■li ^mm 
 
 
 "liiiiiiiiiilf 
 
 jiiiiii.• 
 Illlilli
 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES
 
 J, 
 
 
 / /
 
 THE 
 
 GREEK TESTAMENT. 
 
 VOL. II. 
 
 THE ACTS OF THE APOSTLES, 
 THE EPISTLES TO THE EO:\IANS AND COEINTHIANS.
 
 . . . ήτις apy^riv Χαβονσα λαλεισθαι δια του κυρίου, νπο των 
 ακουσαντων ίΐς ϊ]μας εβίβαιωθη. 
 
 Ηεβ. η. 3.
 
 THE 
 
 GREEK TESTAMENT: 
 
 WITH A CRITICALLY REVISED TEXT : A DIGEST OF 
 
 VARIOUS READINGS : MARGINAL REFERENCES TO VERBAL AND 
 
 IDIOMATIC USAGE: PROLEGOMENA: 
 
 AND A CRITICAL AND EXEGETICAL COMMENTARY. 
 
 FOR THE USE OF THEOLOGICAL STUDENTS AND MINISTERS. 
 
 HENRY ALFORD, B.D. 
 
 DEAN OF CANTERBURY. 
 
 IN FOUR VOLUMES. 
 
 VOL. II. 
 
 CONTAINTNG 
 
 THE ACTS OP THE APOSTLES, 
 THE EPISTLES TO THE EOMANS AND COKINTHIANS. 
 
 C^irlf (ffifition. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 EIVINGTONS, WATEELOO PLACE; 
 
 AND DEIGHTON, BEliL, AND CO., CAMBIilDGE. 
 
 ]8.-)7.
 
 
 ADYEETISEMENT. 
 
 Tn this Third Edition of my Second Volume, I have cursorily 
 compared some exegetical works which have appeared since the 
 publication of the Second Edition, and have inserted, in many 
 places, remarks on, and extracts from them. These authors will 
 be found mentioned in the " catalogue of books referred to," at 
 the end of the Prolegomena, I only regret that time will not yet 
 allow me to give this portion of my Avork a more thorough revision. 
 It is a trial incident to the preparation of such volumes as these, 
 to be obliged to re-issue, from time to time, many things which I 
 could wish to see more thoroughly and laboriously done : and to 
 be content still, in some instances, to put forth views which sub- 
 sequent experience has chastened and deepened. But so it ever 
 will be with those who labour at God's word. The mine is un- 
 fathomable : and the deeper research of the work, as it advances, 
 seems also to shew, how much deeper it might have been carried 
 before. 
 
 London, Oecemher, 1856. 
 
 2(;3δ74•έ>
 
 ADVERTISEMENT TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 • 
 
 Tins Second Edition is little more than a reprint of the First. 
 Errors have been corrected where discovered, and a few unim- 
 portant changes made : but in almost all respects the volumes are 
 identical. That this is so, is owing, not to want of will to 
 reconsider and revise, but to want of time at present, with the 
 preparation of the remaining volumes pressing on me, to work over 
 this ground again. 
 
 The first Volume of this ΛVork being now, in the Editions since 
 the First, assimilated to the present Volume, I need only refer the 
 Header to the following Prolegomena, Chap. V., for an exposition 
 of the principles on which the text is constructed, and an account 
 of the digest of various readings. 
 
 I have to express my sense of especial obligation to 
 
 1. The 2nd Leipzig edit, of Tischendouf, on the digest in 
 which, my own is mainly founded : and from whose account of 
 MSS., versions, and fathers, I have borrowed largely. 
 
 2. The commentary, and critical notices, of De Wette, and 
 Meyer. Though often differing widely from both these, I cannot 
 help regarding the commentary of the latter on the two Epp. to 
 the Corinthians the most masterly and complete that I have 
 hitherto seen on any portion of Scripture. 
 
 3. The archseological and illustrative labours of Messrs. Cony- 
 beare and Howson. 
 
 4. The able and satisfactory treatise of Mr. Smith on the voyage 
 and shipwreck of St. Paul. 
 
 I must leave my other many obligations to speak for themselves. 
 None can tell how much and how kindly I have been helped, but 
 those who find in the exercise of that kindness its most acceptable 
 return. 
 
 London, February, 1855.
 
 CONTENTS OF THE PROLEGOMENA. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 OF ΤΠΕ ACTS OF THE APOSTLES. 
 SECTION PAGE 
 
 I. Its Authorship ............1 
 
 II. Its Sources ............ 8 
 
 III. For what Readers and with what Object it was written . . . .15 
 
 IV. At what Time and Place it was written . . . . . . .17 
 
 V. Genuineness, and State of the Text ........ 20 
 
 VI. Chronology 22 
 
 CHAPTEE II. 
 
 OF THE EPISTLE TO THE ROMANS. 
 
 I. Its Authorship, and Integrity ......... 32 
 
 II. For what Readers it was written ........ 33 
 
 III. With what Object it was written ........ 37 
 
 IV. At what Time and Place it was written ....... 3i) 
 
 V. Language, and Style .......... 40 
 
 CHAPTEE III. 
 
 OF THE FIRST EPISTLE TO THE CORINTHIANS. 
 
 I. Its Authorship, and Integrity ......... 45 
 
 II. For wliat Readers it was written ........ 46" 
 
 III. With what Object it was written ........ ΓιΟ 
 
 IV. Of the number of Epistles written by Paul to the Corinthians . . .51 
 V. Of the number of Visits made by Paul to the Corinthians . . . .52 
 
 VI. At what Place and Time this Epistle was written . • . . .54 
 VII, Matter and Style 5i;
 
 CONTENTS OF THE PROLEGOMENA. 
 
 CHAPTER TV. 
 
 or THE SKCOXD EPISTLE TO THE CORINTIIIAN^S. 
 SECTION PAGE 
 
 I. Its Authorship, and Integrity ......... 57 
 
 II. Circumstances, Place, and Time of Writing ...... 59 
 
 III. Matter, and Style 61 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 OP THE AKRANGEMENT OF ΤΠΕ TEXT IN THIS YOLUME. 
 
 I. On the Arrangement of the Text in this Volume ...... 62 
 
 II. On the Various Readings .......... 70 
 
 III. On the References 7I 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 APPARATUS CRITICUS. 
 
 I. Manuscripts of the Acts of the Apostles (ard Catholic Epistles) referred to in 
 
 this Volume ........... 72 
 
 II. Manuscripts of the Epistles of Paul referred to in this Edition . . .78 
 
 III. Versions referred to in this Volume ........ 83 
 
 IV. Fathers and Ancient Christian Writers cited in the Digest in this Volume . 85 
 V. List, and Specification of Editions of other Books quoted, referred to, or made 
 
 use of in this Volume ......... 89
 
 PROLEGOMENA. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE ACTS OF THE APOSTLES. 
 SECTION I. 
 
 ITS AUTHORSHIP. 
 
 1. The Author of this book is identical with that of the third Gospel, 
 as plainly appears from the circumstauce that in its address, to a certain 
 Theophilus, reference is made to a former work, on the acts and words 
 of Jesus, similarly addressed. Comp. Acts i. 1, Luke i. 3. That Author 
 is traditionally known as Lucas or Luke, spoken of Col. iv. 14, and again 
 Philem. 24, and 2 Tim. iv. 10. For notices respecting him, see Prolegg. 
 to vol. i. ch, iv. § 1. 
 
 2. Nor is there any reason to reject the testimony of tradition in this 
 matter. In chaps, xxvii. and xxviii. we find our Author (see below, 
 paragr. 4) accompanying Paul to Rome. In the passages above cited, 
 all written from Eome, we find that Luke was there, in the company of 
 that Apostle. So far at least there is nothing inconsistent with Luke 
 having written this book ; and if this book, the Gospel. 
 
 3. That no otlier writer has here assumed the person of the Author of 
 the Gospel, may be gathered from the diction of tliis book strongly 
 resembling that of the other. Supposing the student to consult the 
 references in this Edition, he will be continually met by words and 
 phrases either peculiar to the two books and not met with elsewhere 
 (about fifty of these occur), — or mostly found in the two. 
 
 4. That no writer other than the Author of the rest of the looJc has 
 furnished the parts in which tlie narrative proceeds in the first person, 
 will be plain, if the matter be thus considered, (u) We have evidence, 
 both by his own assertion (Luke i. 3,) and from the contents of tlie 
 Gospel and this book, that Luke was a careful and pains-taking writer. 
 
 Vol. II.— 1] a
 
 PEOLEQOMENA.] THE ACTS OF THE APOSTLES. [ch. i. 
 
 Now it -would bespeak a degree of carelessness wholly unexampled, — 
 for one λυΙιο compiled a coutiuuous memoir, to leave its component 
 parts, derived from various sources, in their original fragmentary state, 
 some in the third, others in the first person. Unquestionably such a 
 writer would in such a case have translated the whole into the third 
 person, (β) Seeing that Luke does use the first person in Acts i. 1, 
 and that the first person is resumed ch. (xiv. 22) xvi. 10 — 17, — xx. 5 — 
 15, — xxi. 1 — 18, — xxvii. 1, — xxviii. 16, it is but a fair inference that in 
 one and the same book, and that book betokening considerable care of 
 writing and arrangement, the speaker implied by the use of the first 
 person is one and the same throughout. 
 
 5. That the author never names himself, either as the author, or 
 otherwise, can of itself not be urged as an objection to any hypothesis 
 of authorship, unless by the occurrence of some mention, from which 
 the authorship by another may be fairly inferred. But, if we have in 
 this book no mention of Luke, we have as certainly no hint of any other 
 person having furnished the narrative. On the other hand we have a 
 hint by which it appears that some one other than all the specified 
 companions of Paul on a certain occasion (Acts xx. 4, 5) was with 
 him, and was the author of the narrative. After the mention by name 
 of Sopater, Aristarchus, Secundus, Gains, Timotheus, Tychicus, and 
 Trophimus, we read, ' These having gone forward waited for us at 
 Troas :' this pronoun including Paul and the writer, at least (see note 
 there). 
 
 6. That Paul himself, in Epistles written during the journeys here 
 described, does not name Luke, cannot be alleged as any argument why 
 Luke should not have been the author of our narrative. For (a), we 
 have undoubted examples of Paul sometimes merely alluding generally 
 to those who were with him, as Phil. iv. 21, 22 ; — sometimes sedulously 
 suppressing their names while speaking of services performed by them, 
 as 2 Cor. viii. 18 : sometimes not mentioning or alluding to them at all, 
 as in the Epistles to the Gralatians and to the Ephesians : — and 
 (/3) strictly speaking, no Epistles appear to have been written by Paul 
 while our wi'iter was in his company, before his Roman imprisonment. 
 Eor he does not seem to have joined him at Corinth, ch. xviii., whence 
 the two Epp. to the Thessalonians were written : — or to have been with 
 him at Ephesus, ch. xix., — whence (perhaps) the Ep. to the Galatians 
 was written ; — nor again to have wintered with him at Corinth, ch. xx. 3, 
 at the time of his writing the Ep. to the Romans, and (perhaps) that to 
 the Galatians. 
 
 7. But independently of the above arguments to establish the identity 
 of the author throughout, we may infer the same from the similarity of 
 diction and style, which do not vary through the book. Here again we 
 have, as will be seen abundantly in the references, terms peculiar to tlie 
 
 2]
 
 § I.] ITS AUTHOESHIP. [prolegomena. 
 
 ivriter occurring in various parts of tlie book ; — favourite terms and 
 phrases occurring in all parts of the book ; which could not well have 
 been the case, had he merely incorporated the memoirs of others, Tor 
 compendious statements of these, the whole of which have been inserted 
 in my references, I refer the reader to Dr. Davidson's Introd. to the 
 N. T. vol. ii. pp. 4, 5. 
 
 8. And again, the notes will be found repeatedly to point out cases 
 where the narrator takes up again (with his characteristic μεν olv or 
 otherwise) the thread of history previously dropped (see e. g., and com- 
 pare, xi. 16, i. 5 : xi. 19, viii. 1 — 4 : xxi. 8, vi. 5, \iii. 5 if. : xxii. 20, 
 vii. 58, viii. 1, &c.). 
 
 9. Another interesting source of evidence on this head is pointed out 
 by Mr. Smith, in his valuable work on the Voyage and Shipwreck of 
 St. Paul. He has shewn that in the various narratives of sea voyages 
 in this book, and in that of the stilling of the storm in the Gospel, Luke 
 has, with remarkable consistency, shewn himself to be just so much 
 acquainted with the phrases and habits of seamen, as a landsman well 
 habituated to the sea, but himself no seaman, might be expected to 
 be. To specify instances would be beyond my limits, besides that 
 Mr. Smith's very interesting and ingenious argument and illustrations 
 would be spoiled by abridgment. I can only refer my reader to his 
 work \ 
 
 10. To the same class belong the intimations, slight indeed but 
 interesting, discoverable here and in the Gospel in the descriptions of 
 diseases, that the author was one well acquainted with them and with 
 the technical language of the medical profession. Of this kind are 
 σννί-χομέι η πυρετω μεγάλω Luke iv. 38 ; ττυρετϋΊς κ. Ευςεΐ'τερίω συνεχόμενοι', 
 Acts xxviii. 8 : see also Luke viii. 43, 44, — Acts iii. 7, xii. 23, xiii. 11, 
 and comp. Col. iv. 11. 
 
 11. It will be necessary to mention the various hypotheses which 
 have substituted some other narrator for Luke in the parts of the Acts 
 where the first person is used, or have merged his personality in that of 
 some other companion of Paul : and, irrespective of the above argu- 
 ments, to deal with them on their own merits, (a) Bleek and De 
 "Wette hold Timotheus, and not Luke, to have leen the companion of 
 Paul and the narrator in the first person, — and Lxike to have inserted 
 those -portions from a journal kept hy Timotheus, and loithout alteration. 
 — But this is not consistent with eh. xx. 4, 5 : where, when the com- 
 panions of Paul have been named, and Timotheus among them, it is said 
 (jvroi π(>ϋί\Θόντες ϊμενυν ημάς εν Ύρωύύΐ : the escape from this objection 
 attempted by making οντοι refer to Tycliicus and Trophimus only, being 
 on all ordinary rules of construction, inadmissible. This reason i^^, to my 
 
 ' A second edition of Mr. Smith's book has just appeared (Dec. liiSG), enlarged with 
 much interesting recent detail. See the excursus below *' On the city of Lasica." 
 3] a 2
 
 PEOLEGOMENA.] THE ACTS OF THE APOSTLES. [cii. i. 
 
 mind, sufficient : those wlio wish to see others brought out, and the 
 supports of the hypothesis (which are entirely negative and inferential) 
 invalidated, may consult Dr. Davidson's Introduction to the N. T., 
 vol. ii. pp. 9 if. 
 
 (β) Silas teas the narrator in the first person, and indeed the author 
 of the latter part of the hook, beginning with xv. 13, in the form of per- 
 sonal memoirs, which then were worked up. This hypothesis, which has 
 not any thing resembling evidence to support it, is sufficiently refuted 
 by the way in which the mention of Silas is introduced ch. xv. 22 (in- 
 cluded by the hyp. in his own work') as being a ' chief man among the 
 brethren.' If it be answered that this notice of him was inserted by 
 Luke, — Is it, I would ask, likely, that an author who was at no more 
 pains in his work than to leave the frst perso7i standing in the narrative 
 of another which he used, would have added to the mention of new 
 individuals notices of this kind ? 
 
 (y) More ingenious, and admitting of more plausible defence, is the 
 hypothesis, which identifies Luke himself loith Silas. The latest and 
 ablest vindication of this view is contained in an article by the Author 
 of the literary history of the N. T. in Kitto's Journal of Sacred Lit. for 
 Oct. 1850. The chief arguments by which he supports it are these : — 
 
 (1) "The author of the Acts appears, in the early part of his history, 
 to have been well acquainted with the acts and sayings of Peter, as he 
 was afterwards with those of Paul. Now the only persons whom this 
 description would fit, are Silvanus (or Silas), and Mark (see 1 Pet. 
 V. 12, 13). That Mark did not after Acts xv. travel with Paul, we 
 know : but Silas did, and from that time we find greater precision in 
 the narrative as regards the history of that Apostle." 
 
 But to this it may be answered, — that the difference between the 
 kind of acquaintance which the historian possesses with Peter and his 
 sayings and doings, and that with Paul and his history, is very observ- 
 able even to a cursory reader. No where in the first part of the book 
 does he use the first person : and no where, although the testimony has 
 plainly come in many parts from autoptic authority, does the narrator 
 himself appear as the eyewitness. In fact, all that the above argu- 
 ment insists on, is easily and naturally satisfied, by the long and intimate 
 companionship of Luke and Silvanus as fellow-travellers with Paul, 
 during Λvhich time Luke may have gathered, if Silvanus must be con- 
 sidered as his authority, all that we now find in the former parts of our 
 history ^ 
 
 2 I do not notice in the text the untenableness of the author's hypothesis that Silvanus 
 accompanied Peter from Jerusalem into the East, and became the bearer of his first 
 Epistle to the Christians of Asia Minor, l/efo7'e the commencement of his own connexion 
 with Paul : i. e. before the gospel had ever been preached to many of those addressed by 
 Peter, which it /lad ahead;/ been,— see 1 Pet. i. 12. 25, and remark the aorists in both 
 
 4]
 
 § I.] ITS ATJTHOIiSHIP. [pEOLEOOiiEifA. 
 
 (2) " Luke and Silvanus (Silas) are no where mentioned togeilier. 
 Luke is never mentioned in the Acts : Silas is never coupled with Luke 
 in the addresses or salutations of the Epistles. And the two names, 
 Silvanus from silva, and Lucanus from lucus, are so cognate that they 
 might well be the appellations of one and the same person." 
 
 This ingenious argument, if well weighed, will be found to have but 
 little force. As to Luke not being named in the Acts, the fact itself 
 goes for nothing. If it have any prima focie weight, it would be against 
 the hypothesis. That one who was careful to insert an explanatory 
 notice respecting one so well known as "Σαϋλος ό κίη Παύλος, should take 
 no notice at all of the fact hereafter likely to occasion so much confusion, 
 — that he who was named Silas in the history, was known by Paul, and 
 mentioned in his Epistles, as Lucas, — is hardly probable. But let us 
 observe the occasions on which Silvanus and Lucas have been mentioned 
 by Paul. In 1 Thess. i. 1, and 2 Thess. i. 1, we have Silvanus joined 
 with Paul and Timotheus. In 2 Cor. i. 19, we have an allusion to the 
 preaching of Christ at Corinth by Paul, Silvanus, and Timotheus. Ac- 
 cordingly in Acts xviii. 5, we find that Silas and Timotheus came from 
 Macedonia and joined Paul at Corinth : this occurring in a part of the 
 history when (I am speaking according to the ordinary and prima 
 facie inference, from the disuse of the first person since xvi. 17) the 
 author was absent from Paul, Now let us turn to Col. iv. 14, 
 Philem. 24^. These Epistles belong to a time when we know by 
 the latter chapters of the Acts, that the writer of the history ivas icith 
 Paul. Accordingly I find Lucas mentioned in both places. So far at 
 least is in remarkable accordance with the common view that Silas and 
 Lucas were not one, but two persons, and that the latter was the author 
 of the Acts, and not the former. — It may be said that Paul called the 
 same person Lucas whom he had previously called Silvanus : and this 
 may be supported by his variations between Peter and Cephas, But 
 (1) I conceive that the case of Peter was too exceptional an one (both 
 names having apparently been given him and used by our Lord Himself) 
 to found an analogy upon : and (2) Peter's names are forms of the 
 same meaning in two different languages, not words of similar meaning 
 in the same language. 
 
 But the principal argument in my mind against this hypothesis (over 
 and above that from ch. xv. 22) is, that it would introduce unaccount- 
 able confusion into the form and expression of a history, which on the 
 common view is lucid and accountable enough. Imagine Silas to be the 
 speaker in ch. xvi., and Luke to be merged in Silas. Then ' we,' from 
 
 places. This extraordinary hyp. is not necessary to his theory of the identity of Luke and 
 Silas : indeed that theory is better without it, as then the silence of the Acts on Peter's 
 proceedings after Acts xii. is accountable, which on that hyp. it would not be. 
 * I omit at present 2 Tim. iv. 11. 
 
 5]
 
 rnoLEGOMENA.] THE ACTS or THE APOSTLES. [cii. i. 
 
 ver. 10 to ver. 18, = Silas and Timotheus. In ver. 19, it would be 
 natural to desert the first person, in order to express what happened to 
 Paul and Sihxs, and not to Timotheus. The same specification of Paul 
 and Silas might for the same reason, be continued during the stay at 
 Philippi, i. e. to the end of that chapter. But is it conceivable, that the 
 * we ' should not be resumed when the journey begins again ch. xvii. 1, 
 — that it sliould not be used ch. xviii. 11, seeing that from 2 Cor. i. 19 
 it was Paul, Silvanus, and Timotheus, who were preaching during that 
 time at Corinth — in fact, that it should never be resumed till ch. xx. 5, 
 at the very place (Philippi) where it was dropped before ? 
 
 The argument from the similarity of silva and luctis is too unsub- 
 stantial to deserve serious attention. And that built on the assumption 
 that the author of the third Gospel and the Acts must have held a place 
 of greater honour than we find assigned to Lucas, is purely arbitrary, 
 and sufficiently answered by observing that he is ranked with Marcus, 
 apparently his fellow Evangelist, in Philem. 24. Eather would it seem 
 probable, tliat the men of word and action, in those times of the living 
 energy of the Spirit, would take the highest place ; and that the work of 
 securing to future generations the word of God would not be fully 
 honoured, till from necessity, it became duly valued. 
 
 12. I shall now endeavour to sketch out the personal history of the 
 author of the Acts, as far as it can be gathered, during the events which 
 he relates. 
 
 The first direct intimation of his being in the company of Paul, occurs 
 ch. xvi. 10, at Troas, when Paul was endeavouring (looking for a ship) 
 to sail into Macedonia. Now at this time, Paul had been apparently 
 detained in Galatia by sickness, and had just passed through (preaching 
 as he went, see ch. xviii. 23) that country and Phrygia. It is hardly 
 probable that he had visited Colossie, as it lay far out of his route, but 
 he may, in the then uncertainty of his destination, have done so. (See 
 Col. ii. 1 and note.) I say this, because it is remarkable that in sending 
 Luke's salutation to the Colossians (Col. iv. 14), he calls him ό Ιατρός υ 
 αγαπητός. This designation might recal to their minds the relation in 
 which Luke had stood to Paul when in their country ; or more probably 
 may have been an efi'usion of the warm heart of Paul, on recollection of 
 the services rendered to him on that journey by his loving care. At all 
 events such a designation, occurring in such a place, is not inconsistent 
 with the idea that Luke about that time became Paul's companion on 
 account of the weak state of his health. Further to establish this is 
 impossible : but what follows is not inconsistent with it. We find him 
 in the Apostle's company no further than to Philippi, the object perhaps 
 of his attendance on him having been then fulfilled *. 
 
 * He may have been put in charge with the church at Philippi, but the conjecture is 
 not very probable. 
 
 6]
 
 § I.] ITS AUTHOESHIP. [peolegomena. 
 
 13. If we seek for any trace oi previous connexion between Luke and 
 Paul, we find nothing but the very shghtest hint, and that perhaps 
 hardly to be taken as such. In ch. xiv. 21 we read, that Paul, after the 
 stoning at Lystra, departed with Barnabas to Derbe, and returned 
 through Lystra and Iconium and Antioch (in Pisidia), confirming the 
 souls of the disciples, exhorting them to remain in the faith, kcu 'ότι Eia 
 ΤΓολΧών θλίφεων L•! ημάς είςελβεΐΐ' εις τ. βασιΧείαν τοϋ θεοϋ. This 
 ήμα? may be, as commonly understood, spoken by the writer as a Chris- 
 tian, and of all Christians : but it mai/ also he indicative of the writer's 
 presence : and I cannot help connecting it with the tradition that Luke 
 was a native of Antioch ^ : though Antioch in Syria is there meant. 
 Certainly, in the account (ch. xiii.) of the events at Antioch in Pisidia, 
 there is remarkable particularity. Paul's speech is fully reported : 
 the account of its efiect vv. 44 — 49 given with much earnestness of 
 feeling : — and one little notice is added after the departure of Paul and 
 Barnabas, ver. 52, which looks very like the testimony of one who was 
 left behind at Antioch. Whether this may have been the place of 
 Luke's own conversion, we know not ; but a peculiai interest evidently 
 hangs about this preaching at Antioch in the mind of the narrator, be 
 he who he may : and Mark had departed, who might have supplied the 
 Cyprian events (see ver. 13). 
 
 14. After the second junction with Paul and his company, ch. xx. 5, 
 we find him remaining with the Apostle to the end of our history. It 
 would not be necessary to suppose this second attachment to him to 
 have had the same occasion as the first. That which weakness of body 
 at first made advisable, afiection may subsequently have renewed. And 
 we have reason to believe that this was really the case. Not only the 
 epithet ά-γαπητύς, Col. iv. 14, but the fact, that very late in the life of the 
 Apostle (see Prolegg. to the Pastoral Epp.) when " all in Asia were 
 turned away from him " (2 Tim. i. 15), and Demas, Crescens, and Titus 
 had for various reasons left him, the faithful Luke still remained (2 Tim. 
 iv. 11), bespeaks an ardent and steady attachment to the person of him 
 who in all probability was his father in the faith. 
 
 15. Of the subsequent history and death of Luke nothing is known. 
 
 ^ That the two places of that name would thus be confounded, is nothing surprising to 
 those who are familiar with tradition. The usual ground assigned for this idea, viz. the 
 mention of Lucius (of Cyrene) as being at Antioch, ch. xiii. 1, is certainly far from 
 satisfactory. 
 
 [The idea that ϊιμάς can by any possibility be applied to the writer has been contro- 
 verted by Mr. Light foot in the Journal of Classical and Sacred Philology for March, 
 185C, p. 95. Not being fully ])ersuaded of this (though I incline strongly io his view 
 that ctl ήμας κ.τ.λ. is the language of the speakers themselves), I have allowed the text 
 to stand as before. — Dec. 1850.] 
 
 7]
 
 PEOLEGOMENA.] ΤΠΈ ACTS OF THE APOSTLES. [cii. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 ITS SOUECES. 
 
 1. The principal enquiry respecting the sources of the narrative in the 
 Acts relates to the first part as far as ch. xiii. After that, the history 
 follows the Apostle Paul, of whom its writer was subsequently the con- 
 stant companion. Prom Mm therefore the incidents might be derived, 
 where the writer himself was not present. I shall before the end of this 
 section enquire how far the appearances warrant our supposing that liis 
 testimony has furnished such portions. 
 
 2. I proceed to enquire into the probable soTirces of the first part of 
 our history. And here something will depend on our answer to another 
 question, — When is it probable that Luke was engaged in drawing up 
 the book ? I shall endeavour to support in another section my firm 
 conviction that its puhlication took place at the end of the two years 
 mentioned in ch. xxviii. 30, 31. It may be convenient for me at present 
 to assume that to have been the case, but my argument does not 
 altogether depend on that assumption. I proceed on the hardly 
 deniable inference, that of the last voyage and shipwreck a regular 
 journal was kept by Luke — probably set down during the winter 
 months at Malta. It must then be evident, that at this time the pur- 
 pose of writing a Ιεύηρυς λόγος was ripened in his mind. But how 
 long had this purpose been in his mind ? Am I altogether beside the 
 mark in supposing, that it was with this purpose among others that lie 
 became one of Paul's company on the return to Asia in ch. xx. 4, 5 ? 
 Whether (see Prolegg. to Luke, § iv. 2, 3) the Gospel was written for the 
 most part during the interval between Luke being left at Philippi in 
 ch. xvi. and his being taken up at the same place in ch. xx., or after- 
 wards in Palestine, — on either supposition it is not improbable that the 
 writing of the Acts was at this time already designed, — either as a 
 sequel to the Gospel already finished, or simultaneously with the Gospel, 
 as its future sequel. 
 
 3. It is very possible that the design may have grown under his 
 hands, or more properly speaking have been by little and little sug- 
 gested by the direction of the Spirit of God. He may have intended, on 
 leaving Philippi with Paul (ch. xx. 4, 5), only to draw up a ^ιηγησις of 
 his own travels in company with that Apostle, to serve as a record of his 
 acts and sayings in founding the churches in Europe and Asia. However 
 this may have been, we find him recording minutely every circumstance 
 of this voyage, which I take to have been the first written portion of the 
 book. At any time during that or subsequent travels, or during the 
 two years at Eome, he may have filled in those pai-ts of the narrative 
 
 8]
 
 § II.] ITS SOTIECES. [peolegomexa. 
 
 which occurred during his absence from Paul, — by the oral dictation of 
 the Apostle. 
 
 4. Let us now suppose Paul already in custody at Caesarea. The 
 narrative has been brought down to that time. The circumstances of 
 his apprehension, — his defence before the Jews, — their conspiracy, — 
 his rescue from them and transmission to Felix, — all this has been duly 
 and minutely recorded,— even the letter of Claudius Lysias having been 
 obtained, probably by acquaintance with some one about Felix, An 
 intention similar to that announced in παρηκολουθηκόη νασιν ακριβώς 
 (Luke i. 3) is here evidently shewn. 
 
 5. But ηολν Providence interposes, and lays aside the great Apostle 
 for two years. During all this time Luke appears to have been not far 
 from his neighbourhood, watching the turn of events, ready to accom- 
 pany him to Eome, according to the divine announcement of ch. 
 xviii. 11. But " they also serve, λνΐιο only stand and wait." AVhat so 
 natural, as that he should avail himself of this important interval to 
 obtain, from Cffisarea and Jerusalem, and perhaps from other parts of 
 Palestine, information by which he might complete his hitherto frag- 
 mentary notices ? That accurate following up of every thing, or rather 
 tracing down of every thing from its source, — what time so appropriate 
 for it as this, when among the brethren in Judaea he might find many 
 eyewitnesses and ministers of the word, and might avail himself of the 
 οιηγησεις which of all places would be most likely to abound there 
 where the events themselves had happened ? During tliis interval 
 therefore I suppose Luke to have been employed in collecting materials, 
 perliaps for his Gospel, but certainly for the first part of the Acts. 
 
 6. His main source of information would be the church at Jerusalem. 
 There, from James, or from some apostolic men who had been on the 
 spot from the first, he would learn the second and fuller account of the 
 Ascension, — the weighty events of the day of Pentecost, the following 
 acts and discourses. In the fulness of the outpouring of the Holy 
 Ghost on the apostles and elders at this time, which raised them above 
 ordinary men in power of spirit and utterance, it would be merely an 
 inference from analogy, that their remembrance of the words uttered at 
 remarkable crises of the apostolic history should be something surpassing 
 mere human recollection : that these hallowed words of the Spirit's own 
 prompting should have abode with the church for its comfort and 
 instruction, and finally have been committed to writing for all sub- 
 sequent ages. 
 
 7. But if analogy would a priori suggest this, the phenomena of our 
 history confirm it. The references (which have been on that account a 
 singularly interesting labour) will shew to the attentive student in those 
 speeches, quite enough peculiarities to identify them as the sentiments 
 and diction of the great Apostle of the circumcision, while at the same 
 
 9]
 
 piiOLEGOMENA.] THE ACTS OP THE APOSTLES. [cu. i. 
 
 time there is enough of Luke's own style and expression to shew that 
 the whole material has been carefully worked over and grcecised by 
 his hand. 
 
 8. It has been much disputed whether Luke used written documents 
 in constructing this part of the Acts ". It may have been so. Detailed 
 memoirs of some of the most important events may have been drawn up. 
 If so, chap. ii. would in all probability be such a memoir. The letters, 
 ch. XV. 23 — 29 (xxiii. 26 — 30), must have been of this kind: some of 
 the discourses, as that of Peter ch. xi. 5 — 17, containing expressions 
 unknown to Luke's style (see reff.) : more or less, the other speeches of 
 Peter, containing many striking points of similarity to (both) his 
 Epistles, — see reiF. At the same time, from the similarity of ending of 
 the earlier sections (comp. ch. ii. 46, 47 ; iii. 32 if. ; iv. 42 ; ix. 31 ; 
 xii. 24), from the occurrence of words and phrases peculiar to Luke in 
 the midst of such speeches as those noticed above (e. g. σταθέιτα ch. 
 xi. 13, and see Dr. Davidson p. 30 for a list, which I have incorporated 
 in the reff.) the inference must be (as in the last paragraph) that such 
 documents were not adopted until their language had been revised, 
 where thought necessary, by the author himself. The very minute and 
 careful detail of ch. xii., evidently intended to give the highest authority 
 to the narrative of Peter's miraculous deliverance, — so that the house 
 itself of Mary the mother of John Mark is specified, the name of the 
 female servant who went to the door, her remarks and the answer made 
 to her, are all given, — has apparently been the result of diligent enquiry 
 on the spot, from the parties concerned. We can hardly resist the 
 inference that the very same persons who fifteen years before had been 
 witnesses of the deliverance, now gave the details of an occurrence 
 which they could never forget, and described their own feelings on it. 
 
 9. Whether Luke at this time can have fallen in with Peter person- 
 ally, is very questionable. That Apostle certainly does not appear to 
 have been at Jerusalem when Paul visited it : and from the omission of 
 all mention of him after ch. xv., the natural inference is, that he was not 
 there during any part of Paul's imprisonment. (See note on Gal. ii. 11, 
 and Prolegg. to 1 Pet.) 
 
 10. But one very important section of the first part of the Acts is 
 concerned with events which happened at Csesarea, — and derived from 
 information obtained there. There dwelt Philip the Evangelist, one of 
 the seven (ch, xxi. 8) : a most important authority for the contents of 
 ch. vi. and viii. '', if not also for some events previous to ch. vi. There 
 
 β See tbe question discussed by Dr. Davidson, pp. 21 ff. 
 
 ' De Wette (Eseget. Handb. Apostg. p. 6) objects that Pbilip could hardly have 
 imparted cb. viii. 39 in its present form. At first sight, it seems so ; but tbe next verse 
 ίΰη•/γί\ίζίτο τάς ττόλας ττάσας, κ.Γ.λ. can on the other hand hardly have been imparted 
 by any but Philip : and this leads us to think vphether subsequent enquiry respecting the 
 
 10]
 
 § II.] ITS SOHECES. [peolegomena. 
 
 too, we may well believe, still dwelt, if not Cornelius liimself ^, yet some 
 of the σννελη\νθότε(; πολλοί of ch. x. 27, — the persons perhaps who had 
 gone to fetch Peter from Joppa,— at all events plenty who could nar- 
 rate the occurrences of that memorable day, and the words which formed 
 the great prooem of the Gentile Gospel. 
 
 11. Connected with the Csesarean part of our history, is one minute 
 touch of truth and accuracy, which is interesting as pointing to careful 
 research and information of the most trustworthy kind. The awful 
 death of Herod Agrippa I. had happened on a great public occasion. 
 It appears that the celebration of a festival in honour of Caesar had also 
 been selected as the time of audience for an embassy of the inhabitants 
 of Tyre and Sidon, and during this audience, after making an oration to 
 the embassy, Herod was struck by the hand of God. Now of this latter 
 particular, the Sidonian embassy, the Jewish historian knows nothing. 
 (See the passage quoted, ad loc. ch. xii. 21.) But Luke, who had made 
 careful enquiries on the spot, who had sjient a week at Tyre, ch. xxi. 4 — 7, 
 ■ — and Paul, who had friends at Sidon, ch. xxvii. 3, were better acquainted 
 with the facts of the occurrence than to overlook, as Josephus did, the 
 minute details in the general character of the festival. 
 
 12. One or two sections in the former part of the Acts require sepa- 
 rate consideration. 
 
 (a) The apology of Stephen, from its length and peculiar characteris- 
 tics, naturally suggests an enquiry as to the source whence it may pro- 
 bably have been obtained by Luke. And here I should feel little hesi- 
 tation in ascribing a principal share in the report to him who was so 
 deeply implicated in Stephen's martyrdom, — who shews by his own re- 
 ference (ch. xxii, 20) to the part taken by him on that occasion, how 
 indelibly it was fixed in his memory, — and who in more than one place 
 of his recorded speeches and writings, seems to reproduce the very 
 thoughts and expressions of Stephen. At the same time, it would be 
 improbable that the church at Jerusalem should have preserved no 
 memorial of so important a speech as that of her first martyr before his 
 judges. So that, however we may be inclined to attribute much of its 
 particularity and copiousness to information derived from Paul, it must 
 be classed, as to its general form, among those contributions to the his- 
 tory obtained by Luke at Jerusalem. 
 
 (/3) The narrative of the co7iversion of Saul in ch. ix. can hardly fail 
 
 eunuch (who as he had before come to Jerusalem to worship at the feast, so would again) 
 may not have enabled Philip to add this particular, t7ro(jft;tro yajj τ. oSbu αϋτυϋ χαίρωί', 
 over and above what he could know at the time. 
 
 * It seems probable that the Roman forces never left Caesarea during the wliole period 
 from Augustus to Vespasian. The territory during that time (see chronological table) was 
 alternately part of the province of Syria, and a dependent kingdom ; but the garrisons do 
 not appear to have been changed in such cases. 
 
 11]
 
 PEOLEGOMEXA.] THE ACTS OF THE APOSTLES. [cir. r. 
 
 to have been derived from himself. I have shewn iu the notes that 
 there are no discrepancies between this and the two other relations of 
 the same event, but such as may easily be accounted for by the peculiar 
 circumstances under which each is given, and the necessarily varying 
 expressions of narratives which were afterwards not reduced into har- 
 mony with each other, but written faithfully down as delivered. 
 
 13. Agreeable with the above suppositions is the fact, that the former 
 part of the book presents more traces of Hebraistic idiom, not only in 
 speeches, but in the form of the historical narrative ^. 
 
 14. I proceed now to an enquiry promised in par. 1 of this section : 
 How far we have indications of the lacunce in the author^s personal tes- 
 timony in the latter part having heen filled in hy that of Paul. 
 
 Perhaps one of the best sections for the purpose of this examination 
 will be that froin ch. xvii. 16 — xviii. 5, which relates to a time when 
 Paul was left alone. Do we discover in the narrative or speech the 
 traces of an unusual hand, and if so, lohose is it ? That some unusual 
 hand has been here employed, is evident : for in the six verses 16 — 21 
 inclusive, we have no fewer than eleven expressions foreign to Luke's 
 style ', or no where else occurring : and in the speech itself, no fewer 
 than twenty '\ Now of these thirty-one expressions, five are either 
 peculiar to, or employed principally by Paul ^ ; besides that we find the 
 phrase το πνεϋμα αυτού, so frequently (see reiF.) used by him of his own 
 spirit or feelings. That the άπαΕ λεγόμενα in the speech exceed in 
 number the expressions indicative of his style, may fairly be accounted 
 for by the peculiar nature of the occasion on which he spoke. Here I 
 think we can hardly fail to trace the hand of the Apostle by quite as 
 many indications as we might expect to find. That Luke should, as in 
 every other case, have wrought in the section into his work, and given 
 it the general form of his own narrative, would only be natural, and we 
 find it has been so *. 
 
 15. It may be instructive to carry on the examination of this part of 
 
 ^ See ch. i. 15.23: the connexion by καί ch. ii. 1 — 4: άπο προςώπον τ. awtSp., 
 V. 41 : ^(cowfre^y ύ λόγος ίΐ'ς ra ώτα τ. ίκκ\ΐ]σίας, xi. 22: τταΤς θίοΰ (of Christ) ch. Hi. 
 13. 2G ; iv. 27• 30; (of David) iv. 25: — ϋιά στόματος Δαν'ιβ or των προφ., i. IG, — iii. 
 18. 21, — iv. 25 : — ot viol Ίσρ., v. 21 : — η -γιρουσία, ib. : — ό ιερεύς, ν, 24, &c. 
 
 ' ϊκίεχομίνον, τταριοζύρίτο, κατείδωλον, παρατυγχάνοντας, σννίβαλλον, σπερμο- 
 λόγος, ξίνων (bis), καταγγεΧίύς, ζενιζοντα, είςφίρεις, ηύκαίρονν. 
 
 * δίίσιίαιμονίστ'ίρους, άναθιωρων, σεβάσματα, βωμόν, εττεγίγρατττο, (^άγΐ'ώπτψ,) 
 ίύσεβείτε, ανθρωπίνων, {θίραττεύίται,) προςΰίόμενος, προςτεταγμενονς, υροθεσ'ιας, 
 κατοικίας, (ζητΗν,) χαράγματι, (τέχνης,) ενθυμήσεως, το θεΊον, ϋττεριδών, εστησεν. 
 
 ■' εκίεχομαι, παροζύνω, ενκαιρΐω, σ'εβησμα, ανθρώπινος.- — καταγγέλλω, ορίζω, εΙς 
 'έκαστος with gen. partitive, are peculiar to Luke and Paul : άγνοέω is a favourite word in 
 the Epp. of Paul. 
 
 * We have the characteristic διελέγετο, επιλαμβάνομαι, εις τάς άκοα'ς (Luke vii. 1), 
 σταθείς, διεοχόμενος, καθότι. 
 
 12]
 
 § II.] ITS SOUECES. [peolegomexa. 
 
 the history somewhat further. At xviii. 5, Silas and Timotheus joined 
 Paul at Corinth. One at least of these, Timotheus, was afterwards for 
 a considerable time in the company of Luke in the journey from Philippi 
 to Jerusalem. But on his arrival at Corinth, no alteration in the style 
 of the narrative is perceptible. It still remains the mixed diction of 
 Paul and Luke : the αττ. \tyy. are fewer, while we have some remarkable 
 traces of Paul's hand '. Again, in w. 24 — 28 of the same chapter, we have 
 a description of what took place with regard to Apollos at Ephesus, 
 when Paul himself was absent. This portion it would be natural to 
 suppose might have been furnished by Apollos himself, were it not for 
 the laudatory description of ver. 24. If not by Apollos, then by Aquila 
 and Priscilla to Paul on his return to Ephesus. And so it seems to 
 have been. The general form is Luke's : the peculiarities are mostly 
 Paul's «. 
 
 16. The examination of these sections may serve to shew that the 
 great Apostle appears to have borne a principal part in informing Luke 
 with regard to such parts of his history : the traces of this his share in 
 the work being visible by the occurrence of words and phrases peculiar 
 to Mm, in the midst of the ordinary narrative from Luke's own pen. 
 These he preserved, casting the merely narrative matter into the form 
 in which he usually wrote. 
 
 17. It yet remains, before terminating this section, to say something 
 of the speeches reported in the latter part of the Acts. Are they PatiVs 
 oion icords, or has Luke in this case also gone over the matter, and left 
 the impression of his style on it? 
 
 These speeches are, (a) the discourse to the Ephesian elders in ch. 
 XX. 18 — 35, — (/3) the apology before the Jews, ch. xxii. 1 — 22, — (γ) the 
 apology before Felix, ch. xxiv. 10 — 21, — (c) the apology before Agrippa 
 and Festus, ch. xxvi. 1 — 29. 
 
 (a) The discourse to the Epliesian elders is a rich storehouse of 
 phrases and sentiments peculiar to Paul. These are so numerous, and 
 so remarkable, that nothing short of a complete study of the passage, 
 with the references, will put the reader in full possession of them. \evj 
 faint traces are found of the hand of Luke '. Of those mentioned in 
 
 ' συνίίχίτο, ver. 5, — καθαρός ίγώ, G, — τταοά τον νόμον, 13, — άΐ'ικημα, 14 (see ch. 
 xxiv. 20), ()(}ίιΐηνρ^ΐ]μα, ib. (see ch. xiii. 10), 7)νίσχ6μην υμών, ib., λόγου, 15, — &c. 
 
 ® κατηχημίνος, ακριβώς ΐ/ιιΚατο παρρησιύζίσθαι, ϊζ,ίθίντο, ΰΐίλθίΐν, άττοϋίξασθαι, 
 "τταραγίνόμίνος, ιντΰνως διακατηΧίγχίτο (an αττλ. but in Luke's manner of using long 
 compounds), belong to Luke's style : ζέων τψ ττνίύματι, δημοσί^ (ch. xvi. 37 ; xviii. 28, 
 only), to that of Paul. 
 
 ' Among these may perhaps be counted the opening words ϋμεϊς ίττΊστασθί (comp.ch. 
 X. 28. 'ΛΤ) — ίπίβί]ν ίΐς τ. Άσ. (ch. xxi. 4), — διήλθαν (ver. 25), — προςίχίτε tavroli; 
 (ver. 28;, — άναατήσονται (ver. 30), — ύπίδιιζα (ver. 3.5). But most of these are such 
 that we can only say Paul ftas not used the expressions, or not in the same sense : that ho 
 would not have done so, if occasion had offered, we cannot affirm. 
 
 13]
 
 PEOLEGOMENA.] THE ACTS OF THE APOSTLES. [cii. i. 
 
 the note, scarcely any are decisive, whereas hardly a line of the whole is 
 without unmistakeable evidences that we have here the words of Paul. 
 In the Prolegomena to the Pastoral Epp., I hope to shew the importance 
 of this discourse, as bearing on the very difficult question of the diction 
 and date of those precious and to my mind indubitable relics of the 
 great Apostle *. 
 
 Qj) The apology lefore the Jews (ch. xxii. 1 — 32) was spolccn hi 
 Hebrew (Syro-Chaldaic). Another interesting question is therefore 
 here involved. Old Luke understand Hebrew ? The answer to the two 
 questions will be one and the same. We may find the diction of this 
 translation either so completely Luke's, as to render it probable that he 
 was the translator; — or it may bear traces, as usual, of Paul's own 
 phraseology set down and worked up by Luke. In the former case, we 
 may confidently infer that he must have understood Hebrew : in the 
 latter, we may (but not with equal confidence, for Paul may by pre- 
 ference have given his own version of his own speech) conclude that that 
 language was unknown to him. If again the speech is full of Hebraisms, 
 it may lead us to infer that Paul himself was not the translator into 
 Greek, but one who felt himself more strictly bouiid to a literal ren- 
 dering than the speaker himself, who would be likely to give his own 
 thoughts and meaning a freer and more Grecian dress. — Now we do find, 
 (1) that the speech is full of Hebraisms : (2) that while it contains 
 several expressions occurring no where hut in the loritings of Luke '\ 
 not one is found in it peculiar to Paul, or even strikingly in his manner. 
 Our inference then is that Li.ike himself has rendered this speech, from 
 having heard it delivered ; — and consequently, that he ivas acquainted 
 with Hebrew. 
 
 (γ) The short apology before Felix (ch. xxiv. 10—21) contains some 
 traces of Paul's manner \ but still they are scanty, and the evidences of 
 Luke's hand predominate, as may be seen from the reif. Its very com- 
 pendious character makes it probable that it may have been drawn up 
 by Luke from Paul's oion report of the substance of what he said. 
 
 (i) The important apology before Agrippa and Festus (ch. xxvi. 1 — 
 29), is full of Paul's peculiar expressions ^ It was spoken in Greek, and 
 taken down very nearly as spoken. Some phrases however occur in it 
 
 * [See Vol. III. Prolegg. ch. vii. 1. 34 ; where however, from not bearing this promise in 
 mind at the time, I have not gone as fully into the subject as I had intended. — Dec. 1856.] 
 
 s σννίίμι, ίΐιλαβης, airy ry (jjpg., εκστασις, are peculiar to Luke: ίπιστάς is a 
 favourite word with him : and very many other expressions, as may be seen by reff., are 
 in the common manner of his writings. 
 
 ' ά7Γρ()ς•<ο7Γος, — συνείβησις, — Si ΐτών, — and perhaps αδίκημα. 
 
 2 ηγημαι (in this sense never used by Luke, but by Paul 1 1 times), ovra σι (ace. 
 pendens, see reff.),— f ιό, — μακροθνμως (only used here, but the cognate words are very 
 favourite ones with Paul), — προγινώακοντίς, — θρησκίία, — Ιπ' ϊλπίδι, κ.τ.λ., — νύκτα κ. 
 ημίραν (see reff.), — καταντήσαι (see reff.), — κρίνεται παρ' νμίν, — εδο^α, — εναντία 
 
 14]
 
 § III.] Ton ΛΥΗΑΤ EEADEES, &c. [peolegomena. 
 
 which seem to belong to Luke '' ; just enough to shew the hand which has 
 committed the speech to writing. "We must remember however that 
 several of these are expressive of meanings not elsewhere occurring in 
 Paul's composition, which therefore he may well, in uttering, have thus 
 expressed. 
 
 18. Our conclusion from this examination may be thus stated : 
 (1) That in all cases the diction of the speeches teas more or less 
 modified hy LaiTce's hand. (2) That they are not in any case (as some 
 have supposed) composed hy him for the speaJcer, hut were really in 
 substance, and for the most part in very words, uttered as tvritten, 
 (3) That the differences apparent in the greater or less amount of 
 editorial diction in different speeches, remarkably correspond to the 
 alleged occasions and modes of their delivery : — where Paul spoke 
 Hebrew, hardly any traces of his own style being discernible, — as also 
 where a short compendium only of his speech is given ; while on the 
 other hand speeches manifestly reported at length and which were 
 spoken in Greek originally, are full of the characteristic peculiarities of 
 Paul himself. 
 
 19. Por many other interesting particulars connected with the sources 
 of the narrative in the Acts, I refer the student to Dr. Davidson's 
 Introduction to the N. T,, vol. ii. 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 FOR WHAT EEADEES AND WITH WHAT OBJECT IT WAS WEITTEN. 
 
 1. The Gospel of Luke commences with a preface, in which he 
 declares his object with sufficient precision. Dedicating it to his friend 
 Theophilus, he describes it as a record of τα εν ημιν πεττΧηρυώορημίΐ'α 
 ττράγματα, — and asserts his purpose in writing it to be, "ja ετηγνώς 
 περί ων κατηχ/ιθης λόγων την άσφάλειαν. Now there can be little ques- 
 tion that both these descriptions apply to the Acts also. That book is 
 introduced without preface, as a second part following on the former 
 treatise ; a Μυτερός λύγος to the Gospel. 
 
 2. I have stated with regard to the Gospel, that we can hardly sup- 
 pose Luke's design to have confined itself to Theophilus, but must 
 believe that he followed the common practice of dedicating his work to 
 some one person of rank or influence, and describing it as written for 
 him. The same applies also to the Acts : and the class of readers for 
 
 (comp. ch. xxviii. 17),— άγιων (in Acts, only ch. ix. 13, of Paul, — and in the section cli. 
 ix. 32 — 43, but in Ei)p. passim), — τιμωρών, — τάς ϊ'ξω πΰλίΐς, — virip τ. λαμπ., — κληρον 
 Ιν τοις y'lytaaptvotQ, — /ifrai'otli' (absol.), — ΐκτός, — πρώτος ίζάναστ., — σωφοοσΰνιι, — ίν 
 6Χί-/φ, — όποιος, — τταρικτός. 
 
 3 ίν ψυλακίας κπτίκλίίσα, — Ιί,ουσ'ιαν ληβων, — άναιρονμί^'ων (never used by Paul), 
 — πίριλάμ\Ραν, — καταπεσόντων, — συλλαβόμενοι, — ΰιαχειρίσασθαι, — άποψθίγγομαι. 
 
 15]
 
 TKOLEOOMENA.] THE ACTS or THE APOSTLES. [cu. i. 
 
 whom Luke wrote is the same as before ; viz. Christians, loTiether Jews 
 or Gentiles. 
 
 3. If a further specification of his object in writing be required, it 
 can only be furnished by an unprejudiced examination of the contents 
 of the book. These are found to be, T\e fulfilment of the promise of 
 the Father hy the descent of the Holy Spirit : the results of that out- 
 pouring, li/ the dispersion of the Gospel amoncj Jews and Gentiles. 
 Under tlicse leading heads, all the personal and subordinate details may 
 be ranged. Immediately after the ascension, Peter, the first of the 
 twelve, the Rock on whom the Church was to be built, the holder of 
 the keys of the Kingdom, becomes the great Actor under God in the 
 founding of the Church. He is the centre of the first great giOup of 
 sayings and doings. The opening of the door to Jews (ch. ii.) and 
 Grentiles (ch. x.) is his office, — and by him, in the Lord's own time, is 
 accomplished. But none of the existing Twelve were (humanly speaking) 
 fitted to preach the Gospel to the cultivated Gentile world. To be by 
 divine grace the spiritual conqueror of Asia and Europe, God raised up 
 another instrument, from among the highly educated and zealous Pha- 
 risees. The preparation of this instrument for the work to be done, — 
 the progress in his hand of that work — his journeyings, preachings and 
 perils, his stripes and imprisonments, his testifying in Jerusalem, and 
 being brought to testify in Rome, — these are the subjects of the latter 
 half of the book, of which the great central figure is the Apostle Paul. 
 
 4. Nor can we attribute this with any probability to a set design of a 
 comparison between the two great Apostles, or of an apology for Paul by 
 exhibiting him as acting in consonance with the principles which regu- 
 lated Peter. All such hypothesis is in the highest degree unnatural 
 and forced. The circumstances before the narrator's view would, without 
 any such design, have led to the arrangement of the book as we now 
 find it. The writer was the companion of Paul ; — and in the land which 
 had been the cradle of the Church he gathered materials for the portion 
 which might join his Gospel to the narrative with which Paul's history 
 begun. In that interval, Peter was the chief actor : Peter was the 
 acknowledged ' chosen vessel ' in the first days of the Gospel. But 
 Luke does not confine himself to Peter's acts. He gives at length the 
 mission of Philip to the Gaza road and the conversion of the Ethiopian 
 Eunuch, with which Peter had no connexion whatever. He gives at 
 length the history of Stephen — the origin of the office which he held, — 
 his apology, — his martyrdom, — how naturally, as leading to the narrative 
 of the conversion of him who took so conspicuous a part in the transac- 
 tions of that day *. 
 
 * Schneckenburger, who (as well as Griesbach and Baur) holds the theory against which 
 this paragraph is directed, is obliged to suppose that Stephen was ]iurposely introduced 
 to be exhibited as the prototype and forerunner of Paul ; That Stephen tvas so, in some 
 16]
 
 § IT.] ΤΙΛΙΕ AND PLACE OF WEITING. [prolegomena. 
 
 5. Any view which attributes ulterior design to the writer, beyond 
 that of faitlifullj recording such facts as seemed important in the 
 history of the Gospel, is, I am persuaded, mistaken. Many ends are 
 answered by the book in the course of this narration, but they are the 
 designs of Providence, not the studied purposes of the writer : — e. g., the 
 sedulous offer of the Gospel to the Jewish people, — their continual 
 rejection of it, — the as continual turning to the Gentiles : — how strikingly 
 does this come out before the reader as we advance, — and how easily 
 might this be alleged as the design, — supported as the view would be 
 by the final interview of Paul with the Jews at Rome, and his solemn 
 application of prophecy to their unbelief and hardness of heart. Again, 
 in the course of the book, more and more strongly does it appear that 
 God's purpose was to gather a people out of the Gentiles to His name : 
 so that by Michaelis this is assigned as one of two great objects of the 
 book. And so we might pass on through the whole cycle of progress 
 of the faith of Christ, and hypotheses might be raised, as each great pur- 
 pose of Providence is seen unfolding, that to narrate it was the object of 
 the work. 
 
 SECTION ly. 
 
 AT WHAT TIME AND PLACE IT WAS WRITTEN. 
 
 1. I see no cause for departing from the opinion already expressed 
 in the Prolegomena to Luke's Gospel (vol. i., Prol., p. 40) that the Acts 
 was completed and pithlislied at tlie expiration of the two years described 
 in the last verse of chap, xxviii. No reason can be assigned, why, had 
 any considerable change in the circumstances of Paul taken place, it 
 should not have been mentioned by Luke. The same will hold still 
 more strongly of the death of the Apostle. 
 
 2. The prevalent opinion of recent critics in Germany has been, that 
 the book was written much, later than this. But this opinion is for the 
 most part to be traced to their subjective leanings on the prophetic 
 announcement of Luke xxi. 24. For those who hold that there is no 
 such thing as prophecy (and this unhappily is the case with many of the 
 modern German critics), it becomes necessary to maintain that that 
 verse was written after the destruction of Jerusalem. Hence, as the 
 Acts is the sequel to the Gospel, much more must the Acts have been 
 written after that event. To us in England, who receive the verse in 
 question as a truthful account of the words spoken by our Lord, and 
 
 sense, is true enough : but the assimilation of Paul to Stephen is a result springing 
 naturally out of the narrative, not brought about by the writer of the history. Supposing 
 the facts to have been as related, it was most natural that Paul should earnestly desire the 
 whole particulars respecting Stephen to be minutely recorded : and so we find them. 
 
 \(jL. IL— 17] b
 
 PEOLEGOMENA.] THE ACTS OF THE APOSTLES. [en. i. 
 
 see in tliem a weighty prophetic declaration which is even now not 
 wholly fulfilled, this argument at least has no weight. 
 
 3. The last-mentioned view (which is that of De Wette) differs from, 
 that of Meyer, who sees in ch. viii. 2G (αΰ-η ίστΊν 'έρημος) a terminus a 
 quo, and in the omission of all mention of the destruction of Jerusalem, 
 a terminus ad quern, for the publication of the histoiy ; which he would 
 therefore place at the beginning of the Jewish war, after the destruction 
 of Gaza by the revolutionary bands of the Jews, and before the destruc- 
 tion of Jerusalem. But the notice of viii. 26 cannot be fairly thus 
 taken : see note there, in which I have endeavoured to give the true 
 meaning οίΐρημος as applying to ό^ύς and not to Gaza, and as spoken 
 by the angel, not added by the Evangelist. Meyer's latter terminus, 
 and the argument by which he fixes it, I hold to be sound. It would 
 be beside all probability, that so great, and for Christianity so important 
 an event, as the overthrow of the Jewish city, temple, and nation, should 
 have passed without even an allusion in a book in which that city, 
 temple, and nation, bear so conspicuous a part. 
 
 4. Meyer also (Einl. p. 6) endeavours to render a reason why the 
 subsequent proceedings of Paul in Home should not have been noticed. 
 They were, he imagines, well known to Theophilus, an Italian himself, if 
 not a Roman. But this is the merest caprice of conjecture. What con- 
 vincing evidence have we that Theophilus was a Roman, or an Italian ? 
 And this view would hardly (though Meyer labours to make it do so) 
 account for the narration of what did take place in Rome, — especially 
 for the last verse of the book. 
 
 5. De Wette attempts to account for the history ending where it 
 does, because the words of our Lord in ch. i. 8 had been accomplished, 
 and so the object of the history fulfilled. But how were they more 
 accomplished at that particular time than before ? Rome had not been 
 specified in that command : and he loho now preached at Mome was not 
 
 formally addressed in those toords. Rather, if the object of the writer 
 had been merely to trace these words to their fulfilment, should he have 
 followed the actual Apostles to ivhom they ivere spoken, many of whom 
 we have reason to believe much more literally preached ίως εσχάτου η'/ς 
 γης, than St. Paul. But no such design, or none such in so formal a 
 shape, was in the mind of our Evangelist. That the Lord couunanded 
 and his Apostles obeyed, would be the obvious course of history ; but 
 that the mere bringing of one of those Apostles to the head of the civi- 
 lized world should have been thought to exhaust that command, is in- 
 conceivable as a ground for breaking ofi'the narration. 
 
 G. Still more futile is the view that it was broken off" because the 
 
 promise of ch. xxiii. 11 was now fulfilled (ούτως σε hi και εις 'Ρώμηΐ' 
 
 ■ μηρτνρήσαι). For οη this view, the beiny brought before Cccsar ought 
 
 to have been expressly narrated : another promise having been given to 
 
 18]
 
 § IT.] TIME AND PLACE OF Λ\ΓβΐτΐΝα. [prolegomena. 
 
 Paul, cll. xxvii. 24, μη ψοβυϋ, Παΰλε, Καίσαρι σε Sei τταραστημαι. — Indeed 
 this very argument tells forcibly in favour of the date commonly 
 assigned. Without attributing it as an object in the mind of the 
 writer, to relate the fulfilment of every divine promise recorded by him, 
 we may at least regard it as probable, that had he been able to chronicle 
 the fulfilment of this promise, he tvould have done so, seeing that the 
 apology before Caesar was so weighty an event, and that three former 
 apologies, those before the Jews, before Pelix, and before Pestus and 
 Agrippa had been inserted. 
 
 7. If we look at the probabilities of the matter, we shall find that the 
 time commonly assigned was by very far the most likely for the publi- 
 cation of the book. The arrival at Home was an important period in 
 the Apostle's life : the quiet which succeeded it seemed to promise no 
 immediate determination of his cause : a large amount of historic 
 material was collected : — or perhaps, taking another view, Nero was 
 beginning 'in pejus mutari :' none could tell how soon the whole out- 
 ward repose of Eoman society might be shaken, and the tacit toleration 
 which now the Christians enjoyed be exchanged for bitter persecution. 
 If such terrors loomed in the prospect of even those who judged from 
 worldly probabilities, there would surely be in the church at Rome 
 prophets and teachers, who might tell them by the Holy Ghost of the 
 storm which was gathering, and might warn them that the words lying 
 ready for publication must be given to the faithful before its outbreak, 
 or never. It is true that such a priori considerations would weigh little 
 acjainst presumptive evidence furnished by the book itself: but when 
 arrayed in aid of such evidence, they carry with them no small weight : 
 when we find that the time naturally and fairly indicated in the book 
 itself for its publication, is that one of all others when we should con- 
 ceive that publication most likely. 
 
 8. We thus get a.d. 63 (see the following table) for the date of the 
 publication. 
 
 9. The same arguments which establish the date, also fix the place. 
 At Eome, among the Christians there, was this history first made 
 public, which has since then in all parts and ages of the church formed 
 a recognized and important part of the canon of Scripture. 
 
 10. As regards the title of the book, it is evident from the numerous 
 variations in the MSS, that it proceeded not from the author, but from 
 the transcribers. It represents the estimate, not of one culling these 
 out of more copious materials, but of an age when these were all the 
 Acts of the Apostles extant. 
 
 19] b 2
 
 rKOLEGOMENA.] THE ACTS 0Γ THE APOSTLES. [cu. i. 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 GENUINENESS, AND STATE OF ΤΠΕ TEXT. 
 
 1. Eusebius (H. E. iii. 25), recounting the όμυΚυ-γαϋμενια βΰηι γραφηΙ, 
 says, ruKTtoy tv πρώτοις την ayiav των ευαγγελίων τετρακτυν οΐς Ιττεται ή 
 τώμ τχράί,ίων των ατίοστοΚων γραφή. And in iu. 11, — ί^ονκάς το μεν γένος 
 ων των άττ' 'Λιτίοχε/ας•, την οε ετηστημην ιατρός, τα πλείστα συγγε-γονώς 
 τω ΤΙαΰλω, και τοΊς λοίποις Βέ αν περιέργως των αποστόλων ώμιληκώς, ής 
 άπυ τούτων προςεκτησατο φνχ^ών θεραπεντικΐ/ς εν ουσίν ημΊν υποοείγματα 
 θίοπνεύστοις καταλέλοιπε βιl^Jλί()ις' τω τε εΐαγγελίω .... και ταΊς των 
 αποστόλων πράζεσιν, ας ουκέτι ^t' άκοης, υφβαλμοΊς ci αντο'ις παραλαβών 
 συιετάΕ,ατο. And many earlier fathers, either by citation or by allusion, 
 have sufficiently shewn that the book was esteemed by them part of the 
 canon of Scripture. 
 
 (ft) Papias (see Euseb. H. E. iii. 39) does not mention nor refer 
 to the Acts. He speaks indeed of Philip, and his daughters, but 
 mistakes him (?) for Philip the Apostle : and of Justus surnamed 
 Barsabas. Nor are there any references in Justin Martyr which, fairly 
 considered, belong to this book. Such as are sometimes quoted may be 
 seen in Lardner, Λ^οΐ. I. p. 122. The same may be said of Clement of 
 Borne. Ignatius is supposed to allude to it (μετά 3ε την άνάστασιν 
 συνέφαγεν αΰτο'ις και συνέπιεν. Smyrn. § 3. Comp. Acts χ. 41) : so also 
 Polycarp {ov εγειρεν ο θευς, λΰσας τάς ώ^ΐνας τοΰ ^^ου. Phil. § 1. Comp. 
 Acts ii. 24). 
 
 (/3) The first direct quotation occurs in the Epistle of the Churches 
 of Lyons and Vienne to those of Asia and Phrygia (a.d. 177) given in 
 Euseb. H. E. v. 2. Speaking of the raartj^rs, they say, υπέρ των τα Βεινά 
 ίιατιθέντων ηυχ^οντο, καθάπερ Στέφανος ό τέλειος μάρτυς' κύριε, μη στησϊ]ς 
 αυτοΊς την αμαρτίαν ταυτην. 
 
 (γ) Irengeus frequently and expressly quotes this book : and in book 
 iii. ch. 14 he gives a summary of the latter part of the Acts, attributing 
 it to Luke as its writer. 
 
 (o) Clement of Alexandria quotes it often, and as the work of Luke : 
 e.g. καθο και ο Αουκάς εν ταΊς πράζεσι των αποστόλων απομνημονεύει τον 
 ίΐαΰλον λέγοντα' "Ανδρες 'Αθηναίοι, κ.τ.λ. (see Acts xvii. 22, 23.) 
 Strom. V. p. 588 β. 
 
 (ε) Tertullian often quotes it expressly: e.g.: 'Adeo postea in 
 Actis apostolorum invenimus, quoniam qui Joannis baptismum habebaut, 
 non accepissent Spiritum Sanctum, quem ne auditu quidem noverant ' 
 (comp. Acts xix. 1 — 3), J)e baptismo, c. 10. And again : ' cum in 
 eodem commeutario Lucte, et tertia hora orationis demoustretur, sub 
 qua Spiritu Sancto initiati pro ebriis habebantur, et sexta, qua Petrus 
 ascendit iu superiora,' &c. De jejuuiis, c. 10. 
 20]
 
 § v.] GENUINENESS, AND STATE OE TEXT, [pholegomexa. 
 
 2. («) The Marcionites (cent, iii.) and the Manichseans (cent, iv.) 
 rejected the Acts as contradicting some of their notions. " Cur Acta 
 respuatis jam apparet, ut deum scilicet non alium prsedicantia quam 
 creatorem, nee Christum alterius quam creatoris, quando nee promissio 
 Spiritus sancti aliunde probetur exhibita, quam de instrumento Ac- 
 torum." Tertull. adv. Marcion. lib. v. § 2. And of the Manichseans, 
 Augustine says, " Manichsei canonicum librum cujus titulus est Actus 
 Apostolorum repudiaut. Timent enim evidentissimam veritatem, ubi 
 apparet, Sanctum Spiritura missum qui est a Domino Jesu Christo 
 evangelica virtute prieditus." Epist. 237. 2. 
 
 Qi) Some modern critics in Germany, especially Baur, have made use 
 of the hypothesis, that the Acts is an apology for Paul (see above, 
 § iii. 4), to throw discredit on the book, and to bring down its publica- 
 tion to the second century. But with the hyjiothesis will also fall that 
 which is built on it ; and from the reasoning of the preceding sections 
 it may be seen how utterly impracticable it would have been for an 
 imitator to draw up narratives and speeches which should present the 
 phenomena, in relation to the facts underlying them, which these do. 
 
 3. The text of the Acts, in D and Ε of the leading MSS, and their 
 cognates in the mss and versions, is varied by many interpolations of 
 considerable length. It may suffice to point out a few of these, referring 
 the student to the various readings to examine them in detail : 
 
 chap. X. 25 ; xi. 2, 17, 25, 27, 28 ; xii. 10 ; xiv. 2, 7, 18, 19 ; xv. 2, 
 12, 20 ; xvi. 10, 30, 35, 39, 40 ; xvii. 15 ; xviii. 4, 27 ; xix. 1 ; xx. 
 3 ; xxiii. 24 ; xxiv. 24 ; xxv. 24 ; xx\n. 1 ; xxviii. 31. 
 Of these, some are remarkable as bearing considerable appearance of 
 genuineness, e.g. those in ch. xii. 10, xvi. 10 : some are unmeaning and 
 absurd, as those in ch. xiv. 19, xvi. 39. Considerable uncertainty hangs 
 over the whole question respecting these insertions. A critic of emi- 
 nence, Bornemann, believes that the text of the Acts originally contained 
 them all, and has been abbreviated by the hand of correctors ; and he has 
 published an edition on this principle. 
 
 4. The great abundance of various readings in the Acts, and the 
 extent of space consequently devoted to them, will be observed by every 
 reader. In no book of the N. T., with the exception of the Apocalypse, 
 is the text so full of variations as in this. To this result several reasons 
 may have contributed. In the many backward references to the Gospel 
 history, and anticipations of statements and expressions occurring in the 
 Epistles, temptations were found inducing the corrector to try his hand 
 at assimilating, and as he thought reconciling, the various accounts. In 
 places where ecclesiastical order or usage was in question, insertions or 
 omissions were made to suit tlie habits and views of the church in after 
 times. Where the narrative simply related facts, — any act or word ap- 
 parently unworthy of the apostolic agent was modified for the sake of 
 
 21]
 
 PKOLEGOMENA.] THE ACTS OP THE APOSTLES. [cii. i. 
 
 decorum. "Where St. Paul relates over again to different audiences the 
 details of his miraculous conversion, the one passage was pieced from 
 the other, so as to produce verbal accordance. These circumstances 
 render the critical arrangement of the text in this book a task more than 
 usually difficult, I have endeavoured to conduct it according to the 
 principles which I need not here specify, as they will be found fully 
 enunciated below, in ch. v. § 1, " On the arrangement of the text in 
 this edition." 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 
 CHUONOLOGT, 
 
 1. The chronology of the Acts has been the subject of many learned 
 disquisitions both in ancient and modern times. It must suffice here 
 (1) to point out to the reader those recent works where he will find the 
 whole matter thoroughly discussed, and the results of older enquiries 
 stated and criticised : and (2) to furnish a table arranged according to 
 years, in which the contemporary sacred and profane history may be 
 placed side by side, according to the conclusions which I myself have 
 been led to form. 
 
 (o) The treatise of Anger, de temporum in Actis Apostolorum 
 ratione, Lips, 1833, was by far the best complete discussion of the 
 chronology which had appeared up to that time : and the student who 
 masters this not very voluminous work, will be in entire possession of 
 the state of the enquiry when it was published. 
 
 (fl) But the ground has since been again gone over, and Anger's 
 results somewhat shaken, by Wieseler, Chronologic des apostolischen 
 Zeitalters, Gottingen, 1848, which is now the best and most important 
 work on the subject. I have been led in several places to differ from 
 "Wieseler, but I do not on that account underrate the value of his re- 
 searches. His work, as well as that of Anger, should be in the hands of 
 every student who wishes to master the chronology of the apostolic period. 
 
 (y) A work often referred to in these Prolegomena, Dr. Davidson's 
 Introduction to the New Testament, will be found by the English reader 
 to contain a very useful resume of the views and arguments of other 
 writers as well as his own conclusions ; and is accompanied with the 
 table usual in the German writers, giving at one glance the various dates 
 assigned by different chronologists for the events in the apostolic history. 
 
 2. I proceed to give the chronological table above promised. It will 
 be observed that the chronology of the Acts takes us only to the end of 
 the second year of St. FaitVs [first] imprisonment at Home. With the 
 important and difficult question respecting a second imprisonment, ive 
 are here in no loay concerned. It will come before us for full discussion 
 in the Prolegomena to the Pastoral Epistles, vol. iii. 
 
 22]
 
 §vi.] 
 
 CITEONOLOGY. 
 
 [PEOLEGOMENA. 
 
 W =0 
 Η .J 
 
 K-e I . 
 
 Oh Η S3 a 
 
 gl^ JJi-s 
 Ο ^ ,rt 
 
 
 to 
 
 [V] ri - oi 
 <Ti — \ '■^ 
 
 WO 2 
 
 ο S f Ξ ^^ 
 ^ ο S g ^"^ 
 
 ε^ S"» 
 
 ■ - s -- ώ ο 
 c " 2 2 
 
 :- .•■ ° 
 
 S -Ώ 1^ **^ ο ■::3 
 
 X ^ ο 3 
 
 ^ tn - — -.t: 
 
 : CO gg' 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 ■- ci . ^ ci 
 
 "^ "'SI » ^ 
 ■ — =i ? 
 Π rf 3^ σ^' , 
 oj 3 I-: (M 
 "β g ο I . 
 
 ^ - ο 
 
 blDCO a 
 
 i^ ρ ύ 
 5 ε. rt 
 
 
 ο ι ε 
 
 
 «> οί j: 
 
 
 ε ^ £^ 
 
 ι ^ S. t U ^ 
 .ο c^^tz:^ 
 
 -Ω ca ~ C fz>zx ο ο: ε 
 
 cs . r, -^ 
 
 , 
 
 Cl 
 
 
 Φ 
 
 
 Λ 
 
 03 
 
 C5 
 
 d 
 
 0) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 η 
 
 
 
 
 
 ο 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ο 
 
 'ίί 
 
 '-5 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 ο 
 
 j=. 
 
 Ji 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 <, 
 
 .ϊ 
 
 ϊ 
 
 5 
 
 η. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ι 
 
 ο 
 
 ο 
 
 5 
 
 S 
 
 α 
 
 Ο 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 
 a 
 
 C 
 
 Ο 
 
 αΤ 
 
 ci -Τ3 
 
 Ci 
 
 ο 
 
 CO 
 
 ci *J _= — ci >• 
 
 aj ei ^ Ci. cj u ^ 
 
 5 «■ 
 
 « '^ Si 
 
 
 
 
 
 ° & 
 
 ic" c . , 
 
 CI "53 _f. 
 
 " t2 'Π 
 
 Q^OO 
 
 ^ w 
 
 
 c ci - ω 
 
 ο ο Cl 
 
 t κ 
 
 
 -^2 5 
 
 be ο oT 
 
 C 'S ς ί^ β ;' : • 
 
 , c ~ ^ ^<; 
 
 ίϊ. 
 
 ^< 
 
 ε•~ 1=^ 
 
 d S toi r 
 
 ».-^ cic; ο 
 
 £03 
 
 ο s ? C^ •- . 
 
 ^3 c ■< cxc; -^ ο 5 ; 
 
 • § S- -^ g 
 
 *ε I™ 
 
 CO ο . 
 
 s =-< . 
 
 ^ bc-^ ο -^ 
 
 = -o bcOJ 
 
 ε α. 
 ο -^ 
 
 
 γ5 lU '-'5 -S *!<■ 
 
 ΰ .2 
 Ξ l2. 
 
 .2•=*ί:^ a 
 
 
 ci ο a CO" 
 
 ϊϊ"_ο^^ Π~ 
 
 cd^ ci 
 » ^ Si. 
 
 
 ,Εή °Oi~ 
 
 ci ο 15 
 
 
 1 'S^.S:- ο i 
 " ^ ._: > s - • 
 
 ; I κ :i Έ - 5 5 
 
 ; I 5 a rt g ο a 
 
 La! ζ *< Ή. ^ w *^ 
 ; '-^ Q ■ — • Id -t^ a ■ — ■ 
 
 : ^ T3 Η 
 
 ci Λ 
 
 ro £- iU x; -^ 111 
 
 a ε a a e-S 
 
 '■■- =" £^; 
 
 Oc•! a 
 . ο 
 
 a 1^ s 
 
 ci cs, 
 Ο Ο. . 
 — "C CI 
 
 S'^ 
 
 oc 
 
 cc 
 
 C3 
 
 Τώ '- 
 
 l~ 
 
 l^ 
 
 
 
 
 5-^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^g 
 
 
 
 tfj 0-- 
 
 
 
 H- - ^H 
 
 g 
 
 
 oi ? a 
 
 
 
 Μ «i ^ 
 
 
 
 « a . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^w;:^ 
 
 
 
 Η 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 i; 
 
 a _^ i"o 
 
 w "S -r^ 
 
 §12 
 
 
 1.:: c u 
 ϋ 
 
 23]
 
 PROLE QOME^-Λ.] THE ACTS or THE APOSTLES. 
 
 [CH. I. 
 
 IP 
 
 ■ = as 
 
 ς> " ^ , , - — . 
 
 ^ g e ο -q 
 
 I ο SQ S 
 
 "^ t. ο 
 
 Cu en . *» 
 
 t; cS CS >< ο 
 
 .2. ε -ο 
 
 
 
 5 " 5 ■" 
 
 ca_oit: J^ 
 
 C ii 5 's CO 
 
 "5 β j: 5?3 
 
 c Ϊ: ο bo = - 
 c ο 
 
 ■ < I .a 
 
 III. 
 
 >^ 
 
 O en ^ r- S ^ 
 
 ■■Ξ J ^ o. s. Si- 
 te 2 S -i: > I 
 
 °e e•^ 5^ δ 
 ο «^ 3 '*■' I 
 
 ^.r=i = = 5 '.5 
 
 Μ ^ !*- ς> . — . 
 
 eS-= ο tj— < 
 
 a Ξ = 5<^ 
 
 rt :τΐ 
 
 ο Ϊ <u 
 
 OJi S - 
 
 
 
 ■ X 1• ΰ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _ = 
 
 
 fe 
 
 
 •5 
 
 ""?"; 
 
 
 cf 
 
 
 tc ^ be _• 
 
 
 
 C .g 
 
 3 ti "^ 
 
 1^ 'S\3^ 
 
 ^ ο 
 
 
 
 ο 
 
 (Μ 8 ^ b 
 
 
 ^=•; ^•Ι|^ 
 
 
 Η 
 
 • *~5 — '-Λ 
 
 5 _ 
 
 i; C . ο < - 
 
 ic ϋ 
 
 
 Ο Λ •2 
 
 ■A 
 
 Ο 
 D 
 
 1-5 
 
 S t- 1) ζ5 ι— < 
 
 
 II fin 
 
 ο -ΰ . 
 
 
 '^ 3 Ο to 
 
 Eb 
 
 ο. ο ω ίί 
 
 <η = i= 
 
 "^ Η ci « ►^'^ » 
 
 cT* "■** 
 
 
 ^ ^ 'JiS 
 
 Ο 
 
 Ο 
 
 β: 
 
 t> 
 
 ο 
 ο 
 
 Κΐ-ι >< ο 
 
 J"S 2 • 
 c 3 ο c 
 
 nil 
 
 ο 2i ^ --a' 
 
 
 ^ 5 2 
 
 1 I η 
 
 
 £5 
 
 £- 
 
 3- ^ 
 
 
 
 
 "S : 
 
 "ο ij ^ 
 
 
 rt 
 
 ^ilcrl^ 
 
 
 
 SP-^ • 
 
 to5 οΓ 
 
 = 3 3 
 
 
 A_^ L CO iO «i 
 
 
 
 «":2 
 
 «t^ -i 
 
 
 X.^ S Ξ v< 1 if 
 
 ίΛ 
 
 
 
 ^ ο 
 
 
 j: 
 
 '■ 2 ^ !«! "" ο 
 
 Χ 
 
 S 
 
 
 1^1 
 Is2 
 
 
 
 
 .5 ■£ £ p-tp cT 
 
 Κ 
 
 2 
 κ 
 
 
 Sri a 
 
 
 
 
 ε 
 
 c 
 c 
 c 
 
 
 
 > ct i, 
 
 c -= a 
 
 > s . ζ 
 
 go i^ ζ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ti <; 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 d 
 
 l•-. 
 
 
 05 ο — 
 
 CI 
 
 ""ίϊ 
 
 1^ 
 
 C5 
 
 S 
 
 C5 ο C 
 
 ο 
 
 
 ο 
 
 &■ 
 
 ι^ 
 
 
 (^ 
 
 
 t^ 
 
 CC 
 
 CC 
 
 
 
 Μ 
 
 CC 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ο 
 
 
 -< 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 >c 
 
 
 CO 
 
 t- 
 
 00 
 
 σ• 
 
 
 Ο 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ■i. 
 
 «* 
 
 •* 
 
 -* ■!}< ^ 
 
 ■<1< 
 
 IC 
 
 >ο 
 
 24]
 
 § VI.] 
 
 CHEONOLOGT. 
 
 [PEOLEGOMENA. 
 
 - a> j^ ο ο tL•^^ ο 
 
 +3 Ρ . C ■- Ν — 
 
 si, sj -73 ^ — ? 
 
 «J .-^■— ^ Ο .= 
 
 *> rj c ο -,. 
 
 ί Ο ο 
 
 g £-5 >.Ξ 
 
 ■o> Β j; '^ ■" Ή 
 
 El's - £ S.>3 
 β 3 5S § "Si< 
 
 ο ^ ^ •■- ο ^ 
 
 .2 ? ο ρ =. - 
 
 ft ό PH ^3 -C 1^ 
 
 
 ce 
 
 ^ ft :: <u -- 
 
 
 c ω 3 
 
 ■S _ 5 c S « 
 ο T3 ■ - ο ii . . ^ 
 
 ο C -S — γ5 ^ ■" 
 
 ο iS ^ C-rS ■- 
 
 3 Λ rt -^ 4^ r^ Oi 
 r ■ •■-' ^ ■" O' 
 
 ^ r^ tr. 9 S~ 3 ? . 
 
 ~ Jj — ■- <^ 
 
 X . 
 
 l•-^ io 
 
 .υι- 
 
 > *-• 1, "J 'i ^^ - 
 
 -- 3 ^ -^"S .-3 
 
 "5 >< 
 
 — > 
 
 . ", ?f S Ξ 
 
 
 3 X 
 
 ο "3 
 
 -= c £ 
 
 rt ^~ ^ 
 
 O-H c ο 
 
 ο — := 
 
 2 s 
 
 CO IK tr 
 
 
 3 ce . 
 u £3 ■ 
 
 ρ τ; 
 
 C5 C ;i . 
 
 '■~ΙΖ Ο - . 
 
 ί-^ α; ο i 
 ■— ι JJ α) ^ ' 
 
 ^ S 2 g b 
 
 
 (Μ . Χ ''ΡΗ • 
 
 ■~^^< 3-:3 
 
 
 3 ■" 
 
 % 1 
 
 
 '-> % t: y. 
 
 — 3 cs χ 
 
 « rt ^ α- . 
 
 -σ ^ 1 "■' - 
 
 C :^ C- ^.• 
 
 — cj •Ε -= 
 
 §^.^ ο. 
 
 is OJ C — 
 
 1-5 2 Λ . 
 
 rt^if? I J, 
 
 OS 
 
 ^■^■^ > i 
 
 ο <^ί S, y. ύ 
 
 ■r; 3 tjj--i-^ — 
 
 Ρη» 
 
 ?^^ ?3 
 
 = 2^ I 5 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ο 
 
 rt} 
 
 ο 
 
 S 
 Β 
 
 Ό 
 
 
 13 
 
 :i4 
 
 R 
 
 ta 
 
 
 
 ο 
 
 D 
 
 Ό ί*^' 
 
 5 " S 
 
 >-. ^— Ξ ?: -r- 
 
 
 6.2 J I 
 5 ^ c :5 
 
 — ^^ ο m r 
 
 3 S m 
 
 i^ ,, 3 =t m w 
 
 3 ο 
 
 
 to 3 
 
 ^='<! 
 
 ■3^ Ζ 
 
 3 y- 
 
 r. 3 
 
 9-< 
 
 
 ^ 3 i ■■'■ - 
 
 'ι-. ί^ . ': ο " 
 
 Β3 Γ— ι ^ * • 5^ 
 
 3 3 -g ;-! 
 "^ ^'^' .S 
 
 S --Μ 
 
 g_co'-o .. 
 
 OSS i-^ 
 
 < 
 
 "^5 
 
 ^ 
 
 -i 
 
 I-: 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '^ 
 
 
 
 'P 
 
 
 
 -* 
 
 
 «0 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 25]
 
 PEOLEGOMENA.] THE ACTS 0Έ THE APOSTLES. [cu. r. 
 
 NOTES TO THE CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE. 
 
 1. On the identilij of the Journexj to Jerusalem related in Acts xv., witfi thai 
 referred to Gal. ii. 1 ff. 
 
 Five visits of St. Paul to Jerusalem are related in the Acts. Now the visit of Gal. 
 ii. 1 flF. must be either (a) one distinct from all these, or (/3) identical with .one or other 
 of them. 
 
 (a) This hypothesis should not be resorted to, till every attempt to identify the visit 
 with one of those recorded can be shewn to fail. Then only may we endeavour, as in the 
 case of the unrecorded visit to Corinth, (see below. Chap. ΙΠ. § 5,) to imagine some pro- 
 bable place for the insertion of such a visit. So that the legitimacy of this hypothesis 
 must be tried by the results arrived at in the discussion of the other. The maintainors of 
 it are Beza, Paley (hesitatingly ; Hor. Paul., p. 71 » Birks's edn.), Schrader (der Apostel 
 Paulue, i. 74 ff.), and Tate. 
 
 (β) The visit in question is identical with one or other of those recorded in the Acts. 
 
 L It is not the first visit. The identity of the visits of Acts Lx. 2G —29 and Gal. i. 18 
 being assumed (and it is hardly possible to doubt it), this follows as a matter of course. 
 
 2. // is not the second visit (Acts xi. 29, 30). For we read, Gal. ii. 7, that Paul was 
 alreadv recognized as intrusted with the Gospel of the uncircumcision, and as having 
 preached vv. 8, 9 together with Barnabas among the Gentiles. Now the commission of 
 Paul and Barnabas to preach to the Gentiles dates from Acts xiii. 1, after the second 
 visit. 
 
 Also, at the time of the second visit, it is wholly improbable that Paul should have 
 held a place of such high estimation in comparison with Peter, as we find him filling 
 in Gal. ii. 8 ff. 
 
 Again, on this hypothesis, either the first visit, or his conversion, was, fourteen years 
 inclusive before this, which took plac'e certainly before 4('> a.d. ; for tlien the famine was 
 raging, and this relief was sent up by prophetic anticipation. This would bring, either 
 the first visit, or his conversion itself, to a.d. 32 : a date wholly improbable, whichever 
 way we take the fourteen years of Gal. ii. 1. 
 
 3. The question of identity with the third visit is discussed below. 
 
 4. It is not the fourth visit. For in Gal. ii. 1 , we read that Barnabas ivent up ivith 
 Paul : but in Acts xv. 39, we find Paul and Barnabas separated, nor do we ever read of 
 their travelling together afterwards, — and evidently Barnabas was not with him when he 
 visited Jerusalem Acts xviii. 18—22. Besides, the whole character of the fourth visit as 
 there related, is against the idea that any weighty matters wei-e then transacted. The 
 expression merely is άναβάς και άσπασάμινος την Ικκλησίαν, κατίβη (ίς Άντώχίΐαν. 
 Again, if we assume the identity of the visit in question with the fourth visit, the Apostle 
 can hardly be acquitted of omitting, in his statement of his conferences with the principal 
 Apostles in Gal. ii., an intermediate occasion when the matters arranged between them 
 had been of the most solemn and important kind. This would be scarcely ingenuous, 
 considering the object which he had in Gal. ii. 
 
 5. It is not the fifth visit. For after this visit Paul did not return to Antioch, which 
 he did after that in question. Gal. ii. 11. 
 
 6. It remains therefore, that it can only, if identical with any of the five, be the third 
 visit. Is this probable ? 
 
 (a) The dates agree. See the Chronological Table, and notes on Gal. ii. 1. 
 
 (b) The occasions agree. Both times, the important question relative to the obligation 
 of Christians to the Mosaic law was discussed : both times, the work of Paul and 
 Barnabas among the Gentiles was recognized. What need was there for this to be 
 
 26]
 
 § VI.] EXCUESTJS I. [PEOLEGOMEKA. 
 
 twice done ? It is of no import whatever to the matter, that in Acts, the result is 
 a public decree, — whereas in Gal., no mention of such a decree is made : the history 
 relates that which was important for the church, — the Epistle, that which cleared the 
 Apostle personally from the charge of dependence on man : all mention of the decree 
 would in Gal. have been irrelevant. Similarly we may deal with the objection, that 
 in Acts, a public council is summoned, whereas in Gal., it is expressly said that Paul laid 
 forth to them the Gospel which he preached to the Gentiles, but κατ' iliav τοϊς 
 ίοκοΰσιν. This entirely agrees with Acts xv. 12, where Paul and Barnabas related to the 
 multitude, not the nature of the doctrine which they preached, but only the patent 
 proofs of its being from God, — οσα Ιποιησιν 6 θεός σημίΐα κ. τίρατα iv τοις ίθνισιν 
 δι' αυτών. 
 
 (c) Nor is it any objection to the identity, that in Gal. ii. 2, Paul went up κατ' 
 άποκάλυψίν, — whereas in Acts xv. 2, the brethren ίταζαν that P. and B. should go up, 
 in consequence of the trouble given by the Judaizers. How do we know that this 
 revelation was not made to the church, and so directed their appointment .' Or if it be 
 understood that the revelation was made to Paul himself, who can say whether the 
 determination of the brethren was not a consequence of it .' Who can say again, whether 
 Paul may not have been reluctant to go up, rather willing not to confer with flesh and 
 blood on such a matter, and may have been commanded by a vision to do so ."" We have 
 here again only the public and the private side of the same occuiTence : the one, 
 suitable to the ecclesiastical narrative : the other, to the vindication of his office by the 
 Apostle. 
 
 (d) The result is strikingly put by Mr. Conybeare, Life and Epp. of S. Paul, vol. i. 
 p. 250, — "The Galatian visit could not have happened before the third visit: because, 
 if so, the App. at Jerusalem had already granted to Paul and Barnabas (Gal. ii. 3—6) the 
 liberty which was sought for the tvayy'tXiov της άκροβνστίας : therefore there would 
 have been no need for the church to send them again to Jerusalem upon the same cause. 
 Again, the Galatian visit could not have occurred after the third visit : because, almost 
 immediately after that period, Paul and Barnabas ceased to work together as missionaries 
 to the Gentiles : whereas, up to the time of the Galatian visit, they had been working 
 together. 
 
 (y) It seems then to follow, that the Galatian visit is identical with that recorded in 
 Acts XV. 
 
 Those who wish to see the whole question dealt with more in detail, and the names 
 and arguments of the champions of each view recounted, may refer to Mr. Conybeare's 
 note at the conclusion of ch. vii. of Conybeare and Howson's Life of St. Paul : or to 
 Dr. Davidson's Introd. vol. ii. pp. 112 ff. 
 
 II. On the discrepancy of Tacitus and Josephus regarding Felix. 
 
 Tacitus, Ann. xii. 54, has generally been supposed to be in error in stating that 
 Cumanus and Felix were joint procurators before the condemnation of the former. His 
 account is very circumstantial, but seems to shew an imperfect acquaintance with Jewish 
 matters : whereas it is probable that Josephus was best informed in the affairs of his own 
 country. The discrepancy is a very wide one, and if Tacitus is wrong, he has the whole 
 history of the outbreak in Judiea circumstantially misstated to correspond. See Wieseler, 
 Chron. des Apost. Zeitalters, p. 67, note. 
 
 EXCURSUS 
 
 Ox " THE City of Las^ia," and othkr particulars mentionkd in Acts xxvii. 7 — 17• 
 
 Since the publication of the second edition of this volume, much light has been thrown 
 on the interesting questions connected with the topography of this passage, by letters 
 
 27]
 
 PROLEaoMEXA.] THE ACTS or THE APOSTLES. [en. i. 
 
 written to Mr. Smith from the Rev. George Brown, who accompanied the yacht 
 St. Ursula, Hugh Tennent, Esq., on a cruise in the Mediterranean, in the winter of 
 1 855 — G. I have to tliank Mr. Smith for having kindly forwarded to me copies of these 
 letters as they arrived. The substance of tliem is now printed as an e.xtract from Mr. 
 Brown's Journal, in the second edition of Mr. Smitli's " Voyage and Sliijjwreck of St. 
 Paul," Appendix, No. 3. I extract here such portions as regard immediately the geogra- 
 phical points in question, referring my readers to the volume itself for the whole account, 
 which is most graphic and entertaining, 
 
 I. "We asked Nicephorus (the old Greek already mentioned) what was the ancient 
 name of Lutro ? He replied without hesitation, ' Phceniki,' but that the old city exists 
 no longer. This of course proved at once the correctness of Mr. Smith's conclusion. We 
 were told further that the anchorage is excellent, and that our schooner could enter the 
 harbour without difficulty. We next enquired the ancient name of the island of Gozzo, 
 and he said at once, ' Chlavda,' or ' Chlavdanesa' {χλαύδα, or χλαύία νήσος), a reply 
 equally satisfactory. He told us also that there was a tradition in these parts that uyiog 
 Παϋλος απόστολος had visited Calolimounias (the fair havens), and had baptized many 
 people there. 
 
 II. " Friday, Jan. 18th (Calolimounias). — Nothing now remained to be done but to 
 ascertain the exact position of Lassea, a city which Luke says is nigh to the Fair 
 Havens . . . I asked our friend the Guardiano, ποΰ ίστι Κασία (\.άσαια)} He said 
 at once, that it was two hours' walk to the eastward, close under Cape Leonda : but that 
 it is now a desert-place {τόπω ί^ήμω). Mr. Tennent was eager to examine it : so 
 getting under weigh, we ran along the coast before a S. W. wind. Cape Leonda is 
 called by the Greeks Αίωνα, evidently from its resemblance to a lion couchant, which 
 nobody could fail to observe either from the W. or the E. Its face is to the sea, forming 
 a promontory 350 or 400 feet high. Just after we passed it, Miss Tennent's quick eye 
 discovered two white pillars standing on an eminence near the shore. Down went the 
 helm : and putting the vessel round, we stood in close, wore, and hove to. Mr. H. 
 Tennent and I landed immediately, just inside the cape, to the eastward, and I found 
 the beach lined with masses of masonry. These were formed of small stones, cemented 
 together with mortar so firmly, that even where the sea had undermined them, huge 
 fragments lay on the sand. This sea-wall extended a quarter of a mile along the beach 
 from one rocky face to another, and was evidently intended for the defence of the city. 
 Above we found the ruins of two temples. The steps which led up to the one remain, 
 though in a shattered state : and the two white marble columns noticed by Miss Tennent, 
 belonged to the other. Many shafts, and a few capitals of Grecian pillars, all of marble, 
 lie scattered about, and a gully worn by a torrent lays bare the substructures down to the 
 rock. To the E. a conical rocky hill is girdled by the foundations of a wall : and on a 
 platform between this and the sea, the pillars of another edifice He level with the ground. 
 Some peasants came down to see us from the hills above, and I asked them the name of 
 the place. They said at once, ' Lasea :' so there could be no doubt. Cape Leonda lies 
 five miles E. of the Fair Havens : but there are no roads whatever in that part of Candia. 
 We took away some specimens of marble, and boarded our vessel : at four p.m., sailed for 
 Alexandria." 
 
 III. LuTRO. " The health-officer told me, that though the harbour is open to the 
 E., yet the easterly gales never blow home, being lifted by the high land behind, and 
 that even in storms, the sea rolls in gently ('piano j)iano'). He says it is the only 
 secure harbour, in all winds, on the south coast nf Crete .• and that during the wars 
 between the Venetians and the Turks (the latter took the island in 1C88, I think), as 
 many as twenty or twenty-five war-galleys had found shelter in its waters. He further 
 shewed us an inscription on a large slab which he says was found among some ruins on 
 the point, and took us up the hill to see the traces of the site of the ancient Phceniki. 
 
 28]
 
 § ΤΙ.] EXCUESTJS I. II. [peolegomexa. 
 
 The outline of its ramparts is clearly discernible, and some cisterns hollowed in the 
 rock : but the ploughshare has been driven over its site, and it displays ' the line of 
 confusion and the stones of emptiness.' " 
 
 The inscription here alluded to was afterwards made out accurately by Mr. Brown, and 
 is given by Air. Smith in his Preface. It is interesting and important : 
 
 JOVI . SOLI . OPTIMO . MAXIMO . 
 
 SERAFIDI . ET . OMNIBVS . DIIS . ET . 
 
 IMPERATORI . CAESARI . ^"ERΛ'^AE . 
 
 TRAJANO . AVG . GERMANICO . DACICO . 
 
 EPICTETVS . LIBERTVS . TABTLARIVS . 
 
 CVRAM . AGENTE . OPERIS . DIOXYSIO . 
 
 SOSTRATI . FILIO . ALEXAXDRIXO . GΛ•BERXATORE . 
 
 NAVIS . I'ARASEMO . ISOPHARIA . CL . THEOXIS . 
 
 i. e. " Epictetus, the freedman and tabularius, to Jupiter, only O. M., to Serapis and all 
 the gods, and to the Imperator Caesar Nerva Trajanus Augustus Germanicus Dacicus : 
 the superintendent of the work being Dionysius son of Sostratus of Alexandria, guber- 
 nator {κνβίυνήτης) of the ship whose sign is Isopharia, of the fleet of Theon." 
 
 Now as Mr. Smith points out, we have here several points of union with the text of 
 the Acts. 
 
 1. It appears that Alexandrine ships did anchor and make long stay, perhaps winter, 
 at Phoenice : otherwise Epictetus, the master of one, could hardly have remained long 
 enough to superintend this votive building, whatever it was. 
 
 2. We see the accuracy of the Alexandrian nautical language employed by St. Luke. 
 We have here κνβίονήτης (ch. xsvii. II) as the designation of the master of the ship ; 
 and παρασήμψ as indicating the name or sign of it (ch. xxviii. 4). 
 
 The tabularius was the notary, or agent, of the fleet to which the Isopharia belonged. 
 Mr. Smith quotes an inscription : 
 
 CIXCIO . L . F . SABIXIAXO . TABTLARIO . CLASS . RAVEXX • 
 
 EXCURSUS II. 
 
 Ox THE READixG Έλληνιστάξ IN Acts xi. 20. 
 
 Since the following sheets have passed through the press, my attention has been 
 directed to a pamphlet by Dr. Kay, the Principal of Bishop's College, Calcutta, " On the 
 word Hellenist, with especial reference to Acts xi. 19 (20)." Dr. Kay defends the 
 received reading 'ΈΧΚηνιστάς against the modern critical editors with considerable 
 earnestness : I wish I could say that he had himself shewn the humility and impartial 
 investigation which he demands from them, or abstained from that assumption which 
 substantiates nothing, and that vituperation of his opponents which shakes a reader's 
 confidence in even the best cause. I shall deal here simply with the residuum of critical 
 argument in his work. 
 
 1. As to MSS, B. can only be cited in his favour 'e silentio collatorum ;' and we all 
 know, from the fact of several important readings in that MS Laving been ascertained to 
 be different from its previously assumed testimony, how unreliable such a citation 
 of it is. 
 
 2. He states ύ\ζ.νΐ.\\ηνας is the easier word, and therefore "more likely to have 
 supplanted ΈΧΧηνιστάς in a few MSS, than this latter to have supplanted it in nearly 
 all." But it is remarkable that he did not notice the bearing on such an assertion of a 
 fact which he himself subsequently alleges : viz. that in ch. vi. 1, " there is no MS 
 
 29]
 
 PROLEGOMENA.] THE ACTS ΟΈ THE APOSTLES. [en. i. 
 
 variation at all." Does not this circumstance shew, that the alteration here has not been 
 ίο'Έλλϊίνης• for the reason he supposes .■' Does it not further make it probable that 
 'Ε\\ηνισΓής being unquestioned there, — "KWtjvag, here so difficult to fit into the 
 narrative, has been changed to that other form, which presented no such difficulty.'' 
 But of this more below. 
 
 3. Dr. Kay has certainly succeeded in neutralizing the testimony of some of the ver- 
 sions, by noticing that the Peschito, Vulgate, and others, read the same word here and in 
 ch. vi. 1. In this respect his pamphlet has done good service, and our future digests 
 should be modified by this fact being stated, — the remaining versions being carefully 
 examined and discriminated. 
 
 4. As to the testimony of Fathers, Dr. Kay's argument is one so exceedingly loose 
 and fallacious, that I can only wonder at its having satisfied himself. Chrysostom says 
 ίσως, Sia το μη tuuimi Έβραΐστί, "Ελληνας αυτούς ίκάλονν. Will it be credited, that 
 Dr. K. here argues thus : " I will venture to say that if you were to strike out the word 
 "Ελλ/;ΐ'ας, and put χ in its stead, simply asking a person to determine from the sentence 
 itself, for which of the two, Έλληνιστάς or "Ελληνας, χ had been substituted, the 
 answer would be ΈΧΚηνίΰτάς." My answer would be the other way, seeing that the 
 latter word would require no such explanation : but setting this aside, was there ever 
 such a critical principle laid down, or experiment proposed, and that by one who justly 
 censures Doddridge for the very same proposal in our text .' " Strike out," — not a dubious 
 reading, for there is no doubt about "Ελλ/;νας in the text of Chrysostom's homily, but — 
 " a difficult reading, — put χ for it, and then say, according to the measure of your own 
 apprehension and private judgment, what the word ought to be ! " Truly, we may be 
 thankful that the text of the New Testament has hitherto escaped the application of 
 such a process. 
 
 5. In noticing the Editions, Dr. Kay has shewn singular unfairness. He has quoted a 
 rash and foolish sentence from Doddridge, which says that " common sense would require 
 us to adopt "Ελλί)νος, even if it were not supported by the authority of any MS at all," — 
 and then charged all the critical Editors with having acted in this spirit, administering to 
 them a severe admonition about ' altering the Scriptures by conjectural criticisms,' from 
 Scott, who however himself believes 'Greeks' to be the right reading. In this, of 
 course, the whole question is begged ; — and the very reverse of our practice is charged on 
 us. It is by no conjecture, which source of emendation I altogether repudiate, but 
 owing to conscientious behef that "Ελληνας is the original Scripture text, that I have 
 edited it ; and consequently all Dr. Kay's charges, and admonition, are out of place here. 
 
 6. His section ' on the meaning of the term Έλληησταί,' as ' designating those Jews 
 and proselytes who used the LXX version of the Scriptures in their synagogues,' tells us 
 no more than all knew before. But when he proceeds to ' the suitableness of this 
 meaning to the context' in Acts xi. 20, I cannot but think that he has missed the whole 
 point of the narrative ; and in treating of the objectors to his view, selecting myself as 
 representing them, he has exhibited, as before, remarkable unfairness, and want of logical 
 apprehension. I might point out both these seriatim, as indeed any reader may trace 
 them in his pamphlet : but it may suffice to deal with two or three instances. Against 
 'Ελληνιστής, I have argued, that " the Hellenists were long ago a recognized part of the 
 Christian Church :" my inference being, that, were they here referred to, there would 
 be no case justifying the phaenomena in the text, viz. a special notice like ίλάλουν και 
 ■προς τονς Έλληνιστάς, as distinguished from 'Ιουδαίους preceding, — a special mission 
 of an apostle, as (for this is also implied in the text, not an hypothesis of mine) on some 
 unusual occurrence. Now observe, how this is treated by Dr. Kay : 
 
 " If this be an argument, it must mean something of the following kind : 
 
 " Some Hellenists had been converted at Jerusalem : therefore St. Luke cannot be 
 
 here narrating a wonderful extension of the Christian church among the Hellenist body 
 
 at Antioch." 
 
 30]
 
 § ΤΙ.] EXCTJESTJS II, [ρεοιεοο^γε>-α. 
 
 "'AVhy not?' we ask. 'Because u-e have made up our mind that at this precise 
 period a further development of the Church's constitution took place.' It is sufficient to 
 reply : ' that is a mere arbitrary assumpdon : we are content to say with Newton, Hypo- 
 theses non fingo.' " Kay, p. 16. 
 
 I may safely appeal to the student of Scripture, whether this be not the very height of 
 unfairness. I have advanced no hypothesis, but have been led into my view simply by 
 the pheenomena of the sacred text itself : by that " patient, inductive criticism " which 
 Dr. Kay himself desiderates. His form of stating my argument keeps out of sight the 
 very point on which it really turns. Instead of " therefore St. Luke cannot be here 
 describing," he should have written, " but, from the diction and character of this portion 
 of St. Luke's narrative, it is not probable that he is here describing." 
 
 7. The only other matter which I feel it necessary to notice is, the way in which he has 
 dealt with what he is pleased to call my 'hypothesis' as to Barnabas being sent " not 
 with the intent to sympathize with the work at Antioch, but to discourage it." This 
 last word, italicised by Dr. Kay as being mine, has neither place nor representative in my 
 note, and is a pure misrepresentation. My words are, " probably from what follows, the 
 intention was to ascertain the fact, and to deter these persons from the admission of the 
 uncircumcised into the church ; or, at all events, to use his discretion in a matter on which 
 they were as yet doubtful. The choice of such a man, one by birth with the agents, and 
 of a liberal spirit, shews sufficiently that they wished to deal, not harshly, but gently and 
 cautiously, whatever their reason was." This he designates as " a strange, and not very 
 reverent hypothesis." What Dr. Kay may understand by reverent, I am at a loss to 
 imagine. I understand by reverence for Scripture, a patient, and at the same time fearless 
 study of its text, irrespective of previously formed notions, but consistently with its own 
 analogies. Now the analogy here is not with the mission of Peter and John to Samaria, 
 as Dr. Kay represents it, nor was Barnabas sent from the Apostles and elders, as in that 
 case : but our analogous incident is to be found in Gal. ii. 12, where, as here, the Church 
 at Jerusalem sent down messengers to Antioch on an errand of supervision. Had any 
 one ventured to infer the character of that mission, and its possible effect even on an 
 Apostle, he would doubtless have incurred even more strongly from Dr. Kay the charge of 
 irreverence. But the sacred record itself has set inference at rest in that instance, and 
 thereby given us an important datum whereby to infer the probable character of another 
 mission from the same Church to the same Church ; and our inference is, that the Jerusa- 
 lem believers, whom we find ever jealous for the Judaic purity of the church, acted on this 
 occasion from that motive. The whole character of that which is related of Barnabas's 
 proceeding at Antioch shews that he was acting, not in pursuance of his mission thither, 
 but in accordance with the feelings of his own heart from seeing the work of God on his 
 arrival. 
 
 It were very much to be wished that able men, like Dr. Kay, would study fah-ness in 
 representing those who differ from them on critical points. The same motives which he 
 assumes exclusively for his own side in this matter, have actuated also those who maintain 
 the other reading. We deprecate as much as he can, ' a bold alteration of texts, and a 
 supercilious disregard of authority :' had he dealt fairly with us, and attributed to us our 
 oivn arguments, and not fictitious ones of his creation, he would have been the first 
 to see this. 
 
 It is only waste of precious time to spend our strength in jostling one another, when we 
 have such a glorious cause to serve, and only our short lives to serve it in. Let all our 
 strength and earnestness be spent over the sacred Word itself. For sifting, elucidating, 
 enforcing it, rivalry, if our purpose be simple and our heart single, is the surest pledge of 
 union. 
 
 31]
 
 PEOLEGOMEXA.] THE EPISTLE TO THE EOMANS. [en. ii. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 OF THE EPISTLE TO THE ROMANS. 
 SECTION I. 
 
 ITS AUTHORSHIP, AISTB INTEOEITY. 
 
 1. This Epistle has been universally believed to be tlie genuine pro- 
 duction of the Apostle Paul. Neither the Judaizing sects of old, who 
 rejected the Pauline Epp., nor the sceptical critics of modern Germany, 
 have doubted this. Some of the earliest testimonies are : 
 
 (o) IrensBus, adv. Hser. iii. 16. 3 (ed. Stieren) ; Hoc ipsum interpre- 
 tatus est Paulus scribens ad Eomanos : " Paulus apostolus Jesu Christi, 
 &c." (Eom. i. 1) : — et iterum ad Eomanos scribens de Israel dicit, 
 " Quorum patres, et ex quibus Christus, &c." Eom. ix. 5 \ 
 
 (β) Clem. Alex., Psedag. i. p. 140 (§ 70) ; — 'ϊΒε oZr, ψησϊΐ' 6 Παϋλος, 
 χρηστότητα κ. άποτομίαν θεού' κ.τ.λ. (Eom. xi. 22.) See also p. 109, 
 § 19. And the same, Strom, iii. p. 544, § 75 ; ομοίως ίε και ό Παϋλος εν 
 ττ} προς 'Ρωμαίους εττ. γράψει' υ'ίτινες απεθάΐ'ομεί' τή αμαρτ'κ}, κ.τ.Χ. (Eom. 
 
 vi. 2.) See also p. 545, § 76 ; and al freq. 
 
 (γ) Tertullian, adv. Praxeam, § xiii. ; — Deos omnino nee dicam nee 
 dominos, sed apostolum sequar, ut, si pariter nominandi fuerint Pater et 
 Eilius Deum Patrem appellem, et Jesum Christum Dominum nominem 
 (Eom. i. 7). Solum autem Christum potero deum dicere, sicut idem 
 apostolus : ex quibus Christus, qui est, inquit, Deus super omnia bene- 
 dictus in ievum omne (Eom. ix. 5). 
 
 More instances need not be given : the stream of evidence is con- 
 tinuous and unanimous. 
 
 2. But critics have not been so well agreed as to the Iktegeitt of 
 the present Epistle. The last two chapters have been rejected by some: 
 by others, parts of these chapters. Marcion rejected them, but on doc- 
 trinal, not on critical grounds. Heumann imagined cli. xii. — xv. to be a 
 later written Epistle, and ch. xvi. to be a conclusion to ch. xi. Semler 
 views ch. xv. as a private memorandum, not addressed to the Eomans, 
 but written to be communicated by the bearers of the Ep. to those 
 whom tbey visited on the way, — and ch. xvi., as a register of persons to 
 be saluted, also on the way. Schulz imagines that ch. xvi. was written 
 from Eome to the Ephesians, and Schott fancied it to be fragments 
 
 1 See also the same chapter, § i), where there are six express citations from the 
 Epistle. 
 
 32]
 
 § II.] FOE ΛΥΗΑΤ EEADEES, &c. [pholegomexa. 
 
 of a smaller Ep. written by Paul in Corintli to some Asiatic cliurch. 
 But these notions, as Tholuck remarks (from whom these particulars 
 are for the most part taken) remain the exclusive property of their 
 originators. He himself recognizes the genuineness of the portion, as also 
 Neander, Credner, De "Wette, and Olshausen. The more recent objec- 
 tions of Baur are mentioned and refuted, in part by De Wette, Comm. 
 juxta finem, — Tholuck, Comm. pp. 2, 3, — Olsh. Comm. iii. 34, 35, and 
 fully, by Kling, theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1837, p. 308 ff. 
 
 3. Still more discrepancy of opinion has existed respecting the 
 doxology at the end of the Epistle. I have summarily stated and dis- 
 cussed the evidence, external and internal, in the var. readings and 
 notes in loc. : and a fuller statement may be found in Dr. Davidson's 
 Introd. ii. 188 ff ; Tholuck, Einleitung, pp. 4—6 ; De Wette in loc. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 TOR "WHAT HEADERS TT AVAS WRITTEiT. 
 
 1. The Epistle itself plainly declares (ch. i. 7) that it was addressed 
 to the saints ιοΊιο icere at Rome. The omission of the words iv 'Ρωμτ] by 
 some MSS is to be traced to a desire to catholicize the Epistles of Paul ; 
 — see AVieseler, Chron. des Apostol. Zeitalters, p. 438. 
 
 "With regard to the Cliurch at Rome, some interesting questions 
 present themselves. 
 
 2. Br WHOM WAS IT FOUNDED ? Here our enquiries are enwrapped 
 in uncertainty. But some few landmarks stand forth to guide us, and 
 may at least prevent us from adopting a wrong conclusion, however 
 unable we may still be to find the right one. 
 
 («) It icas certainly not founded hy an Apostle. Eor in that case, the 
 fact of St. Paul addressing it by letter, and expressing his intention of 
 visiting it personally, would be inconsistent with his own declared reso- 
 lution in ch. XV. 20, of not working where another had previously laid 
 the foundation. 
 
 (/j) This same resolution may guide us to an approximation at least 
 to the object of our search. Had the Eoman church been founded by 
 the individual exertions of any preacher of the word, or had it owed its 
 existence to the confluence of the converts of any other preacher than 
 Paul, he Avould hardly have expressed himself as he has done in this 
 Epistle. We may fairly infer from ch. xv. 20, that he had, proximately, 
 laid the foundation of the Eoman church : that is to say, it was ori- 
 ginated by those to whom he had preached, who had been attracted to 
 the metropolis of the world by various causes,— who had there laboured 
 in the ministry with success, and gathered round them an important 
 Christian community. 
 
 Vol. II.— 33] " c
 
 PKOLEGOMEKA.] THE EPISTLE TO THE EOMANS. [en. ii. 
 
 Of this community, though not his own immediate offspring in the 
 fiiith, Paul takes charge as being the Apostle of the Gentiles. He 
 longs to impart to them some χάρισμα (ch. i. 11) : he excuses his having 
 written to them τυΧμηρότερον άττύ μέρους, by the dignity of that oiEce, 
 in which, as a priest, he was to offer the Gentiles, an acceptable and 
 sanctified offering to God. 
 
 (y) The character given in ch. i. 8 of the Eoman Christians, that 
 tJiei?' faith ims spoken of in all the world, has been taken as pointing to 
 a far earlier origin than the preaching of Paul. But, even granting 
 that some among the Eoman Jews may have carried the faith of Christ 
 thither soon after the Ascension (see Acts ii. 10, and Eom. xvi. 7, where 
 Audronicus and Junias are stated to have been in Christ hefore the 
 Αρ.), — such a concession is not necessary to explain Rom. i. 8. What- 
 ever happened at Rome is likely to have been very soon announced in 
 the provinces, and to have had more reporters, wherever the journeys of 
 the Apostle led him, than events occurring elsewhere. He could hardly 
 fail to meet, in every considerable city which he had visited for the 
 second time, in Judsea, Asia, Macedonia, and Greece (see Acts xviii. 
 22, 23 ; xix. 1 ; xx. 1, 2) believers who had received tidings of the 
 increase and flourishing state of the Eoman church. This occurrence 
 of good news respecting them in all the cities might well suggest the 
 expression, // ττίστις υμών καταγγέλλεται εν ολω τω κόσμω. 
 
 3. The above considerations lead me to the conclusion, that the Eoman 
 Church owed its origin, partly perhaps to believing Jews, who had 
 returned or been attracted thither in the first days of Christianity, but 
 mainly to persons converted under Paul's own preaching. This con- 
 clusion is strengthened by the long list of salutations in ch. xvi. to 
 Clu'istian brethren and sisters with whose previous course in many cases 
 he had been acquainted. 
 
 4. It is not within the province of these Prolegomena to discuss the 
 question respecting the presence, preaching, and martyrdom of Peter at 
 Eome. That he did not found the Eoman church, is plain from the 
 above consideratioiis, and is conceded by many of the ablest among the 
 modern Eomanists ^ Nor have we any ground to suppose that he was 
 at Home up to, or at the date of this Epistle. No mention is made of 
 him, — no salutation sent to him. At present therefore we may dismiss 
 the question as not pertinent. In the prolegg. to the Epistles of Peter, 
 it will recur, and require full discussion. 
 
 5. That the Eoman church was composed of Jeivs and Gentiles, is 
 manifest from several passages in our Epistle. In ch. ii. 17, iv. 1, 12, 
 
 2 Tholuck, Einl. § 2, mentions Valesius, Pagi, Baluz, Hug, Klee : and an article in the 
 Tubingen Theological Quarterly for 1824 (written according to Dr. Davidson by 
 Feilmoser) which concludes that though Peter taught and suffered martyrdom in Rome, 
 bis stay there could not have much exceeded one year. 
 
 34]
 
 § II.] "FOE AVHAT EEADEES, &c. [peolegomexa. 
 
 Jews are addressed, or implied : in cL•. i, 13, — in the similitude of en- 
 grafting in ch. xi., and in xv. 15, 16, — Gentiles are addressed. In what 
 proportion these elements coexisted, can only be determined from indi- 
 cations furnished by the Epistle itself. And from it the general 
 impression is, that it is addressed to Gentiles, as the greater and more 
 important part of its readers. Among them vrould be mostly found the 
 ' strong ' of ch. xiv., to whom principally the precepts and cautions 
 concerning forbearance are written. To them certainly the expression 
 ru iQvy] in ch. i. 5, 13, xv. 15, IG, is to be applied, in the strict sense ; 
 and in those places it represents the persons to whom the Ep. is mainly 
 addressed. The same may be said of ch. xi. 13, 14, where νμύ.ς, τα. 'έθΐ'η 
 are evidently the majority of the readers, as contrasted with the τ ίνες εί, 
 αυτών, the Jewish believers. 
 
 6. It may be interesting to add testimonies from profane Avriters 
 which are connected with the spread of Christianity at Eome. 
 
 That the Jeics were found in great numbers there, is evident. 
 
 (a) Josephus, Antt. xvii. 11. 1, mentioning an embassy which came to 
 Eome from Judsea under Yarns, in the time of Augustus, says, και 
 ήσαΐ' οι μεν πρέσΙ^εις οι αποσταλεί τες γνώμη τοϋ έθνους πεντήκοντα, συν- 
 ίσταντο Se αυτοΊς των εττι ' Ρώμης ΊονΕαίων νπερ όκτακις•χ^ι\Ίους. 
 
 (/3) Philo, leg. ad Caium, p. 1014, in a passage too long for citation, 
 states that Augustus gave them the free exercise of their religion, and a 
 quarter beyond the Tiber for their habitation. 
 
 (y) Dio Cassius, XXXvii. 17, και εστί Kul -πάρα τοΙς 'Ρωμαίοις το γένος 
 τοϋτο, κολουσθεν μεν ττοΧλάκις, αΰΐ,ηϋεν €ε επι ττΧε'ιστοί', ωςτε και ές τταρ- 
 ρησίαν της νομίσεως εκνικήσαι. 
 
 (c) So far relates to Judaism proper : in the following it is impossible 
 to say how far Christianity may have been ignorantly confounded 
 with it. 
 
 Augustine, de Civ. Dei vi. 11, cites from Seneca, ' in eo libro quem 
 contra superstitiones condidit,' — De illis sane Judaeis cum loqueretur, 
 ait : — ' Cum interim usque eo sceleratissimse gentis consuetude convaluit, 
 ut per omnes jam terras recepta sit : victi victoribus leges dederunt.' 
 
 (ε) Tacitus, in the same place where he relates the persecution of the 
 Christians by Nero on occasion of the fire at Eome, adds, ' repressaque 
 in prsesens exitiabilis superstitio rursus erumpebat, non modo per 
 Judgeam, originem ejus mali, sed per urbem etiam ' . . . . 
 
 (ζ) Juvenal describes the judaizing Eomans at a later period in a 
 strain of bitter satire, Sat. xiv. 96 if. 
 
 (η) On the passages in Sueton. Claud. 25, and Dio Cass. Ix. 6, re- 
 lating to the expulsion or coercion of the Jews at Eome, see note on 
 Acts xviii. 2. 
 
 7. It yet remains to consider the supposed discrepancy between our 
 Epistle, and the state of the Christian church at Eome implied somo 
 
 35] 2
 
 Γΐϊθΐ.Ε«θΛΐΕΧΛ.] THE EPISTLE TO THE EOMANS. [cii. ir. 
 
 years subsequent to it in Acts xxviii. This discrepancy has been made 
 the most of by Dr. Baur, and by him pronounced irreconcileable. The 
 flourishing state of the Eoman church set forth in this Epistle seems to 
 him to be inconsistent with the tone used by the Jews in their speecb 
 to Paul, Acts xxviii. 22 : ΐιΕκ/ΰμεν ce ircioix συϋ ακοϋσιιι (i φροπΊς' ττερί μεν 
 γαρ της α'ιηέσεως ταύτης γνωστόν εστίν ημίν ότι τταιταχοϋ αιΤίλεγεΓΟί. 
 Olshausen and Tholuck have been at much pains to give a solution of 
 the difljculty : the former referring the circumstance to the entire 
 severance between Christians and Jews at Eome made necessary by 
 Claudius's persecutions of the Jews, — the latter, following many other 
 commentators, to an affected ignorance of the Christian sect on the part 
 of the Jews. 
 
 On this I will remark, — that the difficulty itself does not seem to me 
 so serious as the German writers generally have regarded it. The 
 answer of the Jews was to a speech of Paul in which he had given a 
 remarkable instance of his becoming to the Jews as a Jew. He repre- 
 sents, that he had no real quarrel with his nation : that in fact he was a 
 prisoner for the hope of Israel. This hope they certainly knew, either 
 from previous acquaintance with his name and character, or from his 
 own lips in words which have not been recorded, to be bound up with 
 belief in Jesus as the Messiah. They had received (see note in loc.) 
 no message respecting him from Judaea laying any thing ττοιηρόν to his 
 charge : and they were anxious to have an account from Inmself of his 
 opinions and their ground : for as for this sect, they were well aware 
 that every wlicre it was a thing αντιλεγόμενον : the very word, be it 
 observed, used in ver, 19 and ch. xiii. 45, respecting the opposition raised 
 by the Jews to Paul. Now we may avail ourselves of both Olshausen's 
 and Tholuck's suppositions. On the one hand it was very likely that 
 the intercoiirse between Jews and Christians at Eome would be ex- 
 ceedingly small. The Christian church, consisting mostly of Gentiles, 
 would absorb into itself the Jews who joined it, and who would, for the 
 reason assigned by Olshausen, studiously separate themselves from their 
 unbelieving countrymen. Again, it would not be likely that the Eoman 
 Jews, in their speech to Paul, would enter into any particulars respecting 
 the sect,— only informing him, since he had professed himself in heart at 
 peace with his nation and bound on behalf of their hope, that they were 
 well aware of the general unpopularity among Jews of the sect to which 
 he had attached himself, and wished from him an explanation on this 
 head. Something also must be allowed for the restraint with which 
 they spoke to one under the special custody, as a state prisoner, of the 
 highest power in Eome, and in the presence of a representative of that 
 power. 
 
 Thus the difficulty is much lessened : and it belongs indeed to that 
 class, the occurrence of which in the sacred text is to be regarded far 
 36]
 
 § III.] WITH WHAT OBJECT, &c. [peolegomena. 
 
 rather as a coufirniatiou of our foith, by shewing us how simple and 
 veracious is the narrative of things said and done, than as a hindrance 
 to it by setting one statement against another. 
 
 With respect to that part of it which concerns the notoriety of the 
 Eoman church, — I may remark that its praise for faith in all the world, 
 being a matter reported by Cliristians to Christians, and probably 
 unknown to ' those without,' need not enter as a disturbing element into 
 our consideration. 
 
 8. Tor a judicious and clear statement of the subsequent history of 
 the early Eoman church, I cannot do better than refer my readers to 
 the former part of the work of Mr. Shepherd, " The History of the 
 Church of Eome." 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 WITH WHAT OBJECT IT WAS WKITTEN. 
 
 1. In answering this question, critics have been divided between the 
 claims of the unquestionably most important doctrinal portion of the 
 Epistle, and the particular matters treated in the parenthetical section 
 (ch. ix. — xi.) and the conclusion (ch. xiv. — xvi.). It has not enough 
 been borne in mind, that the occasion of writing an Epistle is one thing, 
 — the great object of the Epistle itself, another. The ill-adjusted ques- 
 tions between the Jewish and Gentile believers, of which St. Paul had 
 doubtless heard from Eome, may have prompted him originally to write 
 to them : but when this resolve was once formed, — the importance of 
 Eome as the centre of the Gentile world would naturally lead him to 
 lay forth in this more than in any other Epistle the statement of the 
 divine dealings with regard to Jew and Gentile, now one in Christ. I 
 will therefore speak separately of the prompting occasion, and the main 
 object, of the Epistle. 
 
 2. The eulogy of the faith of the Eoman Christians, which Paul met 
 with in all his travels, could hardly fail to be accompanied with notices 
 respecting their peculiar difficulties. These might soon have been set at 
 rest by his presence and oral teaching : and he had accordingly resolved 
 long since to visit them (ch. i. 10 — 13). Hindrances however had 
 occurred : and that advice which he was not as yet permitted to give by 
 word of mouth, he was prompted to send to them in a letter. 
 
 3. The contents of that letter plainly shew what their difficulties 
 were. Mixed as the church was of Jew and Gentile, the relative posi- 
 tion in God's favour of each of these would, in defect of solid and broad 
 view^s of the universality of man's guilt and God's grace, furnish a sub- 
 ject of continual jealousy and irritation. And if we assume that the 
 Gentile believers much preponderated in numbers, we sliall readily infer 
 
 37]
 
 PEOLEGOMENA.] THE EPISTLE TO THE EOMANS. [cu. ii. 
 
 that the religious scruples of the Jews as to times and meats would be 
 likely to be with too little consideration overborne. 
 
 4.' Erom such circumstances we may well conceive that, under divine 
 jruidancc, the present ibrm of the Epistle was suggested to the Apostle. 
 The main security for a proper estimate being formed of both Jew and 
 Gentile, would be, the possession of right and adequate convictions of 
 the universality of man's guilt and God's free justifying grace._ This 
 accordinrrlv it was Paul's great object to furnish ; and on it he expends 
 by far the* greatest portion of his labour and space. But while so doing, 
 we may trace his continued anxiety to steer his way cautiously among 
 the strong feelings and prejudices which beset the path on either hand. 
 If by a vivid description of the depravity of Heathendom he might be 
 likely to minister to tlie pride of the Jew, he forthwith turns to him and 
 abases him before God equally with the others. But when this is 
 accomplished, lest he should seem to have lost sight of the pre-eminence 
 of God's chosen people, and to have exposed the privileges of the Jew 
 to the sliglit of the Gentile, he enumerates those privileges, and dwells 
 on the true nature of that pre-eminence. Again when the great argu- 
 ment is brought to a close in ch. viii., by the completion of the bringing 
 in of life by Christ Jesus, and the absolute union in time and after time 
 of every believer with Him, — for fear he should seem amidst the glories 
 of redemption to have forgotten his own people, now as a nation 
 rejected, he devotes three weighty chapters to an earnest and affec- 
 tionate consideration of their case — to a deprecation of all triumph 
 over them on the part of the Gentile, and a clear- setting forth of the 
 real mutual position of the two great classes of his readers. Then, after 
 binding them all together again, in ch. xii. xiii., by precepts respecting 
 Christian liie, conduct towards their civil superiors, and mutual love, he 
 proceeds in ch. xiv. to adjust those peculiar matters of doubt, — now ren- 
 dered comparatively easy after the settlement of the great principle in- 
 volving them, — respecting which they were divided. He recommends 
 forbearance towards the weak and scrupulous, — at the same time class- 
 ing himself among the strong, and manifestly implying on which side his 
 own apostolic judgment lay. Having done this, he again places before 
 them their mutual position as co-heirs of the divine promises and mercy 
 (ch. XV. 1 — 13), and concludes the Epistle with matters of personal 
 import to himself and them, and with salutations in the Lord. And 
 probably on re-penising his work, either at the time, or, as the altered 
 style seems to import, in after years at Eome, he subjoins the fervid and 
 characteristic doxology with which it closes. 
 
 5. There seems quite enough in the circumstances of the Eoman 
 
 Church to have led naturally to such an Epistle, without supposing with 
 
 some critics, that an elaborate plan of written doctrinal teaching, to 
 
 supply the want of oral, was present to the mind of the Apostle. We 
 
 38]
 
 § IV.] AT WHAT TIME, &c. [prolegomena. 
 
 must not forget to whom he was writing, nor fail to allow for the 
 greater importance naturally attacliing to an Epistle which would be 
 the cherished possession and exemplar of the greatest of the Gentile 
 churches. It was an Epistle to all Gentiles, from the Apostle of the 
 Gentiles : ΰμίν λέγω τοΊς ίθνεσιν' εφ" οσυν μεν ε'ιμι εγώ εΰιων απόστολος, 
 
 την ^κικοιήαΐ' μου Ιο'ίάζω. It had for its end the settlement, on the 
 broad principles of God's truth and love, of the mutual relations, and 
 union in Christ, of God's ancient people, and the recently engrafted 
 world. IVhat wonder then, if it be found to contain an exposition of 
 man's unworthiness and God's redeeming love, such as not even Holy 
 Scripture itself elsewhere furnishes. 
 
 SECTION ΙΛ^ 
 
 AT WHAT TIME AND PLACE IT WAS AVEITTEN. 
 
 1. This is more plainly pointed out in our Epistle than in most of 
 the others. The Apostle was about to set out for Jerusalem with a 
 contribution from the churches of Macedonia and Achaia (ch. xv. 25 if.). 
 To make this contribution he had exhorted the Corinthian church, 1 Cor. 
 xvi. 1 if., and hinted the possibility of his carrying it to Jerusalem in 
 person, after wintering with them. And again in 2 Cor. viii. ix. he 
 recurs to the subject, blames the tardiness of the Corinthians in pre- 
 paring the contribution, and (ch. xiii. 1) describes himself as coming to 
 them immediately. Comparing these notices with Acts xx. 1 if., we find 
 that Paul left Ephesus (after Pentecost, see notes there) for Mace- 
 donia, wintered at Corinth, and thence went to Jerusalem accom- 
 panied by several brethren, bearing (ch. xxiv. 17) alms to his nation 
 and offerings. 
 
 2. Thus far it would appear that it was written close upon, or during, 
 his journey to bear alms to Jerusalem. But the very place is pointed 
 out by evidence which can hardly be misapplied. We have a special 
 commendation of Phoebe, a deaconess of the church at Kenclirea, to the 
 kindness and attention of the Eoman Christians : such a commendation 
 as could hardly have been sent, had she not been, as generally believed, 
 the bearer of the letter. Again, greetings are sent (xvi. 23) from 
 Gaius, evidently a resident, for he is called Ό iivoq μον κα\ υΚης της εκ- 
 κλησίας. But on comparing 1 Cor. i. 14, we find Paul telling the Co- 
 rinthians that he baptized among them one Gaius. These persons can 
 hardly but be one and the same. Again, Erastus is mentioned as 
 steward of the city. Therefore, as Tholuck remarks, of some city well 
 known to the liomans, and one in which he must have been some time 
 resident, so to speak of it, I may add, that after the mention of 
 
 39]
 
 PROLEGOMENA.] THE EPISTLE TO THE EOMANS. [en. it. 
 
 Kenchrea, // πόλις can be no other than Corinth : just as, if the Peirseus 
 had been nieiitioncd, »'/ πόλις would necessarily mean Athens. (An 
 Erastua is said to have remauied at Corinth, 2 Tim. iv. 20, but the 
 identity is too nuccrtain for the notice to be more than a j^ossible 
 corroboration.) 
 
 3. From the above evidence it is placed almost beyond question that 
 the Epistle was written /ro?» Corinth, at tlie close of the three mouths' 
 residence tlicre of Acts xx. 3, — the παραχει^οσία of 1 Cor. xvi. G, — when 
 Paul was just about to depart (rvi'i ^ε πορεύομαι, ch. XV. 25) for Jeru- 
 salem on his errand of charity. 
 
 4. By consulting the chronological table appended to the Prolegg. 
 to the Acts, it will be seen that 1 place this visit in the winter of a.d. 
 57 — 58. The Epistle accordingly was sent in the spring of a.d. 58, the 
 fourth of the reiarn of !Nero. 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 LANGUAGE, AND STYLE. 
 
 1. It might perhaps have been expected, that an Epistle to Eomans 
 would have been written in Latin. But Greek had become so far 
 the general language of the woi-ld, that there is no ground for sur- 
 prise in the Apostle having employed it. Not to cite at length the 
 passages in the classics (Tacit, de Orator, c. 29 : Martial, Epig. xiv. 56 : 
 Jm'enal, Sat. vi. 184—189) which point to the universal adoption of 
 Greek habits and language at Eome, we have the similar instances of 
 Ignatius, Dionysius of Corinth, and Irenieus, all of Avhom wrote to the 
 Eoman Christians in Greek. Clement, bishop of Eome, wrote in Greek. 
 Justin Martyr addressed his apologies to the Eoman Emperors in 
 Greek. And if it be objected, that the greater number of the Christian 
 converts would belong to the lower classes, we may answer, that a 
 great proportion of these were native Greeks : see Juvenal, Sat. iii. 
 60—80. 
 
 2. In speaking of the st^le of the Epistle, the following general 
 remarks on the style of the Apostle Paul, taken from Tholuck's Intro- 
 duction to his Commentary on the Ep. to the Eomans, p. 26 if., are of 
 considerable interest : " As in general we can best apprehend and esti- 
 mate the sti/le of a writer in connexion with his character, so is it with 
 the Apostle Paul. The attributes which especially characterize the 
 originality of Paul as an Aiithor, are Power, Fulness, and Warmth. 
 If to these attributes is added Pers])icuity of unfolding thought, we have 
 all united, which ennobles an orator. But fulness of ideas and warmth 
 of feelings often bring with them a certain informality of expression : 
 the very wealth of the productive power does not always leave time to 
 
 40]
 
 § τ.] LANGUAGE, AXD STYLE. [peolegomexa. 
 
 educate (as Hamann expresses it) tlie tliouglits which are horn into the 
 light, — to arrange and select the feelings. Together with the excel- 
 lences above-mentioned, something of this defect is found in the style 
 of the great Apostle of the Gentiles. Something of that which Diony- 
 sius of Halicarnassus de Comp. A^erb. c. xx. says of compositio austera,' 
 is applicable to the Apostle's method of expression, ovrt ττύρισα βον- 
 Χίται τα ι^ώλα άλΧηλοις εΐιαι, οίτε παρόμοια, ούτε αναγκαί^. ίουλεΰαντα 
 αΐνολουθίεί, αλλ' ευγενή κ. άττλα κ. ελεύθερα' φύσει τ εοικεναι μάλλον αντα 
 βούλεται, η Γί'χι•;/, κ. κατά ττάβος λέγεσθαι μάλλο)•, >) κατ' ήθος. ττεριόίους 
 ϋέ συντιθέι αι συναρτιζυύσας τον νυϋν τά πολλά μεν ούτε βοίιλεται' εΐ Εέ 
 ΤΓΟτε αυτομάτως ίπι τούτο κητενε•χθείη, το ανεπιτηοευτον εμψαίνειν έθέλει 
 και αφελές, κ. τ. λ. The high claims of St. Paul to the reputation of elo- 
 quence were acknowledged by remote Christian antiquity. Nay, we 
 have in all probability an honourable testimony to the same eifect from 
 one of the most celebrated critics of heathen Home, — that namely of the 
 fragment of Longinus, where he ranks Paul with the first orators of 
 ancient times, adding however the remark, that he appears more to 
 persuade than to demonstrate '. From Christian antiquity we will 
 adduce the testimony of Jerome, Ep. 48, ad Pammachium, c. 13 : — 
 ' Paulum proferam, quern quotiescunque lego, videor mihi non verba 
 audire, sed tonitrua .... videntur quidem verba simplicia et quasi 
 innocentis homiuis ac rusticani, et qui nee facere nee declinare noverit 
 insidias, sed quocunque respexeris, fulmina sunt. Hsei'et in causa, capit 
 orane quod tetigerit, tergum vertit, ut superet : fugam simulat, ut 
 occidat.' — Add to this the words of Chrysostom de Sacerdotio iv. 7 : 
 ώσπερ yap τε'ιχος εζ αδάμαντος κατασκευασθεν, ούτω τάς παιτα-^οϋ της 
 υϊκουμένης εκκλησίας τά τούτου τει-χ^ίζει γράμματα' και καθάπερ τις άριστεύς 
 γενναιότατος εστηκε και νϋν μέσος, υΙ•χ_μαλωτίζων πάν νόημα εΙς την 
 υπακοήν του γβίστοϋ, και καθαιρώ ν λογισμούς και πάν ύφωμα έπαιρύμενον 
 κατά της γνώσεως τον θεοϋ." 
 
 3. After having stated, and visited with severe and deserved censure, 
 the disparaging estimate formed by Eiickert in his Commentary, and 
 criticised in a friendly spirit the other extreme, taken by Eothe 
 and Glockler, of regarding all ellipses, anakolouthons, and defects 
 of style, only as so many hidden but intended excellences, Tholuck 
 proceeds : 
 
 " We have then this question to ask ourselves : tcith icliat ideas as to 
 
 ^ The genuineness of tliis fragment has been defended by Hug. Einl. ins N. T. ii. 334 
 (342 of Wait's transl.), on grounds well worthy of consideration. [The passage runs 
 thus: κορωνις o' ίστω λόγου πιιντος κα'ι φρονήματος Ελληνικού Δημυσθΐνης, Αυσίας, 
 Αισχίνης, Ύπίοίοης, Ίσα'ιος, Δείναρχος {Αημοσθίν)]ς ό K(Jt0ij'Oc), ΊσοκρίίΓ>;ς, 'Αντι- 
 φών' προς τούτοις ΠίίΓ'λος ό Ύαρσενς, υντινα καΐ πρώτον ψημι προιαταμενον 
 ύόγματυς άναπο3ίίκτον.'\ 
 
 41]
 
 PBOLEGOMENA.] THE EPISTLE TO THE EOMANS. [cii. ir. 
 
 Ilie ahiVitij of the Apostle as a loriter ought the lelievinrj Christian to 
 approach his irorlis ? And what is the result, when we examine in 
 detail the Epistles of Paul in this bearing ? The Eathers themselves 
 frequently confess, tliat the whole character of Christianity forbids us 
 from seeking classical elegance in the outward style of the New Testa- 
 ment : — as the Son of God appeared in His life on earth in a state of 
 humiliation, so also the toord of God. In this sense, to cite one example 
 out of many, Calvin says (on Rom. v. 15) : — ' Quum autem multoties 
 discriminis mentionem repetat, nulla tamen est repetitio, in qua non 
 sit αιαί'ταπό^υτον, vel saltem ellipsis aliqua : Quee sunt quidem orationis 
 vitia, sed quihus nihil majestati decedit ccelestis sapiential, quae nobis 
 per apostolum traditiir. Quin potius singulari Dei providentia factum 
 est, ut sub contemptibili vei'borum humilitate altissima ha)c mysteria 
 nobis traderentur ; ut non humanse eloquentise potentia, sed sola spi- 
 ritus efficacia niteretur nostra fides.' But it must be borne in mind, 
 that this our concession with regard to the formal perfection of the 
 apostolic writings has its limits : for were we to concede that imperfec- 
 tion of form amounted to absolute informality , the subject-matter itself 
 would be involved in the surrender. If the aim of the apostolic 
 teaching is not to be altogether frustrated, we can hardly object to the 
 assumption, that the divine ideas have been propounded in such a form, 
 that by a correct use of the requisite means they may be discovered, and 
 their full meaning recognized. Assuming this, it is impossible to form 
 so low an estimate as Riickert's of the style of the Apostle : while at 
 the same time we cannot see that the believing Christian is entitled to 
 assume in him an academic correctness of syllogistic form, a conscious 
 and perfect appreciation of adequacy of expression, reaching to the use 
 of every particle. If we are to require these excellences from au 
 apostolic writer, why not also entire conformity to classical idiom of 
 expression ? And if we besides take into account the peculiarity of the 
 Apostle's character above pointed out, are we not obliged to confess, 
 that so universal a reflexion, such a calculation, as Kothe's theory sup- 
 poses, is altogether inconsistent with that character, — that such a 
 precisely measured style would be inexplicable from a spirit like that of 
 the Apostle, except on the assumption of a passive inspiration ? and as 
 regards the point itself, I cannot see, that the writings of Paul, ex- 
 amined in detail, justify this prejudice in their favour, even according 
 to the ingenious and minute exegesis of Eothe himself. (This he 
 instances by examining Rothe's account of the defective constructions 
 in Rom. v. 12 f.) * * * * That the great Apostle was no ordinary 
 thinker, — that he did not, after the manner of enthusiasts, carried away 
 by \varmth of feeling, write down what he himself did not understand, 
 is beyond question : — but that all which hitherto has been accounted in 
 42]
 
 § v.] LANGUAGE, AND STYLE. [pboleoomena. 
 
 him negligence or inaccuracy of expression, proceeded from conscious 
 intention of the writer, — can neither be justly assumed a priori, nor 
 convincingly shewn a posteriori." 
 
 4. To these general remarks of Tholuck I may add some notice of the 
 peculiarities of the argumentative style of the Apostle, with which we 
 are so much concerned in this Epistle. 
 
 (a) It is his constant habit to insulate the one matter which he is 
 considering, and regard it irrespective of any qualifications of which it 
 may admit, or objections to which it lies open, — up to a certain point. 
 Much of the difficulty in ch. v. vi. vii. has arisen from not bearing this 
 in mind. 
 
 (β) After thus treating the subject till the main result is gained, he 
 then takes into account the qualifications and objections, but in a man- 
 ner peculiar to himself ; introducing them by putting the overstrained 
 use, or the abuse, of the proposition just proved, in an interrogative 
 form, and answering the question just asked. On a superficial view of 
 these passages, they assume a sort of dramatic character, and have led 
 many commentators to suppose an ohjector to be present in the mind of 
 the Apostle, to whom such questions are to be ascribed. But a further 
 and deeper acquaintance with St. Paul's argumentative style removes 
 this impression, and with it, much of the obscurity arising from sup- 
 posing, or not knowing when to suppose, an interchange of speakers in 
 the argument. A¥e find that it is the Apostle himself speaking 
 throughout, and in his vivid rhetorical manner proposing the fallacies 
 which might be derived from his conclusions as matters of parenthetical 
 enquiry. 
 
 (γ) Perhaps one of the most wonderful phenomena of St. Paul's 
 arguments, is the manner in which all such parenthetical enquiries are 
 interwoven into the great subject ; in which while he pursues and 
 annihilates the oflf-branching fallacy, at the same time he has been 
 advancing in the main path, — whereas in most human arguments each 
 digression must have its definite termination, and we must resume the 
 thesis Avhere we left it. A notable instance of this is seen in ch. vi. of 
 our Epistle ; in which while the mischievous fallacy of ver. 1 is dis- 
 cussed and annihilated, the great subject of the introduction of Life 
 by Christ is carried on through another step — viz. the establishment of 
 that life as one of sanctijication. 
 
 Among the minor characteristics of the Apostle's style, may be 
 enumerated, 
 
 (c) Frequent and complicated antitheses, requiring great caution and 
 discrimination in exegesis. Eor often the different members of the 
 antitheses are not to be taken in the same extent of meaning ; some- 
 times the literal and metaphorical significations are interchanged in a 
 curious and intricate manner, so that perhaps in the first member of two 
 43]
 
 rnoLEGOMENA.] ΤΠΕ EPISTLE TO THE EOMANS. [en. ii. 
 
 antithetical clauses, the subject may be literal and the predicate meta- 
 phorical, and in the second, vice versa, the subject metaphorical and the 
 predicate literal. Sometimes again, the terms of one member are to be 
 amplified to their fullest possible, almost to an exaggerated meaning : 
 ■whereas those of the second are to be reduced down to their least 
 possible, almost to a depreciated meaning. To retain such antitheses 
 in a version or exegesis is of course, generally speaking, impossible : the 
 appropriateness of the terms depends very much on their conventional 
 value in the original language. Then comes the difficult task of break- 
 ing up the sentence, and expressing neither more nor less than the real 
 meaning under a diiierent grammatical form : an attempt almost always 
 sure to fail even in the ablest hands. 
 
 (ε) Frequent 'plays upon words, or rather perhaps, choice of words 
 from their similarity of sound. Much of the terseness and force of the 
 Apostle's expressions is necessarily lost in rendering them into another 
 language, owing to the impossibility of expressing these paronomasiae ; 
 and loithout them, it becomes exceedingly difficult to ascertain the real 
 weight of the expression itself: to be sure that we do not give more 
 than due importance in the context to a clause whose aptness was 
 perhaps its chief characteristic, and on the other hand to take care that 
 we do not overlook the real importance of clauses whose value is not 
 their mere aptness, but a deep insight into the philosophy of the 
 cognate words made use of, as exponents of lines of human thought 
 ultimately convergent. 
 
 {ζ) Accumulation of prepositions, often with the same or very slightly 
 differing meanings. That this is a characteristic of St. Paul's style 
 there can be no doubt : and the difficulty created by it is easily obviated 
 if this be borne in mind. The temptation of an expositor is to 
 endeavour to give precise meaning and separate force to each pre- 
 position, thereby exceeding the intention of the sentence, and distorting 
 the context by elevating into importance clauses of comparative in- 
 difference. 
 
 (jj) TJie frequency and peculiarity of Ids parenthetical passages. 
 The difficulty presented by this characteristic is, in few words, that of 
 disentangling with precision such clauses and passages. The danger is 
 twofold : 1. lest we too hastily assume an irregular construction, not 
 perceiving the parenthetical interruption : 2. lest we err on the other 
 hand, which has more commonly been the case, in assuming the 
 existence of parenthetical clauses where none exist. St. Paul's paren- 
 theses are generally well marked to the careful observer : and it must be 
 remembered that the instances of anakolouthon and irregular construc- 
 tion are at least as frequent : so that we are not, for the sake of clearing 
 up a construction, to throw in parentheses, as is often done, to the 
 detriment of the sense. 
 44]
 
 CHAP. TIT.] 1 COEINTIIIANS. [pboleoomeita. 
 
 The peculiarity of his pareutlieses consists in this, that owing to the 
 fervency and rapidity of his composition he frequently deserts, in a 
 clause apparently intended to be parenthetical, the construction of the 
 main sentence, and instead of resuming it again, proceeds with the 
 parenthesis as if it were the main sentence. 
 
 Instances of almost all these characteristic difficulties will be found in 
 chap. V. of this Epistle, where, so to speak, they reach their culminating 
 point. 
 
 5. Two cautions are necessary, on account of the lax renderings of 
 our authorized version, by which the details of the argument of this and 
 other Epp. have been so disguised, that it is almost impossible for the 
 mere English student intelligently to apprehend them. 
 
 (a) The emplmtic position of icords is of the highest importance. 
 Pages might be filled with an account of misrenderings of versions and 
 commentators from disregard to the rules of emphasis. Tlie student 
 will continually find such instances alleged and criticised in these notes; 
 and will be surprised that so momentous a matter should have been 
 generally overlooked. 
 
 (δ) The distinction between the aorist and perfect tenses is in our 
 authorized version very commonly disregarded, and thereby the point of 
 the sentence altogether missed. Instances are continually occurring in 
 the Epistles : and it has been my endeavour in the notes to draw the 
 student's attention to them with a view to their correction. 
 
 6. For much interesting matter on this subject the student is referred 
 to Tholuck, Eomerbrief, Einleitung : and to Dr. Davidson, Introd. 
 Vol. II. p. 144 ff. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 THE FIRST EPISTLE TO THE CORINTHIANS. 
 SECTION I. 
 
 ITS AUTUORSUIP, AND INTEGRITY. 
 
 1. As far as I am aware, the first of these has never been doubted by 
 any critic of note. Indeed he who would do so, must be prepared to 
 dispute the historical truth of the character of St. Paul. Eor no more 
 complete transcript of that character, as we find it set forth to us in the 
 Acts, can be imagined, than that which we find in this and the second 
 Epistle. Of this I shall speak further below (§ vii.). 
 45]
 
 moLEGOMEKA.] 1 CORINTHIAN'S. [cii. in. 
 
 2. But cxtcrual testimonies to the Authorship are by no means 
 ■wanting. 
 
 (o) Clement of Eome, in his Epistle to this very Church of Corinth, 
 says, C. 47 : — αναλάβετε την ετιστοΧην τον μακαρίου Παύλου του αποστόλου, 
 τι ττρώτοί' υμ'ιΐ' εν αρχτ] ευαγγελίου εγραφεν ; επ άληβείας ττνενματικώς 
 έπέστειλεν ΰμίν, ττερι αυτού τε και Κηψά και Άττολλώ, Sia το και τότε 
 •ττοοςκλίσεις υμάς ττεποιησθαι . 
 
 (/3) Polycarp, ad Philippenses, c. 11: — "Qui autem ignorant judicium 
 Domini ? *An nescimus, quia sancti mundum judicabunt ^ ? sicut 
 Paulus docct." 
 
 (γ) Irenieus adv. lla)r. iv. 27. (45.) 3 : — "Et hoc autem apostolum in 
 epistola qu.T est ad Corinthios manifestissime ostendisse, dicentem : 
 Nolo enim vos ignorarc, fratres, quoniam patres nostri omnes sub nube 
 fuerunt^ &c." And almost in the same words Cyprian, Testim. i. 4, 
 citing the same passage. 
 
 (β) Athenagoras, de resurrect, mort. p. 61: — ευ^ηλον τταντι το λεητό- 
 μενον, ΟΤΙ ^ί7, κατά τον απόστολοι•, το ψθαρτον τοϋτο καΐ ΙιίασκεΙαστυν 
 εν^ΰσασθαι άψθαρσίαν *, 'ίνα κ.τ.λ. 
 
 (ε) Clement of Alexandria cites this epistle very frequently and 
 explicitly : e. g. Psedag. i. 33 : — σαφέστατα γοϋν ο μακάριος Ώαϋλος 
 άπηλλαί,εν ημάς της ζητήσεως εν rrj πρότερα^ προς Κορινθίους wci πως 
 γράφων' Άοελφο\, μη παιδία γίνεσθε ταϊς φρεσιν κ.τ.λ.* — And he proceeds 
 to quote also 1 Cor. xiii. 11, with πάλιν L• Παύλος λέγει. 
 
 (ζ) Tertullian de Prsescript. adv, Hser. c. 33 : — " Paulus in prima ad 
 Corinthios notat negatores et dubitatores resurrectionis." 
 
 See Lardner: and Davidson's Introd. vol. ii. p. 258 f., where more 
 testimonies are given. 
 
 3. The integrity of this Epistle has not been disputed. The whole of 
 it springs naturally out of the circumstances, and there are no difficulties 
 arising from discontiuuousness or change of style, as in some passages 
 of the Ep. to the Eomans. 
 
 SECTION IL 
 
 FOE WHAT EEADEES IT WAS WEITTEN. 
 
 1. " CoEiNTH (formerly Ephyre, Apollod. i. 9, — which afterwards was 
 its poetic name, Ovid, Met. ii. 240. Virg. Georg. ii. 264. Propert. ii. 
 5, 1 al.) was a renowned, wealthy (II. ii. 570. Hor. ii. 16. Dio Chrysost. 
 xxxvii. p. 464), and beautiful commercial city (Thuc. i. 13. Cic. rep. 
 ii. 4), and in the Eoman times the capital of Achaia propria (Apul. Met. 
 X. p. 239, Bipont), situated on the isthmus of the Peloponnese between 
 
 • 1 Cor. i. 10 f. 2 1 Cor. vi. 2. ^ γ Cor. x. 1 f. 
 
 ^ 1 Cor. XV. 53. s j Cor. xiv. 20. 
 
 46]
 
 § II.] ΓΟΕ WHAT READEES, &c. [peolegomeka. 
 
 the Ionian and ^gean seas (hence himaris, Ovid, Met, v. 407, Hor. 
 Od. i. 7. 2, — αμφιϋάλασσος, ξιθάλασσος) and at the foot of a rock which 
 bore the fortress Acrocoriuthus (Strabo, viii. 379 ; Plut. vit. Arat. 16 ; Liv. 
 xlv. 28), — forty stadia in circumference. It had two ports, of which the 
 western (twelve stadia distant) was called Lechaeon {Αίχ^αων, Lechieum, 
 Lechese, Plin. iv. 5), the eastern (seventy stadia distant) Kenchrea? 
 (Strabo, viii. 380; Pans. ii. 2, 3 ; Liv. xxxii. 17; al.). The former was 
 for the Italian, the latter for the Oriental commerce : so Strabo, 1. c. : 
 Κεγγ^ρεαι κώμη και λιμήν α.πε'^ων της πόλεως υσον εβ?.ομηκοντα στάδια, 
 τούτω μεν χρώιται προς τους εκ της 'Ασίας, προς ^ε τους εκ της ^Ιταλίας 
 
 τω Αεχηίω. Arts and sciences flourished notably in Corinth (Pindar, 
 01. xiii. 21 ; Herod, ii. 167 ; Plin. xxxiv. 3. xxxv. 5 ; Cic. Verr. ii. 19 ; 
 Suet. Tiber. 34). The Coi-inthian plate was especially celebrated. But 
 these advantages were accompanied by much wantonness, luxury, and 
 gross corruption of morals (Athenaius, vii. 281. xiii. 543 ; Alciphr. 
 iii. 60 ; Strabo, viii. 378 ; Eustath. Iliad, ii. p. 220). (These vices were 
 increased by the periodical influx of visitors owing to the Isthmian 
 games, and by the abandoned and unclean worship of Aphrodite, to 
 whose temple more than a thousand priestesses of loose character were 
 attached. See testimonies in Wetst.) The city (lumen totius Graecise, 
 Cic. Manil. 5) was taken, pillaged and destroyed by L. Mummius (Flor. 
 ii. 16 ; Liv. Epitome Iii.) in Α.π.ο. 608, 146 B.C. (cf. Plin. xxxiv. 3), — 
 but re-established (as the colony Julia CorintJius) by Julius Ciesar, 
 A.u.c. 710, B.C. 44, — and soon recovered its former splendour (Aristid. 
 Or. 3, p. 23, ed. Jebb), and was accordingly in St. Paul's time the seat 
 of the Eoman proconsul of Achaia (Acts xviii. 18). See, on the whole, 
 Strabo, viii. 378 fi". ; Pans. ii. 1 fi"." Winer, Eealworterbuch. — An inter- 
 esting description of the present remains of Corinth will be found in 
 Leake's Morea, vol. iii. ch. xxviii. 
 
 2. The Christian church at Corinth was founded by St. Paul on his 
 first visit, related in Acts xviii. (1 — 17.) He spent there a year and a 
 half, and his labours seem to have been rewarded with considerable 
 success. His converts were for the most part Grentiles (1 Cor. xii. 2), 
 but comprised also many Jews (Acts xviii. 8 : see too ver. 5, and note) ; 
 both however, though the Christian body at Corinth was numerous 
 (Acts ib. 4, 8, 10), were principally from the poorer class (1 Cor. i. 26 ff".). 
 To this Crispus the ruler of the synagogue (Acts xviii. 8 ; 1 Cor. i. 14) 
 formed an exception, as also Erastus the chamberlain (οικονόμος) of the 
 city (Eom. xvi. 23) and Gains, whom the Ap. calls ό ^ειος μου κ. 6\ης 
 της εκκλησίας. And we find traces of a considerable mixture of classes 
 of society in the agapse (1 Cor. xi. 22). 
 
 3. The method of the Apostle in preaching at Corinth is described by 
 liimself, 1 Cor. ii. 1 fl". Ho used great simplicity, declaring to them 
 only the cross of Christ, without any adventitious helps of rhetoric or 
 
 47]
 
 rnoLEGOMENA.] 1 COEINTHIANS. [cii. iir. 
 
 ■worldly wisdom. The opposition of the Jews had been to liim a source 
 of no ordinary anxiety : see the remarkable expression Acts xviii. 5, and 
 note there. The situation likewise of his Gentile converts was full 
 of danger. Surrounded by habits of gross immorality and intellectual 
 pride, they Λvere liable to be corrupted in their conduct, or tempted to 
 despise the simplicity of their first teacher. 
 
 4. Of this latter there was the more risk, since the Apostle had been 
 followed by one whose teaching might make his appear in their eyes 
 meagre and scanty. ApoUos is described in Acts xviii. 24 ff. as a learned 
 Hellenist of Alexandria, mighty in the Scriptures, and fervent in zeal. 
 And though by the honourable testimony there given " to his work at 
 Corinth, it is evident that his doctrine was essentially the same with that 
 of Paul, yet there is reason to think that there was difterence enough in 
 the outward character and expression of the two ' to provoke comparison 
 to the Apostle's disadvantage, and attract the lovers of eloquence and 
 philosophy rather to Apollos. 
 
 5. We discover very plain signs of an influence antagonistic to the 
 Apostle having been at work in Corinth. Teachers had come, of Jewish 
 extraction (2 Cor. xi. 22), bringing with them letters of recommendation 
 from other churches (2 Cor. iii. 1), and had built on the foundation laid 
 by Paul (1 Cor. iii. 10—18 : 2 Cor. x. 13—18) a worthless building, on 
 which they prided themselves. These teachers gave out themselves for 
 Apostles (2 Cor. xi. 5, 13), rejecting the apostleship of Paul (1 Cor. 
 ix. 2 : 2 Cor. x. 7, 8) ; encouraging disobedience to his commands 
 (2 Cor. X. 1, G), and disparaging in every way his character, and work 
 for the Gospel (see for the former, 2 Cor. iv. 1, 2 if. : v. 11 if., and notes 
 in both places : for the latter, 2 Cor. xi. 16 — xii. 12). It is probable, as 
 De AVette suggests, that these persons were excited to greater rage 
 against Paul, by the contents of the first Epistle; for we find the 
 plainest mention of them in the second. But their practices had com- 
 menced before, and traces of them are very evident in ch. ix. of this 
 Epistle. 
 
 6. The ground taken by these persons, as regarded their Jewish posi- 
 tion, is manifest from these Epistles. They did not, as tlie false teachers 
 among the Galatians, insist on circumcision and keeping the law : for 
 not a word occurs on that question, nor a hint which can be construed 
 as pointing to it. Some think that they kept back this point in a 
 church consisting principally of Gentiles, and contented themselves 
 with first setting aside the authority and influence of Paul. But I 
 should rather believe them to have looked on this question as closed, 
 
 " δς παρα-γίνόιηΐ'ος σννίΐ3άλίτο ττολν τοίς πίπιστίνκόσιν δια της χάριτος, ver. 27• 
 See also 1 Cor. iii. 6. 
 
 ' See esp. 1 Cor. xvi. 1 2, and note. 
 48]
 
 § II.] FOE WHAT EEADEES, &c. [prolegomena. 
 
 aud to have carried on more a negative than a positive warfare with the 
 Apostle, upholding, as against him, the authority of the regularly con- 
 stituted Twelve, and of Peter as the apostle of the circumcision, and 
 impugning Paul as an interloper aud innovator, and no autoptic witness 
 of the events of the Gospel history : as not daring to prove his apostle- 
 ship by claiming sustenance from the Christian churches, or by leading 
 about a wife, as the other Apostles, and the brethren of the Lord, and 
 Cephas. What their positive teaching had been, it is difficult to decide, 
 except that, althougli founded on a recognition of Jesus the Christ, it 
 was of an inconsistent and unsubstantial kind, and such as would not 
 stand in the coming day of fiery trial (1 Cor. iii. 11 if.). 
 
 7. That some of these teachers may have described themselves as 
 peculiarly helonging to Christ, is a priori very probable. St. Paul had 
 had no connexion with our Lord while He lived and taught on earth. 
 His Christian life and apostolic calling begun at so late a period, that 
 those who had seen the Lord on earth might claim a superiority over 
 liim. And this is all that seems to be meant by the iyio οέ χριστοϋ of 
 1 Cor. i. 12, especially if we compare it with 2 Cor. x. 7 if., the only 
 other passage where the expression is alluded to. There certainly per- 
 sons are pointed out, who boasted themselves in some peculiar connexion 
 with Christ which, it was presumed, Paul had not ; and wei-e igno- 
 rant that the weapons of the apostolic warfare were not carnal, but 
 spiritual. 
 
 8. It would also be natural that some should avow themselves the 
 folloivers of Pcml himself, and set perhaps an undue value on him as 
 
 God's appointed minister among them, forgetting that all ministers 
 were but God's servants for their benefit. 
 
 9. It will be seen from the foregoing remarks, as well as from the 
 notes, that I do not believe these tendencies to have developed them- 
 selves into distinctly marked jxirties, either before the writing of our 
 Epistle or at any other time. In the Epistle of Clement of Eome, 
 written some years after, we find the same contentious spirit blamed 
 (c. 47), but it appears that by that time its ground was altogether dif- 
 ferent : we have no traces of the Paul-party, or ApoUos-party, or Cephas- 
 party, or Clirist-party : ecclesiastical iusubordination and ambition were 
 then the faults of the Corinthian church. 
 
 10. Much ingenuity and labour has been spent in Germany on the four 
 supposed distinct parties at Corinth, and tlie most eminent theologians 
 have endeavoured, with very difterent results, to allot to each its definite 
 place in tenets and practice. I refer the student for a complete account 
 of the principal theories, to Dr. Davidson's Introduction, Vol. 11. 
 p. 224 ft:, and Conybeare and Howson's Life of St. Paul, Vol. I. 
 cliap. λ iii. :— and for separate expositions, to Neander, Pfl. u. Leit., 4th 
 cdu. pp. ;i75— 897: Olshauscu, Bibl. Comm. iii. 475 ff". : Schafl", Gesch. 
 
 Vol. II.— 49] d
 
 i-ROLEGOMENA.] 1 COEINTHIANS [en. m. 
 
 d. christlichen Kirche, § 64 : Stanley, Epistles to the Corinthians, Vol. I., 
 Introduction. 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 ΛνίΤΠ \νΠΑΤ OBJECT IT WAS WRITTEN. 
 
 1. The object of writing this Ep. was twofold. The Apostle had been 
 applied to by the Corinthians to advise them on matters connected with 
 their 2»'ac/ ice in the relations of life (ch. vii. 1), and with their liberty of 
 action as regarded oneats offered to idols (ch, viii. — x.) ; they had appa- 
 rently also referred to him the question whether their women should be 
 veiled in the public assemblies of the church (ch. xi. 3 — IG) : and had 
 laid before him some difficulties respecting the exercise of spiritual gifts 
 (ch. xii. — xiv.). He had enjoined them to make a collection for the 
 poor saints at Jerusalem : and they had requested directions, how this 
 might best be done (ch. xvi. 1 if.). 
 
 2. These enquiries would have elicited at all events an answer from 
 St. Paul. But there were other and even more weighty reasons why an 
 Epistle should be sent to them just now from their father in the faith. 
 Intelligence had been brought him by the family of Chloe (ch. i. 11) of 
 their contentious spirit. Erom the same, or from other sources, he had 
 learned the occurrence among them of a gross case of incest, in which the 
 delinquent was upheld in impunity by the church (ch. v. 1 ff.). — He had 
 further understood that the Christian brethren were in the habit of 
 carrying their disputes before heathen tribunals (ch. vi. 1 ff.). And it 
 had been represented to him that tliere were irregularities requiring 
 reprehension in their manner of celebrating the AgapcG, which indeed 
 they had so abused, that they could now be no longer called the Supper 
 of the Lord. Such were their weighty errors in practice: and among 
 these it would have been hardly possible that Christian doctrine should 
 remain sound. So far was this from being the case, that some among 
 them had even gone to the length of denying the Eesurrection itself. 
 Against these he triumphantly argues in ch. xv. 
 
 3. It has been questioned whether St. Paul had the defence of his own 
 apostolic authority in view in this Epistle. Tiie answer must certainly 
 be in the affirmative. AVe cannot read chapp. iv. and ix. without per- 
 ceiving this. At the same time, it is most probable that the hostility of 
 the false teachers had not yet assumed the definite force of personal 
 slander and disparagement, — or not so prominently and notoriously as 
 afterwards. That which is the primary subject of the 2nd Epistle, is 
 but incidentally touched on here. But we plainly see that his authority 
 had been already impugned (see esp. ch. iv. 17 — 21), and his apostleship 
 questioned (ch. ix. 1, 2). 
 
 50]
 
 § IV.] NTJMBEE OF EPISTLES. [peolegomena. 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 OF THE NUMBER OE EPISTLES TTEITTEIT BY PAUL TO THE COEINTHIANS. 
 
 1. If we were left to infer a priori, it would be exceedingly probable 
 that an Epistle had been sent to the Corinthians before this, which we 
 call the first. It appears from ch. xvi. 1 that they wanted some direc- 
 tions as to the method of making "the collection for the saints.''^ "We 
 may ask, — whe^i enjoined and how ? If by the Ap. in person, the direc- 
 tions would doubtless have been asked for and given at the time. It 
 would seem then to follow, that a command to make the collection had 
 been sent them either by some messenger, or in an epistle. 
 
 2. The uncertainty, however, which would rest upon this inference, is 
 removed by the express words of the Ap. himself. In ch. v. 9 he says, 
 έγραψα νμιν iv rrj επιστοΧη, μη συναναμίγινσθαι ττόρνοις. In my note on 
 those words, I have endeavoured to shew that the only meaning which 
 in their context they will legitimately bear, is, that this command, not to 
 associate loith fornicators, was contained in a previous Epistle to them, 
 which has not been preserved to us. Those who maintain that the 
 reference is to the present Epistle, have never been able to produce a 
 passage bearing the slightest resemblance to the command mentioned ^ 
 
 3. The opinions of Commentators on this point have been strangely 
 warped by a notion conceived a priori, that it would be wrong to 
 suppose any apostolic Epistle to have been lost. Those who regard, not 
 preconceived theories, but the facts and analogies of the case, will rather 
 come to the conclusion that very many have been lost. The Epistle to 
 Philemon, for example, is the only one remaining to us of a class, which 
 if we take into account the affectionate disposition of St. Paul, and the 
 frequency of intercourse between the metropolis and the provinces, must 
 have been numerous during his captivity in Eome. We find him also 
 declaring, 1 Cor. xvi. 3 (see note there), his intention of giving recom- 
 mendatory letters, if necessary, to the bearers of the collection from 
 Corinth to Jerusalem : from which proposal we may safely infer that on 
 other occasions, he was in the habit of writing such Epistles to indivi- 
 duals or to churches. To imagine that every loriting of an inspired 
 A])ostle must necessarily have been preserved to us, is as absurd as 
 
 * Perhaps the most extraordinary theory ever propounded by one who has evidently 
 spent some pains on his subject, is that of Mr. Paget, in his " Unity and Order of the 
 Epistles of St. Paul," in which, on account of a fancied resemblance of this command to 
 that in Ileb. xii. IG (which if examined proves to be no resemblance), he maintains 
 ») Ίπιστολή here to be the Ep. to the Hebrews, which he imagines to have been a sort oi 
 general circular epistle to all the churches, written previously to those addressed to 
 particular congregations. I need hardly remind the student, how entirely all the data 
 of every kind furnished by that Epistle are against such a supposition. 
 
 51] d 2
 
 PEOLEGOMENA.] 1 COEINTIIIANS. [CU. III. 
 
 it would bo to imagine tliat all his sai/ings must necessarily have been 
 recorded. The Providence of God, which has preserved so many pre- 
 cious portions both of one and the other, has also allowed many, per- 
 haps equally precious, of both, to pass into oblivion. 
 
 4. The time of writing this lost Epistle is fixed, by the history, between 
 Paul's leaving Corinth Acts xviii. 18, and the sending of our present 
 Epistle. But we shall be able to approximate nearer, when we have 
 discussed the question of the Ap.'s visits to Corinth ^ 
 
 5. Its contents may be in some measure surmised from the data 
 furnished in our two canonical Epp. 
 
 He had in it given them a command, μη συ)α}'αμίγινσθαι πύριοις, 
 
 which being taken by them in too strict and literal a sense, and on that 
 account perhaps overlooked, as impossible to be observed, is explained in 
 its true sense by him, 1 Cor. v. 9 — 12. 
 
 It also contained, in all probability, an announcement of a plan of 
 visiting them on his w^ay to Macedonia, and again on his return from 
 Macedonia (2 Cor. i. 15, IG) which he changed in consequence of the 
 news heard from Chloe's household (1 Cor. xvi. 5 — 7), for which altera- 
 tion he was accused of lightness of purpose (ίλαφρία, 2 Cor. i. 17). 
 
 We may safely say also (see above) that it contained a command to 
 make a collection for the poor saints at Jerusalem. Further than this 
 we cannot with any safety surmise. 
 
 It was evidently a short letter, containing perhaps little or nothing 
 more than the above announcement and injunctions, given probably in 
 the pithy and sententious manner so common with the Apostle '. 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 OF THE NUMBER OF YISITS MADE BY PAUL TO ΤΠΕ COBINTHIANS. 
 
 1. The controversy on this point will be cut very short, if the inter- 
 pretation given in the notes of 2 Cor. xii. 14, xiii. 1, be assumed as 
 correct : — and, as I have there maintained, I believe that neither the 
 Avords nor the context will admit any other. The Apostle had paid 
 two visits to Corinth before the sending of that, and consequently of 
 this Epistle. 
 
 2. The difficulty in this inference, which has led Commentators to 
 adopt an unnatural rendering of the above passages, is, that lut one 
 visit is recorded, viz. that in Acts xviii. 1 if. Eor both Epp. were 
 written before the second visit in Acts xx. 2, 3. (Comp. Acts xix. 
 with 1 Cor. xvi. 8, and 2 Cor. ix. 2 with Acts xx. 1, 2.) 
 
 3. But manifestly, the history of St. Paul's apostolic career in the 
 
 '■> See below, § v. » See Rom. xii. 9 ff. ; 1 Tliess. v. 10 ff. 
 
 52]
 
 § τ.] NUMBER or VISITS. [pkoleoomena. 
 
 Acts is very fragmentary and imperfect. Long and important journeys 
 are dismissed in a few words " : some, e. g. that to Arabia, and the 
 missionary tour in Syria and Cilicia, Gal. i. 21 if., not being even men- 
 tioned. No notice is taken of the foundation of the churches of Galatia, 
 unless the cursory mention of Acts xvi. 6, be taken as such ; — and of the 
 copious catalogue of perils undergone by him in 2 Cor. xi. 24 if., but 
 few can be identified in the history. That a journey to Corinth should 
 have escaped mention, where more extensive journeys and more im- 
 portant events have been omitted or slightly touched on, would not be 
 at all improbable. 
 
 4. Such a journey must of course be inserted between Acts xviii. 18, 
 when his first visit to Corinth ended, and xx. 2, when the second Ep. 
 was sent from Macedonia. But these limits are further narrowed by 
 the history itself. Erom xviii. 18 to xix. 9, when we find the Ap. 
 established at Ephesus, is evidently a continuous narrative. • And as 
 plainly, no visit took place between the sending of the first and second 
 Epistle, as is decisiA^ely proved by 2 Cor. i. 15 — 23. Now the first Ep. 
 was sent from Ephesus, in the early part of the year in which he left 
 that city, 1 Cor. xvi. 8. So that our terminus a quo is the settling at 
 Ephesus, Acts xix. 10, and our terminus ad qxiem the spring preceding 
 the departure from Ephesus, Acts xx. 1. During this time, a visit to 
 Corinth took place. 
 
 5. Let us see whether any hints of his own throw light on this 
 necessary inference. In 2 Cor. xi. 25 we read rpls εΐ'αυοίγησα, and this 
 in a description of his apostolic labours : so that we must not go back 
 beyond his conversion for any of these shipwrecks. Now his recorded 
 voyages are these : (1) Erom Csesarea to Tarsus, Acts ix. 30. (2) Pos- 
 sibly, from Tarsus to Antioch, xi. 25 : but more probably this was a 
 land-journey. (3) Erom Seleucia to Cyprus, xiii. 4. (4) Erom Paphos 
 to Perga, xiii. 13. (5) Erom Attalia to Antioch, xiv. 26. (G) Erom 
 Troas to Philippi, xvi. 11, 12. (7) Erom Macedonia to Athens, xvii. 
 14, 15. (8) Erom Kenchreai to Ephesus, xviii. 18, 19. (9) Erom 
 Ephesus to Csesarea, ib. 21, 22. (10) Erom Ephesus to Macedonia, 
 XX. 1. Of these, it is certain that no shipwreck took place during (G), 
 for it is minutely detailed : it is extremely improbable that any took 
 place during (3), (4), and (5), as the account of the first missionary 
 tour is circumstantial and precise. The same may be said of (7), in 
 
 which the words ol li κιώιστάνοντες τυΐ' ΪΙαϋλον ηγαγοί' εως Άθηΐ'ώ>' 
 will scarcely admit of such an interruption. It is hardly probable that 
 any shipwreck took place in those voyages the purpose of which is 
 described as being at once attained, to which class belong (8) and (9), 
 and, if it is to be counted as a voyage, (2). The two left, of which we 
 
 * c. g., ch. XV. 41, xvi. C, xviii. 2'Λ, xix. 1, xx. 2, 3. 
 
 53]
 
 PEOLEQOMENA.] 1 COEINTHIANS. [cu. in. 
 
 have absolutely «0 account given, are (1) and (10). It is quite pos- 
 sible that he may have been shipwrecked on both these occasions, and 
 such an assumption with regard to (10) would suggest another interpre- 
 tation of the difficult allusion, 2 Cor. i. 8—10. But even assuming this, 
 more voyages seem to be required to account for three shipwrecks. 
 It is true that the evidence thus acquired is very slight— but however 
 triHing, it is at least in fiivour of, and not against, the hypothesis of an 
 unrecorded visit to Corinth. 
 
 6. The nature of the visit may be gathered in some measure from 
 extant hints. It was one made tr λύπη, 2 Cor. ii. 1, where see note : why, 
 we might well suppose, but are not left to conjecture : for he tells them 
 (2 Cor. xiii. 2 and note) that during it he warned them, that if he came 
 again, lie ivonld not spare (the sinners among them) ; and 2 Cor. xii. 21, 
 there is a hint given that God had, on this occasion, humbled him among 
 them. It was a visit unpleasant in the process and in recollection : 
 perhaps very short, and as sad as short : in which he seems merely to 
 have thrown out solemn warnings of the consequences of a future visit 
 of apostolic severity if the abuses were pei-sisted in, — and possibly to 
 have received insult from some among them on account of such warnings. 
 
 7. If we enquire wliat sort of sin had occasioned the visit, the answer 
 seems to be furnished by 2 Cor. xii. 21, μη ηάλιν ελθόντος μου ταπεινώσει 
 με ό θεός μου ττρος υμάς, και ττενθησω πολλούς των προημαρτηκότων και μη 
 μετηνοησάντων επ\ Trj ακαθαρσία και iropt'eia καΐ ασέλγεια j) επραί,αν. It 
 was probably on account of these, the besetting sins of the place, that 
 his second visit had been made in grief; it was to abstain from these 
 sins and the company of those who committed them, that he had enjoined 
 them in his lost Epistle : and accordingly, while we find in our first 
 Epistle detailed notice of the special case of sin which he had recently 
 heard of as occurring among them, the subject of πορνεία is alluded to 
 (vi. 12 — 20) only in a summary way, and in one which shews that he is 
 rather replying to an excuse set up after rebuke in the matter, than 
 introducing it for the first time. 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 
 AT WHAT PLACE AND TIME THIS EPISTLE WAS WEITTEIST. 
 
 1. The place of writing it is pointed out in ch. xvi. 8, — επιμένω ce if 
 Εψ^σω εως της πεντηκοστής, to have been EPHESUS. 
 
 A mistaken rendering of the w^ords (ib. ver. 5) M«(C£Co»'<ai' yap cup- 
 χομαι, as if they signified ' for I a}n i^assing throxujh Macedonia,' — led 
 probably to the subscription in the rec. and our English Bibles, ίγρύφη 
 ατΓο Φίλίπ-πωΐ'. But the idea has never been seriously entertained. 
 
 2. The above notice from ch. xvi. 8 also shews, that at the time of 
 
 54]
 
 § ΤΙ ] TIME AND PLACE OF WETTING, [peolegomena. 
 
 writing, tlie Ap. intended to quit Ephesus after Pentecost of that year. 
 And on connecting this with Acts xix., xx., it appears (see notes, and 
 chronological table in prolegg. to Acts) that he really did leave Ephesus 
 about Pentecost in the year 57. ΛΨβ may assume therefore (as we have 
 no ground for supposing that he referred to a previous year and after- 
 wards changed his purpose) that the Epistle was written in the former 
 part of the year 57. 
 
 3. It will be seen by my notes on 1 Cor. v. 7, that I cannot see in the 
 words καθώς ίστε αζυμοι any allusion to the fact of the days of un- 
 leavened bread being then present. I have endeavoured to Shew that 
 external probability, as well as spiritual analogy, is against the idea that 
 St. Paul would have so expressed himself. But there still is no reason, 
 why the nearness or presence of that season may not have suggested to 
 Mm the whole train of thought there occurring,— especially when we 
 know independently that he was writing during the former part of the 
 year. 
 
 4. It is almost certain then that the Ep. was ^vritten hefore Pentecost, 
 A.D. 57 : and probable, that somewhat about Easter was the exact time. 
 
 5. The Ap. had at this time already sent off Timotheus and Erastus 
 to Macedonia (cf. Acts xix. 22, and 1 Cor. iv. 17), the latter (1 Cor. ib.) 
 with the intention of his proceeding on to Corinth, if possible (1 Cor. 
 xvi. 10), and preparing the way for his own apostolic visit (iv. 17). 
 Possibly also his mission had reference to the collection for the saints at 
 Jerusalem (see 2 Cor. viii., and xii. 18) ; but the language used is 
 ambiguous, and Λνο cannot pronounce positively that Timotheus reached 
 Corinth on this journey. (See below, ch. iv. § 2, 4.) 
 
 6. The Epistle is addressed in the name of Sosthenes ό αοελφός, as 
 well as in that of the Apostle. It is hardly possible that this Sosthenes 
 should be the same as the person of that name mentioned Acts xviii. 17 ' : 
 see note there. The conjectures respecting him I have given on 1 Cor. 
 i. 1. He bears no part in the Epistle itself, any more than Timotheus 
 in 2 Cor. : the Αρ., after mentioning him, immediately proceeds ί'υχαριστώ 
 τώ θεώ μυυ. 
 
 7. It is uncertain, who were the hearers of the Epistle : but perhaps 
 the common subscription is right in assigning that office to Stephanas, 
 Eortunatus, and Achaicus. Eor they are mentioned as being present 
 with the Apostle (1 Cor. xvi. 17) from Corinth: and as an injunction is 
 given (ib. 18) that they should be honourably regarded by the Corr., it 
 is highly probable that they were intending to return. 
 
 3 Unless indeed, as Mr. Birks supposes, Horse Apostolicae, p. 215 f., he was converted 
 subsequently to that occurrence. 
 
 55]
 
 PROLEGOMENA.] 1 COEINTHIANS. [en. ιττ. 
 
 SECTION VII. 
 
 ΜΔ.ΤΤΕΒ A>'D STYLE. 
 
 1, As might have been expected from the occasion of writing, the 
 matter of this epistle is very various. It is admirably characterized by 
 Mr. Conybeare, in Conybeare and Howson's Life and Epistles of St. 
 Paul, vol. ii. p. 28 (2nd cdn.) : 
 
 " This letter is, in its contents, the most diversified of all St. Paul's 
 Epistles : and in proportion to the variety of its topics, is the depth of 
 its interest for ourselves. Eor by it we are introduced as it were behind 
 the scenes of the apostolic Church, and its minutest features are revealed 
 to us under the light of daily life. - We see the picture of a Christian 
 congregation as it met for worship in some upper chamber, such as the 
 house of Aquila or of Gaius could furnish. We see that these seasons 
 of pure devotion were not unalloyed by human vanity and excitement : 
 yet, on the other hand, we behold the heathen auditor pierced to the 
 heart by the inspired eloquence of the Christian prophets, the secrets of 
 his conscience laid bare to him, and himself constrained to fall down on 
 his face and worship God : we hear the fervent thanksgiving echoed 
 by the unanimous Amen : we see the administration of the Holy Com- 
 munion terminating the feast of love. Again, we become familiar with 
 the perplexities of domestic life, the corrupting proximity of heathen 
 immorality, the lingering superstition, the rash speculation, the lawless 
 perversion of Christian liberty : we witness the strife of theological 
 factions, the party names, the sectarian animosities. We perceive the 
 difficulty of the task imposed upon the Apostle, who must guard from so 
 many perils, and guide through so many difiiculties, his children in the 
 faith, whom else he had begotten in vain : and we learn to appreciate 
 more fully the magnitude of that laborious responsibility under which he 
 describes himself as almost ready to sink, ' the care of all the churches.' 
 " But while we rejoice that so many details of the deepest historical 
 interest have been preserved to us by this Epistle, let us not forget to 
 thank God, who so inspired His Apostle, that in his answers to questions 
 of transitory interest he has laid down principles of eternal obligation. 
 Let us trace with gratitude the providence of Him, who ' out of darkness 
 calls up light ;' by whose mercy it was provided, that the unchastity of 
 the Corinthians should occasion the sacred laws of moral purity to be 
 established for ever through the Christian world : — that their denial of 
 the resurrection should cause those words to be recorded whereon 
 reposes, as upon a rock that cannot be shaken, our sure and certain 
 hope of immortality." 
 
 2. In style, this Epistle ranks perhaps the foremost of all as to sub- 
 5G]
 
 en. IV.] ArillOESHIP, AND IXTEGEITY. [peolegomeka. 
 
 limity, and earnest and impassioned eloquence. Of the former, the 
 description of the simplicity of the Gospel in ch. ii., — the concluding 
 apostrophe of ch. iii. (ver. IG — end), — the same in ch. vi. (ver. 9— end), — 
 the reminiscence of the shortness of the time, ch. vii. 29 — 31, — the whole 
 argument in ch. xv., — are examples unsurpassed in Scripture itself: and 
 of the latter, ch. iv. 8 — 15, and the whole of ch. ix. : while the panegyric 
 of Love, in ch. xiii., stands, a pui-e and perfect gem, perhaps the noblest 
 assemblage of beautiful thoughts in beautiful language extant in this our 
 world, — About the whole Epistle there is a character of lofty and sus- 
 tained solemnity, — an absence of tortuousness of construction, and an 
 apologetic plainness, which contrast remarkably with the personal por- 
 tions of the second Epistle. 
 
 3. ISO Epistle raises in us a higher estimate of the varied and wonderful 
 gifts with which God was pleased to endow the man whom He selected 
 for the Apostle of the Gentile world : or shews us how large a portion 
 of the Spirit, who worketh in each man severally as He will, was given 
 to him for our edification. The depths of the spiritual, the moral, the 
 intellectual, the physical world are open to him. He summons to his 
 aid the analogies of nature. He enters minutely into the varieties of 
 human infirmity and prejudice. He draws warning from the history of 
 the cliosen people : example, from the Isthmian foot-race. He refers an 
 apparently trifling question of costume to the first great proprieties and 
 relations of Creation and Eedemption. He praises, reproves, exhorts, 
 and teaches. AVhere he strikes, he heals. His large heart holding aU, 
 where he has grieved any, he gi-ieves likewise ; where it is in his power 
 to give joy, he first overflows with joy himself. We may form some idea 
 from this Epistle better perhaps than from any one other, — because this 
 embraces the widest range of topics, — what marvellous power such a 
 man must have had to persuade, to rebuke, to attract and fasten the 
 affections of men. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 THE SECOND EPISTLE TO THE CORINTHIANS. 
 SECTION I. 
 
 ITS AUTHOIlSniP, AND INTEGBITT. 
 
 1. The former of these is undoubted. No Epistle more clearly marlis 
 itself out as the work of the Autlior whose name it bears. It is 
 inseparably connected with the Eirst, following it up, and only diflcring 
 from it as circumstances since occurring had afiected the mind oi the 
 
 57]
 
 moLEGOMENA.] 2 COEINTHIANS. [ch. iv. 
 
 writer. See this more dwelt on, when I speak of its style and matter, 
 below, § iii. 
 
 2. The external testimonies are, 
 (a) Ireuaeus, Hajr. iii. 7. 1 : 
 
 Quod autem dicunt, aperte Paulum iu sccunda ad Corinthios dixisse : 
 In quibus Deus sieculi hujus exciecavit mentes infidelium. 
 
 (/ϊ) Athenagoras, de resurr. mort. : 
 
 tvhjXov παιτι τυ λειπόμενοί' .... 'έκαστος κομίσηται ϋικαίως α cia τοϊι 
 σώματος ίπραΕίΐ', είτε αγαθά είτε κακά. 
 
 (γ) Clement of Alexandria very frequently cites our epistle : e. g., 
 Strom, iii. § 94, 
 
 αντίκα βιάζεται τον ΏαϋΧον εκ της άπατης την "γίνεσιν συηστάναι. Χεγεη' 
 Sia τοΰτωι' φοβούμαι Ct μη, ώς ό όφις Έ,υαν εί,ΐ]ΐτάτησεν, κ.τ.λ. (2 Cor. xi. 3.) 
 
 And again, Strom, iv. § 101, 
 
 ό απόστολος (specified as Παϋλος previously) .... ε'ΐ()ηκερ εν τη δευτέρα 
 προς τους Καρίί'βίους' ά\ρι γαρ της σήμερον //^αέρας το αϋτο κάλυμμα τοΊς 
 ΤΓολΧοΊς επι τη άΐ'αγί'ώσει της παλαιάς διαθήκης μένει. 
 
 (c) Tertullian, de Pudicitia, ch. 13 init. : Novimus plane et bic suspi- 
 ciones eorum. Hevera enim suspicantur apostolum Paulum in secunda ad 
 Corinthios eidem fornicatori veniam dedisse, quern in prima dedendum 
 Satanse in interitum carnis prouuntiarit, &c. He then cites 2 Cor. ii. 
 5—11. 
 
 See more testimonies in Davidson, Vol. II. p. 279. 
 
 3. The integrity of this Epistle has not however been unquestioned. 
 Semler (in 1767) imagined it to consist of three separate epistles, — (1) 
 chapp. i. to viii.-fEom. xvi. 1 to 20 + ch. xiii. 11 to 18. This he supposes 
 to have been the letter which Titus bore on his second mission to Corinth. 
 
 (2) On receiving intelligence of the effect produced at Corinth, the Ap. 
 writes a second Ep. iu justification of himself, chapp. x. 1 to xiii. 10. 
 
 (3) An Epistle sent to the other churches in Achaia on the subject of 
 the collection for the saints at Jerusalem, ch. ix. — To this curious theory 
 a convincing refutation was furnished by Gabler (De capp. ult. ix — xiii 
 poster, ep. P. ad Corr. ab eadem baud separandis. Getting. 1782). — 
 AVeber again (de numero Epp. P. ad Corr. rectius constituendo, 1798) 
 thought, it had been originally two Epistles, (1) chapp. i. to ix. + xiii. 11 to 
 13, — (2) chapp. x. 1 to xiii. 10. — But Meyer (from whom the foregoing 
 particulars are taken) quotes respecting all such fanciful discussions a 
 good remark of Hug (Eiul. ii. p. 376), that it would be just as rea- 
 sonable to suppose the περ\ στεφάνου of Demosthenes to be two orations, 
 because in the former part the orator defends himself calmly and in 
 detail, and in the latter breaks out into fierce and bitter invective. — 
 Certainly, on the principle which these critics have adopted, the first Ep. 
 to the Corr. might be divided into at least eight separate epistles, 
 marked off by the successive changes of subject. 
 
 58]
 
 § II.] CIECTJMSTANCES, &c. OF WEITING. [pbolegomeka. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 CIRCUMSTANCES, PLACE, AND TIME OE WRITING. 
 
 1. At the time of writing this Epistle, Paul had recently left Asia 
 (2 Cor. i. 8) : in doing so had come by Troas (ii. 12) : and thence had 
 sailed to Macedonia (ibid.; cf. Acts xx. 1, 2), where he still was (ch. 
 viii. 1 ; ix. 2, where notice esp. the present καυχ^ωμαι, — ix. 4). In Asia, 
 he had undergone some great peril of his life (2 Cor. i. 8, 9), which (see 
 note there) can hardly be referred to the tumult at Ephesus (Acts xix. 
 23 — 41) \ — but from the nature of his expressions was probably a 
 grievous sickness, not unaccompanied with deep and wearing anxiety. 
 At Troas, he had expected to meet Titus (2 Cor. ii. 13), with intelli- 
 gence respecting the effect produced at Corinth by the first Epistle. In 
 this he was disappointed (ii. 13), but the meeting took place in Mace- 
 donia (vii. 5; 6), where the expected tidings Avere announced to him 
 (vii. 7 — 16). They were for the most part favourable, but not alto- 
 gether. AH who were well disposed had been humbled by his reproofs : 
 but evidently his adversaries had been further embittered. He wished 
 to express to them the comfort which the news of their submission had 
 brought to him, and at the same time to defend his apostolic efficiency 
 and personal character against the impugners of both. Under these 
 circumstances, and with these objects, he wrote this Epistle, and sent it 
 before him to break the severity with which he contemplated having to 
 act against the rebellious (ch. xiii. 10), by winning them over if possible 
 before his arrival. 
 
 2. The 2)lace of writing is no where clearly pointed out. There is no 
 ground for supposing it to have been Philippi, as commonly imagined ^. 
 Nay such a supposition is of itself improbable. In ch. viii. 1 he 
 announces to the Corr. the generosity which had been the result of 
 God's grace given iv ταΐς εκκλησίαις της Μηκίίοιύας. It is hardly likely 
 that he would make such announcement, if he had hitherto been sta- 
 tionary at Philippi, the ^rst of those churches on his way from Asia. 
 All that we can say is, that the Epistle was written at one of the Mace- 
 donian churches ; more probably at the last which he visited than at the 
 first. The principal of those churches were at Philippi, Thessalonica, and 
 Bercea. AVe know from 1 Thess. ii. 17, 18, how anxious the Ap. was 
 
 ' I cannot help being surprised that any one who lias studied the character and history 
 of the Apostle should still refer this passage to that tumult. The supposition lays to his 
 charge a meanness of spirit and cowardice, which certainly never characterized him, and 
 to avow which would have been in the highest degree out of place in an EjJistle, one 
 object of which was to vindicate his apostolic efficiency. 
 
 2 The common subscription assigns Philippi : but whether from tradition, or mere 
 hasty inference, is quite uncertain. 
 
 59]
 
 PROLEOOMEifA.] 2 COETNTHIANS. [cii. ir. 
 
 fifiain to visit tlio Thossaloniiui cliurcli : and in tlic absence of all detail 
 respecting this journey iu Acts xx. 1, 2, we may well believe that he 
 would have spent some time at Thessalonica. If then Philippi from its 
 situation is improbable, it would seem likely that Thessalonica was the 
 place. But all is conjecture, beyond the fact that it was written from 
 Macedonia, 
 
 3. The time of writing is fixed within very narrow limits. About 
 Pentecost a.d. 57 (see chronological table iu Prolegg. to Acts) Paul left 
 Ephesus for Troas : there he stayed some little time : thence went to 
 Macedonia ; and sufficient time had elapsed for him to have ascertained 
 the mind of tlie Macedonian churches and to have made the collection. 
 Here falls in our Epistle : after which (Acts xx. 2) he came into Greece 
 (Corinth) and abode there three months : and then is found, after tra- 
 velling by land through Macedonia, at Philippi on his return at Easter, 
 58. So that the Epistle was written in the summer, or autumn of 57. 
 
 4. Two questions belong to this part of our subject, which it is not 
 very easy to answer. From 1 Cor. iv. 17, we learn that Timotheus had 
 been sent to Corinth by Paul (see also Acts xix. 22, where he is said to 
 have been sent with Erastus to Macedonia) to prepare the Corr, for bis 
 own coming by reminding them of his ways and teaching. And in 
 1 Cor. xvi. 10, 11, we find directions given to them for their reception of 
 Timotheus and speeding his return: "for," adds the Αρ., " I expect him 
 with the brethren." Here, however, some little uncertainty is ex- 
 pressed as to his visiting them, the words being ε'α»' ίε eXdrj Ύιμόθευζ. 
 Now at the time of writing this second Epistle, we find Timotheus with 
 Paul in IMacedonia (2 Cor. i. 1), without any hint given of his having 
 been at Corinth, or of any tidings respecting the church there having 
 come through him. Nay there is an apparent presumption that he had 
 not been at Corinth: for in 2 Cor. xii. 18 where speaking of those 
 whom he had sent to Corinth he mentions Titus by name, no allusion is 
 made to Timotheus. Had he been at Corinth, or not ? 
 
 I believe, in spite of these apparent obstacles to the view, that he had 
 leen there. The purpose of his mission, as stated in 1 Cor. iv. 17, is too 
 plain and precise to have been lightly given up. And, as Meyer 
 suggests, the relinquishing of the intended journey of Timotheus as well 
 as that of the Apostle, would have furnished to the adversaries another 
 ground for the charge of fickleness of purpose, which they Avould not 
 fail to use against him. Had therefore the journey been abandoned, 
 some notice and apology would probably have been found in this Epistle. 
 That Timotheus is not mentioned in this Ep. as having gone to them, is 
 easily accounted for by the circumstance that he is associated with the 
 Ap. in the writing of the Epistle. 
 
 Meyer believes that tidings had been brought by him from Corinth of 
 an unfavourable kind respecting the effect of the first Epistle ; and that 
 6U]
 
 § πτ.] ΜΑΤΤΕΕ, AXD STYLE. [peoleoomexa. 
 
 the state of the Apostle's mind described in 2 Cor. ii. 12, vii. 5, is to be 
 traced to the reception of these tidings, not merely to the anxiety of 
 suspense. 
 
 5. The second question regards the mission of Titus to Corinth, which 
 took place subsequently to our first Epistle, and on the return from 
 which he brought to the Apostle the further tidings of the effect of that 
 letter, referred to 2 Cor. vii. 6. The most natural supposition is that he 
 was sent to ascertain this matter : and this is the \'iew of De Wette and 
 others. Bleek however, with Avhom agree Creduer, Olshausen, and 
 !Neander, makes a totally different hypothesis, which is thus expressed by 
 the latter, Pfl. u. Leit. p. 437 : " Timotheus had brought to the Apostle 
 painful tidings which excited his anxiety, especially respecting the 
 agitation caused by one individual, who insolently set himself against 
 Paul and endeavoured to oppose his apostolic authority. (This latter 
 view he defends by explaining 2 Cor. ii. 5, vii. 12, not of the incestuous 
 person of 1 Cor. v. but of some adversary of the Apostle.) On this 
 account Paul sent Timothy to Corinth with a letter (now lost) in which 
 he expressed himself very strongly on these circumstances ; so that after 
 Titus had set out, his heart, full as it was of paternal love towards the 
 Corinthian church, was distressed with fear lest he had written some- 
 what too harshly, and been too severe upon them." This ingenious 
 conjecture, while it might serve to clear up some expressions in 2 Cor. 
 ii. 1 — 4, which seem too strong for the fii'st Epistle, can perhaps liardly 
 be admitted in the absence of any allusion whatever of a clearer cha- 
 racter. All Ave can say is, it may have been so : and after all that has 
 been written on the visits of Tiuiotheus and Titus, we shall hardly 
 arrive nearer the truth than a happy conjectui'e. 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 MATTEE, A>^D STYLE. 
 
 1. In no other Epistle are these so various, and so rapidly shifting 
 from one character to another. Consolation and rebuke, gentleness and 
 severity, earnestness and irony, succeed one another at very short inter- 
 vals and without notice. Meyer remarks : " The excitement and inter- 
 change of the affections, and probably also the haste, under which Paul 
 wrote this Epistle, certainly render the expressions often obscure and 
 the constructions difficult : but serve only to exalt our admiration of the 
 great oratorical delicacy, art, and power, with which this outpouring of 
 Paul's spirit, especially interesting as a self-defensive apology, flow^ and 
 streams onward, till at length in the sequel its billows completely over- 
 flow the opposition of the adversaries. Erasmus strikingly says, Para- 
 phr. Dedicat., — ' Sudatur ab eruditissimis viris in explicaudis poetaruiu 
 Gl]
 
 TEOLEOOMEiiA.] AEEANGEMENT OF THE TEXT [en. v. 
 
 ac rhetorum consiliis, at in hoc rhetore longe plus sudoris est, ut depre- 
 hendas quid agat, quo teudat, quid vetet : adeo stropharum plenus est 
 uudique, absit iuvidia verbis. Tauta vafrities est, non credas eundem 
 bominem loqui. Nunc ut limpidus quidam fons sensim ebullit, mox 
 torrentis in uiorera ingenti fragore devolvitur, multa obiter secum 
 rapiens, nunc placide leniterque fluit, nunc late, velut in lacum diffusua, 
 exspatiatur. Eursum alicubi se condit, ac diverso loco subitus emicat, 
 cum visum est, miris ma^audris nunc lias nunc illas lambit ripas, aliquoties 
 procul digrcssus, reciprocate flexu in sese redit.' We may also apply 
 to our Epistle the words in which Dionys. Hal., de admiranda vi dicendi 
 in Demosthene, c. 8, designates the style of that orator, — μίγαλοττρεπη, 
 
 Xin'if' περίΓτηι; άπίριττορ' έ^,ηλλαγμερηΐ', συνήθη' ττανη-γυρικην, αΧιβινην' 
 ανστηρην, iXapdy' σΰντονον,ανίΐμένην' {βΰαι•, πικράν' ίιβικΊμ', ττηθηηκην.''^ 
 
 2. The matter of the Epistle divides itself naturally into three parts : 
 
 1. i. to vii. 16. Here he sets forth to tJiem liis apostolic walk and 
 character, not only with regard to them, though he frequently refers to 
 this, but in general. 
 
 2. λάϋ. 1 to ix. 15. He reminds them of their duty to complete the 
 collection for the poor saints at Jerusalem. 
 
 3. X. 1 to xiii. 10. Polemical justification of his apostolic dignity and 
 efficiency against his disparagers. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 or THE AliEANGEMEKT OE THE TEXT IN THIS VOLUME. 
 
 1. For an account of what has been previously done with regard to 
 the criticism of the text of the New Testament, see the Prolegg. to Yol. 
 I. ch. vi. § 1, paragraphs 1 — 8. 
 
 2. In the first edition of that volume, a text was adopted, resting on 
 purely diplomatic authority, as a provisional compromise for use in this 
 country, between the received text, and one which should be based on a 
 thorough critical examination of evidence both external and internal. 
 
 3. The adoption of that text was, I do not hesitate to confess, a gi-eat 
 mistake. It proceeded on altogether too high an estimate of the 
 authority of the most ancient existing MSS as determining a reading, 
 and too low an one of the importance of internal evidence. Besides, it 
 overlooked many variations of reading of hardly less importance than 
 those which were noticed. The arrangement of loords in tlie sentences 
 was by me at the time of revising the text of that volume (in the year 
 
 02]
 
 § I.] IN THIS VOLUME. [peolegomena. 
 
 1845) esteemed a matter wMcTi might he passed over ; to which were 
 added many other variations (see the list in ch, vi. § II. of the Prole- 
 gomena) which I now consider as of great interest. 
 
 4. In the subsequent editions of Vol. I., and in the present volume, it 
 has been attemjned to construct the text on more ivorthy principles, and to 
 bring to bear on it hoth the testimony of 3ISS, and those critical maxims 
 tvhich appear to furnish sound criteria of a sptmous or gemdne reading. 
 
 5. With regard to MSS testimon_y, it has been my endeavour to com- 
 bine, as far as possible, that furnished by the later MSS with tliat of the 
 more ancient, and to give them, as well as the others, due weight in the 
 determination of readings. The great thing required, in weighing the 
 testimony of MSS, is a knowledge of the habits of various classes of 
 correctors and transcribers. Long before the date of our earliest MS, a 
 systematic course of correction had begun, and there existed errors of 
 transcription of considerable standing. The earlier those corrections or 
 errors originated, the more extensively would they be spread among our 
 present families of manuscripts, and the more likely are they to have 
 found their way into the generally received text. Also, I need hardly 
 say, the more difficult are they of detection. The only sure way to 
 detect them, is by intimate acqviaiutance with the general phenomena of 
 manuscripts, the cursive as well as the uncial. Such acquaintance will 
 enable us at once to pronounce a reading to be spurious, which yet has 
 a vast array of MS autliority in its favour — just because we know that it 
 furnishes an instance of a correction or of an error commonly found in 
 other places. Thus, for instance, we can hardly conceive a reading moi'e 
 strongly attested by MSS, than the celebrated εγωμιν of Rom. v. 1 ; and 
 consequently some very able critics adopt and defend it. But when we 
 come to search into the habits of MSS, and find that many clauses 
 declaratory of Christian privilege or the like are turned into hortatory 
 sentences, the inference becomes obvious, that a reading so repugnant 
 to the course of the Apostle's argument as every one must feel this 
 ϊγωμζν to be, owes its introduction to the same mistaken desire to edify 
 on the part of the transcribers, and was not the original word, but a 
 correction very early introduced '. 
 
 ^ It is impossible to pass without notice the very fair and able remarks made by Dr. 
 Tregelles in the newly published fourth volume of Home's Introduction (written by 
 him) on the principles of revision above enounced, and the illustration given of them. 
 Dr. Tregelles represents the strong diplomatic principle of adjusting the text, as opposed 
 to the application of all "subjective" considerations to the readings of the most ancient 
 MSS. I am still persuaded that such a principle cannot be a safe one. We are not to 
 be, in endeavouring to arrive at a pure text of Holy Scripture, slaves of the letter, where 
 that letter is ordy a midway testimony between the originals and ourselves, and not the 
 autograph. Antiquity is of immense value in forming our judgment : but it is not all. 
 It is of no use attempting to disguise the fact, that we have in our most venerable MSS, 
 frequent and even ridiculous blunders, which no man w^ould think of adopting into the 
 6.3]
 
 PROLEGOMENA.] AEllANGEMENT OF THE TEXT [ch. t. 
 
 G. The object of course is, in each case, to mount ιψ, if possible, to 
 the original reading from ivliich all the variations sprung: in other 
 words, to discover some word or some arrangement which shall account 
 for the variations, but for tchich none of the variations will account. 
 
 7. The carryiug out of this primary object will lead to several critical 
 maxims, applicable under varying circumstances. These have been for 
 the most part so well detailed long ago by Griesbach, that I shall need 
 no apology for transferring to my pages his important paragraphs on 
 the subject : — 
 
 1) Brevior lectio, nisi testium vetustorum et gravium auctoritate pe- 
 nitus destituatur, prceferenda est verhosiori. Librarii enim multo 
 proniorcs ad addendum fuerunt, quam ad omittendum. Cousulto 
 vix unquam pra?termiserunt quicquam, addiderunt quam plurima: 
 casu vero nonnulla quidem exciderunt, sed baud pauca etiam oculo- 
 rum, aurium, memoriae, phantasise ac judicii errore a scribis admisso, 
 adjccta sunt textui. In primis vero brevior lectio, etiamsi testium 
 auctoritate inferior sit altera, prjeferenda est, 
 
 a) si simul durior, obscurior, ambigua, elliptica, hebraizans aut 
 
 soloeca est, 
 l•) si eadem res varus phrasibus in diversis codicibus expressa legitur, 
 
 c) si vocabulorum ordo inconstans est et instabilis, 
 
 d) in pericoparum * initiis, 
 
 e) si plenior lectio glossam seu iuterpretamentum sapit, vel parallelis 
 locis ad verbum consonat, vel e lectionariis immigrasse videtur. 
 
 Contra vero pleuiorem lectionem breviori (nisi banc multi et iu- 
 sigues tueautur testes) anteponimus, 
 
 sacred text. And it is manifest that such a maxim as that very sound one of Bengel, 
 " Proclivi lectioni prsestat ardua," has its limits, beyond which it cannot be applied. 
 Critical judgment must come in : the only real question is, as to the quality of that 
 judgment. Nor is the office of such judgment quite rightly described by Dr. Tregelles, 
 when he implies that it assumes to decide what a sacred writer ought to have wriilen 
 (p. 143). Its object is to ascertain, as nearly as possible, what he did write .• and it is 
 not called on to abdicate its own acquaintance with the phsenomena of his writings, and 
 of the copied MSS of them, because in some certain reading many of the (apparently) 
 earlier of those copies concur. Even Dr. T. himself, a few pages before (141), announces 
 his own principles of correction of the whole N. T. text, in terms of which it seems to 
 me the legitimate working out would, except in a very few instances, lead to the result 
 for which I contend. The more those who edit on the two differing principles become 
 sobered in their judgment, — the more the purely diplomatic Editor learns to ascertain 
 the real worth and the imperfections of his most valued MSS, and the paradiplomatic 
 Editor to pause, and weigh, and discriminate, and narrow the cases in which he suspects 
 our ancient witnesses, — the nearer will the two approximate in their decisions, and the 
 more likely shall we be, by their joint labours, to arrive at the result so much to be 
 desired — a new and better Textus Receptus, which may represent the aggregate conclu- 
 sion of the painstaking scholars now engaged on this sacred work.— Dec. \H50. 
 
 - In the beginnings of the ecclesiastical portions we often find a word or a clause sup- 
 plied, — the proper name of the agent or speaker, or the like. 
 Gil
 
 § ΐ•] IN THIS VOLUME. [prolegomena. 
 
 o) si omissioni occasionem praebere potuerit όμοιοτίλίντον, 
 
 β) si id quod omissum est, librariis videri potuit obscurum, 
 
 durum, superfluum, insolens, paradoxum, pias aures oiFeudens, 
 
 erroneum, aut locis parallelis repugnans, 
 7) si ea quae absunt, salvo sensu salvaque verborum structura 
 
 abesse poterant, e quo genere sunt propositiones, quod vocant, 
 
 incidentes, prfesertira breviores, et alia, quorum defectum 
 
 librarius relegens quae scripserat baud facile animadvertebat, 
 c) si ' brevior lectio iugenio,' stylo aut scopo auctoris minus 
 
 conveniens est, 
 i) si * sensu prorsus caret, 
 ζ) si e locis parallelis aut e lectionariis earn irrepsisse probabile 
 
 est. 
 
 2) Oifficilior et ohscurior lectio anteponenda est ei, in qua omnia tarn 
 plana sunt et extricata, ut librarius quisque facile inteUigere ea 
 potuerit. Obscuritate vero et difficultate sua eaj potissimum indoctos 
 libraries vexarunt lectiones, 
 
 a) quarum sensus absque penitiore graecismi, bebraismi, bistorige, 
 arcbteologise, &c. coguitione perspici non facile poterant, 
 
 h) quibus admissis vel senteutia, varii generis difficultatibus ob- 
 structa, verbis inesse, vel aptus membrorum orationis nexus 
 dissolvi, vel argumentorum ab auctore ad confirmandam suam 
 thesin prolatorum nervus incidi videbatur. 
 
 3) Durior lectio prceferatur ei, qua posita, oratio suaviter leniterque 
 fiuit. Durior autem est lectio elliptica, hebraizans, solceca, a loquendi 
 
 usu griecis consueto abborrens aut verborum sono aures oftendens. 
 
 4) Insolentior lectio potior est ea, qua nil insoliti continetur. Vocabula 
 ergo rariora, aut bac saltern significatione, quje eo de quo quseritur 
 loco admittenda esset, rarius usurpata, pbrasesque ac verborum con- 
 structiones usu minus tritai, pra3ferautur vulgatioribus. Pro ex- 
 quisitioribus enim librarii usitatiora cupide arripere, et in illorum 
 locum glossemata et interpretamenta (priesertim si margo aut loca 
 parallela talia suppeditarent) substituere soliti sunt. 
 
 5) Locutiones minus empJiaticce, nisi coutextus et auctoris scopus 
 empbasin postulent ', propius ad gemiinam scripturam accedunt, 
 quam discrepantes ab ipsis lectiones quibus major vis iuest aut inesse 
 videtur. Erudituli enim librarii*, ut commentatores, empbases 
 amabant ac captabant. 
 
 3 Both these must be applied with caution : the first because it is quite possible that an 
 intelligent librarius might correct to the well-known expression of his author : the second 
 because that which on a mistaken conventional view of a passage, seems without sense, 
 often acquires an admirable sense when the true context is discovered. 
 
 ^ J?ut it is ('videiit that this exception requires the utmost caution in its application. 
 
 '■' Ivibrarios enim <licimus, et hie et alibi criticos simul ac codicum possessores intelligi 
 
 Vol. II.— u5] e
 
 PEOLEGOMEiTA.] AEEANGEMENT 0Γ THE TEXT [en. τ. 
 
 6) Lectio, prce oliis sensiim pietati (praesertiin mouasticse) alendcc 
 (ij)tum fundeiis, suspect a est'^. 
 
 7) Prcpferatur aliis lectio cui scnsiis suhest apparenter q^iidemfahus, 
 qui vero re penitus examinata verus esse deprehenditur. 
 
 8) Inter phtres unins loci lectiones ea pro suspecta merito liahetiir, 
 quce ortliodoxorum dor/matibus manifeste proe cceteris faciei. Cum 
 enim codices hodie suporstitcs plerique, ne dicam omnes, exarati sint 
 a monacliis aliisque honiiuibus catbolicoruui partibus addictis, cre- 
 dibile non est, bos lectionem in codice, quem quisque exscriberet, 
 obviam neglexisse ullani, qua catbolicorura dogma aliquod luculenter 
 couiirmari aut btieresis fortiter jugulari posse videretur. Seiraus enim, 
 lectiones quascunque, etiam manifesto falsas, dummodo ortbodoxorum 
 placitis patrocinarentur, inde a tertii saeculi initiis mordicus defensas 
 seduloque propagatas, caiteras autem ejusdem loci lectiones, quae dog- 
 mati ecclesiastieo nil praesidii afferrent bsereticorum perfidise attributas 
 temere fuisse ^ 
 
 0) Cum scribie proclives sint ad iterandas alieno loco vocabulorum et 
 sententiarum terminationes easdem, quas modo scripsissent aut mox 
 scribendas esse, praicurrentibus calamum oculis, praeviderent, lectiones 
 ex ejusmodi rliytlimi fallacia facillime explicandce, niilUus sunt 
 pretii^. 
 
 10) Hisce ad peccandum illecebris similes sunt aliae. Librarii, qui sen- 
 tentiam, antequam scribere earn inciperent, totam jam perlegissent, 
 vel dum scriberent fugitivo oculo exemplum sibi propositum inspice- 
 rent, saepe ex antecedentibus vel consequentibus literam, syllabam aut 
 vocabulum perperam arripueruut, novasque sic lectiones procuderunt. 
 
 volumus, qui in suis libris, e quibus alii deinceps exscripti sunt, vel ipsum textum immu- 
 tarunt, vel margini saltim qualescunque suas animadversiones et emendationes illeverunt. 
 (not. Griesb.) 
 
 * Thus, e. g., in Rom. xiv. 17 where the kingdom of God is said to be not meat and 
 drink, but δικαιοσίη-η κ. ίΐρήνη κ. χαρϊι tv πΐ'. ΰγίψ, the ms (4) inserts after οικαιοσΰνη, 
 και άσκησις. In some portions, such interpolations and corrections abound. Cf. as an 
 example 1 Cor. vii. with the var. readd. 
 
 7 This rule, sound in the main, must be applied with the following discrimination : — 
 If the passage is of such a nature, that, whichever reading is adopted, the orthodox mean- 
 ing is legitimate, but the adopt ioti of the stronger orthodox reading is absolutely incom- 
 patible ivith the heretical meaning, — then it is probable that such stronger orthodox 
 reading was the original. For while the heretics would be certain to annul the expression 
 offensive to them and substitute the weaker one, the orthodox, on the above hj^othesi?, 
 would have originally no motive for alteration. — A case in point is the celebrated την 
 ίκκλητίαν τον θίον. Acts χχ. 28. Had θεοϋ been the original, it would have been certain 
 to be altered by the heretics : had κυρίου been the original, no reason can be assigned 
 why the orthodox should have tampered with it. It is probable therefore, as far as this 
 consideration is involved (see note in var. readd.), that Otov was the original word. 
 
 * See a curious instance, among many others, of mechanical repetition of a phrase from 
 association, 1 Cor. xiv. 18: and Rom. viii. 1. 
 
 66]
 
 § I.] IN THIS VOLUME. [peolegomena. 
 
 Si V. c. duo vocabula vicina ab eadem syllaba vel litera incipereut, 
 accidit baud raro, ut vel prius plane omitteretur, vel posteriori temere 
 tribueretur, quod priori esset peculiare. Ejusmodi halluciuatioues 
 vix vitabit, qui libello paullo verbosiori exscribendo operam dat, nisi 
 toto animo in boc negotium incumbat : id quod pauci librarii fecisse 
 videntur. Lectionea ei'go, qua) ex hoc errorum fonte promanarunt, 
 quantumvis vetustie ac consequenter in complures libros transfusaj 
 sint, recte rejiciuntur, prsesertira si codices cseteroqui cognati ab bujus 
 labis contagio puri deprebendantur ^. 
 
 11) Ε pluribus ejusdem loci lectionibus ea prcBstat, qiicB velut media 
 inter cceteras interjacet, hoe est ea, quae reliquarum omnium quasi 
 stamina ita contiuet, ut, bac tanquam primitiva admissa, facile ap- 
 pareat, quanam ratione, seu potius quonam erroris genera, ex ipsa 
 caeterse omnes propullularint. 
 
 12) Ilepudiantur lectiones glossam seu interpretamentum redolentes, 
 cujus generis interpolationes nullo negotio emuuctioris naris criticus 
 subolfaciet. 
 
 13) Hejiciendas esse lectiones, e JPatrum commentariis aut scJioliis ve- 
 tustis in textum invectas, magno consensu critic! decent. (He pro- 
 ceeds at some lengtb to caution against tbe promiscuous assumption of 
 corruptions in tbe earlier codices and versions from sucb sources.) 
 
 14) Respuimus lectiones ortas i^rimum in lectionariis, quse ssepissime in 
 anagnosmatum initiis ac interdum in clausulis etiam atque in medio 
 contextu claritatis causa addunt, quod ex oratiouis serie supplendum 
 esset, resecantque vel immutant, quod, sejunctum ab antecedentibus 
 aut consequentibus, vix satis recte intelligi posse videretur. (Similar 
 cautions are here added against assuming tbis too promiscuously,) 
 
 15) Damnandce sunt lectiones e latina versione in grcecos libros in- 
 vectcB. (Cautions are bere also inserted against the practice of the 
 earlier critics, who if they found in the gra^co-latiu MSS, or even in 
 those of high antiquity and value, a solitary reading agreeing with the 
 latin, hastily condemned that codex as latinizing.) 
 
 8. Having reprinted for the use of students these excellent rules of 
 Griesbach's, I must be contented to refer for their ampler illustration to 
 the prefaces of his and other editions, especially that of the 2nd Leipzig 
 edition of Tischendorf, pp. xii. — xxviii. 
 
 9. I may just add that, recognizing in tbe main the tliree great 
 
 ^ The vast number and extent of mistakes of this kind are only known to tliose who 
 have carefully observed the phaenomena of the later and usually less regarded mss. There 
 is hardly an oi)])ortunity presented by similar endings of words, of which the fertile genius 
 of error has not availed itself. And even in our most ancient MSS, these occur not 
 unfrefjuently. A remarkable instance is found in A, 1 Cor. vi. 2 — G, where becrauso 
 ίλοχίστων ends ver. 2, and ιΊπίστων ends ver. C, the whole lying between is omitted, tiie 
 transcriber's eye having passed on from the first -ιστών to the second. 
 
 G7] e 2
 
 PROLEGOMENA.] AEKANGEMENT OF THE TEXT [cu. v. 
 
 families of MSS which Griesbach and others have marked out, I believe 
 that he aud those who follow him have applied this classification too 
 arbitrarily, aud carried it too far, and it has thus become a critical snare 
 to them. No doubt on the whole there was in the Alexandrine trans- 
 cribers a tendency to grammatical emendation, and in the Occidentals 
 to exegctical elucidation. But the results of these attempts became 
 very early combined in tlie MSS, and complicated with far more 
 numerous faults common to all transcribers : so that, while the pre- 
 vailing character of a MS is sometimes to be taken into account as a 
 gnomon of discrimination, the cases are of far more frequent occurrence, 
 where all MSS are to be judged by the same rules'. 
 
 ' An exception to this may seem to occur in the strange idiosyncracies of the Codex 
 Bezie and its cognates. And certainly no reading of tliis MS should ever be judged of 
 without remembering whence it comes. The origin of the readings of this codex would 
 form one of the most curious, as it is one of the most obscure chapters in the critical 
 history of the New Testament. 
 
 The very interesting enquiry, how far it is probable that the original language of the 
 N. T. was coincident with the Alexandrine dialect of the LXX, has never been satisfac- 
 torily gone into. Tischendorf, Prolegg. p. xxviii., has promised a contribution to it, in a 
 forthcoming grammar of the LXX. 
 
 He gives his own opinion resjiecting the classes or families of MSS, ibid. pp. xxxi., 
 xxxii., as follows : 
 
 " A ratione ipsorum documcntorum omnium quae ad nos pervenere si proficiscirau!•, 
 dubium nee illud est quasdam horum testium classes distinguendas esse, in evangeliis qui- 
 dem maxime, multo minus in apocalypsi quam in reliquis libris, magis etiam in epistolis 
 Pauliniset in actibus quam in catholicis epistolis. Quas si alexandrina; et latinse, asiaticaj 
 et byzantinae noniinibus insignire placet, ut non tam quatuor singulas quam duo paria 
 ponamus, multa possunt ex testibus peti et jam sunt petita, quae quam id recte fiat 
 ostendant. Debebimus autem, ut quod sentio breviter dicam, alexandrinam dicere quae 
 inter Judseochristianos orientis celebrabatur, gnomon ut ipsorum apostolorum sermo 
 graecus maxime pendebat a versione LXX interpretum ; latinam porro quae a Latinis 
 adhibebatur, sive latina sive graeca potissimum lingua utebantur ; asiaticam quae potissi- 
 mum Graecis sive per Asiam sive in ipsa patria degebant probabatur; byzantinam denique 
 quae ab ecclesia per byzantinum regnum dilfusa legebatur sensiraque, quo arctiore sensim 
 singulae ecclesiae partes vinculo conjungebantur, ad publicam quandam unitatem perduce- 
 batur. Qua in re per se clarum est qui factum sit ut byzantina exemplaria asiaticam sive 
 Graecorum maxime rationem recijierent ; alexandrina vero et latina quo vinculo conjunctae 
 fuerint, ad ea judicari poterit quae infra de latinis interpretationibus breviter diximus. Jam 
 vero de origine harum classium difficillima quaestio est ; nee enim satis est urgere diversi- 
 tatem terrarum per quas textus propagabatur ; haec enim diversitas nequaquam tanta aut 
 tam Integra cogitari potest ; accedit quod diserte relatum legimus in ipsa antiquitaie 
 alterius terrae codices in alteram transvectos esse, quemadmodum Constantinus Eusebio 
 caesareensi, Constans Athanasio alexandrino praeceperunt ut exemplaria eleganter et accu- 
 rate descripta ad Byzantinos mitterent ; nee denique patres, quorum patriam novimus, 
 talem classium rationem confirmant. Propterea cum diversitate regionum conjuncta poni 
 debebuut certa textum eraendandi studia, etsi quorum fuerint nunquam satis detiniri 
 poterit. Maximi vero momenti illud est, byzantinam quidem recensionem in recentiorum 
 codicum grjecorum ingenti copia conspicuam esse, item latinam in latinis atque per evan- 
 geUa actus epistolas Pauhnas etiam in grseco-latinis documeutis, quamquam et ipsam 
 U8]
 
 § τ.] IX THIS VOLUME. [PROLEGOMETiA. 
 
 It is in accordance with these rules that the text of this volume has 
 been arranged. Every various reading has been judged with reference 
 to external MSS authority and internal probability combined, — and that 
 reading adopted, which on the whole seemed most likely to have stood 
 in the original text. Such judgments are of course open to be ques- 
 tioned, and in many cases the reading will perhaps never be completely 
 agreed on ; but I do not know that this should deter successive editors 
 from using all means in their power to arrive at a decision in each case, 
 and conscientiously discharging their duty by the sacred text ^. 
 
 The subject is one of great and increasing importance : one, which 
 must, I am persuaded, engage the attention of the ordinary student very 
 much more than it has hitherto done. We may reasonably hope to see 
 the day, when every student shall be required to give an account of the 
 sources and rationale of the text which he adopts, and to have a com- 
 petent knowledge of tlie state of the evidence for and against every 
 important various reading. 
 
 As regards the notes and marks used in the text, I have in this 
 volume (as in the 2nd edition of Vol. I.) dropped those symbols 
 by which variation from the received text was expressed in the 
 first edition of my first vol. : as also those indicating divided MSS 
 authority and probable spuriousness. I have only retained the asterisk 
 and brackets in those very few cases where, all things duly weighed, it 
 has been found impossible to decide between two varying readings. The 
 orthography of words in which the MSS vary, has been uniformly 
 regulated by the consent, where such exists, of the most ancient among 
 them. This consent is almost unhroJcen in some points usually 
 neglected : e. g. the uniform insertion, in the inflexion of verbs and 
 datives plural in i, of the final v, before consonants as well as vowels : 
 also of the final s in ούτως. The same applies to the formation of the 
 tenses of λαμβάνω in μφ ^^'^ ΗΦ^ instead of ψ and ψθ,• — λίιμφεται, άια- 
 λημψθήναι, &C. ; — to σνιζητητης and the like; — to εΐ'ατος and ίΐ'εΐ'ίικοντα, 
 
 magna lectionis varietate laborantem, alexandrinam vero et asiaticara uncle inprimis petas 
 pauca documenta superesse, unde illibatam sumas nulla. Nee teraere est quod eum 
 Griesbachio dixerunt, in antiquissimis aliquot testibus nostris, ut in codice alexandrino, 
 alios libros ab aliis paulo diversam textus indolem referre. Quee quum ita sint, sequitur 
 exercenti rem criticara summa opus esse cautione in adhibenda dassium sive recensionum 
 distinctione ; quam ut summam normam aut fundamentura ponere et temerarium etfrustra 
 est. In eo vero omnia quaj cum aliqua probabilitate doceri possunt conveniunt, in textu 
 ad pristinam integritatem revocando primo loco testes habendos esse alexandrinos, qui 
 iidem fere superstitum anti(|uissinii sunt, ultimo byzantinos quippe qui textum ex anti- 
 quioribus classibus multifariam mixtum prae se ferant." 
 
 2 In this part of my work I have found of especial service the critical notices prefixed 
 to each chapter in Meyer's Commentary, and the similar discussions of readings in the 
 text of that of De Wette : and have consulted whatever else I have been able to find on 
 the more important and celebrated varieties of reading. 
 GO]
 
 PROLEOOMEisA.] OF THE VAEIOUS EEADINGS. [ch. t. 
 
 —to Γ£σσερ«\•ο)•Γπ, not τεσσαρ. ,—ίΐηά many others ;— to the spelliDg of 
 proper names, as ^avi^, Καψαριαούμ, &c. ;— to unusual formations of 
 tenses, είπα, ίπεσ^, ήλβα, &c. :— none of which are we at liberty to reduce 
 to the ordinary standards of ortliography, but must reproduce as we find 
 them in the all but universal text of the earliest times \ 
 
 In punctuating, I have been anxious to make the stops, as far as may 
 be, the exponents of the logical structure of the text. I quite agree 
 ■with Laclnnann in ridding the page of most of those numerous un- 
 meanino• commas by which the clauses are festooned off in so many of 
 the recent editions. But he has carried his aversion of commas some- 
 what too far ; and has made unnecessary breaks in the sense, by too 
 frequent adoption of the period, Avhere the colon would have served the 
 purpose better. While I have consulted his punctuation throughout, 
 and my own in the main coincides with it, I have not followed it impli- 
 citly, but have exercised my own judgment on the sentence in each case. 
 
 I have been urged to adopt the plan of numbering the verses in the 
 margin, at tlie beginning of the line where the breaks occur. But those 
 who, like myself, have been long employed in verifying scripture refer- 
 ences, know how fertile a source of error this way of numbering the 
 verses has proved. If for instance, 27 is seen at the head of the line, 
 a word occurring in that line is set down as in ver. 27, though that verse 
 may not begin till the last word of the line. About one-third of the 
 erroneous citations in the modern Lexicons spring from this source. 
 I have therefore retained the numbering as in the first edition of Λ'^οΐ. I., 
 printing the figures somewhat larger. 
 
 An addition has been made to the notice of the leading MSS con- 
 taining the text, which I hope will be found important. It is, that of 
 specifying where the lacunce in those MSS begin and end. Thus in 
 
 p. 1, C πνεύματος implies that C commences with the word 
 
 ■η-νευματυς and continues onward ; in p. 369, .... τεκνωρ Ε implies 
 that E, which has hitherto contained the text, leaves ofi" at τέκνων *. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 OF THE VARIOTJS EEADINGS. 
 
 1. In the first edition of my former volume, many of the various read- 
 ings, which at that time seemed to me of inferior importance, were ex- 
 cluded from notice in the digest. In the present volume (as in the 
 2nd edition of Vol. I.), all these are included. I have made the account 
 
 ' See these treated of in detail in Tischendorf's Prolegomena to his 2nd Leipzig edn., 
 pp. XX. — xxvii. 
 
 * This improvement was suggested in an article on my first vol. in the Edinburgh 
 Review. But I had previously adopted it. 
 
 70]
 
 § III.] OF THE EEFEEENCES. [PEOLEGOME^-A. 
 
 of them as complete as I could, by examination and combination of those 
 already drawn up to our hands by former Editors. 
 
 2. The main foundation of the following digest is that contained in 
 the 2nd Leipzig edition of Tischendorf. AVith this I have combined 
 many notices of the readings of cursive mss, and versions, from iScholz, 
 and readings of the ancient Latin versions from Lachmann. 
 
 3. The reason for the adoption or rejection of any various reading is 
 given in almost every case, in a parenthesis, and in italics. 
 
 4. The abbreviations remain for the most part as in Λ^οΐ. I. edn. 1. 
 Those which are new, either are explained in the following list of ver- 
 sions and Eathers, or will be easily understood without explanation : 
 e.g. vss for versions; if for Fathers; gr-if, lat-iF, gr-lat-ff, &c. : or are 
 given in the note below \ 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 OF THE liEl•ΈIlE^'^C£S. 
 
 1. These are for the most part as in Λ'^οΐ. I. edn. 1, but more copious, 
 and drawn up with a view to illustrate, among other things, the interest- 
 ing questions arising respecting the diction of St. Luke and St. Paul, and 
 St. Peter in the early part of the Acts. 
 
 2. Eor brevity's sake, I have used the letters LP to signify that a 
 word is used only by St. Luke and St. Paul, and Ρ occasionally when 
 it is found in St. Paul only. The other abbreviations and symbols re- 
 main as in Yol. I. 
 
 3. It may be necessary (as I have received complaints on the subject) 
 to repeat a direction given in Vol. I. that, when the references extend 
 heloio the text, they are to be read in single lines across the page. 
 
 ^ (σ) MSS, mss, vss, imply, all MSS, all mss, all vss. 
 
 (/3) The figures, 2, 3 &c. inserted above the line, to the right band, imply a second, third 
 SjC. hand in a ms, or a second, third, ^'c. alternative in a commentator : e. g. B^. ThP. 
 
 (y) The same figures inserted below the line, imply recurrence of the reading 2, 3 &c. 
 times in the author mentioned : e. g. Augj, Origj, BaSg. 
 
 (i) (e sil), implies, e silentio collatorum ,• thus Β (e sil) means, that no collator has 
 stated that Β does not contain the reading. Such notice of course diminishes the value of 
 the testimony, reducing it to mere matter of surmise. 
 
 (f) For shortness, in the enumeration of cursive mss, 72• 77• 79 has been printed 
 72-7-ϋ ;-83. 84. 85. 80 has been printed 83 to (i, &c. 
 
 71]
 
 PEOLEQOMENA.] APPAEATUS CEITICIJS. [ch. yi. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 APPARATUS CRITICUS Κ 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 MANUSCRIPTS OF THE ACTS OP THE APOSTLES (aND CATHOLIC 
 EPISTLES*) BEEEEEED TO IN THIS EDITION. 
 
 1. Manuscripts written in capital {uncial) letters. 
 
 A. The Alexandeine MS— see Prolegg. to Vol. I. ch. vii. § 1. It is 
 
 entire. 
 
 B. The Vatican MS — see as above. It also is entire. 
 
 C. The Codex Epheemi — see as above. It contains the following frag- 
 
 ments : 
 
 from TTj'c, i. 2, to εις την, iv. 3. 
 „ ειπεί' δί, V. 3δ, to /cot ί'εκρωί', Χ. 42. 
 „ ος μαναην, xiii. 1, to εν ειρήνη, xvi. 36. 
 „ λωΐ' αντυυ, XX. 10, to αι θνραι, xxi. 30. 
 „ koi ειττεν, χχϋ. 21, to ττρος τον χιλιαρ., xxiii. 18. 
 „ 7Γΐ2α εχωΐ', xxiv. 15, to απειθης τη, χχνί. 19. 
 „ φης ην αραντες, xxvii. 16, to ουκ ειασεν, xxviii. 4. 
 
 D. The Codex Βεζ.έ— see as above. It is deficient as follows : 
 
 from ττροςελθε, viii. 29, to εφαγον, X. 14. 
 
 „ επιβαντ., xxi. 2, to ιυυίαιας, xxi. 10. 
 
 „ ιερυσολ., Xxi. 17, to -πάντων, xxii. 10. 
 
 „ 01 μέλλοντες, xxii. 29, to end. 
 £. The Codex Laudianus (gra?co-latin : the latin being in the left 
 hand column, the greek in the right hand) in the Bodleian library 
 at Oxford. It is written without accents, in rather clumsy uncial 
 letters, by a Greek scholar, but probably among the Latins. Its 
 place of writing has been imagined to have been Sardinia, from tlie 
 preamble of an edict, which is written at the end : Φλάνιυς 
 ΤΙαγκρατιος συν θεώ ίιποεπάργων Sovt, Έαμ€ΐνίας εήλα ποιώ τα 
 νποτετηγμένα : but this, as Dr. Tregelles remarks, only shews it to 
 have been in that island during the period of the duces. Now the 
 Duces of Sardinia were first constituted by Justinian in 534 
 
 ' For the matter of this chapter, I am indebted to — 1. The prolegomena to Tischen- 
 dorf's 2nd Leipzig edition. — 2. Michaelis's list of MSS in his Introd. to the N. T. vol. ii. 
 part I. — 3. Scholz. Prolegomena, vol. ii. — 4. Wetstein, Prolegg. vol. ii. 
 
 2 For all particulars relating to the Catholic Epistles, see Prolegomena to Vol. IV. 
 72]
 
 § I.] APPAEATrS CRITICTJS. [peolegomexa. 
 
 (Wetst.) : and if, as Micliaelis infers from the writing (see also 
 Marsli's note), the IMS is more ancient than this Dux Sardiniie, 
 its date might be at the earliest the end of the fifth or beginning 
 of the sixth century. But Bp. Marsh (note, as above) has shewn 
 by the writing that it is more recent than the Codex Bezse : which 
 circumstance, if the date now usually assigned to the Codex Bezse 
 be correct (the middle of the sixth century), would bring it down 
 about a century later. It was brought to England from Sardinia, 
 became, it is supposed by "Wetstein, the property of the Venerable 
 Bede, as it, and no other Greek MS, contains the various readings 
 which he has noted in his commentary in the Acts. It was lost 
 sight of for a long time, till Abp. Laud became its possessor, and 
 gave it to the Bodleian library. Michaelis characterizes it as a MS 
 of the utmost importance, and ascribes to it the merit of having 
 decided him against the notion that the grseco-latin MSS have been 
 corrupted from the latin. See Michaelis, Marsh's Ed. vol. ii. pt. 1, 
 pp. 269 — 274; : Home's Introd. vol. ii. p. 119, where there is a fac- 
 simile of the greek and latin of this MS. It was published by 
 Hearne in 1715, but the edn. is very scarce, only 120 copies having 
 been printed. 
 
 E^. In the scholia of a MS of part of the O. T. in the Benedictine 
 library at St. Germain, Wetstein found Acts ix. 24, 25, written by 
 the transcriber of the MS, i. e. in the beginning of the seventh 
 century. To this discovery Tischendorf has added several more 
 passages ; ch. iv. 33, 34 : x. 13. 15 : xxii. 22, and some from the 
 Gospels ; see Prolegg.tovol. i. (2nd edition.) The MS itself is called 
 the Codex Coislinianus 1, from Coislin Bp. of Metz, its earliest 
 known possessor. See Wetstein, IMichaelis, and Tischendorf. 
 
 G. The MS in the Angelican library of Augustinian monks at Bome, 
 formerly the property of Cardinal Passionei. It contains the Acts, 
 be.ginning viii. 10, μις του θεον, — the Catholic Epistles, and the 
 Epistles of Paul to Heb. xiii. 10. " It cannot have been written," 
 says Tischendorf, " before tlie middle of the ninth century." This 
 is the same MS which is noted as J in the epistles of Paul. 
 
 H. " The Codex Mutinensis 196 : of the ninth century. It begins ch. 
 V. 28, και βουλεσθαι : is deficient from nt χ»?ραί, ch. ix. 39, to i^ov, 
 ch. X. 19: from iha, xiii. 36, to τιρητα, xiv. 3. — From κακΐίθιν, 
 xxvii. 4, to the end, is supplied in uncial letters by some hand 
 of about the eleventh century. The other omissions have been 
 supplied by a more recent hand, in the fifteenth or sixteenth 
 century." It was collated by Scholz, and since then more com- 
 pletely by Tischendorf. 
 2. Manuscripts laritten in small (cursive) letters. Eor the use and 
 
 importance of these, see remarks in the previous chapter. 
 73]
 
 PROLEGOMENA.] MANUSCEIPTS EEFEEEED TO. 
 
 [CH. TI. 
 
 The following Table exhibits, in column (1), the number by which the 
 nis is designated in the Acts and Catliolic Epp. : (2), (3), and (4), the 
 corresponding number by which the same ms is known in the Gospels, 
 Epp. of Paul, and Apocalypse respectively: (5), supposed age of the 
 Codex : (6), its name. Any incidental remarks are thrown into the 
 foot notes. 
 
 Acts 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 and 
 Cath. 
 
 Gospp. 
 
 Epp. 
 Paul. 
 
 Apoc. 
 
 Cent. 
 
 Name of Codex. 
 
 Epp. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 _ 
 
 X. 
 
 Basileensis Β vi. 27*. 
 
 2 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 ρ 
 
 Basileensis Β ix. ult. 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 XII. 
 
 Corsendoncensis. 
 
 4 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 XV. 
 
 Basileensis Β χ. 20. 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 — 
 
 XII. 
 
 Regius 106. 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Regius 112. 
 
 7 
 
 — 
 
 9 
 
 — 
 
 X. 
 
 Regius (2870) 102. 
 
 8 
 
 — 
 
 10 
 
 — 
 
 ? 
 
 Stephani in. 
 
 9 
 
 . — 
 
 11 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Steph, ly'. now Cantabr. Kk. vi. 4. 
 
 10 
 
 — 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 
 X. 
 
 Steph. IS (Regius 237). 
 
 11 
 
 — 
 
 140 
 
 — 
 
 X. 
 
 Regius (2872) 103. 
 
 12 
 
 — 
 
 16 
 
 4 
 
 X.? 
 
 Regius (18ί!ϋ) 219. 
 
 13 
 
 33 
 
 17 
 
 — 
 
 XI.? 
 
 Regius (1«7I) 14 t• 
 
 14 
 
 35 
 
 18 
 
 17 
 
 XI. 
 
 Coislinianus 199. 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 XI. 
 
 Coislinianus 25. 
 
 16 
 
 — 
 
 19 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Coislinianus 26. 
 
 17 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 19 
 
 XI. 
 
 Coislinianus 205. 
 
 18 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 18 
 
 XIIT. 
 
 Coislinianus 202. 
 
 19 
 
 38 
 
 — 
 
 23 
 
 XIV. .' 
 
 Coislinianus 200. 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 25 
 
 — 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Westmonasteriensis 935. 
 
 21 
 
 — 
 
 26 
 
 — 
 
 XII. 
 
 Cantabr. Dd. xi. 90. 
 
 22 
 
 109 
 
 75 
 
 — 
 
 1326 
 
 Brit. Mus. 5116 (Meadii 3). 
 
 23 
 
 — 
 
 28 
 
 6 
 
 XII. .> 
 
 Baroceianus 3. 
 
 24 
 
 — 
 
 29 
 
 — 
 
 XI..' 
 
 Cantabr. 2. 
 
 25 
 
 — 
 
 31 
 
 7 
 
 1087 
 
 Harleianus 5537 (Covellianus 2). 
 
 26 
 
 — 
 
 32 
 
 — 
 
 XII. 
 
 Harl. 5557 (Covell. 3). 
 
 27 
 
 — 
 
 33 
 
 — 
 
 XV. 
 
 Harl. 5620 (Covell. 4). 
 
 28 
 
 — 
 
 34 
 
 8 
 
 XII. 
 
 Harl. 5778 (Cov. Sinaiticus). 
 
 29 
 
 — 
 
 35 
 
 — 
 
 XI.? 
 
 Genevensis 20. 
 
 30 
 
 — 
 
 36 
 
 9 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Bodleianus 131 (Huntingtonianus 1). 
 
 31 
 
 69 
 
 37 
 
 14 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Leicestrensis %. 
 
 32 
 
 51 
 
 38 
 
 — 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Bodl. Laudianus (C. 715 63). 
 
 33 
 
 — 
 
 39 
 
 
 
 XI. 
 
 Lincolniensis (Oxf.). 
 
 34 
 
 61 
 
 40 
 
 — 
 
 XVI. ? 
 
 Montfortianus (Dubl.). 
 
 35 
 
 57 
 
 41 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Magdalensis 1 (Oxf.). 
 
 36 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Nov. Coll. Oxon. 2. 
 
 37 
 
 — 
 
 43 
 
 — 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Nov. Coll. Oxon. 1. 
 
 38 
 
 — 
 
 44 
 
 — 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Petavianus 1 (or Lugd. Bat. 77)• 
 
 39 
 
 — 
 
 45 
 
 11 
 
 ρ 
 
 Petavianus 2. 
 
 40 
 
 — 
 
 46 
 
 12 
 
 XI. 
 
 (Pet. 3) Alexandrino-vaticanus 179. 
 
 • A most valuable MS, preferable to many of the later uncials. See Tregelles (Home, 
 vol. iv.), p. 208 f. 
 
 t " Perhaps the most important of the biblical MSS in cursive letters eytent." — 
 Tregelles ubi supra. 
 
 + " Of far higher value than not only the mass of the recent cursive copies, but also 
 than the greater part of the later uncials."— Tregelles, ibid. 
 74]
 
 §ΐ•] 
 
 MANTJSCEIPTS EEFEREED TO. [peolegomena. 
 
 Acts 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 and 
 Cath. 
 
 Gospp. 
 
 Epp. 
 Paul. 
 
 Apoc. 
 
 Cent. 
 
 Name of Codex. 
 
 
 Epp. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 41 
 
 175 
 
 194 
 
 20 
 
 XII. 
 
 Vaticanus 2080 (Basil. 119). 
 
 
 42 
 
 — 
 
 48 
 
 13 
 
 XL 
 
 Biblioth. Francof. (on the Oder). (Seidelianus 
 
 ) 
 
 43 
 
 76 
 
 49 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Caesareus Vindobonensis L 29. N. 114. 
 
 
 45 
 
 
 52 
 
 ( ; 
 
 XV. 
 
 Uffenbacliianus 2. 
 
 
 46 
 
 — 
 
 55 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 ri293;) 
 
 Monacensis 375 (Augustanus 6). 
 
 
 47 
 
 00 
 
 14 
 
 — 
 
 < copied ) 
 
 Ixvi. j 
 
 Joannis Fabri. 
 
 
 48 
 
 105 
 
 24 
 
 — 
 
 XII. 
 
 Ebnerianus (Bodl). 
 
 
 49 
 
 92 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 ρ 
 
 Andreae Feschii 1. 
 
 
 ^[.0 
 
 — 
 
 8 
 
 — 
 
 ? 
 
 Stephani ζ'. 
 
 
 51 
 
 — 
 
 1-34 
 
 52 
 
 XII. 
 
 Regius (2248) 56. 
 
 
 52 
 
 — 
 
 50 
 
 — • 
 
 _> 
 
 Rhodiensis. 
 
 
 53 
 
 — 
 
 30 
 
 — 
 
 XII. 
 
 Cantabr. 3 (Emm. Coll.). 
 
 
 54 
 
 43 
 
 129 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Graecus 4 (Libr. Arsenal. Paris). 
 
 
 t55 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 ρ 
 
 (See note.) 
 
 
 56 
 
 — 
 
 227 
 
 — 
 
 ρ 
 
 Clarkii 4 in Bodl, 
 
 
 57 
 
 234 
 
 72 
 
 — 
 
 1278 
 
 Havniensis 1. 
 
 
 58 
 
 — 
 
 224 
 
 — 
 
 ρ 
 
 Clai-kii 9 in Bodl. 
 
 
 59 
 
 — 
 
 62 
 
 — 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Harleianus 5588. 
 
 
 60 
 
 — 
 
 63 
 
 29 
 
 1407 
 
 Harl. 5613. 
 
 
 61 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 ρ 
 
 Margl notes in a copy of Mill in Bodl. 
 
 
 62 
 
 — 
 
 65 
 
 — 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Regius 60. 
 
 
 63 
 
 — 
 
 68 
 
 — 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Caesareus Vindobonensis L 35. 
 
 
 64 
 
 — 
 
 69 
 
 — 
 
 XII. 
 
 Caes-Vind. L 36. Ν 303. 
 
 
 65 
 
 218 
 
 57 
 
 33 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Caes-Vind. 23 L ] . 
 
 
 66 
 
 — 
 
 67 
 
 34 
 
 XII. 
 
 Cffis-Vind. L 34. Ν 302. 
 
 
 67 
 
 — 
 
 70 
 
 — 
 
 1331 
 
 Caes-Vind. L 37- Ν 221. 
 
 
 68 
 
 — 
 
 73 
 
 — 
 
 XII. 
 
 Upsalensis. 
 
 
 69 
 
 — 
 
 74 
 
 30 
 
 ίΧΙΙΙ.& 
 ι XIV. 
 
 ' Guelpherbytanus xvi. 7• 
 
 
 70 
 
 131 
 
 77 
 
 66 
 
 XI. 
 
 Vaticanus 360. 
 
 
 71 
 
 133 
 
 78 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Vaticanus 363. 
 
 
 72 
 
 — 
 
 79 
 
 37 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Vaticanus 366. 
 
 
 73 
 
 — 
 
 80 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Vaticanus 367- 
 
 
 74 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 XII. 
 
 Vaticanus 760. 
 
 
 75 
 
 141 
 
 86 
 
 40 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Vaticanus 1160. 
 
 
 76 
 
 142 
 
 87 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Vaticanus 1210. 
 
 
 77 
 
 149 
 
 88 
 
 25 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Palatino-vaticanus 171• 
 
 
 c78 
 
 — 
 
 89 
 
 — 
 
 XII. 
 
 Alexandrino-vaticanus 29. 
 
 
 79 
 
 — 
 
 90 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Urbino-vaticanus 3. 
 
 
 80 
 
 — 
 
 91 
 
 42 
 
 XII. 
 
 Pio vaticanus 50. 
 
 
 81 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Barberinus 377. 
 
 
 82 
 
 180 
 
 92 
 
 44 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Propaganda 250. 
 
 
 83 
 
 — 
 
 93 
 
 — 
 
 χ. 
 
 Borbonico-Neapolitanus (225) 1. Β 12. 
 
 
 84 
 
 — 
 
 94 
 
 — 
 
 χ. 
 
 Laurentianus iv. 1. 
 
 
 85 
 
 — 
 
 95 
 
 — 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Laurentianus iv. 5. 
 
 
 86 
 
 — 
 
 96 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Laurentianus iv. 20. 
 
 
 87 
 
 — 
 
 !7 
 
 — 
 
 χ. 
 
 Laurentianus iv. 29. 
 
 
 88 
 
 — 
 
 9fi 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Laurentianus iv. 31. 
 
 
 89 
 
 — 
 
 99 
 
 45 
 
 1093 
 
 Laurentianus iv, 32. 
 
 
 90 
 
 197 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Laurentianus viii. 14. 
 
 
 91 
 
 201 
 
 104 
 
 — 
 
 1359 
 
 701 in Libr. of Friars of S. Mark at Florence. 
 
 
 92 
 
 204 
 
 105 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Bononiensis 640. 
 
 
 '■^ Its situation is now unknown : cited five times only in Acts and Cath. Epp. 
 
 b A duplicate of the Ep. Jude contained in cod. 47. 
 
 t: Contains of Epp. Paul, oidy Rom., Corr. (deft. 2 Cor. xi. 15 to xii. 1), and Eph. i. 1—9. 
 
 75]
 
 PROLEGOMENA.] APPAEATTJS CRITICIJS. 
 
 [CH. YI. 
 
 Acis 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 :.nd 
 Cath. 
 
 Gospp. 
 
 Epp. 
 Paul. 
 
 Apoc. 
 
 Cent. 
 
 Name of Codex. 
 
 Epp. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 93 
 
 205 
 
 106 
 
 88 
 
 XV. 
 
 S. RIarc. Venet. 5. 
 
 94 
 
 206 
 
 107 
 
 — 
 
 XV. 
 
 S. INIarc. Venet. 6. 
 
 95 
 
 209 
 
 108 
 
 46 
 
 XIV.? 
 
 Venet. 10. 
 
 'lye 
 
 
 
 109 
 
 
 
 XI. 
 
 Venet. 11. 
 
 ^97 
 
 
 
 241 
 
 — 
 
 XII. 
 
 Guelpherbytanus Gudianus. 
 
 '98 
 
 
 
 113 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Mosquensis Mt a. 
 
 99 
 
 
 
 114 
 
 — 
 
 1445 
 
 Mosquensis c (5). 
 
 100 
 
 
 
 115 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Mosquensis d (.334). 
 
 101 
 
 
 
 116 
 
 — 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Mosquensis f (333). 
 
 Β 102 
 
 
 
 117 
 
 — 
 
 IX. 
 
 Mosquensis g (98). 
 
 103 
 
 
 
 118 
 
 — 
 
 XII. 
 
 Mosquensis h (193). 
 
 104 
 
 241 
 
 120 
 
 47 
 
 XI. 
 
 (Matthsei k) Dresdensis. 
 
 105 
 
 242 
 
 121 
 
 43 
 
 XII. 
 
 Matt. 1. Mosq. 380. 
 
 lOG 
 
 
 
 122 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Matt. m. Mosq. 328. 
 
 107 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 ρ 
 
 Dresdensis 252. Mtt. 19. 
 
 108 
 
 226 
 
 228 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Escurialensis χ. iv. 17• 
 
 109 
 
 228 
 
 229 
 
 — 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Escurialensis χ. iv. 12. 
 
 hllO 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 (See note.) 
 
 111 
 
 440 
 
 221 
 
 — 
 
 ρ 
 
 Cantabr. Mm. 6. 9. 
 
 ηΐ2 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 (See note.) 
 
 113 
 
 18 
 
 132 
 
 51 
 
 1364 
 
 Regius 189 (437). 
 
 114 
 
 — 
 
 134 
 
 — 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Regius 57 (1253). 
 
 115 
 
 — 
 
 135 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 Regius 58 (2398). 
 
 IIG 
 
 — 
 
 136 
 
 53 
 
 XVI. 
 
 Regius 59. 
 
 117 
 
 263 
 
 137 
 
 — 
 
 ? 
 
 Regius 61. 
 
 118 
 
 — 
 
 138 
 
 55 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Regius 101 (2869). 
 
 119 
 
 — 
 
 139 
 
 56 
 
 / χ. Apoc 
 ι XIII. 
 
 1 Regius 102 A. 
 
 120 
 
 
 
 141 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Regius 103 A. 
 
 121 
 
 — 
 
 142 
 
 — 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Regius 104. 
 
 kl22 
 
 — 
 
 143 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Regius 105. 
 
 123 
 
 
 
 144 
 
 — 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Regius 106. 
 
 124 
 
 — 
 
 149 
 
 57 
 
 XVI. 
 
 Regius 124. 
 
 125 
 
 — 
 
 150 
 
 — 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Regius 125. 
 
 1126 
 
 
 
 153 
 
 — 
 
 χ. 
 
 Regius 216. 
 
 127 
 
 — 
 
 154 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Regius 217. 
 
 128 
 
 — 
 
 155 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Regius 218. 
 
 129 
 
 — 
 
 156 
 
 — 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Regius 220. 
 
 130 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 XII. 
 
 Regius 221. 
 
 131 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 XII. 
 
 Regius 223. 
 
 132 
 
 330 
 
 131 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Coislinianus 196. 
 
 133 
 
 
 
 166 
 
 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Tauvinensis 285. 
 
 134 
 
 
 
 167 
 
 — 
 
 XL 
 
 Taurinensis 315 (19). 
 
 135 
 
 339 
 
 170 
 
 83 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Taurinensis 302. 
 
 d Deficient Acts i. 1 — 12; xxv. 21 to xxvi. 18, and Ep. to Philemon. 
 
 e Deft. Acts xvi. 39 to xviii. 18. 
 
 f Contains lessons from the Acts with var. readd. and schoU : the text of the Epp. with 
 do. : lessons for the whole year from Acts and Epp. 
 
 g Deft. Rom. x. 18 to end, 1 Cor. i. 1 to vi. 13, and viii. 7—12. 
 
 h This is in fact an edition of the LXX and N. T. printed at Basel in 1545. There 
 are ms. notes in the margin. 
 
 ' Identical with cod. 9 above : distinguished from it by a mistake of Scholz. 
 
 ^ Contains only fragments. 
 
 1 Contains prologues and scholia of various authors, some of them written in uncial 
 characters. 
 
 76]
 
 ΐ•] 
 
 MANUSCRIPTS EEFEREED TO. [pkoleoomeka. 
 
 Gospp. 
 
 18a 
 
 3G2 
 Scholz. 
 but? 
 303 
 305 
 307 
 
 308 
 380 
 442 
 444 
 
 Epp. 
 Paul. 
 
 390 
 
 3!J3 
 
 394 
 
 421 
 122 
 
 109 
 170 
 173 
 174 
 215 
 239 
 178 
 
 180 
 181 
 182 
 183 
 184 
 
 230 
 199 
 223 
 240 
 187 
 188 
 190 
 191 
 
 193 
 
 198 
 
 200 
 201 
 
 203 
 
 100 
 185 
 205 
 200 
 180 
 
 211 
 212 
 210 
 218 
 219 
 242 
 138 
 
 Apoc. 
 
 74 
 
 84 
 71 
 
 24 
 09 
 
 05 
 22 
 
 87 
 82 
 
 XII. 
 XL 
 XIV. 
 14.34 
 XI-XIII. 
 XII. 
 XII. 
 
 XIII. 
 Xlll. 
 1332 
 XII. 
 984 
 XIII, 
 XV. 
 XV. 
 ρ 
 
 XV. 
 XV. 
 XII. 
 1073 
 XIT. 
 XI. 
 XI. 
 XI. 
 fXlU-\ 
 
 I XIV. j 
 
 XV. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 1252 
 
 XIV. 
 
 XIII. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 1344 
 
 1330 
 
 XVI. 1 
 
 XVI. j 
 
 XI. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 XII. 
 
 XII. 
 
 XII. 
 
 XI. 
 
 XI. 
 
 Name of Codex. 
 
 Taurinensis 328 (1). 
 Ambrosianus 97. 
 Ambrosianus 103. 
 Ambrosianus 104. 
 Venetus 540. 
 Laurentianus vi. 27. 
 Mutinensis 243. 
 
 Laurentianus vi. 5. 
 
 Laurentianus vi. 13. 
 Laurentianus vi. 30. 
 Laurentianus 2708. 
 Laurentianus iv. 30. 
 Laurentianus 2574. 
 Laurentianus 170. 
 Richardianus 84. 
 Vaticano-Ottobianus 00. 
 Cantabr. ψ. 2537-8. 
 Harleianus 5790. 
 Vaticanus 1270. 
 Vaticanus 1430. 
 Vaticanus 1050. 
 Vaticanus 1714. 
 Vaticanus I7OI. 
 Vaticanus 1908. 
 Vaticanus 2002. 
 
 Vatic.-Ottobianus 258. 
 
 Vatic. Ottobianus 298. 
 Vatic.-Ottobianus 325. 
 Vatic.-Ottobianus 381. 
 Vatic.-Ottobianus 417• 
 Vallicellianus B. 80. 
 Vallicellianus E. 22. 
 Vallicellianus F. 1 3. 
 Gbigiauus R. v. 29. 
 Vallicellianus F. I7. 
 
 Collegii Romani. 
 
 Bil)liotli. Borbon-Neapol. 
 
 Neapol. 1. c. 20. 
 
 Messanensis II. 
 
 Syracusanus. 
 
 Lugd.-Bat. (meermannianus 110). 
 
 Meermannianus 118. 
 
 Regius Monacensis 211. 
 
 ™ Contains prologues and an index of lessons : was purchased in Corcyra. 
 
 " Agrees almost entirely in the Acts with 90 above. 
 
 ο Contain Cath. Epp. only. 
 
 I' Contains only fragments, enumerated in Scholz and Home. 
 
 η Contains Acts, James, 1 Peter, with scholl. Deft. Acts i. 1 — 29 and vi. 14 to vii. 11. 
 
 ■■ Deficient Acts i. 1 to xxviii. 19, Ileb. xi. 1 to end. 
 
 8 For particulars respecting this ms, and 34 above, see Prolcgg. Vol. III. 
 
 ' Agrees almost verbatim with the rec. text (Scholz). 
 
 77]
 
 PEOLEGOMEKA.] APPAEATUS CRITICUS. 
 
 [CIT. Λ'Τ. 
 
 Acts . 
 
 
 
 
 τ 
 
 
 and 
 Cath. 
 
 Gospp. 
 
 Epp. 
 Paul. 
 
 Apoc. 
 
 Cent. 
 
 Name of Codex. 
 
 Epp. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 180 
 
 431 
 
 238 
 
 
 
 XII. 
 
 Molslieimcnsis. 
 
 181 
 
 400 
 
 220 
 
 
 
 XV. 
 
 Beroliiiensis. 
 
 182 
 
 
 243 
 
 
 
 XII. 
 
 Bibliotli. monast. Patmi. 
 
 183 
 
 
 
 231 
 
 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Bililiotli. Gr. Hierosol. 
 
 184 
 
 
 
 232 
 
 «5 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Biblioth. Gr. Hierosol. 
 
 185 
 
 
 
 233 
 
 
 
 XI. 
 
 Bibliotli. monast. 8t. Sabae 1. 
 
 18'> 
 
 456 
 
 234 
 
 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Bibliotb. monast. St. Sabse 2. 
 
 187 
 
 4(i2 
 
 235 
 
 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Biblioth. monast. St. Sabse 10. 
 
 188 
 
 
 
 23<; 
 
 
 
 XII. 
 
 Biblioth. monast. St. Sabte 15. 
 
 18» 
 
 405 
 
 237 
 
 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Biblioth. monast. St. Sabse 20. 
 
 υ 190 
 
 
 244 
 
 27 
 
 XI. 
 
 Oxon. JEd. Chr. Wakianus 2. 
 
 I!H 
 
 
 
 245 
 
 
 XII. 
 
 Oxon. JFA. Chr. Wakianus 3. 
 
 192 
 
 — 
 
 240 
 
 — 
 
 XI. 
 
 Oxon. ^d. Chr. Wakianus 4*. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 Manuscripts of the Epistles op Paul referred to in this edition. 
 
 1. Manuscripts written in capital (uncial) letters. 
 
 A. The Alexandrine MS. See Prolegg. to Vol. I. chap. vii. § 1. It is 
 
 deficient from επισπυσα 2 Cor. iv. 13 to εζ εμού, 2 Cor. xii. 6. 
 
 B. The Vatican MS. See as above. It is deficient from put την 
 
 συνείδηση•, Heb. ix. 14, to the end of the Ep., and supplied by a 
 later hand (noted b in the var. readings). It does not contain the 
 Epistles to Timothy, Titus, and Philemon. 
 
 C. The Codex Epheemi. See as above. It contains the following 
 
 fragments : 
 
 Rom. i. 3, του "γενομένου . . . to σε άγει' κα, ii. v. 
 
 ill. 21, και των προψητων ... to aiwvctg' ημην, ix. 5. 
 Χ. 15, μη αποσταΧωσιν . . . to ούτοι νυν ηττει, XI. 31. 
 
 " Does not contain the Acts, nor James and I Pet. 
 
 * I extract from Dr. Tregelles's fourth vol. of " Home's Introduction" the following 
 notice : 
 
 "A ms obtained by Tischendorf (in Egj'pt apparently) in 1853, containing the Acts, 
 deserves to be mentioned amongst the most valuable of the cursive documents. It is on 
 vellum of a small quarto size, and is now defective from ch. v. 8 — vii. 17, and from 
 xvii. 28 — xxiii. 9. A subscription to the MS states that it was written by John the 
 monk, in the year answering to a.d. 1054. The agreement of this ms with the most 
 ancient and authoritative codices is most remarkable : and where such copies as A, B, 
 and C, differ from one another, i/iis ms far more often than not contains the reading 
 which has the highest claim on the attention of a critical editor. Its excellence thus can 
 hardly be estimated too highly, and it may be regarded as undoubtedly a copy of some 
 very ancient and authoritative uncial MS : it diflers sufficiently from the other copies 
 with which it must be classed, to shew that it cannot be regarded as a mere duplicate of 
 either of them." It is now in the British Museum (No. 20,003). 
 
 78]
 
 § II.] MANUSCEIPTS EEFEEEED TO. [prolegomena. 
 
 Eom. xiii. 10, ovy νομού ... to end. 
 
 1 Cor. i. 3, χάρις ... to επισπασβω, vii. 18. 
 
 ix. 6, γαζεσβαι ... to eire γλωσσοι, xiii. 8. 
 XV. 40, μει• η τωΐ' ... to end. 
 
 2 Cor. i. 2, και ειοηιη ... to καιθαιοεσιν νμωι\ Χ. 8. 
 Gal. i. 21, επειταί ... to end. 
 
 Eph. ii. 18, 01 αμφότεροι ... to εν α-γαττη, iv. 16. 
 
 Phil. i. 22, ρησομε ου γνωρίζω . . . to ψυΧης Ιοεηα, in. 5. 
 
 Col. i. 2, χάρις ... to end. 
 
 1 Thess. i. 2, ευχάριστου μεν . . . to εγενηθητε, ii. 8. 
 
 Heb. ii. 4, μερισμοις . . . to άκακος, vii. 26. 
 
 ix. 15, εστίν' όπως ... to παροξυσμοί' αγα, χ. 24. 
 
 xii. 16, μητις πόρνος ... to end. 
 
 1 Tim. iii. 9, piov της πίστεως ... to μαρτύρων, V. 19. 
 
 2 Tim. i. 1, χάριν εχω ... to end. 
 Tit. i. 1, προ χρονών ... to end. 
 Philem. 1, χηρις νμιν ... to end. 
 
 D. The Codex Clakomonxanus in the Eoyal library at Paris, No. 107 : 
 
 a grseco-latin MS, of, as Tisch. believes, the sixth century. It 
 contains all the Epp. of Paul, except Eom. i. 1 πανλος .... to 
 αγαπητοις Θεού, ver. 7. Another hand, but an ancient one, has 
 supplied 1 Cor. xiv. 13 Sio ο λάλων ... to σημειον εισιν, ver. 22"'. 
 Tischendorf remarks : " It is very difficult to distinguish the cor- 
 rectors who have at different times touched this codex. The 
 second corrector (J)\ about the eighth century), whom I have 
 oftenest cited, found most of the passages which he touched, 
 already corrected ; hence W denotes generally two persons, of 
 whom the former (C^) seldom differs from the latter (D'') so that 
 the difference can be noted. D^ touched a few places, and cor- 
 rectors subsequent to D^ about as many. Sometimes when it is 
 hard to say which has corrected, I liave mai-ked it D""■^" This 
 codex has been lately published by Tischendorf *. "It is one of 
 the most valuable MSS extant : none of the texts published by 
 Tischendorf is so important, with the single exception of the pa- 
 limpsest Codex Ephrsemi." — Tregelles. Home's Introd. iv. p. 193. 
 
 E. The Codex SAisroEEMANEJisis, now Petropolitanus (liaving been 
 
 rescued from the fire of the abbey of St. Germain near Paris and 
 taken to St. Petersburg) appears to be only a copy, and that a faulty 
 one, of the preceding Codex Claroraontanus, with its occasional cor- 
 rections. It abounds with mistakes, and has some monstrous read- 
 
 ^ I have not thought it necessary to note this in the digest. 
 
 ■• It was once erroneously sujiposed (by Mill) to be a continuation of D of the Gospels 
 and Acts (the Code.Y Βοζίε). But the form of the MS, the orthograi)hy, and nature of 
 the vellum, are all different. 
 
 79]
 
 PEOLEGOMENA.] APPAEATUS CEITICTJS. [ch. ντ. 
 
 ings made up of the various corrections of D : Tischendorf instances 
 ^ικαιωσιιην, Eom. iv. 25 : μετά τανειτη τοις ^ωε)Βεκα, 1 Cor. XV. 5 : 
 νίΓίζομειοθεατριζομεΐΌΐ, Heb. Χ. 33. Its age is quite in uncertainty 
 (" probably not older than the ninth or tenth century." Tregelles). 
 It is deficient 
 from Eom. viii. 21, του θεού, to κατά, ver. 33. 
 ,, xi. 25, ει ycip, to πληρωμή, ver. 25. 
 
 „ 1 Tim. i. 1, τταυλος, to και μη (μο ?), vi. 15. 
 „ Heb. xii. 8, πάντες, to end. 
 P. The Codex Augiensis, now in the library of Trinity College, Cam- 
 bridge. It is a grseco-latin MS, made in Switzerland, probably in the 
 latter half of the iiinth century (Tregelles thinks, the eiglith). It once 
 belonged to Bentley, who collated it, but not accurately : it had 
 previously been seen and very negligently collated by AVetstein in 
 his youth. Eecently Tischendorf has made a complete collation. 
 It is deficient in the greek 
 
 from Eom. i. 1, παυλος, to ii' τω lo . . , iii. 19. 
 „ 1 Cor. iii. 8, ο ψντενων, to του θεού, ver. 16. 
 „ vi. 7, η^η μεν, to ^νιαμ. αυτού, ver. 14. 
 
 „ Col. ii. 1, και όσοι, to στυιγ^εια τον, ver. 8. 
 „ Philem. 21, νεποιθως, to end. 
 
 „ The Epistle to the Hebrews (it is extant in the latin). 
 G. The Codex Boeii>'Eriakus, also a grjeco-latin MS, now in the 
 Eoyal library at Dresden. This MS, which was also written in 
 Switzerland and probably in the ninth century, has singular affinity 
 with the Codex Augieusis, without being a copy of it. The lacuna) 
 noticed above in that codex (except the first), also are found in 
 this : and besides, 
 
 Eom. i. 1, αψωρισμενος, to πίστεως, ver. 5. 
 
 ii. IG, τα κρυπτά, to νημου ης, \er. 25. 
 The greek text, with the interlinear ancient latin version, was pub- 
 lished by Matthiei in 1791. " The general description of the Codex 
 Sangallensis (Λ of the Gospels, see Vol. I. Prolegg. p. 89) applies 
 equally to this MS, to which it was once joined : and whatever 
 shews the history of the one will apply equally to that of the other." 
 Tregelles, ib. 
 Π. The Codex Coisltnianus No. 202 in the Eoyal library at Paris, 
 apparently (Tisch.) of the sixth century. It once contained 14 
 leaves, but, as is noted in the codex itself, — " post incendium libro- 
 rum impressorum et subitaneara translationem manuscriptorum 
 non inventa sunt nisi xii folia." The two missing leaves are in the 
 Imperial library at St. Petersburg, and contain 
 Gal. i. 4, ημών, to πείθω, ver. 10. 
 
 ii. 9, και βαρν., to aXijflttar, ver. 14. 
 80]
 
 §"•] 
 
 MANUSCEIPTS EEFEEEED TO. [pkoleoomena. 
 
 The remaining fragments are, 
 
 1 Cor. X. 22, εσμεν, to η ελευθέρια, ver. 29. 
 
 xi. 9, ανηρ, to Γου θευν, ver. 16. 
 1 Tim. iii. 7, ha τε, to ey -χριστώ ιησου, ver. 13. 
 Tit. i. 1, τΓουλου αποστ. 
 
 επιστ. πρ. τιτον, ττανΧος, to τον σωτη, ver. 3. 
 1. 15, ατηστοις uvhi', to αγαθας, ϋ. 5. 
 
 iii. 13, ζησαν, to end. 
 
 Heb. ii. 11, ^t ην αιτιαν, to σπέρματος αβρααμ, ver. 16. 
 iii. 13, αχρις ου, to yu»; είσε, ver. 18. 
 iv. 12, ζων γαρ, to ασθείίαις ημών, ver. 15. 
 
 It was edited by Montfaucon, and accurately transcribed by 
 Tischendorf. 
 Γ*. See this MS described in § 1 of this cliap. It contains the following 
 fragments, apparently written in the seventh century .• 
 
 1 Cor. vii. 39 : xi. 29. 
 
 2 Cor. iii. 13 : ix. 7 : xi. 33. 
 Gal. iv. 21, 22. 
 
 Col. ii. 16, 17. 
 Heb. X. 26. 
 J. The Codex Akgeltcus Eomanus, the same as G of the Acts, where 
 see it described : of the ninth century. It is deficient 
 from Heb. xiii. 10, ουκ εχουσιν, to end. 
 K. The Codex AIosquensis, the same as J of the Catholic Epistles. 
 Probably of the ninth century. It is deficient 
 
 from Eom. x. 18, ολλα λέγω ... to και ταντην και, 1 Cor. vi. 13. 
 ,, 1 Cor. viii. 7, τηες ce . . . to απεθανεν, ver. 11. 
 L. An ancient fragment in uncial letters which has been used to bind 
 up a MS of Gregory Nazianzen in the year 975, containing Heb. 
 x. 1 — 7, 32 — 38, with some gaps. Cited by Tisch. from the com- 
 mentaries of Mattha)i. 
 2. Manuscripts written in small {cursive) letters. 
 
 N.B, Those which have been enumerated in the preceding list are 
 not here noticed again. 
 
 Epp. 
 Paul. 
 
 7 
 3 
 5 
 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 42 
 
 47 
 
 Century. 
 
 X. 
 
 XI. 
 
 XI. XIV. 
 
 .' (latf) 
 ■> 
 
 XI.oiXII 
 
 Vol. n.— 
 
 Name of Codex. 
 
 Basileensis Β vi. 17 (deft, from Heb. xii. 18). 
 
 Readings of Greek MStS cited by J. Faber in liisCommcTit. Paris ITj! 2. 
 
 Codex Amandi, cited by Erasmus. Nothing is known of it. 
 
 Coislinianus 27- 
 
 Coisliiiianus 28. 
 
 Cantabrigiensis Ff. 1. 30 (deft. Rom. and Con•.). 
 
 Coll. Emm. Cant. 1. 2. .33. 
 
 Magdalc'iisis 2 (i-ont. only llom. and Corr.). 
 
 Bodleian u^ lloe Ki. 
 
 81] f
 
 moLEGOMEXA] APPAKATUS CEITICFS. 
 
 [en. YI. 
 
 Epp. 
 Paul. 
 
 53 
 54 
 5(; 
 
 58 
 59 
 60 
 
 64 
 
 66 
 
 71 
 
 100 
 
 Century. 
 
 X. 
 
 xir. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 XII. 
 XI. 
 
 X. or XI. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 Name of Codex. 
 
 XII. 
 
 76 
 
 XIII 
 
 81 
 
 XII. 
 
 82 
 
 XII. 
 
 83 
 
 XI. 
 
 84 
 
 Xtl. 
 
 85 
 
 XIII 
 
 XII. 
 
 Uffenbachianus 2 (cont. Heb. i. 1— iv. 3; xii. 20 -xiii. 25)*. 
 
 Monacensis 412 (cont. Rom. vii. 7 — xvi. 24). 
 
 A co])y in the hand of Zwingli of the Epp. of Paul, from Erasmus's 
 
 1st edition. 
 Vaticanus 16.) (formerly Cryptoferratensis). 
 Coislinianus 204 (formerly 143). 
 
 Certain MSS mentioned in the " Correctorium bibliorum latino- 
 rum." 
 Two fragments folded into the Codex Harl. 5fil3, contg 1 Cor. xv. 
 
 52 — 2 Cor. i. 15, and 2 Cor. x. 13 — xii. 5. They once appa- 
 rently formed a part of 53 *. 
 A transcript of Erasmus's 1st edit., with various readings in the 
 
 margin. Harl. 5552. 
 Csesareus (Forlosiae 19 or Kollarii 10). cont. Paul Epp. exc. those 
 
 to Philem and Titus. 
 Biblioth. Paulinse Lips. (cont. Rom., 1 Cor., Gal., Eph.). 
 Vaticanus 761. 
 Λ'^aticanus 762. 
 
 Λ^aticanus 765. • 
 
 \'aticanus 766. 
 (Apoc. 39) Vaticanus 1136. cont. Apoc. (iii. 8 to end) and most of 
 
 Epp. Paul. 
 Laurentianus x. 4. Epp. Paul, with comm. and schoU. added in 
 
 cent. xiv. 
 Laurentianus x. 6. Epp. with comm. 
 Laurentianus x. 7• Epp. with comm. 
 Laurentianus x. 19. Epp• with catena, &c. 
 A'enetianus 33. Epp. with catena. 
 Venetianus 34. Epp. with comm. and prolegg. 
 Venet. 35. Epji. with comm. begins 2 Cor. i. 20 and is deft. 1 TLess. 
 
 iv. 13—2 Thess ii. 14. Heb. x. 25 to end. 
 Mosquensis cont. Corr. with Theophyl.'s comm. 
 iSIosquensis 99. Epp. with scholl. 
 
 Mosq. 250. cont. Rom. with comm. deft. xiv. 1, to end. 
 Monacensis 504. Epp. except Philem. with Theophyl.'s comm. 
 Monacensis 455. prob. copied from the same MS as the preceding. 
 Monacensis 110. cont. Rom. vii. 7 — ix• 21. with catena; is a copy 
 
 of no. 54. 
 Monacensis 35. Epp. with catena. 
 
 Regius 108. cont. Phil., Col., Thess., Timoth., with prolegg. 
 Regius 109. cont. Rom. 1 Cor. 
 Regius 110. cont. 1 and 2 Cor. 
 Regius HI. cont. Tit., Philem., Hebr. 
 Regius 126. Epp. Paul. 
 
 (Apoc. 60) Regius 136 a. cont. Hebr., Apoc, and Life of St. Alexius. 
 Regius 222. Epp. P. with proll. and comm. deft. Rom.i. 1 to 11 and 
 
 21 to 29 : iii. 26 to iv. 8; ix. 11 to 22 : 1 Cor. xv. 22 to 43 : 
 
 Col. i. 1 to 6. 
 (Apoc. 64) Regius 224. Epp. Paul and Apoc. 
 Regius 225. fragmm. of Epp. P. with Theophyl.'s comm, 
 Regius 226. cont. Rom. with comm. 
 Regius 227. cont. eaten, on 1 Cor. :;vi. 
 Regius 238. cont. Hebr. i. — viii. with catena. 
 Regius 849. cont. Theodoret's comm. on Epp. Paul, with the text 
 
 in marg. 
 
 * λΙοΓο properly to be numbered among the uncial MS-S. " The characters are almost 
 entirely separate, and certainly by no means cursive, in the common acceptation of the 
 term." Tregelles (Home, vol. iv.), p. 207 : whom see. 
 82] 
 
 101 
 
 XT. 
 
 102 
 
 XI. 
 
 103 
 
 XIV. 
 
 110 
 
 XL 
 
 111 
 
 XI. 
 
 112 
 
 XL 
 
 119 
 
 XII. 
 
 123 
 
 XL 
 
 124 
 
 XIV. 
 
 125 
 
 1387 
 
 126 
 
 XIV. 
 
 127 
 
 XVI. 
 
 1-29 
 
 XVI. 
 
 145 
 
 XVI. 
 
 146 
 
 XVI. 
 
 147 
 
 1511 
 
 148 
 
 XVI. 
 
 151 
 
 XVI. 
 
 152 
 
 ? 
 
 157 
 
 XL 
 
 159 
 
 XL 
 
 160 
 
 XVI. 
 
 161 
 
 XVI. 
 
 162 
 
 XVI. 
 
 163 
 
 XIII. 
 
 164 
 
 XVI.
 
 § 1"•] 
 
 VERSIONS EEFEEEED TO. [prolegomena. 
 
 Epp. 
 Paul. 
 
 Century. 
 
 Name of Codex. 
 
 165 
 
 XVI. 
 
 Taurinensis 2H4. cont. Tliess., Tim., Tit., Philem., Hebr. 
 
 
 168 
 
 XII. 
 
 Taur. 325. Epp. P. witlicomm. and proU. deft. Rom. i. 1 to iii 
 
 19. 
 
 171 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Ambroiianus 6. Epp. with comm. but from bcgng to 2 Cor. ν 
 by a later hand. dell. Heb. iv. 7 to end. 
 
 . 19 
 
 172 
 
 XII. 
 
 Ambros. 15. Epp. P. with selections from Chrys.'s comm. 
 
 
 175 
 
 XV. 
 
 Ambros. 125. Epp. P. with comm. 
 
 
 177 
 
 XV. 
 
 Mutinensis 14. Epp. Paul. 
 
 
 189 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Vaticanus 10-19. Epp. P. with Theodoret's comm. 
 
 
 195 
 
 X. 
 
 Vaticano Ottobianus 31. Epp. P. with comm. var. deft. Rom. 
 most of I Cor. 
 
 and 
 
 19G 
 
 XV. 
 
 \'at.-Ottob. ()1. Epp. P. with comm. 
 
 
 197 
 
 XV. 
 
 (Apoc. 78) Vat.-Ottob. 170. Epp. P. and Apoc. 
 
 
 202 
 
 XV. 
 
 Vat.-Ottob. 350. cont. Rom. with catena. 
 
 
 207 
 
 XV. 
 
 Ghigianus R. v. 32. Epp. P. with comm. 
 
 
 208 
 
 XI. 
 
 Ghigianus viii. 55. Epp. P. with Theodoret's comm. 
 
 
 213 
 
 1338 
 
 Barberini 29. Kpp. P. with prolL and scholl. 
 
 
 214 
 
 XV. 
 
 Csesareus Vindobon. Theol. 107• Rom. with catena and 1 Cor. 
 comm. var. 
 
 with 
 
 217 
 
 XII. 
 
 In royal libr. at Palermo, deft. Rom. : I Cor. : 2 Cor. i. 1 to iv. 
 Heb. ii. 9 to end : 2 Tim. i. 8— ii. 14. 
 
 18: 
 
 226 
 
 ? 
 
 Cantabrigiensis 1152. Epp. P. 
 
 
 3. Eor a list of Lcctionaries, or MSS coutaining ecclesiastical readings 
 from the Acts and Epistles, see Scholz. Prolegg. to vol. ii. pp. xl — xliv : 
 or tlie same in Englisli in Home's Introduction, vol. ii. pp. 235* — 239* 
 (ed. 8. 1839). — Some of these are occasionally referred to in the fol- 
 lowing digest : chiefly Λvhere thej serve to illustrate the origin of inter- 
 polations. 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 VEESIONS EEEEEEED TO IN THIS VOLUME ^ 
 
 The readings are cited mainly from Tiscliendorf's 2nd Leipzig edn., 
 with some additions from Scholz. For a more detailed account of the 
 versions the student is referred to Tischendorf's Prolegomena, and Tre- 
 gelles, Home, vol. iv. (edn. 1S5G), pp. 225 — 328, which is the most 
 useful we have. 
 
 1. The ^ff^pfian Yev&ions : comprising 
 
 (copt) the Coptic or meraphitic, 
 (sah) the sahidic, 
 (basm) the hasmuric. 
 
 All these are commonly referred to the Ilird century. 
 
 2. The yEiJiiopic (a;th), ascribed to Cent. IV. 
 
 3. The Arabic versions (arr.) ; some made from tlie Greek about 
 
 Cent. IV., some from the Syriac or Coptic or Latin about 
 Cent. VIII. The various edns. cited are : 
 
 ' Those which relate solely to the Gospels arc not here mentioned. 
 
 83] f 2
 
 ruoLEGOMENA.] APPAEATUS CEITICUS. [cii. yi. 
 
 (ar-erp) the edition of Erpenius of Leyden .in 1616, (See ifc 
 described at Iciigtli in Michaelis ii. 1, p. 89 ff.) In it the Acts, 
 Epp. of Paul, James, I Pet., 1 John, seem to be mere renderings 
 of the Syr (see below) : the Apoc, of the copt. : the Gospp. (2 Pet. 
 2 and 3 John, and Jude ?) to have had a mixed origin. 
 
 (ar-pol) the arable version found in the polyglotts : derived (as to the 
 Gospp.) from the roman edn. (ar-rom), — as to the rest, from a MS 
 version -n-hich was made from the greek text. 
 
 4. (arm) The Armenian. Made from the greek in the Vth cent., and 
 
 afterwards (apparently) corrected from the latin. 
 
 5. (georg) The Georr/ian or Ileric. Made from the greek about the 
 
 Vlth cent., but as yet very little used by critics. 
 
 6. (goth) The Gothic, made by Ulfilas from the greek about the middle 
 
 of Cent. IV. The Ep. to the Heb. does not exist in this version. 
 
 7. (slav) The Slavonic, made by two Greeks in Cent. IX. The dis- 
 
 tinctions (slav-anct) and (slav-mod) refer to the various editions. 
 
 8. (Syr) the Peschito, (syr) the Philoxenian Syriac : the former made 
 
 in Cent. II., the latter in Cent. VI. Eor an account of them see 
 Vol. I. (syrr) implies the concurrence of these versions. 
 
 9. Tlie Latin versions. 
 
 (1) (v) The Vulgate (see Vol. I.), in the authorized edition of the 
 Eomish Church put forth by Clement the VTII. in 1592 ; differing 
 in many respects from the equally authorized edition of Sixtus V. 
 in 1590 (v-sixt). 
 
 But both these editions are very far from representing the Vulgate 
 
 of Jerome, the following ancient MSS of which are cited in the 
 
 digest : 
 (am) The codex amiatimis, written about the year 541 : now in the 
 
 Laurentian library at Florence. It has been carefully examined by 
 
 Tischendorf, and its readings inserted from his own observation, 
 (tol) The codex toletamis, belonging to the cathedral at Toledo, 
 (demid) The codex demidovianus, written apparently in Cent. XII., 
 
 but evidently from a very ancient source, and with great care, 
 (y) The latin version accompanying the codex augiensis (see 
 
 above, Γ). Cent IX. 
 (harl) The codex harleianus 1772, containing the Epp. Paul, cath. 
 
 epp. and apoc. 
 (flor) the floriacensis, (lux) the luxoviensis, (mar) the marianus, 
 
 are MSS written for ecclesiastical use, cited by Sabatier in his 
 
 " Versiones antiquiB latinae," and from him by Tischendorf. 
 
 (2) (it) The ancient latin, or italic versions, in use before Jerome, 
 originally made, probably, in Africa in Cent. II. See Tischendorf's 
 account of these. The following are cited in the var. readd. of the 
 Acts and Epp. of Paid : 
 
 81]
 
 § IV.] PATIIEES EEFEEEED TO. [proleooaiena. 
 
 Eor the Acts : 
 
 (d) The version accompanying the codex Bezce (see above, D, Acts). 
 
 (e) The version in the codex Laudiaiius (see above, E, Acts). 
 
 (Jc) The codex bohliensis (now vindohonensis), containing a few frag- 
 ments of chapp. xxiii., xxvii., xxviii. of about Cent. V. 
 
 Eor the Epp. of Paul : 
 
 (t/) The version accompanying the codex Glaromontanus (see above, 
 
 D, Epp. of Paul). Edited by Sabatier, but more accurately 
 
 examined by Tischendorf. 
 (e) The version in the codex San-Germanensis (see above, E, Epp. 
 
 Paul). Edited by Sabatier. 
 (y) The version in the codex Boernerianus (see above, G, Epp. Paul). 
 
 Edited by Matthiii. 
 (guelph) A few fragments at Wolfenbuttel of Eom. xi — xv., annexed 
 
 to the Gothic text. 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 fathees and ancient cheistian writebs cited in τπε digest in 
 
 this volume. 
 
 1. Greek. 
 (Amnion) Ammonius of Alexandria, Cent. III. 
 (Amphil) Amphilochius of Cappadocia, Cent. IV. 
 (Anast) Anastasius of Sinai, Cent. VI. 
 (Andr) Andreas of Crete, Cent. VII. 
 (Antioch) Antiochus of Ptolemais, Cent. V. 
 (Archel) Archelaus of Mesopotamia, Cent. III. 
 
 (Ath) Athanasius of Alexandria, Cent. IV. (Ps-Ath) Pseudo-Athanasius. 
 (Bas) Basil the Great, Cent. IV. 
 (Bas-sel) Basil of Seleucia, Cent. V. 
 (Cees) Csesarius of Constantinople, Cent. IV. 
 (Canon) The Apostolic Canons, Cent. III. 
 (Chrou) The Chronicon Paschale. 
 
 (Chrys, or Chr) Chrysostora, Cenb. IV. (Ps-Chr) Pseudo-Chrysostom. 
 (Clem-alex) Clement of Alexandria, Cent. II. 
 (Clem-rom) Clement of Eome, Cent. II. 
 (Cosm) Cosmas Indicopleustcs, Cent. VI. 
 (Constt) Constitutiones Apostolie2C, Cent. III. 
 (Cyr) Cyril of Alexandria, Cent. V. 
 (Cyr-jcr) Cyril of Jerusalem, Cent. IV. 
 (Dam) John Damascenus, Cent. VIII. 
 (Dial) The Dialogue against the Marcionites found among the works 
 
 of Origen, Cent. III. 
 85]
 
 riJOLEGOMEyA.] APPARATUS CEITICUS. [cu. vi. 
 
 (Did) Didynms of Alexandria, Cent. ΙΛ". Mostof liis works are extant 
 
 only ill latin. 
 (Epiph) Epiplumius, Cent. ΙΛ'". 
 (Ephr) Ephrem Syrus, Cent. IV. 
 (Eus) Eusebius of Ciesarea, Cent. IV. 
 (Eustath) Eiistathius of Antioch, Cent. IV. 
 (Euthal) Eutlialius of Alexandria, Cent. Y. 
 (Evagr) Evagrius of Syria, Cent. IV. 
 (Gelas) Gelasius of Cyzicum, Cent. V. 
 (Gennad) Gennadius of Constantinople, Cent. V. 
 (Heracl) Heracleon the Gnostic, Cent. II. Erora Origen's Comin. on 
 
 John. 
 (Hesych) llesychius of Jerusalem, Cent. IV. 
 (Hippol) Hippolytus, disciple of Irenfeus, Cent. III. 
 (Tgn) Ignatius of Antioch, Cent. II. 
 (Iren) Irenasus of Lyons, Cent. II. Principally extant in latin : — 
 
 when the latin is referred to it is either placed among the latin ff. 
 
 or written (Iren-int), 
 (Isid) Isidore of Pelusiuin, Cent. V. 
 
 (Justin) Justin-Martyr, Cent. II. (Ps-Justin), Pseudo-Justin. 
 (Leout) Leontius of Byzantium, Cent. Λ"ΙΙ. 
 (Mac) Macarius of Egypt, Cent. ΙΛ^. 
 (Maced) Macedonius of Constantinople, Cent. Λ'Ί. 
 INIarcion, Cent. II. — fragmm. in Epiph. and Tertullian. 
 Martyrium dementis, from Coteler. See 1 Cor. vii. 14. 
 (Melet) Meletius of Antioch, Cent. ΙΛ^ 
 (Meth) Methodius of Tyre, Cent. III. 
 CNaz) Gregory of Naziauzen, Cent. III. IV. 
 (Nest) JN'estorius of Constantinople, Cent. V. 
 (is on) Nonnus of Panopolis, Cent. V. 
 (Nyss) Gregory of Nyssa, Cent. V. 
 (Oec) Oecumenius of Tricca in Thrace, Cent. XL ? 
 (Orig) Origen, Cent. III. (Or-int) where the latin only is extant : 
 
 this latter seems to cite the old italic version rather than Origen's 
 
 own text. 
 (Pampb) Pamphilus of Palestine, Cent. IV. 
 (Petr-alex) Peter of Alexandria, Cent. III. 
 (Phot) Photius of Constantinople, beginning of Cent. X. 
 (Polyc) Polycarp of Smyrna, Cent. 11. 
 (Porph) Porphyry, Cent. III. 
 (Procl) Proclus of Constantinople, Cent. V. 
 (Procop) Procopius of Gaza, Cent. VI. 
 
 (Protev-Jac) The Protevangelium of James, Cent. 11. : seldom quoted. 
 (Seholl) A^arious scholia from mss. and edd. 
 861
 
 § IV.] FATIIEES EEFEREED TO. [proleqomexa. 
 
 Serapion of Egypt, Cent. IV. 
 
 (Sev) Severus of Antioch, Ceut. VI. 
 
 (Smyru-epist) The Ep. of the Smyrnieans ou the martyrdom of Poly- 
 carp, Ceut. II. 
 
 (Socr) Socrates of Constantinople, Cent. Λ*^. 
 
 (Soz) Sozomenus of Constantmople, Cent. V. 
 
 (Suid) Suidas the lexicographer, Cent. XI. 
 
 (Syn) George Syncellus, Cent. VIII. 
 
 (Synojj) A Synopsis ascribed to Atlianasius. 
 
 (Tat) Tatianus of Syria, Cent. II. 
 
 (Test) The Testament of the XII. patriarchs, Ceut. I. ? 
 
 (Thai) Thalassius, Cent. VII. 
 
 (Thaum) Gregory Thaumaturgus, Cent. III. 
 
 (Thdor-heracl) Theodoras of Heraclea, Cent. IV. 
 
 (Thdor-mops) Theodoras of Mopsuestia, Ceut. IV. 
 
 (Thdor-stud) Theodorus Stadites, Ceut. VIII. 
 
 (Thdrt) Theodoretas of Cyrus in Syria, Ceut. V. 
 
 (Thdot) Theodotus the gnostic, Ceut. II. 
 
 (Thdot-ancyr) Theodotus of Aucyra, Ceut. V. 
 
 (Thph-aut) Theophilus of Antioch, Ceut. II. 
 
 (Thph-alex) Tlieophilus of Alexandria, Cent. IV. 
 
 (Thl) Theophylact Abp. of Bulgaria, Cent. XI. (Thl') and (ThP) de- 
 note respectively the old edition, and the text of the comm. of Thl. 
 recently found in a Vatican ms and published by Finetti. (ThP) 
 is a copy of the comm. without the text, in a ms in the Florentine 
 (Mediceau) library. 
 
 (Tim) Timotheus of Alexandria, Ceut. IV. 
 
 (Tit, or Tit-bostr) Titus Bostreusis, Cent. IV. 
 
 (Val) Valentinus and the Valeutiuians, Ceut. IV. 
 
 Victor of Antioch, Ceut. V. 
 
 (Zon) Zouaras of Constantinople, Ceut. XII. 
 
 2. Latin. 
 
 (Ambr) Ambrose, Ceut. IV. 
 
 (Ambrst) Ambrosiaster, i. e. Hilary the deacon. Cent. III. or IV. 
 
 (Arnob) Aruobius, Cent. IV. 
 
 (Avit) Alcimus Ecdicius Avitus, Ceut. V. 
 
 (Aug) Augustine, Cent. IV. 
 
 (Bed) Venerable Bede, Cent. Λ^ΙΙΙ. (Bed-gr) refers to a Greek codex 
 
 of the Acts cited in Bede's commentary. It is nearly identical 
 
 with the cod. Laudianus E. 
 (Cses-arel) Cajsarius of Aries, Cent. VI. 
 (Cassiod) Cassiodorus, Cent. VI. 
 (Chrom) Chromatius, Cent. V, 
 87]
 
 PROLEGOMENA.] APPARATUS CEITICUS. [cu. rr. 
 
 (Cypr) Cyprian, Cent. III. 
 
 (Epiph) Epiphanius, Bp. of Constantia in Cyprus, whose comm. on the 
 
 Cantt. was translated by Epiphanius Scholasticus in Cent. VI. 
 (Eucher) Euchcrius of Lyons, Cent. VI. 
 (Fast) Fastidius, Cent. V. 
 
 (Faust) Faustus the Manichee (cited by Augustine). 
 (Faustin) Faustiuus, Cent. IV. 
 (Firm) Julius Firinicus Maternus, Cent. IV• 
 (Gaud) Gaudentius, Cent. IV. 
 (Gild) Gildas, Cent. VI. 
 (Greg) Gregory the Great, Cent. VI. 
 Haymo, Cent. IX. 
 (Hesych) Hesychius, Cent. IX. 
 (Hil) Hilary of Poictiers, Cent. IV. 
 (Jac-nisib) Jacobus Nisibensis, Cent. IV. 
 (Jer) Jerome, Cent. IV. 
 Julian, in Augustine, Cent. IV. 
 (Juv) Juvencus, Cent. IV. 
 (Lact) Lactantius, Cent. IV. 
 Leo the Great, Cent. V. 
 (Lucif) Lucifer of Cagliari, Cent. IV. 
 (Max-taur) Maximus Taurinensis, Cent. V. 
 (■Sovat) Novatian, Cent. III. 
 
 (Op-imperf) Opus imperfectum in Mattli., ascribed to Cent. X. 
 (Opt) Optatus, Cent. IV. 
 (Oros) Orosius, Cent. IV. 
 (Ors) Orsiesius the Egyptian, Cent. IV. Only an ancient latin 
 
 version of his works is extant. 
 (Pac) Pacianus, Cent. IV. 
 (Pel) Pelagius, Cent. IV. 
 (Philast) Philastrius, Cent. IV. 
 (Phoeb) Phoebadius, Cent. IV. 
 (Praedest) Praidestinatus, a work ascribed to Vinceutius of Lerins, 
 
 Cent. V. 
 (Primas) Primasius, Cent. VI. 
 
 (Premiss) the Author of the work de Promissionihus dimid. temp. 
 (Prud) Prudentius, Cent. V. 
 (Quaest) the Author of the Qucestmies ex vet. et nov. Testt. printed 
 
 among the works of Augustine. 
 (Eebapt) the Author of the tract de rebaptisinate printed among the 
 
 works of Cyprian ; — Cent. III. 
 (Euf) Eufinus, Cent. V. 
 (Salv) Salviauus, Cent. V. 
 (Sedul) Sedulius, Cent. V. 
 88]
 
 § τ.] BOOKS EEFEEEED TO. [peolegomexa. 
 
 (Siug-cler) tlie Author of the tract de singiilaritate clericorum, printed 
 
 among the works of Cyprian : Cent. III. or IV. 
 (Tert) TertuUian, Cent. III. 
 (Tich) Ticlionius, Cent. IV. 
 (Vict-tuu) Victor Tununensis, Cent. Λ^Ι. 
 (Λ^igil) Vigilius of Thapsus. His work de Trinitate adversus Yarima• 
 
 dum was published under the name of (Idac) Idacius. 
 Zeno, Cent. IV. 
 Zosimus, Cent. Λ''. 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 LIST, ATiD SPECIFICATION OF EDITIONS OF ΟΤΠΕΕ BOOKS QUOTED, 
 EEFEKBED TO, OE MADE USE OF IN THIS YOLUME, 
 
 N.B. "Works mentioned in the list given in the Prolegg. to Vol. I. are 
 not here again noticed. 
 BiscoE, History of the Acts of the Holy Apostles confirmed &c., Oxf. 
 
 1840. 
 BispiNG, Erklarung des Briefes an die Eomer, Miinster 1854. Eoin. 
 
 Catholic. 
 BoENEMANN, Acta App. ad fidem codicis Cantabrigiensis &c., Grossen- 
 
 hain et Loud. 1848. 
 Catena in Acta App. ed. Cramer, Oxf. 1838. 
 Chetsostom, Homilies : on Acts, in Bibliopol. Commeliniauo, (Paris ?) 
 
 1503 : on Eom. Oxf. 1849 : on Corr., Oxf. 1845. 
 CoNTBEAEE AND HowsoN, Life and Epp. of St. Paul, with maps, plates, 
 
 coins, &c., 2 Yoll. 4to, London 1850-52 : 2nd edn., 2 voll. 8vo. 
 
 Lond. 1856. 
 Dayidson, De, S., Introduction to the New Testament, vol. ii., Acts — 
 
 2 Thess. ; Lond. 1849. 
 De Wette, Exegetisches Handbuch u.s.w. — Apostgeschiehte, 2nd edn., 
 
 Leipzig 1841: Eomer, 4th edn., Leipzig 1847: Corinther, 2ud 
 
 edn., Leipzig 1845. 
 EsTius, Comment, in omues Pauli Epistolas, 2 voll. folio, Douay 1614. 
 EwBANK, Λν. Λν., Commentary on the Ep. to the Eomans, Lond. 1850. 
 Eeitzsche, Pauli ad Eomanos Epistola, 3 voll., Hal. Sax. 1836. 
 Hackett, Peof., Commentary on the Acts, Boston U.S. 1852. 
 Hemsen, der Apostel Paulus u.s.w., Gottingen 1850. 
 HuMPHEY, W. G., Commentary on the Acts, Lond. 1847. 
 Jowett, Peof., the Epistles of St. Paul to the Thessalonians, Galatians, 
 
 Eomans : with critical Notes and Illustrations : Lond. 1850. (Sec 
 
 Λ"ο1. III. Prolegg. p. 43, note.) 
 Lachmann and Buttman, Novum Testamentum gnccc et latino &c , 
 
 vol. ii., Berlin 1850. 
 89]
 
 vROLEGOMEiiA.] APPAEATUS CRITICUS. [en. vr. 
 
 Lewin, T., Life and Epistles oi" St. Paul, 2 vols., London, ISol. 
 Meter, H. A. W., Kritiscli-excgetische Commentar iibor das Neue 
 
 Testament : — Apostg., GotLingen 1835 : 1 Corinth., 2nd edu., do. 
 
 1SJ;9 : 2 Cor., 2ud edn., do. 1850. 
 Nea>-der, Aug., Geschichte der PflauzuDg u. Leitung der clmstlicbea 
 
 Kirclie durch die Apostel, 4th edn., Hamburg 1847. 
 Oecumexics, Commentaria, &c., 2 vols, folio, Paris 1631. 
 Palet, Horie Paulina? : ed. Birks, Lond. 1850. 
 Peile, Dr., Annotations on the Apostolical Epistles, vol. i. Eom. — Corr. 
 
 Lond. 1848. 
 Philippi, Dr. F. Α., Commentar tiber den Brief Pauli an die Eomer, 
 
 vol. i., Erankf. 1855. 
 ScHRADER, der Apostel Paulus, u.s.w., 5 voll., Leipzig 1829-3G. 
 Smith, James, Esq., on the Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul, Lond. 
 
 1848 : 2nd edn. Lond. 1856. 
 Stanley, Eev. A. P., The Epistles of St. Paul to the Corinthians : 
 
 with critical Notes and Illustrations *. 
 Stier, Dr. Eudole, die Eeden der Apostel, Leipzig 1829. — Andeu- 
 
 tungen fur glaubiges Schriftverstandniss : zweite Sammlung, 
 
 Leipzig 1828. 
 Stuaet, Moses, Commentary on the Epistle to the Eomans, Lond. 
 
 1838. 
 Tertullia>'us, ed. Leopold, Leipzig 1839. 
 Theodoret, in omnes Pauli Epp. Pars i., Oxf. 1852. 
 Theophxlact, Comra. in Epp. Pauli, Lond. 1636. 
 TiiOLUCK, Eoraerbrief, u.s.w., Halle 1842 : 5th edn., 1856. 
 Tregelles, Dr., An Account of the printed Text of the Greek New 
 
 Testament. London 1854. 
 TJmbreit, Dr., Der Brief an die Eomer auf dem Grunde des Alteii 
 
 Testamentes ausgelegt. Gotha 1856 f. 
 
 * The reader will observe that I have worked with Mr. Stanley's book in preparing 
 this edition, and have often extracted from, and referred to it. It is a valuable contribu- 
 tion to the literature of these important Epistles : not so much in its scholarship, as in 
 the power of illustration, and graphic description of usage and circumstance, which 
 pervade the notes. 
 
 t A very valuable work, which I only regret that time has not allowed me to consult, 
 in preparing this edition, as much as I wished. The reader will find several references 
 to it in the notes on the earlier part of the Epistle. 
 
 I am truly sorry to have been compelled, in several places in the notes of this edition, 
 to speak severely of statements occumng in the ninth edition of Dr. Bloomfield's Greek- 
 Testament. My earnest wish is, that all of us who are fellow-labourers in editing and 
 elucidating the word of God, should be fellow -helpers and sympathizers one with another. 
 But in tliis case I believe any candid examiner will concur with me that there is a cause 
 90]
 
 § v.] BOOKS EEFEEEED TO. [prolegomena. 
 
 why I should not have remained silent. Dr. Tregelles has already done good service by 
 pointing out the fictitious citations of the principal MSS, with which Bloomfield's notes 
 abound (see Tregelles, Account of the printed Greek text of the N. T., p. 262, note: 
 and ditto in Home's Introd., vol. iv. p. 151), edn. 185G). To this I will add,— first, as 
 regards myself, — that no statement of his respecting the readings of my text, or the con- 
 tents of my notes, is to be taken on trust of his assertion : many such being inaccurate, 
 and not a few entirely at variance with fact ; — and next, as regards the German commen- 
 tators whose opinions I have reported or criticised, — that his reproduction of those 
 opinions is in complete and ludicrous confusion. Leaving it to be understood in many 
 cases that he has consulted the authors themselves (which he has not, but taken their 
 views entirely second-hand through my notes), he has given sometimes my oi)inion as 
 Meyer's or De Wette's, or interchanged theirs the one for the other, or, in his ignorance 
 of literature with which he professes familiarity, invented German names of commentators 
 which do not exist [as, e. g., on Rom. xiv. 18, where he says, " Mr. Alf. takes iv τοΰτφ, 
 with Baumg. and Crucius (sic), as equiv. to όντως." I need hardly inform my readers 
 that this strange pair of names represents but one man, our old and excellent acijuaintance 
 Bauwgarten-Cnishis']. It is truly lamentable that a man of Dr. Bloomfield's standing 
 and reputation should have condescended to the practices which may be detected in 
 almost every page where we have common ground. I say this, be it remembered, in 
 the full consciousness of my own obligations to others, and in entire willingness that Dr. 
 Bloomfield, or any fellow-labourer, should use any thing of mine which may appear 
 worth borrowing. What I protest against, is, inaccuracy in statement, and assumption 
 of reading which does not belong to a man. In this case I believe these have brought 
 their own punishment : for they have made Dr. Bloomfield's work in great part untrust- 
 worthy, whether as a record of the readings of MSS, or as a report of the opinions of other 
 commentators. Dec. 185G. 
 
 9]]
 
 πΡΑΗΕΐ:^ Απο::έτοΑΩΝ. 
 
 ABDE 
 
 C nvev 
 ματος.,, 
 
 ABCDE 
 
 . 1 ov μίν ιτρωτον Aoyov εττοιησαμην περί ναντων, &(uevsohta. 
 ω θίό^ιλε, ων '^ ηοί,ατο Ιΐϊσοϋς ποιειν τε και οιοασκίΐν aaonw'^.Matt. 
 
 Of>/ f r r a > \ f -' t \ h^^ **' 28, 31. 
 
 ^ «γρι VQ TJAi^paC ίνηΐΛαμενος τοις αττοστυλοις ο/α Heb. vui. ζ. 
 πνεύματος ay'iov, ους ε^εΧεζατο, ^ ανελήμφΘη. ^ ο'ις και ^ ~j^l'^^"^l^• 
 
 37. 6 μίν πρότ. λόγο? ήν ήμίν, ω θίόίοτβ, vepi κ. τ. λ. Philo. Q. om. prob. liber, p. 865. See 1 Chron. 
 
 xxix. 29. c = here only. Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 13. ίποίησΐ δημόσια τρίίμματα. Herodian. vii. 6. 6 . 
 
 dattr.. Matt. XTiii. 19. Zi-pli. iii. II. e «-Luke xiii. 25, or better, xxiii. 5. See Gen. ii. 3. 
 
 f Luke i. 20. g constr., ch. xiii. 4". John xiv. 31. h = ch. xx. 28. traject., ch. xix. 4 al. 
 
 i-=ch.ii.22. Mark xv. 19. 4 Kings ii. 9. See Lake ix. 51. 
 
 Rec πραζιις των άγιων αποστολών, with AEGH (but these at the end: C has neither 
 title nor subscr) : πραζις αποστολών D : πρ. των απ. Β (Bentl) al Orig Chr al : ai πρ. 
 τ. άγιων αποστ. all: λονκα ίυαγγίΧιστου πρα4. απ. all : πραζίις των άγιων και πανευ- 
 φημων αποστολών συγγμαφίΐσαι νπο (or πάρα του αγιον, ΐυδυξον, κ. πανίυφημον) 
 λονκκ του (αποστόλου κ.) (υαγγΐλιστου 38 (cent xiii) al : txt (adopted as being the 
 simj)les( and prob most ancient) Β (Birch) al. — Chap. I. 1. rec ο ιησ., with AE al : txt 
 (the ο ο/" j /ρξαΓο was prob mistaken for the art) BD. — 2. Sia πν. αγ. is joined to ους 
 ίξ. in syrr ar-erp seth Cyr Aug Vig : to tvT. τοις απ. in ν copt al Chr Th Oec al. — aft 
 ους ίξ. add και εκιλίυσί κηρνσσιιν το ίυαγγελιον D, and, omg »coi ίκΕλ., sah syr-marg. 
 — rec ανίληψθη : txt A(B.')CD(places it aft ημέρας, as also sah syr-marg)E al. — 3. τεσσ. 
 
 On the title, see Prolegomena. 1 — 3. 
 Introduction.] 1. τον ^.ev irp. λ.] 
 
 The latter member of this sentence, ταννν 
 εί, . . . is wanting (see Winer, § 64, p. 448), 
 and the Author proceeds at once to his nar- 
 ration, binding this second history to the 
 first by recapitulating and enlarging the 
 account given in the conclusion of the 
 Gospel. Ίτάντων] Whatever latitude 
 
 may be given to this word, it must at all 
 events exi'lude the notion that Luke had at 
 this time seen the Gospels of Matt, or 
 Mark, in which many things which Jesus 
 did and taught are contained, which he had 
 not related in his πρώτος λόγος. On Theo- 
 philus, see notes, Luke i. 3. ων ήρ- 
 
 ξατο Ίησ.] I cannot think ηρζατο here to 
 be merely pleonastic. The parallel cases 
 (see refT.) all point to a distinct and appro- 
 priate meaning for the word, and its posi- 
 tion here shews that it is emphatic. And 
 that meaning here seems to be, that the 
 Gospel contained the αρχάς, the outset of 
 all the doings and teachings of our Lord, 
 as distinguished from this second treatise, 
 which was to relate their sequel and results. 
 Meyer understands it — which Josus first of 
 all men did, &c. But this introduces a 
 meaniiii; irrelevant to the context, besides 
 Vol. 11. 
 
 not giving the emphasis to ηρ^ατο, but to 
 Ίησονς. If, as the position shews, »;ρξ. is 
 to have the emph., the beginning of the 
 doing and teaching of Jesus must be con- 
 trasted with the continuance of the same. 
 2. ίντίΐλ. τ. αιτ.] See Luke xxiv. 
 48 ff., and ver. 4 below. δια irv. άγ. 
 
 may be joined either with εντειλ., or with 
 εζελίΐ,ατο. In the former case, our Lord 
 is said to have given His commands to the 
 App. through, or in the power of, the 
 Holy Ghost. Similarly He is said, Heb. 
 ix. 14, δια •ΐΓ퀕υ(ί.ατο5 αΐωνίον εαυτόν 
 προςένεγκαι άμωμον τφ θεψ. In the 
 latter. He is said to have chosen the App. 
 by the power of the Holy Ghost. Simi- 
 larly, in ch. XX. 28, Paul tells the Ephes. 
 elders, that the Holy Ghost had made 
 them overseers in the Church of God. In 
 this latter case the construction is justified 
 by ref. ; but the former is much the best, 
 as expressing not a mere common -place, 
 but the propriety of the fact, — that His last 
 commands were given ' in the power of 
 (see John xx. 22) the Holy Ghost.' To 
 take διά πν. άγ. with άνελήμψθη (see 
 Olsh. i. β2!>) soems to nio inadmissible ; as 
 also is Dr. Burton's rendering, " having 
 told His Apostles that His commands would 
 Β
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 I. 
 
 k = cli.ix.41. 
 Rom. Ti. 1:5, 
 16, li). L>Cor, 
 si. 2 rt-ft. 
 
 τταρεστησίν tavTov ί,ωντα μίτα το TraUtiu αυτόν fv abcdk 
 ΤΓολλοις '" Τίκμηριοις " ot ΐ]μίρων τεσσί^ακοντα ° οτττα- 
 'Λ'χιΙ ^ι""^ "''^*''°^ αύτοις καί λεγωΓ τα "^ περί της βυσιΧίίας του 
 συναΧιί,ήμίνος αυτυις ** wapiiyytiXtv 
 ριζίσθαι, άλλα * πίριμενίΐν 
 
 Liik 
 
 Paul iiiily. 
 kk abs., Luke 
 
 xxii. lu. 
 
 xxiv. 46 Hi. 
 
 Hcb. ix. aii 
 
 al. 
 I - Malt. vi. 7 
 
 1 Cor. IT. 4. 
 m here only t. 
 
 3 Maic. iii. 
 
 24. Xen. 
 
 Mem. i. 1, 2. 
 
 νυμωΐ' μη -γι 
 
 απο 
 ΤΎ\ν 
 
 ' ΟΤΙ Ιωαν 
 'ησεσθε 
 
 ν\,Κ. 
 
 Οίου. και 
 
 Ιεοοσολυ/ 
 
 iTrayytAiav του ττατρος ην ηκουσατί μου, 
 νης μίν ίβήπτισίν υ^ατι, ίιμίΐς δε βαπτισΌησεσϋε ' εμ 
 ττνίυματι ayiu) ου μιτα πολλας ^ ταύτας τιμίρας. οι 
 
 η — Hfb. ϋ. 15. (ch. τ. 1». χνί. 9. χτϋ. κι?) ο here <inly. 3 Kings viii. 8. Tobit 
 
 00 Luke i.\. 11. ch. viii. 12. xix 8. phereonlyf. Herod i. 62. Xen. Anab. τϋ. 3, 48. 
 
 ProT. xxii. 24. q — Luke viii. 56. Josh. vi. 6. r — ch. xviii. 1. Judg. vi. 18, s here 
 
 xlix. 18. t — Luke xxiv 49. oh. ii. 33. Gal. iii. 14, 22. Eph. iii. 6. Heb. iv. 1 et pas.sim. 
 
 Amos ix. 6. α constr., ch. χτϋ. 3. Mark vi. 8, ». Luke τ. 14 al. Winer, { 64, 2. τ Matt. iii. U reff. 
 
 w constr., here only, πρό ■ποΚλΰιν Twvde ημίμων, Heliod. ^;th. ii. 22, 97. Winer, i 23, 4. 
 
 ημιρ. (omg δια) D. — rec ησσαρακοντα, with Ε al : txt A(B?)CD al. — οπταννομινος Ε : 
 οπτανυμινυίς D' : ψαινομινος 40. — 4. σνναΚιπκομίνυς {-λισγυμ. D'•*) μιτ' αυτών D : 
 convescens e' ν al : comnvens d al : σννηνΧιΖ,ομινος all Eus Did Epiph ThP : txt {cum 
 conversare/ur cum illiti e^) A(B e sil)CDE al Thl'. — rec. τζαρηγγ. ηυΓοις,νϊίΙι Β (e sil)D 
 (see above) &c Phot Thl : txt {rec has prob been a tratisjwisilion) ACE {-ytWev) al 
 vss Chr al. — ην ηκουσαη <ρησι%> Sia του στόματος μου D ν lux seth Hil Aug Jer, and 
 omg ψτισιν d am. — 5. πνινμ. βαπτισθ. Β : πν. αγ. βαπτ. D Hil Victorin Aug al : add 
 και ο μίλΧίτί λαμβάνειν D' tol Hil Aug al. — aft ημέρας add εως της πεντηκοστής D'd 
 
 be more fully made known to them by the 
 Holy Ghost." άνελήμ,ψ.] zz άνεφερίτο 
 
 ίΐς τον οΰρ., Luke xxiv. 51. The abbre- 
 viated form testifies to the familiarity of the 
 apostolic church with the Ascension as a 
 formal and recognized event in our Lord's 
 course. 3. Iv ir. τ£κμ.] See Luke xxiv. 
 
 31,39,43. o"irTav(5p.£vos] ού yap ωςπερ 
 trpb της αναστάσεως ώς άε'ι μετ αυτών 
 ήν, ο'ότω και τότε' ου yap εΊπε τ€σ- 
 σΐράκοντα ήμ€ρα$, άλλα δι' ήμ<ρών 
 TCacipaKovTa• ίφιστατο yap και άφίσ- 
 τατο πάλιν. Chrysostom. — This is the only 
 place where the interval between the Re- 
 surrection and the Ascension is specified. 
 τα irep. τ. β. τ. θ.] τό, in the 
 widest sense ; not ρήματα merely : — ' the 
 matters.' The article implies, that during 
 this period they received from our Lord 
 the whole substance of the doctrine of ' the 
 Kingdom of God.' 
 
 4 — 14.] The last discourses and 
 ascension of the lord. return of 
 THE Apostles to Jerusalem : reca- 
 pitulation OF their names. 4. 
 σνναλιξ.] not middle, ' assembling them,' 
 as Calv. {congregaiis eos). Grot., Olsh., 
 and others, which is without example ; but 
 passive, = συναλισθείς, Hesych., as E. V. 
 Chrys., the Vulg., &c., interpret it ' eating 
 and drinking ,•' so E. V. marg. Thl., Oec, 
 &c., κοινωνών άλών, mistaking the ety- 
 mology. The reading συναυλιζ. is an 
 explanation. The conjecture of Hemster- 
 huis, σνναλιΖομ'ενοι%, is quite unneces- 
 sary. OTTO 'lep. μη χωρ.] See Luke 
 xxiv. 49. ' Simul maiiere jussi sunt, quo- 
 niam uno omnes Spiritu donandi erant. 
 
 Si fuissent dispersi, unitas minus cognita 
 fuisset.' Calvin. πβριμ.] ' to await,' 
 
 1. e. wait till the completion of: the ττερι 
 implies this. τ. ίιταγγ. τ. ττατρός] 
 
 See note on Luke xxiv. 49. 5.] The 
 
 Lord cites these words from the mouth of 
 John himself, Luke iii. 16 || ; — and thus 
 announces to them that, as John's mission 
 was accomplished in baptizing with water, 
 so now the great end of His own mission, 
 the Baptism with the Holy Ghost, was on 
 the point of being accomplished. Calvin 
 remarks, that He speaks of the Pentecostal 
 effusion as being the Baptism with the 
 Holy Ghost, because it was a great repre- 
 sentation on the whole Church of the sub- 
 sequent continued work of regeneration on 
 individuals : ' Quasi totius Ecclesiae com- 
 munis baptismus.' I may add, also be- 
 cause it was the beginning of a new period 
 of spiritual influence, totally unlike any 
 which had preceded. See on ch. ii. 17• — 
 vSuTi and Iv πν. ay. are slightly distin- 
 guished. The insertion of the preposition 
 bef. πν. ay. seems to give a dignity which 
 the mere instrumental dative, νζατι, wants. 
 
 ταύτας] serves to bind on the οϋ 
 ΤΓολλ, ημ. to the day then current ; as we 
 say, ' one of these days.' It answers to 
 the genitives in such expressions as οΰ μετά 
 πολν της άψίξεως, Jos. Antt. i. 22, 1, and 
 μετ' οΰ πολν της αΙχμαλωσίας, ib. xiii. 7> 
 1 (reff".). — ' Numerus dierum non definitus 
 exercebat fidem discipulorum.' Bengel. 
 
 6.] This σνιελθόντες does not be- 
 long to another assembling, different from 
 the former; but takes up again the σνν- 
 αλιζόμει ος of ver. 4. Olsh. has mistaken
 
 4—8. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 uiv ουν συνεΧθοντίο " εττηοωτων αυτόν Xeyovrsc Κύριε, χ Matt. xu. ίο 
 
 • ' - ζ ' ' ' Λ ' •• η ^, ' al. fr. 
 
 ^ £t £V Γω ^ y^^ovit) τούτω ^ αποκαθιστανίΐς την ρασιλειαυ ^ Ji,.*i?x 
 
 τω 
 
 Ισραί/λ 
 
 ειττευ δε προς αυτούς 
 
 ΟυΛ 
 
 "γνωναι "χρόνους ί? καιρούς ους ο τταττψ εσετο 
 
 ιοίο. ίζουσία' άλλα \ημφεσθί * ^υΐ'αμιν ^ εττελθόιτος 
 
 .3al. 
 ζ = Matt. ii. 7 
 
 υμωι; εστίν at- 
 
 , , _ a Matt. xvii. 11. 
 
 "^ ' i» xiii. li)al. 
 IT ' \ η ' Lt;"• xiii• IB. 
 
 a c.n-c A Η^..^Λ/^ pres.Matt. 
 xj. 3. 
 
 του ayiou πνεύματος ίψ υμάς, καΐ ίσεσβε μου " μάρτυρες ^"^i'^-jTh^^s 
 
 iii. 2. olThess. τ. 1. Dan. ii. 21. d = 2 Tim. iii. 1. Matt. xvi. 3. see ch. xiv. 17. 
 
 e see Lnke ix. 44. xxi. 14. cb. T. 4. xix. 21. Hagg. ii.l9. ee = ch. τ. 4. see Matt. xxi. 23. f=Luke 
 
 IT. 36. ix. 1 al. g — Lake i. 35 only. 1 Rings li. 7. h — Luke xxiy. 48. ver. 22 and Acts 
 passim. 1 Pet. τ. I. Isa. xiiii. 10. 
 
 sah Aug. — 6. ηρωτων ABC^ (-ουν) (alteration for simplicity) : txt (-τουν C^ lect 12) 
 C^DE al Thl. — αποκατασΓανιις εις (om D^) την β. του (τω D•) ισρ. D: representa- 
 beris ? et quando regnum Israel ? Aug. sometimes : sometimes, preesentabis regnum 
 Israel. — 7. ειπεί' ουν Β, ο St ειπεν C Aug, και ιιπεν D, ο ϋε αποκριθείς ειπ. αντοις Ε: 
 txt Α al ν coptal Thl. — for οι/χ ΐ'^ί. εστ., nemo potest Cypr Aug sometimes. — 8. rec ληψ• ■ 
 txt AB.'CDE al. — rec μοι (corr to the common cutistr εσεσθε μοι) with Ε al Origj 
 Thl : txt ABCD al Origj. — rec κ. εν πάση (corrective insertion) with B(e sil)C3E al 
 
 the sense of the μίν ουν, which refers, not 
 to another incident, but to other actors ; 
 theg, as distinguished from Him who had 
 been speaking. Κυρΐ€, el . . . .] The 
 
 stress of this question is in the words ev τω 
 χρόνο) τοτίτω. That the Kingdom was, 
 in some sense, to be restored to Israel, was 
 plain; nor does the Lord deny this impli- 
 cation (see on ver. 8). Their fault was, a 
 too curious enquiry on a point reserved 
 among the arcana of God. Lightfoot's 
 idea, that the disciples wondered at the 
 Kingdom being about to be restored to the 
 ungrateful Jews, at this time, now that 
 they had crucified Him, &c., would make 
 our Lord's answer irrelevant. — See Micah 
 iv. 8, LXX. — Meyer would refer iv τψ χρ. 
 του. to the interval designated by ού μιτά 
 ΤΓολλ. ταυ. ήμ., ' during this time.' But 
 this does not seem natural : I should rather 
 understand it, ' at this present period,' 
 ' now.' 7.] This is a general reproof 
 
 and assertion, spoken with reference to 
 men, as forbidden to search curiously into 
 the one point which Omniscience has re- 
 served —the times and seasons of the future 
 divine dealings. But it is remarkable that 
 not θεός, but ο πατήρ, is here used ; and 
 this cannot fail to remind us of that saying 
 (Mark xiii. 32), πΕρί Si τής ήμ'ερας ΐκεϊνης 
 και τίις ώρας οϋοίΐς οίοεν, οΰδε οι άγ- 
 γελοι ίν οΐφανφ, οΰόε 6 υιός, εΐ μη 6 
 ΐΓατηρ. It may be observed however, that 
 the same assertion is not made here: only the 
 times and seasons said to be in the power 
 of the Almighty Father, Who ordereth all 
 things κατά τήν βουλ^ι/ του θε\ϊ\ματος 
 αΰτοϋ. The Knowledge of the Son is not 
 here in question, only that of the disciples. 
 It is an enquiry intimately connected with 
 the interpretation of the two passages, but 
 one beyond our power to resolve, how far, 
 among the things not yet put under His 
 
 Β 
 
 feet, may be this very thing, the knoivledge 
 of that dag and hour. — Bengel attempts 
 to evade the generality of the οϋχ υμών 
 εατιν : — 'quae apostolorum nondum erat 
 nosse, per Apocalypsin postea sunt signifi- 
 cata.' But signified to whom ? What in- 
 dividual, or portion of the Church, has ever 
 read plainly these χρόνους ή καιρούς in 
 that mysterious book .'' — There is truth in 
 Olsh.'s remark, that the Apostles were to be 
 less prophets of the future, than witnesses 
 of the past ; but we must not so limit the 
 υμών, nor forget that the γνώναι χρόνους 
 η καιρ. has very seldom been imparted by 
 prophecy, which generally has formed a 
 testimony to this very fact, that God has 
 them in His foreknowledge, and, while He 
 announces the events, conceals for the most 
 part in obscurity the times, χρ. ή 
 
 καιρ.] not synonymous ; as Meyer ob- 
 serves, καιρός is always a definite limited 
 space of time, and involves the idea of 
 transitoriness. See also Tittmann, N. T. 
 Synonymes, pp. 39 — 45. «θ. ev τη 18. 
 
 έξ.] Some (De Wette, al.) render ' hath 
 appointed bg His own power;' I should 
 rather take iv ίξ. as in ch. v. 4, 'in His 
 own power,' and understand by ίθετο 
 ' kept,' ' (hath) placed,' as E. V. But the 
 aor. sense should be preserved : the period 
 referred to being that of the arrangement 
 of the divine counsels of Redemption. 
 8.] ' Quod optimum frsenandae cu- 
 riositati remedium erat, Christus eos revo- 
 cat tam ad Dei promissionem, quara ad 
 mandatum.' Calvin. αλλά, ' antithe- 
 
 ton inter id quod discipulorum erat, vel 
 non erat ; turn inter id quod illo tempore 
 futurum erat, et inter id, quod in ulteriora 
 reservatum erat.' Bengel. δύνομιν, 
 
 that power, especially, spoken of ch. iv. 33, 
 connected with their office of witnessing tt» 
 the resurrection ; but also all other spiritual 
 2
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 ich.xiii.47. £,/ 7£ Ίίρουσαλτ)^ κα\ πάστι ry 'Ιουδαία και Έ,αμαρξία και abcde 
 
 ταύτα ειπών βΧίποντων 
 νπίΧαβίν αυτόν " αττο των 
 
 ' ^S!' j"nxui. "ί'ως ίσχάτου της γης. ^ και 
 
 18al. met., , „ | f , /j χ /-γ 
 
 2Cor. χ. 5. πυτων ίπιιρυη, και νξψζλη 
 "'pl.*'xi!x™lr οφθαλμών αίιτώ»'. ^ και ως '' ατίΐχςοντίς ήσαν £ίς τον 
 
 η = Lukexxiv. 
 
 31. 
 ο Lake ϊϊ. 20. 
 
 ch. iii. 4, 12. 
 
 xiv. 9. xxiii. 
 
 ] al. Jub vii. 
 
 8alex. 
 ρ ab.s , Matt.ii. 
 
 1) al. fr. 
 q red., Luke ii. 
 
 21 reff 
 r ver. 3 reff. 
 
 ch. xxvii. 2.3. 
 
 2 
 
 12. 2 Mace. xi. 8. 
 vii. 28. Gen. xxvi. 29. 
 
 ουρανυν '' ττορίνομίνου αυτυν, '^ και icov ανδρίς δυο "^ τταρ- 
 
 ίΐστϊΐΚΗσαν αύτοίς ev έσθητι * λίυκρ, οι και ίίπαν 
 
 'Άΐ'δ|θες Γαλιλαίοι, τί ίστί]κατί ' ί^αβλίττοντίς εις τον 
 
 ούτος ο Ιησούς ο " αναΧημφθίΐς αφ υμών εις 
 
 ελιυσεται " ον τροττον εθίασασθε 
 
 ^ υπίστ(>ίφαν 
 
 ν Matt, xxiii. 37 |. ch. 
 
 ουρανον 
 
 τον ουραΐΌν ούτως 
 
 12 
 
 ■pc 
 τότε 
 
 t £<Γ, Matt. Ti. 20. Ι.•;», li. 1, 2. u — ver. 2 reff. 
 
 w — Luke i. 6H al. fr. Gen. 1. 14. 
 
 Origi Till : txt ACD al cop Origi Hil. — σημαρία ADE al.— 9. D has καντα (sic) 
 ί(7Γθ»'Γος αυτού νεφΐλη υπίβαλίν αντον και αττηρΟη αττο (των D^) οψθ. συτ., and 
 simly sah Augi (but retaining βλεπόντων αντωΐ') al. — 10. τταριστηκίΐσαν CE al. — 
 ίσθηπεσιν λίυκαις {a hasty cnrr, from two men being mentd) ABC 27• 29. 81 al ν copt 
 Bah Syr arm Eus {ισθησι λ.) : txt C^DE al Cosm Thl Aug. — 11. rec ίΐτΓον, with C^E &c: 
 txt ABC'D. — /3λίποΐ'Γίς BE (aspicientes e) all Eus Chr (mss) Thdrt Thlj : art- 
 νιζοντις Epiph : txt ACD (tr/S.) al Cosm. — αναλημψ. see ver 2. — εις τον οι/ρ. (2nd) 
 om D 33». 34. 105 tol Augi Vig Avit (13. 31'. 69'. 100 sah cm from 1st ουρ. to 
 2nd). — for ουΓως, ούτος all Thdrt. — 12. tic ιεροσολνμα Ε ν : add ot απόστολοι {an eccle- 
 
 power. See Luke xxiv. 49. μ-άρτυρίς] 
 
 This was the peculiar work of the Apostles. 
 See on vv. 21, 22, and Prolegg. vol. i. § iii. 5. 
 ev T€ 'itp ] By the exten- 
 sion of their testimony, from Jerusalem to 
 Samaria, and then indefinitely over the 
 world, He reproves, by implication, their 
 carnal anticipation of the restoration of the 
 Kingdom to Israel thus understood. The 
 Kingdom was to be one founded on μαρ- 
 τυρία, and therefore reigning in the con- 
 victions of men's hearts ; and not confined 
 to Judaea, but coextensive with the world. 
 — They understood this command only of 
 Jews scattered through the world, see ch. 
 xi. 19. — De Wette observes, that these 
 words contain the whole plan of the Acts : 
 λημφεσθε δύναμιν, κ.τ.λ., ch. ii. 1 — end; 
 iv 'Ιερουσαλήμ, ch. iii. 1 — vi. 7 ; then the 
 martyrdom of Stephen dispersed them 
 through Judata, vi. 8 — viii. 3 ; they preach 
 in Samaria, viii. 4 — 40 ; and, from that 
 point, the conversion of the Apostle of the 
 Gentiles, the vision of Peter, the preaching 
 and journeys of Paul. In their former 
 mission. Matt. x. 5, 6, they had been ex- 
 pressly forbidden from preaching either to 
 Samaritans or Gentiles. 9.] This ap- 
 
 pears (see Prolegg. vol. I. ch. iv. 5. 2) to be 
 an account of the Ascension given to Luke 
 subsequently to the publication of his 
 Gospel, more particular in detail than that 
 found in it. He has not repeated here 
 details found there ; see Luke xxiv. 50 — 52. 
 On the Ascension in general, see note on 
 Luke, 1. c. Ιπήρθη] " ' was taken 
 
 up,' — we may understand of the com- 
 mencing ascent .... ί7Γελαβ£ν by a pregn. 
 constr. involves the idea of aivay as well 
 as up, and hence takes after it αττο. This 
 verb describes the close of the scene, as 
 far as it was visible to the spectators." 
 Hackett. ν€φ£λη] There was a 
 
 manifest propriety in the last withdrawal 
 of the Lord, while ascending, not consist- 
 ing in a disappearance of His Body, as on 
 former occasions since the Resurrection ; 
 for thus might His abiding Humanity have 
 been called in question. As it was. He went 
 up, past the visible boundary of Heaven, the 
 cloud, — in human form, and so we think 
 of and pray to Him. 10. άτίνίζ. ήσαν] 
 
 ' they were gazing,' stood gazing. 
 «Is T. ούρ. belongs to άτενίζ., not to ττορευ- 
 ομ., see reff. 'ΠΌρ€υομενον, not Troptw- 
 
 θίντος: implying that the cloud remained 
 visible for some time, probably ascending 
 with Him. τταρίΐστήκεισ-αν, imperf. 
 
 in sense, as the perf. is present : ' were 
 Standing by them.' avSpes] evi- 
 
 dently angels. See Luke xxiv. 4. John 
 XX. 12. 11. ot και ei-irav] ' who (not 
 
 only appeared but) also said.' There is a 
 propriety in the address, civcp. Γαλιλαίοι, 
 It served to remind them of their origin, 
 their call to be His disciples, and the duty 
 of obedience to Him resting on them in 
 consequence. Sv rpoirov] ' in the same 
 manner as ;' — to be taken in all cases 
 literally, not as implying mere certainty : 
 see reff. οίίτως, i. e. εν νεφίλψ, 
 
 Luke xxi. 27. His corporeal identity is
 
 9—14. 
 
 ΠΡΑ^ΞίΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛίΙΝ. 
 
 ii.ninr η » Lnke xix. 29 
 
 no VOL,, υ only jo5 
 Antt. vii. 
 
 εις ΙερουσαΧημ αττο ορούς του καΧουμενου " ελα 
 
 εστίν εγγύς ΙερουσαΛίμι, σαρρατου ^χον οοον. και 9.2.= 
 
 μένοντες, ο τε Πέτρος καί Ιωάννης κοι Ιάκωβος 
 
 οτε ειςηΧθον, εις το υπεηωον ανεβησαν ου ήσαν κατά- e\aiS,v, 
 
 ' , Lake xix. 37 
 
 "■"' y — here only. 
 
 Ανδρέας, ΦιΧιτητος και Οωμας, Βαρθολομαίος και Ματ- /ι^ίΐ^ίί.' 
 θαιος, Ιάκωβος ΑΧψα'ιου και Έίμων ο ζηλωτής, και f ^Ma'^tl'vin*' 
 
 'Τ'5' 'Τ'/3 14''' ' c* e nal.ch.ix.6. 
 
 Ιουοας Ιακωρου. ούτοι τταντες ήσαν ττοοςκαοτε- eiiips., here 
 
 * "* only. 
 
 bch.ix.37,3i». ΧΧ.8. 2King9 xviii.33. Ezek.xli.7. c cnnstr., Late x.20. Jer. xxxiii. 2U. d here 
 
 only. Num. XX. 1 al. e = ch. τι. 4 al. Rom. lii. 12 al. Luke and Paul only. See Mark iii. 9. Num. xiii. 21. 
 
 siastical portion beginning at υττίστρίψαν) 13. 40. 78• 96. 117 al Thl. — for σαβ. ίχ. οδ,, 
 τοσούτον ον το διάστημα, όσον δυνατόν ιονδαιω ττίριττατησαι tv ααββατω 40 : et 
 dintat ab ea quasi septem stadia Syr : spatio cursus viri quad est iter primi sabbati aeth. 
 — 13. ίίςηλθίν D-gr. — rec ανφησαν ιις τ. υπ. [corr to avoid ambig of ιιςηΚΘ. ιις το νπ.), 
 with DE al tol cop sah al : txt ABC'C^ al ν Chr Thl^-comm Bed-gr. — rec ιακ. κ. ιωαν., 
 with Ε al Bed-gr (but prenxg ανδρ. και) : txt ABCD (ιωανης) al ν all Aug (ττίτρ. ic. «ω. κ. 
 ανδρ. κ. ιακ. Bed). — μαθθαιος B.'D. — 14. rec aft ττροςίυχη add και τη δίησει, with C al 
 
 implied in ούτος ό Ιησούς. cXcv- 
 
 σίται] ' Non ii, qui ascendentem viderunt, 
 dicuntur venturum visuri. Inter ascen- 
 sionem et inter adventum gloriosum nullus 
 interponitur eventus eorum utrique par : 
 ideo hi duo conjunguntur. Merito igitur 
 Apostoli ante datam Apocalypsin diem 
 Christi ut valde propinquum proposuerunt. 
 Et congruit majestati Christi, ut toto inter 
 ascensionem et inter adventum tempore sine 
 intermissione expectetur.' Bengel. 
 12.] In so careful a writer (see Luke i. 3) 
 there must be some reason why this minute 
 specification of distance should be here in- 
 serted, when no such appears in the Gospel. 
 And I beUeve this will be found, by com- 
 bining the hint dropped by Chrysostom, — 
 ioKtl δι μοι και σαββάτψ yeyovevai 
 ταϋτα' oh yap αν οντω το διάστημα 
 
 ίδή\ωσ(ν εί μη ώηισμίνον τι μήκος 
 
 ίβάδιζον εν Ty ήμίρί} τον σαββάτον, — 
 with the declaration in the Gospel (sxiv. 
 50) that He led them out as Jar as to 
 Bet hang. This latter was (John xi. 18) 
 fifteen stadia from Jerusalem, which is 
 more than twice the Sabbath-day's journey 
 (2000 paces = about six furlongs). Now 
 if the Ascension happened on the Sabbath, 
 it is very possible that offence may have 
 arisen at the statement in the Gospel ; and 
 that therefore the Evangelist gives here the 
 more exact notice, that the spot, although 
 forming part of the district of Bethany, 
 was yet on that part of the Mount of 
 Olives which fell within the limits of the 
 Sabbath-day's journey. This of course 
 must be a mere conjecture ; but it will not 
 be impugned by tlie fact of the Ascension 
 being kept by the Church in after-ages on 
 a Thursday. This formed no hindrance to 
 Chrysostom in making the above suppo- 
 sition : although the festival was certainly 
 observed in his time (see Bingham, Orig. 
 Eccl. XX. G. 5. There is no mention of it 
 
 in the Fathers of the first three centuries). 
 Forty days from the Resurrection is an 
 expression which would suit as well the 
 Saturday of the seventh week as the Thurs- 
 day, — The distance of the Mount of Olives 
 from Jerusalem is stated by Josephus at 
 five stadia, Antt. xx. 8. 6, — at six stadia, 
 B. J. v. 2, 3 ; different points being taken 
 as the limit. The present church of the 
 Ascension rather exceeds the distance of 
 six stadia from the city. — The use of ίλαιώΐ', 
 -ώί'ος, here (and in ref.) only by Luke is re- 
 markable, especially as the whole passage is 
 so much in his own distinctive style as to 
 preclude the idea of his having transferred 
 a written document. — ίχοί' is not for 
 άπεχον, but as in τριάκ. όκτ. ετη έχων, 
 John V. 5, and in reff. ; the space or time 
 mentioned being regarded as an attribute 
 of the subject. 13. είςήλθ.] ' into 
 
 the city ;' see reff. το -ιητίρω.] The 
 
 idea that this was a chamber in the Temple 
 has originated in low literal-harmonistic 
 views, Luke having stated (Luke xxiv. 53) 
 that they were διαπαντος tv τψ Ίερψ. As 
 if such an expression could be literally un- 
 derstood, or taken to mean more tlian that 
 they were there at all appointed times (see 
 ch. iii. 1). It is in the highest degree im- 
 probable that the disciples would be found 
 assembled in any public place at this time. 
 The upper chamber was perhaps that in 
 which the last Supper had been taken ; pro- 
 bably that in which they had been since 
 then assembled (John xx. 1!), 20), but cer- 
 tainly one in a private house. Lightf. 
 shews that it was the practice of the Jews 
 to retire into a largo chamber under the flat 
 roof for purposes of deliberation or prayer. 
 See Neander, Pfl. u. Leit., p. 13, note. 
 oS ήσαν. κατ.] not to be taken as 
 in E. V. ' where abode both Peter,' &c. ; 
 which gives the idea that Peter, &c. were 
 already in the chamber, and the rest joined
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 Γ. 
 
 ροΰντες ^ ομοθυμαδόν τρ ^ π/οοςευχτ} συν yvvai^iv και abcde 
 «."like M«/ota/u Ty μητρι τον 'Ιησού και τοις αδίλψοις αυτοΰ. 
 
 ^^ Και '' fp ταίς ημίραις τανταις ' ανπστας Πίτρος εΐ' 
 
 f eh. ϋ. 1 
 II times in 
 Arts. 
 
 μίσω των αδελφω»* είπε»' [ην τε ΰχλος ονομάτων '" επι 
 
 and Paul 
 only. Num. 
 xxiT. 24«1. 
 g abs., Matt 
 xxi. la |. Ps. . 
 
 iv. lal. V 1 \ f « \ ,/ \ 16 I' '' Λ Si , ' ? Λ j. ' <> ''2', 
 
 hnh.vi. I.Luke TO ουτο ως tKOTOv tiKooi) Άνοξϋς αόίΛψοι, εοει 
 
 i"ch "Vi*? ^ "' ^ττΧηρωθηναι την '^■γραφην ταί/την ην ' προίίπεν το πνεύμα 
 
 Luke ν 29. Ν« ^>s ' λ'^ ''f'^ " ' 
 
 Ti.i7. TO α -ytov οια στόματος ΔουιΟ περί Ιουοα του 7ε'ΌΜεΐΌυ 
 
 l-Rev. iii.4. ' ' ' 
 
 li. 13. Num- xxTi. 53. m ch.ii. 1. iii. 1. ICor. xi.20. Ps. χχχτί. 38. ncli.Tii2al.fr. ο — Luke 
 
 xxiv.4rt. Dan.ii. 28. ρ — Matt. i. 22 and passim. q =• Matt. xxii. 29. Luke ίτ. 21. Γ Gal. τ. 21. 
 
 1 Thess. ίτ.6 only, προβψ., Matt. χχίτ. 25 al. s — Luke i. 70. ch. iii. 18, 21. iv. 25. XT. 7. 
 
 Thl (txt) : t.xt ABCDE h \4K 81. 142. 177 al it ν syrr ar-erp copt sah seth arm Chrj 
 Thl--comm Cypr Aug Jer Bed. — ταις yvv. D' : add και τίκι•οις D. — rec μαρια 
 {cornt), with ACD &c : txt BE 27. 2!». 40. 81. 9G. 142 al sah.— roi; om B.— for ιησ., 
 Kvpuni 117• — rec aw τοις αδ. avr. {corrn, to diatinyuish off the αδιλφοι αυτόν from 
 His mother) with B(e 8ϋ)^Ε &c : txt ACD 25. 104.1062. 118 al ν copt sah arm 
 Cypr Aug. — 15. tv δί DE sah syr-marg Aug, : txt ABC &c copt &c Thl Aug,: tv v. 
 — ο πίΤί). D. — (μμ(σω ACE. — rec for oitX^wr, μαθητών {corrn, to avoid the triple re- 
 currence of αδίΧφ. in vv 14, 15, 16. Meyer and De W. take αδ. to have been a corrn to 
 suit ανδρ. aitXipoi in ver 16, but the other is muck more prob), with C^DE &c Thl Cypr 
 Aug,: t.xt ABC 8. Υλ. 163 al ν copt sah seth Arm Aug.— for rt, δί CO- d^ (D' γαρ, 
 d' preeterea) 16 al ν e syrr copt Cypr Aug: om Thl' sah: txt AB(e siI)E gr &c ThP. 
 — ΪΟΧ ονοματιον, ανδρών Ε: hominum ν Syr aeth Aug. — wqn AC 40. 118 Thl^.— rec 
 tiKomr (corrn) : txt ABC (ρκ D) Ε (-fffi) &c. — 16. δη D vd Ir-ms Aug: txt AB(e sil) 
 CD^E &c most vss Orig al. — ταντην om ABC h al ν Syr ar-erp copt sah aeth arm 
 Orig2 Eus Ath Did \\g Gild {erased as unnecessary with ην, and perhaps, as Mey. and 
 
 them there : — hvit. On entering the city, 
 they went up into the upper chamber 
 where they (usually) sojourned (not 
 * dwelt :' they did not all dwell in one 
 house; see John xix. 27, note), namely, 
 Peter,' &c. — On the catalogue of the 
 Apostles, see Matt. x. 2, note. 14.] 
 
 σνν γυναιξίν has been rendered ' ivitk their 
 wives,' to which sense Bp. Middleton in- 
 clines, justifying it by σνν yvvaiVi καΐ 
 τϊκνοις, ch. xxi. 5. But the omission of 
 the articles there may be accounted for on 
 the same principle as in Matt. xix. 22, viz. 
 that which Bp. M. calls enumeration, ch. 
 vi. § 2. Here I think we must take σνν yvv. 
 not as meaning ' with women,' as Hackett, 
 but as = σνν ταΐς yvv. (see Middl. ch. 
 vi. § 1), but interpret ταΐς yvv., ' the 
 women,' viz. those spoken of by Luke 
 himself, Luke viii. 2, 3, — where, besides 
 those named, he mentions iVfoot πολΧαί. 
 Many of these were certainly not wives of 
 the Apostles ; and that those women who 
 were ' last at the Cross and earliest at the 
 tomb ' should not have been assembled 
 with the company now, is very improbable, 
 και Μαριάμ] The και gives emi- 
 nence to one among those previously men- 
 tioned. So τώνδ( t'ivtKa, και yrfQ Ίμίρψ, 
 Herod, i. 73. See Hartung, Partikellehre, 
 1. 145. — This is the last mention of her in 
 the N. T. The traditions, which describe 
 her as (1) dying at the age of fifty-nine, in 
 the fifth year of Claudius (Niceph. H. E. 
 ii. 21), or (2) accompanying John to Ephe- 
 
 sus, and being buried there (see Winer, 
 Realworterb. art. Maria), are untrustwor- 
 thy. Other accounts, with the authorities, 
 may be seen in Butler's Lives of the 
 Saints, Aug. 15. The fable of the As- 
 sumption has wo foundation even in tradi- 
 tion. Tois άδελφ. αντ.] This clearly 
 shews, as does John vii. 5 compared with 
 vi. 67• 70, that none of the brethren of our 
 Lord were of the number of the Twelve. 
 When they were converted, is quite uncer- 
 tain. See the whole subject discussed in 
 note on Matt. xiii. 55, and in the Prole- 
 gomena to the Epistle of James. 
 
 15 — 26.] Election of a twelfth 
 Apcstle to fill the room of Judas 
 IscARioT. 15. iv T. ήμ.. τ.] In the 
 
 days between the Ascension and Pentecost: 
 during which it appears that the number of 
 the assembly had increased, not probably 
 by fresh conversions, but by the gathering 
 round the Apostles of those who had pre- 
 viously been disciples. ήν re] The 
 very frequent use of rt is a pecuharity of 
 the Acts, and should have its weight in 
 determining the reading, even where, as 
 here, δ'ί seems more appropriate. It occurs 
 in the Gospel 5 times: in the Acts, 121. 
 εκατόν είκοσι] De Wette asks, 
 ' where were the 500 brethren of 1 Cor. 
 XV. 6.'' We surely may answer, 'not in 
 Jerusalem.' See Neander, Pfl. u. Leit., 
 p. 72, note. 16.] We may enquire, 
 by what change in mind and power Peter 
 was able, before the descent of the Spirit,
 
 15—19. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λί2Ν. 
 
 'οδηγού τοις " συλλαβοΰσίυ Ιησονν, ^' οτι ^ κ:πτί7|θΐθμί/- "^^'ί;^/'.?^ 
 
 μίνος -ην εν ημιν και '" ίλανει» τον " κληρον της ^ ^ια- oiMy.'Ezra 
 
 κονιας ταύτης. ούτος μίν ονν ίκτησατο \ωξ>ιον ίκ " fts^^a^'ch^lu' 
 
 μισθού της '^ αοικιας, και πρηνης '^ ^ίνόμίνος ίΧάκησίν \h^rioa\y. 
 
 re r ^h*!^'/} ' ^ λ/ ■''^IQ ^ Gen I. 3 al, 
 
 μίσος και είι,ίγυυη πάντα τα σπλα•γ\να αυτού, και ^^^1"°^ 
 
 w = 2Pet. ί. 1. 3 Mace. Ti. 1. χ cli. Wii. 21. xxvi. 18. y = Rom. χι. 13al. ch. xx. 24 alt 
 
 ζ = John iv. 5. ch. ir. 34. T. 3, 8. a = Malt. xx. 2. xxvii. 7. b = Malt. xx. 8. Luke x. 7. Rom. 
 
 iv. 4. 2Pet. ii. 13. c = Luke xiii. 27. i Kings iii. 13, 14. d here only t. Wisd. iv. IH. 
 
 e — ch. xvi. 27 al. fhereonlyf. g constr.. Lake xxiii. 45. h — Matt. ix. 17. 2 Kings xx. 10. 
 
 De W., because no citation immediately folloivs) : t.xt C'DE &c. — rec bef ιησονν ins 
 τον (corrn), with C'OE &c Thl : tet ABC Eus. — 17. rec irvv ημιν (corrn to better 
 Greek ; see ref 2 Chron), with most mss (Scholz) : t.^t ABCDE h all ν sah Eus. — for και, 
 ος D' (not d). — 18. rec του μισθ. {corrn in ignorance of the usage which omits 
 the art aft a preposition; see Middleton, ch. vi. 1), with qu .' : t.xt ABCD (D sah 
 syr* Eus Aug add αντον) Ε h all Eus Chrys Thl OeCj. — for ττμηνης, ττρινης 
 (common confusion in MSS, see Luke xiv. 13, 21) AC 2(j. 33. CO. 98'. 105 al : promts 
 d e ; suspensus ν Bed : dejectus in faciem Aug : ττρησθιις Papias in Thl (in toe. but 
 qu did P. read it in this place ?). — ίλακισί al Thl. — πάντα om A Thl' Gaud. — 
 
 thus authoritatively to speak of Scripture 
 and the divine purposes .' The answer 
 will be found in the peculiar gift of the 
 Spirit to the Apostles, John xx. 21, 23; 
 where see note. — The pre-eminency of 
 Peter here is the commencement of the 
 fulfilment of Matt. xvi. 18, 19 (see note 
 there). 17.] on, not ' although ' 
 
 (Kuinoel), but ' for.' There may be an 
 
 ellipsis : ' guide to them that took 
 
 Jesus : but this was not his only character, 
 for — ;' or the on may have reference to 
 the substance of the prophecy, already in 
 Peter's mind, and serve to explain /; 
 ΐπαυΚις αϋτον and »'/ έττισκοπ») αϋτοϋ. 
 Ιλαχίν τον κλήρον] not literally, 
 but inasmuch as the lot of every man is 
 regarded as being cast and appointed by 
 God. — κλήρος, first, the lot itself; then, 
 that apportioned by lot ; then, any species 
 of apportionment, whether possession, or 
 office, as here. 18.] This verse can- 
 
 not be regarded as inserted by Luke ; for, 
 1. the place of its insertion would be most 
 unnatural for a historical notice : 2. the 
 μίν ουν forbids the supposition: 3. the 
 whole style of the verse is rhetorical, and 
 not narrative, e. g. ούτος, μισθού της 
 αδικίας. — The ίκτΙ/σατο χωρίον does not 
 appear to agree with the account in Matt. 
 xxvii. 6 — 8 ; nor, consistently with com- 
 mon honesty, can they be reconciled, tinless 
 we knew more of the facts than we do. If 
 we compare the two, that of Matthew is 
 the more particular, and more likely to 
 give rise to this one, as a general inference 
 from the buying of the field, than vice 
 versa. Wlietlier Judas, as Bengel sup- 
 poses, ' initio eintionis facto, occasionem 
 dederit ut Sacerdotes earn consummarent,' 
 we cannot say: such a thing is of course 
 possible. At all events we hence clearly 
 see that Luke could not have been ac- 
 
 quainted with the Gospel of Matthew at 
 this time, or surely this apparent discre- 
 pancy would not have been found. The 
 various attempts to reconcile the two nar- 
 ratives, which may be seen in most of our 
 English commentaries, are among the sad- 
 dest examples of the shifts to which other- 
 wise high-minded men are driven by an 
 unworthy system. και irp. γίν.] The 
 
 connexion of this with the former clause 
 would seem to point to the death of Judas 
 having taken place in the field which he 
 bought. See also ver. 19. •ΐΓρηνή5 
 
 Y€vo|xevos will hardly bear the meaning as- 
 signed to it by those who wish to harmonize 
 the two accounts, — viz. that, having hanged 
 himself, he fell by the breaking of the rope. 
 πρηνίις' ini ττρόςωπον ττίπτωκώς, Hesych. 
 'όλον /ΧΕΙ' το σώμα κύσθαι ττρηνίς λίγομιν, 
 'όταν ») μίν γαστήρ κάτωθιν, άνωθιν Si 
 y το νώτον. Galen, cited by Wetstein. 
 ττρηνής, ιίς τοΰμττυοσθιι•, ίπϊ στόματος, 
 Etymol. Nor again is it at all probable 
 that the Apostle would recount what was 
 a mere accident accompanying his death, 
 when that death itself was the accursed one 
 of hanging. What then are we to decide 
 respecting the two accounts ? That there 
 should have been a double account actually 
 current of the death of Judas at this early 
 period is iti the highest degree improbable, 
 and will only be assumed by those (De 
 Wette, &c.) who take a very low view of 
 the accuracy of the Evangelists. Dismiss- 
 ing then this solution, let us compare the 
 accounts themselves. In this case, that in 
 Matt, xxvii. is general, — ours particular. 
 That depends entirely on the exact sense 
 to be assigned to άττηγξατο (ρ^Π?.!! και 
 άπήγξατυ, 2 Sam. xvii. 23) : whereas this 
 distinctly assigns the manner of his death, 
 without stating any cause for the fiiMinji, on 
 his face. It is obvious that, while tlio
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 I. 
 
 τοις 
 
 'h 
 
 γνωστού t-ytvero πασίΡ 
 
 " Λ Λ" ^ k ' 
 
 ωςτε ΚΛηυηναί το χωρίον 
 
 αυτών ΑκίΧοαμάγ^, '" τουτίστιν χωρίον αίματος. "" γε- 
 
 ΎρατΓται yap εν β'ιβλω φαλμων Τίνηθητω ή " ίπαυΧις 
 
 κατοικονσιν ίίρηυσαΧημ. 
 
 ε/ίί/νο Ttj icia διαλεκτω 
 
 k /„.. _'' ' __ _ 20 
 
 1— John χτϋΙ. 
 
 15, Hi. th.is. 
 
 42 al. Ps. 
 
 IxxT. 1. 
 jconstr, Matt. 
 
 xxiii. 21. 
 
 Rev. xii. 12. 
 
 xiT β τ. r. 
 
 xvii. 2 (be- 
 sides Acts^ 
 
 °°J,y «•':''• 9 αυτού ϊρημος, και μι) έστω "ο κάτοικων εν αύτη. και 
 
 k ver. 18. 1 ch. ii. 6, 8 al. Acts only. Esth. ix. 26. m ch. xix. 4 reff. η Psa. IxtuI. 25. here only. 
 
 ο art., Matt. it. 3 al. 
 
 19. KOI DgraP Aug : καιτοντο sah. — πασι C. — ιίια otn D ν sah arm Aug : lovSaia 42^. 
 57• — πι/των διαλ. Ε 1G3 Aug. — rcc ακί\?αμα, with C &c copt ν &c : t.xt A (αχελΰ. A 40) 
 Β (Birch and Bentl) D (ακιλίαιμηχ D tol Aug: acheldemac am lux Bed: acheldemach 
 demid i)C lat) Ε {μακ. -mas e) verss {akyldamach sah). — 20. for αντου (first), αντιον 
 al V (not am demid al) d' seth arm. — for έστω, η D. — rec for λαβίτω, λαβοι {corrn to suit 
 
 general term used by Matthew points 
 mainly at self-mnrder, the account given 
 here does not preclude the catastrophe 
 related having happened, in some way, as a 
 divine judgment, during the suicidal at- 
 tempt. Further than this, with our pre- 
 sent knowledge, we cannot go. An accurate 
 acquaintance with the actual circumstances 
 would account for the discrepancy, but no- 
 thing else. — Another kind of death is as- 
 signed to Judas by CEcumenius, quoting 
 from Papias : laroptl Πάπιας ό του Ιωάν- 
 νου του άτΓοστ. μαθητής, λέγων μίγη 
 της άσίβίΐας ϋπόδίίγμα iv τοντψ τψ 
 κόσμψ π(ριιπάτησεν Ιούδας• ττρησθιΊς 
 γαρ ίπ\ την σάρκα, ωςτΐ μη δΰνασθαι 
 ίιελθίΐν, άμάζης ρ^ί/ως δκρχομίνης, ύπό 
 της άμάζης ίπιέσθη, ωςτί τά ϊγκατα 
 αΰτον ίκκίνωθήναι. Theophylact quotes 
 the same on Matt, xxvii., but without the 
 last words ύπό της άμ. κ.τ.λ., which De 
 Wette supposes to have been inserted from 
 CEcumenius having misunderstood Papias. 
 If so, the tradition is in accordance with, 
 and has arisen from an exaggerated ampli- 
 fication of, our text. See the whole pas- 
 sage from Theophylact cited, and a discus- 
 sion whether it is rightly ascribed to Papias, 
 in Routh, Reliquiae Sacrse, vol. i. p. 9, and 
 notes. έλάκησίν] 'cracked asunder:' 
 
 it implies bursting with a noise. It is quite 
 possible that this catastrophe happening in 
 the field, as our narrative implies, may have 
 suggested its employment as a burial-place 
 for strangers, as being defiled. So Stier, 
 Reden der Apostel, i. 10. 19.] It is 
 
 principally from this verse that it has been 
 inferred that the two vv. 18, 19 are inserted 
 by Luke. But it is impossible to separate 
 it from ver. 18; and I am disposed to re- 
 gard both as belonging to Peter's speech, 
 but freely Graecised by Luke, inserting into 
 the speech itself the explanations tiJ Ιδία 
 διαλ. αύτ., and τουτίστιν χ. α'ίμ., as if the 
 speech had been spoken in Greek originally. 
 This is much more natural, than to paren- 
 thesize these clauses ; it is, in fact, what 
 must be more or less done by all who re- 
 port in a language different from that ac- 
 
 tually used by the speaker. The words and 
 idioms of another tongue contain allusions 
 and national pecuUarities which never could 
 have been in the mind of one speaking in 
 a different language ; but the ear tolerates 
 these, or easily separates them, if critically 
 exercised. γνωστόν . . . ] See Luke 
 
 xxiv. 18. ωςτε] in Matt, xxvii. 8, the 
 
 name ' the field of blood ' is referred to 
 the fact of its having been bought with the 
 price of blood .• here, to the fact of Judas 
 having there met with a signal and bloody 
 death. On the whole, I believe the result 
 to which I have above inclined will be found 
 the best to suit the phaenomena of the two 
 passages, — viz. that, with regard to the 
 purchase of the field, the more circum- 
 stantial account in Matthew is to be 
 adopted ; with regard to the death of Judas, 
 the more circumstantial account of Luke. 
 The clue which joins these has been lost to 
 us : and in this, only those will find any 
 stumbling-block, whose faith in the veracity 
 of the Evangelists is very weak indeed. 
 *Ακ£λδα|χάχ] i^OT "Jirn. The field 
 originally belonged to a potter, and was 
 probably a piece of land which had been 
 exhausted of its clay fit for his purposes, 
 and so was useless. Jerome relates that it 
 was still shewn on the S. side of Mount 
 Sion (fv βορίίοις του Σιών ορούς, but by 
 mistake, Eusebius), in which neighbour- 
 hood there is even now a bed of white clay 
 (see Winer, RWB, ' Blutacker '). 
 20.] γάρ, the connexion being, ' all this 
 happened and became known,' &c., ' in 
 accordance with the prophecy,' &c. Ps. 
 Ixix. is eminently a Messianic psalm, — 
 spoken in the first place of David and his 
 kingdom and its enemies, and, according to 
 the universal canon of O. T. interpretation, 
 of Him in whom that kingdom found its 
 true fulfilment, and of His enemies. And 
 Judas being the first and most notable of 
 these, the Apostle applies eminently to 
 him the words which in the Psalm are 
 spoken in the plural of all such enemies. 
 The same is true of Ps. cix., and there one 
 adversary is even more pointedly marked
 
 20—24. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 Tjjv ^ ίττισκοττην αντοΰ ΧαβΙτω έτερος. ^ δει ουι^ των 
 '^ συνίΧθόντων ημιν ανόρων ίν παντι χρονω ω ^ ειςί)λθεν 
 Καί εςϊ/λσεν εφ 7jjuag ο κύριος Ιΐϊσους, αρςαμενος 
 
 απυ του βατττ'ισματυς Ιωάννου εως της ημί^ας " ής 
 ^ αΐ'ζΑημφΘη "" αφ Ί^μων, ^ μάξ)τνξ>α της ^ αναστάσίως 
 αυτού συν ημιν yiveauai ενα τούτων. και έστησαν 
 
 ουο, Ιωσήφ τον κα\ονμ(νον Βορσαββαν, ος ^ ΐπίκΧηθη 
 Ιοΰστος, και Ματθίαν. και προςευ^άμίνοι ύπαν Συ 
 
 τ — ver 2 reff. w = ver. 9 refF. χ ver. 8 reff. y — cb.ii. 31al. Rom. ri. 
 
 IPct. iii.21(. z=ch. Ti. 6. aMatt. x. Sal. 
 
 LXX) with Ε &c: λαβή Thl : txt ABCD 8. 25 al Eus Chrys.— 21. ανδρών om 100 
 Chr-comtrij : ανδρ. τοντ. bef σννίλθ. d ν arm. — τω χρονω D. — rec bef ω ins fv 
 (corrn) with C (and appy C-) Ε &c : txt ABC'D^ {ως D' quoniam d'). — at end add 
 χριστός D vss Aug. — 22. rec αιεληφθη with C &c : txt A(B.')DE &c. — rec yeviaOai 
 συν ημ. with qu ? txt ABCD 5. 31. 40 ν arm Chrj Aug. — 23. aft /cm ins τουτωρ 
 λεχθίντων Ε Bed-gr. — ίστησεν D^ d ar-pol Aug.— for ιωσηφ, ιωσην Β (Bartol) 5 lect 1 
 syr sah. — rec βαρσαβαν with C &c Eus (or perhaps Papias : see note) : txt ABE all 
 am copt sah syr Eus ms: -ναβαν D tol seth. — μαθθιαν D (and ver 26). — 24. rec ίίπον : 
 
 ρ PsA. cviii. 8. 
 
 1 Titn.iii. 1. 
 q =- ch. ix. 38. 
 
 X. 23 al. 
 
 •= Lake only. 
 
 see Mark 
 
 xiT. ί>3. 
 Γ see Ps. cxx. 
 
 8. Deut. 
 
 xxsi. 2. 
 
 constr., 
 
 Eurip. 
 
 Phoen. 534, 5. 
 s = Lqke ii. 8. 
 
 xii. 14. Heb. 
 
 X.21. 
 t ver. 1 reff. 
 η attr., ver. 1 
 
 reff. 2 Cor. 
 
 i.4. 
 6. Phil. iii.lO. 
 
 εΐΓίσκοιτήν 
 The citations 
 
 out. See also Ps. Iv. 
 = rnpE, office, or charge, 
 are freely from the LXX. 21.] ovv, 
 
 since all this has happened to Judas, and 
 since it is the divine will that another 
 should take the charge which was his. 
 ev iravTi χρόνω] This definition of 
 the necessary qualification of an apostle 
 exactly agrees with our Lord's saying in 
 John XV. 27: και ύμεϊς Si μαρτνρητι, 'ότι 
 άπ' άρχης μίτ ϊμοΰ ίστ(. See Prolegg. 
 vol. I. i. 3. 5. ίΐβήλθ. κ. ίΙήλθ. €φ' 
 
 ημάς] An abridged constr. for ίίςήΧΘ. ίψ' 
 ημάς Κ. ίζηΧΘ' άψ' ημών. 22. βατττ. 
 
 Ίωόν.] Not ' His leing baptized by John ' 
 (as Wolf, Kuin., &c.); but 'the baptism 
 of John,' as a well-known date, including 
 of course the opening event of our Lord's 
 ministry. His own baptism. That John 
 continued to baptize for some time after 
 that, can be no possible objection to the 
 assignment of ' John's baptism ' generally, 
 as the date of the commencement of the 
 apostolic testimony (agst De Wette). 
 μάρτ. της άναστ.] This one event was the 
 passage-point between the Lord's life of 
 humiliation and His Ufe of glory, — the 
 completion of His work below and begin- 
 ning of His work above. And to ' give 
 witness with power' of the Resurrection 
 (ch. iv. 33), would be to discourse of it as 
 being all this ; in order to which, the whole 
 ministry of Jesus must be within the cycle 
 of the Apostle's experience. — It is remark- 
 able that Peter here lays down experience 
 of matters of fact, not eminence in any 
 subjective grace or quality, as the con- 
 dition of Apostleship. But the testimony 
 was not to be mere allefration of matters of 
 fact — any who had seen the Lord since His 
 
 resurrection were equal to this ; — but a dis- 
 tinct office, requiring the especial selection 
 and grace of God. 23.] Ιστησαν, 
 
 viz. the whole company, to whom the words 
 had been spoken ; not the eleven Apostles. 
 Ιωσήφ . . . . ] The names Ιωσήφ 
 and ΊωσΓ;ς, different forms of the same, 
 are confused in the MSS., both here and in 
 ch. iv. 36. But Barsabbas (or Barsabas) 
 and Barnabas are not to be confounded : 
 they are different names (Barsabbas = son 
 of Sabba or Saba : Barnabas, see iv. 36, 
 note) ; and Barnabas is evidently intro- 
 duced in iv. 36 as a person who had not 
 been mentioned before. — Nothing is known 
 of him. Eseb., iii. 39, states, on the 
 authority of Papias, that he drank a cup of 
 poison without being hurt. — In all proba- 
 bility both these (see Eus. i. 12) belonged 
 to the number of the Seventy, as it would 
 be natural that the candidates for Apostle- 
 ship should be chosen from among those 
 who had been already distinguished by 
 Christ Himself among the brethren. — Jus- 
 tus is a Roman cognomen, assumed accord- 
 ing to a custom then prevalent. The name 
 Justus seems to have been common : 
 Schcittgen, Hor. Hebr., on this place, gives 
 two instances of Jews bearing it. 
 Ματθίαν] Nothing historical is known of 
 him. Traditionally, according to Nicepho- 
 rus (H. E. ii. 40, Winer), he suffered mar- 
 tyrdom in i'l'lthiopia ; according to others, 
 in Colchis (Menolog. Grsec. iii. 1!)8, Winer): 
 another account (Perionii Vita; Apost. \i. 178 
 sqq., Winer) makes him preach in Judiea 
 and stoned by the Jews. Clem. Alex., 
 Strom, ii. p. 163. vii. p. 318, mentions the 
 τταραίόπεις of Matthias, which pcrli.ips 
 were tlie same as an apoci-yi)hal gospel
 
 10 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 Ι. 25, 26. 
 
 Kvoit 
 
 bch. XV. 8 
 
 only t. 
 c Luke x.lonly. 
 
 llab. iii. 2. 
 
 = ΰ Mrtcc. ix 
 
 23. see 
 
 i. 80. 
 e»fr. 17. fffj, 
 
 fRom. i. 5. Ρ^Ι* 
 
 b $1 - ' 
 
 Ka^yoioyvioaTa πάντων, 
 τούτων των όυο εΐ'α 
 
 avaSti^ov ον ίζ,εΧίζω £Κ abcde 
 λαβίίυ τον τοτΓον τΐ}ς " οιακονιας 
 Luke ταύτης και αποστολής, αφ ης ^ παρέρη Ιουοας πο- 
 οηναι εις τον τόπον τον ιοιον. ^ και ίοωκαν κλη- 
 GHi'ii.'aoniy. ρους αυτοΊς, και έπεσεν ο κΧηρος επι Ματί^ιαν, και 
 
 Deut.xxii.•/. ] ι _,! α » - ,/ Λ ' /Λ 
 
 ^Exoj'xx'xn συ^κατί•ψΐ](ρισΌϊ] μιτα των ενοεκα αποστολών. 
 
 •Sir. χχίϋ 18. h = Matt. xxvi. .^2. Job xviii. 21 al Prov. xxrii. 8. 
 
 • Matt, xxvii. 35 ) only. Neh. x. 34. 1 constr., Jonah i. 7. 
 
 i = here only, see Luke xv, 22. 
 m here only t. 
 
 txt ABCD. — rec fc τ. τ. ίυο, tva ον {ξίλ. with many mss : txt ABCDE h many mss ν 
 copt syr slav Eus Bas Dion-areop Chrj Thl Oec Procop : tva ov ίξ. εκ τ. τ. δυο Syr 
 ar-erp arm. — 25. rec for τόπον, κτλι/ρον with mss: txt ABCD {τόπον τον) ν copt sah 
 Procop-expr Aug.— rec ίξ ;jc, with qu? : txtABCD5. 18. 33. CG'. 173 marg al (iie e v: a d 
 Aug) Bas Aug : ?'« sah. — tSiov τοπ. C, τοπ. τ. δίκαιον A, τοπ. αυτού lOl. — 26. rec for 
 avTOLc, αυτών {corrn, see note), with D'E &c Chrj : txt ABCD^ 5. 7• 13. 25. 81. 
 100. 173 marg al ν copt sah slav seth Chr, : cm Syr ar-erp Aug. — ο om D. — 
 συνί\Ρηφισθη D- {av\pi]^. D^). — for (νδίκα, ιβ D : xii d. 
 
 once current under his name, mentioned by 
 Eus., H. E. iii. 25. See Winer, RWB. 
 24.] It is a question, to Whom this 
 prayer was directed. I think all proba- 
 bility is in favour of the Apostle (for Peter 
 certainly was the spokesman) having ad- 
 dressed his glorifed Lord. And with this 
 the language of the prayer agrees. No 
 stress can, it is true, be laid on κύριε : see 
 ch. iv. 29, where unquestionably the Father 
 is addressed : but the έξελβξω, compared 
 with ουκ iyω ύμας τους δώδίκα Ιξίλεξά- 
 μην, John vi. 70, seems to me almost deci- 
 sive. The instance cited on the other side 
 by Meyer, ό θ(6ς .... ίζίλίξατο δια τον 
 στόματος μου άκοϋααι τα ίθνη, κ.τ.λ., is 
 not to the point, as not relating to the 
 matter here in hand ; nor are the passages 
 cited by De Wette, 2 Cor. i. 1. Eph. i. 1. 
 2 Tim. i. 1, where Paul refers his apostle- 
 ship to God, since obviously all such ap- 
 pointment must be referred ultimately to 
 God: — but the question for us is, — In 
 these words, did the disciples pray as they 
 ivould have prayed before the Ascension, 
 or had they Christ in their view ? The 
 expression καρδιογνώστα (used by Peter 
 himself of God, ch. xv. 8) forms no objec- 
 tion : see John xxi. 17, also in the mouth 
 of Peter himself. We are sure, from the 
 προςκυνήσαντΐς αυτόν of Luke xxiv. 52, 
 that even at this time, before the descent of 
 the Spirit, the highest kind of worship was 
 paid to the ascended Redeemer. Still, I 
 do not regard it as by any means certain 
 that they addressed Christ, nor can the 
 passage be alleged as convincing in contro- 
 versy with the Socinian. άνάδίΐξ. 
 »c.r.X.] Not. as in E. \., ^ shew whether of 
 these two Thou hast chosen,' but ' appoint 
 (see reff.) one of these two [him] whom 
 Thou hast chosen.' The difference is of 
 some import : they did not pray for a sign 
 merely, to shew whether of the two was 
 
 chosen, but that the Lord would, by means 
 of their lot, Himself appoint the one of 
 His choice. 25.] roirov is from in- 
 
 ternal evidence, as well as MS. authority, 
 the preferable reading. It has been altered 
 to κλϊίρον to suit ver. I7. διακονίας, 
 
 implying the active duties ; όττοστολής, 
 the official dignity of the office : — no figure 
 of ΐν δίά δνοϊν. τον τόιτον τον 
 
 ίδιον] With the reading τόπον before, I 
 think these words may be interpreted two 
 ways : 1 . that Judas deserted this our 
 τόπος, our office and ministry, to go to his 
 own τόπος, that part which he had chosen 
 for himself, viz. the office and character of 
 a traitor and enemy of God ; 2. regarding 
 the former word τόπος as being selected to 
 correspond to the more proper and dreadful 
 use of the word here, that Judas deserted 
 his τόπος, his appointed place, here among 
 us, that he might go to his own appointed 
 τόπος elsewhere, viz. among the dead 
 in the place of torment. Of these two 
 interpretations, I very much prefer the 
 second, on all accounts; as being more 
 according to the likely usage of the word, 
 and as more befitting the solemnity of such 
 a prayer. At the same time, no absolute 
 senteyice is pronounced on the traitor, but 
 that dark surmise expressed by the eu- 
 phemism τον τόπον τ. 'ιδ., which none can 
 help feeling with regard to him. To refer 
 the words πορ. ε!ς τ. τόπ. τ. ιδ., to the suc- 
 cessor of Judas (Knatchbull, Hammond, 
 al.), ' ut occupet locum ipsi a Deo destina- 
 tum,' (1) is contrary to the form of the sen- 
 tence, which would require και πορίυθηναι ; 
 
 (2) is inconsistent with the words πορ., 
 κ.τ.λ., which are unexampled in this sense ; 
 
 (3) would divest a sentence, evidently so- 
 lemn and pregnant, of all point and mean- 
 ing, and reduce it to a mere tautology. It 
 appears to have been very early understood 
 as above ; for Clement of Rome says of
 
 II. ],2. 
 
 πρα;ξ;εις αποςτΟχ\ων. 
 
 11 
 
 II. Καί ev τω '^ σνμττΧηρονσθαί την Ί]μΒραν της "ττεν 
 τηκοστης ήσαν απαιτες ^ ομοθυμαδόν ^ εττί το αυτό. ^ 
 
 16. 1 Cor. XTi. 8 only f. Tobit ji. 1. 2 Mace. xii. 32. 
 
 ρ ch. L 14 reff. 
 
 η « Lake ix. 
 51 (Luke viii. 
 \ 23 only), see 
 και Dan is. 23 1. 
 ο ch. XX. 
 q ch.i. 15 reff. 
 
 Chap. II. 1. for και εν τω, κηι eytvfro tv ταις ημίραις ικειναις του . . Ό. — τας ημιρας 
 d e ν Syr ar-erp jeth arm slavmod Aug] Vig. — απαντις om Ε 1C.3 Chr : add ο ι αττο- 
 στοΧηι h all slav Thl- : τταντες {apparently error from negligence) ABC {ρντων αντων 
 πάντων D-gr) all Ath. — for o/io0i)/j., ομον (corrn, or perhaps gloss to explain ομυθ., the 
 true meaning being overlooked) ABC^ 18 slav-ms Ath: cm D copt (inter se for ομ. 
 
 Peter (1 Cor. v.), οντω μαρτυρήσας έττορίύ- 
 θη εις rbv όφίίλΰμενον τόπον της ίόζης, 
 an expression evidently borrowed from our 
 text. Lightf., Hor. Hebr. in loc, quotes from 
 the Rabbinical work Baal turim on Num. xxiv. 
 25, — ' Balaam ivit in locum suum, i. e. in 
 Gehennam.' 26. εδωκ. κλήρους αυτούς] 
 
 ' They cast lots for them ; ' the ordinary 
 reading would require τους κλήοους. Αΰ- 
 τωΐ' has been an alteration, to avoid the 
 rendering ' they gave lots to them.' These 
 lots were probably tablets, with the names 
 of the persons written on them, and shaken 
 in a vessel, or in the lap of a robe (Pro v. 
 xvi. 33); he whose lot first leaped out being 
 the person designated. σνγκατ.] The 
 
 lot being regarded as the divine choice, 
 the suffrages of the assembly were unani- 
 mously given (not in form, but by cheerful 
 acquiescence) to the candidate thus chosen, 
 and he was ' voted in ' among the eleven 
 Apostles, i. e. as a twelfth. That Luke 
 does not absolutely sag so, and never after, 
 wards speaks of the twelve Apostles, is 
 surely no safe ground on which to doubt 
 this. — Stier seems disposed to question (in 
 his Reden der Apostel, i. 18 ff., which 
 however was a work of his youth) whether 
 this step of electing a twelfth Apostle was 
 altogether suitable to the then waiting po- 
 sition of the Church, and whether Paul was 
 not in reality the twelfth, chosen by the 
 Lord Himself. But I do not see that any 
 of his seven queries touch the matter. We 
 have the precedent, of all others most ap- 
 plicable, of the twelve tribes, to shew that 
 the number, though ever nominally kept, 
 was really exceeded. And this incident 
 would not occupy a prominent place in a 
 book where Paul himself has so con- 
 spicuous a part, unless it were by him- 
 self considered as being what it pro- 
 fessed to be, the filling up of the vacant 
 Apostleship. 
 
 Chap. II. 1 — 4. The outpouring of 
 THE HoLV Spirit on the disciples.] 
 1. €v τω σ-υμττληροΐσθαι . . . . ] 
 ' While the day of P. was being fulfilled :' 
 ' during tlie progress of that parti(-ular day : ' 
 this is necessitated by the pres. tense. In 
 senHe, it amounts to ' vihen the d. of P. was 
 fully come,' as E. V. : but not in gram- 
 mar. Professor Ililzig, in a letter to Idc- 
 
 ler, " Ostern und Pfingsten, u.s.w.," main- 
 tains that the meaning is, ' As the day of 
 P. drew on,' — 'was approaching its fulfil- 
 ment :' but this view is refuted by Neander, 
 " Pflanzung u, Leitung, u.s.w.," p. 10, note. 
 Hitzig supports his view by ver. 5, taking 
 κατοικουντες to imply constant residence, 
 not merely sojourning on account of the 
 feast, which latter he says would have been 
 specified if it were so. Neander replies, 1. 
 that iv T. σνμπλ. τ. ή. Γ. π. must necessa- 
 rily mean that the day itself had arrived; 
 comp. πΧι'ιρωμα του ■χηόνον or των καιρών, 
 Eph. i. 10, and Gal. iv. 4. In Luke ix. 51, 
 it is not said of the day, but of the days of 
 His being received up, including the whole 
 period introductory to that event : and, by 
 the very same interpretation, the day of P. 
 must in this case have arrived, [and was 
 being accomplished, i. e. in process of pass- 
 ing.] And again, if only the appi'oach of 
 that day were indicated, why should the day 
 itself have been mentioned, seeing that it 
 would then be no way concerned in the nar- 
 rative .' On the propriety of the day itself as 
 belonging to the narrative, see below. 2. It 
 is true that in ver. 5, if we had that ver. only 
 before us, we should interpret κατοκ. of 
 dwelling, permanently ; but if we compare it 
 with ver. 9, we shall see, that the same per- 
 sons would thus be κατοικυνντες in Jeru- 
 salem and several other localities, — which 
 necessarily restricts the meaning, in ver. 5, 
 to a temporary sojourn. And, granting that 
 there may have been some residents in 
 Jerus. among these foreign Jews, the 'επι- 
 δημοΰντες 'Ρω /jaloi certainly point to per- 
 sons who were for some especial reason at 
 Jerus. at the time, as also the proselytes. 
 And in ver. 14 Peter distinguishes the άν- 
 δρες ΊονϋαΤοι, — the residents, from πάν- 
 τεςοΊ KaTdiKovvTfQ'lfpna., — the sojourners. 
 T. ή(Α. της ΤΓ.] The fiftieth day (in- 
 clusive) after the sixteenth of Nisan, the 
 second day of the Passover (Levit. xxiii. IG), 
 — called in Exodus x.\iii. 17, ' the feast of 
 harvest,' — in Deut. xvi. 10, ' the feast of 
 weeks .- ' — one of the three great feasts, 
 when all the males were required to appear 
 at Jerusalem, Deut. xvi. Id. No supplying 
 of ημέρας, or εορτής, is required after πεν- 
 τηκοστής : the word had passed into a 
 proper name, see ref. Tobit, where it is in
 
 12 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 II. 
 
 rch.xy1.2e. εγεί'ετο αφνω ίκ του ουρανού νχ^^ζ ωςττερ φερο/χεΐ'ί?ς abcde 
 only. Josh, u ττ^οης '' βιαίας και '" ίττΑτ/ρωσει» όλον τον οίκον ου 
 
 S Luke iv.37. ^ Χ fly' 3 ^ V " j /) ' - ζ 51 Υ ' 
 
 -Luke XXI. ήσαν καΌίί,ομενοι, " και ^ ωψΰησαν αυτοις οιαμζριί,ομίναι 
 
 19 only. P.s. cl.3. t — here only. Isa. xxxil. 2. u =■ here only (ch. xvii. 25 only). Job xxxvii. 
 
 10. seeTliucycI. iv. lOU. y here only. = Exod. xiv. 21. Isa. lix. li). w = John xii. 3. see Isa. vi. 4. 
 
 X = Matt. iv. 1(> Lakexxi.35. Rev. xiv. 6. xvii. 15. ych.i.3. Matt. χτίί. 3. Luke i. 11 al. Exod. iii. 2, 18. 
 ζ here only, see v. 45. 
 
 ίΐς r. avT. sab) Syr: t.vt C'E &c {simul e, pariter v) Thl. — 2. for εκ, απο Ε. — βιηι. 
 πνο. D al. — όλοι/ om al Cyr : τταντα D {totam d) e Vigj. — rec καθημιΐ'οι, with AB 
 (e sil) Ε &c Till : t.\t (adopted as more accordant with diction of the Acts, and there- 
 fore prob the original; see ch. i. 10, 13, 14 &c) CD. — 3. for εκαθισεν τε, και εκαθισιν 
 
 appos. with lopry, and ref. 2 Mace. — At 
 this time, it was simply regarded as the 
 feast of harvest : among the later Jews, it 
 was considered as the anniversary of the 
 giving of the law from Sinai. This infe- 
 rence was ajipavently grounded on a com- 
 parison of Exod. xii. 2 and xix. 1. Jo- 
 sephus and Philo know nothing of it, 
 and it is at the best very uncertain. 
 Chrysostom's reason for the event hap- 
 pening when it did is probably the true 
 one : fiti γαρ εορτής ούσης πάλιν raira 
 γενίσθαι• 'ίνα οι παρόντες τφ σταυρψ τοϋ 
 χριστού, ούτοι και ταΰτα ϊδωσιν (in Ca- 
 tena). — The question, on what day of the 
 week this day of P. was, is beset with the 
 difficulties attending the question of our 
 Lord's last passover ; see note on Matt. 
 xxvi. 17. It appears probable however 
 that it was on the Sabbath, — i. e. if we 
 reckon from Saturday, the IGth of Nisan. 
 Wieseler (Chron. des Apostol. Zeitalters, 
 p. 20) supposes that the Western Church 
 altered the celebration of it to the first day 
 of the week in conformity with her observ- 
 ance of Easter on that day. If we take the 
 second day of the Passover as Sunday, the 
 lyh of Nisan, which some have inferred 
 from John xviii. 28, the day of Pentecost 
 will fall on the frst day of the week. The 
 custom of the Karaites was, to keep Pen- 
 tecost always on the first day of the week, 
 reckoning not from the day after the great 
 Passover-Sabbath, but from that following 
 the Sabbath in Passover week — understand- 
 ing nau^n in Levit. xxiii. 15 of the ordinary 
 Sabbath ; — but this cannot be brought to 
 bear on our enquiry, as it probably arose 
 later. o-iravTes] Not the Apostles 
 
 only, nor the hundred and twenty mentioned 
 ch. i. 15; but all the believers in Chi-ist, 
 then congregated at the time of the feast 
 in Jerusalem. The former is manifest from 
 ver. 14, when Peter and the eleven stand 
 forward and allude to the rest as ούτοι : 
 and the latter follows on the former being 
 granted. Both are confirmed by the uni- 
 versality of the promise cited by Peter, ver. 
 17 ff^• όμοθ.] Not merely (see var. 
 
 readd.) together, but as E. V., ' with one 
 accord ; ' implying that their/>Mrpoie,aswell 
 
 as their locality, was the same. Iirl το 
 
 αντο] Where ? evidently not in the temple, 
 or any part of it. The improbability of 
 such an assemblage, separate and yet so 
 great, in any of the rooms attached to the 
 temple, — the words o\ov τον οίκον in ver. 2 
 (where see note), — the συνηΧθεν το π\η- 
 θος, ver. C, — the absence of any mention of 
 the temple, — all these are against such a 
 supposition. Obviously no α priori con- 
 sideration such as Olshausen alleges (in 
 loc), that " thus the solemn inauguration 
 of the Church of Christ becomes more im- 
 posing by happening in the holy place of 
 the Old Covenant," can apply to the en- 
 quiry. Nor can the statement that they 
 were διαπαντος tv τψ ηρψ, Luke xxiv. 53, 
 apply here (see above on ch. i. 13) ; for 
 even if it be assumed that the hour of 
 prayer was come (which it hardly could 
 have been, seeing that some time must 
 have elapsed between the event and Peter's 
 speech), the disciples would not have been 
 assembled separately, but would, as Peter 
 and John, in ch. iii. 1, have gone up, mingled 
 with the people. See more below. 
 2. ήχ. ijsir. φ€ρ. τΓνοής βιαίας] could not 
 be better rendered than in E. V., ' a sound 
 as of a rushing mighty wind.' The dis- 
 tinction between πνοϊ]ς and πνεύματος, on 
 which De Wette insists, can hardly be ex- 
 pressed in our language. It is possible that 
 Luke may have used πνοής to avoid the con- 
 currence of πνίύματος βιαίαυ and πνεύμα- 
 τος άγιου. It doubtless has its especial pro- 
 priety ; — it is the breathing or blowing 
 which we hear : it was the sound as of a 
 violent blowing, borne onward, which ac- 
 companied the descent of the Holy Spirit. 
 To treat this as a natural phsenomenon, — • 
 even supposing that phsenomenon miracu- 
 lously produced, as the earthquake at the 
 crucifi.xion, — is contrary to the text, which 
 does not describe it as ήχος φερομένης πν. 
 βι., but ί/χυς ωςπερ φ. πν. βι. It was the 
 chosen vehicle by which the Holy Spirit was 
 manifested to their sense of hearing, as by 
 the tongues of fire to their sense of seeing. 
 ' ψερεσθαι ad violentum quo venti 
 moventur iinpetum notandum adhiberi 
 solet. ^1. Hist. An. vii. 24, intiSav το
 
 3,4. 
 
 ΠΡΑΗΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 13 
 
 εκαυισ^ν τε ίώ ενα εκαστον αυτών. 
 
 = Lake xxii. 
 Rev. i. 
 
 •γΧωσσαι ^ ωςίΐ πνρυς, 
 
 και ίπλησυησαν απαντίς πνεύματος ayiov, και ηρίι,αντο b constr., Mark 
 XaXeiv '^'^ ίτίραις -γΧωσσαις ^ καθώς το πνεύμα εδί'δου •==,'-"''«' ι* 
 
 CC ■= 1 Cor. χίν. 21. Exod. ιχχ. 9. d — ch. χ. 46. χίχ. 6. lCor.xu.10aI.fr. 
 
 f = Matt. xui. 1 1. Luke i. 73. John v. 26 al. 
 
 e = Mark xv. 8. 
 
 Β 15. 18 Ath^ Chr Cyr Cyr-jer: και ίκαθισαν rt D'-gr: κ. ίκαθισαν D^-gr syrr 
 arr copt Athj Cyrj : ικαθισίν St C e Aug : txt AC^DE &c Thl {-σαν has been 
 a corrn to suit γλώσσαι). — 4. παντις (iiegliyence ?) ABDE al : txt C &c Cosm 
 TLl. — TO TTv. TO ayiov Έι. — rec αυτοις αποφθίγγ. {corrn for the sake of perspicuous 
 
 τΓΐ'ίϋμα βίαιοι' ίκψίρηται : Diog. Laert. 
 X. 25. 10-4, Sia του πνίΰματος πολλού 
 φίρομίνου.' Kypke. οίκον] Cer- 
 
 tainly Luke would not have used this 
 word of a chamber in the Temple, or 
 of the Temple itself, without further ex- 
 planation. Our Lord, it is true, calls the 
 Temple ό οίκος- υμών, Matt, xxiii. 39, — 
 and Josephus informs us that Solomon's 
 Temple was furnished τριάκοντα βραχίσιν 
 oeTcoif, and again ΐττφκοδόμηντο ct τούτοις 
 άνωθεν trtpoi οίκοι : but to suppose either 
 usage here, seems to me very far-fetched 
 and unnatural. 3. ώφθ. αύτοϊς] — not, 
 
 ' there were seen on them,' as Luther; but 
 as E. v., ' there appeared, to them.' 
 διαμεριζόμΐναι] not, ' distributed' as μί- 
 ρισμοΊς in Heb. ii. 4 : from the construc- 
 tion, ΐιίαμ. must refer to something charac- 
 teristic, not of the manner of apportion- 
 ment, but of the appearance itself ώςίΐ 
 irvpos] see ref. They were not πυρός, as not 
 possessing the burning power of fire, but only 
 ώβίΐ πυρός, in appearance like that ele- 
 ment. Ικάθισ€ν] viz. ro ψηινόμίνον : 
 not TO πνεύμα, nor ή γλώσσα, but the ap- 
 pearance described in the preceding clause. 
 I understand ίκάθ. as usually interpreted, 
 • lighted on their heads.' This also was 
 no effect of natural cause, either ordinarily 
 or extraordinarily employed : see on ver. 2. 
 4. ήρξαντο λαλ€Ϊν ercpat; γλώσ- 
 aais] There can be no question in any un- 
 prejudiced mind, that the fact which this 
 narrative sets before us is, that the disciples 
 began to speak in various languages, 
 viz. the languages of the nations below 
 enumerated, and perhaps others. All at- 
 temps to evade this are connected with 
 some forcing of the text, or some far-fetched 
 and indefensible exegesis. This then being 
 laid down, several important questions arise, 
 and we are surrounded by various difficul- 
 ties. (1) Was this speaking in various lan- 
 guages a gift bestowed on the disciples/or 
 their use afterwards, or was it a mere sign, 
 their utterance being only as they were 
 mouth-pieces of the Holy Spirit? The latter 
 seems certainly to have been the case. It 
 appears on our narrative, KnOotr το πνίϊ'μα 
 iciCiiV uliTolr άπαφΟίγγίσθαι, ' aS the 
 
 Spirit gave them utterance.' But, it may 
 
 be objected, in that case they would not 
 themselves understand what they said. I 
 answer, that we infer this very fact from 
 1 Cor. xiv. ; that the speaking with tongues 
 was often found, where none could interpret 
 what was said. And besides, it would ap- 
 pear from Peter's speech, that such, or 
 something approaching to it, was the case 
 in this instance. He makes no allusion to 
 the things said by those who spoke with 
 tongues ; the hearers alone speak of their 
 declaring τά μιγαλύα του θίον. So that 
 it would seem that here, as on other occa- 
 sions (1 Cor. xiv. 22), tongues were for a 
 sign, not to those that believe, but to those 
 that believe not. If the first supposition 
 be made, that the gift of speaking in various 
 languages was bestowed on the disciples 
 for their after use in preaching the Gospel, 
 we are, I think, running counter to the 
 whole course of Scripture and early patristic 
 evidence on the subject. There is no trace 
 whatever of such a power being possessed 
 or exercised by the Apostles, or by those 
 who followed them. (Compare ch. xiv. 
 Π. 14; Euseb. iii. 39; Iren. iii. 1.) I 
 believe, therefore, the event related in our 
 text to have been a sudden and powerful 
 inspiration of the Holy Spirit, by which 
 the disciples uttered, not of their own 
 minds, but as mouth-pieces of the Spirit, 
 the praises of God in various languages, 
 hitherto, and possibly at the time itself 
 unknown to them. (2) Howis this ίι-ίρηις 
 ■γλώσσαις λαλΰν related to the γλώσσι^ 
 λαλίΧν afterwards spoken of by St. Paul ? 
 I answer, that they are one and the same 
 thing, -γλώσατ^ λαλ. is to speak in a lan- 
 guage, as above explained ; -γλώσσαις {ΐτί- 
 Ρ'ΐις, or καιναΐς, Mark xvi. 17) λαλ., to 
 speak in languages, under the same cir- 
 cumstances. See this further proved in 
 notes on 1 Cor. xiv. Meantime I may re- 
 mark, that the two are inseparably con- 
 nected by the following links, — ch. x. 46, 
 xi. 15, — xix. 6, — in which last we have the 
 same juxta-position of γλώσσαις λαλΰν 
 and προψητίΰίΐν, as afterwards in 1 Cor. 
 xiv. 1 — 5 fF. (ii) Who were those that 
 partook of this gift ? I answer, the whole 
 assembly of believers, from Peter's appli- 
 cation of the prophecy, ν v. Hi if. It was
 
 14 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 Π. 
 
 αποψθεγγισθαι αυτοις. ήσαν δε εν {(ρονσαΧτιμ κατοι- abcde 
 
 ε ver. 14. ch. ^ 
 xxvi.a.'ioiily. 
 
 }.^"""'^^^' κουιτες Ιουδαίοι avcpeq ^^ ίυΧαβίΐς αττο παντός εϋνους 
 
 12 oDlf . Micab τίί. 2 ales. 
 
 > Luke ii, 3. xxiii. 51. cb. sxiii. 34 al. 
 
 order ; but these trajections and insertions between a governing and a governed word 
 are characteristic of Luke, and esp in Acts) with C^E &c : txt ABC'D 130 al ν 
 arm Ath Cyr^ Did Ambr Vig: αποφθ. συν αντοις sah. — 5. £ΐς• ιερονσ. A: tv ttn, 
 ήσαν D: κατοικ. tv tip. C copt Augj : lovSaiot κατοικ. Ε: ανδρ. ιονδ. C : tv\. 
 
 precisely the case supposed in 1 Cor. xiv. 
 23, ίάν ovv avvkXey t) (κκ\7]σία 'όλη ΐπ'ι 
 το ηΐιτο κηί \α\ώσιν -γΧώσσαις πάντες, 
 ίίςέΧθίοσιν ύί ίδιώται η άπιστοι, οΰκ ίροϋ- 
 σιν ότι μαίνίοΟί ; These ΐδιώται and 
 άπιστοι were represented by the iVfpoi of 
 our ver. 13, who pronounced them to be 
 drunken. (4) I would not conceal the 
 difficulty which our minds find in conceiv- 
 ing a person supernaturally endowed with 
 the power of speaking, ordinarily and con- 
 sciously, a language which he has never 
 learned. I beheve that difficulty to be in- 
 superable. Such an endowment would not 
 only be contrary to the analogy of God's 
 deahngs, but, as far as I can see into the 
 matter, self-contradictory, and therefore 
 impossible. But there is no such contra- 
 diction, and to my mind no such difficulty, 
 in conceiving a man to be moved to utter- 
 ance of sounds dictated by the Holy Spirit. 
 And the fact is clearly laid down by Paul, 
 that the gift of speaking in tongues, and 
 that of iiiterpreting , were wholly distinct. 
 So that the above difficulty finds no place 
 here, nor even in the case of a person 
 both speaking and interpreting : see 1 Cor. 
 xiv. 13. — On the question whether the 
 speaking was necessarily always in a foreign 
 tongue, we have no data to guide us : it 
 would seem that it ivas ,• but the conditions 
 would not absolutely exclude rhapsodical 
 and unintelligible utterance. Only there is 
 this objection to it : clearly, languages were 
 spoken on this occasion, — and we have no 
 reason to believe that there were two dis- 
 tinct kinds of the gift. (5) It would be 
 quite beyond the limits of a note to give 
 any adequate history of the exegesis of the 
 passage. A very short summary must suf- 
 fice, (a) The idea of a gift of speaking in 
 various languages having been conferred 
 Jor the dissemination of the Gospel, ap- 
 pears not to have originated until the gift 
 of tongues itself had some time disappeared 
 from the Church. Chrysostom adopts it, 
 and the great majority of the Fathers and 
 expositors. (/3) Gregory Nyss. (see Suicer. 
 Thes. γλώσσα), Cyprian, and in modern 
 times Erasmus and Schneckenburger, sup- 
 pose that the miracle consisted in the mul- 
 titude hearing in various languages that 
 which the believers spoke in their native 
 tongue : μίαν μίν ίζηχΰσθαι tpwfrjv, παλ- 
 
 λάς δε άκοί'εσΰαι. This view Greg. Naz. 
 mentions, but not as his own, and refutes 
 it (Orat. xliv.), saying, ίκείνως δε τών 
 άκουύντων αν ίΐη μάλλον, η τών λεγόν- 
 των, τό θανμα. This view, besides, would 
 make a distinction between this instance of 
 the gift and those subsequently related, 
 which we have seen does not exist, (y) The 
 course of the modem German expositors 
 has been, (1) to explain the facts related, 
 by some assumption inconsistent with the 
 text, as e. g. Olshausen, by a magnetic 
 ' rapport ' between the speakers and hearers, 
 — whereas the speaking took place /?r47, in- 
 dependently of the hearers ; — Eichhorn, 
 Wieseler, and others, by supposing -γλώσστ} 
 λαλε'ιν to mean speaking with the tongue 
 only, i. e. inarticulately in ejaculations of 
 praise, which will not suit γλώσσαις λαλ. ; 
 — Bleek, by interpreting γλώσσα = glos- 
 sema, and supposing that they spoke in un- 
 usual, enthusiastic, or poetical phraseology, 
 — which will not suit γλοΟσση λαλ. ; — 
 Meyer (and De Wette nearly the same), 
 by supposing that they spoke in an entirely 
 new spiritual language (of which the γλώσ- 
 σαι were merely the individual varieties), 
 as was the case during the Irvingite delusion 
 in this country, — contrary to the plain 
 assertion of vv. 6 — 8, that they spoke, 
 and the hearers heard, in the dialects or 
 tongues of the various peoples specified ; 
 — Paulus, Schulthess, Kuinoel, &c. by 
 supposing that the assembly of believers 
 was composed of Jews of various nations, 
 who spoke as moved by the Spirit, but in 
 their own mother tongues, — which is clearly 
 inconsistent with ver. 4 and the other pas- 
 sages, ch. X. and xix., and 1 Cor. xiv., above 
 cited : — (2) to take the whole of this nar- 
 rative in its literal sense, but cast doubts 
 on its historical accuracy, and on Luke's 
 proper understanding of what really did 
 take place. This is more or less done 
 by several of the above mentioned, as a 
 means of escape from the inconsistency of 
 their hypotheses with Luke's narrative. 
 But, to set aside, argumenti gratia, higher 
 considerations, — is it at all probable that 
 Luke, who must have conversed ivith many 
 eye and ear-witnesses of this day's events, 
 would have been misinformed about them 
 in so vital a point as the very nature of 
 the gift by which the descent of the Spirit
 
 5—8. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 15 
 
 των ' υτΓΟ τον ουρανον. 'γινομένης δε της φωνής ταυ- ''^coi'Yll 
 
 1 "Λύ ^ Λ " ύ ^ m Ά." " Dent. XXV. 19. 
 
 της σννηλοίν το πΛησος και συνεγυοη οτί ηκουον kLnkeix. 3γ,. 
 ° Etc έκαστος τύ) ίδια "διαλεκτά» ΧαΧουντων αυτών. ' ''εζ- ι^^^οΐι^'β'^Ί' 
 ίσταΐ'το οε και ίυαυμαί,ον λί•γοντίς Όυκ ιοου άπαντες xix.32. 
 ουτοί ίίσιν οι λαλουντες ΙαΧιλαιοι'^ και πως ημίΐς 9n'5'_iMacc. 
 
 η ch. XX. 31. E|)h. ϊτ. 16. Col. 1τ. β. 
 
 ρ Matt. χϋ. 23 reflf. q = Matt, xxiii. 34. Lnke xii 
 
 iv. 27. 
 
 ocb. i. lOal. Acts only. Eslh.ix. 
 . 16. ch. xiii. 11, 46. xx. 22, 25. 
 
 ανδρ. D : txt throughout, Β (e sil) &c ν copt &c Hil Jer. — 6. for on, «cat D-gr. — 
 ηκουσεί' Β al- : ηκονίν C : ηκονσαν 9(ί al : txt ADE &c Thl. — ιις oni Ε 36. 99. 100 al. 
 — for r»; iS. διαλ. λαλ. avr., λαΧουντας ταις γΧωσσαις Ό Syr: τηις -γλωσσαις αντων 
 syr-marg Augj : lingua sua dev ; linguam suam Bed. — 7. rec aft ίϊ,ιστ. ins τταντις 
 {corrn from ver 12), with ACE &c ν copt sah &c : απαντίς 27. 29. 09 : txt BD h all 
 seth arr slav-mss Chr Augj. — rec aft XiyovTtg ins προς αΧΧηΧονς {explanatory 
 gloss ; and hence became a var read also in ver 12: not, as Meg., genuine here, and 
 thence insd in ver 12), with DE &c : t.xt ABC 26 ν copt sah seth. — ουχί Β : οι/χ DE : txt 
 AC &c.— rec παντίς (negligence ?), with B(e sil)E &c : txt ACD 130. 163 al .'— oi λαλ. 
 tioiv C lect 12 : γαλ. tiaiv 96 ν : for γαλ., ιουδαίοι 3 copt. — 8. ίκαστ. ακου. Ε. — την 
 
 yjSLS accompanied ? There is every mark, 
 as I shall abundantly shew in this com- 
 mentary, of the Acts having been written 
 in the company and with the co-operation 
 of St. Paul : can we suppose that he, who 
 treats so largely of this very gift elsewhere, 
 would have allowed such an inaccuracy to 
 remain uncorrected, if it had existed ? On 
 the contrary, I believe this narrative to fur- 
 nish the key to the right understanding 
 of 1 Cor. xiv. and other such passages, as I 
 there hope more fully to prove. καθ- 
 
 ώς κ.Γ.λ.] ' according as (i. e. ' in such 
 measure and manner in each case as') the 
 Spirit granted to them to speak ' (bestowed 
 on them utterance). Their utterance was 
 none of their own , but the simple gift and in- 
 spiration of the Holy Spirit: see above. 
 6.] De Wette maintains that these κατοι- 
 κονντες cannot have been persons sojourn- 
 ing for the sake of the feast, but residents : 
 but see above on ver. 1 . I see no objection, 
 with Meyer, including both residents and 
 sojourners in the term, which only specifies 
 their then residence. εΰλαβίϊς] Not 
 
 in reference to their having come up to the 
 feast, nor to their dwelling from religious 
 motives at Jerusalem {το κατοικΰν tuXa- 
 βίίας ην σημί\ον, άττο τοσούτων ίθνών 
 ττατρίΟας άφίΐ'τας και οίκίαν καΐ συγγί- 
 νΰς, ίκΗ οίκην, Chrys.), but stated as im- 
 parting a character and interest to what fol- 
 lows. They were not merely vain and cu- 
 rious listeners, but men of piety and weight. 
 
 OTTO TravTos eOv ] Not perhaps 
 
 used so much hyperbolically, as with refe- 
 rence to the significance of the whole event. 
 As they were samples each of their different 
 peojjle, so collectively they represented all 
 the nations of the world, who should hear 
 afterwards in tlieir own tongues the wonder- 
 ful works of God. 6.] Whatever της 
 φωνής ταύτης may mean, one thing is 
 
 clear, — that it cannot mean, ' this rumour' 
 (' when this was noised abroad,' E. V. : so 
 also Erasm., Calv., Beza, Grotius, &c.), 
 which would be unexampled (the two pas- 
 sages cited for this sense from the LXX 
 are no examples ; Gen. xlv. 16. Jer. xxvii. 
 [1.] 40). We have then to choose between 
 two things to which φωνή might refer : 
 — (I) the ήχος of ver. 2, to which it 
 seems bound by the past part. γ€νομ€νης 
 (comp. ver. 2, iycvtTO . . . ήχος), which 
 would hardly be used of a speaking which 
 was still going on when the multitude as- 
 sembled : comp. also John ill. 8 ; — and (2) 
 the speaking with tongties of ver. 4. To this 
 reference, besides the objection just stated, 
 there is also another, that the voices of a 
 number of men, especially when diverse as in 
 this case, would not be indicated by φωνή, 
 but by φωναί : comp. Luke's own usage, 
 even when the voices cried out the same 
 thing, Luke xxiii. 23, oi 6i ίπίκίΐντο φω- 
 ναΐς μ,εγάλαις, αίτονμίνοι αϋτΌν σταυρω- 
 θήναι' και κατίσχυαν οΐ φωναΙ αυτών κ, 
 των άρχΐί(>(ων. And when he uses the 
 sing., he explains it, as in ch. xix. 34, φων7) 
 iy'ivtTO μία ίκ πάντων. So that we may 
 safely decide for the former reference. The 
 noise of the rushing mighty wind was heard 
 over all the neighbourhood, probably over 
 all Jerusalem. το -π-λήθος] including 
 
 the scoffers of ver. 13, as well as the pious 
 strangers : but these latter only are here 
 regarded in the συνιχύθη (see refl'.) and 
 the ήκ. (Ις 'έκαστος. On these latter words 
 see above on ver. 4. Each one heard αυτών 
 λαΧούντων, — i. e. either various disciples 
 speaking various tongues, each in some one 
 only : or the .fame persons speaking now 
 one now another tongue. The former is 
 more probable, although the latter seems to 
 agree with some expressions in 1 Cor. xiv., 
 e. g. ver. 18. 7.] They were not, lite-
 
 16 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 11. 
 
 ακονομεν έκαστος nj ιδύι διαλίκτω ημών εν ^ ε-γεννηθη- abode 
 rconstr., cii.i. μεν, YlapOoi καΐ MrjSoi και Ελαμιται, και οί "^ κατοι- 
 κοΰντες την ^Ιεσοπυταμιαν, Ιουοαιαν τε και Κοππα- 
 Βυκίαν, Πόντου και την Ασιαν, Φf>υyιav τε και 
 
 διαΧίκτον D'-gr ν (not am) Syr ar-erp Augj (once τ. iSiav δ.) Jer. — ημ. SiaX. E. — 
 £»' om 3S. — ίγίΐ'Γ^θνμεν AC'(C'?)E' 1. 13ThP : εγίννηθη sah. — 9. ίλαμίιται AC {εμα- 
 Xtirat : ίλαμηται C-) D : αιλαμειται Β (alamitce d, halamita e, alani Syr). — bef 
 01, om και D'-gr. — for lovSaiav, Syriam ier : ArmeniamT&tt Kn^-^: Jitfleei Angj^: om 
 Thl'.— aft καπτταδ., ius και yaXanav 9G gr-lat. — τ( om D^ ν (not am'). — 10. τε om 
 
 -«*• 
 
 rally, all Galileans ; but certainly the greater 
 part were so, and all the Apostles and lead- 
 ing persons, who would probably be the 
 prominent speakers. 8 — 11.] Tliis 
 
 question is broken, in construction, by the 
 enumeration of vv. i), 10, and then ver. 11 
 takes up the constr. again from ver. 8. As 
 regards the catalogue itself, — of course it 
 cannot have been thus delivered as part of 
 a speech by any hearer on the occasion, but 
 is inserted into a speech expressing the 
 general sense of what was said, and put, ac- 
 cording to the usage of all narrative, into 
 the mouths of all. The words τη Ιδία 
 διαλ. ήμ.. £v η ίγεννήθημεν are very decisive 
 as to the nature of the miracle. The hearers 
 could not have thus spoken, had they been 
 spiritually uplifted into the comprehension 
 of some ecstatic language spoken by the 
 disciples. They were not spiritually acted 
 on at all, but spoke the matter of fact : 
 they were surprised at each recognizing, so 
 far from his country, and in the mouths of 
 Galilaeans, his own native tongue. 9. 
 
 Πάρθοι] The catalogue proceeds from the 
 N. E. to the W. and S. ' Habet (Parthia) 
 ab ortu Arios, a meridie Carmaniam et 
 Arianos, ab occasu Protitas Medos, a sep- 
 tentrione Hyrcanos, — undique desertis 
 cincta.' Plin. vi. 29. Seealso Strabo,xi. 9, 
 and Winer, RWB. Μήδοι] Media, 
 
 W. of Parthia and Hyrcania, S. of the Cas- 
 pian sea, E. of Armenia, N. of Persia. 
 ΈλαμΙται] in pure Greek ΈΧνμαίοι, 
 inhabitants of Elam or Elymais, a Semitic 
 people (Gen. x. 22). Elam is mentioned 
 in connexion with Babylon, Gen. xiv. 1 ; 
 with Media, Is. xxi. 2. Jer. xxv. (xxxii. in 
 LXX) 25 ; with, or as part of, Assyria, Ezek. 
 xxxii. 24. Isa. xxii. 6 ; as a province of 
 Persia, Ezr. iv. 9 ; as the province in which 
 Susan was situated, Dan. viii. 2 (but then 
 Susiana must be taken in the wide sense, 
 'ΈΧνμαΙοι προςεχείς j)ffai'2oDffioig,Strabo, 
 si. 13; xvi. 1). According to Josephus, 
 Ant. i. 6, 4, the Elamseans were the pro- 
 genitors of the Persians. We find scattered 
 hordes under this name far to the north, 
 and even on the Orontes near the Caspian 
 (Strabo, xi. 13; xv. 3; xvi. 1). Pliny's 
 
 description, the most applicable to the times 
 of our text, is, ' Infra Eulseum (Susianen ab 
 Elymaide disterminat amnis Eulseus, paulo 
 snpra) Elymais est, in ora juncta Persidi, a 
 flumirie Oronti ad Characem ccxl m. pass. 
 Oppida ejus Seleucia et Sosirate, apposita 
 monti Casyro,' vi. 27• Μίσοττοτα- 
 
 μίαν] the well-known district between the 
 Euphrates and Tigris, so called merely as 
 distinguishing its geographical position 
 (Strabo, xvi. 1) : it never formed a state. 
 The name does not appear to be older than 
 the Macedonian conquests. The word is 
 used by the LXX and E. V. in Gen. xxiv. 10 
 to express DMh: D^n, Aram of the two rivers. 
 Similarly the Peschito renders it here, and 
 ch. vii. 2. See Winer, RWB. Ίου- 
 
 δαίαν] I can see no difficulty in Judaea 
 being here mentioned. The catalogue does 
 not proceed by languages, but by territorial 
 division ; and Judaea lies immediately S. of 
 its path from Mesopotamia to Cappadocia. 
 It is not ΊουίαΤοι by birth and domicile, 
 but ol κατοικονντες την 'lovSaiav who 
 are spoken of: the άνδρες ευλαβείς settled 
 in Judaea. And even if born Jews were 
 meant, doubtless they also would find a 
 place among those who heard in their mo- 
 ther-tongue the wonderful works of God. 
 Καττιταδοκίαν] At this time (since 
 u.c. 770) a Roman province (see Tacit. Ann. 
 ii. 42), embracing Cappadocia proper and 
 Armenia minor. On the language of Cappa- 
 docia, see note, ch. xiv. 11. Π<5ντον] 
 the former kingdom of Mithridates, lying 
 along the S. coast of the Euxine (whence its 
 name) from the river Halys to Colchis and 
 Armenia, and separated by mountains from 
 Cappadocia on the S. It was at this time 
 dividedinto pettyprincipalities under Roman 
 protection, but subsequently (Suet. Ner. 18) 
 became a province under Nero. την 
 Άσίαν] i. e. here Asia propria, or rather 
 the W. division of it, as described by Pliny, 
 V. 27, as bounded on the E. by Phrygia 
 and Lycaonia, on the W. by the ^Egean, 
 on the S. by the Egyptian sea, on the 
 N. by Paphlagonia. Winer, RWB., cites 
 from Solinus, 43 : ' Sequitur Asia, sed non 
 eam Asiam loquor quae in tertio orbis di-
 
 9— li. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 17 
 
 ΥΙαμφνΧιαν, A'lyvTTTOv και τα μ(ξ)η της Αιβυης rijc '■=''• ^"'ί- 2ΐ 
 κατά Κυξ)ηνην, και οι ^ ίπι^ημονντίς 'Ϋωμαϊοι, 'louocuot '*^v'i.i,''^i"r,. 
 τε και '^ ττροςύΧυτοι, ^^ Κ^οί/τίς και 'Αραβες, άκυνομίν Εχοάΐίκαβ', 
 λολουιτωΐ' αυτών ταις ημίτψαις -γΧωσσαις τη '' ^ίγαλίΓα '^i;n'y': ρ*ΐχχ. 
 του Θίοϋ ; '■" ' ί!:,Ίσταντυ δί πάντες και '^ ^ιηπόf)oυv c^'mm.^h. 
 άλλος πξ>ος άλλον λέγοντες Ύί αν '^ Θελοι τοϋτο είναι ; *' χχ^τ. 'ί ch. 
 
 έτεροι οε οιαγ^λευαί,οντες εΛεγον οτι -γλεύκους 
 ' μεμεστωμενοι εισιν. σταθείς δε Πέτρος συν τοις ένδεκα 
 
 ^ εττηρεν την φωνην αυτού και απεφΘέγζητο αυτοϊςΐχ 
 ' Αί'ορες ΙουοΗ 
 τες, τούτο 
 
 υμιν 
 
 /νωστον έστω. 
 
 ίερουσαλημ ατταν- 
 και " ενωτισασθε τα 
 
 onlyt. Dan. 
 
 ii. 'S. Symm. 
 
 e = ch xvii. 20 
 
 oniy. Herod, 
 
 ■ 78 al. 
 
 1-. ch. xvii. 
 
 1 - <T ■ ■> V ,/ 32 only t. 
 
 tot και 01 κατοικουντες Ιερουσαλήμ ατταν- Prov. xiv. 9 
 
 '' "^ Aqu. 2 Mace, 
 
 vii. 27. 
 
 ύιαχλ-, here 
 
 onlyt• g here only. Job xxxii. 19. h here onlyt. 3 Mace. v. 10. i Luke xi. 27 al. Judg. ix. 7. 
 kver. 4reff. 1 constr., ch. i. ly reff. m ch. i. I9refl". η here only. Gen. iv. 23 al. 
 
 D V. — αιγ. Tt D-gr. — 11. for ακουομεν, audivimus d e v. — μ(γαλια CE &c: txt AD (and 
 B.'). — 12. τταντίς om 95' al. — rec ^ιηπομοιν {corrn to more usual form ; but see Luke 
 xxiv. 4), with (A, Lachm) CDE : txt (A, Tisch) B. — for αλλ. ττρ. αλλ., ττρος αλλήλους 
 {gloss from marg at ver ^ ?), 4. 1 4 al ν seth Thl ; αλληλοις 13: -ουςβΐ: om al Cbrj 
 Augj (sign of genuine reading in ver ^) : add επι τω ycyovon (και λtγovriς D) 
 αν θελοι D syr-marg Augi. — η θίλει {corrn ίο suit the direct form of speech after 
 λεγο,'τις) A {τι τούτο θ. A 113) BCDal {θελη 34. 45) Chr (and vss) : txt Ε &c Thl.— 
 13. rec χλευαζ. {corrn for siniplicity) with Ε many mss : txt ABCD^ all ν e {Βιεχλενα- 
 tov λέγοντες D d). — aft γλ. add outoi D : also, variously placed, ν copt sah al. — 14. 
 ο πετρ. ΑΒϋ al ThP : txt CE al Thl'. — for ένδεκα, 3εκα D' d', and add αττοστυλοις D, 
 lect 12 Syr Aug. — £7rr;p. πρώτος D' d : τ. φων. αυτού -ηροτερον Ε. — απεψθ. λέγων C 
 Aug: ειπεν (omg αυτοις) D vss: απεκριΟη sah: εττεφθεγζ. 38. 95 al. — πάντες 
 {negligence ?) ABC (D bef οι) lect 12: txt Ε ν Thl &c. — και aft έστω om D. — τον 
 
 vortio terminos omnes habet, . . . verum 
 earn quae a Telmesso Lyciie incipit. Earn 
 igitur Asiam ab Oriente Lycia includit et 
 Phrygia, ab occid. yEgsea littora, a meridie 
 mare ^Egyptium, Paphlagonia a septen- 
 trione. Ephesus in ea urbs clarissima est.' 
 See ch. xvi. C, where the same ajjpears to 
 be intended. 10. Φρυγίαν] ή μεγάλη 
 
 Φρυγία of Strabo, xii. 8. Jos. Antt. xvi. 
 2. 2. It was at this time part of the Roman 
 province of Asia. Παμφυλίαν] a 
 
 small district, extending along the coast 
 from Olbia (Strabo, xiv. 4), or Phaselis 
 (Plin. v. 27), to Ptolemais (Strabo,- 1. c). 
 It was a separate tributary district (χωρίς 
 'όπλων φορολογείται, Jos. Β. J. ii. l(i. 4) : 
 we find it classed with Galatia and ruled by 
 the same person, Tac. Hist. ii. 9. 
 Αϊγυπτον] Having enumerated the prin- 
 cipal districts of Asia Minor, the catalogue 
 passes to Egy))t, a well-known habitation of 
 Jews. Two-fifths of the population of Alex- 
 andria consisted of them, see Philo. in Place. 
 p. 973, and they liad an Ethiiarch of their 
 own, Jos. Antt. xiv. 7• 2 ; xix. 5. 2. 
 τα μ., τ. Λιβ\5η9 τ. κ. Κνρήνην] By this 
 expression is probably meant PentapoHs, 
 where Joseplius (Antt. xiv. 7• 2), quoting 
 from Strabo, testifies to the existence of 
 very many Jews, — amounting in Cyreno to 
 
 Vol. II. 
 
 a fourth part of the whole population. The 
 Cyrenian Jews were so numerous in Jeru- 
 salem, that they had a special synagogue 
 (see ch. vi. 9). Several were Christian con- 
 verts : see ch. xi. 20 ; xiii. 1. oi Ιττι- 
 δημονντες 'Ρωμαίοι] 'The Roman Jews 
 dwelling (or then being) in Jerusalem,' see 
 ref. Ίουδ. τ. κ. ττροςήλ..] This refers 
 to the whole of the past catalogue, not 
 merely to the Roman Jews. 11. Κρήτί? 
 K.^ApaPcs] These words would seem more 
 naturally to precede the last. μεγαλβΐο] 
 nib'TJ, Ps. Ixxi. 19, see ref. 13. ere- 
 poi] Probably native Jews, who did not 
 understand the foreign languages. Meyer 
 supposes, — persons previously hostile to 
 Jesus and his disciples, and thus judging 
 as in Luke vii. 34 they judged of Himself. 
 γλεύκους] ]]'•_, Job xxxii. 19, see 
 ref. — Sweet wine, not necessarily netv 
 wine : perhaps made of a remarkably 
 sweet small grape, which is understood by 
 the Jewish expositors to be meant by 'p'W 
 or nptil), Gen. xlix. 11. Isa. v. 2. Jer. ii. 
 21,- and still found in Syria and Arabia 
 (Winer, RWB.). Suidas interprets it, 
 TO (ΐποσταλαγμα της σταφυΚης πριν 
 πατχι')ι). 
 
 14—36.] Τιικ si'UKCu υκ ΡκτΕΐι. " Luke 
 gives us here the first sample of the preach-
 
 18 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 II. 
 
 4ϋ. Jcr. xliv. 
 
 '' μίΟυο 
 
 ρ MatI xxiv. 
 
 411. 1 (or. XI. - / 
 
 21. iThi^s. τούτο 
 
 V. 7. Kev 
 
 ρρ ch xiii.4U 
 
 reft, 
 q Trr. 21 (k) 
 
 reft, 
 qq 2 Tim. iii. 1 
 
 Jatnc:^ V. 3. 
 
 μου. 
 νσιν' 
 ίστιν 
 
 νίΤε OVTOt ABCDE 
 
 16 αλλά 
 
 ου yap ως νμίΐς ° υττολαμβα 
 
 tariv yaf} ωξ)α τρίτη της Ίημίρας 
 
 τύ ''' ίίρημίνον δια του ττροφητου ' '*' Εσται 
 
 Drui.''xxi"f.' ί•^ ■'■"Κ' '" ίσ-^άταις "^ ήμψαις, λίγίΐ ο θίός, "^ ^^χίω "* από 
 42. - / / • ν t - t ' ^ J ' 
 
 του 7Γ)'£υματοο jnow fTrt πασαν ααρκα, και πρυφητευ- 
 σουσιν οι νιοι υμών και αι oυyaτ£pίς υμωΐ', και οι vtu- 
 νισκοι νμων οράσεις οχρονται, και οι πρΒορντεροι νμων 
 
 γε ' ^ 
 
 18 
 
 ενυπίΊΟίς ενυπνιασϋησονται. *" και γε εττι τους 
 
 ch.x4:>. s=Markvi. 43. Luke XX. 10 al. t Matt. xxiv. 22. John xvii. 2 al. u = Rev. ix. 17 
 
 only. Zfch. X. 2. See Rev. iv. 3. τ here only. 1 Kings xxviii. 6, 15. w Jude ver. 8 only. Joel 1. c. 
 
 X Luke xix. 42 only. Joel I. c. alex. 
 
 στόματος μου 43. — 15. ονσης (cum sit) ώρας της ημ. y D'-gr ve Aug Gaud: της ημ. 
 om Syr: a luce seth arr. — 16. rec at end, ιωτ/λ• και, with ABCE e ν al : ιωη\ προφ. sah 
 Syr Gaud {co7-rns : the name of the prophet being supplied, — and the και being inserted 
 to suit the LXX. This is plain from tv ταις ιηχ. ημ. being corrected to μίτα ταντα 
 below, also to suit LXX) : om D Iren Hil Aug Rebapt.— 17. και in addn (see above) 
 om copt sah Syr. — for tv τ. ισχ. ημ., μίτα ταντα (corrn to LXX) Β sah : μίτα ταντ. 
 tv τ. f. ημ. C l(t3 arm Cyr-jer coiistt Thl- (combination of both). — for ο Ofoc, κνριος DE 
 105 V Thl' (ap])y) Iren Hil Rebapt: κνρ. ο θ. 47-marg Chr. — πάσας σάρκας D'-gr. — 
 for νμων (1st and 2nd) αυτών D Hil Jer Rebapt (corrn to suit ττασας σάρκας?) : 2nd 
 om C : Kat at Θ. νμ. om (from similarity of endgs) 142 : 3rd om D Jer Rebapt : 4th om 
 (C .'')DE Rebapt. — oi bef Bvy. om D.— ορασιι D'. — rec twirvia (corrn to LXX), with 
 Ε d e V : om D'-gr : txt ABCD^ all Thl. — 18. for ye, εγω D' d : om sah : και ts and και 
 
 ing of the Gospel by the apostles, with 
 which the foundation of Christian preach- 
 ing, as well as of the Church itself, appears 
 to be closely connected. We discover 
 already, in this first sermon, all the pecu- 
 liarities of apostolic preaching. It contains 
 no reflections nor deductions concerning the 
 doctrine of Christ, — no proposition of new 
 and unknown doctrines, but simply and en- 
 tirely consists of the proclamation of histo- 
 rical facts. The apostles appear here as 
 the witnesses of that which they had seen : 
 the Resurrection of Jesus forming the cen- 
 tral point of their testimony. It is true, 
 that in the after-development of the Church 
 it was impossible to confine preaching to 
 this historical announcement only : it gra- 
 dually became invested with the additional 
 office of building up believers in knowledge. 
 But, nevertheless, the simple testimony to the 
 great works of God, as Peter here delivers 
 it, should never be wanting in preaching to 
 those whose hearts are not yet penetrated 
 by theWord of Truth." 01shausen,in loc. — 
 The discourse divides itself into two parts : 
 1. (vv. 14^21) ' This which you hear is 
 not the effect of drunkenness, but is the 
 promised outpouring of the Spirit on all 
 flesh,' — 2. (vv. 22 — 'Mi) ' which Spirit has 
 been shed forth by Jesus, whom you cru- 
 cified, but whom God hath exalted to be 
 Lord and Christ.' 14. crvv τοις 
 
 Ινδίκα] Peter and the eleven come forward 
 from the great body of behevers. And ho 
 distinguishes (by the ούτοι in ver. 15) not 
 himself from the eleven, but himself and 
 
 the eleven from the rest. De Wette con- 
 cludes from this, that the App. had not 
 themselves spoken with tongues, as being 
 an inferior gift (1 Cor. xiv. \i\ fl'.) ; perhaps 
 too rashly, for this view hardly accords with 
 airavT€s, which is the subject of the whole 
 of ver. 4. avSpes Ίουδ.] the Jews, 
 
 properly so called : native dwellers in Jerus. 
 oi κατ. 'lep. αιτ., the sojourners 
 (ver. 5) fi-om other parts. €νωτίσασθ€ is 
 a word unknown to good Greek, and belong- 
 ing apparently to the Alexandrine dialect. 
 Stier quotes ' inaurire ' from Lactantius. 
 (R. der Ap. p. 32, not.) 15.] οίτοι, 
 
 see above. ώρα τρίτη] the first horir 
 
 of prayer : before which no pious Jew might 
 eat or drink : " Non licet homini gustare 
 quidquam, antequam oraverit orationem 
 suam." Berachoth. f. 28. 2 ; Lightf., Wetst. 
 — But perhaps we need not look further 
 than the ordinary intent of such a defence — 
 the improbability of intoxication at that 
 hour of the morning. See Eccl. x. 16. Isa. 
 V. 11. IThess. V. 7. 16.] This pro- 
 
 phecy is from the LXX, with very shght 
 variations. Where the copies differ, it 
 agrees with the Alexandrine copy. The 
 variations, &c., are noticed below. 
 τοϋτό €στι,ν, ' this is,' i. e. ' this is the fact, 
 at which those words pointed.' See a some- 
 what similar expression, Luke xxiv. 44. 
 17.] tv ταϊς €σ-χ. ήμ. is an exposition of the 
 μιτά ταντα of the LXX and Hebrew, re- 
 femng it to the days of the Messiah, as 
 Isa. ii. 2. Micah iv. 1 , al. See also 2 Tim. 
 iii. 1. Heb. i. 2. Xcyei 6 Oeos does
 
 15—22. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 19 
 
 δούλους μου και επι τας douXag μου εν τοις ημίραις y=Matt.xxiv 
 SKtivaig '^ ίκ-^εω ^ αττό του πνεύματος μου, και ττροίρητίυ- 'inf. 3^ f.'°^' 
 
 σουσιν. 
 
 h 
 
 19 
 
 δω 
 
 ωσω τεοατα εν τω ουοανω 
 
 \ ζ = see last reff. 
 ανω και aJohnxi. 41. 
 Dent. iv. 39. 
 
 σημίΐα επι της -γης '^ κάτω, αίμα και ττυρ και ατμιδα ''ί^ί;""' " 
 
 - Οί) ' (ΐ\ e , ' ' ' ^ ' Deut.iv 3 
 
 καπνού. "ο ηΛιος μίταστοαφησεται εις σκότος και ϊ]ο = μμ. 
 σελήνη εις αίμα, ττριν η εΧβειν ° ημίοαν ° κυρίου την Jiiv"* 
 
 ι, / -ν ' i ' . - - - - 
 
 μίyaΛηv και εττιφαιη]. 
 
 οι > k •' - t\ > ν J.ihn viii. 23. 
 
 και εστηι, πας ος εαν d Jamesiv. ΐ4 
 
 iv 9 
 
 επικαΑεσηται το όνομα κυρίου σωυησεται. avoc 
 
 ΙσραηΧιται, ακούσατε τους λογούς τούτους. Ιησουν οηΊ'ν.' oeat. 
 τον Να^ωραίοΐ', avdpa ° από του θεοΰ ° αποδεδειγ/^ενον "^ μ^λχι>.'3ο. 
 
 ch. νϋ.2 Isa. τϋ. 15. g 1 Theas. ν. 2 (comp. 2 Thess. ϋ. 2). 2 Pet. iii. 10 only. Isa. ii. 12. 
 
 h = John vii. 37. xix. 31. Jade ver. 6. Rev. vi. 17. ihereonly. Joel 1. c. Mai. i. 14. 
 
 k consfr., ver. 17. ch. iii. 23. Joel 1. c. see Luke i. 34. 1 eh. is. 14. Roin. x. 13. 
 
 m =• Malt. X. 22 al. fr. η = 2 Cor. vii. 13. Matt. xi. 19. Rom. xiii. 1. 
 
 ο = ch. XXV. 7. 1 Cor. iv. 9. 2 Thejs. ii. 4 only. Xen. Hell. iv. 4, 8 f. 1 Mace. x. 34. 
 
 rot edd. — IV τ. ημ. εκ. om D Rebapt Jer, — and και ττρο^ί/τίυσ. — 19. for δώσω, dabunt 
 tol. — «ι-ω om A 31. 37' sah Syr ar-erp {κάτω also om Syr ar-erp). — αίμα to καπνού om 
 D. — 20. μίταστρίφεται D'. — η om (as unnecessary) ACDE 13 al: ins B. — rec την 
 ημεραν {grammatical corni), with ACE al : txt BD al. — και επιφ. om D. — 21. rec ος• αν, 
 with ACDal: txt BE al. — του κυρ. D'. — 22. αττοδεδ. απη τ. θ. {corrn to avoid ambiguity 
 ο/ανδρ. απο τ. θ.) BCD^ {δεδοκιμασμενοί' D•) 31. 69. 104. 118. 1G3 varrarm Ath Epip'h 
 Chr al Iren Fulg (but -διγμενον ABPCD-E) : txt AE d e and (order) D' : qui videre fecit vos 
 
 not occur in the verse of Joel, but at the 
 beginning of the whole passage, ver. 12, and 
 is supplied by Peter here. ίκχβώ] 
 
 Alex. : (Cat έκχ.. Vat. It is a later form of 
 the future; see Winer, § 13. 3. airo 
 
 του trv.] In the Heb. simply " My Spirit," — 
 TjlTriN. — The two clauses, κ. ot νεαν., and 
 K. οι 7Γϋί(τ/3. are transposed in the LXX. — 
 The Λ'at. reads ενϋττηα, as the rec. 
 18. καί γε] Alex. : και. Vat. — Aft δούλας, 
 om μου Vat. The Hebrew does not ex- 
 press it either time, but has, as in E. V., 
 ' the servants and handmaids.' — και προφη- 
 τίΐισονσιν is not in LXX nor Heb. 
 19.] και δώσωσι τέρατα εν οΰρανψ, Vat. 
 txt Alex. — άνω, σημεία, and κάτω are not 
 in LXX nor Heb. : but και έπ'ι της γης 
 αίμα, &c., are joined together. αίμα 
 
 κ. Ίτΐρ . . . .] Not, ' bloodshed and ivasting 
 by fire,' as commonly interpreted : — not 
 devastations, but ' prodigies,' are foretold : 
 — bloody and fiery appearances : — pillars 
 of smoke, Heb. 20.] See Matt, x.xiv. 
 
 29. ήμ. κυρ.] Not the first coming 
 
 of Christ, — which interpretation would run 
 counter to the whole tenor of the apostle's 
 application of the prophecy : — but clearly, 
 His second coming,— regarded in prophetic 
 language as following close upon the out- 
 pouring of the Spirit, because it is the next 
 great event in the divine arrangements. — 
 The apostles probably expected this coming 
 very soon (see note on Rom. xiii. 11); but 
 this did not at all affect the accuracy of 
 their expressions respecting it. Their days 
 witnessed the Pentecostal effusion, which 
 
 C 
 
 was the beginning of the signs of the end : 
 then follows the period, kxown to the 
 Father only, of waiting— the Church 
 for her Lord, — the Lord Himself till all 
 things shall have been put under His feet, 
 — and then the signs shall be renewed, and 
 the day of the Lord shall come. Alean- 
 time, and in the midst of these signs, the 
 covenant of the spiritual dispensation is, 
 ver 21 — ' Whosoever shall call on the name 
 of the Lord, shall be saved.' The gates of 
 God's mercy are thrown open in Christ to 
 all people : — no barrier is placed, — no union 
 with any external association or succession 
 required .• the promise is to individuals, 
 AS individuals : iris os Ιάν. 22.] 
 
 άνδρ. Ίσρ. binds all the hearers in o?ie 
 term, and that one reminds them of their 
 covenant relation with God : comp. πάς 
 οΖκυς Ίσραί]\, ver. 3G. τον Ναζω- 
 
 ραΐον] Not emphatically used by way of 
 contrast to what follows, as Beza, Wetst., 
 &c. ; but only as the ordinary appellation 
 of Jesus by the Jews, see John xviii. 5. 7• 
 ch. xxii. 8 ; xxvi. 9. αϊτό, not /or υπό, 
 
 here or any where else : but signifying the 
 source whence, not merely the agency by 
 which, the deed has place. See reff., and 
 esp. James i. 13. άττοΒεδίίγμί'νον] 
 
 ' demonstratum,' more than 'approved' 
 (E. V.):— shewn to be that wliich He 
 claimed to be. άττοδεδ. must bo taken 
 with άπο τ. θεοΰ : not, as some have 
 divided the words, άνδρ. άπΰ τ. θεοΰ, 
 άποδ. κ.τ.λ.: Gal. i. 1 is no justification of 
 this, for there από refers to άτΓύσΓολος,— 
 2
 
 20 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟχλΩΝ. 
 
 II. 
 
 p = nikeix. Ρ jj/. iliac '' δυνάμεσπ' κα\ ' τίρασιν και ^ σημειηις οίς abode 
 
 q = Matt.vii. £7Γθί»;σει/ δι αυτοί) ο Οίος " ίν μίσω νμων, καϋως αντυι 
 
 r-ver. ΐί). οιδοτί, ^^ TOVTOV τ»ϊ ' ώοκτμπ'ί} " βον\\} κοι " ττρο-γνώσίΐ 
 
 taur.ch.i.i ^^- Qg^j- " έκδοτο V "δίά χπ()ός " ai'ojuw»^ '' προςπϊίζαιτες 
 
 η Lake ϋ. 4fi. „ ι f. 01 «^ ' /Ί ^ ιΙ ' ' e Λ ' ^ 1' ' S•" 
 
 uh. i.iftai. οΓειλατε, "* ον ο ι/εος ανίατησΐν Αυσας τας ωόινας 
 
 TLiikexxii.22. ' ,^~ ^h "Ο '^ 
 
 prov^/xvi'sl). τον θανάτου, ^ καβοτι ουκ ην όυνατον κρατίΐσϋαΐ αυτυν 
 
 W = Lnke τϋ. 30. ch. iv. 28 al. abs., Lnke only, ri β. τον βίλ.'/ματο!- αύτ. Eph. i. 11. χ 1 Pet. i. 2 only f. 
 
 Judith xi li•. y litre only t• — Herod, vi. Sa. ζ — ch. tii. 25. xi. 30 al. 2 Chron. xxxiv 14. 
 
 a = Wi.-id. Xiii. 2. ICor. ix. 21. b here only t. c -= Matt. ii. 10 al. di. x. 3il al. d = Matt. xx. 
 
 19 al Isa xxTi. 19. e — Mark vii. 35. λύ. ώί., Job xxxix. 2. iHtv uih. λνσαι δεσμοιίΓ, Ml. Η. Απ. 
 
 xii. ft. f=hereonly. See Matt. xxiv. 8. Pa. xvii. 5. g Luke i.7. xix.9. Lukeonly. 
 
 h — here only. Xen. Mem.iii. 2. 1. 
 
 a Deo ar-pol: qui a Deo videri factus est apud vos Syr ar-erp. — (ΐς ημάς D' 100. 
 127 d Slav (ms).— for ο(ς, οσα D^ — ο θ. δι αντον Ε ν (not am demid) al Thl : 
 om C. — ίμμισω ACE.— for νμ., ημών 24. 100. 127- — rec aft καθώς ins και {καθώς 
 και being a very common expr), with qu ? txt ABC'DE all v-ms Syr ar-erp sah «-th 
 Ath Iren Victorin Fulg. — for αυτοί, νμΐΐς τταντίς Ε, νμίΐς 117 sah arm.^ — 23. rec aft 
 fici. ins \αβοντ(ς {corrn to fill vp the coyistr), with DE al Cosm Thl : txt ABC 25. 
 27. 29. 40 al V Syr ar-erp sah copt seth arm Ath Iron Victorin Fulg.— rec χειρωι- {corrn), 
 with Ε al Λ^ (appy) ft": txt ABC'D 13. 15. 18. 100. 127. 130 Ath Cyr.— rec avuXtrf, 
 with many mss : txt ABCDE all Ath Thl'. — 24. λυιτης ίι αντον Ε Bed-gr. — for 
 θάνατον, aSov {corrn from vv 27, 31 : see also Ps. xvii. 5) D e ν Syr ar-erp copt Polyc 
 Epiphj Pseud-ath Iren Fulg Cassiod : txt ABCE mss Bed-gr seth ar-pol sah al Epiphj 
 
 and certainly Peter would never have barely 
 thus named our Lord ' a man from God.' 
 The whole connexion of the passage would 
 besides be broken by this rendering : that 
 connexion being, that the Man Jesus of 
 Nazareth was bi/ God demonstrated, by 
 God wrought in among you, by God's 
 counsel delivered to death, by God raised 
 up (which raising up is argued on till ver. 
 32, then taken up again), by God (ver. 3G), 
 finally, made Lord and Christ. This was 
 the process of argument then with the Jews, 
 — proceeding on the identity of a man 
 whom they had seen and known, — and 
 then mounting up from His works and His 
 death and His resurrection, to His glorifi- 
 cation, — all THE PURPOSE AND DOING OF 
 
 God. But if His divine origin, or even His 
 divine mission, be stated at the outset, we 
 break this climacterical sequence, and lose 
 the power of the argument. The άττοίε- 
 δίίγμίνον {dvai) από θεον of Dr. Bloom- 
 field is of course worse still. ois (o) 
 £ΤΓθίησ£ν δι' αύτ. 6 θ] not, as De Wette, 
 a loiv view of the tniracles wrought by 
 Jesus, nor inconsistent with John ii. 11; 
 but in strict accordance with the progress 
 of our Lord through humiliation to glory, 
 and with His own words in that very 
 Gospel (v. 19), which is devoted to the 
 great subject, the manifestation, by the 
 Father, of the glory of the Sou. This 
 side of the subject is here especially dwelt 
 on in argument with these Jews, to exhibit 
 (see above) the whole course of Jesus of 
 Nazareth, as the ordinance and doing of 
 THE God of Israel. 23.] βουλή 
 
 and ιτρόγνωσις are not the same : the 
 former designates the ' counsel' of God — 
 His Eternal Plan, by which He has arranged 
 (of. ώρισμ'ΐνγ) all things, — the latter, the 
 ' omniscience,' by which every part of this 
 plan is foreseen and unforgotten by Him. 
 Ικδοτον] by ichom, is not said, but 
 was sup])lied by the hearers, ry ώρισμ. &ο. 
 are not to be joined to ϊκδοτον as agents — 
 the dative is that of accordance and ajipoirit- 
 rnent, not of cgency : — see Winer, § 31. 3. b, 
 and ch. xv. 1. 2 Pet. i. 21. δ. χ€ΐ.ρ6ς 
 
 ανόμων] viz. of the Roman soldiers, see 
 reft'. •TrposiriilavTis] The harshness 
 
 and unworthiness of the deed are strongly 
 set forth by a word expressing the mecha- 
 nical act merely, ' having nailed up,' as in 
 contrast with the former clause, from Ί ηπονν 
 to νμών. — Peter lays the charge on the mul- 
 titude, because they abetted their rulers, — 
 see ch. iii. 17, where this is fully expressed : 
 not for the far-fetched reason given by Ols- 
 hausen, that ' all mankind were in fact guilty 
 of the death of Jesus :' in which case, as 
 Meyer well observes (and the note in Olsh.'s 
 last edn. ii. p. CGfi, does not answer this), 
 Peter must have said ' tee,' not ' you.' 
 24.] There is some difficulty in explaining 
 the expression ώδΐνας in the connexion in 
 which it is here found. The difficulty lies, 
 not in the connexion of λι/ίΐ)-- with ώνίνας, 
 which is amply justified, see reft'., but in 
 the interpretation of ώοη^ας here. For 
 ώοΐνας θαν. must mean tJte pains of death, 
 i. e. the pains which precede and end in 
 death ; a meaning here inapplicable. (The 
 expl. of Chrys., Theophyl., Oec., ό θάνατος
 
 23—29. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 21 
 
 ύπ αυτοί). ^^ Δαυίδ yao λενει ' £ΐς αυτόν Π/οοο/οωμην i_Eph.v. 32. 
 τον κυριον ίνωτΓίον μου "όια παντός, οτι ίκ όίΕ,ιων μ^ν ^°^'^^^^^^^^^ 
 ίστιν, ινα μη σολευσω '^^ όια τούτο '^ ίυφρανυη ^<ου ι -Lukei. ΐ9. 
 ■η καρδία καΐ "^ ηγαλλιάσατο η -γλώασόι μου, " en δε και η "' ^"^'Ι' ^^^"1\ 
 
 f γ S ' t ' ' 'Λ '^ 27 " ' II ' 2. Rom. xi. 
 
 σαρξ juou κοΓασκίίΐ'ωσίΐ fvr ίλττίΟί, ' ort ουκ: ί^κατα- m. 
 
 ίίς " αδου ουδέ ^ δώσίίς' τον 
 
 λειι//εις τ?]•; " φυ^ην μου 
 
 Ιωης, 
 
 σου. 
 
 προς 
 
 η)ξ)αν. 
 
 28 
 
 ί-^νωρισας μοι 
 
 οοουί 
 
 ® ττληρώσεις μί ευφροσύνης ^ μετά του προςωπου 
 
 '^^ ανόρες αόελφοι, εςου ειπείν μετά παρρησίας 
 
 ' - > - k ' ... 
 
 υμάς περί του πατριαργου 
 
 λ 
 
 ευτησεν και εταώη, και το μνήμα αυτού εστίν 
 
 τ Lake xiv. 2fi. see ch. xxi. 28. s Matt. xiii. 32 and II only. 
 
 10 al. Luke and Paul only. Prov. i. 33. η Mntt. xxvii. 4R. 
 
 xriii. 20. ν = Rev vi. 9. xx. 4 only. Jos. And. vl. 14. 2. 
 
 xi. 23 al. 1 Cor. xv. 55. Rev. 1. 18. y = ver. 4 reff. 
 
 Heb. xi. 5. Ps. Ixxxviii. 48. b ch. xiii. 34, Sic. only. Job χ 
 J — Matt. xxi. 32. e = ch. xiii. 52. Rom. xv. 13, l•' 
 
 g constr., here only. h 2 Cor. xii. 4. Esih. iv. 2. 
 
 k ch. vii. 8, 9. Heb. vii. 4 only. 1 Chron. xxvii. 22. 
 
 xiv. 11. 
 
 η = Luke iv. 25, 27. Col. iii. 3. Num. xxiii. 21. 
 
 η iMatt. XXV. 
 33. Luke i. 
 11. ch. vii. 55, 
 5H. 1 Kings 
 xxiii. 9. 
 
 = 2 Thess. ii. 
 2. see Heb. 
 xii. 2ίϊ, 27. 
 
 ρ Luke XV. 32. 
 Rum. XV. 10 
 al. Deut. 
 xiv. 2(i. 
 
 q Lukrx. 21. 
 Λ. J1..7.. Matt. v.l2al. 
 
 ευ ημιν ps.u.u. 
 
 N.ciii. 12. tRom. iv. 18. 1 Cor. ix. 
 
 Mk. 2 Cor. iv. 9. Heb. xiii. 5 al. 1 Chron. 
 
 w constr., Matt. ii. 23 al. fr. x Matt. 
 
 ζ — Heb vii. 26. a = Luke ii. 26. 
 
 Liii. 28. c = Luke ii. 15. Ezek xliv. 23. 
 
 2 Tim. i. 4. f ch. xiv. 17 only. Esth. ix. 18, 19. 
 
 i ch. iv. 29, 31. xxviii. 31 only. Levit xxvi. 13. 
 
 lMatt.ii.19al.fr. = "' '='-'"" 
 
 Δαυίδ, 
 
 ετε- 
 
 • Mark v. 5 al. Exod. 
 
 Thdot-anc Cosm. — 25. μεν yap Ε al. — rec ττροωρωμην {gramml corrn) : t.xt A(B.')CDE 
 &c. — τον κυρ. μου D Syr (om ενωπ. μ.) ar-erp.— 26. ηκφρ. ABCDE al Clem (corrn from 
 LXX).—rec η καρδ. μου (corrn from LXX) with ACDE d e ν &c : txt Β Clem.— c^' ελττ. 
 CD : txt AB(e sil)E &c.— 27. αδην ABCD all Clem Thl {corrti from LXX) : txt Ε al 
 Orig. — 28. -γνωρισας D'-gr. — ευφροσυνην A} (appy) 9(5.— 29. ro μνήμων D : μνημοσυ- 
 vov5.—(oY tv ημιν, παμ ημ. D e ν: εν υμιν 4. 33. 103. 117.119 al Thl^.- 30. ιδως C: 
 
 ώδινε κατέχων αντον, κ. τα δεινά έπασχε, 
 will hardly be seriously maintained at the 
 present day. Stier, I see, does maintain 
 it, Reden der Apostel, vol. i. p. 43 ff., but 
 to me not convincingly.) The fact seems 
 to be, that Peter used the Hebrew words 
 niO-^bin, Psalm xviii. 5, ' the neis, or 
 bands of death,' i. e. the nets in which 
 death held the Lord captive ; and that, in 
 rendering the words into Greek, the LXX 
 rendering of the word in that place and Ps. 
 cxiv. 3, viz. ώΰΐνες, has been adopted. 
 It has been attempted in vain by 01s- 
 hausen and others to shew that ώδίνες 
 sometimes in Hellenistic Greek signifies 
 bands. No one instance cited by Schleus- 
 ner (Lex. V. T.) of that meaning is to 
 the point. See Simonis Lex., bin. 
 οΰκ ην δυν. depends for its proof on the 
 γάρ which follows. 25.] «Is αυτόν, 
 
 not ' of Him,' but ' in allusion to Him.' 
 The KJth Psalm was not by the Rabbis 
 applied to the Messiah : but Peter here 
 proves to them that, if it is to be true in its 
 highest and proper meaning of any one, it 
 must be of Him. We are met at every 
 turn by the shallow objections of the 
 Rationalists, who seem incapable of com- 
 prehending the princi|>le on which the say- 
 ings of David res|)ecting himself are referred 
 to Christ. To say, with De Wette, that 
 Peter's proof lies not in any historical but 
 only in an ideal meaning of the Psalm, is 
 
 entirely beside the subject. To interpret 
 the sayings of David (or indeed those of 
 any one else) ' historically,' i. e. solely as 
 referring to the occasion which gave rise to 
 them, and having no wider reference, would 
 be to establish a canon of interpretation 
 wholly counter to the common sense of 
 mankind. Every one, placed in any given 
 position, when speaking of himself as in 
 that position, speaks what will refer to 
 others similarly situated, and most point- 
 edly to any one who shall in any especial 
 and pre-eminent way stand in that position. 
 Applying even this common rule to David's 
 sayings, the applicability of them to Christ 
 will be legitimized : — but how much more, 
 when we take into account the whole cir- 
 cumstances of David's theocratic position, 
 as the prophetic representative and type of 
 Christ. Whether the Messiah was present 
 or not to the mind of the Psalmist, is of 
 very little import : in some cases He plainly 
 was: in others, as here, David's words, 
 spoken of himself and his circumstances, 
 could only be in their highest and literal 
 sense true of the great Son of David who 
 was to come. David often spoke concerning 
 himself: but the Spirit who spoke in 
 David, els τίιν χριστόν. The citation is 
 verbatim from the LXX : the Vatican and 
 Alexandrine copies agree throughout, except 
 in φδιιν (Vat.) and q.cov (Alex.), between 
 which our MSS. also vary. ίνα }Αή
 
 22 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λ£2Ν. Π. 
 
 "ria"\V.'"ii. "Χ/^' '^^^ νμψ»ζ ταύτης. ^^ ττροφητης ουν °νπάξ)γων και ABCDE 
 ϋν."*!!'!" *' ί'ι^ώς on '' ορκω ωμοσίν αυτω ο Οίος εκ "^ καρπού της 
 
 μ coni.tr., here , , ■< ~ t η' ' ^ ' Λ ' ' - ^ίΐ u 
 
 Slice 'vf/ia οσφυος αντυυ καΙΙισαι ίττι τον υρονον αυτόν, "' προ- 
 li - Luke >. ιόων ελαλησίν πίρι της αναστασίως του χριστού, οτί 
 
 42. Gen. „ \ ι η χ ' '"^ " ' ^ ίΤ ' - a f 5• 
 
 "4•2• .. ουτε κατίλίίφυη etc αοου ούτε τ; σάρα, αυτού iioev 
 
 τ =- Heb. τη. Τ • -" ι ^ t ^ ^ 
 
 l%s'^"Gea. ^ ^ιαώθοράν. ^^ τούτον τον Ίησοΰν ^ ανίστησίν ο θίος, 
 
 XXXV. 11. 
 t trans., Luke xxii. 30. 1 Cor. vi. 4. inf. aor. after verbs of promising, &c., Mark iv. U. ch. iii. 18. η Gal. iii. 8 
 
 only t. see Gen. xxxvii. 18. = Wisd. xix. 1. V ch. 1. 22 reff. w χ see ver. 27. 
 
 y =• Matt. XX. 1ϋ al. Isa. xxvi. 19. 
 
 ίΐίων D-gr. — αντω om 127. — for οσφνος, καρίιας D' (pracordia d) ventris am Syr seth 
 Iren A'ictorin. — rec aft οσψ. αντον ins το κατά σάρκα avaaTijativ τον χριστυν {expla- 
 natory gloss, taken into the text from margin : its spnriousness is shewn by the many 
 variations in themss which read it), with, more or less, (DE) &c 1. 13. 113. 12G d ar-pol 
 Thrdt ThI (Chr) : but το κ. σορ. om Ε 4. 27. 29 Bed-gr : αναστησαι D'E al : aft τον 
 χρ. ins και D-gr Ε G9. 96. 105 al Bed-gr slav-ed-mSj, and Tt aft καθισαι 15. 18. 98. 118. 
 130: Ath A^g ins aft καθισαι, ror χρ. κατά σάρκα : txt AB (Bentl) CD^ h 95. 142 al ν 
 copt sail Syr seth arm (Ath) Cyr Iren Λ"ictorin Fulg (Vig). — rec τον ϋρονον, with Ε &c : 
 txt ABCD"15. 36. 130 Orig (LXX has -νου Vat and -vov Alex: Meyer thinks -vov a 
 gramnil alteration to suit better the transitive καβιηαι : but qu ?). — 31. προίΐίων ACE : 
 ττροίιίως D- (προ. ίλ. -Ktp. της om D• d) al Thdrt. — της om B.— rec for ovTf, ov {corrn 
 from ver 27) with E-gr [ονκ) &c copt sah Syr &c Thdor-mops Thl Oec : txt ABCD al 
 Bed-gr e ν Eus Nyss Chr Cyr Iren Victorin Fulg. — ty/carsX. ABC (-λημψθη C) DE all 
 Eus Thaum Nyss Chr Thdrt Thdor-mops Thl Oec {corrn from ver 27) : txt 1. lect 1 al. 
 — recaft(rarfXfi0e>;, ϊηβί/ψυχ?; auroi• (/row wr 27), with Ε 1. 13 &c ar-pol Bed-gr Thdor- 
 mops Fulg Philast (Chr bef ε-γκατ.) : om ABC^D 7C. 81 al ν copt sah Syr aeth ar-erp 
 Did Iren Λ'ictorin.— αί?;ΐ' Β 15. 18. 27. 29. 36 all Eus Thaum Nyss Thl- {corrn to suit 
 LXX: see ver 27) : txt ACDE &c.— rec ovh {see above), with Ε &c: txt ABCD 5. 13. 
 15. 18. 33 all Eus Nyss Cyr Chr.— for ιι£εν, (ΐς 43 : ttcov 78.-32. aft τούτον, ovv D^ 
 (omg τον) Ε Ambr. — ο θιος om 163. — παi'7(ςom29 Ambr. — μαρτ.ισμιν Dvss. — 33. for 
 
 σαλευθώ] Heb. 'I shall not be moved.' vii. 15. 3, gives an account of the high priest 
 
 26. ή γλωσσά μου] Heb. '1^3?, ' my Hyrcanus, when besieged by Antiochus Eu- 
 
 glory.' 27. διαφθοράν] Heb. ηπιί, 'cor- sebes,— and afterwards King Herod, opening 
 
 ruption,' from PT^t, corrupit,-or 'the the tomb and taking treasure from it See 
 
 .f , J, . ," 7, τ^ -Π' ii. • also xiii. 8. 4. B. J. 1. 2. 5. Antt. xvi. 7• 1• 
 
 pit, from mir\ subsidere. De W ette mam- ^^, ^ . ,, . i . ν „ f 
 
 '^ ' - • 1 , • 1 J Dio Cassius (Ixix. 14) mentions, among 
 
 tains the last to be the only nght render- ^j^^ prodigies which preceded Hadrian's 
 
 ing ; but the Lexicons give both, as above, ^^^^ ^j^^^ ^j^^ ^^^^,^ ^f Solomon (the same 
 
 and Meyer and Stier defend the other, ^jji^ ^^^^^ ^f pj^^ij, see Jos. Antt. xvi. 1) 
 
 28.] «γνώρισα? κ.Γ.λ.: Heb. 'Thou f^u ^^^^_ Jerome mentions (Epist. xvi.) 
 
 ivilt make known. ττληρωσίΐς κ.τ.λ. : ^^^^ ^,^^ ^^^^^ of p^^.jj ^^g ^jgi^^j ^^ j^jg 
 
 Heb. ' F»lness of joys (is) with thy pre- ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^ ^f ^^^ f^^^^^ century). 
 
 ,e„ce.'— These two last clauses refer to the 30.] ^ φ -.^ης, in the strii^ter sense, a 
 
 Resurrection and the Ascension respect- /o/-e/e//er o//«/wre ei-ew/* by the inspiration 
 
 ively. 29. avSpcs αδ€λφοι] q. d., ' I ^f ^γ^^ jjoly Spirit. είδώξ] See 2 Sam. 
 
 am your brother, an Israehte, and therefore ^jj^ ,2, and reff. The words are not cited 
 
 would not speak with disrespect of David. f^.^^ jj^^ lXX, but rendered from the 
 
 He prepares the way for the apologetic sen- jjebrew. On the principle of interpretation 
 
 tence which foUows. £ξον] supply, of this prophecy, see above on ver. 25. 
 
 not ϊστω, but ίστιν, ' I may,' &c.— The gj -, -jj^g ^^rd προϊίώΐ' distinctly asserts 
 
 title 'Patriarch is only here applied to the prophetic consciousness of David in the 
 
 David, as the progenitor of the kingly composition of tliis Psalm. But of what 
 
 race :— Abraham and the sons of Jacob ^^rt that prophetic consciousness was, may 
 
 are so called in reif. οτι] not, be- ^^ gathered from this same Apostle, 1 Pet. 
 
 cause : but ' that, -contains the subject of j io_i2 ; that it was not a distinct know- 
 
 eiTTt,,', and is that for winch the apology is ^^^ „t ^j^^ ^^^,^^^ ^.j^j^j^ ^^ foretold, 
 
 made.— We learn from 1 Kings 11. 10, and ^^^ ,' a conscious reference in their 
 
 Neb. 111. 10, that David was buried at Jeru- ^^j^jg ^^ ^^^ ^ ^mises of the cove- 
 
 f ,Τ'.'ίΙ '^ '"l^ °^ °^"'^' '• *"• ^^^ '*''°"^' nant, in the expression of which they were 
 hold of Zion, 2 Sam. v. 7•— Josephus, Antt. jj^j ^y the Holy Spirit of prophecy to
 
 so— 36. 
 
 ΠΡΑ£:εΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 9'ί 
 
 οΰ πάντες νμίΐς eauev ^ μάοτυοες. τυ δε^<α ούΐ' το ΰ ="='>>■ 22 reff. 
 
 Θεοί) "υφωθεις την τε εττα-γ-γεΧκιν του aytou πνεύματος {Ί'^'ι^ρ'Ι','τ. 
 
 C Λ ο ^ ^ " ^ ύ 'y ' - rtr- < Ral.S.r.w.n. 
 
 Aauiov παοα του πατρός ε<:,ε\εεν τούτο ο υμεις /ecu ί = ';ΐι. i.4reff. 
 βλέπετε και ακουετε. ου yap Δαυ<δ ανεβη εις τους ΪΗ.ίίίΓν!"' 
 
 1 \ -ν / <>\ 5 \ τ^-ί Γ / - ; RfV. ϋ 27. 
 
 ουρανούς, λε-νει έε αυτός ιί.ιπεν ο κυοιος τω κτυοίω <ι ver. i7rcff. 
 μου Κάθου ^ έ /c δεζιων μου foj^ αν θω τους εγθρους ^ '^hHu.'i^^' 
 
 ft /i^ - Λ- 36 β ' J Λ - "^ Isa. Ινϋ.Ι. 
 
 σου υποποοιον των ποόων σου. ^ασφαλώς ονν ρ« xcrui. 5. 
 
 , -h•? •τ ^\" '' '^ g = here only. 
 
 y^vωσκετω πας οίκος Ισραιιλ οτι και κυριον αυτόν ^'^eol'n.' 
 και γοιστον ο θεός ^ εποιησεν, τούτον τον Ιησοΰν ου h-Aiat't. χ.β 
 νμεις εσταυρωσατε. 
 
 1. Jer. 
 sxxviii. 
 (xxxi.)31. 
 Matt. iv. 19. John Ti. 15. Rev. i.6al. Gen. xlv. 9. 
 
 την τε, και την D. — τον ττν. τον ay. (corrn) ABCE 5. 130 (spiriius sancti vss appy, 
 and lat if) : txt D &c Cosm Thl. — for τούτο, νμπν D' d: aft τυντο {τούτον ov 40. 133 
 V e d lux Bed) ins το δωρον Ε Bed-gr vss Iren Cypr Ambr al. — rec bef νμΐις ins τνν 
 (gloss) with C^E &c ar-pol Cosm Thl : txt A BCD all ν lux Syr copt sah arm Cyr Did Ambr 
 Philast. — rec bef βλεττ., om και (as unnecessary), with ACE al : txt BD 81. — 34. for 
 Xiyft ?t, ίίρηκίνγαρ D (dixit v, not am).— for tiTrtv, Xeyfi D am lat mss in Bede. — ο om 
 D. — 35. av om D. — 36. πας ο οικ. CD. — rec owror aft χριστοί (corrn for perspicuity), 
 with Ε &c (4. 31. 100 Oec Tert, all place it aft θεός) : t.xt ABCD^ all ν arm Ath Bas 
 Nyss Chr al Iren al : D^ 142 d om αντον. — εττοιησ. ο θεός (corrn) Β ν (not am) ieth 
 Syr copt Leont Tert Amb : txt ACDE d e ν Iren. — ο θ. om lect 12.— 37. for ct, ovv E- 
 
 say things pregnant with meaning not pa- 
 tent to themselves but to us. 32.] 
 From ver. 25 has been employed in sub- 
 stantiating the Resurrection as the act of 
 God announced by prophecy in old time : 
 now the historical fact of its accomplish- 
 ment is affirmed, and the vouchers for it 
 produced. οΰ] either masc, see ch. 
 i. 8 ; xiii. 31, — or neut. The former seems 
 most probable as including the latter. — 
 ' We are His witnesses,' would imply, ' We 
 testify to this His work,' which work im- 
 pUed the Resurrection. iravrcs, first 
 and most properly the Twelve .• but, se- 
 condarily, the whole body of believers, all 
 of whom, at this time, had probably seen 
 the Lord since His Resurrection. 33.] 
 Peter now comes to the Ascension — the 
 exaltation of Jesus to be, in the fullest 
 sense. Lord and Christ. τη Se ξιά] ' by 
 the right hand,' not ' to the right hand.' 
 The great end of this speech is to shew forth 
 (see above) the God of Israel as the 
 doer of all these things. However well the 
 sense ' to' might seem to agree with the ΐκ 
 ίεζιών of ver. 34, we must not set aside a 
 very suitable sense, nor violate syntax (for 
 the construction is entirely unexampled in 
 Hellenistic as well as prose classical Greek) 
 in order to suit an apparent adaptation. 
 The reference is carried on by the word 
 ίίΚιά, though it be not in exactly the same 
 position in the two cases. And tlio άν'ιβη f /ς 
 τονς ovp. of ver. 34 prepares the way for the 
 Ik It'iiwv following without any harshness. 
 
 — On the poetic dative after verbs of ap- 
 proach, see Mu^gr., Phoenissse, 310 (303, 
 Matth.), and Hermann, Antig. 234. See 
 also ch. v. 31, and Winer (who defends the 
 construction), § 31. 2. b. ίΐταγγίλίαν] 
 
 Christ is said to have received from the 
 Father the promise above-cited from Joel, 
 which is spoken of His days. This, and 
 not of course the declarations made by 
 Himself to the same effect, is here referred 
 to, though doubtless those were in Peter's 
 mind. The very word, ίϊ,ίχαν, refers to 
 ίκχίώ above, ver. 17. τοΰτο, 'this 
 
 influence,' 'this' merely; leaving to his 
 hearers the inference, that this, which they 
 saw and heard, must be none other than the 
 effusion of the Spirit. βλί'ιτβτβ need 
 
 not imply, as Dr. Burton thinks, that 
 " there was some visible appearance, which 
 the people saw as well as the apostles :" — 
 very much of the effect of the descent of 
 the Spirit would be visible, — Xhe enthusiasm 
 and gestures of the speakers for instance ; 
 not, however, the tongues of flame, — for 
 then none could have spoken as in ver. 13. 
 34.] This exaltation of Christ is 
 also proved from prophecy — and from the 
 same passage with which Jesus Himself had 
 silenced His enemies. On it, and its per- 
 version by the Rationalists, see notes, ^latt. 
 xxii. 41 ff. — is is not 'for,' which would 
 destroy the whole force of the seiitciice : 
 the Ap. says, ' For David himself is not 
 ascended into the heavens,' — as he would 
 be if the former propliecy applied to him :
 
 24 
 
 ΠΡΑ£?ΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 II. 
 
 j here only. 
 
 Gen. xxxiv.7. 
 
 Ps. cv.ii. |(ϊ. Ν 
 
 k (int., Rom. iv. TTOOC 
 
 2(1. 1 Cor. '» 
 
 xiv. 2(1. 
 I Marki. 15 al. 
 
 LsK. xlvi. 8. 
 
 Jer. xiii. (i. 
 m CDn.sir., here 
 
 only 
 η Luke iii. 3. 
 
 II Mk. , /) 
 
 o = oh. viii.2u. ψΐσΌί 
 
 ' Ακονσαντίς δε 
 τυν Flirjoov 
 
 ^ κατίννγησπν ry 
 
 X. 45. John 
 iv. 10. 
 ρ ch. i. 4 refl. 
 
 ίίπον τε abcde 
 
 τους λοιΤΓους αποστόλους• Ύι 
 
 wot{]ao)ftiv, (Π'^ρίς αδελφοί ; \](τρος δε ττρος• ουτους 
 
 ΜίΤ(η'θ7/σατε, και |^απτ(σ(/7)τω έκαστος νμων "^ tiri τω 
 
 ονόματι 1ί/σοΰ ^οίστου " εις αφεσιν αμαξ>τιων, και XtjjU- 
 
 την " cwfttav του 
 
 ν 
 
 39 
 
 eoTiv 7} 
 
 " όωξ)ίαν του ayiov πνίυματος. "" νμιν 7"Ρ 
 ετταγγελια και τοίς τέκνοις υμών, και ττασιν τοις 
 
 gr Aug : τοτί ττιη'Τίς οι σιηεΧΟοντις κ. ακονσαντις D Syr-marg. — κατηννγησαν Ε. — 
 την κηρίια)' ABC 'Mi. llif. 130 Clii• {corrn) : txt DE (corde d e v). — for ίίπον Tf, και 
 fiTT. E, ίΐπ. Pi 19, {ΐποιτίς- Ui. 73. 103 Aug^: και τινις ίζ αυτών tiirav D [tiTTOv- 
 τις D^). — Χοιπονς om D al Augj (elsw om τ. πίΤ{). κ.).— rec ττοιησομιν (corrn), with 
 B(e sil)D (D Iren Aug, add ow) : t.xt ACE all Bas.— at end, add fTriciti^nrt (Tisch, 
 but νποδ-, Scliolz, Lachm) ημιν DE Bed-gr tol syr-marg Aug, Promiss.— 38. rec 
 aft <5f , ins ιφη, with Ε al : AC 15. 18 al add ψι/σιν aft μίταν.; D Iren aft αυτονς ; 
 38. (ί7• 113. lect 12 Syr ar pol iieth arm ins ίίπιν δι bof ττίτρος (all these varr shew that 
 originally the verb ivas not expressed) : om Β (J5. 127. 1''3 al demid. — for αντονς, τον 
 λαυν lect 12. — (v τω oj•. BCD Epiph (cnrr-?)) : txt AE iiiss appy Bas Cyr Thdrt Thl &c. 
 — τυν κνυιον ιησ. χρ. DE (,Ό. GU. 100. 1C3 it syrr ar-erp sah arm Bas Epiph Cyr Thdrt 
 Cypr Hil Lucif Ambr Aug Vig : Syr ar-erp copt Oec Iren om χριστοί'. — των αμαρτ. 
 νμων ΑΒ (Bentl, but ημών Birch, and so C) C i)(> al ν copt sah seth Vig Fulg Aug (some- 
 times) {appy corrn for the sense) : txt DE mss (nrly) Syr ar-pol &c Iren Cypr Lucif 
 Ambr Augj. — λ?]μ-φ. see ch. i. 2. — for δωρ., δυναμιν {see ch i. 8) 103: twayyt\iav 
 {see ch i. 4) 1 1 9 Bas Thdrt : gratiam Ambr: gratiam, sanctum spiritum d. — 39. for υμιν and 
 νμων, ημίΐν and ημών D Augj. — for οσονς, ονς {mistake in copying ?) AC al sah : οσοις• αν 
 
 BUT he himself says, removing all doubt 
 on the subject," &c. The rendering 5e, /or, 
 makes it appear as if the άνίβη tig τ. ovp. 
 were a mistaken inference from Psalm ex. 1, 
 whereas that jiassage is adduced to preclude 
 its being made from the other. 36.] 
 
 The conclusion from all that has 
 BEEN SAID. iras oiKos Ίσρ. =^ πας 
 
 6 οίκ. Ίσρ., οίκος being a familiar noun 
 used anarthrously : see Eph. ii. 21 note : 
 ' the whole house of Israel,' — for all 
 hitherto said has gone upon proofs and say- 
 ings belonging to Israel, and to all Israel. 
 ό θίό? ΙτΓοίησεν, as before, is the 
 ground-tone of the discourse. κυριον, 
 
 from ver. 34. χριστόν, in the full and 
 
 glorious sense in which that term was pro- 
 phetically known. The same is expressecl ch. 
 V. 31 by άρχη-γόν κ. σωτήρα vxl/watv.—The 
 final clause sets in the strongest and plainest 
 light the fact to which the discourse testi- 
 fies — ending with ov ΰμβΐς Ιστανρώσατε, 
 — the remembrance most likely to carry 
 compunction to their hearts. ' In clausula 
 orationis iterum illis exprobrat quod Eum 
 crucifixerint, ut majori conscientise dolore 
 tacti ad remedium aspirent.' Calvin in loc, 
 ' Aculeus in fine.' Bengel. 37 — 41.] 
 
 Effect of the discourse. 37. κατ- 
 
 €νυγ.] κιιτανΰσσω is exactly ' compungo.' 
 The compunction arose from the thought 
 that they liad rejected and crucified Him who 
 was now so powerful, and under whose feet 
 they, as enemies, would be crushed. — ' Con- 
 
 cionis fructum Lucas refert, ut sciamus non 
 modo in linguarum varietate exsertam fuisse 
 Spiritus Sancti virtutem, sed in eorum etiam 
 cordibus qui audiebant.' Calvin. 
 ΐΓοιήσωμίν, the deliberative subjunctive, 
 — or more properly, 1st pers. plur. im- 
 perative, ' What must we do 1 ' 
 38.] μ€τανοήσατ€, not, as in Matt. iii. 2; 
 iv. 17, μίτανοΗτί. The aorist denotes 
 speed, a definite, sudden, act : the present, 
 a habit, more gradual, as that first moral 
 and legal change would necessarily be. — 
 The word imports change of mind : here, 
 change from thinking Jesus an impostor, 
 and scorning Him as one crucified, to being 
 baptized in His name, and looking to Him 
 for remission of sins, and the gift of the 
 Spirit. — The miserable absurdity of render- 
 ing μίταΐ'., or ' poenitentiam agite,' by 'do 
 penance,' or understanding it as referring to 
 a course of external rites, is well exposed by 
 this passage — in which (he internal change 
 of heart and purpose is insisted on, to be 
 testified by admission into the number of 
 Christ's followers. See Calvin's note. 
 βατΓτισθήτω] Here, on the day of Pente- 
 cost, we have the first mention and ad- 
 ministration of Christian baptism. Be- 
 fore, there had been the baptism of repent- 
 ance for the remission of sins, by John, 
 Luke iii. 3 ; but now we have the import- 
 ant addition επί rip ονόμ. Ίησαϋ χριστυϋ, 
 — 'on the Name' — i.e.oti the confession of 
 that which the Name implies, and into the
 
 S7— 42. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Α£2Ν. 
 
 25 
 
 q = ch. τϋ. 3. 
 vjii. 2ij. 
 
 ΊΓξ)οςκα\(σηται κύριος ο θίος 
 ■γοις " πΧίίοσιν ^^ΐίμαρτνρατο και ναζ,Γχν ao 
 
 al. Eph.ii. 
 σΚΟ- 13. Isa. Ivii. 
 
 ly. 
 
 Γ =• ch. xiii. 2. 
 "VOV xvi. lu. Joel 
 ' ". .32. 
 
 = Luke xi, 
 Heb. vii. 
 
 ftc μακράν, όσους αν 
 Ίΐμοιν. h,T£{JO(c re Λο 
 
 TTapf/caXfi λέγωΐ' " Σωθί]τε αττο της ' γεί'ίας της• 
 λιας ταύτης. Οί /uei; ovr ^ απο^ί^άμ^νοι τον λό 
 
 ούτοΰ ίβαΐΓΤίσθησαν, και ' προςίΤίΟησαν τ\] ήμίρα εκπνγ) 
 
 ψυγαι ωςίΐ τριςγ^ιλιαι. ^"^ ήσαν όε ΤΓροςκαρΓερουντίς s£nkexvi.28 
 
 .--> /-ν >~d / "«Λ' ^' "Tim. ii. 
 
 αγ?) των ατΓοστοΛων και τη κοινωνία, ττι κΛασει ΐ4. ίν. ι. 
 
 '^ ' ' ι. ' ι 1 Tim. ν. 
 
 21. Lnke and Paal only. Exod.xix.2t. t = Luke jii. 18 al. η = Matt. i. 21. Rom. v. 9. 
 
 τ = Matt. xxiv. 34 al. w =^ Phil. ii. 15. Deat. xxxii. 5. y Luke viii. 40. ch. χτ. 4 al.t 2 Mace. iii. 9. 
 
 Luke only. uwi.rtfKTo'f, 1 Tim. ii. 3. v. 4 only. ζ ver. 47. ch. v. 14. xi. 24. 1 Mace. ii. 43. 
 
 τρ 
 
 Gen. xWi. 15 al. 
 e Luke xxiv. 35 only t• 
 
 b ch. i. 14 refl. 
 
 c Matt. vii. 28 al. 
 
 180: txt B(esil)DE &c.— 40. trtp. St D-gr.— rec ϋίψαρτυρίτη : txt ABCDE all Chr 
 Thl. — aft TTaptKciKd ins αιτους• {corrn) ABCD all ν Syr arr seth arm Lucif : om Ε 1 &c. — 
 aft \ty. ins αιίΓοις 127• — τιιυτ. της σκυλιας D al ν al Lucif: της σκ. om 73 {similarity 
 of endings). — 41. rec bef αττοίίζ. ins ασμινως {explanatory gloss on αττοΰίξ. from 
 margin .• or from ch xxi. 17,\ with Ε al Sjt ar-pol &c : txt ABCD (but for αττ., πιστίυσην- 
 τίς D : ΗΤΓοίίΕ. κ. πιστ. syr-marg Aug) al ν copt sab aeth Clem Chr; (appy) Augj : υττοοίϊ.. 
 42 Thl: κατΓί^ίζ. 46: δίξ. 36. — αντον om 4. 104 copt Aug: add και πιστενσανης 
 syr-marg-Aug. — bef τη ημ. ίκ. ins εν {corrn to avoid the apparent connexion of τη ημ. 
 ίκ. icith προςίτίΰησαν) ABCD (fi'fK. r. ημ.) al ν seth ar-pol: txt E. — 42. και ήσαν πρ. 
 D. — fv τη διο. A 9f5 d ν Syr ar-erp. — aft αποστ., add iv ιερουσαλημ D, as also tol aft 
 ττροςευχ. — rec και τη κλασα {corrn), with D^E : txt ABCD' al, also {communicatione 
 
 benefits and blessings which the Name im- 
 plies. — The Apostles and first believers were 
 not thus baptized, because, ch. i. 5, they 
 had received the baptism by the Holy 
 Ghost, the thing signified, vrhich super- 
 seded that by water, the outward and visi- 
 ble sign. — The result of the baptism to 
 which he here exhorts them, preceded by 
 repentance and accompanied by faith in 
 the forgiveness of sins in Christ, would be, 
 the recetviiig the gift of the Holy Spirit. 
 39.] Tots τέκνοις ΰμ., viz. as included 
 in the prophecy cited ver. 17, ' your little 
 ones:' not, as in ch. xiii. 32, ' your descend- 
 ants,' which would be understood by any Jew 
 to be necessai'ily implied. ιτασιν Tots 
 
 cU μακράν, 'the Gentiles;' see ref. Eph. 
 There is no difficulty whatever in this inter- 
 pretation. The Apostles always expected 
 the conversion of the Gentiles, as did every 
 pious Jew who believed in the Scrii)tures. 
 It was their conversion as Gentiles, which 
 was yet to be revealed to Peter. It is sur- 
 prising to see such commentators as Dr. 
 Burton and Meyer finding a difficulty where 
 all is so plain. The very expression, ίΐίτους 
 ai' ττρηςκίΐλίσηται ο Βί'ος ήμ., shews in 
 what sense Peter understood τηΐς ίίς μακρ. ; 
 not all, but as many as the Lord our God 
 ττροςκ-αλ., shall summon to approach to 
 Hirn, — bring near, — which, in his present 
 understanding of the words, must import — 
 by becoming one of the chosen people, and 
 conforming to their legal observances. 
 
 40.] The words cited appear to be 
 the concluding and inclusive summary of 
 Peter's many exhortations, not only their 
 
 general sense : just as if ver. 36 had been 
 given as the representative of his whole 
 speech above. σώθητί is improperly 
 
 rendered in E. V. ' save yourselves :' it is not 
 (see Stier, R. A. i. 62) σώζίτε ΐαντονς, as 
 in Luke xxiii. 35. 37. 39 : ' be saved,' iajjet 
 cud) vettctl/ is the true sense. σκόλιας 
 
 — see reft'. Peter alludes to ref. Deut. 
 41.] This first baptism of regenera- 
 tion is important on many accounts in the 
 history of the Christian Church. It pre- 
 sents us with two remarkable features : 
 (1) It was conferred, on the profession of 
 repentance, and faith in Jesus as the 
 Christ. There was no instruction in doc- 
 trine as yet. The infancy of the Church in 
 this respect corresponded to the infancy of 
 the individual mind ; the simplicity of faith 
 came first, — the ripeness of knowledge fol- 
 lowed. Neander well observes (Leit. u. 
 Pflanz. p. 34) that among such a multitude, 
 admitted by a confession which allowed of 
 so wide an interpretation, were probably 
 many persons who brought into the church 
 the seeds of that Judaizing form of Chris- 
 tianity which afterwards proved so hostile 
 to the true faith ; while others, more deeply 
 touched by the Holy Spirit, followed hum- 
 bly the unfolding of that teaching by which 
 He perfected the apostolic age in the doc- 
 trine of Christ. (2) Almost without doulit, 
 this first baptism must have been admi- 
 nistered, as that of the first Gentile con- 
 verts was (see ch. x. 47, and note), by 
 affusion or sprinkling, not by immersion. 
 The immersion of 3()0() persons, in a city 
 SO sparingly furnished with water as Jcru-
 
 26 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 II. 
 
 f= Lnke i.65. 
 
 ch. V. 5, bat 
 
 w. ^πί. 
 ε = cli.iii.23. 
 
 Rom. xiii. 1. i /x 
 
 Geii.xvii.l4. UTTOGTOAWV £"y 
 h John iv. 28. ' 
 
 ver. 22. i — ch. iv. 16, 30 al. 
 
 43 f 
 
 ov aprov και ταις ττροςενχοις 
 φνγ^τι φόβος, πολλά τε ' τίρατα και 
 
 44 
 
 τταντίς ό£ οι 
 
 δ^ 
 
 eyivcTo δε πασί? abcde 
 ' σ}]μίΐα ' δίά των 
 τηστευοντες ήσαν 
 
 fractionis panis) ν copt sah Syr seth. — 43. rec tyevtro {corrn as more usual), with 
 Ε &c sail ar-pol &c: txt Λ (BCD iynv.) 90^ ν copt Syr.— for τον αυτού, euc/iarisiice 
 Syr ar-erp.— for rf, dt Β copt: om D 133 lect 12: t.xt ACD-E &c. — σημ. ου μικρά 
 Ε 25. — (5ια των χίψων των αποστ. Ε al Syr ar-crp letli. — aft φοβ., ins κηι τμομος arm, 
 — for tyivito (-ytiv- CD) tytv. all ThP Oec (od) : tyivovTo Ε 25. G4 : (yiv. δια τ. 
 απ. AC Syr copt sah ieth ar-pol: add aft αποπτ., iv (ης al) αρονσαλημ ACE all ν 
 Syr copt ar-crp Thl-, and besides, AC al ν copt add (/)ο/3(ΐς rt ην μίγας tni παντας {cf 
 ch V. 5 al), and (and al) proceed, και παντίς St. — 44. for if, rt D. — πιπτίνπαντίς 
 (corrn) Β h all Orig ThP : txt ACDE &c Thl'.— //σαι- and και om Β 57 al Orig Salv 
 
 salem, is equally inconceivable with a pro- 
 cession beyond the walls to the Kedron, or 
 to Siloam, for that purpose. 
 
 42 — 47.] Description of the life 
 and h.\bits of the first believers. 
 This description anticipates ; embracing a 
 period extending beyond the next chapter. 
 This is plain from ver. 43 : for the miracle 
 related in the next chapter was evidently 
 the first which attracted any public atten- 
 tion : vv. 44, 45, again, are taken up anew 
 at the end of chap, iv., where we have a 
 very similar description, evidently applying 
 to the same period. 42.] τη διδαχή 
 
 των άτΓοστ., comp. Matt, xxviii. 20. 
 τη κοινωνία] ' community :' the living toge- 
 ther as one family and having things in com- 
 mon. It is no objection to this meaning, 
 that the fact is repeated below, in ver. 45 : 
 for so is the κΚάσις του άρτου in ver. 46, 
 and the προςκ. τα'ις προςίνχ. — The Vulg. 
 interpretation of tij κοινωνία (και) t-q κ\ά- 
 au τ. opr. by ' communicatione fractionis 
 panis,' per Hendiadyn, is curious enough. 
 If suggested by 1 Cor. x. Mi, it should have 
 been ' communicatione et fractione panis.' 
 The adoption of the right reading renders 
 this interpretation untenable. The supply- 
 ing των άτΓοστ. aft. κοινωιήίΐ, as in E. V., 
 is better than the last, but still I conceive 
 bears no meaning defensible in construc- 
 tion. Very different is the Koivojvia τ. ay. 
 ■πηΰματος of 2 Cor. xiii. 13, because there 
 the Holy Ghost is imparted, is that of 
 which all partake, are Koivojvoi : whereas 
 the tcotr. των άττοστ. must signify fellow- 
 ship irith the App., or fell, vnth that Society 
 of which the App. where the chief ; neither 
 of which meanings I conceive κοιν. will 
 bear. — The special sense in which κοινωνία 
 occurs, Rom. xv. 26, could not be here 
 meant, or the word would have been qua- 
 lified in some way, tij κοιν. {τ/~ι) π'ς roi'c 
 πτωχούς, or the like. τη κλάσίΐ τ. 
 
 άρτου] This has been very variously ex- 
 plained. Chrysostom (Homil. in Act. vii.) 
 says, Γ01' aprov μοι SoKtl λέγων, και την 
 νηητίίαν ίί'τηϋθα σήμαιναν, και τον 
 
 σκ\ηΐ)θν βίον τροφής γάρ, ου τρυφης 
 μίτ^λάμβavov. And simly Qicumenius, 
 and of the moderns Bengel : ' fractione 
 panis, id est, victu frugali, communi inter 
 ipsos.' But on ver. 46 he recognizes a 
 covert allusion to the Eucharist. — The in- 
 terpretation of ή κλ. τ. άρτ. as the celebra- 
 tion of the Lord's supper has been, both 
 in ancient and modern times, the prevalent 
 one. Chrysostom himself, in his 27th Horn, 
 on 1 Cor., p. 422, interprets it, or at all 
 events ry κοινωνία and it together, of the 
 Holy Communion. And the Romanist in- 
 terpreters have gone so far as to ground an 
 argument on the passage for the adminis- 
 tration in one kind only. But, — referring 
 for a fuller discussion of the whole matter 
 to the notes on 1 Cor. x. xi., — barely to 
 render »/ κΧάσις τοϋ άρτου the breaking of 
 bread in the Eucharist, as now understood, 
 would be to violate historical truth. The 
 Holy Communion was at first, and for some 
 time, till abuses put an end to the practice, 
 inseparably connected with the άγάπαι or 
 love-feasts, of the Christians, and unknown 
 as a separate ordinance. To these άyάπaι, 
 accompanied as they were at this time by 
 the celebration of the Lord's supper, the 
 κλήσις τοϋ αρτον refers, — from the custom 
 of the master of the feast breaking bread in 
 asking a blessing ; see ch. xxvii. 35, where 
 the Eucharist is out of the question. — No 
 stress must be laid, for any doctrinal pur- 
 pose, upon the article before άρτου : the 
 construction here requires it, and below, 
 ver. 46, where not required by the con- 
 struction, it is omitted. — I need hardly add 
 that the sense inferred by Kypke and Hein- 
 richs from Isa. Iviii. 7> διάθρυπτί πιινώντι 
 τον αρτον σοιι, — that of giving bread to the 
 poor, is in the highest degree improbable 
 here, and inconsistent with the Christian 
 use of ή κλάιτις του άρτου elsewhere. 
 ταΐς τΓρο9€υχ.] ' The appointed 
 times of prayer :' see Λ'er. 46. But it 
 need not altogether exclude prayer among 
 themselves as well, provided we do not 
 assume any set times or forms of Christian
 
 43—47. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 27 
 
 ετΓί το αντο κοι 
 
 45 
 
 ίΐ\ον άπαντα κοινά, 
 " κτήματα κα\ τάς ° υπάρ^Ης ^ττιπρασκον και ^ ^κμίρι^ον 
 αυτά πασιν ' καυοτι αν τις y^piiav ειχεν, καυ τιμίραν 
 
 τί ^ προςκαρτίρουντες ^ ομοθνμαόον ϊν τω ιερψ, " κλωντες• 
 τε "" κατ οίκον αρτον, " μετίΧάμβανον τροφής tv '"'' aya\- 
 λ(άσε( και ^ αφεΧότητι καρόίας, ' αινονντες τον utov και 
 
 τα k Matt. xxii. 
 34. ch. iii. 1. 
 i. 1.Ί reff. 
 Nell. vi. 2. 
 1 — IPet.ii.lB. 
 m = ch. iv. 32. 
 Tit. i. 4i. 
 Wisd. vii. 3. 
 η Matt.xix.22. 
 ch. V. 1. 
 H Mk. only, 
 see Prov. 
 xxxi. 16. 
 ο Heb. xi. 34 
 
 only. 2 Chron. XXXV. 7 al. ρ Lake xxii. 17 reff. q = ch. iv. 35 only. Exod. i. 12, 17. Thncyd.iv. 
 
 118 fin. r Matt. vi. 8 al. Prov. xviii. 2. s Mark xiv. 49. Lnke ix. 23. Nnm. iv. Ifi. t ch. i. 14 rcfT. 
 
 η Matt. xiv. 19. xxvi. 2(1 J al. ch. xx. 7, 11 al. Isa. Iviii. 7. Heb. πα ch. v. 42. viii. 3. xx. 20. 
 
 V =ch. xxvii. 33. 2 Tim. ii. 6 t- Wisd. xviii. 9. w Luke i. 14, 44. Jade ver. 24 only. Ps. xliv. 7, 15. 
 
 X here only t. 
 
 (this seems fo jjoint to the genuine text, but is too weakly supported) : txt ACDE v. — 
 •πάντα D. — 45. κ. όσοι κτήματα ίίχον η ντταρζίΐς D (Syr omg η νπαρζ.). — aft επιπρ. 
 ins ίί 96^. — (μεριζον Α : διιμίριζοντο 177• — καθ ημιραν πασι D. — 46. for καθ ημίραν, 
 πάντες D\ καθ ημ., παί'τις τί D^. — προςίκαρτίρονν D. — ο;^οθ. om D 3. 103 : ins aft 
 ιερω C al. — και κατ οικονς αν (om D^) ιπι το αντο κλωιτί ς τε αρτον D. — 47. αντα 
 
 worship, which certainly did not exist as 
 yet. See notes on Rom. xiv. 5. Gal. iv. 
 10. 43.] ττάσ-η ψυχή, designating 
 
 generally t?ie rtndtiiude, — those who were 
 not joined to the infant church. This is 
 evident by the ττάντες δΐ οι πιστεΰοντις 
 when the church is again the subject, ver. 
 44. ψοβος, ' dread,' reverential as- 
 
 tonishment, at the effect produced by the 
 outpouring of the Spirit. On the latter part 
 of the ver. see general remarks at the beg. 
 of this section. 44.] If it surprise us 
 
 that so large a number should be con- 
 tinually assembled together (for such is 
 certainly the sense, not ' fraterno amore 
 conjunctos,' as Calvin) — we must remember 
 that a large portion of the three thousand 
 were persons who had come up to Jeru- 
 salem for the feast, and would by this time 
 have returned to their homes. είχον 
 
 ατταντα κοινά] ' they had all things (in) 
 common,' i. e. no individual property, but 
 one common stock : see ch. iv. 32. That 
 this was literally the case with the infant 
 church at Jerusalem, is too plainly asserted 
 in these passages to admit of a doubt. 
 Some have sujiposed the expressions to in- 
 dicate merely a partial community of goods : 
 ' non omnia vendiderunt, sed partem bono- 
 rum, quaa sine magno incommode carere 
 poterant,' Wetstein ; contrary to the express 
 assertion of ch. iv. 32. In order, however, 
 rightly to understand this community, we 
 may remark : ( 1 ) It is only found in the 
 church at Jerusalem. No trace of its ex- 
 istence is discoverable any where else : on 
 the contrary, Paul speaks constantly of the 
 rich and the poor, see 1 Tim. vi. 17. Gal. 
 ii. 10. 2 Cor. viii. 13 15; ix. C, ?. 1 Cor. 
 xvi. 2: also James, ii. 1 — 5; iv. 13. — And 
 from the practice having at first prevailed 
 at Jerusalem, we may jjcrhaps ex])lain the 
 great and constant [ioverty of that church, 
 Rom. XV. 25, 2«. 1 Cor. xvi. 1—3. 2 Cor. 
 viii. ix. : also rli. xi. 3(» ; x,\iv. I7.— The 
 
 non-establishment of this community else- 
 where may have arisen from the inconve- 
 niences which were found to attend it in 
 Jerusalem : see ch. vi. 1. (2) This com- 
 munity of goods was not, even in Jerusalem, 
 enforced by rule, as is evident from ch. 
 V. 4 (xii. 12), but, originating in free-will, 
 became perhaps an understood custom, still 
 however in the power of any individual not 
 to comply with. (3) It was not (as Grotius 
 and Heinrichs thought) borrowed from the 
 Essenes (see Jos. B. J. ii. 8. 3), with whom 
 the Apostles, who certainly must have sanc- 
 tioned this community, do not appear his- 
 torically to have had any connexion. But 
 (4) it is much more probable that it arose 
 from a continuation, and application to the 
 now increased number of disciples, of the 
 community in which our Lord and His 
 Apostles had lived (see John xii. G ; xiii. 29) 
 before. (The substance of this note is de- 
 rived from Meyer, in loc.) — The practice 
 probably did not long continue even at 
 Jerusalem : see Rom. xv. 27, note. 
 45.] κτήματα, landed property, ch. v. 1 — 
 see reff. : νττάρΚκς, any other possession ; 
 moveables, as distinguished from land. — 
 αυτά, ' their price ;' see a similar constr. 
 Matt. xxvi. 9 ; and Winer, § 22. 3. 
 καθότι ov . . . . The άν with imperf. indie, 
 in this connexion implies ' accidisse ahquid 
 non certo quodam tempore, sed quotiescun- 
 queoccasio ita ferret,' Herm. adViger., p. 81 8. 
 See ch. iv. ?>5. Mark vi. 56"; xi. 24. Soph. Fhi- 
 loct. 290 ff. Aristoph. Lys. 51 ff. 46.] 
 
 καθ'ήμ.. . . . ΙντωΙίρώ — see Luke xxiv. 53. 
 The words need not mean, though they may 
 mean, that they were assembled in Solomon's 
 porch, as in ch. v. 12— but most probably, 
 that they regularly kept the hours of prayer, 
 ch. iii. 1. — See on κυινωΐ'ία, ver. 42. 
 κατ'οΐκον] i/owi,'privatim' (Beiig.), as con- 
 trasted with iv τψ ϊΐ()ψ. So also Wolf., 
 Seal., lleinr., Olsh., Meyer, Dc Wette :— 
 not, domatim, 'from house (o Imiisi•, as
 
 28 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 III. 
 
 ^Γΐι^Γτ'ί 33?^^' 'έχοντες ^ χάριν ^ ττρος όλον τον \αον. ο δε κύριος• abcde 
 iii.4. προςίτιϋίί τους σωί,ομενονς καυ i]uapav ^ βπι το 
 
 ζ = Rom. ϊ. 1. , ' , ' 
 
 cli. xsiv. Hi. ηιιτη 
 
 aver. 41. UVIU. 
 blCor. i. 18 ΤΓΤ 1 Π ' ^^ * 'i ' <^ '' ' (Zt ' \ « \ 
 
 2Cor.ii.i5. 111. ιΐίτοος οε και νωαννης avtpaivov εις το ιερόν 
 
 Isa.xlv.20. f.^vf- - y , , 9' 
 
 d-'chi' r. ^^' ''"''*' '^Ρ"^ '■^}? 7Γροςευ)^7)ς Τ7]ν εΐ'ατίΐν. "^ και τις 
 xxxVi.'ss. ανηρ γωλος " ε /c κοιλίας μητρός αυτοϋ ' υπάξ)γ^ων ' εβο- 
 
 eLukexviii / ν ' '^ ' 'Λ k Λ' ' ' <> ^ /ι' 
 
 '"μ \" ■ θ''"«4""<>5 f' ετισουν κασ Ί^μεραν ττρος την υυραν του 
 eLuki-i.iRreff. ΐίροΰ Ti)v λεγομεν /jv ωραιαν, '" του αιτειν " ελετ)μοσιινηΐ' 
 
 h =■ Luke xvi 
 
 14. xxiii. 60 πάρα των " ειςπορευομενων εις το ιερόν 
 
 3 '^ ' 2• ν 
 ος ιοων 
 
 i = Luke xiv. 27 al. k nh. li. 40 reff. 1 Matt, xxiii. 27. Rom. x. 15 only. 3 Kings i. 6. 
 
 m cuustr., Luke xxii. β. 1 Cor. ix. 6. η = Matt. vi. 1 reff. ο Mark i. 21 al. 
 
 om 117. — καθώς 13: καθο 180. — for \anv, κοαμην D. — o\ov om 105. 180 al. — rec aft 
 KciB ημίοαν ins τη ικκΧηηια {explanatory gloss, see note), with Ε (also D al Syr arr tv τ. 
 ίκκλ.) most mss Bed-gr Thdrt ThI : om ABC (τοις σωζομενοις above 13. 36 lect 1) ν 
 copt sah seth arm Cyr. — ο dt κυρ. to καθ ημ. om 180. 
 
 Chap. III. 1. rec bef ττΐτο., (τη το αυτό it, with Ε most mss Bed-gr Thl, and aft 
 αηβ. Syr arr {see above. This variety ofposn confirms the view taken in the note) : txt 
 ABC (D al attach ιπ. τ. αυτ. to καθ ημ. ch ii. 47, and begin ch iii. tv δί ταις ημιραις 
 τανταις) 38. 69. 163 al lect 1 ν copt sah seth arm Cyr (Lucif appy) : επ. τ. avr. om 65. — 
 ιωανης D, and so usually. — αναιβένΐΌν A, ανίβενν-Ο. — aft ιεροί' add το δειλεινον D: ad 
 vesperum d. — for ri;c προς. τ. εν-, ένατη τη ττροςενχη D' : την ενατην της ττροςενχης 
 D- d arm : νεατην Β. — 2. και ιΟου τις D> Syr ar-erp arm. — υπάρχων om D Syr ar-erp 
 arm Lucif : constituius e. — portabant homines illi qui consueveraut adferre et ponere 
 ilium Syr ar-erp : bef ετιθ., ins ot βαστα'ί,οντες arm. — for θυρ., ττνΚην Ε al Bas-sel. — 
 Trap αυτών ειςπορ. αντων D^— 3. for ος ιδων, ούτος ατενισας τοις οφθα\μοις αυτού 
 
 Erasm., Salmasius, Kuinoel, al. : — the words 
 may bear that meaning (see Luke viii. 1), 
 but we have no trace of such a practice, of 
 holding the άγάπαι successively at different 
 houses. — The κΧάσις τ. άρτου took place at 
 their house of meeting, wherever that was: 
 of. ch. xii. 12. μετ. τροφ.] ' they par- 
 
 took of food :' — see reff. ; — viz. in these aga- 
 pae or breakings of bread. άφελοτητι] 
 
 ingood Greek, άι;ί)έλΗα: = άτλΟΓλ;ς(Οβ\ν.): 
 but see on Rom. xii. 8. 2 Cor. viii. 2. 
 47.] alvovvTcs τ. θ. does not seem only to re- 
 fer to giving thanks at their partaking of 
 food, but to their general manner of conver- 
 sation, including the recurrence of special 
 ejaculations and songs of praise by the influ- 
 ence of the Spirit. Tovg σωζόμενους] 
 'Those who were in the way of salva- 
 tion:' compare σώθητι, ver. 40: 'those 
 who were being saved.' Nothing is im- 
 plied by tliis word, to answer one way or 
 the other the question, whether all these 
 were finally saved. It is only asserted, 
 that they were iri the way of salvation when 
 they were added to the Christian assembly. 
 Doubtless, some of them might have been 
 of the class alluded to Heb. x. 26—2•) : at 
 least there is nothing in this word to pre- 
 clude it. — Correct criticism, as well as ex- 
 ternal evidence, requires that the words εν 
 Ty ϊκκλησίί} or nj ίκκΧησίΐ} should be 
 rejected, as having been an explanatory 
 
 gloss, (' est haec Chrysostomi, ut videtur, 
 glossa, per Syrum et alios jiropagata ;' Ben- 
 gel,) and ίττί το αίιτό brought back to its 
 place and the meaning which it bears in 
 this passage (see ver. 43), viz. ' together,' 
 in the sense of making up otie sum, one 
 body assembled in one place. Meyer attri- 
 butes the separation of ίττί το αυτό from 
 Πίτ-ρος to an ecclesiastical portion having 
 begun 61' ταΐς ήμεραις τανταις 11. κ. Ίω, 
 as D. But why, as De Wette asks, should 
 those ivords have been inserted at the begin- 
 ning of a portion.' Possibly, I would suggest, 
 as a mistaken interpretation of επί το αυτό, 
 which was not understood. Then when ίττ. 
 Γ. ίΐΰ. became joined to Πέτρος, tij εκκλ. 
 would naturally be supplied after ιτροςετίθει. 
 CH.\r. III. 1 — 10.] Healing of a lame 
 MAN BY Peter at the gate of the Tem- 
 ple. 1.] άνεβαινον, ' were going up.' 
 την ενάτην] See ch. x. 3. 30. την 
 ώραν της irp. generic; — την εν., specific. 
 There were three hours of prayer ; those of 
 the morning and evening sacrifice, i. e. the 
 third and ninth hours, — and noon. See 
 Lightfoot and Wetst. in loc. 2.] έβα<ΓΤ., 
 'was being carried.' They took him at 
 the hours of prayer, and carried him back 
 between times. την θνραν τ. λ. 
 ωραίαν] The arrangement of the gates of 
 the Temple is, from the notices which we 
 now possess, very uncertain. Three ne-
 
 1—7. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 29 
 
 Τίίτρον και Ιωαννην μίΧΧοντας ^° ιιςιεναι ίΐς το tijooi' °°^^]j.• ^^'- 1» 
 ^ ϊΙξ)ώτα £λεημοσνν7]ν Χαβίΐν. '^ ατξν'ισας δε Πίτοος ίίς Τθ^^ο^Γγ",' 
 
 αυτόν συν τω Ιωάννη ίίπεν ^ Βλί^Αον εις TJAJac. ο οε ^^''^7- cii. 
 
 L r τ ^ II" -^ XX1U. 18. 
 
 επεί/χεν αυτοις ττροςδοκων τί TrajO αυτών " Xaptiv, '^Llike]"'. 
 
 ε(7Γ£ΐ' οε Πέτρος Αργυριον και χρυσιον ουχ υτταρ^εί ^Ln^'keV 62 
 /uot ο οε εχω, τούτο σοι οιοωμι. tv τω ονόματι Ιζ/σου^^ιπ 
 
 xiii. 22. 
 m. iv. 
 > 1(ί. Luke 
 
 άριστου του ΓΝαί,ωραιου [εγειραι /cat J περιττατει. ' κα/ χιν.7. see 
 
 t constr., here only. 2 Mrtcr. xii. 44. absol., Malt. xxiv. 50 al. 
 V ch. iv. 37. xxviii. 7. 2 Pet. i. 8. Sir. xx. lb. 
 
 ο = ch. ii. 33. 
 
 και iSwv D al. — for ειςκναι, είναι D-gr. — ηρ. αντονς D. — ληβειν om D L• all ar-pol 
 slav Till Lucif : tit darent Syr sah seth ar-erp : ins ABCE (adds ττορ αντων) al ν copt. 
 — 4. ίτμβλίφας δε ο -κ. D. — σνν iwavtjv κ. ειττεν D^ : σνν τω ιωαν. om 26 : ins aft πετρ, 
 163. — ατεΐ'ΐσοί' εις D. — 5. for εττειχεν, ατενισας D-gr. — επ αντονς 46. — η λοβ (λα/3, η 
 Ε) τταμ αντ. DE 42. 103 al ν Lucif: αντον C, τι λαβ. απ αντων D (Lachm). — 6. πετρ. 
 £ε ειπ. AC ν copt sah : txt B(e sil)D(o 7r£rp.)E &c Syr &c Till Lucif al.— >; χρ. 32. 99 
 copt. — ουκ C. — rec bef περιπ., ins εγειραι και {addn from such passages as Luke v. 23, 
 vi. 8 al ?) with C &c Tiidrt2 : έγειρε και AE al ThF : eynpi Syr: ανάστα Epiph : 
 om BD sah (Me authorities being so nearly divided, ε•/ειρε and -pai being no real va- 
 riation, I have left it as doubtful: esp as περιπατεί seems hardly likely to have stood 
 
 trances have been fixed on for the θύρα 
 ωραία : (1) The gate mentioned Jos. B. J. 
 V. 5 : των δε πυλών a'l μεν εννέα χρυσφ 
 και άργύρψ κεκαλνμμεναι πανταχόθεν 
 ί/σαΐ', ομοίως τε παραστάδες και τα νπίρ- 
 θυρα' μία δε ή εζωθεν τοϋ νεώ Κορινθίου 
 χαΧκοΐι, πολν Ty Tipy τάς καταργνρονς 
 κηΐ τάς περιχρνσονς νπεράγονσα. This 
 gate was also called Nicanor's gate (see the 
 Rabbinical citations in Wetstein), — and lay 
 on the eastern side of the Temple, towards 
 the valley of Kedron. Jos. mentions it 
 again, as j) άνατο\ικι] πύλη τοΐι ίνδυτερου, 
 χαλκϊ] οίισα, and gives a remarkable account 
 of its size and weight : adding, that when, 
 before the siege, it was discovered super- 
 naturally opened in the night, τοϋτο τοΊς 
 ίδιώταις κάΚλιστον εδόκει τέρας' ά) οΤξαι 
 γαρ τον θεον αΰταΐς την των αγαθών 
 ττύλην. But some find a difficulty in this. 
 The lame man, they say, would not be likely 
 to have been admitted so far into the Temple 
 (but see Wetst. as above, where it appears 
 that lepers used to stand at Nicanor's gate) : 
 and besides, he would have taken up his 
 station naturally at an outer gate, where he 
 might ask alms of all who entered. These 
 conditions suit better (2) the gate Susan ; 
 as does also the circumstance mentioned 
 ver. 11, that the peo])le ran together to 
 Solomon's porch ,• for this gate was on the 
 east side of the court of the Gentiles, and 
 close to Sol.'s porch. Only the name 
 ωραία cannot be derived from the town 
 Susan ffrom which the gate was named, 
 having a ])icture of the town over it), tliat 
 word signifying 'a lily;' the town being 
 named, it is true, Cta τήν ωραιότητα τοϋ 
 τύπου (Athen. xii. 1, p. 573) : but the de- 
 
 rivation being too far-fetched to be at all 
 probable. Another suitable circumstance 
 was, that by this gate the market was held 
 for sheep and cattle and other offerings, 
 and therefore a greater crowd would be at- 
 tracted. (3) Others again (Lightf. favours 
 this) attempt to derive lopaia from ibrr, 
 ' tempus,' and refer the epithet to two gates 
 opening towards the city on the western 
 side. But it is very unlikely that Luke 
 should have used ώρ. in so unusual a mean- 
 ing : — not to say (see Lightf. Descr. Templi) 
 that the meaning of m"5in itself is very 
 doubtful. So that the matter must remain 
 
 in uncertainty. 3.] ήρώτα 
 
 λαβ€Ϊν, — so Sophocl. Aj. 836, αίτήσομαι 
 δέ σ' oxj μακρόν γέρας λαβείν, and Aristoph. 
 Plut. 240, αιτών λαβπν τι μικροί' άργυ- 
 ρίδιον. £λ£ημ,., as Matt. vi. 2. — The 
 
 Jewish forms of asking alms are given in 
 Vajicra Rabb. f. 20. 3. 4 (cited by Meyer), 
 — ' Merere in me :' ' In me benefac tibi,' 
 and the like. 4. βλεψον els ή[J■άs] 
 
 Calvin's note is important : ' Non ita lo- 
 quitur Petrus quin de consilio Dei certus 
 sit : et certe his verbis singulare aliquod et 
 insolitum beneficium sperare jubet. Qua;ri 
 tamen potest, an facultatem habuerint 
 edendi miracula quoties liberet. Respon- 
 deo, sic ministros fuisse divinie virtutis, ut 
 nihil suo arbitrio vel proprio motu tcntarint, 
 sed Doniinus per ij)sos egerit (punn ita ex- 
 podire noverat. I line factum est ut unum 
 sanarint, non autem ])romiscue omnes. Er- 
 go, quemadmodum in aliis rebus ducem et 
 directorem habebant Dei Si)iritum, ita etiani 
 in hac parte. Ideo priusijuain claiidurn 
 surgere jubeat Petrus, conjccit in cum et 
 defixit oculos. Talis intuitus non carebat
 
 so ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. III. 
 
 "s^jo[fn''vu!' " ΤΓίασας αυτόν τΐ)ς δεξιάς y^u()og rjyeipiv' " παραγ^ρημα abcde 
 xMatt.xxi.i9, o£ ίστίρίΐουησαν αυτού ai ρασίΐς και τα σψυρα, και 
 
 •20. Lukei. (,'^ίΛΛ' •' > / <'-ΛΩ ^ '- 
 
 9ai '■ ί^αΛΑομενος εστη και ττψαπατζΐ, και ειςηλσεν συν αυτοις 
 
 '^μΓ/'^ρβ. εις το ιε^οον περίπατων και '^ αΧΧομίνος ' αιυων τον θεον. 
 
 ixxir.j.met., ^ ifaj ειοεν πας ο Λάος αυτοί' περιττατουντα και αινουντα 
 
 ch. XVI. 5. ^ ^ S 
 
 IKinirsii. 1. '^/J'.lOe' ' ' ι y η •? τ» 
 
 ζ here only. τοί' οεον επε^ινωοκον τε αυτόν οτι ούτος -ην ο 
 
 Εχ.κΙ xxvi. { \ ^ '\ ' η' {( ' \ ~ < t f\ 
 
 h"'*!!^': + ττρος την εΑετΐ]μοσυνην κα\)Ί]μενος επι ττ) ωραία ττυΛ^ 
 "^ jod ?i'!'j.' τοΰ ιερού' και " επ\ί}σθησαν ^Θάμβους και ^ εκστασεως 
 
 cJohniv.i4. k ' \ ~ \ Π Ω ' ■" ~ 11 "> - Λ^ ' " 
 
 ch. XIV. 10 επι τω συμΟερη/οοτι αυτω. κρατούντος όε αυτού 
 
 only. Isa. >■ » *■ ^ e y \ 
 
 d Lukliilis. τον Πετ^ον και Ιωάννην, αυνεΒξ)αμεν πας ο λαός ττρος 
 jobxxx'viii. οι/τους "επι τ^ "στοά ττ} καΧουμεν^ ^οΧομωντος ^ εκ- 
 
 e = Matt. xiv. 3Γι. Luke xxif. 16, 31. 1 Kings xxvi. 17. f = 1 Tim. i. 16 al. see Matt. xix. 8. ff so John v. 2. 
 
 Ε = Lake iv. 28. V. 26. Gen. vi. 11, 13. li Luke iv. 36. v. 9 only. Cant, iii.8. i = Mark xvi. 8 al. 
 
 Dcut.xxTiii. 28. k = Matt. vii. 28 al. I Luke xxiv. 14. Gen. xlii. 4. m = 2 Kings 
 
 iii. 6 ? see Matt. ix. 2.'i al. η = ch. v. 9. John iv. 6. τ. 2. ο John τ. 2. X. 23. ch. v. 12 only. 
 
 Ezek. xlii. 3. ρ here only t. objectively, Dan. vii. 7. plur., ch. v. 16. 
 
 alone). — 7. aft ηγ. add «υΓοί' ABC 15. 18. 36 ν Syr ar-pol copt sah seth arm Bas Bassel 
 Cypr Lucif {insertion to fill up the sense) : txt DE most mss Thl. — και τταραχρ. εσταθη 
 και tcT. D. — αι βασ. αυτόν ABC {corrn). — σφυδρα A, (pvSpa C, σφυριά 1, crura d. — 
 8. ανίστη 36. 100. 103. 127 ειΐ. — aft πιρηττ., add χαίρων Ε, χαιρομίΐ'ος D. — rec bef 
 αίνων ins και, with BCE ν Iren (addition to suit ver 9) : om AD (om also ττεριττ. κ. 
 αλλ.). — 9. om {owing to Qtov . . . θεον) 27- 29. —ιδεν Cal. — rec αυτοί» πας ο λ. {cor7'n), 
 with Ε Lucif: txt ABCD ν (sah).— for θεον, κυριον C— 10. for τε, δε ABC 15. 18. 19 
 e V copt Bas-sel {corrn for the usual τε of the Ads) : txt DE-gr most mss syrr seth ar- 
 pol al Thl Lucif. — for οντης, αυτός {corrn as more usual) AC 15. 18. 36. 40 al ν Syr 
 copt seth ar-pol Bas-sel Lucif: txt B(e sil)DE al Thl. — for ην, εστίν 40. 101 Chr. — 
 καθε^,υμενος D: add καθ 7]μεραν Syr ar-erp. — θαμβού C. — for σνμβ., γε-γενημενω D. — • 
 11. rec for αυτού, του ιαθεντος χωλού {beginning of an ecclesiastical lection) : txt 
 ABC(D see below)E all ν syrr ar-erp copt arm seth {κρατούντων St αυτών : so also v- 
 ms). — την ιωαν. AB 127• 130. — rec προς αυτούς πας ο Χάος {corrn), with Ε &c copt syr 
 ar-pol &c: txt ABC 130 ν Syr seth arm sah: om lect 17 Clirj : πρ. αυτόν 4. 103. — • 
 σοΧομωνος DE &c : txt A((TaX.)B.'C. — D reads: εκπορευομενου £ε του πιτρου και 
 ιωανον συνεζεπορευετο κρατών αυτούς' οι δε θαμβηθεντες έστησαν εν τη στ. τ. κ. σ, 
 
 peculiari Spiritus motu. Hinc fit ut tarn 7. iriacras .... ήγ€ΐρ€ν] ο'ύτω και 
 
 secure de miraculo pronuntiet. Porro, ex- ό χριστός εττοίησε' πολλάκις λόγιμ ίθε- 
 
 citare hoc verbo claudum voluit adrecipien- ράπενσε, πολλάκις εργφ, πολλάκις και 
 
 dam Dei gratiam : ille tamen nihil quam τήν χείρα προηγαγεν, 'όπου ήσαν άσθε- 
 
 eleemosynam exspectat.' 5. ειτεϊχβν] νέστεροι κατά τήν π'ιστιν Ίνα μή δόξy 
 
 not Γοϋς• οφθαλμούς (as Bos and Kuinoel), άπό ταυτομάτου γενέσθαι. Chrys. See 
 
 which is implied: — but (see reff.) τον Mark ix. 27• βάσίΐς are the ' soles' of 
 
 νουν, ' fixed his attention on them.' the feet, — σψυρά, the ' ankles.' Luke, 
 
 6.] ' Non dubium est, quin etiam the physician, had made himself acquainted 
 
 lis qui non erant de communitate fidelium, with the peculiar kind of weakness, and 
 
 datse fuerint eleemosynse : sed Petrus tum described it accordingly. 8.] εξαλλ. 
 
 vel nil habebat secum, in via ad templura, describes his first joyous liberation from 
 
 vel non taiitum dare poterat quantum ad his weakness : as soon as he felt himself 
 
 sublevandum pauperem opus esset. Vide strengthened, he leapt up, for joy. No 
 
 abstinentiam Apostoli in tanta administra- suppositions need be made, such as πει- 
 
 tione, cf. ii. 45, coll. iv. .35.' Bengal. But ράζων Ίσως εαυτόν (Chrys.) : or that it 
 
 perhaps it is more simple to conclude that was from ignorance how to walk (Bloomf.). 
 
 Peter spoke here of his oimi station and His joy is quite sufficient to explain the 
 
 means in hfe^' I am no rich man, nor have gesture, and it is better to leave the narra- 
 
 I silver or gold to give thee.' ev τω tive in its simplicity. 
 
 όν<ίμ.] There is no ellipsis (as Heinr. and 11 — 26.] The discourse of Peter 
 
 Kuinoel) of λ'εγω σοι, which weakens the thereupon. 11. κρατούντος] holding, 
 
 force of the sentence : the Name of Jesus is physically : not spoken of mental adhesion, 
 
 that in which, by the power of which, the but of actual holding by the hand or arm, 
 
 " rise up and walk" is to be accomplished, that he might not be separated from them in
 
 8—14. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λί2Ν. 
 
 SI 
 
 θαμβοί. ^ iciov δε ο ΠεΓοος '^αττεκρ'ινατο προς τον λαο»/ q-Matt. xi 
 ' Αΐ'όρες' ΙαξίαηΧιται, τι θαυμάζετε ' ϊπι τούτω, η Ύ]μιν τι ' ^"„'"Ίίί!ιΙ.''' 
 ^ ατεΐ'ίΖ^ετε ως icict ^υνάμπ η ευσίβί'ια ' πεποιηκόσιν 
 περιπατειν αυτόν ; ^^ ό θίος Αβραάμ και Ισαάκ και 
 Ιακωρ, ο Όίος των πάτερων ημών, εοοςασεν τον παιοα t = inarki. ΐ7 
 αυτοΰ Ιησοϋν, ον υμεις μεν ' παρεδώκατε, κα] '''' ηρνησασΘε '^l°"%\'f„ 
 
 ' ^ χ ν ' Έ-Γ \ / V ' ' ' ΧΧϋ. 2(ί. 
 
 S W. dat., Luke 
 του iv. 20. xxii. 
 5ϋ. ch χ. 4 
 al. Luke 
 only. J„b 
 
 κατα ποοςωπον Πιλάτου, ^ 
 
 υμεις όε τον ayiov και δι'/ 
 
 Jo>h. 
 xxii. 2(ί. 3 
 Kingsxiii.16. 
 Winer,} 45. 4. 
 
 σθε, "° - "■"• ^6 
 
 ΐΓου, -^ κρίνοντος εκτεινου 
 ^ απολυείί'. * υ/ιεις δε ^^ τον ayiov και δίκαιον ?7|0Vi)aac.v/c, ^^g^ 
 
 τ = Matt, xxvii. 18. Mark χν. 10. w = Matt. χ. 33. 2Pet. ii. 1. χ = Lake ii. 31. 2Cor. x. 1. 2 Chron. 
 xui.8. y constr., hereouly. see uh. XX. 16 al. ζ = Matt xxTii. 15, &C. zz = 1 John i. 20. 
 
 (κθ. — 12. αποκριθιις if ο πίτρ. {ΐπίν ττρ. αιτους (τρ. αυτ. Syr ar-erp arm also) D. — rec 
 bef TTfrp. om o, with Ε &c : ins ABCD 5. 13 al. — tm τοντο 13. 73. 133 lect 1. — ως ημών 
 τη ώια Svv. η ενσ. {aut potestate ν Syr ar-erp arm al Irenp reading, as 4, ιϊ,ονσια 
 after ΐυναμίΐ) τοντο πιποιηκοτων τούτο πιριττ. αυτ. D: τούτον Ε vss Iren Cass. — 
 13. bef ισαακ and ιακ., ins Οίος AD al ν aeth copt ar-erp (bef ισαακ only, arm), — ο θιος 
 C al Chr Thl- {corrn to suit LXX Exod iii. 6, and Matt xxii. 32) : om B(e sil)E most 
 mss sail Syr ar pol &c Thdot-ancj^r Thl". — ιησ. χρ. D. — rec om μιν bef τταμιδ. (erased 
 because no correspondg ce follows), with D &c (D has ημείς) : ins ABCE all ν syr slav 
 Chr Thl Iren Jer al. — aft Troptf. add ίΐς κρίσιν D syr-marg Iren, {ΐς κριτηριον Ε, in 
 
 iudicio d (Lachm). — απιιρνησασθαι D, ηρνη σασθαι Ε. — αυτόν om (as needless) 
 
 ABC all V copt arm Iren Jer Did : ins DE many mss &c. — ττίΐλατον του κρίΐναντος 
 iKiivov απολυίίν αυτόν θίλυντος D (α curious instance of combination of read- 
 ings). — κρίνοντος C 13. — εκείνον 190. — 14. δίκαιον f βαρύνατε και ητησατε D: 
 
 the crowd, but might testify to all, who his 
 benefactors were. <rroqi rrj κ. Σολομ.] 
 
 See John x. 23, note. 12.] άπεκρί- 
 
 νατο, viz. to their expressions of astonish- 
 ment implied in έκθαμβοι. See Matt. xi. 
 25. άττεκρίνατο never signifies ' made an 
 address,' as Bloomf. ; but always ' an- 
 swered ;' cf. ch. V. 8, note. — This second 
 discourse of Peter may be thus divided : 
 T/iis is no xvork of ours, but of God. for 
 the glorifying of Jesus, vv. 12, 13 : — whom 
 ye denied and killed, but God hath raised 
 up, vv. 13 — 15 : — through lohose name this 
 man is made ichole, ver. Ifi: — ye did it in 
 ignorance, but God thereby fulfilled His 
 counsel, v\. IT, 18. Exhortation to re- 
 pent, that ye may be forgiven, and saved 
 by this Jesus Christ at His coming, vv. 
 19 — 21 : whose times have been the subject 
 of prophecy from the first, ver. 21. Cita- 
 tions to prove this, vv. 22 — 24 : its imme- 
 diate ajiplication to the hearers, as Jews, 
 vv. 25, 20'. There the discourse seems to 
 be broken off, as ch. iv. 1 relates. 
 eiri τοΰτω] not, at this (event) : but ' at 
 this maii,'comp. αυτόν below, which would 
 not be used at the first mention of one 
 then present. — Their error was not the 
 wonder itself, — though even that would 
 shew ignorance and weakness of faith, for 
 it was truly no wonderful thing that had 
 happened, viewed by a believer in Jesus, — 
 but their wondering at the Apostles, as if 
 they had done it by their own power. 
 'Ergo,' says Calvin, 'hoc est perperam 
 
 obstupescere, quum in hominibus mentes 
 nostrae subsistunt.' δννάμει, ' power,' 
 
 — such as magical craft, or any other 
 supposed means of working miracles : tii- 
 σεβεία, 'meritorious efficacy' with God, 
 so as to have obtained this from Him on 
 our own account. The distinction is im- 
 portant : — ' holiness,' of the E. V., is not ex- 
 pressive of εϋσεβ. which bears in it the idea 
 of operative, cultive piety, rather than of 
 inherent character. 13. ό θ. Άβρ. 
 
 κ.Γ.λ.] ' Appellatio fi-equens in Actis, prse 
 cseteris libris N. T., et illi periodo tempo- 
 rum conveniens.' Bengel. opa ττώς αυτόν 
 (τον θεόν) είςωθεΤ. συνεχώς εις τονς ττρο- 
 •γόνους' ίνα μή οόζ^ καινόν τι είςάγειν 
 δόγμα• και εκεί (ch. ii.) τοϋ πατριάρχου 
 Ααβιδ εμνημόνευσε, καΐ ενταύθα των περί 
 τοϋ 'Αβραάμ . . . (Chrys.). έδόξασεν] 
 
 not, as Ε. V., ' hath glorified,' implying, by 
 thus honouring His Name .• it is the historic 
 aor., ' glorified,' viz. by His exaltation 
 through death— see John ii. 11; xvii. 10. 
 τταΐδα] not ' Son,' but ' Servant :' 
 servant, however, in that distinct and Mes- 
 sianic sense which the same expression bears 
 in Isa. xl. — Ixvi. in the LXX. vilos is the 
 word always used to designate Jesus as tlie 
 Son of God. The above meaning is adopted 
 by all the best modern comm.. Pise, Ben- 
 gel, Olsh., Meyer, De W., Stier, which last 
 refer to a paper of Nitzsch's in the Stud. u. 
 Krit. for 1828, Heft 2, p. .331 fl'. Olsh. .says, 
 ' After N.'s remarks on the subject, no one 
 hereafter can suppose this expression equiva-
 
 32 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 III. 
 
 c^s'r-^^ate Και ^ \]τησασΟί ^ άνδρα ψονία "^ •χπρισΟί]ΐ'αι νμιν, ^ τον ABCDE 
 '■"''jifdg'.^i. οε ' *'fX''7^'' ^^'^ Κ'^νζ ατΓΕΚτεπ'οτί" οΐ' ο Οίος '^ ijysioiv 
 
 c = i<;or.ii.i2. £ic νίκρων, ov Ίΐμίΐς μορτυ^Ες ίσμίν. και ίττι τϊ] 
 
 ^Hcb^if/iu. ΤΓίστίΐ τυϊβ ' ονόματος αυτού τυυτον Όν Θίωρειτε και ο'/δατε 
 xxs. 4. ίστεοίωσίΐ' ro oi'oua aurou* και ϊ) ΤΓ{στ(ς• "^ ■^■ 
 
 c = Johnii. , , ' , Γ 
 
 ίοωκεΐ' αυτω τιιΐ' oAokAi 
 
 η δι 
 
 αυτού 
 
 εόωκΒν αυτω τηΐ' οΛοκληριαν ταυτηΐ' απέναντι πάντων 
 
 κατά αγνοίον 
 ο δε θεός ά 
 
 f ch. i. 8 reft•. 
 
 h.soMHrkxi. viuov. ' Kai vuv, αοεΛφοί, otoa οτι κατά ayvoiai 
 
 •J2. R.m.iii. / , „ \ , ,, r - - - ^ 
 
 i ^j-rZ/rrft-"•'• εττραςοτε, ωςπίρ και οι άρχοντες υμών' 
 
 j Rom. τϋ. 5. lPet.i.21. k — here only, χρόνοί μιίθησιν όίΛωσι, Earip.Suppl. 4\9. 1 here only. Isa. i. β. 
 m = Malt, xxvii. 24. Deut xxvi. 10 al. u ■= Matt. xix. 3. Phil.ii.3. iv. U. Rom.x.2. 
 
 φαρ. also Iren {aygravaslis) μα'Κλην ητησησθαι Ε. — ζην και χαρισΟηναι νμ. Ε Aug. — • 
 15. ο θ(ος om 13. — 16. tni om Β 4. GO. 103: tv 119 d e ν copt sah setli Iren. — τούτον 
 etwptire K. οιδατε οτι εστεραοσίν D'-gr: Gewptirai CE, quern vidistis d v. — 17. avSpiQ 
 a?f\(poi DE. — ίττισταμί^α οτι νμιις μεν D: oiSart 11. 24. 117- 133 al ; scite seth. — 
 aft εττρηξ. add ποΐ'ηρονΌ\ το πυνηρον D^ 34 syr-marg Iren Ambrst al. — και om 18 Syr 
 
 lent to ιιϊός τ. θ.' κατά 'ΤΓρ<55ωΐΓον Π. 
 
 asE. V., '/?« ///e;;i-Men(?<>o/'P.,Or better per- 
 haps, ' to the face of Pilate.' The expres- 
 sion is no Hebraism : Polybius often uses 
 it : κατά ττρήςωτΓον λεγομένων τών λόγων, 
 XXV. 5. 2 : κ. πρ. άτταΐ'ται• τοΊς ττολεμίοις, 
 χνϋ. 3. 3, &C. See Sch weigh., Lexicon Po- 
 lybianum. Kpivavxos «κ. άιτολ. see 
 
 Luke xxiii. 20. John xix. 4. 12. 14. 
 
 αγιον κ. δίκαιον] not only in the higher 
 and divine sense present to Peter's mind, 
 but also by Pilate's ow7i verdict, and the 
 testimony of the Jews' consciences. The 
 sentence is full of antitheses : ayiov κ. 
 δίκ. contrasts with the moral imjmri/.i/ of 
 άνδρα φηνία, — άρχηγ. τ. ζοιΡις, with the 
 destruction of life implied in φονέα, — while 
 άττεκτεινατε again stands in remarkable op- 
 position to άρχ. Γ. ζ. — This last title given 
 to our Lord implies (as Vulg.) ' Auctorem 
 vitse :' see reff. so άρχ>]γον κ. καθηγεμόνα 
 της 'όλης ίπιβο\ης Άρατον, Polyb. ii. 
 40. 2 : 'όπερ (scil. want of occupation in 
 mercenary soldiers) σχεδόν, ως ειπείν, 
 αργηγον κ. μόνον αίτιον γίνεται ηγάσιως, 
 i. CO. 10 al. — It is possible, that the words 
 αρχ. r. ζ. may contain an allusion to the 
 great miracle whicli was the immediate cause 
 of the enmity of their rulers to Jesus. But 
 of course Peter had a higher view in the 
 title than merely this. 16.] em τ. 
 
 ττίστίΐ . . . — The Pi. V. is right ; ' through,' 
 or better, ' on account of faith in His 
 name.' The meaning, yo?• the sake of {\.α. 
 of awakening, in you, and in the lame man 
 himself) /βϊ7Λ in his name (Rosenm., Hein- 
 richs, Olsh., Stier), though grammatically 
 justified, seems against the connexion with 
 the μάρτνρ'ες ίσμεν just before. It is 
 evident to my mind tliat the πίσης τον όν. 
 αντ. is the faith of these μάρτυρες. 'His 
 name' (the efficient cause), 'by means of,' 
 or on account of (our) ' faith in his Name ' 
 (the medium operandi), &c. loTcp. and 
 
 6δωκ. again are historic aorists, — ' con- 
 firmed,' and 'gave;' better than ^ hath coyif.' 
 and ' hath given.' κ. ή ττίστις ή δι' 
 
 αΰτοϋ — ' and that faith which is wrought 
 by Him' —not ' faith in Him ;' which is an 
 inadmissible rendering. Peter's own words 
 (1 Pet. i. 21) are remarkably parallel with, 
 and the best interpreters of, this expression : 
 υμάς τους δι' αΰτοΰ Trc-rriarevKOTas £ts 
 Ocov, TOJ' εγείραντα αυτόν εκ νεκρώΐ', καΐ 
 δόζαν αΰτφ ϋόντα, ώςτε την πίστιν υμών 
 καΊ εΧττίδα εΤναι εις θεόν. — Some of the 
 comm. are anxious to bring in the faith of 
 the lame man himself in this verse. Cer- 
 tainly it is according to analogy to suppose 
 that he had such, faith, from and after the 
 words of Peter : — but, as certainly, there is 
 no allusion to it in this verse, and the 
 thread of Peter's discourse would be broken 
 by any such. It is the firm belief in His 
 name on the part of us His witnesses, 
 of which he is here speaking, as the me- 
 dium whereby His name ( =: the Power of 
 the great dignity to which He has been 
 exalted, the αρχηγία τΙΊς Ci'irjc) had in this 
 case worked. 17.] νΰν, introducing a 
 
 new consideration : see 2 Thess. ii. (}. 
 Here it softens the severer charge of ver. 
 14 : sometimes it intensifies, as ch. xxii. 16. 
 I John ii. 28 : — especially with Ιδού, ch. 
 xiii. 1 1 ; xx. 22. No meaning such as ' now 
 that the real Messiahship of Him whom ye 
 have slain is come to light ' (Meyer) is ad- 
 missible, αδελφοί, still softening his 
 tone, and reminding them of their oneness 
 of blood and covenant with the speaker. 
 κατά αγνοιαν) There need be no 
 difficulty in the application of the άγνοια 
 to even the rulers of the Jews. It admits 
 of all degrees— from the unlearned, who 
 were implicitly led by others, and hated 
 Him because others did, — up to the most 
 learned of the scribes, who knew and rightly 
 interpreted the Messianic prophecies, but
 
 15—19. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 33 
 
 ° προ/οατηγγε/λευ δ(ά '* στόματος πάντων των προφητών 
 
 ίΐν τον -χ^ριστον αυτόν ' ίπληρωσεν όντως. 
 ίΌί;σοΓ€ ουν και " επιστρίφατε εις το 
 νμων τας αμαρτίας, όπως αν ίΧθωσιν ^ καιροί 
 
 μίτα- 
 
 ver. 24. ch. 
 
 vii. 52. 2 Cor. 
 
 ix. 5 only t. 
 ρ ch. i. IHreir. 
 
 ί^αλίtφ^/rίvαι ai.fr. 
 
 ava- 
 
 Lake xxii. 32. t ch. vii. 19. Rom. i. U, 20 al. 
 
 xii. 42. V and constr., Luke six. 44. Heb. iz. 10. 
 
 r Luke xiii. 3 
 al. Ir. 
 
 .■i Matt, xiii. 15. 
 π = Col. ii. 14. Ps. 1. 10. Ua. xliii. 2'i. 2 Mace. 
 w here only, Exod. viii. 15. see 2 Tim. i. IB. 
 
 arr aeth. — 18. for a, -o D-gr : qui demid v-sixt Iren-ms Vig : ως Syr seth arm. — rec places 
 αυτού betw προφητών and τταθίΐΐ' (alteration to suit αυτού προφ. ver 21), with (not A, 
 for A om παθ. τ. χιι.) al copt aeth ar-pol &c : 6i). lfi.3 sah Chr, om it in both 
 places : 66^ Vig ins it in both : txt (A see above) BCDE 3. 15. 18. 25. 27. 3G. 43. «5 ν 
 syrr ar-erp arm Iren. — παθίΐν om 180. — 19. for tic, προς Β. — τας αμ. υμών D many 
 vss. — επίλθωσιν D Tert : ut quum venerint v. — aft αναψυζ. add νμιν Ε tol (lat mss in 
 Bed), and aft ίλθ. Bed-gr Syr syr* copt ar-poI Chr-comm Iren Tert. — του om Ε all. — 
 
 from moral blindness, or perverted expec- 
 tations, did not recognize them in our Lord. 
 Even Caiaphas himself, of whom apparently 
 this could least be said, may be brought 
 under it in some measure : even he could 
 hardly have deUvered over Jesus to Pilate 
 with the full consciousness that He was 
 the Messiah, and that he himself was ac- 
 complishing prophecy by so doing. Some 
 degree of ayvoia there must have been in 
 them all. — The interpretation (Wolf) 'ye 
 did, as your rulers {did),' is of course in- 
 admissible, being contrary to the usage of 
 the words : πμάσσιιν ωςπιρ και can never 
 mean to imitate, but Ιπρόΐ,ατί must refer 
 to a definite act (understood), and ωςπερ 
 καί must take up another subject of ίπρά- 
 ξατε. 18.] ιτάντων, see Luke xxiv. 
 
 27 and note. There is no hyperbole (Kui- 
 noel) nor adaptation (Meyer) to Jewish 
 exegetical views. ' Omnes prophetae in 
 universum non prophetarunt nisi de diebus 
 Messiifi' (Sanhedr. 99. 1), was not merely 
 a Jewish view, but the real truth. — The 
 prophets are here regarded as one body, 
 actuated by one Spirit : and the sum of 
 God's purpose, shewn by their testimony, 
 is, that His CnuiST should suffer. — Notice 
 the inf. aor. τταθεϊν, as in ch. ii. 30, of a 
 definite single act. 19.] ovv, quce 
 
 cum ita sint. els το έξαλ.] The faith 
 
 implied in ίπιστρίψατε has for its aim, is 
 necessarily (by God's covenant, see John 
 iii. 15. 18) accompanied by, the wiping out 
 of sin. όπως αν €λθ. κ.τ.λ.] This 
 
 passage has been variously rendered and 
 explained. To deal first with the render- 
 ing : - οττως αν cannot mean ' when,' as in 
 E. V. — ο πως never occurs in that sense in 
 the N. T., nor indeed with an indie, at all ; — 
 and if it did, — the addition of «r, and the 
 use of a subjunctive, would preclude it here. 
 It can have but one sense, — ' in order that.' 
 This being so, what are καιροί άναψύξ€ως .' 
 From the omission of the article, sonic have 
 insisted (e. g. Stier, R. d. Apost. i. 29) on 
 rendering it ' times, seasons, of ava\p.' But 
 this cannot be maintained. καιρός and 
 Vol. II. 
 
 καιροί are occasionally anarthrous when 
 they manifestly must have the article in 
 English. Cf. esp. Luke xxi. 24, καιροί 
 iljpwv, where none would think of render- 
 ing, ' seasons of (the) Gentiles.' See for 
 καιρός Matt, viii. 29. Mark xi. 13. 1 Pet. 
 ii. 5. And, since philologically we have to 
 choose between ' seasons' and ' the seasons,' 
 ίλβωσιν must I think determine in favour 
 of the latter. For by that word we must 
 understand a definite arrival, one and the 
 same for all, not a mere occurrence, as the 
 other sense of καιροί would render neces- 
 sary. This is also implied by the aorist, 
 used, in a conditional sentence, of a single 
 fact, whereas a recurrence or enduring of a 
 state is expressed by the present. — ' In 
 order that the times of άνά-φυΚις may 
 come.' What is άνάψ. ? Clearly, from 
 the above rendering, some refreshment, 
 future, and which their conversion was to 
 bring about. But hardly, from what has 
 been said, refreshment in their own hearts, 
 arising from their conversion : besides the 
 above objections, the following words, από 
 προςώπου τον κυρίου are not likely to have 
 been used in that case. No other meaning, 
 it seems to me, will suit the words, but that 
 of ' the times of refreshment,' the great 
 season of joy and rest, which it was under- 
 stood the coming of the Messiah in His 
 glory was to bring with it. That this 
 should be connected by the Apostle with 
 the conversion of the Jewish people, was 
 not only according to the plain inference 
 from prophecy, but doubtless was one of 
 those things concerning the hivydoni of 
 God which he had been taught by his risen 
 Master. The same connexion holds even 
 now. If it be objected to this, that thus we 
 have the conversion of the Jews regartled as 
 bringing about the great times of refresh- 
 ment, and those times consequently as de- 
 layed by their non-conversion (' ne<|ue enim 
 est : mutate vos in melius, ut Dcus niittat 
 Christum : non esse potest : hoc non j)en- 
 det a nostra μετανοκ}.' Morns in Stior 
 Ii. A. i. 91), I answer, that, however truo 
 1)
 
 84 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 III. 
 
 ατΓΟ προςωτΓου του 
 
 χ = here only. xLvt^ttuQ 
 see Rev. xx. ^ 
 
 2 TheslT.'t»!' ■'■"'' ^ ^Γpoκί'γJίιpισμ£vov υμιν "χρισ 
 
 y ch XX ■ ' " 
 
 κυρίου, "" κα] αποστείλ^ abcdk 
 
 •> •τ - 21 •^ ζ ^ - 
 τον lf /σουΐ', ον ofi 
 
 xxv'uti.iuiy. ουοανύν /ι«ΐ' ' ^(Ε,ασΟαι άχρι ■χροΐ'ωΐ' ' αττοκαταστάσίως 
 
 £χο(ι. IV. Ιο. ι^ ίχ/Ν '/ΐ\ί^> / »-' f/ 
 
 Ιβ''"Ϊ)"''η' τταΐ'των^ ώυ * ελαλτ/σεν ο σευς έια στόματος των α-^ιων 
 
 — here only. Xen. Anab. τ. ft, 20. b ami con.^^tr., ch. xvii. 30. Lukei. f>7. 
 
 d attr., ch. i. 1 reff. e — Luke xxiv. 2ft. ch. xxviii. 25. 2Pet. i. 21. f ch. i. 16 reff. 
 
 c here unly f. 
 
 20. rec ιτροκίκη^υ-^μίνον {either a mistake, or a gloss agreeable to the sense of vv 18. 
 21), with many mss Orig (iii. 143 c, Lachm) : txt A(-xtp-)BCDE mss (nrly), vss Chr 
 Euthal al : pro'paratum Iren : desliuatum and preedesignatum Tert : preedestinatum d e 
 copt sah : pradicaturn ν : προκίχρισμενον seth : 7rpoict^fipf;/jf vov 133. — rec ιησ. χρ. 
 {corrn to moi-e usual appelhi, the connenion of χρ. not being perceived, see note), with 
 AC &c vss (nrly) Cosm Iren : txt BD-gr Ε 4G. «0. 95. 9C. \2(j. 177 al Thl.— 21. for απο- 
 κατ., dispositionis Iren : exhibitionis Tert. — rec for των ay., τταντων ay., with a few mss 
 Cosm : τταντων των ay. Ε all Chrj Chron-alex Thl {corrn to suit ver 24, and των 
 omd in rec by mistake, ounng to -των preceding) : txt ABCD h 27. 81. 105. 127• 142. 
 163 al vss Orig Chr, Iren Tert: αυτών των 13: om both 29. 100 sah. — rec places 
 
 this may be in fact, the other is fully borne 
 out by the manner of speaking in Scripture : 
 the same objection might lie against the 
 efficacy of prayer. See Gen. xix. 22 ; 
 xxxii. 26. Mark vi. 5. 2 Thess. ii. 3. 2 Pet. 
 iii. 12. OTTO ιτροςώττ. τ. κνρ.] 'From 
 
 the presence of God' {the Father), who 
 has reserved these καιροί in His own power. 
 When they arrive, it is by His decree, 
 which goes forth from His presence. Cf. 
 ΐζήλθίν δόγμα παρά Καίσ. Αύγ., Luke 
 ii. I. 20.] άίΓοστίίλη (see above), 
 
 literally, — not figuratively, by the Spirit: 
 — even if the word ' send ' be no where else 
 applied to the second coming of the Lord, 
 there is no reason why it should not be 
 here : the whole ground and standing-point 
 of these two orations of Peter are peculiar, 
 and the very mention of the ' times of re- 
 freshment' proceeding forth from the pre- 
 sence of the Father would naturally lead 
 to the position here assigned to the Son, as 
 one sent by the Father. See below, on 
 ver. 26. [Besides which, the aor. will not 
 allow of the figurative interpn, confining, as 
 it does, the ' sending' to one definite event. 
 April, 1 856.] ΐΓροκίχ€ΐρισ•μ.€νον] See 
 
 reff. ' before appointed :' ϋμ'ιν ' to you,' — as 
 your Messiah. According to the right read- 
 ing, xpicTT. Ίησοΰν, χριστοί' may be con- 
 nected with τον ττροκίχ. ΰμ., ' Him who 
 was predestined your Messiah, namely, 
 Jesus.' 21. ov Sei οΰρ. μ. δεξασθαι] 
 
 These words admit of a double rendering : 
 (1) ' Whom the heaven tnust receive.' (2) 
 ' IVho must possess (capessere) the heaven.' 
 Of these the former is in my view decidedly 
 preferable, both as best suiting the sense, 
 and as being the natural rendering, whereas 
 the other is forced. Only two or three in- 
 stances of δίχομαι used in this sense are 
 produced, and in these it gets the meaning 
 by signifying ' to take to one's self,' as pro- 
 perty or inheritance : which would surely 
 never be said of υϋρανόν, thus barely ex- 
 
 pressed. Besides, the emphatic position 
 of ούραν6ν, with μ€ν attached to it, is 
 almost decisive against this rendering. I 
 apprehend that this particle in a sentence of 
 the present form is always found appended 
 to the subject, never to the object; and 
 that, if οΰρ. had been the object, the form of 
 the sentence would necessarily have been 
 ov μίν δη κ.τ.\. — The reason given by 
 Bengel for rejecting the right rendering, 
 ' Coelo capi, i. e. cohiberi, concludi, vio- 
 lenta est interpretatio, quasi coelum Christo 
 majus sit; et inimica celsitudini Cliristi 
 super omnes coelos,' is best answered by 
 himself, ' Non tamen nullo sensu dici po- 
 tuit, caelum suscipit Christum : admittit 
 scil. ut thronus Regem legitimum;' only I 
 would rather understand it locally, and re- 
 cognize a parallel expression with that in ch. 
 i., also /oca/, ι-ί^έλ;; ΰπ'ίλαβίν αυτόν. And 
 so far from seeing in it any derogation from 
 the Majesty of Christ, it seems to me ad- 
 mirably to set it forth : it behoves the 
 heaven (which is his, obeying his wUl) to 
 receive Him till the time appointed. The 
 omission of the article cannot be adduced 
 either way here : for ουρανός 'the heaven,' 
 is frequently anarthrous, as 7)λιος and other 
 similar nouns : see (besides very nume- 
 rous instances of οΰρ. after a preposition, 
 which are hardly to the point) 2 Pet. 
 iii. 12, and τάν ττρός 'ίσπιρον κίλίυθον 
 οϊιρανοϊ•, Eur. Orest. 1003. Ζίύς ΐστιν 
 αίθήρ, Ztiif ii γ»}, Ztvg δ' ουρανός, ^sch. 
 Frag. i. 96. The tragedians never prefix 
 the article to οΐφανός, yi) (meaning 'the 
 earth'), αίθήρ, or ί'/Χιος, except when 
 qualified by an adjective, as ώ τον αϊπνν 
 ovp. διφρηΧατών, Soph. Aj. 485, and even 
 then very seldom. Middleton has but very 
 slightly noticed this, ch. iii. 1, § 5, note. 
 
 άχρι] Not during, as the advocates 
 of the present spiritual sense of the passage 
 wish to render it, but ' until ;' see below. 
 
 χρονών άττοκαταστ. τταντων κ.τ.λ.]
 
 20—24. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 35 
 
 ^ ατΓ αιώνος αυτοΰ πξ}θ({)ητ(ον. 
 
 προφητην νμιν 
 
 iict\(fnov υμ<ον 
 
 οσα αν λαλί)"^ ^«^- ,.,...^ ^ο 
 
 2- Μωυσης ^εν εΙττΕί/ υπ ^Γ,η^Ϊ'β/»"'. 
 
 ανάστησα κυρ(ος 
 ώς ε^ε* αυτού ακουσεσθε 
 ιΐ^σ^ ττρος νμας. εσται οε, 
 
 Ί]τις εαν μη ακουσν) του τΓροψητου εκείνου 
 λαου, και πάντες οε 
 
 Οεος υμών εκ των 
 
 θε κατά πάντα 
 
 φυχη 
 
 σεται εκ του 
 
 πάσα 
 
 " εζοΧεθρευϋη- 
 
 οι προφηται απο 
 
 4 
 
 h -ΜηΜ. χχϋ. 
 24. ill. ϋ.30 
 (var. read.). 
 Dlut. xviii. 
 Κι, 18. 
 = Matt. vii. 
 
 ch. xvii. 
 Rum. iii, 
 al. 
 
 22, 
 
 Έαμουηλ και των ^ κάθετης όσοι εΧαλησαν και '' κc'^τηy- ^^^^-^^^^^^ 
 
 d constr,, 
 ch. li. 17, 21. 
 m => ch. ii. 43 
 rett. 
 
 Dent. vii. 10 al. Jos. Antt. viii. 11, 1. 
 Tiii. 1. cb. xi. 4. χνίίί.23 only t• 
 
 ο Matt. X. 18. John vi. 57. viii. 16, 17 al. 
 q = here only, see ch. xiii. 38. 1 Cor. xi. 26. 
 
 ρ Lulie i. 3. 
 
 ατΓ αιώνος aft προφ. : bef πρυψ. al Orig ν : om D (αντου των πρ.) 19 arm Cosm Irea 
 Tert : alii aliter {prob the expr was found difficult, as Mey suggests, because strictly 
 αττ' αιώνος there were no prophets. Hence it was ejected to the marg and foutid its 
 place variously when reinserted) : t.xt {not an avoidance of the diffic as Meyer tfiinks, 
 but a very usual collocation in the Acts) ABCE (των air. αιών.) al Chron-alex &c. — 
 22. rec aft μιν ins yap {to connect the prophecy of Moses, as an example, with ver 21), 
 with qu.' : txt ABCDE all ν copt sah jeth al Chrj Iren. — rec bef tnttv ins ττρος τους 
 ττατίρης, with a few mss (appy) Thl : also aft tintv DE (add ημών D al sah aeth Iren, 
 — νμων Ε al Bed-gr) all Bed-gr sah aeth arm ar-pol Chrj Iren {appy one of the free 
 additions to the text so common in D al in the Acts: see also ver 25) : om ABC 15. 18. 
 3G. 130 al ν copt Syr. — νμων (1st) om Β (>0 copt Syr (om ο Θ. νμ.) Chrj : ημών 
 CE all syr sah seth Justin Thl Oec : txt AD &c ν ar-pol &c Chr Iren. — εκ τ. αδ. νμ. om 
 38 {similar endings). — for νμων (2nd), ημών D-gr al Thl'. — Χαλησίΐ C al. — 23. rec av, 
 with B(esil)DE &c : txt AC all Thl.— roc tloXoQp. with Ε &c : txt A(B.=)CD &c.— 
 24. h om Ό.—^:aτtlης D.— for όσοι, οι C^D-' ν : ο D' : t.xt AB(e sil)C'(appy)C3E &c. 
 — for ίλαλησαν, ΐττροφητίνσαν C^ seth arm. — rec προκατηγ-^ειλαν {more accurate 
 
 The key both to the construction and mean- 
 ing here, is our Lord's saying, Matt. xvii. 1 1 , 
 Ηλίας* μίν ίρχΐται ττρώτοί', και άττο- 
 καταστήσ•€ΐ ττάντα. From this we see that 
 άτΓοκατ. Ίτάντων stands alone, as the 
 άτΓοκατ. of all things : and that ών does 
 not belong to πάντων. Next, what is αττο- 
 κατόστασΐ5 ? We must be guided by the 
 usage of the kindred verb άποκαθίστημι 
 (or -άνω). Certainly, ' to restore ' is its usual 
 import, and most strikingly so, accompanied 
 however with the notion of a glorious and 
 complete restoration, in ch. i. C. To render 
 our viora. fulfilment, and apply it to πάντων 
 ών ΐλάλ. κ.Γ.λ., is against all precedent. — 
 And, in the sense of ' restoration,' I can- 
 not see how it can be applied to the work 
 of the Spirit, as proceeding, during this the 
 interim-state, in the hearts of men. This 
 would be contrary to all Scripture analogy. 
 I understand it then of the glorious restora- 
 tion of all things, the παΚιγγιησία, which, 
 as Peter here says, is the theme of all the 
 prophets from the beginning.— No objec- 
 tion can be raised to this from the meaning 
 of χρόνοι : see ch. vii. 17, and Peter's own 
 language, 1 Pet. i. 20. ίπ' ίσχάτψ των 
 χρόνων. If the distinction be true between 
 χοόΐ'οι and καιροί, as denoting a longer 
 and a shorter ])eriod respectively, which I 
 much doubt, — it does not afi'ect this pas- 
 sage : — for, eitlier way, the χρόνοι άτΓοκαΓ. 
 will imply the time or period of the άποκατ., 
 not the moment only when it begins or is 
 
 D 
 
 completed, as καιρός (not icaipoi) άποκατ. 
 might. De Wette is hardly right in saying 
 that the unexpressed if to answer to μίν is 
 contained in the sense of άποκατάστασις : 
 it is rather contained in the previous clause, 
 και άποστή\ϊ^ κ.τ.λ. In order to fill up 
 the elhpsis, this clause would have to be 
 repeated after προφητών — τότε ίί αντον 
 άποστελεΤ. ών, i. e. ους, agreeing with 
 
 χρόνους-, or perhaps π(ρι ών, i. e. χρόνων. 
 It does not refer to ίτάντων, — see above. — 
 On the testimony of the prophets, see ver. 
 18, note. 22.] This citation is a free 
 
 but faithful paraphrase of the text in Deut. 
 See LXX. — That the words, as spoken 
 by Moses, seem to point to the whole line 
 of prophets sent by God, is not any ob- 
 jection to their being applied to Christ, but 
 rather necessitates, and entirely harmonizes 
 with, that application. See the parable 
 Matt. xxi. 33 — 41. And none of the whole 
 prophetic body entirely answered to the ώς 
 εμέ, but Christ. The Jews therefore 
 rightly understood it (though not always 
 consistent in this, comp. John i. 21 with 
 vi. 14) of the Messiah. 23. eloXcOp.] 
 
 LXX ίγώ ίκίικι/σω ΐξ αΰτον. Tliis word, 
 only known to later Gniek, is often found 
 in the LXX. See besides reff., Gen. xvii. 
 14. Deut. ix. .3. Ps. xvii. 40; Ixxii. 27• In 
 most places where it occurs, the readings 
 vary between -ολοΟρ-, and -ολίθρ- ; see 
 var. readd. 24.] See ver. 18, note. — 
 
 The construction of the Vulg., defended by 
 2
 
 se 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 III. 25, 26. 
 
 (λ α ν 
 
 τας Ύΐμίξίας ταύτας. 
 
 25 
 
 νμίΐς εστε οι νιοι των abcde 
 
 ττρυς' 
 ει; τω 
 
 λίγων προς Αρ^^οαμ Και 
 σπίοματΊ σου " εΐ'ίυλογηθί/σοίτοι πασαι αι '' ττατριαι της 
 
 ίδο αυτόν 
 
 r, 
 αττοστρίψίΐν 
 
 ιουντωι 
 
 r=Matt.Tiii.l2. vfly 
 Lnkexvi.8. / „ , c ν 
 
 s-Luke'i.'Vl." ΤΓ/ιοψητωρ /Cat τί /c ^ διαθήκης ^ ής " ^ΐίβετο ο Θίος 
 
 Rom. xi. 27. ν , r - 
 
 Ps. xxiv 14. roue πηΓίοαο υμών, 
 
 t atlr., cli. 1. 1 ι. -^ r ' 
 
 reft', 
 π =■ Lake xxii. 
 
 2il. Heb. viii. .. cyn 
 
 10. Gcu. XT. γϊ/ς. -" υμιν ποωτον ' αναστησας ο t /ίος τον ττοίί 
 'ΕχήΗ''χίίν.8: άττε'στειλεΐ' αυτυν ' εύλογοΰντα υμάς "^ εν τα 
 
 \ν = J.iiin νϋ ,/ > \ - e - f - Τ-Ι7- 1 Λ Λ ' ί^ 
 
 4S. GI.N xii. έκαστο V αττο των ττονηοίων υμω»'. IV . ΛοΛουντων οε 
 
 ■Λ. χχϋ, 18. ■> '^ 
 
 χχτϊ. 4. χ Gal. iii. 8 only. Gen. nt snpra. y Luke il. 4. Eph. iii 15 only. Nam. i. 18. 
 
 ζ — ver. 22 reff. a — ver. 13. ch. iv. 27, 30. Matt. xii. 18. I.^a. xlii. 1 al. b — Gal. lii. i). 
 
 Eph. i. 3 al. c = ch. iv. 3(1. Rom. xv. 13. d2Tim.iT.4. Lnke xxiii. 14. Job xxxiii. 17. 
 
 e Rom. i.2y. Isa. i. Ifi. 
 
 gloss), with C- a few mss Cosm : txt AB(C'.')DE most mss ν syrr arr copt seth arm 
 Chr Till Oec Iren : ins ημιν lect 12. — 25. rec bef υιοί om oi {as unnecessary, or perhaps 
 in the way, as according to the common notion an art with the predicate distributes it), 
 with D &c : txt ABCE all copt.— ο θ. SitB. BD copt sah : txt (some have tOiro) ACE mss 
 (appy) V Syr seth ar-pol &c Chr Cosm al. — rec aft ττατ., ημιον {corrn, as ot ττατ. τιμών is 
 the more usual, see ver Υλ, ch vii. 12. 15), with B(e sil)CD &c : txt AE 25. S8. 69 al 
 sah arm slav Chr Chron-alex Thlj Iren-ms. — και om 11 tol demid arm. — rec om tv (as 
 unnecessary) with many mss e (al ?) : ins ABCDE &c. — t-rtvXoyijB. A : εν\ο•/ηθ. A' (appy) 
 al Chr Thl^ Oec— φυλαι 3. 18.— 26. rec ο θ(ος ηναστ., with ADE ν Iren (iii. 12. 3: 
 p. 478 Stieren) (rearrangement for perspicuity) : txt BC lect 12 Syr ar-pol. — αυτού 
 om 121. — rec aft r. iraiS. αυτ. ins ι?)<τυυΐ' (marginal gloss. All such additions, if at all 
 the subject of variations, are spurious), with AB (e sil) mss (nrly) ar-pol al Cosm al : om 
 CDE it V Syr ar-erp sah copt aeth arm Chr Chron-alex ThP Iren. — ίϊ,απιστιιΧίν D 
 Chron-alex. — ouror om D Chrj Thl Iren. — ίνΚο-^ουντας D-gr : add και αγιαζοντα 43. 
 81. — ίπιστρίφιιν 96. — εκαπτ. νμκ>ν 13 sah.— for απο, (κ D. — for νμων, αντων C 13. 
 61". 68•' al, αντον 5. 27. 29. 69. 100. 104. 127. 16:} al, and one or the other d ν sah copt 
 Iren : om Β Chrj ThF (corrections and omission to suit ικαστον which did not seem to 
 tally with νμων) : txt ADE all (some vss omg εκαστ.) cosm al. 
 
 Casaubon and adopted by Valcknaer and but to make τάς ι)μ. τηΰτ. identical with 
 
 Kuinoel, των καϋεξΓις οσοι ίλόλ., ' et omnes 
 prophetse a Samuel, et deinceps qui locuti 
 sunt,' is not so good as the ordinary one in 
 E. V. Cf. (Ίρζάμε)Ός άπο Μωνσίων και άπό 
 πάντων των ττρο^., Luke xxiv. 27. — Still 
 less admissible is the rendering given in Dr. 
 Burton's note, as perhaps the literal one, 
 ' And (to the same effect spoke) all the pro- 
 phets from S. downwards, as many as spoke 
 and predicted these days.' To tvhat effect ? 
 And would not the sentence thus amount 
 to little more than saying, ' As many pro- 
 phets as predicted these days, predicted 
 these days .' ' Peter's aim is to shew the 
 unanimity of all the prophets in speaking 
 of these iime*.— Samuel is named, more as 
 being the first great prophet after Moses, 
 than as bearing any part in this testimony. 
 The prophetic period of which David was 
 the chief prophet, began in Samuel. See 
 1 Sam. ii. 10. 35 (Stier). ras ημ. 
 
 TovT.] ' These days ' now present, not the 
 times of restoration, as De Wette and others 
 understand : which would require εκείνος. 
 ' These days' are, in fact, connected with 
 the times of restoration, as belonging to the 
 same dispensation and leading on to them ; 
 and thus the apostle identifies the then time 
 with this preparation for (όπως• uv ελθ.) 
 and expectation of («χρ') those glories : 
 
 the καιροί avaxp. and the χρον. άποκατ., is 
 to make him contradict himself. 25.] 
 
 He applies this to them as being inheritors 
 of the promises. They were descendants, 
 according to the fiesh, and fellow-partakers, 
 according to the spirit. — For a full com- 
 ment on this promise made to Abraham, 
 see Gal. iii. 16. — This is cited freely from 
 the LXX, which for a'l ττατριαι has τά 
 έθνη. 26.] ιτρώτον, ' first ; ' implying 
 
 the offer to the Gentiles (but as yet, in 
 Peter's mind, only by embracing Judaism) 
 afterwards : see ch. xiii. 46. Rom. i. 16. 
 — It is strange how Olshausen can suppose 
 that the Spirit in Peter overleapt the bounds 
 of his subsequent prejudice with regard to 
 the admission of the Gentiles : — he never 
 had any such prejudice, but only against 
 their admission uncircnmcised, and as Gen- 
 tiles. — It is still stranger how a scholar like 
 Dr. Burton can propose the ungrammatical 
 and unmeaning rendering, " ττρώτον is per- 
 haps used with reference to Christ's first 
 coming, as opposed to his second." This 
 would require το ττρώτον, — and would cer- 
 tainly imply in the mind of the speaker an 
 absolute exclusion of all but Jews till the 
 second coming. άναστησας, not '■from 
 
 the dead .•' but as in ver. 22. -τταΐδα, 
 
 ' His Servant:' see note, ver. 13.
 
 IV. 1-5. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 37 
 
 αυτών 
 
 ποης τον 
 
 Λαυν 
 
 επέστησαν ίΐυτοις 
 
 στρατη-γος του ΐΕξ)ου και οι 2,αόοουκαιοι, 
 
 ΐίξ)Εΐς και 
 οιαπονου- 
 
 = Lake ii. 9. 
 XX. 1. xx.ir. 
 
 4 Hi. 
 
 ch 
 
 .24. 
 
 uevoi cia το όιοασκίΐν αυτούς τον λαον και KuTuyytAAtii' iich. χνι. , 
 
 , / / oil ν. Ec 
 
 ίΐ' τω Ιησου την αναστασιν την f/c νεκξ>ων και ίττ- i_eh.xiii 
 
 tpaAov αυτοις τας γίΐρας και ζϋίντο εις τηοησιν ίΐς 
 ABDE την αυριον, ην yap "εσπέρα ηΒη. ττολλοί δε των ακου- 
 
 σαντων τον λογον ίττιστευσαν, και ί-γίνηθη αριθμός των 
 
 ην C, 
 
 ανόρων [ώςεί] χιλιάδες πενΓε 
 
 5 Ρ 
 
 δε 
 
 ετΓΐ την 
 
 Luke χχϋ.52. 
 ,. ι8 
 Ecol. 
 
 δ 
 
 al t 
 k = 1 Cor. vii. 
 
 14 XV. 22. 
 1 = Matt. xxvi. 
 
 fill. Luke XX. 
 
 lit. Gen. xxii. 
 
 12. 
 m =- ch. V. 18 
 
 only, see 1 
 
 Cur. Tii. 19 1• 
 
 εγεί'ετο 
 
 1 Mhcc. t. 18. η Matt. vi. 34. Jos. iii. 5. ο Luke χχίτ. 29. ch. xxviii• 
 
 ρ constr., Matt, χτίίί. 13 al. q Mark xv. 1 reff. 
 
 Chap. IV. 1. for αυτών, των αποστολών {beginning of an ecclesiastical portion) 163 
 al lectt (nrly). — ττρος τ. λ. om 13. — aft λαοί', add τα ρήματα ταύτα DE Syr syr-raarg 
 ar-erp ThP Lucif. — αντοις om D ν Lucif. — oi αρχίίρίΐς BC al seth. — κ. υ στρ. τ. ιιρου 
 cm D: aft σαδ. Syr: στρατηγοί Syr sah. — 2. και διαπ. C (appy) : καταττ. D^ : καιαπ. 
 D'. — τον λ. αντοΐ'ς 103: for λαον, λογον 13. — αναγγ(ΐλ\(ΐν τον ιησου ν ev τη αναστασιι 
 Ό. — for την εκ, των D h all e sah aeth ar-pol Chr Till' Lucif: txt ABCE &c. — 3. ciri- 
 βαλοντίς and και i9.D-gr: ετηβαλλον llO al. — aft eflfvro add «ι/Γους {to complete se?ise) 
 ACE all vss (nrly) Chr ThF ; txt B(e sil)D &c Thl' Lucif.— ίπαυριοί' D al.— 4. ακονον- 
 των 117• — τον λογον om Α. — και αριθμ. τε εγ^ν. ανδρ. D. — rec bef αριθμός ins ο {from 
 supposed necessity of art), with AE &c : om BD {om των also : a similar gramml corrn). 
 — for ωςιι, ως {corrn?) BD lect 12 : om A ν copt sah seth : txt Ε &c. {It seems doubtful 
 
 α.•αΙστ(.ιΚ(ν, indefinite, of the sending in 1.] eireoT., see reff. ot Ιερείς, 
 
 the flesh; 'sent,' not ' hath sent ;' it does the officiating priests, as soon as they were 
 
 not apply to the presetit time, but to God's 
 procedure in raising up His Servant Jesus, 
 and His mission and ministry : and is dis- 
 tinct from the άπoστsίλ7J of ver. 20. This 
 is also shewn by the pre.s. part, εύλογοϋΐ'τα, 
 inaccurately rendered in E. V. 'to bless 
 you.' He came ' blessing you, in (as 
 the conditional element of the blessing) 
 turning every one from your iniquities ;' 
 thus conferring on you the best of blessings. 
 ίΰλογ., in allusion to ίνευλογ., ver. 25. iv 
 τφ in this sense, see Luke viii. 5. The ap- 
 plication to the present time is made by 
 inference : — ' as that was His object then, 
 so now :' — but (see below) the discourse is 
 unfinished. — The intransitive sense of άττο- 
 στρέφειν, — 'which blessing is to be gained 
 by {in) every one of you turning from your 
 iniquities,' — given in the Vulg. ' ut con- 
 vertat se unusquisque,' and maintained by 
 Theophyl., Oec, Beza, Kuiiioel, Meyer, 
 &c., on the strength of ver. 19, is inadmis- 
 sible, — as αποστρέφω is not found thus used 
 in the N. T., and we have the precedent of 
 Luke xxiii. 14. Rom. xi. 20 for the transi- 
 tive sense. The argument from ver. 19 
 tells just as well for it : ' Repent and be 
 
 converted, for thi.s was the object of 
 
 Jesus being raised up, to confer on you this 
 very blessing, the turning away each of you 
 from your iniquities.' — This discourse does 
 not come; to a final conclusion as in ch. ii. 
 3i», because it was interrupted by the ap- 
 prehension of the App. 
 
 CiiAP. IV. 1 — 4.] Apprehension and 
 
 IMPIIISONMENT OF THIS TWO ApOSTLES. 
 
 released from their duties. — The στρατηγός 
 τ. Ιεροΰ was the captain of theLevitical guard 
 of the temple, mentioned by Jos. B.J. vi. 5,3, 
 δραμόντες δε ol γοΓι tfpoi' φύλακες, i}y- 
 γειλαν τφ στρατηγψ. We hear in Jos. 
 Antt. XX. 6, 2, of ό στρατηγός Άνανος : 
 and in Β. J. ii. 12, 6, he is said to be son 
 of the h. priest Ananias. In 2 Mace. iii. 4, 
 we hear of the προστάτης τοϋ ιεροΰ, who 
 appears to have been the same officer. See 
 Winer, RWB., art. Tempel, end. 
 Σαδδουκ.] See note on Matt. iii. 7• Perhaps 
 they on this occasion had moved the guard 
 and the priests to notice the matter ; for δια- 
 ■irov. seems only to refer to them. 2.] Iv 
 
 Τ. Ίησ., — not, as E. V., 'through Jesus,' but 
 ' in the person (or case) of Jesus,' alleging 
 Him as an example of that which the Sadd. 
 denied. ' The resurrection through Jesus ' 
 does not appear on the present occasion to 
 have formed part of their preaching. 3.] 
 
 ΐσΐΓ6ρα, the second evening, beginning with 
 the twelfth hour : see Matt. xiv. 1 5, and 
 note. 4.] ίγενήθη— This form is un- 
 
 known in good Greek : but common in 
 Hellenistic, — see Col. iv. 1 1. 1 Thess. ii. 14. 
 Winer, § 15. It ap|)ears to have been 
 originally a Doric form : [and is commonly 
 used where a passive sense is admissible, 
 and an agent understood : cf. e. g. Matt. vi. 
 10; viii. 13; xxi. 42;— 1 Thess. i. 5, G ; 
 ii. 5, and notes there. ll(>re, as there, 
 the agent would be God : .see ch. ii. 
 47. April, 1}(.)(;.] των ανδρών] 
 
 It does not appear whether we are to 
 take this strictly as masculine, or moro
 
 S8 
 
 ΠΡΑ5:ΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛίΙΝ. 
 
 IV. 
 
 τυναγΟΐ]\ 
 
 ^34Neh^vi2 ''^P'O*' ' ovvayjhjvai αυτών τους ' αργοντας και τους 
 ^~»^"iohtVm. ττξχσβυτίρους και τους -γρπμματας ίν Ι^ρονσαΧτίμ, και 
 
 ABDE 
 
 ' Ανναν τον ap^itpEo καΐ Καιαφαν και Ιωάννη!» καϊ 
 Αλίίαν^ρον καϊ όσοι ήσαν e/c γένους " αρ^κρατικοΰ, 
 και ' στΐ]σαντες αυτούς ^ ίν μ£σ(»» "' ίττυνθανοντο Εν 
 ποία ^ ^υνάμπ η εν ^ποιω ονόματι εποιησατε τοΰτο υμεις ; 
 w'co'nsir.ch.x. ^ τότε Ώίτρος ^ πλησθείς πνεύματος άγιου ειπεν προς 
 ^32,'34ΊιΓ'' αυτούς '"Άοχοντες του λαοΰ και πρεσβύτεροι του Ισ- 
 
 2Kiiig8XT 2. ^Λ 9 ' ' " ' C » ' η d ' ^ e ' ' 
 
 - - — ευεργεσία 
 
 xiii. Sti. Jer. 
 
 χΙτίϋ. 1 
 η here only. 
 
 Jus. Antt. XV. 7 
 
 3,1 ' 
 
 τ Matt, xviii.i 
 
 John viii.3. 
 
 Num. xXTii. 
 
 2Kiiig8XT 2. ^Λ .0 ' ' " ' c » ' i] d ' \ 
 
 y-ch. iii. 12 ραηΑ, ει ημείς σήμερον ανακρινομει/α επί 
 
 αΐ'θρω 
 
 ωπου 
 
 »\ 
 
 ζ — Matt. Til. 
 
 22 al. fr. 
 a — Luke i. 15. Prov. xv. 4. 
 d — Luke ix. 43. ver. 21 al. 
 
 Ti. 7. Mark xi. 22. Juhn xvii 
 i cli. i. 19 reft. Ezra iv. 12. 
 
 ασθε 
 
 10 ' 
 
 /νω- 
 
 Ιενους, ° ev τινι ούτος σεσωσται, 
 
 b ver. ϋ. c Luke xxiii. 14. ch. xii. 19 al. 1 Kings xx. 12. 
 
 e — here only. occ. I Tim. vi. 2only. P.s. Ixxvii. 11. f constr., Luke 
 
 2. g =- Matt. xii. 27, 28. Hos. i. 7. h — Matt. ix. 22 al. Ir. 
 
 whether the word was originally in the text at all). — 5. τη ίπαυοιονΟΟ : avpiov ημεραν 
 D'. — αννηχθησαν οι α()χ. κ. οι πρίσβ. κ. γρ. and αννας &c D. — αυτών οηι D 3. 95' Syr 
 copt ieth arr: ins AB(e sil)E &c ν sah &c. — rec bef wpcr. and γρ. om τους (svjijjosed 
 unnecessary), with Ε &c : ins AB (D see above) all.^ rec eififnocfraX., with 1 Siic{corrn to 
 SMi7 σΐ'νηχΜΓ/ΐ'αι, c/"3io<< vi. 26, xiii. 30 ; aiid esp \x\\.2i)•. txt ABDE all .<ah {injerusalem 
 many vss) Chrj: t.iep. omSyr. — 6. κ. αννας ο αρχίίρίυς κ. καιαφης κ.ιωαννης {ιωναθας 
 Ό) κ. αλίξανίρης ABD al {combination of the ready found as above, ver 5, in D, and the 
 ordinary one) : txt Ε &c. — κρατικού Ιβ. 18. 26. 46 al lect 1 : sacerdotali ν e copt ar-pol. 
 — 7. rec iv τω μίσω {corrn : art inserted because no yenitive follows, see Matt xiv. 6 ; 
 so Meyer), with AB (e sil) and appy a few mss : txt DE most mss Chr Thl. — 8. πίτρος om 
 1 17•— TOD ισρ. om (as unnecessary aft του λαον .') AB ν c copt sah Cyr Fulg : ins DE 
 mss appy Bed-gr Syr arpol &c Thl Iren Cypr Ambr. — του om 96 : του λαον ισρ. 33. 34. 
 — add at end ακονσατί Ε 15. IS. 37 ν Syr ar-erp seth Cypr. — 9. aft ανακρινομ. ins 
 αφ υμών DE Syr ar-erp Iren Cypr. — tn' D al. — tv .... σεσωσται om lect 12 : οντος om 
 
 loosely as if it were «νθρώττων: Meyer 
 thinks the former : Olshausen, that as yet 
 only men attached themselves to the church 
 (but see ch. i. 14) : De Wette objects to 
 the stricter view, that Luke does not so 
 reckon, ch. ii. 41 ; but leaves it undecided. 
 The laxer use of άνίρών occurs Luke xi. 
 31, and James i. 20. In ch. v. 14, men and 
 women both are mentioned as being added 
 to the Lord. — Nor is it quite certain whe- 
 ther this number was that of new converts 
 on this occasion, or of the whole Church : 
 but most probably the latter. 
 
 5—12.] The Apostles examined be- 
 fore THE Sanhedrim. Peter's speech. 
 5.] αντων, of the Jews: a construc- 
 tion frequently used where there can be 
 little chance of mistaking to whom or what 
 the pronoun refers, see John viii. 44, note. 
 Rom. ii. 26. Winer, § 22, 3. In this place, 
 however, it has been mistaken : for Meyer 
 refers αυτών to the believers just men- 
 tioned, inasmuch as they were Jews : ab- 
 surdly enough. αρχ. κ. ττρεσβ. κ. γρ.] 
 The Sanhedrim : see Matt ii. 4 ; xxvi. 59; 
 ch. v. 21. 6v Ίβρουσαλήμι]- — Why is 
 this specified .-' The difficulty of accounting 
 for it has led in the later MSS. to tv being 
 altered to els, so as to imply that certain of 
 them who dwelt out of town (Lightf., &c.) 
 were summoned to Jerusalem. I believe it 
 
 merely implies that the meeting was not 
 held in the temple, as in ch. vi. 13 — 15, 
 but in the city. 6.] On Annas and 
 
 Caiaphas, both called high priests, Luke 
 iii. 2, — see note there. Of John and 
 Alexander nothing is known. Lightfoot 
 supposes John to be identical with the Joch- 
 anan ben Zacchai of the Talmud, who how- 
 ever (De W.) was not of the hiyh-pnestly, 
 but only of the priestly race : — and Pearson, 
 Wolf, Krebs, and Mangey suppose Alexan- 
 der to have been the brother of Philo 
 Judaeus, mentioned by Jos. Antt. xviii. 8, 1. 
 But this is very improbable : for he was 
 Alabarch of the Jews at Alexandria, Jos. 
 ibid. 7.] ev iroitj, δυνάμ€ΐ — not = 
 
 tv TT. ίζουσίφ, ' in what authority,' — but 
 ' in what power;' what was the enabling 
 cause, the element in which, as its condition, 
 the deed was wrought ? — tv ποίψ ονόματι 
 — not 'm what name,' — i.e. 'ay ivhose 
 authority,' but ' by (' in,' see above) 
 what name,' spoken as a word of power : 
 see ch. iii. 6, 16. Jos. Antt. viii. 2, 5. 
 τοΰτο, not the teaching (Olshaus., &c.), 
 but the miracle: and that only ; — not both 
 that and the teaching (Heinr.). 8] 
 
 Ίτλησθ. irv. άγ., i. e. specially, for the 
 occasion. 9.] el, ' if,' with an impli- 
 
 cation of the fact being so : see ch. xi. 1 7• 
 ev τίνι, not ' by (in) whom,' — this is
 
 6-15. nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. S9 
 
 στον έστω ττασιν νμιν και παντι τω Λαω Ισραήλ οτι ευ k Luke χ. 17 ai. 
 
 - •> / •τ - - -*" τντ y ' Λ f - 1 '■«■■■■ a(i. 
 
 τω οΐ'οματι Ιησου χριστού του ίΝαζωραιου, ον υμεις ^.'"'JKiag'^ 
 
 εσταυρωσατε, οι^ ο Οεος• ηνειρεν εκ ιηκρων, *'' εν τούτω m^Lukef.'ig, 
 
 r ι , ηι • ' f - r / ^ 11 r / . "■ Gtu. xxiv.51. 
 
 ούτος Ίταρεστηκεν ενωττιον νμων υy^ης. ^ ούτος εστίν ^^'^^^ '^™•^• 
 Ο Λιαος ο εςουΐ7εν>}(7ε/ς υώ υμών των οικοοομων, ο Hcroi. ιί.ΐ2ΐ. 
 
 ο f ' 1> . Λ ^ η ' \0 \ •, ,f „ . Xen.Symp. 
 
 ■γενόμενος εις ' κεφαλήν '-γωνίας. και ουκ εστίν εΐ'ο'οήΓΰ Lake 
 
 "Λ Λ ■• ^ > ' Γ ' . " y ττ " ' • S '' xiii. ΐϋ. Psa. 
 
 α Αλω ουόενι η σωτήρια ούτε yap όνομα εστίν έτερον cxfii.22 
 υτΓΟ τοι^ ουρανον το όεοομενον εν ανυρωποις, εν ω ""[?• ^^^.^ 
 οει σωϋηναι ημάς. '^'^ ϋεωρηυντες οε την του 11ετ|θου i.xx.goniy. 
 
 χ » ' / > 'τ ' ^ ν Λ /D ' " " Λ rabsol.,Lukei. 
 
 παρρησιαν και Ιωάννου, και ^ καταλαρομενοι οτι ανυρω- 7?. oh xm. 
 
 ζ' ' '' 'a'^•" 'il'y b' ' rr — Phil. ii.9 
 
 TTOt αγράμματοι εισιν /cat ιόιωται, ευαυμαί,ον, επε-γινω- ai. 
 
 / > ν ff \ - »ι - ^ ΙΑ ' "Λ s = ch.ii. 40al. 
 
 σκον τε αυτούς οτι συν τω ιησου τ/σον" τοί' τε ανορω- 'ch π. sreff. 
 
 <• > Job ii. 2. 
 
 ΤΓΟί^ ρλε'τΓΟί^τες συν αυτοις εστωτα τον τεθεραπευμενον , ° i^Sj^/Vm.^i"* 
 
 > 5>ι '^ c ' - 15 Λ ' Λ\ > \ ,^ν- - v-ch.xiv.22. 
 
 ουοεν ει^ον αντειπειν. κελευσαντες οε αυτούς εί,ω του Dan.ii.28. 
 
 W = eh. xvi. 30, 31 al. fr. χ = 1 Tim. Ui. 13. ch. ii. 29. xxviii. 31. τ = ch. x. 34. xxv. 
 
 25. see John i. 6. ζ here only t. a 1 Cor. xiv. 16, 24. 2 Cor. xi. 6 only. Prov. vi. 8. 
 
 b = ch. iii. lU reff. c Luke xxi. 15 only. E.sth. viii. 8. 
 
 sah. — 10. ττασιν om lect 12 syrr arr Cyr ThF. — bef ιησ. χρ. ins 7-01» κυρίου (add ημών ν) 
 Ε ν (not demid amlat-ff). — for ovr. παρίστηκίν, ουν τταριστηκα 117• — bef νγιης in3 
 σημίρον Ε : aft vy. Bed-gr. — aft νγιης (or σημ.) ins και iv αλλω ονδει^ι Ε Bed-gr syr- 
 marg Cypr.— 11. rec οικοδομονντων (corrn to suit LXX and Matt xxi. 42) witli Ε ν 
 Iren Cypr : t.\t ABD all Orig Did. — 12. η σωτ. om D : και .... σωτήρια om Iren Cyp 
 Rebapt Aug Ambr Ambrst Leo. — for ουτί, ονδί {philological correction, Meyer) AB all 
 copt sah Did Thdrt: ov D Cypr Aug Ambr Leo : t,\t Ε &c. — ov. tr.tar. AE al vss Cyr: 
 f σΓ. εΓ. ov. D seth Avit : tr. ot>. ιστ. Thdrt vss : txt Β (e sil) &c am &c Thl. — ο StSo- 
 μενην D', quod datum est {sit Iran) d Iran. — υττ. r. ovp. om h all mss ar-pol slav (ms) 
 Thl: insABDE&c most vss Thdrt Iren al : το υπ. τ.ουρ. StS. 42.— tv om D II7. 163 ν al 
 lat-fF. — νμας Β. — 13. aft θί. ins 01 ιουδαίοι 96. Ι77• — ιωανου D. — και ιδιωτ. om D.— 
 επίγ. δε D copt. — 14. rec δε {corrn : τε is very freq in Acts), with I &c copt &c : txt 
 ABD-(om D')E all ν sah Syr seth arr Lucif. — τον bef rtO. om h 38. — ειχον ποιησαι η 
 αντειπειν D-gr, — 15. δε om D-gr. — αυτοις 95. 96. — for απεΧθειν, απαχθηναι D-gr. — 
 
 not yet brought forward: but 'wherein,' neither is there another name under 
 
 in what, as the conditional element. No heaven (which is) given (by God) among 
 
 person had been mentioned in the cjues- men (not ' to men,' Vulg., Baza, Kuinoel), 
 
 tion, ver. 7> — nor does Peter afterwards whereby we must bs saved :' i. e., as 
 
 say iv Ίησοϋ χρ., but tv τψ όνόμ. Ε. V. Dr. Burton's rendering, ' For nei- 
 
 Ί. xp. On the other hand, ev τούτω, ther is the name which is given among 
 
 var. 10, may very well be masculine, men, whereby we are to be saved, any 
 
 as referring to Ίησοϋς χρ. Himself, in- other than this,' is ungrammatical. 
 eluded in the previous words τψ όν. Ί. χρ. : 13 — 18.] Consultation and sentence 
 
 — it may also be neuter, ' in this Name :' of the Sanhedrim. 13.] καταλαβ^- 
 
 but the masc. is preferable, on account of μ€νοι., ' having had previous knowledge ;' 
 
 ούτος immediately following. 10.] ov . . . not as E. V. which would be the partic. pres. ; 
 
 8v : the copula is omitted to make the see the past, ch. xxv. 25. Ιδιώται, — 
 
 contrast more striking. ττορίστηκίν, the word of contrast to those professionally 
 
 ' stands,' as in E. V. He was there present, acquainted with any matter: here there- 
 
 11.] fSee Matt. xxi. 42, note. — In fore, ' laics,' men of no knowledge on such 
 
 Jos. Antt. iii. 1, 5, Moses, praying to God a subject as this. ί•τΓ£γίνωσκον, — 
 
 for Israel, says, tv αΐιτφ yap ε1ι•αι τι)ν ' they recognized them ;' (so Od. ώ. 215, 
 
 σιοτηοίαν αύτοϋ^ κηϊ ηύκ tv άΚλ(ι>. σωτηρία αϋταρ tyt'ov πατρός πειρησομαι ιιμετιροιο, 
 
 is used here in the higher sense of ' salva- αϊ κ ίμ' ίπιγνηίιι κ. φράσσεται όφΟαλ- 
 
 tion,' not with reference to the healing of μοΐίτΐ!/ : Plat. Eutliyd. 301 0, aoa μοί 
 
 the lam(i man. See reff. The article im- πυτε αϊιτη [>'/ σοφία] παραγενίισεται ίόςτε 
 
 plies, ' the salvation for which we ail look ;' μοι οικεία γενέσθαι ; Έττιγνοίης αν αυτήν, 
 
 'our salvation:' ίστίν ή σωτ. is para- ώ 'Σώκρατες, ίφη, οΐκείαν y ε νομένην;) t^cir 
 
 phrased in the next clause by δεΙ σωϋηναι astonishment setting them to think, and re- 
 
 ήμας. 12. οΐτ€ γαρ . . . .] lit. ' for minding them that they had suoii these men
 
 40 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. IV. 
 
 dch. τ. 27, (τυνεδρ/ου άπελθείΐ', ^ σννίβαΧΧον ττρος αλλήλους λε- abde 
 * s"'^ch"xvii. yovTtq ^^ Ύί ^ ποιί)σωμίν τυις ανβξ)ωποις τοντυις ', ότι 
 
 18. \ \ fr V - r h?.''-- 
 
 f constr, MHit. μ{ΐ; yao yvwoTUv σημίΐον "γεγυνεΐ' οι αυτών, ττασιν τυις 
 gi'hrleoniy. ' KUToiKovaiv 'lif)i)vaaXriii (pnvspov, και ου όυνάμίθα αρ- 
 
 fi = ver. 30. / ίl.l7'Λ^•'' ^k'' Λ" Ι^• Λ"'"' 
 
 ch. ϋ. 4:5ai. νιισασϋαι ' αλλ ινα μη επί πλίΐον οιανΒμ7]υτι tic 
 kl'Tim^ii. ΐβ. τον Χαυν, "απειλή " απειλησωμίθα αυτοις μηκίτι λαλίΐν 
 
 χχίν.4. jer. ' ετΓί τω ονοματι τούτω μηόίνι ανθρώπων. και καΛε- 
 
 "oeDLxlix. σαρτες αυτούς "^παρήγγειλαν το ^καθόλου μη ' </)θεγ- 
 m-john xxi. ysaOui μη^ί ^i^aoKtiv "επι τω ονόματι τοΰ Ιίΐτου. ο οε 
 
 23. oh. XX. > Ί ' ' ' Λ ' "^ ^ ' ^ 
 
 nver.29. ch. ϋ^ρος κοί Ιωάννης αττοκρινεντες enrov ττρος αυτούς 
 
 ix. Ι. Eph. ντ?'^' ' • W'' "Ω"'~ χ' ' 
 
 vi.il only. L•ι oticatov toTiv ενωτΓίον του σεου νμων ακουειν 
 
 Job xxjii. β. „.... ,\ „^«„ ; 20'^' /ι \Γ-Λ 
 
 "οηΓ'' "ό?η /"«Λλον ϊϊ του (/εου, ^ κρίνατε' ου ουνα/υεσα yap ημίΐς α 
 
 χχνϋ. 42. >"? \ 1 f "" Λ \ " 21 ' ί^ ζ Λ 
 
 con.str., ch. τ. ίΐοαμεν και ηκουσαμίν μη AaAtiv. οι οε ττροςαπειΛη- 
 
 28 reft. , a ' 'Λ ' ^ Ον b ' ' c ^ - 
 
 pMatt.xxiT. σαμίνοι αττίλυσαν αυτούς, μηοίν ίνρισκοντίς το πως 
 
 61 
 
 Luke ix. 49. d Λ ' '^Λ^^^^ " / "^''d Υ 
 
 ch. V. 28, 40. κολασωΐ'τοι ουτους, οια τυν Λαον, οτι παντίς ίοοο,αί,ον 
 
 q - ch. τ. 28 ν „ ν e ' ' " ' 99 f • - * Τ \ ' 
 
 Bherfoni '''^^ Viov ίπι τψ yijovoTi. €T(uv jup ην πΑίΐονων 
 
 iTze'k'.'xiii. τεσσεράκοντα ο αΐ'θρο^πος ^ εψ ον γεγοί'ει το σημειον 
 
 3,22. t 2 Pet. ί. 16, 18 only. Job xiii. 7 al. η = Lnke χχίτ. 47 al. τ ~ Matt, xxvii. 
 
 49. Luke xiv. 28, 31. Gen. xlii. 16. w — Lake xvi. 16. ProT. xiv. 12 Heb. X = Matt. xvii. 5 al. 
 
 y — Luke vii. 43. 1 Cor. xi. 13. Ps. Ivii. 1. ζ here only t. a = Matt. xiv. 1^ al. b = Lake v. 
 
 IS), (andconstr.), xix. 48. c Luke i. 62. ix. 46. d2 Pet. ii. 9 only f. VVisd. xi. 16. e ver. U. 
 
 Lnke ix. 43. f constr., Mark v. 42. Lakeii. 42al. g cnnstr., here only. 
 
 rec συνιβαλον (corrn to more usual tense), with B(e sil)D &c sah seth ar-pol ThP : txt 
 AE all V Syr copt &c Thl' Lucif. — 16. rec rt παιησυμεν (corrn to the more usual expr : 
 see also ch ii. 37), with B(e sil)D &c most vss Lucif Ambr : txt AE-gr all d Thl. — 
 γεγονεναι D' gr, iytvtro 127 al. — (pavipwrtpov tariv D-gr. — apvuoGai (corrn to suit 
 ihepres) ABD 5. 2?. 29 al Bas-sel : txt Ε &c Thl.— 17. αλλ (om D-gr) iva dt A^ : add 
 TO ρήμα sah. — tm πλέον η D. — aft Xaov, add τα ρήματα ταύτα Ε syr-tnarg Lucif. — 
 ατΓίίλη om (prob mistake in copying ,• perhaps otnd as unnecessary, the idiom not being 
 understood) ABD 25. 40. 105. 127• 163 ν al Bas-sel Oec Lucif: ins Ε most mss ar-pol 
 syr Thl &c. — αττειλησομιθα all seth Chr (mss) Thl, απιλησομεθα D^, ίτηλησομίθα D\ and 
 add συν D : txt AB(e sil)E &c vss nrly Thl' Lucif. — αυτούς lect 1. — for μηκετι, μη A 142. 
 — απο του νυν sah. — ανθρώπων allThl^ — 18. for και καλ. αυτ., D syr-marg Lucif have 
 συγκαταηθιμίνων St αυτών τη γνώμη ιρωνησαντες αυτούς (προςκαλίσαμινοι 137. 163); 
 and D adds παρηγγε(λαντο κατά το μη φθ. — rec aft παρηγγ. ins αυτοις (α common β lli7ig~ 
 up), with 1 all vss Thl Lucif: om ABD-gr Ε all ν arm syr Chr. — ro om Β (D see above). — for 
 καθυλον, παραπαν 4. — του om 137• 142. 180 al. — 19. αποκραθεις St ττ. κ. ι.Ό: ο ιω. Α. — 
 rec πρ. αυτ. ιιπον, with 1 &c: txt AB(ίιπαl')DE 5. 13. 69. 104. 105 ν copt arm &cChr. — 
 TovTo νμ. SiKaiov (paivtrai E. — 20. rec ίΐίομιν, with Ε &c (tSov μεν 73): txt ABD al. 
 — 21. μη (or μηSt) tυpισκ. D 36. 100. 105. 127 ν sah Lucif: μηεε ενρηκοτις 117 : add 
 aiTiav D .Syr arr. — το ova Ε 18. — κολασονται all Chr Thl : κολασονσιν 34 : txt AB(e sil) 
 DE &c. — φοβουμινοι τον λαον' παντ. yap Ε. — 22. πλ{ΐα> των 42. — rec τεσσαρ. with Ε 
 &C : txt Α (Β .') (D has μ) &c. — rec tytyovti, with AE (corrn to more usual form) : txt 
 
 with Jesus : — not for a pluperfect, here or companionship with Jesus, and the pre- 
 
 any where else : nor is ήσαν ; — ' that they sence of the healed man standing with 
 
 (once) were with Jesus.' 14.] This, ac- them. 17. δι,αν€μηθή] 'be scattered' 
 
 cording to DeW., is the only place in Luke or ' spread ;' lit., be distributed : so Plato, 
 
 where ri couples two sentences. He there- Minos, 317 d, τις επιστήμων Suιvίϊμaι 
 
 fore objects to the reading; and also as επ'ι yy τα σπέρματα; and afterwards, η'ς 
 
 destroying the contrast; but clearly the Si την τροφήν επί τά των άνθ^ιώπων 
 
 former is no sound critical reason, nor is it σώματα Siavt^ai άριστος; άττειλη 
 
 correct : seech, iii. 10 al. fr. : — and I cannot άττίΐλ.] for idiom, see reff. The constr. of 
 
 see that any contrast is intended: the two άπιιλέω with an infin., stated by Dr. 
 
 circumstances which the Sanhedrim found Bloomf. to be ' so rare that even the best 
 
 it diflScult to gainsay were, the boldness of lexx. scarcely adduce an example,' is its 
 
 these illiterate men, conferred by their ordinary constr. ; see Palm and Rost sub
 
 16—27. nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 41 
 
 τοΰτο της ^ Ίάσεως. ^^ ° αποΧνθίντες δε ηΧΘον π^ος τούς^Ι^^^^Ί?^^^^ 
 
 ;>!>» \ ■> / -ν Μ ν 5\'5 - \ only. ProY. 
 
 ώιους και amiyytiAav οσα προς αυτούς οι αρ^^ΐίρίίς και m. s. 
 οΐ πρεσβύτεροι ειττον. ^ οι δε ακονσαντίς ^ ομοθυμαδόν ^^ιΓτίιίΛ 
 
 If ν ^ "■ Λ ^ \ Τ ηι Λ ' ν 12. 
 
 tjpav φωνιιν ττρος τον ueov και ειτταν ΖΛεστΓοτα, συ kch.i. i4reff. 
 
 r'vf /\ 1 \ \ν - 'ν/ί'Λ '~ Lake xrii. 
 
 ο θεος ο ποΐϊ}σας τοί' ουρανον και τιμ' -γην και την υαλασ- ^^•. ^"''e- 
 σαν και τταντα τα εν αυτοις, ο του πατρός ημω^ 
 
 r Mark xiii. 11. 
 
 πνεύματος αγίου ° στόματος Δαυίδ ° ττοιδος σου ειπών °ίι]„^ρ[*β9 
 
 η f'T ' q ' J ' (ί 'Ά ^ λ ' Γ ' λ ' _ S .., ' . Isa χΐίν. 26.' 
 
 *^ Ινα τι ^ εφρυαο,αν ίυνη και λαοί εμελεττίσαΐ' κενά , pMatt.ix.4aL 
 
 9fi t / ' ιΟ \ ~ " " \ < >/ U '^''- ^''- ^• 
 
 "^ παρέστησαν οι ρασίΛίΐς της -γης και οι αργοντες συν- ^Ι^^^^^^• 
 τ}ν(7ί}σαν επι το αυτό κατά του κυρίου και κατά του 
 
 -W'- 97u 'Ο ^ χ'''ΛΩ' "^ *''" 
 
 νοιστου αυτού. ' συνηγυησαν γαρ επ αληυίΐας ρ™ 
 
 10, 14, S8. IThess. ii. 1. 0ό/3ο!• )t£i/0!-, Xcn. Auab. ii. 2, 21. t ver. 10 reff. u = Malt, 
 
 xxii. 34. Neh. vi. 2. ν = Matt. xvii. 1 al. w Rev. x. 10 al. X Lnke iv. 25 al. 
 
 BD. — 23. απολ. δε οι απόστολοι {beginning of an ecclesiastical portion) 78^.96. 177• — 
 for ιΐιονς, αδίλφονς Syr ar-erp : ιουδαίους (error) 73. — avijyy. 38. 93. — προς αντονς 
 οσα 13. — rec £ΐποΐ', with Ε &c : txt ABD. — 24. aft ακονσαντίς, add και επι•γι•οντ(ς την 
 τον θίον svtoytiav D. — την φων. αντων Ε vss. — rec ίίποί', with Ε &c : t.\t ABD al. — 
 ο θίος om AB am demid copt Ath Ambr, and (tu es) ν Hil Aug al : for συ, ο θεος (omg 
 συ) 13 Chrj : ο θ. ημών, or κύριε ο θεος, or κύριε ο θ. ημών al : συ ει ο θεος 32. 42. 69 
 lect 1 ThF Iren : txt DE &c Lucif. {The variations may he explained by the difficulty 
 found in the position of ο θεος, some treating it as voc, others as nom, and glossing 
 accordy. They form a strong testimony to its gouiineness in its present position.) — 
 25. rec for -ου .... παιδος σου, — δια στόματος Λαβιδ του παιδος σου {see below), with 
 (no MS) most mss ar-pol Thl Hil &c : D has ος Cia πνεύματος ayiov δια του στομ. 
 λαλησας δαυιδ τταιδος σου : txt ABE 13. 15. 27. 29. 36 al. The minor varr are very nu- 
 merous: TTvi. αγιω or ει> πνι. aytω ν seth: qui patris nostri per spiritum sanctum os david 
 pueri ltd dicens e, qui per spiritum sanctum ore david patris nostri pueri tni dixisti 
 Iren, qui per spiritum sanctum et os patris n. d. pueri tui dixisti Lucif. See many more 
 in Scholz. {It seems to me that every testimony tends to confirm the more difficult and 
 complicated ready of the text. Meyer dismisses it as a congeries of various glosses. 
 But glosses on what ? Had the rec been the original, no reason can be assigned why it 
 should have been glossed on at all, — 7ior, if it had been, why the glosses should have 
 been inserted into the text in so unusual an order of constr. See note.) — 27. επ αληθ. 
 
 voce, and cf. II. i. 161 ; xiii. 143; xv. 179» years old both gave notoriety to his person 
 
 al. freq. : Od. xi. 313. Xen. Mem. iii. 5. as having long resorted there, and made 
 
 4. Hell. V. 4. 7• Eur. Med. 287. The the miracle more notable, his malady being 
 
 use of the middle in the active sense is more confirmed. 
 
 confined to later Greek. 18.] ciri, so 23 — 31.] Prayer of the church 
 
 as to make that Name the subject (basis) thereupon. 23.] tovs Ιδίο-υς, the 
 
 of their discoursing. other Apostles, and possibly some others as- 
 
 19 — 22.] The Apostles' answer and sembled with them. There is nothing in w. 
 
 DISMISSAL. 21.] τΓροςα•7Γ€ΐλ., 'having 31, 32 to mark that only the Apostles were 
 
 threatened them in addition,' — with present on this occasion. 24.] όμοθ. 
 
 threats superadded to the inhibition of ver. ήραν φων., not, as Meyer supposes, literally 
 
 18. μ.ηδεν, ' no means :' not μηδίν ail speaking together in a known formula 
 
 αίτιον, see John xiv. 30. The difficulty of prayer, but led by some one, and all 
 
 with the Sanhedrim was, to find any means assenting ; not τάς φωνάς, but φωΐ'ήν : 
 
 of punishing them which should not stir see note on ch. ii. 6. σν 6 θΐο% ό iroi. : 
 
 up the people; διά τον λαόν belongs to 'Thou art God who hast made :'— not 
 
 this clause, not to απέλυσαν αΰτ. Thou God who hast made : —in this 
 
 22.] ιτλ. ησσ. for πλ. η τεσσ. so some- latter case, the first sentence would go on 
 
 times in classical Greek ; so οϋκ έλασσον to the end of ver. 2(i, and there abruptly 
 
 πέντε και είκυσι, Thucyd. vi. 95. See end, without any jjrayer being e.xpresscd : 
 
 "Winer, § 38, 5. το σημ. της Ίάσ. — whereas now it is an acknowledgment that 
 
 the genitive of apposition ; .so τον άρμα- it was the same God, who was now doing 
 
 βώνα του πνεύματος, 2 Cor. v. 5. ση- these things, that had before time pro- 
 
 με'ιον περιτομής, Rom. iv. 11, &c. The phesied them of Christ. 25.] Tho 
 
 circumstance of his being more than forty text of this verse (sec var. read.) is in a
 
 42 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 IV. 
 
 ίΐ' ry ττόλα ταυτγ) ^ ξπι τυν ayiov ^ τταιδά σον Ιησοΰν, υν A.BDE 
 " ϊ-^ρισας, ΥΙξίωοης τε και Ποιτιος Πιλάτος συν ίθνίσιν και 
 ί?\"ΐι'χ. 3«.'' λαοις ^Ισραήλ, ποιησαι οσα η '^ χ^ψ <ίου και η ' βουλή 
 
 pUir., see ν«. e ' ' (\ 29 ' f ^ ~ ' R •' ^ ' ^ 
 
 2Ά. σου προωρισίν γενεσσαι. /cat τα τυΐ', κυοιε, ίττιοε εττί 
 
 fhliasrelr.' '''"C 'αττειλος αυτών, και 'δος τοις δουλοις σου ^ |ΐιετα ■' Trap- 
 Rom, νίϋ. 2». •» k' ΛΛ" *Λ' 30 1' "^ιη-' 
 
 Eph. i. ftai.t ρησιας πάσης ΛαΛειν τον Aoyov σου εν τω την χ£ίί>« 
 xxvu!'il' ^'^'^^ "^ εκτείνει ν σε εις ° Ίασιν, και σημίΐα και τίξ>ατα γίνε- 
 iluhhJ, σΟαι " οια του ονόματος του α-^ιου ^ παιδός σου Ιησού. 
 
 ζ — ell. iii. 26 i, ,f 
 
 refl•. 
 a Luke iv. 18, 
 
 from Isa Ix 
 
 I. th. X. 3«, 
 b pUir., see ver. 
 
 5 -'S2 
 
 g Luke 1. 25 
 
 1 Exod ^ai '' δετ}θεντων ουτων "^ εσολευθη ο ^ τοττος εν ω ησπι^ 
 
 hver'iVreff. συνη•γμ(νοι, και ^ εττΧιισθησαν απαντίς του ayιoυ ττνευ- 
 
 i ch. ϋ. 4 reff. ^•^'^ *\' -Λ-ν Νν '< t 
 
 i^ch'x"?•» /""'■ot'i και ελαΛουν τον Aoyov του ϋ(ου μίτα παρρησίας. 
 
 ο = ch. ϋί. Ifireff. 
 S = rh. Tii. 4a. 
 
 reff. 1 — ch. iii. 26. Rom. xv. 13. m here only. η ver. 22 reff. 
 
 ρ ver. 27. q absol., here only. r Matt. xi. 7. xxiv. 29 al. Psa. xvii. 7. 
 
 t = Matt. xxii. 35. Nch. vi. 2. α Lute i. 15 al. ν rer. 29. ch. ii. 29 reff. 
 
 oin 180. — rec om iv τη noKu ταύτη (as unnecessary, see note), with qu .' : ins A' (ττολ. 
 σου) BDE all (ετ πολιτ^α 6β) vss (exc ar-pol) Chr Cyr Cosm Iren Tert^ Lucif Hil all. 
 —σοι- ηαώα D 137.— re om 180 sah.— λαός Ε .3. 33 Syr ar-erp Thl' Hil Aug.— 28. μη 
 1Γ0Ι. 98•'.— σου (2nd) om A'B al vss Hil Lucif Ambr.— 29. ίφώί (ttSs) A(B.')DE &c : 
 tTTtiSt 3. 13. 38. 09. — πασ. ττηρρ. D-gr Ε ν copt ar-pol Hil Lucif: πασ. om 26. 36. 57- 
 137 al lect 1 Syr aeth Thl'-comm. — 30. In χίίρα συν eKTiiveiv σε, om σου A (σε ικτ.) 
 Β (ίΚΓ. σί) : cm at DE 27- 40. 57 al vss Chr : t.xt 1 &c (/ retain both pronn here, and 
 σον in ver 27, as agreeing better with the character of the diction of the prayer. They 
 have prob been omd as unnecessary). — inauQ 180 sah. — ytvtaQai D' 133. — 31. rec irv. 
 ayiov, with Ε &c vss (Jo square with ch ii. 4) : txt ABD al am. — aft τταρρ., ins navri τω 
 
 very confused state. I have kept to that Jehovah, is the antitype and completion of 
 
 of the oldest MSS., adopted also by Lach- 
 mann. Though harsh in construction, 
 their words are not senseless, as De Wette 
 styles them, — στόματος Ααυ'ιδ .... being in 
 apposition with ττνίνματος άγιου. The rec. 
 has been an emendation and simplification 
 of the text, which bears, in this its original 
 form, the solemn and stately character, in 
 the accumulation of parallel clauses, of the 
 rest of the prayer ; cf. ver. 27. ϊνα 
 
 τί κ. Γ. λ.] cited verbatim from the LXX. — 
 The Messianic import of this Psalm has 
 been acknowledged even by those who 
 usually deny all such reference, e. g. De 
 Wette. Meyer endeavours to refer it to 
 some circumstances then present, but is 
 not bold enough to enter into any vindica- 
 tion of his view. ψρυάσσ-ω is only 
 found in the middle in good Greek (see 
 Kypk. Observ. ii. p. 30 f. Meyer), φού- 
 αγμά tan το άλόγιστ-ον κίνημα, Atharias. 
 in Catena. 27.] The γάρ implies an 
 acknowledgment of the truth of God in the 
 fulfilment of the prophecy : Thou art the 
 God who hast, &c. for these events have 
 happened accordingly. Iv ttJ ττόλει 
 ταύτη, which has been excluded from the 
 text on account of its apparent redundance, 
 answers to ίπί Σιώΐ' όυος το ayiov αίιτον, 
 Ps. ii. 6. See also Matt, xxiii. 37. Luke 
 xiii. 33. The parts of this verse corre- 
 spond accurately to those of the prophecy 
 just quoted. ΊΓαϊδα, ' servant,' as 
 before, ch. iii. 26. Jesus, the Servant of 
 
 David, and of all other servants of the 
 Lord : what is said of them only partially 
 and hyperbolically, is said literally and 
 entirely of Him. 28.] There is an 
 
 ellipsis in the thought between ποιήσαι 
 and οσα : ττοιΓ/σαι, [ώς μίν ίίόκει, την 
 ίίίίαν βονΧήν, όντως όέ] οσα ... As De 
 Wette well remarks, σννηχθησαν ττοιη- 
 σαι is used sttbjectively, ' they were col- 
 lected, to do,' and then the speaker changes 
 his ground to an objective one in οσα — (as 
 they believed — but realty) as many things 
 as Thy hand, &c. — ττοιησαι must not be 
 rendered, with Kuinoel, ' ita ut facerent.' 
 It does not express the result, but the in- 
 tention, of their assembling. Still worse is 
 it to take ττοιι^σαι with ίχρισας, 'Whom 
 Thou hast anointed, .... to do,' &c., as 
 some have proposed : the parenthesis, as 
 well as the wliole train of thought, for- 
 bidding it. ή χίίρ. σ. κ. ή βουλή] not 
 a ίν δια δυοίν (Kuinoel) : χίίρ indicates 
 the Power, βουλή the Wisdom of God. 
 The Wisdom decreed, the Hand performed : 
 but the same word ττροώρισίν is used of 
 both by what grammarians call zeugma, — 
 as in γάλα ϋμας ϊπότισα, οΰ βρώμα, 
 ι Cor. iii. 2. See Winer, § «6, 7• 
 30.] Iv τω, see ref. and note there : ' In Thy 
 stretching forth (while Thou stretchest 
 forth) Thine hand for (f ίς, of the purpose) 
 healing, and that signs and wonders 
 may come to pass by means of the Name 
 of Thy Holy Servant Jesus.' 31.]
 
 28—34. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 43 
 
 Του δε πλήθους των ττισπυσαντων y\v r\ ^^ καοδ/α ''^chron. 
 
 \ < \ ι "• νι\ ι *xx'^^'»■ ^- ν' 
 
 και Ύ\ ψν\ΐ] μια, και ουοε tic τι των 
 
 αυτω ελε -ytv ^ Ίόιον ίΐναι, αλλ τ/ν αιιτοις άπαντα 
 
 υπαρχόντων ^ι chrlm'.'xllss. 
 
 'λ / XX 1 Cor. vi, 5 
 
 κοινά. f«e• 
 
 33 
 
 και 
 
 Ί" ^"' ■', '^ ■' "-•--•= ---^ y = Esth.Ti... 
 
 δυνάμει μί•^ά\ι^ '^ αττίδίδουν το μαρτυριον οί αττό- LukeTiui's. 
 
 λ-.> / - />r..g/ Ζ "^ John Χ. 3, 
 
 Οί της αναστάσεως του κυρίου ιτησου, -γαρις τε ^,12 
 
 αλϊ} Jiv επί παντας αυτούς. ουοε 
 
 μεyaΛη ί/ν 
 υ7Γ7]ρνεν εν αυτοις 
 κιων ύττηρ^ον 
 
 γαρ 
 
 όσοι 
 
 γα^ 
 
 κτητορες 
 ττωΛουντες εψίρον τας τιμάς των 
 
 ■ii.44reff. 
 » Γ\ ^ b ^ cli i R 
 
 ενοεης τις Lakew.se. 
 
 ix. 1. 
 c =- here only, 
 d = here only. 
 
 see 1 Cor. ii. 1, 
 
 "γωριων η oi' 
 
 1 
 
 John i.7 and pissim. e = Luke ii. 40 al. see note, and ch. ii. 47. f — Lukex.6. I Pet. 
 
 iv. 14. Rom. iii. 22. r here only. Deut. x». 4, 7. h here only t. i ch. i. 18 reff. 
 
 k = ch. y. 2, 3. vii. 16. Matt, xxvii. 6. W al. Isa. Iv. 1. 1 Matt. xiii. 4H. Exod. xxii. 3. 
 
 θί\οϊ>τι niartviiv DE Bed-gr Iren Aug (om πιστ.). — 32. bef Kapd. om η ABD' 96 Origj : 
 ins D-E mss (appy) Origj Leont Thl. — καρί. μια sah. — bef ψυχ. om η AD 96 Origj : ην 
 avT. K. μια και ψ. μια Ath Thdrt : ins BE mss (appy) Origj Leont Thl. (The art was omd 
 in both cases for simplification : ' they had one heart and soul ' being easier than ' their 
 heart and their soul was one.') — aft μια, add και ουκ ην διακρισις tv αντοις ου^ίμια DE 
 (for δ., χωρισμός, and for ονδ., τις Ε) Bed-gr Cypr2 Ambr Zeno. — και om Ε. — ονδιις Ό 90-. 
 133. 142.— τι om D. —αυΓου D, -γ(.»/ all Thl, om h 18. 30. 1.33 al.— άλλα D. —πηνΓα BD 
 al : txt AE &c. — 33. rec με•/, δνν., with Ε &c vss : txt ABD 38. ] 13 al ν ar-pol Iren Aug. 
 — ίπιδιδονν 133. — οι αττοστ. το /iapr. AE all ν alThl' Aug : txt BD Iren. — της αναστ. om 
 26. 31. — aft ιησυν, add χριστοί» A(i. χρ. του κυρ. : add ημών al vss: ι. γρ. only, Syr arr)DE 
 all Syr ar-erp copt seth arm slav-mod Chr: του κυρ. ιησ. της αναστ. Β {rert/ itsnal varr 
 where the name ιησ. orxp. occurs : the canon being in such cases, that the simplest well- 
 supported form of expr was the genuine text). — 34. ενδεος 137. — for υπηρχίν (om .5), ην 
 {corrn to avoid tautology) Α.Υ^{ην τις)Υ all Cyr : txt DE. — όσοι -yap κτητ. ήσαν χωρ. η 
 υικων υπηρχον {combination) D' [υπηρχ. om D^ d). — πωλ. και φίροντίς (ττωλ. ίφίρον Ό^, 
 
 having become converts, and specially to 
 those mentioned in ver. 4,— thougb the de- 
 scription is general. ' Ubi regnum habet 
 fides, animos ita conciliat ut omnes idem 
 
 As the first outpouring of the Spirit, so 
 this special one in answer to prayer, was 
 testified by an outward and visible sign : 
 but not by the same sign, — for that first 
 baptism by the Holy Ghost, the great ful- 
 filment of the promise, was not to be re- 
 peated. The rationalist commentators 
 have done good service by pointing out 
 parallel cases, in profane writers, of sup- 
 posed tokens of the divine presence. Virg. 
 ^n. iii. 89. Ovid. Met. xv. 672. Schottgen, 
 Hor. Hebr. in loc, produces similar notices 
 from the Rabbinical writings.^ It was on 
 every ground probable that the token of the 
 especial presence of God would be some 
 phenomenon wliich would be recognized by 
 those present as such. Besides which, the 
 idea was not derived from profane sources, 
 but from the Scriptures: see Ps. xxix. 8. 
 Isa. ii. 19. 21 ; xiii. 13. Ezek. xxxviii. 19 
 (especially), .loel iii. 16. Hagg. ii. 6, 7• 
 έιτλήσθησαν, with a fresh and re- 
 newed outpouring. τοΰ άγ. ττν. is 
 personal .• ' they were all filled with ' the 
 Holy Spirit : the meaning being the same 
 with πν. ay., the influence of the Holy 
 Spirit, — but the form of expression varied. 
 See ch. i. 8 ; ii. 33. 38; ix. 31 ; x. 45. 
 
 32 — 37.] Thk statj•; of thk church 
 AT THIS TiMK. This passage forms the 
 conclusion of tliis division of the liistory and 
 thl• transition to ch. v. 32. των ττιστευ- 
 
 σάντων] Mucli the same meaning as των 
 ■πιατίυύντων, but with reference to their 
 
 velint et nolint. Hinc enim discordiae, 
 quod non regimur eodem Christi Spiritu.' 
 Calvin. On the community of goods, see 
 note at ch. ii. 45. We have the view there 
 taken strikingly confirmed here by the ex- 
 pressions used. ' No one called (reckoned) 
 any thing of his goods (which were still 
 τα υπάρχοντα αντψ, not alienated) [to be] 
 his own.' (ίλίγεν, dicebat : hoc ipso prae- 
 supponitur proprietatem possessionis non 
 plane fuisse deletam. Bengel.) 33.] 
 
 The Apostles were the specially appointed 
 witnesses of the Resurrection, ch. i. 22 : and 
 this their testimony they gave ivith power, 
 i. e. with a special gift of the Holy Spirit to 
 enforce and illustrate, to persuade and dis- 
 pute on, those facts of which their own 
 experience (see ver. 20) informed them. 
 That the Spirit did not inspire them with 
 unbroken uniformity in mailers of fact, owe 
 present Gospels, the remnants to us of this 
 very testimony, sufficiently witness. Nor 
 was this necessary : each man reported what 
 h(! had heard and seen ; — and it was in the 
 manner of delivering this report that the 
 great power of the Spirit was shewn. See, 
 on the whole subjec^t, I'rolcgg. vol. I. § iii. 
 Tiff. χάρις, better 'grace,'i.e fromiiod, 
 
 \\\M\ favour, i.e. from the pco|ilf, wliich 
 would hardly be so absolutely designated.
 
 U nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. IV. 35—37. 
 
 '"c'h^l'^^^vii''' <^ΐ^ομίνων ^^ και έτίΟουν "^ τταρα τους πόδας των απο- 
 
 nLukexi. 22. στόΧων, " δίίδί'δίτο δε εκάστω "καθότι au τις ^' y^pe'iau 
 
 joshxii^e ^^Χ'*'• ^*^ Ίωστ/ψ δε ο "^ ίπικΧηθίΐς Βαρνάβας υττο των 
 
 secRev.xvii. Q^^Q^y^Q^^^,,,^ ό εστιν μίθίομηνευομενον ' υιός ^ παρακλη- 
 
 ο ch.ii.4S reff. α •'• Τ^ ' " t ' ^7 u ' ' ' - 
 
 I'Man.vi.^sau ο•£ο;ς^ Αευιτης, Κύπριος τω γεί'ει, "' ι/τταρχοντος αιτώ 
 
 η Malt χ "ί al ν ' ■* w \ ^ '' ^ χ ■* ^ »'/ΐ ^ 
 
 ? = Lukex.u.' αγρού πωλί}σας ηνί'γκεν το γ^ρημα και ευηκεν παοα 
 
 XVi. 8. ν r^ ~ ■> /■» -IT 1 • Λ "■ ^' 'Λ ' 
 
 iThess. ν. 5 τους ποοας των αποστολών. V. Άνιιρ οε τις ΑίΌνιας 
 
 al. 2 Kings •( ^ =" 
 
 eiVb.xiii 15. oi'Oluari συν Ζαπφειρτ^ τ^ yuvaiKi αυτού επωλησεν 
 
 XT. 31. baty- 2 >ζ• ,' '^-a - b 5•' 
 
 -"■ ic β '^'■'ί^ί^ί ί^ί" ενοσφισατο απυ της τιμής, συνειουιης 
 Elth."u'i*n*'' /cai Tf /ς γυναικός, /cat ενεγκας "^ μέρος τι παρά τους 
 
 u-ch. iii.6reff. ^λ - 5 /χ ,^/> 3 "" '^^ ' Π ' 
 
 v = Mati. χιίί. τΓΟοας των αποστολών εϋηκεν. ειπεν οε ο υετρος 
 
 24, 44al. , > ^ , d ' ' ' - ^ <^' 
 
 "jTaL^Geii. Avavia, διοτι επ\•*}ρωσεν ο Σατανάς την κταρδιαν σου 
 
 χΐί. 56. e # ' Α ' \ - ^ " > j^ ' /Ι ' ' ^ 
 
 χ here only t. χρευσασΰαι σε το πνεύμα το ayiov και νοσφισασυαι σε απο 
 
 y = ch. ϋ.4ή. ' Ι" ι τ 
 
 see ProT. xxxi. 16. ζ — Titos ii. 10 only. Jos. vii. 1. a — ch. iv. 34 reff. b = 1 Cor. iv. 4. Job χχτϋ. 6. 
 c = JuhDxix 23al. d John xvi. 6. .see Eccles. vUi. 11. e constr., here only. Dent, xxxiii.25. 
 
 7Γ. καΐίφιρον d) την τιμήν των πιπρασκοντων {-κομινων D^ d) D. — 35. rec SieSiSoTO, 
 with 1 &c: txt A(B.')DE SiC.—avom all.— κοθο 11. 31 : καθυ αν 60. 63. G9'.— 36. rec 
 ίωσης (see note, ch i. 23), with 1 &c sah arr slav-mod Chrj Thl : txt ABDE all ν copt 
 (copt 40. i)6' have ο επικ. βαρσαβι5ας, see ch i. 23) Syr seth arm slav-anct Chr, Epiph. 
 — for υττο, απο ABE h all Thl : txt D &c (υττο seems here to be grammatically required : 
 which would be rather a reason against adopting the readg than for it, were not νπο 
 and απυ confused on almost every occurr of either prep after a passive verb). — μίθ(ρ- 
 μηνενομίνυς 36. 40. 93. 95 al. — κυπρ. λιυιιτης τω ytv. D. — 37. for αγρού, χωρίου D 
 (-10V D'). — αυτού 133. — for πάρα, προς Ε al Thl. 
 
 Chap. V. 1. tv αυτω St τω καιρώ ανηρ (^beginni7ig of ecclesiastical portion) Έ. — ονομ. 
 avav. Α.Ό 134 al ν : txt BE. — σαπφιιρα {corrn) BD (ιταφφνρα D', -ipa D^) all Chr : 
 txt AE {-φφιρη) 1 most mss (appy) : σαμπφιρι 13. — 2. for απο, εκ D : icn . . . ri/x>;c om 
 137• — add του κτήματος 133. — rec συνίιδυιας {corrn), with D : txt ABE : add it 56. — 
 rec aft yυv., ins αυτού, with Ε &c : om ABD-gr 13. 14. 15. 18. 27- 29. 36. 105 al arm.— 
 ίθίτο D : τίθηκίν 38: TiQtiKtv 133.— 3. rec om o, with D &c : ins ABE 5. 163 al Chr. 
 — for avavia, προς avaviav D v-sixt : add προς αυτόν aft (or before) πίτ^). Ε al vss 
 Thl.— for fTrXrjpoiCTtv, εττίΐρασεν ν Bed (tentavit) : ηπατηαιν 'ΐ\\ΑτΛ2•. some ff combine 
 both εττλ. and ίπίΐρ. — το ay. πν. Dgr. — at om 46. — rec aft νοσφ. om at, with AB(e sil) 
 Ε &c : ins D 38. 42. 95. 96. 1 13. 177 all sah Leont (/ insert it as more in character, and 
 
 34.] γάρ gives a proof of God's has been generally made good by taking 
 
 grace working in them, in that they im- τταράκΧησις as included in προφητύα, and 
 
 parted their goods to the poor : see esp. as in the sense of exhortation : see ch. xi. 23. 
 
 2 Cor. viii. 9. ΤΓΐΐΓρα(Γκομ£νων, — ' the Λευΐτης] The Levites had begun to 
 
 things which were being sold:' — the possess land in Jer. xxxii. 7, and this must 
 
 jjrocess of selling, as regarded the whole have becomegeneral after the captivity, when 
 
 church, yet going on, though completed the Mosaic division of the land was no 
 
 in individual cases ; in the places cited longer accurately observed. KiJirpios] 
 
 by Wetst. from Demosth. and Appian For the state of Cyprus at this time, see 
 
 the pres. retains its proper force, as notes on ch. xi. 19; xiii. 4 — 7• 37. 
 
 here. In Appian, B. Civ. v. p. 1088, χρήμ-β•] Very unusual in this sense. See 
 
 the exprn is, τιμάς των ίτι πιπρασκο- Herod, iii. 38, ίπϊ πόσφ αν χρήματι βου- 
 
 μίνων. 35.] ιταρα τονς πόδας, — λοίατο τυύς πατέρας αποθνήσκοντας άπο- 
 
 not a Hebraism for the whole person — σιτΐίσθαι, and other exx. in Wetstein. 
 
 but literal. So Cicero pro Flacco, c. 28, Chap. V. 1 — 11.] The history of Ana- 
 
 'Ante pedes Praetoris in foro expensum nias andSapphira. This incident, though 
 
 est auri pondo centum.' (Rosenm.) Wet- naturally connected with (he end of the last 
 
 stein gives several other examples. The chapter, forms an important independent 
 
 Apostles, like the Praetor, probably sat upon narrative. 1.] Άνανίας, rf::?, Nehem. 
 
 a raised seat, on the step of which, at their ui. 23, or π'3:π, Dan. i. 6. in^LXX : also 
 
 feet, the money was laid, in token of reve- γ Cj^on. iii."2U a.\.—The cloud of God, or 
 
 rence. 36. J Barnabas, n«u? 12. is j^^^ mercy of God. Σαπφίίρη, per- 
 
 vloQ προφητείας— and the interpretation haps from the Greek σάπφαρος, sapphire,
 
 V. 1—7. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 45 
 
 της τιμής τον χωρίου ; ουχί μ^νον σοι 
 
 ^ ττραθίν 'ίν rrj aij ' εζ,ουσια υπηξ)'^ίν', τι οτι 
 
 καοδί'α σου το πξ)α•γμα τοΐβτο ', ουκ ίψευσω "^ ανθρωποις, j^^^ 
 5 ' " ■ 
 
 EjUfi'ti', και '^"m"''* 
 
 1 >'/) » ~ S =■ here only, 
 
 ευΟυ εν Τρ Dan. Ιν. 23. 
 
 άλλα τω θεω. ακουων δε 
 
 τούτους πεσών ° εζεψυζεν. 
 ετΓί τταντας τους ακουοντας 
 "^ συΐ'εστειλαΐ' αυτόν 
 ενεί'ίτο οε, ώς ωρών τρ 
 
 ο 
 
 και 
 
 6 Ι 
 
 Ανανιας 
 
 ο » / 
 
 eyevtTo 
 
 τεροι 
 
 7 ' ' 
 ' εγε 
 
 τους Χο^ονς 
 
 <ρόβος /^εγας 
 
 ε οι νεω- 
 
 /cat ^ εξενεγκαί'τες ίθαφαν 
 
 ιων " διάστημα, καί η 
 
 h ch. iv. 34. 
 i ch. i. 7. 
 
 Mark ii. 16. 
 
 Lake ii. 49. 
 
 see Jolin xiv. 
 
 1 Lake is. 44. 
 xxi. 14. 
 
 Hagi 
 
 19. 
 
 . i. 7. 
 
 ■γυνή 
 
 m consir., here 
 only. Joih. 
 xxiv. 27. 
 2 Kings xxiL 
 45. Ps. 
 IxxTii. 36. 
 
 η ver. 10. ch. xii. 23only. Judg. iv. 21 alex. ο — ch. ii. 43 reff. p— Lake i. 39. Gen. xxii. 3. 
 
 q John xxi. 18. = 1 Tim.T. 1, 2al. Gen. xlii. 13. ol i-., Tit. ii. 6. r — here only t. Ear. Troad. 376. 
 
 see 1 C(ir. vii. 2». s = here only, see Luke τϋ. 12. t = ch. i. 15 al. α here only, of time t : 
 
 of space, Gen. xxxii. 16 al. 
 
 rery likely to have been omd as unnecessary). — εμβινε 13. — 4. for το ττρ. τούτο, ιτοιησαι 
 (add το D-) ττονηυον τοντο D sah : facere dolose rem islam d. — 5. άκουσας dt D-gr : και 
 ενθίως ακουων Ε. — rec bef avav. om o, with D &c Orig : ins ABE all Chr Thl. — 
 ■παραχρήμα πεσωνΌ. — rec aft ακουοιτας ins ταύτα {seever 11), with Ε ac vss : om ABD 
 15. 27. 29. 37. 100. 127 al ν Syr copt sah ar-erp Orig Lucif. — 6. αναστ. δε παραχρήμα 
 
 or from the Syriac «τειτ, beautiful (Grot.). 
 — The crime of these two is well described 
 by Meyer : " By the sale of their field, and 
 the bringing in of the money, they in fact 
 professed to give the whole price as a gift 
 of brotherly love to the common stock : but 
 their aim was to get for themselves the credit 
 of holy love and zeal by one portioji of 
 the price, whereas they had selfishly kept 
 back the other portion for themselves. 
 They wished to serve two masters, but to 
 appear to serve only One.' 3.] The 
 
 Ciari implies the power of resistance to 
 Satan — 'Why hast thou allowed Satan 
 to fill, &c. r 4.] 'While it re- 
 
 mained, did it not remain thine ownV 
 i. e. was it not in thine absolute power ? 
 ' and when sold, was it not (i. e. the price 
 of it) in thine own power,' to do with 
 it what seemed good to thee ? τί οτι, 
 
 1. e. rt ίστιν οτι : see reff. εθου ev τ. 
 
 καρδ.,— 270" cva, Dan. i. 8. Mai. ii. 2. 
 Satan suggested the lie, which Ananias 
 ought to have repelled : instead of that, he 
 put it in his heart, — placed it there where 
 the springs of action are, and it passed out 
 into an act. οϋκ έψ. άνθ., άλλα τ. θ.] 
 
 This ούκ, άλλα, is not always an absolute 
 and exclusive negation and assertion, see 
 Mark ix. 37• John xii. 44. But here it 
 seems to be so, and to imply, ' Thine 
 attempt to deceive was not to deceive us, 
 men ; but to deceive the Holy Ghost, — 
 God, abiding in His church, and in us its 
 appointed superintendents.' This verse is 
 of weighty doctrinal import, as proving the 
 Deity of the Holy Spirit ; unless it be held, 
 that the Holy Spirit whom (ver. 3) Ananias 
 attempted to deceive, and God to whom he 
 lied, are different. ' Haec est sententia : 
 Ananias mentitus est Deo et ejus Spiritui, 
 non hominibus et Petro. Aude si potes, 
 bociniane, ita dicere : mentitus est non 
 
 Sphatui Sancto et Petro, sed Deo.' Bengel. 
 5.] The deaths of Ananias and Sap- 
 phira were beyond question siipernalurally 
 inflicted by Peter, speaking in the power of 
 the Holy Spirit. This is the only honest 
 interpretation of the incident. Many, how- 
 ever, and among them even Neander, at- 
 tempt to account for them on natural 
 grounds, — from their horror at detection, 
 and at the solemn words of Peter. But, in 
 addition to all other objections against this 
 (see on Ιζ,οίσουσίί•, ver. 9), — it would make 
 man and wife of the same temperament, 
 which would be very unlikely. \Ve surely 
 need not require any juitificaiion for this 
 judicial sentence of the Apostle, filhng as 
 he did at this time the highest place in the 
 church, and acting under the immediate 
 prompting of the Holy Spirit. If such, 
 however, be sought, we may remember that 
 this was the first attempt made by Satan 
 to obtain, by hypocrisy, a footing among 
 Christ's flock : and that however, for wise 
 reasons, this may since then have been 
 permitted, it was absolutely necessary in 
 the infancy of the church, that such attempt 
 should be at once, and with severity, de- 
 feated. Bengel remarks : ' Quod gravitati 
 poense in corpore accessit, in anima potuit 
 decedere.' κ. 6γ€ν. φόβ. κτ.τ.λ.] The 
 
 άκοΰσντες can hardly be (Meyer) those 
 present, who (De W.) not only heard, but 
 saw : the remark is proleptical, and = that 
 in ver. 11. 6.] Were ol ν£ώτ€ροι a 
 
 class in the conyreyalion accustomed to 
 perform such services, — or merely the 
 younger men, from whom they would na- 
 turally be expected i Meyer and Olshausen 
 (also Mosh.and Kuin.) maintain the former; 
 NeanderandDeW.tlu; latter. Wecanhardly 
 assume, as yet, any such ollicial (listinctions 
 in the congregation as would mark oti ui 
 νεώτεροι from ol -πρεσβύτεροι, which latter
 
 46 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 V. 
 
 '' απίοοσί 
 
 v = ch.ui.i2. αυτού ην 
 
 Dent, xxvi.5. . . '^, 
 W = Mntt. 
 
 xxvi. (i3. 
 
 Mark xv. 44. 
 X here only. 
 
 gen. of price, 
 
 Nalt. X 2a. 
 
 xxTi.9al. 
 y Ter. 3. 
 2 rh. vii. 9. 
 
 Heb. xii. 16 
 
 only. Gen. 
 
 ei^via TO γεγονός ΐίςηΧθεν. 
 ΓΙίΓρος Ειττε μοι ^' ei 
 
 8 ν 
 
 .33. 
 a vrr. 4 reff. 
 b Malt. XX. 13. 
 
 4 Kings xii. 
 
 8. 
 c dat, Matt. τ. 
 
 \ ' ^ a ΤΠ' 
 
 Trpoc αυτήν 1 1 
 
 ^ πνίυμα "^ κυρίου 
 
 wo, ί > \ 
 
 avopa σου ίπι ttj 
 
 δ^ 
 
 " b 
 
 ίδί 
 
 Ναι 
 συΐ'ίφωνηθη 
 
 απεκριΐ 
 
 < ν 
 
 ro " 
 
 9 
 
 'ij ττρος 
 
 t 
 γωριον 
 
 )υρα, 
 
 0( 
 
 και 
 
 τοσούτου. " ο δε Πέτρος 
 υμιν ΤΓίΐρασαί το 
 
 των θαφαντων τον 
 
 'i: ' > 10 •' 
 
 Βΐιοισουσιν σε. επεσεν 
 
 πόδες 
 
 τταξ)α'^ρημα προς τους πο^ας αυτοΰ και ' εζει/^υζεν* 
 είςελθόντες δε οι νίαν'ισκοι ιυρον αυτήν νεκράν και ^ εξ- 
 
 ai"»' iaines ' 'Ή Ι k ^ ^>'<^ '- 11 >1'' 
 
 iii.18. Winer, ενεγκοντες ευαψαν προς τον ανορα αυτής. και εγε- 
 
 νετο φόρος ,υεγας ε^ oAiji» την εκκΛησιαν καί εττι παυτας 
 
 } 31,6. 
 d-(eKir ) 
 Matt. iv. 7. 
 1 Cor. χ. 0. 
 Heb.iii.9. 
 
 τους ακουοντας ταύτα. 
 
 t 2 Cor. iii. 17. 
 b Matt. xxi. 19 al. Nam. vi. 9. i ver. 5. 
 
 = ch. iii. 11 reff. 
 18. 1 ver. 5. 
 
 g ver. fi reff. 
 
 E. — ανιστίΐλαν 133. — 7. ίιαστψα D. — 8. rec απικρ. δε (και antKp. 180 Orig), with A 
 &c : itTTf ν ίί D V ; κ. tintv Syr aeth al Lucif : -προς ην ο τητ. ίφη Ε : txt (ihe simplest, 
 and prob original) Β al sah [ti-rrtv). — rec avry, with qu } : txt ABD (E see above) all 
 ar-pol Orig Lucif. — ο om AB lect 12 : ins DE mss (appy) Orig Chr al. — for ίΐπί μοι ti, 
 (ττίίίωτησω at ti apa D-gr. — η δη D^ : 7] δε om Β. — 9. rec aft Trtrp. ins είπε, with A (φησιν 
 Orig) : fiTTfi/ δε Trtrp. Ε : txt BD 29. 69. 105. 163 v. — avTij 46. — σννεφωνησΐν D. — 
 τον κυρ. D : το αγιοιι 67• 99. 177^ al ar-erp seth Chrj Bas Avit. — ειητανται επι τη θ. Ε. 
 • — ταις θύραις Α. — 10. και εττ. Ό vss Lucif. — rec τταρα τους π. (see ch. iv. 35. 37, v. 2), 
 with Ε (ν an/e) Lucif: εττι 26. 37 : νπο 2 : txt ABD Orig : for ττρ. τ. ττ., ενώπιον 15. 
 18.36. — ενραν Α, ηύραν Έ: txt BD. — for εζενεγκηντες, εζενε-γκαν δε 134: σννσηι- 
 λαντες εζηνεγκαν και D-gr and simly Sj'r ar-erp. — 11. εττι om A sah : in e. — 12. δια τε 
 
 are first officially mentioned ch. xi. 30. Be- 
 sides which, we have no such ecclesiastical 
 class as oi νεώτεροι. And the use of οι νεα- 
 νίσκοι in ver. 10, as applying to these same 
 persons, seems to decide that they were 
 merely the younger members of the church, 
 acting perhaps in accordance with Jewish 
 custom, — perhaps also on some hint given 
 by Peter σ-υνε'στίΐλαν] So Trtpi- 
 
 στ'ελΧω, Ezek. xxix. 5. Tobit xii. 13. Sir. 
 xxxviii. 16, ' wrapped the body up,' — pro- 
 bably in their own mantles, taken off in pre- 
 paring to carry him out. The context will 
 not permit any more careful enfolding of the 
 body to be understood. — The speedy burial 
 of the dead, practised among the later Jews, 
 was unknown in earlier times, see Gen. 
 xxiii. It was grounded on Num. xix. II ff. 
 The practice was to bury before sunset of 
 the same day. The immediate burial in 
 this case adds to the probabihty that the 
 young men obeyed an intimation from the 
 Apostle. 7.] The construction is, tyi- 
 
 νετο δε, . . . και, ' It happened, that :' and 
 ώς ώ. τ. διάστ. is parenthetical, not the 
 nom. to εγινετο. See a precisely sim. 
 constr., Luke ix. 28 : and Winer, § 64, 
 p. 436. 8.] a-ireKp., perhaps to her 
 
 salutation : but see refl". τοσοτίτ., 
 
 naming the sum : or perhaps pointing to 
 the money lying at his feet — The sense 
 tantilli (Born.) is implied of course, but not 
 expressed by τοσούτου. — No stress on άττ- 
 ίδοσθε as referring to the smallness of price : 
 
 it is the ordinary word for selling. 
 9.] To try the omniscience of the Spirit 
 then visibly dwelling in the Apostles and 
 the church, was, in the highest sense, to 
 tempt the Spirit of God. It was a saying 
 in their hearts ' There is no Holy Spirit :' 
 and certainly approached very closely to a 
 sin against the Holy Ghost. Peter charac- 
 terizes the sin more solemnly this second 
 time, because by the wife's answer it was 
 now proved to be no individual lie of a 
 bad and covetous man, but a preconcerted 
 scheme to deceive God. ol iroScs] Not 
 
 that Peter heard (Olsh.) the tread of the 
 young men outside (they were probably 
 barefooted), but it is an expression common 
 in the poetical or lively description of the 
 Hebrews, and indeed of all nations (see 
 Isa. Hi. 7• Nah. i. 15. Rom. x. 15. Eurip. 
 Hippol. 656. Soph. CEd. Col. «90, al. freq.), 
 making the member whereby the person 
 acts, the actor. I take the words to mean, 
 that the time was just at hand for their 
 return : see James v. 9. The space of three 
 hours was not too long : they would have to 
 carry the corpse to the burying-ground, at a 
 considerable distance from the city (Lightf.), 
 and when there, to dig a grave, and bury it. 
 ίξοίσουσιν] This word, spoken before 
 her death, decisively proves that death to 
 have been not a result merely of her detec- 
 tion, but a judicial infliction. 10.] elseX- 
 θόντ€5, 'when they came in :' not implying 
 that they immediately entered, but leaving
 
 SXXIV. 
 
 . 19 reff. 
 14 teff. 
 
 8—16. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 47 
 
 tn ^j^ gg ^^^ χίΐ^ωΐ' των αποστολών tyiviro "σημεία mMarkw. s. 
 καί τέρατα tv τω λαω πολλά. και ήσαν ° ομυθυμα^υν fchloa 
 άπαντες εν ttj ^ στοά Έ,υΧομωνος' των δε ^'' λοίπών d^jJ 
 
 υυοεις ετυ\μα '' κολλασθαι αυτοις, αλλ' ^ ίμεyάXυvεv αυ- pp'^^iThesl/iv? 
 τους ο Ααος μάλλον οε προςετινεντο πιστευοί'τες ι ~'-'>•'^•26. 
 
 ' ' "^ χ. 28. χνϋ. 
 
 τω κυρκι;, ττληυη ανοξ>ων τε καί γυναίκωΐ' ωςτε leii?. καώ 
 
 "^ κατά τας ττ\ατειας " εκφε'ρειν τους ασθενείς και τίθεναι r= Like i. 46. 
 
 ■ • \ \ . Λ/ / • ch.x. 46. 
 
 ^ επ< ^ κΧιναρ'υον και '' κραβάττων, Ίνα ερ'χομενον Πέτρου Ι^^^'^ε*"'• 
 
 l)*fc ^d* ' \ 1 - ΐβ / _^s = Lnke τ. 15. 
 
 καν -η σκιά επισκίαση τινι αυτών. συνηργετο οε Joimxix. β 
 
 t = ch. ϋ. 41 rtff. xi. 24. η absol., ch. ίτ. 32 al. fr. τ plur., here only. w ■= Lekex. 32al. 
 
 X 1 Tim. Ti. 7. Luke xT. 22 t. see Gen. i. 12. y = Rev. i. 2. Luke viii. 16. ζ here only t• see 
 
 Luke T. 19, 24. a Mark ii. 4 al. John v. 8 al. ch. ix. 33 t. b = Mark vi. 56. 2 Cor. xi. 16. 
 
 c Mark iv. 32. Jadg. ix. 15, 36. d and constr., Mark ix. 7. | Lnke. Exod. xl.35. 
 
 Β seth ar-pol. — eyeviTo 4. 14. 15. 78 al ar-pol Cyr-jer Oec Thl. — πολλά bef tv τω λαω 
 ABDE al vss (appy) Lucif: om 133 lect 12: txt 1 most mss Chr Thl al {it is character- 
 istic of the style, to insert clauses between words in concord .• hence it is prob that the 
 other reading is a corrn). — for απαντις, πανης ABE : txt D mss (appy) Chr Thl al : 
 add σννηγμΐΐΌΐ Syr copt ; (v τω ΐίρω D 42 sah aeth ; iv τω ναω συΐ'ηγμίνοι Έ. — tv τη 
 στ. τη D. — rec σολομωντος, with Α &c Chr Thl : txt BDE all. — 13. και ουδιις των 
 λοιιτων D seth. — ουθπς Β. — 14. ot iriar. A Vo.~n\t)9i (or -Θη) D' al : πλήθος 133. — 
 15. και £ΐς• τας πλ. ABD- {και tf τοις πΧατκς Ε) all : txt D' (omg τας) 1 all : {ΐς τας 
 ■πλ. 100. 163 : none of the vss have και: in plateis or in plateas ν sah Syr al Lucif: 
 per plateas copt : om altogether aeth {prob all the varr were explanations of the origl 
 κατά τ. πλ.). — aft ασθιν. ins αυτών D al. — aft τιθ. ins (νπμοσθίν αυτών Έ.-~ rec κλινών, 
 with Ε &c Thdrt al {corrn to more usual word) : txt Α{των κλ.)ΒΟ all {lectulis ν d e 
 Lucif) Cyr-jer. — rec If p(j/3/3araij^, with Ε al : txt ABD i)6 &c, grabattis am d e,grabatis ν 
 {see Mark ji. 4, 9, var readd).— δκρχομινου 25 lect 12. — aft σκ. ins αντου Ε 33. 66 
 (appy) al ν al Thdrt ThP. — ίττισκιασπ Β 13. 58. 133 al: τίνα 13. — aft αντων, add απηλ- 
 λασσυντο yap απο πάσης ασθίνιας ως ίίχιν έκαστος αυτών D : και ρυσθωσιν απο 
 πάσης ασθίνιας ης ιιχον Ε ν {infirm, suis) Lucif. — 16. διο αυνηρ. Ε : σννηρχοντο 58. 
 
 room for some interval of time : see thetical, but continuing the description of 
 
 above. the dignity of the Apostles) the result of 
 
 12 — 16.] Progress of the Faith ; mi- this was that ' believers were the more 
 
 RACULOUS POAVER AND DIGNITY OF THE added tO the Lord ' (not ΤΓίστ.Τψ KtWl'^J, 
 
 Apostles. 12.] %i\svaerf:\j transitional, but προςίτ. τψ κυρ., as decided by ch. xi. 
 
 and does not imply any contrast to the ^ό/3ος• 24), 'multitudes of men and women.' 
 
 just mentioned, q. d. ' notwithstanding this 15.] <3st£ now takes up afresh the 
 
 fear, the Apostles went on working, &c.' See main subject of vv. 12 and 13, the glorifi- 
 
 ch. ii. 43. ατταντίς, the App. only, not cation of the apostolic office, ' insomuch, 
 
 all the Christians. It does not follow, from that ' It is connected not only with 
 
 απαντίς referring to all the believers in ch. ίμι^άλυνίν αΰτ. 6 λ., but also with ver. 12. 
 
 ii. 1 (see note there), that it necessarily refers κατά τ. ττλ.] ' down the streets,' 
 
 to the same here also. The Apostles are i. e. iri the line of the streets, — see Winer, 
 
 the subject of the paragraph : and it is to § 53, d. note. κλιν. κ. κραβ.] Kui- 
 
 set forth /Λβ!Γ unanimity and dignity that the noel's distinction that the latter is a poor, 
 
 description is given. They are represented and humble bed, the former a couch of 
 
 as distinct from all others, believers and un- richer character, appears to be unfounded, 
 
 believers (both which I take to be included (So also Bengel.) Πίτρου] As the 
 
 under the term ol λοιποί) : and the Jewish greatest, in pre-eminence and spiritual ener- 
 
 people itself magnified them. The further gizing, of the Apostles. Now especially was 
 
 connexion see on ver. 14. στ. Σολ.] fulfilled to him the promise of Matt. xvi. 18 
 
 See ch. iii. 11. John x. 23, note. 13.] (see note there) : — and even the shadow of 
 
 των λοιττών, ' all else,' whether believers the Rock (Isa. xxxii. 2, spoken primarily of 
 
 or not : none dared to join himself to (see His divine Master) was sought for. We 
 
 reff.), as being one of, or equal to, them : need find no stumbling-block in the fact of 
 
 ' but (so far was this from being the case Peter's shadow liaving been believed to be 
 
 that) the very people (multitude) mag- tlie medium (or, as is surely im|)lied, 
 
 nified them.' 14.] 'And' (not paren- having been the medium) of working mi-
 
 48 
 
 ΠΡΑΚΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 V. 
 
 e here only t• 
 
 Jns. B. S. ii. 
 
 li», 1. 
 f Luke vi. 18 
 
 only t. Tobit 
 
 Ti. 7. 
 g -Matt.ii.fi. 
 
 ch. X. 41 ;il. 
 h ver. li. Luke 
 
 iv. 2!) al. 
 k = ch. XV. 5. 
 
 xxiv. r<, 14. 
 
 xxvi. ii. 
 22 
 
 και TO 
 
 πΧηθος 
 
 10f 
 
 φίροντίζ ασϋίΐ'εις 
 ακάθαρτων, ^ 
 
 17 '. Ά 
 
 r; ούσα 
 18 
 
 XXVll 
 
 (2 Pet ii.Dt. ., 
 
 Jos. .\nt. xiii. fl 
 
 6,9. 
 I=ch.iii. 10. t.,,„,V,,, 
 m = 2Cor. xii. KVniOV 
 
 20. Gal. V. 
 
 20. 1 Macn. 
 
 viii.lH. 
 η eh. iv. 3 reff. 
 ο here only t. 
 
 see ch. xvi. 
 
 37 al. 
 ρ ch. xvi. 9. 
 
 xvii. 10. Herod, i. B2 init. 
 
 Twi' "^ ττίριζ ΤΓολεωι/ εις I 
 
 και ' oyXovpevovg νττο 
 
 oiTivfQ ίΰ^ραπίνοντο αττοιτες. 
 
 ναστάς δί ο αρχίΕρευς καί παιτες οι συν αυτω, 
 
 ^ αίρίσις των Έα^8ουκαιων, εττΧιισβησαν ™ ^ηλου 
 
 ζπίραΑον τας γ^ίΐρας εττί τους αποστόλους και 
 
 αυτούς εν τηρήσει δημοσία. ayytAog οε 
 
 '' δια νυκτός ί/νοιζεν τας Θύρας της '' φυΧακης, 
 
 i^ayaydjv τε αυτούς ειττευ Πορευεσθε και σταθεΐ'τες 
 
 λολείτε εν τω ιερω τω λαω πάντα τα ρήματα της "^ ^ωης 
 
 ταύτης. ακουσαντες οε ειςηλθον ^ υτΓΟ του ορθρον 
 
 και 
 ?εντο 
 
 ερουσαλη/ιι, 
 πνευ^ιατων 
 
 ABDE 
 
 q -= Matt. χίν. 10. Acts pa.ssim. Neh Ui. 25. r — here only, (see note.) 
 
 s == here only. Jonah iv. 10, so υπό την ίωΟινήν, Polyb. i. 53,4. υπό την ώρα/αι/, (prima ae.state) iii. 16, 7. 
 t Luke xxiv. 1. John viii. 2 only. Joel ii. 2. 
 
 137. — και TO om D', το om D^. — for ττιριξ, vtpi D'. — ης om AB 103 ν am copt sah Syr 
 ar-erp Lucif (but A' has ιηλ, i. e. ισραηλ, which has perhaps led to the omission of the 
 {ις : more probably, as Mey suggests, ΐ(ρουσα\ημ was a gloss to expl ττιριξ, and having 
 been admitted into the text, supplanted the origl hq itpova) : ins DE &c ar-pol &c. — for 
 νπο, αποΌ. — for οίπΐ'ίς, και D-gr 38. 1 1 3 sah slav-ms Lucif. — ιωντο D. — 17. hei αναστ. 
 ins και ταύτα βλέπων Ε Bed gr (Scholz). — 18. επίβαλλον Α. — rec χ. αντων, with Ε &c : 
 txt ABD 15. 18. 36. 40 al ν Syr ar-erp arm Thl Lucif. — aft δημ. (om Syr ar-erp Lucif), 
 add και ιπορευθη εις έκαστος εις τα ίδια Ό. — 19. rec δια της ν. {corrn), with Ε : txt 
 ABD al {τότε δια v. ay. κ. D). — ανοιΚας A al ν sah: ανεωζαν D', ανεωξ,εν D^ Chr : 
 txt BE al. — for τε, δε Β 73. — και εζ. Ε : cm sah. — αυτούς om 50, — 21. for ακουσ. δε, 
 
 racles. Cannot the ' Creator Spirit ' work 
 with any instruments, or with none, as 
 pleases Him .' And what is a hand or a 
 voice, more than a shadow, except that the 
 analogy of the ordinary instrument is a 
 greater help to faith in the recipient .' 
 Where faith, as apparently here, did not 
 need this help, the less likely medium was 
 adopted. — See, on the whole, ch. xix. 12: 
 and remark that only in the case of our 
 Lord (Luke viii. 40 ||) and His two great 
 Apostles in the N. T.,— and of EUsha in 
 the O. T., have we instances of tliis healing 
 virtue in the person. 16.] Keep, in 
 
 hoth verbs, συνήρχετο and εθεραττενοντο, 
 the imperfect sense ; ' the multitude. Sec, 
 was coming together to Jer., bearing, &c., 
 — for all such (quippe qui) were being 
 healed :' viz. when the next incident, 
 άναστάς δί, κ.τ.λ., happened. 
 
 17 — 42.] Imprisonment, miraculous 
 liberation, examination before the 
 Sanhedrim, and scourging of the 
 Apostles. 17.] άναστάς is not redun- 
 
 dant, but implies being excited by the popu- 
 larity of the App., and on that account com- 
 mencing a course of action hostile to them : 
 see reff. (' Non sibi quiescendum ratus est.' 
 Beng. διη•^'ερθη κινηθείς επ'ι τοΙς γενομέ- 
 νοις, Chrys.) Το suppose that the Η. P. 
 'rose up' after a couiicil held (Meyer) is far- 
 fetched, and against the €πλήσθησαν ζήλου, 
 
 which points to the kindling zeal of men first 
 stirred up to action. ό άρχ•] Annas, — 
 
 see ch. iv. 6, and note on Luke iii. 2. 
 oi σνν αντω] ' those who were with Mm :' 
 (see ch. iv. 13 ; xix. 38 ; xxii. 9). — Not the 
 members of the Sanhed?-im : but the friends 
 of the H. P. Kuinoel's ' qui a partibus 
 ejus stabant ' is too definite (De W.) : it 
 was so, but this meaning is not in the 
 words. ή ούσα] attr., but implying 
 
 more than o'l όντες εζ α'ιρέσιως τ. Σ. : — the 
 movement extended through the whole sect. 
 On αϊρ. τ. Σ., see Matt. iii. T, note. The 
 passage of Josephus, Antt. xx. 9, 1, is worth 
 transcribing : πέμπει δε Καίσαρ (Nero) 
 Άλβινοί' εις την Ίουδαίαν ετταρχον, Φή- 
 στον την τεΧεντήν πνθόμενος. 6 δί 
 jSrtffiXiif άφειΧετο μεν τον Ίώσηπον την 
 άρχιερωσύνην, τψ δε Άνάΐ'ου παιδί, και 
 αύτφ Άνάνψ Χεγομενψ, την διαδοχήν της 
 αρχής έδωκε, τοΰτορ δί φασι τον πρεσ- 
 βντατον ' kvavov εΰτνχίστατον •γ(νίσθαΐ' 
 πέντε γαρ εσχε πα7δας, και τούτους πάν- 
 τας συνέβη άρχιερατενσαι τψ θεφ, αυτός 
 και πρότερον της τιμής Ιπι πλε'ϊστυν Λπο- 
 Χαίισας, 'όπερ οΰδίΐϊ συνέβη των παρ' 
 ήμιν αρχιερέων, ο δΐ νεώτερος "Ανανος 
 .... θρασνς ην τον τρόπον, και τολμη- 
 της διαψερόΐ'τως• αΐρεσιν δέ |Χ€τη'€ΐ των 
 Σαδδονκαίων, ο'ιπερ ε'ισι περί τάς κρίσεις 
 ώμοι παρά πάντας τους Ιουδαίους, καθώς 
 ήδη δίδ/]Χώκαμεν. This shews that the
 
 37—24. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λ£2Ν. 
 
 49 
 
 ίίς το lepov και εδίδασ /cov. " πaξ)ayεvoμεvoς δε ο αργ^ιε- 
 οίυς και οι συν αυτω ^ συνίκάΧεσαν το " συνεοριον και 
 πασαν την yspovaiav των υιών ΙσραηΑ, και απ- 
 εστειλον εις το ^ ζίσμωτηριον αγθηναι αυτούς. " οι οε 
 " παραγενομεί^οι υτΓί/ρεται ουχ εΰρον αυτούς ε»' τ^/ '' ^υ- *^>,.γ,. 
 ^^ ^αΐ'αστρε•(//οντες δε άττίίγγειλαυ λέγοντες Ότι y|iJ[•^ 
 
 η Lnke χϋ. 51 
 Αΐ. John iii. 
 28. Acts pas- 
 sim. 
 
 τ = .Mark χτ. 
 I'l. Luke XT. 
 6. Josh, 
 xxiii. -2. 
 
 w Matt. xxvi. 
 5;.Hl.t 
 
 λα 
 
 κρ 
 
 ΤΟ ' όεσμωτηοιον ίνοομεν κεκΑίΐσμίνον εν πασνι ασφα- oniy. cen 
 λεία και τους φύλακας εστωτας εττι των θυρών, ανοι- *β^„' 
 ζάντες δε έσω ούδεί'α ευρομεν. 
 
 λ6 
 
 24 
 
 ως δε ηκουσαν 
 
 h.xT. 16. 
 viii. 7, 
 
 ■γους τούτους ο τε ιερεύς και 
 
 xiv. 44.) 1 Thess. τ. 3. 
 e ch. iv. 1. Luke xxii. 52. 
 
 στρατηγός του ιερού ^ 
 
 d (ττρό, James v. 9. ch. xii. 6.) έπι, Matt. xxi. 19. 
 
 Job 
 xii. 14- 
 - (see Mark 
 
 ίξίλθοιτίς 5f Syr ar-erp : ίζιΚθοντις δε (κ της φυλακής Ε (Scholz, Lachm). — aft συν 
 οντω, ins εγερθίΐ'Τίς το πρωί D. — σννκαλεσαμενοι (keeping και below) D: αννεκαλετο 
 142. — 22. rec νπΐ]^. ττηραγ., with D(add και αννξαντες γ. φυλακην D ν sjT-tDarg)E &C 
 sah &c (corrn) : txt AB 38. 96. 113. 163 al ν copt s\t aeth ar-pol &c Lucif. — ονχ ηυμον Ε, 
 ονκ ευηον D. — for εν τη φυΚ., εσω D : ora ν aeth. — αναστρ. και απη•^γ. D'. — 23. οτι cm 
 E-gr vss Syr ar-erp.— rec το μεν (to ansiver to ΰε/οΙΙρ), with E-gr 1 al vss if: t.xt ABD h 
 17. 26. 105 al syrr aeth. — ηνραμεν (twice) E. — rec εζω εστ. {gloss t o pa rtictdarize, and to 
 answer to εσω follg), with many mss Chr (txt) : txt ABDE all vss Chr Thl Lucif. — 
 rec TTOo T. Θ. {more usual) with 13 &c ν copt al : txt ABD 96 al {ad am d e sah : iyijanua 
 Lucif). — 24. ιερεύς και ο cm ABD al ν copt sah arm Lucif: oi ιερείς Ε Bed-gr : ο τε 
 
 family of Annas, if not he himself, were 
 connected with the sect of the Sadducees. 
 They (see ch. iv. 1, note) were the chief 
 enemies of the Apostles, for teaching the 
 resurrection. 18. τηρ.] see ch. iv. 3. 
 
 20.] της ζωής ταύτης, an unusual 
 expression, seems to refer to the peculiar 
 nature of the enmity shewn towards them 
 by the Sadducees, for preaching the σ νά- 
 στασις ζωής — 'of this life, which they 
 call in question.' Or perhaps r. ζ. τ. may 
 import the religion of Jesus having its issue 
 in life. A similar expression, ό λόγος της 
 σωτηρίας ταύτης, occurs ch. xiii. 26. See 
 also Rom. vii. 24. But beware of assuming 
 ineitherof these passages the useof the figure 
 called by the grammarians hypallage, so that 
 rci p. της ζ. ταύτης =z τα ρήματα ταντα 
 της ζωής : for thus the sense is enervated, 
 and the peculiar reference in each case lost. 
 The indiscriminate application of these sup- 
 posed figures of speech has been, and con- 
 tinues to be, one of the worst foes of sound 
 exegesis. — The deliverance, here granted to 
 all the Apostles, was again vouchsafed to 
 Peter in ch. xii., and is there related more 
 in detail. It is there a minute touch of 
 truth, that he should mistake for a dream 
 (ver. 9) what he saw : having lain so long 
 in prison, and his mind naturally dwelling on 
 t/iis tiisjormer miraculous liberation. 
 21.] viTT. T. δρθρ., ' at daybreak:' see reff. 
 •π•αραγ£νόμ.€νος] to the ordinary 
 session chixmbcr in the Temple, on tlie 
 south side of it (Winer, IIWB.) : and 
 Vol. II. 
 
 therefore, if the Apostles were teaching in 
 Solomon's porch (ver. 12), not in their 
 immediate vicinity. Perhaps the τταραγε- 
 νόμενος .... σννεκάλεσαν . . . , implying 
 that the summons was not issued till after 
 the arrival <f the H. P. and his friends, 
 may point to a meeting of the Sanhedrim 
 hurriedly and insufficiently called, for the 
 purpose of ' packing ' it against the Apostles. 
 If so, they did not succeed, see ver. 40 : 
 perhaps on account of the arrival of some 
 who had been listeners to the Apostles' 
 preaching. ττάσαν τ. γ€ρονσίαν] Pro- 
 
 bably the τΓρεσβντεροι, including perhaps 
 some who were not members of the San- 
 hedrim ; the well-known foes of Jesus and 
 his doctrine. The very singular expression 
 7Γ. r. γερυυσ. των υ'ι. Ίσοαί/λ, is perhaps 
 translated from the form of words in which 
 they were summoned. γί()θυσια, being the 
 ordinary LXX word for the ττοεσβύτεροι, 
 would be the Hellenistic formal expression. 
 23. ev ττάσ. άσφ] Not, as Vulg., 
 'cum omni diligentia ' (so Luth.), nor as 
 E. V. ' with all safety ' (?) ; but ' in all 
 security' — 'in a state of perfect safety.' 
 24.] ΐ£ρ€ύς, if genuine (and the 
 varieties of reading seem to have arisen 
 from the difficulty it has occasioned) must 
 designate the Hit/h Priest ; not that the 
 word itself can bear the meaning (compare 
 1 Mace. XV. 1 and 2), but tliat the context 
 l)oints out the priest thus designated to be 
 the II. P. (Meyer.) — (Jn ό στρατ. τ. Up., 
 see note, ch. iv. 1. He appears to have been
 
 50 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 V. 
 
 • Μ 
 
 kch. 
 
 ζιηπόρουν ττερί αυτών η αν yivoiro 
 
 OS τις aπl]y•yίl\l:V αυτοις οτι 
 
 χ^ύ''?^' '^^^^ ^' άΐ'δοίς• ους iOtaOe εν τ\] '' φυΧακτ] πσΐν ίν τω 
 
 '^"fffLl';" '^'«ί οί α^.χιερεΐΓ, 
 
 only. - 0\ L' ' 
 
 gvT 21, 22reir. τούτο. παρα7εΐ">Α«εΐ'ος 
 
 h ver. 22 reft. - "> ' '. 
 
 ABDE 
 
 35.' "ί^νΐ'ϊι 'fp<;> ίστωτίς κα 
 
 only. Exod. λ ν r 
 
 ϋων ο 
 
 t διδό 
 
 σκτοντίς τον 
 
 λαοί'. 
 
 26 
 
 τότε αττε 
 
 λ- 
 
 χίτ. 2.5. 
 f — Jolin xviii 
 
 28. six. 31. 
 
 see Winer, } 
 
 60, 2anin. 
 m John X. 
 
 31, 33 al. 
 
 2 King.s xvi. 
 
 Θ. 
 η cli.iv. 7 reft". 
 ο =■ ch IT. 15. 
 
 ver. 34 
 
 στρατηγός συν τοις υπηοίταις ϊ}γαγεν αυτούς ου 
 μίτα βίας, ΐφοβουντο γαρ τον \αον, Ίνα μη '" λιθα- 
 
 27 ' '' ϊ^ ' ^ η >' ' "ο 
 
 ^' αγαγοντες οε αυτούς έστησαν εν τω συν- 
 
 και επηξίωτησεν αυτούς ο αργ^ιερενς λεγωι» 
 
 ^ Παραγγελία "^ ^τapηyyει\aμεv υμιν μη Ζι^άσκειν "^ εττί τω 
 
 ^λ-η,'ίΐΙ'ϊ^.'^'^^^Ι^^'^^ τούτω, /cot (δού * πε7Γλί7ρώκ•αΓε την Ιερουσαλ?}/!* 
 
 2. I'lim i.5, - t^'i " '" '^ Πι ' \ Q "' ' 'j.''" 
 
 18 only της οιοο-^ης υμών, και ρουλεσσε ετταγογεη' εφ ημάς 
 xxiiVft'^Gen '"^ ^ αίμα του άνθρωπου τούτου. Αποκριθείς δε Πέτρος 
 
 και οι αποστοΧοι είπαν ^ Πε(θαpvε^v δει θεω μάλλον η 
 
 » Matt. χχίϋ. 
 
 σθωσιν' 
 εοριω. 
 
 <payyε 
 
 xxxi.3U al. 
 r ch. IV. 17 
 
 reft. 
 s John xii. 3. ch. ii. 2 al. t = cb. ii. 42 al. 
 
 35. xxrii. 2λ. 2 Kings i. 16. w ch. xxvii. 21 
 
 Ηκα. 
 
 βον\ε• 
 
 σθα,... 
 
 ABD 
 
 EH 
 
 η = 2Pet.ii. 1,S. Gen. vi. 17. 
 Titos iii. 1 only f. Sir. xxxiii. 28. 
 
 apxieptvg 67• 98. 104 al ar-erp slav-mod Chr ThP (ar-erp om rt). — ot αρχιιρεις Syr 
 seth : txt (no MS) 1 all ar-})ol slav-anct Thl^ &c : add κ. ot σηδοονκαιοι 25 : ο τε 
 στρατ. κ. ο κρίνς τον κρ. 96 {see notes). — ίθανμοζον μιν rt και hijir. ττ. αυτ. τι αν θι\ηι 
 ίΐνηι τ. Ε Bed-gr. — 25. rec aft αντοις ins λίγων, with Β (e sil) c&c Thl^ Lucif: am ADE 
 h all V it syrr arr sah copt seth arm Chr Oec Ύ\ύ^.— τη om 69^. 10?. — 26. ίττέλθων 96. — 
 ηγεν BD- {deducebant d) : απαγαγοντίς 13: txt AD'E mss (appy) ν all Chr Thl Luoif. 
 — 01) om D* d. — φοβονμινοι yap D-gr. — iva om BDE {to connect μη with ίφοβ) 5. 13. 
 40. 96 al : ins A 1 &c. — 27. ο ιερίυς D^-gr Lucif. — 28. rec ov παραγγ. {making it a qves- 
 tion, which has eindently been occasioned by ιπηρωτησιν), with D-gr Ε Bed-gr mss 
 (appy) vss Chr (ουχί) Thdrt al : txt AB d ν copt Ath Cyr Lucif Prsedest. — λαλιιν A 
 lect 17 Chrj Cyr Thdrt. — και bef ιδ. om D' d. — ίπλτιρωηαη A al Cyr Chr. — (φαγαγίΐν 
 D'• — ίφ νμ• ODa 46. — (κίΐνου D' sah : istins ν : om 27. 29 lect 17. — 29. rec ο π. : txt 
 ABE all Chr: ο St π. enrtv ττρος αντυνς D^ (aft ανθρωποις). — rec ειττον with 1 &c : 
 
 summoned to meet theSanhedrim, — perhaps 
 astheoffence had taken placewithinhisjuris- 
 diction. Buthewasprobablyoneof the άρχ- 
 leptTg (see Winer, RWB., Tempel, end). 
 These latter were the titular High Priests, 
 partly those who had served the office, partly 
 the presidents of the twenty-four courses, 
 partly the kindred of the H.P, (see Matt. ii. 4.) 
 αίιτών] ' The Apostles,' the αυτούς of 
 ver. 22: not ^ these words,' asv/ould appear at 
 first sight. τί ov yiv. τοΰτο] ' To what 
 this would come ; ' ' whereunto this would 
 grow,' E. V. : — not ' quomodo factum sit,' as 
 Kuin., — nor ' quid hoc esset rei ' {τί av «ϊη, 
 as ch. X. 17), as Grot, and others. 26.] 
 
 ϊνα μή λιθ. depends upon ov μετά βίας, not 
 upon ίφυβ. If, however, 'ίνα be omitted, 
 then tliis latter is the case. 28.] δέον 
 
 ίρωτησαι πρώτον, πώς ίξηλθετε ; ώς ον- 
 δενός γενομένου, ερωτώσι λέγοντες' κτλ. 
 Chrys. The same shynessof openallusion to 
 the names or facts connected with Jesus and 
 the spread of his doctrine may be traced in the 
 ονόματι τούτω, and the άνθρωπου τούτου, 
 and is a strong mark of truth and circumstan- 
 tiality. — ' Fugit appellare Jesum : Petrus ap- 
 pellat et celebrat, vv. 30, 31.' Bengel, 
 
 Ιιταγ. Ιφ' ήμας] not meaning, that divine 
 vengeance would come on them for the 
 murder of Jesus, — but with a stress on 
 ήμας — that the people would be incited to 
 take vengeance on them, the Sanhedrim, 
 for that murder. The preceding clause 
 (π£7Γλ/;ρ. κ. Γ. λ.) shews this to be their 
 thought. Compare the pointed address of 
 Peter to the Sanhedrim, ch. iv. 8 — 12, and 
 the distinction between them and the people 
 in iv. 21. — This being so, — the resem- 
 blance between this expression and the 
 imprecation of the people in Matt, xxvii. 
 25 must not be too closely pressed, though 
 the coincidence is too striking to escape 
 notice. 29.] Peter, by word of mouth ; 
 
 the Apostles, as a body, by assent, implied 
 in his own utterance and their silence. 
 There is no ellipse of άλλοι before απόστ. 
 — This defence of Peter divides itself into 
 — (1) The statement of the general truth 
 that we must obey God rather than men .• 
 (2) The reduction of the present circum- 
 stances under that general truth, as being 
 the work of the God of their Fathers — 
 shewn in his having raised and glorified 
 Jesus, for a definite purpose, to give, &c. —
 
 25—32. 
 
 nPASEiS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 δί 
 
 ανυρωποις. 
 
 30 
 
 T7"/f f pev χ ' Chron. xii. 
 ' I r 17 ai. ch.iii. 
 
 θΐος των ττατίρων τ/μων 
 [ήσουν, ον υμξΐς ^ οιεγίίζ)ΐσησβ(: "^ κρΐμάσανης ΐπι ζύλου. y "μ^^χϊ 
 
 31 - ' Λ ^ C ' ^ > - d " / -11. Lukei. 
 
 τούτον ο υεος αργη•γον και σωτΐ]ρα υψωσεν τύ) (w?orMHtt 
 
 οεζια αυΓου, ^ οουναι '^ μίτάνοιαν τω Ισραήλ και ά^εσιν 2ch.'xxvi.2i 
 
 f ~ 32''"'^ '-g' 
 
 αμαρτιών. και ημείς εσμεν αυτού μαοτυρες 
 
 (inly +. 
 
 και ημείς εσμεν αυτού "μαοτυρες τω»^ H = Lukexxiii. 
 
 h ν ^ - Ιι 51^ ^ " ' «^ ''? ?q' '^''"•*'• 
 
 ρημάτων τούτων, και το πνεύμα οε ro αγιον, ο εοωίτεν ^ - ch. χ. 39. 
 
 Gal. iii. 13, from Deut. xxi. 23. 1 Pet. ii. 24. c = ch. iil. 15 reft'. d -= ch. ii. 33 reff. e ch. xi. 
 
 18. 2 Tim. ii. 25. Wisd. xii. 19. Jo.s. Antt. xx. 8. 7. fMatf. xxvi. 28. cli. ii. 38 al. g = ch. i. 8 and 
 
 Acts passim, constr., oh. xiii. 31. double geo., Phil. ii. 30. Heb. xiii. 7. h ch. iii. 24 reff. 
 
 txt ABE. — Sti om To. — 30. ο ie Θ. A Copt. — τον ιησ. Β : τον TraiSa αυτού ιη<τ. Ε Bed- 
 gr. — εχίίρισ. 13. — 31. for ΰιζια, δοΚη D' sah Iren. — του Sovvni Β {tni τω S. Chrj). — των 
 αμαρτ. D' al. — add ιν αντω D' d sah seth. — 32. εσμιν om Β aeth : μαρ. ίπμ. Α am Syr 
 Iren. — for αυτόν, εν αντω Β β9'. 100. 105 Iren : om AD' all ν Syr arr sah seth CliTj 
 Did : 73. 103 place it aft μαρτ.; syr aft ρημ. : txt Ε all Chrj Thl {it prob was omdfrom 
 not being understood, and transposed from being thought to belong to τ. ρημάτων τού- 
 των). — πάντων των ρ. τ. D'. — δί om ABD• al ν sah arm Iren Did Thl- {corrn) : ins Ε 
 
 (3) the identification of themselves with 
 the course of action marked out by the 
 TTiiOapxelv Set ... in that they were bear- 
 ing witness to God's work, under the in- 
 spiration of the Holy Spirit given them 
 as men obedient to God. — The whole is a 
 perfect model of concise and ready elo- 
 guence, and of unanswerable logical co- 
 herence ; and a notable fulfilment of the 
 promise, δυθήσιται νμ~ιν iv iicitvy ry lopg. 
 τί λαλήσετε (Matt. χ. 19). irtiQ- 
 
 αρχίΐν] much stronger than άκονεΐ}', ch. iv. 
 19, — as their conduct, in persisting after 
 prohibition, had been more marked and 
 determined. That was a mere ' listening 
 to ' the proposition then made to them : 
 this, a course of deliberate action, chosen 
 and entered on. θίώ — opposed to 
 
 της διδ. υμών of the Η. P. ; and to άνθρώ- 
 irov τούτου. In the back-ground, there 
 would be the command of the angel, ver. 
 20 : but it is not alleged : the great duty of 
 preaching the gospel of Christ is kept on 
 its highest grounds. 30. των ττατ. 
 
 ήμ.] thus binding on Christ and his work, 
 to the covenant whereof all present were 
 partakers. ύμ€Ϊς, answering to the 
 
 ίφ' ημάς of the H. P. eiri ξύλου] 
 
 comp. reff. and the similar contrast in ch. 
 iii. 14. The manner of death is described 
 thus barely and ignominiously, to waken 
 compunction in the hearers, to whom the 
 expression was well known as entailing 
 curse and disgrace on the victim. 
 31.] άρχηγ. κ. σωτ., not, 'to be a 
 Prince and a Saviour;' but the words are 
 the predicate of τοϋτον — ' as a P. and 
 a S.' άρχηγόν, as ch. iii. 15, wliich see. 
 K. σωτ. not = της σωτηρίας ; Jesus 
 was to be King and Captain of Israel, 
 and also their Saviour. The two offices, 
 though inseparably connected in fact, had 
 each its separate meaning in Peter's 
 speech : a Prince — to whom you owe 
 
 Ε 
 
 obedience, — a Saviour, by whom you must 
 be saved from your sins. τη δεξι^, 
 
 'by (not to) His right hand,' as in 
 chap. ii. 33, where see note. The great 
 aim here, as there, is to set forth God as 
 the Doer of all this. δοΰναι, in his 
 
 Kingly prerogative; μίτ. κ. αφ. άμ., to 
 lead to salvation (els σωτηρίαν, as 2 Cor. 
 vii. 10: els ζωήν, as ch. xi. 18) by Him as 
 a Saviour. — Somewhat similarly Bengel : 
 ' μετ., qua Jesus accipitur ut Princeps : 
 άφεσ. qua accipitur ut Salvator.' — The key 
 to this part of the speech is Luke xxiv. 47, 
 where we have, in our Lord's command to 
 them, the same conjunction of μετ. κ. άφεσ. 
 άμ. — and immediately follows, as here, 
 ΰμίΐς δί ίστβ μάρτυρες τούτων, appointing 
 them to that office which they were now 
 discharging, — -and, |1 with το ιτνεϋμα το 
 αγ. of our text, ίδον εγώ άποστίλ\ω την 
 ετταγγελίαν του πατρός μου εφ' νμας. 
 By conjoining the Holy Ghost, as a witness, 
 with themselves, — they claim and assert 
 the promise of John xv. 2C, 27 : see also 
 the apostolic letter of ch. xv. 28. When 
 we remember, how much of the apostolic 
 testimony was given in writing, as well as 
 by word of mouth, this declaration of Peter 
 becomes an important datum for judging of 
 the nature of that testimony also. — See a 
 very similar conjunction, 1 John v. 9. — 
 They were God's witnesses, in the things 
 which they had seen and heard as men : 
 the Holy Ghost in them was God's Witness, 
 in purifying and enlarging by His inspira- 
 tion that their testimony to facts, and in 
 unfolding, from (and as inseparable from) 
 these witnessed facts, — //te things which 
 eye hath not seen nor ear heard. And in 
 the Scripture thesk same testimonies 
 are conjoined; that of the Apostles,ho\y men 
 under the guidance and rominiscence of the 
 Holy S])irit, faithfully and honestly report- 
 ing those tilings wliich fall under human 
 2
 
 52 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 Υ. 
 
 jch''v1?.'64 ^ Θίος τοις ^ τΓίίθαργ^οΰσιν 
 ■ciiron.xx. θ(ίποίο»'το και iljovAivovTO aviAdv αυτούς 
 
 αυτω. ° Οϊ δε ακονσαντες 
 ανα- 
 
 ABD 
 ΕΗ 
 
 3. 
 k = ch. XV. 
 
 37. xxvii.39. 
 
 1 Cur. i. 17. 
 1 = Luke xxii. 
 
 Sal. Exod. 
 
 xxi. ait. 
 ni - ver. i>7. 
 u Lnkc v. 17. 
 
 1 Tim. i. 7 
 
 only +. 
 ο 1 Cor. iJi. 
 
 12 al. Heb. 
 
 στας Sf τις iv τω "'συΐ'ίδ^)ίω Φα^ϊίσπιος ονόματι Ταμα\ιη\, 
 νομο^ι^άσκαΧος "τίμιος παντι τω λαω, ίκίΧευσίν ^■^'^^ 
 
 ίζω 
 
 Είπεν τί 
 
 Ρροανύ τους αττοστοΛους ' ποιησαι, 
 ακΓους Αι-οοες Ισ^αηλιται, ^ ττ^οςεχετε εαυτοίς εττί Η 
 
 προς C f.'ir... 
 
 ^ ABCDE 
 
 ιελλί 
 
 36 
 
 τοις αιΌοωποις τούτοις τι μίΛΑίτε πξίασσίΐν. προ yap 
 
 xiU. 4. PniT. iii. 15. cnnstr., ch. τϋ. 20. 2 Cor. X. 3. Horn. Od. x. 38. ρ = here only. Job xi. 14. xxii. 23. Xen. 
 Anab. vi. 5. 5. pp Heb. ii. 7. from Ps. viii. 5. q Loke xvii. 3 al. ch. xx. 28. Deut. ίτ. 23. r = Mark v. 33. 
 
 all Chr Thl•. — ο om Β 73 copt : ov Ό^Έ. — 33. aft ακονσ. add ταύτα, or τα ρημ. ταυ. Ε 
 al : οκονοντίς all. — f/BimXojTo (corrn, (βονλιν. not being understood) ABE all copt sah 
 seth Chr,: txt DH most mss ν Syr Chr (comm) Thl' (^ -σαρτο) Lucif: add τον 96. — 
 34. aft (TDi'fi. add αντων Ε : ίκ τυν avvtSpiov D-gr Ε copt ar-pol : e. τ. avvecp. om Syr 
 ar-erp. — naitjg {ξω Β 78. — rec βραχύ τι, with (Η all Thl bef ποιη.) 1 al : txt ABDE all 
 Chrj. — for T. ηποστ., τ. αιθ(ΐωποΐ'ς (alteration from vv 35. 38) AB 80 ν copt arm Chrj : 
 txt DEH iicc Syr sah seth al Chr, Thl. — 35. δε C 58 copt. — for avrovc, τονς άρχοντας 
 και τονς αυνίδριονς D sah. — αττο των ανθρώπων τούτων Ε tol (Scholz, Lachm). — 
 
 observation : and that of God the Spir-it 
 Himself, testifying, through them, those 
 loftier things which no human experience 
 can assure, nor human imagination com- 
 pass. 32. ρημάτων] ' Mstories,' 
 ' things expressed in words : ' see note on 
 Luke i. 4. tois ireiO.] Not ^ιμϊν, 
 which might make an unreal distinction be- 
 tween tlie Apostles and the then believers, 
 and an implied exclusion of the hearers 
 from this gift, — but generally, to all the 
 ΊΓΕίθαρχοΰσιν αντψ, by this word recalling 
 the opening of the speech and binding all 
 together. So that the sense of the whole 
 is — ' We are acting in obedience to God, 
 and for the everlasting good of our common 
 Israel: and otherwise we cannot do.' And 
 a solemn invitation is implied. ' Be ye obe- 
 dient likewise.' It is remarkable that a 
 similar word, νττηκουον Ty ττίστίΐ, is used 
 of the multitude of converted priests, ch. 
 vi. 7• 33. SiCTTpiovTo] sc. ταΐς καρδίαις 
 as ch. vii. 54. From its conjunction there 
 with ίβρυχον τ. οδόντας, it does not appear 
 to have any connexion with the phrase 
 πρίιιν or διαπρίίΐν τ. 6δ. with which 
 Hesych. and Wetst. identify it. 'They 
 were cut asunder' (in heart). So Persius, 
 iii. 8, ' turgescit vitrea bills : Findor, ut 
 Arcadiae pecuaria rudere credas.' And 
 Plautus, Barch. ii. 3, 17, ' Cor meum et 
 cerebrum, Nicobule, finditur, Istius ho- 
 minis ubi fit quaque mentio.' And Euseb. 
 H. E. V. 1 (in Suicer, sub voce, where he 
 cites other authorities also), ίχαΧίτταινον 
 κ. διίπρϊοΐ'το καθ' ημών. ίβον- 
 XevovTo] ' they were purposing,' ' taking 
 counsel with the intent,' see reff. and add 
 John xii. 10. 34] Γαμαλιήλ— Vboi, 
 (see Num. i. 10; ii. 20), is generally, and 
 not without probability, assumed to be 
 
 identical with the celebrated Rabban Ga- 
 maliel, ];:iri (the old man), one of the seven, 
 to whom, among these Rabbis, the Jews 
 give this title Rabban (= ραββοννί, John 
 XX. 16 = ' my master'), a wise and enlight- 
 ened Pharisee, the son of Rabban Symeon 
 (traditionally the Symeon of Luke ii. 25) 
 and grandson of the famous Hillel. His 
 name often appears in the Mischna, as an 
 utterer of sayings quoted as authorities. 
 He died eighteen years before the destruction 
 of the city. (See Lightf. Centuria Chorogr. 
 Matth. praemissa, ch. xv.) He was the 
 preceptor of St. Paul (ch. xxii. 3). Eccle- 
 siastical tradition makes him become a 
 Christian, and be baptized by Peter and 
 John(Phot.cod.l71,p. 19!). Winer, RWB.), 
 and in the Clementine Recognn. (i. β5), lie is 
 stated to have been at this time a Christian, 
 but secretly. The Jewish accounts do not 
 agree, which make him die a Pharisee, with 
 much more probability. Nor is the least 
 trace of a Christian leaning to be found in his 
 speech : see below. And considering that 
 he was a Pharisee, opposing the prevalent 
 faction of Sadduceeism in a matter where 
 the Resurrection was called in question, — 
 and a wise and enlightened man opposing 
 furious and unreasoning zealots, — consider- 
 ing also, that when the anti-pharisaical 
 element of Christianity was brought out in 
 the acts and sayings of Stephen, his pupil 
 Saul was found the foremost persecutor, — 
 we should, I think, be slow to suspect him 
 of any favouring of the Apostles as followers 
 of Jesus. (See the anecdotes respecting 
 Gamaliel collected in Conybeare and How- 
 son's St. Paul, vol. I., p. C2.) Hedoes not here 
 appear as the president of the Sanhedrim, 
 but only as a member. £|ω ττοιήσαι] 
 
 see reff. ' to put out' — ' cause to withdraw.'
 
 33—37. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 53 
 
 τούτων των ήμερων ^ ανίστη θευδας Xeyωv ίΐναί ' τίνα * = «"'^ ''' ΐ8• 
 
 , ^ _ ' ' _ / see ell. vi. 9. 
 
 εαυτόν, ω " πξ)οςεκλΊΘη αυδρωι/ αξ)ΐβμος "ως τεΓ^)α- ' χ.ΊηΓ'ΟηΪ.'^' 
 
 > tv W ' in 1 / " χ ' 'Λ , - η Η. νί. 3, 
 
 κοσίων υς avrJpsυη, και πάντες όσοι εττειυοντο αυτω >^^p<;mo.sth. 
 ^ ζΐίλυθησαν και "^ ε-γενοντο εις ου^ίν. ^'' " μετο τούτον "π!,»" oV' 
 
 S ' ' "T'S• 'ΐ-'ΛΛ- • -t/ -a' XXI. las. 
 
 ανέστη Ιονόης ο 1 αλιΑαιος εν ταις ημεραις της απο- προχ^χίνων 
 
 - \ b ' ι C \ ^ ά ■• ι •> - . > - ToU'Puiiois 
 
 Ύραφης, και απεστησεν λαον οπίσω αυτού κακεινος ό Πτολ. 
 απωΧετο, και πάντες όσοι επειθοντο αυτω ^ ^ιεσκοοπίσθη- αΐρ^σ.ν, 
 
 *' ^ Polyb. iv. 
 
 51,5. v=ch.i. 15al. w -= ver. 33. χ — ch. xxiii. 21 al. James iii. 3. Pror. xxvi. 25. 
 
 y here only } . 3ιαλ. την στρατιαμ, Xen. Cyr. τ. 5, 43. ζ Lnke xiii. 19. Matt. xxi. 42 trom Ps. 
 
 cxvii. 22. Rom.xi.9. zz ch. xiii. 25 reff. a Lake ii. 2 only f. 2Macc.ii. I. b = here 
 
 only. Dent. xiii. 10. Herod, i. 154, and classics, passim. c ■= Lake xxiii. i) al. 
 
 d = ch.xx. 3U. 1 Tim. V. 15. Rev. xiii. 3. consir. praegn., seecb. xiii. 8. Lake iv. 38. Rom. xvi. 20. eMatt. 
 
 xxvi. 31. Luke i. 51. John xi. 52. Zecb. xiii. 7 alex. 
 
 36. bef tavTov ins μ(γαν D : aft it, A^E all tol Syr arr slav-mod al Cyr Jer : t.xt A'BCH 
 &c V copt sail al Chr Thl.— rec πρυςικολΧηθη, with a few mss (appy) Chr Oec Thl : txt 
 AB all: ττροςίκλτ/θ»/ C (-θησαν C' appy) D' {-κΧηΰησαν Ti-) EH all Cyr: consemit ν 
 ar-pol : adhuBserunt, or secuti sunt, or accesserunt, vss (^the varr have been interpreta- 
 tions of or substitutions for the arrXy. in Ν Τ, ιτροςίκλιθη). — rec αριθ. ανίμ., with DH 
 &c V : t.iit ABCE all demid. — rec ωςιι, with &c : txt ABCDE all. — ος δκΧυθη ηυτος δι' 
 αυτού Ό. — δΐίλυθησαν οπι D d. — for £ΐς, ως 3ίί. C5 syr. — ουβίν D al. — 37. ανεητη om 
 177'• — rec \ηοι• ικανον, with Η &c : ικανον λα. Ε al copt Chr: λα. πολύν, CD-gr : 
 txt Α'Β 81 ν e Eus Cyr. — πάντες om D 95. — for οσυι, οι C^ and C^. — 38. for ίασ., 
 
 They are recalled in ver. 40. 35.] The 
 
 words £7rt r. άιΌρ. τοΰτ. may be joined 
 either with ττροςί χ. ίαυτ., or with τι μίλ. 
 ττράσσ. The latter would give the more 
 usual construction : and the transposition of 
 vFords is not unexampled in the Acts, see 
 eh. i. 2 ; xix. 4. 36.] A great chro- 
 
 nological difficulty arises here. Josephus 
 relates, Antt. xx. 5. 1, Φάδου δε της Ιου- 
 δαίας ίπιτροπίί'οντος, γόης τις άνήρ, 
 θευδας ονόματι, ττίίβει τον πλείστον 
 οχλυν άναλαιίόντα τάς κτήσεις επεσθκι 
 προς τον Ίυρδάνην ποταμ'ον αϋτψ' προ- 
 φήτης yap ίλεγεν εΤναι, καΐ πραςτάγματι 
 τον ποταμον σχίσας, διούον εφη παρίζειν 
 αύτοΊς pq.Biav. και ταΰτα λέγων πολ- 
 λούς ήπάτησεν. οϋ μι) ν εΐασεν αϋτονς 
 της αφροσύνης δνασθαι Φύδος, άλλ' ίζ- 
 έπεμφεν ϊλην ιππέων έπ' αύτυνς, ήτις 
 άπροςδόκητος επιπεσοΰσα πολλούς μέν 
 άνείλε, πολλούς δε ζώντας ελαβεν αυτόν 
 τε τον θευόάν ζωγρήσαντες άποτέμνουσι 
 την κεφαλήν, και κομϊζουσιν ιϊς Ιεροσό- 
 λυμα. — But this was in the reign of Clau- 
 dius, not before the year a.d. 44 : and con- 
 sequently at least twelve years after this 
 speech of Gamaliel's. On this difficulty 
 I will remark, that we are plainly in no 
 position (setting all other considerations 
 aside) to charge St. Luke with having put 
 into tiie mouth of Gamaliel words which he 
 could not have uttered. For Jose])hus him- 
 self, speaking of a time which would accord 
 very well with that referred to by Gamaliel, 
 viz. the time when Archelaua went to Rome 
 to be confirmed in the kingdom, says, tv 
 τυύτψ ci και έτερα μύρια θορύβων ίχό- 
 
 μενα την Ίονδαίαν κατελάμβανε, πολλών 
 πολλαχοσε κατ' οικείων ελπίδας κερδών 
 και Ιουδαίων έχθρας ϊπΐ το πολεμείν 
 ώρμημένων. And among these there may 
 well have been an impostor of this name. 
 But all attempts to identify Theudas with 
 any other leader of outbreaks mentioned by 
 Josephus have failed to convince any one 
 except their propounders : e. g. that of 
 Usher, Ann., p. 797, who supposes him 
 the same as Judas the robber, son of Eze- 
 chias, Jos. Antt. xvii. 10. 5, — of Sonntag, 
 who tries to identify him with Simon, men- 
 tioned Jos. Antt. xvii. 10. C. B. J. ii. 4. 2, — 
 and of Wieseler, who would have us believe 
 him the same with Matthias ύ Ή\αργαλώθου, 
 Antt. xxvii. 6. 2, 4. The assumption of Jo- 
 sephus having inisplaced his Theudas is per- 
 haps improbable ; but by no means impossi- 
 ble, in a historian teeming witli inaccuracies. 
 (See this abundantly demonstrated in an 
 article on 'the Bible and Josephus,' in the 
 Journal of Sacred Literature for Oct. 1850.) 
 All we can say is, that such impostors were 
 too frequent, for any one to be able to say tiiat 
 thera was not one of this name (a name by 
 no means uncommon, see Cicero ad divers, 
 vi. 10, and Grot. h. 1.) at the time specified. 
 It is exceedingly improbable, considering 
 the time and circumstances of the writing 
 of the Acts, and the evident supervision of 
 them by St. Paul, the pupil of Gamaliel, 
 that a gross historical mistake should have 
 been here ))ut into his mouth. — The λέγων 
 είναι of our text is curiously related to the 
 έλεγεν είναι of Josephus. ώς τ€τρα- 
 
 κοσίων hardly agrees with the τον πλΰατον
 
 54 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 V. 38—42. 
 
 fch. iv. 29reff. 
 g — cli. xxii. 
 
 an. 2 Cor. 
 
 sii 8. Sir. 
 
 i see Matf. xxi. 
 
 12. 
 1 -= here onlv. 
 
 Drut. XV. io. 
 
 VVisd ii. U'. 
 m — Rom. xiv. 
 
 20. 2 Mhcc. 
 
 ii.22. Ezr. v. 
 
 12 
 p— Matt. i. 18. 
 tch.i?.17rtff. 
 
 σαν. KOI τα νυν λίγω νμιν, αποστητε απο των ABCDE 
 
 ανθρώπων τούτων και ίάσατί αυτούς' οτι tav rj ' εζ 
 ανυρωττων ί] ρουΑη αυτή ΐ) το εργοί' Γουτο, καταλυυη- 
 σίται' ^^ Η δε ' ίκ Θίοϋ ίστιν, ου όυνασθε "" καταΧΰσαι 
 αυτυυς, '^ μίιποτε και "θίομάγ^οι ''ευρεθ7)τε. ■*" '^ίπεισθησαν 
 δε αυτω, και 7Γξ)οςκα\εσύμίνοι τους αττοστόλους ^ οει- 
 ραντες "" πapηy'yε^\av μη λολειν εττι τω ονόματι του 
 Ίησοΰ, καΐ " άπεΧυσαν. Οι μεν ουν εττορευοντο γ^αιρον- 
 
 η = here only. ο here only f. ProT. ix. 18 al. Symm. (Wahl.) see 2 Mace vii. 19. 
 
 Dent. xxii. 20. q ver. 36 retf. r Luke xxiii 63 al. s ■= ver. 28 al. 
 
 α — Matt, xviii. 27. ch. iii. 13 al. 
 
 αφίτί ABC (alteration, as more usual: or perhaps, inierp. of ιασ. ' let them go ') : txt 
 DEH all Chr Thl.— aft αυτοιις, add /i»} μιαί'αΐ'τις τας χείρας Ό: μη μολννονης τας 
 χ. νμων Ε Bcd-gr. — αντη om Η all slav-anct Oec ThP : ins ABCDE &c vss Orig Chr 
 ThP. — τοντων 58. — 39. οννησίσθί BCDE all ν sah Syr Orig Chr Oec ThF (alteration to 
 agree with the foregoing future, and the conditional it : see note) : t.xt AH &c copt al 
 Till'. — rec avTo (alteration to suit tpyov), with Η &c vss Chr Oec Thl : αντον 180: 
 om V (ms) : τούτου διίασκαλιαν Orig: txt ABCDE all am seth arm Bed. — aft αυτούς 
 add ουτ£ νμεις ovrt οι αρχο}τις νμων Ε Bed-gr, ovrt υμίις ovre βασιλείς οντε τύραν- 
 νοι' αττιχεσθαι ονν απο των ανθρωπωΐ' τοντων D : simly demid syr*, and omg ούτε . . . 
 τυρ. al.' — και om D' l(J3sah.— 40. aft if «p. (δηρ.38. llli), add αυΓουςΕ. — aft λαλίίν, add 
 τι»Ί Ε : αυτούς Α. — rec aft απίλ. ins αυτούς, with DEH &c : om ABC ThP. — 41. aft ουν, 
 
 όχΧον of Josejihus above. But he speaks 
 very widely about such matters : see note 
 on ch. xxi. 38. 37.] The decided 
 
 μετά τοΰτον fixes beyond doubt the place 
 here assigned toTheudas. — This Judas, and 
 the occasion of his revolt, are related by 
 Josephus, Antt. xviii. 1. I, Κυρι^νιος ίέ, 
 
 επί Σνρίας napijt', νπο Καίσαρος 
 
 δικαιοδότης τον ϊθΐ'ονς άπεσταλμίνος, κ. 
 
 τιμητής των οΰίτιοίι/ ■γενησόμενος 
 
 τταρΐίν ίί καϊ Κυρ. εις Τ)/ν Ίυνδαίων ττρος- 
 θί^κην τϊις Σνρίας -γενομενην άποτιμησό- 
 μενός τε αντων τάς ουσίας, κ. άττοΰω- 
 σϋμενος τα Άρχίλάου χρίιματα. Οι δε, 
 καίπερ το κατ' αρχάς έΐ' δεινφ φέροντες 
 την επί ταΤς άπογρα^αΐς σκρόπσιΐ', ΰπο- 
 κατ'εβησαν του ε/ς πλεΌν εναντιοϋσθαι 
 
 Ίοΰίας δϊ Γανληνίτης άνήρ, εκ 
 
 πόλεως όνομα Γάμαλα . . . ^πείγετο επί 
 άτΓοστάσει. And, in returning to the men- 
 tion of him as the founder of the fourth 
 sect among the Jews (xviii. 1. 6), he calls 
 him ό Γαλιλαίος 'Ιούδας. From the above 
 citation it is plain that this απογραφή was 
 that so called κατ' ίζ,οχήν, under Quirinus : 
 see Luke ii. 2 and note. His revolt took a 
 theocratic character, his followers maintain- 
 ing μόνον ηγεμόνα καΐ δΐσπήτηι> τον 
 θεόν (ib. i. G). απώλετο] Not re- 
 
 lated by Josephus. διεσκορττίσθησαν] 
 
 Strictly accurate — for they still existed, and 
 at last became active and notorious again, 
 under Menahem, son of Judas την καλου- 
 μένου Γολίληιου, ός ήν σοφιστής δεινό- 
 τατος, και επί Ινυρ?μ'ίου ποτέ Ίουι αίυυς 
 όνειδισας. (Β. Jud. ϋ. 17• 7 i see also Antt. 
 
 XX. 5. 2.) 38.] eoiv η, el . . . εστίν: im- 
 plying by the first, perhaps, the manifold 
 devices of human imposture and wickedness, 
 any of which it might be, (q. d. on av y 
 έξ άνθρώπ.,) and all of which would equally 
 come to nought, — and, on the other hand, 
 the solemnity and fixedness of the divine 
 purpose, by the indicative, which are also 
 intimated by the pres. oh δύνασθε. — Or 
 perhaps the indicative is used in the second 
 place, because that is the case assumed, 
 and on which the advice is founded. 
 η βουλή] The whole plan — ' the scheme,' 
 of which this έργον, the fact under your pre- 
 sent cognizance, forms a part. 39.] 
 The somewhat difficult connexion of μήτΓοτε 
 κ. θ. ενρ. may be explained, — (not by paren- 
 thesizing oTi .... αύτονς, but) by under- 
 standing ' and ye will be obliged to give up 
 your attempt ' (which thought is contained 
 in οΰ δννασ. κατ. αΰτ.), 'lest ye be,' &c. 
 καί] Opponents not only to them, 
 but also to God : — ' even,' in E. V., does not 
 give the sense. — As regards Gamaliel's ad- 
 vice, we may remark that it was founded on 
 a view of the issues of events, agreeing with 
 the fatalism of the Pharisees : that it be- 
 tokens no leaning towards Christianity, nor 
 indeed very much even of worldly wisdom ; 
 — but serves to shew how low the supreme 
 council of the Jews had sunk both in their 
 theology and their political sagacity, if such 
 a fallacious laissez-aller view of matters was 
 the counsel of the wisest among them. It 
 seems certainly, on a closer view, as if they 
 accepted, from fear of the people (see ver.
 
 VI. 1, 2. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 55 
 
 τες ^ ατΓΟ προςωπου του "^ συνίοοιου, οτι 
 
 υπίρ του ''ονόματος ^ ατιμασθηναι, ^^ ^ πασάν τε ημίοαν eu 
 
 τω ΐίοω και κατ οίκον ουκ ετταυοντυ 
 ειιαγγελί^ομίνοί τον \ρισ~ον L 
 
 διδά 
 
 χριστ 
 
 ίησουτ. 
 
 καΓί)ςιωσί}σαν τοπ.νϋ. 45. 
 
 Nora. XX. 6. 
 W ch. iv. 1.") 
 
 Γ.Ι. 
 χ Luke XX. 35. 
 
 ασκοντες και χχί. 3«. 
 
 2 Thess. i. 5 
 οηΐτ t. Gen. 
 xxxi. 28. 
 complat. 
 
 VI. El» δε ταις ημίραις ταυταις ^ πΧηθυνόντων των ych 
 
 ellips.,3Jolin 
 7 iinly. 
 LeTit. xxiv. 
 11. 
 
 μαθητών sjevtTO γογγυσμος τωι» ^ Ελληυίστων πρύς 
 Γους ' Εβοαίους, on ' τταρεθεωροιητο εν τη οιακονία τη zmkexx.u. 
 καστϊμερπ'ϊϊ αι \νραι αυτών. '^ ττοοςκαλίσαμίνοι όε οι 23""j,^es"' 
 
 ϋ. 6 only. Prov. χχϋ. 22. a see Matt, xxviii. 20. 2Pet. ii.8. b ch. ii. 46. viii. 3 xx. 20. 
 
 cch.vi.18al. Isa. xxxviii. 20. d conptr., ch. viii. 3.i. xi. 20. xvii. 18. Gal. i. 16. e intraus. here 
 
 only. Exod. i. 20. fJohnvii. 12. Phil. ii. 14. 1 Pet. iv. 9 only. Exod. xvi. 7, 9. g ch. ix. 29. xi. 
 
 20 (var. rcad.)ouly. h 2 Cor. xi. 22. Phil. iii. 5 only. Gen. xiv. 13. Hcb. i here only t• Xen. 
 
 Mem. viii. 4, 7, but not =. k ■= ch. xi. 29. 2 Cor. ix. 1, 12, 13. 1 here only t. Judith xii. 15. 
 
 add αποστοΧοι D 180 syr.— rec κατηζ. bef αημ. with DEH &c Chr Thl Lucif : t.xt ABC 
 all V Syr copt sah {an. v^tp τ. ov. copt sah ar-pol) Orig Thdrt Ambrst,. — υττερ το όνομα 
 08. — rec aft ονομ. add αυτού, with a few mss (no vss) Orig, Lucif: ιησον Ε aU vss ff, and 
 others variously τον κνριον, or τ. κυρ. ιησ., or τ. ίισποτον, or γ. θεον (all plaiiily sheuung 
 the additions to be spurious) : txt ABCDH all copt sah syr ar-erp Ammon. — 42. Ci D 
 al V e copt sah Lucif. — και om 126. — (πανσαντο 117• — rec ιησ. τον χρ. (corm) with Η 
 &c am Syr aeth copt al Lucif al : ιητ. χρ. Ε al Chr: τον κνριον ιησ. C al : τ. κυρ. ιησ. 
 χρ. D sah : t.xt ΑΒ all ν syr Bas Cyr-jerus Iren. 
 
 Chap. Λ"L 1. nri ct τ. 7]μ. 13. — tKiwaiq 73 sah. — των «λλ. om 65. — aft ai χ. αντ. 
 add tv τη ίιακονια των ίβραιων D {τη 2nd om D'.'). — 2. Se om D-gr sah. — rec ειττον, 
 
 26), this opportunity of compromising the 
 matter, which Gamaliel had designedly af- 
 forded them. 40. Seipavres] See Deut. 
 XXV. 2, — for disobedience to their com- 
 mand. 41. τοϋ όν.] Not ' this Name' 
 (as Beng. and Kuin.), but ' the Name,' 
 tear' Ιϊοχην, viz. of Christ. So the Heb. 
 □ffi is used Levit. xxiv. 11. 16 : see reff. and 
 compare της οδον, ch. ix. 2, and Euseb. 
 H. E. V. 18, κίκριτίΐι (sc. Alexander) .... 
 οΰ ΰιά το όνομα, αλλά ζι ας ΐτό\μησί 
 λι^στίίας. 42. ττάσον ήμι.] ' every 
 day,' not ' all day long,' which would be 
 ττάσ. την ήμ. — On κατ* οίκον see note, 
 ch. ii. 46. τον χρισ. Ίησ ] Accord- 
 ing to the true reading even more pointedly 
 than in the rec, τον χριστ. is the predicate, 
 and Ίησ. the subject: ' preaching (that) 
 Jesus (is) the Christ.' 
 
 Chap. VI. 1 — 7.] Election' of seven 
 
 PERSONS TO superintend THE DISTRIBU- 
 TION OF alms. 1.] δί, in contrast to 
 the former entire unity of the church : in- 
 troducing that great and important chapter 
 in her history of Judaizing divisions, which 
 from this time onward, disquieted her. [April, 
 1856.] ev T. ήμι. τ.] See ch. i. 15 : — 
 but not necessarily as there, 'witliinavery few 
 days:' theexpressioniscjuiteindefinite. Some 
 time must have elapsed since ch. iv. 32. 
 Ελληνιστών — 'Κβραίους] The Hellenists 
 (from ίλλ);)Ίζίΐΐ') were tlie Gi'ecian Jews : 
 not only those who were themselves prose- 
 lytes, nor only those who came of families 
 once proselytized, — but all who, on account 
 of origin or habitation, spoke Greek as their 
 
 ordinary language, and used ordinarily the 
 LXX version. — The Hebrews were the pure 
 Jews, not necessarily resident in Palestine 
 (e. g. Paul, who was Έόράϊος f ξ 'Εβραίων, 
 Phil. iii. 5. 2 Cor. xi. 22), — nor necessarily 
 of unmixed Jewish descent, else the 'ίζ 
 'E/3p. would hardly have been an additional 
 distinction, — but rather distinguished by 
 language, as speaking the Syro-Chaldaic 
 and using the Hebrew Scriptures. 
 ιταρίθίωροΟντο] The use of this appro- 
 priate word shews, I think, that Olsh.'s 
 supposition, that χ»7ραι implies all their 
 poor, is not correct. Those poor who could 
 attend for themselves and represent their 
 case, were served : but the widows, who re- 
 quired more searching out at their own 
 houses, were overlooked. And this because 
 the Apostles, who certainly before this had 
 the charge of the duty of distribution, being 
 already too much occupied in the ministry of 
 the Word to attend personally to it, had en- 
 trusted it apparently to some deputies among 
 the Hebrews, who had committed this over- 
 sight. For the low estimation in which the 
 Hellenistic Jews were held by the Hebrews, 
 see Biscoe, History of the Acts, pp. 60, 61. 
 ev τη διακ. τ. καθ.] Some have ar- 
 gued from this that there must have been 
 'deacons ' before : and that those now elected 
 (see below on their names) were only for the 
 service of the Hellenistic Jews. But I should 
 rather believe, with De Wette and Rothe, 
 that the Apostles had as yet, by themselves 
 or by non-official deputies, performed the 
 duty. The ϋιακονια was the daily distri-
 
 56 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 VI. 
 
 "* Γ, '^''• ?'•£?■ δώδεκα το "" ττλίιΟος των μαθητών nirav Ουκ " αρεστον abcde 
 
 U John V1I1. ϊίυ. ' ^ ι ' ι jj 
 
 YJohni\i.22 εστίν ήμας " καταΧίίφαντας τον '' λογον του θεοϋ '' ο(ακο- 
 
 only. Gen. „ ,,. ^ί s ' ' ι Π "^ '^ Λ j * " ^ ' i^ 
 
 xvih^eoiiMr., yj„, τραττεί,αις. ίπισκίψασυε υυν, αοίλφοι, ανόρας t!;:, 
 
 "cc'^n'n'si!^' υμών '/^αρτυρουμενους επτά, " π\ί]ρ£ΐς πνεύματος [αγίου] 
 q-h^reoniy.' /cdi "" σοφίος, οΰς "^^ κοτοστησομευ επί ττης '"^γοίΐας ταύτης' 
 r-hereoniy. ^ ίψ^^ζ δί TTJ προςευχτ} κα/ τρ " διακονία του λο-γου 
 
 (see ΛΙηΙΙ. „ / Κ \ ζ » 'Λ' ζ'' 
 
 (xxi. 12 0.) •' προςκαρτερίίσομεν. και ηρίσίν ο Λόγος ενώπιον 
 
 xii'ss' ^™' τταντος του ^^ πλ7)ί?ους, και " εζελεζαντο Στε'ψανον άνδρα 
 
 t — ill. χ 22. χτί. 2. 1 Tim. ν. 10. Heh. xi. 2,39. u Luke iv. 1 al. John i. 14. uti = Cul. iv. 5. ν Matt. 
 
 XXV. 21, 23. Lukexii.42. Gen. xli. 33, 41, 43. constr., cli. τϋ. 411. w = here only. 2 Mace. »iii. 9. 
 
 1 Maic X 37. χ ch. i. 17, 25. xii. 25 al. y = ch.i. 14al. Rom. xii. 12 al. Luke and Paul only. 
 
 seeMaikiii. 9. z3 King.s iii. 10. zz =- ch. XV. 12. a John vi. 70 al. Num. xci. 7. 
 
 with DEH al: txt ABC: add προς αυτούς D vss CypT. —ημιν CD ThP : txt AB 
 (e sil)EH mss (appy) Mac Chr Thl'. — καταλιποιτας 5. 180 lect 12. — 3. {πισκ-ίψα/αθα 
 Β : ιπιλίΚαοΟε 15. 60 sah : (κλίζασθε lect 15. — for ovv, δη A: 5e Β : om seth sah al. — 
 α^εΧφ. om A 13teth Bas Or-int: ri ovv εστίν αδε\φοι επισκεψασθαι D : txt CEH all 
 vss ff. — f£ νμ. αντων ανδρ. D: for νμ., ημ. lect 15 slav-ms. — άγιου om BD Ι'ΛΤ. 180 am 
 copt syr ar-erp Chr (coram) Thl' (comm) : ins ACEH &c : κνριου Syr. {The omission 
 May have been made to suit ver 10: at the same time the insertion of ayiov icas very 
 obvious, and is the more probable of the tiro. But it is a doubtful point.) — rec κατα- 
 στηαωμεν (corrn), with B(e s)l)H itc vss (constituamus d e) ThF : txt ACDE all sah 
 Syr ar-pol Bas Chr Oec Thl'.— 4. »;μ. δε εσομιθα .... προςκ-αρτεοουιτες D {sumus and 
 perseveramus d) : και τω λόγω arm : προςκαρτερησωμεν Ε all Ephr Bas Chr Procop 
 al (instantes erimtis ν e). — 5. aft λογ. add ούτος- D Syr ar-erp seth sah. — εναντίον C. — 
 aft ττληθ. add tojv μαθητών D. — πλήρης AC^DEH all (AEH also in ver 3). — προχωρυν 
 
 bution of food : see on ver. 2. 2.] το 
 
 ιτλήθος τ. μ.., — ' the whole number of dis- 
 ciples in Jerusalem :' summoning a general 
 meeting of the church. How many they 
 were in number at the time, is not said. 
 Clearly the 120 names of ch. i. 15, cannot 
 (Lightf.) be meant. ουκ άρίστόν 
 
 Ιστιν] ' non placet :' 'it is not our plea- 
 sure :' not 'non sequum est,' as Beza, 
 Calv., Kuin., and others (and E. V.), de- 
 fending this rendering by άρεστόν being 
 used in the LXX for the Heb. aiTD : but 
 even there it never signifies good or right 
 absolutely, but is used subjectively, with 
 Ti^rys, ' in thine eyes :' see Gen. xvi. 6, 
 ώς &v σοι άριστον y : also Deut. xii. 28, 
 TO άρεστον εΐ'ώπιοί' κνριον r. θεοΐι σον. 
 καταλείψαντας] For to this it would 
 come, if the App. were to inquire into, and 
 do justice in, every case of asserted neglect. 
 διακονεΐν τραττεζαις] It is a ques- 
 tion whether this expression import the 
 service of distributing money (see reff. and 
 Luke xix. 23 al.) — or that of apportioning 
 the daily public meals. The latter seems 
 to me most probable, both on account of the 
 καθημεριΐϊ} above, and of the usage of δια- 
 κονεί f (see ref.). That both kinds of tables 
 may be meant, is possible : but hardly pro- 
 bable. 3. ΙτΓίσκ. ουν] The similarity 
 to Gen. xli. 33 seems to shew that the ' look 
 ye out' of the E. V. is the right render- 
 ing, μαρτυρονμένονς] For this use 
 
 of the pass, not found in the Gospp., 
 comp., besides reff., Jos. Antt. iii. 5, τον 
 στρατηγοί' Ί/>(τοϋΐ' ίνεκωμίαζε, μαρτυ- 
 ρύΰμε^'ον εφ' οίς έπραΚ^ν ΰπο παντός τον 
 στρατοί) — and RIarc. Antonin. vii. 62, συν- 
 εχώς εφιστάναι, τίΐ'ΐς είσΐν ούτοι, νφ' ών 
 μαρτνρε1σ9αι θέλεις. Ιτττά] Some 
 
 have supposed a reference to the number of 
 nations of which the Hellenistic Jews would 
 perhaps be composed : some, to 7^00, to 
 which number the believers would by this 
 time amount (Bengel) : some, to the mys- 
 tic number seven, so common in Jewish 
 writings (Meyer, De Wette) :— but the 
 best remark is Lightfoot's : ' quare sep- 
 tem eligendi, dicat cui est audacia.'— Some 
 present consideration of convenience pro- 
 bably regulated the number. cm τ. 
 χρείας τ.] ' super hoc opus,' Vulg. : — 
 ' ad hunc usum,' Grot. : — ' over this re- 
 quirement (desideratum),' Meyer: — but the 
 occurrence of the very same expression 
 1 Mace. X. 37, (K τούτων κατασταβ ησεται 
 επι χρειών της βασιλείας των ονσών εΙς 
 πίστιν, seems to make the sense 'business' 
 (as E. v.), 'duty.' more probable. The 
 duty (see above) was, not that of minister- 
 ing to the Hellenistic Jews only, but that of 
 superintending the whole distribution. 
 4.] T. διακονία τ. λόγου, in opposition to 
 the διακονία τραπεζώΐ'. ' Hse partes sunt 
 nobilissimae, quas nemo episcopus alteri, 
 quasi ipse majoribus rebus intentus, dele-
 
 S— 7. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λί2Ν. 
 
 hi 
 
 πΧηρη ττιστΕως και πνίυματος ayiov, και Φ'ιλιππον και bver. 3. 
 
 / >τντ' y ml \ ~ cch. ϋ. lo.xiii. 
 
 ΠρϋΛ^ορον και ιΝίΚανορα και Ύιμωνα και Υϊαρμίναν και χχίϋ.^κ,"' 
 
 Ν 'Λ C '\ 'λ ' e^^d'' e' °"'y• Ext " 
 
 ικολαυν προςηλυτον nvrioyjia, ους έστησαν εν- χ». 48,4» 
 
 ' "' '\ . "> Υ^ ' ' ι (\ '" β — Γ..'ι1.'Γι 
 
 ωττιον των αΈοστοΚων και ττροςίυο,αμζνοι ε 
 
 '^"■•"•"' ^.πίΟηκαν αυτοΊς «-^"'^'" 
 
 Gen.xxiy.51. 
 f ch. xii. 24. 
 = xi. 1. 
 ver, 1. 
 
 τας χείρας. 
 
 ' Και ο λόγος του θεοί» ηυζανίν, και ^ επΧηΟυνίτο OylgVyj^j^' 
 ^φό^ αριθμός των μαθητών εν ΙίρονσαΧημ σφοδρά, πολύς τε ' Ti.i'™ir'. χ. 
 
 ο-^Χος των ΐίρεων ' υπί/κουον ry ττιστει. 
 
 16 al. 
 k Lukexviii.8. 
 1 Tim. V. 8. 
 
 Ε 177• — ΐΊκαι-ωρα BE 133: νικορα D-gr. — ηιμωνα D: τιμονα C^ al. — avrioy^tav 
 C: -ας 137•— 6. οντοι ισταθησαν D-gr Syr ar-erp sah. — for και, oiriveg D-gr. — 7. 
 for θίου, Kvpiov DE 180 ν syr Chr (text): txt AB(e sil)CH al. — riul•- μανθανον- 
 Twv E. — for tffjfojv, lovCaiwi' CO. 76• 81. 100' al lect 15 Syr Thl^. — υπηκονον 
 
 gare potest.' Bengel. ' Hinc apparet iion 
 frustra precandi studium commendari verbi 
 ministris.' Calvin. 5.] ττίστίως, — not 
 
 in the lower sense (Kuin.) of ' truthfulness,' 
 — but in the higher of ' faith.,' the root of all 
 Christian virtues : see ch. xi. 24 (De W.). — 
 Of these seven, Stephen and Philip (ch. viii. 
 5. 26. 40 ; xxi. 8) only are elsewhere men- 
 tioned. The idea of Nicolas having found 
 the heretical sect of the Nicolaitanes, Rev. 
 ii. 6. 15 (Lightf and Grot, from Iren. adv. 
 Haer. ii. 27, and Epiph. Hser. 27), seems 
 to be a mistaken one : see note ad loc. 
 From his being called προςι'ιλυτον Άΐ'τιο- 
 χία, some have argued (Heins.) that he 
 only was a proselyte, and none of the rest, 
 — some (Salmasius) that all were prose- 
 lytes, — but the rest, of Jerusalem. But 
 neither inference seems justified : rather I 
 should say that the addition simply imports 
 that he became better known than the rest, 
 from the very circumstance perhaps of 
 Antioch having been afterwards so impor- 
 tant a spot in the Christian history (ch. xi. 
 19 note). — These names are all Greek : but 
 we cannot thence infer that the seven were 
 all Hellenists : the App. Philip and Andrew 
 bore Greek names, but were certainly not 
 Hellenists. There does appear however, in 
 the case of these two App., to have been a 
 connexion with Greeks of some sort, see 
 John xii. 20 — 22. Possibly, though'E/^oaioi, 
 they may not have been έξ Έβμαίωΐ' (see 
 above on ver. 1), but sprung from inter- 
 marriage with Hellenists. And so these 
 seven may have been partly Εβραίοι, 
 though their names seem to indicate, and 
 their office would appear to require, that 
 they were connected with Hellenists, and 
 not likely to overlook or disparage them. 
 The title of ' dencona' is no where applied 
 to these seven in Scri])ture, nor rloes the 
 word occur in the Acts at all. In 1 Tim. 
 Ui. 8 ff. there is no absolute identification 
 of the duties of deacons with those allotted 
 
 to these seven, but at the same time nothing 
 to imply that they were different. And 
 άν'ί^κΧητοι, ver. 10, seems to refer to our 
 μαρτυρανμίΐ'ονς, ver. 3. The universal 
 consent of all Christian writers in regarding 
 this as the institution of the office of dea- 
 cons should not be overlooked : but at the 
 same time we must be careful not to ima- 
 gine that we have here the institution of 
 the ecclesiastical ordei• so named. The 
 distinctness of the two is stated by Chrysos- 
 tom, Horn. xiv. ϋποΊον St άρα αξίωμα 
 ίιχον ούτοι, και ττο'ιαν ίοίζαντο χίιηοτο- 
 i'iav, άΐ'α•γκα~ιον μαΟΰν. άρα την των 
 ^ιακόι-ωρ ; και μήΐ' τοΐιτο iv ταΐς ίκκλη- 
 σίαις ουκ ίστιν άλλα των πρίσβυτίρων 
 iariv ή οικονομία, οθίν οντί διακόνων, 
 οϊιτε ΐΓρισβυτίρων οιμαι το όνομα ίΐναι 
 δήλον και ψανίρόν αλλά τέως ίίς τοΰτο 
 Ιχίΐροτονήθησαν. So also Oecumenius in 
 loc. : τονς ίκλίγίντας ιΐς Οιακόνονς ίχίΐ- 
 ροτόνησαν, ου κατά τον νυν ίν τιης ϊκ- 
 κλ7]σίαις βαθμόν, ύΧλά τον διανίμιιν μίτά 
 ακριβείας και όρφανυΊς και χήρηις τά 
 προς διατροφήν. See Suicer sub voce. — 
 But that the subsequent office of deacon 
 was founded upon this appointment is very 
 probable. The only one of these seven 
 mentioned in the subsequent history (ch. 
 xxi. 8) is called Φίλίττπος ό iiayyiXiarljQ, 
 probably from the success granted him as 
 recorded in ch. viii. 12. In these early 
 days titles sprung out of realities, and were 
 not yet mere hierarchical classifications. 
 6.] €'ΤΓ€θηκαν, viz. the A])p. Their 
 office of giving themselves to prayer is 
 here specially exercised. — The laying on of 
 hands, the earliest mention of whi(-h is con- 
 nected with blessing only (Gen. xlviii. 14), 
 was prescribed to Moses as the form of con- 
 ferring office on Joshua, Num. xxvii. Iff, and 
 from that time was used on such occasions 
 by the Jews. From its adoption by ( he A|)p., 
 it has ever been the practice of the Cliristian 
 church in ordaining, or selling apart hur
 
 58 
 
 πρα;ξ;εις αποστολών. 
 
 VI. 
 
 '^^■■•2• Έτίφανος Of π\ΐ]ρης -χάριτος και ουναμεως εττο/ίΐ 
 
 m = Lni(ex. τίοατα κοι σηΐϋΐα με-γάΧη εν τω Χαω. ™ ανεστησαν δε 
 
 2ο. Mark ' _,„ „''_'' 
 
 XIV. ;)7, do. ^(,^£ς τ(ι,ν εκ τ?/ς συνα-γω-γης της Χί'^ομενης Αιβερτ'ινων c ver 
 και Κυρηνα'ιων και ΑΧεΕανορεων και των απο ΚιΧικ'ιας π 
 
 αν D' : -Off ν ΑΕ 80 ν Chr : υπηκονσίν 137• — ^• rec π\η(ΐ. ττιστεως (corrnjromver 5), 
 with Η &C ar-pol : χάριτος- κ. ττιστ. Ε : txt ABD all ν copt sah Syr arm (χαρ. θίον ath) 
 Did Nyss Chr al Aug. — aft δνν. ins κ. ττνίνμ. nyiov 2C. — μί•/α\α om lect 6 Syr ar-erp 
 Thl' : τΓολλα 40 sah: tv τω λαω μεγ. 95. — aft λαω add δια τον ονόματος (si' τω ονό- 
 ματι Ε) κνριυυ (τον κ. Ε, τ. κνρ. ημών al, om al : νπερ τον ον. ι. χρ. 43) ιησον χρ. 
 DE al sah syr* (om ΐί;σ. χρ.) Aug. — 9. καθ ο (adversus quern e) nvtar. τηης Ε : 
 ίξανεστησαν δε 180. — τοιν λεγομένων Α al coipt sah: om 105. — και ασιας om AD' d 
 
 ministers. It was also used by the Apostles 
 on those who, having been baptized, were 
 to be fully endowed with the gifts of tlie 
 Holy Spirit : see ch. viii. 17 ; xix. G, and 
 Heb. vi. 2. 7.] καί (not ' therefore,' 
 
 as Kuin.), ' and,' i. e., on this measure 
 being completed ; as would be the case, 
 seeing that these seven were not only ser- 
 vants of tables, but men full of the Holy 
 Ghost and of ^^^sdom : — and we soon hear 
 of the part which Stephen bore in the 
 work. iroXi»s δχλ. τ. UpcW] The 
 
 number of priests who returned from Ba- 
 bylon, Ezra ii. 36—39, was 4289 : and the 
 number would probably have much in- 
 creased since then. No evasion of the his- 
 torian's assertion is to be attempted. Ca- 
 saubon, approved by Beza and Valcknaer, 
 would read ποΧνς τε όχλος, καί των Ίερίων 
 (sc. τίνες) νπ. : and Heinsius, Wolf, Kui- 
 noel, and Eisner attempt a distinction 
 between όχλος των Ίερ., ' sacerdotes ex 
 plebe,' and the ' sacerdotes docti.' But, 
 besides that the words will not bear this 
 meaning, the distinction is one wholly un- 
 known in the N. T. — At this time was pro- 
 bably the culminating point of popularity 
 of the church at Jerusalem. As yet, all 
 seemed going on prosperously for the con- 
 version of Israel. The multitude honoured 
 the Apostles : the advice of Gamaliel had 
 moderated the opposition of the Sanhe- 
 drim : the priests were gradually being won 
 over. But God's designs were far different. 
 At this period another great element in the 
 testimony of the church is brought out, in 
 the person of Stephen, — its protest against 
 Pharisaism. This arrays against it that 
 powerful and zealous sect, and hencefor- 
 ward it finds neither favour nor tolerance 
 with either of the parties among the Jews, 
 but increasing and bitter enmity from them 
 both. 
 
 8— Ch. Λ^Ι. 60.]— The accusation, 
 
 defence, and martyrdom of stephen. 
 
 8.] This is the first instance of any, 
 
 not an Apostle, working signs and wonders. 
 
 The power was perhaps conferred by the lay- 
 
 ing on of the Apostles' hands ; though, that 
 having been for a special purpose merely, 
 and the working miracles being a fulfilment 
 of the promise, Mark xvi. 17, 18, to all 
 believers, I should rather refer the power to 
 the eminence of Stephen's faith. 
 χάριτος, ' divine grace' (not ' favour with 
 the people') : the effects of which, the 
 miracles, were called χαρίσμιατα. 
 9.] Λιβ€ρτίνων is rightly explained by 
 Chrysostom : υ'ι 'Ρωμαίων απελεύθεροι. 
 Philo, Legat. ad Caium, speaks of Τ7)ν 
 πέραν τον Ύιβέρεως ποταμοί' μεγάλην 
 της 'Ρώμης άποτομήν .... κατεχομίνην 
 και οίκονμεΐ'ην προς Ιουδαίων, and adds, 
 'Ρωμαίοι δε ήσαν οΊ πλείονς άπελευθε- 
 ρωθίντες. αιχμάλωτοι γαρ άχθίντες εις 
 Ίταλίαν, νπό των κτηταμένων ϊ'ιλενθερώ- 
 θησαν, ουδέν των πατρίων παραχαράΚαι 
 βιασθίντες (ρ. 1014, Potter). Tacitus, Ann. 
 ii. 85 (a. d. 19), relates, ' Actum et de sacris 
 ^gyptiis Judaicisque pellendis : factum- 
 que Patrum consultum, ut quatuor millia 
 libertini generis, ea superstitione infecta, 
 quels idonea setas, in insulam Sardiniam 
 veherentur .... caeteri cederent Italia, nisi 
 certam ante diem profanos ritus exuissent.' 
 In this Josephus agrees, Antt. xviii. 3, 5, 
 relating a story as one of its causes, in 
 which Ida, a freedwoman, was the agent of 
 the mischief. Here then we have abundant 
 reason for numbers of these Jews ' libertini 
 generis ' having come to Jerusalem, being 
 among the cceteri who were ordered to quit 
 Italy : and what place so likely a refuge for 
 Jews as Jerusalem } — Those who find a 
 difficulty in this interpretation suppose 
 them to have been inhabitants of Libertum, 
 a town in Africa propria, or proconsularis, 
 from which we find an episcopus Liberti- 
 nensis sitting in the synod of Carthage in 
 411 (so Suidas, Αφερτίνοι, όνομα έθνους, 
 ■ — Schleusn., al.); or conjecture Αιβυστίνων 
 to have been the true reading (so the Arm. 
 version, Libyorum, Oecum., Lyra, Beza, 
 Le Clerc, al.), — or even Αιβνων των κητά 
 Κνρήνην (Schulthess) ; — or suppose them 
 (Lightf) to have been freedmen from
 
 8—13. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 59 
 
 και Ασίας " συζητοΰντες τω Στεώάνω, και ουκ ° Ίσνυον nandconstr., 
 
 , „ _ . ,"•_ ,*• f >\ / \ 11' Mark viii. 11. 
 
 ^ αντιστηναι ry σοψια και τω '^πνίυματι ώ ίλαλΒί. ''ο^* ο = ΜΗΐί.τϋΐ. 
 
 τ ' fjO \ " ■^ 5Λ' " ' ' '"Λ 28 al. Is'a. 1. 2. 
 
 vnepaAov ανόρας λίγοντος on ακηκυαμ^ν αυτόν Λα- ρ Matt. ν. 39. 
 Χοΰντος ρήματα ^ βΧάσψημα " ίΐς Μωυσην κα] τον θ^^ν. ^l^'\^l^^^f^^ 
 
 10 ν If ^ \ ^ ' ^ Ο > > al. Daii.Ti.S. 
 
 σννίκινχ\ΰαν τί τον Ααον και τους ττρίσρυτίρους και r here only t. so 
 τους ■γραμματίΐς, και ΐπισταντες συνηρττασαν αυτόν jos β j. 
 και Tjyayov ης το ■' avvtcpiov, έστησαν τε μάρτυρας 27. 2ρ"ιΓ 
 
 ζζ ι ^ - a Λ ' '/^ "α ■^ ' a ' ','•4• Winer, 
 
 ψευόίΐς λε-γοντας U ανσρωττος ουΓος ου παύεται }4fi.5(Hnm.) 
 ρ7]ματα λαΧων κατά. του '^ τόπου του '^ α•γιου και του fi^ufj^xim; 
 
 i. 13. 2 Tim. iii. 2 only. Isa. Ixvi. 3. u constr., Mark iii. 29. Bel and Dr. ver. 9. ν here only t. 
 
 w = ch. xvii. 5. Jer. xxi. 2. χ ch.xix. 29. xxvii. 15. Lake viii. 29. Pror. vi. 25. y ch. iv. Ιό al. 
 
 ζ = ch. i. 23. ver. 6. zz = Rev. ii. 2. xxi. 8 (only). Prov. xxx. 9. a ch. v. 42 al. Isa. xxxviii. 20. 
 b = Matt. V. 11. xii. 32. c Matt. xxiv. 15. ch. xxi. 28. Ps. IxvU. 5. 
 
 lect J. 2. — 10. oiTtvfQ ουκ D : και om sah. — τη σοφ. τη ουση εν αντω κ. τω π ν. τω 
 αγιω ω ίΧαλιι, ίια το ί^εγχιπθαι αυτούς {βιοτι ελίγχοιτο Ε Bed-gr) υπ (εττ D') αυτοί; 
 μίτα πάσης παρρησίας' μη ^νΐ'αμενοι ουν (ου D') αντοφθαλμειν [επιοί] ουκ ηδυναντο 
 ανηΧεγιν Ε Bed-gr) τη αλήθεια DE Bed-gr: simly from δια το ελε-γχ. syr-marg. — for 
 ω, ο 2G lect 12 : qui ν Did Bed Bed-gr and Syr arr sah. — 11. λέγοντες A : txt BCDE. — 
 ρημ. βλασφημίας D-gr 137 —12. Kat ταύτα ειπυντες σννεκ. τ( Ε. — συνενικησαν 73. — 
 δε 73 sah. — καί -τραμμ. C — 13. και εστ. D', εστ. δε Η 13. 96 e copt. — μάρτυρας om 46. 
 ■ — aft φενδ. ins κατά αυτόν D. — ουΓ. ο ανθρ. C vss Chr. — rec ρημ. βλάσφημα {inserlion 
 from ver 11), with EH &c asth arm Thl: om ABCD al ν copt sah syrr ar-erp Chr Procli. 
 — λαλ. ρημ. BC al V syrr ar-erp copt sah Procl : txt ADEH al Chr Thl. — rec aft ay., ins 
 
 Jewish servitude, — or Italian freedmen, 
 who had become proselytes. (The Ar- 
 pol version curiously renders it Corin- 
 thiorum.) But none of these suppositions 
 will bear examination, and the best inter- 
 pretation is the usual one — that they were 
 the descendants of Jewish freedmen at 
 Rome, who had been expelled by Tiberius. 
 — There is no difficulty in their having had 
 a synagogue of their own : for there were 
 460 or 480 synagogues at Jerusalem (Vi- 
 triuga, Synag. p. 256. Lightf., Meyer). 
 
 Κυρηναίων] See ch. ii. 10, note. 
 
 Άλεξανδρί'ων] Two of the five re- 
 gions of Alexandria were inhabited by Jews 
 (see Jos. Antt. .xiv. 7• 2, 10. 1 ; xix. 5. 2 al.). 
 It was also the seat of the learning and 
 philosophy of the Grecian Jews, which was 
 now at its height. This metropolis of the 
 Hellenists would certainly have a synagogue 
 in Jerusalem. I understand three distinct 
 synagogues to be meant, notwithstanding 
 the somewhat equivocal construction, — 
 and λεγομένης only to apply to the un- 
 usual term Αιβερτ'ινων. των άττο Κ.] 
 It seems doubtful whether this genitive 
 also depends on συναγωγής. At first 
 sight it would seem not, from the re])eti- 
 tion of των, answering to the των before. 
 But then we must remember, that as Κυ- 
 ρηναίων and ' Αλεΐ,ανδρίωΐ' both belong to 
 towns and towns well known as tlie resi- 
 den(!f's of Jews, a change of designation 
 would be necessary when the Jews of wliolc 
 provincea came to be mentioned, and the 
 
 synagogue would not be called that of the 
 Κιλικίς or Άσιανοι (ch. xx. 4), but that of 
 ol ότΓο Κ. κ. Ά. : — and, this being the case, 
 the article could not but be repeated, with- 
 out any reference to the των before. — Cili- 
 cia was at this time a Roman province, the 
 capital being the free city of Tarsus, see 
 note on ch. ix. 11. — Asia, — not exactly as 
 in ch. ii. 9, where it is distinguished from 
 Phrygia, — here and usually in the Acts 
 impUes Asia proconsularis, a large and im- 
 portant Roman province, including Mysia, 
 Lydia, Caria, and Phrygia — known also as 
 Asia cis Taurum. 11.] Neander well 
 
 remarks (Pfl. u. Leit., p. 81 ff.) that this 
 false charge, coupled with the character of 
 Stephen's apologetic sjieech, shews the real 
 character of his arguments with his oppo- 
 nents : — that he seems to have been the first 
 who plainly set forth the transitory nature 
 of the law and temple, as compared with 
 the permanence of the latter and better co- 
 venant, thus being in a remarkable manner 
 the forerunner of St. Paul. 12.] τον 
 
 λαόν, first, — that by means of the popular 
 feeling they might act upon the ΐΓρ€αβ. κ. 
 γρ., the members of the Sanhedrim. 
 ίτΐΐστάντί'ί] Tlie same jjcrsons, — acting 
 now by the autliority of the Sanhedrim ; 
 Saul, among o'l άπό Κιλικία?, being, as 
 is afterwards (ch. vii. 58) implied, among 
 the foremost, — ' came upon him (sec rert'.), 
 and seized him.' 13. ψίνδίϊς] The 
 
 falsehood of their witness consisted, as in 
 the similar case of our Lord, in taking
 
 GO 
 
 ΠΡΑΗΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 VI. 14, 15. 
 
 1 = Malt, 
 xxvi. 01 ] 
 2 C(ir. V 
 
 14 
 
 ακηκοαμεν γαρ αυτού AeyovTog on 1ί)σους' ο abode 
 
 \ Η 
 
 Ί, 
 
 τουΓον και 
 15 ^' 
 
 νομού. "' ακηκοαμεν γαρ αυτού λί 
 
 2 Cor. v.i. ■j.T γ - t d Λ ^ \ 
 
 Ezr. V. 12. iNoLwoaioc ouToc fcaruAu(T6t τον 
 
 ^l"'•"'^"• "^ αλλάξίΐ τα ίθη a ^ τταρίοωκίν ημιν Μωυσ)7ς 
 
 = Luke i. 9. I) > ( ' i \ ri « l\ 'f ' ' " 
 
 ii.42. ch.xT. ατεΐ'ίσαιτες etc αυτυΐ' απαντίς οι KaUtLoutvoi ev τω 
 
 I.xxi.21aLt -^ , ^r^ ν ' , - f \ / 5 / 
 
 -fcoi^xv" σννίοριω udov το προςωπον αυτού ως-ει προςωττοί' ayye- 
 
 λου. VII. εΐττεί' δί ο αρχιερευς Έι άρα ταΰτα οϋτως 
 
 έχει ; ο οε εφη ' Ανδρες αδελψοι και πατίρες, ακούσατε. 
 
 see I'h. xvi. 4 
 li Luke iv. 2I| 
 
 reft. J.ib ϊϋ. 
 
 ShI^x. 
 i ch. viii. 22 
 
 only. Xeu. Mem. ii. 
 
 k '' 
 
 . 2. Anab. iii. 2. 22. 
 
 kch. xii. 15. xvii. 11. xxiv. U. 
 
 τούτον {to agree with ver \A : or perhaps because the meetinn of the Sanh. seems to 
 have been in a part of the temple), with B(e sil)C all sah Syr al Thl- &c : om ADEH all 
 V copt feth arm Nyss (ms) Chr (comm) TliP. — ούτος om 27. 29 icth. — 14. απφ tdmictp 
 63. 78'• 95- 101. 106 al. — νμιν 4. 45. 63 Syr ar-erp sah. — 15. ητινιζον St αυτω D'-gr. — 
 for απαντίς, τταντις ABCD'E all Thl' : txt D^H most mss Chr Oec ThP. — καθημινοι 
 D 137. 180 al.— K-ni (ώον D: u5ar A: ιδον Η al : txt B(e sil)CE al.— ως 137.-aft 
 αγγ. add tartoroQ εν μισώ αντων D : του Qtov seth sah. 
 
 Chap. Λ'^11. 1. aft αοχ. ins το> στιψανω DE Bed-gr tol al. — apa om ABC al : ins 
 DEH most mss Chr Oec Thl: enim e : not expressed in d ν all : ft apa om 47'. 100. 
 163 al. (The omission, as unnecessary, is easily accounted for : not so the insertion: 
 I therefore retain it.) — for ταύτα, πάντα 163 : τούτο D. —ακονσ. μου all sah arm. — 
 
 Stephen's words out of their context, and 
 misrepresenting what perhaps, totidem ver- 
 bis, he had actually said. τον τ<5π. 
 τ. άγ.] The temple, see reff. 14.] We 
 may either take the words thus, on Ίησονς 
 b Νίΐζωραϊος, ούτος κατ., ' that Jesus of 
 N., he it is tvho shall destroy ' . . . . (see 
 ch. vii. 35. 1 Cor. vi. 4), — or 6τι Ίησονς, 
 6 ΝσζωραΓος ούτος, κατ., ' that Jesus, this 
 Nazarene, shall destroy .... ,' — or, which 
 seems by far the best, take the whole to- 
 gether, ' that this Jesus of N. shall de- 
 stroy,' as in E. V. Comp. ό Παϋλος ούτος, 
 ch. xix. 26. 15.] It is a question with 
 regard to this verse. Does it relate any super- 
 natural appearance, glorifying the face of 
 Stephen, — or merely describe the calm and 
 holy aspect with which he stood before the 
 council .' The majority of commentators 
 suppose the latter : and certainly the fore- 
 going description of Stephen would lead us 
 to infer, that there was something remark- 
 ably striking in his appearance and de- 
 meanour, which overawed his adversaries. 
 But both from the plain language of our 
 text, well understood among the Jews to 
 signify supernatural brightness (see exx. in 
 Wetstein), and from the fact that in Luke's 
 own narrative we have supernatural bright- 
 ness associated with angelic appearances 
 more than once (see Lukeii. 9. Acts xii. ^), 
 I should be inclined to think that the face 
 of the martyr was lighted up with a divine 
 radiance. That the effect on those present 
 was not such as to prevent the examination 
 proceeding, is no argument against this 
 view : in the very mildness of the question 
 of the H. P. which follows, I see the trace 
 
 of some unusual incident exercising an in- 
 fluence over him. Chrysostom (who does 
 not, however, seem to adopt the above in- 
 terpretation, his TOVTO Kai ή δόξα Μωνσέως 
 being apparently only rhetorical) explains 
 well the effect on the council : ϊπίχαριν 
 St avrbv SoKtl μοι ττοιϊισαι τον θίον, τάχα 
 tirti ίμιΧΧΐ τίΐ'ά ipt^v, και 'ίνα ίύθίως ry 
 ττροςόψίΐ καταπλίιζΐ) αίιτονς. ϊστι yap, 
 ίστι και ττρόςωττα χάριτος ■γ^μοντα ττηυ- 
 ματικης ίπ'ίραστα τοΙς ποθονσιΐ' tlvni, και 
 αΐδεσιμα τοΊς μισοΰσι και ψοβίρά. η και 
 ως αΐτίαν τοϋτο ιίπεν, Si ην ήνίσχοντο 
 της εημηγορίας αντον. τί Sat ό άρχ- 
 ΐίρίΰς ; . . . . όρφς πώς μ(τά ίπιεικείας ή 
 ερώτησις και ovSsv τέως ψορτικον έχουσα ; 
 Homil. in Act. χν. Chap. VII. 1.] 
 
 On the Η. P.'s question, see Chrys. just 
 quoted. — It is parallel with Matt. xxvi. 62, 
 but singularly distinguished from that ques- 
 tion by its mildness : see above. 
 2 — 53.] Stephen's defence. In order 
 to understand this wonderful and somewhat 
 difficult speech, it will be well to bear in 
 mind, (1) that the general character οι it 
 is apologetic, referring to the charge made 
 against him : but (2) that in this apology, 
 forgetting himself in the vast subject which 
 he is vindicating, he every where mixes in 
 the polemic and didactic element. A general 
 synopsis of it may be thus given: (1) He 
 shews (apologetically) that, so far from dis- 
 honouring Moses or God, he believes and 
 holds in mind God's dealings with Abra- 
 ham and Moses, and grounds upon them his 
 preaching ; that, so far from dishonouring 
 the temple, he bears in mind its history and 
 the sayings of the prophets respecting it; and
 
 VII. 1—3. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 6ΐ 
 
 χ. 5. 
 Χί^τίϋ. 3. 
 Ps. xxiii. 
 
 Ο θεος της δόζί?ς ™ ωφΘη τω πατρί -ημών * Αβραάμ "'4e*H"b^; 
 υντι ev Tri Μί^τοττοτα/ϋα " πριν η κατοιΚΊ]σαί αυτόν εν 
 ^αρραν, και ίίττίν ττρος αυτόν °' Εζίλθί ΐκ της -γης σου '"^{^ '^ "^ 
 και ίκ της ^ συ-γ'γζνειας σου, και ^ οευρο etc την -νην «ι* °MKrkxil%u. 
 
 ch. ii. 20. Is. 
 ο Gen. ii. 1 (LXX). ρ Lake i. 61. ver. 14 only. Exod. xii. 21. Jub xxxii. 2. 
 
 q Juhii xi. 43. Rer. xvii. 1. xxi. 9. DaD. xii. 9. 
 
 2. γαρρα Ε al (Aug) : χαραν D all ν (not am demid &c) Syr aeth. — 3. tine St 5 sah. — for 
 εκ (1st), αττο D' : de d. — tic (2nd) om (perhaps as inapprojjriale to της avyytvtiac) BD^ 
 sah Tbl' : ins ACEH &c vss Thl- Iren Aug (a, d Syr seth before, de, or ex). — aft σνγγ. 
 σον, add και tK του οίκον τον πατρός σον Ε G5. G^ slav Aug. — rec om την (perhaps an 
 error owing to similarity of endings : perhaps an attempt to render -γην more indefinite), 
 
 he is proceeding, — when, interrupted pro- 
 bably by their murmurs or inattention, he 
 bursts forth into a holy vehemence of in- 
 vective against their rejection of God, which 
 provokes his tumultuary expulsion from the 
 council, and execution. (2) But simulta- 
 neously and parallel with this apologetic 
 procedure, he also proceeds didactically, 
 shewing them that a future Prophet was 
 pointed out by Moses as the final Lawgiver 
 of God's people, — that the Most High had 
 revealed His spiritual and heavenly nature 
 by the prophets, and did not dwell in temples 
 made with hands. And (3) even more re- 
 markably still does the polemic element run 
 through the speech. " It is not I, but you, 
 XV ho from the first times till now have re- 
 jected and spoken against God." And this 
 element, just appearing ver. 9, and again 
 more ])lainly vv. 25 — 28, and again more 
 pointedly still in ver. 35, becomes dominant 
 in vv. 39 — 44, and finally prevails, to the 
 exclusion of the apologetic and didactic, in 
 vv. 51 — 53. — That other connected pur- 
 poses have been discovered in the speech, 
 as e. g. that so ably followed out by Chrys. 
 Homm. XV. — xvii. (simly Grot, and Calv.), 
 of shewing that the covenant and promises 
 were before the laic, and sacrifice and the 
 law before the temple, — is to be attributed 
 to the wonderful depth of words uttered 
 like these under the immediate inspiration 
 of the Holy Spirit, presenting to us, from 
 whichever side they are viewed, new and 
 inimitable hues of heavenly wisdom. Many 
 of these will be brought out as we advance. 
 — The question, /rorw what probable source 
 Luke derived his report of this speech, so 
 peculiar in its character and citations as to 
 bear, even to the most prejudiced . decisi veevi- 
 dence of authenticity, can be only conjectu- 
 rally answered : but in this case the conjec- 
 ture can hardly be wrong. I have discussed 
 the point in the Prolegg. to this vol. ch. I. 
 § 2. II (a). —Another fjuestion has been, in 
 Vihat lani/nnge the speech was delivered. ( I ) 
 It is a hardly disputable inference from eh. 
 vi. 9, that Stephen was a Hellenist : (2) his 
 citations and quasi citations for the most 
 
 part agree with the LXX version. Hence 
 it seems most probable that he spoke in 
 Greek, which was almost universally under- 
 stood in Jerusalem. If he spoke in Hebrew 
 (Syro-Chaldaic), then either those passages 
 where the LXX varies from the Hebrew 
 text (see below) must owe their insertioa 
 in that shape to some Greek narrator or 
 to Luke himself, — or Stephen must have, 
 in speaking, translated them, thus vary- 
 ing, into Hebrew : either supposition being 
 in the highest degi'ee improbable. 
 2. άνδρ. άδ. κ. Ίτατ.] So Paul, ch. xxii. 1, 
 before a mixed assembly of Jews. The 
 ανδρ. άδ. would embrace all : the ίτατ. 
 would be a title of respect to the members 
 of the Sanhedrim, in this case, but hardly 
 in ch. xxii. 1. 6 Oeos τ. δόξης] Not 
 
 = θίος ΐνοίΐζος, ' hut the God of (i. e. who 
 possesses and manifests Himself by) Glory,' 
 viz. the Shechinah, see Exod. xxiv. Hi, 17, 
 and ver. 55. — The words τω ττατρι ημών 
 decide nothing as to Stephen's genuine 
 Hebrew extraction. Any Jew would thus 
 speak. ώψθη .... ττριν ή κατ. αύτ. 
 
 €v Χαρ.] This was the Jewish tradition, 
 though not asserted in Genesis. Thus 
 Philo (de Abrah. § 15, end), having para- 
 phrased the divine command, says, eta τοϋτο 
 τήι> πρώτην άποικίαι> ΰπο της ΧαΧίαίων 
 ■γϊΊς ti'c τήρ Χ/ιρραίων λεγίται ποιΰηθαι. 
 But he accurately distinguishes between the 
 λόγιον which he obeyed in leaving Chaldsea, 
 and the θ(6ς ώφΟη afterwards, adding a 
 reason after his manner, why God could not 
 be seen nor apprehended by him while he 
 was yet χηλίαΊζων and an astrologer. The 
 fact of his having left Ur by some divine 
 intimation is plainly stated in Gen. xv. 7» 
 and referred to in Neh. ix. 7• It was surely 
 both natural and allowable to express this 
 first command in the well-known words of 
 the second. But we can hardly sujijjose 
 that Stephen adopted the pluperfect ren- 
 dering of ΊΏ!<η in Gen. xii. 1, as the LXX 
 has ίίπιν. (Josephus, ordinarily cited as 
 relating the same tradition, throws, as he 
 often docs, the whole history into confusion, 
 saying, it is true, Antt. i. 7- L καταλιίπίΐ
 
 62 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 VII. 
 
 '^'■°ai!'fr'."^'' ^^ ^^f• δείξω. ■* Τότε εζίΧθων Ικ yr\Q 1ζ.α\^αΊων Karw/Cfj- abcde 
 "* «only"' σεν kv yiapoav. κακίΐΟεν ^ μΐτά το απόθαναν τυν πατίρα 
 "■■ '" ' αυτόν μίτωκισίν αυτόν εις την -γην ταυτην εις ην υμεις 
 
 και ουκ ε^ωκεν αυτω " κ\ηξ)ονομίαν εν 
 u = Hd)xi8 "^''"ί'' ουοε ρήμα ποόος και ε^ΓηyyilΛaτo οουναι 
 
 see Deut. ίν. '"'χ'ν ^ *^ ^'^ ' ''^ 
 
 38. αυτω εις κατασγεσιν αυτήν και τω σττερματι αυτού 
 
 τ here only *• , , ν , ,/ , - , 6 'Λ 'Λ 5•^ 
 
 = Deutii.5. '^ usr αυτόν, ουκ οντος αυτω τέκνου. ελαλησεν οε 
 
 wGkn. ΧΙ11. IS. ~ ' ^ L 
 
 see Mrttt. 
 
 tsiKtLii. i'3.iv. vvv κατοικείτε, 
 
 13. 2 Cliron. 
 
 constr., Mark xiv. 11. 
 yy ch. xiii 25 reff. 
 
 X — Mark xiii. 9. xiy. 9 al. y ver. 45 only, (and constr.) Gen. xvii. 8. Num. xxxii. 5. 
 
 with Η al Thl : ins ABCDE 5. 40. 133 al.— 4. και κατωκησίν Ό\—(ΐς χ. Η all Thl . om cv 
 65. 07. — for KoKdOtv (sat t/c. 42 lect 12 : £Κ. δε 177 sah), κακιι ην, and και μίτωκ. D' d. 
 — μίτωκησίν D'EH al Oec, and omg avrov 57- 73. 78^ i)f). 180 al : migravit Jer, intrans 
 miyravit d ; but most vss Iren (Aug) transtulit ilium. — aft avr., ins ο θίος Ε Syr ar-erp. — 
 εις om 177'• — vni' om 180. — aft κατοικ. ins και οι πατιφες ημών (υμών Ε Aug) DE syr• 
 Aug, and fm"ther add oi προ ημών D syr*. — 5. εν αντ. om 177• — «λλ επηγγ. Ό ν ar-erp 
 sah al Iren : txt AB(e sil)CEH mss (appy) copt Thl. — rec αυτω δουνηι with a few mss 
 (no vss) : (δ. αυΓω aiir;;i', or δ. ακΓ»/!/ αιτώ many vss) : txt ABCDE Η all Thl {Sov. αυτήν 
 εις κ. αυτω ΑΕ all). — 6. for ούτως, αυτω YV- all vss, αυτω ούτως 49. 96 Ath. — aft ο θ., 
 
 τ. ΧαΧδα'ιαν . . . τοϋ θίοϊι κελίΰίταντος εις 
 την Χαναναίαν μετελθείν, but omitting 
 entirely the sojourn in Haran, and connect- 
 ing the migration with an outbreak of the 
 Chaldaeans against him for teaching the wor- 
 ship of the true God.) Χαρράν] So 
 the LXX for γ\•π, Gen. xi. 31, &c. 4 Kings 
 xix. 12. Ezek. xxvii. 23, — Κάρραι της 
 Μεσοποταμίας, Herodian iv. 13 (Ptol. v. 18. 
 12. Strabo, xvi. p. 747)> — ' Carras csede 
 Crassi nobiles,' Plin. v. 24 — ' Miserando 
 funere Crassus Assyrias Latio maculavit san- 
 guine Carras,' Lucan, i. 104. It lay on an 
 ancient road, in a large plain surrounded by 
 mountains ; it was still a great city in the 
 days of the Arabian caliphs. See Winer, 
 RWB. 4. μετά το άττοθανίΐν τον 
 Ίτατ. αύτ.] In Gen. xi. 26, we read that 
 Terali lived 70 years and begot Abram, 
 Nahor, and Haran ; in xi. 32, that Terah 
 lived 205 years, and died in Haran ; and in 
 xii. 4, that Abram was 75 years old when 
 he left Haran. Since then 70 + 75 = 145, 
 Terah must have lived CO years in Haran 
 after Abram's departure. — It seems evident 
 that the Jewish chronology, which Stephen 
 follows, was at fault here, owing to the cir- 
 cumstance of Terah's death being mentioned 
 Gen. xi. 32, before the command to Abram 
 to leave Haran ; — it not having been ob- 
 served that the mention is anticipatory. 
 And this is confirmed by Philo having fallen 
 into the same mistake, de Migr. Abrah. § 32, 
 πρότιρον μεν έκ της Χαλδάίκής άναστάς 
 ■γης 'Αβραάμ φκητίν ίΐς Χαρράν TtKev- 
 τησαντος 8e αΰτοΰ τον τΓατρο? ΐκε'ιθε και 
 ίκ ταύτης μετανισταται. It is observable 
 that the Samaritan Pentateuch in Gen. xi. 
 32, for 205, reads 1-15, which has most pro- 
 bably been an alteration to remove the 
 
 apparent inconsistency. — The subterfuge 
 of understanding the spiritual death of 
 Terah, who is, as a further hypothesis, sup- 
 posed to have relapsed into idolatry at 
 Haran, appears to have originated with the 
 Rabbis (see Kuinoel ad loc. and Lightf. 
 Hor. Heb.) on discovering that their tradi- 
 tion was at variance with the sacred chrono- 
 logy. They have not been without followers 
 in modern Christendom. It is truly lament- 
 able to see the great Bengel, warped by the 
 unworthy effort of squaring at all hazards 
 the letter of God's word in such matters, 
 write thus : ' Abram, dum Thara vixit in 
 Haran, domum quodammodo paternam ha- 
 buit in Haran, in terra Canaan duntaxat 
 peregrinum agens : mortuo autem patre, 
 plane in terra Canaan domum unice habere 
 coepit.' (This alteration of relation i7i the 
 land being expressed by μετψκισίν αυτόν 
 εις !) μ€τ. αύτ. els] In these words 
 
 Stephen clearly recognizes the second com- 
 mand, to migrate from Haran to Canaan : 
 and as clearly therefore made no mistake in 
 ver. 2, but applied the expressed words of 
 the second command to the first injunction, 
 the λόγιον of Philo. 5. οΐικ έ'δωκίν] 
 
 There is no occasion here to wrest our text 
 in order to produce accordance with the his- 
 tory. The field which Abraham bought for 
 the burial of his dead surely did not come 
 under the description of κληρονομιά, nor 
 give him any standing as a possessor in the 
 land. To avoid this seeming inconsistency, 
 Schottgen and Bengel lay a stress on εδωκεν, 
 ' agrum ilium . . . non ex donatione divina 
 accepit Abraham, sed emit, ipsa emtione 
 peregrinum eum esse docente.' (Bengel.) — 
 Kuinoel and Olshausen take ουκ for ουπω. 
 και before ίττηγγ, is not 'yet'
 
 4—11. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 63 
 
 όντως ο ι/£ος, οτι ίσται το σπέρμα αυτού τταροικον ίν ^JS^Vg ιρ t' 
 •yrj αλΑοτρια, και οουλωσονσιν αυτό και κακωσουσιν ge.v. χ/ is, 
 
 ,1 / ' 7 * ^ 'Ά ' ' ^ ? Λ ' aLukexTi. U'. 
 
 £Τί} rtrpa/coffto. ' και το etfvoc ω eav όουλ^υσουσιν i"'"'^.v'• 
 κρίνω ε-γω, ύτην ο θεός, και μετά ταϋτα ϊ^ελευσονται c^iivra^^' 
 
 ί e Λ ' ' . - / , 8 ' >'<> 2 Pet. ϋ. 19. 
 
 και Αατρευσονσιρ μοι εν τω τοττω τοντω. και εόωκεν cen.i.c. 
 
 _ . > ' ι ί. t C ver. 19. ch. 
 
 αυτω ' όιαθηκην ττεριτομης' και ' ούτως ε-γεννησεν τον lvi,l'u"'^' 
 
 >¥v \g , i\ -f/ -'λ/ >rl Pet. iii. 13 
 
 Ισαακ και ττεριετεμεν αυτόν τ\] νμερα ττ> ογοορ, και ο "°iy• Exod. 
 Ισαακ τον Ιακωβ, και ο Ίακωβ τους δώδίκα " ττατρι- "^ FxiTel.'ii.^^' 
 
 / Q>< / ί</Λ' \>yNl2al. Gen. 
 
 α^)^σς. /cot oj πατρίαρχαι 4'7Λωσαντες του Ιωσηφ i-c . 
 
 •^ ατΓίδοΐ'το εις Αιγυτττοί'' και ^ ην ό βεος μετ αύτοϋ ff iitb -χ/ϋ• 
 /cat ί^ίΐΛατο αυτόν εκ πασών των υλιφίων αυτού, £f=R>m ν.ΐ2. 
 
 , ,, , _ , , , , ~, ^' Χ). 2Η. ICor. 
 
 και εοωκεν αυτω ° y^apiv και σοφιαν "εναντίον Φηραω gLuk'/i^Mai. 
 
 β\ / λ'' 'ρ ' '^α'' Exiid.iv.25al. 
 
 ασιΑεως Άιyυπτov, και '^ κατεστησεν αυτόν ιι-^ουαενον ge.n-.xvu.io. 
 
 ετΓ ΑΊγυπτοί/ και όλον τον * οίκον αυτού. ^^ ηλθεν δε "'iy.ichron. 
 
 ΙΛ^ ' ,' " \ ^ - α'' >"\.^ ^ < ^xiv. 31 vat. 
 
 At^oc εφ oAiji' την -γην Λι-γυπτου και Λ,ανααν και χχνϋ 22. 
 " θλιφις μεγάλη, καί ούχ " η'ύρισκον "" χορτάσματα οι xiiJi^'yames 
 
 ίτ. 2 Ges.xxxtu. 11. j=ch.T. 8. Heb. xii. 16 only. Gen. xxv. 33. k ch. xviii. 1υ reft'. 
 
 1 = ver. 34. ch. xii. 11. xxiii. 27. Gal. i. 4 only. Exod iii. 8. in Matt. xiii. 21. 2 King.s xxii. 19. 
 
 n -= ch. u. 47 reff. Gen. xxxix. 21. ο = Markii. 12. Luke i. 6. xx. 26. ch. viii. 32. Gen. vi. 8. 
 
 ρ Lake xii. 14. vv. 27, 35. Heb. vii. 28. Ges. xii. 41. q Matt. ii. 6. Lake xxU. 26. Heb. xiii. 7, 17, 24. 
 
 Dent. i. 15. r constr., Heb. ii. 7. s — ch. x. 2 al. Gen. vii. 1. t Lake iv. 25. xv. 14. 
 
 n — Lokeix.12. Som. iv. 1. ν here only. Gen. xiii. 27. Deut. xi. 15 al.t 
 
 add ττρος αυτόν D Iren, λίγων πρ. αυτόν Si^ ar-erp al λίγων Chr. — for αυτού, σου 
 15. 18. 27• 36 v-sixt Syr ar-erp copt sah. — for avro, αυτω 13 : αυτούς D ν seth copt sah. 
 — aft κακωσ., add avro C al vss Thl' (comm) : αυτω 13 : κακ. αυτό κ. δουλ. Ε. — 7. το St 
 C 120 sah. — αν BD : txt ACEH mss (appy) if. — rec οουλίυσωσιν {corrn to suit LXX), 
 with B(e sil)EH &c vss ff: t.xt ACD-gr 26. 96 al Syr copt syr Iren.— ο θ. inrtv ABC : 
 txt DEH mss (appy) vss (appy) Chr Thl (txt and comm) Iren al. — ιϊ,ίΧ. tKtiOtv E. — 
 \ατςιίυσωσιν C 73. — 8. for ούτως, οντοζ all : ούτως ουτυς sah. — bef ισαακ om ο AB 
 (Bentl Birch) CE 96 al Thl' : ins DH all Chr Oec ThF.— ins εγίννησε Ε Syr.— bef ιακ. 
 om ο ACD'E 96 al : ins B(not mentd in Bentl and Bch)D2H all Chr Oec Thl.— 10. rec 
 ίξίίλίΓο, with Η &c Thl' : txt ABCD(f£tX. BCD)E all Ύϊύ^.—χα^,ιν αυτ. D-gr : αντω 
 om A. — ivavTi all. — φαραω οω 137• — f?• o\ov ACE-gr aU ν Syr copt slav: txt B(e sU) 
 DH most mss e ar-pol ff. — 11. aft ηλθ. Se, ins και 70• — for την -γην Αιγύπτου, την 
 Αιγυτττον {την omd firat in error as in 163, owing to similarity of γηΐ', and then -του 
 altered to -τον to suit) ABC(D') 81 ν Syr copt sah : κρ όλης της (add -γης D-) αιγυτττον 
 D : txt (D-)EH mss (nrly) seth syr ar-pol al ff. — rec ίυρισκον {corrn), with ACDH &c 
 
 (Bez•), nor is Ιττηγγ. to be construed plu- narrative form {το σπ. αυτού) into the 
 
 perfect (id.) ; ' and he promised ' is the direct {kq. εγώ). 8.] On the institu- 
 
 simple rendering of the words, and the right tion of circumcision, it is called a διαθήκη, 
 
 one. The following teat is by Kuin. rendered Gen. xvii. 10, and the immediate promise of 
 
 ' nimirum ;' — but again it is only the simple that covenant was δώσω σοι κ. τψ σττίρματί 
 
 copula, ij^.T!';^• 6, 7. J A free citation σου μετά at την γην 'ην παροικείς, πασαν 
 
 from the LXX, with the words και λατρ. την γϊ}ν Χαναάν ίίς κατάσχισιν αιώνων' 
 
 μοι iv τ. τόπ. τοντψ adapted and added f"' ίσομαι αΰτοΐς εις θεόν, id. ver. 8. 
 
 from Exod. iii. 12. The shifts of some ούτω?, 'thus,' ' in this new covenant state;' 
 
 commentators to avoid this i)lain fact are — or, ' in fulfilment of the promise of seed 
 
 not worth recounting : but the student who implied in the above words.' In this word 
 
 would not handle the Word of God deceit- οίίτως lies hid the germ of the subseejuent 
 
 fully should be here and every where on his teaching of tlie Holy Spirit by St. Paul, Gal. 
 
 guard against them. — The round number, iii• 9•] Here wo have the first hint 
 
 400 years, given here and Gen. 1. c, is/?/r- of the rebellious spirit in Israel, which the 
 
 ther specified Exod. xii. 40 as 430. (See progress of the history brings out. 
 
 Gal. iii. 17, and note.) 7.] tlirtv b 9^6% 10.] Observe (Mey.) the simple coupling 
 
 is inserted by Stephen in passing from the of the clauses by και, as characteristic of
 
 Gi ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. VII. 
 
 w rh. iii. 25 
 
 reff. 
 X lureonlv 
 
 πατέρες ΐ]μων. άκουσας οε Ιακωρ οντά σιτια εις abcdL• 
 
 lure only. . ,r ν ' ii ' Λ ^ w ' ' - - 
 
 prov.xxx.22. AiyuwTov ^ ίζοπεστείλεΐ' τους ττατίρας ημών πρώτον, 
 cons' ί "'i like '*■"' '^'' ^'ί' ^^^'^^ρψ ''^ aveyvωpΊσOη 1<ι>ση(ρ τοις α^ίλφοις 
 
 ίν. 23. νϋί. '- 'lij Χ ^ ' ' " Λλ ^ ^Γ' 
 
 46. αυτόν, και ψανερον εγεί'ετο τα» Ψαραω το "γενος 
 
 xx = Marki 39. ». , 1 4. ' 'Λ ^> 'Ι ^ d \ ' r'r 
 
 5"° "^.'j., i,^• ο"ί Ιωσϊ}^. αποστε/λος οε Ιωσιιψ μετίκαλίσατο [^ Α'^" 
 
 Γ.ηΙ! χχ'^'Ί'υ!' f wp] τον ττατε'οα αυτού, και ττασαν την '^ avyyivnav αυτοΰ 
 
 Luke Η rut f'ui "'/Ο^ / 1ζ ^h //0*Γ ^/Ο 
 
 oen'""vi ^^ r'^X"'? εpoojUT)<covτα7Γεvτε. ^'^ κα£ κατίρη Ιακωρ 
 ahril-only'. [ttC Α'/γυτΓΓΟί'] , icat ίτελευτησεν αυτός καΐ οι ' πατέρες 
 
 Gi!f. xW. 1. , _ Ιβ ^ k in ' -s? ^ < 1 ' 'ίι ' 
 
 bMarkvi. 14. ημών, και μετετευησαν εις 2,υ^εμ και ετευησαν εν τω 
 reft μνηματι ω ωνησατο Άρρααμ τιμής ^ apyvpiov 
 
 d ch χ. 32. 
 
 XX. 17. xxiv. 2.Ί only. Hos. xi. 1, 2. e ver. 3 reff. f = Rom.xiii. 9. Eph. i. 10. Deut. x. 22. 
 
 g — cli. ii 41 rrff. h = Luke ii. 61 al. Gen. xii.lu. i ch. iii. 2.i reft. k Heb. xi. 5. Sir. 
 
 xliv. Ifi. Dent, xxvii. 17. 1 =• John xix. 41, 42 al. m Luke xxiii. 53 al. Exod. xiv. 11. 
 
 mm attr., ch. i, 1 reff. η here only t. ο = ch. iv. 34 reff. ρ ch. iii. G. xx. 13. Exod. xxi. 32. 
 
 ff: txtBEal.— 12. recaira, with Η &c ff: σίτο?' 13Thl': fftrtta 15. 40. 100: txt ABCDE 
 36 al. — rec (v αιγυπτω {corrn, as more usual: Meyer thinks ίΐς αιγ. ίο have been a 
 gloss to ίϊ,α-πισταΧίν, and then to have found its way into the txt to the exclusion of the 
 original tv αιγ., but this is far-fetched), with DH &c Thl : t.\t ABCE 40 al. — 13. επι 
 τω d. D al. — ίγνωρίσθΐ) AB : ιγνωσθη al : agyiitus est e, recognitus est d, cognifus est v: 
 txt CDEH mss (nrly) Chr Thl al. — for fytvtro, ιγινηθη D. — rec bef ιωσηψ ins του 
 (added for clearness), with DH &c if: om BC al : αυτού for r. ιωη. AE al' ν arm. — 
 
 for (pavtpov, γνωστόν 46. — 14. αποστ ιωσηφ om 42. 137 [similar endings). — rec 
 
 τον τΓίΐτ. αυ. ιακωβ, with Η &c syrr ar-pol &c fF : txt ABCDE all ν copt sail arm. — om 
 ιηκωβ (which perhaps was the origl, and accounts for the transpositions) 15. 18. 36. 47'. 
 163 al ffith am demid arm Chr Oec Thl: om αυτού 177• — rec aft συγγ. ins αντου 
 [for explicitness), with (B.')DE &c vss : om A(B appy)CH all. — (e sil) &c. — φυχ. 
 aft TTtvTf D(fi'. 0. και t. ψ.)Η all vss: D s}t seem to join tv i. π. ψ. with κατιβη 
 foUg. — 15. rec κατιβη δε, with B(e sil) Η &c vss fl": κατεβ. (omg St) D al syr : txt ACE 
 all V Syr ieth al {from similarity of και κατ., και dropped out as in D, and then δε 
 was supplied). — tig αιγ. om Β (as superfluous ? or perhaps it was a gloss from the marg. 
 Tischendorf excludes it from the txt: but the authority is too weak). — aft αντος, add 
 £κει Ε Syr. — 16. μετηχθησην D. — εΐ' τω μν. om 137• — rec ο, with Η al Thl^ al (change 
 to simplfy constr) : txt ABCDE all Thl'. — ο πατήρ ημών αβ. Ε Bed-gr (Scholz, Lachm). 
 — rec εμμορ, with Ε &c Thl' (comm : txt 1 and 2, as 113, εμορ) : txt ABCDH all 
 copt (ψωρ sah) Chr. — tv συχ. BC al sah arm: του ερ σ. AE 27• 2ί). 40 al tol copt syr: 
 txt DH all (et Sychem d) ν seth ar-pol Chr Oec Thl (the varr arise from this συχ. 
 
 this speech. χό•?'•*' ■«• σοφ.] No κονταπ€'ντ€ : — reckoning, as it appears, cu- 
 
 Hendiadys : ' favour,' so that he was ac- riously enough, among the sons of Joseph, 
 
 ceptable to Pharaoh (see reff.) : and ' wis- Joseph himself, and Jacob ; for these are 
 
 dom,' so that Ph. consulted him and followed required to make up the nine, according to 
 
 his suggestion, especially in the important their ver. 20. And similarly in Exod. i. 5, 
 
 case recorded Gen. xli. 3iJ. κατ- and in Alex. Deut. x. 22. — With regard to 
 
 εστησ€ν] viz. Pharaoh: a change of subject : the various attempts to solve the difficulty 
 
 see ref. Gen. 14. Iv ψυχαϊς εβδο- (66 +12 wives — [Joseph and his wife, and 
 
 μιηκοΐ'τατΓ€'ντ€] In the Hebrew text, Gen. judah's wife who died in Canaan] =: 75, 
 
 xlvi. 27. Exod. i. 5. Deut. x. 22, seie/iiy Seb. Schmid and Wolf: — that Stephen 
 
 souls are reckoned, viz. sixty-six born of spoke of those who were invited, — Moses 
 
 Jacob, Jacob himself, Joseph, and his two of those who went, Krebs and Loesner : — 
 
 sons born in Egypt. So also Josephus, Antt. that πάντες should be read for πεντί, 
 
 ii. 7• 4 ; vi. 5. 6. But the LXX, whom Beza :— &c.), see above on vv. 6, 7• — The 
 
 Stephen follows, insert in Gen. xlvi. 20 an remarks of Jerome are curious : — he is 
 
 account of the children and grandchildren arguing, on Gen. 1. c, that the number 
 
 of Manasseh and Ephraim, five in number: really was seventy, — and adds, ' Quod si e 
 
 and in ver. 27, read viiii δι Ιωσήφ οι contrario nobis id opponitur, quomodo in 
 
 γενόμειοι αί•τφ iv γι) Αιγ., ψυχ.ιί ίνν'εα. Actibus Apostolorura in condone Stephani 
 
 πάσαι ψυγαί οίκου Ίακωβ αϊ ίίςίλθοϋσαι dicatur ad pojiulum, septuaginta quinque 
 
 μετά Ιακώβ εις ΑίγυτΓτον, ψυχαΐ €βδομη- animas ingressas esse JEgyptum, facilis ex-
 
 12-20. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 65 
 
 τταοα των υιών 
 
 Κμμωρ του Συγίμ 
 riyyitiv ο χρόνος της "ίτταγγίλ/ας 
 
 Αβραάμ, 
 
 18 > " 
 άχρι 
 
 Ιωσηφ. 
 
 ' ' ~ ά ' ' 
 
 •γεί'ος ημών 
 
 ου 
 
 10 ■^ 
 ούτος 
 
 ο θίος τω 
 ev AiyvTTTU), 
 
 1 ./Λ ν 
 
 ουκ Ί,Οίΐ τον 
 
 (1 
 
 εκακωσίν τους 
 )>) ' Έκθετα 
 tv ω καΐξ)ω eyίvvηuη 
 
 ' '^ καθώς o£ ί =Rev. uLig. 
 
 , Γ -(here only?) 
 
 lal. 
 
 ωμoAoyησiv 
 
 ης 
 αος και ίπληουνοη Dent, χχ 
 ανέστη βασιλεύς 
 
 " TTOiiif τα ^ βοεφ 
 σΟαι. 20 .η 
 
 / \ ν - Matt xiT.7. 
 
 κατασοφισαμεΐ'ος το wch. viz. 
 πατέρας Ιημων], τον ^^«'"οΐ.ίχ. 
 
 ' - k • ^ ν 1 ν - 31. χϋ. 24. 
 
 αυτωι^ etc το μη ί,ωονονει- see Gen. 
 
 'Λ Λ/Τ - >"5• '- ^^''" "'■ 
 
 i^ijuij Μωυσλΐς Kat ην "«στίίος ? ^j.jll'^.^g• "^^^^ 
 
 Heb iii. 13. Jubxxxii. 11. ζ — ch. τ. .3rt, 37. ExoD.i. 8. a = ch. ii. 40 al. b here only. Exod. 
 
 1.10. Juaith V. 11. X. ly. c=chiF. 3ti. M^rk vii. 2t!. Esth. ii.IO. d "er. Η rcff. e - ver. 
 
 15 al. f - Rom. i. 24. vli 3. ch.iii. 12. g ■= Matt. iii. 3 |. v. 3Θ. Heb. xii. 13. Kev. xxi. 5. 
 
 h Luke ii. 12, 16. xviii. Ifi t? 1 MaL-c. i. fil. i here only t. (:Κτι^<;κοι = ver. 21. Eur Phoen. 2ft. yEl. 
 
 Var. Hist. ii. 7. Philo, Vjt. Moys. ρ 604. } 3. eKiitair ~ Wi^d. xi. 14. k ch. iii. li(. Rom. i. 11, 20 al. 
 
 1 Luke xvii. 33. 1 Tim. vi. 13 (var. read.) only. Exod. i. 17, 18, 22 al. in here only, h αΰτ. τ. κ., Luke 
 
 xiii. 1. ei/ έκεί'ι/. τ. κ., Matt. xi. 25. η Heb. xi. 23 only. Exod. ii. 2. 
 
 having been mistaken for a place, as above). — 17. ως de Α,—ηγγισεν Β. — ην 12R. — rec 
 ωμοσιν, with Η and most mss vss ff : (ττηγγειλαΓο DE Bed-gr tol : txt ABC 15. 3(i ν 
 (confes.ms erai .• conslituerat ms,). {The varr have arisen from the unusual sense of 
 ωμο\.)—1%. rec αχρις (corrn), with AEH &c ff : txt (B.')CD &c ThP.— aft trtuoi: ins 
 fTT ηιγνπΓον ABC all ν [in yEf/i/pto) Syr syr-marg all : αιγυπτου 40 (corrn from the 
 LAX, Exod i. 8) : oin DEH all arr .syr Chr Oec Thl. — for ηζίΐ τον, (μνησθη του DE.— 
 19. for ούτος, και D. — ημών om BD {as unnecessary ? or has it been inserted from ver 
 15 ^-c.•') al : ins ACE v. — rec r. it. εκθίτα {corrn), with DE : txt ABC : ίκριπτοιιμίρα 
 θετά 13.3. — ζωογ. αυτά 43 sah : τα αροενα Ε. — 20. for αστ., κεχαριτωμενυς 133. — 
 
 cnsatio est. Νοη enim debuit sanctus Lucas, 
 qui ipsius (istius ?) historiae scriptor est, in 
 gentes Actuum Apostolorum volumen emit- 
 tens, contrarium aliquid scribere adversus 
 earn scripturara, quae jam fuerat gentibus 
 divulgata.' — Philo, de Migr. Abr. p. 419, 
 mentions both numbers (reading 75 in Gen. 
 and 70 in Deut., see above) and gives alle- 
 gorical reasons for both. 16.] μΐ6τ- 
 ετί'θησαν, viz. αυτός και οι πατίρες ήμώΐ', 
 not the latter only, — as Kuin., Olsh., to 
 evade part of the difficulty of the verse. — 
 The facts, as related in the O. T., were 
 these: Jacob, dying in Egypt, was (Gen. 1. 13) 
 taken into the land of Canaan, and buried 
 in the cave of Macpelah, before Mamre (on 
 the rest of the ver. see below) : Joseph, 
 dying also in Egypt, was taken in a coffin 
 (Gen. 1. 2fi) at the exodus (Exod. xiii. Ii)), 
 and finally buried (Josh. xxiv. 32) at She- 
 chem. Of the burial of the other patriarchs 
 the sacred text says nothing, but, by the 
 gpecitication in Exod. xiii. l!i, leaves it to 
 be inferred that they were buried in Egypt. 
 Josephus, Antt. ii. 8. 2, relates that they 
 were taken and buried in Hebron, and adds, 
 B. J. iv.!>. 7> '^t' i^"i '■" μνημεία μέχηιτοΰ 
 νυν εν rj/uf Ty πολίχνη {Hebron) δίίκνυ- 
 ται, ττάΐ'υ καΧώς μαρμάρου και ψιλοτι/ιως 
 είργασμίνα: — the Rabbinical traditions 
 mentioned by Wetst. and Liglitf. report 
 them to have been buried in Si/chem : and 
 Jerome (tlpitaph. Paulte), relating the ])il- 
 grimages of Paula to the sacred places, says : 
 " transivit Hichem, .... atque inde diver- 
 VoL. II. 
 
 tens vidit duodecim Patriarcharum sepul- 
 chra." These traditions probably Stephen 
 followed; and, in haste or inadvertence, 
 classed Jacob with the rest. ω ωνη- 
 
 σοτο Αβραάμ] The burying-place which 
 Abraham bought was not at Sychem, but 
 (Gen. xxiii. 3—20) at Hebron, and was 
 bought of Ephron the Hittite. It was 
 Jacob who (Gen. xxxiii. 19) bought a field 
 where he had pitched his tent, near Sychem, 
 of the children ofHamnr, Shechem's father: 
 and no mention is made of its being for a 
 burying-place. The two incidents are cer- 
 tainly here confused .• and no ingenuity of 
 the commentafors has ever devised an escape 
 from the inference. The mention of a few 
 suchattemptsraaysuffice. — (l)The omission 
 of 'Αβραήμ (Beza, Valck., Kuin., Schott , 
 al.) against all MS evidence, except Ε (see 
 var. read ) where the change to ο πατήρ 
 ί'ίμων has evidently been designed, to insert 
 an ambiguous term, and so escape the diffi- 
 culty, — and against the constr. also ; for 
 after μετετ'εθησαν, Ιακώβ could hardly 
 be the subject to ώνίισατο: — (2) render- 
 ing, against all grammar, while omitting 
 Αβραάμ, ιονήσατο 'emptumerat' (Kuin.) : 
 — (3) construing 'Αβραάμ, Abrahnniides, 
 i.e. Jacob (Surenhus. al.), &c. &c. — The 
 fact of the mistake occurring whore it does, 
 will be far more instructive to the Chris- 
 tian student than the most ingenious solu- 
 tion of the difficulty could be, — if it teaches 
 him fearlessly and honestly to recogni/o 
 the phenomena presented by the text of
 
 66 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 VII. 
 
 ο — Jonah iii. 3. 
 
 2 Cor χ 4. 
 
 see Geii. χ. it. 
 
 xxiii.K. XXX. 
 
 8(Hrh.) 
 
 Liikei. lf>. 
 
 2 Cor. i.l2. 
 
 Jamf s ii. Γ>. 
 
 Winer, {37, 3. 
 ρ ch. XXII. 3 
 
 only t. Wisd. 
 
 Tii.4. 
 q here only t• 
 
 see ver. lU 
 
 reff. constT., 
 
 Hark ix. 28 
 
 al. 
 Γ = here only. 
 
 Exoil ii. 1ft. 
 t — ver. .^. ell. 
 
 εω. ος 
 
 21 
 
 πατρός 
 Φαραώ και 
 
 " ϊπαι^ίυΟη 
 ουνατυς 
 
 ^ ανβτξ)α(ρη μήνας τρίΐς ev τ(ο οίκω του abcde 
 (κτίϋίντα οέ αυτόν ' α}'ίί\ατο αυτόν 1] θυ-γατηο 
 ' ανίυρίχρατο αυτόν four»; ε/ς υιον. και 
 
 Μ(ϋυσ7;ς ίν πασ»? (τοψια Αι-γυπτιων, r)v οε 
 
 V Λογοις και ερ-γοις αυτού. ^ ως οε εττΛη- 
 
 ' - .S » / ν ' '(Ο ' ^ ^ 
 
 ρουτο αυτω τίσσίρακονταίτης χρόνος, αΐ'ερί) εττί t?)u 
 
 καρ^ίαν αυτοΰ ^ ΐττισκίχΡασθαι τους αδελφούς αύτοΰ τους 
 
 "υιούς Ισραήλ. και ιδών τίνα ^ α^ικυυμίνον '' ημυνατο 
 
 ' (1 ' ' d ' ϊ' 
 
 Kot ετΓοίί/σεν εκ:οί/νΐ)σιν τω 
 
 τον AiyuTTTiov. ίνομιϊ,(ν δε ^ συνύναι τους αδελφούς 
 
 / f ' r 
 
 καταπονουμίνω, τταταί,ας 
 
 xiix. ι;. " ' 
 
 4 King* iv. 
 
 1 al. 
 
 — ch xxii. 3 al. Prov. xxix 17. ν Luke xxiv. 19. Jcr. xxxir. 19. w -= Luke xxi. 24. ver. 30. Gen. 
 
 xxT. 24. X ch. xiii. 18 only. y Luke xxiv. 38, ti/. Isa. IxT.lfi. Jer. iii. 16, έπ». (1 Cur. ii. 9.) 
 
 ch.xv. 36. Judi; XT. 1. a ch. X. 36 reff. b 2 Cor. vii. 12. I.s. x. 2U. c here only. 
 
 Ux. 16. d Lnkcxviii. 7. Micah v. 15. 
 
 xsvi 31 I, from Zech. xiii, 7. ElOD. ii. 12. 
 Exod, xxxvi. 1. 
 
 e2Pet. li 7 only t• 2 Mace, viii 
 S abs.. Mate. xiii. 13, 15 1|. \τ. b 
 
 . 2alex. f = Matt, 
 
 n, Matt, χτί 12. χτϋ. 13. 
 
 rec aft πατρός ins αντον, with DE al vss Thl : om ABCH all Chr. — 21. (κτιθίντος ce 
 αντυν ABCD al ν {corrn for constr) : txt EH all : αντον (2nd) om al Chr Thl : add 
 a inatre sua Syr-ms : a populo sua Syr: πάρα (nf E) τον ποταμον DE syr*. — rec 
 ανίΐλίτο, with 1 all ff : t.\t ABCDEH all. — αντον om all. — και om D'. — avtBpt\\jtv 96. — 
 avTov om 34^. 180. — for ιαντη, αντη D' 180: ti' αυτή 13. — ας om Β. — 22. rec om fi' 
 (as unnecessary), with Η al vss Chrj Thl : ins ACE 55 al ν (ms) copt sah aeth syr Origj Bas 
 Thdrt : πάσης σοφίας Β: πασαν την συφιαν D. — rt (corrn) DE-gr vss: txt AB(e sil) 
 CH niss (appy) e copt Thl : και ην al. — rec bef (py. ins f j•, with E-gr &c ν aeth syr : om 
 ABCDH all e copt Chr Thl (iv (ρ-^οις κ. λογ. αντκυ Β), — rec aft ίργ. om αντον {as 
 unnecessary), with Η &c ar pol syr ff, but ins ABCDE all ν Syr copt sah al. — 23. rec 
 τίσσαρ. as usual, with qu .' txt AC. — for ίττι, εις Η. — το•' ίπιπκ. Ε 180. — τοί'ς- (2nd) οηι 
 Β. — 24. aft aciK. add tic του γενονς αντον (αντ. om D) DE Syr ar-erp syr*.- — ημνητο 
 D'. — aft aiy. add (from Exod ii. 12, LXX) και tKpvtptv αντον tv τη αμμω D a;th. — 
 25. Ενο/ζιζον 13. — αντον (1st) om BC ν (am demid, not tol) al. — rec αντ. σωτ. (corrn?) 
 
 Scripture, instead of wresting them to suit 
 a preconceived theory. 17.] καθώς, 
 
 not 'w/ien' (as E. V., Beza, Kuin.), but 
 ' as,' ' in proportion as.' See ref. 
 19. τοϋ irowtv] ' so that they exposed,' 
 see reff. Meyer maintains that the inf. of 
 the purpose is not to be dej)arted from, — 
 'in order that they might expose:' but I 
 do not see that this meaning would express 
 the fact. The purpose is afterwards ex- 
 pressed, els TO, K.T.X. 20 άστ. τω 
 θ€ώ] add to reff. (Meyer), Hesiod, Op. 825, 
 αναίτιος ni*i(»'aroi<Tij',-^and ^sch. Agam. 
 352, θίοίς άναμπλήκητος. The former 
 expression seems borrowed from tradition : 
 Josephus calls the infant Moses παΤΰα 
 μορφή θείον. — Phil, de vit. Mos. p. 604, 
 says, γ^vι>ιjθ^ις ovv 6 πα^ς ίνθνς οψιΐ' iv- 
 εφ>J^'tv άστίιοτίραν η κατ' Ίόιώτην. 
 22.] That Moses was instructed in the wis- 
 dom of the Egyptians, is not found in the 
 O. T., but derived from tradition, and fol- 
 lowing as a matter of course from his adopted 
 station as the son of Pharaoh's daughter. 
 This wisdom of the Eyypt'ians, celebrated 
 by so many ancient writers (see Wetst. ad 
 loc.) consisted mainly in natural philosophy, 
 medicine, and mathematics, — and its teach- 
 
 ers were the priests. Phil. vit. Mos. p. G06, 
 enters into minute detail: αριθμούς μίν ovv 
 κ. γίωμίτριαν, κ, την τ( ριθμικην κ. άρ- 
 μονικήν κ. μίτρικην θιωρίαν, κ. μουσικ/}!' 
 τι)ν ηϊιμπασαν, ΰιά τε χρήσεως οργάνων, 
 κ. Χόγων των εν ταΐς τϊχναις, κ. ^ιεΚόΟυις 
 τοπικωτϊραις, Αιγυπτίων α'ι λόγιοι παρ- 
 έδοσαν, κ. προςέτι των δια συμβόλων 
 ψιλυσοφιαν, ην εν τοΙς λεγομέιοις Ίερο'ις 
 γράμμασιν επιδείκνυται, κ. διά της των 
 ζώων άποδυχϊΊν, α και Θέων τιμαΊς γευαί- 
 ρονσι. την δε αλλην εγκύκλιον παιδειαΐ' 
 "Ελληνες ΐδίδασκοί'• οΊ δ' εκ των πλησιο- 
 χώρωί', τά τ' ' Ασσνρίων γράμματα, κ. 
 την των ονροΐ'ίοιν 'Καλδα'ϊκήν επιστημην. 
 δυνατός iv λόγοις] So Josephus 
 calls Moses πλήβεσιν ομιλείν πιθανώτα- 
 τυς, but late in his course, during the 
 journey through the wilderness ; — when 
 the divine Spirit, as the book of Deuter- 
 onomy abundantly testifies, had turned his 
 ' slowness of speech ' into the most fervid 
 eloquence. That he was so thus early, 
 during his Egyptian course, was probably 
 rejiorted by tradition, but hardly seems to 
 agree with Exod. iv. 10 — 16. 23. 
 
 Τ€θ•σαρακονταίτής χρ-] μέγας γενόμινυς 
 Μ., Exod. ii. 11,LXX. The exact age was
 
 21—30. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 67 
 
 αυτοΰ on ο Θίος δ(α γλάρος αυτού ' ^ιΒωσιν σωτηρ'ιαν fp^^\^'Jfhi^f' 
 
 ' - , ' J^ ' S - 26 " ί' ι * ' ' ' 4ιι rtlid IMS- ' 
 
 αυτοις οι of ου συν)ΐκαι>. τΐ] of εττιουσπ ημίοα sim. M^rk 
 
 ωψυη αυτοις μαγ^ομίνοις, και συνηλασεν αυτούς fiC k = Lukei 7ΐ 
 
 '' '^■'λ"> '^λ-ι'' '".ο• ''^ ~ Jos. Anit. ii. 
 
 Βΐρΐ)\ιην αττων Λΐ'όοίς αοεΛφοι εστε υμίΐς ινατι αοίκειτε » 7. 
 αλλήλους ', ' ο tt αόικωι> τον ^'πλησίον απωσατο αυτόν ϊ^^ ^'j Υ^'• 
 
 '^rp' \r ' " >s<> ^ ' l' xxi- 18. Acts 
 
 ίίπων ι ις σε κατάστησα' αηνοντα και όικαστην εώ only, see 
 
 f - 98 ^ t ' Λ - \ \j ' \ U t\ ' Γ ' -\ "''"'■ ''■• " 
 
 η^ας ; ''^ ι^ϊ] ανελειι» με συ υελεις ον τρόπον «''f'^^^C „,1."''ί'"3%β8• 
 
 ν /)\ '' Λ ' ' . 29 ''j, ί^ Λ/Τ - W » - η her'eoulvt. ' 
 
 •χ^σες τον Λιγυττηον; i<puyev οε ΐνΐωυσ)}ς ει» τω 2Macciv26. 
 
 \ \ ' / \ » / ν ' ' ~ Λ/Γ ^ ^ "^ σι/ιελίίσαΓ 
 
 λο-γω τούτω, και iyiviTO παροικ^ος εν yrj Μαοιομ, ου τ.< βηοία, 
 t , «\(>/ 80'ζΛ Λ' »- / ^*" *^y• '• 
 
 ί^ίννησίν υιούς ουο. και πληρωυεντων ετών τέσσερα- 4, ΐ4. συκ- 
 
 κοίτα ωψυη αυτω εν τη ερημω του ορούς 2^ινα ayytΛoς «κωι- e.s 
 
 Pint. Cses. ρ. 728 (Wet.st.). ο Mntt. ix. 4. Psa. ii. 1. ρ Matf. xix. 1!) al. Exi>d. ii. 13. 
 
 q Ter. 3» uh xjii. 46 al. L. and P. Ezek. xliii, !». r ver. 10 reff. s Lokr xii 14 only. Exod ii. 14. 
 
 t = Mntt ii 16al. Exod. xxi. 29. u cli. i. 11 reff. vjohniv.52. H.-b xiii. 8. Gen.xix.34. 
 
 ■w =■ yun.v'iT. Johnxyi.au. IPet. ii. 12. Hel>. li. 18. χ ■= Lake i. 29. ch. v. 5 al. y ver. 6 reff. 
 
 ζ = ver. 23. 
 
 with EH &c: txt ABCD 9f» (al.') ν copt Fulg.— oi δ. και ου συν. 46.-26. for δι, τε 
 A(B.')CD2(rori D' d)H all Syr sth al Chr Oec Thl : txt Β (e sil) vss.— aft μαχ. 
 {•t'og D'-gr) ins και ίΐδίν ηντους αδικανντας D'. — συΐ'η\\ασσα' BCD (συΐ'ηλλασιΐ' Η) 
 al ν {recoaciliabal) e sail seth al : txt AE-gr &c vss fF {the varr appear to be occasioned 
 by explanations of the oriyl συνηΧαπιν). — αυνη\\. αυτοις C'H. — aft ffrrt om νμιις (as 
 unnecessary) ABC (rt Troiurt αιδρις αδίλφαΐ iva τι αδικίΐται tic ολλ/;λους• D, ίις 
 om D'•') Ε all sah syr Chr : t.^^t Η &c syr (the other vss transpose it) Till Oec. — a ντον 
 om46: τούτον 38. 113. — 27. κπης D. — for K<ti, η Ε vss. — rec (φ ημών {from LXX, 
 Exod ii. 14), with ABCH all Thl• (t.\t comm) : txt DE &c. — 28. ίχβες (B>)CD al : txt 
 A(B?)EH al. — 29. D has .... (Bornemann conj rorf : adque ila d) ίφυγαδινση' Μωυ- 
 σης : ίφνγαδίντίν δί Μωυσ)/ΐ' Ε. — for ου, και 28 (20 Mill) Syr ar-erp. — δυω D. — 
 30. και μίτα ταύτα πΧησθ^ντων {πΧηοοιθίντων D-) αυτυι (om D- : ins also Syr ar-erp) 
 tTi] {ίτων D^) D^ — nirai liiO. — rec nyy. κυρίου {natural addn aft αγγ., and here occa- 
 sioned by E.vod iii. 2, LXX), with DE : txt ABC 81 (al.') ν copt sah. — ττυοι φλογός 
 
 traditional, see Lightf. . άνε'βη] No 
 
 nominative (as διαληγισμός, Kuin.) must 
 be supplied : it is impersonal ; see retf. 
 24.] τον ΑίγΰτΓτιον, from the his- 
 tory being so universally known, that the 
 agent in the άίικι'α would be readily sup- 
 plied : see Winer, § 65. 7• 25.] The 
 present, δίδωσιν, sets forth the work of 
 liberation as already begun by the act just 
 related, see reff. — Here we have again the 
 resistance to the Holy Spirit hinted : see 
 ver. 51, and note on ver. 2. 26.] 
 avToIs, ' to them,' two of them, taken as 
 representing his brethren the children of 
 Israel. <τννήλασ€ν, not imperf., ' he 
 endeavoured to unite ,• ' the aorist will not 
 bear this sense : nor is it needed : — the act, 
 on Moses' part, was complete ; -not ^ he 
 would have set them at otie ' (E. V.), but, 
 ' he set them at one.' avSpes άδ£λφοί 
 should be taken together, as in Gen. xiii. 8, 
 iii'W()w7roi άοίλφοι ίσμίν ήμιίς. — See also 
 ch. ii. 14 (De W.). 27.] The further 
 progress of resistance to the Spirit on the 
 part of Israel. 29. Μαδιάμ] So 
 LXX, E-fod. ii. 15, for jno. Winer (RWB. 
 ' Midian ') supposes this Midiaii to liave 
 
 been a nomad detachment of the more 
 settled Midianites, — which at that time was 
 encamped in the neighbourhood of Sinai 
 and Horeb. For Jethro, Moses' father-in- 
 law, is not found there, in Exod. xviii. 1 ff., 
 but comes to vi^it Moses from a distance. 
 See also Num. x. 29 ft'. -υΙους δυο] 
 
 E.xod ii. 15; iv. 20; xviii. 3. 30.] 
 
 It. τ£σ•σ.] "This follows from the tradition 
 of ver. ^3, combined with Exod. vii. 7> 
 ' Moses in palatio Pharaonis degit xt. annos, 
 in Midiane xl annos, et ministravit Israel 
 XL annos.' Bereshith Rabba, f. 115. 3. 
 (Mey.) Σινά] Horeb, Exod. iii. 1. 
 
 But both were points of the same mountain 
 range, and the names were convertibly used. 
 In Exod., Levit., and Num., the law is said 
 to have been given from Sinai ; in Deut. 
 from Horeb. ' The desert of Mount Sina' 
 is the desert in which Mt. S. is situated. 
 So ' the Peak of Derbyshire,' originnlly no 
 doubt some single hill, has come to mean 
 the whole district in which that hill is 
 situated. αγγ£λος] Here, as con- 
 
 tinually in the (). T., the angel benrs the 
 authority and presence of (iod llimselt: 
 which angel, since God yireth not His 
 2
 
 hih. xvi. 23. 
 Hfb. xii. 21 
 
 68 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. VIT. 
 
 * 'I'YhesZ'i.'s*' ^^ '' ψλογί πνρος άβατου. ^^ ό δε Μωνσης ίδών abode 
 
 reft l.sa. Ο'Λ'•/ *■(!" . ' ^^''-t" ^ 
 
 xxix.ii. huavuaLev το opoua προί'βρνομεΐ'ου οε αυΓου κατα- 
 
 bMHikxii2«l. „ 7. , y ι .,, ν <• η ^ - / 
 
 ccon"ir,'i!nk.- ''"'ϊ'^"' *" εγεί'ίτο φωΐ'η κυρίου Κγω ο iJioc των ττατεοω)/ 
 
 νϋ !ΐ. ' Jiule 32 ' /J "■ ' Λ /a ^ ' 'Τ ^ ' Ί ' (Q 1ι ■' 
 
 Ter.it>, xeii. σου, Ο ϋίος ApjJaOjU /cat Ισαάκ και Ιακωρ. (ΐ'τρομος 
 
 Cyr. ill. 1, :iS. , „ , , /^ C _ οο τ 
 
 AiVs^in'i "' ^* ■νεΐΌ/<εΐ'ος• Μωυσί^ς ου /c ίτοΛμα κατανοησαι. ίΐπίν 
 
 xAV. !ΐ)!'οέη. δε αυτω ο κύριος ' Λυσον τυ •* υπυόημα των ποοων σου* 
 
 ^^■"""ίίί'χΓβ ** 7°Ρ τόπος ί<ρ ω ^στηκας γη άγια εστπ'. ιοων 
 
 Ge^. χΊ'ί'ί.'ύ. είδον Τ7)ί' κάκωσιν του λάου ^ιου του εν Λιγυπτω, κοι 
 
 g-J.hnx.35. „ „, „ , _ „ , „ 'Ο ο '<ί Λ ' η 
 
 '"•'• *ο•,'•*^ του στίνα^μου αυτών τικουσα, και κατ^μην εςεΛίσΐ/πι 
 
 Χ1Ι1 32. Gen. Ι '^ ' ' ι ' ^ 
 
 αυτούς' και νυν '' δεΰρο αποστείλω σε εις Α'/γυπτοί'. 
 
 τούτον τον Μωυσί)ν υν ηρνϊ)σπντο ειποντίς ιις σε 
 
 κατίστησίν αρνοιτο κπ< ο(καστί/ν , τούτον ο ϋεος 
 
 Ι(> II Λίκ. j.cd. « ^t^ ^''Λ u^ ^''λ 
 
 xiii.ys. αρχοντπ και λυτρωτην απίσταλκίν συν χειρι αγγέλου 
 
 Lnkfxv. 22. Gen. χίτ. 2.S. k Heb. ri. 14, from Gen. χχϋ 17. Exod. iii. 7 al.fr. 1 here only. 
 
 Exiid. 1. c. Thuiyd. vii. 82 init. m Rom. viii. 2(! only. Exod. ii. 24. η = Exnd. 1. c. Gen xi. a. 
 
 = eh. xxiii 27. Ter. 10 reft'. ρ = Rev. xvii. 1. ixi. 9. q = Matt. x. 33 al. r ver. lU refT. 
 
 s ver 27 reft'. t here only. Poa. xviii. 14. η σρι/— 1 Cor. xr. ID (έκ = here only. Num. 
 
 XV. 2ϋ h1. see ver. 25). 
 
 ACE all V Syr: txt B(e sil)DH &c vss Thl al (πυρ. <p\. is the Val reading, φΧ. πυρ. 
 the Alexin Exod iii. 2)• — 31. ιζων om 13. — rec (ΰαυμαπι, with A (om το op.) B(e sil)C 
 &c vss Thl- (c07-rn to historical tense) : txt DEH all Aug Thl'. — και ττοοςιρ. αντ. κ. κατ. 
 D'. — ο κύριος ttntv αυτω Xtywv D Syr aeth. — rec aft κνρ. ins προς αυτοί', ■with C 
 (addn): om AB all am demid copt arm syr.- — for κυρ., φωί'η ίκ του ovparov λίγουσα 
 Ε Bed-gr : κνρ. om 95'. — 32. ε^ω θίος C : tyw (ΐμη θ. Ε (sum ν). — ο bef (hoc (2nd) om 
 C — rec ins ο θιος bef ισ. and ιακ. with D(o twice om D)EH aeth al Thl al : om ABC 
 15. 2β. 37• 40. 96 ν (ms) syrr copt sah arm {the insertion has prob been to suit LXX, 
 which D does still more closely by omg the artt).- — 33. ο bef κυρ. om A al. — ο ΰιος Ε 
 vss: θίος 7ί5• 90 : om ar-pol : κοι tyii'tTo φωνή προς αυτόν D. — λυσαι D^ 142.— aft 
 υτΓοί. ins σον ίκ C : ίκ C^E all Bed-gr syrr ar-erp aeth. — σου τ. π. Β. — rec ιν ω (corrn 
 to suit LXX), with Ε d v: ου D' : txt ABCD^ : add συ C {συν C) lect 13 arm.— 
 34. Kf(( i("(.<i.' yap ϋ {ίΐΰων C al). — τους στίναγμυνς 73. — for αυτωΐ', αυτού BD al : txt 
 ACEH mss (appy) vss (nrly) ff. — ακ/;κ•οα D 9. — row (ζ. 95. — νυνι C. — rec αποστεΧω, 
 ■with Η al Thl {here, though απυστηΧω is accordg to LXX, the corrn to -ί\ω was so 
 very obvious, that I have retained the more unusual form, esp as the authorities in its 
 favour are so strong) : txt ABCDE (-ιλω Ε) 69'. 105. 163 al Chr.— 35. aft ίικαστ. ins 
 f^ ιίμι,ιν (CD), or (φ ΐ)μας (Ε), CDE all tol Syr arr copt aeth arm syr* Chr Thl {corrn 
 to suit LXX and ver 27) : txt AB(e sil)H all ν Thl'.— bef αρχ. ins και BDE al syr: 
 om A{apxi]yov A 38. 113)CH vss if.— rec απιστίΐΧίν, with CH &c ff (-iXtv C) : txt 
 
 glory to another, must have been the great Josh. v. 15. Putting off the sandals was a 
 
 Angel of the covenant, the V2E "^i^O of Isa. mark of reverence. The priests performed 
 
 Ιχνά.ϋ,' the Angel of His Presence,'— Xhe all their ministrations barefooted. The 
 
 Son of God. See below on ίίς ίιαταγας Arabs to this day continue the practice: 
 
 ay-f'iXMV, ver. 53. — Stier remarks, that this they always enter their mosques barefooted. 
 
 second appearance of God, to Moses (see Among the Pythagoreans it was a maxim, 
 
 ver. 2), introduces the legal dispensation, άννπόίητος Οϋί κ. προσκΰνίΐ, lambhch. 
 
 as the /?>•«/, to Abraham, the patriarchal.— vit. Pythag. 105 (Mey.). So Juvenal, Sat. 
 
 The readings of the LXX, as well as of our vi. 158, Observant ubi festa mero pede 
 
 text, vary between rvpl φΧογός and ^λογί sabbata reges.'— On the sanctity of the 
 
 ττυρός. The Heb. is i.\^n2?3.- Theconstr. place, Chrys. remarks,— ούίο/ίοϋ vnbc, κ. 
 
 is, 'in the fiery flame (or. 'the flaming fire') ότόπυς uγιoςτy ίπιφανπα κ. ίνψγίκ} τοϋ 
 
 of a bush.' 32.] The order of Exod. ypK^rov. 34.] Ιδών eiSov, LXX. 
 
 iii. 6, is here somewhat varied. The com- Emphatic, to express the 'π'ί*-; nsT of the 
 
 mand to put off the shoe was given on the Heb., as often elsewhere. The instances 
 
 approach of Moses, and before these words commonly cited from the classics, of the 
 
 werespoken. ούκΙτόλμ. καταν. = ίΰλσ- phrase φίΰγιον ίκφίύγίΐν, Herod, v. 95. 
 
 βίΊτο κατψβΧίχΡαι, LXX. 33.] See Aristoph. Acharn. 177. Nub. 108. Eur.
 
 irk 
 
 22 
 
 Mark 
 
 31—39. nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 69 
 
 του ^ οώθίντος αυτο) 6V τίι ^ βατω. ούτος " ίζίΐνο-νεΐ' '"h. η. sreff. 
 
 αυτούς ^ ποίησης '' τ'ίοατα και ^ σημίΐα εν yy AiyviTTW και ^xvfao'. c'h 
 ev "^ epvOoa OuXaaaij και ev tyi ί^ημω errj τζσσαξ>ακοντα. y = ch.ii.22 
 ' ούτος ίστιν ο Μωυσης ο ειττας τοις νιοις Ισ^»αϊ}λ zdr^'i'. ig „ 
 ΠοοφίίΓΗΐ' υμιν αναστησίΐ ο θεός εκ: των αοελφίϋν ύμιυΐ' a Heb. xi. 29 
 
 r . / oo τ / , f . . / . - 1 • ; ""'^ Exod. 
 
 '^ ως εμε. ούτος ίστιν ο " γείΌ/αεί'ος εν Γί^> £'<^'<^^r/ff/a bi'ch. π. 22 
 
 > ->/ ς£ \ -.,» --ν..- »-. reti. Deut. 
 
 εν ΤΎ1 Βοημω μετά του ayyeAov του λαΛουντος αυτω εν χνϋ. is, is. 
 
 „ <■' 1 "^ ί _^ ~ _ ι ι _ ^ ^ ^ , L c = cliiii. 22 
 
 τω όρει Σιΐ'α icat των 7ΓαΓε^)ων ϊίμων, ος * εοεςατο λογία ^^,Ί?";^ ,„ 
 
 g ν- h •> - ' ~ 39 ' ' 'ί1'\ i ' ' i XX. 18. Mi 
 
 C.'t'i'ra οουναι rjutv, ω oi»a: ηοίλησαν υπήκοοι yt- xvi lu. 
 
 ' D ' / ' - •λ Λ V k > ' > 1' ', Ί.Γ/"-^'^• 
 
 νεσυαι οι πατέρες ημών, άλλα απωσαντο και εστράφησαν „oteT. 
 
 e = 2Cor.vi.l. fRnm.iii.2. Heb.v.l2. 1 Prt. iv. 11 only. Nam. xxiv. 4. IR al. g = John vi. 51. Heb. 
 
 X. 2U. 1 Pet. i. 23. see Ps. cxviii. 50. h = ver. 8. th. xlii 20, 21 ul. Ezek. xx 11 anrt psss. i 2 Cor. 
 
 ii. 9. Phil. ii. 8. L P. Pro<f. iv. 3. k ver. 27. ch. xiii. 46. Rom.xi.l, 2. 1 Tim. i. 19. L.P. Jer. ii. 37. 
 
 1 »er. 42. see Lam. i. 20. Num. xir. 4. 
 
 ABDE all.-rec iv χ. with Η al d Chr Thl: txt ABCDE 5. 8. 13. 40. 81. 96. 180 al ν 
 
 sah syr (per manum most vss) [tv has appy ω -isen from a confusion icith the last syll 
 of αττίσταΧκεΐ'. I cannot see the force of Meyer's reasoning, that συν is a corrn 
 setting forth more strikingly the superhuman powers of Moses). — 36. ο ποιη. D. — for 
 γη, τη BC d sah : txt ADEH all al e Chr Oec Thl' (and without τη, 4. 40. «6. 177' al 
 sah).— rec αιγυτττου, with D al vss ThF : txt ABCEH all sah Chr Thl' Oec— 37. bef 
 μω. om ο DH all. — rec ίίπων {co?-rn to more usual form), with EH &c : txt ABCD. — 
 rec bef θίος ins κύριος (from Deut xviii. 17, LXX? κυρίου του ϋευυ ημών occurs in 
 ver 16), with CEH &c vss Ign Chron al : txt ABD ν sah seth. — rec Θ. υμών : θ. ημών EH 
 &c {corrn as above ?) : txt ABCD all ν syrr ar-erp copt sah seth Ign Eus Chr Chron. — 
 ωςεί D'. — rec aft ίμι, add αυτόν ακουσ. {ίο suit the same citation, ch iii. 22), with CD^ 
 {ακουίσθί D', quern audistis e^) Ε &c : om ABH all sah al Chrj Thl . — 38. του (2ud) 
 om D•. — for ος•, ως 42. — for tSt^., t^tXt^aro B. — λογοί' Ζ,ωντη all. — for ζωντ., 
 viventium d : vittB v. — 39. for ω, on D-gr. — rec αλλ": txt ABCDEH &c. — απίστρ. D 
 al. — rec ταις καρ^ιαις, with D (om αυτωι•) Ε &c ν Syr al : f r ταις καρδιαις ABC 40. 96' 
 al sah (both corrns for the sing without the prep, which bears unquestionable marks of 
 being the origl reading) : txt Η all (abt 50) copt {iv τη) syr ar-pol Chrj Oec Thl Iren. — 
 
 Phoeniss. l-231,&c.,donotapply : for,asPor- bably been altered to agree verbally with 
 
 son observes, ' in his locis simplici verbo CO- the former citation. 38.] γίνομαι 
 
 natus, composito effectus indicatur.' μετά is not a Hebraism, as Kuin. : see reif. 
 
 άίΓοστίίλω] aorist subjunctive, as LXX — That Moses conversed with both the 
 
 (Winer, § 42, 4). 35.] The second Angel of the covenant and our fathers, 
 
 τούτον is repeated emphatically. So ούτος implies that he was the mediator between 
 
 again, vv. 'aG, 1^7, 38. ήρνήσαντο, them, as indeed ος tStiar. λήγ. I. more 
 
 ver. 27. The rejecter of Moses there is plainly declares. €κκλησί<} probably, 
 
 regarded as the representative of the na- 'the assembly' held (Exod. xix.) for the 
 
 Hon: see note on αΰτοίς, ver. 26. In this promulgation of the law at Mt. Sinai, not 
 
 express mention of the rejection of Moses ' the church' generally: but the article does 
 
 by the Jews and his election and mission not determine this : it would be expressed, 
 
 by God, the parallel of Jesus Christ is no whichever meaning we take. λόγια 
 
 doubt in Stephen's mind, and the inference ζώντα] ' living,' see reff. not = ζ>.ιοποι- 
 
 intended to be drawn, that it does not fol- οϋντα (Grot., Kuin.), ' life giving :' still 
 
 low that God rejects those whom they less to be understood ' given viva voce' 
 
 REJECTED. —The difficulty of άιτίσταΧκίν (Pise. Alberti). So Soph. CEd. Tyr. 482, 
 
 has caused it to be altered into the historic τά μεσόμψαλα γας άττυνοσφίζων \ μην- 
 
 tense, άπίατειλεν. But the perf. set forth Ttia• ra l•' ait'i | ζώντα ττίριποταται. 
 
 not only the fact of God's sending Moses 39.] Another instance, brought 
 
 then, but the endurance of his mission till home again by ol Trarepcs ημών, ot rejec- 
 
 now— ' him hath God sent:' with a still tiou of God's nppiiintiul messenger and 
 
 closer reference than before, to Him whom servant. εστράφησαν] ' they turned 
 
 God had now exalted as the true άρχοντα back in their heart to Egypt:' not • they 
 
 κ.λντρωτήν. Seech. V. 31. 37.] wished to return to Eijgpl,' of whicii in 
 
 See ch. iii. 22, notes. Our text has pro- Exod. xxxii. there is no trace (but later, in
 
 70 
 
 nPAiSEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 VII. 
 
 ni ExoD. 
 xxsii I. 
 Luke i. 76 
 iinly. Exod. 
 xiv. lil. J.i.-li 
 
 )ό/α 
 
 Αΐ 
 
 ry καρόια ουτων ίΐς Λΐ-γυπτον, ίΐτΓοίτες τω Άοοώΐ' abcde 
 
 nt c - /( ν Λ III ' Γ - Γ \ Η 
 
 οιησον ■ημιν Utov^ οι ποοττοοίυσυνται τιμών ο yao 
 
 ff 'ν' 3« ΜωυίΤίίς• ούτος, ος " itriyoyev ήμας t/c γϊ7ς• Αιγύπτου, ουκ 
 
 Mntl. viii. >'Τν ' ϋ ' ' '''41^1'' ' ' "' 
 
 13. Lukeiii. Oii^f'^ffi' ΤΙ iytvtTO ovTOJ. Kiti ί/4οσχο7Γθί rjaiiv iv ταις 
 
 2. cpii'tr., f , , ; ^ (1 • ' ν /i ' ~ s '^'\ 
 
 i)an.i. 17. tjufpaic iKHvuiQ KOI avi)yay()i• υυσίαν τω ειοωλω, 
 
 RcT. II. •Λ>. "r^^ ^ '.' •• t' 
 
 iii ι•> ' t ■> . ' • - u >' - - 1 - 
 
 και sv<p^>aivi)VT<) iv τοις ίργοις τ(>>ν Λ/ίΐ^χον αυτών. 
 * ίστρί'ψίν Of ο (7£ος fco/ ττορίοωκίί' «υτους Λοτρίυίΐν 
 "^ "is^'i*''*""'' ■'■ y ^στρατιά του ^ ουοανου, καβως ytyparrTot ev βΙβΧω 
 
 schxT. 20 - J, - Λ1^ ζ ,' ^ ΰ ' a ' / 
 
 τωα' προφητωΐ' ivnj o<payia και Όυσιας προςί/νεγκατε 
 
 ^(οι ετη τεσσερακοντα εν τ»; ^οημίο, οίκος Ισρα?/Λ, και 
 
 1 κ'ίΊ.εΓϋ. 1. ανελαρετε την σκτ^νην του Μολογ, και το αστρον του 
 
 υ^Κ Γ 111 J ^ ^^ 
 
 Οίοΰ Ρε(/;αΐ', τους ' τυττους ους εττοπισατε ττροσκ'υΐ'ειΐ' 
 
 τ .ι« ver. 39 act., (appy) here unly. w •™ Rum i. 24, 2Γ•, 28. Job xvi. 12. con.slr , here only. 
 
 ρ her•- only t• 
 
 q =«= liere only, 
 
 3 Kings iu. 
 
 t Luke xi 
 al .% «ic, 
 RtT. 
 
 u Heb. i. 1 
 
 Irom Ps. ci 
 
 2Γι. Dent. 
 
 xxxiii. 11. 
 X Mall. iv. in 1 (from Dent. vi. 13) al 
 ζ Amos v. 25. σψ., here only. 
 
 vi. 13, Hi.) c — here only 
 
 w " Rom i. 24, 2ΙΊ, 28. Job xvi. 
 
 y στρ.. Luke ii. lo only. 3 Kings xxii. 19. Jer. vii. 18. 
 -Heb. xi.4. John xvi. 2. Num. xxxi. 50. b =- here only. (Eph. 
 
 . Antt. i. ly. 8, lU. 
 
 add 01 ττηηρις 133. — 40. απηντις D. — ημιν 4G. — ο tS^aynyoiv Ε. — for γης, της ij5. — 
 rec ΓΙ yf-ynii7' [cnrrn to LXX, Έχοά xxxii. 1), with DEH most ms.s Chr Oec Thl : txt 
 ABC 1(;3 al. — 41. for aniyayoi', οπί^γοιτο D' : ainjVtyKav 180. — θυσίας• 4C. — ηυφη. 
 D al : txt ABCEH &c.— 42. ίστρ. d. αντονς C sah.— στ^χ-τκα ABD : txt CEH.— των 
 om D. — tT. τ(σσ. aft ισραηΧ A: rec τιππαο. as usual. ^at end, add Xiyti κύριος C. — 
 43. rec aft Utoi< ins νμων (corrn to suit LXX), with ACE ν &c : om BD 15. 18. 3C Syr 
 sah arm Orig Iren al.— rec ρίμφαν, with a few ins (appy) Chr ThF : ριμφαμ D : ρομφα 
 Β: ρίφα or ρίφψα Η 76 al "• ραφαν 180 Just: txt Κ{ρ<ηφαΐ')0,Έ {re/am e seth) all 
 (ρΐφφαν al Oec : alii aliter, see Scholz) syrr copt sah Orig (ms) Cyr Thdrt Thl' Jer. — 
 
 Num. xiv. 4), and which would hardly suit 
 ιτροτΓορεΰσονται ; but ' they apostatized in 
 heart to the Egyptian idolatries.' The very 
 title by wliich Aaron proclaims his idol, is, 
 ' These be tliy gods, Ο Israel, which brought 
 thee vp out of the land of Egypt,' Exod. 
 xxxii. 4. See also Neh. ix. 18. 
 40. irpoTFop.] As God had done in the 
 pillar of the cloud and fire. The plural is 
 not (as Kuin.) put for Wstii , but is used 
 categorically : not perhaps without imply- 
 ing also, tliat the only two religions were, 
 the worship of Jehovah, and that of idols, a 
 multitude. The plural is used by Aaron, 
 see above. — In the ούτος may be implied, 
 as iSIeyer suggests, ' who was the strong 
 opponent of idolatry.' 41. έμοσ-χο- 
 
 ΊΓοίησαν] apparently in imitation of Apis, 
 a bull worshi()ped at Memphis as the living 
 symbol of Osiris. Herod, iii. 28. Diod. Sic. 
 i. 21. Strabo, xvii. 8(»5 (Winer, RWB. 
 ' Kalb '). — The ox was a common symboUc 
 form of idols in the East ; it was one of the 
 cherubic forms, Ezek. i. 10 ; and the most 
 recent discoveries at Nineveh have brought 
 to light colossal Ijulls. Sir Gardiner Wil- 
 kinson (second series, ii. 97, Winer) thinks 
 the golden calves of Israel to have been 
 imitations of Mnevis, a bull kept at Helio- 
 polis (Diod. Sic. i. 21. Strabo, xvii. 803) 
 as a living symbol of the sun. Jeroboam 
 
 afterwards set up golden calves at Bethel 
 and Dan, and with the same proclamation : 
 see 1 Kings xii. 28. 42. βστρίψίν] 
 
 neuter, ' changed,' ' turned,' as άνα- 
 στρίφω, eh. XV. 10". No word, as invroi', 
 or Γί/1' γΐ'ώμηι•, or το 7Γ()όςαΐ7Γ(ΐΐ/ αντον, 
 need be supplied ; nor must ϊστρ. κ. παρ. be 
 rendered '■again delivered Ihem' (Vitring., 
 de Dieu, al.) a Hebraism which has no 
 place in the N. T. (Mey.) : nor must we 
 understand αϋτονς, — God turned them ; 
 for, though philologically there is no objec- 
 tion to this, the sense requires that (στοίφίΐ' 
 should form an introduction to παρίδιοκίν — 
 God, who had hitherto watched over them 
 for good, now pro>^oked by their rebellion, 
 turned, and delivered them up to their own 
 ways. ΊΓαρβ'δωκίν- — not • siiffered them, 
 
 to fall into :' all these explainings away of 
 the strong expressions of Scripture belong 
 to the rationalistic school of interpreters 
 (which is not modern merely : even Chry- 
 sostom has here ί'ίασί) : — it was a judicial 
 delivering vp, not a mere letting alone, 
 see reff. ttj στρ. τ. οΰρ.] This fact 
 
 is not mentioned in the Pentateuch, but 
 may refer to the worship of Baal. In after- 
 times we have frequent traces of star-wor- 
 ship : see 2 Kings xvii. 2(i ; xxi. 3. 5 ; xxiii. 
 4, 5. Jer. xix. 13. Zeph. i. 5. See also Deiil. 
 iv. 19 ; xvii. 3. Job xxxi. 20. βίβλ.
 
 40—45. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 71 
 
 αυτοις ', και μίτοικιω υμάς ^ ίπίκίΐνα Βαβυλωνος. dseever.4refi: 
 
 44 <■ f ^ - f If - / , _ , «ehrreunly. 
 
 Τ} σκηνή του μαρτυρίου ην τοις πατρασιν ημών ίν τη jp/.'^J'^Liv• 
 
 ίριίμω, καθώς ^ όΐίτύ^ατο ο \α\ων τω Μωυσρ πυιησαι H^^sg^ii. la 
 
 αυτήν κατά τον τύπον ον εωρακίΐ, ην και ίίςηγα- ^^ξ^ ξ^^ 
 
 •yor' •' ζια^ίζάμίνοι οΐ πατίρες ημών μετη Ίησοΰ εν τΐ] gmid, ch 
 !- '_.. _.-.. :α.-.. 1 f πι ir- ί £1. ^ . Λ_^ η ?ί'.!•ϋ• 
 
 κατασχέσει τω 
 
 "Χ 
 
 ν εθυ 
 
 ων 
 
 ων 
 
 εΐζ,ωσεν ο ϋιυς απο προς• 
 
 Cor. xi. 34. 
 4al. 
 
 h = 1 Cor. χ. 6. Phil. iii. 17 al. Esod. xxv. 4n. i = here ouly. Xen.Rep. Ath. ii. 3. j here only. 
 
 2 Chron. xxxi. 12. fc ver. 5 only, see rtff. there. 1 attr., ch. i. 1 reff. m = here ouly. (ch. 
 
 xxvii. 3U only ) Jer.xxiv. 9. η ch. r. 41. Nam. xx. 6. see ExoJ. xxiv. 24. Dent. xi. 23. 
 
 αυτούς 177• — for επικ., tni τα μέρη D' e. — add Xtyti κύριος παντοκράτωρ 180. — 44. rec 
 εΐ' τοις, with D'E-gr &c syr (cum ν sah, apud aeth, penes d) TliF : txt ABCD- (ti' τοις 
 ■ττατερεσιΐ' D')H all e am lux copt (tojv πατ. Syr) Chr Thl'. — avrij 133.— t»/uwj' A 95. 
 177^ : om Ι3.~μωυσ(ΐ D al. — εωυακεν DEH (tup. DH) all : vidit copt sah : txt AB(e sil) 
 C all Thl : viderat ν d e.— 45. ε^Ιωσεν Ε δ. 13. 180 al : ίξωσίν most edd : txt J 8. 38. 95. 
 
 T. Ίτροφ.] The book of the prophets, re- 
 garded as a whole. The citation (ref.) is 
 from the LXX. μή σφάγ. κ. θ.] A 
 
 question usually preceding a negative an- 
 swer, see Matt. vii. 9. Rom. xi. 1. 1 Cor. 
 viii. 8 al. : but not always : see John iv. 29 ; 
 viii. 22. Matt. xii. 23 (xxvi. 22) ; Winer, 
 § 61. 3, b. There is no stress on μοΊ (' Is it 
 to Me that ye offered, &c. [i. e. to me 
 only."']' as Rosenm., Heinr., Olsh., Kuin., 
 Stier: the position of μι>ι in the sentence will 
 not allow of this). I should take the ques- 
 tion here according to the usual construc- 
 tion, and understand it as a reproach, 
 implying that God does not receive as 
 offered to Him, sacrifices in which He has 
 been made to share with idols : — ' it is 
 not true that ye offered to Me (but no 
 stress on Me) sacrifices,' &c. : ' I regard 
 it as never having happened.' 43.] 
 
 The answer, by God Himself: ' Yea, 
 άν€λάβ€τ€, ye carried about with you, 
 (not My tabernacle as your sole or cliief 
 holy place, but) the tab. (π'^ρ, the portable 
 tent for the image : Diod. Sic. xx 25, men- 
 tions the ύρά σκηνή in the Carthaginian 
 camp) of M.,' &c. — Stephen was not the 
 sole dishonourer, if a dishonourer, of the 
 holy place— their fathers had done it before. 
 Μολόχ] So the LXX : the Heb. 
 has CD!!bo, ' of your king ,-' — the LXX pro- 
 bably followed another reading, or perhaps 
 explained the expression by the cognate 
 name of this god. Moloch (Winer, R\VB.) 
 was the Phoenician Saturn : his image was 
 of brass with the head of an ox, and out- 
 stretched arms of a man, hollow ; and human 
 sacrifices (ofchildren) were offered, by laying 
 them in these arms and heating the image 
 by a fire kindled within. The rigid prohi- 
 bitions of the worshij) of Moloch ([..ev. xviii. 
 21 ; XX. 2 — 5) were openly transgressed by 
 Ahaz, 2 Kings xvi. 3 ; xxiii. 10. Jer. vii. 31 ; 
 xxxii. 35. In the kingdom of Israel this 
 
 abomination had been long practised, see 
 2 Kings xvii. 17- Ezek. xxiii. 37. We find 
 traces of it at Carthage (Diod. Sic. xx. 14), 
 among the Phoenicians (Q. Curt. iv. 3. 23. 
 Euseb. laud. Const, xiii. 4. Porphyr. de 
 Abstin. ii. 56), — among the Cretans and 
 Rhodians (Porphyr. ibid.), and the Assyrian 
 colonists at Sepharvaim, 2 Kings xvii. 31. 
 TO οστρον τον θ. [ίιμ.] 'Ρίφάν] 
 Heb. •νϊ, Chiun ; but what the meaning of 
 either this or 'ΥΊιιφάν (LXX) is, we have 
 nothing but conjecture to inform us. The 
 principal opinions have been (1) that of 
 Kircher, who maintains 'Vt(pav {'Ριιφάρ) 
 to be a Coptic word, signifying the planet 
 Saturn, and answering to the Arabic 
 ' Kewan :' (2) that of Hengstenberg, Au- 
 thentic, des Pentat. i. 110 ff., who entirely 
 repudiates Kircher's interpretation, and sup- 
 poses 'Ρηφάν to have arisen from amis- 
 reading of JVT for JVD. But Winer (RWB.) 
 prefers the former opinion, and supports it 
 by the authority of eminent modern Coptic 
 and Arabic scholars. — De Wette and Heng- 
 stenberg believe ]V3 to be an appellative 
 noun, and would render it ®cfif U, the car- 
 riage OT frame, on which the star or image 
 was carried : ' imaginem idolorum vestro- 
 rum,' Vulg. Amos. 1. c. Βοβυλώνος] 
 
 Αημασκον, LXX and Heb. The fulfilment 
 of the prophecy would make it very natural 
 to substitute that name which had become 
 inseparably associated with the captivity. 
 44. ή σκ. τ. μαρτ.] In opposition to 
 the σκ. just mentioned: but also in pursuance 
 of one of the great aims of the speech, to 
 shew that holiness is not confined to locality 
 or building. This part of his subject 
 Stephen ndw enters on more particularly. 
 — The words »'/ σκ. r. μαμτ- are the LXX 
 rendering of iriO bn'N (Num. xvi. 18, 19 
 al.) 'the tabernacle of the asseml)ly' (or 
 'congregation,' E. V.). They apparently 
 derived the latter word from nW, ' testatus
 
 Η 
 
 72 ΠΡΑΕΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛίΙΝ. VII. 
 
 "Gen^lxxm. ώτΓου τωι> πατίοων νμων, ^^ ίως των ίιμίρων Δαυίδ, ος abode 
 
 1υ =2 Tim. of ' '' "Ω" \ ρ ' ' η ' - ' 
 
 1.18. Heb. evptv \αξ)ΐν (νωττιον του utov και ' ι^τησατο ' tvpnv 
 
 "^ηοΓ^ύΐ")' ^ σκηνοιμα τω * Οεω Ίακωβ' ^^ 'Σολομών δί ^ ωκο^όμη- 
 
 seeELTi.lf.' osv αυτω ^ οΙκοί'. αλλ ούχ ο νφιστος ev " χίΐροττοί- 
 
 ''Γ^η"'' ντοις κατοικίΐ, καυως ο προφήτης Atyn, U ουρανός 
 
 χϋ. 17. .^ee ί\ ' t(>>-w' '<> - ^- ,χ" 
 
 Hos. χϋ. 8. μοι υοονος, η οί γ)/ υποποοιον των ττοοων μου ποιοι' 
 
 r 2 Pet 1.13, ^ s*^' ' Λ' ' ΛΟ'^^'ν' 
 
 a^"bore ^*' offov otKOOOjUJjCTtre juot, At"y£i κνξ)ΐος, "" η τις τόπος 
 "\χ"ήΐ6'. τΐ]ς ' καταπαυσΐως μου', ον^ι η χε<ρ ^ου ίποιησίν πάντα 
 
 Malt. νϋ. 24. _ ςίαλ 'Λ \b'' "b ^' 
 
 Lokevi. 48, 7αυτα ; σκλιψοτραγ^ηλοί και απίριτμ7}τοι tij καρόια 
 
 , "b's^'Tuke i. "^^^ ■'"^'^^ ωσιν, νμίΐς απ τω πνευματι τω α-γιω '^ αντιπι- 
 
 32,'3."ι, 7<). vi.35 only. Dent, xxxii. 8 al. nch.xvii.24. MarkxiT.58. Eph.ii.ll. Heb.ix.ll, 
 
 24 (inly. Isa. ii. 18. ν of God, Malt, xxiii. 21. Eph.iii.17. (Eph. ii. 22.) Isa. Iviilft. w IsA. 
 
 Ixti. I. Matt. V. 35al. χ ch. iv. 7 reft. y — ch. iv. 31. ζ Heb. iii. 11, 18. iv. pss.iim only. 
 
 Deut. xii. y. = Ps. cxxxi. 14. ahrreonly. Exod. xxxiii. 3, 5 al. b here only. Ezek.xliv. 7. 
 
 Jer. ix. 26. c here only. Nam. xxvii. 14. Herodian vi. 3. 
 
 — 46. for SriviS, ταυτων 13. — ηνριν Ε. — for τω θεω, τω οίκω ΈΌ(σι^ην. tvp. τω οικ. ιακ. 
 D)H (iabern. invenire sedes domuijac. d) {accordy to Meyer and De Wette, corrn ίο avoid 
 seeminy discrepancy with ver 48, tmt qu .■') : t.xt ACE mss (appy) vss Chr Oec Thl. — 
 47. σαλωμων AC: t.xt B(e sil)DEH Scc — oikoS. B'D (al ?).— ίίΐυτιο Η 32. 40. 93. 133 
 ThP : om yC Syr. — 48. rec aft xtipoTrAns ναοις (eaplanatory y loss ; or from chs.\'n. 24), 
 with Η all Chr Thl Aug : but om ABCD (o Se νψ. υν κατ. tv χ.) Ε 27- 29. 40. 73. 163 ν 
 syrr ar-erp copt sah seth vss Pamphil Fulg : κατ. ναοις 95. — for καθώς, ως D: καθώς 
 και Ε 7')' e-. — 49. for μοι, μυν D' {mens d al) add ιστιν D. — και η yi) Β vss (not ν syr) : 
 η Tt γη 12G. — σου 5. — οικοδομ7]σατΐ Β 42: οικοζομησηη 133. ^for τις, ττοικς D: at 
 end, add ιητιν D 5. 13. 9C vss Thdrt. — 50. rec ταντ. παν. with B(e sil)H al vss (appy) 
 if: txt ACDE 78. 80. — 51. καροιαις ACD, ταις καυδιοις al vss Chr Jer : καρδίας Β 
 {-αν Bentl) : add νμων al (corrected to plur to suit the plur subject) : txt EH most mss 
 
 est,' instead of Ίϊ", ' constituit.' Tvirov] from God, denied: — not 'wished' (Grot., 
 (ref.): another contrast, of. tvttovc ονς Kuin. : 'f/esi>erf,'E.V.). The vow (a species 
 ίτΐοιήσατί, ver. 43. 45. ίΐςήγ.] ab- of prayer) here referred to, is defined, by the 
 solute : ' introduced,' viz. κ'ς τήν γην : — words εΰρεΐν σκήνωμα, to be that mcn- 
 not connected with tv τ?) (οητασχ.,— see tioned Ps. csxxi. 1 — 5 (LXX). 48.] 
 below. 8ia8e|.] ' Having inherited But, though Solomon built Him an house, 
 it,' i. e. succeeded to its custody and privi- u-e are not to suppose, for all that, that He 
 leges. — The sense of ' successores,' ' qui is confned to earthly spots. καθώς 6 
 majores exceperunt,' is ungrammatical ; as fp. λ.] We have the same declaration by 
 also is that of ' postea,' ' deinceps.' Solomon himself at the dedication of his 
 €v τη κατασχέσει] ' at (or ' in ') their temple, 1 Kings viii. 27 ; also in the beau- 
 taking possession.' The Vulg. rendering, tiful prayer of David, 1 Chron.xxix. 10 — 19. 
 ' in possessionem gentium,' is philologically The citation is freely from the LXX.— The 
 inadmissible ; ' in terram a gentibus occu- student will not fail to be interested in ob- 
 patam ' (Calvin, de Dieu, Grot., Kuin.) is serving the apparent reference to this decla- 
 still worse. The passage of the LXX, ration in Stephen's apology, by St. Paul, 
 Num. xxxii. 5, δυθητω ή yr) ήμίν tv κατά- ch. xvii. 24. 51.] 1 do not think 
 σχίσίΐ, brought forward to justify these there is any occasion to suppose an inter- 
 renderings, is directly against them. — The rM/(/?onyrow Me awf/Zewce to haveoccasioned 
 martyr combines rapidly a considerable this outbreak of holy indignation. At each 
 period, during which this κατάσχίπις and separate recital (vv. 9. 25. 35. 39 if.) he has 
 this expulsion was taking place (for it was dwelt, with continually increasing fervour, on 
 not comjilete till the time of David) in order the rebellions ayainst and rejections of God 
 to arrive at the next great event of his his- by His people. He has now brought down 
 tory, the substitution of the temple of Solo- the history to the establishment of the 
 monfor the tabernacle. 46. ητήσατο] temple worship. From Solomon's time to 
 ' asked permission,' see 2 Sam. vii. 2 ff., in liis own, he saw but a succession of aposta- 
 which this request is made through Nathan sies, idolatries, rejection of God's prophets : 
 the prophet, and atfirst conceded by Nathan, — a dark and loathsome catalogue, termi- 
 though afterwards, on a revelation made Dated by the betrayal and murder of the
 
 46—53. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 73 
 
 πτετε, ώς οι ττατίρες υμών κα\ ύμίΐς. τίνα των προφητών "^ π'^ί; V*".' 
 ουκ '' εδίωζαΐ' οι πατίξ>£ς νμων ; και απεκτπναν τους e="nh.iii.i8 
 ^ προκατα")ίγείλοΐ'Γος περί της ' έλεύσεως του ^ δικαίου, ού '^'•/^^^"°^ϊί: 
 νυν ύμας προ^οται και ' φοί'εις tycvtaue, 
 
 ελάβετε τον νομον 
 
 5Ά k ■' " 14. xxii 14. 
 
 οιτινες iPet.iu. is. 
 
 ^ , , , . , see James τ. 
 
 εις " ciaTayac ayyeλωv 
 
 tTa-yag ayye/ 
 
 και ουκ 
 
 h Lnke τϊ. ]6. 
 
 2 Tim. iii. 4 only. 2Macc. v. 1ft. i Matt. xxii. 7. ch. iii. 14. xxviii. 4. 1 Pef. ίτ. 15. Re7.xxi. 
 
 8. xxii. 15 onlyf. k -= Malt. xvi. 28 al. fr. 1 = John vii. 39 al. Rom. iv. U. m = ch. ii. 
 
 39. Tiii. 2u. η Rom. xiii. 2 only (Gal. iii. 19). Ezr. iv. 11. 
 
 Syr copt sah Ath Chrj Cyr-jer Thdrt Thl.-for ως, καθώς D: txt AB(e sil)CEH 
 al Ath Chr Thdrt Thl (so Tisch : but prints in his text καθώς). — 52. for oi πατ. νμ., 
 tKuvoi D^ d: ημών (1st) 96: (2nd) 95. — ατηκτ. αυτούς τους TrpoKarayyfWovrac 
 7Γ. ίλ. (της (λ. D ) D'. — του £iK. τοντηυ (see Matt χχνϋ. 24) 5. 180. — rec -γί-γινησθί 
 (corm to appy more suitable tense, see note), with Η al Thl al : txt ABCDE all Orig. — 
 
 Just One Himself. It is not at all beyond 
 probability, to believe that the zeal of his 
 fervent spirit was by the view of this, the 
 filling up of the measure of their iniquities, 
 kindled into a flame of insjiired invective. 
 I find that this is also Neander's view, in op- 
 position to the generality of commentators 
 (P. u. L. p. 92), as also that of Prof. Hackett, 
 in his recent comm.on the Acts: and I cannot 
 but think it far the most probable, ίΐ'τανθα 
 λοιποί' καταφομικώς τψ λόγψ κίχρηται. 
 ΤΓολλ)} ην τταρρησία μίΧλοντυς αύτον άττο- 
 θι•ησκίΐν Και yap καΐ τοντο οΊμαι αϋτ'ον 
 ιίίίναι. Chrysost. σκληρ. κ. άττίρ.] 
 
 Words and figures familiar to tlie prophets in 
 speaking of the rebellious Israel : see, besides 
 reff., Deut. ix. 6, 1.3. Neh. ix. 16 :— Deut. x. 
 16; XXX. 6. See also Rom. ii. 29. ώσίν] 
 I should hardly think of any allusion to Ps. 
 xl. C, — because the LXX have rendered 
 ' mine ears hast thou opened ' by σώμα κατ- 
 ηρτίσω μοι. τω irv. τ. άγ. άντ.] Ap- 
 
 parently a reference to Isa. Ixiii. 10. The 
 instances as yet had been confined to oi ττατ. 
 ΐψ. : now he has arrived at their own times. 
 The two are taken up again in the next ver. 
 
 52. τίνα τ. Ίτροφ.] See Matt, xxiii. 
 34 if. : 2 Chron. xxxvi. 16 : where the same 
 general expressions are used of their per- 
 secuting the prophets. Such sayings are 
 not to be pressed to the letter, but represent 
 the uniform attitude of disobedience and 
 hostility which they assumed to the mes- 
 sengers of God. See also the parable. Matt, 
 xxi. 35. Tois ■jrpoK.] T/ie office of all 
 
 the prophets, see ch. iii. 21. The assertion 
 is repeated, to connect them, by this title, 
 with Him, whom they announced, 
 τον δικαίου] Schottg. vol. ii. p. 18, has 
 shewn from the Rabbinical writings that 
 this name was used by the Jews to designate 
 the Messiah. See refl". and note on James 
 V. 6. ττροδίίτοι] By Judas's treachery, 
 
 of which the Sarihedrists had been the ac- 
 comidiccs; Matt. xxvi. 14 — 16: — φoveϊς,by 
 the hands of tlie Romans ; ch. iii. 23, note. 
 
 ίγβ'νεσθε is jireferable not only on 
 
 account of its MS authority, but as being 
 the historical tense, like the rest. It was 
 prob. altered to the perfect, as suiting the 
 time then present, better than the aorist. 
 53.] The use of oitivss, instead of oi, 
 so very frequent in the Acts and Epp., occurs 
 when the clause introduced by it contains a 
 further explanation of the position or clas- 
 sification of the person or persons alluded to, 
 and not when the relative serves for simple 
 identification. See Rom. i. 25. 32. 
 els διαταγας αγγέλων] Many explanations 
 have been given. Chrys. ίιαταχθίντα 
 νόμυν Xiyit, τον tyxtipiaeivTa αντψ Ci 
 oyyfXoi' τον όφθεΐ'τα αντψ h> τψ βάτψ. 
 and Oec. ΐ'όμον \αβό> τας οιατάϊ,ίις ΐχον- 
 τα, α'ίηΐ'ίς laayytXav ίττοιονν πολιτίίαν 
 ίχίΐν τους ηλουντας αυτοί'. Heinsius 
 and Lightfoot understand by dyytX. the 
 prophets: Grot., Calv., and Krebs, ' prce- 
 sentibjis angelorvm ordinibus,' taking ha- 
 τayάς zz cι'lτά^nς in the sense of troops 
 (Judith viii. 36), in which it never occurs, 
 — not to say that ιΐς will not bear this : 
 Beza, Calv., Pise, Elsn., Hamm., Kuin., 
 &c., ' ab angelis promvlgatiim,' which ίΐ'ς 
 will not bear {tv) : Winer, Gr. § 32. 4, 'as 
 commands of angels,' which, however, was 
 not the fact (Mey.), who refers to Jos. Antt. 
 XV. 5. 3, ημών τά κάλΧιστα των Οογμάτωί' 
 καΙ τά οσιόιτατα των tv τυΐς νόμοις hi 
 fiγy^Xωv τταρα τοΐ θίοΰ μαθύίτων) : — 
 the Syriac version, ' permandatum angeli :' 
 — y\i\g. and Calv., ' in dispositione (or 
 -onibus) angelorum :' Schottg. , ' per miuis- 
 terinm angelorum.' These three last are 
 precluded by the foregoing remarks. The 
 key to the right rendering seems to be the 
 similar expression in Gal. iii. 1!), ό νόμος 
 διαταγεις δι' αγγέλων. The law was given 
 by God, but announced by angels. The 
 people received tiod's law then, «Ις διαταγάς 
 αγγέλων, ' at the injunction (a sense of 
 ίιατ. amply justified, sec Palm and Rost's 
 lex. (-ι«τη£ις, and Polyb. iv. 19. 10, «7- 5) 
 of angels.' So Matt. xii. 41, μιτινόησαν 
 tis TO κήρυγμα Ίώνα, ' they repented at the
 
 74 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 VII. 54—60. 
 
 o-=Lukexl.28 " Εφιιλα^ΟΤε. A/COUOVTfC 0£ Ταυτα "^ ΟίίπΟίΟνΓΟ TfliC ABCDE 
 
 al. tccles. • . ' ii 
 
 pcii.v.33 ΚΌροιαις• (UJT<<^v και ^ tppvyov τους οδόντας ίττ αυτόν, 
 
 ichron.xx. "'"' vTTUQyjMV Of TTAij^jijc πτίίγιατος αγίου, ατ£ΐησ(ΐς• Είς 
 
 ''''Mnu.'viii ''■<"' ουρπί'ϋΐ' fiSfi' δοξαν θεού κα( IrjffoiM' ίστωτα " cfc 
 
 12 η1.) Ps. λ ^ - _ ,j _ \ t 56 Ί ^ ^ ν /> - ν ' ν 
 
 xxxiv. iiiHi. όίζίωΐ' του σεου, και iiwtv Ιοου ΐ/εωρω τους ουραΐ'ους 
 
 Ο(ί)νο{γμεΐ'ους, /cat τον υιον του ανθξ)ωπου " εκ: όίζκον 
 θίοΰ. ' '^ Koaiavrec δε ώωνχι ιχί-νάλι 
 
 ΰ8 reft 
 S Luke viii. 41. 
 al.ch. ii. 3(1. «- - Ο - 57 x 'ii S^^j^ " '\ V 
 
 tLukeiv. 2u εστωτα του οίου. ' κραο,αντες οε ώωνη uiyuAn ' συν 
 
 reft. J.bvii ^ ^ _ , „ , „ • ' /ί Λ ^ • 
 
 Γί, "if .i«i'r'*ft εσγοί' τα ωτα αυτών και ' ωρμ,ησαν ** omouvunco 
 
 uch. ii. 25 reft. '■'^X 
 
 τ = Mark τ. la. ••ν 5« \ b 
 
 John ix Sal. αυτοί', '''" 
 
 w Mark vii. 34 , , 
 
 reff 
 
 ωομηααν ομοϋυμηόον εττ 
 
 και ΐκβαΧοντίς έςω της πόλεως "^ελιθορολουΐ'. 
 
 xMatt χχνϋ '^"' '** /ΐ(άρτυ^)ες "^ αττεθευτο τα ιμάτια πάρα τους ποοας 
 
 5(1 al. ΙΓ. 2Kingsxix.4. y = here only. Ι3.1ϋ.1.5. ζ = Matt. viii. 321|. oh xix. Silonly. 2 Mace. 
 
 X. Iti. a ch. i. 14 al." in Acts, ami Rom. xv. (i only. L. P. b = Matt. viii. 12. xxi. .39 ||. Luke iv. L'9. 
 
 c Matt. xxi. 35 al. Exod. viii. 26 al. d =Deat. xvii. 7. e Rom. xiii. IJ al. Jamesi.2i. 1 Pet. 
 ii. 1. = 2 Mace. viii. 35. f ch. iv. 35 reft". 
 
 54. ακουτηντις (so al vss) St aurcv D. — τας καρδίας 180. — και ίβρ. rf D^ — oC. αυτών 
 Ε all Syr arr aetli sah. — tTC αυτών 133. — 55. στίψανης St ντταρχ. 137. 1ί!0. — πιτηως 
 και ττν. all Syr ar-erp copt. — θιον om lii. — ι;;σ. τον κύριοι/ ίκ I't τοι> θ. κττ. D. — for 
 τ. θ(ου, αυτού C al Thl-. — 56. rec ανΐ:ωγμΐΐΌυς {corrii to ynore visual word), with D^H 
 al Chr Constt Thdrt Thl : ηΐ'ί,ογμ. D' : txt ABC 27. 29. 60^. 105. 103 al Ath Cyr-jer.— 
 εστ. ίκ δίξ. ACE all vss Nyss Clir al. — 57. κρα^,αντος 18 d. — συνισχαν U. — 58. aft ικβ. 
 
 preaching of Jonas.' The only other legiti- 
 mate rendering, ' as the injunctions of angels,' 
 comes under the objections made to Winer's, 
 above. 54.] Sitirp., see ch. v. 33, 
 
 note. 55.] Certainly, in so far as the 
 
 vision of Stephen was supernatural, it was 
 not necessary that the material heavens 
 should have been visible to him : but from 
 the words άηνίσας els τον οΰρανόν it 
 would seem that they were. We are not 
 told where the Sanhedrim were assembled. 
 It does not seem as if they were convened 
 in the ordinary session room : it may have 
 been in one of the courts of the temple, 
 which would give room for more than the 
 members of the Sanhedrim to be present, 
 as seems to have been the case. 
 Ιστώτα] A reason why the glorified Saviour 
 was seen slanding, and not sitting, has 
 been [ileasingly given by Chrysostom (in 
 Cramer's Catena) : r'l ουι> ιστώτα και οΰχι 
 KaOrjfifi'ov; ϊνα Sei^jj την άντίληιΡιν 
 την ίίς τον μάρτυρα' και γαρ rrtpi τηϋ 
 πατρόι; \tytTai " ανάστα ύ θίός." Simi- 
 larly Gregory the Great (cited by Kuinoel), 
 Horn. 19, in fest. Ascens. ' Stephanus stan- 
 tem vidit, quern adjutorem habuit.' So also 
 Arator, cited by Bengel : ' pro martyre sur- 
 git, Quem tunc stare videt ; confessio nos- 
 tra sedentem Cum soleat celebrare magis.' 
 [See also the collect for St. Stephen's day.] 
 But not perhaps correctly : for ' help ' does 
 not seem here to be the ajiplicable idea, but 
 the coufinnntion of his faith by the ecstatic 
 vision of the Saviour's glory at God's right 
 hand. — I should be rather disposed to think 
 that there was reference in the vision to 
 
 that in Zech. iii. 1, where Zech. sees 
 Ίησοϋν τον ttpta τον μίγαν, ιστώτα ττρυ 
 ττροςώπον όγγέλϋΐ) κυρίου. Stephen, under 
 accusation of blaspheming the earthly tem- 
 ple, is granted a sight of the heavenly tem- 
 ple ; being cited before the Sadducee High 
 Priest who believed neither angel nor spirit, 
 he is vouchsafed a vision of the heavenly 
 High Priest, standing and ministering at 
 the throne amidst the angels and just men 
 made perfect. 56.] This is the only 
 
 time that our Lord is by human lips called 
 the Son of Man after His ascension (Rev. 
 i. 13; xiv. 14, are not instances). And wAy 
 here ? I believe, for this reason. Stephen, 
 full of the Holy Ghost, speaking now not 
 of himself at all (ver. 55), but entirely by 
 the utterance of the Spirit, repeats the very 
 words. Matt. xxvi. (!4, in which Jesus Him- 
 self, before this council, had foretold His 
 glorification ; — and assures them that that 
 exaltation of the Son of Man, which they 
 should hereafter witness to their dismay, 
 was already begun and actual. 58. 
 
 εξω τ ττόλ.] See Levit. xxiv. 14. ' Locus 
 lapidationis erat extra urbem : omnes enim 
 civitates muris cinctae paritatem habent ad 
 castra Israelis.' Babyl. Sanhedr. ad loc. 
 (Meyer). έλιθοβόλονν] ' they stoned 
 
 him :' an anticipation of the fact, the de- 
 tails of whicii follow : not, ' they prepared 
 to stone him:' nor 'jam in itinere ad 
 supplicii locum petulanter eum lapidibus 
 lacessebant' (Heinr.) : nor need we conjec- 
 ture t'KiQoXoyovv with Markland. Stoning 
 was the punishment of blaspheming, Levit. 
 xxiv. \α. The question whether this was a
 
 νΐίΐ. 1. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λί2Ν. 
 
 75 
 
 ch. ϋ. 21 reff. 
 = Luke xxiii. 
 46. Eccl. iii. 
 7. 
 
 Lukexxii 41. 
 Murk XT. 19 
 al.t see 
 3 Kings viii. 
 
 veav'iov καΧονμίνον ΈανΧου, και ^ ίΧιθοβόλουν τον 
 
 Έ.τεφηνον ^ ίπικαλονμένον και λίγοχτα Κύριε Ιησου δί'ζοί 
 το πνίΐ'μα μου. Όίΐς όί τα γόνατα ίκραί,ίν ψωνη 
 
 μί-γαλΥ} Ki/p(f, μΐ) στησττις αυτοις ταυτην την αμαξ)τιαν. 
 κα\ τούτο ίίπων "' εΛ:ο(μί}θ>?. VIII. δαυλός dk ην fjiet^^ere 
 
 η \>~ ~ο' ' ■■-" '/ <>\''ί ~ only, propr., 
 
 σννίυόοκων τ>ί αναιρέσει ουτου. eytvero οε εν εκεπηι τη mau.xxvi. 
 
 > / * ^ 1.Ϊ ? 2 Kii ?s 
 
 νμίρα ''διωγμός μέγας 'επί γτ}!' έ/οκΆησίαν την εΐ' Ιερό- I'chfxi. ΐ2 
 
 m Matt.xxvii. 52. ch. xiii.36. 1 Cor. τϋ. 39al. Isa. xiv. 8. η Lake xi. 48. Rom. i. 32. 1 Mace. i. 57. 
 
 och. xxii. 2ti only. Nam. xi. 15. ρ Matt. xiii. 21 ]. Rom. viii. 35 al.4 P. Lam.iii. 19. 
 
 q ch. xiii. 5(1. 
 
 ins αυτόν A 13. C6 sah ThF. — aft ίΚιθ. ins avrov D Syr copt sab arm syr*. — rec aft ιμ. 
 ins avTwv {corrn), with AB(fai;.)CDE &c vss ChrTliF Oec : om Η all slav-ant ThP.— aft 
 vtciv. ins τίνος D Syr arm : του 32. 47. 103. 104 al lect 2 Chr^ Thl'. — 59. ιησ. χρίστε 
 C al ar-erp Chr Thdrt. — 60. ψωνην (om sah) μί-^αληι> D : ψωνην μεγάλη C : μty. om 
 177' ; add Xfytuj' D vss. — στηπίις D' 180. — rec την αμ. τ. with EH &c copt syr Chrj 
 Thdrt Chron al : txt ABCD ν sah Syr seth ar-pol Petrlren Cypr al. — και .... (κοιμ. om 
 137= aft ίκοιμ. add fr ίίρηνη 40. 96: in ΰοηιίηο v-ed. 
 
 Chap. YIII. 1. aft /<t γης, ins και θλίΐψίΐς D : κ. με•γα\η θ\. sah. — rec aft τταιτίς, 
 
 legal proceeding on sentence, or a tu- 
 m'iltuary one, is not easy to answer. It 
 would appear from John sviii. 31, that the 
 Jews had not legally the power of putting 
 any man to death (see note there). Cer- 
 tainly, from tlie narrative before us, and 
 from the fact of a bloody persecution having 
 taken place soon after it, it seems that the 
 Jews did, by connivance of, or in the ab- 
 sence of the Procurator, administer sum- 
 mary punishments of this kind. But here 
 no sentence is recorded : and perhaps the 
 very violence and zelotic character of the 
 execution might constitute it, not an en- 
 croachment on the power of the procurator, 
 as it would have been if strictly in form of 
 law, but a mere outbreak, and as such it 
 might be allowed to pass unnoticed. That 
 they observed the forms of i/iei?• own law, 
 in the place and manner of the stoning, is 
 no objection to this view. ol μάρ- 
 
 Tvpes] See Deut. xvii. 7. They disencum- 
 bered themselves of their loose outer gar- 
 ments, ωπτί nvni κουφοί και άτταματτό- 
 Γιστοι κ'ς• τό λιθυ/ίολίϊι•. Tlieophyl. 
 ά•ΐΓεθ€ντο] to keep them. — Such notices are 
 deeply interesting, when we recollect by 
 whom they were in all probability carefully 
 inserted. See ch. xxii. 19, 20, and note on 
 ch. xxvi. 10: — from which it appears that 
 Saul can certainly not have been less than 
 thirty at this time. He was a member of 
 the Sanhedrim, and soon after was des- 
 patched on an important mission with their 
 authority. 59.] The attempt to es- 
 
 cape from this direct prayer to the Saviour 
 by making '\i)nov the genitive, and sup|ios- 
 ing it addressed to the Father,— in the face 
 of the ever-recurring words ιο'/ριος• 'l/jinrc 
 (see Rev. xxii. 20 esp.), and the utter 
 absence of any instance or analogy to justify 
 
 it, — is only characteristic of the school to 
 which it belongs. Yet in this case it 
 has been favoured even by Bentley and 
 Valcknaer, who supposed Qtov to have been 
 omitted in the text. δβξαι το irv μ.] 
 
 The same prayer in substance had been 
 made by our Lord on the cross (Luke xxiii. 
 46) to His Father. To Him was now com- 
 mitted the key of David. Similarly, the 
 young man Saul, in after years : ττίπειημαι 
 Ότι ίυνατός έτη την τταραβήκην μου 
 φυλαζαι tic iKtij'tjV τήν ήμί^αν. 2 Tim. 
 i. 1 2. 60.] The more accurate philo- 
 
 logical commentators, De Wette and Meyer, 
 deny that arii^ijg here can, as ordinarily 
 explained, refer to u-eighing (Matt. xxvi. 
 15. Jer. xxxi. 10), since not the*/)/, but the 
 puninhment, would be the thing weighed 
 out, — and it would be harsh to take the one 
 for the other, in a sentence of this kind. 
 Meyer would understand Ίστάναι as op- 
 posed to aipi'tvai, την άμαρτκιν, ' Fia: noi 
 this sin upon them .•' but De Wette, as 
 seems to me more probably, reiiders it 
 'Reckon not this sin to them' ('lay not 
 this sin to their charge,' E. V.), sujiporting 
 this by Rom. x. 3. — This again was some- 
 what similar (though not exactly, see note 
 there) to our Lord's prayer, Luke xxiii. 34. 
 €κοιμήθη] Not a Christian expres- 
 sion only : Wetstein, on Matt, xxvii. 52, 
 cites Jewish examples : and we have in 
 the Anthology, iii. 1. 10, ryct Σύων ό 
 Αιιοΐ'ος ' Ακάΐ'θιος ifiidi' ϋπνοι/ | κοιμά- 
 ται' OvijnKiiv μτ) Xfyf Toiii; ά-/αβονς. 
 But it became ί /ie usual Christian term 
 for death. Its use here, when the circum- 
 stances, and the actors in them, are remem- 
 bered, is singularly touching, from the con- 
 tra.st. 
 
 Chap. VIII. 1—4.] Pi:rsf.ci;tion of
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 rvcr.4. ch.xi. σολύϋοίς" ττάιτίς ^Ι ^ ^ιεσπάοησαν κατά τας ^ γωρας της abcde 
 
 lli..nly.Ezek. , S, , , ^ ν' _ > 'Λ Ο t ^ 
 
 .*iii';uuke Ιουόοίας και Έαμαρίΐας ιτλην των αποστολών. -^ συν- 
 "hnm. ίκόμισαν δί τον Στίψανον αν^^ίς " εύλαβίΐς και έ7Γου}σαι^Γθ 
 
 "'v''L'(i"bSt-^ KOTTtroi' μί-γαν ίττ αυτω. "^ Ζαυλος όί ίλυμαινετο την 
 Soyh.Ajax, ^^^\ηfJlfJ^,^ ^ κατά τους οίκους ^ Ηςποξ)ίυομίνος, 'σύρων 
 ?'\1η\ ""■ ■''* ανορας και -γυναίκας παριοιοου £ΐς φυ\ακην. 
 
 lUicali τη. Salex. ν here only. Gen. 1. 10. Micah i. 8. λτ here only. = 2 Chrun. xvi. 10. Ps. 
 
 Izxix. 13. X — Luke xiii.22. ix. (S. Tiii. 1. y ch. iii. 2. Mark i. 21 al. ζ John xxi 8. rh. 
 
 xiT U χτίΐ. 6. Re», xii. 4 only. 2 King^ XTii. 13. a constr., Luke xxi. 12. xxiv. 7. ch. xxii. 4. 2 Cor. 
 
 IT il.' b — Malt. T. 25al.fr. 2 Kings xx. 3. 
 
 ri, with A &c Syr Ath &c : txt BCDEH all ν copt sah syr Eus Isid Chr, Thl : om 13. 47- 
 — και παΐ'Γ. or π. yap al Chr,. (The re has per /taps been an alteration because there is 
 no appearance of contrast but rather of connexion between the two events.) — της om D'. 
 — ιίυΐ'μαιας 105. — σαμημιας DE. — aft αττοσ. add oi ίμίΐναν tv ΐίρουσαλημ D sah Aug. 
 — 2. σννκομισαντίς D-gr : συνίκομισαντο 58. 80. — for ίί, τί D' d E-gr a;th. — εποίησαν 
 ABCD all Tiidrt Chr, : ιττοιησαν τον 57 {which variation shews ίποιησαΐ'το to have 
 been original, and to have been by some mistaken for επ. τον, and by some altered) : 
 tit EH all Chr, Oec Thl. — μί•(α 56. — ίττ αυτών 133.— 3. ο δε σ. D. — ελυμηνατυ E-gr 
 
 THE CHURCH BY SaUL, CONSEauENT ON 
 THE DE.\TH OF STEPHEN. 1. cruViViS.] 
 
 See reff. : and compare his own confession, 
 ch. x.xvi. 9 — 11. From this time, the nar- 
 rative takes up Saul, and, at first with con- 
 siderable interruptions (ch. viii. x. xi. xii.), 
 but after ch. xiii. I entirely, follows his 
 history. tv Ik. t. ήμ. can hardly mean, 
 
 as some (Dr. Burton, De Wette, Meyer, 
 Stier) would render it, on that very day, 
 viz. when Stephen was stoned. For what 
 follows, πάντες Si Ιιεσπάρηπαν . . cannot 
 have happened on the same day, but would 
 take some little time : and it is hardly allow- 
 able to render ίγίνετο ' broke out.' We 
 have tv εκ. τ. ι'ιμίίΐ^. used indefinitely, John 
 xiv. 20; xvi. 23, 26". Luke uses it only 
 once besides (Luke xvii. 31), and therewith 
 direct reference to a ημίρα just mentioned, 
 iravres] Not perhaps literally, — or 
 some of them soon returned : see ch. ix. 
 26 — 30. It may describe the general dis- 
 persion, without meaning that every indi- 
 vidual fled. 1"αμαρεία5] Connected 
 with ver. 4 : this word is not without im- 
 portance, as introducing the next step in 
 the dissemination of the Gospel, according 
 to our Lurd's command in ch. i. 8. 
 ΐΓλήν των ότΓοστόλων] Perhaps, from their 
 exalted ixisitioii of ventTation by the people, 
 the pcr-ecution did not extend to them : 
 perhaps they remained, as possessed of supe- 
 rior firmness and devotion. But this latter 
 reason is hardly applicable, after the com- 
 mand of our Lord ' When they persecute 
 you in one city, tlce to another.' Matt. x. 23. 
 Stier (Reden d. Apostel. i. 2.i3) refers their 
 remaining to an intimation of the Spirit, to 
 stay and strengthen those who were left 
 {ίτ'εοονς γενέσθαι θη ισονς α'ιτιοι, Chrys.) 
 — Mr. Humphry (Comm. on Acts) cites an 
 ancient tradition, mentioned by Clem. Alex., 
 
 Strom, vi. 5. 43, from the Prjedicatio Petri 
 (and by Euseb. H. E. v. 18), that the 
 Apostles were ordered by our Lord to re- 
 main at Jerusalem twelve years : φησ'ιν b 
 Π£Γ()θς• είρηκίναι τον κίψιον τοις άπο- 
 στήλοις' Έάν μεν ουν τις QiXriay τον 
 Ισραήλ μετανοήσαι Cia του ονόματος μου 
 πίστευαν επΙ τον θεόν, άφεβήσονται αύτφ 
 α'ι άμαρτίαι' μετά ίώδεκ^ι ϊτη εζίλθετε εις 
 τον κόσμοι', μή τις tliry Ονκ άκηκόαμεν. 
 But this could not be the case, as we have 
 Peter and John going down to Samaria, 
 ver. 14. 2. άνδρ. βΰλαβίϊς] Whether 
 
 Jews or Christians is not certain. Ananias 
 is so called, ch. xxii. 12 (not in rec. ), and 
 he was a Christian. At all events, there is 
 no contrast implied in the is (as Mey.), 
 ' Yet, notwithstanding the persecution and 
 dispersion, pious men were found who, 
 &c :' the Si is merely the transitional par- 
 ticle, — and, so far from its being any unusual 
 thing to bury an executed person, it was 
 commanded among the Jews. Olshausen 
 thinks that, if they had been Christians, the 
 term άίελφοί would have been used : but 
 this does not seem by any means certain : 
 we can hardly reason so minutely from the 
 diction of one section in the narrative to 
 that of another, especially in the case of a 
 section so distinct and peculiar as this one. 
 [Besides, άSt\φυi in this sense does not 
 occur till ch. ix. 30 : see reff. there.] 
 Probably they were pious Jews, not yet 
 converts, but hearers and admirers of 
 Stephen. 3. ελ\)μαίν€το] Properly 
 
 used of wild beasts, or of hostile armies, 
 devastating and ravaging. (See examples in 
 Kuin ) κατά τους υϊκους, ' entering• 
 
 (the houses) from house to house,'— a 
 pregnant construction. σνρων] So 
 
 Philo, in Flacc. p. 974, συρόμενοι κ. πα- 
 τοΰμενοι ίιά της πόλεως άπάσης ίξανα•
 
 2—9. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟχ\ΩΝ. 77 
 
 Οι μίν ονν '^ οιαστΓαρίντίς όιη\Οοι> ^ ivayyiXiZouivoi cveT.\. 
 
 ν (■ Λ / ς ^'Λ <>^ a ΛΛ^ . ' ' / _ d abs., ver. 40. 
 
 τυΐ' λογον. ΦιλιΤΓΤτος οε κατίλυων ίΐς ττυλιν της χΊπ.^ι^*' 
 
 Σ/ h • / 1 - \ / g i - xTii. 23. 
 
 αμαρίΐας ίκηρνσσίν αυτοις τον χριστον. ττροςίίγοί' χχ. asoniy. 
 
 οί οι Ο'^Χοι τοις Xiyouivnig υπο τον ΦιΧητπου ομόθυμα- ^^^^"^^^^; 
 
 Γ\^ 1» -5/ ι\ <0\' ^ -Λ ch.ix.32ai.8 
 
 COV, εν τω aKovtiv αυτούς και ρλεπειν τα σημίΐα α L-ikeoniy, 
 ετΓΟίίΐ' ' πολλοί γαρ των "" ίχοί'των '" πνευ/ιιατα '" α^α- hU'aidconstr. 
 θαοτα ° βοώντα ° φων?) ι/ενάλ?) έΗ»)ονοντο, ττολλοί δε χνΐΐΕ). ch. 
 
 ί t ' / ι 5 /ν "^ _ :^ j^g^ Phil 
 
 '^τταραλίλυμή'οι /ecu ''^wXot ^ ίθζξ)απίνθ7]σαν' εγενετο δε i.is. κ.τ.χρ., 
 πολλί7 χαρά. εν τ»? πόλει εκ:είν>?. ανηρ δε τις ovojuoTt ' Ττΐΐυίπ!''^' 
 
 Σι S ••- » "'Λΐ ' 'ιι'!^' ch. xvi. 14. 
 
 ιμων πξ)ονττϊ]ξ)χίν εν ττ) ποΛει μα-γίνων και εο,ιστα- ιηιη.ί.4ϋί. 
 
 Tif. 1.14. Heb. ϋ. 1. νϋ. 13. 2Pet. i. 19. P.sa. τ. 2. k eb. τϋ. 57 reif 1 Mntt. xiii. 
 
 4 al. ch. iii. i(i. Ezek. ix. 8. m M.irk iii. 3U. Zech. xiii. 2. η Luke xviii. 7, 38. ch. xvii. R al. 
 
 ο = Matt, xii.43. xvii. IS al. ρ Luke v. 18, 24. ch. ix. 33. Lake only, exc. Heb. xii. 12. 1 Alacc. ix. όδ 
 
 q Matt. xi. 5 al. r Matt. iv. 23 all. s Luke xxiii. 12 only. Job xlii. 17. t here only ί- 
 
 α -άνων here only, trans., Luke xxiv. 22 only. See Job xii. 17. 
 
 seth. — πορ(υομ(ΐ'ος 95. — ίΐς σφαγην κ. φνλακην 13. — 4. ανη\θυν 163. — 5. και εΧθων 
 D'-gr. — εις την πολ. {eaeyetical addition. The art is not needed, see note) AB 31. 40. — 
 ίταμαριας CDE. — 6. rec ττροςίΐγ. τι {corrn as before, ver 1 .' The copula in this sec- 
 tion is mostly Cf), with Ε : t.\t ABCD- (ως it ηκονον τταν οι όχλοι προςειχ. τοις λεγ. 
 D') : ττροςειχ. αντω κ. εττιστ^νον Syr ar-erp all e ν copt sah syr Eus. — τοι< om D' 96. — 
 
 aft υμυθ. ins οΐ'το D'. — 7. rec πολλών (alteration to avoid the difficulty : see 
 
 note. Meyer's account, that ιζηρχετο was first altered to -ovro to suit πνεύματα \the 
 converse is much more probable^, and then πολλών to -oi to furnish a plitr noni to 
 εϊ,ηρχοντο, seems to me very unlikely'), with Η all copt al Chr Thl Oec al : . . . πολλοίς D' : 
 D•' "uncertain .> αττο πολλοίς D at present, but prob D^ ? txt ABCD-.'E 18. 3G. 40 al ν 
 syrr sah. — rec με•^. φ. with many mss : txt ABCDEH all ν Chr Thl. — rec (ζηρχετο {see 
 above), with Η al Chr Thl' : add ίζ αντων Syr syr* sah : txt ABCDE all ThP.— πολλ. δε 
 και Ε 13 syr Chr: πολλ. τε al copt sah al. — εβεραπενοντο D J3. — 8. rec και εγ. [see 
 above on Cf, ver 6), with EH al vss (ay. ου»' ν al) Thl' : και εγ. Cf al : χαρά rt μεγ, εγ. D- 
 gr : txt ABC all copt (Cf om d sah : οντ ν) ThF. — rec χ. μεγάλη, with DEH &c vss Thl 
 al : txt ABC 47 (way^i.^reMf/. am aeth). — 9. προϋπάρχων D-gr. — /cai omD'. — rec εξ,ιστων 
 (corrn.''), with D-EH &c Bed-gr Thl al : seducens ν Iran : suadens e : mentem auferens 
 
 λώθησαν. ιταρίδίδου] viz. to the (Sichem). As the words stand here (πόλι ν 
 
 gaolers — so TrapaCiSovg εις φυλακής, ch. z= τήν πάλιν, aft. tiV, comp. also 2 Pet. 
 
 xxii. 4. ii. 6), seeing that Σαμάρεια (vv. 9. 14 ; cb. 
 
 4 — 12.] Preaching of the Gospel ix. 31 ; xv. 3) signifies the rf/.y^-ic/, I should 
 
 IN Samari.\ by Philip. 4.] μέν oiv be inclined to believe that Sychem is here 
 
 resumes the subject dropped at the end of also intended. It was a place of rising im- 
 
 ver. 1 , and determines this verse to be the portance, and in after-times eclipsed the 
 
 opening of a new section, not the close of the fame of its neighbour Samaria, which latter 
 
 former. διήλθ.] See reff. εΰαγγ. had been, on its presentation by Augustus 
 
 T. λογ.] Here first we become acquainted to Herod the Great, re-fortifietl and called 
 
 with the missionary language so frequent in Sebaste, Jos. Antt. xv. 7• 3, and 8. 5. It 
 
 the rest of the book: and we have τον λόγον, stiU, however, bore the name of Samaria, 
 
 an expression very familiar among Chris- Jos. xx. 6. 2, — where, from the conte.xt, 
 
 tians when the book was written, for r. λ. the district can hardly be intended. 
 
 τοϋ θευν. 5. ΦίλιττΊΓΟ?] The deacon; αΰτοϊξ] The inhabitants, imjilied in πόλις. 
 
 not, as Polycrates in Eus. H. E. iii. 31, 6. ττροςίϊχον . . .] If this place 
 
 V. 12, one of the twelve: this is precluded was Sychem, the narrative in John iv. 
 
 by vv. 1 and 14. And it is probable, that will fully account for the readiness with 
 
 the persecution should liave been directed which these people received the κήρνγ- 
 
 esj)ecially against the colleagues of Stephen. μα τοϋ χριστυν — 'the proclamation of 
 
 Philip is mentioned again as ό ειΊαγγελι- the Christ.' 7 ] According to the 
 
 στης, — probably from his having been the reading in the text, which is too strongly 
 
 first recitrdfi] who ίϊηιγγΛίηατο τϋν λόγιιν, upheld by MS autliority to be rejected for 
 
 — in ch. xxi. 8, — as married, and having four the easier ordinary one, πολλοί is a ' noiniiia- 
 
 daughters, virgins, who iir<)])lie.sied. tivus jiendens' (coriip. cli. vii. 10. Ki'v.iii.12. 
 
 Ίτόλιν τ. Σαμ.] \'(rbatim as Jolin iv. 5, in Winer, § 28. 3), ' For in the case of many 
 
 which case it is specified as being Sychar who had unclean spirits, they crying out
 
 78 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 -Luke νων TO '' tOvoc τϊ]ο ^auaoiiac, \ί-γων eivai ''τίνα εαυτόν 
 
 xxiii.2.Juhn . '..' ., 
 
 ncb.x.a? rrff. 
 
 Lukei. 15, yoVTSC 
 . vii. 1(1. ' ^ 
 
 ω ττ poi-iiyov " αττυ μικρού £ως• μεγαΛου Λί- 
 )τός ίστιν ή '' ^vvcuuq του θίοΰ ή καλουι. 
 
 ix. 48. ch. χίζ. 27. Hrb. ίτ. 14. χ. 21. χϋί. 20 
 ζ — Koin. i. Ifl. 1 Cor. i. 18, 24. 
 
 r*»!;'" "..ij., _ fiiyaV 
 
 Ουτός ίστιν η "^ δυΐ'((/ιιις του ϋίου η καλούμενη G μ,{ 
 
 χ ver. G refl". y Heb. τίϋ. 11, from Jer. xxxviii. (xsxi.) 34. Aτ>(Ί^p 
 
 GH 
 
 d: txt ABCD' (? φισταν(ν) 40. 9G'. — room E. — σαμαριης CDE. — 10. rec bef ακο, 
 ins παΐ'Γκ; (con-n to fill up the sense : Tisch refers to Heb viii. 11), with ABCDE ν 
 ((iTTfivr. 27. 2!). 3(i : aft \ίγ. 42) : om H all (abt 50) Oec Thl Iren. — rec om κ(ΐ\υΐ'μί)'η (as 
 appearing unnecessary, and being difficult, see note), with GH &c sah Syr Chr Thl : ins 
 
 with a loud voice, came out :' «ξήρχοντο 
 being plur., as often when the neuter jjlural 
 betokens living agents; see Winer, § 47• 3, a. 
 ΊΓολλοί has probably been altered to 
 ■ποΧλών, to agree with τών εχόντων, on the 
 difficulty being perceived. 9. Σίμ-ων] 
 
 Neander, in the course of some excellent 
 remarks on this whole history (see further 
 on ver. 14), identities, and I believe with 
 reason, this Simon with one mentioned as 
 living from ten to twenty years after this by 
 Josephus, Antt, xx. 7• 2, καθ' ov καιρόν 
 της lovCauiQ ίπίτρόπ(νσ( ΦηΧιΚ, θίασά- 
 
 μίνος ταίιτην (Drusilla) "Καμιίάνη 
 
 της γυναικός ϊπιθνμίαν, κα'ι Σίμωνα ονό- 
 ματι, τών ίαντιϊ) ψιλών, loiiSa^ov, Κυ- 
 ■πριον ίί γ^νος, μάγυν tlvai σκηπτόμινην, 
 •πίμττων ττρός αντην, (ττιιθε τον άνδρα 
 καταλίττοΐισαΐ' αΰτψ -γήμηηθαι. The only 
 difficulty seems to be, that Simon is stated 
 by Justin Martyr, himself a Samaritan, to 
 have been Έ,αμαρία, άττϋ κώμης λίγομίνης 
 Γίττων, But it has struck me that either 
 Justin, or perliaps more probably Josephus, 
 may have confounded Ghittim with Cliittim, 
 i. e. Citium in Cyprus. This conjecture I 
 also find mentioned in the Diet, of Bio- 
 gra])hy and Mythology, sub voce. The 
 account in Josephus is ((uite in character 
 with what we here read of Simon : not in- 
 consistent (Meyer) with ver. 24, which 
 appears to have been uttered under terror 
 occasioned by the solemn denunciation of 
 Peter. — Justin goes on to relate that he was 
 worshipped as a god at Rome in the time 
 of Claudius Csesar, on account of his magical 
 powers, and had a statue on the island in 
 the Tiber, inscribed ' Simoni Deo Sancto.' 
 Singularly enough, in the year 1 574, a stone 
 was found in the Tiber (or standing on the 
 island in the year 16';2, according to the 
 Diet, of Biogr. and Myth.), with the in- 
 scription SEMOM SANCO DEO FIDIO 
 SACRV^M, i.e. to the god Semo Sancus, 
 the Sabine Hercules, which makes it pro- 
 bable that Justin may have been misled. — 
 The history of Simon is full of legend and 
 fable. The chief sources of it are the Re- 
 cognitiones and Clementina of the pseudo- 
 Clemens. He is there said to have studied 
 at Alexandria, and to have been, with the 
 heresiarch Dositheus, a disciple of John 
 
 the Baptist. Of Dositheus he became first 
 the disciple, and then the successor. Origen 
 (in Matt. § 33) makes Dositheus also a Sama- 
 ritan : so also contr. Cels. i. 57. His own 
 especial followers (Simoniani) had dwindled 
 so much in the time of Origen, that he says 
 vvvi £t τους πάντας iv tij οίκονμιΐ']/ ούκ 
 ίστι Σιμωνιανονς tvpHV τον αριθμόν οΊ,μαι 
 τριάκοντα, και τάχα πλείονας ηττυν τών 
 όντων, contr. Cels. i. 57; see also ib. vi. 
 1 1, and πί|ϋϊ άρχων, iv. I7. In the Recog- 
 nitiones and the Clementina are long re[)orts 
 of subsequent controversies between Simon 
 Magus and Peter, of which the scene is laid 
 at Caesarea. According to Arnobius (adv. 
 Gentes, ii. ^), the Constt. Apostol. (ii. 14 ; 
 vi. 9), and Cyril of Jerusalem, he met with 
 his death at Rome, having, during an en- 
 counter with Peter, raised himself into the 
 air by the aid of evil spirits, and being preci- 
 pitated thence at the prayer of Peter and 
 Paul. — The fathers generally regard him 
 as the founder of Gnosticism : this may be 
 in some sense true : but, from the very little 
 authentic information we possess, it is im- 
 possible to ascertain how far he was identified 
 with their tenets. Origen (contr. Cels. v. G2) 
 distinctly denies that his followers were 
 Christians in any sense : λανθάνει τόν Κίλ- 
 <roi>, 'ότι ονΟαμώς τόν Ίησοΐη' όμυλογοτ- 
 σιν ιΊόν θεον ΈιμωνιανοΊ, άλλα orvajtw 
 βεον λίγοντι τόν Σίμωνα. μογ€ύων] 
 
 Not to be joined with προΰττηοχεν (as in 
 E. V. and Kuin.), which belongs to ίν πάλει : 
 — 'exercising magic arts,' such as then 
 were very common in the East and found 
 wide acceptance; impostors taking advan- 
 tage of the very general expectation of a 
 Deliverer at this time, to set themselves 
 up by means of such trickeries as ' some 
 great ones.' We have other examples 
 in Elymas (ch. xiii.) ; Apollonius of Tyana ; 
 and somewhat later, Ale.xander of Abono- 
 teichos : see these latter in Diet, of 
 Biogr. and Myth. τίνα μβ'γαν] 
 
 Probably not in such definite terms as his 
 followers later are represented as putting 
 into his mouth : ' Ego sum sermo Dei 
 . . . ego })aracletu«, ego omnipotens, ego 
 omnia Dei.' Jerome on Matt. 24. 
 10. ή δυν. τ. θ. ή καλουμ,Ενη μ€γάλη] 
 Neander (1. c.) and Meyer think that they
 
 10—13. 
 
 ΠΡΑΗΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 μίyaλ7]. ττροςίΐ'χον οε αυτω όια το ικανω νροι^ω "i-nke vms/. 
 
 - 1> ' c'lT ' ' ' . 12 " ^> ιΙ ' ' χίν "3 χχ'ϊ 
 
 ταις μα•γίΐαις ίί,^στακίναι αυτούς '■'' ^"^ «=—■•" 
 
 Illy. dat. 
 "• Λ^ \ ι e "* \ V ' ^ ^"^ee/I) λ' of duration, 
 
 τω Φιλιππω iua-yvfAtco/utvw τα περί της ρασιΑΐΐας Luke νϋί. 29. 
 του Οίυυ και του ονόματος Ιί^σου χριστού, ϊβαπτι^οντυ cvtrV"'!/' 
 
 «Λ \ - 1λ ' <^' ■^' \ 1 ν . ι d = Malt. sxi. 
 
 ανοοες τε και "γυναικίς. ο οε 2</^ίων και αυτός επ/στευ- S'lai Joim 
 
 σεν, /caj βαπτισθείς ην ^ προςκαρτερωί' τω Φιλίππω, cenl'xJ.e."' 
 
 θ 
 
 ίωοων τε 
 
 'δι 
 
 Φιλι'τ 
 
 1^ c,ii; 
 
 f constr., Luke i. 10, 20, &c. Jer. xxxiii. 20. g (Mark iii. 9.) = ch. i. 14 reff. h. 
 
 i = Matt. xi. 20, 21, 23 and 1. Mark vi. 2. Gal. iii. 5. k = Matt. xii. 2:4 al. f 
 
 e Luke vii 
 e ch. 
 reff. 
 
 h ch. Tii. 56 reff. 
 Gen. xliii. 33. 
 
 ABCDE all ν copt seth arm syrChr Thl {η λ{γο/ι. 137- 180 al).— 11. ικ(χνον χρονον 13 : 
 ικανοί' Kjiovui 142.— μαγίίΐις ACDEH. — (ξιστακεναι Α{-κίΐναι Α^)€{ίζίΐοτ. C)EH 
 137= txt B.'DG &c: tS,^nτηκt)^nι 142. — 12. bef -fpi om τα {as unneeded, and the 
 constr aft enayyiX. appearing harsh ; see ch six. 8) ABCDE 31. 30 (v syrr ar-erp seth) : 
 ins GH &t• Thl al. — tv τω ονόματι Syr ar-erp v-edtl : et in nomine v-nis ar-pol — rec τον 
 ιησ. with a few mss (appy) : txt ABCDEGH all Clir Thl. — ιησ. om 13. — rf oin A lect 12 
 sah. — 13. ην και π^ιυςκ. D'. — for τι, τα Β : δί al. — rec στ]μ(ΐα κ. ίνναμίΐς μίγαλας 
 γινομίνας, with ABC(om yiv.)O &c vss if with varieties of position &c : txt (ίυΐ'. κ. σιιμ. 
 EGH all syr ar-pol slav Chr Thl Oec : om μί•/αλ. GH all ar-pol Thl Oec : -γινυμίνα all 
 that read i. κ. σημ.). [The inference is that ta:t was the origl : first μιγαλα was in- 
 serted, as ch vi. 8 : then the more usual order, as ch iv. 30, v. \2, xiv. 3, Rotn xv. 19, 
 2 Cor. xii. 12, 2 Thess. ii. 9, Heb ii. 4, was adopted, and the gender of ^ty. changed to 
 
 must have referred to the λόγος, the creating 
 and governing manifestation of God so much 
 spoken of in the Alexandrine philosophy 
 (see extracts from Philo in note on John i. 
 The term, but by no means with the same 
 idea, was adopted by the Spirit, speaking by 
 John, as belonging to the Son of God : see 
 the same note, end), and must have regarded 
 Simon as an incarnation of the λόγος (the 
 ^ί/ΓρότΓολις τταπών των δυνάμιων τοΐι 
 θίον, Philo), so that their erroneous belief 
 would form some preparation for the great 
 truth of an incarnate Messiah, preached by 
 Philip. But to this De W. well replies, 
 that we can hardly suppose the Alexandrine 
 philosophy to have been so familiar to the 
 mass of the people, and refers the expres- 
 sion to their j)opular belief of a great angel 
 (Chron. Sam. 10), who rnight, as the angels 
 were called by the Samaritans the powers 
 of Gild (for which he refers to Reland, de 
 Samar. § 7• Gesen. Theol. Samar. p. 21 ff.), 
 be designated as »'/ ί•ΰν. τ. θ. y) καλυυμη'η 
 /i{γ<-(λ^J. καλονμΐ€νη rests on such 
 
 strong MS authority, and is so unlikely 
 to have been inserted (the idea of a scho- 
 lium to indicate the force of the art. 
 [Bloomf.] is quite out of the question, 
 no such scholium being here needed), that 
 both on external and internal grounds it 
 must form part of the text. The lit. 
 rendering will be, ' This man is the 
 power of God which is called great :' 
 the sense, ' This man is that jiovvcr of 
 God (see above) which we know as the 
 great one.' — λίγο/ιίΐ'»;, found in a few 
 later mss, is an explanation of καλ. by a 
 more usual word. 13.] ' Simon saw 
 
 his followers dropping off, and was him- 
 self astounded at the miracles wrought by 
 Philip : he therefore thought it best himself 
 also to acknowledge this superior power. 
 He attached himself to Philip, and was bap- 
 tized like the rest : but we are not, as the 
 sequel shews, to understand that the preach- 
 ing of the Gospel had made any imjiression 
 on his heart, but that he accounted for what 
 he saw in his own fashion. He was con- 
 vinced, from the works which Philip did, 
 that he was in league vnth some potreifd 
 spirit .• he viewed baptism as the initiation 
 into communion with that spirit, and ex- 
 pected that he should be able to make use 
 of the higher power thus gained for his own 
 purposes, and unite this new magical power 
 to his own. All were baptized who pro- 
 fessed belief in Jesus as the Messiah : there 
 was therefore no reason for rejecting Simon, 
 considering besides, that from the nature of 
 the case he would for the time have given 
 up his magical practices.' Neander, Pfl.u. 
 Leit. p. 102. — ' Hoc Simonis exemplo clare 
 patet, non conferri omnibus inditferenter in 
 Baptismo gratiam, quae illic figuratur. Pa- 
 pistarum dogma est, Nisi quis ponat obiceni 
 peccati mortalis, omnes cum signis recipere 
 veritatem et effectum. Ita magicam vim 
 tribuunt Sacramentis, quasi absque tide pro- 
 sint. Nos autem sciamua ofterri nobis a 
 Domino per Sacramciita quicquid sonant 
 annexa; promissioiics, et non frustra ntc 
 inaniter olierri, modo lide ad Christum di- 
 recti ab i])so petamus ()ui((|uid Sacranicnla 
 promittunt. Qiiamvis autem nihil illi tunc 
 j)rofuerit IJaptismi receptio, si tamen con- 
 versio postea secuta est, ut nounuUi conji-
 
 80 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 YIU. 
 
 i(«pLnkfix. 14 Άκονσαΐ'Τίν δε οι ΐν ']ίροσο\υμηις απόστολοι υπ δί- abcde 
 
 ο'Λ.) I'll. XI. 1. ^ Ι ' GH 
 
 ?TiV«i.'i.n. SeKTai ή Σαμίψίΐα τυν ' λόγον τυΰ Οεοΰ, αττί'σΓίΐλαΐ' προς 
 
 ii. 13. Ριυν. , ^ , , , 15 '' m /^3 ' 
 
 '"•'"•,.. αυτούς ΙΙέτρον «rot ίωαννην, ^'^ οιτινίς καταραντες 
 
 m •• Mark ill. ^ ^ ' ' 
 
 2•.'. Luke ii. 51 al. fr. 
 
 correx/)itnil).—H. κρονσαΧημ D. — σαμάρια CDE : /; om 95 : και η 137- — rec τον πετρ. 
 with GH al Thl : ora art ABCDE (avrou for αυτούς Ε) all Chrj. — 15. π-ρος-ίυξ. Β (;;υξ. 
 
 ciuiit, lion cxtincta fuit nee abolita utilitas. 
 Siepe cniin tit, ut post longuin temjius 
 demuin operetur Spiritus Dei, quo efficaciam 
 suam Sacramenta proferre incipiant.' Calvin 
 in loc. 
 
 14_25.] Mission of Peter and John 
 TO S.\M.\Ri-\. 14.] A question arises 
 
 on this procedure of the Apostles : — whe- 
 ther it was as a matter of course, that the 
 newly baptized should, by the laying on of 
 hands subsequently, receive the Holy Ghost, 
 — or whether there was in the case of these 
 Samaritans any thing peculiar, which caused 
 the Apostles to go down to them and per- 
 form this act. (1) The only analogous 
 case is ch. \\x. ό, 6 : in using which we 
 must observe that there it is distinctly 
 asserted that the miraculous gifts of the 
 Spirit followed the laying on of Paul's 
 hands ; and that by the expression θίίχσά- 
 μίνος in ver. 18, which must be taken 
 literally, the same is implied here. And 
 on this point the remarks of Calvin are too 
 important to be omitted : ' Hie occurrit 
 quaestio. Dicit enim tantum fnisse bap- 
 iizatos in nomine Christi, atque ideo non- 
 dum fuisse Spiritus partieipes. Atqui vel 
 inanem et omni virtute et gratia carere 
 Baptismum oportet, aut a Spiritu sancto 
 habere <|uir(juid efficacise habet. In Bap- 
 tismo abluimur a jioccatis : atqui lavaerum 
 nostrum Spiritus sancti opus esse doeet 
 Paulus (Tit. iii. 5). Aqua Baptismi san- 
 guinis Christi symbolum est : atqui Petrus 
 Spiritum esse prjedicat, a quo irrigamur 
 Christi sanguine (I Pet. i. 2). In Baptis- 
 mo crucitigitur vetus noster homo, ut sus- 
 citemur in vitae novitatem (Rom. vi. G) : 
 unde autera hoc totum, nisi ex sanctifica- 
 tione Spiritus .' Denique Baptismo nihil 
 reliquum fiet, si a Spiritu separetur. Ergo 
 Samaritanos, qui vere Christum in Bap- 
 tismo induerant, Spiritu quoque vestitos 
 fuisse negandum non est (Gal. iii. 27)• 
 Et sane Lucas hie non de communi Spiri- 
 tus gratia loquitur, qua nos sibi Deus in 
 fihos regenerat, sed de singularibus illis 
 donis, quibus Dominus initio Evangelii 
 quosdam esse praeditos voluit ad ornandum 
 Christi regnum.' And a little after : . . . . 
 ' Papistae, dum ficticiam suam confirmatio- 
 nem e.xtoUere volunt, in bane sacrilegam 
 vocem prorurapere non dubitant, semi- 
 christianos esse, quibus manus nondum 
 fuerunt impositae. Hoc jam tolerabile non 
 
 est, quod quum symbolum hoc temporals 
 asset, ipsi perpetuam legem finxerunt in 
 
 Eeclesia Atqui fateri eoguntur ipsi 
 
 quoque, Ecclesiam nonnisi ad tempus donis 
 istis fuisse ornatam. Unde sequitur, im- 
 positionem manuum, qua usi sunt Apostoli, 
 finem habuisse, quum eftectus cessavit ' (in 
 loc.). The English church, in retaining the 
 rite of confirmation, fias not grounded it 
 on any institution by the Apostles, but 
 merely declared the laying on of hands on 
 the candidates, to certify them (by this 
 sign) of God's favour and goodness towards 
 them, to be ' after the example of the holy 
 Apostles.' Nor is there any trace in the 
 office, of the conferring of the Holy Ghost 
 by confirmation ; — but a distinct recognition 
 of the former reception of the Holy Spirit 
 (at Baptism), and a prayer for the increase 
 of His influence, proportioned to the maturer 
 life now opening on the newly confirmed. 
 (2) If then we have here no institution of 
 a perpetual ordinance, something peculiar 
 to the case before us must have prompted 
 this journey. And here again we have a 
 question : Was that moving cause in the 
 Samaritans, or in Philip .' I believe the 
 true answer to the question will be found 
 by combining both. Our Lord's command 
 (ch. i. 8) had removed all doubt as to 
 Samaria being a legitimate field for preach- 
 ing, and Samaritan converts being admis- 
 sible. (So also with regard to Gentile 
 converts, — see eh. x., notes: but they 
 must be circumcised, which the Samaritans 
 already were, — and keep the law, which 
 after their manner the Samaritans did.) The 
 sudden ajipearance, however, of a body of 
 baptized believers in Samaria, by the agency 
 of one who was not one of the Apostles, — 
 while it would excite in them every feeling 
 of thankfulness and joy, would require their 
 presence and power, as Apostles, to perform 
 their especial part as the divinely appointed 
 Founders of the Church. Add to this, that 
 the Samaritans appear to have been credu- 
 lous, and easily moved to attach them- 
 selves to individuals, whether it were Si- 
 mon, or Philip ; which might make the 
 App. desirous to be present iri person, and 
 examine, and strengthen their faith. An- 
 other reason may have been not without its 
 influence : the Jewish church at Jerusalem 
 would naturally for the most part be alien- 
 ated in mind from this new body of be-
 
 14—20. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 81 
 
 " ττροςηυ^αΐ'ΓΟ ^ περί αυτών όπως λαρωσιν πιηνμα αγιον* η coi. is ai. 
 ουόίπω yap ην εττ ουοίνι αυτών ° ίπιπίπτωκος, ^ μόνον „ ^{'[^^fp^lf^ 
 
 δλ /3 /3 ' q ' "" Γ ' ν >' - ' cli.x44. χΊ. 
 
 £ Ιοίραπτισμενοι υπηργον ίΐς τυ υνομα του κυρίου i.ioniy. 
 
 1);σου. ' τότε επετιυεσαν τας -χείρας επ αυτούς, fft q ^Lukexl."'' 
 
 εΑαμρανον πνεύμα ayiov. κ^εασαμενος όε ο 2,ιμων οτι ais. ch.u. 
 
 Βιά της ' επιθέσεως των -χειρών των αποστόλων " οίδοτοί y^mestifis. 
 
 το πνενμα, ^ προςήνενκεν αυτοις " γοηματα Χε-γων Δότε ii.i1t.iii Ή. 
 
 καμοι την εί,ουσιαν ταυτην, ινα ω εαν επιυω τας -γειρας ^ι»^! Rom ^^ι- 
 
 λί3 ' - W 20 Π ' 5'^ ''' \ 1 \ S Num. χχνϋ. 
 
 apfjavy πνεύμα ayiov. ίίετρος οε ειπεν προς αυτόν ΐ8. Matt.ix. 
 
 1 1 Tim. iv. 14. 2 Tim. i. 6. Heb. vi. 2 only J. See 2 Chron. xxv.27. u pres., John 1. 40 al. fr. Winer, 
 
 J41-2. τ = here only. Aii^oi/ προ5?'ί'ρ>:"'. Dem. p. 1168. w Maik x. 23, 24. Luke xviii. 24 
 
 only in Gospp. Ter. 2U and cb. xxiv. 26 only. χ = Matt. x. 1 al. fr. DaQ.Tii.6. 
 
 ACDEGH &c).— 16. w Ιβ, 17 om 13 {similarity of endgs).—rec ουπω, with GH al Thl : 
 tst ABCDE all Did Chr, (It is someivhat difficult to decide here, ουπω is the simpler 
 word, and likeliest to be an emendation : on the other hand, ονζιπω is found with 
 ουίιις, Luke sxiii. 5.3, John xix. 41, 1 Cor. viii. 2, and thus may have been a corrn, as 
 more usual. I have therefore followed MS authority.) — for fjr, επι D' : iv E. — ov- 
 S(va D. — (ΤΓίπε-τ. om Syr : εττίβιβηκος 100 : venerat ν Fiilg : supervenerat tol. — 
 Xp. ιησ. GH all ar-pol Oec ThP : κυρ. του ιησ. D : ιΐ]σ. χο. 80. — 17. rec επετιθουν 
 with D'EGH &c Thl al : txt ΑΒ(-θοσαι0Ο(-θ£ΐ<ταν)Ο2 " all Eus Did Cyr-jer. — 
 18. for θίασαμίνος, ιίων ABCDE all Constt Bas Chrj Dam al (corrn from θιασ., 
 a word carrying meaning as implying the more deliberate contemplation of the 
 fact as a spectator of it, to the less significant and more usual icwv) : txt GH &c Thl. — 
 ο bef aiju. om 137• 180. — rec aft irv. ins το ayiov {common addition, and suspicious 
 wherever there is any variation in MSS), with ACDE ν : om Β sah Constt. — Trpogrjya- 
 yf J' 177• — 19• bef λιγ. ins τταρακαλων και D. — rec av, with DH all Constt Chr Cyr-jer al : 
 txt AB(e sil)CEG &c Thl Oec. — aft επιθω ins καγω D (aft iia Constt), — λαμβαϊ'ει 
 
 lievers. The hatred between Jews and — and in ch. x. to the Gentiles. So far, is 
 
 Samaritans was excessive and unrelenting, plain truth of Scripture history. The mon- 
 
 It would therefore be in the highest degree strous fiction begins, when to Peter is at- 
 
 important that it should be shewn to the tributed a fixed diocese and successors, and 
 
 church at Jerusalem, that these Samaritans, to those successors a delegated power more 
 
 by the agency of the same Apostles, were like that ascribed to Simon Magus than 
 
 partakers of the same visibly testified gifts that promised to Peter. — This is the last 
 
 of the one Spirit. The use of this argu- time that John appears in the Acts. He is 
 
 ment, which was afterwards applied by Peter only once more mentioned in the N. T. 
 
 in the case of the Gentiles, unexpected even (exc• in the Rev•), viz., as having been pre- 
 
 by himself, ch. xi. 17, — was probably no sent in Jerusalem at Paul's visit, Gal. ii. 9. 
 
 small part of the purpose of this journey to 15• ττροςηνξ•] So laying on of hands 
 
 Samaria. 14. Π€τ. κ. Ίωάν.] Per- is preceded by prayer, ch. xiii• 3. 
 
 haps two, in accordance with the δύο £ύο 18. θ€ασάμ€νος] Its effects were therefore 
 
 of their first missionary journey (Mark visible (see above), and consequently the 
 
 vi. 7) : so Paul and Barnabas afterwards effect of the laying on of the Apostles' 
 
 (ch. xiii. 2) : and the fame principle seems hands was not the inward but the outward 
 
 to have been adhered to even when these last miraculous gifts of the Spirit. ιτροςην. 
 
 separated : Paul chose Silas, Barnabas took αύτ. χρήματα] De W. excellently re- 
 
 Mark. — Peter, — because to him belonged, marks, ' He regarded the capability of im- 
 
 in this early part of the gospel, in a re- parting the Holy Spirit, — rightly, as some- 
 
 markable manner, the first establishing of thing conferred, as a derived poicer (sec 
 
 the church; it was the fulfilment of the Matt• x• 1), but wrongly, as one to be 
 
 promise ίπ'ι ravry ry πέτρα οίκυδημήσΜ obtained by an external method, without 
 
 μου την ΐκκλησίαν. It was ho who had an inward disposition .• and, since in ex- 
 
 (in common with all the Apostles, it is true, ternal commerce every thing may be had 
 
 but in this early period more especially com- for gold, he wanted to buy it. This is the 
 
 mitted to him) τος κλίΤοας- της βασιλείας essence of the sin of Simony, which is 
 
 r(7iv ουρανών, — who opened the door to the intimately connected with uiibelict in the 
 
 3000 on the day of Pentecost, — now (as a power and signification of the Spirit, and 
 
 formal and ratifying act) to the Samaritans, with materialism.' — Clearly, from the nar- 
 
 VoL. II. G
 
 82 
 
 ΠΡΑαΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 y -cli.il. 39. Τ Ο 
 
 eliuir.d-h. - 
 
 ι Tim. vi. U. 
 Ileb. χ. Μ. 
 Rev. xvii. 8. 
 Dan. ii. 4. 
 iiir.,2Pet.ii. 
 1 and λΡ. 
 ζ — ch ii.^H. 
 z. 4.'i. John 
 
 σοι» συν σοι ίΐη £ic απωλίίαν, on την abcd 
 tdv ίνομισας cia ■^ηηματων κτασααι. 
 -^ ουκ ίστιν σοι '' //£jO/c ου^Β '^κλήρος εν τω λο- 
 
 ςν/ , <Ι e 'Λ - f'' 
 
 anbia σον ουκ ίστιν tuVtia ίναντι 
 
 αο•γυξ)ΐον 
 ψίαν του 
 
 'JV 
 
 γ((θ Kdocia σον 
 ' μίτανοησον οΰν 
 
 111. 
 
 acnnslr., 1 Cor. 
 
 bi"ke'x.4•... της κηρ 
 
 ουκ ίστιν 
 ^ ατΓΟ 
 
 i ' 
 ίΐ 
 
 τούτω 
 του Οίοΰ. 
 και 
 
 της κακίας σου 
 ^ίηΟητι του κυξίίου, ' ίΐ άρα αφίθησίται 
 
 ιας σον £ΐς yap •χολτ)ν ιτικριας και ^ 
 
 ταύτης, 
 σοι η επινοια 
 
 ι•1ι. xii ϋ. Γ> ο ' ^ ' ' " " 
 
 2Cor. Ti. 15. όίσυοΐ' ' αοικιας 00(0 σε οντά. 
 
 Col.iliLP τ . ,^, r - r ν . - 
 
 D-^uj^• »'j '-• ειττεν /Λίηυητε υμίΐς νπίρ ίμου 
 
 24 
 
 αποκριθίΐς δε ο Σ/μωυ 
 
 ττρος τον κνριον, οττως 
 
 χχνί. 1R. Deat. χίϊ. 27. be Deut. xviii. 1. I.'^a. Ivii. β. d =■ Luke ίτ. 36. cli. xv. 0. e = ch.xiii. 
 
 10. 2 Pet. ii. 15. Ps Ixxvil. .S?. f Luke i. 8 only. Exoci.Ti.12al.fr. g Htb. vi. 1 only. 
 
 (— μ. ίκ, Rev. ii. 21 and al.l ίπί, 2 Cor. xii. 21.) Jer. viii. 6. h — 1 Cor. v. 8 al. Gen. vi. 5. 
 
 Icli. vii. 1 only. Xen. Mem. ii. 2. 2. It = Matt. vi. 12 al. I.sa. xxii. 14. 1 here only. Sir. xl. 2. 
 
 ni -• ver. 20. η Malt, xxvii. 34 only. no Deut. xxix. 18. Lam. iii. 15. ο Rom iii. 14. Eph. 
 
 iT.31. Meb. xii. 15 only. Ps. ix. 27. ρ Eph. iv. 3. Col. ii. 19. iii. 14. L. P. pq Isa. Iviii. 6. 
 
 Fill al. — 20. TO and σου oni D. — (ΐη om 177'• — 21. for εστί, (τι 100. — /itpocEal. — yap 
 om D 177'• — rcc ινωπιην {corrn to more usual loord), with EGH &c Coustt Ath Till al : 
 t.\t A15C(-rioi')D all Iren Bas Chr Dam. — 22. ovv om 180. — rec for κυρ., θεού (corr?i 
 from ver 21 : or doctrinal^), with GH &c vss Thl : txt ABODE all copt sah arm syr 
 Constt Ath Bas Chr Ambr. — 23. ην {tv'i tig D^) yap πικρίας {-αν D-) χο\η (-ί/ς D^) 
 If. συν^σμω (-ov Ό') D'.— for ορω, θεωρώ DE 137- 180 Constt Chr.— 24. ο om EH 
 95'. 00. — ειπεν προς αυτούς D (seth). — παρακαλώ βεηθ. D 137• 180 syr* Constt. — 
 περί εμού D al. — for κυρ., θεον {see above, ver 22) D all Syr {θεον syr-marg) aeth ar-crp 
 
 rative, Simon himself did not receive the 
 Spirit by the laying on of hands. His 
 nefarious attempt to treat with the App. 
 was before he himself had been presented 
 to them for this purpose. 20.] The 
 
 solemn denunciation of Peter, like the de- 
 claration of Paul, 1 Cor. vi. 13, has refer- 
 ence to the perishableness of all worldly 
 good, and of those with it, whose chief 
 end is the use of it (see Col. ii. 22). ' Thy 
 gold and thou are equally on the way to 
 corrujition :' thy gold, as its nature is : 
 thou with it, as having no higher life than 
 thy natural corrupt one : as being bound 
 in the σύνΟεσμος της αδικίας. The expr. 
 of Peter, 1 Pet. i. ', χρυσίυυ τοϋ άπυλλυ- 
 μίνυν, is remarkably parallel with this (see 
 too 1 Pet. i. 18). Ινόμι,σας] aor. ' thou 
 
 thoughtest :' not ' thou hast thought,' as 
 E. V. The historic force of the tense is to 
 be kept here : the Ap. uses it as looking for- 
 ward to the day of απώλεια, ' Let thy lot 
 be άπ., and that because thou thoughtest,' 
 &c. κτάσθ.] ' to acquire,' not pass, 
 
 as E. v., ungrammatically. 21. μ£ρΐ5 
 
 . . . κλήρος] synonymous : the tirst lit., 
 the second tig. (see retT.), but not with- 
 out ref. perhaps to the κληρονομιά of 
 the kingdom of God, the κ•λ. άφθαρτος, 
 1 Pet. i. 4. τω λογ. τούτ.] ' The 
 
 matter now spoken of,' — 'to which I 
 now allude.' evBeia] Hardly, ' right 
 
 before God,' E. V., but ' thy heart is not 
 right, — sincere, single meaning, — in God's 
 presence,' ' as God sees it:' i. e., ' seen as 
 it really is, by God, is not in earnest in its 
 seeking after the gospel, but seeks it with 
 
 unworthy ends in view.' 22.] el αρα, 
 
 'if perhaps' (not ^ ut sane,' which it will 
 not bear) : and tlie uncertainty refers, not 
 to the doubt whether Simon would repent 
 or not (see below on ynp) : but as to whe- 
 ther or not his sin may not have come 
 under the awful category of those unpar- 
 donable ones sjiecified by our Lord, Matt, 
 xii. 31, to which words the form άφεθησεται 
 seems to have a tacit reference. Peter does 
 not pronotmce his sin to have been such, 
 but tlirows in this doubt, to increase the 
 motive to repent, and the earnestness of his 
 repentance. This verse is important, taken 
 in connexion with John xx. 23, as shewing 
 how completely the App. themselves re- 
 ferred the forgiveness of sins to, and left it 
 in, the sovereign power of God, and not to 
 their own delegated potrer of absolution. 
 23.] γάρ gives the reasons, not why 
 it would be difficult for forgiveness to take 
 place, but why he had such extreme need 
 of repentance and prayer, as being tied 
 and bound by the chain of sin. οντά 
 
 els] a pregnant constr. — ' having fallen 
 into anii abiding in :' not to be taken (as 
 Kuin., &c.) as ' amounting to,' — ' totus 
 quantus es, nil nisi venenum amarum es et 
 colligatio iniquitatis,' which is very harsh, 
 and improbable : nor (as Stier) is it pro- 
 phetic, as to what would be the conse- 
 quence, if lie did not rejient : ' / see that 
 thou wilt come to,' Sec. Least of all must 
 it be said, here or any where else, that εΙς is 
 jnit for tv. I cannot too often remind my 
 younger readers, that it is a fundamental 
 maxim of all sound scholarship, that tio word
 
 21—26. 
 
 ΠΡΛ;ξ?ΕΙΣ ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λί2Ν. 
 
 83 
 
 r ch. siii. 40. 
 icah iii. 11. 
 
 jurjSiv ^ eweXQrj επ εμε ών ειρηκατε. Οι μεν ουν ^ δια 
 
 ' 'ΙΛΛ' ^Λ' - ' Micah iii. 11. 
 
 aaoTVoauivoi και Ααλιισαντες τον Λούοι^ του /cuptou, s Luke χνί. 28 
 
 ur/' » «Γ ' ΛΛ/ ν/ _ ch.ii. 4ϋ»17. 
 
 " υπεστρίφον εις Ιεροσόλυμα, ποΑΛας τε '' κωμας των ai^^p;*'^•^ 
 
 ν - W ' \ ΐγ . 26 " Λ ^* ' 'Λ ' (Heb. ii.6.) 
 
 2,αμαρειτων ευηγγελ/ςονΓΟ ayytAog οε κυρίου ελα- Jer vi. m. 
 
 Χησεν προς Φίλιπποι' λέγων ^ Ανάστηθι και ττοοευου α1αί^ί%. 
 
 ν \ζ η > »^■>^a''^\ ^a /Ο' ^"d »'*' '■> 
 
 κατα μεσημρριαν εττι την οοον την καταραινουσαν Lake. Gai.i. 
 
 1. L. p. (exc. aiark xiv. 40, but qu. reading?) Gen. 1.14. vLakeix.52al.fr. Matt. ix. 3.5, &c. 
 
 wconstr., Luke iii. 18. ch.xiv. 21. xvi. in. Isa. xl.9. χ =• Matt. ix. 9. Mark x. 50. Luke i.3!) al. fr. 
 
 Junah iii. 2. y = ver. 36. ch. xx?ii. 12. Phil. iii. 14. ζ ch. xsii. 6 only. Gen. xviii. 1. 
 
 a here only. See Matt. vii. 14. Prov. vii. 27. 
 
 V (ms). — ΐπ(λ. {έλθη 56 lect 12) μοι τούτων τοιν κακών ον (ων D^, ω^ G) up. (iitre ins 
 κακών Ε) μοι D, and add ος (om syr-marg) ττολλα κ\αιωι> ον ϋΐί\ν(ι)μτΓαΐ'(ν D' S3'r-marg. 
 — 25. διαμαρτυρομινοι G all ThP. — for κυρ., θεού Α all sjrr copt seth ν (ms) sab Thl' : 
 om 3. 4'. G5 : κυρίου 180 ν (ms) Syr arr copt. — rec νττεστοί'φαν [alteration to historic 
 tense), with CEGH &c vss Thl : txt ABD 15. 18. 3G. 81. lOO". 105 ν Aug.— rec ιερονσαλημ 
 (corrn to common form, see ver 26 : but •αολνμα perhaps occurs here as helonging to 
 a narrative in which this form has been the one used, see vv 1. 11. In the follg nar- 
 rative, -σαλημ is used, vv 26, 27), with GH &c OecThl : txt ABCDE all Chr.— rec ίυηγ. 
 yiXiaavro (see above, on υπεστρ.), with GH &c vss Thl al : t.xt ABCDE 37. 40. 81. 100. 
 i05. 163 sah ν Aug. — 26. woptvOijTi CD (αναστας τνορ. D al) 96. 177• — for κατά, 
 προς Ε 130. 180 Chr. — for επι, εις Η. — for καταβαιν., φερουσαν 3. 95. — αύτη all. — 
 
 is ever put for another. χολ.. ττικρ.] 
 
 see reff. ' the gall which is the very seat and 
 essence of bitterness ' — ' a very gall of 
 bitterness.' The poison of serpents was 
 considered to be seated in their gall : so 
 χολή άσ—ίϋος ti' γαστρΊ αΰτυΐ', Job xx. 14. 
 See Phn. H. N. xi. 37.' 24.] Simon 
 
 speaks here much as Pharaoh, Esod. (viii. 
 28; ix. 28) x. 17, — who yet hardened his 
 heart afterwards (Stier). It is observable 
 also that he wishes merely for the averting 
 of the punishment. The words οττως μηδέν 
 ϊπίλθρ επ' εμε ών είρήκατε seem remark- 
 ably to set forth the mere terror of the carnal 
 man, without any idea of the ίμε becoming 
 another man in thoughts and aims. 
 
 25 — 40.] CoxTERSiox of the ^Ethio- 
 
 PIAN EUNUCH BY PhILIP's TE.\CHING. 
 
 25.] μ.€ν ovv indicates perhaps (but 
 see var. readd., on Ιεροσόλυμα) that the 
 paragraph should begin here, not at ver. 
 26 as commonly : see on ver. 4. 
 κώμας τ. Σαμ.] It is interesting to re- 
 call Luke ix. 52, where on their enter- 
 ing into a κώμην Έαμ., the same John 
 wi.shes to call down firo from heaven, καΐ 
 άναλώσαι αυτούς. On constr. (iiViyy, 
 w. accus.), see reff. — The gradual sowing 
 of the seed further and further from Jeru- 
 salem is advancing : not only is this eunuch 
 to carry it to a far distant land, but Philip 
 is sent to a desert road, away from town or 
 village, to seek him. [The imperfects (al- 
 tered in the rec, see var. readd., into aorists) 
 are significant. They were on their way 
 back to Jerusalem, and were evangelizing 
 the Samaritan villages, when the angel 
 spake (aor.) to Philip.] 26.] An angel, 
 
 vimbly appearing .• not in a dream, — which 
 
 G 
 
 is not, as some suppose, implied by ανά- 
 στηθι, see reff. The ministration of angels 
 introduces and brings about several occur- 
 rences in the beginning of the church, see 
 ch. V. 19; X. 3; xii. 7 (xxvii. 2:i). The 
 appearance seems to have taken place in 
 Samaria, after the departure of Peter and 
 John. — He would reach the place appointed 
 by a shorter way than through Jerusalem : 
 he would probably follow the high road (of 
 the itineraries, see map in Conybeare and 
 Howson's St. Paul) as far as Gophna, and 
 thence strike across the country south west- 
 ward to join, at some point to which he 
 would be guided, the road leading from Je- 
 rusalem to Gaza. Γάζαν] The south- 
 ernmost city of Canaan (Gen. x. 19), in 
 the portion of Judah (Josh. xv. 47), but 
 soon taken from that tribe by the Philistines, 
 and always spoken of as a Philistian city 
 (1 Sam. vi. 17• 2 Kings xviii. 8. Amos i. 
 6 — 8. Zeph. ii. 4. Zech. ix. 5). In Jer. 
 xlvii. 1, we have ' before Pharaoh (Xecho .') 
 smote Gaza,' — implying that at one time it 
 was under Egypt. Alexander the Great 
 took it after a siege of five months (Q. 
 Curt. iv. 6, 7. Arrian, Alex. ii. 26) but 
 did not destroy it (as Strabo relates in 
 error, xvi. 759, see below in this note), 
 for we find it a strong place in the sub- 
 sequent Syrian wars, see 1 Mace. ix. 52 ; 
 xi. 61, f. ; xiii. 43; xiv. 7; xv. 28; xvi. 
 1 ; Jos. Antt. xiii. 5. 5, 13. 3 al. — It was 
 destroyed by the Jewish king Alexander 
 Jannaeus (96 a.c), Jos. Antt. xiii. 1.3. 3, 
 after a siege of a year, but rebuilt again by 
 the Roman general Gabinius (Antt. xiv. 
 5. 3), — afterwards given by Augustus to 
 Herod (xv. 7. 3), and finally after his death
 
 S4 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 Hnd Matt, 
 xix. IL' only. 
 
 -hereonijt απο Ίερουσαλη /u (Ίς TataV αντη ίστιν έρημος. "' και 
 ■"'""" " αι-ηστος ίποοίνΟη. και ιδού ανηρ ΑίΟΊοφ "" ιυνοΰγος 
 '' δυνάστικ Καΐ'δάκ:ί?ς• '' βοσ(λίσσί;ς Αιθιόπων, ος i)v em 
 
 ττροςκυί'ί^σων tig 
 
 f = ch. xii. 20. Eph. iv. fl. Rom. ix. 5. 
 h abs., John iv. 2U. xii. 20. 
 
 ABCD 
 EG Η 
 
 
 .Ual 
 d Luke i. 62. 
 1 Tim. vi. 15 
 
 iflT^'sL τάσης της " -γαί,ης 
 
 viii. 1. e Matt. xii. 421 L. Rev. xviii. 7 only. Jer. xxxvi.2. 
 
 e here only. Kzr.vii.21. Estli. iv. 7. See Luke xxi. 1 |. Julin viii. 20. 
 ch. xxiT. II. I'.". T. 7. 
 
 αυτής, ος ίληΧυθει 
 
 27. tnoptixTo Uia.— rcc r;jc βησ. {corrn) with GH &c Chr Thl : txt ABCD (add τίνος D') 
 Ε ΛΟ^.— ος (1st) om 142 : (2ii(l) om AC'D' ν sail Oec {corrn for consir sake, to prevent 
 ανηρ bcijiff pendent, and make it the nom to tXy/XvOn) : ins B(e sil, but see Bentl 
 [Tiscli])C-D'EGII mss (appy) copt syr &c Chr Thl.— t ν ΐφ. G.— 28. for τί, h BC e 
 attached to the province of Syria (xvii. and why no more such notices ? In the 
 
 11. 4). Mela, in the time of Claudius, calls 
 it ' ingens urbs et munita admodura,' with 
 which agree Eusebius and Jerome. At 
 present it is a large town by the same name, 
 with from )5,(»00 to KJ.OOO inhabitants 
 (Robinson, ii. G40). The above chronolo- 
 gical notices shew that it cannot have been 
 ϊρΌμ"ζ at tliis time: see below. αΰτη 
 
 Ιστιν €ρημο5] The words, I believe, of the 
 anffcl, not of Luke. There appear to have 
 been two (if not more) ways from Jerusa- 
 lem to Gaza. The Antonine itinerary passes 
 from Jerus. to Eleutheropolis — Askalon — 
 Gaza. The Peutinger Table, Jerus. — 
 Ceperaria — Eleuth. — Ask. — Gaza. But 
 Robinson (ii. 748. Winer, RWB.) found an 
 ancient road leading direct from Jerusalem 
 to Gaza, through the IVadi Musurr, and 
 over the Beit Jiibrin, which certainly at 
 present is ίρημος, without towns or vil- 
 lages. Thus the words will refer to the 
 tray : and denote, ' the way of whicli I 
 speak to thee is desert ' (Schiittg. cites 
 from Arrian, iii. p. 211, ίρήμην ft ilvai 
 T)p> ϋίόν Ct' avvcpiai'). Besides the 
 above objection to applying ΐρημος to Gaza, 
 there could be no possible reason for adding 
 such a speciiication here, seeing that Gaza 
 had nothing to do with the object of the 
 journey, and the road from Jerusalem to 
 
 passage of Strabo commonly cited to sup- 
 port the application of ίρημης to Gaza, 
 ίΊ'δοζός ττοτε γίνομίΐ'»/, κατίοπασμίνη c' 
 ΰπο Άλίζάΐ'νρον (the Great, according to 
 Strabo, which it teas not) και μ'ινονσα 
 ίρημος, the last tlirce words are wanting in 
 some edd. and are supposed to have been a 
 gloss from the Acts. Others suppose ϊρη- 
 μος to signify ' unfortified,^ which standing 
 alone it cannot. Besides, this notice would 
 be wholly irrelevant ; — and would probably 
 not have been true, — see Mela above. The 
 objection of ISIeyer to the interp. given 
 above, that if ϊρημ. referred to )'/ ύοός, the 
 article would be expressed is not valid : 
 the emphasis is on αντη ; ' that ti:ay, of 
 which I speak, is desert :' not, ' is the desert 
 one :' no reference is made to the other. 
 27. Εχινοίίχος] The very general use 
 of eunuchs in the East for places of con- 
 fidence, and the fact that this man was 
 minister to a female sovereign, makes it 
 probable that he was Uterally an eunuch. 
 If not so, the word would hardly have been 
 expressed. No difficulty arises from Deut. 
 xxiii. I , for no inference can be drawn from 
 the history further than that he may have 
 been a proselyte of the gate, in whose case 
 the prohibition would not apply. — Nay, the 
 whole occurrence seems to have had one 
 
 Gaza would be thus designated, whether design, connected with this fact. The walls 
 
 the city was inhabited, or in ruins. — Those 
 who ap])ly ίρτ/^ος to Gaza, have various 
 ways of reconciling the apparent discre- 
 pancy with history : most of them follow 
 Bede's explanation, that the ancient city 
 was ίρ^ί/ζος, and that the Gaza of this day 
 was another town nearer the sea. But how 
 this helps the matter I cannot perceive, 
 unless we are to suppose that the deserted 
 Gaza and the inhabited Gaza were so far 
 apart that it was necessary to specify which 
 was meant, because there would be from 
 Jerusalem two different roads, — of which no 
 trace is found, nor could it well be. Some 
 again suppose (Hug, al.) that the Acts 
 were written after the second Gaza was de- 
 stroyed (Jos. B. J. ii. 18. 1), just before the 
 destruction of Jerusalem, and that Luke 
 inserts this notice : but to what purpose .' 
 
 of partition were one after another being 
 thrown down : the Samaritans were already 
 in full possession of the Gospel : it was next 
 to be shewn that none of those physical 
 incapacities which excluded from the con- 
 gregation of the Lord under the old cove- 
 nant, formed any bar to Christian baptism 
 and the inheritance among believers, and 
 thus the way gradually paved for the great 
 and as yet incomprehensible truth of Gal. 
 iii. 28. Κανδόκης] As Pharaoh among 
 
 the Egyptians was the customary name of 
 kings, so Candace of the queens among the 
 Ethiopians in upper Egypt (Αίθιοπίς vntp 
 Αιγύπτου οίκοϊ'ΐ'Τίς, Dio Cass. liv. 5), — in 
 the island of Meroe, Plin. vi. 29, where he 
 says, ' Ipsum oppidum Meroen ab introitu 
 
 insulae abesse lxx m. pass Regnare 
 
 foeminam Candacen, quod nomen multis
 
 ABC 
 EGH 
 
 27—32. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 85 
 
 Ιίοουσαλημ, "^ ην rt ' υττοστρίφων και καθήμενος ^ iVt [''"'Μίη^'^ί^ 
 
 - " ' - < Ι ' / \ , / 28. xsiii. 2 
 
 του άρματος αυτού και ανί-γινωσκεν τον ιτροφητην ai. 
 eTtfTo Ησοϊαν. -' ίΐ-πίν όε το ττνίυμα τω Φίλίττπω Π^οςελΟε iJ-'ft^^"^' 
 και κολληυητι τω αρματι τούτω. """ προςόραμων οε ο is. aKing.s 
 Φί'λίππος ηκουσεν αυτοΰ ανα'γινωσκοντος Ήσαίαν του "^"f^,^;^^• 
 
 , ' ' ' 1)11'' Λ ' ο ' <^ 1 ' ' Gen. xviiL 2 
 
 ττροφητην, και ειπεν Άρα γε -γινωσκεις α ανα'^ινω- ai. 
 
 31<'5'^' Π" \ΛΛ / .ν / ηη apr'i γε in- 
 
 σκεις ; υ οε ειττεν ΙΙως yap αν ουναιμην, εαν μη τις terrog. here 
 '' οδί)γϊ}σρ με ; '' παρεκαλεσεν τε τον Φίλιττπον "" αναβάντα "Ts^^^kl' 
 καυισαι συν αυτω. " ' η 6ε ττεριογη της ^ραώης ην Dan.ix. as. 
 
 1 ' ι f «t t^-^ //-> » \ , \ ρ — John xvi. 
 
 ανε-γινωσκεν ην αυτή' Ως " προρατον επι " σφα-γην }^- ρ*•"'''• 
 
 \ν"ή >'χ'^ν' ' -ζ' '^q constr., Mark 
 
 ηγυη, και ως αμνός ■' εναντίον του κειοαντος αυτόν ν. ir. Luke 
 
 ■^ ■> viii. 41 
 
 r = Lukev. m. xix.4 al. Sce4 Kings χ. 15. s here only {. 4 Kings xix. 24. Ps. xxx. 21.(1 Mace. xv. 2.) 
 
 t = Johnii. 22 al. Rom. iv. 3. η Matt. x. 16. Mark vi. «4. Isa. liii. 7. ν Rom. viii. 30. James v. 
 
 5 only. w see Luke xxi. 12. ch. τ. 21. xxv. 23. χ John i. 2», 36. 1 Pet. i. lU only. 
 
 y = Markii. 12. Lnkexx. 2(i. Gen. vi. 8. zch. xviii. 18. 1 Cor. xi. Β only. 
 
 copt sail syr Chr. — hef καθ. om και (as tinnecessary to the constr) D• 13. 34. 40. 05. 96• 
 98^ V copt ar-pol. — του om C. — αντον om D'. — ανα^ινωσκων (omg και) D sah ν (ins 
 και {adopted by Lachm and Tisch. The omissions iti this case seem to me very like 
 attempts to escape from the repetitions of και, which however are characteristic of this 
 section, see ν 27> w 3G. 38, 39. The re in A may have the same source) : txt A.{avey. rt) 
 B(e sil)CEGH &c vss Chr ThP.— 29. το irv. το ay. 180.— τω αρμ. αντον 137•— >;σ. τ. 
 ττροφ. C al vss : txt ABDEGH &c am deraid copt syr Chr Thl. — 30. προςίλθωι> 40. 9G. — 
 rec Toi' πρ. ησ. with EGH &c copt sjr Thl {corrn to same order as previously) : txt 
 ABC 13. 1G3 V sah all. — 31. yap om Ε 105 sah {et quomodo \ ; add intelliyere v-ms 
 arm).— αν om A. — οδήγηση CD 5G. 1G3 (μι οδ. C). — for rt, dt Ε copt sah. — 32. rec 
 καροντος (corrn to LXX ? This is uncertain, because in I c the Vat has -οντος, the 
 Alex, -αντος), with Β (esil) &c Orig Cyr-jer Thl : txt ACEGH all IgnChron. — for όντως 
 
 jam annis ad reginas transiit Caete- 28. άν£γίν&)σκ€ν] aloud, see next ver. 
 
 rum cum potirentur rerum ^thiopes, in- Schottg. quotes from the Rabbis : ' Qui in 
 sula ea magnse claritatis fuit.' γάζη?] itinere constitutus est, neque comitem 
 A Persian term. Q. Curt. iii. 13. 5, ' pe- habet, is studeat in Lege.' — He probably 
 cuniam regiam, quam ^flze»w Persse vocant.' read in the LXX, the use of which was 
 See Virg. yEn. i. 119. os Ιληλΰθίΐ . . .] almost universal in Egypt. The word πίοι- 
 This did not only Jews and proselytes, but οχή below is not decisive (Olsh.) against 
 also those pious Gentiles who adhered to this (as if there were πιριοχαί only in the 
 Judaism, — the proselytes of the gate, see Hebrew, not in the LXX), as it would na- 
 John xii. 20. Euseb. ii. 1 , speaking of this turally be used as well of one as the other 
 eunuch says, ov ττρώτον Ιξ εθνών ττρος by those cognizant of the term. Besides, 
 τον Φίλιππου li ϊπιφανίΐας τα του θίίου must there not have been τηριοχαί in the 
 λόγου όργια μίτασχόντα, των τ( άΐ'Λ την copies of the LXX read in the synagogues.' 
 οίκονμ'ίνην ττιστων άπαρχήν γίνόμίνον (And see on ττεριοχ. ver. 32.) 29.] 
 κ.τ.λ., taking for granted that he was a This is the first mention of that inner 
 Gentile. There were (see below, ch. xi. 21) prompting of the Spirit referred to again, 
 cases of Gentile conversion before that of probably ch. xiii. 2, but certainly ch. x. 
 Cornelius; and the stress of the narrative 19; xvi. 6, 7• Chrysostom understands 
 in ch. X. consists in the miscellaneous ad- the words of the appearance of an angel, 
 mission of all the Gentile company of Cor- but the text hardly allows it. κολλ.] 
 nelius, and their official reception into the no stress — 'attach, thyself to.' 30.] 
 church by that Apostle to whom was espe- αρά yt zz ' Yea, but ....;' i[. d. It is well, 
 cially given the power. We may remark, thou art well employed : but . . . .' On the 
 that if even the plain revelation by which force of dpa, used " ubi responsio expecta- 
 the reception of Cornelius and his company tur negans id de quo erat intorrogatum," 
 was commanded failed finally to convince see Hermann on Λ^igpr, p. 821. The yt 
 Peter, so that long after this he vacillated strengthens the dpu, implying the passing 
 (Gal. ii. 11, 12), it is no argument for the over of all other considerations, and select- 
 eunuch not being a Gentik-, that his con- ing this as the most important: see Ilar- 
 version and baptism did not remove the tung, Partikellehre, i. 37G f. It assumes, 
 prejudices of the Jewish Christians. modestly, that he did not understand what
 
 86 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 νιΐΐ. 
 
 Η 1 Cor. χίί. 2. 
 
 (χΙν. 10.) 
 
 2 Pet. ϋ. 10 
 
 niily. 
 b -• litre only. 
 c Lnke i. 48. 
 
 Phil.iii.21. 
 
 Jnmes i. 10 
 
 ανοίγει τυ στυμα αυτόν. 
 
 33 
 
 ev 
 
 )0 
 
 τ\1 
 
 την 0£ -yevfai' 
 ατΓϋ της "γης η ^,ωη 
 
 αφωΐ'ος, ούτως ουκ 
 
 ταπίΐνωσίΐ αυτοΰ η ~ κρισις αυτού ηρ 
 αντυυ τ'ις ^ ^ιηηησίται \ οτι '^ αιρίται 
 
 αυτοΰ, αττοκριΟίΐς οε ο εύΐ'ου^ος τω Φιλιππω είττεν 
 
 "• Δε'ο^ίοί σου, ττίρι τίνος ο προφήτης λέγει τοΰτο ; ntpi 
 
 ίαυτου η ττίοι (τίζ)ου τίνος ; ' ανοιί,ας οε ο Φίλιττττος 
 
 το στόμα αυτοΰ και ' αρί,αμίνος αττο της -γραφής ταύτης 
 
 Εΐ/Γ/γγεΛίσπτο ούτω τον 1»;σουν. ως οε εττο^ϊευοντο 
 
 κατά T7jv οοον, ηΧθον εττι τι 
 ■γος ΐοου υοωρ 
 
 ABC 
 EGH 
 
 k 
 
 13. 2 Pet. 
 
 11. 
 e — ch. xxii. 
 
 22. Jobn i. 
 
 2ti al. 
 f— Mall.xi. 
 
 Ifial. n•.? 
 g coiistr., here 
 
 only. See 
 
 ch. IX. 27 al. 
 
 1 Chron. xvl. 1 
 
 i). Joel i. 3. 
 h— Malt. V. 2. Ί ^ ■*■ " <^ . ' Λ' 
 
 P.•!. ixxTii.2. Yoc Ιοου υοωο τι κωΑυίΐ 
 
 Job iii. 1. Λ, ■" 
 
 i Luke xxiii. 5. Matt. XX. 8. ch. i. 21 al. 
 I coii.Mr., ver. 20 reft. ch. xxv. 3. m = John iii. 23. 
 
 υόωρ, και φησιν ο ίυνοΰ- 
 με βαπτισΟηναι ; ^ και εκε- 
 
 k constr., ch. ν. 42. xi. 20. xvii. 18. Gal. i. 16. 
 
 (om 100), ούτος Gil al. — 33. f i' . . . αυτού om 15 v. — avrov (1st) om AB 100 ν {corrn to 
 LXX) : ins CEGH nisi ^^(nrly) Chr Oec Thl. — την γ. ABC ν sah syr {corrn to LXX) : txt 
 EGH niss (appy) tol copt arr Thl Iren.— 34. for {«?;., avrov H. — τίνος, (om coptsah: άλλου 
 rij'oc 177) fioou E. — 35. ο om Ε 137. — κιφ. κΐ]ϋ. sah Syr ar-erp Orig : ii-[r^. χριστον 
 sah a'th. — [37. rcc inserts ίίπε δε (om am- ar-erp) ο Φ. (om al syr) 1 1 {εαν Ε) ττιστενεις f ξ 
 ο\ης τ>]ς καρδίας (add σον Ε al vss Bed-gr Cypr Prsedest) εξεστιν (om v-nis : σωθησιι 
 Ε Bed-gr: stiscepis e', salvus eris e- : alii aliter) αττοκριΘιις δε είπε πιστεύω τον νιοντου 
 θεον fii fit τον ιησονν χριστον (πισ. £ΐς τον χν τον νιον τ. θ. Ε Bed-gr : alii aliter), — 
 with (Ε) all (about 20 specified, see Scholz) Bed-gr ν (not am) arm ar-pol slav-mss syr* 
 Iren (gr and lat) Oec Tid^ (text) Cypr Jer Aug Prsedest Pacian : om ABCGH all (more 
 than GO specified) am copt sail Syr syr* seth Chr, Oec (ms) ThP Bed {t/ie imertion 
 appears to have been made to suit the formularies of the baptismal liturgies, it being 
 considered strange that the eunuch shd have been baptized without some such confes- 
 
 hc was reading. γινώσκ. α άναγ.] 
 
 So 2 Cor. iii. 2. So too Cato (Wetst.), 
 ' Lcgere ct non intclligore nee legere est.' 
 31.] γάρ gives the reason of the 
 negative which is understood. The answer 
 expresses at once humility and docility. 
 32.] Perhaps it is best to render, ' The 
 contents of the (passage of) Scripture 
 whicli he was reading were as follows :' 
 sec 7Γ{ρΐ£χ(ΐ, 1 Pet. ii. (>. Cicero indeed 
 appears to use περιοχή in the sense of a 
 'jjaragraph,' or 'chapter;' ad Attic, iii. 25. 
 * At ego ne Tironi cpiidem dictavi, qui 
 totas περιοχάς jjcrsequi solet, sed Spintharo 
 syllabatim.' The citation is from the LXX, 
 with only the variation of αυτόν inserted 
 after κείρ., and αντοϋ after ταπεινώσει. 
 33. Iv TTJ ταττίΐνώσίΐ αΐιτοΰ ή κρί- 
 σις αΰτ. ήρθη] Heb. ' He was taken away 
 by distress and judgment :' i. e. as Lowth, 
 ' by an oppressive judgment.' γενεαν 
 
 ανιτον] i. e., ' the age in wMch He shall 
 live' — ' the wickedness of his contempo- 
 raries.' The fathers, and Bedc, explain 
 ' His r/eneradon ' of His eternal Sonship 
 and His miraculous Incarnation (De W.). 
 34. a70KpiO€is] to tlie passage of 
 Scripture, considered as the question pro- 
 posed : not, to the question in ver. 30. 
 We can hardly suppose any immediate re- 
 ference in έτερον τινός to Christ. 
 36. Ti ΰδωρ] In the scholia to Jerome's 
 
 Epitaph of Paulla (not in Jerome himself) 
 on the words, ' A Bethsur venit,' we have, 
 ' liiEC a;tate Hieronymi vocabatur Beth- 
 sura : vicus est in tribu Juda, obvius vige- 
 siino lapide euntibus ab llierosolyraa Che- 
 bron. Juxfa hunc fons est ad radices 
 montis ebuUiens, qui ab eadem in qua 
 gignitur humo sorbetur. In hoc fonte 
 putant eunuchum Candacis Reginse bapti- 
 zatum fuisse.' Jerome's own words are : 
 ' coepit per viam veterem pergere cjuae 
 ducit Gazam . . . . et tacita secum volvere, 
 quomodo Eunuchus ^thiops, gentium po- 
 pulos prsefigurans, mutaverit pcllem suam, 
 et dum vetus relegit instrumentum, fontem 
 rejiperit Evangelii. Atque inde ad dex- 
 teram transit. A Bethsur venit Escol' . . . 
 where no reference is made to the tradition, 
 save what may be inferred from the men- 
 tion of Bethsur. Euseb. (περί τόπων) 
 states it to be twenty miles south of Jeru- 
 salem in the direction of Hebron : and so 
 in the Jerus. Itin. and the Peutinger Tab. 
 (Howson's map.) Pocock found there a 
 fountain built over, and a village called 
 Betur on the left. Fabri describes the 
 fountain as the head of a considerable 
 brook, and found near it the ruins of a 
 Christian church. There is no improba- 
 bility in the tradition, except that, even 
 suj)posing a way going across from Hebron 
 straight to Gaza to be called ϊρημος, this
 
 33—40. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 87 
 
 λευσίΐ' " στηναι το άρμα, και ° κατίβησαν αμφίΐτψοι είς n = Matt.xx. 
 
 \ « Λ « /Κ 'λ > f , _ ^ ',Ο' ^2. Luke 
 
 τυ νοωρ, ο τε ΦίΛιττττος /cat ο ευνουνος, Kat ε ηατττισίν ^u. ΐ4. cen. 
 αυτόν. ^ ore δε '' avepijaav εκ του νόατος, '^ ττνεϋμα ^^"'s^^'"'- 
 
 η / r" ^ /f^'\ \ ■> fs 1 y oLukexviii. 
 
 ^ κυρίου ηρπασεν τον ΦιΛιτΓΤτον, και ουκ ειόεν αυτόν '"•• *i"fk 
 ουκετι ο ευνούχος, * επορευετο γαο την * υδότ' α ίιτοϋ qLu"ke 'ν!' is."' 
 να/ρων. ^" Φί'λιΤΓΤΓος δε εΰοεθη 'είς'Ά^ωΓον, καΐ " διεο- sc'^r.m.i?. 
 
 '«- , ' , , ' ' S aKingsxviii. 
 
 χομενος• '' ευηγγελι^το τυς πόλεις πάσας, '' εως του r-johnvi.is. 
 
 »■vrJ-■>^•Γr/ 2 Cor. xii. 3. 
 
 sAUeiv αυτόν εις iS.aiaapeiav. Rev.xii. 5. 
 
 ποταμοί, Xen. Anab. iv. 3. 6. Judg. xxi.21. 6 here only. t= ch. XTiii. 21 al. See ver. 20 reff. 
 
 u absol , Ter. 4 reff. ν constr., ver. 25 raff. w constr., liere only. See Matt.i. 17. xxiii. 85 al. 
 
 i?ort)]•— 38. tic r. V?. αμφ. 37- 180 copt syr.— 39. ανφη 137.— for fc, απο Ε 137. 177- 
 180. — for πί'ίυμα, άγγελος A' Aug. A- adds (but the corrn is that of A') αγιοί' ιττ- 
 επίοίν ίτΓΐ (ης al) τον {οΐ'ουχοι- ayytXog St: so also 15. 18. 27- 29. 38. 60. 100 arm 
 syr* slaved Bas Did Jer Cassiod al (for ayiov, κυρίου syr*) {oti the insertion, see note). 
 — iSiv H. — tTi 177• — for yap, is 96. — αυτού τηι> οδον Β. — χαΐυων κ. αίνων τ. κνριον 
 40. — 40. ί;υρ. Ε. — τας πο\. πα. tv. Α. — καισαριαν ΑΕ. 
 
 would not be on that portion of it, but on 
 the high road (Winer, RWB.). τί κωλ. 
 μ. βατΓ.] There is no reason for supposing 
 Philip to have preached to him the necessity 
 of baptism : bis own acquaintance with Jew- 
 ish practices, and perhaps his knowledge of 
 the progress of the new faith in Jerusalem, 
 would account for the proposition. 
 37.] The authorities against this verse 
 are too strong to permit its insertion. 
 It appears to have been one of those re- 
 markable additions to the text of the Acts, 
 common in D (which is here deficient) 
 and its cognates : few of which, however, 
 have found their way into the received text. 
 Tliis was made very early, as Irenseus has 
 it. The iNISS which contain it vary ex- 
 ceedingly : another strong mark of spurious- 
 ness in a disputed passage. See var. readd. 
 
 38. IkcX.] viz. the eunuch. 
 39. w. κυρ. ηρίΓ. τ. Φ.] The reading of 
 A-, ' t/ie Spirit fell on the eunuch, and an 
 angel of the Lord caught away Ph.,' is 
 curious, and has probably arisen from a 
 desire to conform the results of the eunuch's 
 baptism to the usual method of the divine 
 procedure, and the snatching away of Philip 
 to his commission, ver. 26. But the Spirit 
 did not fall on the Samaritans after baptism 
 by Philip. — The text clearly relates a super- 
 natural disappearance of Philip : compare 
 μήποτί yptv αυτόν ττνίνμα κνίΛίον, 4 Kings 
 ii. 16 ; no interpretation (as Eichhorn, 
 Kuin., Olsh., Meyer) of liis being suddenly 
 hurried away by the i)romptiiig of the Sjjirit, 
 will satisfy the analogy of the above-cited 
 passage and of (see below) a parallel one in 
 Luke's own Gospel. — Tlic άρττ"^? 1 1^ of John 
 vi. 15, wliich Meyer cites to justify his view, 
 tolls in my mind the otln^r way ; tlie fear 
 was lest tlie multitude sliould come and 
 currg Ilirn off U) make Him a King : and in 
 the rcfi'. I have therefore marked the two as 
 
 bearing the same meaning. ουκ εΐδεν 
 
 αΰτον οΰκ€τι] Not 'never saw him from that 
 day,' though (see below) that meaning may be 
 indirectly included :— but as Luke xxiv. 31, 
 αυτός άφαντος iytrf-o άπ' αυτών, and as 
 in the strictly parallel words of 4 Kings 
 ii. 12, ουκ tlctv αυτόν ϊτι, — afterthe going 
 up of Elijah. These last words in my view 
 decide the question, — that the departure of 
 Philip was miraculous. Υ<*ρ] refers to 
 
 trhat follows {ivp. Se Φ.). PliiHp was 
 found at Azotus : if the eunuch had gone that 
 vmy, he might have met with him again: but 
 he did not, ' for' he went from the fountain 
 on his own tvag, which did not lead through 
 Azotus. 40. eiip. els "Αζ.] A constr. 
 
 praegnans, — 'was borne to, and found at.' 
 The word ίΰοίθη again appears to refer to 
 4 Kings ii. ver. 17• — Azorus or Ashdod 
 (Josh. xiii. 3. 1 Sam. v. 5 al.) was one of the 
 five principal cities of the Philistines, never, 
 though nominally in Judah, thoroughly sub- 
 jugated by the Jews; — it was taken by 
 Tartan the Assyrian general (Isa. xx. 1), — • 
 again by Psammetichus, Herod, ii. 157. 
 Jer. XXV. 20, — again by Judas Maccabfeus 
 (I Mace. V. 6!!) and Jonathan (1 Mace. 
 X. 84), and by the latter destroyed ; — re- 
 built by Gabinius (Jos. Antt. xiv. 5. 3. 
 B. J. i. 7• 7)i aud belonged to the kingdom 
 of Herod, who left it in his will to his sister 
 Salome (Antt. xvii. 8. 1 ; 11. 5). At pre- 
 sent, it is a small village, retaining the name 
 Esdud, but no remains. (Robinson, ii. 62!) ; 
 iii. I. 2.•ί2. Winer, RWB.) τάς iro- 
 
 λίΐ9 ■π-άσας] viz. Ekron, Jamnia, Joppa, 
 Ajjolloiiia, on the direct road : or, if he de- 
 viated somewhat for the purpose, Lydda 
 also (which seems imjilied ch. ix. 32). 
 Καισάρειαν] As this town hears an 
 important part in early Christian history, it 
 will be well to give iiere a full account of it, 
 and refer to it hereafter. C.i;sari;.\ (I'u-
 
 88 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 IX. 
 
 xliereonly. JX. ^ 'Q δί Σοΰλος ίτΐ " fllTTl'tWl' ^ θπ£ίλ7/ς KOI OOVOV ABC 
 
 Josh. X. 10 ' Λ /I Ν - ' - KGH 
 
 (ϊ"«.χ''τ"ί'Ι;Ι) '^ f tc TOur μαΟητας του κνοιου, '' ποοςελθωΐ' rw (({>χΐ6()£ΐ 
 
 yih. ίτ. 17,2U. ο I, « / > ι - r ι Λ ^ (I ' Λ '' ^ 
 
 Eph. τι U " ντΊΐσατο παρ αυτού ίπιστυλας εις ΙΛαμασκον προς 
 
 ο,Λγ. Job ^ ι ' J „ ,, « - e ' ?. - " 
 
 «"'xxiii. τας• σιιναγωγος, οττως- £αν τινας ίυρτ? τ?7ς οόου υιτας 
 7 «Ι. ανόρας τ£ καί γυναίκας, όίόιμίνους ayayyj £ίς ΙερουσαΛτ]^. 
 
 xxvil.SSIL. Johnxii. 21. ch. xxiii. 14al. b 1 John v. Ι."-.. Dent. χ. 12. c - ch. xv. 30 al. 
 
 d coDslr., here only. See 2 Cor. Ui. 1. e — ch. xix. U, 23. xxi». 22. (xxii. 4. xxiv. 14.) 
 
 Chap. IX. 1. πσυλος 142.— trt om 24. 26. ^8. 126 sah.— πνέων 16.*}.— ^θοΐΌυ 6«. 
 — tif om 177.— 2. ai/ Eal Chr.— oir. rj/c oi. Aal: add rai;r/jc25. 46 ν Syrar-erp arm 
 
 lestinae, Kaiac'ipua τής ΙΙαλαιστΐνης, or 
 -παράλιος, Jos. Β. J. iii. !». 1 ; 7-2. Antt. 
 xii. 11. 2, or /; ϊττΊ BaXarry K., Jos. B. J. 
 vii. 1. 3; 2. 1, or Stratonis (see below), — 
 distinguisliud from Csesarea Philippi, see 
 note Matt. xvi. 13) is between Joppa and 
 Dora, G8 Rom. miles from Jerusalem ac- 
 cording to tlie Jerus. Itinerary, 75 according 
 to Joseplius (i.e. 600 stadia, Antt. .xiii. 11.2. 
 B. J. i. 3. 5),— 36 miles (Abulfeda) from 
 Ptolemais (a day's journey, Acts xxi. 8), — 
 30 from Joppa (Edrisi) ; — one of the largest 
 towns in Palestine (Jos. B. J. iii. 9. 1), with 
 an e.xceUent haven (Jos. Antt. x\n. 5. 1, 
 Σίβαστϋςλιμήΐ', — ov κατασκίνάσας Ήρώ- 
 δί]ς ττυλλών χρημάτων tir'i ri/ny tjj Καίσα- 
 ρος καλεί Σ(βαστόν). It was, even before 
 the destruction of Jerusalem, the seat of the 
 Roman Procurators (see ch. xxiii. 23 ff. ; 
 xxiv. 27 ; XXV. 1), and called by Tacitus 
 (Hist. ii. 79) ' Judieae caput.' It was chiefly 
 inhabited by Gentiles (Jos. B. J. iii. 9. 1 ; 
 3. 14), but there were also many thousand 
 Jewish inhabitants (Jos. Antt. xx. 8. 7• 
 Life, ii. B. J. ii. 18. 1). It was built by 
 Herod the Great (Amm. Marcell. xiv. 8, 
 p. 29, Bipont. Beforetime there was only 
 a fort there, called Στράτωνος ττύργος, Jos. 
 Antt. XV. 9. 6 al. Strabo, xvi. 758. PUn, 
 V. 14) — fortified, provided with a haven (see 
 ch. ix. 30; xviii. 22. Joseph, above), and in 
 honour of Cae.'^ar Augu.'^tus named Csesarea 
 (at length Καισαρεία Σεβαστή, Jos. Antt. 
 xvi. 5. 1). Vespasian made it a Roman 
 colony (Phn. v. 13). Abulfeda (Syr. p. 80) 
 speaks of it as in ruins in his time (a.d. 
 1300). At present there are a few ruins 
 only, and some fishers' huts. (From Winer, 
 RAVB.) 
 
 Chap. IX. 1 — 30.] Conversion of 
 S.\UL. 1.] The narrative is taken up 
 
 from ch. viii. 3, but probably with some 
 interval, sufficient perhaps to cover the 
 events of ch. viii. ίμ-πνίων] Meyer 
 
 charges the ordinary interp., ' hreathing,' 
 i. e. as in E. V. ' breathing out,' with an 
 arbitrary neglect of the composition of the 
 word. He would render it ' inhaling,' with 
 the j)artitive genitives signifying the ele- 
 ment. But the sense would thus be flat ; 
 and there seems to be no need for pressing 
 
 the sense of the compound verb. We should 
 perhaps hardly render it breathing out, — 
 but ' breathing ;' his ' spiritus,' inhaled or 
 exhaled, being άττίΐλ»/ ic. <ρόνος. So W 
 α'ιματόεντος άναπνιίων όηνμηγΐοϋ, Q. 
 Calaber, xiv. 72, and πνέων θνμον, Aristaen. 
 I. ep. 5 (Kuin.). ίμ-Ίτνίων, ιτροςελθών] 
 
 As σοι πιστενσας, μετανάστης, OLd. Col. 
 172, where Hermann remarks, ' i^i recte 
 observavi, ea est hujus constructionis ratio, 
 ut priecedat illud participium, quod, sepa- 
 ratim enunciata sententia, indicativus esse 
 verbi debet : ut hoc loco sensus sit, brt σοι 
 ίπίστευσα, μεταναστάς.' τω άρχ- 
 
 ιερεΐ] See table in Prolegg. to Acts ; — it 
 would be Theophilus, — brother and suc- 
 cessor to Jonathan, who succeeded Caiaphas, 
 Jos. Antt. xviii. 5. 3. 2. Ιιτιστολάς] 
 
 of authorization : written by the high priest 
 (in this case, but not always, president of 
 the Sanhedrim) in the name of παν ro 
 πρεσβυτέρων, ch. xxii. 5. cis Δα- 
 
 μασκόν] Dam.\scijs is probably the oldest 
 existing city in the world. We read of it 
 in Abraham's time (Gen. xiv. 15; xv. 2) : 
 then no more till David subdued it (2 Sam. 
 viii. 6) : it became independent again under 
 Solomon (1 Kings xi. 24 ff.), and from that 
 time was the residence of the kings of Syria 
 (1 Kings XV. 18; xx. 1 ff.), who were long 
 at war with Israel and Judah, and at last 
 were permitted to prevail considerably over 
 Israel (2 Kings x. 32. Amos i. 3, 4) and to 
 exact tribute from Judah (2 Kings xii. 17) 18, 
 see also 2 Kings xiii. 3, 22, 25). Damascus 
 was recovered to Israel by Jeroboam II. 
 (cir. 825 a.c). Not long after we find 
 Rezin, king of Syria, in league with Pekah, 
 king of Israel, against Ahaz (2 Kings xv. 
 37). Ahaz invited to his assistance Tiglath- 
 pileser, king of Assyria, who took Damascus 
 and slew Rezin, and led the people captive 
 (2 Kings xvi. 5 — 9. Isa. viii. 4). From this 
 time we find it subject to Assyria (Isa. ix. 
 11 ; X. 9 ; xvii. 1), then to Babylon (2 Kings 
 xxiv. 2. Jer. xxxv. 11), — Persia (Arrian. 
 Alex. ii. 11, Δαρίΐος τών χρημ• τα ττολλά 
 .... πεπόμφίΐ ιίς Δαμασκόν, Strabo, xvi. 
 756. Q. Curt. iii. 12. 27), — the SjTian 
 Seleucidae (1 Mace. xi. 62; xii. 32), — and 
 from the time of Pompey (64 A.c), to the
 
 1—5. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 89 
 
 εν δε τω πορίυεσθαι ^ ε-γενετο αυτόν ' εγγ/^ειι^ ττ/ Δα- f Λΐ»«.χίϋ. 4 
 μασκω, εζ,αιφνης τε περη^στραψεν αυτυν φως απυ τυυ gMarku. 23. 
 
 ^ - 4 ^ ν . \ ν - χ 1 ν Λ / ch. iv. ,C ■ 
 
 ουρανού, και πεσων επι την -γην ηκουσεν φωνην λε- hc]at.,Luke 
 
 •γουσαν αυτω 2.αουΛ 2.αουΛ, τι με οιωκεις ; ειττευ οί jLuk^^ljg 
 
 ίς it, κι;ρ(ε ; ο οε L•7ω ειμί Ιτ/σους, οι^ συ οιωκεις. λ. χχϋ. r. 
 
 ' ' Prov. vi. Ιό. 
 
 k ch.xxii. fi only f. 1 ace, Rev. v. 18. m = ch. Tii. ,ϊ2 reff. 
 
 Beth. — αναγη 78'• — 3. rec και ίζαιφν. (corrn to more usual form), with EGH &cChral : 
 txt ABCal {tlt(pv. CE) : rt om 1G3.— πίραστρ. A'(appy)C3 {τηριστ^αφ. C) 31. 37 (B .' 
 see below) : textB(Bentl : πίοηστξι. appy Birch)EGH Chral. — αυτόν irfpi. λ.{αυτ. ip. ττιρ. 
 A)BC 1()3 lect 1 2 : txt EGII most mss vss Chr al.— tic τ. ovp. {corrn from ch xxii. C) ABCG 
 all vss Thl- : txt EH all vss Chr Thl'. — 5. τις• ει συ C. — rec ο 5ί κύριος ίΐτην {κύριος appears 
 ίο have been an insertion to avoid the apparent insiifficiency of ο it ; — ti-Kiv,from ch 
 xxvi. 15), with GH &c Thl al : ο It κύριος προς αυτόν Ε 11. 27. 29: ο ^6 κτριος 
 100 Hil: txt ABC al ν (43. 105. 137 copt ath arm add fiTTfv).— aft ιησ. add ο 
 Ναζωραιος (from ch xxii. 8) ACE 8. 25 lect 12 Syr syr* copt aeth Hil Aug Ambrj 
 (o χρισΓος Iren). — rec aft f <ωκ. add σκ\ΐ}ρον σοι ττρος κίντρα λακτιζίΐν. τριμων τί και 
 θαμβών fine κνρη τι με θίλιις ποιησαι ; και ο κύριος ττρος αυτόν {insert io7is from ch 
 xxvi. 14, and xxii. 10? But it may be observed that the order of σκλη λακτ. in 
 
 Romans, and attached to the province of 
 Syria (Jos. Antt. xiv. 4. 5 ; 9. 5). Many 
 Jews were settled there, and the majority of 
 the wives of the citizens were proselytes, 
 Jos. B. J. ii. 20. 2.— On its subjection to 
 Aretas, see below, ver. 24, note. It was 
 later the residence of the Ommiad Caliphs, 
 and the metropolis of the Mahommedan 
 world. (C. and H. p. 95.) — At present 
 it is a large city, with (Burckhardt) 250,000 
 inhabitants, nearly 70,000 of whom are 
 Christians. — It is situated most beautifully, 
 in a large and well-watered plain, on the 
 river Chrysorrhoas (Barrada), which divides 
 into many streams (see 2 Kings v. 12), and 
 fertilizes the plain (Strabo, xvi. 756, t) 
 Δαμασκηνή χώρα Οιαφίρόντως ίπαινον- 
 μίνη), — bounded on all sides by the desert. 
 See Winer, RWB., from which the above 
 is mainly taken : Λ^itringa in Jesaiam, p. 
 C50 fF. (Notitia Damasci et Regni Dama- 
 sceni), and a vivid description in C. and H., 
 pp. 94 — 97• irpos τ. «τυν.] i. e. to 
 
 tlie presidents of the synn., who would ac- 
 knowledge the orders of the Sanhedrim, and 
 could, under the authority of the Ethnarch, 
 carry them out. τή? όδοΰ] Not ' this 
 
 way,' E. v., which rendering should be kept 
 for the places where the pronoun is ex- 
 pressed, as ch. xxii. 4, — but ' the way,' 
 viz. of 'salvation,' ch. xvi. 17, or 'of the 
 Lord,' ch. xviii. 25. (The genitive, as της 
 γνώμης ilvai, see 1 Cor. i. 12.) The ex- 
 pression ' THE ΛΥΑΥ ' had evidently become 
 a well-known one among Christians (see 
 reff.) ; and it only was necessary to prefix 
 the pronoun when strangers were addressed. 
 — The special journey to Damascus pre- 
 supposes the existence of Christians there, 
 and in some numbers. This would be ac- 
 counted for by the return of many who may 
 
 have been converted at the Pentecostal 
 effusion of the Spirit, and perhaps also by 
 some of the fugitives from the persecution 
 having settled there. This latter is ren- 
 dered probable by Ananias's τ/κονσα άπο 
 ΤΓολλώΐ' ττιρΊ του άν^ρος τούτου, ver. 13. 
 3.] The journey from Jerusalem was 
 probably made on the Roman road, i. e. 
 that of the Itineraries, by Neapohs (Sichem) 
 and Scythopolis, crossing the Jordan S. 
 of the lake Tiberias, — Gadara, and so to 
 Damascus. Or he might have joined, — 
 either the Petra road, by Jericho and Hesh- 
 bon, and so by Botsrah to D., — or the 
 Egyptian caravan-track, which passes to 
 the north of the lake of Tiberias, and near 
 Csesarea Phihppi. In either case the jour- 
 ney would occupy from five to six days, the 
 distance being 130 to 150 miles. 
 irepniirrp. κ.τ.λ.] It was (ch. xxii. C) ir(pi 
 μεσημβρίαν, — and from ch. xxvi. 13, the 
 light was υπέρ την λαμπρότητα τοϋ ί/λίου. 
 These details at once cut away all ground 
 from the absurd rationalistic attempt to ex- 
 plain away the appearance as having been 
 lightiiing. Unquestionably, the inference 
 is, that it was a bright noon, and the full 
 splendour of the oriental sun was shining. 
 — His companions saw the light, and were 
 also cast to the ground, ch. xxvi. 13, 14 ; 
 xxii. 9, see below on ver. 7• 4. \i- 
 
 γουσαν αΐιτ.] ry "K/jpaiCi ίιαλίκτφ, ch. 
 xxvi. 14. And it is a remarkable undesigned 
 coincidence, that the form Σαονλ should 
 have been preserved in this account, and 
 rendered in Greek in the translation of 
 Paul's speech in ch. xxii. In <;h. xxvi., 
 where he was speaking in Greek before 
 Festus, he inserts the words Ty ' Εβρ- CtaX., 
 to account for the use of the form i."ii<)i'>A : 
 or perhaps he spoke the solemn woriis, in-
 
 90 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 IX. 
 
 ncii.Tiii.so ^ αλλίί " ιινάστηΟι καΐ ί'ι'ί,ίλΟε ίΐς την ττυλιν, και 
 °3. οί.°χΛ'Γ " λαληΟησίταί σοι ο τι σε δει 7roct7i'. ^ οι δε αν^ρίς οι 
 ρ iirre -mij t. '^ συΐΌΟευοντες αι/Γω Βίστηκίΐσαν ' ενεοί, ακουοντες /ιεν 
 
 Wisd. vi. 23. _ _ ^, Λ^rΛ - R''n^^'V''\ 
 
 ^ ίί^'Ί^'ί' ui ■'"'ίί'" 0^^'ί^5 /α»ϊοενα οε ϋεωρουΐ'τες. η•γίρυη όε 2.αυΛος 
 
 I'rov. χτϋ. ί8. Γ cli. νϋ. .ί6 reff. 
 
 xsvi. 14 is not observed, and that Ιιωκιις. aWa αναστηΟί is somewhat suspicious, as 
 being the very words of ch xxvi. 15, 1(>. The authority of MSS is, however, decisive: 
 it could hardly be stronger), with (appy) no Greek ms (Sc^holz) ν (not am' nor am= nor 
 tol) n'th (but varies) ar-pol arm (ed : but add aWa) syr* Thl- (text) Oec (ed-text) (Hil) : 
 om (and ins aWa) iVBCE(E ins σκλ. σοι πρ. κ. \ακτ. aft ίιωκίΐς•, ver. 4, see ch. xxvi. 14) 
 GH mss (appy) am' (am- add πκΚ. &c aft ver. 4) tol Syr syr-marg copt sah all Chr Thl' 
 Oec (ms). — 6. (ίςιΟι Β. — σοι λαλ. Ki? : λ• f^oi ίκιι 180. — rcc η (corrti to more simple 
 word i), ssilh E(i-n σε E)GII ite Chr Thl : txt ABC 15. 18. 29. 30 al.— 7. συνοιτίς 
 177'.— rec trvtoi with G &c : txt ABCEH 13. 101. 103. 113. 120 lect \2.—ακουσαντ(ς 
 137.— 8. rec ο σπυλ., with GH &c : txt ABCE al : παυλος 13. — rec avtmy. with B(e 
 8U)GH &c : txt (/jro.y. A) ACE 137•— for Ot (2nd), η GH all ν seth arm ar-pol Chr Thl. 
 
 ABC 
 EGH 
 
 effaceable from his memory, as they tvere 
 uttered, in Hcbreu•, for KingAgrippa. (See 
 note on Σηοι'λ, ver. 17•) τί μ€ διώ- 
 
 Kiis ;] A remarkable illustration of Matt. 
 XXV. 45. 5. ό δί] That Saul saxv, as 
 
 well as heard, Him who spoke with him, is 
 certain from Ananias's speech, ver. 13, and 
 ch. xxii. 14, — that of Barnabas, ver. 27, — 
 from ch. xxvi. IG {ώφθην σοι), and from 
 the references by Paul himself to his having 
 seen the Lord, 1 Cor. ix. 1 ; xv. 8. These 
 last I unhesitatingly refer to this occasion, 
 and not to any subsequent one, w-hen he 
 saw the Lord tv tKararrti, ch. xxii. 17• 
 Such aiij)earanccs could hardly form the 
 subject of autoptic testimony which should 
 rank with that of the other Apostles : this, 
 on tlie contrary, was no ϊκστασις, but the 
 real bodily appearance of the risen Jesus ; 
 so that it might be adduced as the ground 
 of testimony to His Resurrection. — On the 
 words excluded from our text, as having 
 been interpolated from ch. xxvi. 14, and 
 xxii. 10, see note at xxvi. 14. It is natural 
 that tlic account of the historian should be 
 less jirccise than that of the person con- 
 cerned, relating his own history. In ch. 
 xxvi. 15 — 18, very much more is related to 
 have been said by the Lord : but perhaps 
 he there, as he omits the subsequent par- 
 ticulars, includes the revelations made to 
 him during the three days, and in the mes- 
 sage of Ananias. 7.] In ch. xxii. 9, 
 ol ck ai'v ίμοι όντις το μίν φως ΐθεά- 
 σαντο, κ. ϊμφοβοι iyivovro' την Si ψωνήν 
 oiiK ΐ}Κονσαν του ΧαΧονντός μοι. Two 
 accounts seemingly (and certainly, in the 
 letter) discrepant ; but exceedingly instruc- 
 tive when tlieir spirit is compared, — the 
 fact being this : that the companions of 
 Saul saw and were struck to the ground by 
 the light, but saw ovciva, no person : — that 
 they stood (or ' wtre fixed :' but I should 
 
 acknowledge the discrepancy here, and I'e- 
 cognize the more accurate detail of ch. xxvi. 
 14, that they/e// to the ground) mute, hear- 
 ing της φωνής, the sound of the voice, but 
 not rr'jv ψωνήν τον \α\ονντός μοι, the 
 words spoken and their meaning. Compare 
 John xii. 29, note. (Only no stress must 
 be laid on the difference belween the gen. 
 and ace. government of φωνί], nor indeed 
 on the mere verbal difference of the two 
 expressions ; — but their spirit considered, 
 in the possible reference which they might 
 have to one and the same fact.) — Two 
 classes of readers only will stumble at this 
 difference of the forms of narration ; those 
 who from enmity to the faith are striving to 
 create or magnify discrepancies, — and those 
 who, by the suicidal theory of verbal inspi- 
 ration, are effectually doing tlie work of the 
 former. The devout and intelligent student 
 of Scripture will see in such examples a 
 convincing proof of the simple truth of the 
 narrative, — the absence of all endeavour to 
 pare away apparent inconsistencies or revise 
 them into conformity, — the bona fide work 
 of holy truthful men, bearing each his testi- 
 mony to things seen and heard under the 
 guidance, not of the spirit of bondage, but 
 of that Spirit of whom it is said, ου τυ 
 ■κνιϊιμα κυρίου, ίκίϊ ίλίνθιρία. — Ι sliould 
 not too hastily determine that this account 
 has not come from Saul himself, on ac- 
 count of the above differences : they are 
 no more than might arise in narrations at 
 different times by the same person. 
 ίΐστήκίΐσαν] It will be well to warn 
 younger readers against an error often 
 found in English commentators (c. g. Dr. 
 Burton here), — that ιστηκα is /?β47, and 
 ίΐστήκειν pluperfect in signification, — 
 εστηκα, ' I have been standing,' and ε'ιστη- 
 κεισαν, ' had been standing.' This error 
 arises from forgetting the peculiar chai-acter
 
 6-12. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 91 
 
 ατΓΟ της "γης, ηvHoyμeιιωv δε των οφθαλμών αυτοΰ ου^ίνα 
 ίβΧίπΐν' ^ '^εΐξ)α•γω•γουι>τίς οε ourov mjifyayov εις Ααμα- sch. χχϋ η 
 σκόν. και ην ημίξ)ας τρίΐς μη βΧίπων, καΐ '^ ουκ εψαγεν t d.!'kluf.'^t\ 
 
 ■> ^\ .^ lO'^'TJ ζ•' £1 ^ ' Λ ~ ■> f uch.vii.31 
 
 ουοε ετΓίεΐ'. 1ιΐ' οε tic μαυητης εν ίλαμασκω ονόματι ref\: 
 
 « ; \ -ί ν , \ . f ■■ f / THeb. ii. 13. 
 
 Ανανιας. και είττεν προς αυτόν εν " οραματι ο κύριος ^y\^ 
 Άνανια. ο οε ειπεν Ιοου εγω, κυρ<ε. ο οε κύριος προς χμη 
 αυτυν ^^ Αΐ'αστας πορζυθητι επι r?/v " ρυμην την καΧον- on', 
 μίνην ίυθίίαν, και Ζ,ΐ]τησον εν ot/cta Ιούδα Σαΰλοί' ονο- y abs'>i.", 
 μάτι Τοοσε 
 
 1. 
 
 12 
 
 ίδου yap ^ πξ)oςίυγJEτaι, και είδεν ^ άνδρα ^ j^ff^"'^^ 
 
 — ουίιν {corrn ίο render the description of the llindness more complete) A'B e ν syrr 
 seth sah {non atli sali) : txt (A^ .')CE-gi• GH al copt al Chr Thl. — 9. i]v ikh v arm. — for 
 ovct, και ουκ C. — 10. μαθ. αρχαίος β4 slav-ant. — rec ο κυρ. ev υη. with GH &c vss Till 
 al: t.xt ABCE 40. 69. 105. Ifi3 lect 12 ν atli.— 11. ανάστα Β (Bent!) syrr copt sah, 
 also (addg και) ν (but t.xt am) seth. — ρνμ. της πολιως 1'3. — 12. rec aft tiStv ins iv opa- 
 
 of the verb 'ίστιψι with regard to transitive 
 and intransitive meanings, εστηκα is strictly 
 present, — άστιικίΐν imperfect : as much so 
 as sto and stabam. See Matthiffi, § 20G. 
 And this accuracy is important here : they 
 had not ' been standing,' but had fallen. 
 See ch. xxvi. 14, πάντων Tt καταττεσόντων 
 ημών ίΐς την γην. 8.] ' On his eyes 
 
 being opened (it would seem that he had 
 closed them on the first disappearance of 
 the vision), he saw no one.' He explains 
 it, ch. xxii. 11, ώς (ΐ οϋκ ίν'ιβΧίττον άπό 
 της δόξης τοϋ φωτός εκείνον. He had 
 seen, what those with him had not seen, the 
 glorious Person of the Lord Jesus. See 
 below on ver. 18. — Obs. μ.ή βλέττωΐ', his 
 personal subj. state: οΰκ εφ., the histo- 
 rical fact. 9. οΰκ €φ. ουδέ eir.] 
 There is no occasion to soften these words ; 
 the eifect produced on him by the ουρά- 
 νιος οπτασία (ch. xxvi. 19), aided by his 
 own deeply penitent and remorseful state 
 of mind, rendered him indifferent to all 
 sustenance whatever. 10.] Paul adds, 
 ch. xxii. 12, with particularity, as defending 
 himself before the Jeics, that Ananias was 
 άνήρ ευλαβής κατά τ'υν νόμυν μαρτυροΰ- 
 μινος νπο πάντων των κατυικοΰντων 
 'lovcaiwv : saying nothing of the command 
 received by him, nor that he ivas a disciple. 
 In ch. xxvi., speaking before the Roman 
 governor, he does not mention him. — Mr. 
 Howson (p. 101) remarks on the close 
 analogy between the divine procedure by 
 visions here, and in ch. x. Here, Ana- 
 nias is prepared for his work, and Saul for 
 the reception of him as a messenger, each 
 by a vision : and similarly Peter and Corne- 
 lius in ch. X. I may add, that in ch. viii., 
 where tlic preparation of Iieart was already 
 found in the(fuiiuch, Philip only was super- 
 liaturally prepared for the interview. 
 11.] " We are allowed to bear in mind that 
 the thoroughfares of Eastern cities do not 
 
 change, and to believe that the ' straight 
 street,' which still extends through Damas- 
 cus in long perspective from the eastern 
 gate, is the street where Ananias spoke to 
 Saul." (C. and H., p. 102.) οΙκι> 
 
 Ίονδα] The houses of Ananias and Judas 
 are still shewn to travellers. Doubtless 
 they (or at least the former) would long be 
 remembered and pointed out by Christians ; 
 but, in the long degradation of Christianity 
 in the East, most such identities must have 
 been lost ; and imposture is so easy, that 
 it is hardly possible to cherish the thought 
 that the spots now pointed out can be the 
 true ones. And so of all cases, where we 
 have not unalterable or unaltered data to go 
 on. Ταρσ€α] The first place where 
 
 he is so specified. — Tarsus was the capital 
 of the province of Cilicia, a large and popu- 
 lous city {της Κιλ. πυΧιν μεγάλην κ. fvSai- 
 μονα, Xen. Anab. i. 2. 23) in a fruitful 
 plain on the river Cydniis which flowed 
 through the midst of it (' Cydnos, Tarsum 
 liberam urbem procul a mari secans.' Plin. 
 v. 27. Strabo, xiv. 673. Q. Curt. iii. 5. 1), 
 with a swift stream of remarkably cold 
 water. Strabo speaks most highly of its 
 eminence in schools of philosophy: τοσαύτη 
 τοΙς tv9aSt άνθρώποις σπουδή προς τε 
 φιλοσοφ'ιαν και την αλλην ίγκνκλιον άπα- 
 σαν παιΰιίαν -γέγονεν, ίόςθ' νπιρβεβΧην- 
 ται και Άθί]νας και ΆλεζάνΟρειαν και 
 εϊ τίνα άΧλυν τόπον δυνατόν ειπείν, ίν φ 
 σχολα'ι και διατ(ΐιβίΐΊ των φιλοσόιφων και 
 των 'Koyiiiv γεγόνασι. διαφέρει δε τυσοΰ- 
 τον, ΟΤΙ ενταύθα μεν οΊ φιλομαθοϋντες 
 επιχώριοι πάντες εΐσΙ, xiv. G74. He 
 enumerates many learned men who Iiad 
 sprung from it. It was (see Plin. above) 
 an ' urbs libera,' i. e. one which, though 
 under Rome, lived under its own laws and 
 chose its own magistrates. This ' lilierlas ' 
 was granted to it by Antony (Ai)|>iaii, Civ. 
 V. 7) : and much later we find it a Roman
 
 92 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. IX. 
 
 «ch.Tiii. 17 Avav'iav ονόματι ί'ιςίΧΟόντα και " εττιθίντα αυτω )(ftpa abc 
 "^ K'a'u t'*' ^'' όπως ^ αναβ\ίφ\). '"^ απίΚ -ptO») δί Ανανίας Κυξ)ΐ£, ηκιιυσα 
 
 C and ciinstr., >\ λλ- ^ ""'rs^ ' " c ^ •'cc'/ 
 
 cii.x»i.28. απο ΤΓΟΛλων nepi του ανουυς τούτον, οσα κακά τοις α-γιοις 
 
 CC = here first. ^ ^', *^ .. \τΛ(1>^ ' y ι 
 
 iflrndchf^' ifoi' fTTOtijafv ει» Ιεοουσαλημ" /cat ώέε ε^^ει εςουσίαΐ' 
 
 χχνί. Κίοηΐν. \ - ' ί <>- / ^ e ' Λ ' 
 
 Ερρ. passim. 7Γθ()« T(uv αξ>\ΐίξ>εων oijffot τΓο ντας τους εττικαλουμενους 
 aMM'W.29. ΤΟ οΐΌ^ιά σοι». ^^ ειττεν δε ττρος αυτόν ο κύριος Πορεύου, 
 
 Luke χϋ. 5. Wn -Ιι'Λ"'' ''' '"j/Q ' ^ 
 
 iMaccx.35.ort ^ σκίυος ίκλοΎης εστίν μοι ούτος του ■' pαστασαt το 
 
 ech. η. 21. ^ ^ k ' ' »η - < Ο Λ ' 1 •- 
 
 sa^ROm'x <^νομα μου ίνωπιον tuviov τε /cat ροσιλεωΐ', υιών τε 
 f "sol., Luke Ισραήλ' εγώ yap "'υποδείξω αυτω οσα δει αυτόν 
 
 ν'ύ. 5U:so η'\ ^ ■> ι r λ- 17ο' "ΛΛ ^>'α ' 
 
 ^l^^^i^i^^'• νπερ του ονόματος μου Tramiv. ' απηΛυεν ot Ανανιας 
 
 21,22.23.' ^ ' - \ η ' ^ ' ' ' Ρ ' fl ^ ' ' ' ^ ^ 
 
 2Cor.lv. 7. και ειςηΛΰεν εις την οικιαν, και ^ επιυεις επ αυτόν τας 
 
 xxTii%") Χ^'Ρ^ζ ειττεν 2,αουλ αόελφε, ο κύριος απεσταλκεν με, 
 
 ^χΐ.Τ,τ^».' Ίησοΰς ο '^ οφθε'ις σοι εν Ty οδω ij ηρ-χου, όπως ^ ανα- 
 
 1 Thess. i. 4. 
 
 2 Pet. i. 10 only t- I constr., Luke xxii. 6. 1 Cor. ix. 6. j = here only. k = Luke i. lit. Gen. 
 xxiv. SI. 1 ch. X. 3ti reft'. m and constr., Luke vi. 47. xii. 5. ch. xx. 36. (2 Chron. xv. 3.) 
 
 η ch. T. 41. XT. 26al. Rom. i. 5. 3 John 7. ο = Matt. ii. 22 al. fr. ρ ch. viii. 17 refl'. 
 
 q ch. ii. 3 refl'. Exod. iii.2, 16. rver. 12. 
 
 μητι, with EGH Bed-gr &c: bef ΐΐδεν BC 163 lecfc 12 {addition to complete sense, as is 
 shewn by its various position) : om A ν copt sah £eth. — rec ov. av. {corrnfor better ar- 
 rangement) with GH &c Thl': txt ABCE 38. C8. C9. 113 ν arm {ονομ. om seth sah 
 Chr) T\\V-.—ava)ia 180.— χπρας {τας χ. BE all vss) ABCE m\ 69. 105 al {corm to 
 suit ver 17 : hence also the insertion of τας) : txt GH most mss syrr sah ar-erp Chr Thl 
 Oec. — αναβΧί^ίΐ G. — 13. rec ο αν. with mss : αποκ^ιθιις ο αν. tnrt !JG. 142 : txt 
 ABCEGH &c. — rec ακηκοα {corrn to seemingly more appropriate tense), with GH &c 
 Chr al : ακηκοαμιν lect 14 : t.xt ABCE 15. 18. 36. 40 all.— for αττο, τταοα 68. 100. 103 
 ThP : om 105. 163. — rec Εποι. τοις ay. {alteration of characteristic arrangement tomore 
 usual one), with GH &c vss Chr Thl Oec: tv up. εποιη. A: txt BCE lect 12 am: 
 τους ογιοι-ς 95». 133.— 15. rec μοι «στ., with EGH &c vss Archel Thdrt Thl all : txt 
 ABC 137 V svrr al. — ούτος om 13. — των ίθν. BC^ Cyr. — rec om τε, with GH &c Thdrt 
 Thli al: ins ABCE 13. 25. 36. 40. 100. 105. 163 lect 12 ThF.— rt aft vi. om 78. 137•— 
 avTov G 96. — 17. τοτ£ ε•/(ρΘίΐς αν. αττηλθ. 137. 180. — τας χ. επ αυτ. C vss. — σαυλε αί. 
 Ε al. — ιησ. om GH all ar-pol seth copt sah slav-mss Oec Thl. — ο κυρ. ιι^σ. απεστ. με am 
 
 colony. As a free city, it had neither the a similar meaning, see reff., esp. Rom. ix., 
 
 'jus coloniarum,' nor the 'jus civitatis :' &c., where it is in illustrating God's sove- 
 
 see note on ch. xxi. 39. It is now a town reign power in election. βαστάσαι, 
 
 with about 20,000 inhabitants, and is de- perhaps in reference to the metaphor in 
 
 scribed as being a den of poverty, filth, and σκεϊ}ος. Ιθνών] This would hardly be 
 
 ruins. There are many remains of the old understood at the time : it was afterwards 
 
 town (Winer, RWB.). 12. -irpos- on a remarkable occasion repeated to Paul 
 
 ενχ£ται] This word would set before An., by the Lord in a vision (see ch. xxii. 21), 
 
 more powerfully than any other, the state and was regarded by him as the specific 
 
 of Saul. άνδρα Άν. ύν.] A man, command which gave the direction to his 
 
 whose name in the same vision he knew to ministry, see Gal. ii. 7> 8• βασιλ.] 
 
 be Ananias. The sight of the man and the Agrippa, and probably Nero. 16. 
 
 knowledge of his name were botli granted 'ύπο8€ίξω] The fulfilment of this is testi- 
 
 him in his vision. 13. tois άγίοις fied by Paul himself, ch. xx. 23. 25 : see also 
 
 σου] This is the first time that this after- xxi. 11. 17. κ. ιτλησθης irv. άγ.] I 
 
 wards well-known appellation occurs as ap- can hardly think, with De W. and IVIeyer, 
 
 plied to the believers in Christ. 14.] that these words imply that the Lord had 
 
 It could hardly fail to have been notified said to Ananias more than is above related : 
 
 to the Christians at Damascus by their I would rather view them as a natural 
 
 brethren at Jerusalem, that Saul was on inference from what was said in ver. 15. — 
 
 his way to persecute them. 15. σκ. In ch. xxii. 14, where the command to 
 
 ίκλογης] A genit. of quality : as we say, Ananias is omitted, his speech contains 
 
 ' the man of his choice.' See Winer, § 34. much of the reason given in the command 
 
 2, b. — Paul often uses this word σκεϋος in here. It is remarkable again how Paul,
 
 13—22. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 93 
 
 βΧίφιις και ° πΧησθϊΐς ττνίυματος ayiov. και ευθέως• sLnkei.i5,4i. 
 
 απίττεσον αυτού αττυ των οφθαΧμιον " ωςει ^ ^^ ^'^^C? ' jub'xxll' 24 
 ανερΛεφίν τε και αναστας ίραπτισυη, ^"^ /cat λαρων Matt. ϋΐ ΐ6. 
 
 χ ■ ν ' ' • ' ν^ ^ - • Λ - ν here only. 
 
 Γθϋψ?μ' εΐ'ΐσχυσεν. εγενετο οε ^κετα των εν ίΛαμασκω ['.r's'^x'bt 
 
 20 ^ Ά' ' " - χί. 13. 
 
 μαθητών ημίρας τινας, "" και ευϋεως εν ταις συναγωγαις » ch.Tiii.26 
 ^ εκηουσσεν τοί' ίίϊσοΰν, οτι ^ ούτος έστιν ο υιός του θεον. » here only. 
 
 ^ ueraA. τρ., 
 
 εί;ισταΐ'το οε τταντες οι ακουοντίς και ελεγον ^-'υχ χχνίϊ.ί?. 
 ούτος ΐστιν ο '^ πορθησας εν Ιεοουσολη^ιι τους ίπικαΧου- Γχνίί. si'^'sf.. 
 
 / ν>' e- . ^τ?>f' - Γ'λΛ'Λ Lukeonly.A., 
 
 μένους το όνομα τούτο, και ωοε είς τούτο εΛηΛυσει, =Johnxix. 
 tra οεοεμενους αυτούς ayayy εττι τους αρ^^ΐίρεις, f^! n 
 
 9•2ν~Λ ζι^-ΛΛ h'5i - »i ' ^ y = here only. 
 
 —ουΛυς οε μάλλον ενεουναμουτο, και συνεγυνεν τους cm. χΐηϋ. 2. 
 Ιουδαίους τους κατοικοΰντας εν Ααμασκω, ' συμβιβάζουν Ι^^^;^^^ 
 
 χχϋ.40. ζ κΐ|. τ. ΐΐ)(Γ., ch. xix. 13. 2 Cor. xi. 4. L. P. as also xri. τ. χρ. seech, viii. ή refT. a ver. 22. 
 
 Luke i. 32. ch. X. 30, 48. 1 John r. 20. bMatt.xii.23aI.fr. Gen. xliii. 33. c Gal. i. 13, 23 only f. 
 
 dver. 14reff. e ch. v. 28 (ίτ. 12. James ii. 7). fMarkl. 38al. E= Matt. X. 18 al. h Rom. 
 
 iv. 211 al6. Paal only, exc. here, which is of Paul. Pa. li. 7. i ch. ii. 6 reif. k 1 Cor. ii. 16 al3. 
 
 Paul only, exc. here and ch. xvi. 10. xix. 33. 
 
 syrr ar-erp. — 18. rec απεπεσον {corrn to more usual form), with G al TbP al : txt 
 ABCEH al ThP. — rec απ. τ. οφθ. αντ. (altern of characteristic arrangement to more 
 usual one), with C al : txt AB al. — ως AB {altern to more usual ivord): txt CEGH niss 
 (appy), — Kilt ανίβλ. 180 ff. — for τε, St C^ alcopt al. — rec aft rt ins πα()αχρημα {addition 
 for precision), with EG &c syr slav (mss) if: om ABC'H all ν Syr ar-erp copt sail artti 
 slav-ms (ins seth ar-pol).— 19. τροφής 177 : ενισχυθη BC 27• 2ί). (Hi-. 105. — rec 
 ty. is ο σαυλος {insertion at the commencement of an ecclesiastical portion : so lect 12 
 has εγιν. είναι τον πανλον), with GH &c ar-poI slav Thl : txt ABCE all ν syrr ar-erp 
 copt seth arm Chr. — των όντων εν S. GH all Chr Thl-. — 20. rec r. χριστον {doctrinal 
 alteration.^ see 7ioie) : txt ABCE all vss Iren (ahi aliter). — 21. for £i•, {ΐς A al. — τους 
 ενικαΧ. om 95'. !IG. 142 : παντας τ. (π. al sah Svr. — ί\ΐ)\νθίΐ' {alleratio7i,not observing 
 the force of the plvp ?) E-gr GH aU vss Chr' Oec Thl : txt AB(e sil)C &c e al.— 
 22. πανΚος 2. 2ΰ v-ms. — μάλλον om 27- — aft ενεδ. add τω {εν τω Ε) λόγω CE 8. — 
 συνεχεεν Ε al 57. C6-. 137. 180 ThP. — σννιισχννεν Chr, σννεχνννεν C, σννεσχννεν 
 
 speaking there to an infuriated Jewish mob, quainted with those as brethren, whom he 
 gives the words spoken just that form which came to persecute as infidels : but not to 
 would best gain him a favourable hearing learn from them the gospel {ονΰε γαρ Ιγώ 
 with them — e. g. ό ϋεος των πατΊρων τταρά άνθρώπ-ου τταρ'εΧαβον ουίε ictOc'i- 
 ήμών, — ίίείν τον δίκαιον, — ττάντας άν- χθηι•, Gal. i. 12) nor was the time longer 
 θρώπονς, avoiding as yet the hateful word than to admit of εΰθΐως being used, ver. 20, 
 έθνη. He there too gives άναστάς βά- — and indeed the same {ΰέΐίως of the whole 
 πτισαι και άπόλονσαι τάς αμαρτίας σον, space (including his preaching in our vv. 
 ίτΓίκαλεσάμενος το όνομα αντον as part 20, 21) preceding the journey to Arabia, in 
 of the exhortation of Ananias. 18. Gal. i. 10. — Pearson places that journey 
 wsel XeiriSis] The recovery of sight is before our ίγίνετο c's, — which however is 
 plainly related as miraculous, the conse- manifestly against the sense of the text : — 
 quence of the divinely-appointed laying on ^lichaelis and Heinrich, between vv. 19 
 of the hands of Ananias. And this scaly and 20, — to which there is the same objec- 
 substance which fell from his eyes was lion : Kuinoel and Olsh., after ver. 25, — 
 thrown off in the process of the instanta- which the είιθίως of Gal. i. IG will not 
 neous healing. έβαΐΓτίσθη] It lias allow : Neander and Meyer, in the ήμεραι 
 been well remarked (Olsh.) that great ho- Ίκανηί of ver. 23, which time however in 
 nour was here placed upon the sacrament of our text is certainly allotted to the progress 
 baptism, inasmuch as not even Saul, who of his preaching in Damascus, and the in- 
 had seen the Lord in special revelation and crease of the hostility of the Jews in con- 
 was an elect vessel, was permitted to dis- sequence. See below. 20. Ίησοΰν] 
 pense with this, the Lord's appointed way The alteration to χριστοί' lias probably, as 
 of admission into His Church. 19. Meyer suggests, been made from doctrinal 
 ίνίσχ.'\ intrans. see reff. ήμ,. Twvas] considerations, to fix on ύ ι•ίος• τοΓ» ufoi" the 
 A few days; of (juict, and becoming ac- theological sense,— that C'////.v/ /* ///c 6Όη'>/'
 
 94 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 IX. 
 
 δν m ' Λ •* η ' ' 
 _, ..... ^^ - - ε ίπληοουντο r]/itoai 
 
 " Ικαναι, " συνίβουλίυσαντο υι Ιουδαίοι ^ανίΧαν αυτόν' 
 
 -■* '' ί-γνωσθη δε τω Σουλω η "^ ίττιβουΧτ) αυτών. ^ τταρΕττ]- 
 
 )θϋΐ'Γθ δε και τας πυλας ^ ■ημψης τε και νυκτός- όπως 
 
 1 _^_ '„•__.. Λ .,/^ 23 
 
 ι ver. CO rclT. 
 m cl). Tii. Z-i 
 
 tttt. 
 II vcr. 43. ch. 
 
 xviii. 18. 
 
 xxvii. 7. 
 
 Luke only, 
 ο cnii.str., here 
 
 μ"ι«. χχνΓΛ'. John xi. Γι3. ρ Matt. ii. 16 al. Exod. ii. 15. q constr.. Phi), if. 5. r ch. xx. 3, liJ. xxiii.3l) only 
 Ej.th.ii. 22. s mid., Luke xiv. 1. Ps.xxxvi. 12. t Luke xviii.7. Rev. iv. 8 aU. f. κ. I'l/^tp"?, Mark v. 5 al. 
 
 ABC 
 EGH 
 F vv. 
 
 23, 21. 
 
 G4', (συνίχνίΗ' 13. — τονς (1st) om Β. — 23. οι om 31. 43. 105.-24. rec τταηίτηρονί' 
 (i)iisla/i-c:'xec ie/oi/•), with GlI&cThlal: txt ABCEF all Orig. — rec παρ. τι (the -ro of 
 ■καιητηρονντο he'uig mhlakenfor τε, no other cojnda was wanted : and thus δί και y;as 
 struck out : thus also the και in G Sf-c as wmecessary aft St), with Η &c Syr al Thl al : 
 t.\t ADCEFG (orag και G al copt sah syr arm) all ν Orig.— r£ om A al vss.— οττ. πια- 
 
 God — instead of that which it now bears, — 
 that Jesus is the Soti of God, i. e. that 
 Jesus of Nazareth as a matter of fact, is 
 tlie Son of God, i. e. the Messiah expected 
 under that appellation. Be this as it may, 
 the following το ονομ,α τοΰτο (ver. 21) is 
 decisive for the reading Ίί;σοϋν and ουτός 
 ίστιν ο χριστός ver. 22 still more so. 
 21. τΓορθήσας] ' Militari verbo usus est,' 
 Erasm. So ^Esch. Choei)h. 680, οϊ 'γώ, 
 κατ' άκρας ίΐ'θάδ' ώς ■πορΘούμίθα. See 
 also Sept. c. Thcb. 17C (194 Dind.). 
 Ιληλυθ£ΐ] ' had come here,' implying 
 the abandonment of the jjm-pose. 
 22.] I regard the μ,αλλον «νεδυναμοΰτο, 
 as the only words beneath ivhich can lie 
 concealed the journe;/ to Arabia. Paul 
 mentions this journey (Gal. i. 17) with no 
 obscure hint that to it was to be assigned the 
 reception by him, in full measure, of the 
 Gospel which he preached. And such a 
 reception would certainly give rise to the 
 great accession of power here recorded. I 
 am the more disposed to allot that journey 
 this place, from the following considerations. 
 The omission of any mention of it here can 
 arise only from one of two causes: (1) 
 whether Paul himself were the source of the 
 narrative, or some other narrator, — the in- 
 tentional passing over of it, as belonging 
 more to his personal history (which it was 
 his express purpose to relate in Gal. i.) than 
 to that of his ministry : (2) on the suppo- 
 sition of Paul not having been the source of 
 the narrative, — the narrator having not 
 been aware of it. In either case, this ex- 
 pression seems to me one very likely to 
 have been used : — (1) if the omission was 
 intentional, — to record a remarkable acces- 
 sion of power to Saul's ministry, without 
 particularizing whence or how it came : 
 (2) if it was utiintentional, — as a simple 
 record of that which was observed in him, 
 but of which the source was to the nar- 
 rator unknown. σννίχννίν] Chrysos- 
 tom strikingly says, Ιίτε 7•ομομαθής ων 
 ίττεστόμιζίν ηΰτονς καΊ οΰι: ί'ία <p9iyyt- 
 σθαι• ίνόμισαν άπηΧΚάχβαι της ίν τοΤς 
 τοιούτοις ίιαλίξεως άπαλλαγίντες Στε- 
 
 φάνου, και Έ,τίφάνου σφοδρότιρον ευρον 
 'έτερον. (Cramer's Catena.) 23. 
 
 ήμε'ραι ίκαναι] In Damascus, see above on 
 ver. 19. The whole time, from his con- 
 version to his jom-ney to Jerusalem, was 
 three years. Gal. i. 18. άνίλεϊν αίιτ.] 
 
 έττί τον Ισχνρ'ον σν\\ογισμον έρχονται 
 πάλιΐ'οί ΊουδαΊοι. ονκίτι γαρ σνκοφάντας 
 κ. κατηγόρους κ. φενδομάρτυρας ίπιζη- 
 τοϋση', Chrys. Hom. χχ. 24.] In 
 
 2 Cor. xi. 32, Paul writes, iv Ααμασκί^ ό 
 εθνάρχης Άρέτα τον βασιλέως έφρονρει 
 την ττόλιν Ααμασκηνών, πιάσαι με. Α 
 somewhat difficult chronological question 
 arises respecting the subordination of Da- 
 mascus to this Aretas. The city, under 
 Augustus and Tiberius, was attached to the 
 province of Syria : and we have coins of 
 Damascus of both these emperors, and 
 again of Nero and his successors. But we 
 have none of Caligula and Claudius ; and 
 the following circumstances seem to point 
 to a change in the rulership of Damascus 
 at the death of Tiberius. There had been 
 for some time war between Aretas, king of 
 Arabia Nabataea (whose capital was Petra), 
 and Herod Antipas, on account of the di- 
 vorce by Herod of Aretas' daughter at the 
 instance of Herodias, and on account of 
 some disputes about their frontiers. A battle 
 was fought, and Herod's army entirely de- 
 stroyed (Jos. Antt. xviii. 5. 1). On this 
 Antipas, who was a favourite with Tibe- 
 rius, sent to Rome for help : and A^itellius, 
 the governor of Syria, was commissioned 
 to march against Aretas, and take him, dead 
 or alive. While on his march, he heard at 
 Jerusalem of the death of Tiberius (IMarch 
 10, A.D. 37), and πόλεμον Ικφ'ερην ουκίΟ' 
 ομοίως δυνάμενος δια τυ εΙς Γαίον μετά- 
 ττε-πτωκίναι τα πράγματα (Antt. xviii. 
 5. 3), abandoned his march, and sent his 
 army into their winter-quarters, himself re- 
 turning to Antioch : Antt. xviii. 5. 3. This 
 μεταπεπτωκίναι τά πρ. brought about a 
 great change in the situation of Antipas and 
 his enemy. Antipas was soon (a.d. 39) 
 banished to Lyons, and his kingdom given 
 to Agrippa, his foe (Antt. xviii. 7)» who had
 
 23—27. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 αυτόν ^ ανεΧωσιν' "'' " λαβοιτες ό£ οι μαθηται αυτοί' ajuit. 
 νυκτός ^ om του τίίγους ''" καΟηκαν αυτόν " Λ^αλάσαιτίς 
 ev ^ σπυρΊΒι. " napayivoi^uvoQ δε ^ ίΐς ΙερουσαΧτι 
 
 παραγενο^ιενος 
 
 τ = 2 Cor. xi. 
 33 only. 
 
 ρουσαΛημ ^λ'.'χ!π. xi. 
 
 ' - b \ Λ " a " η " ^ ' ' ο ~ fionly. Exod. 
 
 ίτ:ιιοατο κυΑΑασσαι τοις μαυηταις' και πάντες εφοιίουντο χΜ^'ί^'/ΐ^ 
 
 '^ ^c ' c"d•' ί1'27Τ3 '/Q Luke τ. 4, 5. 
 
 αυτόν, μη ττιστευοντες οτι εστίν μαυητης. ' ΰαοναρας ch.xxfii.i-, 
 
 Γΐ\6'Λ/0' ι\ν ^ \ * 'λ 3u2Cur. 
 
 οε ε7Γ(Λαρο/ιενος αυτόν 7}γα•γεν προς τους αττοστοΛους, jeV χΐν"'^'* 
 και όιη-γησατο αυτοις ^ πως εν ττ) οδω είοεν τον κυριον, s'ee josi'^if.' 
 
 \ Η '\ '\ ' - > ε - ' Λ - 1, / , ι."!. 1 Kings 
 
 /cat οτι ελαλησεν αυτω, και ^ πως εν Ιλαμασκω επαρ- χιχ ι-'• 
 
 ' ι ' ' ~ t Γ y Matt. XV. 
 
 37|onlyt. ζ John viii. 2. cti.xv. 4 only. Josh. xxiv. II. ach. xxvi. 21 only. bch. v. 13 reft'. 
 
 cJohnxiv. 10. Rom. x. 9. 1 Thess. iv. 14. d prcs., John ii. 9. ch. xii. 9. e constr., cli. xvi. I'.l. 
 
 xviii. 17. Luke xiv. 4. f Luke viii. 39 al. Josh. ii. 23. g = Mark v. 16 al. h ch xiii 4t! xivi 
 
 3aI3. Eph.vi. 20. 1 Tbess. ii.2 only. L. P. Prov. xx. 9 al. 
 
 σωσιν αντ. (aft ττυλας) Α. — 25. rec avrov οι μαθηται (corrn of order, as is shewn l>/ 
 the var-ieties below), with EGH mss (nrly appy) ν copt sah syrr al Chr Oec Thl : oi μαΟ. 
 avTov {mistake for txt : the same is made in D, ch xiv. 20) A(B Birch)CF am demid 
 Orig Jer : oi μαθ. (omg αντ.) 36. G9 lect 12 feth ar-pol ν (rns) : txt (ACF see above) 
 Β Bentl al. — rec καθ. Cia τ. r. (omg αυτόν with Ε al Chr Oec) (correction apparently, 
 for the sake of perspictiity, to prevent λαβοντίς and dia την τίίχονς being con- 
 nected together), but txt ABC(E)F al ν al Orig Petr-alex Jer. — σφνριίι C : σαργανη 
 lect 12. — 26. rec παη. ύε ο σανλος {insertion as in ver 19: further shetvn by ο ττανλος 
 in Ε &;c), with GH &c vss Thl al : ο παύλας Ε al Bed-gr ar-pol: txt ABC -10. 
 81 V copt sah aeth Chr (coram) Jer. — (v up. {corrn, τταραγ. being taken absolutely) 
 BEGH all Oec (ed) Thl' : txt AC &c Thl- al. — i-ειpaζtv {corrn to more usual form, see ref) 
 ABC 38. 81 al: txt EGH mss (nrly) Chr Thl.— 27. «τη τϊ\ ol•. lect \^.— αυτού al Chr 
 (see above on ver 25). — iCiv AGH &c. — for on, οσα 26. — rec rot; tija., with Ε &c : txt 
 
 been living in habits of intimacy with the 
 new emperor (xviii. 6. 5). It would be na- 
 tural that Aretas, who had been grossly 
 injured by Antipas, should, by this change 
 of affairs, be received into favour ; and the 
 more so, as there was an old grudge between 
 ViteUius and Antipas, of which Jos. says 
 (Antt. xviii. 4. δ), Ικρυπτεν bpyi)v, μίχρι 
 £t) και μ(-η\θί, Γαίου την αρχήν τταρ- 
 ει\7]φότος. — Now in the year 38 Caligula 
 made several changes in the East, granting 
 Itursea to Sosemus, Lesser Armenia and 
 parts of Arabia to Cotys, the territory of 
 Cotys to Rheemetalces, — and to Polemon, 
 the son of Polemon, his father's government. 
 These facts, coupled with that of no Da- 
 mascene coins of Caligula and Claudius 
 existing (which might be fortuitous, but 
 derives force when thus combined), make it 
 probable that about this time Damascus, 
 which belonged to the predecessors of Are- 
 tas (Jos. Antt. xiii. 5. 2), was granted to 
 Aretas by Caligula. This would at once 
 solve the difficulty. The other suppositions, 
 — tliat tlie Ethnarch was only visiting the 
 city (as if he could then have guarded the 
 city to prevent Paul's escape),— or that 
 Aretas had seized Damascus on Vitellius 
 giving up the expedition against him (as if 
 a Roman governor of a province would, 
 while waiting for orders from a new em- 
 peror, quietly allow one of its chief cities to 
 he taken from him), — are in the highest de- 
 
 gi-ee improbable. The above is taken in 
 substance from Wieseler, Chron. des Apost. 
 Zeitalters, pp. 167 — 175. His further ar- 
 gument from a coin βασιλέως ΆρΊτα <ριλ- 
 έλληΐ'ος does not seem conclusive, as it 
 leaves the latter title altogether unaccounted 
 for. It probably (C. and H. i. pp. 90 and 
 117) belongs to a former Aretas. — On εθν- 
 άρχης see note, 2 Cor. xi. 32. 25. 
 δια τ. τ€ίχοιΐ5] Further particularized by 
 the addition of Sia θνρίΰος, 2 Cor. xi. 33. 
 Such windows in the walls of cities are 
 common in the East : see Josh. ii. 15 : and 
 an engraving of part of the present wall of 
 Damascus in C. and H. i. p. 110. 
 σιτνρίδι] aapyavy, 2 Cor. xi. 33. Sec 
 note there, and on Matt. xv. 37• 
 26. τταραγ.] Immediately : the purpose of 
 this journey was to become acquainted with 
 Peter, Gal. i. 18: a resolution probably 
 taken during the conspiracy of the Jews 
 against him at Damascus, and in furlherance 
 of his announced mission to the Gentiles : 
 that, by conference with the Apostles, his 
 sphere of work might be agreed on. And 
 this purpose his escape enabled him to 
 effect. καί] Not l/ut .• the δί follows. 
 27.] It is very probable that Bar- 
 nabas and Saul may have been personally 
 known to each other in youth. ' (Hprus is 
 only a few hours' sail from Cilicia. Tlio 
 schools of Tarsus may naturally have at- 
 tracted one who, though a Lcvite, was a
 
 96 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 IX. 
 
 ii.ereo„iy. οησιασατο tv τω ονόματι Ιησου. "" και ην μ^τ αυτών ABC 
 
 Zrch. νιΙΙ. 10. '- , , ^ i ' ' ''Τ Λ^ Y.G\l 
 
 Seech. ί.ΐίΐ. ' ί(ς7Γορευο|[ΐ£ΐΌς και ίκπορευομίνος ίΐς ΙερουσαΛι^μ, 
 «i'.'sa't"''' ^ '' τταρρησιαίόμενος iv τω ονόματι του κυοΊου, ελάΧίΐ τε 
 
 Ich. vi. 1. xi. \ li ' ' ν/ k ^ ^1 'Τ^\ Λ ' ' ι^^ m • ' 
 
 2u»oniy. και auvfuiTfi ποος TOUQ ϋλΛηΐ'ΐστας. or Of επενείοου»/ 
 
 m Liikei. ι. ch. ι "in ' ' C\» ii ' ι '^ Λ > α 
 
 EMh'ii^aJ.' " οί'ελίί^»' αυτοί'. "^^ ° ετΓίγΐ'Οίτες όε 'οι '' αόελψοί ^ κατ- 
 ο ab.«oi!, iiere Uyayov oiiTOV £iQ Καίσάοειαρ /cat "^ εζοπεστειλαν αιτου εις 
 
 only. ' ' ' 
 
 23 only in lOpaOV. 
 
 Gospp.Acts 'il 'ΓΤ \ f s ' Λ ' t (Ϋ " \ " ' ί ^ ' ' 
 
 and Epp ^^ Η μίν ouv ίκκλησια καυ οΑης της Ιουόαιας και 
 
 foMhe first Υαλιλαιας και Σαμαξ>ειας ειχει/ fif))/vrji', oi/codo/uou- 
 
 ^ asa"'"' "*'' μίνη /cat ^^ ττορευοαεί'η "" τω Φοβω του κυρίου, και τ^ 
 
 Rom. χ. R. , ,• . , ^ , 
 
 L. Ρ. 3 Kings ί. 3.3. r ch. νϋ. 12 reff. L. Ρ. s sinR. w. two or more places adioined, here only. 
 
 t Loke iv. 14. xxiii. S. ch. X. 37. Lake only. u John xvi. 33. Rom. v. 1 only. τ = 1 Cor. viii 1. x. 23. 
 
 xiv.4, 17. 1 The.'is. V. 11. w constr., ch. xiv. 16. Jude 11. Josh. sxli. 5. See cli. xxi. 21. w. ec, 
 
 Luke i. 0. 1 Pet. iv. 3. 
 
 (κιιριου A) BC al (alii aliter). — 28. και (κπ. om GH all Chr, Thl'. — rec iv tip. with Η 
 &c : t.xt ABCEG all (50 nrly) Chrj Oec ThP. {Meyer holds that hq is owing to a wish 
 io hare a prep that may apply to one or other of the participles : but surely no cor- 
 rector tcould have left ίκπορ. ίΐς together, and Η which omits κ. ίκττ. reads tv). — rec 
 και παρρ. with EGH &c vss Thl al : txt ABC 13. 15. 40. 177 arm jeth ν (ms).— rec 
 T. Kvp. ιησον, with GH &c Thl al : r. κυρ. om C 3. 10. 14. 38. G?-• 80' Syr a;th slav-ms 
 Chr] : t.xt ABE 40. 100. 1G3 lect 12 ν copt sah syr arm Jer.— 29. έλληνας A many vss 
 (Grcecos) : ν lias loquebatur quoque geniibus, et disputabat cum Greeds, but not am 
 demid 8iC (corrn from ch xi. 20). — for ιπιχειρ., ετητηρονν 18. 3G. — rec αυτόν ανελ. 
 with Gil &c Thl : txt ABCE all vss Chr.— 30. for καισ. (-piav CE), ιεροσολνμα A : add 
 νυκτός 180 : δια v. Ε Syr sah syr*. — αυτόν om (as unnecessary) AE all ν arr : ins Β 
 (β sil)CGH &c vss Chr Thl. — 31. rec at μεν ουν εκκλησιαι (add πασαι Ε) &c ειχον &c 
 οικοίομονμενηι (-ΐ'οι Ε) κ. πορευομίναι {-νοι Ε) &c επληθννοντυ (see note), with EGH 
 &c syr ar-pol Chr Thl' Oec : txt ABC all ν Syr copt sah seth arm Dion-alex Thl- {και 
 γαλ. κ. σαμ. om or transp al). — τον om 137 lect 12. — και . . . επληθυνοντο om 101. — 
 
 Hellenist: and there the friendship may 
 have begun, which lasted through many 
 vicissitudes, till it was rudely interrupted 
 in the dispute at Antioch (ch. xv. 39).' 
 (C. and 11. i. p. 113.) toiis άτΓοστ.] 
 
 Only Peter, and James the Lord's brother, 
 Gal. i. 18, 19. Probably there were no 
 other App. there at the time : if there were, 
 it is hardly conceivable that Saul should not 
 have seen them. On his second visit, he 
 saw John also (Gal. ii. 9). Perhaps he 
 never saw in the flesh any other of the 
 Apostles after his conversion. διηγη- 
 
 σοτο] viz. Barnabas, not Saul. 29. 
 
 Έλληνιστός] See ch. vi. 1 and note. This 
 he did, partly, we may infer, to avoid the 
 extreme and violent opposition which he 
 would immediately encounter from the Jews 
 themselves, — but partly also, it may well be 
 believed, because he himself in the syna- 
 gogues of the Hellenists had opposed Stephen 
 formerly. 30. έττιγνόντί? δε . . . .] 
 
 There was also another reason. He was 
 praying in the temple, and saw the Lord in 
 a vision, who commanded him to depart, 
 for they would not receive his testimony : — 
 and sent him from thence to the Gentiles : 
 see ch. xxii. 17—21 and notes. Hisstay in 
 Jerusalem at this visit was fifteen days, Gal. 
 
 i. 18. els Καισ-άρειαν] From the 
 
 whole cast of the sentence, the κατήγαγον 
 and ίξαηίστίΐλαν, we should infer this to 
 be CiEsarea Stratonis, even if this were not 
 determined by the word Καισαρεία used 
 absolutely, which always applies to this city, 
 and not to Csesarea Philippi (which De 
 Dieu, Olsh., and others believe to be meant). 
 From Gal. i. 21, it would appear that Saul 
 about this time traversed Syria (on his way 
 to Tarsus ?). If so, he probably went by 
 sea to Seleucia, and thence to Antioch. The 
 εζαπέστειλαν looks more like a ' sending 
 off' by sea, than a mere ' sending forward ' 
 by land. els Ταρσόν] ' towards,' 
 
 ' for,' Tarsus. He was not idle there, but 
 certainly preached the Gospel, and in all 
 probabiUty was the founder of the churches 
 alluded to ch. χ v. 23 and 41. 
 
 31.] Flourishing state of the 
 CHURCH IN Palestine at this time. 
 Commencement of new section : compare 
 μεν ουν, and note ch. viii. 4. 25. The 
 reading €κκλησία can hardly (as IVIeyer) be 
 an alteration to suit the idea of the unity of 
 the church, — as in that case we should have 
 similar alterations in ch. xv. 41 ; xvi. 5, 
 where no variations are found in the chief 
 MSS. More probably, it has been altered
 
 28—35. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 97 
 
 " παρακ\ησίΐ του ay Ίου πνεύματος ^ £π\ηθυνετο 
 νετο οε ΥΙίτρον ^ Οίίρχόμενοί' "* οια πάντων 
 και προς τους αγίους τους κατυικουντας 
 
 33 ,r. 
 
 £yt- χ — ch.xiii. 
 Λ η - '^• "• ^^' 
 
 Λύδδα. 
 
 ίυ^ίΐ' οε εκεί ανσ^ωττον τίνα ονόματι t\iviuv tt, ετών 
 
 Γω κατακίΐμίνον επί κ:ραραττω, ος ην παραλίλυ- 
 
 34 ^■^ '"'π' Λ*' '- ' 'Τ 
 
 και ειττεί' αντω ο Ιίετρος Λίνεα, ίαται σε 1ί}σους 
 
 1 Co 
 
 . χ. 1. 
 
 /αεί'ος 
 
 ο -^^ριστος' ' αναστηϋι και " στρωσον σίαυτω. 
 
 35 Κα; 
 
 2 Cor. i 
 more usual 
 with ace. 
 a with ev oir, 
 XX. 25. Ai' 
 ΰμκιι/, Rom. 
 .28. 
 
 b ch. viii. 5 
 reff. 
 
 c See ver. 13. d constr., cli. i. 10 reff. e = Lake viii. 27 al. 3 Kiugs xviii. 12. f = Mark i. 30. ch. 
 
 xxriii. 8. Prov.Ti.9. g Mark ii. 4 al. John v. 8 al. ch. v. I.'i t. h ch. viii. 7 reff. i — Mark ix. 
 
 27 al. ch. xii. 7. k Matt.xxi. 8 1 Mk. al. Ezek. xxiii. 41. Job -xvii. 13. constr., here only. 
 
 32. rec XvSSav (alteration to an inflected form from the original Xv^Sa: cf ίΐς Χυδΰα 
 τταριλθων Jos. Β J η. 1ί>. 1), with CEGH &c Chr al : XvCnv 51 : t.xt AB 9f5 al.— 33. 7iv(,. 
 E. — τη•α om 103.— rec aiv. ονομ. with GH &c Clir Thl' : txt ABCE al ν Syr arm 
 (copt sah seth) al ΊΥύ-,—αιτεα 57.— rec κραββατω with (-τω) EGII &c Thl : -Γου ABC : 
 but κρπβητΓ. AB.'CEGH al. [The gen has prob been an alteration to conform it to 
 ch V. 15.)— 34. ο KVQ. ιησ. A al vss ThF Ambr Cass.— «//σ. om 137. — ο om BC 137. 180 
 {alteration to the Name ιησ. χρ.) : ins AEGH all Chr Thl al. — σιαυτον G 42.-35. rec 
 
 here to conform it to those places. — This 
 description probably embraces most of the 
 time since the conversion of Saul. De Wette 
 observes, that the attention of the Jews was, 
 during much of this time, distracted from 
 the Christians, by the attempt of Caligula to 
 set up his image in the temple at Jerusalem, 
 Jos. Antt. xviii. 8. 2 — 9. οίκοδομου- 
 
 μενη] vSee Matt. xvi. 18. It probably re- 
 fers to both external and internal strength 
 and accession of grace. Paul commonly 
 uses it of spiritual building up : see reff. 
 irop. τω φόβ.] ' wal^ng in the 
 fear :' for constr. see reff. : — not '■following 
 after the fear' (Winer, § 31. 1), — nor 
 'walking according to the fear' as their 
 rnle (Meyer), — nor ' advancing in the fear' 
 (Beza, Wolf). K. τ. τταρακλ. τ. άγ. 
 
 Trv. ίττληθ.] ' And was multiplied (reff.) 
 by the exhortation of (i. e. inspired by) 
 the Holy Spirit.' This is the only ren- 
 dering which suits the usage of the words. 
 Those of the Vulg. ' consolatione reple- 
 bantur,' — of Kuin. ' adjumento abunda- 
 bant,' are unexampled, see reff. — Neither 
 must Tij παρακλ. be coupled with τφ φόβψ, 
 as in E. V. and by Beza and Rosenmiiller, 
 which would leave οΐκοδομ. standing by 
 itself, and render the sentence totally unlike 
 Luke's usual manner of writing. 
 
 32 — 35.] Healing of tEneas at 
 Lydda nv Peter. These two miracles 
 form the introduction to the very important 
 portion of Peter's history which follows in 
 ch. X., — by bringing him and his work be- 
 fore us again. 32. δΐ€ρχόμ.. δ. ir.] 
 These words are aptly ititroduced by tlie 
 notice in ver. 31, wliicJi shews tliat Peter's 
 journey was not an escape from persecution, 
 but undertaken at a time of peace, and for 
 tlie |)iiii)i)KC of visiting thi; churches. — 
 πάντων may be neuter, ' all parts :' but it 
 Vol. II. 
 
 is probably masc. and ayiwv understood. 
 Wleseler (p. 145, note) doubts whether we 
 can say δύρχίσθαι Sui πάντων τ. άγιων, 
 — but see reff. The και makes the masc. 
 more likely, as it presupposes some ciytoi in 
 the mind of the writer before. — As I have 
 remarked on ver. 31, this journey of Peter's 
 is not necessarily consecutive on the events 
 of vv. 1 — 30. But an alternative presents 
 itself here; either it took place before the 
 arrival of Saul in Jerusalem, or after his 
 departure : for Peter was there during his 
 visit (Gal. i. 18). It seems most likely that it 
 was before his arrival. For (1) it is Luke's 
 manner in this first part of the Acts, where 
 he is carrying on several histories together, 
 to follow the one in hand as far as some 
 resting-point, and then go back and take up 
 another : see ch. viii. 2 thus taken up from 
 tvatpkati αύτοΐ', ver. 1 : ver. 4 going back 
 to the ?ιασπα(>ΐΐ'Τίς•. — ch. ix. 1 taken up 
 from viii. 3 : — xi. 19, from viii. 4 again : — 
 and (2) the journey of Peter to visit the 
 churches which were now resting after the 
 persecution would hardly be delayed so long 
 as three whole years. So that it is most 
 natural to place this section, viz. ch. ix. 32 
 — xi. 18 (for all this is continuous), before 
 the visit of Saul to Jerusalem, and during 
 his stay at Damascus or in Arabia. See 
 further on xi. 19. Λύδδα] Lod, Neh. 
 
 vii. 37• — A large village near Joppa (ver. 
 38), on the Mediterranean (Jos. Antt. xx. 
 (j. 2, κώμην τινά Av^Cav \(γομ., πόλίοις 
 το μΐγίϋος oi'/c άπυ£ίονσαν), just one day's 
 journey from Jerusalem (Lightf., Cent. Cher. 
 IMatdi. prtem. cxvi.). It afterwards became 
 the important town of Diospolis. 
 33. Alvcav] Whether a believer or not, 
 does not appear ; from Peter's visit being 
 to the .saints, it would seem that he was : 
 but perhaps the indefinite άνΟροιττύν τίνα 
 II
 
 ί)8 
 
 ΠΡΑΕΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 IX. 86— 4ί 
 
 iso.ii.xxiv. 1. tuOiotr ' ανί'στ»), κα\ πδαν αυτόν πάντες οι ' κατοικοΰντίς 
 Ι.?":•.'."•,'-!'• Αυόδ(ί /ν-πί 
 
 (cli. xir. 1' 
 al) 
 D here only. 
 Uiog. Liirrt. 
 
 tTTt τον 
 
 701' j.iii)(oi'(i, oirii'tf,• ίττίπτρ^ψαν 
 "^^'liv Ίόππη δί τις ϊ}ΐ' "μαθήτρια ονόματι 
 
 ABC 
 EGII 
 
 Txvi'.'a:''cuT. 37 f^f,,£ro δί tv ταίς ηπίοοίς εκΐΐναις 
 
 iv. π. ' ^ * 
 
 .i'l•. =• , 38 
 
 iv.a(Ati. Ι,ιριί^α, If όηξίμηΐ'ίυομίΐη^ ^ AeyeTai ίΛορκας αυτή τ/ν 
 "a/Hi.t"''' ' ττλί'ίοης ' α-γαβων έργων icat * t/Xtijjttoffuintii' ών έττοΐίί. 
 
 ασΟίΐη/σασαν ηυτ-ην 
 ^ λου(ταΐ'Γ£ς δε αυτήν ίΟηκαν ει; ^^ υπίοωω. 
 eyyvc δε ουσίκ" Λυδδτϊς τ» Ιοτγτγώ οι μαΟηται ακουσαν- 
 ep^ur'.c'ii χ'-ϋ; ■'■f<>' "^t Τίετρος " εστ/ΐ' ίΐ' αυττ) απεστίΐλαν ουο ανορας 
 
 4,3Ϊοιιίν•. Dan.iT.21. t «tir.. Matt, xviii. 11). Z'ph.iii.ll. u abs., Matt. χ. 8. al.t ? (Ps xxx. 10.) 
 
 τ John xili. 10 al. ch. χτί. 33. £xod. ii. 5. w ch. i. 13 rclf. Acts only. 3 Kings xvii. I'J. χ pres., 
 
 ver. 211 refl'. 
 
 ticov (cnn-n to more usual form), with EGH (ιδον Η) &c : ιώοντίς 180 : txt ABC. — 
 ναΐ'τις om !)G. 142. — λκί. [see above, ver'.Vi). — rec σάρωναν (corrn with the same view as 
 XvcSnv : but seeing τον before it, the transcriber could not make it an accus.fem., and 
 has therefore made it a masc from σαηωιας, not seeing that it urns already an accus 
 from σηρων), witli all: ησσαρωνα GH all slav Chr Till' : t.\t Α{σαορ. but erased)BCE 
 al (copt sah al) ThF.— 36. ην om Β,—τηβηθα BC, τηβηθα 315. 93.' !)5. 113 al Bas Chr 
 Thl-'Ooc: t.xt AEGH cScc Cyr-jer Tlulrt Thl'.-fp/ifji'. 42. 1!)0.— «py. αγ. BCE al vss 
 (corrn η : txt AGH &c Chr Thl.— 37. ίθηκ. αυτ. A al (v al) : om avr. Β : txt CEGH 
 mss (nily) Chr Thl— τω υπιρ. ACE 38. 93. 1 13 Thl' (comm) Thl^ : (corrn : see ch i. 
 13): txt B(e sil)GH all Chrj ThP (text).— 38. XvSSa A, λνΰδιις C, \νδης 5? (altera- 
 tions for conformity to vv 32. 35 : but this is a different section of the narrative. Josephus 
 uses both forms : ίπι λνδδης ιχωρα, Β J iv. 8, \ : and see above, ver 32) : txt B(e sil) 
 EGH ii^s (nrly) Chr Thl.— ^υο avdp. om GH all (40 and more) Chrj Oec ThU.— rec 
 
 may imply the contrary, as also Peter's 
 words, announcing a free and unexpected 
 gift from One whom he knew not. 
 34. στρώσ. σία-υτ.] Not 'for the future :' 
 but ' immediately,' as a proof of his sound- 
 ness. 35. iravres .... oiTives] Not 
 'all, ii-ho had turned lu the Lord,' as Kuin.: 
 this would make the mention of the fact 
 unmeaning, — and surely more would see 
 him than the believers merely. The similar 
 use of uirtfec in the ref. shews its meaning 
 to be commensurate with the preceding 
 iravTcs. 'AH that dwelt in L. and S. 
 saw him ; — who also (i.e. and they) turned 
 to the Lord.' A general conversion of the 
 inhabitants to the faith followed. τον 
 Σάρωνα] Perhaps not a village, but (and 
 the art. makes this probable) the celebrated 
 plain of that name, extending along the 
 coast from Caesarea to Joppa, see Isa. xxxiii. 
 9; XXXV. 2; Ixv. 10. Cant. ii. 1. ] Chron. 
 xxvii. 29 ; and Jerome on Isa. xxxiii. and 
 l.xv.— Mariti (Travels, ]). 350) mentions a 
 village Saren between Lydda and Arsuf (see 
 Josh. xii. 18, marg. E. V.) : but more recent 
 travellers do not notice it. See "Winer, 
 RWB., where other places of the same 
 name are mentioned. 36. Iv ΊάττΊττ^] 
 Joppa was a very ancient Philistian city, on 
 the frontier of Dan, but not belonging to 
 that tribe, Jo.sh. xix. 40; on the coast (ch. 
 X. G), with a celebrated but not very secure 
 
 harbour (Jos. B. J. iii. 9. 3 : see 2 Chron. 
 ii. 10. Ezr. iii. 7. Jonah 1. 3. 1 Mace, xiv.5. 
 2 Mace. xii. 3), — situated in a plain (1 Mace. 
 X. 75 — 77) near Lydda (ver. 38), at the end 
 of the mountain road connecting Jerusalem 
 with the sea. The Maccabean generals, 
 Jonathan and Simon, took it from the 
 Syrians and fortified it (1 Mace. x. 74 — 76 ; 
 xiv. 5. 34. Jos. Antt. xiii. 9. 2). Pompey 
 joined it to the province of Syria (Antt. 
 xiv. 4. 4), but CiEsar restored it to Hyr- 
 canus (xiv. 10. 0), and it afterwards formed 
 part of the k. of Herod (xv. 7• 3) and of 
 Archelaus (xvii. 11. A), after whose deposi- 
 tion it reverted to the province of Syria, to 
 which it belonged at the time of our narra- 
 tive. It was destroyed by C. Cestius (Jos, 
 B. J. ii. 18. 10) ; but rebuilt, and became a 
 nest of Jewish pirates (Strabo, xvi. 759), in 
 consequence of which Vespasian levelled it 
 with the ground, and built a fort there 
 (B. J. iii. 9. 3, 4), which soon became the 
 nucleus of a now town. It is now called 
 Jafla (Ίά^α, Anna Comncna. Alex. ii. p. 
 328), and has about 7000 inhabitants, half 
 of whom are Christians. (Winer, RWB.) 
 Ταβιθά] !<η'3Ώ, in Aramaic, answer- 
 ing to n:i, Heb., δορκάς (Ml. Hist. An. 
 xiv. 14), a gazelle. It appears also in the 
 Rabbinical books as a female name(Lightf.) : 
 the gazelle being in the East a favourite typo 
 of beauty. See Cant. ii. 9. 17; iv. 5; vii 3.
 
 χ. 1. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λί2Ν. 99 
 
 ττρυς αντον, ^ ΤΓορακαΧονντες Μη ^ oKvijayjq * δίελθεΓν y = ch. sm. 
 
 a " ' - 30 b ' ^ ^V π ' c - \ ί\ ' " . '\ 42al.fr. 
 
 ίως Ί]μων. αναστας cc ΙΙίτοος avvi]AVtv (ΐυτοις ov ^'^^^""'y:. 
 
 παρα-^ίνομίνον ^ ανη-γα-γον εις το νπεξίωον, και ° ττορ- a Lnke ϋ. is. 
 
 / >— — e^^ -ν/ ^i*CN ^ XI. 19, 22. 
 
 αι χη- έστησαν αυτω τιασαι αι -χηραι κΛαιουσαι και εττίοείκ- ''^^j^""=^^ 
 
 Ρ"' Η. , 1^ „ \ t / ti ' ι \ »5- t c = c!i.i. 21. 
 
 ABC νυμεναι -γιτωνας και ιμάτια οσα εττοιει μίτ αυτών ονσα χ.•2-3άρ. 
 
 EG r Λ / ^η „ι . /-ι Λ ν Λ\ ,/^ / <• χ-τ / η Λ \ Luk.ixxiii. 
 
 , Luke 
 
 ■η Αορκάς. ^ '" εκβαΧων δε εζω πάντας ο Τίετρος " θε/ς ^^^^^^,- 
 τα jovuTa ° προςηίιζατο, και ^ επιστρεφας ττρος το '' σώμα e = Lule^iT'. 5. 
 ειττεν Ύαβιθα, ' ανάστηθι. η δε ^ ηνοιζεν τους οφθαΧμους '"'^■'ξ^. 
 αυτής, και ι^ουσα τον Πετούν ανεκάθισεν. " δους δε hMarkxii.4i) 
 
 ■> - - ν'/ ''.W, ' ^> >xf' al. Ps.lsxvii. 
 
 awry χί'/Ο" ανεστησεν αυτήν ψωνησας οε τους ανιους . μ. 
 
 και τας ' γί)ρας ^ παρεστησεν αυτήν Ζ,ωσαν. ^ -γνωστόν kM"'u.v.4nai. 
 
 δ\»/ α. η'' " \ " 'ί ' \ ' ι ΛΛ^ ^'^"• ΧΧΧτϋ. 
 
 ε ε^εΐ'ετο κασ οΑης της Ιοττττης, /coi εττιστευσαν ττυλλοί 3. 
 
 '>'''■ ' 43 • ' ^^ C *• ' • ^ ιΙ - ι- John 
 
 ετΓί τοί' κυριον. ε-γενετο οε ημευας ικανας μειναι !^{,,i,"i, 
 
 ■> y > >ι / e / ν' t/Q - Χ^Ι'λ* m Loke viii.54. 
 
 αυτόν ει» Ιοππρ τταρα τινι 2.ιμωνι ρυρσει. Λ.. Λντιρ j<.imvi.37. 
 δε τις εν Καισαρεία οΐ'όματι ΚορνηΧιος, εκατοντάργ^ης εκ ncif vh.'boreff. 
 
 oabs,ver.l2. Matt. vi. ."ι al. p = ch.xvi.l8. \v. προ?, here only. <) =Maft. xxvii. 52, &■-. 5. Jade 
 
 9. Josh. viii. 29. r = ver. 34. s — ver. 8 only. 4 Kings iv. S.i. t Luke vii. In only t. α here only. 
 4Kingss.l,n. ν trans , ch. ii. 24, 32 al. w — John i. 49 al. ToLit ν 8. χ ver. 32. y eh i. 3 reflf. 
 zch.i.lHal. Ps.lxsT.l. aver.Slreff. b ch. xi. 17 al. Rom. iv. 24. L. P. (See Matt xxvii. 42.) 
 
 ever. 23refl. d = John i. 39. ch. xvi. 15. e — John i.39 al. I here (&c.) only f. (Job xvi. 16.) 
 
 μη οκνησαι c. f. αιτ. (alteration to avoid the Aars/inens of the direct constr with παρακ. 
 Meyer thinks the direct constr has been written in the marg and found its way into the 
 text : but this is unlikely. Were there authority enough, I should be disposed to think 
 that the reading οκνησαι . . . ημών might have been the original, and that -σης may 
 have been a corrn : but there could be no motive for correcting οκνησαι . . . αυτών), 
 with C3(appy)GH &c vss Chr Thl : txt ABCiE 81 al {-σας al: fugeret e) ν {οκνησαι . . 
 ημών copt sah). — 39. ο — . C 180. — τηρηστησαν Bas Cbr (v al). — επι^ιγν. A. — ίτηκνν- 
 μιναι Ε'. — χιτιανα 42. — for μ(τ αντ. ούσα, αυταις ν arm. — η οπι 133. — 40. παν. ίζ. 
 C aP ν all : txt AB(e sil)EH riiss (nrly) aeth al Chr Thl.— bef θίΐς ins και ABCE 3. 15. 
 25. 40 al copt Thl- (supplementary corrn) : cm G most mss (vss) Chr Thl' Oec. — bef 
 ηνοιί. ins παραχυημα Ε : ϋιηνοιί. 9fi. 142 al : ηνίωϊ,ί Ύ\Λ-. — 41. for C£ (1st), τί A Syr 
 asth: και φων. 13. 180.— 42. της om BC : ins AEG mis (appy) Chr Thl.— rec ττολλ. 
 fTTiffr. (corrn), with G &c vss Chr Thl : txt ABCE 31. 40. G9 al ν aeth arm.— 43. for 
 ικανας, τινας C al. — iyiv. Ss αυτόν AE 29. 38. 40 al : αυτ. om Β 95' : txt CG most 
 mss Chr Thl. 
 
 Chap. X. 1. rec aft ης ins ην (corrn, see ch ix. 36; not observing that the constr is 
 carried on to tiStv, ver 3), with 1 al vss (appy) Thl : but om ABCEG aU e Chr. — και- 
 
 Lightf. remarks, that she was probably a would shew, in how Httle honour he or his 
 
 Hellenist, and thus was known by both office was held by the Jews at Csesarea. 
 
 names. 37. ev virepaitu] No art., as Chap. X. 1—48.] Conversion (by 
 
 in the expr. ιίς οΊκον, ' on deck,' &c., which special divine rREARR.\NGEMENT) and 
 
 usually occur after prepositions, cf. Middl. baptism of the Gentile Cornelius and 
 
 ch. vi. § 1. — See 1 Kings xvii. 19. his party. We may remark, that the con- 
 
 39. ττάσ-αι αϊ χ.] The widows of the version of the Gentiles was no new idea to 
 place, for wliom she made those garments. Jews or Christians, but that it had been 
 
 eiroiei] ' was making,' i. e. ' used to universally regarded as to take place iy </ieir 
 
 make' (i. o. weave) : not ' had made.' reception into Judaism. Of late, however, 
 
 40. βκβαλών] After the examjjle of his di- since the Ascension, we see the truth that 
 vine Master, see reff. 43. βυρσίΐ ) From the Gospel was "to be a Gospel of the uncir- 
 the extracts in Wetstein atid Scliiitfgen, it cumcisioti, beginning to be recognized by 
 appears that the Jews regarded the occupa- some. Stephen, carrying out the principk'S 
 tion of a tanner as a half-unclean one. In of his own apology, could hardly fail to re- 
 this case it would shew, as De W. observes, cognize it : and the (^yjirian and Cyrensean 
 that the stricter Jewish practices were missionaries of ch. xi. 20 preached tlu; word 
 already disregarded by the Apostle. It also ττρυς τονς"Κ\\ηνας (not -ιστάς), certainly 
 
 II 2
 
 100 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛίΙΝ. 
 
 Χ. 
 
 g ΜηΚ. χχνϋ. g 
 
 •J7 |. ch. xsi. 
 
 31. χχνϋ. 1 
 
 οηΐν t. 
 
 2 Mhcc. Tiii. 
 
 23. 
 hvi-r. 7. 2 Pet 
 
 1ί. II only. 
 
 Isa. xxir. 
 
 2 li 
 
 φη 
 
 ίυσίρης και 
 
 111. 
 
 σπί'ιρης της καΧουμίνης Ιταλικής, 
 ' φηβουμίΐ'ος τον θευν συν παντι τω υ'ικω αυτοΰ, ποιων 
 "^ ίΧζημοσυνας ττοΧλάς τω λαω και " δεομένος τον Οεοΰ 
 ° διοπαντος, ^ ίίδεν tv '' οξ)άματι '' φονερως, ■" ώςει πε^ι 
 ^ ωοαν ii'i'arfjv της ■ημίξ>ας, ayytXov τον Οίου ίΐςίΧΟοντα 
 προς αυτόν καΐ ε'ιποντα αυτω KopvTjXtE. ο δε ατίνισας 
 
 ABC 
 EG 
 
 ί ~νν.;2, 3Γ>. 
 ch. χϋΙ. ιη, 
 2« η1. Prov. 
 ill. 7. 
 
 al. fr. Gin.Tii. 1. 1 — Matt. vi. 1, 2. ch. ix. 3(1. xxiv. 17. Tobit xii. 9. m ch. ix. 30 rcff. η alwol. 
 
 w. gen., hrre only, see chap. iv. 31. 1 Thess. iii. 10. ο ch. ii. 2:i relT. ρ ch. vii. 31 alio. Acts only (exc. 
 
 Mall. xvii.!l.) Gen. xlvi. 2. q — here only. Mark i. 45. John vii. 10 t. r = Luke xxiii. 44. Judg. 
 
 ill. 2!l. eacc. {without wtpi'), Rev. iii. 3. John iv. 52. t Luke iv. 20. ch. iii. 12. 2 Cor. iii. ", 13 L. P. 
 
 Job vii. 8 alex. 
 
 σαρια Ε. — ίκατυνταρχ. om G.— σττίΐρας Β all Chr : txt ACEG all Thl Oec. — 2. rec 
 aft ποιωΐ' ins τι, with G most mss Chr (comm) Thl Oec: om ABCE 18. 2G. 40. 81 ν 
 Syr ar-pol teth Chr (te.xt). — iv τω λαω 40. 47- 73 Syr ar seth Iren. — 3. ούτος (ιδ. iifi- 
 lat v-ms Syr. — ψανίρω 177• — ως£ΐ om 3. O'S. 67 arm sah : ως all Dam Thl^ : ως tig Thl'. 
 — «it)' C — rec aft ωςιι om ττερι (as unnecessary: this is much more probable than 
 Meyer's siippn that πιρι was a gloss on ωςιι : comp πιρι ωρ. εκτ., ver 9), with G most 
 mss Chr (ωρα ένατη) Oec : ins ABCE all Dam ThF. — 4. for η εστί, τις ει seth lat-mss. 
 
 before the conversion nf Cornelius. This 
 state of things might have given rise to a 
 permanent schism in the infant church. 
 The Hellenists, and perhaps Saul, with his 
 definite mission to the Gentiles, might have 
 formed one party, and the Hebrews, with 
 Peter at their head, the other. But, as 
 Neander admirably observes (Pfl. u. Leit. p. 
 Ill), 'The pernicious influence with which, 
 from the first, the self-seeking and one-sided 
 prejudices of human nature threatened the 
 divine work, was counteracted by the supe- 
 rior influence of the Holy Spirit, which did 
 not allow the differences of men to reach 
 such a point of antagonism, but enabled 
 them to retain unity in variety. We recog- 
 nize the preventing wisdom of God, — which, 
 wliile civing scope to the free agency of 
 man, knows how to interpose His imme- 
 diate revelation just at the moment when it 
 is re(|uisite for the success of the divine 
 work, — by noticing, that when the App. 
 needed this wider development of their 
 Christian knowledge for the e.xercise of 
 their vocation, and when the lack of it 
 would have been exceedingly detrimental, — 
 at that very moment, by a remarkable co- 
 incidence of inward revelation with a chain 
 of outward circumstances, the illumination 
 hitherto wanting was imparted to them.' 
 1. Καισαρεία] See ch. viii. 40, 
 note. Ικατοντάρχης] The subordi- 
 
 nate officer commanding the sixth part of a 
 cohort = half a maniple. See Diet, of Gr. 
 and Roman Antt. σιτ. τ. καλ. Ίταλ.] 
 
 A cohort (στΓ.) levied iii Italy, not in Syria. 
 Mr. Humphry quotes from Gruter, Inscr. 
 i. p. 434, ' Cohors militum Italicorum vo- 
 luntaria, qute est in Syria.' Biscoe (Hist. 
 of the Acts, pp. 217 — 221) maintains that 
 this was an independent cohort, not one 
 attached to a legion. The leffio Italica 
 
 (Tacit. Hist. i. 5!). 64 ; ii. 100 ; iii. 22) 
 was not raised till Nero's time. 
 2. ίΰσ. κ. φοβ. τ. θ.] i. e. he had aban- 
 doned polytheism, and was a worshipper of 
 the true God : whether a proselyte of the 
 gate, or not, seems uncertain. That he 
 may have been such, there is nothing in the 
 narrative to preclude : nor does Meyer's 
 objection apply, — that it is not probable 
 that, among the many thousand converts, no 
 Greek proselytehadyetbeen admitted by bap- 
 tism into the church. Many such cases may 
 have occurred, and some no doubt had : but 
 the object of this providential interference 
 seems to have been, to give solemn sanction 
 to such reception, by the agency of him who 
 was both the chief of the Apostles, and the 
 strong upholder of pure Judaism. It is 
 hardly possible that μαπτυροΰμενης νπο 
 όλου τοϋ 'έθί'ονς των Ιουδαίων (ver. 22) 
 should have been said of a Gentile not in 
 any way conformed to the Jewish faith and 
 worship. The great point (ch. xi. 3) which 
 made the present event so important, was, 
 that Cornelius was άνήρ άκροβυστίαν 
 €χων. Doubtless also among his company 
 (ver. 24) there must have been many who 
 were not proselytes. δεόμενος τ. 
 
 θεον διαίΓ.] From Cornelius's own nar- 
 rative, ver. 31, as well as from the analogy 
 of God's dealings, we are certainly justified 
 in inferring, with Neander, that the subject 
 of his prayers was that he might be guided 
 into truth, and if so, hardly without refer- 
 ence to that faith which was now spreading 
 so widely over Judiea. This is not matter 
 of conjecture, but is implied by Peter's 
 οίδατε το γινόμ. ρήμα καθ' ϋλ?;ς της 
 Ίονδαίας. Further than this, we cannot 
 infer with certainty ; but, if the particular 
 difficuly jjresent in his mind be sought, we 
 can hardly avoid the conclusion that it was
 
 2—9. ΠΡΑΗΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 101 
 
 αντω και ^εμφοβος "γενόμίνος inrev Ύΐ ίστιν, Kvpie ; Ηττεν '"^"^''^?','3^■ 
 
 δ^'~Λ'v ' *'ηι'\ ' \ν' 1 Marc. χ ίϋ. 2. 
 
 Ε αντω Αι ττροςίνγ^αι σου και αι ίλεημοσυναι σου αι^- vpinr.,ch.ii. 
 
 ίβησαν "εις ^ μνημόσυνοί' ^ ξμπροσθίν τυϋ θεοΰ. ^ και ^'vi' '''ε^^ο"\°''23 
 
 ΤΓίμφον αΐ'ορας eiq Ιοτητην και '^ μετάπίμ'φαι Έ,ιμωνά τιι>α secch'ixi!!' 
 
 ος ίπικαΧίΐται Πετροί" " ούτος ^ ζει-ί^εται ^ παοά τινι ^j-v.om.iv.-a, 
 
 Σ' e /Q - r > ' ' f ^ £1 ' Λ 7 ' ^^ XV• 6 ch. 
 
 ιμωΐΊ ρυ^χτει, ω εστίν oiKta πάρα υαλασσαν. ' ως οε χ,χ. szai. 
 
 2, 29.c!l. 
 xi. 13 al^J. 
 A'-ts only. 
 Num. xxi)' ~ 
 
 '"ΛΑ f" -v ''ΛΛ" '"c, ' '^' " yMatt. ΧΛ,νι. 
 
 anijAosu ο ayyeAoq ο λαΑων αυτω, ψωνησας όυο των J^o,fi'"Exod' 
 
 h ' - * ' i ' Ο- - k / xii. 14. Tobit 
 
 οικίτων και στρατιωτην ίυσίρη των προςκαρτίοουντων πι. ΐ2. 
 
 5 - Q \ 1 )ν / « 5 - ' / Λ ζ= Luke Χ. 21. 
 
 αντω, και Εζ,ηγησαμενος άπαντα αυτοις, απεστειΛεν scor - - 
 
 αυτούς εις την Ιόττττην. τ^ δε "" επαύριον " οδοιττοοουν- 
 
 των εκείνων και tij πολει εγ-γιί,οντων ^ ανερη υετοος bMatt. χ. sai. 
 
 ever. 23 al. Sir. xxix.25. Heb. xiii. 2t. d — Lake xi. 37. ch. xxi. 16. e here (&c.) only t. 
 
 f Matt. xiii. 1 al. g eh. ix. 41 reff. li Lake xvi. 13. Rom. xir. 4. 1 Pet. ii. 18 only. Gen. ix. 25, 2(>. 
 
 iver. 2reff'. k ch. viii. 13 reft'. Mark iii. 9. 1 = cb. xv. 12, 14. Judg. vii. 13. m John i. 29, Sic. 
 
 Nam. xi. 32. η here only t (2 Kings xii. 4). ο Jat., ch. ix. 3 al. Luke xv. 25. ρ ch. viii. 31 reff. 
 
 — rec ίνωπιην τ. θ. {substitution for the less usual ιμπροσθίν), with CEG &c Chr Thl : 
 txt AB 15. 3C. 40. C9 CEG al Chr Thl.— 5. rec tiq. ιοπ. avEp., with G &c Chr Thl: 
 txt ABCE 31. 69. 105. 180 ν Syr arm al. — rec aft σ. om nva {corrn from respect to 
 the Apostle. This is much more prob than Meyer's supposn, that nva was inserted to 
 conform the first σιμ. to Ike other. The same considerations have led to the varread in 
 ver 32), with EG &c Syr sah al Chr Thl Iren : ins ABC all ν (am tol, not demid) copt syr- 
 marg arm. — τον ίτηκα\ονμη•ον Trtrpov EG all Oec Thl {corrn from ch xi. 32.' or 
 oriyl, and ος ιπικαΚηται a corrn from ver 32 ? the rnss authority must decide). — καλόν- 
 μίΐ'ον Orig .' Chr^ : txt ABC &c CliTj. — 6. κ. αιτος ίση ζαιζίψίνος ττρος σίμωνα τίνα 
 (τον) βυμτεα 08. 137 Chr Thl- {αυτός also 133). — σιμωνι τινι C. — η οικ. lect 12. — rec 
 aft θαλ. add ουτυς \a\t]aei σοι τι σι Set ποιιιν {interpolation from ch ix. C, χ. 32, corn- 
 lined : see also ch xi. 14), with many mss ν (demid, not am tol &c) feth Thl- (al copt ος 
 λαλησίι ρημ. προς σ£ . . . to οίκος σον from ch xi. 14) : ος λαλησίΐ σοι 133 : txt ABCEG 
 h all vss Chr Thl'. — 7. ο (2nd) om G lect 2G. — rec aft λάλων, -τω κορνηλιω {expla- 
 natory corrn), with G &c syr ar-pol Chr Thl : txt ABCE all ν Syr ar-erp copt sah seth 
 arm : auroi' 163. — των om 180. — rec aft ojk. add αυτόν {explanatory insertion), with 
 G most mss vss Chr Thl : om ABCE 40 arm. — for ευσεβή, τίνα ^υλaβη 40 ; fidelem d. 
 — τον ττροςκ-αρτερονντα 96, lect 12 Syr sah. — 8. rec αυτοις άπαντα {corrn), with CG 
 al vss Chr Thl : txt ABE al copt sah: avr. om 126. — 9. for ficttj^, αυτών {corrn to 
 correspond with αυτοις above) AEG all : txt B(e sil)C all e ν &c Chr Thl. — εννατην 
 
 connected with the apparent necessity of of which fruits, and the best of them, was, 
 
 embracing Judaism and circumcision in the earnest seeking by prayer for a better 
 
 order to become a believer on Christ. and more perfect faith. 7. ά7Γήλθ€ν] 
 
 τω λοώ] The Jewi.sh inhabitants, see ch. So in Luke i. 38: — another token of the 
 
 xxvi. 17. 23; xxviii. 17. 3. kv όράμ. objective reality of the vision : ιΐςίλθόντα 
 
 ψαν€ρώς] not in a trance, as ver. 10, and (ver. 3) and άττί/λθ. denoting the real acts 
 
 ch. xxii. 17, — but ivith his bodily eyes: of the angel, not the mere deemings of 
 
 thus asserting the objective truth of the Cornelius. λάλων must be regarded 
 
 appearance. isei vtpX ώρ. €v.] It as the imperfect participle, as in John ix. 8. 
 
 here appears that C. observed the Jewish 9.] By δώμα, Jerome, Luther, 
 
 hours of prayer. 4. «Is μνημ.] Not Erasm., al., understand an upper chamber, 
 
 iwi/ar .sacri/icn (Ps. cxli. 2), as Grot. : but, But why not then ύπ-ίρι^οΐ', a word whicli 
 
 as E. v., ' for a memorial,' ' so as to be a Luke so frequently uses .' It was the tlat 
 
 memorial.' — There has b(!en found a diffi- roof, much frequented in the East for pur- 
 
 culty by some in the fact that Cornelius's poses of exercise (2 Sam. xi. 2. Dan. iv. 29, 
 
 works were received as well jilcasiiig to marg.), — of sleeping in summer (1 Sam. 
 
 God, before he had justifying faith in Christ. ix. 26), — of conference (ib. ver. 20),— of 
 
 But it is surely easy to answer, with Calvin mourning (Isa. xv. 3. Jer. xlviii. 38),— (if 
 
 and Augustine, ' non jiotuisse orare Corne- erecting bootlis at the feast of tabernacles 
 
 Hum, nisi (idelis esset.' His faith was all (Neh. viii. 16), — of other religious celebra- 
 
 that he could then attain to, and brought tions (2 Kings xxiii. 12. Jer. xix. 13. Zejili. 
 
 forth il9 fruits abundantly in his life : one i. 5), — of publicity (2 Sam. xvi. 22. Mutt.
 
 102 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. Χ. 
 
 <iMMLs^27|. £^} ^ο '^^ωμα "" προς^υ^ασΟαι περί Ιοραν εκτην. ^^ iyevero ABC 
 
 2King»xi. gv s ττρόςττείΐ'ος, και ι'ιΟίλΐν ' γίυσπσΟαι. " πθ|θασκ:ευαζόν- 
 
 r Hbsol., Matt. V, , „ ., ' / , . » ν «• ,r 11 » 
 
 vi.ftai.fr. T-(^y ge αυτωΐ' cvivfro επ («υτυν ξκστασις, και 
 
 S here only t• . y ' ■, , ν ν /Λ - ;- - / 
 
 t — ch χχ.Γ --«•>> 
 Jonah iii. 7 
 
 " ΟίωοΗ τυν ουηανον ανίω-^μίνον και ^ καταβαινον "σκεύος 
 
 Jos. Αηΐι. ν1. f-1 'Λ'' 'λ' ' Ιι' "Γ??' 
 
 '•>•»■ τι ων υϋονην με7»λ>)ν, τίσσορσίΐ' αρναις Ιόεόί/κεΐΌ)' 
 
 η 1 Cor. χίν. 8. ' ','^ _ „ 19' -if- / 
 
 l^y.ur'xitKai] "" καθίίμενον επι t>jc γτκ, " εΐ' ώ νπηοχεν πάντα 
 τ - Lake ί. 12. τα "τίΓοάποδο /cat "^ έρπετο της 'γτ}ς κα\ ^ πετίΐνά τον 
 
 '■'■•*'''■"■ 11 \h'' ^ >• '•' ι'λ ^ 
 
 *«r.uu "h ουοανου. και εγεί'εΓο φωΐ'τ; προς αυτοί', Λναστας 
 
 Tiii Ίο ver 41 ch xi. Ι.τ. w = ch. si. 5. xxii. 17 only. Gen. ii. 21. XV. 12. χ ch. vii. ftC reff. 
 
 y - JiihnTL 33 al. ζ Mark xi. 10. John six. 2i». Exod. iii. 22. a ch. xi. 5 only t• (Hos. ii. i») 
 
 b — ch. xi.Sonly. (Exod.xxviii. 23alex. Kzek. xlviii. 1.) See note. cch. ix. 25 reft. dch. 
 
 viii. 10 reir. e ch. xi. 0. Rom. i. 23 only. Gen. i. 24. f. e, and James iii. 7 only. 
 
 g Matt. Ti. 26 al. Γγ. hch.vJi. 31. i ch. viii. 26 rcfl'. Dan. vii. 5. 
 
 :JG.— aft (K-. ins της }]μίρας A tol.— 10. ΐ]θί\ησί 96. 142. — rec (κιινων (probably from 
 ίκίΟ'ων having been in the margin in some MSS at ver i), and thus inserted here by 
 mistake, or as in note), witli G &c Chr Thl : txt ABCE all am dcniid tol sail Orig.— rec 
 ίπιττίσίν (corrn to avoid the repetition of tytviro, and to the more usual tcord, see reff. 
 Meyer holds ιπιπ. to have been origl : but being usually said of πην μα, and thus 
 seeming inappropriate to (κστασις, to have been altered tn comformity with ch x.xii. 17» 
 ytfiauai μ( tv ίκσταπα. But this is very careless : for, Luke i. 12, we have φόβος 
 ίπίπ. f- αιτ., and so ch xix. 17 : and xiii. 11, ιττεττ. ιττ αυτοί' «χλΐ'ς), with EG &c vss 
 Chr Thl {ίπίσεν Ii). 78. ί)0 Clem) : txt ABC all copt (venit seth) Orig.— 11. ηπωγμ. 
 Ε. — aft αιηωγ. ins επ αντον lect 12 : και τισσαυβιχ' ααχαις διΰίμίϊ'ον σκ-ινος τι ιυς 
 οθονην μίγαλην κ. καθκμενον 13. — κητηβαινον om lect 12 d Syr sah (icnt ιίου σκ.) ar- 
 erp syr (bef καΘιεμ- ins καταβ. και) Ambr. — rec aft κητηβαιν. ins ίττ αυτόν (al σντω) 
 (inserted to correspond with αχρις ι μου, ch xi. 5), with G &c ar-pol Chr Thl : om ABC^ 
 (and C appy, but doubtful)E h all d ν copt aeth Syr sah ar-erp syr Orig. — /ίίγαλ»)!' om 
 C- : splendidum d. — rerpaffiv Ε Ath. — bef κηθιιμ. om δίδιμίνον και ABC-(C' is 
 doubtful) Ε 40. 81. 180 ν seth Arm Orig^ Cyr Tbdrt Aug (see note) : txt (C ?) G &c 
 ar-pol, and bef τεσσ. syrr sah : aft αρχ. d Constt : ctS., omg κ. καθ., 3(5 copt, and Clem (εκ- 
 ίίί.) Chr Thl : -νηΐ' και -νην all lect 12 al. — 12. rec aft τετρ. ins της γης, with G &c ar- 
 pol Chr Thl (conformed (o ch xi. 0) : but aft επρ. (as txt) ABCE all ν Syr ar-erp copt arm 
 Clem Orig Constt Thdrt : om 13.27. Hi3 d sah (ieth om ver 12) Ambr. — rec και τα 
 θηοια και τα εηττ. with G &c (τα ins G &c Clem Chr Thdrt ThF : om ABC-(C• .') Ε 
 Orig, Constt Thl') syr Chr Thl (also bef ττετεη: Ε 4. 'Λλ Orig,, but om ABC2(C' .') 33. 
 40. f05. 163. 180 ν Syr ar-erp copt sah arm Clem Orig^ Constt Tlidrt Thl' (comm) 
 Aug Cassiod. — rec bef ττετ. ins τα (conforinn to ch xi. 6), with C'EG &c Clem Constt Chr 
 
 X. 27. Luke xii. 3. Jos. B. J. ii. 21. 5), — held by the person as an ordinary spectator, 
 
 of obsei-vation (Judg. xvi. 27. Isa. xxii. 1), in the possession of his natural senses. 
 
 — and for any process requiring fresh air 11. τίσσ. αρχ.] not, ' by the 
 
 and sun (Josh. ii. G). (Winer, RWB. art. four corners,' which would certainly re- 
 
 Dach.) £κτην] The second hour of quire the article, as in reff. — but 'by four 
 
 prayer: also of the mid-day meal. — The rope-ends.' This meaning of άρχη is 
 
 distance was thirty Roman miles, part of justified by Diod. Sic. i. p. 104, wlio, 
 
 which they performed on the preceding speaking of harpooning the hippopotamus, 
 
 evening, perhaps to Apollonia, — and the says, είθ' ivi των ψτταγεντων ενάπτοντες 
 
 rest that morning. 10. γ£νσ•.] see reff. αρχάς στυπίνας άφίασι μέχρις αν παρα- 
 
 ίκίπ'ωΐ' is more likely to have been a cor- XvOfj. The ends of the ropes vfure attached 
 
 rection of αυτών as applying better to the to the sheet, and, in the vision, they only 
 
 people of the house, than the converse, tcere seen. — I have retained the words δεϋ. 
 
 Εκστασις] The distinction of this και, doubtfully, because it seems difficult to 
 
 appearance from the boo/in above (though account fortheirinsertion, but they may have 
 
 the usage is not always strictly observed) is, been omitted to assimilate our text to ch. xi. 
 
 that in this case that which was seen was a 5. — At all events, as Neander observes (Pfl. 
 
 revelation shewn to the eye of the beholder u. L. p. 126, note), these four άρχαί (whe- 
 
 when rapt into a supernatural state, having, ther ends of ropes attached to the corners, 
 
 as is the case in a dream, no objective or those corners themselves) are not with- 
 
 reality .• whereas, in the other case, the out meaning, directed as they are to the 
 
 thing seen actually happened, and was be- four parts of heaven, and intimating that
 
 10—19. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 103 
 
 EG 
 
 Πετ^ε θΰσον και (pciye. ^'^ ο δε Πίτρυς είττεν Mr?Sa^w^ ic = Matt.xxii. 
 
 / . " ι 'ζ,/ .ί 1 - πι ^ > II ' 'Λ ■*• Luke XV. 
 
 κυρίζ υτι υυόίποτ^ scpnyou παν κοινον και ακαυαρτον. -'^. -'7 oeat. 
 
 1 constr. 
 
 •22 al. 
 
 I 'ί' •' 1 - πι ^ ^ 11 ' 'η ■*•, Luke XV 
 
 :υρΐζ υτι υυόίποτ^ scpnyou παν κοινον και ακαυαοτον. "■^'"\ 
 ΤβΟώ"^^ και φωνή πάλιν "εκ δευτέρου προς αύτον, '^Α ό θεός '™" "•'"'"' 
 
 μ./)/ N\q , ΐβ - Ον\»/ Γ»> < m = Markvii. 
 
 ■^ εκασαρισεν συ ut/ ^κοινού. τούτο οε eyevero επί to<c, STer.ss.ch. 
 
 15»/ - » ' '' xi. 8. Rom. 
 
 Kat ίυθυς ^ ανζλημφθη το ' σκεΰος εις τον ουρανόν. ^^ ως TuJitT^i 
 
 ΐζ,\ ' ' ~ U ^ ' ' ΓΊ ' » Λ ν >/ "> \ν " t\ η = cli. xi. 8. 
 
 οε εν εαυτω όιηποοΗ ο Ιίετοος τι αν ίΐη το opaua ο icor. νϋ. ΐ4. 
 
 ΤΛ λ 'Λ ^ « >' Λ • '> ■) \ Γ 2 Cor. vi. 17. 
 
 είέεΐ', και ιόου οι ανόρίς οι απεσταλμένοι ατΓΟ τοΰ Κθ|θ- ^.id-.xliuil 
 
 Λ'χΛ ' \ > ι - srir ν*' ο MarS: xiv. 72. 
 
 V7]Aiov όΐίρωτησαντίς την οικιαν του Ζιίμωνος (πίστη- Johnix.24 
 σαν επι τον πυλώνα, '^" και φωνησαΐ'τες επυνσανο ντο ρ Ifch.xi'g 
 
 ' ν ' ' b ' Λ ' ττ / ' ΰ ' '^ C y "/ οηΐν. Mark 
 
 ει Ζιμων ο επικαΛουμεΐΌς Ιίετρος ίνυαόε ί,ενιί,ίται. νϋ. iu?but 
 τοΰ οε Πέτρου ^ιενθνμοιιμενου πεοί τοΰ " οοάματος ''^i^Tonfy.'^^' 
 
 r«=ch.xi.in. Lake iv. 2δ. s Mark χτί. 19. 4 Kings ii. 11. t ver. 11 relV. α ch. ii. 12 
 
 reff. Luke only +. ν = Luke viii. !) xv. 2Η al. w Tcr. 3 rcff. χ here only t. y constr., 
 
 ch. xi. 11 only. (1 Kings XTii. 51.) See Luke ii. 9 refl'. ζ Luke xvi. 2U al. Gen.xliii. 19. cli. xii. 13. 
 
 xiv. 13. a ab-ol., = Luke viii. S, 54. xvi. 24. Dan. iv. 11. b ver. 5 rrff. c ver. (i reff. 
 
 d here only f. e ver. 3 refl'. 
 
 Thdrt Thl : oni ABC- Orig,.— 14. τζαν om 180. — rec for και, η {conformn to ch x\. 8), 
 with CD-gr EG &c copt al "Clir Thl al : tst AB al d τ sah syrr arr Clem Origi Constt 
 Aug Ambr. — 15. -πάλιν φων. 180: •»; ψ. παλ. 78. — ίκ ctvT. om {as unnecessai-y) 4'. 37• 
 5G Aug. — πρ. αντ. eytvtro 9G. 142 : add λίγων sah. — tKaOfpiad' ACG {-ρησεί') 13. <-i8 
 Nyss : θαιρισεί' 105 : ίκαθηρεν Origj Thl-. — for συ, σοι 13. — 16. rec ~a\tv art\. (conn 
 from ch si. 10), with G &c e s.vr ar-pol Chr Thl and D-gr aft ai(\. : txt ABCE-gr 81 al 
 (ίΐ'Οίως 40. 180 syr-marg : ίυθνς αν. πάλιν 33. 34) ν copt seth (om 15. 36 d Syr sah 
 arm Ambr). — rec -ληφθΐ]•. see ch i. 2 al freq. — for το σκ., ατταντα 1C3. — 17. aft (v 
 tavToj {αυτοί Β ν 133) ins tyfviTo D — tC(i' AC. — bef icon om κοι AB 3G. 40. 69. 105 ν arm 
 {corrn of Hebraism) : ins CDEG all teth Chr Thl. — oi (1st) om E.— for a-o, νπο BE 
 38. 57. 95. 177 {corrn) : tst ACG most mss Chr Thl' {πάρα ThP) -htaujT. κ. μαθον- 
 Tsg G all Chr. — τον bef κορν. om D Thl'-'. — rec om του bef σιμ. but ins ABCD 40. 105. 
 133. 180 Chr Thl-.— 18. aft φων. ins τιΐ'α arm-venet. — ιπυθοντο BC. — 19. rec ινθνμ. 
 {prob negligence of the significant compounded verb) : tst ABCDEG all Chr Thl : τι 
 
 men from the North, South, East, and sented that He had made of one blood all 
 West, now were accounted clean before nations to dwell on the face of all the earth : 
 God, and were called to a share in his king- God h?i\mg purified these, signified that the 
 dom : see Luke siii. 29. 12. ΐΓαντα distinction was now abolished which was 
 τα T€T.] literally : not ' many of each kind,' ' added because of transgressions ' (Gal. iii. 
 nor, ' some of all kinds,' in which case the 19), — and all regarded in His eyes as pure 
 art., the sense of which is carried on from for the sake of His dear Son. But the 
 τά τετρ. (see ch. xi. 6), would be omitted : literal truth of the representation was also 
 — in the vision it seemed to Peter to be an implied; — that the same distinctions be- 
 assemblage of all creation. Terp., έριτ., tween the animals intended for use as food 
 Trer.] In cb. xi. 6, from which our text has were now done away, and free range allowed 
 been corrected, Peter follows the more to men, as their lawful wants and desires 
 strictly Jewish division : see there. invite them, over the whole creation of 
 14.] Peter rightly understands the com- God : that creation itself having been puri- 
 mand as giving him free choice of all the fied and rendered clean for use by the 
 creatures shewn to him. We cannot infer satisfaction of Christ. The same truth 
 hence that the sheet contained unclean which is asserted by the heavenly voice in 
 animals only. It was a mixture of clean Peter's vision, is declared Ephes. i. 10. 
 and unclean, — the aggregate, therefore, Col. i. 20. 1 Tim. iv. 4, 5. — Only we must 
 being unclean. Kvpie] So Cornelius be careful not to confound this restitu- 
 te the angel, ver. 4. It is here addressed tion with the άποκατάηταπις πάντων of 
 to the unknown heavenly speaker. — On the ch. iii. 21 ; see notes there. 16. c-irt 
 clean and unclean beasts, &c., see Levit. xi. Tpis] denoting tlio certainty of the thing 
 15.] These weighty words have more revealed: sec Gen. xli. 32. 17.] 
 than one apjjlication. They reveal what Valcknaer and Stier understand ti- ίαντώ, 
 was needed for the occasion, in a figure: as ch. xii. 1 1, where yti/i'i/if rot; is expressed, 
 God letting down from heaven clean and — ' when he came to himself,' but without 
 unclean alike, Jew and Gentile, — reprc- -γενόμενος this is very harsh, and it surely
 
 lOi ΠΡΑ3;ΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. Χ. 
 
 fabsoL.Malt. UTTtl' TO *^π»'£Γ<1ία aVTlO iSoU CtVOOfC 2,ί?ΓθυσΐΙ/ σε. άλλο H<3or.. 
 
 iv. l.cli.vi. ^ y , , r, n' y ' - ' - <^^ AHCD 
 
 xxi^iai'''*' "^ «να στα ς καταρ7}ϋι, και ττορίυου συν αντοις μηόίν κοιι 
 G^n.xxxv.i. tiaKoivouivoQ, ΟΤΙ ίνω ατΓίσταλκα αυτούς. ^' κατάρας 
 
 h-M.lt.xxiv. Γ Γ- ^'^ / ^ ^ '[?' ^ ' ' ' <* 
 
 ii^u-'iixxi Of ΓΙίτροί; TTjOoc τους αΐ'όρας ίίττίΐ; Ιόου εγω (ΐμι ον 
 
 •21. Κόπι ίν. ^ - , r k ' ' ^ ' »^ ' . 22 ' ?^ "^ τζ 
 
 20 χ. τ. •.•;». 4πτ6ΐΓ£' τίς ϊ; αίτια έι rjv τταοίστε , •^ οι όί ειτταρ Κ.οο- 
 
 Jamcii.A.t , , , 5v(Nf *1/3' ^ 
 
 k'-L.."v.H! νηλιος ίκατονταργ^ης, ανηρ όικαιος και φορουμίνος τον 
 ?τ.'28!"ΐ"' θίον, "' μαρτυηουμίνάς τε ύπο υλου του Ιθνους των Ιου- 
 
 "χϊ'ϋ*!•• oattui', ί\ξ)ηματια[}η υττο αγγέλου αγ/ου *^ μεταπ^μ- 
 "s«5h.\^'.3 φασθαί σε είς τον οίκον αυτοΰ καί '' ακοΰσαι Τρήματα 
 
 reft• ^ ^ οο γ.» •\ / f '^s*ϊ^/ t" 
 
 n-Liken.cn. τ^αοα σου. '^ ειςκαλεσαμίνος υυν αυτούς εςενισεν. Ty 
 ίατ ΤΙ'π- ^^ ετΓπυοιον " αΐ'αστας ' εζ7]λθεΐ' συν αυτοις, και τίνες των 
 jZ^Anfi χ\. ^^ αδελφών των απο Ίόπττης " συνηΧθον αυτω. ^* ^ Ttj δε 
 
 oMati.xxT.3i. ίπαυοιον ^ ειςηΧθον εις την Καίσαρειην, ο δε Κορνήλιος 
 
 iMark νίϋ.3ίΙ|. ^ * ' 
 
 ρ Ter. Γι red' q John viii. 47. xii. 47. r here only f. s ver. 6 reff. t John i. 2(1, &c. 
 
 Num. xi.32. η ch. riii. 26 reff. y absol., ch.vii. 7 al. λτ = ch. ix. 3U reff. χ ch. ix.2a reff. 
 J — Matt. Tiii. 5 al. fr. 
 
 ενθνμ. 00 : ειανουμινον 15. 18. 36 Did. — rec inrtv αυτω (corrti), with DEG al vss Chr 
 Till : t.\t (αυτ. om Β copt) AC 180 ν sah. — rec aft ανθρις, ins τριις {conformn to ch xi. 1 1 
 and ver 7), with ACE &c ν (τρ. ανδρ. copt al) syr-marg TliI- : Svo Β : txt DGH all 
 (50 and more, Tisch) syr ar-pol slav' (arm add τίνες) Constt Chr Cyr-jerThl' Aug Ambr 
 Βΐ.—ζητυνντίς B.-20. ανασταΌ^ vss.— rec διοη with G al ChrThl-text : txtABCDEH 
 15. 18. 36. 40. 0!). IDO all Bas Did Cyr-jer Thl' (comm) : ιγω γηρ 105.— 21. τοτί κατ. 
 DE Syr.— ο π. DEG 180 lect 12 al Chr ThP : txt AB(e sil)CH most mss Thl•.— rec 
 aft αΐ'ίρας (for r. αΐ'δρ., αντονς C• arm), ins τους ατησταΧμίνους απο {νπο al Thl') row 
 (om H) Kofjv. ττρος αντον {explanatory interpolation, ver 21 heyinning an ecclesiastical 
 portion), with Η al Thl' al ? but om ABCDEG all (50 and more, Tisch) ν syrr arr copt 
 sah aeth arm slav-aiict Chr Thl- : προς άνδρας ίιττίΐ' 63 : πρ. αυτούς ίΐπ. ι. : ιιπί ττρ. αυτ. 
 65. 90 al slav-ms Tlil' : πρ. τ. ανδρ. ειπ. ττρ. αυτ. 42. 133. — bef ης »j αιτ. (η om Β) ins 
 τι θίΧίΤί ; η D syr (om η). — 22. rec uttov, with DGII al : txt ABCE : add προς αυτόν 
 D sah Syr. — icopj'. -ις D-gr Syr. — υπ όλου D. — άγιου om 14^. 38. 113: αγ. ayy. 180. — 
 και . . . σου om {similarity of endings) 31. — 23. for ίΐς κ. ουν, τότε προςκαλ. Ε (intro- 
 ducens e). — ειςκ. or και ειςκ. or (ίςκ. Ct al vss. — τότε ειςαγαγων {ingressus d) and add 
 ο πίΓ. D 40 sah : Simon syr. — f^ti/. αυτ. D 40 vss. — δε om 05. 06. — rec for αναστας, 
 ο τΓίτρος {αναστ. being erased as unnecessary, the vacant space thus left in some copies 
 have beenfilled up with ο πετρ. the subject of the verb), with GH &c ar-pol Thl' : αναστ. 
 ο π. Ε all syr ar-erp al Chr ThP : txt ABCD all ν copt sah syr aeth. — £ξ;;λθ. £ΐς και- 
 σαρειαν 13. — bef «πο, om των Ό all. — rec της ιοπ. : but om της MSS and most mss 
 Chr Oec Thl'. — συνήλθαν D. — 24. rec και τη {corrn appy to avoid the recurrence of 
 τη δε, τη δε, ο δί), witli GH al aeth al Chr ThF : txt ABCDE {quoque d) al ν copt sah 
 syrr Thl'.— {ίς7;λ(ίπ' BD al seth syr (txt in marg) Thl' {corrn to suit ιξιβθεν above) : 
 t.xt .\C(-0nv C)EGH &c : 7]\θον 163 sah vss.— ri;v om D 133.— καισαριαν ACDE.— 
 
 is better not to force from its common This was his first " consorting with men 
 
 meaning so usual a phrase as εν εαυτψ uncircumcised and eating with them " (ch. 
 
 διηττόηει. 18. φωνήσαντ£ς] 'having xi. 3): tliough perhaps this latter is not 
 
 called out (some one), they were enquir- necessarily implied. τίνες των άδ.] 
 
 ing•' — The present, ξενίζεται, is a mixed Siuc, ch. xi. 12: in expectation of some 
 
 construction between the direct and the indi- weighty event to which hereafter their tes- 
 
 rect interrogation. 19.] See ch. viii. timony miglit be required, as indeed it was, 
 
 29, note. 20 . iWi'] ^ make no question ib. 24. άνα-γκαίο-υς] ' his intimate 
 
 as to who or what they are, — but:' — so friends.' So Jos. Antt. xi. 6, φ. oi-ay- 
 
 also ch. ix. 6. έγώ] The Holy Spirit, καώτατυς τψ βασιλη, and Xen. Mem. 
 
 shed down upon the Church to lead it into ii. 1. 14, φίλους προς τοΤς άναγκαίοις 
 
 all the truth, had in His divine arrange- καλουμενυις άλλους κτωνται βοηθούς. 
 
 ments brought about, by the angel sent to These, like himself, must have been fearers 
 
 Cornelius, their coming. 23. έξενισεν] of the true God, or at all events must have
 
 20—28. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 105 
 
 'ην ^ τΓοοςοϋκων αυτούς, συγκαλεσα^ΐίίΐΌς τους *^ συν- zLnkei.io,2o 
 •γίνίΐς αυτού και τους avajKaiovQ φίλους. •'^ ως θε ίγί- ^^'μ^,ι ^j 3|| 
 ΐ'ετο ''' τοϋ ' ίίςίλθεΐν τον Πετρον, ^ συνανΓ7(σος αυτω ο ^\.ρ"^\ι:•^ 
 Κορΐ'ί}λιος ττεσων ^ εττι τους ποόας προςίκυνησίν. ^ ^ ^^ cLifkliVas''' 
 
 Πε'τρος ηγειοεν αυτόν λε-νων Αΐ'άστΓ)θι" κα-γω αυτός d="h'ireoniy.' 
 
 „ ,' , '27 ' m Λ - ' - f ' - Λ fl 28 ^ ■'"*■ '^""-• ^■ 
 
 ανυρωπος ίίμι. ' και συνομιλων αυτω ΗςηΑΌίν, και ι. 2, Tpeir 
 
 ίύρίσκίΐ ° σννί\η\υθότας πολλούς, ίφη τε ττρος αυτούς κα,οτάτουι 
 
 ΎμεΓς εττίστασθε ° ώς '' αθε'μπ"θ)' εστίν avcpi 1ουοα<ω ech. ϋΐ. I'arefr. 
 
 "^ κτολλασθαί η "^ ττροςερ^εσθαι * αλλοι^υλω* /cajuot ο ^^"^'^^ί^ 37. 
 
 χχϋ. 10. Gen. χχχϋ. 1. h here only. 1 Kings χχν. 24. eif, John xi.32. προΓ, Mark v. 22. Trapr!, 
 
 LukeTiii.41. i = Matt. ii. 11 viii. 2 al. Jobi.2il. k = ch. iii. 7 al. Dan. x. 1(J. 1= rh. ix. 34 reff. 
 
 mhcreoniy t. n— ch. i. 6. ii. 7 al. ο =■ ver. 38. Lnke τι. 4. ρ 1 Ptrt. iv. 3 only t. 2 Mace. tji. 1. 
 
 q -= ch. v. 13reff. r-= ch. ix. 1 al. ft. Levit. sis. 33. ε here only. 1 King.•! vi. 10. xiii. 3, 5. 
 
 1 Mace. iv. 12. 
 
 ην ττροςδίχομίνος αυτονς και αννκ. Ό. — aft ψιλούς (και φι\. Syr) add ττιριιμίΐρίν D 
 syr-marg. — 25. rec om τον bef £ΐςίλθ., with Η &c, but ins ABCEG most mss Chr Bas 
 fhl.— fX0ftv 42. 57. 78. 126: συΐ'ίΐςίλθιιν lect 12.— rov ora 133.— aft πατρ. ins ίΐς 
 καισαρηαν 40. — aft ποίας add αυτού all ν Syr arr sah arm ieth Thl-. — προςίκυΐ'. 
 αντω sah. — D d, and syr-marg, read this verse thus: — προςίγγιζοιτος C£ τον ττίτροί', tig 
 την καιααοιαν, ττοοίξίαμων ιις των ίουλων ίΐίσαψησιν Traoayiyovtvai αντον. ο Ci 
 Κορνήλιος ικττηδησας και σνναντησας αντω τησων προς τυυς ποΟας ττροςίκννησίν 
 αντον {-τω D^).— 26. rec αντ. ηγ. with GH &c ThU : tst ABCDE all vis Chr ThR— 
 for αναστ., τι ττοΐίΐς D, also Syr bef αναστηθι. — και εγω αντ. Β lect 12 : κ. αντ. ίγ. C : 
 και yap ίγ. Ε 13 : καγω D sah : κ. yap ey. αντ. all Chr : κ. γ. α. t. Thl^ : tst AGH 
 
 all ThP. — aft ίίμι, ins ως και συ D^ d Ε copt seth. — 27. for κ•, σννομ £υρ., 
 
 — και ίΐςίΚθων τ( και εν^ίν D. — ομιΚυιν 80. — add £ΐς τ. οίκον 27• 29. 66- al. — 28. bef 
 ίττισ. ins βίλτιον D Augj. — αθιμιστον D'. — ιστιν μοι lect 12. — for κολλ., σννΧαΧησαι 
 lect 12. — η ττροςερ. om lect 12 Syr, — bef αλλοψ. ins avSpi D-gr lect 12 sah. — rec και 
 
 been influenced by his vision to wait for the 
 teaching of Peter. 25. τοΰ €ΐ5€λθ.] 
 
 This, the most diiBcult and best supported 
 reading, is a harshness of construction 
 hardly expUcable on any principles. It 
 probably arose from taking the so frequent 
 Γοϋ with the infin. almost as one word, and 
 equivalent to the infin. itself. tov9 
 
 ττόδας] viz. those of Peter. Kuinoel's 
 rendering ' in genua provolutus ' is dearly 
 inadmissible. ττροςίκνν.] " Adoravit ; 
 
 non addidit Lucas, ' eum.' Euphemia." 
 (Bengel.) — ^lay not the same reason have 
 occasioned the omission of αύτον after 
 νόΰας ? the one αντ. would almost re- 
 quire the other. It was natural for Corne- 
 lius to think that one so pointed out by an 
 angel must be deserving of the highest 
 respect ; and this respect lie shewed in a 
 way wliich proves him not to have alto- 
 gether lost the heathen training of his child- 
 hood, lie must have witnessed the rise of 
 the custom of paying divine honours first 
 to those who were clothed witli the dele- 
 gated power of the senate (Suet. Octav. 
 52, mentions, "tcmpla etiam proconsuhbus 
 deccrni solere"), and then κατ' ί'ίοχίιν 
 to him in whom the imperial majesty cen- 
 tered. 26. κάγώ αύτ. ανθρ. €ΐμ.ι] 
 This was the lesson which Peter's vision 
 
 had taught him, and he now begins to 
 practise it : — the common honour and 
 equality of all mankind in God's sight. — 
 Tliose who claim to have succeeded Peter, 
 have not imitated this jiart of his conduct. 
 See Rev. xix. 10; -xxii. 8, in both which 
 cases it is ίμπροαθ. των ττόδων τον άγγ-, 
 supporting the above rendering of tir. τ. 
 ττόδας. 27.] The second €ΐ9ήλθ€ν be- 
 
 tokens the completion of his entering in ; 
 or (as De W. and Meyer) the former, his 
 entering the house, — this latter, the cham- 
 ber. 28.] νμ€Ϊς, ' you, of all men, 
 best know :' being those immediately con- 
 cerned in the obstruction to intercourse 
 which the rule occasioned. ώς άθε- 
 μιτον . . .] ' ^^^t ^t ^s unlawful,' ... or 
 'how unlawful it is:' better the former, 
 because in the order of the words, άθίμιτον 
 has the stress on it : the other rendering 
 would more naturally represent ώς ίστιν 
 άθίμιτον. In both the reff. the ambiguity 
 is the same. — There is some difficulty about 
 this unlawfulness of consorting with those 
 όλλ00ΐ)λοι who, like Cornehus, worshipped 
 the true God. It rests upon no legal pro- 
 hibition, and seems, at first sight, hardly 
 consistent with the zeal to gain proselytes 
 predicated of the Pharisees, Matt, xxiii. 15, 
 —with Jos. Antt. xx. 2, 3 {'lovSalog τις
 
 lOG ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. Χ. 
 
 * 'i?nl'*''l''w* θεος * {'δίίζίν μη^Βνα " κοιί'ύΐ' ?; ^ ακάθαρτον ^^ λέγει ΐ' abcd 
 
 ΙΤ1, Malt 
 r\. 21 
 
 ανΟρωπον, δ(θ /cat '^ αναντιρρήτως ήλϋον ^ μίταπίμφβίίς. 
 
 «>-c., 1 Kings , f,, -r a ' Λ ' ν 'Id' .30 ' 
 
 χΐι.•.'3. πυνυανοιιαι ονν, τινι Aoyio μίΤΕπίμψασυβ ue , "" και 
 
 UV ver. 14 refl-. ^ ^ "^ ^, ' ^^ , ^ '/ r , ι\, ' ' 
 
 ^","""",•. Ο Κοίΐΐ'7/λ(ος \φχ\ ΛτΓΟ τεΓα^Γ>;ς τημίρας μ^χρι ταύτης 
 
 χ hcrt-tinly t. - ti c " d ' \ e *• » ' I' ' 
 
 (ch. xix.sfi.) τϊΐς ώρας νμην νηστίυων και την ίνατην ττροςευνομε- 
 
 Pulybxxxiii. Λ „ / , .^ ν , ν „ „ . , ^, ^ . 
 
 γτα.ίκίτ. νος tv T(o ΟΙΚΟ) μου, και ιόου ανηξ> εστη " εΐ'ωπιοί' μου ευ 
 
 zconntr., ch.iT. ' /ι- h Λ "31 ' j ΤΖ '\ i ' 'Ο 
 
 7. xxiii. 1!». εσι/ί/Γΐ Λαμπρά, και ώησιν iS.op]n]Aie, ίίςηκουσνη σου 
 
 SO,""'""'' ν ττρυςευγϊ) /νο/ αι ελζημοσυνηι σου (μνησυησαν ενω- 
 b-(l")»Iaft. _ ,, - 32 ' / "^ ' Ί ' ^ " ' 
 
 χχϋ.Κ) John τΓίοι; του ϋίου. ττε/ίψοί' ουυ εις Ιοττπτ)!' κοι μετακα- 
 
 xi.ft:5al. ch. , ,ν ^, , ^ „ , .. ι >ί '•/ 
 
 fe^'noiej-'or λεσαι Έ,ψωνα ος ° ίττικαΛΗται Πέτρος' ούτος '' ξεί'ίζετπι 
 2Cor.viii.io. ευ οικία 2.ιμωνος ρυρσεως τταρα υαλασσαν ος παρα- 
 
 ix. 2. ** 
 
 bb ch. XX. 7 reff. c ver. 24 reflf. dMatt. vi. 16. Jadg. xx. 20. e ace, John iv. Ei2. Rev. iii. 3. 
 
 fab.-ol., vi-r. i'rrfi. g = Luke i. 19. Gen. xxiv. 51. hLukexxiii.il. Kev. xv. fi. xix. 8.t 
 
 i -■ Malt. vi. 7. Luke i. 13. P.•;. iv. 1,3. k plur., ver. 2 reff. 1 Rev. xvi. li). Ezek. xviii. 22. 
 
 mver. 3(1. η eh. vii. 14 reft'. ο ver. 5 reft'. ρ ver. 6 reff. q here (Sic; oulyt- (Job 
 
 XTi. IG.) r Malt. xiii. 1 al. s absol., Luke xii. 51 reff. 
 
 f/ioi, with GH &c Chr Till: t.\t ABCDE al.— fif. ο θ. AE al ν setli ar-pol : txt B(e sil) 
 GDI's πκ"£ΐξ.)01Ι al. — 29. αναντιρητως D. — μίταπ. νττ υμών DE 4^ al. — τινι τω Xoyu» 
 Ε.— 30. for rtraoT., της τρίτης D^, nustertiana ά. — aft ημ. ins και 137• — «xpt K^S. — 
 for ταυτ. της, της άρτι D. — της ova. lect 12 : usque in hunc diem, d. — νηστ. και ova. 
 A'BC 27. fil• H»3 al ν copt seth arm {erased perhaps, as nothing is said of fasting above, 
 ver 3) : ins A-DEG(om και . . . μου G)H and most mss Bed-gr sah syrr al Chr (txt) 
 Till. — rec aft εΐ'. ins ωραν {svpplemental insertion), with II &c Chr Thl : om ABCD 40. 
 100. 105. Iti3 al : και 7Γ^>οςίνχ. αττο ίκτ. ωρ. (ως ίνατης Ε Bed-gr: και .... μου om 
 G. — -αμος. ημην 180. — for fi'WTT., tvavTiov GO. 105. — for λαμ-μ., λίνκη 38. 100 V-edd 
 Syr ar-erp sah seth. — 31. η ττροςίυχ. σου 9G. 142 lect 12: προςενχαι σου sah : )j 0ίη(7ΐς 
 σον 80. — ηι om 142. — ηνεμνησθ. 177' : ανιβησαί' 100. 10G- and adding (ΐς μνημοσυνον 
 sah Chr. — 32. πί^ψ. άνδρας arm-venet. — for μίτακαλ., μ(ταπ(μ•φαι 18. 69. 105. 163 
 al. — KaXfirai 163. — for ιν o(ic. σ. β., τταρα τίνα σ. β. C 180 {corrn from ch ix. 43) : σιμ. 
 τίνος 7• 69 al arm. — ος παρ. λαλ. σοι om ΑΒ 3. 15. 18. 36. 81. 93•. 180 al ν copt seth 
 
 ίμπορος, Άνανίαςϋνομα, πρϋς τάς γνναί- though entertaining fully this prejudice my- 
 
 κας {ίςιώΐ' Γοϋ βοσιλίως (Monobazus, of self, yet have been tauglit, &c.' 
 
 Adiabene) ΐίι^ασκίν ηντάς τυι> Qtbv tvat- 29. τίνι λόγω] On wh?.t account:' the 
 
 /3h)'), and with the Rabbinical comment dative of the ca7/6e ; see rett. : and cf. Hes. 
 
 Schemoth llabba on Kxod. xii. 4, " Hoc Theog. 626 : γαίης ιρραΐιμοσΰν^ΐιν άιη/γα- 
 
 idem est quod scriptum dicit Jes. Ivi. 3. ytv, — Winer, § 31. 3. b, and Bernhardy, 
 
 Et non dicot tilius ad venae qui adhaesit Syntax, ch. iii. 14. 30. άττο τετ. ήμ.] 
 
 Domino, dicendo : separando separavit me The rendering of Meyer and others, ' From 
 
 Dominus a populo suo." But, whatever the fourth day (reckoned back) down to this 
 
 excpplions tlierc may have been, it was un- hour have I been fasting,' is ungrammatical : 
 
 questionably the general practice of the for (1) this would require τήςδε τ7]ς ώρας, 
 
 Jews, to separate themselves in common and (2) τΊμην cannot possibly reach to the 
 
 life from uncircumcised persons. We have present time, but is the historical past: 
 
 Juvenal testifying to this at Rome, Sat. xiv. Ί was fasting.' This being so, ήπύ τί- 
 
 103, ' non monstrare vias, eadem nisi sacra τάρτης ι'ιμίρας must indicate the time de- 
 
 colenti : Qusesitum ad fontem solos dedu- noted by //μ»;ν — ' quarto abhinc die ' — 'four 
 
 cere verpos.' And Tacitus, Hist. v. 5, days ago;' see rett. (2), which fully justify 
 
 'advcrsus omnes alios hostile odium, se- this rendering. De Wette's and Neander's 
 
 parati epulis, discreti cubilibus,' &c rendering, ' For four (whole) days was I 
 
 κάμοί] not, ' but God hath shewed (i. e. had I been) fasting up to this hour 
 
 me,' as E. V. : καί can never have this (i. e. the hour in which he saw the vision) ' 
 
 meaning, and in all cases where it is so does not satisfy ταντης της ωρης, which 
 
 rendered we may trace the significance of must in that case be ΐκίίνης, if indeed such 
 
 the simple copula if we examine. Here, an expression could be at all used of ' the 
 
 for instance: — the two parties concerned time when the following incident took place.' 
 
 are νμης, KUyw. ' Fe, though ye see me The only legitimate meaning of τα/τ. r. ω^. 
 
 here, know, how strong the prejudice is I take to be 'this hour of the day:' and 
 
 which would have kept me away : and I, this meaning is further established by the 
 
 EGH
 
 29—36. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 107 
 
 7fvou£voc ΛαΛ7]σ£ΐ σοι. "" £ς αυτής ουν εττίμψα προς σε, tsi^rkvisriai 
 
 , α Λ - ' > S ' ν-•?/ Phil. ϋ. 23. 
 
 συ τε καλώς ε7Γοι/]σος π(φα7{νομεΐΌς. νυν ουί' τταΐ'τες n=icor.vii 37, 
 
 ' ' ' 38. 1 Mace. 
 
 ■ημ^ις " ενώτΓίον του θεού ^' τταρίσμίν άκουσα ι ττάΐ'το τα τ celiil'iv^b. 
 
 ν / ν ' ^ "* /J " '^ ζ • Λ 'ί^ ^^ wheieonljr. 
 
 ττοοοτετα^Μ^να σοι ^ αττο του ϋίου. Δΐ'οιςας όε ^^ ^κ'^γ., here 
 
 ' ' » 5 only. 
 
 Πέτρος TO ^ στο /ito ειττεν ^ Εττ αληθείας καταλαμβάνομαι ^"jf^^Uy^^• 
 
 η 1 ,1 C• Λ ' ' α ^ 3τ ' Λ > ' ' ^ zMait ν. Srcfl". 
 
 ΟΤΙ ουκ εστπ' 7Γροςω7ΓθΛ77α7Γτης ο ι/εος, αΛΛ εν τταντι aLukeiv.ss. 
 
 f 1 -> / IV \ • / f Λ ch. ίτ. 27 al. 
 
 έθΐ'ει ο ' φοβούμενος αυτόν και ^εργαζόμενος οικοιοσυ- ''^^'^•^οΓΓ/'Ι^β 
 
 κ Λ ν 5 - > 36 ^ Ιι Λ ' ι^ Ιι ' / Λ John i. S. 
 
 vjjv οεκτυς αυτο) {στιν, τον Λο7ον ον αττίστειΛεν c = hereoniyt. 
 τοις ' υιοις Ισραήλ ■" ευαγγελιζομενος £ipi7i'i7v οια ίησοΰ inu'e χχ' 'ei') 
 
 d Ter. 2 reff. e = Matt. τϋ. 23. Ht-b. xi. 33. Ps. xiv. 2. f = 1 John ii. 29. iii. 7, 1υ. Rcv. 
 
 xxii. U. ε = Lake IT. 24. 2 Cor. vi. 2. Phil. iv. ]8 only. LeTit. i. 4. h Ps. cvi. 20. 
 
 ich. Tii.23. ix. 15 al. Rev. ii. 14. vii. 4 only. j = 3 Kiogs i. 42. Ps.xxxix. 9. Isa. Iii. 7. 
 
 {omn io suit ver 6) : ins CDEGH Bed-gr most mss vss. — ππηαγα'αμίνος lect 12 : 
 add ρήματα (v οις σωθηση sah. — 33. /ΐίΓ6π£/ίψα 80. — aft ττρος σε, add πορακαλωΐ' 
 ίλθίΐν (ins σί D-) ττρης ημάς D syr*. — συ ίι D copt sah. — (v ταχίΐ ττιιμαγ. D. — νυν 
 ιίου τταντίς D'. — ενωττ. σον D' ν syr sah seth arm Bed {see note). — παρεσμεν om 
 D• sah. — τταρεστηκαμιν Thl' (text and comm). — ακονσαι βονλομενοι D Syr (βονλ. om 
 D-) and add παηα συν D. — πάντα om D 90. 142 sah: σοι —. A : σοι om 37• 56 e. — rec 
 VTTo T. Θ., with B(e sil)GH &c : πάρα Ε : txt ACD.— for θίον, κ-ιρκ.υ ABCE Ιδ. 3G. 
 40. 69, 137• 180 allect 12 ν copt syr arm {cnrrn to avoid repetition of θεον) : txt DGH 
 most mss Syr sah seth arr Chr Thl.— 34. aft το στομ. add αυτού ACE 103. liiO lect 1 
 v-ed Syr arr seth sah arm al Thl: txt {το στ. πετρ. D am copt eeth) B(e sil)DGH mss 
 (appy) am al Chr. — rec προς•ω7Γολί;7ΓΓ;;ς : txt A(B?)CDE (see ch. i. 2 al freq). — 
 35. aWa Α.— at end, εστα'ι A Constt.— 36. τον γαρ λογ. C'(Tisch)D-gr. 13? Syr syr» 
 sah. — ov om {corrn to simplify the constr) AB ν copt sah seth : ins C(Tisch)DEGH 
 mss (appy) syrr al Chr (text and comm) Cyr-jer Thl. — απεστ. ο βεος v-ed. — \p. ιησ. 177* 
 
 omission of iopav aft. ενάτην. — The hour 
 alluded to is probably the sixth, the hour 
 of the mid-day meal, which was the only one 
 partaken by the Jews on their solemn days. 
 (Lightf.) λαμιτρά] ' bright.' In 
 
 Luke (ref.) the brightness was in the colour: 
 here, probably, in some supernatural splen- 
 dour. The garment might have been white 
 (as in ch. i. 11), or not, — but at all events, 
 it was radiant with brightness. 31.] 
 
 The two are separated here, which w'ere 
 placed together in ver. 4, and each has its 
 proper verb : είςηκ. . . . ή προςενχ)) κ. α'ι 
 έλ. . . . ίμνήσθ. 33.] The reading 
 
 ενώπ.σον, for ivoJTT. τοΰθίυϋ, is remarkable, 
 and had it more MS authority, would seem as 
 if it might have been genuine. It was much 
 more likely to have been altered into r. θεοϋ 
 (as making the expression more solemn), 
 than the converse : and the sense, ' We 
 are all here present before thee,' follows 
 better on the two preceding verses. 
 τα TTposT.] Not doubting that God, who 
 had directed him to Peter, had also directed 
 Peter what to speak to him. 34. 
 
 άνοίξας το στ.] Used (see reff.) on occasions 
 of more than ordinary solemnity. 
 e-Tr' άληθίίας κατ.] ' For the first time 
 I now clearly, in its fulness and as a livinrj 
 fact, apprehend (grasp by experience the 
 
 truth of) what I read in the Scripture 
 (Deut.x.l7• 2Chron.xix.7• Job xx. «v. 19).' 
 35.] αλλά gives the explanation, — 
 what it is that Peter now fully ajjprehends : 
 ' but,' as opposed to πρυςωπο\ήμπτΐ]ς in 
 its now apparent sense. ev ταντι 
 
 e9v€i κ.Γ.λ.] It is very important that we 
 should hold the right clue to guide us in 
 understanding this saying. The question 
 which recent events had solved in Peter's 
 mind, was that of the admissibility of men 
 of all nations into the church of Christ. 
 In this sense only, had he received any infor- 
 mation as to the acceptableness of men of 
 all nations before God. He saw, that in 
 every nation, men who seek after God, who 
 receive His witness of Himself without 
 which He has left no man, and humbly 
 follow His will as far as they know it, — 
 these have no ejctraneous hindrance, such 
 as uncircumcision, placed in their ivay to 
 Christ, but are capable of being admitted 
 into God's church though Gentiles, and as 
 Gentiles. That only stich are spoken of, is 
 agreeable to the nature of the case ; for 
 men who do not fear God, and work un- 
 righteousness, are out of the question, not 
 being likely to seek such admission. It is 
 clearly unreasonable to suppose Peter to 
 have meant, that each heathen's natural
 
 108 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 Χ. 
 
 1=^ώ;ϋ'ΐ^ χρίίττοϋ• 
 
 37 
 
 υμεΐί^ οιοατε το 
 
 ^ καθ' οΧης της Ιουδοιαρ, " αρί,άμίνον 
 
 απυ τΐμ: Γπλιλαίας μiτa το βάπτισμα Ό ° ίκηρυ^ίν 
 
 ούτος εστίν πάντων κύριος 
 
 iii.2rrfr. ί" ' •- 
 
 mch. ix.31. "yf t'o/ti voi' ριιμη 
 
 sxiii. Γ<. 
 I.uke onl^. 
 η Luke xxiii. 5. 
 
 Ο κιφίος• 1G3.— 37. νμιις oni Β (sefli).— aft οίί. ins οτι 96. 142. — γη'αμα'ον Ε : γεγονός 
 C— ρ,;/ία om Ό.—ημζαμίνος ACDEH 40 al lectt 1. 12. 14 al e ν Ath Iren (corrnfrom 
 Luke xxiii. 5) : txt B(e sil)G most mss Ath Chr (text and coram) Tliclrt ThI.— aft (φξ. 
 
 ABCD 
 EGH 
 
 oLiike iii.3||. Exod. xxxii. 5. 
 
 light and moral purity would render him 
 acceptable in the sight of God :— for, if so, 
 why should he have proceeded to preach 
 Christ to Cornelius, or indeed any more at 
 all ? And it is equally unreasonable to 
 find any verbal or doctrinal difficulty in 
 ί()γ. ίικαιοσΰνην, or to suppose that Siic. 
 must be taken in its forensic sense, and 
 therefore that he alludes to the state of 
 men after becoming believers. He speaks 
 popularly, and certainly not without refe- 
 rence to the character he had heard of 
 Cornelius, which consisted of these very two 
 parts, that he feared God, and abounded in 
 good worX.•*.— The deeper truth, that the 
 preparation of the heart itself in such men 
 comes from God's preventing grace, is not 
 in question here, nor touched upon. 
 36. τον λόγον] The construction is very 
 difficult. Several ways have been proposed 
 of connecting and rendering this accusative. 
 (1) Erasm., Wolf, Heinrichs, Kuin., &c., 
 take τον λόγοι' with ο'ίδαη, and under- 
 stand TO yiv. ρημ. κ.τ.Χ. as in apposition 
 with it. " The word ivhich, &c., ye know, 
 viz. the ytv. p." But this immediate con- 
 nexion of λόγ. and οιδ. is hardly consistent 
 with the interruption of the sense by οΐιτος 
 .... κύριος. (2) Meyer, and Winer, § 64. 
 i. 1, adopt virtually the same construction, 
 but understand νμ. οιϋ. to be a taking up of 
 the sense which was broken by (in this 
 
 case) the ttco parentheses tiiayy 
 
 •χριστοί', and ούτος .... κύριος. This 
 also is the rendering of E. V. But it does 
 not sufficiently account for the two clauses 
 parenthesized.— Besides, it is an objection 
 to both these, that the hearers did not know 
 the λόγος — ' noverant auditores historiam 
 de qua mox, non item rationes interiores, 
 de quibus hoc versa,' Bengel. (3) Rosenm. 
 and others tinderstand κατά, ' secundum 
 earn doctrinam quam Deus tradi jussit Is- 
 raelitis,' or (4) take it as an accusativus 
 pendens, ' ad sermonem filiis Israel missum 
 quod attinet' .... But an accusative is 
 never found thus standing alone, unless 
 there be an anacolouthon, which (3) pre- 
 cludes, and which would, if assumed in (4), 
 give us a construction of unexampled harsh- 
 ness. (5) Grot, and Bez. take τον λόγον 
 ov, for oj' λόγον, ' quem nuncium,' justify- 
 ing it by Matt. xxi. 42, and so nearly (6) 
 
 Kypke, ' verbum quod misit .... illud in 
 omnes habet potestatem,' a rendering alto- 
 gether out of all N. T. analogy, as is also (7) 
 that of Heinsius, who understands λόγος as 
 personal, 'Verbum quod misit Deus, omnium 
 est Dominus,' ausage confined in the N.T. to 
 the writings of St. John, and, even if admis- 
 sible, most harsh and improbable here. (8) 
 I agree in the main with De Wette, who 
 joins τον λόγον with καταλαμβάνομαι, — 
 and regards ver. 36 as exegetic of ότι .... 
 ifKTOQ αύτψ ίστι. ' Of a truth I per- 
 ceive, &c (and recognize this as) 
 
 the word which God sent to the children 
 of Israel, peaching peace (the same 
 phrase occm-s Eph. ii. 17, on the same 
 subject, ίλθών ίύηγγίλισατο ίΐρήνην ύμίν 
 ΓοΤς• μακράν και τοΊς ΐγγύς) through Jesus 
 Christ, (then, for the first time, ίπ' ά\η~ 
 θήας καταλαμβανόμενος this also, on the 
 mention of Jesus Christ, he adds οντάς 
 ίητι ττάντων κύριος,) He is Lord of ALL 
 men' (with a strong emphasis on πάντων. 
 I the more incline to this, the simplest and 
 most forcible rendering, from observing that 
 so far from νμίΐς οΊϋατί being (Meyer's ob- 
 jection) a harsh beginning to a new sen- 
 tence, it is the very form in which Peter 
 began his address to them ver. 2fi, ύ/ίί7ς 
 ίπιστασθί, &c. : and, as there it answers to 
 κάμοί, so here also (ver. 3!)) to καΐ ήμίις. 
 δια Ίησ. χρ belongs to (ϋαγγιλ., 
 not to ιίοήνην. 37. το ρήρ•α] 'the 
 
 matter:' not the thing, here or any where 
 else : but the thing said, the ' materies' of 
 the proclamation, in this case perhaps best 
 ' the history.' γβνόμίνον] Not ' which 
 
 took place,' but, 'which was spoken,' 'pub- 
 lished,' as E. V. See reft'. This meaning, 
 which ρ>\μα itself renders necessary, is fur- 
 ther supported by κ-ηθ' oXr;g r. 'IodC., which 
 can only be jiroperly said, and is used by 
 Luke (only, see reft".) of a publication, or 
 spreading of a rumour, not of the happening 
 of an event or series of events relating to 
 one person. άρξ. άττ. τ. Γαλ.] It was 
 
 from Galilee first that the fame of Jesus 
 went abroad, as Luke himself relates, Luke 
 iv. 14. 37. 44; vii. 17; ix. 6. (xxiii. 5.) 
 Galilee also was the nearest to Caesarea, and 
 may have been for this reason expressly 
 mentioned. μ€τα το βάιττ.] So also 
 
 Peter dates the ministry of our Lord in oh.
 
 37— 4J. 
 
 nPASElS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 J 09 
 
 Ί 
 
 ωαννης 
 αυτυν 
 
 " Ίησυνί' τον '' «πυ Να^αρεθ, "^ ως 
 
 εγρίσεν ρ John i.4fi. 
 ^^ 'Vlrrff. 
 
 ό βίος πνίυματι ayuo και ^ δυΐ'άμίΐ, υς ' ^ιηλΟίν ^ZnieuV»^' 
 ευεργίτων και ιωμ^νος παντας τους καταόυναστευομίνους 
 
 Irom Isa. Ixi. 
 1. ch. IV. 27. 
 r \ ' ' ^ <>, η '\ tt f Λ ^ vv •? ' ' - 'iQ < 2 Cor. i. 21. 
 
 υτΓΟ του οιαροΑου, οτι ο Οεος ην μίτ αυτού' «^«t '^ Vi^'Iyli'"'' 
 
 ■ημί^ς "'" μάρτυρες πάντων " ωι; εποιτ/σεν εν τε ττ/ χ<^ξ>α Tr"fli^ "'"■ 
 
 των Ιουδαίων και ev [(ρουσαΧημ' Όν και ^ avtiXav "^ ι^Ρ^~ yj!'^„^^''\"•^ 
 40 - ^ 
 
 ον και ' ανίίΧαν 
 
 U here only. 
 
 „,,.„ only Ezek. 
 pii^y xviii. 12. 
 
 vv cli. xviii. 10 
 
 ^ιοσ«Γτες εττί ςυΛου. τούτον ο 
 
 ήμίξ)α και ί^ωκεν αυτόν '^εμφανή -γενίσϋαι ού παντι τ'•' ^"jTo^ij^ff Lnke 
 λαω, ^^ άλλα μάρτυσιν το'ις '' προκεχειροτονημενοις ύττο χη«^;^κ^ι 
 του θίοΰ ϊΊΐιίν, υ'ίτινες * συvεφayoμεv και ^ συνεπιομεν αυτω y=ch.ii.23reff. 
 
 'Γ ' ^ 11'^ ' t ζ ch. ν. ο» reft. 
 
 a ch. V. ;?0 reff. 
 d here only t• 
 
 b = ch. ii.4(27)reff. 
 e Luke χτ. 2. ch. xi. 3. Ps. c. 5. 
 
 c Rom. X. 20 only, from Isa. Ixv. 1. 
 
 ins yap AD e ν Ath Iren.— 38. rec ναζαρίτ, with A &c : txt BCDE 98. 100. 126. 177 
 al V syrr copt seth Did. — for ως ίχρ. αντ., ον εχη. Ό Syr ar-erp seth arm Bas (ms) 
 Faustin. — αγ. πν. D : tv irv. ay. G. — for ος•, ούτος D tol sah Iren Faustin : ως lect J2 
 Thl'. — for £ii]\9., και ηλθιν 78. — καταδνΐ'ασΓευθίντας D. — νπο τ. σατανά Ε gr. — 
 
 39. rec ι;//, ισμιν {supplementary insertion), with GH &c vss Cosm Thl al : txt ABCDE 
 (I'/i. AD-gr) all syrr Clir Iren (ms). — for παντωΐ', αυτόν D: τούτου κ. τταντ. Thl^. — τί 
 cm 137- 163. 180 al. — tr bef ιψ. om BD lect 1 ν (demid al : not am) Syr al {as unne- 
 cessary) : ins ACE &c Chr Cosm Thl Iren. — ιιροσολυμοις 13. — rec ov ainiX. {και omd, 
 its force not being seen), with (mss .') Iren: txt ABCDEGH most mss v-ms arm 
 syr Slav Iren-ms Chr Thl.— rec avti\oi', with GH &c: txt ABCDE 33. 68. 103 al.— 
 
 40. η^ίφίν θ. 13. — μ(τα την τριτην ημιραν Ό^ ά. — for αντον, αυτω Ό^ al d vss. 
 • — 41. ημιν νπο τ. θ. C vss. — συνιφ. αυτω C 133 vss. — aft συνεπ. αυτω, ins και 
 
 i. 22. (See note there.) 38. Ίησονν 
 
 τ. άτΓ. Ναξ.] The personal subject of the 
 γενόμενοι' ρήμα, q. d. ' Ye know the sub- 
 ject which was preached . . . . , viz. Jesus 
 of Naz.' ώς «χρ. αϋτ.] ' how that 
 
 God anointed Him . . . ,' not as Kuin. and 
 Kypke, ' how tliat God anointed Jesus of 
 N.,' taking αντόν as redundant by a He- 
 braism. See a construction very similar in 
 Luke xxiv. 19, 20. — The fact of the anoint- 
 ing with the Holy Spirit, in His baptism by 
 Jolm, was the historical opening of the 
 ministry of Jesus : this anointing however 
 was not His7?r*^ unction with the Spirit, but 
 only symbolic of that which He had in His 
 incarnation : so Cyril II. in Johan. p. 993 a. 
 (cited by Mr. Humphry in loc), ού Ο/'/ττου 
 λ'ιγομεν 'ότι τότε γέγονεν ίίγιυς το κατά 
 σάρκα χρισΓος, οτε τυ ττνεϋμα τεθίαται 
 καταβαΐνυν ό βατττιστης' ίίγιος yap yv 
 ■ και ίν ίμβρΰφ και μήτρψ .... άλλα δί- 
 οοται μίν εις σημε'ιον τψ βαπτισττ) το 
 Οίαμα : — wliich unction abode upon llim, 
 John i. 32, 33, and is alleged here as the 
 continuing anointing which was upon Him 
 from God.— Stior well remarks, how entirely 
 all personal address to the hearers and all 
 doctrinal announcements are thrown into 
 the back-ground in this speech, and the 
 Person and Work and Office of Christ put 
 forward as the sole subject of ajiostolic 
 preaching. καταδυναστ.] Subdued, 
 
 80 tiiat he is tlieir ΐυΐ'άστης, — and this 
 
 power used for their oppresion. Here, it 
 alludes to physical oppression by disease 
 (see Luke xiii. 1 0) and possession : in 2 Tim. 
 ii. 26, a very similar description is given of 
 those who are spiritually bound by the devil. 
 
 ό θεός ήν μ€τ' αΰτ.] So Nicodemus 
 had spoken, John iii. 2 : and probably Peter 
 here used the words as well known and in- 
 dicative of the presence of Divine power 
 and co-operation (see Judg. vi. 16): be- 
 ginning as he does with the outer and lower 
 circle of the things regarding Christ, as they 
 would be matter of observation and inference 
 to his hearers, and gradually ascending to 
 those higher truths regarding His Person 
 and Office, which were matter of apostolic 
 testimony and demonstration from Scrip- 
 ture, — His resurrection (ver. 40), His being 
 appointed Judge of living and dead (ver. 
 42), and the predestined Author of salva- 
 tion to all who believe on Him (ver. 43). 
 
 39. και ήρ.εΪ5] Answering to ΰμε'ις 
 οΊδατε, ver. 37- ' ion know the history as 
 matter of universal rumour : and we are 
 witnesses of the facts.' By this ημε^ς Peter 
 at once takes away the ground from the ex- 
 aggerated reverence for himself individually, 
 shewn by Cornelius, ver. 25 (Stier) : and 
 puts himself and th(i rest of the Aiiosiies in 
 the strictly subordinate ))hice of initiiesses for 
 Another. ov και aveiX.] ' Whom also 
 
 they killed.' καί is not ' yet,' as Kuinoel, 
 but merely introduces, in this case passing
 
 110 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 Χ. 
 
 fch. I.Sal, fr. 
 1 Cliron. li. 
 24. 
 
 f 
 
 μίτα TO 
 
 Ε.λ 
 
 Β Siiltt. xvii. 11 jHAiV 7/jiui' Ki]uv^ai τω 
 
 αναστηναι αυτοχ' εκ: 
 
 λ ο it» 
 
 νίκρων. 
 
 και ' όιαμαρτυρ 
 
 42 ^ Ί ' 
 
 '^ και π α ρήγ- 
 
 α συ α ι 
 
 ABCD 
 ΕϋΙΙ 
 
 αυτυί• ίστιν ο ωριαμίνος υττο του ϋίου κριτής ί,ωντων 
 
 ι Tim. VI. 13. ' IQ L / / ' - II 
 
 ici^iMJas'ieff. K-nt νίκρων. "*"* τούτω παντίς ot προφηται μαρτυηουσιν, ...> 
 
 1ι dat. ami aor., 
 1 Tim. νί. 13. 
 
 ^dia 
 
 la του ονόματος αυτόν πάντα abde 
 
 44 -'Ert λαλ( 
 
 k ch. ii -Μ rffl•. „ « . ' r ~ \ Ο 
 
 1 Luke xxii. 22 αφεσιν ομορτιων Λαρειν 
 
 VjiiKTv*»; τον '' πιστίυοντα *^ εις αυτόν. " " Jl-rt λαΛονντος του 
 
 "7\x^lV."["^' Πίτρου τα ρήματα ταντα επεττεσευ το ττνίΰμα το ayiov 
 
 " al'.' cii" ii'i'.'aS. ρ — ch. iii. 1«. q John ii. 11 and passim. r ch. viii. Ifi reff. 
 
 συνανεστραφημιν D syr* (συνιστρ. OU conversi d).— aft νίκρων add ημιρας μ D 
 ar-crp svr* sah £cth Cassiod : ii ήμερων μ Ε Bed-gr Vigil al.— 42. for τταρηγγ., ti'tra- 
 λατο 1): αττηγγιιλη' 40.— for ηυτος, ούτος BCDEG IX 15. 18. 27- 29. 100. 105. 
 137. \U'o syrr copt sail arr (corni, but unnecessary): t.\t AH mo.st mss dc ν setli al 
 (Constt) Chr Cosm Oec Thl Iren.— του om 73.-43. τούτον Gtl : τοντο 19. GG-. 78 
 allect 2.— for or., αίματος 36. 180.— 44. ΐτι Se 44. 177 sah.— tn-tat AD {-atv) al {mis- 
 
 Gil 
 
 over it without emphasis, a new fact in this 
 history. He even omits all mention of the 
 actors in the murder, speaking as he did 
 to Gentiles: a striking contrast to ch. ii. 23 ; 
 iii. 14; iv. 10; v. 30, — when he was work- 
 ing conviction in the minds of those actors 
 themselves. κρ£μ. eir. |.] So also ch. 
 
 V. 30, where see note. 41.] Bengel 
 
 would understand σννίφ. κ. σννίττ. of 
 previous intercourse during His ministry, 
 
 and parenthesize ού τταντι αυτψ, — 
 
 finding a difficulty in their having eaten and 
 drunk with llim after His Resurrection. 
 But this would make ο'ίτηης .... αϋτφ 
 very flat and unmeaning, especially after 
 ver. 3!) : whereas the fact of their having 
 eaten and drunk with Ilim after His Resur- 
 rection gives most important testimony to 
 the reality and identity of His risen Body. 
 And there is no real difficulty in it : Luke 
 xxiv. 41. 43 and John xxi. 12 give us in- 
 stances; and, even if συνίπίομιν is to be 
 pressed, it is no contradiction to Luke xxii. 
 18, which only refers to one particular 
 kind of drinking. ιτροκεχ. νττ. τ. θεοΰ] 
 
 Had not Peter in his mind the Lord's own 
 solemn words, — ους ίίίδωκάς μοιίκ τοϋ κόσ- 
 μου, 5ohn xvii. (».' 42. τω λαώ] Here 
 as elsewhere (ver. 2 ; ch. iv. 27 al. fr.), the 
 Jewish people: that was all which, in the 
 apostolic mind, up to this time, the com- 
 mand had absolutely enjoined. The further 
 unfoldingsof the Gospel had all been brought 
 about over and above this first injunction. 
 Ch. i. 8 is no obstacle to this interpretation: 
 for although literally fulfilled by the lead- 
 ings of Providence, as related in this book, 
 they did not so understand it when spoken. 
 κριτ. ζ. κ. ν€κρ.] So also Paul, 
 ch. xvii. 31, preaching to Gentiles, brings 
 forward the appointment of a Judge over 
 all men as the central point of his teaching. 
 This expression gives at once a universality 
 to the office and mission of Christ, which 
 
 prepares the way for the great truth de- 
 clared in the next verse. — It is impossible 
 that the living and dead here can mean (as 
 the Augsburg Catechism, and Olshausen) 
 the righteous and simmers : — a canon of in- 
 terpretation which should constantly be 
 borne in mind is, that a figurative sense of 
 words is never admissible, except when 
 
 REUUIRED BY THE CONTEXT. ThuS, in 
 
 the passage of John v. 25 (where see notes), 
 the sense of vticpot is determined to be 
 figurative by the addition of και νυν ίητιν 
 after ωρα, no such addition occuring in 
 ver. 2f!, where the literally dead, υι tv τοΊς 
 μνημείοις, are mentioned. 43. ττάν- 
 
 Tes ol Ίτροφ.] All the prophets, generically: 
 not that every one positively asserted this, 
 but that the whole bulk of prophetic testi- 
 mony announced it. To press such expres- 
 sions to literal exactness is mere trifling. 
 See ch. iii. 21. 24. άφ. άμ. λαβ. κ.τ.λ.] 
 
 The legal sacrifices, as well as the declara- 
 tions of the prophets, all pointed to the re- 
 mission of sins by faith in Him. And the 
 tmiversality of this proclamation, πάντα 
 τον πιστ., is set forth by the prophets in 
 many places, and was recognized even by 
 the Jews themselves, in their expositions 
 of Scripture, though not in their practice. 
 44.] Peter had spoken up to this 
 point: and was probably proceeding (cf. tt' 
 τψ αρξασθαί μί λαλίϊΐ', ch. xi. 15) to in- 
 clude his present hearers and all nations 
 in the number to whom this blessing was 
 laid open, — or perhaps beyond this point 
 his own mind may as yet have been not 
 sufficiently enlightened to set forth the full 
 liberty of the Gospel of Christ, — when the 
 fire of the Lord fell, approving the sacrifice 
 of the Gentiles (see Rom xv. 10) : con- 
 ferring on them the substance before the 
 symbol, — the baptism with the Holy Ghost 
 before the baptism with water : and teach- 
 ing us, that as the Holy Spirit dispensed
 
 42—48. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 Ill 
 
 45 
 
 ** εζίστησαν sM.itt.sii.23 
 
 ετΓΐ πάντας τους ακοΰοντας τον \oyov. '" και 
 
 υΐ ' ίκ τΓΐοιτομης " πιστοί όσοι ^ συνηΧθυν τω l^ί 
 
 ΟΤΙ και £7Γΐ το ίθνη ι) ^^ δωοεο του άγιου πνίνμητος 
 
 Ίΐκουον γαο αυτών " ΛαΛουΐ'των " γΛωσσαις acor. νΐ. is. 
 
 „... xliii 33. 
 ίΤΟ(ι>, t ch.xi. 2. Gal. 
 ii. 12. Col. 
 iv. 11. Tit. 
 
 εκκεγυτοι. 
 
 -X 
 
 και μεγ 
 ^^ " Μητι 
 
 αΧυνυντων 
 το ύδωρ 
 
 τον OiOV. 
 '^ κω\νσαι 
 
 τότε απεκριυη 
 ουναται τις 
 
 η ' Ε ph. 
 
 ι Ιετοοο Col. i 
 
 τρος 
 του μ?; 
 
 2al. 
 = ch. i. 21. 
 ix. Sy refl". 
 = ch. ii. 38 
 
 β /I- r ' .1 V - V " >'•\ rt reff. 
 
 ατττισοηνοι τούτους, οιτινες το πνεύμα το ayiov ελαρον ^ch.n.nre 
 
 ως και ημείς , ^° 11(}οςεταί;εί' τε αυτούς ραπτισοηναι εν 
 
 τω ονόματι του κυοιου. τότε ηρωτησαν αυτόν επιμειναι 
 
 h *■' / h ' 
 
 ■ημεοας τινας. 
 
 C Lnke vi. 2Ρ. Gen. xxiii. 6. (1 ch. xiv. 18. Lake iv. 42. xxiv. 16. Gen. xxiii. 6. 
 
 f constr., Lnke y. 3. viii. 37. John iv. 40. 
 h ch. ix. 19. XT. .36. xvi. 12. xxiv. 24 only. 
 
 h ii 4 reft", 
 ζ = Liike i. 46. 
 ch. T. 13. 
 2 Kings vii. 
 26. 
 a Matt. vii. 16. 
 John iv. 29. 
 Slal. iii. 8. 
 e consfr , 
 gch.xxi. 4, 10. xxviii. 
 
 iake ^ or simple word for compound) : txt BEGH most mss ff. — 45. for όσοι, οι Β ν 
 Syr copt sah Vigil al : tst AD-gr EGH mss (appy) Chr Rebajjt al. — σννηλθαν Β. — του 
 ■πν. τ. αγ. BD2 (του πν. ay. D') al vss : txt AEGH mss (nrly) Chral : του θεού και αγ. 
 ττν. 33. 34. — -γλωσσ. ίτιραις D sah : prcevaricatis Unguis A.^tμtya\υvo^> 9G : Ιο^αζον- 
 των sah Ath.— (ct-niov 78. — 46. rec ο ττ. with D (utt. d. ο ττ.) EGH nearly all mss Oec 
 Thl: txt AB 180 Chr.— 47. ΐυν. κω\. τις AB al : ίυν. τις κω\. Ε 95. 180: ης om 
 177': t.xt GH most mss Chr Oec Thl.— ,/t, om 33. 34.37- 180 d Iren Thl' (text).— 
 rec καθοις κ. ημ. {corrn to more usual ejpr : or to suit ch xv. 8), with EGH most mss 
 Chr Oec Thl: txt {ωςπιρ D) ABD J3. 38. 113. 137- 180.— 48. for rt, ίε BE 180 
 copt sah syr al : txt AGH mss (nrly) ν Eeth al.^ — τητε -η-ροςετ. D Syr. — αντοις A 33 Syr 
 ar-erp sah. — om βαπτισθ. here, and ins bef τότε AB al am demid {corrn of order) : txt 
 DEGH mss (nrly) vss Chr Rebapt al.— for του κυρ., ιησου χριστ.ν AB (του χρ. Bentl) 
 Ε all v-ms copt sah aeth syr slav Cyr-jer Chr ThP Jer Rebapt al (corrn, as giving more 
 precisian to the baptismal formula) : του κυρ. ιησ. 38. 42. 57 : txt GH most mss 
 (appy) arr. — for ηρωτ., τταοεκαλεσαν D. — προς αυτοΐ'ς επιμ. {ύιαμειναι D') D v-ed Syr 
 arr seth sah. 
 
 once and for all with the necessity of cir- 
 cumcision in the flesh, so can He also, when 
 it pleases him, with the necessity of water- 
 baptism : and warning the Christian church 
 not to put baptism itself in the place which 
 circumcision once held. See further in note 
 on Peter's important words, ch. xi. 10. — 
 The outpouring of the Spirit on the Gen- 
 tiles was strictly analogous to that in the 
 day of Pentecost ; Peter himself describes it 
 by adding (ch. xi. 15), ω%ττ£ρ και Ιφ' ήμ.άς 
 €v άρχτ). Whether there was any visible 
 appearance in this case, cannot be deter- 
 mined : perhaps from ver. 46 it would ap- 
 pear not. 45.] We do not read that 
 Peter himself was astonished. He had been 
 specially prepared by the vision : theg had 
 not. — The λαλίϊν γλώ<Γσαΐ5 here is iden- 
 tified with the λ. €Tcpais γλ. of ch. ii. 4, by 
 the assertion of ch. xi. 15, just cited ; — and 
 this again with the ελάΧουν γλώσσαις of 
 ch. xix. 6 : — so that the gift was one and 
 the same throughout. On the vi'hole sub- 
 ject, see note, ch. ii. 4. 47.] One great 
 end of the unexpected effusion of the Holy 
 Si)irit was, entirely to preclude the question 
 whicli otlierwise could not but have arisen, 
 ' Must not these men he circtnncised l/efore 
 
 baptism ? ' το υ8ωρ ... το ιτνενμα] 
 
 The TWO great parts of full and complete 
 baptism : the latter infinitely greater than, 
 but not superseding the necessity of, the 
 former. The article should here certainly 
 be expressed : ' Can any forbid the w.\ter 
 to these who have received the spirit?' 
 — The expression κ-ωλϋσαι, used with to ϋΰ., 
 is interesting, as shewing tliat the practice 
 was to bring the icater to the candidates, 
 not the candidates to the icater. This, 
 which would be implied by the word under 
 any circumstances, is rendered certain, when 
 we remember that they were assembled in 
 the house. 48. ιτροςίταξίν] As the 
 
 Lord Himself when on earth did not bap- 
 tize (John iv. 2), so did not ordinarily the 
 Apostles (see 1 Cor. i. 13 — !(>, and note). 
 Perhaps the same reason may have operated 
 in both cases, — lest those baptized by our 
 Lord, or bytlie chief Apostles, should arro- 
 gate to themselves pre-eminence on that 
 account. Also, which is ini])lied in 1 Cor. 
 i. 17, as compared with Acts vi. 2, the 
 ministry of the Word was esteemed by tliein 
 their higher and paraniMunt duty arwi office, 
 whereas the subordinate ministration of tiie 
 ordinances was committed to those who
 
 112 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XI. 
 
 i-ch.ii.4n. XT. ^'Ήκονσαν δε οί απόστολοι και οι αδελφοί οι αβπε 
 
 koi"?m:u' οντες 'κατά την Ίου^αίαν οτι και τα ΐΟνη εδεξαί'το τυν 
 ]'h"y\.7. ' λοΎον τοΐι Οΐοΰ. ^ οτζ δε '" άνίβη Πέτρος είς Ίε^ουσα- 
 
 m Matt. XX 17, ^ , ' ο ,, ^ , ν y ^ ο ' ' ~ \ ' 
 
 18. Ε>!Γ .1. 1. ^,.„ -* " όιε/ν-ρπΌΐ'το ποος πυτοί' οι ε /c πιηιτομης Λε- 
 
 Julie "jcr'.' γοντες otj ^ πςήλΟίς ττρύς αΐ'δρας '' άκξ)οβυστΊαν '^ έχοντας 
 
 °''X\f'"^( και ^ avvi<l)aytQ αυτοις. αρζ,αμενος οε ο ΙΙετρος ες- 
 
 qtrri'oniVt"* ετίθετο ούτοΓς " καθίζης λέγων ^ 'Εγώ " rj/urjv εΐ' ττόλει 
 
 Gen. χχχίτ. »,/... / \ τλ ' χ ' ' ν " 
 
 14. ακρ., Ιοττπη προςευχομενος, και tibov ev εκστασει όραμα, 
 
 Rom. η. 2Γϊ '^ ,. „ _ > ' h ' Π ' 'Λ ' 
 
 only.exi"' ^κατοβαινον '(τκευος τί ως οϋονην μεγαλ)/ν τεσσαρσο' 
 
 here.' c' - d Ω ' ' "' " ^ "^ \ Ω e" 
 
 rchx4iren•. οογοίς καΰιεμη'ην ίκ τον ουρανού, και ηλυεν αγρις 
 
 ..er.IS Luke . f Λ \ . ,^ '^ , , «, , ,^ ν h '^ / 
 
 t(ch"viil'i) f/nof. είς ην ατενισας κατενοονν και ncov τα τετρα- 
 
 -"Ch.xviii. Λ - - ^^/Ί' <^h'_^ ^^ 
 
 2(i.xxviii.23. ττοόπ της "γης και τα οηρια και τα ερτίετα και τα 
 
 Acts only. , ^ _ , _ - „ '^^ ^ J, - Λ ' 
 
 (jobxxxTi. ττετεπΌ του ουρανού. ' ηκουσα οε και φωνής λε-γουσης 
 
 15.) Λογοί' ' ' * 
 
 jos'Tniri' f^^*- ' Άναστάς Πε'τρε "* θυσοί' κα] «|)άγε. ^ ειττον δε Μη~ 
 
 12.2. " ' <> - ' " 1 ^ ^^ m ' 'Λ '?' η * 
 
 ach. iii.24 οομως κνριε, οτι κοινον η ακαυαρτον ουοεττοτε tic- 
 'Γ'"ο'2ϋΗΓ^'^ 'ϊ'^^*'' ^'^ '^^ στόμα μου. ^ άπεκρΊΘη δε φωνή ° εκ δευτε'ρου 
 
 Jer. xxxiii. 20. ίίμη''. ch. xxii. 19, 20 (Paul). w absol., ch. χ. ί) reff. χ ch. X. 10 reff. y ch. vii. 
 
 31 reft. ζ cl). X. 11 reff. abc ch. x. 11 reff. d ch. ix. 2Γι. x. 11 reff. e = ch. xiii. «. XX. 4. 
 
 xxviii. 15. 2 Cor. X. 13, 14. Rev. xiv. 20. xviii. ft.t f ch. x. 4 reff. g cli. tu. 31 reff. 
 
 hiklm ch. X. 12— 14. η Matt. xv. 11 only. Dan. x. 3. ο pqr ch. x. 15, IB. 
 
 Chap. XI. 1. ακουττον if eytviro τοις απ. κ. τοις aS. τοις (οι D') fi' τη tovS. D 
 Syr : andiio vcro aposioli &c d. — 2. rec και ort (alteration because the fact related 
 seems a consequence of, rattier than opposed to, ver 1 .'), with GH &c vss Chr al: txt ABE 
 all vss Jer Cassiod. — rec κροσολνμα, with (D see below) EG Η &c Chr al. — duKpivavro 
 13. — 01 tK Ttip. πιστοί 4 arm Cassiod. — D (and simly syr*) reads the verse thus : ο μεν 
 ovv ττίτρος δια ικανον χροΐ'ου ηθιλησαι {-σε D^) πορινθηναι εις ιεροσολνμα' και ττρος- 
 φωνησας τονς αδελφονς και εττιστηριζας αυτούς ττολαν Xoyov ποιούμενος Sia των 
 χωρών {civitates d) ίιδασκων αντονς' ος και (quia et d) κατηντησεν αντοις και 
 aniiyyiXiv ηυτοις την χάρη' του Οεον οι St (quia erant d) εκ περιτομης αδελφοί 
 δΐίκρινοντο προς αυτόν (judicantes ad eum d). — 3. οτι otn ί) Eeth : διητι Chr-comm and 
 v-Jer. — rec has ειςηλθες aft έχοντας (corrn of arranc/ement), with Έ,0:(-\()εν D)II syrr 
 Chr ThP : t.xt AB(-X0£j' B)D al ν copt sah asth arm al ThF : -Χΰεν κ. συνεψαγεν 
 BG all syrr. — σνν αυτ. D'. — 4. ο bef ττετρ. cm ABDE 180 Chr (cf Trtrp. above : btit 
 here the art is designedly put) : t.xt GH mss (nrly) OecThl. — εϊ,ίτιθίΐ 1G3. — τα κατεξης 
 D> (καθ. Ό-) : om 4' copt: aft λίγων 08. 100 ThP. — 5. εν ιοττ. πολ. D copt. —ιδον 
 (and in ver 6) H. — εν (2nd) om D'-gr 96. — καταβαινων (error ?)Pl. — for ^sy., δεδε- 
 μενην Syr. — τετρασιν D (see ch x. 11). — και η\θ. ora G8. — άχρι AB.'G al : txt Β (e sil) 
 EH all: εως D al. — 6. τα (thrice) om D'. — της γης cm al : aft θηρ. al : aft ερττ. al. — 
 7. rec ηκ. δε φ. with GH &c syr Chr Thl' Oec : και ηκ. D 15. 18. 3G Syr ath : txt 
 ABE all 13. 25. 27 all ν copt sah. — φωνην λεγουσαν lect 12. — ανάστα D vss. — 8. «ιτΓα 
 D. — rec παν κοινον (insertion from ch x. 14), with GH &c: txt ABDE 13. 15. 18 all 
 V syrr ar-erp sah arm Chr Epiph Dam. — κοιν. τι 27• 29. 69 arm. — 9. εγενετο (add 
 δε D- d) φωνή εκ του ουρ. προς με Ό. — rec bef ψωΐ'. ins juoi (from ch χ. 15), with EGH 
 &c vss Chr al : προς με Ό : om AB 36. 40. 105. 1G3. 180 al ν copt sah arm Epiph. — 
 ίκ δευτ, φ. BE al syr Chr Epiph: £κ δ. om D 4 ar-erp. — ins λέγουσα 13. 106. 177' slav. 
 
 διηκόνουν τραπίζαις. ev τω όν.] = out Judaea.' (See reff.) on κ. τ. Ιθν.] 
 
 επί τψ όν., ch.ii. 3δ, where see note. AV^ahl They seem to have heard the fact, without 
 
 compares άποκτήνίίν εν τη προφάσει any circumstantial detail (but see on τον 
 
 rai'iry, Lysias, p. 452. άγγελοι' below, ver. 13); and, from the 
 
 Ch.\p. XI. 1 — 18.] Peter justifies, charge in ver. 3, — from some reporter who 
 
 BEFORE THE CHURCH IN JERUSALEM, HIS gavc the objectionable part of it, as is com- 
 
 HAViNG CONSORTED WITH MEN UNciR- mon in such cases, all prominence. 3.] 
 
 CUMCISED. 1. κατά, τ. Ίο-υδ.] ' in ol Ικ ττίριτομής must have come into use 
 
 Judaea,Or perhaps more strictly, 'through- later as designating the cii-cumcised gene-
 
 1—16. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 113 
 
 £Κ του ουρανού Ά ο θεός ^ εκαθάρισ£ν συ μη '^κοινού. sLnkexiv.s 
 τούτο όε ε7εΐ'ετο εττ/ τοίς, και ανεσττασϋη τταλιν . ';'■'• ,^ „ 
 αττηντα εις τον ουρανόν. και ίδου ' εζ αυτής τρεΓς "λ χ. Yi/res•. 
 
 >/ Λ 11 ' ' > > \ > ( • τ ν 5 . , W = ch. ίχ. 3a. 
 
 αΐ'ΟΟίς επέστησαν εττι την οικιαν εν η ημην, αττίσταλμε- ; ^lai^. ... 
 
 > ^ £' •Γ • 7 r" Luke xxm. 
 
 J'ot από Καισαρείας ττρός με. ^'^ ε'ιπεν δε το ' ΤΓΐ'ίϋμά /αοί yM^^tviu.o 
 ^^ συνεΧθειν αυτοις. ήλθον οε συν εμυι και οι εζ αδελφοί zMHit.viii.33. 
 
 _ , . , / , - ' Lakevm.20. 
 
 ούτοι, και ^ ίίςηλθομεν εις τον οίκον του ανΒρος, Gtn^Iiv.'^is. 
 
 ]??. 5/ Λ/ Γ- - 7!> ν>ί -ν > - aLukextiii. 
 
 απίίγγειΛει» τε 7]/(ΐν ττως είοεν τον αγγελον εν τω ιι,4ΐι. xix. 
 οίΑτω αυτού στασεντα και ειποΐ'τα αυτω ΑποστειΑον εις onfy. 
 
 »[/ >b ' is?' ^c» \' 1"^ 'h X• 'T feff. 
 
 1θ7Γπ>)ν και μεταπεμχμαι Ζιμωνα τον εττίκαλουΑίενον dLukc ϋ. ΐ7, 
 Ιίετρον, ^ ος ΛαΛί}σει ρήματα προς σε εν οις σωσ)7σλί « RomlV ίο. 
 συ κα/ παο ο οίκος σου. εν οε τω αοΙασΟπι «ε f- μη« ί. 2ΐ. 
 
 t 1 ^ 1^ cb. ii. 4(J. 
 
 λαλε(ν -' εττεττεσεν το πνεύμα το ayiov επ αυτούς, ωςπεο ^^ff'*'^'^ 
 
 k \ ' > < ~ \ ' ' - ig» //) Λ\ -«/ ' hMatt. xiii. 4 
 
 και εφ ?/μας εν ap-^y. εμνησυην οε του ρήματος ai.Ezck.ix.8. 
 
 κυρίου, "' ως έλεγεν 1ωαννί3ς μεν έβάπτισεν υδατι, ί.''ί„1"!ι!^ΓΓ''^' 
 
 only, elsw., καθΰΐί και. 1 John i. 1. vi. 64. Gen. i. 1. m = ch. x. 28, 33. 
 
 —(κηθβρισεν AG 13: ΐκηθαιρισ. Η 105: ΐκαθηρβ 24. 26. 101. 104: εκαθαρι 2. 142 
 Till'. — 10. rec τταλιν ανισττ. (see ch χ. 16, where ττηλιν teas introduced in this order'), 
 with EGH &c syr al Chr al : txt ABD 40. 00. ϋΟ. 105. 103. 180 ν copt eetli arm : av- 
 ι<7τταιΘησαν 90. 142. — 11. tv om ί>ό. — ';/ifv {error in iranscr .') ABD al : ημιν 90 : txt 
 EGH mss (nrly) vss Chr al. -—καισαμιης AE, -ραιας D. — 12. rec μοι το irv. {corrn of 
 arrangement), with EGH &c : txt ABD ν copt sah : μοι και το —v. 137• — ffvitXOt 46 syrr 
 ar-erp copt : TTootvnv Syr sah seth. — rec aft αυτοις ins μηδο' ίιακρινομίΐ'υν {interpo- 
 lation from ch X. 20, as is shetcn by the number of variations : soine inserting it accu- 
 rately, some from memory), with EGH &c : -νος {as x. 20 j 33. 46, and 40 above) συι/- 
 ίλθί {to suit it): μηΡίν διακριιαντη AB 13. 103. 180, but -νοί'τα Β (Bentl) al : μη 
 SiaKoivarTi ThP : txt D syr. — t'f om D al : τι Syr al— oi om ,S8 : αϋ. μου 96. — 13. for 
 τε, δε ABD 18. 33. 36 ν copt syr ar-erp arm (appy) Chr Thl- {corrn to more usual 
 particle) : txt EGH most mss Syr aeth (om sah) al Thl' Oec. — ictv AH. — τον (bef αγγ.) 
 om D : add του θεού 27• 29 al. — αυτω om AB copt seth : txt DEGH mss (appy) vss Chr 
 al. — rec aft ιοπττ. ins άνδρας {from ch x. 5), with EGH &c syr al Chr al : but om ABD 
 al V Syrar-er[) sah copt aeth arm. — 14. for πωθ., ωφεληθηση 177• — 15• ληλ. αυτυις D feth. 
 — ετησεν D al. — επ αυτοις D'. — αις D. — 16. εμί'ησΟημεν Α. — τον κνρ. ADE all ThU 
 {alteration to more nsnnl constr, but the expr is characteristic of Peter : see 1 Pel. i. 25) : 
 txt B(e sil)GH all Chr ThP Oec— aft ελεγ. ins on 38. 69 all slav-ms Thl' Aug.— 
 
 rally : in this case all those spoken of would iti his house.' — Notice also that Peter never 
 
 belong to the circumcision. Luke uses it names Cornelius in his speech — because he, 
 
 in the sense of the time xrhen he wrote the his character and person, was absorbed ia 
 
 account. 4.] ' Having begun, set forth the category to which he belonged, — that 
 
 to them:' i.e. 'begun and set forthi:' of men uncircumcised. 14. ev ois 
 
 not for ηοζατο εκτιΟίΐ'αι, as Kuinoel. σωθ. κ.τ.λ.] This is implied in the angel's 
 
 5.] ήλθ. άχρ. ίμοΰ is a fresh detail. speech : — especially if the prayer of Cor- 
 
 12. ούτοι] They had accompanied him to nelius had been for such a boon, of which 
 
 Jerusalem, and were there to substantiate there can be little doubt. 15. ev δέ 
 
 the facts, as far as they had witnessed them. τω αρξασθαι . . .] See note on ch. x. 44, 
 
 13. τον αγγίλον] The art. almost as also for the rest of the verse. 
 
 looks as if the history of Cornelius's vision 16.] ch. i. 5. This prophecy of the Lord 
 
 were known to the hearers. The difference was spoken to his assembled followers, and 
 
 between the vision of Cornelias and that of promised to them that baptism which was 
 
 Peter is here again strikingly marked, while the completion and aim of the inferior bap- 
 
 the latter is merely ' praying in the city of tism by water administered to them by 
 
 Joppa,' no place nor circumstance being John. Now, God had Himself, by iiouring 
 
 named, the former sees the angel 'standing out on the Gentiles the Holy Spirit, in- 
 
 voL. 11. i
 
 114 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XT. 
 
 nMatriii.ii. vuuc δί βαπτισΟησίσΟί "εν πνίνματι ay'uo. ^' Εί οΰι^ ABDE 
 
 οΙι.ι.Λ 1 Cor. Γ"^ Γ' Jr„;, ,,_ (jH 
 
 oL«Jvi.34. ° την 'ίσην '' ^ο^ηπ' ίδωλΤίΐ' αυτοις ο Οίος ως και ημιν, 
 
 ρ ch. ϋ. 38 reft". , „ , < ν / >, - / » ν <>,ν 
 
 qch. ίι .ii>refi-. ' πιοπυσασιν £7Γ/ τον κνριυν ιησοιιν Ύοιστον, εγω οε 
 
 Ι.. 11. χ. τούτα ϊ)ίτΐ)γπσπι^ και ίόοζαςοί' τοί' 1/£0ΐ' Λίγοί'Τίς* 
 "i'l^xxi^^u! ^'Apayc και τυις ίΟνίσιν ο θίος την '' μίτανοιαν i^toKiv 
 
 Nrh. V. 8. χ ' ν ' 
 οΜηΙΙ. ίχ. 8λ1. ίΐς C,tu1}V. 
 
 " xvTi' s'i'" ^"' ^* ^*^'' ^*^'' ^ οιαστΓοοί'ΐ'ΤΕς ^ αττυ της " 0\ιφ(ως της 
 
 Crn. χχνΙ.Ο. / b'^^Vj' c?>-\/l c" -l•, ' ^ 
 
 w -0I..XX.21. -/fvotjivnc tTTt Ζτεώανω οιηΛυον ίως Ψοινικης και 
 
 2 Tim ii. L'5. ' , , , ,' ' ^ , ,) , ,. „ ν d λ / 
 
 ^ Γι "">'"' Julie' KwTToou κοί Αΐ'Γίθ^ί(πς•, μηοίνι ' Ααλονντίς τον Aoyov 
 
 21. SreiCcir.vii lU. y cli viii. 1, 4 only. Ezek. xxii. 15. ζ = M;itt xxviii. 4. Ezek. xxxi. 16. 
 
 Exn<l. ri. <i. a = ch. xx. 23 al. 2 Chrnii. xx. H. b = ch. iii. Hi. τϊϋ. 2 al. c Luke 
 
 ii. 15. ch. ix. 38 reff. d ch. iv. 2y, 31. viii. 25 al. 
 
 fi' vS. 42. — 17. Ο θίΐις om D aeth Aug Rebapt. — χριττον om 14. 27. 29 al slav-ras. — δι 
 om ABD all ν Syr seth arm Chr Did Thl- Aug Atnbr Jer Rebapt (an ininece.snary, not 
 seeiuy its force) : ins EGH all sail syr Thl'. — for ης, τι arm. — ΰκΐ'ατος om 34 al copt. — 
 aft τυν θιιιν, add τον μη δοΐ'ΐ'αι οντοις ττνίυμα ayiov (so far 8 also) ττιστινσασιΐ' (ττ 
 ου -ci) D and a few lat-mss : simly syr*. — 18. (om 34) ίϋυΐ,ασαν BD^ (ίΓοζαΐ' D') 180 
 vsi (nrly) Chr (text) Thl^ : txt AE &c.— λίγοίτο 5?.- op« ABD 40. G5. KW sah (ys 
 omd, its force not being seen: cf note) : forsitan d Syr ar-erp : vtique e : txt EGH most 
 mss Chr al. — fi' r. tilv. 35. 99. — ίΐς- t• (δωκ. ABD 180 al ? am tol demid (corrn of 
 arranyement) : txt EGH all vs3 Chr al.— 19. ίπι σηψανυν AE 40.45 al iect 12 d ν [suO 
 Stephano) Thl' : απο τ«υ στέφανου D (corrns) txt : B(e sil)GH mss (nrly) vss Chr 
 Thl- Oec. — itj/X^ojufv 180. — ανηοχιαςΐίηά so passim AE. — μονοινΌν. — 20. rec «ις-ίλΟ. 
 
 eluded them in the number of these νμιΐς, pare Matt. vii. 20, ' therefore, whatever 
 
 and pronounced them to be members of the they profess, from their fi-uits,' fte. : and 
 
 church of beUevers in Christ, and partakers the other refl". : and see Hartung's chap, on 
 
 of the Holy Ghost, the end of baptism. yt in his Partikellehre, vol. i. p. 344, if. 
 This (in all its blessed consequences, = the cis ζωήν] to be taken with ίδοικίν, 
 
 gift of /^ΐίτήΐΌΐα ίΐ'ς ζϋ^ήι•, ver. 18) was (ver. not with την /ifrai^ninv, which would be 
 
 17) the Ίση ίω/αό bestowed on them : and, more probably τήν ίίς tf>iiv, 'hath given 
 
 this having been bestowed, — to refuse the unto the G. also repentance, — that they 
 
 symbolic and subordinate ordinance, — or to may attain unto life.' 
 regard them any longer as strangers from 19 — 30.] The gospel preached also 
 
 the covenant of promise would have been, in Antiuch to Gentiles. Barnabas, 
 
 so far as in him lay, κω\ϋπαι τον Otov. being thereupon sent by the Apostles 
 
 17.] 'ΤΓίστίΰσασιν belongs to both from Jerusalem, fetches Saul from 
 
 avTolc and ήμΐΐ' ; setting forth the strict Tarsus to Antioch. They continue 
 
 analogy between tlie cases, and the com»/!/- there a year, and, on occasion of 
 
 M27y of the faith to both. τίς ήμην a famine, carry up alms to the 
 
 δυν.] A junction of two questions: (1) brethren at Jerusalem. Our present 
 
 Who was I that I should . . . . , as Exod. section takes up the narrative at ch. viii. 
 
 iii. 11,— and (2) Was I able to ... . 2. 4. In vv. 19 — 21 it traverses rapidly the 
 
 Sc liere (omitted in some MSS, the tran- time occupied by ch ix. 1 — ;^0, and that 
 
 scribers not being aware of the construe- (undefined,) of Saul's stay at Tarsus, and 
 
 tion) brings out the contrast after n' oiiv. as brings it down to the famine under Clau- 
 
 frequently after ίπύ, e. g. Od. ξ. 178, τον dius. 19. μέν οΰν] A resumption of 
 
 tTTM ijoi^ui' utu'i, toi't'i inou . . . τοϋ cs τις what had been dropt before, see ch. viii. 4, 
 
 aftavu-tiiv βλόφι φϋΐνας tvCov ίισας : continued from ver. 2 : not however, with- 
 
 Herod. iii. G8, ti μή αίιτή Σμίροιν out reference to some narrative about to 
 
 γινωσκίΐι-, συ t'i τταρά Άτόσσης ττνθον. follow which is brought out by a if, an- 
 
 See more cxx. in Hartung, Partikellehre, i. swering to the μίν, — see ch. vi i. 5, also ch. 
 
 P• 'β•*• 18.] άραγ€ is more than (ί(κι. ix. 31, ',Ί2 ; xxviii. 5, (>,— and implying, 
 
 yt has the effect of insulating the sentence, whether by way of distinction or euceptiou, 
 
 q. d. whatever may be the consei/uences, or a contrast to that μεν. Iiri Στ.] ' on 
 
 however mysterious the proceeding to us, account of Stephen;' see reff. Wolf, Kuin., 
 
 this at least is plain, that God Sfc. Com- Olsh., &c. render it ' after St. :' the Vulg.
 
 -21. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 115 
 
 £ί μη μόνον Ιουδαί'οίς. '■" ήσαν δί τινίς ίζ αυτών ην^οες * ^rViv'^ss'^' 
 Κύπριοι και Κυρηναιοι, οΊτι\'ίς ίΧΟοντίς ίΐς Αιτιόνίΐοΐ' f",'}; '^ ^*'• 
 
 '■ν r-y \ \ Ν ''τ^Λ Λ e ' \ V' •• f Lnkp ί. Ofi. ih. 
 
 ϊΛαΛουΐ' και προς τους ι1,ΛΛί})'ας tvayytAiuouivoi τον f'^'in".""'^- 
 κνοιον Ι/;σουν. και ί'/ν yftp κυοΊου μίτ αυτών, xiv ν.κ"'^^ 
 
 (. Λ / π ' /J ^ ' / h • % , ' ' ν e hertf only. 
 
 7ΓθΛι;ς τε ' αρισμος ο πιστίνσας επίστοίψίν επι τον '^'^^•'«■^«Γβ^- 
 ί/;??•^^/;* from ver 3), with Η all ν Syr ar-pol Thl : txt ABDEG all copt sah syr al Chr. 
 — rec aft ίλαλ. am και (as not being understood, the whole sense having been conjused 
 by the reading ίΧληνιστας below), with DEGH niss vss (nrly) Chr al : ins AB 27. 29. 
 CO. 163. — 40 V aft και ins σνΐ'(Ζητνν7'. — rec ίλληνιστας {apparently altogether a mis- 
 take, as no sense can be yielded by it .• see note), with B(e sil)D-EGH mss (appy) 
 (v and many versions do not seem to observe the distinction) Chr (text) Oec (text) Thl 
 (text) : txt AD' Euseb Chr (comm) Oec (comm) ThF Cassiod {gentiles). — κνρ. ημών 
 lect 12.— aft ιησ. add ^jjiif or D 9C.— 21. ην St D-gr. — aft avTiur, ins τον {ας το) ιασθαι 
 αυτούς {from Luke v. 17) 25. 27- 29 all. — rec bef πιστ. om ο {as unnecessary, not per- 
 ceiving its force), with DEGH &c : ins AB 180. — προς τ. κνρ. 180. — κυρ. ιησ. 38. — 
 
 sub Stephana, reading ΐπί 'ΣτιψάΐΌν. 
 διήλθον] so ch. viii. 4. 40 ; ix. 32. 
 Φοινίκης] properly, the strip of coast, about 
 120 miles long, extending from the river 
 Eleutherus (near Aradus), to a little south 
 of Tyre, and belonging at this time to the 
 province of Syria : see ch. xv. 3 ; xxi. 2. 
 Its principal cities were Tripolis, Byblos. 
 Sidon, Tyre, and Berytos. It is a fertile 
 territory, beginning with the uplands at the 
 foot of Lebanon, and sloping to the sea, 
 and held a distinguished position for com- 
 merce from the very earliest times. See 
 Winer, RWB. Κΰττρον] Cyprus was 
 
 intimately connected by commerce with 
 Phcenice, and contained many Jews {nv 
 μόνον fit ηΤΓίΐυοι μίαται των Ιουδαϊκών 
 αποικιών κ'τέΐ», άλλα και νήσων αϊ ίοκι- 
 μύιτατοι, Έ,νΑοιη, Kvirpos, Μ.ρήτη. Philo, 
 Leg. ad Caiam, >; 3ti. See also Jos. Antt. 
 xiii. 10. 4). See on its state at this time, 
 note on ch. xiii. 7• Αντιοχείας] A 
 
 city in the history of Christianity only 
 second in importance to Jerusalem. It was 
 situated on the river Orontes, in a large, 
 fruitful, and well-watered plain, 120 stadia 
 from the sea and its port Seleucia. It was 
 founded by Seleucus Nicator, who called it 
 after his father Antiochus. It soon became 
 a great and populous city I^Avt. ή μιγάλη, 
 Philostr. Apoll. i. 16), and was the residence 
 of the Seleucid kings of Svria (1 Mace, 
 iii. .37; vii. 2 ; xi. 13. 44 ; 2 Mace. v. 21), 
 and (as an ' urbs libera,' Pliny, v. 18) of 
 the Roman proconsuls of Syria. Josephus 
 (B. J. iii. 2. 4) calls it μΐ'/ίΟοί'ς τ( 'ίηκα 
 κα'ι ΓΪΊς άλλ»;ς tvCatiKn'int; τρίτον ά(">/ο('- 
 τως Ιπ'ι της νπό 'Ρι•ιμηίοις ηΐκουμίνης 
 ίχιινση τόπυν. Seleucus the founder had 
 settled there many Jews (Jos. Antt xii. 3. 1. 
 See also xiv. 12. 6. B. J. ii. 1«. 5 : vii. X 3 
 — and contr. .λρΐοη. ii. 4, αυτών γαρ ημών 
 (Λ την \VTit'i\H(ti' κ(ΐτοικονντ(ς, ' Αντι- 
 οχίΐς ονομάζονται• την γάρ τΐολιτύαν 
 
 αντϋίς ίίωκίν ο κτίστης Σίλίμ/οος), who 
 had their own Ethnarch. The intimate 
 connexion of Antioeh with the history of 
 the church will be seen as we proceed. A 
 reference to the principal passages will here 
 be enough : see vv. 22. 26, 27 ; ch. xiii. 1 ; 
 XV. 22. 35 ff. ; xviii. 22. It became after- 
 wards one of the five great centres of the 
 Christi η church, with Jerusalem, Rome, 
 Alexandria, and Constantinople. Of its 
 present state (Antakia, a town not one- 
 third of its ancient size) a view is given in 
 C. and H. where also, vol. I. pp. 131 ff., is 
 a minute and interesting description of the 
 city and its history, ancient and modern. 
 See also ]\Ir. Lewin's Life and Epistles of 
 St. Paul, vol. I. p. 108 ff. (Principallv from 
 Winer, RWB.) 20. Κνρηναϊοι] of 
 
 whom Lucius mentioned ch. xiii. 1, as 
 being in the church at Antioeh, must have 
 been one. Symeon called Niger, also men- 
 tioned there, may have been a Cyrenean 
 proselyte. Ιξ αυτών] not, of these, 
 
 last mentioned Jens : but, of the δια- 
 σπαρεντίς. This both the sense and th 
 form of the sentence {piv ovv .... if) re- 
 quire. "Ελληνας] The retaining and 
 advocacy of the reading ΈΧ^ηνιστάς has 
 mainly arisen from a mistaken view that 
 the baptism of Cornelius must neces.'^arily 
 have preceded the conversion of all other 
 Gentiles. But that reading gives, in this 
 place, no assignable sense whatever : for(l) 
 the Hellenists were long ago a recognized 
 part of the Christian church, — (2) among 
 these ίιασπιιρίντίς tliemselve•; in all pro- 
 bability there were many Hellenists, — and 
 (3) the term 'liwCinai includes the Hel- 
 lenists, — the distinctive appellation of pure 
 Jews being not 'lorSaloi, but Έβρα'ϊοι, 
 ch. vi. 1. Nothing to my mind can be 
 plainer, from what follows respecting IJar- 
 nabas, than that these "1ν\λ);νίς• were(ii:N- 
 TiLiis, uncircumcised : and that their con- 
 
 I 2
 
 116 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 ΧΙ. 
 
 :υοιον. " νκονσΟη δί ό ' λόγος- *" ίίς τα ώτα της εκκλί)- ABDE 
 
 ,"" - , ., Λ ν i V ' - > πι -f / \ ^" 
 
 παοπγίΐ'Ο- 
 
 Kiu ιοων την • χ«ρΐ" r7jv του Όίον εγ^άρη, και 
 
 ΤΓαρΕκάλπ πάντας ry ' ττροΰίσίΐ της καρδίας * ττροςμίνΗΧ' 
 
 i Luke ν. 15. 
 Tit. 17 only. 
 
 'ί'':"^' σ'ιας της ίν Ίίοουσαλημ ' ττίοι αυτών, και 
 kMa^'x'aV.'- Βαρ.-όβίΠ' " δίίλΟίΓν £ο.ς Αντιοχείας- ^•^ ος 
 
 Luke 1 44. il. \ > C\ ν ^ μ " . - - 
 
 44. Ι.«.ν.!1. μ^ι,ος. --— -"'• 
 
 1 en. VIII. 1 HI. Γ ^ _ /ι/ " ^1 
 
 n^riiire'm"' '' τταρΒκάλζΐ πάντοο τη ' ττροΟίσΗ της καβόια 
 
 ο ab: 
 
 ab.Mil., Luke - / 9Λ""*'*'/!)'• ^*λ' ' 
 
 χϋ. Mrco. τω κυριω, '^* οτι ην ανηρ α-γαυος και πλήρης ττνίνματης 
 
 -John i. 14, ^ ι Γ ι J ^ > u 'Π " \ ν • ^ 
 
 4.'2c!.ri*x.8: αγίου Κ"ΐ πίστεως. και προςετευη όχλος ικανός τω 
 
 Col. i. ft, 
 qcli ίχ 38. 
 
 xiii.42al ft. 
 r — 2 Tim. ill. Id 
 
 α rh. ii. 41 rell. 
 X Luke ii. 44 only. 
 
 7 , 
 κυριω 
 
 2Macc.iii. 8 
 
 ^^ ^^ εζηλθίν δί ^* 8ΐς Ταοσον '^ αναΖ,ητησαι Σουλον, 
 
 s =- ch. xiii. 43 only. Wi.sd. iii. 9. 
 τ Mark x. 4β. Luke τϋ. 12. ch. xix. 20. 
 Jobiii. 4. x.H. 
 
 t ch. vi. 3, 8. Luke ir. 1 a1. 
 w Matt. xi. 7 ul. it. John i. 44. 
 
 22. της ονσης (v BE 13. 103. 180 Chr. — rec ιιροσο\νμοις {corrn : cf ver 2), with EGH 
 &c : t.\t ABD 180 sah. — τα πιρι αυτών Ε Chr. — ίζ<ιπ(στηλί UG. — StiXOfti' om AB vss 
 V Syr ar-erp copt setli arm {as uunecessary ,• to simplify the constr : but δΐίΧΘ. ΐως is in 
 Luke' s manner : see ver 19 re^) : ins DEGH mss (appy) syr {ελθην sail). — £ως• της αιτ. 
 D' : ίΐς ("'/I') αΐ'τ. 32. 42 al. — 23. ος και ποραγ. D-gr. — rec aft τηΐ' -χιιρη' om την (as 
 nnnecessari/ : no reason can he given for its insertion in so unusual a connexion. It 
 has peculiar force, see note), with DE &c : but ins AB &c. — bef τω κυρ. Β 40 al ν sah 
 Slav ins f v.— 24. for αγαθ., vigilans arm. — aft ττιστ., ins και προςίυχης lect 12. — τω 
 κυριω om Β. — 25. rec aft ταρσ. ins ο βαρναβας {supplementary) , with EGH &c vss 
 Chr al : om AB (D see below) 3(i. (i9. 100. 180 v-ms Syr copt sah arm. — rec aft ιυρ. 
 ins αυτόν {supplementary), with GH &c syrf : om ABE all lectt 5. 12. 18 Chr Chron. — 
 
 version took place before any tidings had 
 reached Jerusalem of the divine sanction 
 given in the case of Cornelius. See below. 
 21. ήν χίΐρ κυρ. μ. α.] By visible 
 manifestations not to be doubted, the Lord 
 shewed it to be His pleasure that they 
 should go on with such preaching; αυτών 
 being, the preachers io the Ge7itiles, whose 
 work the narrative now follows. 22.] 
 
 ήκ. els T. ώτα, a Hebraism, see reff. 
 Βαρνάβαν] himself a Cyprian, ch. iv. 36. — 
 His mission does not seem e.xactly to have 
 been correspondent to that of Peter and 
 John to Samaria (nor can he in any dis- 
 tinctive sense, be said to have been an 
 Apostle, as they were: see ch. xiv. 14, and 
 note) : but more probably, from what fol- 
 lows, the intention was to ascertain the 
 fact, and to deter these persons from the 
 admission of the uncircumcised into the 
 church : or, at all events, to use his discre- 
 tion in a matter on which they were as yet 
 doubtful. The choice of such a man, one 
 by birth with the agents, and of a liberal 
 spirit, shews sufficiently that they wished 
 to deal, not harshly, but gently and cau- 
 tiously, — whatever their reason was. 
 23, 24.] It is on these verses principally 
 that I depend as determining the character 
 of the whole narrative. It certainly is im- 
 plied in them that the effect produced on 
 Barnabas was something different from 
 what might have been expected: that to 
 sympathize with the work was not the 
 intent of his mission, but a result brought 
 about by the sight of the eflects of divine 
 
 grace {τ. χάρ. την του Οίυϋ, not merely, 
 ' the grace of God,' but ' the grace which 
 [evidently] was that of God;' the e.x)ir. is 
 deliberately used) on a good man, full of 
 the Holy Ghost and of faith. And this is 
 further confirmed to my mind by finding 
 that he immediately ivent and sought Said. 
 He had been Saul's friend at Jerusalem : 
 he had doubtless heard of the commission 
 wliich had been given to him to preach to 
 the Gentiles: but the church was waiting 
 the will of God, to know hoiv this was to 
 be accomplished. Here was an evident 
 door open for the ministry of Saul, and, in 
 consequence, as soon as Barnabas perceives 
 it, he goes to fetch him to begin his work 
 in Antioch. And it was here, more pro- 
 perly, and not in Caesarea, that the real 
 commencement of the Gentile church took 
 place, — although simultaneously, for the 
 convincing of the Jewish believers at Jeru- 
 salem, and of Peter, and for the more 
 solemn and authorized standing of the 
 Gentile church, the important events at 
 Csesarea and Joppa were brought about. 
 23. ΐΓαρεκάλει] in accordance with 
 his name, which (iv. 30) was interpreted 
 υιός παρακλι'ισίως. 25.] This there- 
 
 fore took place after ch. ix. 30 : hotv long 
 after, we have no hint in the narrative, and 
 the question will be determined by various 
 persons according to the requirements of 
 their chronological system. Wieseler and 
 Schrader make it not more than from half 
 a year to a year : Dr. Burton, who places 
 the conversion of Saul in a.d. 31, — nine
 
 22—28. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 117 
 
 Ά ν 
 
 TioyjEiav. 
 
 και ίνρων ηγαγεί' ίΐς 
 και eviavToi' όλου ^ συναχυηναι ίν 
 οαςαι οχΛοι> i/coiOv, ■χ^ρηματι^ται 
 \iia τους μαθητας '' Χριστιανούς. 
 ' υ.)' ταυΓΓκς οε ταις ημεραις 
 σοΧΰμων προφηται εις Αντιογ^παν. 
 
 26 
 
 εγεί'ετο όε ακτοίς ych.iT.sereff. 
 
 _ , , , z = Rom.vU.3 
 
 Τ); εκκλησία και οι 
 ΑντίΟ 
 
 τε ποωτον ευ 
 
 κατηΧΘον 
 
 28 
 
 ατΓΟ 
 αναστας• δε 
 
 Ί 
 
 ερο- o'liy• 
 
 ' b cli . ν 1 1 
 
 οηΙγ.χρΓίμα 
 
 TtV.ci Φιλ- 
 
 e\\iji/, Jos. 
 
 Antt. xiii. Π, 
 
 Sal. 
 
 cli. xxvi. 28. 
 
 1 Pel.iv. 16 
 
 b cli. viii. 5 reff. 
 tJ/- c? '^ = Markxiv. 
 ft? ί^ 57, 6U. rh.i. 
 15. vi. y al. 
 
 rec aft ηγαγ. ins avrou (supplementary), with EGH &c : om AB all ν arm Chron Thl. — 
 The verse stands thus in D syr-marg: άκουσας St uri σανλος tariv ης θαησον (jup. D^) 
 ί^ηΚθίν αναζητών αυτόν και ως συντυχων {et cum invenhsent depraecabantur d, qui 
 cum collocutus esset cum eo syr-marg) na^itKaXtatv avrov (om D') ίλθίΐΐ' ng αντιοχίΐαν. 
 —26. rec αντονς {corni of cons(r), with GK &c Chr al : txt ABE 13. 105. 180.— rec 
 bef ti'i. om και (as iinuecessary), with EGH &c : ins AB (v) syr Ath Vig. — ολο»/ om Ε 
 sah Chr. — tv (1st) om GH (and appy D) all Thl'. — πρωτως BD- 1G3 : πρώτους 
 (or -Γος .') 180. — βις αντ. Α. — The verse stands thus in D' : οιτιπς τταραγίνομ(νοι 
 tviauTov okov συΐ'ίχυθησαν (-αχυθηναι Born) (congregati sunt syr-marg) οχΧυν ικανον 
 και τότε πρώτον (-ως D' .') ίχρηματισίν (-σαν .') iv αντ. οι μαθ. \ρ. ; and syr marg has 
 the former part : d somewhat varies : D- is uncertain. — 27. ανταις Β : ίκιιναις sah. — 
 δε om 80. — 28. D Aug read for αναστ. di εις, — ην δε πυλλη αγαλλιασις' σννεστρσμ- 
 
 years. Speaking α priori, it seems very 
 improbable that any considerable portion of 
 time should have been spent by him before 
 the great work of his ministry began. Even 
 supposing him during this retirement to 
 have preached in Syria and Cilicia, — judging 
 by the analogy of his subsequent journeys, 
 a few months at the most would have suf- 
 ficed for this. For my own view, see Pro- 
 legg. to Acts, § 5. 26. Χριστιανον?] 
 
 This name is never used by Christians of 
 themselces in the N. T. (but o'l μαθηταί, n'l 
 πιστοί, or ot πιστίύοντες, ol act'Scpoi, οι 
 ίίγιοι, οι της ϋδοϋ), only (see reflf'.) as 
 spoken by, or coming from, those without 
 the church. And nf those, it cannot have 
 arisen with the Jews, who would never 
 have given a name derived from the Mes- 
 siah to a hated and despised sect. By the 
 Jews they were called Τ^αζωοηωι, ch. 
 xxiv. 5, and Galilaians : and Julian, who 
 wished to deprive them of a name in which 
 they gloried (see below), and to favour the 
 Jews, ordered that they should not be called 
 Christian!, but Galilaei. Greg. Naz. Orat. 
 iii. p. 81 (see Humphry, Comm. on Acts, 
 p. ii31. That it has a Latin form is no de- 
 cided proof of a Latin origin : Latin forms 
 had become naturalized among the Greeks, 
 and in this case there would be no Greek 
 adjective so ready to hand as the Latin 
 possessive, sanctioned as it was by such 
 forms as Pompeiani, Csesariani, Ilerodiani 
 (Christns being regarded as a i)ri)])er name, 
 see Tacit. Atm. xv. 44, ' . . . quos vulgus . . . 
 Christianos appellabat. Auctor ejus no- 
 minis Christus, Tibcrio impcritante, per 
 procuratorem Pontium Pilatum supplicio 
 affectus erat '). The name soon became mat- 
 ter of glorying among its bearers : ref. 1 Pet., 
 
 Eus. H. E. V. 1, in the epistle of the churches 
 of Lyons and Vienne, του ήγεμόιυς .... 
 μόνον τοντο πυθομένου ιί και αύτϋς ηη 
 Χριστιανός, του δε (Epagathus) λαμπρο- 
 Tfiry ώωι^ ομολογήσαντος, . . . and again, 
 προς πάντα τα επηρωτημίνα άπεκρίνατο 
 (Sanctus) tiJ 'Ρωμαικι^ (ρωνι^, ΧρισΓίαΐ'ός 
 είμι. And in the Clementine Liturgy 
 (Humphry, p. 84), — εΰχαριστοϊψ'εν σοι, 
 'ότι το όνομα του ■χιιιστυϋ σου επικέκληται 
 ίφ' ϋμας, και σοι προσωκειώμίθα. — Before 
 this, while the believers had been included 
 among Jeivs, no distinctive name for them 
 was needed : but now that a body of men, 
 compounded of Jews and Gentiles, arose, 
 distinct in behef and habits from both, some 
 new appellation was required. — It may be 
 observed, that the inhabitants of Antioch 
 were famous for their propensity to jeer and 
 call names; see instances in C. and H. i. 
 p. 130, note 4. 27. ev τ. τ. ήμ..] It 
 
 was during this year, ver. 20. irpo- 
 
 φήται] Ins[)ired teachers in the early 
 Christian church, referred to in the Acts 
 (ch. xiii. I; xv. 32 ; xix. 6 ; xxi. 'J, 10), and 
 in the Epistles of Paul (Rom. xii. C. 1 Cor. 
 xii. 10. 28, 29; xiii. 2 8; xiv. 0. 29-37. 
 Eph. ii. 20 ; iii. 5 ; iv. 1 1 ; 1 Thess. v. 20). 
 They might be of either sex (ch. xxi. 9). 
 The foreteUing of future events was not the 
 usual form which their inspiration took, but 
 that of an ejcalted and superhuman teach- 
 ing, ranked by St. Paul above 'speaking 
 witli tongues,' in being the utterance of 
 their own conscious intelligence informed 
 by the Holy Spirit. This inspiration was, 
 however, occasionally, as here, and ch. xxi. 
 10, made the vehicle of prophecy, properly 
 so called. 28. "Λγαβος] The same 
 
 who prophesied Paul's imprisonment in
 
 118 
 
 ΠΡΑΗΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XI. 29, 30. 
 
 (Ι John χίΙ. S3. 
 
 χνϋΙ.ϋΐ,χχί. 
 
 lit. ch. χχτ. 
 
 27. Kfv i. 1 
 
 only. E!<th. 
 
 ii.:ί•2.c^tu^tΓ., 
 
 here unly. 
 erh i. 2 xxi 4. 
 
 Rom. V. 5. 
 
 Enli ill. in 
 
 2 Thew. ii.2 
 
 al. LP 
 ffem , I. like xv. 
 
 14(v«r.reiirt ) 
 
 αντων ονόματι 'Ά-γαβος '' ίσίψανίν * δια του 
 ^ λιμυν μί-γαν ^ μίΧΧίΐν ^ ίσεσθαι ' (φ ολην 
 μίνην, οςης και tyiviTO ΕΤΤί Κλαυοιου. 
 αΟητιον καΟως tuTTOptiro τις, ojpiaav ίκαστος αυτών 
 ^ιακυνίαν '' πίμφιη τοις '' κατοικονσιν '' εν ry [ουααια. 
 
 πνεύματος abde 
 
 y , ' GH 
 
 την οικον- 
 
 29 
 
 των 
 
 δέ 
 
 εις 
 
 ϋΟίΛώοις, υ κ'ίίί fTToiijffar αττοστίίΛπντίς προς τους• 
 
 xTii. Ι". W. '' ττοίσβυτίοους ^ δκϊ -γ^εψος Βαρνάβα και Σηυλοι». 
 
 XII. ^ ' Κατ' ίΚίΠ'ον δί τον καψον " επίβαΧεν Ηρώ- 
 ν - ν - ί - \ν ' ^ 
 
 τας "^ίί^ης κακ^οσαι τινας των απο 
 ^ ανειΧεν δε Ιάκ'ωβοί' τον α^ίΧφον 
 
 •, } 45. 
 
 h MMrkxT.33|. ^ης 
 Τί)ς 
 
 i - l.nkr ii. 1. 
 
 xxi. 2H. (IsJ 
 
 xxi». 4.) 
 k -Lnkeiii.l. iv. 2; 
 η rh. ii. 23 reff. 
 
 Ο βασιΧενς 
 " εκκΧησιας. 
 
 , here only. 
 
 1 =• Mark iv. 33. Num. xxvi. 54 in here only. Levil. xxv. 2S. 
 
 o=ch. vi. 1. 2Cor. ix. 1, 12, 13. ρ = Phil iv. 10. 
 
 fi Liike xiii.4. ch.i. 2U al. ' r = here for firsf fime. Hfi., pn-ssim. sch. ii. 2:ϊ. vii. 2!> al. 2 Chron. 
 
 xxxiv. 14. t ell. six. 23 only. 2 Mhcc. xii. lii. See Rom. ix. !•. u Malt. xxvi. ΓιΟ. Luke 
 
 XX. 19. Gen. xxii. 12. ronstr., here only. (Seech, iv. 3. v. 18. xxi. 27. Dent. xii. 7. xv.lo.) ν ih. vii. 
 
 f, reir. w — ch. χτ. 5 (xxvii. 44). χ absol., Matt. xvi. 18 cb. xx. 28 al. Dent, xxiii. 1, 3. 
 
 y = ch. ii. £3 reff. 
 
 μένων Se ημών (φη ίίς . . . . — ίσημαινιν Β d ν Chron Aug : txt (ίφη σημινων D-gr) 
 AEGII ϊίϊϋ fappy). — μιγαλην ABD^ 27. 29 40. 100 Epiph Eutlial Chron (corrn, (he. 
 Dorians and later Greeks using λιμός in the fern. This appears bi/ λιμίΐς /if γης being 
 unqnestioned in Luke iv. 25. In Luke xv. 14 it has been altered, as here, to fern. See 
 Meyer, and Lobeck on Phryn., p. 188) : txt D'EGH &(; Chr Chron al. — tntudai om all 
 lect 12.— yii'fTOiu lect 12. — j/nc {see above) ABDE 12. 27. 29. 40 al Epiph Euthal Chron : 
 txt GH &c Chr al. — και om ABU 33. 34. 40. 105. 133 vss Chron {as unnecessary, its 
 force not being seen) : ins EGH most mss syr (copt) ar-pol Chr al. — rec κλ. καίσαρας 
 {supplementary), with EGH &c vss Chr Cassiod al : txt ABD 40 ν copt sah seth arm 
 Chron. — 29. it om 1C3. — rec ηυπορ. with G &c Chr al : txt ABD {oi is μαΘ. καθώς 
 ίυττυυηυντο D)EH all Till'. — (uotfffj• A 95' al.— 30. for o, oi G.— for τους, αυτούς {or 
 for T. 7rp£i/3. ?) lect 12. — π^ιος om Β 34 copt. 
 
 CH.A.P. XII. 1. τας χ. ηρ. ο β. D.— aft ίκκλ. add ίν τη lovSaia D syr*. — 2. St om 90 
 
 Jerusalem, ch. xxi. 10, ff. From the form the events just related were not also in the 
 
 of his announcement there, we may infer 
 the manner in which he ίσήμαΐΊΐ• ίιά του 
 ■κνίί'ματος here. It was τάδε Xeyei to 
 "irv. TO αγιον. ολην τ. οίκουμενην] 
 
 not, ' all Judiea,' though in fact it was so : 
 the expression is a hyperbolical one in or- 
 dinary use, and not to be pressed as strictly 
 implying that to which its literal meaning 
 would extend. That it occurs in a pro- 
 phecy (Meyer) is no objection to this : the 
 scope and not the wording of the ))rophecy 
 is given. But see below. eirl Κλαν- 
 
 δίου] In the fourth year of Claudius, a.d. 
 44, there was a famine in Judaea and the 
 neighbouring countries (Jos. Antt. xx. 2. 5). 
 And three others are mentioned during his 
 reign : one in Greece (Eus. Chron. i. 79), 
 and two in Rome (Dio Cassius, Ix. 11. 
 Tacitus, Ann. xii. 4^5), so that scarcity ίττΐ 
 KXavciov did ejclend through the greater 
 part of the ' orbis terrariim,' if it be 
 thought necessary to pre<s the words of the 
 prophecy. The queen Helena of Adiabene 
 and her son Izates helped the Jews with 
 subsidies on the occasion (Jos. ibid., see 
 also XX. 5. 2, where he calls it τ'υν μίγαν 
 λιμόι), both of corn and money.— I do not 
 believe that the words ίπι Κλ. imply that 
 
 reign of Claudius : but they are inserted to 
 particularize the famine as being that well- 
 known one, and only imi)ly that the author 
 was not W7-iting under Claudius. 29.] 
 
 There is no need to suppose that the pro- 
 phecy of Agabus preceded by any long time 
 the outbreak of the famine : nor would it 
 be any derogation from its prophetic cha- 
 racter to suppose it even coincident with its 
 first beginnings ; it was the greatness and 
 extent of the famine which was particularly 
 revealed, and which determined the Chris- 
 tians of Antioch to send the relief. 
 των δ. |Ααθ. κ. Γ. λ. is a mixture of two con- 
 structions, u\ it μαϋηταϊ καθώς ηί/πορΰτύ 
 τις αυτών. — The church at Jerusalem was 
 poor, probably in connexion with the com- 
 munity of goods, which would soon have 
 this effect; see ch. ii. 45, note. 30. 
 
 Ίτρεσβυτερους] These were the overseer's 
 or presidents of the congregation, — an 
 office borrowed from the synagogues, — and 
 established by the Apostles in the churches 
 generally, see ch. xiv. 23. They are in the 
 N. T. identical with ίπίΐτκ-οτΓοι, see ch. xx. 
 17. 28. Titus i. 5. 7. 1 Pet. v. 1, 2. So 
 Theodoret on Phil. i. 1, ίπισκόπονς τηνς 
 ττρίσβυτίρηυς καλή' αμφότερα yap ιΤχον
 
 XII. 1—4. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 119 
 
 [ωανί'ου ^ μαγαιηα. " ιδων όε οτι " αρεστοί» " ίστιν τοις zMait.nTi. 
 Ιυυ^αΙοις, ^ προτίθετο '^ συλλαβε/ν και Πετρον' ήσαν δε ^c^."^\.Yreff'. 
 
 ' r / - y 1 y/ 4 i\ \ t / σ .'/i > bpres., J.ihn i. 
 
 ai luiioai t(>}V aCvuoiv. ov και ττιασας " ίΰίτυ εις 4υι,β. 
 
 ^ C = Luke six. 
 
 II. λχ.η, 12only. Gen. ϊτ. 2. viii. 12. xviii. 2<Λ d ch. i. Iti reff. e Matt. xxii. 1?. Mark sir. 
 
 12 al. Levit. xx'iii. 6. f John vii. 3u reff. g = ch. iv. 3. xiii. 29. Gen. xii. lu. 
 
 sah : και aitiXtv D setli al : aiti\. (t κσι 76• 177": ifitn'oi• (as ununl) D. — /"'X'lp»? 
 AD-. — 3. rec κοι ιΓ. {ojipi/ corrn to avoid recmreuce of ce : or perhajjs as agreeing 
 belter irith the coni in nation of the same line of conduct), with DGH &c vss Chr (re.xt) 
 al : txt ABE all V lux copt sah Chr (comm). — aft ιουΐαιοις, ins /; ΐπιχίΐμηηίΐς [com- 
 preheiisio d) αυτού επι τους ττιστοιις Ό.—συ»'ίθίτο 177• — ~ον σιΛλ. (σνί'λ. Ε) Ε al. — 
 ιΐσον . . . αζυμωρ οιη 4^. 35. — rec bef (//iforii om ai (as unnecessary), with B(e sil)GH 
 all Chrj Oec: ins ADE all Chrj Thl. — 4. for ov και, τούτον D. — ΐν φυλακτ) Ε — ττα^α- 
 
 His 
 
 κατ' έκΰνον τον καιροί' τά ονόματα. The 
 title ΐπίσκοπος, as applied to one per.=on 
 superior to the ττηκι/^ιτίροι, and answering 
 to our ' bishop,' appears to have been un- 
 known in the apostolic times. — Respecting 
 the chronology of this journey to Jerusalem, 
 see note on ch. .\ii. 25, and Prolegg. to 
 Acts, § 5. 
 
 Chap. XII. 1 — 25.] Persecution of 
 
 THE CHURCH AT JERUSALEM BY HeROD 
 
 Agrippa. Martyrdom of James the 
 BROTHER OF John. Imprisonment and 
 miraculous deliverance OF Peter. 
 De.\th of Herod at C.esarea. Return 
 OF Barnabas and Saul from Jeru- 
 salem TO Antioch. 1. κατ* Ικ. τ. 
 καιρ.] Before the arrival of Barnabas and 
 Saul in Jerusalem. The famine in Judaea 
 broke out under Cuspius Fadus, and con- 
 tinued under Tiberius Alexander, procu- 
 rators of Judsea. Now Cuspius Fadus was 
 sent to Judaea by Claudius on the death of 
 Agrippa (i. e. alter Aug. 6, a.d. 44). The 
 visit of Barnabas and Saul must have taken 
 place about the time of, or shortly after, 
 Agrippa's death. Ηρώδης 6 βασιλίυς] 
 Herod Agrippa I., grandson of Herod the 
 Great, — son of Aristobulus and Berenice 
 (Jos. Antt. xvii. 1. 2. B. J. i. 28. 1). Having 
 gone to Rome, to accuse Herod the Te- 
 trarch (Antipas), and fallen under the dis- 
 pleasure of Tiberius for paying open court 
 to Caius Caesar (Caligula), he was impri- 
 soned and cruelly treated ; but, on the 
 accession of Caligula, released, and at once 
 presented with the tetrarchy of Philip (Tra- 
 chonitis), — who had lately died, — and the 
 title of king. On this, Antipas, by per- 
 suasion of his wife Herodias, went to Rome, 
 to fry to obtain the royal title also, but 
 was followed by his enemy Agrippa, who 
 managed to get Antipas banished to Spain, 
 and to obtain his tetrarchy (Galilee and 
 Peraea) for himself. (Jos. Antt. xix. 8. 2.) 
 Finally, Claudius, in reiurn for services 
 rendered to him by Agrippa, at the time of 
 Caligula's death, presented him with Sa- 
 maria and Judaea (about 41 a.d., Jos. Antt. 
 xix. 5. I), so that he now ruled (Jos. ibid.) 
 
 all the kingdom of Herod the Great, 
 character, as given by Josephus, Antt. xix. 
 7. 3, is important as illustrating the present 
 chapter: innpixn ci ο βασιλεύς ούτος 
 tΰ^py^τικbς tlvai tf ΟωρίαΊς, κη'ι μί•^α\θ- 
 ψρυΐ'ησαι ίϋι•η φιλότιμος, και πυλλοΤς 
 άθ^)ύιυς δαπαιΊμιασιΐ' (ηηστάς αυτόν ίΐς 
 ίπιφάιηκιν, ιιδόμίνος τψ χαυίζεσθαι, και 
 Τψ βιοϋν ίν α'ιφημίο: χαίρων .... (see 
 ver. 3) . . . . πρανς Ct 6 τιιόπος Άγη/τΓΤΓ^, 
 και προς ττάντας τυ tbipytTiKOv ομοιον, 
 >'/?ίϊα γοΓν αΐ'τψ ίιαιτα κα'ι συνιχής ίν 
 τοΙς ItpoaoXi^oig j/r, και τά πάτρια 
 καθαρώς ίιτήμει. διά πάσης -γοϋν αΰτον 
 ηγίν ayvtiac, ohti ήμίρα τις παρώδίυιν 
 αϋτψ της νόμιμης χηρεύουσα θυσίας. 
 This character will abundantly account for 
 his persecuting the Christians, who were so 
 odious to the Jews, and for his vain-glorious 
 acceptance of the impious homage of the 
 people, ver. 23. έττίβ. τ. χεΐρ] A 
 
 pregnant construction. In full, it would be 
 επέβ. τάς χ. Ιπ'ι τινας των άπ. τ. εκκ., 
 του κακώσαι αυτούς. Some expositors 
 (Heinr., Kuin.), not seeing this, have en- 
 deavoured to give to ίπίβ- τ. χ. the unex- 
 ampled meaning, not justified by Deut., 
 see retf.) of ' took in hand' ' attempted.' 
 The E. V. ' stretched forth his hands ' (or, 
 marg. ' began ') is equally inadmissible. 
 It should be, ' H. the K. laid hands on 
 certain of the church, to vex them.' 
 των άττό] See reft., and com p. ch. 
 vi. 9. 2. Ίάκωβον] Of him we know 
 
 nothing besides w'hat is related in the 
 Gospels. He was the son of Zebedee, 
 called (Matt. iv. 21) together with John 
 his brother : was one of the favoured Three 
 admitted to the death-chamber of Jairus's 
 daughter (Mark v. 37), to the mount of 
 transfiguration (Matt, xvii, 1), and to the 
 agony in the garden (Malt. xxvi. 37)• He, 
 together with Jolm his bnifher (named by 
 our Lord 'Boanerges,' ' sons of thunder '), 
 wished to call down tire on the iidio.spitable 
 Samaritans (Lukeix. 54), -and j)rayed that 
 his brother and himself might sit, one on 
 the right hand and the other on tlie left, 
 in the Lord's kingdom (Matt. \x. 20—24).
 
 120 
 
 ΠΡΑΗΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XII. 
 
 h-Mait ν.2Γ.. ^j,X„^.,\,, '' τταραδους• τίσσαοσιν ' τ6τραδ/οις στρατιωτών ΑΒΠΕ 
 
 XVIII. όΑ. Γ '" ν > \ir ϊ (JH 
 
 .^^' ■" </Μ)λί'(σσίίΐ' αυτόν, /SouXo/ifOC Α'^^"» ^ο ττοσχα "' αν- 
 
 αυτον τω λιιω. ^ ο |ΐίν ούν Πέτρος " ίτη()ίΐτο tv 
 
 Γρ'ί,πο'ίη τ>') φυλπΛΓί)• " τΓ.οοςευντ) δί ''ην "^ εκτενής ''■γινομένη ' υττο 
 
 F.acr. ρ SISI. i, ' , , , ν ν Λ ν s ' > ' - fi " ?< 
 
 k-Lukrv.ii. T-jjg ΐκκλησιας πους τυν υεον υπέρ αυτυυ. οτε οε 
 
 3d" xxiuf "iVs 1 Mrtlt.xxvi. 2. 4Kin8SXxi. 22 ni = Luke xxii. Of) imly. η — Ma!(. xxTii.Sfi. 
 
 Provxix'in I) SrcRnm. XV. 3u. 1 Kings xii. lit. 
 
 qLukcxxii. 44. 1 Pet. ir. 8 only t See JooHh iii. 8. Judith it. 9. 
 Epb. T. 12. 
 
 Luk 
 i hire only t 
 
 Toif Terpa- ayuytriv 
 
 s — Luke Ti. 28. Col. i. U. irepi, Luke xxii. 32. 
 
 pLuke i. 10, 2U al. Jer. xxxiii. 20. 
 r Luke ix. 7. xiii. 17. xxiii. 8. 
 Col. i.3 al. 
 
 ζιζονς A. — avTov (1st) oni D ν (not am) : al vss transpose it. — τίσσηοηιν om H.^ 
 ayn-. £if Λ al: ίί;'«γαγίΐΐ' sah : /rarferc syrr : producere syt-mssg. — 5. £ΚΓ£ΐ•ως A' (appy) 
 Β l.S. 40. 81 V e Lucif Cassiod {corrnfrom the adj to the adu as suiting -γιτΌμαη belter). 
 — πολλή ^t πιιθι:(νχη ην (v ίκτινίια πίρι αντον (ττ. ην. om D-) αττο της ίκκλ. ττρ. τ. θ. 
 TTfpt αντ. D (sic) : t.\t A-EGII nrly mss (appy) vss Chr Oec Thl. — ττρ. rov Otov om B. 
 
 for I'Tfo, TTtpc ABD \',i. 2?. 40. 42 al (probablt/ a corrn, see ch viii. 15 : the ttvo are 
 
 indiffereidly used in this comiexion, see Lexs and reff: but τηρι is the more usual) : 
 t.\t EG II &ο Chr al.— 6. rce ψίλλ., with ADH &c Chr al : txt BEG 13 Chr al.— rec προ - 
 
 It was then that He foretold to them their 
 drinking of the cup of surt'ering and being 
 baptized with the baptism which He was 
 baptized with : a prophecy which James 
 was the first to fulfil. — This is the only 
 Apostle of whose death we have any cer- 
 tain record. With regard to ail the rest, 
 tradition varies, more or less, as to the 
 place, or the manner, or the time of their 
 deaths. — Eusebius, H. E. ii. 9, relates, from 
 the Hypotyposes of Clemens, who had re- 
 ceived it t/c τΓίΐρίΐδόσϊως• τών προ αντοΰ, 
 that the accuser of James, struck by Lis 
 confession, became a Christian, and was led 
 away with him to martyrdom, συναπ- 
 ήχΟησαν ovv άμφο), φητϊ, και κατά την 
 ΰδύν ήζίωσ^ν άφίθιιναι (ΐΰτψ υπό τυν 
 Ιακώβου. 6 Ck όλιγο»/ σκ(ψ(ψ£ ι ος, ιϊρήνη 
 σοι, ιίπε, και κοτίφίληηιν αυτόν. και 
 ο'ύτως άμφι'Τίροι όμοΐι ίκαρατομηθησαν. 
 
 μαχαίρα] Probably according to the 
 Roman method of beheading, which became 
 common among the later Jews. It was a 
 punishment accounted extremely disgrace- 
 ful by the Jews : see Lighff. in loc. 
 3.] See the character of Agrippa above. 
 
 •ΤΓρος. συλλ.] A Hebraism : see reff. 
 
 al ήμ.. τ. άζ.] Wieseler (Chronol. 
 der Apost. Zeit. jjp. 215 — 220) regards the 
 whole of the following narrative as having 
 happened on one and the same day and 
 night, %'iz. that of the 14th of Nisan (April 
 1), A.D. 44. He takes το πάσχα in the 
 strict meaning, • the passover' i. e. the eat- 
 ing of the passover on the evening of the 
 14th of Nisan, and thinks that Herod was 
 intending to bring Peter forth on the next 
 morning. He finds support for this in the 
 four quaternions of soldiers, the guard for 
 one night (see below), and maintains that 
 the expression το πάσχα cannot apply to the 
 whole festal period, which would have been 
 την ΐορτήν, or ταύτας τάς ήμίρας. — But 
 
 Bleek (Beitrage zur Evang. Krit.p. 144) calls 
 this view most arbitrary and even unnatural ; 
 and I own, with all respect for Wieseler's 
 general acumen, I am disposed to agree with 
 this criticism. The whole cast of the nar- 
 rative, — the ήσαν αί ημίραι, not i/v ή 
 ι'ΐμ'ίρα. των άζ,., Luke's own expression in 
 his Gospel, xxii. 7. — the intimation of en- 
 during custody in the παραδονς 
 
 φυλάσσίΐν αίιτ., — the delay implied in the 
 βουλόμενος, — in the imperfects ίτηρείτο, — 
 ην -γινομένη (not iyfi'tro), — the specifica- 
 tion of Tij νυκτι εκείνη as presupposing 
 (notwithstanding what Wieseler says to the 
 contrary) more nights preceding, — all this 
 would be unaccountable in the precise his- 
 torical diction of Luke, unless he had in- 
 tended to convey an impression that some 
 days elapsed. But still more decisive is his 
 own definition of πάηχα, Luke xxii. 1, 
 ή Ιορτή των άζυ'μων, ή λ€γομ€'νη ττάσ^α. 
 So that /ifrii TO πάσχα may well ^ μετά την 
 εορτή}' των άζυμων. The argument from 
 the four quaternions of soldiers proves no- 
 thing: the same sixteen (see below) may have 
 had him in permanent charge, that number 
 being appointed as adequate to the duties 
 required. 4. τ€σ•σαρσιν τετραδίοις] 
 
 In military arrangements. Herod seems to 
 have retained the Roman habits, according to 
 which the night was divided into four watches, 
 and each committed to four soldiers {βιίόαπι 
 φυλάκεια ίύο' το if φκλάκιιήν εστίν έκ 
 τεσσάρων άνορίον, Polyb. vi. 33. 7)) to two 
 of whom the prisoner was chained, the 
 other two keeping watch before the doors 
 of the prison, fornjing the βrst and second 
 guards of ver. 10. It is plain that this 
 number being mentioned is no sign that the 
 custody was only for one night. μ€τ. 
 
 TO ττάιτχο] (see above) ' after the days 
 of the feast,' i. e. after the 21st of Nisan. 
 Herod, who (ver. 1, note) observed rigo-
 
 5— 10. nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 121 
 
 ημίλλίν ττροαγηγεα' αυτυν ο Ηρώδης, τιί νυκτΐ εΑτε/ν?) t ch.csvi.so.) 
 
 ^ f -, f ^ * xxv.i?(>. Jos 
 
 " Ί)ν ο Πέτρος κοιμωμίνος ' uiTaL,v δυο στοππωτων δίοε- ah». xvi. η. 
 μίνος " αλυσεσι δυσι, φίιΧακΐς τε προ τί^ς θνοας ^ ετηρουν ]""(°,'hp^- 
 , ι,ι ψι//νΜΛΐ/ι/. icoi ιοου ayyiAoc κυρίου επέστη, /cot "■^ί•""", 
 
 ^ ' . _ ' ' τρίακοσι- 
 
 ^ φ(ος ^ ίλαμφίν εν τω " οικιιματι' ^ ττατά^,ας δε τϊπ' ?"f "«.- 
 
 ' ^ 'j ^ t '^^ ^^^ ' η-ίίμονων. 
 
 "^ ΤΓΛίυραν τοϋ Πέτρου tjyeimv ούτον λέγων "" Ανάστα ν L.lk^'xvi.se. 
 
 ί ' ' '^ ί. ' r ' ■'-'Ιι'λ' » - Mntt. xxiii. 
 
 εν ταγεΓ. και " εξέπεσαν ουτου αι αλυσεις εκ των 35 
 
 - Q τ / r )/ ν 1 ν w=ch.xxi.33. 
 
 χειρών. " είπεν τε ο άγγελος προς αυτόν ' Ζωσαι κ:αί Ephivi.^soai. 
 
 ί''ί ^1 ^'Λ' '' ι>\" \ χ — vcr. ή, 
 
 υποοησαι τα σανοαΛια σου. εποιτϊσεν έε όντως. κ:αί y-Luken.g. 
 λε'γει αύτω ™ Περίβαλοΰ το 'χματιόν σου και ακυΧουθίΐ ^zcoT.U'.e 
 μοι. και ε^εΛσων ηκολσυυει, και ουκ ηοίΐ οτι αλησες a = hereoniyt. 
 
 εστίν το ■γινομίχ'οΐ' ύια του αγγέλου, ίόοκίΐ ύε ^ οοαμα fii"^^ ^^.νΐ 
 ρλε'πεπ'. ' δίελθοντες δε πρωτην ' φυλακην και δευ- b = bereoniy. 
 
 τεραν, ήλθαν εττι την πυλτ/ν την " σι?)ηραν την "■ φίοουσαν 3Ki.igsxix. 
 
 C John xix. 34. XX. 20, 25, 27 only. (Gen. ii.21. Dan. τϋ. 5.) d = Mark iv. 27. Lnkeyiii. 24 
 
 al. Gen. -\ii.4. e ch. ix. 34 leff. f Luke xviii. 8. Rev. i. 1. Dent, xxviii. 20. giVIarkxiii. 
 
 25. ch. xxvii.32. jKuie.s i. 11. Isa. xxviii. 1, 4. h vcr. ti. i Jolin xxi. 18 only. Neh. iv. 18. 
 
 kMarkvi. 9. Eph. vi. 15 only. 2 Chrnn. xxviii 15. 1 Mark vi. 9 only. Isa. xx. 2. m Luke xii. 
 
 27 and O. Esth. ν 1. Ezek. xviii. 7, l(i. η pres., John i 4U reff. ο ch. ii. 43. it. 16 al. ρ ch. vii. 
 
 31 rrfl'. q constr., Luke xix. 1. ch.xiii. 6 al. r=hereon!y. Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 43. rr Rev. ii. 27 reff. 
 
 s = here only. Xen. Cyr. v. 4. 41. 
 
 ajdv (corrn), with DE &c : txt {irpocayay. Β fj? : ιτροςα-^Ην al : aynv 33. 34) AB al. 
 — rec avT. προ., with GH &c vss Th'l Oec : t.xt ABDE all vss Chr. — ο bef ηη. om D 
 lect 12.— αλυσίσυν Ε &c : t.xt AD &c.— ίυσιι^ DE t\c : t.\tA&c. — φνλ.ίίΥ): rt om 133. 
 — Tcpoc τη θνρα A : ττ. την θν(>αν lect 12. — 7. (πίστη τω irtrnw D sah seth syr*. — 
 fπ^λn/Jψf^' τω D : ελαμ-φιν αττ αυτού sjT-marg. — παντι τ. οικ. sj'rr. — for τταταΐ,ας, 
 ννίας Ό Syr ar-erp Lucif. — rec (Εεπεσον {corrn ίο more usual form), with GH &c : t.'st 
 ABDE 1.5. 18 lect 12. — aft χ£ΐρ. ins αυτού D-gr ν Syr arr sah arm Lucif (omg it bef ot ολ.). 
 — 8. Ci BDEH ^^Q V sah Thl' [alterat'wn, as often, to more usual copula, from τι, which 
 is characteristic of the Acts) : t.xt AG most mss Syr seth al Chr Thl- Oec. — ττρ. ηντ. ο 
 ay. G vss. — rec τηοιζωσαι [alteration for more precisio?!, and perhaps, as Mei/er, to 
 agree better with υπονησαι, also a compound), with EG Η &c Chr (text) Thl Oec : txt 
 ABD all sah (add την οσφνν συν) Bas Chr (comm,). — rec οντω: txt ABDE. — (π . . . 
 avT. om 100 : ούτος- lect 12. — 9. rec ηκο\. αντω {supplementary , to corresp to μοι 
 alove), with EGH &c: txt ABD 13. 15. 36. 40. 180 tol arm sλ.—ytvoμ. G 180.— Λα 
 τ. (lyy- cm 4'. 9G. — for Cia, νττο AH all syr-marg Chrj Thl- (con-n, not observing the 
 peculiar force of Cirt here, said of the secondary agent. This is much more probable 
 than the converse. Both exprr are used by Luke .• cffor ^m, reff: for νπο, Luke i.x. 7, 
 xiii. 17, xxiii. 8. But this latter he uses always of our Lord, the prime Agent in the 
 miracle. See also Eph v. 12) : txt BDEG &c vss Chrj Thl' Oec. — tCoKti yap D al tol 
 
 rouslythe Jewish customs, would notexecute todiam copulat.' In the account of the 
 
 a prisoner during the feast : ' Non judicant imprisonment of Herod Agrijjpa himself by 
 
 die festo' (Moed Karon v. 2, Meyer). Tiberius, Jos. Antt. xviii. 0. 7, we read of 
 
 άναγ. αύτ. τ. λαώ] See reff. : ' to bring the σιn'ίiCε|ιfl'oς ηίτψ στρατιώτης. And 
 
 him out and sentence him in sight of we have an edict of Constantius, command- 
 
 the people.' 5.] On the duration ing, for binding prisoners, ' prolixiores ca- 
 
 inijilied by this verse, see above. tenas, si criminis qualitas etiam cafcnarum 
 
 6. €K£i\q)] emphatic: 'that very night,' acerbitatem postulaverit,utetcruciatiodesit, 
 
 viz. which preceded the day of trial. — Tlie et permaneat sub fida custodia.' (Wieseler, 
 
 j)raetice of attaching a pri.^oner to one p. 414.) See note on ch. xxviii. Ifi. 
 
 keeper or more by a cliain is alluded to by Ετήρουν την φυλ.] not, kept the vnlch 
 
 several ancient authors: e. g. Seneca, de (Rapliel. Wolf, al.), — but 'guarded the 
 
 Tranquil!. 10, ' Eadem custodia universos prison.' 7.] οΙκ., 'the chamber.' 
 
 circumdedit, alligatique sunt etiam tjui alii- 9.] «ξίλθών, viz. from tlie οΊκημα. 
 
 gaverunt, nisi tu forte icviorem in sinistra 10.] The first and second watch or guard 
 
 catenam putas :' and Epist. 5 : ' Quemad- cannot mean the two .soldiers to whom ho 
 
 modum eadem catena et militem ct cus- was chained, on account of ίξίλΟώ»/ above :
 
 122 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. ΧΙΤ. 
 
 tch.xi.28ai. Ε('ς ri]v πόΧιν, * ϊ/Γίί; " αυτομάτΐ) ηνυι-γη αυτοις' και ε^ίλ- abde 
 
 β!Ί. ίΓδ*. ":f, αγγίλος- οττ' αι/Γοΰ. ^^ και ο Πέτρος ^ γίΐ'ο^αενος ευ ζαυτψ 
 ωφΗ,,'αύτό- ίΐπίν Νΰΐ'οϊδα ' ΰληΟίος ΟΤΙ "" ίζ,ηπίστίΐλίν κνοιος τον 
 »Ί«ω-ν/•ί'"ΐ• «77^^"•' "ντου κοι ίί,ίΐλατο με ίκ -χειρυς Γΐοωοοι» και 
 
 τ conilr.. hrrc '' -,ι Cn' - \ ~ ~ ' t r^ ι lOe 
 
 ""'y.^'Vi πασηο tiic ττοοςοοκιας του λάου των Ιουόαιων. συν- 
 
 (^ΜΜΐ ϊχνι. ^g^/^^^ ^^ ij\Oiv ' έττί τι)ν οΊκίαν τϊ]ς Manldc της μητ()ος 
 
 ■wM^tl.viS. ,, , - ο• Λ ' Λ/1' •=■ "ί Ι'' ^ 
 
 LiiKrxiv.21. |,tj(,j;i.ou τοι» *" επίκαΛοκμει^οϋ Μάρκου, ου ι/σην i/cavot 
 
 ijj'vv :! i /I / ^ k ' 13 I ' 5•^ 
 
 x-Li.kHi'. συvηOr)o^σμίvoι και 7Γροςίυ)(^ο/(Ε voi. '" κρουσαντος όε 
 
 »'. 1 Kings (,,^7οΰ την ' θίιραν του '" πυλ(.)νος " ττροςηλθε»' " τταιαίσκη 
 
 ^ (ΐ'..\""^ν. '' ύττακοΰσαι, ονόματι PoSij" /cat '' εττιγνοϋσα ημ' φίονην 
 
 An»b i. ή' γ-,,^} Πίτοου ' οπύ της "^αρας ουκ ηνοι^εν τον '" πυλώνα, 
 
 '"«^"xviV's ^ είς?οημοϋσο δε ' απ/ιγγειλεν "^ εστάΐ'ηι τον ΪΙίτρον προ 
 
 only. - III Λ - 1 ζ ' ^■• ^ •) \ •τ q ■»» ί r <>> 
 
 ach.vii.i2 TQO ττυΑίονος. οι οε προς αυτήν ίίπαν iVlatvy. η οε 
 
 bch^Tii.io ^' ^,ισ-χνρΊ^ετο ''" ούτως ε-^ειν. οι οε έλεγον Ο "άγγελος 
 
 ο ch xxiv 7. 
 
 John χ 28, 29 a I. d Luke xxi. 26 only. Gen. xlix. 10. e = ch. xiv. Γ. only. (1 C.>r. iv. 4. Levit. 
 
 v. 1 j IMacc. iv. 21. f = Matt. xii. IW. Luke xxiv. 1 al. g Matl. x. 3 al. fr. Dan. x. 1. 
 
 h rh. xiv. 21. six. IHal. 1 Mace. xiii. 4!i. i I.nke xxiv. 33 (rec). ch. xix. 25only. Dcut.i.41. k ahsol., 
 
 ch. X. 9 reft'. 1 Luke xiii. 2.i. Judith xiv. 14. See Judg. xix. 22 in ch. x. 17 rcfl'. η constr., rh vii. 
 
 31 al. o = Mait.xxvi. ti!<al. Gen. xx. 17. p=Tiereonly. Xen. Symp. i. 11. q 1 Kings xxvi. 17. 
 
 r = Matt.xiii. 44. xviii. 7. 2 Chron. ν ti. s here only f. 2 Mace. v. 2B. t con.sti., here only, 
 
 υ John X. 20. ch. xxvi. 24, 25. 1 Cor. xiv. 23 only. Jcr. xxxvi (xxix.; 2fi. τ Luke xxii. 59 only f. 
 
 w ch. vii. 1 reff. χ = Matt, xviii. 10. 
 
 Syr sah arm : ολλ tSoKn ThP. — 10. ττη. κ. hvT. φι<\. D.— rec ηλΟον, with DE ,\c : txt 
 AB. — την σιδηοαν om 4. — την <ptp. ας τ. ττ. om G Syr: ετγι 13. !)6. 112. — αυτομάτως 
 7;i— rec ηνοιχβη, with EGH &c : txt {ηννγη D) ABD all.— aft t^tAO. {ticfXO. 180) add 
 κατίβησαν τονς tixTa βαβμαΐ'ς και D. — ττροι^ηΧθον (or -αν : -tv 42) D 25. !)5' Thl'. 
 — ατΓΐίλ^ίΐ' A: {ξΐ)λϋ. fJ8 — 11. tv ιαυτω (αυτω Β Birch) -γινομ. ABD 13. 1(13. 180 
 lect 12 V ar-pol al Lucif {alternlinn to avoid ambUjuHy of iv tnvrixt ιιττί i•) : txt EGH &c. 
 — or< αλ. DE it ar-erp a^th Chr Lucif. — ο /cmj). B 180: ο θεός all. — rec ίϊ,ιιΚίτο {corrn) : 
 txt ABDEGll all : ίροι.σατο 40. 98. 99 lectt 12. 13. 14 al.— for ηΐΜϋΙ., aypimra lect 12 
 al. — Km (K τταηης Ε 73• — τυχ) λαυν om A Syr. — 12. σνί'. C( A all Syr sah: rt om 59' : 
 txt B(e sil)EGII iS;c vss Chr al : κιη σνί'. Ό. — £ΐς τ. one. lect 12. — rec om της {as un- 
 necessan/ /), with Ε &c : ins ABD al. — aft συνηθρ., ins αοιΚφοι 32. 42. 57- ('9 Syr ar- 
 erp syr* Chr-ms. — 13. rec for αντον, του πίτρον {explanalory, σνη^ων beyunang an 
 ecclesiastical porlion), with EGH &c Syr al Chr al : txt ABD all ν Syr ar-pol sah copt 
 arm Thl^. — for του πυλ. (om 68), ίξω D (Wetst), and d. — πιχχ/λθί 3 : νττ. om 59. — 
 ρωδη Ε 38 al copt sah : ό^ιαμαυσα ρωθη η τταιίισκη, και ιδονσα τυν πίτρυν, απο της 
 χαράς &C 68. — 01'. ροδ. νπ. D. — 14. for τον πυλ., αντω την βυραΐ' Ε Syr. — και ίίςδρ. 
 δί D', and om τον hei π(τρ. — 15. — rec ειττον (corrn), with EGH &c: txt AB : tXiyov 
 D^ (add αυτή) : D> uncert. — for t\iyov, είπαν Β lect 12 : txt ADEGH mss (nrly) Chr 
 
 but are probably the other two, one at the supposition the unreality. 12. cruv- 
 
 door of the chamber, the other at the outer ιδών] Not, considerans (as Vulg. Bez. 
 
 door of the buikling. Then ' the iron gate Grot.) : nor, ' beiny aware of the place of 
 
 leading into the city' was that outside the meelivy,' with reference to what follows 
 
 prison buiklings, forming the exit from the (Meyer), against which the aorist is decis- 
 
 premises. The situation of tlie prison is un- ive, importing some single act and not a 
 
 certain, but seems to have been in the city. state : but, as reff., referring to what icent 
 
 The additional clause in D (see var. rcadd.) before [οίδα ά^ηΟώς κ.τ.λ.) 'having be- 
 
 is remarkable, and can hardly be other than come aware of it.' 'Ιωάννον] It is 
 
 genuine. 11.] γ. Iv Ιαντώ, as E. V. uncertain whether this John Mark was the 
 
 ' coining to himself : ' having recovered his same as the Evangelist Mark: but they 
 
 self-consciousness. He was before in the have been generally believed to be the eame. 
 
 half consciousness of one who is dreaming For a full account of him, see Prolegomena 
 
 and knows that it is a dream: except that to Mark (vol. i. § 1). His mother Mary 
 
 in his case the dream was t/ie frulh, and his was not sister, but aunt of Barnabas : see Col.
 
 11— ] 9. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 123 
 
 Βτοος 
 
 ΐΕ,ίστησαν 
 
 17 
 
 (ΐνΟΙ- y conftr., Johu 
 
 κατασιισας ce 
 
 ί 
 
 ίστιν αυτόν. ο οε Ιιε 
 
 £οΐ'τες όε εΐοαν αυτόν και 
 αντυις rrj \tipi ' aiyav, " ^ιηyησaτo αυτοις πως ο κύριος 
 
 5\ο>'' ' - h \ ~ ■?/ '» /Λ 15)7 (P.). 
 
 αυτόν et,i]yaytv iK τι^ς φυλακής, είττεί' τε Άπ ayy ίΐΛατε ^■'■'^^ί 
 
 9 -»ί,-ί %• ** abs'il,, Jt 
 
 ιακωβω και τοις αοίΧ^οις ταΰτα. και ' εζίλΟωΐ' εττορευθ») b " 
 1 tvouivric οε 
 
 .05 
 
 Pliilo de 
 ARricillt. p. 
 
 ανακρινας τους 
 
 ecli. ix.27 reff. 
 i ab>ol , vv. !i, 10. 
 23 only. J Kings v. 9. 
 onlv. Sre Juhn xx 
 
 Matt. 
 V. II 
 = Malt. xii. 
 23 al. Gen. 
 xlii. 33. 
 c Luke wiii. 
 
 ' {-"'t dch. xiii. 10. 
 xxi. 4U. 
 J'ici. Antt. 
 Tiii. 11. 2. 
 ace, ch. 
 xix. 33. 
 f = Mark V. Ifial. ρ ch τϋ. 40. xiir. 17. Exod.xx. S. h = ver. 5 al. 
 
 = chi.20al. k Lnke iv 42. vi. 13 al. cb.xvi. 3.τ al Luke only. 1 ch. xix. 
 
 m oh xiv. 28 al6. Act.sonlv. Isa. X. 7. η = Mark vi. 4 al. ο here 
 
 Luke i. 6R• ρ Loke iv. 4J. ) Kings xx. 1. q Luke xxili. H rcfl. 
 
 ταύτα 
 ε/ς ετίοο)' τοττον. 1 ίνομίνης όε ημίρας ην τάραχος 
 
 ιυ'ιη'λ' η» " ' ο'" 'Π' 
 
 oifK oΛιynς ευ τοις στοητιωταις τι αοη ο 11ε 
 εγεί'ετο. Ιτρωοης οε ^ εττί^'/τί^σας αυτοί' και μη εύρων, 
 
 φύλακας εκελευσεν "^ a/ra)^Oiji'o(' κ:α/ 
 
 Exod.xx. 2. 
 
 inly 
 
 r = absol., here only. Matt, xxvii. 3\ 1. 1 Mhco. ii. 9. constr , ch. xxi. 33. 
 
 al. — om Λβ. 5ί) Chr-comm. — add aft ί\(γον, ττρης αντην Τυγοι• D Syr ar-erp. — rec αντον 
 εστ. {cnrrn of order), with DE Orig : t.xt AB. — 16. πίτ. om T>. — ti,avoit. ct και ιίοι^Γίς 
 αντ. Kcn (ξ,. D^. — rec ii^or (corrn), with EGH (ιί.) &c : t.xt AB. — 17. κατασισαντυς Cs 
 nvTov σιγ. A. — ΐΐοι\θίΐ' και ctijy. D Syr syr*. — αυτοις om {as uniiecensary aft αυτοις 
 before) A 13. 33. 69. 100. 105 lect 12 ν arm : t.xt BDE(GH ?) &c : οντο,.ς'ΐΤ! : bef 
 Ciiiy. 4. — avTov ο Kvp. A : ίξ. avrov 13. 73. — αττο Γ. 0. 80. 180. — rec ίΐπί ct (see 
 above, ver 3), with DGH &c vss ff : txt ABE al ν Syr seth sah (add nv-oit). — 18. ονκ 
 ολιγ. om D 70 Lucif : μεγης 15. 18. 36. 180 Syr ar-erp arm sah Cassiod. — 19. ts A 
 seth ar-pol. — αποκτανθηναι D'-gr Syr ar-erp copt (απαγχθ. Petr Alex) : αττοκεφηλι- 
 σΟηναι 67 : add εττι θανατω 23. — rec ti]v και<τ. {insertion to answer to της tovc.), with 
 
 iv. 10, note. 15. αγγ£λ09 Ιστ. αΰτον] 
 
 No other rendering but ' his angel ' will 
 suit the sense : and with a few exceptions 
 (Camero, Basnage, Hammond, and one or 
 two more) all commentators, ancient and 
 modern, have recognized this meaning. 
 Our Lord plainly asserts the doctrine of 
 guardian anyels in Matt, xviii. 10 (see note 
 there) : and from this we further learn in 
 what sense His words were understood by 
 the early church. From His words taken 
 with the context {μη καταφοονίιηητε evos 
 των μικρών τούτων) we infer that each 
 one has his guardian angel : from this pas- 
 sage we find not only that such was be- 
 lieved to be the case, but that it was sup- 
 posed that such angel occasionally appeared 
 in the semblance (if with the voice) of the 
 person himself We do not, it is true, 
 know who the speakers were : nor is the 
 peculiar form in which they viewed the 
 doctrine binding upon us : it may have 
 been erroneous, and savouring of supersti- 
 tion. But of the doctrine itself this may 
 not be .«aid, as the Lord Himself has as- 
 serted it. — For what purj)Ose they sup- 
 posed this angel to have come, does not 
 appear in the narrative. 17. κατο- 
 
 CTtiaas] see reff. His motive was haste .• 
 he tells briefly the particulars of his deli- 
 verance, and, wliile it was yet niirht, liastily 
 departs. Ίακώβω] Λ<ίΐί\α%, the brother 
 
 of the Lord, whom we find presiding over 
 the church at Jerusalem, ch. χ v. 13; xxi. 
 18. Gal. ii. 12. See Gal. i. 19; ii. 9. I 
 believe him to have been one of those 
 
 άίίλί/ιοϊ του κνρίον mentioned Matt, xiii, 
 55. John vii. 5. Acts i. 14. 1 Cor. i 5, of 
 whom I have in the note on the first of 
 these passages maintained, that they were 
 His real maternal brethren, sons of Jo-eph 
 and ^lary : — to have been an Apostle, as 
 Paul and Barnabas, but not of the number 
 of the twelve :— and to have been therefore 
 of course distinct from James the son of 
 Ali)hEeus, enumerated (Matt. x. 3. 11) 
 among the twelve. The reasons for this 
 belief 1 reserve for the Prolegomena to the 
 Episle of James. f is crepov τοττον] 
 
 I see in these words a minute mark of truth 
 in our narrative. Under the circumstances, 
 the place of Peter's retreat would very 
 naturally at the time be kept secret. It 
 probably was unknown to the persom from 
 whom the narrative came, or designedly left 
 indefinite. And so it has remained, the 
 narrative not following Peter's history any 
 longer. ΛVe find him again at Jerusalem 
 in ch. XV. Whether he left it or not on 
 this occasion is uncertain. It is not asserted 
 in ίζιλβών, — which only implies that he 
 left the house. 18. γ€νομ£'νης ήμί'ρας] 
 
 Wieseler argues from this, aiul I think 
 rightly, that the deliverance of Peter must 
 have taken place in the last watch of the 
 night (3-6 a.m. in April), for other- 
 wise his escape would have been perceived 
 before the break of day, viz. at the next 
 change of the watch. τι ... . iytvtro'] 
 
 So Theocr. Id. xiv. 51, άπιστα Γορχ»?, τι 
 γtvolμ^O(t•, 19. κατ. tU Καισ.] 
 
 These words are to be taken together, and
 
 124. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 ΧΙΤ. 
 
 fch.viii. 6 ^ κατίλΟων από της Ίουδα/ας ύς Καισάρπαν ^ ^ιίτριβίν. abde 
 *ΐ!ί!2^'ί^6"4. ^^ τ/ΐ' δί " Ουμομαγ^ων Tvp'iouj και Σι^ωνίοις' '' ομοθυμαΒον 
 
 ch. XV. 35. tv, ... - u \ 1 ■* ^ χ ' ΐ3 \ ' * 
 
 jrr. χΐϋ. gj " ποοίΐσαί' πους αυτυν, και ττΗσαντίς ηλαστον τον 
 (XXXV.) 7. >' ^ - η \ / ι'- '' .^<■ 
 
 b""» 40. ^' ίΤΓί του ■" κυιτωνος του (ύασιλίως ' ΐ}τουΐ'το Είξη^νην, όια 
 
 ίσχ.ΐτ,,ί τυ ^' τοίφίσΟαι αυτών την χω^^πν "" αττο της βασιλικής. 
 
 θυμημα 
 
 Polyb. ϊχ.ΊΟ 
 4. μίχμι τΓ|Γ 
 
 ^^ "τακτ»; CE Jj/uff)» ό Ή^κΟδίϊς "^ έΐ'δυσά^εΐ'ος ΐσΟητα ' βα• 
 υΙοΓΙΐο. σιλικ•ηΐ' /cot "^ καθ'ισας εττί του '' βήματος ' έδί?μΐϊγόρΗ 7Γ|θύς 
 
 v?h'M4r"H' w2Cor. xi. 8. Cal. iv. 1», 20. χ - Mntt. xxviii. 14. Gal. i. 10. 2 Mare. v. 45. 
 
 V ch ii 27 Dan vi 7 7. here only. Exod. viii. 3. a = Matt. vii. Η ||. ch. xvi. 2!l. 3 Kings 
 
 xix 4 li-Matt vi 2Ral. c - Jude 23 al. d John iv. 411, 4il. James ii. 8. Num. xx 17. 
 
 e here only. Job xii. 5. fconstr., Matt. Ti.2.') al. g intr.. Matt, xxiii. 2. 2 Kings vii. 1. h Matt. 
 
 xxvii. I'J rcff. Neh. viil.4. i here only. Prov. xxx. 31. tofjM'ITOpei 6t uUtois, Jos. Antt. ix. 13. 1. 
 
 GH most mss Chr Thl Oec : txt ABDE 13. 20. 40. 59. CD. 80. 105.— ίΐίτ-ριψίν A : 
 add εκίι ν sah arm. — 20. for ^e, y«j) D, rt al. — rec aft δ(, ins ο ηριοΟης {as being the 
 commencemenf of a nrw history , — that of the death of Herod), with Ε (otn o, as do 38. 
 95. 9(). 177') all: oin ABD 13. 33. 34. 40. 133. 142 ν Syr ar-erp copt sah aeth 
 Euthal Lucif: Tt 93. 113.— D reads oi Si ομιιθ. ιξ, αμφοτί^Μον των ■nu\twv {ab invicem 
 civitates d) Traptj^av προς ror βαπιλια {οι St ομ. syr-marg and fS, αμφ. τ. π. syr*). — 
 for τον βαη., avrov Ό,—ητι/σαντο Α. — τας χιορας αυτών D ν Lucif: αυτ. την ττολιν 
 Ε 13. 33. 34 {civitates e). — for αττο, ΐκ D 40.-21. for τακτή, τη ίκτη 21.— ο om Bal. — 
 και om Β al : vestittis sedit ν Lucif: vestitus est seditque am. — 22. bef ο St, ins καταΚ- 
 
 ίκί'ι or tv K. to be supplied with SuTp^iv. 
 Kuin. takes £ΐς Κ. as = έι^ Κ. with Surp., 
 and κατιλθών alone, which is not so 
 natural on account of the position of the 
 words. 20. θυμομαχών] It is im- 
 
 possible that Herod should have been at 
 war with the Tyrians and Sidonians, be- 
 longing as they did to a Roman province, 
 and he himself being in high favour at 
 Rome: — nor is this implied in our text. 
 The quarrel, however it originated, appears 
 to have been carried out on Herod's part by 
 some commercial regulation opposed to their 
 interest, dependent as they were on supplies 
 from his territory, i/v θυμ. is therefore 
 best rendered as "in E. V., 'was highly- 
 displeased.' όμ. τταρήσ.] viz. by a 
 deputation. — Blastus is a Roman name 
 (Wetst. from an inscription), and, from 
 Herod's frequent visits to Rome, it is likely 
 that ho would have Romans as his con- 
 fidential servants. Bl. was his cnbicitla- 
 rius, or prcpfectns cubiculo (Suet. Dom. 
 16) : see ch. viii. 27. είρήνην] not 
 (see above) peace, in its strict sense, but 
 'reconciliation.' Sio τ6 τρ6φ£σθαι] 
 We learn from 1 Kings v. 1 1 that Solomon 
 made presents of wheat and oil to Hiram in 
 return for the cedar and fir-trees for the 
 Lord's house: and from Ezek. xxvii. 17, 
 that Judah and Israel exported wheat, 
 honey, oil, and balm (or resin) to Tyre. In 
 Ezra iii. 7 also, we find Zerubbabel giving 
 meat, drink, and oil to them of Sidon and 
 Tyre, to bring cedar-trees to Joppa. Mr. 
 Humphry quotes frnm Bede, ' Tyrii neces- 
 sarian! habebant vicini regis amicitiam, eo 
 quod eorum regio valde angusta et Galilsese 
 
 Damascique pressa finibus esset.' — An ad- 
 ditional reason for their request at this par- 
 ticular time may have been, the prevalence 
 of famine. 21.] The account in Jose- 
 
 phus is remarkably illustrative of the sacred 
 te.xt : τρίτον Si ΐτος αυτψ βασιλίνοντι 
 τηζ 'όλης 'lovSciag πίπληρωτο, καΐ παρΓρ• 
 ιΐς ττήλιν Καισάρίίαν .... avvfrtXei Ce 
 ίνταϋθα θεωρίας ίίς την Καίηαρης τιμήν, 
 ΰτΓίρ της ΐκίίνου σωτηρίας ίορτήν τίνα 
 ταντην ίπιστάμενος (probably the ' quin- 
 quennalia,' Β. J. i. 21. 8. Wieseler, p. 133). 
 και παρ' αϋτην ηθροιστο των κατά την 
 ϊπαρχίαν iv τίλιι και ττρηβίβηκότων ίίς 
 άξίαν ττ\ί)θος. Stvrtpa it των θεωριών 
 νμίρ^ στο\ήν ίvSυσάμtvoς ΐξ apyvpov 
 πεποιημίνην ττάσαν, ώς θανμάσιον νφήν 
 είναι, τταρηλθιν ίΐς το θ'ιατρον άρχομίνης 
 ημέρας. h'Oa ταΐς ττρώταις των I'jXiaKwu 
 άκτίνων ΐπιβολαΐς 6 ιίργνρος κατανγα- 
 σθίίς- θπνμητίως άττίστιλβί, μαρμαίρων τι 
 φοβίροί' και τοΙς εις αντοι• άτίΐ'ΐζονσι 
 φρικώSες. εΰϋνς Sk ο'ι κόλακες τάς oi'iSk 
 ίκείΐ'ψ ττρυς c'lyaBov ά\\ος άλλοθεν φωΐ'ής 
 άνεβόων θεον προςη-^ορίνοντες, Ευμενής 
 τε είης, ίπιλεγηντες, ει καί μέχρι ννν ώς 
 άνθρωττον Ιφοβίιθημεν, άλλη τονντεϊιθεί' 
 κρείττονα σ( θνητής φιΊσίως όμιιλο-^ονμιν. 
 ουκ έπέπΧηζε τοντοις ό βασιλεύς οΰϋε την 
 κολακείαν άσεβοΤισαΐ' άπετρίύ^ατο. όια- 
 κι'ιψης• S' ουν μετ' 6Xiym> τον βουβώνα της 
 εαντυϋ κεφαλής ύπερκαθεζήμενον t'iStv έπΙ 
 σχοιί'ίου τινός' αγγελαν Si τοΐιτον είιθνς 
 ένόησεν κακών επ'πι, .... και SiaKapSinv 
 εσχιν όSίιvηv. (This owl, Eusebius, Η. Ε. 
 ii. \0, 2}rofessinff to quote Josephus, makes 
 into an angel. Having prefaced his quota- 
 tion, αΰτο'ις -γράμμασιν wSk ττως το ϋαϋμα
 
 20—25. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 125 
 
 22 
 
 ο δε 
 23 1 
 
 όημος 
 
 ίπίφωΐ'ίΐ θεού φωνή και ουΑ: kLnkexxiu. 
 
 y > ν >/ χ 21. cli. xxi. 
 
 "'"= 24 t. 2 Mace. 
 
 αυτούς 
 
 ανθρωτΓου. τταρογρη/χα οε επαΓαςεν αυτόν αγγεΛος 
 
 κνριου ανυ ων ουκ ίοωκεν την οοςαν το» utfL), /cat iLuke 
 
 γεί'ό/,ιενος "^ a/cwArj/co/3owrog '^ εζεψυξεν. ο δε ' λό 
 
 του Οεοΰ "^ ίϊυζανε και " ίπληθυνίτο. 
 
 Σαΰλος υπίιστρίφαν εζ Ιε^ιουσαλτίμ 
 
 oia/coi'ioi', ^^ συμτταραΧαβοντίς [(οάννην τον " ίττικΧη 
 θίντα Maofcoi'. 
 
 ο Lake χνϋ. 18 al. John ix. 24. Josli. τϋ. 19. 
 r rh. vi. 7 reft•. s ch. vii. 17 reff. 
 
 u = Matl.iii. 15. ch. xiv. 26 al. Ps. xix. 4. 
 
 37, 38. Gal. ii. 1 only. Job i. 4. 
 
 ρ here only f. 
 t eK, here only. 
 uv Col. iv. 17. 
 
 X Matt. X. 3 al. fr. Dan. x. 1. 
 
 .Ii4.al9. 
 cli. iii. 7 all. 
 Luke only, 
 exn. Matt. 
 xxi. lii, 20. 
 Num. vi. !>. 
 m= Rev. xi. 6. 
 xix.lfi. Gen. 
 viii. 21. 
 2 Mace. ix. 
 E>. 
 η Luke i. 20. 
 XIX 44. Dent, 
 viii. 20. 
 
 q ch. T. 5, 10 only. Ezek. xxi. 7. 
 Ruth i. C. ύπό. Luke iv. 1. xxiv. S». 
 ch. Ti. 1 1. w ch. XT. 
 
 >γος 
 
 Βα^>)'άρας δε και 
 ΤΓΛηοωσαντις tijv 
 
 λογ£ΓΓος• St αυτού (om d) τοις τνριυις D : reconciliahis est iis autem syr*. — ο δήμος 
 c?£ 177• — φ("νη Βίου GH all vss : φωναι θ. Ό ν Syr Lucif. — 23. αυτ. (πατ. D liiO. — την 
 om DEGH all {alteration to more usual ea?pr) Chr Thl Oec ins AB all. — for δοξ., an'ov 
 33. 34. — D reads και καταβας απο τυυ βήματος -γίνομ. σκωλ. ίτι ζων και οντο}ς 
 (ζίφιιζίΐ•. — 24. for θ., κυρίου Β ν ar-pol. — ηυξανίτο Α : ιυζαΐ'ί D' (-νεί' ED-, •νε BD'). 
 — 25. απιστρ. D'. — for εξ, αττο DE all ν vss Chr (ms) : (ΐς BGH all vss Chr (ms) Oec 
 Thl: εις αντιοχηαν al sail slav-ms {την αντ. al) : alii aliter : txt A al coi)t Chr : aft itn. 
 add (ΐς αντ. Ε all Syr ar-erp sail slav-mod Cassiod {the variations have apparently 
 arisen from a confusion of marginal glosses, εις αντ. may have been an ejplauatory 
 gloss, afterwards substituted for εζ itp. ; then αντ. may have again been corrected to 
 up., leaving the εις standing). — και bef ιωαν. om ABD' 36. 100. 105. 180 ν Syr ar- 
 erp {as unnecessary) : txt D-EGH most mss copt sah syr al Chr Thl Oec. — επικαλού- 
 μενο ν A all Thl". 
 
 διηγείται, he cites thus: .... άνακύφας 
 δε μετ ολίγοι', της ίίΐυτοϋ κίφα\ης ΰπερ- 
 καθεζόμενον ειδεν άγγελοι^, τούτον εϋθνς 
 ίνόηπε κακών είναι α'ίηοΐ' κ.τ.λ. On the 
 impossibility of acquitting the ecclesiastical 
 historian of the charge of wilful fraud, see 
 Heinichen's second Excursus in his edition 
 of Eusebius. It may be a caution to us as 
 to how much we may believe of his quota- 
 tions of authors which do not remain to 
 us.) άθρόον δε αΰτψ της κοιλίας προς- 
 ίφυηεν άλγημα, μετά σφυδρότητος άρζά- 
 μενον. άναθεωρών ουν προς τους φίλους 
 Ό θεϋς υμίν έγω, φησϊν, ι/δη καταητρ'εφειν 
 έπιτύττομαι τον βίον, παραχρήμα της 
 ε'ιμαρμεΐ'ης τας άρτι μαν κατεφευσμ'ενας 
 φωνάς ίλεγχούηης• και 6 κληθείς άΙ>άνατυς 
 
 and the stroke to have been inflicted by 
 His angel. Comp. 2 Kings .\ix. 35. 1 Chron. 
 xxi. 15, 10. But no appearance of an 
 angel is implied : nor was 1 aware tliat such 
 had ever been inferred ; but I see in Vale- 
 sius's note on Euseb. ii. 10, " Quasi vero 
 non utrumque fieri potuerit, ut et bubo 
 supra caput Agrippae, et ex alia parte ange- 
 lus eidom appareret." σκωληκό- 
 
 βρωτος] Another additional particular : 
 and one to be expected from a physician. 
 In several cases of deaths by divine judg- 
 ment we have accounts of this loathsome 
 termination of the disease. So Herodotus, 
 iv. 205, )'/ Φευετίμη .... ζώσα εύλέων 
 εζϊζεσε : which he alleges as an instance 
 that excessive indulgence of revenge, such 
 
 ΰφ' νμώ•ν, ηδη θανών απάγομαι as Pheretima had shewn against the Bar- 
 
 συνεχώς ΰε εφ ημέρας πέντε τψ της 
 γαστρος άλγήματι διεργασθείς τον βίον 
 κατεστρίφεν. Antt. xix. 8. 2. — Tiie cir- 
 cumstance related in our text, of the an- 
 swer to the Sidonian embassy, of which 
 Jose))hus seems not to have been aware, 
 having been one object of Herod on the 
 occasion, shews an accuracy of detail which 
 well accords with the view of the material 
 of this jiart of the Acts having been col- 
 lected at Casarea, where the event haji- 
 pened (see Prolegg. to Acts, § 2. II). 
 23.] The fact may be correctly 
 related by .Iosc])lius (see above) : but our 
 narrative alleg(!S the cause of what hap- 
 pened to have been the displeasure of God, 
 
 cseans, is looked on with anger by the gods. 
 See too the very similar account of the 
 death of Antiochus Epiphanes, 2 Mace. ix. 
 5 — 0. So also Jos. Antt. xvii. 0. 5, de- 
 scribing the disease of which Herod the 
 Great died, mentions σΓ/ψις ακώληκας 
 ίμποιοϋσα. So also Euseb. (viii. I(J) of 
 the death of Galerius. So also Tcrtullian, 
 ad Scapulam, c. 3, " Claudius Jjucius llcr- 
 minianus in Cappadocia, cum indignc fe- 
 rens uxorem suam ad banc sectam trans- 
 iisse, solusijue in prjctorio siio vastatus 
 peste vivus vermibus cbullisset, Nemo 
 sciat, aiebat, nc gaudeant Christiaiii. I'os- 
 tea (iognito errore suo, quod tornicntis 
 quosdam a proposito suo excidere fecisset,
 
 12G 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XIII. 
 
 y ch. x\. 1 reff. 
 zrllips.iif ίκίϊ, 
 
 Arirk viii. I. 
 
 ch xxh. 12. 
 Η 1 Cor. xii. i'8, 
 
 I'i). Eph.iv. 
 
 II. 
 b hrrr only f. 
 
 * 2A1<icc jx. 
 
 21). Tluic.ii. 
 
 fiOfiifill•- 
 
 «■Λ -r.s). Xrn. 
 
 Mem. ii. 3, 4. 
 
 XITI. ^Ήσαν δε tr 'Λνηοχί/ο ^' κατά την 
 ίΚκληπΊαν '^ προφήται και ''διδάσκαλοι, ο τε Βαρνάβας 
 
 ABDE 
 
 Μα- 
 Καΐ ναην 
 
 ν ABCD 
 και „EGH 
 
 και ^υμίωχ• ο καΧουμϋΌς Niyep και Αουκιος ο Κυρηναιος, c 
 Μαναην τε Ή^ώδου του τετράρχου συιτρο^ος 
 Σαΰλος. ^ '^^ XuTovpyouvTWi' δε αυτών τω κυρ/ω 
 
 C— here only. (Heb. x.ll. Rom. iv. 27.) Num.xviii.2al.fr. 
 
 Ch.w. XIII. 1. rec ήσαν (>e τινις (see note), with EGH &c syr Chr al : txt ABD 33. 
 40. OH. ί>ί). 100. 105 lect 12 ν Syr ar-crp sah seth Vig.— for υ rt, iv οις D' ν Vig : add 
 ην και D'.gr ΧΊ^.—σιμιων Β.—ίΤΓΐκα\ονμ. D 180 lect 12. — vitytp A : vηy^p syr-marg. 
 — λονκίίος D (add ο D-), κυρην: λουκκος lect 12.— jjp. και rtrp. D' d. — ααυλου ϋϋ. — 
 
 psene Christianus decessit." 24.] 
 
 Similarly ch. v. 12 ft'. ; vi. 7 ; \x. 31, in the 
 transition from one portion of the hi.story 
 to another. 25.] The journey (ch. 
 
 xi. 30) took place after tiie death, or about 
 the time of the death of, Herod ; see on 
 ver. 1. The purpose of the mission would 
 be very soon accomplished : Saul would 
 naturally not remain longer in Jerusalem 
 than was unavoidable, and would court no 
 publicity : and hence there seems an ad- 
 ditional reason for placing the visit after 
 Herod's death : for, of all the {)ersons whose 
 execution would be pleasing to the Jews, 
 Saul would hold the foremost place. Our 
 verse is probably inserted as a note of pas- 
 sage from the last recorded fact of Barnabas 
 and Saul (xi. 30), to their being found at 
 Antioch (xiii. 1). Ίωόνν.] See above 
 
 on ver. 12. 
 
 Chap. XIII. 1-XIV. 28.] First mis- 
 sionary JOURNEY OF Paul and Barna- 
 bas. Hencpjhrvard ihe /lislory Jo/lows 
 Saul for Paul, as he is now [ver. 9] and 
 from this time denominated), /lis inhiistry, 
 and the events of fiis life, to the exclusion 
 (with the sole exception of the council in 
 ch. XV.) of all the other Apostles. 
 XIII. 1.] The τινίς of the rec. has been 
 interpolated, to make it appear that the 
 persons mentioned were not the only pre- 
 phets and teachers at Antioch. The enu- 
 meration is probably inserted on account of 
 the solemnity of the incident about to be 
 related, that it might be known icho they 
 were, to whom the Holy Spirit intrusted so 
 weighty a commission. That those enu- 
 merated were all then present, is implied 
 by the Tt . . . και ; see ch. i. 13. wpo- 
 
 φήται] See on ch. xi. 27. διδάσκ.] 
 
 Those who had the χό^ηπμα Cilaaxa'^itic, 
 1 Cor. xii. 2fi. See also Eph iv. 11. They 
 were probably less immediately the organs 
 of the Holy Spirit than the ττυοφηται, but 
 under His continual guidance in the gradual 
 and progressive work of teaching the Word 
 (see Neander, PH. u. L. p. 58). Συ- 
 
 μίών ό καλ. Κίγερ] Nothing is known of 
 him. From his appellation of Niger, he 
 
 may have been an African proselyte. 
 Λουκιος] A Lucius, probably the same 
 person, is mentioned Rom. xvi. 21 as a 
 avyytvi)c of Paul. There is no reason to 
 suppose him the same with Αουκης (Lu- 
 canus), — but the contrary; for why should 
 Paul in this case use two different names ? 
 See Col. iv. 14. Philem. 24. 2 Tim. iv. 10. 
 Wetstein. believing them to be the same, 
 quotes Herodotus, iii. 131, π(ΐώΓοι μ\ν 
 ΚροΓωι^ιί^Γία ίί/τροί tXsyorro άνα την 
 Έλλί'ίία firm, dtiinpoi St Κυρηναΐοι, 
 which certainly is curious enough. 
 Μαναήν] The same name with Menahem 
 the king of Israel, 2 Kings xv. 14. A cer- 
 tain Essene, of this name, foretold to 
 Herod the Great, when a boy going to 
 school, that he should be king of the Jews 
 (Jos. Antt. XV. 10. 5). And in conse- 
 quence, when he came to the throne, he 
 honoured Manaen, and ττάιτας άπ' Ικίίΐ'ηυ 
 τους Έσπηιηινς τιμώι> δΐίτϊλ(ΐ. It is then 
 not improbable that this M. may have been 
 a son of that one: but see below. The 
 Herod here meant was Antipas, who with 
 his brother Archelaus (both sons of Herod 
 the Great by Malthace a Samaritan woman, 
 see Matt. xiv. I, note) ■τταρά τινι ιδιώτη 
 τροφάς ύχην ίττΐ 'Ρώμης, Antt. xvii. 1. 3. 
 Both were at this time exiles, Antipas at 
 Lyons, Archelaus at Vienne. στίντρο- 
 
 φθ5] Probably 'co//ac^e«ews' (A'ulg.), 'foster 
 brother;' not, 'brought up irilh,' for, if 
 he had been brought vp wilh Antijias, he 
 would aho hare been with Αί chelaus : see 
 above. — In this case, his mother may have 
 called her infant by the name of the person 
 who had brought the Essenes into favour 
 with Herod, and no relationship with that 
 person need have existed. Σαϊλος] 
 
 mentioned last, jierhaps because the pro- 
 phets are placed first, and he was not one, 
 but a teacher : or it may be, that he him- 
 self furnished the account. From the 
 arrangement of the copula;, it would seem 
 as if Barnabas, Symeon, and Lucius were 
 prophets, — ISIanaen and Saul, teachers. 
 2. λίΐτουργοιίντων] The general word 
 for the priestly service among the Jews, ta
 
 1—5. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ, 
 
 127 
 
 νηστίνοντων ειττεν το Trvevua το ayinv Λφοοίσατε ''<=ι<^• soreff. 
 
 / "^ ' e Kom. 1. 1. 
 
 C7} μοι τον οα^ναραν και 2,αυΛοί' ίΐς το £|θ•γον ο 
 
 g 'Λ ' ' 3 ' Ί ' ^1' 
 
 πξ)υςκίΚΛημαι αυτούς. τότε νηστίνσαντίς και προς- 
 
 ίυ^αμίνοι και ' ίπιθίντίς τάς γ£(ρ«ς• οι/τοις απέλυσαν. 
 
 4 
 
 ετΓίσεντες τας ■γίΐρας αυτοις 
 
 ούτοι //εν ούν ίκπίμφΟίντίς νττο του ayiov πνίυματος 
 κατηΧΟον ίΐς 2fλει)/cεtαJ', ίΚίΐθίν τε " αττεττλευσαν εις 
 υτΓΟοΐ', " K'at "γίνομίνοι εν Έ,αΧαμινι '^ κιατηγγελλον τον 
 του θίου εν ταις συνα-γωνα/ς των Ιουδαίων* 
 
 
 γον 
 
 (L^v. XX. 26) 
 ee ch.xv. 3ti 
 
 reft•. 
 fi;onstr.,ver.39 
 
 
 only, 
 ττόλι 
 
 TTUpU 
 
 
 Tep. 
 
 ■ e.i^ap' 
 ιμφό- 
 t ξυ/ί- 
 [K.Thuc. 
 
 M^tihise, 
 Si)5. 4. 
 
 i 39. 
 . lu. Joel 
 
 ii. 32. fperf. psss. = ch. xvi. 10. xxv. 12. John ix. 22 1 Pt-t. ίτ. 3. 4 Kings v. 2S al.) " absol., x. it reft'. 
 
 i rh. viii. 17 al. Num. xxvii. 18. k = MMtt. xiv. IS.xv. 22 al. 1 Marc. x. 43. (Gen xv. 2 ) 1 cli. xvii. 
 
 10 only. Gen. xxiv. 54, 5ti. m ch. Tiii. 5 rcfl. η ch. xiv. 2(5. xx. l.'i. sxvii. 1 only f. och. iv. 
 
 2al.fr. up ch.xv. 36. 
 
 2. ftTT. (ins Se 133) αυτοις Ε ν Syr sah seth. — for ^η, it 133. — rec τον rt βαρν. : txt 
 MS8 all vss ff.— rec bef σαυλ. ins roj' (corni), with GH &c Thdrt Thl Oec : txt ABCDE 
 all Bas ims) Cyr-jer Chr.—πρoκ^κ\ημ^^ι 177'• — 3. ττροςίυζ. ■πιιντα; D. — αυτ. τας χαρ. 
 38. — απίΧνσαν om D. — απηλθον 47'• 59: add αυτούς Ε ν Syr arr aeth syrf slav-edd 
 Lucif Vig Jer. — 4. rec οντοι (corrn ίο more usual exprn), with E-gr Gil &c vss Chr 
 al: 01 D lect 12 Ath : txt AB (C is uncert) 15. 18. 3(J &c ν d e Syrr al Ambr al.— ouy 
 om 38. 93. 113. 180.— κ.-•π•{/;(ψαι/Γες Β. — rec τον -κν. του ay., with EGH &c vss nrly 
 ff: txt ABC-(Ci uiicert)D2 (r. izr. ay. D') 180 Ath {τωΐ' nytωvsah).—cιπηλθ. A: 
 ηλθ. Atli. — καταβαΐ'τις ίί Dgr. — rec ins την bef σιΧ. and κυττρ., with EGH all Oec al : 
 but om ABC-(C' uncert)D al Chron (alii aliter). — σ(\ίνκιηι> AC-DE. — rt om D 64. 
 137 : κακηθίν 133. 137. 180 Chr : δί Gil all d sah syr-marg Thl Oec— 5. yiv. St D.— 
 tv τη σα\αμ(ΐνι D: ev σαλαμιρη AEG al : Salaminam ν (not am) Lucif Cassiod. — 
 κaτηyyt'Kov G al : -yn\av D 73. 96. 142 Chrj : -ytikor al. — του κυρίου D gr Syr Copt 
 Lucif. — και om 105 slav-ms Lucif. — for υπηρίτηι•, νπηοίτονντα αυτυις D sah ar-pol 
 syr-marg: ίχοντίς μίθ (αυτών και ιω. ίΐς διακονιαν Ε {in ministerio -ν) (the correc- 
 
 whicli now had succeeded that of ττροφηται 
 and δΰάσκαλοι in the Christian church: 
 •ministering' is therefore the only word 
 adequate to render it, as E. V. after the Vulg. 
 ' minis tr ant ibus Domino :^ — more closely 
 to define it is not only impracticable, but is 
 narrowing an expression purposely left ge- 
 neral. Chrys. explains it by κηυυττόΐ'των, 
 — alii aliter: and the Romanist expositors 
 understand the sacrifice of the mass to be 
 meant ; but in early times the word had no 
 such reference (see reflf., and Suicer sub 
 voce). elirev το irv. τ. ίίγ ] viz. by 
 
 one of the prophets present, probably Sy- 
 meon or Lucius : seeabove. The announce- 
 ment being to the church, and several 
 persons being mentioned, we can hardly, 
 with Meyer, suppose it to have been an itmer 
 command merely to some one person, as 
 in the case of Philip, ch. viii. 29. δη 
 
 gives ])recision and force to the command, 
 implying that it was for a special purpose, 
 and to be obeyed at the time : see refi". 
 TO έργον] Certainly, by ver. 4, we 
 may infer that there had been, or was 
 simultaneously witii this command, a divine 
 intimation made to B. and S. of the nature 
 and rliri (tif)!! of this work. 3. νηστ. 
 
 κ. τΓρος€υξ.] not, ' jpjmiio et ]irecibii.s (viz. 
 of ver. 2) jicraclis,' Kuin. : this was a new 
 fasting and special prayer for B. and S. 
 
 Fasting and prayer have ever been con- 
 nected with the solemn times of ordination 
 by the Christian church ; but the ' jejunia 
 quatuor temporum,' or ' ember days at the 
 four seasons,' for the special purpose of 
 ordinations, were probably not introduced 
 till the fourth or even fifth century. See 
 Bingham, iv. 6. 6. Ιττιθ. τ. χ. αύτ.] 
 
 See on ch. vi. 6. 4. ΙκΐΓ€μφ.] Under 
 
 the guidance of the Spirit, who directed 
 their course. Σ€λευκ€ΐαν] A very 
 
 strong fortified city (su])posed im])regnable, 
 Strabo, xvi. p. 751), fifteen miles from 
 Antioch, — on the Orontes, and five miles 
 from its mouth. It was founded and forti- 
 fied by Seleucus Nicator (Strabo, xvi. 7-19), 
 who was buried there (Appian, Syr. 63). It 
 was called Seleiicia ad mare. — and Pieria, 
 or >'/ Iv nttiji^f, from Mount Pierius, on 
 which it was built, to distinguish it from 
 other Syrian towns of the same name. This 
 mountain is called Cory])ha;us, Polyb. v. 59, 
 where is a minute description of the town 
 and its site. Among other ])articulars he 
 mentions, ττρόι^βααιν St μίαι- ίχη κατά την 
 άττο uaXtiTTijQ ττλίυραΐ' κΧΐ/ιακωτιμ' και 
 \Ηροπ(ιίητοΐ', ΐγκ^ηκιτι και σκαλομασι 
 πυκί'οΊς και συνίχί-αι δηι\ημμίνην. This 
 excavated way is to this day consjiicuous 
 amongst the ruins of the city. It. was 
 under the Seleucid kings the capital of a
 
 128 
 
 ΠΡΑΗΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 ΧΙΙΤ. 
 
 q — Lnke i. 2. ttVO 
 
 ch. xxTi. 16. Λ. 
 
 ICor. iv. 1. _,^,, 
 
 Pr..v.xiv.3,'). Tip' 
 
 rrh. xii. lu 
 rt-n. 
 
 8 ch. xi. 5 rcfl". 
 
 tMalt. il. 1 ," , 
 
 only. Daii.ii. ''"' 
 
 u Mail. vii. IS 
 
 V δέ και Ίωάνΐ'ηΐ' '^ υπηρίτην. ^ ^ΐίΧΟόντες δε ολί?ι; ^^^,? 
 
 ΓΤΆ ' " S ^ t / ^^^^ 
 
 I'TjiTOi' "Xf" ΙΙαψου ίυξ)ον ανόρα τίνα μα -yov 
 
 " φίυ^οπηοφητην 'Ιουδαίοι', («> ovofta Βαριησοϋς, ' ος rjv 
 
 ' άνΟυπάτω ^.soyno Πουλώ, αΐ'δρί ^* συνετω. 
 
 oyiio ιΐανΛω, ανόρι 
 υυτος ^ πρυςκαΧεσαμενος Βαρνάραν και Σοΰλοί' ^ επ- 
 
 υΓγ! "Zri-ii χϋί 2. >■ cl' xviii. 12. xix. 38 only. (See iinte.s.) \v Luke x. 21. Ργ!)Τ. xvi. 21. 
 
 I — cii. V. 40 al. j-constr, hereoDly. Matt. xii. 39. 1 Kings xx. 1. 
 
 t'tons have appy been made for perspicuil}/). — 6. ^αλΟοντων dt {διαπ^ριελΟοντων D' ? 
 KOt TTtpitXe. Ci .') αυτών D. — rec om ο\ην (oXjp' and αχηι παφον bclny supposed to be 
 inconsistent), with Gil all ar-])ol Thl Oec : ins ABCDE all vss Lucif al,an(l aft νησ. 137 
 
 Chr. ηνηον Ε, tvoar A, add tKti C— rec om «rtYi (a* superfluotis), with Gil &c Ooc : 
 
 ins ABCDE (aft rtva Ε ν sah al) all syrr arr copt seth Chr Thl Lucif. — υνομαη καλυν- 
 utrov D : οπ'ματι al. — βαριησουαΐ' D' : Barjesuban Lucif: βαοιηπουν AD-GH most 
 mss svr-mar£^ Thl' Oec Cassiod : βαριησου al ν copt arm (alii aliter) : t,\t B(e sil)CE 
 al sail" Chr Thl-. — add ο μίθίρμηνίυίται ελυμης (paratus, i. e. ετοιμας, see on ver 8) 
 Bed-gr demid Lucif. — 7. πανλω om 59. 96. 99: et Paulo Cassiod. — συνκαλ. D. — και 
 district Seleucis, — and, since Pompey'stime, portant ruins. (Winer, RWB.) 
 
 Sifree city. Strabo, xvi. 751. Plin. v. 21. 
 (Winer, RWB.; and Mr. Lewin, Life of 
 St. Paul, from an art. by Col. Chesney in 
 the Geogi•. Soc.'s Transactions.) 
 els Kvirpov] The lofty outline of Cyprus 
 is visible from the mouth of the Orontes 
 (C. & H. p. 145). See below, ver. 7• It 
 was the native country of Barnabas, — and, 
 as John Mark was his kinsman, they were 
 likely to find more acceptance there than in 
 other parts. 5.] Salamis was the 
 
 nearest port to Seleucia on the eastern side 
 of the island. It had a good harbour {Χιμίνα 
 ίχοντα κλπυσΓοί' xn/if()ivoi',Scylax,Peripl. 
 p. 41). It was the residence of a king 
 anciently (Herod, iv. I(i2), and always one 
 of the chief cities of the island. There 
 were very many Jews there, as appears by 
 there being more than one synagogue. 
 Their numbers may have been increased by 
 the farming of the copper-mines by Au- 
 gustus to Herod. On the insurrection of 
 the Jews in the reign of Trajan, Salamis 
 was nearly destroyed, and they were ex- 
 pelled from the island. Its demolition was 
 completed by an earthquake in tiie reign of 
 Constantine, who (or his immediate suc- 
 cessors) rebuilt it and gave it the name 
 of Constantia. The ruins of this latter 
 place are visible near the modern Fama- 
 gosta, the Venetian capital of the island 
 (Winer, RWB. and C. and H.). 
 ύττηρετην] Probably for the administration 
 of baptism : see also 1 Cor. xiv. K!. 
 6] Paphos is on the western shore, with 
 the length of the island between it and 
 Salamis. It is Nea Paphos which is meant, 
 about eight miles north of the Paphos more 
 celebrated in classic poets for the temple 
 and worship of Venus. It was destroyed 
 by an earthquake in Augustus's reign, but 
 rebuilt by liim, Dio Cass. liv. 2.3. It is 
 now called Batfa, and contains some im- 
 
 μάγον, κ.τ.λ.] On the prevalence of such 
 persons at this time, see ch. viii. '.), note. 
 The Roman aristocracy were peculiarly 
 under the influence of astrologers and ma- 
 gicians, some of whom were Jews. We 
 read of such in connexion with Mai-ius, 
 Pompey, Crassus, Ceesar, — and later with 
 Tiberius : and the complaints of Horace 
 and Juvenal shew how completely, and for 
 how long a time, Rome was inundated with 
 Oriental impostors of every description. 
 See Hor. Sat. i. 2. 1. Juv. Sat. iii. 13-10 ; 
 vi. 542— 54G; x. 93, and C. and H. pp. 
 177 flf- Βαριησοΰς] He had given 
 
 himself the Arabic title of Elymas, ' t/ie 
 wise man ' (from the same root as the 
 Turkish 'Ulemah'), interpreted ό μάγος 
 in our text. 7. τω άνθυ-ιτάτω] The 
 
 Greek term for the Latin '•proconsul,' the 
 title of the governor of those provinces 
 which were (semblably) left by the empe- 
 rors to the government of the senate and 
 people. The proconsul was appointed by 
 lot, as in the times of the republic : carried 
 with him the lictors and fasces as a consul : 
 but had no military power, and held office 
 only for a year (Dio Cass. liii. 13). This 
 last restriction was soon relaxed under the 
 emperors, and they were retained five or 
 even more years. The imperial provinces, 
 on the other hand, were governed by a 
 military officer, a Propraetor {άΐ'τιπτράτη- 
 γος) or Legatus {πί)(σβ(ντη(.:) of the Em- 
 peror, who was girded with the sword, and 
 not revocable unless by the pleasure of 
 the Emperor. The minor districts of the 
 imperial provinces were governed by Pro- 
 curators {ίττίταοποι). (C. and H. : Dio 
 Cassius, liii. 13. 15: Merivale, Hist, of the 
 Romans under the Empire, ch. xxxii.) The 
 title ήγιμώι•, used in tlie N. T. of the pro- 
 curator of Judtea, of the legatus of Syria, 
 and of the emperor himself, is a general
 
 6—10. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 129 
 
 ε^ήτησεν ακονσαι τον λόγον του θίοϋ' ^ ανθιοτατο 0£ ^ί^ίίίη "Ρη" 
 αυτυις ΚΧυμης ο ' /ιχάγος ["όντως γαρ μεθερμ^ϊί'ίυίΓοι bMau.'i.sl*'' 
 το όνομα αυτοϋ), '^ tvTtov ^^ ^ιαστρεφαι τον ^ αν^υττατοι/ c=^Lukeji, 
 αττυ της ^πίστεως. Έ.αυΧος οε ο και Παύλος, " ττλη- ciLakeix.4i. 
 
 Θ\ r 'Ι h ' ' ' ' '^ 10 "^ "^ ΓΛ ""'"'■ ^■ 
 
 έίς ττνευ^ατος αγίου, ατενισας εις αυτόν ειπεν \1 pf^^.J/^'*• 
 
 22. Lake xviii.8 al. 
 
 g Lake i. 15 h1. 
 
 b ch. X. 4reS'. 
 
 ίζητησίν D. — τον κνριον C9. 105. — 8. for ίλνμ., ίτοιμας Ό\ eioemas d (see above on 
 ver G).— for μάγος, μέγας D. — add aft ττιστίως, — επηδη ηδιστα ηκονεν αντων D* d syr* : 
 on ηθ(ω€ αντων ηκον(ν Ε Bed-gr. — for ο κ. τταυΧ., και βαρναβα<; lect 1"2. — 9. rec και artv. 
 {supplementary insertion), with DEH &c vss Thl Oec : txt ABCG 13. 33. 34. 36. 40. 105. 
 180 V al Chr Lucif al (ar. f. av. om copt) : πληοθίντίς and ατίνισαντις and ίίπον (see 
 
 term for any governor. But we never find 
 the more definite title of ανθύπατος as- 
 signed in tlie N. T. to a legatus. — Cyprus, 
 as Dio Cassias informs us, liii. 12, was ori- 
 ginally an imperial province, and conse- 
 sequently was governed by a proprietor or 
 legatus: (so also Strabo, xiv. 685, γίγονι 
 
 στοατηγική ίπαρχία καθ' αντήν 
 
 iyivtTo ίτταρχία ή ιήσος, καθάτΓ(ρ και 
 νυν ίστι, στρατΐ]γικ>ι) : but immediately 
 after he relates that Augustus νστίρυν την 
 Κνττρον κ. τήν Ταλατιην την ττίρι Ναρ- 
 βωνα τω δήμω αττΐΖωκΐν, αυτός ck την 
 Δαλματιαν άντ(\αβ(. And in liv. 4, re- 
 peating the same, he adds, και όντως ανθ- 
 ύπατοι και ίς ΐκί'ινα τά ϊθνη πϊμπισθαι 
 ηρΚαντη. The title of Proconsul is found 
 on Cyprian coins, both in Greek and Latin. 
 (See C. and H. p. 156, who give an in- 
 scription [Boeckh. No. 2632] of the reign 
 of Claudius, a.d. 52, mentioning the ανθ- 
 ύπατοι, a former and a present one, Julius 
 Cordus and L. Annius Bassus.) — Nothing 
 more is known of this Sergius Paulus. 
 Another person of the same name is men- 
 tioned by Galen, more than a century after 
 this, as a great proficient in philosophy. 
 He was of consular rank, and is probably 
 the Sergius Paulus who was consul with 
 L. Venuleius Apronianus, a.d. 168, in the 
 reign of M. Aurelius. Another S. P. was 
 one of the consules suffecti in a.d. ί)4 : but 
 this could hardly have been the same. 
 
 8. *F\i3(i,as] See above on ver. 6. 
 διαστρεψαι .... άττό] A pregnant con- 
 struction, as άπίστητιν οπίσω, ch. v. 37• 
 9. ό και Παΰλος] This notice 
 marks the transition from the former part 
 of his history, where he is uniformly called 
 Saul, to the latter and larger portion, where 
 he is without exception known as Paul. I 
 do not regard it as indicative of any change 
 of name at the time of this incident, or 
 from that time : the evidence which I de- 
 duce from it is of a different kind, and not 
 without interest to enquirers irito the 
 character and authorship of our history. 
 Hitherto, our Evangelist has been describ- 
 
 VoL. II. 
 
 ing events, the truth of which he had ascer- 
 tained by research and from the narratives 
 of others. But henceforward there is reason 
 to think that the joint memoirs of himself 
 and the great Apostle furnish the material 
 of the book. In those memoirs the Apostle 
 is universally known by the name Paul, 
 which superseded the other. If this was 
 the first incident at which Luke was present, 
 or the first memoir derived from Paul him- 
 self, or, which is plain, however doubtful 
 may be the other alternatives, the com- 
 mencement of that part of the history which 
 is to narrate the teaching and travels of the 
 Apostle Paul, — it would be natural that a 
 note should be made, identifying the two 
 names as belonging to the same person. — 
 The και must not be understood as having 
 any reference to Sergius Paulus, ' who also 
 (as well as Sergius) was called Paul.' Galea 
 (see above) uses the same e.xpression in 
 speaking of his Sergius Paulus : Sf'pymc Tt, 
 6 καΐ Πηΰλος . . . . , and then, a few Unes 
 down, calls him ό Ποΰλος. It signifies 
 that Paulus was a second name borne by 
 Saul, in conformity with a Jewish practice 
 as old as the captivity (or even as Joseph, 
 see Gen. xli. 45), of adopting a Gentile 
 name. Mr. Howson traces it through the 
 Persian period (see Dan. i. 7- Esth. ii. 7), 
 the Greek (1 Mace. xii. 16 ; xvi. 11.2 Mace, 
 iv. 29), and the Roman (Acts i. 23 ; xiii. 1 ; 
 xviii. 8, &c.), and the middle ages, down to 
 modern times. Jerome has conjectured 
 that the name was adopted by Saul in me- 
 mory of this event : ' Diligenter attende, 
 quod hie prinium Pauli nomen inceperit. 
 Ut enim Scipio, subjecta Africa, AtVicani 
 sibi nomen assumpsit, et ]SIetellus, Creta 
 insula subjugata, insigne Cretici suse familiae 
 reportavit ; — et imperatores nunc usque Ro- 
 mani ex subjectis gentibus Adiabenici, Par- 
 thici, Sarmatici nuncupantur : ita et Saulus 
 ad prajdicationem gentium missus, a prinio 
 ecclesiie spolio Proconsule Sergio Paulo 
 victorise suie tropica retulit, ercxitque vex- 
 illum ut Paulus diceretur e Sauh).' (In 
 Epist. ad Philem.) It is strange that any 
 Κ
 
 130 
 
 πράττεις ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 ΧΙΙΤ. 
 
 kAUit. χχνί.4. IV 
 
 πάσης 
 
 "δι 
 
 poet 
 
 inlyt. 
 R. p. 
 
 ' ττλί/^ί/ς τταΐ'τος δόλου 
 ■ διάβολου, " ίγΟ, 
 ' δ(αστ{ίί'(/)ωΐ' τας• "^ οδούς• κυρίου τας• "^ ίυΟίίας 
 ιδού ' -yiip κυρίου " επί σε, και eatj τυ(/)λος 
 ανρι " καιρού 
 
 τον 
 
 ίπ 
 
 77λΐ01' 
 
 m sec Juhii \ii 
 
 44. E|>h. ii 
 
 2 al. 
 D w. gen. of 
 
 tiling, here 
 
 only. Koii-• 
 
 ^I'ociuc ολ»|Γ τΓΐϊ ύι.ίρωπικ|ί, Dcmosth. κατ. Στίψα. 7!Ι. ο = Matt. ν. ( 
 
 ch. τ.42»1. I.sa. xxxviii. 20. <( = Kom. si. 3:5. Hi-b Hi. 10. Rev. XT. 3 
 
 21 red'. s ver. 40 reff. Exod. xiii. 0. t cli. xi. 21 reft'. _u ellip 
 
 Rom. i. 18. ii. 2. 9. 2 KiiiRs i. 1β- „ τ Eccl. xi. 7. const!.. Dent, ix 
 
 paciovpyiaCf 
 
 1 
 
 δέ 
 
 αυτοί' αχΛυς• και 
 
 λυί 
 
 τταρα^ρημα 
 
 ι < b ' 
 
 σκότος, και περιαγ 
 
 υιε 
 
 παυσι^ 
 
 11 ^ - 
 και νυν 
 
 μη ρλε'ττων 
 
 ^ ίΤΓίττεσίν 
 
 ωΐ' i^ijrfi 
 
 ABCD 
 EG Η 
 
 2Macc. xiT. 10.) χ ch. xii. 23 reff. 
 
 ■ _ here only, σκότον itiopKwi, Eur. Phcen. 37" 
 
 I. Ps. cxi. U. ρ con.str.| 
 
 P.s. xvii. 21. Γ ch viii. 
 
 Matt, xxvii. 25. ch. xviii. (>. 
 
 w Lulce IT. 13. (Rom. i. 
 
 y ch. Tiii. Ifi. xix. 17. ζ here only f. Horn. U. xx. 321. 
 
 b absol., here only. w. ace. Matt. iv. 23 refl". 
 
 above) lect 12. — 10. πάσης (1st) om D> d' arm Liicif Vig Orig-int. — υιός D' ? — ττανη 
 13. — τον Kfipioi) Β. — Γιΐς ούσας ίνθαας D'. — 11. η χαρ. D'. — rec του κνρ. {corrn), with 
 mss Occ: t.xt ABCDEGH all Chr Thdrt Thl. -ίο^ς καιρυν D.— for if, re C ν copt Syr 
 seth Lucif Jer {και (νθαος for π. St D) {c07-rtis, the copulative conj seeming more appro- 
 priate) : txt AB(e sil) EGH mss (appy) sab syr al Cbr Thl Oec. — tniatv A (ίπηισβΐ') 
 BD 95 Thl' {corrn to more simple expr than tTrtirtatv ιπ) : t.xt CEGH most mss Chr 
 
 one could be found capable of so utterly 
 mistaking the character of St. Paul, or of 
 producing so unfortunate an analogy to 
 justify the mistake. It is yet stranger that 
 Augustine should, in his Confessions, adopt 
 the same view : ' Ipse minimus Apostolorum 
 tuorum .... ex priore Saulo Paulus vocari 
 amavit, ob tam magnje insigne victorias.' 
 (Elsewhere Augustine gives another, but 
 not much better reason : ' Paulus Apostolus, 
 cum Saulus prius vocaretur, non ob aliud, 
 quantum mihi videtur, hoc nomen elegit, 
 nisi ut se ostenderet parvum, tanquam mi- 
 nimum Apostolorum.' De Spir. et Lit. c. 7•) 
 So also Olshausen. A more probable way 
 of accounting for the additional name is 
 pointed out by ob.'ierving that such names 
 were often alliterative of or allusive to the 
 original Jewish name : — as Grotius in his 
 note : ' Saulns qui et Paulus : id est, qui, 
 ex quo cum Romanis conversari coepit, hoc 
 nomine, a suo non abludente, coepit a Ro- 
 manis appellari. Sic qui Jesus Judaeis, 
 Graecis Jason (or Justus, Col. iv. 11): 
 Hillel, Pollio .• Onias, Menelaus (Jos. Antt. 
 xii. 5. 1 ) : Jakin, Alcimus. Apud Roma- 
 nos, Silas, SHva7ius,\xt notavit Hieronymus : 
 Pasides, Pansa, ut Suetonius in Crassitio : 
 Diodes, Diocletianus : Biglinitza, soror 
 Justiniani, Romane Vigilantia.' 
 άτενίσας els αυτόν] It seems probable that 
 Paul never entirely recovered his sight as 
 before, after the δό^α τοϋ φωτός ticdvov. 
 We have several apparent allusions to weak- 
 ness in his sight, or to something which 
 rendered his bodily presence contemptible. 
 In ch. xxiii. 1, the same expression, orevi- 
 σα% rtfj rruvicpiii), occurs, and may have 
 some bearing (see note there) on his not 
 recognizing the high-priest. See also Gal. 
 iv. 13. 15 ; vi. 11, and 2 Cor. xii. 7. 9, and 
 notes. The traditional notices of his per- 
 
 sonal appearance (see C. and H. p. ICO, 
 note) represent him as having contracted 
 and overhanging eyebrows. — Whatever the 
 word may imply, it appears like the graphic 
 description of an eye-witness, who was 7iot 
 Paul himself. So also ττεριαγων ίΖ>ιτη 
 χίΐραγωγονς, below. 10. vie διαβ.] 
 
 Meyer supposes an indignant allusion to 
 the name Bar-jesus. This is possible, 
 though hardly probable (see below), διαβ., 
 as a proper name, has no article. 
 Ίτάσ. δικ., ' of all that is right.' 
 διαστρ. κ. Γ. λ.] the υϋ Travrry evidently 
 makes this apply, not to Elymas's conduct 
 on this occasion merely, but to his whole 
 life of imposture and perversion of others. 
 The especial sin was, that of laying hold of 
 the nascent enquiry after God in the minds 
 of men, and wresting it to a wrong direction. 
 κυρίου, here and ver. 11, is Jehovah. 
 If, as some suppose, the reading of the name 
 Bar-jesus is Bar-jehu (rendered by the 
 Syriac Bar-jehovah), the repetition may be 
 allusive : as in the other case might the 
 ίχβρί πα'σ. δικαίοσίιΐ'ης to the name Jesus. 
 But Meyer supposes the various readings 
 in the forms of the name (Barjehu, Bar- 
 suma, Barjesuban) to have arisen from a 
 desire to reverence the Name Jesus. 
 11. άχρι καιρού] The punishment was 
 only temporary, being accompanied with a 
 gracious purpose to the man himself, to 
 awaken repentance in him. The sense 
 given to άχηι κ. by Tittmann and Meyer 
 here and at Luke iv. 13, of (ως rfXoi'c, is 
 one of which it seems to me incajiable. 
 άχλυς κ. σκ(5το5] In the same pre- 
 cise and gradual manner is the healing of 
 the lame man, ch. iii. 8, described : ίστη 
 (first), fc. πιρηττάτα. So here, first a dim- 
 ness came on liim, — then total darkness. 
 And we may conceive this to have been
 
 11—15. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 181 
 
 *^ νΕίραγωγους. τότε ίδών υ ανθυττατος τυ 7^7"^"^^ '^ see'^cY^^x^s 
 
 " ΐπίστίυσεν ' ίκπΧησσόμίνος εττί τρ οιοαχτ) του κυρίου, die?.'/. 
 
 iq„», Λ, Λ,ϊν - π', Ιι' ^Π-Λ e absol., ch. iv. 
 
 ^^^ *= AvayutvTic hi αττο της• Ιΐαώου οι περί ΙΙαυΛοί' ,4»' f':. „„ 
 
 Λ. ^ '^ Γ Ι Ι Mrttt. VII. 28 
 
 ηΧθον (Ίς Περγηΐ' της Παμφυλίας' Ιωάννης δε ' αττο- Z^-^tk^'. 
 ■γωρησας aiT αυτών υττάστρίψεν ίΐς ΙεροσυΑυμα. αυτοί e = Luke rm. 
 δε ' δΐίλθόντες αττο της Tlεpyης "" ττορεγενοντο "' εις 'J,,»'^"^- ϊ'"•'» 
 
 » Λ ' " ΤΤ ^' ^ ' \ η ' ' ^ 2 Mace. ν. θ. 
 
 Αΐ'τιονειαν της ΙΙισιοιας, και ειςεΛί/οντες εις την συν- h John χϊ. ι» 
 αγωγην τί) " ήμερα των " σαββάτων " εκάθισαν. ^^ Μετά "^^ϊ,^βΙχ.Μ 
 
 onlyt. 2Macc.iv.33. k ch. νϋί.25 reff. 1 absoI.,ch. viii. 4 reff. m John viii.2. ch. ix.a6only. 
 
 Exod. xvi. 35. η Lnke iv. 16. ch. xvi. 13 only. Exod. xx.8. ο intr., Malt, xxiii. 2. 2 Kings vii. 1. 
 
 Thl^ Oec. — £7Γ avT. otn B. — 12. ιδων Se D. — bef επιστ. ins iOni^aatv και DE it seth 
 Lucif: £κ•πλ. επιστ. A: aft ίπιστ. add τω θιω D (rw κυρ. omitting the rest, seth). — 
 ικττληττομ.. Β. — θεού (for κυρ.) C Vig : του χριστού 63: των αποστολών 4. — 13. rec 
 τον π. with GH &c Thl Oec: txt ABCDE 13. 69. 103. 105. 180 Dion-alex Chr.— 
 αναχωρ. Ε 180: αποχωρισθίΐς 18. — ιερονσαλημ 42. 57• — 14. for αυτοί d(, παυλος ίε 
 και βαμναβας Ε. — εγενοντο Α. — for της π., την πισιδιαν ABC (appy a corrn) : txt 
 DEGH mss (appy) and vss if. — ελθοντες BC copt. — συν. των ιουδαίων 180. — 15. aft ει ins 
 
 dissension between Paul and Barnabas, ch. 
 
 evinced by his gestures and manner under 
 the infliction. 12. eirt τη 8ιδ. τ. 
 
 κυρ.] Hesitating as he had been before 
 between the teaching of the sorcerer and 
 that of the Apostle, he is amazed at the 
 divine power accompanying the latter, and 
 gives himself up to it. It is not said that 
 he was baptized .• but the supposition is not 
 thereby excluded : see ver. 48, — ch. xvii. 
 12, 34,— xviii. 8, first part. 13. ol 
 
 Trepl Π.] Is there not a trace of the nar- 
 rator being among them, in this expres- 
 sion .' — Henceforward Paul is the principal 
 person, and Barnabas is thrown into the 
 back-ground. Περγην τ. Παμφ.] 
 
 Perga lies on the Cestrus, which flows into 
 the bay of Attaleia. It is sixty stadia from 
 the mouth {tW' 6 Κέστρης ποταμός, ov 
 άναπλενπαντι στα^ίονς έΚί}Κΐ>ντα Ώίργη 
 πόΧις, Strabo, xiv. p. 667), " between and 
 upon the sides of two hills, with an exten- 
 sive valley in front, watered by the river 
 Cestrus, and backed by the mountains of 
 the Taurus." (C. and H. p. 173, from Sir 
 C. Fellows's Asia Minor.) The remains 
 are almost entirely Greek, with few traces 
 of later inhabitants (ib.). — The inhabitants 
 of Pamphylia were nearly allied in character 
 to those of Cilicia (ot Ώάμφυλοι, ττολϋ του 
 Κιλικίου φύλυυ μετίχοντες, Strabo, χϋ. 
 § 7) : and it may have been Paul's design, 
 having already preached in his own pro- 
 vince, to extend the Gospel of Christ to this 
 neighbouring peo])lc. — John probably took 
 the opportunity of some ship sailing from 
 Perga. His reason for returning do(!S not 
 ap|)car, Ijut may be presumed from ch. 
 XV. 38 to liave boon, unsteadiness of cha- 
 racter, and unwillingness to face tlie dangers 
 abounding in this rough district (see below). 
 He afterwards, having been the subject of 
 
 Κ 2 
 
 XV. 37 — 40, accompanied the latter again to 
 Cyprus : and we find him at a much later 
 period spoken of by Paul, together with 
 Aristarchus and Jesus called Justus, as 
 having been a comfort to him (Col. iv. 10, 
 11): and again in 2 Tim. iv. 11, as pro- 
 fitable to him for the ministry. 14. 
 δΐίλθόντίς] It is not improbable that 
 during this journey Paul may have en- 
 countered some of the ' perils by robbers ' 
 of which he speaks, 2 Cor. xi. 26. The 
 tribes inhabiting the mountains which sepa- 
 rate the table-land of Asia Minor from the 
 coast, were notorious for their lawless and 
 marauding habits. Strabo says of Isauria, 
 ληστών (ίπασαι κατοικίαι (xii. 6), and of 
 the Pisidians, καθάπιρ ol Κιλικις, λγστρι- 
 κως ίΊσκηνται, xii. 7• He gives a similar 
 character of the Pamphylians. Άν- 
 τι<5χ€ΐαν τ. ΓΙ.] or προς Πισιδία, Strabo, 
 xii. 8, was founded originally (Strab. ib.) by 
 the Magnetes on the Meander, and subse- 
 quently by Seleucus Nicator, and became, 
 under Augustus, a Roman colony {έχουσα 
 έποικίαν 'Ρωμαίων, Strabo, ib. : — ' Pisida- 
 rum colonia Csesarea, eadem Antiocheia.' 
 Plin. v. 24. — ' In Pisidia juris Italici est co- 
 lonia Antiochensium,' Paulus, Digest, i. 15). 
 Its position is described by Strabo as being 
 on a hill, and was unknown or wrongly 
 placed till Mr. ArundoU found its ruins at 
 a place now called Jalobateh, answering to 
 Strabo's description : where since an in- 
 s('ription has been found with the letters 
 Αντιοοιιελε Caesare (C. and il.). 
 15.] The divisions of the law and prophets 
 at present in use among tlio Jews were pro- 
 bably not yot arranged. B<;fore the time 
 of Antiochus Epiphanos, the Law only was 
 read in the synagogues: but, this having
 
 132 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 ΧΙΙΤ. 
 
 ρ2ΓοΓ. ΐϋ.ΐ4. δέ την ^ ανά-γνωσιν του νόμου και των ττροψητών '' αττ- 
 
 1 Tim. if. 13- «ίι / η^ '^ΜΛ' 
 
 oniy.^ Neh. £(jT£(Anv ot upYiavvaywyoi ' προς αυτούς Λίγοντίς 
 ''m''M«k'iii.''Ai'8()£c οδίλ(/)οί, a ίση»' ' λόγος ' ev υμίν ' τταρακλτ/σίως 
 λίΐύί', λίΊ/ετί. ^*^ " αΐ'αστας δε Παΰλ 
 
 ABCD 
 EGH 
 
 31 »ι 
 r Mark v. 22 
 
 al.t 
 iUcb. xiii. 22 
 
 iinly. 1 AIhcc. 
 
 X. -Ji. 
 t idiom., 2 Cor. 
 
 xi. 111. 1 C'jr. 
 
 Tiii 7 Hi. 
 α — Mark xlv. 
 
 ri7. cli. Ti.U. 
 τ cli. xii. 17 
 
 rcir. 
 w — ch. X.2 
 
 rcfl'. 
 X John vi. 70 
 
 Tfff. Nth. ix. 
 
 7. Deul. 
 
 iv.37 
 
 προς τυν 
 
 ^ κατασασας 
 
 " φοβυυμίνυι 
 
 τουτυυ " £ 
 
 ^ υ'φωσίν ίν ry 
 
 '^ βρα-^ιονος 
 
 ως 
 
 •νετε. '" αΐ'αστας όε ΠαυΛος και 
 
 ττϊ "Yf'P' ειττεν ' Ανδρες Ισ^αι^λιται και οι 
 
 τον θεόν, ακούσατε. ' ο θεός τοί» λαοΰ 
 
 τους πατέρας ημών, και τον λαον 
 
 οικία εν yv Αι-γυπτω, και 
 
 Ες αυτής' '" και 
 
 παξ)ί 
 
 ΰφηΧου 
 
 μίτα 
 ίί;ΐ7γαγεν αυτούς ες αυτής' 
 τισσίρακονταίτη "^ρονον ίτροψοψορησίν αυτούς εν 
 
 y rh. νϋ. 19 al. ζ = I.sA. i. 2. Luke i. Γι2. 2 Cor. xi. 7. Gen. xlviii. li). 1 Chron. 
 
 _ Sir. xliv. 21. 1.22. a 1 Pet. i. 17 only. Ezr. viii. 35. b = ch. v. 2ii reft. c Exod. vi. 
 
 1, (i ai. (I.ukei. SI.) d ch. xii. 17 reft. e ch. vii. 23 only. f here only. Deut. i. 31 (alex., 
 
 W;icar. Horn.: τροπ. vat. Orig. in Caten.) 2 Mace. Tii. 27. 
 
 τις ABCD' all ν Syr copt, Cassiod {snpplemeniary) : txt D'EGH most mss vss Chr Thl. — 
 n> vfuv λόγος (alieralirm of order to conned λόγος tvilh παρακλ.) ABC(H omg £i/, as 
 in al) all vss : txt D(Xo)'. σο0ι«ς)Ε6 most mss Chr Thl Oec : sermo et intellectus in 
 vnbin exhortationis cl. — προς τον λαον is joined to Atytre in 19 al Syr ar-erp sah a;th. — 
 16. ο ττηνλος D. — 17. rec aft τοντον, ins ισραί^λ (jnarginal gloss on του λάου τούτου), 
 with ABCD (του for τούτου Β: om 40 ν ar-erp seth) &c ν copt sah (om λάου tout.) 
 al : om EGII all syrr ar-pol slav Chr Thl Oec Lucif. — tv τη -γη D'. — ηιγυπτοι; 
 AB 1.3. 133. 137 vss (appy) : txt CDEGH most mss Chr Thl Oec— 18. και om 
 Β sah (Scholz). — ως om DE ν Syr arr sah seth : £ως• lect 12 slav. — rec (τροποφορησ(ν 
 [alteration to what seemed a more appropriate word; see notes), with B(e sil) 
 C^DGH most mss ν (mores eorum sustinuit) syr-marg-gr Constt Orig Chr Thl' 
 (ίτραψοπορ. Thl') Oec : txt ACE 24^. G8. 78-raarg 93. 100. 105. 142 al Syr arr copt 
 
 been forbidden by him, the Prophets were 
 substituted : — and, when the Maccabees 
 restored the reading of the Law, that of the 
 prophets continued as well. άττ- 
 
 £στίΐλαν] Then they were not sitting in the 
 ■7τρωτυκηθί^(>ίαι, Matt, xxiii. G, but some- 
 wliere among the congregation. The mes- 
 sage was probably sent to them as having 
 ])reviously to this taught in the city, and 
 thus being known to have come for that 
 })urpose. See, as illustrating our narrative, 
 Luke iv. 17 — 20, and notes. 16. 
 
 Karaaeiaas τ. χίΐρί] As was his practice ; 
 so ίκτ(ίνας την \iipa, ch. xxvi. 1. See 
 also ch. XX. 34 ; xxi. 40. — On the cha- 
 racter, &c. of Paul's speeches reported in 
 the Acts, see Prolegg. § 2. 16. 
 16 — 41.] The contents of this speech may 
 be thus arranged: I. Recapitulation of 
 God's ancient deliverances of His people 
 and mercies towards them, eliding with 
 His crowning mercy, the sending of the 
 Deliverer and promised Son of David (vv. 
 IC — 25). II. The history of the rejection 
 of Jesus by the Jews, and of God's fulfil- 
 ment of His promise by raising Him from 
 the dead (vv. '25-37). HI. The personal 
 application of this to all present, — the 
 annotincemenl to them of justification by 
 faith in Jesus, and solemn learning against 
 the rejection of Him. 16. ol φοβ. 
 
 τ. θ.] The (uncircumcised) proselytes of 
 the gate ; nor excluding even such pious 
 Gentiles, not proselytes in any sense, who 
 might be present. The speech, from the 
 beginning and throughout, is universal in 
 its application, embracing Jews and Gen- 
 tiles. 17. τοΰ λαοΰ τούτου] ' Hoc 
 dicit Pisidis, Judseos digito monstrans ' 
 (Grot.). Or rather, perhaps, by the τούτου 
 indicating, without gesture, the people in 
 whose synagogue they tvere assembled. 
 T. -κατ. ημών] It is evident that the 
 doctrine so much insisted on afterwards by 
 Paul, that all believers in Christ were the 
 true children of Abraham, was fully ma- 
 tured already: by the του λαοΰ τούτου he 
 alludes to the time when God was the God 
 of the Jews only : by this ημών he unites 
 all present in the now extended inheritance 
 of the promises made to the fathers. 
 νψωσεν] Evidently an allusion to Isa. i. 2, 
 where the word is also used in the sense of 
 'bringing up,' nourishing to manhood. This 
 was done by increasing them in Egypt so 
 that they became a great nation : see reff. 
 Gen. 'There is no reference to any exalta- 
 tion of the people during their stay in 
 Egypt : whether by their deliverance (Calv., 
 Heinr., Eisner), or by the miracles of Moses 
 (Meyer), or by Joseph's preferment to ho- 
 nour (Beza, Grot.). 18. έτροφο-
 
 16—20. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 133 
 
 ΤΙ] ίΡϊΐμφ ^^ και καυελων ευνη ίτττα εν yn Χανααΐ' g = Matt.iv.i, 
 
 i Λ ' , - . - , _ /.'' , , .^c. Deut.i. 
 
 κατεκληρονομηαεν αυτοις την yi]v αυτών. '^^ και μετά hich.xix.27. 
 
 - ' •' ι \ f L• ,/Λ i here only. 
 
 ταύτα ως ετεσι τετρακοσιοις και πεντήκοντα εόωκεν trans , ueut. 
 
 ' i. 38. iii. 28. 
 
 xxi. 16, ?at. 1 Mace. iii. 3H, ales. k constr., John iii. 16. 
 
 sah ffith Slav {nulrivit) Ath Mac. — 19. και om Β sah. — iv γη χαν. om 13. 177'. — (πτα 
 om 25 : ins aft χαν. Ε Bed-gr. — rec κατίκΧηρο^οτηικν {corrn to fix the active sense on 
 the verb), with many mss : txt ABCDEGH all (50 and more, Tisch) Chr Thl Oec— 
 αυΓοις om BD' 13. 40 copt sah. — for αυτών (om 15. 18. 3(i), των αλλοφύλων D syr* : 
 add χανααν 13.— 20. και μίτα ταύτα ins aft πιντηκοντα ABC 13. 15. 18. 36. 40. 137 
 copt sah arm Chr.' (see notes) : txt (ju. r. om D' vss) D'EGH most mss ar-pol al Chr 
 Thl Oec. — for πίντ., iriginta tol. — tTtaiv CE &c : t.xt AB &c. — for ως, ίως D : om AC : 
 quasi post annos ν : et post annos seth &c. — ι£ωκ. αυτοις Ε al vss. — του om Β and appy 
 
 φόρησβν] That this is the right reading, is 
 rendered highly probable by MS authority 
 here and in the LXX of Deut. i. 31, and, 
 I conceive, almost decided by the Ileb. of 
 Deut. i. 31, and by the expansion of the 
 same image in Num. xi. 12. The com- 
 pound verb (from ό, not »/, τροφός, as the 
 similitude is that of a man [τΓ\ν] bearing 
 his son) implies carrying and caring for, as 
 a nurse : see ref. Mace. 19. Ιιττά] 
 
 See Deut. vii. 1. Josh. iii. 10 ; xxiv. 11. — 
 The unusual transitive sense of κατικλη- 
 ρονόμηση•, justitiod by reff. in LXX, has 
 not been understood by the copyists, and 
 has led to the rec. reading. — From the oc- 
 currence of manifest references, in these 
 opening verses of the speech, to Deut. i. 
 and Isa. i., combined with the fact that 
 these two chapters form the present lessons 
 in the synagogues on one and the same 
 sabbath, Bengel and Stier conclude that 
 they had been then read. It may have 
 been so : but see on ver. 15. 20.] 
 
 Treating the reading of ABC (see var. 
 readd.) as an attempt at correcting the 
 difficult chronology of our verse, and taking 
 the words as they stand, no other sense can 
 be given to them, than that the time of the 
 judges lasted 450 years. The dative ϊτισι 
 (see ch. viii. 11) implies the duration of the 
 period between ταϋτα (the division of the 
 land), and Samuel the prophet, inclusive. 
 And we have exactly the same chronologi- 
 cal arrangement in Josephus ; who reckons 
 (Antt. viii. 3. 1) 592 years from the Exodus 
 to the building of Solomon's temple, — 
 arranging tlie period thus: (1) forty years 
 in the wilderness : (2) twenty-live years 
 under Joshua {πτ^)(ΐτηγοζ ci μίτά την 
 Μ I.J I) (Τί (Ο ς τίλίντήν ττίντε κ. ΰκοσι, Antt. 
 ν. 1.20): (3) Judges (below): (4) forty 
 years under Saul, see on ver. 21 : (5) forty 
 years under David, 1 Kings ii. 11 : {(>) four 
 years of Solomon's own reign. This gives 
 502—140 =: 443 years (about, ώς, 450) for 
 the Judges, incUiding Samuel. That this 
 clironology diflers widely from 1 Kings vi. 
 1, is most evident, — where we read that 
 
 Solomon began his temple in the four hun- 
 dred and eightieth (LXX, four hundred and 
 fortieth) year after the Exodus. All attempts 
 to reconcile the two are arbitrary and forced. 
 I subjoin the principal. (1) Perizonius and 
 others assume that the years during which 
 the Israelites were subject to foreign tyrants 
 in the time of the Judges are not reckoned 
 in 1 Kings vi. 1, and attempt, by adding 
 them, to make out the period — in direct 
 contradiction to the account there, which 
 is, not that the Judges touted a certain num- 
 ber of years, but that Solomon begun to 
 build his temple in the four hundred and 
 eightieth year after the Exodus. (2) Calo- 
 vius, Mill, &c. supply γινόμίνα after irtv- 
 τηκοντα, and construe, these things ' which 
 happened in the space of 450 years,' viz. 
 from the Ijirth of Isaac to the division of 
 the land. But why the birth of Isaac ? 
 The words too will not bear this construc- 
 tion. (3) Olshausen conceives the 450 
 years may include all from the Exodus, as 
 far as the building of the temple. But to 
 this the objection which he himself men- 
 tions is fatal, viz. that μίτα ταϋτα and 
 (κπθίν must beyond dispute give the ter- 
 mini a quo and ad quern of the period. 
 (4) Others suppose various corruptions, 
 here or at 1 Kings vi. 1, and by arbitrary 
 conjecture emend so as to produce accord- 
 ance. — It seems then that Paul followed a 
 chronology current among the Jews, and 
 agreeing with the book of Judges itself 
 (the spaces of time in which, added toge- 
 ther = exactly 450), and that adopted by 
 Josephus, but not with that of our present 
 Hebrew text of 1 Kings vi. 1. The objec- 
 tion to this view, that Josephus is not con- 
 sistent with himself (Olsh.), — but in Antt. 
 XX. 10. 1 , coiitr. A]>ion ii. 2 gives another 
 chronology, has arisen from not observing 
 that in the latter places, where he states 
 012 years to have elapsed from the E.xodus 
 to Solomon's temple, he reckons in the 
 twenty years occupied in building the tem- 
 ple and the king's house, 1 Kings vi. 38 ; 
 \ii. 1. His words are, Antt. xx. 10. 1,
 
 J 34 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XIII. 
 
 1 of time, here KoiTcic £ioc 'ΣοηουηΧ τοΰ ποοφήτου' κακίΐΘ^ν "^ νττ}- 
 
 σαΐ'τ-ο ρασιλία, και ibwKiv αυτοις ο Όίος τυν Ζαουλ 
 υίον Κ/ς, αΐ'δρα ίκ φυλής Βΐΐ'ΐαμιν, ίτη τίσσαρύκοντα' 
 "•^ καί " μίταστησας αυτυν "^ rjyeijoei' τυν Δαυίδ αύτοίς 
 '' ί'ις βασιλιά, ^ ω και Ηττίν ^ μαρτυρησας Ένρον Δαυ/δ τυν 
 του Ίίσσαι, av2pa ^ κατά την ^ καοόιαν μου, or 
 πάντα τα ' θίλημητά μου. ^^ " τούτου ό Οίος 
 σπέρματος ' κατ' ' ίτταγγελ/αν ^'^ ϊ}γαγεν τω 
 ηρα 
 
 ΤΎ)ς ' ίΐςοοου αυτυν 
 
 ηΐν. έτταγΎ, ch. 1.4 reff. w = Zech. iii. 9 (ί 
 
 1Tb 
 
 only 
 m cli.xii. 20 
 
 reff. 
 η Lake vii. 15 
 
 al. 
 ο — Luke xvi. 
 
 4. 3 Kings 
 
 XV. 13 Dan. 
 
 ii. 21. 
 ρ — Luke i. 09. 
 
 Juilg. ii. 18. 
 q — Luke ii 84 
 
 ch. Tii. 21. 
 
 vt-r. 47. 
 
 1 Kings XV. 
 
 11. 
 I -= Lake iv. 22 
 
 ABCD 
 EGH 
 
 ' ΤκίΝοΤχίίί. " σωτήρα Ίησοΰν, ^ ^ προκηρυ^αντος 
 
 ποηισίΐ 
 
 απο του 
 
 Ισραήλ 
 
 "^ προ 
 
 ωαννου 
 βάπτισμα μετάνοιας 
 
 W = Zech. iii. 9 (8). I.sa. xlviii. 15. 
 
 a — IMal. iii 
 
 . i. 9. ii. 1. 
 
 "(^ibymV ττροςωπου 
 
 u ch. ix 2(1 reff. ν Gal. iii. 29 only, έτταγγ. 
 
 X Isa. xlv. 15. y ch. iii. 20 var. read, only t• 
 
 b Mark i. 4. Lake iii. 3. ch. xix. 4 only. 
 
 Α.— 21. θίος• om all.— (cfic ABCD : txt EGH αΐ—βίνιαμειν ABC : txt DEGH al.— 
 22. rec οντοις rov δαβιδ (alteration of arrangement, to connect αυτούς with the verb), 
 with CEGH &c vss if: txt ABD (om τον) copt sah. — ηνι.)ον Ε. — τον υιον tea. D al. — 
 αΐ'ίρα om BE, also κατ. τ. κ. μου ος cm Ε : της καρδίας 180 : ος . . . μον cm 3. 95 
 ThP. — 23. τυντον 137. — ο θ. ουν απ. τ. σπ. αντου D.— rec for ηγαγ., ijyuptv (expla- 
 natory alteration, see ver 22), with CD &c: txt ABEGH most mss (avηyay. lect 11) ν 
 (not tol ) copt seth ar-pol Ath Chr (comm) ThP Oec Aug. — for σωτ. ιησ., πωτηρκιν (see 
 note) GH ((Τ(ΰ αϊ' Η) all seth Chr (ins) Thl' (text and comm) : txt AB(e sil)CD (σ. τον 
 iv) Ε ν Syr arerp arm copt ThP Oec Aug (ιησ. om al Chrj). — 24. -παντι om GH all ar- 
 pol slav (mss2) Chr (comm) Thl Oec : τω ληω om A all slav (mss,) ar-pol Chr (comm) 
 Thl: λαω om GH all Oec— ισρ. om 68. 104 al sah.— ταυ ισρ. 32. 42. 57 Chr (text) : 
 txt B(e sil)CDE &c vss (the variations have perhaps been occasioned by those in ver 17 
 
 άφ' ης ημέρας ot πατίρις ημών Ιζίλιπον 
 Α'ιγυπτον '^Ίωυσ^ως άγοντος, μίχρι της 
 τοΰ ναοϋ κατασκευής, ον Σολομών ό 
 βασιλίνς tv Ίερησολυμοις ήνίιγαρίΐ', ίτη 
 δνοκαιδίκα προς τοΙς ΐζακοσίοις. Το 
 reckon in the thirteen years during which 
 he was building his own house may be an 
 inaccuracy, but there is no ificojisisiency. 
 
 Σαμουήλ] mentioned as the ter- 
 minus of the period of the Judges, also as 
 having been so nearly concerned in the 
 setting up over them of Saul and David. 
 
 21. Σαονλ άνδρα εκ ψ. Β.] 
 
 It maybe not altogether irrelevant to notice 
 that a Saul, a man of the tribe of Ben- 
 jamin, was speaking; and to trace in this 
 minute specification something character- 
 istic and natural. ετη τεσσαράκοντα] 
 So also Josephus : ίβησίλίυσΐ Σαονλ, 
 'Σαμουήλον ζώντος, ίτη οκτώ προς τοΊς 
 δέκα• τελίντήσαντος δε διΊο και ε'ικοσι, 
 Antt. vi. 14. 9. In the Ο. Τ. the length of 
 Saul's reign is not specified ; 1 Sam. vii. 2 
 gives no reason, as Bengel thinks, why 
 Saul's reign should have been less than 
 twenty years, as the twenty years there 
 raentioiled do not extend to the bringing 
 up of the ark by David, but only to the 
 circumstances mentioned in the following 
 verses. Biscoe has well shewn (p. 399). 
 that as Saul was a young man when 
 anointed king, and Ishbosheth his youngest 
 
 son (1 Chron. viii. 33) was forty years old 
 at his death (2 Sam. ii. 10), his reign can- 
 not have been much short of that period. 
 It is clearly against the construction to sup- 
 pose Samuel's time as well as Saul's in- 
 cluded in the forty years, following as they 
 do upon the εδωκεν. Yet this has been 
 done by the majority of commentators. 
 22. [χεταστήσας] ' having deposed him ' 
 (reff.) : in this case, by his death, for David 
 was not made king till then. Or perhaps 
 μεταστ. may refer to the sentence pro- 
 nounced against Saul, 1 Sam. xiii. 14, or 
 XV. 23. 28, and j/yfiptj' to the whole pro- 
 cess of the exaltation of David to be king. 
 But I prefer the former. ω κ. ειιτεν μ.] 
 
 The two passages, Ps. Ixxxix. 21 (Ixxxviii. 
 20, LXX), and 1 Sam. xiii. 14, are inter- 
 woven together : both were spoken of 
 David, and both by prophetic inspiration. 
 They are cited from memory, neither τον 
 τοΰ Ίεσσαί nor ος . . . . μον being found 
 in them. These latter words are spoken of 
 Cyrus, see reff. That such citations are 
 left in their present shape in our text, forms 
 a strong presumption that we have the 
 speeches of Paul verbatim as delivered by 
 him, and no subsequent general statement 
 of what he said, in which case the citations 
 would have been corrected by the sacred 
 text. 23. κατ' ετταγγ. ηγαγεν] viz. 
 
 the promise in Zech. iii. 9 (LXX), where
 
 21—30. ΠΡΛ^ΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 135 
 
 τταντι τω λαω ]σραί]Χ. "^ ως δε '^ ζπΧήρου Ιωάννης τον '^ ^,^^^'Ιι^^• 
 
 α ^ ' ''Λ rpi ef - f .'f'^'v Sir. xxvi. 2. 
 
 ορομον, ίλεγίΐ' liva μί υπονοίΐτί aval, ουκ 6ΐμι εγω, Joh xx.a4. 
 αλλ ι^οίι έρχετατ ^ )«ετ' ε/κε ού ουκ ίίμι αζιος το οηΐγ)"ί«! 
 
 υτΓΟοτίμα των πυοων 'λυσα(. Ανδρες• αόίΧφοι^ utot ech ixV. is. 
 
 •γίνους Αβραάμ και οι εν ύμιν φυβυυμίνοι τον Οίον, Dan.viV.^' 
 υμιν ο "^ \ο•νος τΐ}ς ^^ σωτήριας ταύτης ° έςαπεστάλ/;. f cHips., John 
 
 07«ν - »«ι \ν \t« xviii. .^ι reff. 
 
 ' οι yap ^ κατοικουντες εν ΙίρονσαΛημ και οι ^ αρ-^οντίς ^^cHnn\y?"i. 
 αυτών τούτον ^ α-γνοησαντίς και τας ^ φωνας των ττροψη- (χί'χ'4 p'aui). 
 των τας *^ κατά 'παν σάββατον " ανα^ινωσκομίνας ^ κρΊ- ^^Ι'^ξΙ'^^^' 
 
 W ' \ ' 28 * ί ' χ ' ' α ' ' Lake iii! 16 J 
 
 ναντίς ίττΑηρωσαν, και μηόίμιαν αιτιαν υανατου Mk.j.ch.vii. 
 
 f/ ν'' ΠΛ' ζ' ίι" ' ' 9') ' 1 **^' 1 • ο 
 
 ίυ^)ϋντες ητϊϊσαντο Ιΐίλατον αναίοεσϊ^ναι αυτο^. ^"^ ως "'^α^"'^• 
 ε ετεΑεσαν τταντα τα ττίρι αυτού "γε-γραμμίνα, /ca ι/- m constr., ch. 
 
 Λ ' ' '^ - ί^'λ >'/ι C ' " .'ίΩ ' ^^ χίτ•3(οΓ 
 
 ελοντες αττο του ςυΛου ευηκαν εις jUvrj^8(or. '^^ ο ce 3^ρ^αΤΓ' 
 
 ICor. χϋ.8. 2 Cor. ν. 19. vi. 7. Eph. i. 13. Phil. ii. 16 aI3 (Panl). Rev. xii.ll. η ch. iv. 12 rrff. 
 
 ο ch. vii. 12 reff. Gal.iv.4, 6. ρ ch. xi. 29 refl'. q = ch. iv. 26 al. 1 Cor. ii. 6, 8. r ch. xvu. 
 
 23(Paul). Rom. X. 3. si. 25 2 Cor. ii. 11. 1 King.s xxvi. 21. s = ch. xxiv. 21 (Paul) vii. 31 (Sleph.). 
 
 teh. XV. 21. xvi. 1, 17. xviii 4 al. α = Lake iv. 16. ch. xv. 21 al. ν = 1 Cor. xi. 31. lPct.iv.6? 
 
 w=.Matt. i. 22. ch. i. 16 aud pas.'.im (not Paul). χ = John xviii. 38. xix. 4, 6(and constr, Ptov. xxyiii. 
 
 17). y conslr., Luke sxiii. 23. ch. iii. 14. ζ ch. ii. 23 reft'. a = Lul£e xviii. 31. xxii. 37. Ezr. i. 1. 
 
 b = Lnke xxiii. 53 1 Mk. Josh. vUi. 29. c ch. iv. 3. xii. 4. 
 
 above).— 25. rec ο ιω. with B(e sil)G_&c Chr ThPj^ txt ACDEH 180 ThP Oec.-for nva 
 μι, τι f/<£ AB sah: txt CDEGH niss (appy) vss (nrly) Chr al.— tirot om 35. 9G. 104. 
 142 Chr-comm. — uWa, and μίθ ιμί D.— for οξ., ικανός 96. 142. 180.— 26. κηι bef οι om 
 Β. — εν ημιν AD. — aft θίον, ins ακονσατι Ε Bed-gr. — ημιν ο λογ. AD 13. 19. 33 sah. — 
 ο Xoyog οντος C all aeth arm syr. — ταντης om 18.37• 133. 180 al lectt 1?. 18 al Syr aeth 
 arm ar-erp. — rec a-KtnraXi] (corrn to more simple tcord), with EGH &c Thl Oec : txt 
 ABCD all Chr. — 27 εν om CE all ν Syr Chr^. — for αυτών, &c, αυτής άγνοησαντες 
 τας ynaipag D (αντ)]ς ν: ayv. τ. γη. Ε Syr). — f ττλί/ρωσηΐ' αυτυν Syr ar-erp slav. — και 
 κριν. D. — 28. ενροντες εν ηυτω D vss. — for ητησ. &c, κρειναντες αντον παρεΟωκαν 
 ττιλατω ινα εις αναιρεσιν D {ut interficerehir d). — 29. ετεΧησαν A (Β.') al : txt CD 
 {ίτεΧεσεν Ώ-, ετε\ουν D')EGH al δίο.— εττληρωσαν ^Ά. 104. — rec ατταντα {error? or 
 alteration for more completeness?), with many mss : txt ABCDEGH most mss Chr Thl. 
 — τα γεγρ. περ. αυτού Β (τα om Β ?). — D* and syr-marg aft γε-γραμμενα add εισιν, 
 ητουντο τον ττειΧατον τούτον μεν σταυρωσαι, και εττιτνχοντες πάλιν και. — for ξύλου, 
 σταυρού Β Syr. — και εθηκαν D'. — 30. ον ο θ. 7}γίΐρεν is the whole verse in D : aft ov, 
 
 the very word «γω is used ; not however on it, and now the reason is given, — -for the 
 
 excluding the many other promises to the Jews in Jerusalem have rejected it. See 
 
 same effect.— The reading σωτηρίαν has ch. xxii. 18—21. τα? φωνάς is not 
 
 probably arisen from the contracted way of governed by άγΐ'οίισαντες, which makes 
 
 writing "I ;;σαί))', thus : σωτηοΊ^'; and then the sentence an unusually harsh one in con- 
 
 from ver. 26 σωτηρίαν was adopted. struction, requiring αί'τόν to be supplied 
 
 24. elsdSov] referring to j/yayiv above— after κριν. and αντάς after ίπλήρωσαν. 
 
 ' Ms coming forward publicly.' 25.] The καί, as often, merely introduces, with- 
 
 ' As John was fulfUling his course (the out the emphasis implied by our ' even,' a 
 
 expression is peculiar to Paul, see reff.) he new element into the sentence. It is per- 
 
 said ' (not once but habitually). τίνα haps hardly possible to find m our lan- 
 
 μ€ νπ. ίΐν.] Not, ' / am not he whom ye guage or the Latin any one word which 
 
 suppose me to be,' as Vulg. (quern me arbi- may give exactly this slight sliade of mean- 
 
 tramini esse, non sum ego), Luth., Grot., >ng. and n» more : paraphrased, tlie sense 
 
 Kuin.,— making τίνα relative, which it will might be (but imperfectly and clumsily) 
 
 not bear; but 'Whom suppose ye me to thus represented: 'in their ignorance of 
 
 he] I am not He.' See Luke iii. 15 ff. Him (not only rejected His salvation, luit) 
 
 26. T. σωτηρία? ταύτης] viz. the ^Ύ judging Him, fulfilled the voices of 
 
 salvation implied in Jesus Ijcing a σωτήο— the prophets,' &(•. 28.] Not, 'thovyh, 
 
 salvation by Htm. 27.] The position hut rather ' because ' they found no cause : 
 
 of hph' at the commencement of its clause ' when they found no cause of death in 
 
 in the last verse shews the emphasis to be lii™. tliey besought,' &c. : sue Luke .\.\iii.
 
 13G ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XIII. 
 
 aj,.h,. ii.22ai. 0£oc '' i)"vfipf V avTOV tK "^ νίκοων, ^^ Ός '^ ωώΟη επί -ημίρας abcd 
 ech ii.'sreir. ττλίίους τοις '^ σι»ϊ'α)'αρασ<ν «υτω απυ της 1 «λιΛαιας• πς 
 ^'xvT'isfx'vii. ΊίοουσπλίΗί, ^ olrivic νυν ήσιν 'μάρτυρες ' α ντου προς 
 vii.T«K) ""■ τον λαοί'. •^- /C(M ίίμίκ; υ^«ις £υαγγίλ(^ο^ίίΙ/α τιιν προς 
 ^S'niy'i''^'" 'τους ττατίρας "' inayyiXiav " '^ίνομίνην, υτι " ταυτηι^ 
 
 •2 Chron. e f. \ .λ/ - ' '- '-ο' 
 
 h-ohx4i Ο I'f'^C ^ ίκπεπλνρωκίν τοις τέκνοις αυτών ημιν ^ ανα- 
 ich'ilsa. στησας Ίησοΰν, ^^ ως καΐ εν τω πρωτω χ^αλμω ye- 
 
 k double arc, r-v/••/ t \ t \ / t / 
 
 ϊαΓ'κϊϊ'χ ^ραττται Υιός μου ει συ, ε-γω σήμερον ^γεyεvvηκa σε. 
 ubsoi.Rom. ^^ OTt δε ^ ανεστησεν αυτόν εκ νεκρών μηκετι ^μέλλοντα 
 
 ix. ft. Hrl). ' ν <s , η ^ " >' Η Λ / 
 
 i. niniy. fch. " ,,^τοστρί ^f «ν ίίς ciofuopav, ούτως ειρηκεν, οτι οωσω 
 
 rrail.) mch. ί. 4reir. η — ch. τϋ. 31 reff. ο oh. ix.20 reff ρ here only f. rat 
 
 ίτταγ^βλ/αΓ ίκπλιΐΡϋΓ.ϊ., Polvb.i. 67. 1. q = ver. 34, Sic. ch. ii. 24 reft'. rPs>.ii.7. s = ch.x.41al. 
 
 t — ch.xxiii. 3. xxvi. 22, 23 al. u of a i/n/e, here only. See ch. »iii.25 refl'. τ ch. ii. 27 reff. 
 
 ins vera d : add tertia die ν (not tol). — 31. for ος, ούτος D. — ωφθη τοις συνηναβαινου- 
 σιν (-βίίσιν D-) ηντω απ. τ. τ. ίΐς ιιρ. (ev t(p. and aft τον \aov 40) (φ ημιρ. 
 ■/τλίίοιος {πλίΐονς D') D. — rec aft οιτ. om νυν {as unnecessary F hardly for Meyer's 
 reason, (hat they had been now for some time His witnesses), with B(e sil)EGII 
 &c ar pol ff : t.xt AC all syr copt sah aeth {και νυν arm) : άχρι νυν D 137 ν syr*. — 
 αυτού oin II. — 32. νμας om 95. — aft ττατιραι:, ins ιιμων DE al vss. — γίίομ. trrayy. 
 D al : tvayy. 13. IfiO: and aft ytv. 95'. 180. — τοις τικνυις ημών ABC'D ν {νμων 
 tol) asth Ilil (/;;i. or νμ.) Ambr : τοις τίκνοις ίΐυτωΐ' sah ar-pol Syr Ambr (ms) : τοις 
 τίκνοις co))t {all alterations, to avoid the difficulty of oi φυβονμίνοι τον θκιν being 
 present, ver \G, besides the άνδρες ifrpajjXirni) : txt {αυτών om 7'>) C^EGH mss (nrly) 
 Syr al Chr Thl- Oec (nur. νμιν lect 5 Thl'). — for ιησουν, τον κυριον {ημωι) ι. χρ. 
 {χρ. om syr*) D al sah syr* Ambr Hil : r. κ. ημ. ιησ. 137 : αυτόν (κ νεκρών Α'. — 33. for 
 ως και, όντως yap D. — rec τω ψ. τω SevT. {alteration to suit the ordinary arrangement 
 of the Psalms), with (ABC 13. 40. G9. 80. 105. 180 al arm τω φ. ytyp. τω StvTfpw: 
 Ιΐυτ. φαλμω Η 4. fi8. 76. 100) ABCEGH and vss nrly Chr Thl Ambr : r. φαλμω only, 
 4()' (appy : cent xi) latt-mss mentd by Erasm Bed-gr al {to escape the difficulty) : txt 
 D Orig expressly (in schol) Georg-Alex (Oec (ed) ψ. τ. ττρ.) Tert Cypr (nis) Ilil (expr) 
 Jer Cassiod lat mss mentd by Bede. — at end, D adds αιτησαι παρ εμού και ίωηω σοι 
 &C ... to Γΐ;ς yης from Ps ii. 8. — 34. ort 137 : ^f om sah. — aft αυτόν add ο θίος Ε Syr. 
 — aft μ(\\. {μέλλων 37. 5f5 Thl') add αυτόν Ε 32. 66 Chr. — υποστρ. αυτόν 42. 57- — νς 
 
 22, 23. 29.] The two verbs ετελεααν ver. 3 1, nor was their mission to the Jewish 
 
 and εϋηκαν have still the same subject, viz. people. ' They are at this moment witness- 
 
 ol κατηικιιϊιντες κ.τ.λ. De Wette rightly ing to the people, we, preaching to you.' 
 
 remarks, that Paul, in this compendious nar- Stier observes (Red d. Apost. p. 3C7) how 
 
 rative, makes no distinction between friend entirely Paul sinks himself, his history and 
 
 and foe in what was done to our Lord, but commission from Clu-ist, in the great object 
 
 regards both as fulfilling God's purpose of his preaching. άναστησας] The 
 
 regarding him. I may add, that there is meaning ' having raised Him from the 
 
 also a contrast between what men did to dead ' is absolutely required by the con- 
 
 Him, and ό δέ 0€os ηyε^pεv αυτόν. — Jo- text : both because the word is repeated 
 
 seph and Nicodemus, be it observed, were with εκ νεκρών (ver. 34), and because the 
 
 both άρχοντες. — Paul touches but liglitly Apostle's emphasis throughout the passage 
 
 on the cross of Christ, and hastens on to is on the Resurrection (ver. 30) asthe^/iaZ 
 
 the great point, the Resurrection, as the fulfilment {ίκττεπληρωκίν) of God's pro- 
 
 fulfiiment of prophecy and seal of the Mes- mises regarding Jesus. This is maintained 
 
 siahship of Jesus. 31.] The >•Γν gives by Luther, Hammond, Le Clerc, Meyer, 
 
 peculiar force to the sentence. 'Who are &c. : the other meaning, 'having raised up,' 
 
 at this moment witnesses,' — living wit- as at ch. vii. 37i ττροφίιτην ίψΐν αναστήσει 
 
 nesscs ; q. d. ' I am not telling you a mat- ό κύριος, — by Calvin, Beza, Calov., Wolf, 
 
 ter of the past merely, but one made pre- Michaelis, Rosenm., Heinrichs, Kuinoel, 
 
 sent to the people of the Jews {τψ λαφ) Olsh., and by Mr. Humiihry. Meyer 
 
 by living and autoptic testimony.' well remarks, that this meaning would 
 
 32. ήμ€Ϊς ύμας] He and Barnabas were hardly in our passage have been thought 
 
 not of the number of the συναναβάντες, of or defended, had it not been that
 
 81—39. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛίΙΝ. 
 
 137 
 
 νμιν τα υσια ίΛανίο τα ττιστα. 
 Xeyei Ου ^ οωι 
 
 35 ? ^ ' ' 
 
 ΟΙΟ και εν 
 
 ιό'-- 
 
 (τιρω 
 
 lOilV 
 
 ''ΗΎ only. 
 5• J Λ ' χ = 1 Tim. i. 
 όΐαψνο^αν. 15al.fr. Rry. 
 
 syei yJv ύωσίΐς τον οσιον σου 
 Aiic Αοιίίο μει» γαρ tcta yivm υπηρίτησας ttj του t /εου ieh i so 
 
 DEG c/Q-\"il» 'n <e 'n ^ »■ / xii. 17 al. 
 
 pouAr} ζκοιμηυη και προςίτίϋη προς τους πατέρας ζ psa.st. ίο. 
 
 , _ ^ ■/. "^ '-^ ^α ' . 37 "^ ί^ ' /ι ^ f " Srech.ii.a7 
 
 αυτού και nciu ύιαφυοραν ' ον οε ο ι/εος ?/νε<οευ "^"; . ,,. 
 
 _ ι ( ^ ' / 1 a=ch.xiT. Ih. 
 
 OKiC ^ είοεί' ^ όιαφΟοράν. "γνωστόν οΰν \στω ΰμιν, fudg.'u.fo. 
 
 W |> ' $■ Λ . * " $. ^ Ί ' ' - i ", i ' - bcli.xx.34. 
 
 ανόρίς αόίΑψοι, οτι οια τούτου υμιν αφεσις αμαρτιών "'^:''ί^r j 
 καταγγελλίΓαι, /cat αττο τται/των "' ών ου /c ϊ}δΐΊ'ί}θίίΓε ο c'h"ii.^23 
 
 η' ' Λ/Γ ' 1^ β" n'h' -' ■^'■fi^• 
 
 εν νομω Μωυσεως οικαιωυηναι, ευ τούτω παο ο d-ch.vu. 
 
 e(ch.ii.47.) =Gen.xlix. 29. Jadg. ii. ΙΟ. fver.30. g ch. ii. 14. iv. 10. χχτίϋ. 28. h ch. ix. 
 
 20 rtffl". ich. X. 42 reff. k ch. iii. 24 reff. I Rom. vi. 7 only. m constr., ver. 2 refll 
 
 ο Rom. V. 9. 1 Cor. iv. 4. vi. Jl. Gal. iii. II. v. 4. more usually w. etc (Paul only). 
 
 S. om 13. — εφηκαμίν 73.-35. ίιοτι AB 97- 98-inarg sah : txt CE{propier nos e)GH 
 mss (nrly) vss Chr Thl Oec : om D Syr aeth. — {Τίρως D : alias ν : alia A: tv trtpa \G : 
 iv τω ίτ. 13. — 36. μεν om D al vss. — κ. προςίτ. om 13. — iSev (but not in ver 37) ACD. 
 — 37. ver 37 om Η 96. 142 lect 1. — for ov, ο D' gr. — ηγ. εκ vf/cpwr 180. — 38. ci αυτού 
 Ε C5. G7. 133 : Sia τούτο al.— 39. και om AC am demid tol : ins B(e siOC^DEG mss and 
 vss (nrly) ff. — aft και, add μετάνοια D syr*. — εϋννηθητε A : η^ννι/θημεί' D-gr. — rec 
 τω νομ. (corrn : but the art is- not needed aft a preposition), ν}\\\ιΈ.<ΰι &.οΎ\ύ Oec : 
 txt ABCD 13. 93. 180 Chr. — tv τούτω ουν D syr*. — at end, D 137 syr-marg add trapa 
 
 the subjoined citation from Ps. ii. has 
 been thought necessarily to apply to our 
 Lord's mission upon earth. 33.] 
 
 Paul refers the prophecy in its full com- 
 pletion to the Resurrection of our Lord : 
 similarly in Rom. i. 4, ορισθέντος νιυϋ 
 
 θίοϊι εν δυΐ'άμει ί£ άναστύσεως 
 
 νεκρών. 34. μηκίτι μί'λλ.] Compare 
 
 Rom. vi. 9, χριστός εγερθείς εκ νεκρών, 
 ονκέτι αποθνήσκει• θά)•ατος αντοΰ ονκετι 
 κνριενει. It is interesting to trace the same 
 shades of thought in the speeches and epp. 
 of Paul ; and abundant opportunity of doing 
 so will occur as we proceed. — But here the 
 ΰπυστρ. εις διαφθ. does not merely imply 
 death, so that Jesus should have once un- 
 dergone it, and no more hereafter, as the 
 E. V. seems to imply : but we must supply 
 ' to die, and in consef|uence to ' before the 
 words, understanding them as the result of 
 death, if it had dominion over Him : thus 
 the clause answers even more remarkably 
 to Rom. vi. 9. τα δσια is the LXX 
 
 rendering of npn, Isa. Iv. 3, which in 
 2 Chron. vi. 42, they have translated τα 
 tXh]. The word 'holy' should have been 
 preserved in the E. V., as answering to τον 
 'όσιήν σου below ; ' the mercies of David, 
 holy and sure :' or ' my holy promises 
 which I made sure unto David.' 
 35. δι6 καί] 'wherefore also,' — corre- 
 sjiondeiit to wliicli purpose, of His Chri.st 
 not seeing corruption. Ιτέρω] viz. 
 
 ■φαλμφ, referring to ver. 33. λίγίΐ] 
 
 viz. ϋ θεός, not David : the sutiject is con- 
 tinued from vv. 32 and 34, and fixed by 
 ί'ιρηκεν and Οοισω just j)receding. — δώσεις 
 
 and οσιον accurately correspond to δώσω 
 and 'όσια before. See ch. ii. 27, notes. 
 
 36.] The psalm, though spoken by 
 David, cannot have its fulfilment in David. 
 
 ιδία γ€ν€0[] The dative commodi, 
 not ' sua generatione,' which is flat in the 
 extreme. David ministered only to the 
 generation in which he lived: but δια 
 τούτου, remission of sins is preached νμ'Ί}•, 
 and to all tvho believe on Him. τ-ρ 
 
 τον θ. βουλή is best taken with υπηρέτησης, 
 not with εκοιμήθη -. — as E. V., 'after he 
 had served his own generation by the 
 will (i. e. according to the appointment) of 
 God.' His whole course was marked out 
 and fixed by God — he fulfilled it, and fell 
 asleep. I prefer this, because joining Ty 
 του θ. β. with εκοιμί/θΐ! seems to diminish 
 the importance of that verb in the sentence. 
 (See, on the whole, 2 Sam. vii. 12. 1 Kings 
 ii. 10.) irposcT. /c.r.X.] An expres- 
 
 sion arising from the practice of burying 
 families together: see reff. and passim in 
 O. T. 38.] Paul speaks here of jus- 
 
 tification only in its lotvest sense, as nega- 
 tive, and synonymous with remission of 
 sins ; he does not unfold here that higher 
 sense of δικαιήω, the accounting righteous, 
 which those wlio have from God are δίκιηοι 
 εκ πίστεως. It is the first office of the 
 Spirit by which he spoke, ί\εγ\ειι> περΊ 
 αμαρτίας, before He ελέγχει περΊ δικαιη- 
 πΰνιμ; : therefore he; dwells on tlie αφεσις 
 αμαρτιών, merely just giving a glimpse of 
 the great doctrine of justification, of whidi 
 he had such wonderful things to write and 
 to say. 39.] ' And from all things,
 
 138 ΠΡΑαΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XIII. 
 
 o-Matt.Miv. τΓίστίύω)' '" δικαιούται. ^^ "βλέπετε ονν μι) ^ ίττίλΟη εφ abc 
 
 4 1; ICor.^ _ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ Γ- ^ 41 ''Ι ^ • r ^^^ 
 
 GaLTifsaL υ^»ας τυ "^ κοΓ/μίνοί' εΐ' τοις προφηταΐζ Ιοετε οι κοτα- 
 
 pih νϋί. 24. , χ ^ , ' S ' . ' η " t >' 
 
 Micaii iii. 11. φοονητα*. /cfft οανιιασατί και αφανιαυητΕ, οτι Ερ7ον 
 
 qLukrii.24. rs"' ■_ '^^ ^' t\ ι \ 
 
 ifi'RomW ^ (ογάίομαι tyio ev ταΐς ημίραις νμων, έργον ο ου μη 
 
 18. (H.l).i. U ' ■' ν • ζ' - ' - 
 
 i3.iT. 3,4, 7.) πιστίυαηη tav τις ίκόιη-γηται υμιΐ'. 
 ' ηΤβΊΊ'.'β. "^^ " Έίιόΐ'το)!' δε αυτών ^ παρίκάλουν ^ εις τυ ^ μεταξύ 
 
 s-iVab. I.e. σάββατον λαληθηναι αντοΐς τα ρήματα ταντα. ^"^ ** λυ- 
 
 (not in lleb.) James iv. 14. t John iii. 21. η ace, John xi. 2f>. 1 Cor. xiii. 7. vch. xv. 3 
 
 only. Hab. I.e. w eh. xvii 15. XX. 7. xxvii 43 only. Exod. xxviii. 31. χ constr., ch xix. 
 
 31. xXTiii. 14(onlyT). y = Luke i. 20. z = hereonIy. Δα/3ι'•(οι/ tc και ΣολομιΤ.κο?, JV, it Kai 
 
 μίτιι? ii τούτων βασιλίων, Jos. Β. J. v. 4, 2, also Apioii, i. 21. Φιλιττττοί' . . . και μεταί ύ d' 'A\^ξal•6pov τον 
 υΐύν . . . , Plutarch. Inst. Lae. 42. a"=hereonly. Diod. Sie. xix. 25, έλυσε 7f;i< έκκλ>|σιαι/. Polyb. v. 
 
 16. 3, \veiv T. αυνονσίαν. 
 
 τω θίω.—ίΟ. ίΤΓίλθοι 25. -42. 57- 73. 97 Chr (comm) : (\θη 34.— ίφ νμας om BD 
 13. 18. 3(i. 73. 180 am tol (as unnecessary? or because a difficulty was found in 
 identifying νμας with the καταφρονηται of the citation?): προφ. (ΐς νμ. 137: ins 
 ACEG most mss vss (nrlv) Chr al. — 41. for i5., ακονσαη Ε Bed-gr. — aft θανμ. add και 
 (om Ε Bed-gr) (τηβλί^άτί Ε all Bed-gr : and bef Θ. 14. (JQ-. 73. 137 Chr Ύ\Α-.—ίμβ\. 
 al {corrn to LXX). — κ. ηφ. om 95': το tpyoi' 57•— rec £γω (ογαζ. {cnrrn to LXX), 
 with CEG &c vss ff: txt ABD 13 ν Syr sah. — aft νμων, ins on ο ΰίος σταυρονται και 
 αποθνηηκίΐ 37. — ί,ογον (2nd) om DEG all tol syrr arr slav Chr Cosm Thl' Oec: ins 
 ABC &c V copt sah Eeth Thl-.— rec ψ, with 1 and many mss Cosm Oec : txt ABCDEG 
 all Chr Th\. — tKh>)ynTcn AG 1 : --γησιται D' al. — at end, D syr" add και ίσιγηηιη> (-atv 
 137 syr*). — 42. rec ίζιαν. CC tK της συιαγωγης των ιονναιων (jsvjiplementary, at be- 
 ginning of an ecclesiastical portion; 98 has των αποστολών (κ Γ7;ς ryv. κτλ), with 
 G (see below) 1 all : txt ABCDE all ν syrr ar-erp copt sah eeth arm Chr Cassiod : add 
 fK. r. συν. των ιονδ. G all slav ThP. — rec aft τταρίκ. ins τα ίθνη (added because it was 
 considered necessary that this request should be ascribed to the Gentiles, on acct <f the 
 hostility of the Jews ver 45), with G &c ar pol al : om AB (ηϊ,ιονν aft σαββ. Β 81 : 
 ί}ξ. also Chr-comm)CDE (om παηικαΧί'ΐη•) all ν syrr ar-erp copt sah Eeth arm Chr Thl 
 Cassiod. — for μιταΐ,ν, (Κης D : ιττιον 104 : and add τοντ (οτι το ισομινοί' 37. — ιΐζ .... 
 σα/3, om 81. — τα om D' : τον \oyov 4 : ταντα om h Thl'. — τα αντα ρήματα some edd : 
 τω λόγοι τούτω slav : verba Dei Cassiod (Griesb and Scholz remark, totus versus e 
 
 from which ye could not in (under) the τοντψ, which (see above) is contrasted with 
 
 law of Moses be justified, in Him (as ίν tv νόμψ Μ. It is quite in Paul's manner 
 
 ■χριστψ, tv κιψίψ passim) every believer to use πας 6 πιστίύοιν thus absolutely: 
 
 is (habitual, pres.) justified.' άττοττάντων see Rom. i. 1(5; iii. 22; x. 4 (Gal. iii. 22). 
 
 (άι^ι') ών, ' from all things (sins), from Still less, with Luther, can we take as far 
 
 which' .... but not implying that in the as ϊικαιωθηναι with ver. 38, and make ίν 
 
 law of Moses there might be justification τοντψ .... ίιΐκαιοϋται a separate sentence, 
 from some sins; — under the law there is no 40.] The object of preaching the 
 
 justification (iv νόμψ ονδιΊς δικαιονται Gospel to the Jews _;?/•*•< was for a testimony 
 
 τταρά τψ θίψ, Gal. iii. 11) : — but = 'Christ to them : its almost uniform reception was 
 
 shall do for you all, that the law could unfavourable : and against such anticipated 
 
 not do:' leaving it for inference, or for fur- rejection he now warns them. tois 
 
 ther teaching, that this was absolutely all : ττροφ.] The book of the projihets. 
 
 that the law could do nothing. The same 41. καταφρονηται] So the LXX for D;i33, 
 
 thought is expanded Rom. viii. 3, το -yap ' among the heathen,' for which they seem 
 
 αδύνατον τον νόμον, tv ψ ήσθίνα δια τής to have read C'l^^- So the Arabic, ' videte 
 
 σαρκός, ο θιος, κ.τ.λ. . . . 'ivu το δικαίωμα arrogantes :' and the Syriac, ' videte trans- 
 
 T. νίψου πληρωθι] Ιν ήμ'ιν. This in- gressores.' (Kuinoel.)— The prophecy was 
 
 terpretation will be the more clearly esta- spoken of the judgment to be inflicted by 
 
 blished, when we remember that δικαιονν ^gans of the Chalda;ans : but neither this 
 
 άπϊι αμαρτίας was not in any sense, and noj. any other lu-ophecy is confined in its 
 
 could not be, the office of the law, by application to the occasion of which it was 
 
 which came the knowledge of sin. The once spoken, but gathers up under it all 
 
 expression δικαιούν άττό is only once used analogous procedures of God's providence: 
 
 again by Paul (ref.), and that where he is such repeated fulfilments increasing in 
 
 arguing against the continuing in sin.— weight, and approaching nearer and nearer 
 
 ό πιστίύων IS not to be joined with iv to that last and great fulfilment of all the
 
 40—46. nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 139 
 
 θε'ισης δε της συνα-νω^ί)? ηκοΧουθησαν πολλοί των aa = ver. so. 
 ίουδαί'ων /coi των "'' σίβομίνων πρυςΐ]λυτων τω Πουλώ y^• Josh. iv. 
 καί τω Υ>αρναρα, οιΤ(ΐ'ίς προςλαλουντΕς αυτοις εττίΐι/ον cch. χ.4ΐ,47. 
 αυτούς "^ ττρυςμίναν tij ^ y^apiTi του Θίοΰ. ^'^ Τω δε '''=„''„-,^^^^^^2ο 
 
 α ' ι Ο Ο' ctr 'ί'' " ' '\ b ' (Χ ίϊ. Ifialex. 
 
 ^ ίχο|ΐΐίί'ω σαρρατω ^" σχεοοΐ' ττασα 7) ττολις συνί/χστ; ech. xi. 23 
 ακοΰσοί τον λόγοι' του θεοΰ. ^ ιδόντες οε οι louduiot fc'h.xfv.s. 
 τους oy\ovς ίπλησϋησαν ^ Ι,ηΑου, και avTiAtyov τοις 27. χχ.24, 
 ύπο τοΰ Παύλου λί-γομίνοις ^ αντι\ε•^οντίς και ρλα- e .= i'^uk<'^siu. 
 
 4β πι ' « ' ' ' Π "Λ ., ' ' 1''• xsi. 26. 
 
 σφτμιουντ^ς. * παρρησιασαμίνοι τε ο ΙΙαυΛος fcat ο siuacc. χϋ. 
 Βαρι^άβας είτταν Ύ^ΰ' ην " αναγκαιον πρώτον λαληθηναι sSjjh^Y^x.^se. 
 τον λόγον τοΰ θεοϋ' επειδή δε ° απωθεισθε αυτόν και T}.uckv.2. 
 
 , 5V»/ D f « \ ρο- » ' y" q'^^ h — Matt. xxii. 
 
 ουκ πςιους ^ κρινίτί εαυτούς *^^ της αιωνίου ςωης, ιεου 34. Nvh. τι. 
 
 i ch. iii. 1ϋ reff. j =■ Kom. xiii. 13. 1 Cor. iii. 3. James iii. 14, ]fi. 1 Mace. viii. IB. k Luke 
 
 XX. 27. Hos.iv. 4. labsol., ch. xviii. R. 1 Pet. iv. 4. 2 Mace. X. 34. m ch. ix. 27 reff. η = Heb. 
 
 Tiii.3. Phil.i. 24. ii. 2.Ί. 2 Cor. ix. 5. 2 Mace. ix. 21. ο ch. vii. 27, 39. Rom. xi. 1,2. Ezck. xliii. y. 
 
 ρ = ch. xvi. In. xxvi. 8. R»m. xiv. 5. pp 1 Tim. Ti. 12 only. (See 1 Jolin i. 2. ii. 25.) q Matt 
 
 xxiii. 34. Lnke xiii. Ui. ch. ii. 7. ver.ll. 
 
 variis glossematibus coiisse videtur). — 43. και . . . ττροςηΧ, om 26*. — σιβ. τον θιον Ε 
 syrr Bed-gr. — τω bef \iat)v. om DG all : for τ. η. κ. τ. β., αυτοις Syr: add aKiovvTtg 
 βαπτισθηιαι 137: παρακαλουνης διίασιασθαι syr*. — προςκιιλονντις IST.—avroig 
 cm EG h all ν Syr Bed-gr Oec Thl' (as tamecessai•!/) ins AB(e sil)CD &c vss Chr Thl^. 
 — αυτοί' 180. — rec ίπιμίΐ•ην (perhaps corrn to avoid πμος\α\ονντις .... προςμενίΐν), 
 with G &c: txt ABCDE all Chr Thl-.— at end, DE Bed-gr syr-marg add fyfitro 8f 
 καθ oXijc της πολβως δΐίλθίιν (κατά πασαν την ττοΧιν φημισθηνοι Ε Bed-gr) τον 
 λο-γορ (add του θίου D). — 44. rec for τε, dt (corrn as more ustial ?), with AC(appy)D 
 &c vss : txt BE-gr G all syrr seth Chr Thl Oec (tote for τω τ( G Oec). -rec ί^ιχομίνω 
 (alteration, ifie sense of εχομίϊ'ω not being perceived), with B(e sil)C'DE-G &c ft' : txt 
 AC^Ei 20. 33. 34. 40. 73. 126 lect 12 : ίτηρχομίνω 3. 95 : τω ιχομ. lect ν2.—σχίδον 
 om Syr ar-erp asth.— for πάσα, ολη D. — for Oeov, κνριου AB all am tol sah : txt CEG al 
 vss fF. — for Tor λ. τ. θ., — του πανλου D. — 45. for ιίοντις It, — ττολυ)' γε λογοί' ττοι- 
 ησαμινου τζιρι του κυ{)ΐου (θιον d) και ιίοΐ'τίς D. — for τους οχλ. (om seth), το ττληθος 
 Χ) sah. — τοις λογοις τοις DE 14 Syr. — του om ΑΒ al (as unnecessary .• hut it has force 
 here) : ins CDEG &c Chr Thl Oec— ληλουμί vote ABE 13. 33. ^Κ-.—ηρημινοις 64. 97 
 (the varr have perhaps been introduced from other similar exprr, such as ch xvi. 14, 
 and ver 40) : txt CDG mss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec— αντι\. και om ABCG all ν Syr ar-erp 
 copt sah aeth arm: ιναντιομίί'οι (sic) και Ε (both the omission and the clumsy attempt 
 in Ε are emendations of the apparent tautology αντίλίγον .... avTiXtjovTtg) : txt 
 D most mss (appy) syr al Chr Thl Oec. — 46. μίνος D. — rec δε (as bringing out the 
 contrast), with EG &c vss ίΐ: txt ABCD-gr 36. 40. 180 all seth (om sah ar-pol : tunc\). 
 — bef βί'ρ. om D Thl'. — rec ηπον (more usual form) : txt ABD (add πμος αυτονς Ό). 
 — ην om C 177 : it is aft ττρωΓ. in D. — avayK. om D-gr : ττρωτ. om 100 Cyr Jerj. — St 
 om BD' 180 copt sah syr Thl' (from the two syll, -δηΰΐ, occurring together) : ins AC 
 (tTTti St C al Origa) D^EG mss (nrly appy) vss Orig^ Thdrtj Chrj Thl2 Oec— 
 
 promises of grace and all the threats of gives the result. The ref. to Josephus 
 
 wrath, by which every prophetic word shall abundantly justifies this use of μίταζύ. 
 
 be exhausted. 42.] The insertions in 43. \νθ. δ. τ. σ.] 'After the break- 
 
 the rec. have been made (see var. rcadd.) ing up of the synagogue.' ^ otrives] 
 
 partly perhaps to remove the ambiguity in Paul and Barnabas ; and avTolc, to the 
 
 αυτών, and to supply a subject to iraptKci- Jews and proselytes : not vice ve7-sd, as Ca\- 
 
 Xiivv. But they confuse the sense. ίξκίν- vin inchnes to believe : see a similar expres- 
 
 των αντ., 'As they (the congregation) were sion ch. xi. 23. Tiiere too, we have // 
 
 going out, they (the s^ame) besought.' χ"ρις τοϋ Qtol• .similarly used of the work 
 
 TO μ€τα|υ σάβ. ajipcars, by the of the Gospel begun in the hearts of the con- 
 
 usage of Luke, to mean ' the next sabbath- verts. See also reft". 44.] Whether ί(>χ. 
 
 day,' not ' the following week. ^ This last or tx.be read, the sense will be 'on the 
 
 rendering would hardly suit ί/ς•, which fixes following sabbath-day:' not, as Ikiiiriciis, 
 
 a definite occasion,— nor ver. 44, which ^ on the following week-day.' <r\>v-
 
 uo 
 
 ΠΡΑΗΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XIII. 47—52. 
 
 Γ -here only. ^ σΤβίφομζθα 
 Seech.vii.;i!). , _ ^ ,' , 
 
 ''joiuikw/ai; ^ΐμ^ν ο κύριος 
 
 tIsA.xlU. β W ' ' 
 
 (aiex.). σε εις σωτηριαν 
 
 ^ εις τα ίθνη. 
 ' Τί'ΟίΐΛ,ά σε 
 
 ίΐς 
 
 ούτως 
 φως 
 
 1 Thess. τ. 9. ^, 
 1 Tim. i. 12. gf 
 
 εως 
 τα (θνη ϊγαιρον και 
 
 1 Prt 
 
 ^LUkexxiro. K-ot ίΤΓίστευσπΐ' όσοι }/σαν 
 
 1 Ciir. ix. β. 
 W — vtr. 22 
 
 reff. 
 χ cli. ί. 9. 
 
 viii. !>. 
 y here only. 
 Ε — • ch. XT. 2 
 
 Rnm. xiii. 1 
 
 έσχατου της "γης. 
 ^ ϊ^όζα^ον τον * λο' 
 
 48 
 
 47 " ^ S ' ' Λ 
 
 •*' ηιιτ/.ι/^ y^P ίντίταΑται 
 
 ίθνων, ^ του eivai 
 
 ακουοντα 
 
 γοΐ' του κυρίου, 
 
 τίτα-γμίνοι ^^ ίΐς ^(^ην αιωνιον' 
 
 *^ '" ^ΐίφίοίτο δε ό λόγος του κυρίου δι' 'όλης της -^ωρας. 
 
 '■' •^^ οί δε 'Ιουδαίοι ^ παρωτρυναν τας ^ σφομίνας -γυναίκας 
 
 ABC 
 DEU 
 
 (ΰσχήμονας και τους ' πρώτους της πόλεως, και 
 δΐίι>7Μθί' ^ ετΓί τον Παύλοι' και Βαρί'όραΐ', 
 
 τας 
 
 [^άΙΖ. ^^τη'ίγείρα»' " όιωγμοί' 
 
 2Maro. νί. 21.) 1 Cor χνΐ. 15. ζζ = Rev. xiii. 10. a — here only. VVisd. xviii 10. See ch. xxvii. 27. 
 
 bhereonlvt c vrr. 43 reff. d = Mark xv. 43. ch. xvii. 12 (1 Cor. vii. 3.Ί. xii. 24) only. Prov. xi. 2.'). 
 
 e = and crm>tr., Mark vi. 21. Luke xix. 47. ch. xxv. 2. XXTui. 7, 17. f ch. xiv. 2 only. 1 King.s iii. 12 al. 
 
 g ch. viii. I reff. 
 
 favr. Kpiv. Ε V Thdrtj. — ουράνιου ζω. 27• 29 : «ιωΐ'. om sah. — στριφ. ημιις Ε. — 47. (v- 
 τίτηλκίΐ' D' al Cyr Thdrt.— ι/μιν om D'-gr 57' : »;//. f rr. 16. 95. ϋ?. 1:57.— aft ο (τυρ. 
 add (ίου DE al Cypr. — τιθηκα 142. — φως (omg £ΐς•) rtG. at D' Cypr. — τοις ίθΐΊση' D 
 am dcmid Aug al. — at (2iid) om 34. C!). 105 al.— 48. και ακονοντ. τα D vss. — ίχηΐ{>ΐ 
 42. 57 al.— for ίίυξηζ., tct^niTo {corrn : see c/i x'l. 1) D Aug: ίίοςηζί 97- 177" : t^oKaat 
 «0 D Aug.— του Οίον BD-gr Ε gr 27- 29. 73. 97- 137- ΙϋΟ copt Augj : om 105 Chri : 
 68 syrr teth ar-erp have roi' Otoi^ for τυν λ. του κν., and 34, rov θίον και τον λ. του κυ. 
 {all corrns, or misunderstanding of corrns, from ch xi. 1): txt A (r. λογ. τ. κυ. is 
 erased) CG most mss vss if. — aft «πιΐΓ. ins τω λογ. τ. κυρίου 137• — aft τtτayμ. ins 
 νπο τυυ κυρίου 73. — αΐωνιαν Β. — 49. και διίψ. D aeth ar-pol. — καθ όλης Α 73. — 
 50. παριοτρυΐ'ον D'-gr. — rec κσι τας ίνσχ. {attempt at corrn, from misunderstanding), 
 with EG &c vss Chr al : txt ABCD all Syr sah arm Cassiod.— ί^λιψιν μίγαλζ/ΐ' (om Ε) 
 και διωγ. DE. — bef παν. om τον Ό al. — rec τον βαρν. {for uniformity), with 1 &c: om 
 
 ήχθη] ' In the synagogue :^ it was the sight 
 of the Gentile crowds in their house of 
 prayer which stirred up the jealousy of the 
 Jews. 45. άντιλ καί] These words 
 
 (see var. readd.) form a graphic repetition 
 passing from the particular thing which 
 they did, viz. contradict the words spoken 
 by Paul, to the spirit in which they did it, 
 viz. a contradictious and blaspheming one. 
 It is no Hebraism. 46. ιτρώτον] See 
 
 ch. iii. 20. Rom. i. 1Π. 47.] From the 
 
 LXX, with only τίθηκα for οίδωκα. They 
 refer the at not to themselves as teachers 
 (as Meyer seems to think), but to Christ. 
 48. τεταγμ€'νοι] The meaning of this 
 word must be determined by the context. 
 The Jews had judged themselves umcorlhy 
 of eternal life : the Gentiles, ' as many as 
 were disposed to eternal life,' believed. 
 By ii-hom so disposed, is not here declared : 
 nor need the word be in this place further 
 particularized. We know, that it is God 
 xoho icorketh in us the will to believe, and 
 that the preparation of the heart is of Him : 
 but to find in this text pre ordination to 
 life asserted, is to force both tlie word and 
 the context to a meaning which they do not 
 contain. The key to the word here is the 
 comparison of 1 Cor. xvi. 15, €ΐς διακονίαν 
 τοις άγϊηις Ιταξαν εαντούς, with Rom. 
 xiii. 1, αϊ υνσαι ϊξουσι'αι, ΰπο τοϋ θίοϋ 
 Τ€ταγμέναι είσίν : in both of which places 
 
 the agents are expressed, whereas here the 
 word is absolute. See also ch. xx. 13. The 
 principal interpretations are: (1) Calvin, 
 &c., who find here predestination in the 
 strongest setise : ' ordinatio ista nonnisi ad 
 aeternum Dei consilium potest referri ' . . . 
 ' ridiculum autem cavillum est referre hoc 
 ad credentium affectum, quasi Evangeliura 
 receperint qui animis rite dispositi erant.' 
 So the Λ'ulgate, ^ prceordinati :' and Aug. 
 ' destinaii.' (2) ' Qui juxta ordinem a Deo 
 institutum dispositi erant' (Franz., Calov. : 
 but not Bengel [as De W.], who explains 
 it as I have done above) : (3) ' Quibus, dum 
 fidem doctrinee habebant, certa erat vita 
 bcata' (Morus, Kuinoel): (4) ' Qui ad vitam 
 aeternam se ordinarant ' (Grot., Limborch, 
 Wolf, al.) : (5) ' Quotquot erant dispositi, 
 applicati, i. e. apti facti oratione Pauli ad 
 vitam aet. adipiscendam ' (Bretschneider) : 
 (0) taking rtr. militari sensu, ' Qui de ag- 
 mine et classe erant sperantium vel conten- 
 dentium ad v. ae.' (Mede, and similarly 
 Schottg.) There are several other ren- 
 derings, but so forced as to be mere carica- 
 tures of exegesis : see ^leyer. It may be 
 worth while to protest against all attempts 
 to join ίπισΓίυσηίΐ' with ι'ις ζωήν αΐώνιην, 
 which usage will not bear. 50. τας 
 
 «Γίβ. γνν.] Women had a strong religious 
 influence both for and against Christianity: 
 see for the former ch. xvi. 14 ; xvii. 2. Phil.
 
 XIV. 1—3. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 141 
 
 και εί,ίραλον αυτούς αττο των ορίων αυτών. 
 
 εκτιναζ,αμίνοι τον κονιορτυν των ποόων "" £7γ 
 ι'ίΧΟον ίΐς Ικονιον. οι οε μαΟηται " επληρονντο χ^ί^"? ].μ''^' 
 
 και πνεύματος αγίου. XI V. " Εγενετο δε εΐ' Ικον'ιω 
 
 y 
 
 Ot δε hw.uTTO.Mark 
 XVI. it only. 
 
 αυΓούς ' i?.l[e,"heie'"• 
 - only. Exod. 
 
 X. 14 
 Β Mk. ch. 
 xviii. 6 only. 
 » -> Λ - , Ν « > χ - Nrh. V. 13. 
 
 κατα το αυτό ίΐςζλυίΐν αυτούς εις την συvayωyηv των imhu.x. ΐ4. 
 
 Luke 
 
 Ιουδαίων και λαλησαι ούτως ωςτε ττιστεΰσαι Ίουδο/ωΐ' τε ''''^="> ^3 
 
 χ. 5. 
 η. 23 
 Exoci. 
 
 only, 
 ix. 9. 
 νΤίς "1 Luke ix. 5. 
 
 /cat Ελλ))ΐ'ων ΤΓολυ πλήθος. " οι δε '' απαθησα 
 Ιουόαιοι eni]y£i^)av και εκακωσαν τας ψυγας των ίονων κ,,',η χν.' 
 κατα των αόελφων. ικανον μεν οϋν ^ -νρόνον " δι- 
 
 13, 
 14. 2 Tim. 
 i. 4. 
 ... . , _ ο constr., Mark 
 
 έτριψαν ΤΓαρρησιαί,ομεχΌΐ επι τω κυριω τω μηρτυ- pj,erfoniy. 
 
 λό 
 
 ρουντι τω Λόγω της ■χάριτος αυτού. 
 
 δίδο 
 
 ντι σημεία 
 
 Exod. χχνί. 
 24. 3 Kings 
 iii. 18. 
 
 q Jolin iii. Sfireff. r cli. xiii. 50. s ch vii. reft'. t ch. viii. 11 reff. tt absol., ch sii.lHrefT. 
 
 u ch. ix.27 reft. ν — Luke xviii. 9. 2 Cor. i. 9. rii. 13 al. w = Luke iv. 22. John iii. 26 al. cb. 
 
 XV. 8. X = ch. xiii. 43 reft. xx. 32. y ch. ii. 4 reft". 
 
 ABCDEG all Chr ThP.— 51. αττο των ττοδ. Ε 133. 137 syr TbP.— rec aft ttoS. ins 
 οΐ'Γωΐ', with DEG &c vss fF: but otn ABC all ν syr arm. — for (π, ίΐς Ε. — for η\θ., 
 κατηντησαν D-gr : 7]\dtv 133. — £ΐς το ικ. Ε. — 52. rec for γ£, it (corr»), with CDEG 
 &c vss ff: txt AB 13 al ν seth ar-pol. — χαράς και om 73. 
 
 Chap. XIV. 1. avro om 133. — for αντονς, αντον (see .xiii. 40) D-gr. — ούτως ττρος• 
 αυτούς D, πρ. αν, ουτ. Ε. — for πιστίνσαι, ηιστινιιν D, θανμασαι Ε, addg at end και 
 ■πισηυσαι. — ττληθ. πολν 80. 96. 142. — 2. rec απιιθηνί'τις {oppy α corrn tn the simpler 
 and more usual pres part. Meyer believes that the pres has been altered to the aor to 
 give the plup sense, but this is hardly likely), with EG &c Chr al : t.xt ABC 13. 18. 40. 
 GO. 73. 105. 180 am al Thl .' — for oi δί . . . . ίπηγ(ΐι>αΐ',—Ό, and syr-marg read ot 
 if ορχισνί'αγωγοι των invS. και οι αρχοντίς της συΐ'αγωγης ιττηγαγον αυτοις £ιωγμον 
 κατα των ίικαιων. — at end D syr-marg Cassiod add ο δι κύριος ιί^ωκίν ταχύ ίΐοηνην, 
 also (ο δ( κνρ. tip. £7η)ΐ?;σ(ν) Ε Bd-gr (and ίτΓ. διωγ. 115). — 3. διιτριβον Α. — διατριι- 
 ψαΐ'Τίς τταρητιασαμενοι {-σιαμινοι D') D. — ιπι om 180. — μαρτνρ. ίπι τω Α. — rec και. 
 διδ. (copula inserted), with CG &c seth Thl : txt {δίδοντος 133: -ουντι 180) ABDE all 
 
 iv. 3. 1 Cor. vii. 16: for the latter, comp. 
 Josephus's statement (B. J. ii. 20. 2), that 
 the majority of the wives of the Damascenes 
 were proselytes, with ch. i.x. '22 — 25. Strabo 
 (vii. 2: C, and H. p. 104) says, άπαιτις 
 της δίίσιδαιμοΐ'ίας άρχηγονς οΊονται τάς 
 γννιηκας. αύται δΐ και τους άνδρας προ- 
 καλούνται προς τάς ίπΊ π\ίον θίραπιίας 
 των βίων και ίορτάς και ποτιηαπμονς. — ■ 
 These were proselytes of the gate, or at 
 least inclined to Judaism. Ιξίβαλον] 
 
 Tiiough the πρώτοι της ποΚιως, at the 
 instigation, probably, of their wives, were 
 concerned, this seems to have been no legal 
 expulsion : for we find them revisiting An- 
 tioch on their return, ch. xiv. 21 ; — but only 
 a compulsory retirement for peace, and 
 their own safety's sake. 51.] As com- 
 
 manded by our Lord, ISIatt. x. 14, where 
 see note. Ίκόνιον] A populous city, 
 
 cast of Antioch in Fisidia, lying in a fertile 
 jilain at the foot of, and almost surrounded 
 by. Mount Taurus. It is reckoned by 
 ,\(HO|)h()n (Anab. i. 2. 10) as belonging 
 lo I'lirygia, — by Strabo (.xii. 5(J8), Cicero 
 (ad Farnil. xv. 4), and Pliny (v. 25) to 
 J^ycaonia, of wbiili it was at tliis time the 
 capital, — by Ammianus Marcellinus (xiv. 2) 
 
 to Pisidia. At this time, it was the capital 
 of a distinct territory, ruled by a tetrarch 
 (Plin. N. H. V. 27), and probably on that 
 account is not reckoned to any of the above- 
 mentioned districts. It became famous in 
 the middle ages as the capital of the Selju- 
 kian Sultans, and had a great part in the 
 growth of the Ottoman empire. It is 
 now Konia, a town of 30,000 inhabitants. 
 (Winer, RWB. ; C. and H.) 52.] See 
 
 Luke xxiv. 52; cli. v. 41 ; xii. 24. 
 
 Chap. XIV. 1.] κατα το αντό, ' toge- 
 ther' (reff.): ομον, Ilesych. : not, ^ in the 
 same manner,'' as Wolf and others. 
 Ελλήνων] Probably here these are the 
 (ηβόμίΐΌΐ τον θιόν, those of the uncircum- 
 cised who were more or less attached to the 
 Jewish religion. ούτως ώςτε, as in 
 
 E. V. ; not ϊγ'η'ίτο .... ωςτί ... , as Vater. 
 2.] The past part, indicates ' who be- 
 lieved not,' viz. when Paul preached. 
 έκάκωσαν, ' male aflecerunt,' — κακοόργως 
 διίβηκαν, Chrys. So Jos. Antt. xvi. \,2,κα- 
 κιιϋΐ', . . . καί της ίιιηάας ης ίΐχ(ν (ΐςτοι<ς 
 τταΊδης, άφαιρΰν. — \'er. 3 gives the sciiuel 
 of ver. 1, — ver. 4, of vcr. 2. Tlie /lir <i»'i', as 
 usual (see ch. xi. 1!)) takes \ip the n;inative 
 which had been interrupted. 3. τταρ'ρ. tirl
 
 ii. 1(1 
 bb 
 
 c James 
 
 ly• 
 
 , 23. 
 
 142 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XIV. 
 
 ^ ιϊ; Viark II ίί^α' τΐξ>ατα y'lViaOai '^ ^ιά των -χειρών αυτών. '* ίσγ^σΟη ^ «- 
 
 xxiv. 14. di TO πλ-ηυος της πόλεως, και οι μεν -ήσαν συν τοις ^^^ 
 ^•5'"''='=''' Ίουδοίοΐί;, οι δε "^ σύι; τοΐς ^^ αποστόΧοις. ^ Ώς δε 
 
 1 Cor. XV. 10. ./ „<Ν- •Λ- ^'r^' ^ 
 
 seesKings ε'νΕΐ'ετο ορμη των ίυνων τε και Ιουοαιων συν τοις 
 '*""•"'• α^ϊγουσιν αυτών, '' ύβρ/σοι και *" λιθοβολησοι αυτούς, 
 
 mes iii. 4fif Λ' Ε ', ' ^ 'λ "α ' 
 
 ly. Prov. " συΐ'ίοοιτες κατεφυ-γον εις τας ττοΛεις της Αυκαονιας 
 ^Matt.xxn..6. ^{,£^^^£,1, Kf^l /\ψβην κα\ την ' περίχωρα ι», ' κακει 'ήσαν 
 
 Χϊίϋ. 32. " k ' Λ y ' 
 
 1 These, ϋ. 2 ευα77*λι4ο/αει/οι. 
 
 only. 2Kiiig» ο Λ ' . ' ^ ' Λ ' 1 ' ?' ' ^ 
 
 eMatt χχί 35 '^''■* """'^ «vTjp £v Αυστροις αόυνατος τοις ποσιν 
 
 al.Esou.Tiii. π)''/Ί Λ^η' \' ^ ί-«\ ϊλ/ 
 
 2(iai. ίκαυητο νωλος εκ κοιΛιας μητρός αυτού, ος ουο^ττοτε 
 
 fch.xil. 12renr. , ^ ^ r ν -ΓΤ'λ Λλ- 
 
 giieb. τι. 18 πεοιεποτ ί/σεί'. ούτος ηκουεν του Ιίαυλου ΛοΛουντος 
 
 only. Gen. » ' ' 
 
 xix. 2(1. Λο'' '" λ•ς,\« p.f ι <\ - 
 
 h Malt, iii..') ai. ος ατενισας αυτω και ιόων οτι £γει ττιστιν 'του 
 
 Gen. xiii. 111. '' 
 
 i constr., Luke i. 10, 20. Jer. xxxiii. 20. k = Lnke XX. 1. Rom χτ. 20. I = Rom. xv. 1 only. Joel iii. 10, 
 
 m absol., John ix. 8 only. η Luke i. 15 reff. ο and constr., oh. x. 4 reff. ρ pres., John i. 40. ii. 
 
 Θ. ch.ix.2e. q constr., ch. XX. 3. 1 Cor. ix. 10. 1 Pet. iv. 17. Winer, } 45. 4. 
 
 V syrr ar-pol copt slav-ms Chr Oec. — 4. 7]v if εσχισμΐνυν D. — for 01 Se, aWoi δε D. — 
 at end D (syr-marg .'') add κο\λωμενοι (this word is in Syr also) Sia τον Xoyov του Oeov. 
 — 5. τε om D 133 sah Chr. — των ιονδ. D.— 6. συν. και καηψ. D : σννίΐδοτες 33. 34 slav 
 Thl' : add 01 απόστολοι 21. 26. 41 : alii aliter. —εις λνστ. CD'. — νιριχ. ολην DE ν 
 (ολ. jr.). — 7. εναγ. ήσαν ABD al {coi-rn of order?): txt CEGH mss (nrly) Chr Thl 
 Oec. — at end D ins και εκεινηθη o\ov το πλ/^θος επι τη διδαχή• ο δβ ττ. και β. διετριβον 
 εν λνστροις, also Ε Bed-gr ν (Sixt) τον \oyov του θιον και εζεπλησσετο πάσα η 
 ΤΓο\υπ\7]θια επί τη διδ. αυτών' ο δε π. κ. β. δητρ. ενλ. — 8. αδυν. εν\. Β; εκαθ.αδυν. 
 D al. — χωλ. om D: and alii aliter. — της μητρ. D'. — rec aft αντου ins υπάρχων {inter- 
 polated from ch iii. 2), with GH &c {ων 69) vss Chr al : txt ABCDE all vss.— rec 
 περίίπεπατηκει {see note), with {ττεριπεπατηκίΐ) DEGH all ff: περιεπατη^ει Thl' : 
 ττεπατηκει 13?: txt ABC all. — 9. ΐ}κουσ£ ADEGH all ν Chr Thl' {alteration to suit 
 the other aorists, the force of the imperf being overlooked : see note) : txt B(e sil)C 
 &c al sah al Οοο.^λαλ. om 68 : λέγοντος 4. 66-. 100. — aft λαλ. ins υπάρχων εν 
 φοβω D {possidens in timore d). — ατενισας δε αυτω ο ττ. D, προς ον ατ. ο. π. Ε 
 
 τ. κυρ.] Α pregnant constr.: — 'speaking certain. There are the ruins of about forty 
 
 with boldness, which boldness was grounded Christian churches on the north side of the 
 
 on confidence in the Lord.' — τω κνρίω is Kara-dagh, at a place called by the Turks 
 
 God : see ch. iv. 29,30, and ch. xx. 32, τψ Bin-bir-Kilisseh (the 1001 churches), which 
 
 θβω κ. τψ λόγψ της χάριτος αΰτοϋ. the most recent travellers believe may be 
 
 SiSovTi, vrithout και, defines μαρτυροϋντι : Lystra (C. and H.). In one of these places 
 
 viz. ' by giving,' &c. 4.] So Virg. (probably at Lystra, see note, ch. xvi. 1) 
 
 JEn. ii. 39, ' Scinditur incertum studia in Paul found and took up Timothy on his 
 
 contraria vulgus.' — Such a split into two second journey; and from τ(κι•ον, 1 Cor. 
 
 factions was a common occurrence, on far iv. 17, compared with πατήρ, as defined 
 
 less important occasions, in these cities of ib. ver. 15, we are justified in concluding 
 
 Oriental Greeks. (C. and H.) 5.] that he had been converted iy Me .<4jU.,• and, 
 
 ορμή is not a rtish (' impetus,' Vulg. : ' as- if so, during this visit. — There appear to 
 
 sault,' E. v.), but as Hesych. βουλή, ίπι- have been few Jews in the district : we hear 
 
 θυμία, — as is manifest from συνιδόντες, of no synagogue. A-uKaovias] Strabo 
 
 rightly rendered in E. V. ' they were ware describes Lycaonia (xii. 6) as a hilly plain 
 
 of it;' which it would be strange if they among the mountain-spurs of Taurus, very 
 
 were not, if an assault had been made on ill watered, cold and bare, but exceedingly 
 
 them. 6. Λύστραν] τά Λ. also, ver. 8. adapted for sheep-pasture and the growth 
 
 This, as well as Derbe (of both which very of wool. 8. Ικάθητο] Not ' dwelt' 
 
 little further is known), was probably a as Kuin., but 'sat,' probably in the forum or 
 
 small town at the foot of the singular moun- some place of resort. ττεριβιτάτησεν 
 
 tain-mass known as the Kara-dagh, or is the historic past : ' who never walked.' 
 
 black mountain, Lystra being S., and Derbe The pluperfect seeming more apt, it has 
 
 S.E. from Iconium. The sites are veryun- been altered in the later MSS accordingly.
 
 4—13. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 143 
 
 ^ σο)θηΐ'αι, είττεν ^ ueyaXv τη ώωΐ'η Ανάστηθι εττι τους r = ch.iv. 9 ai. 
 
 ,^ , , β, ^ U "Χ ί / 11 -/ «μ.τ-ψ,οΗ. 
 
 ΤΓΟΡας σου οουος. και τιΛατυ και πίοΐίπατίΐ. * οί τε χ^^,»» 24 
 
 > ι only. 
 
 ογΧοι icoi>TtQ ο εποιησίν Παύλος ^ Βπηξ)αν την "" φωνην ' Tneb.'^xu/is' 
 ακτΜΐ' Λυκαονιστί Λέγοντες vJi υεοι ομηιωυεντίς αν- 'Τ=?«)„ 
 
 / '^ ' α ch. III. 8. 
 
 Θ' Χ 'iTi ν r - 12 ' ' Λ ^ John iv. 14 
 
 οωτΓΟίς κατερησαν ττρος ημάς. '■-' εκαλουν τε τον oniy. isa. 
 
 Βαρνάβαν Δ('α, τον δε Παυλον Έρμην, επειδή αυτός ^ΐ' ^ ^r'^jmi' Τχ 
 
 f ν Γ / - Λ ' 13 " • ^ - Λ ^ _ a. U g. IX. 
 
 Ο -^ Ύΐ-γουμενος του Λογού. ο τε ιερεύς του ΖΛίος του „ Rom. ix. 23. 
 
 » α^"'Λ ' <b/ • \ Hcb. U. 17. 
 
 οντος προ της ποΛεως ταύρους και στέμματα επι xw πρό^, 
 
 VC Λ- •' ν - » \ ι1"ΠΛ efl' here only. 
 
 τους ττυΛωνας εvεyκaς συν τοις ο^Αοις ηυελεν υυειν. ^'^^"''°"J' 
 
 /(γεμών, lamblich. de Mvsler. init. a ch. xii. 6, 14, ανασσ' "Ογκα πρό τιυ'λεωΓ, jEsch. Theb. 162 
 
 (Dind.). b here only t. c = ch. x. 17al. Gen. xliii. 19. d=• and conslr. w. inf. pres., 
 
 John xvi. 19. Luke s. 29. ch. xvii. 18. e absol., 1 Cor. x. 20. (Exod.xxiii. 18 vat.) 
 
 (Syr aeth). — rec ττιστ. εχ. with EGH &c ν ff: txt ABCD al am demid all. — 10. ri; om 
 BCD^ (as unnecessary, its force being overlooked) : ius AD-EGH mss (appy) ff. — bef 
 ανιιστ, ins σοι λέγω εν τω (om Ε al) ονόματι του κ-ιιριου (γ. κ. om al : add ημών Ε al 
 vss) ιησ. \ο. (γρ. om al Thl-) CDE all Bed-gr vss Thl- (interpolation from ch iii. 6) : 
 txt ABGH most mss ν aeth al Chr ThP Oec. — ορθώς E-gr Η all syr-marg Thl' : add και 
 •περιπατεί D syr-marg. — rec ηλλίτο (alteration to suit the imperf περιεττατεϊ), with GH 
 (ηΧετο) &c : txt ABC (ανη\ατο D', ανηΧΚατο D^, and prefix ευθέως (οτα Ε) παρα- 
 χρημα DE vss) all (ί;λλαΓο all) ν (exilivit et ambulabat) al Chr. — 11. rec Ci (alteration 
 from the characteristic τε), with CDE &c : txt AB al £eth copt. — όπερ Β. — έποι. σημειον 
 4.— rec ο π. with GH &c : txt ABCDE 13. 137. 180 lect 12 Chr.— λυλ-αονιστΓ/ G: 
 lingua loci sui Syr ar-erp sah. — τοις ανθρ. D al. — 12. ελαΧουν 57. 180. — ίε D 38. 40. 
 9ό'. 104. ΙΟδ e Chr.— rec τον μεν (μεν inserted to answer to the foil g it), with EGH 
 &c Chr al (τον μεν om D) : txt ABC' 36. 137. 1«0 vss.— Ci«i' DEGH lect Vi.—i]v 
 om 137- — bef iyy. om CD. — 13. rec ο Ιε (alteration as in ver 11), with DEGH (ot ίε 
 ιερείς &c ε%•εγκαντεν &c ΐ]θε\οΐ' D aP feth) al vss : txt ABC (τότε C, but τ is erased : 
 τϋτε ο lect 12) 15. 18. 3ϋ. 40. 105 ν aeth Chr.— Γου οιτος δ. D 137.— rfjc om D'. — 
 rec aft πολ. add αυτών (supplementary insertion), with EGH &c syr al Chr al : txt 
 ABCD all ν Syr ar-erp copt sah Eeth arm. — ταυρ. αυτοις Ό : στεμ. αυτυις Ε 137• — 
 προς τ. πνλ. 105: add domtts in qua hospitabantur Syr ar-erp. — ηθεΧον Η (D see 
 above) all tol aeth Thl' (but D al' aeth are alone in oi up. &c above). — επιθνειν D. — 
 
 Meyer supposes the alteration to have been see note on ch. ii. 4. — These ΐπιφάνειαι of 
 
 the other way, from " the constant pre- the gods are frequent subjects of heathen 
 
 ference which the Greeks gave in narration poetry and mythology. Hom. Od. p'. 484, 
 
 to the aorist over theplusq. perf. :" butqu.? says, icat τε θευι ζεινοισιν ευικότες όλλο- 
 
 9.] The imperfect ηκου€ν is im- δαποΊσι ΐΙαντοΊιιι τελίθοντες επιστρω- 
 
 portant. He 'was listening' to Paul's φώσι πΰ\ηας. It was in the neighbouring 
 
 preaching, and, while listening, his coun- country of Phrygia that Jupiter and Mer- 
 
 tenance, read by the Apostle's gift of spi- cury were said to have wandered, and to 
 
 ritual discernment, gave token of ' faith to have been entertained by Baucis and Phile- 
 
 he healed.' axev. αΰτ.] See note on mon : ' Jupiter hue, specie mortali, cum- 
 
 ch. xiii. 9. 10. μty. τη φ.] Raising que parente Yenit Atlantiades positis ca- 
 
 his voice above the tone in which he was ducifer alis.' (Ov. Alet. viii. G2G 7•) Dio 
 
 before speaking. The article is important. Chrysostom (Orat. xxxiii. p. 408) says, 
 
 11. Λυκαονιστί] The nature of this φασί τους οίκιστάς ηοωας η θευνς πολ- 
 
 dialect is uncertain : its existence is further λύκις ΙπιητρΙφεσθαι τάς αυτών πόλεις. 
 
 mentioned by Steph. Byzant., see note on (From Mr. Humphry's note.) 12.] 
 
 ver. 20. The notice is inserted to shew This distinction is (besides the reason 
 
 that the Apostles had no knowledge of the given) in accordance with what Paul him- 
 
 iriference drawn by the crowd, till they .saw self cites (as the saying of his adver- 
 
 the bulls being brought to their doors, ver. saries, it is true, but not therefore with- 
 
 13. So Chrysostom : οΰκ ην τούτο οϋΰΐπω out some physical foundation), i) παρον- 
 
 ίηλον Ty yap οϊκείί^ φων^ ίφθεγγοντο . . . σία τον πώματος άβΰενίις. So Chrysostom, 
 
 till τοντο oS'Civ αντοΊς έλεγαν επειδι) (ε ΙμαΙ Caicn και άπυ τϊΊς υφεως αΚιοπρε- 
 
 εΐόυν τά στέμματα, τότε ϋελΟόντες κ.τ.λ. πής είναι 6 Βαρνάΐ'^αι:, ΙΙοιη. .\.\χ. 
 
 Hom. XXX. — On the relation of this inc-ident ήγονμ£νος τοΰ λ<5γον] So lamblichus, 
 
 to the enquiry regarding the gift of tongues, of Hermes, in reff. : ' vocis et sermonis
 
 144 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XIV. 
 
 '^""Mk^^jishf Άκουσαντες δε οί αττοστολοι Βαρνάβας και Παύλος abcd 
 
 vii H. ' f ?ν » • ' y- \ f » / > - β ν ' '^ ' *■ i'd"- 
 
 ghertoniy. οιαροιιζ,αντίς Tu ιματια αντων εςίτττ/οίΐσον εις τον 
 
 iiMatt. viii.29 "Χ'^"" Κξ)αί,οντίς ^'^Kcit AijovTiQ Άνόοίς, τί ταύτα 
 
 i/amesv. 17 ποίΐΐτί ', καΙ ίηΐΕίς ' ο/ίοιοτταθε/ς tauev νμιν άνθρωποι, 
 
 constr ch ίυα-γ-γίλιί,ομίνοι υμάς απο τούτων των μάταιων εττι- 
 
 χνί. 1U. Gal. ' , • ' /ι ^ πι y - Λ • ι ν > ν \ 
 
 i.st. 1 Pet. i. ar()f(/<fti' ετΓί Utov ί,ωντα, ος 87rotr)a£l•' τοι; ονξ)ανον και 
 k-hereoniy. ^-jj,, -y,„„ ^fn γη^, θαΧασσαν και τταντα τα εν αυτοις, 
 Ι Liik "χνΗ."!. ος iv ταις " παρωγημίναις ° "γενεαις ύασίν πάντα τα 
 
 Deut. XXX. 2. ,,^ ,„ '_,«,- ,„ 17 r' ' 
 
 m 1 Thess. 1. ζϋνη ' πορίυίσοαι ταις ^ υουις αυτών, ' KaiToiye ουκ 
 "xea.^Anlb.'ii.^ αμάρτυρον ίαυτον αφηκίν '^ α-γαθουργων, '' ουηανοΟίν 
 o-ch. xiii. 36 * νΐτοίις όιοους και " καιρούς ^ καρποφόρους, ^ ίμπιπΧων 
 Tide.'ier.^n. ^ '"^oi^r/c και ίυφροσυνης τάς καρδίας ίιμων. Και 
 
 Jo>h. χχίί. 5. „,, c'\d ' ^"\ e" 
 
 q = Luke i. 79. τούτα Λεγοντες μόλις κατεπαυσαν τους ούλους του 
 
 r Heh. ίν. 3only. s here only f. "ϋκ earii/ 3t ά/ιαρτυροι/ τό μ^ιβθοί τ. 7Γρο6ιρι?μι•'ΐ'ωΐ' χρπΜί'τωι/, 
 
 Jo.s. ΑηΙΙ. xiv. 7. 2. t '= MhU. iii. 15 al. John si. 48. Rev. ii 20. η 1 Tim. vi. 18 only t. 
 
 V ch. xxvi. 13 only t• ^I.schin. p. 73. iS, from Hesiod. w ch. xxviii. 2. Heb. vi. 7. Rev. xi. ti only. 
 
 Job V. 111. X = here only. τοΪγ /iaipotc βϊκωμ, Polyb. iii. 9. 7. y here only. Ps. tvi. 34. 
 
 Ε here only. See Rom. xv. 24. I's. cii. .5. cxiiv. Hi. ach.ii.4tial.fr. b ch. ii. 28 only. Eslh. 
 
 ix. 18, li). cch. xxvli. 7, 8, 10. Rom. v. 7. 1 Pet. iv. 18 only. Prov. xi. 31. d = here only. (Heb. iv. 
 8. Ps. Ixxxiv. 3.; e ch. x. 47 refl. 
 
 14. ακονσας Si D: om ot απ. D Syr. — ίαντων AB 13 al : αύτων all {common mistake 
 wheie no emphasis is on the pron and it is yet reflective in sense) : txt (CD.EGH most 
 mss Chr Thl Oec — rec ηςεττ. (corrn to suit ίΐς τ. οχλον), with C^GII &c : txt ABC'DE 
 most mss ν Syr sah arm Chr Thl' (comm).— for uc, ιπι C. — 15. και φωρονί'τις D : 
 κ•, λεγ. om 18. 100 sah. — a (corrd to εις?) τι ΑΚ—και om Ό.—υμ. ισμ. C 38. 93. 113 
 Chr: υμ. om Η 137 Aor : aft ανθρ. 13. — for υμάς, υμιν D Iren, and υπως {iva E) 
 air. T. T. μ. (r. ματ. τουτ. 137) ιττιστρίτ^ητε (-φητε Ε) DE Iren. — rec τον θ. τον ζ. 
 (alteration for more precision : see note), with GH &c Chr al : txt ABCD^ {τον θ. ζ. D') 
 Ε 13. 25. 40. 105 Ath— roy πυιηααντα Ό.—αντη 96.— 17. καίτοι ABC 13 lect 12 
 copt sah Ath : ictn yt D E {corrections : the -γε or the rot l/einr/ deemed unnecessary : see 
 note): t.\t C^GII mss_(nrly, appy) Chr Thdrt Thl Oec— for εαντ., αυτόν ABE: txt 
 CD(a0. εαυ. D)GH mss (appy) Ath Chr Thdrt al. — ηψηκεν G.— rec αγαθοττοιων 
 {altern to more usual word), with DEGH (αγαθοττων) &c Chr Thdrt al : txt ABC all 
 Ath. — rec aft ουρ. ins ημιν {supplementary addition, as is shewn by the varr, coupled 
 with the total omission in A S(c, u-hich is no doubt the oriyl reading), with Β (e sil) &c 
 copt Chr Oec: υμιν CDEGH all flor syr slav Ath Thdrt Thl Iren: ουτοις Syr ar-erp 
 Leo : sah and Syr (Tisch, but qu ?) add αντοις aft ayntiovpy. : txt A 13 ν seth Syr (Tisch, 
 but qu.') .sah Iren-ms. — iiO. νετ. A 13. 73 lect 12 vss. — εμπιμπλων {ενπ. D) DE. — for 
 τ()οφ., τρυφης 7.3 : χαράς 25.— rec ημών {corrn, the assertion seeming to be of general 
 application to the speaker as well as his hearers), with AB(e siI)GH al ν (ed) copt aeth 
 ar-pol Chr Leo al : αντων Syr sah al-erp : txt CDE all am demid tol flor syr slav al 
 Ath Thdrt ThP Iren al. — 18. ειποντες 137.— μογις D copt sah. — rote οχλοις90. I42. — 
 
 potens,' Macrob. Saturn, i. 8: λόγου προ- xii. 13. 14.] The App. were within: 
 φήτης, Orph. II. xxvii. 4: λαλίστατος κ. on being told, they ίξεπηδησαν — 'rushed 
 λογιώτατος θεών απάντων, Lucian, Gal- forth.,' into the crowd. 15. ματαίων] 
 lus. 2. 13.] irpo T. 'jr. (see ref ) ; i. e. viz. Θέων : the words of 1 Thess. i. 9, έπ- 
 οι 7iεvς πρήπυλος : no ellipsis of Ίερον or εστρίφατε προς τίινθιυν άπο των ειδώλων, 
 any thing else. ταύρους κ. στΐμ- are remarkably like these. θ€ον ζώντα, 
 ματα] Not for ταύρους ίστεμμίνους : the without the articles, is characteristic of Paul: 
 -garlands may have been to hang on the see Rom. ix. 2(>. 2 Cor. iii. 3 ; vi. IG. 
 doors of the house where the Apostles were: I Thess. i. 9. 1 Tim. iii. 15; iv. 10 al. 
 or for manifold purposes connected with the 16.] Compare Rom. iii. 25, 26, and 
 sacrifice. ' Ipsie denique fores, ipsae hostise, ch. xvii. 30. 17.] Compare Rora. i. 
 ipsa arae, ipsi ministri et sacerdotes eorum 19, 20. The words ovpavoQtv ΰετονς Si- 
 coronantur.' Wetst. tovs ττυλώνας δυύς had a remarkable applicability in a 
 are not the gates of the city, but the doors country where we have seen from Strabo 
 of the outer court of the house : see ch. (on ver. 6) that there was great scarcity of
 
 14—21. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 115 
 
 μη ΘυΕίν αυτοις. ^ ΚπηΧθαν οε απο Αντ(ογε/ας και fdat., here only. 
 
 Ικονίου Ιουόαιοι, και πίΐσαντες τους ογ^Αους και λιυα- °,"'[ι "°'^• 
 
 ^ ι-Γ - \ i >' k ''>' " 'λ ' h Ji.lm viii. 5. 
 
 σαιτίς τον Ιΐουλοί' ίσυραν εί;ω της πόλεως, νομι- ch τ 2fireir. 
 
 IV ο ' 90 1 \ ' <>^ - i ch.viii.3reff. 
 
 σαντες αυτόν τευνηκεναι. κνκλωσαντων οε των Μα- οΐ1'''χχΤδ μ 
 
 Θ'^πι' ν ' -\ύ ' "" '\ 'η~ Neh. xiii.'i'O.' 
 
 ητων αυτόν αναστας (ίςηλυεν εις την ττοΛιν, και rrj ι = juhn χ. 24 
 
 επαύριον ° ε!^ΐ}\θεν συν τω Βαρνάβα ° εις /\ερβην. f,^'^^"^^?• 
 
 21 ρ' Λ ' ' ^ 'Λ*' ^qO' 33.) 
 
 '^ ευαγγελισα^ευοί τε τ?)!» ποΛιν ε/cεtv^}^' και /ttat/rjreu- m = ch. ϊχ.34 
 σαντεο "^ <k:oiovc ^ υπεστοεχίαν ^ εις την Αυστοαν και ε(ς• "•'"'"•'■sp.sc. 
 
 ■' ^ >'^' Γ ^ Num. ζι. 32. 
 
 ο ch. xi. 25 reff. ρ constr., ch. τϋί. 25 reff. q trans.. Matt. xiii. .^2. (xxvii. 57 
 
 iiitr.) xxviii. 19 only f. r » ch, xii. 12 reff. s ch. viii. 25 reff. 
 
 θυίη> αντους 137. — at end, C 33. 137• 180 all syr-marg arm al add aWa ττοοίνιαθαι 
 ίκαστον ιις τα ίδια. — 19. hef ί7τΐ]\θ. ins διατρφοιτων Ss αυτών (^ικει 40: ev λυστροις 
 98) και (οιη C) διδασκόντων (om D ins D') CDE all Bed-gr syr-marg arm slav (mss) 
 ar-erp Cassiod : alii aliter. — ct om CDE &c as above. — rec ίττηΧθον : txt AB. — τίνες ιουδ. 
 απ. a. κ. ι. D, τιν. απ. α. κ. ι. ιονϋ. Ε Bed-gr ν al Cassiod : οι απ. αντ. κ. ικ. και 
 ιουδαίοι 15. 18. 180. — και . . . οχλ. om 27- 105. 106: to τεθν. cm 100. — for πεισαντες, 
 επισει(ταντ(ς D 31 syrr. — C all syr-marg arm slav (mss) read και διαλεγομεΐ'ων αυτών 
 παρρησία έπεισαν (ανεπ. 95'. 180) τ. οχ\. αποστηναι απ (om al) αυτών XtyovTfQ οτι 
 ονδεν (om 180) αληθές λεγουσιν α\\α πάντα ψίυίονται. — λιθοβολησανης Α 15. 18. 
 36. 180.— rec «συρον with AB(e siI)CH &c Thl Oec : txt DEG all Chr. —νομιζοντες 
 {corrn as more suitable) ABD 13 : txt CEGH mss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec— rec τεθναναι 
 {corrn: the contracted form ivas the more common : so Meyer), with D {τεθν. αυτόν) 
 EGH most mss Chr Thl Oec : txt ABC 13. 15. 18. 29. 36. 69. 73.— 20. rec αυτ. τ. μ. 
 {corrn of order), with EGH &c : txt ABCD (r. μ. αυτού D') {see similar mistake ch ix. 
 20) 13. 18. 951. 113. 137. 180 Chr.— λυσΓραΐ' πυΧιν Ό. -εν τη πολει 137.— την 
 επαυρ. D'.— 21. ήλθε 40: {ξί/λΟοι/ 38: ειςηλθε 26 \βαί.—εΐ'αγγελιζομενοι ADEH 
 {corrn aft ver Τ : see also ch xi. 20) : txt B(e sil)CG al. — for τε, δε D 96 copt sah. — 
 for την πολ. εκ., τους εν τη πηλει D-gr. — μηθ. ττολλοιις υπεατρεφον D. — τηι• om D 93. 
 113 Chr ThF. — rec om f tc bef ικ. and avr. {as unnecessary .• the circumstantial repetition 
 of εις is original), with B'(e sil)DGH &c e ν Chr Thl Oec : txt ACE-gr 13. 40. 69. 9όΚ 
 
 water. He relates that in one city of Antipatro Derbete mihi non solum hospi- 
 Lycaonia, where water was reached by dig- tium verum etiam summa familiaritas inter- 
 ging the wells very deep, it was sold for cedit') . . . i<p' ημών δε και τά Ίσαυρα κ. 
 money. — The idea of Mr. Humphry, that τήν Αέρβην 'Αμύντας είχεν, επιθέμενος 
 the conclusion of this speech is a citation τφ Αερβήτγ, κ. άνελων αυτόν. And 
 from some lyric poet, seems improbable on Stephanus Byzantinus, Α'ερβη φρονριον 
 other accounts, and is rendered more so by Ίσαυρίας και λιμ1]ν (for this, evidently an 
 the aboved-noticed propriety. 19. irei- error, the French translators of Strabo pro- 
 σαντ€9 Toiis δχλ.] άπιστοι γαρ λυαάονες, pose to read λίμιηι. There is a large lake, 
 ώς κα'ι 'Αριστοτέλης μαοτυρεϊ. Schol. on now called Ak Gol, near the presumed site 
 Homer, II. iv. 88, 92. — They stoned him, of Derbe, see C. and H. i. 212.) .... τίνες 
 not in the Jewish method, but tumultuously δε Αίοβειαν, ο ίστι ry των Αυκαόνων 
 and in the streets, dragging him out of the φωνι) άρκευθος. (Wetst.) From this va- 
 city afterwards. — He refers to this stoning, riety of the name, Αέρβεια, Mr. Hamilton 
 2 Cor. xi. 24, απηξ εΧιθάσθην. 20. thought the modern Divle might be Derbe. 
 κυκλ , not to bury him, but, as would na- Mr. Lewin (i. 167) objects, that there is no 
 turally be the case, in ynonrnful anxiety lake near Divle : but this objection only 
 and regret. άναστάς] The prima affectsthe conjectural emendation mentioned 
 facie, and I think the right impression is, above. — From Derbe not being enumerated, 
 that this recovery was supernattiral. It is 2 Tim. iii. 11, with Antioch, Iconium, and 
 not indeed so sti'ongly implied, as to leave Lystra, as the scene of any of Paul's suffer- 
 no doubt : es[)ecially as a blow from a stone ings, we may perhaps infer that none befel 
 would be likely to stun and occasion the him there. — They may have fled to Derbe, as 
 appearance of death. Δ^ρβην] See being in a diflerent jurisdiction from Lystra ; 
 above, on ver. 6. Strabo, xii. 6, .says of it, the la'ter being comprised in the Roman 
 της δ' Ίσαυρικής εστίν εν πX^vpιnς »'/ province of Galatia (see above on \er. 5), 
 Αίρβη, μάλιστα rj Καππαδηκίφ επιπε- whereas Derbe seems to have belonged at 
 φυκ'υς, το τοϋ ΆντιπιΊτροιι τιψαννε'ιον τοΐι this time to Antiocrhus, king of (Jomma- 
 Αεφήτον (cf. Cicero, Epp. xiii. 73, ' Cum gene. See Lewin, i. p. 168. Stribo, xiv. 5. 
 Vol. II, L
 
 146 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XIV. 22—28. 
 
 tch.xT.32. ΐΛΤοι-ίοΐ' K(ti tic AvTto\£iav, ^'- ίπιστηοιί,οντίς τας abcd 
 
 41• xviii. ^ _ /, - U Λ - ν ' / W - EGH 
 
 f2K".'.s'i.n.) ■*/"'X"C των μαθητών, τταρακαλουντίς εμμίνίΐν τύ) 
 jiii. 42ni.fr πίστίΐ, κπι ΟΤΙ οια πολλών υλιψεων θ£ΐ r /μας ίΐς- 
 
 τ con^tr., heie » /> - » ^ ν Ο Λ ' - ίί ~ 2^ ζ ΛΛ ' 
 
 only. TuU- fXUiiv ίΐς ττ/1' ^ ίίασιλίίαν του Γ^ίου. '''' Αίΐροτοιηϊσαίτίς 
 μ^ι-ωμ, Xen. ^f ouTOic KdT ίκκλησιαν ττοίσμυτίοονς, ττροςΕυςαμίΐΌΐ 
 
 Μ•-πι. iv.4.4. _ ι Ι ι _' i ^1 
 
 J^i'"ji^'''^J'^• ** μίτα * ΐ'ΐ}στ£(ωΐ' παρίϋίντο αυτυυς τω κνοΐω ^ ίΐς ον 
 Deur'xxwi. ^ πίΤΓίστίυκΗοαν. και ' δΐίλθόντίς την Πισιδίαν ηλθον 
 
 1Η. Sir. f ^_^ ^ , ΛΕ ^ \ Λ ' » π / ^ ΐ Λ ' 
 
 w"'''"% **^" Πί/μ(/)ΐ'λίαν, κοί λπλί/σοί'τίς ίν Ufp-yrj τον \oynv 
 xMaif.vii.i3|. " κατίβ}ΐσαν ίΐς Λτταλίίαν, κακζίΟίν απίπ^ίχισαν ίΐς 
 
 LMkrxv.ii. »./• "iJ'' πι ??' "' 
 
 Η,ιί'^χ'Γί AvTto^ficiv, oi7tv ϊ/σπν παραοίοομίνοι τρ χα|θΐτι του 
 xii'h."iT.i2 θίοΰ " ίΐς το fpynv ο " επΧηοωσαν. ' '^ παρογίνομίνοι 
 ^2c"''''^il) '^"' CTuvoyo'yovTfc την ίκκΛησιαν ανί/γ-νίΛΛον Οίτα 
 a=ch.ii.46 £πο(η<τ£ν Ο (7£ος μίτ ηυτων, και οτι T)votu.£v τοις ευνίσιν 
 
 ^ ''*''•. .„t/j' ' 28 u^' Ο ι^» ' 'ν 'Λ' 
 
 b-.h.xi. 3U (^υοαν 7Γ/στ£(«ίς•. "^ οιετοίρον ο£ γρονον ουκ οΛί^ον 
 
 br•;!, and pas- > SI ΛΊ < 
 
 cabM;i..ch.x.9 συν τοίς μαθηταις. 
 
 d ■- ι Tim. iv. Χν. Κοί τίνες "^ καηΧθοντίς απο της• Ιουδαίας εδι- 
 
 14 al. 
 
 eMutt. XTii.2I. Ο Mk. Luke ϋ. 37 al. 2 Cor vi. 5 reff. 2 King.s xii. Ifi. f Luke xxiii. 46. ch. xs.32. Ps xxx. 5. 
 
 Κ John i. i2 rctt. li ch. xii. Id. xiii. (V ich. iv. 2i', 31. viii. 2fi al. k John ii. 12 refl'. 
 
 Ich. xiii. 4refr. in => cli. χτ. 411. 1 Pet. ii. 23. JdIih xix. 30 t. Dent, i 8. η — ch. xiii 2 al. 
 
 ο = (h. XII. 2.=! reff. ρ absol., Luke xii 51 ch x. 32 ;ι1. q = Matt. ii. 4 al. ch. χτ. 3U. Ps. xlix ft. 
 
 r = ch. XV. 4. xix 18. 2Coriii7. Rom. xv. 21. Deut. xxTi. 3. s Luke i. 72. x. 37. Luke only. 
 
 1 1 Cir. xvi. ». 2 Cor. ii. 12. Col. iv. 3P u absol., John iii. 22. ch. xii. 19 refl'. τ ch. xii. 18 
 
 refl. Rev. xii. 12. w ch. viii. 5 refl". 
 
 100. 105. 180 (Syr.').— 22. και παρακ. C al 69. 100. 105. 137 Syr arr arm ThP Oec— 
 ΤΓίΐρακ. Tt D-gr ν (not tol). — ifi ημ. θλίψ. 177. — ίλίί'Κ' D'. — 23. rec πρκτβ. κατ ίκκλ. 
 {coirn of order ?), with EGII &c vss ft": txt {αατα D) ABCD all ν Syr ar-pol.— προς- 
 ivi. Ct D: και πρ. al vss or πρ. τι.- — νηττίΐας 25. 60. ί)5'. 180: add και 137. — 
 αν7(ΐΐς G. — 7Γtπιστ^vκaσ^l' D ν (copt syr al .') (and και pref 78• 1•ί7)• — 24. δηλθ. St D 
 copt. — 7}\θαΐ' D. — bef πα/ιφ. ins τιμ• BCE 40. 43. (18. 73. 98. 180 {to correspond with 
 την τΓίσ.) : cm ADGH &o ff. — 25. ας ττίιιγην A amdeniid. — aft r. λυγον ins του κυρίου 
 ACE 13. 40. 81. 137 ν Syr arm syr* slav : του θίον Ε ar-erp. — (irraXt«v ACDE : 
 txt GH. — at end, D 137 syr* add ίυαγγίλιζομειοι αυτούς. — 27. συναζαντίς D. — rec 
 ai'i]yyn\av {corrn to aorist as more usual), with Έ{αττη•γ. Ε Bas Chr)GH &c Till 
 Oec: txt ABCD {ainiyynXor D) all copt.— ο Θίος «ττοι. D 90. 133. 180 vss: and add 
 αυτοις (om D^) μιτα των φι•χων αυτών Ό. — θνραν τοις tGv. δια τηστιων 133. — 28. rec 
 aft δΐίτρ. add tKn, with EGH &c vss Chr al : om ABCD 15. 18. 33. 34. 36. 40. 81. 113. 
 180 V aeth arm. 
 
 Chap. XV. 1. aft ιαυδαΐΊς, ins των πητιστίνκοτων απο της αιρεσεως των φαρισαιων 
 8. 137 syr-marg (see tioie). — rec παητίμνησθί (Meyer thinks the aor, in the sense oj' the 
 futurum exactum, tnay he an emendation. Is/id rather think t fie yresent to have been the 
 corrn, as being the simpler, and not therefore ' the more genuine,' as Bloomf.), with EGH &c 
 
 Dio, lix. 8; Ix. 8. Jos. Antt. xix. 5. 1. Journal of classical and sacred philology, 
 
 21. vTreo-rp.] They were not far Camb., March, 1856, where the justice of the 
 
 from the famous pass, called the ' Cilician above conjecture is called in question, the 
 
 gates,' which leads direct into that pro- writer says, ' here ("ft >//υ«ς κ'ςίλ^. &c. is the 
 
 vince : but, notwithstanding all that had language of the preachers themselves, as the 
 
 befallen him, Paul prefers returning by the word on shews :' and proceeds to remark 
 
 churches which he had founded, to a short justly on the transition from the obhque to 
 
 and easy journey to the coast by his own the direct narrative, as especially characteris- 
 
 home. 22. ήμας] Is not this a token tic of St. Luke's style, and corroborative of 
 
 of the presence of the narrator again .' My the unity of authorship between different 
 
 own conjecture would be, that he remained parts of the Acts, and between the Acts and 
 
 m Antioch durint; the journey to Iconium, the Gospel. — But if so, should we not rather 
 
 &c., and back. The events between those look for u/jat• than )}/(«ς? The writer, I am 
 
 two limits are much more summarily related glad to see, joins with me in rejecting the 
 
 than those before or after. [In an ait. in the 'common' explanation (see Prolegg. p. 7)
 
 XV. 1—3. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 147 
 
 Βασκον 
 
 y 
 
 τους αοίλφους οτι 
 
 εθίΐ Μωυσίως, ου ουνασθ 
 (ττασίοίς και ί,ν'^ΐσζως 
 
 eav μη 
 £ σωθτιΐ'αι. 
 ουκ ολι- 
 
 ,flr 
 
 ιyης 
 
 ιηρίτμηΌητζ 
 
 2 ' "^ 
 
 ■γίνομίνης ουί' y 
 
 ) Πηυλο) και τω 
 
 χ Lake i. 59 
 rtl. Gcn.xvii. 
 
 αοναρα προς αυτούς, ίτυα,αν avapuwHV ΙΙαυλον και z = ch xxui.?, 
 οοοναραν icat τινας άλλους £<; αυτών προς τυυς απο- *",','^... 
 
 </ ^ '^ Γ^^ a — John in. 
 
 στοΧους και πξίίσβυτίρους εις ΙίοουσυΧημ περί του f.^'it. 
 
 ey / , 3 ' \ "Τ 1 ,0' ' ^ bch χϋ ■" 
 
 ζ,ητηματος τούτον. οι μένουν προπεμ<ρυεντες ^^'^ ^2^\, ^ 
 
 της εκκΧη'Ίΐας ^ οιηρ^οντο την τε Φοινικην και Έ,αμαρειαν, atu 
 
 ch. xiii. 
 4!lal. 
 
 It. XX. 18 
 Ezra VJI. 
 
 εκΒιη-γοίιμίνοι την ' έπιστροψην Τ(ον εθνίον' και εποιουν «.'■• ... 
 
 15. xxiii. 29. χχτ. 19 xxrt.Sonly. (Ezek. xxxti 37 mss. ?) f ch. xx. 38. xxi. S. Ram χ v. 24 al. 
 
 Jos. Aiitt. XX. 2. ή t. 1 Mace. xii. 4. g ch. χίτ. 24. h ch. xiii. 41 reft. ihrreoniy. Cant, 
 
 vii. 10. Ezek. xlvii. 11. k =■ Lake i. 68. φόβιιν ποιοΓκτετ τοϊν ϊη-ποι?, Xen. Anab. i. 8. 18. 
 
 Chral: txt AB(7rtpt0ii»;ri B>)CD 13. 15. 18. 3G. 40. 73. ISOConstt Ath Epiph.— bef //ωυσ. 
 ins τω {emendation) ABC : τον 170 : om DEGH mss fappy) Constt Ath Chr Thl Oec : for 
 μωυσ., τον ΐΊΐμοο Syr: τον v. μωτίως ar-erp : και τα> ίβ^ι μω. ττίυιπατητι D syr-inarg : 
 Constt add aft μωνσ., και τοις tO-rriv υις SieraS,aro πιριπατητί. — ?ν}'>]ηΐ](ΐθηι C all : -σισθε 
 180. — 2. for uDc,rf BCD-gr Gall Syr coptsah : κaι]^^': txt AEGH al vss ff.— κχασίως 
 D-gr. — rec και σνζητ. {cnrrn from ver j, where ζητ. isfnund in some MSS, shewing its 
 genuineness here), with appy a few mss Thl^ Oec •. om Ε 68 ν copt Jer : txt ABCDGH all 
 syr sah arm Constt Chr Tbl'. — τω bef iiao. om DE. — for ~ρος αντ., συν αντυις D-gr Syr 
 sah: αντοιςΟΤ. — for ίΓίίξαΐ' to ttooc, — D syr-marghave iAtyfi/ yiip ο τταυλος μίΐίΐν οντως 
 καθώς ιπιττίνααΐ' εηηχι•υΐ^ομ(νος (om d) in Pt εληλυβοτις ατο ιευιινσα\ημ τταρηγγίίΧαν 
 αυτοις {tunc for αντ. syr-marg) τω πιιυ\ω κ. τω βιιον. και τισιν άλλοις αναβαιηιν 
 ποος . . . (π-ριις• cm d, and in conseq has alios ascendere apostolos &c). — τηνς πρεηβ. 
 C 180: (V tfpui/ff. E. — οττως κριθωιτιν ίττ αντοις ττευι D 137 syr* (fTr αντων D- 137). 
 — 3. εκπεμφθ. Ε. — νπεο 43.—ανηοχοΐ'το 12'» lect 11. — rec om τε (as unnecessary), 
 with AEGH &c : ins BCD al — και την σ. DH al Thl.— πασιν om 2. 04. 99. 104 al sah 
 
 that ημάς is used by the writer 'as a Chris- 
 tian, and of all Christians :' to what then 
 would he have it referred .' I would rather, 
 regarding the on as marking a transition to 
 the direct narrative, take ίιμας as an insen- 
 sible translation into the first person on the 
 part of the narrator, speaking of an exhor- 
 tation which he heard and felt.] 23. 
 χειροτ.] ^ cum suffragiis creassent,' Erasm.: 
 not necessarily as the meaning of the word 
 conventionally, — which had ])assed to any 
 kind of appointment, see ch. x. 41 : but by 
 the analogy of ch. vi. 2 — <». See 2 Cor. viii. 
 19. The word will not bear Jerome's sense 
 of ' laying on of hands,' adopted by Roman 
 Catholic expositors. The Apostles ordained 
 the presbyters irhom the churches elected. 
 
 irposiv^. μ., νηστ. belongs to τταιιίβ., 
 not to χειυοτον. 25. Άττάλίίαν] A 
 
 maritime town at the mouth of the river 
 Catarrhactes, in Pamphylia, not far from 
 the border of Lycia, built by Attalus Phila- 
 delphus, king of Pergamus, in a convenient 
 position to command the trade of Syria or 
 Egypt. It is still an important place, called 
 Satalia. (Winer, RW B.C. and II.) To reach 
 it tlicy had to cros.s the plain from Perga. 
 
 26.] οθίν, as being the centre, whence 
 their apostolic commission had spread. 
 27.] μ€τ' αυτών, in connexion u<ilh them, see 
 roff. : not to them, as u.sually : nor per ipsos, 
 
 as Beza, &c. θυραν ιτίστ.] The same 
 
 metaphor is used in the refF. by Paul, and 
 shews, perhaps, his hand in the narrative. 
 — On χρον. οΰκ όλίγ., see chronol. table iu 
 Prolegg. 
 
 Chap. XV. 1 — 35.] Difference re- 
 
 SPECTI.NGTHEXECE.SS1TY0F CIRCUMCISION 
 
 FOR THE Gentile converts. Council 
 OF THE Apostles and elders at Jeru- 
 salem. 1. Tives] Called in Gal. ii. 4 
 TTopf ίςακτοί ψίυοόίίλι^πΐ, οίτινες παρεις- 
 TjXHov κατασκοττηιτίΐι τι/ν ϊ\ενθίυίαν ημών 
 ί)ι• εχoμ^v ίν χριστψ Ίησιαι. The later Syr. 
 version in the mari;in,and the mss 8. 137 in 
 the text, add the words των ττεπιστίνκότων 
 άπό τϊΊς ιιΊρίσεως των Φιιριτηίων, as in ver. 
 5. Doubtless it was so. In spite of the spe- 
 cial revelations which had accompanied the 
 reception of the first Gentiles into the church, 
 the strong Judaizing party adhered to their 
 old j)rejudices respectingthe necessity of con- 
 formity to the law of Moses. With this 
 party Paul was in conflict all his life; and 
 even long after, we find it raising its head 
 again in the sects of tiie Ebionites and the 
 Nazarenes. — Neandor (Pfl. u. L. p. 185, 
 note) notices the account in Josephus (.Vntt. 
 XX. 2 4), where Izates, K. of Adiabeiie, is 
 converted to Judaism by a certain Ananias, 
 who, for fear of a commotion among his 
 peo[)le, allows him to remain uucircumcised 
 2
 
 148 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XV. 
 
 1 ch. is. 2β riff. 
 1 Murk iv. iO 
 ch. xvi. 21. 
 
 ιις Ιίρονσαλημ 
 
 πασιν τοις 
 
 xnii. 18. Sc 
 
 Ilrb. X.I. Ο ^*^ 
 
 I'xni. 1. *" ' τωΐ' ατΓοστολωι^ και των 
 
 noh.xiv. 27 „ ' /ι ^ η • ' ι , - 
 
 οσα ο ίηυς ίποίησ^ν μίτ αυτών 
 
 )£1 
 
 ο ίηΐΓ., hrre 
 onl\.tr.,MHrk _ - 
 xii. liML. των 
 Crn. xU. 32, .. , r» 
 
 ^i ■■ ^ Afyorric οτι 
 
 ρ en. xii. 1 reff. / 
 
 rab.<.ol.,<h.xii. T1]pflV 
 
 3». xviii. S, J / .^ \ 
 
 27 xxi. 20, ατΓοστολοι και 
 
 25 al. 
 
 s ver. 1 reff. t ch i. 4. Luke viii. ."ίβ. 
 
 τ — Ha(t. χζίί. 34. Ps. ii. 2. w — hen 
 
 απο της 
 
 τον 
 
 α^ίΧφηις. τταρα^ίνομίνοι 
 
 ήσαν υπο της ίκκλησιας και 
 
 πξ}ίσβυτίρων, " avηy■γiι\av τε 
 
 εζ,ανίστησαν ds τιης 
 
 αιρίσΒως των Φαρισαιων ' τηττιστίυκοτίς, 
 
 ■ < ι ' ^ t 'Λ -V 
 
 ■πίοιτΐμνίΐν αυτούς, Trapa-y-yfAAttv τε 
 
 vo/uoj' Μωυσίως. ^ συνη-γβησάν τε οι 
 
 οι ιτρίσβυτίροι " tciiv ττε^οι τοϋ ^ λογού 
 
 Josh. νί. 6. 
 only. VVisd. ii 
 
 Malt. six. 17. 1 John ii. 3, 4. Prov. iii. 21. 
 X = ch. Tiii. 21 reff. 
 
 Thl».— 4. κροσολνμα AB 133. 137 : txt CDEGH mss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec— rec απ- 
 ίδίχθησαν {apjiy a corrn. as being the usual word, cf Luke viii. 40, ch xviii. 27, xxviii. 30, 
 — and see reff), with CEGIl most mss Chr Thl Oec ; txt ABD- {παοίδιιθησαΐ' D', VTrtS. 
 180, π(,οςίί. al). — add μί-/αλως CD (/χί^αις D') 137 sah syr" Ambr Cassiod : mhe d : 
 add σφοδξία sah. — for υττο, απο BC 180 {perhaps originally, as in C, a corrn to suit 
 απιδίχθ., and ihence adopted even in copies which read παρίδ.). — aTn}yytiKavT(q (sic) 
 D' : unt)yyu\av rt D^.— ίττοί. ο θ. D 38. OG. 137- 142.— at end, C^GH all ar-pol slav 
 Thl- add και υτι ηνοιξεν τοις tOviai θυραν πιστίως {from ch xiv. 27). — 5• for ίξην. to 
 απο, D syr-marg have ot if wapayyttXaiTig αντοις αΐ'οβαιιηιΐ' προς τυνς ττρίσβυηρονς 
 ίζίΐι ίστησαρ λ^yovrtς τιΐ'ίς απο (ίξ. κατά των αποητ. οντις απο syr-marg). — Tirtg 
 αΐ'ί(){ς• Α. — πίπιστίνκοτων 27• 29. 99 Jer. — for οτι, ως Ε. — for αυτούς, τους απο 
 των ιθνων 80-. — for τί, δί D'. — 6. rec for rt, δ( (alteration of the characteristic re to 
 more usual copula), vf'ithAOEGU &c vssff : txt BC 133 ν seth Syr ar-pol. — oi (2nd) om D. 
 — aft πρίοβ. ins συν τω πΧηθίΐ 137 syr. — for λογού, ζητήματος Ε 137 syr-marg: ρη- 
 
 — when a certain Eleazar, πάνυ π(ρι τα 
 •πάτρια δοκών ακριβής ιΖναι, prevails on 
 him to perform the rite, for that without it 
 he could not be a Jew. 2.] Compare 
 
 Gal. ii. 5. έταξαν άναβ.] I assume 
 
 here what seems to me to be almost beyond 
 the possibility of question (see note to 
 chronological table in Prolegg., where I 
 have given the reasons), that this journey 
 was the same as that mentioned Gal. ii. 
 1 — 10. In that case, Paul there (ver. 2) 
 says that he went up κιιτ' άποκάΚυ-φιν. 
 In this expression I cannot see it neces- 
 sarily implied that the revelation was made 
 to himself, but that there was some intima- 
 tion of the Holy Ghost, similar perhaps to 
 that in ch. xiii. 2, in accordance with which 
 the church at Antioch sent him and Barna- 
 bas; — there being προφήτη ι there, by whom 
 the Spirit spoke His will. τινας 
 
 άλλους] Titus was one, Gal. ii. 1, 3, and 
 that, in all probability, in order to gii'e an 
 example of a Gentile convert of the uncir- 
 cuincision endowed ivith gifts of the Holy 
 Spirit. Titus is nut tnentioned in the 
 Acts : but only in 2 Cor., Gal., 2 Tim., and 
 the epistle addressed to him. 3. irpo- 
 
 Ίτεμφ ] This seems to have been something 
 of an official escorting of them on the way, 
 and perliaps parting from them with solemn 
 commendation to God : not, as Morus and 
 Heinrichs, ' rebus ad iter suscipiendum in- 
 structis,' which would hardly be thus spe- 
 cified, being a matter of course. At all 
 events, it shews that the mind of the church 
 
 was with them, not with the Judaizers. 
 This was also the case in Phoenicia and 
 Samaria, as is shewn by πασιν below. 
 4.] On their arrival at Jerusalem, there seems 
 to have taken place an official reception of 
 them and their message, in public. There 
 they related — as a most important datum for 
 the determination of the question — God's 
 dealings with them (see on ch. xiv. 27). and 
 recounted the places where churches of be- 
 lieving Gentiles had been founded. This 
 having taken place, a protest was entered on 
 the part of the Pharisee believers, — in no way 
 doubting the truth of these conversions, nor 
 in any way disparaging the ministry of Paul 
 and Barnabas, — that it was necessary to cir- 
 cumcise αυτούς, those of wh07n they had 
 spoken, and to command them to keep the 
 law of Moses. — It may be objected, that 
 this view would not be consistent with 
 Paul's statement, Gal. ii. 2, άνιθίμην αΰτοΊς 
 το tvayyi-Xioi' ο κηονσσω tv τοΙς ίθνισιν, 
 κατ' Ιδίαν δέ τοις δοκοΰσιν, μίι πως ιίς 
 κινϋν τρίχω η ίδοημοί'. But Ι cannot 
 see any inconsistency, if the words used 
 in both cases be accurately weighed. To 
 the ΐκκ^^ησία, απόστολοι, and πρισβν- 
 Ttpi'i Paul and Barnabas gave a simple 
 recital of what God had done by them 
 among the Gentiles : but Paul did not lay 
 before the whole assembly the Gospel which 
 he preached among the Gentiles, viz. the 
 indifference of the Mosaic law to their sal- 
 vation (Gal. i. 7—9), for fear of its being 
 hastUy disparaged or repudiated, and so his
 
 4—10. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 149 
 
 τούτου, ' πο\\ης ^ ce συνΖ^τι^σίως "γίνομίνης '^ αΐ'π στα ς ych.sxviii. 29 
 ΤΙίτρος ίίττευ προς αυτούς 'Άνδρίς α^ίλψοι, υμίΐς fTTt- ^ζ EVk.'""'' 
 
 /J tt a','' - b' ' c' '" il'iTX'c xxxviii. 8. 
 
 στασυξ οτί αφ τιαίοων αο\αιων tv υμιν ίζιΛε^ατο ί? ;,«. upx. 
 
 , Γν ν _ , , ^ , _ Ν ./fl ν I.S.XIXV,i.2R. 
 
 ο ϋίος '^ όια του "" στόματος μου ακουσαι τα ίυνη ^ον bMatt^v.^ai,^ 
 
 Aoyov του ευαγγελίου και πιστίυσαι. και ο καροιο- 
 
 γΐ'ωστϊ^ς θεός ^ ξμαρτυρητίν αυτοις, δους το πνίυμα το ^ 
 
 και ουβίν ' διεκρίΓεν 
 
 1Η. 
 
 2 Pet. 
 
 ii. 
 
 5ο 
 
 nly. 
 
 
 Ps. 
 
 Klii 1 
 
 
 - M^rk ri 
 
 '.4 
 
 al.i 
 
 .■..iisirj 
 
 not 
 
 μίταΕ,υ as i chron. 
 
 δχχϊίϋ 4, 5. 
 ,- . , , 'c^C '^ j";,4^p"',•^"'''• 
 fίε7v«t*i';fi^'*'"'•''■^ 
 
 tTTiuitvai 
 
 fhe 
 
 ayiov καΌως και ημιν 
 
 ■ημίον τε και αυτών, ry ττ/στει 
 
 αυτών. νυυ οϋΐ' rt " πειοάΖ^ετε τον θίον, 
 
 py\f>v„/^ - α - ^ " ''" 
 
 •^ ςυνοί' ετΓί τον ^ τοαχηλον των μαυητων, ον ούτε ot g< 
 
 ^ / S Λ ' Γ ' 7 (Pet. ?) only. 
 
 h constr., ch. χ. 43 al. i 1 Cor xi. 29. Jamesii.4. k = Mntt. xviii. 15 Rom.ii.lot- Wisd. xviii 23. 
 
 1 cli. xiii. 8 m = Eph. v. -JH. Tit. ii. 14. James i». 8. Sir xxxviii. 10. η .<e^ rh. v. H. Mntt. 
 
 iv. 7. =- Exod. xvii. 2. Ps. Ixxvii. 41, art. ο .Matl. xxiii. 4. Luke xv. ft. 4 Kings xviii. 14. 
 
 ρ = Gal. 7. 1. Matt. xi. 29, 3(1. Jer. xxxv. 14. q Jrr. 1. c. and xxxiv. 8, 11. τρ , ch. XX. 37 al. 
 
 μητος 65.-7. rec σνζητ. : σννζ. B.'CDE : ζι?Γ»;σ. A 13. 15. 36. 40. 69 al copt sah.— 
 ανεστηπίν iv -πνινμητι πίτρ. και ιιπίΐ' D' : aft αυτούς ins tv πν. αγιω 137. — rec ο θ. tv 
 ημιν ιζίΧ. {corrn of order: — and ημ. corrn for υμ. as it seemed more according to 
 ecclesiastical propriety for Peter to describe the selection as made " from us apostles,' 
 ^Λα« " from you the whole church"), with EGH &c vss Thl Oec Iren Ambr Rebapt : 
 ημtιv ο Θ. ίξ. D' {tv i;u. ο 0. tK- Ώ-) 13?: tv υμ. om 31. 9!): t.\t ABC all ; and in 
 varying order, all vss Chr Iren. — Sui στομ. D'E 96. — 8. ο if καρν. ο θ. D'. — ίκμαρ- 
 τνοησίν C. — rec aft ίους ins αυτο<ς {supplementary addn), with CE {αυτοις bef δους 
 om Ε sah ν Ambr Rebapt) GH &c vss Constt Chr al (aft ay. 105: ίττ αυηινς D Jer: 
 δους avToic om lectt 12. 13 : txt AB 13 Did. — ro bef ττν. om i:i.— 9. και om Α.— rec 
 ovSiv: txt BGH 421. gg i2(j all: ou ThF Oec (coram).— τε om D.— 10. και νυν τι Ε 
 aeth. — ουκ (appy) om C— for τον Qtov, τ. κυυιον Hil al : om (readg 7rtιpaζtτt ιπι- 
 θηναι) ν {ms) Jer 2 itnpo7iit is Ambrst: vultis imponere Augj. — ημ. ovCt oi παν. ημών 
 
 work being hindered (^117 πως κ.τ.λ.). But, 
 inprivate interviews with the chief Apostles, 
 James, Peter, and John (Gal. ii. 9), he did 
 unfold the whole freeness of this Gospel, 
 and so effectually, as to prepare the way for 
 their full and public accordance with him 
 at the council. 6.] The Apostles and 
 
 elders only are mentioned as having as- 
 sembled: in which case παν το ττληθος 
 (ver. 12) must mean των ττρίσβυτϊρων, 
 and the decision of ver. 22 must have been 
 arrived at in a larger assembly. But most 
 probably the deliberation of the App. and 
 elders implied the presence of the brethren 
 also, who are intended by πάν το πλ., — 
 and there was but one asseynbly. The ob- 
 jection, that no one place could have held 
 them, is nugatory : the official presence of 
 all is assumed continually in such cases, 
 where the assembly is open to all. 
 λ«$γου] ' matter (in this case) of dispute :' 
 see reff. 7.] A promiscuous debate, 
 
 not perhaps without some angry feeling, 
 ensued on their first coming together, — and 
 among the mnltilude, as is implied in ver. 
 12, — man disputing with man. 1 1 expos] 
 
 Partly on account of the universal deference 
 paid to him, but principally because of his 
 peculiar fitness to open the apostolic deci- 
 sions on the subject, from having b(.'en made 
 the instrument of the first public and ap- 
 proved reception of the Gentiles. 
 
 ΰμβΐς Ιττίστ.] In Peter's speeches in ch. x., 
 this phrase occurs twice at the beginning of 
 a sentence, vv. 28 and 37 : and we have 
 traces of the same way of expressing the 
 personal pronoun in his speeches, ch. ii. 15 ; 
 iii. 14. 25. Such notices are important, as 
 shewing that these reports are not only 
 according to tliese?we of what was said, but 
 the words spoken, verbatim. άφ' ήμ. 
 
 αρχ.] In regard to the whole time of the 
 Gospel up to that day (about 20 years), the 
 date of the conversion of Cornelius, at least 
 fifteen years before this (cf. Gal. ii. 1, and 
 notes to chron. table in Prolegg.), would 
 very properly be so specified. The length 
 of time elapsed is placed by Peter in the 
 strongest light, to shew that the question 
 had in fact been settled by divine inter- 
 ference long since. — Notice (in reff.) the 
 idioms, &c., peculiar to Peter : — tit λίξ. 
 with inf., — Sia τ. στόμ., — καρδιογν. (most 
 probably) ; — or characteristic of him, 
 πίιράζ. τ. θίόν, — καθώς και ήμ'ιν (ch. Χ. 
 47), — αρχαίων now, compared with iv 
 apxy ch.x'i. 15. Compare also with πιιράζ. 
 τ. θ(όι•, — κω\ϊΐ(Ται Γ. ϋίόν, ch. xi. 17• 
 tv ίιμϊν] ' among you.' If ήμ'ιν be read, 
 then ' among us {Apostles) :' see var. read. 
 — There is no ellipsis of ' me' after ili\. : 
 the E. V. expresses the constr. rightly. 
 8, 9.] The allusion is throughout to 
 spiritual circumcision, as the purihcatiou
 
 150 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XV. 
 
 '~^^!ί!'Ί-^\"•2.'^"'''^9^^ T)j(i('»i' ούτε ήμίίς "^ ίσχυσαμιν ' βαστάσαι ; ^^ άλλα 
 
 ι'ο»; Ιησού " πιστίυομίν σωθηναι 
 . ''καθ' ον τρότΓον κακίΐνοι. '' ίσΊ-γησει> οί παι> το " πληβυς, 
 
 και Παύλου " εζϊ?γο 
 
 3 — Luke xiT. ^ ^ " 
 
 27. jjiin Οία της 
 
 χίχ 17. G«l 
 VI 2. S 
 
 tch. xiii.43reft: 
 
 u with inf < " 
 
 (ab.sol.). here KOI rjKOVOV 
 only, iub , f r 
 
 XT.22. π<σ- £7rOt»;afV Ο 
 
 ABCD 
 EGH 
 
 Ba 
 
 ξ)ΐ/άβα 
 
 •γιενων ο σα 
 
 XpOlOf όι- 
 
 Xrn. Anab. 
 vii. 7. 47, 
 with <ir , 
 
 εος " σημίΐα και ' τίρατα εν τοίς ίβησιν δι 
 αυτών. μίτά. δε το '^ ai-yrjaai αυτούς απΐκρΊΟη Ιάκωβος 
 
 λέγων 'Άνδρίς αδελ(|)θί, ακουσατί μου. ^^ Συμεών "^ εζ- 
 ιθώς ττρωτον ο θεός ' ίπίσκίφατο λορεπ' εξ 
 ϊβνων λοον '' τω oi'OjuaTt αύτοΰ. 
 
 κοί τούτω '^ σνμφω- 
 
 τΐγ]οητο καυως ττρωτον ο 
 
 (See Rom. 
 
 XiT. 2.) 
 Tch. χχνίί 2 
 
 only. See MhII. xxiii. 37. Rnm. iii. 3. Num. xviii. 7. vv Luke xviii. 3!l reff. L. P. w = ch.vi. 5. 
 
 X Lnke xxiv. 3ft. Judg vii. 13. y ch. ii. 19 reff. ζ — 3 John Trr. 3 only. a = Lnke i. «8, 78 reff. 
 
 constr ellipl.. here only. See Luke i. 25. b Ps. vii. 17 al. Isa, xxv. 1. c Luke v. 36. ch. v. 9. 
 
 4 Kings xii 8. 
 
 137.-11. αλλ/; 1.37.— rec bef κνρ. om rov, but ins A(B?)CDEGH all Chr Thdrt Thl 
 Oeo. — rec ιησ. χριστον, with CD &c vss Thl^ Oec : txt ABEGH all vss ff : r. κιφ. ημών 
 \'Λ vss ff: ιητ. om 20'. 40. — ττιστίυσυμίν D-gr.— 12. D syr* read σννκατατεθεμα'ων 
 (^disponenies) if των πρισβυτίρων τοις νπο του ττίτρον Ηοημα>οις iaiiyrjntv παν . . . 
 — ισιγησαν C — ναν om Π. 105 copt : άπαν Ε al Thl-. — βαμιαβαν και παυλον 
 ίζηγονμίνΐΗ D'. — tv om 177• — 13. uvar.rnq ιακ. ίίπεν D Syr. — 14. πρώτος 137: om 
 sah Iren. — for επισκ., ίπίλιίητη Ε: ίίίλίξ. 137: f^fXf?. και 13: tε,ηyησaτυ 27 (26 
 jMill) : pronperit d e : stiscitavH tol : excogilavil Iren : ccepit Syr. — fi ίθνων ληβ. C. — 
 rec bef τω ονομ. ins ίπι, with B(e siDGH &c copt al Oec: om ACDE 3. 13. 40. 68. 
 100. 105. 180 V syrr sah Constt Chr Procop Thl' (comm) ThP Iren Jer Rebapt al. — 
 
 of the heart. God, who saw deeper than 
 the mere fleshly distinction between Jew 
 and Gentile, who knows that the hearts of 
 all are unclean, and that the same all-suffi- 
 cient sacrifice can cleanse them all, if applied 
 by faith (compare the remarkable parallel, 
 1 Pet. i. 18 — 22 inch), put no difl'erence 
 between us and them, but has been pleased 
 to render them spiritually clean. τη 
 
 Ίτίστίΐ, n(it simply '■ bij Jaith :' but 'by their 
 faith,' or ' by the faith in Christ.' 
 lO.j ircip (as κικλι'σίΐι, cli. .xi. 17), 'tempt,' 
 by piittiny obstacles in the way of His 
 evidently determined course. έπιθεΐναι, 
 
 infill., marking the intended result of πειρά- 
 ζιτί : cf. βι'ι Ci ti:tii , βι) ϋ' iki ni, uaaTtKiv S' 
 ίλάαν, &c. See Bernhardy, Syntax, p. 365. 
 ζνγόν] See Gal. v. 1 Peter could not 
 be so mucii referring to the mere outward ob- 
 servance of ceremonies, which he himself and 
 the Jewish converts thought it expedient to 
 retain, - but to the imposition of the law, as 
 a condition of salvation, on the consciences 
 of the dis(ij)les. So Neander (Pfl. u. L. 
 p. 2IJ). This being so, «uVt . . . βα- 
 στσπαι will refer, not to tiie burdeiisomeiiess 
 ot ceremonies, but to the far more grievous 
 burden of legal death, of which Paul 
 cries out so bitterly in Rom. vii. 24,— and 
 says. Gal. v. 3, μαατνρ μαι παντι άιβρόιπψ 
 πίοιτίμιομίΐ'ΐι), ΟΤΙ όφ€ΐλ€τη9 €στιν δλον 
 τον νόμον Ίτοιήσαι. 11.] Seeing that 
 
 we all 111 cummon believe that the grace of 
 Christ is the suffii^ieiit, and only cause of 
 our salvation, it can neither be reasonable 
 nor according to God's will, to fetter that 
 grace with superfluous and vexatious con- 
 
 ditions. See nearly the same argument 
 retorted on Peter himself. Gal. ii. 14 ft". 
 KCLKcIvoi are the Gentile Christians, 
 not our Jathers : — their ground of trust ia 
 the same as ours : ours, no more than theirs. 
 12.] The multitude (see above) 
 then,— and not before, on account of their 
 mutual dis])utes, — being tranquiUized by 
 Peter's speech, quietly received from Paul 
 and Barnabas an account of the seals of 
 signs and wonders by which God had 
 stamped the approval of their ministry 
 among the Gentiles. The miracles at 
 Paphos and Lystra would be among the 
 principal of these. 13.] αυτούς, viz. 
 
 Paul and Barnabas. Both had spoken : 
 doubless wonders, unrecorded, had been 
 wrought by the hand of Barnabas, which 
 he had recounted. Ιάκωβος] See 
 
 note, ch. xii. 17, and the prolegg. to the 
 epistle of James. I assume here, that this 
 is James the Just, the brother of the Lord, 
 the author of the Epistle ; and though an 
 άπόπτιιΧος (Gal. i. 19), not one of the 
 twelve. If we may presume to judge from 
 the character of his Epistle, to say nothing 
 of the ])articulars which tradition has handed 
 down concerning him, his decision would 
 come with remarkable weiglit on tliis occa- 
 sion. For he is, among all the sacred 
 writers of the N. T., the representative of 
 the strictest adiierence to and loftiest appre- 
 ciation of the pvre standard of legal mo- 
 rality. All that the law was, from its 
 intrinsic holiness, justice, and goodness 
 (Rom. vii. 12), capable of being to Chris- 
 tians, he would be sure to attribute to it.
 
 11—20. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 151 
 
 νυνσιν οι 
 
 νην 
 
 f 
 
 Xoyoi των ττοοφητων, καθώς yίyoaπτaι ^h^^^"'•^• 
 
 ι i ι ' Ι ι •> e ch. v. 2'Λ refr. 
 
 Mtrti ταύτα " αναστξ>ίφω και ^ανοικοδομήσω την "^ a/c»j- '^''ImoTIx'. π. 
 
 ΔΟ'^ ^ - ν ^ h , ■, - g-h-reimly, 
 
 αριο TTJ1' ΤΓίΤΓτωκυιαν, «rat τα καησκαμμίνα αυτής «"^ Amos 
 
 ^ητησωσιν οι ™ κατάλοιποι τωι^ ανθρώπων 
 και τταΐ'τα το^έθν»/, "" ε(|) ους• ° ΐπικεκλητα 
 
 η ' • > ν \ ' ' ' 
 
 /ιου £7Γ ουΓους, A£-y£i κύριος υ ττοιων ταύτα 
 
 " ατΓ αιωΐ'ος. οιύ εγω "^ κρίνω WJ7 * τταρενογλ 
 
 au 
 Λτυριοί', 
 
 ο " / 
 
 ονο^α 
 •γνωστά 
 
 h Rom xi.3 
 only, ITom 
 3 Kaugs xix. 
 
 κρίνω μη 
 
 k Lnke xiii 13. 
 
 Heb xii. 12. 
 
 Ps xvii. 35. 
 1 = Rom.iii. 11, 
 
 from Ps, xiii, 
 
 2. Heb.xi. 
 
 τταρενοχΛίπ' τοις ^l^l^on\y. 
 
 y \ - '/) ~ u ' ' . ' < ^ η ^ 90 ' λ Λ ^ Ezra 111. 8. 
 
 απο των νίνων ξπιστοξώουσιν επι τον ueov, ''" άλλα η c.ns;r.,Mirk 
 
 ' ' ϊϋ. 2Ί. Rev. 
 
 τϋ. 2. Levit.xv.4. η James ϋ. 7. pch.i.lUal. Ps.Ixxr.l. q cli. iii. 21. Luke i. 7ii. Ocn.ii.4. 
 
 Ocn. 
 
 aco , Jmlp xfi. 
 
 α ch. xip. 1.Ί reif. 
 
 Tii. 2. Levit.xv.4. η James ii. 7. pch.i. lUal. P.s. Ixxr.l. q cli. 
 
 r = w. inf., 1 Cir. ii.2. (2 C.ir v. 15 ) 2 Mhcc. xi. 25. .s liere only. w. dar.. Job xvi 3. 
 
 IB alex. 1 Mace. x. 35, H:5. xii. 14. Deraosth. p. 32ii. Diod Sic. xx. 52 al. t ch. xii. 1 rcff. 
 
 15. for τοντω, TOVTo GH 95. 96: οιτως D' sail. — σνί'ψωνησουσιν D'.-16. μιτα if D'. 
 — {ΤΓίσ-ρέψω D. — aft αναικυδ., ins καθώς ai ιιμίοαι του αιώνος 80- (see / c in LXX): 
 and aft 2nd αιοικοδ. 4. 6 ί. 80^. 98 copt. — κατίσΓί)ίμμίν(ΐ Β : -ατμαμμινκ 13 al Procop : 
 αησκαμμίνα Ε : τον κατίσκαμμίνοΐ'ΆΤνη. — οικοδομήσω (2nd time) C (appj') al. — 17. αν 
 om Ε al Chr. — (κζητωσι 137. — for αιΌμ., ιΒιων 4'. — for κυρ., β(<ιν D aeth ar-pol. — bef 
 ποιων om ο BD (appy). — ree aft ταυ. ins τταντα, with Η &c Chr al : tthv. ταυτ. EG 
 1. 42. 98. 115. 122. I2G Thl' : txt ABCD all ν copt eeth (o ττοι. τ. om sah) Constt Iren 
 Rebapt al. — 18. rec at end add ιστι τω θίω πάντα τα eoyt αχτου, with ISGH &c syr 
 Constt Chr al ; -γνωστόν απ' αι. (add ιστιν D ν syr-marg Iren) τω κιρι,ο (om svr-marg) 
 το ipyov αντκν AD ν syr-marg Iren : txt BC 15. 18. 27. 29. 'Λ6. 5?. 63. 65. 100. 105. 133. 
 180 copt sah (add hcEC, see above) arm : also prefixg a ίττιν and ddg (om d' ieth) αυτοί 
 42. 57'- 81 ieth al : alii aliter. {In Ihe presence of no many apocryphal inseiUaiis as we 
 find hi the Acts, taking into account also the great variety, and seeing in it [cf many more 
 variations in Schulz ad loc] an argument against the genuineuess of the words, — seeing 
 also that no possible reason can be given for their omission, if originally genuine, I have 
 followed the authority of BC, as also have Scholz and Tischeadorf. Lachmaan has 
 adopted the reading of \Ό al [see above], which, as Meyer observes, is evidently an 
 emendation of still later date than the rec). — 19. (κρίνα Ε : ανακρίνω 13. — 20. ολλ 
 
 And therefore when his judgment, as well 
 as that of Peter, is given in favour of the 
 freedom of the Gen iles, the disputers, even 
 of the Pharisaic party, are silenced. There 
 does not seem to be in the following speech 
 any decision ex cathedra, either in the 
 άκοΰσιιτί μυν, or in the ϊγώ koiioj (ver. 
 19) : the decision lay in the weightiness, 
 partly no doubt of the person speaking, but 
 principally of the matter spoken by him. 
 
 14. Σνμ.ΐών] James characteristically 
 uses this Jewish form of the name : so also 
 Peter himself, 2 Pet. i. 1. The name occurs 
 Gen. xxix. 33, LXX. Luke ii. 25 ; iii. 30; ch. 
 xiii. 1. Rev. vii. 7 : the name Simon, else- 
 where used in the N. T. tor Pe'er, is found 
 in 1 Chron. iv. 20 (Heb. Σ^μων, LXX). 
 
 τω όν.] ' for His name : ' dat.com- 
 niodi. On tTTtCTK•. λο/>ί., see reff. : the iutiii., 
 as ΐπιΟί'ι nil, ver. 10, note. λαόν, 
 
 answering to the λαός so well known as 
 His by covenant before. 15. τούτω] 
 
 Neuter, 'to this:' not, ' to Him,' in which 
 case we should exjject not oi Xoyot των πικ, 
 but ol πίΐι,φητηι (.Meyer). 16-18.] 
 
 The citation from Amos is made freely from 
 the LXX : ditreritig widely in the latter 
 part from our present Hebrew text, which 
 see in loc. E. V. In all probability the 
 LXX had another reading before them. 
 
 Of this we may at least be sure, that James, 
 even if (as I believe) he spoke in Greek, 
 and quoted as here given, would not him- 
 self (nor would the Pharisees present have 
 allowed it) have quoted any rendering, 
 especially where the stress of his argument 
 lay in it, at variance with the original 
 Hebrew. — The prophecy regards that glo- 
 rious restitution of the kingdom to (the Son 
 of) David, wiiich should be begun by the 
 incarnation of the Lord, and perfected by 
 His reign over all nations. During the 
 process of this restitution those nations, as 
 the effect of the rebuilding, should seek the 
 Lord, — to whomsoever the gospel should 
 be preaclied There is here neither asser- 
 tion nor negation of the national restoration 
 of the Jews. Be this as it may (and I 
 tirmly believe in the literal accomplishment 
 of all the prophecies res|)ei'ting them as a 
 nation), it is obvious, on any deep view of 
 prophetic interpretation, that the glorious 
 things which shall have a fultilinent in the 
 literal Israel, must have their complete and 
 more vjorthy fulfitmeut in the sjiiritual 
 theocracy, of wiiich the Son of David is 
 the Head. 17. ίφ' οϊ/ς ίττικεκλ.] 
 
 Notice the same expression in the Epislle 
 of James (reff.). 18.] The variation of 
 
 reading here is remarkable. The text which
 
 152 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XV. 
 
 ετΓίστίΐλαι αυτοις του απί\ίοθαι αττο τιον ^ αΧισ-γη- 
 
 Me». XIII. ϊϊ. , _.Λ,^ \ " y. ' < -a 
 
 ai«."^"* * μοτων των ιιόωλωΐ' και της πο^νίΐας και του πνικτου 
 
 τ ch. xxi. 25. 
 Hel). xiii. 22. 
 
 ABCD 
 
 Kui του αίματος. 
 '^ κατά πολιν τους 
 
 21 
 
 Μ 
 
 ωυσης γαρ εκ ytviwv αρναιων 
 
 κηρύσσοντας αυτόν f\ft εν ταις συν- 
 
 irr.2i."nTm: α-γω-γα'ις "κατά πάν σάββατον "" ανα-γινωσκόμενος. ^'^ Τότε 
 iv.;t. 1 Ptt. r >'^^ ,' - ■• '\ ' " /Q ' *• g " Λ 
 
 ϋ. 11. tdoif Toic αποστολυις και τοις ττοίσμυτίοοις συν oAw 
 
 y hrrr only t. ι • ι t 
 
 Srr Mai i 7. 12. Dan.i. «. Sir. xl £i). ζ — Matt. xv. lO al. Ho.s. ii. 2. a ver. 29. ch. xxi. 25.t 
 
 b ■•^«•r vrc. 7 rt-n. c ch. ii. 46 rrft'. xiT. 28. d -> and amstr., ch. viii. 5 reff. e ch. xiii. 27 al. 
 fTT2R, 2», 34. Lnkei. 3. g ch. T. 11. Rom. xvi.23. 
 
 CH i)5. 180. — τον (1st) om H. — απο om (as unnecessary) BD-gr 15. 18. 36. 180 al e 
 Oec : ins ACE-gr GH most mss (vss) Constt Chr al. — ηλιγισματων \'ΛΤ. — ιιίωλοθντων 
 Syrar-erp copt al. — και τον πνικτον om iappy,as Meyer, because in Levit no such 
 comviund isjornially ejtjiressed) D Iren Cypr Tert Jer (who says it was in some MSS) 
 Ambrst (who ascribes it to Greek interpolators) al : but ins (του om AB 13. 177') 
 ABCEGH niss (api>y) vss (Clem : Orig om ver 20) Constt (απ. τ. aXiay. τ. ίθνων ίΐοω- 
 λυθιτυν κ. αιμ. κ. ττν. κ. πορ. : this order also (iO. 105) Chr Thl Oec Vig al (v copt τωρ 
 TTiiKToif : viicpoii sah).— at end, D 7• 27• 20. fJO. 60. u8-marg 106 sah seth slav Iren 
 Cypr al add και υσα («ν add al) /ιη θίΧοικτι»' (-ωσιν al) (αντοις (αντ. al) yiriauai ιτί^οις 
 μη TToifire (ποκιν al : yti'toGai sah .•'). — 21. τ. κηρ. avr. κατά πολ. f\-fi 05': ιχ. 
 τους κηρ. C al : ιχει τ. κ. αντον £χίΐ (sic) D (D^ om ιχ. 2nd). — 22. tSo^tv CE : ώο- 
 
 I have given is in all probability the original, 
 and the words inserted in the rec. have been 
 intended as a help out of their difficulty. 
 Not only are they wanting in several ancient 
 MSS, but they bear the sure mark of spu- 
 riousiiess, — manifold variations in the MSS 
 where they do occur. The sense, and ac- 
 count of the text seem to be this : the 
 Apostle paraphrases the ό ποιών [πάΐ'τα] 
 ταντα of the LXX, adding yvwara άπ 
 αιώνος, and intending to express ' saith the 
 Lord, who from the beginning revealed 
 these things,' viz. by the proj)het (of old, 
 see reff.) just cited. The addition in the 
 rec. has been made to fill up the appa- 
 rently elliptical γνωστά άπ' αιώνος, which 
 not being found in the passage of Amos, 
 was regarded as a sentence by itself. 
 [These last words, κνρ. ό ποι. ταυ. yv. άπ 
 αι., may perha])s be an allusion to the mys- 
 tery of the admission of the Gentiles into the 
 church, which was now being revealed prac- 
 tically, and had been from of old announced 
 by the prophets : cf. Rom. xvi. 25, 26. Eph. 
 iii. 5, 6, &c.] 19.] £•π•ι<Γτρ€'φο•υσιν, not, 
 
 as E. V. ' are iurned,' but 'are turning:' — 
 the converts daily gathered into the church. 
 In irapevoxX. there is no meaning of 
 ' prceter, . . . insuper, molestiam creare:' but 
 simply ' molestiam creare:' see reff. 
 20.] £ΐΓΐστ£Ϊλαι, to send an ίπιστολή : — 
 then τοϋ άπ., of the purpose of such 
 epistle, — ' to the end that they may ab- 
 stain,' &c. άλισγ. belongs to (ίίώΚων 
 only. Meyer understands it to refer to the 
 four genitives, the pollutions of (1) idols, 
 (2) fornication, (3) things strangled, (4) 
 blood. This he rests on the non-repetition 
 of από before της πορν. But in this case 
 the members do not correspond. The Gen- 
 tile converts needed no command to abstain 
 
 from the pollution of idolatry : and the use 
 of the Alexandrine verb aXirryuv in reff. 
 shews it to apply most naturally to pollution 
 by ea/ing. The άλ. r. (Ιδ. are the things 
 polluted by being offered to idols, about 
 which there was much doubt and conten- 
 tion in the early church; — see Exod. xxxiv. 
 15, and 1 Cor. viii. and x. I'J. της 
 
 iropveias] It may seem strange that a 
 positive sin should be made the subject of 
 these enactments which mostly regard 
 things in themselves indifferent, but ren- 
 dered otherwise by expediency and charity 
 to others. In consequence we have the 
 following attempts to evade the simple ren- 
 dering of the word : (1) Beza, Selden, 
 Schleusner, explain it of spiritual fornica- 
 tion in eating things offered to idols : (2) 
 Morus and Heinrichs, of the committal of 
 actual fornication at the rites in idol tem- 
 ples : (3) Salmasius, of the sin of the 
 •whore-master : (4) Calovius, of concubin- 
 age : (5) Lightfoot, of marriage within the 
 forbidden degrees : (6) Teller, of marriage 
 with heathens : (7) Bentley would read χοι- 
 ριίας, 'swine's flesh .•' (8) πορκίίας has also 
 been conjectured (not by Bentley, as stated 
 in Meyer, De W., and this work, edn. 1) : — 
 see other renderings in Meyer and De Wette. 
 But the solution will best be found in the 
 fact, that πορνίΐα was universally in the 
 Gentile world regarded on the same footing 
 with the other things mentioned, as an 
 άδιάφορυν, and is classed here as Gentiles 
 would be accustomed to hear of it, among 
 those things which they allowed themselves, 
 but which the Jews regarded as forbidden. 
 The moral abomination of the practice is 
 not here in question, but is abundantly set 
 forth by our Lord and his Apostles in other 
 places. ttviktovJ as containing the
 
 21—24. 
 
 ΠΡΑΗΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 153 
 
 ττ) ίκκΧησια ^ εκΧίζ,αμίνους ανόρας ίξ αυτών ττίμφαι 
 ΑντιοΎίίαν συν τω Παυλω και Βαρνάβα, Ιούδαν τον ^.^^. 
 καΧουμίνυν Βαρσαββαν και Έ,ιΧαν, ανορας ' η-νουμενους j 
 
 tv τοις αόίΧψοις, 
 απόστολοι και οι 
 AvTw^eiav και 
 ίθνων γαιρίΐν. 
 
 εις h John XT. 19. 
 " ■ xxii.26. 
 xiii. 7, 
 Ά. Sir. 
 
 XXXT. 1, 
 
 •onsir ,ch. 
 . 3 reff. 
 
 ^ -γραψαντΐς eta γ^ίΐρος αυτών ^t ''τϊΐ asf? 
 πρεσβύτεροι αδελφοί τοις κατά 
 Έυρ'ιαν και Κι\ικίαν α^εΧφοις τοις ίξ ^ 
 
 2 Chron. 
 
 την xxxiT 14. 
 
 Ich. xxiii. 26. 
 mes i. 1. 
 
 Jolm lU, 11. 
 
 επειδή ηκουσαμεν οτι τίνες {ς -ημών 22.' 
 
 m Luke xi. 6. ch. xiii. 46. xiv. 12. 1 Cor. i.21, 22 al. L. P., except Malt. xxi. 4β. 
 ο Matt. ii. β. 1 John ii. 19. Deut. xiii. 13. 
 
 ξασίν D : txt A. — ίκλιζαμινοις 13. 137- — ίζ αυτών om A : ιξ a. σνδρας 73. — τω bef 
 π. ora {for uniformity) DGH all Clir Thl» Oec : ins ABCE all Thl2 {τω βα()ν. also 137 
 Thl^).— rec (πιι^αλονμίνον {eaplanator-y cnrrn), with Η &c Chr Thl Oec : txt ABCDEG 
 13. 15. 18. :^6. 73. 180 Constt. — rec βαρσαβαν, with some mss vss Chr Thl Oec : 
 βαραββαν D : βαριαβαν £eth : t.\t ABCEGH 57. 65. 96. i)8. 104 am copt sah 
 Constt. — ti' τοις om 73. — 23. rec aft αυτών ins ταδί, with (mss) Constt Chr al : ίπι- 
 στο\ην πίριίχουσαν raCt CD (syr-marg) : ίττιστυΧην και πίμφαντίς πίρκχουσαν 137 
 {additions, as the rariation shews) : txt AB. — rec bef αίίλφ., ins και οι {see note), with 
 EGH mss (nrly) syrr copt seth al Constt Chr Thl Oec : txt ABCD 13 ν arm Ath 
 Iren Pacian Vigil : /cm oi aC. om 34 (Clem Orig citing freely), και οι πρίσβ. om Clem. 
 — Γοις (1st) om (appy) C. — bef αιτιοχ. om njv 38. 113: add και λνκιαν 68: for κιλι- 
 κία/•, κιλιαν A, κιλίίαν D. — Γοίς' *? t^. αδ. D. — 24. ι^κουσ. om 73. — ίξελθ. om Β arm 
 
 blood, — see Levit. xvii. 13, 14. 
 αίματος] ' blood,' in any shape : see Gen. 
 is. 4. Levit. xvii. 13, 14." Deut. xii. 23, 24. 
 Cypr., Tertull., and others interpret the 
 word of homicide, which is refuted by the 
 context. 21.] Living as the Gentile 
 
 converts would be in the presence of Jevrish 
 Christians, who heard these Mosaic prohi- 
 bitions read, as they had been from genera- 
 tions past, in their synagogues, it would be 
 well for them to avoid all such conduct and 
 habits as would give unnecessary offence. 
 Other meanings have been proposed : as 
 ' that it was superfluous to command these 
 things to the Jews, for they would hear 
 them in the synagogues ' (so an ancient 
 Schol., Lyra, and Neander), — whereas no 
 question whatever was raised about Jewish 
 converts: — ' neque est metuendum, ut 
 Moses propterea antiquetur,' Erasmus, al. : 
 ' Pudori vobis foret et ignominise, si vos, 
 homines Christiaui .... hac in re inferiores 
 a Judaeis deprehenderemini, quod vos com- 
 munione cum epuUs sacriticialibus poly- 
 theismo favere videremini, quum illi Judsei 
 .... monotheismo adhaereant tenacissime, 
 eumque quavis septimana sibi inculcatum 
 audiarit,' — Heinrichs. — 'Nam quod ad 
 Mosen attinet, non possunt, qui ex Judaeis 
 sunt, queri, eum sperni ab alienigenis nostri 
 gregis, quando in nostris (?) non minus 
 quam in Judaicis coiiventibus Moses, ita 
 ut ab antique factum est, legitur, ct quidem 
 sabbatis,' Grot., Hammond. 22. Ικ- 
 
 λ£ξαμ£'νους must not (with Kuin., al.) be 
 taken for ίκ\(χθίι•τας ; the 1 aor. middle 
 can ncijer have; a passive signification : see 
 Lobeck's note on Phrynichus, p. 31i) : 
 where be gives a collectiuD of seeming 
 
 instances of such usage and explains them. 
 — Such irregularities of case in words in 
 apposition as we have here (άττοστόλοις 
 .... ixXiiapivovQ .... γμάψαΐ'Τίς . . . .) 
 will not surprise any one versed in Hel- 
 lenistic Greek. See e. g. ch. xxii. 17, 
 
 ϊγΙΐ'ίΓο δϊ μοι ΰποστρίψανη κ. 
 
 ■ττροςίνχομίνου μου .... γενέσθαι με εν 
 (κστάσει .... and ref. (j). Βαρσαβ- 
 
 βάν] Of this Judas nothing further is 
 known than that (ver. 32) he was a ' pro- 
 phet' (see ch. xiii. 1). Wolf and Grotius 
 hold him to have been the brother of Jo- 
 seph Barnabas, ch. i. 23. Σίλαν] 
 otherwise Silvanus (Σίλουσνόι) : the for- 
 mer name in the Acts, the latter in the 
 Epp. of Paul. He also was a ' prophet ' 
 (ver. 32). He accompanied Paul on his 
 second missionary journey through Asia 
 Minor to Macedonia (ver. 40 — ch. xvii. 4), 
 — remained behind in Beroea (xvii. 10. 14), 
 and joined Paul again in Corinth (xviii. 5. 
 1 Thess. i. 1. 2 Thess. i. 1), where he 
 preached with Paul and Timotheus (2 Cor. 
 i. 19). Whether the Silvanus (1 Pet. v. 12) 
 by whom the first Epistle of Peter was 
 carried to the churches of Asia Minor, was 
 the same person, is altogether uncertain. 
 Tradition tiistinguishes Silas from Silvanus, 
 making the former bishop of Corinth, the 
 latter of Thessalonica. On the hypothesis 
 which identifies Silas with Luke and makes 
 him the Author of the Acts, see Prolegg. to 
 Acts, § I. 11. β, γ. I may repeat here, 
 that in my mind the description of Silas 
 here as one of the t'lyorptvoi iv τοις- άδίλ- 
 (pdlg, of itself, especially when contrasted 
 with the preface to Luke's gospel, would 
 suffice to refute the notion. 23.] The
 
 154; 
 
 nPASElS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XV. 
 
 "εζελθόΐ'τες " ίτάρα^αν νμας λο-γοις '' ανασκ(να^οι>τ(ς τας 
 χΡυ-χας υμών, ""' (ης ου '' δίεστίΐλάμίθα, ίοο^,εν ημιΐ' γενο- 
 μίνοις '^ υμοΘυμαό6ι> ^ ίκλί^αμενους άνδρας πίμφαι προς 
 υμάς συν τοις ' αγαπ»?το(ς ήμων Βαρνάβα και ΤΙαυΧω, 
 
 Οβ U ' Γι ' ν "? 5> ' ^ W ι \ ' - Λ f ν 
 
 ανυρωποις παραοίοωκοσιν τας ψυ^ας αυτών υττερ 
 του ονόματος του κυρίου ημών Ιησού "χωριστού. 
 
 o-Gal.K 7. 
 
 ν. 10. η τα- 
 
 ράττ€ΐ σε, 
 
 . . . ΟΤί . . . 
 
 Xen.Meni. ii. 
 
 (1, 17. 
 ρ here only t• 
 
 (Sie cli. xvii. 
 
 6.) t;;^ Λή- 
 
 κνθον Kutf- 
 
 el^iam. uva- 
 
 Thnc. iv. lie. 
 q Mark vii. 3β al. Ezek. iii. 1!». 
 
 1 Oor. X. 14. Phil. ii. 12 only (Panl) 
 xiii. 3. Dan. ' 
 
 ABCD 
 EGII 
 
 27 
 
 Γ ch. i. 14 reff. s ver. 22. 
 
 P.S. cxxvi. 2. u — Malt, xiii 45. 
 
 V— Matt. ii. 2U al. ch.xx. 24 al. Exod. xxi. 23. 
 
 . gen., Rom. i. 7. χτί fi, 8. 
 
 (ως ίζ ΐ]μων) Constt Vig (ίξ ημ. om 32. 57^ fil. 105 : seth om ίζ ημ. (ξ.) : (\θοντ(ς G. — 
 iKtrirpa^av D'. — rcc aft. νμωΐ> ins λίγονης ττίοιημνίσΟαι και τημαν τον νυμον (yloss 
 from νυ Ι, 5), with CE (aft ττιριτ. ins in Ε B-gr) (rrffiirf^i-fiv αυτονς τη rucra 
 Chr-edd) al Iren (aft citnTttX.) : om ABD 13 ν copt sah seth Constt Ath Epiph Vig 
 Bed. — bef Oifffr. om oi; 137. — 25. ομοθ. om 73. — ^κλ^ε,aμevoις (om 73) ABG 3. 13. 31. 
 6i). 95. 104. 105. 133. 137 {grammatical correction): txt CDEH most mss Constt 
 Clir Thl Oec. — ayair. νμων O-gr. — βαρν. rt 137•— 26. την ^νχην D Iren. — χρ. om 
 73. — at end, add ας πάντα ττιιρασμυν DE 137 Bed-gr syr-marg. — 27. Xoy. πολλοί» Ε. 
 
 omission of και ol before άΰε\φοί, found 
 (see var. read.) in all the first MSS, can (as 
 Neander observes against De Wette) hardly 
 have been occasioned by hierarchical consi- 
 derations, seeing that it occurs as early as Ire- 
 naeus, and that it would be equally against 
 the strong hierarchical view to call the pres- 
 byters πρίσβ. actXipoi, writing, as they were, 
 to the άδίΧφοϊς. It seems very much more 
 probable to me that the words και o'l were 
 inserted to bring the decree into exact har- 
 mony with the beginning of ver. 22. In 
 this, the first official mention of ττρισ- 
 βύτίροι, it is very natural that the import 
 of the term should be thus given by attach- 
 ing άΟίλφηί to it. Κιλικίαν] This 
 mention of churches in Ctlicia, coupled 
 with the fact of Paul's stay at Tarsus (ch. 
 ix. 30— xi. 25 : see also Gal. i. 21) makes 
 it probable that Paul preached the gospel 
 there, and to Gentiles, in accordance with 
 the vision which he had in the temple (ch. 
 xxii. 21). χαίρίΐν] Not a rendering 
 by Luke of the Hebrew cii"C, as Grotius ; 
 for the Epistle was certainly written in 
 Greek, as intended for Gentiles. The only 
 other place where this Greek form of salu- 
 tation occurs in an apostolic document (we 
 have it in the letter of the chief captain 
 Lysias, ch. xxiii. 2(J) is in James i. 1, which 
 Bleek has remarked as a coincidence serving 
 to shew his hand in the drawing up of this 
 Epistle. 24 ] Neander remarks (Pfl. 
 u. L. p. 223, note) that il ημών ίξ. is a 
 presumption in favour of the reading και oi 
 aStXipui above : for that these men could 
 hardly have gone out from among the 
 Apostles and elders. But such a suppo- 
 sition is not necessary : ι'ιμών implies the 
 church, the «όίλ^,χ of whom they were the 
 τΓρίσβϋτεμοι, whether Kiii n't be inserted or 
 not. όνασκ.] See ref. to Thucyd., 
 where it will be seen that it implies turning 
 up the foundations : — for Brasidas cleared 
 
 the ground and consecrated it. Cf. Pas- 
 sow, sub voc. — The words Χί^οντις irtpi- 
 τίμνίσθαι κ. τηρί'ιν τον νόμον, inserted in 
 rec. after ΐψων, are manifestly , in my view, 
 an interpolation, from the desire to spe- 
 cify in what particulars these persons had 
 sought to unsettle the souls of the Gentile 
 brethren. The defence of the clause set up 
 by Meyer and De Wette, — that if interpo- 
 lated it must be from ver. 5, not from 
 ver. 1, and tliat this is improbable,- is best 
 answered by observing that in E, one of the 
 principal authorities for the insertion, the 
 Set after πίριτίμνίσθαι betrays in very 
 fact that the interpolation was from ver. 5, 
 as also, but in a less degree, does the λΙ- 
 yovTtc. The reasons given by Meyer and 
 De W. why the words should have been 
 omitted, — the similarity of ending in ϋ-ΜΩΝ 
 and »■(')- ΛΙ OX, — or to square it with ver. 1, 
 seem to me nugatory. The former is very 
 improbable, — and tlie latter would have 
 required the preservation of \ky. ττερι- 
 τίμνίσβαι. — The variations also in the 
 clause are strong presumptions against it. — 
 The persons to whom the epistle was ad- 
 dressed would very well know irhat it was 
 that had disturbed their minds, and the 
 omission of formal mention of it would be 
 natural, to avoid prominent cause of offence 
 to the Jewish converts by an apparent de- 
 preciation of circumcisiim and the observ- 
 ance of the law. 25.] yev. όμοθυμι. may 
 mean either ' assembled icilh one accord,' 
 as (perhaps) ch.i. 14; ii. 1, or ' having agreed 
 with One consent,' as Meyer. I prefer the 
 former meaning. [So we have adverbs as 
 predicates after verbs substantive, e. g., 
 tivai διαφίρόντ ■ ς. Plat. Legg. x. p. 892 c, 
 KaTVTTtpOi yii'fiH.fi, Herod., &c. See Bern- 
 hardy, Syntax. p. 3:i7•] Βαρν. K. Πανλ.] 
 Paul has generally been mentioned first 
 since ch. xiii. 43. (The exception, ch. xiv. 
 14, appears to arise from the people calling
 
 25—82. ΠΡΑΗΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 155 
 
 εστάλκαμΐν ούΐ' Ιουδαΐ' και Σί'λαν, ^ και ^αυτούς ^^oiay = Matt. 
 
 ^ , /Λ Λ \'/0β• >/c\ Χ \ - xsvii.57.ch. 
 
 λογού "^ ατταγγίλλοιτας τα αυτά. εοοξβν -yap tw y/^r 32. 
 
 <•/ r \f- Λ\ -ν/ b»'/l£l '- ζ Luke viii. 20. 
 
 αγίω πνίυματι και Ίίμιν μηοίν ιτλεον ίπιτιΰεσυαι υμιν χηι.ι. Geo. 
 ^ βύξ)ος, πΧην των ^ εττάΐ'αγκες, ^ " απεχεσθοι ίΐοωλο- y'ii'i'rrefl''* 
 
 ef \ •ι \ π - \g '.'^'2 Pet. ii. 4. 
 
 υτωΐ' και αίματος και πνικτων και πορνείας εί ων arer. 22refl. 
 
 οιατηροΰντες εαυτούς ευ ' πράξετε. ερρωσθε. Οι L^texxiu. 
 
 > "^I'Afl' "'■ΛΑ ''λ ' ^1 c = Revii.24. 
 
 υεν ουν αττοΑνυεντες riAuov εις Άντιο\ειαν, και σνν- sir.xiu.s. 
 οΎα-γοντες τυ ττΛησος εττεοωκτον ττμ' *^ εττιστοΛϊϊν. dhereoniyt 
 
 31 ' ' ?^ <1 ' ' α ' » - Γ Λ ' Jos. Antt. 
 
 αναγι^οΐ'τες οε ε\αρησαν ^ επι tij παοακλησει. xvi. ιι.2. 
 Ιυνοας τε και Ι,ιλας, και αυτηι ΤΓξ>οψηται οντες, οια «ατ.τ.,ιοκρ. 
 
 e ver. 20 reff. gfii., 1 Tim. iv. 3. fch. xxi. 25. 1 Cor. viii. l,&c. Rev. ii. 14, 20 +. g ver. 2U*re£f. 
 
 h Loke ii. Μ <>nly. = Ps. xi. 7. Isa Ivi. 2. i see note, not as Eph. vi. 21. 2 Marc. ix. 19. k liere 
 
 only. (ch. xxiii. 3» var. read.) 2 Mace. xi. 33. 1 ch. xiii 3 refl'. η ch. xiv. 27 reft'. ο = Matt. 
 
 Tii.ll, 10. Jiiiin xiii. 2Ht• ρ ch. ix. 2 reff. q Matt, xviii. 13. 4 Kings x.\. 13. Jonah iv. 6. 
 
 r seech, xiii. 15. Isa. Ivii. IS. s ver. 27. t — ver 27. 2 Thess ii. 2, 15. 
 
 — ατταγγιλοννταςΌ-ξΤ: καταγγελλαντας 13T. — Γαυτα D' : Afficd al : avraal. — 28. τω 
 
 TTv. τω ay. AB 13. 73 vss Iren Tert al Clem (corrn) : txt CDEGH mss (nrly) Constt 
 
 Cyr-jer Chr Thl Oec Cypr Pacian. — τγΑειοι' D al. — rec των ιπαναγ. τυντωι•, with EG 
 
 &c vss Chr Oec: τηυτωτ των επ. Β€Ό(των om D')H all ν al Constt Till Iren al : txt 
 
 A 13. 1.5. 18. 'AG. 43. 180 Clenij Epiph Cyr Orig-int Pacian mss {τοντων was a 7nar- 
 
 ginal supplementary gluss, which some inserted before, some after των ίττηνηγκες). — 
 
 επανιγκοις AC (D- ?) 40 al Constt: επαναγκαις 96. — 29. κ. αιμ. om 133. — rec κ. 
 
 ■κνικτην (alteration for uniformity with ver 21), with A-'EGH &c vss Constt Chr Thl 
 
 Oec Vig : κ•, πν. om D Cyr-jer (ms) Iren Cypr Tert Ambr Pacian Jer (see on ver 21): 
 
 txt A'BC al copt sah Clem, Orig-int Orig (quotes the sense, τα ττνικτα) Cyr-jer (ms) 
 
 Gaud (a sauquine, i. e. snffocatis) : κ. αιμ. πι ικτον (sanguine suffacato) v-ms Cassiod. — 
 
 at end, D 2.5. 29. 32. 42.' δ?. fiO. 105. 106. 137 sah seth syr* slav-edd Iren Cypr (not 
 
 Tert) add και οτα (add αν al) μη θίλετί εαντοις (αυτοις 42 : al add υμιι•) -γενέσθαι 
 
 (γειν. Ό) ετερω (or -poic) μη τιοκιτε (ποιειν D') (see ver 20). — ττιαξατε CDGH 20. 33. 
 
 43. 57• 81. IOG Eeth : ττραζητε Ε al Thl-. — D adds, φερόμενοι (ferentes d) εν τω ayita 
 
 πνενματι : also Iren {ambulantes in sp. s.) Tert {vectante or rectante vos sp. «.). — ερηωσθε 
 
 om 2C : add εν τω κνυ. ημών Syr. — 30. aft αττολ., add αττο τ7]ς εκκλησίας (*8 Thl-. — 
 
 for iiXHov, κατηλΟον {emendation from ver 1) ABCD {tv ημεηηις ολιγηις κατ. D) 15. 
 
 18. 40. m. 73. 105. 180 ν seth Thl- : txt EGH most mss vss Chr Thl' Oec— ηννα^οντες 
 
 D'. — ε -ihcwKav Ε : εΐωκην 38 Thl'. — 32. rec lorc. ίε, with D-gr &c e ν copt al ThF : 
 
 txt ABCE-gr GH 73. 133. 137 all d Syr (om sah ath) Chr Thl' Oec— for οντις, νπαρ- 
 
 Barnabas Jupiter, and thus giving him the άπεστάλκαμεν they vrould be άτταγγελ- 
 
 precedence in ver. 12. after which the next λοντες. 27.] τα αίτά, as above, ' the 
 
 mention of them follows the same order.) contents of the Epistle' (and any ex- 
 
 But here, as at ver 12, we have naturally planation required) : not, as Neander, 'the 
 
 the old order of precedence in the Jeru- same things as P. and B. have preached ;' 
 
 salem congregation preserved. 26. δια λόγου, ' by word of mouth,' as opposed 
 
 Ίταραδ τ. ψ.] See reff. The sacrifice of their to ' i^y /e/^e?•,' decides against this interp. 
 
 lives was made by them : they were martyrs 28. τω άγ. irv. και ήμ ] Not = τψ 
 
 in will, though their lives had not as yet ay. πν. iv ήμ. (as 01sh.),-^but as, in ch. 
 
 been laid down in point of fact.— This is v. 32, the Holy Spirit, given to the Apostles 
 
 mentioned to shew that P. and B. could and testifying by His divine power, is 
 
 have no other motive than that of serving coupled with their own human testimony, 
 
 the Lord Jesus Christ, and to awaken trust — so here the decision of the Holy Spirit, 
 
 in the minds of ι he churches. But, although given them as leaders of the church, is laid 
 
 this was so, the App. atid Elders did not think down as the primary and decisive deter- 
 
 proper to send only P. and B., who were mination on the matter, — and their own 
 
 already so deeply committed by their acts to formal ecclesiastical decision follows, as 
 
 the same side of the queslitm as the letter giving utterance and scope to His will and 
 
 which they bore,— but as direct authorities command. The other interp. weakens this 
 
 from themselves, Judas and Silas also, who accuracy of expression, and destroys the 
 
 miiiht by word confirm the contents of the propriety of the sentence. Neander, in 
 
 Epistle. On the ))resent part, {uirnyy.) see his last edn. of the Pfl. u. L. {y. 224, note), 
 
 reff. and Winer, § 4'i, 5. The simjde account has given up the rendering of his former 
 
 of it is, that during the mission implied in ones, ίίυΐ,εν yap {τψ άγίφ τχνείψατι) και
 
 156 
 
 ΠΡΑαΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XV. 
 
 )γοι» 
 
 α ch. xvi. 40. λο 
 W cli. xviii. 23. 
 
 πολλού " παρεκάΧίσαν τους αδβλψους 
 
 και ίΤΓ- 
 ατΓίλυθί 
 
 ABCD 
 
 Εϋΐί 
 
 £1^ 
 
 μίτα και 
 
 ποιησαντίς οε y^povov αττίΛυυησίΐν 
 ΧΧ.3. j»mei ^ LitT (Ίοήνηο ατΓο των αόίλφων πους τους αττοστίΐλαντας 
 
 ίν 13 2 C<>r Γ ^ » • 3 ι \ ■* 
 
 *|;;=^^• ρ^^^• αιίΓους. ^ Ποϋλος Of και Βαρυάβης " Βιίτριβον ' 
 
 xiii. 23. De- • . / c\ Λ / it)' Λ Υ ' ^ 
 
 niosth.p.3ii2, AiTiovfta όώασκοντίς και ευαγγίλιςομεΐΌΐ 
 
 oid' ίποί- ι• t , ' . .^ _ ^ ι, •\ ' - ' 
 
 ίτίρων ποΛλωΐ' τον Λογοί' του κυρίου 
 ^^ Μίτα δε "^ τινας ημίρας είττεν 7Γ|θός Βαρνόβαν Παύ- 
 λος ^ 'Κπιστρίφαντες οη ^ ίττισκίφωμίθα τους αδελφούς 
 ^^ κατά πόλιν ττασαν εν αις ' κατη-γ-γίίλαμΐν τον λογον του 
 
 (ίσακ χpo^u^ 
 
 Χ Mt-b. xi.31 
 
 only. Gen. 
 
 XX τι 2U. 
 
 (I Cor. xvi. 
 
 11.) 
 
 ach.xii. IHrcff'. 
 
 b ch. viii. 4 rrff. 
 
 c— ch. i. 2U al. 
 
 xviii. 4. 
 
 d ch. X. 48 rrff. 
 gch. vii. 23 refl". 
 
 1 Cor. vi. 20. Gen. 
 
 χοΐ'Γίς Ε: add ττΧηρίις ττνινματος άγιου D. — ττολλου oni D 18. — ίπίστηρισαν CE 73 
 (Β.'): t.xt AB(e siljDGH al. — 33. /itr £tp. om34 : /xfr to αυΓους om !)7 ; απυ r. an. om 
 18 : νπυ O'J Clir. — recfor αποστ. αντονς, αποστοΧονς {perhaps an ejcplanatory gloss, sub- 
 stituted for the genuine text ; — but more probably a mistake, owing to ηττοητ. being com- 
 mon to the two words), with EGH mss Bed-gr syrr al Chr al : txt ABCD 13. 15. 18. 27. 
 29. 3β. 40. 65. 08. G9. 105. 133. 180 ν copt sah seth TliP Cassiod Bed.— rec at end, ins 
 (34) ί5οξ{ Si τω (τιλα επιμΐΐναι αντον {explanatory anticipation of ver 40), with CD &c 
 v-ed sah syr* arm ar-erp slav-ed ThF Oec {rrnXta D : τταυλω seth : for ίπιμίΐηιι, sus- 
 iinere eos d : for αυτού, αυτονς CD', αυτοις 73, ττρος αυτούς D-, αυτόθι 32. 42. 57. 69 : 
 and add μονός dt ιοοίας ΐπορινθη D ν (ed) arm (not arm venet) slav-ed Cassiod, 
 and the above vss and Cassiod add Jerusalem) : txt ABEGH all (abt 50) am demid Syr 
 copt ieth ar-pol slav (mss) Chr Thl'. — for κνρ., θιου sah arm-venet. — 35. ο it ττ. D : και 
 μίτα ίτ. D'.— 36. rec π. ττρ. β., with DE al (ο ττανλ. Ό) : txt ABC 13 {τον β. ο π. 180) 
 ν ΎϊίΙ^.—ίπκτκε-ψομίθα 13. — rec τους αδ. ημών {corrn, missing the sense of τ. a5t\<f>.), 
 with GH &c seth al Thl Oec: txt ABCD (add τους D 137. 1«0 : 7]μων τους 142) Ε 13. 
 15. 18. 27• 29. 40. 69. 73• 105 lect 40 ν syrr ar-erp copt sah arm Chr. — rec πασ. πυλ. 
 with DEGH &c vss flF: txt ABC al copt.— for κατηγγ., εκηρυΚαμεν C 15. 18. 36. 180 
 
 νμίν, ' It seemed good {by the Holy Ghost) 
 to us also,' i. e. as well as to Paul and Bar- 
 nabas. It was plausible, but quite untena- 
 ble. Such ambiguity, in such a document, 
 would surely be out of the question. — The 
 judgment as to what things were επάΐ'αγκες 
 it implied in ϊουζεν, &c. Ιτητίθ. had 
 
 been used by Peter, ver. 10. 29.] [θα 
 
 the constr. of άτΓ€χ€σ-θαι with άπό in ver. 20, 
 and with a simple gen. here, Tittm., de Syn. 
 N. T. p. 225, says well that the difference 
 arises ' non quoad rem ipsam, sed modo co- 
 gitandi, ita ut in priori formula sejunctionis 
 cogitatio ad rem, in posteriori vero ad nos 
 ipsos referatur.' His following remarks are 
 worth reading.] Ιξ ων, ' from wMch 
 
 things;' not, as Meyer, ' according to which 
 precepts;' see John xvii. 15. tv ιτράξ.] 
 Not, ' ye shall prosper :' but as καλώς έποί- 
 ησας, χ. 33. 3 John 6, — 'ye shall do well.' 
 — See the curious additions in var. readd. 
 €ρρωσ-θε] The customary ' valete ' of 
 the conclusion of epistles. 31. ιταρα- 
 
 κλήσίΐ] It does not appear, because παρ- 
 ίκαΚισαΐ' follows in the sense of ' exhorted,' 
 that this word need mean ' exhortation.' 
 There was (De W.) very little exhortation 
 in the letter : and it is much more natural 
 to render it ' consolation ' here : it was the 
 matter of their joy, which surely could not 
 be said of the orders to abstain given in the 
 
 letter. 32.] ττροψ. οντ. gives the rea- 
 
 son for their superadding to the appointed 
 business of their mission the work of exhort- 
 ing and edifying. — On ινροψ., see xi. 27 ; xiii. 
 1. Eph. ii. 20, and notes. 33.] irou 
 
 xp., ' having continued some time :' see 
 reff. 34. omitted. ] On every account 
 
 it is probable that the words forming this 
 ver. in rec. (see var. readd.) are an interpo- 
 lation. For, (1) MSS evidence against 
 them is weighty, especially as D, in the 
 case of insertions in the Acts, is of very 
 low authority. (2) The αΰτοϋ is oiirovs in 
 C and D', and αΰτοίς in others, and D and 
 the Vulg. add μόνος Sk 'lovS. tTropf ύθ/; ; 
 the former shewing the copying of an indis- 
 tinct marginal gloss which was not under- 
 stood, and the latter betraying the secret of 
 the whole, viz. that the notice was inter- 
 polated to account for Silas being found 
 again at Antioch in ver. 40. (3) Inter- 
 nally considered, the insertion is very im- 
 probable : coming after άπελυθηταν unex- 
 plained (which from its voice and tense 
 implies that the dismissal actually took 
 place and they departed) and followed by 
 ΠιϊΑος• δί after εδοζε δε τψ 2i\g. On 
 Silas's subsequent presence at Antioch, see 
 note, ver. 40. — We learn from Gal. ii. 10, 
 that a condition was attached to the cor- 
 diality with which the Gentile mission of
 
 33—41. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 157 
 
 κυριον, πως εγ^ουσιν. 'Βαρνάβας οε ί'ρουλίύσατο tMatt. ίτ. 24. 
 
 Ill Λ/Ο" \»τ/ \ "χ/ TIT/ ΜηΓΚ XVI. 18. 
 
 συμπά paAapeii' και Iwai'Viji» τον καλουμΐνον Μαρκον* ι 2*ch'^v"ii/^" 
 
 38 π "Λ 5>^ 11 '!ί' ^ ο ' ' » t 1 _ , , (2 Kings xVl. 
 
 ΙΙαυΛος οε ϊ/ςιου τον αποσταντα απ αυτών απο as.) 
 Ιΐπ^ί^υλίας κ:α/ μη ' συνίλοοντα αυτοις ίΐς το ' epyov, μν, ° J'^O'lii''*"''' 
 συμπαρολα/ΐ<ρπνειΐ' τούτον. "^ εγενετο οε πα^οοςυσ- oLukeu. 37. 
 
 ν ,; (f „_ , χ. >»...., χ / ίτ.13. ch.xii. 
 
 /uo?, ωςτε αποΛ^ωρισσϊίναι αυτούς αττ αΛλί7Λωι^, τον {."■ ΐχχ;^^^ fg• 
 
 τε Βαρνάραΐ' " παρα\αβοντα τον Map/coi' ^ ε'κπλεΰσοι εις q~'^ch'.'x1,'i'a*' 
 Κυπρον' Παί'λυς οε * έττίλεζάπείΌς Σίλαν " έζίίλθε»' V*^"'• 
 
 ^παραδοθείς Try yJipiTi του κυρίου υπο των αδελφών, *on:y.^D*at. 
 οπϊρ>^ετο οε την 2.υριαν και Κιλικιαν, εττίστίϊριζω»' <Rev. νι. ΐ4 
 
 siii. 14.) U ~ Malt. χτπ. 1. Num. χχίί. 41. τ ch. xviii. 18. χχ. 6 onlyf. Xen.Anab. τ. 621,23. 
 
 w = here only. John v. 2 only. Exod. xvii. y (act.). χ =■ ch.xvi. 3, 40. xx. 1 al. y ch. xiv. 2ΰ reff. 
 
 ζ ch. xii. 10. xiii. 6. a ch. xiv. 22. 
 
 Syr copt. — το πως Ε: add ηρισε St η ίπινοια τω βαρναβα syr*. — 37. (βουΧίτο ABCE 
 13. 15. 18. 25. 27. 29. 36. 40. C8. 69. 73. 103. 105 ν {volebat) syrr copt £eth ThP 
 (corrn : see ch v. 33) : txt (φουλίνίτο D) GH most mss Cbr Thl' Oec. — σνμπαραλαμ- 
 βίΐναν A: παραΧαβίΐν 133: X«/3fU' 137: λαθ. μίθ tavTov sah. — rec TOf ιωαν. with 
 GH &c vss ThP Oec: ιωαν. without και or τον D 7- 8. 29. 69. 97. 105: txt AB 
 (ic. Toi' ιω. Β al)C'E all ν copt syr arm Chr Ύ\ιΙ-.—ίπικα\ονμίνον CD 40. 76. 103. 104. 
 105 al lectt 5. 40 v. — 38. for ηζιον, ονκ (βονλίτο (add Xtywv D) D Syr ar-erp. — απο- 
 στοτΐ]σαντα (sic) A: αττοστησαΐ'τα Ό.— απο παμψ. om C*. — αυτοις om D. — aft εργ. 
 add tig ο ιπεμφΟησαν D tol lat-mss. — rec iTi'/i7rajjfjXa/3fii' (corrn for conformity to ver 
 37), with EGH &c Chr Thl Oec: txt ABC 180 al : σννπ. ABCE.— for μη σνμπ. τ., 
 D has TovTov μη είναι συν αντοις. — 39. rec for if, ουί' {corrn to suit the sequence of the 
 παροΚ. on the last verse), with CEGH &c syr ar-pol Chr al : t.xt ABD al \ copt sah. — 
 απυχωρησαι Ε : χωρισθηιαι 14. 18. 36. 38. 40. 99. IfiO lectt 5. 18 Clir Thl'.— γογ£ 
 βαρν. παμαΧαβων τ. μ. (πΧενσεν D: τον om 177'• — for τι, ύε Η al Thl'. — 40. σανΧος 
 E-gr. — ίί και 13. — επιδίζαμενος D. — rec του θ* ο υ (corrn: or gloss interpreting κνριον), 
 with CEGH &c vss fl": txt ABD 13. 33. 34. 40. 68 am tol ar-pol sah ThP.— αττο D.— 
 41. την KtX. BD Thl: ecclesiain arm-venet.- at end, D v-ed syr-marg add παραίι- 
 £ονς τας εντυΧας των πρεσβυτέρων : pr<ecipiens ciistodire priecepta apostolornm et 
 seniorum arm. 
 
 Paul and Barnabas was recognized by the whole occurrence, notes to Gal. 1. c. 
 chief Apostles : — that they should rewe/wiier 8ή, see above, ch. xiii. 2. [ev αΐς, be- 
 the poor, i. e. the poor at Jervsalem : — that cause πασαν πόΧιν involves a plurality : so 
 the wants of the mother church should not Xen. Mem. i. 2. 62, tav τις ψανίρ'ον -γίνηται 
 be forgotten by those converts, whose Ju- . . . τούτοις θήι•ατής ίστιν ή ζημία : cf. 
 daical bond to her was thus cast loose. Herm. ad Viger. p. 40.] 37.] ίβον- 
 This was an object which Paul was ever λεΰσατο, 'had a plan,' ' was minded :' not 
 most anxious to subserve. See Gal. 1. c. = ίβονΧετο, which has apparently been 
 and note. 35.] διδάσκοντ£ς, to those a correction. 38. ήξίον] Not as 
 who had received it, — βναγγίλιζόμίνοι, to Vulg. ' rogabat :' but ' aequum censebat,' as 
 those who had not. Beza. It gives Paul's refusal in the strong- 
 36. — CH. XVIII. 22.] Paul's second est manner. The position of the accusa- 
 MI^SIONARY JOURNEY (unaccompanied by fives also forcibly expresses his decided 
 Barnabas, on account of a difl'erence be- rejection of one who iiad not dared to face 
 tween them) through Asia Minor to the dansjers of the untried country before. 
 Macedonia and Greece, and thence 'But Paul thoi'ght proper (as to) one 
 BY sea, touching at Ephesus, to Je- who had fallen off from them from Pam- 
 rusalem and back to Antioch. phylia, and had not gone with them to 
 36. μίτα δ. τινας ήμ ] How long, we the work, not to take with them that 
 are not informed : but perliaj)S (f) during man.' We may well believe tliat Paul's 
 this time took )ilaoe that visit of Peter to own mouth gave originally ilie rliarai^ier to 
 Antioch mentioned Gal. ii. 11, ff. when he the sentence. τον άττοστ.] See ch. 
 sacrificed his Christian consistency and xiii. 13. It hence is evident that his de- 
 better persuasions to please some ,Iu- parture was not by the authority of the 
 daizers, and even Barnabas was led away Apostles (as Henson). 39.] ό ΙΙί/Γλος 
 with the dissiriiulafion. On this occasion ίζητει τό όίκαιοι , ύ ΚαρνΊίΙας το φιΧύν- 
 Paul boldly rebuked him. See, on the θρωπον, Chrysostom : who also reumrks
 
 lo8 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 aaplnr., Rnm. TQC 
 
 XTi. llirfft'. 
 b-ch.xtiii. 
 
 1», 24 al3, 
 
 ίκκΧησ'ιας. XVI. ^ ^ κατηντησ^ν δί εις Αίρβην 
 και Αυστραν. "" και ιδού μαθητής τις ην ίΚίΐ ονόματι 
 2Macc iv.44. {ιμοΟίος, υιος -γυναικός Ιουοαιας πίστης, πατρός οε 
 
 ■ί *'•"• *Λ'''1'\ λ 9 •\ e ' - ' ^ - • Λ' » 
 
 oii^lnAcu l^^Ar/i'oc, ος (μαξ)τυρίΐτο υπο των εν Λυστροις και 
 Ίκον'ιω ά^ίΧφίόν. τούτον ηθίΧησΕν ο Παυλυς συν αυτω 
 ΰν, και ^ Χαβων π(ριίτ(μίν αυτόν ' νια τους 
 
 e rr(l7. Malt. '!<>' \v > - / »/ .j''S' 
 
 xiii!3i»iof Ιουοαιους τους υντας εν τοις τοποις (Κίΐνοις ^ rioeiaav 
 
 yap απηντίς τον πατίρα αυτ<»υ, on ' EXAr/v νπηρ-^εν. 
 
 ως δε ^ΐίποριυοντο τας ποΧεις, '" παρίοιόοσαν αυτοις 
 
 " φνΧάσσίΐν τα " δόγματα τα ^ Κίκριμίνα υπο των απο- 
 
 οΧων και πρεσβυτέρων των εν ΙεροσοΧυμοις. 
 
 εκκΧ 
 
 ABCD 
 ΕϋΙΙ 
 
 G...spp., 
 
 pasitim. 
 
 d ch. χ. 4ί) relf. ,■ ,^ ^ '. 
 
 ech. x.22rcff. ' cffXI) 
 fch.XT. 4(1. tQtAW. 
 
 prrsons, here 
 
 only 
 h Luke i ϋΟ. 
 
 Gen. XTii. lu. 4 
 i — ch.iT. 21. 
 
 X. 21. 
 j constr., ch. 
 
 XT. 3(1 al. 
 
 Ucc;,h.?eOniy στολων Kai πρεσβ 
 
 Lake vi. 1 al. fi λ * ^ "^ 
 
 m- 1 Cnr.xi.2. ^ J\l utV Ουν 
 
 2Pet. ii. 21. '^ 
 
 Jade 3. D — Lakexi. 28 al. Eccles. xii. 13. i>»LQkeii. 1 
 
 Dan.vi.9. μ = 1 Cor vii. 37. pp plnr., Rom. xvi. 7 reft. 
 
 HP 
 
 ησιαι ' εστε^οεουνΓΟ τ»} πιστει, και 
 
 cb. χνϋ. 7. Eph. ϋ.15. Col ii. 14 only, 
 q ch. iii. 7 relt. r oh. xjii. 8 rc8'. 
 
 Ch.\p. XVI. 1. t'liXWuir' δ{ τα ttipi] ταύτα κητηντ. D syr-marg Cassiod. — και ng B. 
 AB :W. 40. 137. 180 copt. syr. — και ιις λυστ. AB 73. 137 : £ΐς (2nd) ThF also.— ης om 
 40. {)3. 9!» Till'. — i«f£i ην D : om f»c£i 32. 37- 5? aeth.— rec yvv. Time, with GH inss vss 
 Thl Oec: txt ABCDE 14^. 18. 25. 34. 36. 40. 69. 73. 103. 105. 137. 142. 1«0 ν copt 
 asth arm syr Chr Orig-int Jer. — lovS. om Ε {viducp lat-mss Aug, iov?i. χη'κις 25). — 
 
 3. for λαβών, (λαβί και 137•— παιτίς (for απ. CDE al : t.xt AB(e sil)GH al Chr Thl 
 Oec— ί/ίίσοί' 38.— on {λλτ,ί• ο πατήρ αυτού ABC 13. 15. 1 8. 31 33. 34. 40. 68. 69. 105. 
 180 ν sah TliP (corrn for simplicity ι : txt DEGH most mss (vss) Chr Thl' Oec. — 
 
 4. ίποηίνοΐ'το 57• 95'. — rec παμίΰδυυν : txt ABC( ίονηαν)ΟΈι 13. — rec των πρίσ. 
 {corrn for uniformity), with EGH &c Chr al : txt ABCD 95. 97. 100. 105 Bas ThF.— 
 Γ(ϋΐ' aft 7Γρ6σ. om 13. 95-. — rec κρονσαλημ with EGH &c Chr al : txt ABCD 13 ν 
 ThF. — D has the ver thus: δΐίρχιψαΌΐ Οε τας ττολίΐς ίκηουησοί' και παρίόιδοσαν 
 αντοις μ(τα πάσης παορηαιας τον κυριον ιησ. \ρ. αμα παραΰιδοιτες και τας ίντολας 
 {των D^) αποστ. κ. πριαβ. τ. tv up. — 5. τη πιατ. ονα D. — ntpuaatvov Ε 3. 65. 95' al 
 
 on their separate journeys, — ίμοί δοκΰ και 
 κατά σίηησιν -γίγίνητΟαι τον χιοριπμον, 
 και πρϋς άλλί/λους- nVeTi'• υτι Ιπιιύή ϊγώ 
 ου βυύλομαι, ην ck βοϋλίΐ, Ίνα μή μαχώ- 
 μεθα, διανεμώμεθα τονς τόπονς. ίοςτε 
 •πάνυ ιΊκοιτες άλλήλοις γοΓτο εποίουι>. 
 Horn, xxxiv. Yet it seems as if there were 
 a considerable difference in the character of 
 iheir netting out. Barnabas appears to have 
 gone with his nephew without any special 
 sympathy or approval ; whereas Paul was 
 commended to the grace of God by the 
 assembled church. — We find Mark after- 
 wards received into favour by Paul, see Col. 
 iv. 10. 2 Tim. iv. 11 ; and in the former of 
 those places it would seem as if he was 
 dependent for his reception on Paul's spe- 
 cial commendation. 40. Σίλαν] He 
 may perhaps have come down again to An- 
 tioch (see ver. 33) in Peter's company. We 
 find (see above on ver. 22) a Silvanus in 
 1 Pet. V. 12, the bearer of that epistle to the 
 congregations of Asia Minor. 41. Συρίαν 
 κ. Κιλικ.] See note, ver. 23. Here we finally 
 lose sight of Barnabas in the sacred record. 
 Chap. XVI. 1.] We have Derbe first, as 
 lying nearest to the pass from Cilicia into 
 Lycaonia and Capp.idocia. Paul probably 
 travelled by the ordinary road through the 
 ' Cilician gates,' a rent or fissure in the 
 
 mountain-chain of Taurus, extending from 
 north to south through a distance of eighty 
 miles. See various interesting particulars 
 in C. and H. Vol. I. p. 277. and notes. 
 
 €Κ€Ϊ] At Lystra .• which, and not 
 Derbe, was in all probability the birth-place 
 of Timotheus : see on ch. xx. 4. Tiiis 
 view is confirmed by ver. 2. — He had pro- 
 bably been converted by Paul during his 
 former visit, as lie calls him his son in the 
 Lord, \ Cor. \\.\T. ITim.i. 2. 2 Tim. i. 2; 
 perhajis at Antioch in Pisidia, see 2 Tim. 
 iii. 10, 11. His mother was Eunice, his 
 grandmother, Lois, — both women of well- 
 known piety, 2 Tim. i. 5. Whether his 
 father was a proselyte of the gate or not, is 
 uncertain : he certainly was nncircnmcised. 
 He would be, besides his personal aptness 
 for the work, singularly fitted to be the 
 coadjutor to Paul, by his mixed extraction 
 forming a link between Jews and Greeks. 
 
 2.] Some of these testimonies were 
 probably intimations of the Spirit respect- 
 ing his Jitnessfor the work ; for Paul speaks, 
 1 Tim. i. 18, of τάς πμοηγονσας έπϊ σε 
 ττροφητίίας (see ch. xiii. 1. 3). He was 
 set apart for the work by the laying on of 
 the hands of Paul and of the presbytery, 
 1 Tim. iv. 14. 2 Tim. 16, after he had made 
 a good confession before many witnesses,
 
 1—6. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 159 
 
 * ίπ£()ίσσΕυου τω αριΘμο) ^ καθ ημίραν' " δΐίλθοντΕς δί s 2 cor. ϊχ. ΐ2. 
 τϊ}ν Φρνγιαν και ΤαΧατικην χωράν, ^ κωΧυθίντες ύπο τον "^„ie fi! 'ss^' 
 ayiov ΤΓνίυματος AuAriaai τον Aoyov εν τχι Άσια, Nam iv ιβ. 
 
 ' ■ ' ' ' α ch. XV. 41. 
 
 τ — Matt. χίχ. 14. ch. viii. 36al. 1 Kings χχτ. 2β. web. xi.lU γ;?. 
 
 Chr (mss).— 6. for ίιε\θοντίς, ^υ,λθηι/ ABCDE 13. 15. 18. 27- 29. 31. 3ί>. 40. (>5. 73. 
 103. 105. 133. 137• 1''3. 180 syr copt arm Ath Epiph al {emendation to avoid the 
 repeated participial clauses) : txt GH most mss (appy) {transeuntes . . . vetati sunt v) 
 Chr Thl Oec. — rec Tt]v ya\. {corrn for uniformity), with EGH &c ff : txt ABCD al 
 Caesar. — μηίίΐι Χαλησαι D. — τον λ. του θΐου D V syr ar-erp copt. — at end, Chr adds, 
 την ψρνγ. κ. r. yakariuv αψίνης {καταΚιποντίς msSj) £ΐς την μισογαιαν ιστηνΕον. 
 
 1 Tim. vi. 12. 3. λαβών ττεριε'τ.] 
 
 As Ε. V. ' took and circumcised him.' 
 Every Israelite might perform the rite ; see 
 Winer, RWB., art. ' Besclmeidung.' 
 δια τ. Ίο-υδ.] That he might not at once, 
 wherever he preached, throw a stumbhng- 
 block before the Jews, by having with him 
 one by birth a Jew, but uncircumcised. 
 There was here no concession in doctrine 
 at all, and no reference whatever to the 
 duty of Tiraotheus himself in the matter. 
 In the case of Titus, a Greek, he dealt 
 otherwise, no such reason existing : Gal. 
 ii. 3. 4. τας ττόλ.] Iconium, and 
 
 perhaps Antioch in Pisidia. He might at 
 Iconium see the elders of the church of 
 Antioch, as he did afterwards those of 
 Ephesus at Miletus. If he went to An- 
 tioch, he might regain his route into Phry- 
 gia and Galatia by crossing the hills east of 
 that city. 5.] This general notice, 
 
 with μίν ovv, like those at ch. ix. 31, 
 xii. 24, marks the opening of a new section. 
 6 — 9.] This very cursory notice of 
 a journey in which we have reason to think 
 so much happened, — the founding of the 
 Galatian and Phrygian churches (see ch. 
 xviii. 23, where we find him, on his second 
 visit, Ίπιπτηριζων πάντας τονς μαθητάς), 
 the sickness of the Apostle alluded to Gal. 
 iv. 13, the working of miracles and im- 
 parting of the Spirit mentioned Gal. iii. 5, 
 — the warmth and kindness of feeling shewn 
 to Paul in his weakness. Gal. iv. 14 — IC, 
 — seems to shew that the narrator was not 
 with him during this part of the route ; an 
 inference which is remarkably confirmed by 
 the sudden resumption of circumstantial 
 detail with the use of the first person, at 
 ver. 10. 6. Φρυγίαν] There were 
 
 two tracts of country called by this name : 
 ' Phrygiam utraraque (alteram ad llelles- 
 
 pontum, majorem alteram vocant) 
 
 Eumeni restituerunt.' Livy, xxxviii. 39. It 
 is with ' Phrygia Major' that we are here 
 concerned, which was the great central 
 space of Asia Minor, yet retaining the name 
 of its earliest inhabitants, and on account 
 of its being j)olitically subdivided among 
 the contiguous jjrovinocs, impossililc to 
 define accurately (see C. and II. j). 2Γ)7, 
 note 5). — The Apostle's route must remain 
 
 very uncertain. It is probable that he may 
 have followed the great road (according to 
 his usual practice and the natural course of 
 a missionary journey) from Iconium to 
 Philomelium and perhaps as far as Syn- 
 nada, and thence struck off to the N.E. 
 towards Pessinus in Galatia. That he 
 visited Co1oss<e, in the extreme S.W. of 
 Phrygia, on this journey, as supposed by 
 some, and recently maintained with some 
 ingenuity by Mr. Lewin (Life and Epp. of 
 S. Paul, I. 191 ff), is vei-y improbable (see 
 Wieseler, Chron. d. Apostgsch. pp. 28 ff.). 
 Γαλατικήν χ.] The midland dis- 
 tri(t, known as Galatia, or Gallo-grsecia, 
 was inhabited by the descendants of those 
 Gauls who invaded Greece and Asia in the 
 third century B.C., and after various incur- 
 sions and wars, settled and became mixed 
 with the Greeks in the centre of Asia 
 Minor. They were known as a brave and 
 freedom-loving people, fond of war, and, 
 either on their own or others' account, 
 almost always in arms, and generally as 
 cavalry. Jerome (on Gal. i. 2) says that 
 their speech was like that of the Germans 
 in the neighbourhood of Treves : and per- 
 haps Ανκαοηστι, ch. xiv. II, spoken of 
 the neighbouring district, may refer to this 
 peculiar dialect. But Greek was exten- 
 sively spoken. They were conquered by 
 the consul Cn. Manlius Vulso, 18!) B.C. 
 (Livy, xxxviii. 12, see 1 Mace. viii. 2), but 
 retained their own governors, called as 
 before tetrarchs, and afterwards kings (for 
 one of whom, Deiotarus, a protege of Pom- 
 pey's, Cicero pleaded before Caesar) ; their 
 last king, Amyntas, passed over from 
 Antony to Augustus in the battle of Ac- 
 tium. Galatia, after his murder, a. υ. 26, 
 became a Roman province. The jjrincipal 
 cities were Ancyra, — which was made the 
 metropolis of the province by Augustus, — 
 Tavium, and Pessinus : in all, or some of 
 which, the Apostle certainly preached. He 
 was detained here on account of sickness 
 {δι' άσΟί-ΐ'ίκιν της σηρκόν, Gal. iv. 13). 
 See further in Prolegg. to Gal. κω- 
 
 λυθ€'ντ£ς] By some special intimation, like 
 that in ch. xiii. 2. Άσί({. ] Tills name, 
 
 ai)i)lied at first to the district near Ιΐκ; river 
 Cayster in Lydia [' Ασί<ι) ti' λίΐ/ιώ»Ί, Καυ-
 
 160 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XVI. 
 
 xofpiace.here 7 " jX00i'T£C " κατη Tiiv Mufftav ^eiTt'ipatov ίΐς την Βΐθ»- ABCD 
 
 iiiilj•. of per- ^ ^ ^ ^^ ί \ \ - EGH 
 
 »on,Lukex. ^,^'^^ πορίυΟηναι, και ουκ "" άασεν αυΓους το πνεύμα 
 ich.xi». ushi. Ιησού* " τταρίλΐ/οιτες όε rijv Μυσιαν κατερησαν εις 
 
 a constr , Murk a \ » d^^'' ^ "ΤΎ'\ 
 
 bdiixw"!-'!!'; Τρωάδα. ^ και "όραμα όια της νυκτός τω Παυλω 
 
 cch.iWreff. "ωώΟη, άνηρ 'Μακεδών τις εστως ^ ιταηακηλων αντον 
 
 'ΜΗΐΛϊίί.^έ ί^α» "^ λέγων Δίαρας πς ΜαΚίόονιαν ροηϋησον ημιν. 
 
 2.1(1. '" ωο οε το οηαμα eiCiv, ευσεως ίί,ητησαμεν tt,eAUtiv 
 
 f Luke i ΙΟ 20 -* S ' 
 
 Jer xxxiii "'0 c Matt. viii. fi al. h Lnke χτί. 26. 1 Kings xiii. 7. i Matt. xv. 25 al. ch. 
 
 xxi. 28.*2Cor. vi.2al. k — LukeTi.ie. Exod. ii. 15. 1 John i. 44. Matt. xi. 7. xxii. 10 al. 
 
 — 7. for ίλΟοντίς, -γινομίνην D' : -vol W : ΤΓαρελθοντις 100. — aft e\9. ins δι ABCDE 
 all Syr arr copt sah («cat t\0. Syr aeth) Ath Epiph D al {ίο correspond with Οιηλθον 
 above, mid in same MSS) : txt Gil most mss (appy) Chr Thl Oec. — for μυσ., aniav WT. 
 73. — for £π(ΐ()., ηθίΧαν D. — rec κατά τ. β. (perhaps merely a mistake, occasioned by 
 Kara τ. μνσ. before: if an intentional alteration, the reason is not clear), with GH al 
 Thl' : txt ABCDE all (vss ?) Epiph Cyr Chr ThP. — rec πηρινισθαι (corrn for the less 
 usual inf. aor.), with CDGH &c Chr Thl' Oec : txt ABE 15. 34. 3G al Cyr Did TliF.— 
 Km to ιησ. om l(i3. — rec aft το πν. cm ιησου (see note), with GH al sah ar-pol slav Chr 
 Thl Oec: t.xt ABC2((ct;pt(.u C demidjDE 15. 31. 33. 30. 40. 73 lect 40 ν syrr ar-erp 
 copt £eth arm Jer Orig-int Vig al : τον ιησ. 13. 105 Cyr al. — 8. Su\9. D: tKtXO. Syr 
 ar-erp: παμίλθ. sah. — κατηντησαν O-gr Syr. — 9. tv οραμαη D gr Syr. — Γ>;ς• om A^ 
 (and appy A')BD al (β.ί iiwwecMsary and unusual): ins C(om ίια C)EGH mss (nrly) 
 Chr ThlOec. — rec ωφθη τω παυλω (corrn of order), with ACD'GH &cvssff: txt 
 BD-'E 13 V. — wcfi ανηρ D Syr sah. — rec ανηρ τις (corrn of order), with GH &c vss 
 Chral: txt ABCDE al ν Thl-. — rec aft ori/p ης (see above) ins ην, with GH &c vss 
 Chr ThP Oec: also aft μακίδων τις ABCD2 13. 73 TI1I2 . aft μακίδων 163. 180 (these 
 varr of position shewi7ig the word to be spurious, inserted to fit np the imagined constr, 
 it not being observed that ανηρ &c is in apposn with όραμα) : om D'E 3. 47. 95'. 103 
 Syr copt aeth arm Chr comm (appy). — ίστως κατά το πμοςωπον αντου D syr* sah. — 
 bef τταρακαΧων, ins και (supplementary corrn) ABCE 13. 73. 137• 180 ν syrr ar-erp 
 ieth: om DGH most mss copt al Chr Thl Oec. — αυτόν om D. — 10. ιδιν CH. — for ως 
 .... ΟΤΙ, D has δΐί^ιρθίΛς ουν διηγησατο το όραμα ημιν (so far sah also) και ίναησα- 
 ptv οτι.—ίζητησιν 42.— ίλθίΐν 3. 33. 34. 95' al.-bef μακ. om την BCEG 13. 96'. 
 
 στριου άμψι ρίιθρα, Hom. II. ϋ. 461), came πν. Ίηιτοΰ is remarkable, as occurring in 
 
 to have a meaning more and more widely all the great MSS, and from its peculiarity 
 
 extended, till at last it embraced, as at pre- bearing almost unquestionable trace of 
 
 sent, the whole vast continent, forming one genuineness, — the idea being quite unten- 
 
 of the quarters of the globe. But we never able that the word Ίί;σοϋ has been inserted 
 
 find this meaning in Scripture. The Asia here, and no where else, on doctrinal 
 
 of the Acts is not even our Asia Minor, — grounds. If the report of this journey 
 
 which name is not used till Orosius (i. 2) came from an unusual source, an unusual 
 
 in the fourth century a.d.,— but only a expression would be accoutitable. 
 
 portion of the western coast of that great 8.] irapeXGovTes must from the context 
 
 peninsula. (A full account of the history mean ' having passed by,' i. e. as regarded 
 
 of the territory and its changes of extent their work of preaching (cf. ch. xx. 16), — 
 
 will be found in C. and H., pp. 255 if., and and not ' having passed by' as avoiding it; 
 
 in Wieseler, pp. 32 — 35. I confine myself for they could not get to the coast wUhout 
 
 to its import in the Acts.) This, which was entering Mysia. [I still adhere to th s in- 
 
 the Roman province of Asia, — Asia Pro- terpretation, notwithstanding what has been 
 
 l)ria, Plin. v. 28, — as spoken of in the Acts, said against it in Dr. Bloomfield's edition 9. 
 
 includes only Mysia, Lydia, and Caria, — For this sense of παρίαχομηι, which is not 
 
 excluding Phrygia (ch. ii. 9 and here : figurative at all, but involved in the literal, 
 
 1 Pet. i. 1 it must be included) as in cf. Hom. II. Θ. 2:i9 : Aristoph. Vesp. 636, 
 
 Pliny 1. c, — Galatia, Bithynia,— Cilicia, 7= Plat. Pliadr. p. 278 fin. June, 1856.] 
 Pamphylia, Lycia. See further on ch. xix. Τρα>ά8α] Troas (Alexandria Troas, 
 
 38. 7. Βιθυνίαν] At this time in honour of Alex, the Great : now Eski 
 
 a Roman province (senatorial: Hadrian, Stamboul) was a co\ony juris Ilalici (see 
 
 whose favourite province it was, took it on ver. 12), and a free city, and was not 
 
 from the senate). ' When they were come reckoned as belonging to either of the pro- 
 
 to (i.e. to the borders of) Mysia, they vinces, Asia or Bithynia. Whether it was 
 
 attempted to go into B.' — The expression for this reason that Paul and his compa-
 
 7—12. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ, 
 
 161 
 
 ίΐς την Μακίοοί'Ίαν, ^ σνμβιβάζοντες ϋτι ° προςκΕκλ >jrat m ch. is. 22 
 
 r-f/ ο' Λ' η '' 11ο' /!' 'f ^• 
 
 T7/tac ο κύριος ευαγγεΛισασσαι αυτούς. '^ ανανσίΐτες ''Jj;;.''^^/'.- 
 
 οέ απο της Τρωάδος '^ ίυθυ^ρομησαμίν εις Έ.αμοθοάκηι>, " ν'ΊΊ'οΛ «ff. 
 
 r ' ' ' IVT ' Λ 19 ' "Π' ' ,1^ Λ '* ' ρ ch. siii. 13 al. 
 
 τη τε ετΓίουσΐ) είς ιΝεαττοΛιν, ^^ tKeioev τε εις ΦιλίΤΓπους, ΐ''''-,='^'•ΐ 
 
 ί t ■' ■' *•" only +. 
 
 rch tii. 2β reff. 
 
 180 al Chr (text) Tbl• (for uniformMy iv'ilh ιΐζ μακ. above: but that ivas the first, this 
 the second mention) : ins ADH mss (nrly) Chr (comm) Thl- Oec. — for κνριης, θίος 
 {most prob, as so often, a yloss on κύριος, to distinguish its precise meaning) ABCE 13. 
 15. 18. 33. 34. 3β. 180 al ν copt Eeth ThF Jer : txt DGH most mss syrr sah al Chr Thl'. 
 — for αυτούς, αυτοις A 13. 73 all Thl' : τονς ev τη μακίΟ. D. — 11. recfor if, ovi/ (conn 
 to suit the sequence on the foregoing ver), with BCGH &c vss Thl' Oec : txt AD (τη ίε 
 επαύριον αχθ. [οναχθ. D-] απο D 137 Syr-marg : και αναχθ. other vss: αναχθίντος 
 S( 13) Ε al ν copt syr-marg Chr ThP. — της bef το. om (as unnecessary) ABCDE 13. 33. 
 40. 73. 137. 180 Chr : ins GH most mss Thdrt Thl Oec— r»;i' σαμ. 93.— for τη 
 Τί, τη Ct (alteration of the characteristic Tt, which noir, in Luke's own narrative, 
 begins to be again very frequent) AB(5')CEG al copt sah syr : και τη D : txt Η most 
 mss V Syr ath arr Chr Thl Oec— επιουσ. ημιρ^ι Ό. — vtai' πολινΑΌ'. — 12. κακειθεν 
 
 nions visited it, is uncertain. He may have 
 had the design of crossing to Europe, if per- 
 mitted, — which the subsequent vision con- 
 firmed. See ch. xx. 5. 2 Cor. ii. 12. 2 Tim. 
 iv. 13. 9.] The vision seems to have 
 
 appeared in the same way as that sent to 
 Peter in ch. x. It was an unreal appari- 
 tion, designed to convey a practical mean- 
 ing. The context precludes our under- 
 standing it as a dream. Μακεδών] 
 known probably by the affecting words 
 spoken by him. There would hardly be 
 any peculiarity of dress by which a Mace- 
 donian could be recognized. 10. 
 Ιζητησαμεν] by immediate enquiry for a 
 ship. This word is remarkable as the in- 
 troduction of the first person in the nar- 
 rative : which however is dropped at ch. 
 xvii. 1, on Paul's leaving Philippi, and 
 resumed again, ch. xx. 5, on occasion of 
 sailing from Philippi. Thence it continues 
 to the end of the book. On the question, 
 what is implied by this, we may remark, 
 (1) That while we safely conclude from it 
 that the writer was in company with Paul 
 when he thus speaks, we cannot with like 
 safety infer that he was not, where the 
 third person is used. This latter must be 
 determined by other features of the history. 
 For it is conceivable that a narrative, even 
 where it concerns aU present, might be, in 
 its earlier parts, written as of others in the 
 third person, but might, when more inti- 
 macy had been estabhshed, or even by 
 preference only, be at any point changed 
 to the first. And again, tbe episodes where 
 the chief person alone, or with his principal 
 companion or companions, is concerned, 
 would be many, in which the narrator would 
 use the third person, not because he w-as 
 not present, but because he was not con- 
 cerned. Tills has not been enough attended 
 to. If it be thought fanciful, I may refer 
 to an undoubted instance in the episode, 
 Vol. II. 
 
 ch. xxi. 17, ■γενομένων ημών είς Ίερ., to 
 ch. xxvii. 1, ώς ίε εκρίθη τ. άποπΧε'ϊν 
 ι'ΐμας . . . ; during the whole of which time 
 the writer was with or in the neighbour- 
 hood of Paul, and drops the we, merely 
 because he is speaking of Paul alone. (2) 
 One objection raised by De Wette to the 
 common view, that Ltike accompanied 
 Paul from this time (except as above), is, 
 that several times Paul's companions are 
 mentioned, but Luke is never among them. 
 On examining however one of the passages 
 where this is done, we find that after the 
 enumeration of Sopater, Aristarchus, Se- 
 cundus, Gaius, Timotheus, Tychicus, and 
 Trophimus, we are told, οΐιτοι προελθόντες 
 εμενον ημάς ει> ΎρωάΙι : so that the writer 
 evidently regards himself as being closely 
 associated with Paul, and does not think it 
 requisite to enumerate himself among the 
 companions of the Apostle. This may 
 serve as a key to his practice on other 
 occasions. On the whole, and after careful 
 consideration of the subject, I see no reason 
 to doubt the common view, that Luke here 
 joined the Apostle (whether, as Wieseler 
 suggests, as Ά physician, on account of his 
 broken health, must of course be matter of 
 conjecture, but is not improbable), and 
 from this time (except from ch. xvii. 1 — 
 XX. 5), accompanies him to the end of the 
 history. See the question of the author- 
 ship of the Acts further discussed in the 
 Prolegg. 11.] They had a fair wind 
 
 on this occasion : in ch. xx. G, the voyage 
 in the opposite direction took five days. 
 This is also implied by εϋθνερομησαμεν : 
 see ref., where it has the same sense, viz., 
 ' ran before the wind.' The coincidence 
 of their going to Samothrace also shews 
 it : determining the wind to have been 
 from the S. or SS.E. It is only a strong 
 southerly breeze which will overcome the 
 current southwards which runs from the 
 Μ
 
 162 
 
 ΠΡΑΕΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 χνι. 
 
 6 eh s.41,47. 
 
 xiii.32,43al. 
 tch. ϊϋί."-Ί tell'. 
 D here imly t• 
 τ absol., ch xii. 
 
 1» reft. 
 
 ^ ητίζ £σ''« πρώτη της ' ;ΐ£ρ/'δος της Μακεδονίας πολις, " Κο- 
 λωνία. ΐ]μζν δί ϊν avTy τ\] ττοΧη ' διατριβοντίς "'" -ημίρας 
 
 w ch. χ. 48 al. 
 
 {alteration, see above) ABCDE 13. 105. 133. 1G3. 180 aUThF: ίκ δε G 137 sah syr : 
 txt Η most mss ν Syr copt setli arr Chr Thl' Oec. — ως φιλιττ. 180. — for ττρωτ., κιψηλη 
 D Syr ar-erp. — της bef /ifp. cm Β (Birch, Bentl) : tijq μιμ. om D H^. 90. 105. 13?. 142 
 svrriEth ar-crp Chr. — /itpic E-gr slav. — r»;c bef μακ. om (/o make the sense clearer: 
 μακί(ονιας ττολ. expressing ' Macedonian city ' better f/tan της μακεΰονιας ττολ.) Α€Έ 
 40. 43. 05. C!). !)5. IJiO al : ins BDGH most mss Chr Thl Oec. — κολωναα BH 65. 95. 
 9ϋ. 97. 98. 113. 120. 180 Chr Thl': txt Α{κω\ωνια)(:ΌΕ{κω\ονια)0 &c ThP Oec. 
 
 rec τοντη τη πολ. {alteration from 7nisunderstanding : see note), with ABCD'E 
 
 all V al : τη αντη 4. 6ϋ. 70. 84 : αυτή 57- 78. 80 : αυτή δ( 42 : txt D^GH all Syr 
 
 ABCD 
 EGH 
 
 DardaneUes by Tenedos (C. and II. p. 307) : 
 and this, combined with the short pas- 
 sage, is another mark of the veracity of our 
 narrative. Tliey seem to have anchored 
 N. of the lofty island of Samothrace, un- 
 der its lee. eis Νίάττολιν] In an 
 E. by N. direction, past the island of 
 Thasos. It was not properly in Mace- 
 donia, but in Thrace, and twelve Roman 
 miles from Philippi, which was the frontier 
 town of Macedonia strictly speaking : see 
 below. It was by Vespasian, together with 
 the whole of Thrace, attached to the pro- 
 vince of Macedonia (Winer, RWB.). Some 
 Roman ruins and inscriptions serve to point 
 out the Turkish village of Cavallo as its 
 site. 12. ΦιλίτΓίΓους] Phihppi was 
 built as a military position on the site of 
 the village Krenides (also called Datos, 
 Appian, BeU. Civ. iv. 105, οι δε Φίλιπποι 
 ■πόλις ίστίν, i) Αάτος ώνομάζετο ιτάλαι, 
 και Κρηί'ίδες ίτι προ Αάτου' κρηναι yap 
 ίίσι τΓίίχ" τψ Χόψψ ναμάτων ττηλλαί), by 
 Philip the Great of Macedon. The plain 
 between the Gangites, on which the town is 
 situate, and the Strymon, was the field of 
 the celebrated battle of Antony and Octa- 
 vius against Brutus and Cassius (cf. Dio 
 Cassius, xlvii. 41 fF. : Appian, ubi supra): 
 see more below. There is now an insigni- 
 ficant place on its site retaining the name 
 FUiba (or Philippigi ?). ΛΥίηβΓ, RWB. 
 ΤΓρώτη της μ€ρίδος της Μακεδο- 
 νίας ττόλις] ' The first Macedonian city 
 of the district.' It was the first ISIacedo- 
 nian city to which Paul and his companions 
 came in that district, — Neapolis properly 
 belonging to Thrace. And this epithet of 
 ■πρώτη would belong to it not only as re- 
 garded the journey of Paul and Silas, but 
 as Wieseler remarks (Chron. d. Apgsch. 
 p. 37, note) as lying furthest eastward, for 
 which reason also the district was called 
 ^lacedonia prima, though furthest from 
 Rome. The other explanations are, (1) 
 ' chief city,' as E. Λ^ But this it was not : 
 Thessalonica being the chief city of the 
 whole province, and Amphipolis of the 
 division (if it then subsisted) of Macedonia 
 prima .—(2) πρώτη is taken as a title of 
 
 honour (Hug., Kuin., De Wette), as we 
 find in the coins of Pergamus and Smyrna 
 (but not in the case of any city out of Asia 
 Minor) : (3) πόλίς κολών, are united 
 (Grot.), — ' the first city which was a 
 colony.' But there could be no reason for 
 stating this ; whereas there would be every 
 reason to particularize the fact that they 
 tarried and preached in the very first city 
 to which they came, in the territory to 
 which they were sent. μερίδας would 
 
 seem to import that the division into Mace- 
 donia prima, secunda, &c., made long before 
 this by jEmilius Paulus (Livy, xlv. 29), still 
 subsisted : this however is not necessary : 
 μερίς might be merely a geographical sub- 
 division. Κολωνία] Phihppi was made 
 a colonia by Augustus, as a memorial of his 
 victory over Brutus and Cassius, and as a 
 frontier garrison against Thrace. Its full 
 name on the coins of the city was Colonia 
 Augusta Julia Phihppensis. A Roman 
 colony was in fact a portion of Rome itself 
 transplanted to the provinces (Aulus Gellius, 
 xvi. 13, calls them ' ex civitate quasi propa- 
 gatae — populi Romani quasi effigies parvse 
 simulacraque'). The colonists consisted of 
 veteran soldiers and freedmen, who went 
 forth, and determined and marked out their 
 situation, with aU religious and mihtary 
 ceremonies. The inhabitants of the colonise 
 were Roman citizens, and were still enrolled 
 in one or other of the tribes, and possessed 
 the privilege of voting at Rome. In them 
 tlie Roman law was strictly observed, and 
 the Latin language was used on their coins 
 and inscriptions. They were governed by 
 their own senate and magistrates (Duum- 
 viri, as the consuls at Rome : see on 
 στρατηγοί below, ver. 19), and not by the 
 governor of the province. The land on 
 which they stood was tributary, as being 
 provincial, unless liberated from tribute by 
 the special favour of the jus Italicum, or 
 Quiritarian ownership of the soil. This 
 Philippi possessed, in common with many 
 other colonise and favoured provincial towns. 
 The population of such places came in pro- 
 cess of time to be of a mixed character : 
 but only the descendants of the original
 
 13—15. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 163 
 
 τινας, ^^ Tij τε ^ ημίρα των σαβι3άτων ' ί^ηΧΘομίν της 
 πυΧης πάρα ττοταμον, ηΰ ^ ενομιζίτο ^ προςίυ^?} ί'ιναι, 
 
 συι>ζ\θυΰσαις yvvai^iu. 
 
 γυνή ονόματι ΙΥυόια, πηρφυξ)οπω\ις ττολίως 
 
 * σεβόμενη τον ^ Θεον, ηκουεν, i)q ο κύριος 
 
 την καρΕιαν ^ ττροςε-χειν τοις ΧαΧονμενοις υπο 
 
 και καθΊσαντες εΧαΧοϋμεν ταις 
 
 και τις yvvi] ονόματι Αυ^ί 
 Ουατείξίΐον 
 οιηνοιζεν 
 
 ; Liikeiv. 16. 
 ch. xiii. 14 
 only. Exod. 
 XX. 8. 
 
 w. gen.. MhU. 
 X. 14 only, 
 f.lld by 
 π,.ρά, Mnrk 
 ii. 13. 
 
 = here only I. 
 heie only i. 
 
 τΓ^ϊαςενειι» τοις 
 Παύλου. ώς δε ίβαπτΊσθη, και ο οίκος αυτιις. 
 
 b intr , Matt. 
 
 2 Kings vii.l. 
 e ch. xviii. 7 only. See i:h. xiii. 50. 
 6 reff. h = ch. x. 2 al. 
 
 d here only t- 
 2 Mace. i. 4. g = ch 
 
 slav Chr Till Oec. — 13. τη St D 13 ν copt sali syr Thl.^rec της πολίως (perhaps a 
 margl expl of της πνλης : perhaps an error), with EGH &c vss Clir al : txt ABCD 
 13. 40. 69. 105 ν copt sah (πυλ. της πο\. syr ar-erp). — τον -ποταμ. D 96. 142 Thl•. — 
 ινομιζομίν A BC {-αμιν C) 13. 40 copt aetli (arm) : tSoKii D Epiph {both alterations 
 from misTinderstanding : see note): putabant arm: videbatur v: txt Ε &c. — ττρος- 
 ίυχην A2(not B)C 13. 15. 33. 34. 40 copt sth : ίυχη 31. ϋ\).—βυνί\η\νθιηας D: 
 add ημη• Ο,Έα seth. — 14. της ποΧίως D. — ήτις ηκονιν Ε: ηκοναίΐ' D'-gr G all ν Chr 
 (coram) ThI- Oec al. — ηνοιζε 1^7. 180. — του om BD. — προςιγ. to τταυλην cm seth. — 
 15. αυτή κ. (ins πας D) ο οικ. Ε 38. 93. 97- 106-marg 113. 177• 180 v-ms Syr an• sah 
 
 ' where prayer was wont to be made,' as 
 E. V. That this is the meaning here, is 
 
 colonists by Roman wives, or women of a 
 people possessing the civitas, were Roman 
 citizens. Hence new supplies of colonists 
 were often necessary. See article ' Colonia' 
 in Smith's Diet, of Antt., and C. and H. 
 pp. 313, fF. Iv αυτή τή iroXei] 'In 
 
 the city itself,' — as distinguished from the 
 suburban place of prayer to which they 
 afterwards, on the Sabbath, ίζηλθον της 
 ττνλης. There can hardly be a doubt that 
 this is the right reading, no reason being 
 assignable for the alteration of Taury into 
 aUTij, whereas the converse was obvious 
 enough, the sense not being perceived. 
 13. τΓοταμόν] 'a (or, the) river;' viz. 
 the small stream Gangites,orGangas: Leake, 
 p. 217, cited by C. and H. ; not, as Meyer 
 and De Wette, the Strymon, the nearest 
 point of which was many miles distant. 
 The name Krenides, formerly borne by the 
 city, was derived from the fountains of this 
 stream. — From many sources we learn, that 
 it was the practice of the Jews to hold their 
 assemblies for prayer 7iear water, whether 
 of the sea, or of rivers : probably on ac- 
 count of the frequent washings customary 
 among them. Thus a decree of the Hali- 
 carnasseans in Joseph. Antt. xiv. 10. 23, 
 allows the Jews τας ττροςίνχάς ττοιιϊσθαι 
 Trpc'c τι~ι θαλασσί^ κατά τΰ πάτριον ίθος. 
 Thus Juvenal, speaking of the ' madida 
 Capena' at Rome, adds, ' Nunc sacri fontis 
 nemus, et delubra locantur Judieis,' iii. 13. 
 And Tertullian, de Jejuniis, ch. IG, ' Judai- 
 cum certejejunium ubique celebratur, (|uum 
 omissis templis per oinrie litus (luorumque 
 in aperto aliquando jam preces ad ca'lum 
 mittunt.' And ad Nationes, i. 13, he speaks 
 of the ' orationes litorales ' of the Jews. 
 See also Pliilo in Flacc p. 9«2. oi 
 
 «νομ. τΓρος. tlvat] ' Where a meeting for 
 prayer was accustomed to be :' i. c. 
 
 plain from the use of evojxi^cTo «Ivai, which 
 could certainly not be said if the —ηοςίνχίι 
 were in this case a building dedicated to 
 prayer. Were there no such qualification, 
 we should understand the word of a ττρος- 
 ίυκτηριον or synagogue, as frequently used: 
 τινάς Ζϊ οίκους ίαυτοϊς κατασκευάσαντίς 
 η τόπους πλατίΤς φόρων είκηυ, irpos- 
 €ΐ;χας ταύτας ίκάΧουν και yrrav μεν το 
 παλαιϋν προςενχών τόποι (ν τε τοΊς 
 'ίουδαίοις tit» πόΧεως, και iv το'ϊς "Σαμα- 
 ρίίταις. Epiphanius, Hser. iiO, § 1, cited 
 by Hemsen, der Apost. Paulus, p. 114: 
 and again, soon after, άλλα και τ^'ροςευχης 
 τόπος ti' Σικίμοις, ίν Ty νυν'ι κaλovμtvy 
 Staπόλtt, ίξω Tijc πόλιως, ΐν τι) πεΡιήίι, 
 ώς• άπύ αημίίων Siw, θ€ατροειδής, οίίτως 
 ev άερι κ. αίθρίω τόττω Ιστι κατασκ£ν)- 
 aoOeiS, νπο των "Σαμαρειτών πάντα τά 
 των Ιουδαίων μιμονμίνων. Josephus, Λ'^it. 
 ρ. 54, says, συΐ'ά•/ηνται πάvτtς εις την 
 πμυςευχήν, μ'ε^ιατον ο'ίκημα πολνν οχλον 
 ίπιδίξασθαι Ιυνάμίνοί'. — The προς>υχή 
 here was probably one of the open places 
 spoken of in the above extracts from Epiph. 
 — The close of the verse also agrees best 
 with an open place of resort. There seem 
 to have been few, if any, Jetcs in Philippi : 
 this assembly consisting merely of women 
 attached to the Jewish faith. We hear of 
 no opposition arising from Jews. There 
 appears (xvii. I) to have been no synagogue. 
 14. ΊΓορφυρόττωλις] The guild of dyers 
 (ol βαφίΐς) at Tliyatira have left inscrip- 
 tions, still existing, shewing the accuracy of 
 our narrative. Tlie celebrity of the purple 
 dyeing of the neighbourhood is as old as 
 Homer : ώς S' υτε τις τ' ίλέφαντα γυΐ'ή 
 φυίηκι μιίινγ Μροι/ίς ήί Κάειρα, παριμυν 
 έμμιναι 'ίππων, II. iv. 141. So also 
 2
 
 ICA 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XVL 
 
 ''^ii'I'Markv. 'τταοί/ν'άλίσίΐ' 'λίγουσα Ει ^ κεκρίκατε μ£ ' πιστί^ τω 
 k-ch. xiii. \υρΊω tlvai, ί'ιςίλΟόντίς (Ίς τον οίκον μου μίίνατί' 
 ίη'ΐ/αΐ"'χΙίν. και '" πποίβιάσατο Ίΐμΰς. ^^ eyeviTo δε ΤΓΟΟίυομίΐ'ωΐ' ίψων 
 
 211 only. 
 
 Gen. zix.O. 
 
 1 Kings χχνί. 
 
 II, 2Λ. 
 η ch. xii. 13 ill. 
 
 Gfn XX. 17. 
 ο — John vii. 
 
 2(1 al. ch. 
 
 εις- την 
 πύθωνα 
 
 ττοοςευγήν, " παι^ίσκην τίνα ' ε^ουταν πνίυμα 
 ^ ατταντησαι νμιν, ΐ)τις " tpyaaiav πο\\ην τταρ- 
 
 ειχ^εΐ' τοις 
 
 a (constr. 
 Luke xri. 8. 
 
 κν^)ΐοις αυτής 
 
 . 1 John iv. R. here ο 
 
 c = Xen. Mem. iii. lu. 1. 
 f here only. Deut. xviii. JU. 
 
 17 
 
 αντη ° κατ- 
 
 , -ωνοκ) see Lnke xii 
 cd ch. six. '■!A. 
 Jud7. xix. 11. 
 
 b Mat(. xxviii. 9. 
 
 d = ch.xrii. 31. 
 
 g Luke xxiil. 5.Ί only. 
 
 μαντίυομενη. 
 
 iy+. 
 
 S Kings ii. 34. 
 
 e — Mutl. X. 24. 
 
 Jer. XI ii. 16. 
 
 am Chr.— Γω θ£ω D-gr £eth : om 11. 19. 24. 78'• 99• 126 : bef ττισΓ. 4 : aft eivai 42. 57- 
 73. 10(i. — ίΠ'Λΐ oni i;}3. — μηητι (corrn to ynore usual) ABDE 13: txt CGH mss 
 (iirly) Clir Thl Oec (ίΐς τ. οικυΐ' μου etgiXGere arm : (ΐςίλθοντις μανατί tv τ. οίκω μου 
 sail). — 16. rec bef ττοοςίυ. om την {from misappreheusion of the weaning of ποοοίνχ.), 
 with DGH cScc Chr al: ins ABCE 13. 18. 40. 68. 105. 163. 180 Orig ThP.— rec 
 πνθιοΐΌς (see note), with DEGH al syrr al Chr al : txt ABC (D' accg to Wetst) 33 ν 
 (am demid, not tol) al Orig Ambr : ■πtιθωvoς\ect 12. — υπαντ. BCE 180 al Orig: txt 
 AD(iH al Chr al. — τταοίιχίτο C: πη^ίσχίν Eustath. — Sia τούτου μανηνομεν η D'. — 
 17. κητακολοιθονσα BD-gr 180. — τω om Β Orig. — for και ημ., και τω σιλα 14^ 38. 80. 
 95'. 113 1ectt: both are joined in 43. 73. 81. — άνθρωποι om D> d' Lucif. — for κατ- 
 αγγ., (ναγγελιζοντί D {-ης D'). — rec νμιν, with BDE all ν syrr al Thdrtj (ed rom, 
 ημ.) {alteration, as better suiting the person speakiiig): txt AC-(C' uncert)GH all e 
 
 Claudian, de Raptu Proserp. i. 270 : ' non passed. Similarly n' νμ(~'ς άνακρινόμίθα, 
 sic decus ardet eburnum Lydia Sidonia ch. iv. 9. 16.] This happened on 
 
 quod fcemina tinxerit ostro ' (Lewin, 
 242). — Thyatira was a city of the province 
 of Asia. Thus, although forbidden to 
 preach the word in Asia, their first convert 
 at Philippi is an Asiatic. Lydia is a pi-o- 
 per natne, not ' ita dicta a solo natali,' as 
 Grot. : though its origin may have been 
 that. It was a common female name. See 
 Hor. Od. i. 8 ; iii. 9. σεβ. τ. θ.] A pros- 
 elyte; see reff. ήκουίν, ' was listen- 
 ing,' — when ίιήΐ'οιξίΐ•, the act of God, 
 took place. διήνοιξεν] ' cor clausum 
 per se : sed Dei est id aperire.' Bengel. 
 T. \aXov|X€vois] It appears rather 
 to have been a conversation {ίΧαΧοϋμιν, 
 u-e spoke — and not rbv Xoyor) than a set 
 discourse : ' the things which Paul was 
 saying.' 15. έβατττ., κ. 6 οίκος αύτ.] 
 It may be (as ]\Ieyer maintains) that no 
 inference for infant-baptism is hence deduc- 
 ible. The practice, however, does not rest 
 on inference, but on the continuity and 
 identity of the covenant of grace to Jew 
 and Christian, the sign only of admission 
 being altered. The Apostles, as Jews, 
 would have administered, and Jewish or 
 proselyte converts would have acceded to, 
 the baptism of their children as a matter of 
 course : and that the practice thus by uni- 
 versal consent, tacitly (because at first un- 
 questioned) pervaded the universal church, 
 can hardly with any reason be doubted. 
 See note on 1 Cor. vii. 14. el κεκρί- 
 κατί] ' If ye have judged me;' modestly 
 alluding to the decision respecting her faith- 
 fulness imphed by then• baptizing her, and 
 assuming that such a judgment had been 
 
 other occasions ; not on the same day, as 
 Heinrichs and Kuinoel fancy. In that case 
 (besides other objections), if they had gone 
 back from the house of Lydia to the pros- 
 eucha, the word would certainly have been 
 ϊζίΧθόντων and not πουίνυμΙνο>ϊ>. In ver. 
 15 is implied their taking up their abode 
 with Lydia : — in this ver., that they habitu- 
 ally resorted to this jilace of prayer to 
 teach, and that what follows hapjiened on 
 such occasions. — It may be remarked that 
 the E. V. of ττορευομίνων (ίς {την) ττρος- 
 ίυχίμ', 'as we went to prayer,' has given 
 rise to a curious abuse of the expression 
 ' going to prayer,' in the sense of ' be- 
 ginning to pray,' among the lower classes 
 in England. «χονσαν ττνεΰμα ιτύ- 
 
 θωνα] On the whole subject of dsemoniacal 
 possession, see note Matt. viii. 32. This 
 was a case in which the presence of the 
 spirit was a patent fact, recognized by the 
 heathen possessors and consulters of this 
 female slave, and by them turned to ac- 
 count ; and recognized also by the Christian 
 teachers, as an instance of one of those 
 works of the devil which their Lord came, 
 and commissioned them, to destroy. All 
 attempt to explain away such a narrative as 
 this by the subterfuges of rationahsra (as e.g. 
 in Meyer, and even Lewin, i. 243, and appy 
 Hackett, p. 222), is more than ever futile. 
 The fact of the spirit tearing the girl, and 
 the masters fnding the hope of their gains 
 gone, is fatal : and we may see, notwith- 
 standing aU his attempts to account for it 
 psychologically, that Meyer feels it to be 
 so. τΓνθωνα] Plut. de Defectu Oracul. 
 
 ABCD 
 EGH
 
 IG— 20. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 165 
 
 ακο\ουθησασα τω Ποι;λω και νμιν, εΑτραζεί' ' λί'γουσα 'ijj'si''i4ai• 
 Ούτοι οι άνθρωποι 'δούλοι του θεού του ύφιστου ίΐσιν,'\)Ηη.\\ί''•26. 
 
 Ί k ' Λ Λ ' " 1 ' ^ ^ 1 ' 1 R - k oil iv υ. xlii. 
 
 οιτινες κοταγγεΛΛουσιν rj/utv οοον σωτΎ\ριας. "^^^το ^ξ^'^^^^-^^- 
 
 οε ετΓοίίΐ "' εττι ττολλας η|αερας. " οια7Γον»)ί/εις δε ο Παύλος xxi.'Ja.Lnke 
 και ° ίπιστρίφας τω ττνίυματι είττεν '^ Πα|θα"νγελλω σοι "^ εν π,',ίι,'χί",!' 3ΐ 
 ονόματι Ιησού γριστου εζελθειν αττ αυτής. και εζηλθευ ηίϊι.'ίν. 2on!y. 
 
 Γ ' - " " 19 '<^' <>^ • e / 5 - « 'έ'-'ΛΑ Eccl. χ. y. 
 
 αυτρ ry ωρα. '■" ιόοντες οε οι κύριοι αυτής οτι ίί,ηλυεν " ,^,^^,,^' ^^rt 
 ■η ^ ίΧπις tjjc '^ ίpyaσ^aς αυτών, ' επιλαβομενοι τον "!'. 2ΐι. ί c'ir! 
 ΙΊαϋλο)' και Έ.Ί\αν " ύΧκυσαν εις την ^ ανοοαν εττι τους q Lul:e χ. ιζ 
 
 ^ ' / •> = ih IV. HI al. 
 
 " 90 ^\ν ' ι\- "rT nkf ii 38 
 
 α^οχοντης, κοι ττροςαγαγοι^τες αυτούς τοις στρατη-γοις χ,^,ν. -.L• λ. 
 
 τ y-.r <"/! χ' ' ' - ^ 'Λ χχϋ. 13. 
 
 ειτταν υυτοι οι ανυρωποι εκταρασσουσιν ημών την πολιν Luke only. 
 
 ' ' en U.VT. τ. ώ. 
 
 Luke vii. 21. xii. 12. xx. 19. Luke only. s con.«tr., Col. i. 23 reff. t ace, ch. ix. 27. xviii. 17. 
 
 LukeNiv.4. u = here only. Jer. xlv. 13. ν ill. xvii. 17. Ezek. xxvii 12. 
 
 \v Malt, xviii. 24. Luke ix. 41. Gen. xlviii. 9. χ here only. Ps. Ixxx\ii. 16. 
 
 (tiovis) copt sail aeth al Orig Chr Thdrt-ms Eust Thl Oec Lucif. — 18. ο om AB : ins CD 
 (ίπιστρ. St ο -κ. τω ττν. και διαπον. D)EGH niss (appy) ff : ίπιτριφας 13. — τταραγ- 
 ■γεΚω C. — rec τω ον. {corrn : but /he art is not needed after a preposn), with DGH &c 
 Thl Oec: txt ABCE 137. 180 Eust Ath Thdrt Chr.— ei'a ί£ίλ«/;ς D : f^tXut 13.— 
 ίνθίως (for avT., τ. ω.) D seth. — 19. και iSovt. B Syr seth. — δε om A (apjiy) : Qtaaa- 
 μινοι ovv Eustath. — D has ως ce ticav oi κυρ. της πίδισκης οτι απεση^ιησθαι της tpy. 
 αιτ. }}ς ίίχαν Si αυτής. — for ιζηλθ., ίζίλιπίν lect 17• — rec τον σι\. {corrn for uni- 
 formity), with (ABEGH &c e sil) : txt CD 42. 57. 78. 80 —for uXk. {η\κ. C), ισυραν 
 Ε : add αυτούς 73.-20. rec ΐίπον, with CDG &c: txt ABEH &c.— 21. τα tOvii D' d' 
 
 p. 414, says ώςπίρ τονς ίγγαστριμυθονς 
 Εί'ρυκλίίΐς (from a prophet, Eurycles) 
 πάλαι, vvvi Πύθωνας ττροςαγορίυο/ύ- 
 τους. It is difficult to decide internally 
 between the probabilities of πύθωνα and 
 πύθωνας : I have retained the ancient 
 reading, both from its external authority, 
 and because I find so many commentators 
 explaining πύθων to be a 7iame of Apollo, 
 or the serpent Python, that the alteration 
 into the gen. may thus be easily accounted 
 for. 17.] έ'κραζεν, ' used to cry out :' 
 
 several occasions are referred to. — The re- 
 cognition of Paul and his company here by 
 the spirit is strictly analogous to that of 
 our Lord by the daemons, Matt. viii. 29. 
 Luke iv. 34 : and the same account to be 
 given of both : viz. that the evil spirit 
 knew and confessed the power of God and 
 His Christ, whether in His own Person or 
 that of His servants. 18. διαιτονη- 
 
 θείς] Not mere annoyance is expressed by 
 this word, but rather holy indignation and 
 sorrow at what he saw and heard ; the 
 Christian soldier was goaded to the attack, 
 but the mere satisfaction of anger was not 
 the object, any more than the result, of the 
 stroke. 19.] Her masters (a partner- 
 
 shij) of persons, not plur. for sing. — They 
 may have been the h*redes of some one to 
 whom she had belonged) perceived that the 
 hope of their gain had gone out (with the 
 deemon). e-iriX. . . . εϊλκ. gives the 
 
 idea of force having been used. So wo 
 have ' obtorto coUo ad praitorem trahor,' 
 
 Plant. Pcen. iii. 5. 45. — Paul and Silas only 
 are apprehended as having been the prin- 
 cipal fiersons in the company. When De 
 Wette says that, if Luke here were the nar- 
 rator, he must say something of Timotheus, 
 as he mentions him ch. xvii. 14, xviii. 5, — 
 and yet holds (on ver. 10) that Timotheus 
 himself is the narrator, he forgets that the 
 same reasoning will apply to him also, if it 
 applies at all, which I much doubt. When two 
 persons of a company are described as being 
 apprehended, we do not need an express as- 
 sertion to assure us that the rest were not. 
 eir. T. άρχοντας said generally: they 
 dragged them to the forum to the authorities, 
 — afterwards specified as στρατηγοί. 
 20. στρατηγοί?] The Duumviri of the 
 colony, of whom at Capua Cicero says, 
 ' cum in cieteris coloniis Duumviri apjiellen- 
 tur,hisePrsetores(ffrpari;yoi''c)appellarivo- 
 lebant.' De Leg. Agr. c.34. — 'Messinenses,' 
 says Wetstein, 'etiam nunc (cir. 1750) Ih-ee- 
 torem sive Prsefectum urbis Stradigo ap- 
 pellant.' The name, as a rendering of 
 Prisetor, had come from the Greek title 
 of similar magistrates : so Aristotle, Politic, 
 vii. 3, iv ταΊς μικρα'ις πύΧισι μία irtpi 
 πάντων {άρχ'ΐ)' καλονσι Si στρατηγούς 
 και ποληιάρχοιις. Ίουδ. {ιττάρχοντίς 
 
 .... Ί'ωμ. ούσιν] The distinction hi;( wccii 
 νπάρχ<ι>ν and ων seems to be, that the 
 former is used of something which the 
 speaker or narrator wishes to jiut (orward 
 into notice, either as unknown to his re;ider 
 or hearer, or in some way to be marked by
 
 1G6 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 21 
 
 'έλλ( 
 
 'ίθη 
 
 z-chfv/s"^' 'Ιουδαίοι •* ύπίψγηντες, "^ και " καταηγ^ 
 
 aiiiivi^iliV;•»: ουκ: ^ΐ^,ίατιν ι)μ'ίν '' παροδίχεσθαι ουδέ ποιείν Ρωμα'ιοις 
 
 xiv,4ai. di. ουσιΐ'. ^•' Kot συνετΓίστί? ο υνλος κατ αυτών, και οι 
 
 στρατηγοί '^ττεοιο/ι^οντερ αυτών τα ιμάτια εκελευον 
 
 ABCD 
 EGH 
 
 C MKrk iv. 20 
 
 1 Tim. V. Ml. 
 Εχοίΐ. xxiii. 
 1. 
 
 d hpre oiilv. 
 
 (Niiin.xvi 3. 
 e — lure only, 
 
 Sfe Luke 
 
 xxii. 4. 
 f hrre only +. 
 
 2 Mace. iv. 
 38. 
 
 g2 Cur. xi.2.') 
 
 ^ πίριρήίαντίς 
 23 
 
 ραβ^Ίϊ,^ιν, ^•* πολλάς τε επιθεντες αυτοις πλη-γας 
 ' εβολον εις ' φυλακτμ', παρα^^ί'ιλαντίς τω Βίσμοφυλακι 
 
 ασφαλούς τηρείΓ αυτούς ''^ ος TrapayyeAiau τοιαντην 
 ΰΧηώως ' εβαλεν αυτούς εις την "^ εσωτεραν ' φυλακην και 
 
 Cur. xi.2.') ν /Λ π', Λ' '- ' ^γΧ'Λ 25 s ^^^ 
 
 iiiyt.(;ui!g. τους ττοόας ' Ί^σφαλισατο αυτών εις το ςυΛον. κ:ατα οε 
 
 "* Revfx\ii'i8. ΤΟ *^ ptaovi)KTiov Παΰλος και Σίλας " 7Γ)θοςευχομεΓθΐ ' υμνούν 
 
 δ- -- ■■■ χ , _ . χ Λ' 26 >' " J, 
 
 ε αυτών οι οεσμιοι. αφνω 
 
 Ίίον 
 
 επηκροωυτο όε αυτών οι οεσμιοι. 
 
 i Matt. 
 
 3U. Rtv.ii. τον 
 
 10. (Jer. 
 
 xliv I'l ) k vr. inf. pres., cli. i. 4. IT. 18 a!. 1 Iiere, Sic. only t. Gen. xxxix. 21, &c. m = Mark 
 
 xiv. 44. Tobit vi. 4. η =-= ch. xii. ft, β. Prov. xix Hi. ο ch. v. 28 refl'.t ρ Hcb. vi. li) 
 
 only. Levit. xvi.2, IS. q Malt, xxvii. 64, SiC. only. Isa. xli. In. Wisd. xiii. 15. r=here 
 
 only. Jiibxxxiii.il. s — ch. xxvii. 27. Heb. iii. 8, from Ps. xciv. 8. t Luke xi. S. Mark 
 
 xiii. .νι. ch. XX. 7 only. Ps. cxviii. 02. η absol., ch. x. 30 al. ν ace, Heb. ii. 12 only. Isa. 
 
 xii.4. Dan. iii. 23. w here only t. (1 Kings χτ. 22.) χ Epli. iii. 1 rett. y ch. ii. 2. 
 
 xxviii.ti only. Josh. x. 9. 
 
 15' {ίθη D^ omg τα) ηθη G: sectam tol Lucif.— α ουκ ίξ. ημάς τταραΒίζασθαι ovtc τγοι., 
 Ρω. υπαρχηνσιν D : ΐ]μας 90. 142. — 22. και ττυλνς (ττολ. ins 2G Syr ar-erp Lucif also) 
 οχλ. σνί'ΠΓίστησαΐ' Kcir avT. κρηζοντις' τότε οι .... D. — rec πίριρρ. against all MSS 
 appy : txt AB.'CDEGH &c. — εαυτών 4 lect 1? arm. — 23. for τε, it Β al e copt. — 
 τταρηγγειλας 180. — τηρασθαι D. — 24. for ος, ο Se D. — for ειληφιος, λαβών (corrn to 
 more usual form) ABCDE 13. 15. 18. 31. 36. 40. 6!). 105. 180: λαμβάνων 37 e : 
 txt Gil most mss Chr Thl Oec. — for εβαλεν, ελαβεν A al. — for εσωτ., ετεραν 73. — rec 
 αντων, ησφ. (corrn of order), with C-DEGH al : txt ABC 13. — εν τω ξυλ. D.— 25. κατά 
 Se μέσον της νυκτός D' {μέσον νυκτών Ε). — ο ττ. D. — ο σιλ. C. — και οι ϋεσμ. C. — 
 
 him for praise or blame : whereas the latter 
 refers to facts known and recognized, and 
 taken for granted by both. Thus, we may 
 notice that, when the fact of Paul and 
 Silas being Romans is announced to tlie 
 jailor, it is not άν'•Κ 'Ρωμαίους ovras, but 
 ύττάρχοντας ; whereas here, both parties, 
 the speakers and tlie addressed, being indis- 
 putably Romans, we have 'Ρωμαίοις ουσι. 
 The account of this may be, that υπάρχω 
 is predicated of something of which the 
 speaker informs the hearer, some prior 
 knowledge which he possessed and now im- 
 parts, — ειμί being predicated of the bare 
 matter of fact. See ch. xvii. 27. 29 ; xxi. 
 20 (for both) ; xxii. 3. Gal. ii. 14 al., for 
 ίητάρχων and for ων, John iii. 4 ; iv. 9 bis. 
 Rom. V. 10 al. — ' Versute composita fuit 
 hsec criminatio ad gravandos Christi servos : 
 nam ab una jjarte obtendunt Romanum 
 nomen, quo nihil erat magis favorabile ; 
 rursum ex nomine Judaico, quod tunc 
 infame erat (especially if the decree of 
 Claudius, expelling them from Rome, ch. 
 xviii. 2, had at this time been enacted) 
 confiant illis invidiam : nam, quantum ad 
 religioncm, plus habebant Romani affinitatis 
 cum aUis quibushbet, quam cum gente 
 Judaica.' Calvin. 21. έ'θη . . .] " Dio 
 
 Cassius tells us that ^Miecenas gave the fol- 
 lowing advice to Augustus : — το μεν θείον 
 πάντη πάντως αυτός τε σίβου κατά τά 
 πάτρια, και τονς άλλους τψι^ν ανάγκαζε' 
 
 τους 5f Κενίζοντάς τι περί αυτό και μίσει 
 και κόλαζε- and the reason is alleged, viz. 
 that such innovations lead to secret asso- 
 ciations, conspiracies, and cabals, ίίπερ 
 ηκιστα μοναρχία σνμφιριι." (C. and Η. p. 
 324.) So Julius Paulus, Sentent. v. 21. 2, 
 cited by Wetst., ' Qui novas et usu vel 
 ratione incognitas rcligiones inducunt, ex 
 quibus animi hominum moveantur, hones- 
 tiores deportantur, humiliores capite pre- 
 muntur.' 22.] The multitude tumul- 
 
 tuously cried out, as on other occasions (see 
 Luke xxiii. 18. Acts xix. 28. 34 ; xxi. 30), 
 — and the duumviri, without giving them a 
 trial {άκατακριτους, ver. 37), rent off their 
 clothes, scil. by the lictors {τοΙς μαβοούχοις 
 ίκίλευσαν την έσθητά τε περικαταρρηζαι 
 και ταΐς ράβϋοις το σώμα ί,αίνειν, Dion. 
 Hal.ix. 39). The form was, ' Summove lictor, 
 despolia, verbera.' Seneca (C. and H.). See 
 also Livy, ii. 8. Valer. Max. ii. 28, in Wetst. 
 Erasmus fancied that the duumviri rent their 
 own clothes from indignation : but, to say 
 nothing of the improbability of such a pro- 
 ceeding on the part of a Roman magistrate, 
 a man could not very well •7Γ€ριρρΓ;£οι his 
 own garments. 24. το ξυλον] Also 
 
 called κάλοι>, ποοοκάκη, and πυΟοστράβη, 
 and in Latin, nervus : so ' noctu nervo 
 vinctus custodibitur,' Plant. Capt. iii. 5. 71• 
 Eusebius mentions, speaking of the martyrs 
 in Gaul, τάς iv τψ %ΰλΐι) ϋιατάσεις των 
 ποίων επι πέμπτον διατεινομενων τρν-
 
 21—30. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 167 
 
 δε "^ σίΐσμος εγίΐ/ετο μέγας, ωςτε ^ σαΧίνΟηναι τα ^ θίμεΧια ζ = Matt. 
 τον όεσμωτηριου ηνίω^υησαν οε παραχρήμα αι "νραι ^l^^J^\'-^^- 
 πασαι, και πάντων τα ** δεσμά ^ άνίθη. ^^ έζυττίΌς δε fxxii* a. 
 ^ γενόμενος ο οεσμοφυλας /cat towv ανεωγμενας τας °°'|• g«=''- 
 υνρας τΐ]ς φυλακής, σπασαμενος μαγαιραν ημελλεΐ' d ueut. pi?,Lake 
 
 . >k' - /y 1' , ' νχ<>' ''"'■ -"- '=1>- 
 
 εαί;τον αναιρειν, νομιί,ων Εκπίψίνγίναι τους οεσμιους. χχ ssoniy. 
 " ε^ων>ίσεν δε φωντι μεγάλχ? ο Παύλος λεγωΐ' Μτίδεν ['"ϊ".'^ ''''''■ 
 
 ' y ~u ' , " ' ' ο ' Ο' 'S ^ ill. xxvii. 4C. 
 
 π/οαςτ^)ς σεαυτω κακόν απαντάς yap εσμεν ενσαοε. fhere oniyt. 
 ^ Ρ Αίτησας δε '' φωτά '^ ίΐςίπηΒησεν, και * έντρομος γενό- I'MlVt^liv 47 
 
 t ' " l~r ' Λ ^ Κ" 'Λ λΟ ' U only. Num. 
 
 μένος προςεττεσεν τω ΙΙαυΛω /cat 2,ιλα, ^" /cat ττρο- xxii.ss. 
 
 ν ' ^ ^'y ''', Ι^' ' ' ζι -' - -' α~ k-ch.ii. 23 
 
 ayayiov αυτούς εςω εφη ι\.υριοι, τι με οει ποιείν tva σώσω ; '«ο- 
 ι absoi., here only. (Lnke xxi. 3(i al. Jodg. Ti. 11.) m Luke xxiii. 4fi. Rev. xiv. 18. η = and 
 
 constr., w. woiew, ch.ix. 13. ο Lake xxiv. 41 al.t ρ constr.. Matt. vii. !). | ch. xii. 20. 3 Kings xix. 4. 
 
 q = here only, ννκτόί ίπιτ^νομίνηί φΰ•ς βχωμ okfffp νομιζ^τηι . . . , Xen. Hellen. v. 1 . 8. r here 
 
 only. Amos V. 19. s =- ch. vii. 32. Heb. xii. 2CI only. Ps.xvii. 7. t Mark iii. 11. Luke 
 
 viii. 28, 47. Ps. sciv. 6. η ch. xii. 6 refl. 
 
 26. rec ανεωχΟ., with GH &c Chr al : txt ABCDE (ηνοιχθ. AE 13) 180 ThP.— rec for 
 δί, Ti {perhaps to avoid the recurrence of Of, — perhaps because the copulative is more 
 natural), with CGH &c vss Chr al : txt ABDE 13. 137 al copt sah syr ThF. — τταραχρ. 
 om Β Lucif Cassiod. — aft ττασ., ins του δίσμωτηριον 28. — τταντα τα ίεσμ. 100. 195 
 Lucif. — ανίλυθη D: ανηθη 10': αναθη 38. 137 al : ανιλυθησαν 96^: ανεωχθη 20: 
 ε\υθη 40. G8 : £ιε\νΘησαν G4. — 27. κ. εζυπν. γ. D Syr seth ar-pol. — r. θνρ. ανεωγ. C ν 
 (not am demid) al Chr. — και σηασ. D. — bef μαχ. ins rijv BCD (as in Mark xiv. 47, 
 where rijv is omd only in D β/'. «SO Tischendorf : hut perhaps it was inserted as 
 seeming necessary, without ref to that passage): om AE &c. — rec ιμελλ. with DH al : 
 t,xt ABCEG lect 12: 7;θ£λ(ΐ' Thl-. — αυτόν lect 17• — ανελειν C^ a\. — εκπεφυ-^εναι A. — 
 28. μεγ. φων. (aft παν. Β 180 ν copt sah Syr al) AB (Birch: φ. μεγ. BentI) al am copt 
 sah Syr : om lect 12. — ο om BC^ 13 Thl'. — ποίησες Ε. — η κακόν D-gr. — απαντ. to 
 ινθαϋε om 100. — 29. <ρωτα (ε ετησας D: accendit sibi Syr ar-erp : λαβών sah. — for 
 ■γεν., υπάρχων C'D-gr 40. 98 marg 137 al Chr. — ττροςίττ. ττρυς τους πόδας D' ν Syr 
 ar-erp syrf sah Lucif. — rec τω σι\. (corrnfor uniformity), with AC'^EGH &c : txt BCD. 
 — 30. if. προηγαγεν avr. εζω D (ττροαγων 177 : ττροςαγαγων 42. 96) : add τους λοι- 
 
 πημα. 25. τΓροςευχ. υμν.] Not as tempted to rationalize this wonderful ex- 
 E. v., 'prayed and sung praises,' — but, ample of the triumph of prayer. See some 
 ' praying, sung praises,' or ' in their ctcellent remarks on Baur's attempt to do 
 prayers, were singing praises.' The dis- so, in Neander, Pfl. u. L. p. 302, note 3. 
 tinction of modern times between prayer 27. ημ£λ. Ιαντ. άναιρ.] The law 
 and praise, arising from our attention being de Custodia Reorum (Wetst.) says, ' Ad 
 directed to the shape rather than to the commentariensem receptarum personarum 
 essence of devotion, was unknown in these custodia observatioque pertineat, nee putet, 
 days : see Col. iv. 2. — ' Nihil crus sentit in hominem abjectum atque vilem objiciendum 
 nervo, quum animus in coeloest.' Tertullian esse judici, si reus modo aliquo fuerit olap• 
 ad ISIartyres, c. 2. — The imperfects shew sus. Nam ipsum volumus hujusmodi pcensR 
 that they were singing, and the prisoners consumi, cui obnoxius docebitur fuisse, qui 
 (in the outer prison) listening, when the fugerit.' Mr. Howson notices, by the ex- 
 earthquake happened. 26. ττάντων τα amples of Cassius, Brutus, Titinius, and 
 δ€σμα ανί'θη] i. e. of all the prisoners in many of the jiroscribed, after the battle, — 
 the pri.son : see below (ver. 28), άπαντες that Philippi is famous in the annals of 
 yap εσμεν ενϋάδε. Doubtless there were suicide, (p. 329.) 29. φώτα] Not as 
 gracious purposes in this fortliose prisoners, Έ.Υ.,'α light,' but 'lights,' neut. plur. 
 who before were listening to the praises of 30. ττροαγ. αΰτ. £|ω] Into the outer prison : 
 Paul and Silas ; and the very form of the not jjcrliaps yet outside the prison, which 
 narrative, mentioning this listening, shews (from avayayo'))•, ver. 34, when betakes them 
 subsei/uent conimunication between some to his own house) seems to liave been vnder- 
 one of these and the narrator. — Their chains ground, or at all events on a lower level in 
 were loosed, not by the earthquake, but by the same building. In this same space tliey 
 miraculous interference over and above it. seem to have been joined by the jailor's 
 It is some satisfaction to find, that neither family, — to liave converted and bapfi/ed 
 Meyer, De Wette, nor Kuinoel have at- them, and to have been taken (to the well ?)
 
 168 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XVI. 
 
 Tcii.ix.4;. 31 Q? g^ ίΤτΓπν ^ Πί'στευσου (πι τον κυριον Ιησοΰν, και abcd 
 
 xi. 17. »• w ι FP ι ί 
 
 "clJi^if.f. σωθί'/σ7^? συ και ό '"οίκτος σου. ^"^ Και " ίλάλησαν αύτω 
 Tiii.'sft? τϋί' λό"νοΐ' του κυρίου, συν πασιν τοις εν τη οικία αυτοΰ. 
 
 y — John sis. / ^' ,y,., -(ΐ„^ ν 
 
 le^ch.xxi. 33 ^^ J ■ τταραλοβων αυτούς fv ffCftvrj τϊ? ω^α τϊ]ς• νυκτός 
 'κίτ!^'" ^ 'ίΧουσεν ^ απο των ττ\η•^ων, και ίβαπτΊσθη αυτός και οι 
 b^:".% αυτού πάντες " παραγ^ρημα, ""^ ανα-γα-γων τε αυτούς εις 
 clh.lx. 30 res. rov οίκον '^ πα ρεθηκεν " τράπεΖαν και -η-γαλΧιατο ^ παν- 
 7. 4 KinRs Qj^,j " 7Γίπ<στευκως τω ϋίω. ''^ Hjttfpac ύε -γενομένης 
 
 e= Matt. XV. t , -y 'k ' ^Ι'/ΰ?' Λ' 
 
 27. Ps.ixxvii. απέστειλαν οι στρατηηοι τους ραρόουγους, λέγοντες 
 
 fcii ϋ Sereff g here only. Esod. i. 1. Jos. Antt. iv. 4. 4. li dat., = ch. xviii. 8(= Lake only). 
 
 ii-U.'xii. ISreir. kTer.22. 1 ver. 38 only t. 
 
 ττυνς αηφαΧισαμίνπς και D syr* and ειπιν αντοις D sah. — 31. rec ίίπον, with GH &c : 
 txt ABC(appy)DE. — for (τη, tig Ε lect 12. — rec aft η^σονί', add χριστον (as tisual in 
 some AISS w/ienever ιησ. occurs), with CDEGH al vss Thdrt Chr al : txt AB 2. 13 30. 
 100 V copt Oec (mss) Lucif. — και συ και lect 12. — ττας ο οίκος Ε 13. 73. 180 all copt 
 £eth arm slav. — 32. t\a\i]atv 133. — τον om D. — for κυρ., Θίον Β seth. — rec και πησι 
 (alteration for simpliciti/, and to suit συ και ο one. above), with EGH &c vss Chr al : 
 t.\t ABC (ττασι) D 13. 15. 18. 3G. 40. C9. 105. 180 ν Lucif.— 33. tXvatv W ά.— 
 αντος ίβ. D. — και οι oiKftoi αυτού A arr : ο oi/c. αντ. 40 ν: οι νιοι αυτ. 31 lect 17: 
 ot μι- αντον ThF. (These eaw may serve to illustrate the practice of insertioii to fill up 
 any ellipsis.) — άπαντες Β. — 34. και avay. τε D' : αν. It C 13 al copt Syr. — rec aft 
 oi/c. ins ηυΓου (supplementary), with ADE &c : om BC 36. 40. 100. 105. 137- 180 all 
 Lucif.^/cni παριθ. D'. — rec )]γα\\ιασατο (alteration to more usual historic /e?i4e), with 
 ABC^EGH &c: txt Ci(appy)D all Syr sah Chr Oec ThP : ηγαλλιασαντο lect 12.— 
 navoiKCi AC 13. 180: om E. — συν τω οίκω αυτού D. — πεπ. (πεπιστενκοτες 177) f^i- 
 τον θ. Ό : for θεω, κνριω Ό6. 142 lect 12 al sah. — 35. γεναμ. Ε. — αττεσταλκαν 137• — 
 D syr-marg reads the ver thus, ημ. δε γεν. σννηλθον οι σστρατηγοι (sic) επι το αυτά 
 εις την αγοραν και αναμνησθεντες τον σεισμον τον γε-γονοτα εψοβηθησαν και απέστει- 
 λαν τους . . . . — for αποΧνσον, αποστειΚον 100. — for ανθρ., Ιεσμιονς 133. — at end, D aP 
 
 and washed from their stripes ; and after- attempts to establish a development of St. 
 
 wards to have been led up (by stairs .' see Paul's doctrine according to mere external 
 
 ref.) to his house, and hospitably enter- circumstances, — that this reply was given 
 
 tained. The circumstantiality of the ac- before any one of his extant epistles was 
 
 count shews that some eye-witness related written. Aug. 1856.] και ό oikos συυ 
 
 it. — His question, connected with the ocbv does not mean that his faith would save 
 
 σωτηρίας of the dsemoniac in ver. 17» his household, — but that the same way 
 
 makes it necessary to infer, as De Wette was open to them as to him : ' Believe, 
 
 well observes, that he had previously be- and thou shalt be saved : and the same 
 
 come acquainted with the subject of their of thy household.' 33. eXovatv 
 
 preaching. He wanted no means of escape αϊτό] A pregnant constr. : 'washed them, 
 
 from any danger but that which was spi- so that they were purified from the blood 
 
 ritual: the earthquake was past, and his occasioned by their stripes :' see reff. This 
 
 prisoners were all safe. Bengel admirably is much more natural than to take άπό (as 
 
 remarks: ' Nonaudierat hymnos Pauh, nam in άπό χαράς and the like) as signifying 
 
 dormierat, sed tamen vel antea vel postea ' on account of (see Bernhardy, Syntax, 
 
 senserat, quis esset Paulus.' 31. eirl p. 225). 34.] άναγ., see reff. and 
 
 T. Kvpiov] Not without allusion to the note on ver. 30. ιτίτηστί'υκώς] Winer 
 
 Kiipioi, by which name he had just addressed renders ' as one who has placed his trust in 
 
 them. So Bengel : ' non agnoscunt se God :' but, as De W. observes, πεπιστεν- 
 
 dominos.' — Considering u'ho theperson was κώς must give the yrOMwdof his rejoicing(see 
 
 that asked the question, — a heathen in the 1 Cor. xiv. 18 [rec], ευχαριστώ . . . λαλών, 
 
 depths of ignorance and sin, — and how in- ' I give thanks . . . that I speak'). Thus 
 
 disputably therefore the answer embraces all the meaning will be, ' rejoiced that he 
 
 sinners whatever, — there perhaps does not with all his house had been led to be- 
 
 stand on record in the whole book a more lieve in God.'— The expression πεπιστ. τψ 
 
 important answer than this of Paul : — or, I θεφ could only be used of a converted 
 
 m&y add, one more strikingly characteristic heathen, not of a Jew. 35.] What 
 
 of the Apostle himself and his teaching, had influenced the magistrates is not re- 
 
 [We may remark also, in the face of all corded. We can hardly suppose that the
 
 SI— 29. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 169 
 
 "^ Άπόλνσον τους άνθρώττους εκύνους. aπΊ]yyH\ev ^Ι m-ch.xxvi. 
 
 ό " ^ίσμοφνλαζ τους λόγους τούτους ττρος τον ΥΙαυλον, οΙΙ^':ΐ3. 
 
 (Ι ■> ι •\ ' λ '' m ' Λ Λ- . - τ ο ητ.έι•, ] Cor. 
 
 ΟΤΙ ατΓίστολκαν ot στξ>ατη^θί ινα αποΑυυητε νυν ουν xvi.n.ju 
 
 .£<ρΐ7- εξίλθόντΕς ° ττορίυίβΟί εν Ηξ>ίιν\ι. ' Ο δε Παύλος εφη Lukeiii^^'' 
 
 *>1 C• y '^nΛ/ '""π^ 'γ' ' 1 >', 
 
 ABD προς αυτούς * Δείροντες ημάς ' οημοσια ακατακριτους, x^'.^sVeft 
 
 EGH S ' fl ' s 'r) ' ' ' t ''/Q Λ '« t A Λ pLi>ke'xxii.'il3 
 
 ανυοωπους Γωμαίους υπαρ•\οντας, εραλαν εις φυλά- ai ch.v. 4ο 
 κην, /cat ΐ'υν λαϋρα ημάς εκ-ραλλουσίΐ^ ; ου γα^ο |^, j^'^ ';'!|^+; 
 aWa ελθόρτες αυτοί ημος " έξαγογετωσαι^. ^ aπηyyε^Xav "^ 'ilniy t."" ^* 
 
 Γ\\ - ν - ' ζ ' oV - ν «/ - . sMalt. χχνϋ. 
 
 οε τοις •* στoaτηyoις οι ραροου^οι τα ρήματα ταύτα |2• ^V?^,'^ 
 
 ',ίΟ'Λ Cn\' ' " Ί") "'a' 39 't ver 24 
 
 εφορηπησαν οε ακουσαντες οτι Γωμαιοι εισιν, και ayi»u.i.w. 
 
 εΧθόντες ^ τταρεκάλεσαν αυτυυς, και ^ ε^α^αηοντες '^ ηρω- x^ssoniy. 
 
 τ = Matt. ix. 2.Ί. ch. ix. 40. Gal. iv. 30. w here only. See note. χ = ch. v. li). vii. 3Γ>. y ζ ver. 3δ. 
 a prts , John i. 4U rcD'. b = here only. c = Mark vii. 26. Luke vii. 30 rcB'. 
 
 syr-marg add ους ίχθΐς τταρίΧαβίς. — 36. και ιιςίλθων [άκουσας syr ar-erp) ο δισμοψ. 
 απη-γγ. D Syr ar-erp. — avnyyiiXe 73. — for c)f, τί Ε gr sah xth. — τούτους oin BCD-gr 
 Ιδ. 18. 36. 76. 180 Chr (111882) (β'οηι similarily of endings). — rec απεσταλκασιν 
 {grammatical corrn), with DEGH &c : απιστίΐλαν C : txt AB. — tv tip. om D. — 
 37. Tjp. αντονς om Ε ietli. — bef isip. (i?jp.all) ins αναίτιους D (also Syr omg ακατακρ.) 
 sah. — rec (βαλον (granuna/ical corrn), with ADEGH &c : txt BD. — yap 0111 13. — αυτ. 
 ημάς ίΚθοντ. Ε. — ημ. oiii Η all slav (not mod) Oec. — 38. rec αΐ'ηγγ., with GH &c : txt 
 ABDE 15. 31. 33. 137. 180 al Chr {ανΐ]γ. text) ThP. {It is difficult to determine from 
 internal evidence ivhich is the origl readg : αττί^γγ. may he a corrn to suit ver 36. 
 MSS authority must prevail in such a case.)— for ci, τε E-gr vss : ουν 96. — aft ταύτα, 
 ins τα ρηθεντα ηρος τους στρατηγούς D Syr ar-erp. — rec και εφοβ. {corrn to more 
 natural copula), with EGH &c : txt AB (D see below) all copt. — ot if ακουσαντες or. 
 ρω. εισ. εφοβηθ. D. — 39. for κ. ε\θοντ., — και τταραγινομενοι μετά φίλων ττολλων εις 
 την φυλακην D {εις τ. φυλ. ins also 137 syr*). — και .... ηρωτ. om 137 Syr ar-erp seth, 
 
 earthquake alone would have done so, as vox alia istius miseri, inter dolorem crepi- 
 
 they would not have connected it with their tumque virgarum audiebatur, nisihac: Civis 
 
 prisoners ; they may have heard what had Roraanus sum.' In A'^errem, lib. v. 62, 63. 
 
 taken place : but that, again, is hardly pro- ' Facinus est vinciri civem Romanum, seeing 
 
 bable. I should rather set it down to verberari ; prope parricidium necari.' Id. 
 
 calmer thought, repudiating the tumultuary lib. v. 66. Many others are given by 
 
 proceeding of the evening before. Kuinoel, Biscoe, &c. — On the question, 
 
 ραβδοΰχονς] ' The lictors,• — ' bearers of hoiv Paul came to be born a Roman citizen, 
 
 the rods,' bacilli ; which, and 7iot fasces, see note on ch. xxii. 28 : and on ύττόρχ., 
 
 were carried before the colonial duumviri: note, ver. 21. — Another irregularity had 
 
 see Cicero, de Leg. Agr. ubi supra. been committed by the duumviri, in scourg- 
 
 36.] Paul and Silas had returned to the ing them uncondemned : 'causa cognita 
 
 prison : whither the jailor goes, accom- niulti possunt absolvi : incognita quidem 
 
 panied by the lictors (o ίέ Π. εφη πρ. condemnari nemo potest.' Cic. in Verr. i. 9. 
 
 αϋτον<ί, ver. 37), to announce the order. ' Inauditi et indefensi tanquam innocenter 
 
 37.] δημοσί^. and λάθρα are op- perierant.' Tac. Hist. ii. 10. ίκβάλλ.] 
 
 posed: the iytjury had been jmblic : the 'are they thrusting us out Γ — It does 
 
 reparation, not to Paul and Silas merely, not follow, because ΐκβάλλο) has no such 
 
 but to the Gospel of which they were the sense in ix. 40, &c., that therefore it has 
 
 heralds, must be public also. άνθρ. not here. The circumstances must deter- 
 
 'Ρωρ.. νπΓάρχ.] By the Lex Valeria, passed mine : which here seem to rcc|uire tliis 
 
 A.u.c. 2.54, and the Lex Porcia, a.u.c. 506, sense. οϋ γάρ] An clliiitical answer 
 
 Roman citizens were exempted from stri])e3 to a question or position, the negative of 
 
 and torture : by the former, till an appeal to which is self-evident : see Ilartung, Par- 
 
 the people was decided,— by tlie latter, ab- tikellehre, ii. p. 48 : Kiihner, Gramm. 
 
 solutely. The following passages of Cicero § 741. 6: Hermann on Viger, j). 462. 
 
 illustrate our text: 'Porcia lex virgas ab When it occurs with ήλλίί, it is best written 
 
 omnium civiiim Romanorum corpore amo- without a stop between : cf. Aristoph. Ran. 
 
 vit.' I'ro Rabirio, c. 3. — ' Ciedobatur virgis 58: μ») σκώπτε μ', ω 'βελψ'' οΰ yap ''λλ 
 
 in medio foro Messana; civis Romanus, 'έχ(ο KaKt7jr : — ib. 1!)3: μα τϋυ Δι' οι; yap 
 
 judices : cum interea nuUus gemitus, nulla (scil. νίναυμάχηκα) αλλ' ετνχον ύφΟαλ-
 
 170 
 
 ΠΡΑΕΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 ΧνΤ. 40. 
 
 d \ν. προς, 
 
 Loke i. 28. 
 
 ch. χ. 3. xi. 
 
 3. 
 e — Hike viii. 
 
 *0.ch.xxviii 
 
 των ίζεΧθίΐν της 
 φυΧακΐις '' ίΐςτιΧθον 
 τοιις αδελφούς 
 
 40 
 
 ίξελθοντες 
 Λυδίαν, / 
 
 δέ 
 
 ί /c τΐ}ς 
 " ιουντίς 
 ίί,ηΧΘον. 
 
 πόλεως 
 
 προς την 
 παρζκαλίσαν αυτούς, και 
 ^-^Κ"-^'^- XVII. ^ '' Δίοδευσαντες δε την ΆμφΊπολιν και Άττολ- 
 '^Ί%.\ά\'.' ' Χωνίαν ηΧΘον άς θεσσαΧονικην, υττου ην η συνα^νω-γη 
 
 h Luke viii. 1 
 only. Gen. xiii. 17. Isa. lix. 8. 
 
 jjpiuroDi' Λ Till-: -τησαν Ε. — for ίζ(\θίΐν, απιλθαν {cnrrn : pei-haps on acct of 
 
 ίϊ,ίλΟονης immediately follg, perhaps because ίζίλθ. τ. v. did not sufficiently eapress 
 departure from the city: see Luke viii. 37 : Mark v. 17) AB 13. Ιδ. 18. 3f>. 40. C8. G9. 
 105. 133. 180 al (and omg αττο, (ίό al) : txt EGH &c Chr al. — bef της πολ. ins πττο 
 
 {see above) AB all : £κ Ε : txt GH &c Chr al.— for παρίκ πολίως-, — D 137 syr* 
 
 have iraptK. αυτυνς ίζίλθίΠ' (ΐποντίς Ηγνοησαμιν τα καθ νμας, οτι ισται άνδρες 
 δίκαιοι• και (ζαγαγοντις παρίκηλίσαν αντονς Xtyovrtg ίκ της ττολεως ταύτης ιΚελθατε 
 (-θέτε 137) μητ^οτε πάλιν σνντραψωηιν ημειν επικραζοντες καθ νμων (και εξ. to λε- 
 ■νοί'Γίς- om 137 syr': και εκ τ. τν. 137: μήπως ιπιστρ. παλ. οι επικραΚαντες, 137). — 
 40 for ίκ, απο Β 38 ThP. — η\θον D e. — rec εις τ. Χνδ. (see note: and cf Mark v. 12, 
 13), with a few mss (appy) Oec : txt ABDEGH 1. 13. 3L 100. 105. 133. 137- 177 all 
 V sah arm slav Chr Thl. — την om 137. — icovr. παρεκ. τ. αΰελφ. AB 13 copt (emendation 
 of style) : txt (D)EGH liiss and vis (nrly) Chr Thl Oec. — D Cassiod. have ιδ. τ. aS. 
 ίιηγη/ταντο οσα εποιηαεν κύριος αντοις παρακαλεσαντις (παρεκαλεσαν τε D^) αντονς. 
 —εξήλθαν D. 
 
 Chap. ΧΛ'ΙΙ. 1. for διοδ., διελθοντες Ε. — bef απολλ. ins την (for uniformity) ABE 
 (την απ. κ. την αμφ. Ε) 13. 180 ThP (comm) ThP: ora (D)GH niis (nrly) Chr ThP 
 (text) Oec. — και (om D-) κατήλθαν (add και D-') εις απολλωνιδα κακειθίν . . . D. — 
 την θεσσαλ. Β al.— jj bef away, om ABD 13. 40. 180 lect 12 (see note) : ins EGH 
 
 μιων, and 463 : <pipt ίη ταχέως αντ'• ov travelled from Philippi to Thessalonica, was 
 
 ABn 
 EGH 
 
 yap άλλα πειπτέον. — Mr. Humphry re- 
 marks, ' St. Paul submitted to be scourged 
 by his own countrymen (five times, 2 Cor. 
 xi. 24) : for, though he might have pleaded 
 his privilege as a Roman, to tlie Jews he 
 " became as a Jew," observing their cere- 
 monies, and submitting to their law.' 
 38. έψοβ.] For the account which they 
 might have to give at Rome, as in A'^erres' 
 case, or even for their popularity with the 
 very mob of Roman citizens who had de- 
 manded the punishment. 39. irap- 
 εκάλβσαν] y^ot 'comforted:' but, as E. V., 
 'besought them:' viz. not to make their 
 treatment matter of legal complaint. In 
 the request to depart from the city, the 
 prietors seem to shew fear of a change in 
 the temper of the mob. See the curious 
 addition in the var. readd. 40.] They 
 do not depart hastily, or as though forced, 
 but wait to reassure the brethren, προς 
 has probably been altered to εΙς, on account 
 of the verb, not because Ανδίαν was mis- 
 taken (jMeyer) for the country of that name. 
 iropeK.] ' exhorted,' is better than 
 ' comforted,' E. V. The one in this case 
 ■would imply the other. Chap. XVII. 
 1.] Here we have the first person again 
 dropped, — implying apparently that the 
 narrator did not accompany Paul and Silas. 
 I should be inchned to think that Timo- 
 theus wejit ivith them from Philippi, — not, 
 as is usually supposed, joined them at 
 Bertf-a : see below on ν v. 4 and 10. 
 Βιοδίΐίσαντί?] The ococ, on which they 
 
 the Via Egnatia, the Macedonian continua- 
 tion of the Via Appia, and so named from 
 Egnatia (' Gnatia lymphis iratis exstructa,' 
 Hor. Sat. i. 5), in the neighbourhood of 
 which the latter meets the Adriatic. It 
 extended from Dyrrhachium in Epirus to 
 the Hebrus in Thrace, a distance of 500 
 miles. The stages here mentioned are thus 
 particularized in the itineraries : Philippi to 
 Amphipolis, 33 miles : Amphipolis to Apol- 
 lonia, 30 miles : Apollonia to Thessalonica, 
 37 miles. See more particulars in C. and H., 
 pp. 338 ff. ΆμφίίΓολιν] Anciently 
 
 called ivvia όδυΐ, Thucyd. i. 100. Herod, 
 vii. 114, lying in a most important position, 
 at the end of the lake Cercinitis, formed by 
 the Strymon, commanding the only easy 
 pass from the coast of the Strymonic gulf 
 into Macedonia. (' Amphipoleos, quae ob- 
 jecta claudit omnes ab oriente sole in Ma- 
 cedonian! aditus,' Liv. xlv. 30.) In conse- 
 quence of this, the Athenians colonized the 
 place, calling it Amphipolis, ίπ' αμφότερα 
 περιρρέοντος τον Έτρνμόνος. Thuc. iv. 102. 
 It was the spot where Brasidas was killed, 
 and for previously failing to succour which 
 Thucydides was exiled : see Thucyd. iv. and 
 v., and Grote's Hist, of Greece, vol. vi. p. 
 (i25 ff., where there is a plan of Amphi- 
 polis. After this it was a point of conten- 
 tion between the Athenians and Philip, and 
 subsequently became the capital of Mace- 
 donia Prima, — see Livy, xlv. 30, where 
 Paulus ^■Emilius proclaims, at Amphipolis, 
 the freedom, and territorial arrangements of
 
 XVII. 1—5. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 171 
 
 των Ιουδαιωΐ'. ^ κατά δε το ^ ειωθος τω Παυλω '' ής-ηΧθεν 'LuUeiv m 
 
 ^ t t ^ ' only. Num. 
 
 προς αυτούς και ΐπι σάββατα τρία δΐίλίγετο αύτοις t cifluV. 3ΐ 
 '" απυ των ° -γράφων διαίΌΐ'γαιΐ' και ^ παοατιΘ^ιενος ^~^\γ''^^• 
 
 ort τοι; γριστον ^ εοει παΐ/ειν και αναστηναι εκ νεκρών, 23. ' 
 
 \ ti ^ r f > f ^'Τ -t\>vt η= plur. absol., 
 
 Κα/ OTt ούτος εστίν ο γοίστος 1?)σους ον εγω Karay- M^['^^f'''|• 
 γελλω ύμπ'. * κπί τίνες έξ αυτών ίπίίσθησαν καΐ " προς- 27"'"john''v. 
 εκΛηρωϋησαι^ τω ΠαυΛω καί τω 2«(Λα, των τε σεροπενων Rom. χν. 4. 
 
 ,' _ι <• *■_'„ ιΓ 1 Cor. XT. 3, 
 
 Ελλϊ]νων πΧηθος πολν, γυναικών τε τωΐ' * πρώτων ουκ olLnkexxiv. 
 oAiyai. ^ προςλαρομίνοι οε οι Ιουοαιοι των αγο- ί.''';^•^''• 
 
 24,31. Excel, xix. 7. w. «ίτι, here only. q =Luke xxiv. 4β. Dan. ii. 28. r = Matt. xx. li) al• 
 
 I.sa. xxvi. li». w. tu I/., Matt. xvii. 9 al. fr. s ch. ix. 20 reff. t ch. iv. 2. xxii. 5 al.t u here only t. 
 
 Tip TruTf i ruw οΚων ττροςκεκλίίρωμβίΌΐ, Philo de Fortit. p. 741. ν ch. xiii. 43 reff. w = Malt, 
 
 xxii. 38. Luke XV. 22. ch. xiii. 5(1 reft'. χ ch. xii. 18 refl'. a = ch. xviii. 26. 2Macc. viii. 1. 
 
 b = here only. (ch. xix. 38) t• Herod, ii. 141 al. (see Wctstein.) 
 
 most nass Chr Oec Tlil. — 2. και κατά το D' seth ar-pol. — ο ττανλ. D ν Syr arr aeth. — και 
 om D. — for 5i(\(ytTo, διελίζατο {alteration to hintoric aorist) AB \'Λ: δκλίχθΊ) DE 15. 
 18. 192. 3C. 40 lect 12 Chr-comm : διηλίχθη 137- 180: t.xt GH most mss ν Cbr^ Thl 
 Oec. — for απη, ίκ D. — 3. παρατιθ. αντοις GG. 100. 10(i al sah slav. — τον om D. — bef 
 χιοίστ. om AD 38. 113 Chrj : ins B(but has ο ιησ. aIso)GH most mss Oec Thl : ιησ. ο 
 χρ. Ε 32. 177• 180 Syr ar-erp slav.— 4. ιπισηνσαν Ε 38. 40. lOG. 137: ιβαπτισ- 
 θησανΊ: bef ίξ ουΓων 38. — τω (2nd) om Β. — D aft τω σιλαια (sic) add rjj διδαχή 
 ΤΓολλοι, omg Tt (if Η).— bef tW. (om 15. 27- 29. 36. 180 ThU) ins και AD 13. 40 ν 
 copt: ijv £λλϊ)ί'ω)' arm.— rec πολ. πλ. with GH &c Chr, Thl' Oec : txt ABDE al 13. 38. 
 103. 106. 113. 137. 180 lect 12 arm Chr-text Thl-.— Kra γυναίκες των πρ. D: και 
 των ττρ. 78'. — 5. rec ζηλωσαντίς δί οι απιιθονντίς ιουδαίοι και ττροςΚαβομίνυι, with a 
 few mss (apnv) Chr-text Oec (see below) : Ζιιλωσαντις δ( οι (ουΡαιοι και ττρηςλ. ABE 
 (see below) 15. 18. 25. 27. 29. 33. 34. 36. 40. C6. 81. 105 ν Syr ar-erp copt sah a;th arm : 
 01 δί απειΟυυντίς ιυνδ. συΐ'στρ(•φα}>τίς D : ττροςλ. δε οι ιονδ. οι ατηιθουντίς GH all 
 (abt 55, Tischendorf) ar-})ol slav (ms) Chr (coram, oi απ. ιονδ.) ThP (om 01, as does 1) : 
 ζηλωσαΐ'Τίς προςλαβομει^οι (omg all the rest) 66 ieth : προςλα/^ομίΓοι δε οι αττειθ. ιονδ. 
 38: ζηλωσαΐ'τες δε οι ιονδ. κ. ττροςλαβομενοι οι απειθουντες 137 '• ζηΧωτ. δε οι ιονδ. κ. 
 ττροςκλ. Των 96 : see other varr in Scholz : txt 142. (// appears evident that the reading 
 in the text has been the source of all these varr. 01 ιουο. seemed strange on account of 
 ver 4, and consequently αττειθονντις was inserted, or ot απειθ. added: ζηλωσαντες 
 being similarly, or, in addition, interpolated, to fvrnish a motive for their conduct. 
 Then the whole was combined and variously arranged by copyists.) — rec τινας ανδοας 
 with D(bef των oy.)GH al : txt ABE 38. 96. 113. 180 ν sah {nv. om all) ThF 
 
 Macedonia. It is now called Emboli. honour of his wife Thessalonica, sister of 
 
 ΆίΓολλωνίαν] Its situation is unknown, Alexander the Great. So Strabo, lib. vii. 
 
 but was evidently (see the distances above excerpt. 10 : who, ib. excerpt. 3, calls it 
 
 given) inland, not quite half-way from Am- θεσσαλονικεία. It was made a free city 
 
 phipolis to Thessalonica, where the road after the battle of Philippi : and every thing 
 
 crosses from the Strymonic to the Thermaic in this narrative is consistent with the pri- 
 
 gulf. Leake saw some ruins at about the vileges and state of an nrbs libera. We 
 
 right spot, but did not visit them: and read of its 5i/juoc ver. 5, and its πολιτάρχαι 
 
 Cousinery mentions seeing, on an opposite ver. 6 : not, as at the Roman colony of 
 
 hill, the village of Polina. Pliny mentions Philippi, of ρα/3θοϋγοι (lictors), and στρατ- 
 
 it (N. H. iv. 10), ' regio Mygdoniae sub- ijyoi (duumviri), ch. xvi. 20, 21. — It has 
 
 jacens, in qua recedentes a mare ApoUonia, ever been an important and jjopulous city, 
 
 Arethusa.' It must not be confounded with a and still continues such (pop. 70,000), being 
 
 better known ApoUonia near Dyrrhachium, the second city in European Turkey, under 
 
 on the western coast, also on th(! Via Egiiatia. the slightly corrupted namii of Saloniki. For 
 
 See C. and II. p. 344. (»€σσα\ονίκην] a notice of the cliurcli tlicre, see Prolciig. to 
 
 At this time the capital of the provintu• Ma- first Ep. to thcTIicssalonians. ή συναγ ] 
 
 cedonia, and the residence of the proconsul The article is in all probability genuine : 
 
 (Mac. had been an imperial, but was now a implying that there was no other synagogue 
 
 senatorial province). Its former names were; for the towns lately travcrsi-d : and evincing 
 
 Emathia, Halia, and Therma: it received the same minute ac(|uaintancc with tiic |)e- 
 
 its name of Thessalonica from Cassander, culiarities of this district as our luirrativo 
 
 on his rebuilding and embellishing it, in has shewn since the arrival at Neapolis.
 
 172 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XVII. 
 
 ραιων ανοοας τινας πονηρούς και ογΑοττοιησαΐ'τες abd 
 "tf"'N^iufm' ft /οουρουΐ' τί/ν 7Γθλ/ί', ετΓίσταντξς τε τρ oi/c/ct Ιάσονος 
 ε^,ί}τουι> ^ αυτούς a-yayuv εις τον όημον' μιι ευροντες 
 δε αυτούς ' έσυραν τον Ιάσονα και τινας α^εΧφους έττι 
 τους 7Γ0Λΐταο\ας, Ρυωντες οτι οι 
 
 C hrte only f. 
 dM^tt. viii. 23. 
 
 : ch. vi. 12. 
 
 (absol.) Jer. 
 
 xxi. 2. 
 I-Lukevi. 
 
 111. Euod. ii. 
 
 g -Matt. X. 18. 
 
 Mark xJii. II. 
 
 Luke iv. 21'. 
 
 John xviii. 
 
 28. ch. T.27 
 
 al. 
 hrh. Tiii. 3 
 
 rrlV. 
 i here only t. 
 
 ποΛιταρ^ας, βοωντες οτι 
 '" αναστατωσαντες " ούτοι και ενθαοε τταρεισιν, 
 δε'δεκται Ιάσων' και ούτοι πάντες ^ απέναντι 
 
 Καίσαρος πράσσουσιν, βασιΧεα λε 
 
 Ti}v οικουμενην 
 
 7 
 
 ους 
 των 
 
 υτΓΟ- 
 
 '' oo-y- 
 
 ίΐσαρος πράσσουσιν, 
 
 ■γοντες έτερον 
 
 7 ά\. 1 — ch.xxiv. ."i. m ch. xxi. S8. GhI. v. 12. L. P.t Pan. 
 
 II ch. ix. 20 reli'. ο Luke x. 38. xix, (>. James ii. 2.') onl}'. Tobit vu. 8. 
 
 q ch. xvi.4reff. r — ch. i.2Ual. 
 
 I Kin^s X. 1 
 
 {ανίρ. om Chr-comni). — aft ττονηρ. ins απίίθησαΐ'πς Ε 
 
 ματων 
 
 kch 
 
 •. reailg 
 here only 
 
 και οχ\οπ. om D seth ar-erp : 
 ailJ Kctr avTo)v 27• 2!). 09. 105. 106. — ίθορνβονσαν D. — και επιητ. {alteration of the 
 characteristic rt) ABDE 42. 05. 73. 78. 105. 133. 180 all Thl-' : alii aliter : txt GH 
 most niss Clir Thl' Oec— ιασωνος ADE 42. 98. 101. 104. 180 all Thl-' and (but not A) 
 in vv 6, 9: του ιασωνος 9fj : του ιασονος 142. — for ayayttv, προαγαγαν AH 'oG. 40, 
 i;9. 80. 180 V (/iroducere) Chr (msSj) : ττροςαγαγ, Ε 137: (tvayuy. G 11: (ζαγαγ. 
 D-gr 104 copt sah al : txt Η most mss Chr Thl Oec (all the varr are merely attempts to 
 specify ayay. more closely). — 6. rec tavpov, with AB(e sil)GH &c : t.xt DE 45. 99. 
 104. 105. 137 Chr. — τον om ABD 137 {as unnecessary ; or from similarity of endings, 
 -pov τον) : ins EGH mss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec. — ιασωνα DE al Thl- {ισωνηρ D'). 
 — aft τινας Ε Bed-gr add άλλους: ττολλους lect 5: τους εκίΐ Syr ar-erp. — βοώντας 
 A al : βοωντίς και λβγοντις D. — οι om 113. 137• — ''»?»' οικ. ολην 180: urhem v. — 
 ούτοι εισιν D. — 7. αποδ(^ίκται 90. — rec πραττ., with Β (e sil) al ThP : txt ADEGH 
 1. 38. 80. 105. 177 (al?) lect 12 Chr Oec ThW— έτερον λέγοντες είναι A 13. 38. 73. 
 113. 180 ν syr Chr (text): ετ. ει. Xsy. Β: λεγ. ειν. ετ. Ε: είναι om 45. 57'. 
 
 2. κατά τ. €ΐωθ.] See marg. reff. in 
 Ε. V. — Paul was most probably suffering 
 still from his ' shameful treatment ' at Phi- 
 lippi, 1 Thess. ii. 2. δΐ€λ€γ.] ' argued,' 
 
 see reff. a-irb τ. νραψ. is best taken 
 
 with SieXey., not with διανοίγων : see reff. 
 
 3. OTi ovTOS . . . . ] See examples of 
 the change of construction, ch. i. 4 ; xxiii. 22. 
 Luke V. 14. — The rendering is, not as E. V., 
 ' that this Jesns, tvhom I preach unto yon, 
 is Christ:' but 'that Jesus, whom I 
 preach unto you is oixos ό χριστός, 
 this Christ,' viz. the Christ whom ϊΰει 
 ■παθ. κ. άναστ. This is ne(!essary, both on 
 account of the grammar and the sense. 
 Meyer's rendering is possible, but not 
 so good : ' that this is the Christ, viz. 
 Jesus, whom I preach unto you.' — Even 
 the particularity of this τταθείν κ. άνα- 
 στηναι is reproduced in 1 Thess. iv. 14. 
 
 4. '7Γρος€κληρώθ.] 'were added' (as 
 if by lot, that being determined by God, who 
 gave them the Holy Spirit of adoption : ος 
 και ενεργείται ίν νμϊν τοις πκττεΰουηιν, 
 1 Thess. ii. 13) to the great family of which 
 Paul and Silas were members. — The sense 
 is passive, not middle. The word is not 
 uncommon in Philo. σββ. Ελλ.] See 
 ch. xiii. 43 al. — The aptitude of tvomen for 
 the reception of the Gospel several times 
 appears in this book,— see above, ch. xvi. 
 13 ff., and below, vv. 12. 34. 5. •π-ρο5- 
 λαβ.] 'Having taken to them,' as their 
 accomplices, to assist them in the όχλοττοιί)- 
 
 σαι which follows. αγοραίων] Such 
 
 men as Aristophanes calls πονηρός κάξ 
 αγοράς, — Demosthenes, περίτριμμα αγο- 
 ράς, — Xenophon, τον άγορα'ιον o\\ov, — 
 Plutarch, αγοραίους και ζνιαμ'ενους ΰχλον 
 σνναγαγεΊν : see many other instances in 
 Wetstein, who mentions the modern ' ca- 
 naille' (canalicolce). Cicero calls them ' sub- 
 rostrani :' Plautus, ' subbasilicani.' These 
 may be alluded to in οι Ίΰιυι συμψυλεταί, 
 1 Thess. ii. 14. (See note on αγοραίοι, 
 ch. xix. 38.) €Τ7ΐστ., ' having fallen 
 
 upon,' ' beset.' Ιάσονος] With whom 
 
 (ver. 7) Paul and Silas lodged. He ap- 
 pears, perhaps (.'), again with Paul at 
 Corinth, Rom. xvi. 21, but did not accom- 
 pany him into Asia, ch. xx. 4. 6. 
 ΊΓολιτάρχας] The following inscription, 
 found on an arch at Thessalonica, is given 
 from Boeckh, No. 1967, in C. and H. i. 359: 
 ■πυΧειταρχουντωΐ' Σωσίπατρου του Κλίο- 
 ττατρας και Αουκιον Ποιτιου Σεκουνδον 
 ΤΙονβλιου Φληουιον Σαβεινον Δημητριυν 
 του Φαυστου Δημήτριου τον Νικοττολίως 
 Ζωιλου τουΏαρμενιωνος του και Μενισκου 
 Γαιου Αγι\\ηιου Ιίοτειτον .... Here 
 we have this very title applied to the Thes- 
 salonian magistrates, shewing the exact ac- 
 curacy of our narrative : and, curiously 
 enough, we have three of the names wliicli 
 occur here, or in the Epistles, as companions 
 of Paul: viz. Sosipater {of Beroea, Rom. 
 xvi. 21, see also Acts xx. 4) ; Secundus {of 
 Thessalonica, ch. xx. 4); and Gains {the
 
 6—11. 
 
 πρλ:ξ:εις αποστολών. 
 
 173 
 
 tivai Ιησουν. '^ trcioa^av δε τοι> ο\\ον και τους ' ττολιτ- ""'^•is• 
 
 ■> „ Α, =" S — here on 
 
 t~ch.xvi.3nal. 
 uch.r. 19. χ τι. 
 
 9. Hrrod. i. 
 
 Hi, in It. 
 V ch. xiii. 4 
 
 only. Gen. 
 
 xxir. ."14, 5(5. 
 w Hbsol., Lnke 
 
 xii. fil refl•. 
 
 νομενοι 
 
 11 y 
 
 ούτοι δε 
 
 αρ-^ας ακουοντας ταύτα, και λαβόιτες το ^ iKauov τταρα 
 τον ΙασοίΌς και των λοιπών ' απέλυσαν αυτούς. οι 
 
 οε αοίΧφοι ευθέως " ^ια της νυκτός ^ ί^ίττίμφαν τυν τε 
 Παυλον και τοί' Έ,ιΧαν εις Βεροιπν, οιτινες ^^ Trapaye- 
 
 V ν Γ / _ , ' ' ch. ix.39. 
 
 την συναγωγην * απτ}εσαν των Ιουδαίων. ^Es^j°'i'jj 
 ■ήσαν ^ ευνίνεστβοοι των εν θεσσαλονίκη, ycii 
 
 ' •> c' ret 
 
 zLnkesix. 12. 1 Cor. i. ifi. =hereonlj 
 
 itvni ιησ. om 42' : txt DGH most mss vss Chr (comm) Thl' Oec. — 8. for τον οχ\., την 
 ■πολιν Ε. — και (ταραζίν {-ζαν ά) τους ττολ. και τον οχλ. ακονσαντις (-τα D-) ταυ. D : 
 και .... -αυτά om 42. — 9. ιασωνος DE al Thl- (α* iw νν 5, 6 β/). — 10. ευθ. δια τ. νυκτ. 
 om Α. — Γ»/ς om BD 13. 7•"^• 180 al Petr-alex ΎΙιΙ- (as in ch xvi. f)) : ins EGH most mss 
 Chr Thl' Oec— Γ£ om D 3. 32. 42. 57- 95' sah.— /Sioooiaj^ 43. 99. 104. 103. 106. 113. 
 137 Oec Thl' : txt AB(e sil)DEGH vss (appv) Chr Thl-. — rec των ίουϋηιωΐ' απηεσαν 
 {correction of order), with ABD &c ν ThP : txt Ε(ίίς7/ίσαΐ' Ε vss)GH 38. 42. 57. 78. 
 80. 95. 9G. 98. 113. 137. 177 vss (but many vss απ. εις τ. σ. τ. ιου5.) Chr Oec Thl'. 
 — των ιουδ. om 06. — 11. ευγενείς D-gr. — των αλλοιν των 32, 42. 57- — εν τη θεσσ. D. — ■ 
 
 is. 20 
 
 retf. 
 (2 Mucc. χ. 13.) 
 
 Macedonian, note, ch. χίχ. 29). την 
 
 οίκ. άναστ ] The words presuppose some 
 rumour of Christianity and its spread having 
 before reached the inhabitants of Thessa- 
 lonica. 7. ούτοι iravres] ' All these 
 
 people,' i.e. Christians, wherever found. 
 A wider acquaintance is shewn, or at least 
 assumed, with the belief of Christians, than 
 extended merely to Jason and his friends. 
 άττενοντι . . ιτράσσ•.] Not ' do this in 
 the face of the decrees,' which would require 
 τοϋτο with ττράσσ., but as E. V. The 
 δόγματα in this case would be the Julian 
 'leges majestatis.' βασιλέα, κ.-. λ.] 
 
 This false charge seems to have been founded 
 on Paul's preaching much at Thessalonica 
 concerning the kingdom of Christ. This 
 appears again and again in his two Epistles : 
 seelThess. i. 10; ii. 19; iii. 13;iv. 13— 18; 
 V. 1,2. 2 Thess. i. 5. 7—10 ; ii. 1— 12 : and 
 particularly 2 Thess. ii. 5, where he refers 
 to his having often told them of these things, 
 viz. the course, and destruction of Anti- 
 christ, by whom these Jews might perhaps 
 misrepresent Paul as designating Csesar. 
 9. λαβόντίς το ίκανόν] ' Satisda- 
 tione accepta ;' either by sureties, or by a 
 surn of money, or both. They bound over 
 Jason and the rest (τινας άίελφούς, ver. 6) 
 to take care that no more trouble was given 
 by these men : in accordance with which 
 security they sent them away, — and by 
 night, to avoid the notice of the όχλος•. 
 10.] It does not follow, because 
 Tiraotheus is not mentioned here, that 
 therefore he did not accompany, or at all 
 events follow, Paul and Silas to Beroea. He 
 has never been mentioned since he joined 
 Paul's company at Lystra. The very inter- 
 mitted and occasional notices of Paul's com- 
 panions in this journey should be a caution 
 against rash hypotheses. The general cha- 
 
 racter of the narrative seems to be, that 
 where Paul, or Paul and Silas, are alone or 
 principally concerned, all mention of the 
 rest is suspended, and sometimes so com- 
 pletely as to make it appear as if they were 
 absent : then, at some turn of events, they 
 appear again, having in some cases been 
 really present all the time. I believe Timo- 
 theus to have been with them at Thessalo- 
 nica the first time, because it does not seem 
 probable that Paul would have sent to thera 
 one to confirm and exhort them concerning 
 their faith (1 Thess. iii. 2) who had not known 
 them before, especially as he then had Silas 
 with him. — And this is confirmed by both 
 the Epp. to the Thessalonians, which are 
 from Paul, Silvanus, and Timotheus. From 
 these Epistles we learn that, during his resi- 
 dence among them, Paul worked with his 
 own hands (1 Thess. i. 9. 2 Thess. iii. 8) to 
 maintain himself: and from Phil. iv. 15, IG, 
 that the Philippians sent su]iplies more 
 than once towards his maintenance. Both 
 these facts, especially the last, seeing that 
 the distance from Philippi was 100 Roman 
 miles, make it very improbable that his 
 stay was so short as from three to four 
 weeks : nor is this implied in the text : 
 much time may have elapsed while the 
 ττληθος πολύ of ver. 4 were joining Paul and 
 Silas. See further in Prolegg. to 1 Thess., 
 vol. iii. Bepoiav] According to the 
 
 Antonine Itinerary 61, according to the Peu- 
 tinger Table, 57 Roman miles (S. \V.) from 
 Thessalonica. — Lleroea was not far from 
 Pella, in Macedonia Tertia, Liv. xlv. 30, at 
 the foot of Mt. Bermius. It was afterwards 
 called Irenopolis, and now Kara Feria, or 
 Verria, and is a city of the second rank in 
 Euro])ean Turkey, containing from 15,000 
 to 20,000 souls. (Winer, RWli. C. and 11.) 
 W'etstein quotes a remarkable illustration
 
 174 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λί2Ν. 
 
 XVII. 
 
 oiTivtg 
 το καθ 
 
 fOtsOl'TO TO»' 
 
 ijjUipav 
 
 a ch. X. 41, 47 
 
 al. 
 b(^h. viii. 14 
 
 reft". 
 c — M«rk iii.5. - 
 
 1 chroii. ταύτα 
 
 xxix. •22. , _ • r>\ Λ '<> 
 
 (l2Cor.viii.ll, ^Q, T(uV LA/ViJJ'iOWV 
 
 λόγον '^ μίτα ττασης 
 
 g 
 
 ουτωΓ. 
 
 ι•: 
 
 la, 1!'. ix. 2 
 
 onlyt• Sir. 
 
 xlv. 23. 
 e Luke xi. 3. 
 
 xix. 47. 
 (—1 Cor. X. 25, 
 
 αΐ'δ^ων 
 
 ολί" 
 
 ουκ oAiyni. *" ως 
 ΟίσσαΧονίκης ^iovhaioi οτι και 
 
 προθυμίας, 
 
 ανακρίνοντας τας " "γραφας, ει ' ένοι 
 
 πολλοί μίν ονν it, αυτών ίττίστανσαν, 
 
 των ' ίυσγημονων και 
 
 iyvωσav οι αττυ της 
 
 ■γυναικών 
 
 13/.. δέ 
 
 Β 
 
 ττ) DEjOotfi κατη-γ-γίλη 
 
 ελι 
 
 XX. 12.'^'"'''' ύπο τοϋ Παύλου ο λόγος του θεού, 7Ϊλθοΐ' kukh 
 
 σολευ- 
 
 ver. 2r<ff. ' " \ 14 ' Ω' S•^ ' ^ Π "^ ο • ^' 
 
 1 reft, οντες τους ογλους. ευσεως οε TOTt τον ΙΙαυΑον tt,- 
 
 i ch. xiii.BO 
 
 rell. 
 kch.xii.iareff. 
 
 απίστίίΧαν ol α^ίΧφοι ττορεύεσθοι '^ ως εττί τη»' θάλασσαν, 
 
 icli. iv. 2. xiii. π f / / " -ν'Λ > ' rri Ά » - 
 
 5 λι. 1 Cor. xi. ' υττεμείρευ τε ο τε 2<ιΛας καί ο Ιιμοσεος εκεί. 
 
 2(! al. L. P.t. '^ ^ (~ ^ 
 
 m = ch. ii. 25. 2 Thcs.s. ii. 2. 1 Mace. vi. 8. ο ch. vii. 12 reft'. ρ for reft', see note. 
 
 q — Luke ii. 43. Jos. Antt. vi. 5. 2. 
 
 μ(Τ(ΐ παρρησίας E-gr. — το om (as unnecessary) ADE 13. 137 all: ins B(e sil)GH most 
 mss ChroThlOec. — {χ;{ίϋΈ38. 105. 180alThl' Oec: ίχοην&Ι. — \2. ηΐ'ΐς μίν ονν αυτών 
 D. — aft ίΤΓίστ. D \',VJ add τινίς St ηπιστησαν. — for ίΚΧην. to oXiyoi, — D' has ιΧληνων 
 και των ίνσχ7]μονων ai'Spfg κ. γυναικίς ικανοί ιπισηυσαν : GrcECortim et non placen- 
 tinm {complacentium, see on ver 34) et viri et mulieres plures crediderunt d. — ολίγων 
 OG. 142.-^13. της om D'•* al. — on (ins ο D^) λογ. (ins του Ό-) Qtov κατη-^γ. ας βίροιαν 
 και (om D^) ίπισηνσαν και ηΧθον ίΐς αυτήν {εις αυ. om D-) D. — κακασε 40. 99 al. — 
 aft σηλινοντις, ins και ταρασσοντίς ABD (τασσονης D') 13. 15. 18. 31. 40. 73. 103. 
 10.J. 137. 180 all ν syrr ar-erp copt (sah ταρ. και bef σαλ.) arm {gloss from ver 8, in- 
 serted into the text from the margin, and combined with σαλ.) : txt EGH most mss 
 (appy) Beth ar-pol slav Chr Thl Oec Cassiod. — at end, D Syr ar-erp add ου δαΧιμττανον, 
 — 14. for ενθ. δε τοτ. -ον, — rov μεν ουν D Syr ar-erp : statimque ά. — rort om 137 sah. 
 —rov τε 180.— 01 αδ. εζαττ. απελθειν Ώ.—εως επι τ. θαλ. ΑΒ (ως om D 3. 4. 95•. 9G. 104. 
 180 Syr ar-erp sah) Ε 13. 25. 27. 40. G6-. 81. 105: ad mare versus ά. {misunder- 
 standings of ως, — see note): txt GH most mss (appy) Chr Thl Oec — rec υττεμίνον, 
 with GH &c Chr Oec Thl' : νπεμηναν Β 13. 133 : απέμειναν Ε: επέμειναν al Thdrt 
 Thl- (corrections to suit constr) : txt AD 27 (40 επεμ.) 137 Syr sah. — rec υπ. δε (cor- 
 rection of characteristic τε, and to avoid recurrence), with DGH &c vss Chr Thdrt al: 
 
 from Cicero in Pisonem, c. 26: — 'Thessa- 
 lonicam omnibus inscientibus noctuque ve- 
 nisti, qui cum concentum plorantium et 
 tempestatem querelarum ferre non posses, 
 in oppidum devium Berceam profugisti.' 
 
 11. €{ιγενεα•τεροι] Theophyl. and 
 Oec. explain it by ίπιεικ'ιστεροι, but this is 
 rather its result, than its meaning : — ' more 
 noble' is our best word for it; — of nobler 
 disposition ; — stirred up, not to envy, but 
 to enquiry. ταϊτα] viz. the doctrine 
 
 of ver. 3, which Paul and Silas preached 
 here also. 12.] The designation con- 
 
 veyed in 'ΈΧΚηνίδων is to be supplied be- 
 fore ανδρών also. So εις πασαν πόΧιν 
 κ. τόπον, Luke χ. 1. See Winer, § 35. 2. 
 
 13.] οί άττο τ. Θ., as Ε. V., ' of 
 Thessalonica.' No inference that they came 
 from Thess. can be drawn from this expres- 
 sion : but it is asserted below. See Heb. 
 xiii. 24. ηλθον κάκεΐ σαλ.] Not, as 
 
 Ε. v., * they came thither also, and stirred 
 up .... ' which destroys the force of the 
 sentence : but ' they came, and stirred up 
 there also ....:' no journey having been 
 related of them before, but a precisely simi- 
 lar act of exciting the people. — From the 
 distance, some time must have elapsed before 
 
 this could take place : and that some time 
 did elapse, we may gather from 1 Thess. 
 ii. 18, where Paul relates that he made se- 
 veral attempts to revisit the Thessalonians 
 Cwhich could be only during his stay at 
 Bercea, as he left the neighbourhood alto- 
 gether when he left that town), but was 
 hindered. 14. ώς «ττι τ. θ.] The va- 
 
 rious readings seem to have arisen from not 
 understanding ώς, — which cannot, here or 
 any where else, be redundant (as De Dieu, 
 Raphel, Wolf, Heinrichs, &c.) : nor can it 
 well here signify that his going, ' as if to 
 the sea,' was only a feint, to deceive his 
 enemies (as Beza, Piscator, Grot., Olsh., 
 Neander, &c.) : for, as there is no mention 
 of any land journey, or places passed through 
 on his way to Athens, there can be little 
 doubt that he did really go by sea. But 
 ως ίπί τ. θ. I believe simply to indicate the 
 direction in which the Beroean brethren 
 sent him forth, ω'ς is used thus before 
 participles and prepositions, without any 
 assignable reference to its (more usual) sub- 
 jective reference in such a connexion. Thus 
 Hermann on Soph. Philoct. 58, says ' cogi- 
 tationem significat particula ώς. Sed multo 
 usu factum est, ut aliquando etiam ibi usur- 
 
 ABD 
 EGII
 
 12-17. 
 
 πρλ;ξ;εις αποστολών. 
 
 175 
 
 15 ο; δέ 
 
 Αθηνών, και 
 
 καθιστάΐ'οντίς τον Παΰλον i]yayov ^ εως 
 ' λοβοΐ'τες ' ΐντοΧι^ν προς τον Σιλαι^ και 
 
 r (furni)liere 
 only, seenote. 
 = 2 Chron. 
 
 3 = Luke ii. JS. 
 ch. sxiii. 23. 
 t John X. 18. 
 
 Col. 
 
 , 10. 
 
 2 John 4. 
 nch. xiii.42 
 
 rrft•. 
 V John V. 3. 
 
 1 Cor. xi. 33 
 
 all 
 w I Cor. xiii. 5 
 
 only, Dcat. 
 
 ix. 18. 
 
 Τιμοθεον, 'ίνα ως τάγ^ιστα εΧθωσιν προς αυτόν, " εί;ΐ}εσαν. 
 ^^ έί' δε τα^ς Αθήναις ^ εκ'δε^^ομεΐΌυ αυτούς του Παύλου, 
 ^'' παρω^ννετο το ^ πνεϋμα αυτού εν αυτω ^ θεωροΰντος 
 ^ κατε'ι^ωΧον ουσαν την ττολίΐ'. ' ^ οιεΧε-γετο μεν ούν εν 
 TTJ συί^αγωγτ) τοις Ιουδοίοις και τοις σεβομενοις, και 
 εν T-g ayopa κατά πασαν ημεραν ττρος τους παρατυγ- x = Lukei.47. 
 
 21. Rom. i. 0. viii. 16. χϋ. 11. 1 Cor. ii. 11. v. 3, 4. xir. 14, &c. Paul principally. y w. particip., ch. 
 
 xxviii.fi. zhereonlyt. όια τόττωι/ /ίαταΛ(ί ι-όρωι/, Diod. Sic. xvi. 31. ν^ανίας naTulSoaTpvxoi, 
 
 Eur. Pho?n. 146. a vcr. 2 refl'. b =- ch. xiii. 43 reff. c ch. xiii.27 reff. d here only. w. dat., 
 
 Jo.s. Antt. ii. 9. 5. absol., Xen Apol. S icr. ii. 
 
 txt ABE all aeth syr ar-pol ThP : add fica H. — τε (2nd) om D sail. — 15. rec καθιστων- 
 Τίς {corrn of unusual form), with D-EGH &c : txt ABD {καταστανονηςΏ^) : αττο- 
 καθιστωιτις 180. — rec aft ?jy., ins αυτόν {supplementary adchi), with EGH &c vss Chr 
 al: om ABD 13. U^. 25. 27. 21). 31. 34. m. 105. 137 v-ms tol al ThP.— aft αθί/ΐ'., 
 D reads Trapi]\Qtv Ct την θίσσηΧιαν (κωΧυΘη yap (ΐς αυτούς κ>;ρυξθ£ τοί' λογοί'• λα/3. 
 δ(. — for ίΐ'Γολ., (πιστολην E-gr Syr ar-erp : add τταρα παυλον D : αττ αυτυυ Ε Syr ar- 
 erp arm. — τον τιμ. Β 13. 95. 180. — όπως εν ταχει D. — εξιεσαν Η 13 ThF. — 16. αυτού 
 D' 96. — το cm Ό^.—εαυτω 32. G9 lect 5 Τΐιί^ Aug. — rec θιωρουντι {corrn to agree 
 ivith αυτω. This is much more prob than that, as Meyer suspects, αυτω should have 
 been altered to the yen to suit the gen absol before), with DGH al Chrj ThP Oec : txt 
 ABE 13. 15. 18. 25. 27. 29. 3G. 40. «9. 73. 137. 180 al lectt Chrj Thdrt Euthal ThP.— 
 17. μεν om 73.— και τοις f j' τη D 137 sah (copt) syr-marg. — ττρος om 177'• — παρατυ- 
 
 Άθηνών] See a long and interesting de- 
 
 paretur, ubi non opus esset respici id, quod 
 quis in mente haberet.' We have the same 
 expression in Pausan. ii. 25, καταβάντων 
 dt (the walls of Tyrius) ώς ini θάλασσαν, 
 ενταύθα οι θάλαμοι των ΠροίΓου θυγατέ• 
 ρων f ισύ',— and Diod. Sic. xiv. 49, κίλεύσας 
 κατά τάχος λάθρα πλείν ιος ΐπΐ Έ,νρακο- 
 σίονς, — and Polyb. passim in Wetst., — e. g. 
 καθήκονσην {την Σελουκειαΐ') ώς ίττί θά- 
 λασσαν, ν. 59, — and with the same signifi- 
 cation. Where he embarked for Athens, is 
 not said : probably (C. and H.) at Dium, 
 near the base of Mt. Olympus, to which 
 two roads from Beroea are marked in the 
 ancient tables. 15. καθιστ.] So Odyss. 
 
 xiii. 274, τους μ' εκίλευσα ΥΙΰλονοε κατα- 
 στήσαι και εφίσσαι, — and Arrian, Ind. 
 xxvii. 1, κατάστησαν αντονς μέχρι Καρ- 
 μανίας. — Who these were is not said. — 
 The course of Timotheus appears to have 
 been, as far as we can follow it from the 
 slight notices given, as follows : — when Paul 
 departed from Beroea, not having been able 
 to revisit Thessalonica as he wished ( 1 Thess. 
 i. 18), he sent Timotheus (from Beroea, not 
 from Athens) to exhort and confirm the 
 Thessalonians, and determined to be left 
 (see note on 1 Thess. ii. 1) at Athens alone, 
 Silas meanwhile remaining to carry on the 
 work at Beroea. Then Paul, on his arrival 
 at Athens, sends (by his conductors, who 
 returned) this message to both, to come to 
 him as soon as possible. They did so, and 
 found him (ch. xviii. 5) at Corinth. See 
 Prolegg. to 1 Thess., vol. iii. 
 
 scription of the then state of Athens, its 
 buildings, &c., in C. and H. chap. x. ; 
 and Lewin, i. pp. 2G8 ff. It was &free city. 
 Strabo (ix. 1) gives an epitome of its for- 
 tunes from the Roman conquest nearly to 
 this time: 'PajjunToi tV ovv τταραλαβόντες 
 αντονς ^ημοκρατουμίνονς, ίφΰληξαν την 
 αϋτοΐ'ομίαν αΰτοΊς κ. την ίλενθερΊαν. 
 ετηττεσών δ' 6 Μιθριύατικος πόλεμος, τυ- 
 ράννους αίιτοίς κατίστησεν, ονς ό βασι- 
 λενς εβούλετο' τον 5' ίσχύσαντα μάλιστα 
 τον Άριστίωνα, κ. ταΰτην βιασάμινον 
 την ττόλιν. εκ ττολιορκίας ΐλώι/ Σύλλας, 
 ό των 'Ρω^ιαίωΐ' ήρεμων, εκήλασε' tiJ πά- 
 λει Γε συγγνώμην ϊνειμε' και μέχρι νυν 
 εν ελενθερίίΐ τε εστί κ. τιμι) παρά τοΙς 
 'Ρωμαίοις. See also Tacit. Ann. ii. 53. 
 
 16. κατείδωλον] This άπαξ, λεγό- 
 μενον is formed after the analogy of κατ- 
 άμπελος, κάθυορος, &.c. See also reff. — The 
 multitude of statues and temples to the gods 
 in Athens is celebrated with honour by classic 
 writers of other nations, and with pride by 
 their own. A long list of passages is given 
 in Wetstein. The strongest perhaps is from 
 Xen. de Repub. Ath., who calls Athens ολ;; 
 βωμός, ολη θνμα θεοΊς και ανάθημα. 
 17.] The οϋν (as De W. remarks against 
 Meyer and Schneckenburger) does not ne- 
 cessarily give the consequence of wliat has 
 been stated in ver. 10, but only continues 
 the narration. See above on ch. xi. 19. 
 
 €v τη αγορά] Strabo (χ. 1 ) speak- 
 ing of the Erctrialis in Euboea says that
 
 170 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 χνπ. 
 
 Μ = licreonly. 
 (Luke xiv. 
 
 18 
 
 δέ 
 
 χαΐ'οντας* ^° τινίς όε και των 
 V.\o"um, ' φι^οσυφωΐ' σννίβαΧΧον αυτω. 
 
 Έ 
 
 '^OKtl 
 
 ίολο" 
 
 for 
 
 KUTityy 
 ι 
 
 ούτος 
 ίλευς 
 
 7Γΐκ:ου^ειων και ^τοικων 
 
 και ηνες έλεγαν Tt αν 
 
 \iyeiv ; οι δε ^ ΞεΊ^ων 
 
 ΟΤΙ τον Ιησουν 
 ' " 19 πι ' 
 
 ., Matt.xxii.30. Lake 
 ix. 27. Joclii. U. 
 
 ABD 
 ECiH 
 
 Εγε 
 είΐ'αι' 
 
 tviiyyeAiL,eTO αυτοις. 
 
 Eiir. Iph, e ni\ 
 
 Aiii. s3(i. ϋεΛοι 
 
 e = cli.xiv. 13 . ^ , 
 
 fherl-nniyt. ()αψονιων 
 
 Demoslh.ieo. » ^ k ' ' 
 
 IS». και την αναστασιν 
 
 Ε — Matt. XXV. 
 35al. Liikf, liere only. h — lierc only. Xen. Mem. i. 1.1. 
 
 XX. 3ti. John xi. 24. 1 con.str., cli. τ. 42. viii. 35. xi. : 
 
 χοιτας D' : ίντυγχανοντας 100. — 18. rec om και (1st) (as unnecessary), with Ε &c 
 vss Thl Oec: ins ABDGII l.'J. 31. 38. 42. 09. «0. 105. 177 al lect 5 Syr ar-erp Chr.— 
 επικονπίΜν 180. — rec bef στο. ins των (for ttnijhrmiti/), with D : om A.BEGH 13. 180 
 ThP.— rec στω,κων, with (13.>) &c Chr al : t.xt A(B.')DEGH al copt sah ThF.— συΐ'- 
 ίβαλυν D'G 27. 38. 137 al lectt Chr Thl' Oec : 7Γρος•(/3αλλοί/ lOC-marg : 7r()ocf/3a\oi/ 
 177- — θ(\ΐ) D al : θ(\η 13: λίγην om 68. — rec ηυτ. ινηγγ. with some mss Oec: αιτ. 
 om EG all sah syr arm al Ciir : t.xt AEH ν al Thl 13. 25. 27- 29. GO. 73. 100. 105. 106. 
 133. 137 all Oec : αυτόν ίνηγγ. αντοις 14. 27. 2!). 68. 6ί). 105. 106 Syr ar erp : ort τον 
 .... αυτοις om D. (The van• have principally been produced by αυτόν being inserted 
 after αναστασιν, it being imagined that the resurr 0/' Jesus was intended. Hence the 
 origl αυτοις was transposed and altered, and, from αυτόν and αυτοις being alternately 
 erased, finally disappeared altogether. So Meyer.) — 19. D 137 syr (but as far as ηνας") 
 
 some suppose them to have been named 
 άττό της Άθήντ^σιν Έριτρίας, η ιϋν ίστιν 
 ay ορά (as distinguishetl from the Cera- 
 micus, which was the old forum). It was 
 the space before the στοά ποικίλη, where 
 the Stoics held their ίιαλίξίΐς. 18. 
 
 'Ε•7Γΐκονρ€ίων] The Epicurean philosophy 
 was antagonistic to the gospel, as holding the 
 atomic theory in opposition to the creation 
 of matter, — the disconnexion of the Divi- 
 nity from the world and its affairs, in oppo- 
 sition to the idea of a ruling Providence, — 
 and the indissoluble union, and annihilation 
 together, of soul and body, as opposed to 
 the ho])e of eternal life, and indeed to all 
 spiritual religion whatever. They were the 
 materialists of the ancient world. — The 
 common idea attached to Epicureanism 
 must be discarded in our estimate of the 
 persons mentioned in our text. The sum- 
 mum bonum of the real Epicureans, far 
 from being a degraded and sensual pleasure, 
 was αταραξία of mind, based upon φρόνη- 
 σις, — perhaps tlie best estimate of the 
 highest good formed in the heathen world ; 
 — and their ethics were exceedingly strict. 
 But the abuse to which such a doctrine was 
 evidently liable, gave rise to a pseudo-Epi- 
 cureanism, which has generally passed cur- 
 rent for the real, and which amply illus- 
 trated the truth, that ' corruptio optimi est 
 pessiiTia.' — For their chimerical αταραξία, 
 Paul offered them την ίίοήνηΐ' την ντηρ- 
 έ-χηνσαν πάντα νουν, Phil. iv. 7• 
 Στοϊκών] So named from the στοά ποικίλη 
 (see above), founded by Zeno of Cittium 
 in the fourth century, B.C., but perhaps 
 more properly by Cleanthes and Chrysip- 
 pus in the third century B.C. Their philo- 
 sophy, while it approached the truth in 
 holding one supreme Governor of aU, com- 
 
 promised it, in allowing of any and all ways 
 of conceiving and worshipping Him (see 
 below, vv. 24, 25), — and contravened it, in 
 its pantheistic belief that all souls were 
 emanations of Him. In spirit it was di- 
 rectly opposed to the gospel, — holding the 
 independence of man on any being but him- 
 self, together with the subjection of God 
 and man alike to the stern laws of an in- 
 evitable fate. On the existence of the soul 
 after death their ideas were various : some 
 holding that all souls endure to the con- 
 flagration of all things, — others confining 
 this to the souls of good men, — and others 
 believing all souls to be reabsorbed into the 
 Divinity. By these tenets they would ob- 
 viously be placed in antagonism to the doc- 
 trines of a Saviour of the world and the re- 
 surrection, — and to placing the summum 
 bonum of man in abundance of that grace 
 which Iv άσΟΐΐ'ίία τίλεΐται, 2 Cor. xii. 9. 
 Tives eXtyov . . . . ol Se] These are 
 not to be taken as belonging the one to the 
 Epicureans, the other to the Stoics, — but 
 rather as describing two classes, common 
 perhaps to both schools, — the one of which 
 despised him and his sayings, and the other 
 were disposed to take a more serious view of 
 the matter, and charge him with bringing in 
 new deities. σττίρμολόγος] σπβρμο- 
 
 λόγος (ISog ΐστίν όρνιου λωβωμίνου τά 
 σπίρματα' ίζ ου οι 'Αθηναίοι σπίρμυλήγονς 
 ΐκάλουν τυνς πίρΐ ίμπόρια και αγοράς 
 ΰιατρίβοντας, dta το άναλίγίσθαι τά ϊκ 
 των φορτίω)' απορρέοντα, και διαζ-^ν εκ 
 τούτων. Eustath. ad Odyss. v. 490, where 
 Damm observes, σπερμυλογιΐν, ' verbum 
 recentiorum ; dicitur ίπ'ι των όλαζονενο- 
 μ'ίνων άμεβόδως επί μαθήμασιν ίκ τινών 
 παρακουσμάτων, si quis quid arripuit forte 
 ex disciplinis, eoque se imperite jactat.'
 
 18-21. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 Π7 
 
 αρομενοι τε αυτού επι τον Άραον πα-γον τ;γαγον 
 λέγοντες ώίυνάμίθα ^νωναι τις η ° καινή αυτή τ/ ύττό σοϋ 
 AoAoKMiVij ° διδαγτϊ ; ^^ ° ξενίζοι-τα 
 
 Λοαίθη ηνν •\/ν(,)νηι τι ην '' (ΗΧηι f' 
 
 «χη; 
 
 γαρ τ 
 εις τος ακοας ημών' βουλόμίθα οϋν -γνωναι τ'ι αν ^ θίΧοι 
 Αθηναίοι οε πάντες και οι ^ ίττι^ημοϋντίς 
 
 η Mark i. 27. 
 υ = 1 Pct.iv.4, 
 1:2 only t. 
 i Mace. ix. Θ. 
 , , Diod. Sic. xii. 
 
 ^ eicaepeic ^^, ofcor- 
 
 ' I fias.TUjfeH- 
 
 ταυτα εινοί. 
 
 Τί τί)9 
 ■€uJ9 ef- 
 
 7r\i)ffc^ τούν 
 ρ = here only. (Soph. Aj. 149.) q = ch. ii. 12. r ch. ii. 10 only f. 
 
 μετα Ss ημιρας τινας ίπιλαβ. αυτόν ηγαγ. {ηγον Α) αυτόν επι τον (om D' 137 ?) αρ'ον 
 (so also ΑΕ : άγριοι» G : apioirayoi' lect 12) παγ. πυνθανομενοι και λιγ. — for τί, ίε Β 
 13 sah. — ου ουν. i)(>^. ΙΟβ demid tol. — η (2nd) om BD. — απο σου D'. — λεγομένη Ε, 
 καΓογγίλλο//£ΐ'// D-gr Syr ar-erp aeth. — 20. for ειςφ., φέρεις D, σπεψεις Syr ar-erp. — 
 bef (D) or aft (E) ειςψ., ins ρήματα DE.— for η αν θε\., τίνα θέλει ΑΒ 13. 18. 25. 3G. 
 40. (ίΟ. 105. 180 sah (quce hac sint) {mistake in writing η ar; which iras the easier 
 on acct of the plural ταύτα) : τινι 137 : θελη 4. 13. G8 TbP : tst DEGH most mss ν 
 {quidnam velint hcec esse) al Chr Thl Oec. — ταύτα om Ε : ταυτ. θελ. 137• — 21. aft 
 ίτΓΐί. ins ffc αυτούς D-gr sah. — rec ευκαιρ. (corrn), with GH al Bas Chr Thl' : txt 
 ABDE 13. 9G. 104. 137 ThP Oec. — rec και ακ. {corni to avoid the aiikwardness of 
 
 ' babbler ' is the very best English word : 
 as both signifjang one ivho talks fluently to 
 no purpose, and hinting also that his talk 
 is not his oivn. ξένων δαιμ.] aOiictl 
 
 'Σωκράτης .... καινά δαιμόνια ίίςφέρων, 
 was one of the charges on which Athens 
 put to death her wisest son. — δαιμόνια is 
 not plural for singular, as Kuin. : nor 
 merely, though this is somewhat more pro- 
 bable, marks the category, as Meyer : nor 
 can it refer (Chrys., Theophyl., Oecum., 
 Hammond, Heinrichs) to Jesus and the 
 άνάστασις, mistaken for a goddess (a suffi- 
 cient answer to which strange idea is, that 
 ή άνάστασις is merely a statement in the 
 mouths of others, of the doctrine taught by 
 Paul, which he would hardly ever, if ever, spe- 
 cify by this word, — compare vv. 31 and 32): 
 but alludes (as De Wette) to the true God, 
 the God of the Jews, and Jesus Christ His 
 Son: the Creator of the world (ver. 24), 
 and the Man whom He hath appointed to 
 judge it, ver. 31. καταγγβλίύς] 
 
 Compare ver. 23, end : which is an express 
 answer to this charge. 19. έιτιλαβ.] 
 
 No violence is implied : see refF. Ιττι 
 
 τον "Apeiov ττάγον] There is no allusion 
 here to the court of Areiopagus, nor should 
 the words have been so rendered in E. V., — 
 especially as the same 'Αρείου πάγου below 
 (ver. 22) is translated ' 3iars' Hill.' We 
 have in the narrative 7io trace of any judi- 
 cial j)roceediny, but every thing to contra- 
 dict such a supposition. Paul merely 
 makes his speech, and, having satisfied the 
 curiosity of the multitude who came toge- 
 ther on Mars' Ilill, dcjiarts unhindered : — 
 ' they brought him up to the hill of 
 Mars.' — The following note is borrowed 
 from Mr. Humj)hry's Commentary : — ' It 
 might be expected that on the hill of Mars 
 the mind of the stranger would be im- 
 pressed with the magnificence of the reli- 
 Vor.. II. 
 
 gion which he sought to overthrow. The 
 temple of the Eumenides was immediately 
 below him : opposite, at the distance of 
 200 yards, was the Acropolis, which, being 
 entirely occupied by statues and temples, 
 was, to use the phrase of an ancient writer 
 (Aristides) άΐ'τ αναθήματος, as one great 
 offering to the gods. The Persians en- 
 camped on the Areiopagus when they be- 
 sieged the Acropolis (Herod, viii. 52) : 
 from the same place the Apostle makes his 
 first public attack on Paganism, of which 
 the Acropolis was the stronghold. Xerxes 
 in his fanaticism burnt the temples of 
 Greece (^Eschyl Pers. : Cic. de Leg. ii. 10). 
 Christianity advanced more meekly and 
 surely : and though the immediate effect of 
 the Apostle's sermon was not great, the 
 Parthenon in time became a Christian 
 church (Leake, Athens, p. 277)• Athens 
 ceased to be a κατείδωλος τζόλις, — and the 
 repugnance of the Greeks to images became 
 so great, as to be a principal cause of the 
 schism between the churches of the east 
 and west in the eighth century.' — The hill 
 of Mars was so called according to Paus. i. 
 28. 5, on ττρωΓος "Αρης ενταύθα ΐκ•ρίΟ)}. 
 It was on the west of the Acropolis. The 
 Areiopagus, the highest criminal court of 
 Athens, held its sittings there. To give any 
 account of it is beside the purpose, there 
 being no allusion to it in the test. Full 
 particulars may be found sub voce in 
 Smith's Diet, of Gr. and Rom. Antt. 
 
 δννάμ. γνών.] A com'teous method 
 of address (not ironical, as Kuin. and Stier). 
 
 21.] A remark of the narrator (as I 
 believe, Paul himself, see Prolegg. to Acts, 
 § 2. 13) as a comment on the καινή and 
 Κενίζοντα of the verse before. — εύκαιρω, 
 vaco. Gloss. Vet. It is not a clas.sic Attic 
 word : εΰκαιρείν οΰδε'ις είρηκί των πα- 
 λαιών, "Ελληνες £έ, Moeris. " σχολήν 
 Ν
 
 17S 
 
 nPASETS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 ΧΥΙΙ. 
 
 1 - Matt. V. 13. y / 
 I.ukeix. fc tiVOl 
 
 ηυκαΐξ)ουν η ^tytiv τι 
 
 t Mii'kvi. 31. 
 1 Cor. xvi. 12 
 oiilyt. Pol^b. 
 XX. M. 4. 
 
 η — Matt. xiii. 
 ή2. corapar., 
 see Winer, 
 ( 30. 3. ver. 
 
 (ΐς ovciv irtpoi' 
 KaivoTioov. '" ^ σταθίΐς οε ο Παύλος iv 
 
 μίσω 
 
 UKOVtlV 
 
 του 
 κατά πάντα ως 
 
 ABD 
 EGH 
 
 Άξχ'ιυυ πάγου 'ίφη Ανδρες Αθηναίοι, 
 
 ^ δίΐσίδοί/ιοΐ'ίστίοους ΰμΰς Οίωξ)ω' ^'^ '' ^ΐξρ-^όμίνος γαρ και 
 
 '^ αναθεωρων τα. ^ σφάσματα υμών ίύρον και '' βωμον ϊν 
 
 3. Γι8. Jii.s. Αη:ι. χίν. 10 
 onlyt. ύ• τη" κακιαι : 
 XV. ι; (Vat.). 
 
 χ = 1 Cor. χ. Ι."; 
 3, 14. compar., ver. 21. 
 ■ τι'-ν ποιημάτων, Diod. Sic. χίν. 109. 
 C here only. Jtr. vii. 31 al. 
 
 Cor. ri. 13. y here only -f. 
 
 ζ absol., ch. viii. 4 reS". 
 
 b 2 Thess. ii. 4 only. 
 
 = Xen. Cyr. iii. 
 a Heb. xiii. 7 
 Wisd. xiv. 20• 
 
 the recurrence of η with different meanings), witli EGH &c al vss Bas Chr al : txt ABD 
 25. 44 V sah syr. — aft ακον. ins τι AB (and vss, omg the former τι) (/Λι? repetition has 
 orif/inaied in the transposition/or elegance) : t.ict DEGH mss (appy) Bas Chr Thl Oec. 
 —22. cm AB ΎΙύΚ—ίμμίσω AE (not DGH).— tiTrtv 180 lect 12.— 23. for ηι^αθ., 
 ίαστορων D' (persjiiciens d) ιστορων Clenij. — ijvpov E. — for ίπεγ., ην -/ίγραμμίνον Ό : 
 
 the spirit of Jesus, has here spoken by the 
 Apostle, and therefore it is that we have 
 in liis discourse a masterpiece of apostolic 
 vpisdom.' The same commentator gives the 
 substance of the speech thus : ' He who is 
 (by your own involuntary confession) tm- 
 known to you Athenians (religious though 
 you are), — and yet (again, by your own 
 confession) able to be knoivn, — the all-snf- 
 ficing Creator of the world, Preserver of 
 all creatures, and Governor of mankind, — 
 noiv commandeth all men (by me His 
 minister) to repent, that they may know 
 Him, and to believe in the Man whom He 
 hath raised from the dead, that they may 
 stand in the judgment, which He hath 
 committed to Him.' άνδρες ΆΘ.] 
 
 The regular and dignified appellation fami- 
 liar to them as used by all their orators, — 
 of whose works Paul could hardly be altoge- 
 ther ignorant. κατά, τγ. ' in every point 
 of view :' see reff. δεισ-ιδαιμονεσ-- 
 Te'povs] ' Carrying your religious re- 
 verence very far:' an instance of which 
 follows, in that they, not content with 
 worshipping named and knoivn gods, wor- 
 shipped even an unknown one. Blame is 
 neither expressed, nor even implied : but 
 their exceeding veneration for religion laid 
 hold of as a fact, on which Paul, with ex- 
 quisite skill, engrafts his proof that he is 
 introducing no neiv gods, but enlightening 
 them with regard to an object of worship 
 on which they were confessedly in the dark. 
 So Chrysost. : δεισ•., τοντιστιν ίϋ\αβισ- 
 
 τίρηυς ωςπιρ ίγκωμιάζίΐν ηύτοϊ'ς 
 
 coKil, oi'iOfi' βηρν λίγων. — Το understand 
 this word as Ε. V. ' too superstitions ' (' su- 
 perstitiosiores,' Vulg,, so Luther, Calov., 
 Wolf), is to miss the fine and delicate 
 tact of the speech, by which he at once 
 parries the charge against him, and in 
 doing so introduces the great Truth which 
 he came to preach. — The word itself has 
 both senses : Οίίσιδαίμων, ύ ενσεβής, 
 Hesych. : — ίν τψ τοωντψ (in battle) yap 
 
 ΰγω," καΊ "εν σχολής εχω," ον "σχο- 
 λάζω•" το δε "εϋκαφεΊν" ττάντη αδόκιμοι', 
 Thorn. ^lag. — On this character of the 
 Ath., compare that given of them, Thucyd. 
 iii. 38, μετά κηινότητος μεν λόγου άττα- 
 τάσθαι άριστοι, where the scholiast evi- 
 dently has our text in his mind ; ταντα 
 τΓίΐός• τους 'Αθηναίους α'ινίττεται, ουδέν 
 τι μελετώντας τιλήν λέγειν τι και άκονειν 
 ιοαιί'όί' :— Demosth. (Philippic. I. p. 43), η 
 βονλεπθε, εΙπέ μοι, πει'ϊιόντες αυτών πυ- 
 θέσθαι κατά την αγορά»'• λέγεται τι και- 
 νόν ; γένοιτο γάρ αν τι καινότεοον ή 
 Μακεδών άνήρ κ.τ.λ. (so also in Philipp. 
 Epist. pp. 156, 157). — The comparative, 
 καινότερον, is used as here by Theophr. in 
 the character of a loquacious person : οίος 
 ίρωτήσαι• έχεις τερι τονδε ειπείν καινόν ; 
 και ίτΓΐβαλών ερωτών μη λέγεται τι και- 
 νότερον ; It implies, as we should say, ' the 
 very last news.' 22.] The com- 
 
 mentators vie with each other in admiration 
 of tills truly wonderful speech of the great 
 Apostle. Chrysostom : τοντό εστί το 
 είρημέϊ'ον τψ άποστόλψ, εγεί'όμην το^ς 
 άΐ'όμοις ώς άνομος, 'ίνα κ{ρ5/;σω άνομους' 
 ΆΘηναίοις γάρ δημηγορών, οΰκ άπο ττρο- 
 φητών νύδ'ί άπό τον νόμου διελέχθη, άλλ' 
 άπο βωμοϋ την τταραίνεσιν έττοιήσατο' 
 άπό των οίκΕί'ων αύτονς εχειρώσατο δογ- 
 μάτων διό οΰκ είπεν " άνομος," άλλ' 
 " ώς άνομος." ' The oration of Paul 
 before this assembly is a living proof of his 
 apostolic wisdom and eloquence : we see 
 here how he, according to his own words, 
 could become a Gentile to the Gentiles, to 
 win the Gentiles to the Gospel.' Neander, 
 Pfl. u. L., p. 317. And Stier very properly 
 remarks (Reden dcr Apostel, ii. 131), ' It 
 was given to the Apostle in this hour, what 
 he should speak ; this is plainly to be seen 
 in the following discourse, which we might 
 weary ourselves with praising and admiring 
 in various ways ; but far better than all so- 
 called praise from our poor tongues is the 
 humble recognition, that the Holy Ghost,
 
 22—24. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 179 
 
 ώ εττεγίγρατΓΓΟ '^ Αγνώστω θ^ω. 
 
 ^ Βυσίβίΐτε, ''^ τούτο £γώ ' κατα-γνίΛΑω νμιΐ'. 
 
 "ό Ούί^ «γΐ^Οοΰΐ'Γίς d = Markxv. 
 
 ίελλω y,uii'. ο σεος ο isHcb.vm. 
 
 in.s. Klonly. 
 
 ΤΓΟίήσυς τον κόσμον και πάντα τά ίν αυτω, ' οντος ουρά- ί'™^*^"' 
 
 - > - 1^ f / 1 r ' ' m ' e hereoiilvt. 
 
 ΐΌυ και yr]Q υτταρ^ων κύριος oi»/c ει» -^ίΐροποιι^τοις wisd.xviii.a. 
 
 f ch. siii. 2" reff. r 1 Tiiii. v. 4 only f. constr.. here onlv. Eur. Plicen. 1331. h cli. ίτ. 2. xiii. δ 
 
 al.t L. P. icii.ix. 2U refl. k ch. \iu. 1ΰ reft'. 1 i MhH. xx. S al. m ch. vii. 48 rcff. 
 
 om 42 : ίγιγραπτο Orig : ηναγεγρατττο Clem : επίγραφετο Cyr. — rec ov . . . , and 
 TovTov (see note), with EGH &c vss Clem Ath Chr Cosm Thl Oec Aug: t.xt A'BD ν 
 Orig Jer. — ττξίοςκυνίΐτε 2. 30. — 24. αντοις 142. — κυρ. om 137• — rec κυρ. ντταρχ., with 
 DGH &c ff": txt ABE al 13. 133. 180 lect 12 ν {cum sit dom.) Clem, Thdrtj ThP.— 
 
 i>) o\ δίΐιτιοαίμονες ήττον τονς άνΟηώ- 
 ΤΓους φοβούνται, Χβη. Cyrop. iii. 3. 58 : 
 and on tlie other hand, Theophrast. Char. 
 IG, explains δεισιδαιμονία by CftXia προς το 
 δαιμόνιον : and Pollu.ii, (νσεβηί;, θεών 
 επιμελής, ό δε νπερτιμών, δεισιδαίμων καΐ 
 δεισίθεος. — The character thus given of the 
 Athenians is confirmed by Greek writers : 
 thus, Pausan. i. 24. 3, Άθηναίοις πευισσό- 
 τερόν τι η τοΙς άλλοις ες τά θεΊά ίστι 
 σπονδής. See other instances in Wetstein. 
 Jospphus, c. Apion, ii. 11, calls them εϋσε- 
 βεστάτοΐ'ζ των 'Ελλήνων. 23. άναθ. 
 
 ' looking over,' ' reconnoitring.' σ£- 
 
 βάσμ.] not, as Ε. V., '■devotions:' but 
 ' objects of religious worship,' temples, 
 altars, statues, &c. καί] over and 
 
 above the many altars to your own and 
 foreign deities, πολλά yap των ξίΐ'ΐκώϊ' 
 
 ίίοώι/ παρεδ'ίϊ,αντο και δη και τά 
 
 θρ^κια και τά Φρνγια, Strabo, χ. ρ. 472. 
 αγνώστω θεώ] ' Το an (not, t/ie) 
 Tinknown God.' — That this was the veri- 
 table inscription on the altars, not as Je- 
 rome on Tit. i. 12) ' Inscriptio arse non ita 
 erat ut Paulus asseruit : iynoto Deo : sed 
 ita : Diis Asiae et Europas et Africse, Diis 
 ignotis et peregrinis. Verum quia Paulus 
 non plurilius Diis ignotis indigebat sed uno 
 tantum ignoto Deo, singulari verbo usus 
 est '), tlie words φ ί-εγέγραπτο. On wMch 
 had been inscribed,' are decisive. Meyer 
 well remarks, that the historical fact would 
 be abundantly established from this pas- 
 sage, being Paul's testimony of what he 
 himself had seen, — and spoken to the 
 Athenian people. But \\e have our nar- 
 rative confirmed by the following : Paus. i. 
 1. 4, ίνταϋθα και βωμοί θεών τε ονομα- 
 ζόμενων άγνωστων, και ίμιιΐιων καϊ παί- 
 δων των Βήσεως και Φαλήρου: — Philos- 
 tratus, Λ'^it. Apollon. vi. 3, σωψρονέστερον 
 το περΊ πάντων θεών ιυ λέγειν, και ταντα 
 ΆΟήνι/σιν, ΐιύ και άγνώητοιν δαιμόνων 
 βιυμοι ίδρυνται. On whicli Winer wiiil 
 says, that it by no means follows that each 
 altar had the inscrijjtion in the |)lural, ΘεοΊς 
 άγνιόστυις, but more naturally that the 
 plural has been used to suit βοιμοί, and 
 that the inscription on each was as here. 
 
 Ν 
 
 The commonly-cited passage of (Pseudo-) 
 Lucian, Philopatr. 9, and 29, r;) τον άγ- 
 νωστον iv 'Αθήναις, is no testimony, the 
 dialogue being spurious, and the reference to 
 our text evident. The origin of such altars 
 has been variously explained : Diog. Laert. 
 (vit.Epimenid.)says, thatEpimenides, onoc- 
 casion of a plague, advised the Athenians to 
 let go white and black sheep from the Areio- 
 pagus, and on the spots where they lay down 
 to erect altars τω ιτροςήκοντι θίώ : 'όθεν, he 
 adds, ετι καϊ νυν ϊστιν είψεϊν κατά τους 
 δίιμηυς των Άθηναίωΐ' βωμονς ανωνύμους. 
 Eichhorn conjectures that they may have 
 been ancient altars erected before the use of 
 writing, and thus inscribed in after-times. 
 But I should rather suppose that the 
 above anecdote furnishes the key to the 
 practice : that on the occurrence of any re- 
 markable calamity or deliverance not as- 
 signable to the conventionally-received 
 agency of any of the received deities, an 
 unknoivn God was reverenced as their 
 author. — That the God of the Jews was 
 meant (as supposed by Calov., Wolf, al.) is 
 very improbable. — ' Quod ignotis Diis altare 
 erexerant, signum erat nihil ipsos tenere 
 certi : habebant quidem ingentem Deorum 
 
 turbam sed dum illis penniscent 
 
 ignotos Deos, hoc ipso fatentur nihil de 
 
 vera Divinitate se habere compertum 
 
 Inde apparet inquietudo, quod se nondum 
 defunctos fatentur, ubi popularibus Diis 
 litarunt,' &c. Calvin. δ . . . . τοΰτο] 
 
 The '6v and τούτον of the i"ec. have pro- 
 baljly been alterations from reverential 
 motives. The neuters give surely the 
 deeper, and the more appropriate scnse.- 
 For Paul does not identify the true God 
 with the dedication of, or worship at, the 
 altar mentioned : but speaks of tlic Dirinity 
 (to θεϊυν) of whom they, by this inscrip- 
 tion, confessed themselves ignorant. (It 
 may however be a warning of the uncer- 
 tainty of a ])riori internal evidence for 
 readings, that De Wette and Meyer sup- 
 pose the masculines to have been altered to 
 produce this very sense, and to avoid the 
 inference that Paul identifed the unknown 
 God with the Creator.) But even α more 
 2
 
 180 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XVII. 
 
 η Matt, χχηι 
 
 21. Ps. π. 
 
 ο Rom 
 
 iv.3. 
 χ. 13. James 
 iii. 7. 1 Pet. 
 ii. 13 only. 
 Num. V. (i. 
 ρ = here only. Pro' 
 Gen. ii. 7. 
 
 ί.ναοις κατοικιι, '^^ ουόε υττο γ^ειρων ανυρωπινων ^ υίξ>α- 
 πίύίται '' προς^εόμίνος τίνος, αυτός δίδους ττασι tiorjv και 
 
 ΛΙίΓ> 
 KGII 
 
 ττνοηΐ' και τα πάντα, 
 
 2fi. I.^n.liv.l/. 
 
 , 13. Hom. II. vi 
 
 ίΤΓΟίησβν 
 
 ly. Prov. xii. 9. 
 
 it, ίνυς ' αίματος 
 
 I =. here only. (ch. ii. 2 only.) 
 
 25. rce χ. ανθρωπιών {probably an error), with EGH &c vss Clir Thdrtj Cosm al : txt 
 ABD 14'. If). 18. 2"). 27. IVi. (i4. 73. 78. 97• 180 lectt ν Cleiiij Thdrti Iren. — ως ττρυςο. 
 25 e Thdrt (twice, but once in one ins only) Iren : add μη 80-, — ΓΠ'ος om D' (D^ sup- 
 plies τι αντος) al lectt 12. 13 al.— on (om D^) ούτος ο δους (οντ. hS. D^) D Syr ar-erp : 
 αντος oin II Hi. 37. 50. 100 al Clirj. — δους Η al Clenii Chri. — πασιν Ε &c : txt ABD 
 &c: al transp. — for και τα ναντα, κατά τταντα BGH most mss (κ -nt κητ-α 40) ar-pol 
 Slav (not mod) (tinicuique sah, so also copt) Thdrt, ThP Oec : om Syr ar-erp {Meyer 
 thinks κατά τταντα ver 22 was still in the copyist's mind. At all events, it seems to be 
 an error): txt ADE (om τα) 3. 5. 7- 15. 18. 2G. 27. 29. 30. 81 ν syr arm slav^ Clem, 
 Chr Thdrt, Cosm ThP {et omnia fecerit Iren) : και τα τταντα om 13 : for Tt, δε al : om 
 DE (vss).— 26. αίματος om AB 13. 14'. 27. 29. 40. 90 ν copt sah aeth (joins together 
 £ποι. ίζ ενός and και πάντα) Clem Bed : ins DEGH most mss Bed-gr syrr al Thdrt, 
 Chr (often) Cosm Thl Oec Iren {Meyer well remarks on the omission, that it is more 
 likely to have happened owing to ενός αίματος, than that αίματος should be a gloss on 
 
 serious objection lies against the masculines. 
 The sentiment would thus be in direct con- 
 tradiction to the assertion of Paul him- 
 self, 1 Cor. X. 20, ii Θνονσιν, δαιμονίοις 
 θυουσιν, και οΰ θ£ω. Compare also our 
 Lord's words, John iv. 22, νμείς προς- 
 κννεϊτΐ ο ουκ ο'ίδατε. — In €ύσ£βεΐτ€, we 
 have another confirmation of the sense above 
 insisted on for διισιδαιμοιηστέρους. He 
 wishes to commend their reverential spirit, 
 while he shews its misdirection. An import- 
 ant lesson for all who have controversies with 
 Paganism and Romanism. καταγγ.] 
 
 (See above, καταγγελενς ver. 18.) — Ί am 
 declaring,' 'making manifest,' to you. 
 νμείς με ττροελάβιτε, φησίν ϊφθασε υμών 
 t'l θεραπήα το εμον κήρυγμα. Chrys. 
 24.] ' No wonder, that the devil, in order 
 to diffuse idolatry, has blotted out among 
 all heathen nations the recognition of 
 Creation. The true doctrine of Creation 
 is the proper refutation of all idolatry.' 
 Roos. Einl. in die bibl. Geschicht., cited by 
 Stier, Red. dcr Apost. ii. 140, who remarks, 
 ' Only on the firm foundation of the Old 
 Testament doctrine of Creation can we 
 rightly build the New Testament doctrine 
 of Redemption : and only he, who scrip- 
 turally believes and apprehends by faith the 
 earliest words of Revelation, concerning a 
 Creator of all things, can also apprehend, 
 know, and scripturally worship, the man, 
 in whom God's word, down to its latest 
 canonical Revelation, gathers together all 
 things.' ουκ Iv χίΐρ•] A remarkable 
 
 reminiscence of the dying speech of Stephen : 
 see ch. vii. 48.— Mr. Humphry notices the 
 similarity, but difference in its conclusion, 
 of the argument attributed to Xerxes in 
 Cicero, Leg. ii. 10 : ' Xerxes inflammasse 
 templa Grsecise dicitur, quod parietibus 
 
 includerent deos, quibus omnia deberent 
 esse potentia et libera, quorumque hie 
 mundus omnis templum esset et domus.' 
 — Where Paul stood, he might sec the cele- 
 brated colossal statue of Athena Polias, 
 known by the Athenians as y θεά, standing 
 and keeping guard with spear and shield 
 in the enclosure of the Acropolis. 
 25.] θ£ρατΓ£ΰ€ται, ' is (really and truly) 
 served.' So θίος οΰ μυκτηρίζεται, Gal. 
 vi. 7• ττροζδ.] ένδε'ισθαι μεν έητι το 
 
 τταττεΧώς μή εχειν ττρυςδησθαι (5ί το 
 εχειν μεν μέρος, ετι δι δείσθαι ττρύς το 
 τελειον. Ulpian (in Wetst.). — As the asser- 
 tion of Creation contradicted the Epicurean 
 error, so this laid hold of that portion of 
 truth, which, however disguised, that school 
 had apprehended : ' Omnis enim per se 
 divimi natura necesse est | Immortali sevo 
 
 summa cum pace fruatur. | | Ipsa 
 
 suis pollens opibus, nihil indign nostri,' 
 Lucret. i. 57- There is a verse in 2 Mace. 
 xiv. 35, remarkable, as compared with the 
 thoughts and words of Paul here : σν, κι'ψιε, 
 των όλων άττροςδεής ίητάρχωΐ', εύδοκήσας 
 ναόν τί/ς σης κατασκηνώσεως εΐ' ΐιμίΐ' 
 γενέσθαι. τίνος] neuter, as referring 
 
 to the temples and statues offered by tlic 
 Athenians. ζωήν κ. τΓνοήν] He is 
 
 the Preserver, as well as the Creator, of 
 all ; and all things come to us from Him. 
 Compare, on το τταντα, David's words, 
 1 Chron. xxix. 14, σά τα τταντα, και εκ 
 των σων δεδώκαμέΐ> σοι. 26.] «ξ evb? 
 
 αϊμ. was said, be it remembered, to a 
 peojjle who gave themselves out for αυτό- 
 χθονες : but we must not imagine that to 
 refute this was the object of the words: 
 they aim far higher than this, and contro- 
 vert the whole genius of polytheism, which 
 attributed to the various nations differing
 
 25—28. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 181 
 
 τταν έθνος ανθρώπων " κατυικίίν εττί ' τταντύς προςώττου '^hctoIxu.^^' 
 
 --u''v ' VI ^ ^^ f''•) Gen.ii. 
 
 της "γης ορισας ^τpoςτίτayLUvovς καιρούς και τας •> χί. 8. 
 ^ οροθίσιας της ^ κατοικίας αυτών, ^' ^ CriTuv τον θεον, εί Kom.f Ι"'' 
 αρα γε ^ χΡηΧαφησειαν αυτόν και ίυροιεν, και γε ου lVnuui. 
 "^μακράν αττο ενός εκάστου ημών ^ υπάργοντα' ^ϊ' '^ (Mau.\™4li. 
 
 t ~ \ γ ~ \ η 'α ^ \\ ' ι ' Ι Gen. i. 2.) 
 
 αυτω γαρ ί,ωμεν και ° κινουμευα και εσμεν, ως και τιΐ'ες wabsoi., cai. 
 
 χ liere only t. y here only. Exixi. xxxv. 3. Da», ii. 11. ζ = here only. Exod. xxxiii. 7. 
 
 a = here only. Isa. lix. lu. (Luke xxiv. 3y. 1 John i. 1 al.) opt., see ch. xxlv. 19. b See Luke xix. 42. 
 
 ch. ii. 18. c w. €Ϊμι, Matt. viii. 30. Mark xii. 34. John xxi. 8. Deiit.xxx.il. 
 
 d w. gen., partif., Luke iv. 40 al. ch. ii. 3. xxi. 2R. 1 The.",», ii. 11 al. L. P. e cli. viii. Iti reff. 
 
 f ef. 1 Pet. i. 5, 22. g = here only. Xen. Mem. i. 1. 14. h emphat.. Matt. ii. 18. xxiii. 3u al. 
 
 ίνος,—/θΓ that this would be rather given by άνθρωπου). — for ιθνος, ytvog 23. 69. 96. 
 104. 137• 142 V syr-marg al Clem ThP Iren. — άνθρωπου D-gr. — rec παν τυ προςωπον 
 (corrn/or ease of constr), with EGH &c Chr Tlidrt Cosm al [το om Ε Thdrtj : παν om 
 37. 56. 100) : txt ABD I. 13. 15. 18. 36. 68. 103 Clem.— rec Trportray. with D' all slav- 
 ed {prueficiens Iren) : τετα-γμ. 14'. 69. 105 : txt ABD-EGH all (60 and more) vss 
 (nrly) Clem Ammon Chr Cosm Thl Oec. — τα οροθισια (appy) or κατά οροθίσιαν } D'. — 
 της κατοικΐ)σίως 133: των κατοικιών sah. — 27. μάλιστα ζητ. D-gr. — rec τον κυριον 
 {in this case we can hardly suppose κυρ. to be genuine, as De W. and Meyer, simply 
 from the a priori difficulty of Paid having used the expr tvhen speaking to heathens : 
 the copyists are uniformly so careless ivhere these itvo ivords are concerned, as to leave 
 such considerations very uncertaitt), with Ε &c vss Cosm ThP : το (for rt, or τι το .') 
 θηον ίστιν D Iren : txt ABGH 15. 16. 18. 25. 40. 63. 68. 69. 76. 84. 88. 95. 96. 98. 99. 
 100. 105. 137. 180 lectt ν syrr copt (sah .=) seth al Chr ThP Oec Hil Ambr : αυτόν ζητ. 
 τον θίον 96. — φηλαφησαισαν and tvpoieav D : -σααν 3. 64. 95'. 105 : -atuv Ε 40. 
 69. 96 Oec {-σην and tvpvtv Ε).— for και (bef tvp.), η AD 15. 36. 40. 96. 105 ν 
 (not tol) sah Iren: txt B(e sil)EGiI most mss vss Clem Chr Cosm Thl Oec. — tvpoiav 
 133. — rec καιτοι-γε (alteration to more usual tvord : the ready και τοι is not, as Meyer 
 thinks, any sign that rec is genuine, but merely that τοι in the marg had been sometimes 
 pref.ved to the yf , sometimes substituted for it), with many mss (appy) Chr Cosm ThP 
 al: καίτοι AE Clem : txt BDGH most of best mss Did Thl' al. — ov (corr ων) αφ (αφ Ε 
 also) (νος (κ. ημ. (omg νπαρχ. which is added by a corrector) D. — νμων A'G 180. — 
 υπάρχοντος Ε lect 12 Clem : απέχοντα 69. 98-marg 105. — 28. aft εσμεν, add ro 
 καθ ημεραν D. — ημάς 33. 68. 95. 96. 105. 137 copt. — ωςπερ και των κ. υμ. τίνες D. 
 
 mythical origins, and separate guardian ζητίΐν does not depend on εποίησεν, but 
 
 gods. It is remarkable, that though of all gives the intent of the above-mentioned 
 
 people the Jews were the most distin- providential arrangements : ' that they 
 
 guished in their covenant state from other might seek God.' τον κύριον (as rec. and 
 
 nations of the earth, yet to them only was one uncial MS have) has prob. been a careless 
 
 given the revelation of the true history of mistake of a transcriber : ri rb θεϊύν ίστιν, 
 
 mankind, as all created of one blood .• a which appears to have been the reading of 
 
 doctrine kept as it were in store for the D, is one of its own strange glosses, 
 
 gospel to proclaim. — Not, ' hath made of tl αρα] ' if by any chance,' denoting a 
 
 one blood,' &c., as E. v., but 'caused every contingency apparently not very likely to 
 
 nation of men (sprung) of one hlood, to happen, see llartung, Partikellelire, i. 440. 
 dwell,' &c. See Matt. v. 32. Mark vii. 37. ψηλαφήσ£ΐαν] Originally an /Kolic 
 
 τταντος ■n-posoj'irou] The omission form, but frequent in Attic Greek, for 
 
 of the art. may be accounted for by the ι\/η\αφ1]σαιεν, see Luke vi. 11. On the 
 
 words following ίπί (see Middleton, vi. 1) : word itself, compare Aristoph. (Pax, 691) : 
 
 or, perhaps, by the parallelism of πάν ίΰνος, προτού μεν ονν \ ίι\/η\αφώμίν ίν σκότψ 
 
 •παντός προσώπου : or perhaps, as πας τά πράγματα, \ ννν'ι ύ' άπαντα προς 
 
 υικος Ισραήλ, ch. ii. 36, because πυός- λΰχνυν βονλεύσυμεν. These lines, as Mr. 
 
 ωτΓον της γης is regarded as one appel- Humphry observes, ' seem at once to illus- 
 
 lative. καιρ όροθ.] He who trate the figurative use of the verb, and to 
 
 was before (ver. 24) the Creator, then express the condition of man prior and sub- 
 
 (ver. 25) the Preserver, is now the Gover- sequent to revelation.' καί γ€ . . . .] 
 
 nor of all men : prescribing to each nation ' Not that He is distant from us, but that 
 
 its spaci; to dwell in, and its time of en- we are ignorant of II im.' See Uom. x. 6. 8. 
 
 durance. ιτροςτίτ. not ιτροτ., ' ap- Jer. xxiii. 23, 24. καί ye, ' et (luideni : 
 
 pointed,' 'ordered by Him.' 27.] see llartung, Partikellehre, i. 398 t.
 
 182 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XVIT. 2.9-31-. 
 
 ich.xTiii.i5 jtov ' Καθ' νμας ^ ποιητών ίίρηκασιν Του yap και ytvog ΑΒΠ 
 i-ch.TiLis. fffjitH'. "^ γίΐ'ος υυυ νπαργοντίς του Utov ουκ οφίΐλο- 
 xxii. ι«. j.r. ju£v νομιί,ίΐν Λ/ρυσω 1} aξ)yυpω ί] AiUo) Λ(«ραγ/ιοη 
 icKii 30. viii. ° I'^X'^JC και ^' ίνθυμησίως άνθρωπου, το '^ Οΰον ύναι 
 
 1(ί reft'. ff •>ο \ \ t γ ' -S' 't' ^^ 
 
 πι -1 (or. Ni. 7. ouoiov. *'" τους' W£J' ουν νρονους της α7ΐ'θ{ος υτΓΕΟίόων 
 
 n=lieieonljt. / ^ ^ - ν ι\\ - ' η ' ' 
 
 mev. xiii. 17, Q ^jy^. u ^^ j,j^j^ πο^^αγγίλλίΐ τοις ανϋρωποις παντας 
 
 θ"= tirre only, w -* \ν\ν " 31 " ί) '_ 5' '' ' ' ' 
 
 3 Kings νϋ. πανταχού μίτανοίΐν, καυοτι ' ίστησίν 7j/j£pav εν 
 
 '^ (sia'iMx"'/' V Μέλλει " κ:()/ϊΈΠ' την ^ οικουμίνην ει» '' δικαιοσυΐ'^, ει» 
 
 al.' lieliiiv. 1L'.) q here οπίν. Xen. Mem. i.4. 18. (2 Ptt. i. 3. 4. Exod. x.vxi. 3.) r conslr., 
 
 ch.iii. ai. Luke i. 57. sch.iii. 17. Epli. iv. 18. 1 Pet. i. 14 only. Leiit. xxii. 14. t here only. 
 
 Levi(. XX. 4. Dent. xxii. 3. UTrepiiuw τΓιν ϊόίας: ασφάλεια';, Dion. Hal. Anit. ii. (ίβ. u ch. iv.2!) reff. 
 
 V ch. XV. 5 ifff. w Mark xvi. 20. Luke ix. fi. ch. xxiv. ;i. xxviii. 22. 1 Cor. iv. 17 only. Isa. xlii. 22. 
 
 WW absol., ch.xxvi. 2U a1. χ =-Lnke i. 7. xix. Π. ch. ii. 21. (Luke only.) y = here only. 
 
 ζ = Rom. iii. fi (κόσμον). P.sa. ix. 8. a absol., ch. xxiv. 2.5. Rom. ix. 28. xiv. 17 al. b — Matt, 
 xii. 24. Luke xi. l.i and II. 1 Cor. vi. 2. 
 
 — ττοιητων oni D Iven Aug Ambr Pac al. — for τον, τοντου D' 19^. 21. i)C> : οντον 
 Ε- Ά5. (')8 : TovTow 3: τοντο 137- — 29. ουΓί χρ. D. — χρνσιω η αρ-/νριω ΛΕ 40. 73. 90 
 al (Tlulrt-ms) Dam TbP. — for και, η D-gr Iren : om copt sah aetli. — αιΌς,ωπων E-gr al 
 seth. — 30. ODi' om lect 12 sah. — rriQ ay. τηντης D' v. — «-at τους χρον. μ(ν ουν Ε 
 (ν et iempora qtiidem). — παριδων D' : ττιριδων D^ 103 : despiciens v. — aTrayyiWti B. 
 — rec -πασι {alteration, to agree with ανθηωποις. Meyer and De IVeite's idea, that 
 πασι vas altered to παντας to soften the assertion that God commanded ανθ. πασι 
 ■πανταχού, — is in the highest degree improbable), with GH &c seth al Athj Chr Thdrt 
 CosmThlOec Iren: txt ABD(n'a τταντίς D')E 13. 15. 18. 3G. 40. IfiO ν {ut omnes 
 jicen. agant) ά copt sah (omnibus ut omnes Syr ar-erp) Ath, Cyr Chron Aug (om Jcr). — 
 31. rec Siori {explan of καθότι), with GH al Chr Thl' Oec : txt ABDE all {καθ ο 18. 
 30. 180) Ath Thdrt^ Eulog Cyr Chron ThP al.— for iv η μ. tcp., κρειναι D (Aug).— rov 
 
 28.] There is no justification for the pan- 
 theist in this. — It is properly said only of 
 the race of tnen, as being His offspring, 
 bound to Him : proceeding from, and up- 
 hekl by, and therefore living, moving, and 
 being in Him : — but even in a wider sense 
 His Being, though a separate objective Per- 
 sonality, involves and contains that of His 
 creatures. See Eph. i. 10, wliere the same 
 is said of Clirist. ev αΰτώ must not be 
 taken for ' bg Him :' the subsequent cita- 
 tion would in tliat case be irrelevant. 
 ζώμ. Kiv. Ισμ.] ' A climax : out of God we 
 should have no Life, nor even movement 
 (which some things without life have, 
 plants, water, &c.), nay, not any existence 
 at all (we should not have been).' Meyer. 
 Storr's expl. of ζώμιν by ' vivimus beate 
 ac hilare,' and Kuinoel and Olshausen's of 
 Ισμίν by 'real being,' i. e. ' the spiritual life,' 
 are evidently beside the purpose ; the intent 
 being to shew the absolute dependence for 
 every thing of man on God,— and thence 
 the absurdity of supposing the Godhead like 
 to the works of his (man's) hands. 
 τοΰ γαρ κ. γ. €σμ.] Aratus, in the opening 
 lines of the Phsenomena : . . . πάντη Η 
 Διός Κίχοίψίθα πάντ(ς• τον γαρ και γίνος 
 ίσμίν. Kleanthes also. Hymn, in Jov. 5, lias 
 tKrriw yap γίιοςίπμμν. Aratus vras anatire 
 of Tnr.sns, about 270 B.C., and wrote astro- 
 nomical poems, of which two, the ψαινόμίνα 
 
 and διοσημέϊα, remain. Kleanthes was born 
 at Assos, in Troas, about 300 B.C. The 
 Apostle, by the plural, seems to have both 
 poets in liis mind. — The τοϊι refers to Zeus 
 in both cases, the admission being taken as 
 a portion of truth regarding the Supreme 
 God, which even heathen poets confessed. — 
 The και has no connexion here, but is (see 
 above) part of the verse in Aratus. 
 30. νιτΐριΒών'] In this word lie treasures 
 of mercy for those who lived in the times of 
 ignorance. God ' overlooked ' them : i. e. 
 corrected not this ignorance itself as a sin, 
 but the abuses even of this, by which the 
 heathen sunk into deeper degradation. The 
 same argument is treated more at length in 
 Rom. i. ii. — The ττασιΐ' of the rec. and 'ίνα 
 τνάντίς of D^ have both been corrections 
 occasioned by the apparent difficulty of τοΙς 
 άνθρώποις -πάντας. The genuine reading 
 gives the emphatic ττάντας ττανταχοϋ, fol- 
 lowing on the foregoing assertion of vv. 25, 
 20, its proper place. 31. καθότι] 
 
 See var. read, and reff. ; — used by Luke and 
 him only: 'seeing that,' 'inasmuch as.' 
 €v δικαιοσ.] δικαιησ. is the cha- 
 racter of the judgment, — the clement, of 
 which it shall consist. Iv άνδρί] Not, 
 
 ' in (by) a man,' but ' by (i e. in the person 
 of) the man :' the art. is omitted after the 
 preposition : see Midd. vi. 1. ττίστ. 
 
 κ. -.λ.'} ' Quia res erat vix credibilis, argu-
 
 ΧΛαΐΓ. Ί,2. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 183 
 
 UVOf 
 
 Οξ>1 
 
 αυτόν 
 οι μίν 
 τούτου 
 
 k / 
 μίσου 
 
 αναστησας c aitr., ch. i. ι 
 
 1 , _ reft•. 
 
 αναστασιν νεκρωι^ "^ j•"^• 2fi rpfr. 
 
 ι e here uuly, Jos. 
 
 'λκουβόμώΐχ σου ττψΐ t^lT.li"• 
 
 πάλιν. ^ ούτως ο Παύλος ί^ηΧθίν έκ 
 
 τ. B«/3u 
 rtuy. 
 
 10 
 
 Ο ωρισίν, πιστιν τταρασ-^ων ττασιι 
 εκ: veKpiou. '^~ ακουσαντίς οέ 
 
 εχλίυα^ον, οι δε 
 και 
 αυτών' τίνες οε άνδρες κοΧΧηΟίντίς αυτω 
 
 '" ετΓίστευσαΐ', εν οις Kot Διονύσιος ο Α^)εο7Γογ(Τ7ίς και γυντ} 
 ονόματι L^άμap^ς και "έτεροι συν αυτοις. XVIII. Μετά 
 οε ταΰτα ° χωρισθείς £Κ των Αθηνών ήΧΘίν εις Κορινθον, 
 και ίυρων τίνα Ιονόαιον ονόματι ΑκυΧαν, ΓΙοντικον 
 ^ τω yevii, '^ πξ)οςφατως ίΧηΧυθοτα απο της Ιταλίας, fa ι j l''ji"Vif /^β. 
 Πρισκιλλον "γυναίκα αυτοΰ, διά το ^ ύιατίταγβναι Κλαύ- icor.'xi.'ss. 
 οίον ° χ6>ρ('^εσθοι ττάντας τους Ιουδαίους απο της PώiU^?ς, ''^^οιη'ίδΓ.Ίίί.' 
 
 = rh. XVI 
 
 reft.) 
 fMalt. xvii.U 
 
 al. ir. 
 g ver. 18. 
 }i here only t. 
 
 Pruv. xiv. <J 
 
 Aiinil. 
 
 •J Mitcc. vii. 
 
 27. (ό,αχλ., 
 
 . See ch. xxiii. 10. 1 Cor. v. 2. 
 ch. sis. 39. ο w. e 
 
 Eslh. ii. 10. q here only. 
 
 Col. ii. 14. 2 The; 
 :, liere only. \v. απ 
 (See Heb. x. 2U.) 
 
 1 ch. V. 13 reff. m abso!., ch. ii. 44 al. 
 
 Γ0, ch. i. 4.— JadH. vi. 18. ρ Mark vii. 26 al. 
 
 Dent. xxiv. 5. r Luke viii. 5S. 
 
 κοσμον lect 12 (but rec in marg). — iv om D. — aft avS(>i add ιησου D Iren. — o^jiotv E. — 
 τταρισχειν (sic) D, παρασχίίν 32. 57• — 32. εχλίναίον lect 12. — eitrav BE. — και σου 
 73. — rec πάλιν περί τούτου. ^^ και όντως . . . with GH &c vss (but ττερ. τουτ. τταλ. 
 seth ar-pol slav : παλ. om sah) Clir Thl' Oec : txt ABDE (και om DE Gii. 180 ν arm) 
 13. 29. 40. G8. 73. 105 arm ThP.— 34. tv οις jji• 177.— for ο (bef ηρίοττ.), ης D : om 
 B. — αρίιοπ. Β : add ευσχήμων D : cnmplacens d. — και yvv. ov δ. om D : yvv. τίμια Ε : 
 cum uxore sua lat. — ετ. πολλοί 4. 25. 81 lectt. 
 
 Chap. XVIII. 1. δε om AB 13. 09. 97 ν copt : ins D (αναχωρ?)σας ίε,omgμεΓ. rawr.) 
 EGH mss (nrly) vss Cbr Thl Oec. — rec ■χω. ο τταυλος (insertion, as ike Ss u>as omitted, 
 at heyinnivy of an ecclesiastical portion), with AE &c : t.xt BD 13 ν sah Aug. — 2. τε- 
 Γαχεί'ίίί DEG all : προςτεταχ. all : ττροςταχΟεναι (sic) Thl' : ζιατεταχθεναι 137. 173*. 
 ίιατίταχθαι Tbl^. — κλαυδ. om Β {-ιος D'). — τους om D. — rec εκ r. ρωμ. (prob 
 corrn to suit χωρισθ. εκ in ver 1. So De Wette : Meyer thinks the απο to have been a 
 corrn to suit απο της ιταλ., but the other supjm is much more likely, the same verb 
 occurriny in both), with II &c Chr al : txt ABDEG all ν {a Roma) al. — aft ρώμης, add 
 01 K( (και) κατωκησαν (-σεν D^) εις την αχαιαν D d: simly syr-marg. — for αυτΌΐς, 
 
 mentum adfert eximium.' Grotius. 
 32. όνάστ. vcKp.] Perhaps here, 'when they 
 heard of a resurrection of dead men,^ viz. of 
 that of Christ, νεκρώΐ' being generic. But 
 the same words are used 1 Cor. xv. 12, πως 
 λέγουσιν tv νμίν τίνες, 'ότι ονάστασι? 
 νεκρών ούκ εστίν ; so that I would rather 
 take them here to mean that they inferred 
 the general possibility of the resuiTection 
 of the dead, as a tenet of Paul's, from the 
 one case which he mentioned. 32. ol 
 
 . . . . ol Sc] We must not allot these two 
 parties as some have done, the former to 
 the Epicureans, the latter to the Stoics : 
 the description is general. — The words 
 ακουσόμΐθα .... need not be taken as 
 ironical. Tlie hearing not having taken 
 place is ii(3 proof that it was not intended at 
 the time : and the distinction between these 
 and the mockers seems to imply that they 
 were in earne.-it. 33. οΰ'τως] ' In (his 
 
 state of the popular mind :' (with an expec- 
 tation of being heard again .•■) 34. 
 Διονύσιος ό '.Αρ.] Nothing more is known 
 of him. Euseb. 11. E. iii. 4; iv. 23, re- 
 
 lates that he was bishop of Athens, and 
 Niceph. iii. 11, that he died a martyr. The 
 writings which go by his name are un- 
 doubtedly spurious. V"»'''!] Not, as 
 Chrys. de Sacerd. iv. 7 al., the wije of Diony- 
 sius : this would have been >'/ yvvt) αντον. 
 Chap. XVIII. 1,] Corinth was at this 
 time a colony (see note, ch. xvi. 12), the 
 capital of the Roman province of Achaia, 
 and the residence of the proconsul. For 
 further particulars, see Prolegg. to 1 Cor. 
 2. Ίοχιδαιον] It appears that Aquila 
 and Priscilla were not Christians at this 
 time : it is the similarity of employment 
 only wliich draws them to Paul, and their 
 conversion is left to be inferred as taking 
 place in consequence : see ver. 2(!. 
 liovTiKOVT. γ.] It is remarkable, that Pon- 
 tius Aquila is a name found in the Pontian 
 gens at Rome more than once in the days of 
 the Republic (see Cicero, ad Fam. x. 33. 
 Suet, .lul Ca>s. 7«. Smith's Diet, of Hiogr., 
 art. Aquila, Pontius) ; whence some have 
 supposed that this may have been a freed- 
 man of a Pontius Aquila, and that liojT.
 
 184 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 hereonlyt. 7Γξ)θςΐ]\0ίν aVTOlQ, ^ KOI Sltt TO 
 
 t -' 
 
 t ch. ix. 43 reff. 
 u — Luke xiii. 
 
 παι 
 
 V here niily t. w / 
 w = Rrv.xviii. ''^X^'y 
 2->. Sir. '/Q/D 
 
 xxxviii. 34. aauuaTOv, 
 
 x = ch.jivu. 2. ' ' 
 
 XX. 7. y I'll. xiii. ^'7 reft". 
 
 ομοτζγΐ'ον eivai ίμενεν 
 
 αυτυις και " ϊ'ίργάζίΓΟ, ήσαν γαρ ' σκηνοττοιοι tij 
 
 ^ " διελί'γίτο δε εν tij σννα^ωγ^ ^ κατά παν 
 
 , ^ επειΟεν τε 'Ιουδαίους καΐ 'Έλληνας. ^ ως δε 
 
 ζ = ch. six. 26. Wisd. Χϊί. 8. 
 
 αυτω ο τταυλος D : simly syr-marg. — 3. nvcn om D.— f/xfiv£i' EGH !)5. 96. ij8'. 9i> 
 {manebat c) Chr Thl. — προς αυτούς D al. — rec ttpy. vdth GH &c (ίΐργαζοντ-ο Β) : txt 
 ADE 13. 180. — ijffav .... τιχ. om D.— rec την τίχνην, with Η &c Thl Ooc : txt 
 ABEG 40. 7."}. 173. 177 al Chr. — 4. D reads the ver : ίΐςττηρίυομίνος St ιις την aw- 
 ay wy ην κατά -παν σαββατον SiiXtyero (tol has ingrediebatur for disputabat) και 
 tvTiGttg TO όνομα του κυρίου ιησου (ίρτ. to ιησ. also ν (not am tol) syr-marg) και (om 
 D-) ίττιθιν Ct ου μόνον ιουδαίους άλλα και ίλληνας : the ver is omd in lat-mss mentd 
 by Bedc. — -πάντα σαββ. 13. — 5. for ως δε τταρ., — TraptyivovTO St D : κατηΧθεν 133. — 
 
 ABD 
 EGH 
 
 τω γ€ν€ΐ may have been an inference from 
 his name. But besides that Luke's ac- 
 quaintance \vith the real origin of Aquila 
 could hardly but have been accurate, — 
 Aijnila, the translator of the O. T. into 
 Greek, was also a native of Pont us. — From 
 the notices of A. and P. in the Epp., they 
 appear to have travelled, fixing their abode 
 by turns in different principal cities, for the 
 sake of their business. In ver. 26, we have 
 them settled at Ephesus ; in 1 Cor. xvi. 19, 
 still there ; in Rom. xvi. 3 if., again at 
 Rome; in 2 Tim. iv. 19, again at Ephesus. 
 δια TO διατ£ταχ€ναι . . .] Suet. 
 Claud. 25, says, ' Judseos impulsore Chresto 
 assidue tumultuantes Roma expulit :' but 
 as he gives this without any fixed note of 
 time, — as the words 'impulsore Chresto' 
 may be taken in three ways, (as indicative 
 either (1) of an actual leader of that name, 
 or (2) of some tumult connected with the 
 expectations of a jNIessiah, or (3) of some 
 disjiute about Christianity), — Neander well 
 observes, that after all which has been said 
 on it, no secure historical inference respect- 
 ing the dat« of the event, or its connexion 
 with any Christian church at Rome, can be 
 drawn. It was as a Jew that Aquila was 
 driven from Rome : and there is not a word 
 of Christians here. If one could identify 
 this expulsion of the Jews with that of the 
 ' mathematici ' in Tacitus (Ann. xii. 52), 
 which took place Fausto Sulla, Salv. Othone 
 Coss. (a.d. 52), we might be on surer 
 ground, — but this is very uncertain, and 
 even improbable. The two could hardly 
 have been united. The circumstance related 
 by Dio Cassius, Ix. 6, which seems to con- 
 tradict Suetonius and our text, — τους 'ίου- 
 ϋαίους πλεονάσαντας αύθις, ίόςτε χαλεπώς 
 άν avtv ταραχής ΰττό τοϋ ΰχλου σψών 
 της πόλεως είρχθήναι, ουκ ίΚήλασε μ(ν, 
 τψ ϋί ττατρίψ νόμφ βίω χρωμίτους ίκί- 
 λιυσε μή συναθροίζεσθαι, — probably de- 
 scribes a step taken by Claudius previousli/ 
 to this expulsion, which is not unlikely to 
 have occasioned the tumults which neces- 
 
 sitated it. — The edict soon became invalid, 
 or the prohibition was taken off : we find 
 Aquila at Rome, Rom. xvi. 3, and many 
 Jews resident there, ch. xxviii. 15 if. 
 3. ήργάζετο] " The Jewish Rabbis having 
 no state pay, it was their practice to teach 
 their children a trade. ' What is com- 
 manded of a father towards his son ?' asks 
 a Talmudic writer. ' To circumcise him, to 
 teach him the law, to teach him a trade.' 
 Rabbi Judah saith, ' He that teacheth not 
 his son a trade, doth the same as if he 
 taught him to be a thief:' and Rabban 
 Gamaliel saith, ' He that hath a trade in 
 his hand, to what is he like ? He is like a 
 vineyard that is fenced.' " C. and H. p. 51 . 
 — The places where Paul refers to his sup- 
 porting himself by his own manual labour 
 are, — ch. xx. 34 (Ephesus) : — 1 Cor. ix. 
 12 if. 2 Cor. vii. 2 (Corinth):— 1 Thess. 
 ii. 9. 2 Thess. iii. 8 (Thessalonica). — In 
 2 Cor. xi. 9, we learn that supjjlies were 
 also brought to him at Corinth from Mace- 
 donia, i. e. Philippi, see Phil. iv. 15. 
 σκηνοίΓοιοί] The general opinion now is, 
 that Paul was a maker of tents from the 
 'cilicium,' or hair-cloth of CUician goats. 
 Thus Kuinoel, citing from Hug and Eich- 
 horn, says of the former, " Ad banc scn- 
 tentiam comprobandam monuit, Ciliciam, 
 Pauh patriam, refertam fuisse birds et ca- 
 pris viUosis, eorumque villis Cilices usos 
 esse ad conficiendum pannum, Ciliciuin 
 inde dictum. Suidas : Κίλικος τράγος• ό 
 δασύς' τοιούτοι yap iv Κιλικία γίνονται 
 τρύγοι, 'όθεν καΐ τά εκ των τριχών συν- 
 τιθίμεια Κι\ίκια καλοϋί'ται. Hoc panno 
 usos esse milites, nautas, Nomadas, ad ten- 
 toria conficienda, v. Vegetius, de Re Mil. 
 iv. G. Plin. N. H. vi. 28, ' Nomades, in- 
 festatoresque Chaldaeorum scenitae . . . . et 
 ipsi vagi, sed a tabernaculis cognominati, 
 quae ciliciis metantur, ubi libuit.' Solin. 33, 
 ' Scenitse caussam nominis inde ducunt, quod 
 tentoriis succedunt, nee alias domos habent, 
 ipsa autem tentoria cilicina sunt ; ita nun- 
 cupantur velamenta caprarum pilis texta.' "
 
 S-8. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 185 
 
 " Α.ατηλθοί' απο της Μακεδονίας ο τε Σίλας και ο Τ<- a = ch.vm.5 
 
 μόθίος, 'συνείνετο τω λόγω ο Παΰλος, "^οία^ίαρτυοοιιιει^ος '^^"(!;<ϊ.^y"•,''^''■ 
 -'τ^' ν ^Ί- 6Ί' ' Phil. i. Ϊ3. 
 
 τοις ιυυόαίοις τον γριστον ιησονν. αντιτασσομενων see mhu. ΐτ. 
 
 Λ\ι- ^e/0^ , ' f» f ν«/ -*■.. Wisd. 
 
 οί αυτωΐ' Kat ρλασφημονντων εκτιναί,αμενος τα ιμάτια (.ch"vui .'5 
 ειττεν ποος ακΓους Ιο αίμα νμων ^ επί την κεφαΛτ/ν υμών djamesiv.fi. 
 
 h Λ ^ ' ^ i ' > - - • ^ ''Λ ' ν. 6. 1 Pet. 
 
 καυαρος εγω απο του νυν εις τα ίυνη πορίυσομαι. ^^,,^^^^ΰ^ 
 ' καί μεταβας εκείθεν ί;λθεν εις οικίαν τίνος ονόματι e = ch^siu. 45 
 Ιουστου σεβόμενου τον θεον, ού η οικία ην "^ συνομοροΰσα '^''['^(,^"^•^1 
 
 " " ?> Λ/' ' ζι^'ιι' ' ο'' g ellip.s., ch. 
 
 ΤΜ avvayiuyy. " !\.οισπος οε ο αρνισυνανωνος επι- *" xiu.!!'. mait 
 
 ' '-"■ , .' «. - , * ^, - ' S .. , 5^^"•.2?- 
 
 στευσεν τω κυριω συν ολω τω *^ οίκω αυτού, και ποΛΑοι Rom.i.is. 
 
 ». S ι. t (. ι. ' U. 2, y. 
 
 των Κορινθίων ακουοντες '' επι'στευον και εβαπτι^^οντο. hifriV.'^" 
 
 26. Gen. xxir. 8. i Luke i. 48 al3. 2 Cor. τ. Ifi. L. P. Psa.cxii. 2. k Malt. xi. 1 al. 
 
 1 = ch. XTi. 14 only. See ch. siii. 5fl. ui iKie only t. η Mark v. 22, ^"c. ch. xiii. 15 +. 
 
 ο = Λν. dat., ch.xyi. 34 (= Luke only). ρ ch. x. 2 rcU'. q aksol., ch. xr. 5 rtff. 
 
 της om G al. — for ο re, τότε D^-gr. — ο hef ημ. om D 42. 173 al. — σνί'ηρχίτο 43: συν- 
 ΐΐργίτο 27 : perseverabat sah. — rec for τω λόγω, τω πνιυματι (substitution from niis- 
 zinderstanding .• or perhaps, as Meyer, originally a scholium on συπιχιτο, and thence 
 has usurped the place of the origl τω λόγω), with Η &'c arm syr-marg Chr Thl Oec : 
 add τω α•^ιω G8 : txt ABDEG 13. 40. 73. 137. 142 lectt s}rr ar-erp copt sah (instabaf 
 verba v) Bas Thdrt Chr (ms). — ο om D. — διαμαοτυρονμεΐ'ος D al. — τοις lOvS. om AH 
 177'• — bef r. χριστ. ins itviii ABD all (some aft xf>.) ν copt Syr ar-erp arm slav-mod-syr* 
 Bas Thl-' {supplementary addn) : txt EGH most mss (appy) Chr Thdrt ThU Oec— bef 
 ιησ. ins κνριον D : ujcr. τ. χρ. 95 : ιησ. ttvat τ. χρ. 180. — 6. at beg, ins πολλού δε 
 λογού γίΐνομενου και -γράφων Ιιερμηνίνομενων D syr-marg. — for αντιτησσ., tri τασσ. 
 D'-gr: αρθισταμενων 15. 18. 3G : αντιταμενων 180. — aft £ΚΤ(ΐ'αξ. ins ο ττηυλος D 
 (tol latt-mss). — τα ιμ. αντον, or οντ. τ. ιμ. D 173. 180 sah. — τας κεφάλας 113. 180. 
 — £γω αφ νμων νυν D^ : aUi alitor. — πορίνομαι D'GH' 73 Syr ar-erp Chr (mss). — • 
 7. for εκείθεν, — απο τον ακνλα D' 137.^£ίς>/λθίΐ' AD' (and ε. τον οίκον D) 13. 25. 27- 
 2ϋ. 33 al ν Syr ar-erp sah seth syr-marg Tld^ (cot-tm for particularity) : txt B(e sil) 
 D-EGH most mss copt syr ar-pol Chr Thl' Oec. — ονόματος D' : om A 2. 30. 104 seth. 
 — bef (outrr. ins τιτιον or riroo (E al ν [but am om the ver] copt al Jer) BD--gr E: 
 ιουστ. om 2. 30 Syr sah al Cassiod : τιτον viov ιουστου ar-pol: alii aliter (originally 
 prob a mistake arising from ονοματιιονστ., the τι. being taken for the first syll of τιτου 
 or TLTiov) : txt AD'GH most mss ieth slav Chr Thl' Oec. — for σε/3., φοβούμενου 73. — tjv η 
 οικία 13. — συνομοροουσα ΑΌ 13. — 8. ο όε αρχισ. κρισττ. D. — εις τον κνριον D. — for συ»', 
 εν ΚΚ—ακονσαντες G 4. 25. 137 lectt 13, 14 (vss) Thl Oec (ed).— ακ-ουοιτ. εβαπ. 
 τΓίστευοντες τω θεω (τ. θ. also Syr ar-erp) δια τ. ονόματος τ. κυρίου ημ. ιησ. χρ. D (δια 
 
 If it be objected, that Paul would hardly (see refF.) :— a crisis in the work being im- 
 
 find the raw material for this work in cities minent, which resulted in their rejection of 
 
 far from Cilicia, it may be answered, that the word of life. (On the whole character 
 
 this would not be required in the fabrication of his early preaching at Corinth, see notes, 
 
 of iew^s from the AaiV-c/o//i, which doubtless 1 Cor. ii. 1 — 5.) Thus only the 2ε in ver. 5 
 
 itself would be an article of commerce in the and that in ver. 6 will botli be satisfied : 
 
 markets of Greece. — Chrysost. calls Paul * he discoursed in the synagogue, &c. 
 
 sometimes σκηνορράφος, sometimes σκυτο but when S. and T. returned, he 
 
 τόμος, a leather cutter, imagining that the was earnestly occupied in discoursing, 
 
 tents were made of leather ; — ini σκηνορρα- &c. But, as they opposed themselves 
 
 φείυυ ίστώς δίρμητα ϊρραπτε (in Catenfi). and blasphemed,' &c. 6.] αίμα as 
 
 5.] See ch. xvii. 15. 1 Thess. iii. (i. in ch. xx. 20. The image and nearly the 
 
 σννίίχίτο τω λόγω] ' When S. and words, are from Ezek. xxxiii. 4. De Wette 
 
 T. returned from M., they found Paul should have known better than to call a 
 
 anxiously occupied in discoursing to the citation from the LXX an ' unpaillilli)d5Cl" 
 
 Jews.' This 1 believe to be the meaning : ©pvadigebraild).' άτΓο τον νΐν] Not 
 
 that they found him in a state of more than absolutely, only at Corinth : for ver. 10 wo 
 
 ordinary anxiety, — more tiian usually ab- find him arguing with the Jews again in 
 
 sorbod in the work of testifying to the Jews the synagogue at Ephcsus. I have adui)ted
 
 ]86 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 χνιΐί. 
 
 vch.vii.;ilalio 
 Acta only 
 {ex 
 xiii.i)), 
 
 δε ο κνοιυς δι ' οράματος ev νυκτι τω Παύλω 
 
 '/g™. M)j φηβοΰ, αλλά λάλίΐ και μη σιώπησες, ^ διοη εγώ 
 
 ti/.u μίτα σον, και ουοίΐς ίπιυη(ηται σοι του κακωσαι 
 
 ^ δίόη Χαός εση μοι πολύς εν τν, ττολει ταυτί^). 
 
 ίκάΟισίν τί ΐνιαυτον και ;υ;νας ίζ ^ οιοασκων εν αυτοις 
 
 ^ λόγον του Οεου. Γολλιωΐ'ος οε ^ ανθυπατίυοντος 
 
 ABD 
 EG II 
 
 l.-,a. xii. L'. 
 
 I.. P. priiici- 
 
 paMy. 
 
 ih. vii ». X. 
 
 88. ΙάΆ. Ιτϋί 
 
 11. 
 ι -= here only. _!ί„ 
 
 Gen. xliii. 18. TOl' 
 ■ con-tr . Luke - 
 
 σε, 
 11 
 
 '7 
 
 της Ανπιης κατίττ^στησαν ομουυμαόον οι Ιουοίποι τω 
 
 χ = Luke χχίν. 1!). 
 ίιτίασιν ί'ττί τϊ/κ τοΰ άι^υττατεΐ'Οΐ'τυί οι 
 
 Exocl. xvi 2!). 
 Herodi. 
 
 oh. .\v. 3Ί al. 
 a here only t. 
 
 ζ ht re only f. 
 b oh. i. 14 reff. 
 
 to χρ. 137 syr", — and εηισπυσαν 137). — 9• ο om D. — tv ννκτ. Si op. Β 13. 130 ν ThP : 
 <^i op. τω π. f j' ΐ'υκΓί D Till' : εν οραματι (omg tv νυκ.) A, as also Syr ar-erp {ikis last 
 is an alteration after ch'ix. 10, 12, χ 3: the others are arbitrary variations of the 
 order, which is characteristic) : t.xt EGH {της νυκτός Η) most inss sah copt Eeth syr slav al 
 ClirOec. — 10. aoioniD-grE. — εστίν E8ic: txtAD. — /ίου πολύς• ίση 180. — 11. εκαθ.όί 
 ΑΒ 13 al ν e copt sah syr : και εκαθ. D (add εν κορ. D Syr ar-erp syr* : εκη 40 ν sah arm 
 slav- mod vss) (corrns to avoid the characteristic τε) : txt E-gr GH most mss ieth al Chr 
 Till Oec. — for tv avr., αντονς D-gr 4 al Syr ar-erp eeth: αυτοις 37. 5β. 100. — 12. for 
 ανθνττατευυΐ'τος, αιθυπατιηι οντος ABD 36. 40. Gi!. 180 {alteration of unusual 
 word) : txt EGII most mss Chr Thl Oec. — oi (om 95) ιοι;β. ομοθ. Β copt sah. — for τω ττ. 
 και, — συνλαλησαντες μεθ εαυτών εττι τον τταυλον και εηιθεντες τας χίΐρας D (and επιθ. 
 
 the punctuation of Lachmann, erasing the 
 colon after εγώ : Ί shall henceforth with a 
 pure conscience go to the Gentiles.' 
 7.] In order to shew that he henceforth 
 separated himself from the Jews, he, on 
 leaving the synagogue, went no longer to 
 the house of the Jew Aquila (who appears 
 aftern-ards to have been converted), but to 
 the house of a Gentile proselyte of the gate, 
 close to the synagogue : q. d. ' in the sight 
 of all the congregation in the synagogue :' 
 for this seems to be the object in mention- 
 ing the circumstance. 8.] On this, a 
 schism took place among the Jews. The 
 ruler of the synagogue attached himself to 
 Paul, and was, together with Gaius, bap- 
 tized by the Apostle himself (1 Cor. i. 14) : 
 and with him many of the Corinthians 
 (Jews and Gentiles, it being the house 
 of a proselyte), probably Aquila and Pris- 
 cilla also, believed and were baptized. 
 9. λάλ. κ. μ,ή σιωτΓ.] So, for solemnity's 
 sake, we have an affirmation and negation 
 combined, John i. 3. See also Isa. Iviii. 1. 
 10. Ιπιθ. σοι] See ref. examples of 
 this usage in Wetst. : — ' shall set on thee,' 
 as E. V. Xaos ecrri μοι ττολΰς] See 
 John X. 16". As our Lord /ore?<'ar/ierf Paul 
 in Jerusalem that they would not receive 
 las testimony concerning Him, so here He 
 encourages him, by a promise of much suc- 
 cess in Corinth. The word λαός, the express 
 title beforetime of the Jews, is still used 
 now, notwithstanding their secession. 
 11.] The year and a half may extend either 
 to his departure, or to the incident in vcr. 
 12 ff. Meyer would confine it to the latter, 
 taking ίκάΰισεν in the sense of ' remained 
 
 in quiet .•' but (see reff.) it will hardly bear 
 such emphasis : and seeing that the inci- 
 dent in ver. 1 2 ff. was a notable fulfilment 
 of the promise, — for though they set on 
 him, theij could not hurt him, — I should 
 be disposed to take the other view, and re- 
 gard v. 12 to Ίκανάς, ver. 18, to have hap- 
 pened during this time. 12. Γαλ- 
 \ίωνο5ΐ His original name was Marcus 
 Annseus Novatus : but, having been adopted 
 into the femily of the rhetorician Lucius 
 Junius Gallio, he took the name of Junius 
 Anneeus Gallio. He was brother of Lucius 
 Annseus Seneca, tlie philosopher, whose 
 character of him is in exact accordance with 
 that which we may infer from this narrative : 
 ' Nemo mortalium mihi tam dulcis est, quam 
 hie omnibus :' ' Gallionem fratrem meum, 
 quem nemo non parum amat, etiam qui 
 amare plus non potest.' He is called ' dulcis 
 Gallio ' by Statins, Silv. ii. 7- 32. He ap- 
 pears to have given up the province of 
 Achaia from ill health : ' Illud mihi in ore 
 erat domini mei Gallionis qui cum in Achaia 
 febrem habere coepisset, jjrotinus naveni 
 ascendit, clamitans non corporis esse scd 
 loci morbum.' Senec. Ep. 104. He was 
 spared after the execution of his brother 
 (Tacit. Ann. χ v. 73) : but Dio Cassius, 
 Ixii. 25, adds, oi αδελφοί 'ύστερον επαπώ- 
 λοί'τ-ο, and Euseb. Chron. ad ann. 818 
 (a.d. 60), says that he put an end to him- 
 self after his brother's death. άνθυ- 
 -ττατευ.] See note on ch. xiii. 7• Achaia 
 was originally a senatorial province (Dio 
 Cass. liii. 12), but was temporarily made an 
 imperial one by Tiberius, Tacit. Ann. i. "](>, 
 'Achaiam ac Macedoniam, onera deprecan-
 
 9—17. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 187 
 
 ΤΊαυλω και rjyayov αυτυν ίπι το ^ βήμα, "* λενοιτες on oMatt.xxvii. 
 τταρα τον νομον ανηπίΐυίΐ ούτος τους ανυοωπους di'^o^'-j ^η 
 σφίσθαι τον Οίον. ^ μίΧΧοντος δε τον Παύλου '" αυοί- f.'sfy'ai.*^^'' 
 
 ν / τ 'τ-'ΛΛ' ^ ^'I^^' e here only. 
 
 yiiv TO στόμα ειττεΜ ο 1 αλλίων προς τους Ιουοαιονς xln^liJ'•^• 
 Ει μίν ούν την ^ αδίκημα τι η ' pac^oυoyημa πονηρον, ώ fseevir.'".' 
 Ιονόαιοι, κατά Aoyov αν ηνίσ-νομην υμών ει οε gM^t'-v. sai. 
 
 my' '» ^n^' ^' ' ^' Job iii 1 
 
 ί,ητηματα εστίν πίρι Λογού και ονομάτων και νομού hcb.s.K\v'.2n. 
 
 - ο Λ' ' - Ρ " Ι Λ ' '. \ . \ , , Ret. xviii. ft 
 
 του καυ νμας, ' οψεσϋε αυτοί κριτής εyω τούτων ου only, ι Kings 
 βυυΧομαι είναι. και '^ απηλασεν αυτούς αττό τοΰ ' ste^r.'iiii. 
 
 '^βήματος. ' '^ επιΧαβόμενοι δε ττάντες Έωσθενην του there only. 
 
 14. όι' >ji/ αίτιαι• α)';ττΐ]τ«? ύτΓ'ίμχειΐ' ίιβί'λίίπτο, Και κατά λόγοι/. Diod. Sic. iv. Π. 1 2 Cor. si. 
 
 1,4. =2Tim. iv. 3. Hcb.xiii.2i'. Job vi. 2ti. m ch. xv. 2 red'. η = 2 Tim. i. 13. Tit. i. 9. ii. 
 
 7. Heb. ii. 2. 1 John ii. 7. ο ch. xvii. 28. Eph. i. 15. 'ί^ίαστος τι'<ν κιχθ' ΐαυτόν fpu. Xen. Cyi v. 
 
 1.11. ρ Matt, xxvii. 4, 24. Exod. vi. 1. q here only. Ezek. xxxiv. 12. = Xen. Mem. ii. B. 12. 
 
 r w. ace, rh. ix. 27 refl'. 
 
 Γ. χ. αντω syr* sah). — 13. καταβοωντις και \iy. D. — rec οντος αιαπ. (corrn of cha- 
 racteristic order), with DE &c : t.xt AB 38. 113. (13.S) : πάθη Η 40: ararptntt 1. 
 C5. 133.— 14. oi.i^ om ABDE 13. 2G. 27- 29. 36. 40. βΟ. 105. 133. 137 al (v syrr an• 
 sah seth arm) Chr Thl (.see note): ins G();i' om G 25: τ; A')H most mss Oec. — 
 ττοι/λ^ρ. om 38. — ω ανΟρις ιομδ. D v. — αησχ. Β 13 : also A 33. 34. 36 omg av {con- 
 fusion arising from ανηνίσχ.) : txt DEGH mss (appy) Chr Thl Oec. — 15. rec Ζΐ}τημα 
 (corrn to suit αΐικημα and ραοιονργημα above: the plur has a meaning, see note), with 
 D^GH &c Chr ThP Oec : t.xt ABD^E-gr 25. 29. 40. 69. 73. 81. 137 ν syrr ar-erp slav 
 copt sah arm Thl'. — for ισην, ixtrt D-gr. — for νομ., λογού 57• — rec κριτής γαρ (stip- 
 plementart/ insertion), with EGH &c syrr al Chr al : txt ABD 13 ν copt seth. — εγιο 
 om 180. — 16. ατΓίλυιτΜ' D' 133: abjecit d. — 17. απολαβ. D. — rec aft παντις ins oi 
 tWijitg (see note), with DE(GH.'): oi lou^atoi 180: lovc. 15. 18. 36: om AB al ν 
 copt ar-erp Chi'-comm (but omg τταιτις too) : μετά σωσθ. D : adprehendenies eum . . . 
 
 tes, levari in preesens proconsular! imperio, 
 tradique Csesari placuit.' Claudius (Suet. 
 Claud. 25), ' Provincias Achaiani et ]\Iace- 
 doniam quas Tiberius ad curam suam trans- 
 tulerat, senatui reddidit.' τ. Αχαίας] 
 
 The Roman province of Achaia contained 
 Hellas and the Peloponnesus, and, with 
 [Macedonia, embraced all their Grecian do- 
 minions. It was so called, according to 
 Pausanias (vii. 16. ^), because the Romans 
 ίχειρώσαντο "Έ,\\ηι•ας δι' Άχαίων τότε 
 τον ΈλληΐΊκον προεητηκότων (the Achaian 
 league). — " The βήμα is mentioned three 
 times in the course of thi.•; narrative (see 
 vv. 16, 17)• It was of two kinds : (1) fi.xed 
 in some public and open place : (2) move- 
 able, and taken by the Roman magistrates 
 to be ))laced wherever they might sit in a 
 judicial character. Probably here and in 
 the case of Pilate (John xix. 13), the former 
 kind of seat is intended. See Smith's Diet, 
 of Antiquities, under ' Sella.' See also some 
 remarks on "the tribunal, — 'the indispen- 
 sable s-ymbol of the Roman judgment-seat,' 
 in the Edinburgh Review for Jan. 184 7, 
 p. 151." C. and II. vol. i. 4.i0. 13. 
 
 ΊΓορα τ. νόμον] Against the Mosaic law ; — 
 tiic <;.vcrcisi; of whi(;h, as a ' religio licita,' 
 was allowed to the Jews. 14.] Though 
 
 MSS authority is so strong against the ού>•, 
 I have retained it, as also has Tischendorf. 
 Its omission may be easily accounted for, 
 from the copyists finding it unnecessary 
 and seemingly out of place : but on no suji- 
 pofition can its insertion be rendered pro- 
 bable. It stands very ap|>ropriately here, 
 referring to the complaint of the Jew.':, 
 either as uttered by them, or perhaps reca- 
 pitulated by Gallio : — ' Ye have charged 
 this man uith lawless conduct.' ' If now 
 
 this had really been so ' 
 
 κατά. λόγον] See reff. ^ye have the oppo- 
 site — ffoit \i<yov in 2 ^lacc. iv. 3'). 
 ov ήνεσχ. ύμ.] ' I should have borne 
 with (patiently heard) you.' 15.] 
 
 Ζητήματα has apparently been altered to 
 ζί/τημα to suit the sense, there being but one 
 question before Gallio. But the ))lural ex- 
 presses contempt : 'If it is questions,' &c. : 
 as we should say, ' a parcel of (picstions.' 
 See ch. xxiii. 29. 15. ονομάτων] e. g. 
 
 Paul asserted Jesus to be the Christ, which 
 the Jews denied. This to a Roman would 
 be a question of names. τ. καθ' χιμάς, 
 
 with emphasis : see reff. So Ly.^ias (cli. 
 xxiii. 29) declined to decide Paul's case, 
 and Festus (ch. xxv. 20) though he did not 
 altogether put the enquiry by, wished to
 
 188 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 sver. 8reir. ^ apγισυv(ιyωyυv ίτυπτον ^^ίμττροσΟεν του '^βήματος' και αώβ 
 vi'io"" "^"' ούδεν τουτωί> τω Γαλλίωιη "ίμίλίν. ^^ Ο δε Παΰλος 
 
 U coiistr., hero ,r y ι <•/ w' •^ '"'2'Aj,"x' ίί 
 
 only, jub εη ΤΓοοςμεινας ημίηας ικανας, τοις αοελψοις απorα^- 
 "^ oniyl'i τ'ιη. άμίνος '' εξεττλει εις rijy Συ^οια»', και συν αντω Υίρισκιλλα 
 wch.ix.23 roll. KQi Άκυλαο, ^ κίΐοάμίνος εν Κί-γγοίαις rrjv κίώαΧην' 
 
 κ en. viii. 32. 1 Cor. xi Ο only. 
 
 Luke ix. 61. 2Cor. ii. 13. 
 
 yell. XP. 3U reff. 
 
 CMiw Sost/i,'7ien d. — truTrr. «uroi/ 13. — «at .... ίμίλεν om 96' : for f/<., (μίλλιν G 38. 
 93. 90. 137. 177. 191. 192: iunc Gallio fingebat eum non videre d. — 18. ιπιμινας Ε, 
 — EnXtvaev D' {navUjarit d v) : t^tnXivatv E- {ennvigavit e). — recr. (t>jv om 95'. 133) 
 (c{0. t)' κίγχ. {corrn iif characteristic order), with DEGII &c: txt AB 13. 180 ν ThP. — 
 κίνχρίίαις D, κίχρίαις 11 all sah, «γχραις 137 = «i' κίγχ. om £eth. — προι^ινχτιν D' : 
 
 judge it at Jerusalem, where he might have 
 the counsel of those learned in the Jewish 
 law. 17. iravTcs] Apparently, all the 
 
 mob, i. e. the Gentile population present. 
 Sostliencs, as the ruler of the synagogue 
 {άί)χ. = either the ruler, or one of the 
 rulers ; perhaps he had succeeded Crispus), 
 had been the chief of the complainant Jews, 
 and therefore, on their cause being rejected, 
 and themselves ignominiously dismissed, was 
 roughly treated by the mob. From this, 
 certainly the right explanation, has arisen 
 the gloss ot "ΕΧλψ'ίς. The other gloss, 
 ol ΊηυίοΤοι, has sprung from the notion 
 that this Sosthenes was the same person 
 with the Sosthenes of 1 Cor. i. 1, a Chris- 
 tian and a companion of Paul. But, not 
 to insist on the improbability of the party 
 driven from the tribunal having beaten one of 
 their antagonists in front of the tribunal, — 
 why did they not beat Paulhimself? — There 
 is no ground for supposing the two persons 
 to be the same, Sosthenes being no uncom- 
 mon name. If they were, this man must 
 Lave been converted afterwards : but he is 
 not among those who accompanied Paul 
 into Asia, either in ver. 18, or ch. xx. 4. — 
 The carelessness of Gallio about the matter 
 clearly seems to be a further instance of his 
 contempt for the Jews, and indisposition to 
 favour them or their persecution of Paul. 
 Had this been otherwise meant, certainly 
 και would not have been the copula. ' So 
 little did the information against Paul pros- 
 per, that the informers themselves were 
 beaten without interference of the judge.' 
 Meyer. 18.] It has been considered 
 
 doubtful whether the words Knp. τ. κίφ. 
 κ.τ.λ. apply to Paul, the subject of the sen- 
 tence, or to Aquila, the last subject. The 
 former is held by Chrys., Theoph., Aug., 
 Jer., Isid., Bed., Calv., Bez., Calov., Wolf., 
 Olsh., Neand., De Wette, al. :— the latter 
 by (Vulg.), Grot., Alberti, Kuinoel, Meyer, 
 al., and recently Mr. Hovvson, vol. i. p. 453. 
 — But I quite agree with Neander (Pfl. u. 
 Leit. p. 348, note), that if we consider the 
 matter carefully, there can be no doubt that 
 
 they can only apply to Paul. For, al- 
 though this vow differed from that of the 
 Nazarite, who shaved his hair at the end of 
 his votive period, in the temple at Jerusalem, 
 and burnt it with his burnt-offering (Num. 
 vi. 1—21), Josephus gives us a description 
 of a somewhat similar one, B. J. ii. 15. 1, 
 τους γαρ f; νόσψ καταττονουμίνους ή τισιν 
 άλΧαις όνί'ί-/καις, 'ίθυς εϋχίσθαι προ τριά- 
 κοντα ήμίρών ής άποΰώσίΐν μίλλοιιν 
 θυσίας, ο'ίνυυ ts άψίζβσΰαι και ξ,υρησασθαι 
 τάς κόμας, — where it appears from ξνρη- 
 σασθαι (which, as Neander observes, if it 
 applied to the end of the time, would be 
 'ζυρησεσθαι [or perhaps rather θρίψίΐΐ']), 
 that the hair was shaved thirty days before 
 the sacrifice. At all events, 7io sacrifice 
 could be offered any where but at Jeru- 
 salem .• and every such vow would conclude 
 with a sacrifice. Now we find, on com- 
 paring the subsequent course of Aquila with 
 that of Paul, — that the former did not go 
 up to Jerusalem, but remained at Ej)hesus 
 (ver. 2fi) : but that Paul hastened by Ephe- 
 sus, having a special reason for keeping the 
 feast then imminent at Jerusalem {Sti με 
 
 ■πάντως ver. 21). Again, it would 
 
 be quite irrelevant to the purpose of Luke, 
 to relate such a fact of one of PauVs com- 
 panions. That he should do so apologetic- 
 ally, to shew that the Ap. still countenanced 
 conformity with the law, is a view which 
 I cannot find justified by any features of 
 this book : and it surely would be a very 
 far-fetched apology, and one likely to escape 
 the notice of many readers, seeing that 
 Aquila would not appear as being under 
 Paul's influence, and even his conversion to 
 the Gospel has not been related, but is left 
 to be implied from ver. 26. Again, Meyer's 
 ground for referring κιιράμ. to Aquila, — 
 that his name is here placed after that of his 
 wife, — is untenable, seeing that, for some 
 reason, probably the superior character or 
 office in the church, of Priscilla, the same 
 arrangement is found (in the best MSS at 
 ver. 2G, and) at Rom. xvi. 3. 2 Tim. iv. 19. 
 Lastly, the very form of the sentence is
 
 18—21, 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 189 
 
 iiyev •γαξ) ευχην. 
 κακεινους κατίΑιπεν αυτού, αυτός οε 
 avvaywyriv '^ ^ΐίΧίγθη τοις Ιουοοίοις. 
 
 ρι> ' - e 
 
 οε αυτών 
 
 έέ 
 
 ' Εψεσον" 
 εις την 
 
 ony. 6ΐ/χ. 
 = Gen. χχχί. 
 
 13. SceJauifS 
 
 ν. 15. 6χ. 
 
 = Luke xii. 
 
 fti). 2 Cor. ίτ. 
 
 1. Phil. i. 3U. 
 bch. xvi. 1 rell'. 
 ech. xvii.2reft'. 
 d = Mark vii. 
 
 2H. Luke vii. 
 
 36. 
 
 ch.iii. 21 al. 
 1 Mkcc. iv. 28(alcx.). 
 
 ^■^ κατί/ιτησον ϋε ε(ς 
 
 ειςελθων 
 
 20 <ι ' ' 
 
 Ερωτώντων 
 
 Επ< ττλίίονα y^povov μίΐναι ουκ επεί'ευσεν, 
 
 ^^ άλλα " απετάξατο αυτοις ππων Δε( με ' πάντως την 
 
 « Ν ν k ' ' 1 - m ' 'τ 'λ 'Λ 
 
 εοοτην την εργομεΐ'ην ποιησαι εις ΙεροσοΛυ^αα, τταΛιν 
 
 e = γ1> χίϋ 31 reft'. f here only. Prov. xxvi. 2Λ. g ver. 18. h conslr., n. ; 
 
 i = Luke iv. 23. ch. sxi. 22. xxviij. 4. Tuhit xif. 8.t k ^ ch. xiii. 44 (Paul) 
 
 1 = Matt. xxvi. 18. Heb. xi. 28. Deut. xvi. 1 al. m ch. viii. 40 al. 
 
 orationem d. — 19. rec κατηντησε (alteration to singular to suit κατελιπεν below), with 
 GH &c vss Chr al : txt ABE VA. 40 d tol (and other lat mss) Syr sah ar-erp : καταν- 
 τησας D-gr. — for κακ(ΐι•ονς (και εκ. EH all Chr ThU Oec), — και τω ίπιοντι σαββατω 
 εκείνους D (also aft εφ. ins τω επ. σαβ. 137 syr*). — καηλεητε^' AGH ]3. 122 : ins ο 
 παυλος Syr sah: alii ahter. — for αντον, εκεί ADE 13. 40. 73 (alteration to more usual 
 word) : txt BOH mss (nrly) ff.— tv τη σννα-^ωγη 78.— οΐίλίξαΓο AB 13 Ύ\ύ• (corrn to 
 more usttalform) : txt EGH iiiss (nrly) Chr Thdrt (fiJjX.) Thl• Oec : ί^ιελεγετο D al ν 
 (not am) al. — 20. for of, τε D' Syr aeth. — αυτών om 137 : αντον D^G 31. 6C. 98. 177 
 Thl-. — rec μειν. παρ αυτοις (explanatory addn), with DEGH al &c syrf : μειν. εκίΐ 
 tol sah arm : τταραμειναι avroic 25 : txt AB 13. 15. 18. 30. 40. 73. 105. 180 ν ieth.— 
 21. rec αλλ, with GH &c Chr fhP : txt ABDE all ThF Oec— for αττετ. αυτοις ειττ., 
 αποταΚαμενυς και ειττων ABDE (but απ. αυτοις Ε al ThP) 13. 15. 18. 30. 40. C8. 69. 
 105. 180 al ν ath arm ThP : αλλ αποτ. και om Syr ar-erp : txt GH &c vss Chr Thli 
 Oec. (T/te varr have first arisen from the abbreviation of the sentence by the omn of 
 ίει με i^c below, in conseq of which it more easily admitted of the form αποταζαμενος 
 . . . ειπών . . . ανηχθη. The corrn then found its way into MSS (e. g., D) not having 
 the omn.)— hi . . .Ίιροσ. om ABE 13. 14^ 15. 30. 69. 105. 180 ν copt sah seth arm 
 (see note) : ins DGH &c demid syrr arr slav al Chr Thl Oec. — for την bef £ρχ., ημεραν 
 Ό, solemnem diemfestum d. — παΚιν om D sah (this also belonged to the suiting theform 
 
 against a change of subject at κειράμενος. 
 There are, from ver. 18 to 23 inch, — a sec- 
 tion forming a distinct narration, and com- 
 plete it itself, — no less than nine aorist 
 participles, eight of ivhich indisputably ap- 
 ply to Paul as the subject of the section .• 
 leaving it hardly open to question that 
 κειράμενος also must be referred to him. — 
 There need be no enquiry what danger can 
 have prompted such a vow on his part, 
 when we recollect the catalogue given by 
 him in 2 Cor. xi. Besides, he had, since 
 his last visit to Jerusalem, been νόσψ κατπ- 
 πονονμενος (see Jos. above, note on ch. 
 xvi. 6, and Prolegg. to Gal.) : it is true, a 
 considerable time ago, but this need not 
 prevent our supposing that the vow may 
 have been then made, to be paid on his next 
 visit to Jerusalem. That he had not sooner 
 paid it, is accounted for by his having been 
 since that time under continual pressure of 
 preaching and founding churches, and having 
 finally been detained by special command at 
 Corinth. That he was now so anxious to 
 pay it (ver. 21), consists well with the sup- 
 position of its having been long delayed. 
 €V Keyxpcais] ΚεγχρεαΙ κώμη κ. 
 λ(μ^ν άπίχιυΐ' της πόλκ/^ις 'όσον εβΰομή- 
 κηντη fTTiiCia. tovtiij μεν χρωνται npixj 
 τους ίκ της 'Ασίας, προς Ιε τονς ίκ τϊΊς 
 Ιταλίας τφ Αεχαίψ. Strabo, viii. 380. 
 There wa.s soon after a C^hristian church 
 
 there: see Rom. xvi. 1. 19. "Εφεσον] 
 
 Ephesus was the ancient capital of Ionia 
 (Ptol. v. 2. 8), and at this time, of the 
 Roman proconsular province of Asia, — on 
 the Cayster, near the coast, between Smyrna 
 and Miletus. It was famed for its com- 
 merce, but even more for its magnificent 
 temple of Artemis (see ch. xiv. 24, note). 
 See a full account of its situation and his- 
 tory, secular and Christian, in the Prolegg. 
 to Eph. ; and an interesting description, 
 with plan, in Mr. Lewin's Life and Epistles 
 of S. Paul, i. 344 if. αύτοΰ] Perhaps 
 
 this may be said proleptically, referring to 
 his journey to Palestine (De Wette) : but 
 on account of the is which follows, I should 
 rather understand it to mean that the Jewish 
 synagogue was (as sometimes the case, see 
 Winer, RWB., ' Synagogen ') outside the 
 totvn, and that Prise, and Aq. were left in 
 the town. δΐίλε'χθη, aor., referring to 
 
 one, and a transient occasion : cit\kytTo, 
 imperf., ver. 4, of his long stay, and con- 
 tinual discourses in the Corinthian syna- 
 gogue. 21.] The words from ίε~ι to 
 'ϊεροσάλ. can hardly be spurious. No ima- 
 ginable reason can be assigned for their 
 insertion (especially with the indistinct no- 
 tice την εορτ. τ. Ιρχημ., and the ususual 
 εις Ίερ. The great varieties in the MSS 
 which otnit the words are, as De W. ob- 
 serves, also a powerful reason against that
 
 ]90 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 δε " ανακαμφω 
 ?}νΟ/} απο της 
 ^ αναβας και 
 Αντιυγ^ίΐαΐ'. 
 
 ytov. 
 
 π 
 
 ρος 
 
 υμάς 
 'T?j* 22 
 
 και 
 
 τον Οίου ΘεΧοντος, και ° αν~ 
 
 '' κατεΧΟων εις Καισάρίίαν, 
 
 έκκΧησιαν ^ κατίβη ^ εις 
 
 και ^ ποιησας -χ^ρυνον τίνα " ϊζηΧΟεν, 
 
 coOftijc την ΤαΧατικην γωοαν και Ψί 
 
 αθητάς. 
 
 ασπασαμενος την 
 23 
 
 >ρυ- 
 
 11 Malt.ii. 12. 
 
 Heb. xi. Ift. 
 
 Exod. xxxii. 
 
 27. luag. xi. 
 
 38 {alcx ). 
 ο nh xiii. 13 
 
 rcfl•. 
 ρ oh. viii. ftreff. 
 q Hb.ol., Luke, 
 
 here only. 
 
 John vii.S.lO. 
 
 Tii'.o" Neh. yiav, " ετΓίστηριί,ων παντας τους μ 
 
 r-ch.'xxi. 7. XXV. 13. Exod. xriii. 7. s John ii. 12. cli. vii. 15. t = ch. xv. 3.5 reff. 
 
 ti absol.. ch. xv. 4ii. xvi. 3, 40. xx. I «1. τ ch. xu. 10. xiii. 6. w ch. iii. 24 reff.f 
 
 X ch. xiv. 22. XT. 3:;, 41 only J. (2 Kiug.s i. 6.) 
 
 of the sentence to the omn of hi &c) : ins ABE al ν copt aeth. — if om ABDE 13. 20. 36. 
 40. 103 V copt sail aeth {part of the corrn to suit the omn of δει &cc) : ins GH &c syrr 
 al Chr Thl' Oec : και ττιιλιν demid Thl•^ — bef ανηχΟ. om και (see above on αποτ.) ABD 
 15. 18. id. 103. 105. 180 [not E, vihich is a strong aryument for the genuineness of 
 the rec, seeing that Ε omits Bh Sfc) ν sah arm al : txt EGH &c vss {α}>ηχΘ. St copt) : 
 (for ανηχ. to αναβας, — ακυλαν δε κατελιπίν εν εφεσω' αντος yai) εν πλυιω αχΟεις 
 ίΐλΰεν κς• καισαρειαν αναβ. δε sjT-marg : simly 97- ΙΙΊ?) : απηχΟη 13. — 22. κ. καταβας 
 CC. 100 al Chr-comm : trrXti sah: add ο τταυλος 31. ίίί) al. — και αναβ. D. — ior την 
 £«;κλ., τονς αδελφούς 00.— 23. κατεζης D : om 90. 142 sah arm. — κ•, την φρυγ. 177• 181). 
 — ιττηριζων ΑΒ 13 (the compotmd seeming unnecessary') : txt DEGII (και ε~ιστ. D 38) 
 iiiss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec— Travr. om 18. 25. 3G. G8. 99. 105. 180 tol lat-mss ThP : ins aft 
 
 ABD 
 EGH 
 
 omission), but their omission is easily ac- 
 countable by tlieflj^(i/3ag below having been 
 misunderstood, and its having been ima- 
 gined that he did not go up to Jerusalem at 
 this time. [I need hardly remind the 
 veriest tiro in criticism, that such an omis- 
 sion from ' carelessness of scribes ' (see 
 Bloomf. edn. 9, in loc.) is out of the ques- 
 tion, vphere, as here, no account can be 
 given of such carelessness. Aug. 185C.] 
 την lopT. T. epx.] What feast? 
 (1) Not the Passover: for the ordinary 
 duration of the ' mare clausum ' was (Livy 
 xxxvii. 9) till the vernal equinox. Ac- 
 cording to Vegetius, de Re Milit. iv. 39, 
 'ex die iii. Id. Novembr. usque in diem vi. 
 Id. Martii, maria claudebantur.' And we 
 are not at liberty to assume an exceptional 
 case, such as sometimes occurred (Philo, 
 Leg. ad Caium, p. 1019. Tacit. Ann. xii.43. 
 Plin. ii. 47)• Hence, if the voyage from 
 Corinth at all approached the length of that 
 from Philippi to Jerusalem in ch. xx., xxi., 
 he would have set sail at a time when it 
 would have been hardly possible. (2) Not 
 the feast of Tabernacles. For if it were, 
 he must have sailed from Corinth in August 
 or September. Now, as he stayed there 
 something more than a year and a half, his 
 sea-voyage from Beroea to Athens would in 
 this case have been made in the depth of 
 winter ; which (especially as a choice of land 
 or water was open to him) is impossible. 
 (3) It remains, then, that the feast should 
 have been Pentecost; at which Paul also 
 visited Jerusalem, ch. xx. IC. (The above 
 is the argument of Wieseler, Chron. d. 
 Apostelgesch. pp. 48 — 50, who however 
 allows too long for the voyage from Corinth, 
 forgetting that from the seven weeks' voyage 
 
 of ch. xx. xxi. are to be taken seven days 
 at Troas (xx. C), seven at Tyre (xxi. 4), one 
 at Ptolemais (xxi. 7)» ι'ιμ'εραι πλείους at 
 Csesarea (xxi. 10), — in all certainly not less 
 than three weeks.) — The Ap.'s promise of 
 return was fulfilled ch. xix. 1 fT. 22. 
 
 άναβά5] To Jerusalem: for (1) it would 
 be out of the question to suppose that 
 Paul made the long detour by Csesarea only 
 to go up into the town from the beach, as 
 supposed by most of those who omit δεΧ 
 .... Ίερυσ. in ver. 21, and salute the dis- 
 ciples, — and (2) the expression κατ'εβη εις 
 Ά vr., which suits a journey from Jerusalem 
 (ch. xi. 27), would not apply to one from 
 Csesarea. ασττ. τ. £κκλ.] The pay- 
 
 ment of his vow is not mentioned, partly 
 because it is understood from the mere 
 mention of the vow itself, ver. 18, — partly, 
 perhaps, because it was privately done, 
 and with no view to attract notice as in 
 ch. xxi. 
 
 23.] Paul's visit to the churches 
 IN Galatia and Phrygia. — Either (1) 
 Galatia is here a general term including 
 Lycaonia, and Paul went by Derbe, Lys- 
 tra, Iconium, &c. as before in ch. xvi., 
 or (2) he did not visit Lycaonia this time, 
 but went through Cappadocia : to which 
 also the words διελθόντα τα άνωτερικά 
 μίρη (ch. xix. 1) seem to point, j) άνω 
 Άτια being the country east of the Halys. 
 We find Christian churches in Cappadocia, 
 1 Pet. i. 1. On this journey, as connected 
 with the state of the Galatian churches, 
 see Prolegg. to Gal. — καθεξής implies 
 taking the churches in order ; — regularly 
 visiting them, each as they lay in his route. 
 — One work accomplished by him in this 
 journey was the ordaining (but ajjpa-
 
 22—26. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 191 
 
 - τω -yti^ii, ανηρ 
 
 όυνατος ων ευ ταις 
 μένος τί^ υοοί' του 
 ελάλει Kat εδίδοσκει» 
 
 εις 
 ούτος την 
 Ζίων τω 
 
 Ιουοαιος δε τις Αττολλώς ovouari, Αλεςανδρευς y ver. 2. 
 ' λόγιος, ^ κ:ατϊ)ΐ'Γί]σευ ^ εις Ε<^ί 
 
 •γραφαίς. 
 
 - f ' 
 κνριου, 
 
 ακηιβως τα ττερι 
 
 ' εττισταμενος /uovov το βάπτισμα Ιωάννου' 
 
 ηρζατο παρρησιά^ίσθαι ίν τη συναγωγ?). 
 
 ί./*ι ~ Κι>ηΊ. XII. J 
 
 δε αι»Γθΰ Πρίσκκλλα και ΆκυΧας προςελάβοιτο αυτόν, ^"J|jj/i,* 
 
 του 
 
 26 j 
 
 Jer. xxxis. 
 
 πνίυματι „.>,;\,ϋ.2„^. 
 
 'τ - (1 ch ix. sorcil. 
 
 Ιησού, eLuke i. 4. 
 
 It 
 
 ούτος τε 
 
 ησου, eLukc ί.4. 
 Gx\. vi. r> 
 See ch. xxi. 
 •Jl, 24. 
 ' ' f here only. See 
 
 ακουσαντες ver sh. 
 
 gK.>ni.xii. 11 
 
 h Matt. ii. 8 al. i ch. six. 15 reff. 
 
 jch. ix. 20 refF. k ch. ix. 27 reff. I = ch χ ν 
 
 2Macc.vui. 1. 
 
 μαθ. 42. 57.-24. for απη\., απολλώνιος (aft ονομ. D al) D : απίλλης 15. 1«0 scholl copt 
 arm. — ytvti «λ. (omg τω) D. — 25. ος jjj' icnr. iv τη ττατριδι τον \oyov τυυ (om Β al 
 Thl') κνρ. D (rot' λογυΐ' also 36. 69. 1!3(» al).— for κνρ., χριστού 34 : τον ιησ. lect 5 
 copt syr.— απ£λαλίΐ D : eloquebatur Λ : ίλαλπ ίί Β. — rec του κιιριου {see notes. The 
 varn in the art is no argument (as De Wette) agst the genuineness of the readg : the 
 constant omn of artt aft prepp might easily lead to this : thus we have it omitted also 
 be/Kvpiov), with GH &c Chr Thl' Oec : txt ABDE 13. 30. 38. 40. G9. 73. 137 ν syrr 
 copt sail seth arm ar-erp slav Thl- Aug: r. χριστού 33: κχιριου 137• 177• — 26• τε om 
 D-gr Η sah. — τη oin D'. — icfn ακονσ. D' vss. — αντου om 9G. 142. — rec ακ. κ. ττο., 
 (alteration of characteristic order, cf Rom. .xvi. 3, 2 Tim. iv. 19), with DGH &c vss ff : 
 
 rently not collecting) a contribution for 
 the poor saints at Jerusalem : see 1 Cor. 
 xvi. 1. — Timotheus and Erastus probably 
 accompanied him, see ch. xix. 22. 2 Cor. 
 i. 1, and Gains and Aristarchus, ch. xix. 
 29 ; and perhaps Titus, 2 Cor. xii. 18 al. 
 (and Sosthenes .' (1 Cor. i. 1), but see on 
 ver. 17•) 
 
 24—28.] Apollos at Ephesus, and 
 IN AcHAiA. ΆίΓολλώς] abbreviated 
 
 from Ά ~ολλ(>Ονιος• : see var. read. 
 'j4\e|av8piT5s] Alexandria was the great 
 seat of the Hellenistic language, learning, 
 and philosophy (see ch. vi. 9). A large 
 number of Jews had been planted there by 
 its founder, Alexander the Great. The 
 celebrated LXX version of the O. T. was 
 made there under the Ptolemies. There 
 took place that remarkable fusion of Greek, 
 Oriental, and Judaic elements of thought 
 and belief, which was destined to enter so 
 widely, for good and for evil, into the 
 minds and writings of Christians. We see 
 in the providential calling of Apollos to the 
 ministry, an instance of adaptation of the 
 workman to the work. A masterly expo- 
 sition of the Scriptures by a learned Hel- 
 lenist of Alexandria formed the most ap- 
 propriate watering (1 Cor. iii. 6) for those 
 who had been plaiited by the pupil of Gama- 
 liel, λόγιος] c'itlier (1) learned, as Philo, 
 Vit. Mos. i. 5, Αίγιιτττ/ωΐ' nl λόγιοι, and Jos. 
 B. J. vi. 5. 3, who distinguishes, in the inter- 
 pretation of the omens preceding the siege, 
 01 Ιίιώται from oi Xoyiot, — or (2) eloquent ; 
 so Jos. Antt. xvii. 6.2 calls Judas and Mat- 
 thias, 'lovCciioiv λογίώτητοι and πατρίων 
 i^jjytjTfii νόμων. Tlie etymologists make 
 the former the ancient, — the latter a subse- 
 quent meaning. So Thorn. Mag. : λογίους 
 
 Γοΰς τΓολυίσΓορας ot αρχαίοι Άττικίζον- 
 τ(ς, ώς• και Έρήίοτος' λογίους- Ct τονς 
 ύιαλίΚΓίκονς οι ϋστιρον. The latter mean- 
 ing is most appropriate here, both because 
 the pecuhar kind of learning implied by 
 λόγιος- would not be likely to be predicated 
 of Apollos, — and because the subsequent 
 words, ουνατός iv τ. γραφαΊς, sufficiently 
 indicate his learning, and in what it lay. 
 [See on λόγιος as applied to Papias by 
 Eusebius, prolegg. to Matt. vol. I. edn. 2.] 
 25.] Apollos had received (from 
 his youth .') the true doctrine of the Mes- 
 siahship of Jesus, as pointed out by John 
 the Baptist : doubtless from some disciple 
 of John : but more than this he knew not. 
 The doctrines of the Cross, — the Resurrec- 
 tion, — the outpouring of the Spirit, — these 
 were unknown to him : but more particu- 
 larly (from the words έττιστ. μόνον το 
 βάτττ. Γ. Ίωάν.) the latter, as connected 
 with Christian baptism ; see further on ch. 
 xix. 2, 3. — The mistake of supposing that 
 he did not know Jestis to be the Messiah, 
 has arisen from the description of his sub- 
 sequent work at Corinth, ver. 28, but by no 
 means follows from it : this he did before, 
 but not so completely. Tlie same mistake 
 has led to the alteration of Ίησοϋ into the 
 κυρίου of the rec, it having been well 
 imagined that he could not teach ακριβώς 
 τα 7Γ. τοΐ) Ίησοϋ if ho did not know him to 
 be the Messiah : whereas by these words 
 is imported that he knew and taught accu- 
 rately the facts res|)ecting Jesus, but of the 
 conser/uences of that wliich he tauglit, of all 
 which may be summed uj) in the doctrine 
 of Christian baptism, he had no idea. 
 ίΤΓίστ. μόνον] Meyer well remarks, 
 that it is not meant that he was absolutely
 
 192 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XVITT. 27, 28. 
 
 καΐ ™ ακριβίστίρον αυτω " e^iOti'TO την " οδόν. ^'^ /3ουλο- 
 μίνου δί αυτοΰ '' δίίλΟιίν ίίς Dji» Αχαϊαν '' Trporpt^ajUivot 
 οι αδίλί^οί iyoaxpav τοις μαθηταις ' αττοδίζασθαι αυτόν, 
 ος ^ παοανίνομβνος ^ συνίβαλίτο ττολυ τοίς " ττεπιστευ- 
 κοσιν όια τιις γ^αριτος ίυτυνως γαρ τοις Ιουόαιοις 
 
 " διακ:οτί}λίγγ£το ^ Βημοσια ^ ίπι^ίίκννς δια των ^ -γράφων 
 είναι τον χριστον Ι^σοΰν. 
 
 XIX. ^ ^ Έγεί'ετο δε "^ εν τω τοι» Λττολλώ είναι ε'ν 
 
 Κορίνθω, ΤίανΧον ^ΐίΧθο 
 
 οντά τα ανωτερικα 
 
 μέρη 
 
 ελθε 
 
 Lnke xxiii. 10 only. Josh. vi. 7 (or 8). 
 
 sa. xxxvii. 2H.) a ch. xvii• 2 reft'. 
 
 d ch. xviii. 23 retl'. e here 
 
 ni ch. xxiii. 1!ϊ, 
 
 20. xxiv. 22 
 
 Diily. 
 η ch. si. 4 retl". 
 ο Alatl. sxii. 
 
 Kill. Ps.xxiv. 
 
 4(plur.). 
 pLukeii. l.^i. 
 
 ch. ix. :;s. 
 *1 litre iinty f. 
 
 WiMl. xiv. IS. 
 r Luke viii.4(i. 
 
 ch. ii.4l at. 
 
 Luke i>nlv. 
 
 2 Mace. iii. i). 
 s ahsiil , Luke 
 
 xii. 51 reft•. 
 
 ch. ix. oit. 
 t —here only. 
 
 ^1:70 σι•μ- 
 
 /3αλλ6ταί 
 
 eic TO μαν• 
 
 Ciiviii-, Xen. Cyr. i. 2. 8. u ch. xv. 5 retf. ν ch. xiii. 43 reff. 
 
 X here ouly f. y ch. xvi. 37. xviii. 28 only t. ζ = Hel). vi. 17 t. 
 
 bcoustr., Matt, xviii. 13. ch. iv. .5 al. fr. c Matt. xiii. 4. Ezek. ix. 8. 
 
 only t. I) aio> 'Λσιιι, Herod, i. yo and al. SeeVVetst. 
 
 t.xt ABE 13 V copt seth. — αντω om 38. — εξεθοντο D: -θίτο Η : εδειζαν sah. — rec την 
 τον θ. οδ., with GH &c al Chr al : την οδ. του θίου ΑΒ 13. 40. 42. 57- 73. 97- 137- 1«0 
 lect 12 arm Thl- : τ. οδ. τ. κνριου Ε 36. 177 ν Syr arr slav : τον Xoyov του κυρ. 
 6ϋ'. !)8-marg 105 lect 58 : scripturas domini Cassiod {all these, as shewn by the 
 ναΐΎ, are supplementary emendations of the simple τ. οδον) : txt D (so Tisch also). — 
 for /3οΐ)λ., (οαλουμίΐ'ου 33. 34 : φοβουμ. 137. — £ίςοΐΐΐ47. 104. 105. 137- — πίμψαμίϊ'οι 23 : 
 νροττεμφ. al.— 27. συνιβαλλετο Α (D-gr) 57. 99 Thl^ : συνελαβίτυ ,',Ο. 133 : συνέβαλε 
 34. — rirt τ. χαρ. om (D see below) 137 ν (not tol) syr Bas-sel Aug al. — D syr-marg read 
 the ver thus : εν δε τη εφεσω επιδημουντες τίνες κορίνθιοι και ακουσαΐ'τες αυτού παρ- 
 εκαλονν διεΧθειν συν αυτοις εις την ττητριδα αυτών' σνί'κατανενσαντος δε αυτού οι 
 εφεσιοι έγραψαν τοις εν κορίνθιο μαθηταις οττως αποδεζωνται τον αΐ'δρα' ος επιδημησας 
 εις την α\αιαν {εις τ. αχ. also aft παραγεν. 137 syr*, also εν τ. αχ. lect 12) πολν (-λνν 
 Ό^) σννεβαΧλετο εν ταις εκκ\7]σιαις. — 28. συντονως 13. — κατηΧεγχετο Ε : διακατηΧεγετο 
 15: δΐίΧεγετο 73 al : διακατηγγελετο lect 58. — aft δημοσ. add και κατ οίκον Ε Bed-gr. 
 — διαλεγομεΐ'ος και επιδ. D 137. — τΌν ιησ. είναι χριστοί' D vss : τον om Ε (alii aliter). 
 Chap. XIX. 1. εγεν. δε om 64. — απολλων A'G 40 : αττελλην 180 : αττολλω 2. 96. 
 100.— «ς Koprveoi' 73.— αναΓολίκα 25. 26. 96 Ύ\ύ\—κατελθίΐν ΑΕ 13. 14^. 15. 40. 
 69. 73. 76. 105. 163 Jer. — for ε-γενετο to ελθειν, D syr-marg have θέλοντας δε του 
 τταυλου κατά την ιδίαν βουλην πορευεσθαι εις ιεροσολνμα, ειττεν αυτω το ττνενμα 
 νποστρεφειν εις την ασιαν διελθων δε τα αν. μ. έρχεται. — rec εύρων, omg τε in 
 ver 2 (alteration to simplify constr and get rid of the characteristic τε), with (D)E 
 (£wpov)GH &c vss fi": txt AB 13. 15. 36. 105. 163. 180 (copt) ν Fulg : add ficu sah 
 
 ABD 
 EGH 
 
 ignorant of the fact of there being such a 
 thing as Christian baptism, but ignorant of 
 its being any thing different from that of 
 John : he knew, or recognized in baptism 
 only that which the bapt. of John was : a 
 sign of repentance. 26. άκριβε- 
 
 στ£ρον] The former accuracy was only in 
 facts : this is the still more expanded ac- 
 curacy of doctrine. That was merely τα 
 ττερι τον Ίησον, as He lived and minis- 
 tered on earth : this included also the pro- 
 mise of the Spirit, and its performance. 
 27. ΊΓροτρεψάμενοι] probably 
 Priscilla and Aquila principally. It may 
 have been from their account of the Cor. 
 church, that he was desirous to go to Achaia. 
 After προ7-ρ(ψ. not Apollos, but the dis- 
 ciples (at Corinth) must be understood as 
 an object. Otherwise αυτόν would have 
 been expressed. So the remarkable read- 
 ing of D. συνίβ.] contulit, Vulg. 
 ' contributed,' to their help. δια ttjs 
 χάριτος] Bengel, Olsh., Aleyer, and others 
 join these words with συνεβάλετο, and un- 
 
 derstand them ' by the grace of God which 
 was in him.' But this, from their position, 
 is very unnatural ; and hardly less so from 
 the διά, whereas such a sense would rather 
 require tij χάριτι. In the only other two 
 places where the expression occurs, it refers 
 
 ( 1) to the electing grace of God, Gal. i. 15, 
 
 (2) to the grace assisting believers to His 
 service, Heb. xii. 28. So that I adopt 
 the more natural rendering of the E. V., 
 ' those who had believed through grace.' 
 " The yap should be noticed. His coming 
 was a valuable assistance to the Christians 
 against the Jews, in the controversies which 
 had doubtless being going on since Paul's 
 departure." C. and H. ii. p. 8. 28.] 
 διακατηλ€γχ€το, ' argued down,' as we 
 say, — ^proved it in their teeth :' and then 
 the διά gives the sense of continuity,— 
 that this was not done once or twice, but 
 continuously. 
 
 Ce.\p. XIX. 1 — 40.] Arrival, resi- 
 dence, AND ACTS OF Paul at Ephesus. 
 1. τα άνωτ€ρικα μί'ρη] By this
 
 XIX. 1—4. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 393 
 
 εις tj(piaov και ivpeiv τινας μαυητας, uttsv τε προς fLukexxii.4n. 
 αυτούς Ει ττνεΰμα ayiov ^ εΧάβίτε ' ττιστευσαντες ; ' οί δε a Kings i.' 
 ττρός αύτον ^ 'Αλλ' ' ούδε "' ει ττνεΰμα άγιόν εστιι» ij/cou- ^iK''eh"viui* 
 σαμίν. είπεν τε " Εις η ονν ΐβαπτισθητί ; οι οε ύπαν h ^ Rom. χϋί. 
 
 ° Εις το Ιωάνι>ου βάπτισμα. εΐττεν οέ Παύλος ίωάΐ'νης ieuips!;ch. ix. 
 
 με»' ° εραπτισεν ° βάπτισμα ^μετανοίας, τω λαω λέγων εις k Luke χχϋϊ. 
 τον ίργομίνον '' μετ αυτόν "^Ίι^α * ττιστευσωσιν, τουτεσηι» '7τ! 3?''"' "' 
 
 πι = ch. χ. 18 al. John is. 25. η Matt, xxviii. 19 al. ch. viii. 16. ο con.tr., Luke vii. 29. ρ Mark 
 
 i.4. Luke iii. 3. ch. xiii. 24 only. q w. prrsun, Acts only. ch. ». 37. τϋ. ft. xiii. 25 (Paul). 
 
 r w. λ<ί7ω, here only. See Matf. xii. 16 al. arrangemt of word.s. Gal. ii. 10 refi. s \v. els, John i. 12 rell'. 
 
 al. Ir. tch. i. 19. Kom. iii. 18. is. 8. Thilcm. 12. Ht;b. ii. 14 al5. 1 Pet. iii. 20. 
 
 — 2. 76 see above. — aft πιστ. add iccrt βαπησθίνης sah. — rec oi δε ειπον, with GH &c : 
 είπαν 98. 101. 126 lect 1 Chr : txt ABDE 13. 40. 73. 137 syr am tol Jer.— αλλ 
 ουδέ (corr ονδ ft) τγγ. αγ. Χαμβανηυσιν τίνες 7]κονσαμεν D (sah) : accipiunt et qtiidam 
 d. —ονδ ABD2: txt (DOEGH niss (appy).— 3. ειπ. δε D 133 lect 58 : ο it fjTr. AE 13- 
 73 al lect 12 ν copt Jer: txt B(e sil)GH most mss vss Chr al. — rec add προς avrovc, 
 with GH al Chr al : oni ABDE 13. 18. 30. 38. 68. 69. 73. 105. 113. 137. 163. 180 ν syr 
 arm : αντοις 40 lect 12 ThP. — rec ειπον {more usual form), with GH &c Chr al : εΧε^ον 
 D : txt ABE al.— £ic τον ιωαν. β. 96.-4. for δε, τε Η 192 a;th Thl•.— ο ττ. D 180 lect 
 58. — aft ιωηΐ'. om μεν (erased because there is no δε to correspond) ABD 15. 18. 40. 69. 
 105. 180 V sah : ins EGH most mss syrr copt arr slav Chr Thl Oec al. — τταντι τω λαω 
 5. 8 arm. — rec τον χριστον ιησ. {τον χρ. D) {χρ. seems to have come from the margin, 
 and thus to have been variously placed) : txt ABE 25. 40 ν copt seth syr Jer Fulg al {τον 
 
 name were known, the eastern parts of Asia 
 Minor, beyond the river Halys, or, in com- 
 parison with Ephesus, in the direction of 
 that river. So Herodotus, speaking as a 
 Hahcarnassian, calls even the neighbour- 
 hood of Sardis τά άνω της Ασίας, i. 177 ; 
 including in the term, however, many of 
 the inland districts, Assyria, Babylonia, &c. 
 So that the reading ανατολικά is a good 
 gloss. Tivas μαθητάβ] These seem 
 
 to have been in the same situation as 
 Apollos, see on ch. xviii. 25. They cannot 
 have been mere disciples of John, on ac- 
 count of πιστενσαντες, wliich can bear no 
 meaning than that of beheving on the 
 Lord Jesus: but they had received only 
 John's baptism, and had had no proof of 
 the descent of the Holy Spirit, nor know- 
 ledge of His gifts. 2. έλάβ. ΊΓίστί-υσ.] 
 The aorists should be faithfully rendered : 
 not as E. V. ' Have ye received the Holy 
 Ghost since ye believed j" but ' Did ye 
 receive the Holy Ghost when ye became 
 (not, when ye had become : cf. προςενζά- 
 μενοι είπαν, ch. i. 24, and Winer, § 46, it. 
 Anm. 1, also note on ver. 29) believers'?' 
 i. e. ' on your becoming believers, had ye 
 the gifts of the Spirit conferred on you i" — 
 as in ch. viii. 16, 17• Tiiis is both gram- 
 matically necessary (see also Rom. xiii. 11, 
 εγγύτερον ι'/μών ή σωτη()ία η οτε Ιπιπτείι- 
 σαμεν), and absolutely demanded by the 
 sense ; the cn(|uiry being, not as to any re- 
 ception of the Iloly (Jliost during tlui period 
 since tlicir l)ai)ti.siii, but as to one siiiiultiitie- 
 ous with their first reception into the cliurch : 
 Vol. II. 
 
 and their not having then received Him is 
 accounted for by the deficiency of their 
 baptism. αλλ' οϋδε] ' On the contrary, 
 not even . . .' ήκουσα(Χ€ν] Here again, 
 
 not, ' we have not heard,' which would in- 
 volve an absurdity : ' nam neque Mosen 
 neque Johannem Baptistam sequi potuis- 
 sent, quin de Spiritu Sancto ipso audissent' 
 (Bengel) ; — but ' we did not hear,' at the 
 time of our conversion : — Our reception 
 into the faith was unaccompanied by any 
 preaching of the office or the gifts of the 
 Spirit, — our baptism was not followed 
 by any imparting of His gifts : ' we did 
 not so much as hear Him mentioned.' 
 Tiros only will find an objection to this 
 rendering in 'εστίν (expecting i]v) : the 
 present is commonly used after the aorist of 
 declarative verbs or verbs of sense, in the 
 clause which contains the matter declared, 
 seen, or heard : the action being transferred 
 pro tempore to the time spoken of. See 
 John i. 40, ήλθαν καΊ εΊδαν ποϋ μένει, — 
 and refF. 3.] Paul's question esta- 
 
 blishes the above rendering, ' to what then 
 {ovv, if ye did not so much as hear of the 
 Holy Ghost at your first believing) were ye 
 baptized?' If the question and answer in 
 ver. 2 regarded, as in E. V., the whole 
 interval since their conversion, this enquiry 
 would have been more naturally expressed 
 in the perfect. See Gal. iii. 27, where 
 there is the same necessity of preserving 
 the historical sense of the aorists. 
 eU τί] 'unto (with a view to, as intro- 
 ductory to) what profession ?' They an-
 
 194 
 
 nPASETS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XIX. 
 
 iicii.viii.i7ai. jj/. γοχ, Ίησοΰΐ'. ^ ακονσαντίς δε εβαττησθησαν εις τύ abd 
 
 ν hrreiiiily. •■5» / „ ' 1,'ΠΤ-Γ 
 
 Η.) EzrL όνομα του κυρίου Ιησου. " και tniUtVToq αυτυις του 
 
 wcii.ii^ij, 18. Παύλου γύρας " ηΧθεν το ^ ττνίΰμα το ayiov εττ αυτούς, 
 
 ?orii"'i')l.ct, ελάλουν τε -yXwacrotc κη\ " επροψητευον. ' ήσαν δε ot 
 
 here first. , "Λ χ ' ' ^ "ί ' ii ' Λ /Ι *■ ζ'^ ' ^ 
 
 x-ih.ii.4i τταντες ανορες ωςει οεκαουο. ti^eAUwv ce εις Τ7)ΐ; 
 
 ^ieft.'*^'^ συναγωγ?}^ ^ ΐναρρησιάΐ,ζτο ^ έττι ^ιηνας τρείς ■* διαλεγο- 
 
 ϋ ill. xiii. 31 > Ι> '/) ^ ^ " C η \ ' ~ Ο " 
 
 "■<f- μίνος και πίΐυων τα ττίοι της ρασιλίΐας του σεου. 
 
 a ill. xvii. 2. "^ ' 
 
 3tx.7al. bch. xviii. 4. c eh. viii. 12. xx. 2S. xxviii. 31 only. Luke anil Mark passim. 
 
 ii* χν 105 lect 12 d sah arm). — 5. ακονσ. Se τοντο D (vss). — aft ιησ. ins τον (om D^ 
 lect 58) χριττοί' (χρ. also G4. 137 vss Jer Ambr) £ΐς αφισιν αμαρτιΐχΐν D syr* (and 
 Jer in ver 4) : invocata trinitate Cassiodor. — 6. rec τας χιφας, with EG &c Chr al : 
 txt ABD (χίίρη, and bef του π.) Η u5. 100. 12(i al. — for 7]\θ., ενθίως (π(πιπ(ν D Jer 
 (tyfl. ins tol lat-mss). — £π αυτοις D' lect 58. — for rf, Si D al copt sah. — rec ττηοίφητ., 
 with Ε &c: txt ABD 180.— 7. for StKoSvo, ^ωSfκa ABDE 1.3. 31. 30. 40. (i9. 105. 137. 
 180 lect 12 Chr-ms Thl- (corrn to more usual forrn) : txt GH most mss Chr Thl' Oec. 
 — 8. tiqt\Q. Ct ο τταυλος D al vss: £t om 192. — (v δνναμίι μεγάλη ίτταρρ. D syr-marg : 
 -ασατο E-gr. — επι om 180. — ημέρας τρ. 6(P. 98-marg. — ra om BD lect 12 most vss 
 (appy) {as tamecessary : see a simr omn at ch viii. 12) : txt AEGH &c Chr (txt) al. — 
 
 swer, 'unto (that indicated by) the hap- disciples (John iv. 1) before baptism he- 
 
 tism of John,' viz. : repentance, and the 
 beluving on Jesus, then to come, but 
 noiv (see ch. xviii. 25, note) the object of 
 our faith. 4. els τ. Ιρχ. . . . ϊνα •ίΓ.] 
 
 This peculiar inversion of words occurs 
 again, Gal. ii. 10, μόνον των πτωχών 'ίνα 
 μνημονίύωμεν, — and seems to mark the 
 hand of Paul, ϊνα does not give (as Meyer) 
 the mere purpose of his baptism (saying 
 that he baptized in order that ....), but 
 combines, as in similar uses, of προςινχο- 
 μαι 'ίνα and the like, the purport and pur- 
 pose together : ' He commanded them that 
 they should (purport) — and he spoke to 
 them, that they might (purpose).' See this 
 discussed in note on 1 Cor. xiv. 13. 
 5.] Two singular perversions of this verse 
 have occurred : (1 ) the Anabaptists use it to 
 authorize the repetition of Christian bap- 
 tism, whereas it is not Christian baptism 
 which was repeated, seeing that John's bap- 
 tism was not such, but only the baptism 
 which they now for the first time received ; 
 and (2) Beza, Calixtus,Calov.,Suicer, Glass., 
 Buddeus, Wolf, and al., wishing to wrest 
 this weapon out of the hands of the Ana- 
 baptists, oddly enough suppose this verse to 
 belong still to Paul's discourse, and to 
 mean, ' and the people ivhen they heard 
 him (John), were baptized into the name 
 of the Lord Jesus.' This obviously is 
 contrary to fact, historically : and would 
 leave our present narrative in a singular 
 state : for Paul, having treated their bap- 
 tism as insufficient, would thus proceed on 
 it to impose his hands, as if it were suf- 
 ficient. €15 TO ov. T. κυρ. Ίησοΰ] 
 Two questions arise here: (1) Was it the 
 ordinary practice to rebaptize those who 
 had been baptized either by John or by the 
 
 came, by the effusion of the Holy Spirit, 
 XovTpbv πολιγγίνετιπς ? This we cannot 
 definitely answer. That it was sometimes 
 done, this incident shews : but in all pro- 
 bability, in the cases of the majority of the 
 original disciples, the greater baptism by 
 the Holy Ghost and fire on the day of Pen- 
 tecost sujierseded the outward form or sign. 
 The Apostles themselves received only this 
 baptism (besides probably that of John) : 
 and most likely the same was the case with 
 the original believers. But of the three 
 thousand who were added on the day of 
 Pentecost, very many must have been 
 already baptized by John ; and all were 
 rebaptized without enquiry. (2) What 
 conclusion can we deduce from this verse 
 respecting the use or otherwise of baptism 
 in the name of the Father, and the Son, 
 and the Holy Ghost, in the apostolic 
 period ? The only answer must be, that at 
 that early time we have no indication of set 
 formulae in the administration of either 
 sacrament. Such formulae arose of neces- 
 sity, when precision in formal statement of 
 doctrine became an absolute necessity in 
 the church : and the materials for them 
 were found ready in the word of God, who 
 has graciously provided for all necessities of 
 His church in all time. But, in matter of 
 fact, such a baptism as this was a baptism 
 into the name of the Father, Son, and Holy 
 Ghost, As Jews, these men were already 
 servants of the living God — and by putting 
 on the Son, they received in a new and 
 more gracious sense the Father also. And 
 in the sequel of their baptism, the impo- 
 sition of hands, they sensibly became reci- 
 pients of God the Holy Ghost. Wliere 
 such manifestations were present, the form
 
 5—12. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛίϊΝ. 195 
 
 ώς δε τίνες εσκΧηξ)υνοντο και ^ ηπάθονί' ^ κακολο- diieh. ϊπ.β, 
 yovvTic την ^ οδον ενώττίοΐ' του πΧηθους, ' αποστας αττ' Εχ.κίϊϋ.'.?; 
 
 'ϊ - ν 5 r ν ν 1 . ' , . Λ^ ec1i.xyii.5rer. 
 
 αυτών αφωρισΒν τους μαθητας, καθ ημίραν " οιαλε- '^^ii^'Eiod!* 
 
 r • -m Λ ~ rp f 10" '^\ ' ) xxi. ΙΗ. 
 
 ■γομενος ίΐ> τ>/ σνοΛίϊ 1 υραννου. τούτο οε εγίυετο s = cii.ix. 2 
 
 ετΓί ετη ουο, ωςτε τταντας τους κατοικουντας την :• /ο,,;, ^, ''• 
 
 »./>- ^^' ~ ' 'Ι^' <ich xii.lOreff. 
 
 Άσιαν ακουσαι τον Aoyov τον κυρίου, Ιουοαιους τε /cat k = MHit.xiiL 
 'Ελληνας. '^ δυνάμεις τε ου τάς ^τυχούσας εττοίει ο a'cur.'^^i.^i/' 
 
 Θν r ί• ^ " ~ ΓΤ 'Λ 12 " \ ' \ ν only. 
 
 εος Οία των γείοων 11αι;Λυυ, ωςτε icat εττι τους chi.u. is. 
 
 5- ,Λ.Γ ,ν„, V ,Ζ Grn. ϋ. 10. 
 
 ασθίνοΰντας ' αποφίοίσθαι απο του -χρωτός αυτοΰ mherVonVt!'" 
 
 U ν> ' * ν 'Λ > W • Λ Λ ' η ' > 5 - nch. xiii.31 
 
 σουόαρια η σιμικινυια και ατΓαΛλασσΐσυαι απ αυτών reit; 
 τας νόσους τα τε " ττνίυματα τα '^πονηρά ^ εκπο^ευεσυαι. J^}^ζ^^ι^^^ 
 
 22. ch. ϋ 22. Gal. ϋί. 5t. q = ch. xxviii. 2 only. 3 Mac?, iii. 7. μικρ<\( και Tcit Ύνχηνσαί πρήξαν, 
 
 Polyb. i. 2.ί. 0. οιΊ τ. τυχονσαν ύπορίι,ν, id. i. 42. 12. οϋχ 6 Ύνχων ΰι/ι;ρ (said of Mose.i), Loiigin. de Subl. 
 J 9. rMark vi. 2al. ch. V. 12. xiT. 3. 2 Chron. xxiv. 14. sMarkxv. 1. Luke xri. 22 
 
 (eii). Hos X. ti. "\v. tTTi, Rev. xxi. 10. t here only. Exod. xxiv 29, 30 (alex.). η Luke xix. 
 
 20. John xi. 44. XX. 7 only t. ν here only t. w = here only, constr., Xen. Anal), vji. I. 4. 
 
 X =Lnke (only) vii. 21. viii. 2. Acts, here, &c., only. 1 Kings xviii. 1(1 (alex.). y = 3lHtl. Xiii. 21 
 
 only. (iMark vii. 19.) 
 
 9. τινίς μιν ουν αυτών D : ως ci ηνις των εθνών τοτ( 137• — τ. οο. τον κυρίου Ε 31 
 ν slav-ed : του θεού 5. 8. 73 Syr ar-erp : της πίστεως ar-pol. — παντός τ. ττλ. 4. C6 . 80, 
 ί)8. 100. 192. — Γ. πΧιιθ. των εθνι^ν DE 100 Syr ar-erp syr*. — τότε αποσ-ας ο παύλας 
 Ό Syr ar-erp syr*. — αψορκτεν Η al : εχϋ)οησί 73. — το καθ. ημ. D. — rec aft τυρα}•νου 
 (-VV10V D-gr 3. 95') ins τίνος (see ch χ. 22, xiii. 15, xvii. 34, where D also inserts τις), 
 with D (add απο ώρας ε. εως δέκατης D 137 syr*) EGH &c vss Chr Thl Oec : om AB 
 27- 29. 81 al tol lat-mss copt sah. — 10. for ωςτε to ίλλ., — £ως (/7a iit d, usque quo e syr) 
 πάντες οι κατοικυνντες τ. a. ηκονσαν τους λογηνς τ. κυρ. ιουί'αιοι κ. έλληνες D'. — 
 rec aft κνρ. ins ιησ. with G &c ar-pol slav [verbiim Dei aeth) Chr Thl Oec : txt ABDEH 
 13. 15. 18. 27. 29. 3β. 40. C8. m. 73. 105. 137. 177'- 180 ν svrr ar-erp copt sah arm 
 al Tss.— 11. C£ D'.gr 38 copt syr Thl'.— ο θευς εποιει ABDE 13. 31. 68. 105 180 am 
 demid sah arm Thl- {corrn of order) : txt GH most mss ν syrr copt aeth al Chr Thl' Oec. 
 — 12. rec επκρεοεσθαι (prob corrn to suit επι τ. ασθ. : see note), with DGH &c Chr al : 
 txt ABE 13. 15." 18. 25. 27. 29. 40. C8. 69. 73. 10:?. 105. 1!!0 al ν {deferrentur) all : περιφ. 
 96. 142.- for απο, (c<n 142. — /} και D-gr arm : και 7- 68. 104. 105 al Cyr jer Thl-. — τα 
 (2nd) om D. — rec ε^ερχεηθαι {more usual iv ο id for the going out of evil spirits, see 
 Luke iv. 35. .M6, 41, viii. 2, 29, 33 al, ch viii. 7, xvi. 18), with GH &c Chr Thl Oec: 
 txt ABDE 13. 15. 18. 40. 68. 69. 73. 103. 105. 133. 137. 142. 180 al.-rec add απ 
 αυτών {supplementary insertion), with GH &c (above) sah («ξ αυ.) : om -4iBDE al (nearly 
 
 of words might be wanting ; but with us, We cannot derive any certain estimate of 
 who have them not, it is necessary and im- Paul's stay in Eph. from these words,— even 
 perative. Mr. Howson regards (i. 471 ; ii. if we add the three months of ver. 8, — for 
 11) our ver. 2, άλλ' ovci ει πν. ίίγ. εστίν νν. 21, 22 admit of an interval ajter the 
 ήκοΰσαμεί', as indicative that the name of expiration of the two years and three 
 the Holy Ghost was used in the baptismal months. And his own expression, ch. xx. 
 formula. But the inference seems to me in- 31, τριετίαν, implies that it was longer 
 secure. 6.] See ch. viii. 17; x. 46, and than from this chapter would at first sight 
 note on ch. ii. 4 : and on ίττρο^., ch. xi. 27, appear. He probably (compare his an- 
 note. 7.] oi iravT., 'in all;' So Herod, nounced intention, 1 Cor. xvi. 8, with his 
 vii. 4, βαπιλεΐισαντα τα πάντα ετεα εζ τε expectation of meeting Titus at Troas, 2 
 K. τριήκοντα : Tliuc. v. 120, πεσόντων Si Cor. ii. 12, which shews that he was not 
 Των πάντων πολλών. See Kiihner, § 489 e. far off the time previously arranged) left 
 9.] Probably the school of Tyr. was Ephesus about or soon after the third Pen- 
 a private synagogue (called Beth Midrasch tecost after that which he kept in Jerusa- 
 by the Jews), where he might assemble the lem. See Prolegg. to 1 Cor. ττάντας 
 believing Jews quietly, and also invite the at- τ. κατ.] Hyperbolical: — all had the oppor- 
 tendance of Gentiles to hear the word. But tnnily, and probably some of every con- 
 it is also possible that, as commonly sup- siderable town availed themselves of it. 
 posed, Tyr. may have been a Gentile sophist. To this long teaching of Paul the seven 
 The name occurs as a proper name, 2 Mace. churches of Asia owe their establishment. 
 iv. 40, — and with τίνος. 10. £τη Svo | 11. οΰ τος τυχ.] See red'. ' miracles 
 
 Ο 2
 
 J96 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XIX. 
 
 aii/ieo^fy"^" ^^ ^ ^''■εΥΕί'ρησαΐ' δε τινίς και των '^ ττίρΐίργομίνων Ιου- abd 
 χ.'Ί'ϋ,^Γ' Βαΐων '' ίζορκιστων ' ονομάΐίΐν '' επί τους ** έχοντας τα 
 ι^Λ^Γ-}?] "τνίυμιιτα τα πονηρά τυ " υνυμα του κυρίου Ιησοΰ, λε- 
 
 ''τρότ,οΐ.'ί^' Ύοντίς "ΌρκίΙω υμάς τον Ίϊΐσοΰυ ' όν Παύλος κηουσ- 
 κίΧΤπΕΓ σει. ^^ ήσαν δε τπ'ες Σκεΰα Ιουδαίου ^ άργ^ιερίως έτττα 
 inl'.aTiof υίοί οι τοΰτο '' ποιοΰντες. αττο/οριθεν δε το πνεΰ/«α το 
 
 Sulomun). , 
 
 C here only. d — ch. xvi. 10. John vii. 20 al. e (and constr ) Mark v. 7 only. tiOpKifu), 1 The.s.s. 
 
 V. 27. efopKi'fui, Gen. xxiT.3. f cb. viii. 5 reff. fi = hirreon;y. h constr, (without oi) 
 Luke'i. in,2u. Jer. xxxiii. -'U. 
 
 as above) τ syrr ar-erp copt arm. — 13. rec aft Γΐΐ'6ς, for και, αττο, with G (και απο Η all 
 ν arm syr) &c copt al Clir Thl' Oec : tK D 43 : και tic liV (t/ie και has been onul either as 
 unnecessary, or perhaps, as Meyer, because it seemed unu-urthy of Paul to couple Mm 
 with these : then the απο or εκ inserted, to define the gen more exactly. The genuine- 
 ness of και and spuriousness of the prepp is shewn by the readings και απο and και ίκ) : 
 tst ABE (Η above) all Syr. — rec ορκιζομίν (alteration to suit the plurals preceding), 
 witb GH (ίξορ. 15. 18. 27. 36. Q(P. G9. 78• 180) vss Chr Thl Oec : txt AB (-ζωμ^νΐ 
 Bentl) DE 13. 25. 33. 35. 40. 73 al ν copt al Cassiod : {ξορκίζω 105. — Sia τ. ιησ. 8: 
 Γ Qtov 137: το όνομα του κοριού ιησ. 100. — rec ο παυλ., with B(e sil)G &c 
 Thl Oec: txt ADEH 13. 40. 96. 98. 106. 133. 177• 180 Chr.-14. τίνος B(D)E- 
 gr 36. 180 al Bed gr ν (sixt) demid Syr copt (alteration, τιης not appearing to 
 the copyist to agree with the definite (πτα) : txt AGH mss (nrly) e ν all Chr 
 Till Oec (some vss om). — rec tnoi σκ., with (D)GH al vss Chr al (corrn of order) : txt 
 ABE 14'. 15. 18. 40 (all appy) ν arm (sab): om 13. 31. 180. — σκίνια A. — lovdaioi 
 G. — 01 om (originally perhaps owing to oi of νιοι preceding) AB 13. 14'. 15. 18. 180 
 al Syr): ου 137. — D syr-marg read the ver thus: ev οις και νιοι (add ΐπτα syr- 
 marg) σκενα τίνος ιερέως ηθέλησαν το αντο ποιησαι' εθος είχαν τους τοιοντοιις 
 εζορκιζειν' και ειςε\θθ7>τες προς τον δαιμονιζυμενον ηξΐξ,αντο επικαΧεισθαι το όνομα 
 Χε-γοντες παραγγελλομεν σοι εν ιησου ον παυΧος κηρύσσει εξελθειν (εζελθ. κηρύσσει 
 D'). — 15. ατΓΟκρ. 0£ ττοτί 137• — τότε απεκριθη το πν. το πον. (add και D^) ειπεν D. — 
 
 of no ordinary kind.* In ivhat they dif- be produced on the recipients, beholders, 
 fered from the usual displays of power by or hearers. M'^ithout His special selection 
 the Apostles, is presently related : viz. that and enabling, all itistrttments were vain ,• 
 even garments taken from him were endued with these, all are capable. In the present 
 with miraculous power. 12.] The case, as before in ch. v. 15, it was His pur- 
 ree, reading, επιφερεσθαι, may have been pose to exalt His Apostle as the Herald of 
 occasioned by the 6 771 preceding: the other. His gospel, and to lay in Ephesus the 
 again, by the από following: In such un- strong foundation of His church. And He 
 certainty the reading of the ancient MSS therefore endues Him with this extraor- 
 must prevail. σονδ.] ' Handker- dinary power. — But to argue by analogy 
 chiefs:' see ref. and notes there. from such a case, — to suppose that because 
 σιμικ.] not iiapkins, but semicinctia, our Lord was able, and Peter, and Paul, 
 * aprons,' such as servants and artizans and in O. T. times Elislia, were enabled, to 
 use. αμφότερα λινοειδή ε'ισι, Schol. — exert this peculiar power, therefore the 
 Diseases, and possession by evil spirits, are same will be possessed by the body or relics 
 here plainly distinguished from each other. of every real or supposed saint, is the 
 The rationahsts, and semi-rationaUsts, are height of folly and fanaticism. The true 
 much troubled to reconcile the fact related, analogy tends directly the other way. In 
 that such handkerchiefs and aprons were no cases but these do we find the power, 
 instrumental in working the cures, with even in the apostolic days : and the general 
 what they are pleased to call a popular cessation of all extraordinary gifts of the 
 notion founded in superstition and error. Spirit would lead us to the inference that a 
 But in this and similar narratives (see ch. fortiori these, which were even then the 
 V. 15, note) Christian faith finds no diffi- rarest (οΰχ at τνχοϋσαι) have ceased also, 
 culty whatever. All miraculous working is 13.] See note on Matt. xii. 27, 
 an exertion of the direct power of the All- respecting the Jewish exorcists. These 
 powerful ; a suspension by Him of Ilis men, seeing the success of Paul's agency in 
 ordinary laws : and whether He will use casting out devils, adopt the Name of Jesus 
 any instrument in doing this, or what in- in their own exorcisms. 14. άρχ- 
 strument, must depend altogether on His ιερέως] The word must be used in a wide 
 own purpose in the miracle — the effect to sense. He may have been chief of the
 
 13—19. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 197 
 
 ΤΓονηρον ύπεν Ύον [ήσουν 'νινωσκω και τον Παυλον ϊλ χνίπ. 25. 
 
 - » \R \ k > \ ' JHmes iv. 14. 
 
 ' ετΓί'σταμαΓ υμείς δί τίνις εστε ; ^" Kat εψαλλο^ΐίενος kief^Jniy.'"' 
 ο άνθρωπος εττ αυτούς εν ώ ήν το πνεύμα το πονΐ}ρον, χί.». xvi.is! 
 
 / 5 / ' ,r » , _ '/ 1 = liere niily. 
 
 κατακνριευσας αμφοτέρων "^ ισχυσεν κατ αυτών, ωςτε ^'^'^{i^.fyif, 
 "γυμνούς και " τ ετραυματισ μένους '^ εκφυ-γειν εκ του οΊκου aiitt. χχ.'25. 
 εκείνου. '' τοΰτο δε εγεί'ετο '' γνωστόν πασιν Ίουοαιοίς ,^j^-^^^'Jy-,,,y 
 
 1 ί/τ-ιΛ -ν "ο " ^ ''τ? J > η Luke χχ. 12 
 
 τε και ίΙιΑλησιν τοις κατοικουσιν την ϋ^ώεσον, και only. Ezek. 
 "^ επε'ττεσεν φόβος επι παντας αυτούς, και εμε-γαλυνετο pi'eh.lfaau 
 το όνομα του κυρίου Ifjffou. ποΛΛοι τε των ττεττι- qandcmstr, 
 
 / .' U 'ίΤ Λ ' > ν ' /Λ ■"''•'•.l.'-'J,'"'*'• 
 
 στευκοτων τηργοντο εο,ομοΑο'^ουμενοι και "^''ΤΤ^ Liiifc'i !•'' 
 
 οντες τας πραί,εις αυτών. ικανοί οε των τα •' περί- reft. 
 
 έργα πραςαντων συvεvεyκavτες τας ριρΑους κατ- ^^"^.^^^ ^j ^ 
 
 Mark i. 5. James v. Ifi. ν ch. xiv. 27 reff w = Matt. xvi. 27. Luke xxiii. 31. Rom. viii. 13. 2 Chion. 
 
 xii. 1.^. X =ch. xii. 12 rcff. ν = here only See 1 Tim. v. 13 reff. ζ = here only. Xen. Anab. 
 
 vi.4. 9. aMalt. i. lal. b Mat(. xiii. 3U, 40 al. Gen. xxxviii. 24. 
 
 aft ειτΓίΐ' ins αντοις ABD al 13. 73. 105. 106. 137. 180 al ν syrr ar-erp copt sah jeth arm 
 Chr Thl- {supplementary addn) : om EGH most mss slav ar-pol {αποκριΘίν Se αυτοις 
 before) Thl'• Oec— rov μ(ν ιησ. BE-gr 40. 73. 137 sjr.—rivog (στε 13. 36 : ττοθίν 99. 
 — 16. (ψαλομ. AB al (ίο suit κατακυμανσας) : εναλλομ. D: επιλαβομινος 69: txt 
 (D)EGH mss (nrly) Cbr Thl Oec. — rec εττ. αντ. ο ανθ. {alteration of characteristic 
 order), with (D ν al εις αντ.) GH &c vss Chr ThF Oec {επ. αντ. aft το πον. Ε : om 69. 
 ΙΟδ arm): txt AB 13. To. 137• 180 am syr ThP. — rec και κατακνρκυσος {-σαν 
 AEGH all Chr Thl' : κυριενσας D : κρατησας 15. 18. 36. 180 {supplementary in- 
 sertion), with GH &c Chr al: t.xt ABDE 13. 40. 69. 137 al copt arm ar-pol. — rec for 
 (ΐμψ., αντων {corrn to suit επτά above : see note), with GH &c : om Ε : t.xt ABD 13. 
 15. 18. 25. 36. 40. 73. 101. 106. 137. 180 al ν syr arm Ύ^.— κατίσχυσε λ^Ί.—εκφν^ειν 
 αυτούς A: γΐ'μΐ'ος κ. τιτραυματισμενος εκφευγειν 137: τιτραχηλισμενους 105. — 
 17. τοις ιουί. Ε 192: πασιν γνωστόν 38.9.3. 113. — τε om DE sah. — Τ)]ν om A'D 
 137. — ίττεσεν AD(0o/3. f7r.)E {επεεν) 13 {mistake: or prep omd as unnecessary) : tst 
 B(e sil)GH mss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec— 18. (om ver 3. 95').— it D al copt sah.— πιστίΐ;- 
 όντων D : -oavTwV Ε al. — aft ιϊ,ομ. ins τας αμαρτίας αυτών Β (vss) : for ττραζ., αμαρ- 
 τίας 4. 81. — 19. it om D^-gr: τε Ε syrr «th ar-pol Bas Chr. — των πιρι τα έργα D' : 
 και των 191. — συνενεγκ. και τας Ό: ίΐςενεγκ. 180. — κατεκανσαν Ε ν al. — σννκατεφ. 
 Ε : και . . . αργνρ. om 23. 37• 39 : συνε-ψηφισαντο al. — ηνρον Ε. — χρνσιον 4. 56. 106. 
 
 priests resident at Ephesus : or perhaps by its internal probability. There would 
 
 chief of one of the twenty-four courses, be every reason, as seveii have been before 
 
 Tives does not belong to επτά, see mentioned, for altering it into αυτών: but 
 
 ch. xxiii. 23, but stands alone, recalling the no imaginable one for substituting it for 
 
 Γίνίς of the preceding verse. — Without the αυτών. Two only, it would seem, were 
 
 o'l it would be, ' certain men, &c. were thus employed on this particular occasion : 
 
 attempting this,' ήσαν and ττοιονντίς being and Luke has retained the word as it stood 
 
 taken together. With it, ' They were (it in the record furnished to him. Whether 
 
 was) certain men, seven sons, &c. who any similar occurrence happened to the 
 
 attempted this.' 15.] The narrative, rest, we are not informed: this one is 
 
 from describing the nature of the attempt, selected as most notorious. γυμνούς] 
 
 passes to a single case in which it was tried. With their clothes torn oil' them. 18.] 
 
 and in which (see below) two only of the The natural effect of such an occurrence 
 
 brotliers were apparently concerned. — No was to induce a horror of magical arts, (kc, 
 
 difference between -γινώσκω and ίπίηταμαι which some were still continuing to coun- 
 
 must be pressed : — the two verbs are aji- tenance or practise secretly, together with a 
 
 parently used as separating Jesus and I'aul, profession of Christianity. Such jiersons 
 
 so that they do not stand together in the now came forward and confessed their 
 
 same category:— as in E. V., 'Jesus I error. The πράξ,ίΐς of this verst; denotes 
 
 know, and Paul I know :' the One being the association with sucli jiractices : tlio 
 
 God in lir;iv(ii, llic other man on earth. next ver. treats of tlic nuujiciuns them- 
 
 16. άμφοτίρων] The weight of MSS selves. 19. ττερίίργα] ' male sednta' 
 
 evidence for this reading is even surpassed (' curiosa,' Hor. Epod. xviii. 25). τϊς τών
 
 198 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XIX. 
 
 αι;Γ(ι)ΐ' και 
 
 £)'(07Γί01' 
 
 f τ 
 
 tvpov 
 
 πυΐ'των' και 
 
 avv(Xpi]<piaav 
 μνριαοας πίντε. 
 
 τας τιμάς 
 "^ ούτως 
 
 AI3D 
 EGH 
 
 unyvpitw 
 
 κατα Λτρατος του κνριην ο Λόγος r)υ^αl'fl' κοί ισχυίυ. 
 "' Ώς δε "" Επλ»;ρώθη ταΰτα, " έΟετο υ Παύλος εΐ' τω 
 ° ττνίίιματι ^ διελΟών τϊ)1' Μοκιδοί'ίαν κοί Α)(^πϊον πο- 
 ρεύεσθαι εις Ίε^οσόλιγία, ίίπωυ οτι ^ μετά το γενε'σΟαι 
 με εκ•ει "^δει με /cat Ρωμην ^ ιδεΜ'. ^•' αττοστίίλας δε εις 
 τί/ΐ' Μακτεδοΐ'/'αν δύο των διακονουντων αυτίι^ι, Τιμοθέου 
 i- και 'EjOniTTOJ', αυτός " επεσχεν y^povov ^ εις τηι^ Ασ/οΐ'. 
 
 ΑΙ. 
 dherrnnljt. 
 e»- ΜηΙΙ 
 
 ΧΧϊϋ. η. 
 
 1 Co•. Ti. 20. 
 
 vii W. 
 f— ch XXT» 28. 
 Κ siiiR. — I'f ΓΙ• 
 
 only. Srf 
 
 M.ilt. xxvii. 
 
 I>. 
 h Liikr xii. I. 
 
 oil. xxi 2(1. 
 
 Ilrb. xii 22 
 
 rI. IVul. 
 
 xxxiii. 1Γ. 
 i hcrronlv. 
 k i.itr., MaiL 
 
 Ti. 2S. ch. 
 
 ls«T<T. in. -here only. Dan. τϋΙ. 8. Xen. Cyr. Ti. 1 . 24. m = Luke vii. 1. η = Luke ix. 41. 
 
 XXI. U rh.v.4. H-Igg. ii. 19. See ch. i. 7. n ih. xvii. Ifi rcff. ρ Ter. 1. qih.xx.l. 
 
 Ilel). X. 21! al. Cin. x'lv. 17. r = ch. iv. 12 reft. xiv. 22. s ace. place, here only. 
 
 I Malt. xxT. 44 al.t u — here only. Xen. Cyr. τ. 4.38. τ ch. τΐϋ. 40 reft; 
 
 1ί)2 al : χρ. κ. αργ. 100. — 20. rec ο λογ. τ. κνρ. (corrn of characleristic orde?•), with 
 qii .' : ο λ. Γ. 9tov Ε 21. 7^• lOO^ ν syr ar-erp sah arm : t.xt AB : όντως κατ. κρ. {κατ. 
 κρ. om 1.'$7 sail arm) εΐ'ΐπχυσίρ κσι η πιστις του θίου ηνζανε (-j'ti' D^) και ιπληθυνίτο 
 D. — rec ούτω : t.\t ADE &c. — 21. for ως . . . ταντη, — τοτβ D: -ρωθηπαν Ε: -ροντο 
 73. — ο πουλ. ίθ. {iytvtTo 9!)) DE al copt (ο om D 137). — tv om Ε al. — cuXOtiv ΚΌ{και 
 TTOofiifffl. D)E. — την αχ. ADE 13 (corrn for uniformi/;/) : txt B(e sil)GH mss (nrly) 
 Chr Thl Oec— rec upnvnaXtut, with GH &c Chr (text) Thl' Oec : t.xt ABDE 137 ν Chr- 
 comm ThF. — μι om 137• — 22. και αττοστ. tig D aeth. — την om Ε IfiO. — for ιραστ., 
 αρισταρχον aeth. — χρ. ολίγον D-gr 25 : τίνα χρ. 40 arm. — tv τη ασια D sah : την cm 
 
 iTtpnnYwv in Aristsenet. Ep. ii. 18, is 'a 
 magician' (Kuin.). τας βίβλονς] 
 
 Magical fovinnliE, or receifit-books, or 
 written anmlels. These last were celebrated 
 by the name of Ίΐφίσια -γράμματα. So 
 Eustath. ad Hom. Od. r. p.'fi94 (Kuin.): 
 Έφ'ίσκί γράμματα — tniiji^at γάρ τιΐίς 
 ψασιν ΐκηναι ηηαν, ας και Κροίσος ίπί 
 της πνρας κ'πώΐ' ώφί\>]θη' και tv Όλνμ- 
 ιτια It ψασϊ, Mi\r';criot' και Έ^έσιου ττα- 
 λαιόιτωΐ', τον Μιλήσιον μή δΰνασΟαι 
 naXaitiv, ίιά το τον tTtpov ττίρι τψ 
 άστραγάλψ txtiv τα Έφίσια γράμματα' 
 ων γνωαΟί-ντιον και λυθίΐ'των αντίμ, τρια- 
 κοντάκις τ'υ ίζης ττίσΰν τον Έφίσιον. 
 See more illustrations in Wetst. They 
 were copies of the mystic words engraved on 
 the image of theEphcsian Artemis. Eustath. 
 in C. and II. ii. 13. °•ργ. μυρ. Tre'v.] 
 
 SO.OOOdrachmse.i.e. denarii: forthedrachma 
 of the Augustan and following ages was not 
 the real Attic drachma, but the Roman de- 
 narius—about 8hl. of our money : which 
 makes the entire value about £1770. That 
 
 21. ταΰτα] The occurrences of vv. 19, 20. 
 
 Iv τω TTv.] An expression mostly 
 used by Paul, see ref. Set] As lie was 
 
 sent to the Gentiles, he saw that the great 
 metropolis of the Gentile world was the 
 legitimate centre of his apostolic working. 
 Or perhaps he speaks under some divine 
 intimation that ultimately he should be 
 brought to Rome. If so, his words were 
 literally fulfilled. He did see Rome after 
 he had been at Jerusalem this next time : 
 but after considerable delay, and as a pri- 
 soner. Cf. the same design expressed by 
 him, Rom. i. 15 ; xv. 23—28 ; and Paley's 
 remarks in the Horae Paulinse. 22.] He 
 intended himself to follow after Pentecost, 
 1 Cor. xvi. 8. This mission of Timothy is al- 
 luded to I Cor. iv. 17 (see ib. i. I) ; xvi. 10. 
 The object of it was to bring these churches 
 in Maced. and Achaia into remembrance of 
 the ways and teaching of Paul. It occurred 
 shortly before the writing of 1 Cor. He was 
 (I Cor. xvi. II) soon to return : — but con- 
 siderable uncertainty hangs over this jour- 
 
 drachma and not shekels (Grot., Hamm.) ney. We find him again with Paul in 
 are meant, is plain: for Luke is writing of Macedonia, 2 Cor. i. I : but apparently he 
 
 a Grecian town, and to a Greek. 20. 
 
 κατα κρότος] " Eo modo dicitur urbs 
 αίί'ίίσΟηι κατά κράτος, rjiirevi expnynatur, 
 apud Plut. Apophth. p. 17C. Ilinc lucem 
 mutuatur locus. Act. xix. 19, ubi dicitur 
 verbum Domini icii7(i κράτος ίσχίηιν, per 
 rim inralescere, quasi oppugnans et vi 
 expugnans corda hominum." Hermann 
 on Viger, p. G32. So κατά μικρόν, κατ' 
 όΧιγον, καθ νπιρβολίιν, Κ'ΐτά κύσμον. 
 See Bernhardy, Syntax, p. 241, f. 
 
 had not reached Corinth. See 1 Cor. xvi. 
 1. c. : and 2 Cor. xii. 18, where he would 
 probably have been mentioned, had he 
 done so. — On the difficult question respect- 
 ing a journey of Paul himself to Corinth 
 during this period, see notes, 2 Cor. xii. 14 ; 
 xiii. ] , — and Prolegg. to I Cor. 
 Εραστον] This Erastus can hardly be 
 identical with the E. of Rom. xvi. 23, who 
 must have been resident at Corinth : see 
 there : and therefore hardly either with the
 
 20-27. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 199 
 
 oXiyoc TTfi 
 
 δ^ 
 
 ιγος τΓίρι 
 
 κατά 
 της οδού. 
 
 τοι> κα(ξ)ον 
 
 24 
 
 ουκ wch. Σϋ. 1 
 only. 
 
 αργυροκοτΓος ποιωι; 
 
 ταραγος 
 
 Δ, / •, , oniy. 
 
 ημητριος yap τίς ονόματι sc^'^xn.is 
 
 'Λ ' S' y ih ix. i reir. 
 
 Άοτίμιόος 'her^un\y. 
 
 OK t\ ζ Ju'lg- Ji^i'• 
 
 '^^ ους •'•■'• >>-2y 
 
 ναούς apyvpovq 
 TTu^myiTO τοις τΕ^νιταις *^ εργασίαν "^ ουκ οΧι-γην, 
 
 f β' ^ ^C^^ " > / a D.iriu• nres 
 
 σι/νασροίσας, και τους *" πίρί τα τοιαύτα ερ•^ατας, =Ερίι.ίν. 
 είττεν ' Ανορίς, επιστοσΟε on ' ε«: ταύτης της ίρ•γασΊας η.'^. 
 
 evTTopia ημιν ίστιν^ και vtwpHTB και ακονετί οτι ου 
 /UOVOV Ε<^εσου α\Χα σχεουν ττάσης της Ασίας ο Παύλος 
 ούτος τΓξίσας μετίστησεν ικανον ογΛον, Λeyωv οτι rett. mid.. 
 ουκ εισιν υεοι οι "^ cia γειρων ^ γινόμενοι, ου μόνον οε ^ J;f ,},'• ρ 
 
 τοΰτο ^ κινδυνεύει ημιν το ^ μέρος εις ^ απελεγ/ιιαι^ " εΧθεϊν, ίιΧ χϊ!ιο 
 άλλα /cat το της "" μξyύXης θέας ιερόν Αρτέμιδος ^^ εις 
 
 only. 
 
 here only. 
 
 . . . χρι/σί/ΰν 
 i-auiir. Di.id. 
 Sic. XX. 14. 
 
 Deut. xxvii. 
 1Γι. 
 ech.sii. ISieft'. 
 
 μεyaAης ϋεας ιερόν Άρτεμι 
 
 f Luke χχίτ. 33 (rec). ch. xii. 12 only. Dent. i. 41. g = l.uke x. 40, 41. wept τ(;ΐ' 6P7"^iui/ oiTec 
 
 τΓιί χώρα? Diod. Sic. i. 74. h = Luke xii. 15. John xviii. 36. i here only f. JiidR. Ti. 12 Aquil. 
 
 k w. ότι, Mark xvi. 4. John xii. lit. ch. xxvii. 10. 
 
 η = here only, τά tKet πάντα npns Λακε5αιμοι/ι'( 
 
 ο ch. xi. 24 reft' ρ ver. 11. reft'. '' q = John 
 
 Lukeviii.23. 1 Cor. χ v. 30. w. τυΰ and inf., Jonsih i. 4. 
 
 only t. έλεγμόϊ, 4 Kings xix. 3 I Isa. u=• John v. 24 
 
 X Rom. ii. 2H. ix. 8. Wiod. ix. 6. 
 
 1 ch. xiii. 44 reft'. m ch. xviii. 4 reft'. 
 
 9 μ(τ(-σττ]σεν, Xen. Hell. ii. 2. 5. JoA. xiv. 8. 
 
 3. Hcb. xi. 3. Gen.ii. 4. r ver. 40. afcol., 
 
 s = here only. 3 Mace. v. 17. t here 
 
 = ch. viii. 9 reft". \v = ch. X. 4 reft'. 
 
 133.— 23. ονχ ολιγ. AD (but ουκ ολ. in ver 24) : txt B(e sil)EGH &c.— 24. for ονομ., 
 ην D-gr (om d sah). — αργυροΐ'ς om Β : aft αργ., ins ίσως κιβωρια ftucpa 57 : and ιτως 
 ως κφ. μ. 33. 34-marg al.— τταρί-χί A'D(pr8ef. oi)E 65. 67- 133: txt A2B(e sil)GH 
 mss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec. — ουκ ολιγ. ιργασ. ABD 13 ν al ThP (corrn of order) : txt 
 EGH mss (nrly) syr ar-pol (copt) Chr ThP Oec. — 25. for ονς, ούτος (omg και) D 137 
 tol latt Syr ar-erp sah arm. — for toyar. (om al), τιχνετας (sic ; -ταις D') D-gr : artifices 
 e al. — (φη ττρυς αυτονς D vss. — cif^ptc συΐ'τεχικται D sail syr*: αδίλφοι IOC. — rec 
 ημών {corrn, as more tistial cons/7•), with GH &c vss Chrg Thl' Oec : txt (not υμών) 
 ABDE 13. 18. 26. 3f). 40. GH. <)8\ 105. 133. 137. 180 al ν copt sah ThP (Chr in 
 Wetst). — 26. on om D. — εως εφ. (-σιου D : -ipsiiis Ephesi d) D' 14': της ίφ. 31. 
 G8. 69.73. 104. 105 ThF.— άλλα και AD-gr G 13. 14'. 18. 35. 36. 40. 106. 180 al 
 demid syr ar-pol Chr ThU {svpplementar;/ insertion) : txt B(e sil)EH most mss (appy) 
 d V copt sah al Thl- Oec— τί/ς om D^ al. — οντος τις τοπ D {hie quidarn tunc d). — 
 αττίστησίν Ε. — οχλ. ίκ•. 133. 191. — on ούτοι D-gr. — οι om 57- 65 al. — aft χ(ΐρ• ins 
 ανθρώπων 33. 34. 100. 137 ^yr ar-erp copt seth Chr-text. — 27. οε om E-gr (vss). — 
 ημ. Kird. D al {-ΐ'ΐυσίΐ D-). — το μερ. κινδ. ημ. Α 137: ημών 23. 96. — rec αρτιμ. lepov 
 {comi of characteristic order), -with AB(e sil)G &c ThF Oec (Οεας om ν sah) : txt 
 
 E. of 2 Tim. iv. 20 : see note there. 
 eis T. Άσίαν] i. e. in (but beware of 
 imagining ιΐς to be ^ put for' Iv, here or 
 any wliere. It gives the directioti of the 
 tarrying, as in the expressions ές• ΰόμονς 
 μίναν. Soph. Ag. 80, and διεκαρτίρουν 
 εις Γί)ν πατρίδα, Lycurg. cont. Leocr., 
 p. 158. It is far better to take it thus, with 
 Meyer, than with Winer, Gr., as import- 
 ing ' in favour of,' ' for the benefit of) 
 Ephesus : Asia is named by way of con- 
 trast with Macedonia, just before men- 
 tioned. This is evident by the following 
 event taking place at Ephesus. 24. 
 
 ναο'ΐις άργ.] Tliese were small models 
 (άφιϋηίψατα) of the celebrated temple of 
 the Ephesian Artemis, with her statue, 
 wliich it was the custom to carry on jour- 
 neys, and place in houses, as a charm. 
 Chrys. κ<ιΙ πώς tin ναούς άργυροΤ/ς yt- 
 νίσϋαι; "ίσως 6Jς κιβώρια μικ()ά. Ammian. 
 
 Marcellin. xxii. 13: 'Asclepiades philoso- 
 phus .... dese coelestis argenteum breve 
 figmentum quocunque ibat secum solitus 
 efferre . . . .' Diod. Sic. i. 15 : ι^αοϋς- χρυ- 
 σούς δί'ο. Dio Cass, xxxix. 20 : ΐ'εώς 
 "Ηρας βραχνς επί τραπίζης τινός προς 
 ανατολών Ίδμυμίνος. We may find an 
 exact parallel in the usages of that corrupt 
 form of Christianity, which, whatever it 
 may pretend to teach, in practice honours 
 similarly the "great goddess" of its ima- 
 gination. 25. TO. τοιαΰτα] All sorts 
 of memorials or amulets connected with the 
 worship of Artemis. — Mr. llowson suggests 
 that possibly Alexander the coppersmith 
 may have been one of tliese craftsmen : see 
 2 Tim. iv. 14. 26.] The people believed 
 that the images themselves were gods : τά 
 χαλκά και τά -γραπτά και λιΟιί'ιΐ μι) μα- 
 ϋόντίς, μιιδί ΐΟιπΟίΐ'Τ(ς αγάλματα και 
 τιμάς θ(ών, αλλά Oeovs καλΰν. Plutarch
 
 200 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XIX. 
 
 y-ch.m.38 ουθίν " λογίσθί)να£, ^' μίλλειν δε και ^ καθαιρίΐσθαι της 
 TuLu'.'ii'ere' " /ί£γπλΗΟΓ>?7ος ovTiK W ολη Τ) Ασία καΙ -η ^ οΊκουμίνη 
 
 only. καΟαι- „ , ~) '}<{ •> ι λ\ ^ ' ι1 Λ ' οΛ 
 
 ΡίίΙτ.τ,-,ί CTf/5frfit, -" ακουσοί'τίί- όί κοί γεί'ο^ιενοι πΛϊ/οε(ς• ϋνμου 
 fnc.Diou. ε /fpaCoi' λέγοντες Μεγάλη η Αρτεμις Ιΐ,φεσίων. 
 aLl!keVx.«. ^ Βπλί]σθη -η πόλις τί)ς 'συγχύσεως, ' ωρμησάν ■ 
 
 only Jrr. 
 
 , . ... ,^ _. ,, . τε ' ομο- 
 
 χΐ/ιι. Ουμα^υν είς το '' θεατρον συνπρπάσαντες Γάιον και 
 
 b -ch. χτίί. 31. , . , •««■ Γ\ / m ^' ΓΊΤ 'Λ 30 - 
 
 Rtviii. 10. Αοίσταογον Μακεοονας, σννεκοημους ΙΙανΑου. του 
 
 χϋ.ΙΙ. Ρί. •\ •> Λ, 
 
 ix.S, C ch. xviii. 7 al. d = John i. 14 al. ch. vi. 3, 5, 8 al. Jer. v. 2/. e=Luke 
 
 28. Eph. iv 31. RfV. xii. 12 al. ;i ver. 27 al. See notes. g = Luke iv. 28. v. 2K al. 
 
 h here only. Gen.xi.9. 1 Kings xiv. 20. i ch. vii. 57 relT. k 1 Cor. iv. only f. 
 
 Gen. vi. 1 .. 
 1 ch. Ti. 12 refl. 
 
 m 2 Cor. viii. lyonlyt• 
 
 DEII 4. 42. 57. 7(;. 7«. i)C. 98. 12G. 177• 191• 192 al ChrThI' Jer.— rec ovSev {corrn to 
 viore usual vord),vtiih DEG &c ff: t.xt ABH 42.5?. 7G. 9G. 191. 192 al—XoyiaOijaiTac 
 ADE 7;$ al V Syr arr {emendation of constr) : txt B(e sil)GH mss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec. — 
 μί\\(ΐ A'(D) al (vss) Till (β*• the last) : alii aliter (see Scholz) : txt B(e sil)EGH most 
 luss Chr Oi'c. — for Si, η {corrn, no contrast being implied ?) AE (και om Ε al) all vss 
 Occ Jer : άλλα ΚΓίθίρισθαι ^fXXtt D : txt BGH all ν Chr Thl. — rec την μίγαλίκιτί/ηι 
 {see note), with GH most mss (appy) vss Chr Thl Oec : txt ABE al 13. 15. 18. 29. 3G. 
 40. (>8. G9. 100. 115. 13.'5. 180 al sah : τ. μ(γ. αυτής om D: αυτής om Β: αυτοις 42. — 
 7ji' om Β : t] D'. — aft ολ. om »; BD. — bef oik. om η Β. — d has sed destrui incipiet tola 
 Asia et orbis terrarum colitur. — 28. ταύτα St ακουσ. D vss. — bef ίκραζ. D 137 Syr- 
 marg ins {και 137) ^ραμοντις ίΐς το αμφοίον ((ϋφοδον 137)• — ικραζαΐ' 9G. — η om D. — 
 29. rec ?/ ττολ. ολη {corrn : see ch xxi. 30), with EGH &c sah syr al Chr Thl Oec : ο\η 
 η IT. D Syr seth al : txt AB 13. 40 ν copt arm.— rec om της, with B(e sil)(Di)E al 
 {συνιχυθη ολ. η π. αισχύνης D') : ins AD^GH 4. 31. 73. 100. 105. lOG. 1.37. 177• 180 
 all Chr Thl Oec-ed. — ωυμησαντίς 133. — for τι, Se D-gr al copt. — και συναρττ. D. — 
 μακίίοιης D' : -να 15. 180: -νιας 177' (appy): om 100. — rec του π. : txt ABDEGH 
 most mss Clir Thl. — aft παυλου, ins ιιλκυσαν αυτούς, and τί bef yaiov 14' : rajjto Gaio 
 et Aristarcho comitibus Pauli de thealro ubi verbum domini prcedicabant, traxerunt ad 
 judices audiendos Cassiod: for συνικδ., cum comitibus e. — 30. ηαυλ. dt AB 13: txt D 
 
 de Isid. p. 379, C (Wetst.) : see ch. xvii. 29. 
 — And so it is invariably, wherever images 
 are employed professedly as media of wor- 
 ship. — The genn. Έ(/). and Άσ. are governed 
 by όχΚον. 27.] ήμϊν is best taken as the 
 
 dativus incommodi, not for ημών, nor with 
 TO μέρυς, but with κινζυνίίαι. — μέρος, 
 as we say, ' department.' άλλα καί] 
 
 ' but that eventually even the temple 
 itself of the great goddess Artemis will 
 be counted for nothing.' μίγάλη was the 
 usual ejjithet of the Ephesian Artemis : 
 Xen. Ephes. i. p. 15: ομνύω τε τήν πά- 
 rptov ήμϊν Otov, την μίγάλην Έφίσίων 
 Άρτιμιν. There is an inscription in 
 Boeckh, 29G3 c, containing the words της 
 μιγολης θίας αρτΐμιύος προ ττολίως. 
 The same inscr. also mentions γραμματεύς 
 and ανθύπατος. C. and H. ii. 82. — The 
 temple of Artemis at Ephesus, having been 
 burnt to the ground by Herostratus on the 
 night of the birth of Alexander the Great 
 (B.C. 355), was restored with increased 
 magnificence, and accounted one of the 
 wonders of the ancient world. Its dimen- 
 sions were 425 χ 220 feet, and it was sur- 
 rounded by 127 columns, 60 feet high. It 
 was standing in all its grandeur at this 
 time. See C. and II. ch. xvi. vol. ii. p. 6G. 
 ΤΎ\% μ€γαλειότητο5 is the more dif- 
 
 ficult and probably original reading : ' and 
 that she should he deposed from her 
 greatness, whom ' &c. 29. els το 
 
 θεατρον] The resort of the populace on 
 occasions of excitement, as Wetst. shews 
 by many instances. So Tacit. Hist. ii. 80, 
 ' Tum Antiochensium theatrum ingressus, 
 ubi illis consultare mos est.' ' Of the site of 
 the theatre, the scene of the tumult raised by 
 Demetrius, there can be no doubt, its ruins 
 being a wreck of immense grandeur. I think 
 it must have been larger than the one at Mi- 
 letus, and that exceeds any 1 have elsewhere 
 
 seen Its form alone can now be spoken 
 
 of, for every seat is removed, and the prosce- 
 nium is a heap of ruins.' Fellows, Asia Mi- 
 nor, p. 274 . ' The theatre of Ephesus is said 
 to be the largest known of any that have re- 
 mained to us from antiquity.' C. and H. 
 ii. p. G8. σ-υναρίΓ.] It is not im- 
 
 plied that they seized Gaius and Aristarchus 
 before they rushed into the theatre : com- 
 pare προςενζάμινοι είπαν, ch. i. 24, and 
 Winer, § 4G. 9. Anm. i. Γάϊον] A 
 
 different person from the Gaius of ch. xx. 4, 
 who was of Derbe, and from the Gaius of 
 Rom. xvi. 23, and 1 Cor. i. 15, who was 
 evidently a Corinthian. Aristarchus is 
 mentioned ch. xx. 4; xxvii. 2. Col. iv. 10; 
 Philem. xxiv. He was a native of Thes- 
 
 ABD 
 EGH
 
 28—35. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 201 
 
 δί Παύλου βονΧομίνου ΗςίΧθίΐν εις τον ^ημον, ουκ ίίων ncou^tr, ch. 
 αυτυν οι μαυηται. Ttvfc οε και των Άσιαργων, οντες '"'.''"'; "'j'y- 
 
 _ ' ι Λ- eit Tat €ρη- 
 
 αυτω φίλοι, πίμχίαντΐς ττοος αυτόν " τταοίκαΧουν μη m'^s αύτόι/ 
 
 it \ . , ,. ' ο.-) ,/ \ t » dtSovi, Jos. 
 
 " δοϋναι εαυτόν εις το Θίατρον. **■' '^ άλλοι μεν ονν ^ αλΧο tndb^Jd/^' 
 
 ,t γ t ^ ' • \ ' Q Ι > qq • Sic. τ. 59. 
 
 τι ίκοαί,ον ην yao η ίκκλησια ^ συνκεγνμίνη, και ^^ οι p<-h xxi.34. 
 
 ' , frs ι ,t \ / η ^"i ' Wisd. xviii. 
 
 ττλειους ουκ τ)οεισαν τίνος ένεκεν "^ συνεληλυθεισαν. ^''^ q Jh. ϋ. γ, rer. 
 
 δε τοΰ όγλου ^ τΓοοεΠιΙαασαν Αλεξανδρον, προραλοντων reft." ' ' 
 
 ■> \ - » Λ Ν f ςνλ 5 /y^ U ι ν rcli.i.f). ii.7al. 
 
 αυτόν των Ιουδαίων' ο δε Αλεςαΐ'δρος " κατασεισας ττιν '^ ^'Ι"- ^'''• * 
 
 ^ ^ ^ ■* ' only, ηρυ- 
 
 \εφα ?ίθελεν ' απολογεισθαι τω δ/ϊμω. "επιγνόντες δε '^'f",°^,lj° 
 ΟΤΙ Ιουδαίος " έστιν, φωνή eyeveTO μια ^ ε /c πάντων ως l'^^°'}°^ll 
 ^ ετΓΐ ωοας δυο κτροζοντων Μεγάλη 7} ' Αρτεμις Εφεσιων. 3,"?^'' ε χ^όα. 
 
 οκ a 'Λ ςν^ ' b '' ^ " Λ i * χχχν. 34. 
 
 καΓαστειΛας οε ο -γραμματεύς τον ο^Αον φησιν t=h<;reoniy. 
 
 var. read. (Lnke xxxi. Sponly.) π with dat., ch. xii. 17 reff. r ch. xxiv. 10. xxvi. 24. Lukexii. U. 
 
 w Luke xxiii. 7. ch. xxii 2S). xxviii. 1. Jcr. v. 5. χ con tr., J ihn ii. 9 al. y = ch, v. 3S, 39. 
 
 John iii. 25 al. ζ ch. xiii. 31 rcfl'. a here only t• 2 Mace. iv. 31. I) -= here uiily. 
 
 (Ezr. Tii. ti, &c.) 
 
 (β. ie T. TT.) EGH mss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec : ipso anfem volente P. d. — for ουκ ti. av. 
 01 μ. {ίων Ε, ίΐον GH, unaav al) οι μαθ. εκωΧνον D al : non sinebant d. — 31. και om 
 4. 37• CG' d Slav Chr. — ασιας αοχοντων 23 : αρχόντων sah : principes asicB e. — υπ-αρ- 
 χοντίς Ό. — αντον Ε al (vss) : αυτών 137 : φι^• αυτω 95. — tig αντον 96. — £κόοι;ναι 68. 
 — 32. Γί om D 42 ν al. — η yap ικκλ. (add ολ?; al) ηνΌ. — πλείστοι D-gr : πλί ΐονε ς 133. 
 —(νεκα ΑΒ 13. 180 Thl-.— χάριν 33'. 64. 97 : χάριν ένεκεν 80 : txt DEGH mss'(nrly) 
 Chr Thl' Oec. — συνεληλνθασιν Η : -λνθησαν G Thl'. — 33. for προεβ., συνεβιβασαν 
 ABE 27. 29. 66-. 69. 105. 163 (no version appy) {corrn, perhaps on acct of the 
 unusual word, perhaps to avoid the repetition of xpo) : txt D- (κατεβιβ. D', distrax•- 
 erunt d, detrax. v) GH most mss (appy) Chr Thl Oec— προβαλλ. DG &c Thl : txt ABE 
 40. 95. 96. 97. 98. 163 al Chr. — αντων G' 96. 137•— ο ουν A demid (latt).— r»; χειρι 
 D 40. 73. 81 al Chr Thl- : txt AB(e sil)EGH most mss (appy) Thl' Oec— α-ολογ;;- 
 σασθαι 73 Chr Thl-. — τω λαω Ε. — Syr ar-erp have ver 33 thus : ο ct όχλος των ιονίαιων 
 των όντων εκεί ττροεβιβασαν εζ αντων lovSaiov αλεζαν^ρον ονόματι' ο ίε σταθείς, 
 κατασεισας &c. — 34. rec επιγιοντων (corm, to avoid the pendent 7iominative), with 
 some mss Oec: txt (B .' Η al Thl' -γνωντ.) ABDEGH most mss Chr Thl'.-i«r om D 
 (v copt sah) : εκ παντ. μια 177• — ωςει Β al : ωςει ττερι 13. 33. 34 : ως . . . κραζ. om 
 105 : 6νο ώρας 192. — κραζοντες Α. — η om D. — μεγ. &ο is repeated in Β. — 35. κατα- 
 σεισας DE 1. 17'• 78• 137 Thl' {compescuisset d, sedasset e ν). — τον οχλ. ο γρ. Β 130 
 
 salonica. 31. Άσιαρχών] The Asiar- ονόματος είναι Ifpoj' και άνακεΐσθαι Ty 
 
 chae were officers elected by the cities of θεψ, άγεσθαι ίε εττ' αΰταΊς {soil, του μηνός 
 
 the province of Asia to preside over their ypipaic) τάς εορτάς και την των Άρτε- 
 
 games and religious festivals. Of these it μισίων ττανήγνριν. C. and H. ii. TJ. 
 would be natural that the one who for the δονναι] Kypke remarks : ' latet in 
 
 time presided would bear the title of ό phrasi, quod periculum Paulo in theatre 
 
 Άσιάρχυς: of. Eus. H• E. iv. 15: but no immineat.' E. Λ^ 'adventure himself;' 
 
 more is known of such presidency. Wetst. an excellent translation. 33.] €κ τ. 
 
 quotes several inscriptions and coins in δχλ. ' some of the multitude.' τΓροεβ. 
 
 which the name occurs, and cites many ' Tirged forward,' through the crowd ; the 
 
 analogous names of like officers elsewhere : Jews pushing him on from behind, ' pro- 
 
 Ciliciarcha, Syriarcha, Phceniciarcha, Hel- pellentibus.' — Alexander does not seem 
 
 ladarcha, &c. The Asiarch Philip at to be mentioned elsewhere (but see on 
 
 Smyrna is mentioned by Eusebius (II• E. 2 Tim. iv. 14). He appears to liave been 
 
 iv. 15) as presiding in the amphitheatre at a Christian convert from Judaism, whom 
 
 the martyrdom of Polycarp. These Ephe- the Jews were willing to expose as a 
 
 sian games in honour of Artemis took place victim to the fury of the mob : or ])er- 
 
 in May, which whole moiitli (another sin- haps one of themselves, put forward to 
 
 gular coincidence witii tlie jiractices of clear them of blame on the occasion, 
 
 idolatrous Christendom) was sacred to, and 34. €7Γΐγνόντ€9] The nom. is an anaoolu- 
 
 nanied Artomisian after, the goddess. In thon, as in ch. xx. 3 al. Sec Winer, § 64, 
 
 Boeckh, Inscr. 2954, we have the decree ii. 1. — They would hear nothing from a 
 
 'όλον τον μΰνα τον ίπώνυμον του Θείου Jew, as being an enemy of imago-worsiiip.
 
 20-2 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XIX. 36—41. 
 
 C Id., Malt ix. "Ά ΐ'δρΕς Έ^ε'ο-ιοί, τις '' yap ϊστιν ανθρωττων ος ου yivio- 
 αΡ• ■ / σκίΐ την ΈφίσΙων ττόλιν '' νΕω/νάροί' " ούσαν της /αΕγάλί/ς 
 ''sxi'v'iii.''• Άρτί'/κδος και τοΰ ^ ^ιοττετοϋς ; ^^ 'αναντίρρητων ονν 
 
 ί-1 -h. Tiii.y „ ' , i „, . > f - i, ^ , k ' 
 
 '*■"• . όντων τοντων όίον ίστιν υμάς κατίσταλιηνυυς υττ- 
 αίτο^^„ α'ονίΐΐ' καΐ μη^ίν ' προπίτΐς πρασσίΐν. ^' "' ηyayίτε yap 
 ^"'λ"1'' τους ίίν^οας τούτους ούτε " ιερόσυλους ούτε ° ρλασφΐ]- 
 diU«i"u'.°' μοϋντας την Otov ΰμων. ^^ ει μεν ούν Αημητριος και οΐ 
 *" sjmn."'Voi> συν αυτω ^' τεγ^νίται ε^ουσιν προς τίνα '^ \6yov, ^ ayopaioi 
 
 Χι. 3, χχχίίι. ^ *t'/i' f ' U* Λ' '"ΧΧ'λ 
 
 • ,'ί; ^ a-wovTai και ανυυπατοι εισιν' ε-νκαλειτωσαν αλΛΐ]Αοις. 
 
 1 ι Mace. XII. / ' 
 
 II. fc ch. τίϋ. m ΓίΛ". 1 2 Tim. iii. 4 only. Prnv. χ. 14. m absol , M;ilt. xxi. 7. John vu 45 al. 
 
 η here only t. 2 Mace. iv. 42. (See Rom. ii. 2-'.) ο con.str.,Matt. xxvii. 3U. ρ vcr 24 reft'. q=liereonIy. 
 
 ίμοί . . . πρΟΓ τοΓ'Τοιι? ό λόγοΓ. Drmo.sth. -προς Λακρ., ρ. <)42. 17. Γ = here only. Ttic &,oiKi;- 
 
 fffit. ίν alt ταΓ Uiopaiout iroiuvvTat. Straho xiii. p. 932 (Walil.). μοί 'άηυ^τι τοι- ά-νορ ■ϊοι•, Jo.s. Antt. siv. 
 
 10.21. See ch. xvii. 5. .s=- Malt. xiv. 6 (var. read ). Luke xxiv. 21. t eh. xiii. 7. XTiii. 12only. 
 
 See notes. u ch. xxiii. 28, 29. xxvi. 2, 7. Rom. viii. 33. L. Ρ , but κατ'ί Tii-oc Paul. 
 
 copt : add r»7c ττολίως 5\τ*. — (φη Ε ν al. — εφεσιοι om 137- — rec ανθρωττος (comi), with 
 D=(o ai«. D )GII syr al" Chr Thl' Oec: txt {των αν. al) ABE 13. 14'. 18. 25. 2?. 31. 
 3<). 40. C8. C!). 105. 180 ν Syr ar-erp copt (sah) seth arm Thl-. — ουκ tiriyivwdKn 
 180. — for K/iiff., ιιμίπραν D {vestram a) : των «ρεσ. 180: aft πολ. Ε. — ιαοκ-οοοΐ' D', 
 vtoKOnov EG al. — fo'rtt D. — rec μ^γ. θέας, with GH &c seth ar-pol slav-ed Chr Till Oec : 
 txt ABDE 13. 15. 18. 3G. 40 68. 6!>. 73. HI. 105. 137 all ν Syr ar-erp copt sah slav-ms. 
 — ίΐιις-ίΤίΓοί'ς D G8 : htijus jovis a: jox^iseproUs e : jovisque proli.s \. — 36. τοντ. (om 
 13) ovr. A 38. li)2.— rec πρατ-ί,ν, with Β (e sil) &c : txt AB?DEGH 38. 57. 177. 180 
 Chr Thl Oec. — 37. τον. ενθαίε D svr-marg. — μήτε ito. μήτε D. — rec την Otav (corrn), 
 with D'E- &c Thl : Oec: txt ABD'E'GH most mss (Chr .') Ύ\ι\Κ—ημων ADE^ 13. 32. 
 36. 6C-. 76• 105 al e Syr sah arr Thl' {corrn to suit the relation of the speaker to the 
 addressed) : txt B(e sil)E'-gr GH most mss (appy) ν copt syr seth al Chr ThF Oec. — 
 38. δημητρ. οντάς D Syr ar-erp slav : ο Οημ. 137. — τεχν. om 3. !)5 Chr,. — rec ττμος τιν. 
 λογ. εχ. {alteration of characteristic order) : txt ABD(7rp. αυτούς rii'n D)EGH most 
 mss {εχ, ττρ. ηιας Xoynv 95 : cum aliquos guendam verbuni d) ν all Chr Thl. — rec 
 αγοραΤοι, with rass nrly (see note). — for ay.,forenses e : conventus d : coventiis forenses 
 V : ecce proconsul in civiiaie est : artifices illi sunt : accedant et litigent Syr ar-erp. — 
 
 35. καταστ.] When he had quieted, have been specially granted by the emperors 
 
 ΙιιΠίχΙ, the crowd. ό γραμματεύς] to particular cities : thus we have ϋση επ- 
 
 ' the town-clerk' is the nearest English ετΰχομεν τταράτοϋ κνρίονΥ^αισαρος' Aipi- 
 
 office corres])oiiding to it. He was the ανοϋ ci Αντωνίου ΙΙολίμωΐ'ος δεύτερον 
 
 keeper of the archives, and public reader δόγμα συγκλίιτον, καθ' ο Sis νεωκόροι 
 
 of decrees, &c., in the assemblies. Thucyd. -γεγόνημεν: and on coins of Hadrian, 
 
 vii. 10, τί/ν 'εττιστολήν εττέδυσαν ό δε Έφεσίων Ζΐζ νεωκόρο)!'. Sec. : and similarly 
 
 ■γραμματεύς της πόλεως ττορεΧθων άν- of Elagabalus, Νιΐν.•(γί>;βίωι^ τρις νίωκόηων : 
 
 εγνω τηίς' Αθιιναίοις. ' Among the Ephe- of Maxirain, 'Μαγνητών νεωκόρων Άρτί- 
 
 sian inscrr. in Boeckh, we find the fol- μιδος. τ. διοττίτονς] To give pecu- 
 
 lowing : M. I. Αυρ. Λιονυ(τιον τον ιεροκη- liar sanctity to various images, it was given 
 
 ρυκα και β ασιαρχον εκ των ίδιων Τ. out that they had fallen from heaven ; so 
 
 Φλ. Μουναηος φιλοσεβαητος ο γράμμα- Euripides of the statue of Artemis at Tauris, 
 
 τενς και ασιαρχησας. No. 2990.' C. and ίνθ "Άρτεμις σι) σίιγγονος βωμονς έχει, | 
 
 Η. ϋ. 80. γαρ gives a reason for the λαβε'ιν τ' άγαλμα θέας υ φασίν ενθάδε 
 
 καταστείλας. See Ilerm. on Viger, ρ. 829. | εις τονςδε ναυνς οϊφανυν ττισείν άπο. 
 
 νίωκόρον] Probably a ' verger ' or Iph. Taur. 8G, and 977, lie calls it διοπετες 
 
 adorner (Suidas says, not a sweeper: 6 τον άγαλμα, ονρανοΤ) ττέσημα. So also Pausan. 
 
 νίων κοημΰ,ν κ. εϊιτρεπίζων, άλλ' ηύχ 6 Att. 26, το δε άγιώτατον . . . εστίν ' Αθη- 
 
 σαρων) of the temple : here used as imply- νάς άγαλμα εν ry vvv άκρηττόλει . . . 
 
 ing that Ephesus had the charge and keeping φήμη δ' ές αυτό έχει, ττεσείν εκ'τιιϋ ονραιοϋ. 
 
 of the temple. The title is found (Werst.) —The image is described by Pliny, xvi. 72 : 
 
 on inscrii)tions as belonging to Ephesus : ' de ipso simulacro Deee ambigitur. Caeteri 
 
 η φιλ,ισιβηστος Κφεσιων βυνλη και ο ex ebeno esse tradunt: ISIucianus ter consul 
 
 νεωκόρος δημί'ς κaHιεμωσav επι αιθυπα- ex his qui proxime viso eo, scripsere, viti- 
 
 rov \\εδονκαινν Ώρεισκεινου ι\/ηφισαμενου gineum, et nunquam mutatum, septies res- 
 
 Ύιβ. Κλ. Ιταλικού του γραμματέως του tituto templo.' 37.] From this verse it 
 
 δήμου (Boeckh, No. 2966) ; and seems to appears that Paul had proceeded at Ephesus 
 
 ABD 
 EGH
 
 XX. 1. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 20ί 
 
 v=-rl 
 
 1. xvi 
 
 i.:i4. 
 
 wMh 
 
 tt. vi. 
 
 32 
 
 al. 
 
 1 Ki 
 
 ngs 
 
 XX 
 
 1. 
 
 
 x = h 
 
 ere only. 
 
 1C( 
 
 >r. ix. 
 
 
 21. 
 
 >nly. 
 
 
 etti 
 
 ισμβ'ι 
 
 ua 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 
 Tiii. 7. Kit. 
 y = here (inly. 
 
 Mark jv. 34. 
 
 Gen. xii. 12. 
 ζ ver. -.7. reft', 
 a — Mark XT. 7, 
 
 Luke xxiii. 
 
 Ill, 25. Prov. 
 
 xvii. 14. 
 beon.str., here 
 
 ii οε τι περί ίτίρων επιί,ητίΐτε, εν ry εννομ(ο εκκλη- v=-rh 
 σία ^ ετΓ ιΧνθίισεται. ^'* και yap '' κινΒυνευυμεν " εγκαλεΓσθο/ 
 '^ στάσεως ττερί της σήμερον, μηδενός ^ αιτίου υπάρ- 
 χοντος περί οΰ 6υ)>ησομίθα ^ αποόουναι λογον της 
 συστροφης ταύτης. και ταύτα ειπών ^ απελυσεν την 
 
 εκκλησιαν. 
 
 XX. ^ Μίτα 0C το παυσασθαι τον θορυβον ττρος- 
 
 καΧεσαμενος ο Παύλος τους μαθητας και ' παρακαλεσας, 
 
 ασπασαμενος εΐΙηΧθεν πορευθηναι εις την Ma/cs^ovtai'. 
 
 "^ ^ οηΐν (ch. 
 
 XX. 2». ) C Lakexxiii.4, 14, 22onIy. d ch. τϊϋ. 16 reff. e Matt. xii. 3fi. Luke xvi. 2 al. Dan. vi.2. 
 
 f ch. xxiii. 12 only. Anio.s vii. Id. g = rh. xiii. 3 reft. h ch six. 21 reli. i ch xv. 32. xvi. 40 al. 
 k=• here only. (cli. xxi. ti rec.) Xen. Anal), vii 1.40. 1 = ch. XT. 40 reft'. 
 
 39. for TTfpi ίτ.,—περαιτΐρω Β 15. 18. 3β. 42. 65. 67. G8. 105. 126. 133. 163. 180 al : 
 
 TTf ρ fTfpoj' Ε : txt ADGH most niss Chr Thl Oec : ulterius A : alterius rei ν e {iripcn- 
 Ttou) apjjears to have been a mistake from itacism). — ζηηιτι 163. — tv τω νομω ικκλησια 
 {σιας ? - D- ev τη ti'v. ίκκλησιας .') D' (m let/em ecclesice d) : in loco qui claiui• est a 
 lege ad congregationem Syr. — 40. atjftfp. (νκηλίΐηθ. στασίως μηδ. αιτ. οντος D : lyic. 
 τΓίρι της στ. σημιαυν (add -γινομίνης 43) 40. 43 syr arm. — bef ίυνηπομ. {δννηθησομ. 
 137: δννησωμ. 13) ins ου AG(oi>i' ου G')H all v-ms syrr aeth arm al Clir (text) Thl^ 
 (^perhaps, as Meger,froin a careless repetition of ov : more likely, as Bornemann in loc, 
 inserted by those who placed a colon at ι<-παρ\οντης and regarded ττιρι . . . ταύτης as 
 a new member of the sentence) : t.xt B(e sil)DE most mss (appy) ν copt sah al Chr- 
 comm Thl' Oec. — δούναι GH all TliP Oec-ed {prob the simple verb was substituted 
 for the compd rather than vice versa : both eaprr are in ordinary vse) : txt AB(e sil) 
 DE al ChrThP.— bef της σνστρ. ins ττιρι ABE 15. 18. 25. 31. 33'. 36. 40. 68. 73. 133. 
 137• 180 al d Syr (copt .') arm al Thl- (consequent on regarding σνστρ. as in apposn unth 
 the preceding yen : — q. d. viz. concerning this συστρ.) : om DGH most mss (appy) vss 
 Chr Thli Oec. 
 
 Chap. XX. 1. for προςκα\., μίταπψφαμινος BE 13. 14'. 15. 16. 31. 36. 40. 68. 180 
 copt sah seth ThF : μεταστηλ. G'.i. 98-marg 105 : txt ADGH most mss (appy) vss Chr 
 Thl' Oec. — ο om D. — rec om τταρακαλίσας (see note), with GH most mss Chr Thl' Oec : 
 ins ABD (πολλά παρ. D' and D- : παοακίλίνσας or -λεσαας D')E all vss (arranging 
 variously) ThF. — for οσπ., αποσπασαμεΐ'ος D' : και ασπ. Ε : ησπαστε D^ (alii aliter). 
 — παιιενεσθαι (corrn) ABE (aft μακ.) 13 180 al : add εκεί 43 lect 40 ν coj)t arm Thl- : 
 txt GH most mss Chr Thl' Oec : om D 27. 662. 105 — ^^^ ^^ ggQ 33 jjg j^j γ-^γ 
 
 with the same caution as at Athens, and 
 had not held up to contempt the worship 
 of Artemis, any further than unavoidably 
 the truths which he preached would render it 
 contemptible. This is also manifest from his 
 having friends among the Asiarchs, ver. 31. 
 Chrysostom, however, treats this assertion of 
 the town clerk merely as a device to appease 
 tlie people : τυντο -φεϋδυς' ταντα μιν προς 
 τον ΰημον. γαρ refers to the π(<07ΓίΓ£ς 
 
 with which he had charged them : ' and 
 this caution is not unneeded, — for &c.' 
 See Meyer ; and Ilerm. as above, on 
 ver. 25. 38. αγοραίοι] ' court- 
 
 days' (the grammarians distinguish ayo- 
 (taioc, ' circumforaneus,' an idler in the 
 market, and «γόιιαιος-, as in our te.\t : so 
 Suidas : but Ammonius «i'ce ?;e?-.ve ; and the 
 distinction is now believed tr) be mere pe- 
 datifry) : and άγονται implies that they 
 were then actually going on. They were the 
 periodical assizes of the district, held by the 
 proconsul and his assessors (see below). 
 The Latin phrase for αγοραίους ά-γειν was 
 
 conventus agere, or peragere, or convocare ; 
 cf. Cses. B. G. i. 54 ; v. 1 ; viii. 46. Hence 
 the district itself was called conventus. See 
 Smith's Diet, of Antiquities, art. Conventus. 
 — Pliny, H. N. v. 29 tin., mentions Ephesus 
 as one of these assize towns. άνθ- 
 
 ■υττατοι] ' there are (such things as) pro- 
 consuls:' the tit officers before whom to 
 bring these causes : a categoric plural. So 
 the comni. generally. But may not the 
 ' consiliarii' of the jiroconsul who were his 
 assessors at the ' conventus,' held in the 
 provinces, have themselves popularly borne 
 the name .' We find in Jos. B. J. ii. 16. 1, 
 that Cestius, the ήγεμοΊν of Syria, on re- 
 ceiving an ap[)li(;ation respecting Florus's 
 conduct at Jerusalem, μετά ήγιμήνων ίβου~ 
 λεύετο, — which ηγεμόνες were his assess07's, 
 or consiliarii. (See on ch. xxv. liJ, and 
 Smith's Diet, of Antt , ut supra.) 
 ίγκαλ. άλλ.] ' let them (the plaint id's and 
 det(!ii(laiits) plead against one another.' 
 39.] ' Legit im us ca-tus est, qui a 
 magistratu civitatis convocatur et rcgitur.'
 
 204< 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XX. 
 
 ch.x»iii.3. - '" δίελΟωΐ' §£ τα μίρη ίκΰνα και ' τταρακαλίσας αυτούς 
 " λόνω πολλω τίΧΘίν εις τι]ν 'Ελλάδα, ^ ° ποιησας τε 
 
 ABD 
 EGH 
 
 χίχ. 1. 
 η cli. XT. 32 
 υ I'll. XT. 33 
 
 re η. 
 
 )γω 
 
 τω 
 
 ν Ιου- 
 
 retr. 
 q cli. xiii. 13 
 
 μήνας τρίΐς, Ύ^νομίνης αυτω '^ ίττιβουΧης υπο 
 Βαΐων μίλΧοντι '' αΐ'αγεσΟαι ίΐς την Έυριαν εγευετο 
 r-pi.i!em. 11.' γ>'ω/**ϊ ' ^''^ ' ύτΓοστρεψειν δια Μακεδοΐ'ίος. '^ " CTOv- 
 χίτ. iiV ^ ειττετο θε αυτω "Xfi '"'/C Λσιας Ζωττατρος ΙΙυρρου 
 U here only t ΒεοοίοΓος, θεσσαλοΐ'ίκέων δε Αρίσταρχος fcat Σεκοΰνδος, 
 τί.?ΐΓ.'χί!'5.*\.•αί Γάϊος Αίρβαιος και Τιμόθεος, Ασιανοί δε Τυ)(^(κ:ος 
 
 1»0 Till-: ins ADII most mss (appy) Chr Thl'. — 2. δε om 191. — πάντα τ. μ. ίκεινη D 
 {-ra D-). — for ττηρ. αυΓ., χρησαμίνος D'-gr. — 3. St D 38 ο copt. — αυτω ytv. επιβ. 
 {corrn of order?) ABE: txt GH mss (appy) ν al Chr Thl Oec : και -γιιηιθίίσης Ό 
 {-Οιις D'). — μέλλων Ε: -λοί'τος (Tisch, -τα Scholz) all Chri- — αγεσθαι Ε al. — μίλλ. to 
 συρ. om l(j. — γνώμης ΑΕ 13. 15. 3(5. 38. G8. 105. 180. — του om ar-erp. — for δια, fK 
 copt : £(<; -lijj' Syr sah. — D syr-marg have ηθελησεν αναχθηναι εις συριαν ειπιν δε 
 το ττνευμα αυτω νποατ. δια της μ. — aft νττοστρ. ins αυτόν 191. — £ΐς• μακεδονιαν ν sail. 
 — 4. for σννειπ. δ. αυτ. αχρ., — μέλλοντος ουν εζειενηι αυτού (comiiari euni d, comi- 
 tati sunt euni t(si/tie syr-marg) μέχρι D sjT-marg. — αυτω om 4'. 22. GG. 80. 100. 192. — 
 άχρι τ. ασ. om Β 13 ν seth ar-erp Bed.— σωσιπ. 4'. 25. 40. 57'. 08. 95^. 9G. 97- 99• 1G3 
 al copt sah arm ar-erp slav (mod) Thl' Oec Bed : σαττατρος 137. — rec om ττυορου (see note), 
 with GH &c Syr £eth al Chr Thl' Oec : ins ABDE 13. 15. 25. 27. 29. 31. 36. 40. 42. 57. 
 G6. 68. 69. 73. 76. 96. 105. 142. 163. 180 al lect 40 ν copt sah syr-marg arm slav (slav^ 
 aft βερ.) ThP Orig-int Bed. — βηροιαιος GH (A' .') al : βερυηιος D'E {beryensis d, bero- 
 ensis e) : βεροοιαιος (Β?) 95. 113 Thl' Oec (ed) {see var read, ch xvii. 10). — ο δερβαιος 
 Λ 13 : δονβιριος D^ (doverius d). — aft τιμ. ins lystreiisis Syr ar-erp : εφεσως 137. — fur 
 
 Grot. The art. points out the regularly 
 recurring assembly, of which they all 
 knew. 40.] γάρ assumes that this as- 
 
 sembly was an unlaniful one. μηδ€νος, 
 
 (Γ.Γ.λ.] ' There being no ground why 
 (i. e. in consequence of which) we shall 
 be able to give an account,' ' i. e. ' no 
 ground whereon to build the possibility of 
 our giving an account.' The reading ττιρι 
 oil οΰ (see var. readd.) involves the sen- 
 tence in almost inextricable confusion. To 
 read περί της συστ. τ. and take it in 
 apposit. with περί ov, ' hujus rei, videlicet 
 conventus hujus' (Bornemann), is very 
 harsh. 
 
 Chap. XX. 1 — XXI. 16.] Journey of 
 Paul to Macedonia and Greece, and 
 THENCE TO Jerusalem. 1.] τταρα- 
 
 καλέσας has probably been omitted on ac- 
 count of the two participles coming together : 
 or perhaps on account of the same word 
 occurring again in ver. 2. 2.] Notices 
 
 of this journey may be found 2 Cor. ii. 12, 
 13 ; vii. 5, 6. He delayed on the way some 
 time at Troas, waiting for Titus, — broke off 
 his preaching there, though prosperous, in 
 distress of mind at his non-arrival, 2 Cor. 
 ii. 12, 13, — and sailed for Macedonia, where 
 Titus met him, 2 Cor. vii. 6. That Epistle 
 was written during it, from Macedonia (see 
 2 Cor. ix. 2, καυχώμαι, ' I am boasting'). 
 He seems to have gone to the confines at 
 least of Illyria, llom. xv. 19. αίιτους] 
 
 The Macedonian brethren : so ch. xviii. 1 
 
 rec. text. Ελλάδα] Achaia, see ch. 
 
 xix. 21. 3. iroiiiaas] The nominative 
 
 as cb. xix. 34 : an anacoluthon. This stay 
 was made at Corinth, most probably : see 
 1 Cor. xvi. 6, 7 : and was during the winter, 
 see below on ver. 6. During it the Epistle 
 to the Romans was written : see Prolegg. 
 
 (λί'λλοντι άνάγεσθαι] This purpose, 
 of going from (Corinth to Palestine by sea, 
 is implied ch. xix. 21, and 1 Cor. xvi. 3 — 7• 
 
 τοΰ ύιτοστρ.] The genit. is not (as 
 Meyer) governed directly by -γνώμη, which 
 would be more naturally followed by εις το 
 ΰτΓ. : but denotes the purpose, as in ref. 
 
 4. άχρι τ. Ασίας] It is not hereby 
 implied that they went no further than to 
 Asia: Trophimus (ch. xxi. 29) and Aristar- 
 chus (ch. xxvii. 2), and probably others, as 
 the bearers of the alms from Macedonia and 
 Corinth (1 Cor. xvi. 3, 4), accompanied him 
 to Jerusalem. Σώττατρος Πΰρρου 
 
 Βεροιαΐος] This mention of his father is 
 perhaps made to distinguish him (.') from 
 Sosipater, who was with Paul at Corinth 
 (Rom. xvi. 21). The name Πίφρον has 
 been erased as that of an unknown person, 
 and because the mention of the father is 
 unusual in the N. T. : — no possible reason 
 can be given for its insertion by copyists. 
 Άρίσταρχος] See ch. xix. 29 ; 
 xxvii. 2. Col. iv. 10. Philem. 24.— Secundus 
 is altogether unknown. — The Gains here is 
 not the G. of ch. xix. 29, who was a Mace- 
 donian. The epithet ΛερβαΧος is inserted
 
 2-7. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 205 
 
 Kill τρόφιμος. ^^ ούτοι " ττροελθυντες ^ ϊμίνον ιψας ex'wch.ix.so 
 
 Tfjwcwi' νμίΐς δί ^ ίζίττΧίυσαμίν μετά τάς '^ ημεοας τωΐ' ^^(.Ι^Λΐ^. 
 
 αΐ,υμων απυ ΦιλιτΓττων, και ηλυομεν προς αυτούς εις 3. 
 την Τρωαέα «χρι -ήμερων πέντε, ού "^ ύιετριφαμεν ημεοας fsie^^er'asl* 
 
 ' ' 7 'τ? 5•^ d - " - d /3,Q' e / zch. xv.3i7 
 
 επτα. ' tjV οε τίι μια των σαρρατων συνη-^/μενων r^ff. 
 ημών κλασαι αρτον, ο Παύλος ^ cιελεyετo αυτοις μελ- "^ 7h^5m.'ii It 
 
 Ah ' y ι i " ' ' k / ' ^Λ' c ch. sii. 19 al. 
 
 ων εΐζ,ιεναι τη επαύριον, παρετεινεν τε τον Aoyov dLukexxiv. ι. 
 
 ' ' ' ' Juhnsx. 1. 
 
 Marksvi.Sal. e = Matt. sxii. 34. Ncli. vi. 2. f ch. ii. 4R re.T. g ch.XTii.2, 17 al. h ch. xiii. 42 reff. 
 i John i. 2i» al. fr. Num. xi. 32. k here only J. Num. xxiii. 28. τοσούτοι' vapaTeiveiu χρόνυν, 
 
 Jos. Antt. i. 3. 9. 
 
 aciav., ίψεσιοι D sah. — for τνχ., εντνχος D. — 5. aft οντοι ins is ABE 13. 40. 105. 137• 
 163 al copt svr Thl^ : om DGH most mss (appj') ν Syr al (ins μι ν sail, et Hit seth). — 
 Ίτροςελθοντίς A(appy)E-gr GH 42. 78. 95'. 96. 98'. 99. 105. 192.— for ημ., αυτόν 
 D-gr. — rpoaCi (-tei E) D'E : and τροαία (ver 6)E. — 6. τας om 137: Τ7]ς 96. 142 : τας 
 δυο 4: την cm D. — rec αχρίί;, with Η alff: αττο Ε 13: irifrae: tst ABG 42. 180. 
 191 Till'. — for αχρ. ημ. ττ., πεμπταιοι D. — for οι•, οττου ΑΕ 13 : ου και 40. 137 : 
 it' t] και D (και om d) : txt B(e sil)GH most mss (appy) Chr Till Oec. — 7. τί D Eeth. — 
 τη om E. — μια ττοωτη D-gr. — rec for ημ., των μαθητών (alteration to suit αντοις — see 
 note), with GH &c ar-pol al ThP Oec (om Cassiod) : txt ABDE 13. 14'. 15. 25. 40. 68. 
 69. 73. 105. 137• 1G3 al ν svrr ar-erp copt sah seth arm ChrjTlil- Aug. — recrou κλ. αρτ, 
 with D &c Thl- Oec: txtABEGH 38. 42. 57. 65. 95. 96. 97. 98. 113. 133. 137. 142. 
 103. 177. 191. 192 Chr2 Thl'.— rj om D-gr : it 180 copt sah syr Bas Ί\ύ\—μίλλων Se 
 
 for distinction's sake. Timotheus was from 
 Lystra, which probably gives occasion to 
 his being mentioned here in close company 
 with Gaius of Derbe. All attempts to join 
 ΑιρβαΙος with Ύιμόθίος in the construction 
 are futile. Tim. was 7iot of Derbe, see cb. 
 xvi. 1,2: and the name Caius was far too 
 common to create any difficulty in there 
 being two, or three (see note, ch. xix. 29) 
 companions of Paul so called. With con- 
 jectural emendations of the text (Αιρβ. £i 
 'Γιμοθ., Kuin., Valck.) we have no concern. 
 
 'ΛσιανοΙ Τ. κ. Τ.] Tychicus is men- 
 tioned Eph. vi. 21, as sent (to Ephesus from 
 Rome) with that Epistle. He bore also that 
 to the Colossians, Col. iv. J, at the same 
 time. See also 2 Tim. iv. 12. Tit. iii. 12. 
 — Trophimus, an Ephesian, was in Jeru- 
 salem with Paul, ch. xxi. 29 : and had been, 
 shortly before 2 Tim. was written, left sick 
 at Miletus. (See Prolegg. to 2 Tim.) 
 
 5. ούτοι] The persons mentioned in 
 ver. 4 : not only Tychicus and Trophimus. 
 The mention of Timotlieus in this list, dis- 
 tinguished from ι'ιμας, has created an in- 
 superable difficulty to those who suppose 
 Timotheus himself to be the narrator of 
 what follows : which certainly cannot be got 
 over (as De Wette) by supjiosing that Tim. 
 might have inserted himself in the list, and 
 then tacitly excepted himself by the ήμας 
 afterwards. The trutii is apparent here, as 
 well as before, ch. xvi. 10 (where see note), 
 that the anonymous narrator was in very 
 intimate connexion with Paul ; and on this 
 occasion we find him remaining with iiini 
 when the rest went forward. προΐλθ., 
 
 κ.τ.λ.'} For what reason, is not said : but 
 
 we may well conceive, that if they bore the 
 contributions of the churches, a better op- 
 portunity, or safer ship, may have deter- 
 mined Paul to send them on, he himself 
 having work to do at Philippi : or perhaps, 
 again, as Meyer suggests, Paul may have 
 remained behind to keep the days of un- 
 leavened bread. But then why should not 
 they have remained too ? The same motive 
 may not have operated with them : but in 
 that case no reason can be given why they 
 should have been sent on, except as above. 
 It is not impossible that both may have 
 been combined : — before the end of the days 
 of unleavened bread, a favourable opportu- 
 nity occurs of saili-ng to Troas, of which 
 they, with their charge, avail themselves : 
 Paul and Luke waiting till the end of the 
 feast, and taking the risk of a less desirable 
 conveyance. That the feast had someUdny 
 to do with it, the mention of μίτά τ. ή. τ. 
 άζ. seems to imply : such notices being not 
 inserted ordinarily by Luke for the sake of 
 dates. The assumjition made by some (see, 
 e.g. Mr. Lewin, p. 587), that the rest of 
 the company sailed at once for Troas from 
 Corinth, wliile Paul and Luke went by land 
 to Philippi, is inconsistent wnth ΰνιύτητο, 
 ver. 4. — From the notice here, we learn 
 that Paul's stay in Euroi)e on this occasion 
 was about three quarters of a year : viz. 
 from shortly after Pentecost, when he left 
 Ephesus (see on ch. xix. 10), to the next 
 Easter. 6. αχρ. ήμ. ττίντί] ' in five 
 
 days,' see reif. The wind must have been 
 adverse : for the voyage from Troas to 
 Philippi (NeapoHs) in ch. xvi. 11, seems to 
 have been made in livo days. It ajipcars
 
 206 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XX. 
 
 κηταβαι 
 
 '"xVi'!"3U."h.'' ' μί\ρι '" μίσηννκτΊου• " νσην οε λαμπάδες '^ ικαναί Ιι> τω 
 
 x.:w. 1 Tim. ο ' ' ' I. τ •< υ ' 9 Ω Υ' S" 
 
 "■.Vf"';, νπίοωω 'ου ιιμ^ν ^ συvηyμevoι. καΌίί,ομ^νος dt τις 
 
 f^ci.'xw ι•5 "^ ΐ'£(Π'ΐας• ύι-ό^ίαπ Εϋτυχος ίττί Τ7)ς "" Ουριόος, ^ κατα- 
 χΙΪ'ά. '"'"■ AfnoittJOC υττνω ' BaOti, ^ ^ιαλενομενον του Παύλου 
 
 n-ch.xvii.15r Γ^Λ . "^ η , W ' ν - " .' 
 
 oih.i.13. ix. £7ri πλίίοΐ', κατίνίχϋίΐς απο του ύπνου απεσεν αττο 
 
 3-, 3» only. -χ , / ^ Υ " fl ' Ift 
 
 sKin^sxviii. του τριστε-γου κάτω και -^ ηρυη νίκρος. 
 
 χΐί. 7. ρ Alalt. xviii. 20 ηΙ. q eh vii. 58. xxiii. 17, 18 only. L. Judg xvi. 2(i. r 2 Cor xi. H3 
 
 only Josh. 11 I ;>, IS. s= liere only t. Ps. IxxT. 5 Aq. al-o Oen. ii Jl. xv. 12. t (John iv. 11.) 
 
 Luke xxiv. I Miily. Sir. xxii. 7. u i:h. iv. 17 reft". τ here only. Dan. v. 20. Herodian i. II, of the 
 
 ιίγιιλμο Λιοπ6τι•9, — if oiV'ii'oi' κατίνβχθϊιναι λόγοΓ. ν = Matt. xiii. 44. 2 Cliron. v. (1. 
 
 xlierfonlyt. Symin Oi-n. vi. Hi. στοαί τριστ£γοι, Diun Hal. Antt. iii. ()8. y = Mark vi. 29. 1 Mace. ix. 11». 
 
 ■/. - Mall. xxiv. 17. Xrn. Cyr. i. 4. 8. 
 
 180. — παρατίΐνοντίς 13. — 8. ντΓθ\ημπαϊ^ει• D : add και.ημ(νηι sail. — rec for ημίν, ήσαν 
 (see above on ημών, ver 7) : txt ABDEGH 38. 42. 5?. 73. 80. 9G. 113. 133. 137• 1!)1. Iu2 
 al .' lectt 5. 12. 58 ν syrr arr sah arm slav Chr ThF. — πυΐ'ηγμ. ora Ε : σνί'ηβ^ιοιημα'οι 
 4. — 9. rec καβημαος {corni to more usual form), with GH al Chr Thl Oec : txt ABDE 
 13. 14'. 15. 18. 3i;. ()8. «9. 105. 180 lect 58. — i'tav. om Ε : aft ηνομ. lect 12 : -νισκος 
 137. — (πι τη θί'ΐιιίι κηπχομίνυς υ. βάρη D. — τον bef ττ. om D. — καηνεχΟ. om Syr 
 arerp: κατ. to υπν. ora fi!) : υττο τ. νπ. DH 4. 40. 98. 99. 104. 192 Chr Oec-ed. — 
 πίσων (omg και aft) Ε. — και ος ηρΘη D^-gr (κ. ιπηρθη in Mill). — 10. ιπεσιν (or ίπιπ. 
 
 ABD 
 EGH 
 
 that they arrived on a Monday. — Compare 
 note,<, 2 Cor. ii. 12, ff. 7. «v τη μ,ιά τ. 
 
 σαββ.] We have here an intimation of the 
 coiitiiuiance of the practice, vs^hich seems to 
 have begun immediately after the Resurrec- 
 tion (see John xx. 2G), of assembling on the 
 first day of the week for religious purposes. 
 (Justin Martyr, Apol. ii. p. 2:^8, says, ry 
 roij ί/Χιου λίγομίν?^ ήμΐρα πάντων κατά 
 ■πάλας η άγρονς μενόί'των ίπί το αντό 
 σνΐί\ίνπις yiitTai.) Perhaps the greatest 
 proof of all, that this day was thus observed, 
 may be found in the early (see 1 Cor. xvi. 2) 
 and at length general prevalence, in the 
 Gentile world, of the Jewish seven-day 
 period as a division of time, — which was 
 entirely foreign to Gentile habits. It can 
 only have been introduced as following on 
 the practice of especial honour paid to this 
 day. But we find in the Christian Scrip- 
 tures no trace of any sabbatical observance 
 of this or any day : nay, in Rom. xiv. 5 
 (where see note), Paul shews the untenable- 
 ness of any such view under the Christian 
 dispensation. The idea of the transference 
 of the Jewish sabbath from the seventh day 
 to the first was an invention of later times. 
 κλάσαι άρτον] See note on ch. ii. 
 42. The breaking of bread in the Holy 
 Communion was at this time inseparable 
 from the Α•γ(Ίπαι. It took place apparently 
 in the evening (after the day's work was 
 ended), and at the end of the assembly, after 
 the preaching of the word (ver. 1 1). 
 avTols, in the third person, the discourse 
 being addressed to the discijiles at Troas : 
 but the first person is used before and after, 
 because all were assembled, and partook of 
 the breaking of bread together. Not ob- 
 serving this, the copyi^ts have altered ίιμων 
 above into τών μαθητών, and ήμεν into 
 
 ήσαν, to suit αίτοΐς. 8. λαμτΓαδ. Ικ.] 
 
 This may be noticed, as Meyer observes, to 
 shew that the fall of the young man could 
 be well observed : or, perhaps, because many 
 lights are apt to increase drowsiness at such 
 times. Calvin and Bengel suppose, — in 
 order that all suspicion might be removed 
 from the assembly (' ut omnis abesset sus- 
 picio scandali,' Beng ) ; Kuiii. and partly 
 Meyer, — that the lights were used for so- 
 lemnity's sake, — for that both Jews and 
 Gentiles celebrated their festal days by 
 abundance of lights. But surely the adop- 
 tion of either Jewish or Gentile practices of 
 this kind in the Christian assembhes was 
 very improbable. 9.] Who Eutychus 
 
 was, is cjuite uncertain. The occurrence of 
 the name as belonging to slaves and freed- 
 men (Rosenm.and Heinrichs, from inscrip- 
 tions), determines nothing. eiri της 
 θυρίδας] ' On the window-seat.' The win- 
 dows in the East were (and are) without 
 glass, and with or without shutters. 
 καταψ€ρόμ€νος ίίττν.] Wetstein gives many 
 instances of the use of καταφέρομαι, either 
 absolute, or with εις νπνον, signifying ' <o 
 be oppressed irith, borne doivn towards. 
 Thus Aristotle, de Insomniis iii. : 
 
 τά υπνωτικά . . . πιιντα . . . καρηβαρίαν 
 , . . TToifT . . . και καταψΕρόμβνοι και νυ- 
 στάζοντες τοϋτο δοκονσιν πάσχειν, καΙ 
 άόιυ'ατοϊισιν α'ίρειν την κεψ/ιλήν και τά 
 βλέφαρα : and Diod. Sic. iii. 57, κατ- 
 €ν€χθ€Ϊσαν εις ϋττνον, ίίείν ΰφιν. — Ι be- 
 lieve the word is used here and below in the 
 same sense, not, as usually interpreted, here 
 of the effect of sleep, and below of the fall 
 caused by the sleep. It implies that re- 
 laxation of the system, and collapse of the 
 muscular power, which is more or less indi- 
 cated by our expressions 'falling asleep,'
 
 8—13. 
 
 ΠΡΑαΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 207 
 
 Ολων 
 αυτόν. 
 (see var. 
 read.) 
 ABCD 
 EGH 
 
 ε ο ΙΙαυΛος εττίττεσίν αντω και συμπΐοιλαρων ίίττεν tcit. 
 
 ■»τ\ Λ Γ) - η f \ 1*^ ^ 5-> •>-> b '"^fe only. 
 
 Mjj ^ Όορυρίΐσϋ£' τ] yao φ^χν αυτυυ iv αυτω ff^^'i'• οΛ^χν',Γ'ήΙ^ίβ• 
 ^^ αναρας ce και κλασας τον αρτον και " ηίυσαμίνος, μ a Kings 
 έψ' Ίκανόν τε ' υμιΧησας άχρι αυ-γης, όντως '" 6^77λθεl'. J'eh ii'ati^ik 
 '■'^ i^yayov οε τυν τταιύα ΰωντα, και παρεκληυι^σαν '^ υυ ns. 
 
 D ' Ι'ί'ττ-^να ΛΛ' '* '^ Λ" h ice Luke 
 
 ^ μίτριως. ^'^ Ημίΐς όε ^ προελσοντες επί το πΛοιον jLukexxiT 14 
 
 r'' /Ί '' ^"'λ ' ~0 S 'Λ Λ t ' cli. xxiv. 2ΰ 
 
 ανηχυημίν εττί Τ7)ΐ' Λσσον, εκεισεν ^εΛΛοίτες αι/α- nniy. Pr^v. 
 Χαμβάΐ'ίΐν τον ΥΙαυΧον' ούτως yάξ) τ/ν " οιατεταγμεΐ'ος, there oniy. 
 
 1 = John iv. R. cli. xxvii. 17. See Heb. vl. 15. m = ch. xv. 4» reff. η =MatI. xxi. 7 hI. 
 
 ο = Lnke xvi. 25i Gen. xxiv, (Ί7. 
 r ch. xiii. 13 refl. s=Tv3, 7. 
 
 t = cii. 
 
 here only, μ . Xeii. M.'m.iv. 1. I 
 
 xxiii. 31. 2Tim. iv. 11. 
 
 u 1 Cor. vii. 17. si. 34. 
 
 al Chr ThP) stt αυτω D. — σνμπιρφαΧων C and add αυτού C : συμτταραλαβων 40. 105 : 
 add av-oj> or -τω 27. ^6. 38. GG^. 69. 105. 180 lect 58 vss Chr Thl^.— «cnt (ΐπεν D'.— 
 11. rec om τον (the force of the art being overlooked, — see note), with D-EGH itc Chr 
 Thl'Oec: ins ABCD' 13 "al Thl^.— rec αχοίς, with B(e sil)C'DGH al : t.\t AC^E al 
 Thl' Oec-ed. — ούτως om 70•— 12. for »;γ«γ. to ζωντα (om lect 12), D has ασ-οζυμη'ων 
 S( αυτών (salutaiites aut eos d) ηyaytv {-yov d : ijyaytv also fiO. 97- 101 arm) r. vinvi- 
 σκονζ.— fori e,Tt 133: ζωϊτα om lect 12. — 13. πρηςίλΛ AEH 1.4. 14. 25 all Chr Thl' : 
 κατίλθ. D Syr ar-erp : πρηςαχθιντ. 38. 177 al, (μβαΐ'Τ. 98-marg. — tic το D 133.— rec 
 nc r. αησ. {corrn to more usual prepn), with DGH al Chr Thl' Oec : t.xt ABCE 13. 73 
 Thl-.— for ησσοΓ, θασον or θασσον G (but not in ver 14) 42. 67• 73. 76. 78. 99. 100. 
 101. 192 lect 40 sjrr sah ar-pol : ασον 13. 45. 46. 96. 106 v-ms seth ar-erp: vanov 15. 
 18. 36, and so in ver 14. — ούτος 13. 78. — SiaT. ην ABE 13 : ίντιτάλμίνος ην C 15. 36. 
 180 : txt DGH most mss (appy) Chr Thl Oec : add συν ημιν sah. — ως μέλλων D al : 
 
 ' dropping asleep.' This effect is being 
 produced when the tirst participle is used, 
 which is therefore imperject, — but as Paul 
 was going on long discoursing, took com- 
 plete jiossetision of him, and. having been 
 ' overpowered,' ' entirely relaxed in con- 
 sequence of the sleep,' he fell. In the 
 ήρ6η νεκρός here, there is a direct assertion, 
 which can hardly be evaded by explaining 
 it, ' was taken up for dead,' as De Wette, 
 Olsh. ; — or by saying that it expresses the 
 judgment of those who took him up, as 
 Meyer. It seems to me, that the supposi- 
 tion of a mere suspended animation is as 
 absurd here as in the miracle of Jairus's 
 daughter, Luke viii. 41 — 56. Let us take 
 the narrative as it stands. The youth falls, 
 and is taken up dead : so much is plainly 
 asserted. Paul, not a physician, but an 
 Apostle, — gifted, not with medical discern- 
 ment, but with miraculous power, goes 
 down to him, falls on him and embraces 
 him, — a strange proceeding for one bent on 
 discovering suspended animation, but not 
 so for one who bore in mind the action of 
 Elijah (1 Kings xvii. 21) and Elisha (2 Kings 
 iv. 34), each time over a dead body, — and 
 having done this, not before, bids them not 
 to be trouljled, for his life tvas in him. I 
 would ask any unbiassed reader, taking these 
 details into consideration, which of the two 
 is the natural interpretation, — and whether 
 there can be any roasonabh» doubt that the 
 intent of Luke is to relate a miracle of 
 raising the dead, and that he mentions the 
 
 falling on and embracing him as the out- 
 ward significant means taken by the Apostle 
 to that end ? 11.] The intended break- 
 
 ing of bread had been put oft' by the acci- 
 dent, τον αρτ., as ch. ii. 42. Were 
 it not for that usage, the article here might 
 import, ' the bread which it was intended 
 to break,' alluding to aur. above. 
 γ£υσάμ£νο5] 'having made a ineal,' see 
 reff. The agape was a veritable meal. Not 
 ' having tasted it,' viz. the bread which he 
 had broken ; — though that is implied, usage 
 decides for the other meaning. οντω?] 
 ' After so doing :' see reff". 12.] As in 
 the raising of Jairus's daughter, our Lord 
 commanded that something should be given 
 her to eat, that nature might be recruited, 
 so doubtless here rest and treatment were 
 necessary, in order that the restored life 
 might be confirmed, and the shock recovered. 
 The time indicated by αυγή must have been 
 before or about 5 a.m. : which would allow 
 about four hours since the miracle. 
 13. "Ασσον] A sea-port (also called Apol- 
 lonia, Plin. v. 32) in Mysia or Troas, oppo- 
 site to Lesbos, twenty-four Roman miles 
 (Peutinger Table) from Troas, built on a 
 high (-liff above the sea, with a descent so 
 precipitous as to have prompted a line of 
 Stratonicus, the lyric poet, 'Λσο-οΐ' ΊΙ)', ως 
 Κίν θασσον />λίθ^>ΐ)υ ΤΓίί(>(ΐθ' ίκηηι. Strab. 
 .xiii. Ι,ρ. 126, Tauchn. — Paul's rM.swi is not 
 given for wishing to be alone : [jrobably he 
 had some apostolic visit to make. 14. 
 Μιτ-υλήνην] The capital of Lesbos, on tiio
 
 208 
 
 ΠΡΑαΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XX. 
 
 μίΧΧων αντυς '' ττί^ίνίΐν. ^* ως δε "^ σνί'ΐβαΧλίν -ημίν 
 ύς τιμι'Άσσον, ^ αναλαβυντες αυτόν τ)λΟομ(ν ΐΐς Μιτυ- 
 
 ΛΚ ■> ~η ϋ' Λ' ";ι' ' b 
 
 ίο .-,,.„, /ic, αποττλίυσαΐ'τες tjj 
 
 Χ/ου. TV δε 
 
 λ/, 
 
 ι^>)>'. 
 
 κακίΐΟίν 
 αντικρυς 
 
 ν here only f. 
 
 Λ στρατιά, 
 Xen. An»b. 
 
 w-weoni '"jjffa^tti' ^avTiKpvQ Atou. Ti/ όε εΓί/οα 
 y-cii.xxi.i:n. nXUouiv ίΐς• Μιλητον. 
 
 2 Tim. IV. II. ' I 
 
 Jctv/iiaitirll': πλεύσαι r)> Ε(^εσον, 
 
 b ch. xvi. 1 rt-ft'. -3- > " 'Λ ' 
 
 c here only t. Τβίρησαΐ £1' ΤΏ ΆσίΟ. 
 
 U — ch. xxvii. II' ' <• 
 
 3. Aen. tyr. i-)iv lUlfOnV ΤΏί' IJ 
 
 ABCD 
 EGII 
 
 )7l 
 
 ε7Γΐουσ>ί κατην- 
 •παξ)ίβά\ομίν 
 Trj ^ ίγομίΐη^ 
 
 ΚίΚξ>ικίΐ 7αρ ο Παύλος ' τταοα- 
 οπως μη ' yfvijrat 
 εσττευοεν yap, 
 της ™ ΥΙίντηκοστης 
 
 αυτω γρονο- 
 ει ουνατον 
 " yiveaOai 
 
 ην 
 είς 
 
 , (1. 10. . 
 
 *iT'iwr,°aV' Ίε|θοσόλυ|αα. Αττο δε της Μίλητου πίμφας είς 'Έψε- 
 
 ναραβη\(1ΐ', q -ν/ ^Ρ Ο ' " ' \ ' 
 
 Thmvd.iii 32. ίτου utTiKaAioaTO τους "^ ττοεσΠυτερους της εκκλησίας. 
 
 f — Liikr xiii. ' ' 
 
 33. rh. xxi 20 only. 2 Mace. xii. 39. (; ~ 1 Cor. v. 3. vii. 37. Tit. iii. 12 al. 2 Mace. xi. 2,'i. h here 
 
 onlyt. Xen. Aiiab. Ti 2. 1. _ i Gal. vi. 14. Mark v. 16. Gen. xliv. 7, 17. _ k here only t. 
 
 oi i' ίηΌρωποί τοΐί όίπλοίΓ xQUfvrai όταν ΰνωνυμον η κ. ό λόγο? εΰσΐ'μίίετϋ?, utov τό xpoiOTpt/Seu', 
 Aristol. Rhel. iii. 3. I Lake ii. 16 al. 2 Chron. x. 18." m ch. li. 1 reff. η = Matt. xxvi. 6 al. 
 
 eic, Luke iv. 23. ο ch. Tii. 14. x. 32. xxiv. 25 only. Hos. xi. 1, 2. ρ Seech. xi. 30. 
 
 αυτός μίλλων Ε. — 14. Ss om C (appy). — rec συνίβαλιν (alteration to historic aorist 
 as so/reg), with CDGH most mss ChrThl Oec : txt ABE (convenisset e : cotwenissemus 
 v-se.\t : venissemus demid : prcevenisset tol) al. — ημος 22. CO. 08. 99. 100. — μιτν- 
 Au'/jrAE: μντυΚινηΐ' G : μητνΧινην 180: t.xt B(e sil)CDH al. — 15. και f KfiGf i' Ε : 
 κακΗ 1.'ί7.— rec ονηκρυ {corrn), with BH al : txt ACDEG 30. 40. 68. 105. 180 Thl-'. 
 — for trfcia, εσπέρα Β 15. 19. Τό: τη , . . -παρεβαλ. om 30. — τταρελαβομεν D^-gr: 
 τταρεβαλλομεν 57 Thl' : επεβαλομεν 73. — και μειν. εν τρωγ. om, and instead τη υε εχ. 
 ABCE 13. 15. 18. 09 : και τη εχ. 37- 73. 180 ν copt (om και) arm Jer (^fi»'. to μιλητ. 
 om ieth) {the occasion of the omn has jirol• been, that Troyylium is not in Sa^nos, which 
 at frst sight the text appeared to imply) : txt DGH most mss syr sah arr slav Chr Thl 
 Oec. — rec TpojyvW. with Η &c syr Oec : txt D (τρω-γυλια D-gr, trogylio d) G {Tpoy. G 
 all) : OTpoyyvXiix) 10. 105 : rpoyyvXuu 42. 133. 177• 191• 192 : alii aliter — ερχόμενη 
 D' 95'. 90. 142. — 16. rec έκρινε (an ecclesiastical portion begins at ver 10, ivhich has 
 occasioned the alteration of the pluperf into the independent historic aor), with GH &e 
 Chr Thl' Oec: txt ABC'DE 13. Xi". 15. 30. 08. 09. 73. 105. 180 al ν 8<.ο{κεκρικε ThP).— 
 yap om lect 12. — £ΐς την εφεσ. 8Π. 192. — for όπως . . . χρονοτρ., μηποτε γενηθη αντω 
 κατασχεσια ος Ό : ut ηοη contingeret ei morandi quis ά. — αυτο; om 191. — fi Svv. ην 
 αντω om DH eeth.— for ην, ειη ABCE 13. 15. 18. 2?• 29. 30. 08. 69. 73. 180 {gram- 
 matical corrn) : txt G most mss Chr Thl Oec. — εις την ημεραν D seth : τη ήμερα Η. — 
 εις Ιερουσαλήμ ΑΕ 13 lect 12. 58 : txt B(e sil)CD-(fv ιεροσολνμα D')GH mss (nrly) 
 
 E. coast of the island, famed (Hor. Od. i. 7• 
 ] Epist. i. 11. 17) for its beautiful situa- 
 tion. It had two harbours : the northern, 
 into which their ship would sail, was μέyaς 
 K. βαθύς, χι'οματι σκεπαζόμεΐ'ος, Strabo, 
 xiii. 2, p. 137• 15. τταρίβάλ.] 'we 
 
 put in :' so Charon, in the Frogs, to his 
 boatman, ώύττ, παραβαλοϋ, 180 ; and 271, 
 τταραβαλοϋ τψ κωπίφ. Then they made 
 a short run in the evening to Trogylium, a 
 cape and town on the Ionian coast, only 
 forty stadia distant, where they spent the 
 night. He had passed in front of the bay 
 of Ephesus, and was now but a sliort dis- 
 tance from it. Μίλητον] The ancient 
 capital of Ionia (Herod, i. 142). See 2 Tim. 
 iv. 20, and note. 16. κ€κρίκει] We 
 see here that the ship was at Paul's dis- 
 posal, and probably hired at Philippi for the 
 voyage to Patara (ch. xxi. 1), where he 
 and his company embark in a merchant 
 vessel, going to Tyre. The separation of 
 
 Paul and Luke from the rest at the be- 
 ginning of the A'oyage may have been in 
 some way connected with the hiring or 
 outfit of this vessel. The expression kc- 
 κρίκει (or έκρινε, which will amount to the 
 same thing, only it must not be taken '/or 
 the pluperfect,' here or any where else) 13 
 too subjectively strong to allow of our sup- 
 posing that the ap. merely followed the 
 previously determined course of a ship in 
 which he took a passage. ιταραιτλ. τ. 
 
 "Εφ.] He may have been afraid of de- 
 tention there, owing to the machinations of 
 those who had caused the uproar in ch. xix. 
 — F. M., in his notes, gives another reason : 
 " He seems to have feared that, had he 
 run up the long gulf to Ephesus, he might 
 be detained in it by the westerly winds, 
 which blow long, especially in the spring." 
 But these would affect him nearly as 
 much at Miletus. 17.] The distance 
 
 from Miletus to Ephesus is about thirty
 
 14—20. 
 
 nPASEIE ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λί2Ν. 
 
 2οα 
 
 h. xxi. 4. 
 See ch. xxi. 
 2. Jo:,h. xiv. 
 
 Mark v. 10. 
 1. ix. 27. 
 = Mntt. vi. 
 \ 24 1 only. 
 
 ^^ ως δέ '^ TTapeytvovTo "^ττρος αυτόν, είττεί' αυτοΓς Υμξϊς <i^°^<'.r."-'i, 
 ϊπίστασθβ, ^ απο πρώτης Ίψί()ας αφ ης ^ επίβην εις r οϊ'χ. so rear. 
 
 \ ' \ t t- Lk' ' ~ ^ ' ' • ' ran.-lr., ch. 
 
 την Άσιαν, πως μίΟ νμων τυν πάντα "νρονον ε -yfvo^trjv, j^^• 
 
 ίρ U ζι Λ ' " 'ν ^ W / χ ^ ' ~ 
 
 όουΛευων τω κυριω μίτα πάσης ταπίΐνοψοοσυνης 
 και οακρυων και ^ πίΐρασμων των ^ συμβάντων ^οι εν J* 
 ταις ίπιρουλαις των Ιουόαιων, ^^ ως οι^οεν υπεστίΐ- a = iun. 
 
 •ν/ -C .' -■>'d' -Λ'- < 24 1 only, 
 
 λαμην των συμψίξ)οντων του μη avayyeiAai υμιν και exc Paui 
 
 18 aR Ps. ii. 11. TMarkiii. 5. 1 Cliron. xxix. 22. w (' all possible') ch. xxiii. 1. 2 Pet. i. ,i. Jude 
 
 Sal. Paul, passira. χ Eph. iv. 2. Phil, ii 3. Col. ii. 18, 23. iii. 12. Paul only, exc. 1 Pet. τ. 5 f. See 
 
 Ps. cxxx. 2. y = Lukexxii 28. Gal. iv. 14al. Dent, iv 34. ζ = ch. iii. 10 reft. aver. 
 
 3. ch.ix.24. xxiii.3U only. Esth. ii. 22. b = ver. 27 only. (Gal. ii. 12. Heb. x. 38.) Diod. Sic. xiii. 70, 
 
 e'li TO ληητόιι 6 Κ.ϊφοί eKt-\evacv u'lTt'iv, μηΐιΐΐ' νποστβλλόμΐΐΊΐν. So Jo5. Β. J. i. 20. 1. = 1 Cor. 
 
 Tii. 35. xii. 7. Heb. xii. 10. Dent, xxiii. 6. d = Juhn iv. 25. XTi. 13 al. ver. 27. 1 Pet. i. 12. Dent. 
 
 xxiT. 8. 
 
 Chr Thl Oec. — 17. μετίττιμ-ψατο D. — 18. for ττηρίγενοντο, εσκληρννοντο E-gr. — aft 
 αυτοί', ins ομού όντων αυτών A: ομοσε οντ. αντ. D 40-marg : όμως εοντ. D' : ομο- 
 θυμαδόν Ε : et simul essent ν {interpolations for pariicularity) : txt BCGH mss and vss 
 (nrly) Chr Thl Oec. — aft επιστ. add αδελφοί D : pref 5. 8. 73 sah. — πρώτης αφ ης ημ. 
 lect 12 : ττρ. της ημ. 142: αφ om 38. 93. — εξεβην 00. 142. — την om 137. — for πως . . . 
 εγενομην, D has ως τριετιαν η και πλειον ττοταπως {ττως D^) μιθ υμών ην τταιτος 
 ■χρόνου (μ. υμ. τον τταντα χρ. εγενομην D-). — 19. aft κυρ., add μιθ υμών C 15. 18. 36 
 Chr-text. — for ττασης, ιτολλης ί^γτ ar-erp. — rec bef διικρ. ins ττολλωΐ', with CGH &c syr 
 seth ar-pol slav arm al Chr Thl Oec {prob interpolation .• see 2 Cor. ii. 4) : om ABDE 
 13. 40. G8. 80. 81. 137. 142. 180 al ν syr copt sah ar-erp Lucif.— σΐ'///3αιι/οΐ/Γων C al.— 
 20. και ως 80. — των σ. (add νμιν sah) υττεστ. C. — μη om D slav-ms Lucif. — υμσς om 
 
 miles. He probably, therefore, stayed three 
 or four days altogether at Miletus. 
 τους ιτρεσβ.] called, ver. 28, επιακόττους. 
 This circumstance began very early to con- 
 tradict the growing views of the apostolic 
 institution and necessity of prelatical epis- 
 copacy. Thus Irenaeus, ii. 14. 2 : ' In 
 MUeto convocatis episcopis et presbyteris, 
 qui erant ab Epheso et a reliquis proximis 
 civitatibus.' Here we see (1) the two, 
 bishops and presbyters, distinguished, as if 
 both were sent for, in order that the titles 
 might not seem to belong to the same per- 
 sons, — and (2) other neighbouring churches 
 also brought in, in order that there might 
 not seem to be επίσκοποι in one church 
 only. That neither of these was the case, 
 is clearly shewn by the plain words of this 
 verse : he sent to Ephesns, and summoned 
 the elders of the church (see below on 
 l,ii)\Bov, ver. 25). So early did interested 
 and disingenuous interpretations begin to 
 cloud the light which Scripture might have 
 thrown on ecclesiastical questions. The 
 E. V. has hardly dealt fairly in this case 
 with the sacred text, in rendering iiri- 
 σκόπους, ver. 28, ' overseers .•' whereas it 
 ought there as in all other places to have 
 been ' bishops,' that the fact of elders and 
 bishops having been originally and aposto- 
 lically synonymous might be apparent to the 
 ordinary English reader, which now it is not. 
 18.] The evidence furnished by tliis 
 speech as to the literal report in the Acts 
 of the words spoken by Paul, is most im- 
 VoL. II. 
 
 portant. It is a treasure-house of words, 
 idioms, and sentiments, peculiarly belonging 
 to the Apostle himself. Many of these appear 
 in the reff., but many more lie beneath the 
 surface, and can only be discovered by a 
 continuous and verbal study of his Epistles. 
 I shall point out such instances of paral- 
 lelism as I have observed, in the notes. — 
 The contents of the speech may be thus 
 given : He reyninds the elders of his con- 
 duct among them (vv. 18 — 21) : announces 
 to them his final separation from them 
 (vv. 22 — 25) : and commends earnestly to 
 them the flock committed to their charge, 
 for ivhich he himself had by word and 
 ivork disinterestedly laboured (vv. 26 — 35). 
 
 άτΓο irp. ήμ..] These words hold a 
 middle place, partly with εττΊστασθε, partly 
 with ΐγενόμην. The knowledge on their 
 part was coextensive with his whole stay 
 among them : so that we may take the 
 words with ϊπίστασθε, at the same time 
 carrying on their sense to what follows. 
 
 μεθ' νιμ. «γεν.] So 1 Thess. i. 5, 
 οΊ5ατε οίοι ίγίΐηθημιν 'εν νμΙν, — ii. 10, 
 ίιμ. μάρτυρες . . . ιος όσι'ως . . . ΰμΙν τοις 
 ■κιστινουσιν ε•γενΐιΒημει>. See 1 Cor. ix. 
 20, 22. 19. 8ουλ€υων τω κυρ.] With 
 
 the sole exception of the assertion of our 
 Lord, ' Ye cannot serve God and mam- 
 mon,' Matt. vi. 24. Luke xvi. 13, the verb 
 ('υνλεί'ω for ' serving God' is ust'd by Paul 
 only, and by him six times, viz. besides ref., 
 Rom. vii. 25 ; xii. 11 ; xvi. 18. Col. iii. 24. 
 1 Thess. i. 9. μίτ. ir. τα-π-.] Also a
 
 2Ί0 nPASETS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XX. 
 
 e.h.xvi.37. δίδυμοι ΰμας ^ δημοσία καΐ ^ κατ οίκους, ^^ ^ ^ιαμαξίτν- abcd 
 
 xvm.v'8 ^ >τι^/ >''γ:'ΛΛ ^ h ' η ^ i ' EGH 
 
 2Ma«- Ti οομίνος Χουύαιοις τε και ^ΑΛησιν την εις Utov μετα- 
 
 111. ' ' \ / ν 1ι ' ^ ' , _ ,| ^ 
 
 f- Mall. xxiv. νοιαν KOI niGTiv Tijv iiQ TOV Kvpiov ημών Ιησουν. 
 23 Ο•• 40 22 ^qJ ^,yy (g„|) I* gegf^tvoc εγω τω ττνενματι πορίνομαι 
 rrfi εις Ιερουσαλήμ, τα εν avrrj συναντησοντα μοι μη 
 
 xx^ii's'' ίίδώς, ^^ " ttAijv ore το ττνεΰμα το ayiov ° κατά ° πόλιν 
 s'iTojpm"' ^ ^ιαμαρτυοετα'ι μοι λεγον δη ^ δεσμά /cat '^ θλ'ιφίΐς με 
 
 i cli. xi 18 reir. , ' OJ. ' λ Λ ' ' "ί ^ s Λ ' s - ^ t ι «■ 
 
 k - iirre only. '^ μίνουσιρ. οΛλ ουοευος Λογού ποιούμαι την ψυ^ην 
 
 Ίσχυροτίρα uynyK)), Xen.Cyr.vMi.J.li. 1 ■= ch. xvii. Ifi reff. in = hfreimlv. Eccl. ii. 14. ix. 11. 
 
 η — hrrr only. ' ο cli. xv. 21, SB Tit. i. 5. ρ ch. xvi. 211 reff. q ch. xi. 11) reff. r Ttr. 5. 
 
 s - «lid coii.slr., here only. See Job xiv. 3. xxii. 4. t ch. xv. 2li reff. 
 
 D Thl' Lucif Jer. — κατ οικ. και δημ. Ό. — 21. διαμαρτνραμίνος Η al Thl' : -ροΐ'μίνος 
 D'.— rec ror 9. {corrnfor uniformity), with ADGH &c ThP Oec : txt BCE 38. G6'. !)C. 
 100. 113. i;»2 lect 5 Bas Chr Thl'. — for Qtov, χριστον bl. — την om AC 15. 18. 29. 
 32. 36. 57. CO-. (59. 81 (also D, which reads δια τ. κνριυν ημ. ιησ. χρ.) [as unnecessary) : ins 
 B(e sil)EGII most mss Chr Thl Oec. — jjjuoiv om E. — rec aft ιησ. ins χριστον (addn, as 
 usual), with ACDE &c vss Chr ThP : om BGH 14». 38. 10. 80. 98. 100. 113. 137- 177• 
 191. 192 all lect 5 sah seth syr slav-ms Bas Thl' Oec Lucif. — 22. rec ίγω διδ. {corrn of 
 characterislic order), with DGH &c : txt ABCE 69. 103. 105. 180 ν (edcl) Ath-mss 
 Thl- (om fy. Ath-edd Lucif). — κροσολυμα D. — σνναντηηαντα AD-gr Egr Η 67. 106 
 Thl' (prob originally a mistake) : σνμβησομενα CIS. 36. 68. 69. 180 lect 12 Ath 
 (mss,) TliF (y/04i) : txt B(e sil)G &c Ath Chr Oec. — {μοι Β. — μη γ(ΐνωσκωρ D : μη 
 om 68. — 23. on om sah. — ro ay. πΐ'. D-gr : ro πν. μοι το ay. 47- 137 : κατά ττολ. om 
 Ε : bef τΓολ. ins πασαν D ν Syr arr seth slav Lucif.• — δκμαρτυρατυ AE 13. 40 Ath 
 mss,) : διαμαοτυοηται 137 : add ταύτα sah. — rec om μοι {as unnecessary), with GH &c : 
 ins ABCDE 29.31. 36. 40. 42. 57. 65. 66^ 68. 73. Id. 99. 133. 163 lect 12 ν arm Ath 
 Cyr-jer Chr (aft πν.) Bas ThP Lucif Jer.— λίγων DEGH 22. 73. 96. 98. 100. 137- 142. 
 163. 191 lect 5 Ath (mss). — for on, in 96. — rec 5ίσ//. με {alteration perhaps to avoid 
 μ(μ(νουσιν ; — thus al have it after //£ΐ•ουσιι/ &,-c), with G &c Thdrt ThP Oec {μοι D and 
 aft μίνονσ.): txt ABCEH 1. 13. 15. 18. 40. 65. 68. 78. 105. 115. 133. 137- 180 lect 12 
 V arm Athj (aft μίν. as also vss) Bas Cyr-jer Did Chr Thl'. — at end, add tv κροσολνμοις 
 D V (not demid al) sah syr* Lucif. — 24. rec ονδενος (ins τοντων 43. 81. 99 ar-pol) 
 λόγοι» {\oyov al) ποιούμαι ονδε εχω την ^Ρνχην μου (om G al) τιμιαν εμαντω {see 
 notes), with EGH al Chr-text Thl Oec : ουίίΐ'ος λογον εχω ονδε ποιούμαι τ. ψ. 
 η. εμ. Α 13. 40. 43. 68 al : ονδεί'ος Xoyov εχω μα, ονδε ποι. τ. ψ. μου τι. εμαντον 
 D• : ν nihil horum vereor, nee facio animam meam pretiosiorem : txt BCD' Syr 
 (notwithstanding what is said to the contrary by Bloomf ed. 9) sah seth arm ar-ep (but 
 
 Pauline expression, 2 Cor. viii. 7; xu• 12. 2 Cor. ii. 13, οΐικ εσχηκα avtaiv τφ πν. 
 
 See ch. xxiii. 1. ιτειρασμών] See μον, and al., see also ch. xix. 21. Hotv he 
 
 especially Gal. iv. 14. 20. ίιπίστίΐ- was bound in the spirit is manifest, by 
 
 λάμην] So again ver. 27. The sense in comparing other passsages, where the Holy 
 
 Gal. ii. 12 is similar, though not exactly Spirit of God is related to have shaped his 
 
 identical — ' reserved himself,' withdrew apostolic course. He was bound, by the 
 
 himself from any open declaration of sen- Spirit of God leading captive, constraining, 
 
 tiinents. In Heb. x. 38 it is different. his own spirit. — As he went up to Jerusalem 
 
 των σ-υμφερ.] See reff. 21. δεδεμενος τω ττνίΰματι, so he left Judaea 
 
 «••S θ els T. κυρ. Ί.] This use of again δεδεμένης τη σαρκί, — a p7-is07ier ac- 
 
 εις is mostly Pauline : and in ch. xxiv. 24 cording to the flesh. — He had no detailed 
 
 it seems to be taken from his own expres- knowledge of futurity — nothing but what 
 
 s'""• 22. δ€δ€μΕνος τω ττνΕυματι] the Holy Spirit, in general forewarniugs, 
 
 ' bound m my spirit ' This interpretation repeated at every point of his journey {κατά 
 
 is most probable, both from the construe- πόλιν; see ch. xxi. 4, 11, for two such in- 
 
 tion, and from the usage of the expression stances), announced, viz., imprisonment 
 
 TO πνενμα repeatedly by and of Paul in and tribulations. That here no inner voice 
 
 the sense of Aw own spirit. See ch. xvii. of the Spirit is meant, is evident from tlie 
 
 16 reff., where the principal instances are words κατά πόλιν. (Two of the three other 
 
 given. The dative, as here, is found Rom. places where this phrase occurs are from 
 
 xii. 11, τψ πν. ζίοντ(ΐ:,— \ Cor. v. 3, the mouth or pen of Paul.) 23. το 
 
 παρών τψ πν({>μ. {I Cor. xiv. 15, 16 .>),— ττν. διαμαρτΰρ.] compare Rom. viii. 16,
 
 21—25. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 21 J 
 
 " τιμιαν βμαυτω ως ^ τίΧίίωσαι τον " δοομον μου και τ)η^ " = J»niesv.7. 
 
 ' ' •■ •> ι ' "1 Pet. 1. 1ί( al. 
 
 ciaKoviau ην ' εΛορον τταρα του κυρίου Ιησού, * οια- τϊϋ u. ' 
 
 /η ^' 'Λ -ζ' -Λ- » = PI'il-iii 12. 
 
 μαρτυρασΰαι το euayyiAiov της γαριτος του σεου. JohniT.34 
 /cat νυ»/ ιόου εγω οιοα on ουκετι οψεσυί το ττροςωττον ^vch χϋ.. 20. 
 
 '" / ''»α^"'ΛΛ ' ^ h /Ό 2 Tim. iv, 7 
 
 /tou υ^εις τταντες, εν οις οιηλσοι; κηρύσσων την ρασι- onjy. (Paui 
 
 νίϋ.β. x = cli.i. 17. Rora.si. 13t. ν ch. ii. 33 relf. ζ = cli. xiii. 43 reff. 
 
 a absDi., ch. viii. 4 rclt. b absol., Matt. viii. 12. siii'. 38. 1 Cor. xv. 24 al. 
 
 these vss exc arm om τιμιαν) Lucif {pro nihilo cestimo animam meam cariorem esse 
 mihi) and simly Ambr Aug nee (non enim Aug) facio an. me. cariorem (preiiosam, or 
 pretiosiorem Aug) (see Scholz).— ωςτΕ Ε 13. 29. 40. 68. 69. 76. 95. 96. 105. 137. 142. 
 163 : ως το C 104 : τον D. — τΑπωσω Β. — rec aft τ. ίρ. μ. {μου om 42. 180) ins μετά 
 χα^)ας {interpolation appy : see Phil i. 4, Col. i. 11, Heb x. 34 ύ,'ο : the finishing his 
 course appearing not emphatic enough), with CEGH &c syr al Chr Thl Oeo : om ABD 
 13. 40. 81 al ν copt sah syr ath ar-erp Lucif Ambr. — ciuk. tov \oyov D ν Lucif Ambr. — 
 παοίλαβον D 76. 137- 192. — διαμηρτ. mvcawiQ κ. ίλΧησιν D sah Lucif. — for το ιναγγ., 
 την βαηιΧίίαν 66-. — του bef θ. om D (Tisch says, ex errore videtur dici (see Scholz) Β 
 om του θ. : pertinet omissio ad ver seq).— 25. ιδυν om Ε 13. 40. 73. 96. 142. 177'• 180 
 al Syr ar-erp Lucif. — οιδα (-/ω C al Syr : ίγω om 180. — rec aft τ. βασ. (το (υαγγ. 66•. 
 69. 105 slav-ms), ins τον Qtov {supplementary addn, as shewn by the variations), with 
 EGH al vss Thdrt Thl Oec : του ιησου D sah : r. κυρ. ιησ. Lucif: txt ABC 13. 15'. 36. 
 
 TO ττνινμα συμμαρτιφα τψ ττν. ι/μων. 
 24.] The reading in the text, amidst all the 
 varieties, seems to be that out of which the 
 others have all arisen, and whose difficulties 
 they more or less explain. The first clause 
 is a combination of two constructions, 
 οΰδενος λόγου ποιούμαι την χΐ/υχήν 
 εμαυτίΐν, and ού ττοιονμαι {ή-γοϋμαι, Phil, 
 iii. 7ι 8) '■'}»' φνχήΐ' τιμιαν Ιμαν-ψ. The 
 best rendering in EngHsh would be, ' I 
 hold my life of no account, nor precious 
 to me.' Then again the confused construc- 
 tion of the former clause shews itself in the 
 ώς of the latter, which is not ' so that,' but 
 ' as,' q. d. before, ' so precious.' ' / do not 
 value my life, in comparison with the 
 finishing my course.' Render then the 
 whole verse : ' But I hold my life of no 
 account, nor is it so precious to me, as 
 the finishing of my course.' re- 
 
 Xeiucrai] See the same image, with the 
 same word, remarkably expanded, Phil. iii. 
 12 — 14. There in ver. 12 he has used 
 τίτιΧείωμαι, — and, — as is constantly the 
 case when we are in the habit of connecting 
 certain words together, — the δρόμος imme- 
 diately occurs to him, which he works into 
 a sublime comparison in ver. 14. 
 δρόμον] A similitude peculiar to Paul : 
 occurring, remarkably enough, in his speech 
 at ch. xiii. 25. lie uses it without the 
 word cp., at i Cor. ix. 24 — 27, and Phil, 
 iii. 14. και τ. δ ] 'and (i.e. even) 
 
 the ministry,' &c. καί in this sense gives 
 that which, in matter of fact, runs parallel 
 with the metaphorical expression just used, 
 — stands beside it as its antitype. 
 έλαβον] Comj). Rom. i. 5, Ci ου i\a^o\Ltv 
 χάριν κ. άποατοΧήν. 25.] It has 
 
 Ρ 
 
 been argued from εν οΤς διηΧθον, that the 
 elders of other churches besides that of 
 Ephesus must have been present. But it 
 might just as well have been argued, that 
 every one to whom Paul had there preached 
 must have been present, on account of the 
 word ττάντες. If he could regard the 
 elders as the representatives of the various 
 churches, of which there can be no doubt, 
 why may not he similarly have regarded 
 the Ephesian elders as representatives of 
 the churches of proconsular Asia, and have 
 addressed all in addressing them ? Or may 
 not these words have even a wider appli- 
 cation, viz., to all who had been the subjects 
 of his former personal ministry, in Asia and 
 Europe, now addressed through the Ephe- 
 sian elders ? — See the question, whether 
 Paul ever did see the Asiatic churches 
 again, discussed in the Prolegg. to the 
 Pastoral Epistles. I may remark here, 
 that the word oiCa, in the moutli of Paul, 
 does not necessarily imply that he spoke 
 from divine and unerring knowledge, but 
 expresses his own conviction of the cer- 
 tainty of what he is saying : see ch. xxvi. 
 27, which is much to our point, as express- 
 ing his firm persuasion that king Agrippa 
 was a beUever in tlie prophets : but cer- 
 tainly no infallible knowledge of his heart : 
 — Rom. XV. 29, where also a firm persua- 
 sion is expressed -. — Phil. i. 19,20, where 
 οΙδα, ver. 19, is explained to rest on «πο- 
 καραδοκία και ί\πίς in ver. 20. So that 
 he may here ground his expectation of 
 never seeing tliem again, on the plan of 
 making a journey into tlie west after seeing 
 Rome, which he mentions Rom. xv. 24. 28, 
 and from which, with bonds and imprison-
 
 212 
 
 ΠΡΑλΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XX. 
 
 cch.«vi.22. Χύαν. -^δίο *" μαρτυρομαι νμίν kv τ^ σήμερον "^ τιμίξκχ, ABcn 
 
 Gal. v. 3. „ ,. Λ ν , χ ϊ \ - ./ / 97 ' ^ ΕϋΗ 
 
 Eph. iv. 17. on KaVunuc tyio απο του αίματος πάντων "' ου yap 
 
 ('pau'ioDiy.) ^ νπίστίΐλάμηΐ' του μη avayytiAai υμιν πασαν ΤΊ}ν ^ρουλτ/ν 
 
 Β Πίκ β!' τοΰ Θίοϋ. ^^ '' 7Γρυςίχ£τε ούν εαντοις και παντι τω ' ττοιμ- 
 
 ^"c"'ii'i η ''"•' *'' '^ w^'Of το πΐ'£υμα το ayiov ίϋίτο ίπισκοπους, 
 
 όηΓν^'ί^Ιι. ν. !>. 'jtT. ί. Ιβ!' ech. XTiii.fi refl. fver, 20. g Luke τϋ 150. cli. ii 2:? η1. 
 
 h Lukr xvii. :iiil. cli. τ. :!.'<. Dint. iv. 23. i Luke xii. 32. 1 Pel v. 2, 3 only. Jer. xiii. 17. 
 
 k — I Cur. xii. 28. Gen. Χϊϋ. Γ). IPliil.i. 1. 1 Tim. iii. 2 (here first;. 1 Pet. ii. 2S. 2 Cliroii. xxxiv. 12. 
 la«.lx. 17. 
 
 180 copt syr arm Clir.— 26. iiori AE 10. 29. 42. 78. 97. 177• 191: SiOKaial: tst 
 Β(ο sil)CtUI al.— for Cto to ort, — άχρι υνν της σημίρον ημιρας D', projtier quod 
 hodienw die ί\.—(Ίαμαρτ. 3. 13. 40 Chr.— for tyw, ε,μι BCDE 13. 15. 18.20. 30. 40. 68. 
 73.81. 103. 137. 180 lectt 12.40 valBas,Chrj Dam al : ty^" tt μι ((}<). 105) or a/i. ty. vss 
 jer al (κμι has come in from the margin as in vss, and then supplanted the origl tyio as 
 in I3CDE al) : t.\t AGIl most mss copt al Bas, Chr, Thl' Oec. — aft τταντων, add νμοιν 
 Ε 4-. 25. 34. «8. 105 ν mss Syr arr copt setb ft" (not Chr Thl' Oec al).— 27. yap om 9'>. 
 — μη om D'-gr (i(j-. 73. 81. 177' al slav-mod Lucif.— νμιν is aft Gfov in BCD (ηιιιν D') 
 13. 81 V {transposition to bring the acciis next the verb) : t.xt AEGH ni.ss (nrly) 
 vis Bas, Chr Thl Oec Iran Jer al— 28. ovv om ABD 13. 15. 30. 81. 180 lectt ν copt al 
 (Did Thdrt Lucif al) {ττροςιχίτΐ is the beginning of an ecclesiastical portion) : ins CEGH 
 most mss syrr Chr Thl Oec Iren : ττροςιχί 133. — αυτοις D'. — το ay. πν. D-gr : Βίος 
 sah. — την ίκκ\. του θεην {see note) Β (ascertained to be so by Tisch) 4. 22. 40. 05. (iO'. 
 08. 84. 89. 154. 102 al, and e sil 7. 12. 10. 23. 25. 37. 39. 50. 04 al (Scholz) ν syr (msj) 
 Ath (mss) Chrj (but see below) Epiph (Bas) Antioch Cielest TliF Oec Ambr Oros Cassiod 
 Ferrand I'rim al : τ. (κκ\. του κυρίου και θίου C^GH more than 100 mss {uniting the 
 readings) Thl' : aUi aliter, —κυρ. Θ., κυρ. του θ., θ. κ. κυρ., χριστού (syr al Origj) τ. 
 
 ment and other dangers awaiting him, he 
 might well expect never to return. So that 
 what he here says need not fetter our judg- 
 ment on the above question. 26.] 
 The use of μαρτυρομαι is peculiar to Paul, 
 see refF. : as also in N. T. that of t) σή- 
 μιρον ίιμίρα. 28. Trpose'x. eavTois] 
 If we might venture to trace the hand of 
 Luke in the speech, it would be perhaps in 
 this phrase : which occurs only Luke xii. 1 ; 
 xvii. 3; xxi. 34, Acts v. 35. τ. ιτοιμ- 
 νίω] This similitude does not elsewhere 
 occur in Paul's writings. We find it (reff.) 
 where we should naturally expect it, used 
 by him to whom it was said, ' Feed my 
 sheep.' But it is common in the O. T., and 
 sanctioned by the example of our Lord 
 Himself. το irv. τ. αγ.] See ch. xiii. 2. 
 
 ίθίτο] So Paul, 1 Cor. xii. 18. 28. 
 
 ΙιτισκόίΓους] See on ver. 17, and 
 Theodoret on Phil. i. 1, ίπισκόπυυς τους 
 πptσ^iυτίpoυς καλίί• αμφότερα γαρ ιΐχον 
 κατ ίκΗΐ'ον τον καιρΰν τά ονόματα (Olsh.). 
 — The question between θ(οϊι and κυρίου 
 rests principally on internal evidence — 
 which of the two is likely to have been the 
 original reading. The MSS authority, now 
 that it is certain that Β has tiiov a prima 
 manu, is weighty on both sides. The early 
 patristic authority for the expr. αίμα Otov 
 is considerable. Ignat. E])hes. i. has c'lva- 
 ζωττνρήσαντες tv α'ίματι fclfoi". Tertull. ad 
 Uxor. ii. 3, "pretin empti, et quali j)retio ? 
 sanguine Dei." Clem. Alex., ' Quis dives 
 
 salvus,' c. 34, has δυνάμει θίοϋ πατρός, 
 α'ίματι θίοΰ παιδος, κ. ορόσφ πνεύματος 
 άγιΌιι. On the other hand Athanasius says, 
 οϋοαμοΰ δε αίμα θίοΰ ίίχα σαρκός παρα- 
 δείώκασιν α'ι γηαφα'ι, η θεον δίχα σαρκός 
 παθόντα η άναστάντα. In attempting to 
 decide between the two readings, the follow- 
 ing alternatives and considerations may be 
 put: (I.) IF κυρίου was the original, it 
 is very possible (1) that some busy scribe 
 may have written at the side, as so often 
 occurs, θεον. This having been once done, 
 the interests of orthodoxy would perpetuate 
 the gloss, and by degrees it would be 
 adopted into the text and sttpersede the 
 original word, or become combined with it, 
 as is actually the case in GH and a vast 
 body of mss. Or, continuing supposition 
 I., it may have been (2) that the expr. 
 εκκΧησίαν του κυρίου, not found any where 
 else, may have been corrected into the very 
 usual one, εκκλ. τοΰ θεον, which occurs ten 
 times in the Epp. of Paul. Or (3), which 
 I consider exceedingly improbable (see 
 below), the alteration may have been made 
 solely in the interest of orthodoxy. — Such 
 are possible, and the two former not im- 
 probable, contingencies. On the other 
 hand (II.) if θεοΰ was the original, but 
 one reason can be given why it should have 
 been altered to κυρίου, and that one was 
 sure to have operated. It would stand as 
 a bulwark against Arianism, an assertion 
 which no skill could evade, which }nust
 
 2G— so. nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 213 
 
 "' ΤΓΟίμαινειν τΐ]ν ίκκΧησιαΐ' του θίου, ην " πΐραττοιησατο ™iii ίρ"."2 
 
 Λ\ --/ -•Λ> 29'^'2'Ιίο'Λ' 2 Kings ν. 'a.' 
 
 όια του αίματος του ιοιου. tyio οιόα οτι ΕίςεΛίυσοιται nLukexvusa. 
 
 μίτα την ^ αφιςιν μου λύκοι μαοίΐς εις υμάς μη χ"'χ*, j^^sg. 
 
 ^ φίΐόόμενοι του ' ποιμνίου, και ες υμών αυτών αναστη- οίο^κχχ.ι. 
 
 σονται ανορίς \α\ουντες " οΐίστοαμμίνα, ^ του " αποσπαν •'sMac'^'vii 
 
 18. Herod, ix. 17. 77. q =• Matt. τϋ. 1Λ only. r = here only. s Rom. viii. 32. xi. 21. 1 Cor. vii. 28'al. 
 (2 Kings xii. 4, 6.) t = cli. r. 3Γ., 37 al. α Matt. xvii. 17 L. Luke xxiii. 2. Phil. ii. IS. cli. xiii. 8 
 
 only. Deat. xxxii. 5. ν coustr., Luke xxii. 6. 1 Cor. ix. 10. w = her- only. See Luke xxii. 41 reff. 
 
 tK/cX. without a gen Ath-msSj Thdrt, a: r. s/ckX. r. κυρίου AC'DE 13. 15. 18. 36 
 (text) 40. C'J. 73. 81. 95'. 130. 156. 1C3. 180 al (Scholz) copt sah Syr (marg) arm (seth) 
 (SjT in polygl) Eus Ath (ms) Constt {σνντρίχετε εις τ. ckk\. τ. κυρ. ην ττεριεττ. τω αιμ. 
 του χριστού) Did Ammon Chrj (and comm ει γε [ο οεσποτης νπερ τ. εκκ\.~\ (om ms) 
 ου^ε τον αιμ. εφεισατο του εαυτού) Maxim Thdor-stud ThP al Iren-int Lucif Aug Jer 
 Sedul al (see Scholz). — περιε-, εαυτω D sah Iren. — rec τον iS. αιμ. {alteration, sai/s 
 Meyer, owing to θεον, because του ihov might be referred to Christ [as a gen) : but 
 surety ibis is carrying subtlety somewhat too far. It has been evidently a corrn for 
 simplicity, not observing the emphasis), with GH &c Ath Chr Caelest (-ω iC. αιμ.) Thl 
 Oec: txt ABCDE 15. 31. 33. 34. .36. 40. 69. 73. 81. 105. 130. 142. 156. 163. 180 leet 
 12 arm al Did Iren Lucif al.— 29. rec εyω yap oiCa τοντο {interpolations to connect and 
 strengthen the sentence), with C'EGH al syr al Chr Thl Oec {τουτ. om al vss Thdrt) : 
 txt AB(ort fy. oio.)C'D13. 15.36.81. 130. 180 ν copt («γ. ie) Caelest Iren Lucif Jer: yap 
 om 180 : τοντο om 68. 69. 105. 163. 180 Syr ar-erp sah aeth arm Thdrt in cat.— a^f^tv 
 DE, αψη^ιν G. — 30. αυτών (1st) om Β sah aeth. — Oiirrrp. ρήματα ar sah seth. — for 
 αποσπαν, αποστρεφειν D-gr Syr ar-erp. — for αυτών (2nd), εαυτών AB {alteration for 
 
 therefore be modified. If θίοϋ stood in the to efoi.^more likely that the speaker 
 text originally, it teas sure to be altered to should have used Otoh than κυρίου, and 
 κύριοι;. The converse was not sure, nor more consonant to the evidently emphatic 
 indeed hkely, from similar reasons, the pas- position of the word,— I have on a final 
 sage oflering no stumbling-block to ortho- revision of this vol. decided for the rec. 
 doxy. (III.) P.A.ULi.vE usage must be reading, which in first writing it I had re- 
 allowed its fair weight in the enquiry. It jected. (V.) Of course any reading which 
 must be remembered that we are in the combines the two, κυρίου and Otoii, is by 
 midst of a speech, which is (as observed in the very first principles of textual criticism 
 the Prolegg. to Acts, § ii. 16 a) a com- inadmissible. (VI.) The principal names 
 plete storehouse of Pauline words and ex- on either side are — for the rec. θεοϋ, Mill, 
 pressions. Is it per se probable, that he Wolf, Bengel, Matthai, Scholz: for κυρίου, 
 should use an expr. which )W where else Grotius, Le Clerc, Wetst., Griesb , Kuin., 
 occurs in his writings, nor indeed in those De Wette, Meyer, Tischendorf, al. 
 of his contemporaries :' Is it inore pro- irepieTr.] Paul (and in pastoral Epp. only), 
 bable, that the early scribes should have see reff. 29.] αφιξις is here used in an 
 altered an unusual espr. for an usual one, unusual sense. Au instance is found, Jos. 
 or that a writer so constant to his own Antt. iv. 8. 47, where Moses says, ίπε'ι 
 phrases should here have remained so .' προς τους τ'ιμετίρονς ΰπειμι προγόνουι:, 
 Besides,— in most of the places where Paul και θιός τήνοε μοι την ημίραν της προς 
 
 uses εκκλησία του θεοΰ, it is in a manner εκείνους άφίξιως ίόρισε which is 
 
 precisely similar to this,— as the consurn- somewhat analogous, but more easily ex- 
 
 mation of a climax, or in a position of plained. That in Herod, ix. 77 (init.) is 
 
 pecuUar solemnity, cf. 1 Cor. x. 32; xv. 9. ambiguous. In Demosth. de Pace, p. 58 
 
 Gal. i. 13. 1 Tim. iii. 5, 15 : and, caeteris (fin.), we ha.ve την τότε άφιξιν (ίς τκνς πο- 
 
 paribus, Ι submit that the present passage λιμίους ίποιήσ/ιτο, which is most like the 
 
 loses by the substitution of κυρίου the pe- usage here. Perhaps, absolutely put, it 
 
 culiar emphasis which its structure and must signify 'my death;' see tlie above 
 
 context seem to retjuire in the genitive, passage of Josephus. λΰκοι βαρίΐς] 
 
 introduced as it is by -προΓίχετε not persecutors, but false teachers, from 
 
 ποιμαίνίΐν, and followed by the intensi- the words clseX. els υμάς, by which it 
 
 fying clause ην περιεποιήσατο όια τυϋ appears that they were to come in among 
 
 αίματος τοϋ iciov. (IV.) On the whole the flock, i. e. to be baptized Christians, 
 
 then, weighing the evidence on both sides, \i\ fact ver. 30 is cx])lanatory of tlic me- 
 
 — seeing tliat it is more likely that the taphoric meaning of ver. 29. φίίδομαι 
 
 alteration should liave been to κυρίου than is only used by Paul, e.xcept 2 Pet. ii. 4, 5.
 
 214 ΠΡΑΗΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XX. 31—38. 
 
 xcii.v 37 rcir. τους «αθητας " οτΓί'σω oi/rwv. διο ^ -Ϋρη-γοοίΐτε, '' μνη- ABcp 
 
 fr!"(j'.? ν ό) 1"θΐ'£υοΐ'ΓΕς• οτι τοίίτιαν ννκτα και τημίραν ουκ 
 
 ΊΙ^Ύ/'^^^'^ΐτταυσάμην '^ μίτα Βακρυων ' νουθίτων ^'evn ίκαστον. 
 Paiiioniy. ''^ Kui Tavvv ^ παρατίΌίμαι νμας τω νίω και τω λoyω 
 
 Bhrrei>nlv t. _ ,_-λ , ;>r^_ ''\^_ 
 
 xx^xf/ilr'"' ττίς γάοίτος αυτοΰ, τω ουί'αμίνω οικοδόμησα ι και όουναι 
 Ccn. χν.'ίΐ. k Λ ' k • - k ' / - 33 ' ' 
 
 rh.xxT.ii. κΛηρονομιαν fv τοις ηγκισμενοις ττασιρ. "^ α^ιγυρίου 
 "VTiie."iiK8. V χρυσ'ιου η ' ιματισμοί) ούδενος '" ιττίθυμησα' ^^ αυτο\ 
 
 Paul οηΐν, / « -η' >-τ >.- 
 
 rxc._Mi.rk γπ'ωσίνίτε οτι ταις γ^ρπαις μου και τοις ουσιν μίτ ΐμου 
 
 ^"iii'^y^h^^ " νπηρίτησαν αϊ χείρες αύται' ^^ ^ πάντα "* ύττε'δίίζο υμιν 
 
 b "nsir, E|)h. ΟΤΙ οΌτως ^ κοπιωντος οει ^ αντιΧαμβανίσθαι των ' ασθε- 
 
 'w'Vi'''^ ΐ'ουτων, μνημονίυίΐν τε των λόγων του κυρίου Ιτ^σου, 
 
 Hfi). ν.ν. xii. 17. d Paul only. Rom. xv. 14. ICor. iv. 14. Col. i. 28. iii. IR. 1 Tliess. v. 12, 14. 2 Tliess. 
 
 iii. 1ft only. Jobi^.S. e ch. ii. 6. Eph iv. Hi. Col.iv.O. fih. iv. 2!) r^ff. g Luke 
 
 sxiii. 4I>. ch. xiv. 23. Ps. xxx. 5. h ch. xiv. 3. i = ch. ix. 31 refl. k = and conslr., tph. 
 
 i. 18. ch. xxvi. 18. I Luke vli. 2Γι. 1 Tim. ii. S•. P.s. xliv.9. m conslr., 1 Tim. iii. 1 only. Prov. 
 
 xxiii.3,(i. 11 — cli xxTiii. 10. Rom.xii.13. Pliil. ii. 25. iv. Ifi, 19. Tit. iii. 14. ochxiii. 
 
 30. XX iv. 23 only t• Wisd. xvi. 24. ρ οοη.•.|Γ., 1 Cor. x. 33. Eph. iv. 1ft. Paul only. q = Luke 
 
 vi. 47. xii. ft ch.ix. 16. t2 Chron. xv. 3.) r Matt. vi. 28 al. P.-i. rxxTi. 1. s Luke i. 04. 1 Tim. 
 
 Ti. 2 only. L. P. Isa. xli. 9. Sec Rom. viii. 26. t = 2 Cor. xi. 2a. xii. 10. xiii.4 only. u w. gen., 
 
 Luke x\ii.B2 uI. 
 
 emphasis) : txt CDEGH mss (appy) Bas Chr Thl Oec. — 31. ίκτιαν GC^. — νουθ. μ. S. tv. 
 ίκ. υμ. \οΟ.—ννκταν Α.— at end, add υμών DE 25. 27. 2!). 43. GG^. fi8. 80, 93. 105. 137 
 al lect 40 ν Syr arr copt sah aeth slav Thl- Lucif Jer Oros. — 32. κ. rovvv 137. — 
 τταηατιθημι 2. 30. — rec aft νμας, ins αδιλφοι {fnr solenmUy : were it genuine, as Meyer 
 observes, there u-ould be 7io possible reason for omitting it in any MSS), with CEGH &c 
 seth ar-pol slav Chr al : om ABD 33. 34. G8. 81 ν syrr copt sah al Jer Oros : ins aft 
 θίου 137 lect 58. — for τω Οιω, τω κνριω Β (Scholz) 33. G8 sah. — rec ίποικυδ., with GH 
 most mss Chr (expressly, οΐ'Κ ιιπιΐ' οικοζομηηαι αλλ εποικοζομησαι, ίίίκνί'ς- οτι ηδη 
 ωκο^ομηθησαν. But may not this have been the history of its alteration, to render the 
 word more strictly appropriate η : txt ABCDE 13. 15. 36. 81. 130. 180 : add υμάς DE 
 29. 7G lect 58 Syr (Scholz) arr sah seth: pref νμας 14'. 66^. (jg. ηο. 81. 105' Syr (Tisch) 
 Chrj. — rec aft Sovr. add u/ni' (supplementary insertion), with CGH all vss Chr (but aft 
 κληο Chr,) Oros al : om ABDE 25 ν copt : ?;μιι/ 19. 43.— r^i^ κλ/;ρ. ACE 130. 180 
 (see Col. iii. 24) : add ηντου A. — for πασιν, των ττανπυν D-gr (d is deficient from ver 31 to 
 ch xxi. 2).— 33. for tj (1st), και D ν.—ουθινος AE: txt B(e sil)CDGH al : add νμων 
 DE : το(/Γων 97. — 34. rec αιτ. 0£ (snpplemenf ary inserti07i), v/'tth qu? : yap 106: txt 
 ABCDEGH all ν syrr arr seth arm slav Bas Chr ThP Aug. — oiSari A : ιπιστασθί Chr- 
 text. — ^oi; ττασιν D'. — ανται μονΌ sah: μου αντ. Syr ar-erp aeth slav. — 35. και -πάντα 
 C'D2 27. 29. 3G. 40. 66=. 76. 80. 105. 136. 180 al lect 58 Syr: ττασι D^ (Scholz, but 
 Tisch ?). — Lachmann joins πάντα to ver 34 with some mss, but against ACDEGH Bas3 
 
 al (παντ νμ. om seth). — Sti όντως κοπ. 13 : ούτως κοπιωντα dfi 137. — τωι• απθ. 
 
 αντ. Α. — τί om (Α' .') D' copt sah (and 130 al, readg μνημονενετί). — τον ληγον G 4. 14^. 
 22. 42. 57. 65. GO. 73. 96. 99. 126. 156. 163. 191. 192 all lect 58 al Chr ThP : row 
 λογού 26. 38. 40. 93 al lect 18 ν arm sah (both corrns, because but one saying is cited). 
 
 30.] χιμών ανιτ. does not necessarily idea of a journey (as some think) to Crete 
 
 signify the presbyters: he speaks to them and Corinth having taken place during 
 
 as being the whole flock. 31.] |ΐνημ. this period. But on this cf. Prolegg. to 
 
 oTi is only (reff.) used by Paul. νύκτα 1 Cor. 32. τ. λόγ. τη? χάρ. αύτ.] 
 
 κ. ημ€ραν] This expression is remarkable : I should be inclined to attribute the occur- 
 
 we have it (see reff.) in Alark, but Luke rence of this expression in ch. xiv. 3, to the 
 
 always uses the genitive, except in the narrative having come from Paul himself, 
 
 speeches of Paul. voviecTOJv (reff.) is or from one imbued with his words and 
 
 used only by Paul— On the three years habits of thought. See ver. 24. τω 
 
 spokenof in this verse, see note, ch.xix. 10. δυν.] Clearly spoken of God, not of the 
 
 We may just remark here (1) that this pas- word of His grace, which cannot be said 
 
 sage being precise and definite, must be the cainai τ. κ\ηρον., however it might oiVo- 
 
 master key to those others (as in ch. xix.) ίομησαι. — The expression κΧηρον. tv τ. 
 
 which give wide and indefinite notes of >)y. πασ. is strikingly similar to της κ\η- 
 
 time : and (2) that it seems to preclude the ρονομ'ι,ις αυτοϋ iv το'ις cιyiυις, Eph. i. 18,
 
 XXI. 1, 2. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 215 
 
 on αυτός ύπίν ^ ^ίακάριον ίστιν ^μάλλον διδοναι τ) '^cnstr., w. 
 \αμβάι>ίη'. και ταΰτα ίπτων ^^ θίΐς τα yovara αυτοϋ S"^'i"'j!: 
 
 συν πασιΐ' αυτοις ''" πρυςηυζατο. °' " (κονος δε ^ κλουθμόο w.if.'vii. βο 
 ίγευΕΓΟ παιτωι», /cat ίττίττεσοντες £π< ταν τραγ^ηλον του '^j^',,^' ** 
 
 αυΛου κατίψίΛυυΐ' αυτόν, οουνωμίνοι μάλιστα εττι vni. ιλ&ο. 
 
 τω Λόγω ω ει^ηκίΐ, οτι ουκίπ μελλουσπ' το προςωπον I'llJ•.,^^"- 
 αυτοΰ Οεωρείΐ'. ττροίττεμπον δε αυτόν εις το ττλοίον. ^Lu'kJxv. 2ΐι. 
 
 ■V""VT 1 ' ^^ ε ' ' 1ι ' Π" >• - i ' Λ' Gen.xlvi.2». 
 
 Λ.Λ.1. ^ ως όε * εγενετο οι^οχσηναι 7]μας αττοσπασσει-τας » ^,"'-^^'^^38^ 
 ατΓ αυτών, εύθυδοομτ/σαΐ'τες ηλθομεί' εις την Κω, ""τη <λ Ϊ4."""' '' 
 
 Λ\ιν— » '^'η''ζ> ■""Ω 'π' 9 ' b Luke ϋ. 48. 
 
 οε εςης εις την roooi', κακεινεν εις Ιΐατπρα. και '""'ρ'^,ί, 
 
 C = James τ. 1 al. d atlr . ch. i. 1. Matt xviii. 19. Zeph. iii. 11. e = ch six. 27 al. f ch. xv. 3 reff. 
 
 gconslr., Matt, xviii. 13. cli. iv. 5 al. fr. h cli. xiii. 13 reft'. i = Luke xxii. 41. (See ch. xx. 30.) 2 Mace. 
 
 xii. 10. IcU.xvi. 11 only t. m ch xxv. 17. χχτϋ. 18 only. See Luke vii 11. ix. 37. (Luke only.) 
 
 — ιησ. om A 2. 30. G8. 96. 1-12 Cbr Bas. — ούτος D'. — rec ίιί. μα\\. with many mss : 
 txt ABCDEGH all ν arm syr Chr Dam Thl Aug.— 36. ειπος ΌΚ—αντου om ΌΚ—συμ- 
 πασιν G. — αυτοις om C al : τνασιν om 180 sail : τνροςηυζ. ττασι τούτοις lect 58 : 
 ττροςίυξατο D.— 37. rec tytv. κλ. {corrn of order to bring κ\. and πάντων toyether), 
 with GH &cThl' Oec {ty. dt κλ. ,κ. 137 Chr) : txt ABODE 13. 38. 113. 130. 180 ν 
 ThF. — τον om D- 180 Thl'.— 38. μαλ. ιπι τω λ. oSvv. D : and add on ίίπεν D^ — 
 avTov om D'. — for «ις, ιπι D : προίπ. to πλοιον om 32. 57'. 
 
 Chap. XXI. 1. ημ. αναχθ. A'^ : αναχθ. om A^ (appy) : τον αναχθ. 133: αχθηναι 
 95' : ως . . . ημάς cm Syr ar-erp. — αποσπασθινης BE^.^D' has, και επιβαντες 
 ανηχθημεν αποσττασθίντων St ημών . . . . — for 7;λθ., ηκουίν D. — την om D. — rec 
 κων, with 0(κώΐ')11 {κων al) {Coutn ν, C/io am) : txt ABCDE 42. 57- 73. 70. 80^. 95. 
 97. 105. 133. 137. 142 all syrr copt sail arm slav-ms Thl- Oec Cassiod. — for (ζης, tni- 
 ονση D. — την om CD al Chfj : ins AB(e sil)EGH mss (nrly) Thl Oec. — παηρα AC. — 
 
 addressed to this same church. See also 
 ch. xxvi. 18. 33.] See 1 Sam. xii. 3; 
 
 and for similar avowals by Paul himself, 
 1 Cor. ix. 11, 12. 2 Cor. xi. 8, 9 ; xii. 13. 
 
 34.] See 1 Cor. iv. 12, which he 
 wrote when at Ephesus. — xpda, with a 
 gen. of the pe7-s07i in want, is an expression 
 of Paul only; see among reff. — ύττηριτΰν 
 is used only twice more ; once by Paul, ch. 
 xiii. 36, once 0/ Paul, ch. xxiv. 23.— The 
 construction is varied in this sentence. — 
 ταϊς χρ• μου, κα'ι (not των όντων, but) 
 τοις ούσιν μ(τ' ίμοϋ. This is not without 
 meaning — his friends were among his χρΰαι 
 — he supplied by his labour, not his and 
 their wants, but /lis wants and them. 
 
 al χ. αύται] also in Paul's man- 
 ner: comp. των ίιίσμών τούτων, ch. xxvi. 
 29, — and ch. xxviii. 20. 35. ττάντα] 
 
 'In all things:' so Paul (only), see reft. 
 κοπιώντας] A word used by Paul 
 fourteen times, by Luke only once (Luke 
 V. 5). των άσθενονντων] Not here 
 
 the treak in faith (Ri)in.xiv. 1. 1 Cor. viii. 
 9), as Calv., Bez., Grot., Bengel, Ncander, 
 Meyer, Tholuck, — which the context both 
 before and after will not allow : — but ' the 
 poor' (reff., τιινς ττίνητας άσΟινονντας, 
 Aristoph. Pac. fJIUi. ri γαρ άπΟενίπτερας 
 ΰ πλούσιος τί την Cikiiv Irrtiv ί'χκ, Eurip. 
 ap. Stob. cxv. (Wftst.), as Chrys., Theoph., 
 
 Heinrichs, Kuin., Olsh., De Wette. 
 1\1ακ. Ιστιν, κ.τ.λ.] This saying of our 
 Lord is one of the very few not recorded 
 in the Gospels,, which have come down 
 to us. Many such must have been current 
 in the apostolic times, and are possibly 
 preserved, unknown to us, in such epistles 
 as those of James, Peter, and John. Ben- 
 gel remarks, ' alia mundi sententia est :' 
 and cites from an old poet in Atlienaeus, 
 viii. 5, άΐ'όητος ό ίίϋονς, ίύτνχής S' 6 
 λαμβάνων. But we have some sayings 
 the other way : not to quote authors who 
 wrote after this date, and might have im- 
 bibed some of the spirit of Christianity, 
 we find in Aristotle, Eth. Nicom. iv. 1, 
 μαΧλόν εστίν του ίλευθερίου το SiSovcii 
 οίς c^fi η λαμβάνειν 'όθεν ίεΧ, και μη 
 λαμβάνειν 'όθεν ον δεΊ. της άρετης yap 
 μάλλον το εν ποιεΊν η το εν πάσχειν, 
 XXI. L] The E.V., 'After ive had 
 gotten from than,' does not come up to 
 the original : (ΐκ'κνικτι την βιαν τφ είπεΧν 
 άποσπαπθ'εντας άπ' αύτων, Chrys. 
 €ύθυδρομ.] See ch. xvi. 11, 'having run 
 before the wind.' Cos, ojiposite Cnidus 
 and llalicarnassus, celebrated for its wines 
 (f (IK- (/οπός πάσα, οίνψ δε κα'ι αρίστη, 
 καθάπεη Χι'ος κ. \έσβος, Strab. xiv. 2), 
 rich stufls (' ncc Cose referunt jam tibi pur- 
 pura»,' Hor. iv. J3. 13), and ointments
 
 21G 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXI. 
 
 η Matt. ix. I 
 al. Dent. 
 
 ο abMil., here 
 
 only. =. ver. 
 
 li. ch.xxvii. 
 
 2. 
 ρ (Lake xix. 
 
 II only. Cant. 
 
 f / -y - 
 
 ίνροντες τγΛοιοι' 
 
 λιπάντίς αυτιιν 
 '' κατηγ^θημεν Ης 
 
 " διοττερων εις Φοινικην, 
 αναφανίντίς δί την Κυπξ)ον και 
 '' ευίονυμον ίττΧίομίν 
 Ύυρον 
 
 επιβαντες ψοινι- 
 
 ABC 
 
 ν, 
 
 αποφορτιίομεΐ'ον τον -yo^tov 
 
 iyov 
 
 εκίΐσε yap 
 4 
 
 κατα- 
 
 εις Ζ,υρίαν, και 
 
 ην το πΧοιον 
 
 EGH 
 
 R 
 
 Gal. ϋ.7. 
 
 q-'her^mfw."' /»"^'i^«C '^ επεμείναμεν αυτού ημέρας 
 
 rch.xxvii. 3. »-, f\ >/\ ζ ? ^ 
 
 xxviii. 12 Ιίαυλω eAeyov όια 
 
 only. (Lake 
 
 ανευροντες όε τους 
 ετΓτα, οιτινες τω 
 
 ^ a ' ο ' ' 
 
 μη επιραινειν 
 
 εις 
 
 του πνεύματος 
 
 S ch. χχϋ. Γ) only. Jobxxxix. 2!•. t constr. (see note), Luke i 10, 20. Jer. xxiii. 20. 
 
 Wilier 4 4fi. 5. " ^""''^ onl.V. Kii/JepKi'/Ttic χειμώνων βπι-ίΐι/ομ^νων ύποψορτίζετιιι, Philo de 
 
 Pra'ui.'p. !M5. ν Rev. xviii. 11 only. Exod. xxiii. 6. w Luke U. Ifi only t. x ch s. 48 refl". 
 
 y cb. X. 41, 47. xiii. 32, 43 al. ζ ch. xi. 28 refl'. a = and constr., ch. xx. 18 lefl'. 
 
 at end, add και μύρα (-pp« sah) D sah ν (ms). — 2. ^ιαπΐ(ιονν Ε 73. 105 : Siantpov G 
 4. 19. 39. 100. 103 Thl^ : ^ιατζυρΐυομίνον 137. — 3. Mill (not rec) αναψαναντες (corrn, 
 not perceh'ing the force of the passive), with 39. 6C. 100. 104 al lect 40 Chr (inss) : 
 atpti'Tfg 81 : t.xt MSS.— r?; κυπρω 34 : £ΐς τ. κνπρον 40 : την om Ε. — και om Α al ν 
 (demid not am). — καΓηΧίίποντΐς AGH (but -ττόντις GH) 13. — ίπλίομ. om Α. — for 
 κατ7]χ., κατη'Κθομίν ABE al ν {depositi sumus e) copt sah al {perhaps error in writint/) : 
 txt CDGH mss (nrly) vss Chr Thl Oec : και . . . τνρον om 15. 18. 36. 180. — ficfi 
 (H Scholz) 133.— ro πλόων ην ABCE 13. 137 (corr7i of order): t.-st GH mss (nrly) 
 syr Chr Thl Oec. — αψοριζομινον 91». — 4. recicai avevp. {corrn of copula, as frequently), 
 with C'GH &c vss Chr Thl: txt ABCE 13. 15. 18. 36. 40. 69. 73. 105. 180 all ν copt 
 sah ThR -Γϋυς om GH 1. 4. 38. 42. 57. 65. 80. 95. 98. 113. 133. 137- 142. 177 all Chr 
 Thl' {corrn, the art not seeming in place) : ins ABCE all ThP Oec. — (μαναμίν 180. — 
 αυΓοις- AEG 68. 73. 103 Thl- {alteration to suit οιτινις which follotvs) : αυτήν (error) 
 56: om 28: (ku 177: txt B(e sil)CH most mss (appy) ν al ThP Oec. — i\tyav^. — 
 rec αναβ. {substitution of more usual word), with EGH al Chr Thl' Oec : txt ABC 15. 
 
 (ytvtrai Si μνρα κάλλιστα κατά τόπους 
 .... άμαράκινον li Κώοΐ' κα\ μηλινον, 
 Athen. χν. ρ. 688). The chief town was 
 of the same name (Hom., II. ii. 677), and 
 had a famous temple of ^sculapius (Strabo, 
 ibid.). It was the birth-place of Hippo- 
 crates. The modern name, Stancbio, is a 
 corruption of ϊς ταυ Κώ. See Winer, 
 RWB. — Rhodes was at this time free, cf. 
 Strabo, xiv; 2. Tac. Ann. xii. 58 : ' Reddi- 
 tur Rhodiis hbertas, adempta seepe aut fir- 
 mata, prout bellis externis meruerant, aut 
 domi seditione ddiquerant.' See also Suet. 
 Claud. 25, ' Rhodiis (libertatem) ob poeni- 
 tentiara veterum deUctorum reddidit.' It 
 was reduced to a Roman province under 
 Vespasian, Suet. Vesp. 8. The situation of 
 its chief town is praised by Strabo, 1. c. 
 — Tlie celebrated Colossus was at this time 
 broken and lying in ruins, ib. — Patara, in 
 Lycia (' caput gentis,' Liv. xxxvii. 15), a 
 large maritime town, a short distance E. 
 of the mouth of the Xanthus. It had a 
 temple and oracle of Apollo, Herod, i. 182. 
 ' Delias et Patareus Apollo,' Hor. iv. 4. 
 There are considerable ruins remaining. 
 Fellows, Asia Minor, p. 219 if. Lycia, p. 
 115 if. Winer, RWB. — Here they leave 
 their ship hired at Troas, or perhaps at 
 Neapolis (see note on xx. 16), and avail 
 themselves of a mercliant ship bound for 
 Tyre. 3. άναφανεντί?] for the constr., 
 
 see reff. and Winer, § 40. 1 : ' having been 
 shewn Cyprus,' literally. Wetst. cites from 
 Theophanes, p. 392, πιρκφίρουτο Ίν τψ 
 πίλάγίι, άναψανίντων δί αΰτωυ την yf]!', 
 ιΊδον αντυνς οι στpaτηyoί. ' The graphic 
 language of an eye-witness, and of one 
 familiar with the phraseology of seamen, 
 who, in their own language, appear to raise 
 the land in approaching it.' Smith, Voyage 
 and Shipwreck of St. Paul. But would not 
 this remark rather apply to the active par- 
 ticiple .' Comp, ' aerias Phseacumabscondi- 
 mus arces,' JEn. iii. 291. βΰώννμον] 
 sc. αντην, i.e. to the E. This would be 
 the straight course from Patara to Tyre, 
 ίίτλ. els Σ., — 'we held our course,' 
 steered, ' for Syria.' κατήχθ.] κατάγω 
 is the converse of ανάγω, — ' to put in,' 
 whereas άι^. is ' to put out.' Τυρον] 
 This city, so well known for its commercial 
 importance and pride, and so often men- 
 tioned in the O. T. prophets, was now a 
 free town (Jos. Antt. χ v. 41. Strabo, xvi. 2, 
 ονχ ΰπί) των βασιλΐωΐ' δ' ίκρίθησαν αυ- 
 τόνομοι μόνοι', άλλα και νπο των Ρω- 
 μαίων) of the province of Syria. 
 eKiiae] If this is an adv. of motion as 
 generally, the reference may be to the car- 
 rying and depositing the cargo in the town 
 (De Wette), or to the thitherward direction 
 of the voyage (Meyer) : but in the only 
 other place where ίκησε occurs (ref.) it
 
 3—6. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟχ\ΩΝ. 
 
 2Ί' 
 
 Ιεροσόλυμα. οτε δε eyiviro ^ ΐζαρτίσαι Ί]μΰς '' τας bconMr., Matt. 
 
 ήμερος, ε^ελc;oι'τες επορευομεσα, προττίμποντων ΐϊμας c = here'Ouiy. 
 
 / ν ν\ \ / π f/ h ''y - '\ Diod. Sic. 
 
 παΐ'των συι/ yvvaiL^i και τίκνοις ^ εως εςω τϊΐς πολεωο, xifia Jos. 
 
 , . ( ^ ' λ ^ k » Ν Ι / ΑηΚ. iii. 2.2. 
 
 και ' σεντες τα -γόνατα επι τοι» αιγιαλού ττροςηυξάμεθα, il.j'""'' 
 
 β ^' ' 'ΛΛ'Λ m'O ' ^ Λ" d"" Matt. 
 
 και ασττασαμίνοι αλΑι^Αους ανερημεν εις το πλοιον, χχνιϋ. so. 
 
 reff. fch.xr. 3al. g w. prepos., cb. χτϋ. 14. Luke xxiv. δΟ. Levit. xxiii. 14. h Luke xviii. 3:5 
 
 xiv. I'J. Neh.xiii.2U. 1 ch. τϋ. 6U reff. k Matt. xiii. 2 al. 1 absol., ch. xx. 3ti al. fr. m = here only. 
 
 36. 40. (18. 103 ThP.— rec ΐίρονσαλημ, with GH &c Chr al : t.xt ABCE 15. 18. 26. 36. 
 40. 68. 69. 103. 105. 180 al ν Thl-. — 5. rec ημάς (ζαρ. {alteration of order to avoid ημάς 
 τας ημίρας), with CGH al if: txt ABE 177 (al ?) : ore h tytvtTo iKtXUtiv ημάς ημέρας 
 εξηρησαι ιττ. 13: £e iyei'. om 68 : sequenti autern die {post hos autem dies Syr ar-erp) 
 ambulajmis viam nostram d Syr ar-erp. — ίξίλθ. om A 105. — προπί/^π. it 180: -θεντας 
 I'Jl. — γνΐ'αιξιν CE : txt A. — for ττοοςηνΕαμεθα και ασττασαμίνοι αλλ., — προςευ^αμίνοι 
 απησττασημίθα {απεσπασαμίθα C, ησπασ. al, αττησπασαμενοι 40, απησπασμεθα Α 
 al) αλλ. και ABCE 13. 15. 18. 40. 01). 73. 105. 133 Syr ar-erp al .' {corrn prob arising 
 from αποσπααθεντας of ver 1. αττησπασμεθα, as in A, was written in themarg, thence 
 adopted In the text, and confiised with the origl ασπασαμενοι, thus causing the corrn 
 of ττροςηνζαμεθα also, and the addn of και ; so Meyer and De W.) : t.xt GH {-ροςενξ,. 
 G 4. 100. 100 Chr Oec) &c Chr Thl Oec. — 6. rec επεβημεν {corrn to more usual word, 
 as also ενεβ.), with GH &c Thl' Oec: ενεβ. BE 73 Chr: txt AC 133. 137. 180 
 
 simply — εκεί, so that perhaps no tnotion 
 is included. άποψορ. τ.] The pres. 
 
 part, indicates the intention, as ίιαττερων 
 before. 4. δε] Implying, ' the crew 
 
 indeed were busied with unlading the ship : 
 but we, having sought out (by enquiry) 
 
 the disciples.' ' Finding disciples' 
 
 (E. V.) is quite wrong. It is not impro- 
 bable that Paul may have preached at Tyre 
 before, when he visited Syria and Cilicia 
 (Gal. i. 21) after his conversion, — and again 
 when he confirmed the churches (ch. xv. 
 41) : Tovs μαθ. seems to imply this. 
 ήμ. ΙτΓτ.] The time taken in un- 
 lading : — they apparently proceeded in the 
 same ship, see ver. 6. — The notice here is 
 very important, that these Tyrian disciples 
 said to Paul by the Spirit, that he should 
 not go to Jerusalem, — and get he went 
 thither, and, as he himself declares, δεδε- 
 μίνος Γψ πνίϋμαη, bound in Spirit by the 
 leading of God. We thus have an instance 
 of that which Paul asserts 1 Cor. xiv. 32, 
 that the spirits of the prophets are subject 
 to the prophets, i.e., that the revelation 
 made by the Holy Spirit to each man's 
 spirit was under the influence of that man's 
 will and temperament, moulded by and 
 taking the form of his own capacities and 
 resolves. So here : these Tyrian prophets 
 knew by the Spirit, which testified this in 
 every city (ch. xx. 23) that bonds and im- 
 prisonment awaited Paul. This apjicars to 
 have been announced by them, shaped and 
 intensified by their own intense love and 
 anxiety for him who was probably their 
 father in the faith (see ver. 5). But he 
 jiaid no regard to the prohibition, being 
 himself under a leading of the same Spirit 
 
 too plain for him to mistake it. See below 
 on ver. 10 if. 5. ίξορτίσαι] This 
 
 is ordinarily a naval word, signifying to fit 
 out or refit a ship (with or without ττλοΐυ)', 
 Passow). But this can hardly be the mean- 
 ing here. Meyer would render ' -u'hen we 
 had spent these days in refitting,' so that 
 Γ. ίιμ. would be the accusative of duration, 
 — ' %vhen tve had refitted during the days' 
 But not to mention that τας ίιμ., without 
 ταύτας, would be harsh in such a con- 
 nexion, — is not the aorist ϊξαρτισαι fatal to 
 the rendering ? Would it not in this case 
 he present, if implying the continued action 
 during the days, — perfect, if implying that 
 that action was over (in which latter case 
 ήμ. would be dative) .' The aorist, as 
 almost invariably in dependent clauses, 
 must refer to some one act occurring at one 
 time. So that if the meaning given by 
 Theoph., Oec. -πΧηρώσαι (Hesych. τεληώ- 
 σαι) be found no where else, it is almost 
 necessary so to understand the word here. 
 And it is doing no violence to its import : 
 the same verb which indicates the comple- 
 tion of a ship's readiness for a voyage, 
 might well be applied to the completion of 
 a period of time. Our own word 'fulfil' 
 has undergone a similar change of meaning 
 since its first composition : and πληυώσαι 
 is used both of manning a ship and of ful- 
 filling a period of time. έξίλθ.] from 
 the house where they were lodged. 
 £ως έξω τ. ττ.] "We passed tlirough the 
 city to the western shore of the ancient 
 island, now the peninsula, hoping to find 
 there a fitting spot for the tent, in the open 
 space between the houses and the sea." 
 Robinson, iii. 392. cttI τόν αίγιαλόν]
 
 218 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXI. 
 
 tKiivoi δε " υπόστρεφαν £ΐς 
 '' -^Αυνν '^ οιαννσαντίς απυ 
 
 7Γ/ 
 
 iirli. viii. 25 
 
 refr. 
 ο John xvi. 32. 
 
 six. 27. 
 
 Evth. V. in. 
 ρ oh xxvii. y, 
 
 1(1 only +. 
 q here only. 
 
 ΤΓολλί/ι/ 
 
 6όόν όιηνν- 
 
 σηΐ', Xcn. 
 
 Cyr. iv 2, 15. 
 
 2 Mace. xii. 
 
 )7. 
 r ch. xvi. 1 relT. 
 » ch. xviii. 22 
 
 reft'. t John i. 40. iv. Λ0. 
 
 iv. 5 only. xLnkexxii. 
 
 τα '/δ(α. ' Ημίΐς δε τον 
 
 ννσαντίς απυ Τύρου ^ κατηντησαμεν εις• 
 
 Πτολί|[ΐαίδα^ και * ασπασάμίνηι τους αόίΧφους ίμειναμεν 
 
 Ίΐμίραν μιαν ^ παρ αυτοις. ^' ttj δε ε'τταυριον ^ εξελθόντες 
 
 ηλΟομίν εις Καισάοίίαν, και ΗςίΧθοντες ίΐς τον οίκον 
 
 ABC 
 EGH 
 
 /ομεν 
 Φίλιππου του 
 ' εμειναμεν παρ 
 
 ΐλιστου, 
 9 
 
 η Ji)hn i. 20 rrfT. 
 y See ch. ii. 14 al 
 
 υυτος 
 τουτψ οε -ήσαν 
 
 ν ch. XT. 40 al. 
 
 των επτά. 
 
 »υ"νατερες 
 
 «• Eph. iv. II 
 
 παρ- 
 
 . 2 Tim. 
 
 ThF.— 7. 6ί om ΙΆΤ.—αννσανης (J8 : ίξελθοντίς lect 12.— κατιβη/ην ΑΕ 24. 38 al 
 (corrn to more usual word) : ascendhmis tol : txt B(e sil)CGII al. — ίπίμ(ΐναμιν A d'. 
 — 8. δί om 1!)1. — rec aft. ίξίλθ. ins oi ττίρι τον παυλον {ίζιΧΘ. begins an ecclesiastical 
 portion), \\\ύ\ GH &c aeth ar-pol slav Thl' Oec (ot απόστολοι 47 leott KH. 14) : om ABCE 
 141. 15. 18. 27. 3G. 38. 40. 571. 66'. 68. 73. 95^. 98'. 103. 105. 180 d ν syrr ar-erp 
 copt arm Chr Thl'. — Mill (not rec) ηλθον (to suit 01 rrfpi τ. ττανλοί') with GH all 
 Thl' Oec : t.\t (ηλθ,ιμίν Β) all other MSS &c. — η\θ. to tigtXO. om lect 12.— rec τον οντος 
 (for precision), with some mss : txt ABCEGH 38. 42. 73. 80. 96. 133. 137- 142. 177- 
 180 all Bus Chr Thl Oec. — 9. θυγ. τεσσ. παρθ. AB 13 am demid : τταρΘ. θυγ. τεσσ. C 
 180: τεσσ. θυγ. παρθ. some vss {alterations of characteristic order): txt EGH all 
 
 " Yet had we looked a few rods further, we 
 should have found a very tolerable spot by 
 a threshing-floor, where we might have 
 pitched close upon the bank, and enjoyed, 
 in all its luxury, the cool sea breeze, and 
 the dashing of the surge upon the rocky 
 shore." id. ibid. 7. τον ιτλοί/ν δια- 
 
 νΰσ-.] ' Having ended our voyage,' viz. 
 the whole voyage, from Neapolis to Syria. 
 The E. v., ' %vhen we had finislied our 
 course from Tyre' is allowable, but this 
 would more probably have been τον άπό 
 Τύρου. ' With their landing at Ptolemais 
 their voyage ended : the rest of the journey 
 was made by land.' (De Wette.) άπό 
 Ύΰρου will thus be taken with κατΐ]ντγ\ηα- 
 μεν. ΠτολβμαΐΒα] Anciently Accho 
 
 {'Ακχώ, LXX, Judg. i. 31, — in Gr. and 
 Rom. writers Άκη, Ace), called Ptolemais 
 from (probably) Ptolemy Lathurus (Jos. 
 Antt. xiii. 12. 2 ff., see 1 Mace. s. 56 ff. ; 
 xi. 22. 24; xii. 45. 48. 2 Mace. xiii. 14). 
 It was a large town with a harbour (Jos. 
 Antt. xviii. (J. 3). It was never (Judg. i. 
 31) fully possessed by the Jews, but be- 
 longed to the Phoenicians, who in after 
 times were mixed with Greeks. But after 
 the captivity a colony of Jews is found 
 there (Jos. B. J. ii. 18. 5). The emperor 
 Claudius gave it the ' civitas,' whence it is 
 called by Pliny, v. 17; xxxvi. 65, ' Colonia 
 Claudii Cisesaris.' It is now called St. Jean 
 d'Acre, and is the best harbour on the 
 Syrian coast, though small. It lies at the 
 end of the great road from Damascus to the 
 sea. Population now about 10,000. — The 
 distance from Ptol. to Ciesarea is forty-four 
 miles. For Csesarea, see on ch. viii. 40. 
 8. Φιλ. τ. εϋαγγ ] It is possible 
 that he may have had this appellation from 
 
 his having been the first to travel about 
 preaching the gospel : see ch. viii. The 
 office of Evangelist, see Eph. iv. 1 1, 2 Tim. 
 iv. 5, seems to have answered very much to 
 our missionary : Theodoret, on the former 
 of these texts, says, ficfTiOi περύόντες 
 ίκήρυττον : and Euseb. H. E. iii. 37, tpyov 
 tTTtTtXovv tvayyiXtCTiov, τοΙς έτι ττόμπαν 
 άνηκήοις τον της ττίστιως λόγου κηρύττειν 
 τον χριστον ιριλοτιμουμενοι, και την των 
 θείων εΰαγγίλίων τταραζιΐήναι γραφήν. 
 The latter could hardly have been part of 
 their employment so early as this ; nor had 
 ιναγγίλιον in these times the peculiar mean- 
 ing of a narrative of tlie life of Christ, but 
 rather embraced the whole good tidings of 
 salvation by Him, as preached to the Jews 
 and Heathens. See Neander, Pfl. u. L., 
 pp. 258. 204. — Euseb., iii. 31, mistakes this 
 Philip for the Apostle : as did also (see 
 Valesius's note, Euseb. 1. c.) Clement of 
 Alexandria and Papias. ovtos ek t. 
 
 ΙΐΓτά] See ch. vi. 5, and note. Meyer and 
 Winer (§ 19. 1) well remark (see De Wette 
 also), that the participle without the article 
 implies that the reason why they abode with 
 him was that he was one of the seven : 
 ' ut qui esset,' &c. and in Eng. ' being (one) 
 of the seven.' The fact of Philip being 
 settled at Caesarea, and known as ό tiiay- 
 γελιστής, seems decisive against regarding 
 the occurrence of ch vi. 8 ff. as the establish- 
 ment of any permanent order in the church. 
 9.] This notice is inserted ap- 
 parently without any immediate reference 
 to the history, but to bring so remarkable a 
 circumstance to the knowledge of the read- 
 ers. The four daughters had the gift of 
 τΓροφητύα : see on ch. xi. 27• Eusebius 
 (see, however, his mistake above) gives
 
 7—13. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 219 
 
 Όπρο-θίνοι τίσσαρες ' προφητίυουσαι. ίπιμίνόντων δε ^^^'Ι'^^-^ί^ί 
 
 1) HTfii.. r / b -ν / J. "λ/)' ' ^ -" 'r >> ' b=ch. ii. 40 
 
 ABCD -ημίοας πλΐΐους, κατηΑυεν τις αττο της Ιονόαιας ai.fr. 
 
 KGH ./ '/ ,/• /-) 11 >'\n^ ^ <•- c = cli. Tiii. 5 
 
 προφήτης ovojuciri Λγαρος, /cat ελσωΐ' προς ιιμας ^^^^^^ 
 
 και αοας την "^ ^ων»)ν του Παύλου, δησας εαυτού τους eiun.'iu.i. 
 πονάς και τας ■γίΐοας ειπεν Ιαοε λε^ει το πνεύμα το R<^v.i. is. 
 
 Λ. ί = / Γ xy, (; only. 
 
 αγιον, τον ανόρα ου εστίν η Ciovr] αυτή ούτως όησουσιν εν fMitt.xvu.'iV. 
 Ιερουσαλήμ οι Ιουοαιοι και παραοωσουσιν εις "X^'pcrc sr,'^',"'/^'''• 
 έθνων. ^^ ως οέ ηκουσαμεν ταΰτα, ^ παοεκαΧοΰμεν ημείς oniy!"^ ' '""^^ 
 
 > • h ' ' i - ^ i ' Q ' ' ' ^ ' 'Τ hhereonlyt. 
 
 τε και οι εντόπιοι του μη αναραινειν αυτόν εις Ιερού- see pea. 
 σαΧημ. τότε απεκρΊθη ο Παΰλος Ύί ^ ποιείτε κλαίοντες «Luiiexxu β 
 
 ^ b η ' ' ^ ^' > \ \ ■> f j ch. xy. 2reff. 
 
 και συνυουπτοντες μου την καρόιαν ', ε-νω yao ου ^uovov 1 1 cor. xr. so 
 
 syr-marg Thl Oec. — 10. rec ίπιμ. Se ημοιν {addn for precision), with EG al sjr- 
 marg al Chr al : txt ABCH 4^. 13. Ιδ. 18. 36. 37. «G syr (vss .') Bas.— 11. avtX- 
 θων it D'. — rec ίί/σ. τε αντου {in some late mss αντου, probably from misun- 
 derstanding, supposing that it was Paul's hands and feet that he bound), with 
 GH &c Chr Thl Oec: txt ABODE 13. 15. 18. 25. 27. 3G. ββ^. 69. 73. 76. 80'. 81. 
 i)8-marg 10ό. 137• 180 lect 12 ν copt sah Bas Cyr-jer, also Orig {ίησ. ίαντυν χάρων 
 κ. irolwv) Aug Cassiod. — rec χίΐο- bef τΐοο. (corrn from Lnke xxiv. 39, 40 .' see 
 var read John xi. 14: so De IF. Meyer thinks ττοδ. κ. χ. arose from its being the 
 natural order of binding : bnt surely this would be more likely to be the origl order of 
 narrating, than to strike a copyist as necessary to be observed), vriVn A al copt sah al Chr 
 (oin -ας and τους) Oec and Orig (above) : txt BCDEGH 1. 13. 20. 38. 40. 42. 57. 68. 
 73. 78. 80. 95. 96. 98. 100. 101. 105. 113 all lect 5 ν syrr ar-pol arm slav-ms Bas Cyr-jer 
 Thl.— rnff to ayiov oni 15. 36. 180 al.— f /ς itoova. Ό 26. 63. 97- 98. 106 Chr Epiph 
 and (prefixg ατζίΧθοντα) Orig {adopted by Tisch, but evidently a corrn to suit ας an. 
 below, ver 13) : ot iv tip. lovC. 66' : oi lovc. iv up. 100 demid arm-ed Ambr Vigil. — oi 
 om D' Chr Thl' Oec: Trapcic. αυτόν 180.— for t9v., έχθρων 69. 105.— 12. -£ oni D 
 Thl': 01 ivr. την πανλον D seth ; ημείς τε κ. οι εντ. ηηωτωμεν αντον 95'. — επφαιν. 
 D. — αντον om Ε 93. 95 Bas.— at end, add τότε C 13. 40. — 13. rec απεκρ. £ε, with C 
 (but see above) al syr Chr : αττ. τε GH 4. 25. 26. 38. 42. 57. 66. 95. 96. 97- 98. 126. 13.3. 
 177 al seth al Thl Oec : ειττεν οε ττρος• ημάς D {from the various assignment of τότε to 
 ver 12 or ver 13, it was omitted altogether, and then some copula became necessary) : 
 txt ABC^ (erasing δε: see on ver 12) Ε 13. 15. 18. 40. 73• 81 al ν Svr copt sah arm 
 Cassiod.— add και ειπεν aft τταν. AE 13. 25. 27. 29. 69. 81. 97. 105. 180 al ν Syr ar-erp 
 copt ffith arm Cassiod. — for συνθ., θορνβονντες D' Tert Jer. — for yap, δε E-gr 95' ν 
 
 from Polycrates traditional accounts of there is no reference to that former mention 
 
 them, — that two were buried at HierapoUs, of him, might be occasioned by different 
 
 and one at Ephesus. From that passage, sources of information having furnished the 
 
 and one cited from Clement of Alex. {6ύο two narratives. 11.] Similar symbo- 
 
 θνγατίρες αΰτον γεγηρακνίαι τταρθένοι, lical actions accompanying prophecy are 
 
 Polycr., Euseb. iii. 31 ΦίΧιττπος τάς found 1 Kings xxii. 11. Isa. xx. 2. Jer. 
 
 HvyaTipar άνδράσιν εζ'εύωκε, Clem., Eus. xiii. 1 ff. Ezek. iv. 1 ff. ; 8 ff. ; v. 1, &c. 
 
 iii. 30) it would appear that two were after- — De Wette remarks that τάδε λέγει το 
 
 wards married, according to tradition. — To πνεύμα το liyiov is the N. T. prophetic 
 
 find an argument for the so-called ' honour formula, instead of τάδε Xf'yti ό κι'φιος of 
 
 of virginity' in this verse, only shews to the O. T. 12. τοϋ μή] A similar 
 
 what resources those will stoop who have gen. after exhortation, is found ch. xv. 20. 
 
 failed to apprehend the whole S|)irit and rule 13.] The τότε, which has been 
 
 of the gospel in the matter. They are met changed in the rec. for the ordinary copula, 
 
 however on their own ground by an argu- gives solemnity to the answer about to bo 
 
 merit built on another misapprehension related : q. d. ' It was then that Paul 
 
 (that of Philip being a deacon in the eccle- said.' σ-υνθρυιττοντί?] The present 
 
 sia.-itical sense) : ώςτ£ ούΐ' και τψ κοιι/ω- part, does not im|)ly (lie endeavour merely, 
 
 Vfi<TavTi γάμων οιηκονεΊν ϊζιστι. here or any where else, but as Meyer quotes 
 
 10.] This Agabus in all probability is from Schaefer, Eurip. Phucn. 79, ' ^ ere 
 
 idenliad with the Ag. of ch. xi. 28. That incipit actus, sed ob impedimenta caret
 
 220 ΠΡΑ^ίΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. ΧΧΤ. 
 
 i-ch viii.4o. δεθηνοί άλλα και αποΟανίΐν 'tie Ίψουσαλημ "" ετομιως ABCI) 
 χϋ. 14. "^ ϊ ν (,) " ύτΓίο του "orouaroc του κυρίου Ιησου. ^ μη 
 
 η. 2Cor.xii.i4. "' jy,^ UTTfo Tou ojOuaTOi,• του κυοιου ιησου. μη 
 
 1 Pet. ίτ. .ί Λ. Ί ^ , % , rp - / 
 
 οηΐ^^ Dan. ο γτίίθυμά'ου δέ ουτου ^' ησυχ^ασαμίν ειττοΐ'τες Ιου /cupiou 
 χϊ. 26. Kom. ^ο ^ θελίϊχια ^ yιι>tσUω. Μετά έε τας ημέρας ταύτας 
 
 i. S. SJohii 'Γ 11/-»/ ''Γ 'Λ IRt 
 
 oaVsSlilhere ^ ίΤΓίσκίυασάμενοι αιφαιρομεν HQ ΐΕξ)θσολυμα' συν- 
 
 cy/.v.K"' ηλθοί' δε και των μαθητών απο Καισαρείας συν ημ'ιν, 
 Neh^V*?/*' " άγοντες ''' παρ' ω "^ ζενισθωμεν Μνάσωνί τινι Κυττρίω, 
 
 Q Matt vi. 1(). > / /!*■ 17ν ' ^^ γ " ν * * Τ 
 
 ?hereoniy. αο\αιω μαϋητη . ^' ' -γενομένων όε ημών ■'εις Ιεοο- ..«epo- 
 
 Seech. χν. iAti^ ' ,,>, .ν σολ. Γ) 
 
 36 xxiv. 24. .«here only Ι. 2 Chron. xxxiv. 10. tir. ησ„ >:λ„ί,αντη υποζν/ία, Xen. IMi.vn. 2.\H. ^BC 
 
 t = Lnke xxiii 5'i cli ix 39 al. u = ch. xvii. Ift al. ν atlr , here only? wcn.x.u,2u. Heb. r-rjH 
 
 xiii.2. S.r. xxix. 25. χ Matt. V. 21, &c. Lnke ix. 8, li). cii. XV. 7. 2 Pet. ii. 5 only. Ps. xlui. 1. -^"n- 
 
 y ch. XI. 16 refl. 
 
 (ms) Tcrti• — aft StOi/ifat, ins βονλομαι D : ου to ΐίρουσ. om lect 12 (insg αιτοθ. aft 
 ,,jffoi'). — (χω f(C ifp. A ffith : aft ίΐς ttp. add γινομίνος Orig : rort 180 : εις up. om 27• 
 29. (iO-. (ii). 105 Bas Thdrt, Cyr Aug. — 6roi;u. εχω aft ιησ. IST. — aja. χριστού CD 20. 
 73 Syr ar-er|) arm Cyr Thdrt Tert Jerj Ambrst Aug. — 14. ot (om D^) αποιτις προς 
 α\\ηληνς D. — rec το θίλ. του κυρ. {alteration of characteristic order), with DGH &c 
 vss Chr al : txt ABCE 13. 31. 180 ν arm : θ(ου D-gr 32. 73 aeth arr : add ημών sah.— 
 rec ytviσθω {corrn to more usual), with GH &c Chr al : t.xt ABCDE 42. 73. 98. 105 all. 
 — 15. τη'ΐις ημίραςΏ-ζΐ. — rec βποσ /cf ya(To/i£iOi,witli somenissThP (te.xt) : -παρασκινασ. 
 C 7. 69. 73. 105: αποταζαμίνοι D: (ττισκί^/αμίνοι Η 68. 106 {as Meyer observes, 
 ίττισκ. and απυσκ. being alike no where else found in N. T., MSS authority must pre- 
 vail. The rest are explanatory corrns) : praparati ν syrr ar-erp copt seth : pr<epa- 
 rantes e: referimus nos A: siynati fuimus ar-pol: txt ABEG 4. 15. 18. 25. 27. 29. 31. 
 36. 38. 40. 42. 57. 76. 78. 80. 95. 96. 97- 98• !)9• 100. 101. 103. 104. 12G al Pamphil 
 Chr (edd) Till' Thl- (comm) Oec. — αναβαινομιν CD.— rec ΐίρουσαλ?;/^, with GH al ν 
 Thl Oec : txt ABCDE 36. 69. 105 al Chr.— 16. σννηλθ. δε και (add εκ Ε ν) των μαθ. 
 om D. — for αγοί'τις {αγαγοί'τες 42. 57), ούτοι δε ηγαγον D : add ημάς DE sah arm: 
 secum ν (not demid). — for παρ ω, προς ους D'-gr. — aft ϊ,ενισθ. add Κίΐι -παρα-ζίνομενοι 
 εις τίνα {την syr-marg) κωμην εγενομεθα πάρα D syr-marg. — νασωνι D* d tol lat mss : 
 μανησωνι Thl' : ιασωνι ν (Sixt and ins) copt : μνααω 1. 18 : -σσω al. — μαθ. αρχ. D sah. 
 — d has the passage thus : et cum venerunt in qnendam civitaiem fuimus ad nasonem 
 quendam cyprium discipnlum antiquum el inde cxeuntes venimus hierosolyma suscepe- 
 runt autem nos cum latitia fratres — 17. rec είε^αντο {substitution of simpler word), 
 with GH &c al Chr (text) Thl Oec: txt ABCE 13. 15. 18. 25. 33. 34. 36. 40. 69. 73. 81. 
 
 eventu.' Ί°•?] Either, ^ your pro- journey. ' Carriff^res' in the E. V. is used, 
 ceediny is in vain, for . . . .' — or 'cease as at judg. xviii. 21 (where it answers to 
 to do so, for . . . .' eU 'lep•] ' on my το βάρος, LXX), for bayyage, — things car- 
 arrival at :' the motion to, which was the ried. 16.] Two renderings are given 
 subject in question, is combined with that to the latter clause of this verse : (1) 
 which might result on it : see reff. and ch. making Μνάσωνι, &c. depend on άyovτες, 
 ii. 39. 14. T. K. το θελ. γιν.] One of and agreeing by attr. with ψ, as E. V., 
 the passages from which we may not un- * and brought with them one Mnason, .... 
 fairly infer, that the Lord's prayer was used with whom we should lodge' (so Beza, 
 by the Christians of the apostolic age. See Calvin, Wolf, Schott, &c.) : and (2) re- 
 note on 2 Tim. iv. 18. 15. ίΤΓίσκίυα- solving the attraction into άγοντες παρά 
 σάμενοι] The remarkable variety of read- Μΐ'άσωνο, παρ' ψ ξ. ' bringing us to Mna- 
 ing in this word shews that much difficulty son,' <^c. (So Grot., Valcknaer, Bengel, De 
 has been found in it. The rec. ήττοσ/τίκα- Wette, Meyer, al.) Both are legitimate: 
 σάμενοι (which may perhaps have arisen and it is difficult to choose between them, 
 from the mixture of άποταΐ,άμενοι (D) with The probability of Mnason being a resident 
 επισκενάσηι^τες), would mean, not, 'having at Jerusalem, and of the Csesarean brethren 
 deposited our (useless) baggage,' — but, going to introduce tlie company to him, 
 ' having discharged our baggage,' ' un- seems to favour the latter : as also does the 
 packed the matters necessary for our fact that Luke much more frequently uses 
 journey to Jerusalem, from our coffers.' άγω with a person followed by a prepo- 
 But ίπισκ. is the better supported reading, sition than absolutely. — Of Mnason nothing 
 and suits the passage better : ' having further is known. άρχαίω probably 
 packed up,' made ourselves ready for the implies that he had been a disciple ίξ άρχ/;ς.
 
 ke 
 reff. 
 
 14— 2J. nPASET2 ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 221 
 
 σοΧυμα 'ασμένως " απί^ί^αντο νμας οί αδελφοί. ^^ τη zch.ii.4i 
 r\\b» ' c•' ' η ~\ ^ '-C ^'1/ η '' on'yt- 
 
 οε ετΓίουαί) ίΐς\1ίΐ ο ΙΙανΑος συν Ί]μιν προς Ιακωρον, sMacc iv. 
 
 Ό παν- ττάιτες τε ττορεγεί'οντο οί *" πρεσβύτεροι. ^^ και 'ασττασά- bch.'vil.'se"^' 
 
 ABCD μένος αυτούς ίί,η-γειτο καυ tv ίκαστον ων εποιησεν ο cw. πρόί, 
 
 σεος εν τοις ευνεσιν οια tjjc οιακονιας αυτού. -" οι οε «'^^ λ. iu.s. 
 
 α/νουσαντες εδοξαζον τον θεον, είττόν τε αύτω ' θεωοεΓς, dabsni^Ln 
 
 αοεΛφε, ποσυι μυριάδες ίισιν ιουδαίων των ττεττι- ch. ίχ. sa. 
 
 ' . ' e Seech, xi 
 
 στευκοτων, και πάντες ° ζ/ϊλωται του νότιου ^ ΰπάργουσιν' ^ ss'^ai' "''' 
 
 21 q 'Π S'V \ ^ ri I 1 ι ^S' gch.s.8. XV. 
 
 ^ κατηγηυησαν δε πεοι σου οτι αποστασιαν διδάσκεις ι-'. ΐ4. Late 
 
 ,^ / \ t \ \ t rr\ J xxiv. 35. 
 
 ατΓΟ Μωυσεως ^ τους κατά τα έθνη πάντας 'Ιουδαίους, ^"c'i'johlfi. 
 λέγων μη " περιτεμνειν αυτοίις τα. τέκνα μι?δε τοις ^ εθεσιν νΐί. i.s? ^' 
 
 reff. constr., here only. i ch. i. 17. Rom. xi. 13 al. kMattxv.31. Luke v. 2."), 26 al. ' I = John 
 
 iv. I'.i. xii. 19. ch. xxvii. 10. Hcb. vii. 4. m (ch. xix. JH reff.) = Luke xii. 1. η = ch. xv. 5 reff. 
 
 o = ch.xxii. 3. Gal. i. 14 al. (Exod. xx. 5 al.) ρ ch. ii. 30 reft'. q ch. xviii. 2.i reff. 
 
 r 2Thes.s. ii. 3 only. 2 Chron. xxix. 19. s constr, John xiv. 26. Piov. xxii. 21. t here only. 
 
 π Luke i. 59 al. Gen. xvii. 10. ν ch. vi. 14 reff.f 
 
 105. 180 Chr (comm).— 18. for Se, η AE-gr al syr ar-pol : txt B(e sil)CDGH m^ 
 (nrly) vss Chr Thl Oec. — avv ημ. om 32. — τταντ. om sah. — for Tt παρ., ήσαν St (St 90 
 also) παρ αντω D'. — aft oi πρ., add σνιηγμινοι D 34, coUecti sunt ν : add προς αυτόν 
 6ί). ΙΟδ. — 19. ους ασπαμινυς (sic) ύιη•/ίιτο tia ίκαστ. ως ιπ. ο θ. -οις D'-gr. — ασπα- 
 σaμtvoι 180. — 20. aκovovτtς GH. — tSu^aaav D ThP. — rec κνριον (variation as usual : 
 see ch s.x. 28), with DH al sah syr Oec: txt ABCEG 4. 13. 15. 18. 25. 3G. 40. 42. 57. 
 Gu. 68. 69. 73. 97. 105. 120. 133 all ν Syrar-erp copt arm slav ChrThl.— Μττοιτίς αντω 
 C all syr Chr, and omg αντω D: ίίπαΐ' Έ : και ιιπον 180: (ΐπιν 13. — for ιον£αιων, 
 d' τοις ιονίαιυις ABCE 13. 15. 33. 34. 36. 40. 69. 105. U,0 ν a;th copt Ambrst : tv 
 τη lovcata D Sj'r sah Jer Aug (both corrns to suit tv τοις t^vtaiv above, ver 19) : om 
 3. 4'. 95'. 97 : txt GH al (των lovS. 90. 142) syr al Chr Thdrtj Thl (but aft πιπιστ. 
 Thdrt2 Thl-) Oec. — παντ. ούτοι D: π. αντοι sah. — bef ζηλ., ins ζητονσι και 13. — 
 21. κατιιχ>ισαν 2δ. 40 : καΓτιΚ7}σαν Ό^ : diffamaverunt ά. — κότα ίθι^»; D' : tv τω κοσμώ 
 sah. — παντας om ΑΕ 13 ν copt Jer Aug (as unnecessary) : πάντα 78: txt BCD^ 
 (D' appy has ιισιν for παντας) EGH mss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec. — λίγων om D Jer. — μη 
 οψιλίΐν πίριτ. Ε ν Jer Aug. — μητί tv το•.ς ίθνίσιν (ίθν. also 1. 105) αντου (αντονς 
 
 and had accompanied our Lord during His Epistles .'), in which he had depreciated 
 ministry. See ch. xi. 15, where the word legal observances in comparison with faith 
 is applied to the Pentecostal effusion of the in Christ, and spoken strongly against their 
 Spirit. adoption by Gentile converts, — apprehended 
 17 — XXIII. 35.] P.\UL jVT Jerus.a.- that he advised on the part of the /fe/Ze^- 
 LEM : MADE PRISONER, AND SENT TO isHc believers, an entire apostasy from 
 C-ESAREA. 17. ot άδΐλψοί] The Moses and the ordinances of the law. 
 Christians generally : not the Apostles and θεωρίΐς] This can hardly be a re- 
 elders, as Kuin., who imagines, from vv. ference as (Olsh.) to the elders present, as 
 20, 21, that ' ccEtus non favebat Paulo.' representatives of the /ιυριάοίς of beUeving 
 But (1) this is by no means implied: and Jews; for only those of Jerusalem were 
 (2) James and the elders are not mentioned there : — but refers to Paul's own experi- 
 till ver. 18. 18. Ίάκωβον] James, ence, and knowledge of the vast numbers 
 'the brother of the Lord :' the president of the Jews who believed at Jerusalem, ami 
 of the church at Jerusalem : see ch. xii. 17 ; elsewhere in Judaea. ττόσαι μυριάδί? 
 XV. 13. Gal. ii. 12, and notes, — and Pro- is perhaps not to be strictly taken : see retl'. 
 legg. to the Epistle of James. 20.] Baur suspects, on account of this expression, 
 While they praised God for, and fully re- that the words των πεπιστ. are spurious; 
 cognized, the work wrought by him among but quite without reason. Eusebius (|Uotes 
 the Gentiles, they found it requisite to from llegesippus (H. E. ii. 23), παλλών 
 advise him respecting the suspicion under και των άρχόντ••ιν πιστινόντων ην Οόρν- 
 which belaboured among the believing Jews. βος των Ίονίαίων και -γραμματίων καΊ 
 They led, naturally jierhaps, but incorrectly Φαρισαίων λιγόντων, on Kii'Cvvtvfi πας 
 (see 1 Cor. vii. 18), by some passages of ϋ λαός Ίησονν τύν χριστον προς^οκί^ν. 
 Paul's life (and of his already -written On the other hand, Origin (torn. i. in Joanu.
 
 Esod. xix 
 10. 
 gconsir 
 
 222 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXI. 
 
 w constr, Gal. " πίΟίποτίΓν. ^^ " τί ovv taTiv ', ^ ττάντως Bel ^ avveXOtiiu abcd 
 
 V. It). 2 Ciir. \'-i\ "> r \ ti 'Λ ' \ Ο '2'\ " ■» KG Η 
 
 ?»g'8'Mi. '' ττληϋος, ακουσυΐ'ται yap οτι εΑηλυϋας. "^^ τούτο ovv 
 ^\^.%c'' TToujaoi' ο σοι λί-γομίν. εισίν ημιν άνδρες τίσσυρίς 
 
 ych. χνϋί. 21 ι, ι \ ι, >/ -.it - 04. d ' e \ Ο ^ 
 
 reti. " fUY7iv EYOVTEC ίφ εουτων' τούτους τταραΛαρωί' 
 
 ζ — ch. ί. β. 11. Λ, ' Λ, f _^ ^ , 5 - ,/ 
 
 aa'iisoi.ch. 'oyiu'aGijrc συ»' αυτούς, και ^ οαπανησον ετγ' αυτοις ίΐ'α 
 bch.iviii.'is '' Ευοήσωνται τιιν κίώαΧην, και -γνωσονται τταντίς οτι ' ών 
 
 (reft.) only. ^ , ^ - . ,^/ , ' \ \ > m - \ 
 
 dΓh^^ί!'2ϋ''^■ ^ κατηχηντηι πίξ)ΐ σον ουδέν εστπ', άλλα '" OTOiyjiig " και 
 
 leff * η ' ^' ο , Λ ' ^ ' 25 ^ ί•^ ~ Ρ 
 
 ech. χνί. 33 αυΓος φυλασσωΐ' τον νομον. περί οε των "^ ττεττι- 
 
 '^ΙοϊΐιΛΐηδ.*'' σΓευ/νοτωΐ' WviOv ίμΐίΐς '^ επίστίίΧαμίν, ^ κρΊναντες μη^εν 
 τοιούτον ^ τηρειν αυτούς, ει μη φυλάσσεσθαι αυτονς το 
 here .^Ε " εΐδωλοΟυτοί' fcut ΤΟ οίμο και ^ ττνικτον και " ττορ- 
 
 only. W. *■ ' S 
 
 ύιτΐρ, 2 Cor. χϋ. 15. W. f ν, James iv. 3-t. 1 Mace. xiv. 32. h 1 Cor. xi. 5, β only. i attr., Lnke ix. 3B al. 
 
 kver.21. | = di. xxv. 11. ni ellips., here only, στ., Rom. iv. 12. GhI. v. 25. vi. |β. Phil. iii. 10 
 
 olilv- (Eocles.xi. β.) η ch. χτ. 27. Malt, xxvii. 57. ο =» ch. xti. 4. Eceks. xii. 13. ρ = ch. xv. 5 al. 
 
 q ch XV 2U reff. r = ch. xx. IB relV. s = ch. xv. 5 al. t constr. vv. ace, 2 Tim. iv. 15. 
 
 u ch.' XV.' 2!» reff. ν ch. xv. 20 left. 
 
 D-) TTfpiTT. D'. — 22. for πάντως , . . γαρ, — τταντως ακουσονται BC 15. 3G. 73. 
 137. 180 copt sail syr arm (omg τταιτως) aeth (omg ri ovv fr.) al : ulique d e: 
 txt AC^DEGH al ν al Chr Thl Oec— ro ■πΧηθ. D^.— rec πλ. συΐίλθ., with DGH 
 al : t.xt AC^E 13. 105. 133 al ν {prob the variations have been occasioned by Bti 
 συν. 7Γλ))θ. not being understood, and so having been expunged, as above). — yon om 
 C-' 73. 137 (see above) : συνιλθ. om 34. — ίληλυθίς Β. — 23. οπιρ Ε. — εν ημιν (ιδ. 95'. 
 !)8. 103. 104. 105i3ethThP: συν »?μ. 25.— 24. tn αυτονς Α 13 al: εις {προς Thdrt) 
 αυτούς Ό : συν αυτοις 137: txt B(e sil)CEGH most mss Chr Thl Oec— ξυρτ/ίτο^Γαί 
 Ό-(-(τωνται D')E: ξυρίίτωιται GH Thl-. — τας κίψαλας all vss. — rec γτωιτι (gram- 
 matical corrn aft ,va), with GH &c (vss) Chr Thl' : txt ABCDE 13. 15. 25. 31. 34. 40. 
 C8. G9. 73. 142. 180 ν arr oopt sah Jer Aug: -σωνται 3fi. 105. 106. 133 Thl'. — for 
 ων, πιρι ων C 30. 40. β9. 105. 180. — aft ear. add αληθις 40. — a\. και πτοιχ. A: αλλ 
 ort ποριυον D'-gr : omg και aft. — rec r. νομ. φν\., with GH &c vss Thl' Oec: txt 
 ABCDE 13. 137. 180 vail Chr ThP.— 25. for tOv., ανθρώπων Ε Bed-gr: add ovStv 
 ιχουσι XiydV προς af,and τψίΐς γαρ Dsah. — απ£σΓ£ΐλ. BD-gr al copt syr ar-pol (s2«6s//- 
 tution of more usual word) : txt ACEGH mss (nrly) vss Chr Thl Oec. — κριινοντις D. 
 — μηί'ίν . . . . ti μη om AB 13. 40. 81 al V Syr ar-erp copt sah seth al {prob because 
 no such clau;:e isfotrnd in the apostolic decree ch. xv. 28. It can hardly have been inter- 
 polated) : ins CDEGH al Syr al Chr Bed-gr Aug. — τοιούτο CE al. — αυτούς om 40. (JG^. 
 C9. 105 al : ri om 137• — '"" bef αίμα om ABCD 13. 180 {corrn, to conforyn the e.vpr to 
 ch XV. 29) : otto ιΙωΧο^ντων και αιματης και πνικτου και πορνιης Ε : txt GH tkc Chr 
 Xhl. — και πνικτ. om D sah Jer Aug: και om 15.30: και to 31. 40. 99 Chr ThR — 
 
 § 2) says, that probably the whole number zarites. This vow must not be confounded, 
 
 of believing Jews at no time had amounted historically or analogically, with that of ch. 
 
 to 144 000. On tialv . . . ΰπάρχονσι, see xviii. 18 : see note there,' and Num. vi. 
 
 note, ch.xvi. 20, 21. 21. κατηχήθη- 24. ιταραλαβών] ' having taken to 
 
 σαν] 'they were sedulously informed' thyself,' as comrades. άγν. συν αΰτ.] 
 
 (at some time in the mind of the speaker, 'become a Nazarite with them.' The 
 
 "The sense of the aor. must be preserved, same expression occurs in the LXX, Num. 
 
 Below, ver. 24, it is the perfect) : viz., vi. 3, in describing the Nazarite's duties. 
 
 by the anti-Pauline judaizers. τοις δα-ττάν. έττ* ανιτ.] " More apud Ju- 
 
 ίθίσιν] The dat. of the rule, or form, after dseos receptum erat, et pro insigni pietatis 
 
 irbirh : see reff. 22. ττάντως δ. officio habebatur, ut in i)auperum Na.'iirseo- 
 
 σννελθ. Ίτλ.] Not. as E. Λ^, Calv., Grot., rum gratiam ditiores sumptus erogarent ad 
 
 Calov., ' the multitude must needs come sacriticia (see Num. vi. 14 ff.) quse dum illi 
 
 together,' i. e. there must be a meeting of tonderentur, offerre necesse erat." Kypke. 
 
 the whole church {τϋ πλήθος, ch. ii. (i) : Jos. Antt. xix. G. 1, relating Agrippa's 
 
 but ' a multitude (of these Judaizers) will thank-offerings at Jerusalem, says. <"ιό και 
 
 certainly come together :' ' they trill meet Ναζιραίων 'ξιψασθαι cieTaKt μάλα σν- 
 
 and discuss your proceeding in a hostile γνοίις. — On the shaving the head, see Num. 
 
 manner.' 23. «ΰχήν] A vow of Na- vi. 18. — DeWette remarks: 'James and the
 
 22—28. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 223 
 
 νείαν. " τυτε ο Παΰλος '^ τταραΧαβώΐ' τους αν^οας τΐ} w = ch. xvi. 
 ^ εγ^ομεντι ήμερα συν αυτοις ^ α-γνισθεις ^ εις^ει εις το ^^j'^^,'" "'-... 
 ιερόν, "" όια-γ-γεΧλωΐ' ττιν έκ7Γ\ηξ)ωσιν των Ίΐμερων του ismliyf^' 
 
 C f " rf •?(! //ifXe•^'' ^ Mace. xii. 
 
 α-γνισμου, εως ου πρηςηνεγυη υπέρ ενός έκαστου f- 
 αυτών η ιτροςφορά. ^^ ώς δε ^ εμελλυν αΐ ετττά ημεραι η L«kJ^x. 6*,i. 
 
 h \ " a ti\ -1., w»_ „ , Kom ix. 17 
 
 σιιΐ'τεΛ£ΐσι/αι, οι απο της Άσιας ιουοαιοι πεασαμενοι ?"iy Exod. 
 
 αυτόν εν τω ιερω ^ συνεγεον πάντα τον οχλοί', /cot "'s'^MVcc.'viV 
 
 επεραλυν επ αυτόν τας -νειοας, κηαί,οΐ'τες Αΐ'οοίς <= '"^^«oniy 
 
 Ισραηλιται, βοηΟεηε. ουτός εστίν ό άνθρωπος ό κατά '',"!?. χι' 
 
 . vi. 5. 
 
 του Ααου και του νο^ου και του "τόπου τούτου " παντας r•^"• Levit 
 ° παντα\Ύ] όιόασκων, 
 
 cli. νϋ. 42 
 eft'. Lev 
 .2.3al. 
 
 'Χ^ 
 
 ETC τε Kot 'Ελληνας ^ ειςηγαγεν '"rlJhf"'"'^ 
 
 ' > ^ Λ π ' ^ ΙΓ " m ' - f=ch. xxir. 
 
 εις το ιερόν και ' κεκοινωκεν τον ayiov τόπον τούτον. ΐ7. Heh. χ. 
 
 ' ' 18. I's. 
 
 xxxix.f). g =• Luke vii. 2. John iv.47. ch.xxvii. 33. h = Luke iv. 2, 13. Job i. 5. i ch. ii. 
 
 6reff. k cli. xii. 1 reft'. I ch. xvi. S) refl'. m Malt. xiv. 15. ch. vi. 13. Ps. Ixvii. 5. 
 
 η -χοΓ', ch.xvii. SOrefl. -χΓι. hereonly. ο Seech, ii. 26. Lukexiv. 20. ρ =. ch. is. 8. Lukexxii. 54. 
 
 q Matt. XT. ll,8ic.l|. Heb. ix. 13 f. 
 
 26. τταρηλ. πηυλ. 133: ο om DE. — for εχομ. {(ρχ. 31 al). — επιονση D: om 17 lectt 
 — αςηΧθίν D. — for £ως• ov, οττως D {donee d). — η om D. — 27. σνντιΧονμίνιις de της 
 ίβοομης ημιρας D : cum advenisset dies Septimus Syr ar-erp. — ημελλον EG 38. 113 lect 
 12. — επτά ii μι ρας 40. — συι/χίλίσθεισαι 4. 5G : τελειυνσθαι \'ΛΤ Chr-ms : σνμπληρυνσθαι 
 36. 40. — οι . . . ιονδ. is aft ιεηω in C 180: aft θεασ. αυτ. in 137 •" ο< δε α. τ. ασ. ιουδ. 
 εληλνθοΓίς D. — σννεχεαν C 180: σννεσχον 20. 41 : συιεκίΐνησαν τεΈ.— πάντα cm Ε 
 2. 41. — επέβαλαν Α, f 7Γΐ/3«λλοΐ'σίΐ' D, επεβα\\ον al ThP. — rec της χει. επ. αντ. 
 {corrn of arrain/ement), with GH &c copt sah al Thl' Oec : t.\t ABCDE 13. 38. 40. 69. 
 97. 104. 105. 113. LS7 al lectt 5. 12 vsyrr arm ChrThP.— 28. ιστραηΧειταιΌΈ. (-Xerai). 
 — βοηθησιιται Ε. — τοπ. του ayinv τούτου AC^ 73 lectt 13. 14. — rec πανταχού {altera- 
 tion to more Kstcal ivord), with GH &c Chr Thl Oec : txt ABCDE all. — for ετι, ει 13. — 
 Tt om D al {ίε al copt). — tiQijyiv D' 95^ — om το D^ — τοντο το ιερ. sah. — κεκοινω- 
 κηκεν Β-Ε 14'. 15'. 36. 64. 95'. 105. 137 : εκοινωνησεν D' : εκοινωσεν D^. — 
 
 elders made this proposal, assuming that 
 Paul could comply with it saha conscientiA, 
 — perhaps also as a proof, to assure them- 
 selves and others of his sentiments : and 
 Paul accepted it salvd conscientid. But 
 this he could only have done on one condi- 
 tion, that he was sure by it not to contribute 
 in these four Nazarites to the error oi justi- 
 fication by the works of the law. He might 
 keep, and encourage the keeping of the law, 
 — but not with the purpose of thereby de- 
 serving the approbation of God.' 
 25.] See ch. xv. 28, 29. 26.] Paul 
 
 himself entered into the vow with them 
 (<ri;v αΰτοϊς ά,γν.), and the time settled 
 (perhaps the least that could be assigned : 
 the Mischna retjuires thirty days) for the 
 completion of the vow, i. e. the offering and 
 shaving of their heads, was seven days. No 
 definite time is jirescribed in Num. vi., but 
 there, seven days is the time of purification 
 in case of unc leanness during t fie period of 
 the vow. διαγγβ'λλων] ' making 
 
 known' to the ministci-s of the tciiiplc. 
 την ΙκΊτλήρωσιν] ' the fulfilment,' 
 i. e. that he and the men hud come Id fulfil ; 
 'announcing their intention of fulfijling.' 
 
 £MS ου ιτροςηνΕχθη] ' donee offer- 
 retur,^ ^uig. The aor. indie, is unusual in 
 an indirect construction, where the aor. subj. 
 is almost always found (ch. xxiii. 12. 21 ; 
 XXV. 21). But we have Plat. Gorg. p. 506, 
 ■))δίωζ . . . αν . . . δΐίλεγόμην, ϊω% αϋτψ την 
 την Άμφίοΐ'ος άιτεδωκα ρήηιν, — andCratyl. 
 396, οΰκ άν ίπαυόμι\ν διεζιών .... εως 
 άπεπειράθην της σοφίας ταυτησ'ι τί ποι- 
 ήσει. (De W.) ή ττροςφορά] See 
 Num. vi. 13—17. 27. αΐ Ιτγτ. ήμ..] 
 Of the votive period : not (as Chrys. and 
 Bede) since Paul's arrival in Jerusalem. 
 Five days of the seven had passed : see on 
 ch. xxiv. 11. airb τ. Άσ.] From 
 Ephesus and the neighbourhood, where 
 Paul had so long taught. ' Paulus, dura 
 fidelibus placandis intentus est (viz. the be- 
 lieving Jews), in hostium furorem incurrit 
 (viz. of the unbelieving Asiatic Jews).' Calv., 
 in Meyer, who adds, ' In how many ways 
 had those who were at Jerusalem this Pen- 
 tecost, already persecuted Paul in Asia?' — 
 Notice the similarity of tlio charge against 
 him to that against Stephen, ch. vi. 13. 
 
 28. "Κλληνα?] The generic plural : 
 onl;/ one is meant, see next ver. They
 
 224 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXI. 
 
 ' 7chT 2ft.'f ■ '^ νσαν yap "^ πρυίωρακυτες Ύρόώιμον τυν Έώε'σιοί' ev τη abcd 
 
 s-chxxiv.5. , / ' , -^ Λ . / y ?, ' ν . ^ ρ . , EGU 
 
 sTialc'^iii' 8 "ΌΛει συν αυτω, υν ενομιΐ,υν οτι εις• το ΐίουν ίΐςϊ/γογεί' 
 nMHU.xh-.si; ό Παϋλοί:. ^^ ^ ίκινηθη τε ύ] πόλις• ολη, και eyiviTO 
 
 Luke xxiii. ^ » ν „^- 'υ•Λθ' "ΤΊ'Λ 
 
 2ti. aufopoui? του λαον, και επιΛαρομενοι του ΙΙαυΛου 
 
 vJHines 11. ο i ~ ' » „ . _ \ , 
 
 ch'^xTi^H). ^ είλκου αυτόν * έζω του «εροϋ, και ευθίως εκΧε'ισθησαν 
 
 λν ver. ft. 'η' ^IxV' 5v> - v''/D 
 
 x-Lukevi. aj (/υοοι. ζητουί^τω»/ τε ουτον αττοκτεινοι, ^ ανερλ; •••'" 
 
 1!Ι. Exod. > _, ^ _(,„„> , θιιραί C 
 
 ysee^ch.x.4. ^ ψάσις TW " χιλια^)χα• τ^ς σπειρΐ}ς οτι ολη '^ συγκεχυτοι αβ» 
 
 zhereonlyt. «τ \ ' . 32 "^ <1 ' ίί - e Λ /Ο ^ ' ii-tiU 
 
 a -^Joiiii xviu. Ιίρουσαλημ ος εςαυτίίς πάρα Ααρών στρατιωτας 
 
 12. VT.33, Ι ' .. 
 
 17 Χι•• ' ' ' - • 
 
 37, & 
 
 ί^ραιίίν ίττ' αυτούς. οι δε ιδοι 
 
 b di.'x. ί reff. 'fat εκατονταρχας κατεοραμετ' εττ αυτούς. οι όε ιύοντίς 
 
 C ver. 27. \•ν/ Νν 'Ε*' ' 
 
 dch. χ. 33«ι. τοι^ γιλιαογον και τους στρατιωτας επαυσαντο τυ- 
 
 Markvi.2r). Λ, '[ '^ ^ ^"i ' h • ' ' Λ ' 
 
 ech'xvi'si" ΤΓΤοντες τον Παυλον. τότε ε-γ-γισας ο •χιλιορχος 
 
 fhereoniy. ' εττελάβετο avTov και εκελευσεν οεθί)ναι αΧυσεσιν ουσιν, 
 
 SKinRsxix. ^ . /)/ , Λ ,/ \ , > / 
 
 ^nab νίϊ 1. '^"' επυνσοι^ετο τις• αν ειη και τι εστίν ττεπυιηκως. 
 gcon.>itr.,ch.T. "^ άλλοι οε άλλο τι ετηφωνουν εν τω οχλω μη 
 '"χνπί 41^^' ^^ναμενου δε αύτοϋ γνωΐΌΐ το ° ασφαλές οια τον ^' Θορυ- 
 
 Gfn'xxvii.2e. βον, εκεΧευσεν άγεσθοι αυτόν εις την '' παοεμβολτ)!'. 
 
 ich.xvii lilreH. ο. „ ^y , t . \ ■>■ r ' /3 Λ ^ s Ό Ο 
 
 *" xiTia' "''' "'"^ ^^ εγενετο εττι τους αναραυμους, συνερη ρα- 
 
 ' ΐχνί'ί'ί.^ζο. στά^εσθαι αυτόν ύττό των στρατιο»τ(ϋν Sia ttjv ριαν του 
 
 Eph.vi.20a!. 
 m ch. xix 32 reff. η Lukexxiii. 21. ch. xii. 22. xsii. 24+. 2 Mace. i. 23. ο = cli. xxii. 30. 
 
 XXV. 26. Xen. Mem. iv. 6.15. ρ = Matt, xxvii. £4. cli. xx. 1 al. q ch. xxii 24, &i-. Hrb. 
 
 xiii. 11, 13. (xi 34.) Isa xxi. 8. r ver. 40 only. 3 Kings x. li', 20. simpers, and coustr., 
 
 here only. 2 Mace. iii. 2. 
 
 29. ιωρακοτις (sop. GH) GH all ν (not tol) sail setli slav Chr Thl' Oec (ed) {corrn io 
 more simple word): txt ABCDE al copt syrr al ThP. — συν αυτ. εν τ. ττολ. 96. — 
 ίνομισαμ^νΏ-^ν : putaverunt Α. — ο om D. — 30. τον ■πανΧονΈι.— ειΚκον ι^ωΐ). — 31. rec 
 ζητ. δε {alteration of characteristic re), with Ό'^{και ζητ. D')GH &c vss tf : txt ABE 
 al Syr seth al. — σπείρας 38. 93. 95. — for σνγκεχυται, σν^χυν(ται Β 13 : συνχνννεται 
 AD: txt Έ.{σννκεχ.)ΰΙΙ mss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec.-32^ αντων 133.— λα^βωι^ Β d 
 {stimjjtis') [corrn to more simple word) : txt ADEGH mss (a])py) ν (adsumtis) al ff. 
 • — rec (κατοΐ'ταρχονς, with GH &c Chr Thl Oec : txt ABD'E al : εκατοντ. και 
 στρατηγούς ττολλους Syr ar-erp sah : στρ. κ. εκατονταρχην 137- — 33. εγγ. it 
 GH all Syr slav Thl Oec: εγγ. ovv 45: εγγ. 43: τότε εγγ. δε 57: txt ABDE al vss 
 Chr ThP. — δεθ. αυτόν 78 sah. — bef ειη om av ABD 180 (as unnecessary): ins 
 EGH mss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec.^34. for aWo τι, aWa D syr Chr. — rec for επεφ., 
 φοων {corrn to simpler nwrd), with GH &c Chr Thl" Oec : ε-πεβ. 25. 31. 40 Chr-ms : 
 txt ABDE 13. 15. 18. 36. 69. 73. 97. 105. 133. 137. 180 ThP: add Trept αντου arm.— 
 rec μη δυνάμενος δε (omg αντ.) {emendation of style), with GH &c Chr al : txt ABD 
 
 meant, into the inner court, which was for- or because he was locally stationed in the 
 
 bidden to Gentiles. 29. Τρόφ.] See tower Antonia, overlooking (from the N.W.) 
 
 ch. XX. 4, note. We here learn that he was the temple, where the riot was. τω 
 
 an Ephesian. 30.] The Levites shut χιλιάρχω τ. σιτ.] Claudius Lysias (ch. 
 
 the doors to prevent profanation by a riot, xxiii. 26), the tribune of the cohort (whose 
 
 and possibly bloodshed, in the temple: proper complement was 1000 men), 
 
 hardly, as Bengel, ' ne templi tutela ute- 33. άλνσ. δυσίν] See ch. xii. 0. He would 
 
 retur Paulus :' — the right of asylum was thus be in the custody of two soldiers. 
 only (Exod. xxi. 13, 14) for murder un- ri% αν ίΐη, 'who he might be' 
 
 awares (Meyer). But by ver. 14 there, and (subjective possibility) : and τί εστίν ιτίττ., 
 
 by Joab's fleeing to the altar, I Kings ii. 'what he had done' (assuming that he must 
 
 28 ff, we see that it was resorted to on h&\e aone something). 34. τΓαρίμ,β.] 
 
 other occasions. 31. ζητου'ντων, κ-.τ.λ.] The camp or barracks attached to the tower 
 
 ^j beating him : see ver. 3-2. άνεβη] Antonia ; — or perhaps 'into the tower' 
 
 'went (was carried) up;' ?/;;, either because itself: but the other is the more usual 
 
 of his high station, as commanding officer, meaning of παρεμβ. 35. άναβαθρ..]
 
 29—39. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 225 
 
 υνλυυ* ηκοΧουθίί yap το πλήθος του λαοϋ KpatovTtc ^''^"^^^^'^ 
 Αί|θε αυτόν. ' μίλλων τε ίΐςα^ισθαι ίΐς την '' ποί 
 
 ων τε Είςαγεσσαι εις την ' παρεμ- 
 βοΧην ο Παύλος λεγεί τω χιλιάρχω " Εί εξεστύ' μοι 
 ειπείν η προς σε ; ο δε εφη "" 'Έ,λληνιστι γινώσκεις ; 
 ουκ αξ)α συ εϊ ο Αιγυττηος ο προ τούτων των ήμερων 
 " αναστατωσας και εί;αγαγωΐ' εις την ερημον τους τετρα- 
 κισγ^ιλίους άνδρας των " σικαρίων ; ^^ ειττεν δε ό Παΰλος 
 Εγώ ^ άνθρωπος μεν ειμί Ιουδαίος Ταρσευς, της Κιλικίας 
 ουκ ''άσημου πόλεως πολίτης, Βεομαι δε σου " έπ'ιτρεφόν 
 
 y ch. χνί. 37 rcff. ζ here only {. (Job xlii. 11.) a w. aor., I.ulte is. f.l. Matt. six. 8. 
 
 {και μη S. αυτ.) Ε 13 (al ?) sah ThP. — 35. δε om 13.— ας τ. αναβ. D. — τον πανλον 
 βαστ. νπο D. — των om 13. — for οχλ., \αον D. — 36. τον Χαου om D. — rec κραζον 
 (grammaiical emendation), with DGH al Chr Oec : txt ABE-gr 13. 15. \8. 'όΰ 37 40 
 Go. 68. m. 73. 7G. 80. 90. 105. 133. 180 Syr copt sah slav Thl.— αι/αψεισ^ήι D-gr i 
 iollile A : add t/c μισόν των έχθρων ημών sah : αυτόν om ί)6 : add αττο των ζώντων 137. 
 —37. δε 38. ϋ3. 133. 137 sah: εις τ. π. ειςαγ. 38. 113. 137.-0 ττ. om Ό.— τω 
 χειλιαρχ. αποκριθης £17Γ£)' D : ειττ. also 180. — rec ιιπιιν η {emendation), with ABE 
 &c ν (not tol al) copt al Chr Thl- : om η ϋ(λαλί;σηι)ΟΗ 4. 14. 25. 26. 34 38 4'' 57 
 78. 80. 95. 96. 97. 98. 100. 101. 104 Syr seth arm ThP Oec-ed.— ελληνιστή G 113.— 
 38. for ovic opa {άρα G al, άρα Η al), ου D : ουκ αν sah. — εγνιττιος Ό.~ ιί,αναστωσας 
 
 U Lake xiii. 
 
 23 ch. i. fi. 
 
 3 Kings XX. 
 
 •21). 
 V Johu xix. 2(1 
 
 only. '!„„- 
 
 (5ulσ^^■, Nch. 
 
 xiii. 24. 
 
 fi'u'et 'Ελ- 
 
 ^ηνιστί, 
 
 Xcn. An. vii. 
 
 f). 8. Grffice 
 
 ycire, Cic. tie 
 
 Pin. U.S. 
 w ch. xvii. (S 
 
 reff. 
 X here only f. 
 
 Jos. B. J. li. 
 
 !3. 3. 
 Job xxxii. 14. 
 
 The steps leading up into the tower. The 
 description of the tower or fort Antonia in 
 Jos. B. J. V. 5. 8, sets the scene vividly 
 before us : — ττυργοειδής δε ούσα το ττάν 
 σχήμα, κατά γωΐ'ίαν τίσσαρσιν ίτίροις 
 διεί^ηπτο πίφγοις' ων οι μϊν άλλοι πεν- 
 τήκοντα το ϋψος, ύ Cf ίτΓί Ty μεσημβρινή 
 και κατ' άνατολήν γωνί^ κείμενος εβδο- 
 μήκοντα πηχών ην, ώς καθορ^,ν 'όλον άττ' 
 αΰτον το 'ιερόν. καθά δε συνήτττο ταΐς 
 τον ιερόν στοηΐς, εις άμφοτίρας εΊχε κατα- 
 βάσεις' δι ών κατιόντες οΊ ψρονροΊ, κα£ 
 
 πόλεως άντικρνς κείμενον απέχει στάδια 
 π'ιντε• θίλειν yap, εφασκεν, αύτοίς εκείθεν 
 ίπιδεΓί,αι, ώς, κελεύσαντος αντον, πίπτοι 
 τα των Ιεροσολύμων τείχη, δι ών την 
 εΊςοδον αντοΊς παρΐξειν επηγγίλλετο. 
 Φήλιζ δε ώς επύθετο ταύτα, κελεύει τονς 
 στρατιώτας άναλαβεΐν τά 'όπλα, και .... 
 προςβάλλει τοΊς περί τον Αίγνπτιον και 
 τετρακοσίονς μεν αντών άνείλε, διακο- 
 σίονς δέ ζώντας ελαβεν. 6 δέ Αιγύπτιος 
 αντός διαδρόισας ίκ της μάχης αφανής 
 ίγίνετο. But in Β. J. ii. 13. 5, he says of 
 
 ήστο γαρ ad ίπ' αντής τάγμα 'Ρωμαίων, the same person, περί τριςμ,υρίους αθροίζει 
 και διιστάμενοι περί τάς στοάς μετά των των ηπατημ'ινων, περιαγαγών δε αϋτονς 
 οπλών, ί)' ταΊς έορταΐς τον δήμον, ό)ς μή- εκ της ερημιάς εις το Έλαιών καλ. δρ. 
 
 τι νεωτερισθειη, παρεφύλαττον' φρούριο^' κ.τ.λ ώςτε σνμβολής γενομένης 
 
 yap ίπέκίΐτο τι) πόλει μεν τΰ ιερόν, τψ διαφθαρήναι κ. ζωγρηθήναι itXti- 
 
 στον% των σνν αντψ. It is obvious that 
 the numerical accounts in Jos. are incon- 
 sistent with our text, and with one another. 
 This latter being the case, we may well 
 leave them out of the question. At dif- 
 ferent times of his rebellion, his number 
 of followers would be variously estimated ; 
 and the tribune would naturally take it as 
 he himself or his informant had known it, 
 at some one period. That this is so, we 
 may see by noticing that our narrative 
 speaks of his leading out, — whereas Jose- 
 phus's numbers arc those whom he brought 
 back frotn the wilderness against Jerusa- 
 lem, by whicli time his band would have 
 augmented coii.siderably. τους τετρ.] 
 
 'the four thousand,'— the matUT lieing 
 one of notoriety. σικαρίων] From 
 
 sica, a dagger; they are described by Jos. 
 B. J. ii. 13. 3, 'έτερον ιιδος ληστών iv 
 Ιεροσολνμοις νπεφνετο, οΊ καλούμενοι 
 
 Q 
 
 Ίερφ δέ ή Άντωνία. 37. Ελληνιστί 
 
 γιν.] as ' Gra;ce nescire,' Cic. pro Flacc. 4, — 
 τονς Σνριστι επισταμένους, Xen. Cyr. vii. 
 5. 31 : and reif. There is no ellipsis of 
 λαλεΐν. 38. οΰκ άρα συ ίΐ] ' Thou 
 
 art not then, as I believed' The 
 
 E. v., after the Vulg., ' art not thou' . . . . 
 (' nonne tu es . . .') would require ap' ov or 
 ovKovv, Winer, i; 61. 3. See also Luke xvii. 
 17. John xviii. 37. Αίγυπτιος] The in- 
 ference of the tribune was not, as in Bengel, 
 ' Graece loquitur : ergo est ^igyptius ;' but 
 the very contrary to tl)is. His being able 
 to speak Greek is a proof to Lysias that he 
 is not that Egyptian. — This Egyptian is 
 mentioned by Josejihus, Antt. xx. 8. 6, 
 ΰφικνιΊται δέ τις ίξ Αιγύπτου κατά τούτον 
 τϋν καιρόν εις τά 'Ιεροσόλυμα, προφί/της 
 είναι λέγιον, και συμβουλεύων τψ δημο- 
 τικψ πλήΟει συν α'υτψ ττρος 'όρος τό προς- 
 αγορευόμενον Έλαιών ϊρχεσθαι, ό και τήι• 
 Vol. II.
 
 226 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXI. 40. . 
 
 bTer.35. uoi ΧαΧ^σαι προς τυν λαό»'. ίπιτρίφαντος δε ούτοΰ ο abd 
 
 cell. χϋ. 17 reft. *" ^ . s . \ - b ' Ο Λ - c / - ^ ^GH 
 
 ά ην ■πολλή Πουλος εστως επί των αναραυμων κατεσεισεν rr? Ύ^ψι 
 
 πανταχόθεν „„,.^_,, - , g , '^- 
 
 σ.-ν.'), »•η.. τω λαιο, ΤΓολλης οε σιγής 7fi'"i"*i^*Ji.' προςεψωνησ^ν τ^ 
 *^¥5•''Έβοαίδι «^δίαλ^τω λίγων [XXII.] ' "Ανδ/οες αδελ./)οί 
 
 d»t., Mali. \, >/ / - \f- »1ι'Λ 
 
 xii<5- και ττατερες•, ακούσατε /ίου της ττρυς υ«ας νυΐΊ αττοΛο- 
 
 iniyt 7'"^'• " ακουσαί'τες οε ΟΤΙ τ^ ^ρραιόι ^ όιαλεκτω ϊτρος- 
 
 ^Act'soniy.' owvu πύτοίς, ιιαλλοί' ' παρε'σγον ησυγιαν. και φησιν 
 
 E.sth.ix.26. ^.^ , / • ' - 'Τ ^ - ' ' Τ^ 
 
 hw. προ9, ΰ Κγω /αεν ει/ιι ανηρ Ιονοαως, γεγεννη/ιευος εν 1 αρσ^ 
 ί"'. w.'^dl.t!' τί)ς Κιλικίας, ανατίθραμμίνος δε εν ττ» ττόλει ταύτ^ 
 
 1 Cor. ix. 3. _ ν \ /λ Τ^Λ^Λ" ^ι' '^ 
 
 iPrt.iii.iat. τταρα τους ττοοας 1 αμαΛιηΛ, πεπαιοευπει^ος κατά 
 
 ί — ch. xvi. 10. i ^ f ' ^ ι/ΛΝΓ/ 
 
 ki'^i'Thn ϋ. ° ακρ'ιβίίαν του ^ ττατρωου νομού, '' ^'?λωΓϊ]ς υπάρχων 
 (2'rhe™.iii. rov Θεοΰ καθώς πάντες νμεις εστε σημίξ)ον' ος ταυτην 
 
 Uh. νϋ. 2(1, 21 onlyt. AVisd.vii.4. m Luke viii. 35. χ. 39. ch. iv. 35. η =■ cli. τϋ. 22. constr., vv. 
 
 gen. {?), here only. ο here only. Dan. vii. Hi (see note). ρ ch. xxiv. 14. xxviii. 17 only. Prov• 
 
 xxvii. 10. 2Macc.vi.I. q ch. xxi. 2U refl. JNnm. xxv. 13.) 
 
 E. — τιτρακοπιονς 43. — σιρικηριων Ε. — 39. τε 137• — for ταρσ. . . . ιτολιτης, — εν ταρσω 
 Si της κιλ. γεγιννημενος D-gr. — for ίττιτρ., συνχωρησαι D : cujus rogo obsecro etiam 
 mihi A. — 40. και επιτρ. D' : ie om G 96 : ovv sah. — for αυΓου, τον χιΚ. D sah. — 
 εστως ο π. ιπ. τ. αν. και σεισας D. — for τω λαω, τον Χαον Η 2(). 9ί>. 99. 100. 10-5 al 
 lect 40 Chr (mss) : ττρος αυτούς D Syrar-erp. — πολλ. τε ησυχειης -γεν. D : γεν. aiy. Β : 
 γεναμενης Α.—ττροςεφωνει 14'. 20. 29. 93. 90. ΙΟΙ. 104. ΙΟΟ^ all: ίφωνησε 3.951; 
 απεκριθη αυτοις sah : incepit loqui arm. — τη ίδια ΰιαλ. Α. 
 
 Chap. XXII. 1. rec νυν, with some mss Chr Oec : txt ABDEGH most mss Thl : 
 aft μου arm: om 26 Syr. — 2. rec προςεψωνει {corrn from pres to imperf to suit the 
 sense .• but the pres is common in such constrr. See ch xix. 2, note), with AB al 
 Chr ThP: -προαεφωνησεν G 15. 18. 29. 36. 40. 69. 73. 105-37-80 al : text DEH 
 34. 00. 98-9. 113 al am tol (al latt) ThP.— ηυΓοις om D (-rwv A^ .').— for παρεσ. 
 jjff., ησύχασαν D.— 3. μεν om ABDE 3. 13. 18. 95i. 105-80 al ν sah al {there 
 being no δε to correspond) : ins GH most mss copt syr al Chr Thl Oec. — ιονδ. αΐ'ηρ εν 
 ■γ. της κ. γ{γ. D. — -γεγενημ. Α al : αναθρεμμένης 13. — γαμαλιηλου Β al Chr. — τταιδευ- 
 ομενοςΌ: add δε Η 4. 98-9. 100-33 al Chr.— for ακρ., veritatem {αΧηθειαν }) v.— 
 υπάρχων om D v. — του θεού om 137 tol : του jo/jou v : Τ7]ς παραδόσεως εμης πατρώας 
 
 σικαρίοι, μεθ' ημίραν και εν μίσ^ Ty ττό- listen to him. Chap. XXII. 1.] This 
 λίΐ ψονεΰοντες ανθρώπους• μάλιστα δε εν speech of Paul repeats the narrative of his 
 ταΊς ίορταΊς μισγόμενοι τφ πλι'ιθει, και conversion to Christianity, but this time 
 ταΤς ϊσθήσεσιν ύποκρνπτοντες μικρά ξι- most skilfully arranged and adapted (within 
 φίδια, τούτοις εννττον τους διαφόρους' legitimate hmits) to avoid offence and con- 
 .... πρώτος μεν ουν υπ' αυτών Ίωνά- ciliate his hearers. Proofs of this will ap- 
 0ης 6 αρχιερείς άποσφάζεται• μετά δε pear as we go on. See an enquiry into its 
 aiiTov καθ' ήμ'ιραν άν^ροΰντο πολλοί . . . diction and rendering into Greek, in the 
 The art. is generic. 39. μ€'ν] Our Prolegg. 3.] μεν, as in ch. xxi. 39, 
 ' indeed,'— implying 'not the Egyptian, above. — De Wette and others would place 
 but,' — exactly renders it : ' I indeed am :' the comma after ταύτγ, so to make the 
 so Aristoph. Plut. 355, μά Αϊ' εγώ μεν οϋ. two clauses, beginning with yey. and ανατ., 
 See Hartung, Partikellehre, ii. 413. exactly correspond. But (not to insist, 
 oiiK όσημον ττόλ.] See note, ch. ix. 11. — with Meyer, on the reason that a new cir- 
 The expression is an elegant one, and very cumstance is introduced with each parti- 
 common. Wetst. gives many examples, ciple) it is surely better, as the rule of the 
 and among them one from Eurip. Ion 8, sentence seems to be to place the participles 
 εστίν yap ουκ άσημος Έλλ>)νων πόλις. — before the words which qualify them, to 
 There was distinction in his being a πο- take εν Ty πόλει rairy παρά τ. π. Γ., all 
 λίτης of an urbs libera. 40. τη Έβρ. as the qualification of άνατεθραμμ'ενος, and 
 διαλ.] The Syro-Chaldaic, the mother- punctuate, as commonly done, after Γαμα- 
 tongue of the Jews in Judaea at this time : λί/;λ. — On Gamaliel, see note, ch. v. 34. — 
 his motive is implied (ch. xxii. 2) to be. The expression παρά τ. πόδ. (see ch. iv. 35, 
 that they might be the more disposed to note) indicates that the rabbi sat on an ele-
 
 ΧΧΙΤ. 1 — ΙΟ. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 227 
 
 Ti]v ^ οοον ^ ίόιωί,α ft)(/ot Θανάτου, " οίσμευων και ^ τταρα- rch. ix. sieir. 
 δ/δούς tig φνΧακάς αν^ξ)ας τε καΐ "γυναίκας, ^ ως και ό ( if η,ι, ;^ ι^. 
 αργ^ΐξξίίυς ^^ μαρτυρεί μοι και παν το " ττοεσβυτεριου' xii'u. 
 
 '' ^ y ' \^ ^ r' " ^''^Ai^ aMauo. xiii. 
 
 παρ ων και ■' ίπιστοΑας όεί,αμενος προς τους αοελ^ους „i-np„oniy. 
 
 'Λ ^ ' ' " y \ \ ζ ' - » Judg. Xfi. 11. 
 
 ίΐς ΐΛαμασκον επορευομην, αςωυ και τους εκεισε οντάς (Μη«. xxm. 
 ^ίοεμενους εις Ιερουσαλήμ, ίνα '^ τιμωρηθωσιν. " ^ ε-γενετο " X's rem' 
 
 δ' ' ^ C ' Ύ "λ "d> wRcim Χ.2. 
 
 ε μοι πορευομενω και ε•γ^ιί,οντι τι^ ίλαμασκω περί Cui.iv. ιγ>. 
 
 ^ μεσημβρ'ιαν εξαίφνης εκ του ουρανού ^ περιαστράφαι ψ^ς ^,V"''''i'Tira 
 
 ^ ικανον περί εμε, ' επεσά τε εις το ^ έδαφος και ηκουσα y='ch.""%!' 
 
 Job 
 sxxix. 21). 
 
 ίθνΰ'ν, Jn.s. 
 
 Antt. iii. 2. 1 
 
 a cli. xxTi. 11 
 
 φωνής λεγούσλ}ς• μοι Σαούλ Έ^αουΧ, τι με 'διώκεις', ^ εγώ ^ ο,';, "^ j„i 
 οε απεκρΊθην Ύις ει, κύριε ; ειπεν τε προς με 'Εγώ 
 ειμί Ιησούς ο Νο^ωραιος ον συ ' διώκεις. οι δε συν 
 
 >\,/ ν\ „,Λ/ \k'' ιΟ ' ' acn.xxTi. ιι 
 
 εμοι οντες το μεν φως ευεασαντο και εμφορυι εγενοΐ'το, '^"'y,• '^'"^ 
 την δε φοίνην ουκ ηκουσαν του λαλουιτος μοι. είπον ""inr^'M^t. 
 
 Λ\ΓΓ" ' ' 'C\\/ Τ / 1»Α xviii. 13. ch. 
 
 οε Ιι ποιήσω, κύριε, ο οε κύριος ειττεν ττρος με ■^''"" c(?h■ix'''3reff 
 d=ch. χ, 9. Matt. XX. 3. 2 Mace. ν. 1 e ch. viii. 26 only. Gen. xviii. 1. f Luke ii. 13. eh. 
 ix. 3. ProT. vi. 15. g — Mark x. 46 al. Ezek. i. 24 alex. h here only. 3 KiuKS vi. 15. 
 i Ter. 4. k Luke xxiv. 5 rcfif. 1 ch. ix. ci. refl'. 
 
 syr*. — fcrrai νμ. τταντ. D : ημάς 42. — 4. for ος, και D Syr teth. — μ^χρι D al. — 5ίσμ. τε 
 και 137.—φνλακην D 9G. 142-80 am copt— 5. και om 32-4. 100 ν Syr ar-erp Thli.— 
 ο om D 180. — 01 αρχίίρας tol demid : add ανανιας 137 syr*. — μαρτύρησα D: εμαρ- 
 Tvpii Β : ίτημαρτνρει 137 : aft μοι 42 57• — όλον το ττρ. D {πρεσί3υΓίρίωΐ' Η). — aft ων 
 (ω 13) οηι και D 3 Syr ar-erp aeth. — for προς τ. aS., τιάρα των αδελφωΐ' D : ττρος .... 
 επορίνομην are connected in 2. 105 {tv δαμ.) Syr. — αξαι Ε aeth: εξων 13. — εκεί D: 
 ul adducerem hide vinclos v. — εν ιιρονσ. D. — 6. for tytv. to μεσημβρ., D^ has t I'yi- 
 ζονη (Tisch ; -τυς Scholz) ΰε μοι μεσημβοιας ΰαμασκω : — εγετομην 137 (onig μοι): 
 επι μεσ. 133. — εζιφνης DE. — for εκ, απο Ό'. — πείΐιεατοα-ψεν D-E 137 {-φαι Ό', -ψα με 
 D')•— 7. rec επεσον, with Ό{και επ. D Ath)G &c Chr Oec : txt ABEH {έπεσαν Η 
 Scholz, 142) 13. 15. 25-6. 31-4-G. 40-3. 65-8. 96. 1062-33-80 Ath Thl.— ij/coKoi/ 137- 
 — σανλε σανλε D al v. — at end (' nol, as Scholz, aft ver 8,' Tisch) add σκληρον σοι 
 προς κέντρα ^ακτιζειν Ε al Bed-gr demid syr-marg Ath. — 8. for τε, St D al. — εμε AB : 
 txt DEGH mss (appy) Ath Chr Thl Oec. — 9. μεν om 96. 142 sah. — και εμψ. εγεν. 
 om ABH 3. 13. 33. 40. 95'-9 al ν Syr copt arm ar-erp Bed (t/ie omn is to be accounted 
 for, as Meyer, by the similarity of endings, εθεασαντο, εγενοντο. Had the words been 
 interpolated, not εμφοβοι, but ενναη from ch. ix. 7 would have been used) : και ιμφ. 
 ■γενόμενοι 15. 36 : txt DEG &c Bed-gr sah syr al Chr (comm also) Thl Oec. — την 
 ψωνηρ δε 57• — ηκουον E-gr al. — 10. είπα D. — κύριος om D sah (om ο δε κ.) setli : είπε 
 
 vated seat and the scholars on the ground day;' Ί had the same zealous character (not 
 
 or on benches, literally at his feet. excluding his still retaining it) whicli you 
 
 κατά άκρ.] (The art. omitted aft. a prep.) all shew to-day.' A conciliatory comparison. 
 ' According• to the strict acceptation of the 5. ό αρχ.] ' The high priest of that 
 
 law of my fathers;' = κατά την άκριβε- day, who is still liviny :' i. e. Tlieo])hilns, 
 
 στάτην α'ίρεσιν της ημετέρας Θρησκείας, see on ch. ix. 2. Similarly, 'the whole San- 
 
 ch. xxvi. 5 ; — i. e. as a Pharisee. So Jos. heavixii' :=:' those ivho were /ben metn/jcrs, 
 
 B. J. ii. 8. 18, Φαρισαΐοι . . . οί δοκονντες and noxa survive.' τταρ' ων καί] ' from 
 
 μετά ακριβείας εΚηγεΊσΟαι τα νόμιμα. — whom, moreover.' ιτρος Toiis άδίλφ.] 
 
 Some of the older commentators make τον ' to the Jewish (their) brethren.' lioriie- 
 
 ττατρψου νόμου governed by πίΤΓπιδ., and mann's rendering, ' ί/^«ύ/*/ i//e (Christian) 
 
 take κατ-' ακρί/,ί. adverbially : which would brethren,' is altogctlier inadmissible. If 
 
 give a very vapid sense, the accuracy and ever Paul spokii to the Jews as a Jeir, it 
 
 carefulness of his education liaving been was on this oc-casion. και τους €Κ.] 
 
 already implied in παρά τ. π. Γαμαλιηλ. ' even those who were there.' ίκίΐσί] 
 
 καθω; . . .] Not meaning ' in the if resolved, would be εις Λαμασκόν,—α 
 
 same way as ye all are this day, (but now similar constr. to εις οΙκόν εστίν, Mark ii. I, 
 
 in another way) :' but ' as ye all are this ' those luho had settled at Damascus and 
 
 Q 2
 
 228 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXII. 
 
 στας πορίυου εις• Ααμασκον, κακΗ σοι \α\ηθησετηι τηρι 
 
 m — rh• xiii. 
 
 40. XV. 2 Hi. ^ . ^ ^ - ^ _ ,, , 
 
 m"v^"x"n. πάντων ώ»' '" Ttro/CTot συι ττοπ/σαι. ως οε .. ^^^ ^ 
 
 xi.«,T.T. ερλεποί' ατΓΟ τίίς• ' i>o^r?c του ψωτυς ε^ειι^ου, ' χειραγω- ahu 
 τ^τ"!!!ίτ«,"' -γουμίνος νπο των "^ συνόντων /ιοί ηλθον είς Δα/ιασκοι^ 
 
 η = Mark viii. /«,, , λ/ ίν s'AO^ t ν '^ ' 
 
 -Μ.» iii Ανανιας οε rtr ανί/ρ ευΛαρί/ς• Κατά τον νομον 
 
 Exnd.^ίί.' if.' "μ"θ'''»^Ρου/ΐίεΐΌς υπό πάντων των " κατοικουντων Ιουδαίω)', 
 31, 3Λ 1 ci.r. ΑΛ £λι/ω»/ 7Γ(θος )αε καί επιστας ειττεν juoi 2ααου\ αοίλφε, 
 
 qdux.'sonly: "^ αΐ'ά/3/\ε;/'θΐ'. Kayu) ^ avry Ty ωρα ^ ανφλίφα εις αντον. 
 seaiex. i* ο οε ειττεν U t /εος των πατερωί' ημω»' προίγίίρισατο 
 
 sch.'n.^ft. riii. σε γνωναι το θεΧημα αυτοϋ κάί loeiv τον '^ όικαιον και 
 
 ■2. Luke ίί. , ^ d , ^ d ' " ' ' - 1 1 " >' 
 
 25 only. uKovoai φωΐ'ϊϊν ε /c του στόματος ίΐυτου, ^"^ οτι εση 
 t dr'^xxiv. 14. '^ μάρτυς αυτω προς παντας ανθξ>ωπους ών ίωρακας και 
 
 Phil. iii. 5. „ Ιδ'" 'Κ'ΛΛ h» ^/3' 
 
 Hfb.viii.4ai. ϊ7κ:ουσας. /cat ΐ'υν τι ^ μέλλεις ; αναστας μαπτισαι 
 
 U = ch. χ. 22 ' . . , , . , ' ' , , ^ . , 
 
 vemp.•!., ch. και αποΛουσαι τας αμαξ)τιας σον, επικιαλεσαμενος το 
 Λν absoi, Luke ονομα avTov. ' syivsTO c£ μοι υποστρίφαντι εις Ιερου- 
 
 XX. iver20. χ = Matt. xi. 15 al. Isa. xlii. 18. y ch. xvi. 18 reff. ζ = Matt. xiv. 19 a1. 
 
 ach.vii. 32. Dent. i. 11 al. fr. b cli iii. 20. xxvi. 16 only. Exod. iv. 13. c ah.sol., ch. iii. 14. 
 
 vii. 52. IPet. iii. 18. dch.xi.9al. e = ch. i. 8 reft'. f attr, ch.i. 1 al., .see ver. l:i. 
 
 g = here only. Xcn. Cjr. i. 3. 15. h vcr. 10. i 1 Cor. vi. 11 only. Job ix. 30. kch.ii.21. 
 
 ix. 14. Rom. x. 13. 1 ch. viii. 20 reft'. 
 
 om 2. 30-4. — for Trtpi to σοι, η at ifi Η i^. 34. 95'-8-tnarg 100 Chr (ττιρι πάντων a σε 
 δίΐ ά e \ : TTfpi τταιτ. ωΐ' tj'TtraXrai σοι a σι iti 43. 99) (see ch ix. 6) : συι om Ε : σε al. 
 — 11. ουδίνίβλίπον H {ovStv εβλίττον? ovS' ενιβλεπον ?) : εβλίπον Ε ]8, ανιβλ. Gii. 
 100 Till-: ui auieni surrexi, non videbam d syr (marg). — χειραγωγ. απο A: for χειρ. 
 νπο, μίτα 3. 95^. — ειςη\Θον 13?. — 12. rec αν. ευσεβι/ς with Ε all Oec : (v. om Αν {the 
 omn has prob been because the sentence is -complete without the epithet : ευσεβής, a 
 gloss on ευλαβής): txt BGH 13. 15. 18. 25. 34-6. 40-2. 57- G5-«-9. 73. {ενλ. αν.) 
 95-7-8• 100-5-37• 80 all Chr Thl. — μαρτνρομενος A'. — μαθητών και των κατοικονντων 
 80. — aft κατοικ. add tv δαμασκω GH all demid tol al-latt syr ath arm slav Chr (text) 
 Thl (stqjplementary gloss) : ιονδ. tv δαμασκω 73. — 13. εμε AB : txt EGH mss (appy). — 
 for κΓίγω, και 137• — ίβλίΐ^α Α• — 14. προίχειρησατο AG al. — for το θίλ., salutem tol. — 
 και bef ιδ. om A}.— το δίκαιον 4. 33. 97• — του om A 95' : και .... αυτού om 10: 
 0. π«ρ αΐ'Γου 57-• 80 al. — 15. μαρτ. αν. πρ. τ. ανβρ. εσηΒ: αυτόν 96. — ων τε εωρ. 
 (top. G al) Ε 38. 180 (al?). — 16. rec for αντον, τον κυρίου: ιησην 43. 99 slav {expla- 
 natory corrections) : txt ABD 13. 14*. 15. 68-9. 73. 105-30-37 al ν syrr ar-erp copt sah 
 seth arm Chr ThP. — 17. νποστρεφοντι 13 Chr ThP : νποστρεφαι 96. 142. — πρυς- 
 
 were then there.' 6.] On Paul's con- to those who would gather from Scripture 
 
 version and the comparison of the accounts itself its own real character : and be, not 
 
 in chapp. ix., xxii., and xxvi., see notes on slaves to its letter, but disciples of its spirit, 
 ch. ix. I have there treated of the dis- 13. ave'pX. els αυτόν] De W. re- 
 
 crepancies, real or apparent. 11.] See marks, that the two meanings of α^αβλίττω 
 
 notes, ch. ix. 8, 18. 12.] That Ananias here unite in the word: 'I looked, with 
 
 was a Christian, is not here mentioned, — recovered sight, upon him.' 14 — 16 
 
 and άνι)ρ . . . Ιουδαίων is added : both, is notrelated, but included, inch. ix. 18, 19. 
 as addressed to a Jewish audience. Before 14. Θ. τ. -jrar. ήμ.] So Stephen, in 
 
 the Roman governor in ch. xxvi., he does very similar circumstances, ch. vii. 32. In 
 
 not mention him at all, but compresses ch. ix. 17, ύ κύριος is the word : this title 
 
 the whole substance of the command given is given /or the Jetvs. τον δίκαιον] 
 
 to Ananias into the words spoken by the So Stephen again, ch. vii. 52. How forcibly 
 
 Lord to himself. A heathen moralist could must the whole scene have recalled him, 
 
 teach, — ' Quid de quoijuc viro, et cui dicas, whom presently (ver. 20) he mentions bij 
 
 SKpe videto' (Ilor. Ep. i. 18. «8) : and a name. 16. αιτόλονσαι . . .] This was 
 
 Christian apostle was not unmindful of the the Jewish as well as the Christian doctrine 
 
 necessary caution. Such features in his of baptism. — Sec 1 Cor. vi. 11, and note. 
 speeches are highly in.'itructive and valuable αΰτον] Of Jesus, τοΰ δικαίον.
 
 11—21. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 229 
 
 σαΧημ και "" προςίυ-χομίνου μου έι/ τω Ιΐρψ yiviaQai /[«ε mabsoi., ch. 
 
 >η' ' 18 >'(>-ο'^Λ/ ' 1J-S?- xx.3Biil.fr. 
 
 ϊν ίκστασίΐ και ictiv αυτόν AtyovTa μοι ' 2:πευσον " fh χ• ίο reff. 
 ^αι et,e\Oe ''εν τάγ^ίΐ εξ 'Ιερουσαλήμ, Βιότι ου "^ τταρο- pcoasVr., cen. 
 
 κ 
 
 δεξ. 
 
 1Q •> ν -τ xvm.ii.xxiv. 
 
 ονται σου την μαξ)τυριαν πίρι Εμού. Kayw ειπον is, ^υ. 
 
 Κυρίε, αυτοί ίπίστανται 'ότι εγώ ^ ημην " (^υλακτί'ζωι; /cat "■ Jy^'ciif'iri. 
 
 ν 5'' W ν ν \ ^ χ ' χ » 1 -1. Exod. 
 
 όβρων κατά τας συvayωyaς τους πιστεύοντας ίττι χχ•ϋ• ΐ• 
 
 f on '« '^/Ν- -/*~ John i. 7, 
 
 σε. '^ /cat ore ^ εςεχυννετο το αί/ια ^τίφάνου του μαρ- t οί.η,'ΓΓ' Luke 
 
 Γ, , ' ^ ' ν t " ζ ' , '' ' a Λ - i. ](i,au. Jer. 
 
 υ 60€- τυρός σου, και αυτός ημην εφεστως /cai συνευοοίτων xxxiu.so. 
 
 "^"^ 'Ιί,Λ/ \«/ -C' / ''91' '''^'"'' '^'^•, . 
 
 «<"••• «"at φυλασσων τα ιμάτια των αναιοουντων αυτόν. και ^'•'• <5»'•'• 
 
 ABD ' ' 22. 
 
 j;0jj η here only t. Wisd. xviii. 4. ν Luke xsii. 63. ch. v. 40 al. w cli . ii. 46 refi'. χ ch. ix. 42reff. 
 
 y -Xi'i--, Matt.xxiii. 35. xxvi. 28. Luke .-ii. Su al. ζ vcr. 13. a ch. Tiii. 1 refi'. 
 
 b = Lnkexi.21. c = ch. ii. 23 raff. 
 
 ίΐιχομίνω Ε 03 5 (ν al) (alii aliter).— for μι, μοι G 13? al : om 25. 40. OG. 105 arm.— 
 18. for tCtti', ειΰον 180 al d.~(v ταχίΐ om 78 ^y^ sah. — τταραίίχονται 73. 133: παρα- 
 ίίξοιτίς 57. — την om ΑΒ 13. 180 {as unnecessary) : testimonium metim d : ins EGH 
 mis (nrly) Chr Thl Oec— 19. και tyw 137 : και 96. 142 ά.—δαιρων 38. 113.— r. πίπί- 
 στίνκοτας Ε (d e Tisch : but Lachm cites d e for txt) ν {qui c7-edebant) .' al: fig at 38. !)3. 
 — 20. rec ιζιχίΐτο {corrn to more usual form), with GH &c Chr al : t.xt ABE 13. 15. 36. 
 G8. 73. 130-80 al ThP {-vvtro AB .^ al .').— στε^. om A 68 : ins aft μαρτ. 38. 73 {the 
 omn is hardly accountable, if it was originally in the text : at the same time, the MS 
 authority is too light to allow of its being now omitted. Meyer suggests the similarity 
 of ending, ϋτ«ρανου του : but this would occasion the omn of του, not of στίφανου) : 
 ins BEGH mss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec. — for μαρτ., πρωτομάρτυρας G 57. 60. 73. 99. 
 105-37: ττρωτου μαρτ. ^ syr : σου om 38 d. — εστως A al. — rec aft συνευδ. ins τη 
 αναιρέσει αυτού {interpolated fi-om ch viii. 1), with GH al syr ar-pol slav al Chr Thl Oec : 
 τη βουλή των ανηιροΐ'ΐ'των αυτόν (and \ιθαϊ,οντων for αναιρ. below) Syr ar-erp : oni 
 ABD(appy ; d is deft)E 40 (al?) ν copt sah (ieth). — (cm bef (/)υλ. om GH 1. 26. 34. 42. 80. 
 95>. 133-42 all syr ar-pol slav al Chr Thl' : ins ABDE all ν copt sah al.— ^ιυλ. re 137- 
 
 Paul carefully avoids mentioning to the Jews of this answer is, that Paul thought his 
 
 this Name, except where it is unavoidable, former great zeal against Christ, contrasted 
 
 in ver. 8 : so αυτόν again, ver. 18. with his present zeal /or Him, would make 
 
 17.] viz. as related ch. ix. 26 — 31, where a deep impression on the Jews in Jerusalem : 
 
 nothing of this vision, or its having been or, perhaps, he wishes by his earnest preach- 
 
 the cause of his leaving Jerus., is hinted, ing of Jesus as the Christ among them, to 
 
 18.] irept Ιμοΰ is to be taken with undo the mischief of which he before was 
 
 μαρτιφίαν, not with the verb, as Meyer the agent, and therefore alleges his former 
 
 and Winer maintain. Their objection, that zeal and his consenting to Stephen's death 
 
 then it must be ttjv μαρτ. την περί ϊμον, as reasons why he should remain in Jeru- 
 
 is answered by remarking, (1) that Paul salem. αυτοί can only refer to the 
 
 does not always observe accuracy in this same persons as the subjects of παυαδέζον- 
 
 usage of the article: e. g. Eph. vi. 5, ΰττ- rai above : not (as Heinrichs) to the foreign 
 
 ακούετε τοΊς κυρίοις κατά σάρκα, for τ. Jews : — " Idcirco iter apostolicum extra 
 
 κυρ. τοΙς κατ. σάρ. or τοις κατά σάρκα urbem detrectat, quod undique odio peti- 
 
 κυριΌις, which he has written in the ||, Col. turn se iri pricvidet, Hierosolymis autem in 
 
 iii. 22, — 1 Thess. iv. 16, oi ι•£κροί tv xpiffTf^j apostolorum coUegio delitescere se posse 
 
 άναστήσονται πρώτον. See also Rom. opinatur:"— a motive totally unvvortliy of 
 
 vi. 4. Col. ii. 14, and notes: — and (2) tliat Paul, and an interpretation which happily 
 
 there may have been a reason for the irre- the sentence will not bear. 20. μάρ- 
 
 gularity here, inasmuch as, if either tlic τυρός σου] " Έ,. y. ' thy martyr,' t'ullow- 
 
 article had been expressed after m«pr., or ing Beza : Vulg., and Erasm., testis tui. 
 
 την π. ίμ. μαρτ. had been used, σου would The Apostle may have here used the word 
 
 liave appeared to be governed by πάρα- in its strict primary sense ; for a view of 
 
 Ci^ovrf/t— ' they will not rcceivey'/Om thee Christ in His glory was vouchsafed to Ste- 
 
 tliy testimony concerning mc,' — which is not phen, and it was by bearing witness of I hat 
 
 precisely the meaning intended to be con- manifestation that he hastened his death 
 
 veyed. (See ^Ir. Green's Gram, of N. T. (ch. vii. 55, 56). Tiie present meaning of 
 
 p. 163.) 19.] The probable account the word martyr did, however, become
 
 230 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXII. 
 
 dabsoi.,L.,ke εΐττεΐ'πρός με Uo(>tvov, on ί-γω άς ίθνη '\ιακραν ' «ζ" ^;-^^ ^ 
 iSt!' ^^^' ατΓοστίλω σε. ^"-^ 'Ήκουον δε αυτοΰ άχρι τούτου του akcu 
 
 ech.vii. 12 , ,. . ν, «-ν* *»*'» KGII 
 
 Lukexi.ar. λογυυ, και επήραν την φωνην αυτών λεγοι-τες " Λΐ()ε 
 
 judK-ix.'?. αττύ ττ)Γ -/τίς τον ''τοιούτον, οι» yap ' καΟηκεν αυτόν tyv. 
 
 h'~i Cot τ 5 KpauyatovTwv τε αυτών και ριτττουντων τα ιμάτια 
 
 fxuls.Vc./" και "' κονιορτον βαλλόντων είς τον αέρα, ^4 Ικ^Χ^^σεν ό 
 
 i Rom. i. 28 ' , , „ ,ν» ">η Hi \ "^ ο '' 
 
 «iJyjjP"^'/^ νιλιαργος- ειςαγεσσαι αυτοί' εις την τταρε^ιρυΛηΐ', ειττας 
 
 feJ^chTxi' ' Ρ μάστιξιν '^ ανετάΖ^εσθαι αυτόν, ίνα έττιγνω ^ι' ην αιτίαν 
 
 kabsoi.,M^tt^_^ yj^^jjj^ ' ξττΐφωνουν αυτω. '''^ ως όε προετειίΌν αυτόν 
 
 i-i.i?^oniy. τοΐς S'/uoffiv, ειπεν ττρός τον "" εστωτα ίκατονταργον '' Ει 
 
 Herodol. 17. _^^ ^... ^^ ^^^ ^ ^^ ^^. g^ _ ^^ ^3. χ. 49 Lnke xix 15. Exod. xxxv. 1. 
 
 η - Heb xi 3d "Uly. Prov. xxvi. 3. q vrr. 29 only. Judg. vi. 29 alex. r Luke xxiii. 21. s here only t. 
 
 2iMaciXvlS. t = here only. Demosth. irepi παραττρ. p. 402, end. (Mark 1. 7 ||.) u ch. xvi. 
 
 y. Lukexi'x.iial. ν = ch. xix. 2 reff. 
 
 — αυΓου 13.— 21. ττρος (με C: pref »; ^ων»; 25.— ίθνος E-gi• al.— /ίακρα 93 5. — ίξ- 
 ατΓοσΓίλλω D Ath : αττοστίλλω E-gr.— 22. ηκονσανΌ vss.— τ. λογ. Γουτ". 38. 133-7•— 
 αντ. τ. φ. 13 : αντου (1 also) τ. φ. 180. — rec καθ/;κοι^ {the meaning of the tmperf nnt 
 being apprehended, as the varr shew), with many mss Thl- Oec : txt ABCDEGH 
 most mss Hipp Ath Chr, ThP : καϋηκη 68-9.98'. 105 al: καθηκαν 18.43.-23. κρα- 
 ζοντων C 4. 2G-7-9. 42'. 57- 66^. 76. 96. 126 all lect 40 Chr ThU Oec (ed).— aft 
 avT. add ίττΐ ttXhov 7. 69. 105.— rec dt {alteration of characteristic rt), with DEGli 
 &c: txt ABC ieth ar-pol. — αντων om D .' — ρ-.τττοντωΐ' DEGH 25. 34. 40. G8-9. 95-6-9. 
 105 al Thl Oec (ed). — for αέρα, ον^ανον D Syr Cassiod. — 24. rec avrov ο χ. αγίσθοι 
 (alteration of order: the tig- being dropped as superfluous), with GH al ThP Oec (ay. 
 also ceth ar-pol al) : txt («γ. or ίΐςαγ.) ABCDE 13. 31-8. 40. 68-9. 73. 105-13-30 ν 
 al Chr Thl2.— at/7-ov om 137-42.— rec ίίττωΐ' (more usual form), with GH &c Chr al : 
 txt ABCDE Ά\.—ίταζίσθαι Ε 31.40: ίξίτ. 4: ανεταζειν Ό\—γνωΑ 13 al Chr.— 
 κατεώωνουΐ' Ό 137= add περί αυτόν Ό : αντου 137: εφωνουΐ' αντω C8 al : κατιβοων 
 αντου 98-marg Chr. — 25. rec προετεινει/ {to suit the subject ο χιλ., no more persons 
 having been mentd : this the varr shew), with many mss Oec : προςετεινεν Η al Thl' : 
 but plur {ττροετεινον [which I adopt, as the rec mag be considered as testifging 
 to it, -fcN being an easg change from -ON, but not from -AN] AE 98--9. 104 al 
 ThP : ττροςετειναν CD 40. 137 al adstrinxissent or ligavissent vss nrly) ABCDEG 
 36-8. 42. 57. 69. 73-6. 97- 113-26-30-33-42-80 all (besides the above) Chr (mss) 
 Thl^. — τοις ψ. αυτόν 137. — εφεστωτα 42'. 133. — rec aft εκατονταρχον {-ρχην 
 D 73 ?) ins ο παύλας, with ABCE ν &c : in many vss (Tisch) it is transposed : 
 om D syr Clir {though the authority for txt is slight, this is a case ivhere the 
 attached to it at a very early period , and is prayer had been, that he might preach 
 apparently of apostoUc authority : e. g. Rev. the Gospel to his own people .• but that it 
 xvii. 6, and Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. v. (cited in was by the imperative command of the 
 note on ch. i. 25). . . . The transition from Lord Himself that he went to the Gentiles, 
 the first to the secondary sense may be 22. τούτου τ. λόγον] viz. the an- 
 
 easily accounted for. Many who had only nouncement that he was to be sent to the 
 seen with the eye of faith, suffered persecu- Gentiles. ' Populi terrarum non vivunt,' 
 tion and death as a proof of their sincerity. was the maxim of the children of Abraham. 
 For such constancy the Greek had no ade- Chetubb. fol. iii. 2 (Meyer). καθήκίν] 
 
 quate term. It was necessary for the ' decuerat :' implying, he ought to have 
 Christians to provide one. None was more bee7i put to death long ago (when we en- 
 appropriate than μάρτνυ, seeing what had deavoured to do it, but he escaped). 
 been the fate of those whom Christ had 23. ρηττουντων] Not 'flinging off their 
 appointed to be His witnesses (ch. i. 8). garments,' as preparing to stone him, or 
 Theg almost all suffered : hence to witness even as representing the action of such pre- 
 became a synonym for to svffer ; while the paration : the former would be futile, as he 
 suffering was in itself a kind of testimony." was in the custody of the tribune, — the 
 (Mr. Humphry.) και αντός] ' I my- latter absurd, and not borne out by any 
 
 self also.' 21.] The object of Paul known habit of the Jews : but ' shaking, 
 
 in relating this vision appears to have jactitantes, their garments,' as shaking 
 been to shew that his own inclination and oil" the dust, abominating such an expres-
 
 22—29. nPASElE ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 28J 
 
 ^ ανΘξ)ωπον Ρωμαιον και '^ ακατακριτον ^ εζίστιν υμιν wch.xvi.szai. 
 '^ μαστίζειν ; άκουσας δε ο εκατονταργος """ροςΐΧθων ^""^Jj^•^,.^^ 
 
 τω χίλ(αρ)^ω aπ1|yyeιXev λίγων Ύι μεΧΧίΐς ποαιν ; ozhereuni'/. ' 
 yap άνθρωπος ούτος Ρωμαίος ίστιν. ^' ττροςίΧθων ^£a = hereoniy 
 ο νιλίαργος ΰπίν αυτω Λίγε μοι, συ Ρωμαίος ίΐ ; ο (Hd'j.'vii'i. Ί.) 
 
 Λ\ 0> ιντ ' 98 ' '/Ί ' Λ ' 'Γ< '^ Λ λ - b-hereoLly. 
 
 06 Βφη rial. απΒκριϋη ο χιλιαρχος L•yω ποΧΧου 2ΐ'"Τκρίι'π 
 
 "κεφαλαίου την ττολιτείαν ταντην '^ ίκτησάμην. ο Sicich. ί. is. 
 
 Π-\ "'ι 'τ? ■>■ ^> < ' 29 'ίΐ' "^ bntw. fic- 
 
 αυΛος• ίψη ^γω οε και yίyίvv^ημaι. ίυϋεως ovvdch.v.38. 
 
 απ αυ- απβστησαν απ αυτού οι ^ιιελλοντες αυτόν ^ aviTa'Cuv'^f^^"^]^^- 
 
 του D. 
 
 ABC insertion ivas so probable, the omn so unaccountable, that I must agree ivith Tisch 
 EGH iji rejecting the ivords). — ti t^tar. νμ. D. — 26. τούτο άκουσας ο D. — ίκατονταρχης 
 ACD al: txt B(e sil)EGH al Chr al : add on ρωμαιον tavrov \tyti D 137- — 
 rec απη•^γ. τω χιλ. (alteration ο/ order to avoid the ambigniti/, προςίλθ. τω χ. or τω χ. 
 uTinyy.), with GH &c ar-pol slav Thl' Oec: txt {tπηyy. D') ABCDE 13. 31-8. 40. 6JJ-9. 
 105-30 al V copt arm Chr ThP.— for \tyon', αυτω D 99 syr* : avnyy. 137 — rec bef η 
 ins opa {interpolated appy to give precision, and break the abruptness of the text), with 
 DGH &c seth ar-pol slav Chr al : txt ABCE 13. 15. 36. 40. 08. 73. 113-30-40 al ν 
 syrr ar-erp copt arm. — ^ίλλίΐ 137- — yap om D' seth'. — 27. τοτι ττροςίλθ. ο χ. ιπηρωτη- 
 σεν αυτόν D.— for αυτω, τω παυλω G (Scholz). — rec bef συ, ins (ι {intei-polated, to 
 make the interrogation plainer), with G &c ν (not am tol al) al Chr al : txt ABCDEH 
 most mss syrr copt arm slav^ Ammon (ms). — for £0»; (om 130: untv 13) ναι ΐιπεν 
 ίίμι D. — 28. rec aft απεκ. ins τε, with Η &c ν al Thl Oec : δε BCE al copt syrr al (both 
 to supply a copula): txt AG 9G. 142 ar-pol slav Chr: και αποκριθείς ο χ. (και D') 
 ειπεν αυτω D. — for πολλού, οιδα ττοσου D (lat-mss mentd by Bed) (remarkable, and pos~ 
 siblg 07-iginal, ττολλου being a gloss : but if so, the genuine reading has been now overborne 
 by the intruder). — την om C. — τ:ο\ιν 4.3 slav-ms : ταντην om 95^ — εποιησαμην 2. 30. 
 — τΓΟϋλος δε εφη D : δί om 180. — δε aft εyω om 42. 9G. 142.— 29. for ευθ. ovv, τότε D : 
 ovv om 73 : δε 133. — και ot μελλ. 96. — πολίτης ρωμ. Ε ν. — αυτόν ην δεδ. ABCE 13. 
 
 sion and him who uttered it. The casting Ix. 17, mentions that, in the reign of Clau- 
 
 dust into the air was part of the same ges- dius, Messalina used to sell the freedom of 
 
 tare. Chrys. explains it, ριπτ άζοντες, ίκ- the city, and at very various prices at dif- 
 
 τινάσσονης. 24.] The tribune, not ferent times : »/ πολιτεία μεyάλωι> το πρώ- 
 
 understanding the language in which Paul τον χρημάτων πραθεΐσα,ίπειθ' όντως υπό 
 
 spoke, wished to extract from him by the της ευχέρειας ίπευωνήθη, ωςτε και λυγο- 
 
 scourge the reason which so exasperated ποιηθ?ιναι on κάΐ' ΰάλινά τις σκεύη συν- 
 
 the Jews against him. In this he was act- τετριμμένα δψ τιν'ι, πολίτης εσται. 
 
 ing illegally : ' Νοη esse a tormentis inci- εγώ δί καΐ γ€γ-] 'But I (besides having 
 
 piendum, Div. Augustus constituit.' Digest. the privilege like thee of being a Roman 
 
 Leg. 48. tit. 18.C. 1 (DeW.). Ιττίφών.] citizen) was also born one.' How was 
 
 ' they were thus crying out against him.' Paul a R. citizen by birth? Certainly 
 
 25.] ' And while they were bind- not because he was of Tarsus : for (1) that 
 
 ing him down with the thongs.' Dr. city had no such privilege, but was only an 
 
 Bloomfield quotes from Dio Cassius, xi. 49, ' urbs libera,' not a Colonia nor a Munici- 
 
 'AvTtyovov ίμαστίγωσε στανρψ πρυδη- pium : and (2) if this had been so, the 
 
 σαντες, and explains rightly, I think, the mention of his being a man of Tarsus (ch. 
 
 ■προ in both verbs to allude to the position xxi. 39 ; xxii. 3) would have of itself prc- 
 
 of the prisoner, which was, bent forward, vented his being scourged. It remains, 
 
 and tied with a sort of gear made of leather therefore, that his father or some ancestor 
 
 to an inclined post. De W. and others must have obtained the civitas, cither as a 
 
 render τοίς- Ίμΰσιν, 'for the scourge' (dat. reward for service (' urbes, mcrita erga P. R. 
 
 commodi) ; but why should μάστιΚιν be allegantes, civitate donavit,' Suet. 
 
 varied 'i and can it be shewn (as Dr. B. Aug. 4?) or by purchase. It has been 
 
 asks) that the word in the plural will bear suggested that the father of Saul may have 
 
 this meaning .' ίκατόνταρχον] The been sold into slavery at Rome, when Cas- 
 
 ' centurio supplicio pra'positiis' of Tacitus sins laid a heavy fine on the city for having 
 
 and Seneca, — standing by to superintend espoused the cause of Octavius and Antony, 
 
 the punishment. tl άνθ. κ-.τ.λ.] See Ajjpian, B. C. iv. 64, and very )iiany dl' the 
 
 ch. xvi. 37, note. 28.] Dio Cassius, Tarsians were sold to pay it. lie may have
 
 232 ΠΡΑΞΤΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXII. 30. 
 
 ji.hn vi. Γ>Γ. και ο γίλίαργος όε ίώοηηϋη '^ eiriyvovg οτι ΐΊομαιος abc 
 
 1"•Α'\'7• 1,. '^Ν „ '^^, , ' ^ SJ S ' 30 k - s^ . ' EGH 
 
 cii.iii.24. ίστιν και οτι νν αυτοι> όίΟΒκως. τη οε ίπανριον 
 
 g Luke xxiii. 7 ^ t i 
 
 ii pre.»., jniin ρουλομεΐΌς• 7vwi'at το ασφαΛες, το τι KUTrjyontiTat 
 
 iTrr. 19. ττορο T(ov Ιουοοίω^, ελυσεν αυτόν και εκιελευσεν συν- 
 
 „on.vlr., ch. - __ 
 
 kfoiinfisii.^c. ελθεΓν τους ο()-)(ΐε^ε(ς και παν το ° συνεδριον, και '' κατ- 
 
 I=ch.xxi.34 ν ^ π -Λ Ί•' ' ' ' V"VTTT 1 Γ ' 
 
 i-efi. α-νο^ωΐ' τον 1 Ιαυλον εστησεν εις αυτούς. ΛΛΐΙΙ. ατε- 
 
 inLukei.fi2. / ι ^ ^ __ _ rsi t ,/ λ 'ίνΛ> 
 
 iv.'2?."R!;m. νισας δε ο Παύλος τω ° συνεόριω ειττεν ' Ανδρες αδελψοι, 
 
 viii. 20. «\s/ t <^' t' 0"u Λ' ~ d " " 
 
 ii-ch.i.c εγω παστ? συνειοτ/σει ayauy ττεπολιτευμαι τω σεω αγ^ρι 
 
 oMatt!xxvi.3al. ρ cli ix 30 nft. q constr., here only, (.see ch. i. L'3.) Num. xxvii. 22. r vv. dat., 
 
 Luke IT. 20. ch. iii. 12. x. 4 ά\. LP. s = (all pos.sible) cli. xx. 1» refl. t 1 Tim. i. 5, 1!). 1 Pet. 
 
 Hi. Ifi. (ileb. xiii. 18.) u Phil, i.27 uiilyf. μ£τύ πάσηί . . ■ ΰρίτΓιν ίμί^ύόε ποπολιτει/μαι, 
 
 Jos. Life, } 4!Ι and } 2. Tois νύμυιί πολιτΕΐΈσΟια, 2 M:icc. vi. 1. 
 
 73 Till- [corrn of characteristic order) : txt GO most mss Chr ThP Oec. — for δίδεκως, 
 δίδωκοις Λ' SO-»". 7:5. i»i). l()l-() al Till• : it^jjKOJC A'C : διδοικως QG-. 105 : add και αντη 
 τη ωρα t\va(i' αντον syr* : και παραχρήμα t\. αντ. 137• {Henceforth in Acts, Γ) being 
 deficient, its readings may l/e apjjroximated to by noticing those of its nearest cognates, 
 137 andsyr*.) — 30. ιπιονση 137• — κατιιγορίΐτο 137• — for πάρα, υπο (substitution of more 
 ns-ual prepn) ABCE 13. 15. 18 &c 137-80 all Chr TliF : t.\t GH most mss (appy) Chr ThP 
 Oec. — πψψπς ίλ. 137• — rec aft αντον add αττο τωΐ' διπμων (sicpplementary gloss), with 
 GH &c ar-pol slav Thl Oec: txt ABCE 14. 30. 40. 08-9. 73. 97• 105-13-42-80 all ν syrr 
 ar-erp copt sah seth arm Chr. — rec iXQuv {see note: or the preceding -σιν perhaps (as 
 Meyer) caused the omn of σνν-), with GH &c Syr copt al ThP Oec: ειςελθίΐν 99. 137 : 
 txt ABCE 14. 15». 18. 31-6. 40. 68-9. 73 98. 105-30-33-42-80 al ν sah ieth al Chr ThP. 
 —rec όλον τ. συν. (see Matt xxvi. 59, || Mk), with GH al Thl' Oec: txt ABCE 13 to 
 15. 31-6-8. 68-9. 73. 81. 105-30-33 37-80 all lect 40 ν (otnne) Chr ThP.— rec συι/ίί. 
 αντων (gloss, referring to ιουδαίων above), with GH al &c arr (Syr) al Thl Oec : txt 
 ABCE 14'. 15. 18. 36. 40-5. 68-9. 73. 105-30-37-40-80 al lect 40 ν copt sah selh arm 
 syr al Chr. 
 
 Chap. XXIII. 1. τω σνν. ο ir. ACE 3 ν Syr Lucif : txt (om ο Β 40. 57. 130-37-80 
 al Chrj) BGH 13. 69. 105 al vss Chr Thl Oec: (v τω συν. 40 ν ThP Lucif.— Γω 
 θίϋ) om 14' : ante Deum ν Syr arr Cassiod Lucif. — της ημ. ταυτ. 13. 13/ : for 
 
 acquired his freedom and the citizenship received, would rather have relieved, than 
 
 afterwards. See Mr. Lewin, i. p. 4. But occasioned, the fear of the tribune. A more 
 
 this is mere conjecture. 29. και . . . cogent reason still is, that ήν δίδίκώς can 
 
 he] ' moreover,' ' more than that.' properly only apply to an action still con- 
 
 έψοβ.] There is no inconsistency (as De W.) tinning when the fear was felt : ' that lie had 
 
 in the tribune's being afraid because he had put Mm into custody.' ' The centurion 
 
 bound him, and then letting him remain believed Paul's word, because a false claim 
 
 thus bound. Meyer rightly explains it, that of this nature, being easily exposed, and pu- 
 
 the tribune, having committed this error, is nishable with death (Suet. Claud, 25) was 
 
 afi-aid of the possible consequences of it almost an unprecedented thing.' Hackett. 
 
 (' facinus est vinciri civem R., scelus verbe- 30. το τί] The art. is epexegetical : see 
 
 rari,' Cic. Verr. v. G6), and shews this by reff. It seems remarkable that the tribune 
 
 taking the first opportunity of either un- in command should have had the power to 
 
 doing it, or justifying his further deten- summon the Sanhedrim : and I have not 
 
 Hon, by loosing him, and bringing him be- seen this remarked on by any commentator. 
 
 fore the Sanhedrim. His fear was on ac- Some of the ancient correctors of the text, 
 
 count of his first false step : but it was now however, seem to have detected thedifficulty, 
 
 too late to reverse it : and the same reason and to have altered ^vviXOtlvinto the vapid 
 
 which leads him to continue it now, operates tXOtXv in consequence. καταγ.] From 
 
 afterwards (ό ίίσμιος Π., ch. xxiii. 18) when Antonia to the council-room. According to 
 
 the hearing was delayed. That yv δεδικώς tradition (see Biscoe, p. 147, notes), the San- 
 
 cannot, as Dr. Bloomfield su]iposes, refer hedrim ceased to hold their sessions in the 
 
 only to the binding before scourging, its temple about twenty-six years before this 
 
 immediate juxtajiosition with t\vatv in the period. Had they done so now, Lysias and 
 
 next ver. sufficiently shews. Besides, the his soldiers could not have been present, as 
 
 mere circumstance of a preparation for no heathen was permitted to pass the sacred 
 
 scourging having been begun in ignorance, limits. Their present council-room was in 
 
 and left off as soon as the knowledge was the upper city, near the foot of the bridge
 
 χχιττ. 1— ; 
 
 πρα;=:εις αποστολών. 
 
 233 
 
 ταύτης της ημίοας. " ο δε αρ-χ^ΐΐρζυς Ανανιας ^ επίΓαξεν ^ Jii.jt'^jf^i' 
 
 -_ - 5-/ ,_ν/ 3'' Lake vUi. 31 
 
 τοις παοΒστωσιν αυτω τνπτίΐν αυτού το στόμα. τυτε ο ai. winr. 
 
 Π~\ " ,ν*••? rn/ ν '\\ ' α ^ pre3., here 
 
 ουΛος προς αυτόν ειπεν ιυπτίΐν σε μεΛΛει ο σεος, ""'y- ^«-η. 
 
 ι ' ' Anab. π. 3 fi 
 
 Γθΐ)ζε ^ κ•εκ:ονιομενε /cat συ Kauij κηινων μζ κατά τον as.) 
 νομον, και παοανομων κελεύεις με τυπτεσυαι , οι οε s^ree: 
 τταρίστωτες ύττον Τον αρχιερέα του θεού λοιοορεΓί; ; 
 
 K>r, 'γτ-λ Γ\'< '"^ '^Λι^" ' ' ' y Matt, χ; 
 
 t(pr\ τί Ο υαυλος Όυκ rjctiv, αοελψοι, οτί εστίν αργ^ιε- ^γοπκ. 
 
 2,4. Ρτον xsi. Η. ζ = ch. sii. 21. XXV. 6, 17. Matt, xxiii. 2. a here only. Ps.cxiiii. 51. 
 
 Xen. Mem. iv. 4. 21. b w. ace, John ix. 28. Deut. xxsiii. 8. pas.s., 1 Cor. iv. 12. ] Pet. ii. 23. 
 
 7ΐμ., ώρας 7. 69. 105.— 2. for εττετ., ίκίλίνσιν C 15. 18. 36. 69. 73. 105-30-80 al : aft 
 αυτω 137• — αντον om 180. — 3. απ. πρ. αντ. C ν (not am). — κικονιασμενι C Orig. — 
 for παράνομων, τταρα τον νομοί' Ε ν al Lucif. — 4. tnrai' Β. — 5. τι cm 96. 142: Ci ν 
 sah. — i;r;;38.— aft οτι ins μου Syr sah seth. — ort op^orr. AB 13 sah Thl- : txt CEGH 
 
 X here only. 
 
 Exod. XXX. 
 
 Sal. 
 y Matt, xxiii. 
 
 leading across the Γ3\ηπβ from the western 
 cluiiter of the temple. Lewin, p. 672. 
 
 XXIII. 1.] άτ€νίσας seems to describe 
 that peculiar look, connected probably 
 with infirmity of sight, with which Paul is 
 described before as regarthug those before 
 him : and may perhaps account for his not 
 knowing that the person who spoke to him 
 was the high priest, ver. 5. See ch. xiii. 9, 
 note. — The purport of Paul's assertion 
 seems to be this : being charged with ne- 
 glecting, and teaching others to neglect the 
 law of Moses, he at once endeavours to 
 disarm those who thus accused him, by as- 
 serting that up to that day fie had lived a 
 true and hyal Jew, — obeying, according 
 to his conscience, the law of that divine 
 πολίΓ£(ο of which he was a covenant mem- 
 ber. Thus τΓΐττολίτίνμαι τψ θίψ will have 
 its full and proper meaning : and the words 
 are no vain-glorious ones, but an important 
 assertion of his innocence. 2. *Ava- 
 
 vias] He was at this time the actual High 
 Priest (ver. 4). He was the son of Nebe- 
 daeus (Jos. Antt. xx. 5. 2),— succeeded 
 Joseph son of Camydus, Antt. xx. 1. 3, 
 and 5. 2, — and preceded Ismael, son of 
 Phabi (Antt. xx. 8. 8, and 11). He was 
 nominated to the office by Herod, king of 
 Chalcis, in a.d. 48 (Antt. xx. 5. 2) ; and sent 
 to Rome by Quadratus, the prefect of Syria, 
 to give an account to the emperor Claudius 
 (Antt. xx. 6. 2) : he appears, however, not to 
 have lost his office, but to have resumed it 
 on his return. This has been regarded as 
 not certain, — and the uncertainty has pro- 
 duced much confusion in the Pauline chro- 
 nology. But as Wieseler has shewn (Chro- 
 nol. d. Apostelgeschichte, p. 76, note), 
 there can be no reasonable doubt that it 
 was so, especially as Ananias came off vic- 
 torious in the cause for which he went to 
 Rome, viz. a (juarrcl with the Jewish ))ro- 
 curator Cumanus, — wlio went with him, 
 and was condemned to banishment (Antt. 
 
 XX. 6. 3). He was deposed from his office 
 not long before the departure of Felix (Antt. 
 XX. 8. 8), but still had great power, which 
 he used violently and lawlessly (ib. 9. 2) : 
 he was assassinated by the sicarii at last 
 (B. J. ii. 17. 9). 3.] It is perfectly 
 
 allowable (even if the fervid rebuke of Paul 
 be considered exempt from blame) to con- 
 trast with his conduct and reply that of Him 
 Who, when similarly smitten, answered with 
 perfect and superhuman meekness, John 
 xviii. 22, 23. Our blessed Saviour is to us, 
 in all His words and acts, the jjerfect pat- 
 tern for all under all circumstances : by 
 aiming at whatever He did in each case, 
 we shall do best : but even the greatest of 
 his Apostles are so far our patterns only, 
 as they followed Him, which certainly in 
 this case Paul did not. That Paul thus 
 answered, might go far to excuse a like 
 fervid reply in a Christian or a minister of 
 the gospel, — but must never be used to 
 justify it : it may serve for an apology, but 
 never for an example. ττίιττίΐν σε 
 
 μέλλει κ.τ.λ.] Some have seen a prophetic 
 import in these words ; — see above on the 
 death of Ananias. But I would rather 
 take them as an expression founded on a 
 conviction that God's just retribution would 
 come on unjust and brutal acts. τοίχε 
 
 κεκον.] Lightfoot's interp., " quod (Ana- 
 nias) colorem tantum gestaret pontificatus, 
 cum res ipsa evanuerit," is founded on the 
 hypothesis {for it is none other') that the 
 high priesthood was vacant at this time, 
 and A. had thrust himself into it. The 
 meaning is as in reff. ; and in all jjrobability 
 he referred in thought to our Lord's saying. 
 κάθτ) κρίνων με] This must not be 
 taken as favouring the common interjjreta- 
 tion of ver. 5 (see below) : for the irliolc 
 Sanhedrim were the judges, and sitting to 
 judge him according to the law. 4.] 
 
 Hence we see that not oidy by flic Jews, 
 but by the tribune, who was present, Ana-
 
 234 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXIII. 
 
 cExoD. χχϋ. οίυς' yi -γραπται yap "^ ' Αρχοντα του λάου σου ουκ ' ίοεις• abc 
 κακώς. ^ yvoitc δε ο Παύλος οτι το εν μέρος 
 
 d so καλώ? ^ / * ι 4 ■' 
 
 ΣαδcoυίcαιωJ', το οε έτερο 
 
 (LXX. >-_*'. ν ' ί^ ' ΤΤ '- λ " ^ •^ ' e ' ' ^ ' Ε^« 
 
 aiex.) κ-ηκωο. ννουτ οε ο ΙΙαυΛος οτί το εν μίξ>ος εστίν 
 
 ace Lake ^"«^^">^"•"'"'. , • " δε ετερον Φαρισαιων, έκΐιοα^εΐ' εν τω συν- 
 
 e pres.!'^john i. εΒρίω ' Ανδρες αδελφοί, εγω Φαρισαιος ει /uc, υιός Φαρισαιων* 
 
 
 ^ -ifcie'oni' """^ρι ελτΓίοος και αναστάσεως νεκρών εγω κρίνομαι. 
 
 hell. χνϋ. 32 a!. 
 
 i = cli. .-ixiv. 21. χχνί. β. 
 
 mss (nrly) Chr Thl- Oec. — 6. φαρισαιων το St ir. aadcovK. 38. 113: και το er. 95 sah. 
 — ίκραζίν BC al : txt AEGH al ν al Chr al. — rec υι. φαρισαιου (corrn, the relation 
 being conceived to be that of a son to his father only), with EGH Bed-gr al vss Chr al: 
 txt ABC 13. 15. 3G. 40. 81. 12(»-30 al ν Syr Tert : add και 32 Syr arr aeth syr* Chr- 
 comm. — bef avaar., om και Syr arr seth. — tytx) (2nd) om BC^ copt al.— 7. for λαλ., 
 
 niaa was regarded as the veritable high 
 priest. 5.] (1) The ordinary inter- 
 
 pretation of these words since Lightfoot, 
 adopted by Michaelis, Eichhorn, Kuinoel, 
 and others, is, that Ananias had ttsurped 
 the office during a vacancy, and therefore 
 was not recognized by Paul. They regard 
 his being sent to Rome as a virtual setting 
 aside from being high priest, and suppose 
 that Jonathan, who vvas murdered by order 
 of Felix (Antt. xx. 8. 5), was appointed 
 high priest in his absence. But (a) there 
 is no ground whatever for beheving that his 
 office was vacated. He won the cause for 
 which he went to Rome, and returned to 
 Jerusalem : it was only when a high priest 
 was detained as hostage in Rome, that we 
 read of another being appointed in his room 
 (Antt. XX. 8. 11 ) : and (/3) which is fatal to the 
 hypothesis, Jonathan himself {b άρχαμιύς) 
 teas sent to Rome with Ananias. (B. J. ii. 
 12. 6, Toi'Q άρχκρίΐς Ίωνάθην και Άνα- 
 viav .... άΐ'έπίμφίΡ tni Καίσαρα,) 
 Jonathan was called by the title merely as 
 having been previously H. P. He suc- 
 ceeded Caiaphas, Antt. xviii. 4. 3 : and he 
 was not H. P. again afterwards, having 
 expressly declined to resume the office, 
 Antt. xix. G. 4. Nor can any other Jona- 
 than have been elevated to it, — for Jose- 
 phus gives, in every case, the elevation of a 
 new H. P., and his whole number of twenty- 
 eight from Herod the Great to the destruc- 
 tion of Jerus. (Antt. xx. 1(1), agrees with 
 the notices thus given. (See Wieseler, 
 Chron. Synops. dcr 4 Ενν. p. 187, note: 
 and Biscoe, pp. 48 ft.) So that this inter- 
 pretation is untenable. (2) Chrys. and 
 most of the ancient comm. supposed that 
 Paul, having been long absent, was really 
 unacquainted with the person of the H. P. 
 But this can hardly have been : and even if 
 it were, the position and official seat would 
 have pointed out to one, who had been 
 himself a member of the Sanhedrim, the 
 president of the council. (3) Calvin, Ca- 
 merar., al., take the words ironically : ' I 
 could not be supposed to know that one who 
 
 conducted himself so cruelly and illegally, 
 could be the H. P.' This surely needs no 
 refutation, as being altogether out of place 
 and cliaracter. (4) Bengel, Wetst., Kui- 
 noel, Olsh., Neander, al., understand the 
 words as an acknowledgment of rash and 
 insubordinate language, and render ονκ 
 ydeiv, 'I did not give ii a thought,' 'I 
 forgot.' But as Meyer remarks, ' reputare ' 
 is never the meaning of tlekvai; and were 
 any pregnant or unusual sense intended, tlie 
 context (as at 1 Thess. v. 12) would suggest 
 it. (5) On the whole then, I believe that 
 the only rendering open to us, consistently 
 with the simple meaning of the words, and 
 the facts of history is, ' I did not know 
 that it (or he) was the high priest:' and 
 that it is probable that the solution of his 
 ignorance lies in the fact of his imperfect 
 sight — he heard the insolent order given, 
 but knew not from whom it proceeded. I 
 own that I am not entirely satisfied with 
 this, as being founded perhaps on too slight 
 premises : but as far as I can see there is 
 no positive objection to it, which there is to 
 every other. — It is hardly worth while to 
 notice the rendering given by some, ' I 
 knew not that there iras a High Priest.' 
 Had any such meaning been intended, it 
 would have been further specified by the 
 construction. Besides which, it renders 
 Paul's apology irrelevant, by eliminating 
 from it the person who is necessarily its 
 subject. γεγρατΓται γάρ] Implying 
 
 in this, * and the law is the rule of my life.' 
 Even in this we see the consummate skill of 
 Paul. 6.] Surely no defence of Paul 
 
 for adopting this course is required, but all 
 admiration is due to his skill and presence 
 of mind. Nor need we hesitate to regard 
 such skill as the fulfilment of the promise, 
 that in such an hour, the Spirit of wisdom 
 should suggest words to the accused, which 
 the accuser should not be able to gainsay. 
 All prospect of a fair trial was hopeless : he 
 well knew from fact, and present experi- 
 ence, that personal odium would bias his 
 judges, and violence prevail over justice:
 
 6—10. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 2S5 
 
 k = ch. XT. 2. 
 
 ProT. xvii. 14, 
 1 ch. xiv. 4. 
 
 1 Mace. vi. 
 
 40. 
 m absol.jch. 
 
 xvii. 18 reff. 
 η = Luke 
 
 xxiT. 37,39. 
 
 John IV. 24. 
 
 Heb. i. 14. 
 ο = John xii. 
 
 42. 1 Tim. 
 
 vi 12. 
 ρ Matt. xsv. 6. 
 
 Nth. v. 1. 
 q = ch. i. 15. 
 
 XV. 7 al. 
 r εΙΝρ.•;., here 
 — ch.xix. 2rcir. 
 
 ' τοΐιτο Be αυτού ΧαΧησαντος eytveTO στάσις των Φαρι- 
 σαιων και Σαδδυυκα/ων, και ίσ-χίσθη το πΧηθος' ^ Σαδ- 
 οουκαιοι μίν yap Aeyovaiv μτ] είναι αναστασιν μήτε ay- 
 yeXov μήτε " πνεύμα, Φαρισαΐοι δε ° oμoXoyovσιv τα αμφό- 
 τερα' ^ έyεvετo δε '' Kpavyrj μεγάλη. και ^ αναστάντες 
 οι ypaμμaτεις τον "^ μέρους των Φαρισαιων ^ Βιεμάγοντο 
 Xεyovτες ΟυΒεν κακόν ' ενρ'ισκομεν εν τω ανθρωπω τούτω' 
 " ει οε " τη'ευμα εΧάΧησεν αυτω η άγγελος ; ττολλης δε 
 
 only. shereonly. 2 Kings xiv. 6 (var. read.) Sir.viii.l. t = Luke xxiii.l4. Mal.ii.6. u 
 
 ttvovrog AE 13. U\ 27-9. 40-3. 6G'-8-9. 98-9. 105-33 al {diaisset v) ThP : txt 
 (λαλονντος Β iiG'. 95. 100 al) CGH most mss (appy) Chr Thl• Oec— for eyiviro, 
 ίττίττίσιν Β (ίπίσί 1' Birch, but err). — rec των σαδ. {insn for uniformUy), with GH al 
 Oec: των β. κ. φ. Ε al Sj'r al Chr Thl- : και σ. om all : txt ABC all Ύ\ιΙΚ—δί(σχισθη 
 Ε (Lachm inserts μεν aft ίσχισθ?), alleging for it ACEt, but evidently in error. He omits 
 it aft σαδδ.). — 8. μεν om Β e ν sab : ins ACE-gr GH al copt syrr al Chr al. — γαρ om 
 93. 177' sah. — rec for the first μητι, μηίε {corrn, see note), with GH most mss Chr Thl^ 
 Oec: txt ABCE 13. 15. 18. 36-8. 40. 93. 104-5-30 al lect 5 ThP.— for τα αμφ., 
 h(EC omnia Syr arr £eth.— 9. for ot yp., γραμματείς GH 4. 18. 95'-G-8. 100-1-42-77 
 all lect 14 al : twi' γραμμάτιων Chrj : τίνες των γραμματέων (fK των γ. C) 
 BC 15. 3G. 40. G8-9. 73. 105-30-37-80 al lect 12 syr sah arm Did Chr; ThP: τίνες 
 (omg των γραμμ.) AE 13. 15. 25 ν copt: των φαρισαιων γραμματέων 31: scriia 
 et phariscei aeth : txt mss (?) ThP {notiviihsianding this tceak authority, the rec 
 seems to have been original. First ot teas omd to remove the idea, considered imjn'o- 
 hable, that all the γρ. τ. μερ. τ. φα p. ivere concerned : then τίνες was introduced, and 
 γραμ. του μ. omd as not understood, or perhaps from similarity of endings). — του 
 μέρους om AE 13. 15. 25 ν copt {quidam scribarvni et pars phar. sah, scriba et phar. 
 seth) : T. γένους 99. 105 al. — εν om 137. — for ει δε, ιδε G6-marg : ει δε καν 42. 57- — 
 rec aft αγγεΧος, ins μη θεομαχωμεν {interpoln from ch v. 39), with C^GH many mss 
 sah al Chr (text-ed)Thl (te.xt) Oec (text) {quid est in hoc i" Syr ar-erp) (ποιον έγκλημα: 
 Chr (comm) .■■) : txt ABC'E 3. 13. 40. 60- ν copt seth arm syr, also (from their explana- 
 
 he therefore (Neand.) uses, in the cause of 
 Truth, the maxim so often perverted to the 
 cause of falsehood, ' divide et impera.' In 
 one tenet above all others, did the religion of 
 Jesus Christ and the belief of the Pharisees 
 coincide: that of the resiin ection of the 
 dead. That they looked for this resurrec- 
 tion by right of being the seed of Abraham, 
 and denied it to all others, — whereas he 
 looked for it through Jesus whom they 
 bated, in whom all should be made alive 
 who had died in Adam, — this was nothing 
 to the present point : the belief was com- 
 mon — in the truest sense it was the hope of 
 Israel — in the truest sense does Paul use 
 and bring it forward to confound the adver- 
 saries of Christ. At the same time (De 
 W.) by this strong assertion of his Pharisaic 
 standing and extraction, he was further still 
 vindicating himself from the charge against 
 biiii. So also ch. xxvi. 7. vi. Φαρι- 
 
 σαιων] ' A son of Pharisees,' i. o. ' A 
 Pharisee of Pharisees,' — ' by descent from 
 father, grandfather, and upwards, a pure 
 Pharisee.' This meaning not having been 
 apprehended, tlic• -ων was altered into -on. 
 ίλτΓ. κ. άναστ.] ' the hope and the 
 resurrection of the dead.' The art. is 
 
 omitted after the prep., see Midd. ch. vi. § 1. 
 8.] See note. Matt. iii. 7, for both 
 Pharisees and Sadducees : and for an ac- 
 count of the doctrine of the latter, Jos. 
 Antt. xviii. 1. 4. B. J. ii. 8. 14. In the 
 latter place he says, 'φνχής την διαμονήν, 
 και τός καθ' ^δυυ τιμωρίας καΊ τιμάς 
 άναιροΰσι. — The former μήτε has been 
 altered to μηδέ to suit τα αμφότερα, be- 
 cause with άναστ. μήτε άγγ. μήτε πν. 
 three things are mentioned (and thus we 
 have hcec omnia as a var.) : whereas, if 
 μηδέ is read, the two last are coupled, and 
 form 07ily one. But τά άμφ. is used of 
 both things, the one being the resurrection, 
 the other the doctrine of spiritual cv- 
 istences : the two specified classes of the 
 latter being combined generically. — τίί 
 άμφ., ' them both,' ' both of them,' — ' the 
 two.' 9.] The sentence is an apo- 
 
 siopesis, not requiring any filling uji : an- 
 swering to our Engl. ' But what if a spirit 
 (genus) or an angel (s])e(ies) have spoken 
 to him?' Perhaps in this they referred to 
 the history of his conversion as told to the 
 people, ch. xxii.— On the recent criticism 
 which sees in all this a purpose in tlio 
 writer to compare Paul with Peter, see
 
 ζ = John vi. 15. 
 
 ch 
 acli. X 
 
 reff 
 b cli. X 
 
 reff. - 12 i ' 5'^ 
 
 cch.Tii.2i>ren. /αα|θτυ^ϊίσαι. ^ίνομίνης Oc ■ημες)ας ποιησανης σν- 
 
 '' iTa'i''''""'' οτροφην ot 'Ιουδαίοι ανίΒίμάησαν ίαντους, XayovTeg 
 ^ Gen.i\ui.\' ^^ μητε (payeiv μίιτε ττιειν ίως ού αττοκτεινωσιν τον ΥΙαυΧον 
 
 See ch. νιίί. 
 
 fch xxviii 31 ^JOOv o£ πΛίίους τε(τσαρακ:ονΓα οι ταντην την συνωμο- 
 
 Sir. χίχ.έϋ. ' ' / 14 Ο'' ρ ΛΟ' .-j 
 
 g=ch.Tiii 40. σιαΐ' ποιησαμίνοι, οιτινες ^ ■ΐΓξ)ονεΑϋοντες τοις apyjLi- 
 
 b Luke ,xxjv.^^ ρξυσιν και τοις ττρεσβυτεξίοις είπαν ^^ Αναθεματι ανεβε- 
 ί 'h.'^^d. is reS. ματ ίσαμεν εαυτούς μηβενος '' γίυσασθαι εως ού αποκτει- 
 
 kch.xix 4U ν_ Κ- •> f " Ι ' , > 
 
 rc-fi.-a Kings νωμεν τον ΙΙανλον. νυν ουν υμεις εμφανίσατε τω 
 
 1 here, &C., and Miirk .\ίν. 71 only. Deut. xiii. IS. ni ch. ix. 9. η here only. See Gen. xiv. 13. 
 
 ο = ch. X 41, 47. xiii. 42, 43 al. ρ = rh. ix. 1 reff. pp Rom. ix. 3 refl. q = and cuiistr., 
 
 1 Kings xiv. 24. r = Heb. xi. 14. Esth. ii. 22. 
 
 tions) Ammon Isid-pel Euthal Chr (mss) Thl Oec. — 10. στασ. yev. AC ν sah al : txt 
 (yn'0;u. B) BEGH all mss (appy) Syr al Chr Thl Oec. — for (υλαβ., (pnjSijOng {substitu- 
 tion of more usual word) ABCE Υλ. 14•. 15. 18. 3G. 40. G8-9. 73. 105-30-37 80 lect 
 12 arm slav-mod Chr ThP Lucif : txt GH most mss (apjiy) Thl' Oec. — απ αυτών CE. — 
 τω στραΓίΐιματι lect 12. — καταβηΐ'αί και (corrn) GH all ν syr slav sah Thl Oec: txt 
 ABCE all Syr al Chr. — mraytiv (corrn for particularity) AE (v syr al.•" deducere : re- 
 ducere Lucif) : txt B(e sil)CGH mss (appy) vss Thl Oec: ayaytiv 13 Chr. — rt om Β al 
 vss. — 11. rec θαρ. τταυλΐ (supplementary corrn), with C'GHal (Syr seth al) Thl Oec Cas- 
 siod Ambrst : txt ABCE 13. 32-G. 40. 09. 113-30-37-80 ν copt sah arm syr Chr Lucif.— 
 διιμαρΓνί)ον C: ίμηρτιψω 90. — Sfi σε 42. 57 : Sti 130. — (v {ΐωμη 1 lect 12 sah Thl. — 
 12. re Β seth syr. — rec τιΐ'ίς των ιουδαίων συστροφηΐ' (corrn to suit ver 13), with ΰ(σνσ. 
 Tiv. T. I.) Η al vss Thl' Oec : txt ABCE (or oi t. σ.) 13. 15. 27-9. 3G-7. 40. 09. 73. 80. 
 103-5-30 37-80 copt syr seth arm Chr ThP.—\tyovT(Q om C 4'. 38. 40. 66-9. 73. 03. 105-13. 
 syrr arm ar-erp Chr. — μ7]τε (pay. om 64'. — αηλωσιν A 14. 38. 1 13 Chr. — 13. rec τίσσαρ. 
 see Prolegg.— rec πίποιηκοης (corrn appy to connect τηπ. ήσαν as pluperf), with Η al 
 Chr Thl Oec: ττοιησαντίς G 11. 27-9. 80. 126: txt ABCE 13. 15. 18. 36. 40. 68-9. 
 105-30-80 Thl-.— 14. itptvai 73.— rec ηπον, with GHal: txt ABCE &\.— rec μηδενός 
 (corrn to more usual J orm), with B(esil)CEH &c : txt AG &c. — 15. syr-marg (and simly 
 sah Lucif) has nunc igitur royamus vos ut hoc nobis facialis, ut qmim congregaveritis 
 consessum, indicetis iribuno ut producat eum ad nos (vos Lucif). — ow om 42. — νμεις 
 
 Prolegg. to Acts, § iii. 4. 10. δια- uncertainty of his surviving the storm in 
 
 ο-ττασθη] to be taken literally, not as the Mediterranean : (4) in the uncertainty 
 
 merely = 'should be killed.' The Phari- of his fate on arriving at Rome. So may 
 
 sees would strive to lay hold of him to res- one crumb of divine grace and help be 
 
 cue him : the Sadducees, to destroy him, multiplied to feed five thousand wants and 
 
 or at all events to secure him. Between anxieties. eU, see reff. and ch. ii. 39, 
 
 them both, there was danger of his being — pregnant. 12.] oi Ίουδ. as op- 
 
 * pulled asunder by them.' 11.] By posed to Paul, the subjectof the former verse. 
 
 these few words, the Lord assured him (1) The copyists thought it unhkely that all the 
 
 of a safe issue from his present troubles-, Jews were engaged in it, and so altered it 
 
 (2) of an accomplishment of his intention to τίνες τών'Ιυυό. and then transposed it 
 
 of visiting Rome ; (3) of the certainty that for euphony. — Wetstein and Lightf. adduce 
 
 however he might be sent thither, he should instances of similar conspiracies, — not to 
 
 preach the gospel and bear testimony there. eat or drink till some object be gained. See 
 
 So that they upheld and comforted him 1 Sam. xiv. 24 ff. ; and Jos. Antt. xv. 8. 3, 4. 
 
 (1) in the uncertainty of his life from the 14.] It is understood from the nar- 
 
 Jews : (2) in the uncertainty of his libera- rative that it was to the Sadducees, among 
 
 lion from prison at Ccesarea .• (3) in the the cliief priests and elders, that the mur- 
 
 KuH 
 
 236 πρα;ξ:εις αποστολών. XXIIl. 
 
 vver.7. "γενομενι^ς " στάσεως, ευΧαβηθεις ο "^ιλιαρ^^ος μη '"'' όια- abc 
 
 only, jer.il. g.^^jj.gy ^j Γϊαϋλος ύτΓ ourwv, εκίΧευοεν το '^ στξ>ατευμα 
 
 χ — • Lake γ Ο^/*' '^a*' >— >/ » 
 
 xxiii. 11. • καταΐίαν ' αρπασαι αυτόν εκ μέσου αυτών αγειν τε εις 
 ^nff!''^^'" ''■^'' ^ τταρεμβοΧην. ^^ Ty δε ^ έττιουσ^ νυκτΐ '^ επιστας 
 m."u." αύτω ο κυξ)ΐος ειττεν θά^σεΓ ως yap ^ όιεμαρτυρω τα 
 xi.35 '''^Ρ' εμοΰ ^ εις Ιερουσαλήμ, ούτως σε ''δει και ^ εις Ρώμην
 
 11—20. ΠΡΑ;ξ:εΙΣ αποστολών. 237 
 
 ;iv. 22 
 Num. 
 
 xsxiii. nfi. 
 
 2 Mhcc. ix. 
 
 16 
 
 al. Is. xxvi. 
 IH. 
 d consir.. Matt, 
 xi. 1?. Luke 
 xxi. <J al. 
 
 χίλιαρχω ^ συν τω σννί^ρ'ιω, οττως " KUTCiyayrj αύτον s = ι cor. i. 2. 
 £ΐς υ^ίας ^ ως μέλλοντας '''' ^ια-γινωσκειν ^ ακριβεστερον ^^^''^-^'r.^^^ 
 
 ν ^ ' ' -, ' - ?>\ ζ ' - a ' ' ' > b" u — cb. ix 30. 
 
 τα περί αυτού τιμεις οε ττρο του eyyiaai αυτόν ετοι- ver. asais. 
 
 t ' -Γ' Λ- '' Ifid' ' ^w't^ - Rora.x.O. 
 
 ^01 εσμεν του ανελειν αυτόν. άκουσας οε ο υιός τίΐς p^s'^^'^Bs 
 
 αόελφης Παύλου το "^ έι^εδρον, πanayεv6μεvoς κα\ εις- ^ 22.''''ι cor!'x. 
 
 εΛσων εις τϊ/ν ^ παρεμροΛην aπηyyε^λεv τω Ιίαυλω. ^^'^^ 
 
 ' προςκαλεσάμενος δε ο Παύλος εΐ'α των εκατονταργό)ν ϊχΐί 
 
 ,r rp > h ' - i ' ' » ^ Λ / . ? ^' 
 
 ...χι- εψη Ιον νεανιαν τούτον a•π^ayayε προς τον ■γιλιαργον ij• 
 ABE εΛι^ει -yap η aπayyε^Aaι αυτω. ο μεν ουν παραλαρων yver ιι. 
 
 Gli 1 \ ■>! \ \ ->; ; '/^l'^/ zLukexxii.15 
 
 αυτοί' l]yayεv προς τον χιΛια|θγου, και φησιν U οεσμιος a'• cen. χϋΐ. 
 Παύλος προς/οαλεσά/ιει^ος με "' ηοώτλ/σεν τούτον τον ^^^^.^" ss 
 
 h /5 - r ,f / •..!«, b constr., here 
 
 νεαί'ίαν ayayiiv προς σε, ενόντα τι λαλϊ7σοι σοι. oniy 
 ° εττιλοβο^ιενος οε τ>)ς )(εφος αυτοϋ ο χιλίαρχος και "'■ ' 
 ° ανα•^ωρησας ^ κατ ιόιαν '' εττυνθάΐ'ετο Τί έστιν ο έγεις 
 aπayyειλaί /ttoi ; " είττεν δε οτι οί Ίουδα/οι "^ συνεθεΐ'το *" o^"y'''/„7, 
 
 S-t' "' t" u" ^ TT "Λ V viii. 2. VVisd. 
 
 του ερωτησαί σε όπως αυοιον τον ιιανλον κατ- χίν 2ΐ. fem., 
 ayayyς εις το ^ συνεόριον ως μέλλων τι " ακριβεστερον νϊίΐ^ν/^*''• 
 
 f absol., Lnkexii. 51 reff rh. ix. 3!». g cli. xxi 35 reff. h ch. xx. 9 al. i= Luke xiii. 15. 
 
 eh. XXIV. 7. k ch. xvi. 33 reff. 1 ch. xvi. 25, 27 reff. m = ch. iii. 2. η Mark viii. 23. 
 
 (Ezek. xxix. 7.) ο Matt. ii. 14, 22 al. ch. xxvi 31, 1 Kings xix. Id. ρ Matt. xiv. 13, 23. 
 
 xvii 1. 2 Macx. iv. 5. q = ch. iv. 7. x. 29. r Luke xxii. 5. John ix. 22. Dan. ii. 9. 
 
 s cou.str., Luke xxii. ti. 1 Cor. ix 10. t Luke \ ii. 5. xi. 37. u Matt. V. 3U 0. I^a. xxii. 13. 
 
 V ch. ix. 3(1 refl'. wch. xxii. 30. χ = ch.xviii. 26 reff. 
 
 om 13. — συν τω σννε^ρ. om 99 Lucif : και τ. σ. 8. 9 Syr copt seth : ti> r. σ. Chr. — 
 rec οττως avmov {interpoln from ver 20), with GH al Thl Oec : t.iit ABCE 13. 14'. 15. 
 36. (69?) 73. 105-30-80 ν svrr ar-erp copt sah aeth arm Chr Lucif. — rec αντ. καταγ., 
 with Η al vss ff: txt ABCEG 13. 38. 40-2.57. 69. 73. 105-13-26-30 ν arm Lucif: αυτόν 
 κατα-^αγη αυτόν 06 : om αντον 4^ : αγαγη 133. — rec ττοος νμ. (corrn to more usual), with 
 CGH al Chr al : txt ABE 69. 105 sah.— ακο. Siaytv. C 73. 130-7 ν Syr Lucif (yirionK. C) : 
 διανα-γινωσκίΐν 42 : add ως και ην 73. — τα om 137 : for αυτόν, αντων 73 sah. — 137 syr- 
 marff have του (om E) ai'e\. avr. tav cti] και αττοθανίΐν. — 16. την n'iSoav ACE al 
 Ύ\Α^ {corrn to more usual): txt BGH 1. 14. 38. 42. 57. 66i. 76-8. 80. 95 to 98, 
 113-26 33-42-77 all Chr ThP Oec— 17. tiirtv C \8u.—vtov 1 : ηανκ^κυν 42. 57.— 
 a-Tvayt Β al (alii aliter).— ατταγγ. τι {corrn) ABE 13: txt CGH mis (nrly) ν all Chr Thl 
 Oec— 18. £7ΓΐΓ/"7ί m.—Tov vt. τοντ. 137: νιανισκον AE 11. 13. 15. 18. 29. 40. 69. 
 105-80: txt BGH. — 19. ο χιλ. της χ. αντ. 177• — (ττννθ. κατ ic. Α. — 20. οι ιουδ. οιη 
 19 (29 in Mill) : οι om 13. 20. 69 Chr Thl'. — σνν(θοντο Η'. — rec εις τ. συν. κατ. τον ττ., 
 with Η al Thl' Oec: κατ. τον ττ. (ΐς τ. συν. G 137 vss {perhaps transpositions to avoid 
 avpiov τον παολον): txt ABE 13. 73 al am Chr: τον ττ. om 40 : αττα••/α-γ(ι)σι τον π. 
 (omg £ΐς Γ. συν.) 68. — rec μί\λοντίς {corrn to suit ver 15), with some mss vss Till- Oec : 
 μίλλοΐ'τα GH 4. 25-6-7-9. 31. 69. 78. 96-8-' Thl': μίλλοντων 36. 66-'.8. 73. 98-marsi 
 104'-5-37-80 all Chr: μίλλοντα τίνα 177: μελλοντι 13. 64: txt ABE 40. 97- 101 al 
 
 derers went. That the high priest be- lecting the comparative sense, ' to dcter- 
 
 longed to this sect, cannot bo inferred with mine accurately.' 16.] it is quite 
 
 any accuracy. 15.] σνν τω cruveSp. uncertain whether Paul's si.ster's son lived 
 
 belongs to νμΰς, or perhaps better to in Jerusalem, or had accompanied him 
 
 ίμφανισατί — ' do you give official intima- thitlier. The ήμας of ch. xx. 5, will in- 
 
 tion' (intimation conveyed by the whole elude more than merely Luke. But froni 
 
 Saidiedrim). — όπως expresses the jnir- his knowledge of the plot, whicli presup- 
 
 pose of ίμφαν., — τοΰ αν. αϋτ., that of poses other acquaintances than he would 
 
 'έτοιμοι ίσμ. (Meyer). διαγιν. άκρ.] liave been likely to make if he had come 
 
 not as E. V. ' enquire sotnethiiu/ more per- with Paul, I should suppose liim to liave 
 
 fectly :' — but (see reff.), 'to determine been domiciled at Jerusalem, jiossildy iindfr 
 
 with greater accuracy,' or perhaps, neg- instruction, as was formerly Paul himself,
 
 238 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXIII. 
 
 Ριον. 
 
 χχνί. 35. 
 ζ traiiH., Luke 
 
 xi. 54 only. 
 
 Judg. ix. 32. 
 Η See VT. 12— 
 
 1ft. 
 b oh. i. 4 reff. 
 c = Matt. xiv. 
 
 15 Hi. 
 d ch. XV. 5 reflF. 
 e litre only t. 
 
 Judith xi. 1). 
 
 T.f <i U\a- 
 
 λησαί ; 
 
 Demosth. 
 
 irepi τ. 
 
 τταριιπρ., 
 
 p. 351. 23. 
 fver. 15 refl". 
 
 TTspi αυτού 
 ενίΒρίυυυσιν yap αυτόν ί'' 
 
 21 
 
 γθ; 
 
 συ ουν μτ] πεισυ^ς αυτοις' 
 αυτών αΐ'ορες ττλίΐους τεσσα- 
 ράκοντα, " ο'ίτινίς " ανίθίματισαν εαυτούς '^ μήτε (j>ayeiv 
 μήτε ττιε^ν εως ού * ανεΧωσιν αυτόν' και νυν εισιν έτοιμοι, 
 προς^εγόμενοι τι)ν απο σου επayyελιav. ο μεν οΰν 
 
 ΑΒ 
 EG Η 
 
 rpoςcεyJ^μ^ 
 
 ειλας μηοενι 
 23 
 
 νιλί'πρνος "^ απεΑυσεν τον νεανιαν, irapayy 
 ^ εκΧαΧήσαι Ότι ταύτα ενεφανισας προς ^ με. ""και 
 ποοςκαΧεσάμενος ουο ^ τινας των εκατονταργ^ων είττεν 
 ' Κτοιμάσατε στρατιωτας διακόσιους, οττως ττορευΟωσιν 
 ^εως Καισαρείας, και ιππείς εβ^ομηκοντα και "^δεξιολάβους 
 διακόσιους, " απο τρίτης ώρας της νυκτός, " κτήνη τε 
 ^παραστησαι,ϊνα ^ επιβιβάσαντες τον Παύλοι/ "^οιασωσωσιν 
 
 ΦηΧικα τον ^ ■ηyεμόva, ypά■φaς ^ επιστοΧην " περι- 
 
 here only. 
 g constr , ell. 
 
 6. xvii. 3 al 
 1) =■ ch. xix. 
 
 14. Luke v: 
 
 lil. L. 
 i and con-str., TTOOC 
 
 Rev. viii. 6. ^ ^ 
 
 (ix. l.'i?) kch. xvii. 15. 1 ver. 32 only. m here only t- η = Malt, xxvii. 45. 
 
 ο Luke X. 34. 1 Cor. xv. 39. Num. xx. 4. ρ here only constr., (see Col. i. 22.) ii = Luke .\. 34. 
 
 xix 35. 2 Kings vi. 3. r =■ eh. xxviii. 1, 4 (xx vii. 43. 1 Pet. iii. 2U). \v. elf. Jos. Aiilt. xii. 4. i! end. 
 
 s — Malt, xxvii. 1 al. fr. Jos. Anit. xviii. 3. 1. t ch. ix. 2 refl. u = 1 Pet. ii. only (Luke v. 9 
 
 only). >i Mtc ίπιστολη Tuiroi' vrepielxe τόι/ τρόττον, Jos. Antt. xii. 4. 11, beg. 2 Mace. xi. 16, 
 
 copt reth. — 21. rec ησσαρ. see Prolegg. — τι om 73• — μαθειν 133. — πισθίΐς 13. — αυτούς 
 VaT.—ior μητί, μη 13.— rec ίτοιμ. εις., with GH al : txt ABE 13 (al ?) ThF.— απαγ- 
 yt\iav 78.-22. νίανισκον ABE 13. 29. 40. G9. 73. 96 : t.xt GH most mss.— ττρος ψί Β. 
 — 23. for και .... εκατονταρχων, τω ίκατονταρχω it 68. — τιΐ'ας Svo Β 13: τινας cm 
 73. — aft στρατ. ins ένοπλους 5 to 7• 81• 104 al Cassiod: tv οττλοις 99. — οττως to εβδ. 
 om 177^• — foi" εβδομ., εκατόν l'Λ^ syr-marg sah seth. — δεξιοβολονς A (ms mentd by Erasm) 
 jaculantes dextra Syr: lancearios ν seth sah: jacnlatores copt syr : t.xt B(e sil)EGtI 
 mss (nrly) syr-marg (gr) Chr Thl Oec. — εις καισαρειαν 3. 95'. 137 Chr : μέχρι καισ. 
 18. 30. 180. — διακοσ. om 76 : ογδοηκοντα ar-pol. — 24. τταραστηναι 96. — for ινα, όπως 
 180. — aft τταυλοί', ins νυκΓος 137• — διησωσουσιν Έ : -ονταΐΆΐ: ητε 96: ηγαγωσι Chr: 
 αγαγ. αντον sah. — φιλικά ΑΗ all Thl' : φιληκα 93 to 96. 180 al : and ver 26 also. — 
 aft 7]γεμονα, add εις καισαρειαν 95'. 137 syr*. — at end, 137 ν (add) syr* Cassiod arm (aft 
 διασωσ.) add, εφοβηΒη yap μηποτε αρπασαντες αυτόν οι ιουδαίοι αποκτενωσι και 
 αυτός μεταζυ ε•/κλημα εχη ως apyvpiov ειληφως (accepturus v-edd). — 25. εχουσαν 
 
 and thus likely, in the schools, to have heard 
 the scheme spoken of. 21. (την) Ιτταγ- 
 
 γ€λίαν] not, ' an order' (as Rosenm., al.), 
 nor ' a message ' (as Grot., Bez., Wolf., al.) : 
 but ' the promise (to that effect) :' as E. V. 
 and constantly in N. T. 22.] οτι . . . 
 
 μ.€, a variation of person, as at ch. i, 4. 
 23. δυο Tivas] ' sometwo:' see reff., 
 and Winer, § 25. 2. στρατιώτας, the 
 
 ordinary heavy-armed legionary soldiers : 
 distinguished below from the ίΤΓΤΓίΤς and 
 δεζιόλαβοι. δεξιολάβους] This word 
 
 has never been satisfactorily explained. 
 Suidas, Phavorinus, Beza, Kuin., al., explain 
 it Ίτηραφΰλακες : — Meur.sius, in his Glossa- 
 rium Graecobarbarum, — a kind of military 
 lictors, παρά rb λαβην την τοϋ δέσμιου 
 ίίξιά)' ; — the Vulgate, lancearios (spear- 
 men, Ε. V.) : — Meyer, a sort of light-armed 
 troops, rorarii or velites, — either jacu- 
 lalores or funditores. He quotes a pas- 
 sage from Constantine Porphyrogenitus 
 (ol δΐ λεγόμενοι τουρμάρχαι εις ϋπουρ- 
 yiav των στρατηγών ετάχθησαν, ση- 
 
 μαίνει δε τοιούτον άζίωμα τον έχοντα 
 νφ' εαυτόν στρατιώτης τοζοφόρους πεν- 
 τακόσιους, και πελταστάς τριακόσιους, 
 και δεζιολάβους εκατόν) where they are 
 distinguished from bowmen and peltastse, 
 — and derives the name from grasping the 
 iveapon with the right hand, which the 
 peltastae and bowmen could not be said to 
 do. The reading of A, δεί,ιοβόλους [jacu- 
 lantes dextra Syr.) is ajiparently a cor- 
 rection. 24. διασώσωοΊν] ' escort 
 safe the whole way.' Φήλικα] Felix 
 was a freedman of the Emperor Claudius : 
 Suidas and Zonaras gave liim the prsenomen 
 of Claudius, but Tacit. (Ann. xii. 54) calls 
 him Antonius Felix, perhaps from Antonia, 
 the mother of Claudius, as he was brother 
 of Pallas, who was a freedman of Antonia 
 (Tacit, ib. and Jos. Antt. xx. 7. 1). He 
 was made sole procurator of Judiea after 
 tlie deposition of Cumanus (having before 
 been three years joint procurator with him, 
 Tacit, ib.) principally by the influence of 
 the high priest Jonathan (Antt. xx. 8. 5),
 
 21 — 31. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 239 
 
 έχουσα ν τον ^ τύπον τούτον' " Κλαύδιος Ανσίας τω Tyj^Tiuic 
 
 W ' S <• ' il•» ' Λ χ ' 27 ' " •> iiL 30. ' 
 
 κρατίστω i^ytaovi ΦίΐΛίκι γαιοίΐν. ' τον αΐ'όοα w mkei. 3. 
 
 A/ 5 * ch χχϊτ•3 
 
 τούτον ^ συΧληφθίντα νπο των Ιουδαίων και μίΧΧοντα xch^'^/g's 
 ^ αναιοίΐσθαι υπ αυτών '^ έπιστας συν τω στρατ^υματι ylh.'i.mtes. 
 '^ ΕςίίΧάμην αυτόν μαθών οτι Ρωμαίος ίστιν. β^^^Χό- ''^^^^^'^^ξ-^- 
 
 μενος τε ετΓίγνωΐ'αι τι)ν αιτιαν δι ην ^ ενίκάλουν b?Ji/]o. 
 αντω, κατϊ)γαγον αυτόν εις το ^ συνβόριον αυτών "^ ον ^^, ^"^J, ι 
 
 ''' e ' \ ' ^ h γ ' - ' '- Exod. iii. 8. 
 
 ίυοον εγκαΛου/ιείΌν πε^ι ίτί]τϊ]ματων του νομού αυτών, d-LQkei.4. 
 
 ζ,ν Λχ i ν^ η ' *> k ^ -1'' m >' Λ ICur.xiu. 12. 
 
 μηόίν οε at,iov υανατου η οεσμων έχοντα ε-γκλημα. ^/"i^-gsreff. 
 μηνυθε'ισης δε' /uoi ° επίβουλης ^ εις τον άνδρα |αέλλειν g'ih.'xifLlij' 
 
 ,f Λ η»>- 1 - .f , / r 'λ < - h ch. χν. 2 reff. 
 
 εσεσσαι, ^ες αυτής έπεμψα ποος σε, παρα-γ-γειΑας και τοις 'Lnkexu.as. 
 
 S ' Λ / t ^ < ' < U ' » - ί?1 /^' ^ xxvi'si' ^ 
 
 κατη-γοροις λέγειν τα προς αυτόν επι σου. '^'- Ui /αεν k ch. xxii.' so 
 ούν στρατιωται κατά το ^ Sιaτετayμεvov αυτοις ^ αναλα- ι =J'hnix.4i. 
 
 > 1'^ ^ XV. 22, 24. 
 
 six. 11. 1 John i. 8. 1 Tim. τ. 12. m ch. xsv. 16 only t. η Lake xx. 37. John xi. Sr. I Cor. s. 28 
 
 onlyt. 2 Mace. iii. 7. ο ch. ix. 24 reff. ρ = ch. ix. 1 reff. q Mark vi. 25 al. ch. X. 33 al. Phil, 
 
 ii. 23. rch. XT. oreff. s John viii. Ki. ver. 35. ch. xxiv. 8. xxv. 16, 18 (See Rev. xii. lu.) 
 
 t ch. xxiii. 15. π = Matt, xxviii. 14. ch. xxir. ly al. ν Lake XTii. 9, lU. Jadg. v. y. 
 
 w — ch.xx. 13. 2 Tim. iv. 11. 
 
 {corm, the compound being thonyht unnecessary) BE 13. 27-9. 66^-8-9. 105-37 : om 
 sah : txt AGH most mss (appy) Chr Thl Oec. — rovr. r. τυττ. 177 sah : ταδί \ syr-marg. 
 — 26. τω om 137. — κρατιστ. om 40 seth. — φηλ. om H^ but suppl in marg (appv) H^ — 
 27. rec ίζπλομην {corm}, with GH al: txt ABE 13. 73 (all).— αντ ov om ABE' 13. U\ 
 15. 27-9. 36. 6o-fi--8-9. ^3. 105 80 al ν Chr Oec (as superfluous in the conslr) : ins GH 
 most mss (appy) Thl. — 28. rec for -e, ίε, with GH al e copt syr Chr Oec : txt ABE-gr 
 73 (al.') V Syr aeth al {ovi' sah) Thl. — rec -γνωναι {coi-rn to the simple verb), with EGH 
 al ff (/iaOftv Thl') : t.xt AB 13. 15. 36. G9. 73. 9.'). 105-37-80 Chr (ms).— 5t om 38. 137- 
 ■ — for αντω, αυτόν 42. 126. — avrov om A 69.99 105-37 al. — 29. ν,νρον EG: ίνρων 
 137. — aft αντων, add μιονσίως και ιησον τίνος 137• — ^t om G 26-7. 40. 76. 93-5 to 7• 
 100-1-6 13-20-37 42-77 all (ath al) Chr.— rec lyicX. (χ., with EGH al Chr al : txt AB 
 13. 40. 6o-y. 95 al ν (arm Scbolz) ThF.— 30. ίΐς τον avdpa om 15'. 36. 180 ν jeth. — 
 /ΐίλλειΐ' om {as superfluous with an infin fut : but see ch xi. 28; xxiv. 15; xxvii. 10) 
 iVBE 15>. 36. 40. 68-9. 73. 137-80 lect 40 ν aeth: (σισθαι also om 15> : esse e: txt 
 GH all Chr Thl Oec. — rec aft ίσισθαι, add ντνο των ιουΕαιων {explanatory gloss), with 
 GH al Syr sah al Thl Oec {απο τ. ι.) : (ξ αυτών ΑΕ 13. 40. 68-9. 73. 105 lect 40 ν arm 
 syr (υτΓο τ. lovc. ίξ αυτών fneptp. Chr) : txt Β 5. — (ζαυτης om ΑΕ (see above) 13. 40. 
 68-9. 105 ν al Chr : ins BG(add ουι>)11 most mss (appy) vss if. — κατηγορ. αυτόν Ε syr 
 sah. — for τα πρ. αντον, αυτούς A 13: αντου 40: txt B(om τα Β β Syr)EG(addg 
 αυτους)Η. vss (om ν copt sah) Chr Thl Oec. — for ίττι σου, ττιρι σον 67. 137•— rec at end 
 add ιρρωσο, with EG al vss (Chr) Thl Oec: ιρρωσθε {see ch xv. 29) Η 26. 78. 100-1» al 
 
 whom he afterwards procured to be mur- imagined that the contents transpired 
 
 dered (ibid.). Of his character Tacitus through some officers at Jerus. or at Caesarea 
 
 says, ' Antonius Felix per omnem ssevitiam friendly to Paul. — Such letters were called 
 
 et libidinem jus regium servili ingenio eloyia : so Modestin. Dig. lib. 49, tit. 16, 
 
 exercuit,' Hist. v. 9. His procuratorship leg. 3 (Facciolati) : ' Desertorem auditum 
 
 was one series of disturbances, false mes- ad suum ducem cum elogio prseses mittet,' 
 
 siahs, sicarii and robbers, and civil con- ' with an abstract of the article.^ brought 
 
 tests, see Jos. Antt. xx. 8. 5, 6, and 7• He against him.' 27. σ-υντώ στρ.] 'with 
 
 was eventually (.\.d. 60) recalled, and ac- the troop;' see above vcr. 10, and note, 
 
 cused by the Csesarean Jews, but acquitted ch. xxi. 32. έξ€ΐλ. μαθών οτι 'P. 
 
 at the instance of his brother Pallas (Antt. Ιστιν] This was an attempt to conceal 
 
 XX. 8, 10). On his wife Drusilla, see note, the Jatilt that he had committed, Fee ch. 
 
 ch. xxiv. 24. 25.] Trcpux., τυττ., see xxii. 29. For this assertion cannot refer 
 
 reff. 26. κροτίστω] See Luke i. 3. — to the sccOHiZ rescue, see next ver. 
 
 This letter seems to be given (translated 30.] Two constructions are combined here: 
 
 from the Latin) as written, not merely (1) μηννθίίσης ίπιβυυλι^ις της μίλλον- 
 
 according to its general import (see the σης ίσεσθαι, and (2) μηνυϋεντος, ϊτι- 
 
 false statement in ver. 27) : fro7n what βυυλτ)ν μίλλειν εσεσθαι. 31.] Anti- 
 
 source, is impossible to say, but it may be patris, forty-two Roman miles from Jcrus.,
 
 240 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXIII. 32—35. 
 
 χ Luke V. π. βοντες τον Παΰλον ijyayov ^ cia τΐ]ς νυκτός ί'ις την αβ 
 
 ch. ί. 3 al. > . ,ς^^ ο.-) ^. - ς^ν . r ζ ' ' ^ a ' " ΕϋΗ 
 
 yJohni.2!)al. AvTlTTClTpiCa, " Τ?) 0£ tWaVOlOV iaOUVTeQ TOVC ' tTTTTflC 
 
 ζ = here ouly. S ' 1' I = ■= ϊ. 
 
 » ver. 'J'.i b'' fi ^ ■>-(•'■' / ' ^ ά 
 
 b = Mait.ii.22 aπίξ)γJiσuaι συν αιτώ, υπΒστξ)ίψαν hq την τταρεμ- 
 cch.Tiii.2.-ireff. βοΧην. "^ o'lTiviQ ίΐςε\θοντες £ΐς την Καισα^οειαν και 
 
 e=."ii.x.4i, αναόοντίς την '' επιστολην τω ηγεμοΐΊ, τταηεστησαν 
 
 47. xiii. 32) ^ ^ η - \ '" 34' ^^^h^i' / 
 
 43 ai. Kat τυν ΙΙαυΛον ούτω. αΐ'α^ΐΌυς οε καί -^ εττεοωτϊ/- 
 
 f here only t. k > I ' "^ / » > > ' w 
 
 ""f"*?", σας εκ ττοίας "' επαρνιας ° εστίν, και ττυθομενος οτι 
 
 Τϋΐν 6(/^θρ<)ί!• Ij , , J, ^ , ^ς Ο Λ ' ' '' , " > ' 
 
 TirtTTioTo- ((7J-Q KiAt/ctoc, ΖΛίοκουσοααι σου, εφη, όταν και οι 
 
 λ<ίί, Diod. ' '^ ' , _ 
 
 Bdl^il'/e!''" '' κατη-γυροι σου '' παραγενωνται, κελευσας ει» τω ^ πραι- 
 i =. Malt.' xxvi. τωρ/ω τοΰ Ηρωοου * όυλασσεσσαι αυτόν. 
 
 53. (2 Cor. iv, it > ϊ 
 
 jMatt.su.io XXIV. ^ Μετα δε ττε'ντε ημίρας ^ κατίβη ο αρχιερευς 
 kseejohnxi. Αί'αί^ίας μετα των πρεσβυτέρων και " ρητορος Τερτυλλου 
 ' Φ>'"43;ικ^''' '''"'^^' ^ οίτινες ^*^ εΐ'εψαησαν τω ■ηyεμovι '"'' κατά του Παυ- 
 
 m ch. χχϊ. 1 οηΐγ. See Ezr. v. ^. η pres., John i. 40 al. fr. ο here only. = Deut. i. 16. ρ ver. 30. 
 
 q ab.^^ol , Luke xii. SI reft. ch. ix.39. r Matt, xxvii. 27 II Mk. J. Phil. i. 13 ouly. s =• ch. xii. 4 relf. 
 
 t absol., ih. viii. 15 al. η here only. vsoch.ix. 35. w andconstr , ch. xxv. 2. 
 Seech, xxiii. 15 relf. 
 
 Chr (mss and edd) : om AB 13 am (latt mss) copt sah seth. — 31. T/jcbef ννκτ. om (as un- 
 necessary : see ch v. 19: xvi. 9: xvii. 10) ABE 13. 137-80 Chr ThP : ins GH most 
 mss (appy) ThU Oec. — tig την irarpiSa 3G. 180. — 32. rec ττυρινίσθαι {corrn for less 
 usual exprn), with GH al Chr ThP' (ficTrop. ThP) Oec : txt ABE II. 13. 27-9. 04. 80. 
 97. 126. — 33. ίλθονης Q ίΧονης Scholz) 73. 180. — την om 133.— και τ. ττ. om Ε 
 (al transp) : και om 68-9 sah : τον om 137. — 34. rec aft arayv. if, ins ο ηγίμωρ (sup- 
 plementary corrn), with GH al sah: txt ABE 15. 18. 29. 36. 40. 66-8. 73. 96. 
 105-42-80 al ν syrr ar-erp copt seth arm Chr: syr-marg has αιαγνους ύί την (τηστολην 
 {την ίττ. also 137 slav : αντην sah) ίττηηωτησί (so 115) τον τταυΧον (τ. π. also 137) (■< 
 ■ποιας ιτταρχιας ίΐη (ft 1.37) : και ίΐπίν κιλικκις {(ψη κιλιΚ 137) '■ ΐΌΐ ττνθομινος eiwtv 
 {«Ρη 137) ακονσομαι (so 1.37) όταν οι κατήγοροι σον ιρχονται. — ττειθυμινος 93-5. — 
 35. και om (Scholz is in error, see Griesb) 37• 101-37 al ν (not demid) syr arr £eth Thl'. — 
 τταραγιΐ'ωνται 9V>. 177• — rec f (ίίλίυσε rt (e>wewrfa</o?2 o/'i/y/e), with GH al vss Chr al : ck. 
 ^ί 96: txt ABE 40. 68. 105-37 al syr ThP.— £i' om 137•— τω om 42.— Γω ηρωίου Β: 
 ηρωοου (omg τον) GH 1.17 all Chr Euthal Thl Oec : txt AE al. — rec αντον tv τω πρ., r. 
 lip. (pv\. {emendn as above), with GH al Chr al : txt ABE 1 3. 40. 68. 105-37 al ν arm ThP. 
 Chap. XXIV. 1. for ττίΐ'τε, τινας Α. — for των -πρίσβ., ττρίσβ. τίνων ABE 13. 15. 
 27-9. 31-6. 40. 68. 73. 81. 105-37 80 ν sah syr Arm Thl (prob an alteration, see 
 notes): txt GH most mss Syr copt aeth al. — τίρτυλου 180. — τίνος om 68. 101-37 
 
 and twenty-si.x from Ciesarea, was built by curator resided in the former palace of 
 
 Herod the Great, and called in honour of Herod the Great. Here Paul was ' militi 
 
 his father. It was before called Kaphar- traditus ' (Digest, cited by De W.), not 
 
 saba (Jos. Antt. xiii. 15. 1 ; xvi. 5. 2). In in a prison, but in the buildings attached 
 
 Jerome's time (Epitaph. Paulse) it was a to the palace. 
 
 «semirutum oppidum' (Winer, RWB.).-- Chap. XXIV. 1— XXVI. 32.] Paul's 
 
 They might have well made so much way imprisonment at Cssarea. 1. μετά 
 
 during the night and the next day, — for irevre ήμ.] After five days — or on the fifth 
 
 the text will admit of that interpretation, — day — from Paul's departure for Catsarea. 
 
 Ty Ιπαύρ. being not necessarily the mor- This would be the natural terminus a quo 
 
 row after they left Jerusalem, but after they from which to date the proceedings of the 
 
 arrived at Antipatris. 32. τους high priest, &c., who were left in Jerus. 
 
 Ιπιτίΐς] As they had now the lesser half That it is so, appears from ver. 11. See 
 
 of their journey before them, and that note there. των ιτρίσβ.] ' the elders,' 
 
 furthest removed from Jerusalem. The viz. a deputation from them. This expres- 
 
 ί£ξιόλη/3οι appear to liave gone back with sion, seeming to import that all the Sanhe- 
 
 the soldiers. 35. διακοΰσ.] ' The ex- drim went down, has been altered to ττρίσ/ί?. 
 
 pression is in conformity with the Roman τινών (see var. read.). The alteration, 
 
 law; the rule was, " Qui cum elogio mittun- however, betrays itself by the clumsiness, 
 
 tur, ex integro avdiendi sunt." ' Hackett. so unlike Luke, of the τινών and τινός 
 
 iv τω τΓραιτ. τ. Ήρ.] The pro- close together. Nor can it be said, on the
 
 XXIV. I— ^ 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 241 
 
 eh. iT.18. 
 
 absol , ver. li*. 
 
 h. XXV. 16. 
 
 λου. '' κΧηθέντος δε αυτοΰ rf^^aro ^ κατ-η^ορπν Oy 
 
 ΤίρΓυλλος λέγων Πολλ?7ς H^y^vriQ ^ rvyyJivovTiQ '^ δ(α χχοίϋϊ». ' 
 σου και κατορθωμάτων *^ "γινομένων τω Wvti τούτω δ(α χί'.φ].'"'""'' 
 
 --d '^e' ^f -e' fi = Mrtlt.sviii. 
 
 της σης ττρονοιας, παντη τε και πανταγου ^ απο- ^ιι. Luke 
 
 ' ' . . . ^ χ.\ϋ. :.'2 II. 
 
 ϊοιη. ν. 12, 
 
 Ι) here only t. 
 
 όεγ^ομίθα, κράτιστε Φϊ)λιξ, ' μίτα ^ πάσης ^ ίυγ^αριστίας. &™ 
 
 4'' ί^^ra'^^-■' η' ♦ ο ,_,_ unereonlyt. 
 
 ινα 6ε μη επί ττΛειον σε ε'^κοτττω, τταρακαλω ακον- ocom^tr.cb.u. 
 
 (1 Rom. xiii. 14 only. Jnsli. xx. 3 alex. e here only +. Sir. 1. 22. f ch. xvii. 30 reff. g Lnke 
 
 riii. 40. ch. ii. 41 f. Luke only. 2 Slfuc. iii. t). h ch. xxlii. 2H reff. i Mark iii. Γ). 1 Chroii. xxix. 
 
 22. k =ch. XX. 19rel1. 1 = 1 Cor. xiv. Ifi. 2 Cor. iv. 1ft. ix. Π only. m ch. iv. 17. 2 Tim. ii. 
 
 Ifi. Jer. ii. 12. n Rom. xv. 22. Gal. V. 7. 1 Thrss. ii. 18. 1 Pel. iii. 7 ojily t. Dan. ix. 26. 
 
 ο = Matt.xviii. 29 al cli. xiii.42. 
 
 al Syr an• Ύ1αΙΚ—(νίφανησαν '08. 40. 57. 68. 105 al.— του om 06. 142.— 2. αυτού om 
 Β.—ι\ορθωματων ABE 13. 15. 18. 3G. G8. 73. 137-80 al lect 40 Clir-ms (prob a 
 coiTnfor elegance, as Phrynichus remarks, p. 2bQ, άμαρτάνονσιν oi μήτορις ούκ είδότις 
 Ότι το κατορθώσαι, ϋόκιμον το δ' από τούτον 'όνομα άδόκιμον,τυ κατόρθωμα, — ivhere see 
 Loheck's note) : txt GH most mss (appy) Chr Thl Oec. — add πολλών 3(ϊ. 68. 180 ν Syr 
 arr ThP. — γινομένων G 137 Thl^. — τω εθνίΐ τοντω om v. — 3. παντι τε 13. 25. 36. 
 40. 73. 80^. 9G-8. 180 al: παΐ'τυτε 5 e ν ar-pol : παντι 93: παντι καιρώ sah : πάντες 
 Syr ar-erp. — 4. εκκοπτω G al ThP : κόπτω (A' appy) 13. — σε (om G Chr) ακουσαι Ε 
 
 ίαίνονσ», ΦηΧικος κατηγορονντες' καΐ 
 πάντως αν ΙΙεδώκει τιμωρία}' των εις 
 
 other side, that this has occasioned the 
 reading in the rec, which would not in that 
 case have been τώΐ', but still τινών. 
 ρήτορος] An orator forensis or causidicns, 
 persons who abounded in Rome and the 
 provinces ; sometimes called συνήγοροι, or 
 δικόλογοι, Kuin. says : ' Multi adoles- 
 centes Romani qui se fbro dederant, cum 
 magistratibus in provincias se conferebant, 
 ut caussis piOvincialium agendis se exerce- 
 rent, et majoribus in urbe actionibus prse- 
 pararent.' So Cselius (see Cic. pro Cselio, 
 c. 30), in Africa. Τερτυλλου] A dim. 
 
 from Tertius, as LucuUus from Lucius, — 
 Catullus from Catius. The name occurs 
 Plin. Ep. V. 15; and Tertulla, Suet. Aug. 
 69 (Wetst.). ίνίφάνισαν] (not, ' ap- 
 
 peared,' εαυτούς, sub. ; — See reft.) ' laid 
 information ;' and, as it seems, not by 
 writing, but by word of mouth, since they 
 appeared in person, and Paul was called to 
 confront them. 2.] ' Inter prsecepta 
 
 rhetorica est, judicem laudando sibi bene- 
 volum reddere.' (Grot.) Certainly Ter- 
 tullus fulfils and overacts the precept, for 
 his exordium is full of the basest flattery. 
 Contrast with πολλής είρ. τνγχ., Tac. 
 Ann. xii. 54 : ' Interim Felix intempestivis 
 rcmediis delicta accendebat, aemulo ad de- 
 terrima Ventid. Cumano, cui pars prov. 
 habebatur : ita divisis, ut huic Galilicorum 
 natio, Felici Samaritse parerent, discordos 
 olim, et turn, contemptu regentium, minus 
 coercitis odiis. Igitur raptare inter se, 
 irnmiltere latronum ylobos, componere 
 insidias, et aliquando prmliis congredi, 
 spoliuipic el jirwdas ad Procuratures re- 
 fer re ;^ — Hist. V. 9, quoted above, on ch. 
 xxiii. 24 ; — and Jos. Antt. xx. 8. i), o'l 
 πρωτεύοντες των την Κηισάρειαν κατοι- 
 κούντων Ιουδαίων εις τι)ν 'Ρώμην άνα- 
 VoL. II. 
 
 Ιουδαίους άδικ7]μάτων, ειμή πολλά αυτόν 
 ύ Νίρων τψ άδελφψ ΐΐάλλαντι παρακα- 
 Χ'εσαντι σννεχωρησε .... There was just 
 enough foundation for the flattery, to make 
 the falsehood of its general application to 
 Feli.x more glaring. He had put down 
 some rebels (see ch. xxi. 38, note) and 
 assassins (Antt. xx. 8. 4), ' ipse tamen his 
 omnibus erat nocentior' (Wetst.). — It has 
 been remarked (by Dean Milman, Bampton 
 Lectures, p. 185) that the character of this 
 address is peculiarly Latin (but qu. .') ; and 
 it has been inferred from a passage in Va- 
 lerius Maximus (cited at length in C. and 
 H., vol. i. p. 3), that all pleadings, even in 
 Greek provinces, were conducted before 
 Roman magistrates in Latin. But Mr- 
 Lewin has well observed (ii. 6^54), " under 
 the emperors trials were permitted in Greek, 
 even in Rome itself, as well in the senate as 
 in the forum [Dio Cassius, Ivii. 15, says of 
 Tiberius, πολλάς μεν δίκας iv tij διαλέκτφ 
 TaUTy (viz. Greek) και ίκεΊ (in the senate) 
 λεγομενας άκυύων, ττολλάς δε και αυτός 
 ίπεμωτών'] ; and it is unlikely that greater 
 strictness should have been observed in a dis- 
 tant province. The name Tertullus proves 
 little, as the Greeks, and even the Jews, 
 very commonly adopted Roman names." 
 On this latter point, see note, ch. xiii. 9. 
 κατόρθωμα is ' res praeclare facta,* 
 generally, wlicthei• military or civil (' quie 
 nos aut recta aut rcctc facta dicamus, si 
 placet, illi autem apjiellant κατορθώματα.' 
 Cic. de Fin. iii. 7) : διόρβωμα, ' an amelio- 
 ration or reform.' In uncertainty between 
 the two words, I have retained the rec. for 
 the reason mentioned in the var. readd. 
 Trpovoias] ' provideiitia;.' ' Hoc 
 U
 
 242 ΠΡΑ^ΙΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXIV. 
 
 EGH 
 
 ''provTsiIi.28. σαί σε Ίίμων ^ συντόμως ry ay '' επίΗκε'ια. ^ "" εύρόντες ΑΒ 
 ** only t.^vvisd. -yap TOP tivSoo TOVTOV ^ Aotftov /coi KivovvTu " στιισιν 
 
 ii. 111. constr. ' _^ „ , . ^ ^ , - ν ν ν ' / w 
 
 ^{"l•;.'!'"'""'*'• πασιν τοις Ιουόαιοις τοις κατά την οικουμίνην, ΤΓξ)ωτο- 
 'Τϋ"ΐ"'^"' στάτην τε της των Νο^ωοα/ων ^ αιρεσίως, ° ός καΐ το 
 
 s = here only. ,vv>; z/^0^- '^ ^ a ' ' Τ ^ 
 
 Tkin^xxx ίφυν ^ εττείοασεν ρερίίλωσαι, υν και εκρατησαμεν \_και 
 t-di. xxi.ao κατά τον τημετερον νομον ηϋεΛησαμεν κρινειν. ' παρ- 
 "Jom'^'''' ίλθών δε Αυσίας ο yJί\ίapyoς ^ μετά. πο\\ης ^ μιας εκ 
 
 ti ■νν.'κατ.; των νείοωι; ημών αττί/γαγεν, κελευσας τους κατ- 
 
 hcreo'nly. ' , , ^ ,/ Λ ''/Τ. ' f ^ ' '^ 
 
 where only, η-^οοους avTov ερ^εσι/αι επί σεJ παρ ου ουνησ^ αυτός 
 
 χ ch. ν. 17 refr. y constr., ch. ix. 26. xvi. 7 only. ζ Matt, xii 5 only. Neh. xiii. 18. Ezek. xxii. 26. 
 
 a =acc., Malt. XTiii. 28 ill. b = Luke xii. 37. xvii. 7. cch.v. 21). /3m, ch. xxi. 35. xxvii. 41 
 
 only, lixoil. xiv. 25. d ch. xii. 11 leff. e ch. xiii. 17 retf. f ch. xxiii. 30 reff. 
 
 (copt sail slav) : avvr. ακονσ. ημών 180: ημών om 96. 142 al. — 5. -γαρ om 100 ν copt 
 ieth. — στασίΐς (corrn as suiting better ττασι τ. ιονδ. κ.τ.λ.) ABE 13. 15. 40. 08. 73. 
 105-0 al ν copt Chr Thl' Oec : txt GH most mss syrr salt ieth al.— aft τοις-, ins 
 αατοικονσι 57^. 177• — ττροςτατην 45: -πρωτοστάτης 13. — των om 177• — 6• from 
 
 και κατά to ίττι at om ABGH 4^. lO^. 26. 33-6. 65-β2. 73.3. 80. 93-5 to 7- 
 
 100-1-4-13-26-42 all am tol latt copt sah slav mss Bed : ins {with consid varr, 
 see below) Ε 13. 15. 18. 25-7-9. 31-2. 40-2-6. 57. 00i-8. 73-6. 98-9. lO.j-6-33-80 all 
 (mss mentd by Bed) syrr (tjetb) al Chr Thl Oec Cassiod (see notes). — for ηθίλ., 
 ηβυυληθημίί' (or ίβ.) 31. 40-6. 66-. — rec κρινίΐν, with some mssThP Oec : txt Ε 13. 15. 
 18. 25-7-9. 42-G. 57. 66'-8-9. 73-6. 98-9. 105-6 -33-80 al Chr Thli.— 7. βια πολλή 32. 42-6. 
 57. 06'. — for απηγα-γεν to ce, αφίίλιτο {-ατο 42) και προς σε απεστίΐλεν 32. 42-6. 57. 
 ()6' al slav-ms : κελευσασθαι επι σε παρα-γγειλας τοις κατηγοροις ερχεσθαι επι συι 180. 
 — 8. aft κελευσας, ins και 32. 42. 57. 69. 133 al arm. — αυτόν om 69. — προς σε (the force 
 of επι being overlooked) Ε 46. 133 : om 32. 42. 57 al slav-ms : επι σον 25-7-9. 40. 66'-8. 
 76. 98-. 106-37 al Chr-ms Thl' : επι σοι al : txt some mss (qu ?). — παρ ω Ε 36 : παρ 
 ων 8. 15. 27-9. 66'. 106-80 al : txt ABGH al ν (β quo) {περί ου copt?) al Chr Thl 
 Oec. — δννησει Ε 13 : δννασαι sah Chr Thl : οννασε ^3 : add και 25. 66' latt Thl-. — 
 αντος om A vss : αυτόν 26 : αντονς 40. — διαγνωναι 133. — at end, ins ειποντος de 
 
 vocabulum ssepe diis tribuerunt' (Beng.). omission of the vFords και κατά to επί σε. 
 
 ' Providentia Caesaris' is a common j)hrase Their absence from the principal MSS, 
 
 on the coins of the emperors (Mr. Hum- their many variations in those vidiich con- 
 
 phry). 3. ττάντη κ. ττανταχοϋ] belongs tain them, are strongly against their genu- 
 
 to άποδεχ., not to γινομένων, in vchich ineness ; as also is the consideration that 
 
 case they would naturally precede the parti- no probable reason for their omission can 
 
 ciple. — 'We receive, &C., not only here be suggested. On the other hand, as De 
 
 in thy presence, but also at all times Wette observes, it is hardly imaginable that 
 
 and in all places.' A refinement of flat- so little should have been assigned to the 
 
 tery. 4. eirl irXetov] viz. than the speaker as would be if these words were 
 
 matter demands : ' too long.' Ιγ- omitted. Besides this, the historic aorist 
 
 κόΐΓτ.] See refF. σνντόμω?] As Meyer ίκρατήσαμεν seems to require some sequel, 
 
 observes, we need not supply λεζόΐ'των, some reason, after his seizure, why he was 
 
 but take σνντ. as the measure of the time there present and freed from Jewish dur- 
 
 implied in άκοϋσαί. 5. λοιμών] See reff. ance. The phsenomena are common enough 
 
 and Demosth. p. 794. 5, ούτος ούν αυτόν in the Acts, of unaccountable insertions, 
 
 έζαιτήσεται ό φηρμακος, 6 λοιμός . . . The and almost always in D (here deficient). 
 
 construction here is an anacoluthon, there See a list of such in Prolegg. to Acts § iv. 
 
 being nothing tofoUow up the part. ίΰρόνΓίς•. 2 (y). But in this place it is the owmiow 
 
 Thepart. cannot be taken for the finite verb, which is unaccountable, for no similarity 
 
 See W iner, § 46. 2. ή οΙκονμ€νη] would of ending, no doctrinal consideration can 
 
 here mean the Roman ' orbis terrarum.' have led to it. [The two reasons cited from 
 
 Νοζωρ.] This is the only place in Matthsei by Bloomfield, ed. 9,-1) "that 
 
 theN.T. where the Christians are so called, the critics believed the Jews hardly likely 
 
 The Jews could not call them by any name to have accused Lysias himself,"— 2) " be- 
 
 answering to Christians, as the hope of a cause the words παρ' ου, at ver. 8, must be 
 
 Messiah \vas professed by themselves. referred to Paul : though by its {sic) posi- 
 
 6.] Considerable difficulty rests on the tion, it seems to refer to Lysias," are futile
 
 5—12. ΠΡΑ;3ΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 243 
 
 ^ avaK^yifag περί πάντων τούτων επι-γνωναι ' ών η/χίΓς gi.ukesxni. 
 κaτηyoξ)oΰμsu αυτού. ^ συνίπίθεντο δε και οΙ Ίου- »'■ \κί"ί;« 
 Saioi, ™<ράσκοντίς ταΰτα "οϋτως "έχειν. απεκρίθη T£\mr.^h"i.'i' 
 
 ο Παύλος, ° vtvaavroc αυτω του ^ rtyiuovoc \eyttv, ** Efc '^ ™""'f•. <=ι> 
 
 ι , ' ι ' XXV. Π. f 
 
 )Χλ(".- ΐ-"." ■■ ". ^^ ..^.-J;,. —Γ. '.'«,... -^.'.-... '.^.^^!. ^„ I.ukexxiii 
 
 See 
 
 ΤΓοΛΛων ετών "οντά σε κριτΎ\ν τω εϋνει τούτω επισταμένος j-^'' '" 
 
 s>/j/ t^ ^• -u'A - 11<> / I here only. 
 
 ενυυμοτΐρον τα περί εμαυτου απολο-νουμαι, δυνάμενου orat. xxxii. 
 σου yviovai οτι ου πλειους εισιν μοι -ημεραι οεκαόυο αφ mciV χχν. ΐ9. 
 
 \ν '? χ ' //Ο ν ' ' 'Γ Λ ^ 12 ^ " ' Ri«n.i.22. 
 
 ■ης ανερην ^ προςκνί'-ησων εν Ιε^ουσαΑ-ημ, "^ και ούτε εν oeoxxw. 
 
 xiv. 27 (alex.) 32. η cli. τϋ 1. xii. 15. xvii. Π. ο Jolm xiii. 24 only. (Prov. iv. 2.Ί.) 
 
 ρ ch. xxiii. 24. q = eh, xv. (7.) 21 ix. 33 al. r constr. particip., ch. xix. 35. vii. 12. 2 Tim ii. 8. 
 
 shereonly. Polyb. iii. 34. !l. t Luke xii. U. xxii 37. Phil. ji. 23. ii Luke xii. 11. ch. xxvi. 24. 
 
 V con.slr., Matlhise, } 338. Horn. Ii. xxi. 155. xxiv. 765. vv eunstr., ch. xxii. 15 al. Ir. 
 
 x = ch.xv. 2. Matt. XX. 18 al. Ezra vii. ii, 7. y = ch. viii. 27 rtff. 
 
 αυτού ταύτα 137 syr*. — 9. rec συιιθίντο (error ? or the force of the compound was 
 overlooked), with some mss Oec : txt ABEGII 4. 13. 18. 31-G. 40-2. 5?. GG'-i). 73. 80. 
 95-6. 105-13-33 37-42-77 all Chr Thl : συνίττηθοντο 13. 180: ατηκρ,ναντο sah ath : 
 adjecerunt \ q: litigarunt Sjrr : acclamarunt ar-erp : consenserunt ai--pol. — it om 137• 
 — 01 om 13. 42. 78• 95 u.—XtyovTtg 68. — όντως om 4'. — 10. rec St {alteration 
 of characteristic rt), with GH al vss Chr al : txt ABE-gr 25. 40-2 57. 69. 137 al 
 seth al (om copt) Thl'. — ο om 180. — αντου 4. 57• 99. 137 al. — λαλιιν 137• — ίτωΐ' om 
 177.— /cpir. δίκαιον Ε 15. 18. 25-7-9. 36-8. 40. 66-'-8. 73 6. 80. 93-8-9. 105-13-37-80 al 
 sj'r al Chr (expressly) Thl (scholia in 100) Alcim. — ενθυμως {the force of the comparative 
 beinc/ neglected) ABE 13. 15. 25. 36. 40. 68. 73. 105-33-37-80 ν vss (appy : so Tisch) 
 AthThP : txt GH &c Chr Thl• Oec— 11. σου om Κ,—ε-πι^νωναι AE 15. 18. 27-9. 36. 
 662-8. 73- 6. 98-9 . 105-37-80 al Thl: t.^t B(e sil)GH &c Chr Oec— rec bef hvaL, ins 
 η : but on MSS all.— for δεκαδυο, δώδεκα {conm) ABE 13. 31. 40. 65-8. 73• 105-33-37 
 al Thl: txt GH most mss Chr Oec. — αφ ηςημερας 95'. — προςκυνησηιΈ ('not A,' Tisch) 
 137 sah.— for εν, εις AE 4. 13. 15. 18. 25. 36. 40. 68. 73. 97• 105-33-80 al copt sah Thl : 
 
 and childish enough (on the latter of them, Felix, viz. his confidence arising from speak- 
 
 see below) ; and I only refer to them, to ing before one well skilled by experience 
 
 shew by what sort of considerations English in the manners and customs of the Jews. 
 readers are stiU supposed to be influenced. 11. ή|χεραι ScKaSuo] The point of 
 
 Aug. 1856.] 8.] Trap' oi, if the disputed this seems to be, that Feli.K having been so 
 
 words be inserted, refers naturally enough long time a judge among the Jews, must be 
 
 to Lysias ,• but if they be omitted, to Paul, well able to search into and adjudicate on 
 
 which would be very unlikely, — that the an offence whose whole course was com- 
 
 judge should be referred to the prisoner prised within so short a period. — The twelve 
 
 (for examination by torture [Grot, and al.] days may be thus made out: 1. his arrival 
 
 on a Roman citizen is out of the question) in Jerusalem, ch. xxi. 15—17: 2. his in- 
 
 for the particulars laid to his charge. Cer- terview with James, ib. 18 tt'. ; 3. his taking 
 
 tainly it might, on the other hand, be said on him the vow, ib. 26 ; 3 — 7• tbe time of 
 
 that Tertullus would hardly refer the go- the vow, interrupted by — 7• I'is apprehen- 
 
 vernor to Lysias, whose interference he had sion, ch. xxi. 27 ; 8. his ajjpearance before 
 
 just characterized in such terms of blame ; the Sanhedrim, ch. xxii. 30 ff. ; 9. his depar- 
 
 but (which is a strong argument for the ture from Jerusalem (at night) ; and so to 
 
 genuineness of the doubtful words) remark- the 13th, the day now current, which was 
 
 ably enough, we find Felix, ver. 22, putting the 5th inclusive from his leaving Joru- 
 
 off the trial till the arrival of Lysias. salem. This, which is also De Wette and 
 
 9. σ-υν€ΤΓ€θ.] 'joined in setting Meyer's arrangement, is far more natural 
 
 upon Mm,' bore out Tertullus in his than that of Kuin., Olsh., Heim•., iS:c., who 
 
 charges. 10. Ik ιτολλών ίτών] Felix suppose that the days which he had already 
 
 was now in the seventh year of his procu- spent at Caisarea are not to be conntcd, be- 
 
 ratorshi|), which begun in the twelfth year cause his raising disturbances while in cus- 
 
 of Claudius, a.d. 52. — The contrast between tody was out of the question. The view advo- 
 
 Tertullus's and I'atd's ' captatio benevolen- cated by Wicseler (Cliron. der Apost.-gesdi. 
 
 tiic' is rcinarkable. The former I have cha- pp. 103 fl'.), that Paul was apprehended on 
 
 racterizcd above. Jiut the Ajjostle, using the very day of his appearance with the 
 
 no flattery, yet alleges the one pr)iiit whicli men in the temple, 1 <;annot but regard, 
 
 could really win attention to him from notwithstanding his arguments in its favour, 
 
 R 2
 
 244 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. ΧΧΙΥ 
 
 z = ch. xvii. 2. τω ΐίβω ivoov u£ TTOoc Tiva ^οίολεγο/ιεί'ον Τ] ^επισνστασιν ab 
 
 xTiii.lU. XX. ' J <• ,/ "^ ,; , - ' _ „ i ^ , EGI 
 
 ahereonlyt. TOlOVl'Ta 0)(Aoi», OVTi iV TOIQ aVVayU>yaig OVT£ κατά T1]V 
 
 b = hereoiiiy. TToAtv ovTB ττο^αστησαι οννανται περί ων νυν κατ- 
 
 EGII 
 
 ντ,,ν η-γοουυσιν μην. " ομοΑο-γο) δε τουΓΟ σοι, on κατά την 
 
 jos.Antt. " οοον ην Atyovaii' αιρεσιν ούτως Αατοίνω τω ^ πατρωω 
 
 νϋί. 2. Ε). _ J ^ ι „ . ^ ^ * , <■ ,.''■_'' 
 
 xen. cEe. β^ι^^ τΓίστενων πασιν τοις ^ κατά τον νομον και τοις 
 
 χπί. 1 
 
 vcr. 8. τΓοοώηταις -νί-Ϋραμμίνοις. ίλτηοα εγων εις τον uiov c -ιηϋα 
 
 d^oh.ix.2 .'>'. .','- ^ , '*■,. ,ν εγων . 
 
 ere" 5. ί/ΐ' κ^"' avToi ovTOi προςοί )(οΐ'ται, αναστασιν ' |αεΛ- Aiic 
 
 fMatt.iv. in -y η »' Λ ^ ' \ '^r 16 d ' ' ' KGU 
 
 Hi. Exoii. Ahv ' εσεσυαι όικαιων τε /cat αοικων. ' εν τούτω και 
 
 iii. 12. ' 
 
 g cli. χχϋ. 3 reff. Ii = dat., Luke i. 20 al. fr. i ch. xxii. 12 reft'. k con.str. (daf. of aReney), Maft. 
 
 vi. 1. Lnke xxiii. 15. xxiv. 35 Gen.xxxi. 15. llPet. i. 21. See 1 John iii. 3. ill. xxvi. 18. 
 
 m Ter.20. 2 Cor. ii. 3. vii. II, &c. η =■ liere only? ήρχιι/ιαι = Luke viii. 13. fli. viii. 14rtrli". 
 
 ο absiil., uli. x\ii. 18 refl'. Da.v. xii. 2. ρ ch. xi. 2S. xxvii. 10. q = Miitt. vi. 7. John xvi. 3U al. 
 
 t.xt B(e sil)GH al Chr Oec. — 12. ηνρον Ε. — ττρ. τη'ας E-gr. — for η, ovre 137. — ΐττιστασιν 
 {corrn ίο more simple word) ABE 3. 13. 40. 03-6. 73. 95' al : txt GH most mss {con- 
 
 cursuin v). — ovSt ovSt Β (sah 3 times) : txt AEGH mss (appy) Clir Thl Oec. — 
 
 rate om 73. — 13. ovTt (both) cm 1. 2. 40. — Mill (not rec) aft τταραστ., ins μι, with (Ui'-iJ. 
 78. 80. 96-7. 100-4-G-42 slav-ms Chr-ms Oec: /ioc 2. 18. lGl-77 : σοι 13. 15. 30. 
 133-80: vvi' 6fi2. 76. 80. ΠΙ.— παρ. μί νυν Η 27-9. 98-9 al ThP : μοι wv 177: 
 txt ABEG most mss (appy) vss Chr.— aft dvv., ins σοι ABE 4. 13. 27-9. 36. 40. 64 5-8. 
 73. 105-77 al V Syr ar-erp copt arm : om GH most mss sail syr fieth Chr Thl Oec. — 
 vvvi AB 27. 68. 105-33-37 al Thl-' : om 3. 30 : txt EGH al.— ;uot 13.— 14. σοι τούτο 96. 
 — recoi;rw: txt AE.• — τω πατρ. μου Θ. 137: patri deo meo \ : τω Of ω 73. — πισΓ£υω73. 
 — ιτασιι> om Β: τον om Β al Chr. — και τοις εν τοις ττρ. Ε 3. 15. 18. 25-9. 31-0. 
 40-3. 65 62. 73-6. 105-33-37 al ThF : και εν τοις Β al syrr Chr {αρρι/ the varr have 
 been corrns to ease the constr. First the dat aft the pass was altered by tv, then τοις 
 was stipplied to render τοις κατ. τ. v. and τοις εν τ. ττρ. parallel. This is much more 
 probable than Meyer's hyp): txt AGH 4. 13. 38. 42. 57. 66'. 95-6-7-'-8. 126-42-77 
 al V copt sah seth al Thl' Oec : τοις om 101 al. — 15. έχων Se 137• — τον om C 180. — 
 ίκδεχ. 137• — rec ίσ£σθ. νεκρών {siipplementary addition), with EGH al : om ABC 13. 
 40. 68 al V copt sah arm Chr ThP: om αναστ άδικων 25. — 16. rec £e (it om 13) 
 
 as inconsistent with the text of ch. xxi. 26, tlie city,' ' any where in the city ;' as we 
 27 ; as also his idea that the Apostle did say, ' up and down the streets.' 13.] 
 not take the vow on himself: the expres- The words με and noi, found in various 
 sion σνν αΐιτοίς άγνισθείς clearly negativ- MSS, have been inserted to help the con- 
 ing the latter supposition ; and tiLv ήμερων struction. 14.] The δί here has a 
 τοΰ α^νισμυϋ, ver. 26, being manifestly, peculiar force. 'But,' (^ if thou wouldst 
 unless to one warped by a hypothesis, truly know the reason ivhy they accuse 
 identical with αϊ επτά ήμίραι οί \er. 27• me'), ' hinc illae lacrymae.' aipeaiv. 
 See note there. I mention this here, be- in allusion to αΊρίσεως used by Tertullus, 
 cause these suppositions materially affect ver. 5. The word is capable of an indif- 
 his arrangement of the twelve days, which ferent or of a bad sense. Tert. had used it 
 he gives thus : 2nd, from Csesarea to Jerus. ; in the latter. Paul explains what it really 
 3rd, interview with James ; 4th, (Pentecost) was. οντιας ^= κατά ταντ))ν. Notice 
 visit to the temple with the Nazarenes, a7id in the words ιτατρωω θβω the skill of Paul. 
 apprehension ,• 5th, before the Sanhedrim ; The term was one well known to the Greeks 
 6th, departure from Jerusalem ; 7th, arri- and Romans, and which would carry with 
 val in Caesarea; then, five days from that it its own justification. " Invisum quippe 
 (but see note on ver. 1), Ananias, &c., /eai^e erat gentibus, nominatim etiam Romanis, 
 Jerusalem (but how does this appear from si quis se peregrinis aut diis aut deorura 
 ver. 1 ? κατ'ίβη must surely denote their cultibus addiceret ; praeterea Judieis per 
 arrival at Ciesarea, where the narrator, or, multa impcratorum et magistratuum de- 
 at all events, the locus of the history is) ; creta et senatus consulta sancita erat po- 
 13th, arrival of Ananias, &c., at Ciesarea, testas, Deum patrium colendi, patriis ritibus 
 awrf hearing (improbable) of Paul. So that et sacris utendi. Jos. Antt. xiv. 17; xvi. 
 the above hypotheses are not the only rea- 4" (Kuinoel). In his address to the Jews 
 sons for rejecting \yi('seler's arrangement. (ch. xxii. 14) the similar expression ό θ. 
 12. κατά την ττόλ.] 'throughout τ-ώ»' πατίρω r //μών, brings out more clearly
 
 13-20. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 245 
 
 αυτός ^ ασκώ ^ αττροςκοπον συΐ'ίίδϊ/σιν ένειν " ττρος τύι; ^ ';fr^<"»'y+• 
 θίον και τους ανΘξχυττους " δ(α τταντός. ^' ' δί' ΐτων δε Lk6< ro.- 
 ΤΓΛειονων '"^ελετϊμοσύνας " ποιησων ^ εις το έθνος μου ""τταξ)- aTaistoi 
 εγενοιαηΐ' /cat ττροςψορας, ^" εν οις ευροι^ με η-γ^ησμενον so|,ii.Eiectr 
 εν τω ΐίρω, ου μίτα όχλου ουδέ ^ μετά θοξ)υβου, τίνες δε "^ SpCor'. ^.^ 32. 
 απο τϊ]ς Άσ'ιας Ίουδοιοί, ^^ ους δει ^ έττί σου ^ παρεϊναι sir.^'kxxv. 
 /cat κατηγορεί ν ει ' τι ^ ε^οιεν ^ ττρός εμε. ^^ 
 
 ϊί 
 
 , ^ (xxxii.)ai. 
 αυτοί tch.xxiii. 1 
 
 tt = cli. ii.47. Rom. V. 1. u Matt, xviii. in al. cli. ii. 2.Ί reff. ν = Mntt. xxvi. (il. Gal. ii. 1 
 
 al. Deut. XV. 1. w ch. ix. bB reft'. χ — cli. x. 2 tcff. y— cli.ii. 22. Luke ix. 13 al. 
 
 ζ ab^ol., Luke xii. 51 reff. ch. ix. 3'J. a ch. xxi. 2H reft. b = Mark vi. 48. Luke xvi. 10 al. 
 
 c ch. xxi. 24 reft". d Luke xxii. 6. Ezek. xxiii. 24. e μετά =. ch. v. 2(i al. Ezek. vli. 11. 
 
 fch.xxiii. 30. gSeech X. 3.1. h ver. 2. jMatt. v. 23. Mark xi. 25. Kev. ii. 4 al. 
 
 kopf. (.subjeelivepos.'sibilily), —ch. xrii. 27. Luke xxii. 23 al. Wiuer, } 42. 4 c. 1 = 1 Cor. vi. 1. Col. 
 
 .13. ch. XXV. 19. 
 
 m ver. 15. 
 
 αυτός (και not being understood), with Η al copt Oec : txt ABCEG 15. 40. 68-i). 73-6. 
 97. 10ά-37 al lect 40 ν syrr sah Thl- : t^i και αυτ. 25. 'AG. 80. 100-772 arm slav Chr 
 Thl': Tt αυτ. ^\.—(χων GH 15. 18. 31-G. 42. 57. 06-9. 80. 113-33-37-77-80 all ar-pol 
 Slav Chr: t.\t ABCE al ν all Thl Oec— ττρος Tt G 95. 113-33-37 al Chr Thl-.— TTfJoc r. 
 ανΰρ. \3T .—διάττοντος om 32. 42. 57^ 137 al. — 17. rec has παριγ. aft πλίΐυνων 
 {transposn for perspicuity), with GH al : Ε 137 al aft ττροσφ. : txt BC 13. 31. 40. 68. 
 73. 105-80 all V Thl- : om Α.— add at end, et vota ν Jer. — 18. tv αις {corrn to suit 
 προςφορας) ABCE 13. 36. 40. 66-8. 73-6. 105-37-80 all ThF : txt GH most mss Chr 
 ThU. — aft θορύβου, add et apj)rehenderunt me, claniantes et dicentes : tolle inimicmn 
 nostrum (or virum) v-si.\t demid al-latt. — ηυρον Έ,. — δί om B(e sil)GH al : ins ACE 3. 
 14. 15. 18'. 25-9. 31. 40. 68. 73. 137-42-80 ν copt sah syr al Thl' Oec : Tt ",ΰ.—των απο 
 (and ιουδαίων, except C al) CE all syr Thl. — 19. tSti (corrn to suit i^otf j') ACE all syrr 
 copt all Chr' Thl: txt BGH 4. 18. 42. 57. 66'. 76-8. 80. 95' to 101-4-6-26-37-77 all 
 lect 40 sah seth al Chr Oec. — παραπτηνηι 96. 142. — ti ιχοην τι 133: for ft τι, οτι 137: 
 tTi G (Scholz).-rec μι, with GH al : txt ABCE 13 (al.>).— 20. a AC— rec ti η (corrn 
 
 those πατίρ(ς,\η whom Felix had no interest Ι^εημ. ; thus α\ς must have been altered to 
 
 further than the identification of Paul's 
 religion with that of his ancestors required, 
 κατά τ. v.] See on κατ. τ. ττόλιν, 
 above. Then the dat. is used of the personal 
 agents, the prophets. He avoids saying 
 ' by Moses,' because the mention of the 
 law would carry more weight. 15. 
 
 αϋτοι ovToi] It would appear from this, 
 that the Η . P. and the deputation were not 
 of the Sadducees. But perhaps this infer- 
 ence is too hasty ; Paul might regard them 
 as representing the whole Jewish people, 
 and speak generally, as he does of the same 
 hope ch. xxvi. 7» where he assigns it to to 
 δωδίκάφυΧον ι'ιμών. νίκρών, inserted 
 
 here in some MSS. to fill up the meaning, 
 is not likely to have been spoken by the 
 Apo.stle. Tlie juxta-position of those words, 
 which excited mockery even when the Gos- 
 pel was being directly preached, would 
 hardly have been hazarded in this defence, 
 wliore every expression is so carefully 
 weighed. 16. ev τούτω] ' Accord- 
 
 ingly,' i. e. ' having and cherishing this 
 hoj»! ;' see reff. καί] ' also,' ' as well as 
 
 they.' 17.] Be refers back to the former 
 
 Of, ver. 14. ' But the matter of whicii they 
 complain is this, that after an absence of 
 many years,' &c. — See 1 Cor. xvi. 3, 4. 
 2 Cor. viii. ix. note, ch. xx. 4. 18.] De 
 
 W., upholding the reading αίς, observes, 
 tliat ΐτιγνισμ. can only refer to ττροςφ., not to 
 
 οίς•, to give a general neuter sense, ' amidst 
 which occupations : ' and the sense would 
 be, ' among,' or ' engaged in ivhich offer- 
 ings :' it being in the temple. But this seems 
 far fetched and unlikely, and Meyer's sup- 
 position, which I have adopted in tlie 
 var. readd., much more probable. The 
 use of a verb referring to two substt., to 
 only one of which it is applicable, is too 
 common to require illustration. — The con- 
 struction is irregular. A subject to tipov 
 has to be supplied by a reference to some 
 nominative case implied in ol• ptra ϋχ. οΰδ. 
 μ. θορ., thus : 'amidst whicli they found 
 me purified in the temple, none who de- 
 tected me in the act of raising a tu- 
 mult .... but certain Asiatic Jews . . . .' 
 This would leave it to be iiiierred that no 
 legal officers had ajiprehendcd him, but cer- 
 tain private individuals, illegally ; who be- 
 sides had not cMjine forward to substantiate 
 any charge against him. Bornemann would 
 sup])ly υυχ ούτοι μίν before τινίς όί ; but 
 the objection to this is, tliat the negative 
 
 υΰ μιτά ΰχ stands already as the 
 
 projjcr opponent clause to ro ίς- ic, and we 
 should thus have two negative clauses to- 
 gether. — On this sense of Of, sec Vigcr, 
 ed. Hermann, p. Id", note 24; and Her- 
 mann's note, p. 702. 19. The latter re- 
 marks, " inteiligitur in liac formula, (jitani. 
 malum, stultum est, vel simile quid."
 
 246 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXIV. 
 
 nciKxim.ii qJ^qj είττάτωσον τΊ ενρον ev ίμοι " αδίκημα στάντυς μου abc 
 
 Ttpav Till• 
 •πάλιν ΤΓΟί- 
 
 o = ch. xiii.27 f,x_ ~, 91*" '" ' ο, -I 
 
 "It ch i 1 ^'''* "^^^ συνίόριου, '^^ η περί μιας ταύτης φωνής ' ιις 
 qch kvii.32ai. ίΚίΚξ)αί,α iv ουτοις εστως, οτι περί ^ αναστάσεως νεκρών 
 
 rch.xxiii.fi. , ν ^ / ' f ' ,» ' - 22 s ' Ο ' \ ί^ ' 
 
 S here only. f-yw κοινομαι σιψίρον ίψ υμών, ανίραλετο οε αυ- 
 
 sihieusn. τούς ό Φϊίλιζ, ' ακριβεστερον ειδώς τα περί της " οδοΰ, 
 
 Lex. V. Τ. in ,/ ,/ ^-^ . / f λ f ν /Q " w 5» ' 
 
 ειπας Όταν Αυσιας ο χιΛιαρχος καταρ»?, οιαγνω- 
 συμαι " τα καθ' υμάς, "^ ^ ^ιαταζ,άμενος τω εκατοντάρ^-^ 
 
 eiw ύναβα- ^ τηρε^σθοι αυτόν, έχειν τε ^ ανεσιν, και μη^ενα κωΧυειν 
 
 xen.Mem. Των '^ ι^ιων αυτου υπηρετειν αυτω. 
 
 iii.O. (ί. ' ' 
 
 t ch.xviii. 26 relf. u = cb, ix.2 reff. ν absol., ch. viii. 15 al. fr. w ch. xxiii. 15 only Num. 
 
 xxxiii. 5fi. SMacc. is. 15. χ eh. xxv. 14. Eph.vi.21. Col. ir. 7. Phil. i. 12. y Luke viii. 
 
 55. ch.xviii. 2 al. ρ = ch. xii. 5 reft. a = here only. 2 Chron. xxiii. 15 (2 Cor. ii. 13. vii. 5. 
 
 viii. ΙΆ. 2 The.s.s i. 7 onlv. I- P.) b = ch. xvi. 6 refl". c = ch. iv. 23. See John i. U. Titus i. 12. 
 
 (1 = ch. xiii. 36. xx. 34 only t• Wisd.xvi. 24 
 
 from ver 19), with some mss ν syr al Oec : txt ABCEGH 38. 42. 57. 73-6-8. 80. 95 to 8. 
 113-2G-.'}3-J2-77-iJ0 all syr arr copt arm slav (not mod) Chr Thl. — ηνρον Ε. — ev t/ioj 
 cm AB al 40 : ins CEGH '^u'(nrly) ^Chr ThlOec— 21. φων. ταντ. Ε 80. 137 syr Thl'. 
 — rec ίκι,αζα {negligence?), with B(e sil)EGH al ThP : ικηρνία 101: txt AC 40. 
 65-9. 133-77 all Chrj Thl' Oec. — rec tar. tv αυτ. (corini to avoid ambig of reference of 
 εν avT. ?), with GH al syrr al Chr Oec: txt ABCE 40. 68. 105-37 al ν copt Thl: for εν, 
 συν 177•— «yw om C. — σημ. κριν. 137 = (τημ- om 133. — rec νφ {corrn, the force of εφ 
 not being perceived), with EGH al : txt ABC 13. 31. 40. 65. 73 al syr (ajth) : }]μων 42 : 
 νμας 180. — 22. rec άκουσας δε ταύτα ο φ. ανεβ. αυτ. {corrn for particularity), with G 
 al Thl Oec : txt ABCEH 14'. 40. 68. 105-37-42 al ν syrr ar-erp copt ieth arm Chr (o φ. 
 avr.). — rec ειπών (co7'rn to tnore usual for7n),w'ith^G}l ah txt ABC: add οτι 137. — κατα- 
 λαβη 73.-23. rec Λογ. τε, with Η al ν all : ϋε G: txt ABCE 13. 36. 40. 66^. 88. 99. 
 100-37 al copt syr arm ThP. — rec for αυτόν, τον τταυλον, with GH &c : txt ABCE 10. 
 13. 15. 36. 40. 68. 73. 105-26-37 ν al arm syr copt Thl^.— rec aft υττ7)()ετειν add η irpoc- 
 ερχισθαι, with GH &c : txt ABCE 13. 14. 68. ^'i. 105 al ν syrr ar-erp copt arm al. — 
 
 19.] exoiev, not ίχουσιΐ', implying the sub- curate knowledge ahout the way:' not, 
 
 jective possibility merely, and disclaiming ' till he should obtain more ace. kn.' (un- 
 
 all knowledge of what the charge might be. gram.) : nor, ' since he had now obtained ' 
 
 The sentence is an anacoluthon : δεΐ is ab- (viz. by Paul's speech : but είδώς cannot 
 
 solutely asserted in the present: then be rendered ' certior factus'). But this, 
 
 έχοιεν in the opt. follows, as if the hypo- the only right rendering, is variously under- 
 
 thetical tit ( had been used : and hence the stood. Chrys. says: εττίτηϋίς ΰπιρίθετο 
 
 corrn. to tdti. On the opt. after the hypo- (he adjourned the case purposely), οϋ δεό- 
 
 thetical indicative, see Bernhardy, Syntax, μένος μαθιΐν, άλλα διακρούσασθαι βυυ- 
 
 ρ. 386 ίΤ. — This also is a skilful argument λόμενος τους 'Ιουδαίους. άφεΐναι οΰκ 
 
 on the part of the Apostle : — it being the ηθεΧε δι εκείνους. Luther and Wolf : 
 
 custom of the Romans not to judge a pri- " distulit, . . . non quod sectae ignarus esset, 
 
 soner without the accusers face to face, he aut pleniorem sibi notitiam ejus compa- 
 
 deposes that his real accusers were the rare vellet, sed quia, cum satis illam jam 
 
 .(4 sia/i'c /e?/'s who first raised the cry against cognitam haberet, Judseos amplius sibi 
 
 him in the temple, — not the Sanhedrim, molestos esse nolebat." But these interpp., 
 
 who merely received him at the hands of as De W. observes, overlook the circum- 
 
 others, — and that these were iiot present, stance, that such a reason for adjournment 
 
 20.] ' Or let these persons them- would be as unfavourable to Paul, as to the 
 
 selves say, what fault they found in me Jews. Meyer explains it, that he adjourned 
 
 while I stood before the Sanhedrim, the case, ' becattse,' &c. But this (De W.) 
 
 other than in the matter of this one would imply that he was favourably dis- 
 
 saying.' . . . . -ί serves for ri άλλο. So posed to Paul. The simplest explanation 
 
 in English : ' What fault hut this:' i. e. is that given by De W. : He put them off 
 
 '^What other fault but this.' 21.] έφ' to another time, not as requiring any more 
 
 νμ., 'before you:' less usual than ύ^' ΰ/ι. information about 'the way,'/or Ma^wa^er 
 
 which is probably a correction. 22. he knew Se/bre,— but waiting for the arrival 
 
 άνββάλίτο αίιτ.] ^ ' ariiplinrit eos ;' viz. of Lysias.— Whether Lysias was e.xpected, 
 
 both parties. άκρ. £ΐδώς τα ττ. τ. όδ.] or summoned, or ever came to be heard, is 
 
 These words will bear only one philolo- very doubtful. The real motive of the 
 
 gically correct interpretation, ' having ac- ' ampliatio' appears in ver. 26. διαγν. 
 
 EGH
 
 21—26. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 247 
 
 Μετα οε ημέρας τινας TrapaytvofXivoq ο 
 συν Δρουσιλλ^ τι^? γυναι /Cf, ουστ) Ιουδαία, ^ μίτεττίμφατο 
 
 τον ΙΙαυΛον και ηκουσίν αυτού ττερι της 
 
 ι 25 i 5> Λ ' <>\ ' - \ 
 
 ττιστεως. οιαΛεγο/ίενου οε αυτού 
 
 > ι » ' ^ - m ' 
 
 και ί'^Κξ>ατίΐας και του κοιματος 
 ° ίμψοβος '^ίνόμίνος ο Φηλιί, απεκρΊ 
 καιρόν οε 
 i\Trit<t)v ι 
 
 ^ί/ΛΚ, fabsol.,Hike 
 χϋ. 51. ch. 
 ix. 3ί». 
 R ch. χ. Sreff. 
 
 'εις -^ριστον ^ ^ρ*;,, ^;^ ξ} '''• 
 
 k $> / Paul, or of 
 
 όικαιοσυνης Paui, only. 
 
 _ , .. - i "er. 12. 1-a. 
 
 ελλοΐ'ττ' '^'»• ' 
 
 7Γθ|θευου, 
 
 26 " 
 
 ajua κ 
 
 πεοί 
 
 του " με 
 Irj ^ Το νΰι/ 
 ajjiov μετακαλεσομαι σε' "^^ρ^^Ρ,; 
 ■χρήματα οοθησεται αυτω 
 
 ^^ζ> kabsol., ch. 
 >' xvii.31. 
 
 ενΟΙ^ Rom. ix.£8 
 '^ xiv. 17al. 
 
 in = Ht-b vi.2. 1 Pet. iv. 1Γ. Rev. xx. 4. Proi. xxi. 15 al. η = Matt. xii. 
 
 ο Lake xxiv. 5 al. J Mace. xiii. 2. ρ here ouly. Tobit TJi. 11. q = Gal ϊί. 
 
 r -^ here only. ueTuA. καιρ. ύρμόττοΐ'τα, Pulyb. ii. 16. Ιό. s ch. τϋ. 14 reff. t 
 
 oulvt. Sir. 
 xviii.au 
 (title). 
 R im. V. 14 al. 
 Hagg. i. 2, 4. 
 , viii. 18 refl". 
 
 24. Tiv. ημ. AE 137 ν al. — παραγίν. om Syr ar-erp. — ο φ. om Β. — bef or aft γυν. ins 
 liia AB 13. 31-6. 40-2. δ?. C6-8-9. 97. 180 al syr-marg Amm ThP : om C'EGH all 
 (' abt 40,' Tisch) Chr Thl' Oec. — rec aft γυν. ins αυτού, with A (see above) Ε al Thl' Oec : 
 om Β (see above) C'GH 14. 15. 26-7. 38. 57- 76-8. 80. 95-6-8. 100-4 13-26-37-42-77 all 
 syr (marg) Amm Chr Thl- {both iSia and αντυυ are addilions to fix the sense of yvvaiKi). 
 — aft lovcaia, ins παρακαλονση, οττως ιΟη τον παυΧον και ακουση τον λογοί', ως ουν 
 ίβονλετο ικανον ττοιησαι, (ποιησιν τοντο syr-marg: and roffavit (ilia) ut videret Paulum 
 et audiret bohem. — μιτεπεμφαντο Syr ar-erp. — aft qicovfff r {ηκουαν C) om αυτόν C. — 
 χρ. ιηαονν {corrn for precision) BEG 38. 42. 57- 78. 80. 95-6-7. 101-6-13-33 77 aU 
 V copt syr ar-pol seth arm slav Chr Thl- : txt A(Ci : C^ appy)H al (ap) Syr al Thl' Oec. — 
 
 25. τον μελλ. κριμ. C 15. 31. 40. 73. 180 al arm Chr-comm. — τον om 13. — recaft μεΧΚ. 
 ins εσεσθαι {appy a corrn aft ver 15), with GH most mss (appy) Chr- Thl Oec; txt 
 ABCE 13. 15. 27-9. 36. 40. 66^-8. 73. 105-37-80 al (vss?).— f^^od. ie A Άλ.—ίχων Η 
 al {έχουν ΰ).—!ταραλαβ. A : λαβών 13. 32. 40-2-3. 57. 73-6. 99. 105-33 al Chr (ms & 
 comm) Till-. — καφιο ft εττιτηίιω Ε v. — 26. rec αμα δε και {insertion of copula), with 
 some mss copt ThP Oec: txt ABCEGH 41. 13. 26-7-9. 31-6. 42. 57. 65-6'-8. 73. 80. 
 113-33-37-42-77-80 all ν arr Chr Thl•.— /cat om 7«. 137•— bef χρ. ins και 137.— αυτω 
 
 τα καθ' ύμ.] ' Ι will adjudge your mat- 
 ters.' So in reff. also. 23. δια- 
 ταξαμ.€νος is in appos. with είπας, and 
 both belong to άνεβά\ετο. αν€σιν] 
 De W. and iSIeyer explain this of ' custodia 
 libera,' φυλακή άΰεσμος (Arrian, Exp. ii. 
 15). But this can hardly be. Lipsius 
 (Excurs. II. on Tacit. Ann. iii. 22; vi. 3, 
 cited by Wieseler, Chron. d. Apost.-g. p. 
 380) says, ' Prater cusiodiam militarem 
 alia duplex, apud magistratus, et apud 
 vades. Apud magistratus, quum reus Con- 
 sul!, Praetori, iEdili, interdum et Sena- 
 tori, etiam non e magistratu, committeba- 
 tur : quod nonnisi in reis illttstrioribiis 
 usurpatum, eaque custodia libera dicta : 
 vid. Tacit. Ann. vi. 3. Sail. Cat. xlvii. 
 Liv. vi. 3('i. Cic. Brut. xcvi. Dio Iviii. 3. 
 Custodia apud vades, quum eorum periculo 
 fidejussoribus reus tradebatur : vid. Tacit. 
 Ann. v. 8. Suet. ΛΊίυΙΙ. II.' Now, Wieseler 
 argues, as Paul v:as not bailed, — and was 
 not ' e reis illustrioribus,' and besides was 
 delivered to a centurion to keep, his cannot 
 have been ' custodia libera,' but ' militaris:' 
 relaxed however as much as was consistent 
 with safe custody. He cites Josephus, who 
 says (Antt. xviii. 6. 10) of the custody of 
 Agri])i)a, ιρυλακι) μίν yap και τίιρησις y/v, 
 μετά μ'εντοι aveacws Ti]r εΙς την Siairav. 
 
 ' Remission,' or ' relaxation,' would be a 
 better rendering than ' liberty.' 24. 
 
 τταραγίν.] Into the hall or chamber where 
 Paul was to speak. Δρονσίλλη] She 
 
 was daughter of Herod Agrippa I. (see cli. 
 xii.) and of Cypros, — and sister of Agrijipa 
 II. She was betrothed at six years old (Jos. 
 Antt. xix. 9. ] ) to Epiphanes, son of Antio- 
 chus, king of Commagene ; but (Antt. xx. 
 7•' 1) he dechuing the marriage, not wishing 
 to be circumcised and become a Jew, she 
 was married to the more obsequious Azizus, 
 king of Emesa. Not long after, Fehx, 
 being enamoured of her beauty, persuaded 
 her, by means of a certain Simon, a Cyprian 
 magician (see note on ch. viii. 9), to leave 
 her husband and live with him (Antt. xx. 
 7. 2). She bore him a son, Agrippa : and 
 both mother and son perished in an erup- 
 tion of Vesuvius, in the reign of Titus 
 (ibid.). — The Drusilla mentioned by Tadtus 
 (Hist. v. 9), a granddaughter of Antony and 
 Cleopatra, must have been another wife of 
 Felix, who was thrice married, and each 
 time to persons of royal birth ; ' trium 
 reginarum maritus,' Suet. Claud. 28. 
 25.] It is remarkable that Tacitus 
 uses of Felix (Ann. xii. 54) the expression 
 ' cuncta malefacta sibi impune ratus.' The 
 fear of Felix appears to have operated
 
 248 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXIV. 27. 
 
 "i^Tim^v'ss του Παύλου, ^ιο και '^ ττυκνότερον αυτόν ^ μζταπεμπυμίνος ABC 
 
 onl.vt(Eiek. ,• f /\ ' - 97 w Λ ' ^^ x Λ ύ ' ''Λ /Q V ^ ' Έ.ΟΗ 
 
 xxxi.3rt!ex.) ωαιλει ουτω. ' Διετίας οε πληρωϋίίσης eAalDev ' οια- 
 
 vLukesxiv. δοχον ό Φί}λιξ Πό|θκ:ιον Φηστον, θελων τε ^ χα^οιτας 
 
 only, «.(lat., ^ καταθε'σΟαι τοΓς Ίουδαιοις ο Φί)λιξ κτατελιττεν τον 
 
 here οιιΐν. 
 
 Pro..x.xiii. Παϋλον " δεδεμενοι/. 
 
 80 only. See Λ.Α V . <P)jffToc ουι* ίΤΓίρας τϊ) ίπαργ^ιο. μίτα 
 
 Matt. 11. In. ^ f>//^ ' •τ '\ '^ττ" ' 
 
 χ i"ih^ viusj, τοεις -ημέρας ανερη εις Ιεροσόλυμα αττο Καισα|θείας, 
 
 30 al. Gen. 'oe',' ' »-r? \ >'h 
 
 xsv. !!4. '^ *" ενεώαι/ισαΐ' τε αυτω ο αργιερευς και οι πρώτοι των 
 
 y here only. ' ι. ( Λ. I S 
 
 1 Chron. xviii. 17. 5i'i<5., so siiccessorem accepit, Plin. Epist. ix. 13, end. ζ = ch. xxv. 3, 9, 
 
 a =- ch. XXV. S> only. 1 Mace. x. L>3 (vat.). ευΕργίσιαΐ' κ.ιιαΟίσί/αί, Demoslh. 1!)3. 22. b = ch.xxT. 
 
 14. Luke XV. 4. Dan. x. 13. c = Mark xv. 7. d = here only. Seech, xx. 18. xxi.4. 
 
 e ch. xxiii. 34 onlj . SeeEzr. v. 3. f=ch. xv.2. Matt xx. 18. Ezr. vii. 6, 7. gch. xxiv. 1. See 
 
 ch. xxiii. 15 reft. h ch. xiii. 50 refl'. 
 
 om B. — rec aft παν\. add οττως \νση αυτόν {a gloss from the marg), with GH al {iva 
 απολνσ. αυ. 4. GO. 80. 98 marg 100-4) copt al Chr Thl Oec : txt ABCE 40. <iH. 73. 81. 
 107 V syrr arm (setli). — αντον om 38. !)3-β. — μίΓατΐ-ίμ-φαμίνος 133. — for ωμιλ. (ομιλ. G), 
 ίιίλίγίΓο C 15. 18. 36. 180. — 27. aft διαδοχον, ins της ΐ]•/ίμοΐΊας αυτόν syr. — ο φηλιξ, 
 cm 73. — aft ψηστον, ins τον Si ττανλον tiaatv ti> τηοησίΐ ΰια δρουσιλλαΐ' 137 : τταυλω 
 it ίπίτρίφεν ei> φυλακή Χαλίΐν syr-marg. — τε cm arm : St 13. 14. 27-9. 38. 40-2. 08. 
 93-6. 105-37 ν syr ar-erp copt Chr Thl. — χαριτα {corrn, as is also χάριν, because one 
 favour only is here spoken of: see ch xxv. 9) ABC 13. 25 : χάριν EG 14'. 27• 40. 66--8. 
 73. 96. 105-37 V (Syr ar-erp copt) Chr ThP : txt Η most mss (appy) no versions 
 appy (Tisch). 
 
 Chap. XXV. 1. τη επαρχειω Α. — aft κατεβ., ins αττο καισαρειας 137• — 2. ενιψα- 
 νησαν Η 25-6. 68. 105 ThP Oec (so also ch xxiii. 22; xxiv. 1 ; xxv. 15). — rec δε (al- 
 teration of characteristic Tt) with EGH &c copt Syr al Thl : txt ABC 13 (al .') ν 
 syr aeth al Chr ThP Oec. — oi αρχιερείς (see note) ABCEG 14. 27-9. 36 8. 40. 
 65-6--8. 73. 80. 95. 105-37 al ν Syr ar-erp copt seth arm slav Chr-text : ο re αρχιερευς 
 
 merely in his sending away Paul : no im- and harassed by bands of robbers and 
 
 pression for good w-as made on him. sicarii, and the old plague of false prophets. 
 
 26.] ' Lex Juha de repetundis prsecipit, He died, after being procurator a very short 
 
 ne quis ob hominem in vincula publica time, — from one to two years. Josephus 
 
 conjiciendura, vinciendum, vincirive juben- (B. J. ii. 14. 1) contrasts him, as a putter 
 
 dum, exve vinculis dimittendum ; neve down of robbers, favourably witli his suc- 
 
 quis ob hominem condemnandum absol- cessor Albinus. — On the deposition, &c. of 
 
 vendumve .... aliquid acceperit.' Digest. Felix, see note, ch. xxiii. 24. χοίριτα? 
 
 xl. 11. 3. Cited by Mr. Humphry, who καταθί'σθαι] See reff. ' Est locutio bene 
 
 observes : Albinus, who succeeded Festus, Grseca, Demostheni quoque usitata et Xe- 
 
 so much encouraged this kind of bribery, nophonti : quales locutiones non paucas 
 
 that no malefactors remained in prison, habet Lucas, ubi non alios inducit lo- 
 
 except those who did not offer money for quentes, sed ipse loquitur, et quidem de 
 
 theh• liberation (Jos. B. J. ii. 14. 1). St. rebus ad religionem non pertinentibus.' 
 
 Paul did not resort to this mode of shorten- Grot. The reading χάριτα, so strongly 
 
 ing his tedious, and unjust imprisonment, supported by MSS, has evidently been a 
 
 and Tertullian (' de Fuga in Persecutione ') correction to suit the context, only one such 
 
 quotes his conduct in tliis respect against act being spoken of. But the plural de- 
 
 those who were disposed to purchase escape scribes the ivish of Felix to confer obliga- 
 
 from persecution : a practice which pre- tions on the Jews, who were sending to 
 
 vailed and became a great evil in the time complain of him at Rome, — and so win 
 
 of Cyprian. See his Epistles, lii. and their favour, StSc^evov] There was 
 
 Ixviii., denouncing the Libellatici. no change in the method of custody, see 
 
 27. δΐ£τίας] viz. of Paul's imprisonment, note on ver. 23. He left liiin in the ' cus- 
 
 Πορκιον Φήστον] Festus appears todia militaris' in which he was. 
 
 to have succeeded Felix in the summer or XXV. 1.] The term επαρχία is properly 
 
 autumn of the year 60 a.d. : but the used oi a. province, whether imperial or 
 
 question is one of mucli chronological diffi- senatorial (see note on ch. xiii. 7),— but is 
 
 culty. It is fully discussed in Wieseler, here loosely applied to Judaea, which was 
 
 Chron. d. Apost.-g. pj). 91—99. He found only a procuratorship, attached to the pro- 
 
 the province (Jos. Antt. xx. 8. 10) wasted vince of Syria. So also Josephus calls
 
 XXV. ]— 7. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 249 
 
 Ιουόαιων '^ κατά του Παύλου, καΐ ^ παρεκάΧουν αυτόν i = mm. xvni. 
 αιτούμενοι ναριν κατ αυτού, Όπωτ "^ μίταπίίίφηται ^ = <^^'^>ί"ο. 
 
 ,ν ., ν . - - Malt. τίί. 9 ||. 
 
 αυτόν £ΐς ΙίρονσαΧτιμ, " ΐνί^ραν ποιοΰντίς ° aveXiiv αυτόν ^.^'"e^^'^- 
 
 ρ \ ν f ς\ / 4 ' ^ "? Λ^" ' 'Λα - 'ch. χχίν. 27. 
 
 '^ κατο την οόον. ο μίν ονν Ψηστος απεκ^ιυη ^ τηοίΐ- scor. νω. 
 
 σθαι τον Παΰλον ^ ίΐς Καισάρειαν. εαυτόν δε μεΧΧειν ^ εν ud!!im.'iu 
 ταγ^ει εκττορευεσθαι' "^ Οί ούν έν ύ /^av, φησιν, " δυνατοί o = Matt.ii. 
 ανγκαταβάντες, ει η εστίν εν τω άν^ρΐ τούτω, " κ-α τ ηγο- ρ ch'Tiii!*a6. 
 ρειτωσαν αυτού. ^ όιατρΊφας δε ^ εν αυτοις ημέρας oiiq="chxi'-5 
 
 ττλείους οκτώ rj δέκα, '^ καταβας εις Καισάρειαν, *' t7j ' ^^^ιΙ-^Ιΐ^Ι"- 
 επαύριον '^ καθισας επι του ' βίιματος εκεΧευσεν τον Παΰ- '^^reii.^"' 
 λον α^υηναι. ' παρα'γενομενου δε αυτού ^ ττεριεστησαν j,'^•^'' (cu. ίχ. 
 οι ατΓΟ Ιεοοσολύαων '^κατοβεβί/κότες Ιουδαίοι, ττοΧΧά και^ΪΛ. 
 
 1ι/Λ/ί'/ k / ι\ ■> \ ι > " ''^''^ only• 
 
 ραρεα αιτιωματα καταφεροντες, α ουκ Ίσ•^υον "^ απο- ''^■^'"ϋ- 
 
 χ and coiistr., ch. xxiv. 8. y cli. xii. 19 reff ζ = ch. xxiv. 21 al fr. a cli viii. 15 al. fr. 
 
 I) John i.2!) al. c = ch. xxiii. 3. ver. 17. Matt, xxiii. 2. d ch. xviii. 12 reff. e = ch. xxi. 10 al. 
 
 t = Luke xii. 51 reff. ch. ix. 39. g = Juhn xi. 42 only (2 Tim. ii. IH. Tit. iii. 9 only). 2 Kings xid. 31. 
 
 h = 2 lor. X. 10. Matt, xxiii. 23. i here only t. k = ch. xxvi. 10 (xx. 9 bis) only. 
 
 1 =. Malt. viii. 28 al. Isa. 1. 2. m ch. ii. 22 reff. 
 
 32. 42. 57. 69 al lect 40 Chr-comm : txt Η &c ThP Oec— των ιου^. om 3. 43. 65 : tj]q 
 ΤΓολίως 133. — ra κατά 13. 68. — του om 96. 142. — aft avTOf, ins oi t)}v ιυχην πιποιη- 
 κοης, κατά το δυνατυν, ινα tv ταις χίρσιν αυτών γινηται syr-marg. — 3. for κατ, παρ 
 C 18. 36. 105. 180 tol Syr arr latt Chr (test). — tig ιιροσυλκμα Ε QG.—ertSpoi' 137 Chr. 
 — roil αΐ'ίλ. 180. — 4. τ. ττ. τηρίΐπθαι 68. — rec εΐ' καισαρίΐα {corrn for simplicity), with 
 GH &c Chr al: txt ABCE 13. 40. 73.— it om 13.— /ifXXai^ om E: μίλΧ,,ν m.~tv 
 ταχίΐ om 31. — 5. rec δυν. tv νμιν {trans2)osition for perspicuity), with GH &c syr Thl 
 Oec: txt ABCE 13. 31. 40. 105 ν arm (copt) Chr (coram): ψησιν om 99 Syr arr 
 Lucif : δυν. also om Lucif. — aft taTiv, add ατοττον 27- 36. 43. 57. 98. 105-6. 180 syrr 
 ThF : τούτω om 133 : for τούτω, άτοπον ABCE 4-. 13. 15. 18. 40. 65. 73 al ν arm slav 
 Lucif: τούτω άτοπον 42. 57. 66--8. 81. 96-7-9. 137• 180 {άτοπον has been a gloss on 
 Ti, see Luke xxiii. 41 : and so has been inserted variously) : txt GH most mss syrr copt 
 al Chr Thl Oec. — κατη•/ορητωσαν 38. 180. — 6. rec ημ. πλιιους η δtκa, with GH al Chr 
 (text) (Chr coram om ττλ. j;) Thl' Oec : txt ABCE-gr (ου om E-gr 19^. 25. 40. 66•. 80-. 
 96 syr: πλίΐονας^: πλίωνις 38) 13. 15. 27-9. 31.63-5-6^-8. 73. 105-33 lect 40 ν 
 e copt arm Thl-: also, omg ου πλ., 137 Syr ar-erp sah seth : or πλίΐυυς η δικά 
 18. 63. 76. 180 al slav-ed : πλίΐονς η οκτώ 32. 42'. 57 {on the varr, see notes). — 
 κατίβη 180. — KOL τη tπaυρ. A. — <ιχθ. τ. π. G syrr copt. — 7. aft πιρίίστ. ins αυτόν 
 {interpoln for perspicuity) ABCE(avr«; Ε al Thl2)G 13. 15. 18. 29.36.40. 65-62-8. 
 73. 105-80 lect 40 ν Syr arm Thl-' Lucif : txt Η most mss copt al Chr Thl' Oec— 
 καταβαντες 96. 142. — rec οιτιαματα, with many mss Thl' Oec: txt ABCEGH 
 42. 57. 65. 73-6-8. 96-7. 126 42 80 all Chr ThP.— rec φίροντις κατά του πανλυυ, 
 with GH al syr al Chr Thl Oec: tπιφtρ. τω παυλω Ε: καταφ. του π. 105: φιρ. 
 κατ. αυτού 17• 18. 68 Syr copt ieth sah: φίροντίς 73: txt ABC 13.40 ν al Lucif 
 {καταφ. ivas altered to rec and other varr for yerspy : φέροντας of Ί'λ being a trace of 
 the oriyl ready. So Lachm and Tisch edit : in edn 1 of this vol I adojited φίρυντις loit/i 
 
 Festus ίπαρχος, Antt. xx. 8. 11; as also Festus, relating this application, ver. 15, 
 
 Albinus, ib. 9. 1. 2. ό αρχ.] It has calls them πρεσβύτεροι. 3. χάριν 
 
 been imagined, that ό άρχ. has been a cor- = καταδίκην, ver. 15. irotoivTes, 
 
 rection to suit the former part of the nar- not for πυιί|σovτtς : they were inakiny, 
 
 rative. But it is much more probable that contriving, the ambush already. The 
 
 ol άρχίίρίΐς has been substituted for it, to country was at this time, as may bo seen 
 
 suit the assertion of Festus, ver. 15. — So abundantly in .Jos. Antt. xx., full of sicarii ; 
 
 Meyer and De Wettc. The H. P. now was who were hired by the various |)arties to 
 
 Ishniael tlie son of Phabi, .los. Antt. xx. 8. take oli' their adversaries. 6.] 'J'lic 
 
 11. ττρώτοι is more general than number of days is variously read: wliich 
 
 πρεσβΰτίροι, though most of Um first men has probably arisen from the later MSS, 
 
 must have been members of tiie Sanhedrim, which have η for the οκτώ of the more
 
 250 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXV. 
 
 SMau'sVla'' ^^'^^'^'ί του Παύλου ^ " απολογουμενου οτι οντε ° ίΐς τυν 
 
 x'x*('i. '^" νόμον τωι> Ιουδαίων ούτε εις τυ ιερόν ούτε εις \ίαισαηα 
 
 prh xxiv. 27 ^ ^„ „ 
 
 <,ίίχν.2Γ.η•. ί-ί ημαρτον 
 
 'Γι'ν'.ΐ.'ίϊ;^ ^ καταΘεσΟαι, Ιιποκοιθεις τψ Παυλω ειπεί' ΟεΛεις εις 
 
 sch.xxiii. 30 C, ,χ η ■> Ο ^ ' " » ' r η~ s ' ' 
 
 f<"fi• 1ε/θοσοΛυμα αΐ'αρας εκεί περί τούτων κρίΐΐηναι εττ 
 
 ABC 
 EGH 
 
 Ο Φηστος δε θεΧων τοις Ίουδαίοις "^ χά^ιν 
 ίΚξίίθεις τφ Παυλω ειπεί' θελεΐί 
 
 t Lukei.lO.SU. 
 Jer xxxiii. 
 
 εροσοΑνμα ' αναβας εκεί περί τούτων 
 
 10 r'.^^,, g^ Q Παύλος ^ Επι του βήματος Και- 
 ού με δει "^ κρίνεσθαι. Ιουδαίους οΰδεν 
 
 ε^ου 
 
 σαρος εστως 
 
 ειμί, 
 
 η^ίκησα, ως και συ καΧΧιον " επι•γινωσκεις. 
 οϋν αΒικω και άζιοί' Θανάτου πεπραγ^ά τι, ου 
 
 11 ' ^ 
 ει μεν 
 
 παραιτοΰ- 
 
 ειττεν 
 
 tt compar. — 
 
 i> Cor. Tii. 7. 
 
 2 Tim. i. 18. 
 
 cli. xxvii. 13 
 
 «1. Winer, 
 
 } 3f). 3. 
 ucb.xix. 34 
 
 reft. 
 
 V Luke xiv. 18, I'J. 1 Tim. iv. 7. See Estli. iv. 8. 
 
 T>e IV. a7id Meyer). — 8. rec anoKoy. αυτυυ {corrn following on the insertion of κατ. r. 
 7Γ. above), with GH al Chr (ThP) Oec: txt ABCE {του di tt. E am dcmid Lucif) 13. 17- 
 31. 40. «8. 73. 81. 137 ν syrr ai--erp copt aeth ThP Lucif: αττολ. Si avrov 15. 36. 
 100-80 Tliii.— Ti om 57.80. 105: riva 137.— 9. for ίί, ουν A al.— rec τοις lov. θίλ. 
 {emendn of order), with GH &c Chr Thl' Oec : txt ABCE (5. 13. 31. 40. 08. 105-37 al 
 
 V tol dcmid arm Thl-. — χαριτη A. — τούτου 133. — rec κρινίοθαι (corrn), with GH &c 
 Chr al: t.xt ABCE 13. 40. G8. 73. 105 ThP.— υττ ιμου 4. 15. 18.36-8.80.93-7-8'• 
 105-13-77-80 Chr coram Thl': απ 3: ιττι 133 (υπ and απ have arisen from the 
 
 forensic sense of ίπ not being perceived). — 10. ο om A. — ιστως ιπι ... Β (but in Bentley 
 Β repeats ΐστως aft καισα()ος). — ηδικηκα Β. — γιι/ωσκ£ΐς C 2. 30. 137. — H• rec ft μιν 
 γαρ {corrn, as Meyer, because ti ntv ow seemed contrad to ουδιν ηΐ'ικησα), with GH 
 al vss Chr (text) Thl• Oec : txt ABCE 15. 17. 18. 27. 30. C5-8. 105-33. 180 al copt slav 
 Chr (comm) ThP : ovv om 40 e. — η άξων Ε 29 ν Syr Chr (comm). — του αποθ. Η 18. 
 
 ancient ones : thus η has been omitted on 
 account of the η following. It is possible, 
 as Meyer also observes, that a perverted 
 notion of the necessity of an absolute pre- 
 cision in details in the inspired text, may 
 have occasioned the erasure of one of the 
 numbers. 7.] '7Γ€ρΐ€'<Γτησαν, viz. 
 
 round Paul, as is plain from the αυτοϋ 
 just preceding : not round the βήμα, nor 
 Festus. καταφε'ροντίς, ' bringing 
 
 against him :' see var. readd. and ref. 
 8.] These were the three principal 
 charges to which the πολ. κ. βαρ. air. of the 
 Jews referred (Meyer). 9.] κριθήναι, 
 
 the aor., refers to the one act, of deciding 
 finally concerning these charges. This not 
 having been seen, the later MSS have sub- 
 stituted κρίΐ'ΐσθαι, which is more ' going to 
 law,' ^ being involved in a trial.' — The 
 question is asked of Paul as a Roman 
 citizen, having a right to be tried by Ro- 
 man law : and more is contained in it, than 
 at first meets the ej-e. It seems to propose 
 only a change of place; but doubtless in 
 the Ικ€Ϊ κριθ{)ναι was contained by impli- 
 cation a sentence pronounced by the San- 
 hedrim, eir' ΐμ.ον may mean no more than 
 Ιπί σοΓ>, ch. xxvi. 2, viz., that, as in ch. 
 xxii. the procurator would be present and 
 sanction the trial : so Grot., " visne a syne- 
 drio judicari me prsesente .'" Otherwise, a 
 journey to Jerusalem would be superfluous. 
 Festus may very probably have anticipated 
 the rejection of this proposal by Paul, and 
 have wished to make it appear that the 
 
 obstacle in the way of Paul being tried by 
 the Sanhedrim arose not from him, but 
 from the prisoner himself. 10.] Paul's 
 
 refusal has a positive and a negative ground 
 — 1. ' Caesar s tribunal is my proper jnace 
 of judgment : 2. To the Jews J have done 
 no harm, and they have therefore no claim 
 to judge me' (De W.). Iir. τ. β. 
 
 Κοίσ.] Aleyer quotes from Ulpian, " Quse 
 acta gestaque sunt a procuratore Ciesaris, 
 sic ab eo comprobantur, atque si a Caesare 
 ipsogestasint." κάλλιον] Not ' for the 
 
 superlative,' here or any where else : — the 
 comparative is ellij)tical, requiring ' than 
 . . . .' to be supplied by the hearer : so 
 also in refi". Here, the ellipsis would be 
 readily supplied from Festus's own speech, 
 which appeared to assume that there was 
 some ground of trial before the Sanhedrim. 
 κάλΧιυν will therefore mean, ' better than 
 thou choosest to confess.' We have an 
 ellipsis of the same kind in our phrase ' to 
 knoiv better.' Or it may be in this case as 
 in 2 Tim. i. 18, 'better, than that I need 
 say more on it .•' but I prefer the other 
 interpretation. 11.] Both readings, 
 
 el μέν yap, and el μ,έν ovp, will suit the 
 sense. In the former case, it is, ' For if I 
 am an offender, ....:' in the latter, ' If, 
 now, I am an offender . . . .,' — taking up 
 the supposition generally, after having 
 denied the particular case of his liaving 
 offended the Jews. Meyer and De Wette 
 are at issue about the internal probability 
 of these readings : I am disposed to agree
 
 8—13. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 251 
 
 μαι το αποϋανίΐν' ει ύε οι/όεν ίστιν ων ούτοι κατ 
 ιύδίΐ'ς m δύναται αυτοις 
 
 θαναν' ει δε 
 ηyoρovσιv μου, ουόίΐς μί 
 
 Κ) ζ > Λ - 12 Τ" ' ' il•." a Λ \ Λ ' χ and c.iiistr., 
 
 αισαρα επικαλούμαι. ίοτε ο Φίΐστος συΛΛαΛί}σος rh.xxip.s. 
 
 /χετο του '*'* συ/^βουλίου αττεκρίθη Καίσαρα ' επικεκΧησαι, 1ΰ'^^ fen. '^''• 
 
 επί Καίσαρα ττορευσϊ). pmy. seecii. 
 
 Ήμερων δε '' διαγενομευων τίνων Αγρίττττας ο ρα- "Mau^'vus 
 
 ^ χορισασθαι. "7af xxfv.'s 
 
 χ and cii 
 
 (λευς• και Βε 
 
 σιΛευς• και οερνικη ~ κατηντησαν εις καισαρειαν ασττα- .^'ge dUi'.t 
 
 Κα. 
 
 Lake ix. 30. Exod. xxxiv. 35. 
 cli. xxvii. 9 onlyt• cch. ; 
 
 aa = here only. See Matt. xii. 14 Hi. t b rh. xvii. 14. bb Mark xvi. 1. 
 1 refl'. d cli. xviii. 2S. xxi 7. Exiid. xvUi. 7. 
 
 68. 96-8. 100-5-42-77-80 all ΎΥΛ.—ισην εν (μοι sjrr.—ovroi om 37. 100 al Syr ar-erp 
 Chr (coram).— juoi 78'.— for αυτοις, τούτοις CG 15. 18. 36. 73. 180 : txt AB(e sil)EH; 
 &c Chr Thl Oec. — 12. λη\?]σας 18. 45-6 : συμβούλου G : συνίδριου C : συνΐδ. κ. συμβ. 
 68. — καισ. ιπικ. cm 33-6 : επικαλισαι Ε, (πικαλησαι 26: ττρος (cnea. 23 al. — 13. τίνων 
 om 1. 36. 137 syrr Chr : τριών 3. 95. 108. — βιρίνικη C^ arm : βιοηνικη (appy) CS but 
 ver 23, C has βίρονικης, and so here e (tol demid mss latt) Cassiod. — ασπασαμα'οι AE- 
 gr GH 68. 95-6-8. 105-80 all copt aith al Thl' (C is uncertain) : txt Β (e sil) &c ν syrr 
 
 with Meyer that a difficulty was felt in the 
 oi)v (no expression is more frequently mis- 
 understood and altered than μίν ουν) and 
 it was corrected into γάρ. — This £t assumes 
 the conviction after proof ; as the following 
 61 does the acquit /al. οΰ. μ€ δ\5ν.] 
 
 Said of leffal possibility : ' non fas est 
 
 aliquem ' The dilemma here put 
 
 by Paul is, " If I am guilty, it is not by 
 them, but by Ccesar, that I must be {and 
 am willing to be) tried, sentenced, and 
 2)unished. If I am innocent, and Ccesar 
 acijuits me, than clearly none will be em- 
 powered to give me up to them ; therefore, 
 at all events, guilty or innocent, I am not 
 to be made their victim." Καίσ. 
 
 έ-ΐΓίκολ.] ' I call upon,' i. e. ' appeal to 
 (provoco ad) Caesar.' This power (of ' pro- 
 vocatio ad populum ') having existed in very 
 early times (e. g. the case of Horatius, Livy 
 i. 26), was ensured to Roman citizens by 
 the lex Valeria (see Livy ii. 8. u. c. 245), 
 suspended by the Decemviri, but solemnly 
 re-established after their deposition (Liv. 
 iii. 55. u. c. 305), when it was decreed that 
 it should be unlawful to make any magis- 
 trate from whom there did not lie an 
 appeal. When the emperors absorbed the 
 power of the populus and the tribunitial 
 veto in themselves, the ' provocatio ad po- 
 jmlum' and ' apjjellatio ad tribunos' were 
 botli made to the princeps. See Smith's 
 Diet, of Antt. art. A))pellatio. In Phny's 
 cck'l)rafed Epistle respecting tlie Bithynian 
 Christians (x. 97), we read, " Fuerunt alii 
 similis amentia." : quos, quia cives Romani 
 erant, adnotavi in urbem remittendos." 
 12. συμβουλίου] The ' conventus,' or 
 <τ!ιναύ<)<• of citizens in tlie provinces, assem- 
 bled to try causes on tlie «yojiiiioi (ίιμίικιι), 
 see cli. xix. 38. A crrlain niiiubcr of these 
 were chosen as judices, for the parlicular 
 
 causes, by the proconsul, and these were 
 called his ' consiliarii' (Suet. Tib. 33), or 
 ' assessor es' (πάρίδροι, Suet. Galb. 19). 
 So in Jos. (B. J. ii. 16. 1), Cestius, on re- 
 ceiving an application from Jerusalem re- 
 specting the conduct of Florus, μίτά ηγε- 
 μόνων ίβουλενετο, i. e. with his assessors, 
 or συμβούλων. He consulted them to 
 decide whether the appeal was to be con- 
 ceded, or if conceded, to be at once acted 
 on. (Mr. Lewin cites from the Digests, 
 xlix. 5. 7 : 'Si res dilationem non recipiat, 
 non permittitur appellare.') — The sense is 
 stronger and better without a question at 
 ίπικίκλησαι. — Thus were the two — the de- 
 sign of Paul (ch. xix. 21), and the promise 
 of our Lord to him (ch.xxiii. 11) — brought 
 to their fulfilment, by a combination of 
 IJrovidential circumstances. We can hardly 
 say, with De W. and Meyer, that these 
 must have influenced Paul in making his 
 appeal ; that step is naturally accounted 
 for, and was rendered necessary by tho 
 difficulties which now beset him : but we 
 may be sure that the prospect at length, 
 after his long and tedious imprisonment, of 
 seeing Rome, must at this time have cheered 
 him, and caused him to hear the ΐπί Καί- 
 σαρα noptvay of Festus with no small 
 emotion. 13.] Herod Agrii'pa II., 
 
 son of the Herod of ch. xii. (see note on 
 ver. 1 there), was at Rome, and seventeen 
 only, when his father died (.los. Antt. xix. 
 9. 1). Claudius (ib. 9. 2) was about to 
 send him to succeed to the kingdom, but 
 was dissuaded by his freedmen and fa- 
 vourites, and sent Cuspius Fadus as procu- 
 rator instead. Soon after, (Claudius gave 
 him the princii>ality of Chalcis, wliich had 
 been held by his uncle Herod (Anlt. xx. 
 5. 2),— and (Antt. xx. 1. 3) the presideru'y 
 of the temple at Jerus. and its treasures, —
 
 252 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXV. 
 
 ech.xii. 1!) σόμίνοι τον Φηστον. ^'^ ως δί πλειους η/ιερας ^ οιίτριβυν ^BC 
 *^''Μ"ϋο\Γπ.'^' ^'^'* " ΦΓ}σΓος τω βάσιμη ανίθετο ^ τα κατά τον Παυλοϊ', 
 Bch.xxiT.22 λίγων Άνηρ τις εστί ' καταλίλειμμίνος ΰπο Φηλικος 
 I'Jil'xvf 25*^' ' ^^<^μιος, ^^ πίρι ού -γενομίνον μου εις Ιεροσόλυμα 
 ki^('iu^'ii'i.4u; ένεώάνισαν οι αογιερεις /cat οι πμεσβυτίυοι των Ιου- 
 
 xviii.21al.lr. - , ηι ' / » ' " η <>' 1 fi *• <"> 
 
 ''see^cirxxiii νοιων, αιτουμεροι κατ αυτού καταοικην' * ττμος ους 
 mch"ifii.2o. απεκρΊθην Ότι ουκ εστίν εθος Ρωμαιοις ° χορι^εσθαι τίνα 
 
 11 here only. ,,λ ^^'•^ r r'^r' 
 
 jEimn^VHr. ανϋρωτΓον 7Γξ}ΐν η ο ^ κατη•γορουμενος κατά προςωττον 
 HeroJuii, f^oi TOUQ ^ κaτηyόξ^oυς, ^ τόττον τε " αττολογ/ας Χάβοι 
 
 oSeever. 11. χ „y,^/ 17 w ^Λ' "* >-• 
 
 q absoi., ch. ττερι του ε'^ΚΛηματος. ' συνελυοντων ουν αυτών εν- 
 ' c'hi'iiilis'' θάζε '^ αναβοΧην μη^εμίαν ττοιησάμενος, ^ Tij έξης ' καΘισας 
 S cii. xxiii. 30. £7Γί του ρηματος εκελευσα αγυηναι τον ανορα' περί 
 
 •2Λ. Heb. χϋ. 17. u ch. χχϋ. 1. 2 Tim. iv. 16. ν ch. xxiii. 29 only t. w -> cli. i.fi al. fr. 
 
 χ brre only, ΰναβολην τοΐι ieirou έποιι;σατο, Tbui'yd. ii. 42. y ch. xxi. 1. xxvii. 18 only. See 
 
 Lnke vii. 11. ix. 37. (Luke only.) ζ ver. 6. 
 
 al Chr ThP Oec— 14. ξατριβιν {corrn) Η 42. 57. 78. 80. 97-8 all ar-pol seth Thl' Oec 
 (ed). — 15. tvKp. μοι Ε arm: on -νησαν (40. 105 TliP Oec), see ver 2 : αηφανιηην 13 
 Chrj. — rtiij' ιουζ. om 13. — κητ αυτού om 13. Cf>'. — rec δικην (see note), withEGH most 
 mss Chr Thl Oec : txt ABC 13. 25-7-9. 40. G(J-. 73. 105 al Bas : damnationem ν al : χάριν 
 ar-pol. — 16. ρωμαίους 10. 31. 120: χαρισασθαι 133. — τινι C 27 9• 105 al Bas (om 
 Thdrt Tisch).— rec ανθρ. tig απυΑίίαν (gloss), with GH &c Syr syr* (seth) Chr 
 Thl Oec: txt ABCE 13. 25-7-9. 40. 66- al ν (damn are : donare am) copt sah arm 
 Ath Thdrt Bas Act-chalced.— εχίΐ 57. 68. 80. 99. 100-33-7-62-3-80 all Thl: ιχΐ] 
 104: σχοιη Thdrt: ,ίοι slav-ms.— for rt, St BE-gr.— λα/3ί; 33. 80. 100-4 al Bas.— 17. 
 avriov om Β 13. 40 2. 57. 81. 95'-7 al : ins AC (aft t ιθαίί, αυτών Se 137) EGH &c Chr 
 Thl Oec.— κ^αθί^σας 142. — (κελευσίν 13. 137• — σταθηναι 96. 142. — 18. rec επιφερον 
 
 and the appointment of the H. Priest, riage was, however, soon dissolved (ib.), 
 
 Some years after the same emperor added and she returned to her brother. She was 
 
 to his jurisdiction the former tetrarchy of afterwards the mistress of Vespasian (Tac. 
 
 Philip, and Batanoea, Trachonitis, and Abi- Hist. ii. 81), and of Titus (Suet.' Tit. 7; 
 
 lene (Antt. xx. 7• 1), with the title of King Winer, RWB.). άσ-π-ασόμίνοι] on 
 
 (B. J. ii. 12. 8). Nero afterwards annexed his accession to the procuratorsliip, to gain 
 
 Tiberias, Tarichea, Julias, and fourteen his favour. 14. άν£'θ6το] ' laid be- 
 
 neighbouring villages to his kingdom (Antt. fore,' so ref. He did this, not only because 
 
 XX. 8. 4). He built a large palace at Jeru- Agrippa was a Jew, but because he was 
 
 salem (ib. 8. 11); but otl'ended the Jews (see above) governor o/ the iemple. 
 
 by constructing it so as to overlook the 15.] It seems more probable that the un- 
 
 temple (ib.), and by his capricious changes usual word καταδίκη should have been 
 
 in the High Priesthood, — and was not much changed to iiicrji', especially as κατά pre- 
 
 esteemed by them (B. J. ii. 17. 1). When cedes, than the converse. Luke never uses 
 
 the last war broke out, he attached himself δίκη, except as personified ch. xxviii. 4; 
 
 throughout to the Romans. He died in and in the only two places besides where it 
 
 the third year of Trajan, and fifty-first of occurs in the N. T. (2 Thess. i. 9 ; Jude7). 
 
 his reign, aged about seventy (Winer, it has the sense oi cundeinnation or jjunish- 
 
 RWB.). Ββρνίκη] The Macedonian ment ; and in neither place is there any 
 
 form (RiOfi/u-i; or Btjuu'iic/;) for Φίρεί'ίκη. various reading. 16. χαρίζίσθαι] The 
 
 She was the eldest daughter of Herod words inserted in the rec, εις άπώλειαν, 
 
 Agrippa Ι, and first married to her uncle are a correct supplement of the sense: 'to 
 
 Herod, prince of Chalcis (Antt. xix. 5. 1). give up,' i. e. to Ms enemies, and for de- 
 
 After his death she lived with Agrippa her struction. De W. remarks, that the constr. 
 
 brother, but not without suspicion (φήμης of πριν with an opt. without άι>, is only 
 
 επισχνούσης, on τψ άοελφφ συνίίίΐ, Antt. found here in the N. T. Hermann, on 
 
 XX. 7. 3 ; see also Juv. Sat. vi. 156 if.) ; in Viger, p. 442, restricts the opt. with ττρίν 
 
 consequence of which (όντως yap ίλίγ'ζειν η to cases where ' res narratur ut cogi- 
 
 ψίτο ψέίΐ'ϊίΐς τάς διαβολής, Antt. ib.) she tatio ahcujus :' so Paus., μι) πρότερον 
 
 married Polemo, king of Cilicia. The mar- φάναι ζητονντι μηνΰσειν πριν ή οι και εν
 
 14—22. nPASEIS ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λί2Ν. 253 
 
 ού * σταθεΐ'ΓΕς οι κατη•γοροι ουόίμιαν '^ αιτιαν ^ψ^ρο•' "(LUkton/^f 
 ων υτηνοουν εγω, [,ητηματα οε τίνα περί Τ7}ς ιοιας c=m«u. 
 
 ε ^ ^ It h^'v ^ / 'Τ- ^^™:''^'^„'ί}• 
 
 όίίσιοαιμονιας (ΐ\ον ττρος αυτοί', και rrtpi τίνος 1ϊ)σου ^£<']'•,'^^ 23.. 
 νηκοτος, ov ίψασκεν ο Ιίαυλος ί,νν. αττορονμίνος ver. ζ. 
 
 Λ\ . \ » \ \ / \ <-" m ''Λ ηι ' /Ο ' e .h. xxiii. 25. 
 
 οε εγω ε^ς την πβρι τούτων ί,ητησιν, eAcyov ει ρου- '^'jJ'pVio'nf''''*'^" 
 
 λ 'Ω ''Γ 'Λ '"η'Ω '= Jo.s. Antt 
 
 otTo πορευεσσαι εις Ιεροσόλυμα κακει κρινεσυαι ττερι xix.s, a. ' 
 
 ' οι - Λ\ -p-f r-v ο ' Λ ' η Λ- h — ch.xxir. 
 
 τούτων. του οε ΙΙαυΛου εττικαΛεσοιιεί'ου '^ τηοηνηναι . 1»^"• „ 
 
 αυτόν εις την τοϋ σεβαστού '^ διάγνωσιν, εκελευσα "* τηρεί- kLukexxiv.4. 
 
 Θι \ r/ •!■ r ' 'ι ' ^ ^ Τ/• ' 2 Cor. ίτ. 8. 
 
 αι αυτόν εως ου αναττίμχρω αυτόν προς Καίσαρα, cai. iv. 2». 
 
 ΑγρίτΓττας δε προς τον Φηστον * Εβουλό^αην και αυτός Τΐΐ'η.β?^. 
 
 του άνθρωπου ακουσαι. Αυριον φησιν ακουση αυτού. onV^sre 
 
 ' ill Miitdiia?, 
 
 {578. Rom. iv. 20. 1 = 1 Tim. vi. 4. 2Tim.ii.23. Tit.iii.9 (John iii. 25. ch. xv.2 1 Tim. i. 4) ouly t. 
 
 m constr., liere only. η ver. 9. ο ver. 11. ρ cli. xii. 5. xxiv. 23. w. «ic. 2 Pet. ii. 4. q liere 
 
 onlyt. Wisd.'iii. 18. r = Luke xxiii. 7, 15 (Luke xxxiii. 11. Pliilem. 11) only t- Polyb. i. 7. 12. 
 
 s imperf. = Rom. ix. 2(ο!ι. xxii. 22) al. See Winer, { 42. 2. t absol., iVlalt. vi. 30. ch. xxiii. 20. Im. 
 
 xxii. 13 al. 
 
 with Η &c Chr Thl (add κατ αντου C8 ThP) Oec: υτηψ. 80 lect 5 : txt ABCEG 13. 18. 
 27-9. 36. 40. 68. 73. 105-37-80 al.— f-yw virtroow ABC 13. 180 (all .') ν al ThP (corrn 
 of order): txt EGH most mss Chr ThP Oec. — add πονηραν ABC 13.' (Scholz, but 
 see below) 15. 36. 40. 68. 73. 105-6-37 ν sjrr ar-erp copt seth ThP : πονηρών BE 13. 
 73. 100 lect 40 : πονηρίας arm : πονηρά C- : malum ν {all additions, as άτοπον ver 5) : 
 txt GH most mss ar-pol slav Chr Thl" Oec. — 19. π(ρι τιις ι^ιας δεισ. om 26 : for ιδ., 
 ίαντων 25. — for αϊτοί', ηυτηνς Α. — ίλιγεν 137- — 20. (ΐς (1st) om AH 1. 26. 42. 57• 
 951-7-8. 142-77 al Thl' Oec : π(ρι την τον. 4. 38. 66^. 93. 100 Chr, : ας την του. 31. 
 137 : tiQ την om 113 (Scholz). — rec τούτον (corrn to suit πανΧοο, or ιησον ?), with Η 
 &c : txt ABCEG 13. 25. 36 8. 40. 68-9. 73. 93-5-6. 105-13-42-80 ffith ar-erp al Syr copt 
 ChP; ThP.— rec κρονσαλημ, with G &c : txt ABCEH 17. 137-80 (al ?) Ύ\ιΓ-.—κριθηναι 
 G. — 21. τηρίΐσθαι (]st)Cal: αυτ. τηρασθ. 13 and (2nd) 137. — rec πίμψω {neglect 
 of force ofcompowui), with GH &c Chr al : txt ABCE 13. 15. 36. 40. 08. 73. 97. 105- 
 37-80 al ThP.— 22. rec aft ψηπτ. ins ίφη {see below), with CEGH &c : om AB am.— 
 rec bef ηυρ. ins ο 5e, with CEGH &c : om AB ν copt. {The account of both these insertt 
 I take to have been, that as the words stood, αγοιττπας appeared to be the subj of φησιν, 
 
 Άκροκορίνθφ γένοιτο 'ύδωρ.— On the prac- Agrippa. άιτορ. els] so σΰ δ' εΙς τα 
 
 tice of the Romans, here nobly and truly μητρός μη φόβου ννμφεύματα. Soph. QSd. 
 
 alleged, see citations in Grot, and Wetst. Tyr. 980; and άμψινοώ ίς τέρας, Antig. 
 
 in loc. τότΓον] This use of τόπος as 372. ελεγον] There is a mixed con- 
 
 the Lat. ' locus,' is not found in good Greek, struction between ' I said, wilt thou . . . ?' 
 
 18. TTipi ου σταθ.] See ver. Τ : as in ver. 9, and ' I asked him whether he 
 
 E. v., ' against whom,' supposing πιρΊ ov would . . . .' 21.] τηρηθήναι is not for 
 
 to refer to \}πΥεφί-ρον, is wrong. The word £(ς τϋ τηρ. (as Grot, and De W.), but follows 
 
 πονηράν or ττονί/ρώΐ', added in the best directly on Ιπικαλεπαμίνον. The constr. 
 
 MSS at the end of this ver., is evidently a is again a mixed one between ' appealing so 
 
 gloss to explain ών or alriav, and is be- as to be kept,' and ' demanding to be kept.' 
 
 trayed by the variations in its form and σφαστον] This title, — Augustus, 
 
 place. ' Hinc iterum conjicere licet, imo was first conferred by the senate on Octa- 
 
 aperte cognoscere, adeo futiles fuisse ca- vianus {αντίις γενόμενος άρχη σεβασμού 
 
 lumnias ut in judicii rationem venire non και τοΊς έπειτα, Philo de Legat. ad Caium, 
 
 debuerint, perinde ac si Cjuis convicium p. 1012), and borne by all succeeding em- 
 
 temere jactet.' Calv. 19.] δεισιδαιμ.. perors. Dio Cassius (liii. 16) says: Αΰ- 
 
 is used by Festus in a middle sense, cer- ■γονστος, ώς και πλεΧόν τι Γ; κατά άν- 
 
 tainly not as ζ= ' 67<7>e?-.s727?V;H,' Ε. V., speak- Θρώπονς ων, ίπεκληθη. πάντα -γαρ τα 
 
 ing as he was to Agrippa, a Jew. ίντιμόιτατα και τα ϊερώτατα αυγονστα 
 
 20] See the real reason why he proposed προςαγορεύεται. εζ ούπερ και σεβαστόν 
 
 this, ver. 9. This he now conceals, and αυτόν και έλλην'ιζοντίς πως, ώςπερ τινά 
 
 alleges his modesty in referring such mat- αεπτΌν, άπο τοϋ σεβάζισθαι, προςεΐπυν. 
 
 ters to the judgment of the Jews them- On άναττψψω, Bornemann cites Lucian, 
 
 selves. This would be pleasing to his guest Tox. § 17 : ό Ji βασιλεΐ τψ μ(γάλφ άνα-
 
 254 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXV. 23—27. 
 
 "'^'"ch'/v.^""^' "^ " Τί) ου»' επαύριον ελθόντος του Ά-γρίππα και της ABC 
 
 sxvii.lOal. /ν ν Λ Λ - %ν ' > • ΛΛ' ^^^ 
 
 ίχ 37^"'^''• οερνικης μετά πολΛης φαντασίας και ίΐςίλυοντων 
 
 XV here οηΐν. '^χ' ' ' Λ' Χ'^/ .* 
 
 z.ch.x 1. Etc TO ακροατ7;ρ(οΐ' συν τε νιλια|θχοις καί ανορασιν τοις 
 
 — Polyb. i. > ^ ly y - /χ > -y/ -,*χ' 
 
 37.oai. fcar ' εί;οντ}ν της πόλεως, /cat κελευσαντος του Ψηστου 
 ^Sob\"sx^i. ^ ί'ίχθη ό Παΰλος. ^ κα'ι φησιν Ό Φηστος ' Ay^'nnra 
 ^'ί""ι βατιλεΰ και πάντες οί * σνμτταρόντες ημιν αν^ρίς, θεωρείτε 
 
 wsd.Tx.'uK' τοϋτον περί οΰ απαυ το ττΧηθος των 'Ιουδαίων ενετυχοί' 
 
 b Horn. viii. 27, ,; «y -y/ ^*Λ'<^c'/Q- ^ί•" 
 
 34. 3.>.2. ^01 εν τε Ιεροσολυμοις και ενσαοε επιροωντες /uii οειν 
 sMacc.iv. ^^^^ αυτόν μηκετι. ^ εγώ δε καταλαβόμενος μηδέν 
 
 chereonlyt. ji y '^Λ' ' >e'''5>^e' 
 
 (ί£ούί6πι αςιον αυτόν σαΐ'ατου πεπραγ^εναι, και αυτού οε τούτου 
 
 /?.)ώμίι/ο,. f . Λ / ' /Q < β '' ' 26 ^ 
 
 Thucyd.iii. επικαλεσαμενου τον σεραστον, " ε /cpiva πεμπειν. περί 
 
 xviii.S.l. d ch. iv. 13. X.S4. SeeJohni.5. e ch. xxiv. 15, 20 al. f ver. 11. g = ch. xx. 16 reff. 
 
 — and ίφη and ο δε tvere inserted to distinguish the speakers). — 23. ίτταυρ. ow 88. — 
 ειςίλθοντος Ε (Bornemann) : ί\θοντω%> εις 142 : ειςελθοντες IfiO. — βιρονικης C (latt 
 mss). — ακρυτηοιυν II. — rec τοις χιλ. (the usage of omg art aft a preposition not being 
 recognized), with GH &c Clir al : txt ABCE 3. 13. 40-2. 65-8. <J5'. 105-3? al.— rec aft 
 κατ ίξ. (kuQ νττεροχην 3. 95' schol in 40) add ουσι (siipplementarg interpoln), with 
 EGH &c : txt ABC {καθ C) 13. 2?. 40. 662. 105 ^l Chr ( comm).— 24. συν. ημ. παρόντες 
 95.— τούτο 180.— for ου, τοντο 137•- rec π,,ν, with Η &c : txt ABCEG 25. 36. 40. 68. 
 105-37-80 ThP : om 4'. 16. 23. 37. 100. — £ΐ'£7-υχει^ Β 25. 40. — syrmarg (and 
 therefore perhaps D, had it been preserved) has : ut traderem eum ii.i ad tormentitm 
 sine defensione. Nan potui autem tradere eum propter mandata quce habemus ab 
 Augusto. Si autem quis eum accusaturus esset, dicebam ut sequeretur me in Ccesaream, 
 ubi custodiebatur. Qui quum venissent, clamaverunt id tolleretur e vita. Quum autem 
 hanc et alteram partem audivissem, comperi quod in nulla reus esset mortis. Quum 
 autem dicerem : Vis judicari cum iis Hierosolymce ? Ccesarem appellavit. De quo nihil 
 cerium scribere domino meo habeo : and simly (see Scholz") the bohem version. — κ. ενθαδ. 
 om V e. — βοωΐ'τες AB. — αντον ζην {transposn for euphony ?) ABCE 13. 31. 40. 69 al ν 
 Syr arm Chrj (comm) Thl-' : txt GH most mss Chr Thl Oec. — 25. κατελαβομην 
 (emendn of constr) ABCE 8. 17- 40. 68. 73. 105 ν : txt GH most mss syr teth al Chr 
 Thl Oec. — rec θαν. αντ. {transp of characteristic order), with GH al Chr al : txt ABCE 
 40 am (latt mss) : αντον αζιον 68 arm ThP : ττεΊτραχεναι αντον 105-37 : om avr. 73. 
 — πεπραχ. τι 73. — om και {corrn to suit κατελαβομην above) ABCE 13. 17• 40. 68. 73. 
 100 V al Thl2 : txt GH most mss syr al Thl' Oec— rec ιτεμτΓ. αυτοί', with EGH &c 
 
 ■ττέμνει αυτόν. 22.] έβουλομην qua pater ipsorum a vermibus corrosus ob 
 
 does not (as Calv.) imply any former wish superbiam perierat.' άκροατηριον] 
 
 of Agrippa to hear Paul. It is, as Meyer after the Latin ' auditorium .•' perhaps no 
 
 explains it, a modest way of expressing a fixed hall of audience, but the chamber or 
 
 wish, formed in this case while the procu- saloon set apart for this occasion, 
 
 rator was speaking, but spoken of by Agr. χιλιάρχοιβ] Jos. (B. J. iii. 4. 2), speaking 
 
 as if now past by, and therefore not pressed. of Titus's army, says, ^Γpoςεy'(vovτo δε και 
 
 We say somewhat similarly, ' / was tvish- άπο Καισαρείας πέντε {σπεΊραι). These, 
 
 ing.' See ref. and note there. Cf. Aris- then, were the tribunes of the cohorts sta- 
 
 toph. A\. 102^ : έκκλησιάσαι δ' ovv ίδεόμην tioned at Csesarea. Stier remarks (Red. 
 
 ηΐκοι μένων ; and see other exx. in Bern- der Apostel. ii. 397), " Yet more and more 
 
 hardy. Syntax, p. 373 ff. Agrippa, as a complete must the giving of the testimony 
 
 Jew, is anxious to hear Paul's defence, as a in these parts be, before the witness departs 
 
 matter of national interest. The procura- for Rome. In Jerusalem, the long-suffering 
 
 tor's ready consent is explained, ver. 26. of the Lord towards the rejectors of the 
 
 23.] φαντασία is of frequent use Gospel was now exhausted. In Antioch, 
 
 in this sense in Polybius and later Greek the residence of the Praeses of Syria, the 
 
 writers. Herodotus uses the verb φαντά- new mother church of Jewish and Gentile 
 
 ζεαθαι for ' superbire,' vii. 201 : opgc "''C Christians was flourishing ; here, in Caesa- 
 
 ra νττερεχοντα ζώα κεραννυΐ ό θεός, οϋδ' rea, the residence of the procurator, the 
 
 i(f ψαντάζεσθαι. See Wetst., who finely testimony which had begun in the house of 
 
 remarks on the words, ' In eadem urbe, in Cornelius the centurion, bad now risen
 
 XXVI. 1, 2. ΠΡΑ2ΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 255 
 
 ού ' ασψαλες τι -γράφαι τω ' κυριω ουκ έχω, οιο ττρο- ΐι =oh,xxi. 
 ■η -yayov αυτόν εφ νμων και μάλιστα εττι σου, ρασιλίυ '= ^','^ο^ '^"'• 
 Ανριππα, όπως της "^ανακρίσεως -γενομίνης σγω τΊ ίΐιί.' ""' 
 
 V, . 27 η "Λ ' S! " ' ο S ' Icl, Kxin.30 
 
 ypa -ψω '^' οΛογοι^ γαρ ^οι οοκίΐ ττίμτΓοντα οίσ^ιιον ,,/,^ρ,^^^,^ 
 
 ^*^ ''-ρ''η- 3 Mncf. rii.' 
 
 jurj και τας κατ αυτού ^αιτίας ^ σημαναι. 5. Poiyb. 
 
 XXVI. ^ ΆγρίΤΓΤτας δε 7Γ^)ος τοί' Παυλον έψ)? "%pe7h"l2 
 επιτρέπεται σοι περί σεαυτον λε-γειν. τότε ο ΙΙουΛος εχοα νί. ι2. 
 
 s>^ - t ' ι ^ -9ττ> ' "^ och.XTi.25, 
 
 απελο'^ειτο εκτεινας την χε'ρα Ufpt παικτών ων s^res^ 
 " εγκαλούμαι νπο Ιουδαίων, βασιΧεν Α'/ρ'ιππα, " η-γημαι r'aidcons^r"*^' 
 
 t \ / w''-' /λΛ ' ε'Λ ch.xxviii. 
 
 εμαυτον μακαριον επι συν μέλλων σήμερον αποΑο- ι«^ ι cor- 
 
 ITim.ii. υ. Job xxxii. 14. Xen. Cyr. viii. 4. 29. sLakexxi.l4. Rom. ii. 15. Jer. xii. 1. 
 
 t M.ilt. viii. 3 al. uptTtive τί/ι/ otfitii/ «if όιιΐ-ΐιιγορι/σωΐΊ P.)IyEen. iv. p. 317. (VVaUl.) u cli. xix. 38 reff. 
 
 V 2 Ciir. ix. 5. Phil. ii. 3 al. fr. Paul. Job x'ii. 6. w ch. xxiii. 3U rtfl'. 
 
 vss Chr Thl Oec : t.\t ABC 3. 13. 15. 25. 3G. 40. C5. 73. ΙδΟ al ν arm ThR— 26. ασφα'Κως 
 C : ασφ. τι om e Syr : πι^ι .... εχω om ar-erp. — aft τω κυρ. add μου 15. 18. 25-7-9. 
 38. G8. 98-marg 105-80 copt arm syr* Thl- : ι^μων syr-marg. — προςηγαγ. E-gr. 16. 
 17: ατη-γαγ. A. — κρίσεως Έ. — -/ινομ. 180.— for σχω, εχω AE 137 ThF. — rec γραψαι, 
 with EGH al : txt AB(" -φω in Bentl appears to be an error, as also is ' γράψω Β ' ία 
 Scholz alat the first γρηψαι above." Tischend)C 13. 105 (al .') syr vss ("many of wh 
 have -ψω before also." Tisch). — 27. μοι Sok. om Syr ar-erp : δοκ. μοι 137 : add είναι 31. 
 40 Chr-comm. — ττεμποντι G 37• 43. 133. — Ε ν al have μη aft αίτιας. 
 
 Chap. XXVI. 1. επιτετρεπται G: -απται 5. 137 al Thl^.— rec υπέρ σ., with B(e sil) 
 G &c Chr al: txt ACEH 13. 27-9. 36. 73. 80. 105-80 : λαλειν περί σ. 137•— aft τταυλ. 
 add π£πο(θως, και εν ττνενματι «γιω -παρακΧηθεις syr*. — εκτ. την χ. απελ. {corrn of 
 order) ABCE 13. 40. G6-8. 73. 99. 1.3.3-80 lectt 13. 14 ν Sjt copt arm ThP : txt GH 
 most mss syr Chr Thl' Oec : τας χείρας 137• — 2. for ττίρι πάντων .... ζητημάτων, — 
 137 lias περί παΐ'Των των κατά ιουδαίους έθνη τε και ζητημάτων επισταμένος. — rec 
 μελλ. απολ. επι σου σημ. {simplifn of order), with some mss Oec : txt (αττολ. σημ. EGH 
 aUv syr al Chr Thl» Bed) ABCEGH all vss Chr Thl: απολογησασθαι 1. 38. 80• 95. 
 
 upward, tiU it comes before this brilliant denuntiavit ne se amplius contumeliie causa 
 assembly of all the local authorities, in the nominaret.' Caligula accepted the title, 
 presence of the last king of the Jews." according to Victor, ap. Eckliel, viii. 364. 
 24. αιταν το ιτλ.] At Jerusalem Herod Agrippa had applied it to Claudius 
 (ver. 1) Uterally, by the popular voice (pro- (Philo ap• Spanheim. Numism. ii. 482); 
 bably) of some tumultuous outcry : — here, but it was not a recognized title of any em- 
 by their deputation. 25. καΐ . . • δε] peror before Domitian. Suet. Dom. 13: 
 ' and moreover•' These reasons did really ' Martial, — Edictum Domini Deique nos- 
 coexist as influencing his determination, tri.'" Mr. Humphry. 26.] γράψω 
 Mr. Lewin cites, on ver. 12, Dig. xlix. 1. has apparently been altered to -γράψαι to 
 16 : ' Constitutiones quae de recipiendis, suit the τι γράψίίΐ above. — Olsh. remarks, 
 necnon, appellationibus loquuntur, ut nihil that now first was our Lord's prophecy 
 novi fiat, locum non hahent in eorum per- Matt. x. 18. Mark xiii. 9 fulfilled. But 
 sona quos damnatos statim puniri publici Meyer answers well, that we do not know 
 interest, ut sunt insignes latrones, vel sedi- enough of the history of the other App• to 
 tionum concitutores, vel duces factionum.' be able to say this with any certainty. 
 26. άσφαλ€5] ' fixed, definite.' James the greater, and Peter, had in all pro- 
 The whole matter had been hitherto ob- bability stood before Agrippa I. See ch. 
 scured by the exaggerations and fictions of xii. 2, 3. XXVI. 1•] The stretching 
 the Jews. τω κνρίω] viz. Nero• out of the hand by a speaker was not, as 
 Augustus and Tiberius refused this title; Hammond supposes, the same as the κ-ητα- 
 Caligula and (apparently) all following bore σήειν Ty χί'ρί of ch. xii• 17; x•"- 1/*"• 
 it• "Thus Tertullian, Apol. xxiv. : 'Au- The latter was to ensure silence ; but this, 
 gustus imperii formalor ne dominum (piidem a formal attitude usual witli orators. A]m- 
 dici se volebat ;' and Suet. Aug. 53 : ' Do- leius, Met. ii. \). 54 (Meyer), describes it 
 minum se appellari ne a liberis quidem aut very precisely : ' I'orrigit dextram ct ad 
 ne])Otibus vel serio vel joco jjassus est ;' and iiistar oratorum conformat articuUim, duo- 
 Tib• 27: ' Dominus appellatus a quodam busque infimis conclusis digit is ccteros cmi-
 
 256 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXVI. 
 
 ^ϊκΐη^κ"'^*' γίί^ετθαι, μάλιστα " γνωστην ^ οντά σε πάντων των κατά ABC 
 
 xxviii. 3. '1 ^ ' ζ•/)- 'ay ' ί^?" b EGH 
 
 -sns.42. ίουοαιους ίΟων τε και ί,ητηματων. ο<ο οεοααι μακρο~ 
 
 y cimstr , see , ^ , 4 ^ ^ •* Ι) /3 ' ' 
 
 m-iVcoi ΐ'ΐ'ί^ως ακουσαι /ιιυυ. τ?)^ μεν ονν ριωσιν μου την 
 
 i"i'ui'chi'>fly. "^ εκ νεοτητος, την ' αν αρ'^ης •γενομενην εν τω εθί'ει μου 
 
 Sit Winer, ,, , ^, ,, , 'Γ?ι''5θ ' 
 
 zcii vi kreft- ^^ "^^ ιεροσολυμοις, ισασι παΐ'τες Ιουόαιοι προγινω- 
 
 a fill. XV. 2 reffi ' ( " Ο '^Α'Λ g -« \ 
 
 bherenniyt. σκοντες με auωtfεv, εαν υελωσι μαρτνρειν, οτι κατά 
 
 cMalt.xix.2(l||. ν|ι'/3' ί'' " r ι ku ' 
 
 ΰΜΗΐΓχ'ί'^'' '''^" ακξ)ΐρίστατην αΐξ>£σιν της ημίτεξ}ας υξ)ησκειας 
 
 i.'-h\.^ul έζησα Φαρισαιος' και νυν " επ έλττί'δι της εις τους 
 
 e- here only, ττατερας ημών επαγγελίας γενομένης υπο τον υεου εστηκα 
 
 (1 Pet. i. 2(1. Rom. viii. 29. xi. 2 only t.) f=.Lnkei.3. Wisd. xix. 0. g = ch. xxii. 5. Jolin 
 
 iii. 28. h =. here unly. j ch. v. 17 refl. k James i. 2fi, 27. Col. ii. 18 only. Wi.sd. xiv. 27. 
 
 ] constr., here only. m tTri, here only. ΙγκΑίΐ^εϊσακ έπ< φαρμακεία, Died. Sin. iv. 55. (Trepi, 
 
 ch. xxiii. β. xxir. 21.) 
 
 113-26-77 lect 12: σημ. om 25 lect 5 Ambr : τη σημ. 83.-3. at οντά C 73: σί oin 
 180. — τταντων om A 17• 25 copt seth : add ωι> μέλλω σημ. αττολογησασθαι 08. — κατά 
 ιουδαίων ΑΕ 68 lect \2.—ηθων GII 36. 42. 5?. 101-26-33 TliF : tOvwv A 15. 27. 105. 
 — aft ζητημ. add ιπισταμίνος AC 13. 38. 80. 105 slav-ms Oec : aft μάλιστα above 
 15. 18. 36 Syr ar-erp : ίπισταμινον 73. 180: aft σί 7i and ίΐίως 6. 29 slav-mod : aft 
 τταντωΐ' 31. — reo aft δέομαι ins του {supplementary acldn), with CGH al Syr al Chr al : 
 om ABE 13. 25. 36. 40. 68. 105 lect 12 ν ath syr arm.— 4. την (2nd) om BC'H 3. 
 31. 56. 95^ : ins AC-EG al Chr al. — την (3rd) om 180. — rec cv up. {misapprehension), 
 with CGH al : txt ABE-gr 13. 40 al lect 12 Syr ar-erp. — rec oi lovS. {more usual exprn), 
 with AC^GH al: txt BC'E 13. 57. 95. 133-42 Chrj (coram).— ισασιι/ CE : txt AB.— 
 
 5. με om 137• — ακξΐιβεστεραν 97• 133. — θελωσιν CE : txt A. — θρησκιας CE al : txt AB 
 (e sil)GH al : της to θρησκ. om Syr ar-erp Till' comm. — φαρισαηον Syr ar-erp. — 
 
 6. rec προς τ. πατ. {corrn, see note}, with CGH al Chr al : txt ABE 13. 25. 40. 65. 
 133 al•— rec aft τταΓ. om ημών, with GH al ThP Oec: but ins ABCE 14. 15. 25-7-9. 
 36. 40. 65-62-7-8. 73-6. 103-5-33-7-42.-80 al ν syrr arr copt Eeth arm slav-edd Chr 
 
 nentes porrigit.' The hand was chained — in an indifferent sense. 6.] The rec. 
 
 τούτων τ. δεσμ., ver. 29. 2.] There text has apparently been corrected after 
 
 is no force in Meyer's observation, that by ch. xiii. 32 ; for there we have προς, and 
 
 the omission of the art. before Ιουδαίων, no ημών. The els has its ]iropriety here, 
 
 Paul wishes to express that the charges combining the ideas of address towards, 
 
 were made by some, not by all of the Jews, and of ethical relation to, its object : so 
 
 That omission is the one so often overlooked ες ΰ' νμας έρώ μνθον, tEscIi. Pers. 159 : 
 
 by the German critics (e. g. Stier also here), ψόγος ες "Ελληνας μ'ε-γας, Eur. Bacch. 
 
 after a preposition. See Middl. ch. vi. § 1, 778(735): δημοκρατίας κατίστα είς τάς 
 
 and compare κατά Ιουδαίους in the next πόλιας, Herod, vi. 43. See Bernhardy, 
 
 verse, of which the above cannot be said. Syntax, p. 217; where many more exx. are 
 
 μ,€λλων contains the ground of given. — The promise spoken of is not that 
 
 ηγημαι, ' in that I am to defend myself.' of the resurrection merely, but that of a 
 
 3. γν. οντά σί] For the constr., Messiah and His kingdom, involving (ver. 8) 
 
 see reff. ; and cf. Viger (ed. Hermann), p. the resurrection. This is evident from the 
 
 337, where many examples are given — e. g. way in which he brings in the mention of 
 
 Herod, vi. 109: ii^ σοι νυν εστίν η κατά- Jesus of Nazareth, and connects His exalta- 
 
 δουλώσαι 'Αθήνας, i) ελευθέρας ποι- tion (ver. 18) with the universal preaching 
 
 ήσαντα μνημόπυνονλιπίσθαι K.r.\. of repentance and remission of sins. But 
 
 4.] The μεν ουν takes up άπoλoyε~ισθaι : he hints merely at this hope, and does not 
 
 q. d. 'well, tlien, to begin my apology.' explain it fully; for Agrippa knew well 
 
 5. άκριβεστάτην] See ch. xxii. 3 : what was intended, and the mention of any 
 
 κατά άκηίβειαν του ττατμψου νόμου. Jos. king but Ccesar would have misled and pre- 
 
 (B. J. i. 5. 2) calls the Pharisees σύνταγμα judiced the Roman procurator. There is 
 
 Ti Ιουδαίων δοκούν εύσίβ'εστερον εΊνηι great skill in binding on his former Phari- 
 
 tSjv άλλων, και τους νόμους άκριβ'εστερον saic life of orthodoxy (in externals), to his 
 
 άψηγεΊσθηι. θρησκίία] )'/ λατρεία- now real and living defence of the hope of 
 
 'όθεν και ετερόθρησκος,έτερύδυζ,ος. Suidas. Israel. But though he thus far identifies 
 
 ^We have an instance here of α'ίρεσις used them, he makes no concealment of the dif-
 
 S— 10. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 257 
 
 " κξ)ΐνομίνος, ' aig ην το " δωδεκάψυλον ημών ίν ^' εκτενπα m 
 
 νύκτα και ημίραν '^ Χατρεΰον 
 
 1ι. xxiii. Ο 
 .->>./ r - ■( rert. 
 
 ίλπιί,ει καταντησαι, ττίοι oiicreoniyt. 
 
 „ ' ρ here , inly t. 
 
 - " 8 ' Ju.lith iv. .). 
 
 τι •> Mrtcc. xiv. 
 
 ί'/ς ΕλτΓίδος ^ εγκαλούμαι ύττό Ιουδα/ωΐ', βασιλεϋ 
 απιστον " κρίνεται ^ παρ υμιν ^^ ει υ θευς 
 eyeipei , eyio μεν ουν εοοί; 
 
 νεκρούς ppch.xx.3i. 
 
 '• ^ 2 Thess. iii. 8. 
 
 Εγειρε 
 
 Εγ(( 
 
 )sa εμαυτω '^ προς το όνομα Γχο.'μ"'γ1' ίν. 
 Ιί}σου του Ναζωρα/ου δειν πολλά ^ εναντία πραζαι, gen.,'a5Mar!!: 
 ο και επο'ιησα εν ΙεροσοΧνμοις, και πολλούς τε των ''^^lii^il^ 
 
 ' α ' ' ' '^ ' J Λ " b > \ ^ ^- Exod. iii. 12. 
 
 ayiwv εyω εν ώυλακαις κατεκΑεισα, την πάρα των rch. xvi. lai. 
 
 ' / 'y ι Λ \ /Ο ^ e' / »- = Paul only. 
 
 αργ^ιερεων *^ εο,ουσιαν λαρων, αναιρουμένων τε αυτών χ;^"3,ί ^pi, 
 
 iv.13. Phil iii 11. .s ch. xix. 38 refl'. See abuve (m). t = hereonly. Demosth., p. 15, uK.j 
 
 Kai μ<\ Δι' oyAti• ΰπιστσι» ϊσωί. α = ch. xiii. 46 relT. ν = Matt. vi. 1. See Eph. vi. !) refF. 
 
 vvSeech.iT.9. Rom. viii. 13, 17. w = Matt. x. 8 al. χ w daf.. hereonly. όο/ίώ μοι, Xen. Hier. i. β. 
 
 See 1 Cor. iii. 18 reff. Herod, ii. 93, and tx.\. in Wetst. y = rh. xxiv. 19 reff. ζ = I τhe^s. ii. 1ft. 
 
 (ch. xxviii. 17.) Tit. ii. 8. a = eh. ix. 13 reff. b Luke iii. 20 only. J• r. xxxix. 3. 
 
 c ch. ix. 14. d ch. ii. 33 reff. e ch. ii. 23 reff. 
 
 ThW—ytv. ίπαγγ. 137•— υττο θεον G 142.— εκΓενιη 38. 177-80.— 7. Xarpivoiv Η 73.— 
 ίλτΓίζίΐν E-gr : -ί;ν lect 1 2. — κατάντησαν Β. — rec aft (γκαΚ. itis βασιλευ αγριττπα, with 
 GH alvssChral(3. 31.40. 95. 105-33 lect 12 Syr seth place it at end), orn altogether A 18. 
 3'» : txt BCE (not A as Tisch by misprint appy) all vss Chron Thl-. {The text appears 
 to have been the origl, then αγριππα icas added to βασ., and transposns took place.") — 
 rec Tu)v ιονδ. against MSS, most mss Chr Chron Thl. — 8. τι ; απιστον Ε (appy) and edd : 
 not ACGH &ο. — ΐ]μιν 36.99. 100 al: υμών 78.-9. μεν omB. — ot/rom 95. — εμaυrovlect 
 12.— (!eiv om 78'.— 10. for o, cto B.— rec om τε (1st), with B(e sil)GH al : ins ACE 13 
 (C8 ThFomgicai). — δε 30. 180. — recomev {as unnecessary), with Η alChral : ins ABCEG 
 13. 15. 18. 25-7-9. 31-6. 40. 65-62-8. 73-G. 95. 105-33-37-80 ν al.— for τε (2nd), δε Η 137 
 
 ference between them, ver. 9 if. 7. who yet could not refuse to behave that 
 
 TO δωδεκάψυλ.] The Jews in Judaea and 
 those of the dispersion also. See James i. 
 1. There was a difference between Paul 
 and the Jews, which lies beneath the sur- 
 face of this verse, but is yet not brought 
 out : he had already arrived at the accom- 
 plijliment of this hope, to which they, with 
 all their sacrifices and zeal, were as yet only 
 earnestly tending, having it yet in the 
 future only (so Rom. x. 2 : ζΐιΧον θεοϋ 
 ίχουσιΐ', άλλ' οΰ κατ' επίγνωσιν). It 
 was concerning this hope (in what sense 
 appears not yet) that he was accused by the 
 Jews. — The adverb εκτενώς and subst. 
 ίκτενεια are disapproved by the philolo- 
 gists, as belonging to later Greek. See 
 Lobeck on Phrynichus, p. 311. We have 
 the adj., ^scli. Suppl. 990 : ίκτινής 
 (Ι,ίλος. 8.1 Having im{)ressed on his 
 
 hearers the injustice of this charge from 
 the Jews, with reference to his holding that 
 hope which they themselves held, he now 
 leaves much to be filled up, not giving a 
 confession of his own faith, but proceeding 
 as if it were well understood. ' You as- 
 sume rightly, that I mean by this hope, in 
 my own case, my believing it accomplished 
 in the crucified and risen Jesus of Naza- 
 reth.' Then, this being acknowledged, he 
 goes on to shew how his own view became 
 .so changed with regard to Jesus ; drawing, 
 by the μΐι• ovv (ver. 9), a contrast in some 
 respects between himself, who was super- 
 naturally brought to the faith, and them, 
 Vol,. II. 
 
 God could and might raise the dead. All 
 this he mainly addresses to Agrippa (ver. 
 26), as being the best acquainted with the 
 circumstances, and, from his position, best 
 qualified to judge of them. It may be, as 
 Stier suggests, that if not open, yet jn-ac- 
 tical Sadduceism had tainted the Ilerodian 
 family. Paul knew, at all events, how 
 generally the highly cultivated, and those 
 in power and wealth, despised and thought 
 άπιστον the doctrine of the resurrection. 
 el ... . εγείρει,] not, as commonly 
 rendered, ' that God should raise the dead' 
 (E. V.) : but the question is far stronger 
 than this, if the conjunction be taken in its 
 literal meaning : ' why is it judged by you 
 a thing past belief, if God raises the 
 deadV i.e. 'if God, in His exercise of 
 power, sees fit to raise the dead (the word 
 implying that such a fact has veritably 
 taken place) is it for you to refuse to be- 
 Here it ?' Compare the declaration of our 
 Lord, Luke xvi. 31 : ούύ' iav τις ίκ ιεκρών 
 άναστΐι, πεισθήσονται. We have many 
 instances of this use of ti : — Xen. Mem. i. 1. 
 13, εθανμαΚί Ci, ti μι) (pavniiv αΐιτυ'ις 
 εστίν ; ib. 18, 'όσα δί τζάντες ψεσαν, Οαν- 
 μαστον ει μι) τούτων ενεθι/μήΟιισαν : 
 ib. i. 2. 13, iyw δ', ti μίν τι κακόν ίκείι-φ 
 τήν πάλιν επιιίησΰτηΐ', ουκ άποΧογησο- 
 μοι : on which cxx. Hermann remarks, ad 
 Viger. p. 504, " in his loi-is oiiinilxis riMn 
 non dubiam et incertam indicat f i', scd jiliino 
 certam ct persiiicuani." 9.] llciico- 
 
 S
 
 258 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λ£2Ν. XXVI. 
 
 '^(xx.'ijte) '^ KaritveyKu ^ -φηφον, και 'κατά πάσας τας συι^αγωγας ABC 
 
 only. -^Λ/ i - ,vk'' γ Ι/ίΛ." ^'^^ 
 
 g-iirrconiy. ΤΓΟΑΛακις τιμωοιορ αυτούς ηναγκαςον ρλασψημζΐΐ', 
 ^'ίίκϋ 41!. "τΓίρισσως τε " ίμμαινομίνος αυτυις ° Βόίωκον ^ ίως και 
 
 ich. χϊϋ.5 ' εις τας ^ εςω πυλεις. εν οις και ποοίυομίνος εις 
 
 only (Paul). - ' 
 
 ch. χϊϋ.5 ' εις τας ^ εςω πυΛεις. 
 
 only (Paul). ^ ν,,,^,, \ t ' -- \ 
 
 k-''cbxi'Ti'i ''"'ί'' ί-^αμασκον μετ εξουσίας και ίπιτροττης της τταοα 
 
 IS), ual.ii. -' ' ]3u'' u/ ν vvr^v ττλ 
 
 3,14. των apy^ieptwv, ημίρας μέσης κατά την οοον ειόον, 
 
 Ι ■= Luke χχϋ. ^ .^ — ^y, 1 /Λ \ f \ ^νΛ ' ''^Λ' 
 
 xu 4 r,''y2* Η"ο^''^ίΐ') ovpavousv υπέρ tijv Aa^Trpor/jra του ήλιου 
 °'23.''Ma^k XV. '^ πίριΧαμφαν με φως και τους συν εμοι ττοοενομίνους, 
 
 (βΓεχ)'"'^ παΐ'των τε κατοπεσοντωΐ' ημών εις την ^ην ηκουσα 
 
 " avisd^'/ii! φωνην \α)<οΰσαν προς με καΐ λεyoυσav ttj Κβράί^ι 
 ο- jiait.xxiii. ϋια\εκτω Έ,αουΧ ΈαουΧ, τι με '^ ύιωκεις ', σκ\ηοόν σοι 
 
 34. 1 Alacc. "^ 'Γ = . '•, 
 
 Τ.22. pcli.xxi. Γ) rclT. q — here only, met., Mark ϊτ. II reff. w.arf, Paul only. ]ΓοΓ.τ.12ηΗ. 
 
 rch. xxiv. IS. s = Lake xxi. 27. Dan. vii. l-i. Isa. xxxiii. 17. f here only t 2 Maci•. xiii. 14. 
 
 uhereonly See Matt xxv.tl. ν ch. viii. 3β al. w ch. xiv 17 only + . χ = 2 Cor. i. 8 al. 
 
 y here only. Dan. xii. 3. ζ Luke ii. !) only t. a ch. xxviii. ti only. Ps.cxiv. 14 bch. i.lUal. 
 
 AcLsonly. Esth.ix.2e. c = ch. vii. 52 reff. d = here only. See .fohn Ti. 60 reiT. 
 
 copt syr Thl-. — αυτωί> om E. — 11. ττοΧλακις om Syr ar-erp, and ins aft βλασψ., το or. 
 ΐί/σου: noi7ien ejus demid. — r£ om Β : isE-grcopt. — π(ριησοτίρως 2b. — 12. και om {as 
 vnnecessary) ABCE 13. 15. I7. 18. 36. 40. G8. 80. 105-33-80 lect 12 ν copt arm a;th slav 
 Till- : txt Gil most mss Syr al Chr Thl. — την o;n 38. 137-77• — την om Ε al. — της πάρα 
 om (as imnecessary) AE 40. 68 lect 17 ν syrr arr ; τταρα om Β 17• 73. 137-80 : της om al 
 Thl- : txt CGH most mss Chr Thl' Oec. — 13. iSov AC (so Tiscli asserts expressly in his 
 2nd Leipzig edn : but in his edn of C, it stands ΙΔΟΥ: and this he confirms, N. T. 
 Prolegg, p. Ixis) H. — TrEfuaarpa^ai' 4 : Trtpiavyaaar 18.— 14. rec St (altern of cha- 
 racteristic Ti), with GH al: txt ABCE 13. 18. 25. 36. 40. 68. 105-37 lectt 12. 40 
 V syrr arr Thl-. — ημών om Β : ins ACEGH al. — for Χαλούσαν προς μί κ. Xeyovaav, 
 \(γουσαν προς μ( ABCE {-ης \ίyovσης) 15. 18. 25. 36. 40. 68. 73. 98. 99. 105-33-80 
 lectt 17 sjTr ar-erp arm : λαλούσαν {μοι 80) προς μί Η 27-9. 33-5. 66-. 76• 80 : om 
 1.3 : λιγονσης προς μί κ. λίγονσης 69 : vocem loqueniein ad me or mihi ν e : txt G most 
 mss appy aeth ar-pol al Chr ThP Oec. {The shorter reading Xty. πρ. μί seems to hare 
 been adopted from ch ix. 4, xxii. 7. or, as also λαλ. πρ. με, io avoid what seemed, but is 
 
 forward he passes to his own history, — how it is better to take (as most coram., and 
 he once refused, like them, to believe in IMeyer, and De W.) it as absolute, and κατ- 
 Jesus : and shews them both the process ήιη-γκα as, local,' detitli sentenliam:' 'when 
 of his conversion, and the ministry with their deaths were being compassed, 
 which he was entrusted to others. I gave in my vote' (scil. against them, 
 μέν ουν, 'well then,' resuming the cha- as in ref.). On the fact, cf. συνίνΰοκών 
 racter described vv. 4, 5. 10.] We Ty άναιρίσει avrov, ch. viii. 1. 11. 
 are surprised here by the unexpected word τιμωρών] viz. by scourging ,• comp. Matt, 
 ayi'ojj', which it might have been thought x. 17• ήνάγκαζον does not imply that any 
 he would have rather in this presence did blaspheme (Christ : so Pliny, Ep. n. 97, 
 avoided. But, as Stier remarks, it belongs speaks of ordering the Bithynian Christians 
 to the more confident tone of this speech, ' maledicere Christo,' and adds, ' quorum 
 which he delivers, not as a prisoner defend- nihil cogi posse dicuntur qui sunt revera 
 iiig himself but as one being heard before Christiani') : the imperf. only relates the 
 those who were his e«i?/enc(?, no/ ^/i^/wr/^es. attempt. The persecuting the Christians 
 10, 11.] This is the μέγας διωγμός even to foreign cities, forms the transition to 
 of eh. viii. 1. 10.] κατήν€γκα ψήφον the narrative following. 12. ev ois] 
 can hardly be takt^n fgurative/g, as many 'In which things (being engaged).' 
 comm., trying to escape from the inference 13.] See notes on ch. ix. 3—8, where 
 that the νιανίας Saul was a member of the I have treated of the discrepancies, real or 
 Sanhedrim ; but must be understood as only ap])arent, between the three accounts 
 testifying to this very fact, however strange of Saul's conversion. See also ch. xxii. 
 it may seem. He can hardly have been to* 6 — 10. 14. ttj Έβρ. διαλ.] These 
 than thirty when sent on his errand of per- words are expressed here only. In ch. ix. 
 secution to Damascus. — The genitive is (see note) we have the /ac/ remarkably pre- 
 supposed by Eisner and Kyjike to be depen- served by the Hebrew form Σπούλ ; in ch. 
 dent on κατι'ινίγκα ; but this is harsh, and xxii. he was speaking in Hebrew (Syro- 
 
 EGH
 
 11-17. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 259 
 
 15 • 
 
 Ε•νω δε είττα Tt'c 
 ον συ '^ δίώκείο. 
 
 ει, κύριε ', elCor. xv.SS. 
 ΛΙλ ' λ λ ν •'^*' (frnm Has. 
 
 ^" άλλα xii'1.4). 
 
 Kev IX. 10 
 
 τούτο tUeilfonlyt. 
 
 (D ul. ^sxii. 
 
 Β ih. riii. 26 
 
 reft, 
 h Rev. xi. U. 
 
 Ezek. ii. 1. 
 i Mark i 38 al. 
 
 .h. ix.21. 
 
 a ch. i. 8 reff. 
 
 υπνρ^την και 
 
 προς ^ κίντρα ΧακτΊ^,ίΐν 
 
 ο ce εϊττεν Εγώ ίίμι Ιί^σοΰς 
 
 αναστηΟι και στηυι εττί τους ποοας σου ίΐς 
 •ynp ωψυην σοι, ττρο-^ίίρισασυαι σε 
 " μάρτυρα ών τε είδες ° ώι» τε οφθησομαι σοι, ' ^ εξαι- 
 ρούμενος σε εκ του λάου και των εθνών, εις ους εγω σε 
 
 k ch. ii. 3 reir. 1 ih. iii 2U. xxii. 14 only. Exod. iv. 13. m ch. xiii. 5. 
 
 ο constr., Soph. CEd. Tjr. 788, ώρ μίν Ίκύιιην άτιμοι/ (ξέττΐμ^Ικν. ρ ch. τϋ 1U reff. 
 
 not, a tautology.) — 15. rec (ΐπον, with (Η Tisch, but qu ? as he cites it for ιιπα also) al 
 Chr al : txt ABCE (H ?) all Thl-. — bef tintv, ins κνριος (see ch ix. 5 ; it is most improb 
 that the expr ο κνριος shd have been used here by Paul) ABCE 15. 18. 25. 36. 40-3. 65. 
 73. 81. 105-37-80 al leet 12 ν syrr ar-erp copt arm ThP : txt Η &c aeth ar-pol Chr Thl' 
 Oec. — ιησ. ο ναίωρηιος 137• — ti'Trtv ττρος μ( Ε vss. — 16. for ωψθ., οψθησομαι 64. — aft 
 n?(c {ιί(ς ACH) add με Β (and appy C) 137 lect 12 arm syr Ambr Aug : ίνναμεων 25. — 
 17. aft λαοί•, Άάάτωΐ'ΐονίαιων 5.8.44.9ϋ lectt 12.17 Syr ar-erp ThP.— κ:, ίκτ r. fOi'. ABE-gr 
 13. 25. 40 Thl- {addn for particularity) : txt CGH most mss ν al Chr Thl Oec : κηι om al. 
 • — rec for (yω, vvv {maryinal gloss, which has overborne the ε-γω), with a few mss Oec : txt 
 ABCEGH most mss vss Chr Thl' Aug (ivv (γω\ alThl-). — απυστίλλω σε {corrn of order) 
 ABC (ίξαπ•. C 13. 18. 68. 73. 105 lectt 5. 12) Ε 33. 137 ν syr aeth ThU {t\w) ThP 
 
 Chald.), and the notice was not required. 
 σκληρ. σοι irp. κ. λ.] This is found 
 here only ; in ch. ix. tlie words are spurious, 
 having been inserted from this place. The 
 metaphor is derived from oxen at plough or 
 drawing a burden, who, on being pricked 
 with the goad, kick against it, and so cause 
 it to pierce deeper. (See Schol. on Pind. 
 1. c. below.) It is a Greek, and not (ap- 
 parently; a Hebrew proverb ; but this is 
 no reason why it should not be used in 
 Hebrew, just as it is in Latin. Instances 
 of its use are Pind. Pyth. ii. 173: χω) ίε 
 ττρός θεόν ούκ έρίζειν .... φίρειν ΰ' ί\α- 
 φρώς ίτταυχένιον λαβόντα ζυγον fipi7yfi. 
 τγογΪ κίΓΓΟοΐ' Si τοι \aicτιζ(μεv Τί)^(θει 
 όλισθηρϋς οΊμης. ^schyl. Agam. 1633 : 
 ΤΓ.οός κέΐ'τρα μι) λάκηζε, μη ττήσας μογι)ζ• 
 Eurip. Bacch. "JOl : θνμοίψ(}'ος ττοός Kfi'- 
 rpa λακΓίζοιμι, θνητός Cov θεψ. See also 
 ^Esch. Prom. 323, and other exx. in 
 Wetst. ; Plautus (True. iv. 2. 59) ; and 
 Terence, Phorm. i. 2. 27 : ' Nam qu£e in- 
 scitia est, advorsum stimulum calces .' ' 
 16 — 19.] There can be no question that 
 Paul here condenses into one, various say- 
 ings of our Lord to him at different times, 
 in visions, see ch. xxii. 18 — 21 ; and by 
 Ananias, ch. ix. 15. Nor can this, on the 
 strictest view, be considered any deviation 
 from truth. It is what all must more or 
 less do who are abridging a narrative, or 
 giving the general sense of things said at 
 various times. There were reasons for his 
 being minute and particular in the details 
 of his conversion ; that once related, the 
 commission which he thereupon received is 
 not followed into its details, but snmmed 
 lip as committed to him by the J^ord him- 
 self. It would be not only irreverent, but 
 false, to imagine that he put his own 
 
 S 2 
 
 thoughts into the mouth of our Lord ; but 
 I do not see, with Stier, the necessity of 
 maintaining that all these words were ac- 
 tually spoken to him at some time by the 
 Lord. The message delivered by Ananias 
 certainly furnished some of them ; and the 
 unmistakeable utterings of God's Spirit 
 (ro πνενμα Ίησυϊι, ch. xvi. 7) which su- 
 pernaturally led him, may have furnished 
 more, all within the limits of truth. [As 
 an illustration of the necessity of the caution 
 given at the end of the Prolegg. with re- 
 spect to the ninth edition of Bloomfield's 
 Gr. Test., I may mention that he here, 
 characterising my view as latitudinarian (.'), 
 describes himself as affirming, " with Stier, 
 the necessity of maintaining that all these 
 words were actually spoken to Paul at the 
 same time by the Lord." Here, as always 
 when Dr. B. pretends to quote German 
 writers, he has not consulted them himself, 
 but taken their words from me : and here, 
 as I am sorry to say so often, in thus 
 taking them, he has perverted what he 
 found in my note. Aug. 1856.] 
 16.] els TovTo refers to what follows, 
 ■προχίΐρ. &c., — γάρ gives the reason for 
 άνάστηθι, &c. (Meyer.) ττροχβιρ.] 
 
 See reff. ρ,άρτυρα ών τ£ elSes] Stier 
 
 remarks, that Paul was the witness of the 
 glory of Christ : whereas Peter, the first of 
 the former twelve, describes himself (I Pet. 
 V. 1) as 'a witness of the snfi'erings of 
 Christ, and a partaker of the glory that 
 shall be revealed.' So true it was that this 
 (κτυιομα among the Apostles, became, by 
 divine grace, more than they all (1 Cor. 
 XV. 8 — 10). — The expre.'-sioii {ιπη/ιέτη!' (ov 
 iifft- may be compared with ΰπηρετιη τον 
 λήγον, which Luke calls the (ΐίτόττται, 
 Luke i. 2. ών τ€ όφθησομαί σοι]
 
 260 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXVI. 
 
 q Luke xxii. (ί. ατΓοστί'λλω ^^ ανοίζ,αι οφθαλμούς αντων, "^ του '^ ίττιστοί-φαι abc 
 
 1 θι>Γ. ix. κι. ,^ , , ',„j,,^ , „ _^,, KGII 
 
 '"reiUintr^, «""^ σκοτους Ης φως και της ' ίί,υυσιας του σατανά ίπι 
 6-L«kVix! τον θίον, ^^ τον λαβΰν αυτούς ^ αφίσιν αμαρτιών και 
 SS con.tr..! Cor. κληοον iv τοις Ί]yιaσμevυις πιστΒΐ ttj ίΐς (με. 
 td.'.x.''43refl. ^^ " οθίν, βασιλίΰ Ά^Ϋρίππα, ουκ ί-γ(νυμην ^ απίΐΟν,ς τώ ...απ- 
 U ch. i. 17 reft•. ,, ,', >9ό'^^^ -'λ - -' ^'^"'' 
 
 V01..XX.32. '^ ουρανί ω οπτασία, "^^ άλλα τοις tv ίΐαμασκιο πρώτον τε τ»; c 
 ''χχϊν'ί1;'4*'' και Ίίοοσολυμοις, '' ύς πασάν τ£ ttjv χώραι^ της Ιουδαίας gh 
 
 χ = Matt. xiv. , i. ,, b ' ' Λ Λ ο " » d ' ' j 
 
 7; ^I'^'J•.."-.,'^' καί τοις tVveaiv aπηyyίλλov μετανοίΐν και επιστρΕψΗν 
 
 iiljl juiiiih £7Γί τον θίον, ^ αζια της ^ μετανοίας ε'/ογα πράσσοντας. 
 
 yLnke"i.i7. 21 j,,£,^q rouTWv uE οί 'louSaioi συλλαρο/ιενοι εν τω ιερω 
 
 Rom. 1.13. Γ ι-)οι» / -\ 
 
 ζ "nke ii.''!3'*' εττεφώ ντο ^ δίανειρίσασθαι. ^ ' εττικουρίας οΰν 'τυχών 
 
 (Mntl. vi. 14, _ 1 ν - >r - W - ί / / k " 
 
 2(!,:w. ΧΓ. T-ijc ατΓΟ του ϋεου ανρι της ημέρας ταύτης ίστηκα^ 
 
 13 only.) Dau. **■' 
 
 alTi'ife^zs. ν^^Ρ^^ρομεΐΌς '" μικρω τε /cat "μεγάλω, ούδεν "έκτος 
 acOT.xii 1 λε-νων ° ών τε οί προφηται ϊ\α\ησαν '' μελλόντων 
 
 only. L. Ρ. / ' ' 
 
 Dan. ix. 23. b = (here only). See Luke viii. 34. c absol., ch. xvii. 30 al. dver. 18. eMalt. in. 8. 
 
 af. = Lukexxiii. 41. f=ch.i.l6 xii3al. g i-h. v. 30 nnly t. h here only t. VVisd. 
 
 xiii. 18. i = ch. xxii. 2. Lukexx.S.'i. 1 Slaec. xi. 42. k = here oily. 1 ih. xx. 2ii reft'. 
 
 m L-h. Tiii. 10. Ileb. τϋί. 11 al. ii = 1 Cor. xv. 27. Judg. viii. 26. ο con>tr., ver. 17. ρ ch. xiii. 34. 
 
 (f ζστΓοστίλω) : txt GH (-(λω Η vss) most mss vss copt Syr al Chr Oec. — 18. for αντων, 
 τυφλών Ε mss latt Aug.— αποστρ. AH 65. 97- I(i0-G-42 al lectt 5. 12 al Chr Thl• 
 Aug: νποστη. 27• 78 Clu• (ms).— fic σκ. 96. 142. — τον σκ. 180. — απο της (om 80) 
 (ζ. CEG 137-80 lect 12 (ν al) ThP : txt AB(e sil)H most mss Chr Thl' Oec— 
 ι/γιασ. {η•/ατηιμ(νοις ΙΟδ) ττασιν Ε (see ch χχ. 32). — τη πιστιι τη 180. — 20. rec cm τε 
 (1st), with EG(rt 2nd also om G)H al : ins AB al. — ins fv bef tfp. AE (-υυσαλημ) 
 3G. 40 al SyrarrThl: τοις fv 137 lect 12: om GH most mss Chr Oec. — £ΐς om AB 
 (on acct of •οις preceding ί") (latt mss). — Mill (not rec) anayytWwv, with GH 4. 78. 
 80 al Oec: airayyeWw 14. 38. 65-62. j^. 95.7.9. 104-13-33-77 al Chr : aπηγyiι\a al : 
 KarijyytWov 66-: παρηγγιλλον 96: txt ABE al ν all. — ττρος r. Θ. 95. 177. — bef 
 Θ. ins ζωντα 15. 18. 25. 36. 40. 133-80 arm.— άξιο τί Ε.— 21. συ\\ηβ. μι Α 73. 137 
 vss: οι tovS. μι EG al Clir ThP : μι om ΙδΟ.^οι om BG 13 Chron ThP. — οντά εν τω 
 Ε 13. 15. 18. 36. 40. 68. 73. 105-37-80 ν al Chron.— 22. rec πάρα τ, θ. (more usual 
 eaprn), with GH al Chr al : txt ABE 13. 15. 17- 25. 36. 40. 65-8. 73. 105-80 al Chron 
 Thl". — rec μαφτνρονμίνος {see notes), with Ε al Thl- Oec : txt ABGH 1.15. 18. 40 and 
 most mss ν al {tesiificans) Chr Chron ThP : ίιαμαρτομίνος 'Jii.^Tt om 96. — ιΧαΚησαν 
 
 (1) ο<ρθ. must be passive, not (as Borne- pressly, speaking as he was to the Jew 
 
 mann, Winer, ΛVahl, al.) causative (' videre Agrippa) by the expression σκότυς and 
 
 faciam'), — but as E. V., 'I will appear ίζονσία τοΐ) σατανά, both, in the common 
 
 unto thee.' (2) the gen. is exactly paral- language of the Jews, applicable only to the 
 
 leled (jNIeyer) by Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 788, Gentiles. But in reahty, and in Paul's 
 
 ών μεν Ίκόμην = τούτων (rather εκείνων) mind, they had their sense as applied to 
 
 Si (l Ίκόμην. So here ών =z τούτων Jews, — who were in spiritual darkness and 
 
 {εκείνων) δι α όφθ. ' the things in (or on under Satan's power, however little they 
 
 account of) whicli I will appear to thee.' thought it. See Col. i. 13. τοΰ 
 
 That such visions did take place, we know, λαβ.] A third step : first the opening of 
 
 from ch.xviii. 9 ; xxii. 18 ; xxiii. 1 1. 2 Cor. the eyes— next, the turning to God — next, 
 
 xii. 1. Gal. i. 12. 17. τοΰ λαοΰ] as the receiving remission of sins and a place 
 
 elsewhere, 'the Jewish people.' — 'Hie among the sanctified; see ch. xx. 32. — 
 
 armatur contra omnes metus qui eum ma- This last reference determines π'ιστει Ty 
 
 nebant, et simul praparatur ad crucis to- £ΐς• εμ'ε to belong not to l)yιaσμ(^>oις but to 
 
 lerantiam.' Calvin. els ους] to both, λαβεΊν. — Thus the great object of Paul's 
 
 the peoi)le, and the Gentiles ; not the preaching was to awaken and shew the 
 
 Gentiles only. 18. τοΰ Ιττιστ.] necessity and efficacy of πιστις ?'/ £ΐ'ς f^£. 
 
 not, as Beza, and E. V., ' to turn them :' And fully, long ere this, had he recognized 
 
 but, ' that they may turn ;' see έπι- and acted on this his great mission. The 
 
 στρεφειν, ver. 20 — The general reference epistles to the Galatians and Romans are 
 
 of ους becomes tacitly modified (not ex- two noble monuments of the Apostle of 
 
 f
 
 18—24. 
 
 ΠΡΑΕΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 261 
 
 ings i. 51 
 
 24 
 
 yiuioOai και Μωυσνις, '^ ίΐ "^ παθητος ο γριστυς, '' ti 4 - ""• «• 
 
 < , '*'■ 3 Kings i. . 
 
 πρώτος '' βζ αναστύσίως ^ ι>£Κρων φως ^ μεΧΧίΐ " καταγ- rhclenniyt. 
 ytXXiiv τω τε λαω και τοις ϊΟΐ'ίσιν 
 
 ατΓοΧυ-γουμίνου ο 
 " Maivij, Παύλε' τα ποΧΧά σε ^ 
 
 χ ch. xii. 1δ refl. 
 
 )λονου/^ί£νου ο Φίίστος• ^'' μεγαλτ? τρ φωΐ'τ; φησιν "xiiil'sg'ai. 
 
 cll. siv. 10 only, 
 lereoiily. Hus. ix. 7, 8. 
 
 h. xxiv. 1(1. 
 here only. Eur. Hippol. y&l. 
 
 om 95 : ιτροίλαλησαν 137• — "γίνίσθαι ITT. — 23. μιΧλιιν καταγγ. ('not μίΧλιιν'ιηνβν 
 22. as Scholz,' Tisch) li. — rec om τε {as unnecessary), with G al Chron Thl' Oec: ins 
 ABE-gr Η 13. 38. 40. 05-8. 95-8-9. 105-13-33 al Chr ThF.— 24. ΧαΧουντος avr. κ. 
 απυΧ. Ε v. —rec ίφη {corrn to historical tense), with GH al ν al {dixit) Chr (text) Oec: 
 ίψωνησί 35 al: nnt «4. 137 al : txt ABE 13. 15. 18. 40. 68. 180 al Chr (comm) Thl.— 
 
 F-A.ITH. 19. άπΕίθης] See Isa. 1. 5 in 
 
 LXX. 20. Tois €v Δαμ. ττρ.] See 
 
 ch. ix. 20. — εΙς belongs to c'nriiyyeX. (De 
 W.), not to τοΙς {iv Ααμ.), as Meyer; see 
 Luke viii. 34 ; and on this sense of ιίς, 
 note on ver. 6 above. 22.] The ουί' 
 
 refers to the whole course of deliverances 
 which he had had from God, not merely to 
 the last. It serves to close the narrative, by 
 shewing how it was that he was there that 
 day, — after such repeated persecutions, 
 crowned by this last attempt to destroy 
 him. μαρτυρόμΐνος] The mere love 
 
 of paradox and difficulty, as it seems to me, 
 has led De Wette and Meyer to prefer the 
 ordinary reading -ρούμινος, although very 
 weakly supported by MSS., and yielding 
 hardly any appropriate sense, μορτυρού- 
 μινος must be passive, and signify (see 
 reft", below) ' testified to,' ' home witness 
 of:' the datives μικρψ and μεγάΧφ must 
 be the agents, ' by small and great ' (to 
 which there is no objection grammatically, 
 but every objection analogically, see ch. x. 
 22 ; xvi. 2 ; xxii. 12, in all which μαρτν- 
 ρονμαι is followed by ύπό), and λίγων 
 must be predicative, ' as saying .•' i.e., ' t/tat 
 I say.' But this would be contrary to the 
 fact : Paul was not thus borne witness 
 of by all, but on the contrary accused of 
 being a despiser of the law by a great 
 majority of his own countrymen. There 
 can, I think, be no question either critically 
 or exegetically of the correctness of tlie 
 other reading μηρτυρόμίΐ'ος, 'bearing 
 witness,' as directly appropriate to the 
 office to which Paul was appointed, — that of 
 ii tvitness (ver. IC) ; and then μικρψ rt και 
 /jiyriXr.j, ' to small and great,' so flat and 
 meaningless on the otlier interpretation, 
 admirably suits the occasion, — standing as 
 lie was before an «issembly of the greatest 
 of the land. 23. cl] not for on — but 
 
 just as in ver. 8, — 'if,' — 'if at least:' 
 meaning, that the things following wcire 
 jiatcnt facts to tliose wlio kiiiw the pro- 
 jjlicts. See llcb. vii. 15, wliere 6i' has the 
 saiTiit sense. '7Γαθητο5] not, as I5i'/a, 
 
 ' Christum fuisse jiussnrura ' (so E. V., 
 
 ' should suffer ') : but as Vulg., ' si passibilis 
 Christus.' Paul does not refer to the pro- 
 phetic announcement, or the historical 
 reality, of the fact of Christ's suffering, but 
 to the idea of the Messiah as passible and 
 suffering being in accordance with the tes- 
 timony of the prophets. That the fact of 
 His having suffered on the cross was in the 
 Apostle's mind, can hardly be doubted : 
 but that the words do not assert it, is 
 evident from the change of constr. in the 
 next clause, where the fact of the bringing 
 life and immortality to light by the resur- 
 rection is spoken of, — n' παθητος ό χρ., — 
 fi . . . . μέλλει καταγγε'λλειν. Grot, cites 
 from Justin Martyr, Tryph. παθητόν τον 
 χριστοί', ΟΤΙ α'ι -γραφαι κημνσσουσι, φαί'ΐ- 
 ρόν ϊστι. These words are put into the 
 mouth of Trypho the Jew. ιτρώτος 
 
 «I άvα(Γτάσ'εωs =^ ττρώτης άναστάς, or 
 πρωτότοκος ίκ νεκρών, Col. i. 18, but im- 
 plying that this light, to be preached to the 
 Jews (0 λαός) and Gentiles, must arise 
 from the resurrection of the dead, and that 
 Christ, the first «ξ άναβτάσεως, was to 
 announce it. See Isa. xlii. ; xhx. G ; 
 Ix. 1, 2, 3. Luke ii. 32. ch. xiii. 47- 
 24.] The words τυντα άποΧογονμενον 
 must refer, on account of the present part., 
 to the last words spoken by Paul : but it is 
 not necessary to suppose tliat these only 
 produced the effect described on Festus. 
 Mr. Humphry remarks, " Festus was pro- 
 bably not so well acquainted as his pre- 
 decessor (ch. xxiv. 10) with the character 
 of the nation over wliich he had recently 
 been called to preside. Hence he avails 
 himself of Agrippa's assistance (xxv. 2(i). 
 Hence also he is unable to comi)relu'iid the 
 earnestness of St. Paul, so unlike the iiiilif- 
 ference with which religious and moral sub- 
 jects were regarded by the upper classes at 
 Rome. His self-love suggests to him, that 
 one who presents such a contrast to his own 
 apathy, must be mad : the convenient liy- 
 l)othe'sis that much learning had produced 
 this r(;sult, may have oc(-iirred to him on 
 hearing Paul (piote i)roiilie<-ies in in-oof of 
 his assertions." μαίνη] 'Thou art
 
 262 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXVI. 25—32. 
 
 * περιτρίττει. ^ ό δε Ου " μαίνομαι φησιν, ' κράτιστε Φηστΐ, abf, 
 aWa αΧηΟΰας κοί " σωφοοσυνης ρήματα αττοφΟί'γ'^ομηι. 
 ίπ'ισταται γαρ πί()ΐ τούτων ο βασιΧευς, ττρος Ό\> και 
 ^ πappηaιatόμtvoς λαλώ. λανθόνείΐ' jap ηντον τι του- 
 e — «iOojuat ουθίν' ου γαρ εστίν εν γωνία πεπί 
 2/ ^.„Tc.ici^ ρασιλίΰ Α' 
 
 a here only f. 
 το Heiov — 
 e'ls οργ»;!" 
 
 TTCpiTpaTTt'l', 
 
 Jo:i. Antt. ii. 
 14. 1. 
 b Luke i. 3. 
 ch. xxiii. 26. 
 
 c rrlm. ii. 9, των ου " πίΐ 
 
 IS only t. , 
 
 ΰΓΓ4Γ.Ι.' ■ T^'fVOV 
 
 1 Cliron.xxv. , ' . f^i 
 
 ). προφηταις I otoa 
 
 ech. is. 27refl. ' ' 
 
 TOVTO. 
 
 τΓίστευεις, 
 
 ΟΤΙ πιστεύεις 
 2Pei. .^οΐ' Παυλον Lv οΛιγω ^ιε πίΐϋίΐς 
 
 I.iike XX. π. 1ι Matt. xxi. iSaiul !. liev. τϋ. 1. χχ. 8 only. 
 
 U. xi.id. 1 Pet. iv. Ifionly. 
 
 28 
 
 δέ Ά 
 
 ιγρίΤΓττα, 
 
 rpa- 
 τοις 
 
 γριπττας ττρος 
 
 ^ριστίονον γενεσσαι. 
 
 ί Eph. iii. 3 only. See 1 Pet. v. 12 
 
 ...^ei-e 
 σθαι Ε. 
 ABGH 
 
 25. aft ο it ins ποι.λος ABE 13. Ιό. 18, 25. 36. 40. 65-8. 73. 105-80 lect 40 ν all 
 ThF : om GH most mss sjt al Thl' Oec— rec αλλ, with Η al : txt A(B?)EG 38. 95-6. 
 177 Chr Till Oec— 26. και om Β. — for λαλώ, Xtyw 13.— η om Β 137-80: ri αντον 
 73.— rec ov5(v, with GH al Chr al : om AE (but see below) 13. 32. 40-2. 57". 68. 73 : 
 txt Β : om ου 29. 662-9. 80. 106: and (ονδ. παθ.) 3. 31. 105-80.— for ου, ovct E^ 
 [ovhv E' e) 15. 18. 36.40-2. 105-80.— fffriv om Η 25-6. 38. 95 0. 101-42-77: aft 
 γωνία 31. 40 : aft Tovro 42. 57. 69. — 28. rec ttjjoc roi' π. £0»;, with EGH al (ίίπεν 46) : 
 tst AB 13. 17. 40. 68. 73. 105-37 v.— for yivtaOai, ποιησαι AB 13. 17- 40 copt 
 (facere me) syr-marg {apply from a confus of two readgs, one of wh was με χρ. 
 mad,' not merely, ' thou 7'avesi,' nor ' t/tou τοντο] T/iis, the act done to Jesus by the 
 
 art an enthusiast :' nor are the words 
 spoken in jest (01sh.),-^but in earnest 
 {θΐ'μοϋ ην κ. όυγής ι) ψωΐ'ή, Chrys.). Fes- 
 tus finds himself by this speech of Paul yet 
 more bewildered than before (De W.). 
 τα ΊΓολλα -γράμμ.] Meyer under- 
 stands F. to allude to the many rolls which 
 Paul had with him in his imprisonment (we 
 might compare τα. βιβλία, μάλιστα τάς 
 μίμβϋάνης of 2 Tim. iv. 13) and studied 
 (so also Heinrichs and Kuinoel), — but the 
 ordinary interp. ♦ thy much learning,' 
 seems more natural, and so De ΛΥ. 
 els μ. TrepiTpe'irei] ' Is turning thy brain.' 
 25.] aX-rjeiiamay be spoke warmli/ 
 and enthusiastically , but cannot be predi- 
 cated of a madman's words : σωφροσύνη 
 is directly opposed to μανία. So Xen. 
 Mem. i. 16, recounting the subjects of 
 Socrates' discourses, ri ί'ικαίον, τι άδικον 
 τι σωφροσύνη, τι μανία' τί άνδρία, τί 
 δειλία. The expressions αληθείας and 
 ρήματα, though of course in se7ise = 
 ρήματα αληθή, &c., yet have a distinctive 
 force of their own, and are never to be con- 
 founded with, or supposed to be put by a 
 Hebraism for the other. They occur in 
 classic as well as Hellenistic writers, and 
 indeed in all languages : the idea expressed 
 by them being, the derivation of the quality 
 predicated, from its soitrce : — so here, 
 ' words (not merely true and sober, but) 
 of truth and soberness,'— springing from 
 and indicative of, subjective truth and 
 soberness. 26.] Agrippa is doubly his 
 
 Mritness, (1) as cognizant of the facts re- 
 specting Je.sus, (2) as believing the pro- 
 phets. This latter he does not oidy assert, 
 but appeals to the faith of the king as a Jew 
 for its establishment. ev -γωνία .... 
 
 Jews, and its sequel, was not done in an 
 obscure corner of Judsea, but in the metro- 
 polis, at a time of more than common pub- 
 licity. 28. ev όλίγω] These words of 
 Agrippa have been very variously explained. 
 
 (1) The rendering ' propemodtim,' ' paru7n 
 abest, qui)!,' (' almost,' E. V.,) adopted by 
 Chrys., Beza, Grot., Valla, Luther, Pis- 
 cator, Calov., &c., is inadmissible, for want 
 of any example of iv όλίγψ having this 
 meaning, which would require ολίγοιι 
 {ΰλίγον μ' άπωλίσας, Aristoph. Vesp. 82ί>, 
 and al.), or ολίγου CfT, or τταη' 6>^ίγον. 
 
 (2) Calvin, Kuinoel, Schottg., Olsh., Neaii- 
 der, take it for tv όλίγψ χρόνψ, which cer- 
 tainly is allowable, but does not correspond 
 to μεγάλοι below, nor, as I believe, does it 
 come up to the general sense of the expres- 
 sion. (3) The phrase iv όλίγφ occurs in 
 Greek writers with various nouns under- 
 stood according to the nature of tlie case, — 
 and sometimes it will bear any of several 
 supplements with equal propriety. Thus 
 in Demosth. p. 33. 18, ρφδιον εΙς ταντο 
 ττάνθ' 'όσα βονλεταί τις άθροίσαντα εν 
 όλίγ(>>, where Schaefer in his Index Grseci- 
 tatis says, scil. χρόνψ, aut χώρψ, aut λόγψ, 
 aut πόνψ. So also here we may understand 
 λόγψ or πόνψ (or χρόνψ .') — or still better 
 as it seems to me, leave the ellipsis unsup- 
 plied (see Eph. iii. 3). We have a word 
 in Enghsh which exactly expresses it, — 
 one which has fallen into disuse, but has 
 no equivalent ; ' lightly :' i. e. with little 
 pains, few words, small hesitation. — Next, 
 as to the sense of Agrippa's saying. In 
 determining this, enough attention has not 
 been paid to two points: (1) the present 
 tense, ττείθεις, ' thou art persuading,' i. e. 
 ' attempting to persuade :' and (2) the use,
 
 XXVI Γ. 1. 
 
 ΠΡΑ3:ΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 263 
 
 29 ' ?^ ΓΤ "Ν Ι!"''?'' ηι'^ ~ α ~ ^i> '\> 
 
 Ο οε ΙΙαυΛος ^i/sat/tr/v αν τω (7£ω και ει> ολιγω ι^ι,, .,„,, 
 και ' εΐ' ^αεγαλω ου μόνον σε άλλα και ττάντας τους on"y''"sef^ 
 ακουοντας μου σημίρον γενεσσαι τοιούτους- οποίος n,'I!iJ,^,e^oni 
 
 καγω ίίμι ^ τταρεκτος των "δεσμών τούτων. ^^ ανέστη ίκΛ.ι?^"' 
 τε ο ροσιΛευς και ο ' ■ήρεμων η τε οερνικη και οι ' <^ΐ'γ-ηΜ"ΐί ν 3•^ 
 καθΐ]μενοι αυτοις, ^'^ και '^ αναγωρησαντες έλάλουν ττρος o.uyu lieuf. 
 αλλήλους λέγοντες οτι ούδεν ''θανάτου αζιον η δεσ^ιιων "^^χϋί^ό!)»!'' 
 πράσσει ο άνθρωπος ούτος. ^^ Ά-γρίππας δε τω Φηστω qM^rTilw.% 
 εψη ΑτΓοΛελυσο/οι εουι/ατο ο αΐ'σρωτΓος ούτος, ει ^ιϊ; f^l"•/^• 
 " ε7Γεκε'κ:λί;το Καίσαρα. s di*. χχίϋ. 29 
 
 XXVII. Ως οε "εκρίθη ''"του " αττοττλειν η^^ας εις ί = '=ί'.•.='^^35. 
 
 η eh. XXV. 11. ν = ch. χχ. )Γι reft'. \ν constr., ch. iii. 12 reff. 
 
 .\ ch. xiii. 4. xiv. 2R. xx. 13 only t• 
 
 τΓοιησιις) : t.xt EGH niss (nrly) vss Chr Till Oec. — 29. rec ο St ir. ειπιν (suppli/ addn), 
 with GH al {ίφη 15. 18. 33-G. 76. 177-80): txt AB 13. 17. 40. 68. 73. 105-37 ν 
 syr. — rec for μ(•/αΧω, ττολλω {see 7io(es), with GH al eetli Chr Thl Oec: κ. tv πολ. κ. ev 
 ολ. 31 : t.\t AB (al?) 5. 13. 40. 105 ν syrr copt arm. — 30. rec και ταντα (ΐττοιτος 
 αυτόν, ανίστη {addn for perspicuiti/), with GH syr* al Thl Oec : cfd ταύτα ιιττοντος, 
 ανίατη 137 Syr ar-erp aith arm : avtar. Si 13. 14'. 17• 40. 105 syr (but rec in marg) 
 copt Chr: KOI ανέστη «1: txt AB 13.36. 68. 73. 103-42-80 v.— 31. οτι cm 31-8.— 
 άξιον θα)'. A copt al. — 7} Βίσμ. αζ. Β 13. 31. 40 v. — η ττρασσκ A 13 ν: ττηασσίΐν 137- 
 — 32. ηίυνατο Β 57. 95. 137-80 Thl^ : txt AGH most mss Chr Thl' Oec— 6πικ:£κλ. AG 
 (-κλιιτο) 1. 4. 40. 64-8. 07-8 marg 103-5-6-80 al Thl : txt BH al Chr Oec : εκίκλητο 133. 
 Chap. XXV^Il. 1. ins και ούτως fKoti'fv ο ήρεμων, αναπεμχΡαι καισαηα 64 : και 
 
 in the mouth of a Jew, and that Jew a 
 king, of the Gentile and offensive appella- 
 tion χριστιανός. To my mind, the first of 
 these considerations decide that Agrippa is 
 characterizing no effect on himself, but 
 tvhat Paul was doing or attempting to 
 do : the second, that he speaks of some- 
 thing tiot that he is likely to be persuaded 
 to become, but that cojitrasts strangely 
 with his present worldly position and 
 intentions. I would therefore render the 
 words thus: 'Lightly (with small trou- 
 ble) art thou persuading me to be a 
 Christian:' and understand them, in con- 
 nexion with Paul's having attempted to 
 make Agrippa a witness on his side, — ' / am 
 not so easily to be made a Christian of, as 
 thou siqjposest.' Alost of the ancient com- 
 mentators take the words as imjjlying some 
 effect on Agrijijia's mind, and as sj)oken in 
 earnest : but this I think is hardly possible, 
 philologically or cxegetically. — 1 may add 
 that the emphatic position of both ev όλίγω 
 and χριστιανο'ν, before their respective 
 verbs, strongly confirms the view taken 
 above. 29.] 'I could wish to God, 
 
 that whether with ease or with difficulty 
 (persuaded), not only thou, but all who 
 hear me to day, might become such as I 
 am, except only these bonds.' He undir- 
 staiids iv ύ\ίγ<;) just as Agrippa had used it, 
 ' easily,' ' wit/i little trouble,' ' with smalt 
 persuasio7t ;' and contrasts with it tv μίγά\ΐι> 
 
 (τΓολλςί has been an alteration to suit the 
 imagined supplement χρόνι•ί), with diffi- 
 culty,' ' tvith great trouble,' ' tvith much 
 persuasion.' Those interpreters who under- 
 stand χρόνψ above, render this 'sen tempore 
 exiguo opus fuerit, sue multo ' (Schott.). — 
 Those who take tv όλ. for ' almost,' ' uon 
 propemodum tantum, sed plane ' (Grot.) : 
 ' 7iot only almost, but altogether,' E. V. 
 In εΰχίσθαι θεώ the dative implies the 
 direction of the wish or request to God : 
 so /Escli. Again. 852, utoiai πηώτα δεξι- 
 ώσομαι ; II. iii. 318, θίοΊσι ci χί'ιρης 
 άνίσχον, and freq. See exx. in Bern- 
 hardy, Syntax, p. 86. δεσμών] He 
 shews the chain, which being in ' custodia 
 militaris,' he bore 07i his ainn, to connect 
 him with the soldier who had charge of 
 him. 31. Ίτράσσίΐ] generally, of his 
 life and habits. No definite act was alleged 
 against him : and his apologetic speech 
 was in fact a sample of the acts of which he 
 was accused. 32.] Agrippa in these 
 words delivers his judgment as a Jew : ' For 
 a7ight I see, as regards our belief and prac- 
 tices, he 7night have been set at liberty.' — 
 But now he could not : ' nam ajipcUatione 
 potestasjudicis,a(iuoapj)ollatum est,cessaro 
 incipit ad absolvciidum non minus quam ad 
 condemiiaiidum. Criminaenim Integra ser- 
 vanda .sunt cognitioni supcrioris.' (Jrot. 
 
 Chai'. XXVll. 1— XXVIII. 31.] 
 Paul's voYAiii•; το lioMii and sojourn
 
 264 
 
 πρα;ξ:εις αποστολών. 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 y = ch: xxviii. TIW 
 
 Ifi. 
 ζ ver. 42 only. 
 
 Gen xxxix. 
 
 Ί 
 
 R Cll. X. 1 rrft" 
 
 b see cll. xxv 
 21, 2i. 
 
 ταλ/αΐ', ^ παρεδίδουΐ' τον τε Παύλου και τινας abgh 
 δεσμώτας εκ:ατοντά^χρ ονόματι Ιουλιω ^ σττΗρης 
 ^'"επιβάντες δε πλοίω Αδ^)αμυττΐ}νω μελ- 
 
 ετερους οι 
 σίβαστΊ^ς 
 
 cch. xxi. 2, 0. (lat., here only. 
 
 ουηυς iicptviv ουτοΓ ο »J7- ανατημ-^αι καισαρι 97 : ως ουν (icpiviv ο »;γ. του 7ΓψΐΓ(σΘαι 
 αντοί' π()ος ιτακταιια, γ»; ίττιουσ?; καλισας τον (κατονταρχον ονόματι ιονΧιανον σπειοης 
 σίβαστης, ττίίρίίιέοΐ; αντω τον παυλοί' συν ιτίροις ύισμωταις syr-marg : και ίκριη τηρι 
 αυτού ο φι^στ'ος πεμπισθηι αυτόν ττρος καίσαρα ης την ιταΧ. κτλ Syr ar-erp.— ίε om 
 lect 12.— for ημάς, τους ntpi τ. τταυλον G. 31-3 lectt 12. 25. 32 all ar-pol {an eccle- 
 siastical portion beginning at ως).— την om 57•— παρίίιίου A 6. 8. 40. C!) al demid 
 copt syr ar-crp Thl'. — iTtpovQ om 137• — ίκατονταρχω 133 37. — στιιρας 37 all vss 
 ff. — 2. ως h tyiviTO ττοοίυίσθαι ημης, (πιβαντις Syr ar-erp. — £πι/3. tv 137. — 
 ανραμυντηνω A, -μνντινω 13: αΡραμυττινω G 38: ατραμυτηνω 95. 113-23. — 
 rec μέλλοντες (cnrrn to suit επιβαντες), with GH al ν ar-pol Chr al : txt AB 13. 14'. 
 (I take this opportunity, before than one of the legions at different times 
 
 THERE. 
 
 commencing my commentary on this sec- 
 tion, to express my great obligations to a 
 Treatise on the Voyage and Shipwreck of 
 St. Paul, by James Smith, Esq., F.R.S., 
 kindly put into my hands by the author : 
 and to his subsequent correspondence and 
 conversation, acquainting me with his dis- 
 coveries to the present time. Aug. 18ί.β.) 
 1.] τον (see reff.) contains the 
 purpose of εκρίθη. The matter of the 
 decision implied in εκρίθη is expressed in 
 this form as if governed by the substantive 
 κρίηις, as in eh. xx. 3, ίγενετο -/νώμη 
 τυϋ ΰττοστρεφειν. Meyer remarks that the 
 expressions κελενειν'ίνα, ειπείν Ίνα, θελειν 
 Ίνα, &c. are analogous. ήρ•"•?] Here 
 
 we have again the frst person, the nar- 
 rator having, in all probability, remained in 
 Palestine, and in the neighbourhood of 
 Paul, during the interval since ch. xxi. 18. 
 irapeSiSo-uv] Who ? perhaps the 
 assessors with whom Festus took counsel 
 on the appeal, ch. xxv. 12 : but more likely 
 the i)lural is used indefinitely, the subject 
 being ' they,' = ' on ' (Fr.),or ' man ' (Germ.). 
 erepovs δ.] This expression, says 
 Meyer, is purposely chosen, to intimate, 
 that they were prisoners of another sort 
 (not also Christians under arrest). But De 
 W. shews this to be a mistake, by eVipai 
 ΤΓολλα/, Luke viii. 3, = άλλαι ττολλοι, 
 Mark xv. 41 , in both places meaning ' many 
 others of the same sort.' Here also they 
 are of the same class, as far as δεσμωται is 
 concerned : further, nothing is implied in 
 the narrative, one way or the other. 
 σ~ΐΓ€ίρη5 σίβαστή?] There is some diffi- 
 culty in determining what this cohort was. 
 We must not fall into the mistake of several 
 of the commentators, that of confounding 
 this στΓ. σεβαστή with an Ίλη ϊπττεων 
 καλούμενη Σεβαητηνών, mentioned by Jo- 
 sephus, B. J. ii. 12. 5, and Antt. xx. 6. 1, 
 this latter implying 'natives of Samaria' 
 (Σ,εβαστι'ι), — whereas our word is the same 
 adjective as that name itself, and cannot by 
 any analogy have reference to it. More 
 
 bore the honorary title ' Augusta.' Wetst. 
 quotes from Claudian de Bell. Gild. ' Dic- 
 taque ab Augusto legio:' from inscriptions in 
 Mauritania, Legio III. Aug., II. Aug., VIII. 
 Aug. : from Ptolemy, ii. 3, λεγεών δευτέρα 
 σεβαστή (in Britain) ; iv. 3, λεγεων γ. σε- 
 βαστή ; but of a ' cohors Augusta,' or 
 ' Augustana,' we never hear. De Wette 
 and Meyer suggest (but we have no his- 
 torical proof of the supposition) that it was 
 one among the five cohorts stationed at 
 Caesarea (see note, ch. xxv. 23) thus dis- 
 tinguished as the body-guard of the em- 
 peror ( .' ), and therefore chosen for any ser- 
 vices immediately concerning him, as in this 
 case. Meyer thinks it may be the same 
 (but then would the appellations be differ- 
 ent ?) with the σπε'ιρα Ιταλική of ch. x. 1. 
 It is remarkable that almost all the com- 
 mentators have assumed, without any rea- 
 son, that this στΓ. σεβαητή must have been 
 stationed at Ccesarea, whereas it may well 
 have been a cohort, or body of men so 
 called, at Rome. Wieseler is the only one 
 that I have seen who has not fallen into 
 this error. He controverts the other inter- 
 pretations (Chron. d. Apost.-g. note, p. 
 391), and infers that Julius belonged to the 
 Aiigustani, mentioned Tacitus xiv. 15, and 
 Suet. Nero, 20 and 25 (see also Dio Cass. 
 Ixi. 20 : rjv μεν yap τι και 'iSiov αΰτψ 
 σύστημα ες ττεντακιςχιΚίους στρατιώτας 
 τταρεσκευασμενον Αύγονστειοί τε ώνο- 
 μάζοντο' και ΐζήρχον των επαίνων, and 
 Ixiii. 8), who appear to have been identical 
 with the evocati (veterans specially sum- 
 moned to service by the emperors), and to 
 have formed Nero's body-guard on his 
 journey to Greece. The first levying of this 
 band by Augustus, Dio relates, xlv. 12. To 
 this Julius seems to have belonged, — to 
 have been sent on some service into Asia, 
 and now to have been returning to Rome. 
 — We read of a Julius Priscus, Prefect of 
 the Praetorian guards under Vitellius, who 
 killed himself ' pudore magis quam neces- 
 sitate,' after the military murder by Mu-
 
 2—4. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 265 
 
 ...τνχ- 
 e,vH. 
 aft v^hich 
 it is writ- 
 ten in un- 
 cial let- 
 ters by a 
 
 Aovrt ττλείΐ' τους κατά tjiv Ασιαν τόπους, ^ ανη\6ημίΐ', d constr., here 
 
 o-f<, >^5Λ ^ »_j , Polyb.iii. 
 
 TTj τε ^τερα ^ κατηγΟημεν εις Σιοωνα, ^ ψιλανθ^οωττως ecli.'iu. is 
 
 ' * τ / "ν "* -|-τ 'Λί / k''# ^ '^*'^• 
 
 τε ο Ιυυλιος τω ΙΙαυλω ■^ρησαμενος επετ|θεψεν προς f=cu. xx.is. 
 τους ψιλούς ττυρευθίντα ίπιμζΧίΐας *" τυχειν. Λτακ-ειθεί' g^h.'ski s 
 
 e' /)' Q' Λ' ^Τ/"' 'ί^'^ '■ xxviii. 12 
 
 ανανυεντίς υττετΓΛευσαμεν την ιχυττρον όια το τους only. (Luke 
 
 '^ ' ν. 11.) 
 
 h her? only t φιλ. ίιακ^ίοίίαι πρόί . . . , Polyb. i. 68. 13. i = 2 Cor. siii. 10 only. Xen. Mem. ir. 
 
 6. o(olten). k iuf. aor . Matt. viii. 21. Ste ch. xxvi. 1 reft'. Ihereuny. Prov. iii. 8. 
 
 m = ch.xxiv. 2. Luke xx. 3j. 1 MaLC. xi. 42. η ver. viL only t• 
 
 15. 18. 3G. 40. 6G2-8-i). 73-6. 133-37-80 aU am (latt) syr copt seth arm al : -τα 25. 90-9. 
 105 lect 14: -τος 64 lect 13. — πλεαν {a late usage, see Lobeck, Phryn, ρ 221) 137. 
 —«ς- τους κ. ΑΒ 13. 25. 40. 68-9. 73. 105 al ThP : ίπι. τ. 15. 36. 137-80 lect 12: 
 circa ν al : txt GH all (various corrns supplementary of the constr, which was not under- 
 stood) Chr Thl' Oec. — for οντος συν, συνοντος 13. — aft θίσσαλον., add ίί αμισταρχου 
 και σ(κοι>νίον syr : -νικίων di αρισταρχ. κ. σεκ. 137 {see ch χ.χ. 4). — 3. Ct G al vss Chr. 
 — γι;»» aiC. lect 12. — ιουλιαι/ος A syr-marg : τω Ιε π. ο ιουλιος 95. — επιτρεχΡαι 137: 
 ίκελενσε 105. — Mill (not rec) om τονς bef ^ιλ. : but ins ABGH al Chr Tlil Oec. — 
 ■π-οριυθίνη AB 13. 15. 36. 68. 105 Thl' (jramml corrn) : πορευεσθαι 106 : txt GH most 
 
 cianus of Calpurnius Galerianus. This was 
 ten years after the date of our narrative : 
 but their identity must be only conjectural. 
 2. Άδραμ,υττηνω] Adramyttium 
 {'Α?ραμνΓτιον, -ειον, or Άτραμΰττιον, and 
 in Plin. v. 32, Adramytteos), was a seaport 
 ■with a harbour in Mysia, an Athenian 
 colony. It is now a village called Endramit. 
 Grotius, Drusius, and others erroneously 
 suppose Adrumetum to be meant, on the 
 north coast of Africa (Winer, RWB.). 
 irXttv Toi/s . . .] The accusative is indicative 
 of the direction. We have ηΚθε ΥΙοΧννείκης 
 χθόνα, Eur. Phoeniss. 110. See Winer, 
 § 32. 1, on the accus. after neuter verbs, 
 and Bernhardy, Syntax, p. 114. 20. 
 Άριστάρχ.] See ch. six. 29 ; xx. 4. Col. iv. 
 10. Philem. 24. In Col. iv. 10, Paul calls him 
 his συναιχμάλωτος, but perhaps only figu- 
 ratively : the same term is applied to Epa- 
 phras, Philem. 23, where follows Άρισ-«ρ- 
 χος, Λημίίς, ΧυνκίΊς, υ'ι συνεργοί /ίου. 
 Σιδώνα] This celebrated city is generally 
 joined in the N. T. with Tyre, from which 
 it was distant 200 stadia (Strabo, xvi. 756 
 ff.), and of which it was probably the mother 
 city. It was within the lot of the tribe of 
 Asher (Josh. xix. 28), but never conquered 
 by the IsraeUtes (Judg. i. 31 ; iii. 3). From 
 the earliest times the Sidonians were re- 
 nowned for their manufactures of glass 
 (' Sidon artifex vitri,' Plin. v. 19), linen 
 (η•£πλοι τταμποίκιλοι tpya yvvaiKiov 2t- 
 coi'i'ttiv, II. vi. 290), silversmith's work (II. 
 xxiii. 743, and ()d. xv. 115, &c.), and for 
 the hewing of timber ( I Kings v. 6 ; Ezr. 
 iii. 7)• In ancient times, Sidon seems to 
 have been under Tyre, and to have fur- 
 nished her witli mariners (see Ezek. xxvii. 
 8). It went over to Slialmaneser, k. of 
 Assyria (Jos. Antt. ix. 14. 2); but seems 
 under him, and afterwards under the Chal- 
 dieans and Persians, to have had tributary 
 
 kings of its own ( Jer. xxv. 22 ; xxvii. 3 ; 
 Herod, viii. 67). The Sidonians furnished 
 the best ships in Xerxes'g navy, Herod, vii. 
 96. 99. Under Artaxerses Ochus Sidou 
 freed itself, but was by him, after a severe 
 siege, taken and destroyed (Diod. Sic. xvi. 
 43 ff.). It was rebuilt, and soon after went 
 over to Alexander, keeping its own vassal 
 kings. After his death it was alternately 
 under SjTian and Egyptian rule, till it fell 
 under the Romans. The present Saida is 
 west of ancient Sidon, and is a port of some 
 commerce, but insecure, from the sanding 
 up of the harbour (Winer, RWB. See also 
 Robinson, vol. iii. pp. 415 if., who gives an 
 account of the history of Sidon during the 
 middle ages). 3. iropivGevra] ace. 
 
 with inf. aft. a dat. preceding, as ch. xxvi. 
 20 ; xxii. 17• πορευΰίντι (see var. read.) 
 is a grammatical correction. The <pi\oi 
 here mentioned were probably Christian 
 brethren (see ch. xi. 19, where the Gospel 
 is said to have been preached in Phoenicia ; 
 and ch. xxi. 3, where we find brethren at 
 Tyre) ; but it is usual in that case for 
 άδεΧφοΊ or μαθηταί to be specified : of. 
 ch. xxi. 4. 7• The ϊτημίλειας τυχείν was 
 perhaps to obtain from them that outfit for 
 the voyage which, on account of the official 
 precision of his custody at Cwsarea, he 
 could not there be provided with. 
 4. νπίττλίΰσαμίν] ' sailed under,' i. e. 
 ' in the lee of,' Cyprus. " Ubi navis vento 
 contrario cogitur a recto cursu decudere, ita 
 ut tunc insula sit interposita inter ventum 
 et navem, dicitur ferri ihj'ra insulam." 
 Wetst., who also says, " Si veiitus favisset, 
 alto se commisissent, et Cyjirum ad dex- 
 teram partem relir|uisscnt, ut Act. xxi. 3, 
 nunc autem coguntur legere littus Ciliei;e, 
 inter Cyprum et Asiam." With fliis ex- 
 planation Mr. Smitli agrees ; and there can 
 hardly be a doubt that it is the right one.
 
 266 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 o = MarkTi. ιινίμους είναι ° ίναντιους, το τε ^ ττίλαγος το '' κατά την 
 ''«'(m'yT'" KiXi/Ci'fti' KOI Πομφυλιαν '' διαπλίύσαιτίς *" κατηΧθομεν 
 «Ι = νν. ΰ, 7ai. f/c Μυοα rrjr Λυκίας. 
 
 - here only f. χ- 'αΛ^- ^- \ ' ' ^ 'Τ Λ' 
 
 Xen^Anab. TTAOtOV AAiQaVCpil'OV πλίΟν ίίς Τ?]!» Ιταλίοΐ', 
 
 £Κατονταξ)^της 
 ένφί- 
 
 S (•Ιι. νίϋ. ft reff. /Ο ,-. ,/ 7'"' - ^■' ' / νΟ^ 
 
 thtreoiiiy. ρασί!' Ί]μας ίΐς αυτό. * ίν ικαναις οε τημίραις ροαου- 
 
 ProT. iv. 7. > 
 
 n-ch.ix. 23, ττλ 
 
 οουΐ'Τίς κ:α/ "" μο\ίς ^ -γίνομενοι ^ κατά την Κνίδοι», 
 προςί(>>ντης ημάς του ανίμου, " νπίττΧίυσαμίν την 
 
 τταραλεγομίνοι 
 
 43 re ft•. 
 
 ν here only +. μη 
 
 wch.xiv. IS , ν•^Λ' aw'\ 
 
 x="ch XX i(i '^PVT^^ κατά 2,αΛμωνην, μόλις τί 
 
 aL y = Luke χ 32. Matt. xxiv. 7. ζ here only f. a ver. 13 only t. Dixl. Sic. xiii. 3. 
 
 mss Chr Thl'. — 5. την om 137• — for κιλ., Χυκιαν 38. — πλ^νσαντις Η : add Si ημιρων 
 δίκαττβντί 137 syr*. — κατηλθαμιν A : κατηχθημίν 14. 38. 57• (iC• 7G• 93-7-8-marg 113 
 lect 5 al Oec : >yXOo/iti' 25 ν Syr ar-erp Jer• — for μύρα (μϋμα 93), λυστρα A ν copt 
 al Cassiod Bed: μυιρων Η: σμυρναν .31 Bed-gr : σμυρα arm: txt B(-ppoi')G most 
 mss syrr Chr Thl Ouc .Tor. — 6. κακίΐθίν A 24 al : κακιισε 15. 25. 31-(j. 40. 180: και 
 37• 5C^-rec -ρχος, with GH al Chr ThU Oec: t.xt AB 180 lect 12 ThF.— αλιξανίρ»?- 
 vov Β C9. 93-5 8-marg 105 all Thl•: -Spivov 42. 90. 180.— rz/r om Η 93. 180.— 
 ανφιβασ. 4. 13. 36. (;8. 9(J. 133-80 all lect 14 al Chr Thl^ {ανίβιβασαμιν Thl') : txt 
 AB(e sil)GH al Oec. — ttg αντυ ΐ]μας 137. — 8• και ουκ ίωντος 27-9 : οιικ ίωιτος 
 105: /i;/ ίωιτος 06^: μη ττροςιωντος 2. 99: jurj ττροςιοιτος Thl-. — aft ανιμ. ins ?</ 
 rec/o iiinere navigaremus Syr ar-erp. — κατά σαλμ. om {similarily of endings) 1^1 : 
 σαΧαμινα copt. — καταλίγομίΐ'οι C8 : παραγει^ο/ίίνοι 40 al. — nra om A 133 Syr ar-erp 
 
 The κατά την Άσίαν τόποι of ver. 2 being 
 to the west of Pamphylia (which was not in 
 Asia, ch. ii. 10), the direct course thither 
 ■would have been S. of Cyprus ,• but having 
 the wind contrary, i. e. from the W. or 
 N. W. (" the very wind which might have 
 been expected in this part of the Mediter- 
 ranean at this season (summer). Admiral 
 de Saumarez writes, Aug. 19, 1798, ' We 
 have just gained sight of Cyprus, so invari- 
 ably do the westerly winds prevail at this 
 season.' " Smith, p. 27), they kept under 
 shelter of Cyprus, i. e. between Cyprus and 
 Cilicia; and so ίιαπλίυ'σαιτις, 'having 
 sailed the whole length of the sea off 
 Cilicia and Pamphylia, they came to Myra. 
 See the account of the reverse voyage, ch. 
 xxi. 3, where, the wind being nearly in the 
 same quarter (see ver. 1, ίύ^^υΰρομήσαντίς 
 ί'ις τ. Κ(7ι), the direct course was taken, 
 and they left Cyprus at a distance (for so 
 avaip. seems to imply) on their left, in going 
 to Tyre. On the διαττ\ί{)(7αντίς, &c., it 
 may be well to quote (from Smith) the 
 testimony of M. de Pages, a French navi- 
 gator, who, on his voyage from Syria to 
 RIarseilles, informs us that after making 
 Cyprus, " the winds from the west, and 
 consequently contrary, which prevail in 
 these places during the summer, /orcein us 
 to run to the north. We made for the coast 
 of Caramania (Cilicia), in order to meet the 
 northerly winds, and which ice Jhund ac- 
 cordingly." 5. ΛΙΰρα] ίΐτα Μίφα tv 
 (ΐκοσι σταίίηις νπεο της θαΧάττης t~i 
 μίΤίώρου Χύψον, Strab. xiv. 3. — Λίιτλος• 
 ίτΓίπιμφθίΙς 'AvuptaKtj ΛΙυρέωΐ' ϊπηηίφ, 
 την τί αλυσιν ίρρηξι του λιμίνος, και ιίς 
 
 Μύρα aryti. The neighbourhood is full 
 of magnificent ruins ; see Sir C. Fellows's 
 Lycia, ch. ix. The name still remains. 
 The various readings merely shew that the 
 copyists were unacquainted with the place. 
 6.] The Alexandrian ship 7nay have 
 been laden with corn for Rome ; but this 
 cannot be inferred from ver. 38, for the 
 ship had been lightened before, ver. 18. — 
 On her size, see below, on ver. 37- — Most 
 probably this ship had been prevented 
 taking the direct course to Italy, which was 
 by the south of Crete, by the prevailing 
 westerly winds. Under such circumstances, 
 says Mr. Smith (p. 32), " ships, particularly 
 those of the ancients, unprovided with a 
 compass, and ill calculated to work to wind- 
 ward, would naturally stand to the N. till 
 they made the land of Asia Minor, which 
 is peculiarly favourable for such a mode of 
 navigation, because the coast is bold and 
 safe, and the elevation of the mountains 
 makes it visible at a great distance ; it 
 abounds in harbours, while the sinuosities 
 of its shores and the westerly current would 
 enable them, if the wind was at all off the 
 land, to work to windward, at least as far 
 as Cnidus, where these advantages ceased. 
 Myra lies due N. from Alexandria, and its 
 bay is well calculated to shelter a wind- 
 bound ship. The Alexandrian ship was 
 not, therefore, out of her course at Myra, 
 even if she had no call to touch there for 
 the purposes of commerce." -jrXeov, 
 
 the present, should be rendered ' on her 
 voyage.' 7. βραδυιτλ.] It is evident 
 
 that the ship was encountering an adverse 
 wind. The distance from Mvra to Cnidus
 
 5—9. 
 
 ΠΡΑ£:ΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 267 
 
 avTi]U TjAaojUEV εις τόπον τινη καΧονμίνον Κάλους bch. νϋί. u 
 Λιμίνας, ω fVYi'C V^' ττόΧις Αασαια. ικανού δί c ch. kxv. is. 
 
 '•"<■</' _ Mark xvi. 1 
 
 χρόνου "^ οίπγΕίΌ/ΐίνου και υντος i/orj εττισφαλους του a ('"rioniyt 
 ^ ττλοος otii TO και την νηστβίαν ηΒη ^ πσοίληλυθίΐΌ/, ec_h.xii. ' 
 
 onij- t. f = here only (2 Kings xii. 16). 
 
 Wisd. ix. 14. 
 eh. xxi. 
 7. Tcr. 10 
 Matt.xir. 15. 1 Pet. iv. 3. Dan. ii. 9. 
 
 slav mss. — λίγομη'ον 133. — πολις ην A 13. — for λασαια, αλασσα A 40. 96. 10!) syr- 
 marg (^Alasa) : Thalassa ν seth and some mentd by Jer Thessala latt : txt (with some 
 varr, Xaata Β 21 copt : Χασσαια al : λιηηια lect 12: λαπια ΊϋΟ) BGH most mss syrr 
 al Chr Thl Oec. — 9. του πλ. επισψ. 137 lect 12. — και cm 95*. — την cm 113. — 
 
 is only 130 geogr. miles, which, with a fair 
 wind, would not take more than one day. 
 Mr. Smith shews that the wind was Ν W., 
 or within a few points of it. " We learn 
 from the sailing directions for the Mediter- 
 ranean, that, throughout the whole of that 
 sea, but mostly in the eastern half, includ- 
 ing the Adriatic and Archipelago, N.W. 
 winds prevail in the summer months ; . . . 
 the summer Etesiae come from the N.W. 
 (p. 197) ; which agrees with Aristotle's ac- 
 count of these winds, — oi ίτησίαι Xtyo- 
 μεΐΌΐ μ'ιζ,ιν ϊχοντίς των τε ηττο της 
 άρκτου φιρομίνων κ. ζεφίφον, de Mundo, 
 ch. iv. According to Pliny (ii. 47), they 
 begin in August, and blow for forty days." 
 μόλις] 'with difSculty:' not as 
 E. v., ' scarce,' which being also an adv. 
 of time, gives the erroneous idea to the 
 English reader that the ship had scarce!;/ 
 reached Cnidus when the wind became un- 
 favourable. γ£ν. κατά] ' having• 
 come over against,' as E. V. Kvi- 
 δον] Cnidus is a ]ieninsula at the entrance 
 of the ^-Egean Sea, between the islands of 
 Cos and Rhodes, having a lofty promontory 
 and two harbours, Strabo, xiv. 2. " With 
 N.W. winds the ship could work up from 
 Myra to Cnidus ; because, until she reached 
 that point, she had the advantage of a wea- 
 ther shore, under the lee of which she would 
 have smooth water, and, as formerly men- 
 tioned, a westerly current ; but it would be 
 slowly and with difficulty. At Cnidus that 
 advantage ceased." Smith, p. 37• 
 μή τΓροςίώντ.] The common idea has been 
 that the prep, in composition implies that 
 the wind would not suffer them to put in at 
 Cnidus. But this would hardly be recon- 
 cileable with the fact ; for when off Cnidus 
 they would be in shelter under the high 
 land, and there would be no difficulty in 
 putting in. I should be rather inclined to 
 regard this clause as e.\plaining the μόλις 
 above, and the προς in composition as im- 
 plying contribution, or direction: 'with 
 difficulty, the wind not permitting us by 
 favi)uring our course.' tiireirX. τ. Κ p. 
 κ. Σαλμώνην] " Unless she had put into 
 that harbour (Cnidus), and waited for a fair 
 wind, her only course was to run under the 
 lee of Crete, in the direction of Salmone, 
 
 which is the eastern extremity of that 
 island. "-^Salmone (Capo Salomon) is de- 
 scribed by Strabo (x. 4) as οϊ,ν άκρωτήριον 
 το Σαμώνιοί', ίιτί την Α'ιγντττον vivov, 
 και τας 'Ροί/ωΐ' νήσους. Pliny (iv. 12) 
 calls it Sammonium. 8. μόλις ιταρ.] 
 
 " After passing this point (Salmone), the 
 difficulty they experienced in navigating to 
 the westward along the coasts of Asia, would 
 recur ; but as the south side of Crete is also 
 a weather shore with N.W. winds, they 
 would be able to work up as far as Cape 
 Matala. Here the land trends suddenly to 
 the N., and the advantages of a weather 
 shore cease, and their only resource was to 
 make for a harbour. Now Fair Havens is 
 the harbour nearest to Cape Matala, the 
 farthest point to which an ancient ship 
 could have attained with N.W-ly winds." 
 Smith, ib. ΤΓαραλ£γ. does not, as 
 
 Servius on ^n. iii. 127 supposes, imply that 
 the ship was toiced (" funem legendo, i. e. 
 coUigendo, asperaloca preetereunt"), but, as 
 Meyer explains it, that, the places on the 
 coast being touched (or perhaps, rather, aj)- 
 pearing) one after another, are, as it were, 
 gathered up by the navigators. — Mr. Smith 
 (p. 42) exposes the mistake of Eustathius 
 (adopted by Valpy, from Dr. Falconer), b}' 
 which the ship taking the S. coast of Crete 
 is attempted to be explained : viz. ουςλι- 
 μενκς ή Κρήτη προς την βήρραΐ' : whereas 
 there are, in fact, excellent harbours on the 
 N. side of Crete, — Souda and Spina Longa. 
 Καλούς Λιμ€νας] The situation of 
 this anchorage was ascertained by Pocorke, 
 from the fact of the name still remaining. 
 " In searching after Lebena farther to the 
 west, I found out a place which I thought 
 to be of greater consequence, because men- 
 tioned in Holy Scripture, and also honoured 
 by the presence of St. Paul, that is, " the 
 Fair Havens, near unto the city of Lasea ;" 
 for there is another small bay about two 
 leagues to the E. of Matala, which is now 
 called by the Greeks good or fair havens 
 {Χιμίονες καΧονς." Travels in the East, ii. 
 p. 250: cited by Mr. Smith, who adds: 
 " The most conclusive evidence that this is 
 the F. II. of Scripture, is, that its j)osi- 
 tion is precisely that where a ship circum- 
 stanced as St. Paul's was, must have i)ut in.
 
 268 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 k = ch. Γ. 26. η 
 
 XXV 
 
 1 Mace. ix. 
 37. 
 I =Ter.21 on 
 
 """MHre^vu.^ ^ iraprivei ο Παϋλος λίγων αυτυις Άνδ/οες, ^ Οίωρω abgh 
 "r-ff"^ ΟΤΙ μζτα νροίως και ποΛλης ί,ημιας ου μόνον του 
 
 ■23'a*Kfr. " φοξ)τιου κοι του πλοίου αΧΧα και των " φυγ^ων Ί)μων 
 ^ μ'ζ\\Ην ϊσεσθαι τον πλουν. ο δε iKaTOVTU^yj]Q τω 
 
 ϊόνΥ ρ ' 'ίυρερνϊ/τ)) και τω "^ ναυκ•λ7}ρω ^ έπε/θετο ^ιιαλλον rj τοις 
 
 ii/Spif. Jos. ΑηΙΙ. iii.C. 1, f 11(1. in ver. 21. Phil. iii. 7, S imly. Ezr. vii. 2(). η Mntt. xi. oO. 
 
 xxiii.4al. = here only. Sir. xsi. Ui. ο =ch. xr. 2(i rcfl. ρ cli. xi 28. xxiv. 15 (ΕΓΟίε.•!. 
 
 i. II, Symm.). q Rev. XTui. 17 only. Ezek. xxvii. 8, 27, 28. r here only f. s — ch. V. 
 30 Sic. reff. 
 
 10. ζ/>. πολλ.!)5. 177•— rcc0oprou, with some mss Till Oec: txt ABGH 13. 15. 18.40.57. 
 7;{. 80. 133-37-42-77 all Chr Ύ\\\\—νμων G^ lect 12.— 11. rec -ηρχος, with some mss Oec : 
 txt ABGH 42. 57. ϋδ-δ. 97-8. 105-2U 33-42-77 al lect 12 Chr Thl.— μαλλ. tnuO. AB 
 
 I have already shewn that the wind must 
 have been about N.W. ; — but with such a 
 wind she could not pass Ca])e Matala : we 
 must therefore look near, but to the E. of 
 this promontory, for an anchorage well cal- 
 culated to shelter a vessel in N.W. winds, 
 but not from all winds, otherwise it would 
 not have been, in the opinion of seamen (ver. 
 12), an unsafe winter harbour. Now here we 
 have a harbour which not only fulfils every 
 one of the conditions, but still retains the 
 name given to it by St. Luke." Smith, p. 
 45. He also gives an engraving of the place 
 from a sketch by Signr. Schranz, the artist 
 who accompanied Mr. Pashley in his tra- 
 vels. — There is no ground for identifying 
 this anchorage with KciXr) ακτή mentioned 
 as a city in Crete by Steph. Byzant. For 
 this is clearly not the name of a city, by 
 the subjoined notice, ψ tyyvg ην ή ττόλις 
 Ααίταία. — Nor is there any reason to sup- 
 pose, ■with Meyer, that the name καλοί 
 λιμ. was euphemistically given, — because 
 the harbour was not one to winter in : this 
 (see above) it may not have been, and yet 
 may have been an excellent refuge at par- 
 ticular times, as now, from prevailing west- 
 erly winds. Λασαία] This place was, 
 until recently, altogether unknown; and from 
 the variety of readings, the verynamewas un- 
 certain. Pliny (iv.l2) mentions JLrtoo* among 
 the cities of Crete, but does not indicate its 
 situation. It is singular, and tends to sup- 
 port the identity of Lasos with our Lasea, 
 that as here Alassa, so there Alos, is a 
 various reading. The reading Thalassa ap- 
 pears to have been an error of a transcriber 
 from -αλίΐΐσσ forming so considerable a 
 part of a word of such common occurrence. 
 — There is a Lisia named in Crete in the 
 Peutinger Table, which may be the same. 
 [On the very interesting discovery οι Lascea 
 by the Rev. G. Brown in the beginning of 
 this year (18.i6), see the excursus at the 
 end of Prolegg. to Acts. The ruins are 
 on the beach, about two hours eastward of 
 Fair Havens.] 9. Ικανοΰ χρ.] Not 
 since the beginning of our voyage,' as 
 Meyer : — the time was spent at the anchor- 
 age, τοΰ irXoos] Not ' sailing,' but 
 
 ' the voyage,' viz. to Rome, — which hence- 
 forth was given upas hopelessfor this autumn 
 and winter. That this is the meaning of 
 ύ πλους, see ch. xxi. 7• And by observing 
 this, we avoid a difficulty which has been 
 supposed to attend the words. Sailing 
 was not unsafe so early as this (see below) ; 
 but to undertake so long a voyage, was. 
 την νηστείαν] ' The fast,' κατ' ΐί,ο- 
 χήν, is the solemn fast of the day of expia- 
 tion, the 10th of Tisri, the seventh month 
 of the Jewish ecclesiastical year, and the 
 first of the civil year. See Levit. xvi. 2!) ff. ; 
 xxiii. 2G ff. This would be about the time 
 of the autumnal equinox. The sailing 
 seaso7i did not close so early : ' Ex die 
 igitur tertio iduum Novembris, usque in 
 diem sextum iduum Martiarum, maria 
 clauduntur.' Vegetius (Smith, p. 45, note) 
 de Re Milit. iv. 39. 10.] From the 
 
 use of θίωρώ here, and from the saying 
 itself, it seems clear to me that Paul was 
 not uttering at present any prophetic inti- 
 mation, but simply his own sound judg- 
 ment on the difficult question at issue. It 
 is otherwise at vv. 22 — 24. As Smith re- 
 marks, " The event justified St. Paul's 
 advice. At the same time it may be ob- 
 served, that a bay, open to nearly one half 
 the compass, could not have been a good 
 winter harbour." (p. 47•) μ€τα 
 
 ΰβρεως is interpreted by Meyer as sub- 
 jective — ' accojnpanied with presumption 
 071 our part :' but not to mention that this 
 would be a very unusual sense, ver. 21, 
 κιρΰήσαι την νβριν ταύτ. κ. τ. ζημίαν, is 
 decisive (De W.) against it. on . . . 
 
 μ€λλ€ΐν] A mixing of two constructions, 
 see Winer, § 45. 9. anm. 2. This is most 
 flagrant in later writers, as Pausanias and 
 Arian, — see Bernhardy, Syntax, p. 3(J!); but 
 is also found earlier, e. g. Plat. Charm., p. 
 I(i5 : οΰκ αν αίσχννθίΐην 'ότι μη ουχί 
 ό[)θώς φάναι (Ιρηκίναι. Isseus : τηρΊ τυϋ 
 ^iXoicr. κΧηρ. ρ. 57, ίπιιίή δί προι^ίιαμί- 
 μαρτίΐίΐηκίν ώς ν'ιον ύναι γΐ'λ/σιοΓ ΕιΊκτή- 
 /ίοΐ'ος• ταϊιτυν ... 11. τ. νανκλήρω] 
 
 ' the owner of the ship.' Wetst. cites 
 from Plutarch, ναύτας μίν ίκλίιεται κυ- 
 βίρνήτης, και κιφιρνήτην ναύκληηος.
 
 JO— 13. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 269 
 
 ίιπο τον Παύλου Χί-γομενοις. ^^ ^ ανευθίτον δε τον λ(- "!,ν|ι,"'^/• 
 μένος " υπάρχοντος προς " παρα-χ^Εΐμασιαν ^' υί πλε/οι^ίς »oh. i'i.'an rem 
 ^'' iOBVTO '' ρουλ7)ν *" αναγ^θηναι KUKtiOtv, ^ ι'ίπως ^ίιναιντο ^χ''^!'"' 
 
 ζ ., _ ' ' rK ' a ' Λ ' - νν 1 Cor i» ΙΟ 
 
 καταντησαντες εις ψοινικα τταραγειμασαι λιμένα της reii. 
 Κρήτης βλέποντα "" κατά '' λ/'βα και ''κατά '^ χώρον. ξ^^^ 
 υποπνευσαντος δε νότου δόζαντες της 
 
 \\ here only. 
 Λ. ν. 
 
 νότου 
 
 Rom. i. 10. xi. 14. Phil, i 
 I) = here iinly. Ezek. xi. 1 .il. 
 e here only t. 1 ch. xxviii. 13. Lnke xii. 55. Eecl. i. ti 
 
 xch.xiii.lSreir. 
 
 προ- y \v. opt., here 
 
 only. See 
 
 zch. xri. 1 reff. a rh. xxviii. 11. 1 Cor. xyi. β. Tit. iii. 1L> only t. 
 
 c-ee note. (ch. Tiii. 2(ί,3«. Pliil. iii. 14.) d here only. Gen. xiii. 14 al. 
 
 g = Eph. i. 11 reft•. 
 
 13. 3 1 al V al ThP : txt GH most mss syr seth al Chr Thl' Oec— του om AB : ins GH 
 mss (appy) Chr Thl Oec— 12. rec πλιωυν, with GH al Chr al : txt AB I7. 40. 73 (al?), 
 —ίκΗϋη' ABG 13. 36-8. 40. 73-G. !)3-Γι-'. 100-4-5-13-80 all lect 5. 12 ν Syr ar-erp arm 
 Chr {corrn, the force of the και not being perceived) : txt Η all syr Thl Oec. — for H -πως, 
 ίΐπίρ 9C. 142. — και κατ. χωρον cm Syr ar-erp. — 13. ίο^αντος 13. — της προθ. om 30. — 
 
 So Hesych. : νανκλ7]ρος, ο δισττήτης τ. 
 ττλοιον, — and Xen. QScon. viii. 12 : φορ- 
 τίων, οσίί νανκλήροις κίρδονς ενίκα uye- 
 ται. (Kuin.) 12.] See above on ver. 
 
 8. The anchorage was sheltered from the 
 N.W., but not from nearly half the com- 
 pass. Grotius and Heinsius's rendering of 
 προς τταιιαχίΐμ., ' ad vitandam tompesta- 
 tem,' is contrary to usage, besides being siu- 
 gularlj' inconsistent with the fact in more 
 ways than one. For this purpose the anchor- 
 age was ίνθίτος, and in it they had (see next 
 ver.) actually ridden out the storm, before 
 they left it. κάκίΐθίν] ' thence also,' 
 
 as from their former stopping places. 
 Φοίνικα] Ptolemy (iii. 17) calls the haven 
 Φυιΐ'ίΐοοΓις•, and the city (lying some way 
 inland) Φοίνιξ. Strabo (x. 4) says, ro ί^έ 
 fi'6'ti' ισθμός ίστιν ώς ίκατον σταδίων, 
 ίχων κατοικ'ιαΐ' ττρός μίν ry βοριίφ θα- 
 Xc'iTTy Άμφιμάλλαΐ', προς St ry νοτίψ 
 Λοινικη των λημπ'ιων. This description, 
 and the other data belonging to Phoenice, 
 Smith (p. 48) has shewn to fit the modern 
 Lvtro, which, though not known now as an 
 anchorage, probably from the silting up of 
 the harbour, is so marked in the French 
 admiralty chart of 1738, and " if then able 
 to shelter the smallest craft, must have 
 been capable of receiving the largest ships 
 seventeen centuines before." [See an in- 
 scription making it highly probable that 
 Alexandrian ships did winter atLutro, in the 
 excursus at the end of Prolegg. to Acts.] 
 βλί'τΓοντα κατά, λίβα κ. κατά, χώρον] 
 ' looking (literally) down the S.W. andN. W. 
 winds ;' i. e. in the direction of these winds, 
 viz. N.E. and S.E. ForXi»//, and χώρος are 
 tiot quarters of the compass, but winds; 
 and κατά, used with a wind, denotes the 
 direction of its blowing, — 'down the wind.' 
 Tills interpretation, which I was long ago 
 per.suaded was tlie right one, I find now 
 confirmed by the opinion of Mr. Smith, 
 who cites Herod, iv. 110, lijiipoi'vo κατά 
 κϊ'μα και άΐ'ίμον, and Arrian, Periplus 
 
 Euxini, p. 3, άφνω vfφt\ή ίπσναστάσα 
 t^tppayi] κατ' tvpov. So also κατά ρόον, 
 Herod ii. 90. And in Jos. Antt. xv. 9. G, 
 the coasts near Csesarea are said to be 
 δνςορμα διά τάς κατά λίβα προίβολάς. 
 See also Thucyd. vi. 104. In the reff., 
 the substantive is not one of motion like 
 λ/ψ, χώρος, or ρόος, but of fixed loca- 
 tion, as μίσημβρια σκόπυς. The direc- 
 tion then is towards the spot indicated, 
 just as in the present case it is in that 
 of the motion indicated. The harbour 
 of Lutro satisfies these conditions ; and 
 is even more decisively pointed out as 
 being the spot by a notice in the Synec- 
 demus of Hierocles, Φοινίκη ήτοι Άρά- 
 δ(να• νήσος Κλανδος. Now Mr. Pashley 
 found a village called Aradhena a short 
 distance above Lutro, and another close 
 by called Anopolis, of which Steph. Byz. 
 says, Άράδην πόλις Κρϊιτης• >/ δε Άνω- 
 πόλις \tytTai, διά το tli'ai (ΐι•ω. From 
 these data it is almost demonstrated that 
 the port of Phoenice is the present port 
 of Lutro. Ptolemy's longitude for port 
 Phoenice also agrees. See Smith, jtp. 51 IF. 
 Mr. Smith has kindly sent me the following 
 extract from a letter containing additional 
 confirmation of the view : ' Loutro is an ex- 
 cellent harbour ; you open it unexpectedly, 
 the rocks stand apart and the town appears 
 within. During the Greek war, when cruiz- 
 ing with Lord Cochrane chased a 
 
 pirate schooner, as they thought, right upon 
 the rocks ; suddenly he disappeared, and 
 when rounding in after him,• — like a change 
 of scenery, the little basin, its shipping, and 
 the town of Loutro, revealed themselves.' 
 See Prof. Ilackett's note, impugning the 
 above view and intoriiretation ; which how- 
 ever does not alter my o))inioii. [Since 
 the publication of my cdn. I, Mr. llow- 
 son has given liis opinion tjius : " The 
 difficulty is to be explained .simjily by 
 remembering tliat sailors speak of evc^y 
 thing from tlieir own point of \iew, and
 
 270 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 h-(Heb.Ti. θίσίως ^ Κ£Κξ>ατηκίναι, ' afiavreg ασσον παρίΧε-γοντο 
 
 18). κρ. τΓίί ^ ΙΓ ' 14 ' ' Λ Λ ?^ '" ''ii Λ ' 
 
 ■ίτρο», Diod. Tiji' ivpi/rrji'. ^ μίτ ου πολύ όί epaAev κατ 
 
 Sie. xri. 'JO. ί-,ι ii, ^' Λ' ιι' Λ'^ 
 
 i = lure only, αυτης αΐ'ίμος Γυφωΐ'ίκτος υ καλούμενος ευροκλυοων, 
 
 S ) Thucjil. ' ' 
 
 ii. a3al. k comparat., = cli. XXV. 10 rcQ'. 1 ver. 8. m = here only. See note; η here only t. 
 
 for uacTop, άσσορ G al : Asson ν copt seth (also Chr Thl Oec, but they do not notice it in 
 comm) : om syrr ar erp. — 14. ίορα/τυλων AB^ sah {ίχιρακηλων) copt: {ίντ()ακη\ων) ν 
 Cassiod (Euroacjuilo): (υρηκνκλωΐ' arm: aquilo maris (omg τνφ. ο κα\.) seth (see 
 notes) : t.xt Gil (but they have tup. not £(\o.) most mss Syr {Euroclydon) syr {Euraclydon, 
 
 ABGH 
 
 that the harbour (see chart in C. and 
 Π. ii. 302) does look — from the water 
 towards the land which encloses it — in 
 the direction of S.W. and N.W." But 
 I cannot believe, till exj)crience can be 
 shewn to confirm the idea, that even 
 sailors could speak of a harbour as ' look- 
 ing ' in the direction in which the;/ would 
 look when entering it.] 13. viroirve-u- 
 
 σαντος] as E. V., ' softly blowing,' comp. 
 νττυμαδιάω. The S. wind was favourable 
 for them in sailing from F. H. to Phoenice. 
 δόξ. τ. ιτροθ. κ€κρατ.] ' imagining 
 that they had (as good as) accomplished 
 their purpose;' i. e. that it would now 
 be a very easy matter to reach Phoenice. 
 apavT€S " may be translated either 
 ^ weighed,^ or ' set sail ;' for ancient authors 
 supply sometimes τάς ά•/κί<ρας, and some- 
 times rn ιστία .... Julius Pollux, how- 
 ever, like St. Luke, supplies neither, which 
 is certainly the most nautical way of e.x- 
 pressing it: he says, αΐροντίς άπο της 
 ync, lib. i. 103." Smith, p. 55. 
 ασσον wap.] They crept close along the 
 land till they passed Cape Matala. " A 
 ship which could not lie nearer to the wind 
 than seven points, would just weather that 
 point which bears W. by S. from the en- 
 trance of Fair Havens. We see therefore 
 the propriety of the expression ασσον παρ., 
 ' they sailed close by Crete,' which the 
 author uses to describe the first part of 
 their passage." Smith, p. 5fi. — The Vulg. 
 has : ' quum sustulissent de Asson,' con- 
 necting άραντίς with "Ασσον, and under- 
 standing the latter as the name of a Cretan 
 town. There is an Asus mentioned by 
 Pliny (iv. 12), but it is ' in Mediterraneo,' 
 not on the coast, — and the constr. would 
 be inadmissible. Erasmus, Luther, &c., 
 have taken Άσσον as the accusative of 
 direction, ' when they had weighed for 
 Assus.' But besides the local objection, 
 this constr. also would be most harsh, as 
 ά lavTtc does not indicate the progress of 
 their voyage, but only the setting out. 
 Heinsius took (Ίραντις =: άνηφαΐ'ίντις, 
 oh. xxi. 3, — ' postqu.am Asos attollere se 
 visa est ' (Meyer). But there can be little 
 doubt that all of these are mistakes, and 
 that άσσον is the adverb. 14. €βαλ€ν 
 
 κατ' αυτής] These difficult words have been 
 taken in tliree ways : (1) (The common in- 
 
 terpretation) referring αϋτης to τι))' Κρήτην 
 just mentioned. Thus they might mean, 
 (a) ' drove {us) against Crete,' or (β) 
 ' strtick {blew) against Crete,' i. e. in the 
 direction of Crete. Now of these, {a) is 
 contrary to the expressed fact: — they were 
 not driven against Crete. And (/3) is as 
 inconsistent with the implied fact. Had 
 the wind blown in the direction of Crete at 
 all, they, who gave themselves up to it, and 
 were driven before it {Ιττιϊΐόντίς ίφίρόμίΒα, 
 ver. 15), must have heew stranded on the 
 Cretan coast, which they were not. (2) 
 referring αίιτης to the ship, understood. 
 This is adopted by Dr. Bloomfield and Mr. 
 Smith. (The latter, I find by a letter re- 
 ceived since this note was written, now 
 understands it as I have explained it below.) 
 But not to mention the harshness occa- 
 sioned by having to supply a subject for 
 αυτής which has never yet been mentioned, 
 — a decisive objection against this rendering 
 is, that the ship throughout tlie narrative is 
 TO πλοΖον, not )/ νανς, in every place except 
 ver. 41, — and το πλ. occurs in the very 
 next clause, which, had this been meant of 
 the ship, would certainly have been ex- 
 pressed σνναρπασθίίσης δι, or συναρπα- 
 σθίίσης c't avTijg. (3) referring αυτής to 
 προθίσιως. In that case e^iaXtv κατ' αυτής 
 must either (a) =i κατεβαλιν ήμας άπ' 
 αυτής, as Plato, Euthyph. 15, e, απ i\- 
 πίδος μ( κηταβαΧών μίγά\7]ς άττΕοχ'ίι, 
 which is harsh, and hardly allowable ; or (/3) 
 be understood, taking the neuter sense of 
 βάλλω {ποταμός ί/ς «λα βάλλων, II. xi. 
 722), as meaning ' blew against it,' so as 
 to thwart their design. And so Luther ; 
 
 ' evt)ob ftd) wibev it)i• ffiornt'iimcn.' But 
 
 this mixture of literal and figurative is also 
 harsh, and hardly allowable. (4) A method 
 has occurred to me of rendering the words, 
 which seems to remove all harshness, whe- 
 ther of reference in αυτής, or of construc- 
 tion. There can be no question that the 
 obvious reference of αυτής is to Crete. 
 What then is €βαλεν κατ' αυτής? ϊβαλίν 
 applied to wind may be understood as 
 above, neuter, or reflective, 'blew,' 'rushed.' 
 Assuming this, and that there is no object 
 to be supplied between ιβαλίν and the pre- 
 position, κατ' αυτής may surely be ren- 
 dered, as in βή £k κατ Οϋλύμποιο καρή- 
 νων, — κατ' Ίϋαίων ορίων, — κατά πίτρης,
 
 14—16. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 271 
 
 ^^ ° συναξ)πασθίντος δε τον ttXo'iov και μη ^υναμίνυυ ^ αντ- ρ he'ieonfyt*^' 
 οφθαλμίΐν τω ανεμω '^ επιδόντες ^ εφερομεθα. ^ νησιον q 
 
 1. χϋ. 14. 
 -re o;,:y. 
 h.xv.SU. 
 r — (naut ) Diod. Sic. xx. 10. s here only t. 
 
 and in marg ευρακλυδυν) Chr Thl Oec : ευρνκλυίων B^. 40. 133. — 15. ιτηίιδοντίς 32. 42. 
 57: add τω ττΧΐοντι κ. σι/σπιλαντις τα ιστία 137: τη πνίονση κ. σνναγοντις το 
 σκίνος, ως ιψίξΐίν, ίφίοομίθα syr* : for (φερομ., ως t<ptpiv ar-erp. — 16. νησίδων 177 
 
 &C., viz. ' down (from) Crete,' ' dorvn the 
 high lands forming the coast.' It is a 
 common expression in lake and coasting 
 navigation, that ' a gust came down the 
 valleys.' And this would be e.xactly the 
 direction of the wind in question. When 
 they had doubled, or perha])S were now 
 doubling. Cape Matala, the wind suddenly 
 changed, and the typhoon came down ιψοη 
 them from the high lands-, — at first, as 
 long as they were sheltered, only by tits 
 down the gullies, but as soon as they were 
 in tlie open bay past the cape, with its full 
 violence. This, the hurricane rushing down 
 the high lands when first observed, and 
 afterwards συΐ'αρττάζωΐ' το πλοΐοΐ', seems 
 to me exactly to describe their changed 
 circumstances in passing the cape. A con- 
 firmation of this interp. may be found by 
 Luke himself using κατίβη to express the 
 descending of a squall from the hills on the 
 lake of Gennesareth, ch. viii. 23, where 
 Matt, and Mark have only lyiveTo and yive- 
 ται. Mr. Smith also suggests κατά τυϋ κοη- 
 μνοϋ, Luke viii. 33, as confirmatory. [The 
 above is also INIr. Howson's view. See, in the 
 excursus appended to the Prolegg. to Acts, 
 the confirmation of this view in what ac- 
 tually happened to the Rev. G. Brown's 
 party. Aug. 1856.] τνφωνικος] " The 
 
 sudden change from a south wind to a vio- 
 lent northerly wind, is a common occurrence 
 in these seas. (Captain J. Stewart, R.N., in 
 his remarks on the Archipelago, observes, 
 " It is always safe to anchor under the lee 
 of an island with a northerly wind, as it dies 
 gradually away ; but it would be extremely 
 dangerous with southerly winds, as they 
 almost invariably shift to a violent north- 
 erly wind") The term ' typhonic ' indi- 
 cates that it was accompanied by some of 
 the phenomena which might be expected in 
 such a case, viz. the agitation and whirling 
 motion of the clouds caused by the meeting 
 of the opposite currents of air when the 
 change took j)lace, and probably also of the 
 sea, raising it in columns of spray. Pliny 
 (ii. 4ii), speaking of 'repentini flatus,' says, 
 ' vorticem faciunt qui Typhon vocatur :' 
 Aul. Gell. xix. 1, 'Turbines etiam cre- 
 briorcs . . . et figur* (pitedani nubium tre- 
 menda; qiias τυψωνας vocabarit.' " Smith, 
 p. 00. εϋροκλύδων] I have hero 
 
 retained the rec. reading, being determined, 
 in the great uncertainly of MSS., by in- 
 ternal probability. εΰροκλΰδων is an 
 
 anomalous word, having no assignable de- 
 rivation : if formed from ίϋρνς and κλύδων, 
 it should be, as corrected in B^, ίΰ^ιυκλίί- 
 δων : if from ίύρος and κλνδων, it would 
 be, as Meyer observes, the appellation, not 
 of the wind, but of the wave raised by it, 
 ' fluctus Euro excitatus.' I have little 
 doubt that the wawe of the wind w-as ίύ- 
 ρακΰλων, as we now read in AB ; but this, 
 as is frequently the case, had been cor- 
 rupted, as the last part of it was not Greek, 
 but Latin, by the Greek sailors, into ιίφα- 
 κλι'ιδων or ηφοκλνδων, the α and ο in this 
 position having a very similar sound : and 
 in that form I conceive Luke to have w ritten 
 it. Mr. Smith, in his appendix, ' On the 
 Wind Euroclydon,' has satisfactorily an- 
 swered the objections of Bryant to the com- 
 pound ίύρακύλω!', — by shewing that fii- 
 (ΐος properly, was not the S.E., but the E. 
 wind ; and that compounds of Greek and 
 Latin in the names of winds are not un- 
 known, e.g. Euro-Auster. — The direction 
 of the wind is estabhshed by Mr. S., from 
 what follows, to have been about half a 
 degree N. of E.N.E. ; and the subsequent 
 narrative shews that the wind continued to 
 blow from this point till they reached 
 Malta. 15. συναρττ.] ' being hurried 
 
 away,' ' borne along,' by it : see retf. 
 άντοφθαλμίίν] It is hardly likely that this 
 term, wliich is used so naturally and con- 
 stantly of men facing an enemy (Polyb. i. 
 17. 3, and eight times more), and also meta- 
 phorically of resisting temptation (μι) δύ- 
 νασθίΐι τοΊς χοήμασιν άντοφθαλμεϊν, 
 Polyb. xxviii. Ι7. 1»), should have been 
 originally a naval term, derived from 
 the practice of painting eyes on either 
 side of the beaks of ships. More i)robably 
 the expression was transferred to a ship 
 from its usage in common life. 
 e-iriSovTCs] So Plutarch de Fortun. Rom. 
 p. 3iy, D (Wetst.), ίττιδίδον ry τνχ^ ra 
 ιστία, και δεχον το ττΐ'εϋμα, τψ πνέυνη 
 ■πιστεΰων. Either ^ the ship,' or 'our- 
 selves,' may be sujiplied : or better perhaps, 
 neither, but the word taken generally— 
 ' giving up.' ίφερομίθα] passive : 
 
 ' we were driven along.' 16. νπο- 
 
 δραμοντ€ς] ' running under the lee of.' 
 " St. Luke exiiibits here as on every other 
 occasion, the most perfect command of 
 nautical terms, and gives the utmost pre- 
 cision to his language by selecting the most 
 ai)propriate :— they ran before the wind to
 
 272 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 t = Matt. viii. 
 
 28 Hi. Isa. 
 
 1. 2. 
 u ch. xiv. IS 
 
 reff. 
 V here only t 
 w Heb. 
 
 only. P.s. 
 
 vii. 10 Hi. 
 
 Sir. xl. 24. 
 
 I(! 
 
 δε τι ^ υποόραμοντίς κα\ουμζνον Κ.Χαυόην , ισ"^υσαμίν 
 " /ΐίολις ^ ΤΓίρικρατίΐς γενέσθαι της σκάφης, ' ην άπαντες c -φη? 
 ''" βυηθί'ιαις ΕΛι^ρωντο, ^ υπυ^,ωννυντες το πλοιοί', ψο]3ου- 
 
 ■χαΛασαιτες τυ 
 
 μενοι τε /tij ίΐς την 
 
 χ h 
 
 συρτιν εκττεηωσιν 
 
 only t. Polyb. χχτϋ. 3. 3. Plat. Rep. χ. Rlfi. 3, eiuai γάρ τούτο τό φ!ό( σΰνδασμον 
 τυϋ οΰρ<ιι/οΓ', oiui/ τά ίιπο^ώμιιτα τ. τριιΐΓ""ΐ', υίίτω πΰσι•ι/ fi/iexoi' τί;ν ■περιψαράν. See Tlmcyd. i. 2it. 
 y here only +. ζ =~ ver. 21! only. Diod. Sic. ii. fill, iK-neatlv eic ΰμμονι, and al. a ch. ix. 25 relT. 
 
 Scholz (117 Bornera). — υποδραμοννης 93-5. — καλονμίνην om 2G. 33-0. 180 lect 12. 
 - — κανΰη Β ν ieth Syr {Kyra or Keuda) Jer {Candeu) Cassiod {Gaudetn) (κανδώ Suidas 
 (al γαΐΗ^ος) Gaudos Mela and Plin) : txt A(the letters υΰην are gone at the end of a 
 liu(')Gll most ni.ss (with some varr) : κλαυδιν 29 lect 2 : κλαυδαν 25 lect 12 : κλαυδα 
 13. 4(•. fiO-marg 105-37 syr and syr-marg-gr copt Chr Thl Oec {κλανδυς Hierocl and 
 Ptolem) (see notes). — rec μο\. ισχ. {coi-rn of order ?), with GH al vss ff : txt AB 13. 40 
 {μο-^ις) V. — 17. βοηθηας Η 96 lect 12 (' not C,' so Tisch. He has printed it so in his 
 Codex Eplir, but corrected it. Ν Τ Prolegg, p. Ixix). — υποζωννυνης 43. 95-C : υττο- 
 στρωννννης A^— μήπως 25. 137 al Oec.— συρΓ>;ν GH 25-7-9. 36. 42. 57. 68-9. 177-80 
 lect 12 syr-marg-gr Thl: συρταν 105. — for ro σκίνος, τα ιστία 32-marg 37- 56.66- 
 
 leeward of Clanda, hence it is νττοδρημόν- 
 τ(ς : they sailed with a side wind to leeward 
 of Ci/prus and Crete : hence it is νιτεπλιν- 
 σίΐμεν" (Smith, p. 61, note). Κλαΰδην] 
 
 Here again, there can be little doubt that 
 the name of the island was Καϋοα, or 
 Ταϋδα, as we have in some MSS., or, as in 
 Pliny and Mela, Gaudos : but Ptol. (iii. 7) 
 has Κλαΐίίος-, and the corruption was very 
 obvious. Of alterations, Κλαυί- into Καυδ- 
 is much the more probable, seeing the latter 
 was the name most commonly occurring. 
 — The island is the modern Gozzo. 
 Ιοτχυσαμ. μόλ. K.r.X.] " Upon reaching 
 Clauda, they availed themselves of the 
 smooth water under its lee, to prepare the 
 ship to resist the fury of the storm. Their 
 first care was to secure the boat by hoisting 
 it on board. This had not been done at 
 first, because the weather was moderate, 
 and the distance they had to go, short. 
 Under such circumstances, it is not usual to 
 hoist boats on board, but it had now be- 
 come necessary. In running down upon 
 Clauda, it could not be done, on account of 
 the ship's way through the water. To 
 enable them to do it, the ship must have 
 been rounded to, with her head to the wind, 
 and her sails, if she had any set at the time, 
 trimmed, so that she had no head-way, or 
 progressive movement. In this position 
 she would drift, broadside to leeward. I 
 conclude they passed round the east end of 
 the island : not only because it was nearest, 
 but because ' an extensive reef with numer- 
 ous rocks extends from Gozzo to the N.W., 
 which renders the passage between the two 
 isles very dangerous ' (Sailing Directions, 
 p. 207). In this case the ship would be 
 brought to on the starboard tack, i. e. with 
 
 the right side to windward." "St. 
 
 Luke tells us they had much difficulty in 
 securing the boat. He does not say «o/iy; 
 but independently of the gale which was 
 raging at the time, the boat had been towed 
 
 AUC 
 GH 
 
 between twenty and thirty miles after the 
 gale had sprung up, and could scarcely fail 
 to be filled with water." Smith, pp. 64, 65. 
 
 17.] apavTis, ' having taken on 
 board.' βοηθείαις] ' measures to 
 
 strengthen the ship,' strained and weak- 
 ened by labouring in the gale. Pliny (ii. 
 48) calls the typhoon ' prsecipua navigan- 
 tium pestis, non antennas modo, verum ipsa 
 navigia contorta frangens.' Grot., Hein- 
 sius, &c. are clearly wrong in interpreting 
 βοηθίί., ' the help of the passengers.' 
 
 ίπΓοζωννυντβς τ. ιτλ.] ' undergird- 
 ing,' or frapping the ship. " To frap a 
 ship (ceintrer un vaissean) is to pass four or 
 five turns of a large cable-laid rope round 
 the hull or frame of a ship, to support her 
 in a great storm, or otherwise, when it is 
 apprehended that she is not strong enough 
 to resist the violent efforts of the sea : this 
 expedient, however, is rarely put in prac- 
 tice." Falconer's Marine Diet. : — Smith, 
 p. 00, who brings several instances of the 
 practice, in our own times. [See additional 
 ones in C. and H. ii. 337.] Hor. seems to 
 allude to it, Od. i. 14. 3, ' ac sine funibus Vix 
 durare carinse Possint imperiosius ^Equor.' 
 See reff. την (τυ'ρτιν] ' The 
 
 Syrtis,' on the African coast; there were 
 two, the greater and the lesser (αϊ φυβίραι 
 και τοΤς άκοίιονσι Έ,νρτίΐς, Jos. Β. J. ϋ. 
 16. 4), of which the former was the nearer 
 to them. €κτΓ€σωσιν] See reff. and 
 
 add φιρόμενοι τψ ττνίύμητι .... ΐ'έ,ίπι- 
 πτον ΤΓρος τάς πίτρας, Herod, viii. 13. 
 
 χαλ. τ. aKciios] " It is not easy to 
 imagine a more erroneous translation than 
 that of our authorized version : ' Fearing 
 lest they should fall into the quicksands, 
 they strake sail, and so were driven.' It is 
 in fact, equivalent to saying that, fearing a 
 certain danger, they deprived themselves of 
 the only possible means of avoiding it." 
 Smith, p. 67• He goes on to exi)lain, that 
 if they had struck sail, they must have been
 
 17—21 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 273 
 
 σκίΰυς ούτως "^ εφεροντο. '^ σφο^ρως δε -χειμαΖ,ομενων ^ '^^'^^'^^'^y- 
 
 ιίμων Tij fs^JC εκροΑιιν εποιονντο, ' και ry ^ τρίτη (jonahi.f).) 
 
 αυτογ^ειρες tijv σκευην τον πλοίου έρριψαν μήτε ^^'^"'"■^■' 
 
 '^^ ' \ ' ' " ι ' J ' ηι ' < Λ ' ' ' xiii 13 
 
 οε ηΛιου μ^]τε άστρων επιφαινοντων επι πλείονας "ημε- dneieoniy. 
 ρας, -χειμώνας τε ουκ oAiyov ' επικείμενου, ^ λοιπόν ^^.',"\^^,; j 
 
 '^ περίΊ^ρειτο ελπις πάσα ^ του σω^εσθαι ημάς. ^ ττολλ/ϊς f iferJoIJy""'^' 
 
 t'' u» / 'ν fl^'n-\ ' ί°','"'' '• ί'• 
 
 τε ασιτίας υπαργονσης, τότε σταοεις ο ΙΙαυΛος 8vgLukexiii. 
 
 i. 23. h here only t• i here only. aKevtjv εκατόν τριι'/ρεσι, Diod. Sic. siv. 7!). pUir., Joiwh i. 5. 
 
 k = vpr. 29. Luke xvii. 2 al. Gen. xxi. I'l. 1 = Luke i. 79. Tit. ii. 11 reff. m ch. xiii. 31 rrff. 
 
 η = Matt. xvi. 2. Jobxxxvij.fi. ο ch. xii. 18 al6. Acts only. I.sa. x. 1. ρ = hrre only. (Luke 
 
 T.l. 1 Cor. ix. 16. Heb. 1x1(1.) Jobxix.3. q = v; Tim. iv. 8. r = Hcb. x. 11. Zech.xll. 
 
 .s cnnslr.. Lake xxii. fi. 1 Cor. ix. 10. t here only t- (1 Macc.iii. 17.) u cli ii. 30 reS'. 
 
 V cb. xi. 13 reft'. Luke only. 
 
 marg Chr : το ιστών 98-marg Syr al : antennas Bed. — (ψερομίθα 15. 18. 20. 36 Syr ar- 
 erp copt al. — 18. rf A 25 k al : txt B(e sil)CGH most mss (appy) ν copt Syr al Chr 
 Thl Oec. — 19. aft τρίτη add ημιρα lect 12. — αντοχκρως 13. — rec ερριφιψίν {corrti to 
 first person to suit αυτοχαρις : so Meyer, which is much more probable than that, as 
 De W., -αμεν should have been altered to -av, to suit εποιονντο : see note), with GH 
 most mss syrr copt seth al Chr Thl Oec : txt ΑΒ2(ίρ«ψίΐν W)C 5. 8. 13. 15. 18. 27- 36. 
 40. 66--8. 73. 96. 105-80 lect 12 k v: add εις την θάλασσαν syr' tol demid latt. — 
 τΓλειονς Q6. 109-77• — X"A*• ^£ 15. 180. — 20. ουχολιγ. A: ττολλου 35. — λοιπόν om Β. 
 — rec ττασ. ελπ., with CG(7raa. η ελπ-. G 9G)H al vss ff : txt AB 13. 81 al k ν copt. — 
 21. rec δε [altern of characteristic τε), with GH al copt syr Chr al ; txt ABC 36. 40. 
 81. 105-37 al k V Syr seth al Thl-.— ασιτίΐας GH al.— rort om A 21. — εμμεσω A. — for 
 
 driven directly towards the Syrtis. They 
 therefore set what sail the violence of the 
 gale would permit them to carry, turning 
 the ship's head off shore, she having already 
 been brought to on the starboard tack 
 (right side to the wind). The adoption of 
 this course would enable them to run before 
 the gale, and yet keep wide of the African 
 coast, which we know they did. But what 
 is χαλ. τ. σκεϋος ? It is interpreted by 
 Meyer, De W., and most comm., of striking 
 sail (as E. V.) : but this (see above) could 
 not be : " In a storm with a contrary wind 
 or on a lee-shore, a ship is obliged to lie-to 
 under a very low sail : some sail is abso- 
 lutely necessary to keep the ship steady, 
 otherwise she would pitch about like a 
 cork, and roll so deep as to strain and 
 work herself to pieces." Encycl. Brit. art. 
 ' Seamanship :' Smith, p. 72, wlio interprets 
 the words, ' lowering the gear,' i. e. send- 
 ing down upon deck the gear connected 
 with the fair-weather sails, such as the 
 suppara, or topsails. A modern ship sends 
 down top-gallant masts and yards, a cutter 
 strikes her topmast, when preparing for a 
 gale. In this case it was perhaps the heavy 
 yard which the ancient ships carried, with 
 the sail attached to it, [and the heavy ropes, 
 wliich would by their top-weight produce 
 uneasiness of motion as well as resistant» to 
 the wind. See a letter addresseil to Mr. 
 Smith by Capt. Spratt, il.N., tjuoted in C. 
 and H., ii. p. 338 note.] οίίτως] i.e. 
 
 " not oidy with the ship undergirded, and 
 made snug, but willi storm-sails .«et, and 
 Vol. Π. 
 
 on the starboard tack, which was the only 
 course by which she could avoid falling into 
 the Syrtis." Smith, ib. 18. βκβολ. 
 
 eiroi.] "The technical terms for taking 
 cargo out of a ship, given by Julius Pollux, 
 are, εκθέσθαι, άποψορτίσασθαι, κονφίσαι 
 την ναϋΐ', έπελάφρνί'αι, εκβολήν ττοι- 
 ησασθαι των φορτίων. So that both here, 
 and afterwards in ver. 38 {ίκ'ΐΰφιζον τ. 
 πλοΐον), St. Luke uses approjiriate techni- 
 cal phrases." Smith, ib. — OJ' ivhat the 
 freight consisted, we have no intimation. 
 Perhaps not of tcheat, on account of the 
 separate statement of ver. 38. See ref. 
 19. T. σκ€Χ)ήντ. ττλ. €pp.] y) σκενή is 
 the fnrnHure of the ship — beds, movLvables 
 of all kinds, cooking utensils, and the spare 
 rigging. airtixeipes is used with tppi- 
 
 ipav as shewing the urgency of tlie danger 
 — when the seamen would with their own 
 hands, cast away what otherwise was need- 
 ful to the ship and themselves. This not 
 being seen, αϋτόχ. has been supposeil to 
 imply the _;?rs< /person, and ΐρρίψ«/ί{ν has 
 crept in : see var. readd. 20.] The 
 
 sun and stars were the only guides of the 
 antuents when cut t>f sight of land. The 
 expression, ' all hope was taken away,' 
 seems, as Mr. Smith has noticed, to betoken 
 that a greater evil than tlio mere ft)rce of 
 the storm (whif;h perha})S had some little 
 abated: — χ. ουκ ολίγου seems to ΙηηιΙν 
 that it still indeed rag(>d, but not as before) 
 was afflicting them, vi/., the leaky state of 
 the ship, which increased upon them, as ia 
 shewn by their successive lightcnings of
 
 274 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 reft'. 
 y — here only, 
 TO μιαιΌη- 
 
 ΤΓίΐϋαργησαντας 
 Κίοόησαί τε την 
 
 ττ α ξ} αινώ 
 εσται et, 
 
 well. ν. 29, 32. μέσω αυτωι> ππεν ESft μίν, ώ ανΒξ)ες, 
 xxxiii. -η'"^' ί""^ i^'*i ^ uvayiaOai απο της Κρήτης, ^ 
 
 νρξ)ΐν ταυτην και την C^μιav. και τανυν 
 
 νμας '^ ευθυμειν' αττοβοΧη γαρ ^ φνγης ουδεμία 
 υμών πλην του πλοίου. παρέστη γορ μοι ταυτ^ tyj 
 
 νυκτι του θεοΰ ου ειμί ω και λατρεύω άγγελος, 
 λέγων, Μη ^οβοϋ, Παΰλε' Κα/σα|θί σε δει ''' παρα~ 
 στηναι, και ιοου ' κεγάριστα'ι σοι ο Θεός πάντας τους 
 πλίοντας μετά σου. ^ διο *^ ευΟυμειτε, άΐ'δρες' πιστεύω 
 γαρ τω θεω ort ούτως 'εσται ^ καθ ον τρόπον Χε\ά\ηται 
 
 ARC 
 GH 
 
 Xeipur 
 
 Kep&aiieiv, 
 
 Jos. Aiitt. 
 
 ii. 3. 2. 
 ζ ver. 10. 
 ach. iv. L'Ureff. 
 
 Acts only. 
 I) ver. !) reti 
 c Jiiines V. 13 
 
 only +. 
 d Kom. xi. 15 
 
 onlyt. 
 e = ch.xv. 2fi 
 
 reff. 
 f Matt.iv. lOal. 
 
 Exod. ill. 12. 
 Β = Rom. xiv. 
 
 HI. Dan. 
 
 vii. II). 
 h = uh. iii. 14. 
 1 yer. 33. Gen. 
 
 μο(. 
 
 1 
 
 26 
 
 δε 
 
 " k 
 
 27 Ώς δέ 
 
 εις νησον όε τίνα όει ημάς " εκπεσειν. "' \1ς όε 
 οίκατη νυζ εγενετο '" ^ιαφερομενων ημών εν 
 
 XV. 11 only. See Matt, xxiii. 37. 
 
 ■ ver. 17. 
 
 τεσσαρεςκαΐί 
 
 1 Cor. ii. 12. i el 
 
 xiv. ."). m c'h. xiii. 49. 
 
 αντων, ημών 137• — avayaytadai Η. — της om Η. — for κερδησαι τε, Κ(ρδησαντες 73. — 
 
 22. ίυθκηιΐ' 13: ενθυϋρομίΐν 43.—ουδψιας (or ovSt μιας) 15. 18. 27-9- 36. GG'. 105 
 
 al k ν SjT. — 23. for παρ., ωφθη Syr ar-erp arm. — rec τη v. ταυ., with some mss syr Oec : 
 
 t.xt ABCGH 1. 13. 40. 69. 80. 113-33-7-77-80 al ν arm Cbr Thl' (ThP cm ταυτ.).— 
 
 ίΐμ. εγω AC^ 31. 40 lect 12 ν copt seth arm (transp al) : t.xt BC'GH most mss (και om 
 
 18. 180 : oil καί om 24 : £γω only 36) syrr k al Chr Thl Oec : λατρ. εγω 73. — rec αγγ. 
 
 τ. θ. {corrn of order), with GH al: t.xt ABC 31. 40. 68. 105-37-80.— 24. Ιει σε 13.— 
 
 25. τω θεω om 40: add meo demid. — 26. ημάς δει Β: νμας lect 12.-27. επεγείΊτο A 
 
 68 ν {supervenit) : txt B(e sil)CGH al. — ημών om 13 : υμών lect 12. — ανδρια 180 and 
 
 her. 21. ασιτίας] " What caused the enough. So Rev. xxi. 27, ov μη (ίςέλθγ . . . 
 
 abstinence? A slii]) with nearly 300 people παν κοινον κ. παν βδίλυγμα ... . ft μ>) οΐ 
 
 on board, on a voyage of some length, must 
 have had more than a fortnight's provi- 
 sions (and see ver. 38) : and it is not enough 
 1o say with Kuinoel, ' Continui labores et 
 metus a periculis effecerant ut de cibo cu- 
 piendo non cogitarent.' ' Much abstinence ' 
 is one of the most frequent concomitants of 
 heavy gales. The impossibility of cooking, 
 or the destruction of provisions from leak- 
 age, are the principal causes which produce 
 it." Smith, p. 75 ; who quotes instances. 
 But doubtless anxiety and mental distress 
 had a considerable share in it. τότ£ brings 
 vividly before us the consequence of the 
 ασιτία — when they were in that condition, 
 languid and exhausted with fasting and fears. 
 κίρδήσαι] ' lucrifecisse,' ' to have 
 gained,' not = to have incurred, — but 'to 
 have turned to your own account,' i. e., 
 ' to have spared or avoided.' So Jos. in ref. 
 Aristotle, Eth. Magn. ii. 8, ψ κατά \oyov 
 ζημίαν ην λαβε'ιν, τον τοιούτον κ•(ρ5ά- 
 ναιτα turnxi/^n/jij'Cifheescapeit'). Plin. 
 vii. 40, ' quam quidem injuriam lucrifecit 
 ille.' Cicero, Verr. i. 12, ' lucretur indicia ve- 
 teris infamiae ' (' may have them wiped out,' 
 and so make eain of them by getting rid of 
 them). υβριν] Seeonver. 10. ["The 
 
 νβριν was to their persons, the ζημίαν to 
 their property." C. and H.] 22.] The 
 
 neglect of precision in αποβολή ψυχΓ/ς ου- 
 δεμία .... πλην Γοΰ πλοίου is common 
 
 γεγραμμενυι iv τψ β. τ. ζωής. See Winer, 
 § 65. 7• 23.] Paul characterizes him- 
 
 self as dedicated to and the servant of God, 
 to give solemnity to and bespeak credit for 
 his announcement. At such a time, the 
 servants of God are highly esteemed. 
 24. κεχόρισται] " Etiam centurio, subser- 
 viens providentiae divinse, Paulo condonavit 
 
 captivos, ver. 43 Non erat tam peri- 
 
 culoso alioqui tempore periculum, ne vide- 
 retur Paulus, quae necessario dicebat, gloriose 
 dicere." Bengel. μετά σοΰ] " Paulus, 
 
 in conspectu Dei, princeps navis, et consiliis 
 gubernator." ib. 26. Set] Spolcen 
 
 prophetically, as also ver. 31 : not perhaps 
 from actual revelation imparted in the 
 vision, but by a power imparted to Paul 
 himself of penetrating the future at this 
 crisis, and announcing the Divine counsel. 
 —Mr. Humphry compares and contrasts 
 the speech of Caesar to the pilot under 
 similar circumstances : τόλμα κ. δέδιθι 
 μηθεν, άλλα έττιδιδου tij τύχη τά 'ιστία 
 και δ'εχου το πνεύμα, τψ πνίοντι πισ- 
 τεύων, 'ότι Καίσαρα φέρεις και τήν Καί- 
 σαρος τΰχην, Plut. de Fortun. Rom. p. 
 518. 27. διαφίρ.] 'driven about,' 
 
 or ' up and down,' as E. V. [not ' di-ifting 
 through,' as Dr. Bloomf., tliough this may 
 have been the fact ; see exx. below.] Plu- 
 tarch speaking of the tumult during which 
 Galba was murdered, του φορείου καθάπερ
 
 !2— 29. 
 
 πρα£:εις αποςτολωχ. 
 
 275 
 
 Άδί 
 
 τω Ά6ξ)ΐα. 
 ρ 
 
 ναυτηι „=ch.xvi.25. 
 
 r r Heb. χ. 9. 
 
 ισαΐ'ΓΕς tvonv «λ. xin. ;>,-> 
 
 κότα μίσον της νυκτός υττίνοουν οι 
 
 προςαγείΐ' τίνα αυτοις ^^ωραν, και ^ jDoAic 
 ^ opyviag ύκοσι, ^ βοα^υ δε ^ ^ιαστησαντίς και ττάλιν °"i7.";"3u'' 
 
 ροΛίσαντίς evpov ooyviaq οίκαπ^ντε, φορου^ιείΌί ρ =iierenniy. 
 Tf μη τΓου ^ κατά Tpay^iig τοττονς ίκττίσωμεν, εκ ^"^ πρΰ/υΐ'ί)ς Ϊιι'^η'κ'ιγ."'' 
 ^ ριφαντζς ^ αγκτυρας τίσσαρας ηνγοντο ^ ημίραν ^ "γξνεσθαι. r - ch. "six. iy. 
 
 t = Lnkessii. 58. eh• v. 34. (2 Kings svi. 1.) η Luke xxii. fii). xxir. 37 only. tr.. Isa.lix. 2. 
 
 τ ver 7 reft'. wver. 41. Mark iv. o8 only t• χ ver. lu. y ντ. 3U, 40. Heb. vi. 19 oulvt 
 
 zch.xii. ISreff. ' 
 
 complut. — TO μισόν 05'. — for inrev., tXiyov sail. — for —ροςαγίΐν, ττοοςανίχειΐ' Β : προς- 
 tyyiZtiv 137 : irpoQciyaytiv 40 : ajjparere sibi aliq. reg. \ : txt ACGH al {quod αρμνο- 
 pinquarent ad ierrani syrr copt sah al) Chr Thl• Oec. — αυτοις τίνα ^3 : οντ. cm sab. — 
 28. βωλισαντις 95. — οργυας (twice) Β 13 (once Η). — διαστησ. cm sah: διασταντις 
 140: διατίΐΐ'αντες 106. — κ. παλ. βολ. om 24. 67 : τταλιν μηναντίς ίβη\ισαν sah. — 
 ινρομίν (2ad time) C. — 29. for rf, it C 13 lect 12 ν copt syr Thl' (cm al). — rec μηττως 
 {corrn to simpler word), with GH al copt Chr al : μηττω A : μΐ] 3. !)5' : txt EC 13. 25. 
 40. 68. 105 latt (μηποτί sah) Thl'. — rec ης τρ. τοπ. (corrn for simplicily), with GH 
 al Chr al : t.\t ABC 13. 25. 40. 68. 105 Till'.— βρηχίΐς 68.— rec εκττίηωπιν, with some 
 mss sah al : txt ABCGH 13. 73. 137-77 most mss ν syrr ar-erp copt al Chr. — τίσσαρ. 
 om 4. 36. 66- al. — ίυχοντο B'CH al Chr : tv^avro 40 : ηυχομίθα slav : txt AB-G al. — 
 
 ίν κλι';5ωη δίϊιρο κάκίϊ Οιαφίοομ'ινου (pro- 
 bably from Tacitus, ' Agebatur hue illuc 
 Galba, vario turbce fluciuantis impuhit,' 
 Hist. i. 40) ; Philo, de Migr. Abr. p. 454, 
 ίπαμφοΓίρίσταΙ τ^ρος ίκάτίοον τυΧ-χοί', ώς- 
 TTfp σκάφος υπ' εναντίων πνινμάτων δια- 
 ψΐρόμίνυν, άττοκλίνοντίς. — The reckoning 
 of days counts from their leaving Fair 
 Havens : see ν v. 18, 19. ev τφ 
 
 ΆΒρία] Adria, in the wider sense, em- 
 braces not only the Venetian Gulf, but the 
 sea to the south of Greece : — so Ptolemy 
 (iii. 16), t'l ft Π£λο:ΓΟ) Ί^ζ/σος όρίζιται . . , 
 από δνσμών και μισημβαιας τψ Άδρια- 
 τικψ πίλόγίΐ. So also (iii. 4) >) ("f Σικίλι'α 
 ΰρίζίται .... άτΓο ίί άνατοΧων νπο τον 
 'Αδρίον τΓίλάγοί'ς. In fact, he bounds 
 Italy on the S., Sicily on the E., Greece 
 on the S. and ΛΥ., and Crete on the W. by 
 this sea, which notices sufficiently indicate 
 its dimensions. So also Pausanias (v. 25), 
 speaking of the straits of ^Messina, says that 
 the sea there is θαλάσσης χίίμιριωτάτη 
 Ίτάσης. o'i τί yap άνίμοι ταράσσονσιν 
 αυτήν άμφοτερωθίν το κνμα ίπάγηντις, 
 £Κ τοϋ 'Λδρίου, και έξ ίτίρου ττιλάγονς ο 
 καΧΰται Ί'νησηνόν. inrevoovv] Wiiat 
 
 gave rise to this suspicion ? Probably the 
 sound (or even the apparent sight) of 
 breakers. " If we assume tliat St. Paul's 
 Bay, in Alalta, is the actual scene of the 
 shipwreck, we can have no difficulty in 
 explaining what these indications must have 
 been. No ship can enter it from the east 
 without ])assing witliiii a quarter of a mile 
 of the point of Koura : but before reaching 
 it, the land is too low and too far from the 
 track of a ship driven from the eastward, to 
 be seen in a dark night. When she does 
 come within this distance, it is impossilile 
 to avoid observing the breakers : for with 
 
 Τ 
 
 north-easterly gales, the sea breaks upon it 
 with such violence, that Capt. Smyth, in his 
 view of the headland, has made the breakers 
 its distinctive character." Smith, p. 79• — I 
 recommend the reader to study the reason- 
 ings and calculations by which Mr. Smith 
 (pp. 79 — 86) has established, I think satis- 
 factorily, that this χώραν could be no other 
 than the point of Koura, east of St. Paul's 
 Bay, in Malta. ιτροςάγειν] ' was 
 
 approaching them.' The opi)osite is άνα- 
 χωρεη', ' recedere.' 'Lucas optice loquitur, 
 nautarum more.' Kuin. 28. βολί- 
 
 σαντ€5] βυλίζειν, ήγουν βάθος θαλάσσης 
 μίτρην μολυ/3θπ'7/ καθίτιο, ή τοιούτο) τινί. 
 Eustath. on II. e. p. 427 (Wetst). 
 όργνιάς] opyvia σημαίνει την εκτασιν 
 των χίιρώΐ' σνν τψ πλάτει τοϋ στήθους 
 (Etymol. ^lagn.) := therefore very nearly 
 one fathom. — Every particular here corre- 
 sponds with the actual state of things. At 
 twenty-five fathoms depth (as given in 
 evidence at the court-martial on the officers 
 of the Lively, wrecked on this point in 
 1810), the curl of the sea was seen on the 
 rocks in the night, but no land. The 
 twenty fathoms would occur somewhat ])ast 
 this : the fifteen fathoms, in a diriction W. 
 by N. from the former, after a time suffi- 
 cient to prepare for the unusual measure of 
 anchoring by the stern. And just so are 
 the soundings (see Capt. Smyth's chart, 
 Smith, p. 88), and the shore is hen? full of 
 τραχείς τόποι, mural precipices, upon 
 which the sea must have been breaking with 
 great violence. 29. Ik ττρνμνης] The 
 
 usual way of anchoring in ancient, as well 
 as in modern navigation, was Ity the how: 
 ' anchora de prora jacitur.' But under cer- 
 tain circumstances, they anchored hi/ the 
 utern ; and Mr. Smith has shewn from tho
 
 276 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 Lnke vi. 30 
 Exod. 
 
 )V δε °° ναυτών ^ Ζ,ητΌνντων φνγίΐν ίκ του ττλοιου και 
 bch.Vx.2r.reff. ^ ναλασάΐ'των την '^ σκάφην ίΐς την ΟαΧασσαν, προφιισει 
 
 rer. 17. , '^ , ., , ^ •, , \\ ' ί ' ' 31 "? 
 
 <"."ί '" ^. ως ίκ πρώρας ^ ayκυpaς μελλόντων ίκτίΐνειν, ειπεν 
 
 <ι Jiinn XV. 22. ^ ''_''/ ^ 
 
 ev'i'r.'ii'oniyt. ό Παΰλος τιο ΙκατονταργΎ) και τοις στρατιωταις Εάν 
 
 f= here only. ^, ,•- . _., r - λ- ιλ' Ω 
 
 gjohnxvm. ij^j ovTOi ιΐΕΐνωσιν iv τω τΓΛοΐίι), νμεις σωυηναι ου ουνααυε. 
 
 1", 26. Gal. "^ ' ' ι 'ι 
 
 Deut.xxiii'.i. τοτε ^ oTTf/coi^av οι στρατί(ϋΓαι ΤΟ σχοπ'ΐα τϊ^ς σκαψης, 
 
 h John ϋ. IS , ,, , ν i . - as k " 51^ "^ ' ' 1 •' Λ 
 
 only. 2Kings κο I iiaauv αυτην ίκπίσειν. "ΧΡ* ^^ ^^ ημίρα ίμελ' 
 
 i = rh. χϋ.7 ^^1^ m «,j'^fg.0„,^ " πο/οεκάλει ο Παύλος ατται^τας ° /itf ταλα- 
 βεΓν τξίοφης, λέγων '^ Τεσσαρεςκ-αιδΕκάτίίΐ» σήμερον ημίραν 
 προςδοκωντες, "^ ασιτοι ^ διατελείτε μηθίν ττροςΧαβυμενοι. 
 = amhon5tr.. "^^ δίο " παροκολώ ύ/ιιας ° μεταΧαβιιν τροφής' τοΰτο yap 
 
 och.ii4rt! 2Tim.ii.f)t• \Visil. sviii. 0. ρ ver. 27. Gen. xiv. 5. q ab.iol , Matt. xxiv. ."iO. ch. 
 
 xxviii. 6. rhereonlyt. sbereonly. Dent, ix 7. t = ver 3(1 only. 
 
 ημίρα liiO : ro πρωί sab. — 30. (κφνγιιΐ' A 96. 137- 142: add ιις το καταλίίπιιν (τη 
 πλοιον) sah. — προφασιι om 137 : ως om 36. — πρωηης Α. — rec μιλλοντ. αγκνρ. {corrn 
 of order for euphony), with GH most mss Chr Thl Oec : txt ABC 13 lect 12 (al?). — 
 31. ΰων ίίπιν Syr ar-erp : tv πνιν/ιατι αυτού (ΐδως ίίττ. seth. — ίκατονταρχω 133 77'• 
 — fi' τω ττλοιω μιιΐ'ωσιν 38. 113-37 lect 12. — 32. rec οι στρ. απ. (corrn of order for 
 perspicuity), with GH al copt sah al Chr al : txt ABC 13. 137 lect 12 ν syrr seth alThP. 
 —33. nptW. BCG 13. 40.' 126-33-80 ThU : txt AH al Chr al.— rec ίμίλλ. ημ. ytv. 
 {corrn of order), with GH most mss syrr ieth al Chr Thl Oec : txt ABC 13. 40. 180 ν al. 
 —μιταΧαβαν απαντάς 80: αυτυνς απ. μιτ. sah. — τροφ. τίνος 5. 8 Thl. — λίγωι», ι^ον 
 sah. — ijpepdv σημεροί' 38. — επιτβλιιη προςδοκωΐ'Τίς κ. ασιτοι ίιαμίνίτί 15. 36. 180 al : 
 ττροςίοκ. om sah. — rec μη^ίν, with CGH al : txt AB 40 lect 12. — προςλαμβανιψινοι 
 A 40 lect 12 (corrn to suit προςδοκωντ(ς) : txt BCGH al Chr Thl Oec— 34. διο om sah. — 
 rec πρυςλαβιιν (corrn to suit προςλ. above), with GH al Thl' Oec : txt ABC 3. 13. 18. 
 
 ABC 
 GH ' 
 
 k oh. vii. 
 
 reff. 
 I — ch. X 
 
 relV. q 
 
 meh. xii. 18 
 
 reff 
 
 figure of a ship which he has copied from 
 the " Antichita de Ercolano," that their 
 ships had hawse-holes aft, to fit them for 
 anchoring by the stern. On the advantages 
 of this measure, see below, ver. 40. [" That 
 a vessel can anchor by the stern is sufficiently 
 proved (if proof were needed) by the history 
 of some of our own naval engagements. So 
 it was at the battle of the Nile. And when 
 ships are about to attack batteries, it is cus- 
 tomary for them to go into action prepared 
 to anchor in this way. This was the case 
 at Algiers. There is still greater interest in 
 quoting the instance of the battle of Copen- 
 hagen, not only from the accounts we have 
 of the precision with which each ship let go 
 her anchors astern as she arrived nearly op- 
 posite her appointed station, but because 
 it is said that Nelson stated after the battle 
 that he had that morning been reading Acts 
 xxvdi." C. and H. ii. p. 345.] — On the 
 four anchors, comp. Caesar, Bell. Civ. i. 25, 
 ' Naves quaternis ancoris destinabat, ne 
 fluctibus moverentur.' " The anchorage in 
 St. Paul's Bay is thus described in the 
 Sailing Directions : ' The harbour of St. 
 Paul is open to E. and N.E. winds. It is, 
 notwithstanding, safe for small ships ; the 
 ground, generally, being very good : and 
 while the cables hold, there is no danger, 
 as the anchors trill never slart.^ " Smith, 
 p. !>2. ηίχοντο] Uncertain, whether 
 
 their ship might not ffo down at her 
 anchors : and, even supposing her to ride 
 out the night safely, uncertain whether the 
 coast to leeward might not be iron bound, 
 affording no beach where they might land in 
 safety. Hence also the ungenerous but 
 natural attempt of the seamen to save their 
 lives by taking to the boat. See Smith, 
 p. 97• 30.] " We hear of anchors 
 
 being laid out from both ends of a ship 
 ((κατίρωθεν), Appian, Bell. Civ. p. 723." 
 ib. Ικτ£ίν€ΐν] because in this case 
 
 they would carry ottt the anchors to the 
 extent of the cable which was loosened. 
 31. lav μή, κ.Γ.λ.] " Mirum est 
 quod reliquos vectores salvos posse fieri 
 negat, nisi retentis nautis : quasi vero Dei 
 promissionem exinanire penes ipsos fuerit. 
 Respondeo, Paulum hie de potentia Dei 
 prsecise non disputare, ut earn a voluntate 
 et mediis sejungat : et certe non ideo fide- 
 libus virtutem suam Deus commendat, ut 
 contemptis mediis torpori et socordise indul- 
 geant, vel temere se projiciant, ubi certa est 
 
 cavendi ratio Neque tamen ))ropterea 
 
 sequitur, mediis vel adminiculis alligatam 
 esse Dei manum, sed quum Deus hunc vel 
 ilium agendi modum ordinat, hominum 
 sensus continet, ne prsescriptas sibi metas 
 transiliant." Calvin. 33.] This pre- 
 
 caution on the part of Paul was another 
 means taken of providing for their safety.
 
 30—39. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 277 
 
 ττρος τϊ]ς νμίτίοας σωτήριας υτταρχει* ουοίνος -ναο π = here only. 
 νμων vpiL, απυ της κεφαλής αττοΑειται. •'"' αττας he μ^Οα. hiv τι 
 raura /cat Λαρων αρτον ίυγ^αριστησεν τω υεω ^ ενωττιοί' λόγου,?, 
 ττάΐ'Γοη', /cat ^ /cXaffac τίρξατο εσθίειν. ^^ ^ εύθυμοι δε ^ch^ui le 
 γειΌ^εvot πάντες και αυτοί ττροςεΛαροντο τροφής. '■\μμ. κ. 
 
 ημεθα οε αι πασαι '^ φυγ^αΐ έν τω ττλοίω ^ιακόσιαι ^'^'',;('^°''' 
 εβΒομηκονταεζ. ^ '' κορεσθίντες δε τροψης ^ εκουφιζον χ M^nrt iw. 23. 
 το ττΛοίον, ε/cpαΛΛo^ίεvot τον σιτον εις την υαλασσαν. «ι ...W'sd. 
 ^ οτε όε Σήμερα εηενετο, ττ/ν γην on/c επεγιι^ωσ /cov, '^cen^xtiv*^" 
 κο\πον οε τίνα κατενοουν εγοντα aiyiaAov, εις ον zch-u ί•* 
 
 ahereonlyt. See cli. ssiv. ΙΟ. aa gen., Rev. ii. 17. Winer, } oO. 7. b so ch. xix. 7. c = ch. 
 
 ii.41refl. d I Cor. iv. 8 only. Deut. xxxi. 20. e here onlv. Jonah i. 5. (1 Kings Ti. o.) 
 
 f= here only. Matt. viii. 12 al. g ch. xii. IS raff. h = and cimslr.. here only. See ch. xxviiL 1. 
 
 i = here only t. k Matt. vii. 3 J L. 2 Maco. is. 25. I Matt. xiii. 2 al. ch. xxi. 5. 
 
 73. Ι33-37-βΟ aU Chr (test) ThP.—r,^(rf ρας AG 38. 42. oj. 96 al syr Thl^ ; txt B(e sil) 
 CH al vss Chr ThU : rijv -pav -piar 18. 3C. 180. — ονθενης A. — rec fc r. /c£0. (corrn 
 from Lnke x\\. 18), with GH al Thl Oec Com Chr) : t.xt ABC 13. 25. 36. 40. 8)'. 137-80. 
 — rec TTtrydTai {corrn to LXX, see 3 Kings i. 52, 1 Kings xiv. 45, 2 Kings x\y. 11. 
 T/i fli Meyer supposes, ηττοΧ. ?/'ere α corrn from Luke xxi. 18, ?i-e shortld not have had 
 the future, but as there, ov μη αττοληται), with GH al sah syr al Chr al : txt ABC 13. 
 15. 18. 36. 40. 180 al lect 12 ν copt syr jeth arm ar-erp ThP.— 35. rec απωΐ' (corrn to 
 more usual form), with GH al : txt ABC 24 (al.'). — (λαβιν 40. — for nproi', τροφής 3: 
 αρτυνς 13. — ηυχαξ). A 96. 137 lect 12: txt B(e sil)CGH al Chr al : (νχαριστησας 19' : 
 και ενχαριστησας 40. — aft εσθ., add ίπιίιδονς και ημιν 137 : icat ιδωκι κ<η ημιν syr*. — 
 τταντίς cm 32. 57 seth : add tv ταις ημιυαις (κίΐι•αις sah. — 36. 7Γροςε\<ιβΐ)ί/ Α 40: 
 μιτίΧαμβανον 137: /ttrf/Xa;3i)i'ThP. — 37. rec ημεν {corrn to more usual form), with CGH 
 al : txt AB 40. — rec tv τ. πλ. αι ττασ. ψ. {corrn of order to connect ύ/νχαι and Ιιακ.), 
 with GH al syr al Chr al : txt {ai cm A) ABC 13. 31. 40. 68. 105 37 ν copt arm al 
 Chr (comm) ThP. — ως iiaic. B.— for Siuk., εκατόν copt : om Epiph.^ — εβίομ. om seth. — 
 for f|, πέντε A: om 31. — 38. της τροφής GH 4. 42. 95'-6. 126-77 al lect 12 Chr. — εκ- 
 βαλομενοι G. — 39. ουκ om 38. — εγινωσκον Β. — νττενοονν 9''. 142. — ~ρος αν. Α. — 
 
 έκουφ. τ. Ίτλοΐον] See above on ver. 18. — 
 This wheat was either the remainder of the 
 cargo, part of which had been disposed of 
 in ver. 18 — or was the store for their stis- 
 tenance, the cargo having consisted of some 
 other merchandize. And this latter is much 
 the more likely, for two reasons : (1) that 
 σ'ίτος is mentioned here and not in ver. 18, 
 which it would have been in all probabihty, 
 had tlie material cast out there been the 
 same as here ; and (2) that the fact is re- 
 lated immediately after we are assured that 
 they were satisfied with food ,• from whence 
 we may infer almost witli certainty that 
 ό σίτος is the ship's provision, of part of 
 which they had been partaking. It is a 
 sufficient answer to Mr. Smith's objection 
 to this (" to suppose that they had remain- 
 ing such a quantity as would lighten the 
 ship is (piite inconsistent with the prcxious 
 ab.stinence," )). 99), that the ship was pro- 
 visioned for the voyage to Italy for 276 
 ])ersons, and ihaXfor the lust fourteen days 
 hardly any food had been touched. This 
 would leave surely enouiih to be of conse- 
 quence in a sliijt ready to sink from hour to 
 hour. 39.] It may be and has been 
 
 suggested, that some of the Alexandrian 
 
 All would, on the approaching day, have 
 their strength fully taxed : which therefore 
 needed recruiting by food. ίίχρι ... ου 
 
 . . . . ' until it begun to be day:' i. e. in 
 the interval between the last mentioned 
 occurrence and day break, Paul employed 
 the time, &c. ττροςδοκώντβς] waiting 
 
 the cessation of the storm. The following 
 expressions, άσιτ. ciut., μηθ. τΓοοςλ., are 
 spoken hyperbolically, and cannot mean 
 literally that they had abstained entirely 
 from food during the whole fortnight. 
 — irpos with a gen. (' e salute vestra') is 
 only found here in N. T. ; comp. ref., and 
 έλτΓΐ'σας "ρός εωντυϋ τον ■χριβμ'οΐ' tJrai, 
 Herod, i. 75. 35.] " Paul neither 
 
 celebrates an ά'^άπη (Olsh.), nor acts as 
 the./a//ier of a family (Meyer), but sim[)ly 
 as a pious Jew, who asks a blessing before 
 he eats." De Wette. 36.] When we 
 
 reflect ivho irere included in these ττάντ^ς, 
 — the soldiers and their centurion, tlie 
 sailors, and passengers of various nations 
 and dispositions, it shews remarkably the 
 influence acquired by Paul over all who 
 sailed with him. 37.] Exj)lanatory of 
 
 τΓΐιντες : q. d., ^ and this was no small 
 number : for we were,' &c. 38.]
 
 278 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. XXVII. 40—44. 
 
 εβουλί»Ίσαντο, ίΐ 
 
 δύ 
 
 m — ch. XV. 37 
 al. 
 
 " fhilcydi'ii'.''' τας ayKV^)ag '^ τηρίίΑονης 
 
 vaivTO, ίςωσαι το πλοιον. και 
 
 ' ε'ιων ίΐς την θάλασσαν, ujua 
 
 ίλο 
 
 ABC 
 GH 
 
 ovv. 29, 30. avevTiQ τας Ζ,ίνκτηριας των πηοαλιων, και ^παραντίς 
 s,.,„9n ^ ν' / W /._., Χ Χ 'αι-γιαλον. 
 
 See vcr. 20 
 
 rcff. 
 q =- Lnkc sx 
 
 Γ) I. Exod. 
 
 xxxii. 10. 
 r = ch. xvi. 2 
 .s liere only f. 
 t James iii. 4 
 
 on!y t- 
 u = ι•Η.ί.!>. 
 τ here only t• 
 
 X. 3(1. James 
 
 αοτίμωνα τύ) ττΐ'ίουστ} KUTtiy^ov εις tou 
 ^^ ^ τηριπίσόντίς δε εις τόπον ' οιθαΧασσυν, ^ ίπωκίΐΑαν 
 την ναΰν' κα\ ή μίν ^ πρώρα '^ kpuaaaa έμείνεν ' ασάλευτος, 
 Τ) δε *" πρνμνα ^ ίΧυίτο νπο της ^ βίας των κυμάτων. 
 
 \ν ciinflr. here cinly. χ = here only. Polyb. i. 25. 7. Thnryd. viii. 23^ y Luke 
 
 2 only. 2 Kings i. 0. ζ here onlyt• -ju" e'"^"^ όιίί.ίλαττοι- eiiiai τό vtSayii^ 
 
 T.> Άτλ,ιιτικ 1/, Strabo, i. p. 11. ahi-reoulyt. Thucyd. iv. 2(1. b ver. 30. chere 
 
 only. Poljb. iii. 4«. 1. d Heb. xii. 28 only. Exod. xiii. 10. e ver. 2!) reft'. f -- Rev. v. 2. 
 
 g ch. V. 20 reli. Acts only. 
 
 εβουλευοντο (-λοντο A 13. 40. 95 al) ABC 13. 15. 18. 25. 68. 73. 105-80 al (corrn, to 
 adapt it to the other imperfects): t.\t GH all syr al Chr Thl Oec— it δυνατόν CGH 
 4. 14. 15. 18. 57 all lect 5. 12 Syr ar-erp seth slav Chr Oec: txt AB al ν al Thl.— 
 ίκσωσαι C copt peth.— 40. αμα om arm. — for ζίυκΓ., βακτηρίας 13. — rec αρτεμονα, with 
 G al : txt ABCH 42. !)5-G--82. 177 all. — κατιιχομεν (»7' (appy) Syr ar-erp slav : κaτηyov 
 67". 177 al lectt 12. 13: κητηΧθυν (>()- : κατηχον 113. — 41. εττίτκίΐλαν AB'C {ετηκΐ]\ον 
 or -κηλον al) 25. 40: txt B-GH {ιποκιλαν Η al) al {see notes).— for πρώρα, ττρωτΐ) Α. 
 — ιμη'ίν AH 38. 113 ν al : txt B(e sil)CG most mss copt al Chr Thl Oec. — litXviro G 
 31. 137 lecf• 1-• — tmv κνμ. om {prob because the transcriber's eye passed from των to των, 
 ver 42. The sentence could hardly have been written without some gen aft της βίας) AB : 
 
 seamen mvst have known Malta; — but we 
 may answer with Mr. Smith that " St. 
 Paul's Bay is remote from the great har- 
 bour, and possesses no marked features by 
 which it might be recognized." p. 100. 
 κόλίΓον .... ίχοντ. αίγιαλόν] ' a 
 creek having a sandy beach.' Some 
 comm. sujipose that it should be alyiaXbv 
 έχοντα κόλποι•, since every creek must 
 have a beach : but what is meant is, a creek 
 with a smooth, sandy beach, as distin- 
 guished from a rocky inlet. έξώσαι] 
 Not, ' to thrust in,' as E. V., but ' to 
 strand,' * to run a-ground .•' so Thucyd., 
 ref., and more in Wetst. 40.] (1) 
 They cut away all four anchors (the ττερι 
 may allude to the cutting round each cable 
 in order to sever it, or to the going round 
 and cutting all four), and left them in the 
 sea {ε'ις r. θάλ. ' in the sea, into which they 
 had been cast'). This they did to save 
 time, and not to encumber the water-logged 
 ship with their additional weight. (2) "They 
 let loose the ropes which tied up the rud- 
 ders. " Ancient ships were steered by two 
 large paddles, one on each quarter. When 
 anchored by the stern in a gale, it would be 
 necessary to lift them out of the water, and 
 secure them by lashings or rudder bands, 
 and to loose these bands when the ship was 
 again got under way." Smith, p. 101. (3) 
 They raised {ί-παίρειν, ' to raise up,' con- 
 trary to κατίχειν, ' to haul down,' a sail) 
 their άρτίμων to the wind. It would be im- 
 possible in the limits of a note to give any 
 abstract of the long and careful reasoning 
 by which Mr. Smith has made it appear 
 that the ' artemon ' was the ' foresail' ot the 
 ancient ships. I will only notice from him, 
 
 that the rendering ' mainsail ' in our E. Λ''. 
 was probably a mistaken translation from 
 Bayfius or De Baif, the earliest of the modern 
 vpriters ' de re navali,' and perhaps the only 
 one extant when the translation was made : 
 he says, " est autem artemon velum majus 
 
 navis, ut in Actis Apost. xxvii etenim 
 
 etiam nunc nomen Veneti vulgo retinent et 
 artemon vocant." These words, ' velum ma- 
 jus,' they rendered by mainsail; whereas the 
 largest sail of the Venetian ships at the time 
 was the foresail. — The French ' artimon,' 
 even now in use, means the sail at the stern 
 (mizen). But this is no clue to the ancient 
 meaning, any more than is our word mizen to 
 the meaning of the French misaine, which is 
 the foresail. — The usual technical name of 
 the foresail was δόλων, that of the mizen, 
 ίπίορομος. See on the whole question. 
 Smith's Dissertation on the Ships of the 
 Ancients, appended to his Voyage and 
 Shipwreck of St. Paul. ttj ΤΓν£ουση] 
 
 scil. aSpp. Dat. commodi ; — 'for the 
 wind (to fill) ;' — or (according to Meyer 
 and De Wette) of direction, — ' to the 
 wind.' (4) They made for the beach. 
 41. τότΓον 8ιθάλασσον] At the west end 
 of St. Paul's Bay is an island, Selmoon or 
 Salmonetta, which they could not have 
 known to be such from their place of an- 
 chorage. This island is separated from the 
 mainland by a channel of about 100 yards 
 wide, communicating with the outer sea. 
 Just within this island, in all probability, 
 was the place where the ship struck, in a 
 place, ' where two seas met.' επώ- 
 
 Κ£ΐλαν] Thucyd. several times uses this 
 word and its primitive όκίλλω, and gene- 
 rally transitively, with tu πλοΐα or την
 
 XXVIII. ], 2. ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 279 
 
 "των οε σΓ^)ατιωΓ(ϋΐ» ' βουλ?) eyeviro 'ίνα τους ' δεσ/ίώ- h = cu. τ. ss. 
 
 _ ' ' ' k ' \ ο ' 1^./ '^er. 12. w. ' 
 
 τας ατΓοκτίΐνωσιν, /αηης εκκολυμμησας οιαώυγη' iVa. here 
 
 43 ' ^^ ' ' /Ο Λ ' m C\ - ν τ-Γ -Λ ■ "°'y- 
 
 Ο όε εκατονταρ^ης, ρουΛομενος οιασωσαι τον ΙΙαυλον, '^cla°ll; 
 ° εκωλυσεν αυτούς του ° βονΧηματος, εκίΧευσεν τε τους k here only t. 
 
 Γί / ΡΛΟ'^α'**'! ' > \ ^'"^^- Sic. 
 
 δυνάμενους ^ κοΑυμραν ^ αττορριφαντας ττρωτους ^ττι \^^%1% 
 
 *■ "Γ'ί'' 44^ ^Λ Vsi\ \ > \ Josh, viii 22 
 
 rrji' γί)ν ii^urat, ^^ και τους λοιττους ους μεν εττί m seech. χχίϋ. 
 σαΐ'ί'σιν ^ ους δε επί τίνων των " αττό του πλο/ου. ° JJJ''^"]^'''•• 
 
 ' " ν » ' / m <? Λ- > 1 \ - Gen.xxiii.6. 
 
 και ούτως ε-γενετο τταντας οιασωυηναι επι την -/ην. oRom.u.w 
 XXVIII. Και "" διασωθε'ντες τότε "'" 'ε-!τε•/νωμεν οτι ΤΛο},το^'' 
 Μελίττ/ η νήσος καλείται. ο'ί τε " βάρβαροι ^ παρεΓγαν oemosih"' 
 
 ρ here onlyt. q = an 1 constr., here only. Luci^tn. Ver. Hist. i. 38, ΰιτορμίιΐ/αντίί έκιχόμεί^α 
 
 (Wahl. Parkb.) (Esod. xxii. .Jl.) r ch xiii. 42 reff. s Malt, xiii, 4. ixi. 3.i al. fr t = here 
 
 only. E/ek. xxvii. ft. u ch. xii. 1. xv. .'). (See 2 Thess. i. 9 reit.) ν constr.. Matt, xviii. 13. ch. iv. 
 
 flal.fr. " constr., Luke vii.o?. ch. xxii. 29. Ezek. xvi.H2. See ch. xxvii. 39. χ Rum. i. 14. 
 
 ICor. xiv.ll. Col. iii. 11. Exek. xxi. 31. y = ch. xri. Ifi. xxii. 2. 1 Tim. vi. 17. 
 
 ins CGH al ν vss Chr al : a vi maris ν : afluctibus maris seth. — 42. St om C. — ΰεσμιους 
 177• — μητις avrwv Syr sjr-marg.— κολνμβησας 95•. — rec ^αφιιγυι {grammatical emen- 
 dation, see note) ABCG(-yfi)H 13. 15. 18. 25-6-7. 36-8. 42. 57. 65-8-9. 78. 80 95- 
 6-8. 133-7-77-80 all lectt 5. 12 al Chr Thl.— 43. rec -ηοχος, with GH al : t.xt ABC 13 
 (Scholz; 31 Wetst) 133 ΎΜ-.—τον ττ. διασ. \%—βου\ίνματος 42. 57.— for τε, h C 40. 
 90. 137 al copt syr. — ικκοΚυμβαν Β. — jrpwroi' 101. — ατΓουιψηιτας C. — της γης 137• — 
 44. roi'C . . . Γυυς- 137• — απο om 25 : νπο lect 13 : εττι lect 14. — γης 137• 
 
 Chap. XXVIII. 1. ίιασωθ. om 78• Syr ar-erp.— add οι πιαι roi' τταυΧον 4. G6-. 100 
 al : 01 πιρι r. ττ. βαοβαροι 1-marg: ot τηρι τ. ττ. εκ του ττλοος C^-marg (om τον) 4-marg 
 42. 57. 78. 80. 97. 10G-2G-77-raarg lect 12 all {an ecclesiastical portion beginning at 
 διασωθιντίς). — τότε om 15. 27. 36. 7•5• 180 copt. — rec fTrtytnoaav {corrn to suit ch 
 xxvii. 39 .'), with C^-marg GH al Chr al : txt ABC 13. 68. 137 ν syrr ar-erp copt eeth 
 al. — μίλιτηνη lect 12 demid latt copt arm syr ar-pol Jer {Melifene or Militene) — 2. rec 
 C£ {altern of characteristic τε), with GH ν copt al Chr al : txt ABC 13. 40. 61!. 105 al 
 lect 12 sjTr seth ThP. — rec ιταρειχον {corrn as more usual), with CGH al; txt AB. — ■ 
 
 vnvv; see, besides reff., iii. 12, viii. 102; fore the reader. 43.] απόρριψαν• 
 
 ' they ran the ship a-ground.' — " The της is reflective, sc. εαυτούς. 44.] 
 
 circumstance which follows, would, but for tovs λοιττοΰς] scil. επί την yrjv ίξάναι. 
 
 the peculiar nature of the bottom of St. τίνων των από τ. ττ.] probably, 
 
 Paul's Bay, be difficult to account for. as E. V., ' broken pieces of the ship :' 
 
 The rocks of Malta disintegi-ate into very — some of the parts of the ship : the σα- 
 
 minute particles of sand and clay, which ΐ'ίίες being ' whole planks,' perhaps of 
 
 when acted on by the currents, or by sur- the decks. διασ-ωθ. eiri] i. e. ciaa. κ. 
 
 face agitation, form a deposit of tenacious άφι.κ-ίσθαι επί, — a constr. prtegnans. 
 
 clay : but In still water, where these causes XXVIII. 1. Μίλίτη] The whole course 
 
 do not act, mud is found : but it is only in of the narrative has gone to shew that this 
 
 the creeks where there are no currents, and can be no other than M.a.lta. The idea 
 
 at such a depth as to be undisturbed by the that it is not Malta, but Meleda, an island 
 
 waves, that mud occurs. ... A ship there- off the Illyrian coast ii\ the Gulf of Venice, 
 
 fore, impelled by the force of the gale into a seems to be first found in Constantine Por- 
 
 creek with a bottom such as that laid down phyrogenitus, de Adminiculis Imperii, p. 
 
 in the chart, would strike a bottom of mud, 36, — νήσος μεγάλη τά Μελέτα ήτοι το 
 
 graduating into tenacious clay, into which ΜαΧοζιάται,ην εν ταΊς πράζεσι τ. άποστ. 
 
 the fore part would fix itself and be held ύ ί'ιγιος Α-ουκϋς μεμνηται, ^\ελίτην ταΰ- 
 
 fast, while the stern was exposed to the την προςαγοοενων. It has been adopted 
 
 force of the waves." Smith, p. 103. by our own countrymen, Bryant and Dr. 
 
 42.] ϊνα gives not only thepvrjiose, but the Falconer, and abroad by Giorgi, Uhoer, and 
 
 substance of the fluvXi). 'Their counsel more recently Paulus. It rests i)riiicipally 
 
 was, — to kill,' &c. : this it ivas, and to this on three mistakes : — 1. the meaning of Iho 
 
 it tended. — διαφνγοι has probably been a name Adria (sec above on ch. xxvii. 27), — 
 
 correction to suit έγ'ενετο. But the sub- 2. the fancy that there are no poisonous 
 
 junctivc after the past is merely a mixture serpents in Malta (ver. 3), — 3. the notion 
 
 of construction of the historic past with the that the Maltese would not have been culled 
 
 historic present, and is us<;d where the βιΊρβαροι. — The idea itself, when compared 
 
 scene is intended to be vividly set be- with the facts, is preposterous enough. Its
 
 280 
 
 πρα;ξ:εις αποστολών. 
 
 XXVIII. 
 
 ζ = ch 
 
 reft•, 
 a Tit. iii. 4 
 
 (.Illy t. 
 I Mace vi. 
 
 lix. 11 ού την ^ τυγοΰσαν " φιλανθ^ωττίαν ημιν' αφανής yap abc 
 ττνράν προςελάβοΐ'το παντας ημάς οια τον '^ υετον 
 
 •J Mace vi. ν f ' . - '' ^ ^ " R Ι" 3 1ι V ' / S•^ 
 
 22- τον εώεστωτα και οια τυ ψυνος, Ζυσρτίψαντος ο£ 
 
 b I.uke viii. Hi. ' . y*• _ \ ' /! > \ 
 
 iiiditVxiii. του Παύλου ' φρνγύνων τι ττληθος και ίπιΟεντος εττι 
 
 13. Ν (. Ν 1 >' 1^ 111'•^ - 11/1' ? ,tr λ ί1 " 
 
 C here nniy t. TTiv TTVOuv Evtoi'a OTTO της υίομης θ(ίΐ;ίΛ(/ουσα 
 
 Judith vii. 5, • ** ^ 
 
 '' Π 3^'xT.V.^' ° καΟη-φίν της •χ£•<ρος οΰτοϋ. ^ ώς δε είδαν οι βάρβαροι 
 Ps.xxvi. ΙΟ. ^ κοΐμαμενον το υηριον εκ της -χειρός αντου, προς αλΛ?;- 
 
 e cli.xiv. 17reft'. f^hereonly. όlφeaτ(,}^;ζόφnf,Vo\yb.s\in.3.7, g John xviii. l.S. i' Cor. 
 
 xi. 27 only. Cen. viii. 22. h here only. Jiidg. xi. 3. xii. 4. i licre only. = Job xxx. 7. 
 
 Is. xl.24. k=Lukeii. 13. Jolinxxi. «. 1 Mali. iii. 7 II. t. m = Matt. xiii. 44. xviii. 
 
 7 άΙ. 2 Chron. v. β. u here only. Job vi. 17. ο here only t• trans., Polyb viii. 8. 3, τάς πρώραΓ 
 
 τιΰι/ όργακϋΐ. eii ύκι'ΐΊΐτομ κα(/Γ)πτ€. So Xen Cyneg. vi. 0. ρ Matt, xviii. (>. 1 Mace. i. 01. 
 
 rcc nmnpai'Tig {corrn to more precise word), with Gil most mss Chr' Tlil Oec : txt 
 ABC 13. 40. G8. 10ό. — for yap, St lect 12. — προςίλαμβανον 13?: reficiebant {reci- 
 piebani ?) v. — πηντας om A copt ath Chr (ms) : aft ημάς 13, lect 12 vss : ημ. om 40: 
 add θίρμαιιησθαι Syr ar-erp. — υφίστωτα G 13. — Sia om i)5-(i (so Bornem. corrects 
 Scholz). — 3. rec aft (pptiy. om τι (as unnecessary), with GH al syr al Chr al : ins ABC 
 13. 25. 40. 81 V (not am) ThF.— rec f/c της θ((>μ. {see note), with mss Chr Thl' Oec: 
 t.\t ABCGH 13. 15. 18. 25-ϋ. 36. 40. GC-8. 73. 103-5-37-80 all lect 12 (a calore v) ThP. 
 — rec ίξίλθουσα (corrn, the compound δΐίξ. not being elsw found in Ν Τ, and its force 
 not being seen, v. note), with B(e sil)C &c Chr-comm Thl- Oec: txt AG Η 1.4. 27-0. 
 42. 57. GO. 80. 95I-G-8. 105-42-77 all Chr-text Ί\ύ\—καθη4>ατο C 14. 15. 18. 3(!-8. 
 40. GO'. 7G. 93. 100-13-37-77-80 all lect 5 al Chr Phot Niceph : καΟακί m. 142: 
 txt ABGH &c. — 4. ίί'οΐ' AC : tiSai' B. — κρψωμίΐΌΐ' 40. — το θηρ. om Syr ar-erp : ins 
 Orig (expr) : and bef κριμ. G4. 95-C Chr Thl' : viperam tol. — rec tXty. ττρ. αΚΚηΧ. 
 
 supporters are obliged to place Fair Havens on 
 the north side of Crete, — and to suppose the 
 wind to have been the hot Scirocco (comp. 
 ver. 2). — Further notices of this question, 
 and of the state of Malta at the time, will be 
 found in the notes on the following verses. 
 I Observe, their previous state of ignorance of 
 the island is expressed by the imperf. ίπεγί- 
 νωσκοί' ; — the act of recoenition by the aor. 
 ίπίγνωμεν.^ 2. βάρβαροι] A term im- 
 
 plying very much what our word ' natives ' 
 does, when speaking of any little-known or 
 new place. They were not Greek colonists, 
 therefore they were barbarians (Rom. i. 14). 
 If it be necessary strictly to vindicate the 
 term, the two following citations will do so : 
 ίση δί »; νήσος αϋτη (^lalta) Φοινίκως, 
 άποικος, Did. Sic. v. 12. — iv δε Σίκίλιςι 
 fOj'?) βάρβαρα τάδε εστιΐ',Έδννοί, 'Σικανοί, 
 'Σικελοί, Φοίνι.κε$τ Τρώες, Scylax, Periplus, 
 p. 4. ττροςελάβ.] ' received us,' not 
 
 to their f re (^leyer), but as in reff. 
 •ύίτόν] ' Post ingentes ventos solent imbres 
 sequi.' Grot. τον Ιφεστ.] not, ' which 
 came on suddenly' (Meyer), but 'which was 
 on us:' — another instance of overlooking 
 the present sense of ΐστηκα. Ψ^χο?] 
 
 This is decisive against the Scirocco, which 
 is a hot and sultry wind even so late as the 
 month of November, and moreover (Smith, 
 p. 10!)) seldom lasts more than three days. 
 3. σ-υσ~Γρ€ψαντος] " vincti officium 
 faciebat submisse, aliis quoque inserviens." 
 Bengel. φρύγανων] From the cir- 
 
 cumstance of the concealed viper, these were 
 
 probably heaps of neglected wood gathered 
 in the forest. Ιιτιθίντο?, κτ.Γ.λ.] The 
 
 difficulty here is, that there are now no ve- 
 nomous serpents in Malta. But as Mr. Smith 
 observes, " no person who has studied the 
 changes which the operations of man have 
 produced on the animals of any country, 
 will be surprised that a particular species 
 of reptiles should have disappeared from 
 Malta. My friend the Rev. Mr. Lands- 
 borough, in his interesting excursions in 
 Arran, has repeatedly noticed the gradual 
 disappearance of the viper from the island 
 since it has become more frequented. Per- 
 haps there is no where a surface of equal 
 extent in so artificial a state as that of 
 Malta is at the present day, — and no where 
 has the aboriginal forest been more com- 
 pletely cleared. We need not therefore be 
 surprised that, with the disappearance of 
 the woods, the noxious reptiles which in- 
 fested them should also have disajipeared." 
 pp. Ill, 112. — The reading Ik t. θ'ερμ. has 
 been an explanation of άπό, which here sig- 
 nifies 'from,' locally, not ' on account of 
 [To sup))0se the converse ("the άττό was 
 adopted by those who thought the sense was 
 ' ow account of the fire,'" Dr. Bloomf.), — 
 is simply absurd ; for 1) no man ever could 
 suppose the sense of tic in such a connexion 
 to be this : and 2) even if any one did, he 
 would not have substituted another ambi- 
 guous preposition, άττό.] Paul had placed 
 the faggot on the fire, and was settling 
 or arranging it in its place, when the
 
 S-7. 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λί2Ν. 
 
 281 
 
 Χους eXiyov '^ Πάιτως ^ φονευς εστίν ο άνθρωπος ούτος•, <ι^^ή.^""•2ΐ 
 ...ουχ OP ύιασωυίντα εκ της ΌαΑασσης η οικη Ζ,νν ουκ ειασεν. f2r<rflt. 
 
 €ΐασ6ΐ/ 1 . ρ. ρ y "ϊα' ^ ^ ^ η f * ^ -'''/" s see ch. sxiii. 
 
 ABGH ^ ο μεν ουν αποτιναίας το υηοιον εις το πυο επαυεν , 24 reff. 
 
 ' ^ ^ S ^ i t=- here only. 
 
 ουοίν κακόν, ot οε προςεοοκων αυτόν μελλειν π; 7^^,25.' 
 
 τΓΐμπρασυαι η •' καταπιτττειν αφνω νεκξίον. επι ττολυ °"'y• 'Kmgs 
 οε αυτών ττροςόοκωντων και υεωρουντων μηοεν άτοπον res. 
 
 » i ν f ύ ο \ \ ' 'Ά Λ ^ , ν W = ch. xxi. 
 
 εις αυτόν -γινομενον, μεταραλλομενοί εΛεγον υεον αυτόν f'^'^f, 
 
 "ϊ 7 'Ι? ?* e " e > ^ ' ' - f ' - χ ere on yt 
 
 είναι. ' CjV οε τοις πεοι τον τόπον εκείνον ν 
 
 υττηρχεν ^^f ' ^""*" 
 
 ΤΓίΜ- 
 
 ^ -yjiopia τω πξ>ωτω της νησον, ονόματι Ποττλίω, ός• ^^"^^'dj^j 
 
 Sic. ϋ. 12. y ch. χχϊί. 14 only. Ps. Ixir. 14. ζ ch. ii. 2. xvi.SB only. Josh. x. 9. 
 
 ahereonly. (Seech, xx. 9, 11.) /αίσον ούκ f π» ττολύ ui-rf χε<, TliDC. ii. 64. b w. partkip., ch. χτϋ. 1ϋ. 
 
 c Luke xxiii 41. ch. XXV. 6. 2 Thess. ii. 2 only. Jobiv.S. d here only, act., Exod. vii. 17. = Jos. 
 
 B. l.v. 9.3, KaKof τρό ΰνηκ^στον ανιίφυρΰ! μ£ταβα\ίσθαι : and freq. e = here only, ίιρίατο 
 
 TuTTftiOvaeai Tfi περί Ti'ic θήβαί, Diod. Sic. i. 50. f ch. iii. 6 reft'. gch. i. 18 al. 
 
 h and const r., ch. xiii. δΟ reft'. 
 
 (corrn of order for perspicuity), with GH al copt al Chr Oec : txt ABC 13. 137 lect 12 
 V syi• (Svr om ττρ. «λλ.) Tlil. — 5. αποτιναζαμίνος AGH 4. 13. 15. 18. 25-7. 3G. 40. 
 Do-G 1 13-37-77-80 all Chr ThP lect 5. 12 (corrn from ch xiii. 51, xviii. 6 .' so De W.) : 
 t.xt Β (e sil) al Thl' Oec— 6. οιίε προςίΧθοιτις 13.— ττροςκ'οκουΐ' GH 13. 2ό. 32. 40. 
 180 lect 12 ΎΜΚ—πιπρασϋαι A l". 3. 4. 68 Oec (edj : ττιπρασθαι lect 12: ψττιμ• 
 ττρασθαι 27-9: ΐμπητρασθαι 40. 66-. 98 marg 105. — προςίοκουντων A al : -κοντών 
 G. — μηθεν Β. — for εις avrov, αυτω 63-4. 97• — γείΌμενον 133 lect 2. — μεταβα\ομενοι 
 A 29 al.— fXtyar Β.— πυΓ. ειν. θιον Β ν Thl- : ιιν. αντ. θ. Α : αυτ. ϋ. ειν. 13. 38 Thl> : 
 txt GH all Chr Oec. — 7. χωριοί' 105. — ττοντνΧιω 5. 7• 25 ν (_Publii,—Puplii am) coptsjrr 
 
 viper glided out of the heat and fixed 
 on his hand. διεξελθ. gives the more 
 
 precise sense, and is a less usual word than 
 ίζελθ. The serpent glided out through the 
 sticks. καθήψ€ν] 'attached itself:' 
 
 a usage unexampled in earlier Greek. The 
 narrative leaves no doubt that the bite did 
 veritably take place. 4.] The natives, 
 
 who were sure to know, here positively de- 
 clared it to have been a venomous serpent. 
 I make these remarks to guard against the 
 disingenuous shifts of rationaUsts and serai- 
 rationalists, who will have us beUeve either 
 that the viper did not bite, or that if it did, 
 it was not venomous. ιτάντως φον. 
 
 Ιστ.] ' vincula videbant.' Beng. — The idea 
 of his being a murderer is not to be ac- 
 counted for (as Eisner, Wolf, Kuin.) by the 
 member which was bitten (for this would 
 fit any crime which the hand could commit), 
 — nor by supposing (Heinsius) the bite of 
 a serpent to have been the Maltese punish- 
 ment for murder ; it is accounted for by the 
 obviousness of the crime as belonging to 
 the most notorious delinquents, and the 
 aptness of the assumed punishment, — death 
 for death. ή δίκη] ' Justice,' or Neme- 
 
 sis. What the Phuinician islanders called her, 
 does not appear ; but the idea is common to 
 all religions. 5.] " Luke does not so 
 
 much as hint, that any divine intervention 
 took place." De Wette. — True enough: 
 but why .' Because Luke believed that the 
 very dullest of his readers would understand 
 it without any such hint. According to 
 these rationalists, a fortunate concurrence 
 
 of accidents must have happened to the 
 Apostles, totally unprecedented in history 
 or probability. Besides, did not the natives 
 themselves in this case testify to the fact ? 
 None were so well qualified to judge of the 
 virulence of the serpent, — none so capable 
 of knowing that the hanging on Paul's 
 hand implied the communication of the 
 venom :^yet they change him from a mur- 
 derer into a god, on seeing what took place. 
 Need we further evidence, that the divine 
 power which they mistakenly attributed to 
 Paul himself, was really exerted on his be- 
 half, by Him who had said οφΰς όρονσιν ? 
 See below on ver. 8. 6.] Both these, 
 
 the inflammation of the body, and the fall- 
 ing down dead suddenly, are recorded as 
 results of the bite of the African serpents. 
 Mr. Humphry quotes from Lucan, ix. 790, 
 ' Nasidium Marsi cultorem torridus agri 
 Percussit Prester {an African serpent named 
 from this very verb πιμπρασθαι) : illi ru- 
 bor igneus ora Succendit, tenditque cuteni, 
 pereunte figura :' and, of the bite of the 
 asp, ix. 815: 'At tibi, Leve miser, fixus 
 priecordia pressit Niliaca serpente cruor : 
 nulloque dolore Testatus raorsus, subita 
 caligine mortem Accipis, et somno Styiiias 
 descendis ad umbras.' ττροςδοκών- 
 
 των] not, as E. V., ' when they had /oo/ccil,' 
 — but 'when they were long looking.' 
 μ,ίταβαλλ.] there is no need to 
 supply Γ. ■γνόιμ7)ν, though it is sometimes 
 expressed : — so ol ιτλεΊατοι των ανθρώπων 
 μεταβάλλονται προς• τά παρόντα, κ•. ταΐς 
 τνχαις εϊκονσι, Lysias, pro Nicia fratro
 
 282 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXVIII. 
 
 8 m 
 
 i Heb. xi. 17 
 
 only t. 
 (•J Mhcc. vii 
 Sii) 
 k luTf luilv + υ ^ ' 
 
 I'MuciiLi). όυςίντψιω 
 
 X«n. ( yr. v. -py - ν 
 
 1 nh. X. η ά\. 
 
 Il<b. xiii.it. ^/Ίηηο 
 Sir. xsix.JS. X^'P"'.' 
 
 αι'αδ£^ά;tε^Ός ί/μος τρεις ημέοας 
 
 ^k 
 
 tyivero οε τον πάτερα 
 *" συνεχόμενοι' 
 ειςελΟων, και ' ττ 
 
 του 
 
 φιΧοφρονοίς εξενίίτεν. abgh 
 Ποττλιου " πυρετοΓς /cat 
 προς ον ο 
 ΐπιϋίΐς τας 
 γενομένου και 
 
 κατοκεισσαι 
 
 χνΐϋ. l.i. cli. 
 
 ίν.ΓΐΗΐ. 
 η Mall, viii.l». 
 
 John iv. Γι2. 
 
 Drill, χχνίίί. 
 
 22. 
 ο litre (inly t. 
 ρ — Mall. iv. 24 r.fl". 
 X. U. xvi. 40 111. 
 Uial.fr. 
 y Luke xiv. (28.) 32. 2 Pet. i. 3. 
 
 ος ειςεΛί/ων, και προςευςαμενος, 
 ουτω, ίασατο αντον. τούτου οε 
 
 οί λοιποί οι εν Τ7} νί/σω έχοντες " ασθενε/ας προςί/ρχοντο 
 
 οι καί ποΛΛοις 
 
 y 
 
 και 
 και 
 
 εσεραπευοντο, 
 αναγομενοίς 
 
 τιμαις ^τίμησαν ημάς. 
 
 iTTiuevTO ' τα προς τας χρείας. 
 
 α - Mark i. 3 
 s abseil., ill. ix. 12 al. fr. t ch. viii 
 
 V - 1 Tim. V. 17 ? woh. xiii. 13 leli. 
 
 ζ cli. XX. 31 rclf. 
 
 
 r w. 7 
 
 rpi''t. 
 
 Luke 
 
 i. 28. 
 
 ch. 
 
 II 
 
 - Mali, vi 
 
 ii. 17. 
 
 Lnk 
 
 e V. 
 
 here 
 
 only. 
 
 Xei 
 
 .. Cyr. 
 
 viii. ί 
 
 !.4. 
 
 al Ath Dam.— ϊ/μ. τρ. Β 31. 40. 133-7: om 69: txt AGH most mss Chr Thl Oec : aft 
 ψιλοφη. 13 : add tv τω ηικω αυτω Sjt syr*. — 8. (ττοττλ. see ver. 7•) — rcc δνςίΐ'Τίριη, 
 witli mss Cliral : -rtpioig 13: -αις 25. 40 : txt ABGH lOl'-fi. — και Svg. συν. om OG : 
 συΐ'ίχομ. om C!) : μηχο/κνον 3 : κίΐσθηι 96. — ίΐςίλ^ωΐ' ο ττσυλος 95 lect 12. — ίττιθίΐς τε 
 15. 31. 113. — «υΓϋΐι 1JJ. 180. — 9. rec for ^ε, ονν {corrn, as more natural copula), with 
 Gil al Syr al Thl Oec : txt AB (Bentl) 13. 17- 25. 40. 65-8. 73. 105-33-37 al lect 12 copt 
 syr al Chr. — aft yf ιό/χ. (yiv. G) add hyiovQ Η (*/e, Tisch). — κ<ιι (not m 2nd as in Scholz) 
 om B. — rec oi λ. ιχ. ασθ. tv τ. νησ. with GH al syr al Chr al : t.xt AB 13. 31. 40 ν copt 
 8vr al Thl- : ιχ. ησΟ. om lect 12. — προηηχον Β: ηοχοντο lect 12. — ίβ(μαπ. απανης 
 lect 12. — 10. οι om 73. — αναγομινων 43: add ημιν slav-ed : ίκίιθεν Syr syr*. — for rti, 
 της A 137- — rec την χρίίαν {Meyer thinks τας χοίΐας a gloss for τα προς την xpttav, — 
 J)e W, that the plur has crept in from ch xx. 34. But Bornemann rightly objects 
 (1) that the τας preceding in A 137 shews the transcriber's eye to have past on to της 
 of της χρείας m earlier copies, (2) that the use of the plur is much rarer than of the 
 singular: see also note), with GH al Chr al : txt AB 13. 40. 103 5-37 syr {fjuce 
 
 (Wetst.) : μεταβάλΧίσθηι δοκεΐ και ovSiv 
 ίχειν πιστον ή ττόλις, Demosth. pro Me- 
 galop. (id.), — in neither of which places 
 can r. -γνώμην well be understood. 
 θεόν] " Comparabant vel Herculi qui in 
 ulnis adhuc jacens angues superavit : vel 
 jEsculapio, qui cum serpente pingitur." 
 Wetst. and so also Grot. But so much as 
 this can hardly be inferred : nor are we 
 sure of the thcogony of these Phoenician 
 barbarians. 7.] irpiros Μελιτη/ω)/ 
 
 was probably an official title : the more so, 
 as Pubhus can hardly have borne the appel- 
 lation from his estates, during his father's 
 lifetime. Two inscriptions have been found 
 in ^lalta, at Citta Vecchia, which seem to 
 e^^tabhsh this view : a Greek one, contain- 
 ing the words α{υ\ος) κ{αστρι)κιος κυρ. 
 ΤΓιιουδινς ιππενς ρωμ ττρωτος μελιταιων 
 κηι πατρων αρΙας και αμφιπολενς α σ 
 (Αΰγονστψ σεβαστι^) θεω . . . . , and a 
 Latin one, with the same title, ' Mel. pri- 
 mus.' If so (and his Roman name fur- 
 ther confirms it), PubHus was Irgatus of the 
 PrePtor of Sicily, to whose province Malta 
 belonged ; sec Cic. in Λ^crr. ii. 4. 18. 
 ήμας] Hardly perhaps more than Paul and 
 his companions, and, it may be, Julius. 
 At ver. 10, a special reason had occurred 
 for liis honouring Paul and his company : 
 at present, his hospitahty must have been 
 prompted by the courtesy of Julius, who 
 could hardly fail himself to be included in 
 
 it. The three days were probably till they 
 could find a suitable lodging. 8. itv- 
 
 perois] Hippocrates also uses the ))lural. 
 It probably indicates the recurrence of fever 
 fits. SvsevTepiw] ονςεντερία, Άτ- 
 
 τικώς• -piov, "Ελληνες. Moeris ; — 'dysen- 
 tery.' Dr. Falconer makes this an argu- 
 ment against 'Melita Africana' being meant. 
 " Such a place, dry and rocky, and remark- 
 ably healthy, was not likely to produce a 
 disease which is almost peculiar to moist 
 situations." But Mr. Smith answers, that 
 the changed circumstances of the island 
 might produce this change also : and be- 
 sides, that he is informed by a physician of 
 Valetta, that the disease is by no means 
 uncommon in Malta. έπιθείς τ. 
 
 χείρας αϋτω] It is remarkable, that so soon 
 after tlie ' taking up of serpents,' we sliould 
 read of Paul having ' laid his hands on the 
 sick and they recovered.' See the two in 
 close connexion, Mark xvi. 18. 10. 
 
 τιμαϊς] The ordinary interpretation of this 
 as rewards, gifts, can liardly stand. For 
 (1) it is not justified by any of the passages 
 quoted to support it. In all those, Sir. 
 xxxviii. 1, Cicero, ad Diversos, xvi. 9 
 (' Curio misi ut medico honos haberetur '), 
 — (1 Tim. V. 3. 17 is uncertain, and probably 
 not to be so understood,) — the expression 
 τιμή is general, and the context points out 
 of necessity trhat sort of τιμ ij is meant. 
 Here there is no such unavoidable indica-
 
 8—14. 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 283 
 
 Mfra δε τρΰς μήνας ^ ανη^θημίν εν πλοίω ^ πάρα- a ch.xsvii.i2 
 κί\ίΐμακοτι εν τη νήσω, ΑΛεΙανοοινω, παρασ»)ΐιω 'ί>'^^'= "«'?+• 
 
 '*■ ιο\ !■' ^^>ι•' Ι 'Γι, a Mace. π. 29 
 
 Αιοςκονρηις. ^^ και " καταγθίντίς εις Έυρακουσας '' ε'ττ- cc^h.VkTareff. 
 
 ' ' / - 1^ "/Ί e Λ η ' f , d ch. χ. 48. 
 
 ίμίΐναμ^ν τ/μερας τοίΐς *"' ot /εν ττεοίελσοντες κτατηντ?}- χχί•4, ίο. 
 
 , , ^ ' » Lxod.xii.Sg. 
 
 σαμεν εις Pijytov και μετά μιαν ήμεραν ^ επιγενομένου "Ί'τίη^ν'Ί^. 
 
 1ι' ϊι> ""Λη 'τ-Ύ '\ 1-t•?'' Hei).xi.37. 
 
 voroi» civTipaioi ηλυομίν εις Ιίοτιυλους, ου ευροντες• fth^^i. ι tetr. 
 
 '?Λ ^ k Λ 'η • ' ■> - \ • - </ ε h<^rc only t. 
 
 αόίλψους παρεκ:λϊ)σ>/μεν επ αυτοις επιμειναι ημίρας ^^^'/'^τογ 
 
 /.fVoii, Thncyd.iT, 3ϋ. h eh. xsvii. 13. Luke xii. 55. i here only. See John xi. 39. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 v.2.2,beg. k con.str., ch. xiii. 42. 1 ch x. 48 reff. w.6πl, here only. 
 
 ad usus) (v al have quae necessaria ei-ant). — 11. tqhq ημέρας {cfvv 7• 12. 17) 68. IOC. 
 — ηχθημιν Η 2G. 42. 57- 69. !)G-7. 142-77 al lect 13.—αλίΚ<τΐ'£ϋηνω Β .^2 (al.') Till'.— 
 διοζκουοις 25. 40. 9G. 142: διοςκουπιοίς 3G : ίιοςιοωρ>/ς lect 12. — 12. συρακουηα lect 12. 
 — ημίραις τρισιν Β ν (iri/luo): εττίμ. 6κίΐ Syr syr*. — τρίις ημέρας lect 12: ii(?i<o arm- 
 venet. — 13. ττεριελοντίς Β? : παρίλθοιτίς 3 (Wetst). — ρηγειον G. — επιγινομενον 96. — 
 14. for 01' (vp-, εφίΐ'ίΐοΐ'τες 76. — παρ αντοις {corrn to more usual expni) AB 13. 15. 18. 
 36. 40. 65-8. 98. 105-33-80 al lect 12 al ThF : txt GH aO Chr Thl• Oec— ίττ,^. om 66: 
 ίΤΓΐ 4 al : ε-πιμειναντες (μειναΐ'τες 24) Η u8. 95'. 137 al Thl: εττιμεινα (sic) A. — rec 
 
 erly, and they were under shelter of the 
 high mountainous range of Etna on their 
 left, they were obliged to stand out to sea 
 in order to till their sails, and so came to 
 Rhegium by a circuitous sweep." And he 
 cites a case of a passage from Syracuse to 
 Rhegium, in which a similar circuit was 
 taken for a similar reason, p. 736. The 
 day at Rhegium, as perhaps the three at 
 Syracuse before, was spent probably in 
 waiting for the wind. Ιττιγ. νότ.] 
 
 'the S. wind having sprung up,' — suc- 
 ceeded the one wliicb blew before. 
 SevTepaioi] viz. after leaving Rhegium : 
 a distance of about 180 nautical miles. 
 Ποτιόλους] Puteoli (anciently 
 DicEearchia, Strab. v. 4, now Puzzuoli) 
 was the most sheltered part of the bay 
 of Naples. It was the principal port of 
 Southern Italy, and, in particular, formed 
 the great emporium for the Alexandrian 
 wheat ships. Strabo, xvii. 1. Seneca (Ep. 
 77) gives a graphic account (cited by Smith, 
 p. 117) of the arrival of the Alexandrine 
 fleet at Puteoli : " Subito nobis hodie Alex- 
 andrinse naves apparuerunt, quae jjriemitti 
 Solent et nuntiare secuturae classis adven- 
 tum ; tabellarias vocant. Gratus illarum 
 adspectus CampaniEe est. Omnis in pilis 
 Puteolorum turba constitit, et ex ipso 
 genere velorum, Alexandrinas quamvis in 
 magna turba navium intelligit, solis enim 
 licet supparum (the topsail) intendere quod 
 in alto omnes habent naves. Nulla enim 
 res aeque adjuvat cursum, quam sum ma 
 pars veli ; illinc maxime navis urgetur. 
 Itaque quoties ventus increbuit majortiuo 
 est quam expedit, antenna submittitur, 
 minus habet virium flatus ex humili : cum 
 iiitrare capreas et j)romontorium ex quo 
 ' Alta procellos spcculatur verticc Pallas,' 
 cajterie velo jubentur esse contentie, eup- 
 
 tion. And (2) even more forcibly does this 
 appear by the form of the sentence, which 
 opposes to these τιμαι, bestowed on them 
 during their whole stay, τά πι.ός τ. χρείας, 
 with which they were loaded at their dejiar- 
 ture. Render it therefore ' honoured us 
 with many honours ' (or ' distinctions,' or 
 ^ attentiuns'). τήν χρίιαν has perhaps been 
 an alteration after St. Paul's «τταξ κ. f ΐς• 
 εις την χρείαν μοι Ι-π'ιμ-ιΙιατε, Phil. iv. IG. 
 11.] They probably set sail (see on 
 ch. xxvii. 9) not earlier than the sixth of 
 the ides of March (i. e. Mar. 10). 
 ΐΓαρασημ-ω .λιοςκουροις] ' with the sign 
 (of) the Dioscuri,' as ονόματι Τίοπλίψ, 
 ver. 7 ; not, ' Μ-//Λ the D. as a sign.' So 
 in the inscription found by the Rev. G. 
 Brown at Lutro (Phcenice) in Crete, given 
 at length in the excursus at the end of the 
 prolegg. to Acts, we have " gubernator 
 navis parasemo Isopharia." The ancient 
 ships carried at their prow a painted or 
 carved representation of the sign which 
 furnished their name, and at the stern a 
 similar one of their tutelar deity. Some- 
 times these were one and the same, as ap- 
 pears to have been the case with this ship. 
 Cyril, in Cat., says, εθος άεί πως εΐ' ταΊς 
 Ά\^ξavιptbJV μάλιστα ναΐισι πμός γε Ty 
 Trpojpy Ct'iui τε και εις ευώνυμα γραφάς 
 είναι τοιαύτας. See Virg. JEn. χ. 209. 
 Ovid. Trist. i. 9. 1. Pers. Sat. vi. 30. 
 Castor and Pollux, sons of Jupiter and 
 Leda, were considered the tutelar deities of 
 sailors. See Hor. Od. i. 3. 2 ; 12. 28. 
 12.] Syracuse is about eighty miles, 
 a day's sail, from Malta. 13.] ircpi- 
 
 f λθόντίς aj)parently denotes the roundabout 
 course of a vessel ta<'kiiig with an adverse 
 wind. That the wind was not favourable, 
 follows from ίπιγενομενου below. Mr. 
 Lewin's account is, "as the wind was west-
 
 284; 
 
 nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXVIII. 
 
 τη ■= ch. svii. 
 
 33 refl•. 
 11 I'll. xxiv. 10. 
 
 Phil. ii. Ϊ3 al. 
 ο ΜλΙΙ. XXV. 
 
 (I. 1 The.is. 
 
 iv. 17 Diilv. 
 
 1 King.sixJ-1. 
 ρ ch. XI. S reft. 
 q here only. 
 
 uvu\. f/., 
 
 Job xvii.il. 
 r — rli.xxvii.l. 
 s E|'b. iii. 1 
 
 r.ff. 
 f here only t. 
 
 ετττα και ούτως etc την ^ωμην ηλυαμζν. '' KUKeiUev 
 οι αδίλ^υί ακουσαντες " τα τηρι ημών ίζηΧΘον " πς 
 " απάΐ'τησιν ημιν '' ^XP'C Αππιου Φόρου και Τριών Τα- 
 βίονων, ους ιδών ο Παΰλος ίυγαριστησας τΐι) θίω ελαβίν 
 ' Οαρσος. 
 
 ^^ Ότε δε £ΐςί}\θομΐν tig Ρωμην, ο εκατονταργος 
 "^ τταρεδωκ'εΐ' τους• ° οεσμιους τω στρατοπεοαξ)•^ω, τω δε 
 
 ηλθομίν, with α(ί/ς»/λθ• G Τ1ι1•)Η (om tig) al : t.xt (η\θ. (ΐζ A 13. 3». 40. i)G ν al Thl2) 
 A15. — την bef p. om A 13. 9(i. 137 TliF. — 15. ot om Β 9C. — τα Trfp. ημ. om ν Syr ar erp 
 iBth: τα om 100 copt.— for ίζη\θ., ηλθον A 1?. 25. 40 lect 12 copt seth : ί/λθαι/ Β: 
 t.\t Gil Tilis (nrly) syrr al Chr Till Oec. — ημοιν 4. 13. 36. 40. 05-8. 95-G-7-i>. 103-77 
 all k'ct 12 Till': t.\t ABGH al Chr Thl^ Oec. —αχρι A 13 (prol/ a corrn from 
 J'ancicd ■propriety. Phrynichus says, p. 14, ed Lobeck, μίχρίς καΊ άχιιις συν τψ 
 σ, αδόκιμα• μίχηι Ss και άχρι λίγί, where see Lobec/c's note) : txt B(e sil)GH al. — 
 αππιοφορου luct 12: ηπφιον ψ. 137.— for θίω, χριστώ 10. 23. 37. 50. 80 . 100 al. — 
 16. rec ηλθυμιν (the force of the compound not beiny reyarded), with GH {ηλθον Η) 
 most mss ν syr al Chr Thl Oec : txt Α(-θα^ίΐ/)Β 40. 105 al Syr ar-erp copt seth al latt. 
 — £ΐς την ρωμ. G 137 l^ct 12. — for ο ΐκατ. irap. τ. ίΐσμ. τω στρατ. τω δι π., — ίττετραπη 
 
 parum Alexandrinarum insigne est." Tabernis.' — The brethren were in two par- 
 
 14.] These Christians were perhaps Alex- ties : some had come the longer, others the 
 
 andrines, as the commerce was so consider- shorter distance, to meet the Apostle. — 
 
 able between the two places. Iir' αΰ- We have in Jos. Antt. xvii. 12. 1, an ac- 
 
 Tois belongs to ΐπιμΰ)'ηι, not to παρίκλη- 
 θημίν, ' to remain with them:' see Heb. 
 X. 28. ούτως] after this stay with them .• 
 
 implying that the request was complied with. 
 — The brethren at Rome had heard proba- 
 bly by special message sent by some of their 
 fellow-voyagers. [See a detailed account of 
 the stages of the journev not here mentioned, 
 in C. and H. ii., pp. 364 ff.] 15. τα 
 
 irepi ημών] ' the news concerning us,' 
 i. e. that we were coming. Άττιτίον 
 
 Φ. κ. Τ. Ταβ.] Luke writes as one of the 
 travellers to Rome, who would come on 
 Appii Forum (forty-three miles from Rome) 
 lirst. It was on the Via Appia (" Censura 
 clara eo anno (u.c. 442) Appii Claudii, et 
 C. Plautii fuit ; memorise tamen felicioris 
 ad posteros nomen Appii, quod viam mu- 
 nivit et aquam in urbem duxit, eaque unus 
 perfecit." Liv. ix. 29), which leaving Rome 
 by the Porta Capena, passed through the 
 Pontine marshes, as far as Capua. Being 
 not far from the coast (Strabo, v. 233), 
 it was the resort of sailors (' Forum Appi 
 Differtum nautis, cauponibus atque ma- 
 lignis.' Hor. Sat. i. 5. 3. It has been 
 suggested to me, that these may have been 
 sailors belonging to the canal boats, as 
 Appii Forum is too far inland to have been 
 resorted to by sailors from the coa-t), and an 
 unpleasant halting-idace for tra\ ellers, hav- 
 ing, besides, ' aqua deterrima' (ib. ver. 7). — 
 The ' Tres Tabernae ' was a ' taberna dever- 
 soria,' or way-side inn, ten miles nearer 
 Rome. Cicero mentions both in the letters 
 to Atticus, ii. 10. ' Ab Appii Foro hora 
 quarta : dederam aliam paullo ante Tribus 
 
 count of the pretended Alexander, on his 
 way to Rome, landing at Dicasarchia (Pu- 
 teoli, see above), and it is added, ττρυςίλ- 
 θόντος £ίς• Γί)ν 'Ρώμην λόγου τοϋ ττίρι 
 αύτοΐι, πάν το Tijdt Ίονδαιων πλήθος 
 νπαντιάζοί'Τίΐ; ihjtaav. Suet, relates, on 
 Caligula's return from Germany, "populi R. 
 sexum, aetatem, ordinem omnem usque ad 
 vicesinium lapidem effudisse se." Cal. c. 4. 
 And Tacit. Ann. iii. 5, speaking of the 
 honours paid by Augustus to the body of 
 Drusus, says, " ipsum quippe asperrimo 
 hiemis Ticinum usque progressum, neque 
 abscedentem a corpore simul urbem intra- 
 visse." θάρσος] Both encouragement 
 
 as to his own arrival, as a prisoner, in the 
 vast metropolis, — in seeing such affection, 
 to which he was of all men most sensible; 
 and encouragement as to his yreat work so 
 long contemplated, and now about to com- 
 mence in Rome, — in seeing so promising a 
 beginning for him to build on. 16.] 
 
 The omission of the words ό ίκατ to 
 
 στρητοπίΰ(Ίρχψ has probably been origi- 
 nally caused by the transcriber's eye pass- 
 ing from -ί'ρχιις to -«ρχω, as in syr. (' j)er- 
 misit centurio Paulo ') : this done, the 
 emendation of the text so as to construe by 
 ejecting ό ϊκατόντηρχος was obvious. — It 
 does not follow, from the sinyvlar being 
 used, that there was bid one praefectus prse- 
 torio at this time, and that one Burrus ; — 
 though it may have been so. The prefect 
 mentioned might be one of the two who 
 preceded Burrus, or one of the two who 
 followed him — so that no chronological da- 
 tum is here contained (against Wieseler,
 
 IKal. Exod. 
 vii. 11. 
 ζ cli. xiii. 50 
 
 i. Γ). 
 
 xvii. 'J2 
 
 15—21. nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 285 
 
 Παυλω " ίττίτραττη μίνειν ^ καθ εαυτόν συν τω * ψυλάσ- η - cii.xxvi.i 
 σοντι αυτυν στρατιωττι. ' " ayevaru δε μίτά ημίρας τρΰς ^iX^ceu^ 
 ^ συ-γκαΧίσασθαι αυτυν τους οντάς των Ιουδαίων ^ πρώ- \v='l'h!xii.4 
 τους' ^ συνίΧθυντων δε αυτών ελεγεία προς αυτούς Έγω, ^ χν°ϊΓή'*'*ίι'' 
 
 «Λ ' ? Λ J. ^ ' S ^ b ' ' ' - -γ - -Λ - ίν Γι al tV. ' 
 
 αΐ'ορες αοεΛφοί, ουοεν εναντίον ποιησας τω Λαω rj τοις y = Mart χ 
 '^ ίθεσιν τοις ττατρωοις, ^ Βίσμιος εζ Ιεροσολύ^ιων παρ 
 ίόουην εις τας γ^ίΐρας των Γωμαιων, οιτινες ^ ανακρι- ά = λ 
 ναντες με εβοίιΧοντο αποΧΰσαι δια το μη^εμίαν αιτ'ιαν ''7eff' 
 Θανάτου ' υπάργ^ειν εν εμοί. άντιΧε-γόντων δε 
 
 Ιουδαίων ηνα-γκασθην ™ επικαΧεσασθαι Καίσαρα, ουν ^J,"j('^^ 
 
 ' " ''Δ η '' ο " 90 >> ^ ' al ch xxi 
 
 ως του ευνους μου έχων τι κaτηyopr]σaι. οια ταυτην h. jObxii. 
 ουν την αιτιαν '' τταρεκάλεσα υμάς '' ιοειν και ^ προςΧαΧησαι' gi-ukexxiii. 
 ενεκε»' yap της ^ έλπ/δος του Ισραήλ τ-ην ^ αΧυσιν ταυτην ^7^^^'^^' ^^ 
 
 U / ηι « Λ\ ν 5 \ f tff - >/ i ch. iii. 6 rcfl'. 
 
 περικειμαι. ^ oi οε προς αυτόν είπαν Η^αείς ούτε kLuk.-xx.a7. 
 
 45. Hos. ίν. 4 1 = ch. xxvi 11. Gal. ϋ. 3, 14. m ch. χχν. 11, &c. η constr., ch xsi. 13. 
 
 Winer, 5 4:''• 2. ο ch. sxiv. 2 reff. ρ = h^-re only. Xen. Cvr. i 5. 7, ύμας- πιιρ6καλ£ο.ι. 
 
 q = ch. xvi. 4(1. Luke viii. 2ii al. r ch. xiii. 43 only. Exud. iv. Ifi, alex. s con.>itr. w. Ren. 
 
 ufper.•;., 2 Ci)r. i. 7. Phil. i. 2U. t ch. xii. (i. xxi. 33. Eph. vi. 2U al. u Luke xvii. 2. Heb. 
 xii. 1 t• 4 Mace. xii. 3. 
 
 τω παν\ω only AB 40 lect 12 ν copt {prftceperunt paulo) arm syr {et permisif. cenhirio 
 paulo) Chr : txt GH most mss seth syr* al ThI Oec (see notes). — rec στρατοπίδαρχη, 
 with mss: txt GH fiC. 95'. 126 all lect I.— καθ αυτόν Β (Bentl).-^f rftv ίξω 
 του στρατοπίδου syr*: μ. καθ εαυτόν ίξω της τΓαρίμ3ο\ης \3Τ : Joras extra cantra 
 demid.— 17. rec for αυτόν, τον πανλον, with GH &c : txt AB 15. 18. 25. 30. 40. 
 68. i'l. 105-37 lect 12 al ν copt syr al Chrj. — rec ανδ. αδ. tyw {corrn of arravqe- 
 ment), with GH &c : txt AB 3. 13. 40. 68. 95. 103-5-;i7 lect 12 ν copt syr arm f hi. 
 — tyo) δε 30. 180.— for fi, εις 137• — 18. bef ανακα. ins ττολλα 137 syr*. — ηβου\. 
 GH 95. 137 : txt AB (e sil) most mss Chr al : add μ? 137. — απολυειν 133.^Θαν. αιτ. 
 13.^ — for υτΓ., εύρισκαν syrr ar-erp. — 19. των om 95. 137 Chr (comm) : pref μυι Syr 
 ar-erp. — aft ιουδαίων, ins και επικραζοντων, αιρε τον εχθρον ημών 137 syr*. — ουχ to 
 κατ7)γοη. om 33. — τι έχων lect 1 : τι aft κατηγ. 78. — κατηγορειν {rieglect of meaidiuj of 
 aor) AB 13. 25. 40. 68. 105 lect 12: txt GH most mss Chr Thl Oec— add «λλ iva 
 σώσω {λυτρωσωμαι 137) '"'/i' Ψ"χ';'' μου εκ θανάτου 137 syr*. — 20. ιδειι> νμας 57- 177• 
 — λαλησαι Η. — εινεκεν Α. — yap om 95 lect 12. — 21. rec ειττον, with G al Chr al : txt 
 
 who builds upon it : Chron. der Apost.-g. the character and bearing of Paul on the 
 
 p. 86. He attempts to meet the above journey. στρατιώτη] a Prjetorian, 
 
 argument by accounting it improbable that to whom he was chained ; see below, ver. 
 
 the prisoners would be consigned to either 20 ; and note on ch. xxiv. 23. 
 
 of the prefects ; this may have been so, — 17.] The banishment of Jews from Rome 
 
 but they certainly would be delivered to (ch. xviii. 2) had either tacitly or oj)cnly 
 
 one, not to both ; and the fact might well been abrogated some time before this. Pris- 
 
 be thus related. Luke is not so precise in cilia and Aquila had returned when the Ep. 
 
 Roman civil and military matters, as that to the Romans was written, Rom. xvi. 3. — 
 
 he necessarily should in this case have Paul was naturally anxious to set himself 
 
 written εν'ι των στρατοπεδάρχων). — The right with the Jews at Rome— to explain 
 
 ' prafectus p7-cpt')rio' was the person offi- the cause of his being sent there, in c:ase no 
 
 cially put in charge with the ])risoners sent message had been received by them con- 
 
 from the jirovinces : so Plin. Epp. x. 65, cerniiig him from Judiea, — and to do away 
 
 " Yinctus mitti ad prsefectos praetorii mei if possible witli the unfavourable prejudice 
 
 debet." — The prtetorian camp was outside which such letters, if received, would have 
 
 tlie Porta Viminalis, where it liad been fixed created respecting his character. — The fact 
 
 and fortified by Sejanus : see Tacit. Ann. of his sending for them, and tlieir coming 
 
 iv. 2. τω 8e II. «r.r.X.] This permis- to liim, seems to shew that he was not ini- 
 
 sion probably resulted from the letters of prisoned in the Praitorian camp, but was 
 
 Festus, exjiressing that no crime was laid already in a ])rivat(' lodging. 18. 
 
 to the charge of Paul ; perliaps also ])artly €βουλ. άττολΰσαι ) This may liave been at 
 
 from the favour of Juhus, and his report of ch. xxv. 8. The possiljility of such a re-
 
 286 
 
 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 
 
 XXVIII. 
 
 ν — here onlr. ν ' ' -'^<::''0'^''Ί^' '' 
 
 {Gal. vi. 11?) yoauuiiTd Tveni σου iciQauwa απο της ιουύαιας, ούτε abgii 
 
 1 Mace ν. 10 '«^ , ', - ^'S^■V^- ' ' Λ ^^ •Λ / 
 
 '''xir'srreft πapa^yίvoμivoς τις των αόίΛψων αττηγγειΛεν ί) ίΛα- 
 
 X ΐΐηίίί"?χν.3. λησει» τι περί σου ττονηρόν. ■ αί,ιοΰμίΐ' δε ττορα σου 
 
 y — eh. XT. 38 , „ Λ ζ , - . > > ^ " a ' / ' 
 
 or.iy.^iMaec. α^ουσα( α φρονίΐς ΊΓίρι μεν γαρ ττ;ς αίρεσεως ταυ~ 
 "a^^'iMHic. της ''γνωστόν εστίν τ)/ιην οτι "^ πανταχού αντίλεγετοι. 
 
 xiv ί(1. Ο^ρΧ/ CW•""'/ '? ^ 5\»\ 
 
 ach.v. i7refr. ''•' ra£aii8VOt οε αυτω ημίραν ηκον προς αυτόν tic την 
 
 b — eh. i. 1ί) al. ^ -*■ ι /λ h λ 
 
 ce^Vv'ii'siiKff ^ ^tv'iav πλε/ονες, οίς ^ εζετιθετο διπ/ιαρτυρό^ενος την 
 
 <1 ver. 11). , . , „ 
 
 f — ch XV. 2 refl". constr., here only, roiit φόρον: TOf; Ελλιισι Tnfuc, >Elian. Var. Hist. xi. !). Job xiv. 13. 
 
 f I'liilem. 22 only t. Lilian, Var. Hist. iii. 37. g — ch. xi. 4 red'. h ch. xx. 24 rcfl'. 
 
 ABH al.— Ε^ίξ. TTtp. σου A 13 ν al ThP : txt B(e sil)GH i^ (nrly) syrr al Chr Thl• 
 Oec. — απο της lovS. om aeth : β Judecis tol arm-venet. — ovrt ης των αίίλφων των 
 τταραγινομίνων ίζ ηρο<το\νμων Syr ar-erp aeth. — αττηγ-γ. η om lect 12. — πονηρον om 
 13: ins bef πιρι 177• — 22. ακονσαι τταρα σου G 4. 38 40 teth al : ακονσαι om 13. — μ(}f 
 om 23-5-7. ί'6. — αγνωστον 13. — ημιν εστίν {corrn of order) ΑΒ 31. 40. G8. ΙΟδ-Ο 
 lect 12 Thl-: txt Gil most mss (appy) ν copt svr al Chr Thl' Oec. — 23. ηυτω 
 om 15. 18. 3G. λϋΟ.— ηΧΒον AB {-θαν A) 13. 15. 18. I!). 25. 3fi. 40. 73. 105-80 lect 
 12: txt GH most mss (appy) Chr Thl Oec {the more usual word has been substituted 
 for ?;κον, which only occurs here in Acts). — {(ς τ. ζιν. προς avrov lect 1. — for διαμαρ., 
 
 lease is asserted by Agrippa, ch. xxvi. 32, 
 19] ' My appeal was a defensive and 
 necessary step — not an offensive one, to 
 complain of my nation.' — The inf. aor. is 
 used of some one definite charge ,• had it 
 been κατη^ορύν, as in AB, it vcould mean, 
 ' to play the accuser against my nation in 
 any tiling :' indicating the habit. 
 20.] Ίταρεκάλεσα is here in its primary 
 meaning, ' I have called you to me.' 
 δια ταύτ. τ. alT.,for the reason just stated : 
 because I have no hostile feeling to my 
 nation. Then 'ivtKtv yap . . . adds another 
 motive ; for not only so, but I may virell 
 wish to see and speak with you, being a 
 prisoner for the hope of Israel (see ch. 
 xxvi. 6, and notes). 21.] It may 
 
 seem strange that they had received no 
 tidings concerning him. But, as Meyer 
 well remarks, (1) before his appeal, the 
 .lews in Judaea had no definite reason to 
 communicate with the Jews in Rome re- 
 specting him, having no expectation that 
 Paul, then a prisoner in Judaea, and the 
 object of their conspiracies there, would 
 ever go to Rome, or come into connexion 
 with their brethren there. And (2) since 
 his appeal, it would have been hardly pos- 
 sible for them to have sent messengers who 
 should have arrived before him. For his 
 voyage followed soon after his appeal (ch. 
 XXV. 13 ; xxvii. 1), and was so late in the 
 year, that for the former reason it is as 
 unlikely that any deputation from them 
 should have left before him, as for the 
 latter, after him. Ilad any left within a 
 few days, the same storm would have in all 
 probability detained them over the winter, 
 and they could not certainly have made a 
 much quicker voyage than Paul's ship to 
 Puteoli. Still, as casual, non-official tidings 
 
 might have reached them, Paul shewed this 
 anxiety. It appears however, that none had 
 come. Olshausen's view, that the banish- 
 ment of the Jews from Rome under Clau- 
 dius had interrupted the relations between 
 the Roman and Judaean Jews, is hardly 
 probable : see on ver. 17• 22.] The 
 
 ζ'ί and μίν are inverted: " μίν si dicitur 
 non sequente Of, aut intelligi potest δι, aut 
 omittitur ilia pars orationis in qua sequi 
 debebat 5£,qu8ealiquando praecedit." Herm. 
 ad Viger., p. 83!). It precedes, because it 
 connects with the foregoing. άξ. 
 
 πάρα σοΰ, ' we beg of thee :' see reff, 
 της alp. ταύτ.] To which they per- 
 haps inferred that Paul belonged, from ver. 
 20 : or they might have heard thus much 
 generally respecting him by rumour, though 
 they had received no special message. — 
 Their short notice of Christianity is perhaps 
 the result of caution, seeing as they did the 
 favour shewn by the authorities towards 
 Paul (see Hackett, p. 392) : or perhaps of 
 dissimulation. — Many comm. have noticed 
 the omission of all mention of the Christian 
 church at Rome, and of Paul's connexion 
 with or work among them. And some re- 
 cently in Germany (e. g. Bauer) have called 
 in question the credibility of the Acts on 
 this account. But without any reason : for 
 the work of the Ap. among churches already 
 founded is not the subject of our history, 
 and is seldom related by Luke, without a 
 special reason. Of the three years at 
 Ephesus (ch. xx. 31), — the year and a half 
 (ch. xviii.), and three months (ch. xx.) at 
 Corinth, we know in the narrative nothing 
 that took place among the Christians them- 
 selves. Besides, one great object of this 
 history is to shew forth Paul as working 
 out the Lord's implied command to preach
 
 22—29. nPASEIS ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΩΝ. 287 
 
 βασιλε/αν του θίοΰ, ππθων τε αυτούς ττίοι του Ιησου i = oh.%vii.2. 
 ' ατΓΟ τε του νυμου Μωυσίως και των προφητών, αττο χχ^^^^^ 
 
 k ν '/ 1 ' / 04 > • ν m ' 'Λ "Λ 1 Lukcxxir.29. 
 
 ΤΓΡωι εως εσπίρπς. icat οι i^fv εττεισοντο τοις Λεγο- cu. iv. a. 
 μϊνοις, οι οε " ϊ}7Γΐστουΐ'. ° ασυμφωνοι οε οντες 7Γ^)θς '"ϊϊ.^οϊ'ίΐ^ΐ.'" 
 
 αλλιίλους '^ ίίττελύοΐ'το ειποΐ'τος του Παύλου '^ ρήμα ^ εν, nLukexxiv. 
 ΟΤΙ ' καΧως το πνΐνμα το ayiov ^ ελάλησεί' cia Ησαϊου "Ij^'j^^j'^'^yi.• 
 
 J ' ' *■ ' ' - 26 Λ ' t ΓΤ ' 10. ύσ. πο. 
 
 Έ,πορ-του προφήτου προς τους πατβρας νμων ^" ΛεγοΓ 11θ|θευ- ^,χλ,,λο,,ρ^ 
 
 t'Wi7Ti... Λ \\•ν\ - \»ν>Α-'' < Diod. Sic. 
 
 ABE t/ijTi προς τον λαον τούτον και ειΤΓον Άκον ακούσετε και ΐν. ι. 
 
 ου jia; συι^ητε και ρλεττοι^τες ρΑίψίτε και ου μη ιοητί. q^'iti^xiii 
 
 27 U ' 'α ^ ' ?■' " Λ " ' ' - ϋ11|. Luke 
 
 ' ίπayυv\Jη yap t] καρόια του λάου τούτου, και τοις χχίϋ. 9. 
 ωσιν ραρίως ηκουσαν, και τους οψυαλμους αυτών ^.f- ■*" '• 
 
 W ' ' . ' >'Si - ' J, Ω Λ " 1 " ' ' S ch. iii. 21 refT. 
 
 εκο/ΐι/^ιυσαν μηποτί ιοωσιν τοις οώΌαλμοις και τοις ωσιν tisA. vi. s». 
 ακουσωσιν και τίί καρόια συνωσιν και εττιστρεψωσιν και χχ"!'•";• 
 
 Γ S ί S ~ ν here (and 
 
 ' / ' ' 9ί! V χ t >r Γ - w - Matt. xiii. 
 
 ιασωμαι αυτούς. γνωστόν ουν έστω υμιν οτι τοις j5),>niy. 
 
 εσΐ'εσιν απίσταλη τούτο το σωτηριον του σεου αυτοί \^^• J^""^• 
 κα\ " ακουσοι/ται. \^^ κα\ ταΰτα αυτοΰ ππόντος απηΧθον ^Zzlch^J.'l'. 
 οι Ιουδαίοι, πολλ?]»^ έχοντες εν έαυτοις συ^ϊ7Τ>7σιν.] '"' er^'sa^ '^''''' 
 
 ζ = Luke ϋ. 3π. iii.6. Ps. xcvii. 2. Lsa. Ix. 6. a fut. mid , John v. 25, 28. otlierwise, 
 
 Acts (6) only. b = cli. xv. 7 only t• 
 
 τταρατίίθεμίνοςΑ: -pon/iii-ocalThF. — rec τα π( pj, with Gal ClirThl Oec(seechvni. 12, 
 xix. 8) : txt ABH 13. 15. 18. 3G. 40. G8-9. 78• 101 -5-G-37 lect 40 al ν syrr ar-erp.— r£ om 
 137 lect 12. — μωνσ(ωι:οιη G8 syr. — απο εσπ.ίως πρωί 101 ; αττο ττρ. om Jer. — 24. οι μιν 
 αυτών 18t). — fv ρήμα lect 1. — 25. δια .... νμ. om syr. — rec τυνς πατ. ημών {most 
 prob altered to conform it to PaiiVs being a Jew, and to the tone of his other 
 speeches: not as Meyer and Bornemann, altered to νμ. to distinguish him from the 
 Jeics, or because the speech teas solely addressed to Jews. The νμ. here has an 
 important and characteristic meaning), with GH al ν copt al Chr Thl Oec Ambr 
 Jer : txt AB 13. 25. 40. 80. 95. 104-5 all lect 1 ν (ms) Syr slav al Ath Bas Cyr- 
 jerus Did Vig Qusest {νμ. προς τ. πατ. A).— 26. Xeyojv BG 13. 96 lect 1 Thl {corrn to 
 suit the sense) : txt AH al Chr Oec {λέγοντος Did). — rec (iirt {commoner form), with 
 mss Thl Oec : txt ABEGH most mss Chr.— add αντω Did. — ακονσητε, and β\(φητ{ 
 AE 13. 42. C8 al ThP : -σετε and -ι^ητε Η Bas : txt B(e sil)G all Chr TliP Oec— 
 σννειτε G Thl^ : συνιετε ]3.—β\ε^ητε 95 lect 1: βλε^/ιιτε 4-2.— ιδείτε 13.— 27. ωσιν 
 (1st) αυτών Α 13. 27. 3G. G5-G2. 104-5-80 alvss Thl, Jer2 (om,) Vig.— ωσιν αυτών (2iid) 
 13.— ίπιστρίψουσιι/ AE Thl'.— rec ιασωμαι, with B(e sil)E al Chr Oec {corrn? see 
 Matt xiii. 15) : txt AGH 25-G-9. 3G. G8. 73 8. 80. 95-6-7-8. 126. 137 all lectt 1. 3. 12 Thl. 
 — 28. vv 28, 29 om lectt \2. — νμ. έστω Β 31. — rec om τοντο {as unnecessary ?), with E-gr 
 Gil al ffith al Thl Oec : ins AB 13. 15. 25. 3G. 40. 105-80 e ν syrr copt al Chr.— 29. This 
 ver is omd in ABE 13. 40. G8. 96-lat lect 1 am k (latt) Syr ar-erp copt al: insd in Gil al 
 ieth syr* ar-pol slav Chr Thl Oec. {In the paucity of uncial MSS, and seeing that there 
 are no considerable varr in it, I have retained it, marking it as probably spurious. It is 
 perhaps one of those many additions which D alone of the first class MSS would have 
 contained, had it been preserved to us, and %vas inserted on acct of the abrupt transition 
 from ver 28 to ver 30 : but see notes.) — for πολλί^ν, τταΧιν Chr. — ζητησιν 19. 25. 80 al. 
 
 the Gospel 'to the Jew first, and also to suade.' Meyer well remarks, — Paul, on his 
 
 the Gentile' (ch. i. 8), and, having every part, subjectively, ))erformed that indicated 
 
 wliere done this, it is but natural that he by πε'ιθειν ; that this did not jiroduce its 
 
 should open his commission in Home by objective effect in all his hearers, does not 
 
 assembling and siioakiiig to tlic ye?AS•. alter the meaning of the word. 25. 
 
 23. T. ξ£νίαν] Probably the μίσθωμα of ίίττόντος] ' they departed, but not before 
 
 ver. 30: hardly, as Olsii., the house of Paul had said one saying.' It is very 
 
 Aquila. τΓ£ίθων] ' persuading :' not remarkable, tiiat the same prophetic tpiola- 
 
 ' teaching,^ as Kuiii., nor ' trying to per- tion with which our Lord oi)ened his teacii-
 
 288 ΠΡΑΞΕΙΣ ΑΠ0ΣΤ0Λ£2Ν. ΧΧΛΠΤΙ. 30, 31. 
 
 C ell. XNiv. C7 
 
 only. 
 
 Matt 
 
 2 Μη 
 d hrre only t 
 
 ^^"'EjueivEi' δε "^ δίίτ/αν ολην fV rSifo ^ μισΟώματι, καΐ abe 
 'x.^3. * απί^ί•χίτο πάντας τους Ηςπορίνομενους ττρος αυτόν, 
 
 .lire only t. 91 / ^ΟΛ' " Ω " ^^'ί' e^ 
 
 (Dcut.xxm. •'^ /οί;ρΐίσσωΐ' Τ7)ΐ^ ρασίλίίαν του σεου κ:α£ οιοασκων ^ τα 
 ch h.4i ■"■εοί του κυρίου 1ϊ?σου χριστού μίτα πάσης παρρησίας 
 
 Luke only t. i 5 -ν / 
 
 2 Mine iii. 9. ακωλυτως. 
 
 fE>th. ii. 14. 
 
 gch.xxiii.ll. Sir six. 30. li eh. ii. 2U. iv. 2!•, 31 only. Levit. χχτϊ. 13. i here only t• Job 
 
 xxxiv. 31, Synim. (Wi.^d. vii. 23.) 
 
 — 30. tvmtivtv Β 13: ίττιμεινιν 137. 15G : t.xt AEGII inss (nrly) Chr Thl Oec— 
 for if, ovr 3. 95. 137. — rcc St παυλος {supplementary insertion), with GH al Syr syr* 
 reth al Cbr Thl Oec: om ABE 13. 40. G8. 142 Icct 12 ν copt arm.— rptfrtfrr ΙΟδ.— 
 o\t)v om Syr ar-erp. — νπί^ιχιτο 180. — τταΐ'τας om seth. — tig avr. 13. 31'-2. 69. 9G. 
 142. — aft owro)' ins ιουδαίους 137: ιουδ. και ίλλ;;ΐ'ης• syr* tol latt. — 31. aft Btov, add 
 lent etnuTTtviov πααα^ι νοσον 33.— aft διδάσκων, add quoniani hie est Christus fltus Dei, 
 per quern omnis mnndus judicahitur tol latt: aft ακωΧντως, λίγωΐ" οτι ούτος ιστιν 
 ■χοιστος ηιηονς ο ΐ'ίος του Οεον, δι ου κόσμοι; όλος μίλλίΐ KpivtaOai syr deniid germ- 
 version of \4G2. — χριστοί) om 33. 99. 101-4 al syr. — μιτα .... 7rap(). om ieth : πάσης 
 om 4 Syr Thl-ms. — at end add αμήν 15. 18. 36. 40-3. 96 al Chr-ms. — Subscription : in 
 B, πραΚ(ΐς αττοστολων : in AEGH, νραζίΐς των άγιων αποστολών: Τίλος των 
 ■πραΚίων 73. 113-14: τίλ. συν θίω των πρ. τ. απ. 137: τίλος τ. πρ. τ. αγ. απ. 80. 
 93-6 al : Γίλος (ΐληφαν πρηξίΐς τ. αποστ. ταις δίησισι Χυυκα του θίη-γορου τον 
 συγγραφαντος αυτας ίμπvtυσtιθtta {-σθίΐσαι) 118 al &c. &c. 
 
 ing by parables, should form the solemn 30, 31.] It is evident that Paul was not 
 
 close of the historic Scriptures. 26.] released from custody, but continued with 
 
 the πορίύθ. κ. ίΙπι''ν is referred to himself, the soldier who kept him, — (1) from the 
 
 in his application of the prophecy. These expressions here ; he received all %vho came 
 
 words are not cited by our Lord (Matt. xiii. in to him, but we do not hear of his preach- 
 
 14). 28.] τοΰτο was probably omitted ing in the synagogues or elsewhere: he 
 
 as superfluous, and perhaps to suit Luke preached and taught with all boldness and 
 
 iii. 6. It adds greatly to the force : ' this, unhindered , both being mentioned as re- 
 
 the message of God's salvation,' q. d. markable circumstances, and implying that 
 
 ' there is no other for those ivho reject this.' there were reasons why this could hardly have 
 
 αίιτοι και άκ.] ' They will also been expected : and (2) from his constantly 
 
 (besides having it sent to them) hear it.' speaking of himself in the Epistles written 
 
 "Quod expertus erat Paulus in multis during it, as a^;ri4(»ie?•, see Eph. vi. 19, 20. 
 
 Asiae et Europse urbibus, ut apud gentes Col. iv. 3, 4. Philem. 10: Philipp. passim, 
 
 sermonis felicior esset seges, idem et nunc On the whole question regarding the chro- 
 
 futurum prospiciebat." Grot. 29.] nology of his imprisonment, — and the rea- 
 
 This verse has not the usual characteristic son of this abrupt ending of the history, 
 
 of spurious passages, — the variety of read- see Prolegg. to Acts: — and on its probable 
 
 ings in those MSS. which contain it. It termination and the close of St. Paul's life, 
 
 may perhaps, after all, have been omitted see the Prolegg. to the Pastoral Epistles, 
 as appearing superfluous after ver. 25.
 
 npo:S ΡΩΜΑΐοτ:^. 
 
 δοΰλ 
 
 ος -χωριστοί) Ιησοΰ, 
 
 Ι. Παύλος 
 
 στόλος, αφωρισμίνος εις ^ ivayyiXiov 
 εττι/γγΕίλοτο δια των ττροφητων 
 
 Jtov, 
 ev 
 
 Λ ν » ^ 
 κΑητος αττο- 
 
 2 
 
 ο 
 
 7ί 
 
 Phil. i. 1. 
 ι = 1 Cor. i. 1. 
 (1 ντ. ti, 7. 
 
 7Γ/00- Judr 1 al. 
 ' „ 1) Acf.s xiii. 2. 
 
 οαφαις S"'• '■'■'■.„. , 
 
 ' c 2 Cor. xi. 7. 
 σΤΓίρ- 1 riiess.^i. 2, 
 
 αυτού 
 3 χ - . - ,' 1 _ f 
 
 ayiaiQ πβρι του νιου αυτού, του ytvouevou εκ 
 
 ' ' 8, !». 1 Tim. 
 
 1.11. 1 Pet. ϊτ. 17 only. d 2 Cor. ix. Γι only t. e here only. See 2 Tim. iii. Ift. ch. xvi. 26. 
 
 f=Gal.iT. 4. Phil. ii. 7. Acts xix. 2ti. g Luke 1. 55. Johnvii.42. Acts xiii. 23. 
 
 Title. — προς ρωμαίους ABC (and DFG in the heading title) 3. 110-14 al and prefg 
 ίπcσroλαι τον άγιου αποστ. παυλου 1 : του αγ. {και ττανευψημον add J) αττοστ. 
 τταυλον (πιστ. ττρ. ρωμ. J 14. 44. 80 al. — alii aliter : rec ττανΧου τ. αιτ. η ττρ. ρωμ. ίπ. — 
 Chap. Ι. 1. rec ιησ. χρ. {corrn of order?), with AGJ(EK.') (CDF are deft) &c vss nrly 
 gr-lat-ff; txt Β am Origj Aug Ambr Ambrst Bed. — 2. αυτού om 17 Did. — 3. γίννωμίνου 
 
 Chap. 1. 1 — 7.] Address of the Epis- 
 tle, WITH AN ANNOUNCEMENT OF PaUl's 
 CALLING, TO BE AN ApOSTLE OF THE GoS- 
 
 PEL OF THE Son of God. " Epistola tota 
 sic methodica est, ut ipsum quoque exor- 
 dium ad rationem artis compositum sit. 
 Artificiura quum in multis apparet, quae 
 suis locis observabantur, turn in eo maxime, 
 quod inde argumentum principale dedu- 
 citur. Nam Apostolatus sui approbationem 
 exorsus, ex ea in Evangelii commendatio- 
 nem incidit : quae quum necessario secum 
 traliat disputationera de fide, ad earn, quasi 
 verborum contextu manu ducente,delabitur. 
 Atque ita ingreditur principalem totius 
 Epistolse qusestionem, fide nos justificari : 
 in qua tractanda versatur usque ad finem 
 quiiiti capitis." Calvin. — Paul in the ad- 
 dresses of his Epp. never uses the common 
 Greek formula χαίρίΐν (James i. 1), but 
 always a prayer for bleasing on those to 
 whom he is writing. In all his Epp. (as 
 in both those of Peter, and in the Apoca- 
 lypse) this prayer is for χάρις and (Ιρήνη, 
 except in the three pastoral Epp., where it 
 is for χ(Ίρις, tXtoc, atid ίίρηνη, as in 2 John. 
 In Jutki only we find ϊλεος, ίΐρήνη, and 
 αγάπη. — The address here differs from 
 those of most of Paul's Epj)., in having 
 dofjmalic clauses parcnthcticatly iiiscrtcHl : 
 — such are found also in th(! V.yi. to Titus, 
 and (in much less degree) in that to the 
 Gaiatians. Th(!se dogmatic clauses regard, 
 1. the forc-arinouncemcnt of the Gospel 
 Vol. II. 
 
 through the prophets : 2. the description 
 and dignity of Him who was the subject 
 of that Gospel : 3. the nature and aim of 
 the apostolic office to which Paul had been 
 called, — including the persotis addressed hi 
 the objects of its ministration. 1. 
 
 δοΰλος χ. *!.] so also Phil. i. 1, and Tit. 
 i. 1 (δοϊ'Χος θίοϋ, άττόστ. ίί Ί. χ.), — but 
 usually άν. Ί. χ. (2 Cor. Eph. Col. 1 Tim. 
 2 Tim.) : [κλ^^τός] άττ. Ί. χ. (1 Cor.), — 
 sim])ly απόστολος (Gal.), — δίσμιος χ. Ί. 
 (Philem.). The expression answers to the 
 Hebr. rtp] i2i\ the especial O. T. title of 
 Israel, and of individuals, as Moses, Joshua, 
 David, Daniel, Job, and others, who as 
 prophets, kings, &c., were raised up for the 
 express work of God. See Umbreit's note, 
 Der Brief an die Rcimer auf dem Grunde 
 des alten Testaments ausgelegt, p. 153 f. 
 κλητο5 άτΓοστ.] In naming himself 
 a servant of Jesus Christ, he bespeaks their 
 attention as a Christian speaking to Chris, 
 tians : he now further specifies the jflace 
 which he held by the special calling of 
 God : ' called, and that to the very highest 
 office, of an apostle,-' and even more — 
 among the App., not one by original selec- 
 tion, but one specially called. " Ceteri 
 (piidem a])ostoli per (liutinam cum Jesu 
 consuctudinem cducati fuerunt, et primo 
 ad sequiilam et disciplinaiii vocati, deiiide 
 ad apostolatum |)ro(lucti. Paulus, perse- 
 cutor antehac, de subito apostolus per voca- 
 tionem factus est. Ita Judici crant sancti 
 U
 
 290 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Ι. 
 
 ''ni.'^5.''Vcor. /^ίοτος Δαυίδ ^^ κατά. σάρκα, ^ του ^ ορισθίντος νιου 
 
 tv ΒννάμΗ κατά '" ττνίυμα '" αγιωσυντ)ς• " ίζ " αναστάσεως 
 
 κατά σάρκα, ^ του 
 
 Gal. " ' 
 iv. iiial. 
 Paul only. 
 
 SecJ.ilm viii. 15. i Acts xvii. 26, 31 reff. X. 42. k Mark ix. I. ch. xv. 13, 1». 1 Cur. iv 20. 
 
 XV. 43. Col. i. 2i)al. 1 Gal iv. 2«. m here only. See John xiv. 17 al. 2 Tim i. 7. 1 John 
 
 iv. (Ϊ. άγ., 2 Cor. vii. 1. 1 Thc^s. iii 13 only. η = James ii. 18 (l)is). Rev. viii. 11 al. 
 
 ο Aclsxyii. 32. xxvi. 23al. 1 Cur. xv. 12 reft. Heb. vi. 2 L. P. 
 
 73 al lat- mss nientd by Aug : t.\t (MSS vss) Orig• oft Cyr-jeruSj Thdrt Thl Oec al : qui fact us 
 est it V Tert Hil Ruf and sometimes Iren Aug. — 4. for ορίσΟ., ττροορισΘ. Marcell (in Eus) 
 Thdotians (in Ejiij)!! : prcedestinatvs ν it Iren Arnob Ambrst Pelag all : txt (MSS vss) Orig.j 
 Ath ChrTlidrtPhot all: and destmaius Tert Hil Ruf-e.\pr. —for κατά πνεύμα, και ττνίνματι 
 
 Grseci, sancti ex mera concerning His Son : — and announced by 
 
 ίου ABCE 
 JK 
 
 ex i)ronnssione 
 vocatione, ver. 6. Prsecipuam ergo iwcatus 
 apostolus cMmvocaiis Sanctis similitudinem 
 et conjunrtionem habebat." Bengel. 
 airoaToXos must not be taken liere in the 
 wider sense, of a missionary, as in ch. xvi. 
 7, but in its higher and peculiar meaning, 
 in which the Twelve bore the title {ους και 
 αποστόλους• ωνήμαπίν, Luke vi. 13), and 
 Paul (and perhaps Barnabas), and James 
 the Lord's brother. This title was not con- 
 ferred on Paul by the αφορίσατε 6ή μοι of 
 the Holy Spirit, Acts xiii. 2, but in virttie 
 of /lis special call by the Lord in person ; 
 compare σκίνος ΐκλογί/ς. Acts ix. 15, with 
 εζίλιξάμην, John vi. 70 ; xiii. 18 ; xv. 16. 
 Acts i. 2. " Neque enim iis assentior, qui 
 earn de qua loquitur vocationem ad seternam 
 Dei electionem referant." Calvin. 
 άφωρισμενο5] not in Acts xiii. 2 merely, 
 though that was a particular application of 
 the general truth : — but (as in Gal. i. 15, ό 
 θίος ο ά^ορίσας μβ ίκ κοιλίας μητρός μον) 
 from his birth. " Idem Phariseei etymon 
 fuerat : hoc autem loco Paulus se non 
 solum ex hominibus, ex Judseis, ex disci- 
 pulis, sed etiam ex doctoribus segregatum a 
 Deo sigiiificat." Bengel. els] ' for 
 
 the piirpose of announcing.' εϋαγ- 
 
 γε'λιον θ€ον = το ιύαγ. τον θ., which (see 
 retl.) is the usual form. Bp. Middleton 
 (on ver. 17) remarks on the a?ia>-M>-o?/sneii 
 of Paul's style, and cites from Dion. Hal. 
 de Comp. Verb. § 22, as a character of the 
 αυστηρά αρμονία, that it is όλιγοσύν- 
 ίισμης, άναρθρος. See the passage cited 
 at length in the Prolegomena, ch. ii. § 5. 
 — ' the good tidings sent by (not concern- 
 ing) God.' The genitive is not, as in to 
 evityyiXiov της βασιλήας, Matt. iv. 23. 
 Mark i. 1, one of apposition, but of pos- 
 session or origin ; ' God's Gospel.' And 
 
 way οι promise, so that God stood pledged 
 to its realization. tTrnSt) ίί και καινοτο- 
 μιαν tvtKOXiwv τψ ττράγματι, δίίκινσιν 
 αι'ιτο ττρίπβντίρον Έλλϊ/νωι/ or, και ίΐ> 
 τοΊς ττρηφηταις ττ poSiay ραφόμίνον . Chrys. 
 Hom. ii. p. 431 c. ΥΡ<^Ψ• °•Υ•] "o*'> 
 
 ' in sacred irriiinffs,' — nor ' in passages of 
 Holy Writ .•' — but ' in the Holy Scrip- 
 tures.' The expression used is defined 
 enough by the adjective, to be well under- 
 stood without the article ; — so ττηνμα 
 άγιωσ. below, — πν. ayiov passim. See 
 Winer, § 18. 2 (and for nouns in govern- 
 ment, Middleton, ch. iii. § 6). But one 
 set of writings being holy, it was not neces- 
 sary to designate tliem more particularly. 
 See also above on tvayy. θιον. This 
 expression («ΰαγγ. ο ιτροίττηγγ.) is used 
 in the strictest sense. Moses gave the 
 Latv : the prophets proclaimed the Gos- 
 pel. See Umbreit's note, p. 159. 
 3. Trepi τον uloi) αΰτοΰ] belongs to ο 
 ■προίπ. above, — ' which he promised be- 
 forehand, &c., concerning His Son,' i. e. 
 ' which (good tidings) He promised before- 
 hand, &c., and indicated that it should be 
 concerning His Son.' This is more natural 
 than to bind these words to ihayy. θ(οϋ 
 which went before. Either meaning will 
 suit ver. 9 equally well. — Christ, the Son of 
 God, is the great subject of the good news. 
 γ€νομ.€νου] not ovtoc, see John i. 
 1 — 3, and notes. κατά σάρκα] On 
 
 the side of His humanity, our Lord ty'tvtTo ; 
 that nature of His begins only then, when 
 He was yivόμ^voς ίκ γυναικός, Gal. iv. 4. 
 (τάρξ is here used exactly as in 
 John i. 14, ό λόγος σαρξ ίγίνετο, to sig- 
 nify that whole nature, body and soul, 
 of which the outward visible tabernacle 
 of the FLESH is the concrete representa- 
 
 so, whenever the expression ' the Gospel of tion to our senses. — The words Ik σττέρ 
 
 Christ' occiu-s, it is not ' the Gospel about 
 Christ,' but Christ's Gospel; that Gospel 
 which ilows out of His grace, and is His 
 gift to men.— Thus in the very beginning 
 of the Epistle, these two short words an- 
 nounce that the Gospel is of God, — in other 
 words, that salvation is of grace only. 
 2.] This good tidings is no new inven- 
 tion, no after-thought, — but was lo7ig ago 
 announced in what God's prophets wrote 
 
 μ,ατος Δανίδ cast a hint back at the pro- 
 mise just spoken of. At the same time, in 
 so solemn an enunciation of the dignity of 
 the Son of God, they serve to shew that 
 even according to the Imman side. His 
 descent had been fixed in the line of him 
 who was Israel's anointed and greatest 
 king. 4.] The simple antithesis would 
 
 have been, Γοϋ μίν γινομίνον , . . υντος δε 
 ν'ιον θεοΐι κατά πνεύμα, see 1 Tim. iii. 10.
 
 4, 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 291 
 
 νίκρων 
 
 ρ 
 
 /Ι 
 
 βομ 
 
 ησου χριστού του κυοΊου ημών, δι' ού ελά- Ρ=^^\':^|'ρ3• 
 
 χαρι 
 
 )ληΐ' 
 
 q Acts 1.25. 1 Cor. is. 2. GhI ii. 8 only. Dent. xxii. 7. 
 13. 1 Pet. i. 22. s aud constr., 2 Cor. x. 5. ch. χτ 
 
 iii. lu. Gal. 
 Eph. 
 
 νπακυην πιστίως 
 
 iii. 2. 
 
 r = vv. 16, 17. ch. xvi. 2ti. 2 Cor. ix. 
 2fi. 1 Pet. i. 22. πιστ. (ohjcctivej, .\cts TJ. 7. 
 
 Chr-text (mss vary) and coram (and syrr, but syr om και) Eeth ar-erp : πνΐυματος 109. — for 
 roil Kvp. ημ., τον titov 33-δ. ΙΟί) al.— 5. /cat ατνοστοΚην om ar-erp Sedul : της α-οστοΚης 
 
 But (1) wonderful solemnity is given by be) the Son of God.' See reff. 
 
 dropping the particles, and taking up sepa- 
 rately the human and divine nature of 
 Christ, keeping ύ ν'ώς αϋτυϋ as the great 
 subject of botli clauses, and thus making 
 them, not contrasts to one another, but 
 correlative parts of the same great whole. 
 And (2) the Apostle, dwelHng here on 
 patent fads, — the announcements of pro- 
 phecy, — the history of the Lord's Humanity, 
 — does not deal with the essential snbsistent 
 Godhead of Christ, but with that manifesta- 
 tion of it which the great fact of the Re- 
 surrection had made to men. Also (3) by 
 amplifying πνίΰμα into ttv. άγιωσ-υνης, 
 he characterizes the Spirit of Christ as one 
 of absolute holiness, i. e. as divine, and 
 partaking rf the Godhead .• see below. 
 opiaBevTOs] " Multo plus dicit 
 quam άφωοιημίνης, ver. I : nam άφοοίζι- 
 ται unns e pluribus, ορίζεται unicus quis- 
 piam." Bengel. See reff. Nor does it = 
 ττροορισθί j /Γος, as vu\g. prcedestiiiatus, and 
 as Irenaeus (id. 22. 32) and Augustine de 
 Prsedest. Sanctorum, c. 15 : — " Praedesti- 
 natus est ergo Jesus, ut qui futurus erat 
 secundum carnem filius David, esset tamen 
 in virtute Filius Dei secundum Spiritum 
 Sanctificationis : quia natus est de Spiritu 
 Sancto et Λ^irgine Maria." But this is one 
 of the places where Augustine has been 
 mi.sled by the Latin : — the text speaks, not 
 of the fact of Christ's being the Son of 
 God barely, but of the proof of that fact by 
 His Resurrection. Chrysostom has given 
 the right meaning: ri ovv ίστιν, " όρισ- 
 OevTOS ;" τυϋ S^ιχ^θiι'τoς, ά—οφανθίντος, 
 κοιΘίντος, όμοΧο^ηθίντος τταρα της ά- 
 ■KUiTMV -γνόιμης και φίιφου . . . Hom. ii. 
 p. 432, D. That an example is wanting of 
 this exact use of the word, is, as Olsh. has 
 shewn, no objection to such use ; the opt'• 
 ζ(ΐν here spoken of is not the objective 
 'fixing,' ' appointing' of Christ to be the 
 Son of God, but the subjective manifesta- 
 tion in men's minds that He is so. Thus 
 the obj. words ποαϊΐ' (Acts ii. 3G), yevi'^t' 
 (Acts xiii. 33) are used of the same proof 
 or manifestation of Christ's Son^hip by 
 His Resurrection. So again Ιζιαοιώθη, 
 1 Tim. iii. If». ev Swajiei belongs to 
 
 ορισΗίντος, — not to υίοΰ Otov, — nor again 
 is it a parallel clause to κατ. irv. άγ. and 
 ίξ άναπτ. vtK. (as Chrys., who interprets it 
 άπύ Των θανμάτοιν ίίπίρ ίπραττί, Theo- 
 phyl. &c.) ' manifested with power (to 
 
 U 2 
 
 ιτνίΟμα άγιωστίνης] άγιωσ. is not = a'yiol•'; 
 this epithet would be inapplicable here, for 
 it would point out the Third Person in the 
 Blessed Trinity, whereas it is the Spirit of 
 Christ Himself, in distinction from His 
 Flesh, which is spoken of. And this Spirit 
 is designated by the gen. of quality, ayta»- 
 σννης, to shew that it is not a human, but 
 a divine Spirit which is attributed here to 
 Christ, — a Spirit to which holiness belongs 
 as its essence. The other interpretations 
 certainly miss the mark, by overlooking the 
 κητά πάρκα and κατά ττΐ'ΐϋμα, the two 
 sides of the Person of Christ here intended 
 to be brought out. Such are that of Theo- 
 doret {βιά της υπό τοϊι τταναγίου πνεύ- 
 ματος ίΐ'ίργονμίι•ης δυνάμεως), — Chrys. 
 (άπό τον ■πνίΰματος, δι ου τον άγιασμον 
 εδωκεν), &C. Calvin and Olshausen seem to 
 wish to include the notion of *a?ic///^/7i^(ayt- 
 απμός) in άγιωσΰνη, — which however true, 
 is more than strictly belongs to the words. 
 See by all means, on the whole, Umbreit's 
 important note, pp. 1C4 — 172. Ιξ] 
 
 not 'from and after' (as Theodoret, Lu- 
 ther, Grotius, al.), nor = άπό, which could 
 not be used here, but 'by,' as the ' modus 
 probandi ;' the source, out of which the 
 demonstration proceeds. άνασ-τάσ€ως 
 
 νίκρών] not =: άνιιστ. £Κ vficpdii', — which, 
 besides the force done to the words, would 
 be a weakening of the strong expression of 
 the Apostle, who takes here summarily and 
 by anticipation the Resurrection of Jesus 
 as being, including, involving (ίγώ βΐμ,ι »'/ 
 άΐ/άστατις•, John xi. 25) the {whole) Resur- 
 rection of the dead. So that we must not 
 render as E. V. ' the resurrection from the 
 dead,' but ' the resurrection of the dead,' 
 regarded as accomplished in that of Christ. 
 It was the full accomplishment of this, 
 which more than any thing declared Him 
 to be the Son of God : see John v. 25 — 29. 
 Thus in these words lies wrapped up the 
 argument of ch. vi. 4 ff. Ίησ. χρ. τ. 
 
 κ•υρ. ήμ.] Having given this descrijjtion of 
 the Person and dignity of the Son of God, 
 very Man and very God, he now identities 
 this divine Person with Jksus Christ, the 
 Lord and Master of Christians, — the his- 
 torical object of their faith, and (see words 
 following) the Appointer of himself to the 
 apostolic office. 5. δι' ov] as in Gal. i. 
 
 1. 1 Cor. i. 9, designating the Lord Himself 
 as the Agent in conferring the grace and
 
 292 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Ι. 
 
 tv 2tiai.' iv πασιν τοις ίθνεσιν υττίο του ονόματος αυτού, ^ fv οις g e^ 
 
 3 John 7. , ^,„^χ..- „7- - πασί... 
 
 nvtr. 1. W. £(77•ε (cot Όίΐίΐς κλητοι Ιησον ■χριστού, ' πασιν τοις abce 
 
 gfii., here ^ t.i - - - f GJK 
 
 Mtel/^" ουσιν εν Ρώ/χρ ' αγαπητοίς θεοΰ, " κλητοις '" αγίοις. ϋκλη- 
 
 TW. gen., Acts , r- χ»/ '^Ο" \r- \ / τοιγ.... 
 
 XV. ΐ'5. ch. γαρις υμιν και ίίρηνη απο σίου πατρός Ί]μων και κυρίου abcd 
 
 only. (Paul.) o^_ \ χ y ""fl" S'^'T 
 
 w-Acisix. " ΙΙρωτον μίν ίυγαριστω τω σεω μου οια Ιησου \ρι- 
 
 X Luke χτϋί. 1 1. John ϋί. <11. 1 Cur. ΐ. 4 al. 
 
 eaten (ms) ar-pol. — 7. tv ρώμη om G g schol in 47 : το tr ρώμη, nvrt tv τη ιζηγησίί, 
 οιΐΓί £1' τω prjTio μνημο^ηνει. — for αγαττητ, θίον, tv αγάπη θιου G d g am Ambrst-ins : 
 om Ε «2 e. — ημών om 73 Did. — 8. μ^v om 40' Syr seth al Chr-ed. — rec for nfin, νπιρ 
 {see note), with D'EGJ &c Chr Thdrt Thl Oec : txt ABCDK 17. 40. ul. 73-7• 80-7. 117 
 
 Apostleship. ελάβομ£ν] not ' all 
 
 Christians,' — but ' we,' the Apostle him- 
 self, as he not unfrequentlj' speaks. No 
 others need be here included in the word. 
 Those to trhoni he is ivriting cannot be thus 
 included, for they are specially contrasted 
 with the subject of fXa/Jo/itj/ by the follow- 
 ing ίψιίς. Nor can the aor. ελάβομι.εν 
 refer to any general bestowal of this kind, 
 indicating, as it must, a definite past event, 
 viz. the reception of the Apostleship by 
 himself. To maintain (as Dr. Peile, An- 
 notations on the Epistles, vol. i. Appendix) 
 that the subject of ίλόβομεν must be the 
 same as the ΐ/μώι• which has preceded, is to 
 overlook, not only the contrast just noticed, 
 and the habit of Paul to use indiscriminately 
 the singular or plural, when speaking of 
 himself, — but also the formulari/ character 
 of the expression ' Jesus Christ our Lord,' 
 in which the ' we ' alluded to in ' our ' is 
 too faintly indicated to become the subject 
 of a following verb. X^piv] Hardly, 
 
 as Augustine, " gratiam cum omnibus fide- 
 libus, apostolatum autem non cum omnibus 
 communem habet" (Olsh.) : for he is surely 
 speaking of that peculiar χάρις, by which he 
 wrought in his apostleship more than they 
 all ; see reff. άττοστολήν] Strictly, 
 
 ' apostleship,' ' the office of an Apostle,' see 
 rcH'. : not any inission, or power of sending 
 ministers, resident in the u-hole chnrch, 
 which would be contrary to the usage of the 
 word. The existence of such a power is not 
 hereby denied, but this place refers solely 
 to the office of Paul as an Apostle. [Keej) 
 the χάρ. κ. άττοστ. separate, and strictly 
 consecutive, avoiding all nonsensical figures 
 of Hendiadys, Hypallage, and the Hke. It 
 was the general bestowal of grace, which 
 conditioned and introduced the special 
 bestowal (καί, as so often, coupling a spe- 
 cific portion to a whole) of apostleship: 
 of. 1 Cor. XV. 1(». Aug. 1856.] 
 els] ' with a view to,' — ' in order to bring 
 about.' ντΓακοήν -ιτίίΓτεως] The 
 
 anarthrous character above remarked (on 
 εΰαγγ. θίον, ver. 1) must be here borne in 
 
 mind, or we shall fall into the mistake of 
 supposing i';. ττ. to mean ' obedience pro- 
 duced by faith.' The key to the words is 
 found in Acts vi. 7, ττολΰς rt ΰχλης των 
 \ίΜων νττήκονον τη ττίστίΐ, compared with 
 Paul's own usage of joining an objective 
 genitive with νπακυΙ], — see 2 Cor. x. 5, 
 (Ις την νπακοήν τίΐΐι χριστυϋ. So that ττισ- 
 rf ως is ' the faith ;' not = ' the gospel 
 which is to be believed ' (as Fritzsche, see 
 ch. X. Ifi), but the state of salvation, in 
 which men stand by faith. And so these 
 words form an introduction to the great 
 subject of the Ejiistle. tv τΓασιν τ. εθν.] 
 
 ' in order to bring about obedience to the 
 faith among all (the) nations.' The Jews 
 do not here come into account. There is no 
 inclusion, and at the same time no express 
 exclusion of them : but Paul was commis- 
 sioned as the Apostle of the Gentiles, and 
 he here magnifies the great office intrusted 
 to him. {iTTep τ. όν. οίιτ.] 'on be- 
 
 half of His name,' i. e. ' for His glory :' see 
 reff. " In the name of Christ is summed 
 up what He had done and was, what the 
 Christian ever bore in mind, the zeal which 
 marked him, the name wherewith he was 
 named." Jowett. See also Um.breit's 
 note. The words are best taken as belong- 
 ing to the whole, from Si ου to tBvtaiv. 
 6. ev CIS . . . .] The whole to 
 χηιστον should be taken together : ' among 
 whom ye also are called of Jesus Christ;' 
 otherwise, with a comma at ϋμι^ς, the as- 
 sertion, ' among whom are ye,' is flat and 
 unmeaning. — De Wette and Calvin would 
 take Ίησοϋ χρ. as a gen. of possession, 
 because the call of believers is generally 
 referred to the Father : but sometimes the 
 Son is said to call likewise, see John v. 25. 
 1 Tim. i. 12; — and with αγαπητοί θίοϋ 
 following so close upon it, the expression 
 can I think hardly be taken otherwise than 
 as ' called by Jesus Christ.' ίκλεκτοί 
 avTov, Matt. xxiv. 'A\, cited by De W. is 
 hardly parallel. 7.] This ver. follows, 
 
 in the sense, close on ver. 1. άγ. θ., 
 
 κλητ. άγ.] Both these clauses refer to all
 
 β— 9. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 293 
 
 στοΰ TTEOt πάντων υμών, on ύ\ πιστις υμών ^ κ ατ ay y ίΧ- y .x^tsiv. 2. 
 
 Λ ' "Λ - ' ο vy ' ' • ' ' ο ^ *'"^•'«ΐ•+. 
 
 λίται εν ολω τω κοσμώ. " '^ μάρτυς yap μου ίστιν ο υίος, ^,'^'"^-^'• 
 
 Λ ' ' " a 'Ι b 
 
 ω 
 νιου 
 
 ιτρίυω εν τω ττνίυματι μου 
 αύιαΧ 
 
 αυτού, ως 
 
 a Acts xvii, 1(i reff. ζ κ Pliil. 
 
 ί\ 1 Thcss. i. 2. ii. 13. v. 17 only f. 
 
 ιειτΓτως 
 
 i. 3. 
 
 fy τω ευαγγε 
 μΐ'είαν υμών ττοιοΰμαι 
 
 18. χ. 14 al. C = Acts χ. 28, 
 
 ζ Mitt. iv. ΚΙ 
 reft'. Acts 
 
 b £ Cor sii 
 e Eph.i. 16 reff. 
 
 al ΌΆΐη.—ημων 238.-9. μαρτνρ D'.— for μου (1st), μοι D'G 37. 80-7 al lect 12 it ν 
 Syr arr arm slav Thdrtj lat-if. — εν τω -κν. μου om Did : τω om 80 : μου om Syr ar-erp. 
 
 ihe Christians addressed .• not (as Bengel) 
 the first to Jewish, the second to Gentile 
 believers. No such distinction would 
 be in place in an exordium which antici- 
 pates the result of the Epistle— that Jew 
 and Gentile are one in guilt, and one in 
 Christ. άτΓ. θ. τΓατ. ήμ. κ. κνρ. Ί. χ] 
 
 Not, as Erasmus, 'from God, the Father 
 of us and of our Lord Jesus Christ ' — but 
 ' from God our Father, and from the 
 Lord Jesus Christ.' God is the Giver of 
 Grace and peace, — Christ the Imparter. 
 
 8—17.] Opening of the Epistle. 
 His thankfulness for ihe faith of the 
 Unmans : remembrance of them in his 
 jirai/ers ; wish to visit them : hindrances 
 hitherto, but still earnest intention of 
 doing so, that he may further ground them 
 in that Gospel, of which he is not ashamed, 
 inasmuch as it is the power of God to all 
 Λ\Ήθ BELIEVE. This leads to the announce- 
 ment of one great subject of the Epistle 
 {in a citation from the Scripture), — viz.: 
 Justification by faith. 8.] This 
 
 placing himself in intimate connexion with 
 his readers by mention of and thankfulness 
 for their faith or Christian graces, is the 
 constant habit of Paul. The three Epp., 
 Gal., 1 Tim., and Titus, are the only excep- 
 tions : Olsh. adds 2 Cor., but in ch. i. 
 3 — 22 we have an equivalent : see esp. vv. 
 ii, 7. — 11, — 14. fA€v] The corresponding 
 d't follows, ver. 13. 'Ye indeed are pros- 
 pering in the faith : but I still am anxious 
 further to advance that fruitfulness.' There 
 is no ΐκίΐτα to follow to πρώτοι'. 
 τω θ€ώ μου] ορα μίθ' 'όσης διαθίαιως (ΰ- 
 χηριστη' οΰ yap ίίπε, τψ ΰίψ, άλλα, τψ 
 θ(φ μου' ο και οι τΓροφϊίται νοίυΐκτι, τύ 
 κοινον Ιίιοττοιοΰμενοι. και τι θαυμαστοί' 
 (ί οϊ προφ7]ται•, αυτός γάρ αϋτύ σιινεχώς 
 6 0(νς φαίνεται ττηιών ίπΐ των ίούλων, 
 Otuv 'Λ^ίρ(ΐ«μ καΐ Ισαάκ καΐ Ιακώβ 
 ιδιαζόντως λίγων εαυτόν. Chrys. Horn, 
 iii. p. 43(ί Ε. δια Ί. χ.] " Velut per 
 
 Poiitificem magnum : ojiortet cnim scire 
 ciiiii fjui vult offerrc sacrificium Deo, quod 
 per inaiius Pontiticis debet ofTerre." Origen. 
 So also Calvin, " Hie habemus exemplum, 
 fiuomodo per (Christum agendfje sunt gratia;, 
 Ht'cuiidum Apostoli pra;cej)tum ad lleb. 
 xiii. 15." (Jlsliausen says, "Tliis is no 
 mere phrase, but a true expression of the 
 deci>est conviction. For only by the Spirit 
 
 of Christ dwelling in men's hearts are 
 thanksgivings and prayer acceptable to 
 God." But perhaps here it is better to 
 take the words as expressing an acknow- 
 ledgment that the faith of the Romans, for 
 which thanks were given, icas due to and 
 rested on the Lord Jesus Christ : see ch. 
 vii. 25, and remarks there. irept] 
 
 This prep, and ϋττίρ both occur in this 
 connexion, sec 1 Cor. i. 4. Col. i. 3. 1 Thess. 
 i. 2. 2 Thess. i. 3. Eph. i. lb". Phil. i. 4 .— 
 and it is impossible to say, in cases of their 
 confusion by the MSS., which may have 
 been substituted for the other. The in- 
 ternal criticism which would adopt ΰπΐρ as 
 being the less usual, may be answered by 
 the probability that υπέρ, being known to 
 be sometimes used by Paul, may have been 
 substituted as more in his manner for the 
 more usual ττερί. So that MS. authority 
 in such cases must be our guide ; and 
 this authority is here decisive. The differ- 
 ence in meaning would be, that ΰπίρ would 
 give more the idea that thanks were given 
 by Paul on their behalf, as if he were 
 aiding them in giving thanks, for such great 
 mercies : whereas TTtpt would imply only 
 that they were the subject of his thanks, — 
 that he gave thanks concerning them. 
 ή ττίστις νμ•] " In ejusmodi gra- 
 tulationibus Paulus vel totum Christianis- 
 mum describit. Col. i. 3, sqq., — vel partem 
 aliquam, 1 Cor. i. 5. Itaque \\oc\oco fdem 
 commemorat, suo convenienter instituto, vv. 
 12. 17•" Bengel. καταγγ€'λλ€ται] De 
 
 Wette notices the other side of the report, 
 as given by the Jews at Rome, Acts xxviii. 
 22, to Paul himself. This praise was in 
 the Christian churches, and brouglit by 
 Christian brethren. Iv ολω τω κόσμω] 
 A popular hyperbole, common every where, 
 and especially when speaking of general 
 diffusion through the Roman emi)ire, the 
 ' orbis terrarum.' The praise would bo 
 heard in every city where there was a 
 Christian church, — intercourse with the 
 metropolis of the world being common to 
 all. 9.] " Asseveratio pia, de re ne- 
 
 cessaria, et hominibus, reniotis ])riesertim 
 et ignotis, occulta." Bengel. There could 
 be no other witness to his practice in his 
 secret prayers, but God : and as the asser- 
 tion of a habit of incessantly praying for 
 the Roman Christians, whom he had never
 
 294 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Ι. 
 
 εΧθίΐν 
 
 / f ' > - - 10 
 
 fEph. i. ι«. τταντοτε ίττί των προςευνων μου 
 
 Ι Thess. i. 2. 1, «Λ h ^ i ' ί fl' k ' 
 
 phiiein.4 η^,η ΤΓΟΤί ΒυοοΜΰησομαι ίν τω 
 προς υμάς' ίπιττηθω yap 
 
 '" μεταβώ " ■χάρισμα υμιν ° πνευματικοί' ^ εις το '^ στη- 
 ριγΟηναι υμάς, τούτο δε έστιν "^ συμ7ταξ)ακ\ηβηι>αι εν 
 ιιν Εια της εν αλλί^λοις ττιστεως υμ(ον 
 
 ^εομενος, ^ ει πως 
 θεΧηματι του Θεού 
 ιοεπ' υμάς, ινα τι 
 
 ABCD 
 EGJK 
 
 ■ε και εμού. 
 
 only. fTTi 
 
 πνω^, Dii.d. 
 
 Sic. IT. 3. 
 g ch. zi. 14. 
 
 Phil. iii. II. 
 
 Acts xxvii. 
 
 12 (w. opt.). 
 h here only. mi ι 
 
 Thuc.viii. Π9. '^Λ*' 
 
 rii., ch. xiii. 11. i 1 Cor. ivi. 2. 3 John 2. Gen. xxxix. 3, 23. 2 Chron. xiii. 12. k Heb. x. 10. (Col. 
 
 iv. 12.) 1 w. inf., 2 Cor. T. 2. 1 Thes.s. iii. 0. 2 Tim. i. 4. Src 2 Cor. ix. 14 reff. P.s. cxTiii. 20, 174. m constr., 
 1 Thcss. ii. 8. Xen. Atiab. iv. 5. 6. η — cb. v. l.i, Ifi. xii. «. 1 Cor. i. 7 al. ο — Eph. i. 3. Col. iii. 16. 
 
 ρ Acts iii. 1». Tii. 19. ver. 20 al. q — Lake xxii. 32. ch. xvi. 25 al. Pa. 1. 12. r here only. 
 
 — ποωυμίνος 109. — 10. ττηντοτε om 67^ al Chr : τότε 109. — for ίίττως, οττως J (Tisch, 
 not G as Scholz) 5. C>\. 71-7• 9•^ al lect 12. — for ηίη ττοτε, και ΰηποτι 73.— aft ivoS. ins 
 
 τταντοτε 44. — 11. ειτιπυβω νμης om lect 12 : εις νμας om ieth. — 12. rovr 
 
 εστίν A ν it (g id est aut hoc enim est) {quod est copt). — παβακληΰηναι 38. — εν om 40. 
 — 5ia .... ττιστεως om 37 : for tv α'ΚΧηλοις, άΚΚηλων lect 8. — 13. for ου θέλω (om 48), 
 
 seen, might seem to savour of an ex- 
 aggerated e.xpression of affection, he so- 
 lemnly appeals to this only possible tes- 
 timony. To the Eph., Phil, (see however 
 Phil. i. 8), Col., Thess., he gives the same 
 assurance, but without the asseveration. 
 The thus calling God to witness is no un- 
 common practice with Paul : see reff. in 
 E. V. ω λατρ.] The serving God in 
 
 his spirit was a guarantee that his profes- 
 sion was sincere, and that the oath just taken 
 was no mere form, but a solemn and earnest 
 appeal of his spirit. So he describes the true 
 circumcision, Phil. iii. 3, to consist of oi 
 ννεύμαη θίψ λατρίΐίοιτίς. " TheLXXuse 
 λατρεύω generally for the Heb. ΓΠτ^, which 
 mostly implies the service of the priests in 
 the temple : e. g. Num. hi. 31 ; iv. 12 ; 
 xviii. 2, &c. The Ap. means then, that 
 he is an intelligent, true priest of his 
 God, not in the temple, but in His 
 Spirit, — not at the altar, but at the gos- 
 pel of His Son." Umbreit. Iv τω 
 evay.] >) του ίΰηγγίλίου ττροςθήκη το 
 εΐϋος ίηλοΊ της ίιακονίας, Chrys. Hom, 
 iii. p. 438 a. His peculiar method of 
 Xarptia was concerned with the gospel of 
 the Son of God. " Quidam accipiunt banc 
 particulam, quasi voluerit Paulus cultum 
 ilium, quo se prosequi Deum dixerat, ex eo 
 commendare, quod Evangelii priescripto 
 respondeat : certain est autem, spiritualem 
 Dei cultum in Evangelio nobis prsecipi. 
 Sed prior interpretatio longe melius qua- 
 drat, nempe quod suum Deo obsequium 
 addicat in Evangelii praedicatione." Calvin. 
 See thayyiXtuv, Phil. iv. 15. is] 
 Not to be taken with άίιηΧειτττως, but (see 
 reff.) depends on μάρτνς : ' my witness, 
 that . . . .' iravTore belongs to 
 the following, not to the preceding words. 
 This latter construction would not be with- 
 out exami)le,— iv τταντί καιρφ αδιαλεί- 
 πτως, 1 Mac. xii. II, but this very example 
 shews that if so, its natural place would be 
 close to άοαλεί—τως. The whole phrase 
 
 is a favourite one with Paul, see reff. 
 " τταντοτε viccnominis accipio, ac si dictum 
 foret, ' In omnibus meis orationibus, seu 
 quoties jirecibus Deum appello, adjungo 
 vestri mentionem.' " Calvin. al irpos- 
 ευχαί μου must be understood of his ordi. 
 nary stated prayers, just in our sense of 
 ' my prayers :' " quoties ex professo et 
 quasi meditatus Deum orabat, illorum quo- 
 que habebat rationem inter alios." Calv. 
 
 10. ίϊ ιτως] ' if hy any means.' 
 No subject of Ιεόμενος is expressed, but it 
 is left to be gathered from this clause, as in 
 Simon's entreaty. Acts viii. 24, δειιθητε 
 νμείς νπερ εμυϋ .... 'όπως μηδέν ίπέλθτ/ 
 ίπ' ίμε ιον (ίρήκατε, where οπ-ως κ.τ.λ. is 
 not the contents of the prayer, but the end 
 aimed at by it. ήδη Trore] ' before 
 
 long :' — lit., ' at last, some day or other.' 
 «ΰοδωθήσΌμαι] ' I shall be al- 
 lowed,' 'prospered:' see reff., and Deut. 
 xxviii. 29 : and cf. Umbreit's note. The ren- 
 dering, '■ I might have a pi'osperons journey' 
 (Vulg. and E. V.) is etymologically incor- 
 rect ; the passive of όοόω, ' to shew the 
 way,' ' to bring into the way,' must be ' to be 
 shewn the way,' or ' brought into the way.' 
 So Herod, vi. 73, ώς τψ Ιίλεομίνύ εΰωδώθη 
 τυ ες τον Αημάρητον ■πρη'/μα. kv 
 
 τω θίλ. τοΰ θίοΰ] ' ίη the course of,' 
 ' by,' ' the will of God.' £λθ€Ϊν belongs to 
 (νοδωΟΙ)σομαι, not to δίόμενος. 11. 
 
 Ιττητοθώ] not, ' I vehemently desire:' επί 
 does not intensijy, hut merely expresses the 
 direction of the ττόθος, see Herod, v. 93, 
 and comp. such expressions as μι) προς- 
 εώντος ήμας τοΰ άνεμου, Acts xxvii. 7• 
 
 ϊνα τι μέταδώ χάρισμα ττν.] That 
 the χάρισμα here spoken of was no mere 
 supernatural power of working in the Spirit, 
 the whole context shews, as well as the mean- 
 ing of the word itself in ch. v. 15, 16. vi. 23. 
 And even if χήριημα, barely taken, could 
 ever (1 Cor. xii. 4, 9 are no examples, see 
 there) mean technically a supernatural en- 
 dowment of the Spirit, yet the epithet
 
 10—15. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 295 
 
 ου θίλω δε νμας ^ ayvonv, α^ίλφοι. Ότι ττολλάκτίς sch. xi.ss. 
 
 t Λ' '\ Q " vr- \» Λ ' a u»' χ -1 Cor. χ. i. 
 
 προίϋίμην eAueiv ττρος νμας, και ίκωλνυην άχρι του ?" ι scor. 
 '' όίυρο, Ίνα Τίνα ^ καοττόν σχω και εν ύ/(ίΡ καθώς και ει^ tEpiK^i.9. ch. 
 
 - Λ - t'n ϋ'Ί-'ΛΛ ' >ΖίΟ /D' ''ί- 25 (inly t. 
 
 τοις ΛοίΤΓΟίς εσνεσίΐ^. '^ ^λλτ/σίν τε και ραηηαρυις, Exod.xi.4. 
 σοφοις τε και αΐ'οητοις οφειλίτης ίίμι' ^'^ ούτως "^ το χΐ!"•,,,,^ ^η., 
 
 ''\d Ά if- "''r»' e' Λ' her^only. 
 
 κατ £με προυυμον και νμιν τοις εν Γωμγι ευαγγελί- y = .)"iiniV. 
 
 22. Phil. i. 22. ίτ. 17. James iii. 18. Jer. -xvii. Κ). ζ Acts xxviii. 2 red. a Luke xxiv. 2.V Gal. iii! 
 
 1,3. ITim. Ti.H. Tit. iii. 3 only L. P. Prov. xvii. 28. b = ch. viii. 12. Gal. v. 3. Soph. Aj. 590. 
 
 bb = Rev. iii. Hi. c here only. Polyb. x. 44. 1. See ch. xii. 18. d Matt. xxri. 41. Mark xiv. 38 only. 
 
 2 Chron. xxix. 31. e coustr., Gal. iv. 13. pass., 1 Pet. iv. 6. 
 
 ovK οιομαι D'EG it Ambrst Pelag fappy) : txt (MSS vss) Thdrt Chr Thl Oec &c.— 
 ίκο\\ηθην 48. — της Sfvno 170 lect 12. — rec καρττ. rti'a, with mss ar-pol : om -iva J 42. 
 115 Syr copt al : t.xt ABCD(rt καρττ. D')EGK most mss it ν slav gr-lat-tF. — for σχω, ίχω 
 G77al: fiipa)arm(appy). — icni ora G 48. 109-78 all arrieth latt Sedul. — λοίποιςοιη 31 aeth. 
 — tOftatv om E-gr. — 14. for re, γαρ arm. — ασοφοις 177• — «''o. και τοις (θνισιν seth. — 15. 
 οντω A Slc: txtB?CG&c. — for ro /en r (μ(, ο ιπ ίμίΟ {qriod intne promphim est \ g^ea\x\^ 
 Pelag : quod in me est promtus sum d e Ambr Ambrst Ruf Sedul,). — tv νμιν D' 01 . 122- 
 57 d' g: επ νμ. G. — τοις tv ρώμη om G g. — 16. for ro, tni G: super g : de Aug Vig. — 
 
 'ίτνειψατικόν, and the object of imparting 
 this χάρισμα, confirmation in the faith, 
 would here preclude that meaning. Besides 
 Paul did not value the mere bestowal of 
 these ' gifts ' so highly, as to make it the 
 subject of his earnest prayers incessantly. 
 The gift alluded to was τταρί<κΚι\σχς, as De 
 Wefte observes, ιτνίυμ., 'spiritual:' — 
 springing from the Spirit of God, and im- 
 parted to the spirit of man. €ls το 
 στηρ. -ΰμ.] Knowing the trials to which 
 they were exposed, and being conscious of 
 the fulness of spiritual power for edifica- 
 tion (2 Cor. xiii. 10) given to him, he 
 longed to impart some of it to them, that 
 they might be confirmed. " The Ap. does 
 not say ΰς το στήριζαν νμ., for this be- 
 longs to God ; see ch. xvi. 25. He is 
 only the instrument : hence the passive." 
 Philippi. 12.] ίΐτα Ιπιιΰή και τυΰτο 
 σφόδρα φορτικον ην, ορα ττώς αυτό παρα- 
 μυΰίΐται ΰιά της ίπαγωγης. ίνα yap 
 μη λίγωσι, τι yap; σαλίνόμεθα και πιρι- 
 ψερήμίΰα, και της τταρά σοΰ ζίόμιθα 
 γΧώττης ιΐς το στηναι βίβα'ιως, ττρο- 
 Χαβιον άΐ'αιοίΐ την τοιαντην άντίρρησιν, 
 οϋτω λίγων (ver. 12). ώς αν tt tXiyf 
 μη νποπτίύσητί' 'ότι κατηγορών υμών 
 ΗΤΓον, ου TavTy Ty γvώμ^J ΐψΟίγζάμηΐ' το 
 ρήμα' άλλα τι ττοτϊ ϊστιν,'όπίρ ήβουλήθην 
 ίΐπίϊν ; ΙΙολλάς• ΰττομίνιτί έ'λίψίίς, υπ'ο 
 των ίιωκόντων πιριαντλούμινοι• Ιτηθύ- 
 μησα τοιννν νμας ϊδίΧΐ', ϊνα παρακαλίσω, 
 μάλλον ci οίιχ ίνα παρακαλίσιο μόνον, 
 άλλ' ίνα και αυτός παράκλησιν οίζιομηι, 
 Chrys. Horn. iii. p. 440 u. The inf. 
 συμ-παρακληΟηναι is [>arallcl with στη- 
 ριχίίΤμαι, tpf }h'U]<s understood : ' that is, 
 that I may be also exhorted and strength- 
 ened among you by the mutual faith of 
 you and me.' Tli;it tin• κίΙΙ he wislicd to 
 impart to them was παράκΚησις, is implied 
 in the σν\).τΓα[)(ΐκ\. See the same wish 
 
 expressed in different words ch. xv. 32, and 
 the partial realization of it, Acts xxviii. 15. 
 
 £v άλλήλοις, which might otherwise 
 be ambiguous, is explained by νμών Tt και 
 ίμοϋ to mean ' mutual,' ' which ive recog- 
 nize in one another.' ιτίστις is used in 
 the most general sense— faith as the neces- 
 sary condition and working instrument of 
 all Christian exhortation, comfort, and con- 
 firmation ; producing these, and evidenced 
 by them. 13. ου θέλ. δ. νμ. άγ.] Α 
 
 Pauline formula : see refl'. και έκωλ. 
 οχρ. τ. δεΰρο is best as a parenthesis, as it 
 is impossible that Vra can depend on ίκω- 
 λύθην. So Demosth. p. 488. 7» ϊμυΊ δ' ώ 
 άνδρες Αθ. δοκίΐ Αίπτινης {και /not ττρός 
 Διός μΐ}δεν οργισθ^ς' ούδίν γαρ φΧαϋρον 
 ερώ σί) ΐ] ούκ avfyi'w/csvfU τονς Σόλωνος 
 νόμους ΐ] ον συνιί-ναι. — The reason of the 
 hindrance is given in ch. xv. 20 — 22 ; it 
 was, his φιλοτιμία to preach the (iosj)el 
 where it had not been preached before, 
 rather than on the foundation of others, 
 
 καριτόν] Not, ' wages,' or ' result of 
 my apostolic labour,' for such is not the 
 ordinary meaning of the word in the N. T., 
 but fruit borne by you who have been 
 planted to bring forth fruit to God. This 
 fruit I should then gather and present to 
 God ; cf. the figure in ch. xv. l(i : see also 
 Phil. i. 22 and note. 14.] The con- 
 
 nexion seems to be this : He wishes to have 
 some fruit, some ])iOduce of ex]iendcd la- 
 bour, among the Romans as among other 
 Gentiles. Till this was the case, he himself 
 was a debtor to every such people : wlii(;h 
 situation of debtor lie wished to change, by 
 l)aying the debt and conferring a bcnetit, 
 into that of one having money out at 
 interest there, and yielding a icafiTriir. Tlio 
 debt vvliich he ow(h1 to all ntitions was (ver. 
 15) the obligation laid on him to preach 
 the gospel to them, see 1 ('or. ix. 1'».
 
 296 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Ι. 
 
 f Luke ix. 26. 
 2 Tim. i. 8. 
 
 σασυαι. 
 
 yap 
 
 ^^ ov yao ^ ίπαισ^ννομαι το dvayyiXiov' ^ ^υναμις abcd 
 ί'ις σωτηρίαν παντι τω πιστίυοντι. Ion• 
 
 Εστίν 
 
 h-rerisres. δαί'ω τ£ πξ>ωτον και'ΈΧληνι. ^'^ δικαιοσύνη yap θίου εν 
 
 rec aft tvayy. ins τον χριστού, with D''JK &c {τοντο 73) ar-pol slav (αυτού ieth) 
 Thl Oec {Dei Victorin Flavian): om ABCD'EG 5. 17- 07'• 137-77-8 ν it syrr 
 ar-erp copt arm {αντυν wth) Orig Eus Bas Cyr Chr Thdrt Procop Dam Phot Tert 
 Arnob Hil Ruf &c. — for «tow, θίΐυυ σταυρού 115, and simly (api)y) Pelag and 
 scliol in 124.— ίσηΐ' om D*. — (ΐς σωτηριην om G g.— πρώτον om BG g Tert : ins 
 (πρωΓω al) ACDEJK &c Tsi nrly Orig Chr-expr Thdrt Dam-expr Thl Oec Ruf-expr 
 Eed.— 17. for yaj), £t A Clem : tst (&c) Orig ΆΙ.—μου ίΚ -πιστίως C : ίκ πιστ. μον syr 
 
 "kW. — βαρβ• — σοφ. — άνοήτ.] 
 These words must not, be pressed as api)ly- 
 ing to any particular churches, or as if any 
 one of them designated the Romans them- 
 selves, — or even as if σοφοίς belonged to 
 "Ελλησιν and άνοητοις to βαρβάροις. 
 They are used, apparently, merely as com- 
 prehending all Gentiles, whether considered 
 in regard of race or of intellect ; and are 
 placed here certainly not without a pro- 
 spective reference to the universality of 
 guilt, and need of the gospel, which he is 
 presently about to prove existed in the 
 Gentile world. — Notice that he does not 
 call himself a debtor to the Jews — for they 
 can hardly be included in βαρβάροις (see 
 Col. iii. 11). Though he had earnest de- 
 sires lor them (ch. ix. 1 — 3; x. 1), and 
 every where preached to them first, this 
 was not his peculiar όφίίΧημα, see Gal. ii. 7» 
 where he describes himself as -πηηστίνμέ- 
 ιος το €ύαγγ€'λιον της άκροβνστίας, 
 κηθως ΠεΓρος τΓ/ς τηριτομης. 15. 
 
 όντως] " Est quasi .... illatio a toto ad 
 partem insignem." Bengel. ' As to all 
 Gentiles, so to you, who hold no mean place 
 among them.' 16.] The οΰ yap έττ- 
 
 αισχύΐ'ομαι seems to be suggested by the 
 position of the Romans in the world. 
 ' Yea, to you at Rome also : for, though 
 your city be mistress of the world, though 
 your emperors be worshipped as present 
 deities, though you be elated by your 
 pomps and luxuries and victories, yet I am 
 not ashamed of the apparently mean origin 
 of the gospel which I am to preach ; for 
 (and here is the transition to his great 
 theme) it is,' &c. So for the most part, 
 Clirysostom, Hom. iii. p. 444 b. 
 δυναμ,ις γαρ θ. etrriv] The gospel, which 
 is the greatest example of the Power of 
 God, he strikingly calls that Pov-er itself. 
 (Not, as Jowett, ' a divine power' nor is 
 ίικαιησ. θεού below to be thus explained, 
 as he alleges.) So in 1 Cor. i. 24 be calls 
 Christ, the Power of God. But not only 
 is the gospel the great example of divine 
 Power ; it is the field of ayency of the 
 power of God, working in it, and inter- 
 penetrating it throughout. — The bare sub- 
 gtantive ίννσμις here (and 1 Cor. i. 24) 
 
 carries a superlative sense : the highest 
 and holiest vehicle of the divine Power, 
 the δνναμις κατ' ίΚοχήν. " It is weighty 
 for the difference between the Gospel and 
 the Law, that the Law is never called 
 God's power, m, but light, or teaching, 
 in which a man must walk, Ps. xxxvi. 18; 
 cxviii. 105. Prov. vi. 23. Is. ii. 5." Umbreit. 
 And the direction in which this power acts 
 in the gospel is els σωτηρίαν — it is a 
 healing, saving power : for as Chrysostom 
 reminds us, there is a power of God ιίς 
 κύλασιν, and ίίς άπώλιιαΐ', see Matt. χ. 28. 
 — But to whom is this gospel the power of 
 God to save ? ιταντι τω τηστίνοντι. The 
 universality implied in the παντί, the con- 
 dition necessitated in the ττιστεύοντι, and 
 the δνναμις θίον acting ίΐς σωτηρίαν, are 
 the great subjects treated of in the former 
 part of this epistle. All are proved to be 
 under sin, and so needing God's righteous- 
 ness (ch. i. 11 ; iii. 1 — 20), and the entrance 
 into this righteousness is shewn to be by 
 faith (ch. iii. 20— v. 11). Then the ίύ- 
 ναμις θιον in freeing from the dominion of 
 sin and death, and as issuing in salvation, is 
 set forth (ch. v. II— viii. 3<i). So that if 
 the subject of the Epistle is to be stated in 
 few words, these should be chosen : το 
 £•δαγγελιον, δύναμις θεοΰ «U σωτηρίαν 
 τταντι τω 'Π•ιστ€•υοντι. This expresses it 
 better than merely '■ justifcation by faith,' 
 which is in fact only a subordinate part of 
 the great theme, — only the condition neces- 
 sitated by man's sinfulness for his entering 
 the state of salvation ; whereas the argu- 
 ment extends beyond this, to the death 
 unto sin and lije unto God and carrying 
 forward of the sanctifying work of the 
 Spirit, from its first fruits even to its com- 
 pletion. Ίουδ. ττρώτον κ. Ελλ.] This 
 is the Jewish expression for all mankind, as 
 "Ελλ. κ•, βαρβ. ver. 14 is the Greek one. 
 "Ελλ. here includes all Gentiles, ιτρώτον 
 is not first in order of time, but ' prin- 
 cipally ' (comp. ch. ii. 9), spoken of na- 
 tional precedence, in the sense in which the 
 Jews were to our Lord o'l Ίδιοι, John i. 11. 
 Salvation was tic των Ιουδαίων, John iv. 
 22. See ch. ix. 5 ; xi. 24. Not that the 
 Jew has any preference under the gospel ;
 
 16, 17. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 297 
 
 αυτο) ' ατΓΟΚαλυτΓτεται Ικ π'ιστίως ^ tig πιστιν, καθώς ye- '-^'«'?•^-, 
 
 ι = = J ^ / 2>. Χϊΐ. 17 al. 
 
 "γραπται Ο δε δίκαιος εκ πίστεως ^^σεται. kHAB.n. 4. 
 
 Eus Jer (Cypr) : tst (&c) Clem Chr Thdrt all Iren Ambr al. — for ζησίται, vivii it v. — 
 
 only he inherits, and has a precedence, 
 oidi γαρ, ίττίΐ Ci) τϊρώτός tan, και πλέον 
 λαμβάΐ'ίΐ τής χάρίΓος" ή yap αυτή S(op(a 
 καΐ τοντψ icaic£(i'(fj ίίίοταν άλλα τά^ίό>ς 
 ίστι τιμή μόιον τύ ιτρώτος. Chrys. Horn, 
 iii. p. 4-15 c. 17.] An explanation, 
 
 hotv the gospel is the power of God to sal- 
 vation, and how it is so to the believer : — 
 because in it 'God's righteousness' (not 
 His attribute of righteousness, — ' the r. 
 of God,' but righteousness flotving from, 
 and acceptable to Him) is unfolded, and 
 the more, the more we believe. I subjoin 
 De Wette's note on Cik. Qtov. "The 
 Greek cik. and the Heb. Πζ^^' are taken 
 sometimes for ' virtue ' and ' piety ' which 
 men possess or strive after, — sometimes 
 imputatively, for ' freedom from blame ' or 
 'justification.' The latter meaning is most 
 usual with Paul : Cik. is that which is so in 
 the sight of God (ch. ii. 13), the result of 
 His justifying forensic Judgment, or of 
 ^Imputation' (ch. iv. 5). It may certainly 
 be imagined, that a man might obtain jus- 
 tification hy fulfilling the law : in that case 
 his righteousness is an ic'ia δικαιοσύνη (ch. 
 X. 3), a Cik. £k τοΰ %'όμον (Phil. iii. 9). But 
 it is impossible for him to obtain a ' righte- 
 ousness of his own,' which at the same time 
 shall avail before God (ch. xiv. 21. Gal. ii. 
 IC). The Jews not only have not fulfilled 
 the law (ch. iii. 9 — 19j, but could not ful- 
 fil it (vii. 7 ff•) : the Gentiles Ukewise have 
 rendered themselves obnoxious to the divine 
 wrath (i. 24 — 32). God has ordained that 
 the whole race should be included in dis- 
 obedience. Now if man is to become 
 righteous from being unrighteous, — this 
 can only happen by God's grace, — because 
 God declares him righteous, assumes him 
 to be righteous, δίκαιοι (iii. 24. Gal. iii. 8) : 
 — CiKaioi'v is not only negative, ' to acquit,' 
 as ρ'ηϊΓΤ Exod. xxiii. 7• Is. v. 23, ch. ii. 13, 
 but also positive, ' to declare righteous :' 
 but never 'to make righteous' by trans- 
 formation, or imparting of moral strength 
 by which moral perfection may be attained. 
 Jvstificatio must be taken as the old pro- 
 testant dogmatists rightly took it, sensu 
 forensi, i. e. imputativebj. God justifies 
 for Christ's sake (ch. iii. 22 ff.) on condi- 
 tion of faith in Him as Mediator: the 
 result of His justification is δικαιοσύνη ίκ 
 ττίστίως, and as He imparts it freely, it 
 is δικαιοσύνη ΰιοϋ (gen. subj.) or ίκ i)tov, 
 Phil. iii. 9: so Chrys. &c. (δικ. Οίοϋ is 
 ordinarily taken fgr δικ. irapa θκ/ϋ, as 
 
 Luth. : ' bie ©erf cl)ti9teit bie oor ®ott gitt :' 
 comp. ch. ii. 13; iii. 20. Gal. iii. 11 ; but 
 
 that this is at least not necessary, see 2 Cor. 
 V. 21). This justification is certainly an 
 objective act of God : but it must also be 
 subjectively apprehended, as its condition is 
 subjective. It is the acquittal from guilt, 
 and cheerfulness of conscience, attained 
 through faith in God's grace in Christ, — 
 the very frame of mind which would be 
 proper to a perfectly righteous man — if such 
 there were, — the harmony of the spirit with 
 God, — peace with God. All interpretations 
 which overlook the fact of imputation (the 
 Catholic, that of Grotius, Baumgarten- 
 Crusius, &c.) are erroneous." [To say, 
 with Jowett, that all attempts to define 
 δικαιοσ. θίοϋ are " the afterthoughts of 
 theology, which have no real place in the 
 interpretation of Scripture," is in fact to 
 shut our eyes to the great doctrinal facts of 
 Christianity, and float off at once into 
 uncertainty about the very foundations of 
 the Ap.'s argument and our own faith : 
 of which uncertainty his note here is an 
 eminent example. Aug. 1856.] Iv 
 
 ανιτω] 'in it,' 'the gospel:' not, in τψ 
 ττιστίύοντι. aTroKaXvirrcTai] gene- 
 
 rally used of making knoivn a thing hitherto 
 concealed : but here of that gradually more 
 complete realization of the state of justifi- 
 cation before God by faith in Christ, which 
 is the continuing and increasing gift of God 
 to the believer in the gospel. Ik 
 
 ■7Γίστ£ως] " £κ points to the condition, or 
 the subjective ground, πίστις is faith in 
 the sense of trust, and that (a) a trustful 
 assumpti07i of a truth in reference to know- 
 ledge = conviction : (b) a trustful sur- 
 render of the soul, as regards the feeling. 
 Here it is especially the latter of these : 
 that trust reposed in God's grace in Christ, 
 which trancjuillizes the soul and frees it 
 from all guilt,— and esp. trust in the 
 atoning death of Jesus. Bound up with 
 this (not by the meaning of the words, but 
 by the idea of unconditional trust, which 
 excludes all reserve) is hnmililg, consisting 
 in the abandonment of all merits of a man's 
 own, and recognition of his own unworthi- 
 ness and need of redemption." De Λλ ette. 
 €ls Ίτίστιν] άπυ πίστίως αρχίται 
 κ. εΙς πιστίΰίΐντα λ};γ£ΐ (Occum.) seems 
 the most probable interi)retation, making 
 ■πιστιν almost =: rofi; ττιστίνοντας, sec 
 ch. iii. 22: but not entirely, — it is still the 
 aspect, the phase, of the man, which is 
 receptive of the δικαιοσύνη Otov, and to 
 this it is revealed. Tiie other interpreta- 
 tions, — 'for tlie increase offaitli' (iMcytr), 
 — ' that faith may be given to it' (Fritzschc,
 
 298 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Ι. 
 
 ^° ΑίΓΟΚαΑνπτίται γαρ ορ-γη υεον απ ουρανού ίτΐΐ 
 πασαν " ασίβίίαν και αδικ:ιαν αι^Ορωττων των την αληΟίίαν 
 
 η cb. xi. 20. 2 Tim. ii. 10. Tit. ii. 12. Juile XT. 18 only. Jer. v. 6. 
 
 18. >; opyr/ 72. — Otov om 47. — απ ovpavov om 40•. — for ασ(β., ασθί^ιπι/ CO'. — rwv 
 rti'0j). D'G 238. — aft α\ηθ., ins του θίου arm (not venet) ν latt llufj Ambrst Pelag (not 
 
 1 = Luke xvii 
 3ii. 1 Ciir. iii 
 13. 2 Tln:f^ 
 ii. 3. 
 
 π ellips., Acts 
 2 iii. 11 ref!'. 
 
 ABCn 
 EGJK 
 
 Tholuck, Krebs), — 'proceeding from faith, 
 and leading to a higher degree of faith ' 
 (Baumg.-Criis.), — do not seem so suitable 
 or forcible. — It will be observed that ίκ π. 
 ίΐς 7Γ. is taken witli άτΐοκαΧνπτίται, not 
 with §ικαιοηννη. The latter conne.xion 
 would do for ck tt., but not for els π. 
 καθώς γί'γρ.] He shews that righte- 
 ousness by faith is no new idea, but found 
 in the propliets. The words (ref) are cited 
 again in Gal. iii. 11. Ileb. x. 38, in the 
 former place with the same purpose as here. 
 They are used in Habakkuk with reference 
 to credence given to the prophetic word : 
 but properly speaking, all faith is one, in 
 whatever word or act of God reposed : so 
 that the Apostle is free from any charge of 
 forcing the words to the present purpose. 
 The two w-ays of arranging them, ό ί•ίκαιος 
 — ίκ ττίσπως Ζήπίται, and ό δίκαιος ίκ 
 πίστεως — ζίισίται, in fact amount to the 
 same : if the former, which is more agreeable 
 to the Heb. be taken, ζ1]σ(ται must mean, 
 ' shall live on,' endure in his δικαιοσύνη, 
 hy means of faith, which would assert that 
 it was a δικαιοσί'νη of faith, as strongly as 
 does the latter. See by all means, on the 
 quotation, Umbreit's note : and Delitzsch, 
 der Proph. Habakuk, p. 51 ff. This latter 
 remarks (I quote from Philippi), "The Ap. 
 rests no more on our text than it will bear. 
 He only places its assertion, that the life of 
 the just springs from his faith, in the light 
 of the N. T." 
 
 Chap. I. 18— XI. 36.] The Doctrinal 
 
 EXPOSITIOX OF THE ABOVE TRUTH : THAT 
 
 THE Gospel is the power of God unto 
 
 S.\LVATION to every ONE THAT BELIEV- 
 
 ETH. And herein, — inasmuch as this power 
 of God consists in the revelation of God's 
 righteousness in man by jaith, and in order 
 io faith the first requisite is the recogni- 
 iion of man's umcorthiness, and incapabi- 
 lity to ivork a righteousness for himself, — 
 the Apostle begins by proving that all. Gen- 
 tiles and Jens, are guilty before God, as 
 holding back the truth in unrighteousness, 
 ch. i. 1)!— iii. 20. And first, ch. i. 18 
 — 32, OF the Gentilks. 18.] He 
 
 first states the general fact, of all mankind ; 
 but immediately passes ofi' to the considera- 
 tion of the majority of mankind, the Gen- 
 tiles ; reserving the Jews for exceptional 
 consideration afterwards. άτΓοκ. γάρ] 
 
 The statement of ver. 17 was, that the 
 RIGHTEOUSNESS of GoD is revealed. The 
 necessary condition of this revelation is, the 
 
 DESTRUCTION of the righteousness of man 
 by the revelation of God"s anger against sin, 
 άτΓοκαλυτΓτεται, not in the Gospel 
 (as Grot.) : not in 7nen's consciences (as 
 Tholuck, ed. 1. Reiche) : not in the mise- 
 rable state of the then trorld (as Kollner) : 
 but (as implied indeed by the adjunct άττ' 
 οΰρανυϊ', — tiiat it is il providential, univer- 
 sally-to-be-seen revelation) in the punish- 
 ments which, ver. 24, God has made to 
 follow upon sin, see also ch. ii. 2 (so De W., 
 Meyer, Tholuck ed. 5, &c.). So that άποκ, 
 is of an objective reality here, not of an 
 evangelic internal and subjective unfolding. 
 οργή θίοΰ is anthropopathically, 
 but with the deepest truth, put for the 
 righteotisness of God in punishment (see 
 ch. ii. 8 ; v. 9. Eph. ii. 3. Matt. iii. 7. 
 John iii. 3G). It is the opposite, in the 
 divine attributes, to Love (De W.). 
 άττ' οΰρ. (see above), belongs to άποκαλν- 
 ■πτίται, not to Qtov, nor to opyi) θίοϋ (?; 
 άττ' ovp.). άσβ'βίίαν, ' godlessness ;' 
 
 άδικίαν, ' iniquity :' but neither term is 
 exclusive of the other, nor to be formally 
 pressed to its limits. They overlap and 
 include each other by a large margin : the 
 specitic diflerence being, that άσίβ. is more 
 the fountain (but at the same time par- 
 tially the result) of αδικία, — which αδικ. is 
 more the result (but at the same time par- 
 tially the fountain) of άσίβίΐα. άδικ. is 
 the state of the thoughts and feelings and 
 habits, induced originally by forgetfulness 
 of God, and in its turn inducing impieties 
 of all kinds. We may notice by the way, 
 that the word ασίβιια forms an interesting 
 link to the Pastoral Epistles. άνθρ. των 
 
 την άλ. ev αδικία κατ€χόντων] ' of men 
 ■who hold back the truth in iniquity ;' 
 who, possessing enough of the germs of reli- 
 gious and moral verity to preserve them from 
 abandonment, have checked the develop- 
 ment of this truth in their lives, in the love 
 and practice of sin. That this is the mean- 
 ing of κατίχ^όντοιν here is plain from this 
 circumstance : that wherever κατί-χ^Μ in the 
 N. T. signifies ' to hold,' it is emphatic, ' to 
 hold fast,' or ' to keep to,' or ' to take or 
 have complete possession of:' see for the 
 first, Luke viii. 1 5. 1 Cor. si. 2 ; xv. 2. 
 1 Thess. V. 21. Heb. iii. 6. 14; x. 23: for 
 the second, Luke xiv. 9 (every other place 
 except the lowest being excluded) : for the 
 third. Matt. xxi. 38. 1 Cor. vii. 30. Now 
 no such emphatic sense will apply here. If 
 the word is to mean ' holding,' it must be
 
 18-21. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 299 
 
 ev αδικία ° κατίγόντων, ^^ ^ διόη το '' γνωστόν του θεον o = 2Thes!. 
 
 /» r'' -'Λ^ Ν '-S» ' ϋ. 6 (see note). 
 
 ψανζρον ίστιν εν αυτοις* ο σεος γαρ αυτοις εψανερωσεν. To^oi'i^J^i?• 
 τα yap αόρατα αντου " αττο ' κτίσεως κόσμου τοίς" q-'^Actsi. ig 
 
 w / χ / ν Λ - " ζ '•«^ ' - ('«"enots)• 
 
 ΤΓΟιημασιν ϊ'οονμίνα ^ καυοραται, ί] τε αίοιος αυτού wS'fai 
 ουναμις και '^ Θειοτης, ας το tivai αυτούς '^ α ναπολογί';- r = ch.ii. is. 
 
 21 d Si ' ' ^ ύ ^ ' ' ο ^ e "^fy s ch. lu. ul al. 
 
 τους, CioTi "γνοντΐς τον σεον ουχ ως σεον εόο^ασαν ^^^-j . j. j^, 
 
 ITim. i. 17. Heb. xi. 27 only, π = Matt. sxv. 34. ν = 2 Pet. iii. 4. Mark's. 6. 
 
 X"'• lU. w Eph. ii. 10 only. laa. xxix. 16. χ — Matt. xxiv. 15. 2Tini.ii.7. Ucb. xi. 3. 
 
 Prov. i. 2, 6. y here only. Job x. 4. ζ Jade vi only t• Wisd. vii. 26. a here only. 
 
 Wisd. xviii. 9. b Ter. 1 1 reff. = 2 Cor. viii. 6. c ch. ii. 1 only +. d = 1 Cjr. xv. sj. 
 
 e = Dan. xi. 38. 
 
 Tert Iren Aug).— 19. on ϋΈΟ 78 Chr : txt (MSS &c) Orig AtL• Thdrt Thl Oec : το 
 γαρ 61.— rec ο γορ θίος (corni of order), with D^JK &c Ath, Thl Oec: t.xt ABCD'EG 
 17. 37. 40. 71. 80. 113-16-77-8 all Origj Eus Athj Chr Thdrt al.— 20. for aop., ορατά 
 G-gr 115. — αυτών 72. — (v τυις ττοι. 4!) copt. — tj τι (στι arm. — αιΐιος om J (Tisch, not 
 G as Scholz). — θίοτης 106-8'-9 al. — for αντονς, τταντας arm. — 21. Cio 77: on Clem 
 Orig, : quiaigv: fWi Zeno Aug (sometimes) Premiss. — γιωντες AQ.— rec ευχαρίστησαν, 
 
 only in the loosest and least emphatic sense : 
 ' having a half and indistinct consciousness 
 of,' which does not at all correspond to the 
 κητά, indicating vehemence of purpose, as 
 in καταφιΚίω, &c. But the meaning ' keep- 
 ing back,' ' hindering the development of,' 
 — while it has a direct example in Paul's 
 own usage in ref., and in Luke iv. 42, and 
 indirect ones in John v. 4. Acts xxvii. 40, 
 ch. vii. C. Philem. 13, — admirably suits the 
 sense, that men had (see vv. 19 fi.) know- 
 ledge of God sufficient, if its legitimate 
 work had been allowed, to have kept them 
 from such excesses of enormity as they 
 have committed, but that this oKiiQua they 
 κατίϊχοί' iv άύικίί^, i. e. crushed, quenched, 
 iu (as the element, conditional medium in 
 which) their state and practice of unrighte- 
 ousness. It is plain that to take iv πίικίζΐ 
 for «ίι'κως (as Theophyl. and Reiche) is 
 to miss the force of the expression alto- 
 gether — the pregnant ev, ' in and by,' im- 
 plying that it is their acik-ta, — the very 
 absence of δικαωσίνη for which the argu- 
 ment contends, — which is the status where- 
 in, and the instrument whereby, they hold 
 back the truth lit up in their consciences. 
 19.] δΐ(5τι, ' because,' may either 
 give the reason why the anger of God is 
 revealed, and thus apply to all that follows 
 as far as ver. 32, being taken up again at 
 vv. 21, 24, 26, 28 (so Meyer) : or may ex- 
 plain των .... κατεχ. (so Thol.) : which 
 latter seems most probable : the subau- 
 ditum being, ' (this charge I bring against 
 them), because.' For he proves, first (ver. 
 20) that they had the (Ίληθιια; then (vv. 
 21 ff.) that they held it back. το 
 
 γνωστόν, ' that which is known,' the 
 objective knowledge patent and recognized 
 in Creation: — so Chrys., Theodoret, Lu- 
 ther, lieiche, Meyer, De Wetto, al. : — not 
 'that irhich rnay be known' (as Orig., 
 Theophyl., Oec, Erasm., Beza, Grot., al.), 
 which would assert what, as simple matter 
 
 of fact, was not the case, that all which 
 could be known of God was φανιρϋν iv 
 αΰτυΊς. He speaks now not of what 
 they might have known of God, but of 
 what they did know. Thus το γνωστ. τ. 
 Oeov vriU mean, that universal objective 
 knowledge of God as the Creator which we 
 find more or less in every nation under 
 heaven, and which, as matter of historical 
 fact, was proved to be in possession of the 
 great Gentile nations of antiquity. 
 φαν. €<Γτ. €v avTois] ' is evident in them,' 
 i. e. in their hearts : not, to them (as Luth.), 
 — nor, among them (as Erasm., Grot., &c.) ; 
 for if it had been a thing acknowledged 
 among them, it would not have been κατ- 
 εχόμενον. Every man has in him this 
 knowledge ; his senses convey it to him 
 (see next ver.) with the phaenomena of na- 
 ture. 6 Θ. γ. Ιφ.] gives the reason why 
 that which is known of God is manifest in 
 them, viz. because God Himself so created 
 the world as to leave impressed on it this 
 testimony to Himself. — Notice, and keep to, 
 the historic aorist, tipai epwasv, not ' hath 
 manifested it' (perf.), but 'manifested it,' 
 viz. at the Creation. This is important for 
 the right understanding of άπϋ κτ. κϋσμ. 
 ver. 20. 20.] 'For (justifying the 
 clause preceding) His invisible attributes' 
 (hence the plur. a])plying to δύναμις and 
 Θειότης which follow), — άττο κτίσεως 
 κόσμ., ' from the time of the creation,' 
 when the manifestation was made by God : 
 not =: tK KTianuQ K. 'by the cr. of the 
 world ;' which would be tautological, τοις 
 ■παήμασι νοοίψ(ΐ>α following, besides that 
 κτίσις κιΊημαν cannot =: j) κτίσις, in the 
 sense of ' the creation,' i. e. ' the creatures.' 
 [Urnbreit has here a long and important 
 note on O. T. prophecy in general, which 
 will lie found well worth study.] τοις 
 ττοιημ. νοουμ..] ' being understood (,ιρρπ•- 
 hended by the mind, sec refl.) by means of 
 His works' (of creation and sustenance,
 
 500 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Ι. 
 
 f ■^ 
 
 1] ηυ-χ^αριστησαν, αλλ ^ εματαιωθησαν iv τοις 
 ζΟτισθη η 
 
 ί ver. S reff. 
 g lure only. 
 
 is'^^'Trrji'.'.i "γισμοις αυηον, και ' f σ /co• 
 " φασκοντίς tivai σοψυι 
 
 διολο- 
 οοία. 
 
 ABCD 
 EG J κ 
 
 ?'ίΤ- 
 
 i =ch. xi. 1». 
 Eph.iT. 18 
 only. Psa. 
 IxTiii 23. 
 k Matt. XV IR 
 Mark Tii. 18. vtr. 31. eh. x. li) only. 
 
 20. 2 Kings xxir. 1(1. η Ρ 
 
 i. 17. 1 Pet. i. 4. iii. 4 only. 
 
 xxii. 2Ual. Gen i. 2ϋ, 27. 
 
 Ti. 2(lal. DcHt. xiv. lU, 211. 
 
 ίμωρ 
 
 ασυΐ'ίτος αυτών κα 
 άνθησαν και " η\\αζαν 
 
 Ιησαν 
 
 q 
 
 την όοΚαν του αψϋαρτου σεου ' £V ^ ομοιωματι εικόνος 
 ^ φθαοτου άνθρωπου και πετεινών και " τετραπόδων και 
 
 Ι)•υ(. xxsii. 1Ί. 1 Acts xxiv. i). XXV. 19. Gen.xxvi 20. m = 1 Cor. i. 
 
 A. cv. 21). 1 Cor. XT. 51, 52. Hi b. i. J2. ο 1 Cor. ix. 2.Ί. xv. 52. 1 Tim. 
 
 ρ lon.sir , Ps, C7. 211. q = cli. vi. 5. viii. 3. Phil. ii. 7 r Malt. 
 
 s I Cor. ix. 25. xv. 53, 54. 1 Pet. i. 18, 23 only. Wiscl. ix. 15. t Matt. 
 
 u Act? X. 12. xi. fi only. Gen. xxxiv. 23. 
 
 with B(esil)GJK &c ChrOec: t.xt (-σθησαν AD') A(omg η before)CDE 17• 114-lG- 
 20-51-3-77-8 all Clem Orig Eus Ath Cyr Thdrt (mss and edd vary) ThI.— άλλα Β.— aft 
 ifTKor. ins ic«i !»!.— 22. λ -fie ψασκ. 2. "Jd. 121 : dicenies enim f ν latt ff. — 23. ηλΧαΐ,αντο 
 Κ 4. 4!t. 7(i. 11 7-20 -4 al Eus Cyr Thdrt, Thl : txt (MSS cS:c) Clem Ath Chr Thdrt, Oec : 
 Orig has both. — timv om l(>!i. — £ρπ. κ. rtrp. 93. — 24. διότι Τ^.—κηι om ABC 5. 
 17. 31. 47. 76. 238 al ν all Orig Did Dam Aug Ambrst Pelag : ins DEGJK most mss it 
 
 — not here of moral government), — καθ- 
 οράται, 'are perceived;' not, 'are plainly 
 seen,' — this is not the sense of icnro in καΰ- 
 ο(ΐάω, but rather that of looking down on, 
 taking a survey of, and so apprehending 
 or perceiving. η τ. άΐδ. αύτ. δνν.] 
 
 'His eternal Power.' To this the evi- 
 dence of Creation is plainest of all : Eter- 
 nal, and Almighty, have always been re- 
 cognized epithets of the Creator. 
 K. θίΐότης] ' and Divinity' (not Godhead, 
 which would be θίότης). The fact that the 
 Creator is divine ; — is of a different nature, 
 and accompanied by distinct attributes, 
 from ourselves, and those of the highest 
 order, — which we call divine. els το 
 
 civai αύτ. αναίΓολ.] «ι'ς τό with an inf. 
 never properly indicates only the result, 
 ' so that ;' but is often used where the re- 
 sult, and the intention, are bound together 
 in the process of thought. This is done 
 by a very natural habit in speaking and 
 writing, of transferring one's self to the 
 position of the argument, and regarding 
 that which contributed to a result, as worked 
 purposely for that result. And however 
 true it is, that in the doings of the Allwise, 
 all results are purposed, — to give the sense 
 ' in order that they might be inexcusable,' 
 would be manifestly contrary to the whole 
 spirit of the argument, which is bringing 
 our, not at present God's sovereignty in 
 dealing with man, but man's inexcusable- 
 ness in holding back the truth by unrighte- 
 ousness, els TO, then, in this case, is 
 most nearly expressed by ' wherefore,' or 
 ' so that.' See Winer, § 45. 6. ού Sia 
 τοϊιτυ ravTa π{ 7roi»jcij/ ό θ£0^, fi και 
 τούτο ίξίβη. οΰ γάιι 'ira αντονς απολο- 
 γίας ά-οστιρήσ^, όιίασκαλίαν τοσαντην 
 ίΐς μίσοί' ττρυνΟηκίν, ά\\' 'ivu αυτόν ΐπι- 
 γνώσιν' άγνωμονησαντις C(, —άσης ίαν- 
 τονς άττιστίρηταν απολογίας. Chrys. 
 Hom. iv. p. 450 β. 21. διότι] ex- 
 
 pands άΐ'απολογήτοις — 'without excuse, 
 because , , ,' γνο'ντβς] ' with the 
 
 knowledge above stated.' This participle 
 testifies ])laiiily that matter of Jact, and not 
 of possibility, has been the subject of the 
 foregoing verses. From this point, we take up 
 what they might ηαλέ done, but did not. 
 
 οϋχ ωζ Oebv ίδόξ.] ' They did not 
 give Him glory (ίυίάζω here piii)cii)ally of 
 recognition by worsliip) as God, i. e. as the 
 great Creator of all, distinct from and infi- 
 nitely superior to all His works. Bengel 
 well divides €δο'|ασαν and ηύχαρίστησαν 
 — " Gratias agere debemus ob beneficia : 
 glorificare ob ipsas virtutes divinas." They 
 did neither : in their religion, they deposed 
 God from His place as Creator, — in their 
 lives, they were ungrateful by the abuse of 
 His gifts. Ιματαιώθησαν] "jnn, vanus 
 
 fuit, is used of worshipping idols, 2 Kings 
 xvii. 15. Jer. ii. 5, and hyr\, vanitas, of an 
 idol, Deut. xxxii. 21. 1 Kings xvi. 2G al, : 
 and hence probably the word ματαιόω was 
 liere chosen. διαλογισμοϊς] ' their 
 
 thoughts :' but generally in N. T. in a bad 
 sense : ' they became vain (idle, foolish) 
 in their speculations.' Ισκοτίσθη ή 
 
 άστίν. αϋτ. καρδ.] άσύΐ'ίτος is not the 7e- 
 sult ο/ΐσκοτ., — ' became darkened so as to 
 lose its understanding,' —hut the converse, 
 — ' their heart {κα^ΐία of the whole inner 
 man,— the seat of knowledge and feeling) 
 being foolish (unintelligent, not retaining 
 God in its knowledge) became dark ' (lost 
 the little light it had, and wandered blindly 
 in the mazes of folly). 22. φάσ•κοντ€5 
 
 elv. σοφ.] Not, ' because they professed 
 themselves wise,' but 'while they professed 
 themselves wise,' — ' professing them- 
 selves to be wise.' The words relate per- 
 haps not so much to the schools of philoso- 
 phy, as to the assumption of wisdom by the 
 Greeks in general, see 1 Cor. i. 22, of 
 which assumption their philosophers were 
 indeed eminent, but not the only, examples. 
 
 23. ηλλαξαν, ic.r.X.J quoted from 
 Ps. cvi. 20, only την δόξαν αυτών, 'their 
 glory,' of the Psalm, is changed to ' God's
 
 22—20. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 501 
 
 ν « - 24 ^ *^ νν ^ W '^ ' "■ ' Λ ^ • " 
 
 ίοττίτων. ΟΙΟ και παοίόωκίν αυτούς ο ι/εος εν ταις• ν Acts iwd. 
 
 έΤΓΐυυμιαις των καρόιων αυτών ίΐς ^ ακαυαρσιαν ^ του f^l' ^^°• 
 
 a ' ' y fl ^ ' ' - » ' " 2Λ b '' IV— ch iv. 22. 
 
 ατιμαί^συαι τα σώματα αυτών ευ αυτοις, οιτινες phii. u.y. 
 
 c 'Λ\^ ^ά'Λ'Λ ~ α ~ e ' - ί ι "^ \ "^ ΤΧ *'^''* ."'• 
 
 μίΤΊ}ΑΑαί:,αν την αληυειαν του σεου ev τω ψευοει και ^^ ^ΓΤ?"' 
 ^ εσίβασθησαν και ίΚάτοίυσαν τι? ' κτίσπ παρά τον s.=''iVhesllw. 
 
 1 » « . m 'Λ ν η ' Ν '- » / ^• 2 Pet. η. 
 
 κτισαντα, ος• εστιι» ευΛογητος εις• τους αιώνας, αμήν. J^g'ai"^^''' 
 όια τούτο τταρίόωκίν αυτούς ο σεος εις ^ παυη ^ατιμίας ren. 
 
 ζ = Acts τίί. IP ch. νϋ. 3al. a Luke χχ. 11. John viii. 4!». Acts v.41. ch. ii. 23. James ii 6 
 
 only. Prov. xxii.22. b = Acts x. 41, 47. xiii. 42, 43 al c here only. E^th. ii. 20. d= here 
 
 only. Sec 1 Thess. i. 9. e = Eph iv.14al.fr. f = 2 Tlieis. ii. 11. lJohnii.21. g here only. 
 
 h ver. 9 i = ch. viii. 39. Col. i. 15. Heb. iv. 13. k = ch. xiv. 5. Luke xiii. 2. 1 Mark xiii. 
 
 lilal. Deut. iv. 32. m Luke i. 6SI al. fr. Gen. ix 26. nrh.xi. 3li. 2Ciir. xi. 31. Heb. xiii. S. 
 
 over. 24. pCol. iii.5. 1 Thess. iv. 5 only. = Xcn Mem. iii. 10. 8. q = 1 Cor. xi. 14. 2 Cor. xi. 21. 
 
 syr al Ath Chr Thdrt Thl Oec. — ο θ(ος om C (appy) Did Ath-mss. — rec iv ίαντοις 
 {com), with D^EGJK &c Thdrt Chr^ Dam Thl Oec: txt ABCD' 22. 31-5. 57. 73. 115- 
 21. 238 al copt (al?) Chri•— 25. for «λ/;β., δοζαν (see ver 23) Did.— for του θ., αντου 
 2. 3. 32. — aft ίστιν ins Oeus tol latt fl' (see ch ix. 5) : ενλογημίνυς Did. — αμιμ' om 80 
 lat ff.— 26. Ρίος om syr Ath-ms. — αϋτω»» om 114-21. — for χρησ., κτισιν D' (sensum 
 
 glory,' — viz. His Power and Majesty 
 visible in the Creation, ev represents the 
 conditional element in which the change 
 subsisted. άψθάρτον and ψθαρτοϋ 
 
 shew by contrast the folly of such a sub- 
 stitution : He who made and upholds all 
 things must be incorrtiptible, and no cor- 
 ruptible thing can express His likeness. 
 όμοιώματι cIkovos] ' the simili- 
 tude of the form'• — ΰκήνος generalizes it 
 to mean the human form, — it not being 
 any one particular man, but the form of 
 man (examples being abundant) to which 
 they degraded God, — and so of the other 
 creatures. Deities of the human form pre- 
 vailed in Greece — those of the bestial in 
 Egypt. Both methods of worship were 
 practised in Rome. 24 — 32.] Itnmo- 
 
 raiity, and indeed bestiality, ivere the 
 sequel of idolatry. 24.] The καί aft. 
 
 ίίό may import. As they advanced in de- 
 parture from God, so God also on His 
 part gave them up, &c. ; — His dealings 
 with them had a progression likewise. 
 •ίταρίδωκεν] not merely permissive, but 
 judicial : ' God delivered them over.' As 
 sin begets sin, and darkness of mind deeper 
 darkness, grace gives place to judgment, 
 and the divine wrath hardens men, and 
 hurries them on to more fearful degrees of 
 depravity. €v ταϊς έττιθ.] ' in the 
 
 lusts' — not by nor through the lusts (as 
 Erasmus and E. V.) ; — the lusts of the heart 
 were Xha field of action, the department of 
 their being, in irhich this dislionour took 
 place. άκαθαρσίαν] more than mere 
 
 profligacy in the satisfaction of natural lust 
 (as Olsh.) ; for the Ap. uses cognate words 
 ΰημάζισ(>αι and ΰτίμία here and in V(!r. 
 2'»: — 'bestiality;' impurity in the physi- 
 cal, not only in the social and religious 
 sense. τοϋ ατιμάζ€σ•θαι.] the genitive 
 
 may either imjily (Ij I Ik; purpose of God's 
 delivering them over to iinimrily, ^ that 
 
 their bodies should be dishonoured,' or (2) 
 the result of that delivering over, ' so thai 
 their bodies were dishonoured,' or (3) the 
 nature of the ακαθαρσία, as ττάθη ατιμίας 
 below, — ' impurity, ichich consisted in 
 their bodies being dishonoured.' The se- 
 cond of these seems most accordant with 
 the usage of the Ap. and with the argu- 
 ment. — άτιμάζ^σθαι is most likely pas- 
 sive (Beza, al. De Wette), as the middle 
 of ατιμάζω is not found in use. And this 
 is confirmed by the old and probably ge- 
 nuine reading αϋτοίς, which has been 
 altered to ίαυτο~ις from imagining that 
 ' they ' was the subject to άτιμάζεσθαι. 
 ' So that their bodies were dishonoured 
 among them.' 25.] This verse easts 
 
 light on the την άλήθ. iv ninety καηχον- 
 των of ver. 18. The truth of God (the 
 true notion of Him as the Creator) which 
 they professed, they changed into a lie 
 (ψίϋϋος = njTir, used of idols, Jer. xvi. 19), 
 thus counteracting its legitimate agency 
 and depriving it of all power for good. 
 σεβάζομαι, of the honour of respect 
 and observance and reverence, — λατρεύω, 
 οι formal worship with sacrifice and offer- 
 ing. Both verbs belong to tij κτίσει ; 
 though σεβάζομαι would require an accu- 
 sative, λατρεύω, the nearest, takes the 
 government. τη κτ.] the thing made, 
 
 the ' creature ' — a general term for all ob- 
 jects of idolatrous worshi)). παρά, 
 ' beyond ' — which would amount to the ex- 
 clusion of the Creator. — The doxology ex- 
 presses the horror of the Apostle at this 
 dishonour, and j)uts their sin in a more 
 striking light. But we need not supply 
 {/ Kin' ούτοι ϋ/^^^ισιιΐ', as Chrys. ενλογητός 
 is 'Blessed,' κατ' ίζοχίμ•: the L.XX put 
 for it the perf. part.. Gen. xxvi. 2'.i. I'.s. 
 cxviii. '24. 26.] πάθη άτιμ., — see 
 above, ver. 24, — stronger than άτιμο πάθη, 
 as setting forth the status, άτιμια, to which
 
 302 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. Τ. 
 
 rfem.iiere ot Tt jao ^ ΘηΧΐΐαι αυτων '^ μίτί]λ\αζ,αν την ^ φυσιΚΊΐν abcd 
 
 only, neiit., » - u • ν ν » , ' 0.7 ' ' > ' EGJK 
 
 Markx'fi"*' ΧΡ'}"'"' ^'C ^'Ρ' πήρα ψυσιν, ομοίως τε και οι 
 
 οΐή.ϊ.27 αρσενίς ' αφεντίς την ψυσικ-ην γ^ρησιν της ΟηΛαας 
 
 νϋ. 2. ..1..^ //-ν . " ζ '' ly '" ' 'ΛΛ'Λ w" 
 
 s2Pet.iii2 ' tteKuvonaav sv ΤΏ οοίο,Η αυτών ίΐς a A ΑηΑυυς, αρσενίο 
 
 only. See ^ t^> ,/•<ν 
 
 th"iconV " f V * αρσεσιν την ασ-^ημοσυνην '^ KaTi^yaCopivoi και τί/ν 
 
 Thuc. vii. 5. ι , „, Λ .ΓΛ -βλ' , ~ , t _ f . 
 
 n = Rev. xi. 0. avTiuiaUiav ην εοει της πλάνης αυτών εν εαυτοις αττο- 
 
 Jamcsir.il. "^ οο\ *■> > r\ > ^ΛV 
 
 'i3.*ch!xi!->4. λα^ΐίβάΐΌντες. και καθώς ουκ ^ εόοκιμασαν τον θεον 
 
 Gal.i. S.sTal. ι, .; 'i• ' k '5• '»'/^^k' 
 
 wMart. xix.4. εγειν εΐ' εττιννωσει, παοεοωκεν αυτούς ο οεος εις 
 
 Alarkx. (>. , ,'^ , _ ' ,. , ν , ηη 
 
 is!" ■/«; χ'χ. αδόκιμοι^ νουν, ποιειν τα μη '" καθήκοντα, '^ ° πεπληρω- 
 X = Matt. μένους "πάση ''αδικία, '^ πονηοια, '^ πλεονε^,ια, ^ κακία, 
 
 sxiii. 23. t ι > ι It 
 
 Rev. ϋ. 4. propr., Matt iv. Π, 22. y here only. Diod. Sic. xir ing. Polyl). ix. III. 10. ζ here only. Sir. 
 
 xxiii.ti a — ITim i.iti. b — here only. Jo.s. Antt. xvi. 7. H. Key. xvi. 15 only. Exod. xx. 26. 
 
 c ->ch. ii. !i reff. d 2 Cor. vi. 13 only t• e = Jameh v. 20. 2Pet.ii.l8. Jude 11. f Luke vi. 34. 
 
 xsiii. 4lai. g — here only. Jos. Antl. ii. 7. 4. See ch. xiv. 22 reff. 1 Cor. xvi. 3. h ■= here only. So 
 
 t'xcii• t-f αϊτι'αΐΓ or 6i' airiac, Thac. ii. 18. See Viger, p. 24!•. i Eph. i. 17 relf. k ver. 24. 
 
 1 1 Cor ix. 27. 2 Cor xiii. 5— 7 al. m Aits xxii. 22 only. Dent. xxi. 17. 2 Maec. vi. 4. η con.str., 
 
 2 Cor vii. 4. 2 Mace. Tii. 21. ο = .\cts xx. 1!< rtfT. ρ — Luke xiii. 27. Acts i. 18. q = 1 Cor. T. 8. 
 
 Ei.b. vi. 12. (Ua. i. 16.) r Mark vii. 22 al. Ezek. xxii. 27. s = Eph. iv. 31 al. (Gen. vi. ft.) 
 
 d e) : avTitiv χρησιν 238: add της θηλαας 2. 49. — aft τταρα φυσιν, add χρησιν D'G ν 
 it arm Jer al.— 27. for rt, ct AD'G 17. 124 all it ν syr ClemAth Chr Thdrt Dam Thl 
 Aug Rufj Ambrst : om C 61. 72. 87 al copt ar-erp Oiig Jer Rufj : txt BD^EJK most 
 mss (appy) Syr seth al Oec. — ot om J. — rec (1st) αρρεί'ΐς, with ACD'EJ &c Ath Thdrt 
 Chr Thl: txt BD'G 73 Orig Eus Oec — (for φνσ. χρ., φνσιν 17?) — £V τη αρ. αντ. om 
 30: iv om Sl.—apptrtg (2nd) AC &c Clem Orig Ath, Thdrt Chr: txt BDEGJ Thl 
 Oec— iv αρρεσι A 5. 17 all Clem Orig Thdrt Ath, : txt BCDEGJ &c Ath, Chr Thl Oec. 
 
 for tavT., αΐ'τοις BK 35.- — και om 32. 74 Chr (iti beginning of a homily). — aft εδοκιμ. 
 
 ins 01 ασίβίΐς 74 lectt. — ίχίΐν εν εαυτοίς 73 Oec. — αντειΧαμβανοντες G. — 28. ο θεός 
 om A 2 Nyss Dam (Ath) Vict -tun : Chr has it bef αντους. — 29. rec aft αδικία, add 
 νοονεια (ακαΟαρ'^ια 37• 40 marg Gild), with J &c vss Thdrt Thl Oec Ennod. and D^G al 
 V it Lucif Ruf Ambrst aft κακία, omg πονηρία : om ABCK 17- 23-6. 67". 73. 117 al copt 
 ieth Eph Bas Chr Isid Max Gennad Dam Aug Ruf-comm al. — ττον. κακ. πλιοιεζ. A 
 Ephr Aug: κακ. κογ. πλ. C al copt seth Isid Max Dam: κακ. ττορνιια πΧιον. D'EG 2. 
 46. 71. 92. 117 al (aft πορν. ins ττονηρ. D^) : txt B(e sil)JK (omg πο^ί^ρ.) most mss 
 syr &c Bas Chr Thdrt Thl Oec— φόνων G d^ g Lucif Enuod : φόνου, φθόνου 80 : aft 
 
 the -πάθη belonged. — Contrast 1 Thess. iv. εννα ην, μηΐί κό\ασις ήπε'ιλητο, τοντο 
 
 4, το εαυτοί' σκεύος κτασθαι εν τιμή. πάσης κολάσεως χείρον ην. ει οε 'ήοονται, 
 
 χρήσιν] tisnm venereum ; — see exx. τήν πρηςθίικηΐ' μηι λέγεις της τιμωρίας. 
 
 in Wetstein. This abuse is spoken of first, Chrys. Horn. v. p. ■457 -^• ev ίαυτοϊς, 
 
 as being the most revolting to nature. ' in their own persons,' viz. by their de- 
 
 " In peccatis arguendis saeiie scapha debet gradation even below the beasts, 
 
 scapha dici. Pudorem praeposterum ii fere 28.] The play on δοκιμάζω and αδόκιμος 
 
 postulant qui pudicitia carent . . . Gravitas can hardly be expressed in any other lan- 
 
 et ardor stiU judicialis, proprietate verbo- guage. ' Non probaverunt' and ' repro- 
 
 rum non violat verecundiam." Bengel. bum' of the Vulgate does not give it. 
 
 27.] την άσχημ. perhaps, as De ' Because they reprobated the knowledge 
 
 W., ' the (well known, too frequent) in- of God, God gave them over to a repro- 
 
 decency' — ' cui ipsa corporis ... conformatio bate mind,' is indeed a very inadequate, 
 
 reclamat,' Bengel : but more probably the but as far as the form of the two words is 
 
 article is only generic, as in 2 Pet. i. 5 — 8 concerned, an accurate representation of it. 
 
 repeatedly. την οίντιμισθίαν] The (Mr. Conybeare gives it, — " As they thought 
 
 Ap. treats this ατιμία into which they fell, fit to cast out the acknowledgment of God, 
 
 as a consequence of , a retribution for, their God gave them over to an outcast mind.") 
 
 departure from God into idolatry, — with For άδάκιμνς is not 'judicii ex])ers ' (as 
 
 which in fact it was closely connected. Beza, Tholuck, &c.) but ' reprobate,' re- 
 
 Thi.1 shame, and not its consequences, jected by God. God withdrew from them 
 
 which are not here treated of, is the άιτι- His preventing grace and left them to the 
 
 μιιθια of their πλάι-»;, their aberration evil which they had chosen. The active 
 
 from the knowledge of God, which they sense of αδόκιμος, besides being altogether 
 
 received. This is further shewn by ην unexampled, would, in the depth of its 
 
 ίδει in the past tense, tt γαρ καϊ μή yk- meaning, be inconsistent with the assertion
 
 27—31. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ΡΩΜΑΙΟΥ: 
 
 803 
 
 μεστούς φθυνου, (ρονου, έριδος, 
 ' φιθυριστάς, ^^ * κατολάλους, " Ι 
 'υπερήφανους, "αλαζόνας, 
 ' απειΘπς, ^1 " 
 
 'ίοστυ 
 
 7"ί.'» 
 
 κακοήθειας 
 " υβρ 
 ίφευρίτάς κακών, γονευσιν 
 ασυι^ετους, '^ ασυϊ'θετους, άστοργους, 
 
 χίϊροι/ ύτΓολαμ/δύΐ'ειι» απαΐ'τα, Aristot. Rhet. ϋ. 3 Mace. iii. 22. τϋ. 3.t ν here only t. Sfe Ρ: 
 
 ■w here only t. χ here only t. y 1 Tim. i. 13 only. Prov. vi. 17 al. zLiikei. &1. 2 Tim. m. 2. 
 
 Jame» iv. β. 1 Pet. v. 5. P.s. cxviii. 21, 01. a 2 Tim. iii. 2 only. Prov. xxl. 24. bhcrennlvt. 
 
 cLuke i. 17 reff. dver.21refl'. e here only. Jer. iii. 8,11. Dcmosth. p. 383. 6. 12Tim.iii. 
 
 3 onlyt. Mschin. p. 47, •2ϋ. g here only. Prov. v. !). xi. 17. 
 
 ίριδος A {ίριδας G .'). — δόλου om A Bas. — 30. ψιθυρ. om 46. — κακο\α\ονς D'. — 31. rec 
 aft αστοργ. add ασπυνδονς {gloss in rnarg to explain ασυνθίτονς), with C &c vss Thdrt 
 Chr (om ασννίτους) : pref 17 Thl (Scliolz) : bef ασυνθίτ. D^ : om ABD'EG (al?) it copt 
 
 = Matt, 
 xxiii. 28. ch. 
 
 )ΐστας, ^Γ^Ί/.""" 
 
 Ezek. 
 xxxvii. 1. 
 u here only. 
 άν- κακο,ι^ίΐα, 
 
 . xl. 7. 
 
 of the passage. God did noi give them up 
 to a mind which had lost the facility of 
 discerning , but to a mind judicially aban- 
 doned to that depravity which, being well 
 able to exercise the δοκιμασία required, 
 not only does not do so, but in the head- 
 long current of its abandonment to evil, 
 sympathizes with and encourages (ver. 32) 
 its practice in others. It is the ' video 
 meliora proboqve,' which makes the ' dete- 
 riora sequor ' so peculiarly criminal. 
 oviK ίδοκΐι:ασαν ϊχίιν is not = ίδοκίμ. οΰκ 
 ίχίΐΐ' (as Dr. Burton) : the latter would 
 e.\'press more a deliberate act of the judg- 
 ment ending in rejection of God, whereas 
 the text charges them with not having ex- 
 ercised that judgment which would, if exer- 
 cised, have led to the retention of God in 
 their knowledge. ^X"•*' **' ίτΊ.γν.] So 
 
 Job xxi. 14, — "they say to God, Depart 
 from us : for we desire not the knowledge 
 of thy ways," and xxii. 15 — 17• 
 29.] ΊΓίπληρωμίνονς belongs to the sub- 
 ject of TToitii', understood. — The reading 
 ΤΓορνύα appears to have arisen out of πο- 
 I'i/fxa, and is placed by some MSS after 
 that word, by some after KaKiq, omg 
 ■πον. The Ap. can hardly have written it 
 here, treating as he does all these immo- 
 ralities of the heart and conscience as re- 
 sults of, and flnwing from, the licentious 
 practices of idolatry above specified. — Ac- 
 curate distinctions of ethical meaning can 
 hardly be found for all these words. With- 
 out requiring such, or insisting on each ex- 
 cluding the rest, I have collected the most 
 interesting notices respecting them. Um- 
 breit has illustrated their LXX usage and 
 Hebrew equivalents. αδικία] Per- 
 
 haps a general term, comprehending all 
 that follow : such would be according to 
 the usage of the Epistle : but perhaps 
 to be confined to the stricter import of 
 ' injustice ;' of which on the part of the 
 Romans, Wetst. gives abundant testimo- 
 nies. ΤΓονηρία] Ammonius inter- 
 prets TO ΐΓονηρόν, TO δρηστικον κακοΤ/, — 
 used therefore more of the temjitor and 
 seducer to evil. irXeovclia] ' covet- 
 ousness ' (not as 1 Thess. iv. (», sec: there), 
 of which the wliole provincial government 
 
 and civil life of the Romans at the time 
 was full. ' Quando | major avaritiie patuit 
 sinus.'' exclaims Juvenal, soon after this. 
 Sat. i. 87. κακία] more the passive 
 
 side of evil — the capability of and proclivity 
 to evil, — the opposite to άρίτή : — so Arist. 
 Eth. Nic. ii. 3. (J, υπόκαται άρα ι) άοίττ) 
 di'ai .... των βιΚτίστων ιτρακτικίγ >/ δε 
 κακία, τουναντίον. — ^θόιοι; and ι/)ό)'ου are 
 probably put together from similarity of 
 sound. So Eurip. Troad. 770 ff., ώ Ί'υΐ'- 
 δάρίίον (pi'OQ, ονποτ' tl Διός- | ττολλώ»' δε 
 ττατίρων φημί <τ' ίκπ(ψνκίΐ•αι, \ Άλά- 
 στορος μίν πρώτοι', tJra δι φθόνου, 
 Ι φόνου τι, θανάτου θ', 'όσα τε yij τρΈ- 
 φ(ΐ κακά. κακοηθ€ία5] see ref. 
 
 ψιθυρ. ' secret maligners,' — καταλ. ' open 
 slanderers.' — The distinction attempted to 
 be set up by Suidas and others, between 
 θίομισί]ΐ:, ύπο θιον μισοίψίνος, and θεο- 
 μίσης, ό μισύν τον θεόν, has been applied 
 to θίοστυγΰς also, which has therefore 
 been written Οεοστόγεις. But the distinc- 
 tion is untenable ; all compound adjectives 
 in ης being oxyton. — θεοστνγτις is never 
 found in an active sense, ' hater of God,' 
 but always in a passive, * hated by God ' 
 (cf Eur. Troad. 1205, ή θεηστυγής Έλύ/ι; : 
 Cycl. 395, το θεοστυγεΊ αδου μαγείρφ : ib. 
 508 : and θεοφιλής, Demosth. 1486 ult. : 
 εΰτυχεστάτην πασών πόλεων τι)ν υμετε- 
 ραν νομίζω και ΰεοφιλεστάτην: and ^sch. 
 Eum. 831) ; and such is apparently the 
 sense here. The order of crimes enume- 
 rated would be broken, and one of a totally 
 different kind inserted between καταλά- 
 λονς and νι-^ριστάς, if θεοστ. is to signify 
 ' haters of God.' But on the other sujipo- 
 sition, — if any crime was known more than 
 another as ' hated hg the gods' it was that 
 of ' delafores,' abandoned persons who cir- 
 cumvented and ruined others by a system 
 of malignatit espionage and false informa- 
 tion. And the crime was one which the 
 readers of this part of Roman liistory know 
 to have been the pest of the state ; see 
 Tacitus, Ann. vi. 7, where he calls tlie de- 
 latores ' Principi (|nid<'m grati, et /)eo e.vosi.' 
 So also Philo, ap. Damascen. (quoted by 
 Wetst.) διάβολοι κιιΊ θείας άπυττίμτττοι 
 χάριτος, οι τι)ν αυτήν Ικιϊνψ διαβυλικην
 
 304 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Τ. 32. 
 
 Ελεή; 
 
 ii = Acux. ίΑεημονας, ^-^ ' ο'ίτινες το ' δ 
 
 41,47. xiii. 
 32, 43 Hi. 
 Liikei. 0. 
 
 ικαιωμα του ο£ου ίττι-ννοντίς, abcd 
 
 ' ττητ υ- 
 
 1 ,1^ 
 
 ΟΤΙ οι τα τοιαύτα ττ^)ασσοντζς aqioi 
 
 θανα 
 
 του αση>, ου 
 
 EG J κ 
 
 αΧΧα 
 
 συνενόοκουσιν τοις 
 
 νΜί.4. Htb. μόνον αυτά ττοιουσιν, 
 
 ίχ. Ί, 10. ' / 
 Exod.xv.25, τΓοασσονσιν. 
 
 'τ?'?!)!"."'"' II• Δίό ° αναπολόγητος ει, ώ άνθρωπε πας ο ° Κξ>Ίνων' 
 
 1 Cor. xiii. 12. ηη » ■? ^ οο ' ν ρ '/ ^ q ' . 
 
 i-Lnkexii. £v it» γαρ KpivsiQ τον ^ ετ£ξ)ον, σεαυτον ^κατακρίνεις 
 
 AcfsxxTi.;il. m roiislr., Acts viii. 1. xxii. 20. Luke xi. 4S f. (1 Cor. vii. 12 refl") η ch. i 20 only t. 
 
 nn Cul. ii 11! ο .= M.it:. vii 1. James iv. 11. on = ch xiv. 22. ρ ch. xiii. 8. 1 Cor. iv. (5. 
 
 vi. 1. X. 24, 2!) al. James iv. 12. q => Matt, xxvii. 3. John viii. lU. Esth. ii. 1. 
 
 Ephr, Dam Lucif all. — 32. ίττιγνωντις J al : ίτηγινωσκονης Β 80: γνοιτις Thl : 
 ίΐΐητίς al Chr : oinc (ττιγί'οντίς slav-ms : add ουκ ίνοησαιι DE Bas : υνκ ίγνωσαΐ' G al : 
 ov σνί'ηκαΐ' 15 : ίίοιι iniellexernnt, or the like, ν it lat-ff. — for τα τοιαύτα, τα αυτά 91 : 
 τα om 238. — οι» μόνον yap {see above) D' : ου μ. δί 46". 71 Bas: και ου μ. ν arm 
 Ambrst. — ποιουντις and συνινδοκουντις Β : οι» μον. οι ιτοιουντις αυτά α\. και οι 
 συνινδοκουντίς some mentd by Isid (Oec also cites thus) arm ν d- e g Ephrj Bas lat-ff 
 (Clcm-rom i. 35 freely) : for αυτά, αντοι 73 Chrj. 
 
 Chap. II. 1. πας om Syr ar-erp arm. — κριματι κρινιις C 37• 73. 80. 93. 179 al copt 
 
 νησοϋντίς κακοτίχνίαν, Θ(οστν•/ε7ς τε καΐ 
 θίομισίΐς ττάντη. It does not follow that 
 the delalores only are intended, but the 
 expression may be used to include all those 
 abandoned persons who were known as 
 Diis exosi, who were employed in pursuits 
 hateful and injurious to their kind. — So 
 Wetst., Meyer, Riickert, Fritzsche, De 
 Wette : — the majority of Comm. incline to 
 the active sense, — so Theodoret, CEc, 
 Erasm., Luther, Calv., Beza, Estius, Grot., 
 Tboluck, Reiche, &c. 30. νβριστάβ] 
 
 opposed by Xenoph. Mem. i. and Apol. 
 Socr. to σώφρων, ' a discreet and modest 
 man :' but here perhaps, as said by Paul of 
 himself, I Tim.i. 13, ' qui contumelia afficit,' 
 'an insulting person.' ύπίρηφάνονβ] 
 
 ίστί δί νπίρηφανία καταφρόνησίς τις 
 ττΧήν αΰτυν των ά\\ων. Theophr. Char. 
 34. αλαζόνας] see reff. — δοκΗ δί 
 
 και άΧαζών ηναι ύ θρασνς και ττροςττοιη- 
 τικός άΐ'δρείας, Aristot. Eth. Nic. iii. 10. 
 δοκίΐ δ' δ μίν άλαζών τΐρυςποιητικος των 
 ενδόξων είναι, και μΐ) ίηταρχόντων, καΐ 
 μιιζήνων η ΰπάηχει .... 'ένεκα δόζΐ]ς και 
 τιμής . . . και γάρ τ) νττερβοΧή και >'/ λίαν 
 ίλλίίψις αλαζονικοί'. Id. Magn. Mor. i. 
 33. Ιψ£υρ. κακ.] ' Sejanus omnium 
 
 facinorum repertor habebatur,' Tacit. Ann. 
 iv. 11: — ' sceleruraque inventor Ulixes,' 
 Virg. iEn. ii. l(;i. στασιάρχαι, φιλο- 
 ■πράγμονες, κακών ενρεταί, ταραζιττόλιδες, 
 Philo in Fiacc. p. 520. — πάσης κακίας 
 εΰρετής (of Antiochus Epiph.), 2 Mace. vii. 
 31. 31.] a(ruv€Tu'us, ' destitute of 
 
 (moral) understanding,' see Col. i. 9, and 
 reff. Here perhaps suggested by the simi- 
 larity of sound to άσ•ννθ£το•υ5, ' without 
 good faith,' οΰκ εμμένοντας τηΐς συνϋίι- 
 καις, Suid. and Ilesych. In the same 
 sense, ενσννθετε'ιν and άσνιιΟίτε'ιν are op- 
 posed by Chrysijipus and Plutarcli (see 
 Wetst.). άστοργους] μι) ayaTrCiv- 
 
 Tctc Tiva, Ilcsych. And Athenseus, speak- 
 
 ing of ot καλούμενοι όρνιθες μελεαγρίδες, 
 — ίστΊ δε αστοργον ττρος τα εκγονα το 
 ΰρνεον, και ολιγωρεί των νεωτέρων, χΐν. 
 ρ. 655 c " In hac urbe nemo liberos 
 tolht, quia, quisquis suos hceredes habet, 
 nee ad ccenas nee ad spectacula admittitur." 
 Petronius, 116. (Wetst.) 32.] The 
 
 Ap. advances to the highest grade of moral 
 abandonment, — the knowledge of God's 
 sentence against such crimes, united with 
 the contented practice of them, and encou- 
 ragement of them, in others. το δικαί- 
 ωμα τ. θ.] ' the sentence of God,' un- 
 mistakably pronounced in the conscience. 
 oTi, ic.r.X.] viz. ' that they who do 
 such things are worthy of death ;' this is 
 the sentence, and must not be enclosed in 
 a parenthesis, as in Wetstein, Griesbach, 
 and Scholz. θανάτου, what sort of 
 death ? Probably a general term for the 
 fatal consequence of sin ; that such courses 
 lead to ruin. The word can hardly be 
 pressed to its exact meaning : for many of 
 the crimes mentioned could never be visited 
 with judicial capital punishment in this 
 world (as Grot.) : nor could the heathen 
 have any definite idea of eternal, spiritual 
 death, as the penalty attached to sin 
 (Calov.), — nor again, any idea of the con- 
 nexion between sin and natural death. 
 " Life and Death," remarks Umbreit, " are 
 ever set over against one another in the 
 O. T. as well as in the N. T., the one as 
 including all good, that can befall us, the 
 other, all evil." p. 24'». — The description 
 here given by the Ap. of the moral state 
 of the heathen world should by all means 
 be compared with that in Thucyd. iii. 
 82 — 84, of the moral state of Greece in 
 the Peloponnesian war : and a passage 
 in Wisd. xiv. 22 — 31, the opening of 
 which is remarkably similar to our text : 
 fir' ουκ ίμικεσε το πλανάσθηι περί Tt)v 
 τυϋ θεοϋ γνώσιν, άλλα . . . . , ver. 22, and
 
 II. 1- 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 SO" 
 
 τα yao αυτά ποασσίΐς ο κοινων. οιόαμίν ce οτι το r=.Matt.xxiii 
 
 r ' - /) - ' ^ s ^ s '\'α t ' > ν \ pal. ch.iii. 
 
 κρίμα του υίου εστίν κατά αληυειαν επι τους τα 
 τοιαύτα ττοάσσοντας. " \oyit\l οε τούτο, ω ανθριοπε 
 
 Ο κοινών τους τα τοιαύτα πρασσοντας και ττυιων αυτά, 
 ΟΤΙ συ ^ ίκφίυζη το ^ κρίμα του θεού', η του '^ ττΑουτου 
 της 
 
 'χ^ξ)ηστοτητος 
 
 κρίμα του 
 αυτού και της 
 
 και ΤΊ)ς 
 
 i here onlv. 
 t = Acts iiii. 
 
 11 rrff. 
 u con5lr.,2Cor. 
 
 X. II. 
 τ — Luke xxi. 
 
 3«. 2Cor. xi. 
 
 33. 1 Thess. 
 
 T. 3. Jadg. 
 
 vi. 11. 
 w Eph. i. 7 
 
 ABDE 
 GJK 
 
 αυοχτϊς• 
 ~ μακοοβυμιαα '^ καταώοονεις, ayvowv οτι το ' ■γοηστοί' xci)"'xi.22. 
 
 - /, - • ' / / ri " ς ν ^\ ^ e' Λ SCor.vi.e 
 
 ...at του υεου εις μετανοιαν σε f^J^i, κατά οε την σκλη- »^=• p^q> 
 a.^c. ροτητά σου και ' αμετανοητον καρ^ιαν ^ θησαυρίζεις σεαυτω y "oh. m. 26 
 opyηv εν ήμερα opyης και αποκαλυψεως όικαιοκρισιας ^L^^f^•^']- 
 
 τί. .ί. 1.) zch.ix. 22. 2 Cor. τι. 6 al. Prov χχν. Ιδ. a Matt. χτίϋ. 10. 1 Cor. xi. 22 al. Prov. 
 
 xiii. 13. h coribtr., here only. Xen. Mem. i. 2- 33. c = Luke vi. 35 al. Pa. xxxUi. 8. constr., ch. i. 
 
 15,20. d = ch. (iii.14. Cal. v. 18. 2Tiai. iii. 6. Piilyb. v. 1.5. e here only. = Dent. ix. 27. 
 
 fhereonlyt. p = ProT.i.l8. (Matt. vi. 19, 20 al.) h aba., Luke xxi. 23. ch. iii. 5. iv. 15 al. ήμ. όργ. 
 
 Rev. vi. 17. See Zeph. ii. 2. i = 1 Cor. i. 7. 2 Thess. i. 7 aL k here only f. Incert. Hos. τϊ. 5,for 
 
 ar-pol syr* Orig Jer. — for ο κρίνων, εν ω κριΐΊΐς arm : qua judicas v-edd latt. — 2. for 
 It, yap C 17. 37. 80. 122-79 al it ν copt arm Chr Pelag : txt (MSS &c) Thdrt Dam Thl 
 Oec Tert al: om 32 seth. — 3. for τούτο, τοιτω Α. — bef ο κρ. ins omnia latt. — τα ova. 
 109. 238. — οτι συ om !>3 : συ om arm. — 4. for η, tt 77• — for ανοχ., αναβοληι; 3-marg. 
 — 5. for αμεταν., αμεταμελητον (ib: αμεταθετον Thdrt in eaten. — εαυτω 93. — for 
 ορ•{ης, κρίσεως 73. — for αποκαλνφ., ανταποδοσεως A Eeth Cses-arel. — bef ίικαιοκρ. ins 
 και D^ (om D') JK all syr seth ar-pol slav-ms Origg Eus Eph Bas Chr Thdrt (often) all 
 Mart : om ABD'EG &c it ν Syr copt goth al Origj Dam Oec Iren Cypr Lucif al : της 
 
 2.] οϊδ. δε, ' atqui scirnus ' — ' now 
 we know.' κατά οίλ.] ' according to 
 
 truth,' as E. \., De Wette: — not, ' Iridy,' 
 ^ revera' (as Raphel, &c.), — for υααμεν, 
 on which the emphasis is, implies certain 
 knowledge. Nor does κατά «λ. belong to 
 
 again ver. 27, 1) yap των ανωνύμων ti- 
 δώλων θρησκεία παντός αρχή κακοΰ και 
 αιτία Kill ττίρας εστίν. 
 II. 1 — 29.] Secondly, the same, that all 
 are guilty before God, is ρηολέπ of the 
 Jews also. And first, vv. 1 — 11, no man 
 (the practice of the Jews being hinted at) 
 mvst condemn another, for all alike are 
 guilty. 1.] The address passes gradu- 
 
 ally to the Jews. They were the people 
 who judged — who pronounced all Gentiles 
 to be born in sin and under condemnation : 
 — doubtless there were also proud and cen- 
 sorious men among the Gentiles, to whom 
 the rebuke might ajiply, but these are 
 hardly in the Apostle's mind. This is 
 evident by comparing τα yap αυτά ταράσ- 
 σεις 6 /cpiVtuj/ with vv. 21 — 23, where the 
 same charge is implied in a direct address 
 to the Jew. διό, on account of this 
 
 δικαίωμα θεον decreeing death against the 
 doers of these things — for ihou doest them 
 thyself Therefore thy setting thyself up 
 as a judge, is unjustifiable. iras ό 
 
 κρίνων] The Jew is not yet named, but 
 hinted at (see above) : not in order to con- 
 ciliate the Jews (Riickert), but on account 
 of the as yet purposely general form of 
 the argument. This verse is in fact the 
 major of a syllogism, the minor of which 
 follows, vv. 17 — 21, where the position 
 here declared to be unjustifiable, is as- 
 serted to be assumed by the Jew. 
 ev ω . . .] ' For wherein ' diot ' in that'), 
 aa E. V. — i.e. ^ in the matter m which.' 
 
 \0L. 11. 
 
 κρίμα, ^judgment according to truth' (as 
 Olih.), — but to εστίν, ' is (proceeds) ac- 
 cording to justice ' (John viii. ](j). 
 3.] Here he approximates nearer to the 
 Jews. They considered that because they 
 were the children of Abraham, they should 
 be saved, see Matt. iii. "i, 9. τοντο, 
 
 viz. OTi σν ίκύ., following. — crv has the 
 emphasis on it, ' thou thyself,' — ' thou 
 above all others.' 4.] η, 'or ' (intro- 
 
 ducing a new error, or objection, see cli. iii. 
 29 ; vi. 3 ; xi. 2), ' inasmuch as God spares 
 thee day by day (see Eccles. viii. 11) dost 
 thou set light by His long suffering, ig- 
 norant that His intent in it is to lead thee 
 to repentance ." ττλοΰτου, — a favourite 
 word with the Apostle (see reff.), — ' the ful- 
 ness,' ' abundance.' χρη*»^•! ^s shewn 
 by His άνηχή and μακροϋ. (reff.) 
 άγνοών ' not knowing,' — being blind to the 
 truth. ' that . . .' Grot. Thol al. would ren- 
 der it ' not considering :' but as De Wette 
 remarks, it is a wilful and guilty ignorance, 
 not merely an inconsiderateness, which is 
 blamed in the question. άγει, ' is lead- 
 ing thee :' this is its intent and lo!;itiinate 
 course, which thy blindness will frustrate. 
 ' Malo deducit (|uani invitnt ; tpiia illud 
 plus quiddam significat. Neipte tamun pro
 
 306 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 IT. 
 
 1 — Matt. xvi. 
 
 27.Rrv. xxii. 
 
 12. ProT. 
 
 sxiv. 12. 
 m = KuV e xxi. 
 
 IH. ih.Y 3. 
 
 4. Hrb. xii. 
 
 1 M. Ezr. X. 
 
 του 
 
 7 
 
 τοις μίν 
 τιμψ' και 
 
 £ου, ος 
 ' καθ' 
 
 αποοωσίΐ ίκαστω κατά 
 υττομονην έργου α γ 
 
 τα 
 
 αΟον 
 
 if)ya αυτόν, 
 
 Ζ6 
 
 ABDE 
 GJK 
 
 οζαν και 
 
 ^' αφθαησ'ιαν '^ tvTOvaiv Ci^rfv fuwj'iov' τοις δε 
 ' ίζ "* ίμιθί'ιας κα\ ' αττείΟοϋσι μίν Ty " αληθύα, ' ττέίθο^ίνοις 
 
 ΓιΟ at. 2 Til 
 
 12,14. GHl.iii.7. 
 21. Dcut. xxi. 2U. 
 
 η See Jnines i. 4. ch. xiii. 3. ο - ch. v. 2. viii. 18. ix. 23 al. ρ = 1 Cor. xv 
 
 q = iMalt. vi. 33 Col iii. 1 al r - John xvui. 37. ch. in. 2ii. 
 
 a2Corxii2li. Gal. v. 20. Phil, i 16. ii. 3. James i.i. 14, 1Π only t. t = cli. 
 
 u = 1 John i. β al. Τ — Acts v. 3R, 4U. Gal. iu. 1 al. fr. 
 
 iiK. 3. 33-5. 108-21 al.— 6. avTairoSwau 238.-7. ί^Γιζt]τovσι38.Gί).^■2 al.— 8. (ρ7)θίΐης A. 
 — μίν om BD'G (not c.xprd in vss lat-ff) Thl : ins AD'EJK mis (appy) syr &c Orig Eph 
 Thdrt Chr Dam Thl Oeo Κιιΐγ—απαβονση' G al: txt ABD &c.— for <ιϋικ., κακία Orig. — rec 
 θυμ. κ. opy., with D'^JK ice syr Thdrt Oec : txt ΑΒΟ^ΕΟ 5. 21. 37- 41. 73. lieialitvsyrrarr 
 
 adigcre accipio, sed pro manu ducere.' 
 Calvin. 5 ] I am inclined with Lach- 
 
 mann to regard the question as continued. 
 If not, the responsive contrast to the ques- 
 tion in ver. 4 would begin more em])hati- 
 cally than with κατά if ... ; it would be 
 σν ('f κατά .... or θησανηίΐας ίί σίαυτψ 
 
 κατά But the enquiry loses itself 
 
 in the digressive clau-ses following, and no 
 where comes pointedly to an end. I have 
 therefore not placed a mark of interroga- 
 tion at ayfi or at θίοΰ, as Lachm. does, — 
 but have left the construction to explain 
 itself. κατά] not, ' Ϊ7ΐ proporliou to,' 
 
 (I^Ieyer), but as E. V. ' after,' ' in conso- 
 nance wil/i,' ' secundum,' — describing the 
 state out of which the action springs : see 
 ver. 7i K(i&' νπομονήν. άμ£ταν.] not 
 
 admitting that μιτάνοια to which God is 
 leading thee. ev ήμβρα, not for, nor 
 
 zr εις ίιμί()αν, nor should it be rendered 
 ' against the day,' as E. V. [I need hardly 
 remind any accurate scholar, that such an 
 interpretation as 'ii' for ί/ς ' is wo where 
 to be tolerated.] It belongs to όργήν, — 
 ' wrath in the day of wrath,' ' wrath 
 ■which shall come upon thee in that day,' 
 — not to θησαιψίζ>ίς, imagining which 
 has led to the mistake. The ήμ'ιρ. οργής 
 is the day of judgment, viewed in its rela- 
 tion to sinners : see reff. άττοκαλ. 
 δικαιοκρ.] ' the manifestation (public en- 
 forcement, it having been before latent 
 though determined) of God's righteous 
 judgment.' The reading άττοκ. και ίι- 
 καΐϋκρ. would mean, ' the appearance (2 
 These, i. 7• 1 Cor. i. 7) of God, and his 
 righteous judgment,' — not referring merely 
 to the detection of men's hearts, as Origen, 
 Theophyl., RUckert. But the reading is not 
 strongly ui)helH, nor is it according to the 
 mode of speaking in the argument — see ch. 
 i. 17, 18- 6, 7.] This retribution 
 must be carefully kept in its place in the 
 argument. The Ap. is here speaking ge- 
 nerally, of the general system of God in 
 governing the world, — the judging accord- 
 ing to each man's works — punishing the 
 evil, and rewarding the righteous. No 
 question at present arises, how this righte- 
 
 ousness in God's sight is to be obtained — 
 but the truth is only stated broadly at pre- 
 sent, to be further specified by and by, 
 when it is clearly shewn that by toya νόμου 
 no flesh can be justified before God. The 
 neglect to observe this has occasioned two 
 mistakes: (1) an idea that by this passage 
 it is proved that not faith only, but works 
 also in some measure, justify before God 
 (so Toletus in Pool's Syn.), and (2) an idea 
 (Tholuck 1st edn. and KoUner) that by 
 tpyov άγαβοϋ here is meant faith in Christ. 
 However true it be, so much is certainly 
 not meant here, but merely the fact, that 
 every where, and in all, God punishes evil, 
 and rewards good. 7, 8. tois μέν καθ' 
 
 ίιΐΓ οργή κ. θυμός] ' Το those who 
 
 by endurance in good works seek for 
 glory and honour and immortality (will 
 He render) eternal life : but to those who 
 are (men) of self-seeking, and disobey 
 the truth, but obey iniquity (shall accrue) 
 anger and wrath,' &c. The verb άττο- 
 δώσιι, ver. 6, should have two accusatives, 
 representing the two sides of the final retri- 
 bution, — δόζαν, &c. and όργήΐ'. Sec. But the 
 second of these is changed to a nominative 
 and connected with t στηι understood, and 
 made the first member of the following sen- 
 tence, ίόξα if, &c. being opposed to it. Thus 
 also two datives belong to άττοΰώσα, \iz. τοΐς 
 .... ζ/;Γ(ΐΓ'σιΐ',— and το7ς . . . ήδικίί^.. To 
 ζΐ]τονσιΐ' belong (όί. κ. τιμ. κ. άφθ. as its ac- 
 cusatives, and κηθ' νπομ. tpy• ay. as its ad- 
 verb. This, as DeWette remarks, is the only 
 admissible construction : in opposition to (a) 
 Oecum. and Beza, who divide Ipy. ay. from 
 Kati' νττομ. {lis quidem oui secundum pa- 
 tientein eupectationem quarunt boni operis 
 gloriam),-'{ii) Bengel, Knapp, Fritzsche, 
 Olsh., and Krehl., who take τοΐς .... 
 ayaQol• as meaning ' those who endure in 
 goad works' (as Oec. does ΓοΤς καΰ' ΰπομ. 
 those who endtire, absol.), and ίόζαν .... 
 ζητυϋσιΐ', as in opposition with it, — (y) 
 Photius (in Oecum.), Luther, and Estius, 
 
 who take it, τοις ζητονηιν ζ••ιήν 
 
 αιών., — δόξαν, κ.Γ.λ.,— (i) Reiche, who 
 takes Γοϊς- μίι•, — ' to the one,' — alone, and 
 makes καθ' νττομ. parallel to κατά τα ϊργα,
 
 6—12. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 S07 
 
 δε Tij "' aciKia, 
 νονωρια, ^ ίττι ττασυν 
 
 opyy) και " θυμός, ^ ^ θλ^ις και ' στε- ^^\^-^^^1: 
 ' "φνχην ανθοωτΓου του ' /carfp*ya- y -sxhess. ί. 
 Σ^ομί'ΐΌυ το κακόν, Ιουδαίου τε πρώτον και' Έ^λΧτινυς' ^Y^J'\\^^• 
 
 10 e •?'};■ 5>^ ' ^ ^ 1 • ' » " Κ ' Υ ' lfrt.viii.k2. 
 
 όοςα οε και τιμή και ίΐυΐίνη τταντ/ τω ερ•γαί,ομ{νω xxx.h. 
 ΤΟ ayauov, ΐονόαιω τζ ποωτον και' Έ.Λληνι. ου 7"Ρ bLuke^ix. sc. 
 
 > ϊ ^ #' ^ ~ β ~. 12 " > k ' ' Num. six II, 
 
 ίστιν προςωποΑημχρια τταρα τω σεω όσοι yap ανο- η. s«eh. 
 
 /ιχως ημαρτον, ανομως και απολουνται, και όσοι *»' Vu Is l^Ί7 
 
 18. ICor. V. 3. James i. 20. 1 Pet. iv. 3. d ch. vii. 21. xii. 21(bis). xiii. 4 (bis), xvi. IH. ' 1 Cor. 
 
 xiii.."!. 3 Jiihn 11 only. e — ver. 7. f = ch. viii. H. x. In al. g — Malt, vii 23. xxvi. 
 
 ID. Gal. Ti loal Ps. xiv. 2. h 3 Jolin II onlv. Sec J>hn v. 29. IPet. iii. 11. I'lii em 14. 
 
 iEph.vi.y. Col.iii.2S. James ii. 1 only f. k here only t. See 1 C.r ix. 21. 1 = Mati. xviii. 14. 
 
 2 Cor ii. If). Iv. 3. 2 ΤΗβλϊ. ii. 1(1. m = here only. (Gal iii 11. v. 4.) 
 
 arm Orig Eph Dam Thl lat ff.— 9. και θλιψκ UA. 238 Orig Thl Rufj : Ολ. rt 5.— for τγ. ψ. 
 ανθί)., πάντα ανθρωττυν Arm : omnes homines ier. — ιηνοαιω and ίλληιη G 1. 37- 109 al 
 d'g.— πρωΓο»/ (both times) om aeth.— 10. ίΪ£ om 38. 48.62.70. 115-21 al (not D as in Scholz) 
 Orig. — rw tpya^. το ayaG. (-ω ayaOio lect 8) παντι G g. — 11. rec -λί;ψιη, with JK &c : 
 txt A(B.'')DG &c (see prolegg. eh. v. § 1. 9). — τω era D'. — 12. ίννομως lect 8 Chr-comm 
 Epiphj (Marcion) Th!-text-comm Oec-comm. — bef κριθ. ins και lect 8 tol arm Cypr : bef 
 
 representing the rule of judgment, taking 
 the rest as (y). έργου, sing, of moral 
 
 habitude in the whole, the general course 
 of life and action (see reff.). δοξαν, 
 
 absolute imparted glory like His own, see 
 ilatt. xiii. 43. John xvii. 22:— τιμήν, re- 
 cognition, relative precedence, see Matt. x. 
 32; XXV. 34 :— άφθαρσίαν, 'incorrupti- 
 bility :' so the aim of the Christian athlete 
 is described, I Cor. ix. 25, as being to obtain 
 στίφηνην άφΟαυτοί'. 8. TOis 0€ €§ 
 
 epiGetas] as in reff., to be sujjplied by 
 oi'fft)•, — those who live in, act from, are 
 situated in and do their deeds from — ίριθίία, 
 as a status, as υ'ι ίξ spoken οί place. 
 εριθεία, — not from tpig, from which it is 
 distinguished 2 Cor. xii. 20. Gal. v. 20, but 
 from ϊρΊθος, a hired workman, whence 
 ίριθίνω or -ομαι, properly ' to work for 
 hire,' but met. and generally, ' ambitum 
 exercere,' used principally of official per- 
 sons, who seek their own purposes in the 
 exercise of their office, and (according to 
 the analogy of ττιηίύα from παιίίΰω, 
 Cui:\iia from ίουλη'ω, άλαζοριία from 
 άλαζονίΰυμαι) ίοιθήα, 'ambitus,' '■self- 
 seeking,' ' greed.' It stands opposed to 
 ΰττομοιή tpyov άγηθοϋ, which requires 
 self denial and forbearance. There seems 
 to be no reason why this, the proper 
 meaning, should not here apply, without 
 seeking for a more far-fetched one, as ' the 
 party spirit of the Jews,' Riickert. — The 
 mi.stake of rendering it ' contentiousness,' 
 and imagining a derivation from ίρις, pre- 
 vailed universally (Orig., Chrys., Tlieodo- 
 ret, Tlieo])hyl., Oecum., Hesych., ήριΰιύ- 
 tTo, tipiXiivuKn, Vulg , Erasm., Grot., &c., 
 and even the more recent Eng. comm., 
 Bloomf , Slade, and Peile, roTc t£ ίριβήας, 
 i. e. τοΤς ίμιζηνσι) according to De Wette, 
 down to Riickert, who first suggested the 
 true derivation. It apjiears to have arisen 
 
 X 
 
 from ϊρίθίζω being somewhat similar in 
 sound. Aristotle uses it in the sense of 
 ' ambitus,' canvassing for office, in Polit. 
 V. 3, — μίταβάλληνσι δ( a'l πολιτΰαι και 
 άνίυ στάσιως διά τ( τάς ίριθίίας, ωςπερ 
 iv Ήραι^• ίξ α'ιρίτών yap ha τοντο 
 ίποίΐ)σαν κληρωτός, 'ότι ypovvTO τους 
 ίριθιν^μΐΓους. Fritzsche, who has an ex- 
 cursus on the word, renders 01 tK ίριθ., — 
 ' maliliosi frauduni machinatores.' Ig- 
 natius, ad Philad. § 8, opposes ίριθ. to 
 χριπτομαθία. On the whole, ' self-seek- 
 ing ' seems best to lay hold of the idea of 
 the word: see note on Phil. i. 16. 
 άπειθ. μ., τ. άλ.] Hindering (see ch. i. 18) 
 the truth which they possess from working, 
 by self-abandonment to iniquity. 
 οργή κ. θνμο'ς] According to this arrange- 
 ment (see var. readd.) the former word 
 denotes the abiding, settled mind of God 
 toivards them {ή 6pyή τ. Gtoh μίνα ϊττ' 
 αυτόν, John iii. 36), — and the latter, the 
 outbreak of that anger at the great day of 
 retribution. So the grammarians : θυμός 
 μ'ίν ϊστι πράςκαιρος {excaiidescentia, as 
 Cicero)• ooyj) ii πολυχρόκος μνησικακία. 
 Ammon. See the same further brought out 
 by Tittmann, Syn. I. p. 131. 9.] θλΐψ. 
 
 κ. στεν.] An e.xpression from the LXX (see 
 reff.) : the former signifying more the out- 
 ward weight of objective infliction, — the 
 latter the subjective feeling of the pressure. 
 It is possible, in the case of the suffering 
 Christian, for the former to exist without 
 the latter: so 2 Cor. iv. 8, iv παντι θ\ι• 
 βιψ£ΐΌΐ, ά\\' oh (ΤΓ£ΐ'οχωροι'/ίί I'oi. But 
 here the objective weight of intliction and 
 the subjective weight of anguish, arc co- 
 existent, εττΐ ιτάσ-αν ψ. άνθ ] pro- 
 bably a periphrasis for tiie sake of em|)hasis 
 and solemnity. Had it been (as Krilzsclie 
 and Meyer) to indicate that the soul is the 
 suffering part of the man (nearly so Olsh.), 
 2
 
 508 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Π. 
 
 n-Actsxwi. νομω ημαρτον, 
 
 31 refl. - '■ ' 
 
 ο Jamrs i. 22, 
 
 23, 2.'. only +. 
 Ο" I Cor. iii. 19 
 
 al. 
 ■ James, tit 
 
 " ^ ^ ' 11 fl' . 13 ' ^ ' 
 
 dia νομού Kfiiuijaovrai ου yap oi 
 
 ακροηται νομον δίκαιοι ""πάρα τω θεω, αλλ οι ^ ποιηται 
 νομού '^ ^ικαιωΟησονται. Όταν yap 'ίθνη τα μη νομον 
 
 ρ = James, tit,/ .,^χ^/ - t / \ 
 
 suiir.andiv. £-γοι»τα (pvosi TO Tov vojuou TTOUoaiv, ovTOi νομον μη 
 
 xvii.2«)t. 1 Mace. ii. (i7. q = ch. iii. 20 al23. Paul only, exc. Luke xviii. 14 and James ii. 21, 24. Ps. 
 
 cxlii. 2. r Gal. ii. 15. iv. 8. Eph. ii. 3 only. scon.str, Malt. xvi. 23. ch. viii. 5. Luke 
 
 i. 40. Time. Tlii.31. 
 
 iifi νομ. 115. — 13. om lent 12. — rec (2ce) τον νομ. (corrn), with D3E(2nd time)JK &c 
 ChrTlulrt Phot al : t.\t ABDE(lst time)G 31. 46" al Dam.— bef (ίεο^ om τω BD' : ins 
 AD'EGJK mss (appy) gr-ff• — άλλα ποιηται G. — 14. foryap, Be G (genim ant auiem) seth 
 arm Ori^, (om,). — rec ποιΐ) {grammatical corrn), with Β•ΈΚ &c ChrThdrt al: ποίίΐ J 1. 
 17. 30. 48. ll(;-17-2:i al: ττοιονσιν D'G 93 al lect 12: txt AB 47-marg 672. 73. 118 al 
 Clem Origj Dam. — for οντοι, tit τοιούτοι G it ν Origj Hil Pelag Fulg : txt (MSS &c) 
 
 sinned against a νόμος, is presently (ver. 
 14) shewn. Chrys. says (Horn. vi. p. 46'ΰ 
 Ε), . . . . ό μίν γαρ "E/Wr/j/ άΐ'όμως κρί- 
 νίται' το Cf,άvόμωc, ίντανθα ου το χαλί- 
 ττώτίρον, αλλά το ήμίρωτιρον Xiytf (this 
 is perhaps saying too much, see above) 
 τοντίστιν, οΰκ ϊχίι κατηγορονί'τα τον 
 νόμον. το yap άΐ'όμως τοΰτ' ίστι, χωρίς 
 της ίζ SKfivov κατηκοίσιως, φησίΐ', άπο 
 Των τί)ς φύσ(ως λoyισμώv καταΰικάζίται 
 μόνων, ο Si Ιουδαίας, ίνΐ'όμως, τοντίστι, 
 μ(τά της φύσεως και του νόμου κατηγο- 
 ρονντος' οσψ yap πλύονος άπήλανσίν 
 Ιπιμίλίίας, τοσοΰτψ μιίζονα δώσίΐ ίίκην. 
 
 καί (De \ν.) serves to range ήπολ., 
 as well as ημαρτ. under the common condi- 
 tion άνόμως: 'As many as without the 
 law have sinned, without the law shall 
 also perish.' άτΓολοΰνται, the reaiilt 
 
 of the judgment on them, rather than κρι- 
 θησονται, its process, because the absence 
 of the law would thus seem as if it were 
 the rule hy ivhich they are to be juclyed, — 
 whereas it is only an accident of that judg- 
 ment, which depends on other considera- 
 tions, ev νομω, ' under {in, as a 
 status) the (Mosaic) law ;' not ' a law,' 
 which would make the sentence a truism : 
 it is on that very undeniable assumption, 
 ' that all who have had a law given shall 
 he judged hy that law, ^ that the Ap. con- 
 structs his argument, asserting it with re- 
 gard to the Mosaic law in the case of the 
 Jews, and proving that the Gentiles have 
 had a law given to them in the testimony 
 of their consciences. As to the omission of 
 the article, no inference can be drawn, as 
 the word follows a preposition : see ver. 23, 
 where iv νόμψ unquestionably means ' in 
 the law of Moses.' Besides, these verses 
 are no general assertions concerning men 
 who have and men who have not, a law re- 
 vealed (for all have one), but a statement of 
 the case as concerning Jews and Gentiles. 
 
 νομας, throtiyhout, signifies the Ιαιυ 
 of Moses, even though anarthrous, in every 
 place, except where the absence of tlie article 
 corresponds to a logical indjeiipiteness, b.s 
 
 it should have been, as De W. observes, 
 iiri φνχήν τταντος άΐ'θμ., or ίπί ττάσαν 
 \Ρυχήν ανθρώπων (see reft'.). κατίργ.] 
 
 κατεργάζομαι and tρyάζoμaι seem to have 
 but this slight diff'erence,^that κατεργάζο- 
 μαι, answering rather to our ' commit,' is 
 more naturally used of evil, as manifested 
 and judged of by separate acts among 
 men, whereas 'ipyάζoμaι, answering to our 
 ' work,' is used indiff'erently of both good 
 and evil. That this is not always kept to, 
 see reft"., esp. ch. vii. 18, and Plat. Legg. 
 iii. p. 680, end, in both which places, how- 
 ever, definite acts are spoken of. The 
 pres. part, denotes the status or habit of 
 the man. Ίοιιδ. τ. ττρώτον] Because 
 
 the Jew has so much greater advantages, 
 and better opportunities of knowing the 
 divine will : and, therefore, pre-eminent 
 responsibility. 10. £ΐρήνη] Here in 
 
 its highest and most glorious sense, see 
 reff. 11.] This remark serves as the 
 
 transition to what follows, not merely as 
 the confirmation of what went before. As 
 to what preceded, it asserts that though the 
 Jew has had great advantages, he shall be 
 justly judged for his use of them, not 
 treated as a favourite of Heaven : as to 
 what follotcs, it introduces a compari- 
 son between him and the Gentile to shew 
 Jiow fairly he will be, for those greater 
 advantages, regarded as ττρωτης in re- 
 sponsibility. And thus we gradually (see 
 note on ver. 1) pass to the direct com- 
 parison between him and the Gentile, 
 end consideration of his state. 
 12 — 16.] The justice of a gevbral judg- 
 ment of ALL, but according to the advan- 
 tages of each. 12. όσοι γ. ανό- 
 μω? . . . .] ' For as many as have sinned 
 without (th(i) law (of Moses), shall also 
 perish without (the) law (of Moses) :' i. e. 
 it shall not appear against them in judg- 
 ment. Whether that will ameliorate their 
 case, is not even hinted, — but only the fact, 
 as consonant with God's justice, stated. 
 That this is the meaning of άνόμιος, is clear 
 from I Cor. ix. 21. That even these have
 
 13—16. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 309 
 
 Έχοντες εαντοις ίίσιν νόμος, ο'ίτινες " ενδί/κτνυιται το t = Actsx.4i, 
 
 ν >' - ' W ^ ' - <>' 1-47. xiii. 41,' 
 
 ερ7ον του νομού -/οατττον εν ταις καοόιαις αυτών, 43 ai. 
 
 , > ' ^ "^ ^ 'J _ ■> ^ 'a=ch. ix.22 
 
 συμμαρτνρουσης αυτών της ^ συνειόησεως και ^ μεταζυ 
 
 αλλήλων των ^ Χο-γισμων κατη•γορουντων η και "^ αττο- 
 
 Λ ' 16 ' ' ' " <i - - - 
 
 λoyoυμεvωv. εν ΐ]μεοα οτε κρίνει 
 
 JK 
 
 ο Θεός τα " κρυπτά 
 μου Ota Irjffou 
 
 al. fr. i Cor. 
 Tiii.24. (Gen. 
 1 15, 17.) 
 V ver. 7 reft', 
 vv hereoulytt?). 
 X ch viii. le. 
 
 , 'r i ι - ' --\ - ^ " -, ix. 1 only t. 
 
 OeorG. _ ' η ' ^ ^ ί ■> /Λ ' t ^ V 'Τ - y = John viii. 
 
 ABDE των ανϋξίωττων, κατά το ευayyελιov μου cia ιησου s». Acts χχίϋ. 
 
 Eccles. χ. 2ϋ. ζ Acts χτ. 9. Matt, xviii. Ιδ. Wisd. xviii. 23. a 2 Cor. χ. 5 only. Prov. vi. 18. Jer. 
 
 xi. IH. b-— John T. 40 al (t?;. c ahs., Luke xxi. 14. .4cts xxvi. 1. Jer.xii.l. d ver. 12 refl". 
 
 e Matt vi. 4 al. fr. constT., 1 Cor. ir. 5. xiv. 25. feh. xvi. 25. 2 Tim. ii. 8 only. See 2 Cor. i». 3 
 
 1 Thcss. i. S. 2 Tuess. ii. 14. 
 
 Clem Origj all Aug al. — 15. ivciyvvrai A: ινδικν. G. — for έργον, βονλημα Origj. 
 — μαοτυοουμίνης Orig. — -ας συνιιδ. avr. DEG vss Aug (αντυις τ. συν. tol' Chr Jer 
 Ruf : αυτυις τ. σ. αυτών τ tol- al Pelag Ambrst al). — κατη^/ορουντων α\\η\ονς των 
 λυγίίΤμων αυτών arm: διαλογισμών G. — 16. for υτί, y ΑΒ 73. 03 al tol (al latt) Cyr 
 Dam {tv y) Ambr Aug Ambrst : txt DEGJK most mss it ν (am demid harl) syr &c Ath 
 Chr Thdrt Oec CjT-jerus {όταν κρινη) Ruf^ al. — μου om 37 d' Tert : κατά τυυ iv. μον 
 om 42-3 : Dei e. — aft Cia ιησ. χρ. (χρ. ιησ. Β: εν χριστώ ιησ. Orig: υ/σ. om Tert) 
 
 e. g. ίαυτοϊς ΐΙσιν νόμος, ver. 14 : and even 
 there not ' a law :' see note. And I hope to 
 shew that it is never thus anarthrously used 
 ai =: ό νόμος, except where usage will ac- 
 count for such omission of the article. 
 δια νομ. κριθ.] Now, ' shall be judged by 
 the law :' for that will furnish the ?neasure 
 and rule by which judgment will proceed. 
 13.] This is to explain to the Jew 
 the fact, that not his mere hearing of the 
 law read in the synagogue (= his being by 
 birth and privilege a Jew) will justify him 
 before God, but (still keeping to general 
 principles and not touching as yet on the 
 impossibility of being thus justified) the 
 doing of the law. — τοϋ has been appai-ently 
 inserted in both cases in the later MSS 
 from seeing that νόμος was indisputably 
 the law of Moses, and stumbling at the un- 
 usiial expression o\ άκροαταΐ νόμου. But 
 the 01 in both cases is generic, and άκρο- 
 ατής-νόμου, ποιητής-νόμον (almost as owe 
 word in each case), ' a hearer-ofi-the-laiv,' 
 a ' doer-of-the-law.' So that the correct 
 English for oi άκροαται νόμου is ' hearers 
 of the law,' and for o'l ποιηταΐ νόμου, 
 'doers of the law.'— It is obvious, that 
 with the omission of the τον in both places, 
 the whole elaborate and ingenious criticism 
 built by Bp. Middleton on its use, falls to 
 the ground. (See Middleton, Gr. Art. in 
 loc.) His dictum, that such an expression 
 as oi άκροηται νόμου is inadmissible, will 
 liardly in our day be considered as deciding 
 the matter. 14.] Ιθνη, ' the Gen- 
 
 tiles;' see ch. iii. 2!i ; xi. 13; xv. 10, 12. 
 In this place, ϊΰνη τά μή νόμ. ίχοντα is 
 the only way in which the sense required 
 could be expressed, for τά ίθνη τά μι) v. 
 ίχ., would mean ' those Gentiles who have 
 not the law,' as also would ΪΟνη μι) νόμον 
 ίχ., whereas the meaning dearly is, ' the 
 Gentiles, not having the law.' 
 νόμ,ον] Again, ' the law,' viz. of Moses. 
 A law, they have : see below. 
 
 φνσ€ΐ, 'by nature,' — τοΙς <ρνσικ6ις επό- 
 μενα λογι/τμοΊς, Schol. in Matthai. 
 τα τοΰ νόμου ττ.] 'do things pertaining 
 to the law,' e. g. abstain from stealing, or 
 killing, or adultery. But it by no means 
 follows that the Ap. means that the Gen- 
 tiles could/ulfil the law, do the things, i. e. 
 all the things enjoined by the law (as De 
 Wette) : he argues that a conscientious 
 Gentile, who knows not the law, does, 
 when he acts in accordance with require- 
 ments of the law, so far set up the (see 
 below on the art.) law to himself. — τά τοΰ 
 νόμου is interpreted by Beza, Wetst., and 
 Eisner, ' that which the law does,' i. e. 
 make sanctions and prohibitions : but this 
 can hardly be. — The Ap. does not deny 
 certain virtues to the Gentiles, but main- 
 tains the inefficiency of those, and all other 
 virtues, towards man's salvation. 
 eauTois είσιν νο'μοξ] ' are to themselves 
 (so far) the law,' not ' a law,' for a law 
 may be just or unjust, God's law or man's 
 law : there is but one laiv of God, partly 
 written in men's consciences, more plainly 
 manifested in the law of Moses, and fully 
 revealed in Jesus Christ. The art. could 
 not have been here used without stultifying 
 the sentence by distributing the predicate, 
 making the conscientious heathen to be to 
 himself the whole of the law, instead of 
 ' the law, so far as he did the worAs of the 
 law.' Cf. Aristot. Eth. iv. 14, ύ τέ χαρίεις 
 κ. ί\(υΟΐριυς όντως 'iS,n ούο' ΐ'όμος ων 
 έαυτψ. 15.] Ινδίίκν., ' by their con- 
 
 duct shew forth,'— give an example of. 
 TO €ργ. τοϋ νόμον i= τά τον νόμον 
 above : but sing, as ap))lying to each of the 
 particular cases supposed in the 'όταν .... 
 ■κοίωσιν. If it had here been τ-ά tpya τον 
 νόμυν, it might have been understood to 
 mean the irhole works of the law, which 
 the indefinite orav prevents above. 
 γρα-ΤΓτον iv τ. κ. οΰτ.] Alluding to the 
 tables of stone on which the law was
 
 3J0 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 11. 
 
 ^cVnlv'^iV χριοτοΰ. ^^ εί δε συ 'Ιουδαίος ^ εποΓθ|υάΣ^ϊ7 και εττανηπανγ ABDE 
 
 25. ■ ■ ' r \ \ - • /) - 18 ^ ' J ^ Ω'\ ^^ 
 
 h-heieoniy. νομω κοι κπυχα(ΤΗΐ ίν ϋίω '" και -γινωσκίΐς ^ το ϋίλημα 
 
 \\iZ'/V\\\ '^"' ^ ^οκιμάΖίΐς τα ' δίοφεοοιτα, '" κατηγ^υίιμίνος εκ του 
 
 12. (Lake χ fi. / IQn' η' ^ο''^'> ■» j\~ 
 
 Num.xi. 2.-..) νομού, τηπυιυας τε σεαυτον οοη'^ον tivai τυφλών, 
 
 20 η 
 
 παιδευτ7ΐν "^ α(|)ροΐ'ωυ, διδάσκαλου 
 
 J•. rh. V.3. 
 
 2Cor.i. iftHi. φως '' των εν σκοτει, 
 
 j ellips., hrre ^ 'ϊ' ' 
 
 onlr. Srcch-xii2. k — Luke xii. ftfi. Phil i. 10. 1 — Phil. i. 10. Gal. ii fi. m Luke i. 4 Acts 
 
 xviii. 25. Cx\. vi. 6 al.f. η ron.str , 2 Cor. X. 7. Acts i. Hi. Matt. xv. 14. xxiii 111, 24 
 
 oiilv. Ezraviii. I. ρ Matt. iv. 1«. 1 Thess. T. 4. IJohn i. β. q Heb. xii. '.» only. Hos. τ.2. 
 
 r -= Ep'h. y. 17 reff. 1 Pet. ii. In. 
 
 add τον Kvnioit ημών D(E?) it Ambr.— 17. rec for fi Sf, tie (.see note), with D^J &c syr 
 alChrThdrtThdr-mopsOeo: t.\t ABD'EKS. 10. .SI 5 44-β. <i6-marg74. 80. 101-?f-i)-10- 
 17-53-4--7' all it ' all Clem τινίς in Tlidr-mops Dam Thl lat-ff.— bef ί-κονμοζιι, ins i»v 
 C5. — tiravtTTiivi} 238 : ίπα%'α-ηαυσίΐ 1?. — rec bef vd/iw ins τω (corrn). with D'EJK &,c 
 Thdrt Thl Oec (Chr) : txt ABD• 5. 31. 73. 80. 93 al Clem Did Chr-comm Chr (Mtt's 
 ms,) Dam. — iv τω Btw Did. — aft τυ (lt\ , ins ηυτοιι v-edd arm copt Ambrst Sedul Pelag 
 Ruf : roi; θίον Clem : but (τυυτ(στί) του Gmv Thilrt Thl. — 18. for νοκιμ., γιΐ'ωσκκς 
 33 5. — 19. σίαυτω GO. TJ Syr. — 20. οιδ. νήπιων om A : ins bef παιδίυτ. 5. — 21. τον 
 
 written : see a similar figure 2 Cor. iii. 3. 
 (τυμμαρτ. αντ. τ. σννίΐδ.] This is 
 a 7iew argument, not a mere continuation 
 of the tvCti^iQ above. Besides their giving 
 this example by actions consonant with the 
 law, their own conscience, reflecting on the 
 thing done, bears icihiess io it as good. 
 σνμμ., not merely n: μαυτ., as Grot., 
 Thol., nor z= una testatnr, viz. as well as 
 their practice, — but ' confirming by its 
 testimony,' the aw signifying the agree- 
 ment of the witness with the deed, as con 
 in conteslari, cnnfirmare : — perhaps also 
 the αυι> may be partly induced by the συν 
 in fffi'HC/'/Tfwc, — referring to the reflective 
 process, in which a man confers, so to 
 speak, with himself. και μ£τ. άλλ. 
 
 ιο.Γ.λ.] ' and their thoughts {judgments 
 or reflexions, the self judging voices of the 
 conscience, which being corrupted by sinful 
 desires are often divided) among one an- 
 other (i. e. thought against thought in inner 
 strife) accusing, or perhaps excusing ' 
 (these two partt. are absolute, describing the 
 office of these judgments, — and nothing need 
 be supplied, as ' them,' or ' their deeds'). 
 Notice the similarity of this strife of con- 
 science, and its testimony, as here described, 
 to the hiuher and more detailed form of the 
 same conflict in the Christian man, ch.vii. l(j, 
 16.] To wtiat has this verse reference? 
 Hardly to that just preceding, which surely 
 speaks of a process going on in this life 
 [so however Chrys. takes it. See also a 
 fine passage in Bourdaloue's Sermons, vol. 
 I. Serm. ii. p. 27, ed. Paris, 1854] : nor, as 
 commonly assumed, to κ\>Μί\ηοντηι (ver. 
 12), which only terminates one in a series of 
 clauses connected by γόιι : — but to the great 
 affirmation of the passage, concluding with 
 ver. 10. To this it is bound, it appears to 
 me, by the ra κρυπτά των άνθ^)ώπων, 
 answering to παπαν -φυ-χήν άνθρωπου, 
 ■ver. 9. This affirmation is the last sen- 
 tence which has been in tlie dogmatic form : 
 
 — after it we have a series of quasi-paren- 
 thetic clauses οΰ yap — υσοι yap — οιΊ γάρ 
 — oral' yap. After it, the reasons, neces- 
 sitated by the startling assertion, are one 
 after another given, and, that having been 
 done, t/ie time is specified when Die great 
 retribution shall take place. κατά το 
 
 £•ΰαγγ. μου] See reff. — ' according to (not 
 belonging to κριιη as the rule of judgment, 
 but to the whole declaration, ' as taught in,' 
 ' as forming part of) the Gospel entrusted 
 to me to teach.' 8ia Ίησ. χρ.] ' by 
 
 Jesus Christ,' viz. as the Judge— see John 
 V. 22 : — belongs to icpivt'i. 
 17 — 24.] The pride of the Jews in their 
 law and their God contrasted with their 
 disobedience to God and the law. 
 17. el 8e] This has been in the later MSS 
 changed into ics, apparently to avoid the 
 anacoluthon, or perhaps merely by mistake 
 originally. — The anacoluthon, however, is 
 more apparent than real. It is only pro- 
 duced by the resumption of the thread of 
 the sentence with oSc, ver. 21. Omit (in 
 the sense) only that word, and all proceeds 
 regularly — ' But if thou art denominated a 
 Jeif, and &fc. . . . , thou that teachest thy 
 neighbour, dost thou teach thyself?' &c. 
 The €1 δί συ carries on the apostrophe from 
 ver. 5, since when it has been broken off 
 by reference to the great day of retribution 
 and its rule of judgment; the σ-ύ identifies 
 the person addressed here as the same indi- 
 cated by the σου and σίαυτω there, and by 
 ώ ανθρω-ιτί in ver. 1. Thus the Ap. by 
 degrees Ae/« in his place as a Jew the some- 
 what indefinite object of his remonstrances 
 hitherto, — and reasons with him as such. 
 €irov.] No stress on i π-, — ' art named,' 
 ' denominated,' — ' hast the name put on 
 thee;' see reff. Ι-ιταναττ.] Used of false 
 
 trust, ste reff". — The roi of the rec. has been 
 inserted in the later MSS. before νϊψψ, be- 
 cause it here clearly applied to the ' law of 
 Moses,' and the absence of the article trave
 
 17—2; 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 311 
 
 νήπιων, εχοιτα την μηρψωσιν της -γνώσεως και της ^=^^*^■^^^ 
 '''\ u ' ' ~ ' . Q1 *■ •'■ "^ '^ ' " ^ ill I'al "'' 
 
 αληϋίΐας ev τω νυμω ο ουν οιοασκων ίΤίξ)ον σεαυτοι» t2Tiin ΰί.β 
 
 ου όιόασκεις ; ο κηρύσσων μη κλεπτίΐν κλέπτεις', ο " ". ^,"}^ '■ ^7. 
 λέγων μη μυιγ^ευειν μo^yJευείς ', ο " βδελυσσόμενος τα '^χν".^4.'χχί! 
 ίίθ<ι)Λα ■ ιε,οοσυΛίΐς , ος εν νομω καννασαι, οια ttjc ^ = ''^"^«""'y• 
 
 ' ' '■ Α- ' - E\ud. ν. :.'!. 
 
 ** παραβάσεως του νόμου τον θεον ^ατιμάζεις ', Το •γάξ) muyj^^'*' 
 
 " - fl -" '^ ' ' -" C /0\ , -" • - >'η χ = Acts XV. 
 
 oi'Ojua του σεου οι υμάς ρλασψημειται εν τοις εονεσιν, 2oai.fr. isa. 
 καβως ■yεyρaπτaι. ^^ περιτομη μεν yap '' ώί^ελεΓ, έαν ^ see'^Ac'ti'xix. 
 νομον πρασσης εαν οε παραβάτης νομού ης, 77zver.i7. 
 
 ' ' * ' '''aw. Ren., here 
 
 only, abs., ch. iv. l.'i riff. b eh. i. 23 reff. ρ I-^a. lii. 5. d absol., here only. Xt-n. Anab. 
 
 T. 1. 12. e here only. See John vii. 19. Rev. xxii. 14. fGal.ii. 18. James ii. il, 11 only t. 
 
 fTfpov J 1. 30-8. 93 al. — 22. for κροσυλιις, saci^ific'mm facis Ambr. — 23. for του νυμ. 
 τ. Vtoi•, της ίντοΧης roi' ΐ'ομον του β(υυ 23: om του ΐΌ^κου 41. T(j. — 24. for Si νμης, 
 per vos it ν lat-ft". — 25. yap om 37 d e ν seth arm lat-ff.— for -πρασσης, φυλασσης D^ 
 
 offence. It is omitted, because ' the law ' 
 is not here distributed — it is not the law 
 itself in its entirety, which is meant, but 
 the fact of having or of knowing the law : — 
 the strict way of e.xpressing it would per- 
 haps be, ' in the fact of possessing a law,' 
 — which condensed into our less accurate 
 English, would be in one word, ' in the 
 law:' viz. ' which thou possessest.' 
 κανχ. ev Θ.] viz. ' as thy Covenant God .•' 
 ' as being peculiarly thine.' 18. γιν. 
 
 TO f e'X] Οίος having been just mentioned, 
 it is left to be inferred that θίλημα refers 
 to Him. δοκιμ. τ. διαφ.] ' provest 
 
 (in the sense of shitting and coming to a 
 conclusion on) things which diifer,' — 
 ivaVTin aW>i\oic, ^ικαιοσΰιην κ, αύικίαν, 
 κ.τ.λ. Theod. κρίΐ'ίΐς τι Cfl ττραίαι κ. τι 
 μη ίίΐ ΤΓΐιαζηι, Theophylact. The Vulg. 
 ' probas utiliora,' and E. V. ' approvest the 
 things that are more excellent,' is some- 
 what flat in meaning, and not so applicable. 
 κατηχ. £K τοΰ νομ.] ' being (ha- 
 bitually, not in youth only, — force of pres.) 
 instructed (not merely catechctically but 
 dida<tic;dly, in the synagogues, &c.) out of 
 the law ' (τοΰ νόμου, though after a prepo- 
 sition — because the law is distribnted— it 
 is the book of the law, the law itself, out of 
 which the κιιτίιχησις takes place). 
 19.] τΓί'ποιθας, sometimes with ίηντψ or 
 ϊφ' 'κιυτφ (see Luke xviii. 9), and some- 
 times with iiri (Heb. xiii. ii. Luke, ut su|ir.), 
 — ' regardest thyself as,' 'art confident 
 in thyself as being.' όδηγον τυφλ.] 
 
 We can hardly say with Olsli., tliat the Ap. 
 nndoubleitly refers to the saying of our 
 Lord Matt, χ v. 14, — but rather that both 
 that saving and this were allusive to a title 
 ' leaders of the blind' given to themselves 
 by tiie Pharisees, witii which Paul as a 
 Pharisee would be familiar. Similarly, the 
 following titles may have been \\M known 
 and formal expressions of Jewish pride with 
 reference to those who were without the 
 
 covenant. 20.] μορφωσιν, not the 
 
 mere apparent likeness (Theophylact, &c.), 
 but the real representation. The law, as 
 far as it went, was a reflexion of the holi- 
 ness and character of God. Hardly so 
 much is here meant (Olsh.), as that the law 
 contained a foreshadotving of Christ, — for 
 the Ap. is speaking now more of moral 
 truth and knowledge, by which a rule of 
 judgment is set up, sufficient to condemn 
 the Jew as well as the Gentile. — But after 
 all, this clause {ϊ\οντα . . . νόμφ) is not to 
 be pressed as declaring a fact, hut taken sub- 
 jectively with regard to the Jew, after πί ποι- 
 θας, and understood of his estimate of the 
 law. ev τω νο'μω, because the boo/c of 
 
 the law, the whole law, is denoted. 
 22. ό βδ€λ. τ. ίϊδ. UpotruXeXs ;] The con- 
 trast here must be maintained ; which it 
 will not be if we understand 'tfpnavXtlg 
 of robbing the temple of God of offerings 
 destined for Him (Jos. Antt. xviii. 3. 4). 
 And τα ί'ί?ω\α leads into the kind of rob- 
 bery which is meant. ' Thou who abhor- 
 rest idols, dost thou rob their tem- 
 ples ? ' That it was necessary to vindicate 
 Jews from such a charge, appears Acts 
 xix. 37 : and Jos. Antt. iv. 8. 10 gives as 
 a law, μή συ\ί].ΐ' itjxi ζινικά, μηδ' ΐιν 
 ίττο)υομασμίνον y run θιψ κίΐμήλιον 
 λάμβαναν. 23.] ev νομω, see above 
 
 (ver. 17) for the omission of the art. — but 
 it is not (Un τταρπβάσίοις νόμου, because a 
 τταρήβασις is τον νόμον, the law being 
 broken 06• a v)hole (see James ii. 10: and 
 on 7ΓΓΓ()ο/3άΓ/;ς• νόμον below, ver. 2Γ)). And 
 tTic -παρ. τ. νομ., is ' thy breaking of the 
 law.' — This question coniprchends llic pre- 
 vious ones. 24.] ' For what is ivrilti'U 
 ill tli(! i)roi)li(it Isaiah, is no less true now 
 of you:' 'the fact is so, as it is written.' 
 25 — 29.] Inasmuch as circum- 
 cision was the espetnal sign of the trove- 
 nant, and as such, a distinction on whi(;h 
 the Jewish jiride dwelt witb peculiar satis-
 
 312 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 II. 26—29. 
 
 ^ai'fr' Ge" ττεριτομη σου ^ ακοοβυστ'ια 
 
 yeyoi'iv. iau ούν η ^ ακρο- 
 Mntt (and βνστία TCI ' οικακΌματα του νομού ' φυλασαιι, οιιγι ^ η ακρο- 
 
 Luke)iv.3. '^ , k ' - 1 ' ^ '» \ 1' . 27 ^ 
 
 ίκ φύσεως ^ ακροβυστ'ια τον νόμον ^ τελοΓ 
 
 Jnhn ϋ. υ. Χ- 
 ΙΟ. 
 i — ch. i. 32 
 
 υστια αντου 
 
 υσα 
 
 j act , = Acts 
 
 τϋ.53 xvi. 
 
 4. 1 Tim. V. 
 
 21 al. 
 k iiulcf pron., 
 
 Jolin viii.44 
 
 Im 
 
 β 
 
 " κρίνει ί] 
 
 σε τον "^ Οία "^ -γράμματος και ττ(ξ>ιτομης τταξχιβατην νομού 
 ου γαρ ο '^ ίν τω φανίρω Ιουδαίος εστίν, ούδε η ^ εν 
 •^ τω φανίρω εν σαρκι ττεριτομη, αΛΛα ο εν τ(ι> κρύπτω 
 
 27. cli ix. 8. ΛVi.sd ix. 6. η See ch. χίτ. 22. James iv. 11, 12. ο here only. 0. = Gal. ii. 15. 
 
 p^Jamesii. 8. Gal. v. 16. q — ch.iv. 11. xip. 20. 2 Cur. ii. 4. Heb. ix. 12. Winer, } 51, p. 325. 
 
 rver. 2yre(r. s Malt. vi. 4, fi, &c (ψαι-. rec. text) only. t ch. viii. 8. H. 2 Cur. x. 3. 
 
 Gal. ii. 20. Ti. 12. Eph. ii. 11 (bis). Phil. i. 22. iii. 3, 4{bis). Col. ii. 1. ITim. iii. 10. Philem. l(i. IPet.iv. 1, 
 
 12. 1 John iv. 2. 2 John 7. 
 
 observes or cusiodias it ν Aug Ruf al. — 26^ ovv om 109-78• — for τα δικαιώματα, 
 δικαίωμα G R- harl'. — φυ\αησ6ΐ J al Dam. — ουχ Β 44 Dam : txt DEGJK &c (A uncert) 
 Chr Tlidrt Till Oen. — for λογισθ., μετατραττησίται 32 Chr-expr : τ^ιαπησεται Clir-ms : 
 7ri(HTi)awi)ntTai Chr also. — 27. ;; ίΚ ψνσ. ακροβ. om G g. — for φυσιως, ττιστίως (J3. 73 
 (and in schol also) Thdrt in eaten. — 28. ο (both times) om 17• — bef σαρκι, om ti' 44. — 
 
 faction : the Ap. sets forth, ihal circum- 
 cision without the keeping of the law is of 
 no avail, and that true circumcision and 
 true Judaism are matters of the heart, not 
 of the flesh only, αλλ' »/ τζί(ιιτομη μϊγα, 
 φησιν, ομολογώ κάγώ, αλλά ττόη ; oruf 
 tXy την Ινδον τταητομην. και σκήπίΐ 
 σύΐ'ίσιΐ', πως ίυκα'ιοως τον ntpi αΰτης 
 ίΐςήγαγί λόγοι', ον yap ίϋϋίως άπ' αΰτης 
 ημε,ατο, ίπίιδή πολλι) ήΐ' αΰτης >'/ ΰττό- 
 λί;ψις• άλλ' ιμήκα ΐδίΐζίν αΰτυνς άπό τυΰ 
 μιίζονος πρηςκίκρονκότας, και της ιι'ς 
 θίόν βλασφημίας αιτίους, τότε λοιπόν 
 λαβών τον άκροατήν, κατεγνωκότα αυ- 
 τών, και -γνμνώσας της ττροίδρίας, ίΐς- 
 (tyii τον TTfoi περιτομης λόγον, θαρρών, 
 ΟΤΙ οΰίίίς αΰτ7^ ι\/ηφΐΗται λοιττόν. Chrys. 
 Horn. vii. 474 c. 25.] ττεριτομή, 
 
 chosen as an example in point, and as the 
 most comprehensive and decisive example ; 
 and μίν yap binds it on to the foregoing 
 reasoning : q. d. ' in the same way circum- 
 cision Sec' νομον, not τον νόμον, ττράσ- 
 σης, — because the latter would import the 
 jierfect fulfilment of the whole law: whereas 
 the supposition is of acting according to the 
 law, ' doing the law.' — παραβάτης νόμον 
 here, not τυΰ νόμαν, the παραβάτης νόμον, 
 like άκροα-ής-νόμον and ποιητής-νόμον, 
 ver. 13, being a designation generally of a 
 law-breaker, as those of a law hearer and 
 law-fulfiller. άκροβ. γ€γ.] counts 
 
 for nothing : the Jewish transgressor is no 
 better off tlian the Gentile transgressor. 
 26. ή ακροβ.] i. e. oi iv Ty άκρο- 
 βυστί^. τα δικοιώμ.] plainly, the 
 
 moral requirements, not the ceremonial: 
 for one of the very first of the latter was, 
 io be circumcised. The case is an impos- 
 sible one : nor does the Ap. put it as pos- 
 sible, only as shewing manifestly, that cir- 
 cumcision, the sign of the covenant of the 
 Law, was subordinate to the keeping of the 
 Law itself. The articles shew how com- 
 
 irepiTo- 
 μη... 
 ABDE 
 GJK 
 
 pletely hypothetical the case is — no less 
 than entire fulfilment of all the moral pre- 
 cepts of the law being contemplated. 
 οϋχι ή . . .] 'In such a case would not he 
 be counted as a circumcised person .'' 
 27.] 1 prefer with De Wette (and Erasm.), 
 Luth., Bengel, Wetst., Knapp, and Meyer, 
 to regard this ver. not as a continuation of 
 the question, but as a separate emphatic 
 assertion, and as leading the way to the 
 next ver. κριν^ΐ, ' shall rise up in judg- 
 
 ment against,' 'judge' indirectly by his ex- 
 ample. See Matt. xii. 41, 42, where κατα- 
 κρίνω is used in a sense precisely similar, 
 ή εκ φνιτεως άκροβ.] ' he, who 
 remains in his natural state of uncircum- 
 cision.' ίκ ψνιτ. is contrasted with δια 
 γράμ. κ. πιριτ. below. The position of ίκ 
 φύσεως deckles for this rendering and against 
 joining it with τελούσα, which would re- 
 quire /) άκρυβυστία, εκ φύσεως τον νόμον 
 τελυνσα. τον νομ. τελ.] such is the 
 
 supposition — that an uncircumcised man 
 could fully act up to the (moral) require- 
 ments of the law. It is not ή τον νόμ. 
 τελ. ; because άκροβ. is used in the widest 
 abstract sense ; no distinction is made be- 
 tween one and another uncircumcised per- 
 son, but some one man is taken as an ex- 
 ample of άκροβνστία. So that the omis- 
 sion of the art. does not give a new hypo- 
 thetic sense, ' if it fulfil the lair,' but 
 merely restates the hypothesis : ' fulfi.lling 
 (as it does, as we have supposed) the law.' 
 
 σ€ τον ΤΓοραβάτην νο'μου] 
 
 Here again the position of cia γράμματος 
 κ. περιτομης, between τον and παραβάτην 
 sufficiently shews that, as εκ φύσεως above, 
 it is a quahfication of σε τον παραβάτην 
 νόμον. Βρ. Middleton (it appears, Gr. 
 Art. in loc. and compare his ref.) would take 
 σε τον δια γράμματος κ. περιτομης (όντα), 
 ' thee, who art a professor of the law 
 and a circumcised person,' and understand
 
 in. J, 2. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Si; 
 
 Ιουδαίος, και περιτομη ' καρδίας εν " ττνίυματι ου 
 μάτι' ού ο ^ έπαινος ουκ * ίξ ανθρώπων αλλ 
 θίου. 
 
 III. ^ Τί ούν το ^ περισσον τοΰ Ιουδαίου, 
 
 Ύραμ- (t = lCor.iT. 5. 
 , _ U cli. vii. 6. 
 
 εκ του 2Cor. iii.f,. 
 
 . 1 Cil 
 
 ^ ωψελεια Τ7}ς 7Γεριτομί]ς ', πολύ ^ κατά πάντα 
 
 ποωτον μίν yap οτι ίπιστίυοησαν τα 
 
 ΧΝΪΧ. 9. 
 
 Winer, {40. 1- τι 
 C Acts ϊϋ. as. Heb. 
 
 = Acts iii. 22. xvii. 22 al. 
 12. IPet. iv. U only. > 
 
 S. 1 Pet i 7. 
 w = Matt. i.20. 
 
 A.ts V. :J!i. 
 x = Mait.v.37, 
 47. Dan. v. 
 12, 14. (See 
 Eccles. i. 3.) 
 y Jade ver. 16 
 only. Job 
 xxii. 3. Ps. 
 
 alCor. xi. 18. b — 1 Cor. ix. 17. Gal. ii. 7. 
 
 la βιβλίυϋήκην, Diog. Laert. τϋ. 1. 29. con.itr., Acts xxi. 3. 
 m. xxiv. 4, 10 al. 
 
 rj τις 77 
 τουποι». 
 
 λό 
 
 γ(ο του 
 
 29. rec αλλ, with AJ(K.') &c : txt BD(E.')G &c.— for tv (2nd), ος G it.— ου .... θίον 
 om 47' Chr : ο bet £π. om 48. 61. 93 al.— αλλ om 44^— Γου bef Qt. om D^G 48 al. — aft 
 Gt. add (πτιν D'E vss lat-ff. 
 
 Chap. III. 1. η om G. — 2. for ττολυ, ττολλ;; 120 Phot (Tisch, not Oec as Scholz) : 
 add μίν 157. — ττίΐωΓοι (omg on) 47-marg al Origj Ruf-comm and on ch xi. 7• — μίν om 
 67" al : μ£ )' yap om Syr seth arm arr (but arm ar-erp τούτο) Chr (mSj has μ(ΐ•) : yafj 
 om BD'EG 76. 80. 120--24 al it ν lat-fF (Chr see above): txt AD^JK most mss syr 
 Thdrt Phot Thl Oec. — on om 67^. — ίπιατίυσαν 41. — 3. ηπειθησαν A: deliquerunt 
 
 ilvai after τταραβάτην, — shall adjudge thee 
 to be a transgressor of the lair. But this 
 appears exceedingly forced, and inconsistent 
 with the position of τταοαβ. νόμου, which 
 if it had been thus emphatic, would cer- 
 tainly have been placed either before, or 
 immediately after κρινίϊ. We may well 
 imagine that such an interpretation would 
 not have been thought of, except to serve 
 the supposed canon, that, ' if τόν were im- 
 mediately the article of παραβάτην, νόμου 
 depending on it could not be anarthrous.' 
 See above on παραβ. νόμ. ver. 25, and on 
 ver. 13. Sia γρ. κ. ιτίρ.] διά (see 
 
 reff.) is here used of the state in tchich the 
 man is when he does the act, regarded as 
 the medium through which the act is done. 
 It is rightly rendered ' by ' in E. V. (not, 
 ' in spite of' as Kollner and al.) 
 γράμματος] ' litera scripta,' the ^critten 
 word : here in a more general sense than in 
 ver. 29, where it is pressed to a contrast 
 with τΓΐ'ίνμα : ' thee, who in a state of 
 external conformity with the written 
 law and of circumcision, art yet a trans- 
 gressor of the law.' — In vv. 28, 29, sup- 
 ply the ellipses thus: in ver. 28, fill up tlie 
 subjects from the predicates, — ού yap ο tv 
 τψ φανίρψ (Ίοΐ'ίαίος) Ιουοαΐός tcrti', 
 ovoi t) iv τψ φανίρψ tv σαρκΊ (πίριτομή) 
 ΊΓίοιτομή (ίση J') ; in ver. 29, fill up the 
 predicates from the subjects, — άλλα ό iu 
 τψ κρντΓτιϊϊ Ιουδαίος (^ Ιουδαίος ΐστιν), και 
 ττίριτομι) καμδιας tv πνίΰματι, οϋ "/ράμ- 
 μάτι (πιμιτομί] ΐστιν). Tiius the real Jew 
 only, and the real circumcision only, are 
 expressed in botli verses. This is the ar- 
 rangement of Beza, Estius, RUckert, De 
 Wette: Erasm., Luther, Meyer, Fritzsche, 
 take Ίουίαΐος•, and ti> ττν. ού -γράμ., as the 
 predicates in ver. 29 ; but the latter gives 
 a very vapid sense, besides that the opposi- 
 tion of ό iv τψ φανίρψ, and ύ Iv τψ κρυ- 
 τΓτψ is, as De W. observes, also vapid. 
 
 29.] Iv τώ κρ. as belonging to Ίονδ. is 
 parallel with καρδίας as belonging to irtpi- 
 τομί), both designating the inner and spiri- 
 tual reality, of which the name of Jew and 
 the carnal circumcision are only the signs. 
 — Trip. καρδ. is no new expression : — we 
 have it in Deut. x. 16. Jer. iv. 4 : see also 
 Acts vii. 51. tv irv. ov γρ.] ' in spi- 
 
 rit, not in letter.' Not merely ' spiritu- 
 ally, not externally :' nor does πν. allude 
 to the necessitating cause of circumcision 
 (the uncleanness of the inner man) (ffic. 
 Grot., Estius, Fritzsche) : — nor signify the 
 material (' quae spiritu constat,' Erasm.) : 
 nor the rule (Meyer), — but as De \\'ette 
 rightly, the living power or element, w^here- 
 with that inner sphere of being is filled, — 
 €v being as in Acts xvii. 28, of that in which 
 any thing Uves and moves, — comp. χαρά iv 
 TTv. ayi(<j, ch. xiv. 17, — αγάπη iv πν., Col. i. 
 8, — δον\(νίιν iv καιν. πν., ch. vii. 6, — ttrai 
 ί I' 7Γ1'., ch. viii.9. So that πνίϊψα here is not 
 man's spirit, nor properly the Holy Spirit, 
 but the spirit, as opposed to the letter, of 
 the Jewish law and of all God's revelation 
 of Himself. oO] viz. 'Ιουδαίου, — of 
 
 the true Jew. πίριτομή καρδ. as belong- 
 ing to him, is subordinate. — The ΐπαινος 
 of such a character, (for ίπαινυς it must 
 be,) can only come from Him who sees iv 
 τψ κουπτψ (Matt. vi. 3, 6), and can discern 
 the heart. III. 1—20.] Taking 
 
 IXTO ALL FAIR ACCOUNT THE REAL AD- 
 VANTAGES OF THE Jews, these cannot, 
 BY the testimony of Scripture itself 
 concerning the.m, exempt them from 
 THI.S sentence of guiltiness before 
 God, in which all flesh are i.v- 
 VOLVED. 1 — 4.] The circumcised 
 
 Jew did uiujuestionably possess great ad- 
 vantages, wliich were not annulled by the 
 rebellion of some. 1.] oiv, ' quse cum 
 
 ita sint.' — If true Judaism and true ciroum- 
 cision be merely sjiiritual, what is the profit
 
 314 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 III. 
 
 ccPhil. i. 18. /3,„r, 
 
 3 cc 
 
 13. See Luke 
 xii. 4li. 
 ■ cli. 
 
 •yap \ ft Ύ]ΤΓΐστησαν τίνες* μΐ) r\ αττιστια 
 
 αυτών την ^ ττίστιν του θεού ^ καταρ-γησβι ; ^ μη yevoiTO' 
 
 f "mVi'-'uxIu. ' γπ^ί'σθω δε ό Οίος ^ αληθής, πας δε άνθρωπος φτυστής, 
 
 23. Tit. ϋ. /, Ν / γ/^^ -λ ιη ^ ί J ~ ' ~ \ ' 
 
 ΐϋ»ι. καυως ysypavrai Όπως αν οικαιωυι,ς tv τοις Aoyoig 
 
 Ε LiUke xiii. 7 ' * 
 
 only, ••xeept PrtUl. 1 Cor. xiii. 8. Ezra iv. 21. h Luke xx. ICmnly in gospels, ver. fi alH. L. P. Josh, 
 
 x'xii. -'U. Gen. xliT. 17. i — eh. xi. C. 1 Cor. xiii. 1 al. k sulij., Joliii iii. 33 reft'. I Ji>hn 
 
 Tiii.44. ITiin. i. 10. 1 John i. 10 al. Ps.cxT. 11. in = Luke vii. 29, 35. 1 Tim. iii. 18. 
 
 P.,A. 1. 4. 
 
 Pacian.— for πιπτιν, (Όξ-ιν 35. 121 al Tlulrt-comm. — Kara(>yn(Ti) J 35 Chr (Mtt's mss) : 
 Kctranyii 4?: καημ^ηαη 5 . κατηργησί 28. 10 syrr latt Cy|)r Ambrst (text) Pelag Vig. 
 — 4. "for yivtnlho, ^σrω (5: γίνίσθω J al Chr: γίνηθητιο Orig (ms in catena) : est it ν 
 (est aut m/o g) lat-tt': .s// lat mentd by Ruf. — for (%, γηρ G it Syr Cypr Ainbrst Hedul : 
 ovv arm. — ο bef Οειις- oin 10D-78 al. — for καθώς, καΰαπ(ρ Β Thdrt : ως 73: κ(ίί)ο70: 
 
 ABDE 
 GJK 
 
 of external Judaism and ceremonial circum- 
 cision ? Ίτερισσόν] ' advantage, ' pro- 
 fit,' 'pre-eminence,' — see rett". — It is best 
 to take the question, not as corniny from an 
 objector, whicii supposition has obscured 
 several parts of this Epistle, but as asked 
 h)j tlie Ap. himself, anticipating the thoughts 
 of his reader. 2.] ΤΓολυ answers the 
 first question of ver. I, but takes no account 
 of the second, as it is virtually concluded in 
 the first. Nor can it be properly regarded 
 as answered in ch. iv. 1 ff. (see there.) 
 κατά ττάντα τρ.] not merely omnino, 
 but as E. V. ' in every way,' i. e. in all 
 departments of the spiritual life, 
 ττρώτον] The Ap. begins as if intending to 
 instance several of these advantages, but 
 having mentioned the greatest, leaves it to 
 his reader to fill in the rest, and turns to 
 establish what he has just asserted. For 
 ττρωΓοί' can only be ' first,' — ' secondly,' 
 &c., being to follow: — not, ' primarmtn 
 illud' (as Beza),— nor "■ prcecipue' (as 
 Calv.), — nor ' id quod priecipuum est ' (as 
 Calov.), all of which are attempts to avoid 
 the anacoluthon ; com]), a similar one at 
 ch. i. 8. ίΐΓίστ.] see reff. — ' they 
 were intrusted with.' τα λογία τ. 
 θ€οΰ] These words look very like a remi- 
 niscence of Stephen's apology, see Acts vii. 
 38. These oracles are not only the law of 
 Moses, but all the revelations of God hi- 
 therto made of Himself directly, all of 
 which had been entrusted to Jews only. 
 By these they were received into a special 
 covenant, which advantage is therefore con- 
 cluded in their being entrusted with the 
 divine oracles. 3.] And this advan- 
 tage is not cancelled, nor the covenant an- 
 nulled, by tiicir disobedience. τί 
 γαρ;] 'For what ■?' ('quid enim?' Hor. 
 Sat. i. 1. 7•) The γάρ confirms the pre- 
 ceding — the τί indicates some difficulty, or 
 anticipated objection to it. el ήττίστ. 
 Tivis] If we ()lace an interrogation at yip, 
 we must render tliis, ' suppose some were 
 unfaithful ;' if only a comma, as in E. V., 
 'For what if . . .' The former seems pre- 
 ferable, as more according to usage. See 
 Phil. i. 18. ήττίστησον, not 'did not 
 
 believe,' (as E. V. and Grotius, Estius, Tho- 
 luck, Reiche, Olsh., Meyer, Fritzsche, al.,) 
 which certainly would be out of place here, 
 where he is not speaking of faith or want of 
 faith as yet, but of αδικία (ver. 5), and 
 moral guilt. The word seems to be used 
 in the sense of mere άπιστοι, unfaithful to 
 the covenant, the very condition of which 
 was to walk in tiie ways of the Lord and 
 observe His statutes, — and to have been 
 chosen on account of ίπιστίνθησαν above 
 and Γ. ττίστιΐ' τ. θεον below. μη ή 
 
 άτΓ. κ.τ.λ.] ' shall their unfaithfulness 
 (to the covenant) cancel (nullify) the faith- 
 fulness of God ■? ' ' Because they have broken 
 faith on their part, shall God break faith 
 also on His .'' 4.] μή yiv., ' let it not 
 
 he :' see reff. The Ap. uses this expression 
 of pious horror, when he has supposed or 
 mentioned any thing by which the honour, 
 truth, or justice of God would be compro- 
 mised, as here by His covenant-word being 
 broken. It is often found in Polybius, 
 Arrian, and the later Greek writers. 
 γιν€σθω κ.τ.λ.] ' rather let us believe all 
 men on earth to have broken their word 
 and troth, than God His. Whatever be- 
 comes of men and their truth. His truth 
 must standfast.' — The citation which fol- 
 lows goes to the depth of the matter. It 
 is the penitent confession of a sinner, that 
 he is sensible how entirely ayainst God his 
 sin has been, and how clearly his own un- 
 worthiness sets God's judgment against 
 sin vindicated before him. And to this 
 meaning the objection in the next verses 
 is addresssed, — see below. ' That Thou 
 mightest be justified (shewn to be just) 
 in thy sayings (sentences, words of judg- 
 ment) and mightest conquer when Thou 
 art judged,' — ^'4ifi'3, ' in tby judging,' 
 which cannot well be our rendering of iv 
 τψ κρίνεσθαί σί, — i. e. ' when Thy dealings 
 are called in question by men.' 5.] In 
 
 the citation, the penitent regarded his sin 
 as having been the instrument of bringing 
 out God's justice into clearer light. On 
 the abuse which might be made of such a 
 view, the Ap. founds another question : — 
 ' It would almost seem as if God would l)e
 
 8—9. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 315 
 
 σου και νίκησες £v Tit» Kpiveauai σε. "^ it οε τ; αόικια ΪΓ,|{?)"'* 
 ■ημών treov ^ νικαιοσυνην ' σννιστησίλ', ^'τι ε^οκ^αεί' ; jitij ρ ch. ί. ι? ai. 
 
 ,/ ςν ' fl ^ ' r ' , ' ν S ' ' . t ,^ ' " « "1 .7r ''• ''■■ h 
 
 αοικος ο σεος ο εττίφερων τηι^ op^ijv , κατά ανυρωπον !^ί"[•," ''•, 
 
 λ' 6 11 ^ ' . • < ν - W " ' λ1 '^ ^ ϋ. 18. " Job 
 
 εγω. ^ί} yevoiro επει ττως κρίνει ο (/εος τον χχ^,ϋ 23. 
 
 ί 7' ^ ''Λ'Λ -fl-'x' "'~ν#' Diod. Sic. xiv. 
 
 κοσμον ', ' ει yap η αΛησεια του σεου εν τω ε;χω -^ γ/ευ- ίλ. ι Mace. 
 σματι ^ εττε^ισσευσεν '' εις tjjv δοζαν αυτού, ^'^ τι έτι Kayio ?1,'ϊύίέΊΕ?.'9. 
 ως• αμαξίτωλος κλίνομαι , και μτ} κάπως ρλασψη- πόλεμοι,, 
 
 /Λ »Λ',' '"Λ' " ' Pi>lyb. XT. 
 
 μουμ^να και καυως φασιν rivtg ημάς Λέγειν οτι ποΐί)σωμεν }}-^-.. 
 τα κακά ινο '^ έλθρ τα ayaOa j ών το κρίμα ^ ένοικον εστίν. '^ 
 
 9 1) rpf f . i ' fl 
 
 11 ουν , ποοεγοιιεσα 
 
 , προεχομ 
 
 18. ch. vi. 2al. w = Αι•ι.•< xvii. 31 
 
 i. 2H. 1 Thess.iT. 1. Tobit iv. l(i. 
 bMatt. ix 10. xi. 19al. Ps. xlix. 16. 
 e = MHtr.xviii. 7. f=ch. ii. 2. 
 
 See nole. k = hereimly. 1 Cor. v.lO. xvi. 12, 
 
 ου ΤΓ αντως. 
 
 πρυτ/τιασα- 
 
 I. iii. 15. 
 Cor ix. 8. 
 (St-ech.vi.ia.) 
 ter. 4 reft'. 
 = Luke xi. 
 x = ch.T. P. Mitt. xvii. 21. Pliil. i. 26. yhereonlyt. ζ Phil, 
 a — 1 Cor ii. 7. X. 31. Eph.i. Hal. aa ch. ix 19. Gal. v. 11. 
 
 c = Jiiliii Tiii. 1.5. 1 Cor. τ. li (his). d - Tit. iii. 2. Jrtme,sii.7. 
 
 Κ Heb. ii. 2 only t. h ch. vi. 15. xi. 7. i = here only. 
 
 See Winer, } 65. 4. 1 here only f. 
 
 om 62.—νικησΗς AD al —5. for tt δί η, η Bt 17• 114-16 al : ii η Γ)2 : ti Se 31 Thdrt : ει 
 Se ovv arm : ft 700 Sedul. — for πδικιη ημ., αΧηθίΐα νμων 46'. — η ουν 48^. 1 1C-41 al. — 
 κ. ανθυ. Xfy. om Clem : κατά ανθρώπων (omg λίγω) mss mentil by Ruf, and seth : κατά 
 
 τον ανθ. 57 al. — 6. £7ret κοαμον om 32 Chr. — 7. for yno, it A 5. 23. 57. 74. 124 
 
 al harl (al latt) copt Dam. — ntutaatvtiv (Scholz : qu -ti .•') 5. — κατακρίνομαι 73- — 
 8. for tent μη, η κηι, and joined to καΟως, arm-edd : fi μη Chr: 7] μη (aut nvmqui(T) 
 Syr : et forte ar-erp. — και bef κηθω-^ om BK 39. 74. 117 ar-pol. — ημάς om 35. 120 al : 
 πίί.ι ημών arm. — οτι om G 76. 120 al g ν Aug Pelag Ruf Ambrst.— rn hei κακά om D'. 
 — aft {λθ?; ins tip ημάς 37. — 9• τΓpι>eχωμ^θa AJ al : for ττρ•'ίχ., ιρουμιν Eetli : προ- 
 κατΐχομιν πιρισσον D'G 31 d g Syr ar-erp Thdrt Chr (Mtt's mss) Sever-schol Ambrst- 
 ms Ruf: κατιχομίν π. Thdrt Sev : tenemus d &c : the same (exc 31) and syr ieth om 
 ου τταντως: Ε (joining D' and D•*) has τι ovv πηοκατίχομεθα : ου πάντως. — for ττρο- 
 εχομιθα, ττροςίχομεθα 45 : ττροςίυχομεθα 69 : προςερχομεθα 73'. — ητιασαμεθα D'G 
 
 unjust in inflicting His wrath (the conse- 
 quenres of His wrath) on men whose very 
 impiety has been the means whereby His 
 own righteousness has been shewn forth, 
 and established.' ημών] ' of (Λβ 
 
 Jews ' (Grot., De Wette, &c.), — not ' of all 
 men' (Fritzsche), for to tlie Jews only can 
 ver. 7 ^Pply• δικαιοστίνην] viz. that 
 
 established by the οικαιοϋηθαι of ver. 4; 
 not His ffoodnexs (as Chrys., Theodoret, 
 Grot., al.), — nor His truth (Beza, al.). 
 κατά άνθρωίΓον λβ'γω] said, as elsewhere by 
 Paul, to excuse a supposition bearing with 
 it an aspect of inconsistency or impiety : 
 • — not implying that he speaks in the person 
 of another, but that he puts himself into the 
 place of the generality of men, and uses 
 arguments such as they would use. 
 6.] He does not enter into the objection 
 and answer it in detail, but rejects at once 
 the idea of God being unjust, alluding pro- 
 bably to Gen. xviii. 25, by recalling to 
 mind, that the Judge of all the earth must 
 do right. eirei, ' for' (i. e. ' if it were 
 
 so,' 'alioquin'). τον κοσμον is not the 
 
 Gentiles (Hengel, Reiclie, Olsh., al.), nor is 
 the respondent in ver. 7 a Gentile (Olsh. al., 
 not Beniicl), hut otic of the ημών in ver. 6, 
 only iiidividuaiizci! to liritig out one such 
 case of pretended injustice more strikitigly. 
 7.] This follows (connect(!(l by γάρ) 
 upon Ter. 6, and shews that the sujtposition 
 
 if carried out, would overthrow all God's 
 judgment, and (ver. 8) the whole moral life 
 of man. ' How shall God judge the 
 world? For, if the truth (faithfulness) 
 of God hath abounded (been manifested, 
 more clearly established) by means of my 
 falsehood (unfaithfulness), to His glory 
 (so that the result has been the setting forth 
 of His glory), why any longer (in, this 
 being so, — assuming the premises) am I 
 also (i. e. as well as others, — am I to be 
 involved in a judgment from which I ought 
 to be exempt) judged (to be judged, — the 
 pre?, expressing the rule or habit of God's 
 proceeding) as a sinner Τ And (shall we) 
 not (in this case rather say), as we (I Paul, 
 or we Christians) are slanderously re- 
 ported, and as some give out that we 
 (do) say ((in recitantis), " Let us dc 
 evil that good may cornel" whose con- 
 demnation (not that of our slanderers 
 [Grot., Thohick], but that of those who so 
 say and act) is according to justice' (not 
 only by the preceding argument, but by 
 the common detestation of all men, for such 
 a maxim asdningevil that good may come). 
 — The way adopted generally ((^alv., Beza, 
 (irot., Bengel, Wolf, Riickert, Kiillner, 
 'J'li(iluck) is to connect ver. 7 by ya(> with 
 
 ver. 5, and to regard κατά ανΟμ 
 
 κόημον as a series of parcntliescs ; but I 
 very much prefer that given above, which,
 
 π 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 III. 
 
 9 n^ut μέθα yap Ιουδαίους τε και Ελληνας τταντας υώ abde 
 
 xxiii 3. " / ^ r 10 Λ ^ ' ο " ' -^ GJK 
 
 "Εχχΐ"ι αμαξ)τιαν ίΐναι, ^ καϋως 'γί•γξ)απται οτι ουκ εστίν 
 
 ηη 1 Cor. τι. 5 
 relt 
 
 δίκ:αιος• ""ουδέ εις•' ουκ: ίστιν ο ° συνιών, ουκ ϊστιν ο 
 
 = Ps. η. 10. 
 
 Prov. ϋ. 5. 
 ρ Acts XV. 17 
 
 εκζ 
 
 εκ:6,»ίτων τον σεον 
 
 12 
 
 τταντες 
 
 ίζίκλ 
 
 ιναν, αμα 
 
 ηΜΙΙ i'»\. ΰησαν' ουκ ίστιν ποιων " ■χξ)ηστοτητα, ουκ εστίν ' εως 
 
 ''ΐζ. "jlafli'Js. rlc. only. Polyb. i. 14. 6 al. s — I.e. only. See cli. ii. 4 reff. t P.SA. v. a only. 
 
 31. 89 al it {causa/i siimtis) ν setli Chr (Mtt's mss) Oec-comm. — y<tp om D'. — ιουδ. τε 
 Ίτρωτον Α.— for νφ, νπο Β (Clem).— 10. on om 32-5. 44.^7• 74. 10!Μ3-78 al copt 
 
 feth Chr. ουδ D'. — U. ο bef συΐ'ΐωΐ' om ABG : ins DEJK mss (appy) Chr Thdrt Dam 
 
 Thl Oec. ο hei (κζητ. {ζητών Β) om BG. — 12. ηχρίωθησαν AG. — ο ποιων ED. — ουκ 
 
 in the main, is De Wette's. Fritzsche and 
 Schrader strangely enough regard κάγώ as 
 bona fide the individual Paul, and κρίΐ'ομαι 
 as the judgment passed by his adversaries 
 (" nam si Dei veracitas meo peccatoris 
 mendacio abunde in Dei laudem cessit, 
 cur adhuc ego quoque, Paulus, tanquam 
 facinorosus ab hominibus reus agor," &c.) : 
 Reiche, Olsh., &c. put ver. 7 into the 
 mouth of a Gentile : Bengel, into that of a 
 Jew. Doubtless tlie main reference of this 
 part of the argument is to Jews : but the 
 reasoning from the introduction of the 
 words τον κόσμην (see above) is general, 
 applying both to Jew and Gentile, and shew- 
 ing the untenableness of any such view as 
 that of the Jewish objection of ver. 5. 
 9 — 20.] The Jew has no preference, hut is 
 guilty as ivell as the Gentile, as shewn by 
 Scripture; so that no man can by the law he 
 righteous before God. 9.] τι οίν can- 
 
 not be joined with ττρυίχόμίθα (Oec, &c.), 
 because oiiSkv would then have been the 
 answer. — There is considerable difficulty in 
 Ίτροΐχόμ-ΐθα. The meaning of προίχομαι 
 every where else is passive, ' to be surpassed,' 
 and προίχω, act., is to surpass, or have the 
 pre-eminence. So Plut. p. 1038 d (Wetst.), 
 κατ' ot'iSiv ττροεχομίνοις υπό τοϋ Αιός, 
 ' cum Jove minores non sint :' and Herod, 
 i. 32, ό /if I' ΰή μίγα πλούσιος, άνόλβιος δι, 
 δυοίσι προίχίΐ τοϋ ίυτυχονς μόνον, &c. 
 (see Wetst.) — Those therefore who have 
 wished to preserve the usage of the word, 
 have variously interpreted it in that at- 
 tempt: (o) Wetst. would render it pas- 
 sively, and understand it (as spoken by a 
 Jew) ' Are we surpassed by the Gentiles?' 
 But (1) for this inference there is no ground 
 in what went before, but the contrary (ver. 
 1 if.), — and (2) the question if it mean this, 
 is not dealt with in what follows. (/3) 
 Oecum. (2nd altern.) regards it as said by a 
 Gentile, ^ Arc we surpassed by the .Tews?' 
 but for this question there is no ground in 
 the preceding, for all lias tended to lower 
 the Jews in comparison and reduce all to 
 one level. (y) Reiche and Olsh. take it 
 passively, and render ' Are ive preferred 
 {by God) ? ' but no example of this mean- 
 ing occurs, the above use in Plutarch not 
 
 justifying it. {δ) Koppe and Wahl render, 
 taking it as the middle voice, ' What can 
 we then allege {as an excuse) ? ' but this 
 will not suit ov πάντως. (t) Meyer, 
 ' What then? have we an excuse?' but 
 προ(χό/ί. has not this meaning. {ζ) 
 Fritzsche, ' What then ? do we excuse 
 ourselves (i. e. shall we make any excuse) .' ' 
 But (1) 7Γ(30{χ. is put absolutely : and (2) 
 the answer would rather be μηδαμώς than 
 οΰ πάντως, which replies to a question on 
 matter of fact. Besides (3) the argument 
 would then go to shew, not that all are sin- 
 ners, as it does, vv. 10 — 20, but that all 
 are liable to God's wrath, without excuse, 
 {η) The only way left seems (with Theo- 
 phyl., Oec. 1, Schol. in Mattha'i, Pelag., 
 Vulg., Erasm., Luther, Calv., Beza, Grot., 
 Bengel, Tholuck, KoUner, Schrader, De 
 Wette, al.) to take πραχόμεθα as middle, 
 and understand it as προίχομίν — 'Have we 
 (Jews) the (any) preference 1 ' We have 
 an use of παυίχομαι as active, Acts xix. 24, 
 Tit. ii. 7. See also Winer, § 39. 6. 
 οΰ ιτάντως] ' No, by no means.' This 
 would more naturally be πάντως οΰ, see 
 reff. But we have οΰδίν πάντως for ' not 
 at all,' Herod. V. 34. (Winer quotes oiV ττάνυ, 
 ' no by no means,' from Demosth. Olynth. 
 II. § 21, but I cannot find it.) — The mean- 
 ing ' not in every way,' ' not altogether,' — 
 as 1 Cor. v. 10 and Theophr. de Cans. 
 Plant, vi. 24 (Wetst.), noit't yap ov πάντως, 
 αλλ' ίάν οΰ\ί] τις y νπόκαυστος, — will 
 not apply, for it does not agree with what 
 follows, where the Ap. proves absolute 
 equality in respect of his argument. 
 
 •ητροητ είναι] ' we have before 
 
 proved (chs. i. ii.) both Jews and Gentiles 
 all to be under sin ;' the constr. is not 
 ace. and inf., — that J. and G. are under 
 
 sin, — but Ίουδ πάντας is ace. after 
 
 the verb, and υφ' ά.μ. tivai the matter of 
 the charge, — q. d. ' we have before brought 
 in guilty J. and G. all as sinners.' 
 10 — 18.] Proof of this universal sinfulness 
 from the Scripture, said directly (ver. 19) 
 of the Jews, but a portion including, and 
 taken for granted of, the Gentiles. Com- 
 pare throughout the LXX (reff.). 
 11.] In the Psalm,— Jehovah looked down
 
 10—20. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 317 
 
 εΐ'ος. ταψος ανεω-γμ^νος ο Λαρυγς αυτωι^ τπις "νΛωσ- «Matt, only 
 
 σαις αυτών " ί^οΧιουσαν. ^ ^oς ασπίδων νπο τα. ')(ε('λη „h"eiiimiy. 
 
 '- 14 w•:" ^ ' '" 'χ ' ' Ιόν';-"- •*■"■ ''• "• 
 
 avTO)V. ων το στνμα αράς και πικρίας ^ιμπ, οίίΐς Numxxr.is. 
 
 ot πόδες αΐιτων εκγ^ίαι α'ιμα, σνντξ>ιμμα και ταλαιπωρία f. τ.Τοπΐ".'' 
 
 . _r^_ ,_ 17 \'!>\ '/ ' .' W Psi.ix.7(v;r) 
 
 εν ταις οόοις αυτών, ' και οόυν ειρήνης ουκ εννωσαν. (angular). 
 
 ^ ουκ εστίν φόβος θεοϋ απέναντι των οφθαλμών αυτών, yf pj^^fv.i. ίο. 
 
 iq ,/Λ Γ\\ « « f ' -ν / - b ' - ' ISA lis. 7, 8. 
 
 οιοαμεν οε or» οσ« ο νομός λε-νει, τοις εν τ(ι) νομω aPsA.xxxv. ι. 
 f '^ω ΧαΧει, ίνα παν στόμα '^ φρα-γτι και υποοικος -γενηται πας ^fr. 2n''ai""" 
 
 Δ^ι^ηρ ' ' " Λ " 20 ί ' 'ii dd•' dd ' ' ch.iv. lo! 
 
 ΑΙ5ΠΕ Q κόσμος τω υεω. '^ οιοτι εί ερ-^ων νομού oyc = 2Corxi. 
 
 FGJK ^ ; >■ ^ <■ . \ r α ' " ' , - (Γν ν 10. Heb xi. 
 
 ^ οικαιωβησεται πάσα σαρΕ, ^ενώπιον αυτού' cia yap vf/slf" '^''°' 
 
 d here only. ίιΊν τιί τοιΊτωκ τι παραβι^ιη ύπόίιχοί έστω τώ παθόντι, Demo.sth. SIS. 3. (id = ver. 28. 
 
 ch.ix.S2. Gal. ii. l(i(3ce). iii. 2, 5. 10 nn'ly. e — ch. ii. 13 reff. PsA.cxIii.2. f Matt. xxiv. 22. 
 
 John xvii. 2 al. Isa. xl. 5. constr., Gal. ii. 16. g Ps. cxlii. 2. =- Luke xvi. 15. 
 
 εστίν (2nd) om Β C)"]- Syr seth ar pol. — 13. λαρυξ A 48: -ννξ G. — aft ίίο\ιονσαν, ins κρίνον 
 αντυκς ο θίος (from Psa. v. 10) 48. — 14. aft στόμα ins αντων Β 17- — 19. St om 121 aeth 
 Thdrt Ambrst. — for tv τ. νομω, iv νομω 1ό3 : νπο νομον 10. — for λσλίΐ, \tyn D'FG lect 
 12 (Orig has λαλ. before for Xty.). — 20. ζιοτι . . . αυτού om 76• 124' Chr : ενωττ. αντ. 
 om Thl: for avrov, τον θίου 35. 73. 114-202-21. 77 all seth Ambrst Ruf-text.— 21. χωρίς 
 
 from heaven on the children of men, to see 
 ει ίση σννΐ(1>ι> η ίκζητών τ. θ. He found 
 none. This result is put barely by the Ap. 
 as the testimony of Scripture, giving the 
 sense, but departing from the letter. 
 13.] Ιδολιονσον, an Alexandrine form for 
 ίίολίονν ; see Lobeck, Phrynichus, p. 34i). 
 The oyen sepulchre is an emblem of perdi- 
 tio7i, to which their throat, as the instru- 
 ment of their speech, is compared. 
 15.] The LXX have οι St πόδες αίιτών 
 εττΐ πονηριαν τρεχουσι, τηχιΐΌΪ ίκχίαι 
 αίμα' και ο'ι ΰιαΧογισμοΊ αυτών διαλογι- 
 σμοί άπο φόνων σνντριμμα και ταλαιπω- 
 ρία εν ταϊς ϋδοίς αυτών, και ΰύον ειρήνης 
 ουκ οίδασιν. 19.] He proves the ap- 
 
 plicability of these texts to the Jews by 
 their being found in the Jetvish Scriptures .• 
 not in any Geniile representalion, which 
 might exclude Jews, but spoken universally, 
 in those very books which were the che- 
 rished possession of the Jews themselves. 
 ό νόμος] Here, the whole O. T., the 
 law, prophets, and Psalms : see John x. 34, 
 where our Lord cites a Psalm as in ' the 
 law.' ToTs €V τω v. λαλίϊ] ' it 
 
 speaks (not says, — λαλΐω is not ' to say' 
 see John viii. 25, note) to (or ' for,' dat. 
 commodi : i. e. its language belongs to, is 
 true of, when not otherwise specified) those 
 who are in (under) the law.' So that the 
 Jews cannot plead exemption from this 
 description or its consetiuences. ϊνα] 
 
 ' in order that,' — not ' so that .-' the bring- 
 ing in all the world guilty before God is an 
 especial and direct aim of the revelation of 
 God's justice in the law, — that His grace 
 by faith in ("lirist may come on all who 
 abandon self-riplitcousness and believe the 
 gospel. ττάν στόμα φραγχ)] ^^ ''"" 
 
 Jew's moutli is shut, and his vaunting in 
 
 the law taken away, then much more the 
 Gentile's, and the whole ivorld (see above 
 ver. 6) becomes (subjective, as γιΐ'έιτθω 
 ver. 4) guilty before God. 20.] The 
 
 solemn and important conclusion of all the 
 foregoing argument. But not only the 
 conclusion from it : it is also the great 
 truth, which when arrived at, is seen to 
 have necessitated the subordinate conclusion 
 of ver. 19, the stopping of every mouth, &c. 
 And therefore it is introduced, not with 
 an illative conjunction, ' trherefore' (which 
 c^iort will not bear), but with ' because.' 
 ' Because by the works of the law (Goo's 
 LAW : whether in the partial revelation of 
 it written in the consciences of the Gentiles, 
 or in the more complete one given by 
 Moses to the Jews, — not, bg works of law: 
 no such general idea of law seems to have 
 ever been before the mind of the Αρ., but 
 always the law, emanating from God) shall 
 no flesh be justified before Him' (the 
 future as implying possibility, — perhaps 
 also as referring to the great day when 
 πάσα σαρξ shall stand before God,— i)er- 
 haps also as a citation from Ps. cxii. 2, 
 LXX, ού δικαιωθήσεται ΐνώπιόν σην -πας 
 ζών, — ον .... πάσα, which we render by 
 nulla, must be kept in the mind to its 
 logical precision : All flesh — subject — 
 shall be — copula — notjuslified—im'dic.iiie). 
 — The Ap. does not here say either (1) that 
 justification by legal works would be im- 
 possible if the law cou'd be wholly kept, or 
 (2) that those were not justified who ob- 
 served the prescribed sacrifices and oti'erings 
 of the ceremonial law (of which he has 
 never once spoken, but wholly of the 
 moral) : but lie infers from bis arirnmciit 
 on matters of fact, a result in mdllcr of 
 fact : ' Mankind, Jew and Geniile, have (ill
 
 318 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ Ρί2ΜΑΙ0ΥΣ. 
 
 ΙΠ. 
 
 1= Tcr. I'S. ch, 
 
 νίι.8,μ. ICor. 
 
 iv.Sal. 
 i ch. i. 17 al. 
 k ch.i. isial. fr. 
 1 —3 Joliu iii. 
 
 Johu x\iii. 
 
 37. pass.. 
 
 Acts vi 3. 
 
 1 Tim. V. 10. 
 iii. 14. 
 
 νομού 
 
 21 
 
 καιοσννη Utou 
 vo/iiou και των προφητών, 
 
 πιστίως Ιηηου -χριστού, 
 τους ΤΓίστίυοντας. ου yap (στιν 
 
 Phil. ϋ. 8. η const 
 
 υνι οε -χ^ωρις νοτίου 
 
 1 , r κ ~ 
 
 ίΤΓίγΐ'ωσις αμαρτίας. 
 
 ΰίου πεφανίρωται, μαρτυρουμίνη υττο του 
 δικαιοσύνη '" δί θίοΰ δία 
 
 ικαιοσυνη 
 Ης τταντας και 
 ^ οιαστοΧη' 
 
 (πι παντας 
 
 23 
 
 Acts iv. 33. 1 Pet. iv. 14. 
 
 πάντες yap 
 
 Mark χί. 22. Gal. ii. 1Γ>, 20 al. nn •= Gal. 
 
 h. X. 12. 1 Cor. xiv. 7 only. — Exod. viii. 23. 
 
 ABDE 
 FGJK. 
 
 €κα, 
 των 
 
 πρυφη- 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 νομού om lect 12. — μαρτνρομίνη D' al. — 22. for ιητ. χρ., tv χριστώ ιησ. A: om Chr : 
 om ΐί,^ου Β Tert: t.\t CDEFGJK ms^ (appy) v^ Clem Orig Thdrt Till Oec Pelag 
 Ambrst Chron Bed. — <ai ίπι παντας om (as superfluous ,'' see note) ABC 31. 47'. 07^• 
 80 al lect 1 2 copt leth arm ar-erp (lat-mss) Clem Orig (alludg) Cyr Aug Ruf-comm : ins 
 DEFGJK most mss syrr ar-pol slav ν (but demid am al Datn om tic iratr. και) Thdrt- 
 c.xpr Cbr Thl Occ Ambrst Ruf-text Chrom Bed. — τυνς τηστ. om 4' : add ίίς• αντον ν 
 Syrarr ieth Chron Ruf Pelag. — for on γαρ, και ονκ arm. — 23. for τταιτ. yap, και τταντις 
 
 broken God's law, and are guilty before 
 Him : Man keeps not God's law. By that 
 law then he cannot arrive at God's riijlile- 
 ousness :' δια γαρ ....]' For by the 
 
 law (as before, whether partially known to 
 the Gentile or more fully to the Jew) is the 
 knowledge of sin' (whatever knowledge 
 each has, — whether the accusing and ex- 
 cusing of the Gentile's conscience, or the 
 clearer view of offence against Jehovah 
 granted to the Jew). — The reasoning is : — 
 the law has no such office, in the present 
 state of human nature manifested both in 
 history and Scripture, as to render righte- 
 ous : its office is altogether different, viz. 
 to detect and bring to light the sinfulness 
 of man. Comp. Gal. ii. 16. 21—26 ] 
 
 The Ap. resumes the declaration of ch. i. 
 17 (having proved that man has no righte- 
 ousness of his own resulting from the 
 observance of God's law) ; viz. thai God's 
 righteousness is revealed by Christ, whose 
 atoning Death is, consistently icith God's 
 justice, sufficient for the pardon of sin to 
 those who believe in Him. 21. vuvi] 
 
 Is this of time, ' now,' in contradistinction 
 to ages past, zz iv τψ νυν καιρψ, ver. 26, 
 — or is it merely = ' as things are,' ' now 
 we find?' The former is held by Grot., 
 Bengel, Tholuck, Reiche, Olsh., Riickert, 
 al., — the latter by Fritzsche, Meyer, and De 
 Wette. The former is true in sense, and 
 applicable to the circumstances of the 
 gospel : but the meaning is too strong, 
 where no contrast of time is expressly in 
 view. I therefore prefer the latter, espe- 
 cially as Paul's u-^age elsewhere justifies it : 
 seech, vii. 17. 1 Cor. xv. 20. χωρίς 
 
 νομον] ' without the (help of the) law,' 
 ' independently of the law :' not ' without 
 the works of the law ;' for here it is not the 
 way to the Cik. Qtnv which is spoken of 
 (which \s faith), but that cik. itself. 
 δικαιοσ. θεοΰ] ' God's righteousness :' in 
 what sense, see ch. i. 17. and note. 
 'ΐΓ£φαν£ρωται] viz. in the facts of tlie gospel. 
 The perfect sets forth the manifestation of 
 
 this righteousness in history as an accom- 
 plished and still enduring fad — the άττο- 
 κίίΧνπτίται of ch. i. 17 denotes the con- 
 tinual unfolding of this righteousness in 
 the hearts and lives of faithful believers. 
 (χαρτνρουμί'νη κ.τ.λ.] ' being borne 
 witness to (pres. because the law and pro- 
 phets remain on record as a revelation of 
 God's will) by the law and the prophets' 
 (not merely the types and prophecies, but 
 the whole body of the O. T., see ]Matt. 
 xxii. 40). 22. δικαιοσ. δε θ] 'but 
 
 that (so Sk in Herod, vii. }!, 'Ainarayopy 
 τψ }>\ι\7ΐσίψ, δοϊ'λψ ce ΐιμίτίοψ, — and i. 
 114, νπο του σον ίοΰλου, βουκόΧου £ε 
 παιδής : the contrast being between the 
 general mention which has preceded, and 
 the specific distinction now brought in. 
 See Hartung, Partikellehre I. 168 tt.) the 
 r. of God (i. e. ' I mean, the r. of God 
 δια Ίτίστεως Ί. χρ.') which is (>/ is 
 not necessary, the art. being often omitted 
 in cases vshere the ear is reminded of a 
 usage of the cognate verb with a prepo- 
 sition, such as ^καιοϋσθαι £ιά πιστίως. 
 Comp. Col. i. 4, άκούσαντίς τήν ηίστιν 
 ί'μ. ίν χριστψ Ίί;σ. και την άγάπην την 
 fig πάντας τους αγίους, and Eph. iii. 4, 
 δύνασθί νοήσαι την σΰνίσίν μου ίν τφ 
 μνστην'ιφ \_σννΰντίς iv iraay σο^ια occurs 
 Dan. i. 4]. See Winer, § 19, 2. b)' by the 
 faith in Jesus Christ' (gen. seereff.). 
 els Ίτάντ. κ. cm ττάντ.] depends on ττίφα- 
 νίρι•>ται, — (is revealed) 'unto (f'orthebenefit 
 of) all, and upon (' over.' ' so as to be shed 
 down on,' but no real difference of meaning 
 from «Is ; this repetition of pre])ositions to 
 give force is peculiar to Paul, see ver 30, 
 and Gal. i. 1) all who believe.' Probably 
 the repetition of πάιτος was suggested by 
 the two kinds of believers, Jew and Gen- 
 tile, so as to prepare the way for ού yap 
 ian διαστολή (but still no difference in 
 lie and iπί must be sought). 23. της 
 
 δόξης τοϋ θίοΰ] ' Of the praise which 
 comes from God,' see reff. (so Grot., Thol., 
 Reiche, Fritz., Meyer, Riickert, De Wette) :
 
 21—25, 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 519 
 
 .:, 24 
 
 ατΓολυτ 
 
 )τρωσίως 
 
 τίμαοτον και '' υστίρουΐ'ται τ7/ί; δοζης "^ του 
 
 ου/ι«£ΐΌΐ οωρεαί'Τϊ} αυτού ναριτί οια της• 
 
 τϊ/ς εν -χριστώ Ιησού, ο ν ττ^) 
 
 στί'/ριου δια ττί'στεως• ^ ευ τω αυτυυ α'ιματι, " εις έί'οείί!ιυ ' "χπ^'ί)'/"'"' 
 
 της δικαιοσύνης αϋτου, δια την "^ ττάρίσιν των 
 
 Ί " 9'ί •^ χ '/i ' Ω "• >' ' \ 1 Ciir. ί. 7. 
 
 εν \ριστω Ιησού, ον ττροει/ετο ο σεος ιΛα- coi.str.,2Cor. 
 
 13 reff. 
 WpoytyOVO- t 2 Cor. xi. 7. 
 ^ ' ' Mdtt. X. 8. 
 
 (John XV. 25. Ps. XXXV. ly.) u = ch.v. laal. ν = 1 Cor. i.3n. Eph. i. 7 reft'. w = ch. 
 
 vi. II. viii. 2 al. χ = here only. Polyb. i. 33. 9, irpoyt^Memi τους- γρκσ^ομαχοι;?, (ch. i. 13. Eph. 
 
 i.!l Hilly.) y = here only. See note. ζ = Mntt. xii 27, 28 al. a ch. i. 5 reft', 
 
 b 2 Cor. viii. 24. Phil. i. 28 mily t. c here only f. See Sir. xxiii. 2. Philo, Vit. Mos. p. BtW. 
 
 d here only f. 2 Mhcc. xiv. 3. 
 
 lect 12. — for υστιοο^νται, στίρουντίς lect 12. — 24. at end add τω κνριω ημών lect 12. — 
 25. ιλασΓί /pfioi' FG : om arm : propitialorem d v-sixt harl^ Ambrst OroSj Jer Ambr : 
 propiliatioiiem e ν syr ar-erp Ruf (t.\t) : placationem Hil. — rec ?ta της πιστ. with 
 B(e siljC^D^EJK &c Chr-te.xt Thdrt Oec : om altog A Chr-comm Chr (Mtt's mss) : t.\t 
 C'D'FG 31. 6T-- 70 (al?) Origj Eus Bas Cyr Dam Thl.— for avr,w (1st), tavrov Β 47 
 al. — for Traptatv, πωρωσιν 46 (' not Chr-ms Thl as in Scholz,' so Tisch) : παραιί'ίσιι^ (j[). 
 
 not, ' of prahe in God's sight ' (Luther, 
 Calv., Estius, Kollner) : not, ' of (jlory 
 with God,' as eh. v. 2 (Oec., Beza, al.), — 
 for he is not speaking hereof future reward, 
 but of present worthiness : nor, of the glo- 
 rious image uf God wliich we have lost 
 through sin (Calov. al., Riickert, Olsh.), 
 which is against both the usage of the word, 
 and the context of the passage. 24.] 
 
 ζκαιονμίίοι agrees with παΐ'πς, without 
 any ellipsis ; nor need it be resolved into 
 και i)(icrjio{ij/rat : the participial sentence is 
 subordinated to the great general statement 
 of the insufficiency of all to attain to the 
 glory of God. It is not necessary, in the 
 interpretation, that the subjects of ττάντίς 
 and δικαιοίιμίνυι should be in matter of 
 fact strictly commensurate: — ' β// have sin- 
 ned — all are (must be, if justified) justified 
 freely, &c.' δωρεάν] see retf. : here, 
 
 ' without merit or desert as arising from 
 earnings of our own ;' ' gi-aiis.' ttj 
 
 αΰτοΰ χάριτι] *by His grace,' i. e. 'His 
 free undeserved Love,' as the working 
 cause (De W.). δια της άττολ, 
 
 κ-.Γ.λ.] ' By means of the propitiatory re- 
 demption which is in (has been brought 
 about by, and is now in the Person of) 
 Christ Jesus.' άττολΰτρωσις, re- 
 
 demption by a \vTpov, 'propitiation,' — 
 and, as expressed by the prejiosition άττο, 
 redemption from some state of danger or 
 misery : here, — redemption from the guilt 
 of sin by the ])ropitial<jry sacrifice of 
 Christ's death, see retl". and IMatt. xx. 
 2!i. In Eph. i. 7 this άττοΧΰτρωσίς 
 is defined to z= j'/ άψίσις των τταρα- 
 ΤΓτωμύτων. 25.] ιτροί'θίτο, not here 
 
 'decreed,' as in ch. i. l.'S. Eph. i. !), — 
 but ' put forth,' ' set forth,' manifested 
 historically in His incarnation, sufferings, 
 and exaltation. Wetst. ijuotes Thucyd. 
 ii. 34, τά ΰστΓι προτίβινται τώΐ' άπυ- 
 ■γίίχιμί-νων, ' they exposi; the bones of 
 tlie deceased to imblic view.' 
 Ίλαστήριον] ' as a propitiatory offering.' 
 So we have σωτήρια, Exod. xx. 24, — 
 
 χαριστί/ριον, 2 Mace. xii. 45, — and καθάρ- 
 σιον, Herod, i. 35, in the sense of thank- 
 oflerings and offerings of purification (no 
 subst., as Θΐιμα, need be supplied,— the 
 words being themselves substantives) : and 
 we have this very word in Dio Chrysos. 
 Orat. ii. p. 184 (cited by Stuart), where he 
 says that the Greeks offered an Ίλαστήριον 
 Tij 'AOiivcf, a propitiatory sacrifice. The 
 ordinary interpretation (Theodoret, Theo- 
 phyl., Luth., Calv., Grot., Calov., Wolf, 
 Olsh.) is founded on the sense in which the 
 LXX use the word, as signifying the golden 
 cover of the ark of the covenant, between 
 the Cherubim, where Jehovah appeared and 
 wlience He gave His oracles, τύ Ίλαστή- 
 ριον πίταλον ijv χρυσονί', ίττίκίΐτο δΐ τψ 
 κιβωτψ. (κατίρωθίν ci (Ίχί τά των χί- 
 ρονβ'ιμ ΐκτυττώματα. tKiWev τψ apxitptX 
 λίΐτουργονντι ίγίνετο δίιλη τοϋ θίοϋ ι) 
 (ύμίρίΐα . , . . το άληθινόν ίλαστί]ριυν 
 6 δίσπ(')της ίστί χριστός' tKtlvo ci το ττα- 
 λαών τούτου τον τίητον Ιπλίιρον. άρμύτ- 
 Ttt ίί αΰτφ ώς άνθρώπψ το όνομα, οΰχ 
 ώα θίψ• ώς• yap θ(ος, αίιτός διά τοϋ Ίλα- 
 στηρίυυ χρηματΊΖ,ίΐ. Theodoret: on which 
 Theophylact further, — Ιδήλου ci πάντως 
 τήι• άΐ'θρωπίιη)!' φίισιν, 'ήτις ποιμα ήντής 
 θιότητος, ίττικαλυπτουια ταντην. The 
 expression occurs in full, ίλαστήριον ίττί- 
 θίμα, Exod. XXV. 17 : elsewhere ϊλαστίιριον 
 only, as Heb. ix. 5. See also Philo, Vit. 
 Mos. p. f>6ii. But De Wette well shews 
 the inapplicability of this interpretation, as 
 not agreeing with ίΐ'ς tvitiKiv κ.τ.λ. (which 
 requires a victim, see below), and as con- 
 fusing the unity of the idea here, Christ 
 being (according to it) one while a victim 
 (tv τψ αΰτον α'ιματι), and another, some- 
 thing else. The other interp. (Vulg 2)ro- 
 pilialioiiem : so E. V. : Beza, Riickert, al. : 
 adj. — Rosenmiiller, W'ahl), wlii(di makes 
 Ίλαστήοιον an adj. agreeing with 'όν, ' a 
 propitiator,' hardly agrees with προίΟιτο, 
 implying an external demonstration of 
 Christ as the Ίλαπτίιριον, not merely an 
 ajiiiointment in the divine u'conomy.
 
 S20 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 III. 
 
 as», ι Cor v'i. των αμαητιιματων tv τη ανογν του Οεον, "^ πους την ABCD 
 
 18"n'y• b .' ^ / ' - %> ' ' - • g - - - h • ^ EFG 
 
 isa.ivMi.i ivoeiQiv Tiir ύικαιυσυνης αυτού tv ^ τω νυν Kaioff), eig το jk 
 
 f cli. II. 4 rt-ll. '^ " t'^f i - 
 
 "m.P.'vi'rl'ki. ftj'fit αυτόν δίκαιον και 'Βικαιοΰντα τον εκ πέστίως Ιησού. 
 
 g cli. viii. 18 
 only. Gen. XXX. 2n. h Act.n iii. ill. vii. ig al. ch. i. 11,30. i ch.i. 13 reff. k constr., ch. ii. 8 refi". Iver. 22, 
 
 116: propnsitum d> e Aug Ambrst Pelag-comm : n' τω νυν αιωνι 47• — 26. rec om 
 την, with D'E.IK &c Chr Thdrt Thl Occ : ins ABCD' 47-9. 80 al (FG 17 al omit from 
 ίικ. αυτόν ver 2J to fiK. αυτού ver 2G) Clem Cyr.— ic. (iq t. uv. 10!). — και SiKaiovv D' : 
 K(u om FG al Ambrst.— ι>;σου om FG 52 al e g : for ι>]σ., ιησ. χρ. ν copt Thdrt Pelag 
 Ambrst Ruf : χο. ιησ. d' : την κυρ. /;/(. ιησ. (om arp-crii) χρ. Syr ar-erp : ιηηουν DJ 
 3. 17. 23•. 37-!). 48. 77. 80. 10ί)-152-10.22-41-53-70 all lect 13 Clem Occi : txt 
 AB?C(EK?) &c am d^ teth al Chr Thl OeCj Aug Oros.— for που, πως Gl.— 27. aft καυχ. 
 
 δια ιτίστίως] ' by faith,' as the subjective 
 means of approjiriation of this proi)itiation : 
 — not to be joined with iv αντοϋ α'ίματι 
 (but the om. of της is no objection to this, 
 see above on ver. 22), as Luth., Calv. al., 
 Olsh., Riiekert, — for sueh an expression as 
 π/σης or ττιστινω iv τψ σ'ίμ. Ί. χρ. would 
 be unexampled, — and (which is decisive) 
 the clause tv τψ αντοϋ α'ίματι requires a 
 primary, not a subordinate place in the sen- 
 tence, because the next clause, ίίς tvS. τ. 
 ^iK. air., directly refers to it. As Sia 
 ττίστ. is the subjective means of appropria- 
 tion, so iv τψ ο'ίμ. αντοϋ is the objective 
 means of manifestation, of Christ as a pro- 
 pitiatory sacrifice, αίμα does not zz θάνα- 
 τος, but refers to propitiation by blood, — 
 the well-known typical use of it in sacrifice. 
 els evSeiiiv, κ. τ. λ.] ' in order to 
 the manifestation of His righteousness :' 
 this is the aim of the putting forth of Christ 
 as an expiatory victim. δικαιοσύνη, 
 
 not t7-uih (Ambrst., al.), — not goodnens 
 (Theodoret, Grot., Hammond, Koppe, 
 Rosenm., Reiche), — not both these com- 
 bined with justice (Beza), — not justifying 
 or sin-yo/'^u;f?i^ righteousness (Chrys., Aug., 
 Estius, Krehl., B.-Crus.), — not the right- 
 eousness which He gives (Luther, Eisner, 
 AA'olf, al.), which last would repeat the idea 
 already contained in ver. 21 and rob f /ς• τυ 
 iirai αΰτ. ίίκαιοί' of all meaning, — not holi- 
 ness, which does not correspond to ίίκαιος 
 and ciKaiovr, — but 'judicial righteous- 
 ness,' JUSTICE (as Orig., Calov., Tholuck, 
 Meyer, Schrader, Riickert ed. 2, al.). This 
 interp. alone suits the requirements of the 
 sense, and corresponds to the idea of Si- 
 icaiovv, which is itself judicial. A sin- 
 offering betokens on the one side the ex- 
 piation of guilt, and on the other ensures 
 pardon and reconciliation : and thus the 
 Death of Christ is not only a proof of God's 
 grace and love, but also of His judicial 
 righteousness which requires punishment and 
 expiation. (Mainly from De Wette.) 
 δια τ. ΤΓαρίσιν κ.τ.λ.] = £ui το τταρύΐ'αι 
 τον θΐϋν τά πρηγ. αμαρτήματα Ιν rjj 
 avoxy αντον, and contains the reason why 
 God would manifest His judicial righteous- 
 
 ness ; ' on account of the overlooking of 
 the sins which had passed, in the forbear- 
 ance of God:' i.e. to vindicate that cha- 
 racter for justice, which might seem, owing 
 to the suspension of God's righteous sen- 
 tence on sin in former ages in His forbear- 
 ance, to be placed in question : — to shew, 
 that though He did not then fully punish 
 for sin, and though He did then set forth 
 inadequate means of (subjective) justifica- 
 tion, — yet He did both, not because His 
 justice was slumbering, nor because the 
 nature of His righteousness was altered, — 
 but because He had provided a way where- 
 by sin might be forgiven, and He might be 
 just. Observe, ττόρισις is 7iot forgiveness, 
 but ' overlooking,' which is the work q( for- 
 bearance (see Acts xvii. 30), whereas ybr- 
 giveness is the work of grace, — see ch. ii. 4 : 
 — nor is των irpoyty. άμ., ' the sins of 
 each man which precede his conversion ' 
 (Calov.), but those of the whole world be- 
 fore the death of Christ. See the very 
 similar words Heb. ix. 15.— The rendering 
 Sia, ' by means of (Origen, Luth., Calv., 
 Calov., Le Clerc, Elsn., Koppe, Reiche, 
 Schrader), is both ungrammatical and un- 
 meaning. 26. TTpos την ενδ. κ•.Γ.λ.] 
 The art. distinguishes this ΐνΐιΐιί,ις from the 
 former, as the fuller and ultimate object, of 
 which that ϊνίιιΐ,ις was a subordinate part : 
 — 'with a view to the (or His) manifes- 
 tation of His righteousness in this pre- 
 sent time.' The shewing forth that He 
 was righteous throughcmt His dealings with 
 the whole world, by means of setting forth 
 an adequate and complete propitiation in 
 the death of Christ, was toivards, formed a 
 subsidiary manifestation to. His great ma- 
 nifestation of His righteousness (same sense 
 as before, judicial righteousness, justice^ 
 under the Gospel. The joining προς την 
 ί}'δκζ. κ.τ.λ. with tv rj/ άΐ'οχ^ τ. Biol• 
 (Beza, Riickert 2 ed., Thol., al.) would draw 
 off the attention from the leading thought 
 of the sentence to a digression respecting 
 the άΐ'οχή τ. θ., which is not probable. 
 els TO ίΐναι κτ.τ.λ.] ' in order that 
 He may be {shewn to be ; — i\\e whole jjre- 
 sent concern is with ΰ'δίίξις, the exhibition
 
 26—30. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 321 
 
 ΤΓΟίΟυ 11 = 1 Cor. 1.20. 
 m ch. XV. 17. 
 
 Paul 
 only, exi-, 
 Jaine.s IV. IR. 
 Je-r. xii. 13. 
 
 Exod. 
 
 ικαιωσει o^Lnktvi. 
 
 ^ Που οΰν Tj "^ καυγησις ', " ΐζίκΧί'ισθη. cia 
 
 , „ ρ ,/ > > » ν -. ν i> \ r I m ch. XV. 17. 
 
 νομου\ των '^ εργωΐ' ; ^"X'j aKha cia νομού πίστεως. \^"'^•ρ^''•.3ΐ 
 "^ λογι^ο/αίθα γαρ ' δικαίοϋσθαι ττίστίΐ ανθρωπον '^ -χ^ωρις 
 ερ-νωΓ ΐΌ^ιου. τ) Ιουοαιων ο σεος μόνον, ουγι και " ca 
 
 Ώ - . ' ^ '/ι " 30 '' -τ ' η ^ "^ i ^ ' "" 
 
 εσνων ; ναι και εσνων, είττερ εις ο πέος ος ο 
 
 ττεριτομηυ εκ• τηστίως και ακρορυστιαν cia της πιστίως, iv.r^2KiuE3 
 
 ρ = vcr. 20 al.fr, Paul. Jnine.s ii. 14— 2Η. q = and oonstr,, ch. xiv. 14. Phil. iii. 13 Wisd. xv. 12 
 
 rver. 21. s ver. 2U reft'. t ch. ii. 25 al 16. Paul only, exc. Act.* xi. 3. Gcu. xvii. 11. 
 
 ins σου FG ν it Thl-comm lat-fF. — for δια noiuv νομ., Sta ιργων νομού 73. 118. — for 
 ουχί, ουκ D^ : ου FG. — ίια (2nd) om D'. — 28. λογιζωμεθα D^K al. — rec λογιζομ. ουν 
 (prob corrn from misundersiandg of λoyιζoμaι to convey a conclusion : see note), with 
 B(e sil)CD3(E?)JK most mss syrr al Chr Thdrt Thl Oec : txt AD'FG 5. 39. 4?. 80, 
 121-79 al V it copt ar-pol Cyr Dam Ambrst Ruf Aug Ambr al. — rec ττιστη ίικαι. avOfi. 
 {()-anspos'n to throw emphasis on ttigth, sripposiug the ver to convey a solemn conclusion), 
 with JK.> &c svrr al Chr Thdrt al : t.xt ABCDE (FG δικ. ανθρ. ίια πιστ(ως) 5. 47- 178 !>. 
 238 al d e copt: and (as FG) g ν sth al lat-tT.— 29. »; om :i9 al Thdrt : μη A^ (appy) 
 39- Hil: ft 77: an vss lat-ff.-for μηνον, μονών Β 23. 39. 47-8. 7«. ΙΟΟ-δ-ΙΡ al lect 
 13 Clemj Athj Julian and Cyr Chr, (mss vary) Thl (but aft ιονδ. Clem AthJ : ^ονος 
 DE : t.xt ACFGJK.' &c Ath, Thdrt Oec. — rec ονχι δε και {supplementary corrn), with 
 J &c Thdrt Chr Thl Oec : txt ABCD(E?) (FG ουχί) Κ 31-9. 47- 73. 117 77-8 al ν it 
 Syr copt Clemj Ath Julian and Cyr Chr (Mtt's ms,) Dam lat-ff : kol ονχι και 108' : και 
 ονχι 3 Hil.— 30. rec ίπαπερ (corrn), with D'D^EFGJK &c vss Ath Chr Thdrt Thl 
 Oec: qiioniam quidem Ambr : txt ABCD^ 47'. 80 al copt Clem Orig Cyr, Did Dam : 
 siquidem Jer Pacian. — ο om D' Orig.— for ίικαιωσπ, justificat e ν Iren, Hil Jer Ruf 
 Pacian : justificavit d tol harl flor demid Iran, Ambrst Ambr. — και ακροβ ττιστιως 
 
 against Ν. Τ. usage ; and has probably 
 caused the change of yap into ovv, by some 
 who imagined that this verse was a con- 
 clusion from the preceding argument. ' For 
 
 to men of the righteousness of God) just 
 and (yet, on the other side) justifying 
 Him who is of (the) faith in Jesus ' (τΰν 
 ίκ 7ΓΙΙΤΓ. Ίί/σ., him who belongs to, stands 
 in, works from as his standing-point, faith 
 in Jesus : — see ch. ii. 8, note, and refF.). 
 27 — IV. 25.] Jewish bo.\sting 
 
 ALTOGETHER REMOVED 1/1/ this truth, NOT 
 
 however by m.\kixg void the law, nor 
 
 BY DEGRADING ABRAHAM FROM HIS PRE- 
 EMINENCE, but BY ESTABLISHING THE 
 
 i,.\w, and shewing that Abraham ivas really 
 JUSTIFIED BY FAITH, and is the f.\ther 
 OF THE FAITHFUL. 27.] ή καΰχησις, 
 
 ' the boasting,' viz. of the Jeics, of which 
 he had spoken before, ch. ii., not ' boasting ' 
 in general, which will not suit ver. 29. — (So 
 Theodoret, το νψηλόν τών Ιουδαίων φρή- 
 νημκ, — Chrys., Theophyl., Oec: — Vulg., 
 gloriatio tua : Bengel, Riickert, ^leyer, De 
 AVette, al.) £|€κλ.] οΰκ έτι χώραν 
 
 fyei, Theodoret. δια ττ. v. κ.Γ.λ.] 'By 
 
 what law (is it excluded) ? (is it by that) 
 of works ■? No, hut by the law {norma, 
 the rule) of faith.' The contrast is not here 
 between the law and the Gospel as two 
 dispensations, but between the law of works 
 and tlie law of faith, whether found under 
 the law, or the Gospel, or (if the case ad- 
 mitted) any whore else. This is evident by 
 the A]), proving below that Abraham was 
 justified, not by works, so as to have 
 wlienof to bnast, but by faith. 28.] 
 
 λογιζόμ.€θα, not 'ire conclude,' but 'we 
 hold,' ' we reckon,' see rcff. : the former is 
 Vol. II. 
 
 we hold (as explanatory of the ver. pre- 
 ceding, — on the other supposition the two 
 vv. are disjointed, and the conclusion comes 
 in most strangely), that a man is justified 
 by faith, without the works of the law ' 
 (not works of law) ; and therefore boasting 
 is excluded. 29.] In shewing how 
 
 completely Jewish boasting is excluded, 
 Paul purposes to take the ground of their 
 own law, and demonstrate it from that. 
 He will shew that God is not (the God) 
 of Jews alone, but of Gentiles, and that 
 this very point was involved in the pro- 
 mise made to Abraham, by believing which 
 he was justified (ch. iv.), and therefore 
 that it lies in the very root and kernel 
 of the law itself. But, as often elsewhere, 
 he passes otf from this idea again and again, 
 recurring to it however continually, — and 
 eventually when he brings forward his proof- 
 text (ττατίρα πολλών ίθΐ'ών τί-θκκά σι, 
 iv. 17), Abraham's faith, Άηά not this fact, 
 has become the leading subject. 30. 
 
 eiirep] ' if at least (if we are to hold to 
 what is manifest as a result of our former 
 argument) God is One, who shall justify 
 the circumcision (= the Jews, see ch. ii. 
 2'i) by (tic, as tlie preliminary condition, — 
 the state out of which the justification 
 arises) faith, and the uncircumcision (dio 
 Gentiles) through (by meaiisof) their faith.'
 
 822 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ΡΩχΜΑΙΟΥΣ. 
 
 III. 31, 
 
 ■a ver. 3 refi". 31 
 V ver. 4 rert'. 
 
 νομον ουν 
 
 r 
 
 νυμον 
 
 IV. 1 Ύί 
 
 1 - Λ Ν - / 
 
 καταρ-^ουμίν οια της πιστιως 
 
 ιστανομίν. 
 
 οΰν ίρονμεν Αβραάμ τον πάτερα 
 
 μτ} yivoiTO, 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGt 
 JK 
 
 ημών 
 
 ch. vi. 13. 
 
 om (ί. e. from πκιτεως to ττιστιως) 77• 92 al lect 8: της om 109-78 al.— 31. if for ουν 
 Thdrt. — της am 80. — rcc ιττωμιν (corni), with D^EJK &c {σνιηστωμ. 17- C5. i)H lect 6) : 
 ισταμίν 47 (but rec in marg) : σννιστομιν 71 Chr Thdrt Till Oec: txt ABCD-'(D' vrfpi- 
 ffra»'()/itv)FG {στανιψίν at beg of a line) al {σννισταν. 10 slav-ms) Orig Cyr Procop 
 Darn : add δι αντης Orig. 
 
 Chai>. IV. 1. ενρ. afi. τ. ττ. η. κατ. σαρ. ACD(E?)FG 5. 21. 73. 137 it ν copt arm 
 Eus Cvr Dam Ambrst : ενηριστηκίρηι 4-marg 2.'i-marg : txt B(e sil)JK mss nrly 
 syrr al Chr Thdrt Oec Phot and Gennad (in Oec) {see note). — προπηΓΓορα ABC 5. 10, 
 21. 137 Syr copt arm (seth?) Eus Cyr Chr-commj (alludg) Dam {see note) : txt C 'DEFGJK 
 
 Too much stress must not be laid on the dif- 
 ference of the two prepositions (see ver. 22 
 and note). The omission of the art. in ϊκ 
 Trior, and its cxi)ression in it« της πίστ. 
 are natural enough : the former expresses 
 tlie ground of justification, generally taken, 
 tc ττ'ιστίως, by faith : the latter the means 
 ■whereby the man lays hold on justification, 
 iiii της πίστεως, by his faith : the former 
 is the objective ground, the latter the sub- 
 jective medium. [Jowett's rendering of 
 τνεριτομην ίκ -πίστεως, 'the circumcision 
 that is of faith,' though ingenious, is hardly 
 philologically allowable, nor would it corre- 
 spond to the other member of the sentence, 
 which he rightly renders ' and the uncirc. 
 through their faith.' To understand της 
 πίστεως (as Mr. Green, Gr. p. 300) as re- 
 ferring to πίστεως just mentioned, ' by the 
 instrumentality of the identical faith which 
 operates in the case of the circumcised,' is 
 to contradict the fact : the faith was not, 
 strictly speaking, identical in this sense, or 
 the two cases never need have been distin- 
 guished. Seevv.1,2.] 31.] But again 
 the Jew may object, if this is the case, if 
 Faith be the ground, and Faith the medium, 
 of justification for all, circumcised or uncir- 
 cumcised, surely the law is set aside and 
 made void. That this is not so, the Ap. 
 both here asserts, and is prepared to shew 
 by working out the proposition of ver. 29, 
 that the law itself belonged to a covenant 
 whose original recipient was justified by 
 faith, and whose main promise was, the 
 reception and blessing of the Gentiles. 
 νομον, not ' law,' but ' the law,' as 
 every where in the Epistle. We may safely 
 say that the Ap. never argues of /a?<', abstract, 
 in the sense of a systetn of precepts, — its 
 attributes or its effects, — but always of the 
 L.vw, concrete, — the law of God given by 
 Moses, when speaking of the Jews, as here : 
 the law of God, in as far as written in their 
 consciences, when speaking of the Gentiles : 
 and wlien including both, the law of God 
 generally. His written as well as His un- 
 written will. — Alany comm. have taken this 
 
 verse (being misled in some cases by its 
 place at the end of the chap.) as standing 
 by itself, and have gone into the abstract 
 grounds why faith does not make void the 
 law (or moral obedience) ; which, liowever 
 true, /lave no place here : the design being 
 to shew that the law itself contained this 
 very doctrine, and was founded in the pro- 
 mise to Abraham on a covenant embracing 
 Jews and Gentiles, — and therefore was not 
 degraded from its dignity by the doctrine, 
 but rather established as a part of God's 
 deaUngs, — consistent with, explaining, and 
 exijlained by, the Gospel. 
 IV. 1 — 5.] Abraham himself ivas justified 
 by faith. — The reading and punctuation of 
 this verse present some difficulties. As to 
 the first (see var. read.), the variation in 
 the order of the words, and the reading 
 προττάτορη, seem both, however strongly 
 supported, to have sprung out of an idea 
 that κητά σάρκα belonged to πατ'ί(.)α. This 
 being supposed, ενρηκεναι was transposed 
 to throw πατέρα ήμ. κατά σάυκα together, 
 — and then, because Abraham is distinctly 
 proved (ver. 11) to have been in another 
 sense the father of the faithful, πατέρα was 
 altered to the less ambiguous προπάτορα, 
 ancestor, a word not found in the N. T., 
 but frequent in the Fathers. I have there- 
 fore with DeWette, Tholuck, and Tischen- 
 dorf (in his last edn.) retained the rec. text. 
 Grot., Le Clerc, and Wetst. punctuate, τι 
 
 ovv ερουμεν; ενρηκ σ«ρκ:α: — and 
 
 Matthai, τί ovv ; ερονμ. . . . σάρκα ; supply- 
 ing ίικαιοσύνην (or more rightly an inde- 
 fite Ti) after ενρηκέναι. But as Thol. 
 well remarks, both these methods of 
 punctuating would presuppose that Paul 
 had given some reason in the preceding 
 verses for imagining that Abraham had 
 gained some advantage according to the 
 flesh : which is not the case. 
 1. ovv] The Ap. is here contending with 
 those under the law /rom tfteir own stand- 
 ing-point : and he follows up his νόμον 
 Ίστάνομεν, by 'what therefore (' hoc con- 
 cesso,' ' seeing that you and I are both up-
 
 IV. l—l 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 323 
 
 '^ ίνρηκίναι ^ κατά σάρ /co ; ^ ύ yap 'Αβραάμ " ίί; έ^ογωι^ χ = r.ukeix. 
 ίΒίΚαιωΟη, έ^£ΐ ^ καυγ^ημα. Άλλ' ου '^ ττρύς θίυν' ^ ^ί zch.'P'u'reit.*' 
 
 \ t J ^ \ ' . e ' Γ? > V'^'a/O ^ -/j-ach. iii. 20 and 
 
 yap Tj γ|θαφη Λεγίΐ , η,ττιστίυσεν ο£ Ι\ρξ)ααμ τω σεω, passim. 
 
 ICor. XV. 31. be Gal. 
 
 xii. 12, or John i. 1, 2. 
 
 c 1 Cor. v.fi alH, Paul. Heb.iii.fi. Deut. x. 21 al. 
 . daf., Gen. xv. fi. John v. 24. Acts xvi. 34. 
 
 mssnrly (appy) vss Clir Thdrt Gennad and Phot (in Oec) ThlOec.^2. κανχησιν 238. — 
 άλλα F. — reo τυν 0to)' {ari inserted, but unnecessarity aft ττρος), with D'EJK &c Thdrt 
 Chr al: txt ABCD'FG.— 3. St om (as jmnecessary), D'FG 61. 108' al ν it Chr lat-ff.— 
 
 holders of the law') shall we say,' &c. Tiiis 
 ver., and the argument following, are not a 
 proof, but a conaequence, of I'o^jo)' iffr., 
 and are tlierefore introduced, not with γάρ, 
 but with ούν. «ύρηκεναι.] viz. to- 
 
 wards his justification, or more strictly, 
 earned as his own, to boast of. κατά 
 
 σάρκα belongs to ίΰρ., not (as Chrys., Theo- 
 phyl., Erasm.) to ττατερα ήμ. For the 
 course and spirit of the argument is not to 
 limit the paternity of Abraham to a mere 
 fleshly one, but to shew that he was the 
 spiritual father of all believers. And the 
 question is not one which requires any such 
 distinction between his fleshly and s])iritual 
 paternity (as in ch. ix. 'Λ. 5). This being 
 so, ivhat does κατά σάρκα mean ? It can- 
 not allude to circumcision ,• for that is ren- 
 dered improbable, not only by the parallel 
 expression ϊξ tpyoji' in the plural, but also 
 by the consideration, that circ. was no 
 (fjyov at all, but a seal of the righteousness 
 ivhich he had by faith being yet uncircum- 
 cised (ver. ll),^and by the whole course 
 of the argument in the present place, which 
 is not to disprove the exclusive privilege of 
 the Jew (that having beeen already done, 
 ch. ii. iii.), but to shew that the father and 
 head of the race himself tvas justified not 
 by works but by faith. Doubtless, in so 
 far as circumcision was a mere icork of obe- 
 dience, it might be in a loose way considered 
 as falling under that category : but it came 
 «yViT justification, and so κ chi'onologically 
 here excluded, κατά σάρκα then is in con- 
 trast to κατά TrvfDfinr, — and refers to that 
 dejjartment of our being from which sjn'ing 
 works, in contrast with that in ivhich is the 
 exercise of faith ; see ch. viii. 4, 5. 2.] 
 
 ' For if Abraham was justified (assuming, 
 as a fact known to all, that he was justified 
 by some means) by works, he hath matter 
 of boasting' (not ex|)ressed here whether 
 in the sight of men, or of God, but taken 
 generally : th(; ])ro))osition being assumed, 
 ' He that has earned justification by works, 
 has whereof to boast '). Then, in dis])rouf 
 of this, — that Abraham has matter of boast- 
 ing,— whatever men might think of him, 
 or attribute to him (e. g. the jjcrfcct keep- 
 ing of the law, as the .h'ws did) one thing 
 at least is clear, that he has none before 
 God. This we can prove, (ver. 'Λ) ' for 
 
 Υ 
 
 what saith the Scripture ? Abraham be- 
 lieved God (God's promise) and it (ro 
 τΓίτηϋσαι) was reckoned (LXX. Heb. 
 ' He reckoned it') to him as (ch. ii. 20") 
 righteousness.' — The whole question so 
 much mooted between Protestants on the 
 one hand, and Romanists, Arminians, and 
 Socinians on the other, as to whether this 
 righteousness was reckoned (I) 'perfidem,' 
 being God's righteousness imputed to the 
 sinner ; or (2) ' propter fidcm,' so that God 
 made Abraham righteous on account of the 
 merit of his faith, lies in fact in a small 
 compass, if what has gone before be pro- 
 perly taken into account. The Ap. hag 
 proved Jews and Gentiles to be all tender 
 sin : utterly unable by works of their own 
 to attain to righteousness. Now faith, in 
 the second sense mentioned above, is strictly 
 and entirely a work, and as such would be 
 the efiicient cause of man's justification, — 
 which, by what has preceded, ii cannot be. 
 It will therefore follow, that it was not the 
 act of believing which was reckoned to him 
 as a righteous act, or on account of which 
 perfect righteousness was laid to his charge, 
 but that the fact of his trusting God to 
 perform His promise introduced him into 
 the blessing promised. God declared his 
 purpose (Gen. xii. 3) of blessing all the 
 families of the earth in Abraham, and 
 again (Gen. xv. 5) that his seed should be 
 as the stars of heaven, when as yet he had 
 no son. Abraham believed his promise, 
 and became partaker of this blessing. But 
 this blessing was, justification by faith in 
 Christ. Now Abraham could not, in the 
 strict sense of the words, be justified by 
 faith in Christ, — nor is it necessary to 
 suppose that he directed his faith forward 
 to the promised Redeemer in Person ; but 
 in so far as God's gracious purpose was 
 revealed to him, he grasped it by faith, and 
 that righteousness which was implied, so 
 far, in it, was imputed to him. Home have 
 said (Tholuck, c. g.) that the i)arull(!l is in- 
 complete — Abraham's faith having been 
 reckoned to him for righteousness, whereas, 
 in our case, the righteousness of Christ is 
 reckoned to us as our righteousncsr^, by 
 faith. But the int-ompleteness lies in the 
 nature of the respectiv(i cases. In his case, 
 tite righteousness itself was not yet mani-
 
 524 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 IV. 
 
 f-ch.ii.2r. και ί\ο•γισΟη αυτ(ο ^ ίΐς όικαιοσυνην. τω δε tnyaZoutiO» αϊ 
 
 reff. ProT. , - / , r ^ ,y k > k ' '\λ > ^ ^'^ 
 
 ^'apn'^x 4 ^ /ιι<σ"ος ου Ao-yiCfrai icara χάριν, uAAa /caro ' 
 
 xix.27.ch. I ' J '\ .Λ " ^* ■>■ h ' y ' HI ' ijv in ' ' 
 
 ix.8. οφίΐΑημα "^ τω οε μη ίρ'γαί,ομίνω, πιστευοί'τι οε εττί 
 
 h «Lsol., Acts ν „ ^ - *■ Ν ο ' /J- f Λ 'y ' ' ' - 
 
 y"'•}- „ , τον ο/καίουΐ'τα τον ασερτ), Λo7^ί,εται η ττίστις αυτού 
 
 1 Cor. IX, Bal. ι ' ' / ' = 
 
 '"«.^Lnke"' ^ είς ^ικοιοσυνην. ^ καθάττίρ και /!:^αυι^ \iyei τον '' /ιιακα- 
 
 8ηι. Ceil, ρισμυν του άνθρωπου ω ο θεός "^ λo-yί^εται οικ"αιοσύΐ'ί;ν 
 
 flTen'Oiiiy. ^ YWf>'C έργων, ' Μακάριοι ών ^ α(ρ(:Οησαν αι " ανομίαι 
 
 Deut. xxiv. ^τν' \ ' , Ω ' ' ' 8 ' ίνν 
 
 ΚΙ. Thnc.u. κοί ων ίπεκαλυψυησαν αι αμαρτιαι μακάριος ανηρ ω 
 
 τί. 12 only.) in ver. 24. Acts ίχ. 42. xi. 17. Sie M.i't. xxvii. 42. η ch. i. 13 reff. och.v.6. 
 
 ITirn.i. it. IPct. iv. IS. 2 Prt. ii. Γι. iii. 7. Jiuie ver. xv. only. Ptov. xxi. 30. ρ ch. xli. 4. 1 Cor. 
 
 xii. 12 alH, Paul. Hch. ir. 2. v. 4 only. q GhI. iv. 15 only f. r ver. 4. s ch. iii. 21, 28, &c. 
 
 t = Mutt. vi. 12. xii. 31. 1>Η.χχϋ.14. 1"sa xxxi 1. u — Matt. vii. 23. xiii. 41 al. Exod. xxxiv. 9. 
 
 τ here only. 1. c. Gen. vii. Ill alex. (See 1 Pet. ii. 1(1.) 
 
 4. rec TO οφίΐλ. {appy as agreeing betler with the idea of a definite obligation incurred : 
 i. e. =2 TO ύφηλόμίΐ'ον, ' what is due from the emiiloyer,^ as indeed Bloomf. explains if), 
 with a few mss (appy) Oec : t.\t ABCDEFGJK {οφιλιμα D') most mss ff. — 5. μη om I7. 
 — naf/3;;,' D'FG: t.xt A( Β ?)01)3(Ε.').Ι(Κ. ').— »; πιστ,ς αντυν om GO: αντ ου om 12()•^: 
 αντω 2. — add at end, secundum propositum graiiee Dei v-edd Ambrst Pelag Sedul 
 Λ-'ϊ^οΓ-ίιιηη Bed. — 6. καθοις και ο δαυιΡ (ίΐδ D) DEFG : ο δ. also al Chr-comm. — etc 
 δικα,οπ. 17. 4G. 69'. 70. 114 al lect 13.— 7. και μηκ. •35.—αφ(ΐθησα,' 35. 74. 120 al (all 
 in Mill) mss in LXX.— 8. for φ, ου BD(E?;G 6T, and A al in LXX.— Xoytatrai Κ 
 
 ABCD 
 FG 
 JK 
 
 fested. He believed implicitly, taking the 
 promise, with all it involved and implied, 
 as true. This then was his way of entering 
 into the promise, and by means of his faith 
 was bestowed upon him that full justifica- 
 tion which that faith never apprehended. 
 Thus his faith itself, the mere fact of im- 
 plicit trust in God, was counted to him, for 
 righteousness. But though the same right- 
 eousness is imputed to us who believe, and 
 by means of faith also, it is no longer the 
 mere fact of believing implicitly in God's 
 truth, but the reception of Christ Jesus the 
 Lord by faith, which justifies us (see vv. 
 23 — 25 and note). As it was then the 
 realization of God's words by faith, so now : 
 but we have the Person of the Lord Jesus 
 for the object of faith, explicitly revealed: 
 he had not. In both cases justification is 
 gratuitous, and is by faith : and so far, 
 which is as far as the argument here re- 
 quires, the parallel is strict and complete. 
 4. τω βρ-γαζομ.] (q. d. τφ fjjyarj/, 
 but the part, is used because of the negative 
 τψ μη ΐμγαζ. following) — 'to the workman 
 (him that works for hire, that earns wages, 
 comp. τΓροςίΐργόσητο, Luke xix. IG) his 
 wages are not reckoned according to (as 
 a matter of) grace (favour), but according 
 to (as a matter of) debt.' The stress is on 
 κατά χάοη', not on λογίζίται, which in 
 this first member of the sentence, is used 
 hardly in the strict sense, of imputing or 
 reckoning, but of allotting or apportioning .• 
 — its use being occasioned by the stricter 
 Xoyi^froi below. And the sentence is a 
 general one, not with any peculiar reference 
 to Abraham, — except that after κατά xafjiv 
 we may supply ώς• τψ 'Αβραάμ, if we will ; 
 
 for this is evidently assumed. 5.] 
 
 * But to him who works not (for hire, — is 
 not an Ι^ι-γάτης looking for his μισθόν) 
 but believes on (casts himself in simple 
 trust and humility on) Him who justifies 
 (accounts just, as in ver. 3) the ungodly 
 (' impious ;' stronger than ' unrighteous :' — 
 no allusion to Abraham's having formerly 
 been in idolatry, — for the sentence follow- 
 ing on ver. 4, which is general and of uni- 
 versal ap])lication must also be general, — 
 including of course Abraham : «σ£/3(((( is 
 the state of all men by nature), — his faith 
 is reckoned as righteousness.' — κατά 
 χά(.)ΐν is of course implied. 
 6 — 8.] The same is confirmed by a passage 
 from David. This is not a fresh example, 
 but a confirmation of the assertion involved 
 in ver. 5, that a man may believe on Him 
 who justifies the ungodly, and have his faith 
 reckoned for righteousness. The applica- 
 bility of the text depends on the persons 
 alluded to being sinners, and having sin 
 not reckoned to them. ασφίΧ% and 
 
 λογίζομαι are the two words to be illus- 
 trated. — The Psalm, strictly speaking, says 
 nothing of the imputation of righteousness, 
 — but it is implied by Paul, that the remis- 
 sion of sin is equivalent to the imputation 
 of righteousness — that there is no negative 
 state of innocence — none intermediate be- 
 tween acceptance for righteousness, and re- 
 jection for sin. \iy. τον μακ.] ' pro- 
 nounces the blessedness,' ' the congratu- 
 lation:' in allusion perhaps to the Heb. 
 
 form, nir^i, ' (0) the blessings of' — 
 
 It is very clear that this righteousness 
 must be χωρίς ϊργων, because its impu- 
 tation consists in the remission and hiding
 
 4—11, 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 325 
 
 οι» μη 
 
 ^ λο- 
 
 ^Ύίσηται κύριος αμαρτιαν. 
 ούτος ^'' £7Γΐ την " ττίοιτομην, ''" η και 
 
 » ' μακαξ)ΐσμος ουν 
 fTTt T1IV ακρορυ- 
 στιαν ; λί'γο^ιεν γαρ οτι "^ ίΧον'ισθη τω Αβραάμ η πίστις ^^'j 
 
 οντι, η ^ εν " ακροβυστ'ια ; ουκ ^ έν ττεριτο/ατ}, αλλ' 
 
 = ch. iii. 22 
 reft. See 
 Hcl). vii. 13. 
 iVIrtrkix. 12. 
 
 cb. 
 
 .30 
 
 Cor. is. 8 
 
 ίΐς οικαιοσυνην' ^" πώς ούν "^ ίΧοΎΐσθη ', ^ ev περιτομη y'l^.in w 
 
 / r<rtt. 
 £j; ζ =. Malt. 
 > ^ 11' - ■- " - xxvi. 48. 
 
 ακροβυστ'ια. ^^ /cat ^ σημειον έλαβεν περιτομης, "^ a<ppayiSa 
 της οικαιοσυνης της ^'' πίστεως Τ7}ς ^ ευ τή ακροβυστία, 
 εις το εΐί'αι αυτού πατΒοα τταντων των ττιστΕυοντων όια 
 
 ευ τ^ ακροβ 
 
 δ, 
 
 }•γισβηναι και αυτοις την όικαιο- 
 
 b Act.s iii. 19. τϋ. 19. ch. i. 11, 20 al. 
 
 1 1 or. XIV. 22. 
 GE.s.xvii.U. 
 coustr. gen., 
 Acts iv. 22. 
 - 1 Cor. ix. 
 2. (Hagg. ii. 
 24.) 
 
 1 gen. of.ip- 
 pu.sit.. Col. 
 1. 18. iii. 24. 
 cb. ii. 27 reff. 
 
 ^ ακροβυστιας, ' πς το ^ \o 
 
 Winer, } 48. 2. 
 
 46-8. 117 al lect 13 al. — 9. for μακαρισμος, μακάριος 80'. — aft ττιριτ. ins /ioroi" DE vss 
 Ambrst Pelag : tanium manet ν edd Ambrst Pelag. — η am 109. — και ova 35. 47-9. u2. 
 1081 al lect 13 tol Syr arr arm slav Chr.— for tin (2nd), ε(ς• C : om 29. 33.— Xcyti 73.— 
 on om BD' 47 (al.').— »; πιστις om G g 117 : aft δικαιοσ. 17• G2. — 10. orrt om FG it ν 
 al (not copt svr al) Cyr Aug Ambrst Pelag. — η και D*E. — ακοοβυστια 1st to 2nd om 77• 
 — 11. ττ(ριτο'μ7)ν AC' 6. 9. 3R. 47. «7. 77. 123 al syrr Orig-schol Eus Cyrr (Chr.') 
 Procop Dam : t.xt B(e sil)C2DEFGJK most mss it ν copt al Thdrt Thl Oec lat ff.— aft 
 σφρηγ. ins Sin FG: της τηριτομης J. — η/ς om 17• — τη om D(E.')FG 35. 1 14-57 al lectt 
 13. 14 Procop Dam.— rec Si, with B(e sil)C &c : txt AD(E?)FGJ(K?) &c.— aft XoyinQ. 
 add Εις ro tivai avrov 48. — και om AB 47. 67^• 73-4. 115 all demid tol ar-pol Orig- 
 schol Cyr Dam : ins CDEFGJK most mss it ν syrr seth al Thdrt Thl Oec lat-ff.— bef 
 δικαιοσ. om την C^D' 67-. 80. 115 al : tic ίικαι. (pref την 67 ) A 32. 47. 114-24 e ν Syr 
 
 of offences, whereas none can be legally 
 righteous in whom there is any, even the 
 smallest offence. 8.] οΰ μή λογίση- 
 
 ται, as the same constr. usually in the N. 
 T. is fuUire (Win. § 60. 3), and must be 
 referred to the great final judgment. Or 
 we may say with Olsh. that the expression 
 is an O. T. one, regarding sin as lying 
 covered by the divine long-suffering till 
 the completion of the work of Christ, at 
 which time first real forgiveness of sins was 
 imparted to the ancient believers ; comp. 
 Matt, xxvii. 53. 1 Pet. iii. 18. In this last 
 view the future will only refer to all such 
 cases as should arise. 9 — 12.] 
 
 This declaration of blessedness applies to 
 circumcised and uncircvmcised alike. For 
 Abraham himself was thxis justified %vhen in 
 UNCiRCUMCisiON, arulwas then pronounced 
 the father of the faithful, uncirciimcised 
 as well as circumcised. μακαρισμός 
 
 of course includes the yac^, on account of 
 vjhich the congratulation is pronounced, — 
 the justification itself. 9. eiri] sc. 
 
 Xiytrai, see reff. — Tlie form of the ques- 
 tion, with η καί, presupposes an affirmative 
 answer to the latter clause ; which affirma- 
 tive answer is then made the ground of the 
 argumentation in vv. 10, 11, 12: — ' On the 
 uncircumcision (-cised) also. For we 
 say,' &c. — Thr stress is on τω Αβραάμ,, 
 not on ή ττίστις : ' for we say, that to 
 AuiiAHAM faith was reckoned for righte- 
 ousness.' 10.] irus, ' under what 
 circumstances'?' — Tlie interval between the 
 recognition of his faitli (Gen. xv. 6) and his 
 
 circumcision, was perhaps as much as 
 twenty-five, certainly not less (Gen. xvii. 
 25) than fourteen years. 11.] ' And he 
 
 received (from God) the sign (token, or 
 symbol) of circumcision (gen. of apposi- 
 tion, see ref. — the reading πίριτομην ap- 
 pears to have been an alteration on account 
 of σφραγίδα following), a seal (the Targum 
 on Cantt. iii. 8, cited by Tholuck, has the 
 expression, * the seal of circumcision,' and 
 in Sohar, Levit. vi. 21, it is called ' a holy 
 sign.' So also Baptism is called in the 
 ActaThomee, § 26, ή ηψραγις τυν λουτρού, 
 and elsewhere in the Fathers simply ») 
 σφραγις. Grabe, Spicil. Patr. i. 333) of the 
 righteousness (to stamp, and certify ther.) 
 of the faith (gen. of apposition [but not 
 ?'?t appos. with δικ. \)y construction'], — 'of 
 the r. which consisted in his faith,' — not, 
 'of his justification by faith;' the present 
 argument treats of faith accounted as righte- 
 ousness) which was (or, 'which he had;' 
 της may refer eitiier to Sik. or to ττίστ., 
 — but better to tlie former, because the 
 object is to shew that the righteousness 
 was imputed in uncir.) during his uncir- 
 cumcision.' In literal historial matter of 
 fact, Abraham received circ. as a seal of 
 the covenant between God and him (Gen. 
 xvii. 1 — 10). But this covenant was only 
 a renewal of that very one, on the pro- 
 mise of which Abraham's faith was exer- 
 cised. Gen. XV. 5, 6, — and eacii successive 
 ri^newal of wiiich was a fresh a])proval of 
 (hat faith. The Ajwstle's point is, — tliat 
 the righteousness was reckoned, and tlio
 
 326 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 IV. 
 
 dch.ii. Srrft'. 
 e Acts xxi. 'Ji. 
 
 Gal. v.L'S. 
 
 vi. le. Pliil. 
 
 lii. 16 tiiily. 
 
 Eccles. xi. fi. 
 faCor.xii. 18. 
 
 1 Pet. ii. 21:. 
 
 <'x>"I τϊ)Γ 
 
 Λλ>1«6ία9, 
 
 Polyb iv. 42. 
 
 7. ((]af.,i-h.x 
 
 17. xi.7. 
 
 ^^ /coi πατίρα πίριτομΐ]ς τοις ουκ 
 aWa και τοις ^ στυι\ουσιν τοις 
 
 εκ TTfoiroitTjc abcd 
 
 '_ ., , Ε KG 
 
 συνην, 
 
 μόνον, α\\α και τοις ^ στοιγ^οΰσιν τοις ι-^νίσιν τΐ]ς 
 " ακροβνστ'ια ττιστίως του ποτ^ιός -ημών Λ/3ροάμ. 
 yap δια νόμου ?'/ iTToy-ytXto τω Ap^jna/n ?/ τω ^ σττίρμητι 
 " "" το κ\ηροΐ'όμον ηυτον tivai κόσμου, α\\α όιά 
 
 ίν 
 ου 
 
 αυτού 
 
 ϋ. 13.) 
 
 1ι = Tit. iii. 7. Heb. i. 2. vi. 
 
 Cyr Aug Anibrst Pel — 12. for rote ουκ, ου τοις 37- 80 v-ed Syr arr slav Tlidrt Thl-comm 
 Procop Aug Ambrst-conim Ruf Pel: for τοις ονκ ικ, ov 73: τοις (κ 57• — for στοιχ., 
 Γυχοΐ'ίτι ;U. f!5. !!()-!). 115 al. — rec (r τη ακ()ϋβ. {art sujiplied, bid minecessarily aft iv), 
 with D'EJK &(; Chr Thdrt Thl Oec.' : txt ABCD'FG 5.44. 110-11-15-20-'-!} all Cyr 
 Procop Dam Ouc' : της ττιστ. της iv τη ακρκβ. J Κ all ν (not am harl') al Thdrt Thl' 
 Oec' lat-ff : της ττιστ. της tv ακ^ιοβ. ττισηοις D 71 d e. — 13. for jj, κηι TO. 124 al arm 
 Thl. — avTov om 42 arm slav-ms. — rec τον κυσμ. {corrn, lint unnecessary), with JK &c 
 Thdrt Thl Oec: txt ABCDEFG 4?. 73. 80 al Dam.— bef πκτΓίως- ins κ«ι 3. 44. 71 al 
 
 promise made, to Abraham, not in circ. 
 but hi vncirc. eU το ίΐναι . . .] 'In 
 
 order that he might be (not ' so that he 
 is ;' sec Gal. iii. 8) the father of all that 
 believe in uneircumcision ' (ίιά, see reff., 
 — ' conditioiiis ').— Abraham is the father 
 of the faithful. But the triumph and re- 
 cognition of that faith whereby he was con- 
 stituted so, was not during his circ. but 
 during his uncirc. :— therefore the faithful, 
 his descendants, must not be confined to 
 the circumcised, but must take in the un- 
 circumcisedalso. — On ττατΊρα in this sense, 
 Tholuck compares the expression Gen. iv. 
 21. 1 Mace. ii. 54 (Φπ'ίίς ό πατήρ ημών 
 tv τψ ζηλώσαι ζήΧον) and Maimonides, 
 ' Moses is the father of all the prophets 
 who succeeded him.' See also our Lord's 
 saying, John viii. 37. 39. The Rabbinical 
 book Michlal Jophi on Mai. ii. (Thol.) has 
 a sentiment remarkably coincident with that 
 in our text : " Abraham is the father of all 
 those who follow his faith." «is το 
 
 λογ. κ-.Γ.λ.] (is in fact parenthetical, whe- 
 ther brackets are used or not ; for otherwise 
 the constr. from the former to the latter 
 ττατίρ(ί would not proceed) ' in order 
 that the righteousness (which Abraham's 
 faith was reckoned as being,^the righte- 
 ousness of God, then hidden though im- 
 puted, but now revealed in Jesus Christ) 
 might he imputed to them also.' 
 12. και (ίι'ς τυ tivai αντυν) πάτερα 
 τΓίριτομής . . . .] ' And (that he might be) 
 father of the circumcision (the circum- 
 cised) to those (dat. commodi ' for those,' 
 ' in the case of those ') who are not only 
 (physically) of the circumcision, hut also 
 who walk (the inversion of the article 
 ajjjiears to be in order to bring out more 
 markedly τοις ίκ —tpir. and τυ'ις στοιχ., — 
 who are not only ol U ttuht., but also o't 
 στοίγοΰΐ'Γίς . . . .) in the footsteps (reft".) 
 of the faith of our father (sj)cakiiig here as 
 a Jew) Abraham (wlucli he had) during 
 uneircumcision.' (The art. would make it 
 
 ' during hisuncir.,' — but the sense is better 
 
 without it, the word being generalized.) 
 
 13—17.] Not through the 
 
 LAW, hut through the righteousness 
 
 OF FAITH, was THE INHERITAiSTCE OF THE 
 
 WORLD promised to Abraham .• so that not 
 only they who are of the law, but they who 
 follow Abraham's faith are heirs of this 
 PROMISE. 13.] γάρ, strictly ' for.' 
 
 The argumentation is an expansion of 
 ττατίρα πάττ. τών πιστίνόντων above. 
 If these believers are Abraham's seed, then 
 his promised inheritance is theirs. 
 δια vo'fjiov] not, ' under the late,' — nor, 'by 
 works of the law,' — nor, 'by the righteous- 
 ness of the law :' but, ' through the law,' 
 so that the law should be the ground, or 
 efficient cause, or medium, of the promise. 
 None of these it was, as matter of historical 
 fact. — ' For not through the law was 
 the promise (made) to Abraham, or {>) in 
 negative sentences answers to και in affirm., 
 see Matt. v. 17) to his seed, viz. that he 
 should be heir of the world, but by the 
 righteousness of faith.' This specifica- 
 tion of the promise has perplexed most of 
 the commentators. The actual promise. 
 Gen. xii. 2, 3; xiii. 14. 17; xv. 18; xvii. 
 8, was the possession of the land of Ca- 
 naan. But the Rabbis already had seen, 
 and Paul, who had been brought up in their 
 learning, held fast the truth, — that much 
 more was intended in the words which 
 accompany this promise, ' In thee (or in thy 
 seed) shall all families of the earth be 
 blessed,' than the mere possession of Ca- 
 naan. They distinctly trace the gift of the 
 world to Abraham to this promise, not to 
 the foregoing. So Bemidbar Rabb. xiv. 
 202. 3 (Wetst.). — ' Hortus est mundus, 
 quern Deus tradidit Abrahamo, cui dictum 
 est, " et eris benedictio" ' (see other citt. in 
 Wetst.). The inheritance of the world 
 then is not the possession of Canaan merely 
 (so that κόσμΐ)ν should z:: ytic) either 
 literally, or as a type of a better posses-
 
 12—17. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 827 
 
 νικαιοσυϊ>ης πίστεως, 
 
 ft γαρ οι εκ νομού κΑηρονομοι, i = icoT. lu. 
 
 1 / ' ' \ k f ' • \ r 1 (- r is. 15. 2 Cor. 
 
 κεκενωται ?j ττιστις και καττηρ-^ηται τ] επα'^^ελια' ^^ ο ■f>^,;„/''''''• 
 yap νομός ορ-γην κατερ-γαί,εται. ου όε ουκ εστίν νομός, χτ.Ή)' 
 
 1 5,\ η ιρ ig ^ ν _ ο . , ''ρ ν !< Luke xiii. 7. 
 
 ουόε παραμασις. ^" όια τούτο εκ πίστεως, ινα ^ κατά ?ί "ΐ 3. 
 
 ' , ' ^^ ^ ' 1 Ccir. xiii, 8. 
 
 yjtpiv, '^ εις το είναι "^ βεβαία ν την ^ επαγ-νίλ/'αν παντι \ I"h.ViJ!' 
 
 - m = ch. ν. 3. 
 
 τω σπερματι, ου τω " ε /c του νομού uoror, άλλα και τω νϋ.», is. 
 
 > r ' rt \ « . ν f -*■ 2Cor. iv. 17 
 
 "εκ: πίστεως Αβραα /^t, δς έστιν πατήρ πάντων rj^uaJv η?ϊ) η. 23 w. 
 ' [καυως -γε-γραπται οτι πάτερα πολλών ευνων τευεικα cn.v.ia. ο«ι. 
 
 ^ ' ' ^ ϊ^ iii. 19. 1 Tim. 
 
 ii. 14. Heb. ii. 2. ix. 15 only. Ps. c. 3.) ο = ch. iii 20, 30 al. ρ ver. 4. ellips.. Gal. ii. 9 v. 13. 
 
 q ver. 11 reft'. r 2 Cor. i. 7. Heb. iii. 14. vi. 19. ix. 17. 2 Prt. i. in, 19 only. s Ai-(s i. 4 retl. 
 
 t = ver. 13. α ch. ii. 8 reft. τ Gen. xvii. 5. w = 1 Tim. ii. 7. 2 Tim. i. II. Heb. i. 2. 2 Pit. 
 
 ii. ϋ. Jer. i. 5. 
 
 Cyr Thl-ms. — for ot t/c, Sia lect 14 : fK 238. — oi ic\j;pov. Thdrt. — 14. και om Ε d e ν Jul 
 (in Aug) Ambrst Pelag. — 15. for ov, irov G' (arm Sch). — rec ου yap ουκ tar. v. {see note), 
 with DEFGJK most mss it ν syrr al Chr (before, on ο νομ. for ο γαρ j^.) Oec Ambrst Aug.; 
 Bed: txt ABC 10. 31. 80. 124 al syr-marg copt Thdrt ThI Jul (in Aug) Ambr Ruf.— 
 16. aft ττιστ., add ιησυν D' d'. — iva η A 45. 80 al arm. — rov om 35. — μόνον and και 
 
 sion, — but that tdimiate lordship over the 
 whole world which Abraham, as the father 
 of the faithful in all peoples, and Christ, as 
 the Seed of Promise, shall possess : the 
 former figuratively indeed and only im- 
 plicitly, — the latter personally and actually. 
 See ch. viii. IJ. Matt. v. 5. 2 Tim. ii. 12. 
 I Cor. XV. 24. — Another difficulty, that this 
 promise was made chronologically before 
 the reckoning of his faith for righteousness, 
 is easily removed by remembering that the 
 (indefinite) making of the promise is here 
 treated of as the whole process of its asser- 
 tion, during which Abraham's faith was 
 shewn, and the promise continually con- 
 firmed, αυτόν includes his seed. 
 14.] The sujjposition is now made which 
 ver. 13 denied, — and its consequences 
 shewn. ' For if they who are of the law 
 (who belong to the law, see reff. : not, 
 ' who keep the law,' nor is δίκαιοι to 
 be suppHed) are inheritors (i. e. inherit 
 ' ejus rei causa,' by virtue of the law : 
 they may be inheritors by the righteous- 
 ness of faith, but not quoad their legal 
 standing), faith is (thereby) made empty 
 (robbed of its virtue and rendered use- 
 less), and the promise is annulled ' (has 
 no longer place). How and why so ? The 
 Ap. himself immediately gives the reason. 
 15.] 'For the law works (brings 
 about, gives occasion to) wrath (whicli 
 from its very nature, excludes promise, 
 which is an act of grace, — and faith, wbi('h 
 is an attribute of coiifidence); — \i\!it where 
 (or, for where ; but I sliould regard γάρ 
 as introduced to suit the idea of the second 
 clause rciidiriiig a reason for tlio first) 
 there is no law (lit. ' uhcre the late is 
 not') neither (is there) transgression.' 
 * We should rather expect (says Do W.) 
 the aifirmativ(f clause, "And where the law 
 is, there is transgression :" but the negative 
 
 refers to the time before the Mosaic law, 
 when there was no transgression and there- 
 fore also no wrath.' J'e* ; but not because 
 there was no transgression then ; the pur- 
 pose of the Ap. here is not to deny the 
 existence of the law of God written in the 
 heart (which itself brings in the knowledge 
 of sin) before Moses, but to shew that no 
 promise of inheritance can be by the law, 
 because the property of the law is, the more 
 it is promulgated, to reveal transgression 
 more, — not to \mfold grace. So that com- 
 paratively (see notes on ch. vii.) there was 
 no transgression before the law of Moses ; 
 and if we conceive a state in which the law 
 should be altogether absent, whether written 
 or unwritten (as in the brute creation) there 
 would be no transgression whatever. — But 
 observe (see ch. v. 12 — 14) that this rea- 
 soning does not touch the doctrine of the 
 original taint of our nature in Adam, — only 
 referring to the discrimination of acts, 
 words, and thoughts by the conscience in 
 the tight of the law : for παράβασις is 
 not natural corruption, but an act of trans- 
 gression : nor does the Ap. here deny the 
 former, even in the imaginable total absence 
 of the law of God. 16.] ' For this 
 
 (viz. the following) reason it (the inherit- 
 ance, — not the promise ; the jn-oraise was 
 not strictly speaking ΐκ τνίστιως : — nor 
 they (the heirs), who although they might 
 fairly be said to be ΐκ πίστιως [comp. οι. 
 ΐκ νόμου above, and reff.] could hardly be 
 without har-dmess described as being κητά 
 χάριν) was by faith, that it might be 
 (strictly the pnrjiose; — not, 'so that it 
 was') according to grace (free unmerited 
 favour. As the lair, bringing the know- 
 ledge of guilt, works icralli, — so the pro- 
 mise, awakening./<7!7/i, manifests iioa'sfree 
 grace, — the en<l for which it was given) ; 
 in order that the promise might be sure
 
 328 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 IV. 
 
 χ = 2 Cor. ϋ. _,\ 
 
 17. χϋ. 1!» oty 
 only. Exiid. \ 
 
 xxxii. II τους 
 
 KarevavTi ου επιστίυσεν υεου, του 
 καΧουντος τα 
 
 'ωοποιουντος• 
 
 νίκρυυς και καΛουντος τα μη υντα ως υντα 
 
 Luke XIX. 30 red' ) Num. χχν. 4. y atlr , Luke i 4. Winer, 421- 2 b. ζ John r 21. eh. viii. 11. 1 Cor. 
 
 XV. 22 al. 4 Kings v. 7. a Ste note, and Isa. xli 4. xlviii. 13. 4 King.s viii. 1 {?). τύ μη onTa έκάλεσει; 
 
 cif TO eivat, Fliilo de Great. Princ. p. 728. 
 
 om FG 42. 91 al harP d e g : it is aft ου in flor Aug. — Π. ίτη.στίυσης FG it v-ms tol flor 
 Syr ar-erp Ambrst Vigil I'elag : -σαν D' (crecUturte sunt setli), but credidisti d. — aft 
 Qtov om του 44. — 'ζωο-^ονονντος 93. — \α\ουντος 109. — for ως, (ΐς 37• — 18. t<}> ίλτηοι 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 (not, 'so that the pr. was sure:' this was 
 the result, but the Ap. states this as the 
 aim and end of the inheritance being by 
 faith, — quoad the seed of Abraham, — that 
 they all might be inheritors, — as the mani- 
 festation of (iod's grace was the higher aim 
 and end) to all the seed, not only to that 
 (part of it) which is of the law (.-iee ver. 
 14), but to that which is of the faith 
 (walks in the steps of tlie faith, ver. 12) of 
 Abraham' (it is altogether wrong to make 
 Άβμαάμ depend on σττίρματι expressed 
 or understood, as Oecum., Koppe, and 
 Fritzsche). The part of the seed which 
 is of the law here is of course confined to 
 believing Jews : the seed being believers 
 only. This has been sometimes lost sight 
 of, and the whole argument of vv. 13 — IG 
 treated as if it applied to the doctrine of 
 justification by faith without the works of 
 the law, a point already proved, and now 
 presupposed, — the present argument being 
 an historical and metaphysical one, pro- 
 ceeding on the facts of Abraham's history, 
 and the natures respectively of the law and 
 grace, to prove him to be the father of all 
 believers, uncircumcised as well as circum- 
 cised. OS €στιν ιτατήρ ττάντων ημών] 
 By the last declaration, the paternity of 
 Abraham, which is co-extensive with the 
 inheritance, has been extended to all who 
 are of his faith ; here therefore it is reas- 
 serted : ήμΰ)ΐ> meaning των πιστίνόντων. 
 17. καθώς γεγρ.] The words (ref.) are 
 spoken of the numerous progeny of Abra- 
 ham according to the flesh : but not with- 
 out a reference to that covenant, according 
 to the terms of which all nations were to 
 be blessed in him. The Ap. 7rmy here cite 
 it as comparing his natural paternity of 
 many nations with his spiritual one of all 
 believers : but it seems more probable that 
 he regards the prophecy as directly a7i- 
 nouncing a paternity far more extensive 
 than mere physical fact substantiated. 
 — These words are parenthetical, being 
 merely a confirmation by Scripture tes- 
 timony of ος ίητιν ττατ. πήντ. ημ., with 
 which (sec below) the following words 
 are immediately connected. κατ- 
 evavTi ov ίπίστίυσεν θίον] The mean- 
 ing appears to be, ' Abraham was the father 
 of us all, — though not physically, nor in 
 actuality, seeing that we were not as yet, — 
 
 yet in the sight and estimation of God, — ■ 
 in his relation with God, with whom no 
 obstacles of nature or time have force.' — 
 The resolution of the attraction must be 
 κατίναντι Otov, κατίναντι ου ίττ'ιητίνσιν, 
 as in Luke i. 4,— 'before God, in whose 
 sight he believed.' [Chrysostom's inter- 
 pretation (and sillily Theodoret, al.), — ώς•- 
 7Γ£ρ ό ΰίος οϊκ ίση μερικός θίϋς, άλλα 
 πάΐ'των ττατηρ, οντω και αυτός . ... το 
 γαρ ' κατίναντι' ομοίως εστί, — does not fall 
 in with the context, and is certainly a mis- 
 take.] τον ζωοίΓ. τ. ν€κρ.] ' Who 
 quickens the dead ;' — a general description 
 of God's almighty creative power (see 1 Tim. 
 vi. 13), applied particularly to the matter 
 in hand — the deadness of generative phy- 
 sical power in Abraham himself, which was 
 quickened by God (but νΐκρονς is a wider 
 term than νίνεκρωμίνον, the genus, of 
 which that is a species). The peculiar ex- 
 cellence of Abraham's faith was, that it 
 overleaped the obstacles of physical inca- 
 pacity, and nonentity, and believed implicitly 
 God's promise. Comp. 2 Cor. i. 9. 
 και καλ. τα μη οντ. ως δντα] Much diffi- 
 culty has been found here : and principally 
 owing to an idea that this clause must mi- 
 nutely correspond with the former, and 
 furnish another instance of God's creative 
 Almightiness. Hence comm. have given to 
 καλεΐν the sense which it has in reff., ' ίο 
 summon into being,' and have understood 
 ώς όντα as if it were εις το είναι. Thus, 
 more or less, and with various attempts to 
 escape from the violence done to the constr. 
 Chrys., Grot , Elsn., Wolf, Fritzsche, Tho- 
 luck, Stuart, De Wette, al. I see however 
 in this latter clause not a repetition or ex- 
 pansion of the former, but a new attribute 
 of God's omnipotence and eternity, on which 
 Abraham's faith was fixed. ' Who calleth 
 (nameth, speaketh of) the things that are 
 not, as being' (as if they were). This He 
 did in the present case with regard to the 
 seed of Abraham,w\uch did not asyet exist: 
 — the two key-texcs to this word and clause 
 being, tv Ισαάκ κληθήσβταί σοι σπέρμα 
 ch. ix. 7 (see note there), — and Acts vii. 5, 
 έπηγγείΚατο δούναι αντφ εις κατήσγ^εσιν 
 αυτήν, και τψ σττ'ερματι αυτοϋ μετ' αυτόν, 
 οΰκ δντος αίιτώ ΤΕκνου. These τέκνα, 
 which were at present in the category of τη 
 μη όντα, and the nations which should
 
 18—20. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 S29 
 
 ε7Γ^στ£υσεv, εις 
 κατά το 
 
 ΐρμα σου, 
 
 Ονων 
 19 
 
 ος παρ ελτηοα εττ ελπιοι 
 νίσθαι αυτόν πατίρα πολλών ε( 
 
 Όυτως ίσται το σπε 
 ΤΓίστίΐ, ου 
 
 k • ..... 
 
 εκατονταετλ/ς που υπάρχων, /cat την 
 μήτρας Ζαρρας, ''" *^ εις οε τη»' ^ επαγγελιαν του 
 "^ οιεκριΘη TTJ ^ απιστία, αλλ' * ενεδυναμώθ?/ τρ 
 
 το 
 
 b = Acts xviii. 
 ]3. ch. χνί. 
 ' / 17. i.2ti al. 
 
 είρημεΐΌν c Acts». 26. 
 
 _ ch. Ϊ iii. -20. 
 
 και μη ^ ασΟενησας ττ) ai^"Li,'feand 
 κατενοησεν το εαυτού σώμα t)S»j ' νενεκρω^ενοί', ρΓχν"'^' 
 
 d ver. 11 rfff. 
 
 νέιορωσιυ της ' ^"Yg"' α^Ί 
 
 - Λ - ' ii.'lHal. 
 
 εου ου ίθΕ>•. χν. δ. 
 
 . ε = 2 Cor. xi. 
 
 πιστει, -Ι^"'-^• 
 
 rh. S1V. 1, 2, 
 
 ISonlvt• k here only. Gen. 
 
 2 Cor.'iv. 10 only t- ο Lake ii. 
 
 q Acts i. 4 refl. r = Acts x. 
 
 s ch. iii. 3 retf. t Acts is. 22 oj Paul, othcr- 
 
 Hec. 
 
 21. h = l5a. Ivii. 1. Heb. x. 24. i Col. iii. 5. 
 
 XTii. 17. I of time, here ouly. m Act.s viii. Hi reft". 
 
 2:5 nn!y. Gt-n. xx. 18. ρ con.str., see Acts xxv. 
 
 20. xi. 12 ch. xiT. 23. James i.6t. (Jer. xv. 10.) 
 ■ni:,eal5, Pauloniy. Ps. Ii. 7. 
 
 C'D'FG: om 31. (>2. 70 al.— aft ιπιστινσ., add αβρααμ 39. 70 al—tOvwy om 1091-78 
 al. — at end add ως ai αστίηις {τα άστρα lOfi-8 marg Thl) του orpavov και το αμμον 
 (κ. ως 11 άμμος 10(J-8-marg Thl) της θαλάσσης (τ. θ. om Thl) FG in6-8-marg f latt 
 v-sixt Thl lat-fF (not Jul in Aug Ambrst al).— 19. εν τη π,στει Di(E?)FG d' f g v-si.\t 
 copt S3r Jul (in Aug) Bed. — bef κατίνοησεν om ου (see notes) ABC G7"• 93. 137 
 am copt Syr ar-erp Chi-j (and !Mtt's ms,) Dam Jul (in Aug) : txt DEFGJK mss iirly 
 (appy) it ν syr ar-pol al Chr (h 1) Thl Oec Ambrst Bed. — ως 32 aeth arm Thdrt. — ΐ]δΐ] 
 om BFG 47. 213 al am demid harl Syr aeth ar-erp Chr Epiph Ruf : ins ACDEJK &c vss 
 (but syr*, and ν Bed join it to εκατοντ.) Thdrt al. — 20. It om FG aeth (eliam e \ : et 
 
 spring, physically or spiritually, from him, 
 God Ελ-ήλίΐ ώς όντα, spoke of as having an 
 existence, which word Abraham beheved. 
 And here, as in the other clause, the καΧεΊν 
 τα μη όντα ώς οντά is not confined to the 
 case in point, but is a general attribute of 
 all God's words concerning things of time : 
 past, present, and future, being to His Om- 
 nipotence and Omniscience, all one. His 
 purposes, ^vhen formed, are accomplished, 
 save in so far as that evolution of secondary 
 causes and effects intervenes, which is also 
 His purpose. This also Abraham appre- 
 hended by his faith, which rested on God's 
 absolute power to do what He had promised 
 (see below). 18 — 22.] A more detailed 
 description of this (Xhr.'s) faith, as reposed 
 on God's Omnipotence. 18.] ' Who 
 
 against hope (where there was nothing to 
 hope) believed in hope (i. e. hopefully, en- 
 tertaining hope, see reff.), in order to his 
 becoming the father of many nations' 
 (i. e. as a step in the process of his becom- 
 ing, and one necessary to that process going 
 forward. He would never have become, &c., 
 had he not believed. To render εις το -γεν. 
 'that he should become,' and connect it 
 with επίστευσεν [Theophyl., Bez. all., De 
 Wette] is against Paul's usage, who never 
 connects -πιστεύω with a neut. inf., — and 
 not justified by Phil. i. 23. 1 Thess. iii. 10. 
 — The mere consecutive sense, ' so that he 
 became,' here, as every where, is a weaken- 
 ing of the sense, — and besides, would intro- 
 duce an objective clause in a passage which 
 all refers subj(,'ctively to Abraham), 
 οΰτως] viz. as the stars of heaven .• see 1. c, 
 — and comj). Ps. cxlvii. 4. 19.] The 
 
 reading (with or without οΰ .') must first bo 
 considered. Reading oh, the sense will be, 
 
 ' And not being weak in faith, he paid 
 no attention to,' &c. Omitting οίΊ, ' And 
 not being weak in (his) faith, he was well 
 aware of, &c. — but did not,' Ike. Of these, 
 the second agrees the better with εις δε την 
 εττ. ver. 20, — but the first very much better 
 suits the context ; the object being, to edtol 
 Abraham's faith, not to introduce the new 
 and somewhat vapid notice of his being 
 well aware of those facts of which it may be 
 assumed as a matter of course that he could 
 not be ignorant. The Ap. does not want 
 to prove that Abraham was in his sound 
 senses when he beheved the promise, but 
 that he was so strong in faith as to be able 
 to overleap all difficulties in its way. The 
 erasure of ov seems to have been occasioned 
 by the use of και instead of ονί'ε before 
 τήν ιέκηωσιν. — And the following ιέ, with- 
 out being strongly adversative, falls well 
 into its place — ' He took no account of, &c. 
 
 but ' — The rendering, ' And he did 
 
 not, being weak in faith, take account of, 
 &c.' (omitting οΰ, and making μη the ruling 
 neg. particle of the clause), is ungramma- 
 tical : οΰ would be required. — Abraham did 
 indeed feel and express the difficulty (Gen. 
 xvii. 17), but his faith overcame it, and he 
 ceased to regard it. But most probably 
 Paul here refers only to Gen. χ v. 5, (», where 
 his belief was implicit and uiujuestioning. 
 €κατ. ΤΓου] He was 99, Gen. xvii. 
 1. 24,— and Sarah, 90, ib. ver. 1 7. 
 20.] On if, see above. ' But with regard 
 to (ref.) the promise of God he doubted 
 not through unbelief— (l)e Wet tu thinks 
 from the analogy of ττιστείιειν εις τι, — 
 that, εις τ. ίπ. is perhaps the imniediatc 
 object of ειακρίνεσϋαι : q. d. ' did not dis- 
 believe in the promise of God'), but was
 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ Ρ£2ΜΑΙ0ΥΣ. 
 
 IV 
 
 - 21 
 
 «cat τΓΛηροψοοηυίΐς υτί ο eni]y- 
 ΟΙΟ και ελο* 
 
 " όους ^οζαν τω Ο 
 
 -νελται δυνατός ίστιν και ττοι-ηται. "" όιο και eAoyiautj 
 αυτω " εις ^ικαιοσυνην, ουκ εγ()ό(|)^J δε δι αυτόν μόνον 
 
 ΟΤΙ " ελογισθ»ί αυτω, ^ α\λα και δι ίψας, οις μέλλει 
 " λογι'Ζ^ετθαι, τοις ^ ττιστίνουσιν ^ εττι τον ^ eynpavTa 
 Ίησοϋν τον κυριον ήμ,ων εκ νξκρων, ος ^ παριοόϋη δια 
 
 δια την '' δικαιωσιν 
 
 [ήσουν τον κυριον ημών εκ νεκρών, 
 τα παραπτώματα ημών και η-^ίρυη 
 
 20. Eph. τ. 25. 
 
 U LukexTii.18. 
 
 John ix. 24. 
 
 Josh. Tii. lU. 
 V — eh. xiv. ft. 
 
 (2 Tim. iv. .1, 
 
 17. Lukei. 1 
 
 only.) Eccles, 
 
 Tiii. 11. 
 w = sisin. act., 
 
 Heb. xii. 20 
 
 nnly pa»•.. 
 
 Gal. ill. 19. 
 
 2 Maoc. iv. 
 
 27. 1 aor. 
 
 James i. 12al. 
 WW— Phil. iii. 
 
 «. ch. i. 24. 
 
 yAct.iix. 42. 'ΐμ^ν. 
 
 xi. 17 al. ζ — Matt. X. 8. xi. 5. Isa. xxvi. 19. a = 1 Cor. xi. 23. Gal. ii 
 
 b Malt. vi. 14. Ps. xviii. 12. Ezek. xviii. 26. c ch. v. IS only t. Lcvit. xxiv. 22. 
 
 copt). — τη αττιστ. om seth. — aWa B. — ί5νναμω9η FG.— 21. και bef ττληρ. om (an un- 
 necessary : but the repetitions of και are characteristic) FG E.') (not D as in Scholz) 
 it V lat-ff (not Aug Ruf-Leo). — ο om 44.-22. και om BD'FG g Syr copt ar-erp : ins 
 (MSS) d e V syr al Thdrt Tlil Oec Ambrst Jul (in Aug) Sedul.— 23. om ΙΠ.— μόνον δι 
 avrov DEFG ν it, tantum propter ipsnm solum Ambrst. — at end add ίΐς ^ικαιοσυνην 
 Ό*Ε 0'3 al d e ν ed Syr ar-erp Cyr Chr Till Ruf Ambrst Sedul (Thdrt pref η πιστις). — 
 24. ίγίΐμοντα Α. — ιησουν om 115£eth: ιησ. χριστον 4'). 1 13-marg ν harl- Syr ar-erp 
 Aug Ruf Pelag Ambrst. — 25. bef παρίδοθη ins και 10!)-78 al. — for τα τταραπτ., τας 
 
 αμαρτίας 21 Ambrst : δικαιωσιν ΙΟϋ. — και ΐ]μων om 177•— for ΰικαιωσιν, δικαι- 
 
 οσυνην D'E 17• 73-7- 89'. 93 all lectt 13. 14 Cyr Chron (not Chr Thdrt Thl Oec). 
 
 strong (Ut. ' was strengthened,' ' shewed 
 himself strong') in faith' (dat. of reference, 
 'with regard to faith.' ττ) όττ. and τη 
 πίστ., because both are here strictly ab- 
 stract, being set against one another as op- 
 posites). 8oi)s δόξ. τ. θ.] viz. by 
 
 recognizing His almighty ])ower (see reff., 
 esp. Luke). 21.] τΓληρ., see ch. xiv. 
 
 5, ' being fully persuaded.' βττήγ- 
 
 γελται is not passive (nor b nom.), but 
 middle, and 'God' the subject; 'that, 
 what He has promised. He is able also 
 to perform.' 22.] διό, on account of 
 
 the nature of this faith, which the Ap. has 
 now since ver. 18 been setting forth; — 
 because it was a simple unconditional cre- 
 dence of God and His promise, καί, — be- 
 sides being thus great and admirable, it 
 was reckoned to him for righteousness : — 
 ελογίσθη, viz. το ττιστινσαι τψ Otdj. 
 23 — 25.] Application of that which 
 is said of Abraham, to all believers on 
 Christ. 23.] εγράφη, ' was written,' 
 
 not the more usual yfyi -απται, ' is written :' 
 simly in the parallel, 1 Cor. x. 11; and in 
 our ch. XV. 4. The aorist asserts the design 
 of God's Spirit at the time of penning the 
 words : the perfect may imply that, but 
 more directly asserts the intent of our 
 Scriptures as ve now βηΛ them. ' Now it 
 was not written on his account alone 
 (merely to bear testimony to him and his 
 faith) that it was imputed to him, — but 
 on our account also (for our benefit, to 
 bear testimony to us of the efficacy of faith 
 like his. Observe that cia in the two 
 clauses has not exactly the same sense, — 
 'on his account' being — {I) to celebrate 
 his Jaith, — and (2) on our account —for 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 our proft : see on ver. 25), to whom it 
 (i. e. TO πιστίύίΐν τψ ϋίψ, as ver. 22) 
 shall be imputed ( for righteousness : — 
 μίλ\ίΐ λογ. is a future, as ch. iii. 30 ; 
 V. 19 (Thol.), — not, as Olsh. al., spoken as 
 from the time and standing of Abraham) 
 namely, (to) us who believe on (this spe- 
 cifies the ήμας : and the belief is not a mere 
 historical but a fiducial belief) Him who 
 raised Jesus our Lord from the dead' 
 (the central fact in our redemption, as the 
 procreation of the seed of promise was in 
 the performance of the promise to Abr., 
 see ch. i. 4. 1 Cor. xv. 1 ; and resembling 
 it in the ζωοττοιΓ/σαι rove ηκρούς). 
 24.] €K νεκρών is always anarthrous, as in- 
 deed ΐ'ίκροι sometimes is (for ' the dead ') 
 in classic writers, e. g. Thuc. iv. 14 ; v. 10, 
 end : and see Winer, § 18. 1. The omis- 
 sion may in this phrase be accounted for 
 by the preposition (Middleton, ch. vi. 1); 
 but I suspect Winer is right in looking for 
 the cause of the absence of the art. after 
 prepositions rather in the usage of the par- 
 ticular substantive than in any idiom of 
 general application. 25.] Here we 
 
 have another example of the alliterative use 
 of the same preposition where the meanings 
 are clearly different (see above, vv. 23, 24). 
 Our Lord was delivered up (to death) for or 
 on account of our sins (i. e. because we had 
 sinned) : — He was also raised up (from the 
 dead) for or on account of our justification 
 (i. e. not because we had been, but that we 
 might be justified). This separate state- 
 ment of the great object of the death and 
 resurrection of Christ must be rightly un- 
 derstood, and each member of it not unduly 
 pressed to the exclusion of the other. The
 
 y. 1. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 SSI 
 
 V. 
 
 προς 
 
 1 d 
 
 \.ικαιωΌίντίς ουί' εκ: ττίστεως 
 Θίον δια τοΐι κυρίου Ί\μων 
 
 ' Β'φηνηνίχομεν"'^"''''•'^ 
 
 ,, ' - '^ - e = ch.u. 10 
 
 Ιησού γριστου, ^ rem 
 
 ' ΛΓ ' f = Acts ii. 47. 
 
 xxiv. 16. IJohniii. 21. 
 
 Chap. V. 1. ow om 80. — for ίχομιν, (χωμιτ (see notes) AB (this was ascertained by 
 Tregelles) CDJK 17. 37. 40-8. 80. 113-:i3-5. 15G. 170 all ν it harl^ Syr ar-erp copt Chr 
 Thdrt Cyr Dam Till Oec Ruf Pelag Oros Aug Julian Ambrst-text Cassiod : txt E(e sil) 
 
 great complex event by which our justifica- 
 tion (death unto sin and new birth unto 
 righteousness) has been made possible, may 
 be stated in one word as the glorifica- 
 tion of Christ. But this glorification con- 
 sisted of two main parts, — His Death, and 
 His Resurrection. In the former of these, 
 He was made a sacrifice for sin : in the latter. 
 He elevated our humanity into the partici- 
 pation of that Resurrection-life, which is 
 also, by union with Him, the life of every 
 justified believer. So that, when taking the 
 two apart, the Death of Christ is more 
 properly placed in close reference to foi•- 
 giveness of sins, — His Resurrection, to_;wi- 
 tifcation unto life everlasting. And thus 
 the Ap. treats these two great events, here 
 and in the succeeding chapters. But he 
 does not view them respectively as the 
 causes, exclusively of one another, of for- 
 giveness and justification : e. g. (1) ch. v. 9, 
 we are said to be justified by His blood, 
 and 2 Cor. v. 21 God made Him sin for us, 
 that we might become the righteousness of 
 God in Him : and (2) 1 Cor. xv. 17, if 
 Christ is not raised, we are yet in our sitis. 
 So that, though these great events have 
 their separate propriety of reference to the 
 negative and positive sides of our justifica- 
 tion, the one of them cannot be treated 
 separately and exclusively of the other, any 
 more than can the negative side of our jus- 
 tification, the non-imputation of our sin, 
 without the positive, the imputation of 
 God's righteousness. — It will be seen from 
 what I have said above that I cannot agree 
 with Bp. Horsley's view, that as our trans- 
 gressions were the cause of Jesus being 
 delivered up, so our justification must be 
 the cause of His being raised again. Such 
 a pressing of the same sense on διή is not 
 necessary, when Paul's manifold usages of 
 the same preposition are considered : and 
 the regarding our justification (in the sense 
 here) as a fact past, is inconsistent with the 
 very next words, ίικαιωΟίντ^ς ίκ πίστεως, 
 which shew that not the objective fact, but 
 its sulijeclive realization, is here meant. — 
 In these words (of ver. 25) the Ap. intro- 
 duces the great subject of chaps, v. — viii., 
 — DEATH, as connected with SIN, — and 
 LIFE, as connected with RIGHTEOUS- 
 NESS. Tlic various ramifications of this 
 subject sec in the headings below. 
 
 V. ll.J TUK ULlibSED CONSEaUENCKS 
 
 OF JUSTIFICATION BY FAITH. 1.] It is 
 
 difficult to resist the strong MS authority 
 for the reading ίχωμιν in this verse : and yet 
 every internal consideration tends to impugn 
 it. If admitted, the sentence is hortatory. 
 —^ Being then justified by faith, let us have 
 peace with God.' (This is the only admis- 
 sible sense of the first person subjunctive 
 in an affirmative sentence like the present. 
 The usage is an elliptical one : 'ΐωμιν, ' that 
 we go,' i. e. ' it is time,' or in an address, 
 'permit, &c. that we go.' Thus Od. χ. 77, 
 (Χΰιομίν άι•ά άστυ: II. χ. 450, 'ίδωμ', 
 ίίην' epya τίτυκται. See other exx. in 
 Kuhner, Gramm. § 463. The deliberative 
 sense, attempted to be given by Dr. Tre- 
 gelles (see Kitto's Journal of Bibl. Lit. No. 
 xiv. p. 405 ff.) can only have place in an 
 interrogative or dnbitaiive clause, and every 
 example given by Air. Green, whom he cites 
 for his supposed sense, as well as by Kuhner 
 (§ 4(!4), is of this kind. Besides, to call 
 the sense ' we ought to have,' deliberative, 
 seems a misnomer.) But how can man be 
 exhorted to have peace with God .'' To be 
 reconciled to God, he may, 2 Cor. v. 20 : 
 but of this there is no mention here, and 
 having (been allowed to believe in and 
 enjoy) peace ivith God, depends on, not 
 our reconciliation to Him, not any thing 
 subjective in ourselves, but the objective 
 fact of His reconciliation to us. If, as 
 some say, ίχωμιν = κατίχωμίν, Heb. χ. 
 23, the article would be required before 
 ti'oi'/i'Tji/, and (perhaps) before προς or cui. 
 Besides which there are two objections in 
 the form of the sentence to this reading : 
 (1) ΐχομίν is coupled by κοί {Si ού και) 
 to ίσχήκαμίΐ•, and this connexion necessi- 
 tates, in my view, that the first verb should 
 assert a fact, as the second undoubtedly 
 does. Had the former verb been ΐχωμίΓ, 
 we should hardly have found the και where 
 it is. (2) If ίχωμβν be hortatory, καυχώ- 
 μίθα, in vv. 2 and 3, must be so likewise : 
 (for if we are exhorted to the lesser degree 
 of confidence, (Ιμηνην txfw, such exhorta- 
 tion can hardly bo founded on the existence 
 already of the greater degree, κανχαηΟαι 
 K.r.X.) which, both as to sense and con- 
 struction, is very improbable. — I believe an 
 account of the reading is to be sought, as 
 .in I Cor. xv. 4!). in a tendency of those 
 who transcribed some of our MSS to give 
 such assertions a hortatory, or, where inter-
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 ν. 
 
 όο^,ης τυυ 
 
 i^u!^VO/,fyt.^ δι' ου κα\ ^ tw 
 ταντην εν r) 
 
 εοΰ. ου μόνον of, «λλα και κανγωμεθα 
 
 ταις "* ΘΧΊφεσιν, απάτες οτι η '" ΘΧιφις " υπομονην 
 
 k"'f-7(ir KaTipyaCf^rai, η οε νπομονΊ] ^ οοκιμην, η οε ' όοκιμη 
 
 1,1 ελπίοα η οε ελπις ou ' καταισγυνει, οτι -η αγαττ»? του 
 
 θεοϋ ^ έκκεγνται εν ταις καροιαις ημών cia πνεύματος 
 
 α: 
 
 h — ντ. 17, L>U 
 
 ΰ1. ch. ti. 1 
 
 al. fr. 
 i = 1 Cor. XV. 1 
 
 2 Cor. i. i;4. 
 j cli. ii. 17 {w. » 
 
 i^)w. έπ< εν 
 
 diul dat. here 
 
 ττροςα-γω-γην εσ-χηκαμεν εις την \apiv abcd 
 
 εστιικαμεν, και καυγ^ωμευα επ εΛπιοι της JK 
 3 1 
 
 ρ 2 Cor. ϋ 9. viii 3. ίχ. 13. χϋί. 3. Ρΐύΐ. ϋ. 22 only t. q absol., cli. ix. 33. χ. Π. 
 
 r =■ cli. viii. 3<J. 2 Cor. xiii. 13. s — Acl.s ii. 17. Joel ii. 28. t Act.•* xi. 28 reft'. 
 
 tn -> Matt. xiii. 
 
 21 al. 
 11 ch. ii. 7 rcfl". 
 ο cli. iv. IS rcD 
 xxviii. lU. 
 
 FG all (appy) syr (appy) (slav .') (not seth appy) Sedul Ambrstj. — 2. aft δι ου om και 40 
 Syr asth : vvv Thdrt. — rec aft ισχι/κ. ins τη πίπτει (rnarghial gloss), with CJK &c vs3 
 Thdi-t Cln-i Oec lat-ff: also w τη πίστη A 93. 124 al Tit ΟΗγ; Thl : txt BU(E.')FG d' 
 e g aeth Ambrst, (Aug Hil.'). — for χοριν, χαραν Α.—καυχωμίνοι Β (Bentl) 4- {hut 
 perhaps it belongs to next ve7•). — from 1st καυχωμίθα to 2nd om 177• — t(p D'FG. — aft 
 δυζης ins filioruni ν Pelag Sedul Vig Ambrst (not Ruf as Wetst). — 3. ου μον. ct τούτο D'. 
 — κανχωμίνοι (Β? see on ver 2) C 80 Origj Tert (see ver 11). — 4. for δοκιμην, δικαι- 
 
 rogative, ά deliberative form: thus we have 
 σωθησώμίθα ver. 10, — ζί^σωμίρ ch. vi. 2, — 
 πισηύωμίΐ' or πιστίύσωμιΐ' ch. vi. 8, — 
 νπακούσατί ch. vi. 17, — προςεΰζωμαι (bis) 
 1 Cor. xiv. 15, — πήθωμεν 2 Cor. v. 11, — 
 ττιστεύωμιν John iv. 42, — σννζήσωμίν and 
 συμβασιλεΰσωμεν 2 Tim. ii. 11, 12. — The 
 whole passage is declaratory of the con- 
 sequences flowing from justification by 
 faith, and does not exhort, but assert. 
 Nor does the place for exhortation arrive, 
 till these consequences have been in the 
 fullest and freest manner set forth, — in- 
 deed so fully and freely, that the objection 
 arising from their supposed abuse has first 
 to be answered. I have therefore retained 
 the indicative — ' Being therefore justified 
 (' having been justified :' — it is an act past 
 on the Christian, not like sanctification, an 
 abiding and increasing work) by (as the 
 ground) faith, we (believers in Christ) have 
 peace (' reconcilement ;' the opposite of 
 οργή, see ver. i)) with (' in regard of,' see 
 reff.) God through (by means of) our Lord 
 Jesus Christ.' With regard to the nature of 
 this peace (=: state of reconciliation, ' no 
 more condemnation,' as ch. viii. l)see above, 
 on the reading ίχωμ{ J/. 2.] 'Through 
 
 whom we have also (so δώ καί, ch. i. 24 ; 
 iv. 22, where καί serves to shew the co- 
 herence and likelihood of that which is as- 
 serted—answering almost to our ' as might 
 be expected') had our access (the per- 
 sons spoken of having come to the Father 
 by Christ, — see Eph. ii. 18, — the access is 
 treated of as a thing past. Ty πίστει and 
 tv Ty πίπτει apjjcar to have been glosses, 
 explanatory of the method of access. This 
 access would normally take place in bap- 
 tism) into this grace (namely, the grace of 
 justification, ajiprchended and held fast sub- 
 jectively [from what follows] : not, to πάν- 
 των ίπιτυχείν των Sta βαπτίσματος αγα- 
 
 θών [Chrys. al.], which is inconsistent with 
 iv y έστίικ. : not, ' the Gospel' [Fritz.], 
 for the same reason ; not, ' hope of blessed- 
 ness' [Beza], for U\z.t follows : least of all 
 ' the grace of the apostolic calling ' [Sem- 
 ler], which is quite beside the purpose) 
 wherein we stand (see parallels in reff. : 
 i. e. abide accepted and acquitted unth 
 God ; see also 1 Cor. x. 12, and ch. xi. 20) ; 
 and (couple to είρήν. εχομεν, not to iv y 
 έστήκ.) we triumph in the hope (καυχά- 
 ομαι is found with iπί, iv, περί, υπέρ, and 
 [Thol.] with an ace. of the object. In Heb. 
 iii. 6 we have το κανχημα της ελπίδος) of 
 the glory of God' (of sharing God's glory 
 by being with Christ in His kingdom, John 
 xvii. 22, see reff.). 3.] ' And not 
 
 only so (not only do we triumph in hope, 
 which has regard to the future"), but we 
 triumph in (not amidst ; the Θλ. is the 
 ground of triumph) tribulations, knowing 
 (because we know) that (our) tribulation 
 works endurance (supjiosing, i. e. we re- 
 main firm under it) and (our) endurance, 
 approval (of our faith and trust, 2 Cor. ii. 
 i) ; ix. 13: not, 'proof \_δοκιμησία'], as 
 Grot. ; nor ' experience,' as E. V., — ' δο- 
 κιμή est qualitas ejus, qui est δόκιμος.' 
 Bengel, — the result of proof), and (our) 
 approval (fresh) hope ; and (our) hope 
 (not for αντη ή ελπ. as Olsh.) shames 
 (us) not (by disappointing us ; ' mocks 
 us not ') ; because God's love (not ' the 
 love of God,' i. e. man's love for God, 
 — as Theodoret, and even Aug., misled 
 by the Latin ; see reff., and compare the 
 explicit ttjv έαυτοϋ άγάπην εις ι)μάς 
 (which answers to this in ver. 8) is (has 
 been) poured out {' effus a,' not 'diffusa' 
 [Vulg.], which latter word perhaps misled 
 Aug., owing to whose mistake the true in- 
 terp. was lost for some centuries, although 
 held by Orig., Chrys., and Ambrose. See
 
 2—8. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 S33 
 
 6 ''. 
 
 αγίου του όοϋετ'τος ημιν. en yup Ύριστυς όντων ημών n=hereoniy. 
 
 ασθίνων " κατά καιρυν ''" νττ£ξ) " ασίβων απίθανων' χ^ϊ,^ΐ^^'ρ^. 
 
 ' ^ μόλΐί 
 
 μόλις γαρ υπίρ οικαιου τις αττοΰανειται' υττερ yap v = he, 
 τον ayauov ταγα τις και τολμά αποϋανειν " συν- ,3 
 
 = here only. 
 " ην. 4.J 
 Nam. ix. 
 
 w =" John vi. 
 
 ιστησιν όί την εαυτού α-ναπην εις ημάς, οτι ετι αμαρ- ϋΐ.χ. is. 
 
 ' ^ Luke XX ϋ. 
 
 19al.fr. χ — ch. iv. 5 reff. y Acts xiv. 1ί>. χχτϋ. 7, 8, 16. 1 Pet. iv. 18 oaly. Prov. xi. 31. 
 
 ζ Phucm. 15 onlyt• a = 2 Cor. x. 12. b ch. iii. Γι refl". c ch. iii. 7 reli. 
 
 SI 
 
 οηυνην 17• — 6. for tri yan, u yc B, £( yap copt ar-erp Isid Aug, ει if J Syr, εις τι yap 
 D-(not D^ nor D^)FG, ut quid enfw it ν Iren Faustin al : txt A(appy)CD'D^EK mss 
 (appy) syr (slav.') Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec (Epiph [Marcion?] Isid-ms) Ruf-test- 
 comm. — aft ασθίνων, ins tri ABCD'FG (notD^apj)y) 31. 137 it ν syrr copt (arr seth om 
 former £Γΐ) Epiph (Marcion.') Isid ms Dam Iren Faustin al (not Ruf-text and comm) : 
 Cyr Thdrt-comm confound this with ver 8. So that tri occ 2ce in ACD^ 31. 137 syr 
 Dam Epiph al {see note). — for ασιβων, ΐ]μων 100-78 al. — 7. om Iren : aft ver 8 in Orig. 
 — for δίκαιον, aSiKov S\T• ar-erp. — yap (2nd) om J 2. 32. 62 al lect 18: £t 238. — και 
 τολμά τις lect 1. — 8. om 71• — for ίΐς 7]μας, tv ημιν {hi nobis) it ν Iren lat-ff. — rec aft 
 ημάς ins ο θίος {supplementary insertn, as is shewn by the follg varr in its position), 
 with ACK.' &c copt Chr Oec : bef ης ημάς DEFGJ 7G• 124 al it ν syr Dial Thdrt Chr 
 (Mtt's mSj) Thl Iren Aug al : bef δε arm : transp freely Syr al Faustin al : om, as in txt, 
 B. — £rt om 109 arr Dial: for «n, (i Syr Chr: n ίτι D^FG lat-ff: και βτι slav {quo- 
 niam, si cum adhuc pecc. essemus &c (omg ovr, ver 9) d e v-ms tol Cypr Hil Aug; Ruf 
 Pelag Ambrst al-latt. — for αμαρτ., ασθενών arm-edd. — ημών όντων J Chr. — bef χριστός, 
 
 Trench on St. Augustine, ch. v. p. 89: — i. e. 
 'richly imparted') in our hearts {iv may 
 be taken pregnantly, ίκκίχ. εις και μίνει 
 iv, — ov better, denotes the locality where 
 the outpouring takes place, — the heart 
 being the seat of our love, and of appre- 
 ciation and sympathy with God's love) by 
 means of the Holy Spirit (who is the Out- 
 pourer, John xvi. 14. 1 Cor. ii. 9, 10) who 
 was given to us ' (Olsh. rightly refers the 
 aorist ])art. to the Pentecostal effusion of 
 the Holy Spirit). — ' Prima hsec est in hac 
 tractatione Spiritus Sancti mentio. Nimi- 
 rum ad hunc usque terminum quum per- 
 ductus est homo, operationem Sp. Sancti 
 notanter denique sentit.' Bengel. 
 6.] The text here is in great confusion, — 
 see var. readd. The whole seems to have 
 arisen from the ecclesiastical portion having 
 begun χριστός 'όντων ημών ασθενών ίτι . . . 
 When this found its way into the text, ετι 
 was repeated. This offended the tran- 
 scribers: but the first ίτι could not be erased, 
 because yap followed ; it was therefore con- 
 jecturally emended to ιί (and yi'ip to γέ as 
 in B, or ck as in J), or ιίς τι, — some re- 
 taining ετι in both places. The place of 
 ετι is often, in the case of absolutes, at the 
 beginning of a sentence, with the subject of 
 the sentence between it and the word or 
 words to which it applies ; so ετι αντοϋ 
 λαλονντης. Matt. xii. 4(ί, — tri ci αντυϋ 
 μιικρίΊν απέχοντος, Luke xv. 20, &c. — 
 ' For Christ when we were yet weak 
 (' powerless lor good;' — or even stronger 
 than tliat : — there seems in this verse to be 
 a tacit reference to Ezek. xvi. — See esp. vv• 
 
 7, 8 of that chap, in the LXX, — σν δε ησθα 
 γνμνη και άσχημονονσα .... και διίίλΟυν 
 δια σου και "ιδον σε, καΊ ιδού καιρός συν • . . 
 και διεττ'ετασα τας πτ(pvyάς μου ίττι σε, 
 και ίκάλυψα τήν άσχημυσύνην σον, και 
 ιομοσά σοι' κα'ι ιίςηΧθιν εΐ' δκι^'ήκί^ μετά 
 σοΐι, Xtyft Ki'pioc), at the appointed time 
 (comp. reff. and Gal. iv. 4, and καιρός in 
 the quotation above) Christ died for (' ou 
 behalf of,' see reff.) ungodly men ' (not 
 νπερ ημών, because the Ap. wishes to bring 
 out fully by this strong antithesis, which he 
 enlarges on in the next verses, the great- 
 ness of the divine Love to man). 
 7.] The greatness of this Love, of Christ's 
 death on behalf of the impious, is brought 
 out by shewing that there is none such 
 among men, nay that such a self sacrifice, — 
 not unexampled where a good man, one 
 loving his fellow men and loved by them, 
 is to be rescued, — is hardly found to occur 
 on behalf of the pious and just. — 'For 
 hardly will any one die on behalf of a 
 just man (masc, — not neuter, ' for justice ' 
 or ' rights. 's sake,' as Jer., Erasm., Luth., 
 al. : for the matter in hand is Christ's death 
 on behalf of persons .•) — for (this second 
 ' for ' is exceptive, and answers to ' but 1 do 
 not press this without exception,' under- 
 stood) on behalf of the good man (the art. 
 as pointing him out generally, as in the expr., 
 ' the fool,' ' the wise man,' ' the righteous,' 
 ' the wicked ') perhaps {τ•''χα opens a pos- 
 sibility which μόλις doses) One is even 
 found to venture (the ])res. implies lial)itii- 
 alily — it may occur here and there) to die.' — 
 The distinction here made between δίκαιης
 
 834 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ΡΩΜΑΙΟΥ: 
 
 V. 
 
 Α( 
 
 >ί 
 
 ουν 
 
 νπΐξ) ημών απίΟανίν. πο\\(ο 
 
 μαΧΧον ' ζικαιωΟίντίς νυν εν τω αϊματι αυτού 
 
 σωΟησόμίΟα δι αυτοΰ απύ της ορ-γης' ^" ει yap Ιγθρυι 
 M«tt. )ΐι. 7. „ ,,/ -Λ-^< -η' _.- 
 
 ch.i 18. Οίτες κατιιΛλθ7»?Μεΐ' τω υεω όια του υανατου του υιυυ 
 
 ] Ccir. VII. Π. < ' <• ■• 
 
 ύοη?ϊ'}. αυτοΰ, ττολλω μάλλον ^ KaTaWayivTeg σωθησυμίΟα ΐν 
 
 Ilk'' ?'^'\\^ ^1 
 
 11 ^.. ..^,.^,. Ac άλλα fcai 
 
 (1 Acts xiii. 39. TwAwv οΐ'των ημών γριστος 
 
 1 Cor. ir. 4. , „ , ^' 
 
 vi.ll. Gal. - -λ Λ _-. " 
 
 iu. 1). ν. 4. 
 e = Act.iii. 40 
 
 M«lt. i 21. 
 f M«tt. iii. 7. 
 
 2 Cor. 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 3».) 2 Mace. T^ ' 2[(t>r? aVTOl) 
 
 h — Acts xi. 14. Jude 23 (rec). Ezok. xviii. 2: 
 
 ου μόνον ό£, αΛΛα και ' καυ•χωμ(νοι 
 
 i = 2 Cor. iv. Ill, 11, 12. k ver. 3. 1 ch. ii. 17 rcff. 
 
 ins Kara καιρόν v-edd arm-cdd Thdrt Aug, Pelag : κατ7ΐ\\α•γημ(ν τω θιω δια του 
 θανάτου του υιού αντου syr : χριστός om lect 12. — 9. ουν om D'FG 43. 52 (al.') vss 
 Dial Iren Cypr al (see on ίτι, ver 8). — νυν om 'Λ',). 41 (al.') Dial. — αυτού om 238. — 
 ηωϋΐ]σομ(Οα tv τη ζωη αυτόν 178 : σωΟ. to σωθ. below om 10!)'. — «πο Τί;ς• οργής om 
 178 : απο της μιλλουπης κολασηος 91'^. — 10. om 178. — Α omits from τω θιοι to τω θ{ω 
 ver 11.— τω θεω om 3!) lect 12 Praedest. — του υιού οιη ί)3. — τωθησωμίθα !)3 (.see on 
 εχιομιν, ver 1). — 11. ου μονοί' St τούτο D'(E το? or tovto?)FG d g arm ar-pol Ambrst. 
 —for καυχωμινοι, καυχωμίθα J 37. 44. 80. 121-30-32-34-38-42-50-55-70-78-79 238 all 
 
 and αγαθός, is also found in Cicero, de 
 Oft', iii. 15, 'Si vir bonus is est qui prodest 
 quibus potest, nocet nemini, recte justum 
 virum, boniim non facile reperiemus.' (But 
 some edd. read ' istum viruin bonum.') — ■ 
 The interp. which makes ί'ικαιος and αγα- 
 θός refer to the same man, and the second 
 clause = ' I do not say that such a thing 
 may not sometimes occur,' is very vapid, 
 and loses siglit of the antithesis between 
 δίκαιος, and άίικος (= άσφης t= αμαρ- 
 τωλός). 8.] ' But (as distinguished 
 from human examples) He (i. e. God. The 
 omission of ύ Otoe, which critical principles 
 render necessary, is in keeping with the 
 perfectly general way in which the contrast 
 is put, merely with τις, not ανθρώπων τις. 
 The subject is supplied from )'/ άγάττη τοϋ 
 θίοϋ, ver. 5) gives proof of ('establishes;' 
 (reft".) — not ' commends ') His own love 
 {own, as distinguished from that of men in 
 ver. 7) towards us, in that while we 
 were yet (as opposed to νΰν in the next 
 ver.) sinners (= ασθενών = άσεβων, and 
 opposed to δίκαιος and αγαθός, ver. 7) 
 Christ died for us.' 9—11.] The Ap. 
 further s/ieivs the blessed fruits of justifica- 
 tion, viz. salvation, both from urrath, and 
 \vith life. The argument proceeds from 
 the beginning of the chapter : but the con- 
 nexion, as so frequent with St. Paul, is 
 immediately with the parenthetical sen- 
 tences just preceding. — ' Much more then 
 (if He died for us when sinners, a fortiori 
 will lie save us now that we are righteous 
 by virtue of that His death) having now 
 been justified by His blood (see remarks 
 on ch. iv. 25), we shall be saved by Him 
 from God's (force of the art.) wrath.' 
 10.] The same is substantiated in another 
 form : ' we were enemies (see below) when 
 He died and reconciled us : much more now 
 that we have been reconciled, and He lives, 
 shall we by His Ufe be saved.' — ' For if, 
 
 being enemies {Ιχθροι may either be active, 
 as ch. viii. 7• Col. i. 21. Eph. ii. 15, haters 
 of God: or passive, as ch. xi. 28, — 'haled 
 hy God.' But here the latter meaning 
 alone can apply, for the Ap. is speaking of 
 the Death of Ciu'ist and its effects as ap- 
 plied to all time, not merely to those be- 
 lievers who then lived : and those unborn 
 at the death of Christ could not have been 
 εχθροί in the active sense), we were recon- 
 ciled (κατα\\άσσεσθαι τινι also may be 
 taken of giving up anger against any one, 
 — see 1 Cor. vii. 11, and Jos. Antt. vi. 7, 
 οϋ γαρ εώρα τον θεόν διαλλαττόμίνον, — 
 or of being received into favour by any one, 
 — see 1 Kings xxix. 4, iv τίνι διαΧλαγή- 
 σεται ούτος τψ κυριψ αΰτοϋ ; and Jos. Antt. 
 V. 2. 8, διαλυσάμενος τάς μ^μφεις, καταΧ- 
 λάττεται προς αυτήν, — the latter of which 
 meanings, were received into favour v)ith 
 God, must for the reason above given be 
 here adopted) to God by means of the 
 Death of His Son (this great fact is further 
 explained and insisted on, in the rest of the 
 chapter) much more, having been recon- 
 ciled (but here comes in the assumption 
 that the corresponding subjective part of 
 reconciliation has been accomplished, viz. 
 justification by faith : comp. 2 Cor. v. 19, 
 θεός ην tv χριστφ κόσμον καταλλάσσων 
 Ιαντώ .... δεήμεθα ΰπΐρ χριστού, καταλ- 
 λάγητί τω θ€ω. Both these, the objective 
 reception into God's favour by the death of 
 Christ, and the subjective appropriation, 
 by faith, of that reception, are included) 
 we shall be saved by means of His Life ' 
 (not here that which he now does on our 
 behalf, but simply the fact of His Life, so 
 much enlarged on in ch. vi. : and our 
 sharing in it). 11,] A further step 
 
 still — not only has the reconciled man con- 
 fidence that he shall escape God's wrath, 
 but triumphant confidence, — joyful ho]ie in 
 God. — 'But (abev) not only so, but ([on-
 
 9—12. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 335 
 
 δι' 
 
 του κνοιον ημών Ιησου yoiarov, di ου >" «^ll• ^'• i^• 
 
 "> ' ' Λ.•• ' 2 Cor. τ. 18, 
 
 19 only. (Isa. 
 ix.n.) aSiacc. 
 
 V 211 
 
 εν τω θίω ^ια του κνοιον Ίίμων Ι 
 νυν την '^ καταλλαγην ίΧάβομίν. 
 
 ίΐΛ(ο τούτο ωςπίρ οι εΐΌς ανυοωπον η αμαρτία εις η = Actsxxiv. 
 τον κοσμον ίίςηΧθζν, και eta της αμαρτίας ο θάνατος, ρ = Α«"τίί'8. 
 
 \ ο " ' ' ' α ' q ? ' Λ ί1 Γ ' , ' ■? ' ch. χί. 26. 
 
 και ^ όντως ίΐς παντας αννοωπους ^ omAifev εφ ω πάντες icor. χι. 28 
 
 * * *■ al. 
 
 q Luke ii. 1 
 
 Ai;ts ix. 38. xL ly al. 
 
 lect 12 al it ν arm slav Thl lat-ff: καυχωμιν FG. — κσί την καταλλ. lect 12. — 12. Cia 
 TOVTo om Syr: και ar-erp. — for αιθη., θάνατον 'ό7. — rijv αμαρτιαν 2. — bef ούτως om 
 και 4. 124 al v-ms Cassiodj. — ανθρ. ora 62. — rec aft ανθρ. ins ο θάνατος (marginal 
 gloss specifying the subj of διηλθιν, as is shewn by the varr), with ABC &c vss Thl Oec 
 Aug (often) al: aft διη\θ. Syr arm Chr Thdrt : bef £ΐς syr* : varly transposed in copt 
 al : om as in txt DEFG (J2 al harl it (syr) Aug (often) Ambr PaCj Leo Bed. — ίίςηλθίν 
 
 bern) we also triumph in God fparticip. as 
 the finite verb, see ch. i.v. 28. Winer, § 40. 2) 
 through our Lord Jesus Christ, through 
 whom we have now (not in contrast with 
 the future glory, ' eve7i now,' as Thol. for 
 that would be more plainly expres-ed, — but 
 as in ver. 9) received (our) reconciliation' 
 (to God). 12—19.] The bringing in 
 
 of RECONCILIATION and LIFE by Christ 
 in its analogy to the bringing in of sin 
 and DEATH by Adam. 12.] This verse 
 
 is one of acknowledged difficulty. The two 
 questions meeting us directly are (I) To 
 what does l^ά τυντο refer .' (2) ίοςτηρ, 
 ' like as,' may introduce the first member 
 of a comparison, the second being to be 
 discovered ; or may introduce the second, 
 the first having to be discovered. I shall 
 endeavour to answer both questions in con- 
 nexion. (1)1 conceive Cin τοντο to refer 
 to that blessed state of confidence and hope 
 just described : ' on this account,' here 
 meaning, ' quse cum ita sint :' ' this state of 
 things, thus brought about, will justify the 
 following analogy.' Thus we must take 
 ωςπιρ, either (a) as beginning the com- 
 parison, and then supply, ' so by Christ in 
 His Resurrection came justification into 
 the world, and by justification, life ;' or (3) 
 as concluding the comparison, and supply 
 before ir, ' it was,' or ' Christ wrought.' 
 This latter method seems to me far the 
 best. For none of the endeavours of comm. 
 to su])ply the second limb of the com- 
 parison from the following verses have suc- 
 ceeded : and we can hardly suppose such an 
 ellipsis, when the next following compari- 
 son (ver. 16) is rather a weakening than a 
 strengthening the analogy. We have ex- 
 ample for this use of ώςττερ, in Matt. xxv. 
 14 and of κηΟοίς-, Gal. iii. 10. — 'Conse- 
 quently (the method of God's procedure 
 in introducing life by righteousness resem- 
 bled the iiitrodiictioii of death by sin : 'it 
 was ') like as by one man (the Ap. regards 
 the man as involving generic succession 
 and transmitting the corrupt seed of sin, 
 
 not the woman : but when he speaks of 
 the personal share which each had in the 
 transgression, I Tim ii. 14, he says, ' Adam 
 was not deceived, but the woman being de- 
 ceived was in the transgression '), sin (as a 
 POWER ruling over mankind, see ch. iii. 9, 
 and ver. 21, — partly as a princi})le which 
 exists in us all, and develops itself in our 
 conduct, partly as a state in which we are 
 involved ; but the idea here must not be 
 confined [Calv.] to original sin, as it 
 reaches much wider, to sin both original 
 and actual : nor to the habit of sinning [as 
 Olsh.] : nor is it merely the propensity to 
 sin [as Rothe] : nor is sin pei'sonified 
 merely, as in ch. vii. 8. 11) entered into 
 the world (not ' esse coepit,' ' primum com- 
 missa est,' as Reiche, Fritz., and Meyer : 
 but literally, — ' entered into,' ' gained ac- 
 cess into,' the moral world, — for sin in- 
 volves moral responsibility. So Gal. iii. 23, 
 TTpo τον δ' tKQiiv την ττίητιν, ' before the 
 faith came in ') and by means of sin (as 
 the appointed penalty for sin. Gen. ii. 17 ; 
 iii. 19) death (primarily, but not only, 
 physical death : as αμαρτία, so θάνατος, is 
 general, including the lesser in the greater, 
 i. e. spiritual and eternal death. See ch. 
 vi. 16. 21 ; vii. 10; viii. 6. 2 Cor. vii. 10), 
 and thus (by this entering in of sin and 
 death ; i. e. in fact, by this connexion of sin 
 and death, as appears by ίφ' ψ πάΐ'τες 
 ί'ΐμηρτον) death (whether ό θάν. be 
 genuine or not, death is the subject of 
 CiriXQiv) extended to all men (see reff. 
 De W. well says that πάντ. άνθρ. ditt'ers 
 from κόσμον, as the concrete part from 
 the abstract whole, and δάρχ. from ΰς- 
 ερχεσθαι, as the going from house to house 
 differs from the entering a town. — Obs., 
 that although the subject of διηλθεν is 
 plainly only death, not sin and death, yet 
 the spreading of sin over all men is taken 
 for granted, partly in the οϋτως•, partly in 
 the following clause), because {Ιψ φ, lit. 
 ' on condition that,' which meaning, if 
 rightly appUed, suits the case in hand.
 
 οοο 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 V. 
 
 s-ch. i. 13 al. 
 t I'hilem. 18 
 
 13 s 
 
 "Xi** Ί^Ρ ^'^Ι^ου αμαρτία ην ίν κοσμώ, abcd 
 
 Ίΐμαξ>τον 
 '. 17,21. <ιΙΛαρτια οε ουκ eAAoyiirai μΐ] οντος νομού, άλλα JK 
 
 oftime, Matt. " {Οασίλευσευ ο θάνατος απο Αοοιι ^ uiyoi Μωυσεως και 
 
 χιϋ. 30. Acts 1^ ^ ^ . , \ -. e 
 
 fTim.".'i4 "'" fTTt τους μη αμαρτησαντας ^ έπι τω * ομυιωματι της 
 παοαβάσίως Αδάμ, ος εστίν '^ τύπος του μέλλοντος, 
 
 ych.vi. 5. (Phil. ϋ. 7.) ζ ch. iv. 15 reff. a — 1 Cur. χ. 0. 
 
 w Lake i. 33 
 xix. 4, Ϊ7. 
 X Luke i. ftil. Neh. vii. «3. Ezr. ii. 01 
 b = Mrttt. xii. 32. Actsxziv.uaal. 
 
 38 73 al Slav.— 13, jj αμαρτ. (1st) 38. G2 lect 19 Orig Thl : txt (MSS vss) Clem Chr 
 Thdrt al. — ου« j/v slav-ms. — fv τω κοσ. 38. ^2. 91. 114-15-79 al Thdrt. — for St, γαρ 
 52-5 e Orig Cyr. — fWoyaro A, (Woytiro 52. 108 al, λίλογισται lect 19: impidabatur 
 V (am liarl' flor &c) g syrr copt aeth arr .slav lat-ff: tv\oynrai 71-7• — 14. rec «λλ : txt 
 BDE &c (but αλλ in foUg \ϋτ).—μίχρις 108.— και om 67= ά.— μη om ύ'2-3-72 lect 18 
 Orig (j or 2•'') Cyr Ruf-expr mss mentd by Ruf Ambr-expr lat-gr-mss mentd by Ambr 
 lat-mss mentd by Aug Tert Cypr al : but ins MSS mss nrly Orig,-edd Ath, Chr Thdrt 
 Cyr-jerus Thl Oec Iren Archel Jer-oft Aug al : and Aug says that omnes ant pane 
 omnes gr-mss have it. — και tTri τω 62 : tv τω Β (Grsb and Scholz : but qu?) Chr Thdrt 
 
 Life depended on a certain condition, 
 viz. obedience ; Death on another, viz. dis- 
 obedience. Mankind have disobeyed : the 
 condition of Death's entrance and diffusion 
 has been fulfilled : Death extended to all 
 men, as a consequence of the fact, that, — 
 posito, that, = because, all have sinned. — 
 Orig., Aug., Bez., and Estius render it as 
 Vulg., ' in quo ' [Adam] : — Chrys., Theo- 
 phyl., Oec, Eisner, ' propter guem:' Grot., 
 'per guem ') all sinned ' (see ch. iii. 23 : — 
 not ' were sinful,' or ' were born in sin,' 
 as Calvin would restrict the meaning : sin, 
 as above remarked, is here, throughout, 
 both original and actual; in the seed, as 
 planted in the nature by the sin of our 
 forefather : and in the fruit, as developed 
 by each conscious responsible individual in 
 his ovra practice. So that Calv.'s argu- 
 ment, — ' hie non agi de actual! peccato, 
 colligere promptum est : quia si reatum 
 quisque sibi arcesseret, quorsum conferret 
 Paulus Adam cum Christo .'' does not 
 apply, and the objection is answered by 
 Paul himself, where he says, distinguishing 
 between the παυάτττωμα and the χάρισμα 
 below, vv. 15, lij, το di χάρισμα £Κ ττολ- 
 λών τταραΐΓτωμάτων £ΐς δικαίωμα. The 
 παράπτωμα was not only that of one, the 
 original cause of the entry of sin, but the 
 often repeated sins of individual men: — nor, 
 ' suffered the punishment of sin,' as Grot. 
 and Chrys., θνητοί yfyovani). — Observe 
 how entirely this assertion of the Ap. con- 
 tradicts the Pelagian or individualistic view 
 of men, that each is a separate creation from 
 God, existing solely on his own exclusive 
 responsibility, — and affirms the Augustinian 
 or traducian view, that all are evolved by 
 God's ajjpointmcnt from an original stock, 
 and though individually responsible, are 
 generically involved in the corruption and 
 condemnation of their original. 13.] 
 
 How, consistently with ch. iv. 15, could all 
 men sin, before the law ? This is now ex- 
 plained. — ' For up to (the time of) the 
 law (:= από Άδ. μέχρι Μωυσ. ver. 14 : 
 not ' during the time of the lata,' as Orig., 
 Chrys., — τοϋ νόμου δοθίντος, .... ί'ως ό 
 7'όμος ην, — Theodoret, — an allowable ren- 
 dering of the words, but manifestly incon- 
 sistent with the sense; — nor, ^ as far as 
 there teas laiv, there was sin,' as Dr. Bur- 
 ton, — which is both inadmissible from the 
 μέχρι Μωυσϊως following, and would not 
 answer to the simple matter of fact, ην iv 
 κόσμψ) there was sin in the world (' men 
 sinned,' see Gen. vi. 5 — l.S; committed ac- 
 tual sin : not, men were accoxinted sinners 
 because of Adam's sin : the Ap. reminds us 
 of the historical fact, that there was sin in 
 the world during this period) : biit sin is 
 not reckoned (as transgression) where the 
 law is not.' ελλογ^ται has given 
 
 rise to much dispute. \^ery many comm. 
 (Aug., Ambr., Luth., Melanc, Calv., Beza, 
 Riickert, Tholuck, Stuart, al.) exi)lain it of 
 consciousness of sin by the sinner himself, 
 as in ch. vii. 7 : but (1) as De Wette ob- 
 serves, this is not the natural sense of the 
 word, which implies two parties, one of 
 whom sets down something to the account 
 of the other (ref.) : (2) this interp. would 
 bring in a new and irrelevant element, — for 
 the Ap. is not speaking in this chap, at 
 all of subjective human consciousness, but 
 throughout of objective truths tvith regard 
 to the divine dealings .• and (3) it would 
 be altogether inconsistent with the declara- 
 tions of ch. ii. 15, — where in this sense the 
 ΙΧλογισμός of sin by the νόμον μι) ΐχοΐ'τίς 
 is distinctly asserted. — I am persuaded that 
 the right sense of έλλ. is, 'reckoned,' ^ set 
 down as transgression,' — ' put in formal ac- 
 count,' by God. In the case of those who 
 had not the written law, αμαρτία is not
 
 13—15. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ P£2MAI0YS. 
 
 337 
 
 25 reff. 
 23. 
 
 ^^ αΛΛ ουΛ^ ως το τταρατττωμα, ούτως και το γ^αρισμα α~^ζ]Ρ, 
 ft γαρ τω του εΐΌς τταρατττωματι οι ποΑΑοι antuavov, e-ch. χϋ. 5. 
 — 15. aft ούτως (rec ούτω : txt ABCG) om και Β. — -tv bef χαριη om FG. — r?) om 35-7 
 
 formally reckoned as πα^ιάβασις, set over 
 against the command : but in a certain 
 sense, as distinctly proved ch. ii. 9—16, it 
 is reckoned and they are condemned for it. 
 Nor is there any inconsistency, as Tholuck 
 complains, in this view. Other passages of 
 Paul's writings support and elu(;idate it. 
 He states the object of tlie law to be, ch. 
 vii. 13, ίνα γίνητιη καθ' ϋπίρβυλήν αμαρ- 
 τωλός ή αμαρτία ίιά της ϊΐ'τολης. The re- 
 velation of the law exaggerated, brought into 
 prominent and formal manifestation, the 
 sinfulness of sin, which was before culjyable 
 and punishable, but in a less degree. With 
 this view also agree Acts xvii. 30. Rom.ii. 12, 
 'όσοι άνόμως ημαρτον,ίη'ήμωςκαϊ άποΧυνν- 
 rai, — and iii. 25, in so far as they state an 
 analogous case. The objection to taking οϋκ 
 ίλλογιΊται relatively, ' is not fully reckoned,' 
 will hardly be urged by those who bear 
 in mind the Ap.'s habit of con><tantly stating 
 relative trvlhs as positive, omitting the qua- 
 lifying particles : see e. g. ch. vii. 1, where 
 with οΰκ yCiiv and with αμαρτ'ιαν both, 
 we must supply qualifications (see note 
 there). 14.] ' But (notwithstanding 
 
 the last assertion that sin is not fully reck- 
 oned where the law is not) death reigned 
 (was a jiowcr to which all succumbed) from 
 Adam to Moses ' {μίχρι Μωυσ. := 'ϊχί" 
 νόμου above) : i. e. although the full f λλο- 
 ■γισμός of sin did not take place between 
 Adam and Moses, the universalitg of death 
 is a proof that all sinned,— {or death is the 
 consequence of sin : — in confirmation of ver. 
 12. και em τ. μη άμ.] ' even (not- 
 
 withstanding the difi'erent degrees of sin 
 and guilt out of, and under, the law) over 
 those who had not sinned according to 
 the similitude (reft'.) of the transgres- 
 sion of Adam.' (1) irri τψ ϋμ. belongs to 
 άμιιρτ. and not to ijSarriXiVGtv (as Chrys., 
 Theophyl., Bengel, Elsn., al.), — for that 
 would bring in, in the words τανς μι) 
 άμαρτήσαντας, an absolute contradiction 
 to ί^' ψ πάντις τμιαρτον, by asserting that 
 there were some who did not sin. (2) The 
 emphasis lies on παράβασιςι as distin- 
 guished from αμαρτία. Pliotius (in De 
 W.), — ο μίν (Λο.) (Όρίσμίνην κ. τομη- 
 θί•^7ΐ()ησαν ίντολήν παρίβη κ. ημαρτίΐ'• 
 οΐ ϋ( ήμάρτανον τον αΰτοδιί^ακτον της 
 ιρΰσίιος λόγοι/ ϊνιιβρίζιιντ(ς. They had all 
 sinned: but had ni)t like Adam, Irnnsgrcssed 
 a positive revealed command. (3) There is 
 no reference here, as some comin. (15ez. al.) 
 have supposed, to the case of children and 
 idiots, — nor (as Grot., Wetst.) to those who 
 Vol. H. 
 
 lived pious lives. The aim is to prove, that 
 the seed of sin planted in the race by the 
 one man Adam, has sprung up and borne 
 fruit in all, so as to bring them under death ; 
 — death temporal, and spiritual ; — of these, 
 some have sinned without the law, i. e. not 
 as Adam did, and as those after Moses 
 did: and though sin is not formally reck- 
 oned against them, death, the consequence 
 of sin, reigned, as matter of historical fact, 
 over them also. It is most important to 
 the clear understanding of this weighty pas- 
 sage to bear in mind, that the first member 
 of the comparison, as far as it extends, is 
 this : ' As by Adam's transgression, of which 
 we are by descent inheritors, we have be- 
 come (not by imputation merely, but by 
 ])ropensity) sinners, and have thus incurred 
 
 death, so &.C.' (see below). 
 
 OS Ιστι τΰίΓος τ. με'λλ.] ' who is a figure 
 (or type : not tluis used by LXX, see Um- 
 breit's note) of the future (Adam).' This 
 clause is inserted on tiie first mention of 
 the name Adam, the one man of whom ho 
 has been speaking, to recall the purpose for 
 which he is treating of him, — as the figure 
 (ref.) of Christ, τον μελλ., not ' qui futu- 
 rus erat,' as Bez., Reiche ; but spoken from 
 the Ap.'a present standing, 'who is to come.' 
 The fulfilment of the type will then take 
 place completely, when, as 1 Cor. xv. 22, ίν 
 τφ χριστφ πάντις ζωοπαιηθήαονται. Still 
 less, with Koppe, can ος be taken by attr. 
 for o, and του μέλλοντος beinterp. 'of that 
 which is to come,' viz. life and salvation : 
 see 1 Cor. xv. 45. — Many suppose these 
 words ίίς• ϊτγ. τΰττ. τ. μίλλ. to be the apo- 
 dosis of ver. 12: but see there. 
 15 — 17.] Though Adam and Christ corre- 
 spond as opposiles, get there is a remark- 
 able difference, which makes the free gift 
 of grace rnvch more eminent than the 
 transgression and its consequences, and en- 
 hances the certainty of its end being ac- 
 complished.—' But not (in all points) as 
 the act of trar sgression (of Adam, as the 
 cause inducing sin and death on his race), 
 so also is the gift of grace ' (i. e. justifica- 
 tion : not a direct contrast, as νπακοίι\η 
 ver. 1!J: the Ap. has more in mind here 
 the consequence of the τταηατττ., and to 
 that opposes the χάίηημα. De W.). 
 15. €1 γαρ /ί.Γ.λ.] Distitiction the first, in 
 DKCiRUK : — and in the form of a hypol heli- 
 cal inference ' a ininoii ad majits.' ' For 
 if by the transgression of the one man 
 the many have died, much more did the 
 grace of God, and the gift abound in (by
 
 338 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 V. 
 
 '^Airsii'ssai ττολλω juaXXov τ» χάρις του θεοΰ και η οωρεα εν yJi(^iTi abcd 
 gch-Mi.'/ai. ΤΊ) Tou £ΐ'ός' ονθρωτΓοι» Ιησού -νριστου εις '^ τους πολ 
 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 C'lDstr., Eph. ^ 
 
 i 8. 2 Cor. ;\„y 
 
 16 
 
 ix. 8, bat 
 
 7Γ6ρ. trHnsi- 
 
 (ive. 
 h James i. 17 
 
 only. 
 i — here only. 
 
 SfTi-h.xi. :«. 
 η See Rev. xix. 8. 
 
 ων δι 
 
 υς " επεοίσσευσεν. "" και ουχ ως Οι ενός αμαρτησαντος 
 ΤΟ οωρημα το μίν yap κρίμα ες ενός εις κατακριμα. 
 
 το δέ '' -νόρισρα εκ πολλών '^ ποραπτωρατωΐ' εις " ri/cat- 
 
 m ch. viii. 1 only t• 
 
 k ch. ii. 2» reff. 1 — ch. 
 
 Baruchii. lU. Jer. Xi. 20. 
 
 i. 6. XTi. 26. 2 Cor. ix. 13. 1 Pet. i. 22. 
 
 74 al lect 19: ins bef χηριη 109 78-92 al. — for fj^oc ανθρ., ονόματος lect 19. — 16. h 
 om 109. — for αμαοτησαντος, αμαρτήματος DEFG 20". HO (al ?) it (not d^) ν (not am harl') 
 Syr ar-erp Thdrt-text Augj (often txt) Ruf Pelag Ambr-comm Sedul. — γαμ om FG 
 45 al lect 19. — bef £ΐς• κατακριμα, ins παραπτώματος arm. — for παρατττ., αμαρτημάτων 
 
 means of) the gi'ace of tlie one man Jesus 
 Clirist towards the many.' (1) The first 
 question regards πο\λψ μάλλον. Is it the 
 ' a Jhrtiori ' of logical inference, or is it to 
 be joined with ίπίρισσίυσίΐ' as quantitative, 
 describing the degree of abounding ? Chrys. 
 (τΓολλιρ yiip τούτο ίΰλο-^ώτιροι/), Grot., 
 Fritz., Thol., adopt the former, and pro- 
 vided only the same thing is said here as in 
 ver. 17» the usage there would decide it to 
 be so : for there it cannot be quantitative. 
 But I believe that not to be so. Here, the 
 question is of aboimding, a matter of de- 
 gree, there, of reigning, a matter of /act. 
 Here (ver. 16) the contrast is between the 
 judgment, coming of one sinner, to condem- 
 nation, and the free gift, of (see note below) 
 many offences, to justification. So that I 
 think the quantitative sense the better, and 
 join τΓολλω μάλλον with ίπίρίσσίναιν, in 
 the sense of ' much more abundant (rich 
 in diffusion) was the gift,' &c. (2) χάρις, 
 not the grace working in men, here, but 
 the grace which is in, and flows from, God. 
 (3) tv χάριτι τ. του . . . ., not to be joined, 
 (Thol.) with >) ζωρίά, as if it were >) iv 
 χάρ. (which would be allowable), but with 
 ίπίρίσσ. The grace of our Lord Jesus 
 Christ (His self-offering love, see 2 Cor. 
 viii. 9) is the medium by which the free gift 
 is imparted to men. (4) The aorist ίπ- 
 ίρίοσ. should here be kept to its indefinite 
 historical sense, and not rendered as a per- 
 fect, however true the fact expressed may 
 be : l/oth are treated of here as events, their 
 time of happening and present reference 
 not being regarded. 16.] Distinclion 
 
 the second, in kind. The former differ- 
 ence was quantitative : this is modal. — 
 ' And not as (that which took ])lace) by 
 one having sinned, so is the gift.' — It is a 
 question whether any thing, and what, is to 
 be supplied before ft' ύ-ός άμαρτ. Rothe, 
 Meyer, and Tholuck (and so E. V.) would 
 supply nothing, and render, ' And not as 
 by one having sinned, so is the gift.' But 
 (De W.) this has against it, (1) that since 
 the γάρ following gives the reason for this 
 
 sentence, this must contain iynplicitly all 
 that that next expands in detail ; which is 
 not merely the distinction between spring- 
 ing from one man and out of many offences, 
 but much more : and (2) that thus ίιά 
 ■would =: tic or vice versa, whereas ίιά cha- 
 racterizes the bri7iger-in, and ίκ the occa- 
 sion. Others have supplied το κρίμα (Ben- 
 gel, Kollner) : το κατακριμα (Theophyl., 
 Reiche) : ό θάνατος ίίςηλβιν (Grot., Es- 
 tius, Koppe) : — but inasmuch as it is pur- 
 posely left indefinite, to be explained in the 
 next verse, it is better to supply an inde- 
 finite phrase which may be thus explained : 
 e. g. TO -γίνόμίνον, ^ that which took place 
 by one,' &c. το μέν γαρ, κ.τ.λ.] 
 
 ' For the judgment (pronounced by God 
 upon Adam) was by occasion of one 
 man (having sinned, — supply άμαρτήσαν- 
 τος : παραπτώματος would be hardly al- 
 lowable, and would not help the sense, in- 
 asmuch as many sinners, as well as many 
 sins, are implied in ττολλ. παραπτ. below), 
 unto condemnation (its result, in his own 
 case and that of his posterity : supply, as 
 in ver. 18 is expressed, [tylvtro] ίΐ'ς τηίίτος 
 ανθρώπους) ; but the free gift was by 
 occasion of many transgressions (where 
 sin abounded, ver. 21, there grace much 
 more abounded : the existence of the latv 
 being implied in παραπτ.) unto justifica- 
 tion.' — The only difficulty here is the sense 
 of δικαίωμα. The ordinary meaning of the 
 word is TO ΐπανόρθωμα τον αδικήματος, 
 ' the amendment of an evil deed :' so Ari- 
 stotle, Eth. Nicon. v. 10, διαφίρει ct το 
 αδίκημα και το άδικον, και το δικαίωμα 
 και το δίκαιον άδικον μίν yap ϊ"τι Ty 
 ψΰπΗ η τύζη' το αυτό δί τοντο οται> 
 πρηχθ?), αδίκημα ίστι' πρ'ιν δί πραχθήναι 
 ονπω, άλλ' άδικον. ομοίως δί και δι- 
 καίωμα' κολίΐται δί και το κοη>οι• μάλλον 
 δικαιοπράγημα, δικαίωμα ct το' ί—αι•ορ- 
 θωμα Tolf αδικήματος. But this, which 
 Aristot. insists on as the proper, but not 
 perhaps usual sense of the word, is not to 
 be pressed in the N. T., and does not, 
 though upheld by Calv., Calov., Wolf, and
 
 16—18. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ΡΩχΜΑΙΟΥΣ. 
 
 339 
 
 ωμα. ' η yao τω του ενός " τταρατΓτώι,ιατι υ θάνατος °l"^J^'^J^-^ 
 ° ίβασιΧίυσίν οιά του ενός, ττολλω μάλλον οι ttji' ^ ττίοισ- 
 ae'iav της ■χάριτος και ττ/ς ^ωοίας τϊ]ς δικαιοσύνης Χαμ- ^ 
 '^ ttii\} ^ βασιΧιυσουσιν δια του ίνυς Ιησοϋ si 
 
 βανοντίς εν 
 ■νριστου. Λρα 
 
 τταντας ανθρώπους 
 ° οικαιωματος εις 
 
 χ. 15. James 
 i. 21 only. 
 Eccles. i. 3, 
 
 Matt xviii. 
 H. J..hn i. 
 iai fr. 
 1 Cor. iv.8. 
 
 XX. 4, 6. 
 
 ^ οΰΐ' ως δί ενός "^ παραπτώματος εις 
 
 εις κατακριμα, ούτως και οι ενός sch. νϋ.3, 
 παντας ανθρώπους "^ εις " οικαιωσιν 
 
 25 
 
 al9. Paul 
 only. 
 = ver. 12. 
 α ch.iv. 25unlyt• Lcvit xxir. 22. 
 
 1.— at end add ζωΐ]ς D' d• seth. — 17. for τω του tvog, tv tri ΑΌΕ((ΐ^ τω tvi DE)FG g 
 (the same [+ A] as read αμαρτήματος ver 16) : ev fvog 47 am demid (latt al) Orig, : 
 τω 44 : txt B(e sil)CJK &c vss Chr Thdrt Thl Oec Aug (see nolen). — ίια τ. eiog otn 
 52 lect 19 Syr ar-erp copt : του oin 115. — ri;c Cwptag oni Β 4!i Orig2 Chr-comm 
 Iren Aug-oft Bed : την ίωμία>' 67- al ar pol Thl Ruf : add και 63 ν syrr ar-erp Cyr Isid 
 Thdrt Chr (Mtt's msj and other msSi) Oec-comm Pelag Arabrst. — r//c ίικαωσ. om C 70^ 
 Orig, (retaing Γ/;ς f ώρ.). — tv τη ζωη J 03 al. — βασιλίνσωτίν 8ί)'. 93 al : -λίυουηιν 47. 
 77. 91 al copt Orig Ciiri.— aft fiOc-, ins άνθρωπου 49 copt.— χρ. ιησυυ Β Origj (once as 
 t.xt) : add του εττουρανωυ 65. — 18. παραπτωμάτων D-gr (Grsb and Sch>Iz : but qu .'). 
 — παράπτωμα (pref άνθρωπου 46 al) FG 37- 46 al. — for ttc κατακρ., ficiiXOn' το κατα- 
 κριμα lectt 13. 14 al: ιις om 108 : from ανθρώπους 1st to -'nd om 1/8.— for δικαιώ- 
 ματος, TO οικαιωμα DE(F το και cik.)G : juslificationem flor Aug. — δικαίωμα ζωής 49 
 
 Rothe, suit the context as contrasted with 
 κατακριμα. Other renderings are, ' an 
 abnulutory sentence' (Meyer, Fritz., al.) : 
 Wiyhteousnens,' as in ver. 18. Baruchii. 19. 
 Rev. xix. 8 (where see note) : ' a riyhteons 
 cause,' or plea (LXX, Jer. xi. 20) : 'jitsii- 
 fication ' (E. V., Luth., De Wette, al.). 
 The first seems to me to be right, as stand- 
 ing most exactly in contrast with κατακριμα; 
 the use of the -μα being partly perhaps ac- 
 counted for by the alliteration of the ending 
 marking more strongly the antithesis. Thus 
 as κατάκοίμα is Ά sentence of condemnalion, 
 so οκαιωμα will be a sentence of acquittal. 
 This in fact amounts to just ifcation. 
 17.] Distinction the third, also in kind : 
 that which came in by the one sinner, was 
 the reign q/' death : that which shall come 
 in by the One, Jesus Christ, will be a reign- 
 ing m LIFE. — ' For (carrying on the argu- 
 ment from ver. 15, but not so as to make 
 parenthetical [Rothe] ver 16, — for ?ικαιο- 
 σνιης presupposes <:ικαιωμιι) if by the 
 transgression of the one man (the read- 
 ing iv τψ tv'i παυαπτώματι goes with 
 άμαητήαατος for ΐιμαρτί]σαντ«ς in ver. 
 16: both have evidently been corrections) 
 death reigned by u eans of the one man, 
 much more (logical — a fortiori) shall 
 they who receive the abundance of the 
 grace and of the gift of righteousness 
 (ver. 15: beware of the sliuilow and weak- 
 ening notion, that it is " for τΓ/ς (ΊκαιοηιΊνης 
 ίίϊ'ωοημίνην") reign in life (eternal) by 
 means of the One (Man) Jesus Christ.'— 
 TTtpinnna answers to ίπίαίτ"ίνηίν, ver. 15 : 
 της χάριτος, to ή χ.τοϋ θκΛ ; only here, as 
 at ch. i. 5, the word signifies not only• the 
 
 grace flowing from God, but the same grace 
 implanted and working in man : — ύωριας, 
 to Ciuota there, but quahfied by της ίικαιο- 
 σύνης, answering to οικαιωμα in ver. 16. — 
 The present λαμβάνοντίς, instead of Xa- 
 βόντίς, is not merely used in a substantive 
 sense, receptores (as Fritz, and Meyer), but 
 signifies that the reception is not one act 
 merely, but a continued process by which 
 the πίυιηηίια is imparted. (So Rothe, De 
 ΛΥ., Thol.) €v ζωτ) βασ.] " Antithesis 
 
 to θάνατος ίβασ. \Ve should expect /) 
 ζωήβασιλίΰηίΐ,ίιηί Paul designedly changes 
 the form of expression, that he may bring 
 more prominently forward the idea of free 
 personality, ζωή is not only corporeal (the 
 resurrection) but also spiritual and moral, 
 — as also in θάνατος we must include Cia 
 της ΰμαητιας ver. 12. βασιλίι σονηιν is 
 brought in by the antithesis : but it is else- 
 where used (see retf.) to signify the state of 
 blessedness, partly in an objective theocratic 
 import (of the reign of the saints with 
 Christ), partly in a subjective moral one, — 
 because reigning is the highest development 
 of freedom, and the highest satisfaction of 
 all desires." De Wette. 18.] R(capi- 
 
 tulation and co-statement of the parallel 
 and distinctions.—' Therefore {άρα ου ν, see 
 reff., is placed by Paul at the beginning of 
 a sentence, contrary to classical u>age) as 
 by means of one transgression (not, ' the 
 tr. of one,' as Erasin,, Luth., Calv., Koppe, 
 Fritz., Thol., which is contrary to u.sage, 
 and to ver. 17, where that meaning is ex- 
 pressed by τψ του ίιός παραπτώμοτι. In 
 this summing up, the Ap. puts the anti- 
 thetical elements as strongly and nakedly 
 
 Ζ 2
 
 340 
 
 npos ρωμαίους. 
 
 V. 19—21. 
 
 >»]C" 
 
 19 
 
 ό(ο 
 
 ανθί 
 
 τ 2 Cor. χ. β. 
 Hfb ϋ. 2 ... ^ \ (, \ \ 
 
 wch.^ih 7 reff. "' αμαρτωλοί ^ κατίστίιθησαν * οι πολλοί, οΰτως και δια 
 
 De"r xxiiir ■''^^ ^ υπακοΐις τοΰ ενός δι/ 
 y ih i. ft r.m πολλοί, ^"^ i'oji«'>C δε ^ πα|θ£ΐς•?)λΟεν, 'ίνα " πλεονάσι? το 
 
 ""'5^+- . ττηοαπτΜαα. ου οε επΛεο 
 
 ωςπερ γαρ ό(α τ^ς παροκ:ο77ς του εΐ'ος ανπρωπου 
 ίτάθησαν * οι πολλοί, ο 
 
 icatoi " κ:ατοστπίίΐ]σο)'τ«ι ^ οι 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 .Fii.fr. ποΛΛ( 
 
 iCil. ϋ. 4 , 
 
 »"'5^+-.,„ παράπτωμα, 
 
 λίίΗρα l/r/KTiii ii-Ti'ic τίΤιμ TeiX'"!-, Piilyb. ii. 
 b 2 Cor. Tii. 4 only t. See Mnrk vii. 37. 
 
 i5. 8. 
 
 ίΐ'ασεν i] a^ar>Tia, υπερεττερισ- 
 
 aeh.vi. 1. 2 Cor. iv. 15 al. 2 Chron xxiv. 11. 
 
 Cyrj.— 19. for παμη<., υπακοής 9ί.—κητίσταΘημΐν 37-8 al lect 19 Cyr : κα^ίστηκημιν 
 2. —aft fi'i.c (2nd) add avOfnoTZiW D'FG (f^ia της τον tv. ηνβρ. νπακ. FG) d^ g (al latt) 
 Slav Iren-gr Aug, (somet om) Ambrj Bed (not Faustin Pac Sedul Ambrst). — 20. rr./iog 
 yap J (so Tiscli": not av yati below, as Scholz). — aft ■παμίΐςη\(^. ins Ης το μίσον .syr*. — 
 for τϊΧίοναση, πΧίονικτηση 1U9-78. — for τταραττΓ., αμάρτημα 36. CI al lectt 13. 14 : το 
 
 as possible in contrast : and therefore 
 abridges ' the transgr. of one ' and ' the 
 righteousness of one ' into ' one transgres- 
 sion ' and ' one righteousness ') it came 
 upon (tyirtT", indefinite, being supiilicd) 
 all men unto condemnation, — so also by 
 means of One Eighteous act (the Death of 
 Christ viewed as the acme of His Obedience, 
 see Phil. ii. 8 = >'/ υπακοή τον ίνός below ; 
 not as in ver. 16, — nor Righteousness, as 
 Thol., which would not contrast with πηρη- 
 πτ., a siuyle act) it came upon all men 
 (in extent of grace, — in jiosse, not in esse as 
 the other) unto justification of (conferring, 
 leading to) li.'e.' 19.] 'For (in ex- 
 
 planation of ver. 18) as by the disobe- 
 dience of (the) one man the many (=i 
 πάντις άνθρωποι above, but not so ex- 
 pressed here, because in the other limb of 
 the comparison παιτ. άνθρ. could not be 
 put, and this is conformed to it : see there) 
 were made (not ' wei-e accounted as' [Grot, 
 al.] : nor ^became by imputation' [Beza, 
 Bengel] : nor ^ were proved to be' [Koppe, 
 Reiche, Fritz.] : see reff., — and the notes, 
 on the kind of sin spoken of in this whole 
 passage, as being both original and actual) 
 sinners (not νττηΊϋνροι κ-ολα^κ, as Chrys., 
 Theophyl. : ' actual sinners bi/ practice,' is 
 meant, the disobedience of Adam having been 
 the inlet to all this : comp. ίφ' ψ ττάντίς 
 ί'/μηρτον ver. 12) so also (after the same 
 manner or analogy likewise) by means of 
 the obedience (unto death, see on last verse) 
 of (the) One Man shall {future, because, 
 as in eh. iii. 30, justification, as regards the 
 many, is not pet completed. De W.) the 
 many (= πολλ,,,', romp. Matt. xxvi. 28, 
 Mark x. 45, but thus expressed because 
 ΤΓολλιιι would not have answered in the 
 other limb of the comparison. In order to 
 make the comparison more strict, th^ πάΐ'Τίς 
 who have been made sinners are veakened 
 to the indefinite ol ττηλλοι, the ττιιλλοί who 
 shall be made righteous arc enlarged to the 
 indefinite oi ττολλοι. Thus a common tenn 
 of (piantity is found for both, the one ex- 
 tending to its largest numerical interpreta- 
 
 tion, the other restricted to its smallest) be 
 made (see above) righteous ' (not by imjin- 
 tation merely, any more than in the other 
 case : but 'shall be made really and actually 
 righteous, as completely so as the others 
 were made really and actually sinners.' 
 When we say that man has no righteous- 
 ness of his own, we speak of him as out of 
 Christ : but in Christ and united to Him, 
 he is made righteous, not by a fiction, or 
 impntalion only of Christ's righteousness, 
 but by a real and living spiritual union with 
 a righteous Head as a righteous member, 
 righteous by means of, as an effect of, the 
 righteousness of that Head, but nor merely 
 righteous by transference of the Righteous- 
 ness of that Head ; just as in his natural 
 state he is united to a sinful head as a sinful 
 member, sinful by means of, as an effect of, 
 the sinfulness of that Head, but not merely 
 by transference of the sinfulness of that 
 Head). — See the whole question resjiecting 
 ττάί'Τίς• and ot ττολλοι treated in Tholuck's 
 Comm. in loc. 20.] How the law (of 
 
 Moses) came in, in the divine economy. — 
 ' But (i. e. the two things spoken of ver. 19 
 did not simply and immediately happen) 
 the law (of Moses : not lat», in the ab- 
 stract, nor 'the law of nature' as Dr. Peile, 
 — nor even the law of God in its general 
 sense, as often in cli. i. ii. ; — but here 
 strictly the law of Moses, as necessi- 
 tated by vv. 13, 14 in this same argument) 
 came in besides (besides the fact of the 
 many being made sinners, and as a transi- 
 tion point to the other result : formed a 
 third term, be-ides these two in the sum- 
 mary of God's dealings with man : comp. 
 προςίΓίΟί) Gal. iii. 19 : — not ττρος κηιρον 
 ίόήθη, Theophyl. : not, came in between 
 Christ and Adam [the Jact, but not the 
 interp.'], as Theodoret and Calv. : — not 
 = ίίίήΧθίν merely),— in order that (τΑι- 
 κως, its design, — not merely ίκβατικίος, 
 its result, as Chrys., al. ;— here, and every 
 where else. So of ver. 21) the transgres- 
 sion {created by the law ; for where no law, 
 no transgression, ch. iv. 15: — not merely
 
 VI. 1-3. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Ul 
 
 1. Li ovv ερηυμεν ', ίπιμενωμεν τ^ αμαρτία, ινα V ίΤύ 'i'st's^' 
 γποις ^ ττΑίονασ» ; "^ μΐ] yivuiro. ^ οιηνες ' αττίΟάΐ'ομεν h-andcmstr., 
 TIJ αμαυτια, πως- εη C'J^oiiii' εΐ' (ii/rfj ; jj αγνοείτε ι»-", ίο. ch 
 
 ΟΤΙ οσοι "' ίβαπτισθημεν "εις ^^οίστύν Ιι/σοΰυ, "' εις τόι» ^^«. co'•"• 
 
 i — 1 Cor. XV. 12. Gal.iv.il. j See vt-r. 11. Col. ii. 20. 
 
 m Matt, xxviii. 19. Acts xix. 5. 1 Cor. x. 2. xii. 13. 
 
 k = ch. iii. 29. 
 
 Ich.i.lSreff. vii. 1. 
 
 κακοί' Cyr. — 21. for tv τω 9., in mortem it (not tol) ν Tertj Pac Ruf Ambr. — for ol•, 
 ύτΓοίί FG.— rec ourw : txt ACG.— for β.ιη,Χινηη, -nn JK 47. 77- 121-31-37-40-43-70 
 all: add η ΤΙ. — ίια . . . ΐ]μων cm "JG. i24'-79 al Till : C. τ. κ. ημ. ιι\σ. χρ. 93: χ^>ί<^τ. 
 ιησ. Β : τ. κ. ημ. ova 7. 
 
 Chap. VI. 1. rec επιμηΌνμιν, with mss vss Chr Thtlrt Tbl Oec Tert al : ΐτημ{ΐΌμΐν 
 Κ 1. 57. f)8. lOi) all lect 13 copt Gild : ίττ,μίηηομίν J 93. 124 al : txt ABCDEFG 31-7. 
 46. (J7^ 71-3-7 80-7-9 all d e latt (copt) Dam Augj — no .... πΧί'^νοηη om 32. 
 — 2. aft oirijft ins yap FG it ν syrr ar-pol (not Tert al). — ζησωμιν CFGJ 71• 93. 
 109-13.23 all Diod Clir (Mtt's ms,). — (v om 93.— add at end, ic.ii τη^ς- απ^yαι'o/ίtι'Thdrt. 
 — 3. aft rtyj'. ins αίιλφιιι Thdrt. — ίις χρ. ιβαπτ. 109 Thdrt. — ιησηυν om Β 31-9. 73. 
 109-18-20-24 al lect 8 Chr Thdrt Thl Ambr, : ιησ. χμιστ. 80 Syr aeth ar pol : in Christo 
 Jesu V it lat-fi' (exc Tertj) : txt ACDEFGJK most mss vss Thdrt Oec Iren Aug-oftall. — 
 
 the knowledge of sin, but actual transgr.) 
 might multiply (in actual fact .• not ' be 
 abundantly exhibited,' or any such eva- 
 sive sense). — No possible objection can 
 be taken to this statement by those who 
 view the Law as a preparation for Christ. 
 If it was so, then the efftct of the Law, 
 the creating and multiplying transgres- 
 sion, was an end in the divine purposes, to 
 bring out the necessity of One who should 
 deliver from sin and bring in righteousness. 
 " Those who weaken this telic "ifit into ' so 
 that,' in order to guard the Ap. from what 
 seems to them a doctrine unworthy of God, 
 overlook equally his firm standing on the 
 acknowledged ground of historic fact and 
 actuality, as the humility with which here, as 
 ever ((;li. xi. 33. 34), he bows before the mys- 
 tery of the (ΐίκυνομία τον θίοΰ." Umbreit. 
 ' But (this terrible end, the multiplying of 
 transgr., was not, however, God's nltimate 
 end : He had a further and gracious one) 
 where (' when,' De Wette, after Grot., al. : 
 but Tholuck justly remarks that instances 
 of this meaning of oh in prose are wanting. 
 In verse it seems to occur, Eur. Iph. Aul. 
 yC, but even there may be rendered ' in the 
 case where') sin (the generic ol tiie spt<:itic 
 τταμιΊτΓτωιπι) multiplied, (God's) grace 
 exceedingly abounded ' (not ' did much 
 more a/joiiuil,' as K. V. : for words com- 
 pounded willi {iTTff) have a sirperlative, not 
 a comparatrre signification, e. g. ref. imtp- 
 λί(ΐν, lintf)ViKi'iu>, ΐιπίμυφό'ιΐ, κ.τ.Χ., — and 
 Paul ()ft(;n uses these comjiounds. The H. V. 
 has likewise destroyed the force of the com- 
 parison by rendering the ditlerent words 
 ηλίονάζω and ττίμισαύω both by one word 
 
 ' abound'). 21.] The purpose of this 
 
 ahoundiny of grace : — its ultimate preva- 
 lence and reign, by means of riyhteonsness, 
 unto life eternal. — ' That, as sin reigned 
 (the historic indefinite past, because the 
 standing-point of the sentence is, the resli- 
 tntion of all thinys hereafter) in death 
 {ir, of that in and by which the reign was ex- 
 ercised and shewn: death was the central act 
 of sin's reign. He does not here say, ' death 
 reiyned by sin,' as in vv. 12 — 14, because 
 sin and yrace are the two points of compa- 
 rison, and rec|uire to be the subjects) so 
 also grace may reign by means of (not 
 iv here, though it might be so, if Smaioa. 
 applied to onr beiny made riyhteous .• but 
 as it applies to the Riyhteousness of Christ 
 making us righteous, it is ha) righteous- 
 ness, unto (leading to) life eternal through 
 (by means ot) Jesus Christ our Lord ' 
 (' Jam ne memoratur (|uidem Adamus, solius 
 Christi mentio viget.' Bengel.) 
 
 Chap. VI.— VIII. ] Thu moral ki•- 
 
 FECTS OF JUSTIFICATION'. VI. 1 — 14.] 
 
 No enconrayement yrven hereby (see ch. 
 V. 20) to a life in sin : for the baptized are 
 dead to sin, and walk in a new (vv. I — 7) 
 life, and one (vv. 8 II) dedicated to Gad. 
 1.] ' What then shall we say f ' — 
 the introduction of a difficulty or olijcction 
 arising out of the jireceding argument, and 
 referring to cli. v. 20. See (;li. iii. Γ). 
 €'7Γΐμ£νωμ€ν, ' must we think that we 
 may persist,' — the deliberative subjunctive. 
 So ί'ίΐτωμίΐ' η niyuifin', Kur. Ion 7'•8 : 
 iTitpi\UM ίχ'ψοχη:, Med. 127.'>• ί^^"'" Kiih"cr, 
 Gramin. § 404, and note on ch. v. 1.— 
 ' May we persist in (our natural state and
 
 342 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 VI. 
 
 nCoi.ii.i2 θάνατον αυτού "^ ίβαττισθημίν Ι " συν(τάφημ{ν ονν αυτω abcd 
 
 oc.li iv 25 "> ^ "Ο ' ' ^ ύ' '' " " ' fl H.1 II 
 
 reff. oto του ρατΓΤίσματος εις τον υανατον, ινα ωςττίρ Ί]•^ΐρυη jk 
 
 ρ Sec John xi. ν , ^n\~.^<^f•^ - \ η \ 
 
 4«•^.. ρ ■^ξχστος εκ νίΚξίων cut της ' οοί,ης του πατρός, ούτως και 
 
 χ°νΗ. if.'"^'' νμί'ις εν '' καινότητι Ζ(^ης "^ πίριττατησωμίν. ^ ύ yap 
 σύμφυτοι "γί-γόναμίν τω ' ομοιωματι τοϋ Θα\'ατου αυτού, 
 
 2 Cor ίτ. 2. 
 .3. EpU. T.2al. slierconlyl. Amos ix. 13. Zech. xi. 2. Jos. Antt. τι. 3. 3. 
 
 t ch. i. 23. Pliil. ii. 7. 
 
 4. for nvv, any 3!) al : enim d e ν Syr (g has both) Ruf Pelag Atnbrst Ambr Gaud Bed. 
 — for Sia rov βατττ., post baptisma Tertj : add αυτόν 17 Cyr (but somet aft θάνατον), — 
 
 και συνανίπτημίν ηντω Orig 7 '■ avrtr Gav. om Iren : ίΐς τ. θ. dia τ. β. 115. — 
 
 Tor om D'FG. — dia (νπο D' ajipy) τ. ?οξ.. r. irarp. {π}(νμαΓος Cyr) om Iren Tert Pac 
 Gaud Cbrom : per virtntempatris Amhrst : in i/loi-iam patris Pelag-comm. — 5. for ηλλα, 
 αμα FG it ν latt-ff. — aft αι•αστ. ins αντου FG g Syr al. — 6. και τούτο Β : τοντ. δε 179 
 
 commission of) sin, that (God's) grace 
 may multiply' (v. 20) 1 2.] μή γί'ν. 
 
 (see retf.), used of some inference in itself 
 abhorrent from reverence or piety, or pre- 
 cluded by some acknowledged fact incon- 
 sistent therewith. The latter is here the 
 ground of rejection. An acknowledged Jact 
 in the Christian life follows, which precludes 
 our persisting in our sin. — ' We who (oVri- 
 νες describing quality, not merely matter 
 of fact) died (historic aorist, not perf. as in 
 E. V. : the time referred to being that of 
 our baptism) to sin (reff. and exx. in 
 Wetst :— became as separate from and 
 apathetic towards sin as the dead corpse is 
 Sep. from and ap. towards the functions 
 and stir of life : μ'ενιιν άκίνητον ίόςπιρ 
 τον νίκρόν, Chrys. ' Sin,' Ty άμ. =: as 
 above), how any longer shall we live in 
 it' (= 7Γ£()ΐπαΓ£Ϊ)' ti'— but not, as De W., 
 ζ^ν with a dative : ζ7)ν ev rivi is a further 
 step than ζ^ν τινι, implying introition, 
 and not merely symjiathy). 3.] ' Or 
 
 (supposing you do not assent to the argu- 
 ment in the last ver., see reff.) are ye 
 ignorant (the foregoing axiom is brought 
 out into recognition by the further state- 
 ment of a truth universally acknowledged) 
 that all we who were (i. e. all of us, 
 having been) baptized into Christ Jesus 
 (' into participation of,' ' into tinion with,' 
 Christ, in his capacity of spiritual Master- 
 ship, Headship, and Pattern of conformity) 
 were baptized into (introduced by our 
 bapt. into a state of conformity with and 
 participation of) His Death V — The Ap. 
 refers (1) to an acknowledged fact, in the 
 signification, and perhaps also in the man- 
 ner (see below) of baptism,— that it put 
 upon us (Gal. iii. '27) a state of conformity 
 ■with and participation in Christ ;- and (2) 
 that this state involves a death ry αμαρτία 
 even as He died Ty ύμαμ-ί^ (ver. 10): — 
 the meaning being kept in the back ground, 
 but all the while not lost sight of, that the 
 benefits of His death were likewise made 
 ours by our introduction into the covenant. 
 4.] A further explanation of the 
 
 assertion in the last ver., proceeding {ovv) 
 on its concession by the reader. — ' We were 
 then (not the temporal but inferential 
 ' then :' q. d. " You grant my last position : 
 Well then," . . .) buried with Him {ημών 
 καθάπιμ ϊν τιίί τάφψ τψ νύατι κατα- 
 ίιΐ'όντων τάς ΚίψαΧάς ό παλαιός ΰνθριοττος 
 Θάπτίται, και καταίνς κάτω κρνπτίται 
 δλως κα'ι καβάπαζ, Chrys. on John iii. 
 Tholuck) by means of our baptism into 
 (His) death (τ-οϋ βαπτ. κ'ς τον θάνατον 
 belong together, not συΐίτόφ. ιΐς τ. 0., 
 which would hardly bear any sense. The 
 absence of the art. before t ι'ς• is no objec- 
 tion to this ; — it is unnecessary, because no 
 distinction from any other baptism is 
 brought out, and το βάπτ.-ιΙς -rov-Har. is 
 connected as one idea) ; in order that, as 
 Christ was raised from the dead by the 
 glory (ίίίξη and δνναμις are cognate ideas ; 
 comp. the import of the Heb. ή and the 
 LXX in Ps. Ixviii. 35 [Ixvii. 34 LXX], 
 Isa. xii. 2 : and το κράτος της ΰόΚης in 
 Col. i. 11. The divine δόζα includes all 
 that manifests the Creator to the creature : 
 and hence also His Almightiness. Tholuck. 
 — The renderings ' iti Dei glotiam' [Beza, 
 Bretschneider] , and ' because He is the 
 image of the Father' [Dr. Burton, altern.], 
 are inadmissible for ίιά with a gen.) of the 
 Father (Theodoret makes ί) δόία τού πα- 
 τρός = ί) οι'κκ'ίΐ θίότης of the Son, which 
 is manifestly wrong) thus also we should 
 walk in newness of life' (not — ' a new 
 life;' — nor are such expressions ever to be 
 diluted away thus : the abstract καινότητι 
 is used to bring the quality of neivness, 
 which is the point insisted on, more into 
 prominence, comp 2 Thess. ii. 11. 1 Tim. 
 vi. 17• Winer, § 34. 2). — The comparison 
 is not only (as Stuart) between our Lord's 
 physical death and resurrection, and our 
 spiritual : but reaches far deeper : see notes 
 on vv. 10, 11. 5.] The Ap. confirms 
 
 the last ver. by a necessary sequence, that 
 those tvho are united to Him. in His Death, 
 shall be also in His resurrection. — ' For 
 (confirm.) if we h8,ve become united with
 
 4-7. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 343 
 
 "άλλα και της " αναστάσΐως ΐσόμεθα, τοϋτυ -γινωσκοντες, nsucor.iv. 
 
 « ' ιυ Λ ν r - W " /ί χ ' ί\ Ί '^" Horn. II. 
 
 τταΛαιος ημών ανυρωττος συνεσταυρωυη, ινα «•ί<ι,2. 
 
 ΟΤΙ ο 
 
 y 
 
 ■αταρ-γηυ)^ το ^ σώμα της ' αμαρτίας, '' του μηκίτι ύου- „^Eph'."iv.''2l2'.* 
 υίΐν ημάς τη αμαρτία' ' ο yap αποθανών '^ Βί^ικαιωται χΜημ. xkvu. 
 
 .. '■ ' ^ '■ ' 5 44 II. Gal. 
 
 κατα 
 λευί 
 
 ϋ 20 only t. 
 a Luke Jtxii. tt. 1 Cor. ix. 10 
 
 y ch. iii. 3 reff. ζ gen,, — ch. vii. 23, 24. viii. 13. Col.ii. II. 
 
 b Matt. Ti. 24 al. Dent. xiii. 4 alex. e Acts xiii. 39 only. 
 
 vss. — (στανρωθη 238. — κατάργηση A seth. — 7. om Tert Ambrst Ambr mSj Ruf (text, 
 
 the likeness of His Death {σύμφυτος — 
 either (1) ' congenital,' — as Sia την σίψφν- 
 τον ΰικηιυπίη>ην, spoken of Samuel, Jos. 
 Antt. vi. 3. 3, — or (2) ' cognate,' of like 
 nature, — or (3) ^ ariaing simultaneously,' — ■ 
 or {A) ^ grown together,' — or (5) ^planted 
 with,' ' consitus.' The rendering of Syr. 
 Vulg., Luth., E. v., ^planted together,' is 
 inadmissible, -φντος being not from <pvTtv(ij 
 but from φύω : as also is that of Erasm. 
 and Calv., — ' insititii.' The fourth mean- 
 ing, ^ groum together,' ' intimately and pro- 
 gressively united,' — ' coaluimus,' as Grot., 
 — seems here to apply best. — Obs. σύμφ. is 
 to be connected with τφ ΰμ., not with τψ 
 χριστψ understood, as in ver. 6 : in which 
 case we should have to supply τφ ΰμοιώματι 
 again before της avaaraatwc, which would 
 be not only grammatically difficult, but 
 would not correspond to the sense : for 
 Christians, it is true, partake of the like- 
 ness only of Christ's death, but of His 
 actual Resurrection itself, as the change of 
 construction shews : see below), so shall we 
 be also (άλλα after a hypothetical clause 
 serves to strengthen the inference : see 
 reff., and Hartung, Partikellehre, II. p. 40) 
 with His Kesurrection ' (a change of con- 
 struction : because it could not well have 
 been said σύμφυτοι του ομοιώματος τ. θ. 
 above, the gen. after adjectives compounded 
 with σνι> denoting the thing actually par- 
 taken [cf. Kiihner, § 519, and Bernhardy, 
 Syntax, p. 171 : who cites examples in 
 σύντμοφης. Soph. Philoct. 203, — σύννομος, 
 Eur. Hel. 1508, — σύμφωνος, Aristoph. Av. 
 C58, — συμφυής. Plat. Legg. iv. p. 721, — 
 συνήθης, ib. v. p. 73!),— σΰμψί^ι/^ος, Cratyl. 
 p. 398], and hardly the mere figure or like- 
 ness of it, — and similarly it could not well 
 here be said σύμφ. τι] άιαστάσα, because 
 the dat. would not be strong enough to 
 denote the state of which we shall be actual 
 partakers. — The future is used perhaps be- 
 cause of the injcrence, as a logical se- 
 quence,—' If, &c A shall — 15 :' — 
 
 but more probably with a deeper meaning, 
 because the participation in llis Resurrec- 
 tion, however partially and in the inner 
 spiritual life, attained here, will only then 
 be accomi)lislied in our entire being, when 
 we ' shall waki; up after his likeness '). 
 6.] ' Knowing (recollecting) this, 
 
 that our old man (former self, personality 
 before our new birth, — opposed to καιιός 
 or νιος «ΐ'θρ., καινή κτίσις, — see Col. iii. 
 10. 2 Cor. V. 17. Eph. iv. 22— 24,— not 
 merely the guilt of sin, nor the power of 
 sin, but the man. The idea is not Jewish, 
 as Tholuck has shewn : the passage quoted 
 from the Sohar-chadasch not bearing the 
 meaning commonly given to it, — and if it 
 did, that book itself being a production 
 probably of the sixteenth century) was (at 
 our baptism) crucified with Him (the 
 great key to our text is Gal. ii. 20. As the 
 death of the Lord Jesus was by crucifxion, 
 the Ap. uses the same expression of our 
 death to our former sinful self, which is not 
 only by virtue of, but also in the likeness 
 of, Christ's death, — as signal, as entire, as 
 much a death of cutting off and putting to 
 shame and pain), in order that (the aim 
 and end of the συσταυμωθήναι) the body 
 of sin might be annulled (" to σώμ.. τής 
 άμαρτ. belongs together, and της άμαρτ. 
 is not to be joined with καταργ. as being =z 
 όπο της άμαρτ. [Theodoret. Wahl] ; — 
 nor is το σωμ. τ. άμ., ' the totality of sin' 
 [Orig. 2, Theophyl. 1, Grot.] ;— nor 'the 
 substance or essence of sin,' after the Heb. 
 usage of □2ίϊ' and ηΐ2 [Schottg.] ; nor, ' Ihe 
 mass of sin ' [Thol. i.] ; — nor a mere figure 
 to carry out the idea of being crucified with 
 Christ [Calov., Wolf, Reiche, Olsh., Stuart 
 (2), al.] ; — nor z= ?'/ σάρζ τ. άμηρτ. ; but 
 ' the body, which belongs to or serves sin,' 
 in which sin rules or is manifested, = τά 
 μίλη, ver. 13, in which is ύ νόμος της 
 αμαρτίας, ch. vii. 23, — το σώμα τ. θανά- 
 του, ch. vii. 24, — «ι ττράξιις τυϋ σώ>ματος, 
 ch. viii. 13, — το σώμα της σαρκός, Col. ϋ. 
 11." Do Wette : with whom agree Orig. 
 (1), Theophyl. (2), Beza, Bengel, Meyer, 
 Tholuck, Stuart (1), al. But as De W. 
 further remarks, we must not understand 
 that the body is the seat of sin, or at all 
 events must not so understand those words 
 as if the principle of sin lay in the hotly, 
 which is not true, for it lies in the (/•///). 
 καταρ•γηθη, ' might be rendered 
 powerless' (annulled as far as regards ac- 
 tivity and energy. The word occurs twenty- 
 five times in Paul's Kpp., and does not 
 api)ear to signify absolute annihi/alion, 
 but as above. Gregory of Nyssa has gone
 
 sit 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 VI. 
 
 cc — 2 Cor. τ. 
 15. 
 
 El δε 
 
 :0«, 
 
 ατΓΟ της αμαξ)τιας. " η όε " ατη^ΐανομίν συν -^ριστο), 
 
 ' πιστίίιομίν οτι και "^αυν^^ησομεν αυτω, " ειοοτες οτι χριστός 
 
 ε'/ερΟείς εκ: τεκρωί' ουκ έτι απαΟνησκίΐ' θάνατος αυτοΰ 
 
 ^ κνρΐίυίί. " ' ό -yap απέθαί'εν, ττ) ' αμαρτία 
 
 h Λ ,J,^ y- k y- _ - hh Q^- 11 
 
 ουκ tTi 
 μ•.^"• απεθανεν ■" ίφάτταζ' ο ^Ι Ζ.]Ι, t]l τα 
 
 Jtw. 
 
 ούτως και 
 
 ά See Acts χν. 
 
 11 rett'. ch. 
 
 xiv. 2. 
 e2 Cor. vii.3. 
 
 STim.ii. 11 
 
 onlvt• 
 f ch. iv. 2:1 refr. 
 gLukrxx 
 
 ch xiv 
 
 Ι.ΐ.Οίη.ϊύ. νμίΐς λογι'^εσθί εαυτούς "' νεκρούς μεΐ' τ^ αμαρτία, 
 
 h ace. ohj., Γ,λ\. ii. 20. Rev. xviii. 7. i dat., Col. iii. 23 al. j = Heb. vii. 27. ix. 12. x. 10. (1 Cor. 
 
 XV β) only t. k See ver. 2 reff. 1 = andcon.slr., th. xiv. 14. Phil. ili. 13. Wisd. XT. 15. 
 
 m constr., here only, see ch. vii. 8. 
 
 and does not notice it in comm). — for yap, St d e.— 8. for δ(, yap FG (autem aut enim 
 g) tol : 01)1' Syr slav. — σνν om 2' : tv 2-. 'λ2. — ττιστινωμίν 3ί). 44 ar-erp : πισηνσωμίν 
 123. — rec σνζησ. (see prolegg) : -Κητ^μίν CK 93. 109 al Thl: -ζησομιθα FG. — 
 for avroi, τω χριστώ D'EFG it ν (not demid tol, nor v-Sixt) Syr Aug, Bed (not Chr) 
 Thdrt Thl Geo Tert Augj Ambr Pelag Ruf Sedul al.— 9. και θαν. arm Aug-somet. — 
 κνρανσει 28 it v-ed latt-ff: κυρίίυ»; lect 8. — 10. τη αμ. is joined to former awt9. in 73. 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 into the meaning in his discourse on 1 Cor. 
 XV. 28 [Thol.] ), ' that we should no longer 
 serve (be slaves to) sin' (i. e. that the body 
 should no longer be under the dominion of 
 sin, see belovir, ver. 12). 7.] The 
 
 difficulty of this verse arises from the 
 Apostle having in a short and pregnant 
 sentence expressed a whole similitude, join- 
 ing, as he elsewhere does in such cases, the 
 subject of the first limb of the comparison 
 with the predicate of the second. Fully 
 expressed, it would s-tand thus : ' For, as a 
 man that is dead is acquitted and released 
 from guilt and bondage (among men : no 
 ref. to God's judgment of him) : so a man 
 that has died to sin is acquitted from the 
 guilt of sin and released from its bondage.' 
 I express dtSiK. by this periphrasis in both 
 cases, because I believe that all this is 
 implied in it : ' is acquitted,' ' has his 
 quittance,' from sin, so that Sin (personif.) 
 has no more claims on him, either as a 
 creditor or as a master : cannot detain him 
 for debt, nor sue him for service. A larger 
 reference is thus given to StSiK. than the 
 purposes of the present argument, which is 
 treating of the power, not the guilt of sin, 
 required : but that it is so, lies in the 
 nature of αμαρτία, the service of which is 
 guilt, and the deliverance from whose ser- 
 vice necessarily brings with it acquittal. 
 8 — 11.] This new life must be 
 one dedicated to God. 8.] ' Now 
 
 (continuing the train of argument) if 
 we died with Christ, we believe that 
 we shall also (the future as in ver. 5, — 
 because the life with Him though here 
 begun, is not here completed : and the 
 •κιατίύομίν used more of dogmatic belief, 
 than of trust, though the latter meaning is 
 not altogether absent) live with Him.' 
 9.] What sort of a life with Christ is 
 meant ? This and the following verse ex- 
 plains, by what we know of the Resurrec- 
 
 tion-life of Christ. — The only difficulty here 
 is in οΰκ €τι κυριβύει, as implying that 
 Death had dominion over Christ, which we 
 know it had not: see John x. 17, 18; ii. 
 19. Acts ii. 24. But this vanishes, when 
 we remember that our Lord, by submitting 
 to Death, virtually, and in the act of death, 
 surrendered Himself into the power of 
 Death. Death could not hold Him, and 
 had no power over Him further than by 
 bis own sufferance : but power over Him it 
 had, inasmuch as He died. 10.] ' For 
 
 (the proof of the foregoing) the death 
 which He died (not ' in that He died,' as 
 E. v., nor is b for κταθ' ο, either here or in 
 Gal. ii. 20, but the accus. objective, governed 
 by the verb. So also of b hi Z,y below) 
 unto sin He died (De Wette well remarks 
 that we must in expressing this verse abide 
 by the indefinite reference to sin in which 
 the death of Christ is placed ; if we attempt 
 to make it more definite, \for sin,' or ' to 
 that state, in which He suffered the punish- 
 ment of sin,' we shall lose the point of com- 
 parison, which lies in ' to sin ' and ' to 
 God.' If we are to expand the words 
 ' died to sin,' we must say that our Lord at 
 death passed into a state in which He had 
 ' no more to do with sin ' — either as 
 tempting Him [though in vain], or as re- 
 quiring to be atoned for [this having been 
 now effected], or as met by Him in daily 
 contradiction which He endured from sin- 
 ners) once for all (so that it is not to be 
 repeated : see reff.) ; hut the life which 
 He liveth (see above) He liveth unto God ' 
 (indefinite again, but easily filled up and 
 explained : to God, — as being glorified by 
 and with the Father, as entirely rid of con- 
 flict with sin and death, and having only 
 God's [properly so called] work to do, — as 
 waiting till, in the purposes of the Father, 
 all things are put under Him : — and to [for] 
 God, as being the manifestation and bright-
 
 8—14. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 345 
 
 ^^, 
 
 Ps. ν. 3. 
 
 sMHtt. ν. 29, 
 3υ. James lii. 
 5. 6. iv. 1 
 ottierwise, 
 u Gal. iv. 21. 
 
 ω}>τας ce τω Θεω tv -χ^ριστω \ησοΰ. μη ούν " βα- n--ch. ν. ΐ4 
 
 σίλίυετω η αμαξίτία ίν τω ° θνητω υμών σώματι, '' ίίς το ° j'^J/'xt'ss 
 
 f ' " Q ' η ' '".1.^ '>'r ' 54 2 Cor. iv. 
 
 νττακουίΐν ταις επιυυμίαις αυτόν μη05 παυιστανίτε ιι- v.4oniy. 
 
 τα μίλη υμών όπλα αοικιας ttj αμαοτια, άλλο "^ τταρα- ρ ^,*;*",;,''-^'^-! 
 
 ' ' ^ ~ η ~ ' ^ ' - ν- \ \ ll.SOal. ' * 
 
 στησατί ίαυτους τω σεω ωςει ε /c νίκρων ί,ωντας, και τα ς ch. ί. ^4 rea; 
 
 S '\ ' - t " Λ ^ ' ~ α ~ 14' ' ^ 'TnlTJii^oo 
 
 μξλη υμών υττΛα οικαιυσυνης τω σεω. αμαρτία yao ch ^ΰ ι 
 
 υμών ου ^ κυριεύσει' ου γαρ εστε " υττο νομον, άλλα " υπο 
 
 "χ^άριν. 
 
 al29. Paul ouly. Exod. xxix. 17 al. t See 2 Cor. vi. 7. ch.xiii. 12. Jer. xxl 4. 
 
 80 al-latt. — 11. ημιις Aug. — rec aft νίκρ. μίν ins eivai {supplementary aclchi), with JK 
 &c vss gr-lat-fF: bef νικρ. μίν BC Cyr Dam {μιν v. Cyr Dam) : om ADEFG 17- 178 al 
 co{)t ieth Chr (Mtt's msj) Tertj. — rec at end add τω κνριοι ημών, with CJK &c lect 25 
 copt Syr (but pref to χρ. ιησ.) al Chr Thl Oec-text Ambrst (expr) Ruf : om ABDEFG 
 47'. 177-9 al it flor harl demid tol aeth syr Bas Cyr Thdrt Thl-Oec-comm Tert, Hil Aug 
 Pelag Sedul Bed. — 12. for αμαρτ., ο νομός sah. — τω om 2ΰ8. — ημών [i^. — ίττακουίΐν 
 FG. — rec αυτή IV ταις επιθ. αυτού {appy α combination of the two readirtgs), with 
 C-'JK (most later mss) lect 25 syr ar-pol slav Chr Thdrt Thl Oec {(ΐυτω 9. 23 5. 71; om 
 120 : var al : tniO. αντης 115 Orig Thdrt) : αυτή, omg the rest, DEFG d' g Iren Tert 
 Vict tun : txt ABC 4'. 39. 47- 67- 80. IT.) al d- ν copt sah syr ar-erp seth arm Origj 
 (Math in Epiph) Antioch Dam Jer Aug Sedul Bed (Pel and Ambr-text) : om the whole 
 aft υπάκουαν 178 e Ambr Faustin. — 13. rec ως {corrn to simpler word), with DEFGJK 
 most mss Chr Thdrt Thl Oec : txt ABC 16. 47. 73. 9;i al Meth (in Epiph) Dam : add 
 τους Syr syr*. — ζωντις D'FG. — bef μί^η, om τα Β. — 14. αμαμτ. . . . κυρίίυσα om 
 76. 1241.— for „„_ ovKtrt 73. 80 ath Chr Thdrt Ambrst.— Ki^ptfua 39. 73.— rec αλλ, with 
 
 ness of the Father's glory). 11.] An 
 
 exhortation to realize this slate of death 
 unto si7i and life unto God with Christ. 
 ' Thus (after the same manner as Christ) 
 do ye also (imperative : Meyer only holds 
 it to be indie.) account yourselves (better 
 than * infer yourselves to be,' as Chrys. and 
 Beza, — see refF. and on ch. iii. 28) dead 
 (indeed) unto sin (as ver. 2 and following), 
 but alive unto God in Christ Jesus ' (i. e. 
 ' by virtue of your union wHh Him :' not 
 ihroiiyh \_Ci('i'\ Christ Jesus; in this chapter 
 it is not Christ's Mediatorship, but His 
 Headship,vi\\\c\\ is prominent. — ίνχρ.Λησ., 
 is not [Reiche, Meyer, Fritz.] to be joined 
 with both liK-j). Ty άμ. and ζώντ. τ. f., but 
 only with the latter, next to which it stands, 
 and of which it is literally and positively, 
 whereas of the other it is only figuratively 
 1_τψ όμοιώμ., ver. 5] and negatively true). 
 12, 13.] Hortatory inferences from 
 ver. 11 : Jrom μη to τι^ άμαρτί<^, negative, 
 answering to ηκρους Ty άμ., — then posi- 
 tive, anstrering to ζώντας τ ψ ΰιψ. 
 12.] βασιλ€υ€τω answers to the imagery 
 throughout, in which Sin is a master or 
 lord. It is hardly right to lay a stress on 
 it, and say (as Chrys.) ουκ tint μ ή ojTIi' 
 ζήτω ή ηάιιϊ. μιμ i ti'tpyfiTio, άλλ', >'/ αμαρ- 
 τία μη βασιΧ€υίτω" οΰ yap την φι'ιαιν 
 ι/λΟϋ' όΐίλίΤι•, άλλα την npaaiptniv Ciop- 
 θωσαι : it is no matter of CDriiiiarisiin be- 
 tween reigning and indwelling merely, but 
 between reigning and being deposed. — But 
 
 why τφ θνητώ ΐψ. σώματι ? Orig., al., ex- 
 plain it ' dead to sin,' which it clearly can- 
 not be. Chrys., Theodoret, Grot., and 
 Reiche, suppose the word inserted to re- 
 mind us of the other life, and the shortness 
 of the conflict, or (Theophyl.) of the short- 
 ness of sinful pleasures ; Kollner, — to point 
 out that it is dishonourable to us to serve 
 Sin, whose reign is confined to the mortal 
 body ; Fritzsche, ' quoniam, qui peccato 
 ministrum se preebet, adhuc in mortali cor- 
 pore hserere nee nisi fragilis vitse meminisse 
 videtur;' De Wette, Tholuck, al., that the 
 Apostle wishes to keep in view the con- 
 nexion between sin and death on the one 
 hand, and that σννζϊιν which is freed from 
 death on the other. This last view seems 
 the most probable. See 2 Cor. iv. 1 1 and 
 note. — There is considerable uncertainty in 
 the reading of the latter part of this verse. 
 That which I have adopted is supported by 
 the priuiary IMSS. and has the approval of 
 Lachmann, Tischendorf, Meyer, and Do 
 Wette. 13.] ' Nor render (see reff. ; 
 
 — as a soldier renders his service to his 
 sovereign, or a servant to his master) your 
 members (more particular than ' your bo- 
 dies ;' the individual members being instru- 
 ments of different lusts and sins) as instru- 
 ments (or, ' weapons,' as Vulg., iiiost of the 
 Greek cxijoss., and Luth., Calv., 15ezii, Tho- 
 luck, which latter defciuis this rendering by 
 I'aid's fondness for military siinililndcs, and 
 by the occurrence of όψώί'ΐα below, ver.
 
 346 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 VI. 
 
 ν ch. ίίί. 9. 
 xi. 7. 
 
 W ch. iii. 4 reff. 
 
 ^ " Ύί ovv ; αμαρτησωμίΐ', 'ότι ουκ ίσμευ " υπό νυμον abcd 
 
 άλλα 
 
 υτΓΟ -^αριν ', μτι ytvoiro. 
 
 16 
 
 oiSo 
 
 τε ΟΤΙ ω 
 
 EFG 
 
 JK 
 
 , y. iRreff. '^ παοιστύΐ'εΓε εαυτούς δούλους "εις υττακο}}!', δουλοί εστε 
 ώ ύττακούετε, τ/τοι αμαρτίας " εις θάνατοι' η υπακοής '^ εις 
 
 y altr., Luke 
 ix. 3(Ί. Acts 
 xxi.24itl. 
 
 AD'(E?)J(K?) &c : txt BCD'FG &c.— 15. rec αμαρτησομιν, with niss nrly Chr Thdrt 
 (h 1) Thl Oec : ημαρτησαμ^ν FG d- e' g am harl : txt ABCDEJK 37-i). 46-7- 55. 71-7• 
 «0-9. 91-3. 110'-i;i-53 Icc-t « al Clem (Thdrt, ?). — rec nW, with AD(E.')J(K?) &c : txt 
 BCFG &c•.— 16. η ουκ D'FG 21' d' g demid flor harl' Sedul Bed (not Ambr Ambrst al). 
 
 — on om 17• — ίουλους om 17• 48' Apollinar in eaten. — δούλοι vwciKOVtrt om {see 
 
 above) 17. — for ijroi, η sah. — tig θάνατον om DE d e Syr sah ar-erp arm-venet Aug 
 
 23;— but, as De W. observes, the compari- 
 son here is to servilude rather than soldier- 
 ship) of unrighteousness to sin ; but ren- 
 der (the present imperat. above denotes 
 liabit, — the exhortation guards against the 
 recurrence of a devotion of the members to 
 sin : this aorist imperat., on the other hand, 
 as in ch. xii. 1, denotes an act of self-devo- 
 tion to God once for all, not a mere recur- 
 rence of the habit) yourselves (not merely 
 your members, but your whole selves, body, 
 soul, and spirit) to God, as alive from 
 having been dead (as in ν v. 4 ff. and Ε ph. 
 ii. 1 — 5), and your members as instru- 
 ments (see above) of righteousness to God' 
 (dat. ' commodt,' as indeed is ry άμαρτ. 
 above, the dat. after παρίστ. being there 
 left to be supplied, because of ry άμ. fol- 
 lowing). 14.] An assurance, confirm- 
 ing (by the yap) the possibility of the sur- 
 render to God commanded in the last 
 ver. that sin shall not be able to assert and 
 maintain its rule in those who are not under 
 the law but under grace. — The future κνρι- 
 εύσίΐ cannot be taken as a command or 
 exhortation, which use of the future would 
 if not always, yet certainly here, require 
 the second person, — and would hardly suit 
 a personification like αμαρτία. — The second 
 part of the ver. refers back to ch. v. 20, 21, 
 where the law is stated to be the multipUer 
 of transgression, — and accords with 1 Cor. 
 XV. 50, i) ίΰΐ'αμις της αμαρτίας, ό νόμος. 
 The stress is on κυριευσ-€ΐ : q. d. ' Your 
 efforts to live a life of freedom from the 
 tyranny of sin shall not be frustrated by its 
 after all tyrannizing over you and asserting 
 its dominion : for ye are not under that 
 law which is the strength of sin, but under 
 that grace (here in the widest sense, justify- 
 ing and sanctifying,— grace in all its attri- 
 butes and workings) in which is no condem- 
 nation,' ch. viii. 1. — It will be seen from the 
 above, that 1 interpret Kuimvaei rather of 
 the eventual triumph of sin by obtaining 
 domination over us, than of its reducing us 
 under its subjection as servants in this life. 
 This is necessary, both to fit this verse into 
 the context, and to suit the question which 
 arises in the next. See Calvin's masterly 
 note. So also Tholuck and De Wette. 
 
 (The discussions [in Stuart and al.] as to 
 whether νόμ. is the moral or ceremonial 
 law, and as to whether we are bound by the 
 former, are irrelevant here : the assertion 
 being merely that of the general matter of 
 fact, about which there can be no question, 
 that we [Christians] are not under the law, 
 placed in a covenant of legal obedience, but 
 under grace, — placed in a covenant of justi- 
 fication by faith and under the promise of 
 the indwelhng Spirit — subjects of a higher 
 law — even the law of the spirit of life in 
 Christ Jesus, ch. viii. 2. Whether we are 
 bound by the law, and how far, depends on 
 how far the law itself spoke the immutable 
 moral truth of God's government of the 
 world, or was ada})ted to temporary observ- 
 ances and symbolic rites now abolished, — 
 the whole of which subject is not under con- 
 sideration here. I make these remarks to 
 justify myself for not entering into those 
 long and irrelevant discussions with which 
 many of our commentaries are interrupted, 
 and the sense of the Apostle's argument 
 confounded.) 15—23] The being 
 
 under grace (free from the condemnation 
 of sin) and not under the law, is no en- 
 couragement to sin : for (vv. 16 — 19) we 
 have renounced the service of sin, and 
 have become the servants of righteous- 
 ness : and (vv. 20 — 23) the consequences 
 of the service of sin are terrible and fatal, 
 whereas those of the service of righteous- 
 ness are blessed and glorious. 15.] 
 Ti ούν (sc. iffrij') ; = τι ovv ϊρονμίν; 
 ver. 1 . άμαρτήσωμ€ν] Must we 
 imagine that tee may sin / ' may we 
 sinV — the aor. because he is speaking 
 of committing acts of sin : on the delibe- 
 rative subjunctive, see ver. 1. — This ques- 
 tion is not, any more than that of ver. 1 , 
 put into the mouth of an objector, but is 
 part of the Apostle's own discourse, arising 
 out of what has preceded, and answered by 
 him in the following verses. 16.] 
 ' You are the servants either of God or of 
 sin, — there is no third course.' The former 
 part of the ver. as far as νπακοι'ατί reminds 
 them merely of an universal truth, — that the 
 yielding ourselves servants for obedience to 
 any one, impUes the serving, being (in
 
 15—19. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 347 
 
 δοΰλο, της -trtcr'-^' 
 
 ^ικαιησυνην ; ^' χαρίς δε τω θίω. Ότι ητε 
 
 « / Γ / ^\ ζ ' ^' Λ ' '^ h '^'ύ ITitn. i.5. 
 
 αμα^)τιας, νπηκουσατί Of eK καροιας ίΐς ον τταρίοουητε 2 Tim «.22. 
 '^ τύπον '' δ(δ«)(ϊ/ς, ^^ '' ίλευθερωΟεντες δε αττό της αμαρτίας " ™"-'f . ^b- •• 
 
 " Ν b puss., Acts 
 xxi. 3 rrff. 
 1 _ V _ (; \ ■ WintT, 5 24. 
 
 την " ασθίνίίαν της σαρκός υμών. ωςπβρ yap ' τταρ- gfj^Pt^xxui. 
 
 ΐ^ονΧωθητί τη SiKaioavinj. ^ ^ ανθρώπινοι' λέγω οια 
 την ασθίνίίαν της σαρκός υμών. ωςπβρ yap ' τταρ- 
 
 / ^ί'Λ '-ί(>-\ "k'/l ' '" 25.) 3 Mace. 
 
 εστί/σατε τα μεΛη υμών ■' οουΛα τιι ακαυαοηια και τη ϋί.3ο 
 
 ' Γ- » Λ Ιΐ > t t d Acts li. 42 a1. 
 
 e John viii. 32, 36. ver. 22. ch. Tiii. 2, 21. Gal. v. 1 ooly t. 2Macc. i. 27. fActsvii.fi. 1 Cor. ix. IH al. 
 
 Gen. XT. 13. g Act.s xvii. 2a red'. See ch. iii. 5. li = 1 Cur. ii. 3. Heb. T. 2. vii. 28. i ver. 13. 
 
 j adj. here only. Enr. Hecub. 137. k ch. i. 24. Eph. iv. 19 reff. 
 
 (Ruf-comm .'') : ad pecca/um Vrxdest. — for (ΐς diK., jusiitia d : g has both. — 17. χαριις 
 G' : gratias ν f. — ort 109. — νπηκον^ατί 238. — καΰαρας κάργιας A \Ά. 26 al ar-pol (ex 
 toto corde seth) Chr, (but not h 1 text nor conim). — aft ιοαρί. add νμων sah. — for oi', δ 
 109 : η 44.— £ΐς Γκπον 17-— 18. for if, ovv C 3?. 118 ar-pol icth arm : om 37-9. C2 al 
 lect 12 tol (al latt) copt (jt Syr seth ?) : for tXevQ. . . . αμαυτ., credenten autem in 
 Chrislum Ambrst. — 19. for μί\η, βί^η 37 (and in ver 13) : σήματα 3. 49. 57: animas 
 arm (but not arm-venet) : add της σαρκός Chr. — for δούλα (twice), Sov^tvtiv FG it ν 
 
 reality) the servants of such person. Then 
 this is apj)lied in the form of a dilemma, 
 implying that there is no third service, q. d. 
 ' Novc this must be true of you tvi/h reymd 
 either to sin or to God.' ' Know ye not, 
 that to whom ye yield yourselves ser- 
 vants with a view to obedience, his ser- 
 vants ye are to whom ye obey, (and in 
 this case) either {yrvi — // only occurs here 
 in N. T. ?'/T(ii in alternatives is exclusive, 
 cf. Herod, i. 11, διδ'^μι ηϊ()£σιΐ', όκοτίρην 
 βούλίαι τραττίσθαι . . . ήτοι /cfiior γι τον 
 ταΐ'τα βονλεύσιιντα δη άπόλλνσθαι, ή σ(, 
 τον ίμι .... Isocr. όντιδ. ρ. 317, '/Xf'fv 
 (tv ητοί κατηγορήσωΐ' η ααταμαρτνρήσω^', 
 and see Hartung, Partikellehre, ii. 355 f.) 
 (servants) of sin, unto death (' with death 
 as the result,' — not physical death merely, 
 nor eternal death merely, but death [by sin] 
 in its most general sense, as the contrast to 
 [life by] righteousness, — the state of 
 misery induced by sin, in all its awful aspects 
 and consec]uences : — and so throughout this 
 jiassage and ch. vii.), or of obedience {τοϋ 
 Otov, sc. — obedience to Him who alone 
 ought to be obeyed) unto righteousness 
 (with righteousness as its result ; not iin- 
 ))uted merely, nor implanted merely, but 
 RIGHTEOUSNESS in its most general sense as 
 the contrast to deat/i,— the statu of blessed- 
 ness induced by holiness, and involving in it, 
 as a less in a greater, eternal life .• and so 
 tiiroughout this passage) ?' 17, 18.] The 
 dilemma solved tor them by reference to the 
 matter of fact : thai they vere once servants 
 of sin, hut on receiviny the yospel, obeyed 
 its teachiiiy : and c07ise(]uentty were freed 
 from the service of sin, and became the 
 servants of riyhleousness : — and this in the 
 form of a thanksgiving to God, whose work 
 in them it was : so also 1 Cor. i. 14. — 
 There is a stress on ήτ€ as referring to a 
 state past. So Eph. v. 7 : on account of 
 which stress ajjiiarently the μίν, which 
 
 would naturally follow it, is omitted. 
 
 17. viir Βιδαχής] Attr. : the simple 
 
 constr. would be ϋιτΐ}κονσατι τψ τΰττψ 
 της διδ. ίίς ο%' (or δΐ') τταυεδόΟητι, 'ye 
 obeyed (ΰττ. on account of υπακοή above) 
 from the heart (reff.) that form of teach- 
 ing (so μόρψωσις ch. ii. 20; most pro- 
 bably used of the practical norma agendi 
 accompanying the doctrine of the gos- 
 pel; so Calv., Luth., Beza, Reiche : — 
 De W. thinks it is the Pauline form of 
 teaching, of justification by faith, distin- 
 guished from the Judaistic) to which ye 
 were delivered' (this inversion to the pas- 
 sive agrees admirably with τύπος, as a 
 mould, exemplar, or pattern after which 
 they were to be fashioned : so κατά τά 
 δόγματα τυττονσθηι, Arrian. Enchir. ii. 
 19 [Thol.] : and Beza, — 'hoc dicendi ge- 
 nus magnam quandam emphasin videtur 
 habere. Ita enim significatur evangelicam 
 doctrinam quasi instar typi cujusdam esse, 
 cui veluti immittamur, ut ejus figurie con- 
 formemur, et totani istam transformationem 
 aliunde provenire.' [Thol.] And Chrys, 
 remarks, τϋ παραδοθΙΊναι, την τον θιοϋ 
 βοηθιίαν α'ινιττίται). 18. έλευθ. 
 
 δικαιοσ.] ' And (this ver. is closely 
 
 united with the foregoing ; Riickert, Reiche, 
 and Meyer think that it might be stated 
 as a syllogistic conclusion, of which the 
 dilemma is the major, and the Jact of 
 ver. 17 the minor) having been freed 
 from sin, ye were enslaved (see on 
 next ver.) to righteousness.' 19.] 
 
 For the expression εδουλώθητί the Ap. 
 a])ologizcs : 'it is not literally so; the 
 servant of righteousness is no slave, under 
 no yoke of bondage ; but in order to set the 
 contrast between the former and the new 
 state better before you, 1 have used this 
 word:' Ί speak as a man (accunling to 
 the requirements of rhelorical antithesis) 
 on account of the (intellectual, as Do W.
 
 848 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 νΤ. 20—23. 
 
 1 ch. iv. r reif. avouia 
 m ch. V. Ιβ refl. . "^ t 
 
 ίίς' την avouiau, όντως νυν τταηαστησατε τα ABCD 
 
 * „ EFG 
 
 οτε JK 
 
 ifcori'i'.io' ' jitf^ij υμ(<>ν ^ δούλα Ty SiKaioavvyj "\ις " α-γιασμόν 
 
 except 1 Pet. -yap oouAoi TjTE τΐ]ς αμαρτιος, ελίυσί^οι 7;r£ rrj όικαιο- 
 °χίν.•]ιι^°ν'βΓ. ovvy. "^ τπ'α οϋΐ' ^' καρπυν ύγ^ίτε τότε', '^ εφ οίς νυν 
 
 Srell. Winer, ,» '/Ι "'^s/\ '' Α' ''•"> < 
 
 }:!i.2a. ίτταίσγυΐ'ίσσε, τυ yan τέλος εκείνων υανιιτος. '"' νυνι 
 
 ** Te^'liiVsJ; ^^" ^ί '^ εΧευ^ίί^ωθεντες αττο της αμαρτίας, όουλωΟεντες οε 
 
 r cli. ί. Klreff. ~/ι"ιι>' ^ V vf-t'u' "> *'^^ 
 
 s=2Cor xi. T<f> t /εω, ' £\ετε το»' ^ καρπον υμών εις α^γιασμον, το οε 
 
 Ιΰ. 1 Pet. i. 9. t Acts xi. ISreff. η ver. 19. 
 
 lat-ff (not Tert Jer). — for ακσθ., αμα(ιτια 34. — ίΐς τ. ανομ. cm Β some lectt al Syr ar-erp 
 Sedul Ruric,. — ούτω και 7• 117 io\ al-latt Syr arm slav (not mod) Tertj Sedul. — vvv om 
 31 syr* : ι^η 7fi. — for SiwXa (2nd), οπλίΐ A. — for δικαιυσ., αγιωηυνη 4!). — 21. for ovv, 
 -yf/p tol al-latt Chr Ambrst. — mrt oni 3!) Tert. — τβ μιν γαμ BD EFG 73 al syr Thdrt 
 Chr (Mtt's mss) : txt .\CD''JK niss nrly (ajjpy) vss nrly Clem Chr Thl Oec lat-fT. — at 
 end add ίστιν FG vss. — 22. for St τω θεω, τη ίικαιοσιιΐΊΐ 2'J iEth. — aft τίλιις ins αυτού 
 
 and Thol. : not moral, as Meyer and Olsh.) 
 ■weakness cf your flesh (i. e. ' because you 
 are σαρκ-ινοί and not πηνματικοί, and 
 want such figures to set the truth before 
 you.' — Orig., Chrys., Theodoret, Calv., Es- 
 tius, Wetst., al., take these words in a 
 totally different sense : ' / require of you 
 nothing which your fleshly weakness will 
 not bear'): for (e.xplanatory of tcovXoM.) 
 like as ye (once) rendered up your mem- 
 bers (as) servants to impurity and to 
 lawlessness (two divisions of αμαρτία — 
 impurity, — against a man's self, — lawless- 
 ness, against God), unto lawlessness (both 
 which, άκαθ. and άΐ'ο^., lead to άΐ'ομια, 
 result in it : ' qui justitiae serviunt, ρνοβ. 
 ciimt : άνομοι, initjui, sunt iniqui, nihil 
 amplius.' Bengel : not '■from one ανομία 
 to another,' as Oecum., Theophyi., Luth., 
 Grot., Erasm., al. : because [De W.] άιο- 
 μία is not an act, but a principle) so now 
 render up your members (as) servants to 
 righteousness (see ver. IC) unto (leading 
 to, having as its result, perfect) holiness ' 
 — (contrast to άΐ'ομία, and both embracing 
 their respective consequences). 
 20 — 23.] As a further urginy of the above 
 ea.hortations the Ap. contrasts the end of 
 their former life with that of their present. 
 20.] γάρ introduces a motive for 
 the foregoing : but the ver. belongs to the 
 following : for ver. 22 is the contrast to it. 
 Meyer and Fritz, think it to be an explana- 
 tion of ver. 1!J, but are certainly mistaken. 
 ' For when ye were servants of sin, ye 
 were free in relation to (dat. of regard or 
 reference, \Miier, § 31. 3) righteousness.' 
 — There is doubtless a latent irony in the 
 use of ίλ{ iiWtpoi here ; but it must not be 
 brought out too strongly : it does not ap- 
 pear, till the end of that freedom is de- 
 clared. 21.] ' Well, then, ye were 
 free : and what was the benefit /' vvr con- 
 cedes and assumes. — There are two ways of 
 
 pointing: (1) that of E. V., carrying on 
 the question to ϊπαισχίηεσϋί, and sup- 
 plying ίπ' ϊιctίvoις before t(p' ulc, adopted 
 by Chrys., Oec, Vulg., Beza, Grot., Estius, 
 Bengel, Reiche, Meyer, Frilz., Stuart, al. 
 But this though good as far as constr. is 
 concerned, is inconsistent with the N. T. 
 meaning of καρπός, which is ' actions,' 
 the Jruit of the man considered as the tree, 
 not ^ ivayes,' or ' reward,' ihe Jruit of his 
 actions: see below, ver. 22, and ch. i. 13, 
 note. So even Phil. i. 22 (see note). — So that 
 I much prefer (2) the punctuation of Syr., 
 Theodoret, Theophyi., Luth., Melancth., 
 Koppe, Flatt., Tholuck, Riickert, KoUner, 
 Olsh., Lachm., Griesb., De Wette, al., — 
 placing the interrogation at rort ,and making 
 ϊφ' οΙς• V. ίτταισχ. the answer. 'What 
 fruit then had ye at that time 1 (Things, 
 deeds) of which ye are now ashamed.' 
 TO γαρ ri\. Ik. Θ.] the reason of 
 their present shame. ' For the end (= vir- 
 tually o\pioiia, ver 23, and would be a mere 
 repetition of κηυπός on the first method of 
 punctuation above) of those things (those 
 KopTToi consisting of sinful acts) is death, 
 (death in the widest sense, see note on ver. 
 1(),— physical, which has been the end of 
 sin, in which we all are involved, — and 
 spiritual and eternal, which will be the end 
 of actual sin if followed out). 22.] 
 
 Contrast of your present state to that 
 former one : ' freedom from sin as a 
 master, — servitude (comp. άιθυώ-ιΐ'ον 
 λίγω, ver. lij) to God (a higher description 
 than merely δικαιοσύνη, the actual anti- 
 thesis to αμαρτία, ver. 18. The devil, as 
 the corresponding antithetical power, sel- 
 dom appears in the teaching of Paul : and 
 only in casual expressions, as Eph. iv. 27 : 
 vi. 11.2 Tim. ii. 26),— fruit (see on κάμπος, 
 above 21, — and remark τον καρπόν, your 
 fruit, fruit actually brought forth, q. d. t\tTt 
 καρπον, και ύ καρπός ΰμων αγιασμός) untO
 
 VII. 1—3. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 349 
 
 ^ τί\ος 
 θάνατος, το 
 Ιησου 
 
 
 23 
 
 τα yap οφωνια της αμαοτίας τ Lnteiii. u. 
 
 , _ 'β * - y ν , , . * - 1 Cor. ix. 7. 
 
 γ^αρισμα του νέον Cwrj αιώνιος ev ■γυριστώ o„^i"L•^'•* 
 τω κυρ'ιω ημ(οι>. VII. '' Η αγί'οειτε, αΒίΧφο], 
 λαλ 
 
 "γινωσκουσιν yap νομον 
 
 άνθρωπου "^ ecp όσον γοονον ζτ) 
 
 ■γυΐ'ί) τω ί,ωντι avcpi ^ δί'οίτπι νομω 
 
 ανι)ρ, 
 
 ούν υοντνς του 
 
 ετβρω' eav όε αποϋαν^ 
 
 '''V 
 
 d 
 
 ί,ίοντος 
 "γίνηται ανόρι 
 
 τϊ. 18, 22. 2C.ir.xi. 3. 
 fch ν 18 alio. Paul only. 
 
 38 a!. h = Acts xi. 2ft nnly. 
 
 xxii. 12. Deal. xxir. 2. Jer. iii. 1. 
 
 w = ch. 
 
 re 6'. 
 X ch. Ti. 3refr. 
 
 OTi ο νομός •' κυρίίύζΐ " Ttw y ch. vi.iirrir. 
 
 η -yap νΤΤανόρος Markii.27al. 
 
 fav c£ aπoθavr| ο 
 
 - ' ί ' 3 f " xii. 1•). 
 
 του ανόρος. "^ OpO bhrrecly. 
 
 λ\ I, I .X Num. V. 29 al. 
 
 (ς• \ρηματισίΐ, εαν <= = '.cor. vu. 
 
 inn <lT<;f «• Gal. 
 ffO T. 4. Seech. 
 
 e gen. of reference, John v. 29, bis. 2Cor. ix. 13. Mark i. 4 al. Winer, ί 3(1. 2, b. 
 g Matt. xii. 39. Mark viii. 38. James iv. 4. 2 Pet. ii. 14 .inly. Ezek. xvi. 
 
 κατηρ-γηται απο του νομού 
 'Αοιχ 
 δε απο 
 
 ανόρος 
 
 y 
 
 ■χ^ρηματισίΐ, 
 ο ανηρ, ελευί 
 
 Cor. vii. 39. 
 Gal.ir. I. 
 See Dent. 
 
 ίχρημάτ,ζΐ βασιλεύς, Diod. Sic. xx. 53. 
 
 i = here only. Levit. 
 
 arm. — 23. του Oeov om 28. 
 
 Chap. VII. 1. for τον ανθρ., in homine d ν g. — 2. bef νομω, ins οντι Orig,. — 3. aft 
 ζωντος,-β,άά χρ G. — \p^fJ- M'l'X• D(E?)FG it ν al Jeral : χρημητιζ^ι al slav Chr Tluirt : 
 add 7] yvv?) A copt Orig, Chr,. — ο ανηρ αντης FG (Tiscli : not D as Scholz and Lachm) 
 V Syr ar-erp lat-ff (not d Tert). — απο του νομ. om 76: add του ανδρός l^ ν harl (not 
 
 (leading unto perfect) sanctification, — and 
 the end (governed by f" \fr£) life everlast- 
 ing.' 23.] The enrls of the two 
 courses placed pointedly and antithetically, 
 and the inherent difference, that whereas 
 ' death (see above) is the wages (όψ. = 
 pay, or ration, of soldiers; compare the 
 similitude in ver. 13, and remarks there) of 
 sin, earned and i)aid down, — eternal life 
 is no όύ'όη'ΐον. nothing earned, but the 
 free gift of God to His soldiers and ser- 
 vants ; — and that in (not ' through,' — true 
 enough, but not implied in iv, see above on 
 ver. 11) Christ Jesus our Lord.' 
 YII. 1 — 6.] The explanation and proof of 
 the assertion ch. vi. 14, οΰ yan tart ΰττΌ νό- 
 μον, α\\(Ί ΰπϋ χ^Ίριν : the answer to the 
 question of vi. 15 having occupied vv. 
 16-23. 1—4.] The Christian is 
 dead to the law by being dead with Christ, 
 and has tiecome His. 1.] Connect 
 with vi. ] 4, which is in fact the sentence 
 immediately preceding. Reiche and Meyer 
 connect with vi. 23 ; ' Tlie gift of God is 
 eternal life in Jesus Christ our Lord : this 
 you can only doubt by being ignorant,' &c. : 
 — Krehl believes ch. vii. to be the expan- 
 sion of ' Death is the wages of sin,' — and 
 ch. viii., of ' the free gift of God i? eternal 
 life.' But not only does this division not 
 hold, for mu(!h of ch. viii. regards the con- 
 flict with sin and infirmity,— but the pro- 
 minence of ΐ'ό/ΐ'.ς as the subject here forbids 
 the connexion with όψιόΐ'ΐη της άμαρτ. 
 Θ/Ίνητος. — The steps of the proof are these : 
 The law birnls a man onli/ so long as he 
 lives (ver. 1): — e.g. a married woman is 
 only bound to licr husband so long as lie 
 lives (vv 2, 3) : — so also the Christian being 
 dead with Christ and alive to Ilim is freed 
 
 from the law (ver. 4). αδελφοί] Not 
 
 addressed particularly to Jeu-ish Christians: 
 see below : but generally to the Roman 
 church. γινώσκουσιν γ. νομ. λαλ.] 
 
 'For I am speaking (writing) to men 
 acquainted with the law;' i. e. the per- 
 sons to whom I address this epistle are 
 such as know the law : not ' I speak to 
 those who knot/• the law,' as if he were now 
 addressing a different class of persons, — 
 which would require τοις- yap γινοσκουσιν 
 Τ()ν νόμον ΓοΓτό φημι, see Gal. iv. 21. — 
 Nor does the knowledge of the law here 
 affirmed of the Romans prove that the ma- 
 jority of them were Jewish Christians : they 
 may have been Gentile proselytes : see below 
 on ver. 4. on ό νομ.. κνρ. τοΰ 
 
 άνθρ ] ' that the (Mosaic : for of 
 
 that, and not of any other law, is the wliole 
 argument) law hath power over a man 
 (not ό νήμ. τον άΐ'(^(,ώπου, 'a man's law,' 
 and Ktipieiii absolute, 'has dominion,' — as 
 Hamm. and Dr. Burton, which is very 
 questionable Greek and still worse sense) 
 as long time as he ' (the man, see vv. 4 
 and (> : — not the law, as Origen, Erasm., 
 Grot., Estius, al., which would introduce 
 the irrelevant question of the abrogation of 
 the law, whereas the whole matter in argu- 
 ment is the relation of the Christian to tiie 
 law). 2.] 'For (not merely = c. g. 
 
 but, as Thol., tlie example is it?ulf a jiroof), 
 the married (nf.) woman is bound by the 
 law to the living husband : but if the 
 husband have died, she is set free from 
 (Ht. annulled from) the lawof (' regarding,' 
 comp. reff. and ιΊ I'l'./icr rar \tπpιϋ, Levit. 
 xiv. 'J) the husband ' (no liy])allage). 
 3. ) ' And accordingly (/ήια οϋι-, 'Jrom the 
 same consideration, it follows that') while
 
 550 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 VII. 
 
 dat., ch. τι. „ f ~ η " •> " NT ' - ο ί 
 
 III. Π- καοποφοοησω/ΛΗ' τω Οίω. οτί yap ημ^ν ε»' τη σαρκι, 
 
 l-MHtt.Tiii. ^ ^ , ~ '' "•. - ΝΛΝ - / 
 
 inch''iT.25refr. ΤΟ. '' ττυβημαπι των ** αμαρτιών τα ' οια του νομού 
 
 η Matt. xiii. ,' "' ~ t '\ '-u'^n , " 
 
 i>3«. Markiv. tvi/oyttTO tv τοις μίΛίσιν ημών εις το καρποφορησαι 
 
 10 only. Hal>. iii. 17. Wisd χ. 7. 
 ii. !t. 111. X. 32. 1 Pet. i. II aia only t. 
 
 ο = 2 Cor. X. 3. See note 
 
 pch. viii. 18h17 Paul. Heb. 
 
 r Acts iii. I(i. 1 Pet. i. 2U. 
 
 t ch. Ti. 13 reff. u Acts iii. I'J al. 
 
 II. 1., 11.. i.. u.!.. 1 . ci. .. 11 -1.- .11. J i. q een. obj., .seech, i. 26 reff. 
 
 s Matt. xiv. 2 II. 1 Cor. xii. Β al W Paul. James v. 16 only. Isa. xli.4 
 
 tol) Ambrst Ambr Sedul Ruf Pelag (not Tert Hil).— του to ίτιρω cm 109-78 al.— 4. for 
 τον σωμ., της χηί)ΐτης 238. — ανΰρι trfow 48. ϋ1-6 marg ^2. Γ21-22 marg all slav-ms 
 Pelag: atlerhis qui ά. g ν : ejus qui WW. — καρποροοίσωιην and -φυοίσαι FG : v( mor- 
 tificelis Deo Pelag. — 5. ημην D'. — bef τη σαρκ. om ii' FG. — τα δια τ. νομ. om 92' : for 
 
 her husband lives, she shall be called 
 (rof. : — and on this use of the future, as de- 
 claring what shall follow on a condition 
 being fulfilled, Winer, § 41. (i) an adul- 
 teress, if she attach herself to (beeome 
 the wife of) another husband : but if her 
 husband have died, she is free from the 
 law {τοϋ άΐ'δρός), SO that (it matters little 
 whether τον μι) is the result or the pur- 
 pose : it is better always to keep the latter 
 in view, and to regard the result in such 
 sentences as for the moment spoken of as 
 the purpose to which its constituents con- 
 tributed) she is not an adulteress, (for) 
 having attached herself to another hus- 
 band.' — So far all is clear. But when we 
 come to the application of the example, ihis 
 must carefully be borne in mind, as tending 
 to clear up all the confusion which has here 
 been found by commentators : — that the 
 Ap. is insisting on the fact, that death 
 
 DISSOLVES LEGAL OBLIGATION : but he is 
 
 not drawing an exact parallel between the 
 persons in his example, and the persons in 
 his application. The comparison might be 
 thus made in terms common to both: (1) 
 Death has dissolved the legal obliyalion 
 between man and wife : there/ore the wife 
 is at liberti/ to be married to another : — 
 (2) Death has dissolved the legal obliga- 
 tion between the law and us : there/ore we 
 are at libcrtg to be married to another. 
 So far the comparison is strict. Further it 
 will not hold : for in the example, the libe- 
 rated person is the survivor, — in the thing 
 treated, the liberated person is the dead 
 person. And so far from this being an 
 oversight or an inaccuracy, it is no more 
 than that to which, more or less, all com- 
 parisons are liable ; and no more can be 
 required of them than that they should fit, 
 in the kernel and intent of the similitude. 
 If it be required here to apjily the example 
 further, there is no difficulty nor inconsis- 
 
 tency in saying (as Chrys., al.) that our 
 first Husband was the Law, and our second 
 is Christ: but then it must be carefully borne 
 in mind, that we are freed, not by the law 
 having died to us, (which matter here is not 
 treated,) but by om?• having died to the law. — 
 It is not necessary with Calv. and Tholuck, 
 to suppose that in ver. 4 there is an euphe- 
 mistic inversion, ' we are dead to the law,' 
 instead of ' the law is dead to us ;' indeed 
 such a supposition would, from what is said 
 above, much weaken the argument, which 
 rests on our being slain loith Christ, and so 
 freed from the law. 4.] ' So that 
 
 (inference both from ver. 1, the general 
 fact, that vv. 2, .3, the example) my bre- 
 thren, ye also (as well as the woman in 
 my example, who is dead to the law of her 
 husband) were slain to the law {crucified, 
 see Gal. ii. 19, 20. The more violent word 
 is used instead of άτηθάνίτι, to recall the 
 violent death of Christ, in which, and after 
 the manner of which, believers have been 
 put to death to the law and sin, — and the 
 historic aorist, to remind them of the great 
 Event by which this was brought about) 
 by means of the (crucified) Body (comp. 
 δια της ττροςφοοάς τυϊΊ σώματος τυΰ Ίησ. 
 χρ., Heb. χ. 10) of Christ, that you 
 should become the (property) of another, 
 (even) of Him who has been raised from 
 the dead (alluding both to the comparison 
 in vv. 2, 3, ysi'urai άνδρΐ ίτίρψ, and to 
 ch. vi. 4, Sjf'lva ώ'ςτΓ. i)yf^j0// χριστός, (τ.Γ.λ.) 
 that we should (here strictly final, as 
 Thol., Meyer, De W., &c. Not merely 
 ecbatic, as Fritzsche) bring forth fruit 
 (alluding to καρπόν, ch. vi. 22, and at the 
 same time [Lukei. 4'?] carrying on the simi- 
 litude of marriage. Not that this latter must 
 be pressed, for there is only an allusion to 
 it : nor on the other hand need the least 
 objection be raised to such an understand- 
 ing of the words, as any one conversant
 
 4—7. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ΡΩΜΑΙΟΥ: 
 
 S5J 
 
 τω σαΐ'ατω 
 
 αποΟανοντίς 
 
 y 
 
 ^ι 
 
 eu 
 
 καιίΌτητι 
 ' Τι ουν 
 
 κατηρ-γησημίν αττο του 
 iv ω ^^ κατίΐνομίθα, ωςτε " δουλί 
 ^ πνεύματος και ου '' παΧαιοτητι 
 β()ονμίν ι ο νομός αμαρτία ; 
 
 νομού, :v=''iohnv.4. 
 r - ch. i. 18 reff. 
 
 R rfir. 
 
 ; cli. ii. 2!l reff. 
 Iiere only t. 
 Eurip. Hcl. 
 
 tviiv νμας xch 
 γράμματος. 
 ο νομοΓ αμαοτια ; " μτ} -ytvoiTO* 
 
 •^ ^ ^ ' Ι^ ' ι b eli.iii.4reff. 
 
 TOD v., της σαρκός Dial. — iv ova 93. — καοττοφορίΐν 17• — 6. rec αποθαί'οντος (see note), 
 with Β .'' al ? : for αποθ., τον θανάτου DEFG it ν (exc am') latt mentd by Ruf {but 
 Rnfeapr disapproves) Jer an : txt A(B?)CJK 17. 39. 44. 72-3-7. «0-9. 91-2. 106-8 to 
 11-13 alam• syrr copt an• aeth arm slav Goth Bas Cyr Chr Thcirt Dam al Tert Ruf-expr 
 Pelag {a\ipy). - κατηχουμέθα 62. 71 aeth. — ημάς om BFG : ins ACDEJK mss appy Chr 
 Thdrt al : add θίω slav Tert Aug. — 7. ευουμίν om 36 Orig Chr, (not Clem Tert) : add 
 
 with St. Paul's way of speaking on this sub- the argument connecting the law with si?}, 
 
 ject will at once feel : comp. 2 Cor. xi. 2. 
 Eph. V. 30-32) to (dat. commodi, ' to the 
 honour of) God.' 5, 6.] In the fleshly 
 
 state (before we died with Christ) sinful 
 passions which were by the Law worked 
 in us and brought forth fruit to death : 
 but now that we are dead to the law, we 
 are no longer servants in the slavery of the 
 letter, hut in the newness of the spirit. — 
 The Law (v. 20, alluded to again vi. 14) 
 was the multiplier of sin. To this thought, 
 and the inferences from it, the Ap. now 
 recurs, and contrasts the state under the 
 law in this respect, with that of the behever 
 in Christ. ' For when we were in the 
 flesh (= 'under the law:' so almost all 
 comm., ancient and mod., — exc. Beza, 
 Bengel, Reiche, and Thol , who take it to 
 mean the mere fleshly state, in which the 
 Spirit is not yet energizing, and Ambrst., 
 Calov., Olsh., al., who interpret it the state 
 of the unregenerate. But how does iv 
 σαρκί denote ' under the law .' ' Some say, 
 on account of its cartiality, as more or less 
 Theodoret, Oec, Hammond, Grot., al. : 
 some, on account of the power of sin under 
 the law, — as Chrys., Theophyl., Calv., al. : 
 best of all is it to understand it, with 
 Riickert, KoUner, Meyer, Fritz., De Wette, 
 as pointing to the period before death with 
 Christ, in which we were sensual and sin- 
 ful : so that ir σαιικΐ tlvai forms a contrast 
 νί\1\\θιιιατωθΐΊναι. But, as DeW. observes, 
 it must not with Fritz, be rendered ' quum 
 vivercmus,' as this is never the sense of tv 
 σαρκΊ fij/iii, — not even 2 Cor. x. 3: nor, I 
 may add, Phil. i. 24) the incitements ('pas- 
 sions of sins,' objective gen., wliiili led to 
 sins: not by hendiadys for παΟίιμ.-άμαρ- 
 το)\ά, which, as always, destroys the force) 
 to sins, which were by means of the 
 law (the incitements, — not the sins, \n this 
 place, thougli ultimately it was so, the in- 
 citement leading to tlie sin. The full mean- 
 ing of lui τον I όμοιι must be kept, ' which 
 wen; by iiieans of the law :' i.e. the law 
 occasioned them. Locke argues for the 
 rendering, ' under the law,' ' in the time of 
 the law,' which would destroy the force of 
 
 here put so strongly as to require the 
 question of ver. 7) wrought (' energized : ' 
 not pass., but middle : see note on Gal. 
 V. 6) in our members (the instruments 
 of sin, ch. vi. 13) to the bringing forth 
 of fruit (see on τοϋ μι) ver. 3 : the καρ- 
 πο0. was the final object of their ener- 
 gizing, not the mere result. — In καρπυφ. 
 here, the allusion to progeny is very distant, 
 if it exists at all. Meyer makes it refer to 
 an adulterous state, and personifies θάνατος ; 
 but this can hardly be) unto death' (only 
 a verbal antithesis to τφ Oup : — 'whose 
 end was death') : 6.] ' But now (op- 
 
 posed to tire, ver. 5) have we been de- 
 livered (annulled) from the law, having 
 died (to that) wherein we were held 
 (the reading αποθανόντος cannot even be 
 brought into discussion, as it appears to be 
 only a conjecture of Beza's, arising from a 
 misunderstanding of the text (and of Chry- 
 sostom's commentary, who did not read it), 
 — see above on ver. 1 : the other reading, τον 
 θάνατον, is a correction to suit ver. 5. So 
 that tv ψ either refers directly to νόμον, 
 ότΓοθαί'όντις being absolute and paren- 
 thetic, or we must understand ϊκείνφ aft. 
 άποθ. I prefer the latter, as suiting better 
 the style of the Ap. and the whole con- 
 nexion. The omission of the demonstra- 
 tive pron. probably is occasioned by a 
 desire to give especial prominence to the 
 fact of άποΟανόντις, or perhaps on ac- 
 count of the prcjjos. από in composition, 
 as in ch. x. 14, πώς ουν ίπικαλίσωΐ'ται ίίς 
 ον οΰκ- ϊπίστίνσαιι ;) SO that we Serve 
 (not ' should serve,' as E. V. : the jires. de- 
 scribes the actual state : — understand ' God' 
 after serve) in the new life of the Spirit 
 (i. e. of the Holy Spirit of God, who ori- 
 ginates and penetrates the Christian life : — 
 the flrst mention of the Spirit so much 
 spoken of in ch. viii ) and not in the old 
 life of the letter ' (the law Ijcing only a 
 collection of precepts and ])rohiljitions, but 
 the Gospel a service of freedom, ruled by the 
 S))irit, whose presenile is liberty), καινότης 
 and πιιλαιάτης are not as in ch. vi. 4, και- 
 νότητι ζωής, attributes of the genitives
 
 352 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 VII. 
 
 '''cai i^'ia ''' «λλα ΤΎΐν αμαρτιαν ουκ ^ tyvωv η μι) δια νόμου' την *^ τε ABCd 
 c = 2Cor. χ. 8. "^ "γαρ '^'^ ίπιθυμιαν ουκ hoeiv, α μΐ} ο νομός ί:λ£7£ΐ' Ουκ 
 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 ΟΤΙ 17- 4(ί-8. 71-2. 177 allect40Thl. — εγνω2'Λ8. — γ£ om FG d g v.— for ιπιθ., αμαητιαν 
 109-7ii. — ΟΤΙ ο V. t\ty. 03. — 8. St om D (Lachm, not Scholz Tisch). — κατηηγατητο 
 D(E?) al. — aft vsKpa, add ην G 117 al d g ν Syr Jer Aug Sedul Ambrst Ruf-text Pel: 
 
 which follow them, but s fates in which 
 those genitives are the ruling elements. 
 7 — 25.] An explanation of the 
 part which the law has in bringing out sin, 
 by example of the Ap.'s own case. — In this 
 most im])ortant and Hifficult passage, it is 
 of the first consec|uence to have a clear 
 view of the form of illustration which the 
 A p. adopts, and of the reason tvhy he adopts 
 it. The former has been amply treated of 
 by almost all commentators : the latter, too 
 generally, has escaped their enquiry. But 
 it furnishes, if satisfactorily treated, a key 
 to the other. I ask then first, ivhy St. 
 Paul suddenly changes here to the first 
 person / And the answer is, because he is 
 about to draw a conclusion negativing the 
 question (ό νόμος άμαμτία ;) upon purely 
 subjective grounds, proceeding on that which 
 passes within, when the work of the law 
 is carried on in the heart. And he is about 
 to depict this work of the law by an example 
 which shall set it forth in vivid colours, in 
 detail, in its connexion with sin in a man. 
 What example then so apposite, as his otvn ? 
 Introspective as his character was, and pu- 
 rified as his inner vision was by the Holy 
 Spirit of God, what example would so 
 forcibly bring out the inward struggles of 
 the man which prove the holiness of the 
 law, while they shew its inseparable con- 
 nexion with the production of sin ? — If this 
 be the reason why the first person is here 
 assumed (and I can find no other which 
 does not introduce into St. Paul's style 
 an arbitrariness and caprice which it least 
 of all others exhibits), then we must dis- 
 miss from our minds all exegesis which 
 explains the passage of any other, in the 
 first instance, than of Paul himself : him- 
 self indeed, as an exemplar, yiherein others 
 may see themselves : but not himself in the 
 person of others, be they the Jews, nation- 
 ally or individually, or all mankind, or indi- 
 vidual 7nen. This being done, there arises 
 now a question equally important, — Of 
 V!hai self is it that he speaks throughout 
 this passage .' Is it always the same ? If so, 
 is it always the carnal, unregenerate self.' 
 or always the */'?'/i7«(3/, regenerate ? Clearly 
 not the taller always; for to that self thp his- 
 torical account of vv. 7 — 13 will not apply, 
 and still less the assertion, in the present, 
 of ver. 14. Clearly not the former alivays: 
 for to that the assertion of ver. 22 will not 
 
 apply, nor that of ver. 25. Is it always the 
 complex self, made up of the prevailing 
 spiritual regenerate, with the remains of the 
 carnal-unregenerate .' Not always this : 
 although this seems nearer to satisfying the 
 conditions : for in the description ver. 9, 
 ίγώ ίζων χωο/ς νόμιιν ποτ'ί, and in ίγώ 
 σάρκινος ιίμι κ.τ.\. ver. 14, there is no 
 complexity, but the iyio is clearly the car- 
 nal man. Therefore not always the same. 
 If not always the same, where is the dis- 
 tinction ? If we look carefully, the Ap. 
 himself will guide us to it. Having carried 
 on the 6•νώ unqualified and unexplained till 
 ver. 18, he there has occasion to say οΰκ 
 o'lKii iv ίμοϊ αγαθόν. But he is conscious 
 that, as he had written to the Cor. (1 Cor, 
 iii. Hi), Til ττνίνμα του (^fcu oiVtT tv νμΧν: 
 he therefore finds it necessary to correct 
 himself by an explanation, what ίγώ he 
 meant, and adds to tv ΐμοί, — τουτέστιν ev 
 TTj σαρκί μ.ου. So that ίγώ there is equi- 
 valent to ή σαρξ μην, i. e. ' myself in my 
 state of life to the law and sin, and acting 
 according to the motions of sin.' Again, 
 when the approval of the lazv of God is 
 affirmed (not the mere θίλω, which I will 
 treat by and by), it is not barely εγώ, but 
 to avoid confusion, in ver. 22 the Ap. adds 
 κατά τον Ισω ανθρωτΓον, and in ver. 25, 
 prefixes αντός ; in both cases shewing that 
 (see notes below) he speaks of the complex 
 man, himself made up of an ίσω and an 
 ίξω ανθρωττης, of ό ΐ'οϋς and »} σαρξ. Are 
 we then justified in assuming, that up to 
 ver. 22 the carnal-unregenerate self is 
 spoken of, but after that the complex self.' 
 Such a supposition would not be consistent 
 with the assertion of the θέλω from ver. 15 
 onwards : no such will existing in the car- 
 nal unregenerate man. I believe the true 
 account will be nearly as follows : — from 
 ver. 7 — 13 inch is historical, and the ίγώ 
 there is the historical self, under the work- 
 ing of conviction of sin, and shewing the 
 work of the law ; in other words, the car- 
 nal self in the transition state, under the 
 first motions towards God generated by the 
 law, which the law could never have per- 
 fected. Then at ver. 14, Paul, according to 
 a habit very common to him, keeps hold of 
 the carnal self, and still having it in view, 
 transfers himself into his present position, 
 — altering the past tense into the present, 
 still however meaning by iyw (in ver, 14),
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 ΟΟί 
 
 Ιπιθυμησίΐς' ^ αφοξ>μι]ν δε Χαβοΰσα η αμαρτία Sia τίίς *" υΕ^Ί.^ίκ 
 ίντοΛης ^ KaTiipyaaaro εν εμοι iraaau επιυνμιαν v.ia. xi.i2 
 
 13. 1 Tim. T. 14 only P.t f Jlatt. v. 1!) al. g ch. iv. δ reff. h = Acts xx. ly reft'. 
 
 ιστιΐ' 13. 26 Aug (somet) Ambr Ruf-comm.— 9. (ζην Β : txt (&c) Metli Chr Thdrt Dam 
 
 r/ σαρξ μου. But, having passed into the 
 present tense, he immediately mingles with 
 this mere action of the law upon the natural 
 conscience, the motions of the will towards 
 God which are in contlict with the motions 
 toward sin in the members. And hence 
 arises an apparent verbal confusion, because 
 the ίγώ, e. g. in ver. 17, of whom it is said, 
 οΰκ ϊτι ίγώ κατ(ρ•γάζομαι αυτό, being the 
 entire personality, the complejc aelf, is of 
 far wider extent than the iyio of whom it is 
 said οΰκ οικ-£Ϊ iv ίμ«Ί, τουτίστιν iv ry 
 σαυκί μον, αγαθόν. But the latter ίγώ, in 
 this part of the chapter, is shewn to be 
 (vv. 17. 20) no longer properly ίγώ, but ή 
 οικούσα ίν ίμοΊ αμαρτία, — and so it passes 
 altogether out of sight after ver. 20, and 
 its place is taken by the actual then exist- 
 ing complex self of Paul, compounded of 
 the regenerate spiritual man, sympathizing 
 ■with God's law, sei-ving God's law, in con- 
 flict with the still remaining though decadent 
 carnal man, whose essence it is to serve the 
 law of sin, to bring captive to the law of 
 sin. This state of conflict and division 
 against one's self would infallibh' bring 
 about utter ruin, and might well lead to 
 despair (ver. 23), but for the rescue which 
 God's grace has provided by Jesus Christ 
 our Lord. And this rescue has been such, 
 that I, the αυτός ίγώ of ver 25, the real 
 self, the nobler and better part of the man, 
 serve, with the νοΐις (see there) the law of 
 God : whereas it is only with the flesh, 
 according to which (viii. 4) I do not walk, 
 but overcome and mortify it, that I serve 
 (am still subject to) the law of sin. Then 
 this subjection of the flesh to the law of 
 sin, to the CovXiia τΓ/ς φθοράς, is fully set 
 out, in its nature, — conserji/ences to the car- 
 nal,— and tises to the spiritual, — in ch. viii. 
 ■ — Any thing like a summary of the exegesis 
 of this passage would be quite beyond my 
 limits. I must refer the student to com- 
 mentaries on this ejiistle alone, — and espe- 
 cially to that of Tholuck, where a complete 
 and masterly history is given. It may 
 suffice here to say, that most of the ancients 
 supposed ίγώ to represent mankind, or 
 the Jews generally, and the whole to be 
 taken chronologically, — to ver. 9 as be- 
 fore the law, after ver. 9 as under the 
 law. This was once Augustine's view, 
 Pro)). 44 in Ep. ad Rom., but he after- 
 wards changed it (Retract, i. 23) and 
 adopted in the main that advocated above. 
 — The default of a history of the exegesis 
 AuL. II. 
 
 will be found to be iu some measure com- 
 pensated bj' the account of opinions given 
 under the separate verses below. 
 7.] Tt ούν ep., see note, ch. vi. 1. 
 ό V. αμαρτία;] 'Is the law (not, as 
 Jowett, ' conscience,' but in our case, 
 the revealed law of God, wliich awoke 
 the conscience to action) sin 1 ' — not ' the 
 cause of sin,' which in one sense the Ap. 
 would not have denied,— but sin, abstr. 
 for concrete, sinful, or, as Bengel, ' causa 
 peccati peccaminosa.' ό νόμος itself being 
 abstract, that which is predicated of it is 
 abstract also. The contrast is, ό νόμος 
 άγιος, ver. 12. The question itself refers 
 back to ver. 5, τα παθήματα των αμαρ- 
 τιών τά ίιά του νόμου. It is asked, noi 
 by an objector, but by the Ap. himself, in 
 anticipation of an objection. αλλά] 
 
 Is 'but' here in contrast to ό νόμ. αμαρτ., 
 meaning, ' so far from that,' — or is it a 
 qualification of μή γίνοιτο meaning 'but 
 
 still it is true, that .' ' Neither espl. 
 
 exactly suits the context, which is, by a 
 proper elucidation of the law's working as 
 regards sin, to prove it to be holy. I would 
 rather understand άλλα, ' but what I mean 
 is . . .,' — ' I say not that, but . . .' There 
 surely is no contrast to ό νόμ. αμαρτία, see 
 ver. 8. οΰκ Ιγνων] ' non cognosce- 
 
 bam, ni . . . .,' — ' I was living in a stats 
 of ignorance of sin, were it not . . . .' 
 This constr. comprehends in it οΰκ αν 
 ίγνων as a consequence, and is therefore 
 often said to be put for it ; but it has its 
 propriety, as here, where a historical state 
 is being described, and the unconditional 
 indicative is more appropriate. Tholuck 
 makes it = ' non cognoveram, ni . . . .,' in 
 which case the indie, expresses more plainly 
 than the conjunctive the absolute depend- 
 ence of the fact on the condition. — There is 
 some difficulty in understanding the mutual 
 relation of the clauses, τήν άμ. ουκ ίγιων, 
 and Tijv Tt γαρ ίπιθ. οΰκ yciiv. It is well 
 known that Tt differs from και, in not coup- 
 ling things co-ordinate,hut attaching things 
 subordinate, to a former. Thus Thucyd. i. 
 9 begins 'Αγαμέμνων τι /noi doKil . . ., on 
 which Poppo remarks (cited by Thol.), 
 ' Sequitur exemplum auctfe Grsecorum opu- 
 lentise . . . ductum ex rebus Agamcmnonis 
 ct causis expeditionis Trojanre ;' an e*'- 
 ample being a subordinate verification of a 
 general categorical statement. The γόρ 
 also shews that the second clause is subor- 
 dinated to, and alleged in substantiation of 
 
 A Λ
 
 854 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 VII. 
 
 i ch. iii. 21. 
 
 k ^ Jiimes ii 
 
 17 «1. 
 1 (sabjective) 
 
 liere only. 
 
 See John ix. 41. 1 The 
 
 χω^οίς γαρ νομού αμαρτία νέκρα. " 
 
 νομού ποτέ. " ίλΟουσης δε της 
 
 iii. 8. m = John ix. 13. ch. xi. 3(1 al. 
 
 εγω οε εί,ων χοιρ(ς 
 
 Thl Oec. 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 
 εντολής η αμαρτία JK 
 
 η = but obj., Gal. iii. 23, 25. 
 
 for ανίζ., ίζησίν 48. 72.— 10. η (2nd) om J 48. 77• 109 al Chr (Mtt's mSi). 
 
 the first. Then what is αμαρτία .' Is it 
 sin in act, or sin in principle, — the prin- 
 ciple of sin ? Not sin in act, so that ό/ί. 
 οϊ'κ fyj'. should mean, '/ had not known 
 sin,' i.e. 'had not sinned;' as Fritz. : for 
 then the law would have truly and actually 
 been the cause of sin : nor, sin in act, so 
 that the meaning were, ' / had not knotrn 
 the nature of a sinful act:' for this would 
 not agree with the subordination of ίττιθυ- 
 μίη below: the ίτηθ. being more general 
 (τΓοίΐη)/ ίπιΟ.) than the particular acts 
 which it induced. But the reference must 
 be to sin in principle, the principle of sin : 
 ' I had not recognized such a thirg as 
 sin, but by means of the law.' So Calv., 
 Melancth., Calov., Riickert, Kolln., Olsh., 
 Thol., De Wette. — ' The law ' here is in 
 the full sense of the Mosaic latr as regarded 
 himself, — not e.xcluding the wider sense on 
 which I have insisted in the former part of 
 the Ep., when apphed to others. 
 την τ£ γαρ . . . .] ' For neither (' neque 
 enim ') had I known (by experience : 
 'known any thing of) concupiscence (the 
 motions of the flesh towards sin, — whether 
 acted on or not, — whether consented to or 
 not : — this motion he would not have per- 
 ceived, because he was simply moving with 
 it) if the law had not said. Thou shalt 
 not desire' (Exod. x.x. 17• Deut. v. 21). 
 ' Desire,' in the above sense. The Ap. omits 
 all the objects there specified, and merely 
 lays hold of the idea contained in ίπιθνμη- 
 σας. And it may well be said and strictly, 
 that the ' desire ' there spoken of would 
 lead to all kinds of sin — therefore murder, 
 adultery, &c., if carried out : and that the 
 prohibition of desire there series as an ex- 
 ample of what the law actually forbids else- 
 where. 8.] ' But (proceeding with 
 the development of sin by means of the 
 law) sin (the sinful principle or propensity, 
 but without any conscious personification 
 on the part of the Αρ., — see some excellent 
 remarks on personification in Tholuck) 
 taking occasion (άφηρμη, as its derivation 
 indicates, means more than mere oppor- 
 tunity, — it indicates the furnishing the 
 material and ground of attack, the where- 
 with and whence to attack. The words 
 here are not to be joined, as Luth., Olsh., 
 Meyer, with ίιά τ. ίντο\ης : — for (1) 
 άψορμ. λαβίΐν διά would not express 
 whence the άφηρμη is taken, as -παρά or 
 tie, but only bi/ what means some ά^. is 
 taken from some source, — which would not 
 
 here suit the Ap.'s meaning, seeing that the 
 source itself was the commandment, — and 
 (2) ver. 13, Sui rov άγ. Kartpy., decides 
 the matter here, — but absohiteh/, as fre- 
 quently, see AVetst.), by means of the 
 commandment (not '^^ του νόμον, but the 
 tenth commandment, the prohibition in 
 question) wrought in me (not ' wrotight 
 out,' 'brought into action,' but ' originated') 
 all (manner) of concupiscence ; for with- 
 out the law sin is (not ' was :' the omis- 
 sion of the verb substantive shews the sen- 
 tence to be a locus communis, — and comp. 
 ch. iv. 15) dead' (yiowerless and inactive : 
 comp. 1 Cor. xv. 56, >'/ δΰΐΊίμις τ. αμαρ- 
 τίας ο νόμος) —This deadness of sin with- 
 out the law must not be understood as 
 meaning that sin was committed but not 
 recognized, the conscience being not in- 
 formed nor awakened : such a statement 
 would be trtie, but would 7iot touch the 
 matter argued here. Erasmus (Thol.) well 
 explains the νίκρά, — ' Quum ante legem 
 proditam (but see below) qusedam peccata 
 nescirem, qusedam ita scirem, ut mihi tamen 
 licere putarem, quod vetita non essent, — 
 levius ac languidius sollicitabatur animus 
 ad peccandum, ut frigidius amamus ea, 
 quibus ubi libeat potiri fas sit. Cseterum 
 legis indicio proditis tot peccati formis, 
 universa cupiditatum cohors irritata prohi- 
 bitione coepit acrius ad peccandum sollici- 
 tare.' Compare also Prov. ix. 17, and 
 (Wetst.) Ovid, Amor. ii. 19. 3, ' Quod Hcet 
 ingratum est, quod non licet acrius urit :' 
 and ib. iii. 4. 17, 'Nitimur in vetitum 
 sem))er, cupimusque negata:' and Seneca, 
 de Clem. i. 23 (Thol.), ' Parricidse cum lege 
 cceperunt, et illis facinus poena monstravit :' 
 and a remarkable passage from Cato's speech 
 in Livy xxxiv. 4, ' Nolite eodem loco exis- 
 timare, Quirites, futuram rem, quo fuit, 
 antequam lex de hoc ferretur. Et hominem 
 improbum non accusari tutius est, quam 
 absolvi, et luxuria non mota tolerabiUor 
 esset, quam erit nunc, ipsis vinculis, sicut 
 fera bestia, irritata, deinde emissa.' 
 9.] It is a great question with Interpp., of 
 what period Paul here speaks. Those who 
 sink his own personality, and think that he 
 speaks merely as one of mankind, or of the 
 Jews, understand it of the jieriod before 
 the law was given : some, of Adam in 
 Paradise before (.') the prohibition : those 
 who see Paul himself throughout the whole 
 think that he speaks,— some, of his state as 
 a Pharisee : this however v>ould necessitate
 
 9— 13. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 355 
 
 ο ch. xiv. 9 rec. 
 Luke XT. 24, 
 32 Rev, XX. 
 
 5 reef. 
 ρ = Acts xxir. 
 
 5al. 
 q ellips., ver. 5. 
 r = Sec Levit. 
 
 xTiii.ft. Gal. 
 
 iii. 12. 
 s = ch. V. 12. 
 tch. xvi. 18. 
 
 1 Cor. ill. 18. 
 
 2 Cor.xi.3. 
 2 Thes.<. ii. 3. 
 1 Tim. ii. 14 
 only. Exod. 
 viii. 21». vat. 
 
 u = here only. 
 
 See ver. 10. 
 ch. iu. 4. xi. 6. 
 ίρβ-, 2 Cor. iv. 
 
 ° αΐ'εζησεν, Εγώ δε απίθανην' και ^ ευρίθη μοι η ίντοΧη 
 η '^ tig ' ζωηΐ', αυτή ** εις " θάνατον. η yap αμαρτία 
 
 '^ αφορμην Χαβουσα δια της ίΐ'τοΧης εζ.ητΓάτησεν με, και 
 δι αυτής " απεκτίΐιην. ωςτε ο "^ μεν νομός ayiog, και η 
 
 έντοΧι) ayia και δικαία και ayaΘη. Το ούν ayaBov 
 
 εμοι εyεvετo θάνατος ; ^ μη ykvoiTO' αΧΧά η αμαρτία. Ίνα 
 φαντι αμαρτία, οιά του αγοθοΰ μοι "" κaτεpyaZ,oμεvη 
 θάνατον, Ίνα " yεvητaι * καθ υπερβοΧην ^ αμαρτωΧος η 
 
 πα Mf " solitar., Col. ii. 23 refl'. τ ch. iii. 4 reft'. w ch ii. 9 reft". χ ■= 
 
 1 Cor. xiii. 1 al. ylCor. xu. 31. 2 Cor. i. 8. iv. 17. Gal. i. 13. Paul only, iin 
 
 7. xii. 7 oniyt. ζ — here only. 
 
 — 11. {or (ζη-π•., conculcavit (είίττατησίν) ieth. — 12. «για και om 46 Tert, : ΰικαια και 
 om 2. 02- Tertj. — for αγαθί], θαυμαστή 47. — 13. εμοι ay. arm : ay. tv f/ioi 49. 70. 114. 
 — rec for tytvtTo, yiyovt {corrn, the historic aor not being understood), with JK mss 
 nrly (appy) Chr Tlidrt Thl Oec : om FG : txt ABCDE 47. 73. 80 al ileth Dam : est A g 
 Ambrst Jer Ruf. — rec aWa, with DEJ(K?) : txt (A uncert) BCFG &c. — aft ψανη, ins η 
 17• 67'. 122 al Chr. — του om 17. — η αμαρτ. αμαρτωλ. D(E.')FG it tol arm Aug, Ambrst : 
 
 the understanding the legal death which 
 follows, of his conversion, which cannot 
 well be : some, of his state as a child, be- 
 fore that freedom of the will is asserted 
 which causes rebellion against the law as 
 the will of another : so Meyer, Thol., al. 
 Agreeing in some measure with the last 
 view, I would extend the limits further, and 
 say that he speaks of all that time, be it 
 mere childhood or much more, before the 
 law began its work within him, — before 
 the deeper energies of his moral nature were 
 aroused (see on ίλθούση? below). — ' But 
 (ίζωΐ' opposed, but only formally, to νεκρά, 
 and so having ζί : so Meyer and De W.) 
 I was alive (not merely ' lived,' ' went on,' 
 but emphatic, ' vivus eram,' as Aug., i. e. 
 ' lived and flourished,' — contrasted with 
 άπ'εθανον below) without the law (the 
 law having no recognized place in my moral 
 existence) once ; but when the command- 
 ment (above, ver. 8) came (purely sub- 
 jective ; not ' was enacted,' ' came in,' — 
 but ' came to me,' as we say, ' came home 
 to me,' ' was brought home to me '), sin 
 sprung into life (not 'revived:' however 
 true it may be that sin was merely dor- 
 mant, the idea insisted on here, is, tliat 
 it was dead and came to life, begun to 
 live and flourish : — but this is not to 
 be compared with άνίβΧί-φα in John ix. 
 11; see note tliere) — 10.] but I died' 
 (ceased to live-and-flourish as before, — fell 
 into that state of unhappiness, which ever 
 afterwards under the gospel he calls Οά- 
 νατυς, ver. 24, ch. viii. 2) : ' and (not 
 
 an additional particular, but = ' and so,' 
 — merely changing the subject from ' I,' 
 to 'the commandment') the command- 
 ment, which v/as for (tending to) life 
 (conip. ch. X. 5, ύ ποιί^σας αυτά ανΰρω- 
 
 Α 
 
 ■πος ζήσίται 'εν αΰτοϊς, and refF. there : 
 the life is one of prosperity primarily, 
 but capable of, and indeed requiring [x. δ] 
 a higher interpretation), this (very com- 
 mandment) {α'ΰτη is more forcible than 
 αντί), see Matt, xxiv. 13. Winer, § 23. 3) 
 was found (subjective — οΰκ είπεν, 'ότι ή 
 έΐ'Γολί) γί'γονε μοι θάνατος, άλλ' βυρεθη, 
 Γ0 καινύν και τταράδοζον της άτυπίας 
 οϋτως ίρμηνενων, Chrys.) to be to me 
 unto (tending to) death ' (explained on 
 άπέθ. above). 11.] ' For (explanatory 
 
 how ver. 10 happened) sin (the sinful prin- 
 ciple within me) taking occasion (absol. as 
 in ver. 8, where see note), — by means of 
 the commandment deceived me (there is 
 a plain reference to the Tempter deceiving 
 Eve, which was accomplished by means of 
 the commandment, exciting doubt of and 
 objection to it, and lust after the forbidden 
 thing: see 2 Cor. xi. 3), and by it slew 
 me ' (' brotight me into the state nf misery 
 and death ,•' — but there is an allusion again 
 to the efl'ect of the fall, as the act of the 
 Tempter). 12.] ' So that (seeing it 
 
 was not the law in general, nor this par- 
 ticular commandment, that wrought concu- 
 piscence in me, but the sinful priiiciple in 
 me taking advantage of these, which them- 
 selves were given εις ζωην and not εις 
 θάνατον) the law (indeed) is holy (nkv, 
 as understanding a δι to follow — ' but it 
 was sin,' &c. : which does follow in an ex- 
 panded form, in ver. 13), and the com- 
 mandment {ovK ίπιθυμήτεις, ver. 8) holy 
 and just and good ' (Theodoret thus ac- 
 counts for the epithets : άγίαν ^τo<ίςηyό- 
 ρευσεί' ώς το δί-ον διΰαζασην 8ικαίαν Ce, 
 ώς• όί^θώς τοΙς παραβάταις τιιν φΐΊφον 
 t^tvtyKovaav άγαθήν ίε, ώς ζωίιν τοΙς 
 ψυλάττουσιν εύτρεπίζυυσαν. See also 
 
 A 2
 
 856 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ΡΩΜΑΙΟΥΣ. 
 
 VII. 
 
 αμαρτία όια της εντοΧης 
 
 14 y.^ 
 
 1 Cor. iii. 1. 
 xiv. 1 Hit. 
 
 b 1 Ciir. ill. 1. 
 
 2 Cor. iii. 3. 
 
 "' πνευματικός εστίν, εγω ό£ 
 
 f ν ν Γ ι 1 κ Λ \ 
 
 υτΓΟ Ti]v ομαρτίον. ο ya^) 
 ου yap υ ϋεΧι 
 
 οΊ^αμεν γαρ οτι ο νομός abcd 
 σάρκινος ειμί '^ ΐΓεπξ)αμενος JK. 
 " κατερ-γά^ομαι ου "γινωσκω' 
 αλλ υ μισώ, τούτο ττοιω. 
 
 •ναρ υ (7εΛω ττρασσω, 
 
 Eztk. χι ΐη. C = liert- only. 4 Kings xvii. 17. 1 Mhcc. 
 
 peccatur aut (7;) pecca/um Aug : elsvv deiinquens per mandatum. — 14. for οώαμίν, scio 
 Jer.— for yap, St ADEJ 120-24 al syr-marg Orig, Cyr Thdrt Aug, llil Ruf Ambr Bed : 
 om teth arm Augj Jer,. — rec σαρκικός {corrn to more usual and appy more appropriate 
 ivord? hut the two are constly confused), with JK? &c Orig Ciir Tlidrt-h-1 Phot Thl 
 Oec : t.\t ABCDEFG I?. 35. 48. 61-7. 73. 80-7. 1 13--7S-7U al Meth Eph Nyss Bas Cyr 
 Thdrt Dam. — 15. aft θίλω, ins ayutior 106 v-ed harl arm (om arm-venet) Sedul Bed 
 (Cyr). — rec bef ττρ. ins τυυτο {corrn for uniformity), with AB.'C &c vss Chr Thdrt al 
 Aug al : om DEFG it copt Goth Meth Pelag Ambr, al (ττοιω and πμασσω transp 80. 91. 
 
 1 Tim. i. 8.) 13.] ' Did then the 
 
 good (= ' that which was good,' i. e. ή ir- 
 τολίι, but made abstract for the sake of 
 greater contrast) become death (so ο ΐ'ό/*., 
 αμαρτία, ver. 7) to me ? ' — Was it, after all, 
 i/te commandment itself that became to me 
 this death of which I speak ? — ' Far from 
 it : but (it was) sin (that became death to 
 me. — The constr. adopted by Vulg., Luth., 
 al., άλλα j'/ αμαρτία, 'ίνα <pavij αμ., δια τ. 
 ay. μοι κατιργαζυμίνί] [j/r] θάιατυν, is 
 hardly admissible); — that it might appear 
 (be shewn to be) sin, (by) working death 
 to me by means of the good ' (that which 
 was good : see above). — The misuse and 
 perversion of good is one of the tests 
 whereby the energy of evil is detected ; so 
 that sin, by its perversion of the (good) 
 commandment into a cause (evil) of death, 
 was shewn in its real character as sin. 
 That this is the rendering is evident by the 
 following clause, which is parallel with it. 
 Erasm., Valla., Eisner, Dr. Burton, al., 
 make αμαρτία the subject : ' that sin might 
 appear to be working death,' &c. (' so that 
 sin appears to have effected my death,' &c. 
 Dr. Burton, most ungrammatically) : there 
 is no objection to this on the ground of 
 άμηρτ. being anarthrous, as even Bp. Mid- 
 dleton himself reluctantly acknowledges ; — 
 the objection lies in the context, as above. 
 ϊνα γ€νηται, κ.τ.λ.] ' that (explains 
 and runs parallel with the former 'ίνα, as in 
 
 2 Cor. ix. 3, where he adds to the 2nd 
 'ίνα, καθώς tXtyov) sin might, hy the 
 commandment, become above measure 
 sinful :' i. e. that sin, which was before un- 
 known as such, might, being vivified and 
 brought into energy by (its opposition to) 
 the commandment, be brought out as being 
 (not merely ' sheu-n to be ') exceedingly sin- 
 ful (sinful in an exaggerated degi-ee — ^jiro- 
 minent in its true character as the opponent 
 of God). 14.] On the change into 
 the present tense here, see above in the 
 remarks on the whole section. Hitherto 
 has been historical : now the Ap. passes to 
 
 the present time, keeping hold yet of the 
 carnal ίγώ of former days, whose remnants 
 arc still energizing in the renewed man. — 
 ' For (by way of explaining and setting in 
 still clearer light the relative positions of 
 sin and the law, and the state of inner con- 
 tlict brought about by their working) we 
 know (it is an acknowledged principle 
 amongst us, see reff.) that the law is spi- 
 ritual (sprung from God, who is a Spirit, 
 and requiring of men spiritual purity. These 
 meanings, which have been separately held 
 by diflerent commentators, may, as Thol. 
 and De W. observe, well be united) : but I 
 (see beg. of section) am carnal {σάρκινος, 
 stronger than σαρκικός ; carneus rather than 
 carnalis, — but it is doubtful whether the 
 two endings were not used indiscriminately : 
 see Tholuck), sold (into slavery, see reff. : 
 but the similitude must not be exacted in 
 all particulars, for it is only the fact of 
 slavery, as far as its victim, the man, is con- 
 cerned, which is here prominent) under (to, 
 and so as to be under the power of) sin.' — 
 Tholuck (who differs from the view of this 
 section advocated above, yet) adds here : 
 " The ίγώ appears here in its totality as sin- 
 ful, while in vv. 16, 20 it is distinguished 
 from sin. That Paul does not here bear in 
 mind this distinction, may be justified by 
 the maxim, ' a potiori lit denominatio ;' 
 the εγώ is a slave, and has not his own 
 will : as ver. 23 shews, the έγώ which is 
 hostile to sin, the νόμος τον ναός, is under 
 coercion, and the man is a captive. So 
 Arrian in Epict. ii. 22 : οπού yap το ίγώ 
 και το ΐμον, ΐκίΐ ανάγκη pkntiv τι) ζώον, 
 ίΐ έν σαρκΐ, ίκίΊ το κυρκυον tlvai, ti tv 
 vpoaip'tafi, ΐκίΐΐ'ο (qu. Ικη ?) th'ai." — The 
 latter clause of the verse is the very strong- 
 est assertion of man's subjection to the 
 slavery of sin in his carnal nature. 
 15.] ' For (a jiroof of this πεπράσθηι under 
 sin, viz. not being able to do what 1 would, 
 vv. 15 — 17) that which I do (am in the 
 habit of doing) I know not (act bhndly, at 
 the dictates of another : which is ])roper to
 
 14—19. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 857 
 
 Xen. Aanb. 
 
 ϊ. Χ. 8. 
 
 - 2 Cor. xiii. 
 
 700 OTi ουκ: ee^i'ch.xi.O. 
 ' 1 ver. 13. 
 
 ^ ει δε ο ου θίλω, τοϋτο ττοιώ, συμφημι τω νομω on a here only t 
 κάλος, ' νυνι οε ουκ εη εγω κατίρ-γαί,υμαι αυτό, 
 
 αΛΛα τ; οικούσα ευ εμθ( αμαρτία, οιοα 
 
 οικεί εν ειχοι, τουτέστιν εν τη σαρκι μου, ayauov. ro gc'.nstir. λ. 
 
 ' ' t' i Γ ' / viii. 9. 1 Cor. 
 
 ^ /3'Λ i ' ' ^^>f 'yfl ^ iii.lii vv IS. 
 
 yap uiAeiv παρακίΐται μοι, το οε KaTepyaCtauai το ao. ccn. iv! 
 
 λ\ >/ in 5 \ Λλ/-« - ' η'.'ΛΛ»*^ jlrt. xvi. 3. 
 
 ov ου. ου yap ο υελω ττοιω ayauov αΛΛ ο ουίΐΑοΐ5χιχ.4 
 
 i ver. 21 only t. Horn. Oil. xxii. 6.i. Polyb. iv. 38. 7. iii. ό7. 8. Xen. Anab. vii. 3. 22. 
 
 1 10-11. 238 al). — τοντο 7Γονη()ον ποιώ 106 v-ed arm Cyr Sedul Bed. — 16. aft θέλω ins 
 iyai 37-9• 113-14. — for κάλος, καλόν ίστιν FG. — 17. for ουκετι, ουκ 33-5. 55 al Syr 
 ar-erp setli (appy) Sedul 3ύτ^^αντω 10(;-9. — rec αλλ, with AC(Ki) &c : txt BDEFGJ 
 &c. — for οικουσίί, ίΐ'οικουσα Β Ambrst (εΐ'οικίΐ am Ambrst and foUg ver) : txt (MSS &c) 
 Clem Meth Chr Thdrt al lat-ft". — 18. οιδαμιν 48. — iv ΐμοι, τουτέστιν om Iren Augi (not 
 Clem). — TO αγαθ. FG 121-77 al Meth Cyr. — ro γαρ κατεργ. το ayatiov FG. — rec aft 
 ov {υυχ), ins ενρισκω {see note), with DEF(oy(c)GJK &c vss Chr Thdrt Thl Oec Jer 
 Sedul al : γινωσκω 73 : «χω seth : om ABC 47. OT- 80 al copt arm {ονχ ενρ. arm-marg) 
 Meth Procl Cyr gr-mss-mentd-by-Aug Aug-oft. — 19. αγαθυν τούτο ττοιω (see ver 1δ) ν 
 
 autem quum ita sit ;' not of time, as Grot., 
 ' nunc post legem datam,' — or Koppe, ' ex 
 quo Christianus factus sum ') it is no 
 longer (not a chronological, but a logical 
 sequence, ^ it can no more be said, t//at:' 
 see ref.) I that do it {κατεργ. as recalling 
 ver. 8), but sin that dwelleth in me.' 
 — Here the tydi is 7iot the coynplex respon- 
 sible self, by which the evil deed is wrought, 
 and which incurs the guilt of working it : 
 but the self of the will in its higher sense, 
 the εσω άνθρωπος of ver. 22. The not 
 bearing this in mind has led to error in in- 
 terpretation and doctrine : e. g. when it is 
 supposed that the Christian is not respon- 
 sible for his sins committed against his spi- 
 ritual will and higher judgment : whereas 
 we are all responsible for the έργα of the 
 sin that dwelleth in us, and it is in this very 
 subjection to and involution with the law of 
 sin in our members, that the misery consists, 
 which leads to the cry in ver. 24. 
 18.] An ejcplanation of the οίκοΰσα tv 
 ίμοί αμαρτία of the last ver. — 'For I 
 know (by experience, detailed in the next 
 ver.) that there dwells not in me, that 
 is, in my flesh (any) good (thing).' I 
 said, sin that dwelleth in me, because I feel 
 sure, from experience, that in me (meaning 
 by ' me' not that higher spiritual self in 
 which the Spirit of God dwells, but the 
 lower carnal self: see on this important 
 limitation the remarks at the beginning of 
 the section), dwells no good thing. And 
 what is my proof of this.' How has expe- 
 rience led me to this knowledge .' — ' For 
 (the proof from experience) the wish (to 
 do good) is present with me {παρ., not 
 metaphorical, see reff'., but, as προκεΐμαιλη 
 Homer, used commonly of meats served up 
 to, lying before, any one) ; but to do that 
 which is good, is not (the absence οίίΰοιακω 
 in ABC, and tlio variations, of γινώσκω,ΐχω, 
 — and besides, the somewhat unusual tcrnii- 
 
 a slave, σκοτοϋμαι φησί, συναρπάζομαι, 
 επι'ιριιαν νπομίνω, ούκ olSa πώς υπο- 
 σκελίζομαι, Chrys. The meaning, ^lap- 
 prove not,' introd. by Aug. and held by 
 Erasm., Beza, Grot., Estius, Semler, al., is 
 not sanctioned by usage, — see note on 1 Cor. 
 viii. 3, — and would make the following clause 
 almost a tautology) : for (expln of last as- 
 sertion, shewing how such blind service 
 comes to pass) not what I wish, that do I 
 (this θέλω is not the /«// determination of 
 the will, the standing with the bow drawn 
 and the arrow aimed;— but rather the in- 
 clination of the will, — the taking up the 
 bow and pointing at the mark, but without 
 power to draw it : — we have θέλω in the 
 sense of to trish, 1 Cor. vii. 7• 32 ; xiv. 5. 
 2 Cor. xii. 20), but what I dislike (= οΰ 
 θ'ίλω, ver. 19 : no distinction in intensity 
 between θ'ελω and μισώ) that I do' (no 
 distinction here between πράσσω and πυιώ, 
 as apparently in John iii. 20, 21, where see 
 note : for they are interchanged in vv. 1 9, 
 20). — The comm. cite several parallel pas- 
 sages from profane vsriters : e. g. Seneca, 
 Hippol. G04, ' Vos testor omnes coelites, hoc 
 quod volo, me nolle ;' — Epictetus, Enchiri- 
 dion u. 2C, ίπε'ι γάρ 6 άμαρτάνων ov θέλει 
 άμαρτάνειν, άλλα κατηρΟώσαι, δηλον Ότι 
 ο μέν θέλει ου ποιεί, καϊ ο μη θέλει ποιεί: 
 — the well known lines of Ovid, Met. vii. 
 19, ' aliudque cupido. Mens aliud suadet : 
 video meliora proboque, Deteriora se(]Uor :' 
 — Plautus, Trinummus iii. 2. 31, ' Scibam 
 nt esse me deceret, facere non quibam 
 miser :' — &c. 16.] ' But if (= ' iiov: 
 
 seeing that ,•' takes up the foregoing and 
 draws an inference from it) what I wish 
 not, that I do, I agree with (bear witness 
 to) the law that it is good ' (viz. ' in that 
 the law prohibits what / a/.w dislike,— the 
 law and I are as one in proscribing the thing, 
 — the law, and mg wish, tend the same 
 way'). 17.] 'Now however (' cpiod
 
 358 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 νίΓ. 
 
 ω κακόν, τούτο ττρασσω. ^ ει ^ε υ ου Οί\ω, τοΰτο 
 ΤΓΟιω, ουκ ϊτι εγω κaτίpya^oμaι αυτό, αλλ η ^ οικούσα 
 
 j = Arts xix. θίλ 
 
 19. xxvn.as. 
 k — Heb. τϋ. 
 
 IH. 
 kk ch. ii. !> reff. 
 Ihereunly. jp εΐΙΟί aUaOTla 
 
 Xrii. Mem. "^ '^ i 
 
 Hmid.m 36. f/UOi πυΐίΐυ τυ κάλο 
 
 Enrip. Med. n.-\ i 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 13H, 
 m Eph. iii. 16. 
 See 2 Cor. iv. 
 
 Ifi. ό ivTOi 
 
 Άιθρ.. Plat. 
 
 Rep. ix. p. 
 
 Γ18Λ 
 n = andconstr., 
 
 Heb. X. 25. 
 = Matt. viii. 21 al. 
 Ezek. xii. 3 alex 
 
 συνη^ομαί 
 Ιρωπον, 
 
 ίυρισκω αρα τον 
 
 " ' > kk > 
 
 ov, ΟΤΙ ίμοι το κακόν 
 τω νομίύ του 
 
 ανΟβωττον, " βλεπι 
 
 U 
 
 ο " 
 
 vo^jov τα> ΌίΑοντι 
 
 ' παρακειταί. 
 
 εου κατά '" τον εσω 
 
 ρ 'Λ ' 
 
 και 
 
 μί/ 
 
 ετίρον νομον εν τοις 
 
 q ' / - k ' - ' 
 
 μου αντιστξ>ατίυομενον τω νομω του νοος μου, 
 
 "^ αινμαλωτί^οντα με τω νομω ^ της αμαρτίας τω οντι εν 
 
 pch.Ti. 13. qheieonlyt. r Luke xxi. 24. 2 Cor. χ. 5. 2 Tim. iii. β only. 
 
 3 genit., = ch. vi. 6, 
 
 arm Jer (somet) Ruf-comm. — aWa Β : txt ACDG. — ου θίλω om G (Scho. Lachm, not 
 Tisch) : μίσω F v-si.\t. Thclrt Aug-somet Ruf-comm. — 20. rec aft θε\ω ins tyio {corrn 
 for emphasis: or for conformity with (γιο below/), with AJK &c copt syr al Thdrt 
 Thl-text Oec Aug-oft : aift τοντο 219 Clem Jer: bef ου Chr-text : om BCDEFG 31. 49. 
 61. 73. 80. 109-24 al lect 40 it ν Syr tetli arm Cyr Chr (Mtt's ms,) Thlcomm Amb 
 Pelag Augi Ambrst al. — aft ουκ en om εγω (>1. — άλλη BD^ &c (and ver 19): txt 
 ACD3EFGJ(K.') &c. — 21. for αρα, yap 73. 122' : autem tol. — aft νομον, ins bonam 
 
 demid. — for τω, το (and ττοιη) 109. — θίΚηματι 93. — on τζαρακιιται om FG g. — 
 
 for OTi, και arm. — 22. for σννηδομαι, ύυνησομαι lOS. — τον νομον 109. — for Otov, 
 Kvptov 34 : νοος Β. — aft αιΌρ. ins (μον sah. — 23. νομον om 76 : add της αμαρτίας 36- 
 marg seth. — αντιστρατ. κ. αιχμαλ. (omg μί) τω νομ. τον νοος μου τω οντι Α. — bef τω 
 
 nation of the sentence with οΰ,— are too 
 strong presumptions of its being an inter- 
 polation, to allow of its retention) (present 
 with me).' 19.] And this ού παρα- 
 
 κΰσθαι of the doing good is shewn by my 
 acts, in that I do not the good that I wish 
 (to do), but the evil which I do not wish, 
 that I do. 20.] The inference of ver. 
 
 17 restated, with the premiss of ver. 16 in 
 the place of ΐ'υΐ'ί c^e :— but its meaning is 
 now clearer and deeper than then ; we know 
 now that the tyw which does not the evil 
 thing, is the belter ίγώ of the ίσω άΐ'ϋρω- 
 ΤΓος, — whereas the ΐμοί in which sin dwells 
 and rules, though included in the complex 
 self, is the loiver tyo'), i) σάμξ μου. And 
 so the way is now prepared for at once set- 
 ting forth the conflict within us between 
 these tiro. 21.] ' I find then (i. e. as 
 
 ap])ears from what has been detailed) the 
 (tliis) law (presently to be defined as the 
 law of sin in my members, and exemplified 
 in the following words: so τοϋ ρήματος 
 τον κυρίου, ώς t\tytv, Acts xi. 16 : — των 
 λόγων, Γοϋ κιιρ. Ί?;σ. 'ότι αΰτος ιΐτη, — 
 Acts XX. 35 (De W.). This is the view of 
 Calv., Bez., Grot., Estius, Wolf, Winer, 
 Meyer, De Wette, al. It cannot well be 
 referred to the Mosaic law, as, with various 
 forced arrangements and constructions, 
 Chrys., Theophyl., Theodoret, Tholuck, 
 Olsh., Fritz., Kollner ; the great objection 
 being, that all these do violence to the con- 
 text. Tholuck's remark, that had νόμον 
 meant as above, it would have been anar- 
 throus, or TovTov τον νόμον, is suffi- 
 ciently answered by the above examples : 
 and the dative after ίΰρίσκω, to which he 
 
 also objects as inadmissible in any language, 
 is justified by Soph. Q2d. Col. 966, ούκ αν 
 ίζίίιροις tpoi I αμαρτίας όνειδος ovSsv, — 
 and by Plat. Rep. iv. p. 421, ΐίτιρα . . τοΙς 
 φνλαίιν ίΐιρι'ικαμιΐ', ' alia invenimus nos- 
 tris custodibus observanda,' Ficin.) to me 
 (for myself) wishing to do good, that 
 (consisting in this, that) evil is present 
 with (see above, ver. 18) me.' 
 22, 23.] Explanation of the conflict above 
 alleged to exist. — ' For I delight in {σϋν 
 not signifying participation witli others, but 
 as in σν\λυποΰμ(νος, Mark iii. 5, and in 
 the phrase σύνοιδά μοι, denoting ' apud 
 animum meum.' Thol. — συνίγομαι is a 
 stronger expression than σΰμφημι, ver. 16) 
 ' the law of God after the inner man ' 
 (z= νοϊ'ς, ver. 25, — see reff. — and comp. 
 Peter's ύ κρυπτός της καρδίας άνθρωπος, 
 1 Pet. iii. 4. But not merely, the mental 
 and reasoning part of man : — for that 
 surely does not delight in the law of God : 
 — it is absolutely necessary to pre-suppose 
 the influence of the Holy Spirit, and to 
 place the man in a state of grace before 
 this assertion can be true. And it is sur- 
 prising to find commentators like Tholuck 
 and De Wette, while they acknowledge that 
 συνήδομαι is stronger than ηΰμψημι, yet 
 denying the gradual introduction of the 
 spiritual man in the description of this 
 conflict. True, the Spirit is not yet in- 
 troduced, because purposely kept back until 
 treated of as the great Deliverer from this 
 state of death ; the man is as yet described 
 as compounded of the outer and inner man, 
 of ('/ σαρξ and ο νους, and the operations 
 of the two are detailed as if unassisted, —
 
 20—25. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 359 
 
 •iXi 
 
 24 
 
 )ωπος 
 
 25 
 
 τοις ' μίλεσιν μου, "'^ ' ταΧαίττωρος ίγώ ην 
 
 " ρυσίται εκ του σώματος ^ του θανάτου τούτον | 
 
 τω Θβω οια Ιησοΰ -χρίστοΰ του κυξ)ίου Ύ]μων 
 
 αυτός εγω τω μ(ν " vol ^ δουλεύω νόμω θεοΰ, ttj δε σαρ /ct 
 
 = cli. vi. 1Γ al. fr. 
 
 vv cli. V. 18 al'-i. Paul only. 
 
 ver. 23 al. 2 Thess. ii. 2. 
 
 τίς «ε tRcv. iii. 17 
 
 , only. Isa. 
 
 •? Luk.• i. 74. 
 
 apa ουν acori. uiai. 
 
 ' Exod. vi. 6. 
 
 νί.άπύ, Ps. 
 cxxxi.s. 1. 
 y ch. vi. 6 reff. 
 
 νομ. της αμαρτ., ins ev DEFGK 17• -il. 4C-8. ^2. 113-77 all it ν copt sah goth Clem 
 Thdrt lat-ff (in lege or sub lege or in legem): om (AjB.-'CJ most mss syrr seth al Caes 
 MeMi Chr Thl Oec. — 25. rec for χαρ. τω ΰιω, ιυχαριστω (add it 4!J) τω θΐω [see notes), 
 with AJK &c syrr goth al Orig, Chr Thdrt-te.xt fhl Oec: η χα,ης τον θιυυ DEFG 3« 
 it ν Thdrt-comm-appy lat-ft' {κνμιου for β. FG g) : txt Β 213 sah aeth Origi, and χ. Ss 
 τω θ. C2 (C uncert) 10. 17. 31. 73. 80. 93 al copt arm Meth Cyr Paulin Jerj.— oui^ om 
 D', but suppl D' (appy).— fyw αυτός D'(E.^) al ν al : αυτ-ος om copt sah seth. — iv τω μ. 
 vol sah. — μίν om FG 10 it ν lat-fF: aft rot, add μου 10 Syr arr copt sah. — ti^ St τη ααοκι 
 μου Syr (arr .') copt sah. 
 
 even the term πηνμα for the Imman spirit 
 being as yet avoided, — but all this is done, 
 because the object is to set the conflict and 
 misery, as existing even iti the spiritual 
 man, in the strongest light, so that the 
 question in ver. 24 may lead the way to the 
 real uses and blessed results of this conflict 
 in ch. viii.) ; but I see (= ^flnd ,•' — as if he 
 were a spectator of that which is going on 
 within) a different law (differing in kind 
 and aim, not = ά\\ος merely) in my 
 members (= iv τ>) σηρκί μου, ver. 18), 
 warring against {άντιστρ. is not to be 
 joined with βλέπω so as to = άντιστρα- 
 TtvtaOai, — though that would be an allow- 
 able constr., see 1 Cor. viii. 10. Acts viii. 
 23, — but βλίπω — μον forms an independ- 
 ent sentence antithetic to συΐ'ήΡομαι — 
 αΐ'θ(ΐω7Γ()^) the law of my mind (the con- 
 sent viz., to the law of God, which my 
 mind yields ; not =: the law of God, any 
 more than the different law in my mem- 
 bers ΓΖ the law of sin, — but both meaning 
 the standard or rule set up, which inclina- 
 tion follows : — the one in the vovc, in har- 
 mony ivilh the laiv of God, — the other in 
 the μ'ί\η or σαρξ, subservient, and causing 
 subservience, to the princijile or laiv of 
 sin), and bringing me (the whole complex 
 self — the ' me' of personality and action) 
 into captivity to (not, ' bg means of as 
 Chrys., Theodoret, Theophyl., — but dat. 
 commodi aft. αίχμαλ.) the law of sin (the 
 sinful principle, of resistance to God's law, 
 ή αμαρτία as awakened and set energizing, 
 ver. 0, by that law) which is in my mem- 
 bers.' — Comm. have much disputed whe- 
 ther the ϊτίρος νόμος, and the νόμος της 
 άμαρτ., both ti' τυϊς μίλισιν μου, are differ- 
 ent, or the same. The former view is held 
 by Calv., Beza, KoUner, RUckert, De W. : 
 the latter by Reiche, Meyer, Fritz., Tho- 
 luck. It appears to me (see above) that 
 the identity cannot be maintained without 
 introducing great confusion into the sen- 
 tence. 24.] The division of the man 
 
 against himself, — his inward conflict, and 
 miserable state of captivity to sin in the 
 flesh, while with the mind he loves and 
 serves the latv of God. From this wretched 
 condition, which is a very death in life, who 
 shall deliver him ? σ-ώματος cannot well 
 be figurative, ' universitas vitiorum,' or 
 ' mortifera peccati massa,' but must, on 
 account of the part which i) σαρξ and ret 
 μί\η have hitherto borne, be literal. Then, 
 hotv is τούτου to be taken ? Some (Syr., 
 Erasm., Calv., Beza, Olsh., Winer) join it 
 with σώματος, and (not Winer) justify the 
 constr. as a Hebraism : but Winer has 
 refuted the notion (§ 34 b, p. 194) of a 
 Hebraism, and the arrangement has no 
 Greek example. It can only be joined with 
 θανάτου; — and that most fitly, as the state 
 which he has been describing is referred to 
 by τοΰ θάνατον τούτου. Then ' the body 
 of this death. ' will mean, ' the body whose 
 subjection to the law of sin brings about 
 this state of misery,' comp. σώμα της 
 αμαρτίας, ch. vi. G. From this body, as 
 the instrument whereby he is led captive to 
 the law of sin and death, he cries out for 
 deliverance : i. e. to be set free, as ch. 
 viii. 2, from the laiv of sin and death. — 
 Some comm., misled by the notion of a 
 Hendiadys {σώματος τοΰ θ. = ϋΐ'ητοϋ 
 σώματος), a most fruitful source of error in 
 e.xegesis, have imagined that the ver. implies 
 a wish to be delivered from the body (by 
 death), and expresses & weariness oflfe. — 
 The cry is uttered, as De Wette well ob- 
 serves, mfv.ll consciousness of the deliver- 
 ance which Christ has effected, and as lead- 
 ing to the expression of thanks which fol- 
 lows. And so, and no otherwise, is it to be 
 taken. 25.] Therec. {ϋχηοιστώ has but 
 
 slender authority, and in the great variety of 
 readings, it is not easy to determine, η χάρις• 
 τοΰ βίοΰ is evidently a correction to answer 
 to τίς above ; so that our choice lies be- 
 tween χάρις τφ θ. and χάρις 6i τψ θ. — 
 The sentence is (not, of course, construction-
 
 860 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 ζ ch. τ. 16, 18 νομω αμαρτίας. 
 
 τοις εν γηιστω Ιί}σου 
 
 VIII. 
 
 2 
 
 1 > Λ^ " 
 
 ovoiv αρα ι 
 ο yap νομός τον 
 
 IV κατακριμα abcd 
 
 , * \. EFG 
 
 πνίυματος της JK 
 
 Chap. VIII. 1. νυν om D' Syr setli arm ar-pol Jer Victorin Prsedest : aft κατακη. 
 76 scholl in 115. 124 Chrj Tlidrt Thl Aug. — τοις om <j^^ g. — rec at end ins /i»j κατά 
 σάρκα ■πίριπατονσιν (so far, with AD^ 137 d^ ν Syr arm ar-erp goth Bas Chr-expr 
 lat-ff) aWa κατά πνίνμα {supplied Jrom ver <i, from a misunderstandinr/ of ihe argu- 
 ment: see notes), with D^JK &c ar-pol slav Thdrt Thl Oec : but om BC'C^D'FG 47. 
 
 ally, as the var. readg. >'/ χάρις τον Θιον, 
 but logically) an atisiver to the preceding 
 question : ' Thanks to God (who hath ac- 
 complished this) by means of Jesus Christ 
 our Lord.' — This exclamation and thanks- 
 giving more than all convince me, that Paul 
 speaks of none other than himself, and 
 carries out as far as possible the misery of 
 the conflict with sin in his members, on 
 purpose to hring in the glorious deliver- 
 ance which follows. — Compare 1 Cor. xv. 
 56, 57, where a very similar thanksgiving 
 occurs. αρα ovv κ.τ.λ.^ These words 
 
 are most important to the understanding of 
 the whole passage. We must bear in mind 
 that it had begun with the question, Is 
 THE LAW SIN ? The Ap. has proved that 
 it IS NOT, but is HOLY. He has shewn the 
 relation that it holds to sin, viz. that of 
 vivifying it by means of man's natural 
 aversion to the commandment. He has 
 further shewn, that in himself, even as de- 
 livered by Christ Jesus, a conflict between 
 the law and sin is ever going on : the misery 
 of which would be death itself, were not a 
 glorious deliverance effected. He now sums 
 up his vindication of the law as holy ; and 
 at the same time, sums up the other side of 
 the evidence adduced in the passage, from 
 which it appears that the flesh is still, even 
 iu the spiritual man, subject {essentially, 
 not practically and energetically) to the law 
 of sin,— which subjection, in its nature and 
 consequences, is so nobly treated in chap, 
 viii. — ' So then (as appears from the fore- 
 going), I myself (I, who have said all this 
 against and in disparagement of the law ; 
 I, who write of justification by faith without 
 the deeds of the law : not ' I alone,' without 
 Christ, as opposed to the foregoing, — as De 
 Wette, Meyer : nor, ' ego idem,' I, one and 
 the same person, as Beza, Erasm., Calv., 
 Olsh. : nor ' ille ego,' as Grot., Tbol. See, 
 for the meaning given above, ch. viii. 26 
 (αΰτο TO πΐ'ίΐ'μα); ix. 3; xv. 14. 2 Cor. 
 X. 1 ; xii. 13, in all which places [see on 
 Rom. XV. 14] it has the same force) with 
 my mind (indeed) (ό νονς = ύ ί σω ανθρ, 
 as in ver. 23) sei-ve the law of God (cf. 
 σννήδομαι, ver. 22), but with my flesh 
 (the ίγώ of ver. 18 ; and the σάοί tlirough- 
 out of ch. viii.) the law of sin.' It re- 
 mains to be seen, how this latter subjection, 
 which in the natural man carries all with 
 
 it, is neutralized, and issues only in the 
 death of the body on account of sin, in 
 those who do not walk after the flesh, but 
 after the Spirit. Chap. VIII. 1—39.] 
 In the case of those who are in Christ 
 Jesus, this divided state ends in the glo- 
 rious triumph of the Spirit over the flesh : 
 and that (vv. 1 — 17), though incompletely, 
 not inconsiderably, even here in this state, 
 — and (vv. 18 — 30) completely and glo- 
 riously hereafter. And (vv. 31 — 39) the 
 Christian has no reason to fear, but all 
 reason to hope ,• for nothing can sever him 
 froin God's love in Christ. 1 — 17.] 
 
 Although the flesh is still subject to the 
 law of sin, the Christian, serving 7wt the 
 flesh, but walking according to the Spirit, 
 shall not cotne into condemnation, but to 
 glory with Christ. 1.] ' There is there- 
 fore (an inference from vii. 25, because 
 with their wind, and that mind dwelt in 
 and led by the Spirit of Christ, they 
 serve, delight in, the law of God) now 
 (this νΰν is emphatic, and follows upon 
 the question and answer of vii. 24, 25, 
 - — 7-ebus sic stantibus, — now that a de- 
 liverance has been effected from the body 
 of this death, by Christ. This is certain 
 from the γαρ which follows, setting forth 
 the fact of the deliverance) no condemna- 
 tion (reff. ; = the penal consequence of sin 
 original and actual) to those (who are) in 
 Christ Jesus.' (The expression tv \p. Ίησ. 
 refers particularly to the last place where 
 God's gift of life eternal in Christ Jesus 
 our Lord was spoken of, ch. vi. 23, — and 
 generally to all that was said in that chapter 
 of our incorporation into and union with 
 Him). — The words μή κατά σάρκα τηρι- 
 ττατοϋσιν, άλλα κατά ττνίνμα, ' walking 
 as they do not according to the flesh but 
 according to the Spirit, 'are probably a gloss 
 introduced from ver. 4, right enough in 
 sense (see there), but out of place here, 
 because this moral element of ' those in 
 Christ' is not yet brought in : the present 
 assertion is general, and is made good in 
 detail by and by. See var. readgs. 
 2.] ' For (a reason why there is no con- 
 demnation) the law {norma, method = 
 influence, as in tripov νόμον, vii. 23, — 
 used here perhaps for sharper contrast to 
 the νόμος άμαρτ. below) of the Spirit of 
 life (the Lord and Giver of lite — Ufa used
 
 1—8. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 S61 
 
 ^ ^ωΓ)ς £U χριστώ Ιησυυ Ί]\ίυθίρωσ{ν με απο του νομον 
 
 τΐ]ς αμαρτίας και του θάνατοι/. το γαρ 
 
 νόμου, ΐν ώ ^ ησΟίνα δ(α της σαρκός, ο θίος τοί' εαυτού '' Γοίή'^χν". af 
 
 νΐον ττίμφας εν ομοιωματι ^σαρκός ^ αμαρτίας και τηρΐ ^3.^ 
 
 b ch. vi. IS reff. 
 
 c CDHstr. num., 
 5 Λ/ „ see Heb. viii. 
 
 «ΟυναΤΟν του l-..acc.,L'Cc.r. 
 
 XU. 17 
 
 reff. Phil. ii. 7. 
 
 g canstr., Phil, i 
 
 \ e = a Cur. xiii. 
 3. 
 
 ch.i. 23 
 h = Heb. X (5. 
 
 67^• 177 al d' g copt sail scth Orig-schol Ath Cyr Dial Ruf Aug. — 2. ev χρ. ιησ. om 76 
 (and schol) 117 Chr Suid : (/;σ. oni 62. — for μι, at BFG g Syr Chr, or 3-mss Aug : ίϊμης 
 copt ar-erp Dial Meth : t.xt ACDEJK mss (appy) d e ν syr sah seth goth al Thdrfc 
 Chr, (mss a() Till Oec Tert Jer Ambr al. — τον νομού om 73: του v. και 2. 92. 
 — 3. IV ω 7]σθ. δ. τ. σαρ. om seth. — νι. ίαντ. Did : αΰτου 109. — και τηρι αμαρ- 
 τίας om 34. 7Ι• 109 Hipp Cyr, Ps-Chr : και om Syr Orig Did Hil Ambr-somet 
 
 in an incipient higher sense than ΐζων in 
 ch. vii. 9, — see below) freed me (aor., re- 
 ferring to the time of his conversion. — 
 Tiiere is no stronger jiroof to my mind of 
 the identity of the speaker in the first per- 
 son throughout with the Ap. himself, than 
 this extension of that form of speaking into 
 this chapter : nothing more clearly shews, 
 that there he was describing a really exist- 
 ing state within himself, but insulating, 
 and as it were exayyeraiing it [as so 
 often], to bring out more clearly the glori- 
 ous deliverance to follow) in Christ Jesus 
 (1 follow the more regular grammatical 
 arrangement, in taking iv χμ. 'bycr. with 
 the verb. Thus also Thol. and De Wette. 
 — It may be taken [notwithstanding the 
 absence of the art., at which indeed only 
 tiros will stumble] with ζω//ς, as Luther, 
 which seems to suit ch. vi 23, — or with 
 τον -κν. τ. Ζ. as Piscator and Flatt, — or with 
 ό νόμ. τ. IT. τ. Ζ-, as Calv.) from the law 
 of sin (vii. 25) and death' {death again 
 here bears a higher meaning than in ch. 
 vii. li'e are noiv on h'lyher ground : — 
 κατάκριμα having been mentioned, which 
 is the punishment of sin, death now mvolves 
 that, and is not only temporal misery, but 
 eternal ruin also). — This ' law of the Spirit 
 of life' having freed him from the law of 
 sin and death, so that he serves another 
 master, all claim of sin on him is at an 
 end — he is acquitted, and there is no con- 
 demnation for him, 3.] ' For (expl. 
 of ver. 2, shewing the method of this libe- 
 ration) that wMcli was not in the power 
 of the law (the constr. is a nominativus 
 pendens, as in ref. 1, in apposition with the 
 following sentence, ύ θιΌς κ.τ.λ. ; so Riick- 
 ert, Meyer, Fritz., De W., Tholuck : Winer, 
 § 32. 7. makes it an ace. governed by 
 εποίησί understood : Olsh. al., make it an 
 ace. absol. or supply κατά : Camerarius and 
 Beza, Cia ; — but the above seems the sim- 
 plest. TO άδύνατ. τον νόμ.ου may 
 mean either, ' that part of the law which 
 was impossible,' — ' could not be obeyed,' 
 — as TO γνωστόν του θιοϋ, ch. i, 19 ; — or, 
 
 ' the inability of the law' τ= ή αδυναμία 
 τ. v., as τϋ xptjOTOv τον θίον, ch. ii. 4 ; — 
 or, ' that which was unable to be done by 
 the latv.' Of these, the first is out of the 
 question, because νόμος must be the sub- 
 ject of 61' ψ ήσθ. κ.τ.λ. ; — the second would 
 give the first clause the meaning, ' that 
 ivherein the inability of the law shewed 
 itself,' viz. its powerlessness δια τ. σαρκός. 
 The third yields by far the best meaning : 
 see below on δια τ. σ.) because (not 
 ^wherein' as in ch. ii. 1, but '■ in that ;' 
 this clause gives a reason and expl. of the 
 άδνΐ'ατον) it was weak (the Ap. keeps in 
 mind his defence of the holiness of the law 
 undertaken in ch. vii., and as Chrys. ob- 
 serves, δοκη μιν διαβάλλίΐν τον νύμον, ti 
 δε τις ακριβώς προςίχοι, και σφόδρα αυτόν 
 ΐτταινΰ . . . ούδ( γαρ eiwt το ττονηρόι/ τοΰ 
 νόμον, άλλα το αδύνατον και πάλη', ίΐ' 
 ψ ήσθίΐ'ίΐ, ουκ, iv φ ΐκακονργ(ΐ, ίν ω 
 ΐπ(βυνλ(ν(. Hom. xiv. p. 563 ε) through 
 the flesh (i. e. in having to act through the 
 flesh; not, 'on account of the flesh,' i. e. 
 of the hostiUty, or weakness, of the flesh, 
 which would be διά την σάρκα. Tlie flesh 
 was the medium through which the law, — ■ 
 being a ΐ'ό^ος ίντολης σαρκικής, Heb. vii. 
 \6,^u'rought, and 01 iv σαρκί the objects 
 on which. So the gen. here is similar to 
 that in 2 Cor. ii. 4, διά πολλών δακρύων 
 typaxpa νμ., and 1 Pet. v. 12, δι ολίγων 
 typaipa νμ., indicating the stale in, or 
 medium through which, the action is car- 
 ried on), — God (did), having sent His 
 own Son (the stress is on ΐαντοϋ, and the 
 word is pregnant with meaning : — His oirn, 
 and therefore like Himself, holy and sinless. 
 This implication should be borne in mind, 
 as the suppressed antithesis to άμαρτ., three 
 times repeated afterwards. Another anti- 
 thesis may be implied — ίαντοϊ), and there- 
 fore .spiritual, not acting merely through 
 the flesh, though in its likeness, but bring- 
 ing a higher spiritual life into the manhood) 
 in the likeness of the flesh of sin (the 
 flesh irhose attribute and character was 
 SIN. The gen. is not = αμαρτωλού, but
 
 362 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 νιιι. 
 
 ίΐ^Α/ΐί' αμαρτίας ^ κατέκριναν την αμαοτ'ιαν εν t^j σαρκι, ίνα το 
 1-ch.xiii 8ai. όικαίωμα του νομού πληοωυη ίν -ημιν τοις μη κατά 
 
 m ch. i. 3 reff. ■> ι • 
 
 Ambrst. — εν τη σ ιρ. om syr : in carnem d : add avrov Syr arr seth Ruf-comm, : τη om 
 219. — 4. for του νομ., θεον (or του θ.) 54. 62. 80 al. — 6. at end, add δια ιησου χρ. τ. 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 implies far more — the belonging to and 
 being possessed by. — De ΛVette observes, 
 'The words tv όμοιώμ. σαρκ. άμ. appear 
 almost to border on Docetism ; but in 
 reality contain a perfectly true and consis- 
 tent sentiment. σαρξ άμαρτ. is flesh 
 (human nature, John i. 14. 1 John iv. 2. 
 Heb. ii. 14) possessed with sin .• the Ap. 
 could not then have said ev «ταρκΐ αμ. with- 
 out making Christ partaker of sin .• nor 
 could he have said merely iv σαρκΊ, for 
 then the bond between the RIanhood of 
 Jesus, and sin, would have been wanting : 
 he says then, iv ΰμοιώμ. παρ. αμ., — mean- 
 ing by that. He had a nature like sinful 
 human nature, but had not Himself a 
 sinful nature, — comp. Heb. iv. 15 : οΰ 
 ■γάυ ΐχομιν άρχίίρία μη δυνάμινον ηυμ- 
 τταθησαι ταΐς άσθίνίίαις ημών, ττεπίΐ- 
 ρααμίνον ίε κατά πάντα καθ' ομοιό- 
 τητα, χωρ'ις αμαρτίας. The likeness must 
 be referred not only to σάρζ, but also to 
 the epithet τηςάμ.: — it did not however 
 consist in this, that He took our sins 
 (literally) on Himself and became Him- 
 self sinful (as Reiche), which would not 
 amount to likeness of nature, — but in this, 
 that He was able to be tempted, i. e. sub- 
 jected to sensuous incitements, e. g. of 
 pain, which in other men break out into 
 sin, but in Him did not. See Phil. ii. 7, 
 and note. — σάρ^ is not = σώμα, but as 
 in John i. 14, the material, of which 
 man is in the body compounded), — and 
 on account of sin (to be joined with 
 ττίμ-ιΐ/ας, not as Chrvs. al. Λ'^ulg., with 
 κατίκρηην : least of all as Luther, " und 
 verdammete die Siinde im Fleisch durch 
 Siinde." The 'for,' or ' on account of 
 sin, is at present indefinite, and not to be 
 resti'icted to Christ's death as a sin-offer- 
 ing, which is not just now the subject. 
 ' On account of sin ' then, = to put away 
 sin, as Heb. x. 6. 18), condemned sin 
 in the flesh (not ' the sin which was in 
 the flesh,' which would probably [not cer- 
 tainly] have been την iv τ. σ., and which 
 is against the context, in which άμ. is 
 throughout an absolute principle. 
 κατί'κρινβν is allusive to κατάκριμα ver. 1. 
 Hence it has been taken to mean that God 
 condemned, punished, sin in the flesh by 
 the death of Christ : soOrig., Erasm.,Calv., 
 Melancthon, Calov., Olsh., al. But that 
 can hardly be the meaning here, for several 
 reasons. 1. The Ap. is not speaking of the 
 removal of the guilt, but of the practice of 
 
 sin, and of the real fulfilment of the law in 
 those who are in Christ. It is this which 
 even in ver. 1 is before him, grounding as 
 he does the ουοεν κατάκριμα on the δου- 
 λίύω νόμψ θ(οϋ — on the 7iew and sanctify- 
 ing power of the Spirit by Christ, in spite 
 of the continued sutjjection of the flesh to 
 the law of sin. 2. "The context shews that 
 the weakness of the law was, its having no 
 sanctifying power ; — power to arouse sin, 
 but not to condemn and cast it out. This 
 indeed is the burden of ch. vii. The ab- 
 sence of justifying power in the law has 
 already been dealt with. 3. The following 
 verse clearly makes the fulfilling the δι- 
 καίωμα of the law no matter of mere impu- 
 tation, but of irtpinaTtiv κατά ττνίνμα. 
 — We must then look for the meaning of 
 κατακρΐνειν in the effects and accompani- 
 ments of condemnation, — victory over, and 
 casting out oysin. See, for example, John 
 xii. 31, where κρ'ιηις του κόσμου τούτου is 
 explained by ό άργων τοϋ κόσμου τούτου 
 ίκι3\ηθησίται ίίω,αηά ib. xvi. 11. As early 
 as Irenseus this was seen to be the sense : 
 ' condemnavit peccatum, et jam quasi con- 
 demnatum ejecit extra carnem :' — so Chrys. 
 ενικησεν αυτήν, την δΰναμιν αίιτης ίξ- 
 {λυσ£. — Oecum. 2, ττώς ϊζ,ήρί ; κατακρίνας 
 αυτήν — και διίζας άλοϋσαν. πώς ουν 
 £αλω KJi ηττηται ; iv Ty σαρκι αΰτοϋ. 
 προςήναι yap βουληΟεϊσα κ. μη ισχύσασα 
 ίαλω κ. ηττηται. — and Theophyl., {την 
 σάρκα) ήγίασε κ. ίστεψήνωσε, κατακρινας 
 τήν άμαυτίαν iv tij σαρκι προςληφθείσι^ 
 και δείΚας'ότι οϋ φύσει άμαρτιολός ή σάμζ. 
 And so, in modern times, Beza, Vitringa, 
 Bengel, the Schmidts, Rosenm., Meyer, De 
 Wette, Tholuck, Locke, Stuart, al., and 
 mainly Grot., Reiche, and Fritz., who how- 
 ever render it ' iiiterfuit ' or ' suj)plicio af- 
 fecit,' and understand the occasion to have 
 been the Death of Christ, — though the con- 
 demnation of sin is owing to His sinless- 
 ness, not to His sacrifice. I have dwelt at 
 length on this question, as being very im- 
 portant to the right apprehension of the 
 whole chapter, in this part of which not 
 the justification, hut the sanctification, οι 
 Christians is the leading subject. It is a 
 strong confirmation of the above view, that 
 God's condemnation of sin in the flesh by 
 Christ is stated in ver. 3 as the ground of 
 (ver. 2) my being freed from the law of sin 
 and death .• because, viz. Christ's victory 
 over sin is mine, by my union ivith Him. 
 and ])articipation in His Spirit. ev
 
 4—8. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 S63 
 
 σάρκα περιπατουσιν, άλλα κατά πνι-νμα. οι yap ndi.vi.ireff. 
 
 in ν / >' ο ν - ^ D - < c\\ " '^""^•'■■• Matt. 
 
 κατα σάρκα oureq τα της σαρκός "^ φρονουσιν, οι οε ^''^i'ci^h''® 
 κατα πηνμα τα τον ττνίνματος. " το yap ^φρόνημα νίϋ. «ι. 
 της σαρκός υανατος, το οε ^ ψρονημα του πνεύματος Ι,ωη i^ai. Phn. 
 
 'r'' 73^' ^qj' " ^t''fl ' iii. '2 ch xii 
 
 και ίίρηνη. οιοτι το ^ ψρονημα της σαρκός tyupa ίΐς m. ι Mace' 
 
 ΰεον τω yap νομω του υεου ου^ υποτάσσεται, ουοε 7"/'* *'2^mmc"v'''^' 
 
 δ' • 8 * ^^ ν* ^" /I'^w'' '^' 21 xiii' Η 
 
 νναται οι οε εΐ' σαρκι οντες, υεω αρεσαιου δύνανται, r=ch.ii'.iQ. 
 
 s = eh.i. 21. 1 Cor. χν. 9. t Eph. ii. 1«. Luke xxiii. 12. Gal. v. 20. James iv. 4. w. eic, here only, 
 
 υ Luke ii. .'il al. Dm. vi.l3. ν ch. ii. 28 refl'. w 1 Cor. vii. 32, i54. IThess. iv. 1. 2 Tim. 
 
 ii. 4. 3 Kings iii. 10. See Acts vi. 5. 
 
 Kvp. ημών 17 : in Chr. Jes. Dom. nostra Tert. — 7. for hioTi, οτι FG. — 8. om 178 : ονης 
 
 objects of desire) : but those (who live) 
 according to the Spirit (= ol πνευμα- 
 τικοί, see above), (mind) the things be- 
 longing to the Spirit' (tlie higher aims 
 and objects of desire of the spiritual life). 
 6.] 'For (the spiritual man cannot 
 seek the things of the flesh, because) the 
 mind {thoughts, cares, and aims, as above) 
 of the flesh, is (ends in — the copula [ = ], 
 as vphen it joins the tvsro signs of an algebraic 
 operation; — -^amounts to, being worked 
 out ') death (not merely physical, nor mere 
 unhappiness, as sometimes in ch. vii., but 
 as in ver. 2, in the largest sense, extending 
 to eternity) ; hut the mtad {thoughts, 
 cares, and aims) of the Spirit, is (see 
 above) life and peace ' (in the largest 
 sense, as above). In this argument there is 
 a suppressed premiss, to be supplied from 
 ver. 2 ; viz. 'The Spirit is the Spirit of life.' 
 Hence it follows that the spiritual man can- 
 not mind the things of the flesh, because such 
 mind is death. The addition και ΰρήνη 
 seems to be made to enhance the unlikeli- 
 hood of such a minding, — the peace of the 
 Spirit being a blessed contrast to the tumult 
 of the fleshly lusts, even in this life. 
 7.] 'Because (reason why the mind of the 
 flesh is death) the mind of the flesh is 
 enmity (contrast to ftpipni above) against 
 God (it being assumed that God is the 
 source ο/'ξωη, and that ΐχθρα against Him 
 is the absence of all true peace) : for it is 
 not subject (or, ' does not submit itself' 
 perhaps better) to the law of God, — for 
 neither can it be (this was proved in ch. 
 vii.) : 8.] but (takes up the other 
 
 and inferential member of the pi'oposi- 
 tion, answering to a suppressed μίν pre 
 ceding, - ro μΙν φρόνημα κ.τ,λ. — Calv., 
 Beza, al. render it ' therefore,' and so 
 E. v., ' 40 the?!,' erroneously) they who 
 are in the flesh (as their element of 
 life and thought: — nearly = κατά ηά(ικα 
 'ύντίς above, which however denotes the 
 rule which they follow. In 2 Cor. x. .*{, the 
 two are distinguished: tv σαρκι yap περι- 
 πατονντίς, οΰ κατά σάρκα στρατίυόμιΟα) 
 cannot please God.'— Melanctlion remarks 
 
 Tij σ-αρκί is not ' in His flesh,' or ' by means 
 of His flesh,' as Orig., Syr. (Peschito), Bez., 
 Grot., Reiche, Olsh., al., but ' in the flesh,' 
 which Christ and ourselves have in common. 
 4.] ' In order that (the purpose of 
 God's condemning sin in the flesh) the 
 requirement of the law (= all its re- 
 quirements [statutes], but here combined 
 in one for the sake of more distinct objec- 
 tivity. The variations in interpretation of 
 ver. 3 have given rise to corresponding ones 
 here. But here the matter has been more 
 complicated still by the Vulg. rendering 
 δικαίωμα, ' justificatio,' which has thrown 
 the weight of the Romanist interpreters on 
 the side of 'justitia imputata.' The usage 
 of the word itself would preclude any such 
 reference here, besides the considerations 
 urged in the note above) might be fulfilled 
 in us {fl7id its full accomplishment ,• — not 
 merely = ' be performed by us,' — for the 
 Ap. has a much deeper meaning, viz. that 
 the aim of God in giving the Law might be 
 accomplished in us, in our sanctilication, 
 which is the ultimate end of our redemption, 
 Col. i. 22. Eph. ii. 10. The passive is used, 
 to shew that the work is not ours, but that 
 of God by His grace, Olsh., Thol., De 
 Wette) who walk (not ' walking as we do,' 
 vehich would be anarthrous, — but a de- 
 scription of all those of whom the above is 
 true) not after the flesh hut after the 
 Spirit ' (who, notwithstanding that we are 
 bound up with a ταρξ αμαρτίας, do not 
 walk ill our daily life according to, or led 
 by, the νόμος της αμαρτίας ό ί-ν τυΐς μ(\(- 
 σιν ήμώι•, but according to and led by the 
 νόμος του πνίΰματος τ>)ς ζωής, in Christ 
 Jesus — members of Him, and participating 
 in that victory over sin which He obtained, 
 by which the power of sin in our flesh is 
 broken). 5.] ' For (expl. of the last) 
 
 those who live according to the flesh 
 (ΰι Γίς not quite = πίρητατοϋΐ'τις, but 
 nearly : — the latter is the etndence of the 
 former, and a consequence of it : oi κατα 
 σάρκα όντίς =: οι σάρκινοι) mind (' think 
 of 'care for, and strive after,' see reff.) 
 the things belonging to the flesh (i(,s
 
 S64 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 x-icor.sv. ' ύμίΐς δε ουκ εστε ^ εν σαρκ] αλλ εν ττνζνματι, ^ ππ^ρ abcd 
 y ch.^vii. 17 ττνίνμα θεοΰ ^ oiKu εν νμιν. ει δε τις ^^ πνβϋμα 'χριστού JK 
 y,vicor.vii. ovK ^^ i\ei, ovToc ovK iOTii> uvTov. ti ό£ Ύοιστον εν 
 
 νμιν, το μίν σώμα νεκξ)ον όια αμαρτιαν, το δε ττνίυμα Ζ,ιοη 
 zch.iv.24. δια όικαιοσυνην. ει δε το πνεύμα του ^ ^yiloavTOc 
 
 Malt. χ. 8. _, _ ,_,,„r,, v. 
 
 xxw. ι?Γ' Ιί/σοϋν ε /c νεκ•ρω)^ ^ οικεί εν υμιν, ο ' εγε/οης χριστον ε /c 
 
 a ch. iv. 17 reCf. -ay ' ^ '^ l> Ο ^' '-Cvvv 
 
 bch.Ti. 12 reff. νεκρών ί,'οοποιησει και τα υνητα σώματα υμών, οια το 
 
 om copt sah.— τω θ(ω DE.— 9. άλλα ΒΌ^ : not ACEFGJ(K.') &c : αλλ ίν πν. om 39. 
 — for θίον, χριστού 238. — οικη om sah : irotKfi 6!) : e*< Hil al-latt. — for χριστοί», θευυ 
 39. ίίΐ. 87. — 10. £t St χρ. IV νμ. om FG g: aft χριστός add οικ•ίΐ Thdrt,. — σώμα 
 ίσηΐ' FG (vss).—rec ci ημ. with (B.')D'( K?) &c : δια την αμ. 2. 37- 40. G8. 70. 92 
 al lect 14: txt A(Bi)CD^EFGJ 109. 219.— for ζωη, ζων lect 14 Cyr: ζ»? FG g ν 
 (not harl') arm. — 11. του om Did. — τον ιησ. AB 26. 47: ιησ. χρ. Ath : χρ. ιησ. 
 Hipp: χριστον Thdor-mops Did: txt CDEFGJK mss nrly (a])py) Clem (aft νεκρ.) Chr 
 Cyr-jerus Thdrt Thl Oec. — rec bef χριστοί/ ins roj', with JK all Hipp Thdrt Thl Oec al : 
 omABC(sce below)D'D3EiE^FG all d e vss gr-lat-ff.-for χριστοί', χρ. ιησ. A (aft 
 reicp.) D'E- 31. 41. ΤΛ al d e gr-Iat-if : ΐϊ;σ. χρ. C (aft ν(κρ.) ν copt seth al : τον ιησουν 
 lect 13 al, rov κ-υριοί' 114-15 al, τ. κυρ. ημ. ιησ. χρ. Syr ar-erp al : txt BD'E'FGJK 
 (see above) all S3'r sah al Thdrt Dial-with-Maced Thl Oec Iren Did Tert^ Hil al. — και om 
 A 39. 47 ar-pol : ins BCDG &c. — νμ. σώματα Did. — rec Sin του ίΐ'οικουΐ'τος αΐ'του 
 ■πνεύματος {see notes), with AC 5. 39. 57. 72 to 4. 120. 213 (al ?) Dial-with-a-Macedonian 
 {cited by Wetst. The Maced. says, οϋτως oh γέγραπται Αιά του, αλλά Διά τό, ίάν 
 ονν που εν η δεύτερον αντίγραφαν εΐφεθι^ εσφαλμίνον τταρ' νμΙν . ... ίο ivhich the 
 Orthodox replies, εχομεν ΰείξαι 'ότι εν ολο<ς άρχαίοις άντιγράί/ιοις ο'ύτω κείται• επει Si 
 νομίζεις τούτο άντιλεγόμενον είναι, πληροφορίβητι και ίξ όλλ»;ς -γραφικής άττο- 
 δείξεως. Maced. είπε, τοΰτο γαρ άντι\έγεται) copt sjt aeth slav Clem Hipp Athj BaSj 
 Epiphanj Cyrr Chr, Mac al Aug-oft Did Ambr Vig al : txt Β (ascertd by Tregelles : see 
 his Prospectus of a'critical edn of the N. T. p. 19) DEFGJK 4. 17. 35-6. 44-6 7-9. 67. 
 76-7. 87-9. 91. 106-8 to 11-13-21-24 -schol 77 to 9. 219--38 al it ν Syr sah arr Origj Meth 
 Thdrt Chr (h 1, text and comm) Severian Max Thl Oec-comm Iren Tert Hil Ruf Jer 
 
 (Thol.), — ' Hie locus maxime refutat Pela- 
 gianos et omnes qui imaginantur homines 
 sine Spiritu Sancto legi obedire.' 9.] 
 
 ' But (oppos. to o't κατ. σάρ. οντες) ye are 
 not in the flesh (see above), but in the 
 Spirit, if so he that (' provided that ,-' 
 not 'since,' as Chrys., Olsh., al., which 
 would be επείττερ : Chrys. tries to prove 
 {?7Γ£ρ = tTTfiTrfp here by adducing 2 Thess. 
 i. 6, where however, as here, the meaning 
 is, ' if so be that,' ' if at least.' That this 
 is the meaning here is evident by the ex- 
 ception which immediately follows). — But 
 (this must be rightly understood : for) if 
 any man has not {ονκ, and not μή, be- 
 cause it belongs to the verb and not to fi. 
 De W. See Winer, § 59. 5 d) the Spirit 
 of Christ (= πν. θεοΰ above. Obs. here 
 that 7Γ1'. θεοΰ, ττν. χριστον, and χοιστής, 
 are all used of the Holy Spirit indwelling 
 in the Christian), he is not His ' (belongs 
 not to Him, in the higher and blessed sense 
 of being united to Him as a member of 
 Him). 10.] 'But (contrast to the 
 
 last ver.) if Christ is in you ( = wv. θεοΰ 
 οΊκε'ι εν ΰμ., see 2 Cor. iii. 17), the (your) 
 body indeed is dead on account of sin 
 (still remains dead, see 2 Cor. iv. 11 — 14, 
 under the power of death physical [and 
 
 eternal .•*] because of sin which it, per se, 
 stands in, and serves), but the (your) 
 Spirit {τήι> χζ/υχήν λέγει, ώς πνενματικι/ν 
 »/ί;/ γεγενημενην. Schol. ap. Matthfei 
 [Thol.] : or rather perhaps he uses ττνενμα, 
 regarding our Spirits as possessed and pene- 
 trated by God's Spirit) is life (this would 
 hardly be said if only our human spirits 
 were meant, but the adjective would be 
 used) on account of righteousness ' (not 
 here the imputed righteousness of justifica- 
 tion, which is not now under treatment, 
 but the implanted riyhteousness of the 
 sanctif cation of the Spirit. This appears 
 not only from the context, but also from 
 the Si άμαρτίαν, which answers to it). 
 11.] 'But {Sk takes up and con- 
 tinues the supposition in the former verse, 
 with which in fact this is nearly identical, 
 but with the important additional particular 
 [whence the contrast] τον ίγείραντ. κ.τ.λ.) 
 if the Spirit of Him who raised Jesus 
 from the dead, dwells in you (which 
 Spirit is therefore powerful over death, 
 and besides renders you partakers of 
 Christ's Resurrection), He who raised 
 Christ from the dead (the personal name, 
 Jesus, reminds more of the historic fact 
 of the resurrection of the one Person, Jesus :
 
 9—13. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 S65 
 
 iVOiKovv αυτυυ ττνίυμα ίν υμιν. ana ονν, αόίΑψοι, c 2 cor. vi. ιβ. 
 
 οφίίΛίται ίσμίν ου rij σαμκι του κατά σάρκα l,r\v. it fJj;", '•^' 
 
 •yop κατά σάρκα tvre, ^ μέλλετε αποθνίισκίΐν' ει δε πνευ- ^itl'i-irl'w.' 
 
 \ h 'Υ - ' ifl - jy' Λ ι Lonstr , Luke 
 
 ματι τας πξίαί,βις του σώματος υανατουτί, ί,ησίσυί. χχΐι.Η. icur. 
 
 g = Acis xxi. 27. xsviu. fi. h = Acts six. 18 reff. j ch. vii. 4 reft'. j = Heb. x. 38. 
 
 Ambrst Augj Ambr-somet Pelag Fulg Sedul:— for αντον, αντοι (αυτωι ?) C ; £ia το 
 ενοικουν tv αυτω πνεύμα 3 : ίια το ινοικονν αυτό πνεύματος 2 : dia το εν. πνεύμα 
 714. — 12. αδ. μου sah. — τη σαρ. om sah. — 13. αποθν. πσλιν 115 Thl-ms. — εν πνενμ. 
 sah. — for του σωμ., της σαρκός DEFG it ν slav Origj Iren Tert Did Cypr Ambr Aug Jer 
 Did Ruf Pelag Ambrst Sedul Bed: του πνεύματος 1. 120: txt (MSS &c) sah Orig5 
 
 tlieofficialand mystical name, Christ, of the 
 body of which heistlieHeadand we themem- 
 bers. — all raised with Him by the one Spirit 
 dwelling in all) shall quicken (not merely 
 tyf()£7, because it is not merely the res. of 
 the body which is in the Ap.'s view,— see 
 below) your mortal bodies also (the higher 
 phase of the ζωοποιείν takes place in the 
 spirit of man : and even of that which takes 
 place in the body, there are two branches — 
 one, the quickening it from being a tool of 
 unrighteousness unto death [eternal], — the 
 other, the quickening it out of death [phy- 
 sical] to be a new and glorified body. And 
 the και joined with θνητά, here, signifies 
 that the working of the πνεύμα ζωοποιονν 
 shall not stop at the purely spiritual resur- 
 rection, nor at that of the body from dead 
 works to serve the living God, but shall 
 extend even to the building up the spiritual 
 body in the future new and glorious life), 
 on account of His Spirit which dwells 
 in you.' — Here the reading is much dis- 
 puted, whether it be the ace. or gen. : see 
 var. readd. The great additional weight 
 thrown into the scale of the ace. by the 
 discovery of Dr. Tregelles that it is the 
 reading of B, goes near to determine the 
 matter. The gen. can only mean, ' by 
 means of,' ' through,' His Spirit, &c. : 
 this the ace. may include, (it not being spe- 
 cified for %rhat reason it is on the Spirit's 
 account, and leaving it open to be His 
 presence, or His agency,) but must be ren- 
 dered 'on account of,' or ' because of,' His 
 Spirit, &c. Thus both may imply that the 
 Holy Spirit is the agent in the quickening : 
 but the gen. cannot bear the other mean- 
 ing, that God will quicken, &c. because of 
 His Spirit, &c. Hence in dispute with the 
 Macedonians, who denied the divinity of 
 the Holy Spirit, the gen. reading was import- 
 ant to the orthodox, as expressing agency, 
 and that alone. But it seems pretty clear 
 that the variation was older than the time 
 of tliis heresy, and, however it may then 
 have been appealed to, its origin cannot be 
 assigned to any falsification by either of the 
 then disputant parties. — As to how far the 
 Holy Sj)irit is the direct Agent in the resur- 
 
 rection of the body, see note on πνεύμα 
 ζωοπ., 1 Cor. xv. 45, and on 2 Cor. v. 5. 
 Here, His direct agency cannot be in any 
 way surprising, for ft is the whole process 
 of bringing from death to life, extending 
 even to the mortal body, which is here 
 spoken of — and unquestionably, ' the Lord 
 and Giver of Life' is the agent throughout 
 in this quickening. ' Non de ultima resur- 
 rectione, quae momento fiet, habetur sermo, 
 sed de continua Spiritus operatione, quae 
 reliquias carnis paullatim mortificans, coeles- 
 tem vitam in nobis instaurat.' Calv. : — but 
 perhaps ' non solum de ult. res.,' would have 
 been more correct : for it certainly is one 
 thing spoken of. 12, 13.] ' So then, 
 
 brethren, we are (inference from the assur- 
 ance in the last verse) debtors (we owe fealty : 
 to what or whom, he leaves the reader to 
 supply from ver. 11), not to the flesh, to 
 live according to the flesh (Chrysostom well 
 explains the qualification, του κοτά σ. ζ., — 
 κ«ί γαρ τΓολλα αΰτι~ι όφεί\ομε%', το τρίφειν 
 αυτήν, το θάλπειν, το άνατταΰειν, το θε- 
 ραπενειν ΐ'οσοϋααν, το περιβάλ^ειΐ', και 
 μνρία έτερα λειτουργείν. 'ίν' ουν μη νό- 
 μισες, ΟΤΙ ταϋτην αναιρεί την διακονίαΐ', 
 ειπών, "ουκ εσμ. όφ. τι) σαρ.," ίρμηνενιι 
 αυτό λέγων " του κ. σ. ζΪ!ν" . . . τουτίστι, 
 μι) ποιώμεν αυτήν κυρίαν της ζίοής της 
 ήμετέιιας. Hom. χν. ρ. Π."? α): for if ye 
 live according to the flesh, ye will 
 {μέλλετε of the certain end of your present 
 course) die (ζΓ/ν and άποθΐ'. here in their 
 full and pregnant sense, involving body and 
 soul here and hereafter : but not to be un- 
 derstood as excluding the carnal from any 
 resurrection — only from that which is truly 
 ζην, — any more than the spiritual are 
 exempted from all death, but only from 
 that which is truly θάνατος) : but if by the 
 Spirit ye slay (abolish, annul) the deeds 
 (hardly as Thol. ' sensu obscceno,' but as 
 Col. iii. 9, the whole course of habits and 
 action which has the Hesh for its prompter) 
 of the body (— τής σαρκός, but here con- 
 crete to give more vivid reality : comj). τά 
 toya της σαρκός. Gal. v. 1!»), ye shall live 
 (not μέλλετε ζήν, this Life being no na- 
 tural conseijuence of a course of mortifying
 
 366 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 ''οηΓ'τΪΤη^"^" όσοι yap πνενματι 
 
 STim.'iii.r,. Λ - 15 
 
 kk ver. 19 reft'. tftOV . 
 l(iuvK.ftr.2l. 
 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 - k " f kk ' ' ' 
 
 υ ayovrai, ούτοι νιυι eiaiv abcd 
 ου yap ΐΧάβίτε πνίυμα δουλείας ττάλίν '" tig 
 
 duvK.vtr.'2l. ,^ 'ΛΛ>'\'/0 1 "* ii'fl' ο" 'η "/ 
 
 Gai.iv.24. ν. ψορον, οΛΛα ίΚαρίΤΐ. πχηνμα υιοϋίσιας, εν ω ' κραί,ο- 
 Ts.^'2mT^' Mtv ^ Αββα ο πατήρ. αυτό το ττνίΰμα ^ συμμαρτυρίΐ 
 
 constr., 2 Cor. 
 
 . 13. Epli. i. 17. 
 
 2 Tim 
 
 ρ Gal. iv. 6. 
 
 = ch. V. Ifi reff. η ver. 23. c.h. ix. 4. Gal. iv.S. Epli. i. .') unly t. 
 
 q cli. ii. 15. is. 1 only f. 
 
 Chr Thdrt al. — θανατονηθί 54. — 14. for όσοι, οι oopt sah.— θεού om 80. — ■πιρητατοννται. 
 sah. — rec ίίσιν νιοι θίηυ (corrn of order, as is also v. Θ. n.), with JK &c ν all Chr 
 Thdrt al Ireu al : vi. tie. no. ACDE 5. 39. 47. 80. !)3 al d e v-ras eethOrigi Dam Cassiod 
 Gaud : txt BFG g demid am Syr Origj Did Hilj Aug Ruf Bed al. — 15. ovdt yap 54. — 
 ίλαβομιν (twice) Aug. — δίίλιας 71• — πάλιν om 17. 39. 54 al Orig (somet). — f(c φυβον 
 cm 54. — rec αλλ : t^it ABC &c. — for (u ω, on Chrms. — κραξ,ομιν F. — 16. bef ctvro. 
 
 the deeds of the body, but the gift of God 
 through Christ : and coming therefore in the 
 form of an assurance, ' ye shall live,' from 
 Christ's Apostle. — On ζην, see above). 
 14.] ' For (ground of the assurance con- 
 tained in ζήσ^σθί) as many as are led by 
 (reff. ; — the slaying the deeds of the body by 
 the Spirit, implies the being under the 
 Spirit's guidance) the Spirit of God, these 
 (emphatic — 'these and no others') are 
 Sons of God ' — υιός θ. difters from τΐκνον 
 θ. in implying the higher and more mature 
 and conscious member of God's family, see 
 Gal. iv. 1 — 6, and note on C. Hence our 
 Lord is never called t'skvov but always 
 vlos θίοϋ. This latter, applied to a Chris- 
 tian, signifies ' one born of God ' in its 
 deepest relation to him, — and hence a par- 
 taker of His nature, John i. 13. 1 John iii. 
 9. 1 Pet. i. 23 (Tholuck, similarly Olsh.). 
 15, 16.] Appeal to the conscious- 
 ness of the Christian to confirm the asser- 
 tion (assumed for the moment that he is led 
 by God's Spirit) that he is a son of God. — 
 ' For (confirmantis) ye did not receive (at 
 your becoming Christians) the spirit of 
 bondage (= ' the Spirit which ye received 
 was not a spirit of bondage.' πν. is not 
 merely a spirit, a disposition, but evidently 
 refers to the same πν. which afterwards is 
 πΐ'. νΐοθίσ., and αντο το ττν. The Αρ. 
 seems however in this form of expression, 
 both here and elsewhere, e. g. 2 Cor. iv. 13. 
 Eph. i. 17. 2 Tim. i. 7, to have combined 
 the objective nvtvfia given to us by God 
 with our own subjective πνίΰμα. In the next 
 ver. they are separated) again (it has been 
 imagined here that the πάλιν must refer to 
 a former bestowal of the πηϊψα ίονλιίας, 
 and consequently that the reference is to 
 the O. T. dispensation. In this two dif- 
 ferent sets of comm. have found difficulties ; 
 
 (1) those, as Chrys., — who would hold 
 from John vii. 39, that the Holy Spirit was 
 absolutely not given under the O. T., and 
 
 (2) those, as Cocceius, who holding Him 
 to have been given, deny that His character 
 
 was πν. SovXtiag. But there seems to me to 
 be no occasion to go back for the reference of 
 πάλιν to the O. T. The state of the natural 
 mail is δονλιία : the Holy Spirit given to 
 them, the agent of their birth into, and sus- 
 tainer of, a new state, was not a π v. δου- 
 λίίας πάλιν (ίς φ., a spirit merely to retain 
 them in, or take them back into their old 
 state, viz. a state of slavery : — to whom, or 
 whether to different masters, is not here in 
 question, but the state merely— the object 
 of the gift of the Holy Spirit was not to lead 
 them back into this) towards fear {so as to 
 bring about or result in fear, see ch. vi. 19. 
 ττάλίν can hardly, as De W., be taken with 
 tiQ φόβ.), but ye received the Spirit of 
 (the Spirit whose effect was, see above) 
 adoption (this stricter meaning, and not 
 that of mere sonship, is plainly that in- 
 tended by the Αρ., both here and in reff. 
 So Fritz., Meyer, Olsh., Harless on Eph. 
 i. 5, Tholuck : on the other hand Luther, 
 Winer, RUckert, De Wette, al., see on ver. 
 23. Of course, the adoption to be a son 
 involves sonship, but not the converse), in 
 whom (compare tv πνενμιχτι ch. i. 9 ; ii. 29, 
 and ver. 9. Luth. and Tholuck, ' through, 
 by means of, whom:' but το πνίΰμα =: 
 Him 171 whom, not merely Him by whom, 
 not being merely an external agent, but an 
 indwelling and pervading ])ower) we cry 
 (the outward and confident expression of 
 the state of sonship), Abba, Father ' (I have 
 said, on Mark xiv. 30, that πατ. does 
 not appear to be a mere explanation of 
 N3«, but to have been joined to it in one 
 phrase, as a form of address : expressing 
 probably, a corresponding ' my father,' nx, 
 in the Heb. expression. Luther, to express 
 the familiarity of Abba, renders ' lieber 
 Vater,' ' dear Father'). — See on the whole, 
 the strictly parallel place, Gal. iv. 6. 
 16.] And this confidence is 
 grounded on the testimony of the Spirit 
 itself. So Chrys. : ov yap άπυ της φωνής 
 ΐσχιψίζομαι μόνον, φητϊν, άλλη καΊ άπό 
 της αιτίας άφ' ης ή φοη•)) τίκηται
 
 14—17. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 367 
 
 τω '' ττνίυματι -ημών οτι (σ/αν ^ τέκνα θίου. ' ίΐ δε τέκνα, r = ActsxTu. 
 και κληρονόμοι' κληρονόμοι μεν Θεοϋ, " συγκληρονόμοι ^ Tx'i'.'knd GhU*^ 
 δε -νριστου' ^ ε'ιπερ ''^ σνμπάσγ^ομεν,'ινα και ^ συνόοζασθω- Eph'li.s. 
 
 t ch. iv. 13 rt-ff. 
 w 1 Cor. xii. 26 ooly t. 
 
 α Eph. iii 6. Heb. xi. 9. 1 Pet. iii. 7 only t. 
 X here only t. 
 
 pref ωοτε DE al {itaque) (Syr copt et) : aft add yap 115-24 ν (not am al) Cyr Thdrt TliI 
 Ruf VcL- μαιηνρη 1.211 lect 17 Clem : txt (MSS &c) OrigChr Thdrt Thdor-mops al.— 
 17. ΐοτ k\i]oov. {\st), συνκληρονομοιΌ^ : μεν 9. σνγκ. Of om 178: ΐοΓ μεν, δε 109. — 
 συνπασχωμεν Α. — for ινα . . , σννδ., και σννδοξασομεθα arm. — 18. cm 54. — for yap, δε 
 
 ov yap του ■χαρίσματος εστίν η φωνή 
 μόνον, άλλα και του δύντος την δωρεάν 
 τταρακλητον αυτός yap ήμας αυτός ici- 
 δαζε δια του χαρίσματος υ'ύτω <pθέγyεσΘ'n. 
 Horn. XV. ρ. 57!) c This ver. being with- 
 out copula, is best understood to refer to 
 the same as the preceding, and the asser- 
 tion to concern the same fact as the last 
 verb, κράζομεν, — as if it were αΰτοϋ τοΰ 
 7Γΐ'. σνμμαρτνροΰντος, κ.τ.λ., grounding 
 that fact on an act of the indweUing Spirit 
 Himself. See again Gal. iv. G. — ' The 
 Spirit itself (not ' idem Spiritus,' as Erasm. 
 and similarly Luth., Reiche, al. : the σ/τό 
 expresses the independence, and at the same 
 time, as coming from God, the preciousness 
 and importance of the testimony) testifies 
 to our spirit (see eh. ii. 15, and note : not 
 ' una testatur :^ the συν in comp. does not 
 refer to τψ πν. ήμ. but to agreement in the 
 fact, as in ' contestari,' ' confirmare ') that 
 we are children of God.' — What is this 
 witness of the Spirit itself? All have 
 agreed, and indeed this ver. is decisive for 
 it, that it is something separate from and 
 higher than, all subjective inferences and 
 conclusions. But on the other hand it does 
 not consist in mere indefinite feeling, but 
 in a certitude of the Spirit's presence and 
 work continually asserted within us. It is 
 manifested, as Olsh. beautifully says, in 
 His comforting us, His stirring us up to 
 prayer. His reproof of our sins. His draw- 
 ing us to works of love, to bear testimony 
 before the world, &c. And he adds, with 
 equal truth, " On this direct testimony of 
 the Holy Ghost rests, ultimately, all the re- 
 generate mail's conviction respecting Christ 
 and His work. For belief in Scripture itself 
 (he means, in the highest sense of the term 
 'behef,' = ^ conviction personally applied') 
 has its foundation in this experience of the 
 divine nature of the (influencing) Principle 
 which it promises, and which, while the be- 
 liever is studying it, infuses itself into him." 
 — The same comm. remarks, that this is 
 one of the most decisive passages against 
 the pantheistic view of the identity of the 
 Spirit of God and the spirit of man. How- 
 ever the one may by renovating power be 
 rendered like the other, there still is a spe- 
 
 cific difierence. The spirit of man may sin 
 (2 Cor. vii. 1), the Spirit of God cannot, 
 but can only be grieved (Ei)h. iv. .'iO), or 
 quenched (1 Thess. v. 19), and it is by the 
 infusion of this highest Principle of Holi- 
 ness, that man becomes one spirit with 
 the Lord Himself (1 Cor. vi. 17). 
 τί'κνα θίον] Here, (not v'lot) because the 
 testimony respects the very ground and 
 central point of sonship, likeness to and de- 
 sire for God : the testimony of the Spirit 
 shewing us by our yearnings after, our con- 
 fidence in, our regard to God, that we are 
 verily begotten of Him. 17.] 
 
 CoNSEGUEN'CES of our being children of 
 God. — ' But (announcing a result, as in a 
 math, proposition : 'but, if &c.') if children, 
 also heirs (which is the universal rule of 
 mankind : but κΚηρ. here must not be car- 
 ried to the extent of the idea of heir in all 
 directions : it is merely the one side of in- 
 heriting by promise, which is here brought 
 out : the word referring back probably to 
 ch. iv. 13, 14, the promise to Abraham) ; — 
 heirs of God (as our Father, giving the 
 inheritance to us), and joint-heirs with 
 Christ' (whom God has made κΚηρηνόμον 
 ■πάντων, Heb. i. 2). — Tholuck remarks: 
 " It is by virtue of their substantial unity 
 with the father, that the children come into 
 participation of his possession. The Roman 
 law regarded them as continuators of his 
 personality. The dignity of the inherit- 
 ance is shewn (1) by its being God's pos- 
 session, (2) by its being the possession of 
 the Firstborn of God. By the Roman law, 
 the share of the firstborn was no greater 
 than that of the other children,— and the 
 N. T. sets forth this view, making the re- 
 deemed equal to Christ (ver. 29), and Christ's 
 possessions, theirs; I Cor. iii 21— 23. John 
 xvii. 22. In the joint heirship we must 
 not bring out this point, that Christ is the 
 rightful Heir, who shares His inheritance 
 with the other children of God : it is as 
 adoptive children that they get the inherit- 
 ance, and Christ is so far only the means of 
 it, as He gives them power to become sons 
 of God, John i. 12."— 'If at least (see 
 above on ver. 9) we are suffering with 
 Him, that we may also be glorified with
 
 ;68 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 y=an(iconstr., ηξρ' ^° ^ \oy'iZ,ouai ytto ΟΤΙ ovK ^ οζία ΤΟ. παθήματα του abcd 
 
 ch.11.3. (iii. "_ _/~'^^/Γ u f ? - EFG" 
 
 28) 2Cor. yy I, καινού ^ πξ)ος rrjv "" μίΧλουσαν δοξ«ΐ' '^ αττοκαλνφΟη- JK 
 
 zher^only. d ' ' - 19 ' ^ e ' ^ ' - f ' ^ 
 
 se.-Gen. yai tiQ ημάς. rj yap αποκαραοοκια της κτίσεως την 
 
 1 Chroii. xxi. 22, 24. Prov. iii. In. viii. 11. Sir. xxvi. 15. (Sre note.) wpoc »^ Jt• r. xxiii. 2S. a = ver. 
 
 in. ransp. ofwnrds, Gal. iii. 2.J. 1 C.«r. xii. 22. b = rh. ii. 7 reff. e = Luke xvii. .30. IPet.v.l. 
 
 d = here only. e Phil. i. 20 only. Sfe Jos. B. J. iii. 7. 26. Polyb. xvi. 2. 8. Herod, rii. 103. Ps. xxxviii. 
 
 SAqu. f= Mark XVI. 15. 
 
 A g tcth : ergo Ambrst. — 19. καραβάκια 5δ. — της ττιστιως^Τ. 109-22-marg-7iJ. 219 al. — 
 
 Him :' i. e. ' if (provided that) we are found 
 in that course of participation in Christ's 
 sufierings, whose aim and end, as that of 
 His sufferings, is to be gloritied as He was, 
 and with Him.' But the ΰπιο does not re- 
 gard the subjective aim, q. d. ' If at least 
 our aim in suffering is, to be glorified,' — but 
 the fact of our being partakers of that 
 course of sufferings with Him, w/iose aim is, 
 wherever it is joxind, to be glorified with 
 Him. — Thol. takes the 'iva as dependent 
 on σΐ'γκληρ. (~ ίόςη), and ί'ίπιρ συμπ. 
 as quasi-parenthetical ; but the above seems 
 to me more satisfactory. — The connexion of 
 svffering with Christ, and being glorified 
 tviih Him is elsewhere insisted on, see 2 Tim. 
 i. 11. I Pet. iv. 23; v. 1.— This last clause 
 serves as a transition to vv. 18 — 30, in which 
 the Ap. treats of the complete and glorious 
 triumph of God's elect, through suflerings 
 and by hope, and the blessed renovation of 
 all things in and by Meir glorification. 
 18.] 'For (= this suffering with Him in 
 order to being glorified with Him is no 
 casting away of toil and self-denial, seeing 
 that) I reckon (implying, ' I myself am one 
 who have embraced this course, being con- 
 vinced ') that the suiFerings of this present 
 period (of trial and sorrow, contrasted with 
 the period of triumph following the παρ- 
 ουσία of Christ) are insignificant (ούκ 
 άξια = άνάί,ιη, — no gen. or verb under- 
 stood, «ξκις and άνάί^ος are found in the 
 sense of ' ivorthy (or unworthy) to be com- 
 pared with ' in the classics : so Hom. II. Θ. 
 234, νυν δ' υϋθ' ίνος αξιοι ίσμεν'ΈκΓορος, 
 and Plato, Protag. [Wetst.], άΐ'άζιά ίστί r' 
 άγηθά τώΐ' κακών, and again τις άλλη 
 άναΚία ηδονή ττοός λύττην ίστίν ;) in Com- 
 parison with the glory which shall be re- 
 vealed {μέλλ. put first, as in reff., but ap- 
 parently not, as De W., for the sake of 
 emphasis. Thol. cites Demosth., p. 486. 10, 
 ti' Γυΐς ουσι νόμοις κνρίοις, in which there is 
 no emphasis, as neither in 1 Cor. xii. 22. — 
 άίΓοκαλ., at the άποκ^αλυψις• of Christ. 
 On the sentiment, see 2 Cor. iv. 17) with 
 regard to us ' (not merely ήμίν, as specta- 
 tors, but (('ς ήμας, as the subjects of the 
 revelation ; the E. Λ'^. is not far wrong, 
 ' in Its,' taking the ίίς in a pregnant sense 
 as ην κηρύσσων els Γ«ς συν. r, Γαλ., Luke 
 
 iv.44). Bernard (cit. in Thol.) amplifies this, 
 — de Convers. ad Cleric, c. 30, — ' non sunt 
 condignpc passiones hujus temporis ad prse- 
 teritam culpamquae remittitur,adpr8esentem 
 consolationis gratiam quie immittitur, ad fu- 
 turam gloriam quae promittetur nobis.' 
 19 ff.] The greatness of this glory is sheivn 
 by the fact that all creatiox, iio?<i zmder 
 the bondage of corruption, shall be set free 
 from it by the glorifcation of the sons of 
 God. — ' For (proof of this transcendent 
 greatness of the glory, not, as De W., of the 
 certainty of its manifestation, though this 
 secondary thought is perhaps in the back- 
 ground) the patient expectation (hardly 
 =: »/ σφόδρα ττροςδοκία, as Chrys., whom 
 Luther and E. V. follow ; but better προς- 
 δοκία ίΐς το τίΧος, — the άπο denoting, as 
 also in άττεκδίχιται, that the expectation 
 continues till the time is exhausted, and the 
 event arrives) of the Creation (= all this 
 world except man, both animate and in- 
 animate : see an account of the exegesis be- 
 low) waits for (see above) the revelation 
 of the sons of God ' (' revelatur gloria : et 
 turn revelantur etiam filii Dei.' Beng. — 
 ν'ιίϊιν, not τίκνων, because their sonship 
 will be complete, and possessed of all its 
 privileges and glories). ή κτίσις has 
 
 been very variously understood. There is 
 a full history of the exegesis in Tholuck. 
 De Wette sums it up thus : " The Creation, 
 — i.e. things created, — has by many been 
 erroneously taken in an arbitrarily limited 
 sense ; e. g. as applying only, I. to inani- 
 mate creation, as Chrys., Theophyl., Calv., 
 Bez., Aret., ' mundi niachina' Luther, the 
 Schmidts, al., Fritz., ' mundi machina, cceli, 
 sidera, aer, terra .•' — against this are the 
 words οϋγ εκοϋσα and συστοάζιι κ. συν- 
 ωδίνει, implying life in the κτίσις, — for to 
 set these down to mere personification is 
 surely arbitrary : — and one can imagine no 
 reason why bestial creation should be ex- 
 cluded. 11. to living creation : {\) to 7nan- 
 kind ; Aug., Turret., all., take it of men 
 not yet believers : (2) Locke, Lightf., Ham- 
 mond, Semler, of the yet unconverted Gen- 
 tiles : (3) Cramer, Gersdorf, al., of the yet 
 unconverted Jews : (4) Le Clerc, al., of the 
 converted Gentiles : (5) al., of the converted 
 Jews: {(j) al.jOfall Christians."— '^ But,"
 
 18-21. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ Ρ£2ΜΑΙ0ΥΣ. 
 
 369 
 
 ^ αποκαΧνφιν των νιων τον Θβον ' αττεκδίχετα». ttj yap ^f'^^i-^• 
 
 ματαιότητι -η κτ'ισις ' ύττετάγι? ούν "^ ίκοΐισα αλλά δια j,^'"^'^•'•' 
 τον ντΓοταί,αντα, εττ ελτΓίοί, '^' ore καί ourn r; κτισις Luke χχ. 36. 
 ° ελενθίρωθησίται αττο της ^ δουλείας της '^φθοράς είς χχκ?; '^"• 
 
 vr'\n' -b^'i^ -S' -Λ- ilCor.i. 7 Gal. 
 
 την εΛευσεοίαΐ' της οοί:ης των τίκνων τον σεου. " s. Phu. 
 
 ^ '^ ^ '^ iii. 20. Heb. 
 
 ix. 28t. 1 Pet. iii. 20. k= Eccles. i. 2. (Eph. It. 17. 3 Pet. ii. 18 only.) 1 ver. 7 reff. act., 1 Cor. 
 
 XV. 27. m 1 Cor. ix. 17 only. Exod. xxi. 13. η ch. ir. 18. ο ch. vi. 18 reff. ρ ver. 15 reff. 
 
 FGJK q = 1 Cor. xv. 42. Gal. Ti. 8. Col. ii. 22. Jonah ii 7. r =• 2 Cor. iii. 17. James i. 25. ii. 12. 
 
 s ver. 16 reff. 
 
 τον viov arm : τον viov 70. — 20. for ματ., φθορά (gloss) β?^. — for ονχ (κονσα, ου 
 θίλουσα FG. — ιψ D'FG. — 21. διότι D'FG: αλλσ (for ort) 179. — των τέκνων της δυξης 
 43 lect G : Γί/ς 5οξί;ς om 4'. 41 : των τίκνων om Oec : των νιων 3: του νιοι• arm. — 
 
 ...τέκ- 
 νων Ε. 
 ABCD 
 
 as he proceeds, " against (II.) lies this ob- 
 jection, that if the Ap. had wished to speak 
 of the enslaving and freeing of mankind, 
 he hardly would have omitted reference to 
 sin as the ground of the one and faith 
 of the other, and the judgment on unbe- 
 lievers. But on the other hand we must 
 not extend the idea of κτίσις too wide, as 
 Theodoret, who includes the angels, KoUner, 
 who understands the ivhole Creation, ani- 
 mate and inanimate, rational and irrational, 
 and Olsh., who includes the unconverted 
 Gentiles .• nor make it too indefinite, as 
 Koppe and Rosenm. : ' lota rerum univer- 
 sitas.' The right espl. is, all animate and in- 
 animate nature as distinguished from man- 
 kind: so Irenseus, Grot. , Calo v. , Wolf. , Riick- 
 ert, Reiche, al., Meyer, Neander, Schnecken- 
 burger, Thol." The idea of the renovation 
 and glorification of all nature at the revelation 
 of the glory of our returned Saviour, will need 
 no apology nor seem strange to the readers of 
 this commentary, nor to the students of the 
 following, and many other passages of the 
 prophetic Word: Isa. xi. 6ff; Ixv. 17 ff. Rev. 
 xxi. 2 Pet. iii. 13. Acts iii. 21. 
 20.] Explanation of the re.\son why all 
 creation waits, See — 'For the creation 
 was made subject to vanity (= 7ΐη, Ps. 
 xxxviii. 4, — where the LXX have τά σύμ- 
 παιτα ματαιότης. So also FIccles. i. 2 
 and passim. It signifies the instability, 
 liability to change and decay, of all created 
 things) not willingly (' cum a corruptione 
 natura res omnes abhorreant.' Bucer in 
 Thol.) but on account of (οιά is so far 
 from losing its proper meaning by the refer- 
 ence of τον ΰποτάξαντα to God, as Jowett 
 affirms, that it gains its strictest and most 
 proper meaning by that reference : see ver. 
 11. He is the occasion, and His glory the 
 end, of creation's corruptibility) Him who 
 subjected it (i. e. God. — Chrys., al., inter- 
 pret it of Adam, who was the occasion of its 
 being subjected ; and at first sight the ace. 
 with διιΊ seems to favour this. But I very 
 much doubt whether this view can be borne 
 out. For (I) does not ίιπυτύ'ζαΐ'Τίΐ im|)ly 
 a conscious act of intentional subjugation, 
 Vol. II. 
 
 and not merely an unconscious occasioning 
 of the subjugation ? Thus we have it said 
 of God, 1 Cor. xv. 27, Trovra yap ίπτίταξίν 
 ϋττό τονς πόδας αίιτυϋ' 'όταν ci κ.τ.λ., 
 δΙΊλην υπ ίκτος τοΐ ίητοτάΙαντος αϊιτφ 
 τά πάντα. And (2) the ace. aft διά is 
 in reality no reason against this. He is 
 speaking of the originating cause of this 
 subjection, not of the efficient means of it. 
 He says that creation was not subjected 
 iicovaa, i. e. δια το θίλημα ίαντής, but 
 διό. τον νποτάί^αντα. At the same time 
 such a way of putting it, removing as it 
 were the supreme will of God to a wider 
 distance from corruption and vanity, and 
 making it not so much the worker as the 
 occasion of it, as well as this indefinite men- 
 tion of Him, is quite intelligible on the 
 ground of that reverential awe which so 
 entirely characterizes the mind and writings 
 of the Ap. If the occasion pointed at by 
 νποτάΚαι be required, — I should hardly fix 
 it at the Fall of man, but at his creation, in 
 the eternal counsels, — when he was made 
 capable of falling, liable to change. — The 
 expl. of ό ίποτάξα? as meaning 'the devil' 
 [Locke, al.], hardly needs refutation. See 
 Matt. X. 28, and note), — in (' on condition 
 of,' ^ in a state of — see ch.iv. 18, and note on 
 tip' φ, ch. V. IJ) hope (ΐπ' ϊλπίδι must not 
 be joined with νποτάζαντα, because then 
 the ελπίς becomes the hope of the υπό- 
 ταξης, — but with νπίτάγη, being the hope 
 of the ΰποταγΰσα), because (not ' that,' 
 after ίλπίς, — for then it is not likely that 
 αυτή ή κτίσις would be so emphatically re- 
 peated : the clause now announces a new 
 fact, and thus the emphasis is accounted 
 for. To suppose the whole clause subjec- 
 tive to the eX-iris, would be to attribute to 
 the yearnings of creation, intelligence and 
 rationality, — ci)nsciousness of itself and of 
 God) the creation itself also (not only 
 we, the sons of God, but even creation 
 itself) shall be delivered from the bond- 
 age of corruption (its subjection to the 
 law of decay, see Ileb. ii. 15) into (preg- 
 nant : shall be delivered from, c^c, and 
 admitted into) the freedom of the glory 
 Β Β
 
 370 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Λ^ΙΙΙ. 
 
 ^ Οίοαμζν yap on ττασα τ) κτισις συστίναΐ,ΐΐ και συν- 
 
 woti'fi αχρ' του νυν ου /uovov οε, άλλα /cat αυτοί 
 
 την ' ατταρχίΐν του ττνευματος έχοντες και ήμίΐς αυτοί 
 
 στίνά^,ομίν, " υιοθεσιαν ' απίκοενό^αενοι, Γ7]ν 
 
 σώματος ημών. τρ γαρ έλπίδι 
 
 βλεπομενη ουκ εστ/ν ελττι'ς• ό -ναιο 
 
 t here only t. 
 η 1 Cor. iv. 11. 
 
 2 Cor. iii. 14. 
 
 Gal. IT. Sal. 
 na 2 Cor. viii. 
 
 19. ch. T. 3 
 
 al. 
 Tch.xi. IB. ' " 
 
 xvi .'s. 1 Cor. εν εαυτοις 
 
 XT. 20,28. , , , 
 
 XTi.lo. James •' οΤΓΟλυ 
 
 ABCD 
 FGJK 
 
 τρωσιν του 
 ίσωθημεν, ελττίς οε 
 
 i. 18. Rev. 
 
 xiv, 4 only. 
 Exod. xxiu. 
 19 al. fr. 
 
 MarkTii,34. ρΛεΤΤεί TIC, ~~ Tl Kai 
 
 2 Cor. T.2, 4. " ^' 
 
 Heb. xiii. 17. James v. 9 only. Isa. xxiv. 7. 
 
 = 2 Cor. IT. 18. zz 1 Cor. xv. 2'•». 
 
 ίΧπ'ι^,ει ; ει δε ο ου βλεπομει», ελττί- 
 
 XTer. ISreff. ych.iii. 24. Eph. i. 7 reff. 
 
 22. for γαρ, St A (om seth : ei vera ar-pol). — στιναζιι 33-5 {ingemiscit d ν lat-ff : but 
 congemiscit g Aug Sedul al) Orig (not Ath Chr Thdrt Thdor-mops-expr al). — 23. for και 
 ΐΐμ(ΐς αντοι, ημάς και αυτοί AC al 5. 47• 80. 213 copt Dam : αντοι (readg κ. ημιις [om 
 Ambr] αντοι before) DFG Ambr : var all : aft 1st αυτοί add oi («7'. 77• 87• 109-78 al 
 Thl-txt : K. αυτοί (both times) Β Epiph, and (κ. ημ. αντ. 1st time) 31. 93 d^ ν Aug, 
 (but once only κ. ιψιις before) Ruf : txt {see notes) JK all Chr Thdrt, (readg κ. ημ. αυτ. 
 before) Thl {αυτοις for αυτοί?) Oec : see other van• in Scholz. — συνστίναζομιν (or 
 συστ.) D 38. 72 al : στίναΐ,ωμίν ΑΆ. — viof). om DFG d g Ambrst. — 24. η βλίπομινη 
 FG 55 (vss).— aft τι om «rat BDFG vss lat-ff: txt ACJK mi^ nrly (appy) syr al Chr Thdrt 
 Thl Oec Ambri (τι om 47' : τι και om, from an old ms, 47-marg : add τούτο Thl-ms : 
 for Tl, τούτο 77) and for τι icat, copt). — for έλπιζα, υπο^αίΐίΐ A 47-marg Cjt (Tisch 
 says, ' not D,' as Wetst Grsb Scholz) : exspectat vss Ambrj. — 25. ο {λττιζ., ου βλίπ. 115 : 
 
 (beware of the fatal hendiadys ,• ' the freedom 
 of the glory ' is not in any sense =: ' the glo- 
 rious freedom ;' in the latter, ' glorious ' is 
 merely an epithet whereby the freedom is 
 characterized, as in 'His rest shall be glo- 
 rious :' in the former the freedom is de- 
 scribed as consisting in, belonging to, being 
 one component part of, the glorified state 
 of the children of God : and thus the 
 thought is carried up to the state to which 
 the freedom belongs) of the children ' 
 {τ'ίκνων and not υιών here, perhaps as em- 
 bracing God's universal family of creation, 
 admitted, each in their share, to a place in 
 incorruptibility and glory). 22.] 'For 
 
 •we know (said of an acknowledged and 
 patent fact, see ch. ii. 2; iii. 19; vii. 14) 
 that the whole creation groans together 
 and travails together (not, groans and 
 travails with ics or tuith mankind, which 
 would render the ού μόνον Si άλλα of the 
 next ver. superfluous. On the figure in 
 σννωΕΊνη see John xvi. 21, note) up to 
 this time ' {^ from the beginning till now: 
 no reference to time future, because olSa- 
 μίν yap expresses the results of experi- 
 ence). 23.] The text here is in inex- 
 tricable confusion (see var. read.), but the 
 sense very little affected. I agree with 
 Tholuck in thinking that the variations 
 have arisen from the unusual position of 
 ήμύς in the rec, which 1 have therefore 
 retained. — ' But (moreover) not only (the 
 creation), but even ourselves, possessing 
 (not 'who possess,' o'l ίχοντίς, but 'though 
 we possess') the firstfruit of the Spirit 
 (i. e. the indwelling and influences of the 
 Holy Spirit here, as an earnest of the full 
 
 harvest of His complete possession of us, 
 ττνίϋμα and σαρξ and ψυχή, hereafter. 
 That this is the meaning, seems evident 
 from the analogy of St. Paul's imagery re- 
 garding the Holy Spirit : he treats of Him 
 as an earnest and pledge given to us, Eph. i. 
 14. 2 Cor. i. 22 ; v. 5, and of His full work 
 in us as the efficient means of our glorifica- 
 tion hereafter, ver. 11. 2 Cor. iii. 18. Va- 
 rious other renderings are, — (1) ' the first 
 outpouring of the Spirit,' in point of time, 
 — Wetst., Reiche, Kolln., Mey., al., — which 
 would be irrelevant : (2) ' the highest gifts 
 of the Spirit,' as the Schmidts, al. The 
 gen. TTv. may be partitive, or subjective : — 
 the firstfruits of the Spirit, — which Spirit 
 is the harvest, — or the firstfruits of the 
 Spirit, — which the Spirit gives : — or even 
 in apposition, the firstfruits of the Spirit, 
 i. e. which consist in (the gift of) the 
 Spirit. 1 prefer the first, from analogy — 
 the Spirit being generally spoken of as 
 given, not as giving, — and God as the 
 Giver), even we ourselves (repeated for 
 emphasis, and ήμας inserted to involve him- 
 self and his fellow-workers in the general 
 description of the last clause. Some [Wolf., 
 Kolln.] have imagined the Apostles only 
 to be spoken of ; some, that the Apostles 
 are meant in one place, and all Christians in 
 the other) groan within ourselves, await- 
 ing the fulness of our adoption (άπεκί., 
 as above, ver. 19, but even more strongly 
 here, ' wait out,' ' wait for the end of.' Our 
 adoption is come already, ver. 15, so that 
 we do not wait for it, b«t for the full mani- 
 festation of it, in our bodies being rescued 
 from the bondage of corruption and sin.
 
 22 27. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 371 
 
 ωςαντωο ce και τυ ach.H. 7refr. 
 
 , S.eHeb. χϋ. 
 
 α 
 
 Κομίν, δι * υπομονής ' ατΓίΚί^ίχόμίθα. ^^ ώςαυΓως• δε 
 
 ττνίνμα συναντιΧαμβάνίται ry "" άσθίπία ημών. "^ το γαο bLukex.4o 
 
 τι προανζ,ωμίθα ^ καΟο dti ουκ οί^αμίν, αλλ' αυτυ τυ "x-^xvm'n 
 
 - ι ' ' g - Γ 'Λ Λ' . 27 ' ί^ XX !ξ'^"' 
 
 ττνίυμα υπίξ)ΐντυ•γΛ^αν(ΐ ^ στίνα-γμοις αΛαλητοις ο οε ,. mhh νϋί. ΐ7. 
 
 h• -> 1^' •»Λ '^ί,' - ' ch. vi. 1!Ι reff! 
 
 ερίυνων τας καρόιας οιοεν rt το ψοονημα τυυ ττνίυματος, dart., Mnrk u. 
 
 1 Thess. ίτ. 1. principally L. P. Winer, } 20. 3. 
 fhfreonlyt. g Aits τιί. 34 only. Job iii. 24 al. 
 
 Rev. ii. 23 only. Gen. xliv. 12. i ver. 6 reff. 
 
 e 2 Cor. viii 12. 1 Pel. it. 13 only. Levit. ix. 5 vat. 
 h John T. 39. τϋ. 52. 1 Cor. ii. lU. 1 Pet. i. 11. 
 
 (λπ. om 41. 55. — 26. και om 35. — rec ταις ασθίνιιαις (see note), with JK &c vss Chr 
 Thdrt Thl Oec : της ^ίησιως FG g {infirmitatem nostra; nrationis Ambrst) : txt ABCD 
 10. 23. 31-7. 47-9. 57 al d V Syr ar-erp Cyr-jerus Dam lat-ff: της ασθίΐΉας 80.— for 
 7Γpoς■ίl)ξω/i., τΓ^ιοςίνξυμίθα DJK very many mss Orig Naz Cyr-jerus Mac Chri (also 
 Mtt's ms,) Dam Oec : -χομίθα FG : txt ABC &c Chr, (h 1) Thdrt, Thl.— άλλη DFGJ(K?) 
 &c: txt A(B?)C 109 &.c.~evTvyxavti 47. 54. 118. 238 Chr, (and mss2).-rec aft 
 υπιριντυγχ. ins νπιρ ημών {snpplemeutary addn), with CJK &c vss Cyr-jerus Chr Thdrt 
 al Aug-oft Did Epiph (on Cant, add ad dominurn) Jer all : om ABDFG (>7^ d' g arm 
 Origj (always adds τω θίοι) Epiph Dam Aug, : νπ, αγίων 118: νττ. ημ. ίίτυγχ. 47• — 
 αλλαλητοις 48. — 27. τι om 54 : τι ίστι slav. — for άγιων, ημών 17 32. 47-niarg 238 al. 
 
 This which in Gr. is expressed by the verb, 
 in Eng. must be joined to the substantive. 
 The omission of the art. before υίοϋ. is pro- 
 bably on account of its preceding its verb, 
 — ν'ιοθ. άπ(κδ. rr άπίκδ. τ ι) ν r'loH., for 
 emphasis' sake;, the redemption (in appo- 
 sition with υ'ιοθ., or rather with the fulness 
 of sense implied in νωϋ. άττίκδ., q. d. ' ex- 
 pecting that full and perfect adoption 
 which shall consist in . . .') of our body ' 
 (not, ' rescue from our body,' as Erasm., 
 Le Clerc, Reiche, Fritz., al., — which though 
 allowable in grammar, — see Heb. ix. 15, — 
 is inconsistent with the doctrine of the 
 change of the vile and mortal into the glo- 
 rious and immortal body, — Pbii. iii. 21. 
 2 Cor. V. 2 — 4, — but the [entire] redemp- 
 tion, — rescue,— of the body from corruption 
 and sin). 24, 25.] ' For (confirmation 
 
 of the last assertion, proving hope to be our 
 present state of salvation) by hope were 
 we (not ^ are we,' nor ^ have we been') 
 saved :' i. e. our first apprehension of, 
 and apjiropriation to ourselves of, salvation 
 which is by faith in Christ, was effected by 
 means of hope : which hope (Thol.) is in 
 {act faith in its prospective attitude, — that 
 faith which is ΰπόστασις ίλπιζομίνων, 
 Heb. xi. 1. The dat. ίλπιδι is not a dat. 
 of reference, — ' according to hope,' — but of 
 the instrument. ' Now hope that is seen 
 (the object or fulfilment of which is present 
 and palpable) is not hope : for that which 
 any one sees, why does he at all hope 
 for 1 ' — Kill after an interrogative word con- 
 veys a sense of the utter superfluity of the 
 thing questioned about, as being irrelevant, 
 and out of the question. ' Qui interrogat 
 Ti χοή τΓ^ιυςδοκφΐ' ; expecfat ali(|uid, sed 
 dubius est quid eveniat. Qui interrogat τι 
 χ();/ και ττροςδοκφν ; desperat de salute, 
 nee earn usquam exspectari posse cxistimat.' 
 Bremi in Demosth. Phil. i. 4C, cited in 
 
 Β 
 
 Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 137. 25.] 
 
 ' But if that which we do not see, we 
 hope for, with patience we wait for it.' 
 Patience (endurance) is the state, in which, 
 —through which as a medium, — our wait- 
 ing takes place : hence δι* νπομονης, as 
 ίγρα-φα νμ. διά πο\\ών δίίκριΊων, 2 Cor. 
 ii. 4. 26.] ' Likewise (another help 
 
 to our endurance, co-ordinate with the last 
 — our patience is one help to it, but not 
 the only one) the Spirit also (the Holy Sp. 
 of God) helps our weakness (not, helps us 
 to bear our weakness, as if the weakness 
 were the burden, which the Spirit lifts for 
 and with us, — but, helps our tveakness, — 
 ί<6• tvho are weak, to bear the burden of 
 ver. 23. And this weakness is not only in- 
 ability to pray aright, which is only an ex- 
 ample of it, but general weahiess. This 
 has been seen, and the reading conseq. 
 altered to the plural, which was at first per- 
 haps a marginal gloss). For (example of 
 the help above mentioned ; — the τό binding 
 together the clause, — see reff'., — and here 
 implying ' exempli gratia,' — ' for this, viz. 
 what to &c.') what we should pray as 
 we ought (two things ;—Μ;Λβ< we should 
 pray, — thematter of our prayer ;— and how 
 we should pray it, — the form and manner 
 of our |)rayer) we know not, hut the Spirit 
 itself (Thol. remarks, — ηΰτό brings into 
 more prominence the idea of the ιτνίϊ'μα, 
 so as to express of what dignity our Inter- 
 cessor is, — an Intercessor who knows best 
 what our wants are) intercedes for us 
 (lirrfp here does not intensify the verb, as 
 in νπίονικ^ν and the like,- and as Oec, 
 Erasm., Lutli., Bengel, render it, — but im- 
 plies the advocacy, — ' convenire ali(|uem 
 suj)er negotio alterius,' as Grot.,— to ex- 
 press which the iWfp ϊιμων of the rec. has 
 been inserted) with sighings which can- 
 not he expressed :'— i. e. the Holy Spirit 
 u 2
 
 372 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 ΟΤΙ κατά Utov ivrvyy^avu υττερ αγίων. οιόαμζν οε ABCD 
 
 η ~ ■> - ν/ιν ' η -o''Av FGJK 
 
 εις αγασον, 
 
 k 2 Cor. vli. 
 
 Η~11. 
 1 Alts χ ST. 24 
 
 Γ<•β. οτι TOIL- α^αττωσιν τον 
 
 ιη ch i 7 al. fr. " ' 
 
 η Mark xvi. 20. 1 Cor. xvi. 16. 2 Cor. vi. 1 
 
 ο — ch. xiii. 4 refif. 1 Cor. xi. 17. 
 
 iov τταντα avvtpyei 
 
 James ii. 22 oul; t. IMacc. xii. 1. 
 
 — 28. for ^f , yop 47• C7^ al : om seth.— aft avvtpyti (procedunt it Lucif Ambrst : con- 
 currunt [ίτυιτρίχίΐ] Ambr) add ο θί«ς AB Origj : om (MSS vss) Clem Orig^ Chr Thdrt 
 Cyr-jerus ThlOec Lucif Aug Ambr all.— ro ayaQ. J 48. 5?. 72 to 4. 109-77 all lect 8. 
 
 of God dwelling in us, knowing our wants 
 better than we. Himself pleadsin our prayers, 
 raising us to higher and holier desires than 
 we can e.xpress in words, which can only 
 find utterance in sighings and aspirations : 
 see next ver. So De W., Thol., Olsh. 
 Chrys. interprets it of the χάρισμα of prayer, 
 — and adds, ό yap τοιαύτης κ-βταξιωθκ'ς 
 ^^<ί;)ΐΓος, ίστώς μίτά πηλΧης τί/ς κατα- 
 νί'ζιως, μίτά ττοΧΚών των στινα^μώρ 
 των κατά ίιάνυιαΐ' τφ θίψ ττηοςπίτττων, 
 τα σΐ'μφίρηί'τα TranivyTii : — similarly Oec. 
 and Theophyl. Calv. understands, that the 
 Spirit suggests to us the proper words of 
 acceptable prayer, which would otherivise 
 hare been unutterable by ns .• and similarly 
 Beza, Grot. — άΧαΧήτοις may bear three 
 meanings — \, unspoken: 2, that does not 
 speak, — mute (see LXX, Job xxxviii. 14. 
 Sir. xviii. 33) : 3, that cannot be spoken. 
 The analogy of verbals in -τος in the N. T. 
 favours the latter meaning: comp. άΐ'£κ- 
 ίιήγηΓος, 2 Cor. ix. 15, — άρρητης, 2 Cor. 
 xii. 4, — άνίκλάλητος, 1 Pet. i. 8 (Thol.) — 
 Macedonius gathered from this ver. that 
 the Holy Spirit is a creature, and inferior 
 to God, because He prays to God for us. 
 But as Aug. Tract, vi. in Joan, remarks, 
 * non Spiritus Sanctus in semetipso apud 
 semetipsum in ilia Trinitate gemit, sed in 
 nobis gemit, quia gemere nos facit.' No 
 intercession in heaven is here spoken of, 
 hut a pleading in us by the indwelling Spirit, 
 of a nature above our comprehension and 
 utterance. 27.] ' But (opposed to 
 
 άλαλ>;Γοις — 'though unutterable by us') 
 He who searcheth the hearts (God) know- 
 eth what is the mind (intent, or be7it, as 
 hidden in those sighs) of the Spirit.' A 
 difficulty presents itself in the rendering of 
 next clause. If 'ότι be causal, ' because 
 He (the Spirit) pleads for the saints ac- 
 cording to the will of God,' it would seem 
 that (Jt(^f i/must bear the meaning ^approves,' 
 otherwise the connexion will not be appa- 
 rent ; and so Calv. and Riickert have ren- 
 dered it. Hence Grot., Reiche, Meyer, 
 Fritz, render 'ότι, ' that,' and construe, — 
 ' knows what is the mind of the Spirit, — 
 that He pleads with God (so Reiche and 
 Fritz., and Winer, § 53 d, for κατά β.) for 
 the saints:' justifying the repetition of θίόν, 
 implied before, by 1 John iv. 8, ύ μή aya- 
 ττών υνκ ίγνω τον θεον, οτι ύ θεός άγάττη 
 
 ίστ'ιν. But Ι must confess that the other 
 rendering seems to me better to suit the 
 context : and I do not see that the ordinary 
 meaning of οΊδιν need be changed. The as- 
 surance which we have that God the Heart- 
 Searcher interprets the inarticulate sighings 
 of the Spirit in us, is, — not strictly speak- 
 ing, His Omniscience, — but the fact that 
 the very Spirit icho thus pleads, does it 
 κατά ΰίόν, — in pursuance of the divine 
 purposes and in conformity with God's good 
 pleasure. So that, as its place before the 
 verb would suggest, κατά Qtnv is emphatic, 
 and furnishes the reason of the olctv. A 
 minor objection against the explicative οτι 
 is, that we have υιδαμίν 'ότι immediately 
 following. — All these pleadings of the Spirit 
 are heard and answered, even when inarticu- 
 lately uttered : we mayextend the same com- 
 forting assurance to the imperfect and mis- 
 taken verbal utterances of our \)rs.yers,yi\nc\x 
 are not themselves answered to our hurt, but 
 the answer is given to the voice of the Spirit 
 which speaks through them, which we would 
 express, but cannot. Comp. 2 Cor. xii. 7 — 10, 
 for an instance in the Ap.'s own case. 
 28.] Having given an example, in prayer, 
 how the Spirit /telps our weakness, and out 
 of our ignorance and discouragement brings 
 from God an answer of peace, he now ex- 
 tends this to all things— &\\ circumstances 
 by which the Christian finds himself sur- 
 rounded. These may seem calculated to 
 dash down hope, and surpass patience ; but 
 we know better conceriting them. ' But 
 (the opposition seems most naturally to 
 apply to ver. 22. the groaning and travailing 
 of all creation) we know (as a point of the 
 assurance of faith) that to those who love 
 God (a stronger designation than any yet 
 used for believers) all things (every event 
 of life, but especially, as the context requires, 
 those which are adverse. To include, with 
 Aug. de Corrept. et Grat., c. 24, the sins 
 of believers in this πάντα, as making them 
 ' humiliores et doctiores,' is manifestly• to 
 introduce an element which did not enter 
 into the Ap.'s consideration ; for he is here 
 already viewing the believer as justified by 
 faith, dwelt in by the Spirit, dead to sin) 
 work together {crvvtoyti, absolute, or άλ- 
 λί)λ()ΐς- implied: not, ^ work together for 
 good with those who love God,' — ' loving 
 Goa' being a, 'working for good:' which,
 
 28— so. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 373 
 
 ioOec 
 
 rote κατά '^ TrpoUeaiv ^κΑητοις ονσιν. ^ οτι ους ττοοίγι/ω, ρ Eph. i.ii 
 
 >S ' t ', - a ' ' _t_,'_ reft. 
 
 και ττροωρισεν συμμοοψους της ίΐκονος του νιου αυτού, <ί<:^'7,»^• 
 " eic το tivai αυτυν "^ πρωτότοκου εν "^^ ττολλοΓς αΒίλψοίς' fpA^ao.*' 
 
 30 "^^ 5•^ S ' / ^ χ • '\ . \ .\ 2Pct. iii. 17 
 
 ους οε ττοοωοίσεν, τούτους και ε/ίαΛεσεν και ους "niyt. 
 
 28. 1 Cor. ii. 7. Eph. i. ή, Η only t• t Phil. iii. 21 only t. ach. i. 23 lefif. 1 Cor. xi. 7. xv. 49. 
 
 2 Cor. iT.4al. ν Acts iii. 19. rii. 19. ch. i 11, 2U al. w Matt. i. 25. Col. i. 15. Heb.i.6al. Gen. 
 
 iv. 4al. WW Hcb. ii. 10 reff. χ = ch. ix. 7, 11. 1 Cor. vii. 15, Sic. Eph. it. 1 al. 
 
 13 al Clem Origj Cyr-jerus Thdrt-te.xt Thl : txt ABCDFGK &c Orig^ Chrj Thdrt-comm 
 Oec. — aft κλητ., ins αγιιης g ν Ruf Ambrst-text Ambr-text Sedul Pelag. — 30. for προ- 
 ω()ΐσ(ΐ', Trpotyvuj A. — from ίζικ. to £ui/c. om 77• 109. — και ους (ίικ. A aeth. — 32. ος ovSe 
 
 though upheld by Thol., seem.s to me harsh, 
 and inconsistent with the emphatic position 
 of Γοίς άγ. τ. θ. Surely also in that case 
 ττάρτα would have been τα πάντα, all 
 ikinffs, as one parly tvorking, set over 
 against ot άγαπώντες τ. 0., the olher party 
 working : — whereas πάντα awtpyil gives 
 rather the sense of all things co-operating 
 one with another) for (towards, to bring 
 about) good (their eternal welfare ; — the 
 fulfilment of the purpose of the αγάπη τ. 
 θ(υϋ, »/ iv χριστφ '] ησην Γ. κυρ. ημών, 
 
 ver. 39), — to those who are called (not 
 only invited, but effectually called — see be- 
 low) according to (His) purpose.'— In this 
 further description the Ap. designates the 
 believers as not merely loving God, but 
 being beloved by God. The divine side of 
 their security from harm is brought out, as 
 combining with and ensuring the other. 
 They are sure that all things work for their 
 good, not only because they love Him %vho 
 worketh all things, but also because He 
 who ivorketh all things hath loved and 
 chosen them, and carried them through the 
 successive steps of their spiritual life. The 
 calling here and elsewhere spoken of by the 
 Ap. (comp. esp. ch. ix. 11) is the working, 
 in men, of " the everlasting purpose of God 
 whereby before the foundations of the world 
 were laid. He hath decreed by His counsel 
 secret to us, to deliver from curse and 
 damnation those whom He hath chosen in 
 Chi-ist out of mankind, and to bring them 
 by Christ to everlasting salvation." Art. X. 
 of the Church of England. To specify the 
 various ways in which this calling has been 
 understood, would far exceed the limits of 
 a general commentary. It may suffice to 
 say, that on the one hand. Scripture bears 
 constant testimony to the fact that all be- 
 lievers are chosen and called by God, — 
 their whole spiritual life in its origin, pro- 
 gress, and completion, being_//om Him: — 
 while on the other hand its testimony is no 
 less precise that He willeth all to be saved, 
 and that none shall perish except by wilful 
 rejection of the truth. So that, on tlie one 
 side, God's sovereignty, — on the other, 
 man's free will, — is plainly declared to 
 us. To receive, believe, and act on both 
 
 these, is onr duty, and our wisdom. They 
 belong, as truths, no less to natural than 
 to revealed religion : and every one who 
 believes in a God must acknowledge both. 
 But all attempts to bridge over the gulf 
 between the two are futile, in the present 
 imperfect condition of man. The very rea- 
 sonings used for this purpose are clothed in 
 language framed on the analogies of this 
 lower world, and wholly inadequate to de- 
 scribe God regarded as He is in Himself. 
 Hence arises confusion, misapprehension of 
 God, and unbelief. I have therefore simply, 
 in this commentary, endeavoured to enter 
 into the full meaning of the sacred text, 
 whenever one or other of these great truths 
 is brought forward ; not explaining either 
 of them away on account of possible diffi- 
 culties arising from the recognition of the 
 other, but recognizing as fully the elective 
 and predestinating decree of God where it 
 is treated of, as I have done, in other places, 
 the free will of man. If there be an in- 
 consistency in this course, it is at least one 
 in which the nature of things, the condi- 
 tions of human thought, and Scripture it- 
 self, participate, and from which no com- 
 mentator that I have seen, however anxious 
 to avoid it by extreme views one way or the 
 other, has been able to escape. See, for a 
 full treatment of the subject, Tholuck's 
 Comm. in loc. 29, 30.] The Ap. now 
 
 goes backward from κ\ΐ]τιης, to explain 
 hoiv this CALLING Came about. It sprung 
 from God's foreknowledge, co-ordinate with 
 His fore-determination of certain persons 
 (to be) conformed to the image of His Son, 
 that Christ might be exalted as the Head of 
 the great Family of God. These persons, 
 thus foreknown and predetermined, He, in 
 the course of His Providence actually, but 
 in His eternal decree implicitly, called, 
 bringing them through justification to glory ; 
 — and all this is spoken of as past, because 
 to Him who sees the end from the begin- 
 ning,— past, present, and future, are not, 
 but ALL IS accomplished when deter- 
 mined.— 'For those whom He foreknew 
 (but in what sense .' This has been much 
 disputed: the Pelagian view,— ' eo4- qnos 
 prasciverat credituros,' is taken by Orig.,
 
 374 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 ΥΙΙΤ. 
 
 ycii.ii. isreff. " £/ίάλεσ£ΐ', TovTovc KOI ^ϊ^ικαίωσίν' ους δε ^ ίδίκαίωσεν, abcd 
 
 ζ = (of (hast), '...... „. . _ . . ' PfilK 
 
 31 a 
 
 It ovv epov/uiev προς ταύτα , 
 
 thrist), 
 
 iXl^i^ τούτους κα\ ' ίδόζασεν. 
 
 Ottii, here » ' fl ^ ' \ r - » aa Λ' ' - . 39 « - 'Λ/ 
 
 only. See £t ο usoQ υπ(ξ> ημών, τις καυ Ύ]μων , ος γε του ίοιου 
 ach v'/i ii νιου ovK ' ίώίίσατο, άλλο ύττεο ήμων πάντων ^ παρεδωκεν 
 
 3u'al." ',Ν _ •, y <ν ,_^, f-d ' 
 
 aa-M^tt.xii. avTOv, πως ουχί καί συν αυτω τα πάντα -ημιν γ^αρισίται•^ 
 
 21. τ. 23. b Acts XX. 2ί) reff. c ch. iv. 25 reff. d Luke Tii.ai alf. 2 Mace. iii. 33. 
 
 VI. iSiov {τον iS. VI. D) ΐφιισ. D'FG d' g.— rec αλλ, with ACJ(K?) &c : txt ΒΟΨβ 
 &c. — ffur αυτω om 219 (but ins in marg). — τα om D'FG. — χαρισηται 39. 73. 93. 116 
 al lectt 13. 14 al Chr (ms) Thdrt (somet) : donavit d ν Tert lat-ff: χ. η. τ. π. 92. — 
 
 FGJK 
 
 Chrys., Oec, Thcophyl., Augustine (prop. 
 55, in Ep. ad Rom ), Ambr., Erasm. in pa- 
 raphrase, Calov., Reiche, Meyer, Neander, 
 and others ; the sense of fore-lnved, by 
 Erasm. in commentary, Grotius, Estius, the 
 Schmidts, &c. : that of fore-decreed, by 
 Thol. edn 1, and Stuart, — which however 
 Thol. in subseq. edd. suspects to be ungram- 
 matical without some infinitive follg, and 
 prefers a sense combining foreknowledge and 
 recognition-as-His: — ih^toi elected, adopted 
 as his sons, by Calvin, — ' Dei autem prse- 
 cognitio, cujus hie Paulus meminit, non 
 nuda est praescientia, ut stulte fingunt qui- 
 dam imperiti, sed adoptio qua filios suos 
 ab improbis semper discrevit,' — RUckert, 
 De Wette, al. That this latter is implied, 
 is certain : but I prefer taking the word in 
 the ordinary sense of ' foreknew,' especially 
 as it is guarded from being a ' nuda prae- 
 scientia' by what follows : see below and 
 Gal. iv. 9), He also pre-ordained (His 
 foreknowledge was not a mere being pre- 
 viously aware how a series of events would 
 happen : but was co-ordinate with and in- 
 separable from, His having pre-ordained 
 all things) conformed (i. e. to be conformed) 
 to the image of His Son (the dat. and gen. 
 are both found afterwords like σύμμηριρος; 
 comp. σύμφυτος, ch. vi. 5. — The image of 
 Christ here spoken of is not His moral pu- 
 rity, nor His sufferings, but as in 1 Cor. 
 XV. 49, that entire form, of glorification in 
 body and sanctification in spirit, of which 
 Christ is the perfect pattern, and all His 
 people shall be partakers. To accomplish 
 this transformation in us is the end, as re- 
 gards us, of our election by God ; not 
 merely to rescue us from wrath. Compare 
 1 John iii. 2. 3 Phil iii. 21 : and on the 
 comprehensive meaning of μηρφή, Phil. ii. 
 6, 7i — where it expresses both the ' form 
 of God' in which Christ was, and ' the 
 form of a servant' in which He became in- 
 carnate), that He might (or, may, as 
 Calv., but the reference in the aorists is to 
 the past decree of God) be first-bom among 
 many brethren (i. e. that He might be 
 shewn, acknowledged to be, and glorified 
 as, THE Son of God, pre-eminent among 
 those who are by adoption through Him 
 
 the sons of God. This is the further end 
 of our election, as regards Christ : His 
 glorification in us, as our elder Brother and 
 Head) : — but whom He fore-ordained, 
 those He also called (in making the de- 
 cree, He left it not barren, but provided for 
 those circumstances, all at His disposal, by 
 which such decree should be made effectual 
 in them. 30.] Ικάλ€σ€ν, supply, {/ς την 
 eavTov βασιλίίαν καΐ ίόζαν, 1 Thess. ii. 12; 
 other expressions are found in 2 Thess. ii. 
 14. ICor.i. 9. ITim.vi. 12. 1 Pet. v. 10): 
 and whom He called, these He also jus- 
 tified (the Αρ., remember, is speaking en- 
 tirely of God's acts on behalf of the be- 
 liever : he says nothing now of that faith, 
 through which this justification is, on his 
 part, obtained) : hut whom He justified 
 them He also glorified' (He did not 
 merely, in His premundane decree, acquit 
 them of sin, but also clothe them with 
 glory: the aorist too^atrtr being used, as 
 the other aorists, to imply the completion 
 in the divine counsel of aU these, which 
 are to us, in the state of time, so many suc- 
 cessive steps, — simultaneously and irre- 
 vocably. So we have the perfect in John 
 xvii. 10. 22). 31.] 'What then shall 
 
 we say to these things (what answer can 
 the hesitating or discouraged find to this 
 array of the merciful acts of God's love on 
 behalf of the believer) .= If God is for us 
 (and this He has been proved to be, vv. 28 
 — 30, — in having foreknown, predestinated, 
 called, justified, glorified us), who is against 
 us V 32.] ' (God) Who even (taking 
 
 one act as a notable example out of all) 
 did not spare His own Son (His own, — 
 His ιΰίις μονη-γίνής, the only one of God's 
 sons who is One with Him in nature and 
 essence, begotten of Him before all worlds. 
 No other sense of ίδιου will suit its posi- 
 tion here, in a clause already made emphatic 
 by yt, in consequence of which whatever 
 epithet is fixed to jiioTi must partake of the 
 emphasis), hut delivered Him up (not ne- 
 cessarily ίίς θάνατον only, but generally, 
 as ίδωκΐν, John iii. 16 : ' largitus est, quem 
 sibi retinere poterat,' as Tholuck, from 
 Winer) on behalf of us all (so that every 
 one of us believers, even the most afflicted,
 
 SI— 86. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 375 
 
 Ε f κλί κ• 
 
 τωΐ'... 
 
 ABCD 
 
 EFG 
 
 JK 
 
 ^^ τΙς ^ εγ/οαλέσίΐ κατά ' εκλεκτών ^ θεοΰ : θεός ό ^ δίκαιων : e Acts six. 38 
 
 34 ' *■ > ' ν f > Λ ν ί -χ ^ ^' Γ*"^• constr.. 
 
 λεσ£ΐ κατά ^ εκΧι 
 τις ο κατακρινων ; χ^ριστος ο αποθανών, ^ μάλλον δε soph^p^. 
 
 k > Λ ^ «^ > >' 1 ' ^ ί' - - Λ - t\ \ '"«^t• 328. 
 
 καί εγερθείς, ος /cat εσΓίν εν οεα,ια του υεου, ος «at fM»» sx. ιβ 
 
 m ' ' f \ t - OK , . - "• , , ν aj. ch. xri. 
 
 εντυγχοι^εί υττε^ο -ημών', ''''τις ημάς "χωρίσει αττο της L^vlii. iS!" 
 
 ' ' " " • ο U\ "ι^ο '*•ρ^ ^ε Κ<^η., ch. i. 6, 
 
 ayaπης του γυριστού ; υΛιψις η στενογωηια η ^ cιωyμoς 7. 
 
 η λιμός η ^ yυμroτης η κιΐ'όυνος η μαγ^αιρα ; •*° καϋως '''^^'}„ξ^1'^^ι 
 
 ' " " - S Λ ' Λ "Λ \ 1(), 11. ch. ii. 
 
 yεypaπτaι οτι ένεκεν σου υανατονμευα ολην την lai. Esth. u. 
 
 j = Gal. iv. 9. k ver. 11 reff. I = Eph. i. 20. Col. iii. 1. Heb. i. 3. viii. 1. x. 12. x'ii. 2. 1 Pet. 
 
 iii. 22onIy. m = Hcb. vii. 25. See Acts xx v. 24 reff. nMatt.xix.fi. Ezek xlri. 19. w ύττό, 
 
 Tcr. 39. Heb. Tii. 20. Wisd. i. 3. ο ch. ii. 9 reff. ρ Matt. xiii. 21. Acts vui. 1 al Pror. xi 19 
 
 q2Cor. xi27. Rev. iii. 18 only. Deut. xxviii. 48. r = Matt. x. 34. Jer. ix.l6. β ch. vii 4'reff' 
 
 PsA. xliv. 22. 
 
 33. τον θ. 54. 219.— 34. aft χριστ. add ι>}σοι;ς ACFGJ 5. I7. 31-3. 672. 73. 80 al g ν 
 copt Eetli arm Cyr Did Dam Ruf Augj Maximin : txt BDK most mss syrr arr al Chr 
 Thdrt CjT-jerus ThI Oec.—Kat {hei ίγερθ.) om ABC 5. 17. 35-9. 71-3. 80 al Syr copt 
 Cyr Did Dam Ruf Victorin : ins DFGJK most mss ν (not am') syr ar-erp &c Chr Thdrt 
 CjT-jerus Thl Oec Iren Hil Ambr Aug Ma.ximin Ambrst al. — aft (ytp9. add (κ νεκρών 
 AC 17. 31-9. 73. 115 al ar-erp copt feth Chr Dam Thl. — ος om arm Ambrst. — και (bef 
 fVTvyx.) om AC 35. (i?. 77- 87. 108-9-15. 79. 213 al d' ν copt Chr Thdrt Did Cyrr Iren Thl 
 Ruf al : ins B(e sil)DFGJK most mss d^ g am harl- syrr al Thl Oec Maximin Ambrst. — 
 του om B. — 35. ης ovv FG d g v-ed Ruf Sedul. — for ημάς, (με Syr. — for rov χριστού, 
 τον θίου της εν χριστού ιησον Β (Hilj, but alludg rather to ver 39) : r. θεον 7. 74-6. 91. 
 123. 238 schoU in 39 al slav gr-lat-ff : txt (MSS &c) Orig^ (but ed' r. θεον) Thl Oec Tert 
 Cvpr Lucif all. — ;; ίιωγ. om Tert Epiph : transp 72 al. — 36. rec ένεκα, with CK .' &c 
 Tiidrt Dam Thl Oec : txt ABDFGJ I7. 37. 47. 77- 93. 109-13-78 Clem Orig Meth Chr. 
 
 has an equal part in Him. Of others, no- 
 thing is said here), how shall He not (how 
 can it be that He will not) also with Him 
 (in consequence of and in analogy with this 
 His greatest gift : it is a question ' a ma- 
 jori ad minus ') give freely to us all 
 things (all that we need or hope for ; or 
 even more largely, all created things for 
 ours, to subserve our good, and work toge- 
 ther for us : comp. 1 Cor. iii. 22) .'' 
 33.] The punctuation of these verses is dis- 
 puted. INIany (Aug., Ambr., Reiche, KoU- 
 ner, Olsh., Meyer, De Wette, and Griesb., 
 Knapp, Lachmann) follow, in vv. 3.H, 34, 
 the undoubted form of ver. 35, and place 
 an interrogation after each clause, as in the 
 text ; while Luther, Beza, Grot., Wolf., 
 Tholuck, al., make ΰεος ο Ιικ. and χριστός 
 6 άποθ. κ.τ.Χ. the repli/ to and rejection of 
 the questions preceding them. The former 
 method is preferable, as preserving the form 
 of ver. 35, and involving no harshness of 
 constr., which the other does, in the case of 
 χριστός followed by the two participles. — 
 ' Who shall lay (n) any charge against 
 the elect of God {iyKa\fw usually with a 
 dat. see reff.) ? Shall God {ί^καΧεσει), 
 who justifies them (Chrys. strikingly says, 
 oiiK εΤ,πε, ^εϋς ό άφεϊς αμαρτήματα, ά\\', 
 ο πολλψ μείζον ήν, Οίος ύ ίικαιών. όταν 
 jun ή τυϋ δικαστού ψ»}ι^ος SiKaiov άπο• 
 φήνγ, και Οικαστοϋ ταιούτοιι, τίνος άζιος ό 
 κιιτη-γοίΐων ; Horn. xvi. ρ. 129, c) .' Who 
 is he that condemns them (the pres. part, 
 as expressing the olhcial employment, ' is 
 
 their accuser,' is better than the fut., as cor- 
 responding more closely with δίκαιων) } (Is 
 it) Christ who died, yea who rather is also 
 risen, who moreover is at the right hand 
 of God, who also intercedes for us.'' — 
 " All the great points of our redemption are 
 ranged together, from the Death of Christ 
 to His still enduring intercession, as reasons 
 for negativing the question above." De W. 
 35.] ' Who (i. e. u-hat .• but masc. 
 for uniformity with vv. 33, 34) shall se- 
 parate us from the love of Christ?' — Is 
 this (1) ow love to Christ, or (2) Christ's 
 love to us, or (3) our sense of Christ's love 
 to us ? The first of these is held by Origen, 
 Chrys., Theodoret, Ambr., Erasm., al. But 
 the difficulty of it lies in consistently inter- 
 preting ver. 37, where not our endurance in 
 love to Him, but our victory by means of 
 His love to ns, is alleged. And besides, it 
 militates against the conclusion in ver. 39, 
 which ought certainly to respond to this 
 question. — The third meaning is defended 
 by Calvin. But the second, as maintained 
 by Beza, Grot., Est., al., ThoL, Reiche, 
 Meyer, De Wette, appears to me the only 
 tenable sense of the words. For, having 
 shewn that God's great love to us is such 
 that none can accuse nor harm us, the Ap. 
 now asserts the permanence of that love 
 under all adverse circumstances — that none 
 such can affect it, — nay more, that it is by 
 that love that we are enabled to obtain the 
 victory over all such adversities. Λ\ηΰ 
 finally he expresses his persuasion that no
 
 876 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 VIII. 87—39. 
 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 ημίραν, ελογισθίΐμεν ως ιτροβατα " σφαγής. ^' αλλ εν ABCD 
 τούτοις πασιν " ύττερίΊκω/αεν οια του αγαπησαντος ημάς. 
 
 38 W ' \ « " WW Λ' « y ν >ί 
 
 π^πεισμαι yap οτι οντε υανατος ούτε ςωη, ούτε 
 άγγελοι ούτε ^ "«χα* ούτε ^ ει^εστωτα ούτε ^ ^αελλοντα, 
 δυΐΌ^ιεις, 
 
 ' CC ' / 
 
 κτισις έτερα 
 
 39 " a " ι " b /Ο / Λ " < 
 
 ουτε νψωμα οντε ρανος οντε τις 
 ^υνησεται ημάς γωρ'ισαι από της 
 
 Ί, 
 
 f = ch. ix.8. 
 
 1 Cor. iv. 1. 
 η Acts viii. 32. 
 
 James V 5 
 
 only. I.sa. 
 
 xxxiv. 2» β. 
 
 gen., Zed). 
 
 si. 4. 
 V here only t- 
 vr constr., ch. 
 
 xi». 14. XV. οντε 
 
 14. 2 Tim. 
 
 i. S, 12. 
 WW So 1 Cor. 
 
 iii.22. 
 
 X 1 Cor. XV. 24. ' αγατΓ^ς του Οεον της εν νριστω Ιησού τω κυριω ημών. 
 
 y =■ 1 Cor. νϋ. 2β a1. 1 Mace. χϋ. 44. ζ Acts xxiv. 2.') reff. ζζ = Matf.xxiv. 29 reff. a 2 Cor. 
 
 X. S only. Job xxiv. 24. b Eph. iii 18 al. cch. i. 25. Col. i. 15. Heb. iv. 13. 
 
 CO — 1 Tim. i. lu. d ver. 35. e — ch. v. 5. 
 
 — 37. uWa 77• — ^ta τον α-γαττησαιτα DEFG it ν slav lat-ff : txt ABC &c Syr ar-crp 
 Clem Orig Bas Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec Ruf Aug.— ημάς om 80.— 38. πιποιθα 
 19. 55 al. — άγγελος DEFG it Au?, Ambrst (not Hil Aug-oft all). — aft υντε αρχηι, 
 add οντί ίξουσιηι C 4G. 73. 80. l()ij-21 syr* gr-lat-tf (not Clem Orig Thdrt Chr h I 
 Thl Oec Hil al) : also pref οντε ίζονσια {-σιαι 44. 80. 109 lect 8) DE al (above) 
 d^ e (see Col. ii. 15 al). — rec ovn δυνάμεις ovr. ενεστωτ. ovr. μελλ., with JK 
 &c Syr goth al Chr Thdrt Thl Oec Augj or j: txt ABCDEFG {-μις D• : virfus 
 d g Aug: fortitudo Ambrj) 37• 47. 73. 178-9 d g tol copt Syr arm-venet al Orig Eus 
 Eplir Cyr Dam lat-fF {ουτ. δυν. has been suspected as spurious {^Fritz., Tholuck, in De 
 Wette'] : hxit no mss omit it, unless {appxp^ 121 [M/<] ayid one or two lat-ff who have 
 ovT. εξονσιαι). — 39. ης om DEFG 114 al 219' it ν syrr lat-ff (but Jerj neque alia quce- 
 libet creatura). — δύναται 17• — του θεού om 65 : τον κυρίου AC(E."')FG : χξιίστου 
 lect 8. 
 
 created tiling shall ever separate us from 
 that Love, i. e. shall ever be able to pluck 
 us out of the Father's hand. 36.] 
 
 The quotation here expresses, — ' all which 
 things befal us, as they befel God's saints 
 of old, — and it is no new trials to which we 
 are subjected :— What, if we verify the 
 ancient description .'' 37.] ' But (ne- 
 
 gation of the question θλΐψίς .... μάχαι- 
 ρα ;) in all these things we are far the 
 conqiuerors (hardly ' more than conquer- 
 ors :' the υπέρ intensifies the degree of 
 νικψν, as in ύπερπερισσενειν and the like, 
 but does not express a superiority over 
 νικςίΊ') through Him who loved us' (i. e. so 
 far from all these things separating us from 
 His love, that very love has given us a glorious 
 victory over them). — The reading δια τον 
 ά-γαπήσαντα ήμας would amount to the 
 same in meaning : — ' on account of Him 
 tvho loved us' implying, as in vv. 11. 20, 
 that He is the efficient cause of the result. 
 — It is doubted whether '/fe who loved us' 
 be the Father, or our Lord Jesus Christ. 
 This is, I think, decided by τψ άγαπησαντι 
 
 νμας και Χοΰσαντι τιμάς εν τψ 
 
 α'ίματι αντον, Rev. i. 5. The use of such 
 an expression as a title of our Lord in a 
 doxology, makes it very probable that where 
 unexplained, as here, it would also desig- 
 nate Him. 38.] ' For I am per- 
 suaded (a taking up and amplifying of the 
 νπερίΊκώμεν — our victory is not only over 
 these things, but I dare assert it over greater 
 and more awful than these) that neither 
 death, nor life (well expl. by De W. as 
 
 the two principal possible states of man, 
 and not as = ' any thing dead or living,' 
 as Calvin and Koppe) nor angels, nor 
 principalities (whether good or bad ; αρχή 
 is used of good, Eph. i. 21. Col. i. 16; of 
 bad (1 Cor. xv. 24?). Col. ii. 15. Eph. vi, 
 12 : here, generally. — άyyε\o^, absolutely, 
 seems never to be used of bad angels : if it 
 here means good angels, there is no objec- 
 tion, as Stuart alleges, to the rhetorical 
 supposition that they might attempt this 
 separation, any more than to that of an 
 angel from, heaven preaching another 
 gospel. Gal. i. 8) nor things present nor 
 things to come (no vicissitudes of time), 
 nor powers (some confusion has evidently 
 crept into the arrangement. Ephr. Syr. 
 reads, οντ, άρχαι ουτ. εζουσίαι ουτ. ενεστ. 
 ουτ. μέλλ., οϋτ. δυνάμεις οντ. ayysXot ; 
 Basil, οΰτε άγγ. οντ. αρχ., οϋτ. εζονσ., οϋτ. 
 δυνάμεις, οΰτ. ενεστ. ουτ. μελλ. Ι follow, 
 with Griesb., Lachm.,Tisch., the very strong 
 consent of the ancient MSS ), nor height 
 nor depth (no extremes of space), nor any 
 other created thing {κτίσις cannot here be 
 the whole creation, as Clirys., — ο λΐyει τοι- 
 ούτον εστα/' ει και άλλη τοσαΰτη κτίσις ήν 
 'όση ή δρώμενη, 'όση »'/ νοητή, οΰδεν άν 
 με της άyάπης εκείνης άπέστησε, — but 
 any creature, such as are all the things 
 named) shall be able to sever us from the 
 love of God which is in Christ Jesus 
 our Lord' (here plainly enough God's 
 love to us in Christ, — to us, as we are 
 in Christ, to us, manifested in and by 
 Christ),
 
 IX. 1. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 377 
 
 IX. 
 
 1 f 
 
 ,ir,i f=2Cor.xii.6 
 r"lj Eph iv. 25. 
 2 Cor. xi 
 
 Αληθίΐαΐ' λέγω ^ kv -νριστω, ου τ//ευδο 
 συμμαξ)τυξ)ονσης μοι της συνίΐοησίως μου εν ττνίυματι w. Eph.iv 
 
 hSCor. xi. 31. Gal. i. 20. 1 Tim. ii. 7. i ch. ii. 15. viii. 16 ouly t. k ch. ii. 15 reff. 
 
 Chap. IX. 1. tv χρ. om 238. — aft χριστώ, add ιησου D'EFG it Ps-Ath (de trin et 
 sp) Ambrst (not Aug al). — και ov xj/tvd. lectt 7• 8 arm. — μου της συν. lect 8.— μου aft 
 συν. om 54 lect 12 : μου .... αγιω om 4'. — for tv (2rid), συν FG {cum out in g). — 
 
 Chap. IX — XI.] The Gospel being now 
 established, in its fulness and freeness, as 
 the power of God unto salvation to every 
 one that believeth, — a question naturally 
 arises, not unaccompanied with painful dif- 
 ficulty, respecting the exclusion of that 
 people, as a people, to whom God's ancient 
 promises were made. With this national 
 rejection of Israel the Apostle now deals : 
 first (ix. 1 — 5), depressing his deep sym- 
 pathy with his otvn people: then (ix. 
 6 — 29) justifying God, Who has not (vv. 
 6 — 13) broken His promise, hut from, the 
 first chose a portion only of Abraham' s 
 seed, and that (vv. 14 — 29) by His un- 
 doubted elective right, not to be murmured 
 at nor disputed by us His creatures : ac- 
 cording to which election a remnant shall 
 ?iow also be saved. Then, as to the rejec- 
 tion of so large a portion of Israel, their 
 owti self -righteousness (vv. 30 — 33) has 
 been the cause of it, and (x. I — 13) their ig- 
 norance of God's righteousness, — notwith- 
 standing that (x. 13 — 21) their Scriptures 
 plainly declared to them the nature of the 
 Gospel, and its results tvith regard to 
 themselves and the Gentiles, with which 
 declarations Paul's preaching was in per- 
 fect accordance. Has God then cast off 
 his people (xi. 1 — 10) .■■ No — for a rem- 
 nant shall he saved according to the elec- 
 tion of grace, but the rest hardened, not 
 however for the purpose of their destruc- 
 tion, but (xi. 11 — 24) of mercy to the 
 Gentiles: which purpose of mercy being 
 fulfilled, Israel shall be brought in again 
 to its proper place of blessing (xi. 25 — 32). 
 He concludes the whole with a humble 
 admiration of the unsearchable depth of 
 God's wai/s, and the riches of His Wisdom 
 (xi. 33—36). 
 
 In no part of the Epistles of Paul is it 
 more requisite than in this portion, to bear 
 in mind his habit of insulating the one 
 view of the subject under consideration, 
 with which he is at the time dealing. The 
 divine side of the history of Israel and the 
 world is in the greater part of this portion 
 thus insulated : the facts of the divine 
 dealings and the divine decrees insisted on, 
 and the mundane or human side of that 
 history kept for the most part out of sight, 
 and only so much shewn, as to make it 
 manifest that the Jews, on their part, failed 
 
 of attaining God's righteousness, and so lost 
 their share in the Gospel. 
 
 It must also be remembered, that, what- 
 ever inferences may justly lie from the 
 Ap.'s arguments, with regard to God's dis- 
 posal of individuals, the assertions here 
 made by him are universally spoken with a 
 national reference. Of the eternal salva- 
 tion or rejection of any individualJew there 
 is here no question : and however logically 
 true of any individual the same conclusion 
 may be shewn to be, we know as matter of 
 fact, that in such cases not the divine, but 
 the human side, is that ever held up by the 
 Apostle — the universality of free grace for 
 all — the riches of God's mercy to all who 
 call on Him, and consequent exhortations 
 to all, to look to Him and be saved. — De 
 Wette has well shewn, against Reiche and 
 others, that the apparent inconsistencies of 
 the Αρ., at one time speaking of absolute 
 decrees of God, and at another of culpability 
 in man, — at one time of the election of some, 
 at another of a hope of the conversion of 
 all, — resolve themselves into the necessary 
 conditions of thought under which we all 
 are placed, being compelled to acknowledge 
 the divine Sovereignty on the one hand, 
 and human free will on the other, and 
 alternately appearing to lose sight of one of 
 these, as often as for the time we confine 
 our view to the other. 
 
 IX. 1 — 5.] The Apostle's deep sympathy 
 with his own people Israel. The sub- 
 ject on which he is about to enter, so 
 unwelcome to Jews in general, coupled with 
 their hostility to himself, and designation of 
 him as a ττλόΐ'ος (2 Cor. vi. 8 ; comp. also 
 2 Cor. i. 17; ii. 17; iv. 1, 2; vii. 2 al), 
 causes him to begin with a πρηπηραίτησις 
 or deprecation, bespeaking credit for sim- 
 plicity and earnestness in the assertion 
 which is to foUow. This deprecation and 
 assertion of sympathy he puts in the fore- 
 front of the section, to take at once the 
 ground from those who might charge him, in 
 the conduct of his argument, with hostility 
 to his own alienated people.—' I say (the) 
 truth in Christ (as a Christian, — as united 
 to Christ ; the ordinary sense of the expr. 
 iv χριστφ, so frequent with the Ap. — It is 
 not an oath, ' by Christ,' — for though tv 
 with ϋμνυμι bears this meaning, we have 
 no instance of it where the verb is not ex-
 
 378 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 IX. 
 
 12Tim. i. 3 
 
 only. S«e 
 
 ch. i. 9 reff.t 
 m 1 Tim. vi. lu 
 
 only. Jer. 
 
 viii. IR. 
 η imperf., =- 
 
 ActsxxT. 22 
 
 reff. Gal.iv. 
 
 20. τ 
 
 ο Actsxxiii. 14. (i)V 
 
 1 Cor. xii. 3. 
 
 xvi. 22. Gal. i. 8, 9 only. Deut. vii. 26. 
 q =■ Lerit. XXV. 45. r ch. i. 3 reff. 
 
 a = Exodxl.34. 3 Kings viii. 11. 
 Gen. xvii. 2al. 
 
 ayi<i), ^ on Χυπη μοΊ εστίν μί-γάΧη και α^ιάΧειπτος abcd 
 
 οουνη rp καροια μου. ηυγ^ομην γαρ αναυεμα eivai jk 
 
 αυτός εγω '' αττο του γριστοϋ υττερ τωΐ' α^ζΧφων μου, των 
 κατά σάξ)κα, ^ οιτινίς ίίσιν \σξ>ανι\ιται, 
 και η " δόζα και α'ι " Βιαθηκαι και η 
 
 ρ = 2 Cor. xi. 3. 2 These, i. 9. Col. ii. 20. ch. vii. 2. 
 
 a •= Acts X. 41, 47. xiii. 32, 43 »l. t ch. viii. 1ft reff. 
 
 V =■ Acts iii. 25. vii. 8. Heb. passim, (plur., Eph. ii. 12.) 
 
 συγγενών μου 
 
 ' t ' Λ ' 
 
 η υιουεσια 
 
 2. της καρδίας η . 219\—Ζ. ίνχομην OEJK 5.6^. 35. 46. 108-9-13-21-51 all Thdrt- 
 ms : (νχομαι 41. — rec αντος εγω αναθ. nv., with CJK &c vss Ath Thdrt al Cypr al {ego 
 i>«e mostly) : t.\t ABDEFG 5 al it syr goth Chr Ruf Ambr, Pac : tyw om 108. — for 
 arro, v-no DEG : α d g ν : pro (also) g. — του om 54. 80-9 lect 12.— μου aft των ovyy. om 
 D'FG 116 d' g Cyr latt-tf : τ. σ. μου om 80 ; add των DEFG 73. 115 al Syr Cyr Thdrt. 
 — 4. ίίσιν om 109. — η hei νιοθ. om lect 12 : ojv η υιοθ. ... to tnayytXiai om A : και 
 ai διαθ. κ. η νομοθ. om J. — ri διαθηκΐ] BDEFG ν (not am harl' tol al) Ath Chr (Mtt's 
 
 pressed), — I lie not (confirmation of the 
 preceding, by shewing that he was aware of 
 what would be laid to his charge, and dis- 
 tinctly repudiating it),— my conscience 
 bearing me witness of the same (the σΰν 
 in comp., as in reff., denoting accordance 
 ivith the fact, not joint testimony) in the 
 Holy Spirit (much as iv χοιστψ above : — 
 a conscience not left to itself but informed 
 and enlightened by the Spirit of God. 
 Strangely enough, Griesb., Knapp, and 
 Koppe take these words also for a formula 
 jurandi, and connect them with οΰ \pfvSo- 
 μαι), — that (not because, or for, as Bengel : 
 oTi, as in 2 Cor. xi. 10, introducing the 
 matter to which the asseveration was di- 
 rected, — I say the truth, when I say, that 
 . . . .) I have great grief and continual 
 sorrow in my heart.' The reason of this 
 grief is reserved for a yet stronger descrip- 
 tion of his sympathy in the nest ver. 
 3.] ' For I could wish (the imperf. is not 
 historical, alluding to his days of Phari- 
 saism, as Pelag. and others, but qtiasi- 
 optative, as in reif. ' / ivas wishing,' had it 
 been possible, — ηνχόμην li ίνίχώοιι, ti 
 ίνείίχίτο, Phot. The sense of the imperf. 
 in such expressions is the proper and strict 
 one (and no new discovery, but common 
 enough in every schoolboy's reading) : the 
 act is unfinished, an obstacle intervening. 
 So in Latin, ' faciebam, ni . . . .,' the com- 
 pleted sentence being, ' faciebam, et per- 
 fecissem, ni . . . .') that I myself (on αυτός 
 iyi!} see ch. vii. 25 ; it gives emphasis, as 
 εγώ Πηΰλος, Gal. v. 2 ; 'I, the very per- 
 son who write this and whom ye know ') 
 were a curse (a thing accursed, άνάβίμα 
 in the LXX = c"irT, an irrevocable devotion 
 to God, or, a thing or person so devoted. 
 All persons and animals thus devoted, were 
 put to death : none could be redeemed, 
 Levit. xxvii. 28, 29. The subsequent scrip- 
 tural usage of the word arose from this. It 
 
 never denotes simply an exclusion or ex- 
 communication, but always devotion to per- 
 dition, — a curse. Attempts have been made 
 to explain away the meaning here, by un- 
 derstanding eu'commuiiicalion, as Grot., 
 Hammond, Le Clerc, &c. ; — or even nattiral 
 death only, as Jerome, al. : but excomm. 
 included cursing and delivering over to 
 Satan: — and the mere wish for natural 
 death would, as Chrys. eloquently remarks, 
 be altogether beneath the dignity of the jias- 
 sage. Perhaps the strangest interpretation 
 is that of Dr. Burton : " S. Paul had been 
 set apart and consecrated by Christ to His 
 service ; and he had prayed that this devo- 
 tion of himself might be for the good of his 
 countrymen :" — it is however no unfair 
 sample of a multitude of others, all more or 
 less shrinking from the full meaning of the 
 fervid words of the Apostle) from Christ 
 (i. e. cut off' and separated from Him for 
 ever in eternal perdition. No other mean- 
 ing will satisfy the plain sense of the words. 
 από in the sense of ϋπό, making Christ the 
 agent of the curse, would be hardly admis- 
 sible : still less the joining, — as Carpzov 
 and Eisner, — άπο with ηνχόμην. On this 
 wish, compare Exod. xxxii. 32) on behalf 
 of (in the place of ; or, if thus I could be- 
 nefit, deliver from perdition) my brethren, 
 my kinsmen according to the flesh.' — 
 The wish is evidently not to be pressed as 
 entailing on the Ap. the charge of incon- 
 sistency in loving his nation more than his 
 Saviour. It is the expression of an affec- 
 tionate and self-denying heart, willing to 
 surrender all things, even, if it might be so, 
 eternal glory itself, if thereby he could ob- 
 tain for his beloved people those blessings 
 of the Gospel which he now enjoyed, but 
 from which they were excluded. Nor does 
 he describe the wish as ever actually formed ; 
 only as a conceivable limit to which, if ad- 
 missible, his self-devotion for them would
 
 2—5. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 379 
 
 νομοθίσία και η ^ \α 
 "ηατί^ίς, και ες ων ο Λ^ριστος το 
 
 eXtc 
 
 Tpeia και αι " tira-yyiAiai, " ο 
 κατά σάρκα, ο ων 
 
 ix. 1,6 only. Exod. xii. 25, 26. 
 . ^ Eph.iT.6al. 
 
 y see ch. iv. 13. xv. 8. Gal. iii. 16. 
 
 ' w here only t. 
 
 l' "' 2 Mace. vi. 
 
 . \ 23. 
 
 £7ΓΙ X John xvi. 2. 
 
 ch. xii. l.Heb. 
 
 ζ "■ Acts Tii. 19 al. 
 
 mss) Cypr Ruf-ms Jerj Sedul : txt ACK mss (appy) d e g vss nrly gr-lat-ff. — ai νομοθισιαι 
 238. — οι \ητρ(ΐαι 54.— η ιπαγγίλια DEFG {και ίπαγγ. F, και ηπαγγ. G) Chr (Mtt's 
 mss) : (promissa aut promissio g). — ai om 238.-5. oi om FG. — bef t% ων, om ναι FG 
 g mar (lat al) Hippol Cypr Pelag (not Iren Aug all) : ins aft ων arm. — το {τα C, ό Hipp) 
 
 reach. Others express their love by pro- 
 fessing themselves ready to give their life 
 for their friends ; he declares the intensity 
 of his affection by reckoning even his spi- 
 ritual life not too great a price, if it might 
 purchase their salvation. 4.] Is'ot 
 
 only on their relationship to himself does 
 he ground this sorrow and this self-devotion : 
 but on the recollection of their ancient pri- 
 vileges and glories. — ' Who are Israelites 
 (a name of honour, see John i. 47• 2 Cor. 
 si. 22. Phil. iii. 5) ; — whose (is) the adop- 
 tion (see Exod. iv. 22. Deut. iv. 1 ; xxsii. 
 6. Isa. i. 2 al.), and the glory (perhaps 
 their general preference and exaltation, con- 
 sequent on the inohtaia, — but far more 
 probably, as all the other substantives refer 
 to separate matters of fact, — the Shechinah 
 or visible manifestation of the divine Pre- 
 sence on the mercy-seat between the che- 
 rubims : see retf ), and the covenants (not, 
 the two tables of the law, — as Beza, Grot., 
 al., — which formed but one covenant, 
 and are included in νημοθισία • nor, t/ie 
 Old and λ'βιν Testament Covenants,— a.s 
 Aug., Jer., Calov., Wolf., — see Gal. iv. 24 
 ff. : but the several renewals of the cove- 
 nant with Abraham, Isaac, Jacob, and finally 
 the whole people at Sinai : — see Gen. xv. 
 9—21 ; xvii. 4. 7. 10 ; xxvi. 24 ; xxviii. 13. 
 Exod. xxiv. 7, ^ al ), and the law-giving 
 (' si alii Solonibus et Lycurgis gloriantur, 
 quanto justior est gloriandi materia de Do- 
 mino ! ' Calv. νομοθ. is both the act of 
 giving the Law, and the Law thus given), 
 and the service (ordinances of worship : 
 see ref. Heb.), and the promises (probably 
 only those to the patriarchs, of a Redeemer 
 to come, are here thought of, as the next 
 two clauses ])lace the patriarchs and Christ 
 together without any mention of the pro- 
 phets. So Abraham is described, Heb. vii. 
 G, as τον Ιχοντα τάς ίπαγγ^λίας,) — 
 whose are the fathers (prob. to be limited 
 to Abr., Isaac, and Jacob : — so De W., but 
 Stephen gives οι πατ. ϊιμων a much wider 
 meaning in Acts vii. 11, 12. 19. 39. 44, and 
 so apparently Paul himself, Acts xiii. I7. 
 In all those places, however, ϊιμών follows, 
 whereas herii the word is absolute : so that 
 the above limitation may be true), — and of 
 whom sprung Christ, as far as regards 
 the flesh (re, — ace, see ch. xii. 18,— implies 
 
 that He was not entirely sprung from them, 
 but had another nature ; qu. d. ' on His 
 human side,' — ' duntaxat quod attinet ad 
 corpus humanum,' as Erasmus) who is 
 God over all (prob. neuter ; for τα -πάντα, 
 not oi ττάντίς, is the equivalent nominative 
 in such sentences : see ch. xi. 3G), — blessed 
 for ever. Amen.' — The punctuation and 
 application of this doxology have been much 
 disputed. By the early Church it was ge- 
 nerally rendered as above, and applied to 
 Christ, — so Iren., Tert., Orig. h.l., Athan., 
 Epiph., Chrys., Theodoret, Theophyl., Oec. 
 Wetstein has, it is true, collected passages 
 from the fathers to shew that they apphed 
 the words b ίπ'ι πάντων Οιός to the Father 
 alone, and protested against their applica- 
 tion to the Son ; but these passages them- 
 selves protest only against the erroneous 
 Noetian or SabeUian view of the identity of 
 the Father and the Son, whereas in Eph. iv. 
 5, 6, f /ς κιΊρ'ος, and tig θίός κ. πατήρ 
 πόντων, ο ΙπΙ ιτάντων, are plainly dis- 
 tinguished. That our Lord is not, in the 
 strict exclusive sense, ό ίπί πάντων θίός, 
 every Christian will admit, that title being 
 reserved for the Father : but that He is ίπί 
 πάντων θίός, none of the passages goes to 
 deny. Had our text stood ϊζ ων 6 χρ. το 
 κατά σάρκα, ό έττί πάντων θίός ό ίύλογη- 
 τός ίΐς τους αιώνας, it would have appeared 
 to countenance the above error, which as it 
 now stands it cannot do. — The first trace of 
 a different interpretation, if it be one, is 
 found in an assertion of the emperor Julian 
 (Cyril, p. 321. Wetst.) τον yovv Ίησονν 
 οντί Πητΰλος ίτοΚμη<ΐίν ιΐπι'ϊν θίόν, nvTt 
 Ματθαίος οντί Μάρκος, άλλ' ό χρηστός 
 Ιωάννης. The next is in the punctuation 
 of two cursive MSS of the eleventh and 
 twelfth centuries (5 and 47), which place a 
 period after σάρκα, thus insulating ό ων 
 ίπί πάντων .... άμΐμ', and regarding it 
 as a doxology to God over all, blessed for 
 ever. This is followed by Erasm., Wetst., 
 Semler, Reiche, KoUner, Meyer, Fritzsche, 
 Krehl, al. The objections to this rendering 
 are, (1) ingenuously suggested by Socinus 
 himself (Thol.), and never yet obviated, — 
 that without one exception in Hebrew or 
 Greek, wherever an ascription of blessing is 
 found, the predicate ίύΧογιιτός (ψΐ3) pre- 
 cedes the name of God. (In the one
 
 380 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 IX. 
 
 ''M^j^^f'^g^i• πάντων Θίος ^ ευ^ο-γητυς είς τους αιώνας, αμήν. 
 δε δη ^ εκπίπτωκίν ο λόγος 
 
 οίον 
 
 του 
 
 yap 
 
 ch. i. 2S. 
 2 Cor. i. 3. 
 
 h'a. 1 Pcf. i! 3 only. Psa. Ιχχχτίϋ. 52. c ^ here only. Winer, } 4ϋ. 0, «nm. 1. d = here 
 
 only. See 1 Cor xiii. 8. Jame.si. 11. π/πτω, -= Lake xvi. 17. ίίαττ., Josh. xxi. 43. Judith vi. 9. 
 
 κατα σάρκα om FG Cyrj Thdrtj.— ο bef ων om Chr-text (ed Montf).— θίος ίττι πάντων 
 Syr ar-erp Iren Tertj : tn. ir. om seth : επ. ηαντας Cyr•' : super omnes syrr Iren 
 Victorin: ίττ. Travra Thdrtj : per omnia Tevt^.—Qtoq om Eph Cypr-ed Hil-edi Leo,: 
 but it is in most gr-lat-ff, and ύ ών &c is cited by very many fathers as in apposition to 
 ο χριστοί,•. {The various punctuations <^c see in notes, and more particulars in IVetstein 
 and Scholz.)—aμηv om lat-ff (not Jer al, nor it v).— 6. for h, on, δ' ετι 80.— for ισραηλ 
 
 • •••αμήν 
 
 C. 
 ABDE 
 FGJK 
 
 place, Ps. Ι.κνϋ. 19 LXX, κύρ. ό θ. ίίιΧογη- 
 τός, εϋ\ογ7)ΤΟς κύρ. ήμ'εραν καθ' ι'ιμίραν, 
 which seems to be an exception, the first 
 εύλ. has no corresponding word in the Heb. 
 and appears to be interpolated. So Stuart, 
 and even Eichhorn, Einleit. ins A. T. p. 
 320. In Yates's vindication of Unitarian- 
 ism, p. 180, this is the only instance cited. 
 Such cases as 3 Kings x. 9. 2 Chron. ix. 8. 
 Job i. 21. Ps. cxii. 2, are no exceptions, as 
 in all of them the verb ιΐη or yivmro is 
 expressed, requiring the substantive to fol- 
 low it closely). And this collocation of 
 words depends, not upon the mere aim at 
 perspicuity of arrangement (Yates, p. 180), 
 but upon tlie circumstance that the stress 
 is, in a peculiar manner, in such ascriptions 
 of praise, on the predicate which is used in 
 a pregnant sense, the copula being omitted. 
 (2) That the ων, on this rendering, would 
 be superfluous altogether (see below). (3) 
 That the doxology would be unmeaning 
 and frigid in the extreme. It is not the 
 habit of the Ap. to break out into irrelevant 
 ascriptions of praise ; and certainly there is 
 here nothing in the immediate context 
 requiring one. If it be said that the survey 
 of all these privileges bestowed on his 
 people prompts the doxology, — surely such 
 a view is most unnatural : for the sad sub- 
 ject of the Ap.'s sympathy, to which he 
 immediately recurs again, is the apparent 
 inanity of all these privileges in the exclu- 
 sion from Ufe of those who were dignified 
 with them. If it be said that the incarna- 
 tion of Christ is the exciting cause, the το 
 κατά πάρκα comes in most strangely, de- 
 preciating, as it would on that supposition, 
 the greatness of the event, which then be- 
 comes a source of so lofty a thanksgiving. 
 (4) That the expression ίϋλο-γητος ιΐς τονς 
 αιώνας is twice besides used by Paul, 
 and each time unquestionably not in an 
 ascription of praise, but in an assertion 
 regarding the subject of the sentence• The 
 places are, Rom. i. 25, ίλάτριυσαν τ?) 
 KTi"ti πορά τον κτίσαντα, ος ίστιν ίίιλο- 
 γητος ίίς τους αιώνας• άμίμ', — and 2 Cor. 
 xi. 31, ό θίός κ. πατήρ τ• κυρ. Ίησυΰ 
 οΊϋίν, 6 ων εΰλογητος (ίς τονς αιώνας, 
 ΟΤΙ ου ^(ύεομαι : whereas he twice uses 
 
 the phrase εϋλογητος δ θιός as an as- 
 cription of praise, without joining εις τονς 
 αιώνας• (5) That in the latter of the above- 
 cited passages (2 Cor. xi. 31), not only the 
 same phrase as here, but the same con- 
 struction, ύ ών, occurs, and that there the 
 whole refers to the subject of the sentence. 
 — I do not reckon among the objections the 
 want of any contrast to το κατά σάοκα, 
 because that might have well been left to 
 the readers to supply. — Another mode of 
 punctuation has been suggested (Locke, 
 Clarke, al.), and indeed is found in one MS 
 of the same date as above (71): to set a 
 period after πάντων and refer ό ων επί 
 πάντων to Christ, understanding by πάν- 
 των all the preceding glorious things, or 
 the πητΊρες only, or even ' all things.' 
 This lies open to all the above objections 
 except (5), and to this in addition, that as 
 Bp. Middleton observes, we must in that 
 case read 6 θεός. — Variety of reading there 
 is none worth notice : the very fathers 
 generally cited as omitting θεός, having it 
 in the best MSS and add. — Crell (not 
 SchUchting, see Thol. p. 484, note) pro- 
 posed (and is followed by Whiston, Whitby, 
 and Taylor), to transpose ό ων into ων ό ; 
 — but besides the objection to the sense 
 thus arising, ενλογητός would probably in 
 that case (not necessarily, as Bp. Middleton 
 in loc.) have the art. : not to mention that 
 no conjecture arising from doctrinal diffi- 
 culty is ever to be admitted in the face of 
 the consensus of MSS and versions. — The 
 rendering given above is then not only that 
 most agreeable to the usage of the Αρ., but 
 the only one admissible by the rules of 
 grammar and arrangement• It also ad- 
 mirably suits the context : for, having 
 enumerated the historic advantages of the 
 Jewish people, he concludes by stating one 
 which ranks far higher than all,^ — that from 
 them sprung, according to the flesh. He who 
 is God over all, blessed for ever. — αμήν 
 implies no optative ascription of praise, 
 but is the accustomed ending of such 
 solemn declarations of the divine Majesty : 
 comp. ch. i. 25. 6 — 13.] God has 
 
 not broken his promise : for He chose 
 from the first but a portion of the seed of
 
 6—11. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 S81 
 
 παντίς οι ίξ Ισρηηλ, ούτοι Ισρατ/λ' 'οι/δ Ότι itffiv eCEu.xxi.is. 
 στΓί^μα Αβραάμ, παντίς τίκνο, αλλ Εί' Ισαάκ '^ κλη- fAc(sxix.4 
 
 fl' ' / Rf / ■> \ ι -r fi"• 
 
 υησίται σοι σπέρμα. τουτίστιν, ου τα τίκνα της σαρ- g- Actsxix. 
 
 Koc, ταντα τίκνα του θίοΰ, άλλα τα τέκνα της επαγγελίας S'GE^'.'iviii'.''^' 
 
 ρΙι \ Ύ h ' / Ο ' Λ ' ' ' Λ ' ■"■ 1U fsce note). 
 
 Λογί^εταί εις σττερμο. ίττα^^ίΚιας yap ο Λόγος ούτος, Actsxu.i. 
 'Κατά τον καιρόν τούτον βΧίίισομαι και εσται τ^ 'Σαρρα^^"^"^"^'''• 
 
 " 10 1' ' 5'^'\Λ^ ^'DiQ' 'i: ' ^ m ι 1 ch.V. 3, Π. 
 
 νιος. " ου μόνον οε, άλλα και rtueKKa ες ενός κοιτην viu.-js. 
 
 ,1 >, \ - ν . _ 11 .„ / » SCor. viii.19. 
 
 άγουσα, ισαακ του πατρός ημών, μηπω yap 7^''" 20 ('ΙΙ^ΙιΓ 
 
 Θ/ <>\ >'/ ^ ' £1^ *■ η J -Λ '' ' ' xi. 7. ch. 
 
 ίντων μηοί πραί,αντων τι ayauov η ώαυλον, ινα η κατ χίϋ. ΐ3. Heb. 
 
 * ' ' xiii. 4ouly.) 
 
 mm Heb. ix. 8 only. η Pan!, Tit. ii. 8 only. John iii. 20. 7. 29. James iii. 16 only. Prov. xxii. 8. 
 
 (2n(]), ισραηλιται (Λειται DFG) DEFG 63-62 jt y (not toj) ^yss Chr-mSi (and Mtt's 
 mssj) Oec-comm Aug, Ambrst : txt (MSS &c) Orig2 Cses Chr (see above) Thdrt Thl Oec 
 Aug-oft Tich al. — 7. for ort, όσοι Orig (freely: aft has τταντως κηι τίκνα) : οτοι 23: 
 neque hi sunt g : qni ν (demid not am al) goth Pelag Augj al (but not most lat-fF). — 
 ιηακ DEFG (also DE ver 10) : txt AB d g.— 8. aft τουτ tariv, add on Β 37. 116.— 
 rou om FG37. 67•. 70. 1 14-20 al Chr.— 9. aft ίλ£υσ. ins ττρος σε 109.-11. for μ»,ί£, 
 η FG it V lat-ff (not Aug al). — rec κακόν (substn of more usual word), with DEFGJK 
 
 Abraham (0 — 10), and again only one out 
 of the two sotis of Rebecca (10 — 13). 
 6.] ' Not however that (ούχ clov οΐ, on = 
 ov τοίυν ύ( λέγω, oloi> 'ότι ....,' but I do 
 not mean such a thing, as that . . .,' or ' the 
 matter however is not so, as that . . .' De 
 W. cites from Athen. vi. p. 244, ουχ olov 
 βαδίζει, and from Phrynich. p. 332, οϋχ 
 olov οργίζομαι, in a similar sense. The 
 rendering, ' it is not possible that,' would 
 require ordinarily οίοι• τε with an infinitive, 
 — and St. Paul is asserting, not the impossi- 
 liliti/, however true, of God's word being 
 broken, but the fact, that it was not broken) 
 the word (i. e. the promise) of God has 
 come to nothing' (see reff., so Lat. excidit ) ; 
 viz. by many, the majority of the nominal 
 Israel, missing the salvation which seemed 
 to be their inheritance by jiromise. — 'For 
 not all who are sprung from Israel ( = 
 Jacob, according toTholuck : but this does 
 not seem necessary : Israel here as well as 
 below may mean the people, but here in 
 the popular sense, there in the divine idea), 
 (these) are Israel' (veritably, and in the 
 sense of the promise). 7.] ' Nor, 
 
 because they are (jihysically) the seed of 
 Abraham, are all children (so as to in- 
 herit the promise), hut (we read), " In Isaac 
 shall thy seed he named" (i. e. those only 
 shall be called truly and properly, for the 
 purposes of the covenant, thy seed, who 
 are descended from Isaac, not those from 
 Ishmael or any other son. Thol. renders 
 Ka\t~iv here by eviufcf en, ' to raise up ') : 
 8] that is (that ainounts, when the facts 
 of the history are recollected, to saying) 
 not the children of the flesh (begotten by 
 natural generation, comp. John i. 13, and 
 
 Gal. iv. 29) they are the children of God ; 
 but the children of the promise (begotten 
 not naturally, but by virtue of the divine 
 promise [Gal. iv. 23], as Isaac) are reck- 
 oned for seed.' 9.] ' For this word 
 was (one) of promise (not, ' For this was 
 the word of promise,' i.e. ούτος yap 6 λ. 
 της επηγ-γ. The stress is on επαγγελίας : 
 the children of promise are reckoned for 
 seed : for this word, in fulfilment of which 
 Isaac was born, was a word of promise), 
 According to this time (n;n nrs ' when 
 the time shall revive,' — as De \V., Thol., al. : 
 — i. e. next year at this time. The citation 
 is a free one; the LXX has επαιιαστρεψων 
 ϊ)ξω προς σε κατά τον καιρόν τούτον Γ»)ς 
 ώρας, κ. εΚίι ν'ιόν Έ,άρρα y γνΐ'ή σον. The 
 change into εσται ry 'Σάρρφ ν'ιός is pro- 
 bably made for the sake of emphasis — the 
 promise was to Sarah) will I come, and 
 Sarah shall have a son.' 10, 11.] 
 ' And not only (so) (i. e. not only have we 
 an example of the election of a son of 
 Abraham by one woman, and the rejection 
 of a son by another, but also of election 
 and rejection of the children of the same 
 woman, Rebecca, and that before'they ivere 
 born, οΰ μόνον ύ'ί introduces an a fortiori 
 consideration. — In the constr. supply roDro 
 oidy) hut also Rehecca having conceived 
 (see ref. and ch. xiii. 13, where the mean- 
 ing is not exactly the same though cognate) 
 by one man (in the former case, the chil- 
 dren were by tuw wives ; the difference be- 
 tween that case and this being, that there, 
 was diversity of parents, here, identity. 
 The points of contrast being then this di- 
 versity and identity, the identity of the 
 father also is brought into view. This is
 
 S82 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 IX. 
 
 dJ'x'i^h'r ° ίκλο-νην ^ ττρόθεσις τον θεοϋ "^ μίν^, ουκ ίζ ε/ϊγωυ αλλ ABDE 
 
 28'. 1 Th'ess. . -r Λ- 12 '''Ό '"s" 't ly u ^ FGJK 
 
 i. 4. i>Pet. fic του καλούντος, ίορευη αυτή οτι ο μίΐ^ων οου- 
 
 i. 10 only t. , _,,^, το ^ν , vm^'r ^^ 
 
 A|ts|xyii. λίυσει τω ελασσοιη, καυως yiy ραπται Ιον Ιακωρ 
 η-γάπησα, τον δε Ησαϋ εμισησο. 
 
 11 rrff 
 π = MHtt. xi. 
 
 23. 1 C<ir. 
 
 iii. 14. 2 Cor. ix. 9. 1 Pet. i. 23, 2S. 
 nch. Ti. 6reff. vMal. i. 2, 3. 
 
 = cli.vui. βΟΓεΙϊ. 
 
 3 Gen. XXV. 23. 
 
 t=I. c. Heb.xi.24. 
 
 &c Cbr Thdrt Thl Oec : txt AB 23. 37. 47- 57- G7^ 80 al Origj Cyr Dam.— rec τον Qt. 
 ττροθ., with mss &c : txt ABDEFGJK most mss syr arm slav Origj Chr-ms Thdrt al : 
 τον θίον aft fUPt) 55.—μίΐνη FG. — λαλονντος 70.— 12. rec ερρηθΐ], with B^D'J &c Orig 
 Chr al : txt ABiD'EFGK 1. 44. 108-9 Thdrt.— αντη om D^ harl• d e Origj (but once 
 quotes λίγίται) Ambrst Aug (somet) Bed : προς αυτήν Thdrt. — on om 177• — 13. καΘα- 
 
 well put by Chrys. : ?'/ γαρ 'Ρίβίκκα και 
 μόνη τφ Ίιταάκ: -γέγονε γννι), και δύο 
 τίκονσα παΐδας, ίκ τοΐι Ίσαακ ίηκιν 
 άμφοτίρους' αλλ' 'όμως ο'ι τίχθίντίς του 
 αΰτυν πατρός όνης, της αυτής μητρός, 
 τάς αντάς \ΰσαντ(ς ώδϊνας, και ομοττα- 
 τριοι ϋνης και όμομητριοι, και προς τού- 
 τοις και δίδυμοι, οΰ των αυτών άπίιΚαυ- 
 σην. Horn. χνϋ. ρ. 610 ε), our father 
 Isaac (γ. πατ. ήμ., probably said without 
 any special reference, the Ap. speaking as 
 a Jew. If with any design, it might be, as 
 Thol. remarks, to shew that even among 
 the Patriarchs' children such distinction 
 took place. — Christians being τέκνα επαγ- 
 γελίας, the expression might apply to them : 
 but, as the sameComm. observes, the argu- 
 ment here is to shew that not all the chil- 
 dren oj" promise belonged to the εκλογή. 
 See ch. iv. 1 — 12. — As to the constr. here, 
 it is best to regard άλλα και . . . ίχυνσα . . . 
 ημών as a sentence begun but intercepted 
 by the remark following, and resumed in 
 another form at ίρρ. αντί)), — for (not an- 
 swering to ' furnishes us an example ' sup- 
 plied after ίχηναα, but elliptically put, 
 answering to the apprehension in the Ap.'s 
 mind of the force of the example which he 
 is about to adduce. For this use of yap 
 see John iv. 44, note. Herod, i. 8, Γύγη, 
 ού yap . . . . ; 30, ί,εΐνε Άθ. παρ' ήμεας 
 yap .... Thucyd. i. 72, τώΐ' δε Άθ. έτυχε 
 yap . . . ., and other exx. in Hartung, Par- 
 tikellehre, i. 467) without their having 
 been yet born (the subject, the children, 
 is to be supplied partly from the fact of her 
 pregnancy just stated, ])artly from the his- 
 tory, well known to the readers. — μή in- 
 stead of οΰ is frequently used by later 
 Greek writers in participial clauses : Winer, 
 § 5!). 3; so Acts ix. i), ή ν . • • μή βλέπων κ. 
 οΰκ ϊφιιγεν . . . , and Luke xiii. 1\, μή δυνά- 
 μενη άνακύφαι. See Schafer, Demosth. 
 iii. 395, and Hartung, ii. 130—132) or 
 having done any thing good or ill (ψανλ. 
 an unusual word with Paul — properly 
 άπλονν, ρι^ίδιον, εντελές, as Timaeus in 
 Lex. to Plato, with whom it is a very com- 
 
 mon word in this sense. Ruhnken, on 
 the word in Timaeus, gives from the Lex. 
 Rhetor. MS., τό <ρ. σημαίνει δέκα' επί τε 
 προςώπον και πράγματος τό κακόν, τό μι- 
 κροί', κ. τό ευκαταφρόνητοι', κ. τό ασθενές. 
 κ. τό άίοξο)'. κ. τό ανόητοι', κ.τ.λ. This 
 will shew the connexion of the strict and 
 the wider meaning), that the purpose of 
 God according to (purposed in pursuance 
 of, or in accordance with, or [Thol.] with 
 reference to His) election (Thol. prefers 
 taking κατ εκλ. adjectively, as Bengel has 
 rendered it, ^ proposituni electivum,' and 
 as in Polyb. vi. 34, £<c εκάστης άνήρ λαμ- 
 βάνεται κατ' έκλογι))', ' eleclively ') may 
 (not miff hi ; the purpose is treated as one 
 in all time, which would be nullified if once 
 thwarted) abide (stand firm : the opposite 
 of iK-n-iVrfu'), — not of works (ch. iii. 20; 
 iv. 2) but of Him that calleth, — (this 
 clause does not seem to depend on any one 
 word of the foregoing or following, as on 
 ερρέθη, Calv., Luth. ; — or μίντ^, Riickert, 
 Meyer; — or κατ' ίκλογ/;!/, Fritz. ; — but to 
 be a general characteristic of the whole 
 transaction; see ch. i. 17• Thol., De W. — 
 Thus viewed, or indeed however taken, it is 
 decisive against the Pelagianism of the Ro- 
 manists, who by making our faith as fore- 
 seen by God the cause of our election, 
 affirm it to be ίξ έργων. See the matter 
 discussed in Thol., and Eph. ii. 8, note), — 
 it was said to her {'ότι is recitantis ; the 
 LXX have και), "The elder shall serve 
 the younger " (this prophecy is distinctly 
 connected in Gen. xxv. with the prophetic 
 description of the children as two nations, 
 — λαός λαοϊι νπερίϊ,ει, κη'ι ό μείζων κ.τ.λ. 
 But the nations must be considered, as 
 spoken of in their progenitors, and the elder 
 nation = that sprung from the elder bro- 
 ther. History records several subjugations 
 of Edom by the kings of Judah ; first by 
 David (2 Sam. viii. 14) ; — under Joram 
 they rebelled (2 Kings viii. 'JO), but were 
 defeated by Amaziah (2 Kings xiv. 7). and 
 Elath taken from them by Uzziah (2 Kings 
 xiv. 22) ; under Ahaz they were again free,
 
 12—17. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 883 
 
 14 W rp' r > - 
 
 It ουν ίξ)ονμζν , 
 
 μη 
 
 αδικία ^ πηοά ._ , ^., 
 
 r ΐς- -\ f > /ΛΛ•''- * only. 
 
 γίΐ'Οίτο. ^^ τω Μωυσει -γαο λεγίί "* Ελεήσω όι^ αν ''ίλεω, κταί yrhVn;^"' 
 
 ι. ' ' ι^ « b ' ' 16 C " τ ' - Ω 'Λ DeiDosth., ρ. 
 
 οίί(:τε(ρ))σω οι* αν υικταρω. αρα ουν ου του σελοντος sis ΐ3 
 
 ουοε του τ^οεχοντος, άλλα του * ελεωντος θεού. λέγει "^^''εχο^ 
 •yap η "νραφη τω Φαραώ οτι εις αυτό τούτο ^ εςηνειοα b here only. 
 
 ''''''•' ''c ch. τ. 17 re 
 
 d = 1 Cor. ix. 24. Grtl. τ. 7. gen.. Acts i. 7. Heb. τ. 14. 
 and passim, ch. iv. 3 al. f Mark i. 38. Acts is. 31 al. 
 
 6 al. (EXOD. ix. Ifi.) Jos. Antt. viii. 11. 1. (1 Cor. vi. 4 only.) 
 
 TTfp Β Orig.— 14. τω om D'FG: ins (&c) Clem Orig Thdor-mops all. — 15. rec 
 τω γαρ μ. (corrn), with AJK &c Chr Thdrt al : txt BDEFG al Dam. — rec μωση, with 
 (or μωνση) ADEJK &c Thdrt al : txt (or μωση) BFGaU Chr (Mtt's mss).— 16. θι\. and 
 τριχ. transp 109.— rec ίλιονντος, with B^K &cgr-if (ίυ^οκουντος J) : txt AB'DEFG3i>. 
 — 17. avTo (and σε) om 54. — for (ζηγ., servavi mss mentd by Ambrst. — οττως αν FG. — 
 
 e sing., Mark xii. 10. χτ. 28. John ii. 22 
 g — here only. Jadg. v. 12. Psa. vii. 
 
 and troubled Judah (2 Chron. xxviii. 16, 
 17, comp. 2 Kings xvi. G, 7)) — and con- 
 tinued free, as prophesied in Gen. xxvii. 
 40, till the time of John Hyrcanus, who 
 (Jos. Antt. xiii. 9. 1) reduced them finally, 
 so that thenceforward they were incorpo- 
 rated among the Jews) : as it is written, 
 Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated ' (there 
 is no necessity here to soften the ' haied ' 
 into 'loved less:' the words in Malachi 
 proceed on the fullest meaning of t μίση σα, 
 see ver. 4, " The p^ple against whom the 
 Lord hath indignation for ever "). 
 14 — 29.] This election was made by the 
 indubitable right of God, Who is not 
 therefore tmjust. 14.] 'What shall 
 we say then (anticipation of a difficulty or 
 objection, see reff., — but not prtt into the 
 mouth of an objector) .' Is there un- 
 righteousness (injustice) with (in) God 
 (viz. in that He chooses as He will, with- 
 out any reference to previous desert) .' Let 
 it not be : 15.] for He saith to 
 Moses, " I will have mercy on whomso- 
 ever I have mercy, and will compas- 
 sionate whomsoever I compassionate."' 
 (The citation is from the LXX, who in- 
 sert the indefinite άν, the Heb. being 
 •;πί< TiVnx \7iin ; the meaning ap- 
 parently being, ' whenever I have mercy on 
 any, it shall be pure mercy, no human 
 desert contributing;' which agrees better 
 with the next verse than the ordinary ren- 
 dering, which lays the stress on the ov άν ; 
 and is not inconsistent with ver. 18, oj' 
 θέλίί, iXfq. : because if God's mercy be 
 pure mercy without any desert on man's 
 part, it necessarily follows that He has 
 mercy on whom He will, His will being the 
 only assignable cause of the selection). 
 16.] 'So then (inference from the 
 citation) it is not of (God's mercy ' does 
 not belong to,' — ' is not in the power of,' 
 see reff.) him that willeth (any man 
 willing it) nor of Mm that runneth (any 
 man contending for it, see reff. and Phil. 
 
 iii. 14. There hardly can be any allusion 
 to Abraham's wish for Ishmael, Gen. xvii. 
 18, and Esau's running to hunt for venison, 
 as Stuart, Burton, al.), but of God that 
 hath mercy.' — I must pause again here to 
 remind the student, that I purposely do not 
 enter on the disquisitions so abundant in 
 some commentaries on this part of Scrip- 
 ture, by which it is endeavoured to recon- 
 cile the sovereign election of God with our 
 free will. We shall find that free will 
 asserted strongly enough for all edifying 
 purposes by this Apostle, when the time 
 comes. At present, he is employed wholly 
 in asserting the divine Sovereignty, the 
 glorious vision of which it ill becomes us to 
 distract by continual downward looks on 
 this earth. I must also protest against all 
 endeavours to make it appear, that no 
 inference hes from this passage as to the 
 salvation of individuals. It is most true 
 (see remarks at the beginning of this 
 chap.) that the immediate subject is the 
 national rejection of the Jews : but we 
 must consent to hold our reason in abey- 
 ance, if we do not recognize the infer- 
 ence, that the sovereign power and free 
 election here proved to belong to God 
 extend to every exercise of His mercy — 
 whether temporal or spiritual — whether in 
 Providence or in Grace — whether national 
 or individual. It is in parts of Scripture 
 like this, that we must be especially careful 
 not to fall short of what is ivritten : not to 
 allow of any compromise of the plain and 
 awful words of God's Spirit, for the sake of 
 a caution which He Himself does not teach 
 us. 17.] The same great truth shewn 
 
 on its darker side: — not only as regards 
 God's mercy, but His tvrath also. — ' For 
 (confirmation of the universal truth of the 
 last inference) the Scripture (identified 
 with God, its Author : the case, as Thol. 
 remarks, is different when merely some- 
 thing contained in Script, is introduced by 
 ή -/οαφή Xiyft : there )) γρ. is merely per-
 
 384 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 IX. 
 
 '' i"Tj^°"f Ίβ' σε, οττως εν^ΒίΕωμαι εν σοι την ^νναμιν μου και Όπως abde 
 
 iLnkeix. «u. oia-yytAi} TO όνομα μου εν πάση τη yn 
 
 Acis xxi. 26 III-.. ' ' '. i 
 
 18 c " •5• •\ 
 
 αρο our ov 
 
 Acfs xxi 26 It*• . tt/t 5 
 
 j-Actsx'ix.9. θέλει '^ ελεα, δν δε θέλει ■* σκληρύνει. ^^ ε^οεΓς μοι ουν ^ΎΊ 
 
 Heb iii. 8, 13, •? .f 1 ' , . ~ * m Ο Λ ' ι - / 
 
 18 iv.7<.niy. ouv iTi μΐμφεται , Γω yap ρουΛτ/μαη αυτού τις 
 
 Exod. iv. 21. ι ι Γ 1, / > ι 
 
 k ch. iii. 7. Gal. v. 11. 1 Heb. viii. 8 only. (Mark τϋ. 2. rec.Jt 
 
 m Acts xxvii. 43. 1 Pet. iv. 3 only f. 
 
 (pirt) vii. 3, (ηψ;:η) ai. 
 
 — Sir. xli.7. 2 Mace. ii. 7. 
 
 ενίειΚομα FJ al Chr (Mtt's ms,). — ^ιαγγίλει J al. — 18. rec iXiei, with A* (in A, from 
 ov fff. to η ovK (χίΐ ver 21 is in a later hand) B(e sil)E(appy)JK &c ff : txt 
 (B'?)DiFG.— for if, ai' 17. 177-9.— θίλίΐ om 28. 45: θίλη 48. 2l!J2 : ου OtXfi 114.— 
 19. rec ow μοι, with DEFGJK &c it ν Origi Chr Thdrt al : txt AB 47. 57. !)3 al syr goth 
 Origj : om ovv 73. 118 arm. — rec om ουν (2nd), with AJK &c ν al ff : ins BDEFG d g 
 ar-pol Jer Ruf Sedul. — rec om γαρ, with B(e sil) &cg(Eeth) : ins AB.'DEFGJKmostmss 
 
 sonified. The justice of Thol.'s remark 
 will be apparent, if we reflect that this 
 e.xpression could not be used of the mere 
 ordinary words of any man in the histori- 
 cal Scriptures, Abab, or Hezekiah, — but 
 only where the text itself speaks, or where 
 God spoke, or, as here, some man under 
 inspiration of God) saith to Pharaoh, For 
 this very purpose (iin recitantis; the LXX 
 have και 'ίΐΊκιν τούτον) raised I thee up 
 (LXX ειετ]}ρήθης, ' thou wert preserved to 
 this day :' Heb. η'η-ΐΌϊ:η from τον, stetit, 
 in Hiph. stare fecit ; hence taken to sig- 
 nify (1) ' conslitnit, muneri prcpfecit,' as 
 1 Kings xii. 32. Isa. xxi. 6 [LXX σίαντψ 
 στησον σκοποί'], Esth. iv. 5,— (2) ' con- 
 firmavit' as 1 Kings xv. 4 al., — and (3) 
 ' prodire fecit, excitavit,' Dan. xi. 11. 
 Neh. vi. 7 : the meaning ' incolumem prts- 
 stitil,' given in the Lexicons, seems to be 
 grounded on the following of the LXX in 
 this passage, who apparently understood it 
 of Pharaoh being kept safe through the 
 plagues. This has been done by modern 
 interpreters to avoid the strong assertion 
 which the Apostle here gives, purposely 
 deviating from the LXX, that Pharaoh was 
 'raised np,' called into action in his office, 
 to be an example of God's dealing with 
 impenitent sinners. The word chosen by 
 the Αρ., ίξίγιίρω, in its transitive sense, is 
 often used by the LXX for ' to rouse into 
 action :' see besides reff. Ps. Ivi. 8 ; Ixxix. 2. 
 Cant. iv. 16 al. So that the meaning (3) 
 given above for the Heb. verb — ' prodire 
 fecit, excitavit.' was evidently that intended 
 by ίξ)';γ£ΐρ«) that I may shew in thee ' in 
 thee as an example,' — ' in thy case,' — ' by 
 thee ') my power (r. Ισχύν μαν LXX : δνν. 
 is perhaps chosen by theAp. asmore general, 
 ισχύς applying rather to those deeds of 
 miraculous power of which Egypt was then 
 witness), and that my Name may be pro- 
 claimed in all the earth ' (comp. as a com- 
 ment, the words of the song of triumph, 
 Exod. XV. 14-l(i), 18.] 'Therefore 
 
 whom He will. He hath mercy on (ref. to 
 
 ver. 15, where see note) and whom He 
 will. He hardeneth.' — The frequent recur- 
 rence of the expression σκΚηρίηηιΐ' την 
 καρδία I' in the history of Pharaoh should 
 have kept Commentators (Carpzov, Er- 
 nesti, al., and of Lexicographers, Wahl and 
 Bretschneider) from attempting to give to 
 σκΧηρύιιω the sense of ' treating hardly,' 
 against which the next verse would be deci- 
 sive, if there were no other reason for re- 
 jecting it. But it is very doubtful whether 
 the word can ever bear the meaning. The 
 only passage which appears to justify it 
 (for in 2 Chron. x. 4 it clearly has the im- 
 port of hardening, making severe) is Job 
 xxxix. Ifi, where άττισκλήρυνε τά τ'(κΐ'α 
 εανττϊς, the LXX version of the Heb. 
 Π'ψίΤΓΤ, is supposed to mean, ' treats her off- 
 spring hardly.' But the LXX by this 
 compound seem to have intended, ' casts off 
 her offspring in her hardness ;' the E. V. 
 has, ' She is hardened against her young 
 ones.' — Whatever difficulty there lies in 
 this assertion, that God hardeneth whom 
 He will, lies also »« the daily course of His 
 Providence, in which we see this hardening 
 process going on in the case of the pros- 
 perous ungodly man. The fact is patent, 
 whether declared by revelation or read in 
 history : but to the solution of it, and its 
 reconciliation with the equally certain fact 
 of human responsibility, we shall never 
 attain in this imperfect state, however we 
 may strive to do so by subtle refinements 
 and distinctions. The following is the ad- 
 mirable advice of Augustine (ad Sixtum, 
 Ep. cxciv. 23), from whom in this case it 
 comes with double weight : " Satis sit inte- 
 rim Christiano ex fide adhuc viventi, et 
 nondum cernenti quod perfectum est, sed 
 ex parte scienti, nosse vel credere quod 
 neminem Deus liberet nisi gratuita miseri- 
 cordia per Dominum nostrum Jesum Chris- 
 tum, et neminem damnet nisi Eequissima ve- 
 ritate per eundem Dominum nostrum Jesum 
 Christum. Cur autem ilium potius quam 
 ilium liberet aut non liberet, scrutetur qui po-
 
 18-21. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 385 
 
 2%:; ^vOpc 
 
 ^ ανταποκρινόμενος τω θεω ; μη epu το '' πλάσμα τω f: 
 
 πΑασαντι ίι με εποιησας όντως \ ^ -η ουκ εγει * εξουσίαν rh.x.is. 
 
 rXaaavTi Ύί 
 Ο κε^αμευς του πηλού, εκ του αυτού ψυ^οα/αατος ττοπ/σαι pLufcexiv.e 
 
 UU Λ 
 
 ο μεν εις τιμήν 
 
 ua 'S ^\ %■ ' WW ' ' . only• .•'udg. 
 
 σκεύος, ο οε εις ατιμιαν , ν. anaiex. 
 
 Job xii. 9. 
 
 q liere only. Job xl. 14. Tsa. xxix. 16. xlv. 0. r 1 Tim. ii. 13 only. Gen. ii 7,8. .s aud constr.. 
 
 Mutt. X 1 rt-ft. t Matt, xxvii. 7, 10 only. Isa. xxix. 16. xlv. ». u 1 Cur. v. 6, 7. Gal. ». Η ch. 
 
 xi. Hi only. Ex(]d. xii. 34. uu Matt. xiii. 18 al. ν = ch. i. 13 al. fr. w = 2 Tim. ii. 2ϋ, 
 
 21. Heb. ix. 21 al. Exod. iii. 22. ww 1 Cur. xr. 43 al. 
 
 vss nrly Orig Ath Chr Thdrt Thdor-mops Dam al Aug al. — 20. θίληματι 1. 69. 121. — rec 
 μεΐ'ουνγε ω άνθη. [corrn to suit the arrangement in other places: see reff Luke and 
 Rom. Had the μινοννγί been transposed in A &c to avoid placing it first in the sen- 
 tence [see Phryn Lobeck, p. 342], the same var readg would have occurred in the other 
 places, which it does nol), with D^JK most mss vss Orig Chr Tiidrt Thdor-mops Thl Oec : 
 txt AB (jitr ουί') 37• 47'. 1 16 fChr Mtt's mSj nv μίν ουν γε ω ανθρ.) Dam : om ptvovvys 
 D»EFG 14 it V seth Jer Ruf lat-ff.— for (ποιησ., ιπλασας DE Syr ar-erp Thl-marg.— 21. 
 
 test judiciorum ejus tam magnum profun- 
 dum, — verumtamen caveat praecipitium." 
 19.] ' Thou wilt then say to me 
 (there seems no reason to suppose the ob- 
 jector a Jew, as Thol. after Grot., Calov., 
 Koppe, al. : — the objection is a general one, 
 applying to all mankind, and likely to arise 
 in the mind of any reader. The e.^pression 
 ώ άνθοωτΓΐ: seems to confirm this). Why 
 then doth He yet find fault {in as ch. iii. 
 7) assuming your premises, — ' if this be 
 so :' at the same time it expresses a certain 
 irritation on the part of the objector : ' ex- 
 primit morosum fremitum,' Bengel. μέμ- 
 φομαι has a stronger sense than mere blame 
 here : Hesych. interprets it αιτιάται, ίζου- 
 θίΐίΤ, καταγινώίτκίΐ : see the apocryphal 
 reff. Thol.) 1 For who resists (not, ' halh 
 resisted :' άνθεστηκίν,ϊιίβ εστηκίΐ', is pre- 
 sent, see Winer, § 41. 4, and compare 
 εφέστηκεν, 2 Tim. iv. 6) His will (i. e. if it 
 be His will to harden the sinner, and the 
 sinner goes on in his sin, he does not resist 
 but goes with the will of God) ? Yea 
 rather {μεΐ'οννγΐ, see reff., takes the 
 ground from under the previous assertion 
 and supersedes it by another : implying 
 that it has a certain shew of truth, but that 
 the proper view of the matter is yet to be 
 stated. It thus conveys, as in ref. Luke, 
 an intimation of rebuke ; here, with seve- 
 rity : ' that which thou hast said, may be 
 correct human reasoning — but as against 
 God's sovereignty, thy reasoning is out of 
 place and irrelevant '), man (perhaps 
 without emphasis implying the contrast be- 
 tween man and God, — for this is done by 
 the emphatic σύ following, and we have 
 ΰνθηωπε unemplmtic in ch ii. 1) who art 
 THOU that disputest against (the άΐ'-ί 
 seems to imply contradiction, not merely 
 dialogue : see besides reff., άνταττόκρισιΐ'. 
 Job .xiii. 22) God .' ' — implying, * thou hast 
 neither right nor power, to call God to 
 Vol. II. 
 
 account in this manner.' — Notice, that the 
 answer to the objector's question does not 
 Ue in these vv. 19 — 21, but in the following 
 (see there) ; — the present vv. are a rebuke 
 administered to the spii-it of the objection, 
 which forgets the immeasurable distance 
 between us and God, and the relation of 
 Creator and Disposer in which He stands 
 to us. So Chrys., — και υνδε την λνσιν 
 ευθέως ϊπά-γει, συμφερόντως καΊ τοντο 
 ποιών άλΧ' ίΤΓίστομιζει πρώτον τον ζ?;• 
 τοϊ>ντα, λέγων οντω' ' μενυννγε . . . θεψ ;' 
 7Γοΐ£Ϊ δε Γοΐ'το, την άκαιρυν αυτοί) περι- 
 εργίαν άναστέΧΧωΐ', κ. την ποΧΧήν ποΧυ- 
 πραγμοσύΐ'ην, κ. χαΧινον περιτιθ(Ίς, κ. 
 παώεΰων ε'ιδεναι τι μεν θεός, τί δε άνθρω- 
 πος, κ. πώς ακατάληπτος αντον η πρό- 
 νοια, κ. πώς ν—ερβαινυυσα τον ι'ιμετερον 
 λυγισμόν, κ. πώς Ιίπαντα αϋτφ πείθεσθαι 
 διί' 'ίΐ'α 'όταν τοιιτο κατασκευαστή παρά 
 τφ άκροατ)), κ. KaTaaTiiXy κ. λιάν^ την 
 γνώμην, τότε μετά πολΧϊΊς ευκολίας επ- 
 άγων την λνσιν, εΰπαράδεκτον αΐιτφ 
 ποίηση το Χεγόμενον. Hom. χνϋ. G14 C. 
 Similarly Calvin : ' Hac priori responsione 
 nihil aliud quam improbitatem illius blas- 
 phemiie retundit, argumento ab hominis 
 conditione suinpto. Alteram mox subjiciet, 
 qua Dei justitiam ab omni criminatione vin- 
 dicabit.' — ' Shall the thing made (pro- 
 perly of a production of plastic art, moulded 
 of clay or wax) say to him who moulded 
 it, " Why madest thou me thus I" — These 
 words are shghtly altered from Is. xxix. 
 16, LXX, — μή ευεΊ το πλάσμα τφ πλά- 
 σαντι αΐιτυ,οίι σΰ με ϊπλασας ; η το ποίημα 
 τφ ποιήσαντι, ου συνετώς με εποίησας; — 
 Or (introduces a new objection, or fresh 
 ground of rebuke, see ch. ii. 4 ; iii. 29 ; vi. 
 3 ; xi. 2) hath not the potter power over 
 the clay (the similitude from Isa. 1. c. In 
 Sir. xxxvi. 13, we have a very similar senti- 
 ment : ώς πηλός κεραμέως εν χειρϊ αντον 
 .... ο'ύτως άΐ'Θοωποι εν χειρϊ του ποιη- 
 C C
 
 386 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 IX. 
 
 ^s<"lf'%^p''-2"2 ji gf θί'λων ό Θίος "" Ιν^ύζ,ασθαι ti)v οργην και ^ yvwpi- 
 Heb.''vi"'i(f; σαι το ^ δυνατόν αυτόν * ηνεγκεν £V πολλ^ μακρυθυμια 
 
 11. Sfc ver. , , „ j ι ' e '> ' \ 9Η * '' 
 
 οβιΓΛδ"'^' σκευ») οργτ?ς• κατηρτισμξνα εις αττωλείον, ^'^ fcot tva 
 
 17. ' 
 y John XT. 15 reft'. 
 
 ABDE 
 FGJK 
 
 ζ = here only, 
 b ch. ii. 4 reft. 
 d = Heb. X. 5. xi. 3. See Matt. iv. ΰ1 reff. 
 
 a — here only. (See Heb, xiii. 13.) 0Fpfii' τι πρ^ωί-, Xen. 
 c .,iee w. ver. 21. con^^r., Acts ix. 15. See Jer. xxvii. 25. 
 e = Matt.Tii. 13. John xvii. 12. Jer. xxvi. 21. 
 
 ίζονσ. aft 7Γΐ;λου 109. — 22. fi it om G7- : Se ova 61 it ν Ambrst Jer Ruf Fulg Sedul 
 Bed: enim Jul: θίλων δε 48. — ος 7)vtyKtv arm. — ιμ'ίγκίν om FG d' e g Jul (in 
 Aug). — avTov μακροθ. 109. — (ΐς σκίνη FG g Jul (iu Aug) Ambrst. — for κατηρτ., 
 UC: κατηοαμίνα 109.— 23. bef iva om και Β 37-9. 47-marg 6V• 80. 
 
 καηιργασμίνα 
 
 σαντος αυτούς. — And even more strikingly 
 so, Wisd. .w. 7 : Koi γαρ κίραμίνς άπαλήν 
 ■γηΐ' θλίβων ϊπίμοχθον, ττλπσσίΐ προς 
 νπηρίσίαν ι'/μών εκπστον, ά\\' ίκ Γοϋ 
 αντυν πηλοί) ί'ηίπλάσατο τά η των καθα- 
 ρών ΐργοιν δοϋλα σκεύΐ], τά τί εναντία, 
 ■πάνθ' ΰμοίως' τούτων δε εκατερον τίς 
 εκάστου ίστίν ή χρησις, κριτής 6 πηλονρ- 
 ■γός. See also Jer. xviii. C), from the 
 same mass to make one vessel for honour 
 (honourable uses) and another for dis- 
 honour ' (dishonourable uses. See ref. 
 2 Tim. — The honour and dishonour are not 
 here the moral purity or impurity of the 
 human vessels, but their ultimate (jlorifica- 
 tion or perdition. The Αρ., in asking this 
 question, rather aims at striking dumb the 
 objector by a statement of God's undoubted 
 right, against which it does not become us 
 men to murmur, than at unfolding to us 
 the actual state of the case. This he does 
 in the succeeding verses ; see above, from 
 Chrys. and Calv.) 1 22.] " But what 
 
 if (by the elli|)tical f ί δί the answer to the 
 question of the objector, v. 19, seems to be 
 introduced ; εάν υνν occurs in a similar 
 connexion John vi. 62 ; and άλλ' εΐ, Soph, 
 ffid. Col. 590, — άλλ' £t θίλοιτας γ' oink 
 σοι φυγείν καλόν; see Hartung, Partikel- 
 lehre, ii. 212. 6) (1) God, willing to 
 manifest His wrath, and make known 
 His might (that which He could do), en- 
 dured with much long-suffering ves- 
 sels of wrath prepared for destruction ; 
 and (wliat if this took place) (2) that He 
 might make known the riches of His 
 glory toward (not to, as De Wette, who 
 joins it with γνωρισ}/, — but ' toward,' ' on,' 
 ' with regard to,' dependent on ττΧοϋτον, 
 as ττλοντών εις, ch χ. 12) the vessels of 
 mercy, which He before made ready for 
 glory ■? ' I have given the whole, that my 
 view of the constr. might be evident : viz. 
 that (1) and (2) are parallel clauses, both 
 dependent on εί δέ ; θίλων giving the pur- 
 pose of the 1st, and 'iva yv. that of the 
 2nd. They might be cast into one form by 
 writing the 1st ό θ., 'ίνα ενδείξηται ... κ. 
 yvwpirry, — or the 2nd, και θίλων γνωρίσαι. 
 Only I do not, as Calv., Bez., Grot., Ben- 
 
 gel, De Wette, Meyer, and Winer, under- 
 stand the same ήνεγκεν . . . άττώλ., as be- 
 longing to both, but only to the 1st, and 
 supply before the 2ικ1, ' What if this took 
 place,' viz. this 'ov θίλει, ίλε^. Other con- 
 structions have been, — to make 'ίνα dejiend 
 on κατ7]ρτισμ'ενα — 'prepared to destruc- 
 tion for this very purpose, that &c.' So 
 Fritz, and Rlickert, ed. 2 : but this seems 
 to overlook και, or to regard it as := και 
 TovTo : — to take ver. 23 as a new sentence, 
 supplying 'εκάλεσεν ήμας, as Tholuck. — 
 Stuart supplies θίλων before 'ίνα yv., and 
 ήλίι^σεν before ο'ύς εκάλεσεν ήμας. This 
 in fact amounts to nearly the same as my 
 own view, but appears objectionable, inas- 
 much as it joins ver. 24 to ver. 23 : see 
 below. — The argument is, ' What if God, 
 in the case of the vessels of wrath prepared 
 for destruction, has, iu willing to manifest 
 His power and wrath, also exhibited towards 
 them long-suffering (to lead them to repent- 
 ance, ch. ii. 4, — a mystery which we cannot 
 fathom), and in having mercy on the ves- 
 sels of mercy prepared for glory, has also 
 made manifest the riches of His glory ? ' 
 Then in both these dispensations will ap- 
 pear, not the arbitrary power, but the rich 
 goodness of God. — The theological difficul- 
 ties in καταρτισμένη and προητοίμασεν (in 
 both cases God is the agent ; not they them- 
 selves, as Chrys., Theophyl., Olsh. Bengel, 
 however, rightly remarks, " non dicit quae 
 ττροκατηρτισε, cum tamen ver. seq. dicat 
 ' quae prseparavit.' Cf Matt. xxv. 34 cum 
 ver. 41, et Act. xiii. 46 cum ver. 48") are 
 but such as have occurred repeatedly before, 
 and, as Stuart has well observed, are in- 
 herent, not in the Ap.'s argument, nor even 
 in revelation, but in any consistent belief 
 of an omnipotent and omniscient God. 
 See remarks on ver. 18. — σκιΐ'ί; opyijc and 
 σκεύη έλευνς are vessels prepared to sub- 
 serve, as it were to hold. His opyi] and 
 έλεος : hardly, as Calvin, insti-uments to 
 shew forth: that is do?ie, over and above 
 their being σκεύη, but is not necessary to 
 it. — The σκ. opy. and σκ. ελ, are not to be, 
 with a view to evade the general application, 
 confined to the instances of Pharaoh and
 
 22—27. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 387 
 
 ττΧουΓον της ^όζ,ης αυτοΰ επί '^ σκ£νη ^^p^-.';J^'«^• 
 ους, α προητοίμασίν είς ' δόζαυ ; ^4 J ^^ς και εκά- ^I'^^^kX' 
 
 •γνωηιστι τυν 
 eXl• - ^ " 
 
 ΛεσίΜ νμας ου μόνον έζ Ιουδαίων, άλλα καΐ eE ΐΟνων, ΊΚρίκϋ. ίο 
 
 c\r- , . . - 1 only. lea 
 
 12σΐϊε Af^ft Κ.αλεσω τοι» ου Ααοι 
 
 ως 
 λαον 
 
 και au τω 
 
 Εγε 
 
 Isa. 
 xxviii. 24. 
 
 ιον μου i = ci,.ii Λ 
 
 OR 1 > "^fl- 
 
 ^ιου, fcat Tijv ουκ η-γαπημ£νην ηγαπημενην και j 'n^coi., «ee 
 
 ,, , _ , , , , , ' , „ / / _ Wiuer, 5 64. 
 
 εσται εν τω τοπω ού ερρεθη αυτοις Ου λαός• μου υμεϊς, kH.V. u. 23. 
 
 ' " \ ύ' ' ^ it - ν ~ 97 'ττ •'• ^ν m ' ■/ 1 Hos. i. 10. 
 
 εκ^ει κληνησονται υιοί υεου ί,ωντος. ' ησαΐας 6ε κραζ,ει mJoimi.is 
 " υτΓε,ρ του ΙσραηΧ ° Καν y ο αριθμός των νιων Ίσραηλ "^i^4.'%hii. 
 ως η '' άμμος της Θαλάσσης, το ** υπόλειμμα σωθησεται' oisA.x.22, 
 
 ρ Heb. xi. 12 al. Gen. χχϋ. 17. q here only. 
 
 116 al V copf, arm goth schol in 47 Orig (freely) Jer Ruf Pelag Sedul Fulg (not Aug-oft 
 Jul in Aug al). — ro π-λουτος FG. — aft δο^'. add η ντου 1. 4-'. IKi-'il Thl-ms Ruf-text : 
 αυτών g. — 24. aft ους•, om κητι 17• — 'ί/'^ς om42. 238 al mss rnentd by Erasm v-ms Chrj 
 Ruf-ed Pel : aft μοί'ον Jer : eig ημάς 43. 52. — 25. tv om Β (sicitt Osee (licit AugJ.— for 
 ηγαπ., ηγαπ., η\(ημίΐ•7]ν, ηλίημίνηΐ' v-ms Syr ar-erp Irenj Tert Jerj Bed: simly al 
 latt.— 26. rec ίρρ»,θ//, with B-D-'(E.')J &c Oec : txt ABiD'(E?)K 1. 44. 1(18-9 Thdrt 
 Till : for tpp. αυτ., αν κλι/βησυνται FG d g Ambrst (αι• is not exprd in d g Ambrst) : 
 in loco liherata {ευρνσθη .') in quo vucahatur Iren. — ιψίΐςονα 6!) Syr Iran. — for κληθησ., 
 ττληθυνθιισοί'ται 121 : add αυτοί 71-3 arm. — 27. των υιω)' om 55 : του ισρ. 44. — ωςιι 
 71-4. 238 all. — rec (caraXtiiujUii {corrnto LXX,whereno MS has υπο\.), with DEFGJK 
 &c Thdrt al: ί-γκαταΧαμμα Chr : νποκαταλειμμα 47: txt AB Eus : add αυτών Syr 
 
 the Jews : these instances give occasion to 
 the argument, but the argument itself is 
 general, e.xtending to all the dealings of 
 God. 24.] ' Of which kind {quales, 
 
 agreeing with ι'/μης — i.e. σκίύη ίΚίονι;) 
 He hath also called us, not only from 
 among the Jews, but also from among 
 the Gentiles.' It being entirely in the 
 power of God to preordain and have mercy 
 on whom He will. He has exercised this 
 right by calling not only the remnant of 
 His own people, but a people from among 
 the Gentiles also. 25, 26.] It is diffi- 
 
 cult to ascertain in what sense the Ap. cites 
 these two passages from Hosea as applicable 
 to the Gentiles being called to be the people 
 of God. That he does so, is manifest from 
 the words themselves, and from the transi- 
 tion to the Jews in ver. 27. In the pro- 
 phet they are spoken of Israel ; see ch. i. 
 G — 11, and ch. ii. throughout: who after 
 being rejected and put away, was to be 
 again received into favour by God. Two 
 ways are open, by which their citation by 
 the Ap. may be understood. Either (1) he 
 brings them forward to shew that it is con- 
 sonant with what we know of God's deal- 
 ings, to receive as His people those who 
 V!ere formerly nol His people — that this 
 may now take place with regard to the 
 Gentiles, as it was announced to happen 
 with regard to Israel, — and even more, — 
 that Israel in this as in so many other 
 things was the prophetic mirror in which 
 God foreshewed on a small scale His future 
 dealings with mankind, — or (2) he adduces 
 
 C 
 
 them from mere applicability to the subject 
 in hand, implying, ' It has been with us 
 Gentiles, as with Israel in the prophet 
 Hosea.' I own I much prefer the former 
 of these, as more consonant with the dignity 
 of the argument, and as apparently justified 
 by the και, — as He also saith in Hosea, 
 implying perhaps that the matter in hand 
 was not that directly prophesied in the 
 citation, but one analogous to it. Chrys. 
 takes the same view : ti γάρ ίπι των 
 άγνωμοί'ησάντων μετά ττολλάς ίΰεργί- 
 σΐί(ς, και άλλοτριωθίντων, καΊ το λαός 
 fii'iit άποΧωΧίκότω)•, τοσαΰτη yiyoviv η 
 μίτοβολή, τι ίκώλυί και τους ηΰ μετά την 
 οίκιίωσΐ)' άλλοτριωθίντας, άλλ' ίξ αρχής 
 άλλοτ-ρίοΐ'ς ύντας, κ\ηθήναι, κ. ύττακού- 
 σηντας των αυτών άζιωθήΐ'ηι; Hom. χνϋ. 
 618 Β. — The fem. τήν is used because the 
 Jewish people was typified by the dauyhter 
 of the prophet, Hos. i. 6, who was called 
 Lo-ruhamah, ' not having obtained mercy.' 
 The sense, not the words of the LXX, is 
 quoted. — By iv τφ τήπψ .... ticti, must 
 not I think be understood, in any particular 
 place, as Judaea, nor among any peculiar 
 people, as the Christian Church : but as a 
 general assertion, that in every place where 
 they were called ' not His people,' there 
 they shall be called ' His people.' 
 27.] A proof from Scripture of the fact, 
 that a part of Israel are excluded. Here 
 again the analogy of God's dealings, in the 
 jiartial deliverance of Israel from captivity, 
 and their great final deliverance from death 
 eternal, is the key to the interpretation of 
 c 2
 
 588 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 IX. 
 
 J•• , , " 
 
 S here οηΙν. I.e. nri 
 t .Artsxvii.31 
 
 Tttt 
 
 π =- Gal. i. 9. 
 2 Pet iii. 2. 
 Jiule 17. 
 
 vis 
 
 A.i 3. 
 
 ■ I. Γ. only. 
 Acts .\iv. 
 . Urb. ii. 
 
 " \6yov yap ^ συιτίλων και 
 
 \oyov ^ συντίτμημίνον 
 
 και καθώς " πξ)θίΊρηκίν Η 
 
 "'" εγκατίλιπεν ήμιν σπψμα, ως 
 
 ως Τόμο^ρα αν ^ ο^οιωθ»)μίί\ 
 
 29 
 
 συντέμνων εν οικαιοσυντι 
 ΤΓοιησίΐ κύριος ίττι της ynς. 
 σαϊας ^ Ει μη κύριος σαβαωθ 
 
 Σοη()μ« αν έyίvί](}ημtv και 
 It ουν ίρονμίν , οτι 
 
 ABDE 
 FGJK 
 
 ίθνη τα μη ^ ^ιώκοντα ^ικαιοσυνην, ^ κατίΧαβίν οικαιοσυ- 
 
 al. Sir. χχϊϋ. 8. ζ = Phil. iii. 12. Exod. χν. 9. Dent, sxviii. 4.ί. 
 
 arr : του ισραηΧ 120. — 28. fv ΰικαιοσ., οτι λογ. σνντιτμ. οτα {by miatake from simila- 
 rity of σνντίμνων and ανντ(τμημίνον'ί) AB 23'. 47'• 07^ Syr {και -ποιησΗ) copt ar-erp 
 Eus Dam Aup., (seth has the ver thus : quia cunsvmmahcm et pracisiim verbum enarret 
 Dcus in mundo : a vvTtk. to Xoyov oiii Thdrt) : txt DEFGJK most mss it syr ar-pol 
 goth Slav Eusj Chr Thl Oec Jer Aaibrst Bed. — κύριος ο OtoQ 49 copt. — 29. και om 48. 
 72. lie. — ίίρηκεν 76• 80: Xfya arm: ττροΗτην EuSj (once txt). — κυρ. ο θίος 17. — 
 tyK-nreXHTTfi' AD5(E.')FGJK 10!) (al?) (or tvK.)— ty^vv^θημ^v 48. — rec ωμοιιυθ., with 
 B(e sil)D(E.'K.') cScc : txt AB.'FGJ &c (Orig).— 30. δικαιοσύνης 55.— aft κατ- 
 
 the prophecy cited. The words are spoken 
 by Isaiah of tlie return from captivity of a 
 remnant of Israel. 28.] The refer- 
 
 ence of this latter part of the citation is not 
 very plain. It is almost vei'batim from the 
 LXX, the yap being inserted by the Ap. 
 as continuing the testimony, i= ' for the 
 prophet proceeds,' — and the LXX having 
 i»' ry υΐκουμίί'γ ολ{/ for Ιττι της γης. The 
 literal rendering of the Heb. is " The con- 
 summation (or consumption) decided, over- 
 floweth with righteousness : for a decision 
 (or consumption) and a decree shall the 
 Lord Jehovah of Sabaoth make in the midst 
 of all the land." As it stands in the LXX, 
 the meaning seems to be, t/ie Lord will 
 complete and soon fulfil His word in right- 
 eousness (viz. His denunciation of consum- 
 ing the Assyrian and liberating the rem- 
 nant of His people) : for the Lord will 
 make a rapidly-accumplished word in the 
 midst of all 'the land. The E. V., Calv., 
 and others, render Xoyov, ' work,' a signifi- 
 cation which it never has. If the above 
 interpretation be correct, and the view 
 which I have taken of the analogy of pro- 
 phecy, it will follow that this ver. is ad- 
 duced by the Apostle as confirming the 
 certainty of the salvation of the remnant 
 of Israel, seeing that now, as then, He 
 with whom a thousand years are as a 
 day, will swiftly accomplish His pro- 
 phetic word in righteousness. 
 29.] Another proof of a remnant to be 
 saved, from a preceding part of the same 
 prophecy. (Such seems to be the sense of 
 ■πρυίίρ. here, — and so Beza, Calv., Grot., 
 al. : De W., Thol., al., prefer ' prophesied ;' 
 but surely there is no necessity for affixing 
 an unusual sense to the word, where the 
 ordinai-y one [see all the refT.] suits much 
 better.) " ΰμοιονσθηι ώς is a constr. in 
 which two ideas, ' to become as,' and ' to 
 become like to,' are mingled, as in Heb. 
 
 3 rmz, Ps. xlix. 13.21 ; comp. Markiv. 30." 
 Tholuck. On ' Jehovah Sabaoth,' Bengel 
 remarks, " Pro Ilebraico n'i>!3" in libro 
 1 Sam. et Jesaia σιιβαώθ ponitur ; in reli- 
 quis libris omnibus παντυκρΊτωρ." — The 
 citation is verbatim from the LXX, νιΊιο have 
 put σπίρμα for the Heb. inir, ' residuum,' 
 — implying a remnant for a fresh planting. 
 30 — 33.] The Ap. takes up again 
 the fact of IsraeV s failure, and shews how 
 their own pursuit of righteousness never at- 
 tained to it, being hindered by their self- 
 righteousness and rejection of Christ. These 
 verses do not contain, as Chrys., Oec, Theo- 
 pliyl., the τον χωρίου παντός λνσις - thia 
 λύσις is simply in the creative right of God, as 
 declared ver. 18 ; — but they are a comment 
 on ver. 16, that it is not of him that willeth, 
 nor of him that runneth .• the same simili- 
 tude of running being here resumed, and it 
 being shewn that, so far from man's running 
 having decided the matter, the Jews who 
 pressed forward to the goal attained not, 
 whereas the Gentiles, who never ran, have 
 attained. If this is lost sight of, the con- 
 nexion of the whole is much impaired, and, 
 from doctrinal prejudice, a wholly wrong 
 turn given to the Ap.'s line of reasoning, — 
 who resolves the awful fact of Israel's ex- 
 clusion not into any causes arising from 
 man, but into the supreme will of God, — 
 which wiU is here again distinctly asserted 
 in the citation from Isaiah (see below). — 
 ' What then shall we say % ' This ques- 
 tion, when followed by a question, imphes 
 of course a rejection of the thought thus 
 suggested — but when, as here, by an asser- 
 tion, introduces a further unfolding of the 
 argument from what has ))receded. I can- 
 not agree with Flatt., Olsh., al., that on 
 K.T.X. is to be regarded as a question : for, 
 as Riickert has observed, (1) Paul could not 
 put interrogatively, as a supposition in an- 
 swer to τι υυν (ρονμίν, a sentiment not
 
 28—52. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 S89 
 
 νην, όικαιοσυνην δε την ^ ίκ 
 * όΐΜκων νομον δ 
 32 δ,α 
 
 31 
 
 δ^ 
 
 ιτι 
 
 Gal iii 8. 
 
 1 = Phil. iii. 
 
 Iti. See 
 
 Eccl. Tiii 
 
 πίστεως' "' Ισροηλ 
 νομον όικαιοσυνης, ~ ίΐς νόμον ουκ ^ ίφθασεν. 
 ΟΤΙ ουκ εκ πίστεως, αλλ ως £^ epyfov ^νομον^ μ- _Dan! 
 
 f\n/3f r (.βον 93) add τηΐ' G. — 31. rec aft νομοτ 2nd, ins ζικαιοσυι>ης {corrn for clear- 
 ness sake ? see notes), with F (with +) JK mss nrly d^ ν syrr arr goth slav Chr Thdrt 
 Thdor-mops, Thl Oec Jerj Aug^ Pelag Arabrst-text Bed: om ABDEG 47. iiJK 140 («ις 
 V. also om 17• i>l) d' e g copt Procop Dam Orig-int (homil on Judg) Ruf text-comm. 
 Ambrst-comm Sedul. — for ίφΟιισίν, (φβοχεν FG. — 32. ως om 120 slav Jer. — k)juoi; om 
 (see notes) ABFG (i. 0. 47'. Op g ν copt (Chri ?) Jer Aug Ambrst Ruf al : ins DEJK 
 most mss d e syrr all Chr h 1 (expressly : οΰκ tlwtv Έξ ϊρ-γωρ, άλλ' "Ως• ίξ ϊργων νόμον, 
 
 intimated in nor following from the fore- 
 going ; (2) there would be no answer to 
 the question thus asked, but the Sia τι, ver. 
 32, would ask another question, proceeding 
 on the assumption of that which had been 
 before by implication negatived ; and (3) 
 the answer, 'ότι κ.τ.λ. ver. 32, would 
 touch only the case of the Jews, and not 
 that of the Gentiles, also involved, on this 
 supposition, in the question. — ' That the 
 Gentiles (not, as ISIeyer and Fritz. ' some 
 Gentiles'), which did not pursue after 
 (see esp. reff. Phil.) righteousness (not 
 justification, which is merely ' the being 
 accounted righteous,' ' the way in which 
 righteousness is ascribed :' not this, but 
 righteousness itself, is the aim and end of 
 the race) attained (the whole transaction 
 being regarded as a historical fact) righte- 
 ousness, and that [ck brings in something 
 new, different from the foregoing, but not 
 strongly opposed to it, see Winer, § 57. 4 : 
 — the opposition here, though fine and de- 
 licate, is remarkable : righteousness — not 
 however that arising from tlieir own works 
 but the r., &c.) the righteousness which 
 is from faith: 31.] — but Israel, 
 
 pursuing after the law of righteousness 
 (what is the ΐ'όμος δικακισΪΊ'ης .' Cer- 
 tainly not = oiKaioauvti νόμον, as Chrys., 
 Theodoret, Oecum., Calv., Beza, Bengel, 
 by the so-called, but as Thol. observes, 
 unlogical figure of Hypallage : — it may 
 mean either (1) as Aleyer, Fritz., Thol., an 
 ideal law of righteousness, a justifying 
 law, — or (2) as Chrys., al., — see above, — 
 ike law of Moses, thus described : or 
 (3), which I believe to be the true account 
 of the words, νύμος ίικοιοτ. is put regard- 
 ing the Jews, rather than merely ΰικαιοσ., 
 because in their case there was a prescribed 
 norm of apparent righteousness, viz. the 
 law, in which rule and way they, as matter 
 of fad, followed after it. The above, as I 
 believe, mistaken interpretations arise from 
 supjiosing -ΐ'όμοί' ΰικηιοτ. to be = δικαιοσ., 
 which it is not. The .lews followed after, 
 aimed at the fulfilment of ' the law of 
 righteousness,' thinking by the observance 
 of that law to acquire righteousness. See 
 
 eh. X. 3, 5, and note ; and compare John's 
 coming Iv oifp δικαιοσυπ^ς. Matt. xxi. 32) 
 did not attain unto the law (fell far short 
 even of that law, which was given them. 
 It is surprising, with ch. x. 3 — 5 before 
 them, how De Wette and Tholuck can pro- 
 nounce the reading νόμον without Sixdio- 
 σύνης to be without sense. The Jews fol- 
 lowed after, thinking to perform it entirely, 
 their νόμος δίκαιου όι^ης : which δικαιοσ. 
 ίκ του νόμον the Αρ. defines, ch. χ. 5, to be 
 ό TroiijffiiQ αυτά άνθρωπος, Ζίισίται εν 
 αντο'ις, but they did not attain to — not in 
 this case κατέΛαβιν, but εφθησεν fi'c — the 
 law — they therefore never attained righte- 
 ousness. It is surely far more easy to 
 imagine how a transcriber should have in- 
 serted δικαιυσννης, than how be should have 
 omitted it. It probably was a marginal 
 gloss to explain the second νόμον, and 
 thence found its way into the text. [I may 
 notice, that ch x. 3 is not a case in point, the 
 j^o/<oi'herehavingan independent and excep- 
 tional meaning of its own, which introduces 
 an element not belonging to ιδίαν there]). 
 Wherefore 1 because (pursuing it) not by 
 faith, but as (used subjectively, as ' it about 
 to obtain their object by :' see Winer, § C7. 
 G, and comp. 2 Pet. i. 3) by the works of 
 the law (the evidence for and against νόμου 
 is about equally balanced. On the one 
 side we have the Ap.'s usage, see ch. iii. 
 28, — and the possibility of a transcriber 
 omitting νόμον, either as having twice oc- 
 curred already, or for more complete anti- 
 thesis, — and on the other we have the 
 temptation to correct ίυγων to tpywv 
 νόμον to suit that very usage. On the 
 whole I incUne to omit νόμου, but do not 
 regard the evidence as sufficiently clear to 
 justify its exclusion from the text), they 
 stumbled at the stone of stumbling ' (the 
 similitude of a race is still kept up. The 
 insertion of yap has arisen from a period 
 being placed at νόμου. It confuses the 
 sense, making it appear as if the stumbling 
 was the cause of, or at all events coincident 
 with, their pursuing <)ί;κ ΐκ π. κ.τ.λ., 
 whereas it was this mistaken mctliod of 
 pursuing which caused them to stumble
 
 890 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 IX. S3. 
 
 cMatt. iv. 6. 
 1 Pet. ii. 8. 
 Prov. iii. 23. 
 
 1 Pet. ii. 8 
 
 only. Isu. 
 
 xxix. 21. 
 
 el.-i.i. viii. 14. 
 
 ΤΓΟοςίκοφαν τω λίθω του ^ ττροςκόμματος, ^^ καθώς γέ- 
 
 Ίδού τιθημι 
 
 σκανοάΧου, 
 καταισγννθησεται. 
 
 πίτραν 
 
 h 
 
 εν 
 και 
 
 Σιώΐ' λιθον 
 
 g 
 
 ABDE 
 FGJK 
 
 πξίοςκομματος και 
 ΤΓίστίύων ίττ αυτ(ο ου 
 
 1 Pel. ii. 1). 
 = ch. V. 5. 
 χ. 11 al. 
 
 Χ. ^ Άδίλφοί, η μίν 
 Τ} οεησις προς τον 
 
 Εΐ/δοκτια της ίμης καξ)6ιας και 
 
 t \ ' - k ' ' 
 
 ίον υπΐρ ηυτωχι εις σοηηριαν. 
 
 1 — here only. Sir. xviii. 31. (Matt. xi. 26 al.) k Acts xi. 18. ch. Ti. 22. Jade 21. 
 
 StiKVVQ oTi ovSi ταντην ηχον την ^καιοσ ύνη ν) Thdor-mops Thdrt Thl Oec. — rec aft 
 ττροςίκοί]/. ins γαρ {see note), with D^EJK mss nrly (appy) ν syrr all Chr Thdor-mops 
 Thdrt Thl Oec Augj Jor Sedul Bed : om ABD'FG 47' it am tol copt goth Ainbrst Ruf. 
 — ττροςκομμ. to προςκομμ. om 55. — 33. ίγω τιθ. 38. 48. 72. — XtfJoi' ακρογωνιαιυν, 
 ενημον, και \tOov ττηοςκ. (α curious attempt to separate the two quotations) 17• — rec 
 ττας πΐ(ΤΓ. {πας was more prob added to conform this ver to ch x. 11, than omd to 
 suit the LXX : for not one ms omits it in ch x. 1 1), with JK &c syrarr slav Chr Thdor- 
 mops Thdrt (also adds it in LXX) Thl Oec Jer Sedul: txt ABDEFG 47 (al?) it Syr 
 copt Eeth goth Orig Dam Aug Ambrst Ruf Bed. — αντον Thdrt. — ου μη καταισχννϋη 
 DE(F om μη : add μη also 44)G. 
 
 Chai•. X. 1. aieX0ot om 7•ί 120-1. — rec aft jj ξιησις, ins η {corrn : see note), with 
 JK &c Chr Thdrt al : om ABDEFG 47 (al?) Cyr.— rec for αυτών, του ισραηλ {expla- 
 natory gloss), with JK &c ar-pol slav Thdrt Thl Oec : txt ABDEFG 17- 47'• 71• 93 al 
 lect 12 it V syrr ar-erp copt arm Orig (in Wetst) Cyr Chr Dam Ruf Aug Ambrst Pelag 
 Sedul Bed: vwtp r. ισρ. om seth. — rec bef £ΐς σοιτ. ins ίστιν {supplementary gloss), 
 with JK &c syr al Chr Thdrt &\: fit\ Aug oft (once sit) al : om ABDEFG 47'. 71- 219 
 
 against the stone of stumbling. Thus we 
 have instances in the Greek chariot races, of 
 competitors, by an error in judgment in 
 driving, striking against the στήλη round 
 which the chariots were to turn, see Soph. 
 Electr. 730 f. — There is a close analogy 
 between our text and the exhortation in 
 Heb. xii. 1 f. There, after the triumphs of 
 faith have been related, we are exhorted to 
 run with patience the race set before us, 
 looking to Jesus, the Author and Finisher 
 of our faith .• where notice, that the sacred 
 writer seems to have had in his mind the 
 same comparison of Him to the pillar or 
 goal, to wliich the eyes of the runners 
 would be exclusively directed). 33.] 
 
 Appeal to the prophecy of Isaiah, as justi- 
 fying this comparison of Christ to a stone 
 of stumbling. The citation is gathered 
 from two places in Isaiah. The ' stone of 
 stumbling and rock of offence,' mentioned 
 ch. viii. 14, is substituted for the ' corner- 
 stone elect, precious,' of ch.xxviii. 16. The 
 solution of this is very simple. Isa. viii. 14 
 was evidently interpreted by the Jews them- 
 selves of the Messiah : for Simeon, Luke 
 ii. 34, when speaking of the child Jesus as 
 the Messiah, expressly adduces the pro- 
 phecy as about to be fulfilled. Similarly 
 Isa. xxviii. 16 was interpreted by the 
 Chaldee Targum, the Babylonish Talmud 
 (Tract Sanhedrin, fol. xxxviii. 1, Stuart), 
 &c. What was there then to prevent the 
 Ap. from giving to this Stone, plainly fore-, 
 told as to be laid in Zion, that designation 
 
 which prophecy also justifies, and which 
 bear immediately on the matter here in 
 hand ? — The translation of Isa. viii. 14 ia 
 after the Heb., — the LXX having appa- 
 rently read differently. See 1 Pet. ii. 6 — 8, 
 where the same two texts are joined and 
 also Psa. cxviii. 22. — ov κατηιηχιηθίισίται, 
 LXX υΰ μη καταισχννθϊ), gives a second- 
 ary meaning of the Heb. ϊ,"π^ ν•? ' shall not 
 make haste .•' i. e. shall not fly in terror, 
 shall not be confounded. 
 
 Chap. X. 1 — 13.] The Jews, though zeal- 
 otis for God, are yet ignorant of God's 
 rigfiteousness (1 — 3), as revealed to them 
 in their oirn Scriptures (4—13). 
 1.] ' Brethren (' nunc quasi superata prsB- 
 cedentis tractationis severitate comiter ap- 
 peUat/re/?-e.s.' Bengel), the inclination of 
 my heart (ίΰίοκία is seldom, if ever, used 
 to signify the motion of desire, but imports 
 the rest of approving satisfaction. Possibly 
 there is here a mixture of constructions : 
 the Ap.'s ίϋδοκία would be their salvation 
 itself, — his δίησις ττρϋς τον θ. ϋπίρ αΰτ. 
 was els σωΓ.— The μίν requires a corre- 
 sponding Ss, not expressed, but implied in 
 the course of vv. 2, 3, where the obstacle to 
 their σωτηρ. is brought out), and my prayer 
 to God for them (Israel, see ix. 32, ττρος- 
 ίκοιίίΐν), (is) for (their) salvation' (lit. 
 ' towards salvation.' — The insertion of the 
 art. after ^ίησις has apparently been an 
 over-careful grammatical correction : it is 
 by no means universal in the N. T., even 
 where the Greek writers insert it, — and
 
 χ. 1—4. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 391 
 
 μαρτυρώ yap αυτοις οτι "^ t,v\ov θεού ε^ουσιι/, αλλ ου ' caffy^'is^' 
 κατ " επι-γνωσιν' ^ α-γνοηνντες yap τηΐ' του Θεοϋ in=jo'hnii.'i7. 
 
 Λ / \ν»!>»Γν / αν" Γ" (Act.> χχϋ.3.) 
 
 οικαιοσυνην, και την ιοιαν οικαιοσυνην ^ ζ,ητουντες στησαι, C:6i-.2Cur. 
 τρ ^ικαιοσυν^ του θίοΰ ουχ^ ^ ύπετά-γησαν. ^ ^^ τέλος γαρ "Actsiu. ΐ7 
 
 , ^ k ' ^ ' \ " / och.i. 28. 
 
 νομού γυριστός εις οικαιοσυνην τταντι τω ττιστευηντι. Eph.i.ir 
 
 ρ Acts xiii. 27 refl". 1 Cor. xiv. 38. q = Luke vi. in. Exod. U. 15. r -= ch. iu. 31. Heb. x. 9. 
 
 s = 1 Cor. XV. 28. See ch. viii. 7 reff. »s See 2 Cor. iii. 13. 
 
 al lect 12 it Syr copt goth Cyr Aug,. — 2. θεον om 14. 28. 62 al (not Clem Orig).— 3. for 
 yap, S( A 57 al (' no vs :' Tisch) Leo. — aft tStav om δικαωσυιην ABDE 47 (lias it in 
 marg) 178 al lect 8 e ν copt arm Clem Cyr Bas Chr, Procop Dam Iren-edd^) Aug-oft 
 (see notes) : ins FGJK niss nrly d syrr aeth arr goth slav Chr (h 1, also IMtt's mss) Thdrt 
 Till Oec Iren-mss Tert Ambr Aug2 al. — 4. for τέλος, ττληρωμα Clem, Orig,.— aft νομού 
 
 here, seeing that there could be no ίεησας 
 to any other than God, the omission would 
 be more natural, του Ισραήλ has been 
 substituted by the adoption of a gloss : 
 iarii' to complete the sense). The Ap.'s 
 meaning seems to be, to destroy any impres- 
 sion which his readers may have received 
 unfavom-able to his love of his own people, 
 from the stern argument of the former 
 chapter. 2.] ' For (reason why I thus 
 sympathize with their efforts, though mis- 
 directed) I bear witness to them that 
 they have a zeal for God (for this mean- 
 ing of the gen. see reff., esp. the last, and 
 note there), but not according to (in ac- 
 cordance with, founded upon, and carried on 
 with) knowledge ' (accurate apprehension 
 of the way of righteousness as revealed to 
 them). 3.] ' For (espl. of ού κατ' 
 
 επίγν.) not recognizing (' bei7tg ignorant 
 of is liable to the objection, that it may 
 represent to the reader a state of excusable 
 ignorance, whereas they had it before them, 
 and overlooked it) the righteousness of 
 God (not, the icay of justification appointed 
 by God, as Stuart, al. ; but that οη\γ right- 
 eousness which avails before God, which 
 becomes ours in justification ; see De 
 Wette's note, quoted on ch. i. 17), and 
 striving to establish their own right- 
 eousness (again, not justification, but 
 righteousness : that, namely, described ver. 
 5 ; not that it was ever theirs, but the Ap. 
 speaks subjectively. Notwithstanding the 
 MSS authority against δικαι. after ιδίαν, 
 it would seem as if it had been written for 
 emphasis' sake by the Αρ., and omitted on 
 account of the word occurring thrice in the 
 sentence), were not subjected (historical: 
 implying, but not itself bearing, a perfect 
 sense. The passive, — not in a middle 
 sense, as De Wette and Thol., — expresses 
 the result only ,- it might be themselves, or 
 it might he some other, that subjected 
 tlicm, — but the historical fact was, that 
 they were not subjected) to the righteous- 
 ness of God ' (the OiK. T. Θ. being considered 
 
 as a rule or method, to which it was neces- 
 sary to conform, but to which they were 
 never subjected as they were to the law 
 of Moses). 4 — 13.] The δικαιο- 
 
 σννη τ. θ. is now explained to be summed 
 up in that Saviour who was declared to 
 them in their own Scriptures. — ' For (esta- 
 blishing what was last said, and at the 
 same time unfolding the δικ. τ. θ. in a form 
 which rendered tliem inexcusable for its 
 non-recognition) Christ is the end of the 
 law (i. e. the object at which the law 
 aimed : see the similar expression 1 Tim. 
 iii. 5, TO τέλος της παραγγελίας εστίν 
 αγάπη. Various meanings have been given 
 to rf/\uc. (I) End, finis, chronological : 
 ' Christ is the termination of the law.' So 
 the it., vulg., Augustine, Luther, al. Olsh., 
 Meyer, Fritz., De Wette, al. But this 
 meaning, unless understood in its pregnant 
 sense, that Christ, who has succeeded to the 
 law, was also the object and aim of the 
 law, says too little. In this pregnant sense 
 Tholuck takes the word ' end,' the end in 
 time and in aim. It may be so ; but I 
 prefer simply to take in the idea of Christ 
 being the end, i. e. aim of the law, as borne 
 out by the following citations, in which 
 nothing is said of the Iransitoriness of the 
 law, but much of the notices which it con- 
 tains of righteousness by faith in Christ. 
 (2) Clem. Alex., — πλήρωμα γαρ v. χρ. 
 εις δικ. π. τφ πιστ., De Div. Serv. § 9, — 
 Theodoret, Calv., Grot., al. take τέλος for 
 ' accomplishment,' a sense included in the 
 general meaning, but not especially treated 
 here, — the following quotations. not having 
 any reference to it. (3) The meaning, end 
 in the sense of object or aim, above adopted, 
 is that of the Syr., Chrys., Theophyl., Beza^ 
 Bengel, al. Chrys. observes : ίί γαρ τοϋ 
 νόμου τίλος ό χριστός, ο τον χριστον ουκ 
 έχων, καν εκείνην (i. e. δικαιοσύνηι•) εχειν 
 SoKij, ουκ ΐχει' ό ιΪ£ τοι> χριστίη' έχων, 
 καν μη y κατωρΰοίκως τον νόμον, το παν 
 εϊληψι. και γάρ τίλος ιατρικής ΰγιεία. 
 ώςπερ υνν ύ δυνάμενος νγιη ττυιε'ιν, καν μή
 
 592 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Χ. 
 
 t coiislr., John 
 i. 4ιί. See 
 Luke xvui. 
 
 ^ Μωυσίίς yap ^ ypciOH ττίν δικαιοσυνών την εκ: του νομού, abde 
 
 ΟΤΙ ο ΤΓοιησας αυτά ανυρωπος uj^iTot εν αυτοις. ϊ) οε 
 
 ^' εκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη ούτως λέγει, " Μη ειτττ/ς εν tij 
 
 c\f.\%.'3o. καρδία σου Τις αναβϊ'/σεται εις τον ουρανον Ι " τουτ ίστιν 
 Gai.iii. 8. '> ι- ^ ι • ^ r ' 
 
 η LuT.xviii. S, 
 S>e Neh. ix. 
 29. Ezek, 
 
 ■w Deut. XXX. 11, 12. 
 
 = ch. ix. 8. 
 
 add και -προφητών Orig Cyr-oft : ο χ^ιστοζ 78• — 5• rec μωσης, with A mss (nrly) : txt 
 BDG al lect 12 (and no often). — 70(1 om I7 lect 8. — του om B. — for nc του νομού, kc 
 ΐΓίσΓΕως A (seth om την δικ. την tic τ. v.). — on is aft ypaipti in AD' 17'• 47- ti7^ ν Dam 
 Ruf al: om 115 copt.— awra cm ADE G. 9. 47. β"]• ν Dam Ruf al : earn d^ e goth copt 
 Cassiod : ταντα 17'• Ά^ aeth. — αι^Θρ. om FG g Syr ar-erp Chr Hil.— iv αυτή AB (i.e. 
 ίο agree with the readff -γρηψίΐ οτι την Sik. την ικ τ. ?'. ο ποιησας) 1?• 47• iiO ν d' e goth 
 copt arm-venet Dam Ruf Pelag Sedul Bed: txt D(EFGJK.> vss .' fi?).— 6. τη om 5? 
 
 την Ιατρικήν ixy, rb ππν ίχα' ο Si μι) 
 ίίύώς θβρητΓίνίΐν, καν μιτιέναι doKy την 
 τίχνηί', τοϋ παντός ίζίπΐσίν όντως ίπι 
 τον ΐ'όμαν και της πίστίως, ύ μεν ταΰτην 
 ί\ωχ>, και το tKtifov τέλος ίχιι' 6 Ck ταύ- 
 της ίξω ώΐ', Γΐμφοτίρων ίστ'ιν αλλότριος. 
 Horn, xviii. f!22 β.- — νόμου is here plainly 
 the laii) of Moses : see Middleton in loc.) 
 for righteousness (i. e. so as to bring about 
 righteousness, wliich the law could not do) 
 to (dat. commodi ) every one that believeth.' 
 — " Had they only used the law, instead of 
 abusing it, it would have been their best 
 preparation for the Saviour's advent. For 
 indeed, by reason of man's natural weakness, 
 it was always powerless to justify. It was 
 never intended to make the sinner righteous 
 before God ; but rather to impart to him a 
 knowledge of his sinfulness, and to awaken 
 in his heart earnest longings for some pow- 
 erful deliverer. Thus used, it would have 
 insured the reception of the Messiah by 
 those who now reject Him. Striving to 
 attain to real holiness, and increasingly con- 
 scious of the impossibility of becoming holy 
 by an imperfect obedience to the law's 
 requirements, they would gladly have re- 
 cognized the Saviour as the end of the 
 law for righteousness." Ewbank. 
 6.] ' For (proof of the impossibility of legal 
 righteousness, as declared even in the law 
 itself) Moses describes (reft'.) the righte- 
 ousness which is of (abstr. — not implying 
 that it has ever been attained, but rather 
 presupposing the contrary) the law, that 
 (on recitantis, not γρη^. on, in which 
 case we should have αυτήν and avTy. The 
 various readings have arisen from misunder- 
 standing (in) the man who hath per- 
 formed them (the ordinances of the law) 
 shall live in (in the strength of, by means 
 of as his status) them.' — Ks regards the 
 life here promised, the Jewish interpp. 
 themselves included in it more than mere 
 earthly felicity in Canaan, and extended 
 their view to a better life hereafter : see 
 Wetst. in loc. Earthly felicity it doubtless 
 
 did impart, comp. Deut, xxx. 20 ; but even 
 there, as Thol. observes, ' life ' seems to be 
 a general promise, and length of days a 
 particular species of fehcity. " In the 
 N.T.," he continues, "this idea (of life) 
 is always exalted into that of life blessed 
 and eternal :^see Matt. vii. 14 ; xviii. 8, 9. 
 Luke X. 28." 6—8.] The righteous- 
 
 ness which is of faith is described, in the 
 words spoken in Scripture by Moses of the 
 commandment given by him, — as not de- 
 pendent on a long and difficult process of 
 search, but near to every man, and in 
 every inari's power to attain. I beheve the 
 account of the following citation will be best 
 found by bearing in mind that the Ap. is 
 speaking of Christ as the end of the law for 
 righteousness to the behever. He takes as 
 a confirmation of this, a passage occurring 
 in a prophetic part of Deut. where Moses 
 is foretelling to the Jews the consequences 
 of rejecting God's law, and His mercy to 
 them even when under chastisement, if 
 they would return to Him. He then de- 
 scribes the law in nearly the words cited in 
 this verse. Now the Αρ., regarding Christ 
 as the end of the law, its great central aim 
 and object, quotes these words not merely 
 as suiting his purpose, but as bearing, where 
 originally used, an a fortiori application to 
 faith in Him who is the end of the law, 
 and to the commandment to believe in 
 Him, which (1 John iii. 2;}) is now ' God's 
 commandment.' If spoken of the law as a 
 manifestation of God in man's heart and 
 mouth, much more were they sjtoken of 
 Him, who is God manifest in the flesh, the 
 end of the law and the prophets. This 
 view is, it is true, different from that of 
 almost all eminent commentators, ancient 
 and modern, — who regard the words as 
 merely adapted or parodied by the Ap. as 
 suiting his present purpose. Thus, with 
 minor shades of difference, Chrys., Beza, 
 Grot., Vatabl., Luther, Wolf., Bengel, 
 Koppe, Flatt, RUckert, De Wette, Thol., 
 Stuart, Hodge, al. But we must remember
 
 5—8. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 S93 
 
 •χριστοί' ^ Karayaytiv' ^ η Τίς καταβησίται είς την ^ αβνσ- y^ct^^ix.so 
 
 aWa 
 
 σον ι τουτ εστίν γ^ριστον εκ νεκρών avayayειv 
 
 al6. Geu. i.2. 
 
 \ ζ Lukf \iii.31 
 (inly. esc. 
 Rev. ix. 1 
 Heb. xiii. 20. Ps. xxix. 3. 
 
 al.— 7. fK vfKp. om 124. 219 (but both have it in marg) 238 lectt 7. 8: ins aft avayay. 
 57 arm Cyr. — ayayuv 1. Οδ : t^ayay. slav-ms : liberare Iren. — 8. ins η ypcιφη aft Xtyii 
 
 that it is in this passage Paul's object not 
 merely to describe the righteousness which 
 is of faith in Christ, but to shew it de- 
 scribed already in the v^ords of the law. 
 The Comm. who have taken more or less 
 the view that the Ap. cites the words as 
 bearing the sense put on them, are Calvin, 
 Calovius, Reiche, Meyer, Fritz., Olsh. — 
 ' But the righteousness which is of faith 
 thus saith (personified, as Wisdom in the 
 Prov.), " Say not in thine heart (i. e. 
 ' think not,' a Heb. idiom. The LXX has 
 merely \tyωv, ytvh. The Ap. cites freely, 
 giving the explanation of Xsywj', viz. think- 
 ing, ' Who shall go up to heaven (LXX, 
 άναβ. ι'ιμϊν ίίς τ. οίφ., see Prov. χχχ. 4) .' 
 — that is (see note above ; — that imports 
 in its full and unfolded meaning) to bring 
 down Christ ■?' Or who shall go down 
 into the ahyss (LXX. ης διιητβράσα 
 ημϊν ίΐς το Ίτίραν της θαλάσσης ; The 
 Αρ. substitutes τίς κατ. ίΐ'ς τ. άβ. as the 
 direct contrast to τίς αν. ίϊς τ. ούρ., as in 
 Psa. cxxxviii. 8, LXX. Amos ix. 2 : — and 
 as better suiting the interpretation which 
 follows), that is to hring up Christ from 
 the dead." ' — There is some difficulty in as- 
 signing the precise view with which the Ap. 
 introduces these questions. Tholuck re- 
 marks, " The different interpretations may 
 be reduced to this, that the questions are 
 regarded either (I) as questions of unbelief, 
 or (2) as questions of embarrassment, or 
 (3) as questions of anxiety." The first 
 view is represented by De Wette, who says, 
 " In what sense these questions, from which 
 the righteousness which is of faith dissuades 
 men, are to be taken, is plain from ver. 9, 
 where the Resurrection of Christ is asserted 
 as the one most weighty point of historical 
 Christian belief : — they would be questions 
 of unbelief, which regards this fact as not 
 accomplished, or as now first to be accom- 
 plished. Thus also, probably, are we to 
 understand the first question, as applying 
 to the Incarnation of Christ." This is 
 more or less also the view of Chrys., Theo- 
 doret, Theophyl., Oec, Erasm., Estius, 
 Semler, Koppe, Meyer, al,, Riickert (who 
 refers the doubt of the unbelief to the Jtill 
 accomplishment of redemption by the In- 
 carnation and Resurrection of Christ), 
 Reiche, and KiJllner (who refer icaray. to 
 the ascended vSaviour, thereby destroying 
 the symmetry of the whole, — because the 
 
 latter question undoubtedly refers to bring- 
 ing Christ not from a present but from a 
 past state, from which He has historically 
 come). — (2) The second view, that they 
 are questions of embarrassinent, is taken 
 by L. Capellus, Wolf, Rosenm., and Stuart, 
 which last says, " The whole (of Moses's 
 saying) may be summed up in one word, 
 omitting all figurative expression : viz. the 
 commandment is plain and accessible. You 
 can have, therefore, no excuse for neglecting 
 it. So in the case before us. Justification 
 by faith in Christ is a plain and intelligible 
 doctrine. It is not shut up in mysterious 
 language .... It is like what Moses says 
 of the statutes which he gave to Israel, 
 plain, intelligible, accessible .... It is 
 brought before the mind and heart of every 
 man : and thus he is without excuse for 
 unbelief." (3) The third view, that they 
 are questions of anxiety, is that of Calv., 
 Beza, Pise, Bengel, Knapp, Fritz., and 
 Tholuck : — by none perhaps better ex- 
 pressed than by Ewbank, Comm. on the 
 Ep. to the Rom., p. 74 : " Personifying the 
 great Christian doctrine of free justification 
 tlirough taith, he represents it as addressing 
 every man who is anxious to obtain salva- 
 tion, in the encouraging words of Moses : 
 ' Say not in thine heart, (it says to such an 
 
 one) &c ' In other words, ' Let not 
 
 the man, who sighs for deliverance from 
 his own sinfulness, suppose that the accom- 
 plishment of some impossible task is re- 
 quired of him, in order to enjoy the bless- 
 ings of the Gospel. Let him not think 
 that the personal presence of the Messiah 
 is necessary to ensure his salvation. Christ 
 needs not to be brought down from heaven, 
 or up from the abyss, to impart to him for- 
 giveness and holiness. No. Our Chris- 
 tian message contains no impossibilities. 
 We do not mock the sinner by offering him 
 happiness on conditions which we know 
 that he is powerless to fulfil. We tell him 
 that Christ's word is near to him : so near, 
 that he may speak of it with his mouth, 
 
 and meditate on it with his heart 
 
 Is there any thing above human power in 
 such a confession, and in such a belief? 
 Surely not. It is graciously adapted to the 
 necessity of the very weakest and most sin- 
 ful of God's creatures." — (1) resumed. 
 The objection to this view, as alleged by 
 Tholuck, is, that in it, the contrast with
 
 S94> 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Χ. 
 
 bDEDT. XXX. γ'ι Xiyni Έ-ν/υς σου το ρ-ημά ίστιν. ίν τω στοματι σου abde 
 
 14. constr., / ^ 11^ J ^'<^ ^ ^ ^ >■ ^ ' ^ FGJK 
 
 jphjyii.23. ^.^jj ^^ ^- καρδία σου' " τουτ ίστιν το '^ ρήμα της πιστΒως 
 
 c = Acts χ. 37. Λ / Q η > \ ά ' \ ' dd' " ' ' 
 
 (joimTi.63. ο κηρυσσομίν' οτι tav ο/ΐίολο•γ?/ΐ7ί)ς sv τω στοματι 
 
 1 'ρηι 1 •>'i ' Ί ~ ^ e ' ' " ^ ' " 
 
 d = jMhnii.i2. οου κυριον νήσουν, και ττιστευσ^ς tv rp Kapcia σου οτι 
 
 χϋ. 42 »Λ^ >\f« » - fl'.lO <^' ^ 
 
 ddch. XV.6 ο t/f or owTOv τΐΎΕίοεν ifc vf/cowi', σω(7ΐ)σΐ7 καροία yap 
 
 only. Ps. , , ' ' ' , ' , , ' i 
 
 e jfp^j";^' 26' '^ π(στ£υεται ^ εις δικαίοσυνην, στοματι οε ομολογείΓαι 
 f=*ch.iv.24ai. '^ ίίς CTWTfjptov. λεγει γαρ η ' -ypai^Tj Πας ο ^ ττιστευων 
 
 gTT.1,4. h constr., 1 Tim. vi. 12. i sing., ch. ix. 17 reff. j ch. ix. 33. ISA.xxviii. 16. 
 
 DE all it v-ed (not demid tol) Orig^ Cyr Thdrt Hil Ambrst Ruf Pelag Sedul Bed (not 
 Aug) : aft ri FG. — ιστιν is aft iyy. σον in DEFG vss lat-ff : om Orig : add σφοδρά ί». 47 
 Orig^. — 9. aft ομολογ. {ίιπης Cyr) ins το ρήμα Β 71 Clem Cyr.— for κυρ. ιησιινν, οτι 
 Ki'p. ιησυυς Β Clem Cyr: and addg ta-iv copt al Hil Aug (not Iren al) : κυρ. ιησ. om 
 lect 8. — ι>;σουν χμιστον A al Petr Bas : χριστον seth. — ijyitp. αιτ. A al copt all Cyrr. — 
 10. ττιστίυίΐς 219•.— 11. οτι ττας (Ε?) 38. 48. 12 al ('not DO,' Tisch) Ruf Sedul.— ου 
 
 ver. 5 is lost sight of. And this is so far 
 just, that it must be confessed we thus lose 
 the ideas which the Ap. evidently intended 
 us to grasp, those of insuperable difficulty 
 in the acquisition of righteousness by the 
 law, and of facility,— by the gospel. Also, 
 — it puts ioofarward the allegation of the 
 great matters of historical belief, which are 
 not here the central point of the argument, 
 but introduced as the objects which faith, 
 itself that central point, apprehends. (2) 
 The last objection has some force as against 
 this view. The regarding the questions as 
 mere questions of difficulty and intellectual 
 bewilderment does not adequately repre- 
 sent the ζί)λος Qtov predicated of the Jews, 
 on the assumption of which the whole pas- 
 sage proceeds. Here, however, it seems to 
 me, we have more truth than in (1) : for 
 the plainness and simplicity of the truths to 
 be believed is unquestionably one most im- 
 portant element in the righteousness which 
 is of faith. (3) Here we have the im- 
 portant element just mentioned, not indeed 
 made the prominent point of the questions, 
 but, as it appears to me, properly and suffi- 
 ciently kept in view. The anxious follower 
 after righteousness is not disappointed by 
 an impracticable code, nor mocked by an 
 unintelligible revelation : the word is near 
 Mm, therefore accessible ; plain and sim- 
 ple, and therefore apprehensible : and, 
 taking (1) into account, we may fairly add, 
 • — deals with definite historical fact, and 
 therefore certain : so that his salvation is 
 not contingent on an amount of perform- 
 ance which is beyond him, and therefore 
 inaccessible : irrational, and therefore in- 
 apprehensible : undefined, and therefore 
 involved in nncertainty . — Thus, it seems to 
 me, we satisfy all the conditions of the 
 argument : and thus also it is clearly 
 brought out, that the ivords themselves 
 
 could never have been spoken by Moses of 
 the righteousness which is of the law, but 
 of that which is of faith. 8 ] ' But 
 
 what says it ? The word is near thee, 
 in thy mouth (to confess i, and in thine 
 heart (to believe) : that is (see above), the 
 word of faith (which forms the substratum 
 and object of faith, see Gal. iii. 2. 1 Tim. 
 iv. 6) which we (ministers of Christ: or 
 perhaps, I Paul) preach.' This ver. has 
 been explained in dealing with vv. 6 and 7• 
 9.] ' Because (explanation of the 
 word being near thee : so Thol., De Wette, 
 Stuart, al. Others take on here as in ver. 
 5, merely recitantis, making iai' κ.τ.λ. the 
 ρή/ια preached. But as Thol. observes, 
 (1) the duty of confessing the Lord Jesus 
 can hardly be called part of the contents of 
 the preaching of faith, but the prominence 
 given to that duty shews a reference to the 
 words of Moses: (2) the making on render 
 a reason for εγγνς σου κ.τ.λ. suits much 
 better the context and form of the passage : 
 (3) the fact of the confession with the mouth 
 standing^»•*/, also shews a reference to what 
 has gone before : for when the Ap. brings 
 his own arrangement in ver. 10, he puts, as 
 natural, the belief of the heart first), if thou 
 shalt confess with thy mouth (same order 
 as ver. 8) the Lord Jesus (not, I think, 
 ' Jesus as the Lord ' [see the readg of Β 
 al.] : this might very well be, — and κΰριον 
 might, as Thol., be the predicate placed first 
 for emphasis, did not Paul frequently use 
 κύριος Ίησονς for 'the Lord Jesus,' — see 
 [ch. xiv. 14 after a prep.] 1 Cor. i. 3 al., 
 2 Cor. iv. 5, where see note [Phil. ii. 19] ; 
 iii. 20. Col. iii. I7. 1 Thess. i. 1 bis; iv. 1. 
 1 Tim. i. 1 ; V. 21. Tit. i. 4.— 1 Cor. xii. 3 
 is hardly an example on the other side: see 
 note there), and believe in thine heart 
 that God raised Him from the dead (here, 
 as in ] Cor. xv. 14. 16, 17, regarded as the
 
 9—14. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 )9ί 
 
 12 
 
 αο εστίν ^ ^ια- '^^^α'"-^-^- , 
 
 1 Cor. Χ1Τ. 7 
 
 £7Γ αυτω ου -^ καταισγννϋησβται. "" ου yat 
 
 στο\-η Ιουδαίου τε και 'Έλληνος* ο yap αυτός κύριος ι ="' τ™. τι. 
 
 πάντων πλούτων εις παντας τους εττικαΛου^ΐίΐ'ους n,\'J;fji'2i 
 
 13 
 
 JuEi ii. 32. 
 
 αυτοί'. '" πας -yap ος αν "" επικαλεσηται το όνομα κυρίου Xct s ίχ.' Γα.' 
 
 Θ/ ΛΑ - t m ' \ > η ' •> ' nc..nslr.,Eurip. 
 
 ι^σίται. πως ουν επικαλΐσωνται εις ον ουκ Med. 7οΐ, 
 
 ° ίπίστίυσαν ', πως δε πιατίυσωσιν " ού ουκ ^ ηκουσαν Ι iμμeι>e,v α 
 
 ρ — W. gen., here only. Xen. Mem. iii. 5. 9. Horn. Od. i. 289. 
 
 ο w. eir, John i. 12 reff. 
 
 μΐ] κατ. DEFG.— 12. ίονδαιω και ίλληνι DE. — for παντας, τταντα Chrj : add και επι 
 ναντας CliFj Thdrt. — 14. rec ιπικαΧίσονται (see note), with JK mss nrly (appy) vss 
 (express the future, but goth the present) lat-ff Clem Thdor-mo ps C hr Thdrt Dam Thl 
 Oec : t.xt ABDEFG 73. 115 (al ?). — rec πιστίνσουσιν, with AJK mss nrly (appy) vss and 
 lat-ff as before, Clem Ath Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec : tst BDEFG 70. 73. 109 (al) Chr 
 
 great central fact of redemption), thou 
 Shalt be saved ' (inherit eternal life). — 
 Here we have the two parts of the above 
 question again introduced : the confession 
 of the Lord Jesus implying His having 
 come down from heaven, and the belief in 
 His resurrection implying His having been 
 brought tip from the dead. 10.] ' For 
 
 (refers back to ver. 6, where the above 
 words were ascribed to »/ ίκ πίστεως SiKaio- 
 σύνη, and explains how πιστενσ. iv tij 
 καρί. refer to the acquiring of righteous- 
 ness) with the heart faith is exercised 
 unto (so as to be available to the acquisition 
 of) righteousness, but (q. d. ' not only so : 
 but there must be an outward confession, 
 in order for justification to be carried for- 
 ward to salvation ') with the mouth confes- 
 sion is made unto salvation.' — Clearly 
 the words ίικ. and σωτ. are not used here, 
 as De \V., al., merely as different terms for 
 the same thing, for the sake of the jiaral- 
 lehsm : but as Thol. quotes from Crell., 
 σωτ. is the ' terminus ultimus et apex 
 justificationis,' consequent not merely on 
 the act of justifying faith as the other, 
 but on a good confession before the 
 world, maintained unto the end. 
 11.] ' For (proof of the former part of ver. 
 10) the Scripture saith, Every one who 
 believeth on Him shall not be ashamed.' 
 — πας is neither in the LXX nor the Heb., 
 but is implied in the indefinite participle. 
 The Ap. seems to use it here as taking up 
 ■παντΊ τψ πιστίΰοντι, ver. 4. See ch. lx. 33. 
 12.] 'For (an explanation of the 
 strong expression ττάς ύ πιστινων, as im- 
 plying the universal ofFer of the riches of 
 God's mercy in Christ) there is no distinc- 
 tion of Jew and Greek (Gentile.— See ch. 
 iii. 22j ; for the same Lord of all (viz. 
 Christ, who is the subject here: vv. 9, 11, 
 13 cannot be separated. So Orig., Chrys., 
 Oec, Calov., M'olf, Bengel, Riick., Meyer, 
 Fritz., De Wette, Tholuck, al. So πάντων 
 KvfuoQ of Christ, Acts x. 3G. Most modern 
 
 Comm. make ό αυτός the subject, and 
 κύριος the predicate. But I prefer the 
 usual rendering, both on account of the 
 strangeness of ό αυτός thus standing alone, 
 and because this Ap. uses the expr. ό 
 αυτός κύριος, 1 Cor. xii. 5, and even ό 
 αυτός θίός, ib. C, for ' the same Lord,' and 
 ' it is the same God.' Stuart supplies, 
 ' (there is) the same Lord :' but this is harsh, 
 — and unnecessary, if the participle πλου- 
 τωΐ' be taken as συιτίλώΐ' κ. συντ. in ch. 
 ix. 28) is rich towards all (' By €ΐς is sig- 
 nified the direction in which the stream of 
 grace gushes forth.' Olsh.) who call upon 
 Him.' 13.] ' For (Scripture proof of 
 
 this assertion) every one, whosoever shall 
 call upon the Name of the Lord (Jeho- 
 ΛΆΗ,— but used here of Christ beyond a 
 doubt, as the nest ver. shews. There is 
 hardly a stronger proof, or one more irre- 
 fragable by those who deny the Godhead of 
 our Blessed Lord, of the unhesitating appli- 
 cation to Him by the Ap. of the name and 
 attributes of Jehovah) shall be saved.' 
 14, 15.] It has been much doubted 
 to whom these questions refer, — to Jews or 
 to GentUes .' It must, I think, be answered, 
 To neither exclusively. They are general- 
 ized by the πάς δ ς αν of the preceding 
 ver., to mean all, both Jews and Gentiles. 
 And the inference in what follows, though 
 mainly concerning the rejection of the un- 
 believing Jews, has regard also to the recep- 
 tion of the Gentiles: see below on vv. 19, 
 20. — At the same time, as Meyer remarks, 
 "the necessity of the Gospel άπυητο\ή 
 must first be laid down, in order to bring 
 out in strong constrast the disobedience of 
 some." — ' How then (i. e. posito, that the 
 foregoing is so) can they (men, represented 
 by the πάς, oc cir of ver. 13) call on (I 
 have followed the majority of the chief MSS. 
 in reading the aor. subjunctive instead of 
 the future indie. So also ch. vi. 1) Him in 
 whom they have not believed (i. c. begun 
 to beUeve: so ch. xiii. 11)? But how can
 
 896 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. Χ. 
 
 ■J^J^'i'sf ,ϋ πώς δε ακουσωσιν \ωρις κηρύσσοντος', ^^ πως οε fCJ?oύ^- 
 r = Luke i. 19. ωσιν ictu μ?} αποσταλωσίν ; καβως yeypaTrrai Ως '^ωραίοι c μπ 
 Eph.ii. 17 ΟΙ ποοες των ευαγ-νελι^,ομεΐ'ων ίίρηνηχ', των ivayyiAii,o- σταλώ- 
 sch.n.ii ι^ί'νωι; [τίί] αγαθά. ^^ Άλλ' οι» ττάιτες ^ νττηκουσαν τω ^^^° 
 
 t =■ IsA.liii. 1. , -. , 'ΤΙ •'• ' ^ ' τ/' ι ' ι ~ ιν 
 
 John χϋ. 38. ίυayyίAιω. ϊΑσαίας yao Aiyii l\vpie, τις εττίστευσΕτ τη JK- 
 13. Heb. 17. t y^^oy ημών ι ' αρα η πίστις "εξ ακοής, η όε ακοί) δια 
 
 η Gal. iii. 2. </ Λ" 1β'ΛΛ<ν\' w^w' " . λ ν 
 
 Tch xi. 1. ρήματος Ueov. '^° άλλα λέγω, μη ουκ ηκονσαν , -θΐουΚ. 
 
 ■ΗΓ Ι Cor. IX. 4, ι' ^ ^ _ ^ _,.5. Λ/\ f Λ/ 1 ABCU 
 
 oniy'p.^ "μεΐ'οί^νγε ^ εις ττασαν ττ)υ yrjv ^' εζηλθεί' ο ^ φθόγγος ou- efgj 
 
 χ Lukexi 28. - \• »a' '-b' / \>' 
 
 ch.ix.2u των, και εις τα πέρατα της οικουμένης τα ρήματα 
 
 onlyt. ' ' ' 
 
 y Malt. ix. 26. Mark i. £8. ζ 1 Cor. xiv. 7 only. PsA.xviii. 4. a — Matt. sii. 42. Luke 
 
 xi. 31. (Heb. vi. 16)only. b = Matt. xxiv. 14 reff. 
 
 pitt's mSj). — rec ακονσονσιν, with J all vss and lat-ff as bef Clem Chr (not Mtt's mss) 
 Thdrt Thl Oec : -σονται DEFGK 47. (!7. 71-3. 80. 117-24 al Dam : t.\t A2(A' uncert)B 
 17. 80. ί)'Λ. lO'J 11 all lect 13 Ath Chr (Mtt's mss). — 15. rec κηοΐ'ζουσιν, with most mss 
 (only) vss lat-ff as bef Clem Chr (not Mtt's mss) Thdrt Dam Thl Oec : -σσουσιν FG : 
 txt ABDEJK 17. 73. yS. 115-17 al Chr (Mtt's mss).— καθαπίο Β: καθα Chr (Mtt's 
 ms). — ίναγ•/(λιζ()μα'ΐον (ΐρηνην, των (not των fucry. ίΐρ. των as Tischend. ed 2) om 
 ABC 47 (but ius in marg) 02. 71• 109 al {from similariiy of endings) copt sah seth Clem 
 Orig Thdor-mops (appy) Dam Ruf-text-comm Epiphi (on Canticl : elsWj om evang. 
 bona) : ins DE(FG om 2nd rw^)JK mss nrly it ν s}-rr arr arm ? goth slav Chr Thdrt 
 Thl Oec Iren {evang. bona, evang. pacem, so also Tertj Hil,) Tertj Ambr^ Jerj Hilj (see 
 above: elsWj om evang. bona). — rec ins τα bef αγαθά, with D-corrd JK mss nrly (appy) 
 Clem Chr Thdrt Thl Oec : om ABCD'EFG 47>. 178 al Orig Dam (I have marked this 
 omn doubtful, notwithstanding the concurrence of MSS, because τα is not in LXX). — 
 16. obediunt it ν lat-ff. — for τη ακ-οη, φβο•^γω Syr copt sah. — 17. apa ovv sah. — for 
 θεον, χριστού BCD Ε fi 9. 23. 47 (rec in marg) 49. 57. C72 al d e ν copt sah goth Aug 
 Pel Ambrst {Dei Christi Bed) : om FG g Hil : txt ADUK most mss (appy) syrr seth arr 
 Slav al Clem Ath Thdor-mops Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec Ruf Sedul.— 18. μινουν^ί om FG g 
 
 they believe (in Him) of whom they have dient : and this was before announced by 
 
 not heard (constr. see reff.) ? But how can Isaiah. The persons here meant are as yet 
 
 they hear without a preacher ? But how kept indefinite, — but evidently the Ap. has 
 
 can men preach unless they shall have in his mind the unbeUeving Jews, about 
 
 been sent ? As it is written, How beau- whom his main discourse is employed. — 
 
 tiful are the feet of those who publish ' But not all hearkened to (historic : dur- 
 
 glad tidings of peace, who publish glad ing the preaching) the good news (ου 
 
 tidings of good things.' — The Ap. is πάντίς, because πάντίς, see vv. 11—13, 
 
 shewing the necessity and dignity of the were the objects of the preaching, and must 
 
 preachers of the word, which leads on to hearken to it if they would be saved) : — 
 
 the universality of their preaching, leaving (and this too was no unlooked for thing, 
 
 all who disobey it without excuse. He but predetermined in the divine counsel) 
 
 therefore cites this, as shewing that their for Esaias saith, Lord {κνρΐί is not in the 
 
 instrumentality was one recognized in the Heb.) who believed our report V 
 
 propheticword,wheretheirofSce is described 17.] 'Faith then (concl. from ver. Ifi ri'c 
 
 and glorified. — The applicability of these Ιττίστ. τι] aKofj) is from report (i. e. the 
 
 words to the preachers of the Gospel is e\\- publication of the Gospel produces belief 
 
 dent from the passage in Isa. itself, which in it : ακοή. as Thol. remarks, cannot well 
 
 is spoken indeed of the return from capti- be ' hearing,' as the sense in the inference 
 
 vitv, but in that return has regard to a more from the citation must be the same as in 
 
 glorious one under the future Redeemer, the citation itself), and the report (the 
 
 We need not therefore say that the Ap. uses publication of the Gospel) is by means of 
 
 Scripture words merely as expressing his own (not, 'in obedience to,' but 'by,' as its in- 
 
 thoughts in a well-known garb ; — he alleges strument and vehicle) the word of God ' 
 
 the words as a prophetic description of the {ρίιματος used possibly, as De Wette sug- 
 
 preachers of whom he is writing. gests, as a preparation lor τά ρίιμητη air. 
 
 16.] In this preaching of the Gospel some in ver. 18). 18.] 'But (in anticipa- 
 
 have been found obedient, others disobe- tion of an objection that Israel, whom he
 
 ] 5—20. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 397 
 
 αυτών. ^^ άλλα ^ λίγω, ^ /ατ/ Ισμαήλ ^^ουκίγι^ω; ττρωτος cch.xi.u,i4. 
 
 19 
 
 Μωι;σΐ}ς λ 8 
 
 d 
 
 Έ- 
 
 £7Γί 
 
 7^' , 
 
 τταρα^ηΧωσω νμας 
 TTapopyiio νμας. 
 
 ετΓ 
 
 20 'U •' 
 ησαΐας 
 
 δ\ ά-^ Luke i. 29, 
 ε 4- Hi. 
 _ e— 1 Pet.ii. 10. 
 
 ατΓΟΤοΛμο /cat Aiyet ιΐ,υρίυην ■" εν τοις ε^αε μη UVfov- ^ ^'^'Ρ;^•^*^^•^^. 
 
 g Eph. τί. 4 only. 1. C. 3 Kings χν. 30 al. h here only t• Jos. Ant. XT. lu. 3. 
 
 i IsA. liv. 1. j coustr., EpU. v. 18. 
 
 Ruf al (not Hil al). — ττασαν yap D* d'. — 19. for λτγω, epei τις 73. — rec ουκ ίγνω ισρ. 
 {prob corrnfor elegance), with J &c Syr slav Thdrt Thl Oec-text : txt ABCDEFG 47. 
 57. 73-4. 1 16-24-77 to 9 al it V copt arm all Chr Dam (Oec-comm ?) Hil lat-fF. — πρώτοι/ 
 121 : ου -γινωσκω ισραηλ l()G-7 (Scliolz, but qu ?) : ουκ eyvw πρώτος tol : ideo primus 
 Ambrst.• — rec μωσης: txt BCDFGJ 48. 113. 219 al. — ίγω yap 37: και ίγω slav. — 
 ■παραζηλω 72. — 20. hef αποτ. ins και sah. — αποτολμά και cm DEFG it. — rec om tv, 
 
 has esp. in view, had not svfficienfly heard 
 the good tidings) I say, Did they not 
 hear {ηκουσαΐ' partly founded on the 
 cognate ακοή of the last ver., partly recall- 
 ing the iJKiwaav of ver. 14) 1 nay, rather 
 (ch. ix. 20, note) into all the earth 
 went forth their voice, and to the 
 ends of the world their words.' — It 
 is remarkable that so few of the Comm. 
 have noticed (I have found it only in Ben- 
 gel, and there but faintly hinted: Olsh., 
 who defends the applicability of the text, 
 does not even allude to it) that Psal. xix. is 
 a comparison of the sun, and glory of the 
 heavens, with the word of God. As far as 
 ver. C the glories of nature are described : 
 then the great subject is taken up, and the 
 parallelism carried out to the end. So that 
 the Ap. has not, as alleged in nearly all the 
 Comm., merely accommodated the text alle- 
 gorically, but taken it in its context, and 
 followed up the comparison of the Psalm. 
 — As to the assertion of the preaching of 
 the Gospel having gone out into all the 
 world, where as yet a small part of it only 
 had been evangelized, — we must remember 
 that it is not the extent, so much as the 
 universality in character, of this preaching, 
 which the Ap. is here asserting ; that word 
 of God, hitherto confined within the limits 
 of Judaea, had now broken those bounds, 
 and was preached in all parts of the earth. 
 See Col. i. 6. 23. 19.] ' But (in an- 
 
 ticipation of another objection, that this 
 universal evangelizing and admission of all, 
 had at any rate taken the Jeivs by surprise, 
 — that they had not been forewarned of any 
 such purpose of God) I say, Did Israel 
 (no emphasis on Israel — they are not frst 
 here introduced, nor have the preceding 
 verses been said only of the Gentiles ; but 
 they have been during those vv. in the 
 Ap.'s mind, and are now named for dis- 
 tinctness' sake, because it is not now a 
 question of their having heard, wliich they 
 did in common with all, but of tlieir having 
 been aware from their Scriptures of God's 
 intention with regard to themselves and the 
 
 Gentiles) not know (supply, not ' the Gos- 
 pel,' την άκοήν, as Chrys., Estius, Riickert, 
 Olsh., al., — but, the fact that such a gene- 
 ral proclamation of the Gospel would be 
 made as has been mentioned in the last 
 ver., raising up the Gentles into equality 
 and rivalry with themselves — so Meyer, 
 Fritz., Thol., De Wette, Stuart, al. — 
 Others supply variously: — Calv. and Beza, 
 ' the truth of God,'— so as to have an ad- 
 vantage over the Gentiles : — Berigel, ' jus- 
 titiam Dei :' — Bretschneider and Reiche 
 take 'Ισραήλ for the object of ίγνω, and 
 understand ό θεός as its subject : ' Did not 
 God know,— a<'knowledge, regard with love, 
 • — Israel ?' But surely the context wili not 
 allow this) ? — First (in the order of the 
 prophetic roll ; q. d. their very earliest pro- 
 phet : comp. Matt. x. 2, πρώτος, 'Σ.ίμων 
 κ. Γ. λ. Thol., after Riickert, observes, "The 
 Ap. has in his mind a whole series of pro- 
 phetic sayings which he might adduce, but 
 gives only a few instead of all, and would 
 shew by the πρώτος, that even in the 
 earliest period the same complaint [of Is- 
 rael's unbelief] is found") Moses saith, I 
 will move you (Heb. and LXX. ' them') 
 to jealousy with (those who are) no na- 
 tion (the Gentiles, as ojiposed to the people 
 of God), with a foolish (Sjj, the spiritual 
 fool of Ps. xiv. 1, 2; iii. I. Prov. xiv. 9) 
 nation will I provoke you.' The original 
 reference of these words, as addressed to 
 Israel by Moses, is exactly apposite to the 
 Ap.'s argument. Moses prophetically as- 
 sumes the departure of Israel from God, 
 and his rejection of them, and denounces 
 from God that as they had moved Him to 
 jealousy with their 'no-gods' (idols) and 
 provoked Him to anger with their vanities, 
 — so He would, by receiving into His fa- 
 vour a ' no-nation,' make them jealous, and 
 provoke them to anger by adopting instead 
 of them a foolish nation. On the interpre- 
 tation of De Wette, al., that the meaning 
 is, God would deliver the children of Israel 
 as a prey to the idolatrous nations of Ca- 
 naan, the parallels will not hold ; nor do
 
 398 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 Χ. 21. 
 
 σιν. 
 
 ίμφανης ί^ίνομην τοις εμέ μη εττίρωτωσιν. abcd 
 
 k Acts χ. 40 
 
 only. 
 l = Judg. i. 1. 21 m 
 
 xiiii. f). (XX. 
 IS.) 
 
 "iV,"''L^Hib εζεπίτασα τας χε/ρας μου ττ^)θς 
 
 i.7, 8. Ρ ' Λ ' 
 
 η here only. aVT /ΛεγΟΙ'Τα. 
 
 IsA.lxv.2. -v7-r 1 
 
 ο ch ii 8 al. VI 1 
 
 Drnt xxi.20. 
 
 προς δε τοί' Ισραήλ λέγει ' Οληΐ' την -ημεξίαν 
 i.r^^^„„^ ^„„ ^,^.^^„ ,,„.. ^,.^^ Ααον aπ£ιυc 
 
 απαυυνντα και 
 
 avTii 
 XI. Λέγω ούν, αη '^ απώσατο ο θεός τον λαον 
 
 D Luke XX 27 ^ "^ Γ ^ / • ^ ^'^s*f Λ' »\» 
 
 Acts χίϋ.'45. αυτού ; μη γένοιτο και γαρ εγω 1ίτραΐ)λιτί}ς (ΐμι, εκ: 
 
 r ch. ϋί. 4 retr. sJuhni.4S. Acts 
 
 Hos. iv. 4 
 q Acts Tci. 27, 39. xiii. 46. 1 Tim. i. 19 only. L. P. Ezek. xliii. 
 ii. •2•2 al. Jos. Autt. ii. 9. 1. 
 
 with AC(E?)(JK.') (all?) Clem Chr Thdrt al Thl al (corrn to suit LXX?): ins 
 BD'(E?)FG (it) sah goth (ar-pol?) Ambrst (but d e Ambrst f/x^. iytr. for £i'pf0. and 
 vice versa). — aft ί-^ΐνομ. add tv BD'(E?) Ruf (d e see above). — 21. for {ξίπίτ., δαπίτασα 
 ττρος at 109. — for ττρος λα., ίττι λα. DE Just Clem: ιις λα. ΤΟ. — for και αντιλίγοιτα, 
 κ. λέγοντα D-(E?) : om FG g Hil Anibr Ambrst Sedul. 
 
 Chap. XI. 1. for τον λαον, την κληουνομιαν FG g Till Ambr Ambrst Hil Sedul 
 (not Aug-oft al). — aft λαοί', ins ov προίγι-ω AD' 76 <i^ (not Chr-comm) Thl Augj 
 (but om Aug-oft) Ambrst-comm. — yap om 219^. — f/c ψυλης 44. — rec βίνιαμιν, 
 
 the following verses in Deut. (22 — 25) jus- 
 tify it. 20.] ' But (even more than 
 this : there is stronger testimony yet) 
 Esaias is very hold and says (i. e. as we 
 say, ' dares to say,' ' ventures to speak thus 
 plainly.' Thol. compares ^schin. de Falsa 
 Leg. c. 45: καν WiXi^mj (ΐγίτ-λιάζίΐν κ. 
 \'tytiv), I was found (so LXX, the Heb. is 
 iriffillD, 'I was sought:' but apparently in 
 the sense of Ezek. xiv. 3 ; x.x. 3, ' enquired 
 of,' i. 6. ' worshipped :' which amounts to 
 ίΰμίθην. In Ezek. the LXX render it 
 άτΓοκ^ιΊνίσΰαι — and so Stier here, 3Λ) Qfbc 
 uintiuort . . •) by those who sought me not, 
 I became manifest to those who asked not 
 after me.' The clauses are inverted in order 
 from the LXX, and ίγεί'άμην put instead 
 of iytvi]Qi]i>. — De Wette and other modern 
 Comm. have maintained that Isa. Ixv. I is 
 spoken of the Jews, and not of the Gentiles; 
 their main argument for tliis view being the 
 connexion of ch. Ixiv. and Ixv. But even 
 granting this connexion, it does not follow 
 that God is not speaking in reproach to 
 Israel in ch. Ixv. 1, and reminding them pro- 
 phetically, that while they, His own rebel- 
 lious people, provoke Him to anger, the 
 Gentiles which never sought Him have 
 found Him. The whole passage is tho- 
 roughly gone into and its true meaning 
 satisfactorily shewn in Stier's valuable work, 
 " Sf ΐ'Λΐαέ/ nici)t φίοιι&ο=3ίίαίαέ/" pp. 797 
 ff., who remarks that ' the nation which 
 vas not called by my Name,' in Ixv. 1, can 
 only primarily mean the GentUes. 
 21.] ' But of (not ' to,' but ' with regard 
 to:' see retf. The words are not an ad- 
 dress) Israel (evidently emphatic ; — the 
 former words having been said of the Gen- 
 tiles) he saith (ibid. ver. 2), All the day 
 (aft. μον in LXX) I stretched forth my 
 hands (the attitude of gracious invitation) 
 
 to a people disobedient and gainsaying ' 
 
 (rebellious ; the same word i^b occurs 
 Deut. xxi. 18, wliere the LXX have {pt- 
 θιστής). Chap. XL 1-10.] Vet 
 
 God has not cast off His people, but there 
 is a remnant according to the election of 
 grace (1 — G), — the rest being hardened 
 (7—10). L] Ί say then (a false 
 
 inference from ch. x. 19 — 21, — made in 
 order to be refuted), did (μή,it cannot surely 
 be, that) God cast off His people (as would 
 almost appear from the severe words just ad- 
 duced) .' Be it not so : for I also am an Is- 
 raelite (tK- γΕί'ους- Ίσρ., Phil. iii. 5), of the 
 seed of Abraham (mentioned probably for 
 solemnity's sake, as bringing to mind all the 
 promises made to Abr.), of the tribe of Ben- 
 jamin' (so Phil. iii. 5). — There is some ques- 
 tion with what intent the Ap. here brings 
 forward himself. Three ways are open to 
 us : either (1) it is as a case in point, as an 
 example of an Israelite who has not been 
 rejected but is still one of God's people : 
 so almost all the Comm. — but this is hardly 
 probable, — for in this case (a) he would 
 not surely bring one only example to prove 
 his point, when thousands might have been 
 alleged, — (/3) it would be hardly consistent 
 with the humble mind of Paul to put him- 
 self alone in such a place, — and (γ) μη 
 ytvoiTo does not go simply to deny a hypo- 
 thetical fact, but applies to some depre- 
 cated consequence of that which is hypo- 
 thetically put: — or (2) as De Wette, al., he 
 implies, ' How can I say such a thing, who 
 am myself an Israelite, &c. ? ' ' Does not 
 my very nationaUty furnish a security 
 against my entertaining such an idea .■" — 
 or (3) which I believe to be the right view, 
 but which I have found only in the recent 
 commentary of Mr. Ewbank, — as implying 
 that if such a hypothesis were to be con-
 
 XL 1—4. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 S99 
 
 αττωσατο t = ι Pet. i. 20. 
 
 ch. Viii. 29 
 (Acts xxvi.5. 
 
 σπίρματος Αβραάμ, (^υλης Bevta^tiV. " ουκ 
 
 ο θίος τον λαοί' αυτού Όν ττροεγνω. η ουκ οιόατε " tv aVet.lil."/^ 
 ηλια τι Λίγει η •γραφιι , ως evTuyyjavii τω utu) κατά α see έτη, Luke 
 του Ισοα7)λ, Κύρ(ε, τους ττροφίίτας σου απίκτείναν, τα Tsing^.^cii.ix. 
 * θυσιαστήρια σου ^ κατίσκαφαν, κα-γω ^ υπίΧίΐψβην μονός, "'^'h/viiar* ' 
 
 >ay - ^a» ' 4.'ΛΛ^ 'Λ' ι- 34. Heb. vii. 
 
 και ζ,ητουσιν την χρυγΓίν μου. αλΑα τι Λέγει αυτω 25., g'^Macc. 
 
 ο "χρηματισμός , 
 
 χ MKtt. ν. L>3 al. 3 Kixgs xix. ΙΟ 
 
 ΚατελιτΓον ίμαυτω ίπτακις^^ιΧιους 
 
 2 .Mace. ΐτ. 
 
 sa.t 
 
 y Acts XT. 16 only, from Amos ix 11. ζ here only. Gen• 
 
 xxx.3()al. a .= M.ilt. ii. 20. Exod. is•. 19. b here only. Prov. xxxi. 1. 2Macc. iL4. 
 
 c Mark xiv. 52 al. 3 Kikgs xix. 18. 
 
 with DEFGJ &c : txt ABC &c. — 2. rec add at end Xtywi' {mpplemeniary insertion), 
 with J &c a few vss Thl Oec : om ABCDEFG 23. 47- GV- 73. 178 al it ν copt sah arm 
 ar-pol Eus Chr Thdrt Dam Ruf Ambr lat-ff. — 3. rec και τα θυσ. with DEJ &c syrr al 
 Chr-' Thdrt al : txt ABCFG 17. 30. 47. 71. 80. 1 15-1« al it ν copt sah Eus Chr, (and Mtt's 
 mSj) lat-ft'. — for καησκαφαν, κατίστυίψαν 178. — for κηγω, και 76- Ho Thl-ms : iyw 
 copt sah arm. — rec ζΐ]τονσι, with C &c.— aft μυν, add Καβίΐν αυτήν 30 Eus. — 4. κατ- 
 ελίίΤΓον ACFGJ &c (not D : (BE) ?). — aft εμαυτω, ins ^/;ffiv arm. — for τη, τω G. — 
 
 ceded, it would exclude from God's king- 
 dom the writer himself, as an Israelite. 
 This seems better to agree with μή -γίΐΌΐτο, 
 as deprecating the corisequence of such an 
 assertion. — But a question even more im- 
 portant arises, not unconnected with that 
 just discussed : viz. u-ho are 6 λαός αντοΰ ? 
 In order for the sentence και γάρ ίγώ κ.τ.λ. 
 to bear the meaning just assigned to it, it is 
 obvious that ό λαός αντ. must mean the 
 people of God nationally considered. If 
 Paul deprecated such a proposition as the 
 rejection of God's people, because he him- 
 self would thus be as an Israelite cut off 
 from God's favour, the rejection assumed 
 in the hj'pothesis must be a national rejec- 
 tion. It is against this that he puts in his 
 strong protest. It is this which he dis- 
 proves by a cogent historical parallel from 
 Scripture, shewing that there is a remnant 
 και tv τψ %'vv καιρφ according to the elec- 
 tion of grace : and not only so, but that 
 that part of Israel (considered as having 
 continuity of national existence) which is 
 for a time hardened, shall ultimately come 
 in, and so all Israel (nationally considered 
 again, Israel as a nation) shall be saved. 
 Thus the covenant of God with Israel, 
 having been national, shall ultimately be 
 fulfilled to them as a nation : not by the 
 gathering in merely of individual Jews, or 
 of all the Jews individually, into the Chris- 
 tian church, — but by the -national restora- 
 tion of the Jews, not in unbelief, but as a 
 Christian believing nation, to all that can, 
 under the gospel, represent their ancient 
 pre-eminence, and to the fulness of those 
 promises which have never yet in their 
 plain sensAieen accomplished to them. I 
 have entered on this matter here, beciiuse a 
 clear understanding of it underlies all intel- 
 
 ligent appreciation of the argument of the 
 chapter. Those who hold 7io national 
 restoration of the Jews to pre-eminence, 
 must necessarily confound the kv τψ νυν 
 καιρφ remnant according to the election of 
 grace, with the o'l λοιποί, who nationally 
 shall be grafted in again. See this more 
 fuUy illustrated where that image occurs, 
 ver. 17 ff. 2.] 'God did not cast 
 
 off Ms people which, he foreknew {προ- 
 εγνω as in reft'.: — ^ which, in His own 
 eternal decree before the world, He se- 
 lected as the chosen nation, to be His own, 
 the depositary of His law, the vehicle of 
 the theocracy, from its first revelation to 
 Moses, to its completion in Christ's future 
 kingdom.' It is plain that this must here 
 be the sense, and that the words must not 
 be limited, with Orig., Aug., Chrys., Calv., 
 al., to the elect Christian people of God 
 from among the Jews, with Paul as their 
 representative : see on ver. 1 . On this 
 expl., the question of ver. 1 would be self- 
 contradictory, and this negation a truism. 
 It would be inconceivable, that God should 
 cast off His elect). — Or (see ch. ix. 21 al. : 
 — introduces a new objection to the matter 
 impugned) know ye not what the Scrip- 
 ture saith in (the history of) Ellas (bet- 
 ter thus than ' with regard to,' as Luth., 
 Erasm., Calv., Beza, al. Tholuck gives 
 examples : from Pausan, viii. 37- 3, — ίστιν 
 'tv'Roaq ορκψ τάΐπη, — i. e. in that part of 
 the Ihad (ζ. 278), where Hera swears by the 
 Titans : from Thucyd. i. 9, — και iv του 
 σκήπτρου Ιίμα Ty παραδόσίΐ ί'ίρηκεν αίιτόν 
 ΤΓολλί^σι iryToifft ic. "Apyfi πο^η' ήνάσσειν, 
 i. e. in that part of the Ihad (^3. 108) where 
 the transmission of the sceptre is related) ? 
 how (depends on ουκ o'lSart) he pleads 
 with (see refF. — and note, ch. viii. 20) God
 
 400 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 XL 
 
 λο 
 
 ■yy]V ναρίΓος• 
 
 reft " ανορας, οιηνες ουκ ίκαμψαν -γονυ τ^ Ϊ5ααλ. ούτως 
 
 juiig ϋ 13. ουι^ και εί' τω ΐ'υυ καιρώ ΛΒίμμα κατ ^ ίκ 
 
 jii. 7 (alcx.i• / 6 ' "^^ ' i ' •' 'ί^ ... 
 
 f here only. 4 King.s xix. 4. gch. ix. 11 reff. h gen. subject., Luke iv. 22. i = ch. vii. 17. 
 
 5. ovv om 54-5. 109 Syr arm.— λιμμα ACD'G ( (EK?) not D^FJ) : λήμμα Β al. — for 
 χαοίΓος, δικαιοσνί'ης feth. — for yeyovtv, salvo; J'aci a sunt ν e g Ruf Aug (somet omits 
 salvce) Ambr Ambrst Pelag Sedul Bed. — 6. for δι, yap 87• — for ytvfrai, ίση C^ (appy) 
 54 syrr al Chr Thdrt: est d e ν lat-ff: erit g.— from (i Si to «n ίστιν tpyov, oin 
 ACDEFG 47 (but ha.s it in marg) it ν copt sah arm aeth (but before, has n yap (ζ tnyiov 
 for (πει) Dam lat-ft': ins (with some varr, see below) BJ nearly all mss syrr arr slav Chr 
 Thdrt ('both, in text: they do not expl it in comm ; but that does not prove its omn :' 
 Tisch) Chr in Mtt's mSj om ti St . . . . ουκ tar. χάρις (?) Thl Oec (see notes). — rec bef 
 χάρις (3rd), ins ίση, but om Β (C^ [appy] al vd e syrr al Chr Thdrt lat-ff read ίση ν before 
 
 against Israel,' &o. — The citation is a 
 free one from the LXX. The clauses τους 
 TTpoip., and τα θνσιαστ. are inverted, and 
 κάγώ ΰπίλίίφθ. μόΐ'ος is put for και νπο- 
 Χίλίίρμαι ίγώ μονώτατος. — The altars, 
 as De W. observes, were those on the 
 high places, dedicated to God. 
 4. ] ' But what saith tlie divine response 
 to him (χρηματισμός, see reff. and reff. to 
 the verb,' Matt. ii. 12) ? I have left to 
 myself (here the A p. corrects a mistake of 
 the LXX, who have for κατελιπον — κατα- 
 λ{(ψ?ις, — in the Complut. ed. καταΧύ-φω. 
 He has added to the Heb. 'msi'tti'n, — ' / 
 have left,' ' A-ept as a remainder,' — Ιμαυτω, 
 a simple and obvious filling up of the sense) 
 seven thousand men, who (the sense of the 
 saying, as far as regards the present pur- 
 pose, viz. to shew that all these were faith- 
 ful men ,• in the original text and LXX, it 
 is implied that these were all the faithful 
 men, — ίπτά χιλιάδας ανδρών, ττάιτα yo- 
 νατα a ουκ ώκλασαν yovv τψ Β. κ. τταν 
 στόμα ο ου προςίκννησίν αντψ. But this 
 was not necessary to be brought out here) 
 never bowed knee to Baal.' — " Here the 
 LXX, according to the present text, have 
 τψ, not ry Βίίηλ : but elsewhere (see reff.) 
 they write the fem. : and probably the Ap. 
 read it so in his copy." Fritz. According 
 to this Comm., they wrote the fem., taking 
 B. for a female deity ; according to Beyer, 
 Addit. ad Seld. de diis Syr., Wetst., Koppe, 
 Olsh., Meyer, — because B. was an androgy- 
 nous deity ; — according to Gesenius, in Ro- 
 senmiiller, Rep. i. 39, to designate feeble- 
 ness, comp. the Rabbinical ninibi», ' ftilse 
 gods,' and other analogous expressions in 
 Tholuck. " The regarding τι) Β. as put for 
 rfi τιιϊι Β., scil. (ϊκόνι or ητήΧ^. as Erasm., 
 Beza, Grot., Estius, al., and Bretsohneider, 
 is perfectly arbitrary." De Wette. InTobit 
 i. 5, we have, ττασαι ai φνΧα'ι a'l συναπο- 
 στάσαι ίβυον ry Β. Ty δαμάΧίΐ, — where 
 the golden calves of the ten tribes seem to 
 be identified with Baal. 5.] ' Thus 
 
 then (analogical inference from the example 
 
 just cited) in the present time also (or, 
 even in the present time, scil. of Israel's 
 national rejection) there has remained a 
 remnant (a part has remained faithful, 
 which thus has become & Χίϊμμα) according 
 to (in virtue of, — in pursance of) the elec- 
 tion (selection, choice of a few out of many) 
 of grace' (made not for their desert, nor 
 their foreseen congruity, but of God's free 
 unmerited favour). 6.] ' And let 
 
 us remember, when we say an election 
 of grace, how much those words imply : 
 viz. nothing short of the entire exclusion 
 of all human work from the question. Let 
 these two terms be regarded as, and kept, 
 distinct from one another, and do not let 
 us attempt to mix them and so destroy the 
 meaning of eac^.' So that the meaning of 
 the verse is to clear up and remove all doubt 
 concerning the meaning of ' election of 
 grace,' — and to profess on the part of the 
 Ap. perfect readiness to accept his own 
 words in their full sense, and to abide by 
 them. — This casts some light on the ques- 
 tion of the genuineness of the bracketed 
 clause (see authorities in var. readd.). The 
 object being precision, it is much more 
 probable that the Ap. should have written 
 both clauses in their present formal paral- 
 lelism, and that the second should have 
 been early omitted from its seeming super- 
 fluity, than that it should have been in- 
 serted from the margin. Besides which, 
 as Fritz, has remarked, the words do not 
 correspond sufficiently with those of the 
 first clause to warrant the supposition of 
 their having been constructed to tally with 
 it : we have for χάριτι in the first, ίξ 
 Ipyiov in the second, — for yivtrai χάρις, 
 ίση")' tpyov; — and the plur. tpya would 
 probably have been retained in the infer- 
 ence of clause 2. — ' But (directing attention 
 to the consequence of the admission, ίκλ. 
 χάριτος) if by grace (the selection has 
 been made), it is no longer (wten we have 
 conceded that, we have excluded its being) 
 of (arising out of, as its source) works :
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 401 
 
 ' ουκ en -γίνεται γ^άρις' [ίί δί εξ έργων, ' ουκ έη γαρις, kcb.iu. ο. - 
 εττει το ερ-γον ^ ουκ ϊτι εστίν ε|θγον.] ^ ^ τι οΰν ', ό ' έττι- ' «πηΛί 32. 
 ϊ,^Ίτει Ισραήλ, "' τοΰτο ουκ " επετυγεν, η δε ° εκλογή „'Αίί"ϊχ.\^υ'' 
 " εττετυ^ευ" οι οε λοίττοί '' εττωρωθησαν, καθώς γεγραττταί " "^^"','^• 
 ' Εοωκεν αυτοις ο θεός '' πνεύμα '^ κατανυζεως, οφθαλμούς prol''xu.'2r. 
 
 S " ^ iD\ / >f 3"^'' '' " Ο ch. ix. 11 reff. 
 
 του μ-η ρλεπειν, και ojto του μη ακουειν, εως της ^.^"^^""'J• 
 
 q =ch. viii. 1Γι bis. 1 Cor. iv. 21. 2 Cor. iv. 
 r here only. 1. c. See Sir. xx. 21. Acts ii. 37. 
 
 viii. 17. John xii 40. 2 Cur. iii. 14 only. Job xvii. 7. 
 1Λ. Gal. vi. 1. Eph.i. 17hI. Isa. xxix. 10. 
 s Dkut. xxix.4(alex.;. con.str., Luke xsii. 6. 1 Cor. ix. 6 al. 
 
 for yii'frai).— for ipyov at end, χαοις {by mistake ?) Β (var all). — 7. ο cm 80. — ίττίζητίΐ 
 FG 73 al it ν Syr arr lat-ff. — rec for τοντο, τοντου {grmnrnatieal corrri), with Β (e sil) 
 &c Thdor-mops Thdrt al : t.xt ACDEFGJ 1. 17. 37-9. 47-8. 72-3-7- 80-7-9• 91. 109-13- 
 77-79 Chr (Mtt's mss and elsWj) Oec-ms. — η ct (κλ. (πιτνχίν cm 238 : add τοντο sah 
 ar. — £π£ρω()/;σαν (sic) C : ίπηοωθησαν (JG- : eacacati sunt it \ lat-ff. — 8. ij/xf ρας om 74. 
 
 for {in that case) grace no longer becomes 
 (i. e. becomes no longer — loses its efficacy 
 and character as) grace (the freedom and 
 ' proprio motu' character, absolutely neces- 
 sary to the idea of grace, are lost, the act 
 having been prompted from without) : — 
 but if of (arising out of, as the cause and 
 source of the selection) works, no longer 
 is it (the act of selection) grace ; for (in 
 that case) work no longer is work' (the 
 essence of work, in our present argument, 
 being ' thai ivhich earns reward,^ and the 
 reward being, as supposed, the election to 
 be of the remnant, — if so earned, there can 
 be no admi.xture of divine favour in the 
 matter; it must be all earned, or none: 
 none conferred by free grace, or all). 
 These cautions of the Ap. are decisive 
 against all attempts at compromise between 
 the two great antagonist hypotheses, of sal- 
 vation by God's free grace, and salvation 
 by man's meritorious works. The two 
 cannot be combined vvithout desti'oying the 
 plain meaning of words. — If now the Ap.'s 
 object in this ver. be to guard carefully the 
 doctrine of election by free grace from any 
 attempt at an admi.xture of man"s work, 
 tchy is he an.^ious to do thisjwi'i now? I 
 conceive, because he is immediately about 
 to enter on a course of exposition of the 
 divine dealings, in which, more than ever 
 before, he rests all upon God's sovereign 
 purpose, while at the same time he shews 
 that purpose, though apparently severe, to 
 be one, 07i the whole, of grace and love. 
 7.] ' What then (what therefore 
 must be our conclusion from what has been 
 stated ? We have seen that God hath not 
 cast off His own chosen nation, but that 
 even now there is a remnant. This being 
 so, what aspect do matters present ? This 
 he asks to bring out an answer which may 
 set in view the ol λοιττοί) ■? that which 
 Israel is in search of (viz. ΐΗκαωσννη, see 
 ch. ix. 31 ; x. 1 if.), this it (as a nation) 
 Vol. II. 
 
 has not found (on ίττιτυγχάνω w. an ace, 
 see MatthiiE, Gr. Gr. § 303, obs.), but the 
 election (the abstract, because Israel has 
 been spoken of in the abstract, and to keep 
 out of view for the present the mere indi- 
 vidual cases of converted Jews in the idea 
 of an elected remnant) has found : 
 8.] but the rest were hardened (not 
 'blinded;' see note on Eph. iv. 18: — 
 σκλ;}ροΓ6ρα»' ι) απιστία την KaoSiav αυ- 
 τών άπίίύ-γάσοΓο. Theodoret. It is pas- 
 sive, and implies God as the agent. This 
 for the sake of the context, (!^wkh> αΰτυΐς ό 
 θίός κ.τ.λ., not necessarily for the meaning 
 of the word itself, which might indicate ' be- 
 came hard,' but certainly does not here), — 
 as it is written (if we are to regard these 
 passages as merely analogous instances of 
 the divine dealings, we must remember 
 that the perspective of prophecy, in stating 
 such cases, embraces all analogous ones, the 
 divine dealings being self-consistent, — and 
 especially that great one, in which the 
 words are most prominently fulfilled), — 
 God hath given to them (LXX and Heb., 
 ττεπότικίν υμάς) the spirit (see reff.) of 
 torpor (there is at the end of Fritzsche's 
 comm. on this chapter an elaborate excursus 
 on κατάινξις, in which he has thoroughly 
 investigated its derivation and meaning. He 
 comes to the conclusion that it is derived 
 from καταννσσω, ' compungo,' and might 
 signify any excitement of mind, pity, sadness, 
 &c., — but in the few places where it occurs, 
 it does import stupor or numbness .• — so Ps. 
 Ix. (lix.) 3, ίποΓίσας ημάς oh'nv κατανν- 
 ξίως,— which Hammond exj)lains to mean 
 the stupifying wine giveii to them that were 
 to be put to death. Hamm. also cites from 
 Marcus Eremita, vovlha. φυχ., p. 948, a 
 passage where he describes ττόϊΌν της 
 κητανύζίως as the consequence of cho- 
 ■π-οσίαι. Tholuck compares the similar 
 meanings of ' frappe,' struck, bctvoffetl), — 
 eyes that should not see (such eyes that 
 D D
 
 402 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 XI. 
 
 t Acts XX. 26. 
 
 :; Cor. iii. 14 
 
 only. I. c. ^ 
 
 nPsA.lxviii 2•.;. 7j-j7a 
 
 και 
 
 tig 
 
 εις ανταττοοομα αυτοις, 
 
 upav 
 10 t 
 
 και εις 
 σκοτισθη- 
 
 σημεξ)ον ^ ημίρας. και Δαυίδ λέγει " Τίνηθητω η " τρά- 
 ,„ αυτών εις ττανιοα '^"• •="' ' 
 
 y = 1 Cor. χ. ^ . ' 
 
 21 1)11. ζ ' ^ Λ ' 
 
 wconstr.,MHtt. OKaVCaAOV Kttl 
 
 xxi. 42(rrom ''.ΑΛ ^ >- s - ^ 0\ > ' ^ 
 
 Ps. cxvii. 22). T-tuffav ot οφσαλμοί αυτόθι» του μη ρΛεπειν, fcat τον 
 xLukexxi.35. vioTov avTwv "^ δίοπα^τος σνγκαμφον. ^^ ' Λέγω ου»', μη 
 
 1 Tim. iii. 7. r ,, '' ε ' . li 
 
 vi.il. 2Tim. " *' 
 
 ii.yiionly. . ι - f/-i' V » \ 1 
 
 y berTonYy! "^' ' ποροπτωματι η σωτήρια τοις εθνεσιν, εις το τταρα^ΐ}- 
 
 — Ps. xxxiv. ■» _ if 12 
 
 8. Hos. V. 2. λωσαι αυτούς. 
 
 ζ -=Matt. xvi. 
 23. ch. ix. 33 al. 
 iv. 18 only. I.e. 
 f(=)Jamrs ii. In. iii. 2(bi.s). 
 
 λε- 
 άλλα 
 
 lich. iii. 4reir. 
 m — Heb. xi. 26. 
 
 ίνα ^ πεσωσιν ', " μη yivoiTo' 
 )τηξί 
 ει δε το παράπτωμα αυτών 
 
 a Luke xir. 12 only. Ps. cxxvii. 4. 2 Cliron. xxxii. 25. b = 
 
 c Acts ii. 2.'). X.2 al. d here only. 1. c. 4 Kings iv. 35. 
 
 ! Pet. i. 10 only. I Kings iv. 2, 3. g =- Heb. iv. 11. 
 
 i ch. iv. 25 reff. 
 
 k Acts iii. 19. vii. 19. ch. i. 11, 2U al. 
 
 τω αυτών 
 
 πΧουτος 
 
 Prov 
 
 Ich. X. ly reff. 
 
 120. — 9. καθαπερ και δα. λ. C. — γ(νηθ. αντοις copt sah seth. — aft πηγ., ins εΐ'ωτηον 
 αυτών 4 v-sixt v-ms Syr ar-erp seth Thdrt Pelag (not Ruf). — 10. σνγκηφον 44-8. 72-7• 
 114 to 16 al. — 11. now λέγω, μη δια τοντυ arm. — bef επτ. ins sic e ν Ruf (expr) 
 Pelag Atnbrst al-latt. — iva μη πεσ. ΤΛ: ττταισωσι 55. — αυτοις 48. — 12. om Α. — κόσμου 
 
 they might not see : in the Heb. and LXX 
 the negative is joined with the verb, και 
 οϋκ f^wKiv ΚΓίκος ύ θ. νμών κ.τ.λ.) and 
 ears that should not hear unto this pre- 
 sent day.' — These last words are not, as 
 Beza, E. V., Griesb., Knapp, to be sepa- 
 rated from the citation, and joined to 
 ίπωρώθησαν : they belong to the words in 
 Deut., and are adduced by St. Paul as ap- 
 plying to the day then present, as they 
 did to the day when Moses spoke them : 
 see 2 Cor. iii. 15. 9.] 'And David 
 
 Baith, Let their table be for a snare and 
 for a net {θήρα more usually ' a hunt,' or 
 the act of taking or catching, — but here 
 and in reff. a net, the instrument of cap- 
 ture. It is not in the Heb. nor in the 
 LXX, and is perhaps inserted by the Ap. 
 to give emphasis by the accumulation of 
 synonymes), and for a stumbling-block 
 and recompense to them' (the LXX have 
 ε!ς παγίδα κ. ιίς άιταττόδοσιν κ. εις σκάν- 
 δαλον. The Heb. of εις άνταττόδοσιν, as 
 at present pointed, is DOibTpb, 'to the se- 
 cure.' It has been supposed that the LXX 
 pointed D'p^'jffib or D'pibilJb, ' for retribu- 
 tions.' See Ps. xci. 8 : but qu. .'). 
 10.] 'Let their eyes he darkened that 
 they may not see, and their hack how 
 thou down always.' (" Instead of bend- 
 ing the back, the Heb. text speaks of 
 making the loins to tremble, lypn cn\:np. 
 This elsewhere is a sign of great terror, 
 Nah. ii. 11. Dan. v. 6: and the darken- 
 ing of the eyes betokens in the Psalm 
 a weakened, humbled, servile condition, 
 just as in Deut. xxviii. 05 — G7. It is plain 
 from διατϊαντός, that we must not suppose 
 the infirmities of age to be meant. The 
 Ap. might well apply such a description 
 to the servile condition of the bondmen of 
 
 the law, see Gal. iv. 24." Tholuck.) 
 11 — 24.] Vet this exclusion and hardening 
 has not been for their destruction, but for 
 mercy to the Gentiles, and eventually for 
 their own restoration. 11.] 'I say 
 
 then (see on ver. 1), Did they (who .' see 
 below) stumble in order that they should 
 fall (not ' sic, ut caderent,' — as Vuig., — so 
 Orig., Chrys., Grot., al., denoting the result 
 merely : neither the grammar nor the con- 
 text will bear this : the Ap. is arguing 
 respecting God's intent in the παράπτωμα 
 of the Jewish nation. He here calls it by 
 this mild name, to set forth that it is not 
 final. The subject of ίπταισαν is the 
 αυτοί of the following Λ'erses, i.e. the/e?fi, 
 as a people : not the unbelieving indivi- 
 duals, who are characterized as "π-ίσόντες, 
 ver. 22. He regards the λοιποί as the re- 
 presentatives of the Jewish people, who 
 have nationally stumbled, but not in order 
 to their final fall, seeing that God has a 
 gracious purpose towards the Gentiles even 
 in this πταίσμα of theirs, and intends to 
 raise them nationally from it in the end. 
 This distinction, between the πταίσαντες, 
 the whole nation as a nation, and the 
 πεσόντες, the unbelieving branches who 
 have been cut off, is most important to the 
 right understanding of the chapter, and to 
 the keeping in mind the separate ideas, of 
 the restoration of individuals here and 
 there throughout time, and the restoratioii 
 of Israel at the end. — The stress is on 
 •π•€σωσιΐ', and it is the fall which is denied : 
 not on ϊνα π'εσωσιν, so that the purpose 
 merely should be denied, and the fall ad- 
 mitted) Τ — God forbid : but (the truer 
 account of the matter is) by their lapse 
 (not fall, as E. V.) salvation (has come) 
 to the Gentiles, in order to stir them 
 (Israel) up to jealousy.' — Two gracious
 
 9—13. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ΡΩΜΑΤΟΥΣ. 
 
 403 
 
 κόσμου και το '^ ηττημα αυτών ""πλούτος ΐΘνών, ττοσω " o.^ly "} J. 
 
 -\Λ ^ Ο \ f '".13'" *Λ' " xxxi Η. 
 
 μαΑΑον το πλήρωμα αυτών, υμιν yap Λίγα) τοις <> = '"^reoniy. 
 
 23 niites. Jufiu i. 16. 
 
 ηλουτ. 100.— αντωϊ' (1) to αντων (3) om 48.— 13. for γαρ, δε ΑΒ 10. 31. 47. 73. 80 
 copt syi-r (slav .') ThJrt-mSi Dam : ovv C : om ieth : t.\t DEFGJ most rass it ν arr goth 
 
 purposes of God are here stated, the latter 
 wrought out through the former. By this 
 stumble of the Jews out of their national 
 place in God's favour, and the admission 
 of the Gentiles into it, tlio very people thus 
 e.xcluded are to be stirred up to set them- 
 selves in the end effectually to regain, as a 
 nation, that pre-eminence from which they 
 are now degraded. 12.] Then the 
 
 Ap. argues on this, as Meyer well says, ' a 
 felici effectu causae pejoris ad feliciorem 
 affectum causae melioris :' — ' But ('jjosito, 
 that' — as in last ver., — taking for granted 
 the historical fact, that the stumble of tiie 
 Jews has been coincident with the admis- 
 sion of the Gentiles) if their lapse is the 
 world's wealth (the occasion of that wealth, 
 — the wealth itself being the participation in 
 the unsearchable riches of Christ), and (this 
 latter clause parallel to and explanatory of 
 the less plainly expressed one before it) 
 their loss, the wealth of the Gentiles, 
 how much more (shall) their replenish- 
 ment (be all this)?' — On ηττημα and 
 •πλήρωμα much question has been raised. 
 I have taken both as answering strictly to 
 the comparison here before the Ap.'s mind, 
 viz. that of impoverishing and enriching, — 
 and the genitives αυτών as subjective .• q. d. 
 ^ if their impoverishment be the wealth of 
 the Gentiles, how much more shall their 
 enrichment he ! ' — But several other inter- 
 pretations are possible. (1) ήττημα may 
 mean as in 1 Cor. vi. 7. degradation, and 
 ττΧήρωμα would then he fullness, re-exalta- 
 tion to the former measure of favour, — or 
 perhaps, as where Herod, iii. 22 says όγδώ- 
 κοντα tTta ζόης πλήρωμα, ' their comple- 
 tion' ' their higliest degree of favour.' (2) 
 If we regard the meaning of πλήρωμα in 
 ver. 25, we shall be tempted here to render 
 it, ^fitll number,' and similarly ητηιμα, 
 ' small number.' So the majority of comm. : 
 Chrys., Theodoret, Erasmus, Beza, Bucer, 
 Grot., Bengel, Reiche, De W. (but only as 
 regards πΧήρ. ; — he renders ηττ. with Lu- 
 ther, ©d)abe) and Olsh. (see below). Thus 
 the argument will stand : ' If their unbelief 
 (i. e. of one part of them) is the world's 
 wealth, and their small number (i. e. of 
 believers, the other part of them), the 
 wealth of the Gentiles, how much more 
 their full (restored) immber ! ' i.e. as Olsh. 
 exjjlaiiis it, ' If so few Jews can do so much 
 for the Gentile world, what will not the 
 whole number do .•" But thus we shall lose 
 
 D 
 
 the ' a minori ad majus ' argument — ' if 
 their siti has done so much, how much more 
 their conversion ? ' unless indeed it be said 
 that TO ϊ/ττημα implies a national παρά- 
 πτωμα. Besides, it can hardly be shewn 
 that ϊ]Γτημα will bear this meaning of ' a 
 small number.' (3) Tholuck, from whom 
 mostly this note is taken, notices at length 
 the view of Olsh,, after Origen, that the 
 idea of a definite number of the elect is here 
 in the Ap.'s mind, — that the falhng off of 
 the Jews produces a deficiency in the num- 
 ber, which is filled up by the elect from the 
 Gentiles, as ver. 25 : understanding by 
 πλήρωμα both there and here, if I take 
 his meaning aright, the number required to 
 fill up the roll of the elect, whether of Jews, 
 as here, or Gentiles, as there. Tholuck, 
 while he concedes the legitimacy of the idea 
 of a πλήρωμα των ζωσομίνων, maintains, 
 and rightly, that in this section no such idea 
 is brought foi'ward : and that it would not 
 have been intended, without some m,ore 
 definite expression of it than we now find. — 
 I have thought it best, as above, considering 
 the very various meanings and difficulty of 
 the word πλήρωμα, to keep here to that 
 which seems to be indicated by the imme- 
 diate context, which is, besides, the pri- 
 mitive meaning of the word. — It must be 
 noticed, that the fact, of Israel being the 
 chosen people of God, lies at the root of 
 all this argument. Israel is the nation, the 
 covenant people, — the vehicle of God's 
 gracious purposes to mankind. Israel, 
 nationally, is deposed from present favour. 
 That very deposition is, however, accom- 
 panied by an outpouring of God's riches of 
 mercy on the Gentiles ; not as rivals to 
 Israel, but still considered as further from 
 God, formally and nationally , than Israel. 
 If then the disgrace of Israel has had such 
 a blessed accompaniment, how much more 
 blessed a one shall Israel's honour bring 
 with it, when His own people shall once 
 more be set as a praise in the midst of the 
 earth, and the glory of the nations. 
 13.] ' Why, in an argument concerning the 
 Jews, dwell so much on the reference to the 
 Gentiles discernible in the divine ceconomy 
 regarding Israel ? Why make it appear as 
 if the treatment of God's chosen ])eople 
 were regulated not by a consideration of 
 them, but of the less favoured Gentiles ? ' 
 The present verse gives an answer to this 
 question. — ' For (apology for the foregoing 
 D 2
 
 404 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 XI. 
 
 ίϋνεσιν. ^ £</) οσυν μίν υνν ειμί εγω 
 
 , 4Λ only, 
 q Acts i. 17. 
 
 XX. ΰ4 λ\. 
 r "" 2 Cor. iii. 
 
 111. 
 s Acts xxvii. 
 
 l-> rcff. 
 t-Gen. 
 
 sxxvii. '27. 
 η Act.s xxvii. 
 
 22 only t- 
 V cli. V. 11. 
 
 2 Cor V. 18, 
 
 1>J only (Isa, 
 
 ix. .'i.) 2 Mace 
 xy Num. xv. 21 
 
 λϋ 
 
 παραϊ,ηλωσω 
 15 
 
 ίϋνων αποστο 
 
 1 
 
 την ^ Βιακονιαν μου " δοξάςω, " £ΐ πως 
 ^ου τ-ην ^ σάρκα και σώσω τινας £ζ αύτωΐ'. '" £ΐ γαο 
 " αποβολή αυτών ^ κπταλλαγτ) κόσμου, τις• η ^^ προς 
 λημψις, £1 jinj Cwr) εκ: νεκρών , ^" ει οε τ} απαρχΐ] ayia 
 
 ς, ABCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 Τ) .ef ακ- 
 τωκ Ε. 
 ABCD 
 FGJ 
 
 καΐ ΤΟ ^ φύραμα' και ει η ^ pita 
 
 where only t. Seech. 
 ζ Matt. iii. lu. xiii.C al. 
 
 ayia, και < 
 
 X ch. Tiii. 23 reff. y ch 
 
 i. 32 al. here «ic. only in Epp. 
 
 κλάδοι. 
 
 1 rcff. 
 
 Chr Thdrt Thl Oec lat-fF. — rec aft μ(ν oni ovp (see notes), with J most inss d- e ν syr al 
 Chr Thdrt Thl Oec Aug al (DEFG 80. ί>2 al d» g al om μιν also) : t.xt ABC copt. — tym 
 om A 7:5. 80. 108-1(5-18 arm Thtirt-mSj : bef ειμί FG vss Cyr lat-ff.— ίοξησω FG 46. lOi) 
 it V Thdrtj (elswj t.\t) lat-ff (not Aug). — 14. την σαιικ. μου DEFG: αντονς τη σαυκι 
 μου arm : /11ου om slav-ms : μυι slav-ms. — 15. τον κοημ. 178: κοσμώ FG {immdo out 
 mundi g). — πμολ»;ψις CFG (-/ίψις FG). — 16. for if, γαρ A Thdrtj : om C^ goth al. — 
 
 ver. :— if is be read, the sense will be much 
 the same — But [i. e. let it be understood, 
 that], &c.) I am speaking to you the Gen- 
 tiles. Inasmuch therefore (μέν ovv is 
 surely not to be rejected as yielding no 
 senge, — as De Wette and Tholuck, who 
 object to it as proceeding from those who 
 hold a new sentence to begin at ίφ' 'όσον, 
 and υμ'ιν . . . . Ιθνίσιν to refer to the fore- 
 going : — but the usage of μΙν ουνϊη 1 Cor. 
 vi. 4 seems strictly analogous to that in our 
 text, where no new sentence is begun in 
 any sense which may not be true here. — 
 ίφ' όσον, not ' as long as,' as Orig. and 
 Vulg.) as I am Apostle of the Gentiles, 
 I honour mine office (by striving for their 
 conversion and edification at all times,— by 
 introducing a reference to them and their 
 part in the divine counsels, even when 
 speaking of mine own people), if by any 
 means I may (regarding it as a real ser- 
 vice done on behalf of Israel, thus to 
 honour mine office by mentioning the 
 Gentiles, if this mention may) stir up to 
 jealousy mine own flesh (the Jews) and 
 may save some of them.' 15.] 
 
 ' For (a reason for my anxiety for the 
 salvation of Israel : not merely for the sake 
 of mine own kinsmen, but because their 
 recovery will bring about the blessed con- 
 summation of all believers. Vv. 13, 14 
 should not then be in a parenthesis) if the 
 rejection of them (not ' tfieir loss,' as 
 Luth. and Beng., by which the antithesis to 
 ττρόςλί/ρψις is weakened) he (the occasion 
 of) the reconciliation of the world (of the 
 Gentiles, viz. to God), what (' yualis,' ' of 
 what kind,' in its effect) (will be) their 
 reception, but (the occasion of) life from 
 the dead V — ζωή €κ νεκρ. may be variously 
 taken. (1) it may be metaphorical, as in 
 ch. vi. i;i, and may import, that so general 
 a conversion of the world would take place, 
 as would be like life from the dead. So, 
 more or less, Calv., Calov., Estius, Bengel, 
 
 Stuart, Hodge, al., and Theophyl., Phot., 
 who explain it of a joy hke that of the 
 resurrection. But against this interp. lies 
 the obj., that this is already involved in 
 KUTaWayi) κόσμ., and thus no new idea 
 would be brought out by the words, which 
 stand in the most emphatic position. — (2) 
 it may mean that ' life from the dead ' lile- 
 rally should follow on the restoration of 
 the Jewish people ; i. e. that the Resurrec- 
 tion, the great consummation, is bound up 
 with it. So Chrys., Orig. (" tunc eiiim erit 
 assumptio Israel, quando jam et mortui 
 vitam recipient, et mundus ex corruptibili 
 incorruptibilis fiet, et mortales immortali- 
 tate donabuntur "). Theodoret, Reiche, 
 Meyer, Fritzsche, Riickert ed. 2, Tholuck, 
 al. The objection to this view seems to be, 
 that the Ap. would hardly have used ζωή 
 ίκ Ί•€κ(ιών thus predicatively, if he had 
 meant by it a fixed and predetermined 
 event; — but that, standing as it does, it 
 must be qualitative, implying some further 
 blessed state of the reconciled world, over 
 and above the mere reconcihation. This 
 might well be designated ' life from the 
 dead,' and in it may be implied the glories 
 of the first resurrection, and deliverance 
 from the bondage of corruption, without 
 supposing the words ζωή ίκ νίκρών =: ή 
 άνάστασις των ηκ. — Stuart well com- 
 pares Ezek. xxxvii. 1 — 14, which was per- 
 haps before the mind of the Ap. : — but he 
 gives a mere ethical interpretation to it. 
 16 — 24.] Such a restoration 
 of Israel was to be expected from a consi- 
 deration of their desalination and history. 
 This is set forth in similitudes, that of the 
 root and branches being folloived out at 
 some length, — and their own position, as 
 engrafted Gentiles, brought to the mind of 
 the readers. — ' But (a further argument 
 for their restoration following on άλλα, 
 ver. 1 1 ) if the first fruit be holy, so also 
 the lump (not here the first fruit of the
 
 14—17. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 405 
 
 ^^ η δε τίνες των κλάδων ^ ΐίί,εκλάσΘησαν, συ δε *" ογριε'λαΓος ''ί^Λ^,^ΐ^ΐΓ 
 ων ΕνίΚίντξ>ισΟης εν αυτοις και ^ συηκοινωνος της ^ m'Z[i?c dYJrc'&c"^ 
 
 xvi. 1). e 1 Cor. ix. 23. Phil. i. 7. Rcv. i. i/oiily t! 
 
 fi (2ntl) om FG 70-1. 10!) allect 13 Clir (Mtt's mSj) garm. — άγια omarm. — 17. (ονσυγκ., 
 κοιί'ιυνος 87- — και aft της ριζ. om BC copt Daiu. — for της p. και τ. ττ. τ. «λ. tytpov, 
 
 βθΐιΐ, as Grot., Rosenm. [nor is φύραμα 
 the cake made by the priests out of the 
 first fruits which fell to them, Deut. xviii. 
 4, as Estius, Koppe, KoUner, Olsh., al.] ; 
 — but the portion of the kneaded lump of 
 dough [φύρω] , which was offered as a heave- 
 offering to the Lord, and so sanctified for 
 use the rest : see ref. where the same words 
 occur) ; — and if the root be holy, so also 
 the branches ' — -TIV/o are the άτταρχή and 
 the ρίζα 1 First of all, there is no impro- 
 priety in the two words applying to the 
 same thing. For though, as Olsh. remarks, 
 the branches being evolved from the root, 
 it rather answers to the φύραμα than to 
 the απαρχή, and, as Riickert, the first 
 fruit succeeds the lump in time, while the 
 root precedes the branches, — yet, as Thol. 
 replies, the άγιότης is the point of compa- 
 rison, and in άγιότί^ς the άττορχη precedes 
 and gives existence to the φύραμα. This 
 being so, (1) the απαρχή and ρίζα have 
 generally been taken to represent the 
 patriarchs ,• and I believe rightly (except 
 that perhaps it would be more strictly cor- 
 rect to say, Abraham himself). The aya- 
 •πητοι Cia τους πατίρας of ver. 2(5 places 
 this reference almost beyond doubt. Origen 
 explains the ρίζα to be our Lord. But He 
 is Himself a branch, by descent from 
 Abraham and David (Isa. xi. 1. jMatt. i. 1), 
 if genealogically considered ; and if mysti- 
 cally, the -whole tree (John xv. 1). De 
 Wette prefers to take as the first fruit and 
 root, the ideal theocracy founded on the 
 patriarchs, — the /?-7<e, faithful children of 
 the patriarchs, and as the branches, those 
 united by mere external relationship to 
 these others. This he does, because in the 
 cotnmon acceptation, the κλάδοι who are 
 cut oft" ought to be severed from their phy- 
 sical connexion with Abraham, &c., which 
 they are not. This objection I have en- 
 deavoured to answer below on ver. :23. 
 Meanwhile, De W.'s view appears less 
 simple than the ordinary one, which, as I 
 hope to shew, is borne out by the whole 
 passage. (2) Then, who are indicated by 
 the ψΰραμα and the κλάδοι .' Israel, con- 
 sidered as the people of God. The lump, 
 which has received its ύyι6της from the 
 άτταρχίι, =: Israel, beloved for the fathers' 
 sakes : the assemblage of branches, evolved 
 from Abraham, and partaking of his holi- 
 ness. But one thing must be especially 
 borne in mind. As Abraham himself had 
 
 an outer and an inner life, so have the 
 branches. They have an outer life, de- 
 rived from Abr. by physical descent. Of 
 this, no cutting off can deprive them. It 
 may be compared to the very organization 
 of the wOod itself, which subsists even after 
 its separation from the tree. But they 
 have, while they remain in the tree, an inner 
 life, nourished by the circulating sap, by 
 virtue of which they are constituted living 
 parts of the tree : see our Lord's parable 
 of the vine and the branches, John xv. I ff. 
 It is of this life, that their severance from 
 the tree deprives them : it is this life, which 
 they will re-acquire if grafted in again. — 
 See a very ingenious but artificial explana- 
 tion in Olsh., who agrees in the main with 
 De W. : — and the whole question admirably 
 discussed in Tholuck. — The ασιάτης then 
 here spoken of, consists in their dedication 
 to God as a people— m their being physi- 
 cally evolved from a holy root. This pecu- 
 liar ασιάτης (see 1 Cor. vii. 14, where the 
 children of one Christian parent are simi- 
 larly called ciyia) renders their restoratiou 
 to their own stock a matter, not of wonder 
 and difficulty, but of reasonable hope and 
 probability. — I may notice in passing, that 
 those expositors who do not hold a restora- 
 tion of the Jewish people to national pre- 
 eminence, find this passage exceedingly in 
 their way, if we may judge by their expla- 
 nations of this ά>ΊϋΓ?;ς•. Ε. g. Mr. Ewbank 
 remarks : ' Holy they are, inasmuch as there 
 is no decree against their restoration to their 
 place of life and fruitfulness.' Surely this 
 is a new meaning of ' holy :' the same would 
 be true of a Hottentot : in his case, too, 
 there is no decree against his reception into 
 a place (and in Mr. E.'s view, the restora- 
 tion of the Jew is nothing more) of Ufe and 
 fruitfulness in the Church of God. 
 17.] ' But (introduces a hypothesis involv- 
 ing a seeming inconsistency with the άyι6της 
 just mentioned) if some of the branches 
 (the Tivtc, as Thol. remarks, depreciates 
 the number, in order to check the Gentile 
 pride) were broken out (from the tree), 
 and thou (a Gentile believer) being a wild 
 olive (rtypifAfiioc, the tree, spoken of a 
 sprout or branch of it. Better so than, as 
 Fritz., Meyer, to make ayp. an adj., 'of 
 wild olive,' which can only be used of that 
 which is made out of the wood, as άγρι- 
 ίλαιος σκυτάλη. Thol.) wert grafted in 
 (Clem. Ale.x. Strom, vi. § 11!», enumerates
 
 40 G 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 XT. 
 
 f here only 
 Jdijo. ix 
 
 και της 
 
 i. lo 
 
 πιοτητος της ελαιας 
 κλάδων' ει δε 
 βαστάζεις, αλλ η pita σε. 
 ινα 
 
 18 
 
 κατακαυ-^ασαι 
 
 19 
 
 ίγενου, /tuj " κατακαυγω 
 ου συ την ρΙΖ^ν 
 
 • - τ h 'τ-• >- Λ / , 
 
 ερεις ουν 
 
 ABCD 
 FGJ 
 
 Εξεκλάσ(^ησον 
 
 ly των 
 
 (Ζ^Γΐ.χ.Ίϊ.) h 
 h = 81alt. XX. 
 12. John xvi. ^ . ν Η » - On ' - - 
 
 xviiiM'"^^ οι ^ κλάδοί, ϊνα εγώ ί-^κεντρισθώ. ' καλώς, r^ 
 
 Seech. XV 1. k ' ' b ' y Λ ' η '^ <^^ "" ' " 
 
 iMHit.xv. 7. απιστία εςεκΛασσησαν, συ οε τϊ? πίστει ίστηκας. 
 
 Johniv. 17al. ι ^ ' ' Ι' ' ^ 
 
 k = ch. iii. 3. Heb. iii 111. dat. ol cause, see ver. 30. 
 
 iytvov της τη. της ίλαιου D'FG d g Cyr-jerus alludg Iren Aug,. — 18. for κατακανχ., 
 σν καυχάσαι ϋΤΟ d g (Hil.') Ambrst (not Aug-oft al).— άλλα JBDi : txt ACD^FGJ.— 
 
 19. ft κλασθησαν FG g.—oi om ACD'FGJ 1. 1?. 35-7. 44-G to 8. 5?. 7-*-3-7. 80-•). 91. 
 lOGto 10-13-21. 219-38 aU Cbr Thdrt-ms Dam Oec: ins B(e sil)Di all Thdrt Thl.— 
 
 20. ίκλασθί/σαΐ' BD'FG: txt ACD'J mss (appy) Cbr Thdrt al.—vJ^tjXa ψρονα AB : 
 
 four different kinds of ΐγκίντρισμός, using 
 it as a general term for grafting and bud- 
 ding. The difficulty here is, tbat the Ap. 
 reverses the natural process. It is the 
 wilding, in practice, which is the stock, 
 and the graft inserted is a sprout of the 
 better tree. I believe that he does not 
 here regard what is the fact in nature : but 
 makes a supposition perfectly legitimate, — 
 that a wilding graft on being inserted into 
 a good true, thereby becomes partaker of 
 its qualities. No allusion can be intended 
 to a practice mentioned by Columella, de 
 Re Rust. V. 9, of inserting a wilding graft 
 into a good tree to increase the vigour and 
 growth of the tree : for this would com- 
 pletely stultify the illustration — the point of 
 which is, a benefit received by the wilding 
 from the tree, not one conferred by the 
 wilding on it) among them (i. e. among 
 the branches, — τοις κλάίοις: or perhaps 
 αντϋΐς may imply the remtiants of the 
 branches cut off. The renderings, ' in their 
 stead,' 'in locum,' as De W. after Chrys., 
 Theophyl., Beza, — and 'in their place,' 
 ' in loco,' Meyer, Olsh., are surely inad- 
 missible), andbecamest a fellow-partaker 
 (with tlie branches : or perhajis simply ' a 
 partaker,' arv not implying/e//o?/•* in par- 
 ticipation, but merely the participation 
 itself) of the root (the source of hfe) and 
 of the fatness (the development of that 
 life in its richness of blessing : no hendiadys, 
 ' the fatness of the root ') of the olive- 
 tree, 18.] do not boast against the 
 branches (which were cut off) : but if thou 
 boastest against them (know that . . ., or 
 let this consideration humble thee, that . . . 
 Simly 1 Cor. si. IG, £i £k τις δοκΰ (pi\o- 
 vttKog tlrai, ήμιΐς τοιαΰτην σννήθ(ΐαν ουκ 
 ίχομιν, κ.τ.λ. See Winer, § fIG. 7) it is 
 not thou that hearest the root, but the 
 root thee.' — The ground of humiliation is 
 — "Thou partakest of thy blessings solely 
 by union with God's spiritual church, which 
 church has for its root that father of the faith- 
 ful, from whom they are descended. Regard 
 them not therefore with scorn." This is 
 
 expanded further in ver. 20. 19.] 
 
 ' Thou wilt then {posito, that thou boast- 
 est, and defendest it) say, The branches 
 (the art. has probably been erased, to 
 square this sentence with vc-r. 17, where 
 TivtQ T. κλάδων only were broken oft'. 
 Perhaps, as !Matth;ii has remarked [Thol.] 
 ' Gentilis loquitur arrogantius,' using oi κΧ. 
 in his pride, to signify that the branches, 
 generically, have now become subject to 
 excision on his account. But I prefer 
 taking ot κ\. for the severed branches, ci 
 kX. ot ίκκΧασθίντίς^ — just as oi Ίουίαΐοι 
 in any particular place=:the Jews there 
 present, not the whole Jewish people) 
 were cut off, that I (emph.) might he 
 grafted in.' 20.] 'Well (the fact, 
 
 involving even the purpose, assumed in 
 'ίνα, is conceded. When Thol. denies 
 this, he forgets that the prompting cause 
 of their excision, their unbelief, is dis- 
 tinct from the divine purpose of their ex- 
 cision, the admission of the Gentiles, and 
 belongs to a different side of the subject) : 
 — through their unbelief (or perhaps, 
 ' through unbelief abstr. There is often 
 a difficulty in distinguishing the possessive 
 from the abstract (i. e. generic) article. — 
 Thol. observes that the instrumental use of 
 the dat., and that of Cia with the gen., differ 
 in this, that the latter expresses more the 
 immediate cause, the former the mediate 
 and more remote. The explanation of this 
 would be, that the dative only acquires its 
 instrumental use through another, more 
 proper attribute of the case, that of refer- 
 ence to, form or manner in ivhich : see 
 Bernhardy, Syntax, pp. 100 — 105) they 
 were cut off, but thou by thy faith 
 (see above : — ' through ' indicates better the 
 prompting cause of a defnite act,—' by' 
 the sustaining condition of a contimied 
 state. Thus we should always say that 
 we are justified through, not by, faith, — 
 but that we stand by, not through, faith) 
 Standest (in thy place in the tree, opp. to 
 ίίίκΧάσθησαν. Thol. prefers the sense in 
 ch. xiv. 4, and certainly tlie adoption of
 
 18—24. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 407 
 
 μη υϊ//»)λοφ^ίονεί, ολλα φόβου' n yap ο Θεός των iiTim. νϊ.ι/ 
 "'κατά φυσιν κλάδων ουκ " ίφίΐσατο, ° μί) πως ούοε σου ''''•^''•ΐ''- 
 
 φίΐσεται 
 ίπι μίν τους 
 
 22 >'^ 
 
 ids 
 
 qq 
 
 ουν *^ "^ξ)ηστοτΐ)τα και 
 
 / (1 ' / » \ 
 
 πεσουτας αποτομια, εττί 
 
 q 
 
 θ. 
 
 εου, tau επιμειντις ttj 
 
 23 
 
 κακεινοι 
 
 ίΎκεντρισθησονται 
 εγκεντρίσαι αυτούς 
 
 ΜζΧαιου 
 
 δε, εαν μη 
 
 δυνατός 
 
 24 
 
 m = ch. ix. 11 
 Ci.l.iii. 1•2. 
 εου 11 Acts XX. 2S(. 
 ch. ϊϋι.32. 
 
 Ρ χί»,σΓοτ»,ς ^..«^^^S 
 
 ' . » \ ( \ s ' xii 4, 6.) 
 
 χρηστοτηη εττεί και συ εκκο- ο- ι co 
 
 ατΓΟΓομιαν 
 
 δε σε 
 
 ει 
 και 
 
 επιμεινωσιν Ty 
 yaQ εστίν ο Θεός 
 yap συ εκ της "^ κατά φυσιν 
 
 απιστία 
 άλ' 
 
 V111. 
 
 ». ellips., 
 here only, 
 ih. ii. 4 refl". 
 q here only t- 
 IV Α(ϊ...άπο- 
 
 τομι 
 
 ' ^V 
 
 )υσιν 
 
 εα,εκοπης ' aypιεAaιoυ και πάρα 
 εις " καΧΧιεΧαιον, ποσω μαΧΧον ούτοι ^ οι 
 
 r = Art 
 
 ίθτ 
 
 ενεκεντρισϋης piu('."d'e'L'ih. 
 
 ν' , ΚιΙιιορ.Ι.Ϊ,Ι). 
 
 Kara ψυσιν qq^=eii• xiv.4 
 
 iii.43 (rec). See 1 Cor. vii. 24, 35. ch. vi. 1 reff. s Mutt iii. lu J L. T.3II al. 2 Cor. 
 
 1 Pet. ill. 7 (rec). Dcut. vii. Ά. t = Acts xviii. 13. ch. i 20 reff. π here only f. 
 
 Aristol . de Plant, i. ft. Υ ellips., ch. iv. 14 al. 
 
 txt CDFGJ mis (appy) Orig Chr (expr) Thdrt al.— 21. μ>] ττως om ABC C. 42-7• CT^. 
 73. 80 copt Dam Ruf Aug {corrn to avoid future with μτ] ττως ?) : ins DFGJ most mss vss 
 Chr-e.-spressly Thdrt Thl Oec Iren Cvpr Ambrst al (Orig freely ; ττοσω μάλλον : seth nnm 
 tibi parcel .')•— rec φίίσηται, with B'(e sil) &c Chr (ed Montf) Thl Oec : tst A(B.')CDFGJ 
 most mss Orig (see above) Cbr (Mtt's mss) Thdrt Antioch Dam. — 22. rec αποτυμιαν 
 (2nd) (see note), with DFGJ &c Clem Chr Thdrt al : t.xt ABC «7' Orig-alludg Dam. — 
 rec χρηστότητα, with D^FGJ &c Clem Chr Thdrt al : txt ABCD' C7^ Orig Eus Dam.— 
 rec aft χρηητ. om θίου {see note), with D'FGJ &c Clem Orig Chr Thdrt al : ins ABCD^ 
 d^ V (not demid al) copt arm Ens Dam Pelag. — tav to eav om 55. — ίπιμενης BD'. — 
 23. rec K-at ficEti'oi, with J &c Chr Thdrt al: txt ABCDFG all Dam. — (πιμιινωσα C, 
 -σ(ΐν G, (πιμίΐΊοσα' D'. — θ(ος εστίν J (Scholz : not Tisch) 77. i)l al.— for ty/ctj/r., 
 ατησαι 177•— 24. ot om 2. 38. 76. 109 al d g tol demid Ruf Ambrst Bed : οντοι, tav 
 
 τΓίσόΐ'Τίς ver. 22, seems to shew that the 
 figurative diction is not strictly preserved). 
 — Be not high-minded, but fear: 
 21.] for if God did not spare the natural 
 branches (the branches which grew accord- 
 ing to natural development, and were not 
 engrafted),— (supply 'I fear,' or 'it is to 
 be feared,' or simply ' fear') lest He shall 
 also not spare thee.' — The fut. ind. witli 
 μή ττως, the apparent incongruity of which 
 has probably caused the variety of reading, 
 implies, as Herm., Soph. Aj. 272, observes 
 with regard to the ind. pres., 'μη ίστί 
 (ΐσται) verentis quidem est ne quid nunc 
 sit {futni'inn sit), sed indicantis simul, 
 putare, se ita esse {fnturum esse), ut ve- 
 retur.' See Winer, § CO. 2, and Col. ii. 8. 
 Heb. iii. 12. 22.] The caution of the 
 
 preceding ver. is unfolded into a setting 
 before the Gentile of the true state of the 
 matter. — ' Behold therefore {posiio, that 
 thou enterest into the feeling prompted by 
 the last ver.) the goodness and the seve- 
 rity (no allusion to άποτίμνω in its literal 
 sense) of God : — towards those who fell 
 (see on ver. 11. — Here the ττιαόντες are 
 opposed to σιι, the figure being for the 
 moment droj)])ed : for πίπτίιΐΐ' can hardly 
 be used of the brandies, but of men), seve- 
 rity ; but towards thee, the goodness of 
 God (the nominatives here, as involving a 
 departure from the constr., are preferable : 
 
 and the repetition of Qtov is quite in the 
 manner of the Ap. ; see 1 Cor. i. 23. 24. 
 Riickert thinks that because Clem. Alex. 
 Psedag. i. 8, understands χρηστότης, in iav 
 ίτΓΐμίίνι^ς ry χρηστότί]τι, of the χρηστό- 
 της of men, βίοΰ may have been a marginal 
 gloss to guard against this mistake, and may 
 have found its way into the text, misplaced. 
 But this is hardly probable : θίοϋ is much 
 more likely to have been erased as unneces- 
 sary), if thou abide by (reff.) that good- 
 ness ; for (assuming that thou dost 7iot 
 abide by that goodness) thou also shalt he 
 cut oiF' (ind. fut. The placing only a comma 
 at tKKOTTiiay, as Meyer,— not Lachm. and 
 Tischend. in their last edd., — prevents the 
 break evidently intended between the treat- 
 ment of the case of the Gentile and that of 
 the Jews). 23.] ' And they moreover, 
 
 if they continue not (not exactly the same 
 meaning as before : the χρηστότης before 
 being external and objective, this, as in ch. 
 vi. 1, a subjective state) in their (see on ver. 
 20) unbelief, shall he grafted in : for God is 
 able to graft them in again.' (Some, e. g. 
 Grot., represent this last clause as implying, 
 that God's power to graft them in again 
 has always been the same, but has waited 
 for their change of mind, to act : ' Nihil 
 est prater incredulitatcm quod Deum im- 
 pediat eos rursum pro suis assumere et 
 paterne tractare :'— but surely De W.'s in-
 
 408 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 XI. 
 
 Λν ch. i. 13. d , 
 
 1 Cor. χ. 1. ' 
 
 2 Cor. i. 8. 
 1 ThfS.'i. iv. 
 
 eyKtvTpia6{]aovTai rrj ίδιο ίλαία. "^ ^ Ου γαρ θίλω υμάς ^^^Ρ 
 ayvoiiv, αδίλφοί, το " μυστίΐρίο»/ τοΰτο, Π'α μη ήτί 
 ^Ti.^J'Juou ^ τταξ) ίαυτοΓς• '' φρόνιμοι, Ότι ^ πωμωσις "* αττυ μίμους τω 
 
 Dan. ϋ. 18. tj ν-ν / b>' f^cA' "Vl" 
 
 yth. xii.iti. Ισραήλ γεγοί'εν αχρις ου το πΛΐ)ρωμα των ευνων 
 
 {ev, 1 Cor. xiv. 11.) 
 i. 14. ii. 5. StcHtb is. 
 
 7. Mrirk iii. ft. Eph. iv. 18 only t- See Job xvi 
 b constr , 1 Cor. xi. 26. Gal. iii. lU al. 
 
 ach.xv. IS. 2 Cor. ABCD 
 liereoiily. See vcr. 12. EFGJ 
 
 κατα φνσιν εγκιντρισΟωσι Chr. — 25. Οίλ. yap 80. — ηίίλ^. om 108. — for τταρ tavr., 
 tv tavT. AB gotb Dam : αιντοις FG 47- 07^ d' (ζ'ούί* ipsi d- Ambrst) f g ν copt lat-ff: 
 t.xt CDJ &c Thdor-mops Chr Thdrt Ά\.— πηρωσις (ceeciias) ν d g lat-ff' (see on ver 7). — 
 
 terp. is far better : — ' The Ap. obscurely 
 includes in the tyicirrp. the removal of 
 their unbelief and the awakening of faith, 
 and this last especially he looks for from 
 above :' — for, as he observes, the power of 
 God vrould not be put forward, if the other 
 were the meaning). 24.] 'For (proof 
 
 that, besides God's undoubted power to 
 re-engraft them, the idea of their being so 
 re-engrafted is not an unreasonable one) if 
 THOU wert cut out of thy natural wild- 
 olive-tree, and unnaturally wert en- 
 grafted into the (not'a') good olive- 
 tree, how much more shall these, the 
 natural branches, be engrafted in their 
 own olive-tree V It is a question, as 
 Tholuck remarks, whether κατά ψνσιν and 
 Ίταρύ φνσιν denote merely growth in the 
 natural maimer and growth (by engrafting) 
 in an unnatural (i. e. artificial) manner, — 
 or that the wild is the nature of the Gen- 
 tile, and the good olive that of the Jew, so 
 that the sense would be — ' If thou wert cut 
 out of the wild olive which is thine natu- 
 rally, and wert engrafted contrary to (thy) 
 nature into the good olive, how much more 
 shall these, the natural branches,' &c. But 
 then the latter part of the sentence does 
 not correspond with the former. We either 
 should e.\pect the o'l to be omitted, as is 
 done in some MSS, or must, with Fritz., 
 place a comma after ούτοι, and, taking ol 
 as the relative, construe, ' How much more 
 these, who shall, agreeably to (their) na- 
 ture, be grafted,' &c. Tholuck describes 
 the question as being between a comparison 
 of engrafting and not engrafting, and one 
 of engrafting the congruous and the iticon- 
 gruous : and, on the above ground, decides 
 in favour of the former, — κατά φύσιν sig- 
 nifying merely natural growth, τταρά φ., 
 unnatural growth, i. e. the growth of the 
 grafted nciun. But however this may fit 
 the former part of the sentence, it surely 
 cannot satisfy tlie requirements of the latter, 
 where the κατά φύσιν (κΧάζοι) are de- 
 scribed as being engrafted (which would 
 be παρά φνσιν) into their own olive-tree. 
 We must at least assume a mi,\ture of the 
 two meanings, the antithesis of κατά and 
 irapa φ. being rather verbal than logical, — 
 
 as is so common in the writings of the Ap. 
 Thus in the former case, that of the Gen- 
 tile, the fact of natural growth is set against 
 that of engrafted growth : whereas in the 
 latter, the fact of congruity of nature {ry 
 t'ii^ tXatf) is set against incongruity, — as 
 making the re-engrefting more probable. 
 25 — 32.] Prophetic annouiice- 
 ment that this re engrafting shall 
 ACTUALLY TAKE PLACE (25 — 27), and 
 explanatory justification of this divine 
 arrangement (28 — ;tJ). 25.] ' For 
 
 (I do not rest this on mere hope or pro- 
 bability, but have direct revelation of the 
 Holy Spirit as to its certainty) I would 
 not have you ignorant, brethren (see 
 reff., — used by the Ap. to announce, either 
 as here some authoritative declaration of 
 divine truth, or some facts in his own his- 
 tory not previously known to his readers), 
 of this mystery (μυστ. Tholuck classifies 
 the meanings thus: (1) such matters of 
 fact, as are inaccessible to reason, and can 
 only be known through revelation : (2) 
 such matteis as are patent facts, but the 
 process of which cannot be entirely taken 
 in by the reason. He adds a third sense, — 
 that, which is no mystery in itself, but by 
 its figurative import. Of the first, he cites 
 chap. xvi. 25 ; 1 Cor. ii. 7—10 ; Eph. i. 9 ; 
 iii. 4 ; vi. 19 ; Col. i. 20, al., as examples : 
 of the second, 1 Cor. xiv. 2 ; xiii. 2 ; Eph. 
 V. 32 ; ] Tim. iii. 9. 16 : of the third, Matt, 
 xiii. 1 1 ; Rev. i. 20 ; xvii. 5 ; 2 Thess. ii. 7. 
 — The first meaning is evidently that in our 
 text : — ' a prophetic event, unattainable by 
 human knowledge, but revealed from the 
 secrets of God'), that ye he not wise in 
 your own conceits (that ye do not take to 
 yourselves the credit for wisdom superior to 
 that of the Jews, in having acknowledged 
 and accepted Jesus as the Son of God, — 
 seeing that ye merely ή\(ίιθητί Ty τούτων 
 άπαθίίφ, ver. 30),— that hardening (not 
 ^blindness;' see above on ver. Vi, and 
 Eph. iv. 18 note) has happened in 
 part (Calvin explains it ' quodammodo 
 .... qua particula voluisse mihi dun- 
 taxat videtur temperare verbum alioqui 
 per se asperum,' — but there is no trace of 
 such a deske above, ver. 7 ; — the τινις ver.
 
 25, 26. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 409 
 
 ί'ιςίλθ^, 
 yeypairrai 
 
 26 ,. 
 
 και " ούτως πας ΙσραηΧ 
 
 ^ει t/c 2.1WV ο ρυομενος. 
 
 σωυιισεται, κ,ασως d = Actsvii.8. 
 
 j• , ch. τ. 12. 
 
 αποστρίφίΐ l^^°'■ ^'• ^β 
 
 e ISA. lix. 20. pre?, parf.. Matt. iv. 3. xxvi. 48. 1 Tliess. iii. 5 al. 
 f Acts iii. 2t>. 1' Tim. iv. 4. Jub sxxiii. 17. 
 
 τω om 17• — for αχρις ου, εως Orig3, όταν Orig^, tav yap Origj : quoad usque or 
 donee (v d g), or ciim autem Hil. — 26. for ούτως, postea arm : rort Tbl (comm) Jer 
 Orig. Hilg Ambr: μίτα τοντο Orig, : iva μετά τοντο Origj (orrij) : ro7£ οιτω Clem. — 
 σωϋη ν d e Ruf Jer Ambr (somet) Aug Ambrst (not g Iren Hil). — rec και αποστμεφκ, 
 with D^(E.'')J &c vss veniet qui eripiat et avertat it ν lat-ff {-tet am) Chr Thdrt al : 
 
 17 establishes the ordinary acceptation, that 
 ti portion of Israel have been hardened, άττο 
 μ. may be joined with ττώ^^ωσις, or with 
 ytyovtv : from the arrangement of the 
 words, best with the former) to Israel, 
 nntil {άχρις ου has been variously rendered 
 by those who wish to escape from the pro- 
 phetic assertion of the restoration of Israel. 
 iSo Calv. : " donee non infert temporis pro- 
 gressum vel ordinem, sed potius valet per- 
 inde ac si dictum foret, zii plenitudo gen- 
 tium ;" — al., ' while .... shall come in:' 
 but Thol, well observes that άχρ. ου with 
 an ind., if any thing acivally happening 
 is spoken of, may have the meaning of 
 * while' even with an aor. : but with a 
 subj. of the aorist, a possible future event 
 is indicated, which ivhen it enters puts an 
 end to the former : Gal. iii. 19. 1 Cor. xi. 
 26) the completion of the Gentiles shall 
 have come in ' (scil. to the Cliurch or 
 Kingdom of God, where we, the Ap. and 
 those whom he addresses, are already : as we 
 use the word ' come in' absolutely, with re- 
 ference to the place in which we are. Or the 
 word may be used absolutely, as it seems to 
 be in Luke xi. 52, of entering into the K. of 
 God). — In order to understand ro πλ/^ρ. τ. 
 ίθν., we must bear in mind the character of 
 the Ap.'s present argument. He is dealing 
 with nations : with the Gentile nations, and 
 the Jewish nation. And thus dealing, he 
 speaks of το πλϊ'/ρ r. ίθν. coming in, and 
 of ττσς Ίσραί';λ being saved : having no 
 regard for the time to the individtial des- 
 tinies of Gentiles or Jews, but regarding 
 nations as each included under the common 
 bond of consanguinity according to the 
 flesh. The πλήρωμα των ίθνών I would 
 regard then as signifying ' the full number,' 
 ' the totality ' of the nations, i e. every 
 nation under heaven, the prophetic subjects 
 (Matt. xsiv. 14) of the preaching of the 
 gospel. Stuart denies that π\ήυωμα will 
 admit of this meaning. But the sense 
 which he allows to it of " completion, i. q. 
 ■πληρωσις" (?), amounts in this case to the 
 same thing : that completion not arriving 
 till all have come in : the πληρώ μιι των 
 ίθνών importing that wliich πληροί τα 
 ίθνη. The idea of an elect number, how- 
 ever true in itself (' plenitudo gentium in 
 
 his intrat, qui secundum propositum vocati,' 
 Aug. cited by Tholuck), does not seems to 
 belong to this passage. 26.] ' And 
 
 thus (when this condition shall have been 
 fulfilled) all Israel shall he saved' {Israel 
 as a nation, see above : not individuals, — 
 nor is there the slightest ground for the no- 
 tion of the άίτοκατασΓοσίς). — Thisprophecy 
 has been very variously regarded. Origen, 
 understanding by the ' omnis Israel quisal- 
 vus iiet,' the ' re'iquise qufe electse sunt,' 
 yet afterwards appears to find in the pas- 
 sage his notion of the final purification of 
 all men, — of the believing, by the word and 
 doctrine : of the unbelieving, by purgatorial 
 fire. — Chrysostom gives no explanation : 
 but on our Lord's words in Matt. xvLi. 11, 
 he says, orav fiVp, on Ηλίας μϊ ν ίρχεται 
 κ. αποκαταστήσει πάντα, αυτόν Ήλίαν 
 φησΙ, κ. την τότ€ €σ"θμ€νην των Ιουδαίων 
 επιστροφήν, — and shortly after calls him 
 της ΐίυτίρας παρουσίας πρόίρομος. Simi- 
 larly Theodoret and Geogory of Nyssa (in 
 Thol.) ; so also Augustine, de Civ. Dei xx. 
 29, — ' ultimo tempore ante judicium (per 
 Eliam, exposita sibi lege) Jud<eos in Chris- 
 tum verum esse credituros, celeberrimum 
 est in sermonibus cordibusve fidelium.' Si- 
 milarly most of the fathers (Estius), and 
 schoolmen (Thol.) ; — Jerome, however, on 
 Isa. xi. 11, says, ' Nequaquam juxta nostros 
 Judaizantes, in fine mundi quum intraverit 
 plenitudo gentium, tunc omnis Israel salvus 
 fiet : sed haec omnia de primo intelligamus 
 adventu.' Grotius and Wetst. believe it to 
 have been fulfilled after the destruction of 
 Jerusalem, when μνρίοι εκ περιτομής be- 
 came believers in Christ (Eus. H. E. iii. 35). 
 But Thol. has shewn that neither could 
 the number of Gentiles received into the 
 Church before that time have answered to 
 the πλήρωμα τ. εθνών, nor those Jews to 
 πάς Ισραήλ, which expression accordingly 
 Grotius endeavours to explain by a Rab- 
 binical formula, that " all Israel have a 
 part in the Messiah ;" which saying ho 
 supposes the Ap. to have used in a spiritual 
 sense, meaning the Israel of God, as Gal. 
 vi. Ifi. — The Reformers for the most part, 
 in their zeal to impugn the milleniiarian 
 superstitions then current, denied tlic future 
 general conversion of the Jews, and would
 
 410 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 XI. 
 
 pch.i. IS ri-fi•. ^ ασίβίΐας αττο Ιακώβ' "' και \ιυτη αυτοις ?'/ παρ ίμου 
 
 h 1 John ν- 2. j ' ^ „ \ ■> ^,\ ^ i ' > ' - 28 ^ 
 
 jv.^""•.. οιαυΐ]κη, όταν αψίλωμαι τας αμαρτίας αυτ(ον. κατά 
 
 ' Α(•^"'ηΙ.'•.'.1^' μ^ν το ivayyiXiov ΐγΟροΙ δι' νμας, κατά δε την ticXoyrjv 
 jHeb.x.4. α-να7Γΐ}Τθΐ oto τους ττατερας. αμίταμίλητα yap τα 
 
 Sir. χΊνϋ. 11.' k = Gal.iT.16. 1 cb. ix. 11 reff. m Mitt. iii. 17. cli. i. 7 al. 
 
 η = Ads vii. li). ch. ix. 5 al. ο 2 Cor. vii. 1(1 only f. 
 
 ατΓοστρίψαι FG goth : t\t ABCDi 39. 47- 80 al — 6^ ιακωβ 03.— 28. άΆ μεν ins ουν 10. 
 31. 73 al. — ημας219, — 29. τον θ. και η κλζ/σις 37• 8ί• : και η κλησις των εθνών και 
 
 ATiCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 not recognize it even in this passage : — 
 Luther did so, at one time, but towards the 
 end of his life spoke most characteristically 
 and strongly of what he conceived to be the 
 impossibility of such national conversion 
 (see extract in Tholuck's note, p. GHJ) : — 
 Calvin says : ' Multi accipiunt de populo 
 Judaico, ac si Paulus diceret instaurandum 
 adhuc in religionem ut prius : sed ego 
 Israelis nomen ad totum Dei populum ex- 
 tendo, hoc sensu, Quum Gentes ingressie 
 fuerint, siinul et Judaei ex defectione se ad 
 fidei obedieutiam recipient. Atque ita com- 
 plebitur salus totius Israelis Dei, quem ex 
 ceterisque coUigi oportet : sic tamen ut 
 priorem locum Judfei obtineant, ceu in 
 famihaDei primogeniti.' — Calovius, Bengel, 
 and Olshausen, interpret πας Ίσρ. of the 
 elect believers of Israel .• — Beza, Estius, 
 Koppe, Reiche, Kollner, Meyer, Tholuck, 
 De Wette, al., hold that the words refer, as 
 I have explained them above, to a national 
 restoration of Israel to God's favour. — I have 
 not mixed with the consideration of this pro- 
 phecy the question of the restoration of the 
 Jews to Palestine, as being clearly irrelevant 
 to it : the matter here treated being, their 
 reception into the Church of God. 
 καθώς γίγρ•] This quotation appears to 
 have for its object to shew that the Re- 
 deemer was to comeybr the behoof of God's 
 own chosen people. — For t/c Σιώι•, the LXX 
 have ivtKfv SiujV (p'iJ.b), the E. V. * to 
 Zion.' The Ap. frequently varies from the 
 LXX, and a sufficient reason can generally 
 be assigned for the variation : here, though 
 this reason is not apparent, we cannot 
 doubt that such existed, for the LXX would 
 surely have suited his purpose even better 
 than Ik, had there been no objection to it. 
 It may be that the whole citation is intended 
 to express the sense of prophecy rather 
 than the wording of any particular passage, 
 and tliat the Ap. has, in fic Σιω')•, summed 
 up the prophecies whi('h declare that the 
 Redeemer should .spring out of Israel. — 
 ό ρυόμ. is in the Heb. 'a deliverer' — the 
 Ap. adopts the LXX, probably as appro- 
 priating the expression to Christ. 
 άτΓοστρ. κ•. Γ. λ.] Heb. and Ε. V. ' and 
 unto them that tvrn from transgression in 
 Jacob.' — δταν άφβ'λ. from another place 
 
 in Isa. ref.), — hardly from Jer. xxxi. 
 (xxxviii.) 34, as Stuart; — and also contain- 
 ing a general reference to the character of 
 God's new covenant with them, rather than 
 a strict reproduction of the original mean- 
 ing of any particular words of the prophet. 
 " How came the Αρ., if he wished only to 
 express the general thought, that the Mes- 
 siah was come for Israel, to choose just this 
 citation, consisting of two combined pas- 
 sages, when the same is expressed more 
 directly in other passages of the O. T. ? I 
 believe that the ί/ξπ gave occasion for the 
 quotation : if he did not refer this directly 
 to the second coming of the Messiah, yet it 
 allowed of being indirectly apphed to it." 
 Tholuck. 28.] ' "With regard indeed 
 
 to the gospel (i. e. ' viewed from the gospel- 
 side,' — looked on as we must look on them 
 if we confine our view solely to the princi- 
 ples and character of the Gospel), they (the 
 Jewish people considered as a whole) are 
 hated {utov: not μου, as Theodoret, Lu- 
 ther, Grot., al. — scil. in a state of exclusion 
 from God's favour : not active, ' enemies to 
 God,' as Grot., Bengel) for your sakes ; 
 but with regard to the election (viz. of 
 Israel to be God's people, see ν v. 1, 2 — 
 not that of Christians, as Aug., al. : — i. e. 
 ' looked on as God's elect people'), they are 
 beloved for the fathers' sakes ' (i. e. not 
 for the merits of the fathers, but because of 
 the covenant with Abraham, Isaac, and 
 Jacob, so often referred to by God as a 
 cause for His favourable remembrance of 
 Israel). 29.] 'For (expl. how God's 
 
 favour regards them still, though for the 
 present cast oflF) the gifts (generally) and 
 calling (as the most excellent of those 
 gifts. That caUing seems to be intended 
 ' qua posteros Abrahie in foedus adoptavit 
 Deus,' Calv. A very similar sentiment is 
 found ch. iii. 3, where the same is called 
 >/ ττίσης τ. θεοΰ. But the words are true 
 not only of this calling, but of every other. 
 Bengel says, ' dona, erga Judseos : vocatio, 
 erga gentes:' similarly of κ.Χί/σίς•, De W., 
 
 ' bie ^entfung buret) ha§, @o.' But thus 
 the point of the argument seems to be lost, 
 which is, that the Jews being once chosen 
 as God's people, will never be entirely cast 
 ofi') are irretractable ' (do not admit of a
 
 27—32. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 411 
 
 εου. ωςττερ γαρ νμεις ρ^^. ν. ΐ5. 
 
 "χ^αρισματα και η ^ κ\ησις του 
 
 7ΓθΤ£ ^ ητΓίίθησατζ τω Θίω, νυν δε ' ηλεηθλ/ΤΕ τ»? τούτων "* η, 
 
 ι ' η / 31 " ' "=■ " S ' '/ι ~ ν f / lifh. iii 
 
 απεισεια, υυτως /cat ouroi ι^υι/ ηπαυησαν, τω υμίτίυω ^-ι>Ληι^ 
 
 ι• 'Λ ' ''*■ ^ ' ' t 'Λ ίΐ" 32 " ' Λ*^ ^ '•■ c-ViT'Vi' 
 
 εΛεει ιι•α και αυτοί ίλίηυωσιν. συνεκλεισεν -γα/Ο ο 
 
 il iii. 14. 
 ii. 1 al. 
 χ. 13. 
 
 ιεει 
 
 y 
 
 icat αυΓΟί 
 
 ;εος τους παντας tig απεισειαν, tva ^ 
 
 Heb. iv. R 
 
 τους τταντας tMML 
 
 .7. 
 
 &c. Ezek. vii. !). π Eph. ii. 2. T. «. Col. iii. ft. 
 
 inver.-ion ol words, 1 Cor. ix. 15. a Cor. ii. 4. Gal. ii. 10. 
 xLukev.lS. Gal. iii. 22, 23 only. Ps. Ixxvii. 50. Josh. Ti 1. 
 P.s. Ixxvii. 50, H2. ei9 TOtixVTtiv ύμηχανιαν σκγκλίιο ^619, 
 Polyb. iii. (53.3, and Ir. 
 
 ch. ix. IS 
 
 I onlyt. V— 1 Cor, xv. 31. 
 
 Luke i. 5n, .Sic. ch. ix. 23. Eph. ii. 4. 
 y Eph. iv. 13 reff. ζ ύττό, Gal. iii. 23. 
 
 Diod. Sic. xix. 1!». So Dion. Hal. Tiii. p. 620. 
 
 τον θίου ΤΛ. — 30. yap om 21!). — rec bef νμ. ins και, with D*J &c e ν {irorf και νμίΐς e ν 
 Pel Sedul, and 4«. 72) syrr Chr (ed Montf and Mtt's mss) : om ABCD'EFG (ποτέ νμ. 
 A) 'Λδ-Ο. -47. 80. 115-24 al d g copt aith ar-pol goth Chr Dam Thl Jer Aug-oft Ruf.— for 
 θίω, κυριω 121. — vvvi Β Chr. — ελιηθητί C Thl. — 31. for οντοι, αυτοί D'FG 93. — 
 ημεηρω 17. — και αυτοί ινα 17: add aft αυτοί, υστίρον 5. 17• 93 al : πηλιν Cyr : νυν 
 BD' 42 Dam.— 32. for τους τταντας (1st), τα (om FG) πάντα Di(E.')FG it ν Iren Jer 
 
 change of purpose. The E. V., ' witAout sense is here as in the exx., which might 
 
 repentance,' is likely to mislead. Comp. 
 Hosea xiii. 14). 30.] ' For (illustra- 
 
 tion of the above position) as ye (MSS evi- 
 dence is too decided against the και to 
 allow of its being retained : but we may 
 suspect that it has been struck out as super- 
 fluous, in ignorance (Thol.) of the Greek 
 usage which often doubles icai in two pa- 
 rallel clauses) once disobeyed God (nation- 
 ally — as Gentiles, before the Gospel) but 
 now have (lit. ' were compassionated,' his- 
 tor.) received mercy (scil. by admission 
 into the church of God) through (as the 
 occasion ; the breaking off of the natural 
 branches giving opportunity for the graft- 
 ing in of you) the disobedience of these 
 (i. e. unbelief, considered as an act of resist- 
 ance to the divine will : see 1 John iii. 23), 
 SO these also have now (under the Gospel) 
 disobeyed (are now in a state of unbeliev- 
 ing disobedience), in order that through 
 the mercy shewed to you (viz. on occasion 
 of the fulness of the Gentiles coming in) 
 they also may have mercy shewn them ' 
 (' the objective view corresponding to the 
 subjective εις το τταραζηλωσαι αντονς, ver. 
 11.' De W.). — Some place the comma after 
 iXfft instead of ήπήθησαν, and construe, 
 either, as Erasm., Calv., al., ^ i/iet/ have 
 dinobeyed through (upon occasion of) the 
 mercy shewn to you, or as Vulg., Luth., 
 Estius, al., ' they have become disobedient 
 to the mercy shetim to you.' But thus the 
 parallelism is weakened, and the μυστήριον 
 of ver. 25 lost sight of. Examples of the 
 emphatic word being placed before 'iva are 
 found in 1 Cor. ix. 15. 2 Cor. ii. 4. Gal. ii. 
 10. 32.] 'For (foundation of the 
 
 last stated arrangement in the divine 
 purp'oses) God shut up (not shut uj) to- 
 ffether ,• auf, as in so many cases, imply- 
 ing, not co-pai'fioipatiun on the part of the 
 subjects of the action, but the character of 
 the action itself : so in ' concludcre.' The 
 
 be multiplied by consulting Schweighseuser's 
 Index to Polyb., ' to involve in,' ' to subject 
 to.' The aor., which should be kept in the 
 rendering, refers to the time of the act 
 in the divine procedure) all (the reading 
 τά πάΐ'τα has probably been introduced 
 from Gal. iii. 22) men in (into) dis- 
 obedience (general here, — every form, 
 unbelief included), that He may have 
 mercy on all.' — No n\ere permissive act of 
 God must here be understood. The Ap. is 
 speaking of the divine arrangement by 
 which the guilt of sin and the mercy of 
 God were to be made manifest. He treats 
 it, as elsewhere (see ch. ix. 18 and note), 
 entirely with reference to the act of God, 
 taking no account, for the time, of human 
 agency ; which however, when treating of 
 us and our responsibilities, he brings out 
 into as prominent a position : see as the 
 most eminent example of this, the closely 
 following ch. xii. 1, 2. — But there remains 
 some question, who are the ol ττάντίς of 
 both clauses.'' Are they the same .^ And 
 if so, is any support given to the notion of 
 an άτΓοκατάστασις of all men? Certainly 
 they are identical : and signify all men, 
 without limitation. But the ultimate differ- 
 ence between the all men who are shut up 
 under disobedience, and the all men upon 
 whom mercy is shewn is, that by all men 
 this mercy is not accepted, and so men be- 
 come self-excluded ft-om the salvation of 
 God. God's act remains the same, equally 
 gracious, equally universal, whether men 
 accept His mercy or not. This contingency 
 is here not in view : but simply God's act 
 itself. — We can hardly understand the ot 
 πάντες nationally. The marked univer- 
 sality of the expression recalls the beginning 
 of the Ep., and makes it a solemn conclu- 
 sion to the argumentative portion, after 
 which the Λρ., overpowered with the view 
 of the divine Mercy and Wisdom, breaks
 
 412 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ Ρί2ΜΑΙ0ΥΣ. 
 
 ' £"17 m' ?8ai ελίϊ/σ^. ώ ^ βάθος πΧουτου και '^ σοφίας κα\ '^ "γνωσίίος abde 
 
 i.7rrff. t/eov, ως ανξο,ίοξυΐ'ητα τα κριματα αυτού και avic,i- 
 
 cSeelCor.xii. , . , c ς» ', , - S4- ' ' •' h - ' 
 
 8. X1I1.L'. Λ/νιαστοι αι οοοι αυτού. τις yap ί-^νω νουν κυοιου '. 
 
 ϋ here only t• '^ ^ / > / S ' 
 
 xix. 3. Αηιο3 ϊ? Ttc συ/^ρουΛος αυτού ey^vtTO ^ " τ} τις ^ ττροεοωκ^ίυ 
 
 ΐχ. 3 al. >** ^k* CN/l' ί" ^β W ι * ^ ' -* Χ 
 
 ech. ν. Κ) Ps. «urd» /Cat αί'ταποοο(/)]σεΓαι αυτω '. *^° on ες αυτού και 
 
 CXT111. 75. ι ' ι ' ^ 
 
 fEoh iii. 8 Ι?•' '" ^1' '^m^ / . '"'n^'t' 
 
 only. j,.b ot αυτού και εις αυΓου τα ηαντα αυτω -η οοςα 
 
 ν. 'J. > ν . „ , , *■ 
 
 g = .4ctsxiii. etc τους ακονας. αμήν. 
 
 10. Heb. iii. ^ ^ ^ Γ" ι 
 
 10. Rev. XV. 3. Ps. χτϋ. 21. h Is.\. xl. 13. 1 Cor. ii. Ifi. i tiere only. 1. c. j here only. (4 KinRS 
 
 vi. 11.) (Job xli. 3.) Is i. xl. 14 (alex.). k Lake xir. 14 al. ch. xii. 19. Isa. Ixiii. 1/. 1 1 Cor. viii. li. 
 
 m^Col. i. 16. η ellips., Gal. i. A. Eph. iii. 21. 
 
 all. — (λεηση J al. — 33. και bef σοφ. om Ε 32 d' e ν (not demid al) Cypr Novat2 all : ins 
 (MSS &c) Clem Orig Ath Tit Meth Ca;s Melet (om follg και) Cyr-jerus Chr Thdrt al 
 Iren al (Hilj om πλουτ. και). — γνωσ. κ. σοφ. 219. — σοφ. και om !)1. — του Oeov FG. — 
 αΐ'ίζίοαννητα Α. — ουκ ανιζιχΐ'. 5. — 34. yao om 2. 47 Clem. — for κυρ., θίον D' d' Zeno. 
 — 7} om 57 al. — αυτω 3. "](} goth Till Tert Ruf Ambrst : αυτού συμβ. 77• — 36. for (ΐς 
 αυτ., in ipso ν Syr arr seth lat-fT : but rec d e Orig-e.xpr Ambr ; g lias both : omnia in 
 ipsurn et ex ipso omnia Iren. — aft αιώνας, add των αιώνων FG^ vss. 
 
 FuJ 
 
 forth into the sublimest apostrophe exist- 
 ing even in the pages of Inspiration itself. 
 33 — 36.] Admiration of the good- 
 ness and wisdom of God, and humble 
 ascription of praise to Him. 33.] 
 
 There is some doubt whether σοφίας and 
 •γνώσίως are genitives after πλούτου, as in 
 E. v., or parallel with it. The former 
 view is adopted by Thorn. Aquin., Luther, 
 Beza, Calvin, Estius, Reiche, and al. The 
 grounds on which Reiche supports it are 
 thus given and refuted by Tholuck : (1) 
 " If these three genitives are co-ordinate, 
 και must stand either before all, or before 
 the last only." But in the case of three 
 nouns placed co ordinately in this manner, 
 και is prefixed to the two latter only, 
 see ch. ii. 7 ; xu• 2. Luke v. I7. (2) 
 " πλοΰτος is no qualitative idea, but only 
 a quantitative idea." But wherein the 
 riches consist, is ordinarily indicated by 
 the conte.vt ; and here there can be but 
 little doubt on the matter, if we compare 
 ch. X. 12 ; in Phil. iv. 19 we also read of 
 the πλούτος of God. This also answers 
 
 (3) " that ττλοΰΓος- without an adjunct 
 expresses no definite attribute of God." 
 
 (4) " in the following citation, vv. 34, 35, 
 two only of these, σοφία and -γνωσις, are 
 mentioned." But this may be doubted. 
 Chrys. says, on ver. 36, αΰτΌς eupsv, αυτός 
 ίποίηηιν, αΰτος συγκροτεί, και γαρ και 
 Ίτλουσιόβ εστί, κηΊ υι'; ίείται παρ' έτερου 
 λαβείν και (τοψός εστί, και οΰ δεΊται 
 σιψβοι'ιλου. τι λέγω συμβούλου ; ούδε 
 είδεναι τις ΰύναται τα αύτον, άλλ' j"; 
 μόνος αυτός ό πλούσιος κ. σοφός. Horn. 
 XX. 653 D. — Perhaps this latter is altogether 
 too fine-drawn : but it is favoured by Ben- 
 gel, Olsh., and Tholuck. — I prefer there- 
 fore the view of Clirys., Theodoret, Grot., 
 
 Bengel, Tholuck, Kollner, and Olsh., — to 
 take πλούτου, σοφίας, γνώσεως, as three 
 co-ordinate genitives : irX. denoting the 
 'riches of the divine goodness,' in the 
 whole, and in the result just arrived at, 
 ver. 32 : σοφ., the divine ' wisdom ' of pro- 
 ceeding in the apparenth' intricate vicissi- 
 tudes of nations and individuals : γνώσ. (if 
 a distinction be necessary, which can hardly 
 be doubted) the divine ' knowledge ' of all 
 things from the beginning, — God's compre- 
 hension of the end and means together in 
 one unfathomable depth of Omniscience. — 
 ' How unsearchable are His judgments 
 (the determinations of His wisdom, regarded 
 as in the divine Mind : answering perhaps 
 to γι^ώσις. So Thol. : De W. however 
 denies this meaning to κριματα, and ren- 
 ders it decrees, referring it to the blinding 
 of the Jews) and His ways unable to be 
 traced out' (His methods of proceeding, 
 answering to σοφία. Thol. But this is 
 perhaps too subtle). 34.] ' For (con- 
 
 firmation of άνεϊ,ερ. and άΐ'ίςιχΐ'. by a cita- 
 tion from Scripture. It is freely made 
 from the LXX, more perhaps as a reminis- 
 cence than as a direct quotation) who hath 
 known the mind {γνωσις, but see above) 
 of the Lord ? or who hath beea His coun- 
 sellor {σοφία ?) 1 35.] or who hath 
 previously given to Him, and it shall be 
 repaid to him V— from Job xh. 3, where 
 the LXX (xli. 2) have τ\ς άντιστήσεταί 
 μοι, κ. ΰπομενεΐ; But the Heb. is 
 cViW ':'5'''iiTn Ό, ' who hath conferred a 
 benefit on me, that I m.ay repay him.?' 
 And to this the Ap. alludes, using the third 
 person. — We can hardly doubt that this 
 question refers to the freeness and richness 
 of God's mercy and love. 36.] ' For 
 (ground of vv. 33 — 35. Well may all this
 
 XII. 1. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 413 
 
 Xil. " ΓΤαρα/οαλω οϋν vuac, αδελώοί, ^ δία των o = ancicon5tr., 
 
 , _ ' 1^7 Γ ' Acts χχιι•. 4. 
 
 "^ οικτιρμων του θεοΰ, "^ παραστησαι τα σώματα ύ/χων piYh'^v.^u. 
 
 0/ y- «ί S'/ ~ a " ^ i \ ' ICor. i. 1υ. ' 
 
 υσίαν ί,ωυαν, ayiav, ζυαρεστυν τω ueu), την λο'γικην 2C(.r.x.i. 
 
 2. STliess. iii. I2(rec.). q 2 Cor. i. 3. Phil.ii. 1. Col iii. 12. Heb. x. 28 only I.sa. IxVii. ί.ί. 
 
 r Ltikeii. 22. ch.vi. 13. Ps. v. 3. .s ch. xiv. 18. 2 Cor. v. 9. Eph. v. 10. Col. iii. 2U. Tit. ii. 9. Heb. 
 
 xiii. 21 only-f. t 1 Pet. ii.2ouIy. προςψέρυνσίν Ιοί αγγίλοι) κι/ρι'ω . . Κυ^ικην . . . ττροίψυρύν, 
 
 Test.xii. Palrum, ρ. 547b. 
 
 Chap. XII. 1. αί. μου 178. — τω Οίω tvaptar. Α ν Aug-oft. — την λογ. λατ. νμ. om 
 
 be true of Him, for) of Him (in their 
 origin : — 'quod dicit, " ex Ipso," hoc ipsum, 
 gnod smnns, indic&t•.' Orig. Chrys. some- 
 what differently : see above on ver. 33), 
 and through Him (in their subsistence 
 anddisposal : — ' "perlpsum," quod perejus 
 providentiam dispensamur in vita:' Orig.), 
 and unto Him (' " in Ipso," [see var. 
 readd.] quod perfectio omnium et finis in 
 Ipso erit tunc, cum erit Deus omnia in om- 
 nibus :' Orig.) are all things ' (not only, 
 though chieHy, me?i. — but the whole crea- 
 tion). Origen remarks, ' Vides, quomodo in 
 ultimis ostendit, quod in omnibus quEe supra 
 dixit signaverit, mysterium Trinitatis. Sicut 
 enim in praesenti loco quod ait, " quoniam 
 ex Ipso, et per Ipsum, et in Ipso [see 
 var. readd.] sunt omnia:" convenit illis 
 dictis, quae idem Apostolus in aliis memorat 
 locis, cum dicit (1 Cor. viii. (i) : ' Unus Deus 
 Pater ex quo omnia, et unus Dominus 
 noster Jesus Christus, per quem omnia :' et 
 item in Spiritu Dei dicit revelari omnia, 
 et per hsec designat, in omnibus esse pro- 
 videntiam Trinitatis : ita et cum dicit " alti- 
 tudo divitiarum," Patrem, ex quo omnia 
 dicit esse, significat : et sapientise altitu- 
 dinem, Christum, qui est sapientia ejus, 
 ostendit : et scientise altitudinem, Spiritum 
 Sanctum ; qui etiam alta Dei novit, decla- 
 rat.' And, if this be rightly understood, — 
 not of a formal allusion to the Three Per- 
 sons in the Holy Trinity, but of an implicit 
 reference (as Thol.) to the three attributes 
 of Jehovah respectively manifested to us by 
 the Three coequal and coeternal Persons, — 
 there can hardly be a doubt of its correct- 
 ness. The objection of De Wette, that not 
 t'lQ, but tv, would be the designation of the 
 Holy Spirit and His relation to the Uni- 
 verse, apphes to that part of Origen's 
 Comm. wliich rests on the Vulg. in ipso 
 and to the idea of a. formal recognition: 
 but not to Tholuck's remark, illustrated from 
 ό ίττί ττάντων κ. Ιιά πάντων κ. tv ττάσιν 
 ■ίΐμίν, Eph. iv. (J, as referring to {Ις Qtbc, ιΐς 
 κύριος, tv πν.ΐ'μα. — Only those who are 
 dogmatically prejudiced can miss seeing 
 that, though St. Paul has never definitively 
 ^pressed tlie doctrine of the Holy Trinity 
 in a definite formula, yet he was conscious 
 of it as a living reahty. 
 
 XII. 1— XV. 13.] Practical exhor- 
 
 tations FOUNDED ON THE DOCTRINES 
 BEFORE STATED. And first, ch. xii. gene- 
 ral exhortations to a Christian life. 
 1.] ουν may apply to the whole doctrinal 
 portion of the Ep. which has preceded, 
 which, see Eph. iv. 1. I Thess. iv. 1, seems 
 the most natural connexion, — or to ch. xi. 
 35, 36 (so Olsh., Meyer), — or to the whole 
 close of ch. xi. (so Tholuck.) Theodoret re- 
 marks : OTTtp iariv οφθαλμός iv σώματι, 
 Tovro ry ψΐ'χ{/ ττίστις, και των θιΙων ι) 
 γνώσις. δίΊται Ct 'όμως α'ύτη της πρακτικής 
 άρίτής,καθάπιρ 6 6φθα\μϋς χί ιρώί' και πο- 
 δών και των αλλωΐ' μορίωι> τοΐι σώματος, 
 τοϋτουδε χάριν ό θίΊος άπόστοΧυς τυΤς οογ- 
 ματικο'ϊς λόγοις και την ήθικήν ίιδασκα- 
 λίαν προςτέθίΐκ(. διά] introduces, as in 
 
 refF., an idea which is to give force to the 
 exhortation. οΙκτιρμών] viz. those de- 
 
 tailed and proved throughout the former part 
 of the Epistle, δι αυτών υυν τούτων, φησ'ι, 
 παρακαλώ, δι' ων ίσώθητί' ώςττίρ αν (ι 
 τις τον μεγάλα ίΰίργίτηθίντα ivrpiipai 
 βουλόμενος, αυτόν τον εϋεργετήσαντα 
 Ίκ'ετην άγάγοι. Chrys. Hom. xxi. (JoG c. 
 Ίταραστήσαι] the regular word for 
 bringing to offer in sacrifice (reff.). 
 T. σώματα ΰμ.] Most comm. say, merely 
 for ΰ/^ος αυτούς, — to suit the metaphor of 
 a sacrifice, which consisted of a body : 
 some (Thol., al.), because the body is the 
 organ of practical activity, which practical 
 activity is to be dedicated to God : better 
 with Olsh and De Wette, — as an indication 
 that the sanctification of Christian life is to 
 extend to that part of man's nature which 
 is most completely under the bondage of 
 sin. θυσίαν] Chrys. strikingly says, 
 
 πώς αν γένοιτο το σώμα, φησ'ι, θυσία ; μΐ]- 
 δίν ό οφθαλμός βλεπετω Trov/jpo)', και 
 γ'εγονε θυσία' μηδέν ή γλώττα λαλείτω 
 αΐσχρόν, και γεγυνε προςφορά' μηδέν ή 
 χειρ πραττ'ετω παράνομοι', και γεγηνεν 
 ολοκαύτωμα, μδιλλον δε οΰκ άρκίϊ ταύτα, 
 «λλά και της τών αγαθών ι'/μΐν εργασίας 
 διΊ, ίνα ή μεν χειρ ελεημυσύνην ποη^, το 
 νε στόμα εύλογη τονς επηρεάζοντας, ή δε 
 «κο(} θείαις σχολάζΐ) δη]νεκώς άκροάσεσιν. 
 ι) γάρ θυσία ουδέν έχει ακάθαρτοι', ή θυσία 
 απαρχή τών άλλων εστί. και ημείς τοί- 
 νυν και χειρών και ποδών και στόματος 
 και τών άλλων απάντων ιιπαρχοιμεΟα τιρ 
 θεφ. Horn. xxi. (ίδϋ ε. ζώσαν] In
 
 414 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ΡίΙΜΑΙΟΥΣ. 
 
 XII. 
 
 " \ατξ>£ΐαν υμών, και μη " συσγτ]ματιϊ,ζσθαι τω ^^ αιωΐΊ 
 " τούτω, αΧΧα " μΒταμορφονσθαι Trj ^ ανακαινωσίΐ του 
 ^^ νοος, ^ Ης το * ^οκιμάΐ,ίΐν ΰμας τι το Θέλημα τυΰ Oeov το 
 ayaOov και ^ ζυάρεστον και reXtiou. λέγω yap ^ δ/α 
 
 της '^'^ "χ^ίιριτος της " οοθίίσης ^ot τταντι τω οντι ev υμιΐ', 
 zA^s^?!.!!)?*' i"ij υτΓίρφρονίΐν ^ τΐορ ο δίΐ φρονίΐν, αΧΧά φρονΐΐν ^ Ης 
 
 μίτξ)ον 
 
 υ ( h. ix. 4 relT. 
 ν 1 Pet. i. 14 
 
 only t. 
 w 1 Cor. 1. 20. 
 
 ii. 6 al 7. L. P. 
 
 only. 
 X MM. xvii. 2. 
 
 Mark i\. 2. 
 
 2 Cor. iii. 18 
 
 only t. 
 y Tit. iii. δ 
 
 only t 
 
 vii. li). ch. 
 
 i. n,2(lal. 
 a Luke xiv. 19. 
 
 1 Cor. iii. 13. 
 c — Gal i. 15. i 
 
 onlyt. Tr\oi 
 
 TO σωφρονίΐν, εκαστω ως ο 
 
 θίος 
 
 h 
 
 εμίρισεν 
 
 Eph.v.lO. Phil.i.lO. ProT.XTii.3. b = Matt. τ. 48. xix. 21. Phil. iii. Ki al. Gen. vi. 9. 
 
 ii. 18. iv. 23. Pliilera. 22. cc 1 Cor. i. 4 reil'. oh. i. 5. x?. 15. Eph. iii. 7. d here 
 
 Wiij UTTCi φροι/ρυι/σαι, Herod, i. 19U. (See 2 Mhco. ix. 12.) couslr., Matt. v. 3!). Ac(.sxv.2l. 
 
 e = ch. i. 25. xiv! 5. Luke xiii. 2. ■ 1 =■ Acta xxviii. 22 al. 2 Maei;. xiv. 2ti. g Mark v. 15. Luke viii. 
 
 35. 2Cor. V. 13. Tit.ii. R. 1 Pet. iv. 7 only +. h and constr., 1 Cor. vii. 17. (iii. 5.) uepif. = Mark vi. 
 
 ■ "" ■ - - i2Cor. X. 13. Eph. iv. 7, 13, 10. —Paul only. 
 
 Luke xii. 13. 2 Cor. x. 13. Heb. vii. 2. Prov. xxix. 24. 
 
 Cyprj : al-latt quote only to θίο). — νμων om Syr Did : ημών GO. 73. — 2. και om 47'- (>7^ 
 goth guelph. — μη om lOG. — νμας τι om 18' : aft νμ. add τα CiaiptpovTct 1"20' (appy) 
 Chr : τα Sin(pfoovTa και γιΐ'ωσκεπ' Clir-ms Oec (appy) : i:ai arm.• — rec -ζεσθί and -aOe, 
 with B'J all ^ Clem Tlidrt Dam Thl-marg Oec lat-ff: txt AB-'DFG I7. 35-7. 73-7• 92. 
 109- H»-^. 238 all Thl Chr (Mtt's mSi). — rec aft νοος add νμων {supplementary), with 
 D'(E?)J &c vss {vesi7n sensus g) Chr-text Thdrt al Aug al : t.\t ABD'FG 47. ('ΰ^ copt 
 Clem Chr-comm (appy) Cypr,. — το (2nd) om FG. — bef το ay. ins τι {quod) it (not f) 
 guelph goth lat-ff (' Ruf says that the Latins not the Greeks read it :' Grsb). — for το, και 
 17: for και bef ίυαρ., το 17. 37.-3. aft χαφιτ. ins του θίον J 5. 37. 48^. 67. 73. 113- 
 14-15 20 24 al seth arm goth guelph Thl Aug. — της SoO. μοι om seth. — for οντι, πιστιν- 
 οντι 43 : ττασι τοις ουσι ν d e goth guelph lat-ff (' not Greeks,' Ruf). — παρ ο oti φρ. om 
 FG 70 g : supersapere prcBceptum Hil. — ψρονειν to ψρονειν om 80. — tv ίκαστ. 21ϋ. — 
 
 opposition to the Levitical Θυσ'ιαι, which 
 were slain animals. Our great sacrifice, 
 the Lord Jesus, having been slain for us, 
 and by the shedding of His Blood perfect 
 remission having been obtained Sta των 
 οίκτιρμών τον θέοϋ, we are now enabled to 
 be offered to God no longer by the shedding 
 of blood, but as living sacrifices. — This 
 application of the figure of a sacrifice occurs 
 in Philo, who (' quod omnis probus liber,' 
 § 12, p. 876) describes the Essenes as oh 
 ζώα καταθύοντίς, άλλ' Ίίξιοπρίττης τας 
 ίαυτών διανοίας κατασκινάζειν άξιονντες. 
 See also Jos. Antt. χ viii. 1. 5. — τψ ϋίψ 
 belongs to ιύάρεστον, not to παραστησαι. 
 την λογικήν λατρ. ίιμ.] " This may 
 certainly be in app. with θυτ'ιαν (Reiche, 
 Meyer), the ace. denoting the result and 
 intention ; - θυσία however alone can hardly 
 be called a λατρεία, but παραστησαι θυ- 
 aiav may : therefore it is preferable to 
 take the ace. as in appos. with t/ie whole 
 sentence, and supply some verb of exhort- 
 ing : see 1 Tim. ii. 6. 2 Tliess. i. 5." 
 Tholuck. λογικήν (roff.) is opposed 
 
 to σαρκικήν, see Heb. vii. 16. So Chrys., 
 — ουδέν εχουσαι> σωιιατικ'υν, ούΐεν παχν, 
 ονδεν αίσθητόν, Theodoret, Grot., al. 
 take it as ' having reason,' * rational,' op- 
 posed to sacrifices of animals which have 
 no reason : Photius, Basil, and Calvin, 
 'rational,' as opposed to superstitious. But 
 the former meaning is far the best, and 
 answers to the πνευματικής θυσίας of 
 
 1 Pet. ii. 5. 2.] συσχηματίζεσθαι 
 
 is not imperative in sense, but dependent 
 on παρακαλώ. [Of course, in all such 
 questions between ε and at, the confusing 
 element of itacism comes in : but in no 
 case where both forms are equally admis- 
 sible in the text, can the mere suspi- 
 cion of itacism be allowed to decide the 
 question.] ό αιών ούτος, here, the 
 
 whole world of the unyodb/, as contrasted 
 with the spiritual kingdom of Christ. — 
 The dat. άτ'ακαινώσει is not the instrument 
 by which, but the manner in which the 
 metamorphosis takes place : that wherein 
 it consists : comp. περιετμίιθητε ττεριτομζι 
 άχιιροποιήτψ. Col. ii. 11. els το δο- 
 
 κιμάξ€ΐν, ' that ye may prove,' viz. in this 
 process and the active Christian life accom- 
 panying it, comp. retf. Ei)h., Phil. : not 
 ' that ye may he able to proved ' acquire 
 the faculty of proving,' as Bucer, Olsh., 
 Riickert : the Ap. is not speaking of ac- 
 quiring wisdom here, but of practical proof 
 by experience. το άγαθ. κ. €ΰάρ. κ. 
 
 Τί'λ. are not epithets of το θέλημα τ. θεοϋ 
 as in Ε. V., for in that case they would be 
 superfluous, and in part {τίλειον) inappli- 
 cable : but abstract neuters, see ver. 9, 
 ' that ye may prove what is the will of 
 God (viz. that which is) good and accept- 
 able (to Him) and perfect.' The non- 
 repetition of the art. shews that the adjec- 
 tives all apply to the same thing. 
 3 — 21.] Particular exhortations grounded
 
 2— G. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ΡΩΜΑΙΟΥ: 
 
 41i 
 
 πίστεως. καθαπίο γαρ εν kvt σώματι μίΧη πολλά ^'^p^^^■'\^^^■ 
 
 εχο|αεν, τα οε μεΛί? τΐαντα ου την αυτ»?ν έχει πραςιν, ichlii. ι 
 
 πολλ 
 
 ο δε 
 
 ούτως οι ποΛΛοί εν σώμα εσμίν εν χριστώ, το όε 
 εις αλλήλων μίλη. 
 
 καΐ 
 
 Paul. Heb. 
 τ. 4. 
 Srcffi 
 m = here only. 
 
 Sir. xi. 10, 
 Xen Mem. 
 
 δέ •* ναρίσ^αατα κατά την πλ.'τ.^'ο. 
 
 KJor. s.'l7 
 
 έχοντες 
 '' yjipiv την "^ δυΟεισαν ημιν ^ διάφορα, " είίτε * ττροφητίίαν, ο Mnrk xiV. ώ 
 
 9. Rev. iv. 8. 3 Slaer. τ. 34. ρ ch. v. 15. vi. 23. xi. 29. 1 Cor. xii. 4. q ver. 3. 
 
 r = Heb. ix. lU only. Deut. xsii. 9. rr So 1 Cor. iii. 22 reft'. s 1 Cor. xii. 10. xiii. 2 al. fr. 
 
 for εμίρισεν, ίχαρισί i : ωρισε Cyr : εμίτρησε and add μετρώ 73: εμερισ. ο θ. A am 
 Syr. — for ττιστεωο, χάριτος 6. G^^. — 4. for καθαττερ, ωςττερ D'EFG (al ?). — εν ενι σωμ. 
 aft εχομεν 109.— ττολλ. μί\. BDEFG al it ν al Thdrt Thl lat-fF : tst AJ nrly aU mss 
 (appy) syrr goth ar-pol Chr Dam Oec. — παντ. με\. F ν Syr al lat-ff. — 5. ούτως και 37. 
 40. 57. 80. 109--15- 10-21 -24 al Sjt arm ΎΚΙ—εσμεν om FG g.— fi/ χριστώ om 30 lect 
 13.— rec ο it {alteration to suit εΙς), with D^EJ &c Chr Thdrt Thl Oec : txt ABD'FG 
 47' (al .') Antioch Dam: ot 110. — 6. υ7Γ£((;{χοί'7•ες I. — it om 114-21 lect 12 Thdrt : enim 
 
 on and expanding the foregoing general to be proud of, but God's gift. 
 
 ones. This is expressed by the γόο, which 
 resumes, and binds to what has preceded. 
 And first, an exhortation to humility in 
 respect of spiritual gifts, vv. 3 — 8. 
 3.] λέγω, a mild expr. for ' I command :' 
 enforced as a command by ΐια r. χ. . . ' by 
 means of my apostolic office,' ' of the grace 
 conferred on me to guide and exhort the 
 Church :' reff. τταντι τω δντ. ev vipi., 
 
 — a strong bringing out of the individual 
 application of the precept, οϋχΐ τψ ίεΊπ 
 και τψ δεΊνι μόνον, άλλ« και άρχοντι κ. 
 άρχομέΐ'ψ, κ. εούΧψ κ. ίλενθερφ, κ. ISnory 
 κ. σοφψ, κ. γνναικί κ. avCpi, κ. νέφ κ. 
 •γίροντι. Chrys. μ.ή ■υττερφρ. ic.r.A.] 
 
 "There is a play on the words φρονείν, 
 νπερφρονεΊι•, and σωφρονεΊν, which can 
 only be clumsily conveyed in another lan- 
 guage : ' not to be high-minded, above that 
 which he ought to be minded, but to be so 
 minded, as to be sober-minded.' Wetst. 
 quotes from Charondas in Stobseus, Sen- 
 tent, xlii., ττροςτΓΟίίίσθω ΰε 'έκαστος τών 
 ΤΓολιτών, σωφβονεΊν. μάλλον η φρο>'εΊν, — 
 and from Thucyd. ii. 02, — ιέ ναι δί τοΙς 
 εχθροΧς όμόσε, μι] φρονηματι μόνον, άλλα 
 και καταφρονίιματι. — But φρονεΧν must 
 not be taken, with Calvin, ' admonet ut ea 
 tantum cogitemus et meditemur, quae nos 
 sobrios et modestos reddere poterunt :' — 
 the thoughts implied in it being, ' thoughts 
 of one's self.' Ικάστω <Ls] = ώς 
 
 εκάστψ (retf.), not (λέγω) εκάστψ, ώς . . . . 
 — μ'ιτρον πίστεως is the receptivity of 
 χαρίσματα, itself no inherent congruity, 
 but the gift and apportionment of God. 
 It is in fact the subjective designation of >/ 
 χάρις t'l διιθείσα ημ'ιν, ver. 0. But we 
 must not say, that (Ewb.) " faith, in this 
 passage, means those gifts or graces 
 which the Christian can only receive 
 through faith .•" this is to confound the 
 receptive faculty with tlie thing received 
 by it, and to pass by the great lesson of 
 our verse, that this faculty is nothing 
 
 4.] γάρ, elucidating the fact, that God ap- 
 portions variously to various persons : be- 
 cause the Christian community is like a 
 body with many members having various 
 duties. See the same idea further worked 
 out, 1 Cor. xii. 12 ff. 5. το δέ καθ* 
 
 eis] ' But as regards individuals.' A 
 solcecism for το It εις καθ' ε να, as εν καθ' 
 εν in ref. Rev. Wetst., on ref. Mark, gives 
 many examples of it.—* Members of one 
 another ' = fellow-members with one 
 another, — members of the body of which 
 we one with another are members. 
 6.] The δέ — 'and not only so, but' .... 
 χάρις, see above ver. 3, on μίτρ. πίστ. 
 These χαρίσματα are called, 1 Cor. xii. 7» 
 »/ φαν'ερωσις τοϋ -πνεύματος. "These 
 χαρίσματα διάφορα are next specified. The 
 two first accusatives are grammatically de- 
 pendent on έχοντες : by degrees the Ap. 
 loses sight of the construction, and con- 
 tinues with the concrete ό διδάσκων, which 
 still he binds on to the foregoing by tirt, — 
 but at ό μεταδιδονς, omits this also, and, 
 at ver. 9, introduces the abstract »'/ αγάπη." 
 Thol. £tT€ Ίτροφητίίαν] There is 
 
 some dispute about the construction of 
 these clauses. The ordinary rendering 
 regards them as elliptical, and supplies 
 before κατά and tv, χρησάσΟω avry or 
 ωςτε είναι αντην or the like. But Reiche, 
 Meyer, De Wette, suppose no ellipsis, 
 joining κατά την άναλ., &c. to the fore- 
 going substantives, as κατά την χάριν to 
 χαρίσματα. This constr. must however 
 be dropped at Iv άπλότητι, which is mani- 
 festly to be rendered with a verb supplied : 
 and (2) it reduces the four first mentioned 
 gifts to a bare catalogue, and deprives the 
 passage of its aim, which is to keep each 
 member of the body in its true place and 
 work without any member boasting against 
 another. Tholuck quotes a pas-^^age of very 
 similar construction from Epictet. Dissert, 
 iii. 23. 5. He is speaking of reading and
 
 4JG 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 ΧΙΙ. 
 
 Ίι^^χΜίκίτ. κοτα την ' avaXoyiav της ττΊσπως' ' είτε " Βιακον'ιαν, au ή,?^^^ 
 J8. Acts η. τη ciaKovia είτε ο όιοασκων, εν τη όιόασκαλια " είτε ο 
 
 "Γ*ιτ7ιη"ϊν.' " τταρακαλίϋΐ', εΓ τ»; ^^ παρακλησα' ο μεΓοοίΟυυς, εν 
 5. siii.22. ^ απλθΓΐ}Τΐ ο προϊστάμενος, εν σπουοη ο ελεών, εν 
 
 χ ch. i. Η. ' 
 
 Eph. iv. 28. 1 Thess. ii. 8. Luke iii. 11 only. Job xxxi. 17. 
 xi. 3. Eph. vi. .'i. Col. iii. 22 only. P. 1 Chrou. xxis. 17. 
 v. 17. Tit. iii. 8, 14 ouly. P. Prov. xxii. 17. 
 b ch. xi. 31 reff. 
 
 y 2 Cor. i. 12 free), viii. 2. ix. 11, 13. 
 ζ 1 The.-s. V. 12. 1 Tim. iii 4, 5, 12. 
 a = Jaile3. 2 Pet. i. 5. Tcr. 11. ExoJ.xii. 11. 
 
 Ruf. — aft χαρ., add τον Qtov 93. — νμιν 44. — 7. iirt ο διακόνων 1. 37- 12'^. 109-21 al 
 lectt Bas Thdrt-ms. — for ο διδάσκων, διδασκαλιιαν Α. — 8. tire om D'EFG it ν Ruf 
 
 philosophizing from ostentation, and says 
 tliat every thing which we do, must have 
 its aim, its αναφορά; — λυιπίιν, ι) μίν τις 
 ίστι κοιί'ή αναφορά, ή δ' ιδία. πρώτον, 
 'ίν ως άΐ'θύίοπος. ίν τοντψ τι τηράχίται; 
 . . . il δ' ίδια προς το ίττιτήδίνμα ίκαητου 
 και την TTpoaiptaiV ό κιθαρφδϋς, ώς• κι- 
 θαοίιΐδός• 6 τίκτων, ώς τίκτων ό φιλό- 
 σοφος, ώς φιλόσοφος' ό ρήτωρ, ώς ρήτωρ. 
 See also the same constr. in 1 Pet. iv. 10. 
 — On ττροφητίία, the gift of the τΓροφήται, 
 see note. Acts xi. 27- κατ. τ. άναλ. 
 
 τ. ττίστ.] ' (let Mni prophesy) according 
 to the proportion (ThoL cites Justin 
 Mart. Apol. ii. 50 : " each will be punished 
 ΤΓοός άναλογίαΐ' ων t λαβί δυνάμίων ■κάρα, 
 GfoD") of faith.' But ^Λαί faith .' Ob- 
 jective ('fides quw creditor '), or subjective 
 ('fides qua creditur') ? the faith, or his 
 faith ? The comparison of μέτρον ττίστιοις 
 above, and the whole context, determine it 
 to be the latter; the measure of ///* faitli ; 
 ' quisque se intra sortis suae metas con- 
 tineat, et revelationis suaa modum teneat, ne 
 unus sibi omnia scire videatur.' To un- 
 derstand αναλογία τ. τΓ. objectively, as 
 * the rule of faith,' as many R. Cath. ex- 
 positors, and some Protest., e. g. Calvin, 
 " fidei nomine significat prima rehgionis 
 axiomata," — seems to do violence to the 
 context, which aims at shewing that the 
 measure of faith, itself the gift of God, is 
 tlie receptive faculty for all spiritual gifts, 
 which are therefore not to be boasted of, 
 nor pushed beyond their provinces, but 
 humbly exercised within their own limits. 
 7. Βιακονίαν] any subordinate 
 ministration in the Church. In Acts vi. 
 1 and 4, we have the word applied both to 
 the lower ministration, that of alms and 
 food, and to the higher, the διακ. τοϊ< λόγυυ, 
 which belonged to the Apostles. But here 
 it seems to be used in a more restricted 
 sense, from its position as distinct from 
 prophecy, teaching, exhortation, &c. 
 ev TTJ διακ.] Let him confine himself 
 humbly and orderly to that kirid of minis- 
 tration to which God's providence has ap- 
 pointed him, as a profitable member of the 
 body. ό διδάσκων] The prophet 
 
 spoke under immediate inspiration; the 
 
 διδάσκαλος under inspiration working by 
 the secondary instruments of his will and 
 reason and rhetorical powers. Paul himself 
 seems ordinarily, in his personal ministra- 
 tions, to have used διδασκαλία. He is no 
 where called a prophet, but appears as 
 distinguished from them in several places : 
 e. g. Acts xi. 27 ; xxi. 1 1 . and apparently 
 xiii. 1. Of course this does not aifect the 
 appearance of prophecies, commonly so 
 called, in his writings. The inspired διδά- 
 σκαλος would speak, though not technically 
 ■ττροφηΓίίας, yet the mind of the Spirit in 
 all things : not to mention that the apos- 
 tolic office was one in dignity and fulness of 
 inspiration far surpassing any of the subor- 
 dinate ones, and in fact including them all. 
 
 Iv TT) διδασκαλία] as before : he is 
 to teach in the sphere, within the bounds, 
 of the teaching allotted to him by God, — or 
 for which God has given him the faculty. 
 
 8.] The Ίταρακαλών was not neces- 
 sarily distinct from the ττροφηηΰων, — see 
 1 Cor. xiv. 31. ό μ.€ταδιδοΰ5 appears 
 
 to be the giver of the atms to the poor, — 
 either the deacon himself, or some dis- 
 tributor subordinate to the deacon. This 
 however has been doubted, and not without 
 reason : for a transition certainly seems to 
 be made, by the omission of the tirt, from 
 public to private gifts. We cannot find 
 any ecclesiastical meaning for ίλίων (though 
 indeed Calvin, al., understand by it " vi- 
 duas et alios ministros qui curandis segrotis, 
 secundum veterem Ecclesiae morem, prsefi- 
 ciebantur"), — and the very fact of the 
 three preceding being all limited to their 
 respective official spheres, whereas these 
 three are connected with qualitative descrip- 
 tions, speaks strongly for their being pri- 
 vate acts, to be always performed in the 
 spirit described. Add to all, that, as Vi- 
 tringa remarks, διαοιίόΐ'οι is more pro- 
 perly to distribute (Acts iv. 35), μίτα- 
 διδόναι to impart of one's own to another. 
 I would therefore render it : ' He that 
 bestoweth.' Iv άπλότητι] ordinarily, 
 
 ' tvith simplicity.' But seeing that άττλό- 
 της, referred to alms-giving, bears another 
 and an objective meaning, this hardly 
 satisfies me, because σπουδή and Ίλαρότης
 
 7—12. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους 
 
 417 
 
 ί\αρο 
 
 ροτητι. η uyani] ανυποκοιτος. " αττοστυ-νουντες το <=''ere"»'r 
 
 . <■ . ' ' . _ ' Prov. xvi 
 
 ττονηοον, κολλωμΐνοι τω α-γαθω' ^^ τί? ^ (piXaSe\(j)ia είς d i'cor. vi. ο, 
 αΛΛ)/Λους φιΛοστοργοι rrj τιμτι αΑΑηλους ττ^οη^ου- sTim.i.s. 
 ^ενοι" ^^ rr) ' σποι/δ>ι μη ' οκνηροί' τω "'" ττι-εύματι ° ζε'οΐ'τες•* J^/tAvisd. 
 τω κυρκο ^ οουλευοί'τες* ττ} έλττ/δι γ«/ροΐ'τες' τϊ? θλ/ιΖ/ει eherconiy t. 
 
 ^ ' ' ' Α. ι t f f = Luke ΣΤ. 
 
 15. Acts Tiii. 29. 2 King? xs. 2. g 1 The.«s. ir. i). Heb. xiii. 1. I Pet. i. 22. 2 Pet i. 7 only +. 
 
 h here only t. i = John iv. 44. Acts xxviii. 10. ch ii. 7 al. k here only. Pror. xvii. 14 al. 
 
 = 2 Msec. iv. 41). 1 = Matt. XXT. 26. (Phil. iii. 1 only.) Prov. vi. 6, 9. in = Acts xvii. 1β refl. 
 
 η Acts xviii. 25 only. Job xxxii. lil. υ = ch. vii.2i> al. See notes. 
 
 Pelag-expr Sedul Bed (not Aug Ambrst). — 9. aft αγαπ., ins (στω, φησιν 77• — for 
 απηστνγ., μασουΐ'Τίς FG. — το ayaOov 4. 114-10 lectt 7• 8• 13. — 11. for κυηιω, καιοω 
 D'FG 5 (al .') d' g lat-mss mentd by Jer-Ruf-Bed Nyss, Cypr Ambrst-espr also Mill (not 
 rec) : τω κ. δονλ. cm 71 : txt ABD^EJ niss nrly (appy) gr-mss mentd by Jer-Ambrst-Ruf- 
 Bed vis nrly Clem Ath Bas Chr Thdrt Euthal Thl Oec al Jer Ruf Pelag Aug Primus Sedul 
 
 designate not so much the inward frame 
 of mind, as the outward character of the 
 superintendence and the compassion : as 
 might be expected, when gifts to be e.xer- 
 cised ybr mntual benefit are spoken of. In 
 2 Cor. viii. 2 ; ix. 1 1. 13, the word signifies 
 ^ liberalit;/ :' so άπλως also, James i. 5. 
 This meaning is not recognized by Wahl 
 Lex., but defended by Tholuck, who con- 
 nects it with the phrase found in Stobteus 
 Eclog. Phys. i. p. 123, απΧονν τάς χίΊΐ'ας, 
 ' to open the hands wide :' — and I would 
 thus render it here. ό ιτροϊστάμενος] 
 
 * He that presides ' — but over what .' If 
 over the Church exclusively, we come back 
 to offices again : and it is hardly likely that 
 the rulers of the Church, as such, would be 
 introduced so low down in the list, or by so 
 very general a term, as this. In 1 Tim. 
 iii. 4, 5. 12, we have the verb used of pre- 
 siding over a man's own household : and in 
 its absolute usage here, I do not see why 
 that also should not be included. Meyer 
 would understand it of ' patronage of 
 strangers ' (ch. xvi. 2). Stuart in his Ex- 
 cursus on thiu place, appended to his Comm., 
 takes up and defends the same view. But, 
 not insisting on the general usage of the 
 word being preferable where it occurs abso- 
 littelg, will ίν airnvcy apply to this mean- 
 ing .•' Of course so far as σπονη) is appli- 
 cable to every employment, it might, but 
 more than this is required, where words are 
 connected in so marked a manner as here. 
 Giving TTooifTTO μένος the ordinary meaning, 
 these words fit admirably : implying that 
 he who is by God set over others, be they 
 members of the Church or of his own 
 household, must not allow himself to forget 
 his responsibility, and take his duty indo- 
 lently and easily, but must ττοοΧστασϋίη 
 σττοιιθ(ΐιο)ΐ:, making it a serious matter of 
 continual diligence. ό eXcoiv] See 
 
 above : ' He that sheweth mercy,' is the 
 very best rendering : and I cannot conceive 
 that any officer of the Church is intended, 
 Vol. II. 
 
 but every private Christian who exercises 
 compassion. It is in exhibiting compas- 
 sion, which is often the compulsory work 
 of one obeying his conscience rather than 
 the spontaneous effusion of love, that cheer- 
 fulness is so peculiarly required, and so 
 frequently wanting. And yet in such an 
 act it is even of more consequence towards 
 the effect, — consoling the compassionated, 
 than the act itself. κρίίσσων λόγος η 
 ίόσις. Sir. xviii. 16. 9—21.] Ej:- 
 
 hortations to various Christian principles 
 and habits. 9.] Olsh., De Wette, 
 
 al., would understand ίστίν, — not ιστω, 
 — the ellipsis of the Imperative being un- 
 usual. But I cannot see how this can be 
 here. Clearly the three preceding clauses 
 are hortative ,• as clearly, those which fol- 
 low are so Ukewise. Why then depart from 
 the prevalent character of the context, and 
 make this descriptive/ άιτοστυγ.] 
 
 This very general exhortation is probably, 
 as Bengel says, an explanation of ανυπό- 
 κριτος : — our love should arise from a 
 genuine cleaving to that which is good, and 
 aversion from evil : not from any by-ends. 
 10.] ' in brotherly love (dat. of 
 the respect or regard in which), affec- 
 tionate.' φιλόστ.] properly of love 
 of ticar relatio7is ,• agreeing therefore exactly 
 with φιλαΐίτλφια. 'ΐΓροηγο•υμ€νοι] 
 " invicem prsevenientes," It. Vulg. : — 
 μ?) μίνι ψιλπι^θαι ττσρ' ίτίρον, άλ\' 
 αντϋς tTrnrijSa τούτφ καί κατάρχ^ον, 
 Chrys. : similarly Syr., Theophyl., Erasm., 
 Luther: — or, = ά\λή\ονς t'lyovptioi 
 ΰττίρίχ'ΐντας ΐαντών, Phil. ii. 3 : so Ori- 
 gen, Theodoret, Grot. : or, as in ref. 
 2 Mace, ^setting an example to,' 'going 
 before' which however does not seem to 
 apply here, unless we render ry τιμ^, 'in 
 yielding honour :' ' in giving honour, anti- 
 cipating one another' (so Stuart). 11.] 
 'in zeal (not 'business,' as E. V., which 
 seems to refer it to the affairs of this life, 
 whereas it relates, as all these in vv. 11, 12, 
 Ε ϋ
 
 418 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 ΧΙΤ. 
 
 Ρ~¥*"\?,;22• Ρ WTTOtlfVOVTEC* 
 XXIV. 1311. Γ ^ 
 
 •2 Tim. ϋ. 12. S ' 
 
 ji,mesT. 11. γοίίαις των 
 
 •J Pet. ϋ. L -ϋ. ,,^' , 
 
 Dan 
 q abs., M»(t 
 
 xxi. 13 II. Ps. 
 
 iv. 1 al. 
 Γ — Aclsi. 14. 
 
 vi. 4 al. 
 
 Col. iv. 2. 
 
 Luke and 
 
 Paul only. 
 
 See Mark iii. 
 
 !•. Num. xiii. 
 
 ιωκοντες. 
 λο-ν£(τε, /CO/ 
 /cXaitti' /itro 
 
 TTiti'Otc 
 
 14 
 
 συναπα'γυμίνοι. 
 
 s Acts XX. 34 refl'. t Acts ix. 32 reft'. u = Gal. vi. (i. 
 
 xiii. 2 only f. See 1 Pet. iv. !). w = ch. i.\. 30 refl. 
 
 ζ Matt. V. 44 Mark xi. 21. James iii. 0. Gen. v. 20. 
 
 Pliil. ii. 2. b = 1 Kings ii. 3. See ch. xi. 20 
 
 Ttj ^ ττροςευγττι ^ ττροςκαρηρονντίς' ταις 
 α-^ιων " κοινωνονντίς' την ^ φιλοξείΊαι» 
 
 '^ ίυλογείΓε τους ^ όιωκοντας υμάς' " ευ- 
 
 - 1 15 ' '' ' 
 
 ε. χαιρειν μίτα -χ^αιροντων, 
 
 το αυτό ίΐς αΧληΧους ^ φρη- 
 
 ^ ψοονουντες, αΧΧα τοις "^ τα- 
 
 μη -γινεσθε '^ φρόνιμοι παρ 
 
 ABDE 
 FGJ 
 
 μη καταρασ\ 
 κΧαιοντων. 
 μη τα υψηλά 
 
 Pliil.iv. Ι,ί al. Polyb. ii. 32. 8 al. ν Ileb. 
 
 χ = Malt. 9.44 reft'. y = Matt. v. 11 al.lr. 
 
 . = oil. viii. 5 reft', τ. ίΐυτ-, rh. xv. U. 2 Cor. xiii. 
 
 : = Lukei. 52. 2 Cor. x. 1. James i. 9. Isa. xi. 4. 
 
 d Gal. ii. 13. 2 Pet. iii. 17 only. Exod. xiv. t>. e ch. xi. 25 reft'. Ρκ•>ν.ϋί. 7. 
 
 Bed al.— 13. for χυίίαις, μνιιαις D'FG mSj mentd by Thdor-mops d' g lat-mss mentd 
 by Ruf Chrj Hil Ambrst Opt Augj al : txt ABD'EJ mss (ajipy) vss nrly lat-mss mentd 
 by Ruf (but he says most have memoriis) Clem Chr, h 1 Thdrt Thdor-mops Dam Thl 
 Oec Aug' Bed: Sedul and Pel speak of both readings. — 14. υμάς {ημάς 48) om Β 47• 
 G7" Clem : τονς εχθρούς 7]μωρ Orig : ev\. τ. διωκ. νμ. om FG (i. e. as Tisch., they did 
 not read νμας, and passed over from διωκοντες to διώκοντας) : these words are aft 
 καταρασθί in DE d e: (vXoytire (2nd) om Ambr. — 15. rec bef κλαΐ£ΐΐ', ins και {sup- 
 plementary), with AD^EJ &c Syr copt al Chr Thdrt al: om BD'FG 47- 67" it ν syr arm 
 goth Tert Avig Ambrst Ruf Pel Sedul Bed. — 16. φρονονντες to φρονουντες omlect 12. — 
 
 13, to Christian duties as such: as 'fer- voured the sense thus given. For examples 
 
 vency of spirit,' ' acting as God's servants,' 
 ' rejoicing in hope,' &c.) not remiss.' ζίων 
 τω irv. is used of Apollos, in ref. The 
 Holy Spirit lights this fire witliin : see 
 Luke xiii. 49. Matt. iii. 11. τ. κυρίω 
 
 δονλ.] The external authorities, as will be 
 seen in the var. read., are strongly in favour 
 of this reading. The balance of internal 
 probability, though not easy at once to 
 settle, is I am persuaded on the same side. 
 The main objection to κνρίψ has ever been, 
 that thus the Ap. would be inserting here, 
 among particular precepts, one of the most 
 general and comprehensive character. So 
 Hilary (in Wetst.) and al. But this will 
 be removed, if we remember, of what he is 
 speaking .• and if I mistake not, the other 
 reading has been defended partly owing to 
 forgetfulness of this. The present sub- 
 ject is, the character of our zeal for God. 
 In it we are not to be οκνηροί, but fervent 
 in spirit, — and that, as servants of God. 
 A very similar reminiscence of this relation 
 to God occurs Col. iii. 23, 24 : οι δονλοι, 
 •πάν ο η iuv ττοιητε, εκ χ^υχης εργάζεσθε, 
 ώς τψ κυρίψ και οιΊκ άνθρώποις• εϊδότες 
 'ότι άπό κυρίου άποΧήμχΙ/εσθε την άντ- 
 απόδοσιΐ' της κληρονομιάς' τω κνρίω 
 χριστώ SovXctjctc. The command, τψ 
 καιρώ ΰουλεύειΐ', would surely come in very 
 inopportunely in the midst of exhortations 
 to the zealous service of God. At the same 
 time, it is not easy to give an account of 
 the origin of the reading. The εξαγοραζό- 
 μενοι τϋν καιρόν of Eph. v. 16 may have led 
 to the filling up of the contracted Kvpio^j (κώ) 
 ■with this word : and the notion that aTTovSy 
 referred to worldly business, may have fa- 
 
 of the phrase τψ καιρφ δουλείίειν and 'tem- 
 pori inservire,' see Wetst. As to .its appli- 
 cability at all to Christians, De Wette well 
 remarks, "The Christian may and should 
 certainly employ (Eph. v. 16) τον καιρόν 
 (time and opportunity), but not se)-ve it." 
 Athanas. (in Wetst.) ad Dracont. says, ού 
 ττρίπει τψ καιρφ δουΧεύειν, άλλα κυοίί•). 
 12.] The datives here are not parallel. 
 Ty ελπίδι is the grotmd o/ the joy in χαίρον- 
 τες,— hnt Tt) θλί-ψει the state in which the 
 ύτΓΟ/^ιο)'/; is found. 13.] The reading 
 
 μνίίαις is curious, as being a corruption 
 introduced, hardly accidentally, in favour of 
 the honour of martyrs by commemoration. 
 T. ψιλοξ. διώκ.] ουκ εΙπεί', εργα- 
 ζόμενοι, άλλα, διώκοντες, παιδεύων τΐ/μας 
 μι) όΐ'αμενειν τους δίομένους, ττύτε ττρος 
 ήμας ελθωσιν, ά\λ' αντοΰς εττιτρεχειν κ. 
 καταδιώκειν. Chrys. Hom. xxii. 676 c. 
 
 14.] " The Sermon on the IMount 
 must have been particularly well known ; 
 for among the few references in the N. T. 
 Epistles to the direct words of Christ there 
 occur several to it : e. g. 1 Cor. vii. 10. 
 James iv. 9 ; v. 12 (we may add iv. 3 ; i. 2. 
 22; ii. 5. 13; v. 2, 3. 10). 1 Pet. iii. 9. 
 14; iv. 14." Tholuck. 15.] Inf. for 
 
 imperative: see Phil. iii. 10: and Winer, 
 § 45. 7. 16.] ' Having (the partici- 
 
 jiial constr. is resumed, as in ver. 9) the 
 same spirit towards one another,' i. e. 
 actuated by a common and well-understood 
 feeling of mutual allowance and kindness. 
 
 μή τα ίιψ.] It is a question, whe- 
 ther ΓοΓς ταπεινιης is neuter or masc. Cer- 
 tainly not necessarily nenter, as De W. : the 
 Ap.'s antitheses do not require such minute
 
 13—20. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 419 
 
 ίαυτοις, ' μηοίνι κακόν αντί 
 
 νοούμενοι κα\α ' ενώπιον πάντων ανθρώπων' 
 
 18 
 
 τον, 
 
 19 ' 
 
 c'.ii 
 
 το £^ νμ(ον μετά πάντων ανυρωπων ειρηνευοντες 
 
 4, Κ. Luke 
 χ. 35 al. 
 g2Cor.vui.21. 
 1 Tim. V. 8 
 
 only. 
 
 δυΐ'α- 
 
 εαυτούς ί/νόίκουντες, ayaπητot, aWa ooTgh-La^e 
 " τοτΓον Tij ο<}γτ>• γί'γοαπται -γαρ ° Εμοί ^ ^κ^ίκησις, εyω ^^^^[■^ ^^^^ 
 
 \ ' ' 20''' "Tr " ' ' α ' "οιη• ΙΓ 
 
 Λίγεί κύριος. εαν ουι» πειτ'α ο εχσρος •ί•>-, 2c 
 
 αυτοί'' εαν όιφα, " πότιζε αυτόν. 
 
 . 19. 
 
 ■ ανταποδώσω 
 σου, ^ φωμι^ε 
 
 θίν. 
 
 τούτο kMarkix. 50. 
 
 11. 1 Thess. ν. 1.3<)nlv t. Sir.vi.fi. I — Luke xviii. .3, ft. Rev. vi. in. xix. 2. 4 Ki'nirs ix' 7 
 
 til I Cor. X. 14. XV. 58 al. fr. η Eph. iv. 27. Luke χ it. i). See Heb. xii. 17. ο Dkut. xxxii 35' 
 
 ρ Luke xviii. 7, 8. xxi 22. 2Ciir.Tii.ll. 2 Thes.s. i. 8. 1 Pel, ii. U only. Juiig. xi. 30. iich. xi. 35'rein 
 
 r Malt. iv. 2. v. (i al. Prov. xxv. 21, 22. s 1 Cor. xiii. 3 only. Num. xi. 4, 18 al. t u Matt, xxv 35 al 
 
 u Matt. X. 42. 1 Cor. iii. 2, &c. xii. 13. Rev. xiv. 8. 
 
 17. αποδοντες 238. — aft κα\α, ins ιΐ'ωπιον τον θεον και Α^ (Α' uncert, but om appy) : 
 ου μόνον ίνωττ. τ. Θ. α\\α και FG g ν arm (not ed-venet) Lucif al : Polycarp alliulg : 
 ττρονυουμ. ati του κηΚου (νωπ. θιον κ. ανθό. — for πάντων, των A-D'FG 1ί). 47• 55 
 harl tol guelph it Lucif al : t.\t (A.')BD'^EJ all vss Chr (aft ανβρ. in ed Mont : before in 
 Mtt's mss) Tlidrt (om αιΌρ.) Dam Thl Oec Ambrst Sodul Bed al : om 44-G. 80 al 
 (Polycarp). — αιΌρωπων to ανθρωττων om 48. — 19. aft οργή add θ(ον gotb {see note). — 
 aft ίκδικησκ: add ivci αττοδω goth : και g guelph syrf arm Tort Cypr Hil Ruf al.— 
 ανταποδω FG : retribuo goth. — 20. aWa tav (omg ovv) AB 5. 37• 5?. 67^. 73 all ν d' 
 Bas Dam Ruf Bed: tav (only) D'FG35. 80. lOG-8 al e g guelph goth Cypr al : tav yap 
 vss Did Aug &c: txt D^EJ most mss syr ar-pol and Chr Thdrt Thl Oec. —αντον to 
 αυτόν om (10!)? Scholz) 178 Sedul : και tav διψηση πυτιζ( αντ. (ΙΟϋ ? Scholz) : tav 
 
 correspondence as this. The sense then 
 must decide. In τα ΰψ'/λά φρονοϋνης, 
 the ΰψ);λίί are necessarily sM6;ec/z»e,the/o/iiy 
 thoughts of the man. But in τό\ς ταπιι- 
 νοϊς πυΐ'απαγόμίνοι the adj. is necessarily 
 objective ,• some outward objects, with which 
 the persons exhorted are συναπάγεσθαι. 
 And those outward objects are defined, if I 
 mistake not, by the το αυτό cU ά.λλήλου5 
 ψρονοΪΊ'τες. This spirit towards one an- 
 other is not tb be a spirit of liaughtiness, 
 but one of community and sympatliy, ' con- 
 descending to men of low estate,' as E. V. 
 admirably renders it. For συναττ., see reff. 
 and coinp. Zosimus, Hist. v. 6", cited by 
 Tholuck, καΐ αύτη ή Σπάρτη συναπήγιτο 
 Ty Kowy της 'Ελλάδος άλώπιι. — The in- 
 sertion of the seemingly incongruous /(/) 
 
 γίν εηυτυΐς is sufficiently accounted 
 
 for by reference to ch. xi. 25, where he had 
 stated this frame of mind as one to be 
 avoided by those whose very place in God's 
 church was owing to His free mercy. Being 
 uplifted one against another would be a 
 sign of this fault being present and opera- 
 tive. 17.] The constr. is resumed. 
 The Ap. now proceeds to exhort respecting 
 conduct to those without. ττρονοονμ. 
 καλά . . . .] from Prov. iii. 4, which has 
 ίνώττιον κυρίου και άιθρώπων. 
 18.] The £Ϊ δννα'όν, as well remarked by 
 Thol. and De Wette, is otjjectire on/i/ — not 
 * if you can,' but ' if it be possible ' — if 
 others will allow it. And fliis is further 
 defined by το ΐζ Ιιμών; all yovr part is to 
 be jjeace : whether you actually live peace- 
 
 E 
 
 ably or not, will depend then solely on how 
 others behave towards gou. 19.] So 
 
 Matt. V. 39, 40. άγα-π-ητοί] 'The 
 
 more difficult this duty, the more affection- 
 ately does the Ap. address his readers, with 
 this word.' Thol. δότ€ τόττον] ' allow 
 
 space,' i.e. ' ititerpose delag,' 'to anger.' So 
 Livy, viii. 32, " Legati circumstantes sellam 
 orabant, ut rem in posterum diem difl'erret, 
 et ine suce spatium, et consilio tempus, 
 daret." So that we must not understand 
 Ty opyy, ' your anger,' nor ^God's auger,' but 
 'auger,' generally; — 'give wrath room:' 
 ' proceed not to execute it hastily, but leave 
 it for its legitimate time, when He whose it 
 is to avenge, will execute it : make not the 
 wrath your own, but leave it for God.' So 
 in the main, but mostly understanding r. 
 op. του Otnv, Chrys., Aug., Theodoret, and 
 the great body of Comm. — Some Fathers 
 interpret it, ' yield to the auger (of your 
 adversary ') ; but tliis meaning for δότε 
 τόπον is hardly borne out. — The citation 
 varies from the LXX, which has tv ημίρ(} 
 ίκδικήσεως ανταποδώσω ; — and is nearer 
 the Heb., — ob-i'i Dp: ^), " mine is revenge 
 and requital." It is very remarkable, that 
 in Heb. x. 30 the citation is made in the 
 same words. 20.] The ούν implies 
 
 ' quod cum ita sit;' — carries on the sen- 
 tence with the assumption of the last thing 
 stated. This has not been understood, and 
 hence the alteration or omission of nvv in 
 the MSS. — What is meant by άνθρακα? 
 TTvpos σωρενσ-ει? ? The expression uvHp. 
 πυρ. occurs repeatedly in Psa. xviii., of the 
 ! 2
 
 420 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 ΧΙΤ. 21, 
 
 ανυυακας πυρός 
 του 
 
 yap ποιων 
 
 > - οι ^ _ f > 
 
 αυτού. μν νικώ υπο 
 
 α•γηνω το κακήν. 
 ΧίΐΙ. 1 Πάσα 
 
 C ' 'β ' 
 
 υποτασσίσσοί. ου 
 
 σωριυσίΐς εττι rrji» κίψαλτιν abde 
 κάκου, αλΑα νίκα tv τω 
 
 φυχη 
 
 ίςουσίαις 
 
 γαρ £στ(ν ίζουσια 
 
 η ~ d ι 'Ι 
 
 υεου τετα-^μίνηι ίίσιν. 
 
 υττερίχουσαις 
 ft μη ατΓΟ Ι7£0υ, 
 
 ωςτε ο 
 
 αντί- 
 ο cli. viii. 
 
 ν here only. 1. c. 
 
 Ps. xvii 8,12. 
 w 2 Tim. iii. 6 
 
 only. 1. c. 
 X ch. ii. it rrlf. 
 y "= Matt. xii. 
 
 27,28. Mnrk 
 
 xiv. 1 al. 
 ζ Acts ii. 43. 
 
 iii. 23. cb. 
 
 ii. 9. Gen. 
 
 xvii. 14. , ^^ η. , V 
 
 a=icor. XV. cti ot ουσοι υτΓο 
 
 24. Epii.iii. 
 
 10. vi. 12. Tit. iii.). b Phil. ii. 3. (iii. 8.) iv. 7. — 1 Pel. ii. 13 only. Exud. xxpi. 13 
 
 7al. Dan.vi.13. d Acts xiii. 48. xv. 2. e Acts xviii. (i reB. 
 
 δε 4(}. €>Ά. 11(5-77 al lectt 18. 14 arm goth.— ττυρος om 219'.— «ττισωρίυσίίς 57. 08: 
 rastro votcs (as if σα()ωσίΐς : GrsZi from Kniliel) goth. — rrjc κίφαλης Β. — 21. /xtj 
 ΐΊΚΌυ Λ. — αττο FG. — for iv τω αγ., a bono goth. 
 
 Chap. ΧΙΠ. 1. for τταηη-φυχη . . νποτασσισθω, πασαις . . . υττοτασσίσθί D'FG d' g 
 harl Iren Ambrst al : txt (MSS) ν e Orig Chr Thdrt Thl al Aug Did Jer Ruf Pelag Bed 
 al : παπα ψ. υπο τηις ίζονσιαις ούσα υποτασσεσβω arm : υπερ^χονσαις om ieth. — 
 ίίσιν ίζονσιαι lect 12. — for απο, νπο ABD^E^J all Bas Isid Chr Thdrt-ms Thl-comm 
 Oec-comm : txt D'E'FG all Orig Thdrt Dam Thl Oec-text. — rec aft ονσαι ins ίζουσιαι, 
 with D^J later inss nrly syrr al Chr Thdrt Thl Oec : om ABDFG 67' al lect 12 it ν 
 copt seth arm goth Orig Iren, Did Ambrst Aug al. — for νπο, απο lect 12. — rec bef Ofciv 
 ins του {corrii, but unnecesnai-y after a preposn), with B(e sil)J most mss Orig Thdrt 
 Chr (Mtt's msj) : om ADEFG b. 37- 4G. 77• 91-3. 109-7«-79. 23» al lectt 12. 13 al 
 
 divine punitive judgments. Can those be 
 meant here ? Clearly not, in their bare 
 literal sense. For however true it may be, 
 that ingratitude will add to the enemy's list 
 of crimes, and so subject him more to God's 
 punitive judgment, it is impossible that to 
 bring ibis about should be set as a pre- 
 cept, or a desirable thing among Christians. 
 Again, can the expression be meant of the 
 glow and burn of shame which would ac- 
 company, even in case of a profane person, 
 the receiving of benefits from an enemy .' 
 This may be meant ; but is not probable, 
 as not sufficing for the majesty of the sub- 
 ject. Merely to make an enemg ashamed 
 of himself, can hardly be ujiheld as a mo- 
 tive for action. I understand the words, 
 ' For in this doing, you u-ill be taking the 
 most effectual vengeance ;' as effectual as if 
 you heaped coals of fire on his head. 
 21.] If you sutfered yourselves to be pro- 
 voked to revenge, you would be yielding to 
 the enemy, — overcome by that which is 
 evil: do not thus,— but in this, and in all 
 things, ' overcome the evil (in others) by 
 your good.' 
 
 Chap. XIII. 1—7.] The duty of cheer- 
 ful obedience to the powers of the state. 
 It has been well observed (C'alv., Thol., De 
 Wette. See Neander, Pflanzung u. Leitung, 
 &c. 4th ed. p. 4(ίΟ ff.) that some special 
 reason must have given occasion to these 
 exhortations. We can hardly attribtite it 
 to the seditious s])irit of the Jews at Rome, 
 as their influence in the Christian Church 
 there would not be great ; indeed, from Acts 
 xxviii. the two seem to have been remark- 
 ably distinct. But disobedience to the civil 
 authorities may have arisen from mistaken 
 
 views among the Christians themselves as 
 to the nature of Christ's kingdom and its 
 relation to existing powers of this world. 
 And such mistakes would naturally be rifest 
 there, where the fountain of earthly power 
 was situated : and there also best and most 
 effectually met by these precepts coming 
 from apostolic authority. The way for 
 them is prepared by ver. 17 ff. of the fore- 
 going chapter. 1 Pet. ii. 1 2 fF. is parallel : 
 compare notes there. 1.] νποτασ- 
 
 σεσθω, see 1 Cor. xvi. IG, is reflective, 
 ' subject himself,' i. e. ' besubject of his 
 own free will and accord.' — ' Per there is 
 no power (in heaven or earth — no jwwer 
 at all) except from God ; and (so Si, 2 Cor. 
 vi. 15, 10. It introduces a second clause 
 as if μίΐ' had stood in the first) those that 
 are (the existing powers which we see about 
 us), are ordained hy God.' We may ob- 
 serve that the Ap. here pays no regard to 
 the question of the duty of Christians in 
 revolutionary movements. His precepts 
 regard an established power, be it what it 
 may. It, in all matters lawful, we are 
 bound to obey. But even the jjarental 
 power does not extend to things unlawful. 
 If the civil power commands us to violate 
 the law of God, we must obey God before 
 man. If it commands us to disobey the 
 common laws of humanity, or the sacred 
 institutions of our country, our obedience 
 is due to the higher and more general law, 
 rather than to the lower and particular. 
 These distinctions must be drawn by the 
 wisdom granted to Christians in the vary- 
 ing circumstances of human affairs : they 
 are all only subordinate portions of the 
 great duty of obedience to law. To obtain,
 
 ΧΙΙΤ. 1— G. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 421 
 
 τασσόμενος ry ^ ΐζ,ουσ'ια τί? του θίοΰ ^δίοταγ^ ^ "''^- '^'^^Γν.^'ίο?!. 
 ίστηκεν' οι οε ^ ανθίστηκοτες εαυτοις ' κοιμα λημφοντάι. Ιν'.η. 
 
 (popoQ τω ayaO( 
 
 οι yap άρχοντες ουκ: Eiatw 
 
 aye 
 
 ίο•γω 
 
 αΛΛα τω κακω. υελεις οε μη ψορεισυαι τϊ]ν εζ,ονσιαν \ ΐ3. ch. η. 2. 
 
 το ayuBov ττοΊει, και '" ε^είς '" ετταινον εζ αυτής' 
 
 yap οιακονος εστίν σοι εις το ayaUov. εαν οε το κακόν ΐ4 ijcor. 
 
 πο(7ίς, φόβου' ου yao ^ εική την '' μάνπίραν ^ φορεί' θεού 
 
 γαρ οιακονυς• εστπ', εκοικος εις opyjji' 
 
 πρασσοντι. οίο ava-y/cr? υττοτασσεσσίπ ου μόνον οια H'joniy. see 
 
 ' / '^1 C<ir. SI. 17. 
 
 την opyηv, άλλα και όια την συνειοησιν. οια 
 
 και ^ φόρους "^ τεΧειτε' ^ λειτουργοί yap θεού εισιν εις 
 
 ί. 8 (rec). 
 Mntt ix.l8. 
 1. fr. 
 . iii. 
 ;or. 
 11?) Isa. 
 xxsiii. 3. 
 l.-ing., ch.ii.7. 
 ,"■ m ch ii. 2!) al. 
 κακόν nch.viii. 28. 
 2 (xi-i. 
 nly. S 
 
 •. si. i: 
 τούτο yap p'iunVif. 
 
 . ' . 1 Cor. XT. 2. 
 
 Gal. iii. 4. 
 iv. U. Col. 
 
 ii. 18 only. Trov. xxriii. 2.'<. q Mnit. .xxvi. 52al. rilatt.xi.S. Jolm xix. 5. I Cor. xv. 49 
 
 (bi.s). James ii. 3 only. Prov. xvi. 23. s 1 Tlies.s. iv. 6 only t• Sir.xxx.fi. t I Tliess. v. S>. 
 
 tt = Hel). ix. 16, 23. η cli. ii. l.'i reff. &ia συι/., 1 Pet. ii. lit. ν Luke xx. 22. xxiii. 2 only. 
 
 Judg. i. 28. w = Malt. xvii. 24. X ch. xv. 6. Phil. ii. 25. Heb. i. 7. Tiii. 2 only. Josh. L 1 
 
 (alcx.J. 3 Kings x. 5. 
 
 Chr Dam Thl Oec. — 2. αντιστημίνης 238. — 3. rec των αγαθών epywv ά. των κακών 
 {corrn to plur to suit the sense), with D Έ J &c syrr al Chr Thdrt Thl Oec Ambrst-ed : 
 txt ABD'FG G. G7- it ν copt goth Clem Dam Iren Cypr Tert Aug Ruf Pacian Sedul Bed 
 al. — ie om 5. — τη ίζ,ονΊα 238. — ποίίΐς 93. — 4. σοι om FG 61. IK» (al ?) Ambrst (appy) 
 (not Iren Tert all). — ιις ayriOov B. — την μαχ. τον θίον 4. — yap om lect 8. — (κϋικος 
 om 178.— £ίς οί^γην om D'FG 177 d' g: hef eicciKog D^E 1. 3. 4. I7. 39. 4ϋ. 8ΐ)•7. 108- 
 9-13'-1β al lectt 8. 13 d^ ar-pol slav Chr Thdrt. — 5. for αναγκ. υττοτασσισθαι, νττο- 
 τασσεσθί DEFG (al ?) it goth Iren Sedulj al : -yK?j lectt 7. 8 {necessitate or -tail ν Aug 
 
 by lawful means, the removal or alteration μοναρχίαν ϊνίίείκνυτο. In ancient and 
 of an unjust or unreasonable law, is another modern times, the sword has been carried 
 part of this duty : for all powers among before sovereigns. It betokens the power 
 
 men must be in accord with the highest 
 power, the moral sense. But even where 
 law is hard and unreasonable, not disobedi- 
 ence, but legitimate protest, is the duty of 
 the Christian. 2.] άντιτασσ., see 
 
 above on υπόταση. Ιαυτοϊς κρίμα λ.] 
 
 ' shall receive for themselves (the dat. 
 incommodi) condemnation,' viz. pnnisfi- 
 ment from God, through His minister, the 
 civil power. 3.] And the tendency of 
 
 these powers is salutary : to encourage good 
 works, and discourage evil. It is not neces- 
 sary to set a note of interrogation after 
 Ιξονσίαν: the clause may be treated as 
 hypothetical, — see 1 Cor. vii. 18. Tholuck 
 observes, that this ver. is a token that the 
 Ap. wrote tlie Ep. before the commence- 
 ment of the Neronian peiseci/tion. Had 
 this been otherwise, the principle sXaXea by 
 him would have been the same; but he 
 could hardly have passed so apparent an 
 exception to it without remark. 4.] 
 
 την μιάχαιρα^, perhaps in allusion to the 
 dagger worn by the Casars, which was re- 
 garded as a symbol of the power of life and 
 death : so Tacitus, Hist. iii. β.'ϊ, of Vitellius, 
 " adsistenti Consuli exsolutum a latere 
 pugionem. velut jus necis vitaeque civium, 
 reddebat." Dio Cassius also, xlii. 27, men- 
 tions the wearing of τ'υ ζίφοι; on all occa- 
 sions by Antony, as a sign that he την 
 
 of capital punishment : and the reference 
 to it here is among the many testimonies 
 borne by Scripture against the attemjit to 
 abolish the infliction of the penalty of death 
 for crime in Christian states. ti% όργήν 
 
 seems to be inserted for the sake of paral- 
 lelism with (ΐς ayaOav above: it betokens 
 the character of the εκοίκησις, — that it 
 issues in wrath. The opyi] is referred to 
 in την opyljv, ver. 5. 5.] διό, because 
 
 of the divine appointment and mission of 
 the civil officer. ανάγκη—' it follows 
 
 that we must subject ourselves,' — there 
 is a moral necessity for subjection : — one 
 not only of terror but of conscience : comp. 
 ciu τον Kvpiov, I Pet. ii. 13. 6.] δια 
 
 τοϋτο . . καί is parallel with Sio, ver. 5, — 
 giving another result of the divine appoint- 
 ment of the civil power; — not dependent on 
 ver. 5. τελίϊτε is indicative, not im- 
 
 perative : the command follows ver. 7• — 
 'For they (the άρχοντα;) are ministers 
 of God, attending upon this very duty,' 
 viz Aftrni/iiytT)', — hardly (as Kojipe, (Jlsli., 
 Aleyer) φόρους rtXttr, for in ver. 7 the Ap. 
 has evidently in view the whole official cha- 
 racter of these XeiroopyoL Reiche, al., 
 construe, " For those who wait upon this 
 very thing are ministers of God," wliich 
 would require oi tic αΰτ. τ. προςκ. : — 
 Koppe, ' For λατουργοί are of God ;' —
 
 422 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. XIII. 
 
 ych.su.i2 αυτο τοΰτο ^' 7Γξ>οςκαξ>τίροΰΐ'τες. '' ^ αττόδοτε ττασιν τας αβπε 
 zrh.xii.i7 " ο06ΐλος, τω ^^ τον " φόρον τον ^ φορον, τω το ' τίλος το 
 ''32."'i"or. ^ τίλος, τω τύν ψφον τον φόβον, τω την Tt^tiju τηι> 
 aa'empsT'phii. Tiunv. ^ MrjStvi urjSfv οφει'λίτε, ει utj to αλλί/λους 
 w.ner, 5 ofi. ayavav. ο yao ayairuiv τον έτερον νομον πεπΛϊ/ρωκεν 
 ^zx^Tnllll'^TOyap ^ ου μοι^ίνσίΐς, ου φονεύσεις, ου κΧεφεις, ουκ 
 difii.viu.'^' ίττιθυμησί^ις, και "ει τις '"'έτερα εντολή, εν τω λόγω 
 eExoD.xx. τούτω ^ ανακεφαλαιονται, εν ^ τω " άyaπησεις 'τον ττΑησιον 
 
 12, iSlc. <• ' , 1(1 r ' / i - Λ ' ^ ' 
 
 *7T,ro."i.ui. σου ως σεαυτον. ^^ η ayaπη τω πλησίον κακόν ουκ 
 'on'iyi:'" ^ εpyάtετaι' ^ ιτλίψωμα ονν νόμου η Αγάττί/. ^^ "" κπί τούτο Cj^•; 
 
 ^si'eMi.rkix -nreff h Levit. xis. 18. i Matt. v. 43 al. fr. ch. xv.2. k= Malt. vu. 23. xxvi. 10. ABCD 
 
 ch. ii. lu a'l." Ps. xiv. 2. I = liere only. m 1 Cur. vi. 0. 8. EFG J 
 
 Ambrst-mss BeJ, and υποτασσεπθ().—6. και om FG.— 7. rec aft anoc. ins ουν (insnfnr 
 connexion with the preceding), W\U\ D^EFGJ &c vss Chr Thl Oec Ambrst al : roivvv 
 Tlulrt: om ABD C?- am demid tol copt sah (Orig,) Dam Cypr Aug Ruf Cassiod.— 
 at end, add και Sort την δοξαν τω την ίοζαν sah.— 8. οφηλοντίς 4 : nil jjroderit vobis 
 nisi (οφίληται) ffith.— rec αγαπ. αλλ. {corrn of order to agree with next clause/), with 
 (E.')J ^c syr al Thl Oec : txt ABD(E?)FG 5. 7». 80. 124-77-78-7» all it ν Syr arm vss 
 Orig Cyr Chr Thdrt Dam Cypr al. — for (τερον, TrXijatov ν Syr sah Orig Epiph Ambr. — 
 9. for 7-0 να<), γίγρππΓίΐι yap FG g Ambr: (v τω λίγίΐν sah. — ου /^οιχ. om ar erp sah : ins 
 aft ^ovfuT., Syr Clem Orig Dial Ruf-eomm. — υν φον. om 5.— rec aft κλ(ψίΐς, add ου 
 φίνδομαρτνηητκς {corrn to the decalogue), with mss copt al Chr Oec Ruf (var transp al) : 
 txtABDEFGJ 17.39. 46-7-8. 7-2-0. 89.109-15-HJ-J1-2-1-77-78. 219 all lectt 8. 12. 13v-ms 
 ittolSyrsahClemjOrigjalgr-latff: υυκ tniti om 54 Clemj Orig, Chr.— ίστιν εντολή 17. 
 93.— rec τουτ. τω λογ., with AJ Sec : txt BDEFG 45 al copt syr Origj. — εν τω om BFG it 
 V lat-tf : ins (MSS) Clem Orig Chr Thdrt al : tv om Cleuii Origj.— rec εαντ. with FGJ &c 
 Clem Chr Thl Oec : txt ABDE 5. 44-8. 91-'-3. 1 13 al lect 1 2 sah Origj Clem (in Wetst) Dial 
 Thdrt Dam.— 10. η ay. to εργαζ. om Α.—τυν πλησ. ν g (as a var readg) goth Cyr Ruf al. 
 —01; κατεργαζ. D' 17. 72-3. 213-38 (ουκ: κατ. 89) al.— for ovv, δε D-FG it Aug-oft (txt 
 Augi) : γαρ 115 (al ?) : quia Syr : om 93 lect 12 seth Oros al.— 11. τούτον C6-marg 74, 
 
 but this again would require 01 yap λειτ. — amittitur, sed potius reddendo multipli- 
 
 Tertullian remarks, Apolog. xlii., that what catur." ιτί-ιτλήρωκίν, 'hath (in the 
 
 the Romans lost by the Christians refusing act) fulfilled :' comp. the perfects, John 
 
 to bestow gifts on their temples, they gained iii. 18. ch. xiv. 23. νόμ,ον is not the 
 
 bv their conscientious payment of taxes. Christian law, but the Mosaic law of the 
 
 7!] Before the accusatives supply αίΓοΰίτι, decalogue. " This recommendation of Love 
 
 as the correlative of άττήδοτε. φόρος is has, as also the similar one Gal. v. 23, κατά 
 
 ' tax,' or ' tribute,' — direct payment for των τυιοντων οΰκ εστίν νόμος, — an apolo- 
 
 state purposes : τέλος, ' custom, 'toll,' vec- getic reference to the upholders of the law, 
 
 tigal. φόβος, to those set over us and and depends on this evident axiom, — ' He 
 
 having power: τιμή, to those, but hkewise who practises Love, the higher duty, has, 
 
 to all on whom the state has conferred dis- even before he does this, fulfilled the law, 
 
 tinction. S—IO.^ Exhortation to the lotver.' " OeWctte. 9.] άνακίφαλ., 
 
 universal love of others. 8.] όφείλετβ 'brought under one head,' — ' united in 
 
 is not indie, (as Koppe, Reiche, al.j, which the one principle from which all flow.' 
 
 would require οϋύενι ουδέν, — and would be 10.] All the commandments of the law 
 
 inconsistent with the όφηλαί just men- above cited are we^a^/i-e .• the formal fulfil- 
 
 tioned, — but imperative: 'Pag all other ment of them is therefore attained, by M'or/i- 
 
 debts : be indebted in the matter of love ing no ill to one's neighbour. What greater 
 
 alone.' This debt increases the more, the things Love works, he does not now say : it 
 
 more it is paid : because the practice of love fulfils the law, by abstaining from that 
 
 makes the princi]ile of love deeper and more which the law forbids. 11 — 14.] 
 
 active. Tholuck cites Aug. Ep. 62, ad Enforcement of the foregoing, and oc- 
 
 Coelest. : " Redditur enim (caritas), cum casion taken for fresh exhortations, by 
 
 impenditur, debetur autem etiam si reddita the consideration that the day of the 
 
 fuerit ; quia nullum erat tempus quando Lord is at hand. 11.] και τοΰτο, 
 
 impendenda jam non sit, nee cum redditur ' and this,' i. e. ' and let tis do this,' viz.,
 
 7—12. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ Ρ£2ΜΑΙ0ΥΣ. 
 
 423 
 
 ειόοτες τυν καιρόν, Ότί " ωρα " ηοη ημάς εξ υττίΌυ H=andconstr., 
 
 ρ» /J-.- \η•/ f-r /•ΛΜ Gftl.xxix 7. 
 
 ■^ ζ-γΐρυηνηι νυν γαρ eyyvrepov ι^μων η σωτήρια η οτε ^^,',^'χϋ"' 
 
 ^ ίπιστίυσαμίν. η νυζ, "" ττροίκοφίν, η δί ημίρα 'ίίγγικεν" ο = ch i. ίο. 
 
 υ ' η ' /ι t » ν •' - ν ' W ' ^ ' /Ί ρ = ^Ρ'•• ^• ^'*• 
 
 απονωμίϋα υνν τα ^pjo του σκότους, ενουσωμευα oseeiThess. 
 
 q comp., here οηΐν. = Mutt. xxiv. 32 a!. r=Actsxix.2. 1 dr. iii. 5. XT. 2. Eph. i. 13. 
 
 sLukeii. 02. Gal. i. 14 2 Tim. ii. Itj. )ii. 9, 13 only. See Sir. li. 17. t = Matt. iii. 2 al. 
 
 α Acts vii ftSreti. = Col. ili. 8. ν See John vi. 28, 29. viii. 3i', 41. Gal. v. 19. 1 Thess. i. 3 al. 
 
 w = 1 Cor. XT. 03, b4. Eph. iv. 24. Ti. 11. 
 
 and aft ίΐδοτις, sah. — ιδοντες A'FG^. — οτι ovv sah. — rec ημάς η^η {corrnfor euphony ?), 
 with FGJ ^si (nrly) g goth al Clem Chr Thdrt Thl Oec: txt [νμας AC 37. 76 Clem : 
 om syr, Ruf) ABCDE 37 ν d e al Dam latff. — Βγιρθηναι vw C-. — γαρ ora 48'. C2-5. 
 72. 100. llo al : antem g. — ίττίσηνπαμΐν αντο sah.— 12. Ct om sah. — for αττο^^ωμ., 
 ατΓοβαΧωμίθα DEFG. — rec και tvcva. {corrn, no conirasl seeming to be implied), with 
 C^D'FGJ &c vss Chr Thdrt al lat-fi": txt ABC'D^E copt sah goth Clem Dam.— for όπλα. 
 
 live in no debt but that of love (see reff.), 
 for other reasons, and especially for this 
 following one. ώρα ήδη Ιγίρθήναι] 
 
 "The Inf. Aor. here, as after verbs of 
 willing, ordering, &c., betokens the com- 
 pletion of the act in question. See Winer, 
 § 45, 8." De Wette. — iiirvos here = the 
 state of worldly carelessness and indifference 
 to sin, which allows and practises the tpya 
 τυν σκοΓοιις. The imagery seems to be 
 taken originally from our Lord's discourse 
 concerning His coming : see ^latt. xxiv. 
 42. Mark xiii. 33, and Luke xxi. 28 — 36', 
 where several points of similarity to our 
 vv. 11 — 14 occur. Ιγγυτ. ήμ. ή σωτ. 
 
 η οτ€ ΙτΓίστ.Ι σωτηρία, as άττολντοωσις 
 Luke xxi. 28, and ch. viii. 23, of the accoin- 
 plinhment of our salvation, ημών may 
 be taken with iyyvrtpor, 'nearer to us,' 
 see ch. x. 8. But (γγιζίΐ t) άπυλύτρωσις 
 ■ΐΐμών Luke xxi. 28, seems to favour the 
 usual connexion with πωτηρία. Ιιτιστ.] 
 
 ' we first believed ;' — see reff. — Without 
 denying the legitimacy of an individual ap- 
 plication of this truth, and the importance 
 of its consideration for all Christians of all 
 ages, a fan• exegesis of this passage can 
 hardly fail to recognize the fact, that the 
 Ap. here as well as elsewhere (I Thess. iv. 
 17. 1 Cor. XV. 51), speaks of the coming of 
 the Lord as rapidly approaching. Prof. 
 Stuart, Comm. p. 521, is shocked at the 
 idea, as being inconsistent with the inspira- 
 tion of his writings. How this can be, I 
 am at a loss to imagine. " Of that day 
 
 AND HOTR KNOWETH NO MAN, NO NOT 
 THE ANGELS IN HEAVEN, NOR THE SoN : 
 
 BUT THE Father only." !Mark xiii. 32. 
 — And to reason, as Stuart does, that be- 
 cause Paul corrects in the Thessalonians 
 the mistake of imagining it to be imme- 
 diately at hand (or even aclvally come [.'], 
 see note on Ινίστηκιν there), therefore he 
 did not himself expect it soon, is surely 
 quite beside the purpose. The fact, that 
 the nearness or distance of that day was 
 unknown to the Apostles, in no way affects 
 
 the prophetic announcements of God's 
 Spirit by them, concerning its preceding 
 and accompanying circumstances. The 
 ' day and hour ' formed no part of their 
 inspiration ; — the details of the event, did. 
 And this distinction has singularly and pro- 
 videntially turned out to the edification of 
 all subsequent ages. While the prophetic 
 declarations of the events of that time 
 remain to instruct us, the eager expecta- 
 tion of tlie time, which they expressed in 
 their day, has also remained, a token of 
 the true frame of mind in which each suc- 
 ceeding age (and each succeeding age a 
 fortiori) should contemplate the ever-ap- 
 proaching coining of the Lord. On the 
 certainty of the event, our faith is grounded : 
 by the uncertainty of the time our hope is 
 stimulated, and our watchfulness aroused. 
 See Prolegg. to vol. iii. ch. v. § 4. 5—10. 
 
 12.] ή vij|, the lifetime of the 
 world, — the power of darkness, Eph. vi. 
 12 : ή ήμ€'ρα, the day of the resurrection, 
 1 Thess. V. 4, 5. Rev. xxi. 25 ; of which 
 resurrection we are already partakers, and 
 are to xvalk as such. Col. iii. 1 — 4. 1 Thess. 
 V. 5 — 8. ' Therefore,— let us lay aside (as 
 it were a clothing) the works of darkness 
 (see Eph. v. 11 — 14, where a similar strain 
 of exhortation occurs), and put on (ce cor- 
 responding to an understood /usi') the ar- 
 mour of light' (described Eph. vi. 11 ff. — 
 the arms belonging to a soldier of light — 
 one who is of the v\oi φωτός and υιοί 
 ΐΐμΐμας, 1 Thess. V. 5, — not, as Grot. 
 ' arma splendentia .' ' 13.] κοίταις, 
 
 in a bad sense : the act itself being a defile- 
 ment, when unsanctified by God's ordi- 
 nance of marriage. See reff. — άσελγίίαΐξ, 
 plural of various kinds of wantonness : so 
 νποκρίσιις, φθόνους, κατ αλαΧιάς, 1 Pet. ii. 1. 
 
 14.] Chrys. says, on Eph. iv. 24, 
 οντω και ίπϊ ^(Xoir λίγομιν, ύ Stlva τον 
 Sitva ίνεδΰσατο, την πολλ/}ν άγάττην 
 λίγοιτίς, κ. την άθιά\ίΐπτοι> σνιοικτιαν. 
 See examples in Wetst. — The last clause is 
 to be read, της σαρκός πρόνοιαν μη
 
 42i 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 ΧΙΙΤ. 18, 14. 
 
 δί 
 
 ε τα 07Γ 
 
 λα 
 
 S = 1 Tliess. ν. 
 
 f>, 8. •2 Pet. 
 
 i. 19. 
 τ 1 C.ir. xiv.40. 
 
 lThess.iv.12 
 
 only t- 
 ζ — 1 Thess. iv. 
 
 12 al. fr. 
 a Mat., cli. iv. 
 
 12.) Gal. V. 
 
 21. 1 P.t. 
 
 iv. 3 only t• 
 b Luke xxi.a4 
 
 Gal. V 21 
 
 only. 
 I.«a. xxviii. 7. Hagg. i. It. 
 e ch i. £Hal. ef 2 Cor. xii. 
 
 XX. 3 alex. h =■ ver. 3 al 
 
 13 
 
 π£θΐ7ΓαΓ7}σω/ΐίΐ', μη 
 
 εν ημίρα 
 
 ίυσγημυνως abcd 
 
 και 
 
 σασί 
 
 e 
 
 JctiQ, μη 
 
 1^ aWcl 
 και της 
 
 κοιταις 
 
 εΐ'ου- 
 
 σαρκος 
 
 του <ρωτος. '" ως 
 
 κωμοις και μί 
 ασίΑ-γίίαις, μη epi^i και t^\' 
 ε του κυοιον Ιϊ/σουυ γ^ιστυν 
 τΓοονοιαν μη ττοΐίΐσθί εις ' ίπιθυμιας. 
 XIV. ^ Τον δε ^ ασθίνουντα τ\} ^ ττίστει ττροςΧπμβά- 
 
 ix. lOreff. d Mark vii. 22. 2 Cor. xii. 21 al. 1 Pet. iv. 3 al. 
 
 . V. 20. f = Acts xiii. 4.'> reiT. g Ait.'s xxiv. 2 only. Josh, 
 
 ch. i 24 relT. k ch. iv. 19 reft'. 1 = Acts xxviii. 2 relt'. 
 
 tpya ADE 32. i)3 d e Oros.— 13. εοισι κ. ζηλοις Β Ambr.— 14. rcc «λλ, with CDTGJ 
 &c : txt ΑΒΟΈ SiC— κυοιον om Β : add rj /ίων sah. — χ(κ ιησ. Β Goth : χυ. om al Ambr. 
 — Kcti om D'FG d g Sedul. — aft σαρκ. ins 7}μων sah. — εν ίττιθυμιαις FG it ν lat -ΙΓ: ίΐς• 
 iTTiOvfunv AC('E.') 1 Cyr Ath Thdrt-comm-mSj Dam: ev ετηθυμια slav Ambr: txt 
 (BD) .' Clem Psign Chr Thdrt Thl Oec. 
 
 Chap. XIV. 1. tv τη πιστ. sah.— λογισμών 37- 4V. 6β2. 73. 89. 109-14-79 al Chr- 
 
 ΐΓοιεΊσθε \ εις εττιθνμΊας, — not της σαρκός 
 ττίΐόΐ'οιαν I μι) ποιείσθί εις έπιθιηΰίΐς ; — 
 and rendered, ' Take not (any) forethought 
 for the flesh, to fulfil its lusts,' not 
 ' Take not {yom•) foielhmtght for the flesh, 
 so, as tofu/fil i/s lusfs (SBartct beg Seibcg; 
 bod) alfo/ ba^ ex ind}t geil werbc/ Luth.). 
 
 This latter would be την πρόνοιαν τ. σαρκ. 
 μη π. εις εττιθ., — or της σ. τΐρόν. ποιεΧσθε 
 μη εις εττιΒ. : see constr. of the next verse. 
 Chap. XIV. 1 — XV. 13.] 
 On the conduct to be pursued to- 
 wards WEAK AND SCRUPULOUS BRE- 
 THREN. — There is some doubt who the 
 άσθενονντες rij πίστει were, of whom the 
 Ap. here treats; whether they were as- 
 cetics, or Judaizers. Some habits men- 
 tioned, as e. g. the abstinence from all 
 meats, and from wine, seem to indicate the 
 former : whereas the observation of days, 
 and the use of such expressions as κοικόν, 
 and again the argument of ch. xv. 7 — 13, 
 as plainly point to the latter. The diffi- 
 culty may be solved by a proper combina- 
 tion of the two views. The over-scrupulous 
 Jew became an ascetic by compulsion. He 
 was afraid of pollution by eating meats 
 sacrificed or wine poured to idols : or even 
 by being brought into contact, in foreign 
 countries, with casual and undiscoverable 
 uncleanness, which in his own land he 
 knew the articles offered for food would be 
 sure not to have incurred. He therefore 
 abstained from all prepared food, and con- 
 fined himself to that which he could trace 
 from natural growth to his own use. We 
 have examples of this in Daniel (Dan. i.), 
 Tobit (Tob. i. 12), some Jewish priests 
 mentioned by Josephus, Life, !j 3, who 
 having been sent prisoners to Rome, ουκ 
 ίΚελάθοντο της εις τΰ ΟεΧυν ευσέβειας, 
 διετρεφοντο ίε σύκοις και καρύοις. And 
 Tholuck refers to the Mishna as containing 
 precepts to this effect. All difficulty then 
 is removed, by supposing that of these over- 
 
 scrupulous Jews some had become converts 
 to the gospel, and with neither the ob- 
 stinacy of legal Judaizers, nor the pride of 
 ascetics (for these are not hinted at here), 
 but in weakness of faith, and tlie scruples 
 of an over-tender conscience, retained their 
 habits of abstinence and observation of 
 days. On this account tlie Ap. cliarac- 
 terizes and treats them mildly : not with 
 the severity which he employs towards the 
 Colossian Judaizing ascetics and those men- 
 tioned in 1 Tim. iv. 1 ff". — The question 
 treated in I Cor. viii. was somewhat dif- 
 ferent : there it was, concerning meat 
 actually offered to an idol. In 1 Cor. x. 
 25 — •ζ7, he touches the same question as 
 here, and decides against the stricter view. 
 See the whole matter discussed in Tho- 
 luck's Comm. in loc, De Wette's Hand- 
 buch, and Stuart's Introd. to this chap, in 
 his Comm. 1 — 12.] Exhortation 
 
 TO MUTUAL FORBEARANCES, ENFORCED 
 BY THE AXIOM, THAT EVERY MAN MUST 
 SERVE GoD ACCORDING TO HIS ΟΛΥΝ SIN- 
 CERE PERSUASION. 1.] The general 
 duty of a reconciling and uncontroversial 
 spirit towards the weak in faith. — The Se 
 binds this on to the general exhortations 
 to mutual charity in ch. xiii. : q. d. ' in 
 the particular case of the weak in faith, 
 &c. :' but also imphes a contrast, which 
 seems to be, in allusion to the Christian 
 perfection enjoined in the preceding verses, 
 — ' but do not let your own realization of 
 your state as children of light make you 
 intolerant of short-coming and infirmity in 
 others.' άσθ., see reff. : the particular 
 weakness consisted in a want of broad and 
 independent principle, and a consequent 
 bondage to prejudices. ττίστις therefore 
 is used in a general sense, to indicate the 
 moral soundness conferred by faith, — the 
 whole character of the Christian's conscience 
 and practice, resting on faith. τ\ι, better 
 ' the faith,' than ' his faith :' ' weak in his
 
 XIV. i_4. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 425 
 
 νίσΐ/ε μη ίΐς οιακρισίΐς 
 ^ πιστίυίί (paynv τταντα, ο δε 
 τον μη εσθιοντα 
 ίσΟιοντα 
 
 ° οια\ο•γισμων. ° 
 
 ^ Aayava 
 
 ο εσυιων 
 
 O'u 
 
 εσϋιων τυν 
 
 7Γξ>οςε\αβίτο 
 τω ώιω κυξ)ΐψ 
 
 μη 
 
 ασθίνων 
 μη 
 κριν&τω 
 
 ιχαι 
 εζουθενί/τω, 
 
 υς 
 
 εσ 
 
 δέ 
 
 Πξν m 1 Cor. sii. 10. 
 " If h V. 14 
 
 j.ib 
 
 Ο Οίος γαρ 
 
 αυτόν 
 
 συ τις ει ο '^ κρίνων aWoroiov " Οίκίτην 
 
 H b. 
 
 only. 
 xxxvi 
 
 1 C .r. Hi. 20. 
 
 James ii. 4al. 
 
 ο JlHit. xiii.lS 
 
 al. ch.ix.21 
 
 στηκίΐ η ττιτττεί. 
 
 χ ^ 
 
 Λιι— Q Matt. xiii. 
 
 ^^ -i't II τ ..1' 
 
 σταΟησίται δε, v.. ^^-β. Luke 
 
 xi. 42 only. Gi-n. Ix. 3. r = Luke xriii. 9. ver. 10. 1 Cor. i. 2S. vi. 4 al. Pror. i. 7. s = Malt. 
 
 Tii. 1. John vii. -'4. Col.ii. Ifi. James iv. 11. t Luke xvi. 12. Act.s vii. 6. Ps. cviii. 11. 
 
 nLukexvi. 13. Acts x. 7. 1 Pet. ii. 18 only . Gen. ix. 2S, 26. ν Mark iii. 31. xi. 25. otherwise, 
 
 PaiiloiilT. 1 Cor.xvi. 13. Gal. v. 1. Phil. i. 27. iv. 1. 1 Thess. iii. 8. 2 Thess. ii. Id. Exod. xir. 13 alex. 
 w = ch. xi. 22. 1 Cur. x. 12. χ 2 Cor. ix. 8. xiii. 3 ouly t. 
 
 comm Thdrt Thl-comm Oec— 2. ra τταντα lOi}. — ος οε ασθ. ΤΟ.— ΐσΘίίτωΌ'ΤΟά- 
 g \ (mandiicei) sah seth slav Ruf-te.xt (not Tert Jerj Aug,) Ambrst Pelag al.— 3. for 
 ίξουθίΐ'., κρινίτω A 68 lect 5. — rec και ο μη, with D^EJ &c vss Thdrt Thl Oec lat-ff: 
 ο μη copt Chr-comm: ovSt ο μη {omg μη aft) FG g: txt ABCD' 5 al d• goth Clemg 
 Dam. — ο yap βίος 77- — 4. rec ίυι•ατος yaci tariv {corrn to more usual exprn), with J 
 &c Thdrt al : also, omg tariv, D^E Bas Chr (syr| add ίστη>) : txt ABCD(' sic' Tisch)FG. 
 — rec for Kvpioc, θίος {corrn to suit ver 'Λ ? βίος there does not vary), with C^DEFGJ 
 &c it V syr al Chr Thdrt al : txt ABC v-ms copt sah arm goth Augj Oros Opt and (addg 
 (subj.) faith' would be opposed to 'strong saved :' though that also may be expanded 
 
 in his (subj.) faith,' ' his J'aith' remainin 
 in substance the same : whereas here the 
 (subj.) faith itself is weak, and ' weak in 
 the faith ' = holding the faith imperfectly, 
 i. e. not being able to receive the faitli in 
 its strength, so as to be above such preju- 
 dices. irposXa^p.] 'give him your 
 hand,' as Syr. (Thol.) : ' count him one of 
 you :' opposed to rejecting or discouraging 
 him. μ.ή €is] ' but not with a view 
 to:' 'do not adopt him as a brother, in 
 order then to begin ' . . . διακρίσ*. διαλ.] 
 ' discernments of thoughts,' lit. : i. e. 
 ' disputes in order to settle the points on 
 which he has scruples.' In both the reft"., 
 διά<ρισις has the meaning of ' discernment 
 of ' the power of distinguishing between.' 
 And διαλογισμοί in the N. T. implies 
 (ordinarily in a bad sense) ' thoughts :' 
 what kind of thoughts, the context must 
 determine. Here, evidently, those scruples 
 in him, in which his weakness consists, — 
 and those more enlightened views in you, 
 by which you would fain remove his scru- 
 ples. Do not let your association of him 
 among you be with a view to settle these 
 disputes. The above ordinary meanings 
 of the words seem to satisfy the sense, and 
 to agree better with it ς than 'adalterca- 
 tiones disputationutn,' as Beza, or ' ad cer- 
 tamina cogitationum,' as Estius : — and are 
 adopted by most of the ancient and modern 
 Comm. 2.] The os ^ev, the strong in 
 faith, so indicated by what follows, is op- 
 posed to ύ ci άσΟινών (not to be taken ύ 
 0£, άσθίΐ'ών, λ-.τ.λ.), by which roi' άσθε- 
 ί'οΰΐ'τα of ver. I is resumed. iriaTcvei 
 φαγ€Ϊν, either ' believes that he may 
 (ίξίϊΐΌΐ) eat,' — or 'ventures to eat.' 
 The latter is favoured by Acts xv. 1 1 , 
 τηστεΰομεν σωθήναι, ' we trust to be 
 
 into ' we believe that we shall be saved,' as 
 E. V. λάχ. εσθ.] See remarks intro- 
 
 ductory to this chapter. 3.] There is 
 
 no need to supply πάντα after εσθ. and μη 
 ίσθ. I would rather take ό έηθ. as 'the 
 eater,' and ό μή ίσθ. ' the abstainer.' 
 εξονθ., for his weakness of faith, — κρινετω, 
 for his laxity of practice. — ' For God has 
 accepted (adopted into his family) him' (i. e. 
 the eater, who was judged, — his place in 
 God's family doubted : not the abstainer, 
 who was only despised, set at nought, — and 
 to whom the words cannot, by the constr., 
 apply). 4.] ' Who art thou (see ch. 
 
 ix. 20) that judgest the servant of an- 
 other (viz. as De W., of Christ, — for ό 
 κύριος in this passage is marked, vv. 8, 9, 
 as being Christ, — and the Master is the 
 same throughout, ό θεός before is uncon- 
 nected with this verse) 1 to his own mas- 
 ter (dat. commodi or incommodi according 
 as στ. or ττίτττ. befalls : ' it is his own mas- 
 ter's matter, and his alone, that ') he stands 
 (' remains in the place and estimation of a 
 Christian, from which thou wouldest eject 
 him ;' not, as Calv., Grot., Estius, Wolf, al., 
 ' stands hereafter in the judgment,' which 
 is not in question here : see 1 Cor. x. 12) 
 or falls ifrom his place, see above) : but 
 he shall stand (notwithstanding thy doubts 
 of the correctness of his practice) . for God 
 is able to keep him upright ' (in faith and 
 jiractice. These last words are inapplicable, 
 if standing and falling at the great day are 
 meant). — Notice, this argument is entirely 
 directed to the weak, who uncharitably 
 judges the strong, — not vice versa. The 
 wea/c imagines that the strong cannot be a 
 true servant of God, nor retain his stedfast- 
 ness amidst such tem])tation. To this the 
 Ap. answers, (1) that such judgment belongs
 
 426 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 vliereonlv? " \ f f 
 
 Scecli.iii.31. VOTii ΎΟΟ Ο KVpiOQ 
 ζ = Aiti xiii. . Γ , Λ 
 
 πλί 
 
 iSt'oj ϊ'οΤ " πληξ)θ(Ι>οξ)ίίσϋω 
 
 στησαι αυτοί'. "" ος• μίν ' κρίνει ημ^ραν 
 0£ ^ κρίνει ττασαν ημίξ)αν. ίκαστος iv 
 ο '^ φρονων την -ημίραν 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 a = cli. 
 
 Luke xiii 2. " 
 
 b = eh iv. L'l. τω 
 
 17. Lnkei.V '' Kvpuo ^ (|){ioi;£/[, /Cat Ο jur) '^ ψ^ονων την Ύ]μίραν, '^ κνξ>ίω 
 
 ' ' ' η' <ι ί»/ι/ ρί 
 
 ίσϋίων 
 
 only.) Eccles. 
 
 csJ"ciIviii.r. ου ' (^ρονίϊ] 
 
 και ο 
 yap τω Οίω' και ο 
 'γαριστει τω θεω. 
 
 retr. 
 d dat., ch.vi. 2, 
 Klal. Winer, 
 }31.3. τω = jy 
 πατρί fiTip- 
 Ter, Dion. Hal. iii. p. 153. θΐοϊ( τ^θνηκβν ούτοι, Soph. Aj. ilUU 
 
 κυ^ίω εσΟ 
 μη ίσθιων ' /cupioj 
 ' ουοίίς "yap ημών 
 
 e ch. i. 8 relf. 
 
 (ει, 
 ουκ 
 
 ευχαριστεί 
 εσθιει και 
 
 61 
 
 ουΓοιι) Syr ar-erp.— 5. ος μ(ν yan AC 2G. 39 al it ν goth Ruf Atnbrst lat-if (not Aug, 
 Jer„). — ίκαστ. St 5. 37 al Syr. — tv om A 'Λ8. 54 Chr Thdrt. — 6. και ο μη ψρ. την ημ. κ. 
 ου φρ. om ABC-DEFG 23. 57. 07^ (al .') it ν copt seth Aug Jer Ruf Ainbrst Pelag 
 al-latt {pausing over from φρονιι to φμονίΐ ?) (om from ημευαν to ημιραν (Ui, ft-om 
 taOtti to iffffifi 71-3 lect 19 : from τω θίω to τω ΘίΜ J Chr Matt's ms,) : ins C^J mss 
 nrly syrr arr slav Chr (text) Thdrt (text) Bas Dam Thl Oec. — rcc bef ο ισθ., om και (for 
 uniformity loith the former clause), with many mss slav-rec : ins ABCDEFGJ 17. 37-9. 
 46-8. 72-3-4. 91. 100-8-9-10-13-78. 219 lect 8 it ν Syr arr Chr Thdrt Bas Dam Thl Oec 
 copt arm slav (exc mod) Ruf Ambrst Pelag al. — for ίνχ. γαρ (om 4), και ίνχ. 31. 43 
 al Syr ar-erp arm slav (exc mod) al latt Clem Isid Dam. — for θίω (1st), κνριω A 52: 
 Creatori Ambrst. — 7. at beg (but qu ? it is not clear from Grsb and Scholz) ins και 
 
 only to Christ, ivhose servant he is: (2) 
 that God's almighty Power is able to keep 
 him np, and tviil do so. 5.] ' One man 
 
 (tlie weak) esteems (selects for honour, — 
 Kpivti (lUav τιμής) one day above (refF.) 
 another day ; another (the strong) esteems 
 {i'lUnv ri/tTjc) every day. Let each be fully 
 satisfied in his own mind.' — It is an in- 
 teresting question, what indication is here 
 found of the observance or non-observance 
 of a day of obligation in the apostolic 
 times. The Ap. decides nothing ,• leaving 
 every man's own mind to guide him in the 
 point. He classes the observance or non- 
 observance of particular days, with the eat- 
 ing or abstaining from particular meats. 
 In both cases, he is concerned with things 
 which he evidently treats as of absolute in- 
 difference in themselves. Now the question 
 is, supposing the divine obligation of one 
 day in seven to have been recognized by 
 him in any form, cow\A he have thus spoken.' 
 The obvious inference from his strain of 
 arguing is, that he knew of no such obliga- 
 tion, but believed all times and days to be, 
 to the Christian strong in faith, alike. I 
 do not see how the passage can be other- 
 wise understood. If any one day in the 
 week were invested with the sacred charac- 
 ter of the Sabbath, it would have been 
 wholly impossible for the Ap. to commend 
 or uphold the man who judged all days 
 worthy of equal honour,— who as in ver. 6 
 paid no regard to the (any) day. He must 
 have visited him with his strongest disap- 
 ])robaHon, as violating a command of God. 
 / thevejore infer, that sabbatical obligation 
 to keep any day, whether seventh or first, 
 was not recognized in apostolic times. It 
 
 must be carefully remembered, that this 
 inference does not concern the question of 
 the observance of the Lord's Day as an 
 institution of the Christian Church, analo- 
 gous to tiie ancient Sabbath, binding on us 
 from considerations of humanity and reli- 
 gious expediency, and by the rules of that 
 branch of the Church in which Pi-ovidence 
 has placed us, but not in any way inheriting 
 the divinely-appointed obligation of the 
 other, or the strict prohibitions by which its 
 sanctity was defended. [The reply com- 
 monly furnished to these considerations, 
 viz. that the Apostle was speaking here 
 only of Jewish festivals, and therefore can- 
 not refer to Christian ones, is a quibble of 
 the poorest kind : its assertors themselves 
 distinctly maintaining the obligation of one 
 such Jewish festival on Christians. What 
 I maintain is, that had the Ap. believed as 
 they do, he could not by any possibility 
 have written thus. Besides, in the face 
 of ττασαν ήμίραΐ', the assertion is alto- 
 gether unfounded.] 6.] The words 
 in brackets were probably omitted from the 
 similar ending ψροΐ'ΰ of both clauses having 
 misled some early copyists ; but perhaps it 
 may have been intentionally done, after the 
 observation of the Lord's Day came to be 
 regarded as binding. ψρονών, ' taking 
 account of,' 'regarding.' — €ΰχαριστ€Ϊ, ad- 
 duced as a practice of both parties, shews 
 the universality among the early Christians 
 of thanking God at meals: see 1 Tim. 
 iv. 3, 4. — The (υχαριστ'ια of the μη ίσθιων 
 Avas over his ' dinner of herbs.' κυρίω is 
 Christ. 7.] This verse illustrates the 
 κιφίφ of the former, and at the same time 
 sets in a still plainer light than before, that
 
 5—11. ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 427 
 
 gen., 1 Cor. 
 i. as. 
 
 ουόίΐς ίουτω απουνησκίΐ £αν τε -yap ί,ωμΐν, τ 
 
 ι γ- ' ' 'Ω' d- ''fl'g M«rk i. 38. 
 
 κυριω ί,ωιαν, iuv τε αποσί'ίίσκωυεν, τω κυοιω αττοσι»)/- ,\otsix.2iai. 
 σκυμίΐ'. eav τε ουι^ ί,ωμΐν εαν τε αττοσιη/σκτωμεν, ^^υ ,^^;^!.^^^.. ^^ 
 
 κυρίου εσμίν. ^ εις τυΰτο yap -χριστός απεθανεν και a coVii'k ai. 
 
 ge <Ύ Ί \ ~ > ν Ι) ' 10 ^ ?^ • ^"'''.ί"•'5• 
 
 ε^,'ϊίΐ'εΐ', ιΐ'α και νεκ'ρων /cat ί,ωντων Kvpuvari. συ οε ^"'^Matt'^ ' 
 
 τι κρίνεις τον αοελφον σου , η και συ τι εςουσενεις ι v^r. sresr. 
 
 τον ανελώον σου', τταντες Ύορ τταραστησομευα τω 2'^- oan. τϋ. 
 
 "jSijjuaTi τοΰ θεοΰ. ^^ γεγραττται γαρ ° Zoj εγώ, λέγει "ί^^,κ^ΑοΊ"' 
 
 κύριος, ^ Ότι ϊμοι '^ καμφει παν '' γονυ, και πάσα "γλωσσά 2 Matt. χπί. 
 
 ο = Num. χϊν. 21, 28. Juiig.viii.li). Jer. χχϋ. 24. Ezcli. ν. 11. Zepli. ϋ. 9. ρ Isa. χΐϊ.24 alex. 
 
 constr. of oath., 2 Cor. i. 18. xi. 10. Judith xii. 4. q Eph. iii. 14 reff. 
 
 ovl^eiQ αΰτω στρατινΐται 17. — eavT. to (αντ. om 80. — aft ovSiig (2nd) ins iv 89'. — 
 
 8. yap om 17. — for αττυθνησκωμίν (1st), α-ποθνησκομεν KDYG 47-8. 73. 80. 113-14-15 
 al Ephr Dam: αττοθανωμίν CJ 3. 17. (iS. 70. 87• 122 al luctt 'i. 8 (ioM appear to be 
 corntu : the former for uniformity , imagining that ζωμιν, ζωμιν tvere both indie: the 
 latter for the sense, as representing the state after death) : t.\t BiE.') all ff. — for 2nd, 
 ατΓοθνηπκομίν (as before) ADFG 3. 114-15-16-22 al Thl : ηποθανωμεν 108-35. 219 
 al: txt BC(E?)J all if. — τω (om FG) κυμ. απυθί'ησκωμεν CJ al Chrj (Mtt's mss). — 
 
 9. γαρ om 80. — rec aft χριστός (ο χρ. Cyr-jerus Thl : ιησονς Origj : om 39. 114) ins 
 και, with C3J &c am syr al Chi-i Thdrt Thl Oec lat-ff. om ABC'DEF 5. I7. 73-4-6. 93. 
 108'- 14-20-35 ν g Syr arr copt Origj Cyrr Clirj Anast Dam Sedul. — rec ατηθ. κ. ανέστη 
 κ. αηζησίν {see notes), with mss Thdrt, and (but ίζησεν J) J 5. 129 all Thl Oec &c : εζησ. 
 κ. αττεθ. κ. ανέστη DE d' e Iren Augj Gaud Ambrst : txt ABC v-ms {εζησεν, besides, 
 DEJ mss nrly vss ff) copt syr arm Dion-alex Cyr-oft Cyr-jerus Chr Anast Dam al Ruf 
 Sedul (εζησ. κ. απεθ.), also (but ανέστη for ανεζησ.) FG g ν Origj Cyr, Pel Fulg : 
 αττεθ. και αΐ'εζησ. is also read : transp al. — κ•, ζωντ. κ. νεκρ. 54-5 v-ms d e guelph copt 
 goth al Ephr Iren. — ζώντων κ. νεκαων ojuow arm. — κυριεύσει 3 17 (al .'). — 10. συ δε τι 
 γαρ G'. — aft τον αοελφ. σον (1st) add εν τω μη εσθιειν D'EFG 45 al it am- Ambrst: 
 also g am- Ambrst aft αδελφ. σον (2nd) add εν τω εσθ. — αδ. σον to αδ. σον om 178. 238. 
 — reo for θεον, χριστον (see note), with C- (appy) J &c vss Orig Chr Thdrt Thdor-mops 
 al Augj (elswj Domini) Ambrst.' : txt ABC'DEFG 47-marg it copt am harl tol al Dam 
 Ruf-expressly {quod vero in prcpsenti qiiidem loco tribunal Dei, ad Cor. vero tribunal 
 Christi posuit, ego quidem puto ntdlani differentiam i^c .• Tisch) Augj al. — 11. for οτι, 
 ci μη FG (g nisi aut quoniam). — aft -yovv, add επουράνιων κ. επίγειων κ. καταχθόνιων 
 48. 72 al Ephr (cf Phil. ii. iO).— f^oju. πασ. γ\. BDEFG (al .') it goth Ruf Ambrst Sedul : 
 txt ACD'J most mss ν copt syr al Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec Aug al. — for τω θεω, τ. κνριω 
 
 both parlies, the eater and the abstainer, gloss (1 Thess. iv. 14) explaining άνεζησεν 
 
 are servants of another, even Christ. — «αυ- or ϊζησεν. Or, on the other hand, sup- 
 
 τώ and κυρίω are datives commodi : ζην posing it to have been the original, ό^'fζ//σί^' 
 
 and άτΓοθνήσκίΐν represent the whole sum may have been altered to εζησιν and κ. 
 
 of our course on earth. 8.] The infer- ανέστη left out, to conform it to vv. ^ 
 
 ence, — that we are, under all circumstances, and 8. In such a case of doubt, the weight 
 
 living or dying (and a fortiori eating or of early authority must decide, έ'ζησίν, 
 
 abstaining, observing dags or not observing ' lived,' viz. after His death ,• z= άνεζησεν. 
 
 them), Christ's: His property. The historical aorist points to a stated 
 
 9.] And this lordship over all was the ^rea^ event as the commencement of the revi- 
 
 end of the Death and Resurrection of viscence, viz. the Resurrection. κ. 
 
 Christ. By that Death and Resurrection, νεκρ. κ. ζώντων] here, for uniformity 
 
 the crowning events of his work of Re- with what has gone before : in sense 
 
 dcmption. He was manifested as the right- comprehending all created beings. 
 
 eous Head over the race of man, which 10.] He returns to the duty of abstaining, — 
 
 now, and in consequence man's world also, the weak, from judging his stronger bro- 
 
 belongs by right to Him alone. — The rec. tlier ; — the strong, from despising the 
 
 text here, άπέΟ. κ. άν'εστη κ. ανέζησεν, weaker. — It will be seen that the number 
 
 may have arisen by the insertion (1) of of first class MSS in favour of Οεον has 
 
 άνεζησεν as clearer than εζησεν,&ηά (2) of been augmented of late, ])y Β and C Ijciiig 
 
 άν'εστη from the margin, where it was a ascertained to contain that reading. It
 
 428 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 ΧΙΛ^ 
 
 = ch. XT. 9. 
 Phil. ii. 11. 
 Mad. xi. 25. 
 
 sKiugsxxii. Εαυτού 
 
 ^ ί^ομοΧο-γησίται τω 
 
 12 s 
 
 apa ovv έκαστος ημών τηρι ABCD 
 
 * - ' * EFGJ 
 
 γον όωσα τω θίω. μηκίτι οΰν αλλί/λους 
 
 ' κρίνωμίν, α\\α τοντο " Κξ>ινατζ μαΧΧον, "" το μη 
 
 2. Acts XIX. ^, ^ y / - ' Λ Λ , - ''- W ' "^ Λ 14 ''^?' 
 
 40. ι Pet.iv. TiUevai προςκομμα τω αοίΑώω η σκα\ιόαΛον. οιοα 
 
 5. ill. 15. ' '' *- ί / \Γ\> 
 
 και ^ πετΓΕίσμαι ίν κυριω Iijaou οτι ουοεν ^ κοινον ^ οι 
 αντου, ΐΐ μη τω ^ \ο•νι^,ομενω τι ^ κοινον tivai, ίκίίνω 
 
 sch. ν. 18 reff. 
 t See Luke xvi 
 Acts xix 
 
 tt See 1 Pet. i 
 
 19 reff. 
 u = Acts xvi. 
 
 1 Cor. vii. 37, 
 
 ΰ Cor. ii. 1. 
 
 uu art., 2 Cor. 
 
 κοινόν. ' ει γαρ '^ δια βρωμά ο αδελφός σου ^ λυπει- 
 
 ' .' \ ' / ef - ν - (1 /Ο ' ' 
 
 μη 
 
 τω 
 
 βρίν 
 
 ωματι 
 
 vch.ix.32reff. ται, ovK STi κατα α'^αττην πεοιττπτεις. 
 
 Isa. xxix.21. \ν = Matt. xvi. 23. 1 Cor. i. 23. Rev. ii. 1-1. χ constr., ch. riii. 38. 
 
 y = Acts X. 14 reff. ζ = ch. ii. 27. ver. 211. 2 Cor. ii. 4. v. 7. a — cli. vi. 11. Phil. in. 
 
 13. Wisd. XV. 15. b dat. = 1 Cur. iv. 3. c = John XT. 3. ch, xv. l.'i. 1 Cor. vii. 5. 
 
 cl Matt.siv. IS ||. Luke iii. 11. 1 Cor. x. 3 al. e Matt. xix. 22 1. 2 Cor. ii. 2, Kic, al. = here only. 
 
 1 — 1 Thess. iv. 12 al. Ir. 
 
 47 syr (r. Θ. in marg) demid slav-anct : μιη Syr ar-erp seth (and ίξο^ίολ. before). — 12. ovv 
 om BD'FG ii"]- lit ν Aug itaque for «(ία ovv, so elsw, as ver 19) : ins ACD^EJK most 
 mss vss Chr Thdrt all. — νμ>ι>ν C— αυτόν C. — αποΐωπίι BD'FG 39 al Clir {reddet it v) : 
 t.xt ACD^EJ mss nrly (appy) Polycarp Tiidrt Chr (Mtt's ms,) Till Oec. —τω θιω om 
 BFG 54. (iV g Cypr Aug, (Polycarp, see above) : ins (MSS Ike) Chr Thdrt all Ambrst 
 al.— 13. KoiitTt D'FG: κ^ιναψιν 7^• Ηδ.—ττροςκομμα om Β (Syr.'). — »} om Β (Syr.'): 
 ft 109 (Scholz ; queried by Tisch) : «ς 47". G8'. 77• 87- 93. 115-20-221. 213-38 all slav 
 Chr (Mtt's mSj) Cyr Naz Antioch. — 14. ίί και 17: ναι goth — for κυρ., χριστώ 4C-8. 
 71-2. 93. 11(5 al. — κοινον to κοινον om 219' (ins in marg). — rec for αυτόν, αιντον, with 
 C &c Chr Dam Thl {ex se ipso Syr al) : txt ABDEFGJ most mss arm slav Thdrt-e.xpr 
 Oec (and Sev in Oec) : per ipsum it ν copt lat-ff': αυτό 33-5: αϊτοΐι 48. — είναι om 93. 
 —15. rec for yop, ίί {see note), with mss vss Chr Thdrt al : txt ABCDEFGJ 5. 37-9. i>7^. 
 213 al it V copt syr-marg Dam Ruf Ambrst Jer al. — ό om FG. — απυλνε D'EJ al : 
 
 seems, then, more than ever probable, that 
 χριστού has crept in from 2 Cor. v. 10. 
 The fact of Origen once citing it, decides 
 nothing, in the presence of the expression 
 βήματος τον χριστον in 2 Cor. 
 11.] The citation is according to the pre- 
 sent Alexandrine text, except that our ζώ 
 €•γώ ^ κατ' Ιμαυτον ομνύω. Ιξομ.] 
 
 ' shall praise,' see reff. 12.] The 
 
 stress is on irepi έαυτοΰ : and the next ver. 
 refers back to it, laying the emphasis on 
 αλλήλους. ' Seeing that our account to 
 God will be of each man's own self, let us 
 take heed lest by judging one another 
 (κρίνομβν here in the general sense of ' pass 
 judgment on,' including both the ΐζουθί- 
 vi~\v of the strong and the κρ'ινειν of the 
 weak) we incitr the gnilt of «ττολλυίΐν one 
 another. 13 — 23.] Exhortation 
 
 TO THE STRONG TO ΗΑΛΈ REGARD TO 
 THE CONSCIENTIOUS SCRUPLES OF THE 
 WEAK, AND FOLLOW PEACE, NOT HAVING 
 RESPECT MERELY TO HIS OWN CONSCI- 
 ENCE, BUT TO THAT OF THE OTHER, 
 WHICH IS HIS RULE, AND BEING VIO- 
 LATED LEADS 10 HIS CONDEMNATION. 
 
 13.] See above. — The second κρί- 
 νατε is used as corresponding to the first, 
 and is in fact a play on it : ' pulchra mi- 
 mesis ad id quod praecedit,' Bengel : see 
 James ii. 4 for another instance : — ' but 
 determine this rather ' — ιτρόςκομμα (see 
 ver. 2! ) ' an occasion of stumbling,' in act : 
 
 σκάνδαλον (ib.),an ' occasion of offence,' in 
 thought. 14.] The general principle 
 
 laid dotvn, that nothing is by its own 
 means, — i. e. for any thing in itself {φύσει, 
 Chrys.), — unclean, but only in reference 
 to him who reckons it to be so. 
 '7Γ£ΤΓ€ΐσμ. ev κυρ. Ίησ.] These words give 
 to the persuasion the weight, not merely 
 of Paul's own λoyiζoμaι, but of apostolic 
 authority. He is persuaded, in his capacity 
 as connected with Christ Jesus, — as having 
 the mind of Christ. 15.] The reading 
 
 yap, besides the overwhelming authority in 
 its favour, is the more difficult and charac- 
 teristic. It can hardly (as Meyer and Tho- 
 luck) depend on the fi μη κ.τ.λ., for thus 
 an awkwardness would be introduced into 
 the connexion of (he clauses: but I believe 
 it to be elliptical, depending on the sup- 
 pressed restatement of the precept of ver. 
 13 : q. d. ' But this knowledge is not to be 
 your rule in practice, but rather,' &c., as in 
 ver. 13: 'for if,' &c.— βρώμα, barely put, 
 to make the contrast greater between the 
 slight occasion, and the great mischief 
 done. The mere λυττεΤί' your brother, is 
 an offence against love : how much greater 
 an offence then, if this λυπεΐν end in άττολ- 
 λνεΐΊ' — in ruining (causing to act against 
 his conscience, and so to commit sin and 
 be in danger of quenching God's Spirit 
 within him) by a meal of thine, a brother, 
 for whom Christ died 1 " Ne pluris feceris
 
 12—21. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 42ί) 
 
 σου ίκανον " αττοΛλυε, υττερ ου ■χριστός αττεσανεν. ^ jutj g-icor. vm. 
 ^ βλασφημξίσΟω ovu υμών 'το ayaOov. ^ ου yao ^ eariv 2"pJt' 'ili' 9^' 
 
 'kO Λ' "/Ϊ'Ι/Ο" ^m ' 'ΛΛ^ηΓν h=ch.ui. 8 
 
 ϊί ρασιΛίία του σεου ρρωσις και ποσις, άλλα οικαιο- reit. 
 
 ' < . / ^ ο ν > ο ' ' ' 18 ' ^ i-her^only. 
 
 ουνη και Ηοηνη και \οξ)α εν ττνίνματι ayiu) ο γαρ J = ■'"''° ""■ 
 
 ' ' Ρ^Λ' ~ "α'' ~ Ω " 'k = l Cor. ίτ. 
 
 ev τυυτω "^ οουΛευων τω \οιστω ^ ίυαοίστος τω υεω και 2ο. seeRev. 
 '^ ό(>κ((ΐιος τοις ανθρωττυις. ^^ ^ αρα οΰν * τα της είρι/νης '°^/27°55^^' 
 
 uSJ'^ ^t^-v'^- - ''\Λ'Λ 1 Cor.'viii. 4. 
 
 οιωκωμίν και τα της οικοδομής της εις αλλήλους, scor. is. ίο. 
 μη εΐ'εκεν ρρωματος καταλυί το έργου του σεου. ""^,''-*cJ^ 
 τΓοί'τα («εν καθαρά, άλλα κακόν Τ(ο ανθρώττω τω '^ δια m Johit'ii. 55. 
 
 ν ' ' ύ' 91ζΛ^^<. - ζζ ι C.il.ii. Jfi 
 
 •' προςκομματος εσυιοντι. '' καλόν το μη ^aynv Kpta ?^^• oaa. 
 
 η absdi., Acts xxir. 2.-1 reff. ο 1 TheFS. i. R. (Phil. iv. 4.) ρ Acts xx. 19 rcff. q ch. xii. I reff. 
 
 r = ch.xii.Ui. lCjr.xi.l9. 2 Oir. x. is. xiii. 7. 2Tim.ii.l5. J^mcs i. 12 only. (1 Oirou. xxviii. 18.) 
 sch.v.lSreft. t ch. ii. 14 reH. See Luke xiv 28. α ch.ix. 3U rcff. xii. 13. v=ch.xv. 
 
 2. 1 Cor. xiv. 3, S;c. 2 Cor. x. 8. xii. 19. xiii. 10. Eph. iv. 29. Paal onlv. w = Matt. xxiv. 2 rtrH. 
 
 ww = Phil. i. 6. X = ch.u.27 reff. y ver. 13. ζ = 1 Tim. ii. 3. zz 1 Cor. viii. 13 
 
 only. Geu. ix. 4. 
 
 airoWviiv FG. — 16. ovv om FG 3 arm goth. — νμων om 109 : ημών DEFG it ν Syr ar- 
 erp copt feth goth Clem Ath-lat Dam Ruf Arabrst al. — for το nyciOov, η ττιστις G7-marg 
 73. — 17. for τον θ., των ουρανών Thdrt. — aft ίικηιοσννη, add και ασκησις 4. — κ. fipi;i'); 
 om 238. — for χαρά, ηγπττη 114 — αγ. ττν. 21Γ(. — 18. rec τούτοις (see note), with D^EJ &-c 
 svrr al Chr Thdrt al Tert : t.\t ABCD'FG δ (al .') it ν copt sah Orig Chr-in-Wetst Dam 
 Ruf-expr Aug, Ambrst Pelag Bed.— -ω bef χριστ. om AD'FG 101 : ins B(esil)CD3E(J .'). 
 — for xp., κνυΐίο 47• 109 78 : θίω SO. 115. for Θεω, χριστώ 30. 115. — κάτι δυκιμοις τοις 
 ανθρωποις B(Lachm)G'-gr (Scholz : not noticed by Tisch) : και τοις ανθρωποις δοκιμοις 
 77• — 19. for 7- α της tip., την ιιρηνην sah. — διωκομίν ABFGJ 238 Chr (Mtt's mSj) : 
 txt CDEK &c vss gr-lat-ff.— at end, add φυλαξωμιν DEFG ν (not deinid) it lat-fF (not 
 Aug). — 20. κακοί/ TovTo arm. — τω (2nd) om 80. — 21. aft Kpea, ins και δ. — ττίΐν j)' : 
 
 tuum cibum, quam Christus vitam suam." 
 Bengel. See an exact parallel in 1 Cor. 
 viii. 10. 16.] J'oiij• strength of faith 
 
 (Orig., Calv., Beza, Grot., Estius, Bengel, 
 Olsh., al., interpret το άγ. ' yoiir freedom,' 
 as in 1 Cor. x. 29 ; but here the contrast is 
 between the tveak and the strong : — so De 
 \V. — Chrys. leaves it doubtful : η την 
 ΐΐ'ιστιν ψησ'ιν, η την μίλλονηαν ΐλπίία 
 των ίπάΟΧων, η την άπηρτισμίν7]ν ίϋοί- 
 β(ΐαν) is α good thing ; let it not pass info 
 bad repute : use it so that it may be hon- 
 oured, and encourage others. 17.] 
 For it is not worth while to let it be dis- 
 graced and become useless for such a trifle ; 
 for no part of the advance of Christ's gospel 
 can be bound up in, or consist in, meat and 
 drink: but in 'righteousness' (ό Ινύριτος 
 βίος, Chrys., but of course to be taken in 
 union with the doctrine of the former part 
 of the Έ.\η&ύβ~' righteotisness bg justif ca- 
 tion, — bringing forth the fruits of faith, 
 which would be hindered by faith itself 
 being disturbed) ; * peace (// ττρός τον acc\- 
 φον είρηρη, y ίναντιοϋται α'ντη ή ^ιλο- 
 vtiKia, id.), and joy Ifi ίκ της ομονοίας 
 χαρά, ηι- ι'ηαιιιΰ α'ντη j/ ^πί—λ //Σις, id.1 
 in the Holy Ghost:' — in connexion with, 
 under the indwelling and influence of, as 
 χαίρίτί iv κνοί/ρ (Phil. iv. 4) and the ex- 
 pressions tv κυρ., 61' χριστφ, generally : — 
 
 not, as De W., 'joy which has its ground 
 in the Holy Ghost,' though this is true. 
 So, on the other hand, a man under the in- 
 fluence of, possessed by an evil spirit, is 
 called άΐ'θοωττος iv ττνίΰματι άκαΰάρτψ, 
 Mark i. 23*. 18.] The reading τοΰτφ 
 
 is too strongly supported to be rejected for 
 the rec. τούτοις, as is done by Thol. and 
 De Wette, because the latter is the easier 
 reading, and might refer to Cik. tip. and 
 χαρ. I have therefore adopted it. But I 
 do not understand it (as Orig., al.) of πνίύ- 
 ματι άγίψ. It would be unnatural that a 
 subordinate member of the former sen- 
 tence, belonging only to χορά, should be at 
 once raised to be the emphatic one in this, 
 and the three graces just emphatically men- 
 tioned, lost sight of. I believe τούτψ to 
 express the aggregate of the three, and iv 
 τοίιτψ to be equivalent to ο'ί'τως, as Baumg.- 
 Crusius. δόκ. τ. ανθρ., as a man of 
 
 peace and uprightness : οΰ yap υ'ύτω σε 
 θαιιμάσονται της τίΧίΐότητος, ως της 
 (ΐ'ρήιης κ. τϊ]ς όμοΐ'οίας πάιτίς. τούτον 
 μίν yap τον καλοΰ ττάνης άττοΧαΰσυνται, 
 ίκίίνου Si οΰί{ ης. Chrys. Horn, xxvii. p. 
 713 Β. 19.] Inference from the fore- 
 
 going two vv. — οίκοδ. τ. eU αλλ., ' edifi- 
 cation towards one another,' i. e. the 
 work of edification, finding its exercise in 
 our mutual intercourse and allowances. So
 
 430 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 XIV. 22, 23. 
 
 μηοΒ πΐίΐν υΐΐ'ον μηοε ^ tv ώ ο αόεΧφος σου ττροςκηπτίΐ abcd 
 
 ■Λ C ? Λ '•/ -^ d ■> α '' " 22 ^ ' '' . e ν EFGJ 
 
 η σκανοαλιί,ίται η aaoiuei. συ πιστιν ε\ίΐς 5 κατά 
 
 σίαυτυν ίχε ίνωπιον του Οίου. μακάριος ο μη ^ κρίνων 
 
 εαυτόν εν ω ουκιμαί,ει. υ οε διακρινόμενος εαν (jtayij 
 
 κατακεκριται, Ότι ουκ εκ πίστεως' παν δε ο ουκ έκ 
 
 κατ'Ί σαι/τόΐ' t'xe κ. μ>ι6ί:νΊ ψριίζ(, Jos. Aiitt. ii. 11. 1. f = Luke i. 19. 
 
 a ch ii. 1. 
 
 1 Pet.ii.12. 
 b ch. is. 32. 
 
 Mntt. iv. fi. 
 
 1 Pet. ii. 8. 
 
 Pri)V. iii. 23. 
 c = Matt. XT. 
 
 12al.fr. 
 d TV. 1, 2. ch. 
 
 iT. 19 reff. 
 e Heliodor. vii. 
 
 16. (De W.) 
 
 g = cii.ii. 27. James IT. 11, 12. li = i 
 
 i — Matt. xsi. 21. Acis x. 20. ch. iT. 20. James i.6f. 
 ui. 18.) 1 ellips., ch. iii. 2fi. ii. 8 reft'. 
 
 ■Fiviiv FG Clem. — η σκανοαΧιζ. η ασθίνη om AC G7" Syr ar-erp copt ;eth slav Dam Ruf 
 Aug : ins (MSS." vss >) Chr Thdrt Thl Schol-gr Ambrst Pelag : 70. 115 Chrj, σκ. η πρ. 
 η ασθ. — 22. bef f χ{ ις ins ην {corrn) ABC tol Ruf Aug., Pel. — rec σαντον, with mss &c : 
 σιαντω FG : txt ABCDEJ &.ο.-ίνωπιον τ. θ. om 20. 42. Ul. 123. 238 al Chr.— Sia- 
 Kpirei η δοκιμαΐ^ίΐ To: aft δυκ. add rov TrXtjaiov arm : al'mm al. — 23. for Ct, ovv sah. — 
 κατακρίνεται 17. — τταν to end om 48' : τταΐ'τα sah : and α below. — for o, το D' 37• 
 71. — aft αμαρτία tan»', many MSS insert ch xvi. 25—27 : see var readd there. 
 
 Ci)r. xvi. 3. 2 Cur. 
 (Jer. XT. lU.) 
 
 xxiT. 51. 
 iii. 8. IThess. ii.4. Jos. Ant(. iii. -1. 1. 
 k ch.ii. 1 refl'. (perf., ch. xiii. 8. John 
 
 r;7 άγάπ^ ει'ς άλλ. 1 Thess. iii. 12. 
 20.] TO €ργον τ. θίοΰ has been variously 
 understood: by Fritz, and Baumg.-Crusius, 
 as = δικαιοσ. ιίρηνη, κ. χαρά : by Meyer 
 and Krehl, as zz the Christian status of 
 the offended brother, so as to be parallel 
 to ver. 15 : by Theodoret and Reiche, as = 
 the faith of thy fellow Christian : by Mo- 
 rus, Rosenm., al., as = r) βασιλεία τοΐι θ., 
 ' the spread of the Gospel.' But I believe 
 the expression οΐκυδομή having just pre- 
 ceded is the clue to the right meaning : and 
 that TO tpyov := την ο(Κ()ίο/χ)7ν in the 
 Ap.'s mind. He calls Christians in 1 Cor. 
 iii. 9, Otov γιωργιοί', θεοί οΙκοδομή. Thus 
 it will mean, thi/ fellow Christian, as a 
 plant of God's planting, a building of 
 Gnd's 7-ais)ng. So, nearly, De Wette and 
 Tholuck. 'All things indeed are pure, 
 but (it is) evil to the man (' there is cri- 
 minality in the man ; ' ^Nleyer supplies 
 TO καθαροί'. Grot, ro βρώμα, Fritz, το 
 ττάντα φαγίΐν : but nothing need be sup- 
 plied, any more than to καΚόν) who eats 
 with offence' (i. e. giving offence to his 
 weak brother, as Theodoret, Calv., Beza, 
 Grot., Estius, Bengel, Thol., De Wette, al. 
 That this is the right interpretation is 
 shewn by the sentence standing between 
 two others both addressed to the strong 
 who is in danger of offending the weak. 
 But Chrys., Theophyl., Oec, Meyer, al., 
 take the sense of ' receiving offence,' and 
 understand it of the weak). 21.] ' It 
 
 is good not to eat meats nor to drink 
 wine, nor (to do any thing : the ellipsis is 
 a harsh one. Fritzsche says, " aut supple 
 <payHV η τταΐν τηντο, tv ψ κ.τ.λ., as Thl., 
 Beng., Flatt., al., — or ττοιεΓΐ' [or πράσ- 
 σίΐν'} τοϋτο tv φ κ.τ.\., as Grot., Meyer, 
 &c. Praefero illud, quoniam per to- 
 tum hunc locum de cibo potucjue agitur." 
 But why should not the Αρ., as so often, 
 be deducing a general duty from the 
 
 particular subject .') in (by) which thy 
 brother stumbles, or is offended (see 
 on ver. 13), or is weak' (Thol. remarks 
 that the three verbs form a climax ad 
 infra). 22.] ' Hast thou faith (or, 
 
 ' thou hast faith :' but the question is 
 better, as suiting the lively character of the 
 address) f have it to thyself (reff.) before 
 God,'— Chrys , who does not read the last 
 words (ti'. Γ. 0.) says, ττίσην ΐΐ'τανθα ού 
 την mpi δογμάτων, άλλα την περί της 
 προκίιμίνης ύποθίσιως λέγει . . ., ίκιίνη 
 μϊν yap μη όμολογυνμίνη καταστρΐφίΐ, 
 αϋ-η ύ'ί ϋμυΧογουμίνη άκαίρως. Hom. 
 xxvii. 71-1 c. ^Before God,' — because He 
 is the object of faith : hardly, as Erasm., 
 " comprimens inanem gloriam qufe solet 
 esse comes scientias," — for there is no trace 
 of a depreciation of the strong in faith in 
 the chapter, — only a caution as to their 
 conduct in regard of their weaker brethren. 
 — With μακάριος begins the closing and 
 general sentence of the Ap. with regard to 
 both : it is a blessed thing to have no 
 scruples (the strong in faith is in a situa- 
 tion to be envied) about things in which we 
 allow ourselves (Olsh. refers to the addition 
 in the Codex Bezse at Luke vi. 4, — where 
 our Lord is related to have seen a man 
 tilling his land on the Sabbath, and to have 
 said to him, ii οίδας τι ποιΰς, μακάριος 
 si, ει ck μι) οίοας, tmKaTaparog, και 
 τταραβάτης ει τον νήμην) : ' hut if a man 
 have scruples (if that situation be not his), 
 he incurs condemnation by eating (the 
 case in point particularized), because (he 
 eats) not from faith (i. e. as before, — see 
 Chrys. above, — from a perstiasion of recti- 
 tude grounded on and consonant with his 
 life of faith. That 'faith in the Son of 
 God' by which the Ap. describes his own 
 life in the flesh as being lived (Gal. ii. 20), 
 informing and penetrating the motives and 
 the conscience, will not include, will not
 
 XV. 1-4. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 431 
 
 ΤΓίσΓίως, αμαρτία ίστίν. XV. 
 
 όυνατοί τα 
 εαντοις 
 
 ασΰίνηματα των 
 
 μν 
 
 q 
 
 αοίσκίΐν. 
 
 αρξσκετω ίΐς το ayauov 
 
 έκαστος 
 ττρος 
 
 οφείΛομεν οε η,αεις οι 
 αουνάτων ^ βάσταγαν και 
 Ίίμων 
 
 γαρ 
 
 = Luke χτϋ. 
 111. John 
 xiii 14. xix. 
 7. Acts svii. 
 ~ \ I 2!) al. 
 
 Τ ω ΤΓΛί/σίΟν nUcreonlyt. 
 
 ^ ' '^ 3 ^ 
 
 οικοοομην. και 
 
 ■ Acis 
 only. Joel 
 
 ' ^ '' "q'' 'ΛΛ^ /l"- ' ρ See ch. xi. 18 
 
 Ο χριστός ουχ εαυτω ^ ?]ρεσεν, αλΛα καϋως γεγραττται reff. Matt. 
 <Jt ονείθ(σ/ΐίθ( τ(ϋΐ; ονειοιί,οντων σε εττεπεσαι» εττ 
 οσα yap ^ προί-γράφη εις την ^ ημέτερα ν ^ι^ασκαΧιαν 
 
 εypa(pη, Ίνα δια της '' ΰττομονης και δια της ** 
 
 iM£.qGal.i.lO. 
 <> ^ Λ ' 1 TlieiS. ϋ. 4. 
 
 οιοοσ/οαΛιαι» ch.vui. β. 
 
 , 1 Cor. χ. 33. 
 
 παοακλϊ/( 
 
 ι σε ως ">'■ χ•»• 9- 
 
 ' ^ S ch. xiii. 4. 
 
 t = ch. xiv. l.^i reff. u constr., .'ee ch. ix. 7. Psa. Ixviii. !i. LXX. τ 1 Tim. iii. 7. Heb. 
 
 x.3.i. xi 2«. xiii. 13 only. 1-a. xiiii.28. w Mult. v. 11 al. Prov. xxv. 10. χ John xiii. 2δ. Act.i 
 
 XX. 11) al. met., Luke i. 12. AlIs xix. 17. Exoci. xv. Iti. yGal.iii.l. Eph.ui.3. Jade 4 
 
 onlyt. 1 Mace. X. .Sfi. ζ ohjcclive, here only. See ch. xi. 31 refl'. a ch. ii. 7 rcll. b = Acts 
 
 ix. ai.xv. 31. 2 Cor. i. 3, &c., al. 
 
 Chap. XV. 1. St om 61-2. 77- 87• HI al.— oi to αδυνάτων om 178.— for αδυι/., 
 ασθινων arm. — βαστασαι 5. — 2. rec aft ίκαστοζ ins γαρ, with many mss (^£ mss mentd 
 by Erasm Syr ar-erp arm slav) : txt ABCDEFGJ 17• 47. 73 all it ν copt syr slav-ms Bas 
 Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec Ruf Ambrst al. -νμων D'FG 37-9. 48. GG^. 72-7. 109-20 all 
 lect 8 g V (mss) al Bas Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Ruf Pelag Jer Leo : om Ambrst. — 3. γαρ 
 om 238. — ό om D'FG.— rec εττεπίσον {corrn to more usual form), with J al : txt 
 ABCDEFG all Dam. — 4. for wpotyp., προςιγρ. D'FG: (-/ραφή seth slav-ms it ν Ruf 
 Ambrst al ; and (addg τταιτα) Β 37: προιγμ. πάντα 14: η -γραφή \(yn Clem: txt 
 ACD^EJ &c. — rec (2nd time) προίγραφη {corrn for uniformity), with AJ &c syr al Chr 
 Thdrt Dam Thl (h 1) Oec : txt BCDEFG G72. 80 al it ν Syr ar-erp copt Kth goth Clem 
 Thl' Augg Ambrst al. — rec bef τταρακλ. om Siu (as iinnecessary ?), with DEFG all vss 
 nrly Chr Thdrtg (and elsw-msj) Thl Oec Aug Ambrst Oros al : ins ABCJ 39. 47-8. 57. 
 
 sanction, an act done against the testimony 
 of the conscience) : but (introducing an 
 axiom, as Heb. viii. 13) all that is not 
 from (grounded in, and therefore consonant 
 with) faith, (the great element in which the 
 Christian lives and moves and desires and 
 hopes), is sin.' — Augustine, Thomas Aqui- 
 nas, al., have taken this text as shewing 
 that ' omnis infidelium vita peccatum est.' 
 \\'hether that be the case or not, cannot be 
 determined from this passage, any more 
 than from Heb. xi. G, because neither here 
 nor there is the ' infidelis ' in question. 
 Here the Ap. has in view two Christians, 
 both living by faith, and by faith doing 
 acts pleasing to God : — and he reminds 
 them that whatever they do out of har- 
 mony with this great principle of their 
 spiritual lives, belongs to the category of 
 sin. In Heb. xi. he is speaking of one who 
 bad the testimony of having (eminently) 
 pleased God : this, he says, he did by faith ; 
 for without faith it is impossible to please 
 Him. The question touching the ' infi- 
 delis,' must be settled by another enquiry, 
 can he whom we thus name have faith, 
 — such a faith as may enable him to do 
 acts w^hich are not sinful .' a question im- 
 possible for us to solve. 
 
 Chap. XV. 1—13.] Further exhor- 
 tations TO FORBEARANCE TOWARDS THE 
 WEAK, FROM THE EXAMPLE OF CllRlST 
 (1—3), — AND UNANIMITY (4 — 7) AS BE- 
 TWEEN Jew and Gentile, seeing that 
 
 Christ was prophetically announced 
 AS the common Saviour of both 
 (8 — 13). 1.] By >)μίΤς oi Svv. the 
 
 Ap. includes himself among the strong, as 
 indeed he before indicated, ch. xiv. 14. 
 τα άσθ. are general, not merely re- 
 ferring to the scruples before treated. 
 άρ€σκ£ΐν (reff), to please or satisfy as a 
 habit or motive of action. Tholuck quotes 
 from the Schol. on yEsch. Prom. 15G, τταρ' 
 ίαντφ CiKOiov ίχων Ζίϋς, — ττάντα ίικαίως 
 (ιίόμίνος ΤΓΟίίϊν, ανιτος έαυτώ άρΕσκων και 
 ιίκαιον νομ'ιζων Ηΐ•αι οττίρ αν βούληται 
 πράττίΐν. 2.] The qualification, ίΐ'ς 
 
 Γ0 ay. προς οίκ., excludes all mere pleasing 
 of men from the Christian's motives of 
 action. The Ap. repudiates it in his own 
 case. Gal. i. 10. — Bengel remarks, ' boniim, 
 genus, cedificatio, species :' — to a good end, 
 and that good end his edification. 3.] 
 
 t^ijv αντψ μη όνίΐΐισθήναι, t^ijv μη 
 τταθιίν uTTip ίτταθίν, tlyt. ηθίλε το ίαντον 
 σκοπέιν αλλ' 'όμως ουκ ι)Θίλησει>, άΧλά το 
 ήμίτιρον σκοπησας, το Ιαντον παρίΐίί. 
 Chrys. Horn, xxviii. 721 a. — The citation 
 is made directly, without any thing to 
 introduce the formula citandi, as in ch. 
 ix. 7, where even the formula itself is 
 wanting : — there is no ellipsis. — The words 
 in the Messianic Psalm are addressed to 
 the Father, not to those for whom Christ 
 suffered : but they prove all tliat is here 
 required, that lie did not please Himself; 
 His suflerings were undertaken on account
 
 432 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 XV 
 
 C I'll viii. 5 reff. 
 
 xii l(i. 
 dch. viii. 27. 
 e Ai-tsi. I4alli), 
 
 L. P. Num. 
 
 xxiv. 24 al. 
 f ch. x.'.i iinly. 
 
 Ps. Ixxxviii. 
 
 g = MHlt. ix. 8 
 
 al.fr. 
 Ii 2 Cor. i.3 
 
 j ch'.'xiv. 3, and JiytVl^a 
 
 lit .supra, 
 k ch. iii. 7 reff. 1 See Malt. XX. 28 
 
 rOai 
 
 ■ των ^ y^iurpiov τηι> ελτηδα έχωμεν. ο δε Οευς της ** υπο- 
 
 μονής και της παρακΧησίως ^ωη υμιν "^ το αυτό "^ φοονειν 
 εν αλλίίλοις κατά -^ριστον Irjaoi/i^, ° 'ίνα ^ ομοθυμαδόν 
 iv ενι στοματι οοα,αί,ητΒ τον ϋίον και ποτεοα του 
 κυρίου ημών Ιτ;σου ■χριστού. ' οιο ' ττροςλαμβύνίσθε 
 i.3. Col. αΛΛί/λους, καυως και ο γυριστός προςίλαρίτο υμάς, 
 olff'^rif^'"' f't" δοξαν του θεοΰ. λέγω γα{3 χριστον διάκοι/οΐ' 
 
 τηοιτομης "' υττερ αλήθειας θ(θΰ " εις το 
 
 Phil. ii. 13. η ch. viii. 2!) reff. 
 
 72-7. 106-8-13-21-22-53. 219 al d' Tliilrti. — aft εχωμη', add της παρακΧησεως Β.— 
 5. θίος δε lect 12. — for νπομοντις, (ΐηη}'ης G7". 115 : ελπίδας κ. της υπομ. lect 19 al. — 
 fi' α\\η\. om 109-78.— ijjt. χρ. AC^F 72. 109 ν syrr al Did Tlidrt Ambr.st.— 6. δο^αΖη 
 lect 12 : δοϊ,αΖ,ειν σε 109. — 7. και om 44. — rec for νμας, ημάς (corrn, as more befittin;/ 
 to include the spealcer), with B(e sil)D^ &c d' seth slav-ms Thdrt al : t.xt ACD'EFGJ 
 37-9. 48. 72. 80-7. 93. 108 9-13-78-79. 219 all lectt 8. 12 ν e g syrr arr copt arm gotli 
 slav-ed Chr Ruf Ambrst al.— rec bef Θ. om τυν, with J cSiC Chr Thdrt al : ins ABCDEFG 
 37 (al .').— 8. rec for ynp, δε {.see note), with J &c syrr al Chr Thdrt al : t.xt ABCDEFG 
 73 al it V copt goth Cyr Ruf Ambrst {ου>• Epii)h Eeth). — rec ιησονν χριστ., with DEFG 
 &c it harl syrr al : χρ. ιησ. J all ν al Chr-te.xt Thdrt, Thl Oec lat-ff : t.xt ABC v-ms Cyr 
 Ath Epiph Chr-comm Dam Ruf Ambrst. — γενέσθαι {eori-n?) BC'D'FG Ath : txfc 
 
 of the Father's good purpose — mere work τΌν θεόν as independent of Ίησοϋ χρ., — 
 which He gave Him to do. 4.] The ' God, and the Father of our Lord, Jesus 
 
 Ap. both justifies the above citation, and 
 prepares the way for the subject to be next 
 introduced, viz. the duly of unanimity, 
 grounded on the testimony of these Scrip- 
 tures to Christ. The οσα ττροίγρ. applies 
 to the whole ancient Scriptures, not to the 
 proplietic parts only, ήμίτ., viz. of its 
 Christians, — προεγρ. implying ttjio ίιμώΐ'. 
 ϊνα δια τ. iiTT. κ.τ.λ.] τυνΓεστιν, 
 'ίνα μη εκττίσωμεν ττοικίλοι yap οϊ αγώνες 
 ΐσωθετ, ίζωθεν 'ίνα νενρονμενοι κ. τταρα- 
 καλοίιμενοι παρά των γραψων, νπομυνήν 
 εττιδίΐΚώμίθα' 'ίνα εν ί!πομον\ι ζώντες, 
 μίνωμεν επί της ελπίδος. ταντα γαρ 
 άλλί]λων εστί κατασκευαστικά, >/ ϋπο)κον/) 
 της ελπίδος, ή ίλπίς τΓ/ς υπομονής' ίίπερ 
 αμφότερα «πό τών γραφών γίνεται. Chrys. 
 Horn, xxviii. 721 c. As in this comment, 
 υπομονής, as well as 7Γαρακ•λ/;σ£ως, is 
 to be joined with τών γραφών, — other- 
 wise it stands unconnected with the sub- 
 ject of the sentence. The genitives then 
 mean, ' patience and comfort arising 
 from the Scriptures,' — ' produced by their 
 study.' 5, 6.] Further iiitroduction of 
 
 the subject, by a prayer that God, who has 
 given the Scriptures for these eruls, might 
 grant them vnonimity, that they might 
 with one accord shew fortti His glory. — 
 The later form of the opt., διμη, is also 
 found 2 Tim. i. 16. 18; ii. 7• Eph. i. 17; 
 iii. 16 al., in LXX Gen. xxvii. 28 ; xxviii. 
 4 al. See Winer, § 14. I. g. κατ. χρ. 
 
 Ίησοΰν, ' according to (the sjjirit and pre- 
 cepts of) Christ Jesus,'— see reff. 
 6. τον θεον κ. ττατ.] De Wette regards 
 
 Christ.'' The usage of the article will not 
 decide the matter, because on either ren- 
 dering, the accusatives both refer to the 
 same Person : but the ordinary one, ' the 
 God and Father . . . . ' is preferable on 
 account of its simpHcity. 7.] 'Where- 
 
 fore (on which account, viz. that the wish 
 of the last ver. may be accomplished) re- 
 ceive (see ch. xiv. I) one another, as also 
 Christ received you, — with a view to 
 God's glory ' (that this is the meaning of 
 εις δόζαν τον θεοΐι, appears by ver. 9, τα 
 δε έθνη νπερ ίλίοιις So^acrai, τον θίόν). — 
 The Αρ. does not expressly name Jewish 
 and Gentile converts as those to whom he 
 addresses this exhortation, but it is evident 
 from the next ver. that it is so. 8.] 
 
 ' For (reason for the above e.xhortation. 
 This not having been seen, it has been 
 altered to δί) I say, that Christ was (has 
 come as) a minister (see reft'.) of the cir- 
 cumcision (an expression no where else 
 found, and doubtless here used by Paul to 
 humble the pride of the strong, the Gentile 
 Christians, by exalting God's covenant 
 people to their true dignity) on account of 
 the truth of God (i. e. for the fulfilment of 
 the Divine pledges given under the cove- 
 nant of circumcision) to confirm the pro- 
 mises of (made to, gen. obj.) the fathers 
 (i. e. Christ came to the Jews in virtue of a 
 long-sealed compact, to the fulfilment of 
 which God's truth was pledged) : but (I 
 say) that the Gentiles glorified God (or 
 ' should glorify God :' Winer, § 45. 8, takes 
 it as a perfect, and co-ordinate with γεγεν-
 
 5— li 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 433 
 
 ° βξβαιωσαι τας ^ ετταγγελι'ας των '' πατίρων, τα δε ίθνη °[,ξ" Ι' a'l*' 
 
 υττερ ίΛίους " οοςασαι τον t/fOi», καυως yeypuTTTai ΙΑια Hrb. ϋ. 3. 
 
 τούτο ίΙιι,ομυΑο-γΊ^σημαι σοι εν iUveaii', και τω ονόματι '^,Ί^^ρ^ 
 
 σου φαΧω. και τταΧιν λεγεί " Έ.υφράνθητε'ίθΐ'η μετά pc\).u.i.(iv. 
 
 -Λ - 5- 11 > /% VA'- / y ''η Ifi•' G"''"• 
 
 του Λάου αυΓου. και τταΛιν Λιι^ειτε ποιτα τα ίΰνη '*'•. . .. 
 
 ' q = AftH VII. 
 
 τοί^ ^ κυριΟΜ, /cat ^^ ετταινεσατωσαν αυτοί' πάντες• οί " Χαοι. ix'ft.Vn.' 
 12 ' 'Λ 'ττ •'■ Λ ' y'l? r < 'ν - Ί > \ obj., gki. iii. 
 
 και πάλιν ησαΐας λέγει ^ L•σται τι ρι^α του Ιεσσαί, και '*•. „., 
 
 ^ / > (- -ί J rcli.ix. 23. XI. 
 
 ' ζ ' ' a " Ό ~ b ' > ' " 'Ά b 'Λ - 31. 
 
 Ο ανισταμίνος αρ-χ^ίΐν ίυνων, εττ αυτω ευνη εΛτΓίου- scii xiv n 
 σιν. ode σεος ττ}ς εΛτΓίοος ττΑί^οωσαι υ/.ιας '"""^^^C ^ j^J'.'-^^jV is 
 
 χαράς και Βΐξ)ηνης εν τω ττιστεύειΐ', ^ εις το ' ττερισσεύειν i'^raes ν!"'» 
 
 f - ' - 'Λ '?. i ' <> / / ' ' ""'y•,' .?. ,„ 
 
 νμαο εν τν ίΑπιοι εν ουνααει ττνευματος ayiov. tt = ghI. m ίο. 
 
 ' " ' r Γ ^ ι J Cor. VI. lb. 
 
 u Luke sv. 32. Acts ii. 2fi al. DicUT. xxxii. 13. ν Lnke ii. 13 al. PsA. cxvi. 1. w here 
 
 only. 1 c. (alfx.) χ phir , Acts iv. 25, 27. Rev. vii. 9. x. 11. xi. 9. xvii. l.'i. xxi 3. y Is κ. xi. 1, 111. 
 
 ζ = Act5ii.3u(var. read.), iii 22, 2H al. Heb. vii. 11, IS. 1. c. a = Mark x. 42 only. b 1 Tim. 
 
 v. 1(1. vi. 17. vv. ace, 1 Tim. v. 5. (1 Pet. iii. 5. var. read.) τν. €v, Matt, xii. 21 var. read. w. ek, Jolin v. 4S. 
 
 2Cor. i. lU. 1 Pet. iii. 5. c liere only. d = Lnke ii. 40. ch. ii. 28 2 Tim. r. 4. 
 
 e = Acts XX. y reft". f Acts iv. 30 reff. g ch. viii. 20 reff. h ch. iii. 7 refiF. ich. i. 4reft'. 
 
 AC^D^EJ inss (appy) EpipL• Chr Thdrt Dam al.— 9. aft εν ίθν. {(θνεσι C), add κύριε 
 (from LXX) 1.17• 39. 44-7. 72. 80. 100-8-20•. 238 all v-ed tol syr ar-pol copt goth slav 
 Chr Pelag Sedul. — ψηλω το ov. σ. DEFG. — 11. aft τζαΚιν ins Afysi BDEFG 1 al it syrr 
 ar-erp copt seth goth Jer. — rec τον κνρ. ττ. τα ιθν. {corrn to LXX, where none read as in 
 tjct), with CFGJ &c Syr al Thl Oec: t.xt ABDE 47 (al .') d e ν syr arm goth Chr Thdrt 
 al lat-ff.— και om 17. 03. 100-8-9-15-20. 238 al Syr Chr.— rec ι-παιηπατε [corrn to 
 LXX, vat : but Λ al Did have txt), with DEFGJ &c Thdrt Chr al : txt ABC 39 al 
 Chr-msj Dam. — 12. aft Xtyu ins και 17. — άρχων Syr arm. — at end add και ισται η 
 αναπαυσις αυτού τιμή 57 (from Tsa xi. 10). — 13. for ίλττ., ιιρηνης 1. Γ21. — πληρο- 
 φουησαι νμας (ins tv Β) πάση χαρά κ. αρηνη BFG : ηληρωαίΐ 109. — ημί'ζ 100. — 
 χαράς και om 37• — for ειρ., ίλτηδυς 1. 121 : ευφροσυντις 21. 74. — (ν τω πιστ. om DEFG 
 al it (not d-) arm Vigj. — ττιητενειν εις το om 1. — ιις το ττεριασ. om 57: (v τω ττερισ- 
 σενειν 02. — νμας om 121 syr Chrtext : ημάς 109. — εν bef τη ίλττ. om D'EFG 31. 44 
 
 ησθαι : Ι would regard it as the historic 
 aorist, and understand ' each man at his 
 conversion.' Least of all can it be sub- 
 ordinated to εις TO, as is done in E. V.) on 
 account of (His) mercy (the emphasis is on 
 ν-κερ ελίονς: the Gentiles have no cove- 
 nant promise to claim, — thej' have nothing 
 but the pure mercy of God in grafting them 
 in to allege — therefore the Jew has an 
 advantage), &c.' — The citations are from 
 the Law, the Prophets, and the Psalms. 
 The first, originally spoken by David of his 
 joy after his deliverances and triumphs, is 
 prophetically said of Christ in His own 
 Person. It is adduced to shew that among 
 the Gentiles Christ's triumphs were to take 
 place, as well as among the Jews. 
 10.] και ττάλ. λ€γ€ΐ, viz. >"/ γραφή, or even 
 impersonal, ' it says,' i. e. ' it is written.' — 
 The present Heb. text of Deut. xxxii. 43 
 will not bear this, which is the LXX ren- 
 dering. But Tholuck remarks, " According 
 to the present text the difficulty arises, that 
 we must either take 2^12 of the Jewish 
 tribes, or construe yyyr] with an accus., in 
 stead of with b (Gesen.) : the reading of 
 the LXX may therefore be right." In 
 Vol. II. 
 
 several passages where the Gentiles are 
 spoken of prophetically, the Hebrew text 
 has apparently been tampered with by the 
 Jews. See Kitto's Journal of Sacred Liter- 
 ature for January, lfi52, pp. 275 ff. 
 11, 12.] The universality of the praise to 
 be given to God for His merciful kindness 
 in sending His Son is prophetically indi- 
 cated by the first citation. In the latter a 
 more direct announcement is given of the 
 share which the Gentiles were to have in 
 the root of Jesse. The version is that of 
 the LXX, which here differs considerably 
 from the Heb. The latter is nearly literally 
 rendered in E. V. : " And in that day there 
 shall be a root (Heb. ' and it shall happen in 
 that day, the branch ') of Jesse, which shall 
 stand for an ensign of the people : to it 
 shall the Gentiles seek." 13.] The 
 
 hortatory part of the Epistle, as well as the 
 preceding section of it (ver. 5), concludes with 
 a solemn wish for the spiritual welfare of the 
 Roman church. — The words της eXiriSos 
 connect with έλπιοϋσι of the foregoing ver. 
 — Xapols K. €ΐρήνης, as the happy result of 
 faith in God, and unanimity with one 
 another; see ch. xiv. 17• 
 
 Γ F
 
 434 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 XV. 
 
 k constr., cli. 
 
 Tiii 38. 
 Ich. i.UHreir. 
 m Gal. v. 22. 
 
 Epli. V. !). 
 
 2Thess. i. )1 
 
 only. Neh. 
 
 ix. 35. 
 η = 1 Cor. i. ft 
 
 al. fr. 
 ο Actssx. 31 
 
 reff. (Paul 
 
 only.) 
 ρ here only t. 
 
 Polyb.i. 17,7, ^ 
 
 τολμηρότε- J 
 
 ροκ 67xe 
 
 pfli' τοΐ? 
 
 14 
 
 ' ΥΙετηισμαι δε, α^ίΧφοΊ μου, και αυτυς εγω ττερι υμών abcd 
 
 > ' \ ι ' ' m ' η ' d Λ / EFGJ 
 
 ΟΤΙ και αυτοί μεστοί εστε αγαι/ωσυνης, πεττΛίί^ω^ίίί'οι 
 ^ πάσ>7€ " γΐ'^ιχεως, δυνάμενοι και αΧληΧους ° ΐ'οι/θετειι»' 
 ^^ •" roXjurjporfpov δε kypaxpa υμιν, α^εΧφοι, ''από /«ερους, 
 ως "^ επαναμιμιήισκων υμάς ^ Sia την ^* \αξ^ιν την '" δυ(ίε{σαυ 
 μοι υπο του ϋεου '" ^ εις το είΐΌΐ ^ε Λειτουργοί' χριστού 
 εις τα εθί'ΐι, " ιεξ>ουξ>Ύυΰντα το ^ ευαγγελίου του 
 " θεοΰ. Ίνα γενηται η ^ πξίοςφορα των εθνών " εύπ/οοςδεκτος, 
 
 , 1 Cor. i. 4 teff. 
 
 . . .. „. _. 2 Cor. xi. 7. 
 
 w Acts xxi. 21). xxiv. 17. Eph. v. 2 rtff. 
 
 q cli xi. 2.Ί. 2 Cor. i. 14. r liere only t- « = 'h- xi<'- 1^^ reff. 
 
 t ch.xiii. R reff. It = Col. i. 25. ii here only t. See notes. ν Mark i. 14. cli 
 
 I Thess ii.2, 8, 9. ITim. i. 11. 1 Pet. iv. 17 only. 
 X ver. 31. 2 Cor. vi. 2. viii. 12. 1 Pet. ii. 5 only t. 
 
 (al .') d e g Chr (Mtt's mSj) Vig.— 14. αδελφ. μον (om μον D^EFG d' g Tlulrfc Ambrst : 
 nos(7-i seth : αδ. μ. om Agap Sedul) aft ntpi νμ. DEFG it Syr eetli Thdrt : aft ίγω arm. 
 — νπιρ υμ. Β (so Scliolz and Lachm, not Tiscli). — και αντοι om DEFG it arr seth Chr- 
 comm Agap : add υ/ΐ£ΐς' slav.^ — for ayaOwry., αγαθοσ. DJ : πγαττης FG it ν Ambrst Pelag. 
 — και πίπληρ. DEFG it Syr seth. — πασ. της γνωσ. BalClem. — γνωιτεως, αλΧηλ. Cm'ct- 
 ^fvoi D'D'EFG. — for αλλ>;λ., άλλους J very manymss syrr slav Chr Thdrt Thl Oec Ruf. 
 — 15. τολμηροτΐρως KR: τολμηροί' 109. — αδίλψοι om ABC copt seth Cyr Chr Aug Ruf: t.^t 
 DEFGJ &c vss (but αδ. μον syrr arm ar-pol) Thdrt al Ambrst al: Άΐίμίρονς 3. 108 {see below 
 οηνει•'Μ).—αναμ{μιιηηκων Β. — απο του (om Thdrt) Qtov BF Dam. — 16. from Of ου to 9tov 
 om 48'. 2 1 !)'.— for f tivit, γενέσθαι D'FG.— rec ιησ. χρ. with DEJ &c Syr copt al Chr Thdrt 
 al : txt ABCFGit V syral Orig (in Wetst) Cyr Augal. — εις τα έθνη om Β. — iva -γενηθη Β. 
 — ενττροςδ. om FG g Fulg. — και ηγιασμ. v-ed Syr seth slav-ed harl- Ambrst Pelag Bed. 
 
 XV. 14— XVI. 27.] CONCLUSION 
 OF THE EPISTLE. Personal no- 
 tices, RESPECTING THE ApOSTLE HIM- 
 SELF (XV. 14 33), — RESPECTING THOSE 
 
 GREETED (xvi. 1 16), AND GREETING 
 
 (xvi. IG — 23) ; — and concluding dox- 
 OLOGY (xvi. 24—27). 14—33.] 
 
 He first (14 — 16) excuses the boldness of 
 his writiny, by the allegation of his office as 
 Apostle of the Gentiles. 14 ] ανιτος 
 
 €γώ, ' Imyself,'= 'idem,'Lat., — 'notwith- 
 standing what I have written :' see ch. vii. 
 25 note. Meyer understands it, ' without 
 information from others :' Bengel and 
 Olsh., ' / myself, as well as others ;' Riick- 
 ert, 'I not only wish it (ver. 13), but am. 
 persuaded for myself that it is so.' 
 και αυτοί, ' ye also yourselves,' i. e. with- 
 out exliortation of mine. 15.] άττό 
 μΐ'ρους restricts the τολμηρότερον to cer- 
 tain parts of the Epistle, e. g. ch. xi. 17, ff. 
 25. chaps, xiii. and xiv. έγραψα, the 
 dabam or scribeham of the Latins in episto- 
 lary writing, ως έιταν. νμ., ' as put- 
 ting you anew in remembrance.' 
 8ia T. χάριν . . . , on account of the grace, 
 &C. ;' i. e. ' my apostolic office was the 
 ground and reason of my boldness :'• — not=; 
 ^ιά της χάριτος ch. xii. 3. 16.] ' That 
 I might be (ίΐ'ς τό gives the purpose of the 
 grace being given, not of the έ'γραψο) a 
 ministering priest of Christ Jesus for 
 (in reference to) the Gentiles, ministering 
 in the Gospel of God (ίίρουρ^οΰίτα, -κρος- 
 
 ψέροντα θνσίαν, Hesych. : but the εναγγίΧ. 
 τ. θεοϋ is not the θυσία, but signifies that 
 wherein, in behoof of which, the ιερυυργεΊν 
 took place : so Josephus, de Mace. § 7> 
 speaking of the martyrs for the law, says, 
 Γοιοΰτοιις δεΧ είναι τους Ιερουργοΐντα? τον 
 νόμον ίδίψ α'Ιματι, και γενναίφ Ίδρώτι 
 τοις μέχρι θανάτου -πάθεση' ίιπερασπί- 
 ζηντας), that the offering of the Gen- 
 tiles (gen. of apposition: the Gentiles 
 themselves are the offering ,- so Theophyl. 
 α'ΰτη μοι Ίερωσύν7], τό καταγγ'ελλειν εναγ- 
 γέλίοΐ'. μάχαιραν εχιο τον λόγον' θυτία 
 εστε ήμε'ις) may be acceptable, sanctified 
 by the Holy Ghost.' — The language is 
 evidently figurative, and can by no possibi- 
 lity be taken as a sanction for any view of 
 the Christian minister as a sacrificing priest , 
 otherwise than according to that figure — 
 viz. that he offers to God the acceptable 
 sacrifice of those ivho by his means believe 
 on Christ. " Facit se antistiteni vel sacer- 
 dotem in Evangelii ministerio, qui populum, 
 quem Deo acquirit, in sacrificium offerat, 
 atque hoc modo sacris Evangelii mysteriis 
 operetur. Et sane hoc est Christiani j)as- 
 toris sacerdotium, homines in Evangelii 
 obedientiam subigendo veluti Deo im- 
 molare : non, quod superciliose hactenus 
 Papistse jactarunt, oblatione homines re- 
 conciliare Deo. Neque tamen ecclesias- 
 ticos pastures simpliciter hie vocat Sacer- 
 dotes, tanquam perpetuo titulo : sed quum 
 dignitatem efficaciamque ministerii vellet
 
 14—20. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 435 
 
 ^ ηγιασμξΐ'η ^ εν ττνίνματι ανιω. 
 
 17 
 
 ■χριστώ Ιησού " τα ττρος τον 
 
 ε^ω ουν τΐ]ΐ> 
 eov 
 
 18 ' ^ b 
 
 ου yap τοΑμησω 
 
 ΥησίΙ/ ν (nnd constr.) 
 ^ , John xv.i. 
 
 Ιθι 
 
 λο' 
 
 KaTr]^>yaaaTO χριστός 
 
 δι' 
 
 19 f 
 
 ίμου ίΐς 
 
 17, 19. 1 Cor. 
 i.2. Heb. 
 χ. 10, Uti. 
 Jude 1. 
 ch.iii.S/ reff. 
 /Τίΐ* 1 Cor. XV. 31. 
 ' » Luke xiv. 28, 
 
 νπακοην ίϋνων, ~ Λόγω και ~ ff>7w» ^"^ £ϊ^ δυνάμει 
 μειων και ^τεράτων, ίν δυνάμει πνεύματος, ωςτε με απόι,ΡΜί. ι 
 Ιερουσα\ημ και ' κύκλω μ^\ρι του 1\λυζ)ΐκοΰ ' πεπΧηρω- 
 κεναι το eυayyελιov του "^οιστοΰ. 
 μουμενον ευayyε\'^t,εσΘaι, ουχ οττου 
 
 14. 
 bij aitr., I Cor. 
 vii. 1. Hfb. 
 V. 8. Wiaer, 
 
 1 John iii. 18. (Sie 1 Cor. if. 19, 20. 1 Thess. i. 5.) 
 Acts ii 19, 22rcn. h Mark iii. 34. vi. (i, 3I>. 
 
 XXX7. uhI. i = Col.i 2S. Sec .\ct.s xii. 25. 
 
 Luke XX. 1. Acts xir. 7. 1 Cor. i. 17. ix. IH, 18 only. 
 
 ουτω οε φιλοτι- cchTw. 9reff. 
 
 m ^ f i\ \ Λ ill. i. ft reft'. 
 
 ωνομασυη -νοιστος, escor. χ. ii. 
 
 f vrr. lo. ch. i. 4 1 
 Luke ix. 12. w. gen., Rev. iv 
 k = 2 Cor. V. 9. 1 Thess 
 in — 2 Tim. ii. 19 only 
 
 g John iv. 48. 
 R. V. 11. vii. II. Gen. 
 iv. 11. labsol., 
 
 ISA. XX vi. 13. 
 
 — 17. έχων lOfi: add μιν 93. — rec hef κανγ. om την {corrn, the art not being under- 
 stood), \v'\U\ AJ &c Chr Thdrtal: ins BCDEFG 37. — rec bef Qtov om τον; but ins 
 ABCDEFGJ most mss Cyr Clir Dam Thdrt Oec— 18. τολμώ Β it ν Did Dial-w-Maced 
 Thdrt, Cyr (in Thdrt) lat-ff.-rec rt bef ωι/, with J &c : txt ABCDEFG 37. 80 it ν 
 Ath Cyr Did Chr Thdrt Bas Archel Ά\.—\α\ησαι 7(i. 1 15 Chr Thdrt Thl : tintiv DEFG 
 Cyr : Xi-ytiv Bas Dial-w-Maced Thdrtj : Χαβαν τι I : txt ABCJ most mss Ath Did Oec. 
 ^κατίΐργασαΓο {corrn to more usual form) A(B.')C &c : txt DEFGJ al. — ο χριστός 
 FG. — aft δι ίμου add λύγων {-yov Birch) B. — for υττακο., ακυην Β. — και λογ. κ. (oy. 
 38.48.72: (ργ. κ. λογ. 44.— 19. aft tv δυναμ., add αυτού D'D'EFG d^ g. -rec aft 
 ■πνίυματος, ins θ(ου, with D-J all Syr al Chr-te.\t Thdrt Thl Oec: άγιου ACD'D'EFG^ 
 (acroi; πν. ay. G') 10. 17. 31-7. 47- 100. (102 3-marg) 1203-77-8-9-83. 239 al it ν copt 
 arm syr Ath Cyr Bas Chr-comm Dial Ruf-coram al latt vss : Ofoi» άγιου 90 {both are thus 
 shewn to be interpolations) : txt Β Pelag-comm Vigj. — ωςτί τηπληροιηθαι {nt cornple- 
 retur aut compleverim g) σπο it^t. μέχρι του ιλλ. και κύκλω το DEFG it.— bef κύκλω, 
 om και J^ Thdrt: κύκλω om 178. — 20. φιλοτιμούμαι (corrn of constr) BD'FG: 
 -μονμενος \\G-20 : om ν d e Ruf Pel. — tvayytXiaaatiai 109. — οττου ουκ D'FG g Chr 
 
 commendare Paulus, hac metaphora per 
 occasionem est usus. Hie ergo finis sit 
 Evangelii praeconibus in suo munere, ani- 
 mas fide purificatas Deo offerre." Calvin. 
 17—22.] The Ap. boasts of the 
 extent and result of his apostolic mission 
 among the Gentiles, and that in places 
 where none had preached before him. — 
 ' I have therefore (consequent on the 
 grace and ministry just mentioned) my 
 boasting (i. e. ' I venture to boast :' not = 
 ίχω καύ)(^ημα, ' I have whereof to boast,' 
 as E. V. but, as De W., := ίχω καυχάσΙ^αι, 
 ' / can, or dare, boast ') in Christ Jesus 
 (there is no stress on tv χρ. Ί;;σ.,— it 
 merely qualifies τι'/ν καύχησιν as no vain 
 glorying, but grounded in, consistent with, 
 springing from, his relation and subs^erviency 
 to Christ) of (concerning) matters relating 
 to God' (my above-named sacerdotal office 
 and ministry). 18.] The connexion is : 
 
 ' I have real ground for glorying (in a legi- 
 timate and Christian maimer) ;' ' for I will 
 not (as some false apostles do, see 2 Cor. x. 
 12—18) allow myself to speak of any 
 thing which (ώι- for tkf(j/i«i', ti, attr.) 
 Christ has not done by me (but by some 
 other) in order to the obedience (subjec- 
 tion to the Gospel) of the Gentiles (then, 
 as if the sentence were in the affirmative 
 
 F 
 
 form, ' I will only boast of what Christ has 
 veritably done bg me towards the ob. of the 
 G.,' he proceeds) in word and deed, in 
 the power of signs and wonders, in the 
 power of the Spirit.' — The signs and won- 
 ders (retf.) are not spiritual, but external 
 miraculous acts, — see 2 Cor. xii. 12. 
 19.] ' So that (result of the κατ;;ργήσπτο) 
 from Jerusalem (the eastern boundary of 
 his preaching) and the neighbourhood 
 {κΰκ\ψ is not to be joined with μίχρι τ. 
 Ίλλ. as Calov., al., but refers [refi'.] to 
 Jerusalem, meaning perhaps its immediate 
 neighbourhood, perhaps Arabia [.'], Gal. i. 
 17, — but hardly Damascus and Cilicia, as 
 De W. suggests, seeing that they would 
 come into the route afterwards specified, 
 from Jerus. to lUyr.) as far as Illyricum 
 (Illyr. bordered on Macedonia to the S. 
 It is possible that Paul may literally have 
 advanced to its frontiers during his preach- 
 ing in Macedonia ; but I think it more pro- 
 bable, that he uses it broadly as the ' termi- 
 nus ad quem,' the next pnjvince to tliat in 
 which he had preached), I have fulfilled 
 (ref. : — ' executed mg office of preaching,' 
 so that ει'ιηγγέλιοι/ τοϊι χρ. := τό tnayyt- 
 λίζίσθαι τΰν χρ.) the Gospel of Christ. 
 20.] But (limits the foregoing as- 
 sertion) thus (after the following rule) being 
 F 2
 
 436 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 XV. 
 
 .xiT.4reff. ivo μτι εττ' ° α\\6τξ)ΐον ° θίμίλιον ^υικοΒομω, ^ αλλά καθώς 
 
 ' ' "■ , /-.τ ' π ' 'Λ >>->/, \ 
 
 •γε-νοατΓται Utg ουκ ανην-^ίλη ττίοι αυτού, οψονται, και 
 
 '^■^ hio 
 
 nch 
 
 = 1 Cor. iii 
 
 111, U, 12. 
 
 Hrb. vi 1. 
 ρ = Gal ii 18. 
 
 (See 1 Cor. 
 
 iii. 12 ) 
 η Acts xiT. 27. 
 
 Is.\.lii. 15. 
 r ch iii. 11. 
 
 Ps. ii 10. 
 
 Prov. ii. Γι. 
 s Acts xsiv. 4 
 
 reft", 
 t here only. 
 
 Xen. Hell. 
 
 «I ουκ ακΐ}Κοασιι> 
 τα πολλά του 
 
 ν / >' ' - 
 
 τόπον iyjbjv iu τοις 
 εγων ' του ϊΧθαν προς υμάς 
 αν πορίυωμαι εις την Έπανιαν, 
 
 και 
 
 23 
 
 συνησουσιν 
 ίΧβίΐν προς νμας 
 
 κΧιμασιν τούτοις, 
 
 '' αττυ " ικανών ίτων, "' ως 
 (έλτΓί'Ζ^ω γαρ '^^ διαττορευ- 
 
 EVE/COTTTOyUiJl' 
 
 νυνι δε μηκίτι 
 
 " ετΓίποθίαν οε 
 
 24 
 
 vi. 2, 3(1. , ^, /Ι t- N»,'f''d ,Λ" e•- 
 
 u consir, Acts οίχεί'ος ΌζασασΌαι υμάς και αφ νμων ποοπΐμφυηναι εκε/, 
 
 χ. 47 reft. ,_ _ f ' y ι (.>ΛΛ-\9'ί ><>^ 
 
 Ui."Heb;Vii. ίον fjuwi; πρώτον απο μεοους 
 
 Ιί/οουσαλίίΑ 
 
 ε/απλησθω.) 
 
 το(ς 
 
 νυνι 
 
 w2Cor. xi. 10. ττορευομοι εις Ιερουσαλήμ όιακ:ονωΐ' τοις ayιo^ς. 
 
 onlyt'. (JndS- XX• 1 alPX• Ι'»Ι?) χ here (iiily t. y con.str., Acts xiv. 9 reff. ζ Luk•• viii. 43. 
 
 aLukexsiii.'S. Mark x. 4(w.l. Ezek. i. 24. alex. b 1 Cor. xi. 34. Phil. ii. 23 c absol.. 
 
 Lake xviii. 3(1. Xen. Aiiab. ii. 2. 11. d Acts xv. 3 reff. e = Matt. ii. 22 Jolin xi. 8. xviii. 3. 
 
 fver. l.i. g — hereoiilr. Lcke i. 53. vi. 2.i. John vi. 12 only. Job xxii. 18. .See Acts xiv. 
 
 17. (= Polyb. i. 17. 3.) h = 2 Tim. i. 18. Philem. 13. Hcb. vi. 10. pres. part., Winer, } 46. 5. Acts 
 
 vi. 11. XV. 27. i = Acta ix. 13 reff. 
 
 Bed.— Ο χοισΓ. D'FG 219 Chr.— £jr' aWorpiw θεμιλιω FG.— 21. αττηγγελη C (2.38.'). 
 —οφοντα'ι bef otc Β 3?.— for oi, ο 80.— 22. ινίκοπηΐ' DEFG.— πολλάκις BDEFG: τα 
 τΓολλα om 7') arm-cdd. — 23. for έχων (1st), ίχίΐΐ' 10!). — ύε om HI. — for έχων ("ind), 
 εχω {corrn of comtr) D'FG 37• 1 15-21 d' g. — κλημασι (--το• G) AG (C?). — τυυ om A. — 
 rec for ικαικ, ττυλλων (corrn io more vsual exprn) with ADEFGJ &c : t.xt BC 37-i). 
 71 Dam.— 24. rec εαν {corrn) with J <&c Chri Thdrt al : t.xt ABC(appy)DEFG 39. 73. 
 eOalChrjDam: add ovv DEFG slav {sed cum d' g).— πορΕΜΟ/ι/οι DEFG 47• 109 al 
 lect 14 : -ηομαι J 122^ : -froj/t at Thdrt (profieisci cospero ν d e Ambrst) : txt AB(e sil)C 
 aU Chr Thl al.— £πι 109-78.- ίστΓπΐ'ΐαι/ 44-8. 72-4-G. 10«-14-15-20-21 alThdrt-mss Thl. 
 — rec aft σττανιαν, ins ιλενσομαι ττμος νμας {(ο βΙΙ t/p the aposiopenis : see note), with J 
 mss (nrly) syr ar-pol slav Thdrt Thl Oec: om ABCDEFG 177 it ν sjt ar-erp copt seth 
 arm Clir Dam Ambrst Pel Ruf Sedul Bed : for -π-μος, ας 29. — ycip om FG it ν Syr ar-erp 
 copt seth Chr lat-ff {videbo vos el a vobis dedncar Ambrst) : ins ABCDEJ mss (nrly) syr 
 ar-pol slav Thdrt' Dam Thl Oec: (■£ 3. 5. 108' 20 Chr (Mtt's msj) Thdrtj.— πορπ'.-^ίΐ^ος 
 A 62 Danij.— for θεασ.. tXcifir ττρος 219. — rec v<p νμ. {corrn to more usual exprn), with 
 ACJ&cChral: txt BDEFG 57. 91. 109-132-23'-79. 238 al.— ί;^ω)' Τι.—ττροπορίν- 
 θηναι 14. — 25. διακονησαι DEFG it ν : -νήσων 73: -νουμενος 23: txt ABCJ mss 
 
 careful (reff. : the word in the Ap.'s usage 
 seems to lose its primary meaning of ' mak- 
 ing a point of honour.' — The particip. 
 agrees with ^f, ver. 19) to preacli the 
 Gospel, not where Christ was (previously) 
 named, that I might not build on the 
 foundation of another, but as it is written 
 (i. e. according to the following rule of 
 Scripture : I determined to act in the spirit 
 of these words, forming part of a general 
 prophecy of the dispersion of that Gospel 
 which I was preaching), &C.' — The citation 
 is from the LXX., περί αυτόν referring to 
 ό τταΐς μου, ver. 13, but being unrepre- 
 sented in the Heb., which is literally as our 
 E.V.: "That which had not been told them, 
 shall they see : and that which they had not 
 heard, shall they consider." 22.] διό, 
 
 not, because afoimdation had been already 
 laid at Rome by another : this would refer 
 to merely a secondary part of the foregoing 
 assertion : cio refers to the primary, viz. his 
 having been so earnestly engaged in preach- 
 ing elsewhere. τα ττολλά, ' these many 
 times :' not, as Meyer, Fritz., ' the greater 
 
 number of times,' — which would suggest the 
 idea that there had been other occasions on 
 which this hindrance had not been operative. 
 23.] μηκ. τότΓ. έχων, Ί have no more 
 occasion,' viz. of apostolic work. — The par- 
 ticipial constr. prevails throughout, the 
 participles standing as direct verbs. This 
 not having been seen, the words ΐλεΰ'^ομαι 
 ■προς νμας have been inserted to fill up 
 what seemed an aposiopesis. ' Now, how- 
 ever, I have no longer any business 
 in these parts, but have had for many 
 years past a desire to see you, whenever 
 (as soon as) I journey into Spain.' — Re- 
 specting the question whether this journey 
 into Spain was ever taken, the views of 
 commentators have differed, according to 
 their conclusion respecting the liberation of 
 the Ap. from his imprisonment at Rome. 
 I reserve the discussion for the Prolegg. to 
 the Pastoral Epistles, vol. III. prolegg. 
 pp. 8G — 97. Meanwhile the reader may 
 see, on the side of the co7tipletio?i of 
 the journey, Neander, Pfl. u. Leit., ed. 4, 
 pp. 527 — 552, — and on the other side.
 
 21— so. ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 437 
 
 ευοοκησαν yap Μακεδοΐ'/α κηι Άναία ' κοίνων/αΐ' τίνα k = Liikexii. 
 
 ' ο ΓΠ • ν \ ~ r , . t 32. 1 Cor. i. 
 
 ποιησασϋαι πς τους πτωχούς των ' α-γιων των εν Ιερού- piixvii'ie^" 
 
 Λ' 27 k 'J' ' >Q', Λ' ' > ' - . l = ac.>r.ix. ■ 
 
 σαΛημ. ευόοκησαν yap, και οφειΛίται εισιν αυτών, ει ΐ3. ηλ. 
 
 yap τυις ττνευματικοις αυτών ^ εκοινωνησαν τα έθνη, ίΙ^''*''' ^''• 
 
 α','Λ ί» -Γ "SA - ι-ηΐ"=2 Cor. νϋί. 
 
 οφείΛουσιν και εν τοις σαρκικοις λειτoυpy7]σaι αυτοις. 4 ix. ιι. 
 
 28 - ■? t • Λ ' \ , ■ ■, - ^^ η ch. i. 14 rrff. 
 
 τούτο ουν εττιτεΧεσας και ^ σ(ppaylf7aμεvoς αυτοις τον °%)\^il\"f• 
 καρπον τούτον '" απεΧενσομαι δι νμων εις Σττανίαν' "'ren.^" 
 
 t)q -ί ^ <\\ ti » f ν f-» / qver. Ireff. 
 
 οιόα οε ΟΤΙ ερχόμενος προς υμάς εν " ττληοωματί ^ ευ- ''γΊ.\'^"''^' 
 
 λ' "'λ' λΠζ Λ-Γ\\Γ- S = here only. 
 
 oyιaς χριστού ελευσομαι. ''" τταρα/οαλω οε υ /itac, Actsxui.a. 
 
 αοελψοι, ^ cia του κυρίου ημών Ιησού γρίστοΰ και ^ δια '■^1\1; j^'""' 
 
 _-:„ a'''_ - a ' b > Ω ' • t2 Cor.' vii. 1. 
 
 της ayaπης του πνεύματος, συνανωνισασυαι μοι εν vm 6ai. 
 
 ' '1 Kings iii. 
 
 12. οΓ. sacred rifes, Hcb. ix. fireff. u See John iii. 33. v=»GaI.v.22. Eph.v.y. Hel). xii. 
 
 11. Jajues iii. li(. w «= M.itt. viii. 19. x. 5 al. fr. Isa. xxxvii 37. χ :- Epii. iii. lil y cli. xvi. 
 
 18. ICor. X. 111. 2Cori\.oal. Kzek. xxxiv. 2B. ζ ch. xii. 1. a Uere only. See Col. i. 8. 
 
 there only t. See Col. iv. 12. 
 
 (nrly) &c.— 26. ενδυκησι Β G2. 120 flor Thdrti (and elsw-msi) Aug Ruf: txt ACDG 
 d g V &c. — μακαιδοΐ'ΐς (so also d') και αχαιακηι (but κοι in κοιί'ωνκιν cm G) FG g : 
 μακίδοΐ'ίαν κ. αχαιαν 109. — των εν up. ayiwr DEFG : tu>v aft ay. oin 178. — 27. for 
 ευδοκ. (»;υδ. A Chr-Mtt's-ras,) yap και οφίΐλ(ται, οψειλ. yap DEFG d- g Ambrst. — 
 rec αυτ. εισ. with FGJ &c : t.xt ABCDE d e ν copt al Ambrst.— ουΓωτ (2nd) om J. 
 — for λειτοιίίίγησαι, κηινωΐ'ησαι 37- 80. — αυτονς 80. — 28. τούτο ονν αρα FG. — 
 αυτοις οιη Β TG. 108. — ηιντοί' om arm. — Pt νμας FG. — rec την σπαν. (none om 
 την in ver 24) : txt ABDFG 5. 37. 73. !iO. 93 al Chr : ισπαηαν, &c as above, ver 24. 
 — 29. for oiOa δ(, γανωσκω yap FG {yap also it harl Syr Ruf x\mbrst lat-ff : μεν 
 178). — ερχόμενος om FG g. — πληροφορία D'(E)FG al abiindantia {-am d) ν d g. — rec 
 bef χοίσΓου, ins τον εvayyελtoυ τον {prob a gloss), with J &c syrr ν al Chr Thdrt al : 
 om ABCDEFG i>V- 179 am harl demid it copt aeth arm (om χο also) Clem lat-ff.— 
 30. αδελφοί om Β 76 aeth Chr (and Mtt's mss) : add μου syrr copt al : bef παρακ. νμ. 
 lectt (and C^-marg) ar-pol : hef νμ. demid {iAe variations in posn are suspicious : but 
 may nut the word, characteristic as it is here, have been first rejected as unnecessary, 
 and then noted in the margin, and variously inserted ^ Lachm retains it). — ονόματος 
 τον κνρ. J 74. 12.') lectt. — ημών om I7. — πν. ayiov 46 ν (not tol) copt seth arm Ambrst 
 Pelag Vig, al. — συvayωvισaσOε 5. — προςευχ. υμωΐ' DEFG 30-marg it ν (not am demid 
 harl- al) al Pelag : ττρ. μον Vigj. — νπερ εμού om FG d' g v-ms Ruf Bed : ττιρι 77• 
 
 Dr. Davidson, Introd. to N. T. vol. II. to the Jews for spiritual blessings. This 
 
 pp. i)(> — 102, and Wieseler, Chron. der general principle is very similarly enounced 
 
 Apost. Zeitalt., Excursus I., where a co- in I Cor. ix. 11. It is suggested by Grot., 
 
 pious list of books on both sides is given, al., that by this Paul wished to hint to 
 
 24.] άτΓο ρ,βρους is an affectionate the Romans the duty of a similar contri- 
 
 limitation of ίμπ\ησΗώ, implying that he bution. 28.] καρττόν, hardly, as Calv., 
 
 would wish to remain much longer than he al., " proventum quem ex Evangelii satione 
 
 anticipated being able to do, — and also, as ad Judaeos redire nuper dixit :" more pro- 
 
 Chrys., υνδε'ις yap με χρόνος έμπλήσαι bably said generally, — fruit of the faith 
 
 δύναται, οϋδε εμποιησαί μοι κόροι' τι/ς and love of the Gentiles, σφραγισ., ώς• ίΐ'ς 
 
 σννονσίας νμων. 25.] See Acts xix. βασί\ιι;ά ταμηϊα αποθεμένος ώς iv ά'^ι''\ψ 
 
 21; xxiv. 17. 2 Cor. viii. 9. διακόνων, κ. ασφαλή χω_ο('(,υ. Chrys. δι' νμων, 
 
 not the future, because he treats the whole ' through your city.' 29.] The 
 
 action as already begun : see reff. ' fullness of the blessing of Christ ' im- 
 
 26.] See 2 Cor. ix. 1, 2, &c. kol- ports that richness of apostolic grace whicli 
 
 νων ] See reff. — Olsh. remarks, on τους lie was persuaded he should impart to them. 
 
 ΤΓτωχούς τ. αγίων, that this shews the So he calls his presence in the churches a 
 
 community of goods in the church at Je- χάρις, 2 Cor. i. 15. So also ch. i. 11. 
 
 rusalem not to have lasted long. 27.] 30 — 32.] τ. άγάττ. τ. '7Γν€ύμ., tho 
 
 The fact is re-stated, with a view to an love shed abroad in the heart by the Holy 
 
 inference from it, viz. that the ευδόκησαν Ghost ; — a love which teaches us to look 
 
 was not merely a matter of benevolence, not only on our own things but on tho 
 
 but of re/ja^»ie?i<.• the Gentiles being debtors things of others. σνναγων.] "Ipso
 
 438 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. XV. SI— 33. 
 
 c = ch.vii.24 ταΓς ΤΓΟοςευναις υπέρ ΐμου προς τον θίον, Ίνα ^ ρυσυω abcd 
 
 d = ActsxiT '^-d' ί1 ' ' "'15•' »'e5' ' ^^'^^ 
 
 2. xvH.f.ai. ατΓΟ των αττίΐυουντων εν τ?/ Iokocmo, κηι η dtoK-ovra 
 e=Acf.si. ir. f»»'T ^'^e' 'V> ' -h'/ 
 
 vi. I. XU.25. ΐ|ου Τ? εις ΙερουσαΛίίμ ^ ευπροςοεκτυς -νίΐ'*/τ«ί τοις αγιο/ς, 
 
 g veT.Mireft•. *^^tva ' iv \Ojoa έλθω πρυς• υ^ιιας δια ίίελl]/uατoς σεου 
 
 Ε = Act» IX. 13 ρ \ 1 '' , ' - 1 33 ' 5'^ m ί) "■ - 111 ' ' 
 
 reii. και συχιανατταυσωμαι νμιν\. ο οε σεος τΐ}ς ειοί}- 
 
 i => 1 Cor. ii. 3 L' _ j . 
 
 ki'cor.i. 1. VJ/c '^ μίτα πάντων ΰμων. αμήν. 
 viii.%'.'' Eph. XVI. ^ ° Συνίστημι δε ύμιν Φο'ιβην την α^ίΧώην τ/μών, 
 
 i. ι. Col. ί. 1. ^ ^ ^,^, »»γ, ^Ori 
 
 onTy"*' ' οΰσοί' ■' διοκτονον της εκκλίίσιας της εν Κεγχρεαις, '^ ινα 
 (SeeTcor. ^ ποος^ί^,ησθί αυτήν ^ ίν κυρ'ιω ^ αΕ,ιως των ^ α-γιων και 
 
 Ύϋ'ΐΛ] Isaxi 6 mch.xti. 20. 1 Cnr. xiv. 33. 2 Cor. xiii. 11. Pbil. iv. i». Ileb. xiii. 20. (2 Thess. 
 
 iiil(i) II Kllips., Matt. i. 23. ο = 2 Cor. v. 12. 1 Mace. xii. 43. ρ = Phil. i. 1. 1 Tim in. 
 
 8,12.' qr =Phil. ii.2!l. r vv. 8, 12. i Cor. xvi. It) al. 8 Eph. iv. 1. Phil, i. 27. Col. 
 
 1. 10. 1 Thess. ii. 12. 3 John vi. only t. 
 
 179: aft 9eov 93. — 31. και om lect 14. — rec aft και ins iva {supplementary), with 
 D-'EJ &c: t.\t ABCD>FG (>V. 80 (al?) it ν Syr copt arm Dam Ruf Pelag Ambrst 
 lat ff. — for ίιακονια, δωροφυρια BD'FG (corrn to avoid harshness of ^laKtw. ttq ifo. : 
 see belou•) d e {remuneratio) Ambrst {miinerum meorum ministratio) : txt ACD^EJ mss 
 (appy) v.'is g {admmistratio), ν Sedul Bed {ohseqvii oblatio), d^ Ruf {minisierium) Chr 
 Thdrt Dam Thl Oec al.— for .'/ (om J 37- 73. 93. 122 al Thdrtj Chr-mss) tig, ή tv BD'FG 
 213 (and omg »/ G(J Chr latt?) : txt ACD^EJ mss (nrly) Thdrt^ Chr (Mtt's msj) Thl 
 al. — τυις ay. ytvi}Tai {corrn of order, to connect (νπυΐ'ςΰ. τ. ayioic) ABC (Syr) Dam 
 {yn'r}atrai lectt 8. 37 Dam) : t.xt DEFGJ mss (appy) vss (nrly) gr-lat-ff.— 32. for 
 θίου, Kvptov ιηηου Β : χριστην ιησον D'EFG {ιησ. χρ. Ambrst) : txt ACD^J mss (appy) 
 vss" nrly Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec lat-tf.— ίλθων (omg και aft) AC 67^. 71 Ruf- — και 
 σνναναττανσωμαι νμιν om Β {--πανηομαι^ 48 al, -παιισω '23' : οναψυ£ω DE : ανα->\/ΐ'χω 
 FG: υμάς 23'. 48 : μιΒ νμων DEFG) : ins AC (om και) mss Chr Thdrt Dam Thl 
 Oec : rejriyereni or -rer vobiscum it ν lat-ff.— 33. om 48.— jjriu μ(τα DEFG it ν syr. — 
 αμήν om AFG 80. 109-78 al g : ins B(e sil)CDEJ mss (nrly)^ (exc g) Chr Thdrt 
 Dam Thl Oec lat-ff. 
 
 Chap. XVI. 1. h om D'FG d' g seth Sedul.— for ημ., νμων AFG 2. 73 al g Thl : om 
 seth Chr. — ονσον και BC 47.— ei' Kf ι^χρ. A : κη'χρ. D'FG : Ktxpfnic47^ 109 al.— 2. rec 
 avT. ττροςί., with AJ &c ν Syr al Chr Thdrt al Ambrst al : txt BCDEFG 57 al it harl 
 
 oret oportet, qui alios vult orare secum. ministro' dicebantur, quid esset veri et per 
 
 Orare, agon est, prsesertim ubi homines tormenta quserere." A minute discussion 
 
 resistunt." Bengel. 31.] Compare of their office, &c. in later times, may be 
 
 Acts XX. 22; xxi. 10 — 14. — The exceeding found in Suicer, Thesaurus, sub voce; and 
 
 hatred in which the Ap. was held by the in Bingham, book II. chap. 22, § 8. Ne- 
 
 Jews, and their want of fellow-feeling with ander, Pfl. u. Leit., ed. 4, pp. 2(J5— 267» 
 
 the Gentile churches, made him fear lest shews that the deaconesses must not be 
 
 even the ministration with which he was confounded with the χϊιραι of 1 Tim. v. 
 
 charged might not prove acceptable to them. 3 — 10, as has sometimes been done. — 
 
 32.] δια θίλ. θΐον = £01' ό κύριος- Kenchre^, the jiort of Corinth {των 
 
 θίΚίισ7), ι Cor. iv. 19: otherwise in reff. Κορηθίων ίπίνειοί', Philo in Flacc. § 19: 
 
 K. truvav. {)|x., ' and may refresh my- κώμΐ] τις της ΚοριΊΌοΐ' μίγίστη, Theo- 
 
 self together with you;' — i. e. 'that we doret, h. 1.) on the Saronic gulf of the 
 
 may mutually refresh ourselves, I after my ^gean, for commerce with the east (Acts 
 
 dangers and deliverance, you after your xviii. 18) : seventy stadia from Corinth, 
 
 anxieties for me.' But the text is in Strabo viii. 380. Pausan. ii. 2, 3. Livy xxxii. 
 
 some confusion. Chap. XVI. 17• Plin. iv. 4. The Apostolical Constitu- 
 
 1 — 16.] Recommendation of Phcebe: tions (vii. 4C) make the first bishop of the 
 
 GREETINGS. 1, 2.] In all probability Cenchrean church to have been Lucius, 
 
 Phoebe was the bearer of the Epistle, as consecrated by Paul himself (Winer, RWB.). 
 
 stated in the subscription. διάκονον] The western port, on the Sinus Corinthia- 
 
 'Deaconess.' See 1 Tim. iii. 11, note. Pliny cus, was Leche (Paus.), Lechese (Plin.), 
 
 in his celebrated letter to Trajan says, " ne- or Lecheum (Strab., Ptol.). 2.] ev 
 
 cessarium credidi, ex duabus ancillis quse κνρίω, itt a Christian manner, — as mindful
 
 XVI. 1—5. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 439 
 
 παραστητε cwry ev ώ αν υμών " y^pyty 'τρά.'^ματι' /cat t - 2Tim.i7. 
 
 yap αυτή ^ προστατις ποΧΧων εγ£ΐ'ϊ/0ΐ7, και αυτοΰ ξμου. " ί,',ί'^'ρ Ι• f^' 
 
 ΑσπασασΘε ΥΙρίσκαν και ΑκυΧαν τους "^ συνεργούς η" n!niyi^°' 
 
 > -«Ι -4χ" '' -VI- Jutlg. xi.V. 
 
 μου εν γυριστώ Ιησου, οιτινες υπέρ της "ψυ^ης Μοι» ^'^^fJ■|"",'y+■ 
 
 roι' εαυτών " τραγηΧον ^ υπεθηκαν, οις ουκ εγώ μονός w%l^"',ii' 
 
 a 1 _ ,, . ν'^ , - • aa ' Λ ' - 'η ~ 1 Cor. iii. 9 
 
 £υ\αριστω άλλα και ττασαι αι εκκλησιαι των ευνων, aiHPaai. 
 
 Λ Γ ' ' ^J.ilin 8t. 
 
 και την κατ οίκον αυτών εκκλησιαν. ασττασασσε 4?. xiu.sa, 
 
 'ΓΛ ι ^ C ' ' « > d ' ν - 43al. ' 
 
 Ιΐ^παινετον τον α-γαττητον μου, ος εστίν ατταργτ] της ?=><;'? 
 
 S XV. 
 
 b 1 Cor. xvi. 19. Acts ii. 46 refl". 
 
 copt syr al. — ev to yap om 48. — -ττραγματι om 115 it Ambrst Ruf : bef υ/<. 76 ν arm : bef 
 χρτ/ζη Chr Thl. — rec α'ύτη : txt {ipsa) 5G 1 13 it v. — και (μου και αλλιον (add πολλών D^) 
 ■ΤΓροίΤτατις (παραστατιις FG, προστάτης J 71• 109-22' al Chr-Mtt's mss) (ytvtTO DEFG 
 d' g. — και ίμου αντου (corrn, as is shewn by ihevar in A) BC 3. 37• 73. 80. 93. 106-8-9-15 
 219 al Chr (Mtt's mss) Thdrt Dam Thl : ίμου re αντου A : t/iow Ambrst : txt J (mss .'). — 
 3. rec πρισκιλλαν (corrn to Ads xviii. 2, ^-c), with mss syrr al mss mentd by Thdrt 
 {την yap ΓΙρίσκιλλαΐ' η ΤΙρίσκαν, άμφότίρα yap ίστιν ινρ^ν tv τυΐς βιβλίυις) Chr 
 Ambrst : txt ABCDEFGJ most mss vss gr-lat-ff. — for πυιηργ., συλλ(ιτoι'pyovς Chr 
 (text and comm). — /joi lOii-8. — at end, instead of in ver 5, ins και τ. κατ. οικ. αυτ. ικκλ. 
 DEFG it. — 4. απεθηκαν 48'. — 5. rec for ασιας, αχαιας, with D^J &c syrr al Chr Thdrt 
 Thl Oec : txt ABCD'EFG G. 67= (al ?) it ν (not harl') copt seth arm Dam Orig-int Jer 
 Ambrst Ruf-expr Pelag Jer Sedul Bed. (The rec has prob been an error of the scribe, 
 who had απαρχή njc αχαιας, 1 Cor xvi. 15, in his mind. To suppose, ivith De Wette, 
 that he altered αχ. here to aa. to avoid the inconsistency of tv^o persons being the first 
 fruits of Achaia, is surely too far-fetched.) — tv χριστώ DEFG 35. 46. 73. 122 al it v. — 
 
 of your common Lord : άξίωs τ. αγίων, 
 ' in a manner xrorthy of saints ;^ i. e. ' as 
 saints ought to do,' — refers to πρυς^ίζησθί, 
 and therefore to their conduct to her ; — 
 not, ' as saints ought to be received.' 
 τταραστήτί] Her business at Rome may 
 have been such as to require the help of 
 those resident there. ιτροστάτις 
 
 τΓολλών] This may refer to a part of the 
 deaconess's office, the attending on the poor 
 and sick of her own sex. κ. αΰτοϋ 
 
 εμοϋ] when and where, we know not. It 
 is not improbable that she may have been, 
 like Lydia, one whose heart the Lord 
 opened at the first preaching of Paul, and 
 whose house was his lodging. 3, 4.] 
 
 The form Prisca is also found 2 Tim. iv. 19. 
 On P. and A. see note, Acts xviii. 1 . They 
 must have returned to Rome from Ephesus 
 since the sending of 1 Cor. : — see 1 Cor. 
 xvi. 19: and we find them again at Ephe- 
 sus (?), 2 Tim. iv. 19. — Their endangering 
 of their lives for Paul may have taken 
 place at Corinth (Acts xviii. C ff.) or at 
 Ephesus (Acts xix.). See Neander, Pfi. u. 
 Leit., p. 44l. " ίητοτιθΕναι est pignori 
 opponere. Demosth. in A])hobum : άπίτισα 
 την \tiTovpyiav, νποΟίΐς την οίκίαν και 
 τάμαυτου πάντα, ^schines : νπίθησαν 
 αντψ τοϊ' τολάντιηι τάς δημοσίας προς- 
 aSovc." Wetst. — The 'churches of the 
 Gentiles ' had reason to be thankful to 
 them, for having rescued the Apostle of 
 
 the Gentiles from danger. — It seems to 
 have been the practice of Aq. and Pr. 
 (1 Cor. xvi. 19) and some other Christians 
 (Col. iv. 15, PhUem. 2) to hold assemblies 
 for worship in their houses, which were 
 saluted, and sent salutations as one body in 
 the Lord. Some light is thrown on the 
 expression by the following passage from 
 the Acta Martyrii S. Justini, in Ruinart, 
 cited by Neander, Church Hist. I. 330, 
 Rose's trans. " The answer of Justin 
 Martyr to the question of the prefect (Rus- 
 ticus) 'Where do you assemble?' exactly 
 corresponds to the genuine Christian spii'it 
 on this point. The answer was ; ' Where 
 each one can and will. You believe, no 
 doubt, that we all meet together in one 
 place ; but it is not so, for the God of the 
 Christians is not shuf up in a room, but, 
 being invisible. He fills both heaven and 
 earth, and is honoured every where by the 
 faithful.' Justin adds, that when he came 
 to Rome, he was accustomed to dwell in 
 one particular spot, and that those Chris- 
 tians who were instructed by him, and 
 wished to hear his discourse, assembled at 
 his house. (This assembly would accord- 
 ingly be η κατ οίκον του Ίουστίνον ίκ- 
 κλησία.) He had not visited any other 
 congregations of the Church." 5.] 
 
 Epsenetus is not elsewhere named. άιτ- 
 
 ορχή, the same metaplior being in thcAp. s 
 mind as in eh. xv. 10, — the first believer, —
 
 440 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ΡΩΜΑΙΟΥ: 
 
 XVI. 
 
 "β Άσ'ιαο ® εις γριστόν. ^ ασπάσασθε Μαριαιι, ήτις ποΧλα abcd 
 
 eSeech.xT 
 
 f Ac(sx.41,47. , , 
 
 ?,"'„ ■*-• '•;'^'• ^ ίκοπιασεν 
 
 g Matt. VI. 28. 
 Act.'; XX. 3ή *Τ 
 al. Ps cxxvi. lOV 
 
 iinav τους 
 
 εις 
 
 li 
 
 νμας. 
 
 ασπασασϋί 
 
 \ i 
 
 συναιγ^μ 
 
 Αΐ'δροΐ'ί /cov 
 
 αλω 
 
 h l.uke i. 36, 
 ftS. Arts X. 
 
 ix.f i7yit ίμοΰ yeyovav 
 
 XXV 4r). „ , , 
 
 i Col. iv. 10. 
 
 Philem. 23 
 
 only +. 
 j Matt, xxvii. 
 
 Itt (itiiy (see 
 
 refl'. there). 
 
 Esth. V. 4. 
 k = Acts xiv. 
 
 •θλ( 
 
 και 
 ωτονς μου, 
 
 7Γζ)0 
 
 συγγεί'ίΐς μου και 
 οίτινίς ε'ισιν ^ επίσημοι εν τοις «ποσΓοΛοις, οι και 
 
 ^ εν ΎΡΐ^'^'^'ψ• ασττάσασθε Αμπλιαν τον 
 
 ayairmov μου εν κυρίω. ^ ασπάσασθε Ουρβανον τον 
 
 συvεpyov ■ημών εν γυριστώ, και Στάχυν τον '^ αγαπ^τον 
 
 10 X^^/.^^^Q^ Άττελλτίν τον " δυ /cmoi' εν -γριστω 
 
 14. 
 
 μου. '" ασπασασϋε Λττελλην 
 ασπάσασθε τους εκ °" των Αρ 
 Ηοοδιωνα τον 
 
 η = ch. xiv. 18 reff. 
 
 συγγεν?; μου. 
 
 un See 1 Cor. i. 1 
 
 οκιμον εν 
 ιστοβουΧου. 
 
 ασπάσασθε τους εκ 
 
 ασπάσασθε 
 των 
 
 1 1 Οι. Γ. 
 1 Pet 
 
 Eph. ii. 13. 
 m ver. 3 reff. 
 
 6. μαριαν ABC 57. 1132 al Syr copt al : txt DEFGJ most mss Chr Thdrt Thl al.— for 
 (ΐς ημ., ης νμας AC. 18^. 39. 47- 54. GG^. 70. 87- 10!) al Syr copt arr seth Chr-text 
 (and Mtt's mSi) : tv νμιν DEFG it ν Ambrst al : txt B(e sil)C'J most mss syr slav 
 (arm .') Chr-comm (and Mtt's mSj) Thdrt Dam Thl Oec Ruf-ms.— 7. louviav om Chron : 
 ιουλίίΐΐ' flor mar copt Ruf Ambrst Jer Bed. — τους συναιχμ. Β : μον om 80. — for οι κ. 
 ■προ ιμ. -γιγ., τοις προ ιμον DEFG. — ytyovai' om 2. 30: rec γίγονασιν, with CJ &c : 
 txt AB.— aft χριστώ, add iijnov DEFG d' g Ruf-ed Pelag Ambrst Jer. — 8. ημπλιατον 
 AFG 672 it V copt seth Eutlial lat-ff: αττλιαν 23: μιιττΧιαν syr: txt BC(appy)DEJ 
 nrly all mss Syrr Ai-r al Chr Thdrt Chron Dam Thl Oec. — την αγαπητην 1. — μου om 
 BF.— for >;μωι^, μου 32 d arm Chr Ambrst Aug.— 9. ev κυριω DEFG 37. 57. 71• 114 
 al it arm Chr-msS3 : ti> χρ. ιησου ν (not am demid) : (ΐς χριστον 74. 120. — 10. και 
 απελλ. 17- — ασπ. to αριστοβ. om 48. —11. cvyytvijv AD'.— 12. AFG om from tv 
 
 On *Ασίο5 see var. readd. els χρ., 
 
 ellipt. : the full constr. would be της ττροςφο- 
 ρας εις χρ. 6.] No7ie of the names oc- 
 
 curring from ver. 5 — 15 are mentioned 
 elsewhere. De Wette remarks, that εις 
 ίιμάς is the more likely reading, (I) because 
 the Ap. would hardly mention a service 
 done to themselves as a ground of salutation 
 from him, and (2) because κοττιφν without 
 being expressly followed by \όγψ (Phil. ii. 
 16. Col. i. 29. 1 Tim. v. 17), said of 
 women, most likely implies acts of kind- 
 ness peculiar to the sex. 7.] '\ovviav 
 may be fem., from Ίουι ία (Junia), in which 
 case she is prob, the wife of Andronicus, — 
 or masc. from Ίουν'ιας (Junianus, contr. 
 Junias). It is uncertain also whether 
 συyytvtϊς means felloiv countrymen, or 
 relations. Aquila and Priscilla were Jews : 
 so would Mariam be, and probably Epsene- 
 tus, being an early believer. If so, the 
 word may have its strict meaning of ' rela- 
 tions.' But it seems to occur vv. 11. 21 
 in a wider sense. σ-υναιχμ..] When 
 and where, uncertain. Ιττίσημοι ev τ. 
 ά-ίΓοστ.] Two renderings are given; (1) 
 ' 0/' 7iote anion ff the Ap.,' so that thei/ 
 themselves are counted among the App. : 
 thus the Greek ff. {το ά-ποστό\ονς tivai, 
 μ'tya^ το δε και εν τούτοις ίττισήμονς 
 είναι, εννόησαν »/λίκοΐ' iyκwμιov, Chrys.), 
 Calv., Est., Wolf., Thol., Kolln., Olsh., al. : 
 or (2) 'noted among the App.,' i. e. well 
 
 known and spoken of by the App. Thus 
 Beza, Grot., Koppe, Reiche, Meyer, Fritz., 
 De W. — But, as Thol. remarks, had this 
 latter been the meaning, we should have 
 expected some expr. like Cia πασών των 
 εκκλησιών (2 Cor. viii. 18). I may be- 
 sides remark, that for Paul to speak of any 
 persons as celebrated among the App. in 
 sense (2), would imply that he had more 
 frequent intercourse with the other App., 
 than we know that he had ; and would 
 besides be improbable on any supposition. 
 The whole question seems to have s])rung 
 up in modern times from the idea that o'l 
 άπόστο\οι must mean the Twelve only. If 
 the wider sense found in Acts xiv. 4. 14. 
 2 Cor. viii. 23. 1 Thess. ii. G (comp. i. 1) be 
 taken, there need be no doubt concerning 
 the meaning. 01 καΐ . . . . ] refers to 
 
 Andr. and Jun., not to the Apostles. 
 8 f}'.] Amplias = Ampliatus : see v. r. 
 άγ. ev κυρ., 'beloved in the bonds of 
 Christian fellowship.' anvepY- Iv χρ., 
 
 ' fellow workman in (the work of) Christ.' 
 δόκιμ. ev xp., ' approved (by trial) in 
 (the work of) Christ.' — It does not follow 
 that either Aristobulus or Narcissus were 
 themselves Christians. Only those of their 
 familice (τους Ικ των) are here saluted who 
 were εν κνριψ: for we must understand 
 this also aft. Αριστοβούλου. συγγ., 
 
 see above.— Grot., Neander, al., have taken 
 Narcissus for the well known freedman of
 
 G— 17. ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 441 
 
 Νάρκισσου τους οντάς εν κυρ'ιω. ^^ ασπάσασθε Ύονφαι- 
 
 ναν και Ύρυφωσαν τας ^ κοττιωσας εν κνο'ιω. ασττάσασθε °^^^j,T"'-33 
 
 tpoiou τΊ]ν α-γαπητην, ήτις πολλά ^ ΐκοττιασεν εν κυριω. qLakevu 43. 
 
 ασττασασσε Γουφον τον εκΛεκτον εν κυριω, και ττιν icor.xvi.2o. 
 
 ' Γι' '2 Cor. xiii. 
 
 μητίρα αυτοΰ και ίμοΰ. ^"^ ασττάσασθί Άσυ-γκριτον, ΦΧί- Ι^.'ζβ.^ιρίί 
 yovTa, EpjUijv, Πατροβαν, Κημαν, και τους συν αυτοις rpiar.Actsxv. 
 αδελφούς. ασττάσασθε Φιλόλογον /cat Ίουλίαν, ^ηρεα sTuhi'^Li 
 
 και την αόελψην αυτού, και Όλυμπαν, και τους συν t s^ePhii. ίϋ. 
 αυτοις ττάντας *" άγ/ους. ^ασττάσασθε αλλήλους "^ εν "Jre".)."''^ 
 
 ,-ν/ <» y ,γ ( ~ •γ'Λ' - GhI.v. 20 
 
 ψιληματι ayioj. ασπαί,ονται υμάς αι εκκλησιαι ττασαι "»iyt. 
 τοΐ, χριστο~υ. v = ch.xi".i3 
 
 '* Παρακαλώ δε υμάς, αόεΧφοι, σκοπειν τους τας w'lch.if. is 
 
 " οιγοστασιας και τα ^ σκάν^αΧα ''" πάρα την " δίδανην ην ^ Χ^^1ί''42ΐ.\ 
 
 κυριω to iv κνριω. — 13. at beg, ins ασττασασΟί αίοκιμον εν χηιστω 4- (error from ver 
 10). — 14. (jiXtyyoiTCi arm: φλίγμοιτα 73. — rec ίομαν, ττ., ιρμην, with D^EJ &C ν 
 Syr al Clir Tlidrt Chron al Ambrst al : t.xt ABCD'FG al {και (ρμαν 109. -219) it am harl 
 flor mar copt syr seth Euthal Ruf Bed al. — av-w 115. — 15. ψιΚο-γονον 70: φιλυστορ- 
 γον 6y. — loiiXtovChr (Mtt's mss) : iovviai> CFG 11 : om Chron.- — vtjpiav AFG 55. 71 
 al : vipia 07'• 109 : ηρια 73. — bef ολυμπ., om και 3. 120 Ambrst. — ολνμπίΐδα 
 {Olympiadem it ν Ruf Ambrst) FG : οΧνμπιαν DE. — άγιους om 52-6. lUi al. — 
 
 16. ασπαζοντ χριστού om DEFG it, but aft σνγγ. μου ver 21 read και ai εκκλ. 
 
 ■παηαι του χρ. — rec om πασαι (see note), with mss Chr Thl Oec : ins ABC(DEFG, see 
 above) J 39. 67-• 73. 80. 122. 213 al ν Syr arr copt seth arm Cyr Thdrt (Chr-comm .') Ruf 
 Ambrst Pelag Bed. — for χριστού, θεού 09. lOG-20-77 al Chr-ms. — 17. for παρακαλώ, 
 ερωτώ (rogo it v) DE. — for σκοπειν, ασφαλώς σκοπείτε DEFG Sing-cleric. — τας om 57 
 al. — for πάρα, πιρι D'. — bef ποιουιτ., ins λέγοντας η DEFG it Sing-cleric. — και om 
 
 Claudius. But this can hardly be, for he Rome, about 150 a. d. The σνν αΰτοΊς 
 
 was executed (Tac. Ann. xiii. 1) in the αδελφοί of \er. 14, and σνν αΰτοίς πήΐ'τες 
 
 very beginning of Nero's reign, i. e. cir. 55 «yioi of ver. 15, have been taken by De W. 
 
 A. D., whereas (see Prolegg. § iv. 4 and and Reiche to point to some separate asso- 
 
 Chronol. Table) this Ep. cannot have well ciations of Christians, perhaps (De W.) 
 
 been written before 58 a.d. Perhaps, as assemblies as in ver. 5 : or (Reiche) unions 
 
 Winer (RWB.) suggests, the family of this for missionary purposes. 16.] The 
 
 Narcissus may have continued to be thus meaning of this injunction seems to be, 
 
 known after his death (.'). 13.] that the Roman Christians should take oc- 
 
 Rufus may have been the son of Simon casion, on the receipt of the Ap.'s greetings 
 
 of Cyrene, mentioned Mark xv. 21 : but the to them, to testify their mutual love, in this, 
 
 name was very common. Ικλεκτόν — the ordinary method of salutation, but hav- 
 
 not to be softened, as De W., al., to merely ing among Christians a Christian and holy 
 
 ' eximium,' a sense unknown to our Αρ.; — meaning, see refF. It became soon a cus- 
 
 ' elect,' i. e. one of the elect of the Lord. — tom in the churches at the celebration of 
 
 και Ιμοΰ the Αρ. adds from affectionate the Lord's Supper. See Suicer under 
 
 regard towards the mother of Rufus : ' my ασπασμός and φίλημα, and Bingham, xv. 
 
 mother,' inmyreverenceandaifectionforher. 3.3. άσιτάζ. νμ. αΐ Ικκλ. ir.] This 
 
 Jowett compares our Lord's words to St. assurance is stated evidently on the Apostle's 
 
 John, John xix. 27. 14.] These Christians authority, speaking for the churches; not 
 
 of whom we have only the names, seem to implying as Bengel, " quibuscum fui, c. xv. 
 
 be persons of less repute than the former. 26. His signiticarat, se Romam scribere," 
 
 Hermas (= Hermodorus, Grot.) is thought but vouching for the brotherly regard in 
 
 by Origen (in loc. " Puto, quod Hermas iste which the Roman church was held by all 
 
 sit scriptor libelli istius qui Pastor appella- churches of Christ. The above misunder- 
 
 tur"), Eus. H. E. iii. 3, and Jerome, catal. standing has led to the exclusion of πασαι. 
 
 script, eccl., to be the author of the ' Shep- 17—20.] Warning against 
 
 herd.' But this latter is generally supposed those who made divisions among 
 
 to have been the brother of Pius, bishop of them. — To what persons the Ap. refers, is
 
 442 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. XVI. 
 
 y = 1 Γ•^*•.."'• vuHQ Ηίύθετε ΤΓΟιοΰντας, και ^ ΒΚκΧίνατε άτΓ αυτών. οι ABCd 
 
 n(ch 1U. "/"«^ ν Λ ^ , , „ - ' ζ ζΝ Λ ' EFGJ 
 
 Ι^χχνκϊ- yap τοιούτοι τω κυ^οιω Ί]μων χριστώ ου όουλευουσιν, 
 
 ζ Acts XX lit >-.\ \ - ' " '' n \ I \ <> ν - b Λ ' ' 
 
 Gai.iv.8ai. άλλα τΓ, ίαυτωι> κοιλία, και οια της χρηστολογιας και 
 
 bhefeoniytl'^' " ivXoy'iaQ '' εξοπατώσιν τας καρδίας των "" άκακων. ^^ ί/ 
 
 " = hire only. ^ ._ ft \» / ε'ι' .'j'"" ■> 
 
 See note. «^,αη υϋων υπακοή ειο παντας αφικίτο ίώ νμιν ουν 
 
 ch. τϋ. η /ν ~ ...^ . » . ν,\>» κ. 
 
 d ch. τϋ. 11 
 reff 
 
 here only, χοίο"', ί'ίλω δε ΰ/ιάς σοφούς ειΐ'οι εις το αγαθόν, οκε- 
 
 (Hel). τη. ϊΗ ; cn\ • »■ ' 90 ' ^^ i Ω ^ -" i ' ' k 
 
 only.) proT. potouc οε εις TO κακόν. ο be ϋεος της ίίρηνης συν- 
 
 i 4. Tiii. 5 r ^ - , ν ν ,ζ, . - 1 . / -ττ 
 
 ch.i.sreff. τ^}ΐψη τρν σατονον υπο τους ποόας υ;χων εν τα-^ίΐ. η 
 
 here only. , - /r-'i " "mfl''" 
 
 PtoT.i.ar. γαρις του κυρίου ημών Ιησού νριστου αεσ νμων. 
 
 ii^n.x.ifi. Ασπάζεται υ/αας Τψοθεος ο συνε^ογος /αου, και 
 
 Phil ii. 15./ \»τ/ ^^Γ»' *0 " 
 
 oniyt. Λουκιος και Ιάσων και Ζο^σιπατρος οι συγγενείς /^ου. 
 
 k jialt. χϋ. 2».' Luke ix. 30 al. Gen. xix. 9. I Luke XTiii. 8. Acts xii. 7 al. Rev. i.l. Deut. χχτϋί. 20. 
 
 m ellip.s., cli. XT. 33. η ver. 3 reff. ο Ter. 7 reff. 
 
 4fi. 115 Till. — iKKKivtrt BC G7- Thdrt Dam. — 18. rec τω κνο. ημ. ιησου χρ., with J &c 
 Syr copt al Chrys al : κυρ. χρ. ημ. DFG 178 al d^ g : txt ABC 37. 80. lOiJ-Ki-Ki lect 13 
 syr ieth arm Thdrt: χρ. κνρ. ημ. Έ e\ lat-ff : χρ. κνυ. Aug Leo : Chrislo Domino Jesu 
 Ambrst: κνριω ιησ. χρ. 77. 110-11-23-79. 238 al : κυρ. ημών 23. — δουλίυσονσιν FG 
 80 lect 14. — και (νλογιας (ίυγλωττιας 109: add και καινής αττατης 42. 238) om 
 DEFG 3. 17. 43-9. 52-7- 70 al it Chr (Mtt's ms,).— 19. νπακυη νμο,ν DEFG (not it) : 
 „^o,j f;i. — (φικίτο 238.— rec χαιρ. ουν το (om D'FG al) ίφ νμιν, with D'E(D FG al) 
 &c Chr Thdrt al : txt ABCJ 5. 23. 37 al arm Ruf: νμων 135. — και θίλω D^EFG 
 it Syr al : it om 115 Thl Ambrst Ruf.— rec aft σηφανς add μιν {insd on account 0/ δε 
 folly), with AC &c syr Thl Oec Aug : om BDEFGJ CI al it ν copt all Clem Cses (but om 
 also δί follg) Chr Thdrt lat-if. — 20. συ^τριψαι A 67" ν g al Thdrt-comm Ambr al. — 
 tv τάχη υπ. τ. π. ημών Α. — η χαρ. . . . νμων om DEFG it Sedul : χριστον om Β. — 
 rec at end add a/njv with many mss : but om ABCDEFGJ most mss vss gr-lat-ff. — 
 21. rec ησιταζονται {gramml correction), with EJ &c Syr al Thdrt Oec : txt ABCD'FG 
 5. 57. 7(J. 80. 108' al it ν copt arm syr al Chr Thl Ruf Ambrst.— αδίΚφος κ. ο συν. 
 arm. — μου om Β (J7^. — και bef ιοσων om Β : κ. ιασ. om 47 : λουκιησσων Τ] : for λον- 
 κιος, Lucas han- mar. — ο σνγγίνης μου 108. 178 slav-ms (om μου). — at end DEFG 
 
 not plain. Some (Thol., al.) think the (ϋαρμοπτία κ. (ΰσχημοσννη κ. ενρνθμίη 
 
 Judaizers to be meant, not absolutely within (νηβε(^ ακόλουθη• — or perhaps 'euloffies' 
 
 the Christian pale, but endeavouring to sow (flatteries), as Find. Nem. iv. 8, οϋόϊ θευμόν 
 
 dissension in it: and so, nearly, Neander, 'ύδωρ τόσον \ yt μαλθακά τίνχιι \ γυΐα, 
 
 Pfl. u. Leit., p. 452. De W. thinks that τήσσον ιΰλογία φόρ \ fiiyyi συΐ'άορος. 
 
 Paul merely gives this warning in case such 19.] See ch. i. 8. Their obedience being 
 
 persons came to Rome. Juclying by the matter of universal notoriety, is the ground 
 
 text itself, we infer that these teachers were of his confidence that they will comply with 
 
 similar to those pointed out in Phil. iii. 2, his entreaty, ver. I7. — Some slight reproof 
 
 18. 1 Tim. vi. 3 ff. 2 Cor. xi. 20 : unprin- is conveyed in χαίρω- θέλω δε κ.τ.λ. They 
 
 cipled and selfish persons, seducing others were well known for obedience, but had not 
 
 for their own gain : whether Judaizers or been perhaps cautious enough with regard 
 
 not, does not appear : but considering that to these designing persons and their pre- 
 
 the great opponents of the Ap. were of this tended wisdom. See Matt. x. 16, of 
 
 party, we may perhaps infer that they also which words of our Lord there seems to 
 
 belonged to it. 17.] σκοττβΐν = βλι- be here a reminiscence. 20.] 
 
 TTfii', Phil. iii. 2. — The διδαχή here spoken επειδή yap είττε τονς τϊις διχοστασίας κ. 
 
 of is probably rather ethical than doctrinal; τά σκάνδαλα ττοιονντας, είττεν ειρήνης 
 
 comp. Eph. iv. 20- 24. 18.] χρη- θεοί-, 'ίνα θαρηήσωσι τζερΊ της τοντων 
 
 στολογία, κολακεία, Theophyl. Wetstein απαλλαγής. Chrys. : and so most comm. 
 
 cites from Julius Capitolinus, in Pertinace, De W. prefers taking ό θ. της εϊη. more 
 
 13, " omnes, qui libere conferebant, male generally as 'the God of salvation ;' and 
 
 Pertinacem loquebantur, chrestologum eum the usage of the expr. (see refl.) seems to 
 
 appellantes, qui bene loqueretur et male favour this. σνντρ. τ. σατ. is a simi- 
 
 faceret." ίΰλογίας, 'fairness of speech:' litude from Gen. iii. 15. σνντρίψίΐ, 
 
 so Plato, Rep. iii. 400 d, ευλογία άρα κ. not, as Stuart, 'for optative,' nor does it
 
 18—25. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 443 
 
 ασπάζομαι νμας εγω ίί^τιος ο -γραψας την ίττιστοληΐ' 
 
 > ' 93 * 'y ' " Ύ^ / " ^ ο yf ^ 
 
 εν κνριο). ασπάζεται υ^αας 1 αιος ο ^ ςενος juou κα< 
 
 όλης της ^ εκκλησίας, aairaCiTui υμάς ' Εραστος ο "^ οί- 
 
 κονομος της πόλεως, Kat Κουαρτος ο αδελφός. ^"^ Ή 
 
 χαρίς του κυρίου ημών Ιί/σου ■j^jOiarou ^ετα πάντων 
 
 νμων, αμήν. 
 
 25 Τω δ^ δυ 
 
 ναμενω υμάς ^ στηριζ,αι κατά το ivayyeXiov 
 
 μου 
 
 και το 
 
 \ησ 
 
 ου 
 
 ΧΡ 
 
 ιστού 
 
 οο See 1 Cor, 
 
 V. !ΐ reflf. 
 ρ = tirTf nnly. 
 
 Di.Kl. Si.•. 
 
 xvii. 47. 
 
 Xen Aoab. 
 
 iii 1. 4. 
 q Acts V. 11. 
 
 XV. 22. 
 r = here only. 
 
 Jus. Antt. xi. 
 
 6. 12. (See 
 
 Luke xvi. 1 
 
 al. 1 Cor. iv. 
 
 V 
 sch. i. 11. 
 
 Luke xxii.32 
 
 κη()υ'γμα 
 
 2 Tim. ii. 8 only. Sf-e 2 Cor. iv. 3. 1 The.ss. i. 5. 2 Thess. ii. )4. 
 XV. 14. 2 Tim. iv. 17. Tit. i. 3 only. (2 Cliroa. xxx. 5. Prov. i 
 
 κατα αποκα- «ι 
 
 t ch. ii. 16. 
 η Matt. xii. 41 II L. 1 Cor. i. 21. ii. 
 .3.) vGal.il. 2. £pb. iii 3 unly. 
 
 add και at ίκκλ. &c (see ver 16). — 22. for ασ. νμ. tyw, ασπάζεται νμας 67^ : aft r^. ins 
 και tol- arm slav : εγω om 37• — reptvTiog 7 slav-ms Thl. — ο και -γράφος 67^• — (ν κνρ, 
 om 3. 7(» Chr Thl. — 23. rec τ. ίκκλ. ολτ/ς {prob corrn) with J &c Chr Thdrt al : o\ai ai 
 ίκκλησιαι FG g: ολη η (κκλησια ν (ο\ης &c am) Copt (eccl. omnis) Sedul Pel: txt 
 ABCD 1. 5. 37. 73. 80. 121 al sj-rr all: ο της εκκλησίας 23'. — ασπάζονται 219. — 
 ρασ-υς 238. — bef αδ., om ο 238. — 24. om ABC 5 am harP al-latt copt aeth Ruf : ins 
 (νμων J, om al : ιησ. χρ. om FG g slav, χρ. om 71 : μ(ΰ νμων Chr) DEFGJ most mss 
 it V ar-pol slav Chr Thdrt Thl Oec Sedul Bed al : aft ver 27, 17• 80 Sjt (mss) syr ar-erp 
 Ambrst. — 25, 26, 27. These verses are variously placed : (1) in BCDE 16. 66 (but in 
 
 express any wish, but a prophetic assurance 
 and encouragement in bearing up against 
 all adversaries, that it would not be long 
 before the great Adversary himself would 
 be bruised under their feet. ή xapis, 
 
 κ.Γ.λ.] It appears as if the Epistle was 
 intended to conclude with this usual bene- 
 diction, but the Ap. found occasion to add 
 more. This he does also in other Epp. : 
 see 1 Cor. xvi. 23, 24; simly Phil. iv. 20, and 
 vv. 21 — 23 after the doxologv, — 2 Thess. 
 16, 17, 18 :— 1 Tim. vi. 16, 17 ff. :— 2 Tim. 
 iv. 18, 19 if. 21—24.] Gbeetixgs 
 
 FROM VARIOUS PERSONS. 21.] LuciuS 
 
 must not be mistaken for Lucas {— Luca- 
 nus),^ — but was probably Lucius of Cyrene, 
 Acts xiii. 1, see note there. — Jason 7nay be 
 the same who is mentioned Acts xvii. 5, as 
 the host of Paul and Silas at Thessalonica. 
 — A ' Snpaier (son) of Pyri-fms of Bercea' 
 occurs Acts xx. 4, but it is hardly likely 
 that this Sosipater is the same person. 
 ol συγγ€ν€ΐς, see above, ver. 7. These 
 persons may have been Jews ; but we can- 
 not tell whether the expr. may not be used 
 in a wider sense. 22.] There is no- 
 
 thing strange (as Olsh. supposes) in this 
 salutation being inserted in the first person. 
 It would be natural enough that Tertius 
 the amanuensis, inserting ασπάζεται νμ. 
 Ύίρτ. ο yp. τ. ίΤΓ. ΐν κυρ., should change 
 the form into the first person, and after- 
 wards proceed from the dictation of the 
 Ap. as before. Bez. and Grot, suppose 
 him to have done this on tran.'^cribing the 
 Ep. — Thol. notices this irregularity as a 
 corroboration of the genuineness of the 
 chapter : see Prolegg. 23.] Gaius is 
 
 mentioned 1 Cor. i. 14, as having been 
 
 baptized by Paul. ' The host of the whole 
 church' probably implies that the assem- 
 blies of the church were held in his house : 
 — or perhaps, that his hospitality to Chris- 
 tians was universal. — Erastus, holding this 
 office (οικονόμος, the public treasurer, ο 
 επί της δημοσίας τραπέζης, arcarius, 
 Wetst., who quotes from inscriptions, Nti- 
 \φ οϊκονόμφ 'Ασίας, — Secundus, arkarius 
 Reip. Armerinorum), can hardly have been 
 the same who was with the Ap. in Ephesus, 
 Acts xix. 22. It is cjuite uncertain whether 
 the Erastus of 2 Tim. iv. 20 is identical 
 with this, or with that other,— ό άδιλφός, 
 'the brother/ — the generic singular; one 
 among ol αδελφοί, ' i/ie brethren.' The 
 rest have been specified by their ser- 
 vices or oflSces. 24.] The benedic- 
 tion repeated ; see above on ver. 20. The 
 omission (see var. read.) has probably been 
 by the caprice of the copyists. 
 25—27.] Concluding doxology. The 
 genuineness of this doxology, and its posi- 
 tion in the Ep., have been much questioned. 
 The external evidence will be found in the 
 var. readings ; — from which it is plain, that 
 its genuineness as a part of the Ep. is 
 placed beyond all reasonable doubt. Nor 
 does the variety of position militate here, as 
 in some cases, against this conclusion. For 
 the transference of it to the end of ch. xiv. 
 may be explained, partly from the sujiposed 
 reference of σΓ?;()ΐξο( to the question treated 
 in ch. xiv. (so Chrys., πά\ιν yap ίκείνων 
 εχεται των άοθινώι•, κ. ττρος αντονς τρέ- 
 πει τον λόγοι/), partly from the supposed 
 inappropriateness of it here after the bene- 
 diction of ver. 24, in consequence of which 
 that ver. is omitted by MSS which have the
 
 444 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ ρωμαίους. 
 
 ΧΥΙ. 
 
 υψίν μυστήριου ^^ρονοις αιωνιοις σεσιγημίνου ψα- 
 ^'' ' ''ο'ίΐ^' νερωθεντος Βε νυι> δια τε -γράφων " ττροφητικων κατ εττι- 
 
 αιωνιου 
 
 εου ίΐς w7rafC07)v πισΓίως εις 
 
 a 2 Pet. i. 1» onlyf. 
 ο here uuly. 
 
 Til. i 
 dnt. ofdi 
 tion, Luk 
 
 Tiii. 2μ. Act.s ra"y 71 V του 
 
 Tiii 11. ' 
 
 y = here only. Ps. xxxi.3. (see Lnke xviii. 39 reff.) L. P. ζ ch i. ID. iii 21 al. fr. 
 
 b 1 Cor. vii (i, 23. 2 Cor. viii. 8. 1 Tim. i. 1. Tit. i. 3. ii. 15 only t. WisU. xir. lU. 
 d ch.i. 5 reff. 
 
 marg says they are found εν τοις παλ. αντιγραφοις aft ch xiv.) 80. 137-76 al they stand 
 here and here only, as also in mss mentd by Ruf (who says 'nonnulli' have them elsw) 
 d e V (am demid harl tol &c f) Syr copt sth ar-erp Ruf Ambrst Pelag Bed al : (II) they 
 stand aft ch xiv. 23 in J and about 217 niss (Scholz), i. e. very nearly all: the gr lectt, 
 syr ar-pol slav goth (appy) arm (ed Zohrab) mss mentd by Ruf Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec 
 Theodul (Tert.') : (III) they are omd altoy ether in (D^') F (a spaoe is left aft xvi. 24) 
 G (d"> aft xiv. 23) mss mentd by Erasm .' Marcion {penitus abslulit accg to Ruf [and 
 Orig ? see Orig vol vii. p. 453 ed Lommatzsch] as also chaps xv. xvi.) some mss in Jer 
 (appy) Tert-mss.': (IV) they occur in both places in A 5. 17. 109 lat. {That this is 
 their original place there can be little doubt, and that their jaiusnal character has given 
 rise to the variations. See notes.) — 25. ημης 3?. 73 al.— χριστ. ιησ. Β. — for αιωνιοις, 
 α\α\ητοις 121. — for ataiy., εττηγημίνου 46.-26. for τε, των 87: om DE 34 (not 
 expressed in vss nor lat-ff, but Syr al have και κατ' aft) Chr. — aft προφητ. add και της 
 επιφάνειας {adventum) του κιφιοι; ημών ιησ. χριστού Origj mss in Jer : add et Syr 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 doxol. here, — partly from the unusual cha- 
 racter of the position and diction of the 
 doxol. itself. 
 
 This latter has been used as an internal 
 argument against the genuineness of the 
 portion. Paul never elsewhere ends with 
 such a doxology. His doxologies, when he 
 does use such, are simple, and perspicuous 
 in constr., whereas this is involved, and 
 rhetorical. This objection however is com- 
 pletely answered by the supposition (Fritz.) 
 that the doxology was the effusion of the 
 fervent mind of the Ap. on taking a general 
 survey of the Ep. We find in its diction 
 striking similarities to that of the pastoral 
 Epp. : — a phsenomenon occun-ing in seve- 
 ral places where Paul writes in a fervid and 
 impassioned manner, — also where he writes 
 with his own hand; — the inferences from 
 which I have treated in the Prolegg. to 
 those Epistles (vol. III. prolegg. ch. vii. 
 § 1. 30 — 33). That the doxol. is made 
 up of unusual expressions taken from Paul's 
 other writings, that it is difficult and in- 
 volved, are facts, which if rightly argued 
 from, would substantiate, 7iot its interpola- 
 tion, but its genuineness : seeing that an 
 interpolator would have taken care to con- 
 form it to the character of the Ep. in which 
 it stands, and to have left in it no irregu- 
 larity which would bring it into question. 
 
 The constr. is exceedingly difficult. 
 Viewed superficially, it presents only an- 
 other instance added to many in which the 
 Ap. begins a sentence with one constr., pro- 
 ceeds onward through various dependent 
 clauses till he loses sight of the original 
 form, and ends with a constr. presupposing 
 another kind of beginning. And such no 
 doubt it is : but it is not easy to say what 
 he had in his mind when commencing the 
 
 sentence. Certainly, ψ η ^όζα εις τ. αιώνας 
 forbids us from supposing that ίόξ.ι was in- 
 tended to follow the datives, ^for thus this 
 latter clause would be merely a repetition. 
 We might imagine that he had ended the 
 sentence as if it had begun ό δε οννάμενος, 
 κ.τ.λ. and expressed a wish that He who 
 was able to confirm them, might confirm 
 them : but this is prevented by its being 
 evident, from the μόνψ σοφψ θεψ, that the 
 datives are still in his mind. This latter 
 fact will guide us to the solution. The 
 dative form is still in his mind, but not the 
 reference in which he had used it. Hence, 
 when the sentence would naturally have 
 concluded μόνψ σηφφ θιψ, δια Ιησού 
 χρισΓοΓ, ή δόζα εις τ. αιώνας, — a break is 
 made, as if the sense were complete at 
 ■χριστού, and the relative ψ refers back to 
 the subject of the sentence preceding, thus 
 imagined complete, — viz. to ό ύυνάμενος — 
 μόνος σοφός ΰεός. The analogy of the 
 similar passage Acts xx. 32 would tempt us 
 to supply with the datives τταοατιθεμπι 
 ίιμας, or the like, as suggested by Olsh. : — 
 but as De W. remarks, the form of a dox- 
 ology is too evident to allow of this. After 
 all, perhaps, the datives may be under- 
 stood as conveying a general ascription 
 of praise for the mercies of Redemp- 
 tion detailed in the Ep., and then 
 ψ i) δ. as superadded, q. d., " To Him. 
 
 who is able &c be all the praise : 
 
 to whom be glory for ever." 
 25.] κατά, ' in reference to,' i. e. ' in sub- 
 ordination to,' and according to the require- 
 ments of. κήρυγμα Ίησοΰ χρ. can 
 hardly mean, as De W. and Meyer, ' the 
 preaching which Jesus Christ hath accom- 
 plished by me' (ch. xv. 18), — nor again, as 
 Chrys. ο αύτος έκηρνξεν, — but ' the preach-
 
 26, 27. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ Ρί2ΜΑΙ0ΥΣ. 
 
 445 
 
 flTiin.i. 17 
 tar. read. 
 Juile 2:1 var. 
 h ch. i. 25 reff. 
 
 πάντα τα ίθνη " -^νωοισΘίντος, ^ μόνω σοφω θεω, ^ ^ δια ^ίΐ^"^"•'^ 
 Ιησοΰ χριστοΰ, ώ η δόξα ' εις τους αιώνας. άμην. 
 
 read. g See ch. ϋ. ]6. 
 
 ar-erp seth. — for αιών., (.πονρανιον 69. — νττοτα^ην 46. — 27. xptffr. ί/;σ. Β. — θεω σοφω 
 DE d e. — ψ om Β : φ ίί// 43^. 55 : αυτω η 31. 54 copt Clir (Mtt's mss) : om 33. 72 
 f Ruf: cvjtis d e.—Tiinj κ. η ?οζ. v-ed arm Pelag. — aft αιώνας add των αιώρων A (here, 
 but not xiv. 23) DE 80 d e ν Syr copt seth slav Dam Ruf. — αμΐ]ν om al am. 
 
 Subscription : ττρ. p. AB'CD', and FG addg (τελΐσθη : B-D-corr add ί•/ρα<ρη απο 
 κουινθυυ. This is also added in all (not J) d^ syrr copt ar-pol goth Thdrt (not msj) Oec. 
 J has του αγ. κ ττανινφημον απ. π., ίττισ. ττρ. ρ. (-γραφή απο κοριΐ'θου δια φοιβης της 
 διακόνου {δια φ. γ. δ. syrr also): rec πρ. p. εγραφη αττο κορινθον δια φοιβης της 
 διακυνον της tv κίγχρίαις (κκλησιας, with most mss copt ar-pol Oec : alii aliter. 
 
 ing of Christ,' i. e. making known of Christ, 
 as the verb is used 1 Cor. i. 23 ; xv. 12 al. fr. 
 So Calv., and most comm. κατά 
 
 άΐΓθκ.] This second κατά is best taken, not 
 as co-ordinate to the former one and follow- 
 ing στηρίζαι, nor as belonging to δυναμίιψ, 
 which would be an unusual hmitation of the 
 divine Power, — but as subordinate to κή- 
 ρν-γμα , — ' the preaching of Jesus Christ ac- 
 cording to, &C.' The omission of τό before 
 κατά ά-οκ. is no objection to this, 
 μυστ.] The mystery (see ch. xi. 25, note) 
 of the gospel is often said to have been thus 
 hidden from, eternity in the counsels of 
 God— see Eph. iii. 9. Col. i. 26. 2 Tim. 
 i. 9. Tit. i. 2. 1 Pet. i. 20. Rev. xiii. 8. 
 26.] See ch. i. 2. The prophetic 
 writings were the store-house out of which 
 the preachers of the gospel took their 
 demonstrations that Jesus was the Christ : 
 see Acts xviii. 28 ; — more especially, it is 
 true, to the Jews, who however are here 
 included among πάντα τά Ιθνη. 
 κατ' ετΓίταγ.] may refer either to the pro- 
 
 phetic writings being drawn up by the com- 
 mand of God, — or to the manifestation of 
 the mystery by the preachers of the gospel 
 thus taking place. The latter seems best 
 to suit the sense, αΐωνίον refers back to 
 Xp. αΐωνίοις. — The iirst ίΐς indicates the 
 aim — in order to their becoming obedient 
 to the faith : — the second, the local extent 
 of the manifestation. 27.] Sia Ίησ. 
 
 xp. must by the requirements of the constr. 
 be apphed to μόνψ σοφ. θίφ, and not (as 
 Aug.) to δόία, from which it is separated 
 by the relative ψ. The quantity of inter- 
 vening matter, esp. the datives μόΐ'ψ σοφ. 
 θεφ, prevent it from being referred (as 
 Oec, Theophyl.) to στηοίζαι. It must 
 then be rendered ' to the only wise God 
 through Jesus Christ,' i. e. Him who is 
 revealed to us by Christ as such. — On the 
 constr. of ψ see above. It cannot without 
 great harshness be referred to Christ, seeing 
 that the words μόνψ σοφ. θίψ resume the 
 chief subject of the sentence, and to them 
 the relative must apply.
 
 npo:g κορΐΝΘΐοτ::έ a. 
 
 7.°"α'(ΐβΊ*'κΐ. Ι• ^ Παύλος * [κτλητος] απόστολος γυριστοί) Ιησοΰ δίά 
 ΘίΧηματος Otov, και Έ,ωσθενης ο αοίΧφος, ry"' εκκΧησ'ια 
 
 bR 
 
 reir. 
 bli ch 
 
 i.l.Gal. 
 IThess 
 2 Thrss. 
 
 "2 Cor. του θίου 
 
 Ί, 
 
 Κο- 
 
 τ}•γίασμενοις sv γυριστώ ϊησου, ry ουσ») iv 
 
 πασιν τοις εττί/οαλουμε- 
 
 e Acts xxiii. 15. 2 Cor. i. 1. Phil. i. 1. 
 
 ανθώ, ^ κΧητοις ~ ayioig, συν 
 
 c Rnm. XV. 16 reff. d Acts is. 13 reff. 
 
 f — R.im. X. 1-' reff. 
 
 Title, ττρος κορίνθιους ά or ττρωτη A (appy : the title is nearly gone) BCD 108-9-10 
 al : irp. Knp. αρχΐται a FG (om ά) : ττρ. κορ, ίττ. πρωτ. 3. 'ilO : ττρ. κορ. εττ. πρ. τ. ayiov 
 an. πηυλου44 3ΐ: του αγιυν και πανίυφημου αποστόλου παυλον επιστολή ττρ. κορ. 
 πρώτη J &c. 
 
 Chap. I. 1. κλητος om ADE d e Cytj (perhaps because it does not occur elsw in the 
 openings of epp exc Rom i. 1 : but it may have been insd from there, so I have left it 
 douh/ful):ms B(CTisch: but C is deficient) FGJ mss (appy) vss (nrly)(KXij. και Syr; σπ.κλ. 
 copt) Chr Cvr' Tlidrtj (expr) Thl (expr) Oec (expr) Aug Ambrst Bed. — rec ο/σ. χρ., with AJ 
 &c vss ThdrtThl Oec Aug al : txt BDEFG al it am demid tol al Chr Hil: ιησ. om'lOO.— 2. τη 
 (1st) om B. — rec τη οι•σ. tv κορ. ηγιασμ. {prob a grammatical transposn : cf the varia- 
 tions) with AJ al vss ff : f i' κορ. ηγιασμ., tv χρ. κλητ. ay. (oiiig τη ονπη) 77 : ηγ• to ιησ. 
 om llyi Or-intj : txt BDEFG it.— συμπασιν 4G. 52. 109 al.— /ίμω^ (1st) om A 77- 109 
 
 I. 1 — 3.] Address and greeting. 
 1.] It is doubtful whether κλητός 
 is not spurious : see var. readd. — The words 
 δια θ€λ. βίον point probably to the depre- 
 ciation of Paul's apostolic authority at Co- 
 rinth. In Gal. i. 1 we have this much more 
 strongly asserted. But they have a refer- 
 ence to Paul himself also: " ratio auctoritatis, 
 ad ecclesias : humilis et promti animi, penes 
 ipsum Paulum." Bengel. Chrysostom, re- 
 ferring it to κ\ητός, says, innSi) αΰτψ 
 ίΟοζίν, ίκ\ηβηι.ι(ι•, οΰκ Ιπίιδή αζιοι ησμιν. 
 2ωσθ€νης can hardly be assumed 
 to be identical with the ruler of the syna- 
 gogue in Acts xviii. 17 : see note there. 
 He must have been some Christian well 
 known to the church at Corinth. Thus 
 Paul associates with himself Silvanus and 
 Timotheus in the Epistles to the Thessa- 
 lonians ; and Timotheus in 2 Cor. Chry- 
 sostom attributes it to modesty : μετρίαζα, 
 πνντάττων ΐαυτφ τον ίΧάττονα πολλψ. 
 Some have supposed Sosthenes to be the 
 writer of the Epistle, see ch. xvi. 22. Pos- 
 sibly he may have been one των Χλόης 
 
 ABDE 
 FGJ 
 
 (ver. 11) by whom the intelligence had been 
 received, and the Ap. may have associated 
 him with himself as approving the appeal 
 to apostolic authority. Perhaps some slight 
 may have been put upon him by the par- 
 ties at Corinth, and for that reason Paul 
 puts him forward. ό αδελφός, as 2 Cor. 
 
 i. 1, of Timothy, ' the brother,' — one of οι 
 άδιλφοί. 2.] The remarks of Calvin 
 
 on τη εκκλ. τ. θεοί, κ.τ.λ. are admirable : 
 " Mirum forsan videri queat, cur earn ho- 
 minum multitudinem vocet Ecclesiam Dei, 
 in qua tot morbi invaluerant, ut Satan illic 
 potius regnum occuparet quam Deus. Cer- 
 tum est autem, eum noluisse blandiri Co- 
 rinthiis : loquitur enim ex Dei Spiritu, qui 
 adulari non solet. Atqui inter tot inquina- 
 menta qualis amplius eminet Ecclesiae fa- 
 des ? Respondeo, . . . utcunque multa vitia 
 obrepsissent, et variae corruptelse tam doc- 
 trinae quam morum, extitisse tamen adhuc 
 qusedam verse Ecclesiae signa. Locus dili- 
 genter observandus, ne requiramus in hoc 
 mundo Ecclesiam omni ruga et macula ca- 
 rentem : aut protinus abdicemus hoc titulo
 
 I. 1—5. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 447 
 
 νοις το υνομα του κυρίου ημών Ιησού γοίστου ευ τταντ/ '^ seeuom. 
 Οχα- TOTTiu αυτών τε /co^ ημών. άχαρις υμ'ιν και Βίρηνη gRomlsL•. 
 
 pi9... .χ^- ν,_ , ,.ί^'., „ * h = Phil.i.5al. 
 
 ABCD ατΓΟ σεου ττατρος ημών και κυρίου Ιησου γριστου. i = Actsxi. 23 
 
 ^ Κυγ^αριστω τω θεω μου πάντοτε περί υμών ^ επ\ rrj *" «. χ^.^/ί;'' 
 yapiTi του Θεοΰ ry δοθε/σ^ υμιν εν γυριστώ Ίησοϋ, ^ ort Eph.'iii.'s. 
 
 i. 9. James ir. 6. 
 
 Orig Tert Ambrst Pel: νμων 4i.— χριστού om Α.— re om (A^')BD'FG 4G. 109 al.— 
 ημ. Γ£ κ. αντ. 45. 76• 115-19 Chrj Till Orig-int : for ημ., νμων 123^. — 3. aft ftp. ins 
 εδόθη lect 12. — 4. ^lon om B. — from τταντοτε to ττανη om lect 12. — rov θεον om A* 
 39. 87 Cyr^. — 5. εν τταιτι om 73: owwe* Victorin : in omnibus d g Hil. — ius ει/ bef 
 
 quemvis coetum in quo non omnia votis 
 nostris respondeant. Est enim hsec peri- 
 culosa tentatio, nullam Ecclesiam putare 
 ubi non api)areat perfecta puritas. Nam 
 quicunque hac occupatus fuerit, necesse 
 tandem erit, ut discessione ab omnibus aliis 
 facta, solus sibi sanctus videatur in mundo, 
 aut peculiarem sectam cum paucis hypo- 
 critis instituat. Quid ergo causae habuit 
 Paulus, cur Ecclesiam Corinthi agnosceret ? 
 nempe quia Evangelii doctrinam, Bapti?- 
 mum, Coenam Domini, quibus symbolis 
 censeri debet Ecclesia, apud eos cernebat." 
 On τοϋ θεοΰ, Chrys. remarks, oh τονδε και 
 Γονδι, άλλα τον θιην, — 3.ηΛ simly Theo- 
 phyl., taking the expr. as addressed to the 
 Cor. to remind them of their position as a 
 congregation belonging to God, and not io 
 any head of a •parly. Perhaps this is too 
 refined, the words »/ εκκΚ. τ. βιοΰ being so 
 usual, — see reff. — The harshness of the 
 position of ήγιησμίνοις εν χρ. Ίησ. is in 
 favour of its being the original one : — ■ 
 ' hallowed (i. e. dedicated) to God in (in 
 union with and by means of) Jesus 
 Christ.' Tt) ovcrr; — ' which exists,' 
 
 'is found, at Corinth.' So tv Άιτιοχ, 
 κατά την ουσαν ΐκκΧησίαν, Acts siii. 1. 
 κλητοΐς άγίοις] See Rom. i. 7, 
 note. οτίιν ττάσιν, κ.τ.λ.] These words 
 
 do not belong to the designations just pre- 
 ceding, = ' as are all,' &c., but form part 
 of the address of the Epistle, so that these 
 ττάντες οι εττικαλ. are partakers with the 
 Cor. in it. They form a weighty and pre- 
 cious addition, — made here doubtless to 
 shew the Corinthians, that membership of 
 God's Holy Catholic Church consisted not 
 in being planted, or presided over by Paul, 
 ApoUos, or Cephas (or their successors), 
 but in calling on the name of onr Lord 
 Jesus Christ. The Church of England has 
 adopted from this verse her solemn explana- 
 tion of the term, in tlie ' prayer for all sorts 
 and conditions of men :' " More especially, 
 we pray for the good estate of the Catholic 
 Church : that it may be so guided and 
 governed by thy good Sjjirit, that all who 
 profess and call themselves Christians may 
 
 be led into the way of truth, and hold the 
 faith in unity of spirit, in the bond of peace, 
 and in righteousness of life." eiri- 
 
 κολ.] not ' calling themselves by' (though 
 in sense equivalent to this, for they who call 
 upon Christ, call themselves by His Name) : 
 the phrase, επικαΧύσΰαι το οΐ'ομα του κυ- 
 ρίον was one adopted from the LXX, as in 
 reff. ; the adjunct ^ιμών Ίηηοϋ χιι. defines 
 that Lord (Jehovah) on whom the Chris- 
 tians called, to be Jesus Christ, — and is a 
 direct testimony to the divine worship of 
 Jesus Christ, as universal in the church. 
 The όνομα εττικλιιθεί' εφ' νμας (James ii. 
 7) is not to the point, the constr. being 
 different. ev ιταντί τόττ. αΐιτ. re κ. 
 
 ήμ.] ' In every place, whether theirs (in 
 their country, wherever that may be) or 
 ours.' This connexion is far better than 
 to join αΰτ. τ. κ. ϊ/μ. with κιφίψ, thereby 
 making the first ημών superfluous. 
 αυτών refers to the πάντες οι ίττικαΧ., 
 ημών to Paul, and Sosthenes, and those 
 whom he is address-ing. Eichhorn fancied 
 τότΓος• to mean 'a place of assembly :' Hug., 
 ' aparty' or 'division:' Beza,al., would limit 
 the persons spoken of to Achaia : others, to 
 Corinth and Ephesus : — but the simple 
 ineaning and universal reference are far 
 more agreeable to the spirit of the passage. 
 I may as well once for all premise, that 
 many of the German expositors have been 
 constantly misled in their interpretations by 
 what I believe to be a mistaken view of ver. 
 12, and the supposed Corinthian parties. 
 See note there. 3.] See Rom. i. 7> 
 
 note. Olsh. remarks, that ειρήνη has pe- 
 culiar weight here on account of the dissen- 
 sions in the Cor. church. 
 
 4 — 9.] Thanksgiving, and expres- 
 sion OF HOPE, ON ACCOUNT OF THE SPIRI- 
 TUAL STATE OF THE CoR. CHURCH. There 
 was much in the Corinthian believers for 
 which to be thankful, and on account of 
 which to hope. These things he puts in 
 the foreground, not only to encourage them, 
 but (as Olsh.) to appeal to their better 
 selves, and to bring out the following con- 
 trast more plainly. 4. τ. θεώ μου]
 
 448 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 Ι. 
 
 i2Cor.vi.io. £ΐ; τταντι ίπΧοντίσθηπ ΐν αυτω, ίν *" τταντι Xoyco καΐ abcd 
 
 IX. 11 only. ^ ^ ^ ■ '■ - '' ΕΡΠ.Τ 
 
 Gen. xiv. 23 m 
 
 _ EFGJ 
 
 7Γασ?7 γΐ'ωσίΐ, 
 
 7(ϋς το 
 
 μαρτυρίου του 'άριστου 
 
 ν 
 
 Phil.iP. 12. 
 Ucb. xi. 37 
 al. Ps. xzii. 
 
 m = arts XX. o'/DO'/l ' '" 7" <■- ^u' -/I ' 
 
 n = iirm XV Βρίραιωυη eu νμιν, ' ωςτε νμας μη ^ νστίρεισίΐαι tv 
 nn'isThess.i. /utjStvt '' χαοί'σματι, ^ απίκοίγ^υμίνους την ^ απυκάΧυφιν 
 oR'ji™•^''-» του κυρίου ημών 1ί}σου -χριστού ος και ρίραιωσΗ 
 
 Ι) Lnkr XV. 14. '"t" t'\ u' Λ' ' ~ ν ' / - I 
 
 Rom. iii. 23. υμάς εως τέλους α νεγκΛ ιστούς ευ τι? ήμερα του κυρίου 
 ημών Ιησοΰ -χριστού. " πιστός ο θεός *^^ οι ού ίκΧη- 
 
 Οητε εις " κοινωνιαν του υιού αυτού Ιησοΰ -χ^ριστου του 
 
 Λ1Ι. ο (11. U11. / f ^ 
 
 ,ί''• ''■... „ κυρίου ημών. 
 
 Γ Kom. vui. 19. 1 
 
 Gill. v.. ^i. Phil. iii. 2n. Heb. ix. 28. s-Rom.ii.S. ITIifss. i. 7 al. f 2 Cor. i. 13 only. 
 
 μι-'χρι T.. Heb. iii. (1 var. read, ίίχρι τ., Rev. ii. 26. α Col. i. 22. 1 Tim. iii. 10. Tit i. fi, 7 only t. 
 
 .S Maec. v.31. ellips., Mat(. xii. 13. ν =ch. iii. 13. iv. 3. v. 5. 2 Cor. i. 14. vi. 2. Epli. iv.'SO. 
 
 Pliil. i fi. lU, U, Hi. w=-cli.x.l3. 2Cor.i.l8. 1 Tliess. v. 24. 2 Thess. iii. 3. 2Tim. ii. 13 al. 
 
 ww=2Cor. i. 11. X - Gal. ii. S). cli. X. 16. 2Cor. xiii. 13. 
 
 Ίταση 17 al ν al Origj (onij). — for γνωσ., σοφία Origj. — 6. for μαρτ., κήρυγμα 12, 
 G7--marg (so Chr-comm). — for χριστό», Θίον FG 46-7• 7'-• 109-20 lectt 8. 12 g arm. 
 — ii' om 52. 109-23. — 7. νμας oni lOO^. — 8. om 179 lect 12. — at beg ins πιστός 
 ο θ(ος 48. — και om 108.— for £ως•, άχρι DEFG. — for ημίυα, τταοουσια DEFG it 
 Ambrst Cassiod ; die adventus ν Pel Bed : in adventum d. — χριστού om B. — 9. ύ 
 om C'. — vip ου D'FG. — for κοιν., ίιακονιαν 178. — χρ. ιησ. (ιησ. χρ. FG d g) του 
 (om F) κυρ. ΐ]μ. DEFG it : του κυρ. ημ. ιησ. χρ. 48. ^2 Syr arm Ambrst. — 
 
 so Rom. i. 8. Phil. i. 3. ττάντοτί] 
 
 expanded in Phil. i. 4 into πάντοτί tv iraay 
 δίησίΐ μου. — The ή χάρις ή όοθίίσα := τά 
 χαρίσματα τά δοθέντα (see below on ver. 7) 
 — a metonymy which has passed so com- 
 pletely into our common parlance, as to be 
 almost lost sight of as such. ' Grace' is pro- 
 perly in God : the gifts of grace in ?/,?, given 
 by that grace. ev] not, as Chrys., Theo- 
 phyl., Oecum., for ί<α, but as usually in this 
 connexion, 'in Christ,' — i.e. to you as 
 members of Christ. So also below. 5. 
 
 ev τταντί] general : particularized by ti/ 
 τΓοιτί λόγφ κ. iraay -γνώσίΐ, 'in all doc- 
 trine and all knowledge.' λόγος (obj.), 
 i/ie truth preached; γνώσις (subj.), the 
 truth apprehended. They were rich in the 
 preaching of the word, had among them 
 able preachers, — and rich in the apprehen- 
 sion of the word, were themselves intelli- 
 gent hearers. See 2 Cor. viii. 7j where to 
 these are added πίστις, σπουδή, and αγάπη. 
 6. το μαρτ. τ. χριστον] the wit- 
 ness concerning Christ delivered by me. 
 καθώς, ' as indeed,' ' siquidem.' 
 έβίβ., ' was confirmed,' — tool- deep 
 root, among you : i.e.' as was to have been 
 expected, from the impression made among 
 you by my preaching of Christ.' This con- 
 firmation was internal, by faith and perma- 
 nence in tlie truth, not external, by miracles. 
 7. ] 'So that ye are behind (others) 
 in no gift of grace ;' — not, luck no gift of 
 grace, which would be genitive, χάρισμα 
 here has its widest sense, of that which is 
 the effect o/ χάρις, — not meaning ' spiritual 
 gifts' in the narrower sense, as in ch. xii. 4. 
 
 This is plain from the whole strain of the 
 passage, which dwells not on outward gifts, 
 but on the inward graces of the Christian 
 life. ά-π•€κδ£χ.] which is the greatest 
 
 proof of maturity and richness of the spi- 
 ritual life ; implying the coexistence and 
 co-operation οι faith, whereby they beheved 
 the promise of Christ, — hope, whereby they 
 looked on to its fulfilment, — and love, where- 
 by that anticipation was lit up with earnest de- 
 sire; — compare πάσιν τοΐςήγαττηκόσιν την 
 ίπιψάΐΉαν αντον, 2 Tim. iv. 8. — άπίκδ., 
 κ.τ.λ. is taken by Chrys., — who understands 
 χαρίσματα of miraculous powers, — as im- 
 plying that besides them they needed pa- 
 tience to wait till the coming of Christ ; and 
 by Calv., — " ideoaddit exspectanles revela- 
 tionem, quo significat, non talem se affluen- 
 tiam illis aflingere in qua nihil desideretur ; 
 sed tantum quse sufficiet usquedum ad per- 
 fectionem perventum fuerit." But I much 
 prefer taking άπίκδίχομίνονς as parallel 
 with and giving the result of /i/} υστ. κ.τ.\. 
 8. ος] viz. θιόν, ver. 4, not Ί/;σοι;ς 
 χριστός, in which case we should have iv 
 Ty τ'ιμίρί} οντοΐ. The και besides shews 
 this. £ως τέ\. άνίγκ.] i. e. fit; το 
 
 elvai νμας άνιγκ.; — so άπ(κατ(στάθη 
 υγιής, Matt. xii. 13. ' To the end,' see 
 reff. — i. e. to the σνντίΧπα τ. αιώνος, — 
 not merely ' to the end of your Uves.' 
 9.] See Phil. i. 6. 1 Thess. v. 24. The 
 Koii'. τον III. avT., as Meyer well remarks, 
 is the δόξα τώΐ' ν'ιών τυϋ θεον, Rom. viii. 
 21 : for they will be σνγκληρονόμοι τοϋ 
 χριστού, and συνδοζασθέΐ'τις with Him, — • 
 see Rom. viii. 17- 23, 2 Thess. ii, 14. The
 
 G— 13. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 449 
 
 ^ Τ1αξ)ακη\ω δε υμάς, άΒζΧψο], 
 του κνξ)ΐου ημών Ι " 
 
 δια 
 
 IV α 
 
 πάντες και 
 τισμίνοι ev 
 
 μη 
 τω 
 
 αυτω 
 
 ησου γυριστού, 
 
 ' < - b ' •? 
 
 £v υμιν σγ^ισματα, ητε 
 
 του oi'ouaror y If"™• 
 
 '^ - rcH. 
 
 TO αυτο λε 
 
 εγί}Τε a lonstr., oh. 
 n\ Q xvi. IL'. Kom. 
 
 οε KciTi 
 
 Λ. 
 
 ■ij/o- 
 
 J.hn 1 
 
 vol και εν rrj aury 
 
 εόηΧωθη yao μοι περί υμών, αδελφοί μου, υττό ^ τωι» 
 Χλο/ίς, όη 'έριδες εν υμιν εισιν. ^^ ' λέγω 
 Ότι έκαστος υμών λέγει Εγώ μεν ειμί Παύλου, 
 
 γνα.μΐί. χ^',ίί'οΐ,'ί-χ!. 
 
 18. χϋ. 25. 
 see Mark ii. 
 21rert-. 
 gj n-r,7,.^r^ c = Lukevi. 
 
 τούτο, 
 ενώ δε 
 
 ΑτΓολλω, εγω δε Κηφα, εγώ δε ■χριστού. μεμερισται 
 
 ο γ^ζίΐστος ι μη Παύλος εσταυοωΟη υπέρ υμών, η 
 
 •2 Cir. 
 . 11. Gal. 
 ι. Heb. 
 .21. 
 
 i Pet. τ. 10. 
 
 Ezra iv. 13. 
 
 — Roin.i. 28. 
 
 εις το Eph.ir. 17. 
 
 e = ch. vii. 25, 
 
 40. 2Ci>r. viii. 10. fch.iii.l3. Col.i.S. Heb. ix. 8. xii. 27. IPet.i.ll. 2 Pef.i. 14 only. E.vod. vi. 3. 
 
 Ε See Rom. xvi. 10. h plur., 2 Cor. xii. 20. Gal. v. 20. Tit. iii. 9. -i5et here only. i = Λ. x. 2!). 
 
 Gal. iii. 17. See ch. vii. 29. xv. 50. k geu., Rom. xiv. 8. ch. iii. 23 al. 1 = Matt. xii. 25, 
 
 2ti II only. 3 Kings xvi. 21. m = Rom. vi 3 reft'. 
 
 10. ύε om 93: ovv Thdrt-ms. — σχίσμα 17- — for ητΐ δ(, quia estis arm. — for nvri], 
 αυτού 109. — γνώσει 2: scientia it Arabrst Pelag. — 11. μου om C (app) d e (E .') 
 Ambrst al. — for των, της C3. — εισ. εν υμ. ν syrr copt Dial Aug al. — 13. bef ίγω (1st), ins 
 OTi 108-78: bef εγω ('2nd), α\\ος £ΐ arm Aug,. — 13. μη μεμεο. 10. 39. 71-3 Syr arr 
 arm slav Eus.— for υττερ, ττερι BD> : t.xt ACD^EFGJ Ά\.—ημων 80. 93. 109. 238 lect 12 
 
 mention of κοινωνία may perhaps have been ΜϊΚητος έττί Svo -γενεάς ανδρών 
 
 intended to prepare the way, as was before νοσίισασα ες τά μάλιστα στάσει, μέχρι 
 
 done in ver. 2, for the reproof which is 
 coming. — Chrys. remarks respecting vv. 
 1 — 9, συ Si σκόπει πώς αΰτονς τψ ονό- 
 ματι άει τοϋ χριστού ττροςηΧοΊ. και 
 άϊ'θριότΓου μεν οΰ(5ίΐ'ός, οντε αποστόλου 
 οντε διοασκάλου, συνεχώς δε ηϋτυϋ του 
 ΤΓοθου^αέΐΌΐ» μεμί'ηται, καθάπερ άπό μέθης 
 τίνος τους καριφαροϋντας άπενεγκείν 
 τταρασκευάζων. οΰδαμοϋ yap εν ίτέρ^ 
 επιστολή οντω συνεχώς κείται το όνομα 
 τοϋ χριστού' ενταύθα μέντοι εν ολίγοις 
 στίχοις πολλάκις, και διά τούτον σχεδόν 
 το παν υφαίνει προοίμιον. Horn. ii. p. 
 
 10 D. 
 
 10 — IV. 21.] Reproof of the party- 
 divisions AMONG THEM : BY OCCASION 
 OF WHICH, THE ApOSTLE EXPLAINS AND 
 DEFENDS HIS OWN METHOD OF PREACH- 
 ING ONLY Christ to them. 10.] 
 8e introduces the contrast to the thankful 
 assurance just expressed. δια τ. όν., 
 as διά τών οίκτιρμώρ τοϋ θεοϋ, Rom. χϋ. 1 : 
 " as the bond of union, and as the most 
 holy name by which they could be adjured." 
 Stanley. — Ίνα (reft'.) not only introduces the 
 result of the fulfilment of the exhortation, 
 but includes its import. το αυτό λέγητί 
 • — contrast to λέγει εγώ μεν . . . εγώ δε . . . 
 
 ού μιν Πάρίοι κατήρτισαν. νοΐ (reff".), 
 
 'disposition,' — γνώμ^ι (do.), ' opinicn.' 
 11.] We cannot fill up τών Χλόης, 
 not knowing whether they were sons, or 
 servants, or other members of her family. 
 Nor can we say whether Chloe was (Theo- 
 phyl., al.) an inhabitant of Corinth, or 
 some Christian looman (Estius) known to 
 the Corinthians elsewhere, or (Michaelis, 
 Meyer) an Ephesian, having friends who 
 had been in Corinth. 12.] λβγω δέ 
 
 τοΰτο, ΟΤΙ, — not, ' / saij this because,' — 
 
 but (see retf.), ' I mean this, that ' 
 
 Ι'καστ. -υμ,. λ€'γ. ] The meaning is 
 clear, but the form of expression not strictly 
 accurate, tlie έκαστος being a different per- 
 son in each case. Accurately expressed it 
 would run thus, 'ότι πάντες τοιοϋτό τι 
 λέγετε, εγώ είμι Π., εγώ Άπολ., εγώ Κηφ., 
 εγώ χριστού, — or as De W., ότι πάντες λ., 
 δ μεν, εγώ είμι . . . . ό δε, εγώ κ.τ.λ. — 
 Respecting the matter of fact to which the 
 verse alludes, I have given in the Prolegg. 
 the principal theories of the German critics, 
 and will only here restate the conclusions 
 which I have there endeavoured to sub- 
 stantiate: (1) that these designations are 
 7iot used as pointing to actual parties 
 
 εγώ ϋέ of ver. 12, — but further formed and subsisting among them, but (2) 
 
 εγω οε 
 
 implying the having the same sentiments on 
 the subjects which divided them : see Phil, 
 ii. 2. ήτ€ δ€'] δέ here implies ' but 
 
 rather,' as in Tliuc ii. 98, άπεγίγνετο μεν 
 ηυτο) οί>δέν τοϋ στιηιτοϋ, . . . προςεγίγιετο 
 δέ. Ilartung, Partikellehre, i. 171, gives 
 many other examples. — καταρτίζω is the 
 exact word for the healing or repairing of 
 the breaches made by the σχίσματα, — 
 'perfectly united.' So Uerod. v. 28, ή 
 Vol. II. 
 
 as representing the spirit with which 
 they CONTENDED against one another, 
 being the sayings of individuals, and not of 
 parties (έκαστος υμών λέγει) : q. d. ' \ou 
 are all in the habit of alleging against one 
 another, some your special attachment to 
 Paul, some to ApoUos, some to (k'phas, 
 others to no mere human teacher, but barely 
 to (.Ihrist, to the exclusion of us his Apostles.' 
 (3) That these sayings, while they arc not to 
 G G
 
 450 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 Ι. 
 
 ου 
 
 ίβαπτίσθητε ', 
 ίβύπτισα, η μη 
 
 nvtr. 4. όνομα Πουλ 
 
 ου^ίνα υμών 
 
 Thdrt.— 14. τω θιω om Β 
 syrf copt arm Thdrtj Orig- 
 it V (am flor liarl tol) Beth al 
 εβαττησθητί ABC 5. 6. 17- 
 Ambrst-mss Pel Prim Bed : 
 4G : txt C^DEFGJ &c it f 
 a corrti, — perhaps to agree 
 avoid the appearance of on 
 
 be made the basis of any hypothesis respect- 
 ing definite parties at Corinth, do neverthe- 
 less hint at matters of fact, and are not 
 merely ' exempli gratia :' and (4) that this 
 view of the verse, which was taken by 
 Chrys., Theodoret, Theophylact, Calv., is 
 borne ont, and indeed necessitated, by ch. 
 iv. 6 (see there). εγώ . . . Παΰλον] This 
 
 profession, of being guided especially by 
 the vords and acts nf Paul, would pro- 
 bably belong to those who were the first 
 fruits of, or directly converted under, his 
 ministry. Such persons would contend for 
 his apostolic authority, and maintain doc- 
 trinally his teaching, so far being right : 
 but, as usual with partizans, would magnify 
 into importance practices and sayings of 
 his which were in themselves indifferent, 
 and forget that theirs was a service of per- 
 fect freedom under one Master, even Christ. 
 With these he does not deal doctrinally in 
 the Epistle, as there was no need for it .• 
 but involves them in the same censure as 
 the rest, and shews them in ch. ii., iii., iv. 
 that he had no such purpose of gaining per- 
 sonal honour among them, but only of build- 
 ing them up in Christ. Ιγώ Άττολλώ] 
 Apollos (Acts xviii. 24 ff.) had come to 
 Corinth after the departure of Paul, and 
 being eloquent, might attract some, to 
 whom the bodily presence of Paul seemed 
 weak and his speech contemptible. It 
 would certainly appear that some occasion 
 had been taken by this difference, to set too 
 high a value on external and rhetorical 
 form of putting forth the gospel of Christ. 
 This the Ap. seems to be blaming (in part) 
 in the conclusion of this, and the next 
 chapter. And from ch. xvi. 12, it would 
 seem likely that Apollos himself had been 
 aware of the abuse of his manner of teach- 
 ing which had taken place, and was un- 
 willing, by repeating his visit just then, to 
 sanction or increase it. Ιγώ Κηψά] 
 All we can say in possible explanation of 
 this, is, that as Peter was the Apostle of the 
 circumcision, — as we know from Gal. ii. 
 11 fF. that his course of action on one occa- 
 sion was reprehended by Paul, and as that 
 course of action no doubt had influence and 
 found followers, it is very conceivable that 
 
 14 " 
 
 15 
 
 ivyjcipiarto τω 
 
 οιστΓον και 1 aiov, 
 
 (C72) : add μου A 17. 57. 219^ al v-sixt demid harP Syr 
 •int Pel Sedul Bed (see ver 4) : txt CDEFGJ most mss 
 
 Chr Till Oec Orig-intj Tert Ambrst. — 15. for (βάπτισα, 
 
 37. C7-. 71-3. 80 al e ν copt sah syr-marg arm Chr Dam 
 ; (βαπησθΐ] 10. 31 : on ίΐς το or. τταυλου ίβαπτισθην 
 
 all Thdrt al Tert al {the reading ίβατττισθητε is certly 
 with the passive form before, but more prob, as Meyer, to 
 
 being the introd of an oratio directa, as 40 makes it by 
 
 some of those who in Corinth lightly es- 
 teemed Paul, might take advantage of this 
 honoured name, and cite against the Chris- 
 tian Uberty taught by their own spiritual 
 founder, the stricter practice of Peter. If 
 so, these persons would be mainly found 
 among the Jewish converts or Judaizers ; 
 and the matters treated in ch. vii. — ix. may 
 have been subjects of doubt mainly with 
 these persons. εγώ δε χριστοί] A 
 
 rendering has been proposed (Estius, al.) 
 which need only be mentioned to be re- 
 jected : viz. that Paul having mentioned 
 the three parties, then breaks off", and adds, 
 of his own, ιγώ δε (Πηϋλος), χριστού 
 (είμι). Beza represents this as Chrysos- 
 tom's view, but it is not : ού τοντο ίνεκά- 
 λει, ΟΤΙ τον χριστον αΰτοίς επεφήμιζον, 
 αλλ' ΟΤΙ μι] πάντες μόνον. οΊμαι δε 
 αντον και οίκοθεν αυτό ΤΓροςτεθεικίναι 
 βονΧόμενον βαρντερον το έγκλημα ποιή- 
 σαι, και ίίϊξηι ούτω και τον χριστον εις 
 μέρος δοθέντα εν, ει και μι) όντως εποίονν 
 τοντο εκείνοι : — meaning by ο'ίκοθεν, not, 
 as his own sentiment, but of his o%vn inven- 
 tion, to shew them the inconsistency of 
 their conduct. The words seem to apply 
 to those who make a merit of not being 
 attached to any human teacher, — who 
 therefore shghted the apostleship of Paul. 
 To them frequent allusion seems to be 
 made in this and in the second Epistle, 
 and more especially in 2 Cor. x. 7 — H• — 
 For a more detailed discussion of the whole 
 subject, see Prolegg. and Dr. Davidson's 
 Introd. to the N. T. II. 222 ff". 13.] 
 
 Some (Lachmann has so printed it) take 
 μεμ'ερισται 6 χρ. as an assertion, — ' Christ 
 has been divided (by you),' — or, as Chrys. 
 mentions, διενείματο ττρός ανθρώπους κ. 
 εμερίσατο τι)ν εκκλησιαν. But it is far 
 better to take it, as commonly, interroga- 
 tively : ' Is Christ (the Person of Christ, as 
 the centre and bond of Christian unity — 
 not, the gospel of Christ (Grot., al.),— nor 
 the Church of Christ (Estius, Olsh.) : nor 
 the power of Christ (Theodoret), i. e. his 
 right over all) divided (not [Meyer, 
 ed. 1], against Himself, as Mark iii. 26", 
 where i<p' έαυτήν follows, but ' into various 
 parts,' one under one leader, another under 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGJ
 
 14—18. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 451 
 
 μη τις ει-?? υπ ε/ς τυ εμοί' όνομα ίραιττισα. ^° εΟα- 
 
 S.\ ' ^ V' , - τ ο Λ ^ ' ΤΛ ./ ocb.iT. 2. 
 
 ΤΓΤισα οε icat τον 2<τε(ρανα οίκον' λοιποί' ουκ otoa ει τίνα f5hes^'"j" 
 ολλον ίραπτισα. ' ου yao απίστίΐ\ίν με νοιστός '"^vVjreT" 
 
 ραπτιί,Ην, άλλα ^ ευαγγελί6,εσ(/αΓ ουκ ίν σοφία λογού, !'>''c,;fiJj^'-3 
 ινα μη ^ Kivwtftj ο σταυρός τον άριστου. ο λόγος 
 
 r = Gal. τ. 11. τί. 12, 14. Phil. iii. 18. s = 
 
 (Phil. 
 
 only. Jer.xiv. 
 2. kv. ".).) 
 Act.^ xiii. 2li reff. 
 
 readg ίβαπησθην). — 16. for ίβατττ. (1st), βιβαπτικα D^FG. — ro λοιπόν FG : ceterorum 
 Ambrst : om 108 al. — αλΚοί' om FG it : aWoji' Tlidrt. — 17. απίσταλκεν A. — ο χριοτ. 
 BFG Thdrt: txt ACDEJ ^i^ (appy) Chr Tlil Oec— rec αλλ, with CFGJ al: txt 
 A(appy)BDE al. — tvayytXiaaaBai Β : txt A(C uncert)DEFGJ if. — λόγων arm. — 
 
 another) ? ' The question applies to all 
 addressed, not to the iyCo χύΐστυϋ only, as 
 Meyer, ed. 1. In that case μιμίηισΓαι 6 
 Xf). would mean ' Has Christ become the 
 property of one part only ? ' as indeed Dr. 
 Burton renders it. — Meyer urges against 
 the interrogative rendering, that the ques- 
 tions begin immediately after, with μη. 
 But we may fairly set against this argu- 
 ment, that the ^i) introduces a nevi form of 
 interrogation respecting a new individual, 
 viz. Paul : and that it was natural, for 
 solemnity's sake, to express the other ques- 
 tion differently. In μίμίρισται 6 χριστός, 
 the Majesty of Christ's Person is set against 
 the unworthy insinuation conveyed by μί- 
 μίρισται, — in μη Παύλος ίσταιψώθη vntp 
 νμ., — the meanness of the individual, Paul, 
 is set against the triumph of divine Love 
 implied in ίστ. υπ. ίιμών. Two such con- 
 trasts could hardly but be differently ex- 
 pressed, μή Π. IcTT. κ.Γ.λ.] " Surely 
 Paul was not crucified for you 1 " By re- 
 pudiating all possibility of himself being 
 the Head and ίττώννμος of their church, he 
 does so a Jortiori for Cephas and Apollos : 
 for he founded the church at Corinth, On 
 (Ίς TO or. ίβαπτ. see Matt, xxviii. 19. 
 14.] Olsh. characterizes it as surprising 
 that Paul should not have referred to the 
 import of baptism itself as a reason to sub- 
 stantiate his argument. He does not this, 
 but tacitly assumes between ver. 13 and 14 
 the probability that his having baptized 
 any considerable number among the Co- 
 rinthians would naturally have led to the 
 abuse against which he is arguing. 
 ίΰχ. τ. θ.] ' / am (now) thankjul to God, 
 who so ordered it that I did not,' &(c. Cris- 
 pus, the former ruler of the synagogue. Acts 
 xviii. 8. Gaius, afterwards the host of the 
 Apostle, and of the church, Rom. xvi. 23. 
 15.]'ϊνα represents the purpose, 
 not of the Apostle's conduct at the time, 
 but of the divine ordering of things : ' God 
 so arranged it, that none might say,' &c. 
 16.] He subsequently recollects 
 having baptized Stephanas and his family 
 (see ch. xvi. 15. 17), — perhaps from iufor- 
 
 G 
 
 mation derivedyro»i Stephanas himself, who 
 was with him : — and he leaves an opening 
 for any others whom he may possibly have 
 baptized and have forgotten it. The last 
 clause is important as against those who 
 maintain the absolute omniscience of the 
 inspired writers on every topic which they 
 handle. 17.] This ver. forms the 
 
 transition to the description of his preaching 
 among them. His mission was not to bap- 
 tize : — a trace already, of the separation 
 of the offices of baptizing and preaching. 
 άνθρωπον μεν yap κατη)(^υνμεί ov Χαβόντα 
 και πεττεισμίνοί' βατττίσαι, παντός οΰτι- 
 ΐ'οςοϋν ίστιν r) yap ιτροαίρεσις του ττρος- 
 ιόΐ'τος λοιπόν ϊpyάζ(τaL τϋ παν, και η του 
 θεον χάρις- 'όταν Si άπιστους δεΙ κατ- 
 ηχήααι, ττολλοΰ ίίΤ πόνου, πολλής της 
 συψίιις• τότε St και το κινουνενειν ττμοςί/ν. 
 Chrys. Horn. iii. p. 18 ε. It is evident that 
 this is said in no derogation of Baptism, 
 for he did on occasion baptize, — and it 
 would be impossible that he should speak 
 lightly of the ordinance to which he appeals 
 (Rom. vi. 3) as the seal of our union with 
 Christ. ovK kv (τοψία λόγου] It 
 
 seems evident from this apology, and other 
 hints in the 2 Epp., e. g. 2 Cor. x. 10, that 
 the plainness and sitnplicity of Paul's speech 
 had been one cause among the Corinthians 
 of aUenation from him. Perhaps, as hinted 
 above, the eloquence of Apollos was ex- 
 tolled to Paul's disadvantage. ev 
 σοφ.] ' in (as the element in which : better 
 than ' with ') wisdom of speech (i. e. the 
 speculations of philosophy : that these are 
 meant, and not mere eloquence or rhetorical 
 form, appears by what follows, which treats 
 of the subject, and not merely of the manner 
 of the preaching) in order that the Cross 
 of Christ (the great central point of his 
 preaching ; exhibiting man's guilt and God's 
 love in their highest degrees and closest 
 connexion) might not be deprived of its 
 effect.' This would come to pass rather 
 by philosophical speculations than by elo- 
 quence. 18.] ' For (expl. of the fore- 
 going clause, — and that, assuming the mu- 
 tual exclusiveness of the preachiny of the
 
 452 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους λ. 
 
 1. 
 
 t 2 Cor.ii. Κι. 
 
 iv.3. BTliess. 
 
 ϋ. 111. (1 ΙΉ. 
 
 i. 7.) Rom. 
 
 ii. 12 reft. 
 η vv. 21,23. 
 
 ch. ii. 14. 
 
 iii. 19 only +. 
 
 Sir. XX. 31. 
 τ Acts ii. 47. 
 
 cl>. XV. 2 retf. 
 
 2 Cor.ii. 15. 
 
 dat.. cli. viii. 
 
 β. ix.2. 
 w Acl.s viii. 10. 
 
 Rom. i. U>. 
 
 ver. 24. 
 X Ι-ίΛ. xxix. 
 
 γαρ 
 
 ο τον 
 τοις 
 
 εστίΐ', 
 
 19 ' ^ 
 
 •γίγρατΓΓαι γαρ 
 
 σταυξ)ου τοις μίν αττοΧΧυμίνοις " μωρία 
 δε ^ σωΣ^ομ£»Ό(ς ημπ' ^^ δυνα/ιπς θίου εση»'. 
 Απολω Tijv σοφιαν των σορών, και 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 την 
 
 b 
 
 σννίσιν των 
 
 αθί 
 
 ΤΊ]σω. 
 
 20 b 
 
 που σο<|)ος ; 
 
 y Epli. iii. 4 
 
 reft. 
 ζ JIatt. xi. 25 
 
 Luke X. 21. 
 I.'^a xlviii 
 
 συνίτων 
 πυΰ '^ 'γξ)αμματίυς ; ' ποϋ συν^ητητΐ]ς τον * οιωνός του- 
 τον \ oi^V£ ε/αωρανεν ο σεος τϊ\ν σοψιαν του κοσ^αου ; 
 
 91 Β» <Ν» Ν ' "Ιι ,' " b η " ' i '' ' 
 
 εττειοϊ} yan εν ry σοφία τον υίου ουκ εγτω ο 
 δία rijg σοφίας τον θεον 
 
 εΰδοκΐ}σεν ο Οεος δια ttjc 
 τους πιστεύοντας* 
 
 κοσ^ιιος 
 μωρίας τον "^ κηί)ν•γματος σωσαι 
 
 Acts xiii. 7 only. Pniv.xvi. 21. a = Mark vii. Π. Luke χ. 10. John xii. 48. Gal. ii. 21 al. 
 
 8. b = Rom. iii. 27. I-iA. xxxiii. 18. c = liere only. Ezr. vii. (i. d here only t. 
 
 See Acts vi. i>. ix. 29. e Matt. xiii. 22 al. Ir. Rom. xii. 2 al. Ir. f = Rom. i. 22. 1 King.s xxiv. 111. 
 
 ε Acts XV. 24 reft'. h Rom. xi. 33. Eph. iii. 1(1. i Rom. i. 21. k Kom. xv. 2() reft. 
 
 1 ver. 18. m Rom. xvi. 2ό reft'. 
 
 18. yap om Di. — ό oni Β Cyr-jerus. — jj/iiv om FG lect 8 it ThcJrti Iren Tert Cypr Hil 
 Ambrst Cassiod : id est nobis ν (not am'•^) Pelag Sedul Bed : νμιν 39. — for Θ., χριστού 
 17- — 20. rec σνζητ. (see prolegg.) — rec aft τ. κοσμ. ins τούτου (to corresji unth του αι. 
 τούτου above) with C 'D^EFG.T al vss (but httjus niundi vss) Clem j Orig Chr Thdrt Oec Tertj 
 all, but gcny hiijus nmndi : txt ABC^D' 1?. 28. 46. 74 al Clcmi Cyr Did Dam Thl Orig-int 
 Tertj.— 21. ynp om FG 3. 108-77 arm.— ?ji;5o/c. C al Chri Dam : txt AB(e sil)DEFJ all 
 
 Cross and wisdom of speech, and the iden- sed inducta a Domino et deleta.' 20.] 
 
 tity of o'l άποΧΚνμΐνοι with the lovers of 
 σοφία λόγου : q. d. ' wisdom of speech 
 would nullify the Cross of Christ : for the 
 doctrine of the Cross is to the lovers of that 
 wisdom, folly.' The reasoning is elliptical 
 and involved, and is further complicated 
 by the empliatic position of τοΊς άπολλ. 
 and τοΙς σωζ.) the doctrine (preaching : 
 "there is a word, an eloquence, which is 
 most powerful, the eloquence of the Cross : 
 referring to σοφία λόγου." Stanley) of the 
 Cross is to the perishing (those who are 
 through unbelief on the way to everlasting 
 perdition) folly : but to us who are being 
 saved (Billroth [in Olsh.] remarks that r. 
 σωζ. ι'ιμ. is a gentler expression than ήμΊν 
 τ. σωζ. w'ould be : the latter would put the 
 j/ju. into strong emphasis, and exclude the 
 opponents in a more marked manner. — ot 
 σ-ωζόμ€νοι, are ifiose in the tvai/ of salvation .• 
 — who by faith have laid hold on Christ 
 and are by Him being saved, see ref.) it is 
 the power (see Rom. i. IG and note. 
 Hardly, as Meyer, — a medium of divine 
 Power, — ctwag/ woburd) ©ott fvciftig 
 
 Wil'ft: rather, the perfection of God's 
 Power — the Power itself, in its noblest 
 manifestation) of God.' 19.] ' For 
 
 (continuation of reason for ούκ tv σοφία 
 λόγου : because it was prophesied that such 
 wisdom should be brought to nought by 
 God) it is written, &c.' The citation is 
 after the LXX, with the exception of ciQt- 
 τήσιο for Kpvxpoj. The Heb. is ' the wisdom 
 of the wise sliall perish, and the prudence 
 of the prudent shall disappear.' (Lowth.) 
 But Calv. says most truly, ' Perit sapientia, 
 sed Domino destruente : sapientia evanescit, 
 
 See ref. The question implies disappear- 
 ance and exclusion. σοφός, ' the 
 
 wise,' generally .• γραμμ., ' the Jewish 
 scribe,'— συνζητ., 'the Greek disputer' 
 (reff.). τοΰ αΙών. τ. is best taken with the 
 whole three, — ' of this present (ungodly) 
 world.' ίμώρανίν] μω[)άν tSti^tv 
 
 ουσαν προς την της ττίστίως κατάληφιν, 
 Chrys. 21 ] ' For (expl. of ίμώρανίρ) 
 
 when (not temporal, but illative = ' since,' 
 ' seeing that,' — so Plat. Gorg. p. 454, intu)) 
 Toivvv oh μόνη αττ^ργάζίται τοντο τυ 
 ipyor, άλλα και άλλαι . . . ; see Hartung, 
 Partikellehre, i. 259) in the wisdom of God 
 {as part of the wise arrange^nent of God. 
 De W., Meyer, al., render it, ' by the reve- 
 lation of the wisd. of God,' which was 
 made to the Gentiles, as Rom. i., by crea- 
 tion, and to the Jews by the law, — thus 
 connecting ii> with ΐγνω, and making tij 
 σοφ. r. y. the medium of knowledge : — 
 Chrys. takes it for the wisdom manifest in 
 His ivorks only : τι Ιστιν, tv τ. συφ. τ. θ. ; 
 Ty Sia των ίργων φαινομίνη, δι' ων ήθέ- 
 λησι -γνωρισθηναι. But Ι very much doubt 
 the legitimacy of this absolute objective use 
 of σοφία, as = those things by which the 
 σοφία is manifested. I cannot see with 
 Olsh. why the interpretation given above is 
 ' ganj Utipaulinifd):' it is merely an expan- 
 sion of ϊμώρανα', — and agrees much better 
 with Paul's use of the words ή σοψια τ. 
 θ(ού in reff. and in ch. ii. 7) the world 
 (Jew and Gentile, see next ver.) by its 
 wisdom (as a means of attaining know- 
 ledge: or, but I prefer the other, "through 
 the wisdom [of God] which I have just men- 
 tioned:" so Stanley) knew not (could not
 
 19—25. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 453 
 
 " ετΓίΐοτ} και louoatoi 
 σοφ'ιαν '' Ζ,ητουσιν, 
 
 σημζία αιτουσιν και 
 
 δε 
 
 Έλλ 
 
 'χ^ριστυν ϋεου 
 του θεού 
 
 43 ύ L. 
 q = Kotn. xiv. 
 
 13 reff. 
 r ver. lal.aur., 
 
 see ch. v. 13. 
 
 ver. 18. 
 
 ver. 21. 
 
 iieut., 2 Oor. 
 
 ισ\νρ6τΐξ>ον των άνΰξίώττων εστίν. 'J' ^^f, Υ^'ίΙ' 
 
 uu constr., Matt. V. 20. John v. 36. 1 John ii. 2. ν Matt. iii. U al. 
 
 >}1'ες n = M^tt. xvi. 
 I. IsK. vii. 
 
 ημείς όε κηρυσσομεν χριστοί' ίσταυ- ^ "„*',•^ j^^^^. 
 
 ι 'τ 5' ' ^ Ί ' ^ Λ 'Ό ^'1 ' τϋ. 1U al 
 
 ρωμετον, Ιουοαίοις μεν ' σκανοαλον, εσνεσιν οε μωριαν, ρ =MKtt.: 
 αυτοις δε τοις '^ /cXrjroit, Ίουδαίοις τε και ' Ελλησιν, 
 " " " δυναμιν και θίοΰ ' σοφ'ιαν' 'ότι το " μωρον 
 σοφωτερον των "" ανθρώπων εστίν, και το t 
 " ασθενές του σεου 
 
 ir. 10 al. Dent, ssxii. 6. 
 
 Clem Orig all. — for ο θιος, τω θίω FG. — πιατινσαντας J. — 22. for ίττίΐδ. και, επί» FG 
 al : και om g Syr seth. — οι ιουδ. 179• — rec σημίΐον {Meyer and De W think σημεία a 
 conn, became only the sing could present any difficulty : but Tisch refers to such 
 passages as Matt xii. 39, xvi. 4 al as havg suggested the sing, which considg the 
 immense weight of MSS authority, seems, I oivn, more likely), with J al vss 
 Thl and Oec (te.\t) : txt ABCDEFG 46. 52. «3. 80 al it ν syrr copt al Clem, ff-gr-latt. 
 — ΐπιζητονσιΐ' A. — 23. rec ίΧλητπ) {to suit precedg and follg), with C^ al a few 
 ff: txt ABC^D'EEGJ all vss ff-gr-Iatt.— 24. τοις om FG.— rs om DEFG.— χ^παΓου 109. 
 — 25. ΐστιν των ανθρ. (both times) DEFG it ν arm lat-fF. — εστίν (2nd) om Β 67" 
 Tert,? (om 1st also 17 Chr Tert,) : for εσην (1st), εσται 67" : txt A^ (A' also appy) 
 CDEFGJ mss (nrly) vss Orig, al lat-ff. — εστίν to ιστιν om 48. — 26. for γαρ, ουν 
 
 find out) God, God saw fit by the foolish- 
 ness of preaching (lit., ' of the proclama- 
 tion :' gen. of apposition, — by that preach, 
 ing which is reputed folly by the world) to 
 save believers.' — Rom. i. 16 throws hght 
 on this last expression as connected with 
 δννπμΐί, θεού in our ver. 18, and with what 
 follows here. There the two are joined : 
 Ινναμις yap θεού εστίν {το εύαγ. τ. χρ.) 
 τταντί τψ πιστεΰοντν Ίονΰιιιφ τε πρώτον 
 κ. "E\\7]vi. 22.] έτΓβιδή, not as in 
 
 ver. 21, but = ' siquidem,' — and explains 
 Γ. μωρίας τ. κηρ. και — καί] see 
 
 Mark ix. 13, unite (De W.) things resem- 
 bUng each other in this particular, but else 
 unlike. Jews and Gentiles both made false 
 recjuirements, but of diti'crent kinds. 
 (Γημ.€Ϊα αιτ.] see jMatt. xii. 38; xvi. 1. 
 Luke xi. 16. John ii. 18 ; vi. 30. The 
 correction σημε~ιον has probably been made 
 from remembering the σημεΐυν of these 
 passages. The sign required was not, as I 
 have observed on Slatt. xii. 38, a mere 
 miracle, but some token from Heaven, 
 substantiating the word preached. 
 23.] Still the expansion of >} μωρ. τ. κηούγ. 
 Now, σκάνδ. as regards the Jews, and 
 μωρία as regards the Gentiles, correspond 
 to the general term μωρία before. The οέ 
 after ι'ιμεΊς is that so often found in clauses 
 following the temporal conjunctions ίττεί, 
 'έως, όφι,α, Sip., in Homer, and ος, ώς, ώς- 
 περ, ει, &c., in Attic writers : e. g. Od. 
 ξ. 178) '■όν tTrei f'ps ψαΐ' Θεοί, ερνε'ί Ισον . . ., 
 τον hi τις άβανάτοιν βλάφε φρίνας Ινδυν 
 Ιισας, — and Χοη. Cyr. viii. 5. 12, ώςττίρ οι 
 όπλΪΓοι, ϋ'ντω δέ κηι οι ττεΧτασται κ. οι 
 το'ίοταί. See many other exx. in llartung, 
 Partikellehre, i. 184 f. It serves to give a 
 slight prominence to the consequent clause, 
 
 as compared with the antecedent one. 
 24.] This verse plainly is a continuation of 
 the opposition to ver. 22 before begun, but 
 itself springs by way of opposition out of 
 ΊουΟ. μεν σκάνδ., εθν. δι μωρίαν, — and 
 carries the thought back to vv. 18 and 21. 
 αΰτοΐς δέ τ. κλητοΪ5] Not, ' but to 
 the elect themselves,' which would be either 
 αντυϊς δε κλητοίς, or τοΙς δε κλητυΊς αν- 
 τοΊς; — but 'to these, viz. the elect,' — 
 the αντοΧς serving to identify them with 
 the σωζόμενοι of ver. 18. There it was 
 ήμίν, — here αΰτοΐς, because by the men- 
 tion oi preaching joined with ι'ιμεΊς, he has 
 now separated ott'the hearers. δύναμιν, 
 
 as fulfilling the requirement of the seekers 
 after a sign .- — σοφίαν, — of thosewho sought 
 wisdom. The repetition of γριστόν gives 
 solemnity, at the same time that it concen- 
 trates the δννημις and σοφία in the Person 
 of Christ ; q. d. ' Christ, even in His 
 humilialioti unto death, the poiver of God 
 and wisdom of God.' — The use of δί'ναμις 
 and σοφία here as applied to Him who was 
 the greatest example of both, would not 
 justify the absolute use of συφια in this 
 sense' in ver. 21. 25.] ' Because (rea- 
 
 son why Christ [crucified] is the power and 
 wisdom of God) the foolishness of God 
 (that act of God which men think foolish) 
 is wiser than men (surpasses in wisdom, 
 not oidy all which they call by that name, 
 but men, all possible wisdom of man- 
 kind) ; and the weakness of God (that 
 act of God which men think weak) is 
 stronger than men' (not only surpasses in 
 might all which they think powerful, but 
 men themselves, — all human might whatso- 
 ever. For the constr. of the genu, sec reff.). 
 The latter clause introduces a fresh thought,
 
 454 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 Ι. 26—31. 
 
 βλίι 
 
 Κ'λησιν νμων, αόίΧφοι, οτι ου abcd 
 
 2<5 - ρΛίπίτε γαρ Τ7μ;^ .^ , ^,^ . .^ ^^^^ 
 
 πολλοί σοψοί ^ κατά σάρκα, ου πολλοί ^ουνατοι, ου πολ- 
 λοί ^ ίύγίνίΓς, ^' άΧλά " τα μωρά τον κόσμου ί^,ίΧίζατο 
 ό θίος 'ίνα '^ καταισχυΓ»} τους σοφούς, και τα " ασθίνη του 
 κόσμου ^ ίξίλίξατο ό θεός ίνα " καταισγνν^ τα " ισγ^υξ)ά, 
 '^^ και τα ** αγευί} του κόσ/αου και τα '^ ϊΕ,ουΘίνημίνα εζ- 
 ελεξατο ό θεός, τα ^ /^η δντα, '/να τα όντα ^ κaτaξ}yησΊJ, 
 
 e = Rnm. xiv. 3 reff. f So Enr. Troad.BOS, Όρΰι τ« των θεΰιν, ώί τά μΐ:» πυριυΰσ'ανω 
 
 ϋιιτα, Tti dt δοκονντ άτιώλΕσαμ. g Rom. iu. 3, 31. ch. ii. 6. siii 8. Ezra ίτ. 21. 
 
 w ch. X. 18. 
 
 I'hil iii.2. 
 X ch. vii. i'O. 
 
 Eph i. 18. 
 
 iv. l,4al. 
 
 2 Pet. i. 10. 
 
 See 1 Thess. 
 
 i. 4. 
 y Rom. i. 3 reff. 
 ζ Acts Σχν. S. 
 a Luke six. 12. 
 
 Acl.s xvii. 11 
 
 only. Job i.3. 
 b .iVcts i. 2, 24 
 
 al. 
 c = ch. zi. 4, 
 
 5,22. 
 d here only t. 
 Ti't μηόϊίν 
 
 DEFG 21 g seth arm Pampli (om 4. 14. 80 al Orig, ; if Orig, buttxt Origjalso). — ημών 
 53. — ot^ τΓολλ. Cvv. om FG g copt : ins aft ίυγίΐ'ίΐς- 74 — υνδί D' (and next also Syr 
 ieth).— 27. fi-om ira to iva (in next vcr) om AFG 37- 73-7'• 8!)^ 109 to 1 1- 10-23-70. 
 238 allg: from iva to ισχνρη 4G. — rec τονς σοφ. κατ., with mss : txt (see above) 
 BCDEJ (-j/fi both times) 14. 17. 62. 109-15-19-21 al d e ν copt syrr seth vss (appy) 
 Orig, Eus if gr-and-latt {as ii is diff to say, whether rec u-as a corrn to suit τα οντά 
 καταργ., or tat, to suit καταισχ. τα ισχ., MS authority must prevail). — α-γ(ννη 44. — 
 του κόσμου om Origj. — titX. ο θ. κ. τ. (ξ ουθ. 109: κ. τ. ιζονθ. οηι 48. — 28. rec ins 
 και bef τα μ. υντ. (α mistaken supplement of the sense : see note), with BC^D 'J all ν all 
 Orig (somet) Chr Thdrt al : txt AC'Di(E.')FG 17 al it seth Iren Tert Ambrst Ruf Tich, 
 
 the way for which however has been pre- 
 pared by Ινναμις, vv. 18. 24. The Jews 
 required a proof of divine Might .• we give 
 them Christ crucified, which is to them a 
 thing όσθίΐ'Ες : but tliis άσθίνις του θίοϋ 
 is stronger than 7nen. 26.] βλίτητι, 
 
 imjierative, as in reff. If taken indicatively, 
 it loses the emphasis which its place in the 
 sentence requires. It would thus be τήν 
 γαρ κΧήσιΐ' υμών β)^ίπίτε. γάρ seems 
 best to apply to what has immediately gone 
 before. As a proof that the foolishness of 
 God is wiser than men and the weakness of 
 God stronger than men, he calls attention to 
 the fact that the Christian church, so full of 
 divine wisdom and strength by the indwell- 
 ing Spirit of God, consisted for the most part, 
 not of the wise or mighty among men, but 
 of those whom the world despised, κλήσιν, 
 as in ref. the calling tv y ίκ\ήθ7]μίν — ' the 
 vocation' and standing of Christian men. 
 oTi οϋ τΓολλοι . . .] ' that not many 
 of you are wise according to the flesh 
 (' signiticari vult sapientiam, quae studio hu- 
 mano absque doctrina Spiritus Sancti potest 
 acquiii,' Estius), not many mighty (no need 
 to supply κατά σάρκα, which is understood 
 as a matter of course) — not many noble.' 
 This is far better than to supply (as E. V., 
 and most comm.) ίκΧίιθησαΐ' after (ύγινΰς ; 
 and thus Vulg., Chrys., Bez., Meyer, De 
 Wette, al. Olsh. observes : " The ancient 
 Christians were for the most part slaves 
 and men of low station ; the whole history 
 of the expansion of the church is in reality 
 a progressive victory of the ignorant over 
 the learned, the lowly over the lofty, until 
 the emperor himself laid down his crown 
 before the cross of Christ." 27, 28.] 
 
 τα |χωρά, neut. for more generalization, 
 but = τονς μωρούς. This is shewn by 
 τους σοφούς following, in that case it being 
 necessary to use the masculine. τοΰ 
 
 κόσμ,., ' of (belonging to) the world:' not 
 in the eyes of the world, as Theodoret, 
 Luth., Grot., Est., al., — which would not 
 fit Tfl aytvT] r. κόσμ., nor the sense: for 
 they were not only seemingly but really 
 foolish, when God chose them. κατ- 
 
 αισχύνη, by shewing to the wise and the 
 strong, the foolish and the weak entering 
 the kingdom of heaven before them. 
 τα άγ€νή, matter of/ae/ — ' the low-bom :' 
 τα εξο-υθίνημενα, matter of estimation, ' the 
 despised.' — Without the και, which is cer- 
 tainly the true reading, τά μή ΰντα may 
 belong to all four, the μωρά, άσθίτί), aytvi'i, 
 and ίξ,ουθίν., — but more probably it has 
 reference only to the last two. Nothing 
 (as e. g. μί~/α τι) must be supplied after 
 μή όντα : it means ' as good as having no 
 existence :' μτ) being subjective, and imply- 
 ing that the non-existence is not absolute 
 but estimative. Were it absolute matter of 
 fact, it would be expressed by τά οϋκ όντα, 
 as in 1 Pet. ii. 10, ot ουκ η\ίημ(νοι, νυν Ce 
 ίλίηθί^ντβς. See Hartung, Pariikellehre, 
 ii. p. 131 ; Winer, § 59. 3 ; and Phil. iii. 3; 
 Eph. V. 3. Olshausen refines on the ex- 
 pression too much, when he explains it of 
 those who have lost their old carnal life and 
 have not yet acquired their new spiritual 
 one : it more probably means, things (per- 
 sons) of absolutely 7io account in the world, 
 unassignable among men, which the ayivi) 
 and ίξυυθίνιιμένα are. — Meyer remarks, 
 that the threefold repetition of t£,iX. 6 θιός, 
 with the three contrasts to σοφοί, ίυΐ'ατυί,
 
 IT. 1 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους a. 
 
 455 
 
 29 
 
 ενώπιον του Θεοΰ' habfoi ch.iv. 
 
 2 Cor. XI. 
 
 οττως μη ' καυ-^ησηται ' πάσα σαρζ 
 ες ιιυτου όί υμίΐς ίστε εν χριστώ Ιησού, ος ίγίνηΰη ιμμ. 
 σοφία -ημιν ° απο Θίοΰ, ^ δικαιοσύνη τε κα\ " αγιασμός και 
 "" ατΓολύτρωσις, ^^ ϊνα καθώς γεγραττται Ό ^ καυχώμενος ""a joifuH:^' 
 εν κυριω * καυγάσθω. 
 
 II. Ka-yw ελθων ττρος υμάς, α^εΧφοΙ, ηλθον ου καθ' 
 " υπίξ)oyJl]v λογού jj σοφίας ^ κατ ay ytW ων ίιμιν το 
 
 JubQ 
 χνϋ. 2 al. 
 5. 
 
 John vii.22. 
 
 Rom xi. 3t>. 
 
 = Rom. viii. 
 
 11. 
 
 2 Cor. 
 Gal. i. 22. 
 nap- u = 2Cor. TU. 
 " ' 14. 1 Thess. 
 
 i.Sal. ο — Rom. xiii. 1. ch iv. 5. vi. 19al. ρ Rom. iii. 21, 25. q Rom. vi. 19 reff. 
 
 rRom.iii. 24. Eph.i. rrefi. s Jer. ix. 24. coastr. ellipt., ch. ii. 9. Kom. xv. 3. t — Phil. ii. 3. iii. tj. 
 
 11 1 Tim. ii. 2 only t. 2 Mace. xiii. C. f = Acts iv. 2. xiii. δ al. fr. part, praes.. Acts xv. 27. 
 
 Λν — Acts IT. 33. 
 
 — κατάργησα 48. —29. καυχησίται FG. — rec for row θεον, avrov {corrn to avoid repe- 
 tition, not obserrg the emphasis), with C al ν syrr al Origj Dial Thdrt Oec Ambrst al : 
 txt ABC^DEFGJ most mss it copt seth al Origj (once omg τον) Eus Eph Bas Chr Dam 
 Thl Aug Tichj : Domini Iren. — 30. aft ιησ. adtl τω κνρ. ημών 53. — rec ημιν σοψ. 
 {trans]iosn, see note), with {νμ. al) J all syrr copt al Orig, iMaCj Chr Thdrt al Ambr2 Aug 
 al: txt AB((T. »iMaj;')CDEFG (?) αοφ. FG) 37. 4(J. 7ΐΓί)3 al it am demid harP al-latt 
 Orig (oft) Eus Did Cyr Jerj Ambrst Ambrj : tv νμιν ηοψια lect 18. — απο Οίου om v-ms 
 Aug.— και SiK. D-^(DiE .' £ικ. : D^ cik. -f)FG Origi Cyr Chr. 
 
 Chap. II. 1. καγω Ct 14.• — καιτηο ηΧθον πρ. νμ. αΰ. ου καθ νττίροχ^ην arm : aS. μου 
 sah. — AoytL))' σοφίας arm. — for μαρτ., μνστηηιον {appy a yloss from ver 7) AC 71-7• 
 80-1 al Syr copt Aug Ambrst Ambr al : tvayyiXiov ar-erp Thdrt : txt BDEFGJ most mss 
 it V sah syr seth al Chr Thl Oec Jer Bed al.— for Qtov, χριστού ν arm (not ed Zohrab) 
 
 and ti)-yfi'£(c, announces the fact with a gative side, in Christ's justifying work — 
 
 tvytvuc 
 triumphant emphasis. καταργ.] ' re- 
 
 duce to the state of ουκ όντα.' All the 
 όντα, the realities, of the world, are of ab- 
 solutely no account, unassignable, in God's 
 spiritual kingdom. 29.] ' That all 
 
 flesh may have no ground of boasting 
 before God.' The negative in these clauses 
 goes with the verb, not with the adjective ; 
 so that each word retains its proper meaning. 
 30.] ' But (contrast to the boasting 
 just spoken of) of Him are ye (from Him 
 ye, who once were as ουκ όντα, — ιστέ. — 
 He is the Author of your spiritual life) in 
 (in union with) Christ Jesus, Who was 
 made (not, ' is made : ' see reff. «γίνήθη is 
 necessarily a passive : see 1 Thess. i. 6 note) 
 to us from God Wisdom (standing us in 
 stead of all earthly wisdom and raising us 
 above it by being ά-ύ Otov; —Wisdom — in 
 His incarnation, in His life of obedience, in 
 His teaching, in His death of atonement, in 
 His glorification and sending of the Spirit : 
 and not only Wisdom, but all that we can 
 want to purify us from guilt, to give us 
 righteousness before God, to sanctify us after 
 His likeness), and both righteousness (the 
 source of our justification before God), and 
 sanctification (by His Spirit ; observe the 
 T€ καί, implying that in these two, δικαιοσ. 
 and άγιασμ., the Christian life is complete 
 — that they are so joined as to form one 
 whole — " our righteousness as well as 
 our sanctification." As Bisping well re- 
 marks, " ti/c. and ay. are closely joined by 
 the T£ and form but one idea, that of 
 Christian justification : δικαιοσύνη the ne- 
 
 άγιασμός the positive, sanctification, the 
 imparting to us of sanctifying grace "), — 
 and redemption ' (by satisfaction made for 
 our sin, reff. : or perhaps deliverance, from 
 all evil, and esp. from eternal death, as Rom. 
 viii. 23 i but I prefer the other). The fore- 
 going constr. of the sentence is justified, (1) 
 as regards από θίον belonging to έγινήθη, 
 and not to σοφία, by the position of ημΙν, 
 which has been altered in rec. to connect 
 σοφία with άπ'ο θ., ("2) as regards the whole 
 four substt. being co-ordinate, and not the 
 last three merely explicative of σοφία, by 
 the usage of rt καί — και, e. g. Herod, i. 23, 
 Οιθύραμβον ττρωτον ανθρώπων των ήμί^ς 
 Ίδμίν πυιήσαντά rt και όνομάσαντα καί 
 διδάξαντα, — and Horn. Od. ο. 78, άμφότε- 
 ρον, κνδός τε καί όγληί// καί όνειαυ, — so 
 that (see Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 103 ; 
 Donaldson, Gr. Gram, ϋΰΐ), the words 
 coupled by τε καί (compare the exegesis 
 above) rank as but one with regard to those 
 coupled to them by και, comp. άμφ(ίτ£ρον 
 above. Hence these three cannot be under 
 one category, as explicative of αυφια, but 
 must be thus ranged : σοφία δικαιοσύνη 
 τε καί αγιασμός, καί άπυΧύτμωσις. 
 31.] The constr. is an anacoluthon, the cita- 
 tion being retained in the original impera- 
 tive, though the ϊΐ'α required a subjunctive. 
 It is freely made from the LXX. This ver. 
 declaring, in opposition to ver. 2'J, the only 
 true ground of boasting, viz. in God and 
 His mercies to us in Christ, closes the de- 
 scription of God's dealing in this matter. 
 He now reverts to the subject of his own
 
 456 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 II. 
 
 χ = Acts XV. τνρίΟν τον 
 
 y Rom xiii.ll 
 cli.vi.Ci.S • 
 
 Ri> 
 
 . XT 
 
 3L>al 
 a— Rnm vi.li 
 
 2 Cur. xi. 3U 
 
 xii. 10 al. 
 
 Hfb. V. 2. 
 
 Tii. 28. 
 b 2 Cor. Tii. 1.' 
 
 E|)h. vi. ft. Phil.ii. 1 
 <ld Luke iv. 32. 
 
 OtOV 
 
 Y. μν Ιησοΐιν ■χριστού, 
 tyio '' iv '^ aadtveia και 
 ΤΓΟος υμάς, 
 ουκ εν 
 
 Τ 
 ί-γίνομην 
 
 lid 
 
 ου yap 
 
 y * 
 και 
 
 ζ ' b 
 £V 
 
 4 
 
 έκρινα τι 
 τυυτον 
 
 είδί 
 
 ναι εν 
 
 Ε( 
 
 (popu 
 ti ο Λο 
 
 υμιν 
 
 ι 3 > 
 
 εσταυρωμίνον. και 
 
 πολλ 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 ω και εν 
 
 Γρομ(ο 
 
 ^^' 
 
 μου 
 
 ττειθοις σοφίας Χο-γοις, αλλ εν 
 
 ! only. C = Matt. xiii. 56. xxvi. 65 al. 
 
 e litre only t• Sec Acis ii. 22. xxv. 7. 
 
 γος μου και το κηρυ•γμα 
 αποδει'ζει 
 
 ι1 Rom. xvi. 25 rcB'. 
 
 ], 2. cli.xvi.lO. 
 
 Ambrst (ms) al.— 2. rec aft (κρινα ins τον, with J al ChrTlidrt Thl Oec: om ABCDEFG 
 5. 10. ;i7. 4f;. 71-3-4. i»3. 177to !) al (Orig) Ath Cyr Chr, Antioch Dam. — rec tio. n, with 
 AFG(J) al vss tf-gr-lat : txt BCD'(DS D^, and Ε have η tv νμ. uS.) Ε 37^ 73-4. 
 177-!' al Cyr Bas Isid Chrj Hil Victorin Augj : τι om 17 Ath: ε-γω it έκρινα μηίεν fii. 
 Origg {(/le posn of τι, and harshnens of η tidti'ai, seem to have occasioned the 
 transyosns, and του iconld be supplied from elsic, see Acts xxvii. 1, 1 Cor. vii. 37). — χρ. 
 ιησ. FG lOy am harl Hil, Aug^ all. -3. καγω ABC 37-9• 46. 71-3-4. 113-20 al Orig Bas 
 Antioch Dam {καγω is almost universal in ver 1) : txt DEFGJ most mss Chr Thdrt Thl 
 Oec— «2^ bef <(,οβ. om FG 49 (al .>) ν g copt sah lat-ff.— ί i' bef τμομ. om DEFG 49. 119 (al?) 
 it V copt sah lat-ff. — for (ytv., ηλθον sah. — 4. for ουκ, ov ytyovi sah Eus.— πίΐϋίΐΐ 1. 18'. 
 48. 72. lOG-8-53 al am it Syr sah arm Origj Eus Ath Glossar Ambrst Ambr, Sedul Leo; 
 and add λόγων Syr arm Orig, των \oywv Orig,, \oyov am d e sah ; om λογ. altogether 
 18' g Origj Ath Ambrstcomm Sedul Eus? Glossar? : txt {ττιΘοις AD', πεώανοις Mac) 
 AB(e sil)CDE(FG)J most mss ν syr (copt seth al) Orig^ Athj Cyr-jeruSg Chr Thdrt Thl 
 Oec Jerj Ambj Vig Bed, but λογοις om FG 74 (al?) ar-erp : και λο-γοις 77 (tfie varr 
 appear to have been ancient conjectures by way of elucidation). — rec ins ανθρωπινής 
 bef σοφίας (explanatory gloss), with ACJ all ν copt syr al Orig, Ath Mac Cyr-jerus, Thl 
 Oec Ambrst (comm) Sedul Bed: σνθρωπινοις 93 : but om BDEFG 17• 40. 71 (al .'") am 
 tol (al-latt) it Syr sah seth arm Origj Nyss Cyr Clir Cyr-jerusj Epiph Thdrt (mSj) al Jer 
 al. — και λογοις 77• — άλλα Β. — for αποδ., αττοκαλυψίΐ D'D'E. — κ. δνν. om eeth : και 
 
 preaching. 
 INGLY, Paul 
 
 II. 1—5.] Accord- 
 did NOT USE AMONG 
 
 THEM WORDS OF WORLDLY WISDOM, BUT 
 
 PRE.\cHED Christ crucified only, in 
 
 THE POWER OF THE SpiRIT. 1.] ' I 
 
 also (as one of the ημίΐς of i. 23, and also 
 with ref. to the preceding verse, ό κανχ. Iv 
 κυρ. κανχάσθω) when I came to you, 
 brethren, came, not with excellency of 
 speech or wisdom announcing (pres. part., 
 not fut.,^as in ref., and in Xen. Hell. ii. 
 1. 29, ϊς τάς Άθίρ'ας ίπλευσεν, όγ^ίλ- 
 λονσα τά ytyovora. The time taken in 
 the voyage is overlooked, and the announce- 
 ment regarded as beginning when the voyage 
 begun) to you the testimony of (concern- 
 ing) God. 2.] For I did not resolve 
 to know any thing (hardly = ίκρινα ilis- 
 lai ovCtv,as E. V., but meaning, " the only 
 thing that I made it defnitely my bvsiness 
 to know, u-as") among you, except Jesus 
 Christ (His Person) and Him (as) cruci- 
 fied' (His Office). It would seem that the 
 historical facts of redemption, and especially 
 the crucifixion of Christ, as a matter of 
 offence, had been kept in the back ground 
 by these professors of human wisdom. 
 " We must not overlook, that Paul does 
 not say ' to know any thing of or C07icerning 
 Christ,' but to know Him Himself, to 
 preach Him Himself. The historical 
 Chi-ist is also the living Christ, who is 
 with His oil η fill the end of time; He 
 
 works personally in every believer, and 
 forms Himself in each one. Therefore it 
 is universally Christ Himself, the Cruci- 
 fied and the Risen One, who is the subject 
 of preaching, and is also Wisdom itself; for 
 His history evermore lives and repeats itself 
 in the whole church and in every member 
 of it : it never waxes old, any more than 
 does God Himself; — it retains at this day 
 that fulness of power, in which it was re- 
 vealed at the first foundation of the church." 
 Olshausen. 3.] και Ιγώ, ' and I,' 
 
 coupled to ηλθον in ver. 1, and ί'γώ re- 
 peated for emphasis, the nature of his own 
 preaching being the leading subject matter 
 here. — The ' weakness and fear and much 
 trembling ' must not be exclusively under- 
 stood of his manner of speech as contrasted 
 with the rhetorical preachers, for ό λόγος μου 
 κ. το κήρυγμα μου follow in the nest ver., 
 — but partly of this, and principally of his in- 
 ternal deep and humble peisua.sion of his 
 own weakness and the mightinessof the work 
 which was entrusted to him. So in Phil, 
 ii. 12, 13, he commands the Phili]ipians, 
 μίτά φόβου κ. τρόμου την ίαντών σωτη- 
 ρίαν κατιργάζίσθί, 6 θίός γάρ ίστιν ύ 
 ίνιργών (V νμ'ιν. The άσθίνιια may have 
 reference to the -παρουσία σώματος άσθί- 
 νί]ς of 2 Cor. χ. 10. Chrys., al., under- 
 stand it of persecutions .- but in the places 
 to which he refers, it has a far wider mean- 
 ing, — viz. infirmities, including those re-
 
 2—6. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 457 
 
 ■πνεύματος και Βυνάμΐως, ^ '•' 
 
 εν f = ch.T. 3, 5. 
 gch.i. ISreff. 
 li — ch. xiv. 20. 
 
 iva η π ίσης υμών μη ri 
 σοφία ανΟοωττων, αλλ* '^ ευ ^ Βυνάμει θευΐι. 
 
 GVj' '^^Λ^-' ' "ΙιΛ' ,' ^\' 11 — en. xiv.au 
 
 Ζοφιαν οε λαλουμεν εν τοις τεΛίίοις, σοώιαν οε ου n^b. v.i4ai. 
 
 ^ . / ' ,,,'•. i eh. i. 20 reft". 
 
 του οιωΐ'ος τούτου ουοε των aξ)yJOvτωv του αιώνος ^^ι! 
 
 om 48 : κ. δνν. θ(ου Did Ambrst.— 5. 7)μων 38. 48. 72. 120 (al ?) copt Clem Ot'ig^.— 
 y om FG. — for εν σοφία, ίκ σοφίας sab. — aWu Β. — 6. St om 238. — from αιών. τουτ. to 
 αιών. τοντ. om FG 114 lect 7 al g setb. — των καταργ. om lect 7 setb. — r»ji/ -v>)v 89^- 
 
 sulting from persecution. 4.] 'And 
 
 (not adversative, as Olsb., but following 
 naturally on tbe weakness, &c. just men- 
 tioned — 'as corresponding to it') my dis- 
 course and my preaching (λόγος of tbe 
 coume of argument and inculcation of 
 doctrine, κηρνγμα of tbe announcement of 
 facts. Tbis (De W.) is better than with 
 Olsb. to understand λ. as \ns pi-ivate, κ. bis 
 public discourse : see Luke iv. 32, and 
 ό λόγος Γ. σταυρόν, ch. i. 18) was not in 
 (did not consist of, was not set forth in, 
 see ref.) persuasive (ττίΐθός z= ττιθανός, 
 τΓίΐστήυιος, ττίΐστικός in Greek. The var. 
 readings have been endeavours to avoid 
 the unusual word, which however is ana- 
 logically formed from -πη^ω, as φίίΐός from 
 φαδυμοι, as Meyer) words of wisdom 
 (ανθρωπινής, a gloss, but a correct one. 
 " Corintbia verba, pro e.xquisitis et magno- 
 pere elaboratis et ad ostentationeni nitidis." 
 Wetst.), but in demonstration of the Spirit 
 and of power :' i. e. either, taking the geni- 
 tives as objective, demonstration having for 
 its object, demonstrating, the presence or 
 V)orking of the Spirit and Power of God 
 (so Estius, Bilhotb, al., and the gloss άττο- 
 καλΰψπ) : — or, taking them subjectively, 
 demonstration (of the truth) springing from 
 the Spii-it and Porcer of God (so most 
 comm.). I prefer the latter. It can hardly 
 be understood of the miracles done by the 
 Spirit through /<//«, which accom]ianied bis 
 preaching (Cbrys., al., Olsb.), for be is here 
 simply speaking of the preaching itself. 
 5.] η ev, ' may be grounded on,' — 
 owe its origin and stability to. "The Spirit is 
 the original Creator of Faith, which cannot 
 be begotten of human caprice, though man 
 has tbe capability of hindering its production : 
 and it depends for its continuanceon thesame 
 mighty Spirit, who is almost without inter- 
 mission begetting it anew." Olsbauscn. 
 
 6 — 16.] Yet the Apostle spoke wis- 
 dom AMONG THE PERFECT, BUT OF A KIND 
 HIGHER THAN THE WISUOM OF THIS 
 
 WORLD ; a wisdom revealed from God by 
 the Spirit, only intelligible by the spiiitnal 
 man, and not by the unspiritual (^νχικός). 
 The Ap. rejects the imputation, that tbe 
 Gospel and its preacbing is inconsistent 
 with iinsdom, rightly understood : nay, 
 shews tliat the wisdom of tlie Gospel is of 
 
 a far higher order than that of the wise in 
 this world, and far above their comprehen- 
 sion. 6.] Se contrasts with the fore- 
 going, λαλ.] \\z. ^ we Ajjostles :' not 
 ' / Paul,' — though he often uses the plur. 
 with tbis meaning: — for, ch. iii. 1, he re- 
 sumes κάγώ, αδελφοί. ev τ. TtXeiois] 
 ' among the perfect,' — when discoursing 
 to those who are not babes in Christ, but 
 of sufficient maturity to have their senses 
 exercised (Heb. v. 14) so as to discern good 
 and evil. That tbis is the right interp., 
 tbe whole following context shews, and 
 especially ch. iii. 1, 2, where a difference is 
 laid down between the milk administered 
 to babes, and the strong meat to men. Tbe 
 difference is in tbe matter of the teaching 
 itself: there is a lower, and there is a 
 higher teaching. So Erasm., Estius, Ben- 
 gel, Riickert, Meyer, De Wette, al. On 
 the other hand, Cbrys., Theodoret, Theo- 
 phyl., Calv., Grot., Olsb., al., understand 
 the difference to be merely in tbe estimate 
 formed of the same teaching according as 
 men were spiritual orunspiritual, interpret- 
 ing iv T. τελείοις, ^ in the estimation o/'the 
 perfect,' which is philologically allowable, 
 but plainly irreconcileable with tbe whole 
 apologetic course of the chapter, and most 
 of all with the ουκ -ηύυνίιθην, κ.τ.λ. of ch. 
 iii. 1 , where he asserts that he did not speak 
 this wisdom to the Corinthians. — We are 
 then brought to tbe enquiry, — tohat was 
 this σοφία ? " Meyer limits it too narrowly 
 to consideration of the future kingdom of 
 Christ. Riickert adds to tbis, the higher 
 views of tlie divine ordering of the world 
 with respect to the unfolding of God's 
 kingdom,— of the meaning of tbe prepara- 
 tory dispensations before Christ, e. g. the 
 law, — of tbe manner in which the death 
 and resuiTection of Christ promoted tbe 
 salvation of mankind. According to ver. 
 12, the knowledge of tbe blessings of salva- 
 tion, of the glory which accompanies the 
 kingdom of God, belongs to tbis higher 
 species of teaching. E.xamples of it are 
 found in the Ep. to tbe Romans, in the 
 setting forth of the doctrine of justification, 
 — of the contrast between Christ and Adam, 
 — ofi)redestination(ci)mp.jUDCTr/'y()<o)', Rom. 
 xi. 25),— and in the Epp. to tbe Ei)li. and 
 Col. (where μυστή^κ often occurs) in the
 
 458 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους λ. 
 
 II. 
 
 τούτου των 
 σοψιαν tv 
 
 1 = ch. i. 28. 
 
 reff. 
 m = ver. 13. ch 
 
 xiv. (). 
 η = Rom. xi- 
 
 25. xvi. 25. ωρισεν ο 
 
 ch. iv. 1. Col. ; , 
 II L. XXV. 18. \ yr 
 
 Eph.iii.9. -yap εγΐ'ωσαν 
 ■ άλλα 
 
 ' αλλά 
 
 καταρ'γουμίνων , 
 μνστηριω την ° αποκΕκρυμμ^νην , 
 
 λαλοΰμίν θίου 
 
 Ρ 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 ην 
 
 ις των 
 
 Col. 
 
 I'v.'aj'!'^'"^' σαν' 
 
 ς ττρο των ' οίωνων ίίς 
 > κ - j . „ , 
 
 α|θ>ιςοΐ'των του αιώνος τούτου 
 
 της 
 
 δοξαν ημών, 
 
 7Γ()0- 
 
 8 "^^ 
 ην 
 
 εγΐ'ωκίν* £ΐ 
 
 oi/fc αι^ τον 
 
 ρ Acts iv. 28. Rom. viii.30 al.f 
 James ii 1. Psa. xxviii. 3. 
 
 Kvpiov της ^ ^οζης εσταυρω- 
 καθως "yfypaTTTat "'A υφβαΧμυς ουκ είδεν 
 
 q here only. See Eph. Col. at supr. .s See Acts vii. 2. Eph. i. 17. 
 
 t ellips., ch. i. 31. u Isa. Ixiv. 4. Ixv. 17. See notes. 
 
 marg Orig-ms : του -vov sail. — 7. rec σοφ. θιον {corrn, the emphanis not being noticed), 
 with J all : txt ABCDEFG 37. 46. 74. «0. 93. 116-20-77 to 9 all lect 12 it ν arm Clenia 
 Orig^ Eus gr-lat-ff. — fv μνστ. oni lect 12 : tv μνστηριοις 33-5 : fv μνστηριω θ(ου 
 115: αποκίκρ. ev μ. arm. — προ των αιών. om 109-78. — 8. ουι5ε {ΐς• D'. — aft αρχ. ins 
 τοντων 72. — ιγνωσιν FG : εγνωρισιν 73 : (γνωκαν 48^ : — (2nd time) (γνωκαν lect 12 : 
 ηίίσαν Old. — εγνωρισαν και ισταυρωσαν lect 8. — 9. άλλα om Α Pelag al. — for «, ο 
 (quod) d e v-ed Cypr Hil (somet) Ambr Aug Ambrst : d ο 110-11 Thl. — for tiStv, ιδίν 
 
 declarations respecting the divine plan of 
 Redemption and the Person of Christ : nay, 
 in cm• Ep., ch. xv. Of the same kind are 
 the considerations treated Heb. vii. — x. See 
 ch. iv. 11 ff." De Wette. — 'But wisdom 
 not of this world,' — not, as E. V., ' not 
 the vnsdom of this world' which loses the 
 peculiar force of the negative : — so in Rom. 
 iii. 21 , 22, we have δικαιοσννΐ] θίοΰ ττίφανέ• 
 ρωται .... δικαιοσύνη δι Beov διά ■πίστ. 
 Ίησον χρ. See instances of the usage in 
 note there. — The άρχοντες are parallel with 
 the σοφοί, δυνατοί, tvytvtlg, of ch. i. 26, 
 and are connected with them expressly by 
 the Των καταργαυμίνων, referring to 'tva 
 Tu οντά καταργήσι^, ch. i. 28. They com- 
 prehend all in estimation and power, Jewish 
 or Gentile, άρχοντας δΙ αιώνος ενταύθα 
 ού δαίμονας τινας Χεγει, καθώς τίνες 
 ντΓοτΓτενονσιν' άλλα τονς εν άξιώμασι, 
 τους εν δνναστείαις, τονς το ττράγμα ττφΐ- 
 μάχητον είναι νομίζοντας, φιλοσόφους κ. 
 ρήτορας κ. λογογράφονς• και yap αυτοί 
 έκράτουν,κ. δημαγωγοί πολλάκις εγίνοντο. 
 Chrys. Horn. vii. p. 50 d. των καταργ.] 
 
 ' who are (being) brought to nought,' 
 viz. by God making choice of the weak and 
 despised, and passing over them, ch. i. 28 : 
 not said of their transitoriness generally, 
 as Chrys., Theophyl., Riickert, — nor of 
 their power being annihilated at the coming 
 of Christ (Grot., Meyer, al.), — nor as Olsh., 
 of their having indeed crucified Christ, but 
 of their being καταογονμενοι by His Resur- 
 rection and the increase of His Church. 
 7.] 'But we speak God's wisdom (em- 
 phasis on θεοϋ : — the wisdom which God 
 possesses and has revealed) in a mystery 
 (iv μνστ. does not belong to την άποκεκ., 
 as Theodoret and Grot., which must be την 
 tv μνστ. άτΓοκ., — nor to σοφίαν, as Beza, 
 Bengel, which though not absolutely, yet 
 certainly here, seeing την άποκεκρ. imme- 
 diately follows, would require the art., την 
 
 εν μνστ., — but to λαλοϋμεν, — * we speak 
 God's wisdom in a mystery,' i. e. as hand- 
 ling a mystery, dealing with a mystery. So 
 την σννεσίν μου εν τψ μυστ. τ. χριστού, 
 Eph. iii. 4. — Estius and the Romanists, 
 taking the connexion rightly, have wrested 
 the meaning to support the disciplina ar- 
 cani which they imagine to be here hinted 
 at, explaining εν μνστ., " non propalam et 
 passim apud omnes, quia non omnes ea ca- 
 piunt, sed . . . secreto et apud pauciores, 
 scilicet eos qui spirituales et perfecti sunt," 
 Est.), which has been (hitherto) hidden 
 (see Rom. xvi. 25. Col. i. 26) : — which 
 God foreordained (nothing need be sup- 
 plied, as άτΓοκ-αλύτΓΓίίΐ', or the like, after 
 πρηώρισεν) before the ages (of time) to 
 {in order to, the juirpose of this preordina- 
 tion) our glory' (our participation in the 
 things wliich He has prepared for them 
 that love Him, ver. 9: δό^α, as contrasted 
 with the bringing to nought of the άρχον~ 
 τες). 8.] ην is in app. with the 
 
 former ην, and does not refer to δόξαν, as 
 Tert. contr. Marc. v. 6, — " subjicit de gloria 
 nostra, quod earn nemo ex principibus hujus 
 aevi scierit . . . ,' for this would be depart- 
 ing from the whole sense of the context, 
 which is, that the wisdom of God was 
 hidden from men. el γαρ έ'γν. κ.τ.λ., 
 
 is Ά proof from eucperience, that the rulers 
 of this world, of whom the Jewish rulers 
 were a representative sample, were ignorant 
 of the wisdom of God. Had they known 
 it, they would not have put to a disgraceful 
 death (ό σταυρός άί'υί,ίας tlvai δοκεΐ, 
 Chrys.) Him who was the Lord of glory 
 (reff.), — i. e. who possesses in His own 
 right glory eternal, see John xvii. 5. 24. — 
 These words are not a parenthesis, but con- 
 tinue the sense of the foregoing, completing 
 the proof of man's ignorance of God's wis- 
 dom ; — even this world's rulers know it 
 not, as they have shewn : how much less
 
 7— π. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 459 
 
 και ους ουκ ηκουσίν και επί 
 
 av( 
 
 10 
 
 ψη, 
 
 ητοιμασίν ο ϋίος τοις 
 
 ν άνθρωπου 
 α-γαττωσιν αι 
 
 ονκ ^ ^"^'^ ^''• ^^ 
 
 reif., W. έκ, 
 
 17/uv δί "" απεκάΧυφίν ό θίύς δια τοϋ πνεύματος \_αυτου] 
 
 το γαρ ΤΓΡίυμα πάντα ^ (ξ)ίυνα, 
 
 11 ' ^ '"ί ' β ' a ^ 
 
 τις •γα|θ otdfv ανυρωπων τα 
 
 του ai't 
 
 m. xi. 33 reff. 
 
 βάθη του θεού. χ =: Matt, si 
 
 )f . ν \ 25 «Ι. fr. 
 
 ρωπου, ει «η το y=Rom.viii. 
 
 Judilli Tin. 14. a See Luke ii. 4!». 
 
 ΜηγΙ. xvi. 23. Ti. 34. James iv. 14. aa gener. art., Matt. χτ. 11. 
 
 80 Clem-rom (Smyrn epist) : otdev ΙΟβ lect 8. 12 Clem, (ms,) Ath, (msj). — for α (2ncl), 
 οσα ABC (appy) Hijjp Ath, Bas Mac Cyr : txt DEFGJ mss (appy) Smyrn-epist Constt 
 Orig Ath^ Chr Thdrt ThI Oec. {Meyer regards α as a mere mechanical repetition, οσα 
 being the origl readg •. I shd rather believe a to be genuine, and οσα a corrnfor per- 
 spicuity.)— \Q. for Jf, -jap 37-0. 4«. 57. 71-3. 93. IIC al copt sah Clem : om lectt 13, 
 14.— rec ο Of. αττίκολ. {appy, as above, con'n from not noticing the emphasis), with J 
 all syr al Chr Thdrt al : txt ABCDEFG 4. G. 37• 57. 71-3-4. 93. 1 10-20-77 to 9 all it ν 
 Syr Clem Orig gr-lat-ff. — add αυτά sah. — αντου om ABC copt Clem Bas Cyr {per- 
 haps on acct of m Trv.follg) : ins DEFGJ mss (appy) vss (nrly) : Spirilum smim sanc- 
 tum {άγων) tol Vig (also Or-int, Did, omg sitnm).—(^)arn'a AC.— 11. in aeth, precedes 
 ver. 10. — tyrwKH' 93. 109. — ανθρώπων om A 17 Orig, Ath Cyr Tertj Vig. — τον ανθρ. 
 than the rest. 9, f.] ' But (opposi- facias e.xpectantibus te misericordiam. 
 
 tion to ver. 8) as it is written, The things 
 which eye saw not, and ear heard not, 
 and which came not up (reft.) upon heart 
 of man, the things which God prepared 
 for them that love Him, to us God re- 
 vealed through His Spirit.' — There is no 
 anacoluthon (as De W.) nor ii regularity of 
 constr., as some suppose, supplying after 
 άλλίί, Χαλονμίν (Estius, &c.), or γίγονιν 
 (Theophyl., Grot., al.) ; the δί in the 
 consequent clause after ος in the antece- 
 dent, which has occasioned these supposi- 
 tions, is by no means unexampled ; — so 
 Herod, iii. 37, — δς S( τούτους μή οπώπει, 
 εγώ δί οΊ σr]μavίω, — and Soph. Philoct. 86, 
 εγώ μίν ονς αν των λόγων άλγώ κλνΐίΐ', 
 Ααιρτίον παΐ, τους δί και ττράσσίΐν στνγώ. 
 See Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 184 f. — 
 Whence is the citation made ? Origen 
 says, ' In nuUo regulari libro invenitur, nisi 
 in secretis EHse prophetse,' a lost apocry- 
 phal book : — Chrys., Theophyl., give the 
 alternative, either that the words are a 
 paraphrase of Isa. Iii. 15, οίς ούκ άνηγ- 
 γέλη τνιρί αύτοϊ<, ΰφονται, κ. οΊ ονκ άκη- 
 κόασι, σνί'ϊΐσονσι, or that they were con- 
 tained in some lost book, of which Chrys. 
 argues that there were very many, — και 
 yap πολλά ίΐί^Θόρι// βιβλία, και ολίγα δι- 
 (σώθη. Jerome, ad Pammachium, de optimo 
 genere interpretandi, vol. ii. 247 ff-i says, 
 " Solent in hoc loco apocryphorum quidam 
 delirameiita scctari, et dicere quod de Apo- 
 calyjjsi Ilehse testimonium sumptum sit : 
 cum in Esaia juxta Ilebraicum ita legatur : 
 A seculo non audierunt, nee auribus perce- 
 perunt, oculus non vidit, Dcus, absque te, 
 quae pra:paras tu cxpectantibus te. Hoc 
 LXX multo aliter transtulerunt : A seculo 
 non audivimus, netjue oculi nostri viderunt 
 Deum absque te : et opera tua vera, et 
 
 In- 
 
 teUigimus, unde sumptum sit testimonium : 
 et tamen Apostolus non verbum expressit e 
 verbo, sed τταραφραστικώς eundum sensum 
 ahis sermonibus indicavit." — I own that 
 probability seems to me to inchne to Je- 
 rome's view, especially when we remember, 
 how freely St. Paul is in the habit of citing. 
 The words of Isa. Ixiv. 4, are quite as near 
 to the general sense of the citation as is the 
 case in many other instances, and the words 
 έπι καρδιαν ούκ άΐ'ίβη may well be a re- 
 miniscence from Isa. Lxv. 17, not far from 
 the other place, ού μή t^τίλθy αυτών Ini 
 την καρδιαν. Such minglings together of 
 clauses from various parts are not unex- 
 ampled with the Αρ., especially when, as 
 here, he is not citing as authority, but 
 merely illustrating his argument by 0. T. 
 expressions. 10. το Trvcifjia] the Holy 
 
 Spirit of God — but working in us and with 
 our Spirits, Rom. viii. 16. " Sufficiat nobis 
 Spiritum Dei habere testem : nihil enim 
 tam profundum est in Deo quo non pene- 
 tret." Calvin. epewd] a word of ac- 
 
 tive research, implying accurate knowledge : 
 so Chrys., oi'i/c άγνοιας, άλΧ' άκριβονς 
 γνώσίως ίντανθα το iptvvclv ίνδεικτικόν, 
 τα βάθη] see reff'. There is a com- 
 parison here between the Spirit of God and 
 the spirit of a ?waH, which is further carried 
 out in the next ver. And thus, as the spirit 
 of a man knows the βάθος of a man, all 
 that is in him, so the Spirit of G'orf searches 
 and knows τά βάθη, the manifold and 
 infinite depths, of God— His Essence, His 
 Attributes, His Counsels : and being το 
 πνίΐ'μα το iv Jy/iTr, besides being το πν. 
 τον θ(ον (De Wette well observes that tlio 
 Apostle ))uri)osely avoids using [see var. 
 readd.] tlie expr. τΙ> πνιϋμα το tv αντω 
 of the tSpirit of God, keeping the way
 
 460 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 II. 
 
 b = Acts XV 
 
 Κ) reft". 
 c Ste Rom. 
 
 του ανϋ^ωτΓου το ευ αυτω , ούτως και 
 ίννωκί)', £t μη το πνεύμα τον ι/εου. 
 
 τα του 
 12 
 
 πνεύμα 
 
 'εοΰ ου^ίΐς εγνωκεΐ', ει μη το πνεύμα του ϋεου. *" ημείς 
 
 aiTi'Macc." ^έ οι» ΤΟ ''' πνεϋμα του κόσμου ελάβομεν, αΧΧά το πνεύμα 
 
 το εκ του θεοΰ, Ίνα ει^ωμεν τα υπο του θεοΰ γ^αρισθεντα 
 
 α και ΧαΧουμεν ουκ * εν όιόακτοις ° ανθρωπινής 
 
 ί ζ. ^ 
 οα 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 iii. 33 
 e = ver. vii. 
 f John vi. 45 
 
 only, from 
 
 lsa.lv. 13. 
 
 Sf c 1 Thess. 
 
 Ίψΐν, 
 
 σοφίας λογοις, αλλ '^ εν ' Οι 
 
 ch. sii. 1. xiv. 1 al.f 
 
 (2nd) om FG g Orig^ Hil Ambrj Yig^ 
 
 g ch. iv. 3. 
 gg Rom. i. 11 
 
 ικτοις πνεύματος, πνεύμα- 
 
 -τω tv αυτω 224. — το τον θβον D' : τα sv τω 
 θίω FG g lat-ff. — rec for tyvwxtv, oiStv {prob a corrn to corresp with previous clause), 
 with J all Chr Tlidrt al : txt ABCDE(FG ί^νω) VJ. 37-9. 4G. 71-4. 80. 120. 213 al it ν 
 Orig, Athi Bas Cyr Cyr-jerus, Antioch Dam Hil al. — aft Qtov, add το εν αυτω Tert, Vig 
 al.— 12. κόσμου τούτον DEFG vss lat-ff.— ιδωμίΐ/ DEFGJ 80. 224 Orig3 (elsw ειδ.).— 
 13. a om FG Bus. — for λαλουμίν, ίλαβυμεν 40. — ανθρωπινυις 30. 71• 80. 224 al. — for 
 ίιδακτοις (2nd), διδακτω Β (Bart): διδαχή 10 it ν arm (both times; as also Syr al 
 Ambrst Gaud) Dam Vig, al: διδακτής (twice) 52- : -κηκοις 213 : al aliter, — rec aft ττν. 
 
 open for the expression in ver. 12, ro ττν. 
 TO Ik tov θεον) teaches us, according to 
 our capacity, those depths of God. 
 11.] ' For who of men knoweth the 
 things of a man (τοϋ άιΌ^ιώπον, generic, 
 see ref. — The emphasis is on άvθρώπoJV 
 and άΐ'θρώπον, as compared with θίον) 
 except the spirit of a man which is in 
 him ? Thus the things of God also none 
 knoweth, except the Spirit of God.' — We 
 may remark, (1) that nothing need be sup- 
 plied (as βάθη) after τά in each case, see 
 reff. — (2) that the comparison here must 
 not be urged beyond what is intended by 
 the Ap. He is speaking of the impos- 
 sibility of any but the Spirit of God con- 
 ferring a knowledge of the things of God. 
 In order to shew this, he compares human 
 things with divine, appealing to the fact 
 that none but the spirit of a man knows his 
 matters. But further than this he says 
 nothing of the similarity of relation of God 
 and God's Spirit with man and man's 
 spirit : and to deduce more than this, will 
 lead into error on one side or the other. 
 In such comparisons as these especially, we 
 must bear in mind the constant habit of our 
 Apostle, to contemplate the thing adduced, 
 for the time, only with regard to that one 
 point for which he adduces it, to the dis- 
 regard of all other considerations. 
 12.] ημείς Se carries on the »'/^Ti' ci of ver. 
 10. TO irv. T. κόσμ.] Not merely, 
 
 the mind and sentiments of unregenerate 
 mankind, ' sapientia mundana et ssecularis,' 
 as Estius, al., but 'the spirit (personally 
 and objectively taken) of the world,' = το 
 ττνεϋμα το ι•νν inpyovv tr τοΊς νιοίς τΓ/ς 
 άπηθήας, Eph. ϋ. 2, where it is strictly 
 personal. το ττν. το «κ τ. θ.] Not 
 
 only, ' the Spirit of God,' but ' the Sp. 
 which is FROM God,' — to shew that we 
 have received it only by the wiU and im- 
 parting of Him whose Spirit it is. And 
 
 this expr. prepares the way for the purpose 
 which God has in imparting to us His 
 Spirit, ' that we may know the things 
 freely given to us by God,' i. e. the trea- 
 sures of wisdom and of felicity which are 
 the free gifts of the gospel dispensation, =: 
 (i ήτοίμασεν ό θευς τοΙς άγαπώσιν αυτόν, 
 ver. 9.• 13.] καί, 'also;' τά χαρισθ. 
 
 ί//ί7ΐ', we not only know by the teaching of 
 the Holy Ghost, but also speak them, 'not 
 in words (arguments, rhetorical forms, &c.) 
 taught by human wisdom, but in those 
 taught by the Spirit.' — The genitives are 
 governed by διδακτοΊς in each case : see 
 ref., and cf. Find. Olymp. ix. 153 : το δε 
 φυα κράτιστον ίίπαν. πολλοί δε διδακταΧς 
 ανθρώπων άρεταΐς κλέος' ΐόρουσαΐ' ελίσθαι' 
 άνευ δε Θεον, κ.τ.λ. ττνευμ. . . . ιτν. 
 
 σ-υγκρ.] ' putting together spirituals 
 with spirituals,' i. e. attaching spiritual 
 words to spiritual things, — which we should 
 not do, if we used words of worldly wisdom 
 to expound spiritual things. So, mainly, 
 Erasm., Beza, Calvin (' spiritualibus spiri- 
 tualiacoaptantes'), al. DeWette, and Meyer ; 
 and so certainly the context is best fitted, 
 and the ordinary sense of the word συγκρί- 
 νω satisfied. But Chrys., and many after 
 him, understand it of explaining and prov- 
 ing difficult spiritual truths of the N. T. 
 by O. T. testimonies .• 'όταν -πνευματικόν 
 και άτΓορον η, άπο των πνευματικών τάζ 
 μαρτυρίας άγομεν. οίο)', λέγω 'ότι ανέστη 
 ό χριστός, ότι από παρθένου εγεννί/θη. 
 παράγω μαρτυρίας κ. τύπους κ. αποδεί- 
 ξεις, τοϊ) Ίωνα, . , , κ.τ.λ. or, as Grot. : 
 " exponentes ea, qua Prophetee Spiritu 
 Dei acti dixere, per ea qnce Christus suo 
 Spiritu nobis aperuit." Both these in- 
 terpp. rest on the supposition that συγκρι »^ω 
 means to interpret : but, as Meyer observes, 
 it never has barely this meaning, as would 
 be the case here. The LXX use it, Gen. 
 xl. 8. 16. 22 ; xli. 12. 15. Dan. v. 12, of
 
 12— IG. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 461 
 
 τικοις ^^ πνίυματικα ^ avyKolvovreg. ^ φυγ^ικος οε «ν- ^scor^x.^a 
 
 /) 'k^' IN- ' -"Λ", no 'xl.8. Num 
 
 υρωτΓος ου οελ^ετοι τα του πνεύματος του σεου μωρία χ τ. 34. 
 αυτω εστίν, και ου ουναται yviovai, οτι 
 
 7«? ^ , 
 
 τικως ° ανακοινεται. ο δε "" πνευματικός 
 
 [^jUEv] πάντα, αυτός δε ύττ ούδεί'ος ° αΐ'ακ"()ΐΐ'εταί 
 
 = ch. XV. 44, 
 ' πΐ'ευμα- 4Η. James 
 ^ 1U. Ιο. Jude 
 
 ι ' ' 19 only t. 
 
 ανακρίνει t-ixhess.i. 
 
 ΐβ' , ο. ϋ. 13. 
 
 '^ τις James 1.21. 
 Luke viii. 
 13. ActsTiii.l4. xi. 1. xvii.ll. 1 Ter. 11 reff. m ch. i. 18 refl". η Rev. xi. 8 only t• ^. nn = ch. 
 
 xiv. 37. o — eh. iv. 3 al 6. in Paul, this epistle only. Luke xxiii. 14. Acts iv. 9 aH. 1 Kings xx. 12. 
 
 ρ IsA. xl. 13. Rom. xi. 34 reS'. 
 
 ins σγιου {explanatory addn), with D''EJ al syr al Chr Thdrt al : om ABCD'FG 17• GV. 
 71. 80. 177 to 9 it V Syr ar-erp copt arm Clem Origg gr-lat-fF.— π)£ΐ•/χατ-ίκως I?. 
 213 (and Β Lachm). — σν-^κρινομίν FG {comparantes vel -ramus g). — 14. του dtov om 
 2. CI Syr Clem, Ptol Iren (gr and lat) Epiph Ath Chr Thdot-anc al : ins ABCDEFGJ 
 mss nrly vs.i nrly Clemj Orig Thdrt al Hilj Aug (oft) all. — ττηυματικος (;2. 77• — 
 15. μίν om ACD'FG 17 (al ?) it ν Syr copt al Clem Orig Thdrt lat-ff : ins B(e sil)D3EJ 
 al syr al Chr Thdrt (ad loc) al {has μίν been insd on acct of the Ctfollg, as Meyer, — or omd 
 on acct of l/ie if preeedy, as De W ?). — bef τταντα, ins τα ACD'FG 17• 'J7• 71• 1 IC al 
 Nyss Chr : om B(e 5ϋ)ΟΈΙ all Clem Orig Mac, Thdrti {παντας Thdrt ad loc Did Irenj) 
 al {τα icas prob a gloss to shew that τταντα was not masc sing ace). — κμινιται 109• — 
 
 interpreting dreams, or rather judging of 
 dreams, Kptrtiv rb σημαινόμίνον των ovti- 
 ράτων, as Jos. Antt. ii. 2. 2 : and Philo uses 
 StaKpivtiv for it. — Again, Theopliyl. (as an 
 alternative), Pelag., al., Thomas Aq., Es- 
 tius, Le Clerc, Bengel, al., Billroth, and 
 RUckert, take ττνίνματικοίς masculine, 
 ■πνίνματικυ'ϊς άνθρώποις τά ττΐ'ίνματικα 
 συγκρίνϋντις κ. £ια\νοΐ'Τίς' ούτοι yap 
 /ιόΐ'οι δύνανται χωρίΐν ταντα : — which 
 lies open to the same objection ; see also on 
 ver. 6. Besides, the masc. rendering of 
 ■πνινματικο'ΐς is clearly wrong, the two 
 subjects of the sentence being the things 
 revealed (a), and the words used in speak- 
 ing them ; to which two the two adjj. most 
 naturally refer, άνθρωπος being a new 
 element, introduced in the next ver. 
 14.] He now prepares the way for shewing 
 them that he could not give out the depths 
 of this spiritual wisdom and eloquence to 
 them, because they were not fitted for it, 
 being carnal (ch. iii. 1 — 4). Ψ'^Χ- δέ 
 
 ανθ.] The animal man, as distinguished 
 from the spiritual man, is he, whose 
 governing principle and highest reference 
 of all things is the ψυχή, the animal sottl, 
 αίτια κΐ}•ίισ(ως ζωικής ζώων, Plato, De- 
 finit. p. 411. In him, the ττνίνμα or 
 spirit, being unvivified and uninformed by 
 the Spirit of God, is overborne by the 
 animal soul, with its desires and its judg- 
 ments,— and is in abeyance, so that he may 
 be said to have it not; — ψυχικοί, πνίϋμα 
 μ}'} ίχοντίς, Jude 19. The ψυχ»/ is that 
 side of the human soul, so to speak, which 
 is turned towards the flesh, the world, the 
 devil ; so that the ψυχικός is necessarily in 
 a measure σαρκικός (ch. iii. 3 , also tniyttoc, 
 and ύαιμονιώίης, as James iii. 15. — This 
 general interpretation of ψυχικός must be 
 adhered to, and we must not make it merely 
 
 intellectual, as Theodoret, — ό μόνοις τοις 
 οίκίίοις άρκυύμίνος ΧογισμαΊς, — Grot, "qui 
 humanae tantum rationis luce ducitur:" — 
 Chrys. : ό τό ττάν τοϊς λoyισμo'ϊς της 
 ψυχϊ/ς ίιίοϋς, καΊ μη νομίζων άνωθεν 
 τίνος δί'ισθαι βηηθίίας, — nor merely ethi- 
 cal, as Erasm., Rosenmiiller ('qui cupidi- 
 tatum sub imperio omnem vitam trans- 
 igunt'), al , — but embracing both these. — 
 οϋ δε'χβται, 'receives not,' i. e. rejects, 
 see retf., — not, cannot receive, ' non capax 
 est,' understands not, which is against the 
 context, — for we may well tmderstand that 
 which seems foUy to us, but we reject it, 
 as unworthy of our consideration :— and it 
 besides would involve a tautology, this 
 point, of inability to comprehend, follow- 
 ing by and by : — ' and he cannot know 
 them {τά τον Trvfr/in-oc.thematter of our 
 spiritual teaching, itself furnished by the 
 Spirit) because they are spiritually (by 
 the πνεύμα of a man exalted by the Spirit 
 of God into its proper paramount office of 
 judging and ruling, and inspired and en- 
 abled for that office) judged of.' 15.] 
 ' But (on the contrary) the spiritual man 
 (he, in whom the πνεύμα rules : and since 
 by man's fall the πνεύμα is overridden by 
 the animal soul, and in abeyance, this 
 always presupposes the infusion of the 
 Holy Spirit, to quicken and inform the 
 πνεύμα — SO that there is no such thing as 
 an unregenerate πνευματικός) judges of 
 all things (Meyer, reading τά πάντα, in- 
 terprets it, 'all spiritual things;' but the 
 ordinary rendering. ' all things.' is better: 
 the Ap. is generalizing, and shewing the 
 high position of the spir. man, who alone 
 can judge things by their true standard. — 
 The acceptation of πάντα as masc. sing., 
 — " convincere potest quemlibet profanuni," 
 as Rosenm., — is against the context, which
 
 462 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 III. 
 
 qActsix. 22. yap svvw vovi> Kvpiov, ός '^ συμβιβα 
 ΪΓζΛϋοηΊγ. ^ovv -χριστού ίχομίν. 
 
 Oil αυτόν , 7)μείς οε 
 
 ABCD 
 EFUJ 
 
 ev 
 
 1. C 
 r Rom. τϋ. 14 
 reft•. 
 
 ' IsT^Rom. ^^ ττνίυματικοις, 
 
 ii. 20. Eph. - Ot'\ f- u'' 'v/Q- 
 
 iv. 14. Heb. γ^ιστω. " yuAa νμας ίττοτισα, ου ρρωμα ουπω 
 
 tch.ix. 7. Heb. τ. 12, 13. 1 Pet. ii. 2 only. Gen. xviii. 8. 
 
 III. ^ Και εγώ, α^ίλφοι, ουκ η^υνηθην λαλησαι υμιν ως 
 αλλ ως ^ σαξ)Κίνοις, ως * νηπιοις 
 
 ρ. 13. Pinil 
 Pjth.iii 148. 
 
 u Rom. xii. 2U reff. 
 
 V Matt. xiv. 15 ||. Lake iii. 11. Rom. sir. 15 al. 
 
 16. for oc, arii quis v-ms-aiid-sixt tol demid Pelag: quis Ambrst. — for χριστού, κυρίου 
 BD^FG g Thl (text) Aug Ambrst Sedul (mechanical repetn of νουν κυρ. above. So 
 Meyer, rightly : addy, if any ylons had been written in mary on κυρίου, it wd not have 
 been χριστού, but utov, seiny that the ref of the forer/oiny κυρ. is to God). 
 
 Chap. III. 1. καγω ABCDEFG 17- 40. 7:*• ϋΟ.'ϋΆ. 10.^) 16 al Clem Orig Chr Dam 
 (corrn to suit ch ii. 1 : see var readd, ch ii. 3) : txt J all Thdrt Thl Oec. — ίδυνηθην C. 
 — νμ. λαλ. D- (not D' nor D^) J all ν al Clenij Origj Chr Dam lat-ff (not Clemj nor 
 Thdrt nor Jer al).— rec σαρκικοις (see notes), with D'EFGJ al : txt ABCD' OJ^. 71 al 
 Clem^ (ms) Origa Nyss.— ί'ί/ττιους (joining it with the follg) ^G. 8'.). 10(i-9-l 1 al (Clenii) 
 Thl lat-ff (many vss are ambiguous). — 2. rec ins και bef ου βρ. (supplem), with 
 DEFGJ al (Origi) Cies Thl Oec: om ABC I?. 23. 37-9. 46. 73. 80. 114-1C-77-78 al ν 
 
 speaks of things, τα τοϋ ττν.,— besides that 
 ■κάντα would not be used absolutely, for 
 ' every man,' but either πάντα άνθρωποι•, 
 as Col. i. 28, or τον πάντα) but himself is 
 judged of by none ' (who is not also 
 πνευματικός, see ch. xiv. 29. 1 John iv. 1, 
 where such judgment is expressly attributed 
 to Christian believers), και γάρ ό βλ'ίπων, 
 ■πάντα μίν αΰτος καθορψ τυϋ μι) βΧ'ίττον- 
 τος, τα δε tKtij/oi) των μη βλεπόντων 
 ουδείς. Chrys. 16.] Proof of αΰτος 
 
 δέ ίητ' ούδ. ανακρίνεται. In order for an 
 unassisted man, not y if ted from Christ, to 
 judge the πνευματικός, he must knoiv the 
 νους κ-υρίον, the intent and disposition of 
 Christ ; yea more, must be able to teach, to 
 instruct, Christ — being not, as the πνευ- 
 ματικός, taught by Him, he must have an 
 independent wisdom of His otvn, which 
 Christ has not: — and rvho is there, of 
 whom this can be said ? ' But we 
 (πνευματικοί, among whom he includes 
 himself and the other App.) have (not a 
 wisdom independent of Christ, nor do we 
 know His mind, nor can we teach Him, 
 but) the mind of Christ;' the same mind, 
 in our degree of apprehensiveness of it, by 
 the imparting of His Spirit, which is in 
 Him, and so can judge all things. The 
 ΐ'οϋς κυρίου is the spiritual intetit and de- 
 signs of Christ. — κυρίου in the prophecy is 
 spoken of Jehovah ; but in the whole of 
 Isa. xl., the incarnate .Jehovah is the sub- 
 ject. The meaning of συμβιβάζω, to teach, 
 belongs to the LXX : in the N.T. it is to 
 conclude, to prove, to confirm, see reff. 
 III. 1 — 4.] He could not speak to 
 
 THEM IN the perfect SPIRITUAL MAN- 
 NER above DESCRIBED, SEEING THAT 
 THEY WERE CARNAL, AND STILL RE- 
 MAINED SO, AS WAS SHEWN BY THEIR 
 
 DIVISIONS. 1.] και 6γώ, ' I also :' 
 
 i. e. as well as the ψυχικός, was compelled 
 to stand on this lower ground, — he, because 
 he cannot understand the things of the 
 Spirit of God : I, because you could not 
 receive them. [Perhaps better, with Stan- 
 ley, 'και εγώ, as in ii. 1, "What I have 
 just been saying, was exemplified in our 
 practice." '] — σαρκίνοις is certainly the 
 true reading, being, besides its MS. autho- 
 rity, required by the sense. He was com- 
 pelled to speak to them (this affirm, clause 
 is to be supplied from the former neg. one) 
 ' as to men of flesh :' not ώς σαρκικοίς, for 
 that they really ivere, and he asserts them 
 yet to be, ver. 3. I quite agree with Meyer 
 (against De Wette) that the distinction be- 
 tween σάρκινοι and σαρκικοί is desiyned by 
 the Αρ., and further regard it as implied in 
 the very form of the sentences. Here, he 
 says that he was compelled to speak to 
 them as if they were only of flesh, — as if 
 they were babes, using in both cases the 
 material comparison, and the particle of 
 comparison ώς. But in ver. 3 he drops 
 comparison, and asserts matter of fact — 
 ' Are ye not still σαρκικοί (^ ώς σάρκινοι), 
 fleshly, carnal, living after the flesh, resist- 
 ing the Spirit } ' — q. d. ' I was obliged to re- 
 gard you as mer« men of flesh, without the 
 Spirit : and it is not far different even now ; 
 ye are yet fleshly — ye retain the same cha- 
 racter.' — Both the σήρκίίΌΐ, the mere men 
 of the flesh, and the σαρκικοί, the carnally 
 disposed, are included under the more ge- 
 neral ψυχικοί, which therefore, as Meyer 
 observes, is not here used, because this dis- 
 tinction was to be made. ώς νηιτ. Iv 
 Xp.] The opposite term, τέλειοι iv χρ., is 
 found Col. i. 28 and in connexion with this, 
 Heb. V. 13, 14. Schottgen (on 1 Pet. ii. 2)
 
 1—5. ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 463 
 
 νν = 2 Cjr. τίί 
 11. 
 
 2. ch.iv.S^l 
 χ R(im XV. 27. 
 
 U. 16. 
 2 Pet. ii. 11. 
 \cls xiii. 
 
 yap ί^νΐ'ασθε. ""αλλ' "'ουδέ εη νυν δύνασθε' ^ εη yap 
 hart'' σαρκικοί. ^ οπού yap tV υμίν ^ ζήλος και "^ ε^)ΐς, ".γ^^;'=*; 
 ουχί σαρκικοί ears και κατά ανϋρωπον περιπατείτε ,2 ο 
 
 οταν yap Aiyrj τις byw μεν ειμί Ιίαυλου, ίτερος οε ^ γΐ-"^\^^ 
 Εγω Απολλω, ουκ άνθρωποι εστε ; τίς ούν έστιν 
 Απολλως ; τίς δε ΓεστινΊ Παύλος; διάκονοι δι' ών ί^^^» ... 
 
 ' Ι- J ' a Rom. xui. 
 
 13al. bRom. Hi. 5. (vi. IH.) ch. XV. 32. Gal. i. 11. iii. 15. 1 Pet. iv. 6. c = Rom. Tiii. 1 . Enli. 
 
 ii.2al.fr. d gen., ch. i. 12 reff. e = Luke xi. 15, 16 al. fr. f See Ter. 3 (b). 
 
 copt syr Clenig Iren (gr and lat) Orige Eus gr-lat-ff. — rec ηδυνασθ. (corrn), with 
 DEJ al Origj Cses Dial Thdrt al : txt ABCFG all Clem Orig all : add βάσταζαν Iren-gr : 
 escam percipere Iren-int. — rec ovTt (see note), with J al Orig, Oec: txt ABCDEFG 
 15 Clem Iren Origj all. — tri om B.~vvv om 109.— 3. σάρκινοι (2ce) D'FG Origi Nyss- 
 ed (error by repealg σαρκιν. from ver 1, the diffce not being noticed: see there): 
 txt ABCD^EJ mss (appy) ClemjOrig Nyss-ed. — rec (1st) σαρκικοί tart (corrn to suit the 
 folly), with AB(e sil)CJ al ν ed al Orig, Chr Thdrt al : 1st σαρκ. ιστΐ to 2nd om 48: 
 txt DEFG it am harl demid tol Clem Orig, Nyss Cypr Thl Aug al. — κίκ (ρις om 77 : 
 ins bef ζ//λος 2. 1 19 arm Chr,. — rec aft «ρις (fpfig AFGJ al ; cEmulaliones et contentiones 
 Ambrst al) ins και ίιχοστασιαι, with (DEFGJ al) .' Iren (gr and lat) Thdrt Chr (text) al 
 Cypr (from Gal v, 20) : om ABC 2'Λ. 40'. 57. 71-4 al ν copt seth arm Clenij Orig, Eus 
 gr-lat-ff.— for ουχί, ov 1. 2. 46.-4. τις \iyn DE (appy) FG 46 al vss lat-ff : 
 Xtyft J all: add (ξ νμων arm. — for trici. St tyw (ty. om 37 Thdrt : add c?£ 61. 115), 
 ίyω δε A 23. 224 (al.') Chr.— rec ουχί (corrn from ver 3), with DEFGJ al Dial Chr 
 Thdrt Thl Oec: txt ABC 17 Dam. — rec for αΐ'θρ., σαρκικοί (corr7i from ver 3), with 
 J al Dial Chr Thdrt al : txt ABCDEFG 17- 672-marg. 71 (al .') it ν copt ath Dam 
 Orig-int Did Ambrst Aug al.— 5. for τις (2ce), τι AB I7. 46. 71• 121 al it ν Eeth lat-ff 
 (prob corrn to suit the sense : the question being rather qualis est than quis est) : 
 
 txt CDEFG most mss syrr copt al Chr Thdrt Thl Oec. — rec ττανλ., απολλ. 
 
 (alteration of order, to suit ver 4), with D-J al Chr Thdrt al Opt al : txt ABCD'D^EFG 
 (απολλω FG) 17. 37- 46. 71.116 (al ?) it ν Dam Ambrst Aug Pel.— rec bef πανλ. om 
 ίστιν (from so many of the 3ISS being identical with those last cited, it u:d appear that 
 εστίν dropped out wheti the order was altered), with DEFGJ al : ins ABC I7. 37. 46. 
 71. 116. — rec bef (Jiokov. ins αλλ' η (addn to comjuete the sense), with D'J mss (nrly) 
 syrr al Chr Thdrt Thl Oec Opt (uUque): om ABCD'EFG GV. 7). 177 it ν copt seth 
 arm Dam Ambrst Pelag al. — for di ων, ejus cui it ν Ambrst Pelag Aug, : ejus in quern 
 
 and Lightfoot adduce the similar Rabbinical were not yet able' (scil. /3pwjua iaOitiv), 
 
 term nipirn, sugenies, used of novices in — or, ' for ye were not yet strong,' δύνα- 
 
 their schools. A recent proselyte also was μ"ί being used absolutely, as in Demosth. 
 
 regarded by them as a newborn infant. — 1187. 8, δυνάμενος τψ τε ττράττίΐν κ. τψ 
 
 He speaks of his first visit to Corinth, when tt-Tth', and 4ii4. 25, των ττολιτενομένων 
 
 they were recently admitted into the faith τίνες δυνηΒ'ίντες, and see other reff. in 
 
 of Christ,— and excuses his merely elemen- Meyer. — In the former case, the ellipsis is 
 
 tary teaching by the fact that they then harsh : the latter meaning seems preferable, 
 
 required it. Not this, but their still re- though not found elsewhere in the N. T. 
 
 quiring it, is adduced as matter of blame to αλλ' οϋδε en νΰν, ' but neither 
 
 them. 2.] See the same fig. in Heb. even now . . . ;' the οντε of the rec. 
 
 V. 12. So also Philo de Agricult. § 2, ίπεί is grammatically inadmissible, — see Winer, 
 
 δε νηπίοις μεν εστί -γάλα τροφή, τίλείυις §59.6. 3.] On σαρκικοί, see above, 
 
 δι τά ίκ πυρών ττ'εμματα, και φυχης γα- ver. 1. οττου, not = ίπεί, butputting 
 
 λακτώδεις μεν αν ειεν τροψα'ι κατά την the assumption in a local form, see reff. 
 
 ■παιδικήν ήλικίαν . . . τίλειαι δε καΊ αν- ζήλος, 'emulation,' in a bad sense; 
 
 δράσιν . . . Basil, Hom. i. p. 403, ed. or as m reff., ' angry jealousy.' κατά 
 
 Paris, 1638, cited by Meyer, explains γάλα, ανθρ., see reff., ' according to the manner 
 
 την εΐςαγκιγικήν κ. άπλουστεραν του εύαγ- οί (unrenewed and ungodly) man,' = κατά 
 
 ■γελίου δίδοσκαλιαΐ' : see also Heb. vi. 1, — σάρκα, Rom. viii. 4 ; see note on ch. xv. 32. 
 
 TO)' της άρχϊΊς του χμιστοϋ λόγ(;ΐ'.^Οη 4.] He names but two of the forc- 
 
 Ιπότισα . . . βρώμα, Wetst. quotes νέκταρ going designations, ch. i. 12 : intending, 
 
 t' άμβροσίην τε, τά περ θίοΊ αυτοί both there more fully, and here briefly, 
 
 εδονσι, Hcs. Thef)gon. 640. Sec Hom. rather to give a sample of the sectarian 
 
 II. viii. 546. Winer, § fi6. 7, e. spirit prevalent, than to describe, as matter 
 
 οΐ-ΐΓ. γαρ Ιδννασθί] Either, ' for ye of fact, any sects into wliich they were
 
 464. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 III. 
 
 
 6 
 
 ετΓίστευσατε, και εκαστω ως ο κύριος ecoj/C£v. " ίγ 
 ' έψυΓίυσα, Απολλως• εττοτισεν, άλλα υ θεός ϊ/ΰζαΐ'ερ 
 ' ωςτε ovrt ο φυτευων εστίν rt, ούτε ο ττοτιςων, αλλ 
 
 -'^-' ^ — ο ^ φυτίνων οε /cot ο ττοτ/^ων "εν-^^ο? 
 
 ίδιον ° μισθύν Χημφεται κατά 
 
 '^ συνεργοί σεου ^ γεωρ 
 
 ο αυζανων θεός. 
 εισιν, έκαστος δε τον 
 
 >»0ι 00 ' 9 Λ 
 
 ιοιον κοτΓον. 
 
 θ 
 
 γιον, σεου οικοοομη εστε 
 
 εου γαρ εσμεν 
 
 10 
 
 g =» Acts XIX. 
 
 2 rcfl. Rum. 
 
 xiii. 11. 
 h con.str., Rom. 
 
 xii.3. ch.vii. 
 
 17. 
 i Matt. XT. 13. 
 
 sxi 33 I al. 
 
 ch.ix. 7. 
 
 Gen ii. 8 al. 
 k Kom. xii. 2ϋ 
 
 re 11'. 
 1 tr., 2 Cor. ix. 
 
 10. pass., 
 
 2 Cor. X. 15. 
 
 Col. i. f>, 10. 
 
 1 Pet. ii. 2. 
 
 m =- Acts V. 36. cli. X. 19. Gal. ii. 0. vi. 3, IB. Demosth. 582, 27. η constr., John x. 30. xvii. II, &c. Eph. 
 
 ii. 14. ο = Matt. v. 12 al. fr. oo = cli. XT. U8 al. Gen. xxxi. 42. ρ =• Kom. XTi. 3 
 
 reff. σ. f>., 1 Thess.iii. 2. q here only. ProT. xxif. 30. xxxi. 16. r = Malt. xxiv. 1. 1 Mk. 2 Cor. 
 
 v. 1. Eph. ii. 21 ouly. sch.i. 4rell. 
 
 Opt: tKfii'ov, £i ου arm-odd: rov θιου, Si ων 46. — και om 70• 115• 119 al• — ι^ς om C 
 tol' (al-latt). — for κυρ., θίος 3. 4C. 57• 71 al demid : χριστός Chr. — 6. rec αλλ, with 
 CDXE.')Jall: t.\t ABD'FG all.— for aWa o, ο Se I?.— 7. {ίστιν ri om lO.'j-lO).'— 
 οντε (1st) om A. — τι is repeated in B. — for οντ( ("ind), ovSt (copt 2ce). — aWa D'. — 
 8. Se (•2nd) om C 31 Syr {et seth al) Aug (γαρ Thdrt).— rec λί^ψ., with C &c : txt A &c. 
 — for κοπυν, τόπον C : σκοπον lect 13. — 9. aft y£wpy., add ίστε D- (not D'D') al ν 
 (not harl') syr arm Chr lat-ff {-pyia Orig,). — 10. του θευυ om 55 demid (al-latt) Clem 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 FG 
 rov ABCD 
 
 Kara την χ^^ρι^ τον utov 
 
 actually divided : see note there, and on ch. 
 iv. 6. Meyer sees in the mention here of 
 Paul and Apollos only, a reference to the 
 two methods of teaching which have been 
 treated of in this section : but as I have 
 before said, the German comm. are misled 
 by too definite a view of the Corr. parties. 
 — άνθρωποι, i. e. walking κατά άνΰρωττον, 
 — σαρκικοί. 5—15.] He takes 
 
 occ.\sio!sr, by example of himself anu 
 Apollos, to explain to them the true 
 place and office of christian teach- 
 ers : that they are in themselves 
 nothing (vv. 5 — 8), but work for god 
 (vv. 9, 10), each in his peculiar de- 
 PARTMENT (ver. 10; cf. ver. 6), each 
 
 REftUIRING SERIOUS CARE AS TO THE 
 MANNER OF HIS WORKING, SEEING THAT 
 A SEARCHING TRIAL OF ITS WORTH 'WILL 
 BE MADE IN THE DAY OF THE LoRD (vV. 
 
 10 — 15). 5.] otrj' follows on the as- 
 
 sumption of the truth of the divided state 
 of things among them : ' Whn then . . . ., 
 seeing that ye exalt them into heads over 
 you ? ' The question is not asked by an 
 objector, but by Paul himself ; when an 
 objector is introduced, he notifies it, as ch. 
 SV.35. Rom.i.ii. 19. — επιστεύσατε,ΆΒΪητβϊί : 
 'ye became believers.'— ίκάστφ ώς . . ., 
 =: ώς tcioK. 6 κνρ. ίκάστψ, see reff. It 
 refers, not to the teachers, but to the hear- 
 ers, see below ό ανζ,άνων θεός. — In the 
 rec. text, the question is carried on to the 
 end of the ver. by αλλ' r), which is good 
 Greek for ' nisi,' ' prsetcrquam,' — so ovSi 
 χρησήμεθα Ιζ?ιγητι^ άλλ' η τφ πητρώψ, 
 Plat. Rep. p. 427, see Hartung, Partikel- 
 lehre, ii. 44, — but seems to have been in- 
 serted from not observing the form of the 
 sentence. 6.] The similitude is to a 
 
 tilled field (γιώργιον, ver. 9) : the plants 
 are the Corr., as members of Christ, vines 
 bearing fruit : these do not yet ajjpear in 
 
 the constr. : so that I prefer, with De Wette, 
 supplying nothing after ίφύτευσα and έπό- 
 τισιν, regarding merely the acts themselves, 
 as in E. V. If any thing be supplied, it 
 must be νμας, which would but ill fit ver. 
 7. — Apollos was sent over to Corinth after 
 Paul had left it (Acts xviii. 27), at hig 
 own request, and remained there preaching 
 during Paul's journey through Upper Asia 
 (ib. xix. 1). 7.] Ιστίν τι, either, 'is 
 
 any thing to the purpose ' as in λίγειΐ' τι, 
 &c., orabsol. 'is any thing:' which latter 
 is best : comp. ε'ι και ovSev εΐμι, 2 Cor. xii. 
 11. άλλ' ό αίιξ. θ£05, scil. τά πάντα 
 
 εστί, — to be supplied from the negative 
 clauses preceding. Theophylact remarks : 
 opa πώς άΐ'επαχθη ποιεί τήι> εζον^εΐ'ωσιν 
 των πρυεστωτων εν Κορίΐ'θψ σοφών κ, 
 πλουσίων, εαυτόν κ. Άττολλώ κητά το 
 φαινόμενον εζουδενώσας, κ. διΰάζας, on 
 θεφ Sil μήνψ προς'εχειν, κ. εις αυτόν 
 άνατιθ'εναι πάντα τά συμβαίνοντα αγαθά. 
 8.] εν, in the nature of their ministry, — 
 generically, (card r/}v ΰπονργίαν άμψότεραι 
 yap τψ θείφ διακονηϋσι βονληματι. Theo- 
 doret. Ι'καστος Se . . .] Here he intro- 
 
 duces a new element — the separate responsi- 
 bility of each minister for the results of his 
 own labour, sothat, though κατά την ΰπουρ- 
 yiav they are owe, — κατά το (oynv (ib.) they 
 are diverse. The stress is twice on 'iSiov. 
 9.] Proof of the last assertion, and in- 
 troduction of ///w?, from Whom each λήμφε- 
 ται. The stress thrice on θεοϋ : — ' shall re- 
 ceive,' &c., — ' for it is of God that we are 
 the fellow workers (in subordination to 
 Him, as is of course implied : but to render it 
 ' fellow workers with one another, under 
 God,' as Estius prefers, and Olsh., al., 
 maintain, is contrary to usage: see reff. ; — 
 and not at all required, see 2 Cor. v. 20; 
 vi. 1), of God that ye are the field, of 
 God that ye are the building.' This last
 
 6—12. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους Α. 
 
 465 
 
 την 
 τεθεικα, 
 
 VI " ν 
 
 πως 
 όυναται 
 ■χ^ξαστος 
 τούτον 
 
 ^οΘίΐσάν μοι 
 άλλος δε 
 ίπo(fCoδo/uει. 
 
 τταρα 
 U δε τις 
 ■^ρνσον 
 
 σοφός αρ^^ιτεκτων " θεμελιον == = Εχοιί. 
 
 Ιίΐναι 
 12 
 
 ως 
 εποικο^ομει. 
 
 11 " θεμίλ 
 
 y 
 
 έκαστος 
 ιον γαρ 
 TOU ^ κειμενον, ος 
 ετΓοικοοομίΐ επι τον 
 
 λίθους '' τίμιους, 
 
 4. i.4al. 
 
 80. y Luke 
 
 αργυροί', 
 
 .' α eioiufei/. Pint. Min )ίΐ,.12(ΐ 
 Rev. xvii. 4. xviii, 12, Hi. xxj. 
 
 δε ''" ρλεπετω 
 
 αλλοί' ουδείς 
 
 εστίν Ιησυυς 
 
 ΘεμεΧιον 
 
 ' ξύλα. 
 
 t lirre only. Isa. 
 
 , lu. 
 
 20. Heb. 
 
 VI. 1. 
 V Kph. ii. 20 
 
 re It. 
 w Luke viii. 18. 
 
 β\. ^ Mark 
 
 xiii. Ei h1. Ir. 
 X = Luke Hi. 
 
 13. Heb. xi. 
 ΰ\λο Λ(-'76ιι/, i(). Plisedo, 
 a = here only. Ezr. v. 8. 
 
 P.,a. xvii 
 
 Cyr Thdrt (ms) Aug Bed.— ίθ//κα ABC^ 17 (Chr) : κατατίθεικα sah : txt C^DEJ 
 (ηθηκα) most niss Origg (Chr-mss) Tlidrt Thl Oec. — if (2nd) om DE d e Orig, 
 Chr Gild.— οικοδομεί sah (and in ver 10). — 1st tnoiK. to 2nd om 179 lect 8. — 
 11. καταθειναι and κατακειμ. sah. — ιησ. om lect 12. — rec ιησ. ο χριστ., with mss : 
 χμιστ. ιησ. C"'DE 52. 224 (aU) d e ν syr Orig, Athj Chr, Max Dam Hil Jer Aug (often) 
 Ambrst Sedul ah txt ABJ all vss Origj Marceli in Euseb Ath, all Arnob : ιησ. om C. 
 (The rec ιησ. ο χρ., appears to have been a corrn to give a doctrinal meaning — 'Jesus 
 (is) the Christ.' χρ. ιησ. mag have had the same intentiwi, cf eh xii. 3.) — for Θ^JU., 
 λιθοί' G2.— 12. TOL'Tov om ABC sah Ambr {perhaps from siniilariiy of enihjs ; or as 
 unnecessary) : ins C^DEJ mss (appy) it ν syrr copt al Orig Atli Cyr-jerus Chr Thdrt 
 new similitude is introduced on account of of the foundation is surely implied in 
 
 what he has presently to say of the differ- 
 ent kinds of teaching, which will be more 
 clearly set forth by this, than by the other 
 figure. 10.] κατά, τ. χάρ. die, as an 
 
 expression of humility (reff.), fitly intro- 
 duces the σοφός which follows. So Chrys. : 
 υυα yoic ττώς μιτριάζίΐ. ΰπωΐ'γάρ σοψον 
 tavTOV, ουκ άψηκεν αίιτοϋ τυϋτο tlvat, 
 αλλ' όλον tavTov ττρήηρο 
 θεφ, τότε ίαντόν οϋτως 
 χάρις is not the peculiar grace of his 
 apostleshijj — for an apostle was not always 
 required to lay the foundation, e. g. in 
 Rome: — but that given to him in common 
 with all Christians (ver. 5), only in a degree 
 proportioned to the work which God had for 
 him to do. σοφό%, ' skilful,' see ref , and 
 many exx. in Wetstein. The jiroof of this 
 skill is given, in his laying a foundation : 
 the unskilful master-builder lays none, see 
 Luke vi. 49. The foundation (ver. 11) was 
 and must be, Jesus Christ : the facts of re- 
 demption by Him (obj.), and the reception 
 of Him and His work by faith (subj.). — 
 The mascul. form ό θίμέλης (sc. λίθος) is 
 said by Thomas Mag. (in Wetst.) to belong 
 to the Kinvi) βιάλεκτος — the Attic form is 
 θί/ίέλιοι/, or, if in theplur., 01 θιμίλιοι :— oi 
 yad θεμί^ΐ'Ί παντηίίον λίθων ϋπόκίΐνται, 
 Thucyd. i. !j3. άλλος, ^whoever comes 
 
 after me' — 'another:' not only ApoUos. 
 kitoiKoho^ti, pres., as the necessary 
 state and cundilion of the subsequent 
 teacher, be be who he may. The building 
 on, over the foundation, imports tlie carry- 
 ing them onward in knowledge and intelli- 
 gent faith. Ίτώς, emphatic, =i here, 
 with what material. De Wette imagines 
 that it :dso conveys a caution not to alter 
 the foundations, and that the γάρ in 
 ver. 1 1 refers to this. But the identity 
 Vol. li. 
 
 ^τίοικοδομεϊ. On the γάρ, see below. 
 11. Θ. γάρ] q. d. Ί speak of superimposing 
 merely, for it is unnecessary to caution 
 them respecting the foundation itself : there 
 can be hut one, and that one has already 
 BEEN (objectively, for all, see below) laid 
 BY God.' At the same time in taking this 
 for granted, he implies the strongest possible 
 II' άναθείς τψ caution againstattemptingtolayanyother. — 
 ίκάλισε. The δύναται, strictly ' can,' — not '7iemini licet,' 
 as Grot., al., nor as Theophyl., ού δύναται 
 θίΐναι, εως αν μέ ry σοφός αρχιτέκτων, firfl 
 όταν μι) 7J τις σοφ. άιιχ., δύναται θεη'αι,κ. 
 f (C τούτου α'ι αΊρίσιις : — for it is assumed, 
 that θίοΰ υίκυδομ ι; is to be raised — and it can 
 only be raised on this one foundation. All 
 who build on other foundations are not 
 συνιργυι 9tov, nor is their building θεοϋ 
 οικοδομή at all. — άλλον . . . παρά, see reff. 
 and cf. Thucyd. i. 23, πυκνότεραι παρά τα 
 ίκ τον Ttfih' χρόΐΌΐ' μνημονιυήμίνα. 
 Ktijxevov] not, ' by me,' but ' by God,' for 
 universal Christendom ; but actually laid 
 in each place, as regards that church, by 
 the minister who founds it. De Wette 
 denies this universal reference, as introduc- 
 ing a new element into the context. But 
 surely the reference in ύ Θιμίλιος ϊ κείμε- 
 νος is too direct to the well-known pro- 
 phecy of the divinely-placed foundation or 
 corner-stone, to surprise any reader or di- 
 vert his mind from the train of thought by 
 a new element. — Ίησοϋς χριστός, the 
 
 PER-iONAL, HISTORICAL CuRlST, aS the 
 
 object of all Christian faith. If it be read 
 as in rec, 'Ι>;τοΓις• ύ χριστός, it need not 
 necessarily be, that Jesus is the Christ, 
 but may be in this case also, Jesus the 
 Christ ; not any doctrine, even that of 
 the Messiahship of Jesus, is the foundation, 
 but Jesus Himself (see var. readd.). 
 11 a
 
 466 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 III. 
 
 b = here only 
 χ. MhU. ϊί, 
 SO al. fr. 
 Oen. ii. 5. 
 
 c lirre iiiily. 
 lixod. V. 12 
 XV. 7. Isa. 
 
 σίται' -η 
 ΧυτΓΤΐται 
 
 "^ κα\αμην 
 
 13•' ^'' d, ^d ' 
 
 £κ:αστου το epyov φανερον γενη- 
 0Γ)λώσΕί, ΟΤΙ ^ εν πυρι ^αττοκα- 
 
 ABCD 
 EJ 
 
 fi-h.i. Sreff. 
 
 d Mnrk vi 14. 
 g 2 Thes: 
 
 και ίκαστου το tpyov οποίον εστίν το 7Γυ|0 αυτό 
 
 Actsvii. 13al. e = ch. i. 8 leff. Heb. x. 25. 1 Thess T. 4. 
 
 7, 8. 
 
 Till Oec Aug Jer al. — χμυσιον κ. αργνριον Β 73 Clern (-ριον C also). — 13. for ίκαστου 
 . . . γινησίται, — ο ποίησης τυντο το ipyov φανίμος γινηται D' d e Ambrst (see ch v. 2). 
 — fpyoi' ίκαστον sah : (καστ. . . . αττοκ. om 92. — aft Ί]μ. add κυρίου ( gloss) v-edd artn-edd 
 mar Aug, Ambr Jer Gild Ambrst Pelag. — on seth. — for αποκ., δοκιμάζεται 23 : αττοκα- 
 Χνώθησίται sah. — και om 108.^ — for ta-iv, ην sah. — rec om ηντο {as nnnecessary : hut 
 see note), with DEJ all (vss lat-ff) Clem Origi Chr (msSj) Thdrtj Thl Oec : ins ABC 
 
 12.] The is implies that though ed. 2, in loc. Cf. also Estius's note; and 
 
 there can be but one foundation, there are 
 maiii/ ways of bnildiiiy upon it. — To the 
 right understanding of this verse it may be 
 necessary to remark, (1) that the similirude 
 is, not of tnany buildings, as Wetst. and 
 Billroth, — but of one, see ver. 16, — and 
 that raised on Christ as its foundation ,• 
 — different parts of which are built by the 
 ministers who work under Him, — some 
 well and substantially built, some ill and 
 unsubstantially. (2) That gold, silver, &c., 
 refer to the matter of the ministers' teach- 
 ing, primarily ; and by inference to those 
 whom that teaching penetrates and builds 
 up in Christ, who should be the living 
 stones of the temple : not, as Orig., Chrys., 
 Theodoret, Theophyl., Phot., Augustin, Je- 
 rome, &c., to the moral fruits produced by 
 the preaching in the individual members of 
 the church, — £? τις κακόν βίον ίχιι μιτά 
 ΤΓίστίως όυθης, ον ττροστησίται αίιτον >/ 
 τΓίσης (ΐ'ς το μή κολάζισθαι, Chrys. : (3) 
 that the builder of the worthless and un- 
 substantial is in the end saved (see below) : 
 so that even his preaching was preaching 
 of Christ, and he himself ivas in earnest. 
 (4) That what is said does not refer, except 
 by accommodation, to the religions life of 
 believers in general — as Olsh., Schrader, 
 see also the ancient Comm. above ; — but to 
 
 the DUTY AND REWARD OF TEACHERS. 
 
 At the same time, such accommodation is 
 legitimate, in so far as each man is a 
 teacher and builder of himself. (5) That 
 the various materials specified must not 
 be fancifully pressed to indicate jjartindar 
 doctrines or graces, as e. g. Schrader has 
 done, " Some build with the gold of faith, 
 with the silver of hope, with the imperish- 
 able costly stones of love, — others again 
 with the dead wood of unfruitfulness in 
 good works, with the empty straw of a 
 spiritless, ostentatious knowledge, and with 
 the bending reed of a continually-doubting 
 spirit." Der Apostel Paulus, iv. p. (jG. This, 
 however ingenious, is beside the mark, not 
 being justified by any indications furnished 
 in our Epistle itself. An elaborate resume 
 of the very various minor differences of in- 
 terpretation may be seen in ileyer's Comm. 
 
 Stanley's. λίθους τιμίο-υς] Not '^e»2i,' 
 
 but ' costly stones,' as marbles, porphyry, 
 jasper, &c. — By the ίΰ\α, χόρτοι', καΧά- 
 μην, he indicates the various perversions of 
 true doctrine, and admixtures of false philo- 
 sophy which were current : so Estius, " doc- 
 trina non quidem hseretica et perniciosa, talis 
 enim fundamenturn destrueret : sc-d minus 
 sincera, minusque solida ; veluti si sit hu- 
 manis ac philosophicis, aut etiam Judaicis 
 opinionibus admixta plus satis : si curiosa 
 magis quam utilis ; si vana quadam oblec- 
 tatione mentes occupans Christianas." 
 Comm. i. p. 2G8 B. 13.] 'Each 
 
 man's work (i. e. that which he has built : 
 his part in erecting the οίκοϊομή 9tov) 
 shall (at some time) he made evident 
 (shall not always remain in the present un- 
 certainty, but be tested, and shewn of what 
 sort it is) : for the day shall make it 
 manifest (the day of the Lord, as Vulg., 
 'dies doniini:' see reff., — and so most 
 Comm., ancient and modern. The other 
 interpp. are (1) ' the day of the destruc- 
 tion of Jerusalem,^ which shall shew the 
 vanity of Judaizing doctrines : so Ham- 
 mond (but not clearly nor exclusively), 
 Lightf., Schottg., al., — against both the 
 context, and our Ap.'s habit of speaking, 
 and under the assumption, that nothing 
 but Jewish errors are spoken of. — (2) ' the 
 lapse of time,' as in the proverb, ' dies do- 
 cebit ;' — so Grot., Wolf., Mosheim, Ro- 
 senm., al., which is still more inconsistent 
 with the context, which necessitates a defi- 
 nite day, and a definite fire: — (3) ^ the 
 light of day,' i. e. of clear knowledge, as 
 opposed to the present time of obscurity 
 and night : so Calv., Beza, Erasm. : — but 
 the fire here is not a light-giving, but a 
 consuming flame : and, as Meyer remarks, 
 even in that case the ήμίρα would be that 
 of the -παρουσία, see Rom. xiii. 12: — (4) 
 'the day of tribulation:' — so Augustin, 
 Calov. : but this again is not definite enough : 
 μισθόν λίιμφίται can hardly be said of mere 
 abiding the test of tribulation) ;— because 
 it (the day (see reff.) — not, the work, as 
 Theophyl., Oecum., al. m., which would 
 introduce a mere tautology with the next
 
 13—15. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 467 
 
 όοκιμασει. ει τίνος το soyov 
 
 μησίν, μισθον Χημφίται. ^'^ 
 
 jii£V£i Ο ετΓΟίκυοο- 
 
 εί τίνος το epyov κατα- 
 
 h =cli. xr.23. 
 2 Cor xiii. Γι 
 h1. Luke 
 XIV. 19. 
 
 καησίται, (,ημιωΌησίται αυτός όε σο)υησζται, ούτως οε reft• 
 
 ' k vcr. ΚΙ. 
 
 1 ^er. 8. m Matf. xiii. 30, 40 al. Geu. xxxviii. 24 η = Mitt. xvi. 2ti. Phil. iii. 8. 
 
 ο ch. iy. ] . ix. 26. E|)h. y. 33. 
 
 37-!). 4G. 67. 73. 80. 93 al sah Orig, Eu3 Bas Clir Thdrt' Procop.— 14. rec μί,'ει, with 
 D^EJ all: μίρη 71 lect 12: μαν}] 2: t.xt (earlier iISS ambiguous) it ν syrr copt sah al 
 lat-fl'. — rec επωκυδ., with C al : txt A (B.') DEJ al : ωκτοο. sah. — 15. ti ce (and και ei 
 bef., ver 14) slav : και ti arm. — for £i τινος, ου (both vv) sah. — ούτος 89--marg 114 al. — 
 
 clause) is (to be) revealed (the present 
 όποκαΧύτΓΤίΓαι e.xpresses the definite cer- 
 tainty of prophecy : or perhaps rather the 
 attribute of that day, which is, to be re- 
 vealed, &c., as in the exprr. ό irnpa^wv, 6 
 σπείρων, Sec.) in fire (' accompanied,' q. 
 'clothed,' 'girt,' 'with fire;' i.e. fire will be 
 t/ie element in which the day will be revealed. 
 Cf. 2 Thess. i. 8, and Mai. iii. 2, 3; iv. 1, 
 to which latter place the reference is, — see 
 LXX. But notice, that this is not the fire 
 of hell, into which the gold, silver, and 
 costly stones will never enter, but the fire 
 of judgment, in which Christ will appear, 
 and by which all ivorks will be tried. This 
 universality of trial by fire is equally against 
 the idea of a purgatorial fire, which lucra- 
 tive fiction has been mainly based by the 
 Romanists on a perversion of this passage. 
 See Aug. de Civ. Dei xxi. 26, who men- 
 tions the idea with ' non redarguo, quia for- 
 sitan verum est.' See Estius, who does not 
 maintain the allusion to Purgatory here : and 
 Bispiiig, who does) and each man's work, 
 of what kind it is, the fire itself shall 
 try' (this clause does not depend upon on, 
 but ranges with the following futures. It 
 is a question whether toyuv is nom. or ace, 
 — of what kind each man's work is (Meyer), 
 — or as above. In the only other place 
 where Paul uses ΰποΊηα, Gal. ii. 6, it com- 
 mences a clause, as here if ίυγον be accus. ; 
 — we have a very similar expr. Gal. vi. 4, 
 TO (pyov taurov δοκιμαζΐτω έκαστος : — 
 and it seems more natural that the action 
 of the fire should be described as directly 
 passing upon the work. For these reasons, 
 I prefer the accus. — τΌ π^φ αυτό, the fire 
 itself, of its own power, being a πΓ'ο Kiir- 
 ανηλίσκορ. 14.] ' If any man's work 
 
 shall remain (i. e. stand the fire, — being 
 of inconsumable materials, μ^νεΐ, fut-, is 
 better than the pres. of rec , as answering 
 to £1 ... . κατακιιίισεται below), which he 
 
 built on the foundation, — he shall re- 
 ceive wages (as a builder; — i. e. ' shall be 
 rewarded tor his faithful and eti'ectual work 
 as a teacher') : 15.] if any man's work 
 shall be burnt up (i. e. consist of such 
 materials as the fire will destroy : Staidey 
 adds, " It is possible tliat this whole image, 
 as addressed to the Corinthians, may have 
 
 Η 
 
 been suggested, or at least illustrated, by the 
 conflagration of Corinth under Mummius : 
 the stately temples [one of them remaining 
 to this day] left standing amidst the univer- 
 sal crash and destruction of the meanerbuild- 
 ings "), he shall be mulcted (ζημιωθ., scil. 
 τον μιηθόν, see ref. Matt., and Herod, vii. 
 39, του δε ενός, τοΐι περι>-\εαι μάλιστα, την 
 φυχι)>' ζημιώσίαι, and Plat. Legg. vi. p. 774, 
 f ι'ς μεν «vv χοήματα 6 μ ή θέλων γιιμηι• το- 
 
 πιιΐιτα ζΐιμιυύσϋω) : but he Mmself shall 
 be saved (having held, and built on, the true 
 foundation Jesus Christ, he shall not be 
 excluded from that salvation which is the 
 free gift of God to all who beUeve on Christ, 
 but shall get no especial reivard as a faith- 
 ful and effectual teacher. Cf. 2 John 8, 
 βλέπετε έηυτ<ινς, 'ίνα μη άΐΓολ€σωμ£ν α 
 ΐΐργασ'αμεθα, αλλά μισθον ττλήρη άπο- 
 Χαβωμεν. Meyer remarks, that our Lord 
 hints at such persons under the name of 
 ftjxaroi. Matt. x.x. 16. Mark x. 31), but 
 so, as through fire:'— i.e. as a builder 
 whose building was consumed would escape 
 with personal safety, but with the loss of his 
 work. — Chrys., Theophyl., Oec, strangely 
 understand it, that he shall be burnt for 
 ever in the fire of Hell, unconsumed : ουχί 
 και αίιτύς οϋτως άπολΰται ώς τά έργα, εις 
 το μηύεν χωρών άλλα μενεΐ εν τφ πνρί, 
 Chrys. σώζεται, τοιτέιπ, σώος- τηρείται, 
 δίκας αιωνίους υπέχων. Theophyl. But 
 (1) the fire of Hell is quite alien from the 
 context (see above),— and (2) the meaning 
 given to σώζίσ^οι is unexampled, — and 
 least of all could be intended where the 
 coming of the Lord is s))oken of: cf. inter 
 
 alia, ch. v. 5, παιικΐοΊ'ναι, κ.τ.λ ίνα 
 
 το ττνεΰμα σωθτ) Ιν τή ήμ€ρα τ. κυρίου. — 
 Grot., Elsn., al., explain ώς• Out πυρός as a 
 proverb, ' tanqitam ex incendio,' for ' with 
 difficulty.' But this is needless here, as 
 the figure itself is that of an ' incendium :' 
 and ώς• is not ' Ιωκμιαηι,' but belongs to 
 οΙ'Γως, see reff. — The whole imagery of the 
 passage will be best understood by carefully 
 keeping in mind the keg, which is to be 
 found in the Όεου οίκοδ"μί\, and the να'ος 
 θ(οϋ, as connected with the prophecy of 
 Malachi iii. and iv. There, εξαίφνης ηί,ει 
 εις τον ναϋν εαντοϋ κίψιυς . . . αυτός εις- 
 •πορεΰεται ώς πϋρ χωνευτ}]ρίυυ . . . καΟιεΙ•
 
 468 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 III. 
 
 pSeePs. χΐν. ως '^ ύιο πυρος. * ονκ οιοατε on ναός σεου ears 
 ^jl" Ι; ^'"^" Kiit το ττνίνμα τον θεού ^ οικ:ει tv υμιν', ' ει τις τον ναον 
 
 ^^ Rom. vi. 10. - η - t , Λ ' t./J-" ' Ω ' . ' ^ ^ 
 
 cii. v.fiai. του utov ψϋΒίρίΐ, ψϋίρίΐ TOVTov Ο Όίος ο γαρ ναός του 
 
 ii!'4au''jer. ^^"^ cιy^ός έστίΐ', " ο'Ίτινίς ίστε υμίΐς. ^" μη^είς εαυτόν 
 
 sRora.vii. 1 ^ ί^οττατατω' Η τις " οοκει σοφός είναι ε^ ύ^ιιπ' ει» τω 
 
 'icoiAu.a^' '^ οιωνι τούτω, ^ μωρός γενεσθω, π'α -^ίνηται σοφός. ^^ η 
 
 Jude 10. piny 011 word, oh. vi. 12. ti = Rom. vi. 2. ν Rom. vii. 11 reft'. w ^ ch. viii. 2. xiv. 
 
 37. Gal. vi. 3. IMiil ui. 4. Jarae.s i. £0. χ ch. i. 20 reff. y cb . i. 2.) rcff. 
 
 16. tv υ/1. OIK. Β al.— 17. φθίΐηΐΐ DEFGJ (but ψθειρΰ J) am. — for τοντοί', avrov 
 {corrn as more iisnal) ADEFG ;W. 10(i (al?) Syr syr-marg al Chri {ilium it ν lat-ff) : 
 txt B(e sil)CJ mss nrly (appy) copt sail syr Mac Did Amphil Chrg Thdrt Thl Oec. — 
 γαρ om sah. — 18. tavrov ova 39: vos it toP Pelag Sedul. — aft ί^απατατω, ins KtvoiQ 
 
 ται χωΐ'ίνων και καΘαρίζων ώς rb άργν- 
 piuv και ώς το χρνσίυν ίιόη ΐοον 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 ίμκρα ίρχίται καιομΐί'η ως κλιβηνος, κ. 
 φλίίίΐ αί'τονς, και Ισονται . . . καλάμη, κ. 
 άνά-φίΐ αντονς η ήμ^ρα ή ΐρχομέΐ'η. The 
 Lord thus coming to His temple in flaming 
 fire, all the parts of the building which will 
 not stand that fire will be consumed : the 
 builders of them will escape with personal 
 salvation, but with the loss of their work, 
 through the midst of the conflagration. 
 16 — 23.] The figure is taken up 
 afre.sh and carried further: and 
 made the occasion of solemn ex- 
 hortation, since they were the tem- 
 PLE OF God, NOT το mar that temple, 
 the habitation of his spirit, by un- 
 holiness, or by exaltation of human 
 wisdom : which last again was irre- 
 levant, as well as sinful; for all 
 their teachers were but their ser- 
 a'ants in building them up to be 
 God's temple, — yea all things were 
 
 FOR this end, TO SUBSERVE THEM, AS 
 
 being Christ's, by the ordinance, 
 
 AND to the glory OF GoD THE FaTHER. 
 
 16.] The foregoing figures, with the 
 occasion to which they referred, are now 
 dropped, and the υίκυ<)ομή θίοί recalled, to 
 do further service. This bitildinr/ is now, as 
 in Mai. and as indeed by implication in the 
 foregoing vv., the temple of God {ναός 
 θίην, with emph. on ναός, not Otov ναός), 
 the habitation of His Spirit. ουκ 
 
 οϊδατ£ δη — ' Are ye ignorant that ' . . . . 
 an expression of surprise arising out of their 
 conduct. και . . . evvfiiv =i iv ψ, τουτ- 
 
 enrn', tv {ψΊν. — Meyer rightly remarks, 
 that " vniic θίον is t/ie temple of God, not a 
 temple of God : for Paul does not conceive 
 (as Theodoret, al.) of the various churches 
 as various temples of God, which would be 
 inconsistent with a Jew's conce]ition of 
 God's temple, but of each Christian church 
 as, sensu mystico, f/ie temjjle of Jehovah. 
 So there would be, not many temples, but 
 many churches, each of which is, ideally, 
 the same temple of God." And, we may 
 
 add, if the figure is to be strictly justified in 
 its widest acceptation, that all the churches 
 are built together into one vast tem])le : cf. 
 iv ψ και νμίΐς σ-υνοικοδομ£Ϊσθ£, Eph. ii. 
 22. 17.] φθίίρίΐ, ' mars,' whether 
 
 as regards its unity and beauty, or its 
 purity and sanctity : liere, the meaning is 
 left indefinite, but the latter jiarticulars are 
 certainly hinted at, — by ίίγιυς below. 
 ψθ£ρ£Ϊ, either by temporal death (Mey.), 
 as in ch. xi. 30 ; or by spiritual death, 
 which is more probable, seeing that the 
 figurative temple is spoken of, not (as 
 Mey.) the material temple: — and as tem- 
 poral death was the punishment for de- 
 filing the material temple (Exod. xxviii. 43. 
 Levit. xvi. 2 al. fr.), so spiritual death for 
 marring or defiling of God s spiritual tem- 
 ple, άγιος, the constant epithet of 
 ναός in the O. T., see Ps. v. 7 ; x• 5 ( LXX). 
 Hab. ii. 20, and passim. oinves, i. e. 
 άγιοι, not, ' tvhich temple are ye,' which 
 would be tautological after ver. IC, and 
 would hardly be expressed by o'lVofc, ' tii 
 gui,' or ^qttales.' Meyer well remarks, that 
 ο'ίτινίς ίστε υμης is the minor proposition 
 of a syllogism : — ' Whoever mars the tem- 
 ple of God, him will God destroy, because 
 His temple is holy : but ye also, as His 
 ideal temple, are holy : — therefore, whoever 
 mars you, shall be destroyed by God.' 
 18 — 20.] A u-arninff to those who 
 u-07ild be leaders among them, against self- 
 conceit. 18.] έξαττατάτω, not, as 
 Theophyl., νομίζων, 'ότι α\\ιος ίχίΐ το 
 ττραγμη και υνχ ώς tlnov : — it is far more 
 naturally referred to what follows, viz. 
 thinking himself wise, when he must be- 
 come a fool in order to be wise. — ' If any 
 man thinks that he is wise among you in 
 this world {iv τψ at. τοΰτψ belongs to 
 ίοκίϊ συψ. tlv. iv νμ., — to the whole as- 
 sumption of wisdom made by the man, 
 which as made in this present world, must 
 be false : not (1) merely to σοφός, Grot., 
 Riickert, al., — as the arrangement of the 
 words shew, — nor (2) to μωυϋς γίνίσθω, 
 Orig., Chrys., Luther, Rosenm., al., in
 
 IG— 23. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 469 
 
 -γαξ) σοφία του κόσμου τούτου ^ μωρία ^ παρά. θίω Εσην. zch.i.isreff. 
 
 ' ^ ' ίΛ b "^ ' Ν ν > - a Κ()ΐη ϋ. 13 al. 
 
 γίγρατΓται yap kJ όρασσομίνος τους σοψους ευ τϊ/ ^ job ν. is (bat 
 ""■ πάλιν Κύί 
 
 πανουη-^ια αυτών. 
 
 Ψ7 
 
 και 
 
 ΟιαΛο•γισμ()υς των σοφών 
 
 ίν 
 ΟΤΙ Βίσιν 
 
 ριος -γινωσκίΐ τους 
 
 / οι ff <ι 
 
 μάταιοι. ωςτε 
 
 μηϋίΐς ^ καυ^ασθω εν ανθρωποις' πάντα yap '^ νμίον ίστιν, 
 ' ύτε Παύλος ύτε Αττολλως ε'ιτε Κΐ]φας, είτε κόσμος 
 ειτε ί,ωη είτε υανατος, είτε ενεστώτα είτε μέλλοντα, 
 
 βάνων and 
 (/.poKi'jffei)• 
 (ip. here only. 
 Levit.ii 2. 
 V. 12. Herod, 
 iii. 15. Jos. 
 
 πάντα υμών, 
 
 iv. 14. =Josh.ix. 
 Winer, } 113. 3. 
 fl = cli. iv. -1. 
 xii. B. Col. i. 16. 
 
 23 • " S•* h " ^ 
 
 υμεις οε γυριστού, γυριστός 
 
 1. dllRom. i. L'l. James ii. 4. Psa. xiiii. 1 1. 
 
 f Acts xiv. in. cli. XV. 17. Tit. iii. SI. J 
 g and (-onstr., cli. i. 31. li gen., ch. 1. 
 
 k I So Rom. viii. 38. See 2 Thess. ii. 2. 
 
 B. J. iii. 8. H. 
 Dion Hiil.ix. 
 21. (Ps.ii.l2, 
 uithgen.) 
 Num. V. 26. 
 ^^ h Λ " c Luke XX. 23. 
 οε υεΟν. 2Cor.iT. 2. 
 
 xi. 3 Eph. 
 e constr., ch. xvi. Ι.τ al. Ir. 
 2fi. 1 Pet. i. 18 only. Exod. xx. 7. 
 Rom. xiv 8. i Xic , so Rom. 
 
 = Acts xxiv. 25 reft'. Rom. ut supr. 
 
 Xoyoit; (see Eph v. G) DE 23 marg 73. 118 (al?) d e.— 19. τυυτου om sah. — rec no θιω 
 (corni : but art is unnecessari/ aft prrpn), with AB(e s'u)J al Orig Chr Tlidrt al : tst 
 CDEFG ()1 al Clem. — γαρ om D'. — ό and τους om FG : ταις -γκιις sail. — αυτού 2. — 20. 
 και τταλιν om 80 Chr. — for σοφωί', ανθρώπων 17• 39. 4C. 7G. 2:S8 al ν (ms) (harl'?) 
 Marcion Chr (mss) Jer. — 21. μη cet κανχησθαι 32. — αΐ'θριοπιο FG 17 g lat ff (not Pel 
 Bed): αν^ρωπίΐ'ίΐΐς Chr. — for i'^.(lst', ημών I?• 43 8 al. — 22. απολΧω FG. - rec at end, 
 νμ. εστίν {svjiplementari/), with D^EJ all vss Chr Thdrt al : txt {ημών Β 17. 48 al: 
 δι' νμ. FG) ABCD^FG 17- 4G al d e Dial Aug Ambrst.— 23. ιψας Β 43. 
 
 ■which case, the stress being on μωρός, it 
 must have been /ιιωρός ■γίνΐσθω iv τψ 
 αίώιη τοντφ) let him become a fool (by 
 receiving the gospel in its simplicity, and so 
 becoming foolish in the world's sight) that 
 he may become (truly) wise.' 19.] 
 
 Reason why this must be: — shewn from 
 Scripture. ιταρα θ., ' in the judgment 
 
 of God,' ref. ό δροσσ.] The sense of 
 
 the Heb. is equally expressed by the Ap. 
 and the LXX. The words are taken out 
 of the context as they stand, which ac- 
 counts for the participle, see Heb. i. 7• 
 The sense is, ' If God uses the craft of the 
 wise as a net to catch them in, such wisdom 
 is in His sight folly, since He turns it 
 to their own confusion.' " Spa(7cro|X£V09 
 [possibly a provincialism] is substituted for 
 καταλαμβάνων, as a stronger and livelier 
 expression for ' grasping,' or ' catching with 
 the hand.' " Stanley. 20.] The LXX 
 
 have ανθρώπων (Heb. Π"ΐΝί) ; the Psalmist 
 however is speaking of the proud, ver. 2 f., 
 and such, when διαλογισμοί are in ques- 
 tion, would be the world/)/ wise. 
 21 — 23.] A iraruiny to thetn in general, 
 not to boast themselves in human teachers. 
 21.] oSsTE, viz. seeing that this 
 world's wisdom is folly with God : or per- 
 haps as a more general inference from what 
 has gone before since ch. i., that as the con- 
 clusion there was, ύ καυχώμίνος, ΐν κνρί<ιΐ 
 κανχάσθω, — so now, having gone into the 
 matter more at length, he concludes, μηδιίς 
 καυχάπθω ίν άνθυώποις. This boasting 
 in men is explained in ch. iv. G to mean μή 
 ίίς νττ'ί[> Toh ίΐ'ός ψνπιονπθαι κατά του 
 ίτίμου.^ κανχάσθω after ως rt is a change 
 of constr. A somewhat similar change oc- 
 curred in the parallel ch. i. 31, 'iva .... 
 
 κηυχάαθω : but there, by the citation being 
 adduced in its existing form. ττάντα 
 
 γαρ vp,. Ιστ.] ' For such boasting is a 
 degradation to those who are heirs of all 
 things, &τϊά for whom all, whether minis- 
 ters, or events, or the world itself, are 
 working together .•' see Rom. viii. 28 ; and 
 iv. 13. 22, 23.] Specification of some 
 
 of the things incltided tinder πάντα : and 
 first of those teachers in whotn they were 
 disposed to boast, — in direct reference to 
 ch. i. 12. But having enumerated Paul, 
 Apollos, Cephas, he does not say UTt χρι- 
 στός, but adding the world itself and its 
 events and circumstances, he reiterates the 
 τταιτη υμών as if to mark the termination 
 of this category, and changing the form, 
 concludes with ΰμιΐς ot (not only one part 
 of you) χριστού' χριστός δι θιοϋ (see 
 below). -The expressions ζωή, θάνατος, 
 Ινίστώτα, μίλλυντα, have nothing to do 
 with the teachers, as Chrys., Theophyl., 
 Grot., — ('/ ζωή, φιισι, των διδασκάλων δι 
 νμας ίητη', 'ίνα ώφί\η••θί διδασκόμενοι' κ. 
 υ θάνατος αυτών δι νμας• ίιπέρ υμών γαρ 
 κη•δυ}•εύουσι κα'ι της υμετέρας σωτηρίας, 
 Theophyl., — and ^'praesentia, . . . linguarum 
 et sanationum dona .... futura, .... 
 rerum futurarum revelationes," Grot., — but 
 are perfectly general. Ινίστώτα is 
 
 things actually present, — see note on 
 2 Thess. ii. 2. 23.] On the change of 
 
 the possessives, see above : ~ Christ is not 
 yours, in the sense in which πάντα are, — 
 not made for and subserving you — but {δι) 
 you are His, — and even that does not reach 
 the Highest possession : He possesses not 
 you yor Himself; but {δί again) κκραλή 
 χριστού ο θίός, ch. xi. 3. — Christ Him- 
 self, the Incarnate God the Mediator,
 
 470 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 IV. 
 
 η ell. Hi. 15 IV. ' Οντως τιμάς °\ο•γι^,ΐσθω°° άνθρωπος, " ως^'νπηρίτας ABcn 
 nTiom. viw. 36. χρκ^του και ' οικορομοιις μυστήριων utov. ωοε Λο(- 
 
 oo = ch.xi.28. τΓΟί' " ^r/TitToi £1' τοις "^ ot/covo;itotc iva πιστος τις ^ ευρίθτ;. 
 *" feftl' ^'"' ^ "^ fwoi οε '^ ε/ς ελάχιστον εστιι^ ^ Ίνα υφ νμων ^ ανακοιΟω 
 42. XVI. Ι. 7J υπυ αννρωπιν7)ς τιμΐρας αΛΛ ουοε εμουτυΐ' ονα- 
 
 lPet.iv.10. rchii.7. .s Ciil. iv. Η. — Heb. νϋ. 8. xiii. 14. t ch. i. 16 rcff. 
 
 u = 2 Cor. xiii. 3. Scech.i.22. ν -= Matt. i. 18. 2 Cor. τ. 3. w liil., Rom. χίτ. 14. χ — Act3 
 
 XIX. 27 rctr. y constr.. Matt. x. 2.i. xviii. 6. ζ ch. ii. 14 rctl. a Acts xvli. 25 reif. 
 
 b -= cli. i. 8 refl. c — Arts xix. 2. ch. iii. 2. 
 
 Chap. IV. 1. νμας 109. — μυστήριου 116. — τον OtovTG. — 2. rec δ 5f λοιπόν {prob an 
 alteration of the nnvsital w^t : see note), with D^J most mss Orig Chr Thdrt Tlil Oeo 
 al: txt ABCD'FG 31-9. 672. 7I al lect 12 it ν syrr copt seth arm al lat-ff.— Xotrr. om 
 arm : jam it ν lat-ff.— ^fjrart (itacism.') ABCDEFG 23. 31-9. 48. 73. fiO. 109-14-l(;-22 
 lect 8 {mss in Oec) : txt vss and ff. — tvp. πιστ. D'(and D^)E. — tic fvp. FG : ης om 
 109. — 3. aft ίμοι Si ins και τούτο arm. — {«ς om 109. — αφ νμ. 238. — ημών Α. — ανα- 
 
 belongs ίο God, is subordinate to the 
 Father, see John xiv. 28 ; and xvii. pas- 
 sim. But this mediatorial subordination is 
 in no way inconsistent with His eternal 
 and co-equal Godhead : see note on Phil, 
 ii. (j — 9 ; and on ch. xv. 28, where the sub- 
 jection of all things to Christ, and His sub- 
 jection to the Father, are similarly set 
 forth. — There is a striking similarity in 
 the argument in this last verse to that 
 in our Lord's prohibition, Matt, xxiii. 
 8 — 10. — See Stanley's beautiful note. 
 IV. 1 — 5.] He shews 
 them the right view to takk of 
 Christian ministers (vv. 1, 2) ; but, 
 
 FOR HIS PART, REGARDS NOT MAn's 
 JUDGMENT OF HIM, NOR EVEN JUDGES 
 HIMSELF, BUT THE LoRD IS HIS JuDGE 
 
 (vv. 3, 4). Therefore let them also 
 
 SUSPEND their JUDGMENTS IILL THE 
 
 Lord's coming, when all shall be 
 MADE PLAIN. 1.] οΰτω?, emphatic, 
 
 preparatory to ώς, as in ch. iii. 15. 
 ονθρωτΓθ5, as E. V., ' a man,' in the most 
 general and indefinite sense, as ' man' in 
 German : not a Hebraism, nor =: 'έκαστος. 
 — The whole is opposed to καύχησις t>' 
 άνθρώποις : the ministers of Christ are 
 but subordinates to Him, and accountable 
 to God. ήμ'ΰς, ?iere, not, ' its ministers 
 
 l/enerally,' see below, ver. 6, but ' myself 
 and Apollos,^ as a sample of such. νηΓηρ. 
 
 χριστοΰ, see ch. iii. δ. 22, 23. But in 
 οίκον. μυστ. θβοΰ, we have a new figure 
 introduced. The Church, 1 Tim. iii. 15, is 
 the οίκ•ος• θ£οΰ — and those appointed to 
 minister in it are οικονόμοι, stewards and 
 dispensers of the property and stores of the 
 οικοδίσπότης. These last are the μνστί]οια, 
 hidden treasures, of God, — i. e. the riches 
 of his grace, now manifested in Christ, ch. 
 ii. 7• Rom. xvi. 25, which they announce 
 and distribute to all, having received them 
 from the Spirit for that purpose. " Ea 
 mysteria sunt incarnationis, passionis et 
 resurrectionis Christi, rcdemptionis nostrse, 
 
 vocationis gentium, et csetera quae com- 
 plectitur evangelica doctrina." Estius, who 
 also, as a Romanist, attempts to include the 
 sacraments among the μυστήρια in this 
 sense. The best refutation of this is given 
 by himself: " sed cum ipse Paulus dixerit 
 primo cajiite, Non misit me Christns bap- 
 tizare, sed evangelizare, rectius est ut 
 mysteria Dei intelligantur fidei nostrae dog- 
 mata." It may be doubted, whether, in the 
 N. T. sense oi μυστηιηη, the sacraments can 
 be in any way reckoned as such : for μνστ. 
 is a (usually divine) proceeding, once Aid- 
 den, but 710W revealed, or nov) hidden, and 
 to be revealed : under neither of which cate- 
 gories can the sacraments be classed. 
 2.] ' Moreover, here on earth (see var. 
 readd. and rett'. ωδί is emphatic, atid points 
 to what fallows, that though in the case of 
 stewards enquiry was necessarily made here 
 below, yet he, God's steward, awaited no 
 such enquiry ΰπο άνθιηοττίνης ι'ιμίηίΐς, but 
 one at the coming of the Lord. Lachmann, I 
 cannot but think somewhat strangely, places 
 ώδε at the end of ver. 1 : ο/κονό^ίους μύστη. 
 p'ltDv Οίυϋ ώδ(. Stanley takes ώ? f for ' in this 
 matter,' and supports the meaning by Rev. 
 xiii. 10. 18; xiv. 12; xvii. 9) enquiry is 
 made in the case of stewards (or, it is re- 
 quired in the case of stewards), in order 
 that (or that, tlie purport of the require- 
 ment expressed as its purpose) a man may 
 he found (proved to be) faithful ' (emph.), 
 3.] ' But to me (contrast to the 
 case of the stewards into whose faithfulness 
 enquiry is made ojre, here on earth) it is 
 (amounts to) very little (Meyer compares 
 ig χάριν τέλλίτοί. Find. ϋ1. i. 122, and 
 Theognis, 102, οίς τΰ κακΰν όοκ'ίον yiyvi- 
 ται ΐίς ayauov) that I he (the 'iva, jiere 
 and always, is more or less the conj. of 
 purpose. The constr. is a mixed one in 
 such clauses as this, compounded of ίλά- 
 ■χιστόν ιστιν άί'ακοιθϊΊναι, and (λαχίστου 
 αν πριαίμηΐ', Ίνα άνακρι^ο) judged (en- 
 quired into, as to my faithfulness) by you,
 
 1-6. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους λ. 
 
 471 
 
 κριΐ'ω 
 
 g 
 
 ουοίν yap ίμαυτω συνοιοα, αλλ ουκ 
 ικαιωμαι ο οε ανακξ^ίνων μΐ κυηιος ίστιν. 
 
 ίν ΤΟυΓΟ) (lA.tsv.2. XII. 
 ^ ^ ,, ' 12. xiv. fi 
 5 f /'.^_, only. Job 
 sxvii. Η. 
 
 ii.39. 
 
 ωςτε 
 
 UT} WOO καιοου τι κοινίτί, εως αν ελϋί? ο κυοιος, ος και Rom ν. 9. 
 φωτισίΐ τα ^κρυπτά τον σκότους και φανερώσει τάς ^"] "'• ιι• 
 
 ' ch. iii. 21. 
 
 έπαινος -νενι/σεται giiatt. viu.a 
 
 ' h=2Tiin. i. 
 
 lu only. Jos. 
 Anit. viii.5.3. 
 R.im.ii.16 
 
 βούλας των "" κσοδίωΐ', και τότε ο 
 εκαστω ° απο τον θεοΰ. 
 
 ΐαυτα οε, αοελψοι, μετεσ-^ηματισα εις εμαντον και ree. 
 
 k Rom. i. IB. iii. 21al.fr. 1 = Eph. i. 11 reff. m = Rom. ii. 29. 
 
 η ch. i. 3U refl. ο 2 Cor. xi. 13, 14, In. Phil. iii. 2i only t. Jos. Antt. vii. 10, δ. 
 
 κρίνω 80. — for vir. αι>θρ. ημ., όλως νπο ανθρώπων arm. — aWa D'. — 4. for ουκ, ovSe 
 lect 8. — for St, yan 93 lect 12. — at end add Θ(ος D d. — 5. προ om 93. — η om 17• 43. 
 52 V d e Syr ar-erp Ambrst Pelag Bed. — κριν(ται (itac?) A 3. 39. 48. 52. 7- al. — ος om 
 D'EFG it Aug (oft) : txt ABC ν Orig Augj &c. — τα κρυπτά τ. κηρ. 8'J (rec in marg). — 
 ίκαστω om 7. 110'-77 al Oec. — του bef βΐον om DE 91. 109. — 6. αδ. μου 2'A8.— μετα- 
 σχημάτισα FG' : and om tig FG. — απολλων AB' {απο πολλών Β•'): txt CDEFGJ 
 
 or by the day of man (in reference to wie 
 above, and contrast to tbe νμίρα κΐ'ρίου, to 
 which his appeal is presently made, ver. 5, 
 and of which, as testing the worth of the 
 labour of teachers, he spoke so fully ch. iii. 
 13 — 15. Jerome, Qusestiones ad AJgasiam, 
 10, numbers the e.xpr. among the ci/icisms 
 of the Ap. Estius, al., suppose it to be a 
 Hebraism, referring to Jer. xvii. Id, which 
 is irrelevant. All these are probably wrong, 
 and the expr. chosen purposely by the Ap. 
 Grot, compares ' diem dicere,' ' to cite to 
 trial;' to which Stanley adds the English 
 'days-man' for arbiter [see Job ix. 33], 
 and the Dutch ' dagh vaerden ' and ' daghen,' 
 to 'summon'),— nay, I judge not (hold not 
 an enquiry on : lit. ' brit neither do I,' &c. ) 
 myself: 4.] for I am conscious to 
 
 myself of no (official) delinquency (so 
 Plato, Apol. p. 21, οϊτε p'fya ούτε σμικρόν 
 ί,ννοιΐα ίμαντψ σοψΌς ων, — ib.. Rep. i. 
 Wetst., τψ Λί μηΐ(ΐ> ΐαντφ άόίκων ζνΐ'ίΐ- 
 δότι ήίίΐα ίλπ'ις άιι πύρίστι, and Hor., 
 Epist. i. 1. 61, ' Nil conscire sibi, nulla 
 pallescere culpa.' — The E. V., ' I know 
 nothing by myself,' was a phrase commonly 
 used in this acceptation at the time ; cf. Ps. 
 XV. 4, Com. Prayer Book version, ' He 
 that selteth not by himself,' i. e. is not wise 
 in his own conceit. ' I know no harm by 
 him,' is still a current expression in the 
 midland counties. See Deut. xxvii. 10. 
 Ezek. xxii. 7. in E. V. So Donne, Serm. 
 Ivii., " If thine own spirit, thine own con- 
 science, accuse thee of nothing, is all well .' 
 why, I know nothing by myself, yet am I 
 not thereby justifed." This meaning of 
 'by' does not appear in our ordinary dic- 
 tionaries) but I am not hereby justified 
 (i. e. it is not this circnmstauce which clears 
 me of blame — this does not decide the 
 matter. There can be no reference [as 
 Meyer] to forensic justification here, by 
 the verj' conditions of the context : for he 
 is speaking of that μισθός of the teacher. 
 
 which may be lost, and yet personal salva- 
 tion be attained, see ch. iii. 15); but he 
 that judges (holds an enquiry on) me, is 
 the Lord ' (Christ, the judge). 5.] 
 
 ' Therefore (because the Lord is the sole 
 infallible dijudicator) decide nothing (con- 
 cerning us, of merit or demerit) before the 
 time, until the Lord shall have come 
 (explains προ κηιρ.), who shall also {και, 
 inter alia ,• as part of the proceedings of 
 that Day) bring to light (throw light on) 
 the hidden things of darkness (general — 
 all things which are hidden in darkness), 
 and shall make manifest the counsels of 
 men's hearts (then first shewing, what 
 your teachers really are, in heart) and then 
 shall the (fitting) praise accrue to each 
 from God.' — eiraivos is not a vox media, 
 praise or blame, as the case may be, but 
 strictly praise. Theophyl., Grot., Billr., 
 Riick., Olsh., suppose the word to be used 
 euphemistically, •' unde et contrarium datur 
 intelligi, sed mavultcii^ij/utr," Grot. : Calv., 
 Meyer, al., think that he speaks without 
 reference to those who will obtain no praise : 
 " haec vox ex bonse conscientiie fiducia nas- 
 citur." Calv. But I agree with De Wette, 
 in thinking that he refers to κανχασΟαι iv 
 άιΌρώπυις : — they, their various parties, 
 gave exaggerated praise to certain teach- 
 ers : let them wait till the day when the 
 fining praise (be it what it may) will be 
 adjudged to each from God ; Christ as the 
 Judge being the ώηισμίνος νπο του θίον 
 κριτής, Acts χ. 42, and so His sentences 
 being άπΰ θιοϋ. See also Acts xvii. 31, 
 and Rom. ii. l(i, κοινιΐ ό θιος τα κρυπτά 
 των ανθρώπων, . . . Οιά 'ίηαοϋ χριστού. 
 6 — 13.] He explains to them 
 (ver. 6) THAT the mention hitherto 
 OF HIMSELF AND AroLi.os (and by ]iarity 
 of reasoning, of Cephas and of Christ, in ch. 
 
 i. li) HAS A MORE GENERAL DESIGN, VIZ. 
 TO ABSTRACT THEM FROM ALL PARTY 
 SPIRIT AND pride: AVHICH PRIDE HE
 
 472 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 IV. 
 
 ρ = Jiilin χϋί. 
 
 3?>. Gen.xlii 
 
 33. 
 q —Mark ix. 
 
 23 reft'. 
 qq= ch. X. 13 
 
 2 Cor. xii. (1. 
 r 1 The.-^s. V. U 
 ! {indie, aft 
 
 ΑτΓολλω di υμάς, Ίνα 
 
 ίν ημιν μ 
 ίΐς υπίξ> 
 
 ^0 
 
 τον 
 
 •γε•γξ)απτυι, ινα μη 
 
 ' του ίτίξ)ηυ. ' τις •γαξ) σε " όιακρίνί 
 
 Gal iv. 17.) νν. 18, li). ch. v. 2. vili. 1. xiii. 4. Col. ii. 18 only f. 
 
 ητζ 
 εΐ'ος 
 
 ■ο μη ^ υπίρ α 
 
 φναίουσθί κατά 
 
 οε f^fiC ο ουκ 
 
 t Rom. ii. 1 refl". 
 u"= here only. SeeAclsxv. H. 
 
 mss (appy) if. — fi' νμιν D' 2'Λ. 115 al d- e ν (ms) copt syr ChVj (not h 1) Antioch Bed. — 
 bef /i>/ om TO FG 2. — rec. ϊίττίρ ο, with DEFGJ all g (supra quam de ν : other vss uncert) 
 Chr Thdrt al : txt ABC .'Π (al.') copt syr Ath Cyr Chr (ms). {Meyer and De W. think 
 that a has been a corrn to suit ranTci preceding. But I can hardly think this pro- 
 bable : is it not more likely that in a proverbial exprn the siny seemed most apfiropriate, 
 and thus a has been corrd to υ ?). — rec aft -γιγραπτ. add φρηιηη' (supplementary addn), 
 with C (appy) D^E^J all vss Chr Thdrt {φυσωνσθαι Ath) al : om ABD'E'FG 46 al it ν 
 lat-ff.— iuj om DE.— for vvfo, κατά FG.— bef φνσ. ins μη ?. 44. 6!). 8ί). 91. 106-13-22- 
 23 all lectt 13. 14 al Chr, Dam.— ^(((τιουσθαι DEFG 73. 116 (A uncert) (fi'fi νπϊρ τοΰ 
 ίί'ός ^υσιοϋσθαι Thdrt) : ψυσιωσθε 44 Chr-ms. — 7. CiciKptvtl 116. — έλαβες 1st to 2nd 
 
 THEN BLAMES, AND PUTS TO SHAME BY been Written in this Epistle, as Luth., 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 DEPICTING, AS A CONTRAST, THE LOW 
 AND AFFLICTED STATU OF THE ApP. 
 
 THEMSELVES. 6.] ' But (transeuntis : 
 
 he comes to the conclusion of what he has 
 to say on their party divisions) these things 
 (De Wette, Meyer, al., limit ταντα to what 
 has been said since ch. iii. 5. But there 
 surely is no reason for this. The Ap.'s 
 meaning here must on all hands be acknow- 
 ledged to be, ' I have taken our two names 
 as samples, that you may not attach your- 
 selves to and be proud of any party leaders, 
 one against another.' And if these two 
 names which had been last mentioned, why 
 not analogously, those four which he had 
 also alleged in ch. i. 12 ? There can be no 
 reason against this, except the determination 
 of the Germans to regard their Paulus-par- 
 thei, and ApoUos-parthei, and Petrus par- 
 thei, and Christus-partliei, as historical facts, 
 and consequent unwillingness to part with 
 them here, where the Ap. himself by im- 
 plication repudiates them as such) I trans- 
 ferred (the epistolary aorist) to myself and 
 Apollos (i. e. when I might have set them 
 before you generally and in the abstract as 
 applying to all teachers, I have preferred 
 doing so by taking two samples, and trans- 
 ferring to them what was true of the whole. 
 This is far more probable than the expl. of 
 Chrys., al., tiiat he put in his own name 
 and that of Apollos instead of those of the 
 real leaders of sects, concealing them on 
 purpose. On μίτασχ., see reff. and cf. 
 Plato, Legg. X. p. 903, μίτασχηματίζων 
 τά ττάντα, o'mv ΐκ πιΐίΐός vCwp, — and p. 
 906, TdVTO TO ρημη ρεπηχηματισμίνον, 
 Meyer) on your account, that ye by us 
 (as your example : by having our true office 
 and standing set before you) might learn 
 this, " Not above those things which are 
 written " (i. e. not to exceed in your esti- 
 mate of yourselves and us, the standard of 
 Scripture, — which had been already in part 
 shewn to them in the citations ch. i. 19. 31 ; 
 iii. 19. To refer ytypanTOL to what has 
 
 Calov., Calv. (altern.), is quite inadmissible, 
 for, as Grot, remarks, ^' γέγραπται in his 
 libris semper ad libros Veteris Testamenti 
 refertur." But he (and Olsh.) refer the 
 words to Deut. xvii. 20, — whereas it is far 
 better to give them a perfectly general refer- 
 ence. Chrys., Theodoret, and Theophyl. 
 refer it to tvords of our Lord in the N. T., 
 such as Matt. vii. 1.3; xxiii. 12. Mark x. 
 43, 44, but these could not be indicated by 
 γέγρατΓται, — cf. ch. vii. 10 and note. — 
 The ellipsis, as here, of the verb in prohibi- 
 tory clauses with μή, is common enough : 
 thus, Aristoph. Vesp. 1179, μη ί'οί ye 
 μύθους. Soph. Antig. 577, /") τριβας ΐτι, 
 άλλα I'iv κομίζίτ' ίϊσω. Demosth. Phil. i. 
 p. 46, μή μοι μνρίονς μη^ϊ διςμνρίονς Ef- 
 νονς. Hartung, Partikellehre ii. 153, where 
 see more exx.) that ye may not one on 
 behalf of another be puiFed up against a 
 third ' (i. e. ' that you may not adhere toge- 
 ther in parties to the detriment or dispa- 
 ragement of a neighbour who is attached to 
 a difierent party ' ). — There is a grammatical 
 difficulty here, the occurrence of 'ίνα with 
 an indie, pres. This is variously explained. 
 See Winer, § 42, b. 1. d. Some suppose 
 that Paul has committed a philological 
 error in the formation of the subjunctive, 
 and written the indie, for it. It is at least 
 remarkable, that the other instance. Gal. iv. 
 17, 'ίνα αντονς ζ7]λοϋτί, is also in the case 
 of a contracted syllable in on, — so that we 
 might almost suppose that there was some 
 provincial usage of forming the subj. of con- 
 tracted verbs in οω, which our Ap. followed. 
 At all events it is better to suppose a sole- 
 cism or peculiar usage, than with Meyer to 
 give I'i'o a local sense, — ' ichere,' i. e. ' in 
 which case ye are not (pres. for the future) 
 puffed up' — i. e. if you keep to the Scrip- 
 ture measure ; the double 'ίνα of the pur- 
 pose being, as he himself observes, accord- 
 ing to Paul's usage, Rom. vii. 13. Gal. iii. 
 14; iv. 5, al., and being here absolutely 
 demanded by the sense. 7.] ' For
 
 7-9. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 473 
 
 ΐλαβίς ; ίΐ οε και έλαβες, τί ' 
 
 8 " t^ \ν ' • \ ν ς\ 
 
 Ί}οη κίκυοίσμίΐΌΐ εστε, 7)or} 
 
 y 
 
 καυχάσαι ως μι) λαβών ', 
 εττΛουτί^σατε, -^^ωρις τιμών 
 
 (βασιΧίυσατξ. καΐ ^ υφίΧόν γε ^ εβασιλευσατ; 
 ■ημίΐς νμιν "" συμβασιΧίνσωμίν. ^ δοκω γαρ 
 
 ϊ7μας τους αττοστυλους έσχατους '^ αττεόείξεν ώς 
 τιους, υπ '^ θίατρον ζ-γίΐη]βημίν τω κοσμώ και ayyeXoig 
 
 ch. i. 31 refr. 
 ι ΛοίΛ sxvii. 
 ■Λ» only. 
 Dent. sxxi. 
 
 '■>υ. 
 
 , IVa και x = 2ror.viii. 
 
 ο σεος 
 ετΓίθανα- 
 
 ?. (Luke 
 Η. 21.) 
 ' Rom 
 
 ch. ΧΓ. 25. 
 .10. 
 
 z2Cor. xi. 1. Gal. v. 12. Rev. iii. IS 
 b ch. iii. 18 rcff. c Acts i 
 
 d here only t. Dion. Hal. vii. 35. 
 
 XX. 4, 6. 
 
 xxii. 5. 
 
 only. Job xiv. 13. Ps. cxriii. 5. a 2 Tim. li. 12 only +. 
 
 i. 22. XXV. 7. 2 Thes.s. ii. 4 only. Xen. Hell.iv. 4, 8 t. 1 Mace. x. 34. 
 e = here only. Acts xix. 29, 31 only t. 
 
 om 93. — μη orn 46. — 8. iSov (twice) slav (appy). — (βασ. 1st to 2nd om 44. — ωφιλον 
 D^EJ. — ye om D'FG. — σνν νμιν D' : νμ. om (Ε?) 115. — 9. rec aft Ιοκω yap, ins OTt 
 {supplementary), with D'EJ al vss Chr Thdrt al Ambr al : but om ABCD'FG 4G. 1 IG al 
 it am deiuid tol Clem Orig Cyr Dam Tert Thl Ambrst. — avtcti^ev 77• — hiiic mundo d e 
 (reason why this puffing up should he 
 
 up 
 avoided) who separates thee (distinguishes 
 thee from others ? meaning, that a'l such 
 conceits of pre-eminence are unfounded. 
 That pre-eminence, and not merely distinc- 
 tion [Meyer], is meant, is evident from what 
 follows) ? — And {ci connects inten-ogative 
 clauses, as Od. a. 220, τ-ις Sa'ic, τις St 
 'όμιλος οδ' ίπλετο ; and II. £. 704, tt'Oa 
 τίνα -ίτοώτυν, τιΐ'η c' ν^ττατον ίζίνάριζ(ΐ' ; 
 See Hartung, Partikellehre, i. l(i!)) what 
 hast thou whicli thou receivedst not 
 Q from God' — not, 'from me as thy father 
 in the faith') ? but if (which I concede ; — 
 GTiycti Η it Kai ήμίν αντιης flaw, άλλα 
 μά Δι' οϋχ ίπττοις ; Xen. Cyr. vi. 1. 14. 
 Hartung, i. 140) thou receivedst it,' &c. 
 — He speaks not only to the leaders, but to 
 the members of parties, — wlio imagined 
 themselves superior to those of other par- 
 ties, — as if all, for every good thing, were 
 not dependent on God, the Giver. 
 8.] The admonition becomes ironical : 'You 
 behave as if the trial were past, and the goal 
 gained ; as if hunger and thirst after righte- 
 ousness were already filled, and the kingdom 
 already brought in.' κωμφδιον αύτονς 
 iXtytv ο'ύτω ταχΐως προς το τ^Χος ίψαά- 
 σατί, οτΓίο άίννατον yv γίνίσθαι δια τον 
 καιρόν. Chrys. The emphases are on fjSt) 
 in the two first clauses, and χωρίς ημών in 
 the third. The three verbs form a climax. 
 Any interp. which stops short of the full 
 meaning of the words as applied to the 
 triumphant final state (so Grot., Est., Cal- 
 vin, Wetst., al., interpreting them of kriotv- 
 ledge, of secw-ity, of the lordship oj one sect 
 over another), misses the force of the irony, 
 and the meaidng of the latter part of the 
 ver. χωρι? ημών] ' because we, as 
 
 your fathers in Christ, have ever looked 
 forward to present yon, as our glory and 
 joy, in that day.' - There is an exquisite 
 delicacy of irony, which Chrys. has well 
 caught : ττολλ)} ϊμΦαπις ϊντανΟα και προς 
 τους διδασκάλοΐ'ς κ. προς τιινς μαθητάς. 
 και το άσιινίίίητυν Of αϋτων δίίκνυται κ. 
 το σφόδρα ύνόητον. ο' yap λίγκ, τοντό 
 
 εστίν tv μεν τοις τονοις φησιν είναι 
 τταΐ'τα κοινά και ιιμίν, κ. νμιν tv δε τοϊς 
 ίπάθλοις κ. τοΙς στεψάνοις νμείς ττρωτοι, 
 — The latter part of the verse is said bond 
 fde and with solemnity : ' And I would 
 indeed {γε strengthens the wish; so i) δ' 
 ίΐλεθ' . . . ως yt μήποτ' ωφίλ^ν λαβείν . . . 
 Μι-νίλαον. Eur. Iph. Aul. 70. Hartung, 
 i. 373.— οφ£λον is used in LXX and N. T. 
 as a particle, with the indie. : also with 
 optative. See, for both, retf.) that ye did 
 reign (that the kingdom of the Lord was 
 actually come, and ye reigning with Him) 
 that we also might {pres. because the 
 wish sets the state as present before him) 
 be reigning together with you ' (that we, 
 though deposed from our proper place, 
 might at least be vouchsafed a humble 
 share in your kingly glory). 9.] ' For 
 
 (and there is abundant reason for this wish 
 in our present afflicted state) I think, — 
 Gcd set :orth (before the eyes of the world, 
 — the similitude is in Οέατροί' following) 
 us the Apostles (meaning all the App., 
 principally himself and ApoUos) last (the 
 rendering of Erasm., Calv., Beza, al., us 
 trho were latt called to be App., q. d. 
 τοις άτΓ. τονς εσχ , or τονς εσχ. άποστ., 
 — is ungrammatical.— έσχάτουβ, last and 
 vilest : not, ' respectu priorum,' last, as ike 
 prophets tvere before us, as Corn, a Lap., 
 and in part, Bengel) as persons condemned 
 to death (ώς κατάδικους, Chrys. — Tertul- 
 lian seems to define the meaning too closely 
 when, De Pudic. 14, he interprets it ' ve- 
 luti bestiarios.' Dion. Hal. vii. 35, says 
 of the Tarpeian rock, υϋεν αύτοΊς ϊθος 
 βάλλιιΐ' Toi'c έ—ιθαι<ιτίονς)- — for we are 
 become a spectacle {θίητρον — θ άμα : so 
 Achilles Tatius,i. p. 55 [Kypke],an(l βίατρα 
 ττοιητών, yEschines Dial. Socr. iii. 20 : — see 
 θίατριζόμενοι, Heb. x. 33) to the world, as 
 well to angels {good angels•: ayytXi ι absol., 
 never either includes, or signifies, bad an- 
 gels) as to men' {κόσμψ, being afterwards 
 specialized into angels and men). 
 10.] Again, the bitterest irony : ' how dif- 
 ferent our lot from your:, ! Ilow are you
 
 474 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 IV. 
 
 και ανθρωτΓοις. 
 
 10 ' ■* f ^ 
 
 ϊ]/ΐιε(ς μωροί 
 
 φρόνιμοι εν "^ριστω' η^εις ασθεΐ'ίΐς, νμίΐς δε 
 
 ^ιά χριστοί', νμΒίς δε 
 
 f 
 
 εΐ'οοςοι, ηjuε^ς όε άτιμοι, 
 ττίΐνωμ^ν και ^ιφωμίν και 
 
 lay^vpoi 
 άχρι TTjc άρτι ώρας 
 -γυμνιτενομίν και 
 
 kVui"^' ^αφι^όμίθα και ^ αστατοϋμ^ν, ^ κα\ '^ κοπιωμίν ^ tpyato- 
 ^ίευοι ταις ιο'ιαις χερσιν" ^ Χοιοορουμίΐ'οι ' εύλογυυ/ιεν, 
 ανεγομεΟα, ''" ους^ί7/»ου|αεΐΌΐ '^ τταρακαΧοΐι- 
 
 ^ιωκομίνοι 
 
 5 
 
 Εχομ£ 
 
 f ch. i. 25 reff. 
 
 (seeii.3.) 
 g Rom. xi. 25 
 
 al. iron., 
 
 2 Cor. xi. 1!). 
 h Luke vii. 2.1. „,,,,„ 
 
 xiii. 17. Eph. ^μ^'^^ 
 
 V. 27 only. < ,„ 
 
 1 Kings ix. G Kai 
 al. 
 
 iMal 
 
 Ma 
 
 only. I 
 
 )iii. : 
 kRora viii. 22. _ 
 
 2 Cor. iii. 14. " S, 
 Gal.iv. 2al. *^' 
 
 m'Rom!"xu.2o ii£v* ώς ^ 7Γ£ρικαβάοματα του κόσμου Β•γ(νηΟημεν, τταν- 
 
 nbcreonlyt. ο Malt. xxvi. 67. [ Mk. 2 Cor. xii. 7. 1 Pft. ii. 20 only t. ρ here only t. q Rom. 
 
 xvi.fireff. r = Rom. iv. 4 reft', τ. χ.. 1 Thess. iv. 11. s Acts xxiii. 4 reft. t = Matt. v. 44. 
 
 η = Matt. V. 10, 11 al. ν absol., 2 Cor. xi. 4. (Acts xviii. 14 reft.) w here only t. 1 Mace. vii. 41. 
 
 x= Luke iii. 18. Kom. xii. 8. 2 Cor. r. 20. 2Tini. iv. 2 al. y here only. Prov. xxi. 18. 
 
 tol Tertj Ambr Gaud Ambrst. — 10. ημάς ουν slav-ed. — νμ. (?£ fvCaK. 48. — 11. rec γνμ- 
 νητίυομ(ΐ> (see note), with J al ft" (in present edd) : txt ABCDEFG all (and the complut 
 cdd). — 12. λοιίορ. και tv\. and ΰιωκ. και ηΐ'εχ- FG. — 13. rec βλασφ. {snljslilutinn of more 
 usual word), with B(e sil)DEFGJ all Origj Chr Thdrt al : txt AC 17. 46 Cleni Origj 
 Eus Cyr Dam. — ως πίοικαθαρμυτα D' : ως ττίρει (-οι G) καθάρματα G 37. 123 al 
 lectt 4. 13. 17• 18 al : ωςπιρ καθ. 43 al. — τω κοσμώ lect 8 : hujus rmindi d e ν Tert Ambr 
 
 to be envied — we, to be pitied ! ' — There is press the strict meaning. άστατ.] 
 
 τοντίστιν, ίλαιπ'όμίθα, φ(ύγομ(ν. Theo- 
 phj'l. 12.] As testimonies to Paul's 
 
 working with his own hands, see Acts 
 xviii. 3; XX. 34 ; ch. ix. 6. 1 Thess. ii. 9. 
 2 Thess. iii. 8. That the other Apostles 
 did the same, need not necessarily be in- 
 ferred from this passage, for he may be 
 describing the state of all by himself as 
 a sample : but it is conceivable, and 
 indeed probable, that they did. 
 
 λοιδ κ.Γ.λ.] ' So far are we from 
 
 vindicating to ourselves places of earthly 
 honour and distinction, that we tamely 
 submit to reproach, persecution, and evil 
 repute ; — nay, we return blessing, and pa- 
 tience, and soft words.' 13.] -ιταρακ., 
 όί'Τί τον, ττρ^οτίροις Χόγοις κ. μαλακτικοΊς 
 άμιφόμιθα. Theophyl. ώς περικαθάρ- 
 fiara] Α climax of disgrace and contempt, 
 summing vip tlie foregoing particulars. 'We 
 are become as it were the refuse of the 
 world.' TTtpiK. from ττίρικαθαΊρω, — that 
 which is removed by a thorough purifica- 
 tion, the offal or refuse. So Ammonius (in 
 Wetst.) : καθάρματα, τά μετά το καθαρ- 
 ΘΓμ'αι άττορρηττόμίνα: — Theophylact.orai' 
 ρυπαρόΐ' τι άττοσπογγίσγ τις, ττίρικάθαρμα 
 XtyfTal το άποσττόγγισμα ίΚίΊιυί': and 
 similarly Oecum. Wetst. gives many exx. 
 of the metaphorical usage of the term 
 κάθαρμα as a reproach, from Demosth., 
 Aristoph., Lucian, al., and of pnrgamen- 
 tnm, in Latin, ττιρικαθάυματα is found in 
 Arrian, Epict. iii. 22, ΙΙρίαμος, ο vvv ytr- 
 ΐ'ήσας ττιρικηθάρμητα. — But Luther and 
 very many Comm. suppose the word to 
 imply piacula, as Schol., Aristoph., Plut., 
 454 (Wetst.), καθάρματα tXiyoi'TO ot ΐπί 
 καθάρσει Χυιμον τιΐ'ος τ) τη•ος ΐτιρας 
 νόαου θοόμίνοι τοΙς θίυϊς, τοϋτο Si το (θος 
 Kci τταρά 'Ρωμαίας ίπικράτησι. Meyer 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 a distinction in οιά χριστύν and tv χριητίο 
 — q. d. ' We are foolish for Christ's sake 
 (on account of Christ, — our connexion with 
 Him does nothing but reduce us to be fools), 
 whereas you are φρόνιμοι ίν χριστώ,' 
 have entered into full i)articipation of Him, 
 and grown up to be wise, subtle Chris- 
 tians.— οσΓ£νεΐς— Ισχυροί are both to be 
 understood ^enera/Zy .• the άσθίναα is not 
 here that of persecn/ion, but that of ch. ii. 
 2 : the strength is the high bearing of the 
 Corr. — ' Ye are glorious (in high repute, 
 party leaders and party men, highly hon- 
 oured and looked up to) whereas we are 
 unhonoured.' Then άτιμυι leads him to 
 enlarge on the disgrace and contempt which 
 the App. met with at the hands of the 
 world. 11 — 13.] He enters into the 
 
 particulars of this state of affliction, tvhich 
 was not a thing past, but enduring to the 
 present moment. 11.] άχρι τ. άρτι ώρας 
 
 is evidently not to be taken strictly as in- 
 dicative of the situation of Paul at the time 
 of writing the Ep., but as generally de- 
 scribing the kind of life to which, then and 
 always, he and the other App. were ex- 
 posed : oh 7Γ«λσιά διηγοΐιμαι πράγματα, 
 άΧΧ άττίρ και 6 παρών μοι καιρϋς μαρ- 
 τυρεί. Chrys. See, on the subject-matter, 
 2 Cor. xi. 23-27. γυμνιτ.] ' are in 
 
 want of sufficient clothing:' cf. iv 4>νχη 
 κ. γνμνότητι, 2 Cor. xi. 27• Meyer (after 
 Fritzsche) believes γνμνιηίιομίν to be a 
 mistake in writing the word, of very ancient 
 date: but surely we are not justified, in 
 such a conventional matter as the form of 
 writing a word, to desert the unanimous 
 testimony of the oldest MSS. And we have 
 the forms γυμιίτης, and γυμι-ιτις : wliy 
 not then yi'/ii'iTfi'ioj .' κολαφ.] 'are 
 
 buffeted' — see reff., there is no need to
 
 10—17. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 475 
 
 ουκ ίντοίττων νμας ynaaio zhereoniyt. 
 
 α-γαπητα "νουθετώ. ful•' * ΐ;i^4'"^τit 
 
 αλλ' 
 
 των ^ περίφημα εως άρτι. 
 Τίΐυτα, αλλ ως• τέκνα μου 
 
 yan μυοιους τταίοαγωγους εχητε ει^ νριστω 
 ΤΓολλους πατΕοας* εν -yap -χριστώ Ιησοΰ δια 
 
 -y£λtoυ ίγω υμάς ε-γίννησα. ^ ΤΓαξ>ακα\ΰ) υυν υμάς, dGai:iii.24, 
 
 μιμηται μου ■γινεσυε. 
 
 b 
 
 του 
 οΰν 
 
 nly. 
 οι/ bRom. i. 7 
 reft. 
 FD/TV- "= Acts XX. 31 
 
 μιμηται μου -^ινεσυε 
 ος εστίν μου τεκνον 
 
 σθε. ' ^ια τοϋτο επεμφα ύμίν Τιμόθεον, "^h^x^a"'^' 
 
 2 Cor. 
 
 1 Mace. ii. 
 g ver. 13. 
 
 α•γαττητον και πιστον εν κυριω, ος 
 
 1Ρ, 20. f = Philem. 10. 
 
 h ch. xi. 1. Eph.T. 1. 1 Tliess. i. Ii. ii. 14. Heb. vi. 12 onlyt. 
 
 Ambrst al: aft fyevtjG., add παντι τω κοσμώ arm. — 14. νονθίτωΐ> AC 10. 17. 31 al lect 
 16 Thl (text).— 15. for μυυ., πολλονς 17 lect 12 Chr. —ιηοου om Β Clem al Pac. — fyw 
 om lect 8. — 16. for ovv, £( D'FG g. — aft yiviaHf, add καθώς καγω (or (-/ω) χοιστον 
 10. 31. "Ϊ'Λ. 118 ν (not am demid al) arm (not ed Zohrab) al Mac Ath, Chr Ambr, Pel 
 Bed. — 17. Tov-o αυτό A 17• 46.80. 116 al. — ίτημφαν 48. — rec τ^κν. μον (corrn to 
 more imtal order), with DEFGJ all vss Thdrt Thl Oec lat-ff: txt ABC I7. 37. 46. 116 
 
 al arm Chr Dam. — πιστός FG : και -πιστον om lect 12. — for κ-υριω, χριστώ Α. 
 
 ■weU remarks that "κ^ρικα θ άρματα will more in number than he could wish, — in- 
 hardly bear this meaning, and that πίρί- eluding among them doubtless the false and 
 
 φημα in the sing, would not suit it. [Still 
 we may remark, with Stanley, that "rrcpi,- 
 κάθαρμα is so used in ref. Prov., and ττίρι- 
 ψημα in ref. Tobit : and that Suidas says, 
 
 7Γεοιψί;μα , οΐιτως ίπί\(•/ον τφ κατ' 
 
 iviavTuv σιη'ίχοντι των κακών πιριφημα 
 ημών γενον ήτοι, σωτ7ΐρια κα'ι ά—ολντρω- 
 σις" καϊ οντ<•ις ίν(βη\ον tij θαλασσή ώς- 
 ave'i τφ Ώοσ(ιδώνι βνσιαν άπoτίvvv^'T^L■.'] 
 •π•£ριψ.] much the same as πίρικαθάρ- 
 ματα, — but the expression is more contemp- 
 tuous ; — the individual πίρικαθάρματα are 
 generalized into one πίρίφημα, the τον 
 κόσμοι; is even further extended to πάντων, 
 — see ch. iii. 22. 14 — 21.] Conclu- 
 sion' OF THIS FART OF THE EpiSl LE : 
 
 IN WHAT SPIRIT HE HAS WRITTEN THESE 
 WORDS OF BLAME : VIZ. IN A SPIRIT OF 
 ADMONITION, AS THEIR FATHER IN THE 
 FAITH, WHOM THEY OUGHT TO IMITATE. 
 To THIS END HE SENT TiMOTHY TO RE- 
 MIND THEM OF HIS WAY'S OF TEACH- 
 ING, WOULD SOON, HOWEVER, COME 
 
 HIMSELF, IN MILDNESS, OR TO PUNISH, 
 
 AS THE CASE MIGHT HEQUIRE. 
 
 14. οΐικ Ιντρεττων] ' not as one who shames 
 you,' see ref}'., and ch. \i. 5 ; xv. 34, — and 
 for the force of the participle, ch. ii. 1. 
 νουθίτώ contrasts with £ντρ£•7Γων 
 γράψω, the constr. being purposely adopted, 
 to set in a more vivid light the paternal in- 
 tention : — Ί am not writing these things 
 (vv.8— 13) as shaming you, — but I am ad- 
 monishing you as my beloved children.' 
 15.] justificatioii of theexpr. τΐκνα μυν. 
 μύριους, the greatest possiljle number 
 —see ch. xiv. 1 i). τταιδαγ.] He was their 
 
 sp. father: those who followed, ApoUos 
 included, were but tutors, having the care 
 and education of the children, but not the 
 rights, as they could not have the peculiar 
 affection of the father. He evidently shews 
 by μνρίονς, that these παιία'/ω^οί were 
 
 party teachers : but to refer the word only 
 to them and their despotic leading (as 
 Beza, Calvin, al., and De Wette), or to 
 confine its meaning to the stricter sense of 
 πaιlayo>y6c, the slave tvho led the child to 
 school, is not here borne out by the facts. 
 See ref. and note : and for the wider sense 
 of TTai^ny., examples in Wetst. — άλλ' οΰ 
 brings out the contrast strongly, giving 
 almost the sense of ' at non ideo ,•' so 
 .iEsch. in Ctes. § 155, κα'ι yap tc'tv αυτά 
 Cι(ζιy τά ΐκ τοϋ -ψηφίσματος πρυςτάγματα, 
 άλλ' οΰ Toy' ίκ της άληθίιας αίσχοον σι- 
 ωπηθί)σίται. See Hartung, Partikellehre, 
 ii. 40. €v γαρ χρ.] ' For in Christ 
 
 Jesus (as the spiritual element in which 
 the begetting took place : so commonly tv 
 χριστψ, applied to relations of life, see ver. 
 17, bis, — not to be joined as De W. with 
 ίγώ, q. d. iyω yap tr χ. Ίι^σον δ. τ. tv. 
 ϊψ. ίγίννιισα) by means of the gospel (the 
 preached word being the instrument) I 
 (emphatic) begot you' (there is also an 
 emph. on ΰμας, as coining before the verb, 
 q. d. in t/oitr case, I it was who begot you). 
 16.] oiv, because I am your father. 
 μιμηται, not only, nor perhaps chiefly, in 
 the things _;?<ίί mentioned, vv. 9 — 13, — but 
 as ver. 17, in a'l οίοι μον αϊ tv χρ., my man- 
 ner oflfe and teaching. See reff. 
 17.] δια τοΰτο,- — in order that you may the 
 better imitate me by being put in mind of 
 my ways and teaching : not, as Chrys., 
 Theophl., al., ίπκδή ώς παιΐων κί)δομαι, 
 καΐ ώς ytytvvι|κώς, — wliich would make 
 ver. 16 a very harsh j)arenthesis, and destroy 
 the force of what follows. — On the /'«οΛ see 
 Prolegg. TCKvov] see 1 Tim. i. Ί. 18. 
 
 2 Tim. i. 2. Meyer remark.*, that by the 
 strict use of the word τίκιον in this jias- 
 sage (vv. 14, 15) we have a certain proof 
 that Timothy was converted by Paul : see 
 Acts xiv. 6, 7 ancl note. " The phrase seems
 
 476 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 IV. 18—21. 
 
 iM^rksi.si. vucig oi'oui'ijCTit TOQ ocovQ uov TQQ iv Ύοιστω, κοθωο ABCD 
 
 ΙτΙ'ιηΤ'β πανταχού εν Traay εκκλησία όιόασκω. ως μΐ] ff>Yo- 
 
 only. cen. jUEVOu 0£ μοΌ wooQ νμας εψυσιωυησαν τίνες ελευ- 
 
 viii. 1 vat. _^ , ^,«,^r/ Ο \ f ' 
 
 '^ .s°ee Acu'xu'i' ^^i"'" °^ τονεως προς νμας, εαν ο κυ^^ιος υελησ^, και 
 
 i.4cisxvii 30 "γνωσομαι ου τυν Aoyov των πεψυσιωμενων, άλλα την 
 
 mver.fireft. oui'ouii'* ου yao εν λυ'•/ω η Οασιλεια τον νέον, 
 
 o-Rom.xiv. αλλ' '^ £y ^ννάμει. ^ τί θέλετε; '' εΐ' "^ ράβδω έλθω ττ^οός 
 
 ει; 
 
 q 
 
 i.Rom.i.4 νμας, η ^ εν α•γαπ\ι, πνενματι τε ιτραντητος ', 
 
 Eph. 
 
 8. ui. 12. iv. 1Γι, 17 al. 
 t i Cor.x. 1. 
 
 qrlia. S.24. q = 2 Cor. i 
 
 = Rrv ii. 27 al. .s 
 
 21. iii. 13. 1 Pft. iii. l.'i only. Ps. xlii . 4. 
 
 αναμιμνησει (sic) A. — for χριστώ, χρ. ιησον CD^ I7. 37-9• 4G all ν all Chr Dam lat-ff : 
 Kvptto ιησ. D'FG d : Kvptw e : t.xt AB(e sil)DEJ all am demid (rass al) Syr al Tlidrt 
 Thl Oec. — 18. dt om FG it ν copt al lat -ίΤ.—νμας to νμης below om lOi). — 19. ταχ^ίως 
 om seth: ττρ. 171. om arm : πρ. νμ. ταχ. 73 v-ed. — OfXijfrfi J 48 (al.') : (πιτρεττη 177• — ου 
 om D' d'. — λογ. ηυτυη' FG. — rov ττίφυσιωμΐνον 3 3. 37- 40'-!). 57. 10!)-1<• lectt 7- 1:2 Grig 
 (not Clem Chr Thdrt &c).- 20. for του Θ., των ovpavwr 10!).— «λλα FG.— 21. πως ουν 
 θίλ. arm. — πρ. νμ. f\9u> 10!). — rec πραοτ. with DEFGJ &c many gr-ff: txt AB(C .') 
 lect 12( al?). — αγαπιι πνεύματος, ιτραοτητι κ. ΰικαιυσυνη κ. πραοτητι arm: in caritale 
 spiritus et mansueludinis Ambrst : rt om 238. 
 to be used here in reference to τί-κνα aya- myself of — not the words of those who 
 
 ττητή, ver. 14 : 'I sent Timotheus, who 
 stands to me in the same relation that 
 you stand (in).' " Stanley. ev κυρίω] 
 
 points out the spiritual nature of the rela- 
 tionship. άναμ.νήσ€ΐ] Timothy, by 
 being himself a close imitator of the Chris- 
 tian virtues and teaching of his and their 
 spiritual father, would bring to their minds 
 his well-known character, and way of teach- 
 ing, which they seemed to have well-nigh 
 forgotten. See 2 Tim. iii. 10. καθώς 
 specifies what before was expressed gene- 
 rally : so Luke xxiv. Ii), 20, τα πίρΊ Ίησοΰ 
 .... ΟΊτως rf παρίδωκαν αΰτον οΐ άοχ- 
 ιιρΰς κ.τ.λ. ; and Thucyd. i. 1, τον ττό- 
 Χίμον Των llfX. κ. Αθ., ώς ίποΧίμΐισαΐ' 
 ■προς άλλ;)λο(ΐς•. ττανταχοΐ Ιν ττ. 
 €κκλ.] Το shew the importance of this his 
 manner of teaching, he reminds them of his 
 nnvaryiny practice of it : — and as he was 
 guided by the Spirit, by inference, of its 
 universal necessity in the churches. 
 18 — 20.] To guard against misrepresenta- 
 tion of the coming of Timothy just an- 
 nounced, by those who had said and would 
 now the more say, ' Paul dare not come to 
 Corinth,' he announces the certainti/ of hia 
 coming, if the Lord will. 18.] ώς μη 
 cpxo^evov forms one idea, and the ck is in 
 consequence placed after it all : so Thucyd. 
 i. 6, ii> τοΤς πρΜτοι c e Αθηναίοι : Isocr. 
 TTfpi ίΐρ•, p. ICO, 07/ ar Tvxy £i γινησό- 
 μινον. Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 100. 
 ώς• expresses the assumption in their minds : 
 the present part, ΐρχομίνον refers to their 
 saying — ούκ ίρ\'€ται, as Meyer. 19.] 
 έλ€υσ-ομαι is ]ireiixed, for emphasis, being 
 the matter in doubt : as we say, ' Come I 
 will.' ταχ€ως] How soon, see ch. 
 xvi. 8. γνώσομαι] ' I will inform 
 
 are puiFed up {those I care not for), but 
 their power:' whether they are really 
 mighty in the Spirit, or not. This general 
 reference of ?:ΰν. must be kept, and not 
 narrowed, as Chrys., Theophyl., to power 
 of tv or king miracles : or "quantum apud 
 vos sua scientia et doctrina quam jactant 
 profecerint," Est. ; or virtuous lives (Theo- 
 doret, al.), or energy in the work of the 
 gospel (Meyer) : he leaves it general and 
 indefinite. 20.] Justification of this 
 
 his intention, by the very nature of that 
 kingdom of ivhich he was the ambassador. 
 ή βασ. τ. θεοΰ, the Kingdom (τ. ούρ. 
 Matt. iii. 2 ; iv. 17 and passim ; τ. θ. ^lark i. 
 44, al.) announced by the prophets, preached 
 by the Lord and the App., being now 
 prepared on earth and received by those 
 who believe on Christ, and to be consum- 
 mated when He returns with His saints : 
 see Phil. iii. 20, 21. Eph. v. 5. iv λόγω 
 . . . . ev δυνάμει .... 'is not (i e. does 
 not consist in, has not its conditions and 
 element of existence) in (mere) word, but 
 in might ' — is a kingdom oi power. 
 21.] He offers them, with a view to their 
 amendment, the alternative : ' Shall his 
 coming be in a judicial or in a friendly 
 spirit.'' as depending on themselves, τί, 
 not for πότίρον (as Meyer, De W.), but 
 general, and afterwards confined to the two 
 alternatives : ' What will ye ' (respecting 
 my coming) ? έλθω, ' must I come ? ' 
 £v ράβδω, 'with a rod;' but not ci»i/y 'with,' 
 asaccompanied with .■ the jirep gives the idea 
 of the element iu which, much as ΐν ίόξ^J•. 
 not only iri/h a rod, but in such purpose as 
 to tise it. There is no Hebraism: see Passow 
 under iv, No. 3 and 4. He speaks as a 
 father : τΊ iarir, iv ράβΐψ : iv KoXaati,
 
 V. ], 2. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 477 
 
 ν. " Ολως ^ ακούεται (ν νμιν "^^ ττοονί'ια, και τοίαυτη η Matt. τ. 34. 
 
 ; » ■> . - t ;'" - ' ch. vi. r. XV•. 
 
 " TTopvHa '' Ί]τις ^ ovde εν τοις ϊθνεσιν, ωςτε -yui^ai/ca rifa vS'M«u.xi.2 
 
 V 2 •' . 2 ^z ' ' " a / ' ". \ al. pass., 
 
 του πατρός ^\^ιν και νμεις πίψυσιωμενοι εστε και 
 
 vi. Si) al. ch J 
 zz interrg., 2 Cd 
 
 w Malt. T. 32 al. fr. Gen. xsxviii. 24. x = Heb.u. 3. 
 
 I. Gul. ii. 5. ζ — Matt. xiv. 4. xxii. 28. cli. vii. 2, 29. 
 
 i. Luke X. 29. xviii. 26. a ch. iy. 6 rcff. 
 
 Mark ji. 2 
 only. 2Chron. 
 y = Matt. 
 Deut. xxviii. 30. 
 
 Chap. V. 1. και ακον. arm. — for roiavr., τη αυτή 93 : τοιηντοι (Scholz) 48. — ουτί 93. 
 — rec aft (θν. add ονομηζίται {see note), with J &c syrr al Chr Thdrt al Cassiod : but 
 om ABCDEFG 6. 46. C?-. 177 to 9 al it ν copt seth arm Orig Manes (in Epiph) Tert Lucif 
 all: δοκιμάζεται lect 8. — του π. t\tiv τίνα DEFG g. — 2. rec ίξίρθ/; {corrn from ver 
 
 εν τιμωρίΐ}, Chrys. irveij^. τ. ττραΰ- 
 
 τητο5] generally, and by De Wette, ex- 
 plained, a gentle spirit, meaning by πτεύμ. 
 his own spirit : but Meyer has well re- 
 marked, that in every place in the X. T. 
 where πνεύμα is joined with an abstract 
 genitive, it imports the Holy Spirit, and 
 the abstract genitive refers to the specitic 
 working of the Spirit in the case in hand. 
 So TTV. της αλήθειας (John xv. 26; xvi. 
 13. 1 John iv. 6), υιοθεσίας (Rom. viii. 15), 
 της -πίστεως (2 Cor. iv. 13), σοφίας (Eph. 
 i. 1), άγιωσίινης (Rom. i. 4). And so 
 Chrys., Theophyl., — ϊνι yap καΐ πνεύμα 
 αίιστηρότητος κ. τιμωρίας, όλλ απο τωΐ' 
 γ^ρηπτυτίνων αί'τό καΧεΊ' ώς και τον 
 Θεόν οίκτίρμονα κ. ίΧεημονά φαμεί', άλΧ' 
 ού κο\ιιστ>'μ', KaiTOiyi και τυΰτο οντά. 
 Theophyl. 
 
 V. 1—13.] Concerning a gross case 
 
 OF INCEST WHICH HAD ARISEN, AND WAS 
 HARBOURED, AMONG THEM (vv. 1 — f.) : 
 AND aUALIFICATlON OF A FORMER COM- 
 MAND WHtCH HE HAD GIVEN THEM RE- 
 SPECTING ASSOCIATION WITH GROSS SIN- 
 NERS (9 — 13). The subject of this chap, is 
 bound on to the fi>regoing by the cpiestion 
 of ch. iv. 21 : and it furnishes an instance of 
 those things which required his apostolic 
 discipline. 1] όλως, ' actually,' 
 
 ' omnino,' see reflF. ; in negative sentences, 
 * at all.' aKOTjerai ev νιμ. iropveia] 
 
 another way of saying άκοΰονηί τίνες εν 
 νμ. πόρνοι, — ' the character of iropvos is 
 borne (by some) among you,' — ' fornica- 
 tion is borne as a character among you.' 
 From missing this sense οϊ άκοί'υμαι, Comm. 
 have gone wrong (,1) as to όλως-, rendering 
 it ' commonly,' to suit ακούεται, ' is re- 
 ported,' — (2) as to 1 1' ΰμίν, joining it with 
 πορνεία, whereas it belongs to ακούεται, — 
 (3) as to ήτις ονΐε εν τ. εθν., see below. 
 και τοιαύτ. ττ.] ' And fornication of 
 such a sort (the Km rises in a climax, there 
 being an ellipsis of ού μόνο}• . . ., άλΧά . . . 
 before it ; so Aristoph. Ran. 116, ώ σχέτλιε, 
 τoλfιηπειςyάp itvui και πύ yε : Seellartung, 
 Partikellehre, i. 134), as (is) not (borne as 
 a character) even among the heathen.' 
 The ovop(iZ,fTai of the rec. is a clumsy 
 gloss, probably from Eph. v. 3 : the mean- 
 ing being, that not even among the heathen 
 does any one άκοΰίΐ πόρνος in this sense, 
 
 that it was a crime that they would not 
 tolerate as a matter of jmblic notoriety. 
 ' So that one among you has {as wife 
 most probably, not merely as concubine: 
 the word εχω in such cases universally iu 
 the N. T. signifying to possess in marriage : 
 and Meyer remarks that ό το Ipyov τούτο 
 ποιησας (ver. 2), and τον οϋ-ως τούτο 
 κaτεpyaπάμεvov (ver. 3) seem to point to 
 a consummation of marriage, not to mere 
 concubinage) his father's wife ' (i. e. his 
 step-mother, see Lev. xviii. 8 ; ούκ: είπε 
 μητρυιαν, αλλά, yvvalxa πατρός, ωςτε 
 πολλψ χαΧεπώτερον πληξαι, Chrys.). — 
 The Comm. generally refer to Cicero, Pro 
 Cluentio, 5, 6, " Nubit genero socrus, nullis 
 auspicibus, nullis auctoribus, funestis omi- 
 nibus omnium omnibus. Ο mulieris scelus 
 incredibile, et pragter hanc unam, in omni 
 vita inauditum," &c. — It may seem as- 
 tonishing that the authorities in the Cor. 
 church should have allowed such a case 
 to escape them, or if known, should have 
 tolerated it. Perhaps the universal laxity 
 of morals at Cor. may have weakened the 
 severity even of the Christian elders : per- 
 haps, as has often been suggested, the 
 offender, if a Jewish convert, might defend 
 his conduct by the Rabbinical maxim that 
 in the case of a proselyte, the forbidden de- 
 grees were annulled, a new birth having 
 been undergone by him (see ^laimon. in 
 Wetst.). This latter however is rendered 
 improbable by the fact that the Ap. says 
 nothing of the woman, which he would 
 have done had she been a Christian : — and 
 that Jewish maxim was taxed with the con- 
 dition, that a proselyte might marry any of 
 his or her former relatives, ' modo ad Ju- 
 daicarn religionem transierint.' The father 
 was Hving, and is described in 2 Cor. vii. 
 12, as ύ αδικηθείς; — and from the Ap. say- 
 ing there that he did not write on his ac- 
 count, he was probably a Christian. 
 2.] καί often introduces a cpiestion, espe- 
 cially one by which something inconsistent 
 or preposterous is brought out, — see reff. : 
 and note on 2 Cor. ii. 2. ιτίφυσ•. 
 
 €στ€'] Not, which would be absurd, — al the 
 occurrence of this crime, ούκ επί τψ αμαρ- 
 τήματι• τούτο yap ciXoyinc. Chrys. : _^nel- 
 tlier, as he proceeds, — αλλ' επί τι) διδα. 
 σκα\ίφ Tij εκείνον, imagining the offender
 
 478 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 Λ^ 
 
 bMatt. τ. 4 „',.,, ,.,, 
 
 ai. i.sa.ixi.2. ov^^i μα 
 
 Wov 
 
 ■ John xi. 15. 
 d = M^lt xiii. 
 
 12. Luke xi. 
 
 22. John ii. 
 
 16 a1. 
 e Acts XTii. 33 
 
 TO 
 
 τούτο 
 
 ίξ)•γον 
 
 ^ Ίταρων 06 τω 
 
 reff. 
 
 . ch. xi. 
 
 12 Cor.x. 1,11. 
 
 xiii. 2, lu. 
 
 Phil. i. 27. h 
 
 Col. ii. 5 
 
 only. P. 
 g Aoi.sxii. 20 reff. 
 j = Acts XX. Id reff. 
 
 σώματι, " ττορ 
 τον όντως τούτο 
 κυρίου ημών Ιησού 
 ' 7Γ νεύματος συν 
 
 ξνθησατε, *^ Ίνα ' αρθτ? ® ίκ μίσου νμων ο 
 ΤΓου^σας ; ίγ(ι» μεν yap απών τω 
 ττνίυματι, ηοη ' κίκρικα ως ^ ίταρων 
 κaτζpyaσaμίvov, εν τω ονόματι του 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 rrj 
 
 .17. 
 
 συναγ^ 
 δυνάμει 
 
 θε 
 
 ντων νμων και 
 
 h Acts xvii. le 
 1 = 1 Tim. i. 2U. 
 
 κυρίου 
 
 !ol. ii, .1. See Rom. 
 ke xxiii. 25. 
 
 του ε/ιου 
 
 ■ημών Ιησού 
 
 il. 11. ch. vii. 34. 
 
 IS), with J &c Chr Thdrt al (ίττηι.θ. 93): txt ABCDEFG 17• 31-7-0. 46. 71-3-4. 80. 
 177-8 lect 12 Manes (in Epiph) Epiph. — for fir μ(σον, ίξ "](>. II5-1!) al Chr-comnij. — for 
 ττυιησ., πραίης AC 17. 31-7-!). 40. 71. «0. IIG al Orig Manes (in Epiph) Epiph Bas : 
 txt B(e sil)DEFGJ &c Chr Thdrt al {mtch a var must be decided by the weight of 
 MSS). — Z. yap om Gl-2. 109-20. 213 al ν Thdrt Lucif Ambrst al. — rec ως απών {insd 
 
 to curresp with ως -αρων beloir, it being imagined that απών πνίυμ. %vas to be 
 
 taken together : so Meg), with D^EFGJ most mss fapjiy) syr al Dial Chr Thdrt Thl Oec 
 Lucif Aus2 Pel Bed: txt ABCD' 17. 37-9. 67. 80. 116 al ν copt al Manes (in Epiph) 
 Epiph Orig-int Thl al. — απωι- μ(ν 108'. — roiiro om FG it ν arm Lucif Aug al.— 4. ημών 
 (1st) om A demid (al latt mss) Bas Lucif Pac. — rec (1st) υ/σ. ■χριστού, with D^EFGJ al 
 vss syr* Chr Thdrt lat-ff: txt AB(vv 4, 5 are cut away in C)D' d aeth Lucif. — 
 χριατου 1st to 2nd om 17- — ίμου om 108. — ημών (2nd) om am tol harl Orig^ Thdrt 
 (mss) Orig-int, (but has it,) Aug, al. — rec (2nd) ιησ. χριστού, with D'EFGJ &c vss 
 Origj ChrThdrt al Lucifj Aug, Pac : txt ABD' (C see above) 46 d e ν syr aeth Origg 
 
 in four different ways : (1) iv rip 6v. may 
 belong to σιιναχΘίντων, and συν ry iui'. 
 to ποραδονναι, — so Beza, Calov., Billroth, 
 Olsh., al. : (2) both tv τψ 6v. and συν τι) 
 
 to have been some party teacher : so also 
 Theophyl. : — but, as before, with a notion 
 of your wisdom and spiritual perfection : 
 the being puiied up is only cum hoc, not 
 propter hoc. 6ΤΓ£νθήσ•ατε] ' And did 
 
 ye not rather mourn (viz. when the crime 
 became first known to you), in order that 
 (your mourning would be because of the ex- 
 istence of the evil, i. e. with a view to its re- 
 moval) he who had done this deed (the past 
 part, ποιήσας is itself used of the past point 
 of time indicated by 1-(ΐ•θί)σατε, and must 
 therefore be expressed by the pluperf.) might 
 (may) be removed from among you (viz. 
 by your casting him out from your society) ? ' 
 
 3 — 5.] justifies the expression 'ira 
 ap9y just used, by declaring the judgment 
 which the Ap. although absent, had already 
 passed on the oflfender. 3.] iyi'o μίν 
 
 yap, ' I for my part ' ' ego certe :' so 
 
 Aristoph. Plut. 355, μα Δι', «γώ μίν ου : 
 see Hartung, Partikellehre, ii. 413. 
 ως τΓαρών, ' as if really present,' not, as 
 being present in spirit. τον όντως 
 
 τοΰτ. κατ.] The object is put foremost for 
 emphasis' sake, and after Several intervening 
 clauses, taken up again witli rbv roiovrnv, 
 ver. 5. όντως, Meyer thinks, alludes 
 
 to some peculiarlg offensive method in 
 which he had brought about tlie marriage, 
 which was known to the Corr. but unknown 
 to us. Olsh. understands it, ' under such 
 circumstances, ' ' being such as he is, a 
 member of Christ's body.' But this, being 
 before patent, would hardly be thus em- 
 phatically denoted. Perhaps after all, τον- 
 ro κaτtpyaσάμtrov refers to πημνιια gene- 
 rally, ο'ύτως to τοναντη πορνύα, ver. 1. 
 
 4.] We may arrange this sentence 
 
 Ιυν. may belong to σνναχΰίντων, ■ 
 Chrys., Theophyl. (altern.), Calvin (quoting 
 for συν ry Cw. Matt, xviii. 20), Grot., 
 Riickert : (3) both may belong to παρα- 
 Covvai, — so Mosheim, iSihrader, al. : or (4) 
 εν τφ όν. belongs to παραίοϋι-αι, and συν 
 ry cvv. to arvnxB'tvTMv, — so Luther, Cas- 
 tal., Estius, Bengel, De Wette, Meyer, al. 
 And this, I am persuaded, is the right ar- 
 rangement. For according to (2) and (3), 
 the balance of the sentence would be de- 
 stroyed, no adjunct of authority being given 
 to one member of it, and both to the other : 
 and (1) is hardly consistent with the ar- 
 rangement of the clauses, the parenthetical 
 portion beginning far more naturally with 
 the participle than with iv τψ όν., — not to 
 mention that the common formula of the 
 Apostle's speaking authoritatively, is tv 
 τφ ονόματι Ίησοϋ χυ. or the like: see 
 Acts iii. 16; xvi. 18. 2 Thess. iii. 6. The 
 sentence then will stand:— ('I have de- 
 creed), — in the name of our Lord Jesus 
 (when ye have been assembled together 
 and my spirit with the power of our 
 Lord Jesus), (i. e. ' 1 myself, in spirit, en- 
 dowed by our Lord Jesus with apostolic 
 power :' σνν τ?) δνν. belongs to τυϋ ίμυΰ 
 πνίύμ., and is not, as in Chrys., — see above 
 — merely an element in the assembly) to 
 deliver such an one (reff ) to Satan for 
 the destruction of his flesh, that his 
 spirit may he saved in the day of the 
 Lord.' — What does this sentence import.' 
 Not, mere excommunication, though it is
 
 S— 8. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους a. 
 
 479 
 
 TTapudovvai τον "" τοιούτον τω σατανά " ί'ις ° oXtOoov 
 της ^ σαξ)Κος, Ίνα το ^ πνεύμα σωθrJ ίν ry '^ Ύ]μίρα. τον 
 κυρίου. ου κα\ον το '^ κανγ^ημα υμών. ουκ ο'/δατε 
 
 ΟΤΙ ''μικρά Ζ,υμη " όλον το " φυοαμα "^υ/ΐιοΓ; ' ''" εκ καθ ά- 
 ρατε τΎίν " πάλαιαν ^,υμην, Ίνα ητζ νίον ^ φύραμα, καβως 
 το ' πασγ^α ημών ^ ετυθη 'άριστος, 
 μη ' tv ' Ζ^μτ) " τταλαια μΐ)δέ 
 
 m Act5xxii.22. 
 
 2 Cor. ii. 6,7. 
 
 xii. 2, «ic. 
 η «ft. παραί., 
 
 M-irk xiii.l2. 
 
 Eph. iv. 19. 
 ο 1 Thess. V. 3. 
 
 2 Tlif.ss. i. <t. 
 
 1 Tir 
 
 9 
 
 εστε ■' α^νμοι' και yap 
 
 8 aa " b < '/ 
 
 ωςτε εορτα4ω^εν 
 
 s = Gal. v. 9. {James iii. 5.) 
 Gal. V. Η only. Hos. rii 4. 
 xxvi. 13. Judg. vii. 4 vat. 
 
 &c. Acts xii. 3. XX. 6. Levit. ii- 4, Sic. ζ Matt, χ 
 
 Mark xiv. 12. Luke xxii. 7. ()f'Chri.st,liere only. See Heh, 
 
 b here only. £xod. v. 1. Deut. xvi. 15 
 
 only. Vtov. 
 xsi. 7. 
 ρ Matt. xxvi. 
 41 II Mk. 
 Rom. ii.28, 
 29. viii.4 al. 
 £)/ q oh. i. 8 refl; 
 rRom.iv.2refr. 
 t Matt. xlii. 33. xvi. 6. Exod.xii.loal.fr. u Matt, ut .supr. II L. 
 
 V Rom. ix. 21 reff. = Exoil. viii. 3. w 2 Tim. ii. 21 only. Deut. 
 
 X = Rum. vi. 6 reff. 2 Cor. iii. 14. 1 John ii. 7. y Matt. xxvi. 17, 
 
 i.2, &c. 4 Kings xxi. 22. a w. π^ίσχ., 
 
 2ti. 28. aa = Phil. ii. 12 rcfl'. 
 
 ch. iv. 21 reff. 
 
 Dial lat-flf. — 5. for rov τοιοντ,, αντον FG g. — rec aft κνριου ins ιησον, with J &.C am 
 tol al Chr Thl Oec Orig-int, Aug2 ; ιησ. χριστού DE al d e demid : ημών ιησ. al Dam; 
 ημών ιησ. χρ. AFG all vss {ημών and χρ. syr*) Origj Thdrt lat-ff: txt Β Orig^ Orig- 
 intj Tertj ThP Aug; PaCj. (It aeems evident that κυριον alone wan the or'iyl, and the 
 other varr are additions.) — 6. ior ζνμοι, δόλοι D' Bas (ed) Hes (appy) : corriimpit d e ν 
 (Sev in Iren) Lucif Orig-int all {the varr are glosses on the tat). — 7. rec aft ικκαθ. add 
 'υυν {insdfor connexion), with CJ al syr al Thdrt Thl Orig-int : om ABDEFG (>2. 89. 
 110-1 1-13'-2ΐ-•23-77 to 9. 83-85-90. 213 aU ν all Marcion (in Wetst) Clem Bas Chr Oec 
 Tert Cypr Lucif Ambrst al. — rec aft ττοσχ. ημών, add νπιρ ημών {a doctrinal gloss), 
 with J tkc syrr al Origj (3ce ; mss vary) Method Thdrt Pseud-Ath Thl Oec : but om 
 ABC'DEFG 17. 46" al it ν copt aeth Clem Orig (oft, see above) Ath Marcion (in Epiph) 
 Cyr Chrj Cypr Tert Archel Ambrst Jer Aug (oft) al.— rec ί^υθη. with a few mss {appy, 
 but perhaps it is an error, as in edd of Clem and Oec) : txt AB(C uncert)DEFGJ &c. 
 — ο xp. FG : add ο θιος IIG Hippol Chrys-ms (somet). — 8. (ορταζομιν ADE 71-3 all 
 lectt 14^ al : ίορτασωμίν 131 : ίορταζητί seth : txt B(e sil)CFGJ &c. — for μηδί, μη 
 
 doubtless included. It was a delegation to 
 the Cor. church of a special power, reserved 
 to the App. themselves, of inflicting corpo- 
 real death or disease as a punishment for 
 sin. Of this we have notable examples in 
 the case of Ananias and Sapphira, and 
 Elymas, and another hinted at 1 Tim. i. 20. 
 The congregation itself could o'iptiv ίκ μι- 
 σόν, — but it could not παραδοϋναι τφ 
 oaravq, ίίς ϋλίθρον της σαρκός, without 
 the authorized concurrence of the Apostle's 
 ττνίΰματον, συν τη δυν. τ. κνρ. ήμ. Ίησηΐι. 
 — What the ϋλίθρος τ. σαρκός was to be, 
 does not appear : certainly more than the 
 mere destruction of his pride and lust by 
 repentance, as some (Estius, Beza, Grot., 
 al.) suppose : rather, as Chrys., 'ίνα μα- 
 OTti)j αυτόν ίλ(>-£( ττονηρψ η ν6σ(μ ίτίρα. 
 Estius's objection to this, that in 2 Cor. ii. 
 and vii. we find no trace of such bodily 
 chastisement, is not to the point,— because 
 we have no proof that this παρά'ΰοσις was 
 ever inflicted, — nor does the Ap. cotnmand 
 it, but only describes it as his own deter- 
 mination, held as it were Ι7ΐ terrorem over 
 the offender. See note on'ver. 13. — Obs., 
 σαρκός, the offending element, not σώ- 
 ματος. Paul could not say o>^tOpov τον 
 σώματος, seeing that the body is to partake 
 of the salvation of the spirit ; — but not the 
 σάρζ, see ch. xv. 50. 5. ϊνα το trv. σωθ.] 
 
 The aim of the 6\i9p. r. σαρ., — which he 
 said ΐ'/ύη τφ διαβύλί•) νόμυνς τιθίις, και 
 
 οΰκ άφιε'ις αντον τηραιτίρω προβηναι, as 
 Chrys. Thus the proposed punishment, 
 severe as it might seem, would be in reality 
 a merciful one, tending to the eternal. hap- 
 piness of the offender. A greater contrast 
 to this can hardly be conceived, than the 
 terrible forms of excommunication subse- 
 c|ueiitly devised, and even now in use in the 
 Romish church, under the fiction of dele- 
 gated apostolic power. The delivering to 
 Satan yis/• the destruction oj' the spirit, can 
 belong only to those who do the work of 
 Satan. Stanley remarks, " For the popu- 
 lar constitution of the early Corinthian 
 church, see Clem. Rom. i. 44 : where the 
 rulers of that society are described as having 
 been appointed συνίνδοκησύσης της ίκ- 
 κΧησίας πάσης." 6.] ' How inconsist- 
 
 entwith your harbouring such an one, ap- 
 pear your high-flown conceits of yourselves !' 
 καύχημα, 'your matter of glorying.' 
 ' Are you not aware that a little leaven 
 imparts a character to the whole lump?' 
 That this is the meaning, and not, ' that. a 
 little leaven will,- if not purged out, leaven 
 the whole lump,' is manifest from the point 
 in hand, viz. the inconsistency of their 
 boasting .• which would not appear by their 
 danger of corruption hereafter, but by their 
 character being actnaltg lost. One of 
 them .was a fornicator of a fearfully de- 
 praved kind, tolerated and harboured : by 
 this fact, the character of the whole was
 
 480 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 ν. 
 
 -nm. i. 29. ts" d ' >e ' 'AA'c' v'v" f'A 
 
 Eph.iT.3i ί,νμ^ κακίας και πονηρίας, αλλ εν ^ αΐ,νμυις ειΛι- 
 Rora.i.29 κρινύας κοι "^ αΧηΘίΐας. 
 
 Εγροΐ//α νμιν ίΐ' ryj ίττιστολϊ] μη ' συναναμ'ιγνυσθαι 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGJ 
 
 f 2Cor. i 12. 9 >/ 
 
 ii. 17 only t. 
 
 See Phil. i. 10. 
 
 g = John iii. 21. h (see note) comp., Rom. xvi. 22, 
 
 i 2 Thcss. iii 14onlj;. οιιμμι7ΐ'., Hos. vii. 8. 
 
 B. — for πονηυ., πυοίίΐας FG (g has both) : 
 
 tainted. 7.] The ιταλαια, ζι5μη is not 
 
 the yrian, but the crime attaching to then- 
 character as a church, which was a remnant 
 of their unconverted state, tlieir τταλαιός 
 αΐ'^ρωπος•. This they are to purge out from 
 among them. The ίκκαθάρ. alludes to the 
 careful ' purging out ' from thehousesof every 
 thing leavened before the commencement of 
 the feast of unleavened bread. Schottgen, 
 Hor. Hebr., in loc, gives a full account of the 
 e.xtreme care with which this was done. See 
 alsoStanley'snote.—' That ye maybe anew 
 lump (opposed to the παλαιϋς άνθρωπος o{ 
 old and dissolute days), as ye are (normally 
 and by your Christian profession) unlea- 
 vened ' (i. e. dead to sin and free from it). 
 This indicating the state by profession, the 
 normal stale, as a fact, and the grounding 
 of exhortations on it, is common enough 
 with our Ap.,^see Rom. vi. 3, 4; ch. iii. 
 16, al. freq., and involves no tautology here, 
 any more than elsewhere. — An unfortunate 
 interpretation has been given to these words, 
 — ' as ye are now celebrating the feast of 
 unleavened bread ;' and has met with some 
 recent defenders, e.g. Wieseler, — and Cony- 
 beare. Life and Epp. of St. Paul, vol. ii. j). 
 34. But first, the words will not admit it ; 
 for άζυμοί cannot (as joined immediately with 
 iv άζίιμοις, ver. 8) without much harshness 
 be applied in its literal sense to the cele- 
 brators of the feast, but must indicate the 
 material which was unleavened, see reft"., 
 • — «pro)' ζνμιη'/ν, άζνμον, Athenseus iii. 
 109, and Gen. si.x. 3. Esod. xxix. 2. 
 Secondly, the celebration of a Jewish 
 feast would certainly not be predicated 
 without remark of a whole mixed congre- 
 gation of Gentiles and Jews, even suppos- 
 ing that the Gentile converts did cele- 
 brate it with the Jews. [It is no answer to 
 this, to cite passages (see Conyb. and How- 
 son, ed.2,vol.ii. p. 40, note), where he seems 
 to treat mixed churches, e.g. Gal.iv.8. Rom. 
 vii. 1 ; xi. 18, as if they belonged wholly to 
 one or other of their component elements. 
 For this is not a parallel case. He would 
 here, as above, be distinctly predicating, as 
 a fact, of the whole church, a practice which 
 he himself would have been the first to de- 
 precate. See Gal. iv. 1 0.] Thirdly, it is not 
 at all probable that the Apostle would 
 either address the Corinthians as engaged 
 in a feast which he, at Ephextis, was then 
 celebrating, seeing that it would probably 
 ie over before his letter could be delivered, 
 
 C.il. iv. Hi. IThess. V.27. 2 The.ss. iii. 14. 2 Cor. vii. 8. 
 
 -ιος to -ιας om 48 teth. — 9. iv τη επ. om 4 
 
 — or would anticipate their being engaged in 
 it when thej' received his letter, if it were 
 yet to come. For be it remembered, that 
 in the sense required, they would only be 
 ίϊζυ/ίοι during seven days. [Here again, I 
 do not see how the example of " a birth-day 
 letter to a friend in India," adduced by Mr. 
 Conybeare as ananswer to my objection, will 
 apply. It seems to me that if strictly con- 
 sidered, in detail, it tells my way, not his.] 
 But, fourthly, — and even could all the other 
 objections be answered, this would remain in 
 its full force, — the reference is one wholhj 
 alien from the habit and spirit of our Ap. 
 The ordinances of the old law are to him not 
 points on whose actual observance to ground 
 spiritual lessons, but things passed away in 
 their literal acceptance, and become spiritual 
 verities in Christ. He thus regards the 
 Cor. church as (normally) the unleavened 
 lump at the Passover ; he beseeches them 
 to put away the old leaven from among 
 them, to correspond with this their normal 
 state:' 'for,' he adds, it is high time for 
 us to be άζνμοι in very deed {και yap— so 
 Xen. Anab. v. 8. 7, άκονσαη, ΐφη, και 
 γΰρ αξίο)'. It introduces a powerful rea- 
 son, /or [on other accounts and] also. — See 
 Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 1:17• 8)i seeing 
 that our Passover was sacrificed, even 
 Christ (the days of unleavened bread began 
 with the Passover-sacrifice): therefore 
 (ref ) let us keep the feast (not the actual 
 Passover, but the continued Passover-feast 
 of Christians on whose behalf Christ has 
 died. There is no change of metaphor: the 
 Corr. are the living άρτοι, as believers are 
 the living stones of the spiritual temjile) 
 not in (as our element) the old leaven 
 (general — our old unconverted state), nor 
 (particular) in the leaven of vice and 
 wickedness (the genitives are of apposi- 
 tion, — ' the leaven which is vice and wicked- 
 ness ;' see Winer, § 48. 2), but in the 
 unleavenedness (ra άΖνμα, unleavened 
 things, see Exod. xii. 15. 18) of sincerity 
 and truth.' — The view here maintained is 
 that of Chrys., και αντΌς ci ίπιμίνίΐ τ?] 
 μίταφοιι^,, άναμιμί'ησκιον ττηλαιας σύτούς• 
 ιστορίας, και ττάσχα και άζίψων, κα'ι των 
 ίίχογεσιώΐ' των τότί και των ννν, και 
 των κολάσεων κα'ι των τιμωριών ϊορτης 
 άρα υ τταρων καιρός, και yap ι'ιπών, 
 ΐιρτάζωμίν, οΰκ ίττίΐΐή ττάσ-^α τταρην, 
 οΰίί επειδή ή πεντηκοστή, tXtyiv, ά\\ά 
 νεικννς 'ότι πάς υ χρόνος εορτής εστί
 
 9—11. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 481 
 
 k' .10 'Ι' -k' -' / 
 
 ΤΓορνοις ου πάντως τοις πορνοις του κόσμου του- t cii. vi. 9. 
 
 του 1] τοΊς "" ττλεοιΊκτοις και " αρπαζιν η ° είδωλολάτραις, Γχ"'κ"!!' 
 '^ επίΐ ωφειλΒΤζ ^ αρα εκ του κόσμου εζελσειν ^^ νυνι όε ΐ;. (Heb χϋ. 
 
 1 See Rom.iii. 9reff. mch.vi. 10. Eph. v. 5 only t. Sir. siv. 9. π Matt. τίΙ.Ίό. Luke 
 
 xviii. II. ch. ri. 10 only. Gen. xlis. 27. ο ch. vi. 1). s. 7. Eph. v, 5. Rev. xxi. 8. xxii. 15 onlyt. 
 
 ρ ch. vii. 14 only. q Rom. xv. I al. 
 
 Thdrt (in cat) somet. — συναναμιγνυσθί lOG-8-11. — 10. rec ins και bef ov τταντ. {fur 
 coitnexion), with D^J &c syr al Chr Thdrt Thl Oec : txt ABCD'EFG 1?. 46. 93 al it ν 
 copt Syr Orig Tert Lucif Ambrst Pelag al. — rec η ηξ,ττη^. {alteration to conform to the 
 general context), with D'EJ &c vss Orig Chr Thdrt al Lucif al : txt ABCD'FG I7. 39. 
 4G. 73. 93 al (r; και αρ. 37) d g. — rec οφίίΧιη {corrn from misunderstanding : see 
 note), with Β (e sil) &c Chr Thdrt al: txt ACDEFGJ 47. 71. 80-9. 109 all it ν syrr copt 
 al Dam Orig-int lat-fF. — aft κοσμ., add τούτου d e ν Lucif Ambrst Aug Gaud Pelag. — 
 11. νυν ABFGJ lOG-8 Bas Chrj Thdrt Dam : txt CDE aU Chrj Thl Oec— rec for ή, η 
 
 καιρός τοΊς Χρισηοΐ'οΤς ίίιά την νπίρ- 
 βολήρ των δυΟίντων άγηθών. — With re- 
 gard to the chronological superstructure 
 which has been built (by Wieseler and 
 others) on this passage, t/iat the Ep. was 
 written shortly before Easter, we cannot of 
 course say that the approach of the Pass- 
 over may not have suggested to the Ap. 
 this similitude ; and we know from ch. 
 xvi. 8 that he was looking forward to Pen- 
 tecost. But further than this it would not 
 be safe to assume : see Prolegg. to this Ep. 
 9—13.] Correction of their mis- 
 understanding of a former command of 
 his respecting keeping company with forni- 
 cators. 9.] ' I wrote to you in the 
 epistle (not this present epistle, which τι] 
 ίττιστολτ; might mean, see retf., — for there 
 is nothing in the preceding part of this Ep. 
 which can by any possibility be so inter- 
 preted, — certainly not either ver. 2 or ver. 
 6, which are commonly alleged by those 
 who thus explain it — and tv Ty tniOToXij 
 would be a superfluous and irrelevant addi- 
 tion, if he meant the letter on which he 
 was now engaged : — but, a former epistle, 
 which has not come down to us ; — cf. the 
 similar expression, 2 Cor. vii. 8, used with 
 reference to this Ep., — and see note on 
 2 Cor. i. 15, 16. So Ambros., Calvin, Beza, 
 Estius, Grot., Calov., Bengel, Wetst., Mosh., 
 De Wette, Meyer : so also Lightfoot, under- 
 standing however an Ep. committed to 
 Timothy, see ch. iv. 17 : which could not 
 be, as Timothy was not coming to them till 
 after they had received this Ep., ch. xvi. 10, 
 and thus the words would be unintelligible 
 to them: — on the other side are Chrys., 
 Theodoret, Theophyl., Erasm., Corn, a 
 Lapide, Wolf, al. [It has been suggested 
 (see Stanley, p. 101, notes) that the whole 
 passage, v. 9 — vi. 8, may have been a post- 
 script or note inserted subsequently to the 
 rest of the Epistle, and referring espe- 
 cially to vi. 9, 10] ) not to keep company 
 with fornicators.' 10.] ov τΓαντω? 
 limits the prohibition, whicli perhaps had 
 been comjilained of owing to its strictness, 
 Vol. II. 
 
 and the impossibility of complying with it 
 in so dissolute a place as Corinth, and ex- 
 cepts the fornicators of this world, i. e. who 
 are 7wt professing Christians : 'not under 
 all circumstances with the fornicators 
 of this world :' so Theophr. C. P. vi. 25, 
 cited by Wetst. on Rom. iii. 9, ποιΰ γαρ 
 οΰ πάντως, άλλ' ϊαν οΰ\η τις y ΰπόκαυ- 
 στος. — υύ, not μη, because not the whole 
 conte.xt of the prohibition is negatived, but 
 only one portion of it, and thus ού πάντως 
 τ. 7Γ. τ. κΰσ. Γ. stands together as one idea. 
 So Thucyd. i. 51, νποτοπήσαντες άπ' 
 Άθηνων Hvai οϋχ όσας ίώρων άλλα 
 ττλίΐους. See more exx. in Hartung, Par- 
 tikellehre, ii. p. 125, 6. τοϋ κόσμ,. 
 
 τούτου, belonging to the number of un- 
 believers, — Christians who were πόρνοι 
 being expressly excluded. So Paul ever 
 uses this expression, ch. iii. 19. 2 Cor. iv. 4. 
 Eph. ii. 2. irXeoveKTais and αρπαξιν 
 
 are joined by και, as belonging to the same 
 class — that of cotwtous persons; — πλΐονέκ- 
 της being an avaricious person, not a la- 
 scivious one, as sometimes rendered (e. g. 
 Conybeare, vol. ii. p. 35), nor does it seem 
 to have any where merely this meaning ; see 
 Eph. iv. 19 and note. Compare on the other 
 side Stanley's note here, which however has 
 not convinced me. The root of the two sins 
 being the same, viz. lust or greed, they come 
 often to be mentioned together and as if run- 
 ning into one another. See Trench, N.T. 
 Syn. pp. 91, 2. [On αρπαξιν, Stanley re- 
 marks, " It is difficult to see why it should 
 be expressly introduced here, especially if 
 7Γλ£οι•ίΚΓ/;ς has the meaning of sensuality." 
 Certainly : but not, if πλ. retains its proper 
 meaning, as containing the key to πϋμνιια 
 on the one hand, and ΰοπα-^ή on the other.] 
 eiTfi ώφ.] 'For in that case ye 
 must go out of the world,'— as Chr3's. 
 and Tlieo])liyl., ίτίραν οίκουμίνην ζιιτησαι. 
 The past ώφύλ., as t',\'(.i/)', al., because the 
 necessity would long ago have occurred and 
 the act have jjassed. 11. νυνι δε Εγραψα] 
 
 ' But my meaning was .... ;' — ' hut, the 
 case being so, that ye must needs consort 
 I I
 
 482 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 γ. 12, 13. 
 
 τθαι, εάν Ttc αδίλώος abcd 
 
 21. 
 t vt-r. 6. 
 u Luke XT. 2. 
 
 Acts X. 41. 
 
 xi. 3. Gal. 
 
 ii. 12only. 
 
 Gen.xliii.3 
 
 ypaxLa νμιν μη ' συναναμίΎνυσΌαι, .. . ,^ r- = 
 
 <".''y• οΐ'ομα^ομίνος y ττορνος 7} ττΛίονίΛτης η Ηοωλολατρης 
 η ^ XoidopOQ Ί] ' μίθυσος η " αρπαζ, ' τω τοίούτω ^ΐλ}δέ 
 
 Θ ι 12 ν / ' > W ν >'Χ χ / 
 
 «ειν. τι yap μοι και τους εςω κριΐ'ίΐν ; 
 
 ''ε ' Λ ^ 
 εςω ο Ι/εος 
 
 αυτών. 
 
 y 
 
 Tt -yap μοι και τους 
 
 >' '"χ ' .13w ^j^ 
 
 ουχί ' τους εσω νμίΐς κρίνετε ; τους οε 
 
 tWt. ^ Εξάρατε τοι^ ττοντ/ρον εί; υ^ωΐ' 
 
 Sir. prol. 
 
 Κξ)1 
 
 W (Acts xxvi. 11.) = Col. iv. IS. 1 Tliess. iv. 12. Mark 
 y = here cmly. See Rom. τϋ. 22. Eph. iii. IB. 
 a See ch. i. 24. 
 
 X = Rom. iii. 7. Jolin viii. 15. 
 ζ here only. DiiUT. xvii. 7, 12. xxiv. 7. 
 
 {alteration to conform to thefollg), with d e g ar-pol Aug (oft) al : txt (j\ISS ambiguous) 
 10. 11. 19. 44. 55. Π1. 100-8 to 11-13-19-20-23-79 ν syrr ar-erp copt al Iren Tert Aug 
 (somet) all : nominetvr or iwminatnr d e v-sixt (Sen-in-Iren) Tort Lucif Atnbr. — πορί'. η 
 μίΟ. η ttS. η λοιδ. η πλ. η αρπ. C (all vary).• — for μηδέ, μι; Α 119 : μήτε FG. — 12. for 
 τι, ει FG g. — om και ABCFG 17• 31-9. 40. 67• 73 al it ν copt Syr ar erp al Chr, (mss) 
 lat-ff (omd as vnnecesaary , its sense not beinff perceived) : t.xt DEJ most mss syr al Chr 
 Thdrt Thl Oec. — 13. rec Kpivn, with J all d e syrr al : txt most mss (appy) ν copt seth arm 
 lat-fT and Chr Thdrt Thl in their comm. — rec ins και bef εζαρειτε (και insd as above more 
 than once, for connexion : but the abruptness is characteristic : -ρειτε from LXX), with 
 D-'EJ &c {tollite autem Syr, et tollite syr &c) Chr (om και ? and -ρατε mSj in Matthai) 
 Thdrt Thl Oec : txt ABCD'FG 23. 31-7. 40. 73• 80. 115-1G-77 to 79 all it ν copt al Orig 
 (ίξαρατί many gr-fF: εξαίρετε G. 23: ενάρετε (JT^ : εζαρει 109: εζαιρειτε 43) lat-ff". — 
 TO τΓον. 23. 48 Thdrt Thl (marg) : txt Aug (gr expressly). — αυτών om 73. 
 
 with fornicators among the heathen, I wrote 
 to you, not to consort, &c.' — That this 
 is the meaning and not ' But now I write 
 (the epistolary aorist) &c.,' seems plain, 
 from the use of έγραφα twice so close to- 
 gether, and therefore probably in the same 
 reference, — from the fact noticed by Meyer, 
 that if a contrast had been intended between 
 εν Tij ΐτΓίστολϊί a,nd vvi>i, iv ry έττ. must 
 have preceded έγραφα : — and from the 
 usage of νϋΐ' ίέ, of which Hartung, Par- 
 tikellehre, ii. 25, gives examples, e. g. Plut. 
 Protag. p. 347, vvv δε σφόδρα γάρ και 
 TTfnt τώι> μεγίστων φευδόμενος δοκείς 
 αληθή λέγειν, δια ταντά σε εγω φ'εγω, 
 — and Lycurg. Leocr., p. 138, εβονλόμην 
 
 δ' civ, ώ άνδρες νϋν δε 
 
 See also Heb. xi. 10. Thus by the right 
 rendering, we escape the awkward inference 
 deducible from the ordinary interp., — that 
 the Ap. had previously given a command, 
 and now retracted it. eav tis] ' If 
 
 one who is called a brother be,' &c. 
 Oecumenius, Augustin, Ambros., Estius, 
 al., join ονομαζόμενος with ττόρνος, and 
 understand it eitlier as = ονομαστός, ' be a 
 notorious πόρνος, &(c.,' or ' be named a 
 Τΐόρνος, (^'c' But όνομαζόμ. or even ονο- 
 μαστός, in the tjad sense, is hardly ad- 
 missible, — and in either case Paul would 
 have written αδελφός τις, the stress on 
 αδελφός in that case requiring it to precede 
 Tir, as it now precedes όνομαζόμίνος. 
 ίΐδωλολάτρης] One who from any motive 
 makes a compromise with the habits of the 
 heathen, and partakes in their sacrifices : 
 Chrys. well remarks, προκαταβάλλεται 
 τον ττευΊ των εϊδωλοθύτων λόγον, όν 
 
 μετά ταντα μέλλει γνμνάζεσΟαι. 
 μέθυσος was, in pure Greek, not used of a 
 man, but of a woman only. So Phrynichus, 
 p. 151 (but see Lobeck's note), μέθυσος 
 άνήρ οϋκ ίρεΊς, άλλα μεθυστικός• γυναίκα 
 δε ΐρείς μέθνσον κ. μεθύσην : and Pollux, 
 vi. 25 (Wetst.), μέθυσος ίπϊ ανδρών Με- 
 νήνδρψ δεδόσθω. — Seeing that μηδέ συν- 
 εσθίειν must imply a more complete separa- 
 tion than μή συναναμ'ιγνυσθαι, it cannot 
 be appUed to the α'γάπαι (as Mosheim, al.), 
 but must keep its general meaning, — ' not 
 even to sit at table with such an one.' 
 — This rule, as that in 2 Thess. iii. 15, re- 
 gards only their private intercourse with 
 the offending person : nothing is here said 
 of public excommunication, though for some 
 of these crimes it would be implied. 
 12.] Ground of the above limitation. 
 
 τί •γάρ μοι . . . .] ' for what con- 
 cern of mine is it . . . .' ' So ^Elian, Var. 
 H. vi. 11, τους δε άλλους εώ. τί γάρ 
 μοι κωφοϊς κ. άνοήτοις σνμβονλενειν τά 
 λυσιτίλίστατα ; See other exx. in Wetst. 
 
 τους εξω] reff. It was among the 
 Jews the usual term for the Gentiles. Cf. 
 Schottgen in loc. — He means, ' this might 
 have been easily understood to be my 
 meaning : for what concern have I with 
 pronouncing sentence on the world with- 
 out, or with giving rules of discipline 
 for them ? I could only have referred 
 to persons among yourselves.' 
 οΰχι τους εσω] " Ex eo, quod in ecclesia 
 fieri solet, interpretari debuistis monitum 
 meum, ver. 9. Gives judicatis, non alienos : 
 quanto magis ego." Bengel. But I am not 
 quite certain of this interp., which is also
 
 VI. 1, 2. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους Α. 
 
 483 
 
 VI. 
 
 " e 
 
 έτερον 
 α-γιων ; 
 
 ΤΓοα 
 
 7^* 
 
 ΎυΧμα τις υμών 
 
 ' ii f ' 1 - ^ 
 
 κρινεσυαι ίττι των αοικων 
 
 •'J " « h 
 
 υιο — - 
 
 η ουκ 
 
 d Rom. ii. 1 rcff. 
 
 reff. sxv. 9 al. 
 k = John iii. 17 al. fr. 
 
 εγωΐ' ΤΓΟΟς ΤΟΙ^ li = Acts v. is. 
 \ 5 \ { > \ - Rom- v-7• 
 
 και ουχί ίττί τώι/ i^^;^;^; 
 
 ff \ f k c here only. 
 
 ayiOl τον ΚΟσμον Κρί- Xen.Mem. 
 
 e = Ma(i.v.40. Gen.xxvi.21. Jobix.3. f = Acts xxiii.30 
 
 here only. See Gal. ii. 15 reff. h = Acts ix. 13 reff. i vv. 9, IB, 19. 
 
 iUTS OTl 01 
 
 See Dan. vii. 22. 
 
 Chhp. VI. 1. f ξ νμων A 17. 109-16-22-78 al syrr (not it v) Chrj Thdrt.— προς r. 
 iTtp. ττραγ. DEFG {πρ. τ. αίελφον αντ. ττρ. 1 19 Chr Thl) Thdrt Cypr al : πρ.'τ. tr. 
 om 177' : rov om B. — 2. rec om ?/ {as sitperfluous), with D^EJ &c : ins ABCD'FG 
 δ. 10. 17. 39. 73-4. 80. 1092-20 al it Syr arr arm {an ncscitis syr* ν g Cypr Aug al ; aut 
 nescitis d e Ambr Atnbrst) Clem Chr Dam Thl (not Thdrt Thdor-mops Oec) lat-ff. — 
 
 that of De Wette and Meyer, because it 
 would more naturally correspond to οϋχΐ 
 τονς ίσιο και υμύς κυίνίτί ; Α preferable 
 way seems to be this : ' My judgment was 
 meant to lead your judgment. This being 
 the case, what concern had I with those 
 without ? Is it not on those within, that 
 your judgments are passed ?' The arrange- 
 ment mentioned by Theophylact, and 
 adopted by Knatchbull, Hammond, Mi- 
 chaelis, Rosenm., al., οίιχί• τονς ίσω νμΰς 
 Kpivtre, ' No : those within do ye (imjier.) 
 judge' — is clearly wrong, for ουχί is no 
 answer to ri, and would require αλλά after 
 it, — even supposing μοί τονς ΐζω κρίνιιν 
 and τιινς ίσω ΰμης Kpivere formed any 
 intelligible logical contrast, which they do 
 not. 13.] ' But those who are with- 
 
 out God judgeth.' The pres. κρίνα both 
 e.xpresses better the attribute and office of 
 God, and answers better to the other pre- 
 setifs than the future Kpii'tl. I have there- 
 fore retained it. The future perhaps came 
 from Heb. xiii. 4. ' To judge those ivithout, 
 is God's inatter.' These remarks about 
 judging form a transition-point to the sub- 
 ject of the next chapter. But having now 
 linished his e.xplanation of the prohibition 
 formerly given, and with it the subject of 
 the fornicator among them, he gives, before 
 passing on, a plain command in terms for 
 the excommunication (but no more : not 
 the punishment mentioned in vv. 3— δ) of 
 the offender. And this he does in the very 
 words of Deut. xxiv. 7 (from which the 
 reading και ίΐ,αρϋτί has come). υμών 
 
 αντών is in Deut., but need not therefore 
 lose its emphatic force : ' from among your 
 own selves.' 
 
 Chap. VI. 1 — 11.] Prohibition to 
 
 SETTLE THEIR DIFFERENCES IN THE LE- 
 GAL COURTS OF THE HEATHEN : RATHER 
 SHOULD THESE BE ADJUDGED AMONG 
 THEMSELVES (I — 0) : BUT FAR BETTER 
 NOT TO aUARREL — RATHER TO SUFFER 
 WRONG, WAITING FOR JUSTICE TO BE 
 DONE AT THE COMING OF THE LoRD, 
 WHEX ALL WHO DO WRONG SHALL BE 
 EXCLUDED FROM HIS KINGDOM (0 — 11). 
 
 1.] On Γολ/ίςί, ' Dares . . . , ' Ben- 
 
 I 
 
 gel remarks, " Grandi verbo notatur laesa 
 majestas Christianorum." τις, no par- 
 
 ticutar individual, but 'any one:' for he 
 proceeds in the plur., vv. 4, 7- 
 πράγ|χα] So ref and Demosth. κατ. 'Στεφ. 
 a. p. 1120, τψ μεν v'ltl τψ τούτου ττυλΧών 
 ττρη-γμάτων όντων ου τταρεστί) πώττοτε 
 ονδ' ίβοι'ιθησεν ; κρίνβσθαι, reff. 'to 
 
 go to law.' So Eur. Med. 009, ώς• ού 
 κρινηνμαι TwvSt σοι τά πλείονα, — and 
 Anthol. ii. 30, δυςκώφφ δνςκωφος ίκρι- 
 νετο, και πολύ μάλλον ην ό κριτής τούτων 
 των ΰί'ο κωφότερος. Wetst. on ^latt. ν. 40. 
 — eiri (reff.), ' before,' as judges. των 
 
 αδίκων] ούκ ύττεν, επί των άπίητων, αλλ' 
 ίπί των άδικων, λίζιν θεις, »)ς μάλιστα 
 χρεΐανεΊχεν εις την προκειμίνην νττόθεσιν, 
 ωςτί άτΐοστρεφαι κ. άπαγαγείν. επειδή 
 γάρ περί δίκης αϋτφ 6 λόγος ην, οϊ δικα- 
 ζόμενοι δε ούδεν ο'ύτως επιζητοϋσιν, ώς 
 το πολλήν εΊΐ'αι πρόνοιαν του δικαίου 
 παρά τοΙς δικάζουσιν, εντεύθεν αΰτονς 
 αποτρέπει, μονυνουχι λέγων ποί φερι^ και 
 τι ποιείς, άνθρωπε, τουναντίον πάσχων ών 
 ίπιθνμης, και νπερ του των δικαίωΐ' τυ- 
 χην άδίκοις επιτρέπων ανθρώποις ; Chrys. 
 Hom. xvi. p. 137 β.— The Rabbinical pro- 
 hibitions against going to law before Gentiles 
 may be seen in Wetst. : e. g. " Statutum est, 
 ad quod omnes Israelitse obhgantur, eum qui 
 litem cum alio habet, non debere earn trac- 
 tare coram gentilibus." Tanchuma, xcii. 2. 
 και οΰχι e-ir. τ. αγίων] The Αρ. 
 does not mean that the Christians had their 
 courts of law, but that they should submit 
 their differences to courts of arbitration 
 among themselves. Such courts of arbi- 
 tration were common among the Jews. In 
 Jos. Antt. xiv. 10. 17> there is a decree by 
 which the Jews of Sardis are allowed the 
 
 use of a σύνοδος Ίδια και τόπος 
 
 "ίδιος, εν ψ τά τε πράγματα κ. τάς προς 
 άλληΧους άντιΧογίας κρίΐ'ονσι. — Thco- 
 doret shews, ώς ούκ εναντία ταντα τοις 
 προς 'Ρωμαίονς γραφύσιν (Rom. xiii. 
 1 ίΤ.) : — οϋ γαρ άντιτεη'ίΐν κελεύει τοΙς 
 άρχονσιν, άλλα το~ις ήϋικημίνοις νομο- 
 θετεί μι) κεχρησθαι τοις άρχουσι. [See 
 Stanley in loc, who thinks the existence of 
 such courts is here implied. But his sup- 
 I 2
 
 484 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 V[. 
 
 Ι Luke xi. 15. - 
 
 Ads xvii. 31, νουσιρ 
 
 but see notes. , 
 
 mliereonlv. f/TTF 
 
 Jer. xv.iS). <^"'<^ 
 
 η ver. 4. James k 
 
 ii.lionly. KplVOVUiV, 
 
 JudR. v. 10. " 
 
 ο here only t• ρ Luke xsi. 34 only t 
 
 , και ει 
 Κξ>ιτηξ)ίων 
 
 μητι 
 
 fXfr 
 
 κρίνεται ο κόσμος, 
 
 ουκ οιοα 
 4 
 
 αναί,ιοι 
 
 ■β 
 
 Τ£ 
 
 ιωτικα 
 
 ΟΤΙ ayyt 
 
 ίΧους 
 μεν οΰν 
 
 yJiστωv 
 γε '' βιωτικά 
 
 q = ver. 7. ch.ix.25. Pliil. ii. 23. 
 
 κρίνονσι G9. 73-1. 122 all lect 14 arm.— ti om D-' : inv FG.— 3. vv 3, 4, 5, 6 om A 
 
 (from ιστωΐ' ending ver 2, and also ver 6). — κριι ομη' arm. — for μητι yt, μητοι yt 73 Thl : 
 ΤΓοσω μαΧλοί' (exjjl) FG : quanto magis g ν Pel Bed. — 4. for μιν ουν, yovv FG. — 
 
 port of his view from the Ap. Constt. and the 
 Clementines, cir. a.d. 150, would only go 
 to shew that tlie Ap.'s injunction here had 
 been obeyed, and that those courts were the 
 result.] 2.] οΰκ οϊδατί (refT.) appeals to 
 
 an axiomatic truth. ol άγιοι τ. κ. κριν.] 
 
 ' that the saints shall judge the world ? ' — 
 i. e. as assessors of Christ, at His coming : 
 so Daniel vii. 22, ι/λθεί' ύ παλαιός ημερών, 
 i. e. το κρίμα έ'δωκεν άγίοις υψίστου : see 
 also Matt. xix. 28. So Calv., Beza, Grot., 
 Est., Wolf, Olsh., Billroth, Riickert, Meyer, 
 De Wette. All attempts to elude this plain 
 meaning of the words are futile : whether of 
 Chrys., Theophyl., Theodor.-Mops., Theo- 
 doret, Erasm., — κριΐ'υνσι δί ονχι αυτοί 
 καθήμενοι κ. \oyov απαιτούντες, άλλα 
 κατακρινοϋσι (Matt. χϋ. 41, 42), Chrys. 
 — for this would be no parallel to the case 
 in hand ; — or of Light., Vitringa, Bengel 
 (but only as a prceludium futurorurn), al., 
 — ' quod Christiani fuiuri shit magistralus 
 et judices in niundo,' Lightf., — which 
 does not satisfy ver. 3, nor agree with the 
 Ap.'s earnest persuasion (see 2 Cor. v., al., 
 and note on 2 Thess. ii. 2) that the coming 
 of Christ was near at hand : or of Mosheim, 
 Ernesti, Rosenm., ' quod Christiani pro- 
 fanos judicare possint,' Rosenm., in the 
 sense of ch. ii. 15, IG, — for no such mean- 
 ing can be conveyed by the future, which is 
 fixed here by the following κρινονμεν. 
 καί brings out an inconsequence or a con- 
 tradiction between the members of the sen- 
 tence, which it is the object of the question 
 to remove: so Xen. Cyr. iv. 3. 11, άλλ' 
 ε'ιπυι CIV τις, 'ότι παίδες όντες εμάνθανον. 
 και πότερα τταΊδές εϊσι ψρονιμώτεροι ίόςτε 
 μαθεΊν τα φραζήμενα κ. δεικνίψενα η 
 άνδρες ; see Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 147- 
 ev υμΐν] Chrys. attempts by this 
 prepos. to defend his view (see above), — 
 ov yap είπεν, v<p' υμών, όλλ', εν ϊ>μ~ιν 
 (' exemplo vestro '). But in vain : nor as 
 Grot., al., is iv, by : — for κρίνεσθαι εν is 
 the expression for to be judged before, as 
 judges : the judges being the vehicle of 
 judgment, its conditioning element, as in 
 Acts xvii. 31. So Aristides, Platon. ii.p.214 
 (Wetst.), — η»ίς ήδη λέγονται τών ηρώων 
 εν θίοϊς" δικασταΊς κριθήναι, and Polyb. 
 V. 29, ΐΐτολεμαΐον .... κρίνος εν τοΙς 
 Μακεδόσπ' άπίκτεινε. See other exx. in 
 Wetst. Hence (Meyer) by this ' coram 
 
 vobis,' it appears plainly, though it might 
 be otherwise inferred from the context, that 
 the Saints are to be the judges, sitting in 
 judgment. ανάξιοι έστ. κριτ. Ιλαχ.] 
 
 ' are ye unworthy of (i. e. to hold or pro- 
 nounce) the most trivial judgments?' 
 κριτήρια cannot be, as usually rendered, 
 ' matters to be judged :' it signifies either 
 (1) criteria, lit. or metaphor., which sense 
 is irrelevant here: (2) tribunals, courts of 
 justice : — so Glossar. κριτήριον, δικαστή- 
 piov, and Polyb. ix. 33. 12, κοιν'υν εκ 
 πάντων τών Ελλήνων καθίσας κριτήριον, 
 — or (3) judgments held in such courts, 
 judicia, — as Lucian, bis accus. (§ 25, p. 
 253, ed. Hagan. 152C) ; Hermes describes 
 Pyrrhon as being not in court, 'ότι ούδεν 
 ηγείται κριτήριον ΰληβες είναι. Δι. τοι- 
 γαροΰν ερήμην αυτυϋ καταδικάτωααν. 
 The last meaning suits both this place and 
 ver. 4. So Cicero speaks of ' in privatis 
 minimarum rerum judiciis.' Here, they are 
 ελάχιστα in comparison with the weighty 
 judgments which shall beheld hereafter; = 
 βιωτικά, ver. 4. 3.] The same glorious 
 
 office of Christians is again referred to, 
 and even a more striking point of contrast 
 brought out. αγγέλους] always, 
 
 where not otherwise specified, good angels .• 
 and therefore here ; the λειτουργικά πνεύ- 
 ματα of Heb. i. 14: but exactly how we 
 shall judge them, is not revealed to us. 
 Chrys., Theodoret, Oecum., Theophyl., and 
 most Comm. interpret it of bad angels, or 
 of bad and good together : and Chrys. as 
 before, understands that the bad angels will 
 be condemned by comparison with us, 'όταν 
 yap αϊ ασώματοι δυνάμεις αύται ελαττον 
 ι'ΐμών εύρεθώση' εχουσαι τών σάρκα περί- 
 βεβλημ'ει>ων, χαλεπώτερον δώσουσι δίκην. 
 But see above on ver. 2. Ηΐ^ητι γ€, 
 
 ' to say nothing of,' ' ut omittam .•' so 
 Demosth. p. 24. 23, οΰκ 'tvi δ' αυτόν 
 αργυϋντα ούδε τυΐς ψίλοις επιτάττειν 
 υπέρ αντοϋ τι ποιειν, μη τι γε δη τοΧς 
 θεοΊς. See Hartung, Partikellehre, ii. 155. 
 βιωτικά, matters relating to ό βίος, 
 a man's livelihood : see reff. and Clem. 
 Alex. Strom, vii. p. 873, θλιβόμενον επι- 
 κουψιζει παραμνθίαις . . . , τα'ϊς βιωτικαΐς 
 χρείαις ετΓΐκουρ{!}ν. It is a word of later 
 Greek usage, see Lexx. In classic Greak it 
 would be τά του βίου. — The meaning here 
 then will be ' civil causes,' matters oimeuni
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 485 
 
 " κριτηηια £αν έχ^ίτε, τους '^ (ζουθίνημίνονς iv rri e/c/cX/j- "^ ^^Τ^'"^'^ 
 
 επι αγι- 
 
 ωκ. FG 
 
 ABCD 
 
 EJ 
 
 Θ>Ϋ ,ΐ ^ t ' •^ ' " \ / S trails., Lake 
 
 iCf~£. ΤΓοος εΐ'Γθθ7Γ7)ΐ' υμιν λε-νω. χχπ. so. 
 
 U " ' ν >' » ' - 'ν • 1 -Cv r Λ Λ / Acts ϋ. 30. 
 
 ούτως ουκ evi tv υμιν σοψος ^ ουόε εις, ος ουνϊϊσεται ''^„'';iy''-^ 
 ciaKptvai - ανα μ^σον του αοίΑψου αυτού , άλλα αοεΛ- ■προ^^Λ. 
 
 \ ^'^λ, -e ' ζ > - f'^a'' vii.ofirefr. 
 
 φος μ(τα αοίλώου κρινίται, και τούτο επι αττιστωΐ'. «-M.tt.xsvi. 
 
 ' ' ΓΙ' 411. Mnrk vii. 
 
 18. John xviii. 22. Gal. iii. 3. ν = here only. (Luke xi. 41 only. )t Gnl. iii. i8 reft. 
 
 w Mnlt. x.wii. 14. John i. 3. Acf.'i iv. 32. Rom. iii. 10. 2 Kings xiii. .10. χ = here only. Exod. 
 
 xviii. Hi. y Matt xiii. 2ή. Rev. τϋ. 17 only. Isa. Ivii. 5. Exod. xi. 7. constr., here only. 
 
 ζ Rom. xiii. 11. a = ch. vii. 12, 13-15. x. 27. xiv. 22, 23. 2 Cor. vi. 14, 15. 1 Tim. v. 8. 
 
 f^fTf F. — tv om 44. — for τούτους, κηιτας arm. — τΓΐ>ο<αθιζ(τε 19 : constituite ad judi- 
 canduni ν Ambrst Pelag Ambr. — 5. ληλω Β. — όντως και 109. — rec for ivi, ίστιι> {corrn 
 to simpler ivord), with DEFG &c Ath : t.xt BCJ very many mss Clir Thdrt Dam Thl 
 Oec al. — ovht ίΐς om D'E d' e seth Ath ; ovung σοφ. BC 17• 39. 46. 57- 73 al copt Dam ; 
 ovCt εις σοφ. FG 37. 7Ί. 120 g Aug al ; bef νμιν slav : τις σηφος tv νμ. arm : t.xt D^J 
 most m.ss syrr ν Chr (σοφ. tv νμ. Clir). (Met/ explains the omn of ovSt εις by similarity 
 of terminalions, σοφός and ος : but this u-ould have led to the omn of ος also.) — ος oj' 
 J. — ανακριναι 73. 115-19-21 al. — μεταξύ Chr. — αδελφών Ambrj : α!>ε\φιην κ. τον 
 ηδεΧφην Syr arr. — 6. for μετά, νπο iO',)-']a. — for rouro, ταντα CD^ (τούτα) 73 syr-marg 
 Thdrt. — for επι, μετά D' : εν μέσω arm. — at end, add και ov (sic) επι άγιων FG g. — 
 
 and luiim, as De Wette. The sense is best 
 with only a comma at κρινονμεν. 
 4.] βιωτικά is emphatically repeated, as 
 being the only sort of κριτήρια which were 
 in question here. Meyer compares Herod, 
 vii. 104, TCI av ίκίΐΐ'ος avoyyy άνώγει 
 δε τώύτό άεί, and Aristoph. Ran. 287 f• 
 (i€v oiv, ' immo vera,' reff. (see below). 
 It corrects a foregoing misapprehension : 
 so Soph. CEd. Col. 31, " ή δενρο ττρος- 
 στειχοντα κάζορμώμενον ;" "και δη μεν 
 ουν τταρήντη." Hartung, Partikell. ii. 400. 
 κριτήρια, again, not matters to be 
 judged, but 'judgments:' the matters 
 about which, are expr. in βιωτικά. — The 
 following words may be rendered in two 
 ways: either, (o) ' Yea, rather (so far from 
 remembering your high prospect, of judg- 
 ing angels, your practice is,) // i/e have in 
 hand judgments concerning civil matters, 
 — those men who are of no account in 
 the church (viz. the heathen), those you 
 set up (place on the bench) as judges' (i. e. 
 by bringing your causes before them, you 
 set them up as judges over you), καθίζω 
 occurs in this sense in Plato, Legg. i.x. p. 
 873, iav δε άφνχόν τι ψυχΓ/ς ανθμωπον 
 OTtpljay, . . . δικαστήν μεν avTiij καθιζίτω 
 των γειτόνων τον ίγγϋτατον ό ττίιοςν,κων 
 γίνει, — and Polyb. ix. 'Λ'.\. 12, cited above 
 on κριτήηιον. Thus, making καθίζ. in- 
 dicative. Valla, Castal., Luther, Calov., 
 Wolf, al., Schrader, RUckert, Olsh., De 
 Wette, Meyer. But (β) Syr., Vulg., Chrys., 
 Theodoret, Theophyl., Erasm., Beza, Calvin, 
 Grot., Estius, Bengel, Wetst., al., take 
 καθίζετε as imperative, and τους ίζονθεν. 
 εν τ. ίκκΧ. as ' rninimos de piorum plebe.' 
 So E. V. : ' set them to judge who are 
 least esteemed in the church.' And to 
 this last interpretatiim I am inciintd to ac- 
 cede, both from the context and from the 
 
 arrangement of the words. The context is 
 this: ' Your office is to judge ejiyefc;' mere 
 business causes of this world are almost 
 beneath your notice. If such causes arise 
 among you (he continues in a lofty irony) 
 set those to judge them who are of no ac- 
 count among you : — do not go out of your 
 own number to others to have them judged : 
 the meanest among you is capable of doing 
 it. Let it be noticed that he is passing to 
 ver. 7, where he insists on the impropriety 
 oi βιωτικά KpiT. between Christians at alt, 
 and is here depreciating them ironically. — 
 But the arrangement and constr. of the 
 words are even more strongly in favour of 
 the imperative rendering. For (1) on the 
 other, no account is given of the emphatic 
 position of βιωτικά. (2) the μεν ovv is 
 not so naturally rendered (see above) ' yea 
 rather your course is,' as ' yea rather let 
 your practice be :' it expresses more natu- 
 rally a subjective correction, in the mind of 
 the speaker, than an objective one : see 
 below, ver. 7• (3) if the sentence had re- 
 ferred to their existing practice of going 
 before heathen tribunals, it would have 
 been expressed not βιωτικά μεν ovv κριτ. 
 εάν εχητε, but β. μ. ουν κρ. 'έχοντες, as in 
 ver. ι. (4) οΊ ίζονθενημ'ενηι ίν τι) ίκκ. 
 are much more naturally ' the despised in 
 (within) the church,' than tho.'ie irho in 
 (the estimation of) the church are held of 
 no account. Meyer argues against this 
 that it would be in this case τους ίΚυνΟ. 
 τους 'εν Ttj ϊκκλ., but surely he can hardly 
 be serious, or I do not understand him 
 rightly. (5) καθίζετε applies much better 
 to the appoititing judges over a matter 
 among themselves, than to going before 
 judges already appointed. (Ii) as to the 
 objection that on this rendering thevvord 
 'rather' must be inserted, τοίτοΐ'ς //ολλοί'
 
 486 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Λ. VI. | 
 
 bTer.4. 7 ^^η ^ μΐχ, ουν ^ ο\ως ^ ηττημα ύμίν ζστιν οτι ^ κριματα abcd 
 
 ■^ oil": ''isa.^ έ'χετε μίθ' ^ ΐαυτων. ^ Βιατί ουχί μάλλον "^ αδίκεΐσθε ; 
 e i'ifere*'oniy. ^ διατί oi»v« μάλλον '^' αττοσηοΗσΰί ; άλλα u^trg οΟΓΚτειτε 
 
 Exod. XTiii. Λ. __ ^ _, ' rs \ , ' Q k <^ ' >'?> 
 
 fiEph.iv.32 Κ"ΐ αποστερείτε, /cat τούτο αόελφους. ί} ουκ οίόατε 
 
 gMatt. ix. 14 ΟΤΙ α'^ικοι Βίοϋ ' βασιλείαν ου κ:ληροΐ'θ|αΐ]σουσΐ)' ; '" Μτ} 
 
 al. Num. xi. „ ' , »' ο ' ^ λ Λ ' '' Ρ 
 
 h = i.ereoniy. ττλανασθε. ουτε " πορίΌΐ ουτε ειόωλολατραι ούτε ^ μοι- 
 
 raT/fi/eT χοί ούτε ναλακοί ούτε ""αρσενοκοίται ^° ούτε ' κλεττται 
 
 i = Mark^x: ουτε * ττλεονεκ-ται, ου "μέθυσοι, ου "^ \οΊοοξ>θί, ουχ α^- 
 
 kver. 2. 1 -Matt. τ. ό. ch XV. .5(1. Gal. ν. 21. ^ πι Matt.xxii. 29 al. cli. χν. 33. Gal. 
 
 vi 7 Jameii Hial. η ch. v. !1 relT. ο ch. v. 11 reft. pLukexviii.il. Hcb. 
 
 xiii.'4. J^me.s iv. 4 fvar. read.) only. Job xxiv. Ifi. . q = here only. (Matt.xi. 8. Lnkevii 2.. 
 
 only. Prov. xxvi. 22.) rlTim. i.lu See Levit. xviii. 22. s Matt. Ti. 19 al. Obad. 5. 
 
 t ch. v^ lOreff. u ch. v. 11 reff. 
 
 7. for Tjirj, (ίου slav (not mod).— oui' om D^ 3. 17- 74. 108-lG al copt it ν lat-ff.— όλως 
 cm A Syr ath. — rec bef υμ. ins εΐ' {supplementary), with mss ν al Orig Thl : but om 
 ABCDEJ most mss d e syrr copt slav Bas Chr Thdrt Oec Antioch. — 8. κρψα 109. — for 
 μάλλον . . . ουχί, — νμίΐς αδικίΐσθε και ουχί νμ(ις arm : f tart to νστ. om 108 : i^tart to 
 αίικ-£ίΓ£ 109: αποστίΐιΐισθε and αδικΐΐσθ( are transposed in J (Scholz). — αλλ D'J &c. — 
 for νμίΐς, αντοι Chr Thl. — rec for τούτο, ταύτα {prob corrn because two things, ηίικ. 
 and ατΓοστ., are mentd), with J &c syr al Chr Thdrt al : txt ABCDE 17- 31. 4G. 67'• 73. 
 80. 109 al it ν copt slav-ms Antioch lat-fiF. — 9. rec βασιΚ. Qtov {as belotv in ver 10), 
 with J &c vss (appy) Clem Chr Thdrt al lat-fF: t.xt ABCDE 17- 37• 46. 178 9 al.— ου 
 om 93 (see on ver 10).— ου? £ (everv time) DE (and in ver 10). — 10. ου. ττλ. ov. κλιπτ. Ό -J 
 44. 67. 80. 113 al syrr al Cleni Chr Thdrt Dam Thl: ovr. πλ. om 3. 35. 42. 238 al 
 Clem, Orig.— rec ουΓ£ μ(θ., with B(e sil)(DE oui'f)J &c Ath, Thl Oec: tst AC 31-9. 
 46. 71-3-4 al Clem, Athj Juhan in Epiph Chr Thdrt. — θίου βασ. DE.— rec ου κλ7}ρ. 
 {prob from tvriting the ov of θεού twice over: the mistake being perpetuated, or even 
 the readg occasioned, by the ου κληρ. of ver 9. This seems a more likely account than 
 that a variation belw the two vv shotild have been sanctioned by perpetuating an accidental 
 omn of the ov), with J all Ign (but readg varies. Coteler has κΧηρονομησαι δύνανται, 
 omg ου) Athi Ps-Ath Chr (mSj) Cyr-jerus Thdrt (in loc) Thl : txt ABCDE 17- 46. 57• 67". 
 
 καθίζετε, it has no force, for no such sup- universal arbitrator, — and confines the 
 plement is required. The command is ab- appointment of the arbitrator to each pos- 
 solute, but given to shew them the absurdity sibly arising case respectively. 6.] 
 of their going to law about βιωτικά at all, {It seems not to be so) : 'but,' &c., as in 
 rather than ύοηα/ί /e. 5.] irpos «ντρ. ver. I. — αλλά after a question passes 
 ίιμ.. λ€'γω refers to the ironical command in rajiidly on to the other alternative, the 
 ver. 4 — ' I say this to put you to shame. ' particle negativing the question being sup- 
 ουτως] 'Is there SO completely alack of all pressed. So Xen. Mem. i. 2.2, πώς ovv 
 wise men among you . . .' He now sug- αύτος ων τοιούτος άλλους αν ασεβείς . . . 
 gests the more Christian way of settling their εττοιησεν ; Ά\\' έπαυσε μεν τοΰτιον ττηλ- 
 diiferences, viz. by arbitration : and asks, λοϋς, άρετης ποιήσας ίττιθυμε'ιν. See 
 ' Are you come to this, that you are obliged Hartung, Partikellehre, ii. 37. 7.] 
 καθιζειν any δικηστάς at all, — ' have you He gives his own censure of their going to 
 no wise man among you (ούίέ £ίς, 'quod law at all. μένουν as above, ver. 4. 
 est vehementius, cum sitis tam multi,' όλως, ' altogether,' without the aggrava- 
 Erasm.) who shall be able (in such event) tion of tnl άπιστων. ήττημα, 'a 
 to decide (as arbitrator) between his bro- falling short,' viz. of your inheritance of 
 ther (i. e. his brethren) ? ' This last is a the kingdom of God — a hindrance in the 
 har?h method of expression, and apparently way of your salvation : see ver. 9 : — not as 
 only to be accounted for by the strong sin- ordinarily understood (see esp. Estius in 
 gular form of ούΗ εΙς having attracted the loc), a moral delinquency (cf. the usage in 
 other into the singular likewise, so that reft'.), nor an ι)ττασβαι τ?) opyy, as Oecvmi. 
 instead of σοφυι οι δυνήσονται διακρ. κρίματα, ' matters of dispute,' lead- 
 άνά μέσον των αδελφών αυτών, we have ing to κρυ^ίσθαι ; not ^^ κρίσεις, — ;i£0' Ιανι- 
 σαψυς ος δυνίισεται διακρ. άι•ά μ. του άδ. των, ' with one another ' (reff.), as being 
 αΰτοϋ. But it is not without use : it pre- brethren in Christ. — άδικεΐσθί and άττοστε- 
 vents the apparent inference, which might ρ€Ϊσθ€ not passives, but middle (cf. Bern- 
 be made if τών αδελφών αύτοϋ were used, hardy. Syntax, chap. viii. § 4, p. 346 : Me- 
 that one wise man was to be apipointed nander, frag. : ούΓος κοάτιστός ΐστ' δινήρ,
 
 7—12. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 487 
 
 παγες, βασιΑίίαν θεού κΧηρονομησουσιν. κ:αι ^ τα ura ν see jnhnxv. 
 
 τινίς ητί' αλλά '" άπίλούσασΟε, άλλα " ηγιόσθ/ίτε, αλλ' "oniy! ^jf,b ίχ*! 
 
 y ;^ .. ' Λ ζ ' ~ ■> , - , .J _ χ ζ » 3ιι. SceRev'. 
 
 εόικαιωυητε eu τω ονόματι του κυρίου ΐησου και εν ί.ά. 
 
 ~ , „ .J ^, , _ χ Rom. XT. 16 
 
 τω ττνίυματι του υεου ημών. ΙΓ'''^^ ... „„ 
 
 ι "^ 'Γ y Rom. 111. 20, 
 
 12 a π ' ''y ' Λ Λ * ' ' b , ' 30. v. ι al. 
 
 Ιΐαντα μοι εί:,εστιν, αΛΛ ου τταντα συμφέρει. z = Actsxiii. 
 " τταντα μοι εζεστιν, αλλ ουκ εγω '^ εζ,ουσιασθησομαι υπό """^'"Τ'^^"^ 
 
 χ. 23. b con.str., cli. χ. 23. 2 Cor. viii. 10. c Lake xsii. 25. ch. τϋ. 4 
 
 only. Eocl. ix. 17. play on words, ch. iii. 17 al. 
 
 72. 121-3 all Meth Julian Athj Chr Thdrtj Dam Oec Polycarp (citing freely).— 11. for 
 ταντα τινις, tunc quid (rort rt .') slav : haec aliquando d e Sedul. — a\\a and αλλ var : 
 txt B. — bef ίδικ., om aWa 67" Chr (te.xt) Iren^ (inSj) Tert Cyprj Vig. — κνη. ημών ιησ. 
 χριστού BC (appy) al ν syrr (but ημών and χρ. syr*) al Orig Athj all Irenj Cypr al ; 
 κυρ. ι»/σ. χρ. D'(E ?) al d e Iran, (^Dommi nostri once) Tert Did Augj ; κυρίου (only) 
 
 sense of progressive sanctification, but so 
 that whereas before you were unholy, by 
 the reception of the Holy Ghost you became 
 dedicated to God and holy), but ye were 
 justified (by faith in Christ, you received 
 the δικαιοσύνη Btov, Rom. i. 17), in tlie 
 Name of the Lord Jesus, and in the 
 (working of the) Holy Spirit of our God.' 
 These two last clauses must not be fanci- 
 fully (as IMeyer, al.) assigned amongst the 
 preceding. They belong to all, as De 
 Wette rightly maintains. The spiritual 
 washing in baptism, the sanctification of 
 the children of God, the justification of the 
 believer, are all wrought in the Name of the 
 Lord Jesus, and are each and all the work 
 of the Spirit of our God. — By the ημών 
 again, he binds the Corr. and himself toge- 
 ther in the glorious blessings of the gospel- 
 state, and mingles the oil of joy with the 
 mourning which by his reproofs he is re- 
 luctantly creating. 
 
 12 — 20.] Correction of an abuse of 
 the doctrine of christian freedom 
 which some among them had m.\de, 
 that, as meats were indifferent, so 
 
 WAS FORNICATION (vv. 12 17)• STRONG 
 
 PROHIBITION OF, AND D1SSUAS1ΛΈ FROM 
 
 THIS SIN (vv. 18—20). 12.] .State- 
 
 ment of the true doctrine of Christianfree- 
 doni. ττάντα |xoi e'lecmv are the bona 
 
 fide words of the Ap. himself, not, as some 
 have understood them, the saying of an op- 
 ponent cited by him. For (1) the sentiment 
 is a true Christian axiom : πάντα being of 
 course understood, as it evidently was even 
 by the abusers of the doctrine, of things 
 (supposed by them) αδιάφορα. (2) It is 
 not introduced by any clause indicative of 
 its being the saying of another, which is 
 Paul's habit in such cases, see Rom. i.x. 19 ; 
 xi. 19. (3) The Ap. does not either deny 
 or fjualify the ί'ξεστιν, but takes up the 
 matter from another jioiiit of view, viz. the 
 σνμιρ'ίρίΐ. The μοι is spoken in the jierson 
 of Christians generally. " Sa;pe Paulus 
 prima persona singulare cloquitur quae vim 
 
 ώ Topyin, οςτίς άδικίΐσθσι ττΧηστ ίπι- 
 στάται βρότων : Hesiod. tpy. 347, tv μίν 
 μίτρίίσβαι παρά ytirovoc, ίύΰ' άποδοΰ}•αι) 
 — ' allow yourselves to be wronged and 
 defrauded.' See Matt. v. 39 if. 8.] 
 
 cannot be, as Meyer, a continuation of the 
 question, on account of the emphatic {j/xtTc, 
 which would thus be without meaning. 
 The account of this emphatic ϋμίΐς is to be 
 found in an ellipsis after άποστίρί'Ίσθί to 
 the effect, ' as our Lord commanded in His 
 disciples,' or 'as it behoves the followers of 
 Christ.' Then νμης comes in conti-ast : 
 ' YOU on the contrary (ήλλά, see above 
 ver. 6) do wrong, and defraud, and that 
 (your), brethren. 9.] ' Ye commit 
 
 wrong :' this looks as if you had forgotten 
 the rigid exclusion from the kingdom of 
 God of all wrong-doers of every kind (in- 
 cluded here under άδικοι); see Gal. v. 21. 
 μή ιτλανάσθί] This caution would 
 be most salutary and needful in a dissolute 
 place like Corinth. It is similarly used, and 
 with an express reference to byi\iai κακαί, 
 ch. XV. 33. iropvoi refers back to ch. v., 
 
 and is taken up again, vv. 12 ff. μαλακοί 
 
 = παθικοΊ (see in Wetst.). μ€θυσοι, see 
 
 on ch. V. II. 11.] ' These things were 
 
 the former state of some among you : but 
 ye are now in a far different state.' — I can- 
 not think with Meyer that ταοτα is used 
 in contempt, such a horde, or rabble .• it is 
 rather ' of such a kind,' ' these things, 
 were some of you {nvtc, limits the νμύς 
 which is the suppressed subject of ητί) : 
 but ye washed them off (viz. at yoiu• bap- 
 tism. The I aor. mid. cannot by any pos- 
 sibility be passive in signification, as it is 
 generally, for doctrinal reasons, here ren- 
 dered. On the other hand the middle 
 sense has no doctrinal import, regarding 
 merely the fact of their having submitted 
 themselves to Christian baptism. See ref. 
 Acts) but (there is in the rejjetition of 
 άλλί/, the triumph of one who was under 
 God the instrument of this mighty change) 
 ye were sanctified (not in the dogmatic
 
 488 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 Λ^Ι. 
 
 ''χί"')5ΊΓ^ τίνος. ^^ τα ^^ βρωματα τρ ^κοιλία, κα\ η ^κοιλία τοΊς 
 
 Msrkvii.lil. (Ι /Λ / . ' ^^ ΙΛ ^ < ee / '« te - f ' 
 
 Lukeui. 11. ροωμοσιν ο ci ϋίος και ταντηι> και ταύτα καταξ)•γΐ}σ(ΐ. κ. και 
 
 Τ-ϊρΙι iv 10 ^ ^^ *" "* "^ Ο. ' 'ΛΛ^"* ' \ ^ f ταύτα. .« 
 
 siii.Honiy.' το ot σώμα ου τ\] πορνεία, αΛΛα τω κυριο), και ο κυοιος abcd 
 
 e = Matt. χι. ~ / . 14 *■ ^^ /Ι * ^ ^ ' 1ι '' \ KJK 
 
 17. Rt^v.x.!), τω σωαατι ο οε Ι/εος κ^^οί τοι» κυοιον riytioiv, και 
 
 10. 2 Kings ^ι_.'7 „ .^ „ Λ/ 1 - l^k'* './'^ 
 
 2Chron. xxi. iif'"C ' έζεγ^Ρ^' ^'^ TTjc οκΐΌ/ιιεως ουτοΰ. ^ ου /c ο'ιόοτε fg ouk 
 
 15, 19. ' ' « ' Ν / , _ 1 ,^ - , ,η ,/ r; oiA,jT£. 
 
 eeSeech vii.7. ΟΤΙ TO σωίΐατα νμων μίλη Λ/ριστον εσην ; αράς ονν abcd 
 
 Rcim.iii. :ί. ch. xiii. 8. Ezra i τ 21. gch.v. IrefT. h = Matt. x. 8 hI. xiv. 2. xvi. 21 al. Isa. xxvi. 19. ,^ 
 
 i — hereiinly. (Ki)iii. ix 17 only. ΕχοΊ. ix. 16.) kvy.1',9. 1 Rom. vi. 13 reff. = Rom. xii. 4. ""^ 
 
 m = Malt. xxi. 21. John ii. lU. xi. 3'J. xx. 1. Eph. iv. 31. 
 
 Clem (omg iv twice) : t.vt AD^(E?)J most mss vss Thl Oec. — 14. Se om 80. — rec υμάς, 
 with a few mss (apjiy) {error? Mey thinks, perhaps from Rom \\n. 11): txt ABCDEJK 
 most mss vss ajipy gr-lat-fl' : add συν αυτω syr-marg slav Jer. — for tξεyfp(ι, -ytipei 
 AD' 9S d e ; -ijyupsv Β 67^ : stiscitavit am harl (but fju, for -bit.^) ; tytpti U)0 : t.xt (see 
 note) CD^EJ mss (nrly) ν (see above) syrr copt seth al Ath (mss : cytpa ed) Chr Thdrt 
 al Iren Archel Tert all. — 15. η ουκ ¥0.~ημων A 238. — εστίν om FG. — for αράς, ημα 
 
 habent gnomes : in bac praesertim epistola, 
 ver. 1.5. cb. vii. 7; viii. 13; x. 23. 29. 30; 
 xiv. 11." Bengel. σ-υμφ€ρ€ΐ ] 'are 
 
 advantageous ' — in tbe most general sense : 
 distinguished from οίκο^ομεΊ, ch. x. 23, 
 where the words again occur. Meyer cites 
 from Theodor. AIops., — έττειί;) yap οΰ 
 ττάντα σνμφίρίι, δηλον ώς οΰ ττασι χρη- 
 στί ην, άλλα Γοίς ώφελοϋσι μόνοις. 
 αλλ' οΰκ Ιγώ Ιξ.] Meyer thinks that the 
 εγώ here has an emphasis, as meaning the 
 real J, my moral personality. But this can 
 hardly be so ; the real emphasis is on oiV, 
 and ίγώ corresponds to μοι, expressed more 
 to bring out the first person as the sample 
 of Christians in general, than for any such 
 formal distinction. €|ουσιασθήσο|Λ.αι] 
 
 ' I will not be deprived of my freedom by 
 any practice ;' — i. e. indulge in any prac- 
 tice which shall mar this liberty and ren- 
 der it no real freedom, making me to be 
 one under εξουσία, instead of one exercising 
 it. The play on εζεση and εξουσία cannot 
 be given in English. 13, 14.] " a 
 
 cibis ad venerem non valet consequentia." 
 Bengel. The argument is, — meats (of which 
 he doubtless had often impressed on them 
 that thei/ were αδιάφορα, whence the abuse) 
 are expressly created for the belly, and the 
 belly for them, by its organization being 
 fitted to assimilate them : and both these 
 are of a transitory nature : in the change to 
 the more perfect state, God will do away 
 with both. Therefore meats are αδιάφορα. 
 But neither is the body created for forni- 
 cation, nor can this transitoriness be predi- 
 cated of it : the body is for the Lord, and 
 the Lord (in his mediatorial work) for the 
 body : and God raised up the Lord, and 
 will raise up us (i. e. our bodies) : so that 
 the body is not perishable, and (resumed 
 ver. 18) he that fornicates, sins against his 
 own body. Therefore, fornication is not 
 an αδιάφοροι'. — It is very remarkable how 
 these vv. contain the germ of three weighty 
 
 sections of the Ep. about to follow, and 
 doubtless in the Ap.'s mind when he wrote 
 them, (1) the relation between the sexes : 
 
 (2) the cpiestion of meats offered to idols : 
 
 (3) the doctrine of the Resurrection of the 
 Body. See Neander, Pfl. u. Leit. p. 401, 
 note 21. 13.] τη κοιλ., scil. iarir. 
 The belly is their appointed receptacle — 
 they, its appointed pabulum. Of course 
 even this part of the argument must be un- 
 derstood within the limits of ού πάντα 
 συμφέρει. ό δε θ. . . καταργ.] viz. at 
 the appearing of the Lord : when, ch. xv. 
 ul, 52, we shall be changed from a σώμα 
 ι\/υχίκόν, to be a σώμα πνευματικόν : not, 
 at death. τή ττορν.] The body was 
 not made for the practice of fornication. 
 The reciprocal subserviency of the belly 
 and meats is shewn by their coextensiveness 
 in duration, and perishing together : but 
 when πορνεία (and even that lawful use 
 which is physically the same, but which is 
 not here contemplated) shall have for ever 
 past away, the body shall be subserving its 
 real use — that of being an instrument for 
 the Lord's work. κ. ό κυρ. τω σώμ..] 
 not, only for the body : but ' for the body ;' 
 to sanctify our bodies by His Spirit, and 
 finally to glorify them for Himself, see Rom. 
 viii. 11. This final reference must not be 
 excluded here, though it is not the prin- 
 cipal thought : — rather, the redemption of 
 the body from sin, and making it into a 
 member of Himself by the Spirit. 14.] 
 So far from the case of the Lord and the 
 body answering to the other, God ' raised 
 up the Lord (Rom. viii. ll,al. fr.), and 
 will raise up us too by His Power.' I 
 cannot adopt here the reading {iEήyειpεl'), 
 or the view, of Meyer. He holds, that all 
 reference to the resurrection, as a thing 
 
 future, is out of place ; that the Ap. refers 
 to the virtual and proleptic resurrection 
 which has already taken place in the case 
 of the believer, as Eph. ii. 6. Col. ii. 1 2, —
 
 13-18. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 489 
 
 Ιίλ) 
 
 το μίΛη 
 "γενοιτυ. 
 
 1 'λ . ρ ^ η = Matt. ίν. 
 
 μίλη , '^ μη ,<κ Jobnvi. 
 
 16 k *^ ' >"> " 'η Λ Λ ' - ο ' 1^"'• 
 
 ,. ^...^ οιοατε ΟΤΐ ο KoAAdJiifvnr τίΐ ττοηνιι o.MHtt.xxi.ai, 
 
 ποίΐϊσω πόρνης 
 
 1 
 
 του -χριστού 
 
 jj ουκ οιόοτε οτγ ο ' κοΛΛωμίΐΌς τΐ] ~ ττορν?; "sl^'L^k' 
 εν σώμα ίστιν', ' Εσονται yao ^ [φ»]σιΐ'_] οι δυο ** ίίς σάο /ca ρκ™,','ϋί.. 
 
 17 δέ 
 ψίυγίτε 
 πο/ί)σ?7 ανθρωτΓος, 
 
 μιαν 
 
 18 t 
 
 κολλωμενος τω κυριω εν ττνενμα εστίν, q Aitv.isreff. 
 
 '^ '■_f'•,, '^., .. Ste Matt. XIX. 
 
 T7JV " πυρνειαν. παν ^ αμάρτημα 
 
 " έκτος του σώματος εστίν' 
 
 tOV rcllips.,ch.xv. 
 
 f ρ\\ 27. (SceRum. 
 
 Ο Οε ίν• 3. ίχ. 17. 
 
 1 Tim. ν. 18.) 
 
 sGen. ϋ.24. =Lnkeiii. 5. Rnm.ii.2fi. Gen. XV. 6. .^s = Dent. χ. 20. xi. 22. 4Kingsxviii.fi. Jer. 
 
 xiii. 11. t — ih X. 14. 1 Tjtn. vi. 11. 2 Tim. ii. 22. Paul only. u cli. v. 1 rcff. ν Mark 
 
 iii. 28, 30. Rom. ill. 2<) only. Isa. Iviii. 1. w = John viii. 34. 2 Cor. xi. 7 al. χ 2 Cor. xii. 2, 3. 
 
 (Acts xxvi. 22. ch xv. 27. J'ldg. viii. 26.) 
 
 many mss Did (text-ed) Dam (do); η apa FG. — for τα μ(\η, το σώμα λ^, — ποιησομιν 
 Did: ποιησομαι lect 8. — jutXij ττορνης DEFG 93 lect 8 vss latff. — μη γβΐ'. om arm-ed. 
 — 16. η om DEJK many mss syr Marcion in Epiph, Epiph Dial Thdrt (;ns) Dam Thl 
 Tert (an nescitis ν al Jer) : t.xt ABCFG al vss Clem Orig Chr Thdrt (ed) Oec Cypr al. — 
 ψησιν om A Epiph Cypr Ambr (Tert). — μιαν to πορνειαν om 1 15. — 18. <pvyiTt FG. — ο au 
 
 and thinks that the reading fSfyfpfT has 
 arisen from not seeing this. But how un- 
 natural will the constr. thus be — ύ δι θίος 
 και τον κϊιριον ijyiipfv, και ϊ/μας ίζή•γ(ΐ- 
 ptv, διά τ. δνν. αΰτοϋΐ 1 can conceive no 
 account of such a sentence, except that some 
 emphasis is meant to be laid on the distinc- 
 tion between ήγειρα' and e|;')yfipf v, which 
 idea (maintained by Bengel, al.) Meyer 
 himself very properly repudiates : see below. 
 The future corresponds to καταργήσίΐ, and 
 is used with ήμας, — contrary to the usual 
 practice of Paul, who expected to be alive 
 at the τΓορουτία, — as the expression, in the 
 first person, of the truth of the future re- 
 surreclion, not deslruction, of the body. 
 ηγ€ΐ,ρ€ν, viz. ϊκ νίκηων, Acts iii. 15. Rom. 
 iv, 24, and passim : t^tyeptl, viz. i/c νεκρών. 
 So that there is no real di.HTerence between 
 the two words. 15.] Resumption of 
 
 TO σώμα τψ κνρίφ κ. 6 κύριος τψ σώματι. 
 The two are so intimately connected, that 
 the Lord is a mystical Body, of which 
 our bodies, parts of ourselves in our perfect 
 organization, are members. This Christian 
 axiom is introduced as before (reff.) by ουκ 
 ο'ίδατε 'ότι. — 'Having then (ovr, 'con- 
 cesso,' that my body is a member = my 
 members are members of Christ) alienated 
 (άρας is not merely pleonastic, ' Shall I 
 take .... and make them ....,' as E. V. 
 This is shewn by its position first in the 
 sentence) the members of Christ (i. e. my 
 own members) shall I make them an har- 
 lot's members V — The expr. πόρνης μέλ;; 
 is put as coarsely and startlingly as possible, 
 with the emphasis on πόρνης. — ττοιήσω 
 may also be the aor. subj., ' must I, have I 
 any right to, make them?' But μη -γέ- 
 νοιτο answers better to the fut. 16.] 
 Explanation and justification of the expr. 
 ιτόρνης μίλη. — η, as De Wette well, " Do 
 you think the expr. ττοι/'/σω πόον. μίλη 
 too strong?" κολλ.] " llbliacr '2(116= 
 
 bvutf fuc ©efcijiccbtcucrcinigiing." De 
 Wette. τη ιτόρν.] ' with a harlot,' 
 
 generic : or, which in fact amounts to the 
 same, ' with the harlot ' presupposed in the 
 hypothesis. — ev σώμα, viz. ' with her.' The 
 full constr. would be ότι 6 κο\\. Ty πόρ. 
 καΊ η πόρ. εν σ. ε'ισιν, but he is here 
 bringing out the criminality of the forni- 
 cator, and leaves the other out of view. — 
 The citation is spoken of marriage ; but 
 here as above (see on ver. 13) he is treating 
 merely of the physical act, which is the 
 same in both cases. φησιν, viz. God, 
 
 Who is the speaker in the Scriptures : so 
 in citing the same words, our Lord gives 
 them to ό ποιήσας (αΰΓοιις) άπ' άρχης, 
 Matt. xix. 5. They were spoken by the 
 mouth of Adam, but prophetically, divino 
 afflatii. To render φησιν impersonal, ' it 
 says,' ' i)ci{jt eg,' though justified by classi- 
 cal usage, see Winer, § 4!), would, as Meyer 
 remarks, be altogether without precedent in 
 the citations of Paul. The words oi 8ΰο 
 are not in the Heb.. but in the LXX and 
 the Samaritan Pentateuch, and are found in 
 the Rabbinical citations of the passage. See 
 note on Matt. xix. 5. 17.] Union 
 
 to God, His service, and His ways, is 
 often expressed by this word (κτολλ.) in the 
 LXX (rett.) : but here that inner union 
 with Chi-ist in spirit is meant, which is the 
 normal state of every believer, and of which 
 it may be said that he 'εν πν. Ιστιν with 
 Christ. See John xvii. 21, and the parable 
 of John XV. 1 — 7• Meyer rightly remarks, 
 that the mystical marriage between Christ 
 and llis Church must not (as Olsh. from 
 Eph. V. 23 ff".) be pressed here, as the rela- 
 tions of the compared are not correspondent. 
 Still however, the inner verity of that mysti- 
 cal relation is the ground of both passages. 
 18 — 20.] Direct prohibition of forni- 
 cation, and its grounds. 18.] φεύγετε 
 might be followed by ουν, but is more 
 fortiiblc in this disconnected form, 
 ττάν άμ.άρτ.] The assertion, which has sur- 
 prised many of the Conini., is nevertiieless 
 strictly true. Drunkenness and gluttony,
 
 490 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 VI. 19, 20. 
 
 ή ουκ ABCD 
 , EFG 
 JK 
 
 yfnEpp. "rcv. ^ ■ττορνίνων ^ Ης το Ί'διο»^ σοιμα ^ άμαξ)τάνει. ^^ 
 
 ϋ. 14, ϋ'ϋ. ,,^ν « ν - t _ ^ ν - . Γ - Γ ί , 
 
 XTU -'. xviii. οίοατε ΟΤΙ το σώμα υμών ναός του εν υμιν ayiou πνευ- 
 
 3,i).onIy.PsH. ^ ^ b ^ '' ■> ^ Ω " \ ■> ' \ C ' 
 
 ζ M^tt! i'viii. ματος εστίν, ού έχίτε οττο σεου, καί ουκ εστε εαυτών \ 
 
 )5. Luke XV. 00 d' '/Ί ^e -" f^ii' R'i^''0'•' 
 
 18, 21..11. -" r|yopaσϋητε yao τιμής. οοςασατε ^ όη τον οεον εν 
 
 viii. 12. Xen. _ ^' ' ^ _ ' * 
 
 aih^'la'-Mir^ffii-f;' σω^ιατι υμών. 
 
 b atlr.. Matt. ΤΓΤΤ Ιπ ^<^^^l'!■ • 'ι ' i Λ^ k'n'_, 
 
 xviii. 19. V 11. Ιίερι οε ω^ εypaψaτε μοι, καλόν ανυρωπω 
 
 ZeiJh ϋί II. e gen., ch.i. 12refr. iii. 23. Rom.xiv. 8. d >= cli. vii. 23. 2 Pet. ii. 1. Rev. 
 
 V i) xiv.3,4. e Acts xix. I'J reft. ί Rom i.21. Dan.xi.38. g = Luke ii. 1Γ). Acts 
 
 xiii. 2. XV. 3H. h attr., Rom. xv. 18. Heb. v. 8. Winer, 5 24. 2. i = Rom. xiv. 21. vv. 8, 2fi. 
 k = Miitt. xix. 3 (rec), 10. 
 
 1)1 loG. — 19. τα αωματα {corrn to siiit υμών) A^J many mss copt basm syr feth arm 
 al Orig, Meth Did all Jer Aug Ambrst Vig : membra vestra ν Ambr Pel Fulg Bed : 
 txt A'(api)y)B(esil)CDEFGK &c Syr it Chr Thdrt, (text) Oec Orig-int (no lat-f).— 
 aft ναός ins Qtov ΆΊ.—πν. ay. Β al ν all lat-ff appy. — εαυΓου 238. — 20. γαρ om copt 
 basm. — for τιμ., pretio mnyno ν (not it) Tert (somet) Cypr al latt.— ijj (iti J) om d e al 
 Ath (but ins Ath,) Did Thdrt Thl (ins marg: in text It). — aft hi], ins και ανίατε ν g 13- 
 lat-ff (abt) Ps-Ath (lat) (not Ath .') Chr (appy : but mss differ betw ξη άρατε and δη 
 apa : and mSj (Matthai) has δοξ. τ. θ., τουηστιν άρατε τον θ. Elsw he alludes to the 
 passage, δυΚασωμεί' δη τ. θ., αρωμιν τ. θ. &c) (see Scholz). — rec at end, adds και tv τω 
 ■πνενματι νμων ατινα εστί τον θεού {insd appy ivith a view to make the exhortation 
 complete. An ecclesiastical portion began at δοΐ,ιίσατί), with C'JK syrr al Chr Thdrt, 
 (once αυτού for του θ.) Thl Oec, but om ABC'D'EFG 17- 4G. 67". 71• 109 (al .') copt 
 basm ietb it ν Meth (in Epiph) Did Cyr Max Dam Ir Tert all. 
 
 Chap. VII. 1. /xoi om BC 17- 39. 40. 109 (al?) am Tertj : ins AD(F?)G d g ν Orig 
 
 e. g. are sins done in and bt/ the body, and 
 are sins by abuse of the body, — but they 
 are still εκτός του σώματος — introduced 
 from ivithoui, sinful not in their act, 
 but in their effect, which effect it is each 
 man's duty to foresee and avoid. But 
 fornication is the alienating that body 
 which is the Lord's, and making it a 
 harlot's body — it is sin against a man's 
 oivn body, in its very nature, — against the 
 verity and nature of his body ; not an 
 effect on the body from participation of 
 things without, but a contradiction of the 
 truth of the body, wrought within itself. 
 When maji and wife are one in the Lord, 
 — united by His ordinance, — no such 
 alienation of the body takes place, and con- 
 sequently no sin. 19.] Justification 
 of the ε/ς το ιδ. σωμ. άμαρτ. above, — and 
 this by an amplification of the above σώμα 
 Tiij κνρίψ, and εν ττνενμά ίστιν. 'Your 
 body (i. e. the body of each man among 
 you, but put singular, to keep, as in ch. iii. 
 IG, the unity of the idea of God's temple, 
 or perhaps because the body in its attri- 
 butes is in question here) is the temple 
 of (possessed by, as His residence : the 
 temple, not a temple, see note on ch. iii. 
 16) the Holy Spirit who is in you (re- 
 miniscence of the reality of His indwell- 
 ing), whom ye have from God (reminis- 
 cence, whose Spirit He is, and so prepara- 
 tion for the following inference), and are 
 not your own ' (so that ye have no right to 
 alienate your body, not being yours). 
 20.] Proof, that ye are not your oivn. 
 
 The possessio7i of your body as His temple, 
 by the Holy Ghost, is a presumptive proof 
 that ye are not ; but there is also a proof 
 in matter of fact : ' For ye were bought 
 (not, as E. V. are bought, which destroys 
 the historic reference) with a price ' (viz. 
 the blood of Christ, see 1 Pet. i. 18, 19. 
 Matt. XX. 28. Gal. iii. 13,— not as Vulg. 
 magno pretio : τιμίΊς merely recalls the 
 fact here, that a price was paid and so the 
 purchase completed). This buying is here 
 mentioned mainly with reference to the 
 right of possession, which Christ has 
 thereby acquired in us. In other places it 
 is alleged as a freeing from other services : 
 6. g. that of sin (Rom. vi. 17, 18), of the 
 law and its curse (Gal. iii.), of Satan (Col. 
 
 i. 13). δοξάσ. δη ] ' Glorify 
 
 then (δι), not exactly an inference from 
 the foregoing, but r:'eja,"agedum,' tending 
 to enforce and intensify the command : " as 
 a cheering or hortatory expression," Stan- 
 ley. So Od. II. 17, τέτλαθι δι), κραδίη; see 
 Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 284 f.) God (i. e. 
 not praise God, but glorify Him by your 
 acts) in your body ' (not, by means of 
 your body, but in your body, as the temple 
 of God ; see John xiii. 32). 
 
 Chap. VII. 1 — 40.] Reply to their 
 
 ENaUIRIES RESPECTING MARRIAGE ; BY 
 WHICH OCCASION IS GIVEN FOR VARIOUS 
 COLLATERAL INSTRUCTIONS AND COM- 
 MANDS. In order to the right understand- 
 ing of this chapter, it will be well to re- 
 member, that the enquiries in the letter of 
 the Corinthians appear to have been made
 
 ΥΠ. 1, 2. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 491 
 
 = Gen. XX. 6. 
 Pro», vi. 29. 
 m ch. V. 1 reff. 
 
 γυναικός μη απτεσυαι ^ ma οε τας -KO^Viiaq έκαστος 
 
 Ti7v εαυτυυ Λ/υΐ'αίκα ενετω, και ίκαστη τον ιοιον αυοοα pinr.,2Cor 
 
 ' Λ, ' ' ί χϋ. 20. Gi... 
 
 τ. 20. James ϋ.Ι. ΛΥίοεΓ, } 27. 3. 
 
 &C. — 2. r>}v ττορι/ΐΐαί» FGg vsyrral lat-ff. — καιεκαστ. τ. ιδ. avS. ιχ. om FG 48^ 114-77 
 
 in disparagement of marriage, and to have 
 brought into doubt whether it were not 
 better to avoid it wftere unconfracted, and 
 break it off where contracted, or this last 
 at all events where one of the parties ivas 
 an unbeliever. These questions he an- 
 swers, w. 1 — 16: and puts on their true 
 grounds, vv. 17 — 24. They appear also to 
 have asked respecting virgins, what was 
 their duty and that of their parents as to 
 their contracting marriage. This he dis- 
 cusses in its various aspects of duty and 
 Christian expediency, vv. 20—38. Then 
 he concludes with an answer and advice, 
 respecting the liberty of a woman to marry 
 after the death of her husband. — The whole 
 is written under the strong impression (see 
 on this, notes. Acts ii. 20, Rom. xiii. 1 1 , and 
 2 Cor. V. : and Prolegg. to Vol. III. ch. iv. 
 § 5) of the near approach of the end of 
 this state of things (vv. 29 — 31), and as 
 advising them under circumstances in which 
 persecution, and family division for the 
 Gospel's sake, might at any time break up 
 the relations of life. The precepts there- 
 fore and recommendations contained in the 
 chapter are to be weighed, as those in ch. 
 viii. al., icith reference to change of cir- 
 cumstances ; and the meaning of God's 
 Spirit in them with respect to the subse- 
 quent ages of the Church, to be sought 
 by careful comparison and inference, not 
 rashly assumed and misapplied. — I may 
 also premise, that in hardly any portion of 
 the Epp. has the hand of correctors and 
 interpolators of the text been busier, than 
 here. The absence of all ascetic tendency 
 from the Ap.'s advice, on the point where 
 asceticism was busiest and most mischiev- 
 ous, was too strong a testimony against it, 
 to be left in its original clearness. In con- 
 sequence, the textual critic finds himself in 
 this chapter sometimes much perplexed 
 between differing readings, and in danger 
 of on the one hand adopting, on overwhelm- 
 ing MSS. authority, corrections of the 
 early ascetics, — and on the other exclud- 
 ing, from a too cautious retention of the 
 rec. text, the genuine but less strongly at- 
 tested simplicity of the original. 
 1, 2.] Conce.ssion of the expediency (where 
 possible) of celibacy, but assertion of the 
 practical necessity of marriage, as a remedy 
 against fornication. 1.] Be, tran- 
 
 sitional, passing on to another subject. 
 καλόν . . . .] not, morally good; 
 for in ver. 28 expressly not sin, but inex- 
 pediency, is the reason for not marrying ; 
 
 nor good in the sense of ν-πι^ίχον, as 
 Jerome, adv. Jovin. i. 4, ' si bonum est 
 mulierem non tangere, malum ergo est 
 tangere :' but ' expedient,' generally : 
 ' more for a man's best interests under 
 present circumstances :' Angl. ' it is the 
 best way,' in the colloquial sense : so also 
 throughout the chapter : see the word 
 qualified ver. 26, καλόν δια την €ν€<Γτώ- 
 σαν ανάγκην. άνθρώπω] though of 
 
 necessity by what follows, the man only is 
 intended, yet άνθ{)ώ•πψ does not here or in 
 ref. = άνδρι, but as Meyer remarks, re- 
 gards the man not merely in his sexual 
 but in his human capacity. Thus in its 
 deeper reference, it would embrace the 
 other sex also. οιττίσθαι] so in reflf. ; 
 
 and in Latin tangere, attingere, virgo in- 
 tacta. See exx. in Wetst. This expres- 
 sion is obviously here used in the widest 
 sense, without present regard to the differ- 
 ence between the lawful and unlawful use 
 of the woman. The idea that the asser- 
 tion applies to abstinence from intercourse 
 in the already married (see again below), 
 is altogether a mistake. 2.] The 
 
 former course is expedient — would avoid 
 much ' trouble in the flesh :' but as a gene- 
 ral rule it may not be, seeing that for a 
 more weighty reason the contrary course is 
 to be recommended. — ' But on account of 
 fornications (the many instances of forni- 
 cation current. The plur. of an abstract 
 noun implies repetition, or varieties of the 
 occurrence: so Herod, vii. 158, ϋμίν ptya- 
 Xai w(pt\tai τε κ. Ιτται ρίσίΐς γιγόνασι : 
 iii. 40, fjunt Si at σαΐ μίγάλαι εντνχίαι 
 ούκ a(iirrKovat, see reff., and Kiihner, 
 Gramm. ii. 28 [§ 408, γ]), let each man 
 possess his own wife, and let each 
 woman possess her own husband.' The 
 ίχίτω is (I) not concessive, but imperative ; 
 not, ' habere liceat,' but ' habeto.' So 
 the other exprr., -γαμησάτωσαν ver. 9, 
 μίΐίτω ver. 11, &c. (2) not here in the 
 sense of ' utatur, eigne commisceatur,' as 
 Estius, al., which does not come into con- 
 sideration till the next ver. (3) not em- 
 phatic, let each retain, according to the 
 mistaken idea mentioned on ver. 1, that he 
 is speaking to the married, who though 
 they are not to cohabit are yet to remain 
 together. — Had either of the two latter 
 senses been meant, the sentence would 
 rather have stood Ιχίτω εκ. τ. tnvr. 
 yvvinK'i, κ. ίχετω εκάσηι r. ιδ. άνύρ. — 
 With regard to the assertion of Iliickert, 
 that the Ap. here gives a very low estimate
 
 492 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 VII. 
 
 και 
 
 ry yiivaiKi υ avijp ti]v οψειλην αττοόιοοτω, 
 ο£ και η "γυνη τω ανόοι. η yvvri του ιόιυυ 
 
 '' ec,ovaiat,ii, αΧ\α 
 
 'Λ. 
 
 μη '' ατΓοστεοίίτε αΧΧηλους, 
 πξ)ος καΐξ)ον, ϊνα ' σγ^οΧασητε 7>7 
 
 ο ανηρ 
 
 •γυνή τοι 
 ομοκος 
 αΧΧα τ/ 
 
 yvv)]. 
 
 32. Rom. Α. 
 
 xiii 7 only f. 00 ' ' 
 
 o=Rnm. iiii. ομοίως 
 
 7. (xii.l7 , 
 
 ■■^1) .. „. σώματος ουκ 
 
 oo jHmes 11. 2j '^ ^ 
 
 pch%i.i2reir. Ο avrjjO τοϋ ιδίου σώματος ουκ '' εξουσιάζει, 
 (SceJames ^ μη ' ατΓοστεοίΐτε αλλι/Λους, ει μη τι αν εκ συμφώνου 
 "cor.xiii.'s ΤΓ^ος καΐξ)ον, ivu σγ^ολασητε ry ττροςευχ^ και πάλιν 
 
 only. χ»ί'•'^χ"ϊ γ' >ν / γ r - r «^Λν 
 
 s-2Cor.viii. fTTi TO αυτο ητε, ινα μιι •' Ίτειραί,τ) υμάς ο σατανάς οια 
 
 thereonlv. Eccl. νϋ. 15 alex. η Luke viii. 13 only. See 1 The.ss. ϋ. 17. Wisd. iv. 4. ν Matt, 
 
 xii. 44 iinly. Exod. v. 8, 17. η absol., Rom. xii. 12. χ Acts ii. 1. (i. 15 refi) 
 
 y Mitt. IT. 1. James i. 13. IKiiigsx. 1. ζ = Roin. xiv. 15 refT. 
 
 (al ?) g Tert ; (χ. om Chr. — 3. rec for οφηλην, οψαΧομειη^ν εννοιαν (see note), with J 
 &c syrr al Thdrt Tlil Oec : txt ABCDEFG 6. 17- 4(J. G?'. 71- 177 it ν copt basm jeth 
 arm Clemj Origj Meth CliVj (o0fiXo/jfvf;i' Ti/i/;i' Chr3 : οψ. τιμήν κ. tvvoiav 49) lat-ff, 
 — αποίιδίτω Α. — 6f om A 55 ν (ms ; not am demid harl tol) Syr copt basm al Origj 
 Chr (mss) Cypr Jer, al.— 4. rec αλλ (2ce), with D(l.st D, 2nd D^)FFGJ(K?) &c : t.xt 
 ABC (2nd D') &c. — 5. aft αποστ. ins ovi• 29. 37• 114 Syr ar-erp. — av om Β : ti μη 
 Clem : τι aou av 73. — aft καιη. ins ο>(ΐας syr-marg. — rec σχο^αζηη, with J &c Math 
 Chrj Thdrt "al : t.xt ABCDEFG 39. 46. 73-4. 80. 177 to 9 basm Orig, Dion-alex Chr 
 (somet) al. — rec bef τη πρυςίυχ ins τη νηατίΐα και {see itote), with J &c syrr al Chr 
 (text, but not jNIatthai's mSj, nor comm) Thdrt (text and comm) Cyr, Thl (text) ; 
 but om ABCDEFG 9. 10. 17- 29. 46-7- G?'• 73. 93. 177-8 it ν "basm copt ieth 
 arm Clem Orig, all gr-lat-ff. — rec for ητε, σννερχίσθε (gloss: see note), with mss 
 Meth Chr Thdrt, Thl; σννρχησθε JK 1. 462-8. 57. 108-11-131 all Thdrtj al ; 
 ■γιΐ'εσθε Tatian Clem ; 7-evertimini ν al lat-ff: txt ABCDEFG all g basm aeth Orig 
 IJion Cyr Dam all Aug (oft estate). — ττιιραζει 106 : επιχαρη νμιν Orig : εττιχειρη 
 
 ABOD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 of marriage, as solely a remedy against 
 fornication, the true answer is, that Paul 
 does not either here, or in this chapter at 
 all, give any estimate of marriage in the 
 abstract. His estimate, when he does, is 
 to be found Eph. v. 25 — 32. 
 3, 4.] The duly of cohabitation incumbent 
 on the married. This point was in all pro- 
 bability raised in the letter of the Corr. The 
 Ap.'s command is a legitimate following out 
 of δια τάς ττορνείας above. 3. την 
 
 όφίΐλήν] ' debitum toi-i.' The rec. was 
 perhaps an euphemism (cf. also the va- 
 rieties) for the same thing. Meyer will 
 not concede this, but thinks it arose from 
 a mistaken interpretation of όφιιλή as 
 meaning merely ' benevolentia .•' thinking 
 that not fii'oifi, but φιλότης would be the 
 word in the other case. But some of 
 the later exx. in Wetst. seem to bear out 
 this meaning of ivifoin. 4.] The 
 
 axiom is introduced without a γάρ, as freq. 
 
 τοΰ Ιδίου .... ουκ €|ουσιάζΐΐ.] 
 ' sui, cum potestatem non habet, elegans 
 facit paradoxon.' Bengel. The ground of 
 this being another's trhile they remain their 
 own, is to be found in the oneness of body, 
 in which the marriage state places them. 
 
 5.] aTrocrTipcXre is applied by 
 Meyer to της εξουσίας, — by Billroth, al., 
 to της οφειλής; De Wette suggests τοϋ 
 σώματος, but prefers, and rightly, leaving 
 its reference indefinite, to be supplied in the 
 reader's mind. ei μη τι, ' unless per- 
 
 chance ' (reff.). αν] " The verb is 
 
 sometimes omitted after this particle, but 
 always so, that it can be supplied from a 
 foregoing clause. So Eur. Alcest. 181, 
 σ£ 6' άλλη yvvt) κεκτήσεται, σώφρων μεν 
 οΰκ αν μάλλον, ευτυχής δ' ϊσως." Har- 
 tung, Partikellehre, ii. 330. εκ, ' accord- 
 ing to:' the mutual agreement being the 
 grotind, and the measure, of the act. 
 ϊνα σχ ] 'in order that ye may have 
 undisturhed leisure for prayer.' The 
 pres. σχολάζητε of the rec. would refer to 
 the general habit, and would thus make 
 ry ττρος., 'your ordinary prayers' — 
 being thus inconsistent with the direction 
 given τζρος icaipnv : the aorist expresses 
 this temporary purpose, and shews that the 
 prayer meant is not ordinary but extraor- 
 dinary, — seasons of urgent supplication. — 
 Both the alteration to the present and tlie 
 addition of tij νηστείι^ και, shew how such 
 passages as this have been tampered with 
 by the ascetics. ήτί, — not σννέρχησθε 
 
 as it has been amended (nor -εσθε as it has 
 been reamended), — because tl>ai επι το 
 αυτό in this sense is the normal state of the 
 married. For the expr. see reft". — The sub- 
 junct. still depends on 'ίνα — the aim of the 
 temporary separation is not that you may 
 keep apart, but for a certain end, and then 
 that you may be united again. ϊνα 
 
 μη ΤΓ£ΐρ.] Purpose of the re-union stated, 
 by that which might happen did it not take 
 place, ττειράζτ^ now is present, not aor., 
 as betokening the danger of a state of ab- 
 stinence if continued. — ακρασία here, not
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους α. 
 
 493 
 
 ;γω κατά " συ^'^νωμψ', aMa» χχϋ 
 
 την '^ ακρασιαν υμών. '^ τοΰτο δί λί 
 
 ου κατ '^ ίττιταγ]ν. ' Οίλω δε ττάντας ανθξίωΐίους άναι v'i!i'.7"5! 
 ως Kot (μαυτον άλλα έκαστος toiov ενει γαρισμα εκ ^ ί». •;•.. 
 ί/εοϋ, ο μίν ''ούτως, ό δε " ούτως. c κ,^ίη. xvi. sa 
 
 8α' ^\ -f'' > ■" S ' 1ιΛ^ dch. ί. 7 reff. 
 
 Iveyw οε τοις α•γαμοις και ταις Λτηραις, καλόν -iicreoniy. 
 
 f TV. 11, 32, 34 only t. 
 
 g Luke iv. 25 al. 2 Kings xiv. 5. 
 
 7Γ£ΐραζ£ΐΐ' i;j[<ac Dam. — νμων om Β (Tatian in Clem) Meth. — 6. for συγγι/ω/ι., consiliuin 
 d g, conscieiitiam (also) g, indulyentiarn ν Iren Orig. — ου icor tTrir. oin 17{{ : «λλ ου 
 fTTir. 238 — 7. rec θ^λ. γ«ρ (gloss, sti.bstiluted for df, as -more appropriate), with 
 B(esiI)JK &c vss Chr (h 1) Tiidrt^ Thl Oec : txt ACD'FG 17. 23. 39. Ad. 115 it 
 am demid copt Orig Cyr Chr, Dam lat-ff. — ανθξ>. om 4 Tert Jer, Aug al : vos v-ed Tert 
 Zeno Pelag. — aft εμαυτ., add tr εγκράτεια syrr ar-erp Chr Thdrt (ascetic adeln, as 
 above).— rec αλλ, with AD^FGJ(K?) &c : txt BCD' &c. — rec χσρ. έχει, with JK &c 
 vss Chr Thdrt al lat-fi' : txt ΑΒ(,'χ. εκαστ. C appy)DEFG 17. 37. 4G. 73. 177 to 9 am 
 demid tol it basm Clem Orig Cyr Cypr Jer.— του Bnw DEFG 93 Thdrti. — rec (2ce) oc, 
 with JK &c Orig Chr Thdrt al : txt ABCDEFG 17. 4(i. (J\-V Clem Cyr : οσοί^ . . . οσϋν 
 3. — 8. ταις αγαμοις 2. 61-9. 109-19 al lect 14 Thl: αγαμαις 115. — ort καλόν Α. — 
 ανταις 115-19: om ΙΙ7. — rec aft ουτ-οις, ins εστίν, with D'EJK &c vss (est illis it \) 
 Thdrt Thl Oec; but om ABCD'FG 17- 46. 73. 12;i Syr copt Meth Cyr Epiph Chr Dam. 
 
 that from άκρατος (" ), — which sig- 
 nifies a bad tnixtrire, as άκρ. αέρος•, 
 * insalubrity of the air :' but that from άκρα- 
 της (-"""), — * incontinence ;' see reff. 
 Slo. t. άκρ. νιμ., ' on account 
 of your incontinence,' — but hardly, as 
 Meyer seems to think, with allusion to the 
 proverbial fault of the Corr. in this parti- 
 cular, which would be more definitely ex- 
 pressed, were it intended. The νμων is 
 necessary to carry out the form of the sen- 
 tence, corresponding to νμας above. 
 6.] ' But this I say by way of allowance 
 (for you), not by way of command.' 
 τοΰτο refers, not to ver. 2, as Beza, Grot., 
 and De Wette, because the precept there 
 given depends on a reason also given, Sia 
 τάς πορνείας, from the nature of which 
 reason it must be κατ ίττιτηγήν : nor to the 
 whole since ver. 2, as Billroth, Riickert, 
 al.,— because the precept in ver. 3 depends 
 on the general truth in ver. 4, and is also a 
 command : nor to ττρός καιρόν, as Theo- 
 phyl. : — nor as the ascetics, Orig., Tert., 
 Jerome, Estius (also Calvin), to έπι το 
 αυτό ί/Γ£, because both these are but sub- 
 ordinate members of the ))receding sen- 
 tence : — still less to w/iat follovs, as Ro- 
 senm., al. : — but, as the context (ver. 7) 
 shews, to the whole recommendation given 
 in ver. 5. This recommendation all de- 
 pended on the possibility of their being 
 tempted by incontinence : he gives it not 
 then as a command in all cases, but as 
 an (illoii-niicp for tliosc to whom he was 
 writing, whom be knew, and assumes, to be 
 thus tempted. The meaning 'bij permission,' 
 E.V., is ambiguous, ajjpcaring as if it meant 
 by permission of the Lord (to say it) : that 
 given by Hammond, al., κατά τι)ν ίμήν 
 ■γνώμην, is philologically inadmissible. 
 
 7] * I rather (δε) wish that all men 
 were as I myself also am (κ-οί comparandi, 
 so Xen. Anab. 11. i. 22, καΐ ΊίμΙιι ταύτα 
 δοκεΐ άπερ και βασιλεΐ. See Hartung, Par- 
 tikell. i. 126) — viz., ti' εγκρατήι^, which 
 Chrys. seems to have read in the text ; see 
 below on ver. 8. άλλα 6καστο5 . . . 
 
 said in the most general way, as a milder 
 expression of ' all have not the gift of con- 
 tinence.' οΰτως .... ούτως] both 
 are said generally, not one iti the vay in 
 ivhich I have it (of continence), another in 
 the iray of marrying (i. e. though he have 
 not this, and be therefore better married, 
 yet has some other), which should be 
 εκείνως, — but, ' one thus, and another 
 thus,' — i. e. ' one in one way, another in 
 another.' 8 — 10.] Advice to the un- 
 married, that it is best so to remain, but 
 better to marry than be inflamed with lust. 
 8. λί'γω Be] taking up the former Xeyio, 
 ver. 6, and bringing this advice under the 
 same category as ver. 7i viz., his own wish 
 that all were as himself. The stress is on 
 λέγω, not on τοις ay. κ. ταΊς χ., which 
 would in that case be placed first, as τοις• 
 γεγαμηκόσιν below. TOis άγά|Αθΐ,ς, 
 ' the unmarried,' of both sexes : not as 
 usually interjireted, widowers, or unmar- 
 ried males alone: this is shewn by the 
 contrasted term γεγαμηκόσιν, which em- 
 braces (see vv. 10, 11) both sexes. — καΐ 
 ταϊς χήραις may be added as singling out 
 widows especially ; — or more [)robably, be- 
 cause τνίς άγάμιιις would naturally be 
 taken as those who never were married, 
 and thus widows would not be understood 
 to be included. καλόν, sec on ver. I, 
 ' it is good for them,' i. e. ' their best way.' 
 ώς κάγώ] i. e. ΛγαμοΓ. This 
 brings the Ap.'s own circumstances more
 
 494 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 VII. 
 
 ••γκρα 
 
 αυτοις εαυ μειί'ωσιν ως Kayw. ει οε ονκ 
 
 ονται, -γημησατωσαν /ορεισσον γαρ εστίν ^yaμησaι η 
 οΰσθαι. Tote δε yiyautiKoaiv " TrapayytWi 
 
 τευ- 
 
 ου /c 
 
 πυρουσϋαι. '" Ιοις οε -γί-γαμηκοσιν irapayyt 
 iyio, aWa. ο κυηιος, yvvaiKa utto αι^οοος ^η " χωοίσΟίμ'Οί 
 
 11 
 
 εαν 
 
 δε 
 
 και 
 
 Prov.x. L'U.) 
 
 ανδοί 
 
 1 ε( • • • . Of, 
 
 Rom. viii. 9. 
 
 Matt. xxvi. 
 
 42. 
 k ch. ix. 25 
 
 only t• 
 1 =. Phil, i- 23. 
 
 1 Pet.iii. 17. 
 
 2 Pet. ii. 21. 
 Frov. Hi. 14. 
 (ver. 38. ch. 
 %\. 17. xii. 
 31, Hnd Heb. i. 4, and 12 times more.) 
 
 lii. 12. Rev. i. 15. iii. 18 only. 2 Mace. iv. 38 
 xix. (i. Juilg. iv. 11. 
 
 — ov B.— όντως μεινωσιν C f g ν : txt ABDG &c.— και eyoj DEFG Meth.— 9. ου 
 Kpartvorrai FG. —γαμΗτωσαν (or γαμητ.) FG 2. Ci). 71• 93. 114-16-23-79 Chr 
 (ed).— κρΗΓΓΟι/ BDE &c : t.xt ACFGJ &c.— εσην om D'FG Syr Μβύχ.—γαμην AC* 
 17. 2.3. 46-9. 57 Clem, Dam (Oec coram?). — 10. ττπραγγίλω 48. — rec αλλ, with 
 D3EFGJ(K.>) &c: txt AB?C(api)y)D ike. — χωριζισθαι ADEFG Bas Cses : txt 
 B(e sil)CJK mss (appy) Clem Chr Thdrt Thl Oec. — 11. μίνειν αγαμον, and καταλ- 
 
 f " 
 άγαμος η τω 
 
 here only. (2 Cor. xi. 29. 
 η Acts XV. 5 reif. 
 
 clearly before us than ver. 7. which might 
 be misunderstood : and there can be little 
 doubt from this, that he never was mar- 
 ried. Grot, says, "ex h. 1. non improba- 
 biliter colligitur, Paulo fuisse uxorem, quod 
 et Clemens Alex, putat, sed cum hsec scri- 
 berentur, mortuam." But this rests on 
 the mistaken interp. of ά-γάμαις noticed 
 above. The passage of Clem. Alex, alluded 
 to is in Euseb. iii. 30, and is grounded on 
 Paul's having in a certain epistle addressed 
 την avTov σνΖυγοί', ην ov ΤΓερΐίΚρμιζ(, 
 ίιά το της νττηρίπίας (νσταλίς. But the 
 words σύζυγε -γιησκ, Phil. iv. 3, certainly 
 have no reference to a wife : see note 
 there. 9.] ' but if they are incon- 
 
 tinent' . . . oi)K must be joined not with t/, 
 which would require μή, but with the verb. 
 So reff. and Soph. Aj. 1131, ii τονς 
 θαΐ'όντας ουκ ίγς ΰάτττίΐν τταρίον, ' vetas.' 
 See other exx. in Hartung, Partikellehre, 
 ii. 122 f. εγκρατενω is said by Lobeck, 
 ad Phryn. p. 44, not to be found except in 
 the LXX and N. T. But both Phrynichus 
 and Thom. ^lag. say, (Ίκρατενεσΰαΐ μη- 
 ίαμως ε'ιπ^ς, άλλα ονκ εγκρατενεσθαι. See 
 in Wetst. γαμησάτ.] Lobeck, in 
 
 Phrynichus, p. 742, says, " post εγημα (ut 
 εγηρα) ίγάμησα invaluit quod non solum 
 in N. T. libris, ut quidam putaverunt, sed 
 etiam in ipsa Grsecia reperitur, auctore, ut 
 videtur, Menandro : ΐγάμησεν fjv ίβου- 
 \<Ίμην ΐγώ, — nihil impediente pedum mo- 
 dulatione quominus usitato uteretur aoris- 
 to." ΐΓ-υροΐσθαι] " melius nuberent 
 
 quam urerentur, id est, quam occulta flam- 
 ma coucupiscentiae in ipsa conscientia 
 vastarentur." Aug. de sancta \^rginitate, 
 34. 10, 11.] Prohibition of separa- 
 
 tion after marriage ; or in case of separa- 
 tion, of another marriage. These γεγαμη- 
 KOTes, as the άγαμοι and χηραι above, are 
 all Christians. The case of mixed mar- 
 riages he treats ver. 12 if. They are 
 * those already married.' 10. οϋκ Ιγώ, 
 άλλα ό KTjpios] Ordinarily, the Αρ. {εγώ) 
 writes, commands, gives liis advice, under 
 
 ABCD 
 
 EFG 
 
 JK 
 
 conscious inspiration of the Holy Spirit of 
 God. See ver. 40. He claims expressly, 
 ch. xiv. 37, that the things ά εγώ γράφω 
 νμίν, should be recognized as κυρίου εν- 
 τολή. But here he is about to give them a 
 command resting, not merely on inspired 
 apostolic authority, great and undoubted 
 as that was, but on that of the Lord him- 
 self. So that all supposed distinction be- 
 tween the Ap.'s own writing of himself ΆηΑ 
 of the Lord, is quite irrelevant. He never 
 wrote of himself , being a vessel of the Holy 
 Ghost, who ever spoke by him to the 
 church. The distinction between that 
 which is imperative, and that w-hicli is 
 optional, that which is more and that which 
 is less weighty in his writings, is to be made 
 by the cautious and believing Christian, 
 from a wise appreciation of the subject 
 matter, and of the circumstances binder 
 which it was written. All is the ontpour- 
 ing of the Spirit, but not all for all time, 
 nor all on the primary truths of the faith. 
 — ' Not I, but the Lord,' viz. in Mark x. 
 11, 12, where only the icoman's part is 
 brought out. That it occupies the prin- 
 cipal place here, is perliaps because the 
 Christian yeomen at Cor. may have been 
 the most ready to make the separation : or 
 perhaps, be(;ause the woman, from her place 
 in the matrimonial union, may be more 
 properly said άπ'ο άνδρος χοιρισθηναι than 
 the man άπο γυναικός χωρισθήναι. 
 χωρισθ., ' be separated,' whether by 
 formal divorce or otherwise ; the καταΚ- 
 Χαγίιτω below, is like this, an absolute 
 passive ,• undefined whether by her own or 
 her husband's doing. 11.] εάν to 
 
 καταλλαγήτω is parenthetical. It sup- 
 poses a case of actual separation, contrary 
 of course to Christ's command : if such 
 hai^e really taken place (κηί, veritably: 
 see note on 2 Cor. v. 3, and Hartung, Par- 
 tikell. i. 132), the additional sin of a new 
 marriage (jNIatt. v. 32) must not be com- 
 mitted, but the breach healed as soon as 
 possible. καταλλ.] see above on
 
 D—li. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 495 
 
 και ανορα -γυναίκα μη '^ αφιίναι. 
 
 12 
 
 ^7 
 
 γω, ουχ ο κύριος 
 
 ατΓίστον, και αυτή 
 13 
 
 £1 Τ(ς α^ίΧφος 
 
 ^ κατα\\α•γητω 
 οε λοιτΓοις λε 
 yvvaiKa ε^ίΐ 
 
 αυτού, yujj "^ αφιίτω αυτήν' "" κοι -yui'T/ " ϊ)τ(ς ε^Εί αΐ'όρα 
 απιστον, και ούτος συνευοοκει οιΚΕίν μετ αυτής, μη 
 
 α',/ \>/Λ 14. ν f' vf5vfr>( 
 
 αψίίτω τον ανύρα. η•γιασται yao ο ανηξ> ο άπιστος 
 
 εν τί? yυva^κt, και ^ r]y'ia(JTai η γυνή η ^ άπιστος ^ εν 
 
 τοις ΡίΙ'Γ•^- 
 
 συνίυδοκει οικειν juετ 
 εγεί ανοί 
 
 U " 
 
 ήτις 
 
 α = Acts χ. 41,47 al. 
 
 ey σοι πασ' έ'γω^ε ^ 
 
 ν = Acts XX. 32. XX vi. 18. 
 ίζ^μαι, Suph. Aj. 519. 
 
 r ch. vi. 6 reff. 
 s Acts ix. 20 
 reff. coiiatr. 
 
 2 John '2. 
 
 Luk.'Xvii.Sl. 
 t = audconstr., 
 
 here only. 
 
 (Luke xi. 48. 
 
 Acts Tiii. 1. 
 
 Ε oil), i. 32 
 
 only.jt 
 w = ch. XV. 22. 
 
 λαγηναι FG it ν goth lat-if. — 12. rec ιγω λιγω, with (pref ονχ D') DEFGJK al it ν al 
 Chr Thdrt al lat-ff : txt ABC al copt Sjt aeth al Clem. — rec αυτή (αύτη J al) : txt 
 (MSSambig)it ν all (appy). — 13. for 7]τις, η ης D'FG 42. IIG. 238 it ν Chr (not 
 Matthai's msj Thdrtj Thl (mss,) lat-fF. — rec for ovroc, αιτος {appy corrn ίο more usual 
 exprn, as also in the former ver), with D^EJK al Chr (h 1) Thdrt Thl Oec : txt 
 ABCD'FG 37. 46. 120 it ν all (appy) Cyr Chr, lat-fF.— fwcoicfi B.— rec for τον ανξο., 
 αυτόν {corrn to conform to αυττ/ν above, ver 12), with JK &c syr al Chr Thdrt al Tert : 
 avTiiv 106: txt ABCDEFG I?. 37. 46 it ν copt syr seth arm goth Cyr Jer Aug Ambrst 
 Pel Bed. — 14. aft γυναικι, ins τη ττιστη DEFG al it ν al Martyrium Clementis (Coteler) 
 
 XWQiady. K. ανδρ. yvv. μη άφ.] The 
 
 Αρ. does not add the qualification τταξίίκ- 
 τος λόγου ττορνύας ]Matt. v. 32 ; xix. 9, 
 not found in INIark x. 11 or Luke xvi. 18. 
 But we cannot hence infer that he was not 
 aware of it. The rule, not the exception, 
 here was in his mind : and after what 
 had been before said on the subject of for- 
 nication, the latter would be understood 
 as a matter of course. 12 — 16.] 
 
 Directions for such Christians as %vere 
 already married to Heathens. Such a 
 circumstance must not be a ground per 
 86 of separation, — and why : but if the 
 unbelieving party v;ish to break off the 
 union, let it be so. 12. J toIs λοι- 
 
 ΊΓοΐς, ' the rest,' perhaps in respect of 
 their letter of enquiry, — the only ones not 
 yet dealt trith. At all events, the meaning 
 is plain, being those who are involved in 
 mixed marriages with unbelievers. 
 €γώ, οίιχ ό κι3ρ.] ' I,' i. e. I Paul, in my 
 apostolic office, under the authority of the 
 Holy Spirit (see above on ver. 10), 'not 
 the Lord,' i. e. not Christ by any direct 
 command spoken by Him : it was a ques- 
 tion with which He did not deal, in His 
 recorded discourses. In the right arrange- 
 ment of the words (txt) the stress is not on 
 iyo), but on λίγω : ' But to the rest I say 
 (I, not the Lord).' — (τυνίυίοκ-ίΐ presup- 
 poses his own wish to continue united. 
 ιιντη, not αίιτή, and οντος, not αντός, 
 below,— see reff'. 13.] The change of 
 
 constr. /cat yvvi), >/-ις• . . . κα\ ούτνς . ., is 
 found frequently with και : so II. a. 78, ή 
 yap όιομαι άν^ρα χολωσίμίν, ος μίγα 
 πάντων \ Άργίιων /oporftt teat at τταθον- 
 ται Αχαιοί. See reff"., and KUhnt-r, ii. 
 526 (§ 7'J9).— Meyer remarks, that the Ap. 
 uses the vox media άφάναι here, of both 
 
 parties, the husband and wife, not aVoXii- 
 tiv (as Matt. v. 31, &c.) which would apply 
 only to the husband. In the E. V. this 
 identity of terms is unfortunately neglected. 
 The same word, ' part from,' would well 
 have expressed άφιέτω in both cases. — By 
 the Greek as well as Roman customs, the 
 wife had the pouer of effecting a divorce. 
 At Athens, — when the divorce originated 
 with the wife, she was said άττολίίτηιν the 
 house of her husband : when with the hus- 
 band, άποττεμπεσθαι. At Rome, the only 
 exception to the wife's liberty of effecting a 
 divorce appears to have been in the case of 
 a freedwoman who had married her patro- 
 nus. See Smith's Diet, of Gr. and Rom. 
 Antt. artt. Divortium, and άπολ(ΐφ(ως 
 ίίκη. Olsh. thinks that Paul puts both 
 alternatives, because he regards the Chris- 
 tian party as the superior one in the mar- 
 riage. But, as Meyer remarks, this would 
 be inconsistent with the fundamental law of 
 marriage, Gen. iii. 16, and with the Ap.'s 
 own view of it, ch. xi. 3. 14. 34. Eph. v. 
 22. 1 Tim. ii. 11, 12. 14.] Ground 
 
 of the above precept. ήγίασται] The 
 
 meaning will best be apprehended by re- 
 membering (1) that holiness, under the 
 Gospel, answers to dedication to God under 
 the law ; (2) that the ι'ιγιασμίνυι under the 
 Gospel are the body of Christian 7nen, de- 
 dicated to God, and thus become His in a 
 pecuUar manner : (3) that this being so, 
 things belonging to, relatives inseparably 
 connected with, the people of God, are said 
 to be hallowed by their ΰyιότης : so Theo- 
 phylact, ονχ 'ότι uyiog yivfTUi ύ "Ελλην. 
 οϋ yap tlntv υτι αγιιίς eVriv' ήλλ', ήγί- 
 ασται• TovTtrTTt, Ty ayiorijTi τον πιστού 
 νίνικηται. Chrysostom well shews the 
 distinction between this case and that in
 
 496 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 νιτ. 
 
 χ ill. τ. ΙΟ. " 
 
 y - 2 Cor. vi. TtO 
 
 17. i 
 
 ζ ver. 12. 
 a ver. 11. 
 b Act.s vii. β. 
 
 cli.ix. IH. 
 
 Gal. IV. 3. 
 
 2 Pet. ii. m. 
 
 Gen. XV. 13. 
 
 See ver. 39. 
 d = Gal. i.e. 
 
 αοΒλφω' 
 νυν οε άγια 
 " ■χωρ(2[εσθω. 
 τοις 
 
 ίΤΓίί αξ>α τα τίκνα νμων ^ ακάθαρτα 
 
 15 ' ί^ ' ζ " a Ύ 
 
 ίΐ οε ο άπιστος χωρί6, 
 οεοούλωται ο αοελ(|)ος η V αδελψη ευ 
 
 εστίν 
 ου 
 
 εστίΓ, 
 εταί, 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 τοιούτοις^ εν δε uprjvy ' κίκληκίν ημάς ο Οεος. 
 
 C neut., nom. i. 32 al. masc, ver. 2S al. ch. xvi. 10, 18. v. 11 reflT. 
 Epli.iv.4. 1 Thess.iv.7. 
 
 lat-ff (not Aug). — rec for αδιΧφω, avSpi {explanatory gloss, substituted as more appro- 
 priate : but αδίλφ. has peculiar force here), with D'JK &c ν syrr al Chr Thdrt Thl Oec 
 lat-tf" (but add τω πιστω ν Syr al Iron Tert all): txt ABCD'EFG 17- 1!)• 4(i it copt 
 basm Aug (ex]iressly) Jerj. — I'vri D'EFG Chr. — 15. on ου ίΐ(δονλ. arm : enim some 
 latt.— )) cm FG al Chr (msj Matthai').— ιψας• ACK 39. 4C. 73. 117 copt (Scholz) al 
 Dam Thl Pel Sedul Bed: txt B(e sil)DEFGJ &c vss Nyss (sKaXtaiv above) Chr Thdrt 
 
 ch. vi. 1δ, that being a connexion κατά τι/ν 
 άσίβίίαν, — in and under the condition of 
 the veri/ slate, in which the other party is 
 impure .• whereas this is a connexion accord- 
 ing to a pure and holy ordinance, by virtue 
 of which, although the jihysical unity in 
 both cases is the same, the puiitij overbears 
 the impu7-ity. ev τη γ., €v τω άδΐλ.] 
 
 'in,' i.e. his or her άγιότηι; is situated 
 in, rests in, the other (see reft". : and note, 
 ch. vi. 2). CTTil αρα] as ref., but 
 
 here elliptically : 'since in that case' 
 (i. e. as understood, the other alternative, 
 ■ — the non-hallowing). έστιν, not 
 
 av ί'ίη, nor ην, but j)res. : because the 
 supposed case is assumed, and the ind. 
 pres. used of what has place on its as- 
 sumption, άγια] as yyiaaTai above : 
 ' holy to the Lord.' On this fact, Chris- 
 tian children being holy, the argument is 
 built. Tliis being so, — they being hallowed, 
 because the children of Christians, — it fol- 
 lows tliat that union out of ivhich they 
 sprung, must as such have the same hal- 
 lowed character ; i. e. that the insanctity of 
 tlie one parent is in it overborne by the 
 sanctity of the other. Tlie/ec< of the chil- 
 dren of Christians, God's spiritual people, 
 being holy, is tacitly assumed as a matter of 
 course, from the precedent of God's ancient 
 covenant-people. — With regard to the bear- 
 ing of M?Ai'eri'e on the subject of Infant Bap- 
 tism, — it seems to me to have none, further 
 than this : that it establishes the analogy, 
 so far, between Christian and Jewish chil- 
 dren, as to show, that if the initiatory rite 
 of the old covenant was administered to the 
 one, — that of the new covenant, in so far as 
 it was regarded as corresponding to circum- 
 cision, would probably as a matter of course 
 be administered to the other. — Those, as 
 Meyer, who deny any such inference, forget, 
 as it seems to me, that it is not personal 
 holiness which is here predicated of the 
 children, any more than of the unbelieving 
 husband or wife, but holiness of dedication, 
 by strict dependence on one dedicated. 
 Notwithstanding this αγκίτί/ς, the Chris- 
 tian child is individually born in sin and a 
 
 child of wrath ; and individually needs the 
 washing of regeneration and the renewing 
 of tlie Holy Ghost, just as much as the 
 Jewish child needed the typical purifying of 
 circumcision, and the sacrificial atonements 
 of the law. So that in this cιyιύτης of the 
 Christian child, there is nothing inconsistent 
 with the idea, nor with the practice, of 
 Infant Baptism. On νΰν δε, see note, ch. 
 V. 11. 15.] But if the wish for sepa- 
 
 7-ation (implied by the present xwpittTat, 
 — ' is for being separated,' see Winer, 
 § 41. 2, and compare John x. 32; xiii. G. 
 27) proceed from the side of the unbe- 
 liever (emph. on ό airtaTos), let him (or 
 her) depart (be separated off). ου 
 
 δεδούλ.] οΰιο ίχίΐ avayKi]v b ττιστος τ) 
 )'/ πιστή tv τοΤς άττίστοις τοιαντην, ο'ία 
 αϋτψ επίκίιται έττΐ των πιστών, ίκιΐ 
 μιν yap τταντί τρόπο^}, χωρίς \όγψ πορ- 
 νίίας, οΰκ ίζιστιν άπ' αλλήλων τους 
 συναφθίντης χωρισθΙΊναι' ίνταϋθα Se, αν 
 μΙν συηυζοκι] το άπιστον μίρος τφ πι- 
 στψ συνοικΗν, δη μή λίηιν τύ συνοικίσιον. 
 αν Of στσσιάζ7J καΐ τήν λΰσιν ίκίΐΐ'ος 
 noiy, οΰ δεδούλωται 6 πιστός ίίς τι) μή 
 χωρισθήναι. Photius, in Oecumenius. ev 
 TOis τοιούτοι? may be taken as masc, in 
 the case of such persons, — as above by 
 Phot. : — but the iv seems harfli ; it is better 
 therefore to render it, ' in such cases.' 
 €V δέ elp.] Not := {('ς (ίρήνην, but signify- 
 ing the moral element m ivhich we are 
 called to be : see reff. and ver. 22 below. — 
 The meaning is, ' let the unbeliever depart, 
 rather than by attempting to retain the 
 union, endanger that peace of household 
 and peace of spirit, wliich is part of the 
 calling of a Christian.' — Observe, (1) that 
 there is no contradiction, in this licence of 
 breaking off such a marriage, to the com- 
 mand of our Lord in Matt. v. 32, — because 
 the Ap. expressly asserts, ver. 12, that our 
 Lord's words do not apply to such mar- 
 riages as are here contemplated. They 
 were spoken to those unthin the covenant, 
 and as such apply immediately to the wed- 
 lock of Christians (ver. 10), but not to 
 mixed marriages. — De Wette denies this,
 
 15—17. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 497 
 
 σώσεις , 
 
 η 
 
 τι 
 
 e 2 Kinqs xii. 
 22. Joelii. 
 14. Jonah 
 See 
 
 ElvL i 
 
 .21 
 
 ppy here 
 only. See Gal. 
 i. 7. 2 Cor. 
 iii. 1 rec. 
 Heb. vii. 2. Prov. 
 
 Tt yap οιόας, yvvai, ει τοι» avooa 
 '^ οιοας, ανίξ), ti την yvvaiKa σώσεις', "^ ει μη " εκαστω 
 ως εμερισεν ο κύριος, ^ εκαστοί' ως ' ' ^ 
 ούτως περιττατειτω και ούτως εν ταις εκκλησιαις ττασαις 
 
 g constr., ch. iii. 5. Rom. xii. 3. h = Mark vi. 41. Lake xii. 3. 2 Cor. x. 13. 
 
 xxix. 24. i = ver. 15 reB". k — ch. iii. 3. Rum. τϋί. 1 al. fr. 
 
 Oec Ambrst. — for θεός, κύριος basm. — 16. -γνιιη, and ονηο FG. — σωσας to σωσίΐς om 
 178• — for η τι, ft ΓΙ Α. — 17. ίΐ μη om 177'• V μη•, joining it to the precedg, 18^. 22-3^. 
 4H-4. 57. 67'• 120-23 al syr-marg Chr-ms Severianus in Oec (fwc τυι> ' η μη,' στιξον 
 TtXnav στιγμήν) : tvi Chr-ms. — μιμίοικίν Β. — rec θίος and κιφιος, with J Κ &c syr al 
 Chr Thdrt al : but txt {κυρ. ψιρ. A) ABCDEFG (o icvp. ο θ(ος [2nd] G) I7. 31-7. 4(;. 
 73. 178-9 al it V all lat-ff: θίος (2ce) 32-3. C3. 03 goth.— καί ικαστον ως FG : ίκαστ. 
 γαρ 109. — και to διατασ. οηη Chr. — for ούτως, ως ν Jer Ambrst \ig Bed Pelag. — Sia- 
 
 and holds that Paul is speaking only of the words immediately preceding, it• ειρήνη 
 
 κίκλ. ή μας 6 Θ. — Ι may observe in addition 
 to Meyer and De W.'s remarks, that the 
 position of the words further establishes 
 this rendering. If the point of the argu- 
 ment had been the importance, or the pros- 
 pect, of saving {zzz converting) the unbe- 
 lieving party, the arrangement would pro- 
 bably have been ti σώσίΐς τον άνορα, and 
 fi σώσίΐς την γυναίκα, whereas now the 
 verb holds in both clauses a subordinate 
 place, rather subjective to the person ad- 
 dressed, than the main object in the mind 
 of the writer. — Those who take ti for ti μη, 
 attempt to justify it by 2 Kings xii. 22. 
 Joel ii. 14 Jonah iii. 9, where the LXX 
 have for the Heb. inv 'n, τις oJciv d, to 
 express hope : but (1) in every one of those 
 passages the verb stands in the emphatic 
 position, and (2) the LXX use this very 
 expression to signify uncertainty, e. g. Ec- 
 cles. iii. 2(5, τις uce (oi^f, Alex.) τϋ ττνίϋμα 
 υ'ιων του άνθρωπου, ii αναβαίνει αϋτο 
 άνω ; — The rendering then of the ver. will 
 be as follows : (' Let the unbeliever depart : 
 hazard not for an uncertainty the peace in 
 which you ought to be living as Cln-istians) : 
 for what assurance hast thou, wife, 
 whether thou shalt be the means of thy 
 husband's conversion ■? Or what assur- 
 ance hast thou, husband, whether thou 
 shalt be the means of thy wife's conver- 
 sion'?' [" This interpretation is the only 
 one compatible with the obvious sense of 
 ver. 15, and of the expression (not rt οίδας 
 ίί jui'/, but) ri οίοας ii σώσιις ; and is also 
 in exact harmony with the general tenor of 
 the Ap.'s argument, which is not to urge a 
 union, but to tolerate a separation." Stan- 
 ley ; the rest of whose note is deeply in- 
 teresting as to the historical influence of 
 the verse as commonly misunderstood. Dr. 
 Bloomfield, after quoting, as the aryummt 
 of Meyer and De Welte, my additional 
 reason above, proceeds to characterize it as 
 " German sophistry," &c. It is a pity tliat 
 so zealous an impugncr of other men's 
 opinions does not take care, by reference 
 Κ κ 
 
 Christian's duty in cases where the marriage 
 is already virtually broken off, — and by 
 his remarks on Matt. v. 32, seems to take 
 TTopi'tia in a wide sense, and to regard it as 
 a justifiable cause of divorce because it is 
 such a breaking off'. This however ap- 
 pears hardly consistent with ver. 12 ; for, if 
 it were so, there would be a command of 
 the Lord regarding this case. At all events, 
 ■we may safely assume that where the Ap. 
 is distinctly referring to our Lord's com- 
 mand, and supplying what it did not con- 
 tain, there can be no real inconsistency : if 
 such appear to be, it must be in our appre- 
 hension, not in his words. (2) That the 
 question of re-marrying after such a sepa- 
 ration, is here left open : on this, see note on 
 Matt. v. 32. (3) That not a word here 
 said can be so strained as to imply any 
 licence to contract marriages with unbe- 
 lievers. Only those already contracted are 
 dealt with: the ίτίροζυγύν ά-πιστοις is 
 expressly forbidden, 2 Cor. vi. 14, and by 
 implication below, ver. 40. 16.] This 
 
 verse is generally understood as a ground 
 for remaining united, as ver. 13, in hope 
 that conversion of the unbelieving party 
 may follow. Thus ver. 15 is regarded as 
 altogether parenthetical. But (I) this in- 
 terp. is harsh as regards the context, for 
 ver. 15 is evidently not parenthetical, — and 
 (2) it is liardly grammatically admissible 
 (see below), for it makes £t = ii μίί, — 
 ' What knowest thou .... whether thou 
 shalt not save .... .'' — Lyra seems first to 
 have proposed the true rendering, which 
 was afterwards adopted hesitatingly by Es- 
 tius, and of late decidedly by Meyer, De 
 Wette, and Bisping : viz. that tlie ver. is not 
 aground for remaining united, in hope, &c., 
 — but a ground ior consummating a separa- 
 tion, and not marring the Christian's peace 
 for so uncertain a prosiiect as tliat of con- 
 verting the unbelieving party, τί οίδας tl 
 thus ])reserves its strict sense, ' What 
 knowest thou (aijout the question) whe- 
 ther ....■?' and the ver. coheres with the 
 Vol. II.
 
 498 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους λ. 
 
 νιτ. 
 
 1 = Matt xi 1 ι ^ ' 18 πι ττ / Ϊη»"\'/Ί ^ο• , 
 
 Th xvi.iai. νιατασσομαι. '° ΙΙεξ>ιτετμημίνος τις εκληυη, μτι επι- im- 
 
 Oaii. i. Γι. ' fl . • Ρ ' /Q ' ' \ > ^ in / σπασΟω 
 
 ηι Luke i. Γι9. σπίΐσϋω εν ' ακρορνστια κεκληται τις, μιι πίοιτεμνε- c 
 
 Cen.svi,..0 ^ ^ ν / ,., . \ r\, η ' ^"^^ 
 
 niiypotiiet• ί^ΐ'''^• ^7 πί^)(τθ|ΐπ/ uuo£i' EffTU', /cc/t 7] ' ακοορυστια FGJK 
 
 27. James oucfv iffTiv, αΛΛο Tijorjaig εντολών ΰεου. έκαστος 
 
 "^itllv"}»^' ^v τη ' κ\ησει ή ^ εκ\ΐ]Οη, εν ταυτΎ) μενετω. δούλος• 
 
 "^ ie'a* Rom. ' ίκλίίθης, μή σοι μεΧετω' αλλ' ίΐ και ουνησαι έΧευθερος 
 
 ϋ. 2.ί al.fr. Ι f ^ 5 Γ ' Γ Ι 
 
 η P^tiiloiilv, rxf- John τίϊ. 22, 23. Arts τη. 8. χ. 4δ. xi. 2. Exod. iv. 26. r See Matt, xxiii. Ifi, 18. 
 
 John viii. 64. cli xiii. 2. 2Cur. xii. Jl. s= here only. Sir. xxxv. 23. See Acts iv. 3 reU. ellipt. 
 eonstr., .see ch. iii 7. ssMatt.XT.3aI.fr. t — ch. i.SBal. 
 
 τασσομίν 2'.',: διδάσκω D'ETG (doceo it ν lat-fT).— 18. (κλ.τις D'D^EFG goth (κεκηλ- 
 ται TIC Β ? 17). — ικληθη 1st to 2ntl oin O',i. — rec (2nd) τις ίκληΟη {corrn io cmifonn to 
 forme',), with D^EaK al (v.ss) Chr Thdrt al : t.xt ABD'FG {τ,ς κίκ\. DiPG) al 17- :U-7- 
 4G goth. — 19. η (1st) om FG. — from ίπτιν to ίστιν om FG al g. — των tvr. τον θ. 44. — 
 20. £κ. Ct 30. 73. 11δ-77 ?eth arm, — εν τοντω Λ. — 21. άλλα Ό^. — aft ft om και FG g 
 
 to authors themselves, that he is right 
 in the persons of the adversaries whom 
 he pretends to be confuting.] 
 17.] ci μη takes an exception, by way 
 of caution, to the foregoing motive for 
 not remaining together (ver. 1(5). The 
 Christian partner might carry that motive 
 too fa); and be tempted by it to break the 
 coniie.xion on fiis own part ; a course al- 
 ready prohibited (vv. 12 — 14). Therefore 
 the Ap. adds, ' But (q. d. only be careful 
 not to m.ake this a ground for yourselves 
 causing the separation) as to each {ϊκόατ. 
 ώς = ώς ίκάστ., reff.) the Lord, distri- 
 buted Ms lot, as (i. e. y κλήσει, ver. 20) 
 God has called each, so (in that state, 
 without change) let him walk' (reff.). 
 — The el μή has raised considerable diffi- 
 culties, (1) some (see var. readd.) read ti 
 τήν γνιηΐκα σώσης, η μή ; — and Knatch- 
 buU, al., join el μή similarly to the fore- 
 going ; ft ... . σώσιις, — tt μή. But as De 
 W. remarks, this would be, as Matt. sxii. 
 17» V οϋ : and then we should have the 
 strictly parallel clauses of ver. If! rendered 
 unequal, by an appendage being attached 
 to the second, which the first has not : be- 
 sides that ver. 17 would be disjoined alto- 
 gether. (2) Pott would supply χωρίζ6Γαι, 
 — Mosheim, Λ'^ater, and Riickert, σώσεις, 
 after tl μή. But so, to say nothing of the 
 irrelevancy of the idea tlius introduced, ίί 
 £c μή, or fi ct Kill μή (as jSIeyer), would be 
 required. (3) Theodoret, al., join all as 
 far as κίφιος to the foregoing : ' What 
 knowest thou, &{c , excej)t in so far as 
 the Lord has apportioned to each?' But 
 thus the evidently parallel members, ίκάστ. 
 ιός ίμ. ό κΰρ., and ίκάστ. ώς κεκ\. ο θ., 
 would be separated, and a repetition occa- 
 sioned which, except in the case of intended 
 parallehsm, would be alien from St. Paul's 
 habit of writing. οίίτως .... διατ.] 
 
 τοντο linfv, 'ίνα τψ t,\{iv iccii άλλους κοι- 
 VMi'Ovc, πηοθνμότί^ιοι πιρΊ τήν ίιπακοήν 
 itarieOJffi.'Theophyl. 18—24.] Ex- 
 
 amples of the precept just given, είτα συν- 
 ί/θως άηϋ τοϋ ττροκίιμ^νου ίίς 'έτερα μετα- 
 βαίνει, ττασι νομοθετών τά κατάλληλα. 
 Theodoret. 18—20.] First example. 
 
 — Circumcision. 18. ίκληθη] ' Was 
 
 any one called in circumcision,' — i. e. cir- 
 cumcised at the time of his conversion. 
 Ιττισ-ττάσΘω] By a surgical opera- 
 tion ; seeTheophyl.,Wetst., — Winer, Real- 
 worterbuch, art. Beschneidung, — Jos. Antt. 
 xii. 5. 1. 1 Mace. i. 15. Celsus de Re Me- 
 dica, vii. 25 (in Wetst.). The practice 
 usually was adopted by those who wished 
 to appear like the Gentiles, and to cast off 
 their ancient faith and habits. Among the 
 Christians a strong anti-Judaistic feeling 
 might lead to it. 'π-ίριτ€μν£'σ•θω] See 
 
 Gal. V. 2, al. 19.] See Gal. v. C, 
 
 where our τήρησις εντολών θεοϋ is ex- 
 pressed by πι'στις Si αγάπης ένερ-γουμ^'η : 
 and Gal. vi. 15, where it is given by καινή 
 κτίσις. Cf. an interesting note in Stanley, 
 on the relation of these three descriptions. 
 After θίοΰ, supply τά πάντα εστίν : see ch. 
 iii. 7• 20.] Formal repetition of the 
 
 general precept, as again ver. 24. 
 κλήσΐξ is not the calling in life, for it 
 never has that meaning either in classical 
 or Hellenistic Greek (in the example which 
 Wetst. gives from Dion. Hal. Antt. iv. 
 20, κλήσεις is used to express the Latin 
 ' classes,' — «ς καλοΐσιν Ρωμαίοι κλήσεις, 
 and so is not a Greek word at all) ; — but 
 strictly 'calling (' vocatio') by God,' as 
 in ref. The κλΓ/σις of a circumcised person 
 would be a calling in circumcision, — and 
 by this he was to abide. tv rig . . . ev 
 
 ταύτη] See ch. vi. 4 : emphatic. 
 31 — 24.] Second example .• Slavery. 
 ' Wert thou called (converted), a slave, 
 let it not be a trouble to thee: but if 
 thou art even able to become free, use it 
 (i.e. remain in slavery) rather.' This ren- 
 dering, which is that of Chrys., Theodoret, 
 Theophyl., Oecum., Phot., Camerar., Es- 
 tius, Wolf, Bengel, Meyer, De Wette, al.,
 
 18—24. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 499 
 
 ■γενέσθαι, μάλλον " -χ^ρησαι. ^" ό yap εν κυρ'ιω ' κληθίίς « acisxxtu. 
 δοΰλος ' απελίυθερος κυρίου εστίν' ομοίως ό ελεύθερος 1\Ι^:1'\ 
 
 Ϊ.Λ Ω ^ ^ 'Λ ' ' - 2λ W - W ■> r ι\ ν. 23.' wis. 
 
 κΚΐ]Κ)εις όουλος εστίν χριστού. '^^ τιμίως ΐ]•^/ορααθχ]τε' ϋ• «■ 
 jUTj -γινεσθε όουλοι ανθρώπων. "^ Ε,ναστος• εν " ω ' εκλήθη, \°"-2%'η'. 
 αοελφοι, εν " τούτω μενετω * τταρα θεω. 
 
 χ Acts χτϋ. 23 al. 
 
 Rom. { 4 t. 
 w ch. vi. 20 
 reff. 
 here only. See Lake i. 37. 
 
 (sed si potes copt, sed fametsi poies goth, quin etiam si poles Syr al).— for μα\\. vp., 
 rovro σοι κα\ον ean arm. — 22. rec aft ομοίως ins και (α* ie/iiy usual aft ομοίως : so also 
 Si και), with JK &c copt syr* al Chr Dam Thl Oec Ambrj al : ίε και DEFG it : tst 
 AB 17. 31. 40. 73 V syrr (see above) goth Chr (msi Matt) Thdrt Ambrj Ambrst Pel Bed. 
 — χοιστ. ιστιν FG g al. — for χρ., του κυρίου 1)2: του χρ. 17• — 24. ίκαστοα, aCt\<p. 
 DEFG it Ambrst : αί.οτα 39. 120 Chr Thdrt.— rec τω θεω, with A al Oec : t.xt BDEFGJK 
 most mss Thdrt Dam Thl : τταρ. θ. cm 13. 20 Chr Thdrtj : παρη θεού 38. 55. G3.— 
 
 is required by the xisage of the particles 
 εί και, — by which, see Hartung, Partikel- 
 lehre, i. 139, the κηί, ' also,' or ' even,' 
 does not belong to the ε'ι, as in και εί, but 
 is spread over the whole contents of the 
 concessive clause : so Soph. CEd. Tyr. 302, 
 ττόλιν μεν, el και μι) βλέπεις, φηοί'εϊς δ' 
 Ομως, ο'ί'ςι ιόσψ ζύνεστιΐ'. Plat. Rep. p. 
 337, el δ' ου J' και μή ίστιν ομοιον, φαίνε- 
 ται £ε τψ ερωτηθίντι τοιούτων. Aristo]ih. 
 Lycistr. 254, χώρει, Αυάκης, ήγον βάί^ην, 
 el και τον ώμον άλγεΐς. Thucyd. ϋ. 04, 
 μήτε ίμε δι οργής έχετε ... el και επελ- 
 θόντες οι ενάντιοι έδρασαν, απερ εικός ην 
 μή εθελησάντων νμών υττακονειν. See 
 more exx. in Hartung. It is also required 
 by the context : for the b^irden of the whole 
 passage is, ' Let each man remain in the 
 state in which he was called.' The other 
 interpretation, — mentioned by Chrys., and 
 given by Syr. (cited by Meyer : ' Elige tibi 
 potius quam ut servias'), Erasm., Luther 
 (Stanley is mistaken in quoting him as 
 favourable to the other interpretation : his 
 ■words are, " Siijl bu ctn J\iud)t bcrufcii/ 
 forge bit nici)t : bo*/ fannjt bu fvci 
 werben/ fo bi-aud)e bc^ oiel licber "), 
 Beza, Calvin, Grot., and almost all the mo- 
 derns, — understands tij ελευθεμί^ after 
 χρήσαι: ' but if thou art able to become 
 free, take advantage of it rather.' The 
 objections to this are, (1) the position of 
 και, which in this case must have been after 
 δννασαι, — εί δύναπαι και ελεύθερος -γε- 
 νέσθαι, or have been absent altogether. 
 
 (2) The clause would hardly have begun 
 with άλλα εί but with fi 8e — so the alter- 
 native suppositions in vv. i). 11. 15. 28. 3G. 
 The άλλα brings out a strong opposition to 
 the μ,ΐΧέτω, and implies a climax which 
 would ill suit a merely parenthetic clause, 
 but must convey tlie jjoint of the sentence. 
 
 (3) The absence of a demonstrative pro- 
 noun after χοήηαι, by which we are thrown 
 back, not on the secondary subject of the 
 sentence, ελενΟεηΙςι, but on the primary, 
 δουλεία. (4) Its utter inconsistency with 
 
 Κ 
 
 the general context. The Ap. would thus 
 be giving two exx. of the precept 'έκαστος εν 
 ψ ϊκ\ί]θη £1' τούτω /uirsrw, one of which 
 would convey a recommendation of the con- 
 trary course. See this followed out in 
 Chrysostom. (5) Its entire contradiction 
 to ver. 22 : see below. (0) It would be 
 quite inconsistent with the teaching of the 
 Αρ., — that in Christ (Gal. iii. 28) freeman 
 and slave are all one, — and with his re- 
 marks on the urgency and shortness of the 
 time in this chapter (ver. 29 if.), — to tm-n 
 out of his way to give a precept merely of 
 worldly wisdom, that a slave should become 
 free if he could. (7) The import of χρά- 
 ομαι in such a connexion, which suits 
 better the remaining in, enduring, labour- 
 ing under, giving one's self up to, an 
 already-eaisting state, than the adopting 
 or taking advantage of a new one : cf. 
 such expressions as τοιούτοι μόρφ εχρή- 
 σατο ό τταΐς, Herod, i. 117= σνμφορ^, 
 σνντνχί<}, ευτυχία, χρήσθαι, often in He- 
 rod : άμαθί^ χρησθαι, and the like. [The 
 instance quoted by Bloomfield for ' become 
 free,' ίκών γάρ ουδείς δουλίφ χρήται ζυγοί, 
 yEsch. Agam. 9, 53, tells just the other 
 way. There χρηται is used not of entering, 
 but of submitting to, the yoke of slavery, as 
 here.] 22.] ground of the above precept. 
 
 ' For the slave who was called in the Lord 
 (not, as E. V. and De Wettc, ' He who is 
 called in the Lord, being a slave,' which 
 would be ίοϋλος κληθείς, see above, δυϋλος 
 έκλί]θης : ev κυρίω, as the element in , 
 
 which what is about to be stated takes 
 place) is the Lord's freedman (" απελεύ- 
 θερος with genit. is not here in the ordinary 
 sense of ' libertus alicujus,' ' any one's 
 manumitted slave :' for the former master 
 was sin or the devil, see on ch. vi. 20 ; — 
 but only a freedman belonging to Christ, 
 viz. freed by Christ from the service of 
 another. This the reader would under- 
 stand as a matter of course." !Meyer) : 
 similarly he that was called being free 
 (not here, κληθείς ελεύθερος, see above) is 
 κ 2
 
 500 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 VII. 
 
 ^^ ΙΙίρι όε των irapVevwv ' twirayi^v κυρίου ουκ ^\μ, 
 
 "^νωμην δί ^Ί^ωμι ως ηΧ^ημίνος ύπο κυρίου '^ πιστός 
 
 νομίζω ούν τούτο κα\ον ^ υπαρ-^ίΐν οια την 
 
 ίνίστωσαν ανα-νκην^ οτι καΑον ανυρωττω το ούτως 
 
 ^^ ' ^t^taai "γυναικί, μη Cvth λυσιν" ™ λελυσαι 
 
 , τϋι. 38. ch. iii. 22. Gal. i. 4. 2 Thess. ii. 2. 2Τίπι. iii. 1. Heb. is. !» nnly. 
 
 g = Luke xxi. 23. 2 Cor. vi. 4. xii. 10. 1 Thess. iii. 7. 1 Kings 
 
 i Rum. vii. 2. ver. 39. k =Matt. vi. 33 reff. 1 here only f- 
 
 a — ch.i. 10 
 refl'. w. 
 6ιΛω/ιι, ..- ofi 
 
 2Cor.viii.lO. £tj;ai. 
 b pas.s., MHtt. 
 
 V. 7. Rom 
 
 xi. 31 reff. 
 c — oh. iv. 2 
 
 ai fr. uvai 
 
 a = vcr. 1. 
 
 e = A.ts Tui. le reff. 
 
 1 Mhcc. xii. 44. (see note.) 
 xxii. 2. h =- ver. 40. 
 
 m •= Acts xxli. 30. Ps. cxiv. 7. 
 
 26. om (i. e. from uvai to είναι) 48. — for ovv, 5ε 238. — οτι καλόν ιστιν D'FG vss. — το cm 
 
 the slave of Christ.' Christ's service is 
 perfect freedom, and the Christian's free- 
 dom is the service of Christ. But here the 
 Λρ. takes, in each case, one member of 
 this double antithesis from the outer 
 ivorld, one from the spiritual. The 
 (actual) slave is (spiritually) free : the 
 (actually) free is a (spiritual) slave. So 
 that the two are so mingled, in the Lord, 
 that the slave need not trouble himself 
 about his slavery, nor seek for this world's 
 freedom, seeing he has a more glorious 
 freedom in Christ, and seeing also that his 
 brethren who seem to be free in this world 
 are in fact Christ's servants, as he is a 
 servant. It will be plain that the reason 
 given in this ver. is quite inconsistent with 
 the prevalent modern rendering of ver. 21. 
 23.] Following out of ίοΰλής iariv 
 χριστοί', by reminding them of the price 
 PAID whereby Christ purchased them or 
 His (ch. vi. 20) : and precept thereupon, 
 
 BECOME NOT SLAVES OF MEN : i. e. ' do 
 
 not allow your relations to human society, 
 whether of freedom or slavery, to bring 
 you into bondage so as to cause you 
 anxiety to change the one or increase the 
 other.' Chrys., al., think the precept 
 directed against οφθαλμοδυνλεία, and ge- 
 neral regard to men's opinion. But it is 
 better to restrict it (however it may legiti- 
 mately be applied generally) to the case in 
 hand. Hammond, Knatchbull, Michaelis, 
 al., understand it as addressed to the free, 
 and meaning that they are not to sell them- 
 selves into slavery : but this is evidently 
 wrong : as may be seen by the change to 
 the second person phir. as addressing all 
 his readers : besides that a new exam])le 
 would have been marked as in ver. 18. 21. 
 See Stanley's note. 24.] The rule is 
 
 again repeated, but with the addition τται,ιά 
 θίψ, reminding them of the relations of 
 Christ's freedman and Christ's slave, and of 
 the price paid, just mentioned : — of that re- 
 lation to God in which they stood by means 
 of their Christian calling. " The ?<4?<a/ ren- 
 dering, Deo inspectante (Grot.), i. e. 'perpe- 
 tuo memores, vos in ejus conspectu versari' 
 (Beza), does not so well suit the local word 
 μίνίτω." Meyer. 25 — 38.] Advice 
 
 (with some digressions connected with the 
 subject) concerning the marriage of vir- 
 gins. 25.] ΤΓαρθ£νων is not, as Theo- 
 dor-mops., Bengel, Olsh , al., unmarried, 
 persons of both sexes, a meaning rarely if 
 ever found, — see Rev. xiv. 4 and note, — 
 perfectly unnecessary here, and introduced 
 from a mistaken view of vv. 2β — 28. The 
 emph. is on ίτηταγην — ' command of the 
 Lord have I none,' i. e. no expressed pre- 
 cept : SO that, as before, there is no marked 
 comparison between ό κύριος and ϊγώ. 
 τΓίστος eivai] ' to be faithful,' as 
 in ref., — as a steward and dispenser of the 
 hidden things of God, and, among them, 
 of such directions as you cannot make for 
 yourselves, but require one so entrusted to 
 impart to you. This sense, which has oc- 
 curred in the estimate given of himself in 
 this very Ep., is better than the more gene- 
 ral ones of true (Billroth, Riickert) or be- 
 lieving (Olsh., Meyer, De Wette). 26.] 
 The question of the marriage of virgins 
 is one involving the expediency of con- 
 tracting marriage in general : this he deals 
 with now, on grounds connected with the 
 then pressing necessity. oiv, ' then,' 
 follows on -γνώμ. δίδωμι, and introduces 
 the γνώμη. τοΰτο indicates what is 
 coming, viz. το οϋτως tlvai. καλ6ν, 
 see note on ver. 1 : ' the best way.' 
 την ίνίστώσ. άνάγκ.] ' the instant neces- 
 sity :' viz. that prophesied by the Lord, 
 Matt. xxiv. 8. 21, &c. : which shall precede 
 His coming : see especially ver. 19 there : 
 not, the cares of marriage, as Theophyl., 
 ί^ίά τάς tv αύτψ δυςκολίας, κ. ra τυϊι 
 γάμου 6χ\ηρά: nor persecutions, as Pho- 
 tius in Oecum., al., which are only a part 
 of the apprehended troubles. These the 
 Ap. regards as instant, already begtm : for 
 this is the meaning of Ινίστώσαν, not im- 
 minent, shortly to come : see reft', and Jos. 
 Antt. xvi. 6. 2, το ϊθνος τωι> Ίονδαίων ίΰ- 
 χάριστον ίνρίθη, ου μόνον ίν τψ ϊΐ'ίστώτι 
 καιρφ, άλλα και ίν τψ προγΐγίνημ'ινψ, — - 
 where all time future is evidently excluded. 
 See note on 2 Thess. ii. 2, where this dis- 
 tinction is very important. οτι κολ. 
 
 άνθ ] De Wette takes οτι as because, 
 
 understanding τοϋτο above = ru τταρθίνυν
 
 25—29. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 501 
 
 αττυ -γυναικυς, μη ί,ητΐΐ -γυναίκα. '^° tav όε και -γάμησες, mm γαμ^ω, of 
 
 ' " < >> mm ' f Λ/ > f» lhew(.man, 
 
 ουχ νμαρτίς^ και eav γί7μ>7 τ) παρθένος, ουχ ί?μαρΓεν ί^^''^ ιι 
 " θλιφιν δε Γ^ ° σαΓ)κι " εζουσιν ^ οι τοιούτοι, εγώ δε ύ^ίΓη' "κ°'ν"ίΤ.1ο,^^* 
 
 η,/^ 29 Γ - <>', '<^Λ,^f ^s odat.ch.xii. 
 
 ψειόυμαι. ^ τούτο όε ψημι, αόίλφοι, ο καΐξ>ος συν- J;ri5reff. 
 μένος εστίν το λοιπόν, ινα και οι ε•^οντες γυναίκας ^ rem 
 
 r=ch.XT. 50. See ch. i. 12 reff. s — here only t. Sir. ίτ. 31. See Acts v. 6. Tobit xii. 13. 
 
 t = Matt. xxvi. 45. Heb. x. 13. (Eph. vi. 10 reff) 
 
 FG Metli. — 28. και om it ν slav (anct) Ambrst Pelag. — rec for -γα/ιητης, "γημης {to con- 
 form to the folly), with JK &c Chr Thdrt al ; λαβής γυναίκα DEFG ; ληβης (omg 
 ■yu»'.) Meth ; acceperis 2iXorem it ν lat-ff; dttxeris Tert: txt AB (-σι;) 17. 37. 46. 113- 
 marg Bas Dam al. — for -γημη, γαμη D'FG. — bef παρθ., om ή BFG. — ουκ (•2θ6) D'. — 
 ημηρτες to ημαρτιν om 178. — ΐν τη σαρκι D'FG g (in came or car7iis) Oec (text) ; 
 ίξονσ. τη σαρκ. al. — 29. rec οτι ο καιρ. {supplementary : see ch xv. 50, ivhere 
 there is no var readg), with DEFG 57 all it copt al Orig Thl al : txt ABJK 17. 23. 
 44-6-8. 67. 7-2-3. 109-10-13-14. 238 aU ν basm syr al Eus Meth Bas (Chr) Thdrt 
 lat-ff. — rec το λοιπόν ίστιν, with D^EJK &c Thdrt Thl al (om Chr); λοιπόν 
 (only) D'; εστίν λοιπόν ιητιν FG 67^ g ν al : t.xt AB 17. 37. 46. 68. 71-3-4. 
 80 copt syr (Syr?) arm al Bas Cyr : το ληιπ. om 39. There is great var in the 
 punctn : — rec (with J &c syrr copt al Thdrt Thl Oec) has συν. το λ. εστίν ; DFG 67^. 
 68. 71 it ν lat-ff (Augj al espr το λοιπόν twice) σννεστ.• το \οιπον εστίν ινα . . . {the 
 varr have appy arisen from a desire to fix the connexion of το λοιπόν more definitely). 
 — και om 67" tol arm. — rec (ed 1624) and edd om oi {in error appy). — ωσιν om FG g 
 
 tlvai, ' thai this (virginity) is best on ac- 
 count of the instant necessity, because it 
 is {generally) best for a man so to be (i. e. 
 unmarried).' But this seems constrained, 
 and tautological, and the only rescue of it 
 from the charge of tautology is found in the 
 word ' generally,' which is not in the test. 
 Far better, with Meyer and most interpp. 
 to view the sentence as an anacoluthon, be- 
 gun with one constr., τοντο καλόν υπάρ- 
 χιιν, and finished, without regard to this, 
 when on account of the intervening words 
 it became necessary to restate the καλόν, 
 with another constr., οτι, &c. Thus we 
 shall have it, literally rendered : ' I think 
 then this to be the best way on account 
 of the instant necessity, — that it is the 
 best way for a man thus to be.' 
 ούτως, = ώς κάγώ as ver. 8 ? or perhaps 
 ώς- ίστιν, which seems better on account of 
 the following context, ver. 27. This, in 
 the case of the unmarried, would amount 
 to the other : and the case of virgins is 
 now that especially under consideration. 
 άνθρώττω, not as in ver. 1, but here 
 purposely general, including those treated 
 of, young females. 27.] το ο'ΰτο)ς 
 
 είναι restated ax\a illustrated : neither the 
 married nor the unmarried are to seek for a 
 change. The general recommendation here 
 is referable alike to all cases of marriage, 
 and does not touch on the prohibition of 
 ver. 10, — only dissuading friim a spirit 
 of change, in consideration of the €ν€σ•τώ- 
 σα ανάγκη. It seems better to take the 
 ver. thus, than, with Meyer and De Wette, 
 to regard it as inserted to guard against 
 misunderstanding of the preceding -γνώμη 
 of the Ap. λελνσαι does not imply 
 
 previous marriage, but as Phot., ονχι προς 
 τονς σνναφθίντας, είτα διαλνθέντας, . . . 
 αλλ' άττλώς προς τονς μή σννελθόντας 
 'όλως εις γάμου κοινωνίαν, άλλα λελυ- 
 μίνουί, όιτας τοΰ τοιούτου δεσμοϊι, — and 
 Estius, " intelligit liberum a conjugio, sive 
 uxorem aliquando habuerit, sive non." 
 28.] Not sin, but outicard trouble, 
 will be incurred by contracting marriage, 
 whether in the case of the unmarried man 
 or of the virgin ; and it is to spare them 
 this, that he gives his advice. ' But if also 
 {και, of the other alternative : see ver. 21) 
 thou Shalt have married, thou didst not 
 sin (viz. when thou marriedst) ; and if a 
 virgin (generic art.) shall have married, 
 she sinned not ; but such persons (viz. oi 
 γημαιτες) shall have tribulation in the 
 flesh (it is doubtful, as Meyer remarks, 
 whether the dative belongs to the sub- 
 stantive, — trouble for the flesh, — or to the 
 verb, — shall have in the flesh trouble) : 
 but I (emphatic — my motive is) am spar- 
 ing• you ' (endeavouring to spare you this 
 θλΊ\}/ιν εν σαρκί, by advising you to keep 
 single). 29 — 31.] He enforces the 
 
 foregoing advice by solemnly reminding 
 them of the shortness of the time, and the 
 consequent duty of silling loose to all 
 worldly ties and employments. 29.] 
 
 τοϋτο 8e φημι . . . c|. d. ' What I just now 
 said, of marrying being no sin, might dispose 
 you to look on the whole matter as indiffer- 
 ent : my motive, the sparing you outward 
 affliction may be underrated in the import- 
 ance of its bearing: but I will add this solemn 
 consideration.' ό καιρ. σννίοτ. ear. 
 
 το λοίΊτόν] ' The time that remains is 
 short:' lit., ' the time is shoitenud hence-
 
 502 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 νιι. 
 
 fcft. ως μΐ) έχοντες ωσιν, " και οι κλαίοντες ως μΐ) κλαίοντες, abde 
 
 D ch. Ti.20 
 
 reft", 
 τ = 2 Cor. vi. 
 
 xch'.il"r"' ως μγι " κατεγ^οντες, ^^ και οι 
 
 onlvt. ' ^ χ ' ΜΙ 
 
 3MH0C.T. 22. ως ^11) /ναΓαν^)ω^ίνοι 
 
 = 2 Cor. vi. \ « , t \ ι λ < U > / y 
 
 111. , κ"αι οι χαι^οοντες ως jU7} χαίροντες, και οι αγοράζοντες 
 
 χρωμενοι τον κοσμον, 
 
 / ν ν ζ - 
 
 παράγει yap το σ\ημα τον 
 ps^'cxxviu.'s; κόσμου τούτου. θέλω δε ύ^ας ^ αμέριμνους είναι. 
 
 ζ Phil ίί. 8 f ι, ν C ~ CC \ - ' - (1 ' / 
 
 only. isa. Ο αγαμος μέριμνα τα του κυρίου, πως αρέσει τω 
 
 a Matt, sxviii. 14only t. Wisd. vi. 15. vii.23. b Ter. 8. c constr., Matt. Ti. 34 var. read. Phil. ii. 
 
 20. iv.C. cc Rom. ii. 14 refl. d Rom. viii. 8 reff. 
 
 syr arm. — 30. for κλαιοντις, κ\ίθο7>τ(ς FG. — 31. rec τω κοσ/χω τούτω (gramml corrn, 
 and supplementary addn), with D'EJK &c Thdrt Thl al : t.xt ABD'FG (add τοντον 
 D'FG al) copt basm. — for καταχρ., τταοαχρ. J Bas Thdrt3 ; χpo)μe^Όι 121 basm al it ν 
 lat-ft' (not Tert). — 32. St om FG Gl it al : γαρ 38 Clem. — on ο ay. arm. — τα τον to τα 
 του follg om 80. — αρεση (corrn to more visual mood) ABDEFG 21. 40. lOi) Eus (and so 
 in next ver) : txt JK mss (nrly) Clem Orig Meth Ath Thdrt Dam Thl Oec. — τω θεω 
 
 dering all proceeds naturally. ΛΥβ have 
 exactly parallel usages of το λοιττόν in reff. 
 
 ϊνα Kol . . .] Τλβ end for which the 
 time has been (by God) thus gathered up into 
 a short compass : ' in order that both 
 they,' &c. : i. e. in order that Christians, 
 those who wait for and shall inherit the 
 coining kingdom, may keep themselves 
 loosed in heart from worldly relationships 
 and employments : that, as Meyer, '• the 
 married may not fetter his interests to his 
 wedlock, nor the mourner to his misfor- 
 tunes, nor the joyous to his prosperity, nor 
 the man of commerce to his gain, nor the 
 user of the world to his use of the world." 
 — This is the only legitimate meaning of 
 Yi'rt with the subj. The renderings which 
 
 make it = brf, ' tempus futurum 
 
 cum ei qui uxores habent pares futm-i sint 
 nonhabentibus,' Grot., or ' ubi ' (local), are 
 inadmissible. We may notice that accord- 
 ing to this only right view of ίνα, the 
 clauses following are not precepts of the 
 Αρ., but the objects, as regards us, of the 
 divine counsel in shortening the time. 
 
 30. ω% μη κατεχοντ£ς] ' as not POS- 
 SESSING (their gains).' So in the line of 
 Lucretius (iii. 984), " Vitaque mancupio 
 nuUi datur, omnibus usu." 31. χρώμβνοι 
 
 καταχρώμβνοι] the κατά, as in 
 
 κατίχοντες, appears hei'e to imjily that 
 intense and greedy use which turns the 
 legitimate use into a fault. This meaning 
 is better than * al/use,' which is allowable 
 philologically, and is adopted by Theodoret, 
 Theophyl., Oec, Luther, Olsb., al., but 
 destroys the parallel. 1 would render then, 
 ' and they who use the world, as not 
 using it in full.' So, or merely ' as not 
 using it,' regarding Kara χφ. — χρ., — Vulg., 
 Calv., Grot., Estius, al., and Meyer and 
 De Wette. χρησθαι with an ace. is found 
 only here : never in classical Greek, and 
 very rarely in Hellenistic. Almost the only 
 undoubted instance (Stanley quotes Xen. 
 Hier. xi. 11, but the reference is appa- 
 
 FGJK 
 
 forth :' — i. e. the interval between now and 
 the coming of the Lord has arrived at an 
 extremely contracted period. These words 
 have been variously misunderstood. (1) ό 
 καιρός has been by some (Calvin, Estius, 
 al.) interpreted ' the space of man's life on 
 earth :' which, however true it may be, and 
 however legitimate this application of the 
 Ap.'s words, certainly was not in his mind, 
 nor is it consistent with his usage of ό 
 καιρός : see Rom. xiii. IL Eph. v. IC, — or 
 with that in the great prophecy of our Lord 
 which is the key to this chapter, Luke 
 xxi. 8. Mark xiii. 33. (2) συνίσταλμίνος 
 has been understood as meaning calami- 
 tosus (so Rosenm., Riickert, Olshausen, 
 al.). But it never has this signification. 
 In such j)assages as 1 Mace. iii. 6 ; v. 3. 
 
 2 ]Macc. vi. 12, τταρακαλώ μη ου- 
 
 στϊλλεσθαι Sia τάς συμφοράς : 3 Macc. v. 
 33, Ty όράσει , . . σνρεστάλη, — it has the 
 meaning of humbling, depressing, which 
 would be obviously inapplicable to καιρός. 
 The proper meaning of σνστΆλεσθαι, to be 
 contracted, is found in Diod. Sic. i. 41, iio 
 και τυν NtlXoi' ίύλόγως κατά τον χειμώνα 
 μικρόν ίΐναι και (τνστέΧΚ^σΒαι. It is, as 
 Scbrader well renders it, ' in .ftuvjcm fturjt 
 tie alte Sfficlt 3u[ammen.' συστέΚλεσθαι 
 
 and συστολή are the regular grammatical 
 words used of the shortening of a syllable in 
 prosody. (3) το λοιττόν has been by some 
 (Tcrtuil. ad Uxorem i. 5, Jer. adv. Helv. [ii. 
 13 c], on Ezek. [v. 331 d], on Eccl. [vii. 
 58 d], — Vulg., Erasm., Luther, Calvin, Es- 
 tius ; also E. V. and hachm.) joined to ichat 
 folloirs : ^ it remains that both they,' &c. 
 But thus (a) the senseof ϊ ί'α will not be satis- 
 fied — see below : (/3) the usage of το λοιττόν 
 is against it, which would require it to stand 
 alone, and the sense not to be carried on as it 
 is in ' super est , ut,' το λοι—όν, 'ίνα . . ., — 
 see Eph. vi. 10. Phil. iii. 1 ; iv. 8. 1 Thess. 
 iv. 1. 2 Thess. iii. 1. Heb. x. 13. (y) The 
 continuity of the passage would be very 
 harshly broken : whereas by the other ren-
 
 30-34. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 503 
 
 κυριω ο όε -γαμησας μέριμνα τα του κόσμου, πως 
 
 αρίσίΐ ΤΊ^ yvvaiKi. "^ μίμιρισται και η γυνή και }/ e = Matt. xu. 
 τταρβίνθ(•. Ί] «γάμος '^ μίξ^ιμνα ""^ τα του κυρίου, 'ίνα <=''•'• i^rea 
 ϊ; ayia και σώματι και πνιυματι tj οε -γαμησασα με- f cu. v.sreff. 
 
 FG g V Orig Cypr all: αντω Till (marg). — 33. αρεση — see last ver. — 34. rec /ii^sjji- 
 <rrai η yvv. και η ττ., with (Ε .' if so, Ε is not here a copy of D) some few niss, latt 
 mentd by Jer Tert al : μηχίμισται και D'(E?)FGJK 23. 37-»• 44-8. (J8-9. 70 2-4. 80-9. 
 91. 10G-8-102.13-14-1G-17-19-21 all lect 14 al it slav Chr Thdrt^ Dam; |U£/i. ^e 30 ; 
 μΐμ. δί και Syr seth al ; και /if/n. D^ copt basm (appy) demid Cyr Ath (or Ps-Atli) 
 Ephr Aug Jer (expressly) : και μίμιρ. και AB G. 10. l?. 31. 41-4-G. G7. 71-3. 93. 109- 
 22 V syr Eus Meth Bas Epiph Timoth Euthal Cypr (appy) Pel Fulg Prim Bed. (The 
 reason of the varr has evidently been that μΐμερισται has been imayined to apphj to 
 the foregoing, and to mean ' is divided in heart,' ' distracted.' Hence came the και 
 before μεμεοισται. Then, it being retained by those also who joined μεμ. with the 
 following, we get the ready και μιμ. και η γιπ'. (<(c, or the erasure of the 2nd και. So 
 that on the ivhole the reading in txt is preferable, as having most prob been the origl.) 
 — η άγαμος is transpd in AB 17• 71• 122 al seth (appy) Augp and placed both aft -γνιη 
 and παρθίΐ'ος, και μίμερισται being joined to the preceding — τη γυναικι, και μεμίυισται. 
 So also G. 10. 31• 4G. 71-3 ν basm (appy) Eus Cyr Jer, Aug {jnulier et inmipta et virgo) 
 al, but they do not ins it aft ira^tutvoq : X\t DEFGJK most mss it syrr al Meth Ps-Ath 
 Thdrt Thl Oec Tert Ambrst all. {The varr have arisen from the above mistake respg 
 μεμίρισται: for thus the yvvi] and τταοθ. being cast into one category, it became neces- 
 sary that the former shd be specified as α-γαμος.) — aft κνμιον ins ττιος anean τω κυριω 
 4. 57- 73 Thl Augj. — και bef σωμ. om A ν copt al Orig,, Ath Did Tert al. — τω σωμ. κ. 
 τω πν. AB Clem Origi Ath : t.xt DEFGJK ^ appy Origi Method2 Did Thdrt Thl Oec. 
 
 rently wrong) seems to be in a Cretan in- 
 scription, Boeckh, Corp. Inscr. ii. 400, και 
 τά άλλα ττάΐ'τα χμίιμίνοι, ΐν Se τ^ ΰ^ίμ 
 τάς ξί ιικας θοίνας. See Boriicmann, note 
 on Acts .\xvii. 17, where ί3οηθίίας is a var. 
 read. τταράγ'ΐ γαρ . . . . ] gives a 
 
 reason for ό κοιρ. συηστα\μ. ίστ. το ληιπ., 
 the clauses which have intervened being 
 subordinate to those words : see above. 
 Emphasis on ιταράγει : ' for the form 
 (present external form, cf. Herodian i. 9, 
 άνι}ρ φιλησόφον φίρων σχήμα, and other 
 exx. in Wetst.) of this world is passing 
 away' (is in the act of being changed, as a 
 passing scene in a play : cf. wapayi 
 τττίρΐ'γας, Eur. lon, IGo). — This shews 
 that the time is short : — the form of this 
 world is already beginning to pass away. 
 — Grot., al., according to the mistaken 
 view of ver. 20, — ' non manebunt, quEe 
 nunc sunt, res trancpiillai, sed mutabuntur 
 in turbidas.' Theophyl. and many Coram, 
 understand the saying of worldly affairs in 
 general — αχρις ιίψίοΊς ίϊσι τά τυν παρόντος 
 κόσμου, καΊ επιπόλαιη : — but this is in- 
 consistent with the right interp. of ver. 29 : 
 see there. [Cf. a remarkable parallel, 2 
 Esdr. xvi. 40 — 44, probably copied from this 
 passage. Stanley.] 52 — 34:.^ Applica- 
 
 tion ofivhat has been just said to the ques- 
 tion of marriage. 32. θβ'λω Se . . .] 
 'But (i.e. since this is so — since the time 
 is so short, and that, in order that we Cliris- 
 tians may sit loose to tlie world) I wish 
 you to be without worldly cai'es ' (undis- 
 
 tracted). Then he explains how this touches 
 on the subject. irus apetrei — ' how he 
 
 shall please:' πώς αοίσ•(\ — 'how he may 
 please.' The latter is the more usual : see 
 Winer, § 42. 4, b. 34.] See var. 
 
 readd. ; I treat here only of the te,i~t. — 
 ' Divided also is the (married) woman 
 and the virgin' (i.e. divided in interest 
 [i. e. in cares and pursuits] from one 
 another : oh τι/ν αυτήν ίχυυσι φροντίδα, 
 ηλλά μίμερισμίναι ίϊσι ταίς σπουδαΊς, 
 Theophyl. : not merely, different from 
 one another, as E. V., Cln-ys., Lutli., 
 Grot., al.). The sing, verb seems to be 
 used, as standing first in this sentence, and 
 because // γυνή κ. ή παρθ. embraces the 
 female sex as one idea : so e. g. Plat. Lys. 
 p. 207, 0iXfi σί ό 7ΓίίΓ>)ρ Kcd ι) μητηρ : 
 Herod, v. 21, (ίπιτο γαρ ύή σφι κ. οχή- 
 ματα κ. βίράποΐ'τες κα'ι ή πάσα πολλή 
 παρασκευή : q. d. 'There loves thee father 
 and mother,' — 'there followed them,' &c. 
 See more exx. in Kiihner ii. p. 58 (§ 433, 
 exception 1 ) : — Reiche thinks that one and 
 the same woman is intended at difterent 
 periods : but // ck γαμήσασα is against 
 this : it would be γαμήσασα δέ (Meyer). 
 — The judgment of marriage here pro- 
 nounced by the Aj). must be taken, as the 
 rest of the chapter, with its accompanying 
 conditions. He is speaking of a pressing 
 and quickly shortening period whicli ho 
 regards as yet remaining before that day 
 and hour of which neither lie, nor any man, 
 knew. He wishes his Corinthians, during
 
 50i 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους λ. 
 
 VII. 
 
 g = ch. τι. 5. 
 
 χ. 11. ζίί. 
 
 7al. 
 h ch. χ. 33 
 
 only. 
 i here only. 
 
 Prov. xxii. 
 
 £5. 
 k and ronstr., 
 
 Maik xi. 7. 
 1 Aclsxiii fin 
 
 reft', ih. xii. 
 
 24. 
 
 ριμνα τα του κόσμου, ττως 
 δε ^ ΤΓβος το νμων αυτών 
 
 (1 ' ' - ' Λ ' 
 
 apian τω avcpi. 
 
 35 
 
 Γρος 
 
 ίπιράλω, άλλα 
 
 i /-> / f - 
 
 m ■> / ^ - / 
 
 ευττα/οεοροι; τω κυριω 
 
 ρ 
 
 συμφόρου Χί-γο), ουγ 
 
 ^)εοροι; 
 " ασχι/μοί'ειι; "^ εττι xiji' 
 υπίρακμος, και όντως 
 ουχ αμαρτανζΐ, -γαμίΐτωσαν 
 ^ ία αυτού εοραιος, μη 
 
 ττρος το 
 
 " ατηρισπαστο)ς. 
 
 τταρθίνον αυτού 
 
 οφίΐΧίΐ yiviaOai, 
 
 37 Γ.,, δέ 
 
 τούτο 
 ira 
 και 
 Η οε Tic 
 νομίζει, ίάν if 
 ο θίΧίΐ 7Γθ(£ίτω* 
 
 ABDK 
 luJK 
 
 ίυσγημον 
 
 36 ,: g,' 
 
 ος• 
 
 εστηκεΐ' ε»' τϊ? 
 
 ίχων ai'ay/CT)i', εΰ,ουσιαν 
 
 ρ Mark χν. 24 1 J. James τ. 14. q = Eur. 
 
 .iph. 02(1. Tyr. 1462, τυίμ ύθλιαίν οίκτραϊι- tc παρ- 
 
 s — ch. V. 10. ix. 10. Heb. ii. 17. V. 3. 
 
 Luke xiv. 18. xxiii. 17. Jude 3. Jos. Antt. xvi. 9. 3. 
 
 13. 
 η here only +. 
 
 Po yb. ii. 20 
 
 Hal. See 
 
 Liikex.4ii. 
 ο ch. siii. Γι only. Dtut. xxv. 3. See Ezek. xvi. 8. 
 
 Iph. in Aul. 714, ίκΕΪσ' ύ-πήξα σϊ;ι/ 6μι;ι/ tc παρθένοι 
 θ^ΐΌΐν ΐμ,ιϊΐ'. r here only t. See Sir. xli 
 
 nch.xv. 58. Col. i. 23 only t. Ps. Ivi. 8 Symm. i 
 
 w coHstr., here only. if. 'έχ , Matt. vu. 2U relT. 
 
 ■ — ra rov κοσμ. om B. — αριση see on ver 32.-35. rec συμφίρον, with Meth Chr Thdrt 
 al : txt ABDi 13. I7. 20. 37- 49 Hes.— rec t ΐί7Γ()ος£ ipov, with Κ Sic. Chr (h 1, and Matth's 
 msi)Oec: π()οςίίρον J : ιυπροςικτον 5. G : txt ABDEFG 17. 31-7. 49. 73 all Clem 
 Eus Bas all. — 36. ασχημονει FG omg νόμιζα. — ίοτ όντως, τούτο Α. — γ(νεσθαι FG 
 Mtth. — κιη υνχ αμ. \0<).—ονκ D(E?)FG.— γ«/ί£ίΓω D'FG vss Aug (si nubat d e ν 
 al lat-ff) : -γαμητωσαν JK : γαμησητωσαΐ' 2H8 : om aeth. — 37. rec ίδο. tv τ. καρ5. 
 with JK all Thdrti Thl al : om tdp. FG it (d e g) seth : txt ABDE I7. 23. 31-7-9. 46-9. 
 57. 71-3-4. 120 (for εδρ., γενναίος 46) ν copt basm syrr al Bas Thdrtj lat-ff. {The 
 
 that short time, to be as far as possible 
 totally undistracted. He mentions as an 
 objection to marriage, that which is an U7i- 
 doubtedfact of Itvman experience : — which 
 is necessarily bound up with that relation ; 
 and without which the duties of the rela- 
 tion could not he fulfilled. Since he wrote, 
 the unfolding of God's providence has 
 taught us more of the interval before the 
 coming of the Lord than it was given even 
 to an inspired Apostle to see. And as it would 
 be perfectly reasonable and proper to urge 
 on an apparently dying man the duty of 
 abstaining from contracting new worldly 
 obligations, — but both unreasonable and im- 
 proper, should the same person recover his 
 health, to insist on this abstinence any 
 longer : so now, when God has manifested 
 His will that nations should rise up and 
 live and decay, and long centuries elapse 
 before the day of the coming of Christ, it 
 would be manifestly unreasonable to urge, — 
 except in so far as every man's καιρός is 
 ουνεσταΧμίνος, and similar arguments are 
 applicable, — the considerations here en- 
 forced. Meanwhile they stand here on the 
 sacred page as a lesson to us how to regard, 
 though in circumstances somewhat changed, 
 our worldly relations ; and to teach us, as the 
 coming of the Lord may be as near now, as 
 the Apostle then believed it to be, to act at 
 least in the spirit of his advice, and be, as far 
 as God's manifest will that we should enter 
 into the relations and affairs of life allows, 
 άμίριμνοι. The duty of ver. 35 fin. is incum- 
 bent on all Christians, at all periods. 
 35.] Caution against mistaking what has 
 been said for an itnperative order, whereas 
 it was only a svygestion for their best in- 
 
 terest, τοΰτο] vv. 32—34. 
 
 ττρος TO υμ. αύτ. συμ.] ' For yoUT own 
 (emph.) profit,' — i. e. not for my own pur- 
 poses — not to exercise my apostolic autho- 
 rity. — ' Not that I may cast a snare 
 (lit. ' a noose ;' the metaphor is from throw- 
 ing the noose in hunting, or in war ; so 
 Herod, vii. 85, >/ Sk μάχη τούτεων των 
 ανδρών ί'ιδε. επίάν συμμίαγωσι τοΐς 
 πολεμίοις, βηλλοιισι τίις σειράς ίπ' άκρφ 
 /3ρό;^οΐ'ς (χουσης, υτιυ δ' αν τΰχ-η ΐ]ΐ'τε 
 'ίπττου ΐμιτε άνθρώτνου, επ' ίωντον έλκει' οι 
 δε εν ερκεσι ίμπάΧασαόμενοι διαφθείρον- 
 ται. See other exx. in Wetst.) over you (i.e. 
 entangle and encumber you with difficult 
 precepts), but witli a view to seemliness 
 (cf. Rom. xiii. 13) and waiting upon the 
 Lord without distraction.' De W. remarks, 
 that ττρος το παρεδρεύειν τφ κ. άττερ. 
 would be the easier constr. Stanley draws 
 out the parallel to the story in ref. Luke. 
 36 — 38.] For seemliness' sake : and conse- 
 quently, if there be danger, by a father with- 
 holding his consent to his daughter's mar- 
 riage, of unseemly treatment of her, let an 
 exception be made in that case : but other- 
 wise, if there be no such danger, it is better 
 not to give her in marriage. — ' But (intro- 
 duces an inconsistency with εΰαχημον) if 
 any one (any father) thinks that he is 
 behaving unseemly towards Ms virgin 
 daughter (viz. in setting before her a 
 temptation to sin with her lover, or at 
 least, bringing on her the imputation of it, 
 by withholding his consent to her marriage), 
 if she he of full age (for before that the 
 imputation and the danger consequent on 
 preventing the marriage would not be such 
 as to bring in the άσχημοσΰνη. — The ακμή
 
 iio— 39. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους λ. 
 
 505 
 
 ε έχει ττίρι του ιόιου υελΐ}ματος, και τοντο ^ ΚίκριΚΒν xofman.Lnke 
 εν τγι καρόια αντοΰ, ^^ του ^ τηοίΐν την ΐαυτοϋ '' τταοθενον, ^-{Uxvifi. 
 
 καΛως ποίίΐ. *" ωςτε /cat ο ΐκya|LuLωv καλώς ποίίΐ, -•Ρβΐ. i.2i. 
 καί ο μτ] £κ•γαμι^ων *^ κρίίσσον ποηϊ. jy'L'^A^cts 
 
 39 Γ" " d S•'? e ',' " ' y- Γ > ν 5 - . xxvii. 1. 
 
 i υΐ'ϊ; οεοεται εφ όσον ^^oroi' Cy ο αΐ'ηρ αυτΊ]ς ζ = ι Thes 
 
 i.4. Johaxii. 7. 
 25 τ. r.) 
 
 ess. V. 
 Pet. 
 a = Acts s. 33. Phil. iv. 14. James ii. 8, ly. 2 Pet. i. 19. b lierp nnly f. (Mark xu. 
 
 c ver. 9 rett'. d — Rom. vii. ■>. ver. '27. e Rom. vii. I reft. 
 
 transposn seems to have been made for perspicuily , to bring tanjicev and t^naiog together.") 
 — rec aft καρδ. (1st) om αντον (prob as unnecessary), with JK all sjt alThdrt, Dam Till 
 Oec : ins ABDEFG all vss Bas Thdrt lat-ff.— for k<wc. αντον (2nd), iSia Ka^iha AB (BentI 
 expressly) 31-7-9. 46. 73-4: suo coi'de Kmhrst. {The τον and αντον having produced 
 confusion, and one or other, or both, being omitted [«ee beloiv'\, ilia was insd to parti- 
 cularize κα^ιδια, being sanctioned bt/ ιόιου just precedg): tst DEFGJKal. — του hef τηρ. om 
 AB 17. 3!i. 4β. 67'. 73. 100-8-14 I'o-lO. 20. 238 (all?) (as unnecessary ;> ornot understood? 
 or perhaps from the του ο/'ηυτυυ originally. See note) : ins DEFGJK al Dam Oec. — 
 for ποια, τΓοιησει AB ϋ". 17- 4C. OT copt basm {corrn to future, as better suiting the sense : 
 see also on next ver) : txt DEFGJK most mss it ν syrr seth al Bas Thdrt Dam Thl Oec. — 
 38. om 3. 114: ωςτι to 1st Troift om FG 39. 57.— for f icy., γαμιζωιΆΒΌΕ 17.23.31. 4G 
 Clem Meth Bas : (γγαμιζων ΐί Tl. 113-- 17 Thdrt Dam : add την (αυτόν παρθινοί' {or r, 
 παρθ. ιαντ.) ABDE 17- 31-7. 40. 71-3. 93. 109 d e ν copt basm Syr syrf al Clem Aug^ 
 all {γαμιζωΐ' τ. eavr. παρθ. appears to have been a gloss on ικγαμιζωΐ' • there would be 
 no reason for 071 alteration the other way). — ποιηηιι Β 6. 17• 37. C7'.^rec ο δ( μ)} 
 {corrn for contrast), with JK al syr Thdrt Thl Oec : txt ABDEFG I7. 4G. 73. 93. 177-9 
 it V copt basm Syr aeth al Clem Meth Bas Chr lat-ff. — -γαμιζων ABDE &c as before, and 
 FG who omd ωςτε to ttoih bef : (yy. κ. &c as bef {see above). — ποΐ7}σίΐ AB 6. 17. 37• 
 46. 67- al : txt &c as before {see above). — 39. rec aft δίδεται ins νομω {γαμώ Κ Epiph) 
 {addnfrom Rom vii. 2), with D'EFGJ &c ν Syr syrf al Thdrt al Ambrstj al, but om 
 ABD'F 17. 07^ am demid tol harl^ d e copt basm al Clem Origj Cyr lat-if. — αντης om 
 
 of woman is defined by Plato, Rep. v. p. 
 400, to be twenty years, that of man, 
 thirty. See Stanley's note), and thus 
 it must be (i. e. and there is no help for 
 it, — they are bent on it beyond the power 
 of dissuasion : — depends not on εάν, as the 
 indie, shews, but on εΐ. ούτως, viz. that 
 they must marry. — Theophyl. takes the words 
 for the beginning of the consequent sentence 
 1= υ'ντως και γενίσθω. But, as Meyer re- 
 marks, the words would thus be altogether 
 superfluous, and after όφεί\ίΐ, οίιχ ύμαμτά- 
 νει would be inapplicable) , what he will (as 
 his determination on this τ'ομιζειν), let him 
 do {to δοκούν 7rparr£rw,Theodoret)he sin- 
 ueth not {αμαρτίας yap ύ ya/jot ελεύθερος, 
 Theodoret); let them (his daughter and her 
 lover) marry.' — Some (Syr., Grot., al.) take 
 άσχιιμοΐ'ίΐϊ' passively, — ^ thinks that he is 
 (likely to be) brought into disgrace as re- 
 gards his daughter,^ \\τ. by her seduction, or 
 by her being despised as unmarried. But this 
 would require (1) the future άσχ7]μυνίισειΐ', 
 — (2) επί with a dative, the ace. shewing 
 that tlie verb is one of actio7i : Meyer com- 
 pares άσχτμιιινε'ιν εΙς τίνα, Dion. Hal. ii. 
 26. And (3) the active sense of the verb 
 is found in this Ep. ch. xiii. 5, the only 
 other place where it occurs in the N. T. 
 37.] ' But he who stands firm in 
 his heart(=::/yw/7/0.ve,— having no such mis- 
 giving that lie is behaving unseemly), not 
 involved in any necessity (no οφείλει yi- 
 
 νίσθαι, as in the other case : no determina- 
 tion to marry on the part of his daughter, 
 nor attachment formed), but has (change 
 of constr. : — the clause is opposed to εχο)ν 
 arayK.) liherty of action respecting his 
 personal wish (to keep his daughter un- 
 married), and has determined this in his 
 heart (τοΰτο, not stated what, but under- 
 stood by the reader to mean, the keeping 
 his daughter U7i7na7-ried : — not in apposi- 
 tion with nor explained by, του τηρ. τ, 
 εαυτ. παυθ., see below), in order to keep 
 (in her jiresent state) his own virgin 
 daughter' (this, τοΰ τηρ., is the ptvpose 
 of the determination expressed in κεκρικεν ; 
 not [as commonly given] the expl. of τοΰτο, 
 which would require ro τηρε'ϊν or τηρείν. 
 It shews that the motive of the κ'εκρικεν is 
 the feeling of a father, desirous of retaining 
 in her present state his own virgin daughter. 
 So Meyer, and I think rightly ; see note on 
 Acts xxvii. 1. De Wette, on the other 
 hand, regards the words τοΰ τηα. . . ., as 
 merely a periphrasis for not giving her in 
 marriage). 38.] The latter καί has 
 
 been altered to δέ because a contrast seemed 
 to be required between καλώς and κρι7σσοΐ'. 
 One account might be (as M. and De W.) 
 that Paul had intended to write καλώς πυηΐ 
 twice, but cu)-7-ente cala7no, intensified the 
 expression to κρΰησον τζοιεί. Perhaps a 
 better one would be found by referring tho 
 και— Kill to that which καλώς- and κρείασον
 
 506 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 VII. 40. 
 
 f — Matt.SXTii. 
 62. Actsvii. 
 
 εαν 
 Οηναι 
 
 δέ 
 
 κo^μηu)J 
 μόνον ίν 
 
 ο α ΐ'ηρ , 
 κυριψ. 
 
 ' ελευ 
 40 
 
 ούτως μίΐν^, κατά ΤΊ}ν ίμην 
 πνίΰμα θεοΰ "' t^HV. 
 VIII. ^ Πε(){ δε των " α^ωλυθυτων 
 
 'ερα βστιν ω θέλει "γαμη- 
 καριωτίρα δε εσην, εαν 
 -γνωμην' δοκω δε καγώ 
 
 ABDE 
 FGJK 
 
 τταντες 
 
 γΐ'ωσιν 
 
 Λ - 2 " 
 
 οικοοομΗ. ίΐ 
 
 εχο^ιεί' 
 τις 
 
 δϋκει είδε' 
 
 ο >'ί> ο " 
 
 οιοαμίν οτι 
 
 φυσιοι, η δε αγαττι; 
 
 ναι τι, ουδεττω ουδέν 
 
 νν. 7, 10, 11. See 1 Tim. vi. 2U. 
 
 l.sa. xiv. 8. 
 g w. inf. here 
 
 only. 
 h = Kom. XI i. 
 
 2,8, 11 «1. 
 i ver. 2Γι. 
 k = ch. i. 10 
 
 rcff 
 Ich. iii. 18 rtff. 
 m Rum. viii. H. 
 
 Jiicle lit. 
 η .\ct.s XV. 2!). 
 
 xxi.25. Rev. ii. 14, 20 t• " 
 
 q ell. iv. G reft. r = ch. x. 23. Acts i 
 
 44. — bef Koiju. ins και D''(E?)FG (κίκοιμηθη for κ•«ι κ-οφ.) J all syr (seth al appy) Thdrt 
 Oec (perfiajjs error, facilitated by the common occurrence of και in such a })0S7i : cfvv 
 11, 2ii) : om ABD'k &c vss Clem Orig Thdrt (text) al ; quodni lat-ff', si autem al. — for 
 κοιμηϋη, anoOcwi] A 73 basm syr (raarg) Clem Bas. — rec aft ο ανηβ ins αυτής {sup- 
 plemcntarrj addn), with DEFGJ &c vss (syr*) Origj Dam Thl lat-ff: om ABK many 
 mss V (nis) Origj Bas Cyr Thdrtj Oec Vig : ο ανηυ αυτής om Tert Cypr. — γαμηθη FG 
 it V lat-ft": γαμησαι J'.— 40. for St (2nd), ya/, Β 4. 17. 37- 07^• 71-3. 1 16 tol basm syr 
 (if in marg) Ambr Ambrst Vig Sedul (not Tertj Aug Jer al) {corrn to suit the sense). — 
 for θίον, χρισηιν 17• — for ιχιιν, (χω FG g Tertg Ambrst Aug. 
 
 Chap. VIII. 1. ονκ οιδαμη'3]. — ct om 109. — 2. rec aft κ ins St {for connejcion), viith 
 DEFGJ Κ &c V syr* g {si autem aut quod si) Chr Thdrt Thl Oec, si quis enim Jer, et si 
 quis ceth al : txt AB 17• 4G. 71-3-4. 80. IIG am tol harU (appy) d e{quodsie) coptbasm 
 arm Clem ^lelet Nyss Dam Orig-int Tert Cypr Ambrst all. — for ttotvai, tyvwKtvai {corrn 
 to suit thefollg) ABDEFG 17- 31-7-8. 4i). 71-3. UG d e g coptbasm Clem Nyss^ Thdrt, 
 Dam(yiraifficfij^Melet): txt JK &c Chr Thdrt (hi) Thl Oec: tivaim.^\.\^^•. scire aliquid, 
 nondum cognovit {scit some if) . . . eum scire ν lat-tf. — for ουζιπω, ουπω AB 17• 31. 4G. 
 71-3. llGClem Melet (ju /Όδ q/i(Mee/'asMre of ovStv as unnecessary, ουΒεπω, thus standing 
 
 pier,' partly by freedom from the attendant 
 trials of the Ινεστώσα άΐ'ήγκ•?;, — but prin- 
 cipally for the reason mentioned verse 34. 
 " To higher blessedness in heaven, which 
 
 have in common : ' both he who gives in 
 marriage does icell, and he who gives not 
 in marriage does ivell, even in a higher 
 degree.' [I need hardly remind the tiro 
 that ' both— and ' here does not, as Bloomf. 
 objects, represent τ( — και, — each subject 
 being accompanied by its own predi- 
 cate.] 39, 40.] Concerning second 
 marriages of women. 39. SeScrai] 
 viz. τ ψ avcpi, or perhaps absolutely, ' is 
 bound,' in her marriage state. 
 γαμηθήναι] γαμηθΙΊναι and γαμησαι are 
 later forms, reprobated by the gramma- 
 rians : γημεθηναι and γημίσαι being the 
 corresponding ones in good Greek. See 
 Lobeck on Phrynichus, p. 742. — Meyer 
 cites Schol. on Eur. Med. 593, γαμίΐ μιν 
 γαρ ό άνήρ, γαμίΊται δε ι) ■γυνι). But 
 not invariably, see ver. 28. μόνον 
 Iv κυρίω] ' only in tlie Lord,' i. e. within 
 the limits of Christian connexion — in the 
 element in which all Christians live and 
 walk; — 'let her marry a Christian.' So 
 Tertull., Cypr., Ambros., Jerome, Grot., 
 Est., Bengel, Roscnm., Olsh., Meyer, De 
 W. — But Chrys. explains it μετά σωφρο- 
 σύνης, μετά κασμώτητος : — and so (but in 
 some cases including in this the marrying of 
 a Christian) Theodoret {τουτίατηι ομοπι- 
 στψ, ενσεβεΊ, σωφρόιως, εΐΊ'όμως), Theo- 
 phyl., Calv., Beza, Calov., al. This how- 
 ever seems fiat, and the other much to be 
 preferred ; also as making a better limita- 
 tion of (;3θ£λ£ί. 40. ρ,ακαριωτερα] 'hap- 
 
 became attached to celibacy afterwards in 
 the views of its defenders (Ambros., Corn, a 
 Lap., al.), there is no allusion here." Meyer, 
 δοκώ δί κάγώ] This is modestly 
 said, implying more than is expressed by 
 it, — not as if there were any uncertainty in 
 his mind. It gives us the true meaning of 
 the saying that he is giving his opinion, as 
 ver. 25 ; viz. not that he is speaking with- 
 out inspiration, but that in the conscious- 
 ness of inspiration he is giving that counsel 
 which should determine the question. The 
 rationalizing Grotius explains ττνενμα dtov, 
 ' non revelationem, sed sinccrum affectum 
 Deo et piis serviendi,' referring to ch. iv. 
 21, where (1) the meaning is not this (see 
 note) ; and (2) the expression is not πνεϋμα 
 θίον. κάγώ] ' asivell as other teach- 
 
 ers' Whether said with a general or par- 
 ticular reference, we cannot tell, from not 
 being sufficiently acquainted with the cir- 
 cumstances. 
 
 VIII. 1— XI. 1.] On the partaking 
 
 OF MEATS OFFERED TO IDOLS, AND AS- 
 SISTING AT FEASTS HELD IN HONOUR OF 
 IDOLS. 
 
 Chap. VIII. 1—13.] Though (vv. 1— G) 
 for those who are strong in the faith, an 
 idol having no existence, the question has 
 no iniportaace, this is not so ivith all (ver.
 
 VIII. 1—4. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 507 
 
 καθώς δε 
 
 £•γνωκεν καυως όει yvujvai 
 ούτος εγνωσται υττ αυτού. 
 
 ει δε 
 
 4 
 
 τις αγάπα τον ι 
 περί ττ7ς ρρωσεως 
 
 ^ευν, ■''=J?al.iv 9. 
 ' 2 Tim. 11. 19. 
 
 alone, was altered to ονπω : so Meyer) : txt DEFGJK most mss Nj^ss Chr Thdrt^ Dam Thl 
 Oec.-bef£>j/. omoi;<^fi/(*eeeiore) ABD'FG I?. 31. 4C. 71-3. 109-16. 238 it ν copt basm 
 al Clem Melet Nyss Thdrt, lat-if : t.\t D^JK most mss syrr al Chr Thdrtj Dam Till Oec. 
 — for tyi'wKiv, εγ)•ω {the eye of the transcriber prob passing from κ of Kfy to κ of 
 καθώς folic/) ABD'FG 31-7. 4^. 73-4. 11(1-20 Clem Melet Nyss Tlidrtj Dam: ηδη 
 17 : tst D'EJK most mss Chr Thdrt2 Thl Oec— 3. νττ αυτυυ om 17.— 4. for της βρ. 
 
 7) ; and the infirmities of the weak must 
 in such a matter be regarded in our con- 
 duct {w. 8—13). 1.] 8e, transitional, 
 as in ch. viii. 1 , al. fr. — As regards the con- 
 struction, we may observe, that πιοί δ. των 
 elc. is again taken itp ver. 4, ττίρϊ της 
 βρωσ. ουν των ιΊδ., after a parenthesis. 
 We may also observe that in the latter case 
 οιδαμίν on is restated, bearing therefore, 
 it is reasonable to suppose, the same mean- 
 ing as before, viz. ' we know, that.' This 
 to my mind is decisive against beginning 
 the parenthesis with on, and rendering on, 
 'for,' as Luther, Bengel, Valckn., al. :— 
 ' we know {for we all have knowledge),' 
 S(c. Are we then to begin it with ττάΐ'τις, 
 leaving πίρί . . . οΊδαμίν on broken off, 
 corresponding to the words resumed in ver. 
 4 ? We should thus leave within the par- 
 enthesis a very broken and harsh sen- 
 tence : πάντις γνώσιν ΐχομιν {what γνώ- 
 σις ? if yv. about the ύδωλοϋ., it should be 
 joined with the preceding ; if yv. in general, 
 it should be την γνώσιν, see ch. xiii. 2, 
 which would be absurd ; if some yv. on 
 some subjects, as σν πίστιν Ιχας, James ii. 
 18, it would here be irrelevant), i) yv. 
 ψυσιοΊ, ι) δί ay. κ.τ.'Κ. The first logical 
 break in the sense is where the concrete 
 γνώσΐξ, that irept των elS., is forsaken, 
 and the abstract ή γνώσις treated of. Here 
 therefore, with Chrys., &c., Beza, Grot., 
 Calv., Est., al., De'Wette, and Meyer, I 
 begin the parenthesis, — ' . . . we are aware 
 that we all (see below) have knowledge ; 
 knowledge,' &c. ; not however placing it 
 in brackets, for it is already provided for 
 in the cunstr. by the resumption of ττίμι . . 
 ovv below ; and is not a grammatical but 
 only a logical parenthesis. — The είδωλό- 
 θντο were those portions of the animals 
 offered in sacrifice w-hich were not laid on 
 the altar, and which belonged partly to the 
 priests, partly to those who had offered 
 them. These remnants were sometimes 
 eaten at feasts holden in the temples (see 
 ver. 10), or in private houses (ch. x. 27), 
 sometimes sold in the markets, by the 
 priests, or by the poor, or by the niggardly. 
 Theophrastus, Charact. xviii., describes it as 
 characteristic of the άνί\ίϋΒί(>ος, — ϊκδιδηνς 
 αυτού θυγατίιια, του μίν ifQtiov, πλην 
 τών Ίί[>ώ)•, τα κ()ία άπυδίδοσΟαι. Tlicy 
 were sometimes also reserved for future 
 
 use : Theophr. mentions it as belonging to 
 the άναίσχυιτος, — θύσας τοις θίυΊς αυτός 
 μίν δίίπνίΐν τταρ' ίτίρψ, τα δί κρία άττο- 
 τιΘίναι άλσι πάσας. Christians were thus 
 in continual danger of meeting with such 
 remnants. Partaking of them was an abo- 
 mination among the Jews : see Num. xxv. 
 2. Ps. cvi.28. Rev. ii. 14. Tobit i. 10— 12 ; 
 and was forbidden by the Apostles and 
 elders assembled at Jerusalem, Actsxv. 29 ; 
 xxi. 25. That Paul in the whole of this 
 passage makes no allusion to that decree, 
 but deals with the question on its own 
 merits, probably is to be traced to his wish 
 to establish his position as an independent 
 Apostle, endowed with God's Holy Spirit 
 sufficiently himself to regulate such matters. 
 But it also shews, how tittle such decisions 
 were at that time regarded as lastingly 
 binding on the whole church : and how 
 fully competent it was, even during tlie life- 
 time of the Apostles, to Christians to open 
 and question on its own merits, a matter 
 which theg had, for a special purpose, once 
 already decided. — There should be a comma 
 at ίΐδωΧοθύτων, as the resumed sentence 
 (ver. 4) shews. "jravres γνώσιν «χο- 
 
 μ.€ν] Who are iravres ^ ^Nleyer says, Paul 
 himself and the enlightened among the 
 Corr. : Estius, al., these latter alone; and 
 some think it said ironically , some conces- 
 sively, of them : Grot., " pars maxima nos- 
 trum, ut Rom. iii. 12." But it is manifest 
 from vv. 4 — G, which is said in the widest 
 possible reference to the faith of all Chris- 
 tians, that all Christians must be intended 
 here also : and so Chrys., Theophyl., Oe- 
 cum., Calov., al., and De Wette. But then, 
 ver. 7j he says, οΰκ ev ιτΕσιν i) γνώσις: 
 and how are the two to be reconciled ? By 
 taking, I believe, the common sense view of 
 two such statements, which would be, in 
 ordinary preaching or writing, that the first 
 was said of what is prof essed and confessed, 
 — the second of what is actually ayid prac- 
 tically apprehended by each man. Thus 
 we may say of our people, in the former 
 sense, ' all are Christians ; all beliere in 
 Christ :' but in the latter, ' all are )iot Chris- 
 tians ; all do not believe.' γνώσιν, 
 scil. Tzfpi αυτών. — From )) γι•, to end of 
 ver. ο (s_'e above) is a logical jjarcntbesis. 
 ή γνώσΐ9, ' knowledge,' aljstract. — 
 scil. wlien alone, or improperly prcdomi••
 
 508 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 π — Matt. χϋ. 
 4. Gal. i. 
 
 Γ dat. =t 
 18 retr. 
 
 των ° ειδωλοθυτωΐ', οιδαμεν Ότι ούδίΐ» ί'ιοωΧον ίν κυσμω, 
 και ΟΤΙ ουόίΐς σεος έτερος " "" '■" 
 ίίσιν Xeyoniivoi θίοι ύτε εν 
 
 ^ ^ ' ' rj^ti' εις 
 
 μη εις' " και yap είττερ 
 
 E-yojUEi'oi ϋεοί είτε εν ουρανω, είτε επι yriq, ωςττερ 
 
 εισιν θεοί ττολλοί και κύριοι πολλοί, "" αλλ 
 
 ουί', if της βρ. DE 1. 17• 108-15 vss Iren Au^ (γνωσιως D' 121). — ουδίν ίστιν FG. — 
 ίτιρος om ABDEFG 17• 39. 46-7. 67". 73. 110-19 it ν all Cyr Bas Iren lat-ff (;;ro6 as 
 in the way, or, as Met/ suggests, to avoid the possible misunderstanding , — ' There is only- 
 one θίος ίτίρος') : t.\t JK most mss syrr al Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec. — 5. oi λι-γομενυι 
 FGK 117. — from αση• to ei^ij/ora J. — Otoi (1st) k<u κνριοι DE d e Ambrst Pel: θιοι 
 Xfyo/tfvoi 144. — -ω ovp. 178. — rec της γης, with mss Thdrt, (but once he has also tv 
 τωουυ.)Οβο: txt ABDEFGK 37- 46. 57- 07'• 73. 80-9. ll4 (al?) Orig, Cyrr Chr 
 Thdrtj Dion-areop al. — for ωςπιρ, ennp (siquidem) ν Aug (somet) Pelag : add ovv Chr. 
 — 6. αλλ om Β basm Iren ; νμιν A? : ημιν St 17 copt Ath Did Cyrj Epiph. — tig ο θίος 
 
 nant : it is the attribute of ») -γνίοσις, 
 ' barely.' ή άγάττη] viz. ' towards the 
 brethren,' see Rom. siv. 15, and ch. x. 23. 
 
 οίκοδ.] 'helps to build up' (God's 
 spiritual temple), ch. iii. 9. 2, 3.] The 
 
 general deductions, (l)from ^profession of 
 knowledge, and (2) from the presence if 
 love, in a man : — expressed sententiously 
 and without connecting particles, more, as 
 Meyer observes, after the manner of St. John 
 in his Epistles. — On the text, see var. 
 readd. — The case supposed is the only one 
 which can occur where love is absent and 
 conceit present : a man can then only think 
 he knows, — no real knowledge being acces- 
 sible without humility and love. Such a 
 man ' knows nothing yet, as he ought to 
 know :' has had no real practice in the art 
 of knowing. — ' But if a man loves God 
 (which is the highest and noblest kind of 
 love, the source of brotherly love, 1 John 
 V. 2), this man (and not the wise in his 
 own conceit) is known by Him.' The ex- 
 planation of this latter somewhat difficult 
 expression is to be found in Gal. iv. 9, rvv 
 Si γΐ'όΐ'Γ£ς• Θίϋν, μάλλον δέ γνωσθ€ντε5 
 •υπό θεοϋ. So that here we may fairly 
 assume that he chooses the expr. ϊγνωσται 
 νπ' αϋτον in preference to that which 
 would have been, had any object of know- 
 ledge but the Supreme been treated of, the 
 natiiral one, viz. ούτος tyi>w αυτόν. We 
 cannot be said to knotv God, in any full 
 sense (as here) of the word to knoiv. But 
 those who become acquainted with God by 
 love, ' are known by Him :' are the espe- 
 cial objects of the divine Knowledge, — their 
 being is pervaded by the Spirit of God, and 
 the wisdom of God is shed abroad in them. 
 So in 2 Tim. ii. 19, tyvw κύριος τινς όιτης 
 αντον. See also Ps. i 0, and reft". "Cogni- 
 tionem passivam sequitur cognitio activa 
 c. xiii. 12. Egregia metalepsis : cognitus 
 est, adeoque cognovit." Bengel. 
 4.] The subject is resumed, and further 
 specified by the insertion of της βρώσtωr. 
 
 ovv resumes a broken tliread of dis- 
 course : so Plat. Apol. p. 29, ωςτε οϋδ' ii 
 
 με άφ'ΐίτί , . . t'l μοι ττρός ravra tlπoιτe, 
 Sec. . . . ίί ουν μι, ovtp tlnov, ϊπι τού- 
 τοις aip'ioiTt . . . See Hartung, Partikcl- 
 lehre, ii. 22. — ' We know that there is no 
 idol in the world,' i. e. that the t'iSwXa 
 of the heathen (meaning not strictly the 
 images, but the persons represented by 
 them) have no existence in the world. That 
 they who worship idols, worship devils, the 
 Ap. himself asserts ch. x. 20 ; but that is 
 no contradiction to the present sentence, 
 which asserts that the deities imagined by 
 them, Jupiter, Apollo, &c., have absolutely 
 no existence. Of that subtle Power which 
 under the guise of these deluded the na- 
 tions, he here says nothing. The rendering 
 of Chrys., Theodoret, Theophyl., Oecum., 
 Λ^ulg., E. Λ^, Luther, Beza, Grot., Est., al. 
 (' an idol is nothing in the world,' ch. x. 
 19. Jer. X. 3. Sanhedr. 03 2 [Wetst.], " no- 
 verant utique Israelitse idolum nihil esse''), 
 is certainly wrong here, on account of the 
 parallel cue tig θ(6ς ετ. ίί μι) ης which fol- 
 lows. — ' And that there is no other god, 
 hut One:' on the omission of ί τίμιος, see var. 
 readd. ; — cf. the first commandment, ουκ 
 Ισυνταί σοι θιοι ετίρηι πλην εμον. 
 5, 6.] Further explanation and confirma- 
 tion of ver. 4. 5.] ' For even sup- 
 posing that (tintp makes an hypothesis, so 
 that " in incerto relinquitur, jure an injuria 
 sumatur," Herm. ad Viger. p. 834. See 
 also Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 343, who 
 gives many exx. — και γαρ el, as Eur. ^led. 
 400, Kcii yap ti σύ με aTvytlc, ούκ αν ίυ- 
 ναίμην σοι κακώς (ppoi't'ii' ττοτε ; see Har- 
 tung, Partikellehre, i. 140 f.) beings named 
 gods (not those who are named gods, ol 
 Xf-y. Θ., i. esset, all who are so named) 
 EXIST {the chief emphasis is on €ΐσιν, ou 
 which the hypothesis turns), whether in 
 heaven, whether upon earth, as (we 
 know that) there are (viz. as being spoken 
 of, Deut. X. 17, ytio κύριος ό Θεός υμών, 
 ούτος θίος tCjv θεών και κύριος των κυρίων, 
 see also Ps. cxxxv. 2, 3) gods many, and 
 lords many' (the asirep brings in an ac- 
 knowledged fact, on which the possibihty
 
 o- 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 509 
 
 is ου τα πάντα και ημίΐς 
 
 Όίος ο πατΐ]ζ> 
 
 και Ης κύριος 1ί}σους γυριστός, 
 οι αυτού. ' αλλ 
 
 δι' 
 
 ουκ: ίν πασιν 
 
 εις αυΓΟϊ', wR.un.xisr,. 
 
 \ / \ See Col. i. IB. 
 
 τα πάντα κ:α ι χ Arts xm is. 
 
 , _ 2 Cor. XI. Κ). 
 
 V γΐ'ωσις- τίνες 1 «.';;^ή. obj., 
 
 ' " i. 19. 
 
 t) γκωσιΓ T}^16(^ 
 
 Κ. ςν^ "ζ '^' a" " - »(^ ' λ ' η' »^ Λ 'η 1 Pet. ίί. ι 
 
 ABDE οε ΤΊ1 σι;νειο?;σει εως άρτι του ειοωλου ως (ώωλουυτον Heb. χ.2. 
 
 FGJ .β/' ^ ' b '^ ' - C ' Λ ν •Τ ,1 ach.iT.13u.. 
 
 εσϋιουσιΐ', και ?) συνειόησις αυτών ασϋενης ούσα jno- b w.^en. sabj., 
 
 Λ' SeO- Λ\Γ- 'f / ~ η " RoiD. ii. 15 
 
 λύνεται. ρ^ωμα όε Ίψας ου παβαστησιι τω σεω 
 
 παραστΊ]σει τω 
 
 Re 
 
 f — Rom. xii. 1 (xiv.'lO). 2 Cor. iv. 14. 
 
 c See Rom. sir. 
 1. IT. 19 al. d ReT. iii. 4. χίτ. 4 only. Isa. Ιχτ. 4 al. = Sir. xxi. 28. 
 e Rom. χίτ. 15 relF. " ~ "■ — . -- 
 
 FG. — ra (1st) om D. — και ημ. {ΐς αντ. om Clem Origj (not elsw) Ath Did Cassiod. — 
 και ιις . . . δι αυτού om 72• 115. — δι ον Β. — δι αντον 114 : (ΐς αυτόν 93. — at end, 55. 
 72-. 109-78 al slav-anct and some gr-ff add και ev πνίϋμα ayiov iv φ τά πάντα και 
 νμΰς tv αϋτψ : but om Chr (expressly, — odtv δηλον on ψίΐδόμίνος της άσθιΐ'ίίας των 
 άκονόντωι/ ταύτι^ ίχρήσατο rp διησκίνΓ/, και δια τοΰτο ονδε τον πνίϋματος ϊμνη- 
 μόηυσίν) Dam (1ι 1 ; elsW2 he has it) Thl Oec. — 7. Ct om arm : yap 37. 47. 68. 73. 80. 
 11 β Syr copt basm. — ior συνίΐδ., συνηθηα {ffloss on the more difficult σννίΐδησιι) AB 
 17• 4G. 07'. 80. 109 syr-marg copt basm seth Dam (67^ 137 Chr coram του ειδω- 
 λοθυτου for τ. ίΐδωλου) : txt DEFGJ most mss it ν syrr al Chr Thdrt Thl Oec Tert 
 Aug all. — rec του ειδ. εως άρτι {corrn for perspicuity), with AJ &c vss (^τινις δε 
 fwc ορΓί copt) Chr Thl Oec : txt BDEFG"31-7. 116 it v (am dem harl tol) Syr arm 
 Bas Thdrt lat-ff.— ως om 57. 67^. 114-20 al.— 8. νμας 17. 37. 108-16 18 lect 8: 
 aft παριστ. 238. — rec τταριστησι (corrn to suit the follg pres tenses), with DEJ al vss 
 Origi Ath (mssj) Chr Thdrt al Jacob-nisib lat ff: σννιστησιν FG : txt AB 5. 10. I?. 
 
 of the hypothesis rests — ' Even if some of 
 the many gods and many lords whom ive 
 knoiv to exist, be actually identical with 
 the heathen idols . . .' The Ap. does not 
 concede this, but only puts it). This exe- 
 gesis, which is Meyer's, is denied by De 
 Wette, who takes εΊπερ as concessive, ' even 
 though,^ and understands εΐηιν both times as 
 only ' e/-e,' — in the meaning of the heathen, 
 — imagining it impossible that Paul should 
 have seriously said in an objective sense, 
 ' there are gods many.' But in the sense 
 in which he uses θεοί (see above) there is 
 no unlikelihood that he should assert this. 
 — Chrys. gives the following explanation: 
 " και yap tlnfp ε'ιηΐ Χεγόμενοι θίοί, ωςπερ 
 ουν καΐ εΐσΐΐ'," ον\ άττλώς είσΐν, η\\ά, λε- 
 γόμενοι, ουκ tv πράγματι, άλλ ΐν ρηματι 
 τοΰτο έχοντες' ε'ίτε iv οΰρανψ, εΊτε ϊπ'ι yijg' 
 εν οϋρανφ την η\ιοι> λέγων κ. την σελήΐ'ην 
 κ. τον λοιπόν των άστρων χορόν και γάρ 
 και ταϋτα προςεκϋνησαν "Ελληνες" έπ'ι 
 γης δε δαίμονας, και τους ίξ άιΌρώπων 
 θ^οποιηθίντας απαντάς. And similarly 
 Theodoret, Theophyl., Oecum., Calv., Beza, 
 Calov., Estius, Schrader, al. See the vari- 
 ous minor differences of interpretation, in 
 Pool's Synopsis and De Wette : and a 
 beautiful note in Stanley. — There is a 
 sentence in Herodotus (ix. 27) singularly 
 resembling this in its structure : ήμΊν δε, 
 εϊ μηδέν άλλο ίστί άποδεδεγμένον, ίόςπερ 
 ίστϊ πολλά τε καί ευ έχοντα, . . . άλλα και 
 άπϊ) τοϋ iv ^ΙαραΟίϋνι έργον αζιοί εσμεν, 
 κ.τ.λ. Cf. also llom. 11. a. 81 f. ; φ. 576 f. 
 6.] 'Yet (see reff. just given, and cli. iv. 
 15) TO u.s (emphatic: however that matter 
 may be, ice hold) there is one God, the 
 
 Father (ό πατιίρ answers to Ίησοϋς χρι- 
 στός in the parallel clause below, and serves 
 to specify what God — viz. the Father of 
 our Lord Jesus Christ) of Whom (as their 
 Source of being) are all things, and we 
 for Him (His purposes — to serve His will) ; 
 and one Lord Jesus Christ (notice the εΙς 
 Θεός opposed to θεοί πολλοί, and εΙς κχΊριος 
 to κύριοι πολλοί), hy Whom (as Him by 
 whom the Father made the worlds, John i. 
 3. Heb. i. 2) are all things, and we (but 
 here secondly, we as his spiritual people, 
 in the new creation) by Him.' — The infer- 
 ence from the foregoing is that, per se, the 
 eating of meat offered to idols is a thing in- 
 different, and therefore allowed. The limita- 
 tion of this licence now follows. 7.] 
 ' But (fonbovn) not in all is the knowledge 
 (of which we have been speaking : i. e., see 
 above, is not in them in their individual 
 apprehension, though it is by their profession 
 as Christians) : but (abcv) some through 
 their consciousness, to this day, of the 
 (particular) idol (i. e. through their having 
 an apprehension to this day of the reality 
 of the idol, and so being conscientiously 
 afraid of the meat offered, as belonging to 
 him : not wishing to be connected with 
 him. ry συνειδησει εως άρτι is not = r/J 
 'έως άρτι συν., but '{'ως άρτι stands sepa- 
 rate, as above : so δια της ίμΐ/ς τ^αρονσίας 
 πάλιν προς υμάς, Phil. i. 26) eat it as 
 offered to an idol, and their conscience, 
 in that it is weak, is defiled.' — By εως 
 άρτι, it is shewn that these άσΟει-εΙς must 
 have belonged to the Gentile jiart of tlio 
 Cor. church : to those who had once, be- 
 fore their conversion, held these idols to bo
 
 510 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. VIII. 9—13. 
 
 hiVhViv"' οντ£ εαν μτ] φά-γωμεν, ^ υστίοουμεθα, ούτε εαν φογωμεί', abde 
 
 Γ'ηΓ See h f Si ιΟλ ' ^v k ' ' \ >>■ r ' - ^^^ 
 
 Rom.iii. 7 ττίρισσευομίν . ρΑεπετε οε μήπως tj εα,ονσια νμων 
 
 "^"• " 111 ' ' " C • ο ' 10 ' ' ' 
 
 » = Actfxm. αντη πρυςκομμα γεΐ'Τ)ται τοίς ασυενίσιν. εαν yap 
 
 ι „ Rom xi '"ί \\»/ y ~ 'π'^Λ'Ο ' 
 
 21 τις 10^ σε τον έχοντα ■' γνώσιν εν ειοωλειω κατακει- 
 
 I = ch. rii. 37 5 » f b '^ ' " c • il " " 
 
 ai. «ενον, ουγί τι συνειοησις αυτού αουενονς οντος 
 
 niRom. ix.32 • , ' Λ.^ , ν , ,^ , • ί 11 < 
 
 nhe^eoniyt. '' οικοΒομηΟησεται εις το τα " εώωΧοθυτα εσθιειν, και 
 
 ι Mace. ί.47η>/•>-^ 'r'n " S' " "ν ' '■*S'^J'' 
 
 ai. ' ατΓολλυται ο ασυενων εν τιί σΐ) 7ΐ'ωσεί, ο οοεΛφος 
 
 ο = Mirk ϋ. ι• ί• ι ' r ^ 
 
 15 1L. Mark siv. 3 only}. Prov. τι. !). ρ =■ ch. χ. 23. xiv. <1, 17. 1 Thess. v. 11. (iron., here onlv. 
 
 Si-e Mul. iii. 15.) coiistr., Eph. ii.22 reff. q Koin. xiv. 15 relt. r Rom. iv. li) reft'. 
 .<! Matt. vi. 7. 
 
 4G. 0^-. 71. 93 lect 18 copt basm Clem, Orig, Ath Dam. — rec aft οητε ins γαρ {for con- 
 nexion), with DEFGJ &c vss Clem Orig Chr Thdrt al Jac-nisib Ambrst al : t.xt AB 2. 
 17• 7-1 lect 17 am tol basm Eeth al Cypr Aug, (Terf,) : «'i 52. — rec φαγωμιν, πιμισσίν. 
 . . . μη φαγ, νστίρονμ. {njjpy a transposn to bring closer the clause φαγωμ. περισ., to 
 βρωμ. ov παριστ., as being logically connected with it), with A^ (which however has μη 
 φαγ. 1st and [so also 17] φαγ. 2ndj DEFGJ &c syrr al Clem Orig Chr Thdrt alJac-nisib 
 Cypr al : txt A'B (ττίοισσίνομιθη Β Origj) 46 am tol dem flor mar copt basin arm Bas 
 Dam. — 9. re om 80. — ημών 44. 2158 : αυτ. νμων lect 8. — rec ασθεΐ'ουσιΐ' {appg corrn to 
 suit ασθενών below, which however is gradually introduced, — ασθίνεσιν, — ασθενούς 
 ovToc, — ασθενών), with J &c Chr Thdrt Tbl Oec (Chr h 1 Thl add των αδελφών) : txt 
 ABDEFG 17. 46. 672. 80 al Clemj Dam.— 10. ιιδη A 44.— σί om BFG g ν Orig-int 
 lat-fF {eum qui habet ν Aug) : ins AD &c. — εκϊωλιω ABDJ (ιίωλ. AG). — ουχ 44. — 
 ασθενής ονσα {cum sit ιηβηηα) d (g has both) ν lat-ff. — εσθ. τα (ΐδωλοθ. DEFG vss 
 Orig-int Aug al. — 11. αττολ. γαα Β 17 copt basm goth Clem, (elsw cites freely aWa απ.) 
 ατΓολ. ovv A 39 : και απ. ovv 46 Dam : txt DEFGJ &c syrr al Chr all Iren Jeral. {The 
 sentence has pro b been tampered with to get rid of the appt awkwardness of the question 
 being carried on tlirongh ver 11, — and ovv and γαρ have been attempts to break it off 
 at εσθιειΐ'). — rec απολειται {to suit the fit above), with D'EFGJ &c vss Chr (edd and 
 mss vary) Thdrt (h 1) Thl Oeclren Jer al : t.xt ABD• {απολνταί D', απο\λνται D^) 
 32. 46. G72. 73-4 (al?) copt goth d e Clenij Bas Antioch Chr (see above) Thdrtj Dam.— 
 rec επι τη σ. γ v. {επι, ' on account of,' seems to have been a corrn for the more diffcult 
 iv,—see note), with J &c Chr Thdrt Thl Oec : txt ABDEFG 17 al Bas Thdrt, : in it ν 
 all Iren Jer al : εν om Clem, (Orig) Thdrt (ms). — for γνώσει, βρωσει lect 6' Chr (ex- 
 pressly : ούίέ γαρ ει —tv Έ~1 oij τελειότητι, οί'ΟΕ Έπι tij σ{/ γνώσει, άλΧ' ΈπΙ t>j ay 
 βϋώσει) : conscientia harl v-sixt Aug al-latt. — rec ασθενών αίελφος {attempt to sim- 
 plify, at the expense of the emphatic character of the sentence), with J &c Chr Thdrt 
 al {αΰ. ο ασθ. syr al) : om aS. ν (ed) Syr : txt ABDEFG 17• 37 (al .') it ν copt seth goth 
 
 veritable gods. Had they been ./eit'/sA con- meaning it will not bear) that παραστήσει 
 
 verts, it would not have been σννείΐησις is a verbum ^έσοί', after \vhich may follow a 
 
 τοϋ εΐδώΧυν which would have troubled good or a bad predicate : — ' will not aifect 
 
 them, but apparent violation of the ^Mosaic our (future) standing before God;'— and 
 
 law. 8.] Reason why we should ac- to this indifferent meaning of παραστήσει 
 
 commodate ourselves to the prejudices of answers the antithetic alternative which fol- 
 
 the weak in this mailer: iecazwe it is not lows. 9.] Se — q. d. " 1 acknowledge 
 
 one in which any spiritual advantage is to this indifference— this hcence to eat or not 
 
 be gained, but one perfectly indifferent : to eat ; but it is on that very account, be- 
 
 not, with Calv., al., an objection of the ce?«e it is a matter indifferent, that ye must 
 
 i/rony among the Corr. : no such assurap- take heed, &c." — The particular ττρόςκομ/ια 
 
 tion must be made, without a plain indica- in this case would be, the tempting them 
 
 tion in words that the saying of another is to act against their conscience ; — a practice 
 
 being cited : see Rom. ix. l!); xi. 19; and above all others dangerous to a Christian, 
 
 as Meyer well remarks, if the eaters had see below, ver. 11. 10.] Explanation 
 
 said this, they would have expressed it, cvTt how the ιτρόςκομμα may arise. τίς, 
 
 uiv μ,ή φάγωμεν irepKrcr.. οντε εάν φάγ., scil. (see below) άσθενι/ς ών. τον 
 
 νστερ., as it has actually been corrected έχοντα γνώσιν seems to imply that the 
 
 (see var. readd.) in some !MSS., and adopted weak brother is aware of this, and looks up 
 
 by Lachm. in his last cdn. — The ί'ε carries to thee as such. ΐνείδωλείφ κατ.] See 
 
 on the argument. — Bengel remarks (against on εΙΐω\οθ., \er. Ι.— ε'ιίωλεΊυν, as ΠοσΕΐ- 
 
 the ordinary rendering, which takes παμ- ύείον, Άπολλωνΰον, ΊσεΊον, &c. 
 
 ίστημι ζζ συνίστημι, ' commendo,' which " οίκοδομηθήσίται is not a vox media,
 
 IX. 1, 2. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 511 
 
 αμαοτανοντίς t coustr.. οΐι. 
 
 ' ^ ■•= ISreir. 
 
 ci ον γοιστοο απίυανεν ; όντως οε 
 
 ttc τους ααλφους και " τυτττοντες αυτών την '^^'^'^^^V~ ^ TKiagsfi 
 
 13 ^^ g.fj 
 
 ασυίνουσίΐν, ίΐς γριστον αμαρτανίτί. 
 
 Prov. xxvi. 
 TTfjO 22. 
 
 aofAipoi' μου, ου μη φάγω " '^'! 
 τον α^ίΧφον μου ^ 
 
 14 
 
 (xiv. 13 τ. 
 leud.) only. 
 σκαν- xKom.siv.I5 
 rert. 
 y Matt XV. 12. 
 xvii.27. Sir. 
 ix. ftt- 
 ζ Rom. xiv. 21 
 otilv. Geci. 
 ix. 4 al. 
 Malt. XX 
 
 retl. 
 
 19 
 
 rcfl•. 
 
 Deut. xxii. 7. 
 
 σιν 
 
 ei ^ βξχομα ■ σκανοαΧιϊ,ίΐ τον 
 ^ κρία " ίΐς τον αιώνα, Ίνα μη 
 οαΧισω. 
 
 IX. 1 Ουκ ίΊμ\ ίλίνθίοος ; ουκ ίίμι απόστολος ; ουχ< 
 1ί)σουν τον κυριον ημών ίωρακα , ου το ipyov μου υμίΐς 
 εστε εν κυρ'ιω ', ει αλΧοις ουκ ειμί απόστολος, *^ άλλα 
 γε υμιν ίίμι' η yap σί^ρα^ις μου της αποστολής νμεις cch 
 
 d =■ Rom. iv. 11. (Hagg. ii. 24.) e Acts i. 25. Rom. i. 5. Gal. ii. 8 only. 
 
 al Bas Iren Jer Ambrst al Clerrij (o aS. ησθ. : elsWj he cites aw. yap υ σσθ. τη ση yv.). 
 ■ — 12. rec οντω : txt AG &c. — τους om FG. — κηι oni FG it goth. — 13. ro βρωμά FG. — 
 μον (1st) om g goth Cypr Ambrst (ed). — μον (2tul) om D'FG it Cypr al. 
 
 Chap. IX. 1. rec αττοστ. ; . . . tXfvO. ; (posnibli/ transposn to bring the WpAyJiliesl 
 question inio prominence, — or, as Met/, ουκ ιιμ. απ. having been omd in mistake [es 
 below'], was re-insd first as the tveightier and first treated, cf vv 2, 3), with DEFGJK &c 
 it syr basm goth al Chr Thdrt al Ambrst : t.xt AB 5. 10. I7. 37- 4G. 93. 177-9 ν copt Syr 
 seth arm al Orig Tert Aug Ambr Pel Cassiod Bed: uhk (ΐμ. απ. om 71- 17<i• — '"ec aft 
 ιηα., add χριστοί•, with DEJK &c ν (ed) copt syr* al Chr Thdrt al : om AB 46. 74 am 
 tol harl sah basm £eth Orig Ambrst: χριστοί' ιησ. FG demid Tert Aug. — fopaioa 
 D^(E?)FG : add τοις οφθαλμοις μυν arm.^ — 2. om A (i. e. from εν κνριω to t ν κνριω). — 
 rec της (μης απ. {prob corrn. Mey objects to txt, that the evidence of Β alone is too weak, 
 and that σφρ. μου is prob a corrn to suit tpy. μον abore. This latter is surely improb, and 
 he forgets that A omits the ver and C is deficient), with DG(EFJK.') &c : txt Β 17. 31. 
 40 (al?) Orig. — for απυστ., ίπιστυλης 14. 37 lectt 8. 19 ath. — εν Kupjwom D^ (4Gappy) 
 
 as Le Clerc, Eisner, Wolf, al., nor is 
 it impelletur, as Castal., Bengel, Kypke, 
 al., nor confirmabitur, as Syr., Grot., 
 Billroth, al." (Mey.), but as Meyer and 
 De AVette, cedificabilnr, not without a 
 certain irony, seeing it is accompanied by 
 άαθίΐΌΪ'ς 'ύντος, — for thus the building 
 up would be without solid foundation — 
 a ruinosa cedificatio, as Calv. 11.] 
 
 . . . ' and (thus) the weak perishes (here- 
 after: see the parallel, Rom. xiv. 15 and 
 note) in (as the element in which, — he 
 entering into it as his own, which it is not) 
 thy knowledge,— the brother, in whose 
 behalf Christ died Γ — See again Rom. xiv. 
 15. 12.] οίίτως, viz. as in vv. 10, 11. 
 
 καί fixes and explains what is meant by 
 αμαρτ. uc r. άζ. τύτττοντίς] smit- 
 
 ing : τί yap άπηι•'ίστ(ρον ανθρώπου yi- 
 νοιτ άν τον νοσννντα τύπτοντος; Chrys. 
 
 13.] Fervid expression of his own 
 resolution consequent on these considei-a- 
 tions, by way of an example to them. 
 
 βρώμα, ' food,' i. e. any article of 
 food, as ver. Ji : purposely indefinite here : 
 'if such a matter as food ....,' but pre- 
 sently particularized.— oil μ.ή ψάγω. strong 
 future, Ί surely will not eat;' 'there is 
 no chance that I eat.' Kpca] ' Quo 
 
 certius vitarem carncm idolo iminolatam, 
 toto genere carnium abslinerein.' Bengel, 
 
 σκανδαλίσω] ' be the means of offend- 
 ing:' " conimutatur persona : modo dixit si 
 cibus offendit.^' Bengel. " Non autcm hoc 
 dicit quod hoc aliquo casu opus sit, sed ut 
 ostendat multo graviora quam de quibus 
 hie acitur sustinenda pro proximorum 
 salute." Grot. IX. 1—27.] He di- 
 
 gressively illustrates the spirit of self- 
 denial which he professed in the resolution 
 of viii. 13, — by contrasting his rights as 
 an Apostle with his actual conduct in 
 abstaining from demanding them (vv. 1 — 
 22). This self-denying conduct he further 
 exemplifies, vv. 23 — 27, for their imita- 
 tion. See Stanley's introductory note : 
 and Conyb. and Howson,vol i. pp. 51.41C, 
 edn. 1. 1.] He sets forth, (I) his in- 
 
 dependence of men (contrast ver. 19) ; (2) 
 his apostolic ofifce (for the order, see var. 
 readd.) : — (3) his dignity as an Apostle, in 
 having been vouchsafed a sight of Christ 
 Jesus our Lord: — (4) his efirciency in the 
 office, as having converted them to God. 
 βλίΰθ.] So that the resolution of 
 viii. 13 is not necessitated by any depend- 
 ence on my part on the opinion of others. 
 ίώρακα] Not, during the life of our 
 Lord on earth, as Schrader, nor is such an 
 idea su]ii)orted by 2 Cor. v. Hi ; see note 
 there :— but, in the appearance of the Lord 
 to him by the way to Damascus (Acts ix. 17 ;
 
 512 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 IX. 
 
 fn•. dat., 1 Pet. ' » ' 
 
 iii. ISonly. ίΟΤί 61' KVOHO. 
 
 See Acts f, , , '^ A h 
 
 V'•• '.i\ «■ (ΐυτη fffrti'. 
 
 ρ en. 11. 14 reiT. ^ ' 
 
 h Rom X. 19. 5 
 
 ch. xi. 22 
 
 imly. P. 
 i Matt. vii. 2» reB". 
 
 7j (μη uwoXoyia τοις ζμε ^ ανακριΐ'ουσιν ABDE 
 
 \ ■< \ ,r \ > γ I . - \ - FGJK 
 
 ^7j ουκ: ί^ομίν £ί;ουσιαυ (paynv και πΐίΐν , 
 
 ^^ μι) ουκ ' εχο^ιιεί' ' (ζουσίαν α^εΧφην yvvaiKa περιαγίΐν, 
 
 k trans., here only. Ezek. xxxvii. 2. (Matt. iv. 23 aH. inlraus.) 
 
 d e tol Syr al Chr.— 3. εττιν αντη (transposn) ΛΒ 37. 4fi Chr Dam : txt DEFGJK mis 
 nrly vss Thdrt Thl Oec. — 4. ίχωμιν J al : ιχω slav-ms (and so in next ver). — 5. for 
 α£(\φην -γνναικα, γυναίκας FG g Clem, (citg freely) Tert all : α?ί\φας γυναίκας arm mss 
 mentd by Jer : ηδιλφοι, γυναίκα lectt 8. 5G : ac. om Ambrst (ed) : Sedul says, m yraco 
 sorores, non mulieres, legitur : uxores Helvid Cassiod : mulierem sororem ν (harP, not 
 am dem al) : {the varr shew, as in ch vii, how the sacred text was tampered ivith by the 
 
 see Acts six. 33. 2 Cor. xii. 19 : — 'to those, 
 
 ch.xv.8: seeNeand.Pfl. u. Leit.p. 151, note); 
 and also, secondarily, in those other visions 
 and appearances, — recorded by him. Acts 
 xviii. 9 (.'), xxii. 17> — and possibly on other 
 occasions since his conversion, ov μικρόν δι 
 και τοντυ αξίωμα ην, Chrys. tv κυρίω, 
 
 is not a mere humble qualification of το 
 ίργον μον, as Chrys., τοι<τίστι του θιοϋ το 
 έργον ίστιν, ονκ ΐμυΰ, — but designates as 
 elsewhere, the element, in which the work 
 is done : they were his work as an Apostle, 
 i. e. as the servant of the Lord enabled by 
 the Lord, and so in the Lord. See ch. 
 iv. 15. 2.] At least my apostle- 
 
 ship cannot be denied by you of all men, 
 who are its seal and proof. «l . . . . 
 
 oiiK ί1μ.ί] οϋκ, because it belongs closely to 
 the hypothesis : ' if I am no-Apostle,' 
 see ch. vii. 9. — άλλοις, 'to Others,' i.e. 
 in the estimation of others. — αλλά γε, 
 ' yet at least,' is stronger than άλλα 
 alone. The ρ irticle shews that the senti- 
 ment which it introduces has more weight 
 than the other to which the άλλα is a 
 reply. See Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 385. 
 Meyer (after Klotz) remarks that " in the 
 classics αλλά γι is never found without 
 one or more words intervening:" those 
 words being emphatic : e. g. Aristoph. Nub 
 
 who call me in question:' ίμ'(, emphatic, 
 as Chrys. says of ver. 2, κ•«ΐ' βοΰληταί τις 
 μαΟίΙΐ' πιΊθίν 'ότι άττόητολός (Ιμι, ΰμας 
 πρι>βά\\ομηι. 4.] He resumes the 
 
 questions which had been interrupted by 
 giving the proof of his Apostleship. 
 μη οϋκ ?χ.] μη asks the question .• οΰκ 
 ίχημη' is the thing in questioyi : ' Is it SO, 
 that we have not power . . . . ■? ' The 
 plur. seems to apply to Paul alone .• for 
 though Barnabas is introduced momenta- 
 rily in ver. G, there can be no ref, to him 
 in ver. 11. It may perhaps be used as 
 pointing out a matter of right, which any 
 would have had on the same conditions 
 (see ver. 11), and as thus not belonging per- 
 sonally to Paul, as do the things predicated 
 in vv. 1, 2. 15. This however will not 
 apply to ver. 12, where the emphatic ήμΰς 
 is personal. φαγεΐν κ. τΓΐ€Ϊν] ' To eat 
 
 and to drink,' sc. at the cost of the 
 churches : not with any ref. to the eating 
 of things offered to idols (as Schrader, iv. 
 132), nor to Jewish distinctions of clean and 
 unclean (as Billroth and Olshausen) ; — see 
 below, vv. 6, 7• 5•] ' Have we not the 
 
 power to bring about with us (also to 
 be maintained at the cost of the churches, 
 
 399, πώς ούχϊ Σίμων' ϊνίττρησεν for this, and not the power to marry, is 
 
 άλλα τον αντοϋ γε νεών βάλλει; 
 σφραγίς] as being the proof of his apos- 
 tolic calling and energy, by their con- 
 version : better than, — by the signs and 
 wonders which he wrought among them, as 
 Chrys. (al.) from 2 Cor. xii 11 — 13, and per- 
 haps misled by the similarity of σημείον and 
 σφραγίς. Their conversion was the great 
 proof; so Theodoret άπόδειξιν γαρ των 
 αποστολικών κατορθωμάτων την νμετέραν 
 εχω μεταβολήν. iv κνρ.] belongs to 
 
 the whole sentence, see above, on ver. 1. 
 3.] This belongs to the preceding, 
 not to the following verses : αίίτη, viz. 
 
 the fact of your conversion : this word is 
 the subject, not the predicate— as in John 
 i. 19; xvii. 3, and stands here in the em- 
 phatic place before the verb ; referring to 
 what went before. With ver. 4 a new course 
 of questions begins, which furnish no απο- 
 λογία. Tois «μ* όινακρ.] For thedat. 
 
 here the matter in question) as a wife, a 
 (believing) sister (or, ' to bring with us 
 a believing wife .•' these are the only ren- 
 derings of which the words are legitimately 
 capable. Augustine, De Opere ^lonacho- 
 rum, § 5, explains it thus: " Ostendit sibi 
 licere quod ceteris Apostolis, id est ut non 
 operetur manibus suis, sed ex Evangelio 
 vivat : .... ad hoc enim et fideles mulieres 
 habentes terrenam substantiam ibant cum 
 eis, et ministrabant eis de substantia sua," 
 &c., and similarly Jerome adv. Jovin. i. 
 p. 20 D. So hkewise Tertull., Theodoret, 
 Oecum., Isid. Pelus, Theophylact, Ambros., 
 and Sedul. So too Corn, a Lap. and Estius. 
 See Estius, and Suicer, γννη, II. And 
 from this misunderstanding of the passage 
 grew up a great abuse, and sucli women 
 are mentioned with reprobation by Epi- 
 phan. User. 78, under the name of άγαπ?;- 
 ταί. They were also called άδελφαί : and
 
 .3—9. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 513 
 
 C γα- 
 
 ζ^οΗ..,.. 
 
 AliCD 
 
 EFG 
 
 JK 
 
 iv. 4. Acts 
 XTiii 3 al. 
 STlieis.iii.S. 
 Luke iii. 14. 
 2 Cor. X. 3. 
 1 Tm i 18. 
 2Tim.ii.4. 
 
 ως και οι λοιποί αττοστολοί και οι aSeXaoi του κνοΊου labsoi., Rom, 
 
 \ τζ " Κ *■ ι >\ \ r\ ^ t '' iv. 4. Acts 
 
 Km ]\-ηφας \ τη μονός iyio και Βορνάβας ουκ: ' έχί>μεν 
 ' ί<^ουσΊαι> του μη ip-ya^taOt/t ; ' Τ/ς "' στρατίνίται Ίοΐυις 
 " οφωΐΊοις ° τγοτε ; τ'ις '' φυτίυίΐ αμττίΧωνα, και τον καρπον 
 αυτόν ουκ eaOui ; τις '^ ποιμαιν^ι 
 γάλακτος της ττοιμνης ουκ ίσβίίΐ 
 ταντα λαλώ, " η και ο νομός ταύτα ου λίγει 
 
 Μωυσεως νομω -yiypaTrrai Ου ^ φιμώσεις βουν 
 
 ΤΓΟίμνην, και 
 
 8 ν t ν >' 
 
 μιΐ κατά αν 
 
 ίκ του 
 ΊοωτΓον 
 
 yap 
 
 {31 
 
 4. 
 
 
 ο 
 
 = Heb. i 
 
 -, 
 
 rMatt 
 
 . xxfi 
 
 31. 
 
 Luke ii 
 
 8. 
 
 refl". 
 
 rh. 
 
 XV 
 
 32 
 
 
 
 xii. 
 
 11. 
 
 R 
 
 m. 
 
 V. 9. 
 
 
 1 Prl. ii. 11 
 only. 
 
 η Liikc iii. 14. 
 Rom. vi. 2.3. 
 
 2 Cor. xi. 8 
 oiily t. 
 1 Μ ICC. xiv. 
 32. (Inf., ch. 
 xi 5. 2C()r. i. 
 15 al. Winer, 
 
 13. ρ ch.iii. reff. Dent.xx.6. q = Luke xs ii. 7. 1 Kings xxv. 16. 
 
 Jolin X. Ill only. Gen. xxxii. Hi. s ch. iii. 2 rcll'. t Rom. iii. 5 
 
 u Luke xi, II, 12. xviii. 11. Rom. ii 15. ch. .\vi, (i. 2 Cor. i. 13. interrog., Luke 
 V Deut. XXV. 4. ITim.y.JS. Malt. xxii. 12 reO'. 
 
 parties in the controversy on celibacy). — oi (2r.d) om Κ al. — 6. τον om {to conform to 
 vv 4 and 5) ABD'(E?)FG 17- 4G Isid: t.xt D'(E.')JK 1^ (nrly) Chr Thdrt Dam Thl 
 Oec: μη om Chr-ed (ins syr*) : hoc operandi ν lat-ff.— 7. τοις ιδ. οφ. lect 5ΰ. — rec fie 
 τον καρττον {corrn to confoj-m to the follg εκ τον ya\.), with (C^.')D^E &c vss Chr 
 Thdrt al : tic το,ν καρπών (C?) Dam : t.xt ABC'D'FG 17- 4f:. 137 g tol harl flor (mss 
 al, but de fructum d am') sah Bed. — tnu. και πινη DEFG it. — rec η ης ττοιμ. (corrn 
 for connexion), with AC JK &c Syr Dam Oec: txt BC-(appy)DEFG 31. 73. 119 it ν 
 sah syr arm goth al Chr Thdrt Thl Aug Ambrst al. — for της ττοιμν., αντης D'FG 3 35. 
 vss Chr Thl Aug Hil Ambrst (αντον lect 14: om lect 12 Dial).— 8. λ£γω DEFG 38. 48. 
 72. 122. — rec η ουχί και ο νομ. ταυ. λ. (alteration from not understanding txt). with 
 JK &c sah al Chr Thdrt al : η ti (en Syr) και ο νομ. τ. λ. FG g Syr goth : txt ABCDE 
 4G vss Orig Epiph Marcion (in Epiph, but reads ft for η, and adds μωυσεως aft νομ.) 
 Ambrst (but reads [ταίτά] eadeni) al. — 9. for iv . . γίγραπται, γίγραπται γαρ DEFG 
 it Origj (elsw ev τω v. y(yp.) Hil: txt ABCJK mss (nrly) vss Origi gr-if Aug (νομ. μω. 
 48. 72. 110-20 vss Nys Chr Thdrtj : μω. era Ambrst).— for φιμωσπς, κημωσας D'FG 
 were forbidden under the name of avvtic- children)]' — Clem. Alex. (ib. § 53) imagines 
 
 ακτοι by the 3rd Canon of the 1st Council 
 of Nicrea. See these words in Suicer), as 
 also the other Apostles (in the wider 
 sense, not only the twelve, for, ver. G, 
 Barnabas is mentioned. It does not follow 
 hence that all the other App. irere mar- 
 ried ; but that all had the poirer, and 
 some had ttsed it) and the brethren of 
 the Lord (mentioned not because distinct 
 from the άττόστολοι, though they were 
 absolutely distinct from the tirelve, see 
 Acts i. 14, — but as a further specification of 
 the most renowned persons, who travelled 
 as missionaries, and took their wives with 
 them. On the άδ. του κνρ. see note, 
 Matt. xiii. 55. They were in all proba- 
 bility the actual brethren of our Lord by 
 the same mother, the sons of Joseph and 
 ]Mary. The most noted of these was 
 James, the Lord's brother [Gal. i, l!); 
 ii. 0. 12, comp. Acts xii. 17; xv. 13; xxi. 
 18], the resident bishop of the Church at 
 Jerusalem : the others known to us by 
 name were Joses [or Joseph], Simon, and 
 Judas, see note on Matt, ib.), and Cephas 
 (Peter was married, see Matt. viii. 14. A 
 beautiful tradition exists of his encouraging 
 his wife who was led to death, by saying 
 μίμνησο, ώ η'ΰτη, του κυρίου, Clem. Ale.x. 
 Strom, vii. § G3. Eu<eb. II. iii. 30. Clem. 
 Alex. Stroin. iii. § 52, relates thai he had 
 Vol. II. 
 
 that he recognizes the wife of our Αρ., 
 i)i' οΰ πιρακόμι^ίν Cta το τ)}ς ΰ-ηυΐσίας 
 ίίσταΧίς, in the σύζυγος Λνΐιοηι he ad- 
 dresses, Phil. iv. 3. But this is evi- 
 dently a mistake : see note there. 
 6.] ' Or (implying what the consequence 
 would then be, see ch. vi. 2. 9 : does not 
 introduce a new ίζονσία, but a consequence 
 of the denial of the last two) have only I 
 and Barnabas (why Barnabas ? Perhaps 
 on account of his former connexion with 
 Paul, Acts xi. .30 ; xii. 25 ; xiii. 1—15. 39 ; 
 but this seems hardly enough reason for his 
 being here introduced. It is not impro- 
 bable that having been at first associated 
 with Paul, who appears f-orn the frst to 
 have abstained from receiving sustenance 
 from those among whom he was preaching, 
 Barnabas, after his separation from our Ap. 
 may have retained the same self-denying 
 practice. " This is the only time when he 
 is mentioned in conjunction with St. Paul, 
 since the date of the quarrel, in Acts xv. :i9." 
 Stanley) not power to abstain from work- 
 ing (i. e. power to look for our mainte- 
 nance from the churches, without manual 
 labour of our own. The Vulg. has ' hoc 
 operandi,' so also Tertull., Anibros., al., 
 omitting μί), and against the usage of ifiy^- 
 ζίσί^σι, see reff.) 1' 7—12.] Exam- 
 
 ples froin conDHOn life, of the reasonable' 
 
 L L
 
 514 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 IX. 
 
 Λνίτίιη. ν. 18 ^" αλοωΐ'τσ. 
 
 \1 
 
 χ coiislr., but ^ ττίΐλ)ΤΙ,ίΓ 
 
 τϋ VI. Xen. . . /Λ ΓΙ, 
 Cyr.iii. 1.3U. fATrtOt Ο 
 
 y Acts xviii. 
 21 rclV. ζ Act 
 
 b Luke xvii. 7 only. Dcu.xxii.lu. 
 
 των βοων " μίλα τ<ο θεω, 
 
 Λ > Γ - ν . / t, 
 
 όι Ίΐμας Ύ<'Ρ ^Ύ'^'γ^^' °^' 
 
 b ' ~ * ' W ' Λ - 
 
 _ αλοα 
 
 γ£< ; 
 αροτριωι^ αοοτριαν, /cat ο 
 
 . 2fi. Rom. iv. 18 al. Luke and I'aul only. Ps. xv. 9, 
 
 10 
 
 1] CI ϊβίας 
 
 ΟφίίλίΙ " £7Γ 
 
 '' fTT ίλπ(οι 
 
 a ch.Tii. atircff. 
 
 Hes Tlulrti (but not appy citing the text).— π(ρι των βοων DEFG 31-9. 4C. 73. 178 
 lect 12 vss.— 10. πάντως om sah basm arm: παντας 32. 121- — και ί•/μαφη lect 8. — 
 rec ίπ iXir. ηφ. ο αροτρ. {fippy a transpoan connected ivith the next vnr read, — in throw 
 the \iit trr ιλπιΡι more into emphasis at the beginniiKj, as the 2iid is at the end of the 
 senieuce), will» D'(o np. oji. E)JK &c vss (but var transp) Chr Thdrt ThI Oec : ο ίττ 
 ίλπ. (If), οφ. D' : οφαλη ο ιφ ίλπ. no. οφίΐΧπ FG : txt ABC 17• 31-7• 4(ί. 80. 93 lect 
 12 ν Orig Dial Eus Cyr Dam Aug Pel Bed. — rec for ίττ ιλπ. του μίτ., — της ίλπιδος 
 αυτόν μιτιχίη' ίττ (λπι?ι {Meyer's acct seems to he the right one, that, it being over- 
 looked that n\onv must be supplied oft oKoiov, μίτιχαν was supposed to be infin aft 
 ηφηλίΐ, anil so του altered to αυτόν ; then the sense bettered by insg της ιλπι^ος and 
 iransposg the oriyl ιπ (λπιδι to the end), with D'EJK &c Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec : 
 της ίλπιδος αυτυυ μίτίχαν D'FG (ίπ (λπιύας 4'j) : τ)]ς ελπιΟβς αντου ίπ ίλττιίι μίτ- 
 ιχαν 'ΔΙ : ιπ e\inSi αντου μ(τ. slsiV-ms: ίπ ίλττ. rjyc ίλπιΒυς αυτ. μίτ. slav-ed : txt 
 ABC 10. 17• 71 (but του om 71) syrr (copt) sah basm arm al Orig Eus Cyr Aug, also in 
 
 ness of the workman being sustained by 
 his work. 7.] front the analogies of 
 
 hmiwn conduct. (I) The soldier. 
 Ιδίοις όψωνίοις] with pay furnished out of 
 his own resources, — the instruuiental da- 
 tive, see Winer, § 31.4. στρατ€ΰομαι, 
 of the soldier, who serves in the army : 
 στρατίνω, of the general, or the nation, 
 that leads, or undertakes, the war. So 
 Thuryd. iii. 101, of the states which joined 
 the Peloponnesians, οντοι κα\ ^υνίητρά- 
 Ttvov ττάντίς: butXen.Cyr.viii.4.29,of the 
 wife of Tigranes, άνΒριΊως ζνΐ'βστρατίνίτο 
 τψ ((ΐ'(ϊ(ΐι. See Kiihner, ii. 18 (§ 398). 
 (2) The husbandman. τον καρττ. αΰτ. 
 ο-ϋκ Ισθ.] τον καρπόν, as Meyer observes, 
 is sinijjly objective : he does eat the fruit, 
 though it may be only part of it. (3) The 
 shepherd. — Here it is tfc γοΓι ya\., perhaps 
 on account of the inappropriateness of το 
 
 ya\a 
 
 inOlti, and also of το yoKa 
 
 ■πίνιι, milk being for the most part made 
 into other articles of food, which sustain 
 the shepherd partly directly, partly by their 
 sale. 8.] ' Am I speaking these 
 
 things merely according to human judg- 
 ment of what is right ■? Or (see note, ver. 
 C) does the law too not say these things ? ' 
 9.] (It does say them) : ' for in the 
 law of Moses it is written, Thou shalt 
 not (on the fut. with an imperative meaning, 
 ' Thou shalt not,' i. e. ' This I expect of 
 thee, that thou wilt not,' common to all 
 civilized languages, see Winer, § 44. 3. 
 Kiilmer, § 446. 2) muzzle an ox v/hile 
 treading out the corn' (in the sense = 'the 
 ox that trt-adLth out ;' but strictly, that 
 would require τϋν β. τον άλοωντα). — 
 "«λ(•^ι• dicuntur bovcs, quum grana ex 
 aristis extcrunt pedibus, qui mns Orientis, 
 sed et Grsecife, ut ex Theophrasto et aliis 
 discimus. Hie triturandi mos in Asia ho- 
 
 dieque retinetur. Solent enim illarum re- 
 gionum incolse, postquam demessae fruges 
 sunt, non domum eas ex agris, more nostro, 
 granis nondum excussis, in horrea convel- 
 lere : sed in aream quandam sub dio com- 
 portare : deinde, sparsis in aream manipulis 
 frugum, boves et bubalos immittunt, qui 
 vel pedibus calcantes (see Micah iv. 13), 
 vel curruum quoddam genus trahentes super 
 frumenta, ex aristis eliciunt grana." Rosen- 
 miiller. — 'Is it for oxen (generic) that 
 God is taking care 1 ' — We must not, as 
 ordinarily, supply μόνν, only for oxen, and 
 th'.is rationalize the sentence : the question 
 imports, ' In giving this command, are the 
 oxen, or thoseybr ichom the law teas given, 
 its objects ? ' And to such a question there 
 can be but one answer. Every duty of 
 humanity has for its ultimate ground, not 
 the mere welfare of the animal concerned, 
 hut its welfare in that system of which man 
 is the head : and therefore, man's welfare. 
 The good done to man's immortal spirit by 
 acts of humanity and justice, infinitely out- 
 weighs tlie mere physical comfort of a brute 
 which jierishes. So Philo (de Victimas 
 oflerentibus, § 1) rightly explains the spirit 
 of the law : oh yap vntp των ά\όyωι> ύ 
 ■νόμος, άλλ' vrrip των νουν κ. λόγον ΐχόν- 
 των ώςτί οΰ των θνομίνων φροντ'ις ίητιν, 
 'ίνα μηδ(μίαι> ίχοι λώβην, άλλα των θυόν- 
 των, 'ίνα τζι-ρΊ μηΐΐν -πάθος κηρηινωσι. 
 10.] ' Or (the other alternative being 
 rejected) on our account (Ct' ήμας, em- 
 phatic — not on account of tnen generally, 
 but as Estius, " propter nos evangelii mi- 
 nistros:" cf. the ημΰς of vv. 11, 12, with 
 which this ημάς is inseparably allied) alto- 
 gether (ro πάντως πρηςϋίϊς, .... 'ίια 
 μι) nvy\wpi]ny μηΰ ύτιυϋν άντίΐπΓιν τφ 
 axpoaTy, Chrys.) does it (ύ νόμος : or per- 
 haps ό Οίος, but better the former, as above,
 
 10—12. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 515 
 
 c-<l / i]'f-f-\e y ί ' ι 
 
 του μίτζ^ίΐν. ει ij/uftc νμιν τα πνευματικά εσπίΐ- 
 
 ραμεν, ^ μί'γα £t νμ^ΐζ υ^ον τα ^ σαρκικά ' βερισωμίν ; 
 
 ft άλλοι τ-ης νμων εκούσιας μετε'^ουσιν, ου μάλλον 
 
 αλλ ουκ ε'^ρησάμεβα tij εζουσία ταυτι?, άλλο 
 
 Ί μη τίνα ε^κοττην όωμεν τω 
 
 ι. 6. i W. gen. ohj.. Matt. χ. 1. John xvii. 2. 
 
 1 ch. xiii. 7. 1 Thess. lii. 1, 5 only t- Sir. viii. 17. 
 
 c Acts xiv. 9 
 
 reft; 
 dch.x. 17,21, 
 311. Hel). ii. 
 U. V. 13. 
 vii. 13 only, 
 e Rum. XV. 27 
 
 rcffi 
 f = JlHrkl.'.U 
 - al. Ir. 
 ( g — 2 Cor. xi. 
 
 13. 
 Sir. X. 4. xvii. 2. 
 m here only t• 
 
 ημείς , αλλ ουκ 
 τταντα στε-γομεν. 
 
 h = John iv. 3(1 reff. ; 
 k ch. vii 21 reff. 
 η = 2 Cor. vi. 3. 
 
 spe fructus percipiendi ν Pel Bed. — 11. n om lect 12. — tv νμιν Syr arr.— ου μί•/α D' d. 
 — ίξ νμων (appy) arm : νμιν lect 50. — for σαρκ., ττνιυμαηκα lect 12. — rec θιηισομιν 
 {grammatical corrn oft u), with AB(e sil^K &c Clir Dam Thl Oec : txt CDEFGJ 23. 
 31-7-9. 7) 3. 80. 113 all lect 50 it ν all Thdrt.— 12. rec ίξουσ. νμ. {transpn), with JK 
 &c: txt ABCDEFG 37. 40. 73. «0. 178 9 (all?).— ου κεχρημίΰα (perhaps ου»: ίχρτ;- 
 μίθα?) A: ουκ (χρησαμην 238. — ffrfpyo/Jti/ schol in 19 Cypr : -^(γοναμίν lect 50: 
 στίγωμίν lect 8. — αντη for ταικ FG. — rec (-/κοπ. τίνα {traiisponn to more usual order), 
 with {(κκι,π. Di.T 2. 4H-9. 03. 238 al lectt 12. 50 Thdrt: nvvtyKon. 37) DEFGJK &c 
 syr al Chr Thdrt al : txt ABC 40. 137 d e ν copt (Syr) al Tert Ambrst aX.—nva om g 
 τ ψ θίψ being only incidentally introduced words have the emphasis) is categoric, but 
 
 as the confessed Author of the law, and ύ 
 νόμος remaining the subject of the sen- 
 tence) say (this) 1 (on our account) : for 
 on our account it (viz. ού φιμώσας, κ.τ.λ., 
 not, that which follows, q. esset γίγραπται) 
 was written, meaning that (not 'for,' 
 argumentative as the ground of ί^οάψη, — 
 but containing the /;ii/7;o*e of Ιγηάφη, ex- 
 pressed in its practical result) the plougher 
 (not literal but spiritual, see below) ought 
 to plough in hope, and the thresher {to 
 thresh, see var. readd.) in hope of par- 
 taking ' (of the crop). — The words used in 
 this sentence are evidently spiritual, and 
 not literal. They are inseparably connected 
 with ci' ήμας which precedes them : and 
 according to the common explanation of 
 them as referring to a mere maxim of agri- 
 cultural life, would have no force whatever. 
 But spiritually taken, all coheres. " The 
 command (not to muzzle, &c.) was written 
 on account of its (Christian teachers) that 
 •we ploughers (in the γίώργιοί' θεού, ch. iii. 
 9) might plough in hope, — and we threshers 
 (answering to the βονς ηλοώΐ') might work 
 in hope of (as the ox) having a share." 
 So Chrys. and Theophyl. : τουτέσηΐ', ύ 
 διίάσκαλος όψί(\(ΐ αροΓριςΐι', και κοπιςίν 
 f 7γ' ί\—ίΐι αμοιβής κ. αντιμισθίας. So also 
 Meyer and De Wette : but by far the greater 
 part of interpp. (also Stanley) take it literally; 
 understanding ή μας of mankind in general, 
 and ό άροτριων and ΰ άλοών of labourers in 
 agriculture. — No minute distinction must 
 be sought between the άϋοτηιών and the 
 άλοών. The former is perhaps mentioned 
 on account of the process answering to the 
 breaking uji the fallow ground of Heathen- 
 ism : — the latter on account of its occur- 
 rence in the precept. 11.] The ήμ.€Ϊς 
 (both times stroiiglg emphatic : — we need 
 sorely some means of marking in our Eng- 
 lish Bibles, for ordinary readers, which 
 
 L 
 
 in fact applies to Paul alone. The secon- 
 dary emphasis is on νμΧν . . . νμων. It is 
 one of those elaborately antithetical sen- 
 tences which the great Apostle w^ields so 
 powerfully in argument. The ήμίϊς — ΰμίΐς, 
 being identical, stand out in so much the 
 stronger relief against the triple antithesis, 
 ίιμΧν, ΊΓνίΐιματικά, lo-ireipa^ev, — and ίιμων, 
 σαρκικά, θίρίσωμεν — For the subj. after 
 ei, see Winer, § 42. 3 ; ch. xv. 5. 1 Thess. 
 V. 10. Kiihner, § 818 a. 1. The usage is 
 common in Homer, Od. a. 204, al. fr., — 
 doubtful in Herod, ii. 13; viii. 49. 118,— 
 and hardly ever found in Attic writers. See 
 Soph. CEd. Tyr. 198, a ri νΰξ atpy, and 
 ffid. Col. 1442, ti σου στιρηθώ. 
 τΓΐ'ίυμ. and σαρκ. (see Rom. sv. 27) need 
 no explanation. The first are so called as 
 belonging to the spirit of man (De W. and 
 !Meyer, as coming from the Spirit of God ; 
 but it is better to keep the antithesis exact 
 and perspicuous), the second as serving for 
 the nourishment of the flesh. 12.] 
 
 άλλοι does not necessarily point at the /«/ac 
 teachers ; others may have exercised this 
 power. υμών is the objective genitive : 
 
 ' power over you,' — see retf. — Tlie second 
 αλλίί is not in apposition with the first, but 
 in opposition to the idea implied in ϊχρ. ry 
 ίξ. TuiiTy. Meyer compares Horn. II. a. 
 24 f., αλλ' οϋκ'Άτρύΰι^ Άγαμίμνονι ην- 
 davt θνμφ. Άλλα κακώς άψίίΐ. 
 στί'γομβν] The word was commonly used, 
 as may be seen in Wetst., of vessels con- 
 taining, holding without breaking, that 
 which was put into them ; thence of con- 
 cealing or covering, as a secret ; and also of 
 enduring or bearing up against. In this 
 last sense Diod. Sic. iii. 34, uses it literally 
 of ice, στίγοντος τοϊι κονστάλλου otapa- 
 σιις στρατοπέδων κ. άμαζών ίφόι^οΐ'ς, 
 and (xi. 25, Wetst. but ?) of a besieged tort, 
 oil μήνγε την Όξιμην . . . lartytv . . .To
 
 516 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. IX. 
 
 oiiereoniy. ivayyiXno Tov yoioTov. "^ ouK οίΟοτε on 01 τα ΐίοα abcd 
 soipjai. '' ^' .'^f^ „p. - . ^, • -no ' EP« 
 
 ichroii. Ti. ° ioyoumtvoi tK του ^ lepov ίσυιονσιν, οι τω ' υνσιαστηρηο jk 
 
 49. ix. 13. > / ' _ ' / ~ ί ΙΑ f 
 
 ρίζΓζτίίή. '' πο(5ίδρίύο)'Τ£ς τω '^ Gwaiaarrjjoiw ' συμμίριζονται ; ^* ούτως 
 q κΐ.ιη'.χί!!' /cat Ο KvpioQ * StiTfi^EV τοις TO iva-yjiXiov " κταταγγελ- 
 ' ρ'οΓί'.'οι. λουσπ', i/c του ευαγγελίου "" 65ν. ^^ εγώ δε ου ^ Κί:χ^ξ)ημαι 
 
 Seech, τϋ. » c\ \ / 5 >^ ι ^ν " '' " νν / 
 
 i^f"• ουοεί'ί τούτων* ου /c iynaxLa οε ταύτα ινα ούτως γεν»}ται 
 
 S here only t. ^ f is ^ \ \ ' Γ\ -tv \ 
 
 ' Χίχΐν. '"^ ί»' ψοΊ' ^^ καλόν jao μοι μάλλον αποΟανειν ΐ) το 
 
 Act.s xxiii. ν/ / γ/ >ν ' 16'^ ^ζ' 
 
 31. inf.Luke * κ-πυγημα μου ινα τις ■'κενώσει. εαν γαρ ευαγ- 
 
 τϋί. 65 al. Α. • ^ ^ ^ ■> / / 
 
 h^iiZly!'*^•' γελιΖω^αοι, ουκ έστιν μοι " καύχημα' ανογκί? γαρ μοι 
 
 Dan. i. Γι. ., » / b ι λ / ι ι f ν ^ ζ ' Λ ' 
 
 n = ActsiT.2. επίκειται' ουαι γαρ μοι εστ<ν εαν jtirj ίυα-γ-γίΑισωμαι. 
 
 ιιη = ΜηΗ. iv. 4. II L. only. ν ch. Txi 21 reff. vv Matt. xvii. 12. Luke xxii. 37. xxiii. 31. John xiv. 3». 
 
 w Mark ix. 42. καλ. — ch. vii. 1, 8, 26. χ Rom. iv. 2 al«. Paal. Heb. iii. 6. (arrang. ofwonls, 2 Cor. ii. 4.) 
 
 y Rom.iv. 14refr. ζ absol., Rom. xv. 20 reff. a Acts sxtii. 20 refT. Kpcirtp»; 0' f πικει'σίτ' 
 
 ύκίγκιι, Horn. II. t- 458. b Paul, here only, epp., Jude 11 only, gospp. and Rev. passim, constr., 
 
 Hos. ix. 12. 
 
 pah basm arm Clem Orig. — 13. τα ικ τον D'FG 46 vss lat-ff.— rec irpocidpevovriQ (see 
 ch vii. 35), with JK Sec Chr Thdrt Thl Oec : txt ABCDEFG 17- 46 Eus Procopi Dam.— 
 14. iTTtTaU 178. — 15. rec oi'if It ίχρηπημην {corrn for simplification), with Κ &c Chr 
 Thdrt Thl Oec: txt AB'CD'EFG 17- 37- 46-!). 57- 71-3. 177-9 Dam, also ov^tvi κίχμη- 
 μαι DU: ονκ ιχ^ιι^σαμην ovhivi 23: ovStvi ηυ Κΐχρημαι 80. — μη\λορ om Ι7. 108: 
 αποθ. μαλλ. 106.— for ινα τις κει-., ovSttg κιν. BD'(E?) 17 sah basm Tert Ambrst (ed) : 
 ονθίΐς μη κ. A : τις κ. FG 26 {prob corrns to simplify the constr, and the more so as an 
 indful follows : see helow. Mey thinks the true ready to be η το κ. μου ον^ίΐς κίΐ'ωσίΐ, 
 and supposes an aposiopesis at μov,follou•ed by the eacla mation, ουδείς κιηοαιι. But 
 qu?) : (irt ης ου μη Ktv. 109: txt CD'E (appy) JK mss nrly (appy) ν vss Chr Thdrt 
 Dam Thl Oec Jer Aug all. — rec κένωση {yramml corrn), with Κ &c Chr Thdrt al : txt 
 ABCD'D^EFGJ &c. — 16. for ευαγγίλιζω/ίπι (1st), -σωμαι DEFG : -ζομαι J al Dam.— 
 for καύχημα, χάρις DEFG it Ambrst (ms).— for «layic?; . . (πικ., α\ηθ(ΐαν yap tpio 1?: 
 for (πικ.,εστι sah. — rec ovni δ( {clumst/ alteration, not seeiny that yap explains ανάγκη), 
 with JK'&c syrr al Chr (h 1) Thdrt al": txt ABCDEFG all vss Orig Ath Cyr Chr, Orig- 
 int Jer Ambrst all.— for κττιν, tarai {alteration, to apply it better to the last day) FG g 
 (est ant erit) Ambrst Symm : om 1 19 copt Syr al.— rec (ναγγ(\ιζωμαι (appy corrn in 
 ignorance, to suit -ζωμαι above), with Κ &c Orig Ath al : -ζομαι J al : txt ABCDEFG 48 
 , . . Γίϊχος, . . . άλλα ΰ-πύκίΐν ηναγκάζίτο. holy building.' Similarly Jos. B. J. v. 13. 6, 
 So also ^sch. Sept. c. Theb. 216, πύργοι/ makes the Zealots say, hT . . . . τονς τφ 
 στίγίΐν ίϋχίσθί πολίμίωΐ' δόρυ. Theselast ναψ στρατευομίνονς εκ τοΰ ναον τρ€φ€- 
 usages are very near akin to this of our text, σθαι. irapeSp.] So Jos. contr. Apion. 
 
 — 'We endure all things:' viz. labour, i. 7> speaks of the priests as ry θεραπεί^. 
 privations, hardships. The ΐγκοτταί (bin- του θεοϋ προςεδρεύοντας. — On the practice 
 drances — so Diod. Sic. i. 32, speaks of the referred to, see Num. xviii. 8 ff. Deut. 
 Nile as being πολλάκις δια τάς ίγκοπάς xviii. 1 ff.— iVo other priesthood but the 
 ανακλώμενος) would arise from his being Jewish can have been in the mind of the 
 charged with covetousness and self-seeking, Apostle. The Jew knew of no θυσιοση'/- 
 which his independence of them would ptov but one .• and he certainly would not 
 entirely prevent. 13, 14.] Analogy of have proposed heathen sacrificial customs, 
 
 the maintenance of the Jewish priesthood even in connexion with those appointed by 
 from the sacred offerings, with this right God, as a precedent for Christian usage : 
 of the Christian teacher, as ordained by besides that the idea is inconsistent with 
 Christ. — Aleyer rightly remarks, that ol ο'ύτοις και : see below. 14.] ' So also 
 
 τα Upa £ργαζό|Α£νοι can only mean the (i. e. in analogy with that His other coni- 
 priests, not including the Levites : and mand) did the Lord (Christ ; the Author 
 therefore that both clauses ajiply to the by His S])irit of the O. T. as well as the 
 same persons. Ιργάζεσθαι, ίρδειν, New) command (viz. Matt. x. 10. Luke 
 
 ρεζίΐν, are technical words for the offer- x. 8) to those who are preaching the 
 ing of sacrifice. See reff. to LXX. gospel, to live of (be maintained by. 
 
 lepov here, as θυσιαστηρίου is parallel with Themistius [Kypke] has ζ>)ν εξ εργοσ'ιης) 
 it below, is probably not ' the sacrifice,' the gospel.' Observe, that here the Ap. 
 * the holy thing,' but 'the temple' — 'the is estabhshing an analogy between the
 
 13—18. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 517 
 
 17 
 
 (κων τούτο 
 
 ν f . / 
 
 άκων, οικονομιαν 
 
 πρίίσσω, 
 πίπιστίυμαι. 
 Ο μισυος, ινα ίυα-γ-γίΑιί,ομίνος 
 evayyiXiou, εις το μη 
 
 μισ(7( 
 18 τις 
 
 ί-ι ^c cR(jm. viii.SO 
 '' ^*= cnly. Ex-id. 
 
 ovv μου εστίν d=Matt.'v.i2. 
 
 Εχο 
 
 αόαττανοί' υησω 
 
 1 ul. ir. 
 
 17. 
 
 καταχρίΐσασθαι ry εΕουσία μου 4"! ΕμίΙ.'Γ 
 
 i. 25. 1 Tim. i. 4 only. L. P. Isa. xsii. 19. 
 = Acts xxvii. 12. Geu. xxxii. 12. VVisd. x. 21. 
 
 = RiiD. iii. 2ri:ff. 
 k cli. vii. 31 only. 
 
 3 Mace. 7. 22. 
 
 (al?) ChTj al. — 17. for εχω, ουκ ίχω 13. 37• — 18. η 109. — rec /tioi ιστ. {appy corrn, not 
 observing the constr, to give the sense ' What reward then have I .'' [τις ουν tariv μοι 
 μισθός'], instd of' What then is my reward .'' — see further in note),W\\\\ B(e sil'jDEFGJ 
 (but ioT. μοι DEFG) &c syr al Chr Thdrt al Aug: txt ACK 1?. 39. Ar>. 5?. ll? lect 
 14 V copt sah syr seth al Cyr Jer Ambrst Pel Bed. — for ίστιν, tarai {as above) D'FG it 
 Aug Ambrst. — ο om 73 Oec-te.xt. — θω 238- — rec aft το (vnyy. ins του χριστού {addn to 
 particularize, or perhaps to accord with ver 12), with D^EFGJK &c g syrr al Thdrt al 
 Jer : om ABCD' 3. 17• 23. 40. 57. 74 d e ν copt sah arm Cyr Chr (comm^) Ambrst Aug 
 
 rights of the sacrificing priests of the law, 
 and of the preachers of the gospel. Had 
 those preachers been likewise sacrificing 
 priests, is it possible that all allusion to 
 them in such a character should have been 
 here omitted ? But as all such allusion /*■ 
 omitted, we may fairly infer that no such 
 character of the Christian minister was then 
 known. As Bengel remarks on ver. 13: 
 ' Si missa esset sacriticium, plane Paulus 
 versa sequente apodosin hue accommo- 
 dasset.' 15.] οϋδενΐ τούτων is best 
 
 explained of the different forms of εξουσία, 
 — not, with Chrys.,al., τών πυΚλών τταρα- 
 ίίιγμάτων — πολλώΐ' γαρ μοι τταρίχόν- 
 των ίζονσίαν, τυΰ στρατιώτον, τυϋ -γε- 
 ωργού, τον ΤΓοιμέΐ'ος, των ηποστόλίον, 
 του ΐ'όμον, των τταρ' ημών εις ΰμας γε- 
 νομένων, των παρ' νμών ε!ς τους ίϊλλοΐ'ς, 
 των ιερέων, τον ττροςτάγματος τυϋ 
 ■χριστοί', οΰδενι τούτων εττεισθην εις τό 
 καταΧϋσαι τον εμαυτοϊ) νόμον, και Xajitlv. 
 True, that each of these examples pointed 
 to a form of εζονσία, and none of these 
 forms had he made use of. See reff. on 
 ch. vii. 21. Ιγραψα is the epistolary 
 
 aorist— ' I wrote (write) not these things 
 however, that it may be thus (viz. after 
 the examples which I have alleged) done to 
 me (in my case, see refl'.) : — for it were 
 good (reff.) for me rather to die (or, belter 
 for me to die, see ref. Mark) than that any 
 one should make void (see var. readd.) 
 my (matter of) boasting.' To under- 
 stand άτζίίθανίΐί' as Chrys., Theophyl., 
 Oec, Estius, BilhOth, al., άποθ. λιμω, 
 seems quite unnecessary. Further on, 
 Chrys. himself expresses the true sense : 
 ούτω και ζωής αντψ γΧνκύτερον ijv το 
 γινόμενου : — and Calvin, " tantum Evan- 
 gelii promovendi facultatem nimirum pro- 
 pria: vitie prseferebat." 16 ff.] The 
 reason why he made so much of this ma- 
 teries gloriandi : viz. that his mission itself 
 gave him no advantage this way, being an 
 office entrusted to him, and for which he 
 was solemnly accountable : but in this thing 
 
 only had he an advantage so as to be able 
 to boast of it, that he preached the gospel 
 without charge, ούαΐ γάρ— explains the 
 ανάγκη. On οΰαί εστίν, see ref. Hos. 
 17.] ' For (illustration and con- 
 firmation of oval yap, κ.τ.Χ. above) if I am 
 doing this (preaching) of mine own ac- 
 cord (as a voluntarg undertaking, which in 
 Paul's case was not so, as Chrys., το εκών 
 κ. άκων έπϊ τον έγκεχειμίσΟαι καΐ μή ίγ- 
 κεχειρίσθαι λαμβάνων : not, as Ε. V., al , 
 willingly, for this was so) I have a reward 
 (i. e. li of mine own will I took up the minis- 
 try, it might be conceivable that a μισθός 
 might be due to me. That this was not the 
 case, and never could be, is evident, and 
 the μισθός therefore only hypothetical) : 
 but if involuntarily (which was the case, 
 see Acts ix. 15 ; xxii. 14 ; xxvi. Iii) with a 
 STEWARDSHIP (oiV. emphatic) have I been 
 entrusted' (and therefore from the nature 
 of things, in this respect I have no μισθός 
 for merely doing what is my bounden duty, 
 see Luke xvii. 7 — 10 : but an ούαϊ, if I fail 
 in it. Chrys. observes well : ovSi γάρ 
 είπεν, it ft άκων, ούκ εχω μισθόν, άλλ' 
 οίκ. ττεττίστ. δεικννς ότι και όντως έχει 
 μισθόν, αλλά τοιούτον, οίον ό τύ ίπιταχ- 
 θίν ίζανύσας, ονχ οίον ίκεη'ος ό ίκ τών 
 εαυτόν ψιΚοτιμησά μινος κ. ίητερβάς τό 
 ϊ—ίταγμα). — The above interpretation, 
 which is in the main that of Chrys., Theo- 
 phyl., Oecum. (altern.), al., Meyer, and De 
 Wette, is the only one which seems to me 
 to satisfy, easily and grammatically, all the 
 requirements of the sentence, and at the 
 same time to suit the logical structure of 
 the context. The other Comm. go in omnia 
 alia, and adopt various forced and arbitrary 
 constructions of the verse. 18 ] Or- 
 
 dinarily, and even by De Wette, thus ar- 
 ranged and rendered : ' What then is my 
 reward ? {It is), that in preaching I 
 make the gospel to be without cost, that I 
 ■use not my poirer in the gospel. But this, 
 though perhaps philologically allowable 
 (against Meyer,— see John xvii. 3,— our»;
 
 518 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 IX. 
 
 1 \ν. κί, here 
 only. 
 
 νελκ 
 
 1ί) 1 'Λ 'η ^ * ' ' 
 
 ίλίυυίρος yap ων εκ πάντων, abcd 
 
 ' ' * EFG 
 
 £V τω ivayy 
 uno.-Rom. ττασιν ίμαντυν '" ίόουΧωσα, ίνα " τους " πΧί'ιονας ° κίρ^ησω' 
 
 m Acts τϋ. Ο 20 
 
 reft•. 
 1 Luke rii. 43 
 
 reft. και εγενό /iujv τοις Ιουδαίοις ως ΊουδίίΓος, 'ίνα Ίου- 
 
 η Luke πι. 4!. λ, q ί^',-μ'^' «„fv/ r 
 
 AcLsxix ο2. οαιους κ:ε<30ΐ}σω τοις ^ υττο νο^ιον ως ' νπο νομον, μη 
 
 sv.hhi. ωΐ' αυτός ' υττο νομον, ινα τους ' υττο νομον Κίρόησω 
 
 οΜηΊι. χνί. 21 " q ' ' • η " » ,ν η " Ο - 
 
 τοίς ανομοις ως άνομος, μη ων ' ανυμος σεου 
 
 ■ Aets ϋ 23. Wisd. χνϋ. 2. 
 
 21) al. Ir.t 
 -=BIntt. xviii. 
 15. ll'et. iii. 1. 
 
 ρ Rom. vi. 14, 15. Gal. iv. 4, 5, 21 . 
 
 Pel Bed. — καταχρασθαι A 1?. — (v τω tvnyy. om 109. — 19. tX. γαρ ων om 48: γαρ 
 om 108'-/!). — πασιν om 4' : τοις πασιν 120: ίΐ' πασιι /D' d e. — for ττλίίοΐ'ος, παντας 
 4(J. 10!) syr {π\(ΐοί•(ΐς marg) CIcm Jer,. — for «cfpt?., σώσω 3. 33-5. 120. — 20. και oin 
 D'E' 37 d e copt sah.— ως (1st) om G' 30. (Ji^ g' Tert Sedul.— τους ιονδ. 71. ί)3 lect «. 
 — οι WTTO νομοΓ arm. — rec om μη ωΐ' αντος νπο ιομοί' (?'. e. from, νομον to ιό//ο)', by over- 
 sight of copyist), with Κ (J omits from κίρδησω to κίρδησω) &c Syr cojjt al Orig Tlidrt 
 al : ins ABCDEFG all it ν sah syr copt al Orig Thdrt al. — for iva, ηλλ ινα και arm. — 
 for κίρδ., ίξαγορασω 72• — 21. rec Gtw and χριστώ {corrn : not observe/ the constr : see 
 
 ecTTiv t) αίώΐ'ίος ζωή, tra -γινώσκωσι .... 
 also John xv. li. 1 John iv. 17 [•']), is not 
 true. His making the gospel to be without 
 cost, was not his μισθός, but his και•χημα 
 only : and these two are not identical. 
 The καύχημα was present: the μισθός, 
 future, — Meyer's rendering is equally at 
 fault. He would make τις ovv μου ίστιν 
 6 μισθός; a question implying a negative 
 answer ■ — ' What then is my reivard ? 
 None: in order that I preach gratui- 
 tously,' &c. But thus he severs off (see 
 below) the whole following context, vv. 19 
 — 23 : and as it seems to me, stultifies the 
 καύχημα, by robbing it altogether of the 
 coming μισθός. I am persuaded that the 
 following is the true rendering : ' What 
 then is my reward (in prospect) that I 
 (ii'a, like υττως• in classical Greek, with a 
 fut. indie, points to the actual realization 
 of the jiurpose, with more precision than 
 when followed by the subjunctive. So 
 Xen. Cyr. ii. 4. 31, Κΰρος•, ώ Άρμΐικ, 
 κίλίύιι οϋτω ποιην σι, όπως ώς τάχιστα 
 ίχων OKTCiS και τον δασμόΐ' καΊ το στρά- 
 τίνμα, — Kiihner, Gramm. ii. 490, where 
 see more cxami)les) while preaching, ren- 
 der the gospel without cost (i. e. what 
 reward have I in prospect that induces me 
 to preach gratuitously) in order not to 
 use (as carrying out my design not to use, 
 καταχρ. see ref. and note : not, to abuse, 
 as E. V.) my power in the gospel (= Ty 
 Ιϊ,ονσ. μου Γ{/ tv τψ thayy., as often; cf. 
 τοΊς κνριοις κατά σάρκα, Eph. vi. 5; οι 
 vtKpo'i tv χριστψ, 1 Thoss. iv. IG, al.fr.)?' 
 19 11'.] He now proceeds to answer 
 the question, ' What prospect of reward 
 could induce me to do this ." — ' For (q. d. 
 the reward must have been great and glo- 
 rious in prospect) being free from (the 
 power of) all men, I enslaved myself 
 (when I made this determination : and have 
 continued to do so) to all, that I might 
 
 gain (not τονς ττάντας, which he could not 
 exactly say, but) the largest number ' {of 
 any : that hereafter Paul's converts might 
 be found to be ot πλιίανίς : see below on 
 vcr. 24). — Bengel has remarked on κβρ- 
 δησω, ' congruit hoc verbum cum conside- 
 ratione mercedis :' but ' congruit ' is not 
 enough : it is actually the answer to 
 the question τις μού ίστιν 6 μισθός ; This 
 ' lucrifecisse ' the greater number is dis- 
 tinctly referred to by him elsewhere, as his 
 reward in the day of the Lord : τίς yap 
 ι'ΐμών ιλπίς η χαρά ί) στϊφαΐ'ος κανχί]- 
 σίως ; ή ϋ/)χί και νμης ΐμττρυσθίν του 
 κΐφίοι; ημών Ίησυν χριστού tv Ty αύτον 
 ΤΓίΐιιουσίςι ; νμείς γάρ ϊστε ή δόξα ημών 
 και ('/ χαρά. 1 Thess. ii. 19, 20. Audit is 
 for this reason tliat 'ίνα .... κίρδήσω is 
 three times repeated: and, as we shall pre- 
 sently see, that the similitude at the end of 
 the chapter is chosen. 20 — 22.] <S};e- 
 
 cializes the foregoing assertion ττάσιν ΐμ. 
 ΙδούΧωσα, by enumerating various parties 
 to whose weaknesses he had conformed 
 himself, in order to gain them. 20. toIs 
 Ίουδ. ώς Ίουδ.] See examples. Acts xvi. 3 ; 
 xxi. 2(J. ούκ ητΓΐν, ΊονΰαΊος, άλλ' ως 
 Ίονδαΐνς, ίνα δ^iKyόrι οικονομία το πράγ- 
 μα »)»', Theophyl. aft. Chrys. The Jens 
 here are not Jewish converts, who would be 
 already xvon in the sense of this passage. 
 Tois inro νόμον . . . .] These again 
 are not Jewish converts (see above) ; nor 
 proselytes, who would not be thus dis- 
 tinguished from other Jews, but are much 
 tJie same as Ίηυόηιοι, only to the number 
 of these the A p. did not belong, not being 
 himself (αντός contrasts with ώς above) 
 under the law, whereas he was nationally a 
 Jew. 21. τοις άνόμοις ώς αν.] The 
 
 άνομοι are the Heathen : hardly, with 
 Chrys., such as Cornelius, fearing God but 
 not under the law. Paul became as a 
 Heathen to the Heathen, e. g., wlieu he
 
 19—21.. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους Α. 
 
 510 
 
 αλλ 
 
 22 
 
 ■χ^οιστου, ινη κεροαι/ω 
 " ασΟίί'ίσιΐ' ^ ασθ 
 
 ίννομος 
 ί'^Βνομην τυις 
 
 υ $>' t - 
 
 κίροί/σω. τοις πασιν 
 
 « ' 23 ' ί* 
 
 τιΐ'ας σώσω. πάντα oe πυιω 
 
 σνγκοινωνος αυτοΰ "γίνωμαι. 
 
 τρί^οντίς παντίς 
 
 ^ βξ>αβειοΐ' ', ούτως 
 
 όανω τους 
 fj'jjC, Ίνα τους 
 yiyova τταντα, 
 
 ' γγί 
 
 fi' στοΒκ• 
 Χαμβανίΐ το 
 
 άνομους. 
 ασΟίνίΐς 
 Ίνα " πάντως 
 evayyiXiov, Ίνα 
 οΊοατί ΟΤΙ οι 
 μίν τρίνουσιν, ίΐς of 
 ' τ^ε^ετε, ii'ct " καταΧα- 
 
 ίί. I4onlyt. ζ 
 
 ■= liere only. 
 (Acts xix.a'.». 
 only)t. 
 = Kuril. V. (!. 
 xi 3Λ 
 , 13 
 
 δίο TO 
 
 24 w ' 
 
 ii. 21 
 
 E|,li, 
 rcir. 
 
 II Alls 
 
 relt. 
 V Hi>ni. xi. 17, 
 
 Phil. i. 7. 
 
 Rev. i. U 
 
 only t. 
 well. vi. L'al. 
 X = lieie only. 
 
 (Luke xxiv. 
 
 13 al.) P'.lyb. 
 = Rom. ix. 115. 
 
 Tiofe), with D^JK &c (Οίω sah Syr al) Thdrt Oec (text) : t.vt ABCD'E(but E^ θ£ω)Ρα 
 7. 17• 2f;. 31-7. 42-6'. (i7-. 73 it V copt arm syr Orig Did Cyr Chr Isid Dam Oec (comin) 
 Till I's-Ath lat-ft'. — rec κ(ρδηπιο {conn to suit ver 2»), witli DE (aft αννμ. DE al vss) 
 JK &c Orig Did Chr Thdrt al : txt ABCFG I7. 37- W. W.) (Clem).— rec hei ανομ. om 
 τους- {prob to suit ιηνδ. αύοηα), with FGJK &c Chr Tlulrt al : ins ABCDE I7. 37. 71-3. 
 109 al Orig Did — 22. ιγίνομ. (om 17) ct και FG g. — ασϋ^νοναιΐ' DEFG. — rec aft ασθ. 
 ins ως (to tally with the ?> former), with CDEFGJK &c vss Chr Thdrt al : om AB d e ν 
 Orig (retaining the 3 former) Cypr Aug Amb Ambrst Bed. — τονς om 80. — (γίνομην FG 
 Clem. — rec ins τη bef τταιτα (prob to suit τοις ττασιν : but often when πάντα occurs, 
 τη is insd befit in some mss), with D'EJK &c Orig, Mac Chr, Thdrt al : txt ABCD'FG 
 4G Clem Orig, Naz Cjr Chrj. — for παΐ'τως τινας, ποιτας- {conformation to the fore- 
 going clauses) DEFG vss (not copt sah syr goth al) lat-ft': also, prefg τονς 17 Clem Orig 
 (elsw TTrtiTii) : ιτηΐ'τως Ttrn 115lectt5. I7. lii• — for σωσιυ, (cfpiijrrw geth ar-erp Clem 
 Orig2 Mac Naz, Thl (marg) Tert Jer Aug. — 23. rec τυντο Of ττοι. {jjrob corrn to specify 
 more particularli/ the foregoing), with JK &c svrr al Thdrt Dam Thl Oec: txt 
 ABCDEFG 17. 37. 4G. «7-. 73. 80 it ν copt seth Naz Chr Schol-on-7 Ambrst Pelag Sedul 
 Bed: ταντα dt πάντα sah arm. — 24. bef ουΓως, ins tyio St λίγω νμιν FG g. — rec οι-τω 
 
 discoursed at Athens (Acts .xvii.) in their 
 own manner, and with arguments drawn 
 from their own poets. μή ών, κ.τ.λ.] 
 
 ' not being (being conscious of not being, 
 remembering well in the midst of my 
 ανομία that I was not. This is implied by 
 μη, which is subjective, giving the convic- 
 tion of the subject, not merely the objective 
 fact (as οί'κ ών would do) an outlaw from 
 God {θίοΐ) and χ^^ισrυϋ are genitives of de- 
 pendence, as after κατήΐίοος, f ΐ'οχος, &c.) 
 but a subject-of-the-law of Christ (the 
 words seem inserted rather to put before 
 the reader the true position of a Christian 
 with regard to God's law revealed by Christ, 
 than merely with an apologetic view to 
 keep his own character from suffering by 
 the imputation of ανομία), that I might 
 gain those who had no law.' — κίούανώ 
 and Κίυοήπο) are both found in the classics : 
 see Matthiae, § 239, and Lobeck on Pliryni- 
 chus, p. 740. — The ασθενείς here can hardly 
 be the weak Christians of ch. viii. and 
 Rom. xiv., who were already won, but as 
 in reff., those who had not strength to 
 believe and receive the Gospel. This sen- 
 tence docs not (hen bring out a new form 
 of condescension, but rccajiitulates the pre- 
 ceding two classes, τοΙς νπί> νόμον .... 
 τηϊς άνόμοις. 22. τοις ττάσιν . . . .] 
 
 This sums up the above, and others not 
 enumerated, in one general rule, — and the 
 various occasions of his practising the con- 
 
 descension (aorists) in one general result 
 (perfect). — ' To all men I am become all 
 things (i. e. to each according to his situa- 
 tion and prejudices) that by all means 
 (' omnino :' or perhaps as Meyer, in all 
 wags: but I prefer the other) I might 
 save some (rtvas is emphatic : — some, out 
 of each class in the πάντις: — It is said, as 
 is the following ver., in extreme humility, 
 and distrust of even an Apostle's confidence, 
 to shew them the immense importance of 
 the μισθός for which he thus denied and 
 submitted himself). 23.] But (q. d. 
 
 ' not only this of which I have spoken, but 
 all') all things I do on account of the 
 gospel, tha; I may be a fellow partaker 
 (with others) of it' (of the blessings pro- 
 mised in the gospel to be brought by the 
 Lord at His coming). 24 if.] ' This 
 
 is my aim in all I do : but inasmuch as 
 many run in a race, many reach the goal, 
 but one only receives the prize,— I as an 
 Apostle run my course, and you must so 
 run yours, as each to labour not to be re- 
 jected at last, but to gain (he glorious and 
 incorruptible prize. This, as compared with 
 the former context, seems to bo the sense 
 and connexion of the passage. Ho was 
 anxious, as an Apostle, lo iubour more 
 abundantly, more eft'ectually than Ihiy all: 
 and hence his condescension {πιι•/κητά• 
 βασίι;) to all men, and self-denial : accom- 
 panied with which was a humble self-dis-
 
 520 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 IX. 
 
 πας δί ο ayω\ΊLoμίvoς '^ πάντα iyKoaxiveTai' aecd 
 
 b John xviii. ί^ητι: ^5 
 
 3(irffl. H'/Tc• 
 
 ii.2. εκίΐνοι μίν ovv iva ψοαξ)τον στίψανον λαρωαιν, ημείς 
 
 e Γ*ΊΓ'νί*4 reff ^^ αφΟύοτον. £γ(ϋ '^ τοίΐ'υΐ' ^ ούτως τρί^ω ^ ως ουκ 
 
 1 Rom. i. ι'3 ί'5"Λ h" k ' Ιι• ' Ι" m^'' . 
 
 rrft αόΐ]Λως, όντως πνκτίνω ως υυκ aepa €ίοων 
 
 g I,«ke XX. 25. ' ' 
 
 Ilrb xiii. 13. James ii. 24 var. read. only. Isa. iii. Ill v. 13. h ch. iii. 15 reff. ihereonlyt- 
 
 2 Maic. Tii. 34. See 1 Tim. τι 17. k here only t. Xen. Rip. Lac. ϊτ. 6. 1 Acts xxii. 23 al. 
 m Matt, sxi.35 al. 
 
 (and in ver 26) ; txt ACG &,c. — 25. μίν ovv ora arm: ovv om KG. 117-19 sah goth 
 Clem Iren (syr*). — 26. for τοιι•., £i sah: St ronvv 80. — δαιρωί' 12. 113^ (*!')• — 
 
 KFCr 
 
 JK 
 
 trust as to the great matter itself of his 
 personal salvation, and an eager anxiety to 
 secure it. These he proposes for their 
 exam])le likewise. 24.] The allu.'^ion 
 
 is primarily no doubt to the Isthmian 
 games ; but this must not be pressed too 
 closely: the foot-iace was far too common 
 an element in athletic contests, for any 
 accurate knowledge of its predominance in 
 some and its insignificance in others of the 
 Grecian games to be here supposed. Still 
 less must it be imagined that those games 
 were to be celebrated in the year of the 
 Epistle being written. The most that can 
 with certainty be said, is that he alludes to 
 a contest which from the neighbourhood of 
 the Isthmian games was well known to his 
 readers. [See Stanley's note : who, in fol- 
 lowing out illustrations of this kind, writes 
 with a vivid graphic power peculiarly his 
 own.] βραβ€Ϊον] Wetst. quotes 
 
 from the Schol. on Pindar, Olymp. 1, Xs- 
 yt-ai Vi TO διΰόμίνοί' yfnag τψ νικήησί'τι 
 aOXijTJj άπο fitv των ίιΐϋντων avrb βηα- 
 β(υτωι> βρηβ'Ίον, άπο οε τώΐ' άθλούΐ'των 
 άθλον, and from the Etymol., βραβεΊον 
 XfyiTat ο τταρά τώΐ' β(ΐπβ(υτών διδόμαος 
 στίφανος τψ viKwvTi. οντω5 τρ.] 
 
 ' Thus (after this manner — viz. as they who 
 run all, each endeavouring (o be the one 
 u-ho shall receive the prize : — not, as the 
 one who receives it (Meyer, De Wette), — 
 for the others strive as earnestly as he : 
 still less must we take Ίνα κηταλάβητί for 
 ώς κaΓu\aβi7^■, which is barely allowable, 
 and here would not suit the sense ; the 
 υ'ύτως being particularized presently by one 
 point of the athletes' preparation being spe- 
 cially alleged for their imitation) nin (not 
 Kd'i νμπς ταίχιτί, because the evident 
 analogy between the race and the Cliristian 
 conflict is taken for granted. If, as Dr. 
 Peile imagines, a contrast had been in- 
 tended, between the stadium where one 
 only can receive the prize, and the Christian 
 race where alt may, it must have stood 
 οϊτως C( ΐψιΊς τοέχιτί, ώς και (—άΐ'-ας .') 
 καταΧαβί'ιν. But such contrast would de- 
 stroy the sense), in order that ye may 
 fully obtain ' (the prize of your calling, 
 see Phil. iii. 14. On λαμβ^ηω and κατα- 
 λαμβάνω see note, ch. vii. 31). 25.] 
 
 The point in the όντως, the conduct of 
 the athletes in regard of temperance, 
 which he wishes to bring into especial pro- 
 minence for their imitation: — as concern- 
 ing the matter in hand, — his oivn absti- 
 nence from receiving this icorld's pelf in 
 order to save himself and them that heard 
 him. — The 8e specifies, referring back to 
 όντως. The emphasis is on ττάς, thus 
 shelving οΰτως to refer to the ττύντις 'who 
 τρέχουίτιΐ'. άγωνιζόμ€νος is more 
 
 general than τρίχωι•, — q. d. ' Every one 
 who engages, not only in the race, but in 
 any athletic contest,' and thus strengthen- 
 ing the inference. The art. (ό άγωι•.) 
 brings out the man as an enlisted and pro- 
 fessed άyωvιϊ,όμfvoς, and regards him in 
 that capacity. Had it been -πας Ct άyωrιζ., 
 the sense would have been, ' Now every 
 one, while contending,' &c., making the 
 discipline to be merely accidental to his 
 contending — which would not suit the 
 spiritual antitype, where we are enlisted for 
 hfe. — Exam])les of the practice of absti- 
 nence in athletes may be seen in Wetst. 
 in 1. I will give but two : (1) Hor. de Art. 
 Poet. 412: 'Qui studet ojjtatam cursu 
 contingere metam, Multa tulit fecitque 
 puer, sudavit et alsit : Abstinuit venere et 
 vino.' (2) Epict. c. 35 : Θίλΐις 6\νμ-ια 
 νικησαι ; Kayuj vi) τονς θίούς, κομ -ipof 
 yap iariv. άλλα σκόττίΐ και τα καθηγον- 
 μίΐα και τά ύκόΧονθο, και όντως απτού 
 τώι> tpyωτ. δη σ' iVTUKTtii•, avayKOTfm- 
 ψίϊΐ', άπίχίσθαι πίμμάτων, yvμl'άζ^σβaι 
 ττρός a'i'ayK/ji• iv ωρα τίταγμέιγ, tv καν- 
 ματι, ίν φνχίι, μή \1/νχρι>ν πίνίιν, μι) 
 οίνον' ώς ίτυχ^ίΐ' απλώς, ώς ιατρψ παρα- 
 ίίδωκίΐ'ηι σαντον τφ ϊπιστιιτ•^, tira ίίς 
 τον cΊyώva παρίρχίσθαι. Ικ€Ϊνοι.] 
 
 scil. iyKpaTti'oi'Tai. μεν ovv, ' immo 
 
 vero' (refl".). — The Schol. on Pind. Isthm. 
 νπόϋίσις, cited by Meyer, says : στίφος δε 
 Ιστι τοΐι dyώroς ιτίχυς, το δι άνίκαΰιν 
 σί\ινα και αντοϋ ην 6 στΐφαΐ'ος. 
 ήμ€Ϊς Be, scil. ίyκpnτ^vόμtθa 'ίνα λάβω- 
 μεν στέφανον. He takes for granted tlie 
 Christian's temperance in all things, as liis 
 normal state. 26.] Ί then^tyi!) em- 
 
 pliatic — recalls the attention from the in- 
 cidental exhortation, and reminiscence of 
 the Christian state, to the main subject, his
 
 25—27. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 521 
 
 ^' αλλ " ύττωπιά^ω μου το σώμα καΐ " δουλαγωγω, '' μηττως °ο°ι^^^^"*'^ 
 
 >/■>■> /ν ivqio,/ , ο here only +. 
 
 αΑΑοις κηρυε,ας αυτός αδόκιμος -γίνωμαι. Gen. xim. is 
 
 ρ Rom. xi. 21 al9. Paul only, exc. Acts xxvii. 29 (var. read.). q Rom. i. 28 refT. 
 
 27. άλλα Β. — υτΓοτΓία^ω FGJK 73. 89' all leott G. 8. 13 al Eus Serap Eph Nazj Clir 
 (^Matth's ms,) Dam: νττοπίίζω D''(ii7rw7r-)E 4C. 113-marg al Clem NaZj Chr (Mattli's 
 mSj) Thdrtj ; castigo ν if ; al ίί suhjicio, niacero, affllgo ; Uvidum facia d e Iren Paulin : 
 txt ABCDi and D* Orig Chr (ed Montfauc, also Matth's mSj) Thdrt, Till Oec — 
 αλλοΐ'ς 80. 
 
 own abstinence from receiving, and its 
 grounds. τοίννιν, as distinguished from 
 other particles which imply restriction 
 of what has been generally said to some 
 particular object, indicates the dropping 
 of rninvte or collateral points, and return- 
 ing to the great necessary features of the 
 subject, — and this, as introducing some 
 short and pithy determination or conclu- 
 sion : see Hartung, Partikellehre, ii. 348. 
 E. g.,— Xen. Cyr. vi. 3. 17, τούτων μίΐ' 
 τοίνυν ά\ις ύη, ίί Ct καιμύς ί'/μΐν ttciirn, 
 τηντα, ϊφη, διηγον) SO run aS (οϋτως — ώς, 
 see reff.) not uncertainly (relf. : cf. also 
 Polyb. iii. 54. ό, η/ς χιόνος aSijXov ποιού- 
 σης (κάστοις την ίπίβασιν : — ' uncer- 
 tainly,' i. e. without any sure grounds of 
 contending or any fixed object for which to 
 contend : both these are included. Chry- 
 sostom rightly brings it into subordination 
 to the main subject, the participation with 
 idolaters : — η ck ϊστιν, ούκ ά!:Ι)\ως ; πυος 
 σκοττόν τιΐ'α βλίπων, ψηαιν, ούκ ί'ικη και 
 μάτην, καθάπιρ νμίΐς, τι yap υμίν yivt- 
 ται πΧ'ίον άτΓο τοΰ ίίς (ίδωΧίΙα ιίςιίναι, 
 καΐ την τίΧίκΊτητα δήθίΐ' ίκίίνην ίττιίύκ- 
 ννσθαι ; ονδίν. ά\λ' υΰκ tyio τοιούτος, 
 άλλα ττάντα άττερ ποιώ, ύπίρ της τώι' 
 πλησίον σωτήριας ποιώ. καν τιΚίιότητα 
 ίπιδύΧωμαι, δι' αυτούς' καν συγκατά- 
 βασιν, δι' αϊτούς' καν νπιρβώ Tlfrpoj' ΐν 
 τφ μή \αμβά]>ίΐΐ', Ίνα μη σκανδαλισθώ τι' 
 καν καταβώ πλίον πάντων, πίοιτιμνό- 
 μίνος και ξνρώμινος, ινα μή νποσκίλισ- 
 θώσι. Hom. xxiii. ρ. 201 c) ; so fight I, 
 as not striking the air' (and not my ad- 
 versary). The allusion is not to a σκ•ια- 
 μαχία or rehearsal of a fight with an ima- 
 ginary adversary, as Chrys. (ί'χω yap 'ov 
 ΐΓλήζω) Theophyl. al. m., but of a fight 
 with a real adversary (viz. here, the body) 
 in which the bo.xer vainly hits into the 
 air, instead of striking his antagonist. So 
 Entellus in the pugilistic combat, Mn. v. 
 446, 'vires in ventum efi'udit,' when Dares 
 ' ictum venientem a vertice velox Praevidit, 
 celericjue elapsus corpore cessit.' See exx. 
 both of what is really meant, and of the 
 σκιαμα\ία, in Wetst. — Obs., in both places 
 ούκ is used and not μή, as importing 
 the matter of fact, and joined closely with 
 the adverb in one ca.'e and the verb in the 
 other. 27.] ' But I bruise my body 
 
 (ύπωπιάζω, lit. to strike heavily in the 
 
 face so as to render black and blue, — " ύττ- 
 ώτΓία, — τά ΰπό τινς ώπας τών ττλιιγών 
 Ιχνη, ut ait Pollux : sed latius did sic 
 ccepere άφ' οΊαςδΐ)ποτοϋν πληyής τραύ- 
 ματα, ut ait Scholiastes ad Aristoph. 
 Acharn., Cicero Tusc. 2, ' Pugiles csestibus 
 contusi,' i. e. νπωπιαζόμίνυι." Grot. The 
 body is the adversary, considered as the 
 seat of the temi)tations of Satan, and espe- 
 cially of that self-indulgence which led the 
 Corr. to forget their Christian combat, and 
 sit at meat in the idol's temple. The 
 abuse of this expression to favour the 
 absurd practice of the Flagellants, or to 
 support ascetic views at all, need hardly be 
 pointed out to the rational, much less to 
 the Christian student. It is not even of 
 fasting or prayer that he is here speaking, 
 but as the context, vv. ly — 23, shews, of 
 breaking down the pride and obstinacy and 
 self-seeking of the natural man by laying 
 himself entirely out for his great work — 
 the salvation of the greatest number : and 
 that, denying himself " solatium " from 
 without : " Aly hands have been worn away 
 [cf. χΰρις αύται. Acts xx.34] with the black 
 tent-cloths, my frame has been bowed down 
 with this servile labour [cf. ελίύθιρος . . . 
 ίδονλωσα, ch. ix. 19]." Stanley) and. 
 enslave it (' etiam δουλαγωγεΊν a pyctis 
 desumptum est : nam qui vicerat, victum 
 [vinctum ?] trahebat adversarium quasi 
 servum.' Grot. But this seems to want 
 confirmation. I can find no account of 
 such a practice in any of the ordinary 
 sources of information. Certainly Dares 
 is not made the slave of Entellus in /En. 
 v. : and Virgil is generally accurate in such 
 matters. I had rather give a more general 
 meaning : that viz. of the necessary sub- 
 jection, for the time, of the worsted to 
 the prevailing combatant), lest perchance 
 having proclaimed {κηρ. absolute : as in 
 ^sch.Eum. 5(J(i, κήρυσσε, κήρνί, και στρα- 
 τον KaTfipyi'iuov [Peile]. The subject of 
 the proclamation might be the laivs of the 
 combat, or the 7iames of the victors (.En. v. 
 245), each by one in the capacity of herald : 
 probably here the former only, as answering 
 to the preaching of the Apostles. The nature 
 of the case shews, that the Christian herald 
 differs from the agonistic herald, in being 
 himself a combatant as veil, which the 
 other was not : and that this is so, is no
 
 522 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους λ. 
 
 χ. 
 
 rRom. i. 13. 
 
 >i. as. 
 
 1 Thess. iv. 
 
 13. 
 s Acts iii. 25. 
 
 vii. 12 al. 
 t John i. 4il. 
 
 Acts iv. 12. 
 η Kom. vi. 3 
 
 reff. 
 τ Rum. siv. 15 
 
 EF(1 
 JK 
 
 X. Oil θίλω yap υμάς ^ tiyvoHi', α^εΧφοι, on ni abcd 
 ^ 7τατί()ίς ημών ττάντίς υπο την νεφίλην ήσαν και τταντίς 
 δία της Θαλάσσης διί/λΟον, και πάιτες " ίΐς τον 
 
 Μωυσην " ΐβαπτ'ισαντο ίν τΐ] νεφίλΐ) /cat ίν ττ} θαλασσή, 
 αυτό ^ βρωμά " ΤΓΐ'ίυματίΚου ΐψαγυν, 
 
 κσί παντίς 
 
 rrit. 
 W Κϋΐη. ί. 11. ch. ii. 13. xii. 1. siv. 1 al. 
 
 Chap. X. 1. rec ΟΑω ot (corrn, the connexion not being perceived), with JK &c syrr 
 al Chr Thdrt al : t.xt ABCDEFG G. 17- 'Λϋ. 4iJ. 73-4. 178 it ν copt Clem Orig gr- 
 lat-fT. — a?, μου Syr sail. — νμων 49. 73. — ποντ-ίς om lect β. — και τταντίς to και ττηντις 
 om lect 17 Iron Hil^ Vig. — for θα\., ιεφιλης 17.— 2. φαπτισθησην ACDEFG 17- 3!). 
 40. 7:i. «(). 93. 109-79 al lect 19 Dial Bas Cyr Did Chr (somet) Thdrt (somet) Thl al : 
 -ζοί'το Thl-ms {notu-ithslandg the strong MS evidence, the pass appears to have been a 
 corrn to the more usual exprn in the case o/ Christian baptism) : txt B(e sil)JK most 
 mss Origj Chrj (h 1) Thdrt (h 1) Dam Oec— 3. om 109-78 α\.—πντο om AC' (ajipy) 4(> 
 iEth ϋ\.—πΐ'ίνμ. βρ. εφαγ. BC^ 93: πνευ. εφ. βρ. Α l'Λ^ Maroion in Epiph : t.\t 
 (C ?)DEFGJK inss (nrly) vis (nrly) Orig Dial Chr Thdrt Thl al Iran (or others cited by 
 
 objection to thus understanding κηρνΚπς. 
 " This introduces indeed a new complica- 
 tion into the metaphor : but it is rendered 
 less violent by the fact, that .... some- 
 times the victor in the games was also 
 selected as the herald to announce his 
 success. So it was a few years after 
 the date of this Epistle, in the case 
 of Nero. Suet. Nero, c. 24." Stanley) 
 to others, I myself may prove rejected' 
 (from the prize: not, as some Comm., 
 from the contest altogether, for he was 
 already in it). An e.xamination of the 
 victorious combatants took place after the 
 contest, and if it could be proved that 
 they had contended unlawfully, or unfairly, 
 they were deprived of the prize and driven 
 w-ith disgrace from the games. Such a 
 person was called εκκεκπιμενος, and άττο- 
 £είοκιμησμε}•ος, see Philo de Cherub. 
 p. 120, § 22. So the Ap. if he had pro- 
 claimed the laws of the combat to others, 
 and not observed them himself, however 
 successful he might apparently be, would 
 be personally rejected as άοόκιμος in the 
 great day. And this he says with a view 
 to shew them the necessity of more self- 
 denial, and less going to the e.xtreme limit 
 of their Christian liberty : as Chrys. ft 
 yap ίμοί τϋ Κ7]ρνζαι, r'u ίιύά^,αι, το μυυί- 
 orc TTpogayaytlv οΰκ άρκίΐ εΙς σωτηρία»', 
 ει μη και τά κατ' ίμαυτόν παρησ^οίμην 
 ίίλητΓτα, Τ7υ\\φ μα\\ον ί'γιΤί'. 
 Χ. 1 — 22.] He jiroceeds, in close connex- 
 ion with the warnings which have just pre- 
 ceded, to set before them the great danger 
 of commerce with idolatrg, and enforces 
 this by the example of the rebellions and 
 rejections of God's ancient people, who 
 were under a dispensation analogous to and 
 typical of ours (1— llj ; and by the close 
 resemblance of our sacrament of the Lord's 
 Supper, — their eating of meats sacrificed, 
 — and the same act among the heathen, in 
 
 regard of the union in each case of the 
 partal'ers in one act of participation. So 
 
 that THEY COULD NOT EAT THE IDOL's 
 FEAST WITHOUT PARTAKING OF IDOLATRY 
 = A'IRTUALLY ABJURING ChRIST (vv. 15 
 
 • — 22). 1.] γάρ joins to the pre- 
 
 ceding. He had been inculcating the ne- 
 cessity of self-subduing (ch. x. 24—27), 
 and now enft)rces it in the particular depart- 
 ments oi abstaining from fornication, idol- 
 atry, S^'c, by the example of the Jews of 
 old. oil θίλω . . . . , see reff. ol 
 
 ττατ. ημών] He uses this expression, not 
 merely speaking for himself aiid his Jewish 
 converts, but regarding the Christian church 
 as a continuation of the Jewish, and the 
 believer, as the true descendant of Abraham. 
 ΊΓαντίς . . . iravTis . . . ττάντβς, each 
 time with strong emphasis, as opposed to 
 τιης πλίίοπίΐ•, ver. 5. All had these pri- 
 vileges, as all of you have their counter- 
 parts under the Gospel : but most of them 
 failed from rebellion and unbelief. 
 ΐιττο την ν£φ. ήσαν] The pillar of cloud, 
 the abode of the divine Presence, went 
 before them, and ^as to them a defence .• 
 hence it is sometimes treated of as covering 
 the camp, e. g. Ps. civ. 39, Ιιε-πίταπι vt- 
 φίληΐ' εις σκίττην αΰτο'ις: and thus they 
 would be under it. So also Wisd. x. 17 ; 
 xix. 7i — V '■')'' τταρεμβολήν σκιάζονσα 
 νεφί\η. See Exod. xiii. 21 ; xiv. 22. 
 2.] tis T. Μωυσ. Ιβατττ., ' received bap- 
 tism to Moses ;' entered by the act of such 
 immersion into a solemn covenant with God, 
 and became His church under the law as 
 given by Moses, God's servant, — just as wc 
 Christians by our baptism are bound in ;i 
 solemn covenant with God, and enter His 
 church under the Gospel as brought in by 
 Christ, God's eternal Son ; see Heb. iii. 
 5, 6. Others (Syr., Beza) explain it ^ per 
 Mosen,' or (Calv., al.) ' auspiciis Mosis,' 
 which εις will not bear, — not to mention
 
 1—4. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 523 
 
 ^ και παντΐς το αυτό τΓηυματικον εττίον ττομα εττίνον γα^ ^ "'ιΐ»• 'χ- 1^• 
 ε /c " πνευματικής ακοΧουθυυσης πίτρας, τ/ ττετρα δε ^^ι; ό ϊ='μ;;«,χχτϊ 
 
 bim) lat-ff. — 4. ηυτο om A 46 aeth Origj al.— rec ττομ. πνευ. ίττιον {transposn (ο 
 conform irith ihe precedy), witli &c Dial Chr Thdrt al Ireri (or others cited by him) 
 Orig-int al : txt ABC AG. 137 Orig, Cyr Epiph Jer {tirivov 137 Origj : tiriav D>). — rec 
 jj ?'t TTfrpa {transposn io more tisnal order, the emphasis not being observed), with 
 ACD2JK Orig (somet) Chr Thdrt al : txt BDiD^FG {η om FG) &c Origj: η . . . χφ. 
 
 that the formula βαπτίζω ης was already 
 fixed in meaning, see reff. έβαιττ., 
 
 ^ bapiismum sxisceperunt :' see var. readd. 
 ev TTJ V. και €V τή θ.] The cloud 
 and the sea being both arjiteous, and this 
 point of comparison being obtained, serves 
 the Ap. to indicate the outward symbols of 
 their initiation into the church under the 
 government of Moses as the servant of God, 
 and to complete the analogy with our bap- 
 tism. The allegory is obviously not to be 
 pressed minutely : for neither did they 
 enter the cloud, nor were they wetted by 
 the waters of the sea ; but they passed 
 under both, as the baptized passes under 
 the water, and it was said of them, Exod. 
 xiv. 31, " Then the people feared the Lord, 
 and believed the Lord, and His servant 
 Moses." To understand, as Olsh., the sea 
 and cloud, of tcater and the Spirit respec- 
 tively, is certainly carrying the allegory too 
 far : not to mention that thus the baptism 
 by the Spirit would precede that by water. 
 3.] They had what answered to the 
 one Christian sacrament. Baptism : now the 
 Ap. shews that they were not without a 
 symbolic correspondence to the other, the 
 Lord's Supper. The two elements in this 
 Christian sacrament were anticipated in 
 their case by the manna and the miraculous 
 stream from the rock : these elements, in 
 their case, as well as ours, symbolizing the 
 Body and Blood of Christ. The whole 
 passage is a standing testimony, inciHentally, 
 but most providentially, given by the great 
 Apostle to the importance of the Christian 
 Sacraments, as necessary to membership of 
 Christ, and not mere signs or remem- 
 brances : and an inspired protest against 
 those who, whether as individuals or sects, 
 would lower their dignity, or deny their 
 necessity. βρώμα irvcv^aTiKov, κ-.τ.λ.] 
 
 The manna is thus called, from its being no 
 mere physical production, but miraculously 
 given by God — the work of His Sjjirit. 
 Thus Isaac is called, Gal. iv. 29, ό κατά. 
 7Γν€ΪΙμα ^ίννηθίΐς, in opposition to Ish- 
 mael, ύ κατά σάρκα γίΐτηΟίίς. Josephus 
 calls the manna Oflov βοωμη και πα()ά- 
 δυζον, Atitt. iii. 1. (> : and in Ps. Ixxvii. 24, 
 it is said αυτόν ονρανοϋ tfojKlv πι'/τοίς•. — 
 We can scarcely avoid recognizing in these 
 words a tacit reference to our Lord's dis- 
 
 course, or at all events to the substance of it, 
 — John vi. 31 — 58. ["Forthesenseof rrj/fi;- 
 ματικός, as ^typical,' 'seen in the light of 
 the spirit,' cf. Rev. xi. 8, ηης (ταλίΪΓπι πνη•- 
 ματικως Σόcoμa." Stanley.] 4.] It is 
 
 hardly possible here, without doing violence 
 to the words and constr.,to deny that the Ap. 
 has adopted the tradition current among the 
 Jews, that the 7-ock followed the Israelites 
 in their journeyings, and gave forth water 
 all the way. Thus Rabbi Solomon on Num. 
 XX. 2 : " Per omnes quadraginta annos erat 
 iis puteus" (Lightf) : and Schottgen cites 
 from the Bammidbar Rabba, " Quomodo 
 comparatus fuit ille puteus (de quo Num. 
 xxi. 16) .' Resp. Fuit sicut petra, sicut 
 alveus apum, et globosus, et volutavit se, 
 et ivit cum ipsis in itineribus ipsorum. 
 Cum vexilla castra ponerent, et taberna- 
 culum staret, ilia petra venit, et consedit in. 
 atrio tentorii. Tunc venerunt Principes. et 
 juxta ilium steterunt, dicentes, ' Ascende, 
 putee, &c.' (Num. sxi. 16) et asccndit." See 
 other testimonies in Schottgen. — The only 
 ways of escaping this inference are, (1) by 
 setting aside the natural sense altogether, 
 as Chrys., Theophyl. — ού yap ή ri}f τ^έ- 
 τρ'.ις φύσις το νοωο ηφ'ιίι, ά•\λ' ίτίρα τις 
 ττϊτρα ΤΓΐ'ενματική το τταν ίΐργάζίτο, τουτ- 
 έστιν 6 χριστός, ο τταρων αϊτνίς τταντα- 
 χον, και πάντα θαυματουργών ίιά yap 
 τυϋτο tl-Ktv, ακολουθούσης, — or (2) by 
 taking ττίτρα =: το ϊκ της ττίτρας ϋίωο, as 
 Erasm., Beza, Grot , Estius, Lightf. : — and 
 so Calvin, who says : " Quomodo, inquiunt, 
 rupes quae suo loco fixa stetit, comitata 
 esset Israelitas ,' Quasi vero non palam 
 sit sub petrse voce notari aquae tluxum, 
 qui nunquam populum deseruit." But 
 against both of these we have the plain 
 assertion, representing matter of physical 
 fact, Ιπινον ϊκ ττηυ/ιατικής άκηλονθούσης 
 πίτρας, ' they di'ank from a (or, aft. a 
 preposition, the) miraculous rock whicli 
 followed them :' and I cannot consent to 
 depart from what appears to me the only 
 admissible sense of these words. How ex- 
 tensively the traditionary reliqucs of unre- 
 corded Jewish history were adopted by 
 apostolic men under the insjiiration of the 
 Holy Spirit, the apology of Sfci)li(n may 
 bear witness. ή •π•€τρα Se ήν ό χρι- 
 
 στός] ' But (distinction between what they
 
 524 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 χ. 
 
 ζ Malt. iii. 1Γ. y ΟίσΤΟΟ 
 
 aThes6. ϋ. κησζν 
 
 12. 
 
 αλλ ουκ 
 
 εν τοις 
 
 πλίί 
 
 οσιν αυτών 
 
 ηυ 
 
 υδυ- 
 
 a ch. ix. 1!) 
 
 reft•, 
 b here only. ^,,,,7^' 
 
 κατεστρωυησαν γαρ fi' r?} ίοημιο. 
 ταύτα δε "^ τύποι Ύ\μων '^^ eyivuOriaav, ' £ΐς τυ jtJTi tirat 
 
 ίΤΓΐθνμητας κακών, καθώς κακίΐνοι εττεθυμησαν. 
 = Rom. V.14. * ιχηδε ειδωλυλάτραι yivtaOs, καΟως τίνες αυτών, ωςπίο 
 
 d Acts iii. 19. vii. 19. Rom. i. 11, 2(1 al. 
 
 elit-reonly. Num. xi. 34. 
 
 om 119.— 5. rec ci-Jo/c. with DEFGJK &c Tlulrt Dam Oec Thl : txt ABC al Clem Clir. 
 — ο θίος om Clem Marcioii (in Epiph) Iren,. — 6. τνττος 4!) slav-ms : tiQ τύπον 4ϋ : in 
 figuram nostri d e Iren-cit Bed : in fyiira noslri g ν Vig Ambrst : fiyura nnstrce Tert 
 Cypr Aug. — ημιν ^i). 4G sah slav (a])py) : Si ημάς arm. — f/cfii'oi sail. — 7. μΐ]ύ tihoXo- 
 λατ^Ηΐς γινισθαι FG li. llG-22 g {effici aut efficiamini) arm. — kuOojq και D' al. — rirfi,• 
 
 saw in the rock and what we see in it : they 
 drank from it and knew not its dignity : but) 
 the rock was Christ.' — In these words 
 there appear to be three alluisious : (1) to 
 the ideas of the Jeivs themselves : so the 
 Targum on Isa. xvi. 1 : " Afferent dona 
 Messise Israelitarura, qui robustus erit, 
 propterea quod in deserto fuit rupes ec- 
 CLESiA ZioNis :' SO also in Wisd. x. 15 ff., 
 the σοφία θίυν (see note on Jolin i. 1 ) is said 
 to have been present in Moses, to have led 
 them through the wilderness, &c. That the 
 Messiah, the Angel of the Covenant, 
 was present with tlie church of the Fathers, 
 and that His upholding power was mani- 
 fested in miraculous interferences for their 
 welfare, was a truth acknowledged no less 
 by the Jew than by the Christian. (2) To 
 the frequent use of this appellation, a Rock, 
 for the God of Israel. See, inter alia, Deut. 
 xxxii. 4. 15. 18. 30, 31. 37- 1 Sam. ii. 2. 
 2 Sam. xxii. 2, and passim ; xxiii. 3, &c. 
 Psalms passim, and especially Ixxviii. 20, 
 compared with ver. 35 : see also Rom. ix. 
 33. I Pet. ii. 8. Hence it became more 
 natural to apply the term directly to Christ, 
 as the ever-present God of Israel. (3) To 
 the sacramental import of the water which 
 flowed from the rock, wliich is the point 
 here immediately in the Ap.'s mind. As 
 well in sacramental import as in upholding 
 physical agency, that rock was Chi'ist. The 
 miraculous (spiritual) food was (sacramen- 
 tally) the flesh of Christ : tlie miraculous 
 (spiritual) drink was the blood of Christ : 
 so that the Jews' miraculous supplies of 
 food and drink were sacrameatally signifi- 
 cant of the Body and Blood of Christ, in 
 kind analogous to the two great parts of the 
 Christian Supper of the Lord. — In the con- 
 tents ])refixcd to the chapters in the E. V., 
 we read as tlie im{)ort of these verses, " The 
 sacraments of the Jews are types of ours," 
 which tliough perha|)S correctly meant, is 
 liable to be erroneously understood ; inas- 
 much as no sacramental ordinance can be 
 a type of another, but all alike, though in 
 different degrees of approximation, and by 
 different representations, types of Him, 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 who is the fountain of all grace. Tlie dif- 
 ference between their case and ours, is gene- 
 rally, that they were unconscious of the 
 sacramental import, whereas we are con- 
 scious of it : "they knew not that I healed 
 them," IIos. xi. 3: and in this particular 
 case, that Christ has come to us " not by 
 water only, but by water and blood," I John 
 V. 6 : His Death having invested our sa- 
 cramental ordinance with another and more 
 deeply significant character. To enter more 
 minutely into the import of the words, ' the 
 rock was Christ,' would be waste of time 
 and labour. The above reasons abundantly 
 justify the assertion, without either pressing 
 the verb ηι• beyond its ordinary acceptation, 
 or presuming to fix on the Ap. a definite- 
 ness of meaning which his argument does 
 not require. See in Meyer's note an ex- 
 ample of the ])roceeding which I blame. 
 5.] ' But not with the greater part of 
 them (in fact with Joshua and Caleb only) 
 was God pleased.' κατ£στρ. γαρ . . .] 
 The very words of the LXX, see ref. 
 6.] ' Now (ii transitional ; the contrast 
 being, between the events themselves, 
 and their application to us) these things 
 happened as figures (not ' types ' as we 
 now use the word, meaning by type and 
 antitype, the material representation, and 
 the ultimate spiritual reality, — hut figures, 
 as one imperfect ceremonial polity may 
 figure forth a higher spiritual polity, but 
 still this latter may not itself be the ulti- 
 mate antitype) of US (the spiritual Israel as 
 distinguished from the literal), — in order 
 that we might not he (God's purpose in 
 the τντΓοι : of course an ulterior purpose, 
 for they had their own immediate purpose 
 as regards the literal Israel) lusters after 
 evil things {generally : no special reference 
 yet to the Corinthian feasters, as Grot, sup- 
 poses. So Theophyl. rightly : καθολικώς 
 τηρΐ ττάσηι: κακίας Afyti, tnnot) κα'ι ττααα 
 κακία tS, ίτηθιιμίας. (Ιτα και κατ' ίίδυς 
 τιΟησι τάς κακίας. Simly Chrys.) as they 
 also (και, i. e. supposing us to belike them) 
 lusted. '^The constr. {ταίιτα . . tytvifii}- 
 σt(^'jmay be a verb substantive attracted into
 
 5—9. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 525 
 
 yiypoKTai ίΐ,κανισίν ο Λάος waysw και πΐίΐν, και αϊ'- gExoD.xxxu. 
 
 / i 'y a '^^ k ' Λ ' 1 "• >"trans•. 
 
 Εστησαν παιί,ίΐν. μηύί ποξ)νίυωμΗ>, καϋως τινίς αυ- ""ί^' ''•' 
 
 -k»' >'' • -f/ » -h M.,tt'. ix. !l 
 
 T(ov ΐτΓορνίυσαν και ίττεσαν ty μια -ημίοα ίΐκοσιτοίΐς ai.fr. 
 
 ν /CV 9 5.\ 1 • /y ν ' / Λ ' i here only. I.e. 
 
 ^^(Λιαοες. μηοε ίκπίψαί,ωμίν τον κνριυν, Καϋως τινίς ^^2^κί'^Μ 
 
 νί. 5. 1 Chriiu. Jer. xssviii.4. Horn Od. viii. 2π1. k ch. vi. 18 reff. Num. χχτ. 1— 9. 
 
 1 Malt. iv. 7. Luke iv. 12. x. 25 only. Ps. Ixxviii. 18. 
 
 (aft Ttv. ins {ξ A vss) αντων, ωςπιρ om FG g. — rec ως ytyo. {corrn to more i/snnl), 
 with CD^K &c Oec : txt ABD'(E.')J all Chr fhdrt DaraThl :' καθ,^ς ως 17 : ωςη 91.— 
 τον φη•/(η> 48. 72. — πί!!» D'FG. — ανέστη FG. — 8. εκττορνίνωμίν D'FG. — ίζ,ίπορνιυσαν 
 D'EFG 67' al Chr,. — rec nrtaov (corrn, as usual : Meyer supposes -σαν to have been 
 occasioned by -tvaav preceding. This might have been so, had the present been ike 
 only case), with D^JK &c Chr Thl Oec : t.xt ABCD'EFG 17. 2«. 37. 71. 03. IIG Chr 
 (Mtt's msj) Thdrt Dam. — ev om BD'FG (it ν al lat-ff) : tri 48. — (ΐκοσι ησσαρες 37. 
 73 tol (al-latt) syr (f iir. τρ. marg) arm : ilk. cvo icth. — 9. εκπειpaσoJμ(v FG. — rec for 
 Ki'pioi', χβίστον {see note), with DEFGJK most mss it ν s^rr copt (ed) sah al Thdrt 
 Marcion (Epiph says: ό Ct Μηρκίων c'lvri του κύριον χριστον εποιησεν) Chr (h 1) Oec 
 Thl Iren (or Iren-cit) Aug Pel Amb Ambrst : θεον A 2 "al Bed : txt BC I7. 31. 46. 73. 
 80. 109 copt (ms) syr (marg) aeth arm {χν marg) Epiph (see below) Chrj Thdrt Dam 
 Sedul Cassiod. — rec aft καθώς ins και {as more iisiial : και may have been omd to con- 
 form to ver 8 : but MSS authority is very decisive), with D'EJK &c Syr Chr Thdrt al : 
 
 probably set down here from memory. The 
 subtilties of comm.entators in order to 
 escape the inference, are discreditable alike 
 to themselves and the cause of sacred 
 Truth. Of the principal ancient comm., 
 Chrysostom and Theophyl. do not notice 
 t!ie discrepancy : Oecum. notices it, and says 
 that some ancient copies read είκοσιτέσ- 
 σαρας here, but passes it without comment. 
 — Although the sin of Baal-peor was strictly 
 speaking idolatry, yet the form which it 
 exhibited was that of fornication, as inci- 
 dent to idolatrous feasting, see Numb. xxv. 
 1, 2. Thus it becomes even more directly 
 applicable to the case of the Corr. 
 9.] €κ•7Γ€ΐρ.—' tempt beyond endurance,' 
 ' tempt thoroughly.' Simly ί^αρνε'ιαβαι, 
 ' to persist in denying,' al., as Suidas, ή γαρ 
 l| πρόΡεσις, εττίτασιν ίτ/λοϊ. See Musgr. 
 on Eurip. Iph. Taur. 249, and cf. ίκ- 
 π\{]ρόω, Acts xiii. 32. So also in Latin, 
 'oro' and ' exoro,' &c. τον Kijpiov] 
 
 There may be two views taken of the in- 
 ternal evidence concerning the reading 
 here. On the one hand it may be said 
 that χριστόν being the original reading, it 
 was variously altered to ici'ipioi• or θεόν by 
 those who found a difficulty in supposing 
 (hat the Jews of old tempted Christ, or 
 even by those who wished to obliterate this 
 assertion of His prse-existcnre : and so 
 De Wette, al. On the other it may be 
 said, that κνριον being the original, it was 
 variously explained in the margin γριστόΐ' 
 and θίόν, as is often the case : and so 
 Meyer. On comparing these, it seems to 
 me that the latter alternative is the more 
 probable. The inference that τίνες αυτών 
 έπ^ίpnσav requires τον χριστόν as an 
 object, is not a necessary one, and hardly 
 likely to have produced the alteration, 
 
 the plur. (or sing.) by the predicate, — one 
 often found : so Herod, i. 93, )'; μεν ττερίοδος, 
 
 ιίσι στίιίιυι εξ ; and ii. 15, at θϊΊβαι 
 
 Αίγυπτος εκαΧίετο : so in Latin, Ter. Andr. 
 iii. 3. 2.3, ' Amantium iree amoris integratio 
 est :' see many other exx. in Kiihner, 
 § 429 : or, which is perhaps better, as in 
 ver. 11, where see note. — The rendering, 
 ' Now ill these things they were figures of 
 us' (1 know not by whom suggested, but I 
 find it in Dr. Peile's notes on the Epistles), 
 is inconsistent both with the arrangement 
 of the words, — in which ταντα has the pri- 
 mary emphasis, — and with ίγενηθησαν, 
 which should be ήσαν. 7.] Now, the 
 
 special instances of warning follow, coupled 
 to the general by μηδΕ in this negative 
 sentence, as so often by και in an affirm- 
 ative one. Notice, that all four of these 
 were brought about by the ΐπιθνμείν 
 κακών, not distinct from it. — This instance 
 is singularly appropriate. The Israelites 
 are recorded to have sat down and eaten 
 and drunken at the idol feast of the golden 
 calf in Horeb : the very temptation to 
 which the Corr. were too apt to yield. And 
 as the Isrr. were actually idolaters, doing 
 this as an act of worship to the image : so 
 the Corr. were in danger of becoming such, 
 and the Ap. therefore puts the case in the 
 strongest way, ' neither be ye idolaters.' 
 τοίζίΐν, ΙΓΠϊ:, ' choreas agere,' ' saltare ac- 
 cinentibustympanisvelcantoribus :' see reff., 
 where the same word occurs in each place in 
 the Heb. The dance was an accompaniment 
 of the idol feast : see Hor. ii. 12. 19 : ' Quam 
 nee ferre pedem dcdecuit choris .... sacro 
 Dianse Celebris die.' 8.] Another pro- 
 
 minent point in the sins of the Cor. church. 
 e'lKoaiTpcis χ•] The number was 
 twenty-four thousand, Num. xxv. 9, and is
 
 yie 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους a. 
 
 χ. 
 
 '^^]^l*^}^\^^-r^ αυτών "'εττειροσαν και υπο των Ο0εωυ " αττωλονΓΟ. abcd 
 
 al. EX'D. 
 xvii. :.'. 
 η Num. xxi. β. 
 
 10 5'^ ο 'y η ι ' - ο » ' \ 
 
 μηοε "yo-yywc,f~f , καυως τΐλ'ίς αντωι» tyoyyuaav και 
 
 η NUM. XXI. ι>. » (χ ' f ν - υ 'Λ Λ - 11 - λ« / 
 
 ο*|«^'^^^^|ΐ'• οττωΛοιτο υττυ του ' ολυορίντον. ταντα οε παίτα 
 
 43ΐ"'ι!'νΗ.'32 ^ τυτΓίκως '' σννφαινον εκεύ'οις, εγούψη δε " πους ' νου- 
 
 oiily. EXOD. η ι ' ~ ' Α Ν U /Λ - U ' ' ν / 
 
 xTi.7(ai-x). ϋ£(7/αι» tyK.j]' ίΐς ους τα τέλη των αιώνων καττιντηκίν. 
 
 ρ hrre only t• .^r j = = ι ι 
 
 ^ΓΓ^ΛυΜ. ωςτε ο " δο\ωί' ^ εστόνα», ^ βλεττετω /ιπ] ^ ττε'σι;. ^^ ' π(ΐ- 
 
 xiv. 2ί». \ r - ' a ''λ , ' "■ b • Λ ' . C ■» 
 
 nYreoniy. ρασμος υμάς ουκ ίίληφίν ει μη ανυρωπινος πιστός 
 
 Luke χ.\ίν 11. Johuxix. 31. Rev i. 19. .« = ch. vii. 35. xii. 7 al. t Epli. τι 4. Tit. iii. 10 only t. 
 
 Wi.til. xvi t). u here only. See Matt. xiii. 3!). Heb. is. £R. ν Acts xxvi. 7 reft. ch. xiv. :>Γ>. 
 
 w ch. lii. 18 reff. χ = Acts xiii. 40 reff. y Rom. xiv. 4 reff. ζ Acts xx. IH. Luke 
 
 xxiii. -.'8 al. Deut. iv. 34. a = Luke v. 26. vii. 16. Exod. xv. Id. b Acts .wii. 2.i refl. 
 c = oil. i. y refl". 
 
 txt ABCDiPG all vss Epiph al Ir all.— ουΓων om 2. 122: αντον 73 Chr (somet).— 
 ίζεττίΐρασαν CD'EFG all. — απωλλνρτο A(appy)B. — 10. γογγνζωμιν DEFG 17 J e copt 
 Clir^, (not h 1) Aug,. — rec καθώς και (see above), with JK &c : txt ΑΒ(κίΐθα7Γ{(ΐ 
 Β !(3)CDEFG all vss Chr-mss gr-lat-ff.— ίγογγυ^ο»/ 238. — αττωλλννΓο Α. — ολίθρίυτου 
 D' : ολίθρου FG. — 11. πάντα om (/ο correspond wi/h ver G : παντ. Se ταυ. is n'l real 
 variation, for we ahvai/s find ταντα πάντα and πάντα ταντα interchanged in the MS S) 
 AB 17 sail ilarcion (in Epiph and Tert) Orig, Dial Hipp Cyr alex (oft) Cyr-jeruSj Oros, 
 Pac: ins {παντ. S. τ. DEFG 3. -16. 57. 70 g [seth] Orig, Chr Aug, Vig) CDEFGJK vss 
 Thdrt Oec Thl Iren Jer al : πα^'τα Ct Iren, Hil. — rec τύποι {corrn to coi'respond with 
 ver C), with DEFGJ most mss copt sah syr al (in exemplum nostrum Syr) Thdrtj (h 1 
 expressly: αντί τυν ω% τύποι., and elsw expl ταντα τυπικώς ίκηνοις σνΐ'(βη) Thl 
 (h 1) Oec Dial (τύπος) : txt ABCK 10. 17. 2 3. 31 . 4ϋ 7. 57. 71-3. «0. 115-17 syr (marg) 
 al it V (infgiira or simly) Iren (or Iren-cit) lat-tf Marcion (in Epiph) Origj Hipp Mac 
 Cyr alex (oft) C)t jeruSj Chr all. — συνφαινιν (corrn : see note) BCK al (the same 
 which have τυπικώς) Marcion (in Epiph) Origj Dia!, Hipp Cyr-jerus, Chr (Pitt's ms.,) : 
 tyiyvtro Mac: tyivtTO Cyr-jerus, : (ytvovru sah: txt ADEFGJ most mss Dial, Chr 
 Thdrtj all. — το ήλος sah. — τον αιώνος 74. — rec κατηντηπίν (altern of the perf into 
 the aor, so conunon with the copyists), with ACD^E-JK &c Origj Chr Thdrt al : txt 
 BD'E'FG39. 40 Orig, Bas, Cyrj. — 12. ωςτί αδιλφηι !iO. — 13. for οκκ ίίληφ.,ου καταλ,ιβη 
 FG e g Orig-int lat-fl". — for πιστός, δυνατός 44. 108 slav (exc mod) Procop. — for ουκ 
 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 closely connected as τ. χα. is with the verb 
 in the first person. I have therefore with 
 Meyer adopted the reading κύμων. — The 
 tentptiny of the Lord was, — as on the other 
 occasions alluded to Numb. xiv. 22, where 
 it is said that they tempted God ten times, — 
 the daring Him, in trying His patience by 
 rebellious condiict and sin. Cf. the similar 
 use of πίΐυάΖ,ω Acts v. 9; xv. 10. And he 
 warns the Corr., that they should not in 
 like manner provoke God by their sins and 
 their partaking with idols. Chrys., Theo- 
 phyl., and Oec. understand the temptation 
 of God to be the seeking for signs : Theo- 
 doret, to be in danger arising from 
 those who spoke with different tongues. 
 iπ^ipaζnv Ci κ. o'l ΓοΤς διαφϋροις κ(χρ}]- 
 μίνοι ■γΧώτταις, κατά ψιΧοτιμιαν μά\- 
 λο»' η χρίίαν ταύτας ίπ' ίκκΧι^σίας ττρος- 
 (Ρΐηηντίς. νττο των όψεων, ' by the 
 
 (well known) serpents.' The art. is so often 
 omitted after a preposition, that wherever 
 it is expressed, we may be sure there was 
 a reason for it. 10.] γογγνζετί has 
 
 been by Estius, Grot., al., and De Wette, 
 understood of murmuring against their 
 teachers, as the Israelites against Moses 
 and Aaron, Num. xiv. 2; xvi. 41. But 
 
 not to mention that this was in fact nmr- 
 muring against God, such a reference 
 would require something more specific 
 than the mere word yoyyy^trf. The 
 warning is substantially the same as the 
 last, but regards more the spirit, and its 
 index the tongue. Theophyl. : αίνίττΐται 
 if αύτυνς κα'ι cia τούτον, 'ότι tv τν7ς 
 πιιρασμοίς ουκ ϊφιρον γα'ναίως, άλλ' 
 ίγ'Ίγγνζον λίγοντις, πότ( ηζ(ΐ τά αγαθά, 
 καϊ ϊως πότε α'ι κακώσίΐς ; simly Chrys. 
 — The destruction referred to must be that 
 related Num. xvi. 41 if. when the pesti- 
 lence (which though it is not so specified 
 there, was administered on another occa- 
 sion by a destroying angel, 2 Sam. xxiv. 
 IC, 17, see also Exod. xii. 23) took off 
 ] 4,700 of the people. The punishment of 
 the unbelieving congregation in Num. xiv., 
 to which this is commonly referred, does 
 not seem to answer to the expression 
 άπώλοντυ νπο τ. ύλοθριντοΰ, nor to the 
 τινις, seeing that all except Joshua and 
 Caleb were involved in it. 11.] 
 
 τυτΓΐκώς, see var. readd., ' by way of 
 figure.' Meyer cites from the Rabbis, 
 ' Quidquid evenit patribus, signum tiliis.' 
 — The plural συνίβαινον expresses the
 
 10 -16. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 )27 
 
 δε ο Οίος, υς ουκ ictasi νμας '^ πειρησθηναι '''' ύπίο odver. 9. 
 
 vvaaUi, οΛΛο Troojfffi συν τω πίΐ()ασμω και την "^ £f - e Ηε'ίΓ^ϋί''?"' 
 ρπσπ' την dvvaaUai " vireviyKiiu. ^ οιυπΐο, α-νηπητοι ϋ i7, νϋί. 
 
 k ' ' '' - I •<> Λ Λ ' 1»; ' , 8. xi. 14. 
 
 μου, (pivyire απο της ίώωλολατρίΐας. '^ '" ωο " φρονι- heKfi.Ur. 
 
 μοις Atyio' κρινατί υμάς ο φημι. 
 
 16 ο 
 
 •vXoyu 
 
 5υλο 
 
 ΤΟ ΤΓοτηηιοΐ' της ^''^ybm. 
 
 f Mark iv. 3. 
 
 yutς ο ^ ευΛογουμίν, ouyt κοίΐ'ωιηα του αίματος Acisxviu 
 
 ' '^ 1(1. xxri. IS. 
 
 Rom.xi 8. Ps.cxlix. 7, 9. g 2 Tim. iii. 11. 1 Pet. ii. 1» only Jobii. HI. Proc. vi. 33. 
 
 li ch. viii. 13relt'. i Acts xv. S.") reff. k cli. vi. 18 rrfl'. 1 Cul. v. 2u. Cul. ui. 5. 1 Pet. iv. 3 luily t. 
 
 m = Acts xvii 22. 2 C"r. vi. 13. η Matt. vii. 24 al. Prov. xiv. 17. ο attr.. Matt. xxi. IJ at. 
 
 . Gal. iii. 14. James iii. lu. Rev. v. 12, 13. vii. 12. q Matt. xxvi. 2("> rcfl. Mark x. 10. Luke 
 
 ix. 16. 
 
 ch. i. 9 refl'. 
 
 ίασβι, ovK αψησιι DEFG. — παρασθηι/. νμας Β. — oi' οννασθί FG 123- d g. — eig το Svv. 
 93. — rec bef vmityK. ins ημης (suiiplcmentary add/,), with D^(aft υ7Γ.)Κ &c Tlidrt^ 
 Dam Oec Till (ed) : txt ABCD'EFGJ I7. 32. W-"}. 52. V,V. 73. 80 it ν sah syrr Mac^ 
 Bas^, Cyr (oft) Chr (comm and Matt's mss) Thdrt' Thl. — 14. Cio αίίλφηι μ^ν αγαπητοί 
 38. 48. 72 al : ciowtp a5. μου 119 seth Chr Thl: ha τοντυ ουν sah. — βιδωλυλατριας 
 CD'FG &c: t.xt AB.'D^E.^JK &o. — 15. ψοοημοις νμ,ν DE vss.— for κοιν. νμ. υ φημι, 
 Kpii'aTt ovr, φημι D'. — K-pii'trt F. — 16. for (v\., ίνχαριστιας FG 71• 80. 213. — ηνλο- 
 
 jilurality of events separately happening : 
 the singular ί-γράφη, their union in the 
 common record of Scripture. Similarly 
 2 Pet. iii. 10, στοιχίϊα λυθήσονται . , . . τά 
 iv alny ίργα κατακαήσίται. See Winer, 
 § 47. 3. b.— Se conveys a slight opposition 
 to (τυΐ'ίβα(ΐ'ο)' ίκίίΐ'οις. τα τέλη τ. 
 
 αΙών.] zzr 1) ιτυιτίλίΐη τον ηι'ώί'ος of Matt, 
 xiii. 39 : ' the ends of the ages ' of this 
 world's life time. So Chrys. : oi'Ctv άλλο 
 Xtyu η OTt ίφί-στηκί λοιπόν ro ζικαατή- 
 ριον το φοβίρόΐ'. — The form ΐ'ονθεσία 
 belongs to later Greek. Tlie classical word 
 is νυνϋίτησις or νουθίτία : see Lobeck on 
 Phrynichus, p. 512. κατήντ.] 'have 
 
 reached.' The ages are treated as occupy- 
 ing space, and their e.\tent as just coincident 
 with our own time. See a similar figure 
 in the last of the reff. 12.] Ιστάναι, 
 
 viz. in his place as a membe?• of Cht-ist's 
 church, to be recognized by Him at His 
 coming for one of His. To such an one 
 the example of the Israelites is a warning 
 to take heed that he fall not, as they did 
 from their place in God's church. 
 13.] There are two ways of understanding 
 the former part of this verse. Chrys., 
 Theophyl., Grot., Est., Bengel, Olsh., De 
 Wette, al., take it as a continnadon, and 
 uryiiig of the warning of the rer. pre- 
 ceding, by the consideration that no tempta- 
 tion had yet befallen them but such as w^as 
 άίΌρώτΓΐΐ'ος•, ^vithin the power of human 
 endurance ,•' but ' major tentatio imminet,' 
 Beng. : — while Calvin, al., and Meyer regard 
 it as a consolation, tending to shew them 
 that /3λ{ TTS-oj μη TTtny is within the limits 
 of their jiower, seeing that their temptation 
 to sin was nothing extraordinary or unheard 
 of, but only ' according to man :' and fhey 
 might trust to (iod's loving care, that no 
 temptation should ever befall them which 
 should surpass their power to resist. This 
 
 latter seems to me beyond doubt the correct 
 view. For (1) in the jiarallel which they 
 bring for the former sense, Heb. xii. 4, 
 ονττω is distinctly expressed, — and would 
 have been here also, had it been intended. 
 Besides, in that case, οϋττω, as having the 
 primary emphasis, would have been pre- 
 faced, as in Heb. xiii. 4: ονπω παρασμος 
 
 νμας ΰληφίν Then again (2) this 
 
 restricts the sense of πειρασμός to persecu- 
 tion, which it here does not mean, but 
 solicitation to sin, in accordance with the 
 whole context. εΐληφίν — ' has taken 
 
 you,' not ϊλαβίΐ', 'took you,' shews that the 
 temptation was still soliciting them. 
 άνθρώτΓίνος] not, as Piscator, al., and 
 Olsh., originating with man, as opposed to 
 other temptations originating with the devil, 
 or even with God's Providence : but, as 
 Chrys. : Κνμμετηος, — ojiposed to υπέρ ο δύ- 
 j/aaff, 'adapted to man.' ττισ-τός] He 
 
 has entered into a covenant with you by call- 
 ing you : if He suffered temptation beyond 
 your power to overcome you. He would be 
 violating that covenant. Comp. 1 Thess. 
 V. 24, ττιστΰς ϋ καλών νμας, ος και ποιίισα. 
 OS = on οντος. ττοιησει . . . και 
 
 την εκβ.] Then God makes the temptation 
 too : arranges it in His Providence, and in 
 His mercy will ever set open a door for 
 escape. την έ'κβ.] ' the escape,' i. e. 
 
 which belongs to the particular tempta- 
 tion : την απαλλαγή}' του παμασμον, 
 Theophyl. τοΰ διίν.] ' In order that 
 
 you may be able to bear (it) :' Obs., not, 
 'will rcrnove the temptation:' but, 'will 
 make an escape simultaneously with the 
 temptation, to encourage you to bear up 
 against it.^ 14.] Conclusion from the 
 
 above learning examples: idolatry is hy 
 ALL MEANS TO DK SHlfN.NED; not tam- 
 pered with, hut fed from. φεύγετε 
 άτΓο ('fugiendo discedite a,' Meyer) ex-
 
 528 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους Α. 
 
 Χ. 
 
 sActsii.46 TQy Λ/ρίστου ΐστιν ; ° τον αοτον uu ^ κ\ωμΐν, ον\ι '' κοι- abcd 
 
 17 " 
 
 J^FG 
 
 νωΐ'ίπ του σώματος του -χριστού ίστιν', ' οτι εις άρτος, JK 
 
 ■γοχφεν D'. — βστιν aft κοινωνία (/ranspmm to avoid the harsknexs of eariv at the end) 
 ΛΒ copt syr Cyr, Aug Bed (snnc/. ent Chrinti Iren) : txt CDEFG.TK &c. — τον αιμ. om 
 213: below, τουσωμ. ora 12;{'. 213: τον αιμ. (i!). — ο άρτος Chr Thdrt. — (στιν (2nd) aft 
 κοινωί'ΐα A copt Syr Cyr Aus? Bed (corrti : see above) : txt B(e sil)CDEFGJK &c. — for 
 
 Ainbr 
 
 ισΓου (2iid), κυρίου D'EFG 21 it ν gotli Dial ? Tlulrt Aug Ambrst Fulg ? (goth Thdrt 
 nbrst syr-marg κιφιου before) : αντου 30. — 17. for ί<ς (ΐρτος, sicut units ])anis est, 
 
 pressing even more strongly than the accus, 
 with ψίύγω, the entire avoidance. This 
 vcr. of itself would by inference forbid the 
 Corr. having any share in the idol feasts : 
 but he proceeds to ground such prohibition 
 on further special considerations. 
 15 — 22.] By the analogy of the Christian 
 jmrticipaiion in the Lord's Supper, and 
 the Jewish participation in the feasts after 
 sacrifices, joined to the fact that the hea- 
 thens sacrifice to devils, he shews that the 
 partaker in the idol feast is a partaker 
 ΛΥίτΗ DEVILS ; which none can be, and yet 
 be a Christian. 15.] An appeal to 
 
 their own sense of what is congruous and 
 possible, — as introducing what is to follow. 
 cos expresses an assumption on the 
 Ap.'s part, that they are φρόνιμοι. De 
 W. compares Plut. Alcib. i. 104, ώς άκου- 
 σομίνψ λίγω. — λε'γω and ψημ.ί both refer 
 to what follows, ν v. 10 — 21. i^eis is 
 emphatic — ' be ye the judges of what I 
 am saying.' 16.] The analogy of 
 
 tlie Lord's Supper, which, in both its 
 jiarts, is a participation in Christ. The 
 stress throughout to ver. 20, is on κοινω- 
 νία, and κοινωνοί. το ττοτήριον is 
 tlie accus., by attr. corresponding to τον 
 αρτον. το IT. τή5 εϋλ.] i. e. δ ίΰλο- 
 youvTtQ κατασκίυάζομιν (Oec), as ex- 
 plained immediately by ο ίΐΊλογοΓμίν, — 
 ' over which we speak a blessing,' the 
 Christian form of the Jewish Π3"ΐ? Di3, the 
 cup in the Passover over which thanks 
 were offered after the feast, — in blessing of 
 whicti cvp, our Lord instituted this part of 
 the ordinance: see Lightfoot in 1., and 
 note on the history in Matt. xxvi. The 
 rendering of Olsh., al., the cup irhich 
 brings a blessing, is wrong, as being against 
 this analogy. δ ίϋλογοΰμ.€ν] ' whicli 
 we bless,' i. e. consecrate with a prayer of 
 thanksgiving : not, as Erasmus, Beza, 
 ' quod cum gratiaram actione sumiinns ' 
 (τΓίρί ού ίΰχαριστοϋμο). Observe, the 
 first person plural is the same throiigliont : 
 the blessing of the cup, and the breaking of 
 the bread, the acts of consecration, were 
 not the acts of the minister, as by any 
 authority peculiar to liimself but only as 
 the representative of the o'l ττάντις, the 
 whole Christian congregation (and so even 
 Estius,but evading the legitimate inference.) 
 
 The figment of sacerdotal consecration of the 
 elements by transmitted power, is as alien 
 from the apostolic writings as it is from the 
 spirit of the Gospel. κοινωνία] ' the 
 
 participation (i. e. that whereby the act of 
 partici])ation takes place) of the blood of 
 Christ ■?' — The strong literal sense must 
 here be held fast, as constituting the very 
 kernel of the Ap.'s argument. The wine 
 is the Blood, the bread is the Body, of 
 Christ. (In what sense the Blood and the 
 Body, does not belong to the present argu- 
 ment.) We receive into us, make by assi- 
 milation parts of ourselves, that wine, that 
 bread : we become therefore, by participa- 
 tion of that Bread, one Bread, i. e. one 
 Body : hence the close and literal ])artici- 
 pation in and with Christ. If we are to 
 render this ΐστιν, represents or symbolizes, 
 the argument is made void. On the other 
 hand it is painful to allude to, though ne- 
 cessary to reprobate, the caricature of this 
 real union with Christ which is found in 
 the gross materialism of transubstantiation. 
 See further on ch. xi. 20, 27- ov 
 
 κλώμ£ν] probably already the breaking of 
 the bread in the communion was part of 
 the act of consecration, and done after the 
 example of our Lord in its institution. 
 See ch. xi. 24. Acts ii. 42 ; xx. 7• 1 1 • For 
 the rest, see above. 17.] ' For we, the 
 
 (assembled) many, are one bread (by the 
 assimilation of that one bread partaken : not 
 'one loaf), one Body (by the κοινωνία of 
 the Body of Christ, of which that bread is 
 the vehicle) : for the whole of us partake 
 of that one bread.' Meyer and De Wette 
 and many other Comm. take ιΐς άρτος 
 alone, ' there is one bread ;' and impugn 
 the interp. given above by saying that it is 
 evidently not so, because the following 
 clause uses άρτος in its literal sense. But 
 it is for that very reason, that I adhere to 
 the interp. given. By partaking of that 
 bread, we become, not figuratively but lite- 
 rally, one bread: it passes into the sub- 
 stance of our bodies, and there is in every 
 one who partakes, a portion of himself 
 which is that bread. The bread which 
 was before, is noiv ήμέϊς. But that loaf, 
 broken and blessed, is the medium of icot- 
 νων'ια of the Body of Christ ; we then, 
 being that one bread, are one Body ; for
 
 17—19. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 )29 
 
 εν σώμα 
 
 άρτου /Λετ£χομ£ΐ' 
 
 οι τΓοΛΛοι ίσμιν οι yap τταιτες ίκ του εΐ'ος t Rom.v. is 
 " βλε'τΓίτε τον'Ισραιιλ ''/cora σάοκα* "Ι','^ j^' fl" 
 ούχ οι ίσθίοντίς τάς Θυσίας, ^κοινωνοί του ^Θυσιαστηρίου vcii/ix lureff. 
 
 ' ' . 19 ' "^ . " a •?> Λ Ό ' b ' » *' " "'έί'•,'-^":, 
 
 ίίσιν , τι OVU φημι ; οτι ίΐοωΛουυτον τι ίστιν, η οτι χκο',η I'srefr 
 
 ν Malt, xsiii. 30 al. Isa i. 23. zch.ix. 13. Rom. xi. 3 al. a cU. viii. 1. 
 
 b = Acts T. 36. ch. iii. 7. Gal. ii. 6. vi.3, 15. Dcmostli. 582. 27. 
 
 iin Syr arr seth. — for ττολλ, τταντίς ν sah aeth. — aft apron, ins και τον ενός (om ίνος 
 DE) ποτηριού DEFG it v-sixt dem harl tol (not am) Ambrst Pel Bed. — 18. rec ονχι 
 (corrn), with B(e sil)D'EJK &c Thdrt al: txt ACD'FG al Chr.—taGouTfc D.— for 
 ϋνσιαστ., μυστηηιον 238. — 19. aft φημι, ins μη Xsy-jj (Scholz : owic tiwojv, Grsb) sah : 
 ονχ Chr-ms. — rec (ΐδωλον bef etSwXoUvTov {adopted as the tnost natural order, on the 
 7-e-insertion of the omitted clause : see below), with JK &c syrr goth al Chr Thdrt al : 
 ιδωλοθντοί' twice FG g : from τι ΐστη> to τι εστίν om AC Epiph : txt BC-DE 31-7. 46. 
 73. 137 V d e (g) copt sah seth Aug Ambrst Pel Bed: om on tiOuAoO. τι ta. η 17• 71 
 (Tert) Aug-cit: for τι εστίν (2ce), εστίν τι D'EFG it v. — for j; on, ονχ οτι DEFG it 
 (Tert) Augi (mss) Ambst (so also for the 1st on, ουχ οτι) Chr (Mtt's and Montfaucon's 
 
 we all partake of that one bread. So that 
 there is no logical invei-sion, and no arguing 
 (Meyer) from the effect to the cause. The 
 argument is a very simple and direct one ; 
 — the bread is the Body of Christ; — we 
 partake of the bread : therefore we partake 
 of the Body of Christ. Of these propp., 
 the conclusion is implied in the form of a 
 question in ver. 16: the minor stated in 
 the latter clause of ver. 17 ; its connexion 
 with the major producing the conclusion 
 given in the former clause οτι .... ίσμεν. 
 The major itself, τοΰτό ίστιν το σωμά μου, 
 is suppressed, as axiomatic. The above 
 remarks shew also the untenableness of the 
 rendering of Calv., Bez., Bengel, al., — 
 " because there is one bread (antecedent), 
 we being many are one body " (conse- 
 quent) : for this would parenthesize ver. 
 17, and take it altogether out of the argu- 
 ment, giving it a sense which as occurring 
 here, would be vapid — " obiter hoc dicit, 
 ut intelligant Corinthii, externa quoque 
 professione colendam esse illam unitatem 
 quae nobis est cum Christo," Calv. — Meyer 
 objects to rendering εκ τον ενός άρτου 
 μετ'εχομεν, we partake of that one bread: 
 saying rightly that μετέχω is always found 
 with a gen. or an ace, never with εκ. He 
 would render, /or ive all, by means of that 
 one bread, partake (viz. in the one Body : 
 so μετεχ. is absoL, ver. 30). This is ex- 
 ceedingly harsh, besides as it seems to me 
 (see above) confusing the whole argument : 
 and we may safely say would not have 
 been thus expressed by the Αρ., leaving the 
 most important words to be supphed from 
 the context, — but would have been oi yap 
 'πάΐ'τες εν τ<μ ivi άυτψ τον ενός σώματος 
 μετ'εχομεν. The usage of tic, too, would, 
 though perhaps barely allowable, be very 
 harsh, especially when it is remembered 
 that the Οϋτος is not (by the hyp.) the 
 ultimate, but only the mediate object of 
 participation. ISone of the examples given 
 Vol. II. 
 
 in Bernhardy, Syntax, p. 230, which Mey. 
 quotes for his sense of έκ, seem to justify 
 it. They apply mostly to the subjective 
 source, ΐκ ττξιοιοίας, or the circumstances 
 originating, ώς ίκ τούτων, — not to the 
 medial instrument, which it appears to me 
 would require Cici. 18.] Another ex- 
 
 ample of κοινωνία, from the Jewish feasts 
 after sacrifice. τ. Ίσρ. κατά σ-άρκα 
 
 ( =3 Γ. Ίσρ. τον κατίι σάρκα: so we have 
 τόϊς κυρίοις κατά σάρκα, Eph. vi. 5), ' the 
 actual material Israel,' as distinguished 
 from ό Ίσρ. κατά πνίϋμα, see Rom. ii. 29. 
 Gal. iv. 9, and ό Ίσρ. τηϋ θεοΐι, Gal. vi. 16. 
 οί Ισθ. τ. θυσ.] viz. those parts of 
 the sacrifices which were not offered ; see 
 on ch. viii. 1. — The parts to be offered are 
 specified, Levit. iii. 3 ; the practice of eat- 
 ing the remainder of the meat sanctioned 
 and regulated, ib. vii. 1.3 — 18. κοι- 
 
 νωνοί τοϋ θυσ.] ' partakers with the 
 altar ' (in a strict and peculiar sense, — the 
 altar having part of the animal, the par- 
 taker another part; and by the fact of 
 the religious consecration of the offered 
 part, this connexion becomes a religious 
 connexion. The question has been raised, 
 and with reason, why the Ap. did not say 
 Koti'twvoi τοϋ Oeov } Meyer answers, — 
 because the Jew was already in covenant 
 ivith God, and the Ap. wished to express a 
 closer connexion, brought about by the 
 sacrifice in question : — De Wette, — because 
 he was unwilling to ascribe so much to the 
 mere act of sacrifice, see Heb. x. 1 if . : and 
 to this latter view I incline, because, as De 
 W. remarks, θεοΰ would liave suited the 
 analogy better than θυσιαστηρίου, but 
 Paul avoids it, and evidently is reluctant to 
 use it. But to carry this view further, and 
 suppose with Riickert that he would not 
 concede to the Ίσρ. κατά σάρκα any κοι- 
 νωνία θεοί', is (Meyer) contradicted by 
 Rom. ix. 4, 5. Still the inference lies 
 open, to which our Saviour's saying points, 
 Μ Μ
 
 530 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 Χ. 
 
 '^ ύόω\ον 
 Θυυυσιν 
 
 C ch. τίϋ. 4 al. 
 ύ absol., Acts 
 
 xiv. \Λ. 
 
 (Exod. XKiii. 
 
 18 vat.) , .e S. ' 
 
 eDEUT. xxxii. οαιμονιων 
 
 17. Paul, here ' 
 
 and 1 Tun. 7j-tV£t»' KUl πθΤηξ)Ιθν 
 
 iv. 1 only. 
 gu.>:pp. pas- 
 sim. Acts 
 XTii. 18. 
 James ii. lit. 
 Rev. ix. -JO 
 only 
 f— Rom. xi. 9 
 efl^a. Ixv. 11. 
 fr = ch.xi. 22. 
 
 τί (.στιν \ αλλ οτι a υνουσιν 
 και ου Of ω, ου Οελω δε ΰμας '' 
 Οαι. ου δύνασθε 
 
 δα ι 
 
 7 
 
 ινίσι 
 
 όαιμονιοις 
 
 κοινωνούς των 
 
 ποτηξ)ΐον κυρίου 
 
 ιμονιων, ου δύνασθε τραπί^,ηζ 
 
 κυρίου /.ιετεχειν και τξ)απεί,ης οαιμονιων. rj ^ τταρα- 
 
 ^ιγλούιαεν τον κυριον ; μη ισχυρότεροι αυΓου εσ^ιεν ; 
 
 ΙΙαντα εςίστιν, αλλ ου πάντα συμφέρει πάντα 
 
 g Rom. χ. 19. xi. 1), 14 only. Deut. xxxii. 21. Iich.vi.l2. 
 
 mss). — 20. for αλλ on a, a St DE, aWa a FG it ν lat ff. — rec (twice) θυίΐ {gramml 
 corrn: see 6e/o)r), with JK &c Chr Thdrt al : txt ABCDEFG 1?. 31-7. 46. 71-3. 109 
 Marcion (in Epipli) Epiph Eus. — rec bef ζαιμ. ins τα ιθνη {snjiplemeniarij : occanioning 
 afterwards the alt of ^υουτιν into θυιι), with ACJ(aft ori)K &c vss Chr Thdrt al 
 Orig-int : om BDEFG d e Marcion (in Epiph) Epiph Eus Tert Augj (once e.xpressly) 
 Aug-cit (giii sacrijicant) Ambrst : δαιμοσι (}'3 : (ΐδωΧοις copt. — δαιμ. κ. ου Otw θυουσιν 
 {corrn to avoid the close recurr of θυουσιν) ABC 37• 40. 137 ar-pol Eus Orig-int Aug. — 
 δαιμονίων κοινωνούς {omg των) D'D^EFG: δαιμόνων 108': yivtaOai Β: eivai FG 
 syrr copt al. — 21. TroTtjjiiuv δαιμο}Ίον (sic) C. — 23. πάντα to wavra om 17• Ηϋ al. — 
 
 Matt, xxiii. 20, 21. The altar is God's 
 altar. 19, 20.] The inference from 
 
 the preceding analogies would naturally be, 
 that Paul was then representing the idols 
 as being in reality what the heathen sup- 
 posed them to he — and the eater of meats 
 ofTered to them, as partaking with the idol. 
 This objection he meets, — but with the 
 introduction of a new fact to their con- 
 sideration — that the things which the hea- 
 then sacrifice, they sacrifice really to devils. 
 19.] τί ουν φημι ; ' what am I then 
 assuming'?' so Xen. Anab. i. 4. 14, τΊ ουν 
 κίΚίΰω ποιησαι ; οτι €ΐδωλόθ. τί 
 
 έστιν] ' that a thing sacrificed to an 
 idol is any real thing ( so sacrificed) ? ' 
 (i. e. has any real existence as a thing 
 sacrificed? The accentuation τι ιστιν; 
 would come nearer to the sense of ch. 
 viii. 4, on οΰδΐν ίΊδωΧον tv κόσμψ, — ' that 
 there is any (such thing as an) offering to 
 an idol/' and in a matter so ambiguous 
 it is impossible to decide between the two) 
 ' or that an idol is any thing' {real? e. g. 
 that Jupiter is Jupiter in the sense of a 
 living power .') — {Not so.• — this ellipsis of 
 the negative, taken up by άλλ«, is found in 
 classical Greek : e. g. Xen. Mem. i. 2. 2, 
 ΤΓως ουν αυτός ων τοιοντος άλΧους αν 
 
 άσιβΰς ίττοίησίν ; «λλ' ίπαυσε μίν 
 
 τούτων ττοΧλυνς, άριτής ποιήσας ϊπιθυ• 
 μΰν, &C. See Hartung, Partikellehre, ii. 
 37)• ' But (I say) that the things which 
 they (i. e. the Gentiles) sacrifice, they 
 sacrifice to devils, and not to God {δαιμ., 
 not 'false-gods,' nor in the sense in which 
 it is used in the mouth of idolaters them- 
 selves. Acts xvii. 18, and Xen. Mem. i. 1. 1, 
 deities [see Stanley's note, in which this idea 
 is ingeniously combined with the Christian 
 sense given below],' — but, as always inLXX 
 and N. T. when used by worshippers of the 
 
 true God, ' devils,' ' evil spirits.' The 
 words are from Deut. (ref.), see also Ps. 
 xcv. 5 (Baruch iv. 1, θύσαντις δαιμονίυις 
 κ. οϋ 0f(p). Heathendom being under the 
 dominion of Satan (ό άρχων του ιοόσ^ου 
 τούτου), he and his angels are in fact the 
 powers honoured and worshipped by the 
 heathen, however little they may be aware 
 of it) : but (the inference being suppressed 
 ' and ye therefore by partaking in their 
 sacrifices would be partakers with devils : 
 but ') I would not have you become par- 
 takers with devils ' {των generic). 
 21.] Reason of the ού θέλω, — sententiously 
 expressed without yap. — ού SwaaOc applies 
 of course to the real spiritual participa- 
 tion of the table of the Lord so as to profit 
 by it : to moral possibihty. The ττοτήριον 
 δαιμονίων is said as corresponding to the 
 cup of which mention has been already 
 made, not as Grot., al., and De Wette 
 fancy, referring to the libation at an idol 
 feast. — τράτΓίζα is said by Pollux vi. ] 2 
 (Suicer) to be used in the sense of τα σιτία 
 τα ίττ' αυτών των τραπιζών τιθίμίνα. 
 Compare the description in Herod, iii. 18, 
 of the Ήλί'ου τράπιζα, — Polyb. iv. 35. 4, 
 ωςτί TTtpi τον βωμ'ον κ. την τράπίζαν της 
 θεον κατησφσ•/ηΐ'αι τυνς Εφόρους απαν- 
 τάς,- — and ref. Isa. — From this passage pro- 
 bably, the τράπεζα κυρίου became an ex- 
 pression current in all ages of the Christian 
 Church : see Suicer in voc. 22.] ' Or 
 
 are we provoking (is it our wish to jirovoke, 
 that He may assert His power) the Lord 
 (Christ) to jealousy (by dividing our par- 
 ticipation between Him and devils) T'^see 
 Deut. xxxii. 21, wliich evidently is before 
 the Ap.'s mind : — ' are we Stronger than 
 He (are we then such, that we can afford 
 to defy His power to punish)?' 
 23 — XI, 1.] Now that he has fully
 
 20—28. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 531 
 
 εΕίστιν, αλλ ου πάντα ^ υικο^ομπ. μη^ίΐς το εαυτού iA,tsix.3i 
 
 ί,ητίΐτω, aAAa το του εηοου. τταν το ev μακίλ- ι^ s-^^e Matt. χτϊ. 
 
 λω πωΧουμενον εσθίετε μηζΐν ° αν α κρίνον τ ες δία tj^v ''ρΜί.'ίί.Ιί. 
 
 '5. •SfilT'- ' ^ ' - ^ ^ τ Λ ' m Rum. U. 1 
 
 συνιιοησιν 'ίου κυρίου γαρ η -yi/ και το πΑΊ]οωμα ^^^^^-^ ^ι 
 
 ί,τΖ,^ 27,'/ —Λ ^ΙΛ,Λ^Γ .'.,,Γ.^ ^Γ.Λ. ',',^/-,-. ,. ,-«! (ir\r ^ ο = ACt.S xvii. 
 
 ιλει 
 
 6/ελί 
 
 αντης. "' ει ης καΛει υμάς των άπιστων και σεΛετε ' ιι."ί Kings 
 
 ΤΓορευεσθαι, παν το " παοατιΘίμενον ύμιν έσΟίετε μη^Ιν p = ch7viii.7 
 
 ανακξίΐνοντες οια την ' συι^ίίόϊϊσιυ εαν οε τις υ /tiiv r _ sianT viii. 
 
 ,/ ΓΓΛ - ν ' 'Λ ' ' *■ ' fl' ς\ • » - \ I'u. Ps. xcv. 
 
 ειπη ιουτο ΐίοουυτον εστίν, μ-η εσοιετε ci εκείνον τον η. 
 
 3al. Esth.v. 12. t = ch. vi. Η reff. u — Mark vi. 41 al. Gen. xliii. 31, 32. vhereiinlyt. 
 
 rec (twice) μοι ίϊ,ίβτ. {from ch vi. 12), with (C^ 1st time) HJK &c ν (ed) harl- syrr al 
 Orig Chr Thdrt al Augj al : txt ABCDEFG (FG ora παν. εζ. αλλ ου π. οικοδ.) 17- 46•. 
 6V. 1 18-79 VSS Clem Atli Dam Iren Tert all.— 24. for ro (2ce), ra A 47 Antioch (Tert) : 
 (1st) TO συμφουον sah : 2nd om 4G'. 07". — άλλα και 61-7. 1^0 al Syr al Clem. — rec aft 
 ετίρ. ins έκαστος (supplementari/ : perhaps, as Mey, a reminiscence of Phil ii. 4), with 
 D^EJK &c syrr al Chr Thdrt al : om ABCD'FGH 17 (appy) 67". 71-3. 80 it ν copt sah arm 
 Clem lat-ff. — 25. om 178. — Cia τ. avvtic. om teth Novatian. — 26. rec yap κυρ (transposn 
 to more usual order, not observing the emphasis), wiA AHJK &c Chr Thdrt al : txt 
 BCDEFG 93 (al.'). — 27. rec aft ει ins δε (for connexion; but thus perplejcing the 
 sense), with CD^EHJK most mss sah (Syr) syr goth al Thdrt, Dam Thl Oec : om ABD'FG 
 46. ^iT-■ 109 it V copt Antioch Chr Thdrt {tav τις 178 Chr Thdr : καλ?; Chr) Jacob- 
 nisib Aug Ambrst. — αΐίαττιστων, ins εις cimvov DEFG vss lat-ff (not Aug).— πάντα 
 τα παυατιθεμενα A copt sah al. — αυτοί' ανακριν. sah. — 28. υμίν cm FG it ν goth Tert 
 Augj al. — rec ειδ^Χοθυτον {see notes), with CDEFGJK &c Chr Thdrt al : txt ABH sah 
 Eus (Clem alludg appy) : immolaticium d e al-latt. — εκείνον τον μηνυσαντα και om 
 
 handled the whole question of partaking in 
 idol feasts, and prepared the way for 
 specific directions as about a matter no 
 longer to he supposed indifferent, he pro- 
 ceeds to give those directions, accompany- 
 ing them with their reasons, as regards 
 mutual offence or edification. 23.] 
 
 He recurs to the plea of ch. vi. 12 : — re- 
 asserts his modification of it, with a view, 
 after what has passed since, to shew its 
 reasonableness, and to introduce the follow- 
 ing directions. οΙκοδομ.€Ϊ] viz. the 
 Christian body : tend to build up the 
 whole, or the individual parts, of that 
 spiritual temple, God's οικοδομή. 
 24.] Further following out of οικοδομεί. 
 This ought to be our object : the bringing 
 on one another to perfection, not the 
 pleasing ourselves, see Rom. xv. 2, 3. In 
 the second clause, ίκαττος must be sup- 
 plied from μ7}δείς (hence it has found its 
 way into the rec.) : so Plat. Rep. ii. p. 366 
 D, ουδείς εκών δίκαιος, αλλ' .... ψέγ£ΐ 
 το ΰδικον, — i. e. 'έκαστος ψέγίΐ. See Bern- 
 hardy, Syntax, p. 458. 25.] The key 
 to understanding this and the following 
 ver. is, to remember that σννίίΒησις is 
 used in each case of the conscience of the 
 person spoken of, i. e. in the two first cases, 
 that of the reader, — in the third, as ex- 
 plained by the Αρ., that of the iveak 
 brother : see there. — ' Every thing which 
 is being sold (offered for sale) in the 
 flesh-market (ΐλάκ€λλον is adopted from 
 
 Μ 
 
 the Latin. It was also used by the Rabbis, 
 in the form "bv^• See Stanley, and exx. in 
 Wetst.), eat making no enquiry (whether 
 it is meat offered to idols or not), on accoont 
 of your conscience ' (to be joined with 
 ίσθίετε μηδ. άνακ., not with άΐΌκμινο}'τες 
 only, — as is shewn by the parallel below, 
 ver. 28, — where the reason given is joined 
 to εσθ(ετε). — The meaning being, — ' eat 
 ■without enquiry, that your conscience may 
 not be offended.' If you made enquiry, 
 and heard in reply, that the meat had been 
 offered to idols, your conscience would be 
 offended, and you would eat δια ττρος- 
 κόμματος to yourselves. De Wette, al., 
 understand την συν., all through, of 
 the conscience of another, and apply to 
 all the expl. of ver. 29. But as Meyer 
 well observes, no reader could possibly 
 refer την συναδ. to any one but himself, 
 no other person having been mentioned, 
 until ver. 28, where ίκε'ίνον τον μηνυ- 
 σαντα is introduced, and την σννειδησιν 
 is to be referred (but even then not with- 
 out special explanation given) to the neiv 
 subject. 26.] The principle onwhich 
 
 such an eating ought to rest : that all is 
 God's, and yor our use: and where no 
 subjective scruple is cast in, all to be freely 
 partaken of: see 1 Tim. iv. 4. 27.] 
 
 The same maxim ajiplied to their conduct 
 at a banquet given by a heathen. A mis- 
 cellaneous banquet, and not a sacrificial 
 feast, is meant. At such, there might be 
 Μ 2
 
 582 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 η Luke XX. 37. 
 Jcihn xi. ^7. 
 
 3iio„fyT_ ουχί T7}V 
 
 ilO» 
 
 29 
 
 2 Mace. iii. 7. 
 ch i. 12 rj 
 
 μηνύσαντα και ti]V ' συΐ'ίΐθ»ίσ/ν. ~" συνίΐοησι 
 y ί^,,^^Γ^ΐ, άλλα T7JV '" του έτερου 
 
 ιόησιν δε "^ λεγ 
 
 εαυτού, 
 
 τι 
 
 reft'. 
 
 ελευθε 
 
 )ίΐ'εται υτΓΟ 
 
 αλλ 
 
 νς 
 
 συνει 
 
 δ»ί 
 
 ABCD 
 EFGH 
 yap JK 
 
 σεως ; eXevOe- 
 
 ειτε πίΐ'ετε είτε 
 32 
 
 τι 
 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 ;ερια ^[(ου κρι 
 y = ^^°''"''""• 30 j[ j^(^ "^ νάριτι '^ ιυετεχω, τί βλασφημούμαι ^ ύττερ οΰ abcd 
 
 ζ Paul, here , ν f ', - . 31 g •' "^ ' fl' ' " " " ^'^^ 
 
 οηΐν. Matt. £ νω ευγοοιστω : ^'^ ^ eire ουν εσυατί 
 
 ix. 4. χχνϋ. ι ^ Λ^Γ . , -,,^ „ „ 
 
 iiii.7."''Acfs ΤΓΟίειτε, πάντα εις όοί,αν ϋεου ποιείτε. "- • αποοςκοττοι 
 
 iv. 25. νϋ. 2β ^ »τ ί> ' ' fl ' ''Τ?ΛΛ * " ' Λ ' 
 
 only. Gen. fcoi louooioic yiviatfs Kai tiAAr/aiv και rrj εκκλησία τον 
 
 a =• Gal ii 4 ν 1 13 al h = Rom. vi. 17. ch. xv. 57 al. dat., Rom. iv. 19. See note. cch.ix. 
 
 Ui reff d = Rom. iii. 8. Tit. iii. 2. James li. 7. e ellips , Hf b. v. 8 al. 
 
 f — Rom xiT. 6. i. 8 al. g So ch iii. 22 reft; h Rom.iii. 7. ch. ii. 7. Eph. i. 6 al. 
 
 i .\ct.s xxiv. 16. Phil. i. 10 only t. P. Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 21. 
 
 FG g Ambrst (ίκιινον om Chr-commj). — rec at end, ins τον yap κιψιον η γη κηι το 
 ■π-ληρωμη ηντης {repetition from vei• 26), with H^JK &c syr gotli al Clir Thdrt Phot (in 
 Oec) Oec Thl (all these expl it in their comm) : but om ABCDEFGH' 10. 17• 28. 40. 
 71-3. iW. !)3. lf)l)-77 to !) it ν copt sah Syr arm al Dam Aug Ambrst Pel Bed (see on ver 
 31). — 29. tor ουγι, ου D'. — for ίαντου, ψαυτου Η 3 : σίηντον D*, tttam it ν &c. — for 
 άλλης, άπιστου FG it Ambr Jer Sedul Primas (txt Aug Ambrst Pelag Bed) : άλλου 52. 
 
 30. rec aft <t ins St {svppleinentary, but diaturbiny tlie sense), with a few mss Thdrt 
 
 (text) Oec: om ABCDEFGJK most mss vss Clem Cyr Thdrt (in Oec) all gr-and-lat. — 
 εγω om 178.— 31. ττοιητί τι DEFG. — πάντα om 45-G' Origj. — ποαιτε (2nd) om FG g 
 Ambrst (Gaud).— at end, add τον yap κνριον η γη &c (as in ver 28) 0^.-32. rec γιΐ'εσθ. 
 και lovS. {transposnfor simplifcation), with DEJK &c : γιν. ιονδ. τε FG : txt ABC 17 
 
 meat which had been offered to idols. 
 Grot, says w-ell on θελίτε ττορενεσθαι, 
 " Admonet tacite, melius forte facturos, si 
 non eant : ire tamen non prohibet : supra, 
 V. 9." — On δια τ. cruveiS., see above, ver. 
 25. 28.] TfVio is the person sup- 
 
 posed to say this ? not, as Grot., al., think, 
 the host, of whom tis could hardly be said, 
 but it would stand iai' δε ii/Jtv fiV^ : nor, 
 as Chrys., Theophyl., al., and De Wette, 
 — some heathen gvest, by whom De W. 
 imagines it said maliciously, or to put the 
 Christian to the proof, — for his σννείοησις 
 would hardly be so much taken into ac- 
 count in the matter; but, as Neander, Pfl. 
 u. Leit. p. 3!)9, and Meyer, — some weak 
 Christian, wishing to warn his brother. — 
 ΐ€ρόθ•υτον is apparently placed advisedly, to 
 represent what would be said at a heathen's 
 taijle. De ΛΥ. suj)poses it on this very 
 account to be a correction : but surely this 
 is giving a corrector credit for more fine- 
 ness of discrimination than they ordinarily 
 shew. ^luch more probable is it, that the 
 unusual and apparently incorrect iepaOvTOJ' 
 should give place to the ordinary and more 
 exact term. δι' €κ. τ. μ.ην. . . .] ' On 
 
 account of the man who informed yon, 
 and (κηί specify in ff the particular point or 
 points to which the more general preceding 
 clause applies: as, τώνίί είνεκα, κα\ γΓ/ς 
 Ίμέρψ . . . κα'ι μάλιστα τι^ χρηστηριψ πι- 
 αννος ίώΐ', ica't τίσασΟαι OiXwv . . . . , 
 Herod, i. 73. See Hartung, Partikellehre, 
 i. 145) conscience:' i.e. to spare the in- 
 former being u-ounded in his conscience. 
 29.] Expl. of the last δια την 
 συνείδηση• , as meaning 7iot your own, but 
 
 that of the informer. True to his interp. 
 (see above), De W. supposes τοϋ ετ'ερυν 
 not to refer to roi' μηνύσαντα but to 
 ^ your treak Christian brother;' but then 
 how very harsh and clumsy are the various 
 references to understood persons ; — and 
 how simple, on the other interp., is the 
 reference in each case of την συν. to the 
 subject of the clause. ϊνα τί γάρ] 
 
 'For why is my freedom judged by a 
 conscience not mine own?' — i.e. ' Why 
 should I be so treated (hazard by my 
 actions such treatment) that the exercise of 
 my Christian freedom, eating as I do and 
 giving thanks, should become matter of 
 condemnation to another, who conscien- 
 tiously disapproves of it ? — ' If (no copula), 
 I partake thankfully (dat. of the manner, 
 cf. Soph. Antig. GK», σοφία yap εκ του 
 κλεινόν έπος πίφανται, — and Bernhardy, 
 Syntax, p. 101), why am I to be spoken 
 ill of for that for which I give thanks ■? ' 
 These words have been misunderstood. It 
 has been generally supposed that the Ap. 
 is impressing a duty, not to give occasion 
 for the condemnation of their liberty by 
 another's conscience. But the ground on 
 which he is here arguing, is the unfitness, 
 absurdity, injustice to oneself and the cause 
 of God, ver. 31, of so acting as to be con- 
 demned for that in which a man not only 
 allows himself, but for which he gives 
 thanks to God. The s-entiment is the same 
 as in Rom. xiv. 10, μή βλασφημύσβω 
 νμων τϋ αγαθόν. — The emphasis is each 
 time on εγώ. 31— XI. 1.] General 
 
 CONCLUSION OF THIS PART OF THE 
 
 Epistle, — enforced by the example of
 
 XI. 1- 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 533 
 
 Θίοΰ' ^^ καθώς Kayu) ^ πάντα ττασιν ' άξ>εσκω, μη ^ ^ητων ^Actsxx.ss 
 
 το εμαυτου '^ σνμφορον, αΧλά το "των ττοΧλων, Ίνα σω- retrl "' ^ 
 η- "VT 1 ρ ' 'η /> ^ ' ν - >" "«■■ 24. 
 
 Όωσιν. Λ.Ι. ^ μιμηται μου yivtaue, καυως κα^ω -νριστον. "οη/"•^^ 
 
 2q'T? -^\f- ti k' τ / η ' oRom. τ. 15 
 
 ϋ,τταινω όε νμας οτι πάντα μου μίμνησυε, και reu. 
 
 Θ\5 ,^Ν ,_ ν{ ^, ,f , ρ ch. ίτ. 16 reff. 
 
 ως παοίόωκα υμιν ταο παηαόυσεις κοτ£γ£Γε. ik"'"=^"-8- 
 
 „ > ' > ^ Λ, Κοιη. XV. 11, 
 
 υελω όε υμάς ειοεναι οτι παντός ανορος -η κεφαλί] ο oniy. w.otj, 
 
 ' ' .Λ^^^ \r>\ ,^^^^ Eccles. viii. 
 
 ■γυριστός εστίν, κεφαλή οε -γυναικός ο ανηξ>, κεφαΑτ) οε }^>-^ 
 
 1.4. Heb. xiii.2. s = Acts xvi. 4. 2 Pet. ii. 21. Jude 3. t = Gal. i. 14. 2 f hess. 
 
 ii. l.i. iii ti. See Matt. xr. 2 al.t Jer. xxxL 4. tt = Lake viii. la. ch. xv. 2. 1 Thess. v. 21. 
 
 Heb. iii. 6, 14. x. 23. u Col. ii. 1. 
 
 37. 73 Orig Cyr Did : και bef ωνδ. om ν al Aug al. — 33. for τταντ. πασ., ττασιν κατά 
 Ίταντα FG : ττανταττασι^' Thdrt (ms, also a ins of the N. T. referred to by edr of Thdrt). 
 — for ιμ., εαυτού 93.— rec συμφίρυν (corrn as more usual), with DEFGJK &c : txt 
 ABC— ro (2nd) ora FG. 
 
 Chap. XI. 2. rec aft υμάς ins αδελφοί (addn at beginning of a new section), with 
 DEFGJK &c vss (add μου Syr al) Thdrt al: txt ABC 4f). 71-3-4 copt sah seth arm Ath 
 Cyr-jerus Bas Chr Thl (comm) Oroa. — μου μεμνησθε πάντες Thdrt. — και om A' 57 al. 
 — πανταχού παρεδωκα FG (παραΰ. G) d g Ambst. — παραδόσεις μου D'FG it ν ar-pol 
 lat-ff. — ούτως κατίχίτε C Ecth Athj Chr. — 3. δε (1st) om FG al syr Ambrst. — η om 17• 
 — ανηρ αυτής sail seth. — κεφάλι] (2ad) to κεφαλή (3rd) om 89'. — ο bef χριστ. om 
 
 himself. 31.] This εϊτε ovv . . . . , 
 
 passing from the special to the general, is 
 not without reference to the last ver., ia 
 which the hyp. is, that the Christian and 
 thankful act of the believer is marred by 
 the condemnatory judgment of his weak 
 brother. All such hindrances to God's 
 glory they are to avoid ; and in all things, 
 eating or drinking, or any other particular 
 of conduct (τι, ' any thing,' the stress 
 being on TToiflT-f, — ' whether ye are eat- 
 ing or drinking, or doing any thing;' 
 not as E. V. ivhateter ye do, — ότιονν), 
 the glory of God is to be the aim, self- 
 regard being set aside : and so, — 32.] 
 all offence is to be avoided (it being under- 
 stood that this refers to iic'ia0op(ir, for in 
 other things, both Jews and Greeks must 
 be offended, see ch. i. 23), whether to Jews 
 or Heathens (both these out of the Church), 
 or to the Church of God (their own bre- 
 thren). 33.] His own course of con- 
 duct : — ' As I in all things (accus. of that 
 on which the subject acts, or over which the 
 quality predicated e.xtends, as in άλyώ την 
 κεφαλήν ; — so rou πάντ εύδαιμονος όλ- 
 βου, Soph. CEd. Tyr. 1197. See Kiihner, 
 ii. 222. 4) please' (' am pleasing :' as Meyer 
 well remarks, not the result, but the prac- 
 tice on Paul's part ; for πάπιν άοίσκειν 
 τον συμβουλεύοντα κ. τά κοινά πράττοιτα 
 αδύνατον, Demosth. 1481. 4. «μαντοΰ 
 and των ττολλών are opposed : see ver. 24. 
 ϊνα σ-ωθ., his great aim and end ; — 
 so ch. ix. 22. XI. 1.] καγώ, sell. 
 μιμητής ytyova. Compare on the sense, 
 Phil. ii. 4, 5. 
 
 XI. 2 — 34.] Reproofs and direc- 
 tions REGARDING CERTAIN DISORDERS 
 
 WHICH HAD ARISEN IN THEIR ASSEM- 
 BLIES : viz. (1) THE NOT VEILING OF 
 THEIR WOMEN IN PUBLIC PRAYER (vV. 
 
 2 — 16) : (2) THE ABUSE OF THE αγατται. 
 (17-34). 2 — 16.] The law of 
 
 subjection of the woman to the man (2 — 
 12), and natural decency itself (12 — 16), 
 teach that women should be veiled in 
 public religious assemblies. 2.] 8e, 
 
 implying a distinction from the spirit of 
 the last passage, which was one of blame, 
 and exhortation to imitate him. He praises 
 them for the degree in which they did this 
 already, and expresses it by the slighter 
 word μέμνησθί. ιτάντο, see above, 
 
 on ch. x. 32 — ' And ye keep (continue 
 to believe and practise) the traditions 
 (apostolic maxims of faith and practice, 
 (Jelivered either orally or in writing, 2 Thess. 
 ii. 15), as (according to the words in which) 
 I delivered (them) to you.' This was 
 their general practice : the ej:ceptions to 
 it, or departures at all events from the 
 spirit of those παραδόσεις, noiv follow. 
 3.] " It appears, that the Christian 
 women at Cor. claimed for their sex an 
 equality with the other, taking occasion by 
 the doctrine of Christian freedom and aboli- 
 tion of sexual distinctions in Christ (Gal. 
 iii. 28). The gospel unquestionably did 
 much for the emancipation of women, who 
 in the East and among the Ionian Greeks 
 (not among the Dorians and the Romans) 
 were kept in unwortiiy dei)endence. Still 
 this was effected in a quiet and gradual 
 manner ; whereas in Corinth they seem 
 to have taken up the cause of female in- 
 dependence somewhat too eagerly. The 
 women overstepped the bounds of their
 
 534 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 XI. 
 
 θε 
 
 ν -(Acts six. του γριστου ο σεος. 
 
 6?)cli.xiii. Λ,' 
 
 Ίτας ανηξ) ιτροςευγυμίνος -η 
 wMaVkx'iv'^3. <p^Tivwv " KOTO. ΚίφαΧης έχων 
 
 (andellips.),' •> - 5 
 
 Esih. Ti li. αυτόν. 
 
 χ = ell. i. 27. 
 ver. 2-2. 
 
 D'FG al.— rec om του bef χριστοί;, with CFGJK &c Chrj Thdrt Dam Thl, OeCj : ins 
 ABDE 37. 46 &c Clem Chrj Thlj Oec,.— 4. bef κατ. κ«ρ., ins καλιψμα 4. (i"l. 07". 213 
 copt sah. — «πι της κίφαλης 4. — κίψ. αΰτοϋ 10!) : βαντυν κίφ. 48. 72. — 5. γ?; om D'FG. 
 
 προ- 
 καταισ-^υνα την κεφοληΐ' 
 πάσα δε yurjj προςευχομενη tj ^ προφητίυυυσα 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 sex, in coming forward to pray and to pro- 
 phesy in the assembled church with un- 
 covered heads. Both of these the Ap. dis- 
 approved, — as well their coming forward to 
 pray and to prophesy, as their removing 
 the veil : here however he blames the latter 
 practice only, and reserves the former till 
 ch. xiv. 34. In order to confine the 
 women to their true limits, he reminds 
 them of their subjection to the man, to 
 whom again he assigns his place in the spi- 
 ritual order of creation, and traces this pre- 
 cedence up to God Himself." De Wette. 
 iravTos avSpos] ' of every Christian 
 man' (as Chrys., al., Meyer, De W.), cer- 
 tainly, — and for such the Ap. was writing: 
 but not only of every Christian man : the 
 Headship of Christ is over all things to 
 His Church, Eph. i. 22, and thus He is Head 
 of ' every man.' — The word κίψαλή in 
 each case means the head next above. This 
 must be borne in mind, for Christ is the 
 Head of the Christian woman, as well as of 
 the Christian man. — God is the Head of 
 Christ, not only according to His human 
 Nature : the Son is, in his Sonship, neces- 
 sarily subordinate to the Father : see ch. 
 iii. 23, note, and ch. xv. 28. — From 
 χριστός-, the order descends first : then, in 
 order to complete the whole, ascends up to 
 God.— Obs. that though (Gal. iii. 28) the 
 distinction of the sexes is abolished in 
 Christ, as far as the offer of and standing 
 in grace is concerned, yet for practical 
 purposes, and for order and seemliness, it 
 subsists and must be observed. 4.] 
 
 The case of the man here treated, was 
 regarded by the ancient Comm., Chrys., 
 Theodoret, Theophyl., Oec, and Grot., 
 Mosh., al., as an actually occurring one 
 among the Corr. : — but by recent ones, 
 since Storr and Bengel, as hypothetically 
 put, to bring out that other abuse which 
 really had occurred. Had it been real, 
 more would have been said on it below : 
 but from ver. 5 onwards, attention is con- 
 fined to the woman. ιτροςίυχ. ' pray- 
 ing in public :' ττροφ. ' discoujsing 
 in the Spirit ;' see on ch. xii. 10. 
 κατά κίφ. €χων] scil. τι. The Jews when 
 praying in public put over their heads a veil, 
 called the Tallith, to shew their reverence 
 before God and their unworthiness to look 
 on Him : Light., Hor. in loc. Grotius's 
 note on the Greek and Roman customs is 
 
 important : — " Apud Graecos mos fuit sacra 
 facere capite aperto. Legendum enim apud 
 Macrob. i. Saturn. 8. Illic Greeco ritu 
 capite aperto res divinaft, apparet ex loco 
 ejusdem libri c. 10 ubi itidem de Saturno 
 agitur, et sacrum ei fieri dicitur aperto 
 capite ritu peregrino ,• et ex loco iii. 6, ubi 
 Varronem ait dicere, Graeci hoc esse moris, 
 aperto capite sacrificare. άττορακαλύπτφ 
 κίφαΧ?^ ait de ejusdem Saturni sacris agens 
 Plutarchus in Romanis qusestionibus. Lu- 
 cent facere id dici solitum Festus testatur. 
 Eodem modo, id est aperto capite, etiam 
 Herculi in ara maxima sacrum fieri solere 
 testatur, praeter Macrobium dicto libro iii. ϋ, 
 Dion. Hal. lib. i., nimirum quia id sacrum 
 institutum erat ab Evandro homine Grseco. 
 Sed ^neas (.') contrarium morem in Ita- 
 liam intulit sacra faciendi velato capite, ne 
 quod malum omen oculis aut auribus obve- 
 niret : ut Virg. nos docet ^n. iii. et ad 
 eum Servius, et in Breviario Aurelius Vic- 
 tor : sed et Plutarchus in Romanis quses- 
 tionibus. Et ejus moris etiam Plautus 
 meminit in comcediis quibusdam : ut solet 
 admiscere Romana Graecis. Paulus Grsecis 
 Corinthiis scribens, Graecum praefert mo- 
 rem, et causas adfert quales ferebat negotii 
 natura. Ex Pauli praescripto perpetuo 
 hunc morem tenuere Christiani veteres. 
 Tertul. Apologetico : ' Illuc suspicientes 
 Christiani manibus expansis, quia innocui : 
 capite nudo, quia non erubescimus : deni- 
 que sine monitore, quia de pectore oramus,' 
 &c. Nihil hue pertinet mos Septentrionis 
 in reverentise signum caput velandi, qui 
 quanquam per Germanicas nationes late 
 manavit, et Judaeis tamen et Gra;cis, et ve- 
 teri Italiae fuit incognitus." καταισχ. 
 
 τ. κεφ. αΰτοΰ] ' dishonours Ms Head,' 
 i. e. Christ : not, his oum head, literally 
 [except in so far as the literal and meta- 
 phorical senses are both included, — the 
 (literal) head of the man being regarded as 
 the representative of his spiritual Head. 
 See this brought out in Stanley's note] : 
 for the head of the man, in this respect of 
 honojiring or dishonouring, has been, ver. 3, 
 explained to be Christ. Him he dis- 
 honours, by appearing veiled before men, 
 thus recognizing subjection to them in an 
 assembly which ought to be conformed to 
 Christian order. 5.] The case of the 
 
 woman is just the converse. She, if she 
 uncovers herself (on the manner of cover-
 
 4—9. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 535 
 
 * ακατακαΧυπηο ry κεψαλτ) " καταισχύνει την κεφαΧτΙν 
 αυτής' ^ εν yap tOTiu ^ και το αυτό Trj ' ίξυρΐ7μεν)/. ει 
 
 "γαξ) ου κατακαΧυτττεται "γννη, και '^ κειρασθω' ει δε 
 αισγ^ρον -γυναικι το '^ κειρασθαι η " ζυρασθαι, κατακα- 
 λυπτεσθω. ' ανηξ) μεν yap ουκ '^ οφείλει κατακαΧυπτε- 
 σθαι ττιν κεφαλήν, εικων και ^ οοζα θεού ' υττάργων' η 
 •νυιη] δε ^ ^οζ,α αν^ξ>ος εστίν. ου yap εστίν ανιψ εκ 
 
 yυvaικoς, αΧΧά γυΐ'η εζ ανόρος' και yap ουκ ' εκτίσθη 
 
 (Iconstr., Phil. i. 21. ρ = Acts xvii. 29. f Rom. viii. 29 reff. Geo. i. 26, 27. 
 
 g — Ps. xviii. 1. h Acts viii. 1() reff. i Mark xiii. 19. Rom. i. 25 reff. 
 
 — rec for αντης, ιαυτης (see note and cf var readd, vv 8, 9), with B(e 5ί1)0•ΈΚ most 
 mss Orig : txt ACDFGJ 17- 73-4. 80. 93. 2.38 Chr Thdrt al.— 6. η γννη Β (Birch : but 
 see next ver). — και om 9 v-ed £eth arm Ambrst. — κίΐρασΘω η ξυρασθω Β : κηρααθω 
 179: Keipintiai 44 : κίΐρίσθω 80 : add την τρίχα αυτής arm. — κιιοίσθαι (2αά) 80, — and 
 και κητακαΧ. — 7. μίν om sah. — την κεψαλιρ' om Chr Thdrt (somet) Thl-ms Sedul. — 
 rec bef yuvjj om η {for conformity with the precedg and folly), with CD^(E.')JK &c 
 
 y ver. 13 only. 
 
 Levit. xiii.45 
 
 alex. Polyb. 
 
 .w. 27. 2. 
 
 (Int., Winer, 
 
 } 31. 4. 
 ζ ch xii. 11 
 
 only, constr., 
 
 hrre only. 
 
 See 1 Pet.r.9. 
 a Ac's xxi. 24 
 
 only. Num. 
 
 vi. 9. 
 b here only. 
 
 Gen. xxxviii. 
 
 IS al. 
 c Acts viii. 32. 
 
 xviii. 18 only. 
 
 2 Kioes xiv. 
 
 26. ' 
 
 ing, see below ver. 15, note) in such an 
 assembly, dislionours her head [the man ,• 
 not, as Meyer and many others, Uterally, 
 her oum head [but see above] : of this 
 kind of dishonour there is no mention 
 at all in our passage, and ver. 3 has ex- 
 pressly guarded us against making the mis- 
 take) by apparently casting oft' his head- 
 ship : and if this is to be so, the Ap. pro- 
 ceeds, why not go further and cut oft" her 
 hair, which of itself is a token of this sub- 
 jection ? But if this be acknowledged to be 
 shameful (it was a punishment of adulter- 
 esses, see Wets, in loc. and Tacit. Germ. 
 19), let the further decency of the addi- 
 tional covering be conceded likewise. — The 
 readings αντοϋ and εαΐ'Τ))ς have arisen fi-om 
 fancying that his and her own head are 
 meant. iv . . . Ιστιν κ. το ανιτό] she ; 
 
 not it, TO άκατηκάλυπτο}' tli'cti. The 
 neut. is used because the identity is generic, 
 not individual : cf. Eur. Med. 928, — yvui] 
 ίε θή\ν κάπι δακρΰοις ϊφυ, and other exx. 
 in Kiihner, ii. 45 "(§ 421). 6.] the 
 
 argum. see above. ov κατ., — ' is to be 
 
 unveiled,' the pres. indicating the noi-mal 
 habit. καικ6ΐρ., 'let her also,' besides 
 being unveiled, &c. κείρ. ή |υρ.] 
 
 ' plus est radi quam tonderi,' Grot. 
 7 — 9.] A second reason for the same, — 
 from the dependence of the man on God 
 only, but of the woman on the man. 
 7.] γάρ refers back to and gives a reason 
 for κιιτακαλνπτίσθίχ), the difference be- 
 tween the sexes being assumed, — that one 
 should be and the other should not be 
 veiled. The emphasis is accordini^ly on 
 άνήρ. oviK οφείλει, ' should not,' 
 
 * ought not :' see reft'. εΙκών θεοΰ. Gen. 
 i. 26. This the man is, having bi'en created 
 first, — directly, and in aspecial manner: the 
 woman \i\a\Ti:cX\y,on\y through thetnan. 
 
 K. δόξα θ.] ' And the (representative of the) 
 glory of God :' on account of his superiority 
 and godlike attributes among other created 
 beings. This is obviously the point here 
 brought out, as in Ps. viii. C ; not, that he 
 is set to shew forth God's glory {tig γάρ 
 So^av θίοΐι οφείλει 6 άνήρ ύττοτετάχΟαι 
 τψ θεψ. Phot, in Oecum.), however true 
 that may be : nor, as Estius, from Augustin, 
 ' quia in illo Deus gloriatur :' nor is δόξα 
 the representative of the Heb. HTO^, Gen. i. 
 26 {όμοίωσις), as Rdckert, al., suppose, be- 
 cause the LXX have rendered niTOri, Num. 
 xii. 8. Ps. xvii. 15, by ίόξα : for, as Meyer 
 observes, in so well-known a passage as 
 Gen. i. 26, the Ap. could hardly fail to have 
 used the LXX word ομοίωσις. — Man is 
 God's glory : He has put in Him His Ma- 
 jesty, and he represents God on earth : 
 ivoman is man's glory .• taken (ver. 8) from 
 the man, shining (to follow out Grotius's 
 similitude, "minus aliquid viro, ut luna 
 lumen minus sole") not with light direct 
 from God, but with light derived from man, 
 " TO θήλυ, lipptv ατελές, philosophis. Im- 
 perat materl'amilias suae familise, sed viri 
 nomine." Grot. This of course is true only 
 as regards her place in creation, and her pro- 
 vidential subordination, not in respect of 
 the dependence of every woman's individual 
 soul directly on God, not on man, for sup- 
 plies of grace and preparations for glory. 
 The Ap. omits είκών, because anthropologi- 
 cally tbe woman is not the image of the 
 man, on account of the difference of the 
 sexes : and also perhaps because thus he 
 would seem to deny to the woman the being 
 created in the divine image, which she is 
 as well as the man, Gen. i. 26, 27- The 
 former reason appears the more jirobable : 
 and so Do W. and Meyer. " It may be 
 observed that, whereas in Genesis the gene-
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 XI. 
 
 k_asordi. avrip δ(α tijv yvvmKa, aWa yvvii ^la τον avcpa. ota Η o- 
 
 aiM."' τοΰτο^οφήλει η 7uvj] ϊζουσιαν tYftv εττί της Κίώαλης abc 
 
 I So Uiod. Sic. Τ , , . ' . EFli 
 
 i. 47, εχοι/σαι/ τρ£Ϊ? /ίασιλειαί ίπ» TJjt Ke(/>aXi7f• JK 
 
 Cbr Dam al : ins ABD'FG 73. 118 Dial Isid Thdrt.— row «i-qjoc FG.— at end, ins 
 ιαντης copt sah eeth. — 10. »/ γυ»^»; υφίΐλει Η 37- — ουκ ο0. ij γι/ι/. 33-5. — ίττι της Κίφ. 
 
 ral character of man under the Hebrew 
 name answering to άιθρωπος is the only 
 one brought forward, here it is merged in 
 the word ai'i'/f), which only expresses his re- 
 lation to the woman." Stanley. 8.] 
 γάρ gives the reason of the former assertion 
 ■γυνή δόξα άν?ι>ός, — viz. that 'the man is 
 not (emphasis on ΐστιν, which prevents the 
 ίκ having a figurative sense, of dependence : 
 — ' takes not his being,' in the fact of his 
 original creation. The propagation of the 
 sjiecies is not here in view) out of the wo- 
 man, but the woman out of the man ' 
 (comp. Gen. ii. 23, κΧφήιτίται yvvi), (in 
 CK τον ανδρός αυτής Ιλήφθη). 
 9.] ' For also {parallel with ver. 8—an- 
 otlier reason : not subordinate to it, as 
 Meyer, who renders Ik in ver. 8, ' dependent 
 on,' and regards this ver. as giving the rea- 
 son) the man was not made (emphasis on 
 έκτίσβ?], as before on ίστιν) on account of 
 the woman, &C.' — In this ver., besides the 
 manner of creation, έκ τον άΐ'ίμής, the oc- 
 casion of creation, δια τον άνδρα, is in- 
 sisted on ; see Gen. ii. 18 ff. 10.] 
 δια TovTO, on account of what has just 
 been said, by which the subordination of 
 the woman has been proved : — refers to vv. 
 7 — 9, not as Meyer, to v. 9 only : for yv. 
 8, 9, give two parallel reasons for yvvt) 
 δόϊ,α όϊ'ίμός, the inference from which pro- 
 position has not yet been given, but now 
 follows, with όψείλΐΐ answering to ουκ όφίί- 
 λ€ΐ above. όφ. ή γ. «ξουσίαν €χ. ίττί 
 της κεφ ] ' The woman ought to have 
 power' (the sign of power o\• subjection : 
 shewn by the context to mean a veil). So 
 Diodor. Sic. i. 47 : ιΐκόνα .... ίϊκοσι ττη- 
 χών, μονόλιθυν, ΐχονσαν τρεΊς βασιΧήας 
 ίπϊ της Κίφιιλής, ας διασημαίνειν 'ότι και 
 θνγάτΐ]ρ κα'ι γνι•ή κιιΊ μήτ7]ρ βασιΧέως 
 νττηυζι, where βασιλειαι evidently are 
 crowns, the tokens of kingdom. And as 
 there from the context it is plain that they 
 indicated participation in the glory of the 
 kingdoms, so here it is as evident from the 
 context that the token of ΐξουσια indi- 
 cates being under power : and such token 
 is the covering. So Chrys. (ro κα^νπτε- 
 afiai, ΰττοτα-γής κ. ΐζονσίης), Theodoret, 
 Theophyl. (το τον ίίυυσιάζισθαι σίψβο- 
 λον), Oecum., Beza, Grot., Est., Bengel, 
 Wolf., al., Billroth, Riickert, Olsh., Meyer, 
 De Wette. — To enumerate the various rend- 
 erings would be impossible. Some of the 
 principal are, (1) a sign of power to pray 
 
 and prophecy in public, bestowed on her by 
 her husband. So Schrader, iv. 158 : but 
 this would be quite irrelevant to the con- 
 text. (2) Some suppose εζονσίαν actually 
 to mean a veil, because the Heb. Til, ' a 
 veil,' comes from the root tit, 'subjecit.' 
 So Hammond, Le Clerc, al. But (see 
 Lexx.) ' subjecit ' is not the primary, only 
 a tropical meaning ; the primary meaning, 
 ' extendit, diduxit' is much more likely to 
 have given rise to the substantive. It is 
 certainly a curious coincidence that the 
 Heb. terms should be thus allied,— and that 
 alliance may have been present to the Ap.'s 
 thoughts : but this does not shew that he 
 Ui^ed ϊζονσία for a veil. (3) Kypke would 
 put a comma after ίζοντ., and render 'prop- 
 terea mulier potestati obnoxia est, iia ul 
 velamen {see ver. 4) in capite habeat.^ 
 But the sense of 6<ρύ\ειν τι would require 
 (see Lexx.) νπακοήν, not Ιξονσίαν. (4) 
 Pott renders, * mulierem ojjortet servare 
 jus {site potestatem) in caput suum, sc. eo, 
 quod illud veto obtegat.' But this, though 
 philologically allowable (see Rev. xi. C ; xx. 
 6; xiv. 18; and with επάνω, Luke xix. 
 17\ is entirely against the context, in which 
 the woman has no power over her own head, 
 and on that very account is to be covered. 
 (4) Hagenbach (in the Stud.und Krit. 1828, 
 p. 401) supposes ίζουπία here to mean her 
 origin, εξ-υΰσία from ϊξ-ίίμι, as παρ- 
 ουσία from τταρ-είμι : — to shew that she 
 (ver. 8) iariv ίξ ανδρός. But apart from 
 other objections to this, it must thus be, 
 την £ξ. or την ΐξ. αυτής. Other render- 
 ings and conjectures may be seen in Meyer's 
 note, from which the above is mainly taken : 
 and in Stanley's. δια τους άγγί'λους] 
 
 ' On account of the angels :' i. e. because in 
 the Christian assemblies the holj' angels of 
 God are present, and delighting in the due 
 order and subordination of the ranks of God's 
 servants,— and by a violation of that order 
 we should be giving ofl'ence to them. See 
 ref. So Chrys. {ουκ υΐδας 'ότι μετ' ayy'(- 
 "Κων 'έστηκας ; μετ' εκείνων άδεις, μετ 
 ίΚίίΐ'οιΐ' j')/4i'f7c, καί'έστηκας yiXwv; cited 
 by Hammond, but from what work of 
 Chr5's. I have not been able to find. In his 
 comm. on this passage he is not clear, but 
 seems to take this view, — εΐ yap του άν- 
 δρας καταφρονείς, φησ'ι, τους άyyέλoυς ai- 
 δέσθητι. In the Horn, on the Ascension, 
 p. 448 c, he says, ει βυνλει Ιδε'ιν κ. μάρτυ- 
 ρας κ. άγytλovς, άνοιζον της πίστεως
 
 10—14. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 587 
 
 έλους. " πλην ούτε yvvri χωρίς ανορος ' 
 
 ούτε ανηο ■^ωρις yvvaiKug εν κυριω ωςπερ γαρ τ] yvvii 
 
 εκ του αν^οος, οΰτως και ο avijo cia tijq -γυναικός, τα οε 
 θίοΰ. εν νμιν αυτοις " κρίνατε' ^ πρέπον 
 
 '' ακατακάλυτΓτον τω θεω προςευχεσθαι ', 
 ^'^ ουδέ η ^ φύσις αυτή δίδάσκεί νμας οτι ανηρ μεν εαν 
 
 :ια τους αγγε 
 
 παι^τα εκ του 
 εστίν yvvaiKa 
 
 ο = Luke τϋ 
 q ver. 5. 
 
 Ps. Ivii. 1. 
 
 20. ii. 27. xi.21,24. 
 
 1 = as ordi- 
 narily ; so Ps, 
 cxsxvii. 1. 
 = Matt. 
 Luiie passim 
 (not Mark, 
 J"hu, nor 
 Luktin Acts). 
 Paul, Eph. 
 V.33. Phil. 
 1. 18. iii. 16. 
 iv. 14 (uses it 
 in no other 
 sense). Rev. 
 
 Heb. ii. lu. vii. 26 al. 
 
 om 238 : οία τ. κ. sah : add (αυτής Syr sah. — 11. rec ανηρ χωρ. yvv. ovr. yvv. χ. avi. 
 (corrn to appy more natural order), with D^JK &c syrr ν al Chr Thdrt al Pel al : txt 
 ABCD'D'EFGH 31-7-9. 4G. 57. f;8. 73. 177 to 9 it copt sah seth arm slav-ms Clem 
 Bas-sel Dam Ambrst Sing-cler Aug: for the whole, 01 has -γννη χωρίς ανίρος {curious 
 instance of ascelical corrn). — for tv κυρ., εν κοσ^ιω Thdrt. — 13. νμίΐς αυτοί κρ. DEdev 
 (not tol) lat-flf. — for ακατακαλυπτον, ακαταληπτως 23' : ουκ ακαλνπτον 73. — for Οία», 
 κυριω 44. — 14. rec ins i] bef owCt {adda to mark the interrogation), with D^JK &c syr 
 (marg) al Clir Thdrt Dam al (in their text) : om ABCD FGH 4G. 73. 137 it ν all Damj 
 lat-ff. — rec αυτή η (pva., with D-JK &c vss Chr Thdrt al lat-ff : αυτή om FG arm 
 Tert : txt ABCD'D'EH 37. 46. 73-4 (appy) 120-78 ffith al Dam : ο ανηρ 93, omg μεν. 
 
 rove όφθα^μονς, κ. δψίΐ το θέατρον ΐκύνο' 
 ii yap πως 6 ά/)ρ άγγίλων ίμττίττΧησται, 
 ■ηοΧΚψ μάλλον ή 'ίκκ\7]σία .... 'ότι yap 
 ίίπας ύ άήρ ayyeXiov ίμπ(π\ΐ]σται, άκου- 
 σον τι ψησιν ό απόστολος, ίντρίπων τάς 
 yvvalκaς ώςτί ιχειν κάλυμμα ίττί της 
 κίφαλΡις' " όφίίλουσιν κτλ."), Grot, (whose 
 note see in Pool), Estius, Wolf, Riickert, 
 Meyer, De Wette. (1) Others, with a 
 modification of this rendering, take roi'c 
 αγγέλους as the auardian angels, ap- 
 pointed, one to take charge of each Cliris- 
 tian. So Theophyl. (ro άνακίκαλύφΰαι 
 όναισχνντίαν ίμφαίνεΐ' ην και οι τοις ττισ- 
 τοΐς τταρίπόμενοι άyyeλoι ββ(λΰσσονται), 
 Jerome (not Aug. de Trin. xii. 7, as Jleyer, 
 see below), Theodoret. But, though such 
 angels certainly do minister to the heirs of 
 salvation, — see Matt, xviii. 10, and note, — 
 there does not appear to be any immediate 
 allusion to them here. (2) Others again un- 
 derstand 'bad angels,' who might themselves 
 be lustfully excited ; so TertuU. de Virg. 
 Vel. 7> " propter angelos : scilicet quos le- 
 gimus a Deo et coelo e.xcidisse ob concu- 
 piscentiam foeminarum." See also cont. 
 Marcion. v. 8, — or might tempt men so to 
 he, — Schottgen, Mosh., al., — or might in- 
 jure the unveiled themselves; so, after Rab- 
 binical notions, Wetst. But o'l άγγελοι, αύ- 
 soL, never means any thing in the N. T. ex- 
 cej)t the holy angels of God. [See, in 
 Stanley's note, a modification of this view, 
 which is consistent with that meaning.] 
 (3) Clem. Alex, ύποτνπ. fragm. lib. iii. 
 (p. 1014 Pott.) says, άγγίλους φησΊ τους 
 δικαίους κ. ενάρετους. (4) Beza, the 
 Christian prophets, " in cottu loquentes 
 ut Dei nuncios et legatos." (.τ) Ambrose, 
 the presidents of the assernblies. (i») 
 Lightf., the angeli or nuntii desponsatio- 
 num, persons deputed to bring about be- 
 
 trothals. (7) Rosenm., Schrader, and many 
 others, — exploratores vel sjjeculatores .• 
 " Poterat nempe novae consuetudinis notitia 
 per άπισΓους speculatores in publicum ema- 
 nare, christianasque uxores turn Judaeis, de 
 isto mulierum habitu pessime existimanti- 
 bus, tum Grsecis quoque in suspicionem rei 
 christianse probrosissimam adducere." Ro- 
 senm. — Against all these ingenious interpp. 
 is the plain sense of ot άγγίλοι (Matt. xiii. 
 49. Mark i. 13. Luke xvi. 22. chap. xiii. 
 1. Col. ii. 18. Heb. i. 4, 5. 7• 13, al.), 
 which appears to me irrefragable. — But 
 still a question remains, Why should the 
 Ap. have here named the angels, and ad- 
 duced them as furnishing a reason for 
 women being veiled in the Christian assem- 
 blies ? Bengel has given an acute, but 
 not I believe the correct answer : " mulier 
 se teyat propter angelos, i. e. quia etiam 
 angeli teguntur. Sicut ad Deum se habent 
 angeli : sic ad virum se habet mulier. Dei 
 facies patet : velantur angeli : Esa. vi. 2. 
 \'vc\ facies patet : velatur mulier." Surely 
 this lies too far off ϊοτ any reader to supply 
 without further specification. Aug. de Trin. 
 xii. 7- gives an ingenious reason : " Grata 
 est enim Sanctis angelis sacrata et pia sig- 
 nificatio. Nam Deus non ad tempus videt, 
 nee aliquid novi fit in Ejus visione atque 
 scientia, cum aliquid teniporaliter aut trans- 
 itorie geritur, sicut inde afficiuntur sensus 
 vel carnales animalium et hominum, vel 
 etiam coelestes angelorum." (He makes no 
 mention, — see above, — of guardian angels.) 
 I believe the account given above to be 
 the true one, and the reason of adducing it 
 to be, that the Ap. has before his mind 
 the order of the universal church, and 
 prefers when speaking of tlie assemblies of 
 Christians, to adduce those beings wlio, as 
 not entering into the gradation whicli he has
 
 )38 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους a. 
 
 XI. 
 
 s here only t. 
 t Rom. i.iO. 
 
 2 Cur. xi.21. 
 u here only. 
 
 Num vi. Γ). 
 V = Luke xi. 
 
 11. 
 w Heb. i. 12 
 
 only, and 1. c. 
 
 Exiul. xxii. 
 
 27. Jul) xxvi. 
 
 6. P.s. ciii.e. 
 
 κομα, ατιμία < 
 avry εστίν ; οτι 
 
 V 
 
 εστίν, 
 
 f 
 
 16 
 
 15 ν 5\\ • ν s " S''ir 
 
 yvvT} οε eav κομα, οοςα 
 
 αντί * ττεριβολαιου δεδοται 
 
 αυτ^' *" ει δε ης " δο<οει ^ ψιλονει/οος είναι, ημείς τοιαυτην 
 ^ σννηθειαν ουκ εγομεν, ουδέ αι ίκκΧησ'ιαι του θεοΰ. 
 ' I ουτο οε παρα-ννεΛΛω oioc 
 
 wapayytAAM oioc επαίνων, οτι ου /c εις 
 
 ,24. Gal. η. 6. y here only t. ζ John xviii. 39 unly t. fch. viii. 7 var. read.) 
 
 a .\cts XV. Γ) reft. b ver. 2. c Rom. viii. 28. xiii. 4 reft'. 
 
 — 15. αυτη om 44. 138: αντης 7- 110-11-23 sah syr-marg. — aft StSorai ins αντη (siip- 
 plemenlai-y addn, as the variations shew) ABCH &c vss Chr and Thl (text) Ambrst al 
 {αντη Sidorai CH 37. 4G. G8. 73-4. 80. 109 ν syr Dam Amb al) : om DEFGJK all 
 (abt 40) d e Chr^ Thdrt Oec Tertj. — 16. φιλον. ιστι sah. — ecclesia v-edd Syr ar-erp aeth 
 Tert Cypr Ambrst Pacian lat-ff. — 17. rec naoayytWiuv ουκ ίπαινω {prob corrn to suit 
 επαινώ, vv 2 and 22), with C^(appy)D^EJK. &c d copt al Chr Thdrt al : -λλω ουκ -νω 
 
 here described, are conceived as spectators 
 of the whole, delighted with the decency 
 and order of the servants of God. [Stan- 
 ley thinks the most natural explanation of 
 the reference to be, that the Ap. was led to 
 it by a train of association familiar to his 
 readers, but lost to us : and compares the 
 intimations of a similar familiarity on their 
 part with the subjects of which he was 
 treating in 2 Thess. ii. 5—7•] 
 11.] I'et is neither sex insulated and inde- 
 pendent of the other in the Christian life. 
 Iv κυρίω is not the predicate (as Grot., &c.), 
 — ' neque viri exclusis mulieribus . . . par- 
 ticipes sunt beneficiorum per Christum 
 partorum :' nor does it mean according 
 to the ordinance of God, as Chrys., Beza, 
 Olsh., — for the phrase iv Kvpiqj is well 
 known as applying to the Christian slate, 
 ' in Christ.' See e. g. Rom. xvi. 2. 8. 11, 
 12, bis, &c. 12.] And in this, 
 
 the Christian life accords with the ori- 
 ginal ordinance of God. ' For (proof of 
 ver. 11) as the woman is (was taken. Gen. 
 ii. 21 f.) out of the man, so the man is (is 
 born, in the propagation of the human race) 
 by means of the woman ; but all things 
 (both man and woman and all things else ; 
 a general maxim, see 2 Cor. v. 18) are of 
 (as their source, — thus uniting in one great 
 head both sexes and all creation) God.' — 
 They are dependent on one another, but 
 both on Him : the Christian life therefore, 
 which unites them in Christ, is agreeable to 
 God's ordinance. 13.] Appeal to their 
 
 own sense of propriety : cf. ch. x. 15. 
 ev ύμΐν αΰτ.] Each man within himself, in 
 his own judgment. 14.] ή ψυσΊς 
 
 αυτη, 'nature herself:' i. e. the mere 
 fact of one sex being by nature unveiled, 
 i. e. having short hair, — the other, veiled, 
 i. e. having long hair. This plainly de- 
 clares that ma?i was intended to be uncover- 
 ed, — υ•οηιαη, covered. When therefore we 
 deal with the proprieties of the artificial 
 state, of clothing the body, we must be re- 
 gulated by nature's suggestion : that which 
 she has indicated to be left uncovered, we 
 
 must so leave : that which she has covered, 
 when we clothe the body, we must cover 
 likewise. This is the argument. 0ίlσIς•isnot 
 sense of natural propriety , but Nature, — 
 the law of creation. κομ-ά] So Eusta- 
 
 thius, II. γ. p. 288, in Wetst., κόμην δε 
 εχίΐν, και ινκομον tlvai, γνναικώτερόν 
 tariv. διί) και ό Πάρις όνιιδιζεται ώς 
 κόμην 'έχων. On φύσις and κομα Pool 
 observes, ' locus est vexatissimus docto- 
 rum sententiis :' and gives a note of four 
 folio columns ; and Bengel has a long dis- 
 cussion on the lawfulness of wigs. — The 
 Ap. (see above) makes no allusion to the 
 customs of nations in the matter, nor is 
 even the mention of them relevant. 
 15.] See on ver. 14 : comp. Milton, Par. 
 Lost, iv. 304 fF. ΐΓ€ριβολαιον, pro- 
 
 perly a wrapper, or enveloping garment : 
 see refF., and Eurip. Here. fur. 549, and in 
 a met. sense, 1269. " In this passage," 
 says Stanley, " the Ap. would refer to the 
 ' peplum,' which the Grecian women used 
 ordinarily as a shawl, but on public occa- 
 sions as a hood also, especially at funerals 
 and marriages." See a wood-cut in Smith's 
 Diet, of Antt. art. ' peplum.' 16.] Cuts 
 
 off the subject, already abundantly decided, 
 with a settlement of any possible difference, 
 by appeal to universal apo.stolic and eccle- 
 siastic custom. ' But if any man seems to 
 be contentious' (i. e. ' if any arises who ap- 
 pears to dispute the matter, who seems not 
 satisfied with the reasons I have given, but 
 is still disputatious ;' — this is the only admis- 
 sible sense of ίοκύ in this constr. : see reft'. : 
 — for the meaning, ' if it pleases any one' 
 &c. would require τινι δυκίΧ : and ' if any 
 one thinks that he may,' &c. would not 
 agree with φιλονεικεϊν, which is in itself 
 wrong. ■ημ.εΐζ'] declarative : ' let him 
 
 know that' . . .; so, κ' δι κατηκαυχασαι, 
 οΰ συ την ρίζαν βαστάζίΐς, άλλ' )} ρίΖα σί, 
 Rom. xi. 18. 'We,' — the App. and their 
 immediate company, — including the women 
 who assembled in prayer and supplication 
 with them at their various stations, see Acts 
 xvi. 13. τοιαύτη V σννήθίίαν] The
 
 15—19. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 539 
 
 το κρζίσσον αλλ '^ εις το ήσσον συνίρ-νεσθε. 
 
 μεν yap 
 
 σχίσματα εν νμιν 
 
 εν 
 
 ε 
 
 σνί'εργομενων νμων 
 υπaQyίιVf και 
 yap και αιρίσεις εν νμιν είναι, Ίνα οι 
 
 ^^ πρώτον ^^^tr'- 
 
 • •\ t ' / dd = eh. V. 3. 
 
 εκκΑϊ]σια ακονω 2Cor. ίχ. ι. 
 
 , *• ^ e ch. ί. 1υ reft'. 
 
 μέρος τι πίστευω. ^ ^^^^^"'"•^'^ 
 
 1 Λ ' g = liere only. 
 
 ΟΟΚίμΟΙ Thmyd ii. 
 64. iv. 30. 
 
 h absol., Matt, xs.iT. 23, 26 a), fr. i ■= Matt. xtu. 10. xxiv. 6 al. fr. Dan. ii. 28. = ui/a^xt], 
 
 Matt, xviii. 7. k = Gal. v. 20. See Acts v. 17 reft'. I Rom. χίτ. 18 refl. 
 
 Di 137 sah : txt ABC'FG 6. 10. 17- 31-9. 46. 67". 73. 80 d g ν syrr arr seth arm Aug 
 Ambrst Pel Bed.— rec κριιττον and ήττον, with D^?J &c : txt ABCD'FG al (for 
 ητ -ou, (λαττυν FG Thdrt). — σννεσθε 17β. — 18. μt^> om 4 arm Ambrst: yap om it ν 
 aeth arm Pelag. — νμων om 63. 238 al Thl. — rec bef ικκλ. ins τη {(he meang being mis- 
 taken, see note), with mss Oec Thl {tni το αντο for iv ίκκλ. Thdrt) : but om ABCDEFGJK 
 44-8. 57. 72. 80-9. 106-8-10-11-13 al Chr Dam.— υπαρχ. (v νμ. Ο'Ό^ΕΡΟ {tv νμ. om 
 am demid barl Orig Ambrst Bed). — 19. tv νμιν (1st) om D^FG it ν Orig-int lat-ff (not 
 Archel Jer Prim al) : ins aft tivcu D^E vss Archel : bef ητιμ. 48. 7-• — for tivai, νπα^χειν 
 17 : for δίΐ . . . . tivai, tiaiv arm. — aft iva, ins και BD' 37• 71 d e ν sah Ambrst : om 
 
 best modern Comm., e. g. Meyer and De 
 Wette, agree with Chrys. in understanding 
 this, ToiavT. σννηθ., ωςτ{ tpiXoimctHv κ. 
 ερίζίΐν κ. άντιτάττίσθαι. And so Ambros., 
 Beza, Calvin, Estius, Calov., al. But surely 
 it would be very unlikely, that after so long 
 a ii-eatment of a particular stibject, the 
 Ap. should wind up all by merely a censure 
 of a fault common to their behaviour on this 
 and all the other matters of dispute. Such 
 a rendering seems to me almost to stultify 
 the conclusion .•— ' If any will dispute about 
 it still, remember that it is neither our 
 practice, nor that of the Churches, to dis- 
 pute.' It would seem to me, but for the 
 weighty names on the other side, hardly to 
 admit of a question, that the σνιηθίΐα al- 
 ludes to the practice (see ref.) of teamen 
 praying uncovered. So Theodoret, Grot., 
 MichaeUs, Rosenm., Billroth, Olsh., al., and 
 Theophyl. altern. He thus cuts off all 
 further disputation on the matter by appeal- 
 ing to tiniversal Christian usage ; and to 
 make the appeal more solemn, adds τον 
 θεοΰ to a\ ίκκλ., — the assemblies which are 
 held in honour of and for prayer to God, 
 and are His oxen Churches. — Obs. al ίκ- 
 κ\ησία.ι, not ή ΙκκΧησία.. The plurality of 
 independent testimonies to the absence of 
 the custom, is that on which the stress is 
 laid. This appeal, 'to the Chtrches,' 
 was much heard again at the Reformation : 
 but has been since too much forgotten. 
 See, on the influence of this passage on the 
 Christian church, the general remarks of 
 Stanley, vol. ii. pp. 230—233. 
 17 — 34.] CoRRECTiox of abuses re- 
 garding THE AOAP-i; AND THE PAR- 
 TAKING OF THE Supper of the Lord. 
 17.] Refers back to what has been 
 said since ver. 2, and forms a transition to 
 what is yet to be said. ' But this (viz. 
 what has gone before, respecting the veiling 
 ofvomen : not, as Chrys., Theophyl., Grot., 
 Bengel, al., that which follows : see below) 
 I command you (not, ' announce to you,' 
 
 nor ' declare to you from, report,' which 
 are senses of ττοραγγ. unknown to the 
 N. T., where it only means ' to command,' 
 — ' to deliver by way of precept :' see refif. 
 and ch. vii. 10. 1 Thess. iv. 11. 2Thess. 
 iii. 4. 6. 10. 12. This makes it hardly pos- 
 sible to refer τοντο to u-hat follows : for if 
 so, some definite command should imme- 
 diately succeed) not praising (refers to the 
 i —ηινω of ver. 2, and excepts what has 
 been said since from that category) that 
 you come together (i. e. the fact of your 
 assembling) not for the better (so that 
 edification results) but for the worse' (so 
 that propriety is violated, and the result is 
 to the hindering of the faith). These last 
 words on . . . αυνίοχ. are introduced with 
 a manifest view to include more than the 
 subject hitherto treated, and io prepare the 
 tray for other abuses of their assembhes to 
 be noticed. 18.] πρώτον — where is 
 
 the second particular found, answering to 
 this ιτρώτον ? Ordinarily, it is assumed 
 that the σχίσματα are thefrst abuse, the 
 disorders in the Agapse (begins with ver. 
 20), the second. But I am convinced, with 
 Meyer, that this view is wrong. For (1) nei- 
 ther special blame, nor correction of abuse, 
 is conveyed in vv. 18, 19 : nor is it so much 
 as intimated, on the ordinary hypothesis, 
 what the character of these σχίσματα was. 
 And (2) the words of ver. 22, ίτταινίσω 
 νμπς 61' τοντψ ; ούκ ΐπαινω, plainly refer 
 back to ver. 17, and shew that the whole is 
 continuous. Again (3) the ovv of ver. 20, 
 as so frequently, — see ch. viii. 4, and Har- 
 tung,Partikellehre,ii. 22, — resumes the sub- 
 ject broken off by ku'i μίιιος . . yiv. iv νμΙν. 
 The σχίσματα before the Ap.'s mind are, 
 specif cally, tho^e occurring at the Agapie, — 
 but on the mention of them, he breaks off 
 to shew that such divisions were no matters 
 of surprise, but ordained to test them,— and 
 in ver. 20 he returns with the very words, 
 πννίυχημίνων νμων, — to the immediate 
 matter in hand, and treats it at length. See
 
 540 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 XI. 
 
 m Acts i. 15. 
 
 ii. 1 »l. ch. 
 
 %ii. 5. Ps. "' 
 
 xxxvi. 3S. 
 nRcv. i. 10 91 
 
 ο Μ «rk xiv. 8. 
 Gal. Ti. 1 onlyt. 
 
 20 d 
 
 ανεροι yeviovTai £v νμιν 
 
 ίπι το αυτό ουκ ϊστιν " κυοιακον Οίΐπΐ'ον φα-γίΐν 
 καστος yap το ίιδίον οειπνον " πξ)υ\αμβάνίΐ ^ ΐν τω 
 
 συνεονο|ΐΐ£νωΐ' ovu νμων abcd 
 κυοιακον ^ίίπνον ώη-^/ίΐν' JK 
 
 ρ Matt. xiii. 4 al. Ezek. ix. 8. 
 
 ACD^EFGJK mss (nrly) g syrr copt seth al Chr Thdrt Dam lat-ff.— ev νμιν (2ncl) om 
 C Orig (edd) Chr Dam (comm) Jer al.— 20. om^ om D'E'FG it Clem Chr: δε I?.— for 
 tanv, fTi D FG (om d e) g {ja7n non est ν lat-tt') : ουκ tariv οίκος κνριου νμιν τόπος 
 αρτον φα-γίΐν arm : ονχ ως ev τη κνριακη δίΐ φαγιτε κ. ττινιτί Syr ar-erp. — 21. ττρος- 
 λαμβ. Α (not C) 46. 10G-8-222 all Zonar.— for tv τω, tnt τω DEFG {ad ν : in mandu- 
 
 more on ver. 21. — But the question still 
 remains, where is the «ecojirf point, answer- 
 ing to this πρώτον ? Again with Mej-er 
 (and Macknight) I answer, — at ch. xii. 1. 
 The ABUSE OF SPIRITUAL GIFTS, wJiich 
 also created disorder in their assemblies, 
 ch. xiv. 23 al., and concerning which he 
 concludes, xiv. 39, πάντα ίΰσχ7]μόΐ'ως κ. 
 κατά τάζιν -γινίσθω, — was the other point 
 before his mind, when he wrote this πρώτον. 
 That he takes no notice in ch. xii. 1, by any 
 Ιπίΐτα δέ or the like, of what has gone 
 before, will be no objection to the above 
 view to any one but the merest tiro in our 
 Ap.'s style.— There is a trajection of the 
 ακούω, which in the sense, precedes σνηρχ., 
 &c. ev εκκλ.] ' in assembly ;' not 
 
 local, as E. V., ' in the church,' but = tiri 
 TO αντό, ver. 20. <Γ\ίσματα] of tvhat 
 
 sort, is specified below ; viz. that he does 
 not here refer to the party dissensions of 
 ch. i. 10, nor could he say of them μίρος 
 τι πιστεύω, but strictly to σχίσματα 
 which took place at their meetings toge- 
 ther, viz. that each takes before other his 
 own supper, &c. So Chrys. : ού Xeyft, 
 ακούω yap μη Koivy ΰμας αννίειπνείν 
 ακούω κατ' iS'iav υμάς έστιασθαι, καί 
 μη μετά των πενήτων άλΧ' ο μάλιστα 
 Ίκαρον ην αυτών διασΰσαι την διά- 
 νοιαν, τούτο τίθεικε, το του σχίσματος 
 όνομα, δ και τούτον ηι> α'ιτιον and Tlieo- 
 phyl., Oec, Est., Pise, Grot., which last 
 remarks, ' Accidebat jam illis temporibus, 
 quod nostris multo magis evenit, ut res 
 instituta ad concorporandos fideles in 
 vexillum schismatis verteretur.' 
 K. μ-ερος τι ττιστ.] Said in gentleness : 
 q. d. " I am unwilling to believe all I hear 
 concerning the point, but some (hardly 
 ' much,' ' in great part,' as Stanley : nor 
 do his testimonies from Thucyd. i. 23 ; vii. 
 30, bear out this meaning. It might, 
 of course, lie beneath the surface, but 
 is not given by μίυος τι) I cannot help 
 believing." 19.] Set, in the 
 
 divine appointment, the 'ira which follows 
 expressing God's purpose thereby. Our 
 Lord had said ανάγκη ί^θείν τά σκάνδαλα. 
 Matt, sviii. 7 : — and Justin Martyr, Tryph. 
 p. 235, B, quotes among His sayings pro- 
 phetic of division in the church, έσονται 
 
 σχίσματα κ. α'ιοεσεις. From the pointed 
 manner in which δεΙ γάρ και αίρείτεις 
 ... is said, I should be inclined to think 
 that the Ap. tacitly referred to the same 
 saying of our Lord .• ' for there must be 
 (not only dissensions, but) even here- 
 sies (not in the ecclesiastical or doctrinal 
 sense, — as Pelag., Est., Calv., Beza, — see 
 reff., but indicating a further and more 
 matured separation, where not only is 
 there present dissension as in the Agapse, 
 but a deliberate choice and maintenance of 
 party distinction. It does not appear, in 
 spite of all that has been written in Ger- 
 many on the supposed parties of ch. i. 10, 
 that such separations had yet taken place 
 among the Corr. Nor even in Clement's 
 Ep., forty years after this, do we find any 
 allusion to such, but only, as here, to a 
 general spirit of dissension and variance, — 
 see chaps, iii. and xiv. Chrys. would refer 
 αφ. only to the Ayapep : ob ταύτας λέγει 
 τάς των δογμάτων, άλλα τάς των σχισ- 
 μάτων τούτων, — and so Theophyl., Oec. 
 But tliis hardly justifies the climax, uti γαρ 
 καί alp.) among you, that the approved 
 may be made manifest among you ;' viz. 
 through a better and nobler spirit being 
 shewn by them, than by the contentious 
 and separatists. 20.] The same sub- 
 
 ject — resumed from the συποχ. of ver. 18 : 
 see notes on πρώτον. — ' When then ye 
 come together {are assembling, pres. and 
 perhaps here where he deals with particu- 
 lars, to be pressed, — as their intention in 
 thus assembhng is blamed) to one place 
 (reff. and note) it is not to eat {with any 
 idea of eating. But Meyer, Bengel, and 
 many others, render ούκ εστίν here, ' 7ion 
 licet,' as in ούκ εητιν ειπείν and the like : 
 De ΛVette, after Estius, al., as E. V., ' this 
 is not,' ' cannot be called,' — ' id quod agitis, 
 non est.' But the greediness which is 
 blamed, seems to refer ούκ εστίν to the 
 σννίρχεσθαι, and φαγείν to the motive = 
 'ίνα <p !γητε) the Supper of the Lord' 
 (em^ihasis on κνμιακόν, as opposed to icioj' 
 below). κυρ. δεΐπν.] ' the Supper 
 
 instituted by the Lord.' This was an in- 
 separable adjunct, in the apostolic times, 
 to their agapse or feasts of love. Chrys. on 
 ver, 17, and Tertull. Apol, § 39, give an
 
 20—24. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 541 
 
 (paysiv, και ος μεν πειί'ο, ' ος όε μίϋνίΐ. 
 οικίας ουκ έχίτε " εις το εσθ/ειν και πίνίΐν ; 
 κ\ησιας του θεού ''" καταφρονείτε, και 
 
 22 t 
 
 μη yap q = Mati. xm. 
 
 ', ' 8 al. 
 
 ϊί της εκ- rMaU. iv. 2 
 
 fr. 
 
 καταίσνύνετε τους ? Rf,m."x.''i8!'^" 
 
 y ν .f f ,ί Γ - b » ' r - » / ch. ix. 4,5 
 
 •' μΐ} ε^οΐ'τας ; τι ειττω υ/ΐίν ; επαινέσω υμάς εν τούτω; °".'^•.Ρ-, 
 
 ' t" ' " 23 ' ^ 'ζ 'λ /Ο ' ^ - ' νϋ m ill fr 
 
 ουκ ετταινω. εγω yap τταρ^Λαρον αττο του κυοιου τ = λ χ «ί' 
 
 Λ \ α ,<\ c-«f/ >j -> - \ wMatt.: 
 
 Ο κα( τταρεοωκα υμιν, οτι ο κύριος 1τ?σους εν τρ νυκτι ΐ" R' 
 ■ρ ΤΓορεοιοετο εΛαρεί' αρτον, και ευχοριστησας εκΛα- 
 
 Matt. xviii. 
 m. ii. 
 Prov. 
 
 σεν και ειττεί' 
 
 Του 
 
 το μου εστίν το σώμα το 
 
 h. i. 27. 
 'er. 5. 
 y See Lake iii. 
 
 υττερ 
 
 ζ — ch. XV. 1, 3. Gal.i. 9, 12al. a = Luke i. 2. Aclsxvi. 4 2Pet. ii. 21. b = Rom. iv. 25 
 
 refl'. Go.spp. passim. c Luke xxii. I'J. d =» 1 M. L. refl. e ellips., here only ? 
 
 canditm g). — £ΐς ro 3. 17 : αυτω 122. — 22. for ίΐς το ίσθ. κ. πα'., <payHV και vtiv FG 
 g.— rec νμιν (ΐπω, with JK &c syr al Thdrt al {n tiw. νμ. om seth Chr) : txt ABCDEFG 
 al it V Syr copt sah goth al Dam lat-ff. — ίτταυ'ω {conformation to the pres/olli/) BFG 
 it vlat-ff: txt ACDEJK mss (appy) vss Chr Thdrt Dam al. — ίττι τούτω 46 (ij' τουτ. 
 is joined to the precedg in J 23. 44. 71• 80. 177 al)• — 23. for α-κο τον, πάρα DE. — for 
 KVpiov, Oeov FG g. — ο om 17- IK• lect 8. — ιηηους om Β 44: add χριστ. 29^. 238 seth 
 Cyr Bed. — fv η ννκτι jraptS. (in qua nocte it ν al lat-ff) D'FG. — rec τταοίίιΐυτο, with 
 J &c Chr Thdrt al : txt A(B?)CDEFGK 4C Dam.— roi' αρτον DFG.— 24. rec aft 
 £ΐ7Γ£ΐ', add λαβίτί φαγίτί {interpolnfrom Matt xxvi. 26), with C^JK &c syrr al (v arm 
 slav Ambrst λ. και φ. : omg <pay. a;tli Sedal) Cyr-jerus {ίκΧασιν κ. ί^ωκα' τοις (αυτού 
 μαθηταις λίγων Ααβ. </)«γ.) Chr (1ι 1 text and coram) Thrt Dam Oec Thl Ambrst : but 
 om ABCDEFG 3. 17- 23'. 31. 46•. 57- 67^. 70 to 3. 178 (al.') am (al) copt sah arm- 
 venet Bas Cyr (Ath) (Cyr and Dam, but not h 1) Euthal.' Cypr Bed. — rec aft υττίρ νμ. 
 
 ample description of these feasts, which 
 were of the nature of tparoi, or mutual 
 contributions, where each who was able 
 brought his own portion,— and the rich, ad- 
 ditional portions for the poor. See Xen. 
 Mem. iii. 14, in whicli the circumstances 
 bear a remarkable similarity to those in the 
 Cor. church. — Not be/ore this feast, as 
 Chrys. (μ(τά την των μνατηι/ιων κοιι^ω- 
 viav ίπϊ κοινήν ττάιτίς ytnav (ϋωχίαν), 
 al., — but during and after it, as shewn by 
 the institution, by the custom at the Pass- 
 over, by the context here, and by the rem- 
 nants of the ancient custom and its abuse 
 until forbidden by the council of Carthage, 
 — the ancient Christians partook of the 
 Supper of the Lord. The best account of 
 this matter is to be found in the note in 
 Pool's Synopsis on ]\Iatt. xxvi. 26. — It was 
 necessary for the celebration of the Lord's 
 Supper that all should eat of the same 
 bread and drink of the same cup ; and in 
 all probability, that a prayer should be 
 offered, and words of consecration said, by 
 the appointed ministers. Hence cessation 
 of the feast itself, and solemn order and 
 silence, would be necessitated even by the 
 outward requirements of the ordinance. 
 These could not be obtained, where each 
 man was greedily devouring that which he 
 had brought with him : where the extremes 
 were seen, of one craving, and another being 
 drunken. This being their practice, there 
 could be no intention of celebrating the 
 Lord's SujJper, — no discernment of the 
 solemnity of it. On the whole subject, see 
 
 Stanley's note. 21.] ττρολ., as in E. 
 
 v., ' takes before another,' viz. during the 
 feast (f I' τψ ψ.), not, at home, before coming. 
 Obviously the 'ίκαστης must be limited to 
 the i'ich : the poor had no 'iSiov ίΰπνον to 
 take, and were the losers by the selfishness 
 of the rich. ir€ivd] ' one is craving 
 
 (the poor), another is drunken' (the rich. 
 There is no need to soften the meaning of 
 μιθνίΐ : as Meyer says, " Paul draws the 
 picture in sti-ong colours, and who can say 
 that the reality was less strong.'") 
 22.] ' For (a reason for the blame in the 
 foregoing : this should not be : for) have 
 you no houses, to eat, &c. :' meaning, ' at 
 home is the place to satiate the appetite, 
 7iot the assembly of the brethren.' — ' Or do 
 ye shew your contempt for (pres.) the 
 congregation of God {Otov to express, as 
 Bengel, ' dignitatem ecclesiae.' This con- 
 tempt was expressed- by their not sharing 
 with the congregation tlie portion which 
 they brought), — and put to shame those 
 who have not (houses to eat and to drink 
 in, and therefore come to the daily άγάττηι 
 to be fed. There is no reason for rendering 
 with the majority of Comm. τους μι) ΐχον- 
 τσς, 'the poor;' the μι) ίχοντας has a 
 distinct reference to the (χετε before. Meyer 
 refers in support of the meaning, ' the poor,' 
 to Wetst. on 2 Cor. viii. 13, where nothing 
 on the subject is f(jund : De Wefte, to 
 Luke iii. 11, where the case is as here, the 
 preceding ίχων being referred to. The 
 meaning is allowable, e. g. προς yap τον 
 ίχονθ' ύ φθόνος 'ίιιπιι, So])h. Aj. 157:
 
 542 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. XI. 
 
 «■-. - - { • v.vf>/ 25 f' 
 
 filL. reff. υμών τούτο ττοΐίΐτε tig την ^μην αναμνησιν. ως~ 
 
 ^^^]y^} χ,.η, (ίντως και τύ ττοτηριον μετά το ^ζίπνησαι, λέγων Τοΰτο 
 
 Mem. iii. 4, \ / r [ '■^/l' >\f» -.-,; 
 
 3. TO ποτηριον -η καιντ] οιαυηκη ίστιν ίν τω εμο» αιματι 
 
 h = Acts iv. 2. ^ ' _ , , , , , f , \ , y ί ■> , 
 
 iconltn.'iiL. τούτο ποϋΐτζ, ^οσάκις tav πινητί, εις την ίμην αναμνη- 
 χί.2Γ).' GhI. 26 ε ' ' "" ' ^ ' Ο' ν « - \ 
 
 ϋί. i9ai. σιν. ^οσάκις yap εαν εσι/πίτε τον ορτον τούτου και 
 
 k here only t. ^ , ι ^ η' ~ ' h '\ 
 
 ^li^it^^yl"'' TO ποτηριον ττινητε, τον υανητον του κυρίου KaTuyyiA- 
 
 6fi. Mark' λ i " ' 'Ά fl 27 " '^ * ' Π' \ " •<^ 
 
 ui.sii. xiv. λετε, ανρις ου ελσι?. ' ωςτε ος αν εσϋιτι τον αρτον η 
 
 «4. Hfb. ^ ' ^ AS ^ 1_^ ^ k ' ^' 1 .' '' 
 
 i'i'Vu ■''*°"^* Tivrj το ποτηριον του κυρίου αναί,ιως, ενογος εσται 
 
 ins κλωμίΐ'ον, with C^D^EFGJK it syrr goth al Thdrt (h 1 ; elsw2 διδομινον η κλωμενοι/ 
 κατά τον αττοστ.) Dam Oec Thl: Ορνιττομίνον D': διδομίνον copt sail arm : quod pro 
 vobis tradctur ν Cypr Ambrst (ed) : txt ABC 17- C>V Cyr (Cyr-jerus om also το υπ. νμ.) 
 Ath Fulg al. (It is evident from the variations that all are siipplementary glosses.) — 
 την om FG. — 25. om (i. e. from αναμνησιν to αναμνησιν) 178. — f λα/3ί Xtyiov arm Cypr. 
 — αιμ. μου AC 17. 23'. 37. 46. 57. 73. 10!): αι/χ. τω ψω Cyr: αιματι (omg {//ω) 70: 
 ίμω ονόματι 43 : ονόματι μου 23^. — from οσάκις to οσάκις om Α : οσάκις αν πιν. om 
 37. 43-fJ. 57. 70-3-4. 109 seth.— rec αν, with DEFGJK &c Chr al : txt BC &c Thdrt.— 
 26. yap om A 238 aeth goth. — rec av : txt ABC &c. — laOuTt lect 1. — και om lect 1.— 
 rec aft Vorrjp. ins τούτο (for %miformity), with D^EJK &c tol syrr copt al Chr Thdrt 
 Dam al Cypr, : om ABCD'FG I7. 46. 80. 109 it ν sah arm Cyr Cyprj Ambrst Pel Bed. 
 —rec aft αχο. ου, ins αν {ίο fill up the eow*^•)- with D^EJK &c Thdrt al : txt ABCD'FG 
 17. 31. 17« Ath Bas Nest Cyr Chr (Mtt's ms,) Dam: ου om Chr (comm) Thl. — αυτός 
 ίλθη arm. — 27. αισθκηται and πινηται FG. — rec αρτον τούτον {supplementary, or as 
 above), with JK &c ν (ed) copt al : txt ABCDEFG 17- 46. 61. 73. ]09-77-to-9 it al 
 am demid harl tol al sah syr arm Clem Bas Ps-Ath Thdrt Dam Cypr Orig-int al. — for η, 
 και A 39. 46. 109 lect 1 ν (ms) all Clem Ps-Ath Orig-int (Jer) Pel Cassiod al : txt 
 BCDEFGJK &c it ν syr (marg) al Chr Thdrt Dam al Cypr all. — του κυρ. om 108 Bas- 
 ins Chr (somet) : τούτο 2. 115 seth : του om 44. — aft αι^αξιως, add του κυρίου D*J 
 
 ττρός rix)v ίχόντων, Φοίβί, τον νόμον is only what might be expected on the sup- 
 
 τί^ίης, Eurip. Ale. 57 : ττότί μΐν ίττ' ήμαρ position of a special revelation made to 
 
 ί^χον, είτ' υύκ ίίχον αν, where however Paul, of which that Evangelist, being Paul's 
 
 it is cjualified by ΐπ' ημαρ)ν 'What companion, in certain parts of his history 
 
 must I say to you ? Shall I praise you availed himself) that which I also de- 
 
 in this matter 1 I praise you not.' (See livered (in my apostolic testimony) to you, 
 
 ver. 17.) 23 — 25.] To shew them (viz.) that the Lord Jesus, &c.' 
 
 the solemnity of the ordinance which they irapeSiScro] the imperf. : ' He was being 
 
 thus set at nought, he reminds them of betrayed.' "There is an appearance of 
 
 the account which he had before given fixed order, especially in these opening 
 
 them, of its institution by the lord, words, which indicates that this had already 
 
 23.] ' For I (no emphasis on ϊ-γώ, become a familiar formula." Stanley, 
 
 as Meyer, al. : see ch. vii. 28, compared ορτον] not, as Meyer, ' a loaf 
 
 with 32; Gal. vi. 17 ; Phil. iv. 11) received but 'bread:' cf. the common expression, 
 
 from the Lord {by special revelation, see cpayuv αρτον. 24.] On £ΰχ. 
 
 Gal. i. 12. Meyer attempts to deny that ίκλασβν, see note, Matt. xxvi. 26. — Meyer 
 
 this revelation was made to Paul himself, well remarks, that " the filling up of το 
 
 on the strength of άπό meaning ' indirect,' ΰπιρ υμών is to be sought in the foregoing 
 
 τταρά ' (Z?rec<' reception from anyone: but ίκλασίΐ^." Hence the insertion of κλώ/ΐίί'οΐ'. 
 
 this distinction is fallacious : e. g. 1 John τοΰτο -n-oi. . . .] See note on 
 
 i. 5, α'ύτη ίστΊν ι) ΐπαγγίλία i]v άκηκό- Matt, ut supra. 25.] See Luke 
 
 αμ(ν άπ' αΰτοϋ. He supposes that it was xxiii. 20. ωςαιίτ. και τ. ir.] "viz. 
 
 made to Ananias or some other, and com- ϊλαβιν και ίυχ. ΐδωκεν αντοΊς. These 
 
 municated to Paul. But the sole reason last words are implied in ίκλησίν above." 
 
 for this somewhat clumsy hypothesis is the ]\Ieyer. ή καιν. δ. Ιστιν €v τω 
 
 supposed force of the preposition, which Ι|λω αΐ|χ.] ' is the new covenant in (rati- 
 
 has no existence. If the Ap. had referred fied by the shedding of, and therefore s/awi?- 
 
 only to the Evangelic tradition or writings(.'') ing in, as its conditioning element) my 
 
 he would not have used the first person *iw- blood:' z= ίστΊν t) καιν. δ. y) ti' τψίμφ αίμ. 
 
 gtilar, hut παρίλάβιψΒν. I may remark. The position of ίστι ν is no objection to this, 
 
 that the similarity between this account of nor the omission of the art. Meyer would 
 
 the Institution and that in Luke's Gospel, render it, ' is the N. C. by means of my
 
 25—29. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 543 
 
 28 -gf 
 
 του σώματος και του αίματος του κυρίου. ""' ooictjua- m = Lake xiv. 
 
 y ?'^ "1 " ο ' ^ \ ο " ' - >/ 1!' rt-ff. 
 
 Ctrw οε ανΰρωτΓος εαυτόν, και ούτως ίκ του άρτου οίΑχίΓχνΰ. 
 
 ' /) ' > ' - > ' . 29 ' < ' η' ' 33rfff. 
 
 £σ(7ίετω /cat εκ του ποτηριού ττινίτω ο yap Βσυιων κ■α^ ρ- R^m. u. 
 
 ΤΓίΐ'ων ^ κρίμα εαντω εσθ/ει και πίνει μη "^ Βιακρ'ινων το •ϊ*^,•^^^^.^4. 
 
 all (about 20) syr goth fF. — rec bef αιμ. om rou (as unnecessary ?) with mss Thl : ins 
 ABCDEFGJK &c ff.— for κυρίου, χριστού A 17 ath Jer.— 28. tawr. αΐ'θρ. CDEFG 46 
 &c it V goth: txt AB(e sil)JK &c vss Clem Orig all: pref πρώτον 2 Epiph : for 
 ανθρ., ίκαστος 4. 17 Orig. — £/c om 238. — 29. rec aft πίνων ins ανα^ιως (gloss JVomver 
 27), with C'DEFGJK &c vss gr-lat-ff: aval, του κυρίου Chr : aval. εσθ. Orig 
 Ath Cses Hil : om ABC^ 17 sah seth. — (ΐς κρίμα copt Orig Cses. — rec aft το σώμα, ins 
 του κυρίου ((/loss from ver 27), with C^DEFGJK &c vss Chr Thdrt al Ambrst al : om 
 ABC 17• 67^ am' harl' sah (67 non sit pura anima ejus, for μη διακρ. το σωμ., seth : μη 
 
 blood :' i. e. by virtue of its contents, which 
 are ray blood : and this solely on account 
 of the position of Ιστιν. But the meaning 
 is as harsh, as the rendering is unrequired. 
 οσάκις έαν ττίν.] Not a general 
 rule for all common meals of Christians ; 
 but a precept that as often as that cup is 
 drunk, it should be in remembrance of 
 Him : on these last words is the emphasis : 
 see below. 26.] γάρ gives an ex- 
 
 planatory reason for ίΐ'ς r. ΐμήν «I'a/jj'., 
 viz. that the act of eating and drinking is a 
 proclamation of the death of the Lord till 
 His coming. The rendering of KaTuyyiX- 
 \ίτί imperative, asTheophyl.?,Luth., Grot., 
 RUckert, is evidently wrong : he is substan- 
 tiating the application of the Lord's words 
 by the acknowledged nature of the rite. It 
 is a proclamation of His death .• and thus 
 is a remembrance of Him. It is so, by our 
 making mention of in it, and seeing visibly 
 before us and partaking of. His body broken, 
 atid His blood shed. ^XP••? °^ ^^^Tl] 
 
 The KaTayy. is addressed directly to the 
 Corr., not to them and all succeeding 
 Christians ; the Ap. regarding the coming 
 of the Lord as near at hand, in his oirn 
 time, see notes on 2 Cor. v. Thdrt 
 remarks, μίτά yap την αύτον παρυυ- 
 σίαν, ούκίτι χρίία των συμβόλων τοϋ 
 σώματος, αντοϋ φαινομίνου τοϋ σώμα- 
 τος' δια τυΰτο ιΊπίν, ιιχρις ου \_α.ν'\ 
 iXtiy. — The άν has been inserted from not 
 being aware that its absence implies the 
 certainty of the event. See exx. in Lobeck 
 on Phrynichus, pp. 15, 16, note. 
 27.] A consequence, from the nature of the 
 ordinance being, to proclaim the death of 
 the Lord : the guilt of the unworthy par- 
 ticipation of either of the elements. The 
 death of the Lord was brought about by 
 the breaking of His body and shedding Ilis 
 blood : this Death we proclaim in the ordi- 
 nance by the bread broken — the wine poured 
 out, of which we partake : whoever tliere- 
 fore shall either eat the bread or drink the 
 cup of the Lord unworthily (see below ver. 
 2!>) shall be guilty of the body and blood of 
 
 the Lord : i. e. " crimini et pcence corporis 
 et sanguinis Christi violati obnoxius erit:" 
 Meyer. Such an one proclaims the death 
 of Christ, and yet in an unworthy sjjirit — 
 with no regard to that Death as his atone- 
 ment, or a proof of Christ's love : he pro- 
 claims that Death as an indifferent person : 
 he therefore partakes of the guilt of it. 
 Chrysostom strikingly says, a<payfiv το 
 πράγμα άπίφηνεν, οϋκίτι θυσίαν. But 
 the idea ώς και αϋτος ϊκχίας το αίμα, 
 Theophyl. (and Chrys., τι δηποτε ; δη 
 ίζίχβίν αυτό, και σφαγ., &c., as above), is 
 irrelevant here, see ver. 29. The Roman- 
 ists absurdly enough defend by this ») (the 
 meaning of which is not to be changed 
 to και, as is most unfairly done in our 
 E. v., and the completeness of the ar- 
 gument thereby destroyed) their prac- 
 tice of communicating only in one kind. 
 Translated into common la^iguage, and 
 applied to the ordinary sustenance of the 
 body, their reasoning stands thus : ' Who- 
 ever eats to excess, or drinks to excess, 
 is guilty of sin : therefore eating, with- 
 out drinking, will sustain life.' 
 28.] The 8e implies an opj)osition to, and 
 wish to escape from, the ϊνοχος ΐσται. 
 δοκιμ. Ιαυτ.] ' prove himself ' — 
 examine τήν διάνοιαν ϊαντον, as Theodor. 
 mops., cited by Meyer : ascertain by suf- 
 ficient tests, what his state of feehng is with 
 regard to the death of Christ, and how far 
 this feeling is evinced in his daily life— 
 which are the best guarantees for a worthy 
 participation. και ούτως] i. e. ' after 
 
 examination of himself.' The case in 
 which the self-examination ends in an un- 
 favourable verdict, does not come under 
 consideration, because it is assumed that 
 such a verdict will lead to repentance and 
 amendment. 29] ' For he who eats 
 
 and drinks (scil. of the bread and of the 
 cup : certainly not, as Meyer, ' the mere eater 
 and drill ker, he who partakes as a mere 
 act of eating and drinking,' which is harsh 
 to the last degree, and refuted by the 
 parallel, ver. 27• άνα^ίως is spurious, see
 
 544 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 XI. 30—34. 
 
 30 
 
 Χ1Τ. 
 
 alex 
 
 t.xiv. σώμα 
 
 ύ. ΜηΙ. ' , . 
 
 ,'i^"'K' σΓοι, και "" κοιμωνται 
 
 νομίν, ουκ αν " εκρινομ^θα 
 ^ τταιΒίνομίθα, Ίνα μη 
 
 δια τοντο εν νμιν πολλοί ασθενείς /cot ^ αμρω 
 
 t • f 31 ' ϊ^ ' '■ η S' 
 
 t/cavoi. ει οε εαυτούς ο 
 
 '^'^ κρινόμενοι οε 
 
 κόσμω 
 
 συν τω 
 
 ιεκξ}ΐ- 
 
 υπο κυρίου 
 
 κατακξ)ΐθωμζν. 
 
 33 WW 
 
 ει τις 
 
 αδελψοι μου, 
 ε/νδεχεσθε. 
 Ίνα μη *^ εις ' κρίμα " συνε^)^»}σ 
 
 ωςτε, 
 αλλήλους 
 
 σννίξί'^ομίνοι ^ 
 "* ττεινα, εν 
 
 >ε. 
 
 τα 
 
 εις το (pajiiv 
 ot/cw ίσΟίίτω, 
 
 Λ S e ' * 
 
 λοιπά ως αν 
 
 ch. vii. 39 
 
 refl'. 
 t = Actsxii. 12 
 
 refl. 
 η = Acts xiii. 
 
 27. 1 Pet. 
 
 iv.O? 
 V Luke xxiii. 
 
 IH. Hcb. xii 
 
 7,10.2Chr()n 
 
 X. 11. Pruv. 
 
 xix. 18. 
 
 wMatt.xxvii. ΕΛΡω όιαταί::,ομαι 
 
 Ά. John viii. -' r 
 
 10. Kora. ii. 1. Esth. ii. 1. ww = Phil. ii. 12 refl". χ ver. 17. y ver. 22 refT- 
 
 ζ John T. 3. Acts XV ii. If) Hi. t aver. 21. b anarth., Mark ii. 1. eh. xiv. 35. c ver. 17 lefi• 
 
 dvcr. 2». e Horn. XV. 24. Phil. ii. 23. f = ch. vii. 17 refl'. 
 
 δ. Γ. σ. om Orig Ath Hil al). — 30. δια τουτ. yap sah. — πολ. tv νμ. lect 1. — ικανοί ιτι 
 αντοι ίίσι οι και κοιμωντες «σι arm. — 31. rec €ΐ γαρ {corrn as more suitable), with CJK 
 &c copt sah syrr al Chr Thdrt al Aug,: txt ABDEFG 17- 4(J. 10!) g (^ϊζοώί d e ν 
 Orig-int Pel Ainbrst) goth Clem Augi•— sicpiro/iii/ 4G-7. 93. lOS'-O-'iO lectt 8. 17 Chr 
 Thdrt all: ίκρινωμίθα lect I : ίκριναμίν 73. 92. — ίκρπ'α/χίΰα 92. — 32. ηττο τ. κυρ. FG. 
 — bef κΐ'ρ., ins row BC 37. 72. 80. 178 Clem Dam (te.xt) : om ADEFGJK &c C«s Chr 
 Thdrt Damj Oec Thl. —κτοσμω τοι;Γω FG ν lat-ff. — 33. μου om 67" d syr* arm Ambrst 
 Aug. — 34. rec aft a ins δί {for connexion), with D^EJK &c demid syrr al Clem Chr 
 Thdrt Dam al Bed : om ABCD^FG 17- 23. 4G. 57- 177 to 9 it ν copt sah al Chr (comm) 
 Cypr Ambrst Pel.— fi' oik. tavrov arm. — £ΐς κρίσιν Κ. — συνιρχεσθί F al. — τα δε . . , . 
 διαταζ. om 80. — διέλθω G3. — ϋιαταζωμαι AD(E?)FG 44 : τότε διατάζομαι arm : δ. νμιν 
 232 tol sah al-latt. 
 
 var. readd.) eats and drinks judgment to 
 himself (i. e. brings on himself judgment 
 by eating and drinking. κρίμα, as is 
 evident by vv. 30 — 32. is not ' damnation ' 
 [καΓακριμα], as rendered in our E. V., a 
 mis translation, which has done infinite 
 mischief), not appreciating {dijudicans, 
 Vulg. μη ίζίτάζων, μη ίννοών ώς χρή, 
 rh μίγίθος των προκειμένων, μι) λογιζό- 
 μενος τον ίίγκον τΐ)ς δωρεάς. Chrys.) the 
 hody (soil, of the Lord : here standing for 
 the tvhole of that which is symbolized by 
 the Bread and the Cup, the Body and 
 Blood. The mystery of these, spiritually 
 present in the elements, he, not being spi- 
 ritual, does not appreciate : and therefore, 
 as in ver. 27, falls under the divine judg- 
 ment, as trilling with the death of Christ. 
 The interpretation of Stanley, " not dis- 
 cerning that the body of the Lord is in 
 himself and in the Christian society, and 
 that it is as the body of the Lord, or 
 as a member of that body, that he par- 
 takes of the bread," is surely somewhat 
 far-fetched, after τοντό μου ίστιν το 
 σώμα, ver. 24). 30.] E.xperi- 
 
 mental proof of the κρίμα ίαντψ, from 
 the present sicknesses and frequent deaths 
 among the Cor. believers. — Meyer dis- 
 tinguishes ασθενείς, veaklings, persons 
 whose powers have failed spontaneously, 
 from άρρωστοι, invalids, persons whose 
 powers are enfeebled by sickness ; and cites 
 Tittmann, Synon. p. 7"• — a'^^• and app. 
 refer to physical, not (as Olsh., altern.) 
 moral weaknesses. 31.] Se contrasts 
 
 with this state of sicknesses and deaths : it 
 
 might be otherwise. This διεκριν(ίμ€θα 
 (parallel with δοκιμαζετω before) should be 
 rendered by the same word as δια κρίνων 
 before, the idea being the same. ' Appre- 
 ciate,' if etymologically understood, is the 
 nearest to the meaning : in Latin dijudico, 
 which the Vulg. has, is an excellent render- 
 ing, — preserving also the 'judico,' so essen- 
 tial to the following clause. In the E. V. 
 ' If we icoiild judge ourselves, we should 
 not be judged,' the tenses are wrong : it 
 should be, ' If ive had judged ourselves, we 
 should not have been judged .•' ' no such 
 punishments would have befallen us.' [Thus 
 I wrote in my two former editions : and so 
 also Stanley. But this collocation of the 
 (imperfect) tenses may be rendered either 
 way. Donaldson, Gr. Gr., p. 204, renders 
 fi η ε'ίχεν, εδιδον άν, 'si quid haberet, 
 daret :' and so we have it in ^schyl. 
 Suppl. 244, Κ(ΐϊ τάλλα πόλλ' ΐπεικάσαι 
 δίκαιον ην, ει μη τταρόντι φθόγγος ην ΰ 
 σημανών : vEschin. Ctes. p. 8G, ει δ' ην 
 ('π'αγκαΐοΐ' ρηθί/ναι, ού Δ^ϊμοσΟένους ην 
 6 λόγος: and other places (Bernhardy, 
 p. 37G). But as certainly, we find the 
 other sense : e. g. Herod, iii. 25, of Cam• 
 byses, εί . . . άπηγε οπίσω τον στρατΌν 
 .... ην α.ν σόφος άνηρ. So that the 
 Ε. V. may here be kept, if thought de- 
 sirable. In John v. 46, our translators 
 have adopted the other rendering : ' If ye 
 had believed Moses, ye would have be- 
 lieved me :' but in viii. 39. 42, have ren- 
 dered as here." — Nov. 185G.] 
 32.] ' But now that we are judged, 
 it is by the Lord (emph.) that we are
 
 XII. 1, 2. 
 
 Ι1Ρ0Σ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 545 
 
 XII. Πίρί δε των ^ πνίνμίΐτικων, αδελφοί, ου θζΧω^~^, 
 
 υμάς ayvoeiv. 
 
 Γίδα 
 
 τε ΟΤΙ οτί ευνη ϊ/τε, ττρυς 
 
 Rom. i. 11. 
 h. xii. 1. 
 \ b R.MTi. i 13. 
 
 τα xi a.'i. ch. X. 
 
 1. 1 The 
 iv. 13. 
 
 Chap. XII. 1. αγν. αίιλφ. ΟΈΡΟ al it ν seth lat-ff. — 2. otSare ova Syr ar-erp : add 
 Ss sah.— rec om ort {either a mistake, or a corrn to help the constr : the same of the 
 omn of on), with B(e sil)FG &c d e Syr copt al Oec (te.xt) Ambrst : om on Κ al 
 Thdrt (mSj ort orf) Dam Oec (coram) Aug, : t.xt ACDEJ all (abt 50) g ν syr (sab) 
 
 being chastised (to bring us to repentance), 
 that we may not be (eternally) condemned 
 with the (unbelieving) world.' 33.] 
 
 General cunclusion respecting this dis- 
 order. ' So then ('quae cum ita sint'), my 
 brethren (milder persuasive : as has been 
 the as.sum])tion of the first person, vv. 
 31, 32) when ye are coming together to 
 eat, wait for one another (contrast to 
 'ίκαστας .... πμοΧαμβανίΐ, ver. 21 : as 
 Theophyl. : ονκ ηπίΐ', άλλήλοις μίτάδοτι, 
 αλλ', ΐκίίχίηβί' CUKiVLOt' 'ότι κυινά ιίσι 
 τά ίκΰσι ίίςφίρήμινα, και £tl άνιιμίΐίΐν 
 την κοιί'ήν τυνίλίνσιν). 34.] The 
 
 άγάττηι were not meals to satiate the bodily 
 appetites, but for a higher and holier pur- 
 pose : let the hungry take oft' the edge of 
 his blinder at home : see ver. 22. 
 τα δέ λοιττά] viz. things omitted (probably 
 matters of detail) in the above directions. 
 Perhaps they had asked him questions 
 respecting tiie most convenient time or 
 manner of celebration of the Lord's sup- 
 per : points on which primitive practice 
 widely differed. ojs av έλθω, see reff., 
 
 ' whenever I shall have come.' ώς «i', as 
 or άι•, implies uncertainty as to the event 
 anticipated : see Kiihner, vol. ii. p. 5155, 
 § 807. Ch.wp. XII.— XIV.] On the 
 
 ABUSE OF Spiritual Gifts : especi- 
 ally PROPHESYIXG, and speaking ν\•ΙΤΗ 
 TONGUES. The second particiclar requir- 
 ing correction in their assemblies, see ch. 
 xi. 18, note. Chrys. well says: τοϋτο 
 ίίτταν τι) χωυιον σφόδρα εστ'ιν ασαφές' την 
 δί άσήψίιαν η των πραγμάτων άγΐΌΐά τί 
 και ίλλίίψις ποίΗ των τότ( μϊν συμ- 
 βαινόντων, ννν ΐί ο!) γινομίνων. Horn, 
 xxix. init. XII.] On the nature, 
 
 INTENT, and worth OF SPIRITUAL GIFTS 
 
 IN GENERAL. 1 — 3.] The foundation of 
 
 all spiritual utterance is the confession of 
 Jesus as the Lord : and without the Spirit, 
 no sv.ch confession can be made. 1. J 
 
 8e transitional. Some have thought that 
 the Corr. had referred this question to tlie 
 Ap.'s decision : but from the ov θίλω νμ. 
 dyvotiv, it rather looks as if, like the last, 
 it had been an abuse which he had heard 
 of, and of his own instance corrects. 
 T. Ίτνευματικών] Most likely neuter, as 
 ch. xiv. 1, spiritual gfts : so Chrys., Theo- 
 phyl., Oec, Beza, Calov., Est., al., De 
 Vol. II. 
 
 Wette, and Meyer : — not masc, as ch. xiv. 
 37 : so Grot., Hammond, al., and Locke, 
 who maintains that the subject of this sec- 
 tion is not the things, but the persons, 
 quoting ch: xiv. 5. But surely the things 
 are the main subject, enounced here, 
 vv. 4 — 11, and treated of tlirough the 
 rest of the chap. ; the inspired persons 
 being mentioned only incidentally to them. 
 Others, as Storr, Billroth. Wieseler cited 
 by Meyer, and De W., limit τά πν. to the 
 speaking xi-ith tongues, which indeed is 
 mainly treated of in the latter part of the 
 section (see ch. xiv. 1) : but here the gifts 
 of the spirit generally are the subject. 
 οΰ %i\. ίιμ. άγν. ] Theodor. Mops, cited by 
 Meyer; θέλω υμάς και των πνευματικών 
 χ^αρισμάτων tlSfvai την τάζιν,ωςτί βυνλο- 
 μαί τι και ττίρΊ τοντι•η' ίΐτίίΐν. See reff. 
 2.] Reason ivhy they iranted instruction 
 concerning spiritual gifts — because they 
 once were heathen, and could not therefore 
 have any experience in spiritual things. 
 Thus Meyer, and so far rightly : but the 
 stress of this reason lies in the words άφωνα 
 and ώς αν iiytaQt, which he has not suf- 
 ficiently noticed : — ' Ye know, (that) when 
 ye were Gentiles (the constr. is an anaco- 
 luthon, beginning with o'lcaTt on, and then 
 as if oicare ort had been merely a formula 
 for ' ye know,' passing into the construction 
 so common, that of placing ort after such 
 verbs as μίμνημηι, οΙΰ<ι, ακούω, and the 
 like, an ellipsis taking place of του χρόνου, 
 as Lysias actually fills it up in one place, 
 tKfii ov του χρόνου μνησΰίντας, ore .... 
 in Poliuch. (τίρί δημίύσίως,κ.τ.Χ.'),'^. 151, 
 34. Thus II. ξ. 71i yδ(a μεν yap, ore 
 πρήφρων ΛανηοΙΰιν άμιηην: Plato, Menon. 
 p. 7!') μέμνησαι or' iyio σοι άρτι άττεκρι- 
 νάμην. See more exx. in Kiihner's Gr. 
 Gramm. ii. 480) led about (άπαγ. not 
 necessarily, ' /ef/ j/'row^ ;' and the context 
 seems rather to favour the idea of being 
 ' led at will,' blindly transported hither and 
 thither,' — and so De W., and Estius, " cpia- 
 litercunque, temere, pro nutu ducentium, 
 et hue illuc illos circamag:entium, abiluctos 
 fuisse ") to idols which were without 
 utterance (' the God in whom you now 
 believe is a living and speaking God — speak- 
 ing by his Spirit in every believer : how 
 should you know any thing of such spiritual 
 Ν Ν
 
 546 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 XII. 
 
 i ell . : 
 k Act 
 
 ίώωλα τα αψωνα ως 
 
 liMarkvi.ftfi. yvw^iUo υμιν ΟΤΙ ουύίΐς 
 
 'tjiia Ιησούς* και 
 
 mai. 
 
 reft•.' 
 = Μ 
 Acts ϋ. 45. 
 
 1 '^ 
 
 αν 
 
 Τ7γ£ 
 
 ΐν.35. Gen. 1' Άΐ'άθι 
 ϋ. 19. 
 
 mMatt.xxvi. Γι7 al. Dent. 
 
 ii. 28 al. Ezek. xli». 23, 
 ρ Rum. ix 3 reft 
 
 η m ' ' 
 
 τυε απα•γομίνοι. 
 ' fv πνίνματι βίον λαλωυ 
 υυδίίς δύναται ίΐπίΐΐ' Κυ 
 
 λέγει 
 ριος• 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 Ερρ., here only, 
 ο Matt. χχϋ. 43. 
 
 η Ι. like ϋ. 1Γ 
 . 27. ίν. 1. Rev. i. lu ι 
 
 Jolin XV. 15. Ads 
 (E/ek. xxxvii. '.I.j 
 
 seth al very-m-ff gr and lat. — ra om i)l. — for άφωνα, άμορφα FG : om Hi). — ανηγισθε 
 B=Gal: asceinhi/atis Ang: ως α7Γ?;γ. 30: πως απηγ. Ι^Η.—αιαγομίνοι 'd'J. 46.-3. tv 
 om Chr Did Thl.— λαλωΐ' om DEFG it lat-ff (not Aug al).— rec α/σοκτ (corrn to bring 
 it into govei-nment by Xtyft, whereas it is an oratio directa), with DEFGJK &c it sah 
 Origi Chr Thdrt Dam al Novat Hil (ed) : ιησον F ν Cyrj lat-tf: t.xt ABC G. 17• 40. 109 
 copt syrr ath al Orig, Cyr.,.— rec κνριον ijj^orv (.see above), with DEFGJK &c it syr 
 Ath Mac Chr Thdrt al Did (lat) Ruf al : txt ABC C. l?• 31. 46. 672. 73. ItO ν Syr copt 
 
 speech or gifts at all, who have been accus- 
 tomed to dumb idoh?'), just as ye hap- 
 pened to be led ' (scil., on each occasion : 
 the force of «i- being to indicate the in- 
 definiteness, i. e. in this case, the repe- 
 tition of the act : so Xen. Anab. i. 5. 2 : o'l 
 μίν ih'oi, ίπύ τις διώκοι [whenever any 
 followed them] ΤΓροδρημόντίς αν ί'ιστή- 
 Κίκταν, — and Eurip. Phoen. 401 : ποτΐ μίν 
 ίς ήμαρ ίίχον, tlr' ουκ Λχον αν. See other 
 exx. in Kuhner, ii. 93, 94).— These last 
 words seem to me to imply the absence of 
 all ficed principle in the oracles of Hea- 
 thendom, such as he is about to announce 
 as regulating and furnishing the criterion 
 of the spiritual gifts of Christendom. This 
 ώς άΐ' ηγίσΗε might take a man to contra- 
 dictory oracles, the whole system being an 
 imposture— their idols being void of all 
 power of utterance, and they being there- 
 fore imposed on by the fictions of men, or 
 evil spirits, who led them. Chrys., Oec, 
 Theophyl., make this refer to the difference 
 between the heathen μάντις, who was pos- 
 sessed by an evil spirit, and therefore tiX- 
 KtTO ίιττϋ του ττηνματος Otifjuii'og, ohoiv 
 ίίοώς ων λέγΕί, and the Christian προφήτης, 
 — which however is entirely unwarranted 
 by the context. 3.] The negative and 
 
 positive criteria of inspiration by the Spirit 
 of God : viz. the rejection, or confession, of 
 Jesus as the Lord. διό, ' because ye 
 
 have been hitherto in ignorance of the 
 matter.' I ν ttv. itov — lv ττν. άγ.] 
 
 The Spirit of God, or the Holy Spirit, is 
 the Power pervading the speaker, tlie Ele- 
 ment in which he speaks. So Schottgen, 
 on ^latt. xxii. 43, quotes from the Rabbis, 
 ' David saw cnpn nnn, in the Holy Spirit.' 
 λαλών λε'γίΐ,] On the difference of 
 meaning between λαλώ, ' to discourse,' ' to 
 s;>ea^,' and λέγω, 'to say,' the former of 
 the act of utterance absolutely, the latter 
 having for its object that which is uttered, 
 see note on John viii. 25. [In all the 
 seeming exceptions to this, λαλώ may be 
 justified as keeping its own meaning of ' to 
 discourse :' we may safely deny that it is ever 
 
 'to soy' simply. Nov. 185G.] άνάθ. 
 
 Ίησ.] ' Jesus (not Christ, the Name of 
 office, itself in some measure the oltject of 
 faith, — but Jesus, the personal Name, — 
 the historical Person whose life was matter 
 of fact : the curse, and the confession, are in 
 this way far deeper) is accursed ' (see Rom. 
 ix. 3, note). So κύρ. Ίησ., ' Jesus is Lord ' 
 (all that is implied in Kvpios, being here 
 also implied : and we must not forget that 
 it is the LXX verbum solenne for the Heb. 
 JEHOΛ^AH). By these last words the influ- 
 ence of the Holy Spirit is widened by the 
 Ap. from the supernatural gifts to which 
 perhaps it had been improperly confined, to 
 the faith and confession of every Christian. 
 — It is remarkable that in 1 John iv. 1, 2, 
 where a test to try the spirits is given, the 
 human side of this confession is brought 
 out, — λησοϋν χριστορ iv σαρκΐ ίληΧνΟύτα, 
 — John having to deal with those who de- 
 nied the reality of the Incarnation. Or 
 also, as Bengel : " Paulus prsebet criterium 
 veri contra gentes : Johannes, contra ya/iO* 
 prophetas." 4 — 6.] 'But (as con- 
 
 trasted to this absolute unity, in ground 
 and principle, of all spiritual influence) 
 there are varieties (in reft'. 2 Chron. and 
 Ezra, used of the courses or divisions of the 
 priests) of gifts (χαρίσματα = eminent 
 endowments of individuals, in and by which 
 the Spirit indwelling in them manifested 
 Himself,— the φαιίρωσις τον πνεύματος 
 in each man : — and these either directly 
 bestowed by the Holy Ghost Himself, as in 
 the case of healing, miracles, tongues, and 
 prophesying, or previously granted them by 
 God in their unconverted state, and now 
 inspired, halloived, and jjotentiated for the 
 work of building up the church, — as in the 
 case of teaching, exhortation, knowledge. 
 Of all these gifts, faith working by love 
 was the necessary substratum and condition. 
 See Neander, Pfl. u. Leit. pp. 232 if.), but 
 the same Spirit (as their Bestower, — see 
 the sense filled up in ver. 11) : 5.] 
 
 and there are varieties of ministries (ap- 
 pointed services in the church, in which as
 
 S— 7. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους a. 
 
 547 
 
 Ιησυυς, ει μη " tv ττιηνματι ayi^o 
 ρισματων ίίσιν, το 0£ αυτό πνεύμα 
 νιων ίίσιν, και ο αυτός κύριος 
 ματων ίίσιν, και ο αυτός υίος ο 
 ττασιν. ' ίκάστω δε δί'δοται η 
 
 α ver. Π. Rom. νϋ. 6 reff. 
 
 4 q 
 
 δίσ< 
 
 δέ 
 
 ε χα- 
 ζιακο- 
 
 r Rom.Cv. 15. 
 vi 2ο. xi. 
 
 2W)xii. 6 al. 
 s Acts i. 17. 
 , 1 al t. 
 
 «ρεσείς 
 icat ''διαιρέσεις 
 icat '' διαιρέσεις ενεργ»)- 
 " εΐ'εργων ^ τα τταΐ'τα ei> 
 φανίρωσις του τη^εΰ^ατος ^ ;^- \;;'+„,^^ 
 
 vch. νϋί. Β al.fr. w 2 Cor. iv. aoulyf. 
 
 sail seth al Origj Cyr Did (gr) Bas Epiph Genn lat-ff. — tt μη ri copt sail.— 5. ο δε αυτός 
 41. 73. 115-19 d e ν Syr arm slav gr-lat-ff (not Thdrt, Dam Oec Irenj Aug all). — 
 6. rec ο δε αυτός {corrn to express contrast. It can hardly have been altered to και ο 
 ίο conform to the precedg clause, the first remaining το (it) v/\th AJ Κ Sec (Deus hie inem 
 est copt) : ο αυτός οε DEFG : txt BC 3?. 4G. 10!)-37 Orig.— rec ias εστί bef θεός {sup- 
 jjlementary, as appears from the varr), with JK (see Β below) &c : also (but most ΰεος 
 εστί) syr al Orig Thdrt Dam Oec: om AB(o fvff.ywi/ εστί B)CDEFG 17. 28. 3G-7. 
 73. 10.9-77 to 9 it V Syr sah slav (exc mod) Eus Ath Bas Chr Thl Iran Hil all.— τα om 
 D'. — 7. δε om J 37- 238.— aft φανεοωσις and τα οημεια {by which Thl explains η φαν. 
 
 their channels of manifestation the ■χαρίσ- 
 ματα would work), but the same Lord 
 (Christ, the Lord of the church, whose it 
 is to appoint all ministrations in it. These 
 διακονίαι must not be narrowed to the ec- 
 clesiastical orders, but kept commensurate 
 in extent with the gifts which are to find 
 scoi)e by their means, see vv. 7 — 10) '• 3•ΐιά 
 varieties of operations (effects of divine 
 ίΐ'έργειαι : not to be hmited to miraculous 
 effects, but understood again commeusu- 
 rately with the gifts of whose working they 
 are the results), and the same God, Who 
 works all of them in all persons ' (all the 
 χαρίσματα in all who are gifted). Thus 
 we have God the Father, the First 
 Source and Operator of all spiritual influ- 
 ence in all : God the Son, the Ordainer 
 in His Church of all ministries by which 
 this influence may be legitimately brought 
 out for edification : God the Holy Ghost, 
 dwelling and working in the church, and 
 effectuating in each man such measure 
 of His gifts as He sees fit. 
 7 — 11.] These operations specified in their 
 variety, but again asserted to be the work 
 of one and the same Spirit. 7.] 'To 
 
 each individual, however (the emphasis 
 on εκοίστω, as shewing the character of what 
 is to follow, viz. individual distinction of 
 gifts. 8e again contrasted with the ό 
 
 avTOS of the last ver. ; though the workings 
 of One God, One Lord, One Spirit, they are 
 bestowed variously on each man), is given 
 the manifestation of the Spirit (not, as 
 Meyer, al., the means of manifesting the 
 Spirit which dwells in him [gen. obj.] : 
 but, as De W., the manifestation by which 
 the Spirit acts [gen. subj.] ; it is a general 
 term including χαρίσματα, (ιακοι•ίαι, and 
 ενεργίιματίΐ) with a view to profit' (with 
 the profit of the wlioU; body as the aim : 
 see reff.). 8 — 10.] It has been dis- 
 
 puted, whether or not any studied arrange- 
 
 N 
 
 ment of the gifts of the Spirit is here found. 
 The most recent and best advocates of the 
 two views are Meyer and De Wette. Meyer 
 gives the following arrangement : grounding 
 it mainly on what he believes to be the in- 
 tentional use of ixepo) δε as distinguished 
 from άλλω δε, and pointing out a new cate- 
 gory : — I. gifts having reference to intel- 
 lectual power : {I) λόγος σοφίας. (2) λόγος 
 γνώσεως. II. {έτερψ δέ) gifts, whose con- 
 dition is an exalted faith (i^lauben6=Uroig- 
 mue) : {\) faith itself. (2) practical work- 
 ings of the same, viz. (a) ίάματα. (b) δυ- 
 νάμεις. (3) oral working of the same, viz. 
 ■προφητεία. (4) critical working of the 
 same, the διάκρισις ττνειιμάτων. III. gifts 
 having reference to the γλώσσαι : (1) 
 sjieaking with tongues : (2) interpretation 
 of tongues. — To this De Wette objects, (1) 
 that ψ μεν, ετέμψ δε, ετΊρψ δε, do not 
 stand with any reference to one another, 
 but ετ'ερψ δέ is in each case opposed to the 
 a\X(/j δε which immediately precedes it, and 
 followed by an αλλί;^ δε similarly opposed 
 to it : therefore neither can tlie one betoken 
 the genus, nor the other the species. (2) If 
 any thing could be relied on as marking a 
 division, it would be the repeated κατά το 
 αυτό 7Γ)'., iv τψ αυτ. πν., and the con- 
 cluding πάΐ'τα δε ταντα ver. 1 1 : but even 
 thus we get no satisfactory partition, for in 
 ver. 10 dissimilar gifts are classed together. 
 
 (3) We must not look for a classification, 
 for the catalogue is incomplete, see ver. 28. 
 
 (4) The classification given is objectionable. 
 Speaking with tongues is plainly more 
 nearly alUed to προφητεία than ττροφ. to 
 gifts of healing : and the two, tongues and 
 jirophesying, are subsefjueiitly treated of 
 together. Besides which, Kling (Stud. u. 
 Krit. 1839, p. 482) rightly remarks, that 
 both διάκρισις ττν. and ερμηνεία γλ. have 
 reference to the understanding. — I am in- 
 clined to think that Do W.'s objections are 
 
 Ν 2
 
 548 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους λ. 
 
 XII. 
 
 x = ch.vi.R. τΓοος ΤΟ ουμφΕρον. ω μεν yap οια του ττΐ'ίνματος 
 
 yActsxs.20. St'SoToi λογος "" σοφ'ιας, ^άλλω δί λόγος γΐ'ώσεως- '^ κατά 
 
 Hrb. χϋ. II). χ,\ - Qz'/ ς»^' ο' -1- / 
 
 ucut.xxui. ΤΟ ηυτο ττνίνμα, ίτίρω όί πιστις ίν τω αυτω πνίυ- 
 
 ^Ιη\ψ.'ϊΐ7 fi"'''ti (ίλλω ^£ '^ ■χ^αμισματα ιαμάτων kv τω ίνι πνίυματι, 
 a-i'h.ii6ai. ^" αλλω δε ^ tvioyiiuaTa δυΐ'άμεωΐ', αλλω οε ^ ττρυώητεια, 
 
 b-2Cor.xi6 ^^ Ν ι cv / i ' « / ^\ k ί 1 Λ 
 
 ο-'καί*ώ9/3. «λλω δε ' ύιακρισίΐς ' πνευμάτων, ετερω οε γένη -γλωσ- 
 
 Ter.n. d νν. 28, 30 only. Jer. χΙ. 6. e ver. β. f = Matt. vii. 22. Acts ii 22 al.t 
 
 g= Rom xii. fi. ch. xiii. 2al. fr. li Rum. xiv. 1. Heb. v. 14 only. Job xxx vii. 1(1. i — eh. xiv, 12, 
 
 32. IJohniT. 1. 1 Tim. iv. 1. k = Matt. xiii. 47. χτϋ. 21. ( Mk. Ter.28. ch. xiv. 10. 1 Act.•, ii. 4 refiF. 
 
 T. TTi'.) 70. — aft σνμφ. add ίκαστον arm. — 8. yap om g ν Syr sah arm Thl Pelag. — 
 Xoyov 4«.— 5f om d e Tert Hil (soraet) al-latt.— 9. δε (1st) om BD'EFG 47• dT' it ν 
 Syr Clem Orig lat-ff: ins ACD^JK mss nrly (appy) copt sah syr al Cses Cyr-jeruSj Chr 
 Thdrt^ Dam al Didj Thli Aug,.— πνίκ^ιαπ to ττιαιμαη om 177• 238 lect 8. — h (2nd) 
 om DEFG it ν Syr lat-H'.— χαριτ^α d e g^ ν Tert Jer (al.>).— rec for tvi, αυτω {corrn 
 to conform to theforeyoinfj), with DEFGJK &c vss Clem Chr Thdrt al : txt AB 17. 31. 
 (i7'. 74. {JO al d e V lat-tf {tv τω en nv. om C Tert, Cassiod). — 10. δι (1st) om 
 D'(E.')FG it V al.— ffffiyart {-yt" DE) DEFG operatio it ν lat-ff (not Auga al) : -yuai 
 46: -γίίμα 19. — δι^νιμίως it Cyr-jerus lat-ff (not Jer all). — δι {'2nd, Srd, and 4th) om 
 BDEFG it V Clem lat-ff': ins ACJK mis (appy) syrr copt al Caes (om 4th) C hr Th drt 
 Dam βΙ.—τΓροφητειαι 4G Chr. — διακρισις (corrn) CD'FG al it ν all Clem Bas, lat-tf. — 
 
 valid, as applied to a rigorous arrangement 
 like Meyer's ; but that at the same time 
 there is a sort of arrangement, brought 
 about not so much designedly, as by the 
 falling together of similar terms, — λό/ος 
 yv.,\oyoQno(p., — ykvr|y\^ιlσaώl',t^ψ.y\ωa- 
 σων. Unquestionably, any arrangenn nt 
 must be at fault, which proceeding on psy- 
 chological grounds, classes together the 
 speaking with tongues and the interpreta- 
 tion οϊ Ιο\Λξ\ι&^ : the working of miracles, 
 and the discernment of spirits. I believe 
 too that Meyer's distinclion between ίτί^ιψ 
 δι and άλλψ δι is imaginary : see Matt, 
 xvi. 14. Heb. xi. 35, 3(j. 8.] γάρ 
 
 appeals to waiter of fad, as the ground of 
 the assertion in ver. 7, both as to the διδοται 
 and as to the ττρϋς το συμφέρον. — ω μεν 
 . . . αλλω δε, a loose constr. as in ver. 28. 
 λόγος σοφίας . . . λόγος γνώσεως] 
 What is the distinction ? According to Ne- 
 ander, σοφία is the skill, which is able to 
 reduce the whole practical Christian life into 
 its due order in accordance with its founda- 
 tion principles (see Pfl. u. Leit. p. 247) ; — 
 γνώσις, the theoretical insight into divine 
 things ; and simly Olsh and Billroth. But 
 Bengel. al., take them conversely, γνώσ. for 
 the practical, σοφ. for the theoretical. Both, 
 as De W. remarks, have their grounds in 
 usage : σηφία is practical Col. i. 9, as is 
 γΐ'ώσις• Rom. xv. 14, but they are theoreti- 
 cal respectively in 1 Cor i. 17 ff- and viii. 1. 
 Estius explains λόγος σοφίας, ' gratiam de 
 lis quae ad doctriiiam religionis ac pietatis 
 spectant dissereiidi ex causis supremis,' — 
 as ch. ii. ϋ f. : — and λόγ. γνώσεως, he says, 
 ' gratia est disserendi de rebus Chi-istianse 
 
 religionis, ex iis quae sunt humanae scientiae 
 vel experientise." — Meyer says, " σιιφια is 
 the higher Christian wisdom (see on ch. ii. 
 G) in and of itself;— so that discourse which 
 expresses its truths, makes them clear, ap- 
 plies them, &c. is λόγος σοφίας. But this 
 does not necessarily imply the speculative 
 penetration of these truths, — the philoso- 
 phical treatment of them by deeper and 
 more scientific investigation, in other words, 
 yvbjaiQ : and discourse which aims at this 
 is λόγος- yrwatwQ." This last view is most 
 in accordance with the subsequently recog- 
 nised meaning of γιώσις and yvωστtκ()ς, 
 and with the Ap.'s own use of σοφία in the 
 passage referred to, ch. ii. 6. κατά. τ. 
 
 αν. irv.] ' according to the disposition (see 
 ver. 11) of the same spirit.' 9.] 
 
 Ίτίστις, as Chrys. : ττίστιν ου ταύτην 
 λίγων την των δογμάτων, άλλα την των 
 στιμειο)! , πίρί ης φησιν ϊάν ϊχητί πίστιν 
 ώς κόκκυν σιν. κ.τ.Χ. (Matt. χνϋ. 20)' και 
 ο'ι απόστολοι δ'ί πιρΊ αϋτης ήζίονν λέγον- 
 τες, ττρόςθες ημ'ιν ττίστιν (Luke χνϋ. 5). 
 αϋτη γαρ μί]τηρ των σημείων εστίν. This 
 seems to be the meaning here ; a faith, 
 enabling a man to place himself beyond the 
 region of mere moral certainty, in the actual 
 realization of things believed, in a high and 
 unusual manner. εν τ. αΰτ. irv.] ' in,' 
 
 i. e. by and through, as the effective cause 
 and the medium. χαρίσματα Ιαμάτων] 
 
 'gifts of (miraculous) healings;' plur., to 
 indicate the different kinds of diseases, re- 
 quiring different sorts of healing. εν, see 
 above. 10. ενεργ. δυν.] ' operations of 
 miraculous powers ' (in general). 
 •τΓροφητεία] ' speaking in the Spirit.'
 
 8—13. ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 5ί9 
 
 σων, αλλω οε "" ερμηνίία -νΧωσσων' ττάντα δε ταύτα mch.xiT.se 
 
 "- . ' ' / only t- Sir. 
 
 evtf>yH TO ff και το αυτό πνίυμα, ^ biaipovv ώια nVJrv, Rom. 
 εκαστω 'καθώς " βυνΧΐται, καθάττερ yao το σόιαα ocu.ki ι,' 
 
 Γ/ > % f ι / » ' only. 
 
 εν εστίν, και ^ μέλη πολλά έχεί, πάντα δε τα μελί; Γοϋ P.Vniy^^Daa^ 
 σώματος, ττυλλο οντά, εν εστίν σώμα, ούτως και ο γ|θΐ- q ii<-re oniy. 
 στος. ^"^ και yap "εν ενι πνευματι ημείς ττάντες "εις 'εν ri.\etsxi.29. 
 
 > η r η >' Ί <> " >' ''τ^λ % >' Num. xxvi. 
 
 σώμα εΠαπτισυηίΐεν, είτε ιουοαιοι είτε ^Αληνες, είτε S4. 
 
 Γν - ,/ . /• \ / Λ - . , , rrof God, Heb. 
 
 οοϋΧοι ε'ιτε ελεύθεροι, και πάντες εν πνεύμα ^ εποτ'ισθημεν. Ι'•^^• 2Pet? 
 
 iii. Sonly. s Rora. iv. fi reff. t Rom. vi 13 reff. u Ma;t. iii. 11 reff. ν Rom. 
 
 xii. 2U reff. ace, see lUark x. 3u. Lake xii. 47 reif. 
 
 Sf (5th) om D'E it ν lat-ff. — ξκρμηνιια AD' : αλλ. ^£ ίρμ. γλ. (i. e. from γλωσσών 1st to 
 2nd) om Β 109 : txt CD'EFJK 1^ (appy) Clem Caes Cyr-jerus Chr Thdrt Dam al.— 
 11. bef tj^, om το D'FG 119 Orig Chr. — ίδια om D' (ΰΐίρυυμινα for Siaip. iCii-i) FG it ν 
 copt Syr al Orig (χοοηγουν for ίιαιρ.) Epiph Orig-int Did (lat) Hil al (propria Jer Aug 
 al. — ίκαστω om "il. — 12. on /«tXr/ ττολλα εισι, α\λ.α σώμα tv (στι sah. — yap om 117 
 arm. — μίΚη ct D(E.')FG it Hil Tich. — ττολλα ΐχα {transpn^n to briny μίλη and πολλά 
 together) ABC 37. 73. 118 arm Thdrtj Jer : txt DEFGJKmssnrly (appy) vssgr-lat-ff.— 
 τζαντα St τα ττυλλα μιλη του σώματος εν σώμα (στι arm. — ίκ τον σωμ. D' d e goth Hil 
 Ambrst Tich. — rec aft σωματοα, ins τον (ΐ/ος (oloss), with DE &c d e goth &c Chfj 
 Thdrtj Dam Oec Hil al : om ABCFGJK 10. 2.3. 31. 73. 11 7-22' g ν Syr ar-erp ieth gr- 
 lat-ff. — 13. tv om 57 al vss Clem. — ΐνι om FG g. — for εις εν, εις εαμεν εν (sic) D. 
 — rec εις ει- ττν. ε—οτισθ. {appy to conform to the first member of the sentence), with 
 D'EK &c Thdrt Till (text) : £ΐς ii•- ττν. εφωτιπθημεν i 2\. 'aQ. 116: tv σώμα εσμεν A: 
 iv τΓομα εποτ. 19. 23 syr Mac, also 15 more mss prefg εις : εν (or £ΐς ir) ττομα εττοτισθ. 
 εις tv πνεύμα 18'. '20. fi3. 113--21-3 Oec: ενι ποματι επιομίν Clem: ίΐς εν σώμα 
 εβατΓτισθ. (repeated) Dam: txt BCD'FG 17. 73. 80 it am harl Syr ieth al Ps-Igu Athj 
 Did Chr Thl (comm) lat-tf (uno sp.potati sumns demid tol copt gothal : pref in f ν Vig.) 
 (The varr appear to have arisen from applyiny the words to the Lord's Supper.) — 
 
 Meyer gives an excellent definition of it: ject dealt with in the note on Acts ii. 4, and 
 
 " discourse flowing from the revelation and ch. xiv. 2 ff. ερμηνεία γλωσσών] 
 
 impulse of the Holy Spirit, which, not being the power of yiviny a rneaniny to what 
 
 attached to any particular office in the was thus ecstatically spuken. This was not 
 
 church, but improvised, — disclosed the always resident in the speaker himself : see 
 
 depths of the human heart and of the ch. xiv. 13. 11.] The Spirit is the 
 
 divine counsel, and thus was exceedingly universal worker in men of all these powers, 
 
 effectual for the enlightening, exhortation, and that according to His own pleasure : 
 
 and consolation of believers, and the win- see above on vv. 4 — 6. Ιδία, ' seorsim.' 
 
 ning of unbelievers. The prophet diti'ers 'respectively,' or ^severally,' as E. V. 
 
 from the speaker with tonyues .... in This unity of the source of all spiritual 
 
 that he speaks with the understanding, gifts, in the midst of their variety, he 
 
 not ecstatically : from the ίιίήσκαλος•, thus: presses as against those who valued some 
 
 — ό μεν προφητεύων πάντα άπό τον and undervalued others, or who depre- 
 
 •πνενματος ψθίγ-/ίται• 6 ίΐ διδάσκων εστΊν dated them all. 12 — 30.] As the 
 
 'όπου και it, οικίίας διαλεγίται, as Clirys. inany members of the body compose ail 
 
 on ver. 28." διακρίσεΐ5 "fv.] ' distinc- organic whole, and all belong to the body, 
 
 tions of spirits :' i. e. the power of distin- none being needless, ?ione to be despised ,• 
 
 guishing between the operation of the Spirit so also those who are variously gifted by 
 
 of God and the evil spirit, or the unassisted the Spirit compose a spiritual organic 
 
 human spirit : see 1 John iv. 1 , and comp. whole, the mystical body of Christ. First, 
 
 προςέχοντ(ς πvti'μaσι πλάιοις, 1 Tim. however, vv. 12, 13, this likeness of the 
 
 iv. 1. The exercise of this power is alluded mystical Christ to a body is enounced, and 
 
 to ch. xiv. 29. Ύ**''Π γλωσσών] justified by the facts of our Baptism. 
 
 'kinds of tongues,' i.e. the power of 12.] The organic nni/y of the various 
 
 uttering, in ecstasy, as the mouthpiece of members in one body, is predicated also of 
 
 the Spirit, prayer and praise in languages CHRIST, i. e. the Church as unHed in 
 
 unknown to him, — or even in a spiritual Him, see ch. vi. 15. The yap confirms 
 
 language unknown to man. See this sub- the preceding tv κ. το αντο πνεύμα, by an
 
 550 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 XII. 
 
 "heVe'.mfy.' ι^^^- 7^Ρ '''^ σώμα ovK 'ίστη> εν με\ος, aWa ττολλά. 
 
 ofpeis., Matt. IK » ν >/ ' ν f'/~\ '' ' \ ^ ' w'<w' ~ 
 
 xxvi.73. ^^ εαυ £ΐπρ ο ττους Urt ουκ ίίμι χ^ψ, ουκ πμι εκ του 
 obad.'n^*'' σώματος, ου '' πηξ>α τοΰτο ουκ εστίν εκ του σώματος ; 
 
 χ = h. re only. \β > >\ ,/ ν τ ,/^^ t ' ^ ' j Ω \ "> ' ' ^ 
 
 poiyi). i. aa. '"και εαν έίπτ; το ους Ότι ουκ ειμί οψσαλμος, ουκ ειμί 
 
 πάρα τούτο ουκ εστίν εκ του σώμα- 
 τος ; ' ει όλον το σώμα οφβαΧιαος, ^ ττου η ^ ακοή ; ει 
 ολου ακοΐί, ^ που tj οσφρησις , νυνι οε ο σεος εσετο 
 
 παρητ'η^, ^^ μίΧη, iv εκπστον αυτών εν τω σώματι καθώς ηθεΧη- 
 
 Winer, 5 ϋ3. κ. y ellips., Rom. iii. 27. ch. i. 20. z — 2Pet. ii.8. Xen. Mem. i. 4. 6. a here only f. 
 
 b = Lake xi. 3;) al. c=- Acts xx. 28. ver. 28. Gen. XTii.5. d Acts xi. 29 reff. 
 
 15. on om 238. — σώματος to σώματος om 67^.-16. om (i. e. from σωμ. to σωμ.) 178-9. 
 • — και om D'E d e goth Ambrst (vel Augj). — 17. ο οφθαλμ. D'. — 18. for vvvi, νυν 
 ABD'FG 73. 119 Thl: txt CD'EJK ^iis nrly (appy) Clu-j Thdrt Dam Oec— 19. τα om 
 
 vdv σφαλίΐ- εκ Tou σωματος, ου 
 
 Drmo.-th. 
 64.1. 22, 
 
 analogy. By the repetition, — το σώμα, 
 , . . . τοϋ σώματος . . . , σώμα, the unity 
 of the members as an organic whole is 
 more strongly set forth. 13.] This 
 
 shewn from our being baptized into one 
 body, and receiving one Spirit. — ' For in 
 (see on vcr. 9) one Spirit also (the emjjh. 
 on £)'( πν., to which words και belongs) 
 we all were baptized into one Body, 
 whether Jews or Greeks, whether slaves 
 or freemen ; and we all were made to 
 drink of one Spirit' (or, 'all u-atered hij 
 one Spirit,' viz. the tvater of Baptism, 
 here taken as identical with the Spirit 
 whose influence accompanied it). — So (un- 
 derstanding the whole ver. of baptism) 
 Chrys., Theophyl., Oec, Riickert, Meyer, 
 De Wette.• — Luther, Beza, Calv., Estius, 
 Grot., al., refer the latter half to the Lord's 
 Supper: and this is »ie?i/io/iei/ by Chrys. 
 and Theophyl. : — Billroth and Olsh. to the 
 abiding influence of the Spirit in strength- 
 ening and refreshing. But the aor. ίττο- 
 τίσθημίν, referring to a fact gone by, is 
 fatal to both these latter interpretations : 
 besides that it would be harsh to under- 
 stand even els ε»' ττν. ίποτίσθ. (see var. 
 readd.) and impossible to understand ev irv. 
 tTTor., of the cup in the Lord's Supper. 
 14.] Analogy, by which this mul- 
 tiplicity in unity is justified : it is even so 
 in the natural body, — which, though one, 
 consists of many members. — The object of 
 the contiimation of the simile seems to be, 
 to convince them that their various gifts 
 had been bestowed by God on them as 
 members of the Christian body, and that 
 they must not, because they did not happen 
 to possess the gifts of another, consider 
 themselves excluded from the body, — in 
 which the weaker as well as the stronger, 
 the less comely as well as the more comely 
 members were necessary. — The student 
 will remember the fable spoken by Mene- 
 
 nius Agrippa to the mutinous plebs in 
 Livy ii. 32. The passage is also illustrated 
 by Seneca de Ira, ii. 31, ' Quid si nocere 
 velint manus pedibus, manibus oculi .•' Ut 
 omnia inter se membra consentiunt, quia 
 singula servari totius interest : ita homines 
 singulis parcent, quia ad coelum geniti 
 sumus : salva autem esse societas nisi 
 amore et custodia partium non potest :' — 
 and by Marc. Antonin. ii. 1, where in his 
 morning meditations on the duty of re- 
 pressing anger through the day, he says, 
 ■γεγόναμίν yap ττρός avvtuyiai', ώς ττόύίς, 
 ώς χίΤρΕς, ώς βΧίφαρα, ώς οι στοίχοι των 
 (ίνω και των κάτω οδόντων' το ονν άν- 
 τιπράπσιιν άλλ;;λοις, τταρά ψίισιν. See 
 also vii. 13 : Clem, ad Cor. c. χχ.κνϋ. : and 
 other exx. in Wetstein. 15.] The on 
 
 is rightly rendered in E. V. ' because.' 
 ov πάρα τ. χ-.Γ.λ.] These words are 
 best taken as a question, appealing to the 
 sense of the reader : they thus have more of 
 the vigour of the Ap.'s style, than taken 
 affirmatively. τταρά, see refl". ckt. σ., 
 ' belonging to the body ' as an aggregate ; 
 so ίΐς tic των δώίίκα, — yaav ίκ τών Φαρι- 
 σαίων. — The double negation strengthens, 
 — see Winer, § 59, 8. b (he takes the two, 
 in this case, as destroying one another [.•■], 
 see ib. a). 17.] The necessity of the 
 
 members to one another, and to the body. 
 — Understand i/v in each clause, which is 
 indeed expressed in ver. 19. 18.] 
 
 vDvl he, 'but as the case really stands :' 
 see Hartung, Partikellehre, ii. 25. τα 
 
 μ€λη, generally, — ev €καστον αυτών, seve- 
 rally, καθώς ήθ€λ. answers to καθώς 
 βονλίται, ver. 11. 19.] The same 
 ' reductio ad absurdum ' which has been 
 made in the concrete twice in ver. 17, is 
 now made in the abstract : ' if the whole 
 were one member, where would be the 
 body (which by its very idea μ'ίΚη ϊχίΐ 
 πολλά (see vv. 12. 14) V 20.] Brings
 
 14—26. ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 551 
 
 σίν. εί ο£ ην τα πάντα tv ^ιΐίΛος, ττου το σώμα ; ever. β. 
 
 νυν Of ΤΓοΛΛα ufi» ιιεΛη, tv οε σώμα. ου ουναται οε Ρ•"ν^χ>ΐΊ•2. 
 
 ^ [_ '_ " ' Β =- -' Cor. χ. 7. 
 
 Ο οφθαλμός mrtiv τ\] χ^ψι Kpe'iav σον ουκ '^ έχω* η ^25^]%)^^' 
 ΊταΛιν η ΚίφαΛϊ] τοις ττοσιν Αρειαν νμων ουκ εγω. ; Acisi,.3oreff. 
 
 •___^ i '^ Ak Acts xiu. 46 
 
 Αλλα ΤΓολλω μάλλον τα. Βοκουντα μέλη του σώματος lah.iv.ioreff. 
 
 > /J , if' k ' -/ ' 23 * '^ h S; - mMatt xxiii. 
 
 ασϋίνίστίρα υπαργειν avajKaia εστίν, και a οοκου- ι•*• Luke 
 μεν ατιμότερα ειιηιι του σώματος, τούτοις τιμήν "^ ττερισ- η mhu^xxvu. 
 
 , r. /Λ > \ η ' / r - η > ϋ« II Mk. See 
 
 συνην "" ττερισσοτεραν έχει. τα δε "^ ευσγημονα -ημών ου ="h!.Ve"oniy 
 
 f t f./ .'ΛΛ^'η^Γ ' ^- -sf ο here only. 
 
 ■vpeiav ε-χ^ει αΛΛα ο ι/εος συνεκερασεν τυ σω^ίπ, τω υστε- Deut.xxiv. 
 ρουμενω ™ ττερίσσοτφαΐ' δυυς τιμήν, Ίνα μη f, ' σχίσμα ρ hei;!fniyt. 
 
 • -/ 'ΛΛ^^''^'ν'ΛΛ'λ U - Piilyb. χ. 18. 
 
 ευ τω σώματι, άλλα το αυτό υπεο αλΑηΛων μεριμνωσιν ?. 
 
 S '',χ 26 ' •' ' •^ */Λ ν / / "ϊ^' 
 
 τα μέλη. και είτε πάσχει εν μέλος, συμπάσχει πάντα ^[^ 
 
 b. iv. 2 
 
 onlyt. 2 Ma -c. XV .Si). s cli. i. 7 reff. t ch. i. 10 reff. nMatf.vi.2oal.fr. 2Kings 
 
 vii. lU pliir., oil. X. 11 reft'. ν Uom. \ iii. 17 only f. 
 
 BFG 17—20. vvri FG 32. 47. «7• 80. 114 Chr, Ύ\ύ.—μεν om B©' 73. 114 d e goth 
 Aug. — 21. it om (oi being in the way ? hut it brings oiit a contrast to the nnifg just 
 insisted on) ACFG all (abt 20) demid g copt Syr al (Orig) Bas (Thdrti) Jer al: ins 
 BDEJK all d e V syr goth al Chr Thdrt (h 1) Dam Thl Oec Aiigj Pel Ambrst al.— rec 
 bef ηφΘ. om ο (absorbed in the οφΘ. follg /), with B(e sil)K &c Thl (text): ins 
 ACDEFGJ all (about 30) Orig Bas Chr Thdrt Dam Oec Thl (coram).— 22. μίμη 115.— 
 αναγκαιον 92.-23. for «', ϋ FG. — μιλη του σωμ. DEFG 17• 28 it ν Dam lat-ff : μίλη 
 ίΐν. Γ. σ. 17• — προςτιθίμεν 20: (ττίτιΟ. 49: (ντιθ. Chr-ms : τιθίμεν 'Λ. 4^. 73• 108': 
 τιθίσθαι 115. — for ίνηχημ., τιμήν 2. 17 Thl. — ίχίΐν FG. — 24. aft ίχει, ins τιμής DEFG 
 d e Syr.— rec αλλ, with FG &c: txt ABCDEJ &c. — σνηκιρ. ο θεός A seth (ο θ. om syr). 
 — rec vrTTepovrTi {appy corrn to more usual exprn in Ν Τ), with DEFGJK mss nrly 
 (appy) Orig Dial Chr thdrt Oec Thl : txt ABC I?. 5?. 6T' Melet (in Epiph) Dam.— for 
 ττίριπσ. S. τιμηΐ', Tt ττ(ρισσο-(ρον οους Β. — 25. σχίσματα D'FGJ 47 8. fi3-7• 74. 
 109-14-20'-l-2 al g arm Bas Antioch Dam Thl Augj Sedul.— τη αυτά D'FG : ουΓο57. — 
 μέριμνα DEFG Thl (marg).— 26. for tiTt (1st), u τι BFG it ν syr Ambrst Pel Cassiod 
 Bed : fi 31 Orig : ei τι δί 93 : txt ACDEJK mis (appy) vss Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec 
 
 out the fact in contrast to ver. 19, as ver. distinguished from τά affx^;i.below)tothose 
 
 18 in contrast to ver. I7. 21 — 26.] limbs which we conceal from sight in accord- 
 
 And the spiritual gifts are also necessari/ ancewith custom, butintheexposureofwhich 
 
 to one another. This is spoken in reproof there would be no absolute indecency. So 
 
 of the highly endowed, who imagined they Chrys., — καΧως ίίττίτα δοκοΰντα, και αδο- 
 
 could do without those less gifted than κοΰμ€ν (but I should draw a distinction be- 
 
 thcmselves, as the preceding to those of tween the two, in accordance with the above 
 
 small endowment, who were discontented expl. of (iaflevf(Tr., and render τα ίοκ-οΰιτη, 
 
 with their gifts. 22, 23.] ' Nay, the ' wMcli appear to be,' and a ίοκοϋμεν, 
 
 relation between the members is so entirely ' which we think:' noticealso νττάρχίΐχ'&ηά 
 
 different from this, that the very dis- tu'iii), 5(ΐ^ννς'ότι ου της φύσεως τών πραγ- 
 
 paragement, conventionally, of any mem- μάτων, ά\\άτης τώι> ττολΚών ίιττονοίας r) 
 
 ber, is the reason why more care should be ψί)0ος. τιμ. τζ^ρισσ. ιτεριτίθ.] viz. by 
 
 taken of it. I understand by the τα co- c/o///iin// : honouringthem morethantheface, 
 
 κοΰντα μεΧη τον σώματος άσθενέστίμα the noblest part, which we do not clothe. 
 
 ΰπάρχειν, those members which in each και τα άσχ.] Here there is «ο α δοκοΰμ€ν, 
 
 man's case appear to be inheritors of disease, and no ambiguity. Chrys. says: . . άλλ' 'όμως 
 
 or to \\;\ve incurred weakness. By this very πλείονος άπολαίηι τιμής' κα'ι οΊ σφόορα 
 
 fact, their necessity to him is brought out πένητες, καν το λοιπόν -γνμνυν εχχισι 
 
 much more than that of the others. 23.] σώμα, ούκ av άνάσχοιντο εκπνα τη μέλη 
 
 So also in the case of the parts li βοκοΰμεν St'iKai -γυμνά. 24.] The comely i)arts 
 
 ατιμότερα είναι — on which usage has set the are in some measure neglected, not needing 
 
 stamp of dishonour. Perhaps he alludes (as to be covered or adorned : ' but (opposed
 
 552 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 XII. 27—31, 
 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 w = ii^w only, τα jttiXi)' (ΊτΒ "^ δοζοΣ^εταί ε»' μίΧος, '^ συ-γ-^ηιρΐΐ πάντα τά abcd 
 xiii.Vphii. jUfXr?. "' ύμίίς δί έστε σίομα -χ^ριστοΰ και μίλη "εκ ^ |ΐίε- 
 
 ϋ. 17, 18 9}{ ^ a «^ > b ''Λ ' η ^ ' " c ' \ ' 
 
 only. L. Ρ. ρους. "^^ και ους μίν tUero ο υεος εν τϊ7 ίκκλησια 
 
 Cen xxi.6. ι_= ^ ^ ^ ' ^ ^ ''^ 't 
 
 ^.^''°h"v'a. πρώτον αποστόλους, οευτεοον TTpo^^'OCi τρίτον διδα- 
 
 Γι Γ<•«•. ,-. ,f e'>' •' f ' f'' 
 
 yzcii.xiii !>, σκαλους, επίΐτα ουναμίΐς, ίπειτα γαρισματα ιαματων, 
 
 Ri'im. xi. a5 rpft'., and Heb. ix. 5.) a = ver. 8 al. b — ver. 18. c absol., Act.s ii. 47. Eph. i. 22 al. 
 
 d .Vets xiii. 1. Eph.ir. 11. e = ver. 10. fver.9refi'. 
 
 lat-fF. — tv (1st) om A Orig, (elswj με\. iv ; so Cypr).— tv (2nd) om AB (Thdrtj but not 
 hi) (μίλ. tv Orig Cypr). — αυμπασχη and -χαιρη 67^• 1'2'. 113-19-20-21 v-ms Origj : 
 συμττασχοι 2^8. — 27. σώμα tart FG g Ambrj. — for μιρονς, μίλονς (perhaps error: 
 jierhaps, as Mcy, tK μ(ρ. was not understood) D' d e ν syr (μίρ. marg) arm Origj Eus 
 Nyss Epiph Cyr, Thdrtj Procl lat-ff (f κ• μί. om Hil Aug) (t.Kt expressly Origj Chr Thdrt 
 [h 1] Dam Oec Thl) : add <ιυτου arm Ambr. — 28. from αττοστοΧοκς to SiIh(tku\ovc om 
 178 — rec for ίπιιτα ("ind), ura [corrn as more itsnal, folly tnfira : the omn may be 
 accounted for by a desire to throw all into one cataloyue), with JK &c Thdrt Oec Thl 
 {deinde virtutes, exinde . . . v) : om DEFG it Hil Aaibr : txt ABC I7. 39. 73-4. 93 Bas 
 
 to xptiav ΐχα) God (at the creation) tem- 
 pered the body together (compounded it 
 of members on a prii^;iple of mutual com- 
 pensation), -to the deficient part giving 
 more abundant honour, 25.] that 
 
 there be no disunion (see ver. 21) in the 
 body, but that the members may have 
 the same care (viz. that for mutual well 
 being) for one another.' The verb is plur , 
 on account of the personification of the 
 members (Meyer). 26.] καί, ' and 
 
 accordingly,' in matter of fact : we see 
 that God's temperament of the body has 
 not failed of its purpose, for the members 
 sympathize most intimately with one an- 
 other. •ΤΓάσχ€ΐ . . . σ-υμητάσ-χίΐ] και 
 ■yfip rij πτίρΐ'Τ) πολλάκις ττροςπαγείσης 
 άκά^'θης, 'όλον το σιομα αίσθάνιται και 
 μίριμι•^.' και νώτος κάμπτεται, και y αστήρ 
 Καί μηυη'ι συστίλλοΐ'ται, και χ(^ρις καθά- 
 ΤΓίο δ^ψνφόροι κ. νπηρίται προςιόντες 
 άνίλκονσι το Trayh', καί κεφαλή επι- 
 κνπτει, και όφθαλμυΐ μετά πο\λής όρώσι 
 της φροντίοος. Chrys. δοξάζεται . . . 
 <Γυγχαίρ£ΐ] Chrys. again with equal beauty 
 instances, στεφαΐ'ονται >'/ κεφαλή, και Ιίπας 
 υ άνθρωπος δοϊ,άζίται' λέγίΐ το στόμα, 
 και -γελώσιν οφθαλμοί καΊ ευφραίνονται. 
 But perhaps the analogy requires that we 
 should rather understand ίοξ. of those 
 tilings which physically refresh or benefit 
 the member, e. g. anointing or nourish- 
 ment. 27.] Ajiplicalion of all that 
 has been said of the physical body, to (he 
 Corr. as the mystical body of Christ : and 
 to individuals among them, as members in 
 pariicnlar, i. e. each according to his al- 
 lotted part in the body. Each church is 
 said to be the body of Christ, as each is 
 said to be the temple of God (see ch. iii. 
 IG, note) : not that there are many bodies 
 or many temples ; but that each church is 
 an image of the whole aggregate, — a micro- 
 
 cosm, having the same characteristics. Chrys. 
 would understand ίκ/χφους• — οτι >) εκκλησία 
 r) παμ' υμ'ιν /χίρος ίστι της παΐ'ταχον κει- 
 μένης εκκ\ί]σίας, καί Γοϋ σώματος τοΐι ίίά 
 παηών σννισταμ'ενου των εκκλησιών : but 
 this, though true, does not apjiear to have 
 been here before the Αρ., — only the whole 
 Cor. church as the body of Christ, and its 
 individual components as members, each in 
 his appointed place. 28 ] The divine 
 
 disposition of the members in the spiritual 
 body. ους μεν was apparently in- 
 
 tended to be followed by ους £ε, but mean- 
 while another arrangement, πρώτον, δεύτ., 
 τρίτ., occurs to the Αρ., and οΐις μεν is left 
 uncorrected, standing alone. See Eph iv. 
 11, where rot'c μεν is followed by τους ΰ'ε, 
 regularly. ev τη εκκλ.] ' in the (uni- 
 
 versal) church,' a sense more frequently 
 found in the Ep. to the Ephesian.s, than in 
 any other part of St. Paul's writings. 
 irp. άίΓοστόλους] Not merely the Twelve 
 are thus designated, but they and others 
 who bore the same name and had equal 
 power, e. g. Paul himself, and Barnabas, 
 and James the Lord's brother : see also 
 note on Rom. xvi. 7• ιτροφ.] See 
 
 above, on ver. 10. διδασκάλους] See 
 
 reif. : those who had the gift of expounding 
 and unfolding doctrine and applying it to 
 practice, — the λόγος σοφίας and the λόyoς 
 yvώσ^ωc. δυνάμεις] He here passes 
 
 to the abstract nouns from tlie concrete, — 
 perhaps because no definite class of persons 
 was endowed with each of the following, 
 but they were promiscuously granted to all 
 orders in the church : more probably, how- 
 ever, V)ithout any assignable reason ; as in 
 Rom. xii. 6 — {i, he passes from the abstract 
 to the concrete. όντιλήμψεις] i. e. 
 
 άί'τέχεσθαι των ασθενών and the like, as 
 Chrys., forming one department of the cia- 
 Koviai of ver. 5 : as do also κυβερνησ-εις, a
 
 XIII. 1. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 553 
 
 iAc-tsii.4. 
 
 χ. ^(ί, SiC. 
 k Luke xxiv. 
 
 27. Acts ix 
 
 ^ αντι^ήμφίΐς, κνβερνησίΐς, ^ -γίνη ^ -γΧωσσων. μν ^^'"^"xli.'id 
 
 παΐ'τίς οποστοΛοί ; μη παντΐς πουψηται , μη τταιτίς sMacc. viu. 
 
 SidaoKaXoi ; μη πάντες ^ δυνάμεις ', μη ττάντίς χα- "" Prov.T.'i.' 
 
 / <ι f ' ' ^ ' i Λ ' i ^ xi. 14. xs.\v. 
 
 ρισματα εχ^ουσιν ιαματων \ μη πάντες γΛωσσαις λα- 
 Χοΰσιν ; μη πάντες ^ιερμηνευουσιν ', 
 
 31 1 Γ7 Λ ■* ^\ ν m ' >. D '/ . > >' 27. Aci 
 
 Δηλοντε οε τα "χαρίσματα τα μειί,ονο και ετι 3β. ch χι,. 
 "καθ νπεηβοΧην ^ οδο»/ ΰμιν ^είκνυμι. XIII. εαν τα<ς , ""^J^^j^ j 
 
 3!lonly. Sir li. 18 m ver. 4. η = ch. xiii. 13. xiv. 5. ο Rom. vii. 13 reff. 
 
 pch. IT. 17. See Acts xiii. 10 refi. 1 Kings xii. 23. 
 
 Cyrr Chr Dam {deinde 2ce Aug Ambrst). — rec αιτιλτ/ψίΐς, with C &c : txt AG &c. — 
 aft -γλωσσών, add £ρμί;)'ίΐας γλωσσών {Ιο suit ver 10) ν syr arm Naz Ambrst-ed Pelag 
 Bed. — 29. μη to ίυναμίις om 48. — 30. (ομηνίνουσι 73: τΓρηφητίνονσι syr-marg. — 
 31. rec for /ίίΐζονα, κριιττονα (apfy a corrn, μειζοιηι not being understood: thus we 
 have κβίΐπσων also, ch xiv. 5, in some mss), with DEFGJK (-σπονα DEFG &c) &c 
 Origj Chr Thdrt (te.xt) Thl (e.\pressly) Oec (but in comra μιιζ. appy) : t.xt ABC 5. 6. 10. 
 17. 31-7-9. G7-. 73. 213 (al ?) am (v ms) Syr (syr .^) ieth (al.') Orig, Thdrt (comm) Dam 
 Phot Orig-int Jerj. — και om FG it. — for trt, tin D' : tru FG. — οδυν σωτήριας 114 
 (see Acts xvi. 17). — δεικνύω 17. 
 
 higher department, that of the presbyters 
 or bishops — the direction of the various 
 churches. Ύ**''Π γλωσσών] ύοίς ποΰ 
 
 Τίθεικε Tovr'i το \ήρισμσ, και πώς παν- 
 ΓοχοΓ; τήν ίσχήτ7]>' αντψ νίμει τάζιν ; 
 Chrys. There certainly seems to be inten- 
 tion in placing this last in rank : but I am 
 persuaded that we must not, with ^leyer, 
 seek for a classified arrangement : here, as 
 above, vv. 7 — 1 1 , it seems rather suyyestive 
 than logical : the χαρ. ίαμ. naturally sug- 
 gesting the ίϊ^'Γιλ^7/^ψfιc,^and those again, 
 the assistances to carry out the work of the 
 church, as naturally bringing in the κv^3^p- 
 νησεις, the government and guidance of it. 
 29, 30.] The application of the 
 questions already asked w. 17 — 19. 
 29. δυνάμ€ΐ5] not, as Meyer, al., accusative, 
 governed by ΐχουσιν — which involves a de- 
 parture from the parallelism, besides the 
 harshness of constr. : — but nominative, in 
 apposition with πάντις. The Ap. has 
 above placed the concrete, άπόιττολοι, ττρο- 
 φήται, διδάσκ'ΐλοι, in app. with δνΐ'άμεις 
 and χαρίσμ. ίαμ., and now proceeds with 
 the same arrangement till he comes to χα- 
 ρίσματα ίαμάτων, which being too palpa- 
 bly unpredicable of persons, gives rise to 
 the change of constr., — μή πάντις χαρ. 
 εχονσιν ίαμάτων -. — In the last two ques- 
 tions, he departs from the order of the last 
 ver., and takes in again one particular from 
 the former catalogue, ver. 10. — Meyer 
 compares Hom. 11. r. 726 — 734. See 
 Stanley's note and excursus. 31.] 
 
 'But (he has been shewing that a// gifts 
 have their value : and that all are set in 
 the church by God .• some however are 
 more vnluable ύχΆη others) do ye aim at 
 the greater gifts ' {μείζ. is e.\plained ch. 
 
 xiv. 5). — This exhortation is not inconsis- 
 tent with ver. 1 1 : but, as we look for the 
 divine blessing on tillage and careful cul- 
 ture, so we may look for the aid of the 
 Spirit on carefully cultivated powers of the 
 understanding and speech ; — and we may 
 notice that the greater gifts, those of προ- 
 φητίΐα and διδασκαλία, consisted in the in- 
 spired ejcercise of the conscious faculties, 
 in which culture and diligence would be 
 useful accessories. " Spiritus dat, ut vult 
 (ver. 11): sed tideles tamen libere aliud 
 prse alio possunt sequi et exercere, c. xiv. 
 26." Bengel. Comp. also xiv. 39 There 
 is thus no need to explain away ζι/λοϋτε, 
 as Grot. {" ayite cum Deo precibus ut ac- 
 cipiatis") and others: or to depart from 
 the known usage of χαρίσματα, and explain 
 it to mean faith, hope, and love, as iMorus, 
 or the fruits of love, as Billroth. καΐ 
 
 £Ti] 'And moreover:' besides exhorting 
 you to emulate the greatest gifts. 
 καθ' ύΐΓ. όδ.] ' An eminently excellent 
 way,' viz. of emulating the greatest gifts : 
 — so Theophyl. : και μετά τούτων {τοντο 
 yap δηλαΐ Γ0, και ετι), far όλως ζηλωταΐ 
 νπάρχ7]τε χαρισμάτων, δείξω νμίν μίαν 
 όδόν καθ' ί'ττερβο^ήν, τουτέστιν, νπερεχον- 
 (TOJ', ητι? ψ€ρ€ΐ £ΐΓΐ ΊΓοίντα τα χαρίσματα* 
 τήν ctyaTTiiv δε Xiyn. καθ' νιττερβ.] 
 
 must not be joined with the verb, — 'est 
 adhuc via quam vobis diligentissime de- 
 monstro ' (Pagnini's version, and some 
 mentioned by Estius): see reff. and cf. // 
 μάλιστα άναγνώρισις, Arist. Poet. ii. 6, — 
 μάί^α στρατι^γόν, Xen. Hell. vi. 2. 39, — 
 ii> πρηξις, ^Esch. Agam. 262, — σφόδρα 
 γυναικών. Plat. Legg. i. p. 639 c, and 
 ether exx. in Bernhardy, Syntax, p. 338. — 
 The expl. of Estius aiid Bllioth, that the
 
 554 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 XIII. 
 
 ? i^'s^cor'^xH. 7^'^''^''^"'^ ^^^ '^ανθρώπων λαλώ και των '^ αγγίλων, abcd 
 
 11. ' ' ' ' 5,\ ν .r r ' Λ ^ s ' - <^ t ' Ο Λ ^'^τ? 
 
 sLukexxi.25 α-^απην οε μΎ\ ε)((ι>, yeyova χαλκός v\'<JV η κνμραλον ^'^ 
 thcrJliniy αλαλαί,υν. ^ και (αν εχ^ω προφητίίαν και ειοω τα 
 
 1 Chruu. xiii. w ' ' ' " ^ χ - \ > \ tt 
 
 8. μυστήρια πάντα και ττασαν την "γνώσιν, και εαν εγω 
 
 η Mark ν. 38 ' ' ^ 
 
 only Ι. Jer. iv. 8. Ezek. xxvii. 30. ν Rom. xii. 6. ch. xii. 10 al. fr. wMatt.xiii.il. Rom.xi. 25. 
 
 ch. XV. 51. Dan. ii. 18al. χ = ch. viii. 1. xii. 8 al. 
 
 Chap. XIII. 1. for yiyoro, sv ίίμι D'E', also addg ?;, FG : γεγ. ως ν Syr ar-erp 
 seth slav Aug (somet) Pelag Bed. — κνμβ. (but -λος lect 8) αλαλαζων AD lect 8. — 
 2. for και far, καν twice {corrn) ABC (but και tav 2nd time) (Origj : tav Orig3) 31 Clem 
 Origi (cite the 1st: for the 2nd, και al) : txt DEFGJK {και αν 1st) mss (appy) Chr 
 Thdrt Dam al.— for ηδω, ιδω AD' 72 lect 17 Epiph : οιδα FG (appy).— τα παΐ'τα FG. 
 
 way which he is about to shew them is 
 ' multo excellentiorem iis donis de quibus 
 hactenus egit ' (Est.) is clearly wrong : 
 the opening verses of ch. xiii. shewing, that 
 he does not draw a comparison between 
 love and gifts, but only shew that it is 
 the only way, in which gifts can be 
 made effectual in the highest sense. See 
 also on ch. xiv. 1. 
 
 Chap. XIII. 1 — 13.] The panegyric of 
 LoA'E ; as the principle without which all 
 gifts are worthless (I — 3): its attributes 
 (4 — 7): its eternily (8 — 12) : its superior 
 dignity to the other great Christian graces 
 (13). — Meyer quotes from Valcknaer, 
 p. 299 : ' Sunt figurae oratorise, quae hoc 
 caput illuminant, omnes sua sponte natse in 
 animo heroico, flagrante amore Christi et 
 Luic amori divino omnia postponente.' 
 *' It may," he adds, " without impro- 
 priety be called 'a Psalm of Love:' " — the 
 ΠΤΤ τώ of the New Test, (see Ps. xlv. 
 title). " On each side of this chapter the 
 tumult of argument and remonstrance still 
 rages : but within it, all is calm : the sen- 
 tences move in almost rhythmical melody : 
 the imagery unfolds itself in almost drama- 
 tic propriety : the language arranges itself 
 with almost rhetorical accuracy. We can 
 imagine how the Apostle's amanuensis must 
 have have paused to look up in his master's 
 face at the sudden change of his style of 
 dictation, and seen his countenance lighted 
 up as it had been the face of an angel, as 
 the sublime vision of divine perfection 
 passed before him." Stanley. 1.] 
 
 lav λαλώ, supposes a case which never 
 has been exemplified : ' even if I can 
 speak,' or as E. V. 'Though I speak.' 
 So Isocr. Areop. p. 142, — ολλ' iav fi'tv 
 κατορθώσωπι ττίοί τιΐ'ος TTnaifig, η ίιά 
 τνχην, η Ci άνθους apfTtjt', μικηον Sia- 
 λι-ΓΟΓΓίς παλιΐ' κ'ς τάς αντάς άττορίας 
 κατ(σ-ί]ηην. See Matthai, §523. 1. 
 Tois γλώσσαις τ. άνθρ. κ. τ. όγγ.] 
 υρα ηόθίν άρχίΓαι' πρώτον άπο τον 
 θαυμαστού ϋοκονντος tivat Trap' αύτοίς 
 
 κηΐ μεγάλου, τώΐ' γλωσσώΐ'. Chrys. It is 
 hardly possible to understand -γΧώσσαι here 
 of any thing but articulate forms of speech: 
 i. e. languages. Meyer and De W., who 
 deny that the speaking with tongues was 
 ever in an articulate language, vehemently 
 impugn such a rendering here. But their 
 own rendering is to me undistinguishable 
 from it, as far as the sense is concerned : 
 ' tongues speaking in all possible ways,' 
 surely, in the common acceptation of words, 
 must mean, tongues speaking all possible 
 languages, and the use of the word indif- 
 ferently for the tongue and a tongue (a 
 language), when this very gift is spoken of, 
 e. g. Acts ii. 4 compd. w. 11, and here as 
 oompd. w. ch. xii. 30, is one of the strong- 
 est proofs that \α\ίϊν γΧώσσαις is to 
 speak in languages ; see note on Acts ii. 6. 
 — 'Of men (generic) and of angels' (ge- 
 neric) : i. e. ' of all men and all angels,' 
 whatever those tongues may be. 
 άγάιτην] Love to all, in its most general 
 sense, as throughout the chap. : no dis- 
 tinction being here drawn between love to 
 man and to God, but the general principle 
 dealt mth, from which both spring. The 
 ' Caritas' of the Latin vss. has occasioned 
 the rendering ^charity' in most modern 
 versions. Of this word Stanley remarks, 
 " the limitation of its meaning on the one 
 hand to mere almsgiving, or on the other to 
 mere toleration, has so much narrowed its 
 sense, that the simpler term ' Love,' though 
 too general exactly to meet the case, is 
 now the best equivalent." γε- 
 
 γονα] 'I am become;' the case supposed 
 is regarded as present : ' if / can speak . . . 
 I am become.' χαλκ. ήχ.] Brass, of 
 
 any kind, struck and yielding a sound : i. e. 
 άΐ'αίσθητόν τι κ. άψΐ'χιιΐ'. Chrys. No 
 particular musical instrument seems to be 
 meant. κυμιβαλον] κΰμβαλα ην πλα- 
 
 τ'ια κ. μιγάΧα χάΧκίυ, Jos. Antt. vii. 12. 3. 
 The Heb. name is most expressive, c^b'^)'2. 
 There appear to have been two sorts, men- 
 tioned in Ps. cl. 5 : 5?ΌΤΓ ''ί??ί'2 and nmn .s,
 
 2—4. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 555 
 
 πασαν την ττιστιν ωςτε υξ)η ^ μευιστανίΐν, αγαττην ο£ μη ^ geeVud χ 
 
 >' ζ'ίΙ' ' 3 >'»a/ ' ' y h ' ' IK alex. Isa. 
 
 t\o), ovuBv ίίμι. και eav ψωμισω τταντα τα νπαρ- ϋν ίο. 
 
 ^, ».xc ^-ν-, .> d α' zch.vii IPreff. 
 
 γοντα μου, και eav παραοω το σώμα μου ινα καυυησω- " ^|ί™• '"^;jf^ 
 
 μαι, α-γαπην οε μη έχω, ουοεν ** ωφίΧονμαι. η α-γαπη TOnftVl^ere 
 
 μακροβυμξΐ, αχρηστεύεται, η α^αττη ου ^ ζήλοι, τ/ «γάττη b =Maft. χίχ^ 
 
 λ1. Gen. χϋ 5. c = Acts χν. 2fi. d snbj. fnlnre, 1 Pet. iii. 1 (var. read ). 1 Tim. 
 
 vi. 8(var. read.). e Mark v. a(i. Matt. svi.Sfi. Prov x. 2. xi. 4. f Matt, xviii. 2H, iH. 
 
 Lukexriii. 7. 1 Thess. τ. 14. Heb. Ti. 15. Janusv. 7, 8. 2 Pet. iii. 9 only. Prov. xix. II. g here 
 
 only t. (not foond elsewhere. Lexx.) h Acts τίί. 9 reff. 
 
 —ττασαν om seth €γγ>Τι.—μ(θισταναι BDEFG 17• 31-7. 44-8. 73 lect 13 Clem Thl : 
 txt ACJK most mss Oriff2 Chr Thdrt Dam Oec : μι^Ιισταν Method. — rec ovS(v, with 
 D'(E.')FGK &c Meth Macj Chr Thdrt Thl (text) : t.xt ABCD3(E.>)J 44-8. «7• 71-2. 89 
 lect 13 Clem Eph Bas MaCj Dam Oec Thl (comra). — 3. for και tav, καν {as above) ABC 
 al Dam and (1st) Clem : txt DEFGJK most mss Chr Thdrt al.— rec φωμιζω {corrn, the 
 force of the aor not being perceived), with Κ &c : txt ABCDEFGJ most mss fF: Ιιαξω 
 Clenij. — παραοωσω 1?. — καυθησομαι DEFGJK most mss Chr Thdrt al : κανχηπωμαι 
 AB 17 aeth copt (ms in Wetst) Eph Jer (from gr-mss asserts aptid Greecos ipsos ipsa 
 exemplaria diversa esse, but thinks, ob similitudiuein καιιθησωμαι et κανχησωμαι apud 
 Latinos errorem inolevisse) : txt (AB see above) CK &c Chr Thdrt al lat-fF Jacob- 
 nisib : καΐ'θησιται Τ•'> ■ κανΘη 1. 108' Syr arr Bas Cypr. — ουθίν A 'SI. 73 Bas (ms) : 
 txt B(e siI)CDEFGJK &c ίΐ.—οφίλουμαι 44.-4. η nya-. (2nd) om 41. 71 Clem Chr 
 Thl Tert: η αγ. χρηστ. Cypr Aug.—;? ay. (3rd) om Β 17. 19. 55. 73-4. 118-22' lect 17 
 V copt arm Clem Ephr Chr Thl Tert Ambrst Ambr al. — χρησ. η αγ., ου ζηλ. η ay., is 
 
 rendered by the LXX, κνμβάλοις ενηχοις 
 — and κ. αλαλαγμοί', as here. Winer 
 thinks the former answered to our castag- 
 nettes, the latter to our cymbals. The 
 larger kind would be here meant. See 
 Win.RWB. art. 'Becken.' άλαΧάξον] 
 
 see Ps. el. cited above. 2.] τα μ,υ<ττηρ. 
 
 ττάντα are all the secrets of the divine 
 counsel, — see Rom. xi. 25 ; xvi. 25, — and 
 reff. The knowledge of these would be the 
 perfection of the gift of prophecy. The 
 verb belongs to both μυστ. and yvihaiv. 
 The fuU constr. would be ίίΐώ μυστ. and 
 ίχω yvwTiv. ττάσον την ιτίστιν 
 
 hardly, as Stanley, implies 'all the faith 
 in the world,' but rather, ' all the faith re- 
 quired to,' &c. : or perhaps the art. conveys 
 the allusion to our Lord's saying. Matt. 
 xvii. 20; xxi. 21 : 'all that faith,' so as 
 &c. 3.] The double accus. after 
 
 ψω/ίί^ω is found in the reff. to LXX : 
 but here the accus. of the person is omitted, 
 and left to be supplied from the context : ' If 
 I bestow in food all my substance.' See 
 the quotation from Coleridge in Stanley's 
 note. παραδ. τ. σώμ. μ. ϊνα καυθ.] 
 
 So LXX, Dan. iii. 28 : και ■παρ'ίΐωκαν τα 
 σώματα αυτών ί!ς πυρ : see also 2 Mace. 
 vii. He evidently means in self-sacrifice : 
 for country, or friends. Both the deeds 
 mentioned in this ver. are such as ordinarily 
 are held to be the fruits of love, but they 
 may be done irithout it, and if so, are 
 worthless. [Stanley prefers κανχησωμαι 
 — and Lachmann has edited it. TJie objec- 
 tions to it seem to me to be, ( 1 ) It leaves 
 
 ■jrapaSai standing in a very vague and un- 
 defined meaning — "deliver, to what?" 
 (2) It introduces an irrelevant and con- 
 fusing element, a boastful motive, into a 
 set of hypotheses which put forward merely 
 an act or set of acts on the one side, and 
 the absence of love on the other.] 
 4 — 7.] The blessed attributes of love. 
 4.] μακροθνμίϊ is the negative 
 side, χρησ-Γ€ν€ται the positive, of a loving 
 temper : the former, the withholding of 
 anger ; the latter, the exercise of kind- 
 ness, oti ζηλοΐ, ' knows neither envy 
 nor jealousy :' both are included under 
 the more general sense of ζήλος. 
 ιτ£ρΐΓ€ρ€υ€ται] The word occurs in Cicero 
 ad Attic, i. 14: ' Di boni ! quomodo ίπίρ- 
 τΓίρίνσάμην novo auditori Pompeio ! ' and 
 Marc. Antonin. v. 5: άρεσκίίησθαι, κπΐ 
 ΐΓίρπίρίΰΕσθαι, κ. τοηαντα ριτττάζίσθαι 
 Ty Ψ"Χί?• Among the exs. in Wetst. of 
 TTspnepog and Trfpnipcia, is a good defini- 
 tion from Basil: τι trrri το περπίρίΰίσθαι ; 
 πάν ο μή cta χηήαν, α'λλά δια καλλω- 
 πισμόν πιριλαμβάνίται πιρπίρίίσς ίχ(ΐ 
 κατιιγορίαν. And the Etymol. Mag., — 
 άντΊ του, μηταιοϋται, άτακτΗ, κατιπαί- 
 ρεται μίτά βλακείας ϊπαιρήμενος. The 
 nearest English ex])r. would perhaps be, 
 ' displays not itself.' See Wetst. 
 5.] ovK άσχημονβΐ seems to be general, 
 without particular reference to the disor- 
 ders in public speaking with tongues, τα 
 ί αυτής— Love is so personified, as here to 
 be identified with the man possessiiig the 
 grace, who does not seek τα ίαυτοΰ : see
 
 556 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 XIII. 
 
 i here only t. 
 
 See note, 
 kch.iv. (i reft•. 
 Ich lii. 3li 
 
 only. Diut. 
 
 xxr. 3. Sre 
 
 Ezelt. xvi. 8 
 in ch. X 24. 
 
 Phil. ii.21. 
 n Acts xvii. 16 
 
 oily. Deut. 
 
 ix. 18. 
 
 ττερττερΕυίται, ου φυσιουται, ουκ ασχημοΐ'ει, 
 εαυτής, ου " τταροξυι^εται, ου ° λογι^^εται 
 
 ου 
 το 
 
 κακόν. 
 
 ου 
 
 αΧηθίία, 
 
 χαφ 
 
 ει 
 
 επι ry 
 πάντα " στεγει, 
 ελττ/ζει, τταιτα ^ νττομίνίΐ. 
 
 συ•γγηΐξ)Η οε τρ 
 πιστεύει, παΐ'τα 
 ουδέποτε ^^ εκ- 
 πίπτει. " ε'ιτε δε ^ προφτϊτειαι, "^ καταργ^βησοι^τοι* " ε'ιτε 
 
 ^ καταρ-γηθησίται. 
 
 αόικια, 
 πάντα 
 ■η α•γαπη 
 
 δε 
 
 Rom. iv. 
 4, 8. 
 ρ ch. ii. 9 red'. ..- a' . \ '^ u " 
 
 qconstr.Mait. -^λωσσαι, παυσουται £ΐτί "γνωσις, 
 
 xviii. 13. ι ' 
 
 Luke i. 14. Acts xv. 31. ch. xvi. 17. r ch. xii. 2Γι reft". s = Col. i. Γι. 2 Tliess. 
 
 ii. 12. Rom. i. 18. 2 Tiin. iii. 8. t ch. ix. 12. 1 Thi-.is. in. 1, 5 only t. Sir. viii. 17. 
 
 η ace , J'lhn xi. 26. Act.sxiii41. τ constr., 2 Tim. ii. 10. Heb. x. 32. xii. 2, 3, 7. Jame.•* i. 12. 
 
 w = Jamesi.il. SeeActsxii.7. Rom. ix. 6 reft". See note. xSoch.xv.ll. 2 C.ir. viii. 23. 
 
 y ter. 2 refl". ζ ch. i. 28 res'. 2 Cor. iii. 14. a abuol., here only. b ver. 2 reft'. 
 
 the arrangt in D Dam. — irtp-rroptvirni A Ephr. — 5. for ra {το 80 Chrj, but mss2 τα) 
 tavT., TO μη fonr/ic Β Clenij. — 6. εττι αδικία FG. — 7. for artyft, ασταγι (sic) FG : 
 tliligit (στ(μγΗ) slav Cypr Zeno : boih are in setli Ejihr. — 8. y oin B. — for ίκπιπτη, 
 ΤΓίπτίΐ {jirolj corrn, the meaning of ticir. not being apjirehended) ABC. 17• <<7' • 80 
 (Mac.')Nyss Andr {cadii) Orig-int Aug Ambrst: ίκλαπΗ 4ίί : t.vt C'DEFGJK mss 
 nrly vss {excidit or excidet ,• am has excedil) Clem Orig, Mac Chr Tlulrtj Dam Oec Thl 
 
 latff. dt om C^D'FGK 48'. 117. '-^38 it ν copt arm ai Did lat-flf (Clem oin also ars 
 
 See) : ins ABC-D^EJK &c syr goth al {yap, omg firt, Syr) gr-ff. — προψητιια {-na A) 
 AB. — καταρ-^ηθησίται Β. — yvwatiQ, καταργηθι/σονται {to conform to the precedg 
 
 ch. X. 33. ot) λογίζ. το κακόν] 
 
 ' imputetli not (the) evil :' oiioiv πυ- 
 ιη}ρον oil μόνον οι' κατασκευάζει αλλ 
 οϊΉ ΰποπτενιι κατά τον ή•/απημενον, 
 Chrys. : and so Theodoret, Theophyl., Es- 
 tius, Riickert, Meyer : and this is better 
 and more accordant with the sense of 
 \ο•/ίζεται, than the more general rendering 
 ' thinlcelh no evil.' And we must not over- 
 look the article, which seems here to have 
 the force of implying that the evil actually 
 exists, ' the evil ' which is, — but Love does 
 not impute it. So Theodoret, σνγ-^ινώσκει 
 τοΙς ίπταιημ'ενοις, ουκ εττί κακψ σκοπψ 
 ταύτα γεγενησθηι ϋττηλαμβάΐ'ων. 
 
 6. οΰ χ. £πι τη άδ.] ' rejoices not at (the) 
 iniquity,' i. e. at its commission by others, 
 ■ — as is the habit of the unloving world. 
 (τυγχαίρίΐ τη άλ.] Most comm., 
 as the E. V., altogether overlook the force 
 of the verb and the altered constr., and 
 render, ' rejoicelh in the truth:' others, 
 who respect the verb, make tij άληθ. '^^^ 
 τοΙς εϋδοκιμονσι (Chrys.), those to whom, 
 as in 3 John 12, μεμαρτνρηται υπ' αυτής 
 της αληθείας. But Meyer's rendering is 
 the only one which preserves the force of 
 both words: 'rejoices with the Truth,' ή 
 άλήθ. being personified, and meaning espe- 
 cially the spread amoiig men (as opposed to 
 aSiKia) of the Truth of the Gospel, and 
 indeed of the truth in general, — in oppo- 
 sition to those who (Rom. i. 18) τήν ά\ή- 
 θιιην (V aciKicf. κατέχουηι, — who (2 Tim. 
 iii. 8) άΐ'θιητανται Ty ά\ηβεία. 7.] 
 
 ιτάντα, — i. e. all things which can be borne 
 tvilh a good conscience. So Bengel, of all 
 four: 'videlicet, quae tegenda vel credenda, 
 
 quae speranda et suflerenda sunt.' 
 στεγί i] ' bears :' see note, ch. ix. 12. 
 Hammond, Estius, Bengel (above), — 
 'covers:' but the variation in sense from 
 ch. ix. is needless. χιστ.] viz. with- 
 
 out suspicion of another. ΙλίΓίζ.] 
 
 viz., even against hope — hoping what is 
 good of another, even when others have 
 ceased to do so. νιπομ.] viz. perse- 
 
 cutions and distresses inflicted by others, 
 rather than shew an unloving spirit to them. 
 8 — 12.] The eternal abiding of Love, 
 when other graces have passed away. 
 8. £κπί•ΤΓΤ£ΐ] The exact word is that of the 
 E. v., 'faileth:' soTheod. : οΰ διασφάλλε- 
 ται, αλλ' άε'ι μίνει βεβαία κ. ασάλευτος κ. 
 ακίνητος, ες άεϊ διαμένουσα' τούτο yap δια 
 τών επαγόμενων εδιδαΚεν. So Plat. Gorg. 
 p. 517 : ί' ούτοι ρήτορες ήσαν, ούτε tij 
 α'λ)/ϋΐ)'^ ρη -^opiKy εχρώντο {οϋ γάη αν 
 ίξί πεσο)') ούτε tij κυλaκικτJ : where Hein- 
 dorf, — ' proprie usurpatur de actoribus, 
 citharoedis, aliisque, qui a spectatoribus 
 exploduntur et exsibilantur.' Cf. the cele- 
 brated passage in Demosthenes ττεοί στεφ. 
 p. 315, — ετριταγωνίστεις, εγώ δ' ϊθεώρουν. 
 ενέπιπτες, ίγώ δ' εονριττην : (where also, 
 by the way, έπιπτες is a various reading.) 
 By £Ϊτ€, ίϊτ€, €Ϊτ€, the general idea, χαρί- 
 σματα, is split into its species — ' be there 
 prophesyings,' — 'be there (speakings in) 
 tongues,' — ' be there knowledge.' — 
 Chrys., al., understand the two first fu- 
 tures, καταργ., τταυσ., of the time when, 
 the faith being every where dispersed, these 
 gifts should be no longer needed. But un- 
 questionably the time alluded to is that of 
 the coming of the Lord; see ver. 1 2, and this 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK.
 
 5—12. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 557 
 
 9 C 
 
 f/c μέρους ynp "γινωσκομίν και \ίκ μίρους πρΓχρητευ- dch^xi.'I^'^^' 
 
 . 10" ^^ ''\ it ^ e '\ ^ C • / ζ xiv. 1. &C. 
 
 ομεν ^"ϋταΐ' οί tAvy τυ τίλίΐοΐ', το εκ μέρους καταρ- e-ch. ϋ. 6. 
 "γηοησεται. ore ημην ^ νιιπιος, ελαλουν ως ^ νηπιος, fgo.;pp.„„d 
 
 h»j' ^ε' i*\ y' 'e' " / Acts, passim. 
 
 εφρουουν ως * vrjTTtoc, tAoyiCojUfjv ως• ^ νϊ]πιος• υτ£ -νε- Paui cai.i. 
 yova ανηρ, ^ κατηρ-γηκα τα του ^ νηπίου. βλεπομεν ^ ^b.'ui^ti'^ 
 
 \ w ζν • 1 • ' » ΠΙ ' ' ' C\\ η 
 
 •yap άρτι οι εςοπτρου εΐ' αιΐΊγματί, τότε οε 
 
 h ai .sol-, here 
 
 ττροςοίΤΓΟί' «niy 
 
 ' i = Rom. viii. 
 
 ISreff. k Matt. xvi. 23. Kom. viii. 5 al. 1 James i. 20 only t. Wisd.vii.2tl. Sir. xii. 11. 
 
 mhcieonly. Num. xii. 8. Sir. xxxix. 3. η Gen. xxxii. 3U. Num. xii. 8. 
 
 clmises) AD^EFG al g Dam (text, not comm) Tert (freely) Ambrst ? — 9. for yap, δε 
 (^perhaps because this sentence was regarded not as rendering a reason for the last, but 
 as another assertion of the imperJ'ectio7i of knowledge and prophecy) JK all (abt (JO) arr 
 slav-ms Origj ? Dam .' (not h 1 te.vt) Phot (in Oec : expresslj' : it άντι τον yap. αίτια 
 yan Ιση τυϋ ?ιά τι μίλλοΐ'σι Kcirapy. κ. ττηΰσ.) Oec : txt AB(e sil)DEFG &c vss 
 (many) Orig, Thih-t al Iren Ilil al : om G7^ a'th goth Origi Melet Chr.— 10. rec bef ro 
 tK /<. ins rore {for emphasis and precision), with D'(E rors k-hi .')JK &c syrr al {και 
 TOTt Origi) Melet Chr Thdrt : om ABD FG 17- 'Λ\-ϋ. GT. 73-4. «0 it ν copt Eeth arm 
 goth Origj Ath Dam Iren Orig-int all. — (cnrojiy. το εκ μέρους DEFG it ν Syr goth . . Jer 
 Aug, al (not Iren Augj al) : τα εκ μ. FG Iren al: το om lOi). — 11. οτε §ε ημην D. — 
 rec ως νιιπ. fA., ως νηττ. (φρ., ως νηπ. fXoy. {prob transposns for emphasis sake), with 
 DEFGJK &c it syrr Chr Thdrt (h 1) Thl Oec lat-ff: txt AB"17. 80. 93 ν copt leth al 
 Clem Orig Bas Nyss (Did) Thdrtj Dam Jer Augj al : ως- νηπ. εφρ. om 48 slav-ms Did. — 
 rec aft orf, ins Ct {for conneauon and contrasi), with DEFGJK &c vss {et qniim ietli) 
 Orig (somet) Chr Thdrt al Tert al (Clem επειδή once, and επει δε once) : om ABD' C7-. 
 119 d e am harl' tol goth Orig (somet) Did Hil Ambrst.' — εyίlΊ>μηv B. — ra τον νηπ. 
 κaτηpyηκa DEFG it syr goth Bas lat-ff (not Aug al) (-σα Mac). — 12. /ίλίττω Thdrt, 
 (not h li. — yap om D'(E.')FG it ν arm Cyr Tert Cypr Ambrst (al ?). — bef Si εςοπ. ins 
 ως- DE all vss (not it ν al) Clem, Thdrt, Tert (not Thdot Orig Chr Tlidrtj Dam many 
 lat-ff). — και εν αινιγμ. J 63. 109-78 Orig (oft) Gaudj : και anΊyμaτoς Origj : εν εςοπ. 
 
 applies to all these, not to the last {γί•ώσις) 
 only. The two first, ιτροψ. and γλώσσ•., 
 shall be eAio/wii'/y superseded : γνώσις, re- 
 latively : the imperfect, by the perfect. 
 9, 10.] Reason giren ; — that our know- 
 ledge, and our prophesying (utterance of 
 divine things) are but partial, embracing 
 but a part : but when that which is perfect 
 (entire — universal) shall have come, this 
 partial shall be abolished — superseded. See 
 Eph. iv. 11 — 13, where the same idea is 
 otherwise expressed. 11.] Analogical 
 
 illustration of ver. 10. νήτΓΐ05 and 
 
 Ti'Xetos are used in contrast ch. ii. (! ; iii. 1 ; 
 xiv. 20. ίλοίλουν, έφρόνο-υν, «λογιζό- 
 
 μην — ' I spoke,' ' I felt ' (was minded), 
 'I judged.' There can hardly be an allu- 
 sion, as Theophyl., Oec, Bengel, 01sh.,al., 
 think, to the three gifts, of tongues (ϊλάλ.) 
 jjrophesy {ίψρόν., which suits but very 
 lamely', and knowledge {ίλογιζ.). 
 ore ydy. κ.τ.λ.Ί ' Now that I am become 
 a man, I have brought to an end the 
 ways of a child:' not, as E. V., 'when I 
 became a man, I put away ....,' as if it 
 were done on a set day, and as if yi-y. and 
 κατίμ^γ. were aorists. For this u.se of οτε, 
 of. Demosth. Olynth. 1, init. οτε τοίννν 
 τανθ' οϋτως ίχει, προςήκη πρυθνμως ίθί- 
 Χίΐν άκονειν : see Kiihner, § 813. 2. 
 12.] Contrast between our j)resent 
 
 sight and knowledge, — and those in the 
 future perfect state. γοίρ justifies the 
 
 analogy of the former ver. : ' for ' it is just 
 so with us. άρτι, in our present con- 
 
 dition, until the Lord's coming. δι* 
 
 i'sOTTTpov, 'through a mirror:' i.e. as 
 Billroth, Meyer, and De W. — according to 
 the popular illusion, which regards the 
 object, really seen behind the mirror, as 
 seen through it. AVe must think, not of 
 our mirrors of glass, but of the imperfectly- 
 reflecting metallic mirrors of the ancients. 
 The idea of the lapis specularis, placed in 
 windows, being meant, adopted by Schott- 
 gen from Rabbinical usage (e. g. ' omnes 
 prophetse viderunt per specular obscurum, 
 et Moses doctor noster vidit per specular 
 lucitlum ' [Wetst.] : and see numerous ex- 
 amples in his Hor. Hebr. i. C4G ff.), and 
 followed by many Comm., is inconsistent 
 with the usage of esoiTTpov, which (Meyer) 
 is always a miurok (Find. Nem. vii. 20 : 
 Anacr. xi. 2 ; xx. 5. Lucian, Amor. xliv. 
 48 : see also reff.) : the window of lapis 
 specularis being Βίοπτηα (Strabo, xii. 2, 
 p. 540). ev αΐνίγματι] There is a 
 
 reference to Num. xii. 8, σηψα κατά 
 στόμα λαλήσω αίηψ ίν t'ion, κκΊ ον δι 
 αΐνι•) μάτωΐ'. Many take the words adverbi- 
 ally, — ' enigmatically' (so E.V., ' darkly'): 
 but this cannot be, because αίνιγμα is ob-
 
 558 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 XIII. 13. 
 
 " iun!":ii.'-27' "ίτρος " προςωπον' άρτι -γινωσκω ^ εκ μίρους, τότε δε abde 
 
 bis. ο' ' Ρ/1*• ^ο* 'ΰ Ι'ία ^^^ 
 
 pciixu. 11 ετΓΐ-γνωσομαι '^ κανως και επί^νωσυην. νυνι οε 
 
 ''Luke'xi?39 ^ μίνίΐ πιστις εΧττις α^άττη, τα τρία ταΰτα' * μείζων δε 
 
 ■λ\. Jub XXX. / r > / 
 
 1,9. τούτων τ] α-ναπη. 
 
 r=Heb. xiii.l, ^ ' ' , ν •> , 
 
 8^"οΐΓ1ίΓ^. XIV. 'Διώκετε την α-γάττην, " ζηλοντε δε τα " ττνευ- 
 
 xiv. 5. com- \ "λΛ Λΐ./ w . ' 9' ^ χΛΛ" 
 
 parat., μηιι. uaTiKQ, uaAAov οε tva ττοοφί/τευητε. ο yap λάλων 
 
 xiii. 32 refl. ι -^ ' •> ι /ι 
 
 . Rom. ix. 30. χϋ 13. Phil. iii. 12, 14. 1 Thess. v. 15 al. Sir. xxrii. 
 only. Sir. li. 18. ν = Rum. i. 11. cli. xii. 1. wch. xiii. lu. 
 
 π = cli. xii. 31. ver. 30 
 X Acts ii. 4. X. 415. six. 6 al. 
 
 K. εν aiv. al : δι εςοπτρ. ως ερ αιν. 5. 10. 17 Thdrt, : εν αινιγ. om Clem (alw). — 
 γινωσκομεν and γνωσομαι 238 lect 8. — bef εττεγν. (twiyv. FG) ins εγω FG it tol Cypr 
 (ω D' .') : αντος ε-γνωσα με arm. — 13. μινει St FG ; manet aulem it lat-ff. — ταύτα om 
 sah. — μείζον J. — for τούτων, πάντων 89. 
 
 Chap. XIV. 1. δε om ν sah Ambrst Pelag. — for irv., χαρίσματα 177• — 2. γλωσσαις 
 
 jective, not subjective : ' a dark hint given 
 by words.' I agree with Meyer, notwith- 
 standing De Wette's strong objections, in 
 beheving tv αινίγματι to mean ' iti a dark 
 discourse,' viz. the revealed word, which is 
 dark, by comparison with our future per- 
 fect knowledge. So also Luther : in eineni 
 bunieln 3Bort. Thus, as M. observes, Iv 
 will denote, as Iv τφ κμνπτφ, Matt. vi. 4, 
 the local department, in ivhich the βλετηιν 
 takes place. τότε = 'όταν t\9y το 
 
 TiXnov, ver. 10: 'at the Lord's coming, 
 and after.' ιτρόςωττ. ιτρος ιτρόςωττ.] 
 
 'Face towards face,' i.e. by immediate 
 intuition : so Heb. in reff. — ' I shall tho- 
 roughly know even as I was (during this 
 life : he places himself in that state, and 
 uses the aor. as of a thing gone by) tho- 
 roughly known.' — In this life we are 
 known by God, rather than know Him : 
 see Gal. iv. 9 ; ch. viii. 3, note, — and cf. 
 Philo de Cherub, p. 127 : vvv οτε ζώμεν, 
 κρατούμίθα μάλλον η άρχομίν, κ. -γΐ'ωρι- 
 ζόμίθα μάλλον η γνωρίζομίν. — The sense 
 of this aor. ίπίγνώσθηΐ' must not be forced, 
 as in E. V., to a present, or to a future, as 
 by some Comm. 13.] Superiority of 
 
 Love to the other great Christian graces. 
 — Some gifts shall pass away — but these 
 three great graces shall remain for ever — 
 FAITH, HOPE, LOVE. This is necessarily 
 the meaning, — and not that love alone 
 shall abide for ever, and the other two 
 merely during the present state. For (1) 
 vvvi 8e is not ' but now,' i. e. in this present 
 state, as opposed to what has just been said 
 ver. 12, — but 'rebus sic stantibus' 'qua 
 cum ita sint,'^a.nd the inference from it 
 just the contrary of that implied in the 
 other rendering : viz. that since tongues, 
 pi'ophesyings, knowledge, will all pass 
 away, we have left but these three. 
 (2) From the position of p.£V£i, it has a 
 strong emphasis, and carries the weight of 
 the clause, as opposed to the previously- 
 mentioned things which καταργηθήσεται. 
 
 (3) From τά τρία ταντα, a pre-eminence 
 is obviously pointed out ior faith, hope, and 
 love, distinct from aught which has gone 
 before. — This being the plain sense of the 
 words, how can faith and fiope be said to 
 endure to eternity, when faith will be lost 
 in sight, and hope in fruition .' With hope, 
 there is but little difficulty : but one place 
 has inscribed over its portals, " Lasciate 
 ogni speranza, voi che' ntrate." New glo- 
 ries, new treasures of knowledge and of 
 love, will ever raise, and nourish, blessed 
 hopes of yet more and higher, — hopes which 
 no disappointment will blight. But how 
 can faith abide, — faith, which is the evi- 
 dence of things not seen, — where all things 
 once believed are seen .' In the form of 
 holy confidence a?id trust, faith will abide 
 even there. The stay of all conscious 
 created being, human or angelic, is depen- 
 dence on God ; and where the faith which 
 comes by hearing is out of the question, 
 the faith which consists in trusting will be 
 the only faith possible. Thus Hope will 
 remain, as anticipation certain to be ful- 
 filled : Faith will remain, as trust, entire 
 and undoubting ; — the anchor of the soul, 
 even where no tempest comes. See this 
 expanded and further vindicated in my 
 Quebec Chapel Sermons, Λ'^οΐ. I. Serm. 
 viii. μείζων τ.] ' The greater of 
 
 these,' — not ' greater than these.' "The 
 greater," as De Wette beautifully remarks, 
 " because it contains in itself the root of 
 the other two : we believe only one whom 
 we love, — we hope only that which we 
 love." And thus the forms of Faith and 
 Hope which wiU there for ever subsist, 
 will be sustained in, and overshadowed by, 
 the all-pervading superior element of eter- 
 nal Love. 
 
 Chap. XIV. 1 — 25.] Demonstration of 
 
 THE SUPERIORITY OF THE GIFT OF PRO- 
 PHECY OVER THAT OF SPEAKING WITH 
 
 TONGUES. 1.] Transition from the 
 
 parenthetical matter of the last chapter to
 
 XIV. 1—5. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 559 
 
 * -/λώσση ου /c ανθρωττοις λολει, ολλα τω θίω' ουέε/ο y = Markiv. 
 
 ' ' , ^ . ^ ο r ■•,.. 33. Gen. xi. 
 
 γαρ • ακουΐΐ, ττνίνματι οε ΛοΛει μνστΐ]οια ο οε ττρο- ^ _ fer.ili ; 
 
 / '/»' \\''b'<>^ 'c 'Λ Acts xvii. 16. 
 
 φητίνων ανυρωττυις ΛαΛει οικοοομην και παρακΛησιν acii.xiii.2 
 /cat '^ TTafJa^vO'iav. ^ο λαλών γλώσστ} έαυτον '^ οικ:οδθ|Μεί, "^ = ^^"g'!^•^''• 
 Ο οε προφητεύων ίΚκΚτί\σιαν υικοοομίΐ. σελω οε παντας ret». 
 
 f - .- / '-Λ -ν '^\ / / d here only t. 
 
 νμας λαλεΐν γλωσσαις, μάλλον όε tra ^' πρθ(|>τ/τευ»)τε• ^ί»Ί•^ί^• 
 
 f /./ Cv\ ' \ν . ' '''^ ' Λ Λ ~ Λ ' Κ ' * e Acis ix. 31 
 
 «είίΐων οε ο ττροφητευωι^ η ο Λάλων "γλωσσαις, έκτος les. 
 ίΐ /U7J διερμηνευ^, Ίνα η εκκλησία ' oikoooju?]!' Aapr]. gJii''^^^^^. 
 
 1 Tim. V. 19. 
 
 h cL•. xii. 30 rcfi 
 
 i Roin. xiv. 19 reff. 
 
 DEFG 10. 61 g- slav-ed Cyr Chr, Aug : ev γλωσση Mac, also (and in ver 4) copt sah. — 
 συν. ανθυ. sah. — τω bef θ(ω om (^or conformity with ανθ().}) BD'FG G7" Chrj (and 
 Chr ms, Matthai) : ins AD^EJK mss (appy) Chr, Thdrt Dam Thl Oec— for ynp ακονιι, 
 τταρακονίΐ ΙΤ. — ττνίνμα FG it flor (latt mss in Mil) Pel Vig Bed.— 3. for ο h, η yap 
 FG g ; nam qui d e v. — tig oikoS. v Oec-ed Ambrst Pel Bed. — 4. ο Xa\ei FG (G adds 
 aut λαλωι). — γλωσσαις DE 46 slaved Mac. — oticoi. 1st to 2nd om 48'. 178. — ίκκλησιαν 
 θίίΐν FG g V (not am demid al) Pel Bed. — 5. if om sah. — τταντας om 178 : νμ. παντας 
 A copt syrr al Ambrst. — γλ. λαλ. A am Chr Thl. — for iva πρυψ., πρυφητίναν D' ν Jer 
 Pel Bed : προφιιηυίτί G. — for μ(ΐζ., κοΗσσων 37• 7^ al. — rec μιιΖ. γαρ {corrn, to give 
 a reason: see note), with DEFG^yap εστίν FG vss)JK &c vss gr-lat-ff: txt AB 
 39 (al.') copt (.Mac ο St προφ. μιιζ. η ο). — γλωσση Syr ar-erp Thdrt Ambrst Sedul. — 
 ίΐίρμηνίνΗ JK all (abt 30) Chr Thl : -ηνων D', also Ε addg η : η ο ίαρμηνινων FG : 
 
 the subject about to be resumed. — ' Pursue 
 after Love (let it be your great aim, — im- 
 portant and enduring as that grace has been 
 shewn to be) : meantime however (during 
 that pursuit ; making that the first thing, 
 take up this as a second) strive for spiritual 
 gifts, but more (more than πΐ'. in general : 
 i. e. more for this than for others) that ye 
 may prophesy' (sc. ζηλυϋτε, Ίνα ... as the 
 aim of your ζήλος). 2 — 20.] Pro- 
 
 phecy edifies the brethren more than 
 speaking with tongues. 2.] ' For he 
 
 that speaks in a tongue, speaks not to 
 men but to God ; for no one understands 
 Mm (so άκονω in reff. and .\then. ix. p. 
 382, t\tyfv ρημητα a oliSt ίίς r'jicovntv 
 «»', i. e. as a general rule, the assembly do 
 not understand him ; some, who have the 
 gift of interpretation of tongues, may, — but 
 they are the exceptioni, but (opposed to 
 oiiStlg γαρ ό/οοι'ίί) in the spirit (in his 
 spb'it, as opposed to in his understanding : 
 his spirit is the organ of the Holy Ghost, 
 but his understanding is unfruitful, see vv. 
 14, 15) he speaks mysteries (things which 
 are hidden from the hearers, and sometimes 
 also from himself) : 3.] but (on the 
 
 other hand) he who prophesies, speaks 
 to men edification (genus) and (species) 
 exhortation and (sp.) consolation.' See 
 the definition of j/r(/phecy given on ch. xii. 
 10 : and Stanley's excursus introductory to 
 this chapter. ιταραμυθία occurs Plato, 
 
 Axioch. p. 3G5, — aautvFi T))v\pn\)jv, πάνυ 
 ivCta παραμυθίας : and yEIian. V. II. xii. 
 1, fin., παρίμυθήσατυ Άρταζίρζην, κ. rb 
 τήςλΰττης Ίάσατο πί'ιϋος, ί'ίζαντος τον βασ. 
 
 T7j κηύίμονίί}, κ. Tij τταραμυθίφ πεισθίντος 
 σννίτώς. 4.] έαυτ. οίκ. does not 
 
 necessarily involve his understanding what 
 he speaks : the exercise of the gift in ac- 
 cordance with the prompting of the Spirit 
 may be regarded as an οικυίο/,ι») : the in- 
 tensity of the feeling of prayer or praise in 
 which he utters the words is edifying to 
 him, though the words themselves are un- 
 intelligible. This view is necessary on ac- 
 count of what is said in ver. 5, that if he 
 can interpret, he can edify not only himself 
 but the church. Ικκλησίαν] not, as 
 
 Meyer, a congregation, but = τήν ικκλη- 
 σίαν : the art. being often omitted when a 
 noun in government has an emphatic place 
 before the verb : accordingly on ver. 5, it is 
 >'/ Ικ•ΐ£•λ., which is edified. 5.] He 
 
 shews that it is from no antipathy to or 
 jealousy of the gift of tongues that he thus 
 speaks : but (force of the Se) that he wished 
 them all to speak tcith tongues, but rather 
 that they should prophesy. The distinc- 
 tion between the ace. and inf. after θίλω, 
 as the simple direct object of the wish, and 
 Ϊγ« with the subj., as its higher and ulterior 
 object, has been lost in the E. V. The 
 second Sk is opposed to the subordinate 
 λαλ. γλ., as in ver. I to τα πνευματικά. 
 
 μΐίζων δε] f έ is transitional. 
 μείζων] see rert"., — superior in usefulness, 
 and tlierefore in dignity. tKxbs «l μ•η 
 
 is a mixture of two constrr. ίκτυς d, and fi 
 μή. It is not a Hebraism, as Grot, sup- 
 poses ; Wetst. gives exx. from Dcmosth., 
 Aristides, Lucian, Sextus Einpiricus : aiid 
 from Thorn. Mag., φαμεν, ίκτυς (i μή τύΰε,
 
 560 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους Α. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 ui'if'/ 13^'" νννι δί, αόίΧφοι, ίαν ελΟω ττρος ύμας γλώσσαις λαλωΐ', ABDE 
 τι υμάς ωψίΧησω, ίαν μη ύμιν Χαλησω η 
 
 Malt. xiii. 3 
 m Κοιη. li. Γ>. 
 
 ch. i 7 al. 
 11 ch xiii. 2. 
 ο Matt. vii. 28 
 
 al. 
 p= Gal.iii. 15 
 
 only. 
 qlierr oiily+. 
 
 Wisd. xiv. 
 
 ev 
 ψίΐ Ύ\ ίν γνωσεί ij ει; προφητίΐα η 
 
 ^ δίδοντα 
 
 αποκαλυ- 
 
 ' ο 5• 'ί 
 
 εν οιοα^τ} , 
 
 r=-"Malt.xxiv. "VV 
 2il. Exod. ' 
 
 ' ^ ομως τα '^ αφυ^α ^ωνην "^ δίδοντα, ε'ίτε * αυλός είτε 
 
 κιθάρα, εαν " διαστολην τοις ^ φθόγγοις• μη "^ δω, ττως 
 
 σΟησΒται το ^ αύλουμενον r} το " κιθα^ϊΐζόμενον ; καί 
 
 sni. Ε.ΧΟΙΙ. y >\,. >'Γ\Λ ζ ^ζ'λ ^'r^" 'a ' 
 
 Tiii.23. isa. yap Euv acnAov φωνην σαλτη^ς οω, τις τταρασκευα- 
 xiii. 10. >ιχώ ' ^ r ' / ι :> ^ ι 
 
 6.3uDffa θόρνβην, Enr. Hec. 10!<3. s here only. 1 KinRs χ. 5 al. t Rev. v. 8. χίτ. 2. xv. 2 
 
 onlv. Gen.iv.2lHl. u Rum. iii. 22. x. 12 only. Excid. Tiii. 23. τ Rom. x. IS only. P.^a. xtiii.4. 
 
 w Mart. xi. 17. L.• only t- ^ Rev. xiv. 2 only. Isa. xxiii. 16. y (Luke X. 44 only. Ps. 1. (i.) 
 
 = here only. Polyb. viii. 3. 2, άδηλοι tATiirtec. and al. (See ch. ix. 26.) ITim.vi. 17. ζ Matt. xxiv. 
 
 31 refl'. a Acts x. 10. 2 Cor. ix. 2, 3 only. Jer. xii. 5. 
 
 txt ABD' all Thdrt Dam Oec— 6. νυν ABD'FG Chrj (mSj Matthai) : txt JK ^iss 
 (appy) Chr Thl Oec. —νμιν om arm.— tj om I7. 67'• 120- d e syr Thl. — iv bef 
 διδαχ. om D'FG (harP om bef πυοφ. also). — 7. tav μη D'FG. — for τοις φθογ-γηις, 
 φθόγγου Β (not τον φθ. wbich [Tisch, ed^] is a mistake of Bentl) d e tol Ambrst 
 {souituum V copt Pel Bed). — for ζω, ξ,δω D-'EFGJ all (abt 40) Thdrt Dam 
 Till: txt Orig Chr Oec. — όωτε Κ \17. — γνωσθη D'FG. — for ανλουμη>ον, λολου- 
 μίνον 17• — 8• σολπιξ AJ : -ττιιξ FG. — σαλπ. φωνην Α al Orig. — for δω, δωη 
 
 tivity. 7 — 11.] Instances to shew that 
 
 unintelligible discourse profits nothing. 
 And first, — 7 — 9.] from musical instru- 
 ments. 7.] όμως occurs here and in 
 the only other place where it is used in the 
 N. T. (ref.) at the beginning of the sen- 
 tence, out of its logical order, which would 
 be before ίάν διαστο\ήν . ., thus : ' Things 
 without life whicli yield sound, whether 
 flute or harp, yet, if they do not,' &c. — 
 The renderings, ' even things without life ' 
 (E. v.), or ' things which, though without 
 life, yet give sound ' (Winer, § (ιό, 4), are 
 inadmissible, — the former because of the 
 usage of ϋμίυς, the latter because no such 
 idea as any surprise at a thing without life 
 yielding sound is here in [ilace. 
 φων. διδ.] so δίδου φωιάν, Find. Nem. 
 V. 93. €αν διαστ.] ' If they (the 
 άψυγα φ. δ.) shall not have yielded a 
 distinction (of musical intervals) in iheir 
 tones, how shall he know that which is 
 being played on the flute or that which 
 is being played on the harp (i. e. ivhat 
 tune is played in either case : the art. being 
 repeated to shew that two distinct instances 
 are contemplated, not necessarily 'one tune, 
 either piped, or harped^ := το αύλανμι- 
 νον η κιθίΐ^ιζόμΐνυν •,)'ί' The observation 
 of Meyer, that this example is decisive 
 against foreign languages being spoken in 
 the exercise of this gift, is shewn to be 
 irrelevant by the next example, from 
 which the contrary might be argued — the 
 άδηλοι; φωνί) of the trumpet being exactly 
 analogous to an unknown language, not 
 to an inarticulate sound. But the fact 
 is that all such inferences, from pressing 
 analogies close, are insecure. 8.] 
 αδηλον, 'uncertain,' in its meaning: for a 
 jmrticular succession of notes of the trumpet 
 
 κα\ ίκτος fi τάδε. διερμηνεΰη] viz. 
 
 ό Χαλων yXt'or^nij, not τις, as suggested by 
 Flatt. On the subj. with n', giving a sense 
 not distinguishable from the ind., see Winer, 
 § 42, Anm., and Herm., on Soph. Ant. 706. 
 6.] Example of the unprofitable- 
 ness of speaking with tongues without in- 
 terpreting, — expressed in the first person 
 as of himself. vwi δέ] ' quod cum ita 
 
 sit ' — viz. that there is no edification with- 
 out interpretation. eov βλθω] Chrys. 
 understands the first person to imply ' not 
 even I myself should profit you,' &c. But 
 then (ΐϋτος ίγώ or some expr. similarly 
 emphatic would have been used. — The se- 
 cond ίάν is parallel to the first, not depen- 
 dent on ώφίλίισω. It is the negative side 
 of the supposition, as iav ϊλθω, κ.τ.λ., was 
 the affirmative. On this double apodosis 
 Hermann remarks. Soph. Aj. 827, — 'Est 
 enim hsec verborum complexio ex eo genere, 
 cujus jam apud Homerum exempla inveni- 
 untur, cjuod duplicem habet apodosin, al- 
 teram prsemissam, sequentem alteram : quae 
 ratio ibi maxime apta est, ubi in magno 
 animi motu, quasi non satis sit id quod 
 praemissum est, aliud infertur secunda apo- 
 dosi, quod gravius sit et fortius.' 
 
 ή iv άτΓοκ ] It seems best here, with 
 
 Estius, to understand ' duo juga, ut conju- 
 gata sint revelatio et prophetia, ac rursus 
 conjugata scientia et doctrina.' So also 
 Meyer, who observes that the ground of 
 ■προφητεία is άττοκ iXviptc, and that of δι- 
 δαχί). γνύ'τις : the former being a direct 
 speaking in the Spirit, and the latter a 
 laying forth by the aid of the Spirit of 
 knowledge acquired. Thus ti•, as referred 
 to άτΓοκ. and γνώσ., denotes the internal 
 element; — as referred to ττροφ. and διδ., 
 the external element, of the spiritual ac-
 
 6—12. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους Α. 
 
 561 
 
 σίται 
 
 fiC ΤΓολίαον ; ούτως και ύμίΐς δία της Λ/λώσσί?ς barranst.of 
 
 vr" \' C\-- / words, ch. 
 
 ^v.^ jUJ] ίυσημον Aoyov Οωτε, ττως ^νωσθησίται το if4."^ **^'" 
 αΛουμεΐΌν , εσίσσε 7«Ρ f'C αέρα Λαλουντίς. ^" το- ρ-. ιχμχ.3. 
 
 e • ' f / _ . '^ , , Ν ,Γ^^ dSeech.is.26 
 
 σαυτα, ει τυχοί, γε»'/} (^ωι/ωΐ' ίίσιν εν κοσμώ, και ουόεν ""^'.'.ly" ρ^πο 
 ^ ο^ωνον' έαν ouf ^ΐ7} ειδω την ^ ζΰναμιν της φωνής, 
 εσομαι τω λαλοΰντι ' βάρβαρος, καΐ ο λάλων "^ εν ΐμοι 
 
 de Mut. 
 Norn. p. 1067, 
 
 ' βάρβαρος. όντως 
 
 "" πνευμάτων, " ττρος την 
 
 και υμεις εττεί Ζ^ι^λωται εστε 
 " οικο^ομην της εκκΧησ'ιας ° ^η- 
 
 €1 τι.χοι, κ. 
 γραμματι- 
 
 19, 
 
 ίιί«υο., e'l τύχοι .... Galen, de nsa. part, τι., ίίκα μέι/, e'l τιΊχοι. Wetst.) f =■ ch. xii. 10 refT. 
 
 g — here only. Acts viii. 32. ch. xii. 2. 2 Pet. ii. 16 only. Isa. liii. 7. h — here only. Dion. 
 
 Hal. Antt. i. 68, τοϋ π μήπω -(ράμματίΐς βύρ'ΐμίνου, τω S StiXovv τ. eKeiiOv ίύιιαμιιι τ. παΚαιού•;. Dio. 
 
 Ca.ss. Iv. 3, roiuvTuv γαρ η δύοαμιζ τυν ύι/όματον τοιίτυΐ' ι5(|Λοϊ. i .4cLs xxviii. 2 reS'. 
 
 k = Rom. .\i. 25 var read. 1 Acts xxi. 20. xxii. 3. Gal. i. 14 al. (Exod. xx. 5 al.) m = ch. xi. 
 
 10. Ter. 32. 1 John iv. 1. η Kom. xv. 2. οίκ., xiv. lo reff. ο w. ϊκα, here only. w. πιΰ?, 
 
 Mark xi. 18. xiv. 11. w. τίνα καταπίν;, 1 Pet. v. 8. 
 
 D' : £iSw al. — τταρασκίυαζεται A Orig. — 9. for ενσημον, (νσχημην D'E 21. 23^. 80. — 
 for TO λαλ., ο XaXov/itv sah. — γαρ otn Syr eeth : add ως arm. — 10. τοααυτα om D'FG 
 g Ambrst (ed) : tanium e : on τοσαυτα (omg 6i Γυ;!^οι) arm. — φωνών om e: φων. γένη 
 44 : γλωσσών Syr ar-erp Ambrst : γλωσσω»/ κ. φωνών ^3. — rec ί(ττιν {gramml coi'rn .• 
 nee note), with JK &c Chr Thdrt Oec : txt ABDEFG 32-9. 47- 672. 73 Clem Dam Thl. 
 — tv τω κ-οσ/ι. D'FG {^hoc m. ν (not atn) Ambrst Bed). — rec aft ovCiv, ins αντων (αΛΛη 
 for precision), with D'EJK &c syrr al Chr Thdrt al : om ABD FG 57. 67^ al e ν Clem 
 Dam Ambrst Bed. — α0ωΐ'. εστίν D'EFG vss. — 11. ow om sah. — ιίω AD'J I7. 73. 114 
 lect 13. — γινωσκω FG. — τη δυναμίί 89. — bef εσομαι ins όμοιος slav : for εσομαι . . . 
 βαρ. (2nd), βάρβαρος δοζει μοι ο ΧαΧων 115. — ΧαΧονντι μοι 73 arm. — from βαο. to 
 βαρ. om J (Scholz, not Tisch).— fv om DEFG Γ-. 3. 6. 672. 80. 93. 121 Clem'Chr 
 (expressly, ο εμοι λαλ. βαρβ.) Dam. — 12. for πνευμάτων, πνευματικών 23-marg 7^ 
 
 then, as now, gave the signals for attack, and 
 retreat, and the various evolutions of an 
 army. The giving the signal for battle with 
 the trumpet is called by Dio Cassius τ6 πο- 
 Χεμικον βο^,ν, by ^lian το παρορμητικον 
 εμπνιΐν : see Wetst., where many exx. are 
 to be found. 9.] Application of these 
 
 instances. δια τ. γλώσοτης is most 
 
 naturally understood /;A^*ice//y, 'by means 
 of your tongue,' as answering to the utter- 
 ance of the sound by the musical instru- 
 ments. But the technical rendering, by 
 means of the tongue (in the sense of γλώσ- 
 ayj XaXflv) is allowable. €σ€σ•θ€ . . . 
 
 λαλ.] This periphrasis of the future implies, 
 ' ye will be, so long as ye speak, speaking, 
 . . .' On els α.€ρα, see reff'. : it implies the 
 no7i reception by hearers of what is said. 
 10, 11.] Another example of the 
 unprofitableness of an utterance not under- 
 stood. 10.] εΐ τυ'χοι, ' if it should 
 so happen,' i.e. 'perad venture:' — it is 
 commonly found with numerical nouns ; 
 but sometimes with hypothetical sen- 
 tences in general, as in ch. xv. 37• See 
 reff. and exx. in Wetst. It will not bear 
 the rendering ^for example,' though in 
 meaning it nearly approaches it. It belongs 
 here to τοσαΰτα, itself representing some 
 fixed number, but not assignable by the 
 informaiion which the writer possesses, or 
 not worth as.>igning. See similar exprr. 
 Vol. II. 
 
 Acts V. 8, — and 2 Sam. xii. 8 in E. V. 
 γί'νη φωνών] 'kinds of languages;' the 
 more precise expr. would be -γένη φωνής, 
 or φωναί : we can hardly say, with Meyer, 
 that each language is a γέΐΌς φωνών. The 
 use of φωνών, and not γΧωσσώΐ', is no 
 doubt intentional, to avoid confusion, 
 ■γΧώσση being for the most part used in this 
 passage in a peculiar meaning : but no ar- 
 gument can be grounded on it as to the 
 ■γΧώσσαι being languages or not. 
 ίΐσίν (plur.), because it is wished to dis- 
 tinguish them in their variety. otiScv, 
 scil. -γίνος. Bleek renders, 'no rational 
 animal is without speech ,•' and Grot., read- 
 ing as the rec. αυτών, understands it as 
 referring to meri : others supply έθνος to 
 οίι^έν. But the common rendering is both 
 simpler, and better sense ; ' none of them, 
 is without signification,' as E. V. : or, 
 ' is inarticulate.' 11.] ovv, seeing that 
 none is without meaning : for if any tvere, 
 the imputations following would not be just. 
 We assume that a tongue which we do not 
 understand has a meaning, and that it is 
 the way of expression of some foreign 
 nation. βάρβαρος, — ' a foreigner,' 
 in the sense of one wlio is ignorant of the 
 speech and habits of a people. So Ovid, 
 Trist. V. 10, — ' Barbarus hie ego sum, quia 
 non intelligor ulli;' and Herod, ii. 158, — 
 βαρβάρους £ε πάντας οι Αιγύπτιοι καΧί- 
 Οο
 
 562 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 13 
 
 διθ7 
 
 νλωι 
 
 ρ abso!., Matt. TiiT£, ivo ' Ίποισσίνητε. '" ϋιοττίο ό λα\ων γλώσσι? abdk 
 
 ν. 20. oh. / η α '' r ^ ' 14. ' '^ ^ ' F&JK 
 
 Mait^xxiv προςευχίσϋω ' ινα blcoμηvevϊJ. ^* εαν yap προςευχω- 
 
 SOllMk. Mnrkxiv. 35. (οπω?, Acts viii. 15.) Phil. i. ϋ. Col. i. 9. iv. 3. 2 Thess. i. Π. Ui. 1. 
 Γ ch. xii. 30. 
 
 Syr ar-erp sah slav (g has both) Orig-int Ambr : ανθρώπων 2. — for πίρισσίυ., προφη- 
 TtvtiTi A "iS Amhrst{qy cerite 171 prop/ieds mSj). — 13. for ίιοπίρ, διυ {corrn for simplicity) 
 ABDEFG Dam: txt JK mis (appy) Chr Thdrt Thl Oec : om e.— for γλωσσ»;, γνωσίΐ 
 178. — προςίυχίσθί 80. — δΐίρμηνίυιτω 109.— 14. yap om BFG lOS'-lS g sah : δί 38 copt 
 
 ουσι Tovc μη πφισι ΰμογλώσσονς. (Wc-tst.) 
 The appellation always conveyed a certain 
 contempt, and such is evidently intended 
 here. So Ovid, in the ne.xt line, — ' Et rident 
 stolidi verba Latina Getse.' — tv εμοί, ' in 
 my estimation:' so Eurip. Hippol. 1335: 
 σΰ δ' tv τ' ίκίΐνψ κάν ίμοί tpai^'y κακός, — 
 ' in his judgment arid in mine :' see KUhner, 
 ii. 275. 12.] Application of ihe ana- 
 
 logy, as in ver. 9. — The ούτως is evidently 
 meant as in ver. 9, but is rendered some- 
 what difficult by the change of the constr. 
 into a direct exhortation. It is best there- 
 fore to suppose an ellipsis ; and give to 
 οϋτως the pregnant meaning, after the 
 lesson conveyed by this example. Meyer's 
 rendering, since in such a manner (i. e. so 
 as to be barbarians to one another) ye also 
 are emulous, &c., is very harsh, besides 
 making the second clause, standing as it 
 does without a μάλλον or any disjunctive 
 particle, mean (and I do not see that it 
 will bear any other meaning), seek this 
 βαρβαρυψωνία to the edfying of the 
 Church. ' Thus likewise ye (i. e. after 
 the example of peuj)le who would not wish 
 to be barbarians to one another, — avoiding 
 the absurdity just mentioned), emulous 
 as ye are of spiritual gifts (reff.), seek 
 them to the edifying of the church, that 
 ye may abound' (grow in grace, see reif.) : 
 or perhaps (but I can find no instance of 
 ζητώ 'ίνα thus used : ch. iv. 2 is no case in 
 point, see note there) as in E. V. ' seek that 
 ye may excel (abound in them) to the edify- 
 ing of the church.' 13.] Hortatory 
 inference from the foregoing examples. — 
 There is some difficulty in the constr. of 
 this ver. ττροςβυχ. ϊνα δΐ€ρμ. is ren- 
 dered by Chrys., Theodoret, Theophyl., 
 Erasm., Beza, Calv., Grot., Estius, Wetst., 
 — Bleek, Riickert, Olsh., al., '■pray that he 
 may interpret.' But the next ver. shews 
 that this is untenable. For the act of 
 ττροςινχίσθαι yXioaay is there introduced 
 in strict logical connexion with this ver. 
 so as to shew that the ττρηςίνχίσθω here 
 must have the same meaning as there, viz., 
 that oi praying m a tongue, openly in the 
 church. Seeing this, Luther, Rosenm., al., 
 
 render it, let ' so pray, that he may 
 
 interpret .•' i. e. ' not pray, unless he can 
 
 interpret' But this rendering of 'ίνα is 
 hardly allowable even when ο'ύτω is ex- 
 pressed, see note on ch. ix. 24. The knot 
 of the difficulty lies in the relation of 'ίνα 
 to verbs of this kind. It may be doubted 
 whether in such exprr. as πραςίϋχίσθαι 
 'ίνα (see reff.), the conj. ever represents the 
 mere purport of the prayer, as in our " to 
 pray, that." The idea of purpose is in- 
 separably bound up in this particle, and 
 can be traced wherever it is used. Thus 
 προςίύχ. 'ίνα seems always to convey the 
 meaning " to pray, ΐ7ΐ order that." At 
 the same time, prayer being a direct 
 seeking of the fulfilment of the purpose 
 on account of which we pray, — not, like 
 many other actions, indirectly connected 
 with it, — the purport and purpose become 
 compounded in the expression. This 
 will be illustrated by yu^yopurt κ. ττρος- 
 ίύχίσθί, 'ίνα μη ίΐςίλθητι ίΐς ττκρασ- 
 μόν : where it is plain enough that 'ίνα μή 
 represents the ullerior object of yβηyo- 
 ptirf, and, now that it is joined ivilh ypη- 
 ynpHTt, of πριιςινχίοθί : but had it been 
 merely, ■προςιΰχίσΟί 'ίνα μη, κ.τ.λ., the 
 above confusion would have occurred. Now 
 this confusion it is, which makes the words 
 πρηςινχίσθω 'ίνα δκιψηηνι^ so difficult. 
 Obviously, the ττροςίνχ'ίσθω is not merely 
 used to express a seekitig by prayer of the 
 gift of interpretation, on account of its 
 sense in the next verse : but as plainly, 
 there is in προςευχέσθω a sense which 
 passes on to ίνα δαιιμηνίνγ. The render- 
 ing of Meyer and De Wette, ' pray, with a 
 view to interpret (what he has spoken in a 
 tongue),' is unobjectionable, but does not 
 give any reason for the choice of irposev- 
 χί'σθω, any more than ενχαριστήτο), or 
 the like. I believe the true rendering to be 
 pointed out by the distinction in the next 
 verse. If a man prays in a tongue, his 
 spirit prays, but his tmderstanding is bar- 
 ren. This prayer of his spirit is, the 
 intense direction of his will and affections 
 to God, accompanied by the utterance of 
 sounds to him unintelligible. ' Let then 
 him who speaks with a tongue, pray, when 
 he does pray, with an earnest striving (in 
 this prayer of his spirit) after the gift of 
 interpretation.' The meaning might be
 
 13-16. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 563 
 
 S = Acts χνϋ. 
 
 !Η. ver. 2. 
 t Ma't. xiii. 22. 
 
 Eph. v.U 
 
 reff. Wisd. 
 
 XT. 4. 
 u Act.s xxi. 22. 
 
 ver. 2H. 
 V Rom. XV. 9. 
 
 Eph T. 19. 
 
 James v. 13 
 
 only. Psa. 
 
 xvii. 49. 
 w ch. iv. 12. 
 X go.-pp , Matt. 
 5, στρατίώτον 
 
 15. is. 11 only. 
 
 μαι γλωσσρ, το ^ πν^υμά μου ττροςευγίται, ο δε νους 
 
 t " ' ' 1,5 U ' f ' . f r 
 
 μου άκαρπος ioriv. ^ τι ουν εστίν \ προςί υςομαι τω 
 
 * ττνευμαη, προςευζομαι δε /cat το) νοΊ' ^ φαΧω τω * ττνευ- 
 
 ματι, ψάλω οε και τω νοι. *" εττεί εαν ευΛογϊϊσλ^ς 
 
 ^ ττνευμαη, ο " αναπΧηρων τον ^ τόπον τοϋ ^ ι^ιώτου πως 
 
 (pel το ^ αμήν εττι tyj στ] '^ εύχ^α|θ(στίο, έττείδ») τι λεγείς 
 
 xiii. 14 only. ch. xvi. 17. Gal. vi. 2. Phil. ii. 3U. 1 Thess. ii. 16. P. (= here only. Jos. B. J. v. 2. 
 τάξιν ά^νληροϋ^. Philo, Fiaic. p. 979, ιτρΐαβευτοΰ τάξ 6κπλ/;σω. Tacit. Ann. iv. 38, " li 
 impleam.•') y=- here only. Sir. xii. 12. ζ .A.cts iv. 13 reft'. a Nch 
 
 b =. Act.-iXi. 19. 2Cor. xii.21(?). Heb. viii. 1. c = Acts xxiv. 3. 2 Cor. iv. 
 
 d .Acts XT. 24 reft'. 
 
 Aug, : txt ADEFK mss (nrly) ν syrr al Chr Thdrt Dam Oec Thl Orig-int Aug, Ambrst 
 Pel Sedul Bed. {Meyer thinks St both times prob spurious : but may it not have been 
 omd as superfluous .^) — 15. πηοςιυζωμαι (2ce) ADEFG 26. 40-7 : txt Β d g ν Orig, (see 
 note). — aft nv., and voi, ins μου sah. — St bef 1st και τω om FGK 35. 46. 109- 
 14-17 itvsahSyral Orig, (om και also) Dam Orig-int lat-tf : ins AB(e sil)DEJ &c 
 syr al Orig Chr Thdrt Oec Thl.— it bef 2nd και τω om BFG 46. lOlJ it ν sah Syr al 
 Orig, (where he has the 1st St) Ath, Cas Dam Thl lat-tf : ins ADEJK &c syr al Orig, 
 Athj Chr Thdrt Oec. — φαλω πηυματι FG. — 16. tv\oyr)Q {corrn to co'iform to ver 14, 
 not observff the force of the aor here) ABDE 17. 61. ΤΛ. 80 Dam ; ειΑο-^ω 44-3: txt 
 FGJK most mss Chr Thdrt Oec Thl ; benedixeris e g ν lat-ff. — rec bef πνινμητι ins τω 
 {to conform to last ver .• but see note), with JK &c Chr Thdrt al : om ABDEFG 17. 73 
 Dam (but tv πν. BDE 73 copt sah) : om altog 32 and ms, of Erasmus's. — το om FG. — 
 
 more strictly given thus in English : ' where- 
 fore let him who speaketh with a tongue, 
 in his prayer (or, when praying), strive 
 that he may interpret.' 14 ] This 
 
 ver. has been explained above. It justifies 
 the necessity of thus aiming at the yft 
 of interpretation. το irv. μου, not 
 
 as in ver. 32, and Chrys. r.i χάίηημα το 
 SoQ'iV μοι και κινοϋν την -γΧωσσαν, — but 
 as in reff., 'my (own) spirit,' taking him- 
 self as an example, as above, ver. 6 : a use of 
 the word familiar to our Αρ., and here neces- 
 sary on account of ύ νους μου following, 
 ' When I pray in a tongue, my higher 
 being, my spirit, filled with the Holy 
 Ghost, is inflamed with holy desires, and 
 rapt in prayer : but my intellectual part, 
 having no matter before it on which its 
 powers can be exercised, bears no fruit to 
 the edification of others (nor of myself:' 
 but this is not expressed in άκαρπος• ; cf. 
 the usage of καρ-πός by Paul, — Rom. i. 13 ; 
 vi. 21, 22 ; xv.28. Gal. v. 22, al.). 
 15.] ' What then is (the case) (i. e. as our 
 ^ What then.'' Cf. τι ούν, Rom. iii. 9; 
 vi. 15. — ' What is my determination there- 
 upon.'').'— I will pray (on the reading 
 7Γηυί_ίνζωμαι, see note on Rom. v. 1) with 
 the (my) spirit: I will pray also with 
 my mind (i. e. will interpret my prayer for 
 the benefit of myself and the church), &c. 
 This resolution, or expression of self-obli- 
 gation, evidently leads to the inference, by 
 and by clearly expressed, ver. 28, that if he 
 could not pray -φ vut, he would keep 
 silence. ψαλώ] hence we gather that 
 
 Ο 
 
 the two departments in which the gift of 
 tongues was exercised were prayer and 
 praise. On the day of Pentecost it was 
 confined to the latter of these. 16.] 
 
 The discourse changes from the first person 
 to the second, as De W. observes, because 
 the hypothesis contains an im)iutation of 
 folly or error. eav eiX.] ' if thou 
 
 shalt have given thanks in spirit (no art. 
 now : the dat. is now mere'y of the manner 
 in which, the element; not of X\\e sjiecific 
 instrument, as in the last ver ). how shall 
 he that fills (i. e. is in) the situation of a 
 private man {ίϋιώτης, in speaking of any 
 business or trade, signifies a lay person, i. e. 
 one unacquainted with it as his employment. 
 Thus in state matters, it is one out of office 
 — Λημυσθέν€ΐ όντι ιίιωτι^, Thuc. iv. 2 : in 
 philosophy, one uneducated and rude — 
 ήμης μίΐ' o't Ιύιώται ου SίSotκnμeι■, ϋμείς 
 ιέ οι φιλόσοφοι SttXiaTi, Diog. Laert. Aris- 
 tipp. ii. 71) &c. &c. See exx. in Wetst. So 
 here it is, one who has not the gift of 
 speaking and interpreting. — The word 
 To'irov is not to be taken literally, as if the 
 ίίιώται had any separate seats in the con- 
 gregation : the expr., as in reff., is figura- 
 tive) say the Amen (the Amen always said : 
 see Deut. xxvii. 15 — 26. Neh. viii. 6. From 
 the synagogue, — on which see Wetst., 
 Schottg. in loc, Winer, RWB., Synagogen, 
 and Philo, Fragm. p. 630 — cvvtSpiinvai 
 , ... Ill μϊν 7Γολλ(ΐ( σιιυ-{5, ττΧήι• ti rt 
 ττροςίπίφιιμίσαι τοις άιnιyιvωσκnμ^t'Oις 
 ν<)μιζΐ:Τ(ΐΐ,—\ί passed into the Christian 
 church ; so Justin Mart. Apol. ii. p. 97 : 
 ο 2
 
 564 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 e ch. vii. 37 
 
 reft'. 
 f Rom. i. Sal. 
 g Rom. ii. 1 
 
 reft•. 
 li Acts i%. 31 
 
 ετί^ος ουκ: 
 
 αλλ' 
 
 οίδίΐ' ; ' συ μίν yap * καΧως ευχσριστίΓς, αΛΛ " υ 
 
 J - 18 f ' - " ^ " ' 
 
 :()θομίΐται. ίυ^ηριστω τω υίΐο, πάντων 
 
 υμών μάλλον γλίόσσϊ) λολω' άλλα ίν εκκλησία 
 
 'θελ 
 
 ττεΐ'τε λογούς τω νοϊ μου λαλησοι, ίνα και άλλους 
 ■■' ί)χί/σω, ' η μύριους λογούς εΐ' γλώσσϊ?. 
 
 ω 
 
 κατ- 
 
 2« Άδελ(/>οί, μ;, 
 
 1 here only '?' ' fl "1. '.'\Λ^ "m ' ii 'y 
 
 prov.xviii.2. τταιόια yivtaue ταις apeaiv άλλα ttj κακία νηπιαί,ίτί, 
 
 in Rom. i. 2il al. „ ^/ , > ο 'Λ ' Λ 21 ' ' " ' / 
 
 S = ciuu.'ii!^' ■''"'^ ^^ (/)p£ffiv ° τελείοι γινεσσε. εν τω νομω γε- 
 
 Heb.v. 14 al 
 phereonlyt. γοαΤΓΤαΐ 
 (IsA.xxviii. '' 
 11 Aq., but not LXX.) 
 
 Οτι εν 
 
 q Matt. XV. 8 
 
 '' ετερογλωσσοις και £v "^ χ 
 
 είλί 
 
 Rom. iii. 13 al. 
 
 εσιν (τεροις 
 
 Acts ii. 4 rtff. Exod. sxx. 9. 
 
 ουκ οιίϊ. η λεγ. (ης Xfyfi 238) FG g al Jer Aug.— 17. nWa B. — ετοιρο^ G. — 18. recaft 
 τω θ. ins μην {oihin from svch placen as ch i. 4, Bijin i. 8 (S|'e ; Ji8 seth arm e?'PW further 
 add TTfo,), with JK &c ν al Thdrt Dam al Pel Ambrst : om ABDEFG 1?. 23. 31. (iT. 
 73. 80.'l77-8-u it am tol syrr copt seth al Chr Thdrt (ms) Jer Sedul Bed.— aft Βίω ins 
 on FG it V syrr copt al lat-ff.— μαλλοί' om 41' Chr (Mtt's ms,) d [aliis e) ν aefh lat-tt'. — 
 y\. μα\\. FG. — rec γλωστοίς (^corrnfor sfirise : but see note), with (B?)JK &c vss Chr 
 Thdrt al Orig-int (see on vv 2, 4): t.\t A(B.')DEFG 17.31 it ν Dam Ambrst Pel Bed.— 
 rec λαλωΐ' {the bare present aft (νχ. was not understood, and thus some helped it with 
 oTi, some by turning ληλω into λάλων. Or λπλων ivas niidersfood to belong to 
 ευχη/χητω, ' I give thanks, speaking,' &c.), with JK &c Chr Thdrt Dam al : txt (om A) 
 BDEFG 17. 67'. 73. Γ2Ι it ν Oec Orig-int lat-ff.— 19. rec αλλ, with FGJ &c : t.\t 
 ABDE &c. — rec δια του νοος μου (prob a corrn, see note. If τω vin had come from 
 ver 15, μου would prob have been omd), with JK most mss d e syr al Mac Chr Thdrt 
 Thl Oec : Sia τον νομον (omg μον) Marcion in Epiph {per legem Ambrst-text ; in lege 
 Paulin) : t.xt ABDEFG (τω voi μ. \α\ΐ)ομ(ν (sic) FG ; loqui quidem g) 5. 10. 17. 23'. 
 31-7•!). 57. 70-3. 80 g V Syr copt al Nyss Epiph Dam al lat-fF. — 20. ακακία lect 8.— 
 for ταις- 0p. . . . yii'tadt, iva ταις φρ. τίλ. -γίνητΟε FG it Orig-int Ambrst Aug Gaud. 
 — 21. icat yap tv τ. νομ. v-ms tol arm arr Ambrst Pel Bed. — for «τερογλ., ε7ερο(ς 
 y\wffaaiQ FG lect 8 it ν slav lat-ff. — χειλεσιν om 80. — χείλ. έτερων AB 5. (J. 10. 17• 
 31-9. αΤ. 73 {corrn to suit ίτιρογλωσσοις, that both mag apply to the living agents. 
 
 ov (scil. τοΰ τΓοοίστωτος) συνηλίσαντος 
 τάς (ύχας και τι)ν ίΐιχαριστίαΐ', ττας 6 
 τταηών λαός τταιίνφημΛ λέγωΐ', αμήν. 
 See Suicer, sub voc. and Stanley's note 
 here) to (at the end of) thy thanksgiving, 
 since what thou sayest he knows not?' 
 — This is, as Doddridge has remarked, 
 decisive against the practice of praying 
 and praising in an unknown tongue, as 
 ridiculously practised in the church of 
 Rome. 17.] καλώς is not ironical, 
 
 but concessive : it is not the act of thanks- 
 giving in a tongue that the Ap. blames, for 
 that is of itself good, being dictated by the 
 Spirit : but the doing it not to the edifica- 
 tion of others. ο erepos, the ίόιώτης 
 spoken of before. 18, 19.] Declara- 
 tion of his own feeling on the matter, highly 
 endowed as he was with the gift. — ' I 
 thank God, I speak with a tongue (have 
 the gift of speaking with tongues) more 
 than you all.' This juxta-po.sition of two 
 clauses, between which ' that ' is to be sup- 
 plied in the sense, is not unusual : βιιύλιι 
 σκοττώμ(ν : ' fac videas,' Eur. Hippol. 567, 
 — έττίσγετ', αΐιδήν των tσωΘtv ίκμήθω. 
 Horn. Od. β. 195, Ύηλιμάχψ ί' ίν ττασιν 
 ίγών νποθήιομαι αυτός, Μητέρα ην ίς 
 
 ττατρης άvωyίτω άττονέεσθαί. See Har- 
 tung, Partikell. ii. p. 134. 19.] ev ίκ- 
 
 κλησί<}ΐ, ' in (the) assembly,' ' in the congre- 
 gation,' — not ' in an assembly,' as Meyer. 
 The art. is omitted after a preposition : see 
 Middleton, ch. vi. § 1 [the logical account 
 of which is, that the prep, serves to cate- 
 gorize the substantive following it, and 
 so make it general instead of particular. 
 Nov. 1856]. θβ'λω, ή, as βοΰ- 
 
 λομαι, ή, II. α. 117= simly ίπιθυμίω, 
 ζητέω, — see Hartung, ii. p. 7"-• — δια τοΰ 
 νοής has probably been a correction because 
 λαλίΐν τ φ lot was found harsh, the under- 
 standing being only the indirect instrument. 
 
 20.] With this exhortation he con- 
 cludes tliis part of his argument, in which 
 he reproves the folly of displaying and being 
 anxious for a gift in which there was no 
 edification. ' άδΐλψοί suavem vim ha- 
 
 bet,' Bengel. tuis φρεσίν, ' in your 
 
 understandings,' as this preference shews 
 you to be. — TTJ κακίς, — dat. of reference, 
 'as regaids vice:' see Winer, § 31. 3. 
 
 21 — 25.] By a citation from the 
 O. T. he takes occasion to shew that 
 tongues are a sign to the unbelieving only : 
 and that cveii for them they are profitless
 
 17—23. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 565 
 
 ΛαΛτισω τω Ααω τούτω, και ουο ούτως ίΐςακονσονται ^ '',''°:7-J• 
 
 ' t ι. 1 ' ^ ^ UhI. II. ίρ al. 
 
 eyti κυοιος. *" ωςτε αι -γλωσσαι εις σημίΐον κοηι. ν. ΐ2. 
 
 ' \ ■> - / ' \ \ ^ - λ ' ' f Λ\ ν χί :;6. ch. 
 
 εισιν ου τοις πιστίνουσιν άλλα τοις απιστοις, τι οε προ- χ" £« »ΐ• 
 
 ^' ' '> η Mrttt. τι. 7. 
 
 φητξία ου τοις " aTTtaroec άλλα τοις πιστίυουσιν. εαν Aci'i^x.m." 
 
 ούν ^ συνελθ^ ι'; εκκλησία οΧη ^ εττι το αυτό και λαλωσιν «mj• Ps. 
 
 τ So eii μαρτύριομ, Matt. viii. 4 al. fr. = Jer. ix. 22. 
 y ch. xiii. 2. ζ (ch. vii. 5 var. read.) ch. xi. 20. 
 
 w Rom. iv. 11. 
 
 X = ch. vi. 6 reff. 
 
 Mey thinks the dat a mere mechanical corrn to suit the other datives') : txt DEFGJK 
 most mss vss (appy) Orig Constt Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec lat-ff. — for ovS ούτως, ουδίπω 
 FG e g Ambrst-ed (text). — (ίςακουσιται FG al. — 22. for -πισηνονσιν (2nd), ττιστοις 
 FG. — 23. ουν om FG 07" it goth Ambr Ambrst. — for συνίλθ., ίΧθη BG'. — ολ^ η £κκλ. 
 DEFG it ν goth lat-if. — rec τταρ. γ\. λαλ. with JK &c vss Chr Tlidrt Dam Oec Vict-vit 
 Bed : λαλ. παν. γλ. copt aeth ar-pol Ambrst : παν. λαλ. y\. {\α\>ισωσιν FG al [^-ληωσιν 
 
 in comparison with prophecy. 21.] 
 
 ev τω νόμω, as John x. ^4 ; xii. 34 ; xv. '25, 
 — where the Psalms are thus quoted. The 
 passage stands in the LXX : Sta φαυλισμόν 
 χίιλέων, Sia -γλώσσης έτιρας 'ότι λαλή- 
 αουσι τφ Xatji τοντψ ... if. ουκ ήθίλησαν 
 άκοίκιν. The context is thus : The scoffers 
 in Jerusalem (see ver. 14) are introduced 
 as scorning the simplicity of the divine 
 commands, which were line upon line, pre- 
 cept upon precept, as if to children (vv. 9, 
 10). Jehovah threatens them that, since 
 they would not hear these simple com- 
 mands. He would speak to them by men 
 of other tongues, viz. the Assyrians, their 
 captors. — Here as in many other cases, the 
 historical sense is not so much considered, 
 as the aptness of the expressions used for 
 illustrating the matter in hand ; viz. that 
 belief would not be produced in the unbe- 
 lieving by speaking to them in strange 
 tongues. — The on answers in the LXX to 
 'a, ^for;' or ^ yea verily,^ as Louth. It 
 forms part of the citation, not of the text. 
 Iv exep.] ' in (in the person of) 
 men of other tongues :' Heb. ivith another 
 tongue; — and it is placed second. The 
 Ap. personifies it and gives it the promi- 
 nence, ev χ. €T.] ' in (as speaking in, 
 using as the organ of speech) Other (strange) 
 lips.' Heb. in (by) stammerers of lip .• 
 Louth, with a stammering lip. τω 
 λαώ τοντω] in Isa., the Israelites: here 
 taken generally for the unbelieving world. 
 ονδ' οΰτως βίςακονα.] This is the 
 point of the passage for St. Paul's argu- 
 ment : see ver. 23: — "for them, and not 
 for us : but even fur them, profitless in the 
 main :" — not even under such circum- 
 stances will they listen to me : even this 
 sign will be for them ineffectual. 22.] 
 ώςτ€, — v'z. according to the words of the 
 foregoing prophetic passage. at γλ.] 
 'the tongues,' in the t/ien acceptation of 
 the term. He is not interpreting the pro- 
 phecy, nor alluding to the tongues there 
 
 spoken of, but returns back to the sub- 
 ject in hand — the tongues about which 
 his argument was concerned. eis 
 
 σημ. elcriv] ' Serve for a sign :' but 
 there is no emphasis on the words, — the 
 meaning being much the same as if ίίς 
 σι|μ^Ί^ιv were omitted, and it stood ίόςτε 
 a\ y\. ilalt' ov τυΐς π. Not seeing this, 
 Comm. have differed widely about the mean- 
 ing of σιιμύον. So Chrys. : κ'ς σιιμύον, 
 τοντίστιν, ίίς ίκηληΚιν: — Bengel : 'quo 
 allecti auscultare debebant :' — Calvin : ' lin- 
 guae, quatenus in signum datae sunt:' &c. 
 &c. All dweUing on the word σημΰον 
 would introdui e an element foreign to the 
 argument, which is, that tongues are (a 
 sign) for the unbelieving, not Jor the be- 
 lieijing. oil r. ιτιστ.] ' Not to men 
 
 who believe, but to unbelievers,' i. e. 
 ' men who do not believe :' not, as Ne- 
 ander. Billroth, Riickert, and in substance 
 De Wette, ' men who u-ill not believe :' 
 άπιστοί: must be kept to the same sense 
 through this whole passage, and plainly by 
 ver. 23 it is not one who will not believe, 
 but an unbeliever open to conviction. The 
 mistake has been occasioned by regarding 
 those to whom the prophecy was directed, 
 and interpreting Paul by Isaiah, instead of 
 by himself. ή δί ΐΓροφ.] scil. (-σηΐ', 
 
 as Meyer, or ίΐ'ς σημ. ίση ι», as De Wette : 
 it seems to me to import little which we 
 supply, seeing that ίΐ'ς σημ. is of so very 
 slight weight in the preceding clause. If 
 emjiiiatic meaning had been attached to 
 σημί'ιυν as belonging to «i yX. we must not 
 have supplied it here : but if it be a mere 
 indifferent word, to be interpreted according 
 to the sense in which at yX. and ή πρυψ. 
 were σημηα, there can be no objection to 
 it here : and the uniformity of constr. seems 
 to re(|uire it — Both here and above, tois 
 αίΓίστ. and the other are datives commodi 
 — ' for,' not 'to,' ' the unbelieving.' r) 
 προφητύα teas a sign to the unbelieving, 
 see vv. 24, 25.— Prophecy, i.e. inspired
 
 566 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Η — Arts iv. 13 
 
 ri'fr ver. Ifi. 
 b Acts xii. 15 
 
 reft, 
 cch. xiii. lu. 
 d = Jiihn jii. 
 
 2(1. Pi. xlix. 
 
 21. 
 ech ii. ]4reff. 
 f Ri.m. ii.ltS. 
 
 cb. iv. ft. 
 g Acl.s vii. 8. 
 
 xvii. 33. 
 b Matt. XTii. 6. 
 
 /\lOt 
 
 •ίΧθωσιν δε "^ i^i 
 
 •νΛωσσαις πάντες, είςεΛσωσίί' οε ιαωται jj άπιστοι, ουκ 
 ίρουσιν οτι μαινίσυβ ; tav οε τταντίς προψητίνωσιν, 
 ΗςίΧΘ^ δε τις " άπιστος η " ιδιώτης, ' ελεγχετατ ύττύ παν 
 των, ανηκξ>ινίται υπο πάντων, τα 
 
 ABDE 
 FGJK 
 
 Luke 
 
 ,39. 
 
 , 12. 
 
 25 > f 
 
 κρυπτά της καρ- 
 ιας αυτυν φανιρα "γίνεται, και ούτως πίσων επί προς- 
 ωπον ^ προςκυνησίΐ τω θεω, απα-/ΎεΛλ( "" 
 ο θεός "' εν νμιν εστίν. 
 
 .le.Niim 
 
 χτί. 4. XX- ti. i dat.. Matt. ii. 2 al. fr. 
 
 only. Hrb. ii.l2. IJohn i. 2 only. Gen. xiv. 13 
 Num. xxii. 37. m = 2 Cor. xiii. 5. 
 
 ;εω, απα•γ•γελΛων οτι όντως 
 ^" " Τί οΰν έστιν, αδελφοί ; 
 
 k gospp. and Acts, passim. Paul, 1 Thess. i. 9 
 l = Mrfrkxi.32. Lukexxiii. 47. I Tim. v. 5. 
 η Acts xxi. 22. Ter. 15. 
 
 Γ] )ABFG Bas Thl : txt D'D^E d e goth Hil ? {T/ie varr seem ίο have arisen from 
 transposns to stdt παντις προψ. in next ver, not observing the emphatic posn qf\a\. yX. 
 here.) — St και ιδιωτ. 2'OS. — η άπιστοι om Β Ambrst : 7] om seth. — 24. ττροφητίυονσιν 
 93 : -σωσίί' 109. — for ?e ης, Tt ης A Syr (seth). — η om 115 seth : ins bef άπιστος 17. — 
 ανακριν. υπ. π. om 109 (i.e. παντ. to παντ.) : it is repeated in 80. — 25. rec bef τα 
 κρνπτ., ins και ούτω {from belotv, — the result being imagined better to begin here ,• the 
 iollg K. όντως being by some omd, as Chr Ambr, by some carelessly left, or reintroduced 
 icithout erasing this former. So Meyer), with D''JK &c syr al Chr h 1 (om όντως aft) 
 Thdrt al : om ABD'EFG 6. 10. 1?. 1»'. 31. 42. (ΪΤ~• 73. 8ι•. 178 it ν Syr ar-erp copt 
 seth arm vss Bas Cyr Chrj lat-ff. — rec ο (om lt)9') 0. όντως {corrn for elegance), with 
 JK &.C. syr al Chr thdrt al : txt {όντως om 3. 32 Thdrt-comra : ο om D'FG 109' Chr') 
 ABDEFG 44. 118 all it ν copt syr seth arm goth Orig-int lat-ff.— συν νμ. slav. — 
 26. tariv oxa 32. 119: ins aft αδίλφ.ΆΤ. — νμων om {as unnecessary i") AB 74 copt: 
 
 and intelligent exposition of the ivord and 
 doctrine, was eminently for believers, but, 
 as below, would be profitable to unbelievers, 
 furnishing a token that God was truly 
 among his assembled servants. 23 — 
 
 25.] Instances given of the operation of 
 both 071 the ungiftrd or the unbeliever. 
 23.] ovv, following up the axiom 
 just laid down, by supposing a case = ' if 
 then . . . .' — The first case put answers to 
 the former half of ver. 22: the second, to 
 the latter. — The supposition is this : that 
 all the (Corinthian) church is assembled, 
 and all its members speak with tongues 
 (not in a tumultuary manner— that is not 
 part of the present hypothesis, for if it 
 were, it must apply equally to ver. 24, 
 which it clearly cannot : — but that all have 
 the gift, and are in tur7i exercising it) : 
 — then 'ώιωται, ^ plain believers,' persons 
 unacquainted with the gift and its exercise, 
 come in. It is obvious that the hypothesis 
 of all being assembled, and all having the 
 gift, must not be pressed to infer that no 
 such Ιίιώτης could be found : no one hy- 
 pothesizes thus rigidly. If any will have it 
 so, then, as Meyer, we may suppose the 
 ίοιώτηι to come from another congrega- 
 tio7i : but the whole difficulty seems to me 
 mere trifling. The I'i. plainly cannot be, 
 as De W. maintains, an unbeliever, for his 
 case is separately mentioned. — Such ' plain 
 men,' or perhaps a company of unbelievers, 
 have come in : — they have no understand- 
 ing of what is going on : the -γλώσσαι 
 sound to them an unmeaning jargon ; and 
 
 they come to the conclusion, ' These men 
 are mad ;' just as men did infer, on the 
 day of Pentecost, that the speakers were 
 drunken. 24.] ' But if all (see 
 
 above) prophesy (i.e. intelligibly lay forth, 
 in the power of the Spirit, the Christian 
 word and doctrine) and there enter any 
 (singular now, setting forth that this would 
 be the effect in any case : plural before, 
 to shew that however many there might 
 be, not one could ap2Jreciate the gift) un- 
 believer or plain man {άπιστος first 
 now, because the great stress is on the 
 power of prophecy in its greatest achieve- 
 ment, the conversion of the imbeliever ; 
 but ίΰιώται was first before, because the 
 stress there was on the unprofitableness of 
 tongues, not only to the άπιστοι but to 
 the ίδιώται), he is convicted by all (the 
 inspired discourse penetrating, as below, 
 into the depths of his heart, — by all, i. e. 
 by each in turn), lie is searcheti into by 
 all (each inspired speaker opening to him 
 his character), the hidden things of his 
 heart become manifest (those things which 
 he had never before seen are revealed, — his 
 whole hitherto unrecognized personal cha- 
 racter laid out. Instances of such revela- 
 tions of a man to himself by powerful 
 preaching have often occurred, even since 
 the cessation of the prophetic gift) : and 
 thus (thus convicted, searched, revealed to 
 himself: — in such a state of mind) having 
 fallen on his face he will worship God, 
 announcing {by that his act, which is a 
 public submission to the divine Power
 
 24—30. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 567 
 
 Όταν ° συνίο-^ησθί, ίκαστος νμων ^ φαΧμυν έχεί, '' ^ι^αγην 
 έχίί, "^ αποκαΧυφιν £^ft, γλωσσαν ^\(ΐ, ίομηνίίαν ένει* 
 παυτα ^ προς ^ οικοοομην ' -γινίσθω. ' fiVf γλώσσρ τις 
 λαλίί, " κατά. όνο η '' το πλΐΐστον τρεις, κα\ " ανά μίρος, 
 και εις όΐίομηνίυβτω ^ ίαν οε μη y ' οκρμηνευτης, 
 ^ σ(-νάτω εν ίκκΧησ'ια, εαυτω δε ΧαΧε'ιτω καΐ τω θεω. 
 ^ πξ>θ(ρηται οε ουυ η τρεις ΧαΧε'ιτωσαν, και οι άλλοι 
 όιακρινετωσαν' εάν οε άλλω *^ αποκαΧυφθτ} καθημενω, 
 
 iitii't μ- uMeii-, Polyl). ϊτ. 20. 10, and al. freq. See Hcb. ix. 5. χ ch. xii. 30. 
 
 ζ cliange of .«nbjei-t. Luke XV. 15. xix. 4. Acts ri. 6. Winer, { 65. 7. (σιγ , see Lake xviii. 39 reff.) 
 bcli.Ti. 5. See ch. xii. 10. c ch. ii. 10 al. 
 
 ins DEFGJK mss (nrly) vss (nrly) Chr Thdrt Damal lat-ff. — ίιοαχ. ιχει (i.e. from ιχΛο 
 £χ.) om A : δι^ατκαλιαν (χ. 35. — rec γλ. ίχ., αττ. ίχ. [the various clauses have been 
 omd as below, and then confusedly reinserted), with J &c vss Chr Thdrt Dam : txt 
 ABDEFG al vss Bas Thl Oec (comm) lat-ff.— α ττοκ. (χ. om 35-7-9. 42-7. G3 Chr (Mtt's 
 nnss).— y\. {χ. om Κ 35-». 42-3. 57. 9Γ. lOfi-17-77. 238 Άλλ.—δαυμηνίίαν DEFG.— 
 ■πάντα tt 17• — rec ytptoQw, with Β (e sil) &c Dam: txt APDEFGJK most mss ff. — 
 27. -γλωσσαις sah aeth. — κατά om arm.— και αι•α μΐοος om 46'. 71• 114-17. — bef ίΐς 
 om και 31-3-δ harl' Eeth : tit Ambrst : εις δε 109. — 28. δε om sah. — ερμηνίντης Β and 
 (prefg ό) D'FG.— for εαυτω, αντω FG. — 29. δε om 48'. 72 lect 13 d e v-ms tol harl 
 aeth. — 01 om D'FGJ al. — αι-ακρινέτωσα»' D'FG. — 30. δε om D'FG it ν Orig-int Ambrst 
 
 ο ch. xi. 20. 
 p= Eph. T. 19. 
 
 Col. iii. 16. 
 q Matt. Tii. 23 
 
 al. 
 Γ ver. 6. 
 s ver. 12. 
 t = ver. 3S. 
 α κατά. Mark 
 
 vi 40. ακί, 
 
 Luke ix. 3. 
 
 X. 1. John 
 
 ii. 6. KaW' 
 
 tva.. Eph.v. 
 
 33 refl. Xen. 
 
 .\nab.iv.7,8. 
 ν here only, 
 w here only. 
 
 y here only t. 
 a ch. xii. 28. 
 
 manifest among you : or, but not so well, 
 aloud, by declaration of it in words) that 
 of a truth (implying that previously he had 
 regarded the presence of God among them 
 as an idle tale ; or, if a plain Christian, had 
 not sufficiently realized it) God is among 
 you ' (or in each of you : by His Spirit). 
 — In this last description the ιδιώτης is 
 thrown into the back ground, and (see 
 above) the greater achievement of pro- 
 phecy, the conviction and conversion of 
 the άτΓίτΓος-, is chiefly in ^aew. " For a 
 similar effect of the disclosure of a man's 
 secret self to himself, compare the fascina- 
 tion described as exercised by Socrates over 
 his hearers by the ' conviction' and 'judg- 
 ment' of his questions in the Athenian 
 market-place. Grote's Hist, of Greece, viii. 
 609— Gil." Stanley. 26—39.] 
 
 Regulations respecting the exercise of 
 spiritual gifts in the assemblies. 
 26.] The rule for all, proceeding on 
 the fact of each having his gift to contri- 
 bute when they come together : viz. that 
 all things must be done with a view to edi- 
 fication. t£ OTjv έστιν] See ver. 15. 
 or. <rvv.] ' whenever ye happen 
 to be assembling together:' the present 
 vividly describes each coming with his gift, 
 eager to exercise it. ψαλμόν] most 
 probably 'a hymn of praise ' to sing in the 
 power of the sj)irit, as did Miriam, De- 
 borah, Symeon, ike. See vor. 15. 
 δι5αχήν] ' an exposition of doctrine ' or 
 moral teaching: belonging to the gift of 
 prophecy, as indeed do also ψαλμ. and 
 ά-ίΓοκάλ., the latter being something re- 
 
 vealed to him, to be prophetically uttered. 
 
 γλώσσαν] ' a tongue,' i. e. an act 
 
 of speaking in tongues: see vv. 18. 20. 
 
 Ιρμηνείαν] See below, and ver. 5. 
 
 ττάντ. irp. oIk. γιν.] The general 
 RULE, afterwards appUed to the several 
 gifts : and 27, 28.] to the speaking 
 
 with tongues. Art begins the constr., but 
 is not carried on, ver. 29, where ττοοφήται 
 δέ answers to it. 27.] κατά 8ύο (soil, 
 
 let it take place), 'by two (at each time, 
 i. e. in one assembly : not more than two 
 or three might speak with tongues at each 
 meeting) or at the most three, and by 
 turn (one after another, not together) : 
 and let one (some one who has the gift, — 
 and not more than one) interpret ' (what 
 is said in the tongue). 28.] 'But if 
 
 there be not an interpreter (Wieseler, in 
 the Stud, und Krit. for 1838, p. 720, would 
 render it, ' if he be not an interpreter,' viz. 
 himself. But this would exclude the pos- 
 sibility of others interpreting, which we 
 know from ch. xii. 10 might be the case. 
 And thus the preceding tic could hardly 
 bear its proper meaning. \\^ieseler tries to 
 make it mean ' one at a time.' Besides, 
 the emphatic position of y seems to require 
 more stress than this sense would give, which 
 would be better expressed by tav δε διε|J- 
 μηνεντής μη y) let him (the speaker in a 
 tongue, see reff.) be silent in the church: 
 but (as if σιγάτω had been μι) λαλκτί.-) 
 let him speak for himself and for God:' 
 i. e. in private, with only hini.>^elf and God 
 to witness it. Chrys. καθ' εαυτόν ψϋεγ- 
 γίπθω : which Theophyl. enlarges to τοντ-
 
 568 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Α ch. xiii. 10. 
 e ■= Rom. xi 
 
 8 reft. 
 f = ch. 
 
 RfV. xxii. o. -v 
 
 gLukn..51 al. Καλ 
 
 Kom. viii. 7. 
 
 Dan. vi. 13. 
 h Luke .sxi. 9 
 
 2 O.r. vi. ft. 
 
 31 
 
 δύι 
 
 ο πρώτος σι-γατω. "" cvvaaue yap καν eva πάντες 
 .10. προφητίυίΐν, ίνα πάντες μανθανωσιν και πάντες '^ παρα- 
 
 . S9 \ f / Ά . ~ Λ . f ν ' 
 
 ωνται 
 
 ABDE 
 FGJK 
 
 xii. 2U. 
 James iii. 16 
 only. Prov. 
 XX vi. 28. 
 
 32 ^f ' a j-a ,' g' 
 
 και πνεύματα προψητων πρηφηταις νπο- 
 
 ου yap εστίν ακαταστασίας ο ^ υεος, άλλα 
 
 ειρήνης, ως εν ^^ πασαις ταις εκκλησιαις των 
 
 Αί "γυναίκες εν ταις έκκΧησιαις 
 
 τάσσεται 
 
 q Rom. XV. 33 reff. 
 
 yυvaικες εν ταις εκκ/ 
 
 qq 2 Cor. viii. 18. xi. 28. 
 
 σινατωσαν 
 
 '7 
 
 r Rom. i. 7. Acts ix. 13 reff. 
 
 ayιωv. 
 ου yap 
 
 al (not Cypr : et si aeth Hil). — 31. τταντ". (om 17 Ambrst) καθ era DEFG vss : έκαστοι 
 C. UT- : (καστοι παντις 38. 72.-32. πΐΉψα DEFG 1. 43. 52. G72. 213 it ν (sixt) Syr 
 ffith Orig, Thdrt Orig-int lat-ff: t.xt AB &c Origj Chr Thdrt (ms) Dam Oec Thl Tert 
 Orig intj Didj al (the plnr teas corrd to the smg because, One Spirit inspiring all the 
 pi'ophels, ■πιηνματα vas not understood). — ι<ποταησονται J.- — 33. ο θ. ακαταητ. A 57 
 copt Syr: ο om FG : θίος om Tert Ambrst {all coi-rns, constr not being understood). — 
 rec αλλ, with FGJ al : txt ABDE &c. — aft up., add και τα^ιως 1 14. — πασαις om basm. 
 — at end ins Ιι^ασκω {from ch iv. 17) FG 2. 10. 3!). (!1 g (e .' not d) ν (not am) syr* al 
 Chrj : διατάσσομαι Chr (Mtt's mSj) Dam.— vv 34, 3.5 are placed aft ver 40 in DEFG 
 93 it Ambrst Sedul.— 34. νμων om (as in ver 26) AB 5. I7. 31. 73. 80. 115 ν copt basm 
 aeth arm Marcion (in Epiph) Dial Nyss Dam (Cypr) Pel Bed : ins DEFGJK most mss 
 it syrr (syrf) al Chr Thdrt Thl Oec Ambr Ambrst Sedul. — τη εκκλησία 119 tol copt 
 
 ίστιν ά-φοφητι και ήρίμα κηθ' ΐαντόν : 
 whith does not seem to agree with \a- 
 λίίτω, the speaking being essential to the 
 exercise of the gift. 29 — 33.] Simi- 
 
 lar regulations for prophecy. 29.] 
 
 δ€, transitional. Svo ή rpeis, viz. at 
 
 one assembling ; — not together; this is 
 plainly prohibited, ver. 30. There is no το 
 ττληστον as in the other case, because he 
 does not wish to seem as if he were limit- 
 ing this most edifying of the gifts. 
 ol άλλοι, scil. ττροφηται, — or perhaps, any 
 person possessing the gift of διακρίσεις 
 πΐ'ίνμάτων, mentioned ch. xii. 10 in im- 
 mediate connexion with προφητεία. Such 
 would exercise that gift, to determine 
 whether the spirit u-as of God: see ch. xii. 
 3. 1 John iv. 1—3. 30.] 'But if 
 
 a revelation shall have been made to 
 another (prophet) while sitting by, let 
 the first (who was prophesying) hold his 
 peace ' (give place to the other : but 
 clearly, not as ejected by the second in 
 any disorderly manner : probably, by being 
 made aware of it and ceasing his discourse). 
 The rendering of Grot., al., ' let him (the 
 second) wait till the frst has done speak- 
 ing,' q. ά., ' let the first have left off,' is 
 ungrammatical. See also vv. 28. 34. 
 31, 32.] He shews that the ό 
 πρώτος σιyάτω is no impossibility, but in 
 their pover to put into effect. — ' For ye 
 have the power (the primary emphasis of 
 the sentence is on δννησθι, which is not 
 merely permissive, as E. V., ' ye may,' but 
 asserts the possession of the power ,• — the 
 secondary on κα& ίνα) one by one all 
 to prophesy (i. e. you have power to bring 
 about this result — you can be silent if you 
 please) in order that all may learn and 
 
 all may be exhorted: 32.] and 
 
 (not, yor; but a parallel assertion to the 
 last, 'ye have power, &c. and') spirits 
 of prophets (i. e. their own spirits, filled 
 with the Holy Spirit : so Meyer, and 
 rightly : not, as De Wette, the Spirit of 
 God within each: and so ver. 12: the in- 
 spired spirit being regarded as a ΐΓν€Ϊ(Αα in 
 a peculiar sense — from God, or otherwise. 
 See the distinction plainly made 1 John iv. 
 2 : tv τυΰτψ γηώσκιτε το Ίτνΐϊιμα τοΰ 
 θίοΐΐ' παν Ίτνίνμ,α, κ.τ.λ. The omission 
 of the art. generalizes the assertion, mak- 
 ing it applicable to all genuine Christian 
 prophets) are subject to prophets ' ; i. e. to 
 the men whose spirits they are. But very 
 many Comm., e. g. Theophyl. (alt.), Calvin, 
 Estius, and more recently Bleek and Riick- 
 ert,take προψίμαις to signify other prophets 
 — TO tv σοι χάρισμα, καΙ ι) iv'tpytia τονίν 
 σοι πνίνματος, υποτάσσεται τψ χαρίσματι 
 τον έτερου τον κινηΒίντος ιΐς το προφη- 
 Ttviiv (Theophyl.). But the command 
 ό πρώτος• σιγάτω would be superfluous, 
 if his gift was in subjection to another, 
 33.] Reasoti of the above regula- 
 tions. The premiss, that the church is 
 God's church, is suppressed. He is the 
 God of peace, not confusion : therefore 
 those assemblies which are His, must be 
 peacefully and orderly conducted. And this 
 character of God is not one dependent for 
 its truth on preconceived views of Him : — 
 we have a proof of it wherever a church of 
 the saints has been gathered together. ' In 
 all the churches of the saints. God is a God 
 of peace : let Him not among you be sup- 
 posed to be a God of confusion.' — I am 
 compelled to depart from the majority of 
 modern critics of note, e. g. Lachmann,
 
 .16. 
 i4. 
 
 iVlHtt. xii. 10 
 
 Rom. X. 
 
 X Acts xxvi. 7 
 
 SI— 38. ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 569 
 
 ^ ίπιτοίΐτεται αυταις XaXuv, aWa ^ ύττοτάσσίσθαί, καθώς "Acts xxvi. ι 
 
 και ο ' νομός Xeyei. ^^ t'l δε τι μαθπν θίλυνσιν, " iv ΙβΓχΙίΙίΙ 
 
 οικψ τους ιόιους ανόρας ίπίρωτατωσαν αισγρον 7"? 
 
 ίση -γυναικι λαλίΐν ev ζκκΑησια. "^^ η αφ νμων ο λόγος 
 
 του ueov (α,ηΑϋίν,η εις υμάς μονούς κατηντησ^ν ', ' ti y = ch.iu. is 
 
 τις ■' coKti π^ίοψητης ίΐναι η πνευματικός, εττιγινωσκετω a cun."r.; Acts 
 
 Λ / ' - a " ' » ' Sfi ' <> ' I) ' - iv. 13. 2 Cor. 
 
 Ο Ύραψω υμιν, οτι κυρίου εστίν ει οε τις ayvosi, ί ]ΐ- χί» ^• 
 
 pass., see 2 Cor. vi. 9. 
 
 basm Syr aeth al Marcionj (in Epipb) Dial (Cypr). — rec εττιτετραττται (' the sense of the 
 perfect, permissum est, ivas more familiar to the transcribers.' Meyer"), with Κ (fTrt- 
 τίτρίπται J) &c syr many gr-ff : txt ABDEFG 5. 10. 26. 31-9. 71-3. 89. 122 vss 
 Marcionj (in Epiph) Dam lat-ff.— αυτοις 17. — rec αλλ, with D3(E.')FGJ &c: t.xt ABD' 
 109 &c. — υπητασσίσθωσαν A (add τοις ανδυυσιν) Β 5. 10. 17• 39- 71-3. 80 copt basm 
 Marcion (in Epiph) Dam : t.xt DEFGJK most mss it ν syrr al Dial Chr Thdrt Thl Oec 
 lat-ff.— 35. fi rt St DEFGit ν Ambrst 3.\.—μηιθανίΐν A (A^ .') I7. 23(;. 31. 73Nyss.— 
 9f\wnu' A 73 Dam. — lOiXouffti' 37-8. 48. 72 Thdrt. — οίκοις αυτωΐ' basm. — rec γνναιζιν 
 {to agree with plurals precede/), with DEFGJK &c it syrr copt al Chr (mss) Thdrt al 
 Ambrst : txt AB I7. 31. 57. 70-3. 80. 178-9. 238 al ν basm seth arm slav Chr Dam Pel. 
 — rec εν εκκΧ. λαλ. {conformalion to ver 19), with DEFGJK &c it syrr al Chr Thdrt al 
 Ambrst : txt AB I7. 3?. 57. 73. 80 ν copt basm asth al Dam Bed : (κκ\ησιαις FGJ 49. 
 09. lOfi-8 it syr Thdrt : tv ίκκΧ. yw. 44-8. 72. — 36. κητηντ. μονούς FG g. — 37. ει ίε 
 τις 219-. — γινωσκετΜ Β Chr (add ravra) : ητιγιγν. D. — rec τον κνη. [addn : but the 
 art is seldom expressed when the predicate is before the copula), with Β (e sil) &c Thl : 
 txt {θίου A vss) ADEFGJK all Chr Thdrt Dam Oec— rec εισιν εντολαι {explaitatory 
 corrn, as shewn by toriv εντολή, a compound of the two readings, and the other varr), 
 with D^E-JK &c vss Chr Thdrt al Ambrst (ίΐ'τ-ολαί εισιν Q(\, εισιν at εντ. al : εισιν 
 εντολή 17) : εστίν εντολή AB Aug (οτι tv τ. θεον εστ.) copt seth : txt D'E'FG (14 
 εισιν) it Orig Hil Ambrst (ed) : on κ. εισ. cm Ambr and the writer de sing, cle- 
 ricorum. — 38. om 109. — for αγνοειτω, αγνοείται A'(appy)D'(-r£)FG {ί/γνοηται 
 FG) Orig: ignoratur d e: ignorabitur g ν Orig-int lat-ff: tion cognoscetur Hil: so also 
 
 Tischendorf, Billroth, Meyer, De Wette, supplied from the context, occurs 1 Tim. 
 
 and to adhere to the common arrangement iv. 3. So Soph. CEd. Tyr. 236: τον av^^' 
 
 of tliis latter clause. My reason is, that άττουίώ τούτον μήτ' είςδίχεσθαι 
 
 taken as beginning the next paragraph, μήτε ττροςφωνε'ιν τίνα, ώθεΤν δ' άπ οίκων 
 it is harsh beyond example, and super- ττάντας : Lucian, χάρων ΐ] ϊττισκοττονντίς, 
 fluous, as anticipating the reason about to line 49 from beg., — σέ δε κιιΊ ovrbv κωλύσει 
 be given ου yap, κ.τ.λ. Besides which, ένεργεΧν τά του θανάτου tpya, κα'ι την 
 it is more in accordance with St. Paul's ΠλοίτΓωίΌς άαχην ζημιοΰν. See other 
 style, to place the main subject of a new ex.x. in Kiihner, § 852, κ. ό νόμος 
 sentence first, see I Tim. iii. 8. 11, 12; — reff. Their speaking in public would 
 and we have an example of reference to be of itself an act of iwdependence ; of 
 general usage coming in last, in aid of teaching the assembly, and among others 
 other considerations, ch. xi. 16 : but it their own husbands. 35.] This pro- 
 seems unnatural that it should be placed hibits another kindred irregularity — their 
 first in the vtry forefront of a matter on asking questions pubhcly. Tliey might 
 which he has so much to say. 34, say in answer to the former σιγάτωσαν, 
 35.] Regulationprohibiting women to speak 'But if we do not understand any thing, 
 publicly in the church, and its grounds. — are we not to ask?' The stress is 011 
 If ojs . . . αγίων be placed at the beg. of this μαθΰν. ISiovs» confining them to 
 sentence, we must not, as Lachm. absurdly their otvii husbands, to the exclusion of 
 does, put a comma before των άγιων, other men. αίσχρόν] See ch. xi. 6 : 
 whicli would tlirow the emphasis on it and ' indecent,' bringing deserved reproach, 
 disturb the sense : and which besides would 36 — 40.] Genr-ral Conclu- 
 then be expressed άγιων γυναίκες, or even sign : the unseemliness and absurdity of 
 άγιων o'l γννα'ικις, but certainly not των their pretending to originate customs un- 
 άγίων a't γυνα'ϊκες. 34.] άλλα ύτΓΟ- known to other churches, as if the word of 
 τασσίσθαι, scil. κελεύεται αίιτιΓις. The God frst tveut forth Jrom them ; and the 
 same constr. where a second verb must be enforcement of his apostolic authority.
 
 570 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 XIV. 39, 40. 
 
 bb = Phii. ϋ. ^ ayvoiiTCt). ^^ ^^ ωςτε, αδίλφο/, '^ ΌίΧοΰτε τυ προώη- 
 
 12 reff. / ^ '^ 1Λ/ 
 
 ''7er''ioniy.'' τίϋίΐΐ', καΐ ΤΟ λαλείν μη κωλύετε ev -γλωσσαις, πάντα 
 
 Sir.'li. 18. 
 
 ABDE 
 FGJK 
 
 Sir. Ii. 18. jxv g , /. \ f ■^ ' ir Ε ' fl 
 
 dch.xiii. 10. έιε ευσγημονως κα< κατά ταί,ιν ^ -γινίσυω. 
 
 eRom xiii. 13. 1 h ' Λ\ f - '^ λ < '' ' /\ <^ 
 
 ΙΙο,Λγ\"' XV. Γι/ωρί^ω δε νμιν, αόίλφοι, το ευαγγελιον ο 
 
 f Luke i. 8.' i , -. / r - t\ \ k \ ' Ο 1 ' ' > I ' ' 
 
 Col. ii. s. ίvηyyeAισaμηv υμιν, ο και τταρεΛαρετε, εν ω και εστη- 
 Tllvuu\-2. κατί, 2 gt' ου και "" σώ^εσθε, τίΐΊ λόγω ίυη-γ•γε\ισάμην 
 eh.xii.3ai. νμιν u κατεγ^ίτί, έκτος ει μ?] "^ εική ^ επιστευσατε. 
 
 iconsir', Ai.-i.sTiii.4al.fr. k ch. xi 2-3. Gal. i. 9, 12 al. SeeJohni.lI. 1 Rom. v. 2. 2 Cor. i. 24. 
 
 m prcs.. Acts ii. 47. ch. i. 18. 2 Cor. ii. 15. 1 Pel. iii. 21. iv. 18. Isa. xlv. 20. η ch. xi. 2 refi. 
 
 och.xiv. 5. 1 Tim. V. la. ρ Rom. xiii. 4refl. q = Aetsxix. 2. Rom. xiu. 11. ch. iii. 5. 
 
 copt basm in Scholz : tet A2B(e sil)D'EJK mss (appy) syr copt (Wilk) basm (Engelbr) all 
 Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec. {There appears no reason why the indie should have been 
 altered to the imperat : but the form of exprn in ch viii. 2, 3 may perhaps have occa- 
 sioned an alteration of the imperat into the indie, esp if, as Meyer supposes, in writing 
 αγνοητω ωςτί, one ω had dropped out, and left the last letter of ayvonr. to be sup- 
 plied.) — 39. ωςτι om basm. — aft αίίλφ. ins μον AD^CE?) all vss ff. — το (1st) om FG. — 
 TO (2nd) om Β 48. — rec y\. μη κωλ. (transposn to avoid harshness), with DEFGJK &c 
 vssfF: txt AB al Dam {μη κωλ. το λ. copt basm).— rec om tv (λαλ. y\. being the more 
 tisual eaprn), with A 3iC : ins BD^FG copt. — 40. rec om ie {because there appeared to 
 be no contrast /), with JK Stc slav Thl Oec Ambr al : ins ABDEFG all vss (^enim syr) 
 Chr Thdrt Dam Pel Bed : yap syr : St νμοιν arm. 
 
 Chap. XV. 1. aft tvayy. ins μου (j^^. 71-4 basm arm slav-ms.— ίυιγγίλισα/χ;;!' 
 p(E?). — στηκίτε D'FG it ν copt Ambrst.— 2. aft λόγω, add και W d; quod et sermone 
 Ambrst. — for «i καηχίτι, οφειλίΤί καταχ(ΐν D'FG it lux Ambrst : ii om Syr-ed. — 
 
 Then, a summary in a few words of the 
 purport of what he has said on the spiritual 
 gifts, and a repetition in another form, of 
 the fundamental precept, ver. 26. 
 36.] I cannot agree with Meyer in referring 
 this only to the regulation concerning women 
 which has preceded. It rather seems to 
 refer to all the points of church custom 
 which he has been noticing, and to be in- 
 separably connected with what follows, — 
 the recognition of his apostolic orders, as 
 those of God. 37.] ΤΓνευματικος, one 
 
 spiritually endowed : not quite as in ref. 
 α γράφω] ' the things which I 
 am writing,' viz. ' these regulations which 
 I am now making.' κνρίου, emphatic : 
 
 'the Lord's:' carrying His authority. No 
 more direct assertion of inspiration can be 
 uttered than this. " Paul stamps here the 
 seal of apostolic authority ,• and on that 
 seal is necessarily Christ.^' Meyer. 
 38. άγνοβίτω] implying both the hopeless- 
 ness of reclaiming such an one, and the little 
 concern which his opposition gave the Ap. 
 The other reading, ayvotlrai, gives a pass- 
 able sense — ' he is ignored,' scil. by God : 
 of. ch. viii. 2, 3; xiii. 12. Gal. iv. 9. 
 39.] ζηλοντ€ and μή κωλυ€Τ€ 
 express the different estimations in which 
 he held the two gifts. 40.] hi, ' only 
 
 provided, that' .... κατά. τάξιν] 
 
 i. e. in right time, and due proportion. — 
 Meyer compares Jos. B. J. ii. 8, 5, of the 
 Essenes : ovTi κραυγή ποτί τον οίκον οντι 
 
 θόρυβος μολύνει, τας S'i λαλιάς tv τάζει 
 παραχωρονσιν άλλί/λοις. See Stanley, 
 pp. 339, 340. 
 
 Chap. XV.] Of the Resurbection^ 
 OF THE Dead ; which some in the Cor. 
 CHURCH denied. For the enquiry, 
 
 WHO they were that denied the Resurr., see 
 note on ver. 12. 1—11.] The Ap. lays 
 
 the foundation of his intended polemical 
 argument in the historical fact of the Re- 
 surrection OF Christ. But he does not 
 altogether assume this fact. He deals with 
 its evidence, in relating minutely the various 
 appearances of the Lord after His Resur- 
 rection, to others, and to himself Then, 
 in ver. 12, the proclamation of Christ's 
 Resurrection as the great fact attending the 
 preaching of the gospel, is set against the 
 denial of the Resurrection by some of them, 
 and it is subsequently shewn that the two 
 hang together, so that they who denied the 
 one must be prepared to deny the other ; 
 and the conseqq. of this latter denial are 
 pointed out. But it by no means follows, 
 as De W. (in part) and Meyer have as- 
 sumed, that the impugners were not pre- 
 pared to deny the Resurr. of Christ. — The 
 Ap. writes not only for them, but for the 
 rest of the Cor. believers, shewing them the 
 historical certainty, and vital imporlance of 
 Christ's Resurrection, and its inseparable 
 connexion with the doctrine which they 
 were now tempted to deny. 1, 2] Se, 
 
 transitional. γνωρίζω, not as most Comm .,
 
 XV. 1—5. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 571 
 
 ον. 
 
 = Luke i. 2. 
 ch. xi. 2. 
 2 Pet ii. 21. 
 KCITO 5 hi-re only. 
 See note. 
 I Heb. V. 1. 
 
 ^ '' παοί^ωκα •γαξ) νμιν ^ εν πρώτοις υ και irapeXap 
 
 ΟΤΙ νριστος απίθαπν υττίο των αμαρτιών τιμών 
 
 τας -γραφας, και ότι ίτάφη, και οτι " ίγηγερτοι Ttj ήμίρα 
 
 τη τρΊττι * κατά τας -γραφας, και οτι " ωφθη Κηφα, ύτα η Ps\ xxi. ΐ6. 
 
 Ολν.ιχ. 24. ZECH.xiii.7. τ = Matt χ. 8. χίτ. 2. svi 21 al. Isa. xxvi. 19. wPsa.xv.10. 
 
 IsA. liii.u, 1». Hos. T1.2. Jox. i. 17. See Mart. xii. 4U. χ Acts ii. 3 teff. 1 Tim. iii. 16. ia this ref.. 
 
 Matt., Lake, Paal. = έψήκπ, ot ίφιχνίρύιΟη, Mk., John. See Stanley. 
 
 3. ο και τταίκλ. om Iren Tert Hil Ambrst Ambr : sicut accepimus d e. — 4. και om 238. 
 — for tyi\y•, αηστη 2*38. — rec τη τρίτη ημ. (see Matt xvi. 21 ; xvii. 23. Here τη ημ. τη 
 τρ. is solemn and emphatic), with FGJK &c vss Dial Chr Thdrt al Iren al : t.\t ABDE 
 al d e copt syr ar-pol Cyrr Hil al. — 5. on om lect 12. — for ιιτα, ίττίΐτα A I7. 37. 40. 
 73. 10!) lect 12 Eus Cyr-jerus Chr: μίτα ταύτα D'E'FG : και basm : etra ct arm: 
 
 aft. Oec, 0101' νττομιμνήσκω, nor as Riick. 
 ' I direct your attention to ' (both which 
 meanings are inadmissible, from the usage 
 of the word: see reff.) — but as E. V. 'I 
 declare :' i. e. ' declare anew .•' not without 
 some intimation of surprise and reproach to 
 them. TO βΰαγγ.] ' The (whole) 
 
 Gospel :' not merely the Death and Resurr. 
 of Christ, which were ii' πρώτοις parts of 
 it ; the reproach still continues ; q. d. 'I 
 am constrained to begin again, and declare 
 to you the whole gospel which I preached 
 to you.' δ και τταρ.] The thrice re- 
 
 peated και indicates a climax : — 'which ye 
 also received (see esp. ref. John), in which 
 moreover ye stand, by means of which ye 
 are even being saved' (in the course of 
 salvation). τίνι λογ.] ' If ye hold 
 
 fast, with what discourse I preached to 
 you:' the clause n'l't λό)-., being prefixed 
 for emphasis' sake, λόγος, of the imjiort. 
 not the grounds of his preaching: for of 
 this he reminds them below, not of the 
 arguments. Some Comm. take τίνι Xoyy, 
 K.T.X. as a mere epexegesis of t{'ayyi\iov, 
 — ' the gospel . . . ., tvitk what discourse I 
 preached to you,' as οιίή at, τις el. But 
 as Meyer has remarked, in that case, — (1) 
 σώζίσΗί and fi κατίχίτε being altogether 
 severed from one another, ei κατίχίτι be- 
 comes the conditional clause to γνωρίζω 
 νμη', with which it has no logical con- 
 nexion : (2) li κατ(χ(τε would be incon- 
 sistent with ti' ψ και ίστηκατ{, which 
 would thus be an absolute assertion : (3) 
 the words Ικτος ti μη ιίκη ίττιττ. would 
 have to be referred as a second conditional 
 clause to κ' κατίχίτε (see below), 
 έκτος ei μή ίΐκή έττιστ.] The only chance, 
 if you hold fast what I have taught you, of 
 your missing salvation, is the hardly sup- 
 posable one, that your faith is vain, and 
 the gospel a fable; see ver. 14, of which 
 this is an ;inticij)ation : — ' unless (per- 
 chance) ye believed (not as E. V. ' have 
 believed,' which confuses the idea : it is, 
 • became believers' see reff.) in vain' (f /ς 
 κενόν, as ver. 14). So Chrys., who re- 
 
 marks: vvv μεν νπεσταλμ'ενως αύτόφησι, 
 πμΐιϊών ίε και ίιιαθερμηινόμενος• γνμντ^ 
 λοιπ-όν Ty κίφα\7^ βοφ κα'ι λέγει' ti ci 
 χκιστος οϋ»: iyi'iytpTni, κ.τ.λ. ver. 14. 
 This explanation of the words appears to 
 me the only tenable one. Meyer, and in 
 the main De \V., understand them of a 
 vain and dead faith, which the Ap. will not 
 suppose them to have. But surely if the 
 previously expressed condition of κατίχίτε 
 were fulfilled, their faith could not be vain 
 or dead; and again the aorist is against 
 this interp. : ' unless ye became believers 
 in vain,' not,' unless your faith has been a 
 vain one.' A still further reason is, the 
 parallelism of εΐκη ί-ιστίύσατε here and 
 ovTwQ ίπιστενσατί, ver. 11: leading to the 
 inference that ίΐκη here relates, not to the 
 subjective insufficiency of their faith, but to 
 the (hypothetical) objective nullity of that 
 on which their faith was founded. Oec, 
 Theophyl., Theodoret, Luther, Calv., Es- 
 tius, and De W. connect ίκτός ii μ// (see 
 above) as a second conditional clause to ti 
 κατίχετί, supplying between, κατίχίτε it 
 πάντως (Theophyl.) : but this is arbitrary 
 and unnatural. 3 — 11.] A detail of 
 
 the great facts preached to them, centering 
 in THE Resurrection of Christ. 
 3. ev τΓρώτοις] in primis, with relation not 
 to order of time (as Chrys. : έξ αρχΐΐο), 
 but to /m/io?'ia?ice (as Theophyl. o'lovtl yap 
 θίμίλιός tan πάσης της πιατεως). So 
 Plato, Rep. vii. β, p. 522 : roDro το κοινον 
 .... δ και παντϊ tv πρώτοις άΐ'άγκη 
 μανθίινειν. ο και 'ΐΓαρ€λαβον] viz. 
 
 (see ch. xi. 23 and note) from the Lord 
 himself, by special revelation. Before his 
 conversion he may have known the bare 
 fact of the death of Jesus, but the na- 
 ture and reason of that Death he had to 
 learn from revelation : — the Resurrection 
 he regarded as a fable, — but revelation 
 informed him of its reality, and its accord- 
 ance with prophecy. On the following 
 clauses, ' the earliest known specimen of 
 what may be termed the creed of the early 
 Church,' see Stanley's notes, and disserta-
 
 572 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 XV. 
 
 ν = Mark xiv 
 
 - nly.el 
 
 τοις 
 
 of p!ac<: See αδίλφοίς 
 V\iner, {38. ' 
 
 δώδεκα. 
 
 εψάτταξ, 
 
 δε 
 
 inhere only. αΟΤΙ, Τίνίς 
 (Rom. vi. lU. ,r " ■> /-v 
 
 Heb.Tii.27. ετΓΕίτα ToiQ αποστοΛοις 
 
 έπειτα ωφΰη -^ εττανω τηντακοσιοις 
 
 εξ ων ^ οι πλείοΐ'ες μενουσίΐ» "^ εως 
 
 και ~ ΐκοιμηθησαν' ' ϊπέΐτα ^ ωφθη Ιακωρω, 
 
 εσχατον 
 
 9 
 
 πασιν. " εσγατον δε 
 ch.ixi'iiirffl. ωςπίρίΐ τω ® ίκτρωματι ωψυη καμοι 
 ΐ\ά\ιστος των αττοστολων' ος ουκ ^ιμι 
 απόστολος, δίοτι ' εδΐ(ι)ςα τΐ]ν εκκ\ησιαν του 
 
 Λ\ /ι - » λ « » * ' j 
 
 οε σεου ίίμι ο πμι, και η 
 
 fhere only t 
 
 τταντων 
 
 b = John XXI. /-ν / 
 
 ■j-2. Phil. i. £λα 
 
 25. 
 c ch.iv. 3. viii 
 
 7 al. fr. 
 d — ch. Tii. 39 
 
 reff. 
 e neat., see 
 
 Murk xii. 29, and note 
 
 iii. ](>. Eccle.<. vi. 3. 
 i = Malt. V. 10,11 al. fr. 
 
 jOiTl 
 
 ναρις αυτόν η 
 
 εγω -yap ειμί ο 
 ικανός καΧίΐσΟαι 
 
 θεοΰ• 1« 
 
 j 
 
 εις εμε ου 
 
 Ps. Tii. 1. 2 Mace. τ. 
 
 OS. Antt. iii.7. 1. Diort. Sic. 
 ■ Matl. iii. 11. 2 C.ir. iii..'). 
 j 1 Pft. i. 10. 
 
 1.39. g here only. Job 
 
 ^ού. It. 10. con.str., 2 Tun. ii. 2. 
 
 lira ωφΘη copt. — for Sw^eica, ivOixn D'(E.')FG 122' it ν Syr-marg arm slav nonnulli 
 codices in Aug Phot Dam Archel Jer all (not Aug). — 6. ιπανω om 109. 238 leet 1. — 
 ττειτακιςχιλιοις Bas-sel. — ίπανω and Εφαττ. om aeth. — rec ττλίΐους, with J Κ &c Chr 
 Thdrt Dam al : txt ABDEFG 17- 31-7-9- 73 lectt 8. 12. 19 Orig Bus Cyr.-bef ίκοιμ., 
 om και {as unnecessary, not perceiving its force) A'(appy)BD'(E.')FG iiT' it ν Syr arr 
 copt sah basm arm lat-ff: ins A^D'JK mss nrly Syr seth al ? Orig Chr Thdrt Dam 
 al Archel. — for εκοιμ., ίΤίΚιυτησαν {gloss) 17• — 7• for nrtira (1st), ura DE 17 : txt 
 AFGK all Orig Cyr-jerus Dam.— rec for tTctira (2nd), tirn, with B(e sil)J all Chr 
 Thdrt al: txt AFGK 46. 72-3. 93. 106-9-17• 219' lect 12. 19 Orig Cyr-jer.— 8. ωςττιρ 
 ΐ>. — τω (for rij'i) 106-8. 219 Chr (but does not notice it in comm) : τω om FG lect 19 
 al?— «rat ιμοι FG. — 9. for θίου, χριστού 80. — 10. bef ίΐς ίμι, om >} D'FG it ν lat-ff. — 
 
 tion at the end of the section. {ιττέρ τ. 
 
 αρ.. ήρ..] ' ON BEHALF OF OUR SINS :' viz. 
 
 to atone for them. Meyer makes the im- 
 portant remark, that this use of υπιρ with 
 των αμαρτιών ί}/χ. shews, that when Paul 
 uses it in sjjeaking of Christ's sufferings with 
 ήρ.ών only, he does not mean by it ' loco 
 nostri.' He also quotes from Buttmann 
 (Index to Meidias, p. 1H8), on the distinc- 
 tion between ύπίμ and π£ρί : "id unum 
 interest, quod irtg'i usu frequentissimo teri- 
 tur, multo rarius usurpatur ΰττίρ, quod 
 ipsum discrimen inter Lat. praep. de et super 
 locum obtinet." κατατας γρ.] This 
 
 applies to Christ's Death, Burial, and Re- 
 surrection on the third day : see reff. 
 4. €γηγ£ρται] the perfect marks the 
 continuation of the state thus begun, or of 
 its consequences : so Herod, vii. 8, άλλ' ό 
 μίν TtTtXtvTtjKS, και οΰκ f^tyfvfro οι 
 τιμωρησαπθαι : see Kiihner, § 441. 6. 
 5.] That the following appearances 
 are related in chronological order, is evident 
 from the use of the definite adverbs of se- 
 quence, t(7"a, fTTfira, ϊσγ^ατον 0£ ττάΐ'Των. 
 See exx. in Wetstein. Wieseler, Chron. 
 Synops. der vier Ενν. pp. 420. 21, attempts 
 to disprove this, but certainly does not suc- 
 ceed in getting over ΐσχατον πάντιον, ver. 8. 
 ώψθη Κηφά] See Luke xxiv. 34. 
 τοΪ9δώδ£κα] used here popularly, 
 as decemviri, and other like expressions, 
 although the number was not full The 
 occasion referred to seems to be that in 
 John XX. 19 ff. Luke xxiv. 36 fiF. Clearly 
 we must not with Chrys., suppose Matthias 
 
 to be included as possibly having seen Him 
 after His ascension : for the appearance is 
 evidently 07ie and the same. 6.] He 
 
 drops the constr. with on, dependent on 
 πα()ίλαβον, and proceeds in a direct narra- 
 tion. But evidently the sense of the former 
 constr. continues : he is relating what he 
 had received and preached to them. 
 ΙίΓανω ττεντακ. οδ. ΙφάτΓ.] From Matt, 
 xxviii. 17, it appears (see note there) that 
 others besides the eleven witnessed the 
 appearance on the mountain in Galilee. 
 But we cannot say that it is the appearance 
 here referred to : — nor indeed is it likely 
 that so many as 500 believers in Jesus 
 would have been gathered together in Gali- 
 lee : both from its position in the list, and 
 from the number who witnessed it, this 
 appearance would seem rather to have taken 
 place at Jervsaleni, and before the disper- 
 sion of the multitudes who had assembled 
 at the Passover : for we find that the 
 church of Jerusalem itself (Acts i. 15) sub- 
 sequently contained only 120 persons. 
 έψάιταξ] not here in its commoner meaning 
 of ' once Jor all,' but 'at once,' 'at one 
 and the same time•,' as Theodoret, ού 
 Κ(ΐθ' f'lrr, ίίλλ' ομοϋ πάσιν. μβνουσίν] 
 
 ' survive ;' see reff. 7. Ίακώβω] 
 
 Probably, from no distinguishing epithet 
 being added, the celebrated James, the 
 brother of the Lord; see Gal. i. 19. So 
 Chrys. : t^oi δοκιΊ, τφ αΓίΧφφ τψ ίηντον. 
 See notes on ch. ix. 5. Matt. xiii. 55, and 
 the Prolegg. to the Ep. of James. — This 
 appearance cannot however be identical
 
 6—12. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 573 
 
 Kevi) ί-γενηθη, αλλά. πίρισσότίρον αυτών πάντων "^ εκο- ''TTh'ss!''ii^i; 
 
 ' ' • Ν ^\ ί Λ \ \ Γ / - /Ι - η ^ ' / TV. 14, fi8. 
 
 πιασα, ουκ ε-γω of, αΑΑα η χα/ο<ς του οΐου συν εμοι. Ueut. χχχϋ. 
 " '•'" "'"■ iyM είτε εκείνοι, ούτως ^ κηξ)ΰσσομεν, και ^^^^l;'^^^'^^XΊ■ 
 
 είτε ουν 
 
 tl α ' 
 
 όντως ^ ετΓίστευσατε. 
 
 12 
 
 tl 
 
 δί 
 
 £ νοιστος 
 
 Rom. χνί. Γι al. Phil. ϋ. 16. Ps. cxxvi. 1. 
 ρ absol., Matt. iii. 1, and passim. Exod. xxxii. ^ 
 
 κηρύσσεται ίκ m Matt. vi. 28. 
 
 nActsxiv. 4. See 2 Kings ii. 10. ο ch. xiii. 8. 
 
 q = Tcr. 2 reff. 
 
 for ov Ktv. ty., ντωχη ουκ εγ. D' : πτωχ. ου ysyoviv FG : so also it latff (not Jer al). 
 — απάντων lect 12. — aft Se, add μοΊ'ος 74.— rec αλλ, with D\E.')FGJ &c : t.xt ABD* 
 &c.— rec bef συΐ' ins η (see note), with A(EJK?) (all .') Ath Chr Thdrtj Dam, Thl Oec 
 Jerj Orig intj : om BD'FG it ν Orig (gr and lat) lat-ff. — tv ιμοι syr-marg Thdrt (somet) 
 Jer,: tic f μι mss mentd by Erasm. — 11. for ουί', δί D'FGit goth Iren : ew2>« ν Tert Pelag : 
 et Beth. — aft urt ('2nd), ins ουν lect 12. — (κηρνξαμίν 4 v-sixt. — έττισπυσαμιν 5. 61. ΤΆ 
 £eth Marcion in Epijih,: νμεις επ. arm. — 12. δε om slav-ms : and in ver ij. — rec οτι tic 
 
 ■with that traditional one quoted by Jerome 
 (from the Gospel according to the Hebrews), 
 Catal. Script. Eccles. p. 170 d : " Juraverat 
 enim Jacobus, se non comesturum panem 
 ab ilia hora qua biberat calicem Domini, 
 donee videret eum resurgentem a mortuis." 
 This would imjily that the appearance was 
 very soon after the Resurrection, and be- 
 fore any of those to large collections of be- 
 lievers, in which James would naturally be 
 present. The circumstance of most of them 
 remaining alive is mentioned apparently by 
 wayof strengtheningthe evidence: q.d.,"and 
 can attest it, if required :" — hardly for tlie 
 reason suggested by Stanley-, that the dead 
 among them would have been worse off even 
 than others, if there were no resurrection, 
 having been " tantalised by the glimpse of 
 another world in the vision of their risen 
 Lord." άίΓοστ. irdatv] This is de- 
 
 cisive for the much wider use of the term 
 απόστολος than as applying to the Twelve 
 only : and a strong presumption that James, 
 just mentioned, and evidently here and Gal. 
 i. 19, included among the απόστολοι, was 
 not one of the Twelve. Chrys. extends the 
 term to the Seventy of Luke x., and others : 
 ήσαν yap και άλλοι άττόστολοι, ώς ο'ι ίβ~ 
 ίομήκυντα. 8.] ' But last of all 
 
 (not masc, as Meyer, who refers it to των 
 αποστόλων, — for others than the Apostles 
 have already been mentioned, — but neul., 
 as in ref. and in the expr. πάντων μάλιστα 
 [Plat. Protag. p. ,330]), as to the abor- 
 tively-born (τω pointing out the Apostles 
 as a family, and himself as the abortion 
 among them, — the one whose relation to 
 the rest in point of worthiness, was as that 
 of the immature and deformed child to the 
 rest of the family. That this is the mean- 
 ing is evident from ver. 9, which drops the 
 figure. On 'ίκτμωμα, see exx. in Wetstein. 
 It is not, as Tivtc in Theophyl., το νστιρον 
 yh'Vt]μ<ι, ' a weaklhiy child of old age.^ 
 The grammarians find fault with the term, 
 and prefer άμβλωμα or ί'ζάμβλωμη : but 
 it occurs in Aristotle, do generatione ani- 
 
 malium,iv.5, — ού δύναται τελειονν, άλλα 
 κνήματ' ίκπίπτιι παραπλήσια τοΊς κα• 
 λιινμίί'οις έκτρώμασιν. — The suggestion of 
 Valcknaer, al., that τψ is τιμ for τινι, is 
 equally inconsistent with usage and the 
 sense of the passage) He appeared to me 
 also :' viz. 071 the road to Damascus. This, 
 and this only, can here be meant ; as he is 
 speaking, not of a succession of visions, but 
 of some one definite apparition. 
 9, 10.] Digressive, explanatory of Ικτρώ- 
 ματι. 9. Ιγώ] The stress is on lyio, 'I, 
 and no other.' ος] ' ut qui .•' assigns 
 
 the reason. iKavos] see reff. 
 
 καλίϊσθαι] ' to bear the honourable name 
 of an Ap.' 10. χάρ. δ. θΐον] " With the 
 
 humiliating conviction of his own unworthi- 
 ness is united the consciousness of that 
 higher Power which worked on and in him, 
 — and this introduces his chastened self- 
 consciousness of the extent and success of 
 his apostolic labours." De Wette, The 
 position of χάριτι ct θ(οϋ, and the repeti- 
 tion of )'/ χάρις αϋτον afterwards, shew the 
 emphatic prominence which he assigns to 
 the divine Grace. ο €ΐμι] viz. in my 
 
 office and its results. The church has ad- 
 mirably connected this passage, as Epistle 
 for the nth Sund. after Trin., with that 
 other speech of a Pharisee, Luke xviii. 1 1 , — 
 ό θι'ος,ιϋχαριστώ σοι οτι ουκ ίίμι ωςπιρ οΊ 
 λοιποί των ανθρώπων : see note there. 
 ή ils ίμέ] ' whicli was (manifested) to- 
 wards me :' see ref. and Rom. viii. 18. 
 αλλά] opposed to κίνή ty.,- — ' bi/ 7neans of 
 God's Grace' being understood after άλλα, 
 as afterwards explained. "ΤΓ€ρισσοτ€- 
 
 pov] neut. accus. governed by ϊκοπίασα. 
 αυτών τάντων] either, ' tha7i any 
 of them' or ' than them all' scil. together. 
 Meyer prefers the latter, on account of 
 Γοϊς απ. πασιν, ver. 7• l^ut it seems 
 hardly necessary, and introduces an element 
 of apparent exaggeration. ίκοττίασα] 
 
 Spoken of liis apostolic work, in all its 
 branches ; see retf., esp. Phil. ονκ 
 
 εγώ δε] ex2)lanatory, to avoid misapprc-
 
 574 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 XV. 
 
 . ver.4 al.fr. 
 
 ί'γη-γζρται, ττως 
 
 λ^ 
 
 ηοΙ in Matt, 
 (έκι/.άκαστ. 
 χτϋ. ϋ. >ιι• 
 
 ίγουσιν εν υμιν riveg υτι abde 
 
 . 13 ' 5•^ t ' ' t FGJK 
 
 νίκ^ων ουκ ίστιν \ ει οε αναστασις ve- 
 IV, οΐ/δέ χριστός " εγηγερται* ^^ ει δε χριστός 
 Maikvi.''i4, ουκ " ayi)yf^)Tai, " Ktvov "" αρα και το ^ κηρν-γμα -ημών, 
 
 7. ' John ϋ. 22. χϋ. 1, 9, 17. xxi. 14. Act.•; iii. 15 al2. Paul, passim. Heb. xi. 1!). IPet.i. 21. s = Rom. 
 
 vi. 2. Gal. ii. 14. iv. 9. t Malt. xxii. 31 only in gn.spp. iw. tK, Luke ϋχ 3.ί. Acts iv. 2.) Actsxvii. 
 
 32 aH. Paul, Rom. i. 4, this chap. (Heb. vi 2J only. See l.sa. xxvi. 19. u ver. 4. ν ver. ID. 
 ■w See Rom. vii. 3, 20. 2 Cor. v. 15. Gal. iii. 29. χ = Acts xxir. 5. Rom. vii. 10. 
 
 riK-p. εγηγ. {transposn for perspicuity), with AB(e sil)JK &c ν {on ty. ικ vsk.) al 
 Chr Thdrt al Iren al : txt DEFG it (vss var) Orig.— rec Tivtg tv υμ., with DG &c Chrj 
 Thtlrt lat-ff: txt AB al syrr Orig Chr, Dam Orig-int. — 13. for ft, tav FG. — from u to 
 ίπτιν cm Ε 17. '28. 43-8'. 74' al e. — 14. tyijyfprai• ti Ss χριστός cm D> : η οε χη. ονκ 
 fyjyy. cm (Ε.') d e Ps-Ign.— rec aft apn om και (as superfluous), with B(e sil)J &c vss 
 (d e al lat-ff om apa also) Ps-Iga Constt Cyr-jerus Chr Thdrt Dam al Jacob-nisib : ins 
 
 hension : it had been implied (see above) 
 in the άλλα :— 'not I, however, but the 
 Grace of God with me' (see var. readd.) : 
 scil. t(co7rirtf7£i•, K.T.X. — That is, — the Grace 
 of God worked with him in so overwhelm- 
 ing a measure, compared to his own work- 
 ing, that it was no longer the work of him- 
 self but of divine Grace. — Augustine, de 
 Grat. et Lib. Arb. § 3, hardly expresses 
 this : " Non ego autem, i. e. non solus, sed 
 gratia Dei mecum : ac per hoc nee gratia 
 Dei sola, nee ipse solus, sed gratia Dei cum 
 illo :" — for he overlooks the entire prepon- 
 derance of Grace, which Paul asserts, even 
 to the exclusion of his own action in the 
 matter. The right view of this preponder- 
 ance of Grace prevents the misunderstand- 
 ing of the words which has led to the in- 
 sertion of the article, η avv εμοί, whereby 
 Grace becomes absolutely the sole agent, 
 which is contrary to fact. On the coagency 
 of the human will with divine Grace, but 
 in subordination, see Matt. x. 20. 2 Cor. v. 
 20 ; vi. 1 , and ch. iii. 9, note. 11.] 
 
 He resumes the subject after the digression 
 respecting himself: — ' it matters not whe- 
 ther it were I or they (the other App.) — 
 SUCH is the purport of our preaching — 
 SUCH was your belief:' — υ'ΰτως, 'after 
 this manner,' viz. that Christ died, was 
 buried, and rose again, as vv. 3, 4. 
 12—20.] On the Jact of Christ's Resur- 
 rection, announced in his preaching, and 
 confessed in their belief, he grounds {nega- 
 tively) the truth of the general Resurrec- 
 tion : — If the latter be not to hafipen, nei- 
 ther has the former happened : — and he 
 urges the results of such a disproof of 
 Christ's Resurrection. 12.] intro- 
 
 duces the argument for the resurrection, 
 by referring to its denial among a portion 
 of the Cor. church. 8e' belongs to the 
 
 whole question, and is opposed to ούτως 
 κηΐί. and our. ίττιοτ. of the foregoing ver. 
 — The jiosition of χριστός before the verb 
 gives it the leading emphasis, as an example 
 
 of that which is denied by some among 
 you : ' But if Christ is preached that 
 He is risen from the dead (if an instance 
 of such resurrection is a fact announced in 
 our preaching), how say some among you 
 (how comes it to pass that some say) that a 
 resurrection of the dead does not exist 
 (οΰκ ΐστ. as ver. 13) Τ ' If the species be 
 conceded, how is it that some among you 
 deny the genus ? tiv€s] It is an in- 
 
 teresting question, who these τινίς were ; 
 and one which can only be answered by the 
 indications which the argument in this 
 chapter furnishes. (1) Were they Sad- 
 ducees ? If so, the Ap. would hardly have 
 begun his argument with the fact of the 
 Resurrection of Jesus. And yet we must 
 remember that he is arguing not with the 
 deniers, but with those who being as yet 
 sound, were liable to be misled by them. 
 But the opposition between Sadduceism 
 and Christianity was so complete, that we 
 have little reason to think that any leaven 
 of the Sadducees ever found its way into 
 the church. (2) Were they Epicureans? 
 Probably not for two reasons : (a) the 
 Epicurean maxim, " Let us eat and drink," 
 &c., is represented as a legitimate conse- 
 quence of adopting their denial of the re- 
 surrection, not as an accompaniment of, 
 much less as the ground of it : and (/i) had 
 the Epicurean element entered to any ex- 
 tent into the Cor. church, we certainly 
 should have had more notice of its exceed- 
 ingly antichristian tenets. It is possible 
 that the deniers may have been, or been in 
 danger of being, corrupted by mixture with 
 Epicureans without, from the warning of 
 ver. 33. (3) Were they Jews ? If not 
 Sadducees, hardly Jews at all, or Judaizers : 
 a strong tenet of Pharisaism was this very 
 one of the Resurr., see Acts xxiii. C : and 
 we know of no tendency of Essenism which 
 should produce such a denial. (4) They 
 must then have been Gentile believers, in- 
 heriting the unwillingness of the Greek mind
 
 13— ]9. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 575 
 
 κενή και η ττιστις υμών' ^ ίυρισκομίθα δε και ^ ϊ^ευ- 7Μ»»-χ^"• 
 ^ομάρτνρξς του Οβυυ, οτι ^ (μαρτυρησαμζν ^ κατά του θίου ^T^e?^'^^'^ 
 
 w U >' "- ν ι\ ' U " b >' >ί a = here only. 
 
 οτι r}-yiipiv τον γ^ριστον, ον ουκ ηγείρεν ειπερ αξ>α xc, cymp. 
 νεκροί ουκ '^ eyi'ipouTai. ει yap νεκροί ουκ " εγε/ρον- ταίταμβι/ 
 
 ται, ούδε χριστός " εγτιγερται' ' ει δε -χριστός ουκ ^""τωκ 
 
 U'' C > ' ι r-.f '\(1» ~ " \ • 
 
 eyqyeprai, μάταια η πιστις νμων, ίτι εστί εν ταις «χομε" λ6- 
 άμαρτ'ιαις υμών' αρα και οί ^ κοιμηθεντες ^^ εν χρίττω ''^ρ™,: i/'s^• 
 
 ί ■> ' \ 19'' " R y ~ ' 1ι• -hi'\ cch. iii. 20 
 
 αττωΚοντο. ει εν τυ 4f»'i? ταντ-η εν χριστώ ΐ)Λπι- rem 
 
 ι ι ' Λ.Γ t d John viii.24. 
 
 ix. 34. e = ch. Tii. 39 reff. ee = 1 Thess. iv. 16. f = Rom. xiT. 15 al. g = Phil. i. L'O. James 
 
 ir. 14. 1 Pet. iii. 10 only. h Eph. i. 12. 4 Kings xviii. 5. i pcrf., John T. 43. 2 Cor. L 10. 
 
 ADEFGK 17. 37-9. 47. 91. 108'-9-13-22i. 219» al g basm goth Dial Oec— rec aft Kfvi] 
 ins St {prob as a connecting particle, and to correspond to ct και beloiv), with D-'EJK 
 most mss syr Pseud-Ign Constt Chr Thdrt ThI Oec : oin ABD'FG 17- 23. 31-7• 74 it ν 
 ar-pol copt sah basm Cyr-jerus Dial Dam lat-flF. — for νμων, ημών D' 6/"• 73. 91. 106 
 ar-pol sah basm goth al Dial Cyr-jerus Oec Ruf Arm Bed. — 15. Si cm d e Chr (Matt's 
 ms*) : apa 37: ■yep 73- — και om D'E arr arm goth Tert. — θίου to Qtov oni 48'. — 
 from tiTTfp to tytip. om DE 43 vss (not v-ed am demid harl- syr copt al) Origj 
 (does not cite beyond i/yfip.) Thdrt Iren Tert al. — oi νικρ. FG. — 17. for νμ. (1st) ημών 
 73. 123•* : add ισην BD' vss lat-iF (but ματ. ear. vss). — και (τι A 31 Syr arr sah basm 
 arm ieth Dam : tri και copt : tn yap goth Orig lat-iF : οτι tri Iren-Tert : on 37- 43 : 
 om 179. — 18. και om basm. — tv χριστώ om 28. 4δ. — 19. rec ηλττ. ισμ. ίν χρ. {appy 
 
 to receive that of which a full account could 
 not be given, see vv. 35, 36 : and probably of 
 a philosophical and cavilling turn. Meyer 
 argues from the antimateriahstic turn of the 
 Ap 's counter-arguments, vv. 35 tf., — that 
 the objections were antimateriahstic also : 
 De W. infers the very opposite, which cer- 
 tainly seems to me more probable. — No 
 trace whatever is found in the argument of 
 an alleyorizing character in the opponents, 
 as was that of Hymenseus and Philetus, who 
 maintained that the resurrection was past 
 already, 2 Tim. ii. 17, 18.— as Olsh. after 
 Grot supposes. — Whether the Ap. regarded 
 the resurrection of the body as inseparably 
 bound up with a future existence of the 
 soul, does not very clearly appear in this 
 chapter. From the use of the word άπ- 
 ώλοντο, ver. 18, which must refer, not to 
 annihilation, but to perdition, it would 
 seem that he admitted an independent e.x- 
 istence of the soul ; as also from Phil. i. 23. 
 But from ver. 32, ti vtKpoi οΰχ iytipovrai, 
 (pάyωμtv κ. ττίωμίν, avpinv yap άποθνη- 
 σκομίν, it would seem that the Ap. re- 
 garded the denial of the resurrection as in- 
 volving that of the future state and judg- 
 ment.— On the question, to which of the 
 (supposed) Cor. parties the opponents be- 
 longed, I have nothing to say, not recog- 
 nizing the divisions into the Pauline, Apol- 
 lonian, Petrine, and Christine parties as 
 having any historical foundation ; see note 
 on ch. i. 10. 13. J δ€ is the 'but' 
 
 argumentandi, frequent in mathematical de- 
 monstrations, όν. veK. ουκ toTiv] the 
 
 words (ουκ) of the deniers. ουδέ 
 
 χριστ. έγήγίρται] This inference depends, 
 as Grot, observes, on the maxim, " Sublato 
 genere tolhtur et species;" the Resurrection 
 of Christ being an instance of the rule, that 
 dead men rise ; inasmuch as He is man. 
 This is enlarged on, vv. 20—22. 14.] 
 
 δε, again introducing a new inference. 
 oviK ίγ.] Again repeating and using as mat- 
 ter of fact {ovk) the inference of the last 
 ver. : q. d. t'l St χρ. oi)K-iyi^ytpTai. 
 K€vov] 'idle,' 'empty,' 'without result:' 
 placed first for emphasis. «ip»•] ' then:' 
 ' rebus ita comparatis ' (Meyer). 
 καί] ' also,' q. d. " If Christ's Resurrec- 
 tion be gone, then also our faith is gone." 
 Without the copula St, the clause is much 
 more forcible : — ' idle also is our preach- 
 ing, idle also is your faith,' Thus κι-.Ί 
 both times refers to the hypothesis, ti χρ. 
 OVK iyijy. 15.] Not to be joined 
 
 with the former ver., as Lachm., al., and 
 Meyer : for it does not depend on ti ck 
 χρ., κ.Γ.λ., but has its reason given below. 
 δέ καί, ' moreover.' ψευδ. 
 
 τοΰ θ.] ' False witnesses concerning 
 God' (gen. obj.), not '■belonging to God' 
 (gen. subj.), as Billroth : and false wit- 
 nesses, as bearing false testimony (see 
 below), not, as Knapp, as pretending to be 
 ■witnesses, and not being : — there is no such 
 distinction as Miiller attempts to lay down 
 (Diss. Exeget. de loco Paul. 1 Cor. xv. 
 12 — 19, cited by De Wette) between φίυ- 
 StXg μάρτυοίς, ' qui falsum testimonium di- 
 cunt,' and -φινδομάρτυρί^:, ' qui mentiuntur
 
 576 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 XV. 
 
 ωπων Εσ.αεί'. 
 
 κοτίς εσ /uiv μόνον, εΧείΐνοτΐροι πάντων avOf 
 
 νυνι οε χριστός " eyriytprai ίκ νεκ'ρων, '" αττπρ-χ?} των 
 " κίκοιμημίνων. " εττειοη γαρ οι άνθρωπου ο θάνατος, 
 
 και δι άνθρωπου ° αναστασις ° νίκρων. ωςπερ yap 
 
 Aga 
 
 μ πάντες αποι^νησκονσιν, όντως και ^ εν τω 
 
 kRev. η!. 17 
 only t. corn- 
 par., Malt, 
 siii. 32 al. 
 
 I = ch. xUi. 13 
 reft. 
 
 m Rom.Tiii. 23 
 reft. 
 
 η Acts XV. 24 
 refl'. η » " ' 
 
 over. 13. ' ev τω 
 
 ρ — ch. vii. 14. •■ 
 
 Col. i. 16 refl'. 
 
 tra7isposn for perspicuity), with D^JK &c vss {ταντη μόνον vss) Orig, Chr Thdrt Oec 
 (all aliter) : txt ABD'EFG 17- 31-7-9 it goth Thl (addg μον.) Iren Ambr Ambrst al : 
 μόνον tv χρ. η\ΐΓ. £σ/ί. Origj Clem. — (ομ. τταν. ανθ. DE dev goth lat-ff: omnibus 
 surmts hominibus Tren. — 20. νυν AFG Dial. — tic των νεκ. FG Dam coram. — rec at end 
 add fyf I'fro {supplemental gloss), with D'^JK &c syrr al Thdrt Dam : -γίνομίνος 80 : 
 txt ABD'EFG 6. 17. ('>V- 71• 177 it ν copt basm arm Orig Dial all Iren Hil all.— 
 21. υ bef θάνατος om ABD'K (i'l-. 117 Orig Dial Athj Ps-Ath Dam {ajjpy to conform, 
 to αναστ. below : this is more pi-ob than to suppose with Meyer that it has been introd 
 from Rom v. 12) : ins D EFGJ niss nrly Athj Eucher Chr (but η avanr. also) Cyr- 
 jerus (but η ζωη afterwards) Thdrt al. — Sia (2ce) FG. — 22. αττοΟνησκομίν 93. — ■ 
 
 se esse testes :' see refF., and compare (De 
 W.) ψίκίο^ιί'ίσκ-αλος, ψίκ^οκατΖ/γορος. 
 κατά τοΰ θ€θΐ] not, as commonly, and 
 even Meyer, 'against God:' butasE.V., 
 ' of,' or ' concerning God :' see, besides 
 refF., Plut. de Liberis Educandis, § 4 : — δ 
 κατά των τίχνών κ. των ίττιπτημών \'t- 
 ytiv ίίώθαμίν, ταΰτόν καΐ κατά της άρί- 
 τής φατίυν ϊστιν. ώς ίίς την παντελή 
 SiKaioTTpayiav τρία £εΧ σννδραμΰν, ψν- 
 σιν, κ. λόγον, κ. ίθος. €ΪτΓ€ρ αρα] 
 
 'if in reality, as they assert, . . .,' comp. 
 Plat. Protag p. 319 (§ 27), >/ καλόν, ην δ' 
 εγώ, ΤΒχνημα άρα κίκτησαι, είτϊίο κίκτη- 
 σαι, and see Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 343. 
 16.] repetition of the inference in 
 Ter. 13, for precision's sake. 17, 18.] 
 
 Repetition of the consequence already men- 
 tioned in ver. 14, but fuller, and with more 
 reference to its present and future calami- 
 tous results. 17. ματαία] from μάτην, 
 and thus more directly pointing at the frus- 
 tration of all on which faith relies as ac- 
 complished, — e. g. the removal of the guilt 
 and power of sin ; — and of all to which hope 
 looks forward, e. g. bliss after death for those 
 who die in Christ. This is so, because 
 Christ's Resurrection accomplished our jus- 
 tification (Rom. iv. 25) and, through justi- 
 fication, our future bliss, even in the dis- 
 embodied state (for that seems here to be 
 treated of). 18 άρα καί] ' then also.' 
 oi κοιμ,.] ' those who fell asleep in Christ, 
 perished' (i. e ])assed into misery in Hades). 
 He uses the aorists, speaking of the act of 
 death, not of the continuing state : the act 
 of falling asleep in Christ was to them 
 άττό)λίΐα. iv χρ., in communion with, 
 membership of Christ.— On κοιμηθ€'ντ€ς, 
 Meyer quotes a beautiful sentence from 
 Photius (Quaest. Amphiloch. 197) : f^' μίν 
 ovv τον χριστοί) θάνατον καλή, iva το 
 •αάθος πιστώσηται' ίπ'ι ίε ημών κοίμησιν, 
 
 'ίνα την οούνην ιταηαμνθήσηται. ένθα 
 μεν γαρ παρίχώρησιν t) άνόστασις, θαρ- 
 ρών καλίΧ Θάνατον, ένθα δε εν ίλπίσιν 
 ίτι μένει, κοίμησιν καλεί. 19.] As- 
 
 suming this άττώλίΐα of the dead in Christ, 
 the state of Christians is indeed miserable. 
 It has perhaps not been enough seen that 
 there are here two emphases, and that μό- 
 νον belongs to the aggregate of both. Ac- 
 cording to the ordinary interp., ' If in this 
 life only we have hope in Christ . . . ,' it 
 would be implied that in reality we shall have 
 hope in Christ in another state also, which 
 would not agree with the perfect ήλπικότες 
 εσμέν. The right arrangement of the Greek 
 gives the key to the sentence : fi [εν τη 
 ζω^ Tahry Iv χριστψ ήλπικότες εσμεν'] 
 μόνον, — 'if all we have done is merely 
 having hoped in Christ in this Ife,' ' if it is 
 there to end, and that hope have no result 
 . . .' — The perf. ήλιτικότίς εσμ. implies 
 the endurance of the hope through our 
 lives. έλεειν. ττάντ.] ' We are more 
 
 to he pitied (more miserable) than all 
 men;' viz. because they, all other men, Uve 
 at ease, — we on the contrary are ever ex- 
 posed to danger and death : because our 
 hope is more intense than that of all others, 
 and leads us to forego more : and to be 
 disappointed in it, would be the height of 
 misery. 20 — 28.] Reassertion of 
 
 the truth that Christ is riskn from the 
 dead, — and prophetic exposition of the 
 consequences of that great event. 
 20.] vvvt, ' as matters now stand :' see 
 reft'. οΊταρχ. τ. κεκοιμ.] ' (as) (the) 
 
 first-fruit of them that sleep (anar- 
 throus, because categorematical).' For the 
 constr., Meyer compares Eur. Or. 1098: 
 ΐ.λ'(νηΐ' κτάνωμεν, MfrtXff^u λνπηΐ' πι- 
 κράν. The sense is, ' Christ, in rising from 
 the dead, is but the firstling or earnest of 
 the resurrection of the whole number of
 
 20-2 k 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 577 
 
 "νριστω τταντίς '^ 'C'^o^Γoιηθήσovτa^. έκαστος c£ sr τω qRom.iv. 17 
 
 tciu) '^ τ ay ματ ι' "" απαργτ^ι -χριστός, επατα ^ οι του χριστού '"ϊΓκίηε/ίΙ'. 
 
 t • ~ t ' ' - 24 ' ■^ U 'Λ " ν 
 
 e\> T1J τταρουσία αυτού, ίΐτα το τεΑος, όταν τταρα 
 
 11. t = 1 Thess. ϋ. 19. ui. 13. τ. 23 
 
 U = Matt. xxiv. 6 al. 
 
 10. xxxiii. 
 - 13.) 
 
 s gen., see ch. i. 
 V = Matt. xi. 27. 
 
 23. recom του bef χριστού {by a mistake appy). — for ii^ τη παρ. αυτόν, οι ίντη παρ. αυτυν 
 ίλπισαΐ'τις FG g ν (not am al) lat-ff (crediderunt ν lat-ff ). — 24. rec τταραδω {alteration to 
 conform to κατάργηση, the propriety 0/ the pres beiny overlooked : see note), with J Κ 
 &c Chr Thdrt Dam al : παραδίδω ADE al (goth, and basm sah in Scholz) Eus Ath Did 
 Hipp Bas Nyss al {oTt or όταν παραδιδωσιν Origj, once ore παραδώσει) : txt BFG : 
 
 those that sleep.' There does not appear 
 to be any intended reference to the legal 
 ordinance of the first-fruits (Lev. xxiii. 10, 
 11): but however general the application 
 of the analogy may be, it can hardly fail to 
 have been suggested to the mind of a Jew 
 by the Levitical ordinances, especially as 
 our Lord rose on the very morrow after the 
 Paschal Sabbath, when (1. c.) the first-fruits 
 were offered. των κβκοιμημβνων] 
 
 from the logical connexion, should mean, 
 not the dead in Christ, but all the dead ; 
 see next ver. : but it is the Christian dead 
 who are before the Ap.'s mind, when he 
 calls our risen Lord άπαρχτΊ των κίκ. 
 2L] Man the bringer-in 
 both of death and life: explanation (not 
 proof) of Christ being the απαρχή τ. κ£- 
 κοιμ. : and (1) in that He is Man: it 
 being necessary that the first-fruit should 
 be as the lump. The verity lying at the 
 root of this ver. is, that by man only can 
 general effects pervading the whole human 
 race be introduced. δι' άνθρώττον, 
 
 sc. ίστιν. 22.] (2) In that He is 
 
 (and here the fact of His being the Lord of 
 Life and Righteousness, and the second 
 and spiritual Head of our nature, are as- 
 sumed) to us the bringer-in of Life, as 
 Adam was the bringer-in oy Death. 
 Iv τω Ά δ., ev τω χριστώ] ' in commvuiity 
 with,' as partakers in a common nature 
 with Adam and Christ; who are respec- 
 tively the sources, to the whole of that 
 nature {πάντίς), of death, and life, i.e. 
 {here) physical death, and rescue from 
 physical death. The practice of Paul 
 to insulate the objects of his present at- 
 tention from all ulterior considerations, 
 must be carefully here borne in mind. The 
 antithesis is merely between the bringing 
 in of death by Adam, and of life (its oppo- 
 site) by Christ. No consequence, whether 
 on the side of death or of life, is brought 
 into consideration. That death physical 
 involved death eternal — that life eternal (in 
 its only worthy sense) involves bliss eternal, 
 is not so much as thought of, while the 
 two great opposites. Death and Life, are 
 under consideration. This has been missed 
 by many Interpp.,and the reasoning thereby 
 Vol. Π. 
 
 marred. But the ancients, Chrys., Theo- 
 phyl., Theodoret, Oecum , and Olsh,, De 
 Wette, and Clever, keep to the universal 
 reference. Theophylact's note is clear 
 and striking : airiav προςτίΟησι δι ης 
 πιστοϋται τα ΐίρημίνα' ϊδει yap, φησιν, 
 αυτήν νικήσαι την ήττηθίΐσαν φύσιν, και 
 τον καταβληθέντα, αυτόν ίκνικήσαι' και 
 ■γάρ tv τψ 'Αδάμ, τουτίστι διά το τοϊ' 
 'Αδάμ πταίσμα, πάντες τψ θανάτψ νπ- 
 ίπεσον ούτως συν έν χριστφ πάντες άνα- 
 στίισονται' τουτίστι διά το εύρεθήναι 
 τον χριστόν άναμάρτητον κ. άνίνοχον τψ 
 θανάτψ, κοί ίκόντα μεν άποΘανεΊν, άνο- 
 στη ναι δε, καθό ουκ ήν δυνατόν αυτόν 
 κρατεΊσθαι νπό της φθοράς, τον άρχη-γόν 
 της ζωής. See on the great antithesis, 
 Rom. V. 12 fr., and notes. 23.] But 
 
 in this universal Resurrection, all shall 
 NOT hold the same rank. Chrys. rightly, 
 είτα, 'ίνα μή την ζωοποίησιν κοινή ν άκου- 
 σας, και τονς αμαρτωλούς νομ'ισι^ς σώ- 
 ζεσθαι, έπήγηγεν €καστο5 δέ, κ.τ.λ. 
 τάγμα is not order of priority, but ' rank,' 
 OY '■ troop in an army :' so Plut. Otho, p. 
 1072 (Wetst.) : λίγ6ώΐ'£ς•, οϊτω yap τά 
 τάγματα 'Ρω/ιαΤοι καλυυσιν επίκληση'. 
 The three ranks are mentioned in order of 
 priority, but this does not constitute their 
 distinctive character: — Christ is the απαρχή 
 — this is His Ίδιον τάγμα, see Col. i. 18 : — 
 ol του χριστού follow at His coming, who 
 are the φύραμα (as understood by the con- 
 text, and implied by απαρχή), in the proper 
 and worthiest sense, made like unto Him 
 and partaking of His glory ; then (after how 
 long or how short a time is not declared, 
 and seems to have formed no part of the 
 revelations to Paul, but was afterwards re- 
 vealed, — see Rev. xx. 4 — 6": comp. also 
 1 Thess. iv. 15 — 17) shall come the end, 
 viz. the resurrection of the rest of the dead, 
 here veiled over by the general term το 
 τίλος, — that resurrection not being in this 
 argument specially treated, but only that of 
 Christians. The key to the understanding 
 of this passage is to be found in the ])ro- 
 phecy of our Lord, Matt, xxiv., xxv., but 
 especially in the latter chapter. The resur- 
 rection and judgment of oi του χιηστοΰ 
 forming the subject of vv. 1 — 30 there,
 
 578 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 ΧΥ 
 
 w = Arts XX. διδοι την βασιλίίαν τιο θεω και πατρι, όταν ^ κατά ρ- abde 
 xKom.xv.fi yj^ffij πασαν αρχ?]ν και πασαν eqovniav και όνναμιν. 
 ^i^ff."'" ... 2^ "^ δϊΓ γαρ αυτόν ** βασιλίυει»', «χρις ου " Orj πάντας τους 
 
 '^ rreff.^Ephi i. 21 rcff. a =- Luke xxiv. 40. Dan. ii. 28. b - ch. iv. 8 reff. c Psa. cix. 1. 
 
 βασ. ναραδ. 219. — bef πατρι om και Syr (and elsw) ar-erp sah basm Hil (but once as 
 
 and TO T-fXoc,— tbe great final gathering of 
 τταιτη τά ΐθνη, of vv. 31 — 46. 
 αιταρχή, therefore necessarily the first 
 τάγμα : and hence the word stands first, 
 oi τον xp.] = o\ I'tKpol tv xpiffnp, 
 1 Thess. iv. 16. No mention occurs here of 
 any judgment of these his icioi SovXoi, as in 
 Matt. XXV., for it does not belong to the 
 present subject. ev τη τταρ. αϋτ.] iv, 
 
 a» forming part of, involved in, His appear- 
 ing, — which, as the great event of the time, 
 includes their resurrection in it. It ought 
 to be needless to remind the student of the 
 distinction between this παρουσία and the 
 final judgment; it is here pecuharly impor- 
 tant to bear it in mind. 24. eiTo] 
 ' then,' next in succession, introducing the 
 third τάγμα, — see above. το tc'Xos] 
 ' the end' κατ' ϊζαχήν : not the end oft/ie 
 resurrection, as Meyer, after Theodoret, 
 Oecum., Bengel, al. :— nor, of this present 
 world, as Chrys., al., — which properly hap- 
 pens at the τταρουσία : nor exactly, of the 
 Kingdom of Christ, as Grot, and Billroth : 
 but generalh/, the End, when all shall 
 he accomplished, the bringing in and full- 
 ness of the Kingdom by the subjugation 
 of the last enemy, the whole course of 
 mediatorial work of Christ, the salvation of 
 the elect ; the time indicated by IMatt. xxv. 
 ult. : και άτΓίλίΐ'σοιτοι ούτοι £('ς κοΚασιν 
 αΐώνιον' 01 if δίκαιοι ίΐς ζοα/ΐ' a>t'<niiov. 
 δταν τταραδιδοϊ] ' when He (Christ) gives 
 up (the ])res., for that which is certainly at- 
 tached to the event as its accompaniment — 
 orni' indicating the uncertainty of the time 
 when) the Kingdom to God and the 
 Father (reff. : to Him who is God and 
 His Father).' — Then the rest of the section 
 as far as ver. 29, is in explanation of the 
 giving up the kingdom. And it rests on 
 this weighty verity : the kingdom of 
 Christ over this world, in its beginning, 
 its furtherance, and its completion, has one 
 great end, — the glorificahon of the 
 Father by the Son. Therefore, when 
 it shall be fully established, every enemy 
 overcome, every thing subjected to Him, 
 He will, — not, reign over it and abide its 
 King, but deliver it up to the Father. 
 Hence as in ver. 25, His reign will endure, 
 not, like that of earthly kings, when He 
 shall have put all enemies under His feet, 
 but only till He shall have, &c., — and 
 
 then will be absorbed in the all-pervading 
 majesty of Him for whose glory it was from 
 first to last carried onward. It may be 
 observed (1) that the whole of this respects 
 the mediatorial work and kingdom : the 
 work of redemption, — and that Lordship 
 over dead and living, for which Christ both 
 died and rose. Consequently, nothing is 
 here said which can affect either (1) His 
 coetjuality and coeternity with the Father in 
 the Godhead, which is prior to and indepen- 
 dent of this mediatorial work, and is not 
 limited to the mediatorial kingdom ; or 
 (2) the eternity of his humanity : for that 
 humanity ever was and is subordinate to 
 the Father; and it by no. means follows 
 that when the mediatorial kingdom shall 
 be given up to the Father, the humanity, 
 in which that kingdom was won, shall be 
 put off : nay the very fact of Christ in 
 the body being the first fruits of the resur- 
 rection, proves that his body, as ours, will 
 endure for ever : as the truth that our 
 humanity, even in glory, can only subsist 
 before God by virtue of His humanity, 
 makes it plain that He will be very man to 
 all eternity. την βασιλείαν] That 
 
 kingdom, which in its fullest sense is then 
 first His. At this very time of το rsXoc, 
 Matt. XXV. 34, He first calls Himself by the 
 title of 6 βασιλίνς. The name will no 
 sooner be won, than laid at the feet of the 
 Father, thus completing by the last great 
 act of Redemption the obedience which He 
 manifested in his Incarnation, and in his 
 Death. όταν κατάργηση] (aor.) 
 
 ' when He shall have brought to nought,' 
 &c. : see above. ττασ•. αρχ. κ-.τ.λ.] 
 
 not only, as Meyer, &c., hostile power and 
 government, but as the context necessitates, 
 ALL power. Christ being manifested as 
 universal King, every power co-ordinate 
 with His must come under the category of 
 hostile: all Λ-ί'η^* shall submit to Him : the 
 kingdoms of the world shall become the 
 kingdoms of the Lord and of His Christ : 
 — and see the similar expressions Eph. i. 
 21, where speaking proleptically, the Ap. 
 clearly indicates that legitimate authorities, 
 all the powers that be, are included. 
 25] See on the last ver. : — this is the divine 
 appointment with regard to the mediatorial 
 kingdom, — that it should last till, and only 
 till, all enemies sliall have been subdued to
 
 25—29. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 579 
 
 26 
 
 ΐ-χθρους ύτΓΟ τους πόδας αυτού. ^^ εσγ^ατος εγ^/ρος a Rom. τϋί. 2ο 
 ^ KaTaoyHTai ο θάνατος. ' Πάιτα yap '^ υπετα^ίν ύττό el'^mstr., 
 
 \ /Λ 5 - e " ^^ f ■' " ' d ' ' J.ihn is. 5 
 
 τους ποοας αυτού. όταν οε tnrv οτι πάντα υττοτε- fciups., cu 
 τακται, ^η\ον οτι ^ έκτος του υττοτά^αντος αυτω τα ^Tif^'jl^^ 
 
 28 ". 
 
 IV δε 
 
 πάντα όταν οε υττοταν'? αυτω τα πάντα, τότε /cat h = c.ii.iii. η. 
 
 . ν ^ .ν d c , ^^' - «i, , ,y ' , _ , Herod.m. 
 
 αυτός ο υιός υποτα^ησεται τω υποταςαντι αυτω τα Ι^^, π 
 
 _ / <■ . ί• . . Ill- 61• ■ 
 
 παντα^ ινα ί] ο ΰεος τα πάντα εν πασιν. 
 
 y / 
 
 29 
 
 ποιησουσιν οΐ βα 
 
 όλον αΰτοϊ^ t)v καΐ το ηάν ΆπελλΓ)?. 
 
 εττεί ' τι ί^!^β">^<^; 
 
 οισι Ζωπν 
 
 πτιΖ,όμενοι ϋττέρ των νεκρών ', ει υλως ρ°^• ^°^y^- 
 
 k Matt. τ. 34. ch. τ. 1. vi.7ouIyt. 
 
 L = Markxi. 5. Acts xxi. 13. 
 
 txt).— 25. rec aft αχοις ου ins αν {perhaps, as Mey,from LXX, Pscx. 1), with JK &c 
 Orig, (elsw (ο^ς αν) Cies Cyr-jerus (edd) Chr Thdrt al : om (άχρι A Dam) ABD'(E?)FG 
 17. 31. 71-3. 80. 93 Orier, Ath Eus Hipp Epiph (oft) Dam al. — aft ίχθρ. ins avrov 
 AFG al 10. 17. 31. 73. 93' 120 g Syr ar-erp copt sah basm seth harl Origj Marcell (in 
 Eus) Cses Cvr-jerus al Tert al : om BD &c ν (ed) am demid al syr al Origj Ath Chr 
 Thdrt (h 1) Dam al Ir Hil al.— η ντον om FG g Jerj. — 26. This ver in DE d e tol Jer Ambrst 
 stands after ποδός αυτού \er 27: from Tro^acto ποίας (ver 27) om 17(92?). — ίσχ. ct 80 sah 
 basm. — 27. οτι (1st) om Β d e ν lat-ff (not Aug). — υττοτίτ. αυτω FG vss Hipp Orig-lat (al 
 lat).— ra om F. — 28. for Sf, γαρ lect 1. — και om (as superfluous) BD'(E.')FG 17- dV it 
 am harl tol syr goth Orig Iren Jer al : ins AD^JK mss nrly (appy) ν (demid) copt basm 
 syr al Ps-Ign Dial Ath Ps-Ath Caes Cyr-jerus Chr Thdrt Dam" al Tert Orig-int al.— 
 ο υιης om ν (ms, but not am demid tol harl) Ps-Ign (ed) Hipp Caes Cyr-jerus Ps-Ath 
 Tert all : ins besides MSS, Ps-Ign (ms) Orig Chr Thdrt Dam al Iren al. — ra bef πάντα 
 (3rd) om ABDi (θ(ος /; D•) 17 Hipp: ins D'EFGJK illsl nrly Orig (alw) Dial Ath 
 Tit Cses Cyr-jerus Chr Thdrt Dam al. — 29. ίπη om 48. — πυωνσιν FG, πυιησωσιν 93 
 lect 1. — νεκρ. to αυτών om 178. — ti yap ολ. 73. 118. — και om lect 1. — rec (at end) 
 
 it. θη, viz. Christ, not the Father, 
 
 as Beza, Grot., Est., Billr., al. : it is 
 parallel with κατάργηση, and included in 
 the mediatorial acts of Christ, who in His 
 world's course goes forth νικών, και 'ίνα 
 νικίισι^, Rev. vi. 2. It is otherwise with 
 νπίταζίν, ver. 27: see there. 26.] 
 
 Connect Ιοτχατ. Ιχθρός together ; not as 
 Bloomf., " last of all, the enemy Death is to 
 be destroyed," which is ungrammatical. If 
 ίσχ. is to stand alone, ίχΟρός καταργιίται 
 must be " is destroyed as an enemy." — 
 Death is the last enemy, as being the con- 
 sequence of sin : when he is overcome and 
 done away with, the whole end of Redemp- 
 tion is shewn to have been accomplished. 
 Death is personified, as in Rev. xx. 14. 
 καταργ€Ϊται, — pres., either as a prophetic 
 certainty as παραΐώοΐ above, — or as an 
 axiomatic truth. 27.] Scriptural 
 
 proof of the above declaration. 
 ντΓΕτοξ. viz., from the Psalm, — God, the 
 Father.— See on the Psalm itself, Heb. ii. 
 8 ff. notes. '^'''''Πι scil. ό θαΊς, the 
 
 same subject as νπίταζεν. Meyer alone, 
 as it seems to me, gives the right construc- 
 tion of oTuv . . ■ ΰποτίτιικται. '' The 
 aor. ήπγ must be rendered regularly, not 
 in the present sense, but as a futurum 
 exactum .• see Luke vi. 26 : Plat. Parm. 
 p. 143, C {τί δ' 'όταν ήπω ουσία re και 
 
 Ρ 
 
 εν, αρα ουκ άμφυτ'ιρω ;), — Ion, ρ. 535, β 
 (oral' ει) {ϊπρς επη και ίκπλήζι/ς μά- 
 λιστα τονς θεωμίνονς). The time referred 
 to, is that when the as yet unfulfilled πάντα 
 νπίτηζεν shall be fultilled and completed: 
 hence it is no longer the aor., but the 
 perf. ΰποτ'ετακται. The meaning then is: 
 ' when God, who in Ps. viii. 7 has an- 
 nounced the ΰπόταξις, shall hereafter have 
 declared that this ύπόταξις is come to pass.' 
 . . . — Thisyb?•?» of expression was suggested 
 to the Apostle by his having already ex- 
 pressed himself in the words of a saying of 
 God." I render then, ' But when God 
 shall have declared that all things have 
 been subjected to Him, it is evident that 
 they have been subjected (ellipsis of the 
 predicate of the foregoing sentence after 
 δηλον 'ότι and οίδ' on is common ; so Plat. 
 Gorg. p. 475, C, ' οϋκηϋν κακψ ΰπερβάΧ- 
 Χον το άδικείν κάκιον αν ε'ίη τυν άοικεϊ- 
 σθαι,' — ' δϊ)λον δι) 'ότι,' — scil. κάκιοί' αν 
 fi//. Kuhner, § 852, d) with the excep- 
 tion of Him who subjected all things to 
 Him.' 28.] On the sense, see above. 
 
 " The interpretations, that subjection is 
 only an hyperbolical expr. for the entire 
 harmony of Christ with the Father (Chrys., 
 Theophyl., Oec.) : — the limitation of it to 
 His human nature (Theodoret., Aug., 
 Jerome, Est., \\^olf, al.), with the declara.
 
 580 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 XV. 
 
 iTer.4. vtKOOi ovK ' kye'tpovTai, "^ τι "" και βaπτΊtovτaι υπ(ο abde 
 
 inRom.Tiii.24. ^ϊ__ ο«,'Λ,„ ^ , ο" ο" FGJK 
 
 "rdif"^'^** "υτών ; τι και Ίΐμίΐς " κινουηνομίν ττασαν ωραν ; 
 
 ο here only. ^\ ο Γ\' ' ' '/Ι' ti^^r' ' S' 
 
 Ex.id.xviu. ^^ '^ κασ ritifpav αττουνησκω, ' νη Τ7)ν υμετεραν καυνη- 
 
 22, 2t). Levit '^ '> ' ' '^ 
 
 xvi.2. ρ Acts ϋ. 4Γ) al. Num. iv. Ifi. q liere only. Gen. xlii. l.'i, 16. r =• Rom. xi. 31. φαβγ 
 
 τω υμίτίρω., Thncj d. i. 33. s Rom. xv. 17. 
 
 v-Kip των vtKQitiV {as Mey, a mechanical repetition of the above, as we have in i)3 υπιρ 
 αντων above), with J &c"Syr al Chr Tlidrt Oec Thl Jacob-nisib : txt ABD'EFGK 5. 10. 
 17. 23. 31-2. 46-7-1). 5?. 68. 71-3-4. 80. 117 lect 1 it ν copt basm syr arm goth Orig 
 Dial Eph Epiph al gr and lat: υττ. αντων των νικξίων {combination) 37• 43. 52 al. — 
 30. κότα πασ. ωρ. G'J. 120. — 31. αποθνήσκων 71• 109 lect 1: -σκοντις 3!). 72". 93. 
 11G Slav Dial•— for νη, η 3-. 71• 109-114 lect 1 : Sia 1-marg 72^ : propter harl v-sixt : 
 pro gloria vestra Ambrst Sedul.— jj/itrfpav A 2^. 4. 44•. 51-6. 72'. 89. 120-2 lect 14 al 
 
 tive explanation, that it will then become 
 plain to all, that Christ even in regard of 
 His kingship, is, on the side of His 
 Humanity, dependent on the Father 
 (Flatt.) — and the addition, that Christ will 
 then in this divine nature reign ivith the 
 Father (Calv. : — ' regnum — ab humanitate 
 sua ad gloriosam divinitatem quodauimodo 
 traducet'); — the interp. (of αντΌς ύ νώς\) 
 as referring to Christ's mystical Body, i. e. 
 the Church (Theodoret), — are idle subter- 
 fuges (Iccve 7iuefiucl)te)." DeWette.— The 
 refutation of these and all other attempts 
 to explain away the doctrine here plainly 
 asserted, of the ultimate subordination of 
 the Son, is contained in the three precise and 
 unambiguous words, avTOS vlos• 
 ϊνα η ό θ. τ. ΊΓαντα Ι ν ιτάσιν] ' that God 
 (alone) may he all things in all,' — i. e. 
 recognized as sole Lord and King : ' omnia 
 erunt subordinata Filio, Filius Patri.' Ben- 
 gel. Numerous exx. of τα πάντα in this 
 sense (more commonly πάντα, Kiihner, 
 § 422), may be found in Wetst. 
 29—34.] Arguments for the reality 
 OF THE RESURRECTION, yrom the practice 
 (1) of those ivho were baptized for the 
 dead, (2) of the App., Sfc, who submitted 
 to daily peril of death. 29.] eirei 
 
 resumes the main argument, which has been 
 interrupted by the expl. since ver. 23 of 
 'έκαστος iv τ. ί^ιψ τάγματι. After it is an 
 ellipsis of ' if it be as the adversaries sup- 
 pose.' τί ΤΓΟιήσουσιν] There is in 
 these words a tacit reprehension of the 
 practice about to be mentioned, which it is 
 hardly possible altogether to miss. Both 
 by the third person, and by the art. before 
 βαπτ., he indirectly separates himself and 
 those to whom he is writing from participa- 
 tion in or approval of the practice : — tlie 
 meaning being, ' what will become of — 
 ' what account can they give of their prac- 
 tice ?' oi βατΓτιζόμ,ενοι] ' those who 
 are in the habit of being baptized'— not 
 o'l βαπτιοθίντίς. The distinction is import- 
 ant as affecting the interp. See below. 
 vnrep των νεκρών] ' on behalf of the dead;' 
 
 viz. the same νεκροί who are spoken of in 
 the next clause and throughout the chapter 
 as the subjects of άνάστασις — not vtKpoi in 
 any figurative sense, των ν(κρ., the art. 
 marking the particular dead persons on 
 behalf of whom the act took place. Before 
 we pass to the exegesis, it will be well to go 
 through the next question — fi όλως, κ.τ.λ. 
 ' If dead men are not raised at all, why 
 do they trouble themselves {τί και as in 
 reff.) to be baptized for them?' — Thus 
 much being said as to the plain meaning of 
 the words used, there can be no doubt as to 
 their interpretation. The 07ily legitimate 
 reference is, to a practice, not otherwi.se 
 known to us, not mentioned here with any 
 approval by the App., not generally pre- 
 valent (oi βαπτ.), but in use by some, of 
 survivors alloiving themselves to be bap- 
 tized on behalf of {be\\e\mg?)frie7ids who 
 had died without baptism. "With the sub- 
 sequent similar practices of the Cerinthians 
 (Epiph. Haer. xxviii. § 7) and Marcionites 
 (Chrys., TertuU. de resurr. 48, adv. Marc. v. 
 10)this mayor maynot have been connected. 
 All we clearly see from the text, is that it 
 unquestionably did exist. — "With regard to 
 the other interpretations, Bengel well says, 
 " Tantaest interpretationum varietas, ut is, 
 qui non dicam varietates ipsas, sed varieta- 
 tum catalogos coUigere velit, dissertationem 
 scripturus sit." I will give a few of them, 
 mostly in the words of their authors : 
 Chrys. : — ΰπίρ των νεκρών, τουτβστι των 
 σωμάτων, και γάρ ϊπϊ τοϋτψ βαπτϊζ•^, 
 Ty του νεκρού σώματος άναστάσίΐ, πισ- 
 τίΰων ΟΤΙ ονκίτι μ'ίνιι ι>εκρόι• . . . και σν μεν 
 Sta τώΐ' ρημάτων λέγεις ΐ'εκρών άνάστα- 
 σιν 6 St Ίερίύς, ως περ iv ει'κόνι τινι .... 
 δείκννσί σοι .... διά του 'ύδατος' το γάρ 
 βαπτ'ιζεσθαι κ. καταδύισθαι, είτα άνα- 
 νείκιν, της εις q.oov καταβάσεως εστί 
 σνμβοΧον κ. της ίκ(ίθ{ν ανόδου, διό κ. 
 τάφον το βάπτισμα ο Π. κα\ει (Rom. vi. 
 4). — Theophyl. : ψηπΊν ουί', 'ότι υ\ πιστείι- 
 σαντες 'ότι ϊσται άνάστασις νεκρών σω- 
 μάτων, και βαπτισθίντες επΙ τοιανταις 
 ίλπίσι, τί τΓοιήσονσιν άπατηθίντες ; τί
 
 so— S3. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους a. 
 
 581 
 
 σιν, ην £)^ω εΐ' γ^ί)ΐστω Ιι/σου τω κνξίΐω ημών. ίΐ κατά but 
 αΐ'Θρωπυν ίΟηοιομά-^ησα ev Εψεσω, τί μοι το " ό^ίλος ; 
 εί νεκροί ουκ iyeipovTai, φα-γωμίν και πιωμεν ανβΐοι> 
 
 Iier 
 
 yap ατΓΟϋνησκομίν. ^^ 
 
 IsA.xxii. 13. 
 
 μη 
 
 πλανασθί. " ψθίΐρουσιν ^ ηθη 
 
 W ch. vi. !) reff. 
 
 aiidch. iii. 3 
 reft-. 
 
 litre only +. 
 James ii.) 4, 
 IH only. Job 
 3. 
 
 V adv., Matt. 
 Ti. 3ii al. 
 ch.iii. 17al. Jude 10. y here only. 
 
 Orig Thdrt (text h l).-aft καύχηση^, ins αδβλφηι ABK I?. 2G. 31-7-9. 45-6. 71-3. 80. 
 93. 117 al V syrr ar-erp copt basni aeth arm (but many add μοι>) Dial Aug Pel Bed (not 
 Orig Chr Tlidrt Dam all Ambrst). — ιησ. τω κν. ημ. om D'E (also d e Ambrst, but read 
 Ki'ptio for χριστώ) τω κυρ. ί/μ. om Orig Ciir Aug, : ημών om Dam ; all alit. — 32. το om 
 DFG. — ?>jy. to φθίΐρ. om 48.-33. φθ. yap 93. — rec χρησθ' {to stui the metre) : txt 
 
 δί ο\ως και βαπτίζονται άνθρωποι νπερ 
 αναστάσεως, τυντίστιν ϊπι προςοοκ/^ 
 άναστάσιως, ti ν. οίικ Ιγ. ; and so in 
 the main, Pelag., Oecum., Phot., Corn. 
 a Lap., Wetst. — Theodoret : — ύ βαπ- 
 τιζόμίνόν, φησι, τψ δίσπότι^ συνθά- 
 ΐΓτετιιι, ινα τοϋ θαΐ'άτου κοινωνησας και 
 της αναστάσεως -γένηται κοινωνός• ti δε 
 νεκρόν ίστι το σώμα, και οϋκ άνίσταται, 
 τί δήποτε και βαπτίζίται ; and so Castal., 
 al. — All these senses would require τί 
 ποιήσετε βαπτισθέντις, to say nothing of 
 the iinpossibihty of thus understanding 
 νπερ των νεκρών. Estius e.xplains ΰπερ 
 των νεκρ. as 1:3 ' jamjani niorituri,' and 
 Calvin justifies this, ' baptizari pro mortuis 
 erit sic baptizari id mortuis non vivis pro- 
 sit.' So too Epiph. (1. c), — of catechu- 
 mens who προ της τελευτής λουτρού 
 καταζιυΰνται : — and Bengel : — " baptizan- 
 tur super mortuis ii, qui mox post bap- 
 tismum ad mortuos aggregabuntur." But 
 against this νπερ τών νεκρών is decisive, — as 
 is iirip against ' over the dead,' i. e. over 
 their sepulchres (Luth., al.) : this local 
 sense of νπέρ not being found in the N. T. 
 Le Clerc, Hammond, Olsh., al., expl. υπ. 
 τ. νεκρ., ' to fill the place of the dead.' 
 But as Meyer observes, such an idea can 
 hardly be gathered from the words, but 
 would want explaining in the context ; — 
 and besides, the question would thus be 
 irrelevant, because, the place of the dead 
 heing supplied by their successors, it would 
 be no matter to them,, whether the dead 
 iheinselves rose or not : whereas now, the 
 benefits of baptism being supposed to be 
 conveyed to the dead by the baptism of his 
 substitute, the ])roceediny tvould be stulti- 
 fied, if the dead could never rise to claim 
 those benefits. — This, the only justifiable 
 rendering, is adopted by Ambrose, and by 
 Anselm, Erasmus, Grotius, al., and re- 
 cently by Billroth, Riickert, Meyer, De 
 Wette, al. The ordinary objection to it is, 
 that thus the Ap. would be giving his sanc- 
 tion to a superstitious usage, or at all events 
 mentioning it without reprobation. But 
 this is easily answered, by remembering 
 
 that if the above view of τί ποιήσονσιν is 
 correct, he does not mention it without a 
 slur on it ; — and more completely still, as 
 Riickert (in Meyer), " usurpari ab eo mo- 
 rem, qui ceteroqui displiceret, ad errorem, 
 in quo impugnando versabatur radicitus 
 evellendum ; ipsius autem reprehendendi 
 aliud tempus expectari." See a multitude 
 of other interpp. in Pool's Synopsis and in 
 Stanley's note. His concluding remarks 
 are worth quoting : " On the whole there- 
 fore, this explanation of the passage {that 
 given above) may be safely accepted, (1) as 
 exhibiting a curious relic of primitive super- 
 stition, which, after having, as the words 
 imply (?), prevailed generally in the apos- 
 toUcal church, gradually dwindled away till 
 it was only to be found in some obscure 
 sects, where it lost its original significance : 
 (2) as containing an exam))Ie of the Ap.'s 
 mode of dealing with a practice, with which 
 he could have no real sympathy ; not con- 
 demning or ridiculing it, but appealing 
 to it as an expression, however distorted, 
 of their better feelings." 30.] Not 
 
 only the practice of those just spoken 
 of, but his oini, and that of those like 
 him, who lived a life of p)eipetual expo- 
 sure to death, were absurd, if there be no 
 resurrection. Obs. that the argument here 
 applies equally to the future existence of 
 the soul ; and so Cicero uses it, Tusc. Quaest. 
 i. 15 : " Nescio quomodo inhseret in men- 
 tibus quasi seculorum quoddam augurium 
 futurorum . . . quo quidem demto, quis tam 
 esset amens, qui semper in laboiibus et 
 periculis viveret.'" 31.] To 'die 
 
 daily ' is a strong expression for to be daily 
 in sight of death and exjiecting it. See 
 2 Cor. iv. 11. — This he strengthens by an 
 asseveration, grounded on his boast of them 
 as liis work in Christ : not that this is im- 
 mediately or proximately at stake in the 
 matter, but much as we should say, "As I 
 love you, it is true." He would not tliink 
 of deceiving those of whom he boasted be- 
 fore God in connexion with Christ. 
 ύμίτ.] gen. obj., see reft', νή, the affirma- 
 tive, as μά is the negative jiartide of adju-
 
 582 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 χ γ. 
 
 ζ — here only. 
 
 a here only t. 
 
 £x(>d. sxi. 
 
 -χρηστά. ^ όμιλ'ιαι κακα'ι. ' ίκνηφατε ^ δικαίως, και μ-η abde 
 
 αμαξ)τανίτ£' α-γνωσιαν yap 
 
 here only. g ' * ' " Λ λ ~ 
 
 Gen.ix.24. iVTOOTTlW Villi' Λαλώ. 
 
 1 King.s xxT. > 
 
 37. met., a.< here, Joel i. 5. SeeSTim. ii. 2fi. 
 
 xxiii. 41 only. Dent. i. 10.) d 1 Pet. ii. l(i 
 
 xsxiT. 26. TTpof = ch. TU. 35. χίτ. 12al. 
 
 εου Tiveq εγονσιν. προς 
 
 c = here only. (1 Thess. ii. 10. Tit. ii. 12. 1 Pet. ii. 23. Luke 
 
 only. Job XXXV. 16. WisD.xiii. 1. 
 
 e ch. vi. 5 only. Pa. 
 
 ABDEFGJK mss nrly Clem Ath Chr Thdrt Dam Oec Thl.— 34. for δικαίως, jnsii d e 
 v-ed flor Pelag Aug : justi estate Ambrst. — rec λ£γω {negliqence, the force of ληλω not 
 being perceived), with AFGJK &c Chr Thdrt al : t.xt BDE 1?. 37- 46. 93. 109-13 (rec 
 
 ration : but ΐ'ηί μά is often found in an 
 affirmative sense : see Kiihner, § 701. 
 32.] The stress of the first clause is on 
 κατά ανθρωιτον, and its meaning, ' merely 
 as man,' i. e. ' according to this world's 
 views,' ' as one who has no hope beyond the 
 grave ;' seeref. \iiMis only he fought, &c., 
 where was his profit (seeing he despised all 
 those things which κατά άνθρωπον might 
 compensate for such a fight, — fame, praise, 
 &c.). — The renderings, Βσον το ΰς άνθρώ- 
 ■πους (Chrys.), i. e. ' so far as one can be 
 said θηριημηχύΐ' against men,' — and κατά 
 άΐ'θρώποιν^ογισμον θηρίων ΐγίνόμην βηρά 
 (Theodoret), — ' exempli causa ' (Semler, 
 Rosenmiiller), — 'tit hominnm more loquar' 
 (Estius and Bloomf.), are all constrained, and 
 scarcely to be extorted from the words. 
 Ιθηριομάχησα] ' I fought with 
 beasts ' (aor. referring to one special occa- 
 sion). How ? and when } Most ancient 
 and modern Comm. take the expr. figura- 
 tively, as used in Appian, B. C. ii. p. 763 
 (Wetst.), where Pompey says, ο'Ίοις θηρίοις 
 μαχήμίθα, — and Ignat. ad Rom. 5, init., 
 άπύ Έ,νρίας μέχρι 'Γι'ομιις θηηιομαχώ ίιά 
 γης κ. θαλάσσης, 8(ί(μί}'ος δϊκα λίοπάρ- 
 δοις, ο ίστι στρατιωτικόν τάγμα. So, of 
 our text, Tertull. de Resurr. 48 : " Depug- 
 navit ad bestias Ephesi, illas scilicet bestias 
 Asiaticse pressurae." — And this expl. must 
 be right : for his Roman citizenship would 
 have precludedhis everbeing literally throvra 
 to beasts : and even supposing him to have 
 waived it, and been miraculously rescued, 
 as Ambrst., Theodoret, Erasm., Luther, 
 Calv., al., suppose, is it conceivable that 
 such an event should have been altogether 
 unrecorded in the Acts ? — Adopting the 
 figurative rendering, — we cannot fix on any 
 recorded conflict which will suit the words. 
 His danger from Demetrius and his fellow- 
 craftsmen (Acts xix.) had not yet happened 
 (see Prolegg.) : but we cannot tell what 
 opposition, justifying this expression, the 
 άντικίίμινοι ττολλοι of ch. xvi. 9, may ere 
 this have made to his preaching. tl 
 
 veKp.] ' If dead men rise not,' i. e. ' if 
 7ione of the dead rise.' These words are 
 best joined with the following, as Chrys., 
 Theophyl., Beza, Bengel, Griesb., Meyer, 
 
 De Wette, al., — not with the preceding, as 
 Theodoret, Grot., Est., Luther, al. For 
 κατά άνθρωτΓον already expresses their 
 meaning in the preceding sentence ; and 
 the form of ver. 29 seems to justify this 
 arrangement, besides that otherwise φάγ. 
 κ. ττίωμιν, &c., would stand awkwardly in- 
 sulated. Φ*7• •*• "ΐτίωμίν . . .] In Isa. 
 the words represent the recklessness of those 
 who utterly disregard the call of God to 
 weeping and mourning, and feast while their 
 time lasts. "Wetst. has collected very nu- 
 merous parallels from the classics. The 
 most striking perhaps is Herod, ii. 78• 
 33.] The tendency of the denial of the re- 
 surrection, represented by the Epicurean 
 maxim just quoted, leads him to hint, that 
 this denial was not altogether unconnected 
 with a practice of too much intimacy with 
 the profligate society around them. 
 μη ττλαν., as in ref., introduces a warning 
 against moral self-deception. ψθείρ. 
 ήθη . .] These words (according to the read- 
 ing χρί/ίτθ', which is not, however, well sup- 
 ported) form an Iambic trimeter, and occur 
 in this form in a fragment of the Thais of 
 Menander; but Clem. Alex. Strom, i. 14. 
 59, says, ττρός γονν Κορινθίους• . . . Ίαμβύψ 
 συγκίχρηται τραγικω— but this may be a 
 mere inaccuracy. Socrates, Hist. Eccl. iii. 
 16, quotes it as a sufficient proof that Paul 
 was conversant with the tragedies of Euri- 
 pides. "Perhaps," says Dr. Burton, "Me- 
 nander took it from Euripides." The Ap. 
 mag have cited it merely as a common-place 
 current, without any idea whence it came ; 
 — and χρηστά seems to shew this. The 
 plur. ΰμιλίαι points out the repetition of 
 the practice. Meyer quotes Plat. Rep. viii. 
 p. 550, ίιά TO μη κακοϋ avSpbg tivai την 
 φύσιν, ΰμιλίαις ίί rale των άλλων κακαΐς 
 κεχρησθαι. 34. έκνήψ.] 'Awake Out 
 of (your moral) intoxication, already pos- 
 sessing you by the influence of these men.' 
 δικαίως] either, 'as is just,' 'as 
 you ought ' (Wahl., al.), — or, ' in a proper 
 manner' (Olsh., al.), — or, ϊττί συμψί^ρονη 
 Koi χρησίμψ (Chrys., al.), or, so as to be 
 δίκαιοι, as Ε.λ^, 'Awake to righteous- 
 ness.' The last meaning is well defended 
 by Dr. Peile by Time. i. 21 : άπίστως ΐπ'ι
 
 34—38. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους λ. 
 
 583 
 
 Lake xi. 40. 
 , ,- xii.aoal. 
 
 "^Ο" gR.ra iv. 17 
 5 \ reft. 
 
 OV TO h = John xii. 
 
 ' Αλλ epti τις Πως kyi'ipovTai οι νίκοοί ; ποιώ δε 
 
 ' '' . 36 f " J " <^ ' * ' c y 
 
 σώματι εο\^ονται , αφοων, συ ο σπίΐοεις, ου ζ 
 
 ποιείται, tav μη αττυθάν}/" ^' fcat ο σπείμίΐς, 
 
 σώμα το -γζνησόμίνον σπείρεις, άλλο ' -γυμνον ** /co/cfcov, tToh^LT'li 
 
 ει τυγοι, σίτου η τίΐ'ος τωι/ λοιττωΐ'* ο δε θεός ΒΊ^ωσιν iJh.kiv.w 
 
 ' - - ην 'Λ/Λ ' . / - / only(reff.). 
 
 αυτω σώμα καυως ηυελησεί', και εκαστω των σπερμάτων "jf'iv '^'• 
 
 in marg) 16 (al?) Dial. — 35. aWa Β Orig. — 36. rec αφρον (corm to the voc), with JK &c 
 ff: txt ABDEFG 47. 73.93. 109 lect Ι,—ζωογονηται A 89. 108i Epiph Chr, and Thdrti 
 (not h 1). — αποθανη πρώτον or ττοωτ. αποθ. DEFG it ν Dial Iren all. — 37. αυτό το 
 σώμα arm. — σττίφπς cm 238. — τίνος om lect 1 (but ins in marg). — aft λοιττ. add 
 σττίρματων Syr copt arm sj'r* Nyss Chr. — 38. rec αυτω (αυτό lect 1 : αυτών 109) 
 ζιξωσ,ν, with DEFGJK &c it Chr'Thdrt al Ambrst al : txt AB 80 ν syrr (copt).— rec 
 
 TO μνθώδις ίκνίνικΐ]κότα, — ' so as to be- 
 come incredible ;' — and seems to be the 
 best.— The aor. iraper. tKviixpart marks the 
 quick momentary awaking ; the pres. im- 
 per. /a) αμαμτάΐίτί, on the other hand, the 
 enduring practice of abstinence from sin 
 (Meyer). But that this must not always be 
 rigidly pressed, see Kiihner, §445.2. Anm. 1. 
 άγνωσίαν] The stress is on this word : 
 ' for some (the τινίςοί ver. 12, most proba- 
 bly, are hinted at, and the source of tlieir 
 error pointed out) have (are affected with) 
 ignorance (an absence of all true knowledge) 
 of God.' See ref. to Wisd. irpos €vt. νιμ. 
 
 λ., shews that these τινίς were iv νμΐν, — 
 not the heathen without : — the existence of 
 such in the Cor. church was a disgrace to 
 the whole. λαλώ] 'lam speaking;' not 
 merely Ί say this;' it refers to tlie spirit 
 of the whole j)assage. 35 —50.] The 
 
 argument passes from the fact of the resur- 
 rection, already substantiated, to the man- 
 ner of it : ivhich is indicated, and confirmed, 
 principally by analoyiesfrom nature. 
 35.] Tlie new difficulty is introduced in the 
 form of a question from an objector. This 
 is put first generally, ττώς . . . ., 'In what 
 manner,' — and nest specifically, iroiiij ck 
 (of, 'what I mean, is ' . . .) σώματι, ' With 
 what kind of body'— ίρχ., ' do they (pres. 
 as transferring the action to that time,— as 
 iytipovrai before : so Meyer and De W. : 
 — or rather perhaps, an assuming for the 
 moment the truth of the resurrection as a 
 thing actually hajjpening in the course of 
 things) come (forth at that time) V 
 36^^1.] Analogies illustrative of the ques- 
 tion just asked .• and first, that of seed sown 
 in the earth (3G— 38). 36.] Meyer 
 
 would point this, άφρων σύ, ο σπίίοίΐς . . ., 
 because according to the common punctua- 
 tion there is necessarily an emphasis on σύ, 
 which the context does not allow. But on 
 the other hand, it seems to me, there is an 
 objection to the introduction of a new 
 jnatter so lamely as by δ σπύι,ίΐς. Besides 
 
 which, the emphatic σύ does not necessarily 
 require any other agency to be emphatically 
 set against it, but may imply an appeal to 
 the objector's own experience (as Billr. in 
 Dr. Peile) : — ' thou say this, who art con- 
 tinually witness of the process, &c. .•" And 
 let it be remembered that we have another 
 σττίΐρίΐν below, vv. 42 — 44, which may be 
 set against thy solving. I retain therefore 
 the stop at άφρων (nom. for voc. as freq. 
 See Luke xii. 20. ilark is. 25. Luke viii. 
 54, al., and Winer, § 29. 1), and the em- 
 phasis on σύ. — The similitude was used by 
 our Lord of His own Resurrection, John 
 xii. 21. οϋ ζωοποιεϊται] Its life is 
 
 latent in it ; but is not developed into quick 
 and lively action without the death of the 
 deposited seed, — i. e. its perishing, disap- 
 pearing from nature. The same analogy 
 was used by the Rabbis, but to prove that 
 the dead would rise clothed : ' ut tri- 
 ticura nudum sepelitur et multis vestibus 
 ornatum prodit, ita multo magis justi,' &c. 
 37.] Before, the death of the seed 
 was insisted on : now, the non-identity of 
 the seed with the Juture plant. There is a 
 mixture of constr., the words b cndpug 
 being pendent, as the sentence now stands. 
 The two constrr. as De W. observes are, d 
 Ti σπιίρεις, ov το σ. τϋ ytr. σττίίηας, — 
 and ο στΓίίρίΐς, ov το σ. το yiv. ίστιν. — He 
 names the plant το σώμα το γίνησόμενον, 
 having already in his eye the ajiplication to 
 the Resurrection. ei τυ'χοι] ' if it 
 
 should so happen,' — ' peradventure :' not, 
 'for example.' See on ch. xiv. 10. τών 
 
 λοιιτών, scil. σπίομάτων. 38.] ήθε- 
 
 λησεν, willed, viz. at the creation : the aor. 
 setting forth the one act of the divine Will 
 giving to the particular seed the particular 
 development at first, which the species re- 
 tains : whereas BtXn would imply a fresh 
 act of the divine Will giving to every indi- 
 vidual seed (not ίκάστψ τών σπίρμάτων, 
 but (κάστψ σττίρμαη, or rather ίκάστψ 
 κόκκψ), his own body. But the ivhole gift
 
 58Ji 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους a. 
 
 XV. 
 
 , L.ikcx.34. ιοιυν σώμα. ου πάσα σάρα, η αυτή σαρί:, άλλα άλλη abde 
 
 Actsxxiii. , ' Λ ' "Λ \ <Λ\ ν i^ η - "\Λ <>ν ^ ^ FGJK 
 
 xl'iii ΐ3οηΐ 1^''^^ ανυρωττων, άλλη ce aapt, κτηνών, άλλη be σαρ!:, 
 
 Num. XX. 4, 
 8, 11. 
 
 ο here only t. 
 Xen. Cjr. i. 
 
 " πτηνών, αΧΧη δε ιχθύων. "* και σώματα '' επουράνια, 
 και σώματα '^ emyiia' αΧΧα ^ ετβρα μεν η των ^ ίπουρα- C μβν 
 Phii.ii.ioai. '''w•^ οοίι,α, ίτίρα οε η των ' εττιγειων. αλλλ] abcd 
 
 2 Cor. τ 1. οοςα ϊ/λίου, και άλλη οοί,α σελήνης, και άλλη οοζ,α jk 
 
 iii. 1U. James iii. 1ft only t. r — hereouly. See Luke ix. 29. s = Acts xxii. 11 retf. 
 
 bef i^iov ins ro {corrn from ίδιον σωμ. to the more usual το ιδ.), with JK most mss Orig 
 Chr Tlidrt Dam Thl Oec: txt ABDEFG 17. 31. 42. 672. 80. 2'Λ8 Epiph.— 39. σαρξ 
 (2nd) om FG al g Chr (Mtt's mss).— rec aft άλλα (om D' aeth Dial Chr : αλλ G : γαρ 
 Syr) (ΐ\\η μ(\ι, ins σαρξ, with appy a few mss : txt ABDEFGJK (CO and more, Tisch) it 
 V copt syr fetli gr-lat-ff. — αι^^ρωττου D^ (E.') d e 8yr Dial Tert. — σαρξ bef κτην. om 
 D'(E.')FG C:i. 80. 93 lectt 8. 12 it ν Syr Chr Tert al. — τωι• κτ. 48.— κΓ/,νους D'(E.')FG 
 d e Syr Tert al : τττιινων Dam h 1: then (crj/v., and lastly i;^W.— rec i\U. and τττην., 
 with FGJK &c syr al Thdrt Oec: t.xt ABDE I7. 40. 71-3. 80 d e ν copt Syr ar-erp aeth 
 arm Orig Chr (Dam) Thl Tert all (alii aliter). — rec bef πτην. om σαρξ, with AJK &c 
 syrr gr-lat-ff: ins BDEFG 179 al it am demid harl tol copt al (Dam) Thl Tert 
 Ambrst al. — 40. σωμ. (2nd) om FG g Tert al. — ίττουρ. and «ττίγ. transpos lect 12. — rec 
 αλλ, with FGJ(EK.') &c: txt ABD' &c.— 41, η\., α\\η Ss FG lect 7 g : και om ν (ed) 
 
 to the species being God's, to continue or 
 withhold, the pres. δίδωσιν still holds good. 
 εκάστ. των σιτερμ..] ' to each of 
 the (kinds of) seeds;' see above: τ-ώί' is 
 generic. ΐδιον σώμα] ' a body of its 
 
 own.' — Such then being the case with all 
 seeds, why should it be thought necessary 
 that the same body should rise as ivas soivn, 
 or tliat God cannot give to each a resur- 
 rection-body, as in nature ? 39 — 41.] 
 And the more, — because we have ex.x. from 
 analogy of various kinds of bodies ; viz. (1) 
 in the flesh of animals (ver. 39) : (2) in 
 celestial and terrestrial bodies (ver. 40) : 
 (3) ia the various characters of light given 
 by the sun, moon, and stars. fttpS] 
 animal organism (De W.). Stanley's ren- 
 dering of οΰ πάσα σαρξ, »'/ αύτη σαρξ, 
 ' no flesh is the same flesh,' is contrary 
 to the usage of the passages which he 
 alleges to defend it, where the negative is 
 always attached to the verb ; οΰ δικαιω- 
 OijfftTai πάσα σαρξ, Rom. iii. 20. Gal. ii. 
 10. See Matt. xxiv. 22 1|. Acts x. 14 ; 
 xi. 8. 1 Cor. i. 29. 1 John iii. 15. Rev. vU. 
 16 ; ix. 4. On the other hand, where the 
 negative is attached to πας, as here, the 
 sentence is a particular negative, not an 
 universal: e.g. Rom. x. 10, άλλ' ού ττάιτίς 
 νπήκουσαν : ix. Ο, 7• Heb. iii. 10. Matt, 
 vii. 21, οΰ πας b Xkywv μοι κνριι κνρΐί ίίς- 
 ελίύσιται ιΐς την βασιλεϊαν των ουρα- 
 νών, — where Stanley's rendering would 
 involve portentous consequences indeed. I 
 observe that Conyb. also, though disap- 
 proving on the ground of the sense, adds, 
 " the words of the Greek text no doubt 
 admit of such a rendering." κτηνών] 
 properly {κτίιινος, κτάομαι) animals pos- 
 sessed by man : but used in a wider sense 
 
 for quadrupeds in general. 40.] σώ- 
 
 ματα έίΓουράνια] not, according to our 
 modern expression, heavenly bodies, — for 
 they are introduced first ver. 41, and if we 
 apply these words to them, we must sup- 
 pose the Ap. to have imagined the stars to 
 be endowed with bodies in the literal sense : 
 for he is here comparing not figurative ex- 
 pressions, but physical reahties : — nor (as 
 Chrys., al.) the bodies of the righteous, as 
 opposed to those of the wicked, for in these 
 there is no organic difference whatever : 
 but, as Meyer and De Wette, ' the bodies 
 of angels,' — the only heavenly organisms of 
 which we are aware, (except indeed tlie 
 Resurrection-Body of our Lord, and that of 
 those few who have been taken into glory, 
 which, as belonging to the matter in ques- 
 tion, are not alleged) which will bear com- 
 parison with bodies on earth. δόξα 
 belongs to the ίπουράνια more strictly than 
 to the fTTiyfia. In Luke ix. 20, we have 
 tv rj7 ίόξρ avTov, και τον πατρός, και 
 τών αγίων αγγέλων. 41.] This third 
 analogy is suggested perhaps by δόξα just 
 before. There is no allusion whatever here 
 (as some have imagined, — even Chrys., 
 Oecum., Tbeodoret, Calov., Estius, al.) to 
 different degrees of gloriflcation of the 
 bodies of the blessed ; the introduction of 
 such an idea confuses the whole analogical 
 reasoning : which is, that even various 
 fountains of light, so similar in its aspect 
 and properties, differ ; the sun from the 
 moon and the stars : the stars (and much 
 more vividly would this be felt under the 
 pure sky of the East than here) from one 
 another : why not then a body here from a 
 resurrection body, — both bodies, but differ- 
 ent? 42^44 a.] AprLicATioN of
 
 SD— 4t. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους λ, 
 
 58ί 
 
 αστέρων αστΊ]^ yap αστέρος οιαψερίΐ εν cot,y. ^"^ ούτως t = and consir., 
 
 Gal. iv. 1 
 
 και Τ) αναστασ/ς τωΐ' νεκρών. σπειοεται εν 
 ε-γειρεται εν a<pUapaia σττειρεται εν 
 
 ε'γειρεται ^'' έν δόζρ* " σπε'ιρεται εν '^ ασθένεια, 
 iv όυναμει ^^ σιτειρεται σώμα ψυγ^ικον, ε-γειρεται σώμα χ, κ',ψύτίί 
 
 ν ' ' α ver. 12 reff. 
 
 ατιμία, vS.ever.Sti. 
 , , wRom.tiii 21. 
 
 ε-/ε<οεταί ί^^'Τ'-»• 
 
 ί-γειρε 
 
 / » .f - b ι '^ >' 1 - Tim• ί- 
 
 πνευ^ιαπ/νον. ει εστίν σώμα ψυ^^ικυν, εστίν και ττνευ- y Κ'™- ■ s 
 
 yy 1 Tim. iii. 1 β reff. 
 James iii. 15. Jude 19 only t. 
 
 ! = Rom. Ti. 19 reff. (.see note.) 
 cell. ii. 13, 15 reft', —here only. 
 
 a Rum. i. 4 reff. 
 
 am al copt Orig-intj Jer al. — 43. ατιμ. to ασθίν., om {similarity of endings) i)3. — 
 44. rec tori σώμα φυχικον και tan σώμα ττνίνματικον {conjnrmn to the foregoing 
 assertions ; or perhaps ti overlooked from ίστιι> follotving. The 2nd σώμα was a gloss), 
 with JK &c syrr al ChrTlulrt al Jacob-iiisib (σώμα [2nd] in some ms.s mentd below and 
 cojit seth Ruf al) : om altog 1. 2. 14. 40'. l08'-78. 219' (but has it in marg) Chr (Mtt's 
 mss) and appy Orig Iren Tert all : t.xt ABCD'(D3E omg f<)FG (pref καθώς G' but 
 corr G') G. 10. 1?. 31-9. GJ'. 73. 80. 93 it ν copt ath Arm Dam Aug (oft) Bed Ambrst 
 
 THESE ANALOGIES TO THE DOCTRINE OP 
 THE RESURRECTION. 42.] οίίΤως, 
 
 ' thus,' viz. in the entire diversity of that 
 which is raised again from the former body. 
 <Γ7Γίίρ€ται] "Cum posset dicere 
 sepelilur, maluit dicere seritur, ut magis 
 insisteret similitudini supra sumtae de gra- 
 no." Grot. ev φθορά, Iv αφθαρσία] 'in 
 
 a state of corruption,' — ' in a state of in- 
 corruptibility.' 43. if άτιμίςι, Iv δόξη] 
 ' in dishonour ' (r/ yap ίίδίχθίστερον v(- 
 κροϋ διαρμυ(ντος•, Chrys. Cf. Xen. Mem. 
 i. 2. 53, — της φνχης ίξίλθούσης, . ... το 
 σώμα του οίκειοτάτον άνθρώττου τήν τα- 
 χίστηΐ' ίζίνίγκαντίς άψΐϊ'ίζουσιν), — 'in 
 glory;' regarding, as throughout this argu- 
 ment (see on ver. 24), only the resia-rec- 
 tion of the just : see Phil. iii. 21. Iv 
 άσθ£ν£ία] ' in weakness,' — the character- 
 istic of the lifeless body, which is relaxed 
 and powerless. Chrys. understands άσθ. of 
 its inabiliti/ to resist corruption .• De Wette 
 would refer it to the previous state of pain 
 and disease : but it seems better to under- 
 stand it of the powerlessness of the corpse, 
 contrasted with Iv δυν., ' in vigour,' viz. 
 the fresh and eternal energy of the new 
 body free from disease and pain. "That 
 which Grot, adds : ' cum sensibus multis, 
 quos nunc non intelligimus,' is very Hkely 
 in itself true, but is not implied in iv 
 δυνάμει." Meyer. 44 a. αώμ. ψυχ•] 
 ' an animal body,' of which the ψυχ/;, the 
 animal soul, was the acting and informing 
 power. This soul having departed out of 
 it, does not do away with the correctness of 
 the predicate : its whole organism which 
 still remains when it is sown, is arranged to 
 suit this predominance of tlie animal soul. 
 σώμ. ττνίυματικόν] Theophyl., 
 haiing cxj)lained σώρ,. ψυχ., — tv φ ή 
 ψυχ// το κϊιρος και τ))ν ιιγεμοιάαν έχει, — 
 proceeds πνευμαηκΰν ΐί, τι) τήν του αγίου 
 ττνεΰματος καταπλουτοϋν tvkpynar, και 
 
 υπ εκείνου τα πάντα διοικονμενον. εί 
 yap και νϋν iv ήμίν ενεργεί το πνεύμα, 
 άλλ οϋχ όντως, οϋδε άεί. άφίπταται γαρ 
 άμαρτανόντων. και του πνεύματος δε 
 παρόντος, y ψυχν διοικεί το σώμα' τότε 
 δε διηΐ'εκώς παραμενεΐ τοΙς σιίιμασι τών 
 δικαίων το πνιΐψα. But this is not quite 
 enough : — for thus the body might remain 
 as it is, sin only being removed : whereas 
 it shall be no longer a body in which the 
 ψυχ// predominates to the subordination of 
 the higher part, the πνεύμα, but one in 
 which the πνενμα, and that informed fully 
 by the Spirit of God, shall predominate, — 
 its organism being conformed not to an 
 animal, but to a spiritual life : see on ch. 
 vi. 13. — Some understood πνευματικοί', 
 (jEtherial, aery, κουφύτερον και λεπτότερον, 
 και οίυν και iπ' αέρος όχείσθαι (Chrys.), 
 or as Origen, άερώδες κ. αίθέριον (see Theo- 
 phyl.), but the other is certainly right. 
 44 b — 49.] Reassertion and Confirma- 
 tion OF THE EXISTENCE OF THE SPIRITUAL 
 
 BODY. 44 b.] 'If there exists an animal 
 body, there exists also a spiritual body :' 
 i.e. it is no more wonderful a thing, that there 
 should be a body fitted to the capacities and 
 wants of man's highest part, his spirit, than 
 (which we see to be the case) that there 
 should be one fitted to the capacities and 
 wants of his subordinate animal soul. The 
 emphasis is both times on έστιν. 
 45.] Confirmation of this from Scripture. 
 οί5τω5, ' thus,' viz. in accordance 
 with what has been just said. — The citation 
 extends only to the words εγέΐ'ετο ό άνθρ. 
 εις ψυχ. ζώσαν ; πρώτος and 'Αδάμ are 
 supplied, as are also the concluding words, 
 in whicli lies the real confirmation. The 
 words quoted serve therefore rather for the 
 illustration of man being a φυχή, than for 
 a proof of the existence of the spiritual 
 body. ΙγΙνίτο] by his creation, — by 
 
 means of God breathing into him the
 
 586 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 XV. 
 
 a = Mau.n.b. μαηκον. ούτως και -γεγρατΓται Cjyevtro ο πρώτος abcd 
 
 xHi izal ανυρωπος Άοαμ εις ifu^ijv ί,ωσαν, ο ίσ-^ατος Αόαμ JK 
 "^ co'nstr",' Malt. * εις τΓΐ'ευμο ^ωοτΓΟίουΐ'. αλλ ου πρωτοί' το '^ ττνευ- 
 
 χχί. 42 (ΐΓ,>ηι '■'\\>''bi v.f ^c ' 
 
 and'i^^Luke M"'''"^*^''» αΛλο TO ί^υχι /cov, ετΓΕίτα TO ιτνίυματικον. 
 
 xiii I*) al 47 ' "" "fl * "Ε^ν^λ/ 
 
 fver.sft. Rom. Ο πρωτος ανυρωπος εκ γης ^ χοικος, ο οευτερος 
 
 ίν. 1- reft. „ ^ • ίί ■> - 4β ■•■ ' 2 •• ^ - ' 
 
 ghereoiiiyt. ανι/ρωπος ες ουρανού. ^ οίος ο χoι/coς, τοιούτοι και 
 h ver. 4(1 reff. ΟΙ ^ ^oiKOt, Kat οιος Ο ετΓουραΐΊος, τοιούτοι και οι 
 
 h' ' .4<) ^ /l^i'i' ^k'' " 
 
 i Knm. xiii. 4 επουρουιοι /cai κασως ίψορίσαμίν την εικόνα του 
 
 •^ J^™• '^'''• 23 ^ Λ/ οίκου, ^ φορΒσομίν και την εικόνα τον ' επουράνιου. 
 
 and Pel (text) Ruf and Gaud (citing freely) : ιστι (2nd) om 52-6. — 45. for ουΓως και, 
 καθώς FG g al Anibrst : και om 17!J. — οΐ'θρωπος om BK 13. '.V.). G.3. 117 Did Iren Tert 
 al.^fi^o/t (1st) om 31 al lect 12 Aiigj : (2nd) om Iren (ms) : άνθρωπος ietli al : κιψιος 
 Marcion in Tert Dial. — θίοποιουν 28. — 46. άλλα D^ : άλλα τ. ψ. om 48' : ιττ. το ■πν. 
 cm 46'-8'. ΙΟί) Aug. — 47. aft ο ττρωτ. ηνθρ., add α^αμ C. — ανθρ. (2nd) om 71• — rec 
 bef ίξ ονρ. ins ο κιιριος ((/loss), with AD^JK &c syrr goth al Orig, Clir Thdrt Dam Thl 
 Oec Orig-intj Maximin-arian {the insertion is ascribed to Marcion by Tert and in Dial) : 
 om BCD'EFG 17. 67" it ν copt seth arm Origi Hipp (ms) Ath Has' Nyss Naz Isid Cyr 
 Apollinarist and Photin in Epiph Orig-intj Tert Cypr (often) Hil all. — aft ουρανού, add 
 ο ουράνιος FG g ν lat-ff: ο ίπουρ Ath. — 48. aft τοιούτοι ins ούτοι C. — Km om FG. — 
 ουράνιος and ου(*ηΐΊθΐ D'FG. — 49. for φορισομίν, φορίηωμίν (from a desire [as Chrys 
 below] to turn what is really a physical assertioti into an ethical exhortation : see var 
 read and note at Rom v. I) ACDEFGJK by far most mss it ν copt goth slav Thdot Oi'ig 
 (edd) Cses Bas Cyr Mac Meth (pref iva) Chr (expressly : τοϋτ ίσην, άριστα ττράζωμβν. 
 αυμβουλιυτικώς ίίςήγει τον λόγαν) Epiph Ps-Ath Dam Iren Tert (expressly) Cypr Hil 
 Jar all : txt Β 17. 23. 46. 52-5-7. 1 13 all syrr arr seth arm Orig (edd) Thdrt (expressly : το 
 γαρ ψορίσομίν προρρητικώς, ου παραινιτικώς ί'Ιρηκίν) Thl (expressly) Oec (expressly). 
 
 breath of life. els ψ. ζώσ.] becoming 
 
 thereby a σώμα ψυχικ-όΐ'. ό βσχ. 
 
 Αδάμ] This expression was well known 
 among the Jews as indicating the Messiah. 
 The Rabbinical work Neve Shalom ix. 9 
 (Schottgen), says : " Adamus postremus est 
 ^lessias :" see other instances in Schottg. 
 ad loc. €<Γχατος, as being the last 
 
 HEAD of humanity, — to be manifested in 
 the last times : or merely in contrast to the 
 ^rst. els "TTv. ζωοττ.] scil. ί-γίνιτο — 
 
 'became a quickening (life bestowing) 
 spirit.' — When ? This has been variously 
 answered : see De Wette and Meyer. The 
 principal periods selected are his Incarna- 
 tion, his Resurrection, and his Ascension, 
 But it seems to me that the question is not 
 one to be pressed : in the union of the two 
 natures, the second Adam was constituted 
 a life-bestowing Spirit, and is such now in 
 heaven, yet having the resurrection-body. 
 The whole complex of his suffering and 
 triumphant state seems to be embraced in 
 these words. That his resurrection-state 
 alone is not intended, is evident from ί'ζ 
 ουρανού, ver. 47. He was a πνιΐ'μα 
 Zojowoioiv, even while in the σώμα ψΐ'%ι- 
 κόν ; and is still such in the σώμα πνκι- 
 ματικόν. The life implied in ζωοττοιοΰΐ', 
 is the resurrection-life : see John v. 21. 
 
 28. Rom. viii. II. 46.] But in the 
 
 natural order, that which is animal pre- 
 cedes that which is spiritual (το ψνχ., 
 το irv€V(A., not σώιμα, but abstract and 
 general) : as in ver. 45, ό πρώτος — ό 
 ίσχατος. 47.] So exactly in Gen. ii. 
 
 7• God made man χονν λαβών άττό της 
 γϊΊς• Meyer has some excellent remarks 
 here, with which I entirely agree : — " Since 
 the body of Adam is thus characterized as 
 a -φιιχικόν σώμα, as ver. 45, and psychical 
 organism involves mortality (ver. 44), it is 
 clear that Paul treats of Adam not as created 
 exempt from death : in strict accordance 
 with Gen. ii. 7; iu• 19• Nor does this 
 militate against his teaching that death 
 came into the iiwrld ihrovyh sin, Rom. v. 
 12. For had our first parents not sinned, 
 they would have remained in Paradise, and 
 would, by the use of the Tree of Life, 
 which God had not forbidden them (Gen. 
 ii. 16, 17), have become immortal (Gen. iii. 
 22). But they were driven out of Para- 
 dise, ere yet they had tasted of this tree 
 (Gen. iii. 22), and so, according to the 
 record in Genesis also. Death came into 
 the world by sin." See also some strilcing 
 remarks on the ver. in Genesis in Stier, 
 ' Andeutungen fiir glaiibiges Schriftver- 
 standniss,' pp. 202, 3. Ιξ οΰρανοΰ]
 
 45—51. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 587 
 
 τοντο 0£ ψτιμι, αόελψοι, on σαρς και αίμα ρασι- s^^ech. i. ΐ2 
 Λίίαν Θίυυ " κΧηρονομησαι ου δύνανται, ουοε η "" ^θορα ""^^ii^sir^'' 
 την '^ αφθαρσ'ιαν " κΧηρονομει. ιδού ^ μύστη ριον νμιν uch%\%. 
 
 λέγω. πάντες ου ^ κοιμηθησόμίθα, τταντες δε "^αλλαγή- cai. ν.2γ 
 
 21. Gal. vi. 8. ο ver. 42. ρ — Rom. xi. 25. Mntt. xiii. 11. Dan. ii. 18 al. q = ch. vii. 39 reff. 
 
 r Act» VI. 14. Rom. i. 23. Gal iv. 20. Heb. i. 12 only. Ps. cv. 20. 
 
 • — 50. for κληρ. ov δύνανται {βνναται al), ου κΚηρονομησονσιν {corrn from ch 
 vi. 9, Gal V. 21) FG 42 al g copt Mac Chr Tert' al. — for κ\ΐ)ρονομίί, κΧηρονομησιι 
 {corrn as above) C'D'FG it ν copt lat-ff (not Orig-int). — 51. recaft πάντες ins μιν (added 
 on acct of the Ss folic/), with AC^D^EFGJK &c g ν copt al gr-lat-if : cm BCD' 23'. 219i 
 d e syrr seth ar-pol goth (syr goth add enim) Origj Jer (on the testimony of the greek 
 niss : for after stating that the lat niss read omnes quidem resurgemus, he says all the 
 Greek have either onines dormiemiis or non omnes dormiemus) Jacob-nisib. — for ου 
 κοιμ. τναντίς Sf aXXay., — κοιμηθησομίθα, ov παντΐς £t αΧλαγησομίθα C'C'^FG 17 (but 
 FG 17 g prefix ovi') and A (but oi τταντες, the oi being corrd to οϋ or ovv}) and greek 
 ms mentd by Jer Aug Pelag Ruf Oec, also seth arm Cyr-jer (sic legendum, Tisch) Did 
 Pamphil (in W^etst) Max (treats of both this reading and txt) Jer: αναοτησομεθα, ου 
 ■πάντες It αΧλαγησομεθα D' d e ν (resurgemus, but -gimus am) arm-marg lat-mss 
 mentd by Jer Aug Pelag Ruf Gennad, — Jacob-nisib Hil-oft Ambr Aug all : txt Β 
 (ascertained by Dr. Tregelles at Rome: see Kitto's Journal of Sacred Lit, April 1851, 
 p. 465) D'EJK mss nrly (appy) greek mss mentd by Jer Acac Did Pelag Gennad Oec, 
 also syrr copt arr goth Thdot Orig, (and twice more in Jer) Thdor-heracl Diod-tars 
 Apollin (these three in Jer) Dial Pseud-Justin (in the respons ad orlhod) Tit (in Dam) 
 Caes Chr Thdrtj Andr Max (see above) Dam Thl Oec Tert Orig-int, Jer3. (The variation 
 has prob arisen from the apparent difficulty of reconciling -πάντες μεν ου κυιμ. with 
 the fact that St. Paul and his readers had all died. Hence the yiegative particle was 
 
 either, in this glorifed Body, at his 
 coming, — as Meyer : or, in his whole Per- 
 sonality (De W.) as the God-man : this 
 latter seems more probable from John iii. 
 13, where 6 υ'ιός τοϊ: άνθρωπου is desig- 
 nated as ό tK Toi οϋοανον καταβάς. 
 48.] 6 \οϊκό%, Adam ; ol χ., his posterity 
 on earth : 6 εττουρ., Christ : ol eir., His 
 risen people. See, as admirably illustrating 
 this ver., Phil. iii. 20, 21. 49.] For 
 
 the reason of keeping ψορ€'σομ.εν, see var. 
 readd. ' As we (Christians) bore ' in this 
 life ; the time imagined is when this life is 
 past, and the resurrection instant . . . 
 50 — 54.] The necessity of the change 
 OF the animal body into the spi- 
 ritual, IN order to inherit God's 
 KINGDOM. The manner of that change 
 
 prophetically DESCRIBED : AND THE 
 ABOLITION of DeATH IN VICTORY CON- 
 SEGUENT ON IT. 50.] Τοΐτ. δ. φ., 
 
 see reff. It calls attention to something to 
 be observed, and liable to be overlooked. 
 Not only is the change of body possible, 
 and according to natural and spiritual 
 analoigies, — but it is necess.\ry. 
 σαρξ και αΐμα] zz σώμα ψυχικοί', the pre- 
 sent organism of the body, calculated for 
 the wants of the animal soul, τήν θνητήν 
 φύσιν καλεί' άούναταν ci ταΐ'την έτι 
 Θνητήν οναιιν της Ιπουρανίον βασιλείας 
 τνχιΐν. Theodoret. ή ψθορα .... 
 
 τήν άψθαρσίαν, the abstracts, represent- 
 
 ing the impossibility of the φθαρτόν in- 
 heriting the άφθαρτον as one grounded in 
 these qualities. κληρονομεί, pres., 
 
 sets forth the absolute impossibility in 
 the nature of things. 51.] He 
 
 proceeds to reveal to them something of 
 the process of the change at the resurr. 
 day. This he does under the name of a 
 μνστηριον, a hidden doctrine (see refF., 
 esp. the first). ττάντίς οΰ κοιμ.] 
 
 See var. readd. — Meyer maintains that the 
 only rendering of the words which is philo- 
 logically allowable (the ordinary one, re- 
 garding πάντες μεν ου as = οϋ πάντες 
 μ'εν, — we shall not all sleep, being inad- 
 missible, here and in other instances where 
 it has been attempted, see Winer, § 26), is 
 this, 'tve alt (viz. as in 1 Thess. iv. 15, 
 ημείς ol ζώντες oi περιλαπόμενοι εις τήν 
 παρονσίην τοΐ> κνρίον, — in which number 
 the Αρ. firmly believed that he himself 
 should be, see 2 Cor. v. 1 if. and notes) 
 shall not sleep, but shall all be changed.' 
 But we may observe that this would com- 
 mit the Ap. to the extent of believing that 
 not one Christian would die before the 
 παρουσία ;— and that it is besides not 
 necessary, for the emphasis is both times 
 on πάντες — ' [All of m] shall not sleep, 
 but [all of tts] shall be changed :' i. e. 
 ' the sleep of death cannot bo |)rc(licated of 
 [all of us], but the rcsurroctioii-cliange 
 can.' 52] €v άτόμω, ' in a point
 
 588 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους λ. 
 
 XV. 52—58. 
 
 S here only t• 
 t MHtt. xxir. 
 
 31 retl. ell. 
 
 xiv. 8. 
 u Matt. vi. 2. 
 
 Rev. viii. 6 
 
 &C. only. 
 
 Num. X. 3— 8. 
 V Rum. i. 23 
 
 reft". 
 
 σομίυα, εν 
 
 t 'Λ . 
 
 aaATTiyyi 
 
 ατομω, tv 
 σαλτΓίσει 
 
 και οι 
 
 α(, 
 
 U. 28. 
 χ Rom.xiii. 12 
 
 14. Eph. iv 
 
 24. vi. 11. 
 
 2 Cor. V. 3. 
 
 Col.iii. 10. 
 y Horn. vi. 12 
 
 reft'. 
 ζ 1 Tim. vi. 16 
 
 only t. W'isd 
 
 viii. 13 
 
 φυαρ 
 
 TOVTO 
 TOVTO 
 
 pnry οφΘαΧμοΰ, ei> rrj ίσ'χaτ}J abcd 
 
 > « » » Λ' EFG 
 
 νεκ"ροί Β•γίξ)ϋησυι>ται jk 
 
 53 w ^ - Ν V 
 OH yap TO 
 
 yyi' σαΛΤΓίσει γαρ 
 άρτοι, και ημίΐς "^ a\λayησoμίθa. 
 τον τυντο '' εΐ'δύσασθαί ° αφΘαρσιαν και το 
 
 tape 
 
 1νΐ]τον 
 
 αϋανασιαν. 
 
 54 
 
 όταν 
 το 
 
 ίνόυσασθαι 
 
 ^ ίν^υσηται ° αφΟαρσιαν και 
 
 αθανασιαν, τότε ^ yevrjatrai 
 ysyξ)aμμevoς, Κατίποθη ο θάνατος *^ εις 
 
 δε το 
 y 
 
 " φθαρτον 
 
 νητον τούτο 
 
 ο λο- 
 
 νικος. 
 
 iyoQ ο 
 55 Πού 
 
 ιανατί, το κίντρον \ που σου, ΰανατζ^ το %ΊΚος ; 
 
 Η = Lnke ϋ. 15' 
 there.) = 2 dr. (ii. Γ) v. 4. 
 xiij. 14. Actsxxvi. 14. Re\ 
 
 bnt see reff. there (3rd edn.). 
 c Matt. xil. 2u only. 
 . ix. 10 only. 
 
 b Is 1. XXV. 8(Heb., note LXX, but κατ. oci;. 
 2 Kings ii. 20. Job xxxvi. 7. d Hos. 
 
 transferred to ike other clause, to ike detriment of the sense). — 52. ως fv ριιτη C. — for 
 piTTij, ροπ»; D'EFG 67^ Dial gr-mss mentd by Jer (ριπή s. ροπή, ntrumqne enim 
 legilur, et nostri interpretati sunt in ictu s. in moiti). — σαλττ. yap om Tert Ambr 
 Ambrst. — add φηπι 17: σαλττιγζ copt. — for f-yfpS., αναστησονται ADEFG 13. 19 Chrj 
 Dam Thl (marg) : Eyftpocrai al. — 53. τοντο (2nd) om FG. — 54. το φθαρτ. τοντ. ινδ. 
 αφθ. και (i.e. το φθαρτ. to το θνητ.) om C 64. 71 ν copt seth goth Marcion (in Epiph) 
 Ath Iren (who cites from oportet enim, ver 53, to victoria tua, ver 55) Hil Augj Ambrst 
 Fulg Oros Bed. — in A arm, το φθ. to αφθαρσ. is put aft το Θν. τον. tvc. αθανασ. (so also 
 17 {.Ttji' aOa}'.'] and perhaps C). — κ. το θι>. του. tvS. αθαν. om D^ d' (but d• seems to 
 have suppUed it) 1 Orj : αΰανασ. to αθανασ. om FG. — for νικος- (simly oft) νίικος BD' : 
 i)i contenlione Tert Cypr Hil Jer. — 55. νικοζ is bef κιντρ. (corrn to agree witk LXX) 
 in BC 17• 64. 71 ν copt seth arm al Eus Athj Did Nyss Cyr Cyr-jeruSj Bas-seleuc Dam 
 Iren, Tertj Jer Ambr al : t,xt A2(A' om που σου θ. το viic.)DEFGJK most mss it svrr 
 goth al Origi Ath, Cyr jeruSj Chrj (h 1) Thdrt Eucher (Serm xv) Thl Oec Irenj Te'rt, 
 Cypr Hil al {νεικος again BD', and in ver 57 : conteiitio Tert al). — rec for θανατά (•2ηΰ), 
 αΐη {corrn to suit LXX), with A^JK &c vss Orig Athj Eucher all: txt BCDEFGji!). 
 67^ V copt seth arm Eus Athj Nyss Ireuj Tertj Cypr Ambr (oft) Aug (oft) all. — 
 
 of time absolutely indivisible,' iv ριπί}- 
 ματι, Hesych. ev τη εσχ. σάλτΓ., ' at 
 
 (in, as part of the events of) the last 
 trumpet-blowing.' The word ίσχ. must 
 obviously not be refined upon as some 
 (τίνες in Theophyl., — and Olsh.) have 
 done, identifying it with the seventh trum- 
 pet of the Apocalypse ; — nor pressed too 
 closely as if there were necessarily no trump 
 after it, — but is ike trump at tke time of 
 ike end, ' the last trump,' in a wide and 
 popular sense. See 1 Thess. iv. 16. 
 σαΧττίσει] impersonal, — ό σαλπι-γκτής, 
 scil. So Od. φ. 142, άρίάμενοι του χώρου 
 οβίν τε περ οίνοχοενει (scil. ό οινοχόος) : 
 Herod, ii. 47, ίπεάν Qiaij : Xen. Anab. iii. 
 4. 36, Ικί]ρυ'ίε : — vi. 5. 25, Εως σημαίνοι 
 Ty σάλτΓίγγί. Kiihner, § 414. 2, who ad- 
 duces ίσάλπιγξίΐ/ also from Xen., but 
 without ref. — σαΧπισω for σa\πiyίω is 
 reprobated by the grammarians : see Wetst. 
 ήμΕΪς, see above. 53.] Confir- 
 
 mation of και ήμ. όλλαγ., by a restatement 
 of the necessity of putting on incorruptibility 
 and immortality. το φθ. τοντο ... το 
 
 θν. τοΰτο] ' this,' indicating his oirn body. 
 ένδυσασθαι — see note on the force of the 
 aor. as indicating that which is momentary, 
 
 on ver. 34. — Comp. on the figure of put tin ff 
 ow, 2 Cor. V. Sand notes. 54.] δταν Se, 
 
 &c. is a repetition, in a triumphant spirit, 
 of the description of the glorious change. 
 γ€νήσ•£ται] ' shall come to pass ' 
 — really be. — The citation is from the Heb. 
 with this difierence, that the active, ' Jeho- 
 vah abolishes,' yVi, is made passive, and 
 TO?^, 'for ever,' is rendered (as elsewhere 
 by the LXX, e. g. 2 Kings ii. 26, but not 
 here) ίΐ'ς νίκος. els v., 'so as to re- 
 
 sult in victory.' Wetst. quotes from the 
 Rabbis, ' In diebus ejus (Messiae) Deus 
 S. B. deglutict mortem.' 55.] Tri- 
 
 umphant EXCLAMATION of the Ap. real- 
 izing in his mind that glorious time: ex- 
 pressed nearly in the terms of the pro- 
 phetic announcement of Hosea, — που ή 
 δίκη σου, θύΐ'ατε ; ποϊι το κέΐ'τηορ σου, 
 qLCt] ; — The figure of death as a vetiomous 
 beast is natural, from the serpent. Gen. iii. 
 Num. xsi. — The souls in Hades being freed 
 by the resurr., Death's victory is gone : 
 sin being abolished by the change of the 
 animal body (the source of sin) to the 
 spiritual, his sting is powerless. For a dis- 
 cussion of the quotation, see Stanley's note.
 
 XVI. 1, 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους α. 
 
 589 
 
 56 
 
 το όε κίΐ'τξίον του Θανάτου η αμαρτία, η δε ουναμις dii^piiii.u. ΐ2 
 
 57 
 
 δέ Θ 
 
 εω yapiQ τω 
 
 δί ' e address, Paul, 
 
 ICOVTi here only. 
 
 ττ}ς αμαρτίας ο νομός 
 
 Ύ]μιν το ^ νικος οια του κυρίου ημών Ιησού γυριστού. ?ε ίί νί°"!^' 
 ωςτε, αόίΑψοι μου α'γαττητοι, ίοραιοι -νίνεσσε, 2 Pet. iii. is.) 
 
 „, , h ' .-i,r -j, fch. Vii. 37. 
 
 αμετακίνητοι, ττίρισσίυοντίς εν τω fpy'i' του κυρίου ^"Ι'-^^ρ^ 
 ττάιτοτε, είδοτες οτι ο κόττος υμών ουκ εστί κενός εν g i7ere*onIi""' 
 
 , h Ri.m.iii. 7. 
 
 κυρυο. r.'rV'^t 
 
 5 t 1 rhess. ir. 
 
 AVI. llfpt οε TT7C λογίας της εις τους ayιoυς, iViii. 
 ωςπε^) ^ οιεταςα ταις εκκλησιαις της 1 αΛατιας, ούτως icat (Ρΐιίΐ.ϋ.3ΐ.) 
 
 al. Gen. xxsi. 42. 1 ver. 10 reff. inhere only t. η = Kom. xv. 26. 2 Cor. viii. 4. ix. 13. 
 
 ο Acts ix. 13 reft. See Rum. xv. 26. ρ ch. Tii. 17. Matt. xi. 1 al. Dan. i. 5. 
 
 56. ίσην η αμηρτ. A ν (/; αμ. εστ.) Syr (aft both άμ. and νομ.). — at αμαρτιαι' η δε Svr. 
 των αμαρτιών arm. — for νομ., θάνατος Ηϋ. — 57. ίοιτι DE ί)Ι. llSalAth (msSg) Chr 
 Oec (ν al lat-ff gut dedii). — 58. και αμίτακιν. A vss Ambrst.— του otn 109. — υπ ουκ 
 car. ο κοπ. υμ. FG. — ημών slav-ms. — for tv κιφιω, tv τω οίκω τον κυρίου 178 : ίνωπιον 
 τ. κυρ. arm. 
 
 Chap. XVI. 1. της om 219^ — ευλογίας 3-. 109-marg. — της γαλ. cm 33-5. — rec 
 
 56.] See above : and comp. Rom. 
 V. 12, and vii. 57.] For this blessed 
 
 consummation of victory over death, he 
 breaks out in thanks to God, who gives it to 
 us {present, as being certain) through our 
 Lord Jesus Christ (the Name in full, as 
 befits the solemnity and majesty of the 
 thanksgiving). 58.] Conclusion of 
 
 the whole by an earnest exhortation. 
 ώςτ€] ' quce cum ita sint,' — seeing that the 
 victory is sure. «δρ., όμ,ίτακίν.] a 
 
 clima.x (Mey.); — in reference, viz. to the 
 doubt which is attempted to be raised 
 among you on this matter. ev τω 
 
 εργ. τοϋ κυρ.] The work of the Lord is 
 the Christian life, with its active and pas- 
 sive duties and graces, — the bringins; forth 
 the fruits of the Spirit. ίΐδότβς] 
 
 * Knowing (as you do — being convinced 
 by what has been said), that your labour 
 (bestowed on the ί'ργ. τοϋ κυρ.) is not vain 
 (which it would be, were there no resur- 
 rection : see reff.) in the Lord.' — These last 
 words cannot belong to ύ κόττος νμ., nor very 
 w^ell to οΰκ ίση κενός (as Meyer), but are 
 best taken with the whole sentence, your 
 labour is not in vain : so ch. ix. 1. 
 
 Chap. XVI.] Various directions and 
 
 ARRANGEMENTS (I 18). SALUTATIONS 
 
 (19, 20). AUTOGUAPH CONCLUSION AND 
 
 BENEDICTION (21—24). 1 — 4.] Di- 
 
 rections respecting the collection and trans- 
 mission of alms for the poor saints alJeru- 
 salem. 1.] The constr. is as in ch. 
 
 vii. 1 ; viii. 1 ; xii. 1 ; — the περί μεν .... 
 rather serves to introduce the new subject 
 than to form any constructional part of the 
 sentence. Simly in ver. 12. λογία5] 
 
 λογία, avWoyij, Hesych. \oyiav, την 
 ονΚΚογην των χρημάτων καλίϊ, Theodoret 
 
 (Wetst.). The word is said in the Lexx. 
 not to be found in classic writers. 
 €15 T. άγ.] =; £('ς• τους -πτωχούς τ. αγίων 
 των εν Ιερουσαλήμ, Rom. xv. 26. See 
 also 2 Cor. viii. ff. ; ix. 1 fF. : and on the 
 poverty of the church at Jerusalem, note on 
 Acts ii. 44. That poverty was no doubt 
 increased by the continual troubles with 
 which Jerusalem was harassed in this, the 
 distressful close of the Jewish national 
 history. See other causes in Stanley. 
 That the mother church of Christendom 
 should be thus, in its need, sustained by 
 the daughter churches, was natural ; and 
 it is at the same time an affecting circum- 
 stance, to find him the most anxious to col- 
 lect and bear to them this contribution, 
 whose former persecuting zeal bad doubt- 
 less (see Acts xxvi. 10) made not a few of 
 those saints widows and orphans. 
 bSs^-ep διετ.] We do not find any such 
 order in the Ep. to the Gal. : ch. ii. 10 
 being merely incidental. It had probably 
 been given during his journey among them, 
 Acts xvii. 23, — or perhaps by message (.') 
 from Epbesus. Not as E. V., ' as I have 
 given order, ' but * as I gave order.' He 
 refers to the occasion, whatever it was, 
 when that order was given. — Bengel re- 
 marks : " Galatarum exemplum Corinthiis, 
 Corinthiorum exemj)lum Macedonibus, Co- 
 rinthiorum et Macedonum Romanis pro- 
 ponit. 2 Cor. ix. 2. Rom. xv. 20. Magna 
 exemplorum vis." 2. μίαν σαββ.] 
 
 For this Hebraism, and σαβ. in tiic sin- 
 gular, signifying week, see red'. — On the 
 observance of the first day of the week, see 
 notes. Acts xx. 7, a"fl Rom. xiv. 5. Here 
 th(Te is no mention of their assembling, 
 which we have in Acts xx. 7, but a plain
 
 590 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Α. 
 
 χντ. 
 
 r Luke χχ 
 John XX 
 
 Act 
 
 υμίΐς ποιΐ}σατε. ^ '^ κατά ^ μ'ιιιν ^' σαββάτου έκαστος υμίον abcd 
 
 S ' " ~ Ο' t η Ύ " ''' U ' ϊ> - '' EFG 
 
 τταξ) ίαυτω τιυετω οησαυριί,ιον ο τι αν ίυοοωται, ινα JK 
 Lnkexviii. μη^ OTav έλθω, τότε "^ Xoyiai ylvwvTai. όταν δε ^ ττα/ΐ 
 
 xxiv. V2 
 John. 
 
 t Malt 
 
 reft•. 
 η Rom.i. 10. 
 
 3 John 2. 
 
 Gen. xxxix. 
 
 3. 23. 
 τ Matt ij.l Hl.fr. 
 y = 2Cor. viii. 0,7, lu, 
 
 •ytat -yti'wvTot. ~ όταν όε τταρα- 
 
 ουκιμάσητε, ^^* οι εττιστοΧων τούτους 
 
 πεμφω " απενε•γκειν την ^ -ναριν υμών εις ΙερουσαΧημ' 
 
 12. JVlHrkxTi. 
 
 S See Luke γίνωμοι, οος εάν 
 
 εάν όε y ^ αζιον του κάμε πορευεσϋαι, συν εμοι ττορεύ 
 σονται. ° ε\εvσo^aι δε ττρος ύ/ιας, υταν 
 
 <ενσομαι 
 
 ' Rom. xiv. 22 reft'. 
 ζ = and constr., here < 
 
 ily. 
 
 ττρος 
 
 WW = 
 
 υμάς, 
 
 2 Cor. ii. 4 al. 
 
 Μακεδονιαν 
 
 X Acts xix. 12 reft'. 
 
 ουτω : txt ACG. — πυιησΐτε 93. — 2. rec σαββατων, with JK &c copt goth al Thdrt Dam 
 al : txt ABCDEFG 17• 10!) marg it ν al Chr lat-ff. — την κνριακην 4C-marg. — τταρ ίαυτω 
 om 17ί*•— for τιθ. θησανρ., θηοανριζίτω arm: τιΘ. om 116 Ambrst. — fctu Β: txt 
 ACDEFGJK &.ο.—ίνοδωθη ACK '.U. «4-7-. 71-3. 80. 1 17 Dam : ιυοδονται 5T.— γίνονται 
 J al.— 3. av BD'FG &c: txt ACD'EJK &c. — for υμών, υμιν ΙΟΟ.-ίις ηροσοΧνμα Α.— 4. 
 άξιον η {corrn of order) ABC al it ν al : txt DEFGJ Κ mss nrly syrr goth al Chr Thdrt Dam 
 al. — for καμΐ, ιμε slav-ms harl Ambrst Sedul Pelag Bed. — aft ποριυσ., add ους εαν doKi- 
 μασητε 1. 108'. 122-marg lectt. — 5. for yap διεμχ., δε δαρχομενες 92. — 6. τυχόν om 92 : 
 
 indication that the day was already consi- 
 dered as a special one, and one more than 
 others fitting for the performance of a reli- 
 gious duty. irap' Ιαυτω τιθ.] ' let 
 each of you lay up at home (reff.) what- 
 soever he may by prosperity have ac- 
 quired ' (lit. ' whalaoever he may be pros- 
 pered in :' i. e. the pecuniary result of any 
 prosperous adventure, or dispensation of 
 Providence) : not, as Bengel, al. : ' quod 
 commodum sit,' — a meaning which the word 
 will not bear. ϊνα μή . . .] ' that 
 there may not, when I come, then be 
 collections to be made.' His time would 
 be better employed in imparting to them a 
 spiritual benefit, than in urging them to 
 and superintending this duty. 3.] 
 "Vide quomodo vir tantus nullam suspi- 
 cioni rimam aperire voluerit." Grot. 
 δι' Ιττιστολών cannot belong to δοκιμάσητε 
 (as Beza, Calv., Wetst., E. V., — for what 
 need of letters from them, 'όταν παραγε- 
 νωμαι, or before his coming, if the person 
 recommended were not to be sent off before 
 his arrival?), but is emphatically prefixed, 
 as the safe and proper way of giving cre- 
 dentials to those sent ,• — τούτους πέμ-φω, — 
 the alternative which follows, of himself ac- 
 companying them, being already in the 
 mind of the Ap. Ιττιστολών, plur., — 
 not of the category merely, meaning 07ie 
 letter, — but meaning, either that each should 
 have his letter of credentials, — or more pro- 
 bably, that Paul would give them letters to 
 several persons in Jerusalem. — Meyer well 
 remarks : " Hence we see how common in 
 Paul's practice was the writing of Epistles. 
 Who knows how many private letters of his, 
 not addressed to churches, have been lost .' 
 The only letter of the kind which remains 
 to us (except the Pastoral Epp.), viz. that 
 
 to Philemon, owes its preservation perhaps 
 to the mere circumstance, that it is at the 
 same time addressed to the church in the 
 house of Phil. See ver. 2." X«ipi''] 
 
 see reff. Meyer compares Plat. Def. p. 1 1 3, 
 Ε : χάρις, ευεργεσία εκούσιος. 4.] 
 
 ' But if it (the occasion, — dependent on 
 the magnitude of your collection) be wor- 
 thy of my also taking the journey (i. e. 
 if your collection be large enough to war- 
 rant an apostolic mission in order to carry 
 it, — not said for security, — nor to procure 
 himself a fair reception at Jeru.salem, — but 
 with a sense of the dignity of an apostolic 
 mission: " justa gestimatio sui non est su- 
 perbia." Bengel), they shall go in my 
 company ' {συν εμοι τν. contr. to δι επι- 
 στολών 7Γ{/(ψω, and observing the same 
 order). This did apparently take place, see 
 Acts XX. 4 if. 
 
 5 — 9.] Taking up orav παραγένωμαι, 
 he aiuioiinces his plari of visiting them. 
 5.] This plan was a change from 
 his former intention, which had been (see 
 2 Cor. i. 15, 16, and note), to pass through 
 them to Macedonia, and again return to 
 them from Macedonia, and thence to Judaea. 
 This he had apparently announced to them 
 in the lost Epistle alluded to ch. v. 9 (or in 
 some other), and he now tacitly drops this 
 scheme, and announces another. For this 
 he was charged (2 Cor. i. 17 ff•) with levity 
 ofpiirpose : — but his real motive was, lenity 
 towards them, that he might not come to 
 them in sorrow and severity (2 Cor. i. 23 ; 
 ii. 1). The second plan he adhered to: 
 we find him already in Macedonia when 
 2 Cor. was written (2 Cor. ii. 13 ; viii. 1 ; 
 ix. 2. 4), and on his way to Corinth (2 Cor. 
 xii. 14 ; xiii. 1) ; — and in Acts xx. 1, 2, the 
 journey is briefly narrated. Μακ€δ.
 
 2— ]0. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους a. 
 
 591 
 
 δΐίλθω* Μοκεδον/αν γαρ ^ιεργομαι 
 
 6 a 
 
 προς υμάς οί » = Μηιι. xin. 
 
 V "^ fifi. xxvi. 55. 
 
 τυγον 
 
 ;χον παραμένω η και τταραγ^ίΐμασω, ινα υμεις με fjuhn i.'a. 
 
 f '/ r»\ / 7'Λ'Λ ν f- cli.ii. 3. 
 
 προττεμψητε ου εαν πορευωμαι. ' ου σελ 
 
 άρτι εν ^ τταροόω ihnv' εΧττίί,ω yap Ύρόνον τίνα 
 τρος ι 
 Έ^φεσο. 
 
 ω yan υμ,ας b here only. 
 
 V. 9. 211. 
 
 ναι προς υμάς, εαν ο κύριος 
 C£ εν ^ ^ — — 
 
 11 ' / /Λ 
 
 ανεωγεν με-γαλη 
 πολλοί. 
 
 εσω εως της ττειτηκτοστης 
 
 > m ' ^ 
 
 και ενεργής, 
 
 επιτρεφτι. 
 9 ι' 
 
 ε7Γί^ιει-„ίιν5.νϊί.23. 
 
 8 h • - Phil. i. 25. 
 
 ίπίμενω James ί. 25 
 , only. Gen. 
 
 ύρα yap /iot d^h'^ik^'sreir. 
 
 u ' ' e Acfs xxvii. 
 
 l^'EaV δέ ελθν Τφο'θεος, ° βλε'πετε tva Ρ ά,^όβως ^G/n^'i-'xlvm. 
 
 ... ..ilvb. 
 
 τ. Π8. 8. h Ar(sx.4S. xxi. 4, 4U al. ExoJ. xii. 39. i Ants xxvi. 1 reff. Heb. vi. 3. kActsiilrcff 
 
 UAct.sxiv. 27.) 2C.ir.ii. 12. Col.iv. 3. P. II 2 Cor. vi. Jl. m Philem. 6. Heb. iy. 12 only t• 
 
 ο w. iVa, Col. iv. 17 only. w. πω?, 
 
 Polyb. xi. 23. 2. 
 Eph. V. 15 (see reff.). 
 
 η Lul;e xiii 17. xxi. 15 al. Zech. iii. 1. _ „, _ 
 
 *• ρ Luke i. 74. Phil. i. 14. Jude 12 only. Proy. i. 33. 
 
 τνχο>ν 44.57- 116 al. — καταμη'ω Β 64. fi7^ : παραγενω 238: ναραπομεινω FG. — 
 η om FG 2 g. — και om Β 3. G4. 116 Chr (Matt's mss). — for iva, η μη FG it. — iva n και 
 τταραχ. D'. — ου αν D'FG. — πορεύομαι J al : -σομαι 80 : -σωμαι al. — 7. rec (λττ., 
 Ss {corrn to suit the sense), with JK &c syr al Thdrt al : txt ABCDEFG all vss Chr 
 Dam lat-ff. — rec εττιτρεπη (-π(ΐ J) {corrn, the force of the aor not being perceived : see 
 tiote), with DG(EFK al ?) : txt ABC 3. 17. 31-7-9. 57. 64-7'• 73. 80. 93 al ; jJermiserit 
 it V Chr Thl (Mtt's mss).— 8. om 18'. — επιμένω D^ all Oec : apri h επιμένω arm. — 
 9. ηνοικται or αιεωκται 46 Thl Oec : ανεωγμενη 47• — for ενεργής {efficax Jer, opcrosum 
 Ambrst), evidens (εναργής) it ν Aug al. — και αντικ. πολλ. om J : οι αντικ. Ciir-comra 
 Thdrtj Thl.— 10. δε om 93.— rec και εγω, with DEFG &c Chr (καθώς κ. εγ.) Oec : txt A 
 
 γ. διερχ. is not parenthetical, but δι'ερχ. is 
 opj)osed (by Bk) to παραμένω. — The pres. 
 implies, as in E. V., his notv matured plan, 
 — not, as in the erroneous subscription of 
 the Ep., that he was on his way through 
 Macedonia. 6. τταραμβνώ] This, of 
 
 which he speaks uncertainly, was accom- 
 plished ; he spent (Acts xx. 3) three months, 
 and those (ib. ver. 6) the three winter 
 months, in Greece (at Corinth). 
 ΰμεΐς, Meyer justly remarks, is emphatic, 
 and conveys an affectionate preference, in 
 his present plan, for them. ov, with a 
 
 verb of motion. The account of this is that 
 the ideas of motion and rest are both in- 
 volved in the verb : rest, when the motion 
 is accomplished. So Luke .x. 1 ; — Soph. 
 Trach. 40, κείνος ο οπαυ βίβηκεν ον- 
 δεις oiOf : — Xen. Hell. vii. 1. 25, 'όπου 
 βονλι^θεΧεν έΕ,ελθεΙν. See Kiihner, § 623, 
 Anm. '2. — Whither he should go from Co- 
 rinth, was as yet uncertain, see ver. 4. 
 7.] 'For I am not willing, this time to 
 £68 you by the way.' There is a slight, 
 but a very slight, reference to his change of 
 purpose (see above) : but we must not take 
 (ίρτι with θέλω (which Meyer charges Ne- 
 ander with doing, but clearly in error, see Pfl. 
 u. Leit.p.4 15 note) : rather the aprt refersto 
 the occasion, the news from ' them of Chloe,' 
 whii'h had made it advisable that he should 
 not now pay thom a mere passing visit. 
 γάρ] ground of oii θίλω — but not the ulti- 
 mate one, see above. ετΓίτρί'ψτ)] 'shall 
 
 have permitted me,' i. e. ' if it shall so turn 
 out, in the Lord's direction of my work, that 
 I shall then find my way open to do so.' 
 8, 9.] His present plan regarding his stag 
 in Ephesus (where he was writing). 
 T. ττεντηκ.] viz. that next coming. This 
 probably happened so, or nearly so, not- 
 withstanding the tumult of Acts six. : for 
 he already (see there, vv. 21, 22) wasmedi- 
 tating his departure, and had sent on two 
 of his company, when the tumult occurred. 
 θύρα, see retf. : an o/ipurtinnty of 
 action. μεγάλη refers to the extent of 
 
 the action thus opened before him : ενερ- 
 γής, to its requirements ; neither of them 
 (though μεγάλη may be referred to θύρα) 
 properly agreeing with thefgure, but both 
 with the reality. Meyer compares Plat. 
 Phsedr. p. 245, a : μουσών έπΙ ποιητικάς 
 θύρας άψίκηται. αντικ. ττολλ.] See 
 
 Acts xix. 9. 23 ff. 10, 11.] 
 
 Recommendation of Timothy to their good 
 reception and ojfices.— lie had preceded 
 Paul (Acts xix. 22) in the journey to Mace- 
 donia. From εάν ελθη, it would appear to 
 ha\e been prol^able, but not quite certain, 
 that he would visit them. In ch. iv. 17, he 
 is described as sent on for that purpose : 
 so that the εάν may merely refer to the 
 uncertainties of the journey. 10. βλ. ϊνα 
 
 άψόβ. γ.] There must have been some 
 special reason for tills caution respetrting 
 Timothy, besides that assigned by Meyer, 
 al., that he would naturally be depreciated
 
 592 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους λ. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 q di. ii.3 ι off. 
 r ch.xv. r>8. 
 s Matt. xxvi. 
 
 lU. il Mk. 
 
 John iii. 21. 
 
 Ti.28. ix. 4. 
 
 Hub. i. ft. 
 t = Rom. xiv. 
 
 3 reft•. 
 u Luke ii. 2i). 
 
 Acts xvi. 36 
 
 reft', ell. τ 
 
 '^ yevTjrat '^ προς• υμάς' το -γαρ '^^ Εργον κυξ>ιου 
 
 ip-^aC^Tui ABCD 
 t ' 1 / il' ■* '^t'if/l'f 11 EFG 
 
 ως κα-γω' μν^ι^ζ ουί' αυτόν ic,ovUev^}ay, 7Γξ)οπίμψαΓε JK 
 
 δε αυτόν " εν iiprjvy, '/να έλθ^ ττρος με' " εκοε^ομαι -γαρ 
 αυτόν μετά των αόελφων. 
 
 Περί δε Αττολλώ του αδελ</)θΰ, ^^ ττολλα ^ τταρεκα- 
 
 16 ai. judg λεσα αυΓΟί», π'α ελσρ ττρος υμάς μετά των αοελψων 
 
 και ^πάντως ουκ ην ^ θεΧημα "^Ίνα νυν iXurj, εΧευσεται οε 
 
 x\iii. Ιί 
 Τ Acts χνϋ 
 Jobn ν. 3ν 
 rh xi 33 al t ^' b * ' 
 
 ivHdv.{sttic(iy, oral» ευκαΐξ)ησ^. 
 
 in gospp., 13 c r> " (1 ' ' " ' e ' ^ 'y fl 
 
 Markuniy, ^^ L ρη•γοξ)ειτε, στηκετε εν tij ττιστει, ανό^ιί,εσυε, 
 
 V/iv-lr-^ll'. ^ κραταιοϋσθε. ^^ ^ τταντα υμών εν ayavy '' -^ινεσθω. 
 
 χ c-onslr.,Koin. Ιζ in Λ " '?^ ' " "ί Λ j. '. ''?■ ^ k ' ' 
 
 xii.ireft. ^"^ ΐιαρακαΚω οε υμάς, αοελώοί» οιόατε την οικιαν 
 
 y Acts xviii. 21 > ' 
 
 reft". zof mmi, ch.vii. 37 ΓεΑ". a aft. ίίρλω, Malt. τϋ. 12. Mark vi. 25. ix. 30 al. I) Mark 
 
 vi. 31. Actsxvii. 21. Polyb. xx. 9.4. c = Mnrk xiii. 37 al fr. I The.ss. v. (i. ti Rom. 
 
 xiv. 4 reft. e here (mly. Joih. i. 0. f Luke i. 80. ii. 40. Eph. iii. 16 only. Ncli.ii. 18. 
 
 g coustr., here only. h = ch.ix. 15 res'. i ver. 12. k =■ Joliuiv. 53. Phil. iv. 22 al. 
 
 (iyo) Β 64-72)CJK 73. 80. 93. 114 al Thdrt Dam Thl.— 11. oi'i' om D'FG it goth arm 
 Ambrst. — f^ovOanjaei J al : εζονδίνηηη 93 : (ζουδινωσα 109. — προτΓ(μ•φίτε 109.-— 
 ττρ. ψΐ BD'FG Dam : txt ACD^EJK ii^(nrly) Chr Thdrt Thl Oec. —μετη των α^ίλφ. 
 om Β : αδίλψ. to αβίλφ. (ver 12) om 48. — 12. αττολλώ om seth.- — bef πολλή, ins ίί/λω 
 νμιν on DEFG it ν goth lat-if. — aft θέλημα, ins θεού 47. — 13. τη om FG.— bef. 
 κραταιονσθε, ins και ADE 46. 109 V (not it) Syr ar-erp seth copt lat-ff (not Ambrst ms 
 nor Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec). — 14. for υμών, νμιν 52.— 15. δε om D' 71 seth goth ar- 
 
 as only a subordinate of Paul, whom so 
 many of them opposed. His yonth occurs 
 to us, mentioned 1 Tim. iv. 12: but even 
 that is not enough, and would hardly be 
 intended here, without some reference to it. 
 De Wette's conjecture may not be without 
 foundation, that he was perhaps of a timid 
 disposiiirm. Meyer objects that we have 
 no historical trace of this : but I think some 
 are to be found in 1 Tim. :^e. g. iii. 15 (see 
 note) ; v. 22, 23. το έργον κυρ.] 
 
 see ch. 58, note. 11. ev εΙρήνη] χωρίς 
 
 μάχης και ψιλονει,κίας, Theojihyl., and 
 simly Chrys. ϊνα ελθ.] the aim of 
 
 ττροττίμχρ. €κδ€χ. γαρ αντ.] και 
 
 τοΰτο ψοβυϋντος αΐιτονς ην. Ίνα γόο 
 εί^ότίς, οτι πάντα εί^ησεται ττρος αυτόν 
 ίίπερ αν ττάθ^, έττιιικίστεροι -γένωνται, 
 (?(ά Γοϋτο τΓροι^ίθηκεν €κδ. γ. αύτ. Chrys. 
 Theophyl. adds, <'ίμα δε και αίδεσιμώτε- 
 ρον αϋτον TTonov, εlyε ο'ΰτο3ς avayKalov 
 τούτον έχει, ωςτε ίκδ'εχεσθαι αυτόν. — 
 By μ.€τα των αδελφών it would appear, 
 comparing ver. 12, that more brethren be- 
 sides Erastus (Acts xix. 22) accompanied 
 Timotheus to Macedonia. It is hardly pro- 
 bable (as Calov. and De W., al.), that μετά 
 τ. ά(". is to be taken with ΐκδέχομαι : ' I 
 a7id the brethren expect him.' 12.] 
 
 Of Apollos : that he was not willing at 
 present to go to them. hi, transitional. 
 
 — On the constr. of irepl .... άδ., see on 
 ver. 1. τταρεκάλ. ϊνα €λθ•η] "iva 
 
 denotes the aim, not only the purport of 
 
 the exhortation. See remarks on ch. xiv. 
 13. — " Ideo excusat, ne suspicentur Corr. 
 
 ab eo fuisse impeditum Apud se 
 
 quaerere poterant : Cur hos potius quam 
 Apollo nobis misit .' Respondet, minime 
 per se stetisse, &c." Calvin. Meyer re- 
 marks, perhaps the Corr. had expressly 
 desired that Apollos should be sent to 
 them. μετά τ. άδελψ.] perhaps, those 
 
 who went with Timotheus (see above) : 
 perhaps, those who were to bear this letter 
 (ver. 17). καί] 'and,' not, ^ but :' 
 
 see John xvi. .32. Rom. i. 13. It merely 
 couples the exhortation with its result. 
 θέλημα] Evidently the will of 
 Apollos, not as Theophyl. : τουτέστιν, 6 
 ϋίος ούκ ήθίλεν. όταν εύκαιρ.] The 
 
 present καΐρος not seeming to him a suit- 
 able one : apparently on account of the 
 divisions hinted at in the beginning of the 
 Ep. 13.] είτα δεικννς 'ότι ούκ εν 
 
 τοΧς διδασκάλοις, αλλά και iv έαυτοίς 
 όφείλονσι τάς ελπίδας εχειν της σωτηρίας, 
 φησί• γρηγ. κ•. γ. λ. Chrys., who adds : διό 
 λ{γ£ΐ, γρηγορείτε, ώς καθευδόντων στη- 
 κετε, (^ς σαλενομέΐ'ων άνδρίζεσ-θε, κρα- 
 ταιονσθε, ώς μαλακιζομίνων ττόντα νμ. 
 έν άγάττη γινε'σθω, ώς στασιαζόυτων. 
 άνδρίζ.] Aristot. Eth. iii. G. 12 -.—αμα δi 
 και άνδρίζοί'ται, εν οϊς εστίν ή αλκή, η 
 καλόν τό άποθανεΐι•. Wetst. : where see 
 other exx. 15 — 18.] Recommenda- 
 
 tion of the family of Stephanas to their 
 honourable regard: and by occasion, ex-
 
 11—18. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους λ. 
 
 593 
 
 2^T((pnva, οτι eariv ατταρχϊϊ της Άγαιας και εις iconstr.,cb. 
 " SiaKov'iav τοις ^ ά-γ'ιοις "έταζαν εαντονς' ^^ ' ίνα και '"^'^'"'""■•^ 
 
 f-qf ' flr- ' < ^'s η Arts xiii. 48 
 
 νμίΐς ^ υποτασσησυε τοις τοιυυτοις, και τταντι τω συνερ- ren. 
 
 " > t " 1 7 II f c>\ » \ " • *' ' ο ch xii. S. 
 
 γουΐ'τι και κοττιωντι. ^' χαίρω όε " εττι ry ^ τταοουσια ^^^1\•^ζ• 
 Έ,τίψανα και Φοητυυνατου και Άναικτοΰ, Ότι το '''' νμίτερον '' Ac™ii'. is 
 υστέρημα αυτοί ανεπληρωσαν' * ανειταυσαν yap το <! !^^'"^";^'""• ''• 
 
 '^a " >\f- b' ' '''r^ r ch. vii. 15, 28 
 
 εμοί' πνεύμα και το υμών, επι-γινωσκετε ουί' τους £ν. iirefr.) 
 
 τοιούτους 
 
 Rom. viii. 28. 
 
 Mark xvi. 
 
 2U. 2 Cor. 
 
 Ti. 1. James ii. 22 only t. IMaco. xii. 1. t ch. xv. 10 reff. u consfr., ch. xiii. 6 reft". 
 
 V = 2 Cor. vii. 6, 7. Phil. i. 26. ii. 12 al. w— ch. xv. 31. χ 2 Cor. viii. 13, 14. ix. 12. xi. 9. Phil, 
 
 ii. 30. Col. i. 24. 1 Thes». iii. 10. Pdul only, exc. Lake xxi. 4. y ch. xiv. IH reft'. ζ = Mall. 
 
 xi. 28. 2 Cor. vii. 13. Philem. 7, 20. 1 Chnm. xxii. 9, 18. a = .\cts xrii. 16 refi•. b = here 
 
 only? (SeelThcss. V. 12.) 
 
 pol. — aft στίφηνα, ins και φορτουνατον DE &c (φουρτ. al) : και φορτ. και αχαϊκού 
 CFG &c {additions from ver 17). — for on, ος 32: οι D arm. — aft αχαι., add tii; 
 χριστοί' 73. — ίταξα αυτούς seth. — for εσην, (ίσιν C'(appy)DEFG &c as above Orig- 
 int. — 16. iva to roiovroig oin 8'J. — aft και κοττ. (cm 17) ins iv νμιν FG g Arabrst. — 
 17. rec φονρτ. with B(e sil)K &c ff (edd h 1) : txt AB.'CDEFGJ 17. 3G-7. 47 v^nrly 
 (seth cm κ. φ. κ. a., and does not ins in ver 15). — rec for νμιτ., υμών {explanatory 
 corrn), with AJK &c Chr Thdrt Dam al : t.xt BCDEFG 17- 37- «4. 80 : trtoiov 71 : 
 μου (aft υστ.) bCt.— rec. ούτοι, with B(e .silyCIK &c Thdrt Dam al : txt ADEFG al 
 {ilii d e: ipsi illi g: ipsi ν lat-ff) Chr Oec. — 18. και το (μ. D'FG 4G it ν goth Ambrst 
 
 pression of his own joy at the presence of 
 Stephanas and his companions. 15.] 
 
 Some expp. (Erasm., Wolf, al.) talce 
 οΐδατε as imperative, and regard it as the 
 command : but the imper. use of o'iSaTt 
 (for Ίστΐ) seems to be witliout example. 
 We must therefore understand it as indica- 
 tive, and the constr. is the well known 
 attraction otJa σι τίς el (Meyer). 
 άτταρχή] see Rom. xvi. 5 : the first 
 Achaan converts. — έταξαν, plur., refer- 
 ring to the noun of number, οικία. This 
 family were among the few baptized by 
 Paul, see ch. i. IG. eis διακ. τοις 
 
 άγίοις] ' to service for the saints :' in 
 what way, does not appear: but perhaps, 
 from the fact of Stephanas being here in 
 Ephesus, — for journeys and missions. 
 έταξαν Ια-υτοΰς] So Demosth. de falsa 
 legat. : βιινλομαι Se ΰπομτήσαι tig τίνα 
 τάζιν tTottv ίαυτΌν Αίσχί)ης. Wetst. : 
 where see other exx. The ίαυτοΰς is not 
 without meaning— they voluntarily devoted 
 their services. 16.] και νμεϊς, you in 
 
 your turn, — in return for their self-devo- 
 tion, νττοτάσσ.] viz. in honouring 
 their advice and being ready to be directed 
 by them : there is an allusion to ίταίαν 
 ίουτονς above. tois toiovtols] to 
 snc/t jtersons, meaning tiie individuals of 
 Steplianas's family, whom they knew. See 
 the usage of ύ τοιούτος in reff. 
 συνίργοίντι] viz. with τοΤς τοιοντοις. 
 17.] Perhaps Fortunatus and Achai- 
 cus were members of the family of Ste- 
 phanas. The Fortunatus mentioned by 
 Vol. II. 
 
 Clement at the end of his Ep. i. to the 
 Corr. may be the same. ΐΓαρονσία] 
 
 viz. in Ephesus. το ΰμε'τερον νστ.] 
 
 ' The want of you ' (ref.) ; i. e. of your 
 society. — Grotius interprets it, " Quod vos 
 omnes facere oportuit, id illi fecerunt : cer- 
 tiorem me fecere de vestris morbis," and 
 holds them to have been o'l Χλοής of 
 chap. i. 11. But it is very improbable that 
 he should mention tlius a family so dis- 
 tinguished as this : he names them just 
 after, i. IG, as the household of Stephanas : 
 — and still more improbable that one of so 
 line feeling should add of the bearers of 
 such tidings, άν'ίπανσαν, κ.τ.λ., which 
 would on that hyp., be almost ironical. 
 
 18. και νμών] this is a beautiful expres- 
 sion of true affection used in consciousness 
 of the effect of this ep. on them : q. d. ' it 
 is to their presence here that you owe 
 much of tliat in this my letter which I 
 know will refresh and cheer your sjiirits.' 
 Theophyl. explains it: ίοειξεν αίιτοΊς οτι 
 >'/ αί)Τον άνάπο οσις, αυτών εστίν, ωςτε 
 tTTfi, Ιμοϋ άνατταυθέντος ττερΊ αυτών, και 
 ΰμεΊς εκερδΙισατε αυτό τοϋτο, την εμι)ν 
 άνάπαυσιν, μηδέν άχαρι προς αΰτονς 
 τούτους ίνδείζη'^θε : — Grot., of the an- 
 nouncement wfiich they would make ou 
 their return of Paul's love for the Corr. 
 But this last can hardly be. έττι- 
 γινώσκ€Τ£] ' know,' the prep, giving force, 
 but not altering the meaning ; as Grot, and 
 Theophyl., — tv τιμι^ αΰτυνς (χετε. 
 
 19, 20.] Salutations. 19. €v κνρίω] 
 see note, Rom. xvi. 2. On Atpiilu and Pris- 
 
 Q α
 
 594 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Λ. ΧΥΙ. 19—24. 
 
 cRom.xvi.i6 19 Άσπο^οιται υμάς αι '^ ίκκΧησιαι της Ασίας, ααπα- 
 ''«."i^iu" ^' t^rai υμάς "^ tv Kvp'uo ^ πο\\α Ακυλος και Π^ίσκιλλα, 
 
 e ver. 12 reft. ^ e ^ »•ϊ , ~ , •. , on 
 
 fRom. xvi.4. σκν rti κατ οίκον αυτών ίκκλησια. 
 
 Acts ίϊ. 4ϋ t ί. " • 
 
 ERom svi 10 01 αδίλφοί πάιτίς. άσπάσασΟί άλλίιλους ^ ev φιληματι 
 
 reff. f , 
 
 h =» Col.iT. 18. ay 10). 
 
 xxiiiizTaDt Ο ασπασ/ιιος ' tij ίμ\} χ^ιρι Παύλου. '^^ ει τις ον 
 
 iCi)l. iv. 18. ^'-^ ' i" k ' 'q' 1 Ο' 23' ' 
 
 2'rhess.iii. ώίΛΗ Tov Kwptov, ^ ϊ)τω ανασίμα. μαραναυα. ^ 77 χαοίς 
 iRom^L.^I' του κυρίου Ί)?σοϋ χριστού μίθ* ΰμων. ^^ ι'» ά-γύττη '"μου 
 1 here only. μετα πάί'των ύμω»^ εν γυριστώ Ιησοΰ. [a^iji'.J 
 
 Phil! 1. ϋ. ' Cul.i. 8. Philcin. v. 7. Rev.ii. 4, 19. 
 
 Pel Bed : το ημών 114-15 al lect 14. — 19. om A 34 : σσπ. to ασιας om 177- — aft ("■ 
 
 ίκκλ. add πησαι C 47 Syr ar-erp Chr Bed. — rec ασπαζθ7'ται, with B(e sil)FGJ &c vss 
 ff: txt CDEK al goth. — εν κνριω om 123 arm Ambrst : ins aft ττολλο 17. G4. 74. — 
 απολλως (-ω 109) και ακνλας 46. 109. — ακνλα 17- — ακυλ. πολλά DE d e. — πρισκα 
 Β 17 am demid harl copt goth Pel. — (κκλησ. αντωΐ' arm. — at end, add π(ΐρ οις {ονς F) 
 και ΐ,ίΐ'ΐίομαι DEFG it ν goth Pel Ambrst (text ed) Bed. — 20. ασττ. to αγ(ω om GT- — 
 22. κυρ. 7)μων 23. 44. 89 all lectt v-ed vss Chr Thl Pel Victorin. — rec aft κυρ. ins ιησονν 
 χοιστον, with C'DEFGJK &c vss ff, but om ABC^ 17- 64. 73-4 seth copt (in Wetst) Chr 
 (Mtt's msj).— 23. aft κνρ. ins ιιμων AJ 17- 39. 106-8-77. 238 lect 13 vss Chr Thl lat-ff. 
 — χριστού om Β al am f tol (al latt) goth Thdrt : ιησ. χρ. om 14. — 24. μου om A 73 : 
 Dei Did in Jer (appy). — tv χρ. ιησ. om 37. — αμηΐ' om BFG (has -γενίθητω ytrtOijTw 
 betw the text and the subscr) 17-C4 fg tol (al latt) : ins ACDEJ &c vss ff.— Subscription. 
 rec προς κορίνθιους πρώτη (ά επιστολή J al) ε^ραψη απο φίλιππων Sta στέφανα και 
 φυνρτοννατου {φορτ. J al vss) και αχαικον κ. τιμοθεον, with JK al : others vary. B^ al 
 have απο εφεσυυ : so also copt Chr (comm) Euthal (prsef ) Thdrt (prsef to II Cor) Oec 
 (prsef) al. — AB'CDG al have merely προς κορίνθιους- ά or πρώτη, or ετελεσθη πρ. κ. ά. 
 
 cilia, see Rom. xvi. 3, 4. Acts xviii. 1. follows. ήτω άνοίθ.] On ανάθεμα, 
 
 They had removed from Corinth (Acts see note, Rom. ix. 3 : — ' let him be ac- 
 
 xviii. 2) to Ephesus (ib.26), and had there, cursed..' μαραναθα] An Aramaic ex- 
 
 as subsequently at Rome (Rom. xvi. 3. 5), pression, i<n^! po, 'the Lord cometh:' 
 
 an assembly of the faithful meeting in their ^not as Chrys.', all, ό κίφ. ήμ. ήλθε) : )>ro- 
 
 dwelhng. — ol ά8. ττάντίς — the whole bably unconnected with oiaOfjua: andadded 
 
 Ephesian church. Iv φιλ. άγ.] see perhaps (Mey ) as recalling some remem- 
 
 Rom. xvi. 16, note. ^ 21 — 24.] Auto- brance of the time when Paul was among 
 
 ffrapk conchmon.—o άσίΓασμό? is the them : at all events, as a weighty watch- 
 
 βηαΐ greeting, which according to 2 Thess. word tending to recall to them the near- 
 
 iii. 17, was always in his oicn hand, the ness of His coming, and the duty of being 
 
 rest having been written (see Rom. xvi. 22) found ready for it :— not added, as Riickert, 
 
 by an amanuensis. ^ Παύλου is in to stamp genuineness on the letter,— for why 
 
 app. with ΐμοϋ implied in t/xjj.as II. p. 226, iiere rather than in other Epp., especially 
 
 νμίτερ^ δε εκάστου θυμον ά'εϊ,ω : έμος as those who were to bear it were so well 
 
 Toi) άθλιου βίος, and the like. See Kiihner, known? See Stanley's note. 24. ή 
 
 § 499. 4. 22.] He adds, as in Col. <ίγ. ^.ov] Because the Ep. had contained 
 
 iv. 18, Eph. vi. 24, some exhortation, or go much that was of a severe character, he 
 
 solemn sentence, in his oivn hand, as having concludes it with an expr. of affection ; so 
 
 especial weight. On the distinction be- Chrys. : μετά τοσαντην κατηγορίαν οΰκ 
 
 tween φιλεΊν and άγαπ^,ν see notes on αποστρέφεται, αλλά και φιλεϊ και περι- 
 
 John xxi. 15—23. The negation here λαμβάνει πόρρωθεν αΰτονι: όντας. 
 
 of the feeling of personal affection, " has |v χρ. Ίησ.] τουτέστιν, ovSkv άνθρώπινον 
 
 no love in his heart for," is worthy of ή σαρκικύν ή αγάπη μου έχει, άλλα πνευ- 
 
 note, as connected with the curse which ματική ίστι και tv χριστψ. Theophyl.
 
 npo:S ΚΟΡΙΝΘΙΟΥ^ β. 
 
 1. Παΰλος ατΓοστολος Ijjaou ■χριστού ^ δίά θίληματος «Rjm.xv. 32 
 θίοΰ, και ΎιμόΟίος ο α^ίλώος, τη εκκλησία του θίοΰ τη ^ Th^Tclr.""' 
 
 " ' f ' ia b ^ - c ' ' - ' - r ,' i.2. Phil. 
 
 ovarj εν Ινορινσω συν τοις ayioic πασιν τοις ουσιν (ν 'ΐ•. , 
 
 η\-'/η - > C Acts IX. 13 
 
 ολ^ τ^ Αχαΐα. ^ χάρις υμιν κα\ ειρήνη άττό θεοϋ πατρός d Rom. is. 5 
 
 f - 1 / t J - - reft. 
 
 ημών και κυρίου ιησου -νριστου. eKomxr. β 
 
 Εύλογ)7ΓΟς• ό " θίός /cat ttottjo του κυρίου ημών ^ jameh.'iz^" 
 Ιϊ;σοΰ γυριστού, ο πατήρ των ^ οίκτιρμων καΐ Θεός πάσης 
 
 Pliil.ii. 1. Col. 
 
 g Rom. χϋ. 1. 
 12. Heb. χ 28 only. Isa. bdii. Ιδ. 
 
 Title : προς κορ. β. AB(C appy)K 1. 3. 7. 80. 108-10 : αρχΐται πρ. κορ, β. (δεύτερη 
 G)DFG 90 : rec πανλου τον αττοστολον η ττρος κορινθίους εττιστοΧη δευτέρα : all aliter. 
 — Ch.\p. ι. 1. χριστού ιησ. Β syr Thdrt Bed: txt ADEGJK &c vss Chr Dam al: 
 om F f. — ο bef αδελφ. om 238. — τοις to αχαια om 178. — 3. bef πατήρ om ο FG. — 
 
 Ch.\p. I. 1, 2] Address and greet- 
 ing. 1. δια θίλ. θ€οΰ] see 1 Cor. i. 1, 
 note. Τιμοθίος ό οίδ.] So of Sos- 
 thenes, I Cor. i. 1 ; '■one of oi αδελφοί;^ — 
 but perhaps in this case with peculiar em- 
 phasis : see 1 Cor. iv. 17. 1 Tim. i. 2, 18. 
 2 Tim. ii. 1. On his being with Paul at 
 this time, see Prolegg. to this Epistle. 
 σνν τ. άγ. ττάσιν . . . .] This, and 
 the Ep. to Gal., were circular letters to all 
 the believers in the respective countries : 
 the variation of expression in the two cases 
 (ταΊς ίκκληπίαις τ. Γαλατίας, Gal. i. 2) 
 being accounted for by the circumstance 
 that the matter of this Ep. concerned 
 directly the church al Corinth, and in- 
 directly all the saints in the province, — 
 whereas that of Gal., being to correct deep- 
 rooted Judaizing error, directly concerned 
 all the churches of Galatia. — Achaia com- 
 prehended Hellas and Peloponnesus ; the 
 province was so named by the Romans 
 because lliey became possessed of them by 
 subduing the Achwan league, Pausan. vii. 
 16. 7. On the hist, of the province, see 
 Acts xviii. 12 and note. 2.] See 
 1 Cor. i. 3. 
 
 3 — 11.] Thanksgiving for deliver- 
 
 Q 
 
 ANCE FROM GREAT DANGER OF HIS LIFE : 
 — HIS ABILITY TO COMFORT OTHERS IN 
 
 AFFLICTION. Comm. have endeavoured 
 to assign a definite purpose to this opening 
 of the Ep. — De Wette thinks that Paul had 
 no definite purpose, except to pour out the 
 thankfulness of his heart, and to begin by 
 placing himself with his readers in a posi- 
 tion of religious feeling and principle far 
 above all discord and dissension. But I 
 cannot agree with this. His purpose shews 
 so plainly through the whole latter part of 
 the chapter, that it is only consistent with 
 vv. 12 — 24 to find it beginning to be intro- 
 duced here also. I believe that Chrys. has 
 given the right account: ίλύπει λίαν 
 αυτούς κ. εβυρΰβει το μη παραγενίσθαι 
 έκει τον άπόστολον, καΐ ταϋτα επαγγει- 
 Χάμενον, άλλα τον ίίπαντα ίν ^Ιακιδυνΐί}, 
 άΐ'αλώσαι χρόΐΌΐ', και δοκΰν αυτών ίτί- 
 (lojif προτετιμηκέναι. δια τυντο προς 
 τούτο ϊ'ττάμενος το άΐ'θορμονν, Χίγει την 
 αϊτίαν δι r)t' οΰ παρεγενετο' υύ μην εζ 
 ευθείας α^ύτήν τίθηπιν, υιΊδε Χίγει 'ότι ιιΐδα 
 μεν υποσχόμενος ηζην, ίπίΐδή δε δια τάς 
 Ολιψίΐς ΐνεποδισθιιν, σύγγνωτε, κ. μη 
 καταγνώτε τίνα ύπερυψίαν η ρι^θνμιαν 
 y'linov άΧλ' έτίοως τοϋτο κ. μεγαλοπρε- 
 Q2
 
 596 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 h ■= Rom. XV. 
 
 4. Arts ix. 
 
 :il. XV. 31 al. 
 i = Ltikf xvi. 
 
 2S. Aci.sxx. 
 
 12 al. Gen. 
 
 xxiv. R7. 
 k = Mark xii. 
 
 17. Kiim.v. 
 
 2. MKtt. xiv. 
 
 14 al fr. 
 1 Alts Hi. 19. 
 
 vii. 19 al. 
 m attr., Act.s i. 
 
 1, 22. Matt. 
 
 zviii.lS. 
 
 Zeph iii. 11. 
 η Rnm. iii. 7 
 
 reft", 
 ο Rom. vii. ft 
 
 rcfl'. (St-e note.) 
 cii . i 
 
 '' παρακλί'ίσεως, ο ' τταρακαΧων -ημάς ΐπι iraay ry 
 
 ΘΧΊφίΐ Ίίμων, ίΐς το όυνασθαι τ}μας ' τταρακαΧαν τους 
 
 fv πάσρ θλίψει Βια της τταρακλησεως "^ ης ' παξ)ακα- 
 
 Χουμιθα 
 
 " παθήματα τον γυριστού 
 
 νριστου περισσεύει και η 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 εου, 
 
 Ρ 
 
 δέ 
 
 •η καυως ττερισσευει τα 
 
 ημάς, ούτως ^^ όια του 
 
 λησις ημών. ^ ίΐτε 
 
 ΘΧιβόμίθα, ύπεο της υμών ^ παρακΧησεως και σω- 
 
 νπομονίβ των αυτών ° τταβη- 
 
 ίΐς 
 
 ' τταρακ/ 
 
 h 
 
 τηριας της ενεργου^υεί'ης εΐ' 
 
 ρ = Rom. ν. 15. ϊίϋ. 18. ρρ = 1 Thess. iv. 2. 
 
 1 Thess. iii. 4. 2 Thess. i. 6, 7. 1 Tim. v. lu. Hcb. xi. 37 only 
 
 t Rom. ii. 7 reft'. 
 
 4. Ο και τταρ. 93.— for ειτι, tv C 39. 89. 91-3. 122 al Chr Antioch Procop.— r>j om Β (but as 
 passing from τταση to τταση aftds) 91-3 Chr-commj. — ημίον om (>4 Hil Ambr : νμων 3. 
 — for nc, iva FG. — νμας 80 aeth. — bef αυτοί, ins και DEFG 14 it ν Amb Bed (not Jer 
 Ambrst). — for νπο, απο F 109. — 5. το πάθημα D'. — όντως (rec ούτω: txt ABC &c) 
 και DEFG 37. 80 it (v al Dam Ambrst (ed), but omg και aftds). — rec om τον bef χρ. 
 (2nd) (as uniiecessary), with mss : ins ABCDEFG(J om from ττίοισσ. to 7Γ{ρισ(τ.)Κ all 
 (25 in Scholz) Orig all. — ημών τταμακληοις 238. — 6. for UTt, ει D' al. — for St, ovv 177• 
 • — ημών 238. — και σωτήριας (1st) om Β 176: σωτ. κ. τταρακλ. 42 seth. — for ών, ως 
 
 ΤΓίστερον κ. αζιοπιστοτιρον κατασκίναζίΐ, 
 ίπαίρων Ty παραμυθίι^ το ττραγμα, 'ίνα 
 μηΗ ϊρωτώσι λοιπόν την α'ιτίαν, Ci ην 
 νατίμΐ]ηΐ. Calvin, somewhat differently : 
 " Incipit ab hac gratiarum actione, partim 
 ut Dei bonitatem praedicet, partim ut 
 aniinet Corinthios suo exemplo ad persecu- 
 tiones fortiter sustinendas : partim ut pia 
 gloriatione se efferat adversus malignas 
 obtrectationes pseudapostolorum." But 
 this does not touch the matter of the post- 
 poned journey to Corinth, which through 
 the latter part of the chap, is coming more 
 and more visibly into prominence, till it 
 becomes the direct subject in ver. 23. 
 3.] ίνλ., ' Blessed (above all others) 
 
 is ' . . . . ό Θ. K. ττατ ] ' The 
 
 God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ.' 
 Here, as in Rom. xv. 6, De Wette would 
 render, ' God, and the Father' . . . ., which 
 grammatically is allowable ; but I jjrefer 
 the other rendering, on account of its 
 greater verisimilitude and simplicity. 
 6 ΤΓ. τ. οίκτιρ.] o'tKT. can hardly be the gen. 
 of the attribute, as De W. and Grot., 
 seeing that οϊκτ. is plural and refers to acts 
 of mercy ; but as Chrys., ό υίκτιρμονς 
 τοσοντονς ίπιοίΐζάμινος: see ref. James. 
 This meaning De W. himself recognizes in 
 ό θ. πάσης παρακ\., — ' the God who works 
 all (possible) comfort,' and refers to ό θ(6ς 
 Γ. ΐλπίδος, Rom. xv. 13. 4.] The 
 
 Αρ. in this Ep. uses mostly the ^r«^ ^;er*o« 
 plnr., perhaps as including Timothy, })cr- 
 haps, inasmuch as he writes apostolically 
 (cf. ΐιμας Γονς άποσΓολιίττς. of himself and 
 ApoUos, 1 Cor. iv. 9), as speaking of the 
 Apostles in common. This however will not 
 explain all places where it occurs elsewhere : 
 
 e.g. 1 Thess. ii. 18, ήθίΧήσαμεν ίλθΰν 
 προς νμάς, ίγώ μίν Παϋλος και Ιίπηζ 
 κ. δις, — where see note. So that after 
 all perhaps it is best to regard it merely 
 as an idiomatic way of speaking, when 
 often only the singular is intended. — 
 ' In order that we may be able:' not, ' so 
 that we are able.' δια τοΰτο γάρ παρ- 
 εκάλβσίν ι)μάς, φησΊν,'ίνα ήμης αλλήλους 
 παρακαλώμίν. Chrys. " Νοη sibi vivebat 
 Apostolus, sed Ecclesise : ita quicquid gra- 
 tiarum in ipsum conferebat Dcus, non sibi 
 soli datum reputabat, sed quo plus ad alios 
 juvandos haberet facultatis." Calv. 
 ης, attr. for y, or perhaps (Winer, § 24. 1) 
 for TJv {παράκλησιν πορακαλΰν). 5.] 
 
 ' As He is, so are we in this world :' 
 1 John iv. 17. 'As the suiFeringsof Christ 
 {endured by Christ, whetlier in his own 
 person, or in his mystical body the Church, 
 see Matt. xxv. 40. 45) abound towards us 
 (i.e. in our case, see retF.); — even so through 
 Christ our consolation also abounds.' 
 ^The form of expression is altered in the 
 latter clause: instead of 7) παράκλησις 
 του χριστού πιρισ. we have ή παράκ. 
 ημών περισσ. διά του χριστού. And not 
 without reason : — we suffer, because we are 
 His members : we ere consoled because He 
 is our Head. — There is no comparison (as 
 Chrys. ov yap 'όσα Ιπαθι, φηπίν, ίπάθομιν 
 μόνον, (ίλλά και περισσά) between the 
 personal sufferings of Christ, and theirs. 
 6] And all this for your benefit. — 
 ' But whether we are afilicted, (it is) en 
 behalf of your comfort (κ'ς• τό δννασϋαι 
 κ.τ.λ. ver. 4, only now applied to the Corr.) 
 and salvation (the great end of the πηρά- 
 κληπα), which (viz. παράκλησις and aoj-
 
 4—8. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 597 
 
 ματων ων και ημείς• ττασγομεν, και η ΕΛΤΤίς 77/uwl•' °<=o°^*[-«^• 
 ^' /ρ /3 ' ν\' ' ^ ' ~ . ρ '' i Λ ' Λ ' ^ - s;ill Alts 
 
 ρίραια VTTsp υμών ^ ίΐτε παοακαλονμίυα, υπίρ της ' 
 
 7 
 
 νμων 
 
 παοακ\)]σίως και σωτηρίας, ' Η^ότίς οτι ως 
 κοινωνοί εστε των ° παθημάτων, ούτως και της ' παρα- 
 
 XXVIII. ΰΟ. 
 
 Phil. i. 20. 
 = Rum. iv. 
 IH. Hfb. iii. 
 
 κΛησίως. wu yap υίλομεν υμάς ayvonv, αοεΛφοί, w Matt. xxiu. 
 
 υττερ της υΛίψεως ημών της -γενομένης υμιν εν τι? Ασία, ifa.l as! 
 ΟΤΙ ^ καθ υπερβοΧην ^ υπέρ ^υναμιν ^ εβαρηθημεν, ωςτε χΐ. 2.^ ι cir. 
 
 ν. 13. XX = John i. 30 reff. y Rom. vii. 13 reff. 
 
 xxvi. 43 I Mk. Luke is. 32. ch. v. 4. 1 Tim. v. 16 only t. 
 
 ζ =■ Acts xxvi. 13 al. 
 
 D'FG (g has both). — rec has itre τταρακηλονμ. &c. before και η {λπις, with only a few 
 mss, no vs nor f (ajjpy) : AC 23 31-7• 51-7• 64-7. 73. 80 am harl flor (v-ed demid) 
 Syr ar-erp copt (arm) Eph Antioch Ambrst (Pel Bed) read είτε παρακ., νπερ τ. νμ. 
 παρακλ. (omg και σωτ.) τηα εΐ'εργονμεΐ'ης εν νττομονη των αντ. τταθ. ων κ. ημ. ττ. και 
 η ίλτΓ. &C : txt BDEFGJK all (GO and more, Tisch) it f syr ar-pol slav gr-ff. — aft υπομον>ι, 
 add τΓολλί/ 1. 87. 108'. 219'. — for αντων, αντον 219-. — 7. rec for ωc, ωςττεο, with 
 D'E-'JK&cChrThdrt al: oi FG (tt ? si d e Syr ; omg): txt ABCD'E alOrig Eph Dam. 
 —των παθ. ιστέ DEFG it νιΛ.-ουτως cm FG it. — 8. θέλω 93. 109-17. 211 lectt 
 slav-ms Jer. — for υ-ερ, ττερι {corrn to the more usual prepn in this sense) ACDEFG 17• 
 31-7-marg-9. 47.73.80. 118 Bas Chr Thdrt Antioch : txt B(e sil)JK most mss Dam 
 Thl Oec. — aft -γενομ. om ημιν (^as unnecessary, — to avoid the repetitions of the pron.) 
 ABCD'FG 17. 73. 93. 211 al lect 8 it ν Jer al {ημών om copt Syr Thl Ambrst) : ins 
 D'EJK most mss vss Bas Chr Thdrt Dam Ambrst (ms).— for νττερ, παυα D'D'FG. — 
 υττερ δνν. εβαρ. {corrn of order) ABC 37. <;4. 73. 80. 93 arm Bas Jer:' txt DEFGJK 
 most mss vss Chr Thdrt al Tert Ambrst al : εβαρυνθ. al Dam Thl : εβαρυθ. 109 Oec. — 
 
 τηρία) is working (not, as Chrys., Theo- 
 phyl., Estius, Beza, al., 'being icnrked :' 
 the passive does not occur in St. Paul) in the 
 endurance of the same sufferings which 
 we also suffer;— and our hope is stedfast 
 on your behalf (that you ivill endure hard- 
 ness, and be consoled and saved) ; — or 
 whether we are comforted, (it is) for your 
 comfort and salvation.' This place of the 
 words και — υμών agrees best with the sense, 
 besides being in accordance with the best 
 MSS. Their position has perhaps been 
 altered to bring the two parts of the dilem- 
 ma closer together, and because ίλττίς ημών 
 seemed to suit the part, ε'ιύότες, and the 
 future supposed to be implied after όντως 
 και (as in E. V.). The objection to this is 
 (as De W.) that the ίλττίς clearly must be 
 referred to σωτήρια, which however is not 
 hinted at in ver. 7• 7•] elSoxes refers 
 
 back to παυακαλονμεθη : — ' we are com- 
 forted with the assurance that &c.' — 
 After οϋτως καί understand not ϊσεσθε, but 
 εστε : he is speaking generally, of the com- 
 munity of consolation iwiiiiYin^ mutually be- 
 tween himself and the Cor. ; and it was this 
 thought which helped to console him. 
 8.] see var. read. — It is generally supposed 
 that the tribulation here spoken of was the 
 danger into which Paul was brought by the 
 tumult at Ephesus, related in Acts xix. 
 This opinion lias been recently defended by 
 Neander, Wieseler, and Dr. Davidson, but 
 impugned by De Wette, on the grounds, 
 
 (1) that iv ry Άσί^. can hardly refer to 
 E[)hesus, which Paul generally names, 1 Cor. 
 XV. 32 ; xvi. 8 ; (2) that he was not in 
 danger of his life in this tumult. The first 
 gi-ound is hardly tenable : there would be an 
 appropriateness in tv ry 'Aaig. here, as he 
 has in his mind an apologetic account of 
 the reasons which hindered him from leaving 
 those parts and coming to them. I own, 
 however, that the strong expressions here 
 used do not seem to me to find their justifi- 
 cation in any thing which we know of that 
 tumult or its consequences. I am unable 
 to assign any other event as in the Ap.'s 
 mind : but the expressions seem rather to 
 regard a deadly sickness, than a persecu- 
 tion : see below, vv. 9, 10. καθ' 
 •ύττερβ. signifies the greatness of the afflic- 
 tion itself, objectively considered : virep 
 8υν., the relation of it to our power of en- 
 durance, subjectively. ώςτε Ιξ.] ' So 
 that we utterly despaired even of life.' 
 Such an expression surely would not be 
 used of a tumult, where life would have been 
 the first thing in danger, if Paul had been at 
 all mixed up in it, — but to some wearing and 
 tedious suffering, inducing despondency in 
 minor matters, which even reached tlie liope 
 of hfe itself. 9.] αλλά, ' moreover,' 
 — carries on and intensifies the descriiition 
 of his hopeless state. — ' We had in our- 
 selves the response of death,' i. i•. «ur 
 answer within ourselves to the question, 
 ' Life or Death ? ' was, ' Death.' So Vulg.,
 
 )98 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 bcli.iT. 8 only, b'i' Λ" '" . ^ c _ - 
 
 Ps. ixxxTiif ίί,απορηυηναι ΐ]μας και του 
 
 «"■ο"^*!;• Luk<: £αυι-ο(ς• ΤΟ ' ίίποκριμα του θοΐ'ατου ^ fff^jjfca/u£v, Ίνα μη 
 
 χν.%2»}!"'°' ^ πίποιθότες ώμίν ^ (φ ίαυτοις, αλλ ^ ίττι τω Θίω τω 
 
 eyeipovTi τους νεκοους, ος ίκ τηΑικουτου θανάτου 
 
 g Mark χ. 24. ίρρυσοτο Ί}μας και ρυσεται, 
 
 ρυσίται, "" συνυπουρ-γουΐ'των και υμών υπίξ> 
 ry δειίσει, Ίνα "εκ πο\\ων ° προςωττων το ^ 
 
 , Ιό. τύ. 
 
 John 1.31. 
 iHik 
 Luke 
 
 4^7ί' αΛΛα αυτοΓ tv 
 
 £^ς ον Ί^ΧτΓίκαμίν οτι 
 
 και 
 
 .!). Heb, 
 ϋ. 13 only. 
 
 h -I'cor χν. ημών 
 
 12 reft•, 
 i Hrb.ii. 3. 
 Jame.*^ iii. 4. 
 
 Rev. xvi. 18 onlyt 2Macc. xii. 3. j = cli. χ 
 
 iii. S. Rom. xv. 12 rell. perl., 1 (or. xv. 1!'. 
 only. πρόνα'ΤΓοί' αξιόχρ^ων το προστϊΐσόμβίΌΐ 
 q = Rom. V. IS, 16. vi. 23. xi. 2» «1. r so 1 Cor. 
 
 ίΤΙ 
 
 Ti^ δευσει, 
 Ί^μας " -χάρισμα 
 
 )ΐΓίρ ημών. 
 
 Tii. 24 reft: 
 
 ABCD 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 εις 
 
 οΛΛων ευγαριστϊ 
 
 23. (1 Cor. XV. 31.) k Rom. vii. 24 reft'. I 1 Pet. 
 
 ni liere only f. η = cli. ii. 2. iii 5. ο = here 
 
 Polyb. XT. 25. 8. ρ = Act.", xx. 21. χχίτ. 24 al. 
 
 .9. sconslT., here only, (εΰχ., Rom. i. 8 reff.) 
 
 9. αλλ ACFG &c : txt B(e sil)DEJ SiC.—aWa ιπι Ό\—θβον τον eysipavra FG.— 
 -pavTi 38. 91-3. 109 211 lect 8 Thdrt Tlil : μονω τω ty. Thl-ed and comm.— 10. τηλι- 
 κοντων Θανάτων d e syrr goth Chr Thdrt Orig-int Jer Ambrst {tantis pericnlis v). — 
 rec for κ. ρνσιται, κ. pvtrai {see notes), with D^EFGJK Ike ν syr goth al Thdrt Till Oec 
 Orig-int Jer al : oro {for same reason) AD' d e demid Syr Chr Ambrst (ed) : txt BC 73. 
 93. 21 1 gam tol al copt aeth arm al (Ath) Dam : κ. (wtTcn ιτι 44. — ίΐς ον ηλττ. om 93. 
 177-8. 211 : ηλτΓίκ. It 31 syr (but txt in marg) (arm) Chr Thl Jer: ελττί^ω St arm. — 
 on om BD' G4 : και οτι FG g. — ίτι om D-FG 47 al vss Jer Ambrst: οτι και tn ρνσ. 
 om 99. 177-8. 211 : pvtTcii FG latt goth. — 11. ημών VTZtp νμ. A al : ημ. vir. ημ. 44. 
 93. 211-19.— for νπιρ, ττιρι D'FG : virtp ημ. is aft Cnjati. in C ν copt Chrj : om Sedul 
 (syr has it with *). — tv πολλω ττροςωπω FG G4-7^ it Ambrst (πολλωι^ ed) Chrj. — for 
 ημάς, νμας 17•— for ημών, νμων b2(E.')FJK 37». 48. 67. 72. 89. 91-3. 109 aU slav 
 
 Estius, Billroth, Riickert, ]\Ieyer, De Wette. 
 T. άττόκρ. may perhaps mean, the 
 * sentence,' as Hesych. : άπόκριμα, κατά- 
 κριμα, \1/ήφον, — and most Comm. — The 
 perfect ίσχήκαμίν is here (see also ch. ii. 
 12) in a historical sense, instead of tlie 
 aorist ; which is unusual. Winer notices 
 but one such usage, J}X0£ και ί'ίληφΐ το 
 βιβλίον. Rev. V. 7• ϊνα μη . . .] very 
 
 similarly ch. iv. 7, tχoμtv St τόΐ' θησαυροί/ 
 τοϊιτον (V όστρακίνοις σκίίησιν, ϊνα ι) 
 ν7Γ(ηβο\>) της £υΐ'άμ(ως η τοΰ θεοΰ, κα'ι 
 μη €| ημών. τώ Ιγ. τ. veKpotJs] Our 
 
 thoughts were weaned from all hope of sur- 
 viving in this life, and fixed on that better 
 deliverance which God shall work when He 
 raises us from the dead. — To see in this 
 expression merely a figure (De W.), and 
 understand ' Who raiseth the dead ' as 
 =z 'Who delivers men from peril of their 
 lives ? ' because such peril is below and else- 
 where (ch. xi. 23) called θάνατος,— is surely 
 very forced. Understanding it hterally as 
 above, I cannot see how it can be spoken 
 with reference to the Ephesian tumult. If 
 it alludes to awy eate? rial danger, I should 
 be disposed to refer it to the same obscure 
 part of Paul's history to which he alludes 
 1 Cor. XV. 32, where he also speaks of the 
 hope of the resurrection as his great sup- 
 port. But there would be this objection, 
 that these two passages can hardly refer to 
 the same event ; this evidently had taken 
 
 place since the sending of the first Ep. 
 10.] ' Who rescued us from so great 
 a death, and will rescue us, — on whom 
 we hope that He will also continue to 
 rescue us.' The rec. phtTai has been sub- 
 stituted for the fut. ρνσίται, as more ap- 
 propriate. But it regards the immediate 
 future, — the και ίτι ρνσίται the continu- 
 ance of God's help in time distant and un- 
 certain. — The whole verse (as De W. con- 
 fesses, who although he repudiates the 
 Ephesian tumult, yet interprets the passage 
 as alluding to external danger) seems to 
 favour the idea of bodily sickness being in 
 the Ap.'s mind. 11.] σ-υνυττουρ- 
 
 γούντων — ivith whom ? From the similar 
 passage Rom. xv. 30, συναγων/σησθαί μοι 
 iv ταις ττροςίυχαΐς νπϊυ ίμον, it would 
 seem as if μοι should be supplied ; — bat he 
 himself could hardly be said vwovpytlv, 
 though he well might uyoiviGaceai. We 
 must therefore understand the preposition 
 either with Chrys., τουτέστιν, ίίχομίνων 
 ττάΐ'των υμών ϋπίρ ήμων, — or as merely 
 signifying coincidence with the purpose to 
 be accomplished, as in μι) ττροίίώντος 
 ήμας τον άνΐμαυ, Acts xxvii. 7, where see 
 note. ϊνα εκ ττολλών ιτροβώττων . . .] 
 
 "Three constructions of this ver-se are pos- 
 sible : (I) to take ΐκ ττολλ. ττρυςώττ. as well 
 as δια πολλών with ίΰχηοιστηθ/), — ' iii 
 order that the mercy shewn to me may be 
 given thanks for on my behalf by many
 
 9-13. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους 13. 
 
 599 
 
 Η γαρ καυ-χησις Ύίμων αντί] ΙστΙν, το ^ μα^τυξ>ίον tRom.ui.27 
 
 της " συΐΈΐ^ησίως ήμων, 'ότι ev ^^ ά-γιότητι καΐ ^ ύλικρινεΐα " ^"ί*• ''j;,;* 
 
 ^ τον θεού, ουκ sv σοφία ^ σαρκικτ], αλλ' £ΐ' ^ γ^ύριτι Θεοί), v^'jlhf/vin. 
 
 ανεστραφημβν εν τω κοσμώ, '^ πε^χσσοτερως δε 7Γ|θός ιιμας. fi^lf^{^""'- 
 
 ον yap άλλα -γραψομίν νμη' αλλ 7} α αναγίνωσκετε wHeb. Lii.'iu 
 
 Ί] και ° ετΓΐΎίΐ'ώσκετε, ελτΓίΖ^ω δε ότι και ' εως τέλους ^ εττι- ^ ',^ο•:. ν. 8. 
 
 ' ^ ch. 11. 17 
 
 onlyt. See Phil. i. in. y So (5ικαιοσ. ΟεοΓ/, Rom. iii. 21. See ch. ii. 17. ζ 1 Cor iii 3 reff 
 
 a = Rom. i. 5. V. 2al. b = IMntt. xvii. 22. ITim. iii. 15. Epli. ii. 3 reff, c Mark xr. 14 var. 
 
 rertd. c-h.ii. 4 »1« Paul. Heh. ii. 1. xiii. la only. d Luke xii. 51. Num. xiii. 29. e Acts 
 
 viii. 28 al. 1 1 Cor. ix 8 reft'. g = Luke vii. 37 reft. h 1 Cor. i. 8 only (reff.). 
 
 Dam Phot (in Oec) Oec. — 12. rec for ayior., απλοτητι (*ee note, and Eph vi. 5, Col 
 iii. 22), with DEFGJ &c vss Chr Thdrt Thl Oec Ambrst al : ττφαοτητι 93. 211: txt 
 ABCK 37• 64-7". 73 copt arm Clem Orig Antioch Dam, Anton.— και tv ειλικρ. A syr. — 
 rec om roc bef Οίου, with FGJK &c Orig Thl Oec: ins ABCDE al Danij : 7-011 Θ. om 
 syr (lias it in marg) Chr Thdrt Ambrst (βίον ίγί'ωμίν Clem).— και ουκ Β (»4. 73. 120 ν 
 syr al. — σαρκ;η; FG. — 13. for γρ., fypa^ojuii' 20-marg 113-marg harl Sedul. — αλλ om 
 BFG. — η Ii ora A: »/ om likew 4. 17• 21i)' Syr arm goth : Ii om D^ I7. — for avayiv., 
 γιι/ωσκ. Syr : /e^/s/js ν g Ambrst Pel : -frai (and (πιyιvωσκtτctι) 111. — ;; και επιγιν. 
 om Β 31. 41. Ιϋί). 238 Oec: >y om Κ 114-17 it ν copt arm Ambrst al.— on om 108'. 238. 
 — bef ίως om και {as unnecessary/) ABCD'EFG 3. I7. 39. 73. 178 vss Dam lat-ff: ins 
 
 persons with many words ' " (Storr, Opusc. 
 ii. 253) : but the rendering, ' with many 
 words,' is objectionable, see Matt. vi. 7 : — 
 (2) to take εκ ττολλ. ττροςιίιττ. with ίΰχαρ., 
 and Sia ττολλίόΐ' with ro εΙς ήμ. χάρ. — 'm 
 order that the mercy shevm to me by means 
 of (the intercession of) many, may be given 
 thanks for by many persons o?i my behalf' 
 (Theophyl., Billroth, Meyer, who explain 
 tK 7Γ. προςώτΓ. 'ex multis oribus :' Stan- 
 ley, ''from many upturned yijce* ") : but 
 the position of the words is against this, — 
 and it is more natural that the mention of 
 the effect of the intercession should precede 
 that of the thanksgiving. (3) Consequently, 
 the best method is to take ϊκ ττολλ. ττροςιόττ. 
 with TO fi'f ι'ιμ. χάρ., and δια ττολλιΰΐ' with 
 fixap.(Beza,Calov.,Estius, Fritz., Riickert, 
 al.) :— ' in order that the mercy shewn to 
 us by the intercession of many persons, 
 may by many be given thanks for on our 
 behalf.' De Wette. — The emphasis of the 
 whole being on the Ik ττολλών τΓροςώττων, 
 he places it first, even before the art., after 
 which it would naturally come. irpos- 
 
 ώττων, ^persons' a later meaning, which 
 Phrynichus (see Wetst.) blames as used by 
 o'l άμ(ρΊ τας οίκας ρήτορες. 
 
 12 — 24.] Expression of his confi- 
 dence IN HIS INTEGRITY OF PURPOSE 
 TOΛVARL•S THEM (12 — 14), AND DEFENCE 
 OF HIMSELF AGAINST THE CHARGE OF 
 FICKLENESS OF PURPOSE IN NOT HAVING 
 
 COME TO THEM (15 — 24). 12.] γάρ, 
 
 reason why they should help him witli their 
 united prayers. κα-υχησις] viewed in its 
 
 ground and substance. But we must not say 
 that it \s for καύχημα: the Ap. regards 
 the μαρτΰξΐιον and the κανχησις as coin- 
 
 cident : — it is not the testimony, &c., of 
 which he boasts, but in which his boasting 
 itself consists. άγιότ.] anXnrtjTi seems 
 
 to be a gloss from Epii. vi. 5 : — ' in holiness 
 and sincerity of God :' i. e. either ' belong- 
 ing to God,' as () ι5ιι.-α(οσ. αυτοϋ, Matt. vi. 
 33, or ' which is the gift of God,' as Rom. 
 iii. 21, 22, — or better than either, as E. V., 
 'godly,' i. e. maintained as in the service 
 of and with respect to God. Calvin inter- 
 prets it, ' coram Deo.' See on ch. ii. 17; and 
 on the senses of «yior. and άττλότ., Stanley's 
 note. otiK ev σοφ. σαρκ.] which fleshly 
 
 wisdom is any thing but holy and pure, 
 having many windings and insincerities in 
 order to captivate men. αλλ' ev χάρ. 
 
 Oeoi] ' but in the grace of God,' i. e. in 
 that χάρις which he had received (Rom. i. 
 5) fi'f υπακοίμ> πίστεως iv πάση' τοΙς 
 εθνεσιν — the grace of his apostleship. To 
 this he often refers, see Rom. xii. 3 ; xv. 
 15. Eph. iii. 2, al. ΤΓ€ρισ•σοτ€'ρω5] 
 
 " Non quod apud alios minus sincere con- 
 versatus fuisset : sed quia majora sincerse 
 suse conversationis documenta apud Corin- 
 thios ostenderat : ut quibus gratis ac sine 
 stipendio pra;dicasset evangeliura, parcens 
 eoruin infirmitati." Estius. But perhaps 
 it may relate only to the longer time, and 
 greater opportunities which he had had at 
 Corinth for shewing his purity of purpose : 
 so Calv., De W. 13, 14. j" Confirmation 
 
 of the foregoing assertion. ' For we do 
 not write to you any other things, except 
 those which ye read, or know (l»y experi- 
 ence of facts), and I hope, shall know to 
 the end:'— i. e. ' my charai^ter in my writ- 
 ings is one and the same, not fickle and 
 changing, but such as past facts have sub-
 
 600 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 i cnnstr., see 
 
 1 Cor. χ i τ. 37. 
 k Κοιη. xi. 25 
 
 15. ch. Qi-i 
 
 7"^ 
 
 εσθε, καθώς και 
 καίι-^ημα υμών εσμεν ™ καΟα 
 Ίησοΰ. ^^ 
 εΧΘειν 
 
 ϋ 5. 
 1 Rom. iv. SalS η 
 
 Paul Heb. TJjUiPa TOV KVOIOV 
 
 iii. H Deut. ,^ ^ / / 
 
 x.jiai. ερουλυαην πρητεηον 
 
 m Rum. iv. 6 I ' ' > Ί 
 
 1. Tcor.i.s '' χάριν εχητί, ^^ 
 
 ^ ' επε-γνωτε rjjuac αττο μεξ)ους, 
 
 πεξ) και υμεις ημών εν rrj 
 ρ 
 
 και ' ταυτιτι τ^ '' ττεποιθησει 
 προς νμας, 'u>a ζευτεραν 
 
 και "^ Sc νμων "^ δΐίλθίίν "^ εις Μακίδυν/αν, 
 .. iiat., 1 Cor. κιοί πάλίν 07Γ0 Μακεοονιας ε\θειν ττξ>ος υμάς, και νψ 
 
 ch iii. 4. Tiii. 22. 
 ix.38refl. al. Ir. 
 
 ;. 2. Eph. iii. 12. 
 (Rom. XV. 28.) 
 
 Phil. iii. 4 only. P. 4 Kings xviii. 19. 
 
 q = here only. 
 
 D^JK most mss syr al Chr Thdrt Thl Oec. — 14. for αττο, ίκ 80. — καθ. κ. νμ. ημ. om 
 117• — aft Klip, ins ημών BFG al vss ff. — aft ιησ. add χ(>ιστου D'EFG all (iirly the same 
 as ins ημ. above) vss Chr Antioch Thl lat-ff. — 15. rec φουλ. πρ. νμ. ίλθ. προτιροί', ινα 
 (see wo/e*), with Κ &c copt al Thdrt al : txt (προτ. om 121: το iivrtpov Κ 117» το 
 ττροΓ. J all Thl Oec) ABCDEFGJ all it ν syrr goth al Chr Dam lat-ft'. — rec πρ. νμ. 
 tXOtLi' {corrn of arraiigernent), with ABC &c syr al Chr Dam Oec : txt DEFGJK all vss 
 Chr (Mtt's ms>) Thdrt Thl lat-ff'.— for χάριν, χαραν BJ 31. 71-3• «0. 115 Thdrt (Chr- 
 comm says : χύριν δε ίνταύθπ την χαράν \(γίι). — αχ'ΐτί BC al Thdrtj Dam. — 
 16. for διελθ., απιΧθαν AD^FG (g has both) }iO copt (syr marg goth /re) Chr, Dam : 
 ίλθειν 44-8. 72-4. 115 vss Oec: txt BCD^EJK most mss ν all Chr^ Thdrt Thl {see 
 Rom XV. 28).— πάλιν om arm.— ίΐςίλθαν 80.— for νψ, αφ D'FG 44. 91. 238 al Chr 
 
 stantiated it to be, and as I hope future 
 facts to the end of my life will continue to 
 do.' άΐ'αγινώσκοΐ'τες yap επιγινώσκετε, 
 ΟΤΙ a σννιατε ήμϊν iv τοΊς εργοις, ταντα 
 και ίν ΓοΤς γράμμασι λίγομερ• και ούκ 
 ίναντιονται νμων η μαρτυρία ταΊς ίπι- 
 στολαΐς, άλλα σνν^,οει τι] αναγνώσει ή 
 γνώσις, ϊ)ν ττρολαβόντες εχΐτε ττερί ημών. 
 Chrys., who has the advantage of being able 
 to express in his exposition the play of words 
 in fij-O- and επιγινωσκετε. — 'As also ye 
 have partly (that part of you, viz. which 
 have fairly tried me : άπο μίρηνς, because 
 they were divided in their estimate of him, 
 and those who were prejudiced against him 
 had shut their minds to this knowledge. 
 Chrys. refers it to what follows : μετριάζων 
 είπιν : Theophyl. to the not yet completed 
 testimony of his ιναρίτου βίου : Estius and 
 Calvin, to their inadequate cstiniaiion of 
 him, which he blames : but I much prefer 
 the above. So most Comm.) known US, 
 that (not ' because,' putting a colon at μέ- 
 ρους, as Luth., Griesbach, and Scholz : nor 
 is it to be joined with ίπιγνωσεσθε, what 
 follows being parenthesized, as Theophyl., 
 al., Meyer, Olsh.) we are your glory, as 
 ye are ours, in the day of the Lord Jesus.' 
 ίσμ-ΐν, 'present,' as of that which is a 
 settled recognized fact. But this is no 
 ground for its being joined with εττιγνω- 
 σεπθε, as Olsh. The experimental mutual 
 knowledge of one another as a καύχημα was 
 not confined to what should take place tv 
 Ty ημ. τ. κ. Ίησον, but regarded a pre- 
 sent fact, wiiich should receive its full 
 completion at the day of the Lord. 
 15 — 24.] His defence of himself against 
 the charge of fickleness of purpose for not 
 having come to them, 15.] τα-υτ. τ. 
 
 ireir., i. e. of my character being known to 
 you as that of an earnest and sincere man. 
 irpoTcpov belongs to ίλθ£(ΐ', not to 
 εβονλόμην. This having been seen, its 
 place was changed to after ίλθείν, to remove 
 the present ambiguity, ιτρότίρον, viz. 
 before he visited Macedonia, where he now 
 was. ϊνα δ€\)Τ£'ραν χάριν €χητ€], 
 
 ' that you might have a second benefit' 
 (eflusion of the divine χάρις by my pre- 
 sence : not = χάιιαν as Chrys., see var. 
 read.). δεντέραν, second, because there 
 
 would thus have been opportunity for two 
 visits, one in going towards Macedonia, the 
 other in returning. Tliis is the interp. of 
 De Wette, Bleek, and Wieseler, and I believe 
 the only one which the words will bear. 
 The other, according to which δεντέραν 
 χάριΐ' would mean ' a second benefit,' by 
 my visiting you for the second time, is in 
 my view unnatural, and would hardly have 
 justified the use of δεντέραν at all. For 
 come ivhen he would, the χάρις of the 
 second visit would be the δευτέρα χάρις, 
 and the conferring a δευτέρα χάρις would 
 have been of no signification in the present 
 connexion, which is to state a purpose of 
 paying them two visits in one and the same 
 journey. The first of these he characterizes 
 by πρότερον ίλθείν, — the second by δεν- 
 τέρα χάρις, implying also the first. So 
 that I do not believe this passage to be 
 relevant to the question respecting the 
 number of visits which Paul had made to 
 Corinth previously to writing these Epp. 
 See on that quest., Prolegg. to 1 Cor. 
 16. J If this is the same journey which is 
 announced in 1 Cor. xvi. 5, the idea of 
 visiting them in the way to Macedonia as 
 well as after having passed through it, must
 
 14—18. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους β. 
 
 G01 
 
 υμών ^ ττροττίμφΘιιναι πς την Ίου^αίαν. ^^ τούτο oursActsxr.s 
 ''' βουλίυόμίνος μητί ' αοα Ty " ίΧαφο'ια ' ίχοϊ/σά^ίτ»!/ ; η α ' '^e "'vu.°i.' 
 ρονλίνομαί "κατά σάρκα " βουλίύοΐίαι, ίνα η ^ τταο' aber^ οη\γ. 
 
 'Ν ν Ζ ^ < , ( , ^^ „ 18 a ν ^r ^ /, ν* v-cl,iii.l2. 
 
 f,uot TO νοί ναι, και το ου ου; ^° πιστός he ο σίος, 'V„1? =ac(s 
 
 a " Λ Λ ' f - Γ ν t - 5 ,f ( \ >/ V.33. XV. 37. 
 
 ΟΤΙ ο Λόγος ημωι/ ο προς υμάς ουκ εστίν ναι και ου. χχνιί. 39. 
 
 xiv.31. Julinxii. lOonly. Isa. iii. 9 al. χ Ram. i. 3 reff. y = Rom. xi. 25 al.^""'*'''' ζ See 
 
 Mrtlt.v. 37. James V. 12. a (1 Cor. i. 9 reff.) constr., see ch. xi. 10. Rum. xiv. 11. Jailith xii. 4. 
 
 (Mtt's ms,) Thdrt (ms). — ημυ)ν 48. — 17. for ovi', Sf A, vera igitur goth. — for βουΚΐυ- 
 ομίνος, βουΧοικνης {corrii to suit (βονΧημην above/') ABCFG 17• 31-7. 73. 80. 106- 
 11. 21!»• lect 14 ν copt Chr Dam Thl Bed: tst DEJ(-ao/i£»'oc)K most mss it syrr £eth 
 goth al Thdrt Oec Ambrst. — r>/ om FG Thdrt. — κακά σ. βονλ. cm I7. — αλλ ιι^α arm. — 
 ναι (2nd) and ον (2nd) om 67' ν Pel. — 18. for ημών (νμ. 238) ο πρ. νμ., αντον ο πρ. 
 ημάς 114. — ο bef προς om D'. — rec for tariv, iya/tro {corrn to suit the svpposed 
 reference to the past), with D^EJK &c {fuit syrr al) Chr Thdrt Dam al : txt ABCDFG 
 17. 23. 57. 70 it V goth al Cyr Thl (marg). — for ναι και ου, το ναι ναι, κ. το ου ου 80. — 
 
 have occurred to him subsequently to the 
 sending of that Ep. ; or may even then 
 have been a wish, but not expressed, from 
 uncertainty as to its possibility, — the mam 
 and longer visit being there principally 
 dwelt on. But perhaps the following is the 
 more likely account of the matter. He had 
 announced to them in the lost Epistle (see 
 1 Cor. V. 9) his intention, as here, of visit- 
 ing them on his way to Macedonia : but 
 the intelligence from " them of Chloe" 
 had altered his intention, so that, in 1 Cor. 
 xvi., he speaks of visiting them aftei• he 
 should have passed through Macedonia. 
 For this he was accused of levity of pur- 
 pose. Certainly, some intention of coming 
 to them seems to have been mentioned in 
 that lost Epistle : see 1 Cor. iv. 18. But 
 the ττροτΓίμφβηναι ί!ς Tt)i> Ίουδαίαν can 
 hardly but be coincident with the alms- 
 bearing scheme of 1 Cor. xvi. 4 ; in which 
 case the two plans certainly are modifica- 
 tions of one and the same. 17.] μήτι . . 
 ' Did I at all use levity (of purpose) ■?' τη 
 ίλαφ., as t) aperii, »'/ ττισης, — the art. 
 being generic. Olsh., De Wette, Billroth, 
 take it to mean ' the levity of purpose 
 which has been laid to my charge ;' Winer, 
 ' the levity of purpose inherent inhuman 
 nature.' — ' Or those things which I plan, 
 do I plan according to the flesh (i. e. ac- 
 cording to the changeable, self-contradic- 
 tory, and insincere purposes of the mere 
 worldly and ungodly man), that there may 
 be with me (not, so that there is with 
 me : he is speaking not merely of the re- 
 sult, but of the design : ' do I plan like the 
 worldly, that I may shift and weaver as suits 
 me?') the Yea, yea, and the Nay, nay 
 (i. e. both affirmation and negation concern- 
 ing the same thing) V Chrvs., Theodoret, 
 Theophyl., Oec, Calv., Bengel, ]5illroth, 
 Winer, al., take it thus : ' Or those things 
 which I plan, do I plan after the flesh (as 
 
 fleshly men do), so that my yea must (at 
 all events) be yea, and my nay, nay .<" i. e, 
 as worldly men who perform their promise 
 at all hazards, and whatever the conse- 
 quences, whereas I am under the guidance 
 of the Spirit, and can only journey whither 
 He permits. But this expl. is directly 
 against the next ver., where val και οϋ is 
 clearly parallel to vai ναι και οϋ ου 
 here, the words being repeated, as in Matt. 
 v. 37, without altering the sense : and in- 
 consistent with ver. 23 and ch. ii. 1, where 
 he says that his alteration of plan arose 
 from a desire to spare them. See the 
 whole discussed in Stanley's note. 18.] 
 
 Such fickleness, you know, was not my 
 habit in preaching to you. Chrys. gives 
 the connexion well : καλώς αντίθεσιν 
 άνακΰπτουσαν καταλύει. ti yap ύπο- 
 σχήμίΐ'ος, φησ'ι, TrapayfvsaOai υπερίθου, 
 καΐ οί'κ εστί τταρά σοι ναι, ναι (predicate 
 in Chrys. 's interp. ; see above), και ου, υν, 
 άλλα νϋν & λέγεις ανατρέπεις μετά 
 ταϋτα, οίςπερ επί της σΓ;ς• επιδημίας 
 ετΓοίησας• οΰαι ημ'ιν, μήποτε και εν τψ 
 κηρύγματι τοντο γέγονεν. 'ίν υυν μη 
 ταΐ'τα ίννοώσι, μηίε θορνβώνται, φησι• 
 πιστός ίε 6 θεός, κ.τ.λ. Hom. iii. p. 
 440, Β. ΊΓίστ. Se ό θ., δτι] a form 
 
 of asseveration : see reff. — The δέ follows 
 on the denial of the preceding question. 
 ό λογ.] ' Our doctrine (which we 
 preached, cf. ό λόγος• ό του στανηοϋ, 1 Cor. 
 i. 18) to you is not {present, inasmuch as 
 the character of the doctrine was present 
 and abiding. The pres. has been altered 
 in rec. to the easier εγένετο) yea and nay' 
 (i. e. inconsistent with itself). 19.] 
 
 Confirmation of the last ver., by affirming 
 the same of the great Subject of that doc- 
 trine, as set before them by Paul and his 
 colleagues. χριστός, ]H'rsoiial — not 
 
 for ' doct7-ina de Christo' — Hi•: Himself 
 is the centre and substance of all Christian
 
 602 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 Ι. 19—24. 
 
 τον 
 
 θίοΐ) γαρ υίος ΐ7/σους -^ξχστος ο iV νμιν δι 
 Tkix.23 ημιοι> κηρυγθίΐς, δι εμοϋ και Έ,ιΧουανοί) και ΎιμοΘίον, 
 «.ch.iT. ουκ: εγενεΓΟ ναι και ου, οΛΛα ναι εΐ' αυτω -νε-νονεν 
 
 '"'" "'■ 20 b" ^c' Λ' £)"' '"d^ > ^ 
 
 11. XV. 8 ■'" οσαι γα|0 ετταγγελίαι αεου, ει» αυτω τυ ιτα, κοι 
 
 Κ„ "^^, • , ». ci> /^ιι•τ#.ι ^η <^ tiTiii τ-ζ.ι Γτε/.ι 'Trriri/^ OOCCfl' ΟΙ TJAIWI-' 
 
 avT(o 
 
 τω 
 
 ιεω π 
 
 ξ>ος 
 
 ο δε βίβαιων ίιμας συν νμιν εις χρισΓου και ^ "χ^ρισας 
 
 from IsH. Ixi. ΕΙ' 
 1 . Acts iv. 91 
 27. Si. Λ». '•^ 
 Heh. i.i) 
 only. 
 
 19. rec -^ap τον θίου (corrn of order), with (rov om FG) DEFGJK &c : txt ABC 37. 
 67- 73. 80. — xpiar. ιησ. AC om Chr. — ό (ίι r;/x. FG. — σιλβηττου DEFG. — for eyiv., εστί 
 C— ytyoii 2'όΗ.—ναι cm 219i.— 20. τον Beov A 48. ^2. 106 lectt 13. 14 Thdrt.— for 
 K. er αντω το αμήν, ί(ο t>i αιτοιι r. αμ. ABCD'(om i(o)FG 10. 17- 31-7-8. 80 vss 
 Marcion (in Epiph) Dam Pel Fulg Bed (add dicimus Syr Pel Fulj;) (.see notes) : txt 
 D-'EJK most mss syr at Chr Thdrt Thl Oec. — τα αμήν 44 : τυυ αμ. Β 80. — bef ιιμ. om 
 ^t CJ 1. lot» ν Pel Fulg. — Si ηιιων ττρος δοξαν τω Oku arm. — νμων 34. 210- lect 13 Fulg 
 Bed.— 21. νμας σνν ημιν BC 38. 57. 72. 120 latt 8. 13. 14 (but νμιν Β al) : j;/i. σνν 
 ημ. f al. — ο και χρισας D: και ο χρισας it ν arm lat-if. — ο θίος 89 lect 8. — 22. ό cm 
 
 preaching : see 1 Cor. i. 23, and note at 
 ii. 2. ό τοΰ θίον vio's is prefixed for 
 
 solemnity, and to shew how unlikely fickle- 
 ness or change is in Christ, bein(/ such as 
 He is. Cf. 1 Sam. xv. 29, ' the Strength 
 of Israel will not lie nor repent.' 
 Σιλουανοΰ] = Silas, see Acts xviii. 5 and 
 al. 1 Pet. V. 12. He names his com- 
 panions, as shewing that neither was he 
 inconsistent with himself, nor were they 
 inconsistent with one another. The Christ 
 was the same, whether preached by dif- 
 ferent persons or by one person at dif- 
 ferent times. άλλα ναι ev ανιτ. 
 γέγ.] ' Christus prsedicatus, i. e. prsedi- 
 catio nostra de Christo, facta est nse in 
 Ipso Christo.' Bengel. This seems to me 
 far better than with De Wette, al., to 
 make ναι the subject, and yfyoj'ff pre- 
 dicatory. The absence of the art. before 
 I'oi, as well as the sense, stamps it as the 
 predicate. ' Christ preached as the Son of 
 God by us, has become yea in Him,' 
 i. e. has been affirmed and substantiated 
 as verity by the agency of the Lord Him- 
 self. 20.] οσαι γαρ ... is an 
 independent relative clause, as in ref., — not 
 tl)e subject answering to ev αντψ το vai as a 
 predicate, as E. V. : — ' For how many so- 
 ever be the promises of God, in Him is 
 the yea (the affirmation and fulfilment of 
 them all) ; and in Him, the Amen, for 
 glory to God by our (the Apostles') 
 means.' The other reading, which in spite 
 of its strong external authority I have 
 rejected, appears to have arisen from an 
 idea that the clause had reference to the 
 Amen uttered at the end of prai/ers. So 
 Theodoret, ου Si) χάριν κηί Ci αντοϋ τον 
 της ευχαριστίας αΰτίβ TTpoc'i/ifpo/jfr νμνην, 
 from which comment De W. thinks the 
 reading has sprung. The vital objection to 
 it is, that then ημών must mean ήμιΤιν κηΐ 
 
 νμων, which without notice it could hardly 
 do. In the next verse, when such is about 
 to be its meaning, we have first {i|j,as σνν 
 νμΙν, and then in ver. 22, ι/μας . . ημών 
 in the general sense : but here, without 
 any such preparatory notice, δι' ημών must 
 signify ' by means of us Apostles,' ' by our 
 work in the Lord.' Thus a μην will be 
 merely a strengthening of ναι — the affirma- 
 tion and completion of God's promises. 
 21, 22.] constr. as in ch. v. 5, which in 
 form is remarkably similar : 21.] ο δε 
 
 βίβ. — ήμάs is the (prefixed) predicate, and 
 0609 the subject, βφ. ί/ς χριστόν = βφ. 
 TiJ πίστίΐ ίΐς χριστόν, ' confirmeth US (in 
 believing) on Christ.' χρίσας ημάς, 
 
 after ήμ. σνν νμιν and the και, cannot refer 
 (as Meyer, al.) to any anointing of the App. 
 only, but must be taken, as Chrys., al., of 
 all, App. and Corr. — ομιιν ττροψητας κ. 
 'ηρίΐς κ. βασιλείς εργαζόμενος' ταντα yap 
 το παΧαιον Ιχυ'ιετο τά -γίνη. Chrys. See 
 1 John ii. 20. " Observe the connexion of 
 χριστός and χρ'ισας." Stanley. 22.] 
 
 σφραγ. again cannot refer to the App. alone, 
 nor is John vi. 2? any ground for such a re- 
 ference, — but as in the other N. T. reff., to 
 all, — sealed by the Holy Spirit to the day 
 of redemption. και δούς . . . .] ' And 
 
 assured us of the fad of that sealing:' see 
 Rom. viii. 16. τ. άρρ. τ. irv.] ' the 
 
 pledge or token of the Spirit :' genitive of 
 apposition : the Spirit is the token, app., 
 πρύΰομα, Hesych. : — »'/ επί -ηΐς ώναΐς 
 ■παρά τών ώΐ'ονμένων διδομένη προκατα- 
 βολή νπερ ασφαλείας, Etymol. in Wetst., 
 where see examples. " It is remarkable 
 that the same word y\yyi is used in the 
 same sense in Gen. xxxviii. 17, 18, from 
 a^y, to ' mix ' or ' exchange,' and thence 
 to 'pledge,' as Jer. xxx. 21. Neh. v. 3. 
 It was therefore probably derived by the
 
 II. 1, 2. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 G03 
 
 Ίψας υεος, ο και σψρα-γισαμίνος ημάς και οους 
 
 τον αρραβώνα του ττνίνμητος £ν ταις καρόιαις ημών. 
 
 ϋ•Ύω οε μάρτυρα τυν vtov Εττικολουμαι £πι την (μην 
 
 φυγην, οτι " φειδό/υενος υμών ουκίτι ηΧβον ίΐς ΚορινΟυν. 
 
 94' "ο ' ' ~ " ι '\Λ^Ρ 
 
 ^ ουγ ΟΤΙ κνρΐίυομίν νμων της πιστίως, άλλα "^ συΐ'- 
 ipyoi ίσμεν της γ^αρας νμων τ^ yap πιστει ίστηκατί 
 . ΕΚρινα οε εμαυτω τούτο, το jurj παΛιν εν 
 λυτΓτ? προς νμας ελθειν. ει γαρ εγω 
 
 1ι = John vi. 
 
 27. Eph. i. 
 
 13. iv. 311. 
 
 See Kev. vii. 
 
 Sal. Drtn. 
 
 viii. 2C> al. 
 i = Alts ip. 12. 
 krli. V. ή. Eph. 
 
 i. 14 only. 
 
 Gen xxxviii. 
 
 17, 18, 20. 
 1 = here only. 
 m = Luke ix. 
 
 5. Aets xiii. 
 
 51. 
 η Acts XX. 2U 
 
 re It. 
 ο Rom. vi. 9 
 
 rert. 
 ρ Kom xW. 3 
 
 refi. constr., 
 
 here only. 
 Tii 37. Til iii. 
 1 Pet. il. lilrefl". 
 Rom. xiv. 15 al. 
 i. 11. iii. 5. 
 
 AC'K 30-7. 74. 109-16-17 copt Syr goth Ps-Ju.st Did Chr Dam : και ο FG it tol demid 
 Ambr Sedul Pel Bed.— ίΐίΌυς 2192.— αρ^/β.ϋΐίΐ AFGJ : txt, B(e sil)CDE.-for ημ., 
 νμων 17• 115. — 23. for ουκιτι, ovic FG it copt Syr al Ambrst (.ms). — 24. της πιστ. 
 νμων DEFG al vss Aug Ambrst. — for χορας, χάριτος 37- 71• 93. 211 arm. 
 
 Chap. II. 1. for Se, rt D' {et igitur setb) : ynp al. — rec tv λνπη aft (\θ. (corrn of 
 arrangement— see notes), with mss : txt ABCDEFGJK all (40 and more, Tisch) vss ff. — 
 rec παλιΐ' {λθίΐι^, with mss copt al : παλ. tv \υπ. ί\θ. DEF(t 14. 120 it ν Syr goth al 
 Chr Till lat-fF: txt ABCJK all (30 and more, Tisch) syr Thdrt Dam Oec— 2. rec aft 
 και TiQ, ins εστίν {supplementary), with DEFGJK &c vss Orig Chr Thdrt al : om ABC 
 
 TO μη τταΑιν 
 2 ,: ,,^^ 1^.,\ " Χυττω νμας^ 
 
 και τις ο " (υφραίνων μ£ (ΐ μη ο ^ Χυπουμίνος ^ ες εμού ; 
 
 dat., Act.s χχί. 21. q = Rom. ν. 2. ICor. xv.l. r = Acis xx. l<i. 1 C >r. ii. 2. v. 3. 
 
 12 al. 2 Mace. xi. 25. s dat., Rom. xiv. 7 reff. Tit. ii. 14. ss So Rom. xiv. 13. 
 
 tart., Rom xiv. 13 al. u =. 1 Cor. iv. 21 reff. ν Malt. xix. 22 ||. 
 
 w intenog., 1 Cor. T. 2. See Phil. i. 22. χ Rom. xv. 10. Luke ii. 15 al. y = cli. 
 
 Greeks from the language of Phoenician 
 traders, as ' tariff,' ' cargo,' are derived, in 
 English and other modern languages, from 
 Spanish traders." Stanley. 23,^24.] His 
 
 reason for not coming to them. 23. eiri 
 .... ψυχ ] ' against my soul,' — ' cum 
 maximo meo malo, si fallo,' Grot. 
 φ£ΐδόμ€νος νμ.] ' sparing you,' — out of a 
 feeling of compassion for you. oiiKcri, 
 
 ' no more,' viz. after the first time : see 
 Prolegg. to 1 Cor. The following οΰχ οτι 
 κυρ. seems to be added to remove any false 
 inference which might have been drawn 
 from φίι^όμινος as seeming to assert an 
 unreasonable degree of power over them. 
 But why υμών της •ΐΓίστ£ω5 ? He had 
 poioer over them, but it was in matters of 
 discipline, not of faith : over matters of 
 faith not even an Apostle has power ('fides 
 enim prorsus ab hominura jugo soluta 
 liberrimacjue esse debet.' Calv.), seeing it 
 is in each man's faith that he stands before 
 God. And he puts this strongly, that in 
 matters of faith he is only a fellow helper 
 of their joy (the χ^ρα tv τφ nirjTtitiv, 
 Rom. XV. 13), in order to shew them the 
 real department of his apostolic jiower, 
 and that, however exercised, it would not 
 attempt to rule their faith, but only to 
 secure to them, by purifying them, joy in 
 believing. He proceeds to say, that it was 
 the probable disturbance of this joy, which 
 induced him to forego his visit. τη 
 
 iriarci, dat. of the state or condition in 
 which : cf. Gal. v. 1. So Polyb. xxi. 9. 3: 
 'ίατϊ\ Ty uiuvoiq.. 
 
 Chap. II. 1 — 4.] Further explana- 
 tion ON THE REASON OF THE POSTPONE- 
 MENT OF HIS VISIT. 1.] Be is merely 
 transitional, and does not imply any con- 
 trast with what has preceded. Ιμαυτω, 
 not = παρ' ϊμοντψ (as most Comm. and 
 E. v.), but ' dat. commodi,' ' for my own 
 sake,' as is evident by tiie consideration in 
 the next ver. τοντο refers to what 
 follows : see refF. το μή ττάλιν ev 
 λΰττη irpos ίιμάς Ιλθίϊν] ' not again to 
 come to you in grief.' This is the only 
 fair rendering of the words ; implying, that 
 some former visit had been in grief Clearly 
 the first visit Acts xviii. 1 ft"., could not be 
 thus described : we must therefore infer, 
 that an intermediate unrecorded visit had 
 been paid by him. On this subject, comp. 
 ch. xii. 14 ; xiii. 1 and notes : and see Pro- 
 legg. to 1 Cor. § V. €v λύτΓΤ)] is ex- 
 plained in vv. 2, 3 to mean (so Estius, 
 Bengel, Ruckert, Olsli., De Wette, al.) ' in 
 mutual grief :' ' I grieving you (ver. 2), and 
 you grieving me' (ver. 3) : not, as Chrys., 
 al., Paul's grief alone, nor as Meyer, al., 
 grief inflicted on them by Paul. 2.] 
 γάρ, reason why I would not come to you in 
 grief : because I should have to grieve those 
 who formed my proi:)er material for thank- 
 fulness and joy. «γώ has a peculiar 
 emphasis : ' If / cause you grief .... im- 
 plying, ' there are who cause you sufficient. 
 καί prefixed to a question denotes 
 inconsequence on, or inconsistency with, 
 the foregoing supi)Osition or affirmation : 
 so Eur. Med. i;!»»: ώ τίκνα φίλτατο \
 
 604 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους C. 
 
 II. 
 
 ,. 3 
 
 και ί'γραφα ^ τούτο αυτό, Ίνα μη εΧθων Χυπην σγω " αφ"" 
 
 ' ίόΗ μί γ^α'ψίΐν, ^ πε7Γ0(θώς (πι τταντας νμας οτι η 
 
 εμη χαρά πάντων υμών εστίν. ■* ' εκ -γαρ πολλής θλίφίως 
 
 Matt, και '^ συνογης κάργιας eypa^a υμιν ' δία πολλών οακρυων, 
 
 ουγ ινα Λυπηυητε, άλλα 
 
 1. / i • ' - 
 
 πε^(σσοτεοως eig υμάς, 
 
 εμε ^ λελυπηκεν, άλλα απο μίμους, ινα μη ' επ< 
 
 Rom. ϋ. 27 reff. 2 Tim. ii. 2. g arrangt uf words 
 
 zActsxsiv. 1.^ 
 
 ch. vii. 1 1 al. 
 a con.str., Mark 
 
 x.4(l. Luke ωΐ/ 
 
 V. 25. xvii. 1. , , 
 
 Rom. vi. 
 b Acts XX 
 
 21. 
 c constr, 
 
 xxvii.43. 
 
 2 Thess. iii. 
 
 4. %v. dat., 
 ch. i 9. 
 Mark x. 24. 
 
 d = 1 Cor. vii, 
 
 5. cli. Tiii. 
 13. ix. 7. 
 
 e Luke xxl. 25 only. Job xxx. 3. 
 
 GhI.u. lU. hch.i. ISreff 
 
 1 1 Thess. ii. 9. 2 Thess. iii. 8 only t. 
 
 Syr copt Cyr Dam. — 3. και γορ typ. 80. — rec aft ιγραφα, ins νμιν {supplementary), 
 with C'DEFGJK &c vss ff: om ABC 17 am copt arm Dam Ambrst. — τούτο ηντο bef 
 eyp. DEFG it ν Pel Bed; αυτ. τηντ. C Chr Thl : nvro omAcopt: και τούτη οτι 
 eyfinxl/a arm. — aft λυττην ins (πι Χυπην {-Try all) DEFG 31-9. 4>i. 50. 7--4. 120 it ν 
 syr* Pel Bed {see Phil ii. 27)•— rec ιχω, with CDEFGJK &c Thdrt Dam : txt AB 48. 
 i)7-. 72-3 all Chr Thl Oec-comm (.see var read, Phil ii. 27). — for αφ, ιφ FG (de g v). — 
 νμας om 170. — bef (μη om ?/ IdO. — 4. ολλ wa yv. την ay. FG al vss lat-ff : iva yv. 
 T. ay. 93. 211. — for ΐις, προς FG. — 5. aft λίλι/ττ. (1st) ins (με demid slav Ambrst 
 Pelag Bed. — ουχ t/xe D'. — rec αλλ, with DEFG &c : txt ABCJ all. — iva μη επιβαρων 
 
 την α^απην ινα -γνωτε ην (\ω 
 
 "* Ει οε τις ^ ΧεΧυπηκεν, ουκ 
 
 βαρώ, 
 
 ι 27 reff. 2 Tim. ii. 2. 
 iActsxx. 21 xxiv.24al. 
 
 " μητρι yf, σοι ό ov. καπητ (κτας; 
 see other examples in Hartung, Partikel- 
 lehre, i. p. 147. It is best expressed in 
 English by ' then .•' ' who is he then, &c.' 
 as in E. V. — The expl. of Chrys. who has 
 been followed by Erasm., Bengel, Olsh., 
 al., is curious, and certainly inconsistent 
 with the conte.xt : ΰ και λυπώ νμας, χάριν 
 μοι παρΊχετί κάν τοΰτψ μ(yiστηv, οτι 
 δάκνισθε νπο των παρ' Ιμον λίγημίνων. 
 Some of these Comm. refer the sinf/ular to 
 the offender, vv. 5 — 8. But however the 
 words may bear the meaning, and however 
 true the saying might be, it is pretty clear 
 that it would be beside the subject : nay 
 would give a reason the other way, — why 
 he should come to them. 3.] Ιγραψα 
 
 τοΰτο αυτό, ' I put in writing this same 
 thing,' viz. the τοϋτο which I εκριΐΌ, 
 ver. 1 : the announcement of my change of 
 purpose in 1 Cor. xvi. 7, which had occa- 
 sioned the charge of fickleness against him. 
 The theories of Comm. have given rise to 
 various interpp. of τοϋτο αυτό : Chrys. 
 understands, ch. xii. 21 of this same Ep. : 
 — Beza, Meyer, al , my blame of you in the 
 first Ep. : — so Estius, especially I Cor. iv. 
 19. 21 : — Bleck supposes a lost Ep. to be 
 referred to : De Wette wavers, but is 
 disposed with Erasm., Riickert, al., to ren- 
 der ovTO TovTo ' on this accoiuit,' as Plat., 
 Protag. p. 310, aW' αυτά ταΰτα και νυν 
 ηκω : but Meyer rejoins, that this idiom is 
 foreign to the style of Paul. 1 imagine 
 that two meanings are 0))en to us : (1) as 
 above, the announcement which caused the 
 charge of fickleness : (2) the reproaches in 
 the \st Ep. which grieved them. Of these, 
 specious as is the latter on account of the 
 following context, I prefer the former be- 
 
 cause of the τοϋτο in ver. 1. άφ' ων, 
 
 ellipt. for από τούτων, άφ' ων, see retf. 
 ΊΤΐΊτοιθω% . . . .] ' having trust in 
 (reposing trust on) you all, that my joy is 
 (the pres. expressing the purport of the 
 trust when felt) that of all of you:' i. e. 
 trusting that you too would feel that there 
 was sufficient reason for the postponement, 
 if it interfered with our mutual joy. — Meyer 
 well observes, that iravTas ΐψας, in spite of 
 the existence of an anti-pauline faction in 
 the Cor. church, is a true example of the 
 love which πάντα πιστα'κι, πάντα ΐλπΐζ^ι, 
 1 Cor. xiii. 7• 4.] Explanation [yap) 
 
 that he did not write in levity of jmrpose, 
 but under great trouble of mind, — not to 
 grieve them, but to testify his love. €κ, 
 
 of the inducement - διά, of the condition .• 
 he wrote, ' out of much tribulation (in- 
 ward, of spirit, not outward) and anguish 
 {συνοχή, ' atigustiee') of heart, with (q. 
 ' through,' — the state being the vehicle of the 
 action, see reff.) many tears.' τ. άγά- 
 
 ττην, before the conjunction ινα, for special 
 emphasis : see reff. ττίρισσοτβρως — 
 
 ' tha?i to other churches (?)' — so Chrys. (re- 
 ferring to 1 Cor. iv. 15; ix. 2), Theophyl. : 
 Estius thinks, the comparative is not to be 
 pressed, but understood as in ver. 7, — 
 ' exceedingly.' 
 
 5 — 11.] Digressive REFERENCE TO THE 
 
 CASE OF THE INCESTUOUS PERSON, WHOM 
 THE Ap. ORDERS NOW TO BE FORGIVEN, 
 
 AND REINSTATED. From the λίιπιι of the 
 former verses, to him who was one of the 
 principal occasions of that grief, the tran- 
 sition is easy. 5.] Si, transitional. 
 ' Now if any one hath occasioned sorrow 
 (a delicate way of pointing out the one who 
 had occasioned it), he hath grieved, not
 
 3-9. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 605 
 
 παντας νμας. ικαΐΌν τω τοιουτω η ίπιτιμια αυτή m Acts χχϋ. 
 
 ^ ^ << ί ' "2'2. 1 Cor. 
 
 7] ° υπο ^' τιον ^ π\ειονων, ' ωςτε ^τουναντίον μάλλον ΰμας oh^oniy^. 
 
 Γ 'Ο ^ S Λ r t' ~u ' VVisd. iii. IC 
 
 '^αρισασϋαι και ττσρακαΛίσαι, /χηττοις ttj ττερισσοτίοα ο eiiips., see 
 λνπ\] '' καταποθ^ "" ο τοιούτος. ^ διο ^'' τταρακαλω ujuac ^ Je»"'^ '''■ ^' 
 
 χ - ' 5 \ 5 , . 9 V ' - ^ < •' Ι 1 Gal• ϋ• 7. 
 
 κυρωσαι t^ς αυτόν αγαττην - £ΐς τούτο -yaf) κα/ έγραψα, ι ?>■« m. 9 
 
 3 Mace. iii. 22. r = Lnke τϋ. 42, 43. ch. xii. 13. Col. ii. 13. iii. 13. 
 
 t 1 Cor. ix 27 rrff. π — Matt, xxiii. 13 J. 1 Cor. xii. 23. Dan. iv. 33. 
 
 w = w.inf., Rom. xii. 1 al. χ Gal. iii. IS only. Gen. xxiii. 20. Letit. xxv. 30. 
 
 = rh. i.4, SiC. reff. 
 τ 1 Cor. XV. 54 reff. 
 y Rom. xiv. 9 retf. 
 
 FG : τταντας, iva μη (ττιβαρω υμάς Syr. — 6. (ττιτιμησις 44. — η ντζο πλιιονων 
 (πλεονων C) om FG g sett. — 7. μάλλον om AB Syr Aug Thdrt h 1 Dam Thl Oec 
 Ambrst al: ins CJK mss (appy) ν copt syr al Chr, and aft νμας DEFG it goth Thdrt. — 
 9. for εις, κατά 177• — f«' om 112 am copt Syr goth Thdrt Oec Ambrst Sedul. — aft 
 ίγραψ. ins νμιν FG 31 copt al Chr Thdrt Pel Bed {νμων FG). — ίοκιμ. πάντων υμών 
 
 me (not, — ' not only me,' which destroys 
 the meaning, — ' / am not the aggrieved 
 person, but you') but, more or less {'par- 
 tially :' ref.), that I be not too heavy on 
 him (refers to άπό μέρηνς, which qualifies 
 the blame cast on the offender) all of you.' 
 The above punctuation and rendering is 
 adopted by Chrys. (iva μη βαρήσω ΐκηΐ'ον 
 TOP ποριηνηαντα), Beza, Calvin (but not 
 in his text), al., with Meyer, De Wette. 
 But Theodoret, Vulg., Luther, Bengel, 
 Wetst., al., join επιβαρώ πάντας νμ., 
 thus : ' /le hath not grieved me (alone and 
 principally) but only in part (having grieved 
 you also), that I may not lay the fault on 
 all of you,' which I should in this case do, 
 by making myself the only person aggrieved, 
 and classing you with the offender. But 
 this can hardly be ; αλλά must be ει μή. — 
 Another way is adopted by Mosheim, Bill- 
 roth, and Olsh., — to join ττάντας with 'iva 
 μή επιβ., — ' but in part, — that I burden 
 not all, — you:' — επιβαρώ being variously 
 understood, either (1) of including you in 
 the blame of the offender, or (2) as Olsh., 
 of extending to them all the burden of this 
 sorrow ; — he supposes it to be ironically 
 spoken ; - their highest praise would have 
 been that all had been troubled. But 
 as Meyer remarks, irony is entirely out 
 of place in this part of the Ep. The mean- 
 ings are well discussed in Stanley. 
 6.] Ικανόν, sc. either ίστιΐ' or ϊστω. 
 τω τοιοΰτω] Meyer remarks on the expr. 
 as being used in mildness, not to designate 
 any particular person : but the same desig- 
 nation is employed in 1 Cor. v. 5, παρα- 
 δονίΌΐ τυν τυιοντον τψ σατανά. 
 ή Ιπιτ. αίίτη] ' This punishment' (= Ιττι- 
 τίμΐίΐν, see ref.) : what ii was, we are un- 
 able with certainty to say ; but 1 Cor. v. 
 seems to point to excommunication as form- 
 ing at least a jiart of it. But it was not a 
 formal and public, only a voluntary indivi- 
 dual abstinence from communion with him, 
 as is shewn by ϋπύ τών τΓλ€ΐονων : the 
 
 anti-pauline party probably refusing com- 
 pliance with the Ap.'s command, 
 ίκανον] ' enough,' not in duration, though 
 that would be the case, but in magnitude : 
 sufficient, as having produced its desired 
 effect, penitence. 7.] ' so that (con- 
 
 seq. on Ίκανήν) on the contrary you 
 (should) rather (than continue the punish- 
 ment) forgive and comfort him,' &c. 
 !Meyer denies that ίείν should be supplied, 
 and makes ojqtc depend immediately on 
 ικανόν, — ' enough, for you to forgive and 
 console him.' τη ΊΤΐρισσοτέρα. λυτττ]] 
 
 not, as Ε. λ^., ' by overmuch sorrow .•' but 
 (as Aleyer), 'by the increase of sorrow' 
 which will come on the continuance of his 
 punishment. καταττοθη does not set 
 
 any definite result of the excessive sorrow 
 before them, such as apostasy or suicide, 
 but leaves them to imagine such possible. 
 
 8.] κυρώσαι, hardly (as usually un- 
 derstood) to ratify by a public decree of 
 the church : if (see above) his exclusion 
 was not by such a decree, but only by the 
 abstinence of individuals from his society, 
 the ratifying their love to him would consist 
 in the majority making it evident to him 
 that he was again recognized as a brother. 
 
 9.] Reason why they should now be 
 ready to shew love to him again, — the end 
 of Paul's writing to them having been ac- 
 complished by their obeying his order. 
 ' For to this end I also wrote :' the καί 
 signifying that my former epistle, as well 
 as my present exhortation, tended to this, 
 viz. the testing your obedience. Meyer 
 (ed. 2) explains the καί as implying that 
 other orders to the same effect were sent by 
 word of mouth. He alludes beyond doubt 
 to the former Ep., ch. v. Yet the ancient 
 Comm., Chrys., &c., and Erasm., Wolf, 
 Bengel, al. (not Olsh., as De Wette says), 
 interpret it of this Ep. : which certainly is 
 grammatically allowable (see I Cor. v. '.), 
 note), but opposed to the context (see vv. 
 .'{, 4, besides the manifest sense here, that
 
 606 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 II. 
 
 ζ Rcim. ν. < 
 
 rcfl'. 
 a = ver. 12 
 
 ίνα yvCo την ^ Βοκιμην υμών, ίΐ '^ εις τταντα υπήκοοι tare, abcd 
 ω οε τι yapiLiaue, κayω και yap syω ο κενά- JK 
 
 ix 8 Gal. '^ ^^ ■'"' γ^ηριί,ίσοί, καγω και yap εγω ο 
 
 bAcisvii'.so ρισμαι, ει τι κί"^αρισμαι, οι υμάς, εν '^ προςωπω 
 
 "^Vcts χΙ'ν'Ιί " •γριεπ"οϋ, tVa /ur) '' πλεοι/εκ:τ»)0(ι»;(ίεΐ' ύττό του σατανά' ου 
 
 18. v^'P αυτού τα νοι^ματα α-ννοουμεν. 
 
 SeeVatt bAi/wy οε ε/ς τηί' Ιρωαοα εις το ευαγγελιον του 
 
 άΛ:\ύ'2.-ί\ί. γυριστού, και ^ θύρας μοι ^ ανίω-γμενης εν κυρ'ιω, ^^ ουκ 
 
 1 fhess. iv.6onlj'. ρ. Ezek. χχϋ. 27. e ch. iii. 14. iv. 4. χ. 5. xi. 3. Phil. iv. 7 only. P.f f Ri>m. i. 
 
 13r<ffl•. gActsxiT. 27. 1 Cor. xvi. 9. Col. iv.3. P. 
 
 FG g: for yv. τ. Sok. υμ., δοκιμάσω νμας arm : probarem or scirem Ambrst-edd. — for 
 t(, η ({}.') AB: ως 109.-10. rec και fyw, with C'FGJK &c Thdrt al : txt ABC^DE al 
 Chr Dam. — rec fi η <ιχ"ρ• ψ κεχηρ., with D-(DE see beIow)JK &c syr al Thdrt Thl 
 Oec: allaliter: txt(oomD: φ Ό^Ε 31-7 : ο κίχ. om 2. 4G1-7. 71. 109 Chr-comm Thdrt- 
 ms Aug : for « τι, rivi Aug : η τι κ(χ. cm 39. 73 a;th Arabr2 PaCj) ABC(DE)FG al it 
 V Dam Jei-j Abrst Pel Pacj al. — ως iv προςωπ. 73. — τον χ^). 112: του θ. 17• — 
 12. Sia το tvayy. FG Dam : δια του εναγγίλιου DE : propter evang. it ν lat-ff. — for 
 χφ., Qtov IT•— και θύρα μοι ην (g has esset over ην) εω^μενη FG. — ιινεωγμενης D(E?) 
 
 the object of his writing had been accom- 
 plished). ' That I might know the proof 
 of you, whether in all things (emphatii;) 
 ye are obedient.' This was that one 
 among the various objects of his first Ep., 
 which belonged to the matter at present in 
 hand, and which he therefore puts forward : 
 not by any means implying that he had no 
 other view in writing it. 10.] Another 
 
 assurance to encourage them in forgiving 
 and reinstating the penitent; — that they 
 need not be afraid of lack of apostolic autho- 
 rity or confirmation of their act from above 
 — he would ratify their forgiveness by his 
 sanction. ω 8e . . .] ' Your forgiveness 
 
 is mine :' not said generally (as Meyer), but 
 indefinitely, pointing at the one person here 
 spoken of and no other. κάγώ, scil. 
 
 χπρι'ζο^αι. Then he substantiates this as- 
 surance, by further assuring them, that his 
 forgiveness of any fault in this case, if it 
 takes place, takes place on their account. 
 Meyer's (and Riickert's) rendering of κ€- 
 χάρισμαι as passive, disturbs the whole 
 sense of the jiassage, besides being incon- 
 sistent with the N. T. usage of the word, 
 see reff. ev ΐΓροςώττω χριστοΰ] either 
 
 * in the presence of Christ,' as in Prov. 
 (ref.), — so Theodoret, Erasm,, Beza, Calv., 
 Olsh., De W.,— or, and far better, ' in the 
 person of Christ,' acting as Christ, in the 
 same way as he had commanded the punish- 
 ment, fi' τφ ονόματι του κνηίου ημών 
 'IjjtoS, 1 Cor. v. 4 : so Vulg., Estius 
 (who argues the matter at some length), 
 'Wetst.,al. 11. ϊνα μή . . .] follows out 
 
 the h' ϋμας — ' to prevent Satan getting 
 any advantage over us ' (the Church ge- 
 nerally : or better, us Apostles), in robbing 
 us of some of our people, — viz. in causing 
 the penitent offender to despair and fall away 
 
 from the faith. Chrys. remarks : ττλεον- 
 εζιαν είκότως εκάλεαεν, οηιν και ύιά των 
 ήμετί-ί)ων κρατι). το yap δι' αμαρτίας 
 λαμβάνίΐν, ϊόιην αΰτψ εστί• το μίντοι δια 
 μετανοίας, οΰκίτι• ήμέτεμον yap, ουκ εκεί- 
 νον, το οπλυν. The word has yet another 
 propriety : the offender was to be delivered 
 over τφ aaTavq, εις ΰλεθρον της σαρκός — 
 care must be taken lest we πλευνεκτηθώμεν 
 νπό τοϋ σ., and his soul perish likewise. 
 ov γαρ . . .] αΰτοΰ before τα νοήμ. 
 for emphasis: — such devices, as coming 
 from him, are special matters of observa- 
 tion and caution to every Christian minister ; 
 much more to him who had the care of all 
 the churches. See 1 Pet. v. 8. — The per- 
 sonality and agency of the Adversary can 
 hardly be recognized in plainer terms than 
 in both these passages. 
 
 12 — 17.] He proceeds (after the di- 
 gression) TO SHEW THEM WITH WHAT 
 ANXIETY HE AWAITED THE INTELLIGENCE 
 
 FROM Corinth, an» how thankful he 
 
 WAS FOR THE SEAL OF HIS APOSTOLIC 
 MINISTRY FURNISHED BY IT. The Only 
 
 legitimate connexion is that with vv. 1 — 4. 
 hi serves to resume the main sub- 
 ject after parenthetical matter : so Herod, 
 viii. 67, — ίπει ών ά'τίκατο ες τάς 'Αθήνας 
 πάντες ούτοι πλην ΙΙαρίων Πάριοι £έ 
 ΰπολειφθέΐ'τες εν ΚνΟνψ Ικαραδήκεον τον 
 πόΧεμον κϊΊ άποβήηεται' οΐ δε λοιιτοι ώς 
 άπικο)'Το ες το Φάληροί', κ. γ. λ. See Har- 
 tung, Partikellehre, i. 174. 12.] To 
 
 Troas, viz. on his journey from Ephesus, 
 Acts XX. 1, 2. 1 Cor. xvi. 5—9. " The art. 
 perhaps indicates the region of ' the Troad,' 
 rather than the city." Stanley. eis το 
 
 ίύαγγ. τ. χρ.] ' for (the purpose of preach- 
 ing) the Gospel of Christ.' He had been 
 before at Troas, but the vision of a Mace-
 
 10—14. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους β. 
 
 607 
 
 Ιι .' i " k - / ' 1 - ν r - 
 
 £σχίϊΛ.α ανίσιν τω πνίυματι μου, τω μ7] tvptiv με ί λ. ι. g. τϋ. 
 Tirol' τον α^ίλφον μου' άλλα "^ αποτα^άμίνος αυτοις, ^^^'^^^^"-^^ 
 
 n 'y~\rt ' Λ τ ^ ' 14 τ» " <^' /~4 " DQ ' ~ k Acts χτϋ. 16 
 
 ε^ηλϋον ίΐς ΆΙακίόονιαν. 1ω οε ϋεω yapic τω r<-ff- 
 
 παντοτί ° θριαμρίυοντι νμας εν τω γυριστώ και την x/,t'cyfop. 
 οσμην της "γνώσεως αυτού φανερονντι οι ημών εν winer.Ms. 
 
 m Acts xviii. 18 leff. η = John i. 44. ch. viii. 17. nn Rom. vi. 17. 1 Cor. xv. 57 al. ο Col. 
 
 ii. lb onlj t• ρ Epli. v. 2 ret). q gtu. object., ch. x. 5. TJahai.3lal.fr. 
 
 9F (see FG above).— 13. iv τω μη DE Μ.— του μη C^ 73 Thdrt-ms : το μη 109.— 
 ίυ^ισκίΐν D'. — (^£ is omd by mistake in Grsb aud Scliolz.) — 14. for τω χρ., χρ. ιησον 17• 
 
 donian asking for help prevented his re- 
 maining there. He now revisited it, pur- 
 posely to stay and preach. On his return 
 to Asia he remained there seven days, Acts 
 XX. (i — 12. και Θ\5ρα5 . . .] 'and an 
 
 opportunity of apostolic action being 
 afforded me :' ev κυρίω defines the soti of 
 action impUed, and to which the door was 
 opened. It is remarkable tliat in speaking 
 of this journey, though not of the same 
 place, Paul uses this expression, 1 Cor. xvi. 
 9. Compare the interesting passage at 
 Troas on his return from Europe the next 
 spring. Acts xx. (i — 13. 13. Ισχηκα 
 
 αν€σιν] perf. in the sense of aorist, as ch. 
 i. 9. — ' I had not rest for my spirit ' (not, 
 'in my spirit:' compare ούχ (νμυνσα ή 
 ττερκττιρά άνάπαυσιν τοΙς ποτϊν αντης, 
 Gen. viii. 9). He could not with any tran- 
 quilUty prosecute the spiritual duties opened 
 to him at Troas. τω μή ίίιρ•] ' by 
 
 (reason of) my not finding :' see reff. — 
 Paul had sent Titus to Corinth, ch. viii. C ; 
 xii. 18, partly to finish the collection for the 
 saints, but principally to bring intelligence 
 respecting the effect of the first Ep. Pro- 
 bably it had been tised that they should 
 meet at Troas. τ. aSeX. μου implies 
 
 a relation closer than merely that of Chris- 
 tian brotherhood — my colleague in the 
 Apostleship. αΰτοΐς] the disciples 
 
 there : understood from the context. 
 14 — 17.] Omitling, an preaU}iposed,thefact 
 of his having met icilh Titus in Macedonia, 
 and the nature of the intelligence ivhich he 
 brought, — he grounds on these a thanks- 
 giving for that intelligence, and a magnifi- 
 cation of his apostolic office. — It is evi- 
 dently beside the purpose to refer this 
 thanksgiving to the ditt'usion of the gospel 
 in Macedonia (as Flatt), or in Troas (as 
 Emmerhng), or to general considerations 
 (as Bengel) : — both the context, and the 
 language itself (see below), shew that its 
 reference is to the effects of the a])o.stolic 
 reproof on the Corinthians. 14. θριαμ- 
 
 βεύοντι] ' leading us in triumph,' see ref. 
 Two kinds of persons were led in triumph : 
 the participators of the victory, and the 
 victims of the defeat. In Col. the latter 
 
 are plainly meant ; here, according to many 
 Comm. (Calv., Eisner, Bengel, De Wette, 
 al.), ihe former : which however is never 
 elsewhere the reference of the word, but it 
 always implies trittmphare de aliquo. ΛVetst. 
 quotes this sense, βασιλι'ϊς ίθριάμβίοσε, 
 Plut. Rom. p. 38 d, and in four other 
 places : — and the Scholiast to Hor. Od. i. 
 37• 31, who relates of Cleopatra, "invidens 
 Privata deduci superbo Non humihs muHer 
 triumpho," that she refused the terms of- 
 fered her by Augustus, saying, οΰ Θρκιμ- 
 βίυθήτομαι. Meyer in consequence under- 
 stands it in this sense here : ' who ever 
 triumphs over us,' i. e. ' who ceases not to 
 exhibit us, His former foes, as overcome by 
 Him :' — and adds in a note, " Remark the 
 emphatic ττάντοτι, prefi.ved, to which the 
 similarly emphatic iv παντι τόπψ, at the 
 end, corresponds. God begun His triumph 
 over the ημΰς at their conversion ; — over 
 Paul, at Damascus, where he made him a 
 servant, from being an enemy. This tri- 
 umph he ever continues, not ceasing to 
 exhibit before the world tliese His former 
 foes, by the results of their present service, 
 as overcome by Him. This, in the case 
 before us, was efifected by Paul, in that (as 
 Titus brought him word to ^Macedonia) his 
 Ep. had produced such good results in Co- 
 rinth." And I own that this, notwithstand- 
 ing that De W. objects to it as a strange 
 way of expressing thankfulness for deliver- 
 ance from our anxiety (but is it so to those 
 who look beneath the surface .' In our 
 spiritual course, our only true triumphs 
 are, God's triumphs over us. His defeats 
 of us, are our only real victories), yet ap- 
 pears to me to be the only admissible ren- 
 dering. We must not violate the known 
 usage of a word, and invent another for 
 which there is no precedent, merely for the 
 sake of imagined perspicuity. Such is that 
 of ' to make to triumph ' (Beza, Estius, 
 Grot., al.) : — μαθητεύην. Matt, xxviii. 18, 
 and βαηιλίΰίΐν, I Kings viii. 22, are not 
 cases in point, their sense being, ' to make 
 a disciple,' ' to make a king,'— whereas that 
 required for θριαμβίΰίΐν, would be, ' tri- 
 umphaiorem facere.' χυρεναν, for 'to
 
 608 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 Π. 15-17. 
 
 S- 1 Cor. ϋ. β. τταντί τόττω. ^^ ΟΤΙ γριστοϋ ^ ίυω^ία ίσμίν τω θίω ^ ^ν Α,Η£Ρ 
 uR.fra.ii.is τοις ^ σω^ομενοις και ^ ευ τοίς " άττολλυμό'οις, ' οίς JK 
 ' fcir χ" 2ΐ' ''*^*' ^ οσμή εκ: θανάτου "'εις θάνατον, ^ οίς δε '' οσ/α»/ εκ 
 w = Rom.T.ir, ζωίίς ''" Ης Ζ,ωην. και "" πξ)ος ταϋτα τις "ικανός; 'ου 
 
 reB. Arts xi. ,» fy' ΛΛ^ζ Λ' ^Λ' " 
 
 •S- -ναρ εσαεν ως ^ οι ττολλοι κ:απ>}ΛευονΓες τον λο-γυν του 
 
 χ here οηΙν. / Γ Γ = ^ 5>f>/i- 
 
 iri-^'^ee Otol•, α\Χ "ως ίζ " ειλικ:|θΐνειας, αλλ " ως εκ θεού. 
 
 Col. ί. 12. Q / '' ίί "^ CC ' '"ΛΛ" 
 
 y Rom. ν. 15. κοτίνωττιον του υίου εν γριστω ΛαΛουμεν. 
 
 χϋ. 5. 1 Cor. Ai ι. r• 
 
 a = John i. 14. 
 
 b 1 Cor. T. 8 reff. 
 
 c Rom. iv. 17 reff. 
 
 80.— 15. εν τω Θιω 92.— 16. οαμην (2ce) DE.— rec om εκ (2ce) (corrn to suit the appa- 
 rent sense), with DEFGJK &c vss Chr h 1 Thdrtj Cyfj Thl Oec latt : ins AB (has it 
 twice, Tisch, ed 2) C 10. I?. 31-7. 47. 80 copt seth goth (2nd only) Clem Origj Dial 
 Nyss.— 17. for πολλοί, λοιποί DEFGJ 23. 39. 44-6-8. 72 to 4 all vss (not d e ν copt al : 
 g has both) Chr Thdrt al (not Dam Oec-text Iren Jer all) : ως πολ. Thl-ed.— for 
 καπη\(νοντ., ταλαντευοντες 4^ — άλλα Β. — ως om FG al it ν copt goth Iren latt. — 
 ολλ (2nd) om FG it demid al syr Iren all (not Jer) ; et Syr al. — for κητενωττ., κητενανη 
 (see ch xii. 19, F.ph i. 4, Col i. 22) ABC 1. 17- 3?. (>7• 93. 211 (39 has both) Chr 
 (Mtt's msj): txt DEFGJK most mss Bas Chrj Thdrt Dam [Dam ed και ενωπ.'] al. — 
 bef θ(ον om του (Jo corresp with εκ θ. before: but the art here is significant as giving 
 soleiraiiti/) ABCD' 17• 37- 46. 57. 73. 80. 93. 114. 211 Bas: ins D'EFGJK most mss 
 Chr Thdrt Dam al. 
 
 make to dance,' is more to the point ; οΰπω 
 καταπανσομίν μούσας, a'i μ' έχήρενπαν, 
 Eur. Here. Fur. G88, — τάχα σ εγώ μάλλον» 
 χο(>ενσω, ib. 873 : — but the Ap.'s own usage 
 in Col., in my mind, decides the question. 
 See also the following context. ev τω 
 
 Xp., as usually, 'in our connexion with,' 
 ' as members of,' ' Christ :' not, ' bg Christ.' 
 την όσμ.ή)'] The similitude is not 
 that of a sacrifice, but still the same as be- 
 fore : during a triumph, sweet spices were 
 thrown about or burnt in the streets, which 
 were θυμιαμάτων πλ>ιρεις, Plut. ^mil. p. 
 272 (cited by Dr. Burton). As the fact of 
 the triumph, or approach of the triumphal 
 procession, was made known by these odours 
 far and wide, so God diffuses by our means, 
 who are the materials of His triumph, the 
 sweet odour of the knowledge of Christ (who 
 is the Triumpher, Col. ii. 15). rr\s 
 
 γνώσ.] genit. of apposition : the odour, 
 which, in the interp. of the figure, is the 
 knowledge. αΰτοΰ, — χριστοί', cf. next 
 
 verse. 15.] Here the propriety of the 
 
 figure is lost, and the source of the odour 
 identified with the Apostles themselves. 
 'For we are a sweet savour of Christ 
 (gen. object., of tliat which was diftused by 
 the odour, viz. the knowledge of Christ. 
 ' Iiistar fragrantis cujusdam unguenti, seu 
 florum aut herbarum, famam nominis ejus, 
 velut bonum et suavem odorem, . . . spar- 
 gimus apud omnes.' Estius) among those 
 who are being saved, and among those 
 who are perishing ' (σαιζ. and άπολλ., see 
 note, 1 Cor. i. 18). κύν σώζωνταί τίνες, 
 καν άτΓολλνωνται, το tvayykXiov μένει 
 
 εχυν την οικειαν αρετην, κ. ^ιμεις μενομεν 
 τοντο Οίτες οττερ Ισμίν, Theophyl., mainly 
 from Chrys., who proceeds και καθάπερ το 
 φώς, κα.}' σκoτίζy τους ασθενείς, φως 'εστί, 
 καίτοι σκότιζαν κ. το μέλι, καν ττικρόν y 
 τοΙς νοσοϋσι, -γλυκύ τήΐ' ψύσιν εστίν ο'ντιο 
 και το εΰαγγίλιον ενωοίς εστί, κάι> άττολ- 
 λύωνταί τιΐ'ΐς άττιστονντες. Horn. ν. 467 
 Ο. 16 a.] ' to the one (the latter) an 
 
 odour arising from death and tending to 
 death: to the others (the former) an 
 odour arising from life and tending to 
 life.' The odour was, Christ,— who to the 
 unbelieving is Death, a mere announcement 
 of a man crucified,— and working death by 
 unbelief: but to the believing. Life, an an- 
 nouncement of His Resurr. and Life, — and 
 working in them life eternal, by faith in Him. 
 The double working of the Gospel is set forth 
 in Matt. xxi. 44. Luke ii. 34. John ix. 39. 
 16 b.] In order to understand the con- 
 nexion, we must remember tliat tlie purpose 
 of vindicating his apostolic commission is in 
 the mind of Paul, and about to be intro- 
 duced by a description of the office, its re- 
 quirements, and its holders. This jjurpose 
 already begins to press into its service the 
 introductory and apologetic matter, and to 
 take every opportunity of manifesting itself. 
 In order then to exalt the dignity and shew 
 tlie divine authorization of his oflice, he 
 asks this question : ' And (see remarks at 
 ver. 2) for (to accomplish) these things 
 (this so manifold working in the believers 
 and unbelievers, — this emission of the 
 εϋωδία χριστού every where), who is suf- 
 ficient "!' He does not express the answer,
 
 ΠΙ. 1,2. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 609 
 
 III. Αξ)^ομίΘα πάλιν ''εαυτούς '^ συνιστάνΐΐν ; i^distpers., 
 
 μη \pyJtoμev ως τίνες ^συστατικών επιστολών προς icor7x'"': 
 
 r - i\,v-r_ Or» Λν,- ,.,, ch.x. 12, 
 
 ΰμας, η ΐζ υμών; ^ η επιστολή ήμων νμίΐς f^rt, ^ΑΊ'.ν. ΐ2. 
 ' ε-γ-γί-γοαμμενη εν τσις καξ)^Ίαις ημών, ' -γινωσκομενη καΐ I'Jr"?»! 
 
 f Kom. xvi. 2 ri-ff. g here onlyf• Arrian, Epictet. ii. 3. h Luke x. 20 only f. 1 Mace, xiii.' 
 
 i A.;ls viii. 3i) rcH. See ch. i. 13. 
 
 Chap. III. 1. for πάλιν, mivvv 4. — σννισταν BD• 17. .3!): -σταναι FG Thdrt 
 (-irrai'fi)' ms,) : txt ACD^EJK most niss if. — rec ft μ>] (which Met/ prefers, thinking 
 the η seemed easier to the transcribers than ti : but in my view, it was the μη which 
 created ihe difficulty, and from its apparently awkward posn in the c/iiestion, led to the 
 substitution of tt μη, by ivhich the interrogn is got rid of), with AB(e sil)JK &c Chr 
 Dam al: txt CDEFG 31-7- 44-6. GV. 74. 80. 1 132-23--7i). 219' all (it ν aut numqiiid)'^s 
 Thdrt lat-ft". — χρηίωμίν (J Scholz) 219'. — ωςπίβ AD' 93. — rec at end, add συητατικων, 
 with D^(Di -(Cfn)EFG(add ίπιστυλων FG g)JK &c vss (add προς trtpovg 23-marg 
 syrf) Dam al (Chr-comm has η ίξ νμ. συστ. (πιστ. προς αλλονς : simy Thdrt) (sup- 
 plementary glosses, as the varr shew) : cm ABC 17• 23-. G^^. 80 ν copt arm Chr Thdrt 
 (exc ms,) lat-ff.— 2. η ίπ. γαρ arm slav Chrj. — for ημών (1st), υμοιν 4. 93. 219' Thdrt- 
 ms. — ίγγιγραμμίνοι ίι5. 112: -^ί-^ραμμίνοι 52: -γίγραμμενη 32.45. — for ημωΐ' (2nd) 
 νμων 17• 219' demid seth al. — -γινωακομίνοι κ. αναγινωσκομενοι 52. — κ. αναγ. cm 109. 
 
 but it is too evident to escape any reader, — 
 indeed it is supplied in terms by ch. iii. 5, 
 ονχ ΟΤΙ Λφ' ίαντών ικανοί ίσμιν, . . . άλλ' 
 r) ίκ«ΐ'ό-/;ς ημών ίκ τον θίον. — Meyer 
 remarks that -ττρος ταΰτα is put first, in 
 the place of emphasis, to detain the atten- 
 tion on its weighty import, and then τις 
 purposely put otl' till the end of the ques- 
 tion, to introduce the interrogation unex- 
 pectedly ; as in Herod, v. 33, — (τοί Si κ. 
 Γούτοιαι τοίσι πρηγμασι τι ίατι ; — Plat. 
 Symp. p. 204, ό 6()ώΐ' τών καλών τι ΐοφ; 
 
 17.] οί ΐΓολλοί here points definitely at 
 those false teachers, of whom he by and 
 by, ch. X. — xii., speaks more plainly. 
 6σ•μ€ν . . . καττηλίΰοντες] ' are not in the 
 habit of adulterating. (The word κά- 
 ■πηλός originally signifies any kind of huck- 
 ster or vender, but especially of wine, — 
 and thence, from the frecpiency of adultera- 
 tion of wine, καπτιλίϋω implied to adul- 
 terate; in Isa. i. 22, we have οι κάπηλοί 
 σον μίσγονσι τον οίνον 'ύδαη : in the 
 Etymol. (Wetst.), κάπηλος, 6 οΐνοπώλης 
 . . . 6 St Αιτ^^υλος τα (όλια πάντα καλΰ 
 κάπηλα' ' κάπηλα προψίρων τεχνήματα :' 
 in Lucian, Hermotim. 59 (ib.), 'ότι και 
 φιλόσοφοι άπούίδυνται τα μαθήματα, ώς- 
 7Γ((0 οί κάπηλοι, κίρασάμενοί -γε υ'ι πολλοί, 
 και δολώσοντες, και κακομίτρινντες. See 
 many more exx. in Wetst. — The same is 
 expressed ch. iv. 2, by δολοΐντί? τ. λόγον 
 τ. titov) the word of God, but as (' ut qui") 
 from sincerity (the subjective regard of 
 tlie speakers), but as from God (the objec- 
 tive regard — a (Icpcndence on the divine 
 suggestion) we speak before God (with a 
 consciousness oi His presence) in Christ' 
 (not ' in the name of Christ,' Grot., al., 
 nor ' concerning Christ,' — Beza, al. : nor 
 
 Vol. II. 
 
 ' according to Christ,' Calv. : but as usual, 
 'in Christ;' as united to Him, and mem- 
 bers of His Body, and employed in His 
 work). 
 
 Ch. III. 1 — VI. 10.] Beginning with 
 
 A DISOWNING OF SELF-RECOMMENDATION, 
 THE Ap. proceeds to speak CONCERN- 
 ING HIS APOSTOLIC OFFICE AND HIM- 
 SELF AS THE HOLDER OF IT, HIS FEEL- 
 INGS, SUFFERINGS, AND HOPES, PARTLY 
 WITH REGARD TO HIS CONNEXION WITH 
 
 THE Corinthians, but for the most 
 
 PART in GENERAL TERMS. 1 3.] 
 
 He disclaims a spirit of self-recommenda- 
 tion. 1.] αρχ., 'are we beginning'?' 
 Ίτάλιν, alluding to a charge probably made 
 against him of having done this in his 
 former ep. : perhaps in its opening section, 
 and in some passages of chs. v. ix. and in 
 ch. xiv. 18; xv. 10 al.— see 2 Cor x. 18. 
 ή ν•Ά ΧΡ•] 'Or do we want (the 
 μί] gives an ironical turn to the question, 
 which is more strongly expressed in the 
 rec. reading ti μή, — ' unless it be thought, 
 that' . . . .) as some (so τινις, 1 Cor. iv. 
 18; XV. 12. Gal. i. 7, of the teachers who 
 opposed him. Probably these persons had 
 come recommended to them, by whom 
 does not appear, whether by churches or 
 Apostles, but most likely by the former (ΐξ 
 υμών), and on their departure requested 
 similar recommendations from the C'orinth- 
 ian church to others), letters of recommen- 
 dation to you (ίπιπτ. συητατικοι are fully 
 illustrated by Suicer, Thes. in voc. Among 
 other passages he cites the 13th canon of 
 the council of Chalcedon : ξ,ίνους κλη- 
 ρικούς Kui άyvώστovς εν htpif πι'Λει 
 δίχα συστατικών γραμμάτων τοΟ Ιδιου 
 ΙτΓίσκόττου μηΰέ υλως μηι'αμον λίίτυνρ- 
 
 R Ά
 
 610 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 ΠΙ. 
 
 it., ch. 
 
 ' ανα'^ινωσκομενη νπο πάντων ανθρώπων, ^ ^ φανίρουμίνοι abcd 
 
 viii. ΙΗ. 
 
 •γί-γραμμίνη ου 
 
 £V πλαί,ιν 
 
 4 
 
 2 Tim. i. 18. 
 1 Pet. i. 12. 
 iv. lu al. 
 
 kk 2 John 12. 
 
 3 John 13 
 onlyt- 
 
 1 Heb. is. 4 ( 
 
 only. ExoD. KIVOIQ. 
 xxxi. 18. _ 
 
 "i^^"Ji.lo χριστού 
 
 only. Esod. ^ \ f 
 
 1. c. al. Aoyicsaa 
 
 m Rom. vii. 14 ' 
 
 reff. Ezek. xxxvi. 26. 
 r = Rom. iii. 28. (Jer. xi. 19.) 
 
 on ΐστί ϊπιστολη χριστοΰ ^ιακονηΰίίσα νφ ΐ]μων, " 6γ- 
 ^^ μίλανι, άλλα πνίυματι θίοϋ Ζώντος, ουκ 
 
 EFG 
 JK 
 
 " ΧιθΙναις, άλλα εν ' πΧαΙ,ιν καρόιαις σαρ- 
 Ώίποίθησιν δε τοιαυτην έγομΕν ota τοϋ 
 
 προς 
 }αί τ( 
 
 τον 
 αφ 
 
 ηον 
 ίαντων 
 
 5 ρ 
 
 ^Χ 
 
 OTt 
 
 χο^ί 
 
 ως ' ίξ 
 
 η ch . ί. 1 ϋ reff. 
 
 S John V. 19 re 
 
 ικανοί ίσμίν 
 εαυτών, αλλ η 
 
 pcb.i. 24. qch.ii.lR. 
 
 —for ναντων, των FG.— 3. for ημ., νμων 109.— και tyytyp. Β 67^ 74 ν arm Jer Pel 
 Bed: γίγραμμινη 8!».— ^ιΑαντ/ 44.— ίΐ' πνίυματι 37. — πλανΚιν (2ce) D(E?).— rec 
 aWa £Γ, with (Β.') &c : txt AB(appy)CDEFGJ &c.— rec καρίιπς {see note), with 
 (no MS?) mss Orig Chr Thdrt Dam al Iren HU all, vss (cordis: goth cordium) : 
 txt ABCD(EF?)GJ(K.') all syr Oec ; Thdrt-comm says, i) μεν γαρ {ειαθήκη) πλαξΐν 
 ίνίκυλάφθη Xi^'ivaic, ι) δι ταΐς λογικα'ις ίνίγράψη καρδίαις.—ί. for (χομεν, εχω Α, 
 εχωμ^ν 46.— if om 80. — του om 209^—5. rec ικαν. εημ. αφ εαντ. with JK &c syr al 
 Chr Thdrt Dam al : a<p εαυτ. tic. εσμ. EC 37. 73 copt arm Bas Antioch {attempts to 
 connect ικανοί and αφ εαυτ.): txt ADEFG it ν goth lat-ff : αφ εαν. om 139 Syr Augj : 
 αφ om η.—λογιζεσθαι CDEFG 91 : txt ABJK most mss ff. — τι om Β (Birch, not 
 Bentl). — ως om C. — εξ, αυτών FG al (so also Lachm reads : and Tisch, ed 2, but appy by 
 
 yt7v ; and Epist. xi. of Basil, which has 
 this inscription : Εϋσεβίψ ετα'ιρψ συστα- 
 τική ίπι Κυριακφ πρεσβυτέρψ, " Euse- 
 bio sodali commendatitia Cyriaci presby- 
 teri "), or from youl' — The rec. συστατι- 
 κών at the end, as well as συστ. επι- 
 στολών, have probably been glosses, in- 
 serted (the ancient MSS having no stops) 
 to prevent εξ ΰμ. being taken with r) εττιστ. 
 following. 2.] ' Ye are our epistle 
 
 (of commendation), written on our hearts 
 (not borne in our hands to be shewn, but 
 engraven, in the consciousness of our work 
 among you, on our hearts. There hardly 
 can be any allusion, as Olsh. thinks, to the 
 twelve jewels engraven with the names of 
 the tribes and borne on the breast-plate of 
 the High Priest, Exod. xxviii. 15. The 
 plural seems to be used, as so often in this 
 Ep., — see e. g. ch. vii. 3. 5, — of Paul him- 
 self only), known and read (a play on yiv. 
 and iij'nyti'., as at ch. i. 13) by all men 
 (because all men are aware, what issue my 
 work among you has had, and receive me 
 the more favourably on account of it. But 
 * all men ' includes the Corr. themselves ; 
 his success among them was his letter of 
 recommendation to them as well as to 
 others /row them), 3.] manifested 
 
 to be (that ye are) an epistle of Christ 
 (i.e. tvritten by Christ, — not, as Clirys., 
 al., concerning Christ : — He is the Recom- 
 mender of us, the Head of tlie church and 
 Sender of us His ministers) which was 
 ministered (aor.) by us (i. e. carried about, 
 served in the tcay of ministration by us as 
 tabellarii, — not, as ^Meyer and De W. and 
 al., ivritten by us as amanuenses : see 
 
 below), having been inscribed, not with 
 ink, but with the Spirit of the living 
 God (so the tables of the law were γε-γραμ- 
 μέναι τφ δακτίιλψ τον θεού, Exod. xxxi. 
 18), not on stone tables (as the old law, 
 ib.) but on (your) hearts, (which are) 
 tables of flesh ' (Meyer calls the reading 
 καρίιαις a mistake of the pen. But surely 
 internal as well as external evidence is 
 strong in its favour, the correction to καρ- 
 δίας being so obvious to those who found 
 the constr. harsh). — The apparent change 
 in the figure in this ver. requires explana- 
 tion. The Corr. are his Ep. of recommen- 
 dation, both to themselves and otliers ; aft 
 Epistle, written by Christ, ministered by 
 Paul ; the Epistle itself being now the sub- 
 ject, viz. the Corinthians, themselves the 
 ivriting of Christ, inscribed, not on tables 
 of stone, but on hearts, tables of flesh. The 
 Epistle itself, written and worn on Paul's 
 heart, and there known and read by all 
 men, consisted of the Corinthian converts, 
 on whose hearts Christ had written it by 
 His Spirit. / bear on my heart, as a testi- 
 mony to all men, that ichich Christ has by 
 His Spirit written in your hearts. On the 
 tables of stone and of flesh, see Exod. ut supr, 
 Prov. iii. 3 ; vii. 3. Jer. xxxi. 31 — 34, and 
 on the contrast, also here hinted at in the 
 background, between the heart of stone and 
 the heart of flesh, Ezek. xi. 19; xxxvi. 26. 
 4 — 11.] His honour of his apostolic 
 office ivas no personal vanity, for all the 
 ability of the App. came from God, ivho 
 had made them able ministers of the netv 
 covenant (4 — 6), a ministration infnitely 
 more glorious than that of the old dis-
 
 8—8. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 611 
 
 ικανότης ημών ίκ τον θεοΰ, " ος• κα\ ^ ίκάνωσεν η» ας u here only t. 
 
 " Col. i. 12 
 
 '''' οιακονους καινής "διαθήκης, ου ^ 'γξ}άμματος αλλά ^ττνίυ- JZ%\,.iii.7 
 
 ,^^ν' ' / ^Cn^Z" al- Col. i 23. 
 
 ματος το yap "γράμμα αποκτίννΕΐ, το οε ΤΓνευμα χ ι c.>r. χΐ. 25. 
 
 ay -7''^''b^ ' - Ο ' 'ν ' ^5'' ''■■"'?),ΐ'' 
 
 ^ωοτΓΟίει. ' ει οε η οιακονια του υανατου εν ^ "γραμματι ^^j, ,™'-^^• 
 £ντ£τυπο)μίνη λΐϋοις εyίVl|ση ^ εν οος», ωςτε μη ου- rra. 
 
 ' b Acta i. 17 
 
 νασθαι '^ ατενισαι τους υιυυς Ισ{)αί}λ εις το ττ^οόςωττον ^^^α• ^ . ^ 
 
 Μ> ^ ^ ^ d ^ 'y ~ ' '-vf d = Acts xxi'i. 
 
 ωυσεως cia την cot^av του προςωπου αυτού την κατ- n. icor.xv. 
 
 ιλλον 1^ διακονία του 
 
 4υ, 41. τβΓ. 
 
 πνεϋ- 18- 
 
 Qpyoυμεvηv, " ττως ουχί μαΑΑον η _.„„ ™eepp.,here 
 
 and ver. 13 only. Luke iv. 20. xxii. 56. Acts i. 10 h18 only. L. P. Job vii. 8 alex. (ExoD. xxxiv. 29.) 
 f 1 Cor. i. 28 retf. part, pre»., ib. ii. 6. 
 
 mistake). — 6. ου γραμματι aWa πνίυματι 17 it ν Syr ar-erp Jer Ambrst Pel Bed (not 
 Aug). — rec αποκηινίΐ, with Β &c tf (in pres editions) ; αττοκτίνίΐ (so accented in D'J al) 
 ACD(E?)J all (appy) Orig-ms : txt FGK 4G all appy Chr (Matt's mss). {Hence it 
 seems that -vvti was the origl readg, altered to -vti and -iptt.) — 7. rec γραμ- 
 μαπιν (see note), with ACD^EJK &c vss nrly Orig Mac Chr Thdrt Dam lat-ff: txt 
 BD'FG (litleris aut littera g). — πτυττωμίνη FG. — rec bef λιθοις ins ti> {explanatory 
 insertn), with D'EJK &c vss (but ν all om tv bef -γραμμ.) Origj Mac Chr Dam lat-ff 
 (Ambrst al om tv bef γρ.) : txt ABCD'FG 17- 6T-- T-^• 80 g Orig, or 3 Did Epiph Thdrt 
 Augj. — for λιθοις, ττλαζι λιθιΐ'αις arm. — ΐνατενισαι 7• 32. 49. 121 Oec. — rec μωσ. with 
 
 pensation (7 — Π). 4.] The con- 
 
 nexion with the foregoing is immediate : he 
 had just spoken of his consciousness of 
 apostolic success among them (which asser- 
 tion would be true also of other churches 
 which he had founded) being his world-wide 
 recommendation. It is this confidence of 
 which he here speaks. ' Such confidence, 
 however, we possess through Christ 
 towards God :' i. e. ' it is no vain boast, but 
 rests on power imparted to us through 
 Christ in regard to God, in reference to 
 God's work and our own account to be 
 given to Him :' 5.] ' not that (i. e. ' I 
 
 mean not, tliat ' . . . : — not, ' not because,' 
 as Winer, § ilb. 4) we are of ourselves 
 able to think any thing (to carry on any 
 of the processes of reasoning or judgment, 
 or faith belonging to our ajiostolic calling : 
 there is no ellipsis, ' any thing great,' or 
 'good,' or the like) of ourselves, as if from 
 ourselves (άψ' ίαυτ. and ίξ ίαυτ. are 
 parallel : the latter more definitely pointing 
 to ourselves as the origin), — but our ability 
 (λογίσασθαι τά πάντα) is from (as its 
 source) God, 6.] Who also (=' qui 
 
 idem ;' so Eur. Bacch. 572, ταϋτα καΐ 
 κοθνβρισ' αυτόν, ' hsec eadem illi expro- 
 bravi.' See llartung, Partikellelire, i. p. 
 132) hath enabled us as ministers of the 
 (or, as Stardey, "a:" but not necessarily 
 from the omission of the art. : of. Heb. 
 xii. 24, Krti διαΙΙτικης νιας μίσιτ^ Ίησαύ) 
 new Covenant (i e. the gospel, Eph. iii. 7• 
 Col. i. 2'Λ, as distinguished from the law : 
 see 1 Cor. xi. 25. Gal. iv. 24 : — the πλάκες 
 λίθινοι and σύρκιναι are still borne in 
 mind, and lead on to a fuller comparison of 
 
 R 
 
 the two covenants), — not of (gov. by διακό- 
 νους, not by καινής SiaH. — ' ministers, not 
 
 of ) letter (in which, viz. in formal 
 
 and literal precept, the Mosaic law con- 
 sisted), but of spirit (in which, viz. in the 
 inward guiding of the Spirit of God, the 
 gospel consists. Bengel remarks : ' Paulus 
 etiam dum haec scripsit, non literee, sed 
 spiritus ministerium egit. Moses in pro- 
 prio illo officio suo, etiam cum haud scrip- 
 sit, tamen in litera versatus est ') : for the 
 letter (mere formal and literal precept of 
 the law) killeth (as in Rom. vii., — brings 
 the knowledge of sin, its guilt and its 
 punishment. The reference is not, as 
 Meyer, to natural death, which is the 
 result of sin even where there is no law ; 
 nor as Clirys. to the law executing punish- 
 ment), but the Spirit (of the gospel, i. e. 
 God's Holy Spirit, acting in and through 
 Christ, Who iytvtTo ί'ις τΓνεΐμα ζωοττοιοΐν, 
 1 Cor. XV. 45. See also below, ver. 17) 
 giveth life ' (not merely hfe eternal, but 
 the whole new life of the man of God, see 
 Rom. vi. 4. 11; viii. 2. 10). On the his- 
 tory of this meaning of -γράμμα, see 
 Stanley's note. 7—11.] And litis 
 
 ministraliun is infinitely more glorious 
 than was that of Moses under the old 
 Covenant. He argues from the less to 
 the greater : from the transitory glory of 
 the killing letter, to the abiding glory of 
 the lifegiving Spirit. 7.] ' But (pass- 
 
 ing to another consideration, — the compa- 
 rison of the two ύιακοιήαι) if the minis- 
 tration of death in the letter (of that 
 death which the law, the code of literal and 
 formal precept, brought in. This not 
 R 2
 
 612 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 ΙΙΤ. 
 
 g LnVe iv. 
 
 32 al. Psa. 
 
 sxviii. 4. 
 
 1 Tim. iii.lo 
 
 refl. 
 h cli vii. 3 
 
 oiilyt. 
 j = Rum. iii.7 
 
 reft, canstr., 
 
 ch. viii. 7. 
 
 [τΐίατβί, 
 
 κ.τ.λ.) 
 k = Rom. xi. 
 
 ματος εσται ^ ευ θος>? ; "^ £i γαρ η όια 
 '^ κατακρ'ισίως δυζα, ττολλο) jutiAXov ' περισσεύει ι) 
 κυν'ΐα της δικαιοσύνης δόζτ?. 
 το οεο()ζασ|υεΐ'ον 
 
 ει yap το 
 
 και 
 
 7^' Ρ 
 
 ου 
 
 κονια της 
 
 δια- 
 
 δεδόζασται 
 
 υπβρ- 
 
 tv τοντω τω μ^ρα, ίΐνίΚίν της 
 βηλΧουσης δό^ης. ^^ ει yap το K:aTa()Yuu/i£VOi/ "δια 
 
 δόξης, πολλω μάλλον το ^ μίνον, ^ εν ^o^y. ^^ έχοντες 
 '^3η°""'''^' ουν τοιπύτην ελττ/δα πολλ»] '^παρρησία γ^οωμίθα, ^ και 
 
 m ch. 
 (1 Pet. iv. 1β 
 
 ιθά: 
 
 Μ( 
 
 κάλυμμα επι το προςωττον 
 
 ου καϋαπίρ ΐνίωυσης ετισει 
 
 rec.) ' , 
 
 nch.ixl4. Eph. i. 19. ϋ. 7. iii. 19only. P.t. 2 Mace. iv. 13. υπβρ/ϊαλλόμτω?, Job xv. 11. o = ch. ii. 4. v.7. 
 
 ρ = 1 Pet i 23 2.'i al.fr. q (Go.^pp. τταήμιιιτια, adv., Mark, John only.) Acts ii. 29 aH. ch. 
 
 Tii 4 aiePaol. Hfl). iii. 6 al 3. 1 John ii. 28 al3 only. Prov. i. 2U al. r Rom. ir. 6 refl'. 
 
 a here only. ExoD. xxxiv. 33—35. 
 
 A &c•. txt BCFG &c.— 9. for η ?ιακ., τ. άσκοπα {explanatory corrn, as is s/iewn by 
 the latin varr below) ACDFG I?. 31-9. 73-4. 80 d e am syrr Orig Cyr Ruf (m or ex 
 ministerio Orig-int Ambrst Sedul) : txt (?/ cm 112) B(e sil)D^EJK most mss g ν copt 
 goth al Mac Chr Thdrt Dam al Aug Pel al. — for ί"οξ«, ti- δοζη v-Sixtarm Pel : add tarn' 
 D^FG vss lat-fF: i]v arm. — ουχί πολ. μαλ. arm. — τηρισσινσει DE 38. 72. 93 it syrr 
 al Mac Ambrst. — rec bef c"o2»; ins εν {prob from tv ?. above, ver 8, and below, ver 11), 
 with DEFGJK &c it ν copt syr (e gloria goth) Orig2 Mac all Ambrst al : om ABC 17. 
 39. 67". 80 tol al Syr al Orig (Wtst). — 10. rec for ov, ovSt {mistake, from It being the first 
 syll of the next word), with mss g {nea e) ν al Chr (not Mtt's mss) Thdrt-ancyr (ov^t -yoi)) 
 Thl-ed : txt ABCDEFGJK most mss syrr copt eoth al gr-ff Jer, Aug.— rec tvnctv, with 
 CJK &c Orig all: txt ABD(E?)FG 44-8. 108 al Dam.— 13.' rec /ίωττ,ς•: see above, 
 ver Τ.—ίτιθη FGJ &c Oec— rec ιαυτυν, with DE &c Chr Thdrt : txt ABCF^FGJ 
 
 haviog been seen, it was imagined that 
 •γράμιιατι belonged to tvτ^τvπtDμίι■η, and 
 hence it was altered, as more according to 
 fact, into γράμμησιν, the received reading. 
 — No art. is required before -γρήμματι, as 
 Meyer objects, — on account of the prepo- 
 sition ti') engraven on stones (it seems 
 strange that ίντίτ. λ/β. should be the pre- 
 dicate of Oi/Tkoi iVi ; but the ministration 
 is the vJiole putting forth of the dispensa- 
 tion, the purport of which was summed up 
 in the decalogue, written on stones. The 
 decalogue thus written was, as in ver. 3, 
 διακονηθ€Ϊσα ϋπό Μωυσίως) was con- 
 stituted (on εγίτήθη being necessarily pas- 
 sive, see notes, 1 Thess. i. 5 bis, 6) in glory 
 (as its state or accompanying condition : — 
 the abstract as yet, to be compared with 
 the glory of the other : — the concrete, the 
 brightness on the face of Moses, is not yet 
 before us), so that the sons of Israel 
 could not fix their eyes on (they were 
 afraid to come nigh him, Exod xxxiv. 30 — 
 so that μή εΰναηθαι is not said of physical 
 inability, but of inability from fear) the 
 face of Moses, on account of the glory of 
 his face, which was transitory (• trans- 
 itoria et modici temporis,' Estius ; — super- 
 naturally conferred for a season, and pass- 
 ing away when the occasion was over), how 
 shall not rather the ministration of the 
 Spirit (= ή CiaKovin της ζωής iv πνιν- 
 μάτι, as formally opposed to the other : — 
 but not so expressed, because the Spirit is 
 
 the principle of life, whereas the Law only 
 led to death) be (future, because the glory 
 will not be accomplished till the manifesta- 
 tion of the kingdom : according to Billroth, 
 ' esse invenietur si rem recte perpenderi- 
 mus :' or as Bengel, ' loquitur ex prospectu 
 veteris Testamenti in novum :' but I much 
 prefer the above, as giving the contrast, by 
 and by expressed, between το καταργον- 
 μίνον and το μίνον) in glory? 9.] 
 
 For (an additional reason ' a minori ad 
 majus ') if the ministration of condemna- 
 tion was (or, is) glory (the change to the 
 dat. has been made apparently because a 
 difficulty was found in the ministration 
 itself being glory) much more does the 
 ministration of righteousness abound in 
 glory.' — The min. oi condemnation, because 
 (Rom. vii. 9 if.) the Law detects and con- 
 demns sin : — the min. of righteousness, be- 
 cause (Rom. i. 17) therein the righteous- 
 ness of God is revealed and imparted by 
 faith. 10.] ' For (substantiation of 
 
 the foregoing τ:ο^\φ μάλλον) even that 
 which has been glorified (viz. the ζιακ. 
 r. κατακμίσ., which was tv coKij by the 
 brightness on the face of Moses) is not 
 gloiified (has lost all its glory) in this 
 regard (i. e. when compared with the 
 go.'ipel, — κ.Ίτά τον rijc σνγκηίσαος λό -yoi•, 
 Chrys. — De W. takes ij' r. τψ μίρ. with 
 δίίοίασμ'ίνην, ' that which was in this par- 
 ticular glorified,' viz. in the brightness on 
 the face of Moses : — but that would more
 
 9—14. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 613 
 
 αντου ττρος το μη "^ ατίνισοι τοίις υΙους Ισραήλ £ίς• t consir., = 
 
 ΤΟ Γίλος του " καταρ-γουμεΐΌν. 
 
 αλλ' 
 
 )οωθη 
 
 ν Rom. xi. 7 refiF. 
 
 al Chr (Mtt's mss) Dam Thl Oec. —δννασθαι arev. 48 slav Thl-ms. — for rtXog, προς. 
 ωπον A V Ainbrst Bed.— 14. αΚλα Β. — ίπωρωθησαν Κ 'J3. 177 Thl: ίπορρωθη 21.91. 
 
 naturally be το iv τοντψ τφ μΐρει δίδοζα- 
 σμίνον : — as it now stands, I cannot divide 
 otherwise than οϋ ϋίοόξασται | το SfCo- 
 ζαημίνον | tv τοντψ τψ μέρει. Meyer 
 takes TO δεδοζ. as abstract, and εν τοντψ 
 τψ μίρει as pointing to the concrete .• ' that 
 ■which has been glorified [general and ab- 
 stract] has in this particular department 
 [concrete, viz. the δκικ. κ. κητακμίσ. which 
 was Οίίοξ(ΐ(τ/ί.] no glory : q.d. 'the glori- 
 fied is unglorified in this case.' This may 
 certainly be, and is ingenious ; but the 
 other is simpler) on account of (i. e. when 
 we take into consideration) the surpassing 
 glory (viz. of the other διακονία: — pre- 
 sent, because spoken of qualitatively). 
 11] For (a fresh ground of superiority in 
 glory of the Christian over the Mosaic 
 ministry) if that which is transitory (not 
 here, as above, the brilliancy of the visage 
 of Moses, for that was the δάζα, but the 
 ministry itself, the whole purpose which that 
 ministry served, which was parenthetical 
 and to come to an end) was with glory 
 {διά, see reff., of the condition or circum- 
 stances in which a thing takes place) much 
 more is that which abideth (the everlast- 
 ing gospel) ia glory.' — Estius says, '^ per 
 gloriam (δια δ.) innuere videtur aliquid 
 momentaneum ac transitorium : in gloria, 
 aliquid manens et stabile." Simly, Ols- 
 hausen : but it is quite (qu. this 'i Dec. 
 185f)) in the style of our Αρ., to use vari- 
 ous prepositions to express the same rela- 
 tion, — see Rom. iii. 22. 30 ; v. 10. 
 
 12, 13.] From a consciousness of this 
 sttperinr glory nf his ministration, the Ap. 
 uses great plainness of speech, and does not, 
 as Moses, ttse a veil. 12. ίλττίδα] viz. 
 
 that expressed by εστηι ki' δόζι^, ver. 8: 
 the hope of the ultimate manifestation of 
 exceeding glory as belonging to his minis- 
 tration, τταρρησία] ττμυς τίνα, είπε, 
 ^of ττρός τον θεϋΐ', η ττιιος τονς μαθητύς; 
 ττρός ΐιμας τονς μαθητενομίνους, φι/σί• 
 τοντ'εστι, μετ' εΧενθερίας ττανταχηϊι φθεγ- 
 γόμεθα, ονδεν άποκρνπτόμίί'οι, οϋδεν ϋπο- 
 στεΧΧόμενοι, ονδεί' νψοριΊιμεΎ'οι, άλλα σα- 
 φως \'ε-γοντες• και ιώ δεδοίκημεν μη πλήζ- 
 οιμεν νμώΐ' τάς όψκς, καθάπεη ?\]ωνσϊΊς 
 τάς Ιουδαίων, Chrys. 13.] καΐ ον, 
 ' and (do) not (place a veil on our face, — 
 so Mark xv. 8, ύ όχλος,• ί/υΚατο αΐτεΐσθαι 
 [ποίίΐΐ'] ΚίΐΟωζ άεϊ εποίει ηντοΊς. See 
 
 Winer, § CG. 1) as Moses placed a veil on 
 
 his face, in order that (see below) the 
 sons of Israel might not look on the ter- 
 mination of the transitory ' (viz. his δια- 
 κονία, see ver. 11, but si)oken of as δεδοξ- 
 ασμίνη: 'the glory of his ministration.' 
 — A mistake has been made with regard to 
 the history in Exod. xxsiv. 30 — 35, which 
 has considerably obscured the understand- 
 ing of this verse. It is commonly assumed, 
 that Moses spoke to the Israelites, having 
 the veil on his face : and this is implied in 
 our version — ' till Moses had done speaking 
 with them, he put a veil on his face.' But 
 the LXX (and Heb ) gave a different ac- 
 count : Kai έττειδή κατίτταυσεν λαλών προς 
 αυτούς, ίπέθηκίν επί το ττμοςώπου αύτοϋ 
 κάλνμμα. He spoke to them without the 
 veil, with his face shining and glorified : — 
 when he had done speaking, he placed the 
 veil on his face ; and that, not because they 
 were afraid to look on him, but as here, 
 that they might not look on the end, or 
 the fading, of that transitory glory ,• that 
 they miglit only see it as long as it was the 
 credential of his ministry, and then it might 
 be withdrawn from their eyes. Thus the 
 declaration of God's will to them was not 
 iv παρρησίςι, but was interrupted and 
 broken by intervals of concealment, which 
 ours is not. The opposition is twofold : 
 (1) between the veiled and the unveiled 
 ministry, quoad the mere fact of conceal- 
 ment in the one case, and openness in the 
 other : (2) between the ministry which was 
 suspended by the veihng, that its τέλος 
 might not be seen, and that which pro- 
 ceeds Λπό δόζης εις δόζαν, having no ter- 
 mination. — On the common interpretation, 
 Comm. have found an almost insuperable 
 difficulty in προς το μη άτ. The usual 
 escape from it has been to render it, ' so 
 that the Israelites could not,' as in ver. 7• 
 De Wette somewhat modifies this, and sees 
 in it the divine purpose : ' in order that,' 
 but not in the intention of Moses, but of 
 God's Providence. But both these render- 
 ings are ungrammatical. προς τϋ with an 
 infinitive never signifies the mere result, 
 nor, as Meyer rightly remarks against De 
 Wette, the objective purpose, but always 
 the subjective purpose present to the mind 
 of the actor .• he refers to Matt. v. 28 ; vi. 
 1 ; xiii. 30 ; xxiii. 5. Mark xiii. 22. Ejih. 
 vi. 11. 1 Thess. ii. !). 2 Thess. iii. 8. James 
 iii. 3 (rec), and Matt. xxvi. 12 (see my
 
 614 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 III. 
 
 W cl). ii. 11 reff. W ' ' " 
 
 xlRom viiil νοήματα αντων 
 
 Cnr. IV 
 
 αγ^ρι γαρ της ^ σημίρυν ^ ημίρας abcd 
 
 2-'. ICnr. IV. ν 5\5'Λ ζ•< "a' ' -b Λ" EFG 
 
 11. Gai.iT. ro αυτο καΑνμμα επι rrj ανα-γνωσίΐ της παλαιάς• JK 
 
 ()ΐαθηκης μΕνίΐ, 
 
 μη " ανακαΧυπτομίνον οτι εν -νριστω 
 καταργείται' αλλ '^ εως ^ σήμερον, ^^ ηνΊκα ' ανα- 
 
 ηνωσκεται Μωυσ77ς, ^ καλ 
 
 καΑνμμα ^ επι τΐ]ν καρδίον αυτών 
 
 y Acl.s XX. 2Η. 
 
 Rom. xi. 8 
 
 only. Jo.sh. 
 
 T. H. Jcr. i. 
 
 18. 
 ζ = John iv. 
 
 27. cli.vii. 4. Ύ' 
 
 Heb. ix. 15, 
 
 26. a Arts xiii. 15. 1 Tim. iv. 13 only. Neh. viii. 8. b 1 Cor. v. 7. c here only. Job 
 
 xii. 22 vat. Isa. iii. 17. d 1 Cor. i. 28 reff. e here only. w. τΓ)γ, Matt, xxvii. 8. 1 Kings 
 
 xxix. 6. ee here only. f cunstr., Acts viii. 28. (xiii. 27) xv. 21. 
 
 for αυτών, του κόσμου Tert.— rec om ημιρας (as unnecessai'y, see ver 15), -with JK 
 &c Cyr-jerus (μιχρι γαρ σημ.) Chr Thdrt Dam al Tert Archel : ins ABCDEFG all it ν 
 copt vss nrly Clem Cyr Ambrst al.— for eiri, tv DEFG Chr. — 15. bef αναγινωσκ. in.s av 
 {originally/ vritten appi/ by mistake, from av beginning αναγινωσκ. ; — then the verb 
 was changed to the snbj to suit the conslr, and by some av omd, as unnecessary. So 
 Meyer) ABC 17- 31 Orig Thdrti : ora DEFGJK mss nrly Cyrr Cses Chr Thdrt., Dam al. 
 — for avayti'waKtroi, -σκηται (see on av aboi'c) ABCDE 17. 31-7. 48. 123 lect 13 
 Orig Cyr Chr (Matt's ms,) Thdrtj Oec : t.xt FGJK most mss Cyr-jerus Cees Chr Thdrti 
 Dam Thl.— rec μωσης, with A &c : txt BCDG &c. — κιιται ιττι D'EFG it ν al. — 
 
 note there). — I may remark also, that the 
 narrative in Exodus, the LXX version of 
 which the Ap. here closely follows (see be- 
 low on ver. 16), implies that the brightness 
 of Moses's face had place not on that one 
 occasion only, but throughout his whole 
 ministry between the Lord and the people. 
 When he ceased speaking to them, he put 
 on the veil ,• but whensoever he went in 
 before the Lord to speak to Him, the veil 
 was removed till he came out, and had 
 spoken to the Israelites all thai the Lord 
 had commanded him, during which speak- 
 ing they saw that his face shone, — and 
 after which speaking he again put on the 
 veil. So that the veil was the symbol of 
 concealment and transitoriness : the part 
 revealed they might see ; beyond that, they 
 could not: the ministry was a broken, in- 
 terrupted one ; its end was wrapped in 
 obscurity. — In the τίλος τον καταργ. we 
 must not think, as some Comm. have done, 
 of Christ (Rom. x. 4), any further than it 
 may be hinted in the background that when 
 the law came to an end, He appeared. 
 
 14 — 18. J The contrast is now made be- 
 tween the CHILDREN OF IsRAEL, On whose 
 heart this veil still is in the reading of the 
 O. T., and us all (Christians), ivho with 
 uncovered face behold the glory of the Lord. 
 This section is parenthetical. Before and 
 after it, the ministry is the subject : in it, 
 they to whom the ministry is directed. But 
 it serves to shew the tvhole spirit and con- 
 dition of the two classes, and thus further 
 to substantiate the character of openness 
 and freedom asserted of the Christian min- 
 istry. 14 ] ' But (also) their under- 
 standings were hardened (on this, the 
 necessary sense of β-ιτωρώθη, see note, 
 Eph. iv, 18).' These words evidently 
 refer, as well as what follows, not to the 
 
 Τίλος, which they did not see, but to 
 that which they did see : to that which an- 
 swers to the present άνά-γνωσις τί)ς ττα- 
 λαιας (ίιαί'/;κί/ς•, viz. the word of God im- 
 parted by the ministration of Moses. And 
 by these words the transition is made from 
 the form of simihtude just used, to that new 
 one which is about to be used ; q. d. ' not 
 only was there a veil on Moses's face, to 
 prevent more being known, but also their 
 understandings were darkened : there was, 
 besides, a veil on their hearts. So that 
 αλλά = ' but also,' or ♦ moreover.' — To 
 
 refer this ίΐλλ' ϊπωρ. to τταρρη/τιψ χρώμβθα, 
 to the present hardheartedness of the Jews 
 under the freedom of speech of the Gospel, 
 as Olsh., De W., al., is, in my view, to miss 
 the whole sense of the passage. No refer- 
 ence whatever is made to the state of the 
 Jews under the preaching of the gospel, 
 but only as the objects of the O. T. minis- 
 tration. — then, under the oral teaching of 
 Moses, — 7101V, in the reading of the O. T. 
 — In order to understand what follows, the 
 change of similitude must be carefully borne 
 in mind. το αΰτο κάλυμμα] ' the 
 
 veil once on Moses's face,' is now regarded 
 as laid on their hearts. It denoted the 
 ceasing, the covering up, of his oral teach- 
 ing ; for it was put on 7vhe7i he had done 
 speaking to the people. Now, his oral 
 teaching has altogether ceased, and the 
 διακονία is carried on by a book. But as 
 when we listen, the speaker is the agent, 
 and the hearers are passive, — so on the 
 other hand, when we read, tve are the 
 agents and the book is passive. The book 
 is the same to all : the difference between 
 those who understand and those who do 
 not understand is now a subjective differ- 
 ence — the veil is no longer on the face of 
 the speaker, but on the heart of the reader.
 
 15—18. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 615 
 
 = κίΐται. 
 αιρίΐται τυ 
 
 16 ee f ' 5'' '^ li ' ' / '' ' i 
 
 ■ηνικα Ο αν ίττιστρίψ^ προς κυριον, ττεοι- ffcoii.,tr.,A(ts 
 ^ κάλυμμα. ^' Ο δε κύριος το πΐ'ίΰμά εστίν' ?Τ. νΐίΐ!' 
 
 KUAujujiia. *■ KJ οε κυρ 
 ου όε τυ πνεύμα κυρίου, έλευθεοιΉ. 
 
 i Acts xxvii. 20, 40 reflF. 
 
 ϊΐμεις δε πάντες hAcisix. 35. 
 
 '^ ^ xi. 21. 
 
 k (Rom.viii. 21.) Gal. τ. 1,13. 1 Cur. χ. 20. 
 
 16. αν om C Mac. — for ηνικα, ο rav FG : all aliter. — ίττιστρίψίΐ 72 lect 8. — for κυρ., 
 θίοι/ d e tol Tert VigPel : χοιστον Promiss Augj Bed. — 17. for οΰ, που FG. — for κυρίου, 
 TO ayiov J ; era 33-5 Sedul. — rec bef ελευθ. ins εκεί (see notes), with D^EFGJK &c 
 vss Ath Chr Thdrt Dam al lat-ff: om ABCDi 17. «72 copt Syr Cyr Nyss.— 18. πάντες 
 
 So that of necessity the form of the simili- 
 tude is changed. ' For (answering to an 
 understood clause, ' and remain hardened ') 
 to the present day the same veil (wliich 
 was once on the face of Moses) remains, 
 at the reading of the Old Testament (») 
 ΤΓολ. SiaO. here, as we now popularly use 
 the words, the book comprising the ancie^it 
 Covenant), the discovery not being made 
 (by the removal of the veil) that it (the O. 
 T.) is done away in Christ ' (that the Old 
 Covenant has passed away being superseded 
 by Christ). This I believe to be the only ad- 
 missible sense of the words, consistently with 
 the symbolism of the passage. The render- 
 ings, ' remains not taken away, — -for it (i. e. 
 the veil) is done away in Christ,^ and (as 
 E.V.) 'remaineth . . untaken atvay . . which 
 veil (o Tt) /* done away in Christ,' — are 
 inadmissible : (1) because they make καταρ- 
 γείται, which throughout the passage be- 
 longs to the glory of the ministry, to apply 
 to the veil : and (2) because they give no 
 satisfactory sense. It is not because the veil 
 can only be done away in Christ, that it 
 now remains untaken away on their hearts, 
 but because their hearts are hardened. 
 Besides, the Ap. would not have expressed 
 it thus, but iv χριοτί^ί yap καταργ. The 
 word άνακαλυτττόμενον has been ])robably 
 chosen, as is often the practice of the Αρ., 
 on account of its relation to κάλυμμα, — 'it 
 not being unveiled to them that . . . . ' 
 15.] ' But (reassertion of μι] άνακαλυπτό- 
 μενον, with a view to the next clause) to 
 this day, whenever Moses is read, a veil 
 lies upon their heart (understanding. 
 Kfirat ίπί w. ace, — pregn., involving the 
 being laid on, and remaining there). 
 16.] Here, the tertium comparationis is, 
 the having on a veil, and taking it off 
 on going in to the presence of the Lord. 
 This Moses did ; and the choice of the 
 same words as those of the LXX, shews 
 the closeness of the comparison; ήνίκα 8* 
 άν (ϊςεπαρει'ιετο Μαινσης tvavrt κυρίου 
 λολίΐ»' αΰτψ, '7Γ€ριηρ€ΐτο το κάλυ|χμα. 
 This shall likewise be done in the case of 
 the Israelites : when it (i. e. j/ κηρδίη 
 αυτών, — not Israel, as Chrys., Tlieod., 
 Theophyl., Erasm., al., — nor Moses, as 
 Calv., Estius, — nor τις, as Orig., al.) shall 
 
 turn to the Lord (here again επιστρί-φη 
 ■προς is carefully chosen, being the very ex- 
 pression of the LXX, when the Israelites, 
 having been afraid of the glory of the face 
 of Moses, returned to him after being sum- 
 moned by him: — ίφοβί/θησαν iyyiaai 
 αύτψ' και εκάΧεσεν αΰτονς Μ,ωυσης, και 
 
 €'7Γ€στροίφησ•αν ΤΓρός αΰτον , — and 
 
 κύμιον appears to be used for the same rea- 
 son) the veil is taken away ' (not, shall 
 be, because // κάρδια is the subject, and 
 thus the taking away becomes an indivi- 
 dual matter, happening whenever and 
 wherever conversion takes place). Let me 
 restate this, — as it is all-important towards 
 the understanding of vv. 17, 18. ' Wlien 
 their heart goes in to speak with God, 
 — ceases to contemplate the dead letter, 
 and begins to commune with the Spirit 
 of the old covenant (the Spirit of God), 
 then the veil is removed, as it was from 
 the face of Moses.' 17.] ' Now (^έ 
 
 exponentis. τις Sk ούτος προς υν δεΙ 
 άποβλέχΡαι ; Theodoret) the Lord is the 
 Spirit:' i.e. the κύριος of ver. 16, is, the 
 Spirit, whose word the O. T. is : the 
 πνεύμα, — as opposed to the γράμμα, — 
 which ζωοποιει, ver. 0. — But it is not 
 merely, as Wetst., ' Dominus signifcat 
 Spiritum,' nor is πνεύμα merely, as Olsh., 
 the spiritual sense of the law .• but, ' the 
 Lord,' as here spoken of, ' Christ,' ' is the 
 Spirit,' is identical with the Holy Spirit : 
 not personally nor essentially, but, as is 
 shewn by το ιτνεΰμα κυρίου following, in 
 this department of His divine working : — 
 Christ, here, is the Spirit of Christ. The 
 principal mistaken interpretation (among 
 many, see Pool's Synops., Meyer, De Wette) 
 is that of Chrys., Theodoret, Theophyl., 
 Oecum., Estius, Schulz, — making το πνεύ- 
 μα the subject, and ύ κίψ. the predi- 
 cate, which though perhaps (but would 
 5έ then have had its present position .') 
 allowable, is against the context, ο Si κύρ. 
 being plainly resumed from ό κύρ. in ver. 
 \(j. The words are then used by thorn as a 
 proof of the Divinity of the Holy Spirit. — 
 'But (δι appealing to a known or evi- 
 dent axiom, as in a mathematical demon- 
 stration) where the Spirit of the Lord 
 (see above) is, is liberty' (t/cti has pro-
 
 616 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 IV. 
 
 ihereoniyt. '^ ανακΐΚοΧυμμίνω προςωττω την οοΕ,αν κυρίου 
 
 m Rum ι iii 29 / ' ' ' ^ m ' ' η _l ' fl ' '' 
 
 rrfi οπτριί,ομίνοι, την αυττην Ηκονα μίταμηηώουμίυα αττο 
 
 nRom. χϋ. 2. 
 
 κατ- ABCD 
 EFG 
 
 r.m. xn.y. Λ /j^ '?''^ ο Λ' ρ'^ ' ' 
 
 Htt. χτιι. 2. oou^/C fiC ουςαν, κασαττερ '^ αττο κυοιοι; τη'έυματος. 
 oRom.VT.6 IV. δια τοΰτο ίχοιτίς την '' δίοκοΐ'ί'αν raiirrji', καθώς 
 
 reft'. γ'Λ'Λ ' S* " 2'ΛΛ^Ι' ^ ί\ ^ 
 
 ρ = Actsii. 22. ηΑίϊμΙημίν, ουκ ΐyκaκo\ιμίV, αΛΑα απίίπαμίυα τα 
 
 q = .Acts i 1*. Rom. xi. 13. r Rom. xi. 30 reff. 1 Tim. i. Ifi. s Luke xviii. 1. ver. 16. Gal. vi. 9. 
 
 (See Epii. iii. 13.) 2 Thess. iii. 13 t. L. P. t here only. 3 Kings xi. 2. Jobs. Sal. 
 
 om 73. — αποτΓτρίζομενοι FG : ινοπτριζομεθα Mac. — μεταμορφονμενοι A 2^Mac Orig- 
 int.- — καθωςπιρ Β. 
 
 Chap. IV. 1. rcc tιcκaιcovμ(v, with CD^EJK &c ff : txt ABD'FG 37-9. 4G. 73.— 
 2. rec αλλ, with FGJ &c : txt A(appy)BCDE 44. 109. 238.— for κρυπτά, ίργα Κ 117. 
 
 bably been inserted, as being usual after 
 ov : but, as Meyer remarks, not in St. Paul's 
 style, see Rom. iv. 15 ; v. 20).— They are 
 fettered in spirit as long as they are slaves 
 to the letter, = as long as they have the 
 veil on their hearts ; but when they turn 
 to the Lord the Spirit, which is not πνηψα 
 Sov\tiag but ττν. ν'ιοθίσίας, Rom. viii. 15, 
 — and by virtue of whom οΰκ tn ti δούλος, 
 άλλα υ'ιός, Gal. iv. 7>— then they are at 
 liberty. There can hardly be any allusion 
 to a veil over the head implying subjec- 
 tion, as 1 Cor. xi. 10, (Erasm., Beza, Grot., 
 Bengel, Fritz.,) for here the covering of 
 the head with a veil is not thought of, 
 but merely intercepting the sight. 
 18.] 'But (the sight of the Jews is thus 
 intercepted ; in contrast to whom) we all 
 {'■all Christians;^ not, as Erasm., Estius, 
 Bengel, al., m., ' we Apostles and teach- 
 ers :' the contrast is to the υιοί Ισραήλ 
 above) with unveiled face (the veil having 
 been removed at our conversion : the stress 
 is on these words) beholding in a mirror 
 the glory of the Lord (i. e. Christ : from 
 vv. 16, 17. κοτοΊΓτρίζω is to shew in a 
 mirror, to make a reflection in a mirror ; 
 so Plutarch, de Placitis Philosophorum, 
 iii. 5 : Anaxagoras explained a rainbow to 
 be the reflexion of the sun's brightness 
 from a thick cloud, that always stands op- 
 posite την κατνπτρίζοντος αυτό αστέρος. 
 In the middle, it is ' to behold oneself in a 
 mirror :' so Diog. Laert., Plato, p. 1 15, το7ς 
 μεθνονσι σννφονλενε κατοπτριζισθαι ; — 
 but also, to see in a mirror, so Philo, Legis 
 Allegor. iii. 33, μι) γαρ ίμψανισθείης μοι 
 Ci ουρανοί' η γης η ϋϋατος η άίρος η 
 τίνος απλώς των iv -γινίσει, μηΐε κατ- 
 οπτρισαίμην εν άλλ^ rtj'i την σήν ίδίαι/, 
 η ίν σοι τφ θεψ. And such is evidently 
 the meaning here : the gospel is this mir- 
 ror, the ιναγγ'ίλιον της δόξης τοΰ θ€θΰ, 
 ch iv. 4, and we, looking on it with un- 
 veiled face, are the contrast to the Jews, 
 with veiled hearts reading their law. The 
 meaning ' reflecting the glory,' &c. as 
 Chrys., Luth., Calov,, Bengel, Billroth, 
 
 Olsh., is one which neither the word nor 
 
 the context [see above] will bear [see, 
 however, Stanley's note. Dec. 185(;]), are 
 changed into the same image (which we 
 see in the mirror : the image of the glory 
 of Christ, see Gal. iv. 19, which is more to 
 the point than Rom. viii. 21, cited by Meyer, 
 and 1 John iii. 3. But the change here 
 spoken of is a spiritual one, not the bodily 
 change at the Resurrection : it is going on 
 here in the process of sanctification. — No 
 prep, need be understood before τήν αυτήν 
 εικόνα — the passive verb indirectly governs 
 the ace, as in άποτίμνομηι τήν κεφαλήν 
 and similar cases) from glory to glory 
 (this is explained, either [1] 'from one de- 
 gree of glory to another ,-' so most Comm. 
 and De Wette, or [2] 'from [by] the glory 
 which we see, into glory ' as Chrys., άπο 
 δόξης τής τον πνεύματος, εις δήίαν, τήν 
 ήμετεραν, τήν εγγιγνομίνην. — Theodoret, 
 Oecum., Theophyl., Bengel, Fritz., Meyer, 
 al. I prefer the former, as the other would 
 introduce a tautology, the sentiment being 
 expressed in the words following,) as by 
 the Lord the Spirit.' κυρίου πνεύματος 
 = του κυρίου τυϋ πνεύματος, — the first 
 art. being omitted after the preposition, 
 the second to conform the predicate to its 
 subject, as in άπο θεον πατρός. Gal. i. 3, 
 - — and answers to ό δε κύριος το πνενμά 
 ίστιν above. This seems the obvious and 
 most satisfactory way of taking the words, 
 and, from ver. 17, to be necessitated by the 
 context ; and so Theodoret, Luther, I5eza, 
 Calov., Wolf, Estius, al. The rendering 
 upheld by Fritz, Billroth, Meyer, De Wette, 
 ' the Lord of the Spirit,' i. e. ' Christ, whose 
 Sjjirit He is,' seems to me to convey very 
 little meaning, besides being an expression 
 altogether unprecedented. The transforma- 
 tion is effected by the Spirit (τοϋτο μετα- 
 μορφοί, Chrys.), the Author and Upholder 
 of spiritual life, who ' takes of the things of 
 Christ, and shetcs them to us,' John xvi. 
 14, see also Rom. viii. 10, 11, — who sanc- 
 tities us till we are holy as Christ is holy ; 
 the process of renewal after Christ's image
 
 1—4. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 G17 
 
 κρυτΓτα της αισ-χννης, μη ττίριπατουντίς '' tv πανονρ- ^ »nicoiL'tT., 
 y'la, μηοί ^ οολονντίς τυν λόγον τον θεοΰ, αλλά tyj l.-^y'^-jij''' 
 
 y. ' -"'Λ/Ί'ζ ' < ν ν TR'im. vi. 4. 
 
 ^ φαΐ'ξρωσίΐ της αληναας συνισταντζς εαυτούς προς <-h.s.a. 
 πασαν "^ συνί'ί^ησιν ανθρώπων ενώπιον του Θεοΰ. ^ ^ ει δε ^""reu""^' '''' ^^ 
 
 b>•' Λ ' V' /\ c'-d' " xliere<in1y. 
 
 Και εστίν κεκαΛυμμενον το ευον-νελιον ημών, εν τοις ps. χχχν. 2. 
 * ατΓολλυμε'νοίς έστιν κεκαΧνμμενον, ^ εν οΊς ο 'θεός του ^^'''^,,^^^^ι 
 
 t ' - r C''j\ ^h' -i'' 1 reft. See 
 
 αιώνος τούτου ετυψΑωσεν τα νοήματα των άπιστων, ch.i». ι. 
 
 b Ter. 16. c SeeRom. ii. 16 reff. d = ch. ii. 15. e Rom. ii. 12 reff. 1 Cor. i. 18. 
 
 f See John xii. 31. xiT. 30. Eph. ii. 2. vi 12. gjohnxii.40. IJohn ii. 11 only. Isa. xlii. 19. 
 
 h ch. ii. 11 reff. iii. 14. i = Matt. xvii. 17 al. fr. 
 
 — for ά\ηθ(ΐας, κάργιας 37. — rec σννιστωντ(ς, with D''EJK &c fF : -aravovrtg Β (and 
 A appy but is uncert) 67^. 80 al : txt CDFG 17. 39. 93 Chr (Wetst).— £ΐ<ω7Γ. r. θεού 
 osn 4' Chr. — 3. κ-αι om Gl slav : εστίν και arm. — 4. for ανγησαι, Siavy. A 10. 17• 23. 
 31 Eus Archel Cyrr Dam all : κατανγ. CDE 73 Origj EuSj al {bo/h glosses, further to 
 particularize the simple verb) : txt B(e sil)FGJK most mss Origj Dial Chr Thdrt 
 
 is such a transformation as may be expected 
 by the agency of (καθάττίρ άττό, so Chrys., 
 Koi τοκιντην o'tav είκος άπο . . .) the Lord 
 the Spirit, — Christ Himself ^ei?;^ the image, 
 see ch. iv. 4. The two other renderings are 
 out of the question, as being inconsistent 
 with the order of the words : viz. : (1) that 
 of E. V. and of Vulg., Theophyl., Grot., 
 Bengel, 'the Spirit of the Lord,' and (2) 
 that of Chrys., Theodoret, Calov., Estius, 
 ' the Spirit who is the Lord.' — Meyer 
 objects to the interpretation given above as 
 inconsistent with the self-evident connexion 
 of the genitives. How would he render 
 άπό θίοϋ ττητρός? 
 
 TV. 1 — 6.] Taking up again the subject 
 of his freedom of speech (ch. iii. 12), he 
 declares his renunciation of all deceit, and 
 manifestation of the truth to every man 
 (ver. 2), even though to some the Gospel be 
 .hidden (vv. 3, 4). And this because he 
 preaches, without any selfish admixture, 
 only the pure light of the Gospel of Christ 
 (vv. 5, (i). 1.] δια τοΰτο refers to 
 
 the previous description of the freeness and 
 unveiledness of the ministry of the Gospel, 
 and of the state of Christians in general 
 (iii. 18). €χοντ€5 τ. δ. ταυτ. further 
 
 expands and explains cut -ovro. 
 καθώς ήλίήθ.] 'as we received mercy' 
 (from God, at the time of our being ap- 
 pointed; cf. η\ίί]Οην, 1 Tim i. 16) : belongs 
 to εχ. τ. 0. ταύτ., not to what follows, and 
 is a qualification, in humility, of έχοντες — 
 ' possessing it, not as our own, but in as 
 far as we were shewn mercy.' 
 ovK ίγκακοΰμεν] 'We do not behave 
 ourselves in a cowardly manner,' do not 
 shrink from ])lainness of speech and action. 
 It is the opposite of παρρησι/ιζω. ουκ Ικ- 
 κακονμεν would be, ' we do not give up 
 through faintness or cowardice.' — It is 
 hardly possible to decide satisfactorily be- 
 tween the two readings. iyK. seems to be 
 
 universal, except in the N. T. (rec. text) and 
 the Fathers, which have Ίκκ. Did the Fa- 
 thers borrow this form from the N. T., or was 
 it the usual form of later Greek, and as such 
 introduced into the text by the copyists ? 
 In such doubt, I have followed MSS autho- 
 rity. — ' But (cowardice alone prompting 
 concealment in such a case, where it does 
 not belong to the character of the ministry 
 itself) we have renounced (so Herod, iv. 
 
 125, τών άπειτταμίρων τι)ΐ' σψετίρην σνμ- 
 μαχίην : .^Elian, Ν. Η. vi. 1, την άκόλα- 
 στον κοίτην άπείττατο παντελώς πασαν : 
 and other exx. in Wetst.) the hidden things 
 of shame (the having any views, ends, or 
 practices which such as have them hide 
 through shame : not, as De Wette, the hid- 
 den things of infamy or dishonesty, αισ- 
 χύνη is subj., =: , as Meyer, φόβος έττϊ πυος- 
 ίοκία άδυξιας. Plat. Defin. p. 416. It is 
 plain from the context that it refers, not to 
 crimes and unholy practices, but to crooked 
 arts, of which men are ashamed, and which 
 perhaps were made use of by the false 
 teachers), not walking (having our daily 
 conversation) in craftiness (see ref ). nor 
 adulterating (see ch. ii. 17. note) the word 
 of God, but by manifestation of the truth 
 (as our only means, see 1 Tliess. ii. 3, 4 ; 
 — the words come first, as emphatic), re- 
 commending ourselves (a recurrence to 
 the charge and apology of ch. iii. 1 ff.) to 
 (with reference to, — to the verdict of) every 
 conscience of men (every possible variety 
 of the human conscience ; implying, there 
 is no conscience but will inwardly acknow- 
 ledge this, however loth some among you 
 may be outwardly to confess it. So that the 
 expr. is not exactly = πρ. την σνν. πάν- 
 των ανθρώπων. AVe need hardly extend 
 άνθρ. so wide as Chrys , ov πισηης μόνον, 
 άλλα κηΐ άπίστηις εσμη' κ•ατάΰη\ιη : — he 
 is speaking as a teacher, and the men 
 spoken of are naturally his hearers and dis-
 
 618 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Β. IV. 
 
 kActsiii.ig. ^ etc το mn avyaaai τον '" ώωτίσμόν του ivayysXiov της ABCD 
 
 yii. 1». Rom. ^ "^ ' /_^ ^ .ν „«-'ε•> ν EFG 
 
 iherVoniy*'' ^όΕης τοΰ y^piOTOv, OQ icjTiv " tiKh)v Tov θβοΰ. ov yac> JK 
 
 i4 ° εαυτούς κηουσσοη^ν, aXXa γοιστον Ιησουν κνοιον' 
 
 m here only. ^ ' '> ' ' _ A-i^ _ ^ f Λ * f 
 
 Psiixtri'"' "εαυτούς δε δούλους ύ/ιών °° δια Ι>?σοϋν. " οτι ο σεος ο 
 
 nRom. Tiii.29. Ρ ίίττων Ικ σκοτονς '^ φως '^ Χαμφαι, ος eXauxLev £u ταις 
 
 2β,2?"''' καρόιαις ημών ^ ττρος '" φωτισμον της γνώσεως της ουξης 
 
 och iii. Ireff. „ λ « « . r - 
 
 cover. 11. rou (7εου εν προςωττω γριστου. 
 
 ρ = Acts χχϋ. Ι = t /VS 
 
 24 refl'. q Acts xii. 7. I.sa. ix. 2. r — 1 Cor. vii. 35. s ch. u. 10 reff. 
 
 (αυγί;σαι) Dam h 1 Thl Oec-text. — rec bef τον ins αντοις {supplementary), with D'EJK 
 &c vss Origi Chr al : om ABCDTG 17- 232. 39. 73. 177.8-9 it am demid harl (al) gr-fT 
 lat-f}': αυτονς 74 : tv αντηις Dion-alex Bed : αντων Dial. — της δοξ. τον tvayy. 115. — 
 for χριστοί), κυρίου C. — for oc, ο FG. — r. αοράτου θίοιι 80. 106-77 : τ. θ. τον αοράτου 
 23-marg 31-7- 47-8. 72-4. 113' v-ms arm syr ar-pol Till.— 5. ιησ. γρ. ACDEFG (κυρ. 
 ti). χρ. FG g: Kvp. om 42. 238 : τον κυρ. 80) it ν all Marcioiij (in Epiph) Aug al : txt 
 BJK nissnrly copt Syr Cyr-jerus Chr Thdrt Dam al Ambrst. — for ιησονν, (2nd) ιησον A'C 
 17 MarcioHj (in Epiph) : per Jesum it ν fF (not Ambrst al) : ι/^σου χρ. copt Cyr : χριστού 
 5._6. ό (1st) om B. — λαμ -iptt {corrn to the direct form of speech) ABD' GV ae th al 
 (Clem: Ιστιν ή ά\ήθίΐα η Kiκpayυ~^a Έκ σκότους ψώς λάμ■φeι) : txt CD'EFGJK mss 
 (nrly) vss Marcion (in Epiph) Mac Athj Chr Thdrt Dam al lat-tf.— ος- om D'FG 36 
 it demid harl (not am) Chr Did Ambrst al : ως 122 aeth : ο Mac : ούτος 67" : ipse v-ed 
 Pel : και arm. — for Jf/uov, νμων C 3 Dial Chr.— προς om arm Origp— Γ?;ς yv. om 219'. 
 — Γ>;ς ^ο^ης om 17. «7". 74.— for τον θίου, αντου BPC'D'FG 39 it seth Dial Cyr (Thl- 
 comm) Tert al : txt AB(e sil)C3D3EJK ims nrly fappy) vss (Orig) Ath Chr Thdrt Dam 
 al Ambrst Ambrj {Domini^) (του θίον is certainly original ; for, as Meyer observes, 
 had αντου been origl, it is hardly possible that τον θεού should have been a gloss on it, 
 as ο θίος occurs just before). — for tv ττροςω-ω, δια της παρουσίας 6. — rec bef χρ., 
 ins ιησον, but om AB 17 Origj (τον χρ.) Dial Ath Chr Thl-comm Tert : ins (but χρ. ιη. 
 
 ciples), in the sight of God' (as eh. ii. 17 : νοήμ. of those signified by tv οίς, — vehereas 
 
 not merely to satisfy men's consciences, now, by the addition of τώχ' άπίστ., the 
 
 but with regard to God's allseeing eye blinding inflicted on the άττολλ. is marked 
 
 which discerns the heart). 3.] ' But if as falling under its category. The render- 
 
 (' which I concede;' — see note, 1 Cor. iv. 7) ing των άπιστων ' so that they believe not,' 
 
 it is even so that our gospel (the gospel Fritz., Billroth, is out of all question) in 
 
 preached by us) is hidden, it is among order that the illumination of (shining 
 
 (in the estimation of) the perishing that from, gen. subj.) the gospel of the glory 
 
 it is hidden.' The allegory of ch. iii. is of Christ, who is the image of God (recur- 
 
 continued, — the hiding of the gospel by the rence to the allegory of ch. iii. 18 ; — Christ 
 
 veil placed before the understanding. is the image of God, απαύγασμα της δόξης 
 
 4.] ' In whose case (it is true, that) the αντου, Heb. i. 3, into which same image, 
 
 god of this world (the Devil, the ruling την αυτήν εικόνα, we, looking on it in the 
 
 principle in the men of this world, see reff. mirror of the gospel, are changed by the 
 
 It is historically curious, that Irenseus Spirit; but which glorious image is not 
 
 (Hser.iv. 48), Origen, TertuU. (contr. Marc, visible to those who are blinded by Satan) 
 
 iv. 11), Chrys., Augustine (c. advers. leg. might not illuminate ('them:' αίιτοίς 
 
 ii. 7, 8), Oecum., Theodoret, Theophylact, was a correct gloss : — the rendering, ' that 
 
 all repudiate, in their zeal against the Mar- they might not see,' Grot., al., is inadmis- 
 
 cionites and Manichseans, the grammatical sible).' 5, 6.] Tf'e have no reason to 
 
 rendering, and take των άπιστων τον use trickery or craft, having no self sh ends 
 
 αιώνος τούτου together) blinded (the aor. to serve,- nor concealment, being ourselves 
 
 of a purely historical eventj the under- enlightened by God, and set for the spread- 
 
 standings of the unbelieving (i. e. who, ing of light. 5.] ' For we preach not 
 
 the άπο\λνμ(νοι, are victims of that (the subject of our preaching is not) our- 
 
 blinding of the understandings of the un- selves (Meyer understands κυρίους, ' as 
 
 believing, which the Devil is habitually lords;' but as De W. observes, this would 
 
 carrying on. Clever well remarks, that if anticipate the development of thought which 
 
 it had merely been τα νοίψατα, it would follows, the contrast between χρ. Ίησυνν 
 
 have only expressed in the concrete the as κύριον, and ourselves as your δούλους,
 
 5—8. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 G19 
 
 ' Εχο/ΐί6ν δε τον θησαυρον τούτον εν " οστρακίνοίς tEpp.. coi. ii. 
 " aKtveatv, Ίνα η ' ύπερβολτ} της ^υνάμίως τι τοϋ θεοϋ ^°^;ρ^;Μ,ΐί. 
 καί /4Τ} ες ΐ]μων εν τταιτί σλίρο^υενοι αΛλ ου ^ στε- passim, josh. 
 
 νοχωοου/ιιεί'Οί, αττορονμΐνοι 
 
 α\\' 
 
 ουκ "^ ίί,ατΓορονμΐνοι, °LVi"\"i.|8. 
 
 ν cnnstr., Rom. vii. 13. ch. xii. 7. Joseph. Antt. i. 13. 4. ii. 2. 1. 
 
 X I'h. i. (i rrft. y ch. Ti. 12 bis. Isa. xxviii. 20. xlix. 19. 
 
 a ch. i. 8 only. Ps. IxxTii. 15. 
 
 DEFG it V lat-flF) CDEFGJK &c vss Origj Thdrt Dam al.— 7. εχοντις 179.— 
 
 not being yet raised), — but Christ Jesus 
 as Lord, and ourselves as your servants 
 for Jesus' sake' (on account of Him and 
 His work). 6.] ' For (explains and 
 
 substantiates the last clause, — that we are 
 your servants for Jesus' sake) (it is) God, 
 who commanded light to shine out of 
 (not, ' ajle7' the darkness ;' this meaning of 
 iic, though allowable, e. g. ίκ κυμάτων γαρ 
 ανθις ου -γήλην' ΰρώ, does not occur in 
 Ν. Τ.) darkness (originally. Gen. i. .3) who 
 shined (Grot., Fritz., Meyer, would render 
 ίλαμφεν, ' caused light to shine,' using the 
 verb in the factitive sense, as ανατέλλω, 
 Matt. V. 45, and ώ λάμττονσα ττίτρα πυρός 
 ίικόρυ^οΐ' σ(\ας, Eur. Phoen. 2•2β. But 
 this usage of the word seems entirely poeti- 
 cal, and the intransitive sense would as well 
 express the divine act) in our hearts (the 
 physical creation bearing an analogy to the 
 spiritual) in order to the shining forth 
 (to others) of the knowledge (in us) of the 
 glory of God in the face of Christ ' {= της 
 
 0(Ίξι/ς τ. θιοϋ της έΐ' τΓυοςώπφ χρ., 'the 
 . glory of God manifested in Christ'). The 
 figure is still derived from the history in 
 ch. iii., and refers to the brightness on the 
 face of Moses : — the only true effulgence of 
 the divine glory is from the face of Christ. 
 Meyer contends for the connexion of ίν 
 ττροςώπ. γρ. with φωτισμόν, but his ex- 
 planation fails to convey to my mind any 
 satisfactory sense. He says that when the 
 γνωηις is imparted by preaching, it shines, 
 and its brightness illuminates the face of 
 Christ, because it is His face whose glory is 
 looked on in the mirror of preaching. But 
 I cannot think that any thing so very far- 
 fetched would be in the Ap.'s mind. — As to 
 the necessity of the art. τ Γ/ς before ίν, none 
 will assert it who are much versed in the 
 many varieties of expression in such sen- 
 tences in the Ap.'s style. 7 — 18.] 
 Tfiis glorious ministry is fulfilled ly weak, 
 afflicted, persecuted, and decaying vessels, 
 which are vmreover worn out in the work 
 (7 — 12). Yet the spirit of faith, the hope 
 of the resurrection, and of being j)resented 
 with them, for ic horn he has laboured, bears 
 him up against the decay of the outer man, 
 and all present tribulation {\',i— 18). We 
 are not justified in assuming, with Calvin, 
 Estius, al., that a definite reproach of per- 
 
 sonal meanness had induced the Ap. to 
 speak thus. For he does not deal with any 
 such reproach here, but with matters com- 
 mon to all human ministers of the word. — 
 All this is a following out in detail of the 
 ούκ ίγκακοϋμιν of ver. 1, already enlarged 
 on in one of its departments, — that of not 
 shrinking from openness of speech,— and 
 now to be put forth in another, viz. bearing 
 up against outicard and inward difficulties. 
 — If any polemical purpose is to be sought, 
 it is the setting forth of the abundance of 
 sufferings, the glorying in weakness (ch. xi. 
 23 30), which substantiated his apostolic 
 mission : but even such purpose is only in 
 the background ; he is pouring out, in the 
 fulness of his heart, the manifold discou- 
 ragements and the far more exceeding en- 
 couragements of his office. 7.] τον 
 θησ. τοΐτ., viz. ' the light of the know- 
 ledge of the glory of God,' ver. 6. iwtiSt) 
 yap πολλίί Kdi μ^γαΚα Ηττε ττερι της άττορ- 
 ρητου δόξης' 'ίνα μη τις f^iyy, κα'ι. πώς 
 τυσαΰτης ίόζΐ]ς απολαύοντες μ'ενομεν iv 
 Θνητιί) σώματι ; φησίν, 'ότι τοϋτο μεν ονν 
 αΰτο μάλιστα ίστι το θανμαστον, και 
 δείγμα μέγιστην της τοϋ θίοϋ δυνάμεως, 
 'ότι σκεΐιος οστράκινον τοσαύτην ήδυνήθη 
 λαμπρότητα ΐνεγκεΊ)', και τηλικοϋτον φυ- 
 Χάξαι θησανρόν. Chrys. Hom. viii. 496 
 Α. Some (Calv., al.) think the θησ. to 
 be the whole διακονία : but it seems 
 simpler to refer it to that which has im- 
 mediately preceded, in a style like that of 
 Paul, in which each successive idea so 
 commonly evolves itself out of the last. 
 The σκενος is the body, not the whole per- 
 sonality : the ό ίξω άνθρωπος of ver. 13; 
 see ver. 10. And in the troubles of the 
 body the personality shares, as long as it is 
 bound up with it here. — The similitude 
 and form of expression is illustrated by 
 Wetst. from Artemidorus vi. 25, θάι ατον 
 μεν yap εΐκότως ίσημαινε Ty -γνί^αικί το 
 είναι tv όστρηκινψ σκίύει, — Arrian, Epict. 
 iii. 9, niura εχω άντΊ των άργυρωμάτων, 
 άντϊ των χρυσωμάτων σν χρυηά σκεΰη, 
 οστράκινον δε τον λόγο»•, and Herod, iii. 
 96, τούτον τον φήρον θησαυρίζει ϋ 
 βασιλεύς τρόπψ τοιψδε. ίς πίθους κε- 
 ραμΐους τηξας καταχίει, πλί/σας ck το 
 άγγος περιαιρίει, επεάν δι δειβί) χρημά- 
 των, κατακόπτίΐ τοσούτον, 'όσου αν εκά-
 
 620 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 IV. 
 
 b — Malt. V. 10 
 
 al. fr 
 c Rl^tt. xxvii. 
 
 ^ Βιωκόμ^νοι αλλ ουκ *^ εγκαταλειττόμενοι, καταβαΧ- 
 Mk. ■ Αομίνοι αΛΛ ουκ αττοΑΑυμΒνοι, τταντοη τ-ην νίκηωσιν 
 
 Acts ϋ 27 al. _ , , „ , - , „ , ,, > f 1, y ν 
 
 2T.m^iv. 16. του 1 ί}σου fi' τω σώματι πίριφίροντίς, lua και η ί,ωη 
 ^(U^b.\±\^' του Ίησοΰ εν τω σώματι ήμων ' ψανερωθ»}' ^^ απ yap 
 
 ηι. 19. "πμίΐς οι ί,^ιτες εις ι/ανοΓου ττοραοιοομεσα οιο 1ί)σουν, 
 
 fR'.m iv. 19 ίνα και η ύ,ωη του Ιησού φανίρωΌ^ ευ rrj t/VijTij 
 
 onlyt. \ r ~ 19, " 'fl' 'f-n' " f^v 
 
 gM..rk vi.iis. σαρκι ημών. ωςτε ο σονατος εν 7]μιν evioyeiTai, η οε 
 
 11 Rum. vli. 5 reff. 
 
 i John ί. 31 al.fr. 
 
 k Matt. X. 21 al. 
 
 9. ιγκαταλιμττανομίνοι FG 7^. 02 Eus Chr Max (ινκ. FG and -vvonevoi G). — 10. rec 
 bef ιησαυ (1st) pref κυριον, with JK &c syr goth al Chr Thdrt Dam al Ambrst ms al : 
 om ABCDEFG I?. \H\ 31. 71. «0. 177-8 it ν Syr ar-erp copt seth arm Orig-oft Cyr 
 Iren Tert Did al (χηιστοκ D'FG : χιι. ιησ. D-'E Tert : ιησ. χρ. al). — σώματι ημών 
 DEFG vss Iren Orig-intj latt : σωμαη κυρίου ημών 112 it Iren Tert Ambrst al. — d/t. 
 to ιησ. om 89'. — του ιησ. χρ. D' : ιησ. χρ. FG g Iren Orig-int al (all alit). — φαν. iv τ. 
 σωμ. ημ. A ν (not am demid al). — 11. for ati (om 37") ei FG g Syr {sic et for iva και) 
 al Tert Ambrst : και Chr. — διϊΐομίΟα FG. — ιησυνν to ιησου om 93 — aft iva, om και 
 C 3 Tert.— Θι'»;γ?} om 3. llG-19 al.— for του ιησον, ι. χριστού O\D^ om xp.)EFG : 
 του χρ. C. — 12. rec bef θαν ins μεν (to con-espond to L• below), with JK &c syrf al 
 Thl Oec Ambrst-ms : cm ABCDEFG 31 it ν copt Syr goth al Chr Thdrt Dam lat-ff.— 
 
 στοτε δίηται. ή νττίρβ. της 8υν. 
 
 not = >) ύτΓίοβάλλουσα ΰύΐ'αμις, but, the 
 ίύναμις contemplated on the side of its 
 ΰτΓίρβολη, — the power consisting in the 
 effects of the apostolic ministry (1 Cor, 
 ii. 4), as well as in the upholding under 
 trials and difficulties. The passage com- 
 monly referred to (even by Stanley) to 
 prove the hendiadys, may serve entirely to 
 disprove it ; Jos. Antt. i. 13. 4, μαθών ίε 
 αϋτυν το ττρόθκμον κ. την ΰπερβοΧήν της 
 θρησκείας : " the readiness and surpassing- 
 ness of his obedience." η τοΰ θεοΰ] 
 
 ' may belong to (i. e. be seen to belong to) 
 God.' Tertull., Vulg., and Estius, render 
 it ' ut sublimitas sit virtutis Dei, non 
 ex nobis,' which is hardly allowable, and 
 disturbs the sense by confusing the anti- 
 thesis between ό θεός and ήμεΐς. 
 8^10.] He illustrates the expr., ' earthen 
 vessels,' in detail, by his own experience 
 and that of the other ministers of Christ. 
 8 ] ' in every way (see reff.) 
 pressed, but not (inextricably) crushed 
 (στ. ' angustias h. 1. denotat tales, e qui- 
 busnon deturexitus,' Meyer, from Kypke) ; 
 — in perplexity but not in despair (a 
 literal statement of what the last clause 
 stated fyiiratirely .• as Stanley, " bewil- 
 dered, but not benighted ") : — perse- 
 cuted but not deserted (syifaraXiiTro- 
 μενοι, see reff., used of desertion both 
 by God and by man. Hammond, Olsh., 
 
 Stanley, al., would refer διωκήμ 
 
 to the foot race, and render it 'pur- 
 sued, but not left behind,' as Herod, viii. 
 59, ol ίέ yf (γκαταλειττόμενοι οΰ στε- 
 ψανοϋνται, — but the sense thus would be 
 
 quite beside the purpose, as the Ap. is 
 speaking not of rivalry from those who as 
 runners had the same end in view, but of 
 troubles and persecutions) : struck down 
 (as with a dart during pursuit ; so Xen. 
 Cyr. i. 3. 14, θηρία .... τοζεί'ων και 
 άκοντίζιον καταβαΧεΤς. It is ordinarily 
 interpreted of a fall in wrestling ; but 
 agonistic fgures would be out of place in 
 the present passage, and the attempt to find 
 them has bewildered most of the modern 
 Comm.), but not destroyed: 10.] 
 
 always carrying about in our body (i. e. 
 ever in our apostolic work having our body 
 exposed to and an example of : or per- 
 haps even, as Stanley, " bearing with us, 
 wherever we go, the burden of the 
 dead body." But see below) the killing 
 (the word appears to occur only twice be- 
 sides, — in Rom. iv. 19, where it signifies, 
 figuratively, utter lack of strength and vital 
 power, and in a fragment of the Oneirocri- 
 tica of Astrampsychus (Meyer), νεκρούς 
 ορών, νεκρωσιν (ζεις ττραγματωΐ', where 
 the sense is also figurative. But here the 
 literal sense, ' tfie being put to death.' must 
 evidently be kept, and the expr. understood 
 as 1 Cor. xv. 31, and as Chrys. : oi θάνατοι 
 oi καθημεριΐ'οί, Ci ών και ή άνάπτασις 
 εδίίκνυτο. The rendering, ' the deadness 
 of Jesus to the flesh, as opposed to the 
 vitality, ?'/ ζωί) τοΰ 'lijnoii below,' — see 
 Dr. Peile's Annotations on the Epistles, 
 i. 383, — is beside the present purpose, 
 and altogether inconsistent with αεί εΙς 
 θάνατοι' τταραδιοόμεθα διά Ίησοϋν, ver. 
 11. See Stanley's note) of Jesus (as 
 τά παθήματα τοΰ •χριστού, ch. i. 5 : —
 
 9-14. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 621 
 
 ί,ωτι iv υμιν 
 
 13 
 
 δ^ 
 
 κατά το 
 
 νμίΐς 
 q 
 
 eyji^VTtq όε το αυτό 
 •γί-γραμμίνον *" ΕττΙστίναα, 
 πιστίνομίν, διό καΐ λαλοΰμεν 
 
 ίγίίρας τον κυ^ιον 
 
 Ί 
 
 πνεύμα της ττιστεως o=.nr.m.vin. 
 
 » , , IS reft. 
 
 ΟΙΟ ίλαλησα, και pfsAcxv. 
 
 ' ' ]. (ex IT. 
 
 14 '?' " '10.) 
 
 ίΐόΟΤίς ΟΤΙ ο ql Cor. XV. 4 
 \ f - ν »τ - α ' - and passim. 
 
 ήσουν και τημας συν Ιησου ' iyfpu 
 
 γψ£ 
 
 13. κστα .... ίλαλ. om Marcion (in Epiph) : bef t\a\. ins και FG g sjrrr goth. — 
 
 14. Kvpiov om Β 71-3 ν (am demid : not tol) arm (om τον also Chr-comm Dam-comra 
 Thl) Tert Pel Sedul Bed : ins CDEFGJK ms^ nrly (app) vss gr-lat-ff.— rec δια ιησου 
 {corrn, on account of (he difficuUi/ found in συν ιησου being joined to a future verb, 
 His Resurrn being past), with D'JK &c vss Chr-te.xt Thdrt Dam al : ii αυτού 91 : om 
 71 Clir-comm Thl-comm : txt BCDEFG C. 17. 31 it copt Tert {cum ipso) Amb Ambrst 
 (not ed Rom) Pel Bed (συν iv δια iv 93). — tyipu D'FG, suscitat et constituit goth. — 
 
 not ' ad exemplum Christi,' as Grot., al.), 
 in order that also the life of Jesus 
 may be manifested in our body :' i. e. 
 ' that in our bodies, holding up against 
 such troubles and preserved in such dan- 
 gers, may be shewn forth that mighty 
 power of God which is a testimony that 
 Jesus lives and is exalted to be a Prince and 
 a Saviour :'— not, ' that our repeated de- 
 liverances might resemble His Resurrection, 
 as our sufferings His Death,' as Meyer, 
 who argues that the literal meaning must 
 be retained, as in the other member of the 
 comparison, owing to tv τψ σώματι ήμ. 
 But, as De W. justly observes, the bodily 
 deliverance is manifestly a subordinate con- 
 sideration, and the Ζ,ωίι of far higher signi- 
 ficance, testified indeed by the body's pre- 
 servation, but extending far beyond it. 
 11.] Explanation and confirmation 
 of ver. 10. — 'For we who live (ζώντ£5 
 asserting that to which death is alien and 
 strange, an antithesis to tig θάνατον 
 τταραδ., as in the other clause ζωι) to tv 
 T\) BvtiTy σηρκί. No more specific mean- 
 ing for ζώντις must be imagined, as 
 ' tan/is mortibns supersiitem,' Bengel, 
 Estius, al., — or ' as long as we live,' Beza, 
 al., — or ' gui ad/tiic vivimus, qui nondum 
 ex vita excessimus ut multi jam Christia- 
 norum,' as Grot.) are ever delivered to 
 death (in dangers and persecutions, so cli. 
 xi. 23, iv θανάτοις ττυλλάκις) on account 
 of Jesus (so in Rev. i. !> John was in Pat- 
 raos δια τον Χόγον του θίοϋ κ. διό. την 
 μοιιτυρίαί' 'ίΐ]σ(ΐν χρ.) that also the life 
 of Jesus may be manifested in our mor- 
 tal flesh (the antithesis is more strongly 
 put by Ovriry σαρκί than it would be by 
 θΐΊΐτψ σώματι in Rom. viii. II, the flesh 
 being the very pabulum of decay and cor- 
 ruption). By tills antithesis, the wonderful 
 greatness of the divine power, »'/ ιΊττίρβιιλ)) 
 της δυνιιμίως, is strikingly brought out: 
 God exhibits Death in the living, that He 
 may exhibit Life in the dying. 12.] 
 
 By it is also brought out that which is here 
 the immediate subject, — the vast and unex- 
 
 ampled trials of the apostolic office, all 
 summed up in these words : ' So that death 
 works in us, but life in you ;' i. e. ' the 
 trials by which the dying of Jesus is ex- 
 hibited in us, are exclusively and pecu- 
 liarly OUR OWN, — whereas (and this is 
 decisive for the spiritual sense of ζω/;) the 
 life, ivhereof we are to be witnesses, ex- 
 tends beyond ourselves, nay finds its field 
 of action and energizing in you. Estius, 
 Grot , and apparently Olsh., take ivipytl- 
 ται passively, ' is wrought' (' mors agitur et 
 exercetur .... perficitur vita.' Est.) : but 
 it is never so used in N. T. Chrys., Calv., 
 al., take the ver. ironically, τά μϊν ίπικίν- 
 δυνα ήμι^ς ΰπομίνιιμίν, των δι χρηστών 
 ΰμης άπυλαΰίτε, — but such a sentiment 
 seems alien from the spirit of the passage. 
 Meyer, as unfortunately, limits ζωή to 
 natural life, whereas (as above) the context 
 plainly evinces spiritual life to be meant, 
 not merely natural. — In Rom. viii. 10, 11, 
 the vivifying influence of His Spirit who 
 raised Jesus from the dead is spoken of as 
 extending to the body also ; here, the up- 
 holding influence of Him who delivers and 
 preserves the body, is spoken of as vivifying 
 tlie whole man : LIFE, in both places, 
 being the higher and spiritual life, includ- 
 ing the lower and natural. ' And, in our 
 relative positions,^ of this life, ye are the 
 examples,— a church of believers, alive to 
 God through Christ in your various voca- 
 tions, and not called on to be θίατριζόμινοι 
 as WE are, who are (not indeed excluded 
 from that life, — nay it flows from us to 
 you, — but are) more especially examples of 
 conformity to the death of our common 
 Lord; — in whom death works.' 
 13 — 18.] Encour.\gements : and (I) 
 FAITH, which enables us to go on preach- 
 ing to you. Meyer connects this ver. with 
 »/ i'f ζωή iv ΰμϊν : for, he says, by means 
 of ΤΓίστινομίν διυ και Χαλονμίΐ', is that 
 ζωτ) iv ΰμ. ivipynrni, wrought. But, 
 not to mention that thus the context is 
 strangely disturbed, in which tve and our 
 trials form the leading subject, it would
 
 622 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 IV. 
 
 r ■= ch. xi. 2. 
 
 Eph. V. 27. 
 
 Col i. 22. 
 β Rom. V. 20. 
 
 Ti. 1 al. 
 1 1 t or. ix. 19 
 
 reff. 
 η Alts xxiv. 3 
 V Irait.sit., ch. 
 
 ix. 8. Eph. 
 
 i. 8. 1 Thess. iii. 12. 
 
 Kat '' 7ΓαραστΊ}σΗ συν νμίν. ^^ τα ya^) πάντα δι υμάς. Ίνα bcde 
 ■η * γύρις ^ πΧίονασασα οια των πλίΐουων την " ει/ναρι- 
 στιαν ττερισσευσ^ εις την οοΐ;αν του υεου. οιο ουκ 
 
 ΐ-γκακουμεν, αΛΛ ti /cat ο εςω 7)μωυ αΐ'σρωπος 
 
 ■W ver. 1. χ ver. 3. y here only. See Rom. vii. 22 reff. Eph. iii. 16. 
 
 i^eyepei 72. 109. — συν om 109 : συν ημιν 219-38 lect 8. — 15. Si ημαι; 37- 80 : avrov 
 xth.—ntpirratvii 721.— 16. i-gc ικκακ. (see wr 1), with CJK &c ff: txt BDEFG 37-9. 
 109-39'.— for ίξω, ιΚωθίν D'D* 73. 137 Bas Thdrtj {εε,ω{).—φθ€ρίται JK 46'-7. 114 
 
 surely be very unnatural that ΐχονης δέ 
 should apply not to the princijial but to the 
 subordinate clause of the foregoing ver. — 
 ' But (contrast to the foregoing state of 
 trial and working of death in us) having 
 the same spirit of faith (not distinctly 
 the Holy Spirit,— hut as in reff., not 
 merely a hitman disposition : the indwell- 
 ing Holy Spirit penetrates and characterizes 
 the whole renewed man) with that de- 
 scribed in the Scriptures {to avrb κατά 
 TO yiyp-, i. e. either as Billroth, το αυτό 
 [ίκίύ'ψΐ 7Γ£ρί ου γέγρίίττται, or as De W., 
 =1 TO αυτό ώς yiyp-, ώςττίο being some- 
 times found after ό αυτός, ϊτος, and the like, 
 and κατά here being equivalent to it. I 
 prefer the former : but at all events the 
 connexion of το αυτό and icara το ytyp• 
 must be maintained, and we must not, with 
 Meyer, connect κητά το γ(γρ• • • • with και 
 7ΐμΰς πιστεύομίΐ', which makes the Αρ. 
 say that his faith is according to the words 
 of the citation, and thus confuses the whole 
 process of thought), I believed, where- 
 fore I spoke (the connexion of the words 
 in the Psalm is not clear, nor the precise 
 meaning of '•2, rendered by the LXX διό. 
 See Pool's Synopsis in loc. for the various 
 renderings), we too believe, wherefore 
 we also speak (continue our preaching 
 of the gospel, notwithstanding such vast 
 hindrances within and without) : 
 14.] knowing (fixes, and expands in detail 
 the indefinite ττιστίΰομίν, and thus gives the 
 ground of AnXof'/nfj', — not as commonly 
 understood, the matter of which we speak) 
 that He who raised up (from the dead) 
 the Lord Jesus, will raise up us also 
 {from the dead hereafter, see 1 Cor. vi. 
 13, 14 : — not in a figurative resurrection 
 from danger, as Beza, who afterwards 
 changed his opinion, al., and lately Meyer, 
 whose whole interpretation of this passage 
 is singularly forced, and his defence of it 
 unfair, see below) with Jesus {πΰν Ίησοϋ 
 is not necessarily figurative, as Meyer ; even 
 in the passages where a figurative sense is 
 the prevailing one, it is only as built upon 
 the fact of a literal ' raising with Christ,' to 
 be accompUshed at the great day : see Col. 
 iii. 1. 3. 1 Thess. v. 10. Eph. ii. 6) and 
 
 present us with you ' (i. e. as in Jude 
 24, τψ δυναμίνψ . . . στήσαι κατίνώττιον 
 Γί)ς• δόϊ,^ις αντιιΰ άμωμους ίν ayaWiaan 
 . . ., and in reff., at the day of His coming). 
 — Meyer's objection to the meaning above 
 given, — that the Ap. could not thus speak 
 of the resurrection, because he expected 
 (1 Cor. XV. 51, 52 ; i. 8. 2 Cor. i. 13, 14) 
 to be alive at the day of Christ, is best re- 
 futed by this very passage, ch. v. 1 ff., where 
 ?iis admission of at least the possibility of 
 his death is distinctly set forth. The fact 
 is that the iytptl here, having respect rather 
 to the contrast of the future glory with the 
 present suffering, does not necessarily imply 
 one or other side of the alternative of being 
 quick or dead at the Lord's coming, but 
 embraces all, quick and dead, in one blessed 
 resurrection-state. — This confidence, of 
 being presented at that day niiv νμίν, is 
 only analogous to his expressions elsewhere ; 
 seech, i. 14. 1 Thess. ii. 19, 20; iii. 13. 
 15.] Explanation of niv νιμ-ΐν as a 
 ground of his trust : with reference also to 
 »/ £i ζωΐ) ίν ■υμϊν, ver. 12; viz. that all, 
 both the sufferings and victory of the min- 
 isters, axe for the church : see the parallel 
 expression, ch. i. 6, 7• ' For all things 
 {of which we have been speaking ; or per- 
 haps hyperbohcally, all things, the whole 
 working and arrangements of God, as in 
 1 Cor. iii. 22, 23, UTt ίνίστώτα ι'ίτε 
 μίλλοντα' ττάντα υμών) are on your 
 behalf, that Grace, having abounded by 
 means of the greater number (who have 
 received it), may multiply the thanks- 
 giving (which shall accrue), to the glory 
 of God.' Such (]) is the rendering of 
 Meyer, and, in the main, of Chrys., Erasm., 
 al., and recently, Riickert and Olshausen. 
 Three other ways are possible : (2) ' that 
 Grace, having abounded, may, on account 
 of the thanksgiving of the greater number, 
 be multiplied (' πλίοΐ'ήζω habet vim posi- 
 tivi : ταρισσίΰω, comparativi,' Bengel) to 
 the glory of God.' So Luther, Beza, Es- 
 tius. Grot., Bengel, al. : — (3) ^ that Grace, 
 having abounded, may, by means of the 
 greater number, multiply the thanksgiving 
 to the glory of God.' So Emmerling and 
 De AVette : — (4) ' that Grace, having nml-
 
 15—18. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 623 
 
 ^ ^ιαφθύοίται, αλλ' ο ^ ίσωθεν ανακαινονται '^ η^ΐίί/οα κα/ ^ ^ίm^Ί■. Ι!' 
 
 , , 'l7 ^ ν d ' e 'Λ , ^ - /1\ ''/ Rev. vUi ί). 
 
 Ίΐμίρα. ' το yap παξ)αυτικα ελαψρον της νΑιψίως χι. is only. 
 Ύ\μωι> καθ ύπίρβοΧην ίΐς υπΐοβοΧην αιωνιον ^ ρό/οος * 3s»^4'ueffi' 
 
 h P./J' i Ύ < ~ is' ^ k / r - b'col iii. lo' 
 
 οοζης KaTspyuLiTai ημιν, μη σκοπονντων ημών oniyt. 
 
 τα βΧίπομΕνα αΧλα τα μη βΧίττομίνα' τα yap (^eb",'.''"* 
 
 1 /ΟΛ ' m ' ^ <>* ■^ i (Ολ ' ' ' d here only. 
 
 ρλ£πθ|αεΐ'α ττροςκαιρα, τα οε μη ρλεπομ^να αιωνία. p»\^>%.s»\. 
 
 only. Exod. Χϊίϋ 20. constr., 1 Cor. i. 25. ch. viii. 8. f Rom. vii. 13 reflf. κα6' ύ. ei? i/., here only. 
 
 g = here only. Malt. xx. 12. Acts xv. 28 refl'. h = Knm. ii. 7 lefl. i = Rom. iv. 15. τ.3. 
 
 k = Phil. ii. 4. (Rom. xvi. 17 reff.) I = Rom. viii. 24. m Matt. xiii. 21. J Mk. Heb. xi. 25 only t• 
 
 al Thdrto (once txt) Thl. — for tawOev, ίσω {corrn for iiniformity) BCD'FG 4. 37. 47. 
 57. 72. 113-16-37 Orig Ath Chr Thdrtj Dam : txt D^EJK most mss Thdrt^ Thl Oec— 
 aft ίβω (or -Qtv) ins ημών {corrn, an the last, for uniformity) ECDEFG 37• 73 al g syr arm 
 Thdrtj (Marcionj in Tert) : om JK most mss vss Orig Ath Chr Thdrtj Thl Oec Tertg 
 (Marcionj in Tert) Lucif Ambrst al. — 17. ττοοςκηφον και ίΚαψρον D'EFG 31 vss lat-ti" 
 (Thdrt-comm sajs : Cia του παραντίκα ititif το βραχύ η και ττρόςκαιρον. So also 
 Thl). — ημών om Β Chr. — ίΐς νπερβ. ova C 38. 80 Has. — αιωνιυν om arm: εν ημιν it ν 
 Ambrst Augj Pel : ημάς 93. — 18. for σκοπ. ημών, σκοττονντες D'FG it Ambrst-ed. — from 
 βλίπομενα (1) to (3) om 109-78 : τα yap βλ. om 80. — ττροςκαιρα εστίν FG (g ν all). 
 
 tiplied (see 1 Thess. iii. 12, for the transit, 
 sense) by means of the greater number the 
 thanksgiving, may abound to the glory of 
 God.' This last has not been suggested by 
 any Comm. that I am aware of, but is ad- 
 missible. — I prefer (1), as best agreeing 
 with the position of the words, and with 
 the emphases. If (2) had been intended, 
 I should have expected 'iva πλίυνάσασα »'/ 
 χήρις, — πλεονόσαηα in its present position 
 standing awkwardly alone. The same re- 
 mark apphes to (3), and this besides, that 
 in that case I should expect πλειόνων, and 
 not των πλ., in which the art. rather re- 
 gards the matter of fact, the many who 
 have received the grace, or who give thanks, 
 than the intention, to multiply the thanks- 
 giving by the (possible) greater number of 
 persons. If (4) had been intended, I should 
 have looked for 'ίνα »'/ χάρις τήν ενχαρι- 
 στίαν ττλεον. ίιά των ττλιι., ττερισσ. κ.τ.λ. 
 By adopting (1), we keep the words and 
 emphases just where they stand : 'iva η 
 χάρις, ττΧιονάσασα διά των πλειόνων (not 
 οιά Γ. πλ. πλέον., which would give an undue 
 prominence to ίι« των πλειύν., whereas 
 those words only particularize πλίοΐ'α'σασα), 
 τήν ενχ. περισσενσ^, εις τήν οόζυν τ. Omv. 
 As to the sense, (see the very similar senti- 
 ment, ch. i. 11,) thanksgiving is the highest 
 and noblest offering of the Church to God's 
 glory {θνσία αίνίσεως οαΚάσει μι, Ps. xlix. 
 23, LXX) : that this may be rendered, in 
 the best sense, as the result of the working 
 of grace which has become abundant by 
 means of the many recipients, is the great 
 end of the Christian ministry. 
 16 — 18.] Second ground (f encouragement 
 — HOPE. 16.] ' Wherefore (on ac- 
 
 count of the hope implied in the faith spoken 
 of ver. 1 4, which he is about to expand) we 
 
 do not shrink (as in ver. 1 : but noiv, owing 
 to despair), but (on the contrary) though 
 even (not ' even if putting a case; t'l και 
 with ind. asserts the fact, as in ii και οπ'εν- 
 δομαι, Phil. ii. 17) our outward man is 
 wasted away (i. e. our body, see Rom. vii. 
 22, is, hy this continued νικρωσις and ενίρ- 
 yiiii τον Bararov, being irorti out : — he is 
 not as yet speaking of dissolution by death, 
 but only of gradual approximation to it), 
 yet (άλλα in the apodosis after a hypo- 
 thetic clause, introduces a strong and marked 
 contrast: — so Horn. II. «. 81, — είττερ yap 
 τε χόλυν yε και αύτήμαρ κατίίττίψ}/, άλλα 
 τε και μετόπισθεν έχει κότυν, υφρα τελίσ- 
 fiy : see other exx. in Hartung, Partikel- 
 lehre, ii. 40) our inner (man) is renewed 
 (contrast, subordinately to διαφθείρεται, 
 but mainly to iyKanui^tv) day by day ' 
 {ήμ. και ή μ., SO Hebr. DVT cv, Esth. iii. 4 ; 
 an expression not found [Meyer] even in 
 the LXX) : i.e. Our spiritual hfe, the life 
 which testifies the life of Jesus, even in our 
 mortal bodies (ver. 11), is continually fed 
 with fresh accessions of grace:' see next 
 ver. So Chrys., — πώς άνακαινοϋται; Ty 
 πίστει, tij ίλπιδι, Ty προθυμκ^, τψ λοιπόν 
 κατατολμ^ν των δεινών. 'orrijj yap ίιν 
 μνρια πάσχι^ το σώμα, τοσούτφ χρηστό- 
 τερος έχει τάς ελπίδας ή ^Ινχή, και λαμ- 
 πρότερα yίvετaι, καθάπερ χρυσίον πνρού- 
 μενον επιπλέον. Horn. ix. p. 50(1 Α. 
 17, 18.] Method of this reneirat.—' For 
 the present light (burden) of our afflic- 
 tion (the adjec. use of παραντίκα is com- 
 mon with Thucyd., e. g. ii. (>4, ή παραν- 
 τίκα λαμ—ρότης, και ες τυ έπειτα δόϊα : 
 viii. 82, τήν τε παραντίκα ελπίδα : νϋ. 7Ί 
 εν τψ παραντίκα, where Schol. 'εν τφ έν- 
 εστώτι τότε χμόνφ ; — and with his imi- 
 tator Demosthenes, e.g. p. 72. 16, y παρ-
 
 624 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 V. 
 
 o'tSojufv γαρ Ότι εαν η " επίγειος ημών 
 
 κατά 
 
 λυθ)), 
 
 υικια του bcde 
 „ . , FGJK 
 
 οικυόομιμι εκ σεου ε^ομεί' 
 και 
 
 οικιαν 
 yap εν 
 
 η 1 Cor. XV. 40 ΎΓ 1 
 
 reft•. » ♦ 
 
 ο " Job iv. 19. ,, / 
 
 (XXX. 23.) ' σκηνους 
 
 ρ here only. ^ 
 
 iltM.rCvisd. ^ αχ£ΐ|θθ7Γθί?;τον αιώνιοι^ ει» τοις ουρανοις 
 η =STa«.xxvi. τούτω ' στεΐ'άΣ!!οίΐε»', το " ot/cr]T?)ptov ημών το εξ ουρανού 
 
 (ί1 [Ι Act^ νί *■ 
 
 14 Ezra V. 12. r = 1 Cor. iii. 9 reff. s Mark xiv. 58. Col. ii. 11 only t. t Rom. viii. 23 reff. 
 
 nJudeuouly. Jer. xxv. 3U (aid ). 
 
 Chap. V. 1. η om 72. 112. — for rov, hujus it ν Tert Ambrst Pel Jer. — bef οικοδ. ins 
 on (keeping the former on) DEFG it ν Chrj Ambrst Pel Sedul (not Tert Aug al). — ουκ 
 αχίΐροπ. FG (wow manuf. g). — amviov om seth.— 2. ίνΐυσασ^αι 55. 112. 219' arm. — 
 
 αντ'ιχ riSori) κ. ρζίστάιΐ'») μΰζον Ισχνιι 
 του ποθ' νστίρον ηννοίσειν μίλλορτος ; 
 —see also pp. 34. 24 ; 215. 10 : and more 
 exx. in Wetst. — ίλαφρόν as a substantive, 
 contrasted with βάμος ; see reff.), works 
 out for us (' pfficit,' ' is the means of bring- 
 ing about') in a surpassing and still 
 more surpassing manner (κηθ' νττ. εις 
 νπ(ρ. must belong to the verb, as Meyer 
 and De \V. ; for otherwise it can only qua- 
 lify ηΐώνιοί', the idea of which forbids such 
 qualification, not βάρος, which is separated 
 from it hy the adj. ;— i. e. so as to exceed 
 beyond all measure the tribulation) an 
 eternal weight of glory' {αΙώ%•ιον βάρος 
 opposed to τΓίΐρπυηλα ίΧαψρόν). 
 18.] Snbjectire condition under v-hich this 
 working out takes place. — ' While we re- 
 gard not (' propose not as our aim,' ' spend 
 not our care about,' — reff.) the things 
 which are seen (ref. = τά tniytiti, Phil, 
 iii. 19. Chrys. strikingly says, τ a βλίπό- 
 μίνα πάντα, καν κόλασις y, καν άνάπαν- 
 σις' ΐόςτί μήτί ίΚίϊθίΐ' χαννοΐ'σθαι, μήτί 
 ίντίϊ'θη' βιάΚισθ(ΐι), but the things which 
 are not seen (' aliud significat αόρατα, in- 
 visibilia, nam muUa quae non cernuntur, 
 erunt visibilia. confecto itinere fidei.' Ben- 
 gel — μή βλ., not οϋ, perhaps because 
 μη stands with participles in clauses of a 
 subjective character, so ατήκίτί . ... μη 
 ■πτνυόμίνοι ΐν μη^ίνί . . ., Pliil. i. 27, 28. 
 Winer, § 59. Ά. b. β, — or rather perhaps, 
 as ib. a, as hypothetic: τά ου βλιπόμ. 
 vrould be the things which as a matter of 
 fact at 0711/ given time we do not see, cf. ot 
 ουκ ή\ίημ(νυι, 1 Pet. ii. 10: τά μ.ή βλ., 
 generally and hypothetically, the things not 
 seen. So ό μή ων μετ ίμον, Matt. xii. 30, 
 in a case indefinite and hypothetical. This 
 amounts to much the same as when in the 
 ordinary account of such clauses, we say 
 that μή belongs to the stthject, οϋ to the 
 predicate, — but is a better explanation, in- 
 asmuch as that account gives only the lo- 
 gical./i2e<, — this, the logical reason of the 
 usage) : for the things which are seen, 
 are temporary (not ' temporal,' ' belonging 
 to time,' — but 'fleeting,' ' only for a time,' 
 see reff. : — i. e. till the day of Chi-ist) : but 
 
 the things which are not seen, are eter- 
 nal.' Chrys. again : καν βααιλίία, καν 
 κόλασις )j• ωςτε και εκείθεν φοβήσαι, και 
 εντενθ^ν προτρίψασθαι. — Seneca, Ερ. 59 
 (Wetst.), has a very similar sentiment : ' ista 
 imaginaria sunt, et ad tempus aliquam fa- 
 ciem ferunt. Nihil horum stabile nee soli- 
 dum est . . . Mittamus animum ad ea, quae 
 seterna sunt.' 
 
 Chap. V. 1 — 10.] Further specification 
 of the hope before spoken of, as consisting 
 in anticipation of an eternity of glory after 
 this life, in the resurrection-body : which 
 leads him evermore to strive to be found 
 xvell pleasing to the Lord at His coming .• 
 seeing that all shall then receive the things 
 done in the body. 1.] ' For (gives the 
 
 reason of ch. iv. 17, — principally of the 
 emphatic words of that ver., καθ' ΐ)περ- 
 βυλήν ε!ς ύπερβ., — shewing how it is that 
 so wonderful a process takes place) we 
 know (as in iv. 14, — are convinced, as 
 a sure matter of hope) that if (' supposing ,•' 
 — not = καν, 'etiamsi,' but indefinite and 
 doubtful : if this delivering to death con- 
 tinually should end in veritable death. The 
 case is hypothetical, because many will 
 be glorified without the κ-στάλυαις taking 
 place: see 1 Cor. xv. 51. 53) our earthly 
 tabernacle- dwelling (roi~' σκίινους is gen. 
 of apposition. The similitude is not de- 
 rived from the wandering of the Israelites 
 in the wilderness, nor from the tabernacle, 
 but is a common one with Greek writers, 
 see exx. in Wetstein. " The whole pas- 
 sage is expressed through the double figure 
 of a house or tent, and a garment. The 
 explanation of this abrupt transition from 
 one to the other may be found in the 
 image which, both from his occupation 
 and his birthplace, would naturally occur 
 to the Apostle, — the tent of Cilician 
 hair-cloth, which might almost equally 
 suggest the idea of a habitation and of 
 a vesture." Stanley. Chrys. observes : 
 ειπών οι'κίαν σκήνους, και το ενδιάΧντον 
 και πρόςκαιρυν δειί,ας εντεύθεν, άντέΟηκε 
 την αϊωνιαν το γάρ της σκηνής όνομα 
 το πρόςκαιμον ττολλα'κις ίείκννσι) were 
 dissolved (' mite verbum,' Bengel : i. e.
 
 1—4. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 625 
 
 "■' ίΤΓΕί'δυσασθοι '" ίπιποΟοΰντες' ^ " tl yt και "^ εν^υσύμίνοι V\v''in"\L• 
 ου ' ^νμνοι tvpt\Jt]aoutUa. * και γαρ οι ονης ίν τω ^σκηνΐΐ χ c.i i.23. 
 
 ' ' ' ' ■• XX 1 Cor. XT. 
 
 ■^^ reff. y So Plato, Cratyl. p. 277 c, ή ψκγ» ivufh tu5 σώματοΓ. 
 
 ζ = 1 Cor. iv. 2. xv. 15. I'hil. ii. 8. λ. / ι λ- ι Λ' » 
 
 3. ft^-fp (see notes) BDEFG 17• 80 (Chr : τινίς δε φασιν, ο και μάλιστα ΐγκριτεον, 
 EiVfp και ΐνδυσάμενοι. So also Oec) : ει yap 52 : t.\t CJK mss (nrly) Clem Mac^ Chr 
 Thdrt Dam Till Oec : si tamen it ν Aug Pel al : si quidem Tert Ambrst al. — for tvS. 
 εκδνσαμίΐΌΐ {see notes) D'FG (εκλ. so also ίττιλ. ver 6) it al (mss in Ambrst) Tert 
 (Mareion in Tert) Ambr Paulin Prim : txt BCD^EJK mss (appy) ν copt syrr goth seth al 
 Clem (ηνες in Chr, with his approval : he himself reads εκδ., explaing it καν άποθοΊμεθα 
 τυ σώμα) MaCj Thdrt Dam al Ambrst Aug Pel Sedul Bed. — for ευρ., inveniamnr \t\ 
 Tert lat-ff. — 4. aft σκηνει, add τούτω {supplementary insertion) DEFG 'όΐ. 120 (pref 
 
 ' taken down,' ' done away with :' but 
 ' dissolved,' as well as the vulg. ' dis- 
 solvatur,' is right), we have in the 
 heavens (as Meyer rightly remarks, the 
 present is used of the time at which the 
 dissolution shall have taken place. But 
 even then the dead have it not in actual 
 possession, but only prepared by God for 
 them against the appearing of the Lord : 
 and therefore they are said to have it in the 
 heavens. Chrys., &c., Beza, Grot., al., 
 join iv τηΧς οϋρ. with οϊκιαν, which can 
 hardly be : it would be either ίττουραΊ tov 
 or Ιξ οΐφανοΐι. The Ε. V. according to 
 the present punctuation, yields no sense : 
 ' not made with hands, eternal in the 
 heavens') a building (no longer a σκΐ}νος) 
 from God (' in an especial manner prepared 
 by God,' ' pure from God's hands;' not as 
 contrasted with our earthly body, which, 
 see 1 Cor. xii. 18. 24, is also from God), a 
 dwelling not made with hands (here 
 again, not as contrasted with the fleshly 
 body, for that too is άχειροποιητος, but 
 with other οίκίαι, which are χειραποιητοι. 
 Remember again the Ap.'s occupation of a 
 tent-maker), eternal.' — A diificulty has been 
 raised by some Comm. respecting the inter- 
 mediate disembodied state, — how the Ap. 
 here regards it, or whether he regards it at all. 
 But none need be raised. The οικία which 
 in this verse is said, at the time of dissolu- 
 tion, to be ev τοις υνρανοίς, is, vjhen we 
 put it on, in the next ver., our οίκητήριον 
 TO Ιξ ουρανού. Thus the intermediate 
 state, though lightly passed over, as not 
 belonging to the subject, is evidently in the 
 mind of St. Paul. — Some Comm., Photius, 
 Anselm, Thomas Aq. (in Estius), Wolf, 
 Rosenm., al., understand these words them- 
 selves {(ΐίκ. άχειη. αιών. tv τ. υίιρ.) of the 
 intermediate state of absence from the 
 body ,• Usteri and Flatt, of an immediate 
 glorified body in heaven, to be united with 
 the body of the resurrection. Calvin hesi- 
 tates : ' Incertum est, an significet statum 
 beatse immortalitatis, tjui post mortem fide- 
 les manet, an vero corpus incorruptibile et 
 VoL•. II. 
 
 gloriosum, quale post resurrectionem erit. 
 In utrovis sensu nihil est incommodi : 
 quanquam malo ita accipere, ut initium 
 hujus sedificii sit beatus animse status post 
 mortem : consummatio autem sit gloria 
 ultimas resurrectionis." But if this be so, 
 (1) the parallel will not hold, between the 
 o'lKia in one case, and the οΙκια in the 
 other, — and (2) the language of ver. 2 is 
 against it, see below. 2.] ' For also 
 
 (our knowledge, that we possess such a 
 building of God, even in case of our body 
 being dissolved, is testitied by the eai-nest 
 desire which we have, to put on that new 
 body without stick dissolution taking place. 
 See the similar argument in Rom. viii. 18, 
 19) in this (viz. σκίινει, as Beza, Meyer, 
 Olsh., al. The rendering iv τοΰτψ ' where- 
 fore,' — some referring it to the foregoing, — 
 ' propter hoc quod dictum est,' Est., some 
 to the following, — is inconsistent with ϋντες 
 iv τψ σκηνει, which is parallel with it, 
 ver. 4. The stress is not necessarily on 
 ev, ' in this,' as contrasted with ' out of 
 this,' as Meyer, who joins καί with iv 
 τοί'τψ ; but see above) we groan (see 
 Rom. viii. 23), longing (i. e. because we 
 desire, the reason of στενάζομεν. επι- 
 ■κοΘ., not ardently desire: the prep, does 
 not intensify, but denotes the direction of 
 the wish, as άνεμου μη προςεώντος. Acts 
 xxvii. 7) to put on over this ' (' svperin- 
 dnere :' viz. by being alive at the day of 
 Christ, and not dissolved as in ver. 1 : — see 
 on ver. 4 below. — The similitude is slightly 
 changed : the house is now to be jmt on, as 
 an outer garment, over the fleshly body) 
 our dwelling place (' οικία est quiddam 
 magis absolutum, — οίκητήριον, domiciliuin, 
 respicit incolam ;' Bengel. So Eur. Orest. 
 1113, — ώςθ' Έλλας αΰτι'ι σμικρόν οΊκητή- 
 ριον) from heaven (i. e. = ΐκ βεοϋ ver. 1, 
 but treated now as if brought with the 
 Lord at His coming, and put upon us who 
 are alive and remain then. — ' Ita(|ue,' says 
 Bengel, 'hoc domicilium nan est cwlnm ip- 
 sum') : 3.] seeing that (ti'yt is us(!(l 
 
 ' de re, quae jure sumta crcditur ;' ΰττερ, 
 S s
 
 626 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 V. 
 
 bKoraVif; ^ στevάtoμίv ^ βαρονμίνυι, εφ ώ οι» θίλομεν '^ έκδυσασθαι, bcde 
 
 Alts' iii.lfi. 'ΛΛ' ν ' ?ν' η ■> (1 ίΐ" ^ >; Λ ν Γ χ - FGJK 
 
 Matt.xix.it. αλλ ίπίΐ'ουσασ(7α(, ινα καταπουη τυ υνητον νπο της 
 
 C Malt, xxvii. ^ ^ Κ ' r\\ ί ' t - ' α 1 κ 
 
 Luke'xau'' O^^f^' Ο οε κοτεργασα/αενος ημάς εις ^ αντο τούτο 
 
 only. Grn. λ\ γλ\ t- \ 1ι''•0- " ' 
 
 χχχνϋ. as. Οίος, ο οους τ\μ\.ν τον υρραρωνα του πνεύματος. 
 
 54 (ch ϋ 7.) Isa.xxv.S. e Rom. vi. 12. fcDiistr., here only. κατ£ρ7., Kom. ii. U reff. 
 
 gch.ii.Sreff. hch. i.22. Eph. i. 14 only. Gen. xxxviii. 17, 18, 2υ. 
 
 177, and vss lat-ff) ^ nrly (appy) Chr Thdrtj Thl Tertj Ambrst al (not C as Wetst) : 
 txt B(e sil)CJK niss nrly (appy) am Orig-alw Thdrt h 1 Dam Oec Ύβτί^.—βηρννομίνοι 
 D'FG Thl: om Chr.— Mill (not rec) for ίψ ω, (τηιεη, with 7'. 20'. 93 (al.') (Oec says 
 εφ' φ αντί τον ίπίΐίή).— for εκδνσ., ενδ. 3. 115-schol 119-21. 238 (al?).— Θιλ {φΟαρτον 
 Chr Thl) Γοντο FG g goth. — 5. καηρ-γαζομενος DEFG it ν syrr Iren Ambrst (καταρ- 
 yaa. C). — η/ο^ς om 219'. — aft θεός, ins και χρισας ημάς 9 slav-ms. — rec bef δυνς ins 
 KOL {cf ch i. 22), with D^EJK &c syr goth al Iren-gr Chr Thdrt {και διδυνς Dam omg o) 
 al Ambrst : txt BCD'FG 17. 67^• 73. 80 it ν copt Syr arm Orig Iren-int Aug Pel Sedul 
 
 when ' in incerto relinquitur, utrum jure an 
 injuria sumatur.' Herm. ad Viger., p. 834. 
 So Xen. Mem. ii. 1. 17, άλλα yap, ώ Σ., 
 ol tic την βασιλικ>)ν τίχνηνηαώενόμενοι, 
 ιμι δοκιΐς μοι συ νομίζειν εΰ< αιμονίαν 
 είναι, τι οιαψίρονσι των ίξ άνάγκί/ς κακο- 
 τταθοΰντων, ei ye ττίινί/σονσι κ. δι-φή- 
 σουσι, κ•. Γ. λ., — ' if they are to hunger and 
 thirst, &c.') we shall really (καί, ' in very 
 truth :' so Soph. Antig. 7•'0. αμφκί> yap 
 αυτά και κατακτεΧναι νοείς ; • dost thou 
 intend verily to kill them both i" and 
 .^Lsch. Sept. Theb. 810, ϊκείθι κηλθον ; ' hare 
 they really come to that i" See more exx. 
 in Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 132) be found 
 (shall prove to be) clothed (' having put 
 on clothing,^ 'VIZ. a body), not naked' (ivith- 
 out a body — "tvSva., ov γνμν., as γάλα, 
 οΰ βροιμα, 1 Cor. iii. 2 and often, cf. ver. 
 7." Meyer. See Stanley's note). The verse 
 asserts strongly, with a view to substantiate 
 and explain ver. 2, the truth of the resur- 
 rection or glorified body ,• and, with Meyer, 
 I see in it a reference to the deniers of the 
 resurrection, whom the Ap. combatted in 
 1 Cor. XV. : its sense being this: "For I 
 do assert again, that we shall in that day 
 prove to be clothed with a body, and not 
 disembodied spirits." — Several other ren- 
 derings have been given : (1) 'Si nos iste 
 dies deprehendet cum corpore, non exutos 
 a corpore, — si erimus inter mutandos, non 
 inter mortuos,' Grot. : Estius, Bengel, Conyb. 
 al. To this there are three objections, — that 
 ίΊγ€ (see above) should be ti'irep. — that και 
 is not rendered at all, — and that ινδνσά- 
 μενοι, the aor. mid., should be ενδεδν- 
 μένοί, the perf. pass. (2) The same objec- 
 tions apply to Billroth's rendering, ' If we, 
 having been once clothed (witli the earthly 
 body), shall not be found iiaked ' (without 
 the body). (3) DeWette renders: 'seeing 
 that when we are also (really) clothed, we 
 shall not be found naked :' i. e. ' setting 
 down for certain as we do, that that hea- 
 
 venly dwelling will also be a body.' To 
 this Meyer rightly objects, that it is open to 
 the difficulty of making ερίνσις and yvμ^'ό- 
 της, and that in the very sense in which 
 they are opposites, to co-exist ; — no clothing 
 but that of a body is thought of here, or 
 else ού σώματος γΐ'/^ΐ'οί must have been 
 expressed. (4) This latter objection ap- 
 plies to the rendering of Chrys.,Theodoret, 
 Theophyl., Oecum., al., who take ίνδυσά- 
 jUfjOi :::= σώμα άφθαρτον λαβόντες, and 
 γυμνοί to mean γυμνοί δόΕης. Simly 
 Anselm explains γυμνοί, ' nudi Christo ;' 
 Pelagius, Hunnius, and Baldwin, ' vacui 
 fide :' Erasm. Paraphr. ' si tamen hoc 
 exuti corpore non omnino nudi reperiamur, 
 sed ex bonse vitse liducia spe immortalitatis 
 amicti :' in part too Calvin, — restricting it 
 however to the faithful only, — ' if at least 
 we, having put on Christ in this life, shall 
 not be found naked then.' Olshausen too 
 takes οΰ γυμνοί as an expansion of ένδυσά- 
 μενοι, 'provided that we shall be found 
 clothed with the robe of righteousness, not 
 denuded of it.' Of all these we may say, 
 that if the A p. had meant by γυμνοί to 
 hint at any other kind of γνμνότ7]ς than 
 that which the similitude obviously implies, 
 he would have certainly indicated it. (5) 
 The rendering of ει ' utinam,' ' utinam 
 etiam induti, non nudi reperiamur ! ' as 
 Knatchbull and Homberg, need hardly be 
 refuted, (ii) Another class of renderings 
 arise from the readings e'lTrep and έκδυσά- 
 μενοι, both evidently adopted in conse- 
 quence of the views of expositors. It was 
 thought to be a conditional sentence, — 
 'provided, that is, that' . . . . , and con- 
 sequently those who were aware that t'iye 
 could not mean this, substituted ti'irep : it 
 was thought that it referred to the time 
 after putting off the mortal body, and Iv 
 was therefore altered to «.— For much of 
 the reference to opinions in this note I am 
 indebted to Meyer and De Wette.
 
 5—9. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 627 
 
 ' θαρρουντζς ονν πάντοτε, κα\ ίίδότίς υπ ^ ίνΒημονντες '''^■:pi;^^jj^^^ 
 εν τω σώματι εκόημουμεν αττο του κυρίου' ' Sia πίστεως pi'or^i^af; 
 
 ν πι - ' 1 <^ ν mm >'<^ R i η ' • - c\\ '' here !4ο. 
 
 yap περιπατουμεν, ου cia ειόους' ° υαρρουμεν οε ^^"1^^^ ^.^ ^^ 
 
 και " ίυόοκοϋμεν μάλλον έκ^ημησαι εκ του σώματος /cot mRom, vi.4 
 
 ενόημησαι προς τον κυριον. '- όιο και (ριΑοτιμουμεϋα, ""^^^"^^ ^ ^^ 
 ειτε ενόημουντες είτε εκόημουντες, ^ ευαρεστοι αυτω ίπ k• ix 
 
 ' ■- ί>». John ν. 
 
 37. Exod. xxiv. 17. η ■= Luke xii.32. Rom. χτ. 26. 1 Cor. i. 21. Gal. i. 15. Ps. Ixvii. 16. 
 
 ο Rom. XV. 20. 1 Thess. iv. 11. ρ Rom. xii. 1 reff. 
 
 Bed: om 7• — ημι^' om 116 Chr (ovv 17•')• — 6. ιπιΒημουνης D'FG al : ΐκ^ημουντΐς 
 72. — αποζημονμίν DEFG Chr,.— for κυρ., θίου DEFG it (not Tert Lucif &c) : του om 
 238. — 7. bef ov ins και FG g v. — 8. for ίίαρρ. 5t και, θαρρουιτίς Orig (so 17• 80 with 
 δί και) : St και om 67". 73 lectt 8 13 ar-pol : ovv και, or ovv FG' 17 Syr ar-erp al : e7'go 
 vel autem g: txt BCD ν &c. — ίκδημ. to ίνδημ. om 109. — rov om 108. — for κνρ., Otov 
 Di 17 am arm Clem Ambrst. — 9. ίκί. fir. tvS. 3. 39 g ν Syr al Clem Orig-int Tert 
 Lucif al (not Chr Thdrt Dam al Aug Ambrst) : for ενδημ., (νδνναμονντίς 80. — 
 
 4.] Confirmation and explanation of ver. 
 2. — ' For also (a reason, why we ίττιποθον- 
 μεν ίπινούσασθαι .... as in ver. 2) we 
 who are in the tabernacle (before spoken 
 of, i. e. of the body) groan, being afflicted 
 (not by troubles and sufferings, nor by 
 the body itself, which would be directly 
 opposite to the sense : but for the reason 
 which follows), because {ίψ' ([i as in reft'.) 
 we are not willing to divest ourselves 
 (of it), but to put on (that other) over 
 it, that our mortal part may (not, die, 
 but) be swallowed up by life ' (absorbed 
 in and transmuted by that glorious prin- 
 ciple of life which our new clothing shall 
 superinduce upon us). — The feeling ex- 
 pressed in these verses was one most na- 
 tural to those who, as the App., regarded 
 the coming of the Lord as near, and con- 
 ceived the possibility of their living to be- 
 hold it. It was no terror of death as to its 
 consequences — but a natural reluctance to 
 undergo the mere act of death as such, when 
 it was within possibility that this mortal 
 body might be superseded by the immortal 
 one, without it. 5.] This great end, 
 
 the καταποθϊίναι το θνητΰν άττο της ζωής, 
 is justified as the object of the Ap.'s fer- 
 vent wish, seeing that it is for this very 
 end, that this may ultimately be accom- 
 plished, that God has wrought us (see 
 below) and given us tl)e pledge of the 
 Spirit ; — ' But (and this my wish has rea- 
 son : for) He who hath wrought us out 
 (prepared us, by redemption, justification, 
 sanctification, which are the qualifications 
 for glory) for this very purpose (viz. that 
 last mentioned — ro καταπυΗηΐ'αι τϋ θνητον 
 ϊΐμών ίιπό τ. Ζώης, — not τΰ ϊπίΐ'δνσιισθαι, 
 a mere accident of tliat glorious absorption : 
 sec below) is God, who has given us (a 
 sign that our preparation is of Him : 'qnijjpe 
 qui dederit '....) the earnest (reff. and 
 
 S 
 
 note) of (gen. of apposition) the (Holy) 
 Spirit.' — The Αρ., in this verse, is no 
 longer treating exclusively of his own wish 
 for the more summary swallowing up of the 
 mortal by the glorified, but is shewing that 
 the end itself, which he individually, or in 
 common with others then living, wishes 
 accomplished in this particular form of 
 επίΐ'δίισασϋαι, is, under whatever form 
 brought about, that for which all the pre- 
 paration, by grace, of Christians, is carried 
 on, and to which the earnest of the Spirit 
 points forward. Meyer would limit this 
 verse entirely to the wish expressed in the 
 last : but he is certainly tvrong .• for it 
 forms a note of transition to θαρριηη'Τίς ovv 
 πάντοτε in the next ; see below. 
 6 — 8.] He returns to the confidence ex- 
 pressed in ver. 1 ; that however this may 
 be, whether this wish is to be fulfilled or 
 not, he is prepared to accept the alterna- 
 tive of being denuded of the body, seeing 
 that it will bring with it a translation to 
 the presence of the Lord. — ' Being con- 
 fident then (because it is God's express 
 purpose to bring us to glory, as in last 
 verse) always (either under all trials : or, 
 always, whether this hope of ίπενδνσασθαι, 
 or the fear of the other alternative, be be- 
 fore us, — which latter I prefer), and know- 
 ing (not as the ground of our confidence, 
 as Calv., al., nor as an exception to it, 
 ' though we know' as Est•, Olsh., al., — 
 but correlative with it, and the ground 
 of the εΰδοκονμεν below) that while at 
 home in the body, we are absent from 
 the Lord (the similitude of the body as our 
 οι'κία being still kept up : see similar senti- 
 ments, respecting our being wanderers and 
 strangers from our heavenly home while 
 dwelhng in the body, Phil. iii. 20. Ileb. 
 xi. 13; xiii. 14), — for (proof of om• ίκδιιμία 
 άπό τ. κνρ.) we walk (tlie usual fig. 
 ί 2
 
 628 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους β. 
 
 ν. 
 
 qRom. xi. 32. c,,.f,i 
 
 ret). t >' Ο 
 
 r = (ieenote). ίμΤΤροσΌίν 
 
 ^ τους yap "^ παντας ημάς 
 
 φανερωθηναι 
 του ' βΐ}ματος του γυριστού, Ίνα " κομ'ισηται 
 τα οιά τοχ) σώματος, * ττρος α επραζίΐ', άτζ 
 
 δίΐ BCDE 
 FGJK 
 
 Col. iii. 4. 
 
 411. Dan.ii. uyauov Είτί KaKov. Πιΐόοτίς ουν τον φορον του κυ- 
 
 tsxviii.ir. p'lQD^ ανθξ)ύ)πους '^ πίίθομίν, θίψ δε ^ ΤΓί(ρανεξ>ωμιθα' ελπίζω 
 
 xxvii.lHal. 2 Mace. xiii. 2fi. 
 Eph., Col., ut supra, 
 vii. J. Epii. V. i;i (not Ron 
 iii. 21 al. 
 
 n = Eph. vi. 8 Col. iii. 25 a!. 2 Mace τίϋ 33. ν constr, 
 
 w = Gal. ii. 14. Lulie xii. 47. χ = Acts ix. .'51. Rom. iii. 18. cli. 
 
 siii. 3). y = Acl.s xii. 20. Gal. i. 10. ζ = Mark iv. 22. John 
 
 10. for τα, ίί, omg προς a D'FG. — for προς a, 11, οσα, ττρος ο, προς ον al : ίια τ. σωμ• 
 om J Oros. — for ί ία, idia (propria) it ν arm goth Orig2 Thdrtj Datrij Orig-int Cypi" 
 Lucif Ambrst all : txt (besides MSS) Clem Orig. Cies Ath Cyr-jerus Bas Chr Thdrts 
 Dam li 1 al Tert Jer Aug al. — for ιποαζίν (om 91'), ίπ()αίαμεν 91- : add o/im arm. — 
 for κίΐκον, φανλοί' C 17• 2'Λ. 37-9 Orig^ Eus Ephr Athj Epijih Nyss, Bas, Cyrj„ Damj 
 Thl-comm (api)y) al : t.\t B(e sil)DEFGJK &c Clem Origj Chr Thdrt-oft Dam h 1 al.— 
 
 11. πίιθωμ^v 2li. 46. 109 Oec-comm (e.xpressly). — τω Se θ(ω 89 : St om lect 8. — ίλπί- 
 ζομίρ 0£ 10. — πιφανί^ωμ. to πιψανιρωσϋαι om 178• — οτι και 106. — ημών 106-8.2138. — 
 
 sense, — ' go on our Christian course,' — 
 not literal, as of pilgrims) by means of (not 
 ' in a state qf,^ nor ' through,' as the ele- 
 ment through which our life moves, Meyer; 
 who is thereby necessitated to interpret the 
 two prepp. differently, see below) faith, net 
 by means of appearance (tiooc catmot pos- 
 sibly be subjective, as rendered in E. V. 
 and by many comm. ; see reff. — i.e. 'faith, 
 not the actual appearance of heavenly 
 things themselves, is the means whereby we 
 hold on our way,' a sure sign that we are 
 absent from those heavenly things), — not- 
 withstanding (I say) (he resumes the 
 θαρριηη'τις, which was apparently at first 
 intended to belong to (νδοκοϋμη', — by the 
 indicative, inserting the ct because the last 
 clause seemed something like a dash to that 
 confidence) we are confident, and are 
 well pleased rather to migrate out of the 
 body and dwell at home with the Lord :' 
 i. e. ' even if (as in ver. 1) a dissolution of 
 the body be imminent, — even that, though 
 not according to our wish, does not destroy 
 our confidence : for so sensible are we that 
 dweUing in the body is a state of banish- 
 ment fiOm the Lord, that we prefer to it 
 even the alternative of dissolution, bringing 
 us, as it will, into His presence.' — Meyer 
 regards ίκδημ. and ίνδημ. as equivalent to 
 the puttinff off of the ?nortal (but how.') and 
 piitting on the immortal body at the coming 
 of the Lord : — but surely by this the whole 
 sense is destroyed. The Αρ., it seems to 
 me, carefully chooses the words, new to the 
 conte.xt, ϊκίημπν and ίν&ημιΐν, to avoid 
 such an inference, and to express, as he 
 does in Phil. i. 23. then in the actual pros- 
 pect of death, that τύ άναλΰσαι is equiva- 
 lent to σ?ιΐ' χριστψ ni'ai : for here is 
 no hint of the new house from heaven, 
 only of a certain indefinite Ινδημια προς 
 τον κνριον, which is all that is revealed 
 
 to lis, and it would seem was all that 
 was revealed to him, of the disembodied 
 state of the blessed. I may remark that 
 Meyer, whose comm. on this Ep. is most 
 able and thorough, has been misled in this 
 passage by an endeavour to range the whole 
 of it under the specific wish of vv. 2 — 4. 
 9, 10.] ' Wherefore (this being so, — our 
 confidence, in event whether of death, or of 
 life till the coming of the Lord, being such) 
 — we also (besides our confidence) strive, 
 whether dwelling in the body or absent 
 from the body (at the time of His appear- 
 ing), to be well pleasirg to Him,' i. e. 
 ' U'hetfier He find us ίνδημ. or (κύημ., to 
 meet with His approval in that day.' That 
 this is the sense, the next verse seems to 
 me to shew beyond question. For there he 
 renders a reason for the expressions, and 
 fixes the participles as belonging to the time 
 of His coming. But this meaning has not, 
 that I am aware, been seen by the Comm., 
 and in consequence, the ver. has seemed to 
 be beset with difficulties. The ordinary 
 rendering is represented by Chrys., το ζη- 
 τυνμίΐ'ον τοΐιτό tart, ψηπιν' αν τι ίκη 
 ώμίν, άί• τι ίντανθα, κατά -γνώμην αντυΰ 
 ζ)])' ; — the objection to which of course is, 
 that when there ivilh iimi, there will be no 
 striving to be (ίηιριστοι avTiiJ, the accept- 
 ance having taken place. Nor is De Wette's 
 interp. free from objection — ' whether we 
 live till His coming, or we die:' because 
 no sufficient account is given of the present 
 partt. — Of all renderings, Meyer's is in this 
 place the most absurd, misled as he is by 
 his interp. of ver. 8. He would make ίνδη- 
 μοϊη'τις and (kS. here merely literal, the 
 similitude being dropped ; — ' whether at 
 home, or on travel.' But, all else aside, 
 can he tell us ivhere Paul's home was, sub- 
 sequently to Acts ix. ? For this would be 
 necessary, though he shrinks from any ' gco=
 
 10— u. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 629 
 
 f και tv Taic συνΗοησΕσιν υμών π£<^αΐ'Ε^3ωσ0αι. ^^ ου "J*"™•^"• is 
 yao πάλιν εαυτούς " συνιστάΐΌμει» υμιν, άλλα ° αφορμην " (Κυίΰ'. it?To 
 οιοοί'τες υμιι^ "^ καιιχ7;μαΓος υττερ ημών, ινα ^ εγΐ}τε προς v.i4oniy. 
 τους εν προςωπω κουμπωμένους, και ου καροια. είτε «"uvii.s, 
 
 γα^ εςε'σΓ>;μεν, θεω' * ε'/τε '^ σωφρονοΰμεν, υμ7ν. ^^ η γαρ ''κίΐω.ίν.Ι' 
 
 12. aft ου om ynp (the connexion not being perceived .• no reason can be imagined for 
 ijsj7iserti07i) BCD'FG 10. 39. C>V it ν Syr copt Chr Thdrt Ambrst Pel Bed : txt D'EJK 
 mss nrly (appy) arr slav (e^ Eetli) Dam Thl Oec. — a\K 109.219. — καυχησίως 48. 72. 122. 
 — νμων 17. — for ov, μη {emendation for supposed propriety, τους . ... μη and not τους 
 
 ov: but ου belongs to Kaocia) Β 17. 37. 71-3. 80. 1 13-marg Thdrt {ουκ D'FG al). 
 
 — εν καρδ, {addn, as B, in pursuance of the same misapprehension as above: then 
 adopted in the others) BD'FG 17. 37- 73. 121 it ν copt Syr Clem Ambrst Pel: txt 
 CD^EJK mss nrly (appy) syr goth al Chr Thdrt Dam al.— 14. for η, ft 238.— for χυ., 
 
 9vapi)ifcl)e 33cftimnuing.' 10.] ' For 
 
 (explanation and fixing of ίνάρ(στοι αντφ 
 tlvai, as to when, and /ioiv testified) we 
 all (and myself among the number) must 
 be made manifest (' appear.•' not — τταρα- 
 στήΐΌΐ merely, but ' appear in our true 
 light,' appear as we have never done be- 
 fore, as in reff., where the word is used 
 of our Lord Himself : see also 1 Cor. iv. 5) 
 before the judgment-seat (on βήμα, see 
 Stanley's note) of Christ, that each 
 may receive (the technical word for re- 
 ceiving wages) the things (done) through 
 the body (as a medium or organ of action. 
 Meyer cites των I'lCovoji' a'l Cia του σώμα- 
 τος ίίσιν. Plat. Phoedo, p. Go, and αίσθη- 
 σιις a'l ίιά τοϋ σώματος, Phasdr. p. 250), 
 according to the things which he did (in 
 the body), whether (it were) good, or bad' 
 (singular, as abstract). I may observe that 
 no more definite inference must be drawn 
 from this verse as to the place which the 
 saints of God shall hold in the general 
 judgment, than it warrants ; viz. that they 
 as well as others, shall be manifested and 
 judged by Him (Matt. xxv. 14) : when, or 
 in company with ivhom, is not here so much 
 as hinted. — I cannot pass on, without di- 
 recting the student to the passage on this ver. 
 in Chrysostom's tenth Homily, as one of the 
 grandest extant eft'orts of human eloquence. 
 11 — 13.] Having this φιλοτιμία, — 
 being a genuine fearer of God (see below) 
 — he endeavours to make his plain dealing 
 
 EVIDENT TO MEN, OS it IS EVIDENT TO GoD. 
 
 He will give the Corr. whereof to boast 
 concerning him in reply to his boastful 
 adversaries : this his conduct being, what- 
 ever construction may be put ou it, on be- 
 half of God and them. 11.] 'Being 
 then conscious of (' no strangers to :' so 
 Homer freq., o. g. άθιμιστια ίίΰώις) the 
 fear of tbe Lord (not, as Chrys. and most 
 
 of the ancient Comm., =: το φοβερόν τ. 
 (Clip., — so also Beza and Estius, ' terrorem 
 Domini,' and E. V., ' the terror of the Lord;' 
 — but as Vulg., ' timorem Domini,' — this 
 wholesome fear of Christ as our Judge : see 
 retf. The expression is particularly ajipro- 
 priate for one who had been suspected of 
 double dealing and insincerity : he was in- 
 wardl}- conscious of the principle of the fear 
 of God guiding and leading him), — we per- 
 suade men (the stress on άνΒρώ-πνυς, 'it 
 is MEN that we attempt to persuade.' — Of 
 tvhat ? Beza, Grot., al., of the truth of 
 Christ's religion .• win them to Christ, 
 which however suits the rendering ' ter- 
 rorem Domini,' better than the right one : 
 — Chrys., Theodoret, Theophyl., ' of our 
 own integrity,' and so in the main, Estius, 
 Bengel, Olsh., De Wette, — and Meyer, 
 though he seems to object to it, for he con- 
 nects the words with the φιλοτιμία of ver. 
 9: — Erasm., Luther, Wolf, Hammond, al., 
 understand ττειθομιν of the endeavour to 
 make ourselves acceptable to men .■ Cornel. 
 a Lapide, Le Clerc, al., ' eundem hunc ti- 
 morem hominibus suademus.' But from 
 the context, it must have reference to our- 
 selves ; and I therefore agree with Chrys., 
 al., as above), but to God we are already 
 manifested (we have no need to persuade 
 Him of our integrity, for He knows all 
 things) ; — and I hope (am confident) that 
 we have also been manifested (Meyer 
 remarks, that ίλπιζω in the N. T. else- 
 where has only the inf. aor. ; here however 
 the inf. perfect is logically necessary. He 
 hopes, that the manifestation /* complete. 
 Cf. Acts xxvii. 13, οό'ίαντις της πρoΰ^σ^ως 
 κεκρατηκίναι, and Horn. II. ο. 110, ιμη 
 yap I'vv ιλπκμ'" .\ρηι γε ττήμα τετνχΟαι) 
 in your consciences.' 12.] ' For 
 
 (reason of foregoing ΐλπι'ϊ^ω — viz. that he 
 was not speaking in any spirit of self-com-
 
 630 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 V. 
 
 • Rom. τίίί. 
 35. Eph.iil. 
 19. 
 
 αγαττη του χριστού συνε•^ίΐ 
 
 ημάς, 
 
 y 
 
 κρίνοντας bcde 
 , S , FGJK 
 
 19•, , .. τούτο, ΟΤΙ εις υττίο τταντων απίΐ/αΐ'εν, αοα οι παντός 
 
 ■W = Luke XU. . ' ' 
 
 και υτΓίρ παντο)ν απεσα ΐ'ει», ινα οι ί,ωντες 
 
 ^θαι 
 
 )1 ^(ι 
 
 .3. s?eMi.-.t. ' απίθανου- ^^ 
 
 IV. 24. , b < " y - ' Λ λ ^ " ' ^ ' - ' Ω ' 
 
 x = .\ctsxv. μηκίτι εαυτοις ί,ωσιν, αΛΛα τω υττε^ο αυτών αττουανοντι 
 
 y 1 Cur. XV. 14. Rom. vii. 3, 25. Gal. iii. 29. ζ ver. 10. a = Rom. vi. 8. 
 
 b dat., Rom. vi. 11. xiv. 7 al. 
 
 θεου C 17. 3i). 42-6. 120. 238 syr Chr Thdrt (not h 1) Thl-marg.— 15. κριναντις FG: 
 κοιναΐ'τος τούτου Did. — rec bef ίΐς νττερ ττ., ins ft {perhaps, as Mey, for connexion 
 merely : but more prob because it appeared strange that an objective fact like the Death 
 of Christ should be made matter of judgment, and it seemed better to express that the 
 sequence, ei . . . . apa, κτλ, was alone dealt with), with C all ν (am demid &c) copt arr 
 Ath-mss Chr h 1 Cyr, Thl Oec-text Ambrst-ms Augj (elsw mss vary) Bed al: om 
 BC^DEFG.IK all (abt 30, Tisch) it syrr seth goth Ath edd Cbrj Cyrj Thdrt Dam Oec- 
 comm (appy) Ambrst-ed al. — aft σττίθ. add χριστός FG al g ν (not am) some lat-ff. — 
 01 bef τταντες om 238. — from απιθανεν to απεθηνεν om 114-16 lectt 13. 14: from 
 -θανόν to -θανεν om 109. — for αυτών, τταντων 44-7• 74. 113 lect 40 Oec Leo ; 
 
 mendation — not προςωπ^ι, but (ταρίι^) we 
 are not again recommending ourselves 
 to you (see ch. iii. 1), but (say this as). 
 giving you an occasion for matter of 
 
 boasting {καύχημα, — not = κανχησις as 
 De W., — 'a source, whence matter of boast- 
 ing may be derived') on our behalf (of us, 
 as your teachers, and to the upholding of 
 our ministry), that ye may have it (viz. 
 κα{'χημη, matter of boasting) against 
 those who boast in their outward ap- 
 pearance, not in their heart' (i. e. in 
 those things which they exhibit, and are 
 outwardly π κατά σάρκα, ch. xi. 18, not 
 in matters which are in their hearts: im- 
 plying that their hearts are indifferent about 
 the matters of which they boast). 
 13.] ' For (ye have good reason to boast of 
 me as your teacher ; seeing that) whether 
 we are mad (there is no need to soften the 
 meaning to ' inordinately praise ourselves,' 
 as Chrys., al. ; or ' act foolishly,' as others ; 
 or ' ultra modum agimus,' as Bengel, Lu- 
 ther : — μαίίψ, ΙΙαϋλε, had been once said, 
 Acts xxvi. 24, and doubtless this charge was 
 among the means taken to depreciate his 
 influence at Corinth), it is to God (in God's 
 work and to His glory) : whether we are 
 of sound mind, it is for you' (on your 
 behalf). ' So that you have reason to glory 
 in us either way ; if you will ascribe to us 
 madness, it is a holy madness, ybr God; if 
 you maintain and are convinced of our so- 
 briety, it is a soundness i)i your service.' — 
 On the interp. of Chrys. above, he explains 
 the last clause, — av rt μίτριυν κ. ταπεινυν 
 φθίγζώμεθα, δι νμας. Ίνα μάθητε ταπει- 
 νοψρυνεΐν. But he gives our interp. also, 
 as an alternative : μαινεσθαι τις ί)μάς φησί ; 
 Sia τον βεΰν μαινόμιθα. 
 
 14 — 19.] And his constraining motive 
 is the love of Christ ,• who died for all, that 
 all should live to Him ,• and accordingly the 
 Ap. has no longer any mere knowledge or 
 
 ■πάντων 
 
 regards according to the flesh, seeing that 
 all things are become neiv in Christ by 
 means of the reconciliation effected by God 
 in Him, of which reconciliation Paul is the 
 minister. 14.] 'For (reason of his 
 
 devotion under all reports and circum- 
 stances, θίψ and υμϋν, as in last verse) 
 Christ's love (not, love to Christ, as Oec , 
 Beza, al., — but Christ's love to men, snbj., 
 as most Comm. ; as shewn in His Death, 
 which is the greatest proof of love, see Rom. 
 V. G — 8. Meyer remarks that the gen. of 
 the person after ά-^άπη is with Paul always 
 subjective, — Rom. v. 5. 8 ; viii. 35. 39 ; ch. 
 viii. 24 ; xiii. 13. Eph. ii. 4. Phil, i, 9 al., 
 whereas with John it is not always so, 
 1 John V. 3. — Paul expresses love of, i. e. 
 towards, by tU, Col. i. 4. 1 Thess. iii. 12) 
 constraineth us (a better word could not 
 be found : the idea of σιη'εχω is that of for- 
 cible limitation, either in a good or a bad 
 sense, — of confining to one object, or tcithin 
 certain bounds, be that one object a painful 
 or glorious one, — those bounds the angustise 
 of distress, or the course of apostolic energy, 
 as here. ' Constraineth us,' generally : — 
 limits us to one great end, and prohibits 
 our taking into consideration any others. 
 ' Metaphora est in verbo constringendi : 
 qua notatur, fieri non posse, quin, quisquis 
 mirificum ilium amorem quern testatus est 
 nobis Christus morte sua, vere expendit et 
 reputat, quasi ei alligatus, et arctissimo vin- 
 culo constrictus, se in illius obsequium ad- 
 dicat.' Calv. The varieties of interp., some 
 as Meyer, urging more the sense cohibendi, 
 others as Chrys., that excitandi, ουκ άφί- 
 7}σιν J/f /ας• ι'ισνχάζειν, all in fact amount 
 to one — that of the forcible compression 
 of his energies to one line of action), be- 
 cause we formed this judgment (viz. at 
 our conversion : — learned to regard this 
 as a settled truth) that One died on be- 
 half of all (not only, for the benefit of
 
 15—17. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 GS1 
 
 και *^ εγερθί'υτί. ^^' ώςτε ημείς '' άπο του νυν ov^iva ο'/δαμευ " ?,„%a"im.' 
 κατά σάρκα' ει και εγνίοκαμίν ^ κατά σαοκα γριστον, iPnuioreff. 
 άλλα νυν ουκ ετι ■γινωσκομεν. ' ωςτε ίί ης ^ ev -χριστώ, n'coriso 
 
 καινή ^ κτισις' τα 
 
 "i " \ ύ *^^ ' Rom viii. 1 
 
 αρχαία τταρηΛυεν^ ιοου, y^yovtv «ι. 
 
 h Acts XV. 7 re ff. = Isa. xliii. 18. i = Matt. τ. 18. xxiv. 35 al. Jer. viii. 20. 
 
 αντων 42. 121-3. 213: αυτ. τταντ. 106. 238.— 16. και ημάς 37- 47-9•— αττο τ. νυν 
 om arm. — rec «ι Ss και {emendn for connexion, as also is kcii ti), with C-(C' is uncert) 
 D^EJ most mss syr copt goth (but copt gotli appy om και) Chr, Thdrtj Dam Thl Oec : also 
 omg )cat Orig-int : ft 5t Κ 115-17: και tt FG it ν lat-ff: txt BD* 7• 3!i. — χοιστ. κατ. σαρκ. 
 DE copt al Jer. — at end, add κατά σάρκα D'(E.')FG it Jerj : ούτως arm. — 17. aft κτισις 
 add ανακαινιζίται 72--4 Orig : on arm. — jtyovav G. — aft καινά om τα τταντα BCD'FG 
 
 all, as Meyer, — but instead of all, suffered 
 death in the root and essence of our hu- 
 manity, as the second Adam. This death 
 on behalf of all men is the absolute objec- 
 tive fact : that β// enter not into the benefit 
 of that Death, is owing to the nonfulfilment 
 of the subjective condition which follows), 
 — therefore all died' (i. e. therefore, in the 
 death of Christ, all, the all for whom He 
 died, 01 τΐάΐ'Τίς, died too ,• i. e., see next 
 ver., became planted in the likeness of His 
 death, — died to sin and to self, that they 
 might live to Him. This was true, objec- 
 tively, but not subjectively till such death 
 to sin and self is realized in each : see Rom. 
 vi. 8 ff.). The other renderings, — ' ought 
 to die,' as Thomas Aq., Grot., Estius, al., 
 — ' tvere tmder sentence of death,' as Chrys., 
 Theodoret, Beza, al. ; — ' as good as died,' 
 Flatt. ; — are shewn to be erroneous by care- 
 fully noticing the construction, with or with- 
 out f 1. The vet-b is common to both mem- 
 bers of the sentence ; the correspondent 
 emphatic words in the two members being 
 (1) els virep ιτάντων, (2) ττάντίς : ' {One on 
 behalf of all) died, therefore (all) died : if 
 One died the death of (belonging to, due 
 from) all, then all died (in and with Him).' 
 — Meyer's rendering of 'ότι because, can 
 hardly be right, as it would leave κρί^αντας 
 TovTo standing awkwardly alone. 15.] 
 
 ' And He died for all, in order that they 
 who live (in this life, see ήμης oi ζώΐ'Τίς, 
 eh. iv. 11 ; = in sense, 'a* long as they 
 are in this state,' as De W. : — not, 'those 
 who live spiritually ,' as Beza, Flatt, which 
 would altogether strike out the sense, for it 
 is, that they may live spiritually, ^c. : nor, 
 ' superstites,' they whom He left behind at 
 His death, ζώΐ'ΓίςΙη contrast with Him who 
 air'tuavtv, as Meyer; — for, not to insist on 
 the more general reference to all time, many 
 to whom the Ap. was now writing were not 
 born at the time of His Death) might no 
 longer (now that His Death has taken 
 place : or, as they did before they appre- 
 hended that Death as theirs, — but 1 prefer 
 the former, see άπο τοϋ νϋν below) live to 
 themselves (with self as their great source 
 
 and end of action, to please and to obey) 
 but to Him that died and rose again for 
 them' (Wep, not merely even as connected 
 with ίγίμϋίντι, 'for the benefit of as 
 Meyer again ; but strictly, ' in the place 
 of:' as the Death of Christ is oiir death, so 
 His Resurrection is our resurrection). 
 16.] ' So that {accordingly, — consistently 
 with our judgment expressed ver. 14) we 
 (in opposition to our adversaries, the false 
 teachers : not general, of all Christians, as 
 De W., — but as yet spoken, as the emphatic 
 position of ίιμΰς shews, of the Ap himself 
 [and his colleagues .'] ) from this time 
 (since this great event, the Death of Christ) 
 know no man according to (as he is in) 
 the flesh (Meyer well remarks : " Since all 
 are [ethically] dead, and each man is bound 
 to live only to Christ, not to himself, our 
 knowledge of others must be altogether in- 
 dependent of that which they are κατά 
 σάρκα, — must not be regulated κατά σάρκα. 
 And the connexion of ver. 16 with vv. 14 
 and 15 shews that we must not take κατά 
 σάρκα as the subjective rule of οΊδαμίν, — 
 so that the expl. would be, ' according to 
 mere human knowledge,' ' apart from the 
 enlightening of the Holy Spirit,' cf. ch. i. 17• 
 1 Cor. i. 26, — but as the objective rule, cf. 
 ch. xi. 18. John viii. 15. Phil. iii. 4, — so 
 that tli'ivai rij'ii κατά σάρκα zz ' to knoiv 
 any one according to his viere human indi- 
 viduality,' — ' to know him as men have 
 judged him by what he is in the flesh,' not 
 by what he is κατά πνίϋμα,&Β a Christian, 
 as καινί) κτισις, ver. 17• He who knows 
 no man κατά σάρκα, has, e. g. in the case 
 of the Jew, entirely lost sight of his Jewish 
 origin, — in that of the rich man, of his 
 riches, — in that of the learned, of his learn- 
 ing, — in that of the slave, of his servitude, 
 &c., cf. Gal. iii. 28"): if we have also 
 (ti και concedes what follows : πάλιν μϊν, 
 ti και μι] βλέττΗς, φρονίΐς δ' ο/. ως, oiif. 
 νόσψ ^ϋί'ΐστι. Soph. GJd. Tyr. 3(12,— but 
 also, as distinguished from και ιί, intro- 
 duces no climax, and distributes the force 
 of the και over the whole concessive clause, 
 whereas in και ti it is coiitined to the con-
 
 632 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 V. 18—21. 
 
 k Rom. V. 10 
 
 καινά τα πάντα. 
 
 τα ό£ ττάντα ίκ τον Θεοΰ τον κατα\• 
 
 m «"«>;*'■ ι"• Χάζαντος Ί]μας εαντω cia -χρ 
 
 /lea ix 'Ί 1 1 ^ ' "* ΠΙ Λ Λ 
 
 2Maccv% οιακονιαν ttjc καταΑΛα 
 
 ■ only. 
 
 ιστον και οοντος ημιν την 
 
 19 η 
 
 BCDE 
 FGJK 
 
 ιακονιαν της καταΛΛα"yης, '" ως otl Οίος ην 
 
 η = here only. ~ , y λ\' ' " ^ο\ y ' 
 
 (ch. xKL'i. -χξ^στω κοσμον καταλλασσων ίαυτω, μη λο-γιΐ,ομίνος 
 \\inrr, }ι.7. fjyjQig γιι ^ ΤΓ α pttTT Τ ωματ u αντων, και '^ βεμίνος ίν ημιν 
 
 ηη C..1. i. 16 ν % / -πι Λ Λ " 20 ' ^ " "^ 
 
 rtft. τον Aoyov της καταλΑα-γης. νττίξ) γριστου ονν 
 
 iv. 4, 8al.fr. ρ Matt. vi. 14 al. Ezi-k. iii. 20. q Ps. civ. 27. (Amou v. 7.) 
 
 67' am demid (al) it copt ieth arm-venet Clem Athj-mSj Nyss Cyr2 Tertj Hil Aug : ins 
 D^EJK mss nrly (appy) syr goth all (but bef καινά 17- 4f). 67^ all ν syrr si Athj Dial 
 Meth Naz Cyrj Thdrt Procl Tbl Jer Ambrst Salv all : and τα St it. follg om Syr all) Orig 
 (om τα) Const Atbj Chr Dam Oec Tertj gr-lat-fF. {The history of the omission seems to 
 have been, as Mey, that the follg ra St πάντα caused this to be passed over, a* that /* iti 
 Syr ar-erp : and then it was variously inserted, before or after καινά.) — 18. του (1st) 
 
 om D'FG. ϊ,αντος to δυντος om 179. — rec ins υ;σ. bef χριστ., with D^EJK &c ar-pol 
 
 Slav Thdrt Dam al : txt BCD'FG all it ν copt syrr ath arm goth Chr (pref τυν) Tort Hil 
 Aug Ambrst al. — ΐ]μων 1 7• — 19• ως om 6. 07^. — ο Otog FGK Thdrt Chrj. — tavT. κατηλλ. 
 80. — for λογιζομ., αστιζομίνος (ΛΟΓ being mistaken for ACT) FG: λογισαμίνος HO.— tv 
 om 44. 89. 119.— aft 7]μ. add αυτοις 21. — του (om FG) evayytXtov τον λογον D'EFG it. — 
 20. for virtp xp. ovv, ov vvtp χριστού D'(E.')FG g, pro quo Christo d e: vntp χριστού 
 
 ditional particle tl, — see Hartung, Partikel- 
 lehre, i. 139) known Christ according to 
 the flesh, now however we know Him 
 (thus) no longer.'— The fact alluded to in 
 the concessive clause, is, not any personal 
 knowledge of the Lord Jesus while He was 
 on earth, but that view of Him which Paul 
 took before his conveision, when he knew 
 Him only according to His outward appa- 
 rent standing in this world, only as Jestts 
 of Nazareth, χριστον is not = τον χρισ- 
 τόν, ' the Christ,' but merely as a proper 
 name designating Him whom He now knew 
 as Christ. — Observe, the stress is not on 
 χριστό)', q. d. ' If we have known even 
 Christ after the flesh,' &c., as usually under- 
 stood ; — the position of χρ. forbids this, 
 which would retjuire tl και χριστον ίγν. κ. 
 σάρ., — but on £γνώκαμ£ν, as belonging to 
 the past, contrasted with our present know- 
 ledge. Obs. likewise, that the position of 
 κατά σάρκα, see above also, forbids its be- 
 ing taken as the subjective qualification of 
 ίγΐ'ώκαμίν, as z:: tl και κατά σάρκα tyv. 
 ΧΡ; or f ί κ. tyv. χρ. κ. σάρκ., and fixes it as 
 belonging to χριστον, — ' Christ according 
 to the flesh.' — He now, since his conver- 
 sion, knew Him no longer as thus shewn, 
 but as ορισθέντα νίοΰ Otov tv δννάμίι, 
 κητά ττνΛμα ayiwainnfc. At that time, 
 ίΰίόκησίν ΰ θίϋς . . . άττοκαλνψαιτονυΐόν 
 αΐιτον ti> ίμοί. Gal. i. IG. See by all 
 means Stanley's remarks, on the absence 
 of all local and personal recollections of our 
 Lord's life, in the apostolic age. 17.] 'So 
 that (additional inference from what has 
 gone before: hardly as Meyer, from ver. 16 
 071 ly : the death of ver. 15, as well as the 
 new knowledge of ver. IC, going to make 
 up the καινή κτίσις) if any man is in 
 
 Christ (far better than ' whoever is in 
 Christ.' See note on Phil. iv. 8. ' In 
 Christ,' i. e. in union with Him : Christ 
 being ' the element in which by faith we 
 live and move,' as Meyer), he is a new 
 creature {κτίσις, ^creation,' — the act, im- 
 plying here the result of the act. See ref. 
 and Col. iii. 10, 11. Eph. ii. 10; iv. 23. 
 — ' He has received,' ' past into,' ' a new life,' 
 John iii. 3) : the old things (of his former 
 life — ' all the old selfish and impure motives, 
 views, and prejudices,' — De Wette) have 
 passed away (there does not appear to be 
 any allusion, as in Chrys., Theophyl., to 
 the passing away of Judaism, but only to 
 the netv birth, the antiquation of the former 
 unconverted state, with all that belonged to 
 it) : behold (a reminiscence of Isa. xliii. 18, 
 19 — μή μvημovtΰiτt τα. ττρώτα, κα'ι τα. 
 αρχαία μή σvλλoyίζtσθt^ ίδον, tyth ποιώ 
 καινά), all things have become new' (see 
 var. readd.). — The arrangement of the sen- 
 tence followed by tlie Vulg., al., ' Si qua 
 ergo in Christo nova creatura, Vetera transie- 
 runt,' is inadmissible, because the second 
 member would be a mere reassertion of the 
 first. 18.] 'And all things (in this 
 
 new creation : he passes to a more general 
 view of the effects of the death of Christ — 
 viz. our reconciliation to God) are from 
 God (as their source), who reconciled us 
 {all men, from next ver. where κόσμον is 
 j)arallel with it) to Himself by means of 
 Christ (as an atonement, an ex]5iatory sa- 
 crifice, ver. 21, for sin which made us 
 ίχθροί θ(ην, see Rom. v. 10) and gave 
 (committed) to us (Apostles, not mankind 
 in general ; for had it been so, — in the next 
 ver., which is parallel, 'tv αντοΊς, not iv 
 ήμ'ιν, must have stood, after αΰτοΊς and
 
 Λ' I. 1. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 633 
 
 '' πρίσβίνομεν, ως του θεοΰ ' τταρακαΧοΰντος Βι ημίον' rEph.vi.so 
 ΒεόμίΟα υπίρ ■χριστού, ^ καταλλά-γητε τω θίω. ^^ τον '^^Ι^'"-"-^'^ 
 
 1= Eccles.viii. 
 
 μτ] -γνοντα αμαητιαν υττερ νμων αμαοτιαν εποιησεν, ινα 5• 
 
 ' - ' Λ uV /•/!-' ■> "" - -ITT 1 u = R.im. i. ]7. 
 
 ημίΐς -γίνωμ^υα δικαιοσύνη ϋίου εν αυτω . VI. σιο'ίο- //!;;,' ;''ΰ*^28. 
 
 ^^'w Λ- ^χ'χ \ Ν / Mark χνί. 20. 
 
 ■γουντες όε και ττ αρακά λον μεν, μ-η εις κενόν την yaoiv icor.xii.ie. 
 
 ,,,.... Αι James U. £2 
 
 onlyt. IMacc. xii. 1. See 1 Cor. iii. !). 
 xGal.u.2. Phil. ii. 16 bis. 1 Thtrss. iii. 5. 
 
 virtp ov Ambrst.— it ημ. om \09.—δίομενοι D'FG it Chr (Matt's msj) Hil Ambrst (not 
 Aug all) : add ovi' 44. — καταλλα-γηναι D'FG it syr-marg goth lat-ft' (not Jer Bed). — 
 τω om FG. — 21. rec aft τον ins γαρ {see note), with D'EJK &c vss Chr Eucher Thdrtj 
 Dam al Ambrst-ms : om BCD'FG 67^. 7I it ν copt Orig Ath Chri-comm Thdrtj Hil 
 Aug Did Ambrst-ed Pel Alcim al. — rec γινωμιθα {see notes), with mss (Origj?): tst 
 BCDE(£ra;^(a FG)JK all Orig, Chr Thdrt-oft Dam Thl Οβο.—θιον ίικαιοσννιι Κ 93. 
 109. 219 Eus Sev Chr Thdrtg : Beov om 46. 114 Thdrtj. 
 
 Chap. Λ^Ι. 1. συι/£ργ. νμιν arm.— και om I7. 37-9. 89. 92. 108 al lect 40 v-ed Syr 
 ar-erp sah Thdrt Pel. — παηακαλονί'τες D'E'FG. — νμας om D' : 7]μ. C 4. I7. 89 : ίίξ. 
 
 αυτών just preceding) the ministry of 
 the reconciliation ' (the duty of ministering 
 in that office, whose peculiar work it is to 
 proclaim this reconciliation : so ίιακονία 
 της δικαιοσύνης, ch. iii. 9). — Obsene, that 
 the reconciliation spoken of in this and the 
 next ver., is that of God to tts, absolutely 
 and objectively, through His Son : that 
 whereby He can complacently behold and 
 endure a sinful world, and receive all who 
 come to Him by Christ. This, the subjec- 
 tivereconciliation, — o/mento Gof/, — follows 
 as a matter of exhortation, ver. 20. 
 19.] ' Because (or, How that) (ώς on θίος 
 ijr, a pleonastic expression, apparently a 
 combination of the two constrr. ώς Gtov 
 όντος, and on θίός ην. So Xen. Hell. iii. 
 2. 14, ti —ων τψ Φάρακι ώς on όκνυ'ιη μη 
 6 Ύισσαφ. κ•. γ. λ., and Isocr. orat. argum. 
 p. 362 [cited by ΛΥίηοΓ, § 67- 2] κaτηyό. 
 povv ai'Tov, ό>ς 'ότι καινά Ραιμόΐ'ΐα ttc- 
 φίυιι) God in Christ reconciled the world 
 to Himself (ήν καταλλάσσων not exactly 
 =: κατή\\ασσ(ν, any more than ήν κη- 
 ρύσσων Luke iv. 44 =: ίκήουσσεν : in both 
 cases the habitual state is more emphatically 
 implied than could be done by the imperfect 
 merely: the shade of difference can, how- 
 ever, hardly be expressed in English. — ήν 
 cannot, as in Erasm., Luther, Calv., Beza, 
 al., and E. V., belong to f i» χριστψ, ' God 
 was in CArw^, reconciling,' &c., — partly on 
 account of the position of iv χ:>., which 
 would thus probably be before ήι•, but prin- 
 cipally (Meyer) because of incoherence with 
 θίμινος iv ήμίν, κ.τ.λ. : for in that case 
 the two latter clauses must express the 
 manner of reconciliation by Christ, which 
 the second of them does not. κοσμον, — 
 
 without the article, as governed words placed 
 for emphasis before their verbs often are — 
 it would not be καηιΧλάσσιοί' κήσμιιν, but 
 τον κόσμον, — 'the whole world,' — w/a?i, 
 
 and man's world, entire, with all that 
 therein is, see Col. i. 20, but considered, cf. 
 αυτών below, as summed np in man), — 
 not impudng to them their transgres- 
 sions {present .• on the expr. see reft'.), and 
 having placed in us {past .• — not merely 
 = ' committed to us,' but ' laid upon 
 us,' as our office and charge, and, be- 
 sides, ' empowered us for,' ' put in our 
 souls by His Spirit.' — ' Us,' viz. Apostles 
 and teachers) the word, of the recon- 
 ciliation (as ό λόγος ό τον σταυρόν, 
 1 Cor. i. 18). 
 
 20, 21.] He describes his office as that 
 of an ambassador for Christ, consisting in 
 beseeching them, on their part, to be re- 
 conciled to God : and that, in considera- 
 tion of the great Atonement which God 
 has provided by Christ. — ' In Christ's 
 stead then (i. e. in pursuance of the impo- 
 sition on us of the \oyoc της κατ.) we are 
 ambassadors, as if God exhorted by us : 
 we beseech (' you,' but not uttered as an 
 integral part of the present text, not a re- 
 quest now made and urged, as Rom. xii. 1 ; 
 he is describing the embassage ; we are 
 ambassadors, and in our embassage it is 
 our work to beseech — ' Be ye,' &c.) in 
 Christ's stead, Be reconciled to God :' — 
 διαλλ. strictly ^flssa'e .• 'God was the Re- 
 conciler — let this reconciliation have ef- 
 fect on you — enter into it by faith.' Our 
 E. v., by inserting the word ' ye,' has given 
 a false impression, making it appear as if 
 there were an emphasis on it, corres])onding 
 to God being reconciled to us, as if it had 
 been καταλλάγητί και ΰμίΐς τψ θαί), — 
 whereas it is the simple being reconciled in 
 that reconciliation in which God tras, in 
 Christ, the Reconciler. 21.] States 
 
 the great fact on tvhirh the exhortation to 
 be reconciled is grounded :■ — viz. the un- 
 speakable gift of God, to bring about the
 
 634 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 VI. 
 
 Και 
 
 ^Lxx^'' Luke του θίοΰ ^εζασθαι νμας " (λέγει γαρ ίνατρω " όεκτω " ίττ- 
 Χ.3.-1. Phil. ί]κουσά σου, και έν " η/ίε'ρα σωτηρίας ίβυίιθησά σοι. ιδού 
 
 zhereonly. ^^-^ KUipOQ '^ f ύτΤρόςδεΚΤΟς , l^OV VVV 
 
 a = 1 Cor. i. 8 
 
 reff. 
 I) Matt. XV. 2δ 
 
 al. Acts xvi. 9. xxi. 
 e 1 Cor. ix. 12. 
 
 μη^εμ'ιαν ev μη^ίνι ^ ^ιοοντες 
 
 ■ήμερα σωτήριας 
 
 ττροςκοπην, ινα μη 
 
 C Rom. XV. 1R reff. d So hv παιτι, ch. iv. 8. vii. 5, 11. ver. 4 al. 
 
 f here onlyf. διι5όι>αι ΰφυρμάί προίκυπ'ήί, Polyb. xxvii. 6. 10. 
 
 νμ. τ. χ. τ. Θ. 91. — 2. καιρώ γαρ λΐγίΐ Di(E)FG it Sedul. — for σοι, σου 93. — νυν om 
 (2ce) arm ; 2nd time, Chrj Hil. — δίκτος FG. — 3. εν om ν Syr ar-erp Oec-comm Ambrst 
 Pel Sing-cler Cassiod. — προκοπην lect 8.— at end, add ημών DEFG 66^. 73 it ν syrr 
 
 reconciliation. — It is introduced without a 
 yap (which has been supphed), as still 
 forming part of the λόγος τΓ/ς καταΧΧαγης. 
 — ' Him who knew not sin (-of οϋ yvovra 
 would merely assert the fact, that up to the 
 time oi ίποίησίν, He was ignorant of sin. 
 But //>'; with a participle, as has been ob- 
 sen'ed since the doctrine of the particles 
 has been more accurately studied, always 
 denies subjectively, i. e. in reference to the 
 view of some person who is the subject, or 
 to the hypothesis of some person who is the 
 direct or indirect utterer of the assertion. 
 Cf. note on ch. iv. 18. — With what refer- 
 ence then is the particle here used .' Fritz, 
 (in ]Meyer) thinks, to the Christian's neces- 
 sary idea of Christ, " quem talem virum 
 mente concipimus, qui sceleris notitiam non 
 habuerit :" Meyer, and Winer, § 59, to 
 God's judgment of Him. I much prefer to 
 either regarding it as subjective with refer- 
 ence to Christ Himself, Who said, John 
 viii. 46, τις t ξ νμών ίλέγχει με TTfpi αμαρ- 
 τίας ; He was thus ό μη -γνονς άμαρτίαν 
 [see Hartung, Partikellehre, ii. 131, who 
 gives among other exx., one very similar, 
 from Thucyd. i. 118, ήσυχαζόν τε το wXsov 
 τον χρόΐ'ου, 6ντ£ς και προ τοϋ μ.ή ταχ€Ϊς 
 ϊέναι ίς τονς πολίμους'], — 'knew not,' i.e. 
 by contact, bj' personal experience, ' sin.' 
 See, for the serise, 1 Pet. ii. 22. Heb. vii. 26), 
 on our behalf (or, instead of us : I prefer 
 here the former, because the purpose of the 
 ver. is to set forth how great things God 
 has done for us : — the other, though true, 
 does not seem so applicable. — The words 
 VTTip ήμ. are emphatic) He made (to be) 
 sin (not, ' a sin offering,' as Augustine, Am- 
 bros., Oecum., Erasm., Hammond, Wolf, 
 al., for the word never has the meaning, 
 even in the LXX, Levit. vi. 25. Num. viii. 
 8 ; and if it had, the former sense of the 
 same word in this same sentence would 
 preclude it here : — nor rr αμαρτωλός-, as 
 Meyer, al. : but, as De Wette, al.. Six, 
 abstract, as ojiposed to Righteousness 
 which follows : compare κατάρα, Gal. iii. 
 13. He, on the Cross, was the Represen- 
 tative of Sin,— of the sin of the world) that 
 we might become (the present, -γινώμ. as 
 
 in rec, would signify, as Stallbaum, Crito, 
 p. 43 [Meyer] — ' id quod propositum fuerit, 
 nondum perfectum et transactum esse, sed 
 adhuc durare.' The aor., which is far the 
 best supported by MSS., also yields the 
 best sense, as joining the whole justification 
 of all God's people, as one act accomplished, 
 with the Sacrifice of Christ) the Righte- 
 ousness of God (see above : representatives 
 of the Righteousness of God, endued with 
 it and viewed as in it, and examples of it) 
 in Him ' (in union with Him, and by virtue 
 of our standing in Him). 
 
 Chap. Λ^Ι. 1 — 10.] He further describes 
 his apostolic embassage, as one of earnest 
 exhortation not to receive the grace of God 
 in vain (vv. 1, 2), and of approving himself, 
 by many characteristics and raider various 
 circumstances, as the minister of God 
 (vv. 3 — 10). 1.] σνν£ργοΰντ€5, viz. 
 
 τψ θεψ. Whose representatives they were, 
 and Whose grace they recommended. This 
 is implied not only in what went before, but 
 in the τον θεοϋ of our ver. itself. Meyer 
 makes it τφ χριστό), referring it to the 
 ν-κερ xp. above: Chrys., Theodoret, Ben- 
 gel, Olsh., al., νμ~ιν, which certainly would 
 have been expressed, and does not suit the 
 sense, nor Paul's habit of speaking of the 
 ministry, see 1 Cor. iii. 9. Flatt and Em- 
 merling would make the σΰ\> imply, work- 
 ing ivith our exhortations, aiding them by 
 our example : which sense, though occa- 
 sionally belonging to σίη' and ττρός in com- 
 position, could hardly have place here with- 
 out some plainer indication in u-hat went 
 before, of that to which the preposition 
 refers, — and would not suit the και, which 
 severs συνίρ-γ. from τταρακάλ. — The Ik is 
 one of transition, introducing a new feature. 
 — ' Moreover also, while working with 
 God, we exhort, that you (when preach- 
 ing to you, ^-or others, when preaching to 
 others : he still is describing his practice in 
 his ministry, not using a direct exhortation 
 to the Corr.) receive not (' recipiatis ;' — 
 not ' receperitis,' ' that ye will not have 
 received,' i. e. * will not by apostasy shew 
 that ye have received' ... as Erasm., al., and 
 De Wette. This mistake arises mainly
 
 2—6. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 635 
 
 2 0"'Ί^ ' 4'ΛΛ*ι3' ^ i ' ech. τϊϋ. 20 
 
 ^ μωμηυ^ τ] όιακονια, αλλ εν παΐ'Τί σννισταντΐς ^ only. Prov. 
 εαυτούς ως Οευΰ διάκονοι, ev ύπομονί) πολλι?, έν "^ θλί- h = Actsi.i?. 
 
 ' Ε - Rom.si.lSt. 
 
 ■φίσιν, tv ανά-γκαις, εν "^ στίνο-χωοίαις, ίν " ττληγοις, U^ROm.!:? 
 ίν ° φυΧακαις, εν '^ ακαταστασιαις, εν "^ κοποις, εν "^ αγρυ- ' =,ι cor.vii. 
 πνίοις, εν ^ νηστείαίς, ° εν ' άγνότ /jri, εν "γνώσει, έν ^ jua- "v'jirssl'^isa. 
 υ^ΐία, εν γ^ρηστοτητι, εν πνευ /^toTi αγίω, εν α-γαπγ) β ^^ 
 
 ρ 1 Cor. xiv. 33 reff. q 1 Cor. iii. 8. χν. ri8 al. Geu.xxxi.42. r cli. xi. 27 only t. 2 Mace, 
 
 ii. 2<i. s 1 Cor. vii. a var. reHd. ch. xi. 27 only iu PhuI. Gospp., Matt. xvii. 21. 1 Mk. Luke ii. 37 
 
 only. Actsxiv. 23. xxTii. 9 only. 2 Kings xU. 16. t ch. xi. 3 only t• u = 1 Cor. i. 5. xii. 8 al. 
 
 τ Rom. ii. 4 reff. w Rom. ii. 4 refl'. P. 
 
 ar-erp copt Cbr Thdrt Thl Oec-comm Ambrst Aug Pel. — 4. rec σνηστωντες, with 
 D^EJK &c Chr Thdrt Dam h 1 al : -στανοντΐς Β 31. 73 Daoii: txt CD'FG 17 
 Clem Cyr. — διακόνους D'.— aft αναγκ. ins εν ίιωγμοις 72'-4. 113-marg 122 Chr 
 (somet) : aft στινοχ., 23-marg. — 5. tv ακατ. om sah. — 6. for tv bef yrwa., και sah. — 
 
 from regarding the words as directly ad- 
 dressed to the Corr. instead of a descrip- 
 tion of his apostolic practice) the grace of 
 God (i. e. the reconciliation above spoken 
 of) to no purpose ' (i. e. unaccompanied by 
 sanctincation of Ufe; so Chrys-, 'ίνα μι) 
 νομίσωσιν otl τοϋτό εστί καταλΧαγή μό- 
 νον, το τΓίστινσαι τφ καΧοϋΐ'τι, επάγει 
 ταύτα, ττ)ν πΐξΐΐ τον β'ιον σπονίήν άπαι- 
 τών). 2.] Ground of the exhortation: 
 
 ■viz. the importance of the present time as 
 the day of acceptance, — shewn by a Scrip- 
 ture citation. — ' For He (God, with whom 
 we σννεΐ)•γονμεν and whose grace we re- 
 commend) saith, "In an accepted time 
 (Heb. iiiinnr?, ' in the season of grace ') I 
 heard thee, and in the day of salva- 
 tion I helped thee :" behold (inserted for 
 solemnity — to mark the importance of what 
 follows) NOAv is the favourably accepted 
 time (ίϋτϊρόςοεκτος, a far stronger term 
 than οεκτός, q. d. the very time of most 
 favourable acceptance, said from the ful- 
 ness of his feeling of the greatness of God's 
 grace), — behold, now is the day of salva- 
 tion.' — ό γαρ iv τοιοντψ καιρψ άγώνιζό- 
 μινος, εν φ τοσαντη κέχνται δωρεά, εν ψ 
 τοσαντη χάρις, ενκόλως ϊπιτενζεται των 
 βραβείων. Chrys. The prophecy is one 
 directly of the Lord Jesus, as the restorer 
 and gatherer of his people ; and the time of 
 acceptance is the interval of the offer of tlie 
 covenant to men, conceded to Him by the 
 Father. 3 — 10.] And this doing, he 
 
 approves himself as the minister of God by 
 various characteristics, and under mani- 
 fold circumstances in life. 3.] 8t- 
 8ovT€S, resumed from συνεργονντες, ver. 
 1 ; ver. 2 being parenthetic. It, and all 
 the following participles, vv. 9, 1 0, qualify 
 παρακαλοϊ'μεν, shewing the pains and 
 caution used by him to enforce this ex- 
 hortation by his example as well as his 
 precept. So Grot.: ' ostendit enim, quam 
 serio moneat, qui, ut alitjuid proficiat, 
 
 nullis terreatur incommodis, nuUa non com- 
 moda negligat.' But evidently, before the 
 hst is exhausted, he passes beyond the 
 mere confirmation of his preaching, and is 
 speaking generally of the characteristics of 
 the Christian ministry. — Iv μηΰενί, ' in 
 nothing,' comp. εν παντί, below : not, 
 ' in no man's estimation,' as Luther, μη- 
 όεμ., — μηδενί, are not =r ούδεμ. — ονδενί, 
 but, see on ch. v. 21, subjectively said — 
 ' we exhort, being such as give, &c. :' so 
 I Cor. X. 33, iyct) πάντα πασιν άρίσκω, 
 μη ζητών κ.τ.Χ. ττροςκοττή =: σκάν- 
 
 δαΧον, or πρόςκομμα, Rom. xiv. 1.3. 
 μωμηθτ}] μωμασθαι, 'to reproach' (see 
 Winer, § 30. 7), is one of those deponent 
 verbs which have an aorist passive : so δια- 
 Χεγεσθαι, βονΧεσθαι, δνι•ασθαι, σπΧαγχνί- 
 ζεσθαι, &c. — The ινιακοί ίο, the office itself, 
 would be reproached, if cause of offence 
 were found in the character of its hearers. 
 4.] ^leyer well remarks the position 
 of σννιστ. εαυτούς. When the words sig- 
 nified ' to recommend otirselves,' in a bad 
 sense, ch. iii. 1, v. ]2, — έαντ. preceded the 
 verb : but here and ch. iv. 2, where used in 
 a good sense, and without any stress on 
 ίαντονς, it foil oics the verb. This is only 
 one of continually occurring instances of the 
 importance of the collocation of words with 
 regard to the emphasis. διάκονοι] 
 
 not διακόνον<ί : ' recommending ourselves, 
 as ministers of God should do.' The 
 ambiguity of the E. Λ^. miglit have been 
 avoided by a different arrangement of 
 words : ' in all things, as the ministers of 
 God, approving ovrsetves.' — The following 
 datives are a specification of παντί ; but 
 not all of the same sort : some signify in- 
 struments by which, some, situations in 
 uhich, some, both these. Bcngcl remarks : 
 " Insignis gradatio. Sequuntur tor tria 
 patienda (i.e. from Ολιψίσιν to νί/στύαις), 
 quihus patientia {νπομυνίι)οχντνΜητ; pres- 
 sura,—plaga', - laborcs. Primus ternarius
 
 636 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 VI. 
 
 χ Rom. χϋ. 9. 
 y Eph. i.l3 
 
 reff. ^ 
 
 ζ = ch. X. 4. ^' 
 
 ανυττοκρΊτω, ' εν ■ λόγω ' αληθείας, ευ δυνα^αει σεου, bcde 
 [α τωι» οπλωΐ' της όικαιοαυνης των οεςιωτ' και 
 
 15. Rom. vi. αοιστεοωΐ', ota οοί,ης και ατιμίας, δια όυςφημιας 
 
 13.) 
 
 ^ fchr"on?iii. '<^«' "* ευφημίας, ως ^ ττλάνοι και ' αληθίΐς, ^ ως ^ άγνοού- 
 
 b = iohnv.il, μζνοι και " εττι-^ινωσκομενοι, ως αποθνήσκοντες και ιόου 
 
 C 1 Cor XV. 43 reff. d here only t- e MhK. xxvii. 03. 1 Tim. ir. 1. 2 John 7 (bis) only. 
 
 Jer. xxiii. 32. f suL)j., Matt. xxii. IB. John iii.3o al. g 1 Cor. xiv. 38. 2 Pet. u. 12al. 
 
 hch.i. 1. Luke vu. 37 reff. 
 
 7. for θεου, πνεύματος A"].— των αρισηρ. 2192.— 8. ευφ. κ. δυςφ. 80.— 9. ως (2nd) οιη 
 
 continet genera, secundus, species adver- 
 sorum : tertia, spontanea " (but qu .' : see 
 below). So that the υπομονή πολλή be- 
 longs to vv. 4, 5, and ver. 6 goes on to 
 other points. <ΓΤ£νοχ.] See ch. iv. 8, 
 
 note. 5.] On ττληγ., see Actsxvi.23, 
 
 and ch. si. 23, 24. φυλακ.] At Phi- 
 
 lippi only as yet, as far as we know from 
 the narrative of the Acts ; — but there must 
 have been many other occasions, see ch. 
 xi. 23. He may have been imprisoned at 
 Antioch in Pisidia, Acts xiii. 50, and at 
 Lystra, xiv. 19, and at Corinth, xviii. 12. 14 : 
 and we cannot tell what may have befallen 
 him during his journeys. Acts xv. 41 ; 
 xvi. C ; xviii. 23. ev άκαταστ.] ' in 
 
 tumults,' see Acts xiii. 50 ; xiv. 5. 19 ; 
 xvi. 22 ; xvii. 5 ; xviii. 12, and above all, 
 xix. 23 — 41. The sense given by Chrys., 
 al., TO μ7]ϋαμον δίη'ασθαι στηΐΌΐ iXnvvo- 
 μενον, is philologically allowable, — cf. De- 
 mosth. 383. 7. άκατάστατον ώςπερ εν 
 eaXarry πνεύμα, and James i. 8, and 
 Polyb. xxxi. 13. (J, νποίηκνϋων αϋτοΊς 
 την άκατασταη'ιαν της βασιλείας, — but 
 not found in Ν. Τ. ev Koirois] usually, 
 
 and here, signifies ' labour in the Lord,' 
 for His sake, see reff. So also κοπιάω, 
 Rom. xvi. 12 (bis), and reff. Chrys., al., 
 interpret it of his manual work, 1 Cor. iv. 
 12 ; and άστατουμιν and κοπιώμεν oc- 
 curring there togefher certainly gives some 
 semblance to the view : but see ch. xi. 23, 
 where this can hardly be ; it is most pro- 
 bable that the wearitiess of his excessive 
 apostolic labour was in his mind, 
 άγρυιτνίαι?] Chrys. says, τας νύκτας εν 
 αις εΐιίασκεν, η ότι και iv αύταΐς tjpya- 
 ζετο. But Ι would rather believe the 
 ήγρυ— j'ifii to have been tcatchings through 
 anjciety for tlie churches. ev vηστeίαιs] 
 
 This is generally, and by De \V. against 
 Meyer, taken to refer to involuntary hun- 
 ger and thirst. But, as the latter remarks, 
 the word does not appear to be ever so 
 used ; and in ch. xi. 27, Paul himself dis- 
 tinguishes εν νηστειαις from έν λιμψ κ. 
 ίιψί(. The meaning of 'fastings' must 
 therefore be retained. So Chrys., Theo- 
 doret, and Calvin. 6.] The nine pre- 
 
 ceding datives (see on ver. 4) have ex- 
 
 panded υπομονή. We now resume the 
 main catalogue, with ev άγνο'τητι, ' in 
 purity :' which is variously explained : of 
 bodily chastity, Grot. : — of unselfishness, 
 Theodoret, and Chrys. as an alternative (Γ; 
 σωφροσύνην, i] την έν Ιίπααι καθαρότητα, 
 η το άδΜίιυδόκητοί', η και τϋ δωρεάν το 
 εύα-γγ. κηρύττειν) : — Ι prefer the second 
 of Chrys. 's meanings, general purity of 
 character, ειλικρίνεια, — unblameableness 
 of life, and singleness of purpose. Iv 
 
 γνώσ£ΐ] 'knowledge of the gospel,' in a 
 high and singular degree ; see I Cor. ii. 
 6 tf. So Chrys. : σοφί^. tij παρά τοϋ 
 θεου δεδυμίνγ. χρηστοτητι] ' kind- 
 
 ness :' a kind and considerate demeanour. 
 ev irv. όγίω] ' in the Holy Spirit,' 
 as the Power by Whom all these motives 
 are wrought. The omission of the artt., 
 aft. εν, constitutes no objection to this ren- 
 dering, as Bp. Middleton (in loc.) sup- 
 poses : cf. δια πν. άγιου τον δοθέντυς 
 ήμ'ιν, Rom. ν. 5, — and the very same 
 words, 1 Thess. i. 5, — in both which places 
 the meaning is undoubted ; neither of 
 which, however, is noticed by Middleton. 
 The words do not appear to hold any logi- 
 cal place in the list, any more than iv δυν. 
 θεου below. 7. ev λογ. άληθ.] is taken 
 
 by De W., ^leyer, al., as subjective, — ' in 
 speaking, or teaching truth ' — ' in discourse, 
 the contents whereof were truth :' but 
 their objection against the sense ' in the 
 word of truth,' = iv t^j λόγψ τής αλη- 
 θείας, as it is expressed Col. i. 5, is not 
 valid, — on account (1) of the government 
 by a preposition, which would make the 
 insertion of the art. optional, — (2) of the 
 whole catalogue being anarthrous, which 
 would cause the art. to be omitted for 
 uniformity's sake. ev δυν. θ€οϋ] 
 
 viz. the Power spoken of ch. iv. 7, — 
 the power manifested in every part of 
 our apostolic working, — not merely, in 
 miracles. δια τ. οπλ. τ. δικ.] ' By 
 
 means of (εν is changed for διή, first ap- 
 parently on account of τα 'όπλα, marking 
 them more distinctly as instruments, — and 
 then contiimed) the weapons of righte- 
 ousness {belonging to, — or as jSIeyer, fur- 
 nished by, — the righteousness which is of
 
 7— υ. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 637 
 
 xsiii. 
 Heb. 
 
 ,ιη. 
 
 SCliron.x. 
 
 xis. 
 
 ^(ομίν, ως ^ παιόίνομίνοι και μη θανατουμίνοι, wCiLnkexsi 
 
 λυτΓου^εΐΌΐ aft δε χαίροντες, ως πτωγ^οι ττολλούς δε ^Ί/^'^Ι' 
 πλυυτίί,οντες, ως μηοίν εχοιτες Και πάντα /νατεχοντες. ι»; 
 
 llrrivo ' <•-μ'/ ν f- τ/- ' α ' ^ ^°!°- ™• ^ 
 
 ΐυ στόμα -ημών ^ avetoysv ττρος υμάς, Κορινσιοι, V .ν^:. ., ^. 
 
 m 1 Cor. i. Γι. ch. is. η only. Gen. xiv. 23 al. η = 1 Cor. vii. 30. 
 
 ο See Epb. vi. ly. Sir. xxii. 22. ρ pres., 1 Cor. xvi. 9. 
 
 sah. — for iSov, tri FG. — for naiS., πιιραζομενοι D'FG it Ambrst. — 10. τα πάντα 3. 48. 
 114 (al?): παν Se sah. — 11. ω κορ. FG ν al Thl. — και i] arm : η yap 213. — πίττλατυται 
 
 faith. That panoply, part of which only in 
 the more particular specification of Eph. 
 vi. 13 — 17, viz. the θώραξ, is allotted to 
 δικαιοσύνη, — is here all assigned to it. — 
 Some of the ancient Comm. — Chrys., 
 Oecum., al., and Grot., Estius, al., under- 
 stand by 'όπλα, ' instruments,' as in Rom. 
 vi. 13, and interpret these instruments to 
 be, situations and ojjportunities of life, 
 whether prosperous, ίιίΐ,ιά, or adverse, 
 άριστίρα : but the other interp. is in better 
 accordance with the Ap.'s habit of com- 
 parison,— see ch. X. 4. Eph. vi. 13 ff. 
 1 Thess. V. 8). των Scl- κ. άριστ.] 
 
 ' which are on the right and left :' i. e. 
 encompassing and guarding the whole per- 
 son. Grot., Bengel, and most recent Coram., 
 even De W. and Me3'er, explain it, both 
 right handed, — i. e. of attack, the sword 
 and spear,- — and left handed, — i. e. of de- 
 fence, the shield : but it seems to me that 
 this would require twv δίζιων και των 
 άριστίρών : whereas now, no art. being 
 inserted before άριστ., it is implied that the 
 panoply (τά δπλη) is on both sides {dt^ia 
 K. aptffrf pa) of the person. On the interp. 
 prosperity and adversity, see above. 
 8.] Perhaps the instrumental signification 
 of Cid need not be strictly retained. The 
 prep., once adopted, is kept for the sake of 
 parallelism, though with various shades of 
 meaning. I would understand it in Sia 
 ίόξ., &c., as iu διά πολλών δακρύων, as 
 pointing out the medium through which. 
 Thus understood, these two pairs in ver. 8 
 will form an easy transition from instru- 
 mental, through medial, to the passive cha- 
 racteristics which follow. ώς ιτλάνοι] 
 From speaking of repute, he passes to the 
 character of the repute. — In all these capa- 
 cities and under all these representations or 
 misrepresentations, we, as ministers of God, 
 recommend ourselves. But in these following 
 clauses a new point is perhaps brought out, 
 viz. the difference of our real state from our 
 reputed one. That this is the case with 
 ώς άπυθν. κ. ιδού ζώμιν and all following, 
 is of course clear. But is it so with the 
 two clauses jireceding that one .' Do they 
 mean, ' as deceivers, and yet true, as un- 
 known, and yet vtell known,' or, — ' as de- 
 ceivers, and as true men, as unknown, and 
 
 as well known ?' I own I am not clear on 
 this point. The words και ιδον, ζώμιν, 
 may be an indication how the Ap. would 
 have the previous two clauses understood ; 
 but they also may be a transition, altering 
 the previous reference of the second member 
 of the clause, now that the subject is no 
 longer matter of rumour, as πλάΐ'Οί and 
 άγνυονμίνοι, but matter of fact, as άπη- 
 θνί]σκοντ(ς, and the following. If the 
 latter alternative be taken, the two clauses 
 will serve as a transition to the subsequent 
 ones, thus : having said, δια δνςφημίας κ. 
 ίύφημίας, he proceeds ώς ττλαΊ'Οΐ (answer- 
 ing to δνςψ.) και άληθΓις (answering to 
 tv<p.), — ώς άγνυονμίνοι (still having δυςφ. 
 in view, — as ' unknown,' of obscure reputa- 
 tion), και 'ίπι•/ινωσκήμ(νοι (still looking 
 back at (ΰφ., seeing that the ϊπίγνωσις 
 would lead to good repute) : then, having 
 by the participles of the latter clause ex- 
 pressed more a matter of fact than did the 
 adjectives of the former one, he passes to 
 ώς άποΘνησκοντις, which has no longer its 
 main reference to the reptile of others, but 
 to the fact, see ch. iv. 7 ff•, as exhibited in 
 himself. I confess that on the whole this ren- 
 dering recommends itself to my mind. 
 9.] καΐ Ιδού ζώμ.€ν is much stronger, more 
 triumphant, than και ζώντ(ς. There is 
 something still of the idea of one reputed 
 dead and found to be alive: though I would 
 not say with Meyer that ώς άποθν. alto- 
 gether refers to a supposed triumph of his 
 adversaries, " Now it is all over with him ! 
 His course is ended!" ώς τταιδ.] 
 
 Surely we must now drop altogether the 
 putative meaning of the ώς. The sense has 
 been (see above) some time verging that 
 way, and in the clauses which follow the 
 ώς, expresses just what it does in ώς 0fou 
 διάκονοι, viz. ' quippe qui simus.' — Ps. 
 cxvii. 18, LXX, seems to have been in his 
 mind : παιδίύων επαιδινπέ μί ύ κύ^ηος, 
 και τφ eavciTiij ον παρίδωκε με . . . 
 10.] Here even more (-learly than before, 
 the first member of the clause όις \νπ., <ni 
 δε χαίρ. cannot express the opinion of his 
 adversaries. For however παιδινόμενος 
 might be wrested to signify ' a man under 
 the chastisement of God ' as a ground of 
 reproach, λυποιίμενο? will surely not bear
 
 638 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 VI. 
 
 ρόια 
 
 q Matt, xxiii. 5 ΚΟ 
 
 ouljr. PsA. 
 
 cxviii.32 ,5,, ,7,, 
 
 (45). 1 Kines ')^"'5 
 
 ii. 1. IQ V 
 
 rch.iv.8. Isa. ^'' 
 
 xxviii. 20. 
 
 xlix. 19. 
 8 = oh. vii. 15. 
 
 Phil. i. 8. 
 
 Philem. 20. 
 t Rom. i. 27 
 
 only t 
 
 ■ημών 
 στεΐ'οχ 
 την δε αυτήν 
 τυνθητε και υμπς 
 στοις' τις yap 
 
 λ ι . 12 ' r " Λ ' 
 
 ατννται ου στενογωρεισνε εν 
 
 ωρεισΟε όε εν τοις ^ σττλαγγνοις ύμων' 
 
 (" ως τέκνοις \εyω) '' πλα- 
 
 yιvεσuε ετεpoCυyυυvτες απι~ 
 
 / > ζ ' ι i•. t 
 
 συΐ'Ύ) και ανομία, η τις 
 
 αντιμισυιαν 
 1^ Μη 
 
 )χτ, 
 
 oticafoc 
 
 U Acts xvii. 22. 
 
 ν w. particip., Mark i. 4. See Jer. xxxiii. 20. Luke i. 10, 20 al. 
 X = 1 Cor. vi. 6 relt'. y here ouly. Ps. cxxi. 3. ζ Matt. vii. 23 
 
 219'.— 12. νμιν 44. — if om C. —ημων 72. 114-15 (al?).— 13. αυτήν om 179: add 
 habentes ν Ambrst Pel Sedul. — νμας FG. — 14. και μη FG it arm Ambrst (not al latt). — 
 μίτα άπιστων FG it ν lat ff : ως άπιστοι slav. — δικαιοσύνης και αδικίας D', also 
 (-vj; κ. -la) ϋΈ : δικαιοσύνης (y Scliolz) μετά {και Orig) ανομίας FG it ν al Orig some 
 lat-ff. — rec for η τις, τις cfj {corrn for conformity, or as more usaal), with Κ &c syr 
 {η τις marg) al Chr Thdrt Thl Oec Turtj : και τις Cyr : τις Orig2 Augi : t.xt BCDEFGJ 
 17. 31-7-9. G7-. 73. 80. 113--15 {η τις δι 67') it ν Syr copt arm Clem Dam Orig-int 
 
 the meaning ' fold}er ber παφ gewo^nii(i)ei• 
 nienicl)lid)er 3in[td)t tvaurig \er)n imi^tc/' 
 
 ' one in such a situation, that according to 
 ordinary human estimation he must be 
 wretched,' as De Wette, — but must point to 
 the matter of fact, that he is really ' af- 
 flicted.' See reff. ιττωχοί again can 
 hardly have been a reproach, but sets forth 
 the fact — ' as poor men, but enriching 
 (not by distribution of alms, as Chrys., 
 Theodoret, Estius, but by imparting spiri- 
 tual riches, see 1 Cor. i. 5) many :— as 
 having nothing (in the sense in which ot 
 ίχοντις are ώς μη ίχοντις, 1 Cor. vii. 29, 
 — in the improper sense of ' to possess ' in 
 which we here use the word — t/itts, we have 
 nothing, are destitute), but possessing 
 (finally and as our own, our inheritance 
 never to be taken away ; in that sense of 
 the word 'to possess' which this world's 
 buyers are not to use — 01 άγοράζοντις, ώς 
 μη κατί'χοντίς, 1 Cor. vii. 30) all things.' 
 See a similar ' possession of all things,' 
 1 Cor. iii. 22 : though this reaches further 
 than even that, — to the boundless riches, of 
 the heavenly inheritance. 
 
 11 — VII. 1.] Earnest exhortations 
 
 TO SEPARATION FROM UNBELIEF AND IM- 
 PURITY. 11 — 13.] These verses form 
 a conclusion to the preceding outpouring of 
 his heart with regard to his apostolic min- 
 istry, and at the same time a transition to 
 the exhortations which are to follow. 
 11.] ' Our (my) mouth is open {notpast .• the 
 use of άΐ'έψγα for άΐ'Βφγμοι is common in 
 later Greek : see Palm and Rost's Lex.,and 
 ref. RUckert takes it as past, and renders, 
 ' I have begun to speak with you, I have not 
 concealed my a})Ostolic sentiments — 1 can- 
 not shut my mouth, but must go on speak- 
 ing to you yet further.' The word seems 
 to refer to the free and open spirit shewn in 
 the whole previous passage on the ministry, 
 in which he had so liberally imparted his 
 inner feelings to them) towards you, Co- 
 
 rinthians (και η προςθήκη δε τον ονόμα- 
 τος φιλίας πολλής, και θερμότητας καΐ 
 διaθέσεϋJς• και γάξ) ιίώθαμεν των άγαπω- 
 μ'&νων συνεχώς γυμνά τα ονόματα περι- 
 στρέφειν. Chrys. See Phil. iv. 15. Gal. iii. 
 1, which last is written under a very dif- 
 ferent feeling), ^our (my) heart has become 
 enlarged.' These last words are very vari- 
 ously explained. Chrys., Theodoret, Oec, 
 al., understand them of the expansive effect 
 of love on the heart : Luther, Estius, al., 
 of dilatatio gaiidii, which does not, how- 
 ever, agree with πλατννθητε και νμης be- 
 low : nor with the general context, either 
 of what proceeds or of what follows : for to 
 refer it to ch. vii. 4, as Estius, is evidently 
 far fetched, the intermediate matter being 
 of such a different character. Alii aliter. 
 Meyer holds with Chrys., and refers it to 
 the preceding passage, during which his 
 heart became expanded in love to them. 
 De Wette takes it, ' / /lave potired out, en- 
 larged and diffused, my heart to you,' viz. 
 by speaking thus open-hearted to you. I 
 believe the precise sense will only be found 
 by taking into account the πλατύνθ. κ. 
 νμεΤς below, and the occurrence of the e.x;- 
 pression in the Psalm (reff.). Some light 
 is also thrown upon it by χωοήσατε ήμας, 
 ch. vii. 2. The heart is considered as a 
 sjjace, wherein its thoughts and feelings are 
 contained. We have the same figure in 
 our expression ' narrow-minded.' In order 
 to take in a new object of love, or of desire, 
 or of ambition, the heart must be enlarged .• 
 όδον ίί'τολών σου εδραμον, όταν επλάτυ- 
 νας την καρδίαν μου. The Αρ. has had 
 his heart enlarged towards the Corr. : he 
 could and did take them in, with their in- 
 firmities, their interests, their Christian 
 graces, their defects and sins : but they did 
 not and conld not take him in {χωρησαι 
 αυτόν) : he was misunderstood by them, 
 and his relation to them disregarded. This 
 he here asserts, and deprecates. He assures
 
 12—18. ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Β. 639 
 
 ^κοινωνία φωτι προς σκότος', ^^ τις δε ** συ]ΐΐ(^ώΐ'ΐ;σίς aicor.i. 9. 
 -χριστού προς *" βίλί'αρ, η "^ τ'ις '^ μίρις πιστω μετά " απ'ι- ^^j^'^/^jyK 
 στου\ τις ^Ι " σνγκατάθεσις ναω θεοΰ /ΐίί τα ε/δώλωΐ' ; c here only t. 
 υ^ίίίς γαο ΐ'οος t /ίου εστε ζ,ωντος, καυως (ΐπεν ο σεος ιβ. μ.,Αοΐβ 
 
 " g ' / , , _ , ι, , , , ,, viii.sireff. 
 
 ΟΤΙ " ενυικησω εν αυτοις και ίμπ(οιπατΐ]σω, και ^σομαι ^^J^^^^J^. 
 
 '" fl^ ' ' ^>' ' Λ' 17<^'''^''^Λ xxii.l.Luke 
 
 αυτών σεος, Kot αυτοί έσονται μυι λαός. ' οιο £c.eAuaTe xxiii. 5ΐ. 
 
 i • ' ' - ^ k ' , / /) \ > /• \ f 7«' ^ν• "'••• 
 
 εκ μείτου αυτών και αψορισοητε, λέγει κύριος, και ]^- •''=f™- 
 ακαυαρτου μη απτεσοί κayω ειςοεξομαι υμάς, ^° και couin.in. 
 
 η .' ' " η ' ι > r - ,; /ι , , \ ^ ,2 Tim. i. 5, 
 
 ίσομαι υμιν εις ττατερα, και υμε/ς εσεσσε μοι εις υιούς και j"» ««'y- (not 
 
 h here only. Letit. xxvi. 12. i Acts xvii. 3 5 reff. k Acts xix. 9 reff. Isa. Hi. 11 (free). 
 
 I — 1 Cor. vU. 14. 1. c. m here only. EzEK. xx. 34. η 2 Kings τϋ. 14. Jcr. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 9, 33. 
 
 Cypr Lucif Ambrst Jer all. — 15. for τις Se, η τις arm Ambrst. — συμφωνία 17. — rec 
 χριστώ (prob corrn for conformn to φωτι preceding), with DEFGJK &c vss Clem-edi 
 Orig, Can-apost-ed Tert, al : tst BC 13. 17 d e ν copt CleiDi (and msj) Origj Can-apost- 
 mss Dam lat-ff. — rec βίλιαλ, with a few mss g ν Tit-ed : βϊΧιαν DEK al syr-marg-gr 
 goth {Beliam) many mentd (" corrupte ") by Jer Thdrtj al : βίλιαβ FG d e : txt BCJ all 
 (40 and more, Tisch) vss (harP) Clemj Orig-alw Can-apost (so Cotel fi-om mss : al 
 βίλιαλ) Nyss Naz Bas Ephr Chr Thdrt-oft Dam gr-ff ^Martin. — πιστυν Β al copt (Can- 
 apost : but not Cotel from mss). — αττιστων 17• — 16. η τις arm Chr Tert Ambrst: δε 
 cm Did.— ί,μ£<ς • • • • £σμίΓ BD'J 6. 10. 17- 23. 31-9. 67". 71• 80. 109 (al?) al d e copt 
 Clem (freely) al Augj Did : txt CD^EFGK most mss g ν syrr goth al Ath Chr Thdrt 
 Dam al Jacob-nisib Orig-int Lucif Tert all. — for yap, dt 177• — vaoi 122 Clem. — for 
 καθώς ίίπιν, Xtyn yap D'EFG it goth Tert Augj : καθώς ηπ(ν ο προφήτης Clem : 
 scripium est enim Lucif. — ο θίος om Syr Tert al : ο προφήτης Clem. — αντοις θιος FG g 
 copt Orig,: αντοις ίΐς Qtor slav-ms Chr Ηϋ). — for μοι, μου BC 17• 3? Dam: txt 
 DEFGJK mss nrly (appy) vss (appy) Clem Orig Ath Cyr-jerus Thdrt (μοι ιις λαον 
 Chr) lat if. — 17. rec tS.i\titr( {corrn to more usual form), with DEJK &c ff: ίζίρχίσθε 
 Clemi : txt BCFG 71 al Dam. 
 
 them of their place in his heart, which is 14 — Λ^ΙΙ. 1.] Separate your- 
 
 wide enough for, and does contain them ; selves from unbelief and impurity. On 
 
 and refers back to this ver. in vii. 3, thus, the nature of the connexion, Stanley has 
 
 προΐίρηκα 'ότι iv ταΐς καρδίαις ημών e<rT€ some good remarks. He now applies 
 
 He tells them, ver. 12.] that they to circumstances which had arisen among 
 
 are not straitened in him, i. e. that any con- the Corr. the exhortation which in ver. 
 straint which they may feel towards him, 1 he described himself as giving in pur- 
 any want of confidence in him and persua- suanceof his ministry of reconciliation. The 
 sion of his real appreciation of their state following exhortations are general, and 
 and interests, arose, not from his being hardly to be pressed as applying only to 
 really unable to appreciate them, and love partaking of meats offered to idols, as 
 them, and advise them, — but from tJteir Calv., al., or to marriage ivith unbelievers, 
 own confined view of him, of his love, his as Estius, — but regard all possible con- 
 knowledge of and feeling for them. iiexion and participation, — all leanings to- 
 13.] την αυτήν άντιμ., as τον όμοιον τρό- wards a return to heathenism which might 
 πον, Jude ver. 7, κλισίας, Luke ix. 14, see be bred by too great familiarity with hea- 
 Winer, § 32. 6 : — not governed by κατά thens. — ' Become not (' ne fiatis, niolliter 
 understood, but in fact an accus. of a re- pro: ne silts,' Bengel : rather, perhaps, as 
 moter object, answering in many cases ex- expressing, ' do not enter into those rela- 
 actly to the further removed of the two tions in which you must become ') incon- 
 accusatives in the double accusative govern- gruous yokefellows (the word and idea 
 ment. — The sense seems to be compounded from ref. in Levit. Hesych. : tTtpo^vyoi• 
 of τον αΰτΰν τρόπην, and ηντιμισθίαι>, οι μη συζνγανι τες. Grot explains it, ' αΐ- 
 Ίη the same manner, as a return for teram partem jugi trahere,' but this does 
 my largeness of heart to you.' ώς not give the force of trepo-: — Theo])hyl., 
 τέκνοις λ. explains άντιμιηθίαν, — it being μη άοικύη το δίκαιον Ιπικλινόμινοι κ. 
 naturally expected of children, that they προςκλινύμίνοι οΊς uv θίμις: so making the 
 should requite the love and care of their simile that of an une(|ual balance : but this 
 parents, by corresponding love and regard. could hardly be without more precise notifi-
 
 6i0 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 Λ^Π. 
 
 "exc^Rcl^' OvyaT£^)aQ, λέγει κύριος ° παντοκράτωρ. VII. ταύτας bcde 
 
 passim. Τ•' ^ρ• Λ' q' ^ r Q ' FGJK 
 
 SKixGsvii. ουν εχοιτες τας '^ ετταγγελίας, α-γαπητοι, καυαρισωμίν 
 
 ''^Mn'xti'la ^ ^ί'^^τους ατΓΟ παιτος ^ιιολι»σ/ιοΰ ^σαρκός και " πΐ'ευ- 
 
 rActs^xv.Rreflf. μοτος, ^ ετΓΐτΐ\οΰ\>τίς "" ayuoavvt}v ευ φόβω Θίοΰ. 
 
 " θωρήσατε iVmg' ουδει^α η^ικησαμίν, ου^ίνα ^ εφΘείρα- 
 ' ?' ζ ' -ν / 3 
 
 λε"' 
 
 .■.t pe 
 
 iii. 1 rrfl'. 
 t here only. 
 
 Jer. xxiii. 15. ,.,,, «..λ#-..« 
 η So Malt. 1«£1'> OUCfl/a 
 
 xxvi. 41. 
 
 vRom. XV. 28. Λέγω' ~ προζίρηκα yap οτι εν ταις 
 
 εττΛεοΐ'εκτησαμεν. 
 
 ch. viii. ti al. 
 
 1 Kings iii. 12. 
 ζ ch. ii. 11 rell'. 
 cc Phil. i. 7. 
 
 wRom. i. 4. 1 Thess. iii. 13 only, 
 a = Rom. XV. 2 al. ft. 
 
 προς κατακρισιν 
 καροιαις ημών έστε 
 
 = Matt. six. 11. (Gen. xiii. 6.) y = 1 Ccir. iii. 17. 
 
 b 1 Cor. iii. ϋ only f. c Matt. xxiv. an refl. 
 
 Chap. Λ'^ΙΙ. 1. καθαΜ]σωμίΐ> 238. — for ayuoa., ίικαιοσννην 43. — 2. συγχωρήσατε 
 219. — ί^θ. ovSiva C^ : δΐίφθ. al : om 4C'. 109. — 3. πρ. κατακρ. ου Β (ου λ. ττρ. κα. 
 Birch, but appy mistake) C : ου om 17 : txt DEFGJK mss (appy) vss (appy) gr-lat-ff : 
 aft κατακρ. add μου ϋ1. — υμών 115 ν (not harl) Syr ar-erp Ambrst Pelag. — ίστε om B. — 
 
 cation) with unbelievers (Winer explains 
 the constr., § 31. 5, thus, μι) γίν. ίηροζυ- 
 ■γοΐ'ΐ^τίς,και ούτως δμοζυγουντει; άπίστοιζ : 
 better, as De W., μι) yii'. όμοζ. άπίστοις 
 κ. ο'ύτως ίτίροζνγοϋντίς). μίτοχή] 
 
 ' share in the same i/iing,' ' community.' 
 δικαιοσ. is the state of the Christian, 
 being justified by faith : he is therefore ex- 
 cluded from ανομία, the proper fruit of 
 faith being oljedience. ψωτί, of which 
 
 we are the children, 1 Thess. v. 5, and not 
 of darkness. — Meyer remarks, that the five- 
 fold variation of the term to express part- 
 nership, — μίτοχή, κοινωνία, σνμφώνησις, 
 μερίς, συγκητάθεσις, shews the Ap.'s com- 
 mand of the Greek language. The constr. 
 of κοινωΐ'ία with a dat. and προς, is illus- 
 trated by Wetst. from Stobseus, S. 28, ti 
 S's TIC fan κοινωνία ττρός θεοί'ς ΐ/μ^ν, — 
 and Philo. leg. ad Caium, § 14, τίς ουν 
 κοινωνία προς ' ΚπήΧΚωνα, Τ(/7 μηδέν οι- 
 κείοι' ΐ) συγγενές ΐπιτίτΐ]δίνκότι ; 
 15.] After a question beginning with πώς, 
 τίς, and tlie like, a second question is regu- 
 larly introduced by δέ. Thus Hom. Od. a. 
 225, τίς δαις, τίς δε ο/ζιλος οδ' επλετο ; 
 See Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 169. 
 βίλίαρ] Heb. te'ba, ' contemptibleness,' 
 'wickedness:' found 1 Sam. ii. 12 al. It 
 appears to have been subsequently personi- 
 fied, and used, as here, for a name of the Evil 
 One (see Stanley). The termination -apis 
 stated by Meyer to have arisen from the fre- 
 quent permutation of λ and ρ in the dialect of 
 the Grecian Jews. 16.] συγκατάθ., 
 
 ' agreement in opinions :' see reff., and cf. 
 Plato, Gorg. § 122, συ δε δι) πότερον σνγ- 
 κατητίθεσαι ήμίν περί τοΰτιον την αυτήν 
 δόξαν 1) a)'ri0j}c ; ναώ θίοΰ, 'be- 
 
 tween you, the Church of God,' — see be- 
 low, and 1 Cor. iii. 10; — βίδώλων, 'idols,' 
 as the lords and t— ώΐΊ'ΐιοι of the heathen 
 world. ■υμ€Ϊ5 γάρ] explan. of ναιμ 
 
 θεοϋ as applying to them, and justification 
 
 of it by a citation from the prophetic Scrip- 
 tures. The words cited are compounded of 
 Levit. xxvi. 12, and Ezek. xxxvii. 20, 27• 
 17.] The necessity of separation from 
 the heathen enforced by another citation, — 
 Isa. Iii. 11, — freely given from memory; 
 κάγω είςδΐζ. νμ. being moreover substi- 
 tuted, from Ezek. xx. 34, for προποοίΰ- 
 σεται γαρ πρότερος ίψών KUpioc, κ. ό ΐττι- 
 συνάγων ΰμίίς θεός Ίσραηλ. — The άκά- 
 θαρτον must be understood of the pollu- 
 tions of heathenism generally, not of any 
 one especial polluted thing, as meat offered 
 to idols. 18.] The citation continues, 
 
 setting forth the blessings promised to those 
 who do thus come out from heathendom. 
 Various passages of the O. T. are combined. 
 In 2 Kings vii. 14 (LXX), we have εγώ 
 εσομαι αΰτψ εις πατ., κ. αυτός ισται μοι 
 εις υ'ιόν — the expr. οι υιοί μου and αί θυ- 
 γατέρες μου is found Isa. xliii. 6 : and τάδε 
 λέγίΐ κύριος παντοκράτωρ begins the sec- 
 tion from which the former clauses are 
 taken, 2 Kings vii. 8 (LXX). VII. 1.] 
 
 Inference from the foregoing citations : — 
 seeing that we have such glorinus (ταύτας 
 in the position of emphasis) promises, we 
 are to purify ourselves (not merely, ' keep 
 ourselves pure :' purification belongs to 
 sanctification, and is a gradual work, even 
 after conversion). σαρκός, as the actual 
 
 instrument and suggester of pollution : 
 Ίτνευματος, as the recipient through the 
 flesh, and when the recipient, the retainer 
 and propagator, of uncleanness. The ex- 
 hortation is general .• against impure acts 
 and impure thoughts. iirtxcX. άγιωσ., 
 
 as De W. remarks, gives the positive side of 
 the foregoing negative exhortation : every 
 abnegation and banishing of impurity is a 
 positive advance of that sanctification, in 
 the fear of God (as its element) to which 
 we are called. 
 
 2 — 16.] Concerning the effect on
 
 1—5. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 641 
 
 εις τυ συναποΟανίΐν και σννζην. ^ ποΧΧη ^uoi ^ 7Γ«/ό- dActsni. 19. 
 ,„>,- ,-, h' c\f- ^i'• ly- Ron 
 
 ρησια προς νμας, ποΛΑη /not κανχ^ι^σις υττίρ υμών' eM^kxi'/ai 
 
 ^ πίπληρωμαι rrj παρακΧησπ, υπίοπερισσευομαι τη οη'^Τ."" 
 
 \ορα. ίπι παστι τύι υλιψίΐ ημών. 
 
 και yap ελσοιτων -'τ,ιη.ϋ.ιι 
 
 Β = (Eph. iii. 12) 1 John iii. 21. h = 1 Cor. xv. 31. Rom. iii. 27 reff. i coustr , Rom. i. 29 
 
 •>nly. 2 Slacc. vii. 21. k = ch. i. 3 ρΗδ.-ϊιιι. 1 Rom. τ. 2U ojily t• See Miirk vii. 37. Matt. xiii. 12. 
 
 m — ell. iii. 14 reff. 
 
 αποθανίΐν 3. 28. 121 lect 14.— rec σνζην, with JK &c : txt BPCDEFG.— 4. aft ττρ. νμ. 
 add ίστιν D'E d e al. — tv τη χαρά Β. — aft πασί] om τη FG : aft πάση τη, add ττολλη 
 
 THEM, AND RESULTS IN THEIR CONDUCT, 
 WHICH HIS FORMER Ep. HAD PRODUCED. 
 
 2 — 4.] He introduces the subject by a 
 friendly assurance of his love and besjieak- 
 ing of theirs, as before in ch. vi. 11, 13. 
 2.] χωρήσ., see above on ch. vi. 
 13; Sf^aaOe ήμας πλατίως, κ. μτ/ πτίνο- 
 ■χωρώμεθα iv ίιμΤν. Theophyl. De Wette, 
 after Bengel, al., renders it, ' understand us 
 rightly,' referring to Matt. xix. 1 1 f . : but 
 even there the meaning is ' to take in,' and 
 only ' to understand rightly,' because τον 
 \()yov τούτον follows. And as Meyer ob- 
 serves, there could not well be any misun- 
 derstanding as to what he here says. 
 ouScva ήδ., κ. Γ. λ.] Reasons why they 
 should make room for him in their hearts: 
 ' We (when he dwelt among them, — the 
 aorists refer to a set time, not to his course 
 hitherto) wronged no man (in outivard 
 acts, namely, — in the exercise of his apos- 
 toHc authority, or the hke), — we ruined no 
 man (tliis probably also of outward conduct 
 towards others, not as Calv., al., of corrupt- 
 ing by false doctrine),— we cheated no 
 man.'— To understand, with Riickert, these 
 verbs as applying to the contents of the 
 former Ep., is very forced. If ήδικ. had 
 really referred to the severe punishiBent of 
 the incestuous person, — ίφθίίρ. to the de- 
 livering him over to Satan, — and ϊπλίον. 
 to the power which Paul gained over them 
 by this act of authority, — surely we should 
 have found more express indication of such 
 reference in the text. But no allusion has 
 as yet been made to the former Ep. ; and 
 therefore it is much better to understand 
 the words generally of the time when he 
 resided among them. " In how many ways 
 of which history says nothing, may such 
 ruining of others have been laid to the 
 charge of Paul ? How easily might his 
 severe visitation of sin, his zeal for eleemo- 
 synary collections, his habit of lodging with 
 members of the churches, and the like, 
 have been thus unfavourably character- 
 ized!" Meyer: who remarks, tliat the 
 emphatic position of oiil'tva thrice re- 
 peated is no confirmation of Riickert's 
 view. 3.] ' I say it (ver. 2) not for 
 
 condemnation (with a condemnatory view. 
 
 Vol. II. 
 
 in a spirit of blame : there is no νμων ex- 
 pressed, nor should it be suppUed. He 
 means, ' I do not say ver. 2 in any but a 
 loving spirit'): for (and this shews it) I 
 have before said iviz. ch. vi. 1 1 f. see note 
 there) that ye are in our hearts (this was 
 implied in // καρδία ήμώί' ττίπΚάτυνται, vi. 
 11. In the qualifying words, ίΐς το συν., 
 κ.τ.\., Paul, as Meyer says, is his own 
 commentator), to die together and live 
 together.' This is ordinarily understood, 
 ' so that I could die with you or live ivith 
 you,' — as Hor., ' Tecum vivere amem, 
 tecum obeam libens,' Od. iii. 9 24 : which 
 Meyer controverts, owing to νμΰς being 
 the subject of the sentence, and renders, 
 ' in order to die and to live with us :' i. e. 
 ' if our lot is to die, in death,— and if our 
 lot is to live, in life, never to be torn from 
 our hearts.' But to this I would reply, 
 that though νμΐΐζ is the subject of sv ταΤς 
 καρζ. ήμ. ίστε, it is but an accidental and 
 secondary subject as regards the u-hole sen- 
 tence : that they are present in his heart, 
 is a sign, not of their state of mind, but of 
 his : therefore the purpose, els το, must 
 refer logically to him, the main subject, of 
 whom only the purposes can come into 
 consideration. 4.] τταρρησία, as in 
 
 retf., ' conMence,' which leads to and jus- 
 tifies καϋχησις; not here 'liberty of speech,' 
 as Chrys., al. καΰχ., to others, in 
 
 speaking of them. τη irap., ' the 
 
 consolation (which I have received),' viz. 
 that furnished by the intelligence from you. 
 Though this is anticipating what follows 
 vv. 7, 0, I cannot but believe it to have 
 been already before the Ap's mind, and to 
 have been referred to by the articles before 
 τταρακλ. and χαρ. — On the constr. of 
 ττληρόο} with an instrumental dative, see 
 ret!"., and Winer, § 31. 4. So Eurip. Here. 
 Fur. 3/2, ττενκαισιΐ' χίρας π\ηρα'ϊ'ντες, — 
 and Bacchse 18, μιγάπιν "Ελλησι βαρ- 
 βάροις θ' ϋμον πλ/'/()ίΐς εχουηα κιι\\ι~ 
 ιτν(ΐγώτ(ΐνς ττόλεις. vTrcpir.] ' Ι am 
 
 made exceedingly to abound,' see ref. 
 Matt. The pres. indicates tlie abidiny of 
 the eifect. — ttj xapif ' with the joy ;' see 
 above. — eiri ττάσ. τ. θλ. ήμ., ' in (reff.) all 
 my tribulation :' refers to both preceding 
 Τ τ
 
 642 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 "ν II. 
 
 nrh.i. Slrefl". 
 ο Acts xxiv. 
 
 23 refl 
 ρ ch. vi. 3, 4 
 
 reff. 
 q ch. i. 6 refi". 
 τ Malt, xxiii. 
 
 25, 27, 28 al. 
 
 Deut. xxxii. 
 
 2Γι. 
 s2 Tim.ii. 23. 
 
 Tit.iii.9. 
 
 James iv. 1 
 
 only. = Gen. 
 
 xiii.7. 
 t = ch. i. 4 
 
 pass. 
 η Ι3Λ. xlix. 13. 
 V — ch. iv. 8. 
 w = 1 Cnr. x»i, 
 
 17. Phil. i. 
 
 26. ii. 12al. 
 X = 1 Cor. xiii 
 
 xxxviii. 15. 
 
 2 reff. 
 
 Ύ]μων Ης Μακίδονιαν ου^ίμιαν " ίσγηκεν ° ανίσιν η σαρξ bcde 
 ημών, αλλ' ^ εν τταντι '' Θλιβυμενοι' ^ ίξωθεΓ ^ μά-^αι, 
 '^ ίσο}θεν φόβοι. αλλ ο " παρακαΧων τους " ταττίΐνους 
 
 ' τταρεκάλίσίν ημάς ο θεός "εν τυ) * τταρουσια Τίτου* 
 ^ ου juovov δε ^ έν τρ " παρουσία αυτού, άλλα και " ev ry 
 παρακΧησει rj πορεκτληθ»} " ίφ νμιν, ^ αναγγε'λλων ημιν 
 την νμίόν ^ επιττόθησιν, τον υμών ^ ο^υρμον, τον υμών 
 ^ ^ηΧον ύττερ εμού, ωςτε με "^ μάλλον χαρηίΌΐ. όη ει 
 
 icat ** έλυπησα ύμας εν "^ tij> επιστολτ), ου μεταμελομαί, ει 
 
 6. χνί. 17. y Acts xiv. 27 reff. ζ vcr. 11 only +. a Matt. ii. 18 only, from Jer. 
 
 b=Johnii. 17. Rom. x. 2 ver. 11. c ver. l.i. compare Act.s xxv. lu. dch.ii. 
 
 e 1 Cor. V. 9 refl. f Matt. xxi. 2!», 32. xxvii. 3. Heb. vii. 21 ouly. Prov. xxv. 8. 
 
 D'E'. — υμών 44. 112. 238. — 5. ίσχεν (corrn to more usual form and to aor) BFGK 
 2?,8 : txt CDEJ mis nrly (appy) Chr Thdrta Dam al. — avta. εσχ. CFG it ν al Thdrt, 
 lat-fF. — γαρ μοχαι και arm.— 6. ο bef θίος om C 4 : ο θ. om 72-4. 114 lect 8 Bas Chr 
 Thdrtj : ins aft ταπειν. copt Dam Ambrst (vss transpose it otherw). — for tv, f πι C Chr 
 Thl-marg: om 238. — 7. for μονοί', τιτου ΙΟί). — it om FG g. — ην τταμεκληΘην D'E: 
 add αντος arm. — for εφ, εν J. — for ημιν, υμιν 109 : for νμων, νμιν (qu?) 48 (SchoJz). — 
 vntp εμον om K. — με aft μάλλον DE Thdrt : aft χαρηναι FG arm: om Κ 31-5-7-9. 
 109-14-17 lect 113.— 8. aft ίττιστ. add μου DEFG it : ττρωτη syr. — for ει και (2nd), ει 
 ίίε και Β. — μίΓίμελουμ7]ν Κ (before, μεταμελουμαι) ; εμετεμελομην al : μεταμελημαι 93. 
 
 clauses. "What θλΤψις he means, is ex- 
 plained in next ver. — ττοίση here not of 
 all trib., at all times, which the special 
 reference of πηρακλ. and χηρά forbids : 
 but of various sorts of trib. as specified 
 {iv τταντι) below. 5—7.] The intel- 
 
 ligence received from them through Titus, 
 and its comforting effect on the Ap.'s 
 mind. 5.] yap gives a reason for 
 
 βλι'ψίΐ above : και connects with ch. ii. 
 12, 13, where he has spoken of the trouble 
 which he had before leaving Troas. ' For 
 a,lso, after our coming to M., our flesh 
 had no rest (there is a slight, but very 
 slight, distinction from oiiic εσχηκα άνεσιν 
 τψ ■πνεΰματΊ μου, ch. ii. 12. Titus was now 
 present, so that that source of inquietude 
 was removed ; but the outward ones, of fight- 
 ings generating inward fears (but see below), 
 yet remained. No further distinction must 
 be drawn — for εσωθεν 00;3οι evidently 
 shews that σαρξ must be taken in a wide 
 sense) : without, fightings (the omission 
 of ynav renders the description more gra- 
 phic), within, fears.' Chrys., εζωθ. μά- 
 χαι' παρά των άττίστων εσωθ. φόβοι' Sia 
 τους ασθενής τώι> ττιστών. So Calv., 
 Grot., Wetst., al., slightly varying in their 
 assignment of each class. But it is better 
 to suppose, as Paul speaks of »'/ σάρί, ήμίοΐ', 
 to understand €ξωθίν of the state of tilings 
 without him, contentions with adversaries, 
 either within or without the church, and 
 εσωθίν of that tvithin, fears, for ourselves, 
 for others, or for you, how you might have 
 received our letter. 6.] xoits Tairei- 
 
 vovs, generally, ' those that are low :' 
 ημάς, as belonging to that class. — It was 
 not finding Titus which had given him 
 such uneasiness in Troas, ch. ii. 12. Iv, not 
 ' by,' but 'in,' as the conditional element or 
 vehicle of the consolation. So also in next 
 ver. 7. άλλα και . . . .] ' not only 
 
 .... hut with the comfort with which he 
 was comforted concerning you :' i. e. ' we 
 shared in the comfort which Titus felt in 
 recording to us your desire,' &c. see ver. 13. 
 He rejoiced in announcing the news : we in 
 hearing them. There is no inaccuracy of 
 constr., as De W. supposes. iirvtro- 
 
 θησιν, either longing to see me, or longing 
 to fulfil my wishes. The former is the 
 more simple. οδνρμόν, — ΐπί τι] εττι- 
 
 τιμήαει μου ry εν τι) Tzpuny επιητολγ, as 
 Oecum. ξήλον ΰττέρ Ιμοΰ] The art. is 
 
 omitted after ζηλον, as in των αδελφών 
 μου των συγγενών κατά σάρκα, because 
 the words ζηλον νπερ εμοϋ cohere in the 
 sense, and forms as it were but one, — see 
 Col. i. 4 ; iv. 13 : and Winer, § 19. 2. 
 μάλλον, viz. ' than before, at the mere 
 coming of Titus.' The emphasis is on 
 μάλλον from its position. 8 — 11.] 
 
 He expresses his satisfaction at the effect 
 produced on them, as superseding his 
 former regret that he had grieved them. 
 8.] 'For (reason of the χαρηναι) 
 though I even grieved you in (by means 
 of) my epistle, I do not (now) repent 
 (having written it), though I even did 
 repent it' (before the coming of Titus). 
 Erasm., al., take ii και μετιμ. for ' even
 
 6—10. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 643 
 
 και μΒτίμ6Λομΐ]ν ρλίπω yart οτι ίπιστολη εκίΐνη £ΐ και phTwmi^.' 
 
 g vf/ d*\' ^ " Q" ' ' f/l' = Rom. viii. 
 
 ελυτΓ» 
 
 XV. 32. 
 i rb. vi. 3 reff. 
 j I Cor. iii. 15. 
 
 ίλυπιιθητί, αλλ υτι ' ΐΧυπηθητε ίΐς μετάνοιαν' ίΧυπη- 
 r?r£ γαρ κατά utov, ινα εν μηοίνι ^ ί,ημιωυητί ίίι,ημων. Phiiui. s. 
 η -^αο κατά Uiov λύπη μζτανοιαν εις σωτί/ρίαΐ' iRom.xi. 29 
 αμζταμί\ϊ)τον (ρ^αί,ίται, η ο£ του κόσμου λνπη ϋανατυν ta = Rom. xm. 
 
 — aft βλίττω om γαρ BD' d e Ambrst-ms Aug Bed ν Ambrst ed (et si posniteret 
 [penitet d e; pcenituisset Ambrst-ed] videns quod [video j'/orf d e Ambrst-ms Aug]). 
 {T/te varr arise from attempts to clear the constr, making ti δε και μ. the beginning of 
 a new sentence, and βλέπω, without yap, the apodosis, — or βλέπων κ.τ.λ. a qualifying 
 clause: see also notes.) — ή om Ε (and Mill, appy by mistake). — νμ. ελυπ. FG. — 9. νυν 
 om D' d e (tamen) Syr. — ελυπηβητε 1st to 2iul om 10!). — 10. for αμεταμελητ., αμετα- 
 νοητον 41 Thl-marg : αμελητον Orig, : αμετάβλητοι' Origj : stabilem it ν Ambrst Pacian 
 Pel: t.xt (BCDG &c) Clem Orig, all. — rec κaτεpynζετaι {appy for conformity to the 
 follg : but a distinction seems to have been intended by the Ap : see notes. None read 
 εργ. for the follg κατεργαζ.), with FGJK &c Origj Thdrt Thl Oec : txt BCDE 37 
 (Justin.') Clem Origj Chr-mss DsLtn.— εργάζεται 1st to 2ad om 17. 31. 108'-14-78 Chr. 
 
 supposing I repented it before, tvhich was 
 7iot the case:' Calv., al., think ' verbum 
 pmnitendi improprie positum pro dotorem 
 capere.' The reason of these departures 
 from grammatical constr. and the meaning 
 of words, is, for fear the Ap. should seem 
 to have repented of that which he did 
 under the inspiration of the Holy Spirit. 
 But there is no difficulty, even on the 
 strictest view of inspiration, in conceiving 
 that the xVp. may have afterwards regretted 
 the severity wliich he was guided to use ; 
 we know that Jonah, being directed by 
 inspiration to pronounce the doom of Nine- 
 veh, endeavoured to escape the unwelcome 
 duty : and doubtless Paul, as a man, in the 
 weakness of his affection for the Corin- 
 thians, was tempted to wish that he had 
 never written that which had given them 
 pain. But the result shewed that God's 
 Spirit had ordered it well, that he should 
 thus write ; and this his repentance was 
 repented of again. βλεττω γαρ, κ.τ.λ."] 
 
 ' For I see that that letter, though but 
 for a time, did grieve you.' This seems 
 the only admissible rendering of the words. 
 Chrys. sees in them the reason of ού μετα- 
 με'λομαι, and adds το μεν γαρ λνπηρον 
 βμαχν, το ίε ώφέλιμον διηνεκές. It 
 appears then that he would render ει και 
 προς ωραν, ' if even for a season,' ■=! 
 ' scarcely for any time.' Rinck (lucubr. 
 crit. p. 1(»2) would begin a new sentence 
 with ει κα'ι μετεμελόμην, and jjarenthesizing 
 /3λ6πω .... υμάς, regard νΰν χαίρω, κ.τ.λ. 
 as the apodosis. But this is very unna- 
 tural, with so abrupt a beginning as 1 1 και. 
 It would certainly have been ει ί'ε και : and 
 the present, βλέπω, would give no reason 
 for the past, μετεμελόμην, viluch had jiast 
 away. The best sense, as well as the most 
 
 Τ 
 
 legitimate rendering, is to regard βλέπω . . . 
 ιίμδς as the epe.xegesis of ελύπησα, as 
 above. 9.] vvv, emphatic, as dis- 
 
 tinguishing χαίρω from μετεμελόμην : now 
 that I know not only of your grief, but of 
 its being grief which worked repentance. 
 κατά θ€ο'ν] as Ε. V., ' after a godly 
 sort:' 'with reference to God,' see Rom. 
 (retf.) and note : ' secundum, hie significat 
 sensum animi Deum spectantis et sequen- 
 tis,' Bengel. α'ντη γαρ ή καλή λύπη, ώς 
 τό γι κατ άνθρωπυν λυπείσθαι κακόν. 
 Oecum. Cf. κατά άνθρ(υπυν, 1 Cor. χν. 
 32. ϊνα, κ.τ.λ.] ' in order that ye 
 
 might in nothing he damaged by us :' 
 not εκβατικώς, so that ye did not . . . ., as 
 many Comm. : — the divine purpose of 
 their grief is indicated ; ' God so brought 
 it about, in order that your grief occa- 
 sioned by me might have, not an inju- 
 rious, but a beneficial effect.' 10.] 
 How 'grief according to God' produces 
 such an effect. — ' For grief according 
 to God works (brings about, promotes, 
 see ref.) repentance unto salvation which 
 none will regret.' άρ.€ταρ.ελητον 
 best belongs to σωτηρίαν, as Vulg., Theo- 
 phyl., Aug., Est., Fritzsche, Meyer, De 
 Wette ; not to μετάνοιαν, as most Comm. : 
 — not necessarily however from the position 
 of the words, as Meyer and De Wette main- 
 tain : for what more common than for the 
 predicate of a substantive {εις βάιατον) to 
 be placed between it and a qualifying adjec- 
 tive, — but on account of the sense, and the 
 fact that not άμετανόηταν, but άμεταμέ- 
 λητον is chosen, so that the ])lay in E. V., 
 'repentance not to be repented of does 
 not seem to have been intended. De W. 
 well explains σωτηρία άμεταμελητος — 
 'salvation which none will ever regret' 
 I• 2
 
 6U 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 νιτ. 
 
 ΐϋ• " κατΕΟ-νά^εται. ιδού γαρ ° αυτό " τοΰτο ^ το ^ κατά bcde 
 
 ν li Λ Λ- ' - ' η ' ' " FGJK 
 
 £θΐ' Λυπί)(7ίμ'α( υ^ίΐας ττοσην κaτilpyaσaτo νμιν 
 
 .Sal. ^ (ΐ7Γουοτ/ν, άλλα αττολογιον, άλλα α-γανακτησιν, 
 
 η — Rom. i 
 V. 3al. ch. 
 ίτ.17. 
 
 ο Acts xxiv. 
 15, ί?». ch 
 
 q = Rom. xii. ^ aWa φόβυν, '^ aWa "^ Εττιποθησιν, ' aWa ^ ΖηΧον, 
 r='i r.^r^iii. 2. "" άλλα ''^ ΐκ^Ίκησιν. 'ευ τταντι ^ συνεστησατε εαυτούς 
 
 s-ICorix.3. ^ ^ ^ , - , 19 >' 
 
 n'Ver."on:yt. ^ ajvovQ fiT'ai ^^ TW πραγματί. ^"^ αξ>α 
 
 τ = rer. 7. t- ϊ f/ "Ζ'?»' '^^ 
 
 W R.iin. χϋ. 19 νμιν, ouv Ei^EiCEv του αοικησοντος ονόε 
 
 χ •= ch. vi. 4. iv.Sal. ySeech.vi. 6. yy See 1 Thess. iv. 0. ζ Ear. Med. 267 
 
 » \ ,r , 
 
 ει και ε-γραψα 
 ικησαντος ουόε εινεκεν του 
 
 — for κατίογ., ί-πιφιριι 42. 238. — 11. τοντο om 4 Chr-ms Thl.— ro om 109. — νμας ora 
 {as unnecessary, νμιν occurring below : and to express, as above, the abstract and not 
 the conrrete) BCFG 17 g Anibrst Aug : ins DEJK Inss nrly ^s nrly Clem Bas Chr 
 Thdrt Dam Thl Oec Bed.— κατ/^ργησοΓο D(E.').— bef υμη> ins iv CFG all g ν all Bas 
 Chr Thdrt Till lat-ff {supplemeiitary, to ea;plain the dative): om B(esil)DEJK all d e 
 cojit goth Clem Dam Oec— rec αλλ (last), with C(EK?) &c : t,\t BD'FGJ &c.— rec ins 
 fv bef τω πράγματι {supplementary, as before), with BD^EJK &c vss Chr Thdrt al 
 Anibrst-ms: txt CD'FG 13. 17• 80. 213 gv goth Clem Dam (ro πράγμα in text) 
 Ambrst-ed Pel Bed.— 12. tr om 48.— οι-κ CD(E?) Dam.— fMicf»' (3ce) CDEFGK 72. 
 100 (al .') Chr Dam Thl : txt B?J (1st, not 2nd and 3rd) all Thdrt Oec— for αΰικησαντος, 
 
 having attained, however difficult it may 
 have been to reach, however dearly it may 
 have been bought. ή τ. κόσμου 
 
 λύπη] τι ίέ ίση, κατά κόσμοι/; Ιάν λυ- 
 ττηθϊ/ς ίιά χρήματα, Οιά οόϊ,αν, ίιά τον 
 άπίλθόιτη. Chrys. τοΰ κόσ-μ. is sub- 
 jective : ' the griej felt by the children of 
 this tvorld.' θάνατον] ' Death eter- 
 
 nal,' as contrasted with σωτηρίαν : not 
 ^deadly sickness,' or 'suicide,' as Theophyl. 
 (in part, πάντως μϊν τον -φυχικυν, πο\• 
 λήκ•ις ?i κα\ τον σωματικόν), al. The 
 grief which contemplates nothing but the 
 blow given, and not the God who chastens, 
 can produce nothing but more and more 
 alienation from Him, and result in eternal 
 banishment from His presence. — So that 
 Ιργάζ. is rather ' works,' ' contributes to,' 
 and κοτ£ργάζ., ' works out,' ' results in.' 
 
 11.] The blessed effects of godly 
 grief on themselves, as shewn by fact. 
 
 αύτο τοΰτο, ' this very thing,' ' rf 
 which I have been speaking.' σττον- 
 
 δήν, ' earnestness,' as contrasted with your 
 former carelessness in the matter. 
 αλλά] nay, not σπονδήν merely, — that is 
 saying too little ; — ' hut . . .' όττολο- 
 
 γίαν] viz. to Paul by means of Titus, — 
 asserting their innocence in the matter ; see 
 below. άγανάκτησιν] προς τον πε- 
 
 πορίίνκότα. Theophyl. φοβον] ' ne 
 
 cum virga venirem,' Bengel : fear of Paul : 
 not here of God. The context is brought 
 out well by Chrys. and Theophyl. The 
 latter says, on έτη-ιτοθησιν, — πμος ίμέ. 
 ίίπων ci φοβον, ίνα μη ίόί^ ανθη'ΤίΊν, 
 συντόμως ίιω^θωσατυ, £ΤΓηΓθθησιν (ΐπων 
 Όπιρ iv^mcriKiv άγάπιις, nvic ί'ζονσίας. 
 
 ξήλον] 071 God's behalf, to punish 
 
 the offender ; — εκδίκησιν being the inflic- 
 tion of justice itself. — Bengel remarks, that 
 the six accusatives preceded by αλλά fall 
 into three pairs : άπολογ. and άγανάκτ., 
 relating to their own feelings of .shame, — 
 00/3. and ίπιπόθ. to Paul, — ζηλ. and έκ- 
 οίκ., to the offender. ev ιταντί must 
 
 be understood only of participation of guilt : 
 by their negligence, and even refusal to 
 humble themselves (1 Cor. v. 2), they had 
 in some things made common cause with 
 the offender. Of this, now that they had 
 shewn so difterent a spirit, the Ap. does not 
 speak. σννίστήσατε] ' have com- 
 
 mended yourselves by proving that ye 
 are ;' a pregnant constr. τω irp., the 
 
 dat. of regard : see Rom. vi. 20 and Winer, 
 § 31. 3. — 'the matter,' — perhaps, as in 
 ref., not only, ' of which I have been speak- 
 ing,' — but with allusion to the kind of sin 
 which was in question. άγνοΰς, 'pure 
 
 of stain.' 12.] He sheu-s them that 
 
 to bring out this zeal in them was the real 
 motive of his writing to them, and no pri- 
 vate considerations. άρα, ' accord- 
 ingly,' — ' in accordance with the result just 
 mentioned.' «l και «γραψα ΰμ. is 
 parallel with fi και ΙΧΰπησα υμάς, ver. 8, 
 — ' though (i. e. assumed that) I wrote 
 (severely) to you.' — The αδικηθείς would 
 be the father of the incestuous person, who 
 ■γυναίκα τοΰ πατρός ηχίν, 1 Cor. v. 1. 
 — Theodoret imagines it to mean the step- 
 mother, who was the adulteress ; and thinks 
 that the father was dead. But there is no 
 ground for this in 1 Cor. v., and the mas- 
 culine participle, though not decisive against 
 it, is at least more naturally explained on 
 the other view. Others (as Wolf, Bleek,
 
 11—15. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 645 
 
 εΐ'ωτΓίον του Όίου. 
 
 ' α^ικηθίντος, αλλ ύνίΚίν τοιι ^ φαλ'ερωθηναι την 
 δην νμων την υπίο ημών προς υμάς 
 
 δ(ά τούτο '^ παρακζκΧημίθα. '' επι οε 
 ημών * ττεοισσοτεοοίς μαΧΧον ε^^αρημίν 
 
 Ύί 
 
 τ\1 
 
 d 
 
 τταοα 
 
 κ\ησί 
 
 ετΓί 
 
 = ch.ii. 14. 
 
 iii. a, ttic. 
 
 constr., here 
 c.iily. 
 I = Rom. xiv. 
 
 -l-h. i. 4 
 
 ITOV, OTi 
 
 14 
 
 νμων 
 
 αναπετταυται το πνίνμα αυτού απο πάντων ^ 
 ΟΤΙ ύ τι ' αυτο) υπέρ υμών 
 
 II γαοα d-Actsxiv. 
 
 /^ *• 3. ch. i. !Ι λ\. 
 ch i. K'reff. 
 doublti eom- 
 
 κεκαυχί/μαί, ου ?ίΥ3βί"ρι,π. 
 
 ^ καττ)σνύΐ'θί)ΐ^, αλλ ώς πάντα ΐν αΧηθεια ίΧαΧησαμεν fv 
 ύ^Π', ούτως και η ^ καν^ησις υμών η επι Τίτου αΧηθεια ^^l^luu. 
 
 23. 
 ■r. 7. 
 I Cor. xvi. 
 
 ΐyεvη 
 
 ηθη. 
 
 i constr , cb,ix.2. xii. ft. 
 1 gen. = Acts xxiii. 3(1 refT. 
 
 λ/ Ϊ -, Q / i:'. Luke is. 
 
 ay^^^va αυτού περισσοτερως άά- acisu. 
 
 j Rum. τ. 5. ix. 33. χ. 11 a!. k = 1 Cor. xv. 31. (Rom.'ili. 27 refi.) 
 
 m =• 1 Cor. i. 30. η = ch. vi. 12. ο ch. i. 12 refl'. 
 
 αδικήματος 19.55. — αΰικηθ. ovdi s. τ. αΰικησαντ. D'E. — αλλ ovSe Β 37- 73. — τβοημοιν 
 την νπ(ο νμων {altern fr07n misunderstanding : see notes), with Β .' &c ν ^oth al Chr 
 Thdrt alAmbrst al {νμ. τ. νπ. νμ. D'F d' : ημ. τ. υπ. ημ. Gg) : txt CD^JK all (60 or 
 more, Tisch) e copt syrr aeth al Dam Oec-text. — προς νμ. {η μ. 120. 21H) om ν Syr ar- 
 erp arm seth Ambrst Pel. — (νωπ. τ. θ. om Clir. — 13. rec places £ε aft πεηισσοτιρως 
 {apjiy to conform to the εχαρημ(ν em below, by joining -αρακικλ. επι: then also the 
 change of ΐ]μ. into νμ. became necessary) with mss aeth al Chr-text Oec : txt 
 BCDEFGJK 10. 36-9. 46. 68. 80. 109-14-16-17 lect 13 it ν syrr ar-erp copt Chr-comm 
 (and Mtt's mSj) Dam (has εττειδ,) for επι ΐε) Thl> lat-ff: om :i2-6-9. 71 Thdrt.— rec 
 νμων {see above), with FJ &c copt syr al Chr Thdrt al Bed : txt BCDEGK 3. 17- 23. 
 33. 115 itv Syr ar-erp seth arm goth Ambrst Pel. — ττερισσοτεμυν C (appy) Thdrt.— for 
 χάρη, παρονσια 36. 113-marg (.«ee ver 6). — for το πν.,τα σττλαγχνη Chr (comm expr). 
 — for απο παντ., απάντων 109. — 14. κίκανχ. νπερ νμ. FG g Chr Till. — άλλα C. — for 
 ■πάντα, παντυτε CFG copt syr (g has both) Chr. — υμιν εν αλ. ε\α\. CDE d e ν goth : 
 ελαΧησα 93. — η bef κανχ. om 93. — rec ημών {prob a corrn, see note), with DEGJK &c 
 (C micert) vss fF: txt B(C.')F al copt al Thl.— bef επι, om i) Β Thl (Mtt's mss,).— προς 
 
 al.), suppose ΡαΐΐΙ himself to be meant, 
 which however would be in direct contra- 
 diction to ch. ii. 5 : Bengel, al., the Corin- 
 thians, ' singularis pro plurah, per euphe- 
 mian,' which is forced : Theophyl., al., both 
 the persons concerned ( — αμφότεροι yap 
 άλλίιλονς ήίικησαν) : — and Neander, al., 
 take τον (ΐεικηθέΐ'Τος&5 =: τηϊι αδικήματος, 
 ' the fault committed :' — which however 
 would not be true, for the Ap. certainly did 
 write 071 account of the committal of the 
 fault. — It would be easy for any of the 
 Ap.'s adversaries to maintain that the re- 
 proof had been administered from private 
 and interested motives. αλλ' civcKev 
 
 . . .] But he ivrote, in order to bring out 
 their zeal on his behalf (i. e. to obey his 
 command), ajid make it manifest to them- 
 selves in God's sight. The other reading, 
 ήμώΐ' την νπερ υμών, has been an altera- 
 tion owing to not understanding τ. σπονδ. 
 ύμ. τ. ΰπ. »//!., and is inconsistent with the 
 fact: it was not to exhibit to them his zeal for 
 them that he wrote, but to make manifest 
 to {προς, ' among,' ' chez') them, to bring 
 out among them, their zeal to regard and 
 obey him. 13.] ' On this account 
 
 (on account of the fulfilment of this jiur- 
 pose) we are comforted : but in addition 
 to (or, on the occurrence of) our comfort, 
 
 •we rejoiced very raueh more (reff.) at the 
 joy of Titus, because his spirit has been 
 refreshed by you all. ' A similar declara- 
 tion to that in ver. 7. where not only the 
 arrival of Titus, but his comfort wherewith 
 he was comforted by them, is described as 
 the ground of the Ap.'s joy. — According to 
 the received reading, the sense is : ' There- 
 fore we are consoled on account of your 
 consolation {either gen. subj., 'that which 
 you feel on account of the good issue of the 
 affair,' — or gen. object., ' the consolation 
 received from you ') : but ive rejoiced very 
 mnch more,' &c. This however would 
 hardly represent the real state of things. 
 14.] This increased joy was produced by 
 the verification which my former boasting 
 of you to Titus now received. ei 
 
 Ti . .] see one particular in which he boasted 
 of them, ch. ix. 2. ox» καττ)σχ.] 'I 
 
 was not shamed,' viz. by being shewn, on 
 Titus's coming to you, to have boasted in 
 vain. αλλ' ώς . . •] ' But truthjnlness 
 
 was shewn to be my constant rule of speech, 
 to whomsoever I sjioke.' -' But as we 
 spoke {generally, not merely in our teach- 
 ing, as Theodoret, al.) all things in truth 
 (truthfully) to you, SO also our boasting 
 concerning you (gen. obj. : — the rec. ήμων 
 agrees better with the comparison, of ' 0!/r
 
 646 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 Λ^Ι. 16. 
 
 ρ — Eph. i. 8. 
 
 iii.2. ch.Tiii. 
 
 14 refl•. 
 q 1 Cor. iv. 17 
 
 rrff. 
 Γ Kom. i. S reff 
 s = Mrtrk iii. Γι. 
 
 1 Chr.in. 
 
 sxrx. 22. 
 t 1 C.ir. ii. 3. 
 u i-h. vi. 3 reff. 
 V ch. V, 6 rfff. 
 w 1 Cor. xii. 3. 
 
 XV. 1 al. 
 X 1 C'.ir. i. 4 
 
 reff. w. ei•, 
 
 ver. Itl. ch. 
 
 i.22. 
 y Rom. V. 4 
 
 reft: 
 } 55. 2. 
 
 16 
 
 αναμιμνησκομίρου την πάντων υμών bcde 
 
 ;ασ(/ε αυτόν. 
 
 ίΐς υμάς εστίν 
 
 ύπακοην, ως ^ μίτά *' φόβου και * τξ)όμου 
 Λ/α'ιρω, ΟΤΙ " ευ τταντι ^ θαρρώ εν υμιν 
 
 VIII. 
 
 1 
 
 του 
 δο 
 
 νιας, 
 
 εου 
 
 2 
 
 ΤνωρΊ^ομεν δε ύ/ιαν, αδελφοί, Τ7)ΐ' " χά|θΐν 
 την " δεδομεντ/ν εν ταις εκκλησιαις της Ma/ce- 
 οτί εν τΓολλτ] 
 
 ε7Γε|0(σσει>σεν εις το πλούτος της 
 
 ϋοκιμη " θλίψεο»ς tj ^ περισσεία 
 
 της ναρας αυτών καΐ η "* κατά βάθους τττω-^Ηα αυτών 
 
 λουτος της αττΧοτητος αυτών, 
 
 ι here only. Sfrabo ix. 41P. Winer. 
 r. d Roin. xii. 8 reff. 
 
 TiTov DEFG al vss (ad v) Dam. — 16. rec aft χαφω, ins ovv (for connexion), with 
 many mss (Scholz, but qu ?) : om (B?)CDEFGJK all vss gr-lat-flf. — for εν νμ., νμιν 
 74. 120 79 : ίΐς νμας lect 3. 
 
 Chap. VIII. 1. -^νωριΐω 47. 73. 80. 93. 1081-9-14-22-77• 219 al lectt harl arm seth 
 ar-pol Chr Thdrt Sedul : add μίν 48^ — is om 109. — 2. for Trtcnactia, ττιριονσια 115. — 
 χαμίτος avTMv G?"• 219• al : χάριτος νμων 29. — κατά βαθύς D' al Thdrt. — rec τον 
 ττλουτον, with DEFGJK &c : txt BC 17• 31. — for απλοί-., χρηστότητας 37- — 3. rec VTTfp 
 Svv. {explanatory r/loas on τταρα : or conformation to ch. i. 8), with J Κ &c if : txt BCDEFG 
 17. 45-6 (al ?) : add αντων Syr syrf arm. — αυθαιρ. om arm Chr-ms {αφθ/ηρίτυι J Scholz). 
 — 4. ημών om 67- arm Ambrst-ed : nostram Ambrst-ed : υμωΐ' 48. 61 219 ar-pol : roffO 
 vos aetli. — πυλλ. της πηρακλ. C (appy). — rec at end add δίζασβαι ημάς {sup/ilemen/ari/ 
 gloss), with a few mss {^οθίίσηα jj/iii' arm), but om BCDEFGJK most mss vss gr-lat-fl". — 
 5. ηλπικαμίν Β 80 : txt CDEFGJK &c ff.—a\Xa CD' 219.— όίίωκασι 80.— πρωτω 
 
 words ' in general, with ' onr boasting ' in 
 particular : but on that very account it is 
 probably an alteration : and this is the im- 
 plied meaning at all events) before Titus 
 was (was proved to be : was, as shewn by 
 proof) truth.' De W. suggests that the 
 Ap. had described (by anticipation) to Titus 
 in glowing terms the affection and probable 
 prompt obedience of the Corr. as an en- 
 couragement to his somewhat unwelcome 
 journey. 15.] enlarges άλήθ^α tyt- 
 
 νηβη. — ' And his heart is more abun- 
 dantly (turned) toward you, remembering 
 as he does the obedience of you all, how 
 (i.e. which was shewn in the fact, that) 
 with fear and trembling ye received 
 him.' ' Fear and trembling,' i.e. ' lest ye 
 should not pay enough regard to my in- 
 junctions, and honour enough his mission 
 from me.' 16.] ' I rejoice (more ex- 
 
 pressive than with a connecting particle) 
 that in every thing I am (re) assured by 
 you :' ' am of good courage, in contrast to 
 my former dejection, owing to your good 
 conduct.' The ordinary rendering, ' / can 
 have confdeiice in you,' is wrong in not 
 giving the indie, θιφρώ, and still more, in 
 making θαρρΰν tv mean ' to hare confi- 
 dence in,' which is unexampled. Meyer, 
 who remarks this, does not notice, that 
 the strongest reason against it is not 
 mere want of usage, but the psycholo- 
 gical meaning of θσρρην, which is not 
 like ττεποιθίναι, descriptive of a relative, 
 but of an absolute state of mind, — ' to 
 
 be of good courage :' and this admits 
 only of cjualification as to the ground of 
 that good courage ; thus we have Oopptlv 
 vTTip, TTtpi, twi, in the sense of ' rejoicing 
 at,' 'feeling confident concerning:' but 
 θορρΐϊν £v for ' to trust in,' as ττίποιθί- 
 vai tv, would, I think, be inadmissible. 
 Meyer quotes tf σοι -πάσ iyuiyt σώζομαι, 
 Soph. Aj. 519, where, as here, iv gives the 
 ground of the verb as in the person spoken 
 of. 
 
 Chap. VIII. 1— IX. 15.] Second part 
 
 OF THE Epi.STLE : CONCKRNING THE COL- 
 LECTION FOR THE SAINTS. 1^6.] He 
 
 itiforms them of the readiness of the Mace- 
 donian churches to contribute for the poor 
 saints {at Jerusalem), which led him also 
 to beg of Titus to complete the collection 
 at Corinth. See some interesting geo- 
 graphical and historical notices in Stanley's 
 introduction to this section, vol. ii. pp. 144 
 — 6. 1.] 8e is transitional, — pass- 
 
 ing on to new matter : so 1 Cor. vii. I ; 
 viii. 1 al. fr. χάριν] For every good 
 
 gift and frame of mind comes by divine 
 grace, not by human excellency : and this 
 occasion was most opportune for resting the 
 liberality of the Macedonian churches on 
 God's grace, that he might not be extolling 
 them at the expense of the Corinthians, 
 but holding out an example of the effusion 
 of that grace, which was common to the 
 Corr. also, if they sought and used it. — It 
 is a mistake, with Orig., Erasm., al., to 
 understand Ιμοί or ήμίν after δεδομένην
 
 Yin. ι— ι 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 647 
 
 υτι ^ κατά ^υναμιν μαρτυρώ και ^ τταρα ^νναμιν, ^^^^l^■^^^■^'^■ 
 aυθatpeτoι, '^ ' μετά πολλής ^ παρακλησίως ^εόμενοι coi.iv.il; 
 Ί]μων τΊ]ν yapiv και Tr]v κοινωνιαν της διακονίας της παρ. a^. 
 εις τους '' α-νίους, και ου καθώς ηλττ'ισαμεν, αλλ' εαυτούς Thacyd!m. 
 
 •'5' - " ' ^'-α'^^η\' η-^^ See Luke 
 
 έδωκαν πρώτον τω κυριω και ημιν ^ δια θελήματος θεού, |'',j„.Vv.o. 
 
 6γ* ^ Λ' '-rp' Γ/ α^ & ' Hfb. xi. 11. 
 
 εις το παρακαλεσαι ημάς Ιιτον, ινα καϋως προενηρ- p.s.cxxxiv.5. 
 
 ν- „ ^ t ' Λ / . r - « ν U / hver.l7oulyt. 
 
 c,aTO, όντως και επιτεΛεση εις υμάς και την -ναοιν Exod χχχν. 
 
 . -... ί=<= A,i5 Sym. -τως, 
 
 ' 7 UU ' Λ Λ ' " ν » > W / / ο Marc vi ig 
 
 ταυτην. αΛΛ ωςπερ εν π αντί περισσεύετε, ττιστεί i = ch »ύ κί 
 
 Νχ-\/ >.>; ' < / V ^~ \ ~ ty k= Rom.xii. 8. 
 
 και Λoyω και -γνώσει και πάση σπουδή και τη εί i-Actsxxv.a. 
 νμων ^ εν ημιν α-γαπ^, Ίνα και εν ταυττι rrj " vootri "^η.''*"'^' '''■ 
 
 W / 8'a •' '•λ' >•νΛ\Λ>-.ο = Rom. XV. 
 
 περισσενητε, ου κατ επιτα^ην λέγω, αΑλα δια της sn. ch ix. 
 
 ρ = Act.s ix. ISrcff. q Rom. xv. 32 reff. r = ch. vii. 3. Feb. xi. 3. s ver. 10 only +. (ναρχ., 
 
 GhI. iii. 3. Phil. i. 6. t Rom. xv. 28. ch. vii. 1. 1 Kings iii 12. α = 1 Cor. xvi. 3. ver. 19. 
 
 uo = Mark xri. 7. Luke vii. 7. Acts ix. ii. x. 20. xsvi. l(i. τ ch. vi. 3, 4 reft'. w = 1 Cor. xv 
 
 S8. X I Cor. i. 5. (viii. 1.) ych. vii. Ual. ζ = (John xvii. 26 ?) 1 John iv. 9. 
 
 a Rom. xvi. 26 refl'. 1 Cor. vii. 6. 
 
 238. — aft iciit, ins υστ(ξ>ον arm : deinde it ν Ambrst Pelag. — 6. for εις το, ωςη 3. 35 
 Chr Thl. — ημάς om 115 arm: νμας T2-4. 120 al. — ίνηρζατο Β : «rat ίνηρζ.αΐ: προί;οξ. 
 al : προςίνηιιΚατο 48: add iv νμιν f»G-marg Chr (test) Thl (omg {ΐς νμ. below). — 
 ίπιτίΧίσίΐ J al. — £ΐς ημάς 72. — και om 93 — 7. ττίρισπίνητί C Chr. — κ. πασ. σπυνδ. 
 cm 108'.— ίξ ημών (ν νμ. Β 31-7• 73-4. 80. 238 copt (fi/ νμ. t£ /;.) Syr arm al Origint 
 {nostra in vos) Ambrst-ms {in nobis et vobis) : tv ημιν om Chr: txt CDEFGJK most 
 mss vss fF. — τη om 238. — ττίοισσίυσητε D'(E.')FG. — 8. Sta την it. σπουοι^ν DE : 
 
 ' quemadmodum adfuerit mihi Deus in 
 ecclesiis :' see the constr. CiCovai iv, in 
 refF. : — ' given among,' ' shed abroad in,' 
 the churches of Macedonia. 2.] ' how 
 
 that (depends on -γνωρΊζομίν) in much 
 proof of tribulation (though the}" were put 
 to the proof by much tribulation) (was) 
 the abundance of their joy (i.e. their joy 
 abounded),— and their deep poverty {κα-ά 
 βάθους, lit. 'down into the depth,' as καθ' 
 6\ov, 'throughout the whole') abounded 
 to (' abunde cessit in,' as Meyer, &c. or 
 rather perhaps, ' abounded,' produced 
 abundant fruit, ' so as to bring about ' 
 . . . .) the riches {-o ττλ. the riches which 
 have actually become manifest by the re- 
 sult of the collection) of their liberality ' 
 (see Rom. xii. 8, and note). 3 — 5.] 
 
 Proof of this. There is no difficulty, and 
 no elli]isis, in the constr. ' For according 
 to their power, I testify, and beyond 
 their power, voluntarily, with much 
 exhortation beseeching of us the grace 
 and fellowship of the ministry to the 
 saints (i. e. to allow them a share in that 
 grace and fellowship), and not as we ex- 
 pected (i. e. far beyond our expectation), 
 but themselves they gave first (i. e. above 
 all : as the inducing motive : not first in 
 point of time, but in point of impiirtanre, 
 see Ilora. ii. 9, 10) to the Lord, and to us 
 by the will of God ' (the Giver of grace, 
 who made them willing to do this : nit =: 
 κατά τΰ θί\. τ. θ., which only ea:'2)resses 
 
 [whatever it may imply], consonance trifk 
 the divine will : δια τον θίλ. τ. θ. makes 
 the divine will the agent). 6.] ' So 
 
 that we besought Titus (not, Titus be- 
 sought us, see ver. 17), that (the aim, and 
 purport as well, of our request), as he had 
 previously (before the JMacedonians begun 
 to contribute : ' during his visit from which 
 he had now returned ') begun it, so also 
 he would complete among you (the 
 constr. is pregnant — tAOj/ κ'ς- υμάς και 
 iTTiTtXintj) this grace also' (this act of 
 grace or mercy, reft'. — καί, — as well as 
 other things which he had to do among 
 them. It does not belong to ταΰτην, ' this 
 grace also, as well as other graces,' but to 
 την χάιην τα iirijv altogether). 7 — 15.] 
 
 Erhortations and inducements to perform 
 this act of charity. 7.] άλλιί marks 
 
 the transition to an exhortation, as in reff. 
 It at the same time imphes, as Herm. ad 
 Viger, p. 812 (in Meyer), ' satis argumen- 
 torum allatum esse.' ττίστίΐ, see ch. 
 
 i. 24. λόγω κ. γνώσει, see 1 Cor. i. 5 ; 
 
 viii. 1. τίάση σττουίτ/, because (Τττου^)} 
 
 may be manifold even in a good sen.se. 
 Grot, well explains it, ' stuiiium ad agendas 
 res bonas.' τη e| υμ,. €v ήμ. οϊγ.] 
 
 'your love to us;' 'the love which, 
 arising from you, has us for its object :' 
 see reff. According to tlie reading, ίξ 
 ημών tv νμ., the only meaning agreeing 
 with the context is, ' the love (to God and 
 man) which, arising from our teaching, is
 
 648 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 FGJK 
 
 17 phii.iv. ίτίρων ' στΓουοης, και το της νμίτ(ρας α-γαπης -γνησιον bcde 
 
 3. ITim.i. ^. η / γ () , '/ \\/ - ,<_ 
 
 1-' Tit i 4 οοκιμαί,(ι)ν ' (γίνωσκετε yap την γ^α^ϊΐν του κυρίου ημών 
 cRom^'xiv. 22 iij^ou ν^ιστου, ΟΤΙ ΟΙ Όμας ' επτωνευσεν ττλουσίος ων, 
 
 reff. ,/ r - - . ί e ' f Λ ' \ ' f! ' 
 
 d here only. ti'a νμίΐο Tij εκιείί'ου πτωνεία 7ΓΛουτ77σηΓε) /cai -^νωμην 
 
 - Judges vi. ^ ' in-r-i ι 
 
 ^OMxxv^iil'a; f τοντω δί'δω^ιι. τοΰτο yOjO ύ^απ' ' συμφίρίΐ, ' οΊτο'ες• ου 
 
 Prov. xxiii. r \ - ' Λ λ *■ * ^ Ω'\ k ' ίΤ fl 
 
 21. Tobitiv. juovov TO ΤΓοιησαι αλΧα και το uiAeiv προίνηρί,ασυζ 
 
 e ver. 2 reff. 
 h 1 Cor. vi. 12. 
 
 flCor. iv. 8. Rev. iii. 17. (Lukexii21) 
 i =• Acts X. 41, 47. xiii. 32, 43. Rom. i. 2Γι al. 
 
 Κ = 1 Cor. i. 10 refl'. w. όιίωΜ'> vii. 25. 
 k ver. 6. 
 
 ^jrfi7;/cr it goth Aug Ambrst. — ημίτιρας 23. 72. 115-22 lect 8. — for αγάπης, σπον5ης 
 17. 115 άΙ— γνήσιοι: 80.— δοκιμάζω D'FG Clir (Mtt's ms').— 9. χριστ. om Β (Ambri) : 
 ιησ. χρ. om Clir.— 5t ημάς CK 19. 23. 37. 41. 55. Gl. 14. 8<). 93. 109-15-17. 238 lect 13 
 Orig Chr Thdrt^ Dam Augi Paulin. — νμεις is aft τττωχΗη in D'EFG it Ambrst al. — 
 πλοντισητί 0. — νμ(ΐς and πλουτησωμεν 19 41. 55. 74- 93 (al ?) Orig (appy) Chr (text) 
 Tlidrt (somct) Ath Theoph-alex some lat-ff. — 10. for οιτηης, on FG g Syr. — το θελ. 
 and TO τΓοιησ. are inverted in Syr ar-erp : τω ποι. and τω θελ. Chr: του ποι. 109. — 
 ενηρξασθε D'FG Orig. — περσν D^FG : om aith. — 11. τοντο ττοιησαι 26 : το) ττ. it ν 
 
 planted in you.^ ϊνα και, fc.r.X.] the 
 
 sense is impei"aiive, — κελεύω, or βονλομαι, 
 — (or βΧίττετε, see 1 Cor. xvi. 10,) — being 
 omitted. So Soph. CEd. Col. 156, άλλ' 
 'i}'a τψ5' if (Ίφθεγκτψ μι) προς-ττίσ^ς 
 νάπει. See Hartung, Partikellehre, ii. 
 148, 9. ταύτη is emphatic here, 
 
 although ταίιτην is not in ver. 6: ^ this 
 grace also;' — other graces having been 
 enumerated. — Grotius remarks, ' non ig- 
 noravit Faulus artem rhetorum, movere 
 laudando.' 8.] Lest his last words 
 
 should be misunderstood, he explains the 
 spirit in which they were said : not as a 
 command, but by way of inducement, by 
 mention of the earnestness of others, and 
 to try the genuineness of their love. 
 κατ' ίτΓίτ.] not, 'in consequence of a com- 
 mand from God,' as Dr. Burton, — but, 'by 
 way of command ' (ref. 1 Cor.). δια 
 
 της is not = δια την, ' by occasion of,' as 
 E. v.: — but treats the ετέρων σπονδή as 
 the instrument by which, in the way of 
 emulation, the effect was to be produced. — 
 The participial constr. is as in 1 Cor. iv. 14. 
 9.] Expl. of ' trying the genuine- 
 ness of your love,' by upholding His ex- 
 ample in the matter, Whom we ought to 
 resemble. τ. χάριν, ' the (act of) 
 
 grace :' ' tlie beneficence.' δτι] 
 
 ' consisting in this, that ' . . . . irX. 
 
 ών] The part, refers to the time when the 
 historic act implied in the aorist επτώχενσεν 
 took place. ' He, being rich, became 
 poor:' — not, as De W., merely by His 
 renunciation of human riches during His 
 life on earth, but by His exinanilion of His 
 glory (Phil. ii. 6, 7) when, as Athanas. 
 (cited by Dr. Burton), ti)v πτωχενσασαν 
 φνσιν ti' εαντφ άΐ'ελάβετο. — The stress is 
 on δι' υμάς, to raise the motive of gratitude 
 the more effectually in them. τη «κ. 
 
 τΓτωχ. ιτλουτήσητί] ' that by His poverty 
 (as the efficient cause) ye might be rich :' 
 viz. with the same wealth in which He was 
 rich, — the kingdom and glory of Heaven, 
 including τά μυρία άπερ παρίσχιν ήμΐν 
 αγαθά, as Chrys. : who adds, ει μη πισ- 
 τεύεις, ΟΤΙ ή πτωχεία πλούτου εστί ποιη- 
 τική, εννόησαν συυ τον δεσπότην, και 
 ούκέτι άμφιβαλεΙς. See the various pos- 
 sible meanings discussed in Stanley's note. 
 10.] ver. 9 was parenthetic : 
 he now resumes the ov κατ' επιταγήν 
 λέγω .... ' And I give my opinion 
 in this matter,' the stress being on 
 γνώμη V, as distinguished from επιταγής. 
 τοϋτο γαρ . . . .] ' For this (viz. 
 ' my giving my opinion, and not command- 
 ing,' — as Billroth and Meyer. De Wette 
 controverts this, and would make τοϋτο 
 refer to the proof of their love in the act of 
 charity, contending that rof;ro must refer to 
 the same as εν τούτψ. But Meyer rightly 
 answers that this need not be, for iv τούτψ 
 is altogether unemphatic and insignificant, 
 and the whole sense of the clause is in the 
 words γνώμην δίδωμι) is expedient for 
 you (better than " befitting," or '^ suitable," 
 as suggested by Bloomf. after the Schol. 
 αρμόζει, πυνψδει. This sense of συμφίρει 
 is not found in the N. T., and is very 
 doubtful elsewhere. See Palm and Rost's 
 Lex.), seeing that you ('quippe qui;' 
 οϊτη ες is decisive for the above meaning of 
 τοϋτο. ' My giving my opinion, rather 
 than commanding, is expedient for you, 
 who have already shewn yourselves so 
 willing.' A command from me would be a 
 lowering of you, and depreciation of your 
 zeal) begun before them (the Macedonian 
 churches, see below) not only the act, but 
 also the mind to act, from a year ago :' 
 i. e. ' not only were you before them in the
 
 9—14. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 649 
 
 ατΓΟ ΤΓίουσι νυνι όε και το ττοιησαι ίπιηλεσατε, ich.ix.s 
 
 η fl/ < ο η ' 00 - Λ/Λ " ^ ' onlvt. προ 
 
 Οπως καυατηρ η ττροϋυμια τον σίλειν, ούτως και το ^^c""'' 
 ίΤΓίτίλεσοι ^ f/c τοϋ εχείν. ^" εί -γαρ η ° ττξίοθυμία '' ττ/οόκει- m«^'."ree•. 
 ται, iCfit/o εαν εντ? ευττροςοεκίΓος, ου κασο ουκ εγε/. r<^ff• 
 
 ,„,^,,'>-' ,' ' Λ. ο Acts xvii. 11. 
 
 ^3 ο^ γαρ ίνα άλλοις ' ανεσις, νμίν δε θλίφις, ^^ ^χχ' " ^ξ rx.VLf,•. 
 
 χ » ' » - - - ν t _ ^. , ^.y . Sir slv.23. 
 
 ίσοΓίίΓος, εν τω νυν καιρώ το υμών περίσσευμα £ΐς no int. aft. 
 TO εκείνων υστέρημα, iva και το εκείνων περίσσευμα Γί?"Ί 
 
 / » vf-w'' " / χ'' p=Juhniii.34. 
 
 "γενηται εις το υμών υστέρημα, όπως "γενηται ' ισοτης, q H<;b. νΐ. is. 
 
 Jurle 7 only. Levit. xxiv. 7 al. r Rom. viii. 2R. 1 Pet. iv. 13 only. Levit. ix. 5 vat. ' ' s Rom. 
 
 xv.lrtrtff. t Acts xxiv. 2.S reO'. α = 1 Cor. vii. ii. cli. ix. 7. ν epp., here oiilv. Matt, 
 
 xii. 34. IJL. Mark viii. 8 only. Eccles ii. 15. vv = Rom. iij. 22. Gal. iii. 14. w 1 Cor. xf i. 17 rcff. 
 
 X Col. iv. 1 only. Jobxxxci. 29. 
 
 Chr Aug Pel. — επίπλίσατε aeth Chr. — ro θεΧειν D^ : εκ τον OiX.Chr. — του επιτελ. 123 
 it ν lat-ff. — 12. αν D'GJ Chr-mSi Dam. — rec aft ίχη ins τις {supplementary addn), with. 
 C'J &c : txt {εχεί BJ 71• 89. 91-2. 109-14-15 lect 13) BC'DEFGJK 10. 17- 39. 46. 71. 
 1 16-17 it V goth al Clem gr-lat-ff : ins bef εχη 73. 80 al : τι 55. 112.— aft έχει, ins τις 
 DEFG g: ov . . . ίχει om aeth. — 13. ανεσιν θέλω and θλιψίί/ arm. — it om BC 17• 33-5. 
 80 d 6 aeth {et vobin copt).— 14. αλλ to καιοω om Chr : εν τ. v. καφ. om Jar. — vvv ora 
 FG^ g-. — aft iva, ins γειηται ισοτης εν τω vvv καιρώ Chr. — γενηται (1st) om 74 Chr. 
 — aft ισοτ)]ς ins ij^ τω vvv καιρώ Chr. — 15. ό (2nd) om FG 80. 93. lOG-14-15-22. 238 
 
 deed itself, but also in the will to do it.' — 
 The sense has been missed by many of the 
 Comm., from not observing the comparison 
 implied in 'π•ρο6νήρ|ασθ€, and applying it 
 only to the (Jorr. themselves beginning. 
 In that case, as the will comes before the 
 deed, to say, you begun not only to do, hut 
 also to will, would be unmeaning. Some, 
 in consequence, as Grot., al., and the 
 Peschito, have arbitrarily assumed an in- 
 version of terms, so that ' non solum facere, 
 sed velle' should =: ' non solum velle, sed 
 facere.' Others, as Chrys., Theodoret, al., 
 Erasm., Calv., Beza, al., Billroth, Olsh., 
 Riickert, al. m., have taken ΟέλΕΐΐ' = ' to 
 do ivith a good will,' which is certainly not 
 its sense in ver. 11. The above espl. is 
 that of Cajetan, Estius, De Wette, Winer, 
 Meyer, and Wieseler, and puts the climax 
 in its right order, making it a backward one 
 of comparison. For as Wieseler remarks 
 (Chron. Apost. Zeit. p. 3fJ4, note), there 
 are three steps in the collection for the 
 saints, — the wishing it (θίΧειν), the setting 
 about it (ττοιησηι), and the completion of 
 it {ϊπιτ(\ίσαι). And the Corr. had begun 
 not only the second, but even the first of 
 these, before the Macedd. Long employed 
 as they had then been in the matter, it was 
 more creditable to them to receive advice 
 from the Αρ., than command. — " θβ'λίΐν 
 is not a historic act like ττοιήσαι, but a 
 permanent state: hence the pros, inf." 
 Meyer. — In saying οίττο τΓ€ρυσι 'from last 
 year,' it seems probable that I'aul would 
 speak as a Jew, regarding the year as 
 beginning in Tisri. 11.] ' But (con- 
 
 trast of your former zeal with your present 
 
 need to be reminded of it) now complete 
 the act itself also {καΊ can hardly apply to 
 the whole ro ττοι. εττιτ., as De \Vette, but 
 must be taken with ττοιΓ/σοι ; now shew 
 not only the completion of a ready will ia 
 the act begun, but complete the act also, — 
 as Meyer), that, as (there was) (with 
 you) readiness of will, so (there may) 
 also (be) completion according to your 
 means (έκ τον εχ€ΐν, not ' out of that 
 which ye have,' as E. Y., but ' after the 
 measure of your property,' as in ref. The 
 verbs substantive must be supplied, as 
 in ver. 13'. 12.] Expl. of £κ τοΰ 
 
 £χ£ΐν, — that on it, ττοοθνμία being pre- 
 supposed, and not on absolute quantity, 
 acceptability depends.—' For if a willing 
 mind is present,— according to what it 
 may happen to possess, it is acceptable, 
 not according to what it possesseth not.' 
 The constr. of the sentence is simple 
 enough : προθυμία being the subject 
 throughout, quasi-personified : readiness in 
 God's service is accepted, if its exertion 
 be commensurate with its means, — and is 
 not measured by an unreasonable require- 
 ment of what it has not. 13.] Fur- 
 ther expl. that the present collection is 
 not intended to press the Corr. καθο οί'κ 
 εχουηι. ' For (it is) not (the collection is 
 not made) that there may be to others 
 (the saints at Jerusalem) comfort, and 
 to you distress (of poverty) : 
 14.] but by the rule of equality {ίϊ as in 
 ίκ τϋ'ν Ιχειν, above) that at this present 
 time (of their need : the stress is on iv τψ 
 vvv καιρψ, as suggesting that this relation 
 may hereafter be altered) your abundance
 
 650 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 y ami cniislr., 
 
 lixon. xvi. 
 
 IS vat. 
 
 Winer, ί 66. 
 
 3.1). 
 ζ here only. 
 
 1. c. rran-s., 
 
 Prov. xiv.34. 
 a constr., Mntt. 
 
 xiv. 3. Acts 
 
 iv. 12. ch. i. 
 
 22. 
 b ch. vii. 11 al. 
 c = Rom. xii. 
 
 8al. 
 d = John iv. 
 
 4E>. 
 ever. 22. 2 Tim. 
 g Ter.2 only f. 
 
 ^'' καθώς γεγραττται ^ Ο το πολύ υυκ εττλεόνασίΐ', καΐ ό bcdk 
 το oAi-fOv ουκ ηΛαττονησίν. 
 
 ϋαρις οε τω θεω τω "' όιοοντι την αυτήν σπον^ην 
 υττερ υμών '' εν τρ καρδία Ύίτου, ^' οτι την μεν '^ ττα^ά- 
 κΧησιν ίόίΕ,ατο, * σττουοαιοτερος δε ύττόρνων ^ αυθα'ι- 
 ξ)ίτος ί€,η\θίν προς ύμας. ' συνίπεμφαμεν δε μετ' 
 
 αυτοΰ τον αδελφοί', ου ο έπαιίΌς ■* εν τω εύαγγελιω δ(α 
 
 i. 17 only, adv., Luke νϋ. 4. Phil. ii. 28. Tit. iii. 13. Ezek. xli. 2Γι. f Acts viii. 16 refl". 
 
 li = ch. ii. 13. John i. 44. i ver. 22 only t. j Rom. 1. 9. eh. x. 14 al. 
 
 al : φ (2ce) 48. 72 tol. — bef πολύ om το IOC. — aft ττολι» ins εληβι arm (not venet) : 
 habuii harP Cypr Ambrst Pel.— 16. δόντι DEFGJ all (30 and more, Tisch) (dedii it ν 
 latt apjjy) Chr Thl-edd {alteration to suit the aorists folly) : t.xt B(e sil)CK all Chr-mSj 
 Tlidrt Dam Thl' Oec. — αυτήν om 92. — for νπίρ to Kupdia, ev τη πα{>ουσιη 2. — 
 17. αυθαιρ(τως 109. — ττρος υ/ίας om Cbr. — 18. for^ir αυτοί/, αυτω 80. — aft αί(\φ. ins 
 
 may subserve (yEi'jjrni, see next clause, yt- 
 τίπβαι tic, 'to be extended to,' see ref. Gal.) 
 their deficiency ; that also (supposing cir- 
 cumstances changed) their abundance may 
 subserve your want.' Tiie reference is 
 still, as is evident from the next ver., to the 
 supply of temporal wants, in respect of 
 which there should be a mutual relieving 
 and sharing among Christians. But the 
 passage has been curiously misunderstood 
 to mean, * that their (the Jevcish Chris- 
 tians') abundance in spiritual things may 
 be imparted to you to supply your defci- 
 ency.' Thus Clirys., al., — the ancients re- 
 garding this imparting as the Gospel-benefit 
 received from, them by the Gentiles (which 
 however was past, not future, and is urged 
 as a motive for gratitude, see Rom. xv. 27 J, 
 and the modern Romanists introducing the 
 monstrous perversion of the attribution of 
 the merits of the saints to others in the 
 next world. So Estius : " Locus hie apos- 
 toli contra nostrae aetatis haereticos ostendit, 
 posse Ciiristianos minus sanctos meritis 
 sanctorum adjuvari etiam in futuro sseculo. 
 Denique notanda virtus eleemosynse, quse 
 facit hominem participem meritorum ejus 
 in quem coiifertur." 15.] ' that 
 
 there may be equality, as it is written 
 (i. e. according to the expression used in 
 the Scripture liistory : πίΐράγίι τζαΧαιάν 
 ιστορίαν, Chrys., — of the gathering of the 
 manna) He that (gathered) much, did 
 not exceed (the measure prescribed by 
 God) : and he that (gathered) little, did 
 not fall short (of it).' The fact οϊ equality 
 being the only point brought into compa- 
 rison as between the Israehtes of old and 
 Christians now, it is superfluous to enquire 
 minutely how this equality was wrought 
 among the Israelites. The quotation is the 
 present Vatican reading of the LXX. The 
 Alex, has ψ το πολύ and ψ το όλίγοί', pro- 
 
 bably a correction. The context supplies 
 συΧΧ'ί^ας from the συνίΧίΐ,αν in ver. 17, — 
 and is presumed by the Ap. to be familiar 
 to his readers. 16—24.] Of Titus 
 
 and tii'o other brethren whom Paul had 
 commissioned to complete the collection. 
 16.] The sense is taken up from 
 ver. 6. — ΰιδόντι iv, see refF. την αΰτ. 
 
 σίΓ., viz. ' as in myself.' This is evident 
 irom vnip ίψών. 17.] Proof of this ; 
 
 that Titus received indeed {μίν) Paul's ex- 
 hortation to go to them (said, to shew his 
 subordination, — or perhaps to authenticate 
 his authorization by the Αρ.), but in reality 
 (if) was too ready to go, to need any ex- 
 hortation ; — and therefore went forth (the 
 past tense of the epistolary style, — as ' da- 
 bam,' &c., indicating things which will have 
 passed before the letter is received) of his 
 own accord to them. 18 — 21.] Commen- 
 dation of a brother sent trith Titus. 18.] 
 ό αδελφός carmot surely be, as some Comm. 
 (Heumann, Riickert) have understood ' the 
 brother of Titus :' the delicate nature of 
 the mission would require that there should 
 be at least no family connexion between 
 those sent to fulfil it. This and the other 
 are called in ver. 23, άίίλ^οί ημών, and 
 were unquestionably Christian brethren in 
 the usual sense. Who this was, we know 
 not. Chrys., Theodoret, Oecum., Luther, 
 Calvin, suppose Barnabas to be meant : 
 but there is no historical ground for this, 
 and we can hardly suppose hiiri put under 
 Titus. Baronius and Estius suppose, Silas ,• 
 to whom this last objection would also ap- 
 ply : besides that he was well known to the 
 Corr., and therefore would not need tliis re- 
 commendation. Orig., Jerome, Chrys. (1), 
 Ambrose, Pelagius, Primasius, Anselm, Ca- 
 jetan, Grot., Olsh., al., suppose Luke: — and 
 of these all before Grot, (who pointed out 
 the mistake ; which however I see lately
 
 15—22. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 651 
 
 k - - k'-v -. 19 1' ' 5'^1''ΛΛ^ ^ 
 
 πασών των £ΚκΛησιων ου μόνον oe, άλλα κα< k ι cor.xiv. 33 
 
 m η ' ' ^ - • Λ - η ' 5• ' ~ , ^^ ""'■ 'l• 
 
 ■^ίΐξ)οτονηυίις νπο των ίκκλησιων συνίκοημος νΐ^'^^ν,^^^'^^ΐ'^;^^- 
 £v τη ° νάριτι ταύτη τη ^ ^ιακονουμίνη ΰώ τιμών, '' προς "OliTy?."*^ 
 T7JV του κυρίου όοί,αν και προυυμιαν -ημών σΓελ-^^'[^^ ^^. 
 
 Χόμενοι τοΰτο, μη τις ημάς ^ μωμί\σχ\ται iv ttj " άδρόη/τι pfrans, λ. m 
 
 21 
 
 3 reft. 
 q = Acts iii. 10. 
 
 ταυτί? TTJ •" SiafcovoujUfVij ύ(|) ημών. ""^ ' ττρονοουμε»/ 7»^ "^ Γ-πίΐΙ j.'ie ai 
 
 καΛα ου μόνον ίνωπιον κυρίου, άλλα και ενωττιον ssThess. ϋϊ. 
 ανθρώπων. ^ ' συνεπίμφα/ην δε αυτοις τον αδελφον tch.*vi"3reff. 
 
 cciustr., Htb. si. 2. u here only t. ν Rom. xii. 17. Ρκοτ. iii. 4. 
 
 ij/iwr 10. 238 v-sixt Syr ar-erp seth Ambrst Pel Bed. — 19. aft ημών (1st) {ημιν 177) add 
 tyiViTo DE 91. 177 arm {est v-ed al lat-fF). — rec for tv, συν {erroneous ffloss on iv), 
 with DEFGJK &c syr goth al Chr Thdrt al Aug : txtBC (om τη) G. 10. 17. 31-7-9. 47- 
 67. 71-3. 93. 113--21. 238 ν Syr copt aeth slav-ms al ν all Dam Aug Ambrst Pel al.— 
 νφ υμών C 55. 73. 177• -38. — rec αντον τον kvuiov {union of two readings, αυτού and 
 του KV(>. ? or perhaps arose from writing του twice over, as Meyer), witli D^EK most 
 mss syrr al Chr Thdrt Dam ai : αντην 6. 43. 672. 74: txt BCD'FGJ 3.23.31-0.57• 
 71. 80. 93 it V ath copt arm goth slav-ms lat-ff. — rec at end, νμων, with F and a few 
 mss : txt all other RISS, most mss, vss and ff. — at end add τίλουσιν D'E : voluiit (for 
 voluntatem) d. — 20. υττοστίλλ. FG : συσΓ(λλ. 93 : ίεδοικοτίς 4^. — νμας FG 31. 37. 7•^• 
 — μωμηται C^ (C uncert). — 21. rec π^>ovυoυμtvoι, with CJK &c copt goth Clem Chr 
 (Mtt's ms') Chr (Wtst) Thdrt Dam Thl Oec : txt BDEFG G. 11. C72. 80. 91 it ν syrr 
 al Chr lat-if.— rec om γαρ, with JK &c Thdrt Dam Thl Oec: ins BCDEFG mss as 
 above, and 17• 37-9. 47• 73 it ν syrr ar-erp copt goth Clem Chr lat if (C ττρονοονμενοι 
 yap, uniting both readings: and so Tischendorf ed 2. Meyer thinks ττοονυουμίνοι to 
 have heen a mere mistake originally, arising from, στί^λομινοι above : and thus the yap 
 which was at first retained from oversight, as in C, was at last erased. Pi-obably 
 ττρονοουμίνοι was introduced from Rom. xii. IT, where the same words occur). — for κυρ., 
 
 reproduced in Mr. Birks's Horse Aposto- 
 licae, p. 242 f.) suppose ού ύ ίπαινος iv τψ 
 (i'ayytX(<{j to refer to his gospel, — ίιά την 
 ιστορία I' ηνττίρ typaipe, Chrys. ; — but this is 
 altogether without proof, as is the assump- 
 tion that it was Mark (Lightfoot, Storr). 
 It may have been Trophimus, who (Acts 
 XX. 4) accompanied Paul into Asia, and (xxi. 
 29) to Jerusalem : so De Wette, Wieseler. 
 If the expression ' whose praise in (the 
 matter of) the Gospel is throughout all 
 the Churches,' is to be compared with any 
 similar eulogium, that of Gains in Rom. 
 xvi. 23 seems to correspond most nearly : 
 Γάίος ό ξίΐΌς μου και δλης της ίκκλησίας : 
 but he was resident at Corinth, see 1 Cor. 
 1. 14. A Gaius, a Macedonian, is men- 
 tioned Acts xix. 29, as one of the συνίκοη- 
 μοι of Paul, as here, together with Aristar- 
 chus, which latter we know accompanied 
 him to Jerusalem. — It must then rest in un- 
 certainty. 19.] parenthetical (see on 
 ver. 20) adding to his general commendation 
 a particidar qualification for this office. 
 οϋ |ΑΟν. 8e, — ' and not only so (i. e. ))raised 
 in all the churches) but also appointed (' suf- 
 fragiis designatus,' see ref. and note ; and 
 Stanley here) by the churches (of Mace 
 donia ? see ver. 1 ) as our fellow traveller 
 (to Jerusalem, from what follows) in (the 
 
 matter of) this charity which is being 
 ministered by us,— in order to subserve 
 the glory of the Lord and our readiness ' 
 (this clause refers not to Οιακυν. νψ' ήμ. as 
 usually interpreted, but to the fact related, 
 the union of this brother with Paul in the 
 matter of the alms, which was done to avoid 
 suspicions detrimental to Christ's glory, and 
 to the zeal of the Αρ.). 20.] ' Taking 
 
 heed of this (' devitantes,' Vulg. — ύττο- 
 τΓΤίνσαντίς κ. CfOoiicortf, Theophyl. : — the 
 particip. belongs to συνίττί-μ^αμίν, ver. 19 
 being parenthetical) that no one blame us 
 (ret.) in the matter of this abundance (of 
 contributions) which is being ministered 
 by us.' On ά("ρΟΓί;ς•, Meyer observes, 
 " from άΐρός, ' compact,' ' solid ;' — is used 
 in Homer (11. χ. 3(J3, π. 857, ω. 6) of a 
 firm and succulent habit of body. Later, 
 we have it in all the various references of 
 the adjective, e. g. of abundance — of plants 
 and fruits (Theophr.) of discourse (Diog. 
 Laert. x. 83). of tone (Atlien. x. j). 415 a), 
 &c. \]'hat kind of abundance is meant, 
 the context therefore alone determines." 
 Wetst. says, " άιψότης apud Zosimum 
 quater pro inyenti largitioiie." 21.] 
 
 'And such caution is in accordance with our 
 general practice.' See Rom. xii. 17. and ref. 
 Prov. 22.] Still less can we determine
 
 652 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 VIII. 23, 21. 
 
 xiT. ly. 5i - " 
 
 xSeech. vi. 4, OaiOV ΟίΊ 
 
 5reff. 
 y ver. 17. 
 zch. i. 15 reff. 
 a So 1 Cor.xii 
 
 8. 
 aa John i. 30 , ^ 
 
 εοοκιμασαμίν i 
 νυνι οε ποΧύ 
 
 )λλο 
 ουδαΐϋτ 
 
 ις 7Γ0 
 
 λλά 
 
 κις στΓου- 
 ΤΓίποιΘησει 
 
 b ill. 1. 7 refl, ' ' 
 
 '^Tx^'s "bai. α-γαττης νμων, και ημών 
 
 ν. 10 al. , ν i ' '^ / k 
 
 d Rom. .\τ1. 3 aVTOVQ £ VO£l/Cl'U^£VOt 
 
 e = piiii.ii.yri. TV 1 ^^^; kk 
 
 ποΛυ ' σπουόαιοΓερη 
 ποΛΛ^ τϊ^7 tig υμάς "" tire ι»περ1 /του, κυινωνυς εμος 
 και "^ εις νμας συΐ'εργος" ^ είτε αοελψοί ΐ}μ(ι)ν, "^ αττόσΓολοι 
 οοςα χριστού. rrji.' ούν ^ έΐ'δε/ζιν της 
 
 καυ^ησεως υττερ υμών, ε<ς 
 εις ττροςωτΓον των είνκλησίο^ν. 
 ρι μεν yap της ύιακονιας της εις τους 
 Β Rn.m-.i«-^25• ογιους περισσον μοι εστί το -γραφειν υμιν οιόα yap 
 
 onlyt. h Rom. iii. 27 refl". 1 = Rom. ii. 15. ix. 22 al. fr. (Gen. 1. 15, 17.) constr.? k (ch. xi. 
 
 i?0.) See Num. sx. β. kk So 1 Cor. v.3. xi. 18. 1 ch. Tiii 4. m — Matt. v. 47. (Dan. v. 12, 14.) 
 
 Oiov 120 V Syr ar-erp Ambrst Aug Pel. — 22. τούτοις 03. — aft ττολλοις add αντου arm. — 
 πολλά/τις om 3. 30. 43 ar-pol.— πολύ om G9. 74. 80 Tlil : ττολλοις 30 : πολλω Thdrt.— 
 ΤΓολλ»; om FG 67"-9 g : pref St Β : ττεττ. ττολλ. τη ίΐς υμ. om Chr. — 23. σννεργ. (ΐς νμ. 
 DE d e copt goth al Ambrst. — for χρ., κυρίου CF : Otov al. — 24. νπίρ ημ. D'G 71-3 g. — 
 ί(ς ηυτους ora 44. 213 slav-ms : Εις ίαντους slav-ms : αντυνς 71• — rcc ενδίΐζασθί [ex- 
 planatory gloss on the participle), -^λύι CD^E'JK &c vss ff: txt BD'EiFG 17 it goth.— 
 rec και ας np., with very few mss : txt BCDEFGJK most mss vss ff. 
 
 Chap. IX. 1. γαρ om C 2. 41. 115 copt al («^ goth). — πιρισσου 93. — (μοι Β. — το 
 om C 17• 73 : του FG 109 Thdrt-ms Dam.— προγρα^ίΐν 17- — 2. γαρ om 48'. — την 
 
 who this second brother is. Every possible 
 person has been guessed. Several would an- 
 swer to the description, ' whom we have many 
 times in many matters proved to be earnest.' 
 By our uncertainty in these two cases, we 
 may see how much is required, to fill up the 
 apostolic history at all satisfactorily. 
 ΐΓ€•π•οιθήσ•£ΐ • • •] ' through his great con- 
 fidence which he has towards you :' be- 
 longs to σπουίαιοΓίοοΐ', andto the brother, 
 not to σννίπέμ-φαμίν and to Paul. The 
 brother had, by what he had heard from 
 Titus, conceived a high opinion of the pro- 
 bable success of their mission. 23.] 
 General recommendation of the three. 
 €Ϊτ£ iiir. Τίτου] ' Whether concerning 
 Titus (we may supply λέγω or γράφω, or 
 as in E. V., ' any enquire :' or we need not 
 supply any thing), he is my partner und 
 (especially) my fellow-worker towards 
 you : whether our hrethren (be in ques- 
 tion : — viz. the two mentioned — but gene- 
 ralized by the absence of the article — ' whe- 
 ther brethren of ours ') they are the Apos- 
 tles (in the more general sense of Acts xiv. 
 14. 1 Thess. ii. C. Phil. ii. 25) of the 
 churches (i. e. ' are of the churches, what 
 we are of the Lord '—persons sent out with 
 authority), the glory of Christ ' (i. e. men 
 whose work tends to Christ's glory). 
 24.] ' Shew then to them the proof of 
 your love (' to us, or perhaps, ' to yotir 
 poor brethren ' (Meyer) : — but the word 
 has not been so used throughout this pas- 
 sage, see verse 7 : χόρις has been the 
 word), and of our boasting concerning 
 you, in the sight of the churches.' 
 
 I may remark, (1) that the participial 
 constr. is elliptic, as in Rom. xii. 16, al. 
 (2) That ττρόςωπον τών ίκκλησιών does 
 not actually import ' the representatives of 
 the churches,' as Meyer (which would be τυ 
 πρόςωπον or τά πρόςωπα, without εις), 
 but as above, it being implied that they, 
 being the απόστολοι τ. ίκκλ., are such re- 
 presentatives. And this is all that Theo- 
 doret seems to mean, whom Meyer quotes 
 in support of his view : — το ττρόςωπον γαρ 
 των ίκκλησιών ίπίχ^ουσιν ούτοι τών πιμ- 
 ■φασών αυτούς. IX. 1 — 5.] He re- 
 
 curs to the collection itself, and prays them 
 that they toould make good before the 
 brethren his boasting of them, and prepare 
 it before his ow7i coming. 1.] The 
 
 μεν γάρ connects with the last verse, thus, 
 ' I beseech you to receive the brethren whom 
 I send, courteously; for concerning the duty 
 of miyiistration to the saints, it is surely 
 superfluous for me to write to you who are 
 so prompt already.' No new subject be- 
 gins, as some have supposed ; nor is there 
 any break in the sense at all. Some ob- 
 scurity has been introduced unnecessarily, 
 by taking της ίιακ. τ. ΰς τ. άγ. for merely 
 this collection which is noiv making: 
 whereas the Ap. chooses such general terms 
 as a mild reproof to the Corr., who, well 
 aware as they were of the duty of minister- 
 ing to the saints, were yet somewhat remiss 
 in this particular example of the duty. 
 There is an emphasis on γρύφίΐν : ' nam 
 testes habebitis prsesentes,' Bengel. Theo- 
 phyl. well remarks: τοσαϋτα και προΓίροι/ 
 ίΐπών και πάλιν μίλλων εΐπΰν, 'όμως
 
 IX. 1—5. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 653 
 
 την " προθυμία ν υμών ° ην ύπΐξ) υμών ° κavyJίxtμaι Μακεδό- ίλ vui. η 
 σίΐ», ΟΤΙ Ayjaia ^ τταοίσκίυασται ' αττυ πέρυσι και ο si siV.' λογ. 
 '''' £ζ υμών ' ζήλος ^ ηρίθισεν ^ τους πλε/ονας. £πειι;//α δε ρΐ c>r.'xiv. s. 
 
 ' ' '^ ' Acts χ. 10 
 
 τους αόεΛφους, iva μη το καυγημα ημών το υπεο υμών xd.h. 
 
 ν Λ- • W - / r ./ Λ ^ ''λ υ qch.viii. 10 
 
 κεί'ωρ» ει; τω μέρει τούτο;, ιι^α κηϋως sAeyov ^ παρ- oniytref.j. 
 
 t '' Λ r '■ J \ / \ . 1 Ί qq So Luke xi. 
 
 ίσκίυασμίνοι ητί, μη ττως, ίαν εΧθωσιν συν εμοι Μακε- rjoiina.T?^ 
 οοΐ'ες• κοι ευρωσιν υμάς ατταρασκ^υαστους, καταισνυν- «coi. in -.ι 
 Οωμίν ημης {'ίνα μη λε'γωμεν ύμεις) εν ττ) ^ ύποστάσει t f cir.Vx. ly 
 
 / 5a' - f b ' ' c Λ / \ reff. 
 
 ταυττ?. ανα -y/caiov ουν η-^χ\σαμην παρακαλίσαι τους η Rom. ir.2rcff. 
 
 reff. w ch. iii. 10. (1 Pet. iv. 16 var. read.) χ here only t. 
 
 here only. ζ = Heb. iii. 14. xi. 1. ch. xi. 17. Psa. xxxviii. 7. 
 
 b Acts xxTi. 2. PhU. ii. 3 al. Job xlii. 6. c Matt. xir. 3ΰ al. 
 
 y ch. vii. 14refF. w. tt 
 a .\cti xiii. 46 reff. 
 
 VTTtp ημών 17 (Scliolz). — π(ρσν D'FG.- — for ό, το Β. — ίξ om (as superfluous, its force 
 not being seen) BC 17- 39. ii"]-. 74 ν Syr ar-erp copt arm slav-ms Ambrst Pel : ins 
 (besides DG &c) it syr goth al Chr Thdrt Dam al λΜζ. — ηρίθησ( 2,38. — 3. ιττεμφαμεν 
 DE (not d e) copt Aug al. — ro νπ. νμ. om FG 45 g Chr. — αλλ ira 37• 71 syr* arm 
 Thdrt. — τΓαραπκίνασμί7'οι J 48 : παρασκινασαμίνοι 238. — 4. πως om D'. — tav om 
 BD2 (αν D') Syr. — συί' ίμοι om 44.— και κατα/σγ. D'(E.')J 2 d e.— λίγω C'DEG it 
 v-ms Thl-comm Ambrst Aug (ti'a μ. \ty. v. om Κ : ιιμ. iv. μ. \ey. om 109). — ταύτη 
 om 67^ : ταύτης 47• 74 slav-ms Oec. — rec at end add της κανχησίως (gloss, from ch 
 xi. 17: so Meyer), with D'E^l^add ημών W• al)JK &c syrr al gr-tf: om BCDiFG 
 
 ττίύιττον ηντψ λίγίι το ττίοί τηντων ypa- 
 ψίιν. σοφώς C£ τοντο ποιίΐ, ωςτε μάλλον 
 αϋτονς ίπισπάσασθαι. αίη\ζ^νΐ'^)σονται 
 yap εΊyε τοιαντην ύπόλί^ψίν ττερι αυτών 
 έχοντος τον Παύλου, οτι ου ίίονται συμ- 
 βουλής προς το ϊλεείν, είτα φανώσιν ϊλάτ- 
 τονς της ΰπολι'ιφίως. 2.] ' For 
 
 (ground of ττερισσόν ΐστι) Ι am aware of 
 your readiness of which (reif.) I am in 
 the habit of boasting concerning you to 
 Macedonians (Bengal remarks on the pres., 
 ' adhuc erat Paulus in Macedonia') that 
 Achaia (not ΰμεΊς — he relates his own 
 words to the Macedonians) has been ready 
 (viz. to send off the money: και οϋί'εν 
 λείτΓίΐ ει μή το ϊλθε^ν τοις ciio^f ΐΌΐις τά 
 χρήματα, Theophyl. The Αρ. judging by 
 their readiness, had made this boast con- 
 cerning them, supposing it was really so. 
 That this is the sense is shewn by άπαρα- 
 ηκευ'ιστυνς below, ver. 4) from last year 
 (reff.) : — and the zeal which proceeds 
 from you (' which has its source in you 
 and whose influence goes forth from you :' 
 so ό tK Πελοποννήσου πόλεμος, οι εκείθεν, 
 and the like) stirred up the greater num- 
 ber of them ' (but not only the example 
 of your zeal: see ch. viii. 1). 3.] 
 
 ' But (contrast, not to μεν in ver. 1, but to 
 καυχώμαι above; implying fear lest he 
 should have been making a vain boast 
 concerning them) I sent (epistolary past, 
 as in viii. 18. 22) the brethren, in order 
 that our matter of boasting concerning 
 you (καύχημα, our whole ' materies glori- 
 andi,' not = καύχησις) may not, in this 
 
 particular, be proved empty (iv τφ μέρει 
 τούτφ does not belong to καύχημα, but to 
 κενωθ?) — ' that our boast of you, so ample 
 and various — ch. vii. 4, may not break down 
 in this one department.' Estius, in marg., 
 well calls it ' acris cum tacita laude exhor- 
 tatio apostoUca ') ; that, as I said (when ? 
 in ver. 2 ? or, in his boasting to the 
 -ilacedd. ? or, in 1 Cor. xvi. 1 ? — Most 
 naturally, »i ver. 2. If he had meant, to 
 the Macedd., it would prob. have been 
 λ'εyω, as καυχώμαι above : if m 1 Cor. 
 xvi., it would have been more clearly ex- 
 pressed. — If so, t.Xfyov refers merely to the 
 u-ord παρεσκ.), ye may be prepared (see 
 above on ver. 2), 4.] lest perchance 
 
 if Macedonians should come with me (to 
 you : — to bring me on my way, or to bear 
 the Macedonian collection. — We may infer 
 from this expression, that neither of the 
 two brethren above mentioned, viii. 18. 22, 
 was a Macedonian) and should find you 
 unprepared (with your collection, see ver. 
 2) we (who have boasted), not to say you 
 (who were boatted of) should be put to 
 shame, in the matter of this confidence 
 (respecting you. ΰπο'στασι?, as elsewhere 
 in N. T. and LXX, see reff., subjective : 
 the attempt to give it here the meaning 
 of ^foundation,' ' matter boasted of as 
 Chrys., Theophyl., Erasm., Grot., al., 
 Riick., Olsh., is unnecessary, and has prob. 
 been induced by the gloss της καυχ. in- 
 serted from ch. xi. 17 : but see there also). 
 5.] I therefore (because of ver. 4) 
 thought it necessary to exhort the bre-
 
 654 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 IX. 
 
 d Acts ζχ. 5, 
 
 13. Geo. 
 
 sxiii. 3. 
 e here onlyt. 
 f Rom.i. 2 
 
 onlyt. 
 g — Rom. XV. 
 
 2ii. XTi. 18. 
 
 1 lor. X. 16. 
 
 Ezek. xivxiv. 
 
 26. 
 li 1 Cor. iii 15 
 
 (reft.), ix. 26. 
 i =" tiereon'y. 
 k See 1 Cor.'vii. 
 
 29 reff. 
 
 αΒίΧφους, ^ Ίνα προελθωσιν εις ύμας, και 
 σωσιν την πξ)Oζπηyyt\μevηv ^ avXoyiav 
 
 ως ^ ivXoyiav και μη ως ' πλεοΐ'ίζία)'. 
 σττεί^ωΐ' φειοομενως ψίΐόομίνως και 
 
 προκαταξ)τι- 
 νμων ταυτην 
 
 ετοιμην ίΐναι 
 
 6 k ■ 
 
 ο 
 
 τούτο δε, 
 
 \ η ι > 
 
 υεοισίΐ, και 
 
 ^ 1 ί) ' 
 
 και αερίσει. 
 
 1 1 Cor. ix. 11. Gal. τι. 7. 
 
 όντως 
 
 1 
 
 ο 
 
 1 
 
 σπείρων 
 έκαστος 
 
 Prov. χχϋ. 8. 
 
 Ε7Γ ευ 
 
 υΧο• 
 
 ετΓ 
 
 yιaις 
 καθώς ° προαιρείται 
 
 inhere onlyt- n=Uom. τ. 14 
 
 ευ\oyιaις 
 ry κάργια. 
 
 3. 17. 23'. 57- 07^-9. 70-1. 177-8-9 it ν copt Ambrst Pel Aug.— 5, ττροςίΧθωσιν FG 48 
 Thdrt-ms : τΓαρ(\θωσιν 80. — for (ΐς, προς (prob a corrn to introd the more usual 
 2}repn. So also in the verb we have προςίλθ. in FG) BDEFG 37. 46. 93 (al ?) : txt CJK 
 mss nrly (appy) Thdrt Dam Thl Oec (Chr Thl-marg have ηροπίμχΐ^αι r. aS. iva ττρο- 
 K-arapr ).— rec TrpoKarjjy-yfX. {occasioned prob by προκοταρτ. above), with .IK &c syrr 
 al Thdrt Dam Oec: om Chr Thl (Mtt's ms,) : txt BCDEFG 17- 23. 57. 106-8 to 1 1 it 
 V (repromissatn) copt goth Thl Aug Ambrst Pel. — νμων om D' d e ν Pel al : ΐ}μων 238. 
 — ταντην om FG g arm Chr : al transp. — και (bef μη) om FG 52 it ν Syr al Chr-comm, 
 lat-ff. — 1st ως om 69. — rec for 2nd ως, ωςτηρ, with a few mss (appy) : txt JMSS most 
 mss ff. — 6. τυυτο δι om 37• 69. 74 lectt arm (not venet) slav-ms : add Xtyw 14 ν Syr- 
 ms ar-pol copt slav-ed Chr Ambrst Pel. — for εττ ιυλυγιοις (1st), (v tvXoyta D'FG, in 
 benedictione it copt goth al lat-ff. — (2nd), ίξ tvXoyiaq D' d e goth Cypr al : ίπ ivXoyia 
 
 tliren (Titus and the two others) that they 
 would go bsfore (my coming) to you, and 
 previously prepare your long announced 
 beneficence (i. e. long announced by me to 
 the jMacedd., ver. 2. — €ϋλογία, ' blessing;' 
 not used only of a blessing in words, but of 
 one expressed by ά present, as Gen. xxxiii. 
 11; Judg. i. 15. (See Stanley.) But beware 
 of the blunder of connecting it with tv and 
 λογι'η,'Λ good collection.' This sense of 
 blessing, combined with the jirimitive sense, 
 affords the Ap. an opportunity for bringing 
 out the true spirit in which Christian gifts 
 should be given), that this same may be 
 ready (the constr. is unusual: τοντην 
 refers back to tv\. and the inf. must have 
 ώς•Γ£ supplied. De W. compares Heb. v. 5. 
 Perhaps the nearest is Col. iv. 6) in such 
 sort as beneficence, and not as covetous- 
 ness ' (i. e. as the fruit of blessing, poured 
 out from a beneficent mind, not of a sparing 
 covetous spirit which gives no more than it 
 need. There is no need to alter the pri- 
 mitive meaning, or to make the word sig- 
 nify ' tenacity,' as Calv., De Wette, al. : 
 he who defrauds the poor by stinting them 
 ττλίοΐ'ίΚΓίϊ, in the literal sense. Still less 
 must we with Chrys., al., refer ττΧίονίϊ,., to 
 the Αρ., — μη νομισητ(,φησ\ν,οτι ως ττΧιο- 
 νίκτανντίς αυτήν λαμ/3ίίνο^{ΐ', — which is 
 inconsistent with the interpretation φίΐεο- 
 μίνως below, and with ev\(iyinv, the cor- 
 responding word, which applies to the spirit 
 of the givers). 6, 7.] He enforces the 
 
 last words by an assurance grounded in 
 Scripture and partly cited from it, that as 
 we reap, so we shall soiv. τοΐτο] 
 
 Some supply φημί, as 1 Cor. vii. 29 : others, 
 as Meyer, would take it as an accus. absol., 
 
 'as regards this,' viz. what has gone before. 
 But I would rather take it as an imperfect 
 construction, in which τοντο is used merely 
 to point at the sentiment which is about to 
 follow: — 'But this— (is true),' or 'But 
 (notice) this' . . . Ιπ €ΰλογίαι,5] ' with 
 blessings:' ίττί denoting the accompany- 
 ing state or circumstances, as in ref. : not, 
 ' with a view to blessings,' which will not 
 suit the second έττ' ίύλ. : nor as Theophyl., 
 Oec, and E. V. μετά δηφιΧιίας, bounti- 
 fully : which gives indeed the sense, but 
 misses the meaning of the espr. : see above. 
 It refers to the spirit of the giver, who 
 must be ιλαρός δότης, not giving mur- 
 muringly, but with blessings, with a bene- 
 ficent charitable spirit : such an one shall 
 reap also with blessings, abundant and un- 
 speakable. The only change of meaning 
 in the second use of the expr. is that the 
 (v^oyiai are poured on him, whereas in the 
 first they proceeded from him : in both 
 cases, they are the element in which he 
 works. So, we bestow the seed, but receive 
 the harvest. The spirit with which we sotv, 
 is of ourselves : that with which we reap, 
 depends on the harvest. So that the 
 change of meaning is not arbitrary, but 
 dependent on the nature of things. 
 7.] Not, as Meyer and De W., a limitation 
 of the foregoing, or else it would be ex- 
 pressed by some connecting particle, — but 
 a continuation of the thought : — φαδομί- 
 viuf and ίττ' tΰ^oyίπις referred to the spirit 
 of the giver; so does this ver., — ίκ Χύπης 
 η ϊξ άν. corresponding to ψειοομΐνως, — 
 ιλαρός, to ϊττ' ίϋλογιηις. καθώβ 
 
 Ίτροαιρεΐται] ' as he determines in his 
 heart;' supply, ' so let him give :' i.e. kt
 
 6—10. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 655 
 
 r ί ' ο here only. 
 
 COT ην Prov. xxi. 25 
 
 καθώς γεγροττται "* Εσκορπισίν, έδωκε ν 
 7) δικαιοσύνη αυτοΰ " μίνΗ eiq τον αιώνα, 
 '^ορη'γων σττίρμα τω 
 
 μη ^ ίΚ \υπης η ^ εξ ανάγκης' '^ ΐλαρόι» γαρ 
 
 ayana ο θεός. ^ όυνατίΐ δε ο θεός πασαν ' γόοι ν " περισ- Pr\^'"'■•''"■ 
 ' _ '■ , , ^ . , Λ, •> Γ b ch.viii.13. 
 
 σεΰσαι ' είς ίιμας, Ίνα * εν παντί πόντοΓε " ττάσαν ^ αντάρ- '^\ίΙΙηοΙ:^η. 
 
 '' 2 ' ζ ' - >' 1 Λ ν 8) Prot. 
 
 χχίϊ. 8. 
 r here only. 
 ^ D ' Prov., at 
 
 τοις τηνησίν, nipra. 
 10 ' ^^ d ' sR()m.xiv.4. 
 
 Ο Οε εΤΓΙ- ch. xm. S 
 
 "nly t• 
 ' \ >' ' f /D " t— Jnhni IJ 
 
 στΓίΐροντι και αρτον εις ρρωσιν &c Ac's 
 
 λ/) - ^ i ' ' - > k '^' xi. 23. ICor. 
 
 rii /υΐ'ει τον σττορον ναών και αυίησίΐ ί 4• coi. ί. β. 
 
 'ν ' ' ' ' α trans., ch. 
 
 iv. 15. Eph.i. S. 1 Thess. iii. le. ν = ch. ii. 9, 12. viii 23. Gal. v. 10 al. w ch. iv 8. vii. 5 al. 
 
 x-= .'^ct.sxx. IHreff. y 1 Tim. vi. 6 only. ζ Rom. iii. 7 rcfT. a Psa. cxi. y. (LXX.) Matt. 
 
 xii.3u. flL. John X. 12. xvi. 32 only. 2 King.s xxii. 15. b here only. 1. c. c — Matt. 
 
 xi.23 Kom. ix. 11. 1 Cor. iii. 14. 1 Pet. i. 23, 2,i. d Gal. iii. 5. Col. ii. 19. 2 Pet. i. 5, 11 only f. 
 
 (See Eph. iv. 1(1. Phil. i. 19.) e ver. 6. Isa. It. 10. f Rom. siv. 17 reff. I.sa. 1. c. g 1 Pet. iv. 
 
 11 only 3 Kings T. U. h Acts vii. 17 reff. i epp., here only. Markiv. 2li, 27. Luke viii. 5, 
 
 U only. Deut xi. 10. k trans., 1 Cor. iii. 6, 7 reff. 
 
 FG g copt al Aug. — και om D'E ar-erp aeth slav. — 7, ττροηρηται (most likely corrn lo 
 suit the sense) BCFG (ττροίΐοίτοι F', πμοαρητ. F^G) 31. 67^. 71 Chr-ms (Wtst) : pro- 
 posiiit (or simly) vss lat-ff: txt DEJK mss nrly (appy syrr Cbr Thdrt Dam al. — for jj, 
 /ijjSf slav Cbr : και arm. — 8. rec δυνατός {see notes), with C^D^JK mss (appy) Chr 
 Thdrt Dam al : txt BC'D'FG.— for if, γαρ D' 109-78 demid ΐΛ.—τηριησίνωμίν 109.— 
 τταντοτί om FG 7 g- — τταησσινονται 238. — 9. at end, add τον αιώνος FG 238 g ν (not am 
 demid al) Aug (Wtst). — 10. for σπίρμα, σπορον {corrn from σπορον below) BD'FG 80. 
 — τω σπίΐραντι J al. — rec χoυl|yησaι, ττληθυναι, ανξησαι {prob, as Meyer, corrns, in 
 
 the προαίρισις, the full consent of the free 
 will, go with the gift ; let it not be a re- 
 luctant offering, given tic λνπιις, out of an 
 annoyed and troubled mind at having the 
 gift extorted, nor ίξ ανάγκης, out of neces- 
 sity — because compelled. Such givers, — 
 that is implied, — God does not love. — 
 δότης is not a classical word. δότηη, 
 δωτήο, and (Hes. Op. 353) δώτης, are 
 used (Meyer). 8 — 11.] He encourages 
 
 them to a cheerful contribution by the 
 assurance that God both can (vv. 8, 9), and 
 will (vv. 10, 11) furnish them with the 
 means of performing such deeds of benefi- 
 cence. 8.] Svvaxei has the em]3hasis. 
 I adopt the reading because after all it is 
 difficult to imagine how so easy a constr. as 
 δυνατός 6 θιός should have been altered to 
 dwaTfl, as Meyer supposes, or why the 
 transcriber need have written δυνατός έσην 
 if the latter were a corrn for δυΐ'ατπ, seeing 
 that the verb subst. is just as frequently 
 omitted in such clauses as inserted. 
 ττάσαν χοίριν, ' etiam in bonis externis,' 
 Beiigel, — to which here the reference is : 
 not excluding however the wider meaning 
 of ' all grace.' ττβρισσίϋσαι, ' to make to 
 abound,'— reff. 'ίνα, κ-.τ.λ.] 'in order 
 that, having at all times in every thing 
 all sufficiency (of worldly substance ; 
 αΐτάρκ. is objective; not contentedness, 
 subj.j ye may abound towards (' have an 
 overplus for ;' which is not inconsistent with 
 αντάρκιια, seeing that αΰτ. does not ear- 
 clude the having more, but only the having 
 less than is sufficient : the idea of a man's 
 
 having at all times and in all things a 
 sufficiency, would presuppose that he had 
 somewhat to spare) every good work : 
 9.] as it is written (i. e. fulfilling the cha- 
 racter described in Scripture), — He scat- 
 tered abroad (metaph. from seed : μετά 
 δα-φιλίίας ίδωκί, Chrvs.) he gave to the 
 poor : his righteousness remaineth for 
 ever.' — In what sense is δικιηοσίη'η used .' 
 Clearly in the only one warranted by the 
 context — that of ^goodness proved by be- 
 neficence,' — ' a righteous deed, which shall 
 not be forgotten, — as a sign of righteous- 
 ness in character and conduct.' To build 
 any inference from the text inconsistent 
 with the great truths respecting δικαιοσύνη 
 ever insisted on by Paul (as Chrys. κ<ιί yap 
 δικαίους ποιύ [»'/ ^ιλαΐ'^ρωπια], τά αμαρ- 
 τήματα καθάπιρ πυρ άναΧίηκουσα, Όταν 
 μίτά ίαψιλίΐας Ικχίηται) is a manifest 
 perversion. 10.] Assurance that God 
 
 will do this. — ' But (introduces the new as- 
 surance) He that ministers seed to the 
 sower and bread for eating (in the physi- 
 cal world : — from Isa. Iv. 10, LXX. The 
 Vulg., E. v.. Luther, Calv., Grot., al., com- 
 mit the mistake of joining κ. άρτον ίΐς 
 βρώσιν with χορηγήσαι, or -fi. βρώσις, 
 the act of eating .• not =z βρώμα), shall 
 minister and multiply your seed (i. e. 
 the money for you to bestow, — answer- 
 ing to σπίρμα τψ σττύροντι), and will 
 increase the fruits of your righteous- 
 ness ' (from IIos. reff.— the everlasting re- 
 ward for your bestowals in Christ's name, 
 as Matt. X. 42; — answering to afnov ΰς
 
 656 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 IX. 11— L 
 
 ν 1 
 
 τα -γίνηματα Τ7]ς οικαιοσννης υμών. 
 
 Malt, xsv 
 
 xii ia. D.nt. τιΙομίΐΌΐ εις 
 
 χίτ. 22. Hos, , _ , , / " η ~ 
 
 evy^apiariav τω utio 
 
 11 m 
 
 πασαν 
 
 •" αττλο 
 
 ί]Τίς 
 
 εν παΐ'Γί ττΛου- 
 κατερ^άΖ,ίται δ{ 
 
 8 rem ^^"^'^ , 
 
 τουρ\ιας ταύτης ου /χονον 
 
 ιη ch. 
 
 η ch. vi. lU. 
 
 1 Ciir. i. 6 
 
 only. Gen. 
 
 siv. 23 al. 
 
 participial 
 
 constr., Acts 
 
 xxvi.3 reft'. 
 ο — Acts XX. 
 
 19 teft". 
 ρ Rom. sii. 8 
 
 (J =Acts X. 4), TVQ 
 47. xiii.32, 
 
 τητα, 
 
 12 " ' t 2. ' - u Λ 
 
 ΟΤΙ η όιακοΐ'ΐα της Aei- 
 
 εστίν ΤΓξίοςαναπΑηρυυσα τα 
 " υστερήματα των ■' ay^ωv, άλλα και ^ περισσεύουσα οια 
 τΓολλων * ευ-^αριστιων τω θεω' ^ δια της ^ Βοκιμης της 
 ' Βιακον'ιας ταύτης 
 
 ^οζ,α^οντες τον 
 
 dd 
 
 )λο 
 
 oμoΛoyιaς νμων εις 
 
 το 
 
 ν C ' > - d ' 
 
 εον εττι Tt^ uTrora-yi) 
 ευο-ννίλίον του 
 
 ην 
 
 ΧΡ 
 
 ιστον 
 
 και απ\οτητι της ^κοινωνίας '^ εις αυτούς και ^ εις παντας, 
 
 r = Rom. iv. 
 
 15. V. 3al. s = Act.s xxiv. 3. 1 Cor. xiv. 10. ch. ic. 15 only. 
 
 ii. 17, 30. Hel). viii. (i. ix. 21 only. Exod. xxxvii. Ill (xxxviii. 21). 
 
 20. Jer. xxxiii. 211. w ch. xi. Η only t• Wisd. xix. 4. 
 
 ζ Act.s xvi. 5. Phil. i. i). a Rom. v. 4 reft. b ver. 1. 
 
 d Gal. ii. ft. 1 Tim. ii. 11. iii. 4 only t. dd 1 Tim. vi. 12. Heb. i 
 
 reference, Rom. vii. 2 red". 
 
 e = Acts XX. 21. 
 
 f ver 11. 
 
 t Act.s i. 17 relT. η Luke i. 23. Phil. 
 
 Num. viii. 22. V cunstr., Luke i. 10. 
 
 X 1 Cor. xvi. 17 reft'. y Acts ix. 13 reft'. 
 
 c Luke ii. 20. Act.s i/. 21 al. ronstr., ver. 1 1 al. 
 
 i. 1. iv. 14. X. 23 only t. (Ueut. xii. 17.) yen. of 
 
 g See Rom. xv. 
 
 Phil, i 
 
 ihe idea that a wish was inteiided, and so the futures have been changed to optatives : 
 for such they are, not infinitives: cf \ Thess. iii. 11, 12. 2 Thess. ii. 17; iii. 5, — and 
 rar readd, Rom. xvi. 20), with D^E-JK &c syr goth ChrThdrt Dam al : txt (χορηγηπαι 
 FG, πληθυνη C, -ναι EFG) BCD(EFG) 10. 23. 31-7-9. 71• lli>-78 al vss Cyr, Cypr 
 Ambrst Aug al. — rec -yt i'vjj/i., with mss and present edd of fF: txt BCDE'FGJK most 
 mss Cbr (Mtt's mss) Thl (do). — for ί^ικαιοσ., ^ιακοιηας 39. — 11. iva εν τταντι FG g 
 Chr ν lat-ff. — bef ης ins ττίξΐισσειητί edd : ahundelis ν al Pel Bed. — for ημ., νμων C^ 
 CO--?. 71-4. 91. 119-20 g syr-marg Dam. — for τω θ., Qtov Β: τω om D•.— 13. for Otw, 
 χριστώ Β 4G : in Domino v. — 13. και Sia B. — for νττοτα-γη, υπομονή 122. — απλό- 
 τητας 109. — for κοιν., διακονίας 39. 43 (al.'). — 14. aft επιποΘ., ins iSiiv 17. 66-marg 
 
 βρώσιν, which is the result of the sower's 
 labours). 11.] Method in which you 
 
 will be thus blessed by God. — 'In every 
 thing being enriched (the constr. is an 
 anacoluthon, as in reff. and in ch. i. 7 al. : 
 nothing need be supplied) unto all libe- 
 rality (i. e. in order that you may show all 
 liberality. On άπλ. see note, Rom. xii. 8), 
 ■which (of a sort wliich) brings about by 
 our means (as the distributors of it) thanks- 
 gi'ving (from those who wiU receive it) to 
 God.' 12.] ΕαψΙ. of the last clause. 
 
 — ' For the ministration (not on our part 
 who distribute, though it might at first 
 sight seem so : the next ver. decides διακο- 
 νία to mean, ' your administering by con- 
 tribution,' as in ver. 1 ) of this public ser- 
 ■vice (λειτ. here seems to approach more 
 nearly to its proper sense, serving the public 
 by furnishing the means of outfit for some 
 necessary purpose) not only ser'ves the 
 end of supplying by its help the -wants 
 of the saints, but of abounding (ireptao-. 
 may be transitive as in ver. 8, not only 
 filling up, but 'causing to overflow,' what 
 were νστιοήματα. But the usual intr. sense 
 is preferable. The emphasis is on ττρος- 
 (ίναπΧ. and πιρισσινιη'σα) by means of 
 many thanksgivings to God (n^ θίψ with 
 ίνχαρ., as in ver. 11, not with πίρισσιν- 
 ονσα, which would not, as Meyer observes, 
 give the sense of abounding towards God, — 
 £ΐς Γ. θίόν, see Rom. v. 15, or ης τ. δόζαν 
 
 τ. Bfov, ch. iv. 15, — but the objectionable 
 one of πίρισσίύη μοί τι, as John vi. 13. 
 Luke ix. 17)• 13.] they (the recipi- 
 
 ents) glorifying God (the particip. as in 
 ver. 11, an anacoluthon) by means of (not 
 'for,' as E. V., — διά την δοκ. : the proof, 
 &c., is not thatyb»• which they glorify God, 
 — see below, — but the occasion, by means 
 of which^ the proof (i. o. the tried reality 
 — the substantial help yielded by) of this 
 (your) ministration, for the subjection of 
 your profession as regards the Gospel of 
 Christ (i. e. that your ΰμυλογία, \_=z ' you 
 who confess Christ,'] ' is really and truly 
 subject in holy obedience, as regards the 
 gospel of Christ.' But tig must not be 
 joined with νποΓαγί'ι, as 'obedience to,' or 
 (E. V.) ' subjection unto,' — which is unex- 
 ampled, and would more naturally have the 
 art., Ty tig : it is ' towards,' ' in reference 
 to,' as in reif.), and liberality of your 
 contribution as regards them and as re- 
 gards all men ' (the same remarks apply to 
 tig as above). — Meyer would render άπλό- 
 τηη της κοινωνίας, ' the genuineness of 
 your fellowshi}) .•' but see note on Rom. xii. 
 8, and Rom. xv. 2C. He also makes tj; 
 VTTorayij τϊ)ς όμυλ., 'your subjection to 
 your confession,' which perhaps may be, 
 but disturbs the parallel of άπλότητι r. 
 κοιν. 14.] The constr. is very diffi- 
 
 cult. δfήσtι may dejiend on πεpισσtvovσa, 
 ver. 12 (but then we should expect διά as
 
 χ. 1. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 657 
 
 και αυτών csrjoei υπίξ) νμων εττιπυθουντων νμας Βιά ^f^^-^l'l^ 
 την ' νπίρβάλλουσαν γάηιν του θεοϋ εώ' ΰμϊν. ^^ ^ γάρΐΓ so''] Pet"ii 
 
 -fl-c'v-l' 5.' '-m<^ - ^ ^ ' 2. Ρ.-, xli.l. 
 
 τω ϋίω em τη ανίκοιηγιιτίο αυτού οωοία. (κ.ίπ< ) 
 
 -\r 1»'^Γ>\>νι-τ'^-\ t ~ i cli. iii. 10 reff. 
 
 Α. Αυτός be eyω Παύλος " τταρακαλω υμάς " om ""fcor ^'/ζ,,. 
 
 _" ο •'■ * ρ ' ' - - <Ν η \ cli.ii. 14al. 
 
 της πραυτητος και '^ eπιiικeιaς του γριστου, oc ^ κατά I'lereoniyt. 
 
 '^' m JoliD iv lu 
 
 Ads 11. 38 al. Dan. ii. 0. η Rom. xii. 1 refl'. ο 1 Cor. iv. 21 reff. η Acts xxiv. 4 onlv t 
 
 q = Acts ill. 13. Luke li. 31. 2 Chron. siii. 8. ■ j 1 
 
 Ambr.st. — ημάς arm. — ημιν arm. — 15. rec aft χάρις ins ^6 (for connexion), with 
 C^D^EJK &c vss (κ-αι χ. seth) gr-fF Ambrst-ms Sedul : om BC'D'FG 74 (al .') it ν goth 
 Ambrst-ed Aug Pel Bed. 
 
 Chap. X. 1. rec ττραοΓ., with CDEJK &c : txt BFG (al?).— /ifv om Κ 219•.— for 
 
 there), — or on δοξάζοντίς (but then it 
 should also depend on ίττί — and they could 
 not be said to glorify God J'or their own 
 prayers. If on δοξάζοντις as the instru- 
 ment whereby, it seems strange that αυτών 
 should be expressed), or αντώΐ' διησει 
 νπΐρ νμ. επιπ. νμ. may be (as JNIeyer) a 
 gen. absol., ' while they desire you in 
 prayers for you ' (but this seems forced, 
 and as De W. observes, would require ry 
 either before or after ίί/'/σίΐ). In the midst 
 of these diiBculties I see no way but this : 
 the datives preceding, vTtoTayy and α'ττλό- 
 τηη, have occasioned this also to be ex- 
 pressed in the dative, as though it depended 
 on ίπί, whereas it is in reality parallel with 
 £>(« πολλώί^ ίύχαρισηών and dependent on 
 irtpiaatvovna. Again, the words in another 
 point of view are parallel with tij ϋπυτaγy 
 and άπλότηΓΐ, inasmuch as these are νμων, 
 and this ΐίησις is αυτών. Amidst such 
 complicated antitheses and attracted con- 
 structions, it may suffice if we discover the 
 clue to the original formation of the sen- 
 tence : the meaniny is obvious enough, viz. 
 that ' glory also accrues to God by the 
 prayers of the recipients, who are moved 
 with the desire of Christian love (reff.) 
 to you. en account of the grace of God 
 which abounds eminently towards (over) 
 you ' (€φ' ύμ.. belonging to -ίπΓίρβ. not to 
 χάριν, which would, but not of absolute 
 necessity, require rj'/v) . 15.] Having 
 
 entered, in the three last vv., deeply into tlie 
 thankful spirit which would be produced in 
 these recipients of the bounty of the Corr., 
 he cuncluden with an ascri])tion, in the 
 spirit also of a thankful recijjient, of un- 
 feiyned thanks to Him, who hath enriched 
 us by the yift of His only Son, ichich brings 
 with it that of all things else (Rom. viii. 
 32), and is, in all its wonders of grace and 
 riches of mercy, truly ineffable, άΐ'(κδιίιγΐ)- 
 Γος. It is impossible to api)ly such a term, 
 so em))hatically placed as here, to any gift 
 short of THAT ONE. And the ascription, 
 as coming from Paul's fervent spirit, is very 
 natural in this connexion. This interpre- 
 VoL. II. 
 
 tation is preferred by Chrys. [δω^)ε('η' St 
 ίνταΰθα Χίγίί και τά τοσαϋτα αγαθά τά 
 Sia της ίλίημοσύνης -γινύμινα και τοΊς 
 Χαμβάνουσι και τοΊς τταρίχουσιν η, τά 
 απόρρητα αγαθά τά διά τΐίς παρουσίας 
 αΰτυϋ Ty οίκοιιμέΐ'^ ττάσ^ μετά 7Γολλί}ς 
 ΰωρηΟίντα Γί)ς• φιλοτιμίας' δ και μάλιστα 
 ίσην νποπτίνσαι. 'ίνα γαρ και κατά- 
 aTsiXy, και όίίψιλίοτίρους ΐργύσηται, ών 
 ίτυχυν παρά τυΰ θίον, τυύτων αϋτονς 
 άναμιμνίισκίΐ. και γάρ μίγιστον τοΰτο εις 
 προτροπήν αρετής άπάσης• διά και εν- 
 ταύθα τον λόγοι' κατ'εκλειαεν'\, and Thl. 
 [who, after beginning as Chrys., proceeds : »'/ 
 και των αγαθών άναμιμνί^σκει ών ί/ξ((ιί- 
 Θημεν διά της σαρκώσεως του χριστυϋ, 
 ώςανεί τοιαύτα λέγοιν. Μηδέν μέγα νομί- 
 σιιτε νμείς ποιεΐν άΐ'εκδιίιγητα γάρ εΐσι 
 τά αγαθά Ά ίΧάβομεν παρά Θεοϋ' κα'ι ει 
 ολίγα και φθαρτά δώμεν, τι μέγα ;] It is 
 also given by Bengel [" Deus nobis dedit 
 abundantiam bonorum internorum et ex- 
 ternorum, quae et ipsa est inenarrabilis, et 
 fructus habet consimiles"] , Meyer, al. The 
 other explanation (see Chrys. above) is 
 that of Calv., Grot., Est., al. 
 
 Chap. X. 1— XIII. 13.] Third Part 
 OF THE Epistle. Defence of his apos- 
 tolic DIGNITY, and labours, AND SUF- 
 FERINGS, against his ADVERSARIES : 
 ΛνίΤΗ ANNOl'NCEMENT OF HIS INTENDED 
 COURSE TOWARDS THEM OX HIS ENSUING 
 
 VISIT. X. 1 — 6.] He assures them of 
 
 the spiritual nature, and power, of his 
 apostolic office : and prays them not to 
 make it necessary for him to use such au- 
 thority against his traducers al his coming. 
 1.] δί marks the transition to a new 
 subject, — and aiiTOS points on to the ))er- 
 sonal characteristics mentioned below, ' Ego 
 idem Paulus, qui . . . ;' the words εγώ Ιΐαΰ- 
 λθ5 setting his apostolic dignity in contrast 
 with the depreciation which follows. Some- 
 times however we have αυτός used, where 
 the only object seems to be to bring out the 
 personality more strongly: so 1 Tiiess. iii. 
 11; iv. i(j; v. 23; 2 Thess. ii. 1(<; iii. 1«. 
 See also Rom. vii. 24 ; and ch. xii. 13 : — 
 U υ
 
 658 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 Χ. 
 
 r Rom. xii. ιβ: ττοοςωπον jU£v ^ ταπίΐνος εν νμιν, ^ απών δε Θαρρώ ίΐς bcdk 
 
 «Tcor τ3 '-.ΟΛ, ζ>\ϋ^ ^s ^ ι Ω ' '- "ν FGJK 
 
 rrft νμας ΟΗψαι οε το μη πη^ηον ναρρΊ)σαι τρ ττεττοί- 
 
 t eh V. 6 reft'. «/ ΤχνΛ'•/ χλ" '' ^Υλ Υ ' 
 
 nconstr..Phii. (jiioti Ίΐ AoyiLouai τοΛιΐί](7αι ίπι Τίί'ας τους Αο-γιί,ομε- 
 
 ίί. •• Winer, ', _ ' , _ !} . 
 
 τ i-ii' ί. ?5 rffl. νους ημάς ^ ως ''κατά σάρκα ^ πίοιττατουντας. '' tv 
 
 W = here only. >xL> - •lz^' c 'fl. 
 
 iKiiB?, σαρκι yap πίριπατουντες ου κατά σάρκα στρατΐνομίυα 
 λογ.^ημεΐΌί 4 ^^ ^^^ ■' οττλα τϊίς ^ στοατίίος ημωι» ου σαρκικά, άλλα 
 
 tjfeil/ αμα ι Ί ' ' 
 
 ήλ.ω Αήιομτι, κ.τ.λ., Xen. Anab. ϋ. 2. 13. 
 ζ Rnin. (i. 3ree.)Tui. 4. 
 b Rom. Ti. 4. c 1 Cor. Ix. 7 reff. d ' 
 
 ch.xi.2l. II. X 232. y 1 Cor. ip. 1. 
 
 . = Gal.ii. 20. Phil. i. 22, 24. Col. ii. 1. ITim.iii. IB. I'hilein. 16. 
 ch. Ti. 7. el Tim i. 18 only f. f 1 Cor. iii. 3 rcfl'. 
 
 tie, Si B, ττρος ί)2. — 2. Γ>} ττίττ. ταντη C^ (hence to οττλα r/jc, ver 4, C is rewritten) : 
 τη πίτΓ. oni 46'. 210'. — for t), i] arm. — \ο•γιζομαι to λογιζο/ΐίΐ'ους cm 44', but ins in 
 marg. — Time cm C^. — 3. for ιτίυιπ., οντίς Clenij : ζωντίς Orig,. — 4. στοατιας CDEFG 
 
 and such may be the case here : — but the 
 ος rather favours the former interpretation. 
 δια τ. τΓρ. κ. ίΐΓ.] as in Rom. .\ii. 1, 
 using the meekness and gentleness of Christ 
 (Matt. xi. 29, 30) as a motive whereby he 
 conjures them. And most appropriately : 
 he beseeches them by the gentleness of 
 Christ, not to compel him to use towards 
 them a method of treatment so alien from 
 that gentleness: "Remember how gentle 
 my Master was, and force not me His ser- 
 vant to be otherwise towards you." — 
 " ττραντης, lenitas, virtus magis absoluta : 
 iTTifiicfin, sequitas, magis refertur ad alios," 
 Bengel. See many e.xx. in Wetst. δς κατ. 
 irpos.] ' Wlio in personal appearance in- 
 deed (am) mean among you (he appropri- 
 ates concessively, but at the same time with 
 some irony, — so Chrys., κατ' ήρωπίαν 
 φησι, τα tKtii'ujv φθ(γ•/όμε: oc, — the impu- 
 tation by which his adversaries strove to 
 lessen the weight of his letters, κατά irp. 
 is not a Hebraism : Wetst. quotes several 
 instances of its usage by Polybius), but 
 when absent am hold (severe, out-spoken 
 in blame) towards you, 2.] but 
 
 (however this may be, assuming this cha- 
 racter of me to be true or not, as you please ; 
 — or, notwithsfaiidiiig that I may have been 
 hitherto ταπανόι: among you) I pray you 
 (not, God, as Bengel [1], al.) that I may 
 not (to μίι sets the object of ίέομαι in a 
 stronger light, see reff.) when present ('as 
 I intend to be :' — ' at my next visit ') 
 have to he hold (see above) with the 
 confidence (official peremptoriness, and re- 
 liance on my authority) with which I 
 reckon (am minded: not passive, 'am 
 reckoned,' as Vulg., LuSher, Beza, Estius, 
 Bengel, al., which, as Meyer remarks, would 
 naturally require άττών with τολμήσαι) to 
 he bold towards some, inamely) those who 
 reckon (of) us as walking according to 
 
 the flesh' {π(ηιπατΗΐ• κατ. σάρκα is well 
 explained by Estius, ' hoc est, secundum 
 carnales et humanos affectus vitam et ac- 
 
 tiones instituere Putabant enim Pau- 
 
 lum, quando prsesens eiat, sive captandae 
 gratise causa, sive quod timeret ofiendere, 
 vel simili affectu humano prohibitum fuisse, 
 ne potestatem exerceret, quam absens per 
 literas venditabat '). 3.] The γαρ 
 
 here shews that this ver. is not the refuta- 
 tion of the charge κατά σάοκα πιμητατΗν, 
 but a reason rendered for the δέομαι above; 
 and 6 Γ σπρκι and κατά σάρκα allude only 
 to the charge just mentioned. This indeed 
 is shewn by the use, and enlargement in 
 vv. 4 — 6, of στρατίνήμίθα, instead of irtpi- 
 ττατυΐψιν : — they who accuse us of walking 
 after the flesh, shall find that we do not 
 war after the flesh : therefore compel us 
 not to use our weapons. ev σαρ. ire- 
 
 piir.] ' Although we walk in the flesh,' 
 i. e. are found in the body, — yet we do not 
 take our apostolic weapons from the flesh 
 — do not make its rule, our rule of warfare. 
 4.] Enlargement of the idea in 
 (Γτρατίυόμ€θα. — If the warfare were ac- 
 cording to the flesh, its weapons would be 
 carnal : whereas now, as implied, they are 
 spiritual, tvtdTii τφ θιψ, — 'powerful in 
 the sight of God ' (i. e. ' in His estimation,' 
 ' after His rule of warfare.' It is not a 
 Hebraism ; see on Acts vii. 20 ; and for the 
 dat., Winer, § 31. 3. Some render it, ' bg 
 means of God ' — 'Beza,, Grot., Estius, Ben- 
 gel, al. : others, 'for God,' — God's means 
 of shewing His power, — Billroth, al., but 
 wrongly) in order to pulling down of 
 strongholds ' (see ref. Prov. So Philo de 
 Abrah. § 38, τον ίττιτίιχιημ'ον των tvai'- 
 τ'ιων ίοίων καθαιρίϊ)', — see also de Con- 
 fus. ling. § 20. Cf. Stanley : who thinks 
 that recollections of the Mithridatic and 
 piratical wars may have contributed to this 
 imagery. The second of the=e, not more 
 than si.xty years before the Ap.'s birth, and 
 in the very scene of his earlier years, was 
 ended by the reduction of 120 strongholds, 
 and the capture of more than 10,(100 
 prisoners). 5.] The nom. καθαι-
 
 2—7. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 G59 
 
 ουνατα τω θεω ττρος ' καθαιοεσιν ογυρωμάτων' e- *''*?'"• 
 ' λη-γισμους "^ καΟαίξΧιϋντίς κα\ τταν " υφωμα " £-οίρό/(£- '' ρ,/'^)^"ί; 
 
 1' κατα της -γνωσίως '^ του υεου, και ^ αινμαλωτιΐ,ηΐ'τίο •■ '«• 
 
 r' • ^s' ^ ~ - R \ f ivrr.S. ch.xiu. 
 
 !ΐ' νόημα εις την υπακοην του -χοίστοϋ, °και ' £ΐ' ki'iee'.lniy. 
 
 ΙΌ 
 
 Ίτα 
 
 ι t •' U ' C\ - - ν ν ff Prov. x'xi. 
 
 ίτοιμω ίγοντίς (Κΰικησαι ττασαν παρακοην, όταν ^^ ι Mhcc. 
 
 * πλί}(θωθ»ί υμών η " υττακοη. '""""pinv 
 
 • Ια fcara ττροςωπον ρΛεττίτε , ει τίς ττεποισει^ χ'•'!•• 
 
 ' m = Acts vix. 
 
 27. D Rom. viii. 39 only. Ji>l> xxiv. 24. ο ^ John xiii. 18. rh. xi. 20. Dan. xi. 14. ρ Rt-n. oljeci- 
 
 ch.ii. 14. qRum. vii.23. Luke xxi 24 only. Ezek. xii. 3 alex. r cli. ii. li ret?, 
 
 s and conslr, Rom.i.Sreff. thcreonly. (See -ωι exeii•, Acts xxi. 13reff.) Polyb ii. 34. 2. 
 
 u Rom. xii. 1» reft. τ Rom. v. 19. Heb. ii. 2 only f. \v = John iii. 2il al. fr. X gen. 
 
 snbj.. Rom. v. HI. XT.18. xvi. ly al. y vcr. 1. ζ conslr, Phil. i. 14. Philem. 21. Prov. 
 
 xir. 16. Isa. xxviii. 17. 
 
 (-πας JK al) : om Chr Thdrt Hil : Tijg σαρκός lect 13.— 5. tva κατισχννωμ(ν λογι- 
 αμοις και καταιρωμιν γνώσιν ττασαν και νοημη παν sah. — καθαιοουιτων D'(E.•'). — for 
 ■γνωσ., ίοζης 17• — fot" Otot', χβίητηυ sah. — bef αιχμ. om και FG it Ambrst-ed. — 
 αιχμαλωτίνοντίς 3Γ>. 71. 108 . 113 marg 114 lectt 13. 14 Thdrt, Dam.— at end add 
 αγυΐΓίς DEFG it goth {και tic την bef). — 6. ίτηιμως βχ. Ό'. — bef παηηκ. ins π<•ρα- 
 βασιν και 10. 31. 74. — -λί?!>ωθι; προτιρυν C 39 Aug. — η υττακ. νμ. D'EFG it al lat-ff 
 (^ημων D'F al Ambrst-ms). — 7. κατ. εκαστυν ττροςωπ. arm. — for πίποιθίν, δοκα 
 
 ρηΐιντίς refers to ly^fTc, the implied subject 
 of ver. 4; — this ver. carrying on the figure 
 in όχυρωμάτων. By λογισμούς he means, 
 as Clirys., τοί' τνφοί' το>> ΈΧΧηιηκοί', και 
 των σοφισμάτων κ. τώΐ' σν\^ογισμων την 
 Ισχνν ; — but not only these; — every tower- 
 ing conceit κατα σκρκα is also included. 
 K. trav υψ.] ' And every lofty edi- 
 fice (fortress or tower) which is heing 
 raised (or, raising itself) against the 
 knowledge of God (i. e. the true knewledge 
 of Him in the Gospel ; not subjective here, 
 but taken objectively, the cnnijiarata being 
 human knowledge, as lifted up against the 
 hnuwledye of God, i.e. the Gospel itself) 
 and leading captive every intent of the 
 mind (not ' thovyht,^ as E. V. : not f//^e/- 
 /ec/Mo/ subjection here, but that of the will, 
 is inended) into subjection to Christ' (in 
 the figure he treats ;'/ vwukih) t. χιιισταΐ•, 
 the new state into which the will is brought 
 by its subjection, as the country into ir/iich 
 it is led cojitive : compare ref. Luke). 
 6.] But perhaps some will not thus be sub- 
 jected. In that case we are ready to inflict 
 punishment on them : but not fill every 
 opportunity has been given them to join 
 the ranks of the obedient ; ' when your 
 obedience (stress on υμών) shall have 
 been completed.' He does not mention 
 any persons — not the disobedient, but 
 ' every (case of) disobodience,' and throws 
 out νμ(7ς into strong relief, as charitably 
 embracing all, or nearly all, tliose to whom 
 he was writing. Lachmann, strangely, and 
 as it seems to me mo.^t absurdly, puts a 
 porio<l at παμακοψ', and joins 'όταν πλη- 
 pwdij ΐιμ. ή υπακοή, τά κατά ττιχη,ωττον 
 βλίπίτε. More complete ignorance of the 
 
 U 
 
 Ap.'s style, and non-appreciation of the 
 fine edge of his hortatory irony, can hardly 
 be evinced, than this. 
 
 7 -XII. 18.] A DIGRESSION, IN WHICH 
 HE VINDICATES HIS APOSTOLIC DIGNITY, 
 HIS FRTIITFULNESS IN ENIRGY AND IN 
 SUFFERINGS, AND THE HONOUR PUT ON 
 
 HIM BY THE Lord in revel.ations 
 MADE to him. 7—11.] He takes 
 
 them on their own ground. They had 
 looked on his outward appearance and 
 designated it as mean. Well then, he 
 says : ' do ye regard outward appearance ? 
 even on that ground I will shew you that I 
 am an Apostle — I will bear out the severity 
 of my letters : I will demonstrate myself to 
 be as much Christ's, as those who vaunt 
 themselves to be especially His.'— This ren- 
 dering suits the conte.xt best, and keeps the 
 sense of κατϊι ττρήςωπον in ver. 1. The 
 imperative rendering of Vulg., Aitibros., 
 Theophyl , BiUr., Riick., 01>h., De Wette, 
 al., — ' took at the things before your eyes,' 
 is objectionable (Meyer), (1) from altering 
 the meaning of κατά πΐ)όςω7την : (2) be- 
 cause it gives too tame a sense for the 
 energy of the passage: (3) because /ίλί n-tri 
 generally in such sentences, in Paul's style, 
 comes first, see I Cor. i. 2G ; x. 18. Phil, 
 iii. 2 (3ce). Col. iv. 17- Another way, is 
 to take it as said without a question, but 
 indicatively. So Chrys., Calvin, ' Magni 
 facitis alios qui magnis ampuUis turgent, — 
 me, quia ostenfatione et jactantia careo. de- 
 spii'itis.' But in that case, surely some fur- 
 ther intimation would have been ijiM'ii of 
 such a sentiment than merely these words, 
 — the break after which, witiio'it any con- 
 necting particle, would tlms be exceedingly 
 D 2
 
 660 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 Χ. 
 
 ^wu^s"'^'^^' ^ ^ουτω ^ y^piarov tivai, τοΰτο ^ λογιζί'σθω ^ πάλιν αψ 
 
 b conslr., Rom. « -ι, « r\ \ ^ \ -« \f- 
 
 ii.3. εαυτού, οτι καυως αυτός γριστον, ούτως και Tjjuetc. 
 
 c=lCor. χϋ. ο,, \ { ' ' { ' >- 
 
 dj,!hnv.J9 *"ΐ^ ^ "^^ Ί"9 -πίρισσοτιρον τι καυχησωμαι τηρι τι\ς 
 e-Rom.vii.7. ^ ίζουσίας ημών '^ ης ' εδω /ctv ο κνριος ίΐς οικοδομην και 
 
 fLiikexii.4 , > \ η ' ' ~ ■> πι ' Ο' 9 '' ^ 
 
 gseficor.ix. Ο"*^ ^'C κ:οϋαί(>εσιν υμών, ουκ αισ^ννϋησομαι, ινα μη 
 tM^.^Xi"l^' δόζω " ως ^ αν " εκφοβίΓν υμάς δια των έπίστολων. 
 
 h attr., MKtt. ^ ' , „ . ^ , . 
 
 xviii. 1!Ι. Actsi. 1. Zeph.iii. 11. i So MHtt. χ. 1 al. fr. k = Rom. xiv. 19 reff. 1 ver. 4. 
 
 mgospp., Lukexvi.Scnly. Phil. i. 20. 1 Pet. iv. IR. 1 John ii. 28 only. a Me-fuKa χρήματα wi- aw 
 
 cii-ai 'Ρϋΰώπιοϊ, Herod, ii. 135. ο here only. Levit. xxvi. fi. 
 
 TrtTTotflfroi B. — aft χριστοί» ins ίουλος D'EFG it flor Ambrst-ms. — for αφ, ΐφ Β 21 : 
 apud d e ν, intra g. — rec aft ημnς ins χ^}ΐστον {ntipplenieniary), with D'EJK &c: om 
 BCD'FG 17. 31. 73. 80. 177-8 al vss gr-lat-ff.— 8. rt om {as unnecessary) BFG I7. 45. 
 52. G72. 73. 80 (si e/iiw it tol Sedul Vig and copt al) Chr Thl : txt CDEJK most mss 
 {nam et si ν Ambrst al and syrr al) Thdrt Dam Oec Ambrst al. — rec bef πιρισσυτ. ins 
 και {prob from desire io make the sentence a stronger climax-), with D^^JK &c Chr 
 Thdrt (who adds και also aft καυχ.) Dam Thl: om BCD'E'FO 39. 45. 120 vss"(appy) 
 Oec — πίρισσον 17. 23'. 39. 57 Chr Thl.— ri ττίρισσ. FG it Ambrst Vig: τι om 37 
 slav-ms Chr (text) Sedul. — καυχησομαι J al Thl : -σωμίβα 17. — ημών om C^ 66^. 219' 
 Syr ar-erp copt Chr al : υμ. aeth slav. — rec aft κιφ. ins ημιν {for particularity ; or io 
 confine more plainly such power to the Apostles only), with D'EFGJK &c g goth Thdrt 
 Oec : also bef ο κνο. 73 ν syr arm al lat-ff : add μοι copt Syr al : pref Chr Thl : add ημών 
 74 : txt (o θίος D>E>FG al it Vig) BCD' I7. 06^ al am tol (al latt) d e seth (and Syr 
 copt Chr Thl [Wtst] ).—καταισχυν9ησομαι 238.-9. aft iva ins C.t 3?. 48. C?. 72 to 4. 
 80 V al Syr Chr Thl-ed Pel Ambrst.— ι^οξω/^ίΐ/ D'EFG it Ambrst.— ως αν om D'.— 
 
 harsh. Others again fancifully mix up with 
 κατά ττρόςωπ. the supposed characteristics 
 of the (.') Christ-party, the having seen 
 Christ in the flesh : the being headed by 
 James the brother of the Lord, &c. &c. 
 €Ϊ Tis . . . .] ' If any one believes 
 himself to belong to Christ (lit. ' trusts in 
 himself to belong.' — From 1 Cor. i. 12, it 
 certainly was one line taken by the adver- 
 saries of the Ap. to boast of a nearer con- 
 nexion with, a more direct obedience to, 
 Christ, in contradistinction to Paul : and to 
 this mind among them he here alludes), 
 let him reckon this again out of his own 
 mind (i. e. let him think afresh, and come 
 to a conclusion obvious to any one's con- 
 mon sense [άι^' ίαυτον~\ and not requir- 
 ing any extraneous help to arrive at it), 
 that as he is Christ's, so also are we' 
 (that whatever intimate connexion with or 
 close service of Christ he professes, such, 
 and no less, is mine). 8.] This is 
 
 shewn to be so. Even more boasting than 
 he had ever yet made of his apostolic 
 power, would not disgrace him, but would 
 be borne out by the fact. — ' For if we 
 were to boast {ίάν is not concessive, but 
 hypothetical, as in 1 Cor. xiii. 1. — re yap 
 generally has a corresponding clause fol- 
 lowing, with rf, και, Si, or η, as Eur. Phcen. 
 1313, ΐμός Tt γάρ τταϊς yfjg ολωλ' ΰττερθα- 
 νών, . . . /3()^ (if δώμα ποι•, and Thucyd. i. 
 12 bis, Rom i. 26 ; vii. 7, — but sometimes 
 the corresponding clause is wanting, being 
 understood, or, as apparently here and in 
 
 ...καθ- 
 
 Heb. ii. 11, allowed to pass out of mind while 
 following out the thought of the first clause. 
 See Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 115. 5) some- 
 what more abundantly (than we have 
 ever done : or than in ν v. 3 — C) concern- 
 ing our power which the Lord has given 
 for building you up and not for pulling 
 you down {και πώς φησι, λο^ιτμοϋς 
 καθηιροϋντίς ; οτι αυτό τοϋτο μάλιστα 
 οικοδομής ηδός ίστι, το τά κωλύματα 
 άνηιρίϊν, και τά σαθρά διιλίγχιιν, και 
 τά άλ)ΐθίί σνντιθίΐ'αι ίΐ' οΙκοδομ^Ί. Chrys ) 
 Ι shall not be put to shame ' (οΰ δίίχθή- 
 σομαι ■ψίνδόμενος υύδ( άλαζονίνόμίνυς, 
 Chrys.). 9.] follows on ver. 8, but 
 
 requires some clause to be supplied such as 
 ' And I say this,' or the like. Meyer 
 would join it immediately to αίσχννθ., and 
 regard it as the purpose to be served by 
 the fact verifying his boast. But as De 
 W. observes, a particular result like this 
 can hardly be bound on to a general asser- 
 tion like that of ver. 8. To suppose the 
 purpose of Paul's boast of apostolic power 
 being borne out, to be merely "iva μη δόϊ,ω, 
 &.C. would be out of keeping with the im- 
 portance of the fact. So that 'ίνα μι) 
 δόζω is much better taken subjectively — ' I 
 say this, because I wish not to seem, &c.' 
 — cis άν, — as Vulg. ' tanquam terrere vos.' 
 It takes oft' the harshness of ΙκφοβΓιν. " ώς 
 άν in later (? see retf.) Greek, has the sense 
 of ' quasi, tanquam,' — άν losing its proper 
 force, in a commonly current expression ; 
 and the sense is much the same as that of
 
 8—12. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 661 
 
 ^" ΟΤΙ αι μίν επιστοΑαι ^ ψησιν ' ρορειαι και ισγνραι, η οε ρ?^*^"•"» 
 τταρουσια του σώματος ασοίνης και ο Λθ"νος •= ' 
 
 του7θ ^ λυγ(^£ίΐ0ω ο 
 ■(») λόγω CI ίΤΓίστοΑων 
 παροντίς τω έργω. υυ yap 
 
 μίνος 
 ΐσμίν 
 
 τοιούτος, 
 
 εζουσίΐ'ΐ)- " 03. acisxx 
 
 r , 7. 
 ΟΙΟΙ f 1 Cor. 1.25. 
 
 άλλα αυτοί εν εαυτοις εαυτούς 
 
 λ' "^ ^s^l Cor. xvi- 
 
 οτΓΟίΤίς, Totourot καί i7refl. 
 
 y.y- 2> " *• See 1 Cor. i. 
 
 ■^ τολμωαεν eyKoivai η 2S- 
 
 ■ "^ / 5 ' η Rom. xiT. 3 
 
 σνγκριναι "εαυτούς τισί των εαυτούς "^ συνισταΐΌντων* vAclssxiLsa. 
 
 ^i - (a ch.ii. 6, 7. 
 
 μετρουντες, και avy- xii.2,&c. 
 
 •^ r ^' / w Rom. XV. 18. 
 
 Col. iii. 17. IJohniii. 18. (See 1 Cor. ir. li), 20. 1 Thess. i. 5.) χ 1 Cor. v. 3 reff. y = 1 Cor. vi. 1 reff. 
 
 ζ here only t Jos. B. J. ii. 8. 7, eis τόι. ομιλον ίγκριΊεται. a 1 Cor. ii. 13 only t. Gen. xl. 8 
 
 al. = VVisd. vii. 2!). XV. 18. b Ist pers., ch. iii. 1 reff. c ch. iii. 1. d Mark iv. 24. 
 
 ίκφοβονντίς DE d e (and g as a var readg) : ως αν om 177• — 10. Sia r. εττιστ. om Chr. — 
 on αι £7ΓΐσΓολίΐί μίν φασίρ Β : quoniarn quidem episiolce inquiunt ν g. — ί%ου£ίνημίνος 
 Β : t-xt DETGJK mss (appy) if. — 11. for ίπμιν, μίν FG (not g). — τω λόγω om Chr. — 
 12. τολμώ Β. — k-pij'ai Fii 80. — aft fyicp. add (αντους D'E and (oing fair, follg) D-. — 
 αλλ D'J, — ti> om Syr ar-erp. — ίουτυις (αυτούς DEK 219 al Chr Thdrt. — αυτυις F. — 
 συπασιν B^ Thdrt-«d : ισασιν al: ov συν. om 74- ν Lucif Pel Fulg. — ου αυν. ημίΐς Ss 
 
 ώς alone." Meyer. Winer takes ώς av 
 (κψίΐβΰι^ as = ώς αϊ' ίκφοβίΰμι, Gram. 
 § 43. 6, and is followed by Olsh., but this, 
 in the presence of the above idiom, is un- 
 necessary. Slot των Ιττιστολών] He 
 had written tivo before this, see 1 Cor. v. 9; 
 but this is not necessarily here implied : 
 for he may reckon this which he is now 
 writing. Still less can we infer hence that 
 a third had been written before this 
 (Bleek). 10.] φησίν, taken by 
 Winer (§ 49), De W., and Meyer, as im- 
 personal — t)eipt e^, ' men say : but why 
 should not the ης of ver. 7i and ό Γοιοΐτος 
 of ver. 1 1 , be the subject .' βαρίϊοι] 
 see in Wetst., definitions from the rhetori- 
 cians of βαρι'ίτης in discourse. Among 
 other illustrations of it, Aristides mentions 
 όταν τι άτοπον ίαντφ Karapaaij' οίον, 
 Τίθνάνηι μα\\ον η ταντ' (Ιρηκίναι βούλο- 
 μαι (see 1 Cor. is. 1δ), and orav ίΐς κρίσιν 
 
 personal appearance, in Winer's RWB. 
 vol. ii. p. 221, note. 11.] λογι- 
 
 ζίσϋω, as in ver. 7• ό τοιούτος» 
 
 viz. who thus speaks. The introduc- 
 tion of the ver. without any conne'cting 
 particle gives force and emphasis. — After 
 irapovTis supply ίσμίν, not ΐσόμίθα. Not 
 only the conduct of the Apostle on his next 
 visit, but his general character, is in ques- 
 tion. 12-18.] The difficulty of this 
 passage is universally acknowledged. In 
 early times Theodoret wrote: ασαφώς ίίπαν 
 το χόιρημα τοϋτο yiyiiaipiv, and adds as 
 a reason, ivapywg t\sy^ai τους αίτιους 
 οϋ βουλόμενης. He substantiates what 
 has just been said, by shewing how un- 
 like he is to those vain persons who 
 boast of other men's labours ; — for he 
 boasts of what God had really done among 
 them by him, and hopes that this boast 
 may be yet more increased. 12.] 
 
 ayc'iyiw των Τίθνίώτων ίΐ'ίόζων, disclaims resemblance to those false teach- 
 
 olov, τΓ7]\ίκον άΐ' στίνάζακν οι npoyovoi 
 (see 1 Cor. xv. 18). ττορονσια .... 
 
 άσ-θίνης] No countenance is given by these 
 words to the idea that Paul vifas of weak 
 physical constitution, or short in stature. 
 His own explanation of them is sufficient as 
 given in 1 Cor. ii. 1 ff. It is, that when he 
 was present among them, he brought, not 
 the strength of presence or words of the 
 carnal teachers, but abjured all such influ- 
 ence and in fear and trembling preached 
 Christ crucified. It was this, and not 
 weakness of voice, which made his λόγος 
 to be ϊζονθινημίνος. At the same time, 
 the contrast being between his ephtles and 
 his word of mouth, his authority as unac- 
 companied or accompanied by his presence, 
 it must be assumed, that there was some- 
 thing (see on ch. xii. 7) which discom- 
 mended his appearance and delivery. See 
 the traditional authorities for the Ap.'s 
 
 ers who made themselves their only stand- 
 ard. — ' For we do not venture (ironical : — 
 " dum dicit quod non faciat, notat quid 
 isti faciant." Bengcl) to number ourselves 
 among (fTi)i'api0^r;ff.u,Theoi)hyl., Occum., 
 ' inserere,' Vulg. : see examples of this 
 usage, with tic principally, but also with 
 μίτά aud i-Ki w. gen., in Wetst.), or com- 
 pare ourselves with {avyKpntiv is pro- 
 perly, in classical Greek, ' to compound,' or 
 ' unite ;' but in later Greek, ' to compare :' 
 ό avyKpiTiKoQ τρόπος, with the gramma- 
 rians, is the comparative degree) some 
 of those who commend themselves (the 
 charge made against him, iavrov συν- 
 ιστάνε, see ch. iii. 1 ; v. 12, he makes as a 
 true one against the false teachers) ; —but 
 (they), themselves measuring themselves 
 by themselves, and comparing them- 
 selves with themselves, are not wise.' 
 The renderings are verg various. Chrys.,
 
 662 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 Χ. 
 
 Malt xiii. ' * \ « - ■> 
 
 }-ia.Rom. i^pivovTtc ζαυτους εαυτοις ου 
 
 13 
 
 δί 
 
 ίΐς τα αμετοα κανχ^ησομίυα, 
 
 ι f i -Γ k • ' , - ' 
 
 κανόνος ον ίμίξ>ισίν ημιν ο 
 
 συνιουσιν. '" tJjiie'C ^^ ου /c 
 άλλα κατά τυ μίτηον του 
 
 Pl»t. Ale. i. ρ. 111. 
 i altr., \a. 8. 1 John i 
 
 ghere nnly +. 
 
 k Kom xii. 3. 
 
 . Irtonlyt? 
 i.lyt. 
 
 ίυς μίτρηυ ίψίΚίσυαι 
 
 Jiib xxxriii. 5 Aq. ^σπupτiol', LXX.) 
 
 om {perhapn because the transcriber's eye passed from ov above to ονκ JoUg, and so 
 omitted all between ■ or perhaps on acct of tlie difficulty of the vords. See the 
 readings discussed in Stanley's note) D FG 10!) it Ambrst Sing-cler-in-Cypr Sedul 
 Vig (Idacl : ins BD'EJK mss nrly (appy) copt syrr goth al Chr Thdrt Dam Thl 
 Oec Augj'.-lS. rec ονχ,, with D"E &c Oec : txt BD'FGJK 31. 57- 7:$. 80. 93. 
 10!}-17-'J2. 219-38 Chr Thdrt Dam Thl.— ίΐς το αμίτυον D'FG : in immensum it ν 
 (also ver 1.5). — κ-αιιχω// fi'ot FG g Sing-cler : -χω/ηθα al : -χησωμίθα al : om D' d e : 
 add KaHantp οντιιι Chr. — for ου, υσυν 64-7^ al. — for (μ(μισίΐ', ίμιτοηπίν 49. (!4-7'• 
 74 Thl-ms : mensus est it ν lat-fF : partitus est Ambrst. — ί/μιι- om FGJ 4(». 219 g: 
 transp al.— for ϋίος, κύριος DE Vig (Idac) : add Jesus "Vig. — αψικ^ιθ. FG 109 
 
 al., make σνηο7<σιν a particip., τοντΊστι, 
 μι) αΙηΟανομίνοις πώς ιϊσι καταγί\α(ΤΓ<Η 
 Toinvra ά\ηζη}>ίιιήμίνοι : and see again 
 below. Others take it rightly, as = σνν- 
 ιασιΐ', but make μ^rιι<ιύι'τtς, &c., the object 
 of πννιιιϊ'πη' : * know not that they are 
 measuring ' Sfc. : but the corresponding 
 sentence ήμΰς ff, κ.τ.Χ., shews that this 
 sense would be irrelevant ; for the Ap. does 
 not oppose their ignorance of their foolish 
 estimate of themselves to his own practice, 
 but that foolish estimate itself. — Others 
 again, as Emmerling and Olshausen, take 
 άλλο — aviiovnii) to apply to the Apostle 
 himself, as contrasted with the ηνίς : ' We 
 do not venture, ^c, — but we ourselves 
 measure (supply ϊσμίν, ' are in the habit of 
 measuring') ourselves by ourselves (i.e. as 
 ver. 18. by what the Lord has really made 
 us to be) a7id compare ourselves ivith our- 
 selves, foolish as we are (reputed to be: — 
 avi'nwatv being a participle). But foolish 
 we are not : we wilt nut boast ourselves' 
 &c. — But (1) this rendering would abso- 
 lutely require the art. before αΰ συπαΐ'^αν, 
 which, anarthrous, would imply, not an im- 
 putation, but the jacl .• (2) the mode of 
 expression (αΰτυι tv tutiToit, ΰιντ. μίτρ.) 
 would be a most extraordinary one to con- 
 vey the meaning supposed : and (3) the 
 meaning itself would be irrelevant when 
 obtained. Another variety of this rendering 
 is to take (as Bos, Schrader, al.) ίαυτοΊς, 
 ov τιη'ΐυϋσιΐ', := taintac, νύ τοις σν>'κη'<7ΐν 
 — with ourselves, not with thevrise: w-hichis 
 also inadmissible.— Others again (see var. 
 read.) would omit υν ηνηοϋσιΐ'• ήμίΐς ck, 
 • — which has been an evident correction, 
 on the suppositioti that άλλίί nvroi, κ.τ.\., 
 belonged to the Apostle, to expunge words 
 so much ill the way of such an interpreta- 
 tion. — I may observe that much of the diffi- 
 culty has ari-en from taking avroi with 
 άλλο as the subject to ov σννιυνσιν, whereas 
 it belongs to what follows, άλλα αυτοί tv 
 
 eavr. favr. pirn. κ.τ.\., as in the version 
 given above : the subject of σιιΐΊονσίΐ> being 
 to be supplied, and the constr. being an inac- 
 curate one. Calvin well illustrates the sense, 
 by the reputation which any moderately 
 learned man gained among the ignorant 
 monks of his day — " Si quis tenuem mode 
 gustum elegantioris literaturse habeat, . . . 
 spargitur de eo mirabilis fama, adoratur 
 inter sodales . . . Inde pisecipue monachis 
 insolentissimus ille fastus quod se metiuntur 
 ex se ipsis : quum in eorum claustris nihil 
 sit praeter barbariem, illic nihil mirum, si 
 regnet luscus inter csecos. Tales erant isti 
 Pauli semuli: sibi eniin intus plaudebant, 
 non considerantes quibus virtutibus con- 
 staret vera laus, quantumque a Pauli et 
 similium excellentia distarent." 13.] 
 
 ' But we (oppos. to those spoken of in last 
 ver.) will not (ever : will never allow our- 
 selves to) boast without measure (lit. ' boast 
 as far as to things lau/ieasured.' els with 
 an adj. and the art. is used to signify the 
 extent to which; so Herod, vii. 229, κατ- 
 ίκίατο iy Άλπηιοίσι όφβαΧμιώντίι, ές το 
 ίσχατον : as ίττι with the same denotes the 
 direction towards which, as ίττϊ τϋ μαζον 
 Κυσμυνντίς, . . . ΐπί τύ μνθώΐίς ΐκνίΐ'ΐ- 
 /c/;(cora,Thucyd.i.21, — 'without measure,' 
 scil. as they do who compare themselves 
 with themselves and measure themselves by 
 themselves, — for there is no standard for, 
 no limit to, a man's good opinion of him- 
 self. The plar. τα άμίτιια, instead of το 
 (Ίμίτρον, seems to be chosen to generalize 
 the negative — ' we adopt no such vague 
 standard for our boasting ') but according 
 to the measure of the rule (-ύ μίτρ. τοϋ 
 καν. — 'the mesisare pointed out by the rule,' 
 gen.-subj.) whicli God has apportioned 
 to us as a measure, to reach as far as to 
 
 you. — ^I'l; tfnpirrti> /'iph' 6 ". μίτρκν z= oi> 
 f/if(j. ήμ. ύ W. μίτρκν, ' which (ιταΐ'(ί)ΐ') God 
 
 has apportioned us as a measure,' — or, as 
 De W., του μίτρου ο ίμίρ. ι)μ• 6 ΰ., in which
 
 13—17. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 663 
 
 m 
 
 "ΧΡ* '^"' νμίον '■* ου yap ως μη εφικνουμενοι £ΐς 'n = Actsxi.5 
 
 reft: 
 
 ύμας " ΰπίρΐκτύνομίν " ίαυτους, "'άχρι yap και υμών oiu'txVis. 
 ° ίψθασαμίν ^ ίν τω iuayyiXl•' '■""■ -^.'-— Γ.• 15 
 
 II L. K.im. 
 
 ουκ '*- °' '■'^β• 
 
 , , fv τω iυayyiAιω του γοιστου ν.„.ν 
 
 ίΐς τα ^ αμξτξία '^ καυχωμίνοι '^ ΐν ^ αλλοτοίοις ^ κόποις, ,Ί'. '"'' 
 
 'λ '^ ^\ >' t '' y ι - ι f - q f^oni ii. 17. 
 
 EATTtoa οε ενοιτες αι/ι;ανοαεΐ'»ίς rjjr πίστίως υμωτ rKum. χίτ.4 
 εν υ^ιι/ ^ μtya\υv^Ύ\vaι κατά τον 'κανόνα ηαων είς firVs'l'icor 
 
 ν ' 16 W' ^χf » f-\v' Λ' iii.Cireft 
 
 πίρισσίίαν, ας τα νπίρεκίΐνα υμών ευαγγίλισα- α Luke ι.46. 
 
 σθαι, ουκ kv "^ αλλοτριω ' καΐ'όη ^ εις τα έτοιμα ° icau^j'j- oKingsvu. 
 
 _ η 17 ζ ' ^^ ' q ' ' Q ' ί\ . '^*^• 
 
 σασυαι. ο οε καυ\ωμίνος ^ εν κυριω ^ καυγασσω vRom.v. ΐ7. 
 
 W 1 Pet. 1. 25. Heb. ii. 3. 
 
 χ here only f. 
 
 y ver. 13. 
 
 Chr (Mtt's ms). — 14. for ου yap ως, ως yap Β 114-16 : οΐ'χ ως μη arm : ου γαρ μη ως 
 Chr : ως μη yap 178. — for ίφικί'ονμίΐ'οι, αψικν. Κ al : αφικ-ομη'οι FG : αφικηνμη'οι 
 106: ίφ(κομίν(α€\ΐΓ.—ίφ ημάς 2\ϋ.—15. σλλ tv 89. 178 Dam ThI (Mtt's ms).— for 
 ΚΟΤΓ., novate Thdrt-ros : κονοις (err) F : τοττοις 3 Dam. — ί^ί om J 64. 8'J. 109-14-22 lect 
 l4. — παλ(.ι/ £1/ υ^ιν arm. — 16. ίον υπ•(ρίκ , ντηρκκμίνα 116. — for καυχησησθαι, -εσθαι 
 
 latter ca.se μίτρον is in oppos. with κανόνος : 
 but I prefer the former. Sir. Green, Grammar 
 of the N. T. dialect, p. 269, makes μίτρου 
 governed by ίφικίσθαι, as in ούτω τύμβους 
 άφίκόμην, Eur. Pboeu. 361 ; τυϋ /3ioi' (ύ 
 ηΐΐοντι, Herod, i. 30. Μγ objections to 
 this construction are, (1) that ίφικνούμινοι 
 εις υμάς is used absolutely in the very next 
 clause, which makes it probable that the 
 same usage is found here : (2) that an un- 
 necessary harshness is introduced, which I 
 cannot persuade myself that the Ap. would 
 have used, and which is apparent even in 
 Mr. G.'s English, ' of advancing in standard 
 as far as even you.' See Stanley's note. 
 €ψικεσθαι, is the inf. of the 
 purpose, ' that we should reach :' or 
 perhaps (but not so well) of the result, 
 * 60 that we reach.' 14.] Further 
 
 expl. of ίφικ. άχρ. κ. νμ. 'For we are 
 not stretching ourselves beyond our 
 bounds, as (we should be doing) if we did 
 not reach to you (not, as if we had not 
 reached to you, as Luth., Beza : the pres. 
 betokens the allotment of the field of apos- 
 tolic work as his own, ' ut si non pervenia- 
 mus.' The μή shews that the case is only 
 a supposed one: so also I Cor. iv. 18, but 
 compare 1 Cor. ix. 26, ώς• ονκ άίρα cipwv, 
 where the case is the real one : see Winer, 
 § 59. 3) : for even as far as you did we 
 advance (the jjroper meaning of φθ^νω 
 must hardly be pressed here : the Ap. would 
 not introduce a distinct thought by a word 
 of secondary importance in the sentence) 
 in the gospel ' (tlie element in which our 
 advance was made: 'the gospel' ^ 'the 
 promulyation of the gospel'). 15.] in 
 
 appos. with <ιΰ yoo, <.r.\. ver. 14, and car- 
 rying out the thought. — ' Not boasting 
 without measure in other men's labours 
 
 (the element of the boasting), but having 
 a bore, if (or, as) your faith grows, to be 
 enlarged (not as many Comm., * cele- 
 brated ,•' the metaphor of measure still re- 
 mains) among you (so Chrys., Theophyl., 
 Est., Meyer, iv ίψ. is not to be joined 
 with ηϊιζ., as Luth., Calv., Beza, Olsh., Be 
 W., in which case it would be superfluous) 
 according to our rule (i. e. our apportion- 
 rnent of apostolic worA, for we seek not 
 vTreptfcrii'i/fii' (ίΐυτοί'ς) unto abundance 
 (' so as to abound more than we now do,' 
 viz. as ver. 16 explains). 16. J (with 
 
 a view) to preach the gospel as far as 
 (see on {ΐ'ς• τά άμ., ver. 15) the parts be- 
 yond you (Wetstein quotes from Thomas 
 Magister, έπ€Κ€ΐνα ριιτορίς λέγουσι .... 
 iiirepiKeiva ("f μόιοι υ'ι α{φφίΐκίς, la ca- 
 naille). — not (with a view) to boast our- 
 selves with regard to (or, ' to the extent of;' 
 ' to extend our boasting to ') things ready 
 made to our hands within another man's 
 line' {κανών througiiout seems to be used 
 of a measuring line: according to the me- 
 taphor so common among us, ' in his line,' 
 — i. e. ' within the line which Providence has 
 marked out for him '). 17.] He sets 
 
 forth to them, in contrast (os) to this boast- 
 ing themselves in another's line, whicli was 
 the practice of his adversaries, wherein the 
 only legitimate bnasling must consist : viz. 
 in the Lord, the Source of all grace and 
 strength and success in the ministry ; see 
 1 Cor. XV. 10. 18.] The reason of 
 
 this being, that not the self-coynniender, 
 but he ivhotii the Lord commends by select- 
 ing him as His instrument, as He liad the 
 Αρ., and giving him the ίτηητιΑη ηυστα- 
 τικί], to be known and read by all men, of 
 souls converted and churches founded, is 
 ζόκιμος, ' approved,' i. e. really and in the
 
 664 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 Χ. 18. 
 
 a ver. 12. 
 
 b So Mark vii. 
 
 In. J..hn i. 
 
 18, :i3 al. 
 
 18 
 
 oo/c 
 
 ιμος, 
 
 ου yap ο ίαυτον συνιστανων, ίΚίΐνος εστιυ 
 αλλ ον ο κχφιυς " συνιστησιν. 
 
 XI. ^ '''Όφίλου ^ ανξίγίσθί μου μικρόν τι ^ αφροσν 
 νης. α\\α κα\ ^ ανίγ^ίσθί μου. ^ ^ι>λω yap υμάς ' θίοί 
 ι>.3. η"!). ' Ζ,ηλω' ^ ηρμοσάμην yap υμάς ίνι αν^ρι τταρβίνον ayvriv 
 
 BDEF 
 GJK 
 
 18 ren. 
 d 1 for iv. 8 
 reff. 
 
 siii 22. Job 
 vi.afi. 
 i Rom. X. 2. 
 
 fver Ifi. 
 j here only. 
 
 g Mark vii. 22 
 Prov. xix. 14. 
 
 . 17, 21 only. Job iv. 6. 
 k See Rev. xiv. 4. 
 
 h = Gal. iv. 17 bis. Zech. i. 14. 
 I = Tit. ii. 6. Prov. xix. 13. 
 
 91 : ευπγγίλίίτασθαι 37• — 18. ο om 109. — rec συνιστών (more usual form), with D'JK 
 &c Mac Dial Chr al : txt BDEFG all (not Jer') Orig Eph Thdrt Dam.— 5οκ. tariv DE 
 vss : e<rriv ο ίοκ. FG : txt Β &c. « 
 
 Chap. XI. 1. ωφίλον D^EFGJK 40-8. 72. 109-10'-22i Chr (Mtt's ms) Oec: txt 
 BD' (o0tXoi') &c Chr Thdrt Dam Till. — rec ηνιιχισθί {corrn for elegance: see note), 
 with mss Chr-ed Thl : ανίχίσθί {corrn to folia αηχ.) BK all Thdrt Chr (Mtt's ms) : 
 txt DEFGJ most mss Chr-mss, Dam Oec Thl (Mtt's mSj). — Mill (not rec) om τι, with 
 FGJK all it al Chr Thdrt Dam Thl (Mtt's mss) Oec Lucif al: ins BDE all ν goth al 
 Thl Bed.— rec ins -ης bef αφροσινης, with FG &c Thl : om BDE al : Mill (not rec) 
 τη αφυυσννη, with .IK all copt gr-fif: αψροσυνην 4ϋ syr al : add μυυ (see above) FG it V 
 al lat-fF: txt BDEFG (see above) it ν goth al Lucif Bed. — μον om 71 arm slav-ms. — 
 2. ζη\ων yap νμ., θιω ζϊ^λω d e Lucif Ambrst : ζ^^λω θίον 48. 72 al. — ως τταρθίνον 
 
 end abiding the test of trial. IkeXvos 
 
 brings out the distinction of the man who 
 is ίο'κι/ιος, — see reff. and Winer, § 23. 3. 
 We have the usage in English in affirmative 
 sentences, e. g. ' The Lord, he is the God,' 
 1 Kings xviii. 39 : but not in negative ones. 
 
 XL] His boasting of himself : 
 and 1 — 4.] apologetic introduction of it, 
 by stating his motive,— viz. jealousy lest 
 they should fall away from Christ. 
 1.] άν£ίχ€σθ€ is the Hellenistic form, — 
 ■ηνύχ. the Attic, not ' utinam tolerassetis,' 
 as Calv., al. : the imperfect is put after tiOf, 
 al, ΰφίλον, &.C., ' ubi optamus eam rerum 
 conditionem, quam non esse sentimus :' 
 Klotz ad Devar. p. 516, cited by Meyer. 
 
 μου and άφροσυνη5 are not both 
 genitives after juu-poV n, as Meyer : nor is 
 it so in the passage quoted by him. Job vi. 
 26, LXX : ovSk γαρ ΐψών φθίγμα ρήματος 
 άν'ίξομαι. In both cases the personal pro- 
 noun is governed by the verb, as indeed 
 here in άνίχίϋΒί μου immediately following 
 — and μικρόν τι αφροσύνης is the accus. of 
 remote reference, as in the double accus. 
 constr. άλλα K.] ' But (why need I 
 
 request this .' for) you really (see note, ch. 
 V. 3) do bear with me.' The indie, is 
 mucli better than the imper. rendering (as 
 Vulg., Beza, Calvin, Grot., Estius, Bengel, 
 al.), — which, after όφίΚην άνιίχ., is very 
 flat, and gives no account of the και. He 
 says it, to shew them that he does not ex- 
 press the wish as supposing them void of 
 tolerance for his weakness, but as having 
 eaperienced some at their hands, and now 
 requiring more. 2.] ' That forbear- 
 
 ance which you do really extend to me, and 
 for more of which I now pray, is due from 
 
 you and I claim to have it exercised by you, 
 because I have undertaken to present you to 
 Christ as a chaste bride to her husband, and 
 (ver. 3) I am jealous for fear of your falling 
 away from Him.' θ£οΐ ζήλω] so t /λι- 
 
 κριΐ'ίίςι θίοϋ, ch. i. 12 : 'a godly jealousy :' 
 see note there. Meyer after Chrys., Estius, 
 al., would render it, 'with God's jealousy,' 
 ' with such a jealousy as God has.' But 
 though θβυν ζί/λί_ι) and ri,J rov θιοϋ ζή^ιρ 
 are for most purposes identical, I cannot 
 but think that the latter expression would 
 have been chosen to express such an idea 
 as ' xvith the zeal which God has.' And 
 the rendering, ' with a godly zeal,' i. e. one 
 which has God's honour at heart, satisfies 
 well what follows : see below. ηρμο- 
 
 σάμην] ' I betrothed you (viz. at your 
 conversion : ττυομί'ίιστωρ υμών ίγίΐ'όμην 
 και τυϋ γάμου μίσίτης, Theodoret. 
 Ordinarily, the father, or the bridesman 
 {■παρανϊ'μφιοί.) is said αρμόζΐΐν : the 
 middle voice is used of the bridegroom 
 only. So among other exx. in Wetst., — 
 ιΐχίν ev δόμυις Αίγισθος, οϋΰ' ί'/ρμοζί 
 νυμφίψ Tivi, Eur. Electr. 24, — and άρ• 
 μοσαμίνυυ Λιυτοχίδίω Πίρκαλον την 
 Χ.ί\ωιιος θυγητίρα, χαι ηχών γυναίκα . . ., 
 Herod, vi. 65. But in Philo we have 
 γάμος ov άρμόζίται ή^ονή, de Abr. § 20) 
 to one husband, to present (i. e. in order 
 that I may present in you) a chaste virgin 
 to Christ' (viz. at His coming: ύ μιν ούν 
 τιάρων καιρός μι^ηστίίας ίστίν 6 Si μίλ- 
 λωΐ' τώί) γάμων, οτε κραυγή γίνίται, tSoi) 
 ό ννμφίος. Theophyl.). τω χρ. is 
 
 not in constructive apposition with tvi 
 arSpi, but explains and fixes it : the em- 
 phasis being on τταρθίνον άγνην.
 
 XI. 1—4. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 665 
 
 παραστησαι τω γυριστώ "^ φορονμαι όε μήπως, ως ο m-Rpm.xu 
 Οφις " ίΕηπάτησίν Ευαν ° av γϊ? ° ττατουργία αυτοϋ, "fen?'"' " 
 
 ρ. Λ " vq / ' ~ r''^ - sf\'' Γ \θ=.1 Cor. iii. 
 
 φυαρτ] τα ^νοήματα υμών απο της αττΑοτητος \ και lyr^" 
 της αγνοΓ^ΓΟς] τί/ς "«ς τυι^ χοίστοι/. ■* £t μ£ν -yap ο qchji^ uVe 
 
 ερχόμενος άλλον ίησουν κηρύσσει ον ουκ εκηουί,αμ^ν, a.orix.s 
 η πνεύμα "έτερον λαμβάνετε ο ουκ έλάβετε, tj ευαγ- '^^Γ'^"* 
 
 /"ν VV'' Λ ' '^ 'y /\ \ " e'' η tch. vi. 6 
 
 •"/ελιον έτερον υ ουκ εοεςασσε, καλώς ανεινεσσε. oniyt. 
 
 ' ' Α α = Eph. i 
 
 ν particip., Gal. τ. 10. 
 
 arm. — 3. ff om J. — μη πως ova. arm : for πως, ttotc Chr-comm2 : om D' (d e ν al 
 Lucif Aug al; Clem, (not elswj). — ο bef οψ. om 219' Chr Dam. — rec fv. (ζηττ., with 
 DEJK &c d e V syr al Clemj Orig, all Lucif all : txt BFG 80 all (appy) g copt Syr ath 
 al Clem, Orig; Eus Dam Orig-intj Jer al. — iv om Dj ν al : δια τταν. or Cia της π. al. — 
 rec hef <ρθαρη, ins οντω, with D EJK mss (appy) ν syrr a;th al Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec 
 Orig-int3 Archel lat-fl": ούτος 2:J8 : om BD'FG it copt arm Clem, (Lucif.') Gaud. — rec 
 om και της αγνοτ., with (MSS? vss .') Cleraj Chr Thdrt al Orig-intj lat-fiF (but some have 
 castitate, some, as v, simplicitaie) : ins (but της ayroT. και bef της απλ. D'E d e 
 Epiph,) BD'EFG 17• 74' g tol aeth syr* Archel Aug-oft Bed : και της ayioT. Ath, και τ. 
 αγί'ίΐσς Epiphj. {The omission appy arose from the similarity of endgs. Meyer and 
 he Wet I e suppose αγν. to hare been a gloss, to explain απ\., and offerwards to have 
 found its way into the text. This is a case where internal considerations are so nearly 
 balanced, that MS authority must decide.) — τον om FG 80-ί). — 4. for ιησ., χριστον 
 FG 4^ g V arm Ambrst Pel. — tTtp. ττνιυμα 93. — for ίΧαβίτι, (Οΐζασθί FG. — rec 
 ηνίΐχίσθί {see ver 1), with mss Chr Thdrt al : ανεχισθι Β: txt DEF(ti£ix.)GJK all 
 
 3.] But he fears their being seduced from 
 their fidelity to Christ. ό οψις] He 
 
 takes for granted that the Corr. recognized 
 the agency of Satan in the (well known) 
 serpent: see vv. 13 — 15, where his μιτα- 
 σχηματισμός for the sake of deceit is al- 
 luded to. ev τη irov. αϋτον] ' in (i. e. 
 by means of as the element in which the 
 deed was done) Ms versatility (or subtlety), 
 — SO {υντω has been a gloss from the mar- 
 gin) your thoughts (' sentiments,' ref. and 
 ch. X. 5) he corrupted from (pregnant 
 constr. ^ be corrupted, and seduced from) 
 your simplicity (singleness of affection) 
 [and your chastity] towards Christ ' (cl? 
 Xp. is not — ii' χυΐστφ, as Vulg., E. Y., 
 Beza, Calvin, al.). ' 4, 5.] The thought 
 here seems to be this : — ' If these new 
 teachers had brought with them a new 
 Gospel, superseding that which I preached, 
 they might have some claim to your regard. 
 But, since there is btit one gospel, that 
 which I preached to you, and which they 
 pretend to preach also, I submit that iyi 
 that one no claim to regard is second to 
 mine.' Observe, that the whole hypothesis 
 is ironical .• it is fixed and clear that thei-e 
 can be no such new gospel .• therefore the 
 inference is the stronger.—' For (the whole 
 sentence is steeped in irony : — ' the ser- 
 pent deceived Eve by subtlety : I fear for 
 you, but not because the new teachers use 
 such subtlety — if they did, if the tempta- 
 tion were really formidable, there would be 
 
 some excuse.' All this lies in the yap) if 
 indeed {d μίν introduces a reality, and is 
 full here of deep irony. Cf. II. i. 135, 
 aW ei μίΐ' δώσονσι γίρας μίγάθνμοι 
 'Αχαιοί: ' if the Achseans shall really give 
 me another gift ;' and xii. 138 — 142, fi /jfj/ 
 ίή Άΐ'τιμάχοιο εαίφρονος ν'ύίς ίστόν . . . 
 t'vv μϊν δη τοΐι τϊατυος άίικέα τίσιτί 
 
 \ώβην . . ., ' if ye really are, &c ye 
 
 verily will.' . . . See Hartung, Partikel- 
 lehre, ii. 414) he that Cometh (viz. the 
 false teachers generically thus designated: 
 but here too perhaps there is irony : ο 
 'ίρχόμίνος was a ρήμα σίμνόν) is preach- 
 ing (the indicative pres. carries on the 
 ironical assumption, so λαμβ. below) an- 
 other Jesus whom we preached not, or ye 
 are receiving a different Spirit (άλλος•, 
 distinctive of individuality, 'έτερος of kind), 
 which ye received not (from us), or 
 another gospel which ye accepted not 
 {ίλάβ.,ΐδίζ., — ' verba diversa, reiapta. Non 
 concurrit voluntas hominis in accii)iendo 
 Spiritu, ut in recipiendo evangelio.' Ben- 
 gel. But singularly enough, in English, 
 usage has attached the voluntary act to the 
 verb ' accept '), ye would with reason bear 
 with him (irony again : for they not only 
 bore with, but preferred them to their 
 father in the faith. The sense is : "there 
 would seem to be some excuse in that case, 
 — but even in that, would really be none, 
 — for your tolerating him." — On άνείχισβε, 
 Bengel remarks : ' Ponit conditiouem, ex
 
 666 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 XT. 
 
 wconstr.,Rom, 
 
 xiv. 14. 
 χ Si Mrttt. i 18 
 
 ''" \ο•γΊζομαι ^ yap μη^Ιν '^ ΰστίξ>ηκίναι των ' υπ(ρ\ίαν 
 οτΓοστοΛωΐ'. ει c£ και ιοιωτης τω λο-γω, αλλ ου τη 
 iv παντι ψανΕρωσαντες ^ tv ττασπ' ίΐς 
 
 BDEF 
 GJK 
 
 y Γΐ)η.•<(Γ., Rom. ,| / ' Λ \ ' 
 
 iii. 23. "^νωσί!. «λλ 
 
 zrli. XII. 11 ' ' 
 
 only t. a Acts iv. 13. 1 Cor. xiv. Ifi, 24 only. Pro» 
 
 d — ICiir. xii. 8. e ch. iv. 8 relt. f 
 
 \ui.7. H<rb. xiii. 4. 
 
 ri. 8. b — ICor. ii. 1. c 1 Cor. iv. 15 reff. 
 
 ■ Col. iv. 3. g See Pbil. iv. 12. masc, 1 Cor. 
 
 Chrms Dam Till (Altt's mss) : add avrwv arm. — 5. for yan, h Β 178: om lOi)^.— 
 aft υητίίΐηκ•. add iv υμιν D'E d e tol (al latt ?j. — for vttidX., άλλων d e. — 6. St om D' 
 it am demid all Jer al . 7iam elui ν Pel. — ιδιώτης n^i D'Eital. — rec φaι'ίpϋ>θ^vτ^c,v/\^h 
 D^EJK &c v.ssChr Thdrt al Sedul {inanifenti sumti.s) : ψαΐ'ίηκιθας {manifeisttis or -status 
 siiMi) D' d e am demid flor lat-ff: -(κ,ί^Μτι 1. lOii: txt BFG 17 g {manijestantes aut 
 -status sum) and addg tuiiTov^(]i. 108- goth arm : φανιρωσαι εηντυυς dr. {The variety 
 appears to have arisen from the difficulty of φανιρωααντίς, which became φαν. ιαυτυνς, 
 
 parte rei, impossibilem : ideo dicit in im- 
 perfecto, toleraretis : sed pro conatu jiseud- 
 apostolorum, non modo possibilem,sed plane 
 prsesentem: ideodicit inprsesenti,;;r«i//ca/.' 
 Similarly Meyer. See Winer, § 43. 2). That 
 this rendering is right, seems to me beyond 
 question. It is the only one which reaches 
 the depth of the exquisite irony of the sen- 
 tence, at the same time that it satisfies all 
 grammatical requirements. 5.] See 
 
 above. (' Seeing that there is but one 
 gospel, and they and I profess to preach 
 one Jesus and impart one Si)irit, they have 
 no such claim : mine is superior') : for I 
 reckon that in no respect do I fall short 
 of (the pert', sets forth the past and jiresent 
 truth of the fact) these surpassers of the 
 apostles.' τών ύ-π-βρλίαν άττοστ. has 
 
 very commonly been taken to mean bona 
 fide ' the greatest Apostles,' i. e. Peter, 
 James, and John, or perhaps the Ttrelve : 
 but (1) this hardly seems to suit the e.v- 
 pression hntpXiav, in which I cannot help 
 seeing, with De W., some bitterness : (2) it 
 would be alien from the spirit of the passage, 
 in which he institutes no comparison what- 
 ever between himself and the other Apji., 
 but only between himself and the Jalse 
 teachers. {'Λ) had any such comparison been 
 here intended, the ' punctum comparationis' 
 would not have been, personal eminence in 
 fruits of apostolic work and sufferings, still 
 less, seeing that the other App. were un- 
 learned also, the distinction which imme-' 
 diately follows, between an Ιδιώτης, and one 
 pretending to more skill,— but priority of ar- 
 rival and teaching in Corinth. (4)the expres- 
 sion ψίνδατΓίίίΐτ-ολος ver. 13, seems to me to 
 refer to, and give the plain sense of, this 
 ironical designation of iWfpAiav άττυττολοι. 
 (5) the same expr. ch. xii. 1 1 appears even 
 more pkiinly than here to require this ex- 
 planation. The above e.xpl. is that of 
 Beza, Michaelis, Schuiz, Fritzsche, Bill- 
 roth, Riickert, Olsh., Meyer, De Wette. — 
 υπί/ιλίαν is not found in classic Griek : 
 but Wetstein cites from Eustath. Od. a. 
 p. 27, 35 : fan yap ττοτί και τψ λίαν 
 
 κατά την rpaytfiiiiav χράσθαι καλώς, καθ' 
 ο σημαινόμίνον λ(yoμiv τίνα ύπίαλίαν 
 σοψόν. Meyer instances as anahigous, 
 νπίράγαν (2 Mace. χ. 34), ΰη'αχυ {{j-iptv 
 ΤΓίττυλίτίνμαι, Demosth. 22^1. 17), and the 
 frequent use by Paul of compounds of 
 ΐιπαι. It has been the practice of Pro- 
 testant Comm. (e. g. Ben^el, Macknight) 
 to adduce this ver. against the primacy of 
 Peter, and of the Romanists (e. g. Corn, a 
 Lapide) to evade the inference by sup- 
 posing the pre-eminence to be only in gifts 
 and preaching, not in power and jurisdic- 
 tion. All this will fall to the ground 
 with the supposed reference to the other 
 Apostles. 6.] Explains that, though 
 
 in one particular he may fall short of 
 them, viz. in rhetorical finish and word- 
 wisdom^ yet in real knowledge, not so. 
 Ιδιώτη5] a ' laic,' — a man not pro- 
 fessionally acquainted with that which he 
 undertakes, see reff. The Ap. disclaims 
 mere rhetorical aptitude and power in 
 1 Cor. ii. 1 if. άλλα brings out the 
 
 contrast, see reff. : — η toi αύ yi σκούτυϋ 
 μι) ττρυιιρ^ς, αλλ' ηιιΐν τυΰτό ίπτι ου 
 TTfpio -πτίυΐ', Herod, ν. 39. τη γνώσει] 
 
 the depth of his knowledge of the mystery 
 of the gospel, see Eph. iii. 1 — 4. 
 αλλ' Iv ιταντί] ' But in every matter we 
 made things manifest (i. e. ι he things of 
 the gospel, thereby shewing our yriOai^ ; — 
 not, την yvCoaiv. Meyer and De W. sup- 
 pose φαηρώσαντίς to have been a gloss 
 for φαΐ'ίρωθίντίς, especially as it is fol- 
 lowed in some mss by ίαοτυύς, and to 
 have been the more readily received into 
 the text, because it might easily be taken 
 with yi'wcnv. But how improbable that 
 the easy (pavfowtifVTfc should have been 
 replaced by the har.'-h -σηι τις. Much 
 rather would the latter be replaced by 
 φαΐίϋωΟίντίς from ch. v. 11) befcre all 
 men {tv πάσιΐ', being separated from iv 
 πα I Ti by the verb, cannot be coupled with 
 it, as in reff., but must mean among all) 
 unto you' (i. e. with a view to your benefit : 
 not = ' to you,' in which sense the dative
 
 5—10. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 667 
 
 υμάς. 
 
 η αμαρτ'ιαν ^ ίπο'ιησα, ίμαυτον ^ ταπίΐνων ί'ΐ'α 'Ί" 
 
 f " k <■ Ι η" " Ι >> ν ^ - ιη /Ί - η• ' '•\ i Sn 1 Cor. vi. 
 
 νμίΐς νψωυητΒ, υπ cuipeav το του σεου £i/ayyfAjoi' ι». John vm. 
 iυ1)yyί\ισύμηv υμ'ιν ; ^ αλΧας ίκκ\ΐ]σΊας " ΐσυληση λαβών ^f/Uff'^'"- 
 
 ο';' μ ^ ^'-Π^ ' ^Γ '^Γ '■' Κοιιι iii. 24. 
 
 οψωνιον ποος τϊ]ν υμών ' οιακονιαν. και τταρων ttooc Mhh. χ s. 
 
 ' - > s ' />'■>( ' ' ^ q \ s ' (l.lin ΧΓ.25. 
 
 υμάς και υστίρηθας ου κατίναρκησα ουθίνυς ^ {το yap Γ,Γ, '"''"'■ 
 
 m R .m. XV. 16 
 
 u ' ' ' ν \ > • ■■ <^ Λ , ^ • \ /ι ' m R .m. XV 
 
 υ(ΤΓίο(7μα μου 7Γ^)οςαΐ'ίπλ7;^ίωσπΐ' οι αόίλφοι ίλοοντες rcit. 
 ατΓΟ Μακεδονίας)* κηΐ ev παντι "'" αβαρη ΰμη' ίμαυτον "s'om.'vi^i 
 
 1 η ν •' ' Λ ' ΰ - ν ' ϊ Cor. ix. 7 
 
 εσηι/ αλι/οεια γριστου -^ εΐ' <>niyt 
 
 /^' p = Act,siii. 
 
 ετηρησα και τηρήσω 
 
 q — 2 Tim iv. 11. Heb. i.l4. 
 Hcb. si. 37. Sir. xiii. 4. 
 
 10. 
 
 rAclsxii. 20. Gal. iv. 18, 20. u=Lukexv. 14. Phil. iv. 12. 
 
 t ch. xii. 13. 14 nnly. (ΐΊίρκιίω, Gen. xxxii 25, 32. Jub xxxiii 1!)) 
 u 1 Cor. xvi. 17 reff. ν cli. ix. 12 ouly-f. Wisclxii.4. whereonlyt. χ -= 1 Tim. 
 
 V. 22. James i. 27. Wisd. X. 5. y Acts xiii. 15. See ch. i. 18. Rom. xiv. 11. 
 
 and then -ρωθιντις.) — fv ττησιν om FG g ν Syr Ambrst lat-ff. — 7. aft ?), atld μη FG 
 vss. — for εμηυ., ίαυτυν FGJ 93 (al.'). — 8. ου om 80. — rec ovSn'oc : t.xt Β !ίΟ al .' Dam 
 (appy). — 9. ιμαυτ. νμ. Β L>3 d e V al (we in vobis Aug) : νμ. om Κ Chr Thl-ms. — 
 Kill τηοησω om seth. — 10. xjjicrr. om D' (but corr D' appy). — Mill (not rec) for 
 
 is always found after (pnvepnw : see Rom. 
 iii. 21, -πκρανίρωται .... ΰς πάντας κ. 
 ΐπΐ πάιτας ....). 7.] Another par- 
 
 ticular in which he was not behind, but 
 excelled, the ΰπ^υ\ιav απόστολοι ; viz. t/ie 
 gr aluilous exercise of his ministry among 
 them. On the sense, see 1 Cor. ix. 1 ff. 
 and notes. The supposition is one of sharp 
 irony. Ιμ. ταττ^νών] See Acts xviii. 3. 
 
 The exaltation which then received by his 
 demeaning himself was that of reception 
 into the blessings of the gospel, which was 
 more effectually wrought thereby : not 
 merely, their being thus more favoured 
 temporally, or in comparison with other 
 churches. on δωρ., &c.,is epexegeti- 
 
 cal of ίμαυτον τίπτανώΐ'; — 'in that I 
 gratuitously, &c. :' — not, as Meyer, άμαρτ. 
 ίΤΓοιιιτα on, making ίμαντον .... ί'φωθ. 
 parenthetical. It was his wish to preach 
 to them gratuitously, which necessitated 
 his Tawttviit'V iuvTUv, i. e. not exercising 
 the apostolic power which he might have 
 exercised, but living on subsidies from 
 others, besides (Ahich he does not here dis- 
 tinctly allude to) his working with his own 
 hands at Corinth. See Stanley. 8.] 
 
 The ' other cfturches' were the Macedo- 
 nian, cf. ver. i). Among them the Philip- 
 pians were probably consiiicuous, retaining 
 as doubtless they did, their former att'ection 
 to him; see Phil. iv. 15, Iti. ίσΰλησα 
 
 is hyperbolic, to bring out the contrast, and 
 shame them. όψ., see retl'., ' wages ;' 
 
 more properly here " subsidy.' irpos 
 
 T. νμ. διακ.] ' in order to (to support me 
 in) my ministration to you,' gen. obj. 
 αλλάς and υμών stand in tlie em- 
 phatic po-itions, as contrasted. In the 
 former sentence, he implied that he brought 
 with him from Macedonia supplies towards 
 his maintenance at Corinth : λαβών .... 
 
 irpos T. νμ. ΰιακ. : here, he speaks of 
 a new supply during his residence with the 
 Corr , when those resources /ailed. 
 κατ€νάρκησα] apparently =z κατφάρησα, 
 ch. xii. \(j. Hesych. interprets it Ιβάουια. 
 Jerome, Ep. to Aglasia. quaest. 10, says, 
 'multa sunt verba, quibus juxta morcm 
 urbis et jirovinciae suae familiarius Apostolus 
 utitur : e quibus ex. gr. pauca jionendasunt 
 . . . Et, till καηνάρκηηα ΰ /unc, hoc est, 
 non gravavi vos .... quibus et aliis multis 
 usque hodie utuntur Cilices.' Thuophylact 
 and Oecum. mention a rendering, οΰκ ή μί- 
 λησα, η ρ(^Οι•μοΓίιΐίος ττρός το κίιριιγμίΐ 
 ytyova : and Beza, following the etymology, 
 interprets οι'κ ΐνάοκησα κατ' uiiCtvoc, 
 ' cnin cvjxsquam incommodo.' But the 
 former meaning suits the context better. 
 The word is found no where else in Greek. 
 άποΐ'αμκαΜ occurs in Plutarch, de Liber. 
 Educatione, p. 8, f (Wetst.), άπυναοκώηι 
 κ. φμιττηνηι πιιυς Γοΰς• πόι>ιΐ)ΐς. — On the 
 government of the genitive by verbs com- 
 pounded with κιιτά, see Matthia', § 376. 
 9.] 'For (reason why he l)ur(li'ned 
 no one) the brethren {who, he does not 
 say ; their names were well known to the 
 Corr. Possibly, Timotheus and Silas, Acts 
 xviii. ,5) when they came from Macedonia 
 (not as E. v., 'which came,' ti'i ίλΟιΊ)•τ(ς) 
 brought a fresh supply of my want (or 
 ])eiha|)s πικκ.αι. is used without the idea 
 of addilional sujiply, as in ch. ix. i"i, tiie 
 προς merely denoting direction) : and in 
 every thing I kept myself (' dnrini/ mg 
 residence :' not, 'hare kept mi/srlf,' λ^ K. 
 V.) unburdensome to you, and will keep 
 myself.' 10.] ' The truth of Christ 
 
 is in me, that . . . ;' i. c. ' / s/n-ak ac- 
 cording to that truth of which Christ 
 Himself was our example, when J sag, 
 that . . .;' — there is no oath, nor even as-
 
 6θ8 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 XI. 
 
 Rom.iii.27 Ejuo/, ΟΤΙ η ^ κουγησις αντη ου ^ φρα'^ησΒται εις ίμε tv bdef 
 ""■ ■ Λ f - . . ./ 11 ? '^ ' " ' ' - fi'K 
 
 cAiiiaffti' Trie Λγαιατ. ota τι 
 
 τοις 
 
 κΑΐμασιν της Λγ^αιας. 
 
 Ω ^ bb 'i'S' 12 '^ 
 
 ΐ/εος oiotv. υ 
 
 aRnm. iii. 19. 
 
 Hel). xi.33 
 
 (inly. See r -* f 
 
 Dan. vi. 22. VLiaC I Ο 
 
 Hos, ii. β. '^ ^ ' 
 
 bRoin. XV. 23reff. bb Josh. xxii. 22. 
 
 φραγίισίται, reads σ^ραγισίτ-ηι, appy from conjecture : 
 {(ς i^f, fi/ ijuoi FG 2. 120 (al .').— Tijc om FG al.— 11. 
 
 υτι ουκ αγαττω 
 οέ ποιώ, και Troujaw, Ίνα 
 
 σφραγησεται 14. 74. 238. — for 
 on om Β. — ό om D' Thdrt. — 
 
 severation, as E. V. and most Comm. in- 
 troduce. The expr. is e.xactly analogous to 
 Rom. ix. 1. ή καυχ. . . .] ' this boast- 
 ing (not = καί'χημα, here or any where 
 else) shall not be stopped (supply to 
 στόμα, which is not expressed, because 
 καΰχ>ισις being itself a matter of utterance, 
 suits the sense of the verb without it) as 
 regards me {καύχ. is as at were personified 
 — shall not have its mouth stopped as re- 
 gards me) in the regions of Achaia ' (where 
 the καίι•χ7]σις is imagined as being and 
 speaking). 11.] \\.e. presupposes, and 
 
 negatives, a reason likely to be given for 
 this resolution ; viz. that he loves them not, 
 and therefore will be under no obligation 
 to them : for we willingly incur obligations 
 to those whom we love. oi8ev, scil. ort 
 
 νμας αγαπώ-, 12.] T/ie true reason : 
 
 — ' But that which I do, I will also con- 
 tinue to do (ff/i ποιήσω must not, as 
 Erasm., be coupled to ττοιώ, and Stu rovro 
 ■ποιώ supplied before 'ίνα, — because it is for 
 his resolution respecting the future that the 
 reason is especially given) in order that I 
 may cut off the occasion' (τήν, which 
 would be furnished if I did not so) of those 
 who wish for an occasion (viz. of depre- 
 ciating me by misrepresenting my motives 
 if I took money of you). Many (Chrys., 
 Theophyl., Calv., Grot., Billroth, al.) take 
 this occasion to be one of aggrandizing 
 themselves above Paul if all took money, 
 assuming that the false teachers, as well as 
 Paul, took none: which is extremely un- 
 likely, from the prominence which he gives 
 to the boast of his own abstinence in this 
 point, — and seems directly opposed to ver. 
 20 and to 1 Cor. ix. 12. ϊνα ev ω, 
 
 (c.r.X.] ' that, in the matter of which they 
 boast, they may be found even as I.' 
 Such appears generally acknowledged to be 
 the rendering .• but as to the meaning, there 
 is great variety of opinion. (1) Many of 
 the ancient Comm. assume that they tangfit 
 gratis, and were proud of it, — and that Paul 
 would also teach gratis, to put both on an 
 equality and take this occasion of boasting 
 from them. This would suit the sense of 
 the present verse, but seems (see above) at 
 variance with the fact. (2) Theodoret, 
 ■whom Meyer, al , follow, supposes them to 
 have pretended to the credit of self-denial, 
 while really making gain, and that Paul 
 
 means, that he will reduce them from pre- 
 tended to real self-denial. But this too is 
 inconsistent with the context. Paul's boast 
 of disinterested teaching was peculiarly his 
 own, and there is notliing to shew that the 
 false teachers ever professed or made any 
 boast of the like. His resolution did not 
 spring out of an actual comparison insti- 
 tuted by them between their own practice 
 and what they might falsely allege to be 
 his, but was adopted even before his coming 
 to Corinth, arguing a pri07-i that it was best 
 to cut off any possible occasion of such de- 
 preciation of him from his probable adver- 
 saries. (3) Others, Cajetan, Estius, after 
 Aug. de Serm. Dom. in Monte ii. 16, — also 
 Bengel, — join 'Ira . . . >y/<£Tfwith άφηρμήν, 
 — ' occasion that they may he found even 
 as ive,' and explain tv ψ κανχ. a« a paren- 
 thesis, ' that they may he found {a point in 
 which they hoast) even as we :' i. e. ' that in 
 point of selfishness and covetousness, we 
 may be both on a level.' But this meaning 
 would require rather (ύριθώμιν καθώς και 
 αυτοί, ' we may be reduced to their level.' 
 
 (4) Olsh., adopting in the main the last 
 interpretation, would understand h' ψ καν- 
 γώΐ'ται of the taking of money of which 
 they boasted, accounting it an apostolic 
 prerogative. But to this the last stated 
 objection applies even more forcibly : and 
 besides, the supposition is wholly arbitrary. 
 
 (5) De Wette, believing the second ϊνη to 
 be parallel with the first, as in (1) and (2), 
 understands iv ψ καυχώνται as applying 
 to their boast of apostolic efficiency : ' that 
 they may, in their apostolic work which 
 they vaunt with such preten;ion, be found 
 even as we,' and thinks the transition to 
 what follows thus made easy. But the ob- 
 jection to this is, that the punctvm compa- 
 rationis in the rest of the cha])ter is not 
 apostolic efficiency, but rather matters 
 κατά σάρκα. (C) I cannot adopt any one 
 of the above accounts of the sentence, for 
 the negative reasons already given, and be- 
 cause all of them seem to me to have missed 
 the clue to the meaning which the chapter 
 itself furnishes. This clue I find in vv. 18 
 if. The καυχώνται is there taken up, de- 
 scribed as being κατά σάρκα : the καΐ^'ώς 
 και ι'ιμι'ις is taken up hy Έβοα'ιοί ιίσιν; 
 κά-γώ• &c. From this it is manifest to me, 
 that his meaning in our present clause is,
 
 11—16. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 669 
 
 '^ ίκκοφω τ-ην αφορμην των Θ(\6ντων ^ αφορμην^ Ίνα £v <=^^°™•^'•22 
 ω ^ κπυχωΐ'τοι ίύρίβωσιν καθώς και ημΰς. ^^ ^ οι γαρ ^?e'e' 
 ^τοιούτοι φίυ^απόστολοι, ' ί'ργάται "^ δόλ(υί, 
 ματι^,ομίνοι ίΐς αποστόλους γυριστού. ^"^ και ου '" θα 
 
 d Rom. τη. 8 
 e ch ii. II riff. 
 
 αυτός yap ο σατανάς μίτασγ^^ματιΐ,ίται Ης ayvf 
 " φωτός' ου ° μί'γα οϋν ει και οι διάκονοι αυτού ' μι 
 
 ιγ ΓΡ,/ Λ / ■''^D/\ i Matt. ix. 37. 
 
 σ\Υ}ματίΐ,οΛ>ται ως όιακονοι όικαιοσννης, ων το ^ Te\oc =Phii.i,i. 2 
 
 •r . . » . 1^ klitreonlv. 
 
 pp .-,.,/. .^ •/ :._.-.,. 16 n^X(v λί ^ 
 
 XX. 23al. 
 - . f = ch. T. 3al. 
 
 υμα g acis xxu. 22. 
 
 ^ ch.ii. (i, 7. 
 
 η litre only t. 
 
 μετα- '^■=«"•"• 
 
 ■ Matt. ix. 37. 
 
 ισται 
 
 icora τα soya αυτών 
 
 pyi 
 
 Pr.i 
 
 Uv Λίγω, |Uij τις με i ι'ί;ο'..ί»•.ο. 
 
 q^'y r " , •ϊ . s ' ^v ' t '^ ' r " , Phil.iii.2l 
 
 οοζϊ) otppova εινοι ει οε /uj/ γε, καΐ' ως αψρουα «"ly• fos. 
 
 10.5. m Rev. xvii. fi only. Job xvii. 8. XTiii. 20. η See Epli. v. 8. 1 Thess. v. 5 al. ο = 1 Cor ix 11. 
 p— Rom.vi. 21. Phil. lii. 19. 1 Pet. i. μ. pp Rom.ii. 6. Rev. xx. 12, 13. Psa.xsvii.4. 
 
 q= 1 Cor. iii. IS. r Luke xi. 40. Rom. ii. 20 al. Prov. passim. s Matt. vi. 1. ix. 17 reff. 
 
 t Mark. v. 28. vi. 58. Acts v. 15. 
 
 12. aft f (ίκοψω ins /if i)3. — 13. -φινδοαπ. ΒΈ de v. — (ic om FG. — 14. rec ov (ovStv [ονθιν'} 
 Chr) θανμαστον {gloss on θανμα), with D'EJK &c ff : txt BD'FG 17. 39. 6^^. 74 Orig. 
 — ει γαρ αυτός . . . η μίγα, ei και Chr.— ως άγγελος D* d e Cypr Ambrst (Archel al). 
 — 15. ου^ om D' vss Lucif Philastr. — for εσται, εστίν D' d e {βί goth). — 16. δοξη με 
 
 ' that m the matier(s) of which they boast 
 they may be found even as we :' i. e. ' we 
 may be on a fair and equal footing :' ' that 
 there may be no adventitious comparisons 
 made between us arising out of misrepre- 
 seiitations of my course of procedure among 
 you, but that in every matter of boasting, 
 we may be fairly compared and judged by 
 facts.' And then, before the γάμ of ver. 13 
 will naturally be supplied, ' And this will 
 end in their discomfiture : for realities they 
 have none, no weapons but misrepresenta- 
 tion, being/e/ie Apostles,' &c. 13.] 
 ' For (see above : the γήρ implying also 
 that the choice of the above line of conduct 
 has been made in a conviction of their false- 
 hood and its efficacy to detect it) such men 
 are false Apostles (not, as Vulg. and most 
 exposs. ' such false Apostles are βργ. δολ., 
 which destroys the whole emphasis of the 
 sentence, wherein the {ιιτερλίαν απόστολοι 
 of ver. (> are jironounced now to be \|;ev8- 
 απόητολοι : and besides, suggests an irrele- 
 vant comparison between oi τοιοντοι ψ. and 
 ψ. of some other kind, ό toiovtos is a 
 familiar designation with the Αρ., see reff;), 
 — dishonest workmen (in that they pre- 
 tended to be teachers of the Gospel, and 
 were in the mean time subserving their own 
 ends), — changing themselves into (in ap- 
 pearance : the pres. particip. indicates their 
 habit and continual endeavours to assume 
 the shape) Apostles of Christ.' By a. fair 
 comparison between us, this mask will be 
 stript off ; — by the abundance of my suffer- 
 ings, and distinctions vouchsafed by the 
 Lord, my Apostolicity will be fu.ly proved, 
 and their Pseudapostolism shewn. 
 14, 15.] οΰ θαΰμο— so Aristojjh. Plut. 99, 
 και ϋαϊιμά γ' orciv, οΰό' ί)ω yap ο βλίπωτ, 
 οΰτο5 γαρ ό σ.] If any definite allu- 
 
 sion is here intended, it is perhaps to Job i. 
 6, &c. : but I would rather suppose the 
 practice of Satan in tempting and seducing 
 men to be intended. 14. αγγ. φωτο5] 
 
 God is light, and inhabits light, and His an- 
 gelic attendants are surrounded with bright- 
 ness, see Acts xii. 7• Ps• civ. 4 : whereas 
 Satan is the Power oi darkness, see reff. and 
 Luke xxii. 53. 15.] el και, ' if also,' 
 
 i. e. as well as himself, or perhaps better ap- 
 plying to the whole sentence, ' if, also . . .' 
 μίτασχ. ως, i. e. μίτασχ. και γί- 
 rovrai ώς : — so Rom. ix. 29, ώς Γόμορρα 
 αν όμοιό'θημίν. axiTo's, the father of 
 
 falsehood and wrong (John viii. 44), is di- 
 rectly opposed to ί'ΐκαιυσίινη θευν. Matt. vi. 
 33, that manifestation of God by which He 
 is known to us in the Gospel, Rom. i. I7. 
 ων TO τ€'λ. ] 'Of whom (notwithstanding 
 this disguise) the end shall he correspond- 
 ent to their works' (not to their preten- 
 sions). 13 — 21.] Ea-cnsesfor his intend- 
 ed self-boasling. 16.] ττάλιν— referring 
 to ver. 1, not repeating what he had there 
 said, but again taking vp the subject, and 
 expanding that request. The άνίχομαι of 
 ver. 1 in fact implies both requests of this 
 ver.: — the not regarding him as a fool for 
 boasting, or even if they did (ti ci μ>ι γε 
 after a negative sentence implies ' bid if it 
 cannot be so,' ' if you will not grant this,' 
 see reff. — καν elliptical : tlie full constr. 
 would be kud ώς άφρονα δίζιισθαι Siy, 
 ίίξσσΗί μί : so in reff.) as a fool (i. e. 
 yielding to me the toleration and hearing 
 which men would not refuse even to one of 
 whose folly they were convinced) receiving 
 him. κάγώ, as well as they. 17.] 
 Proceeding on the ώς άφρονα, he disclaims 
 for this self-boasting the cliaracter of inspira- 
 tion — or of being said in pursuance of his
 
 670 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 XI. 
 
 nSeeMstt.x. ^ϋίζοσθί μξ, ivu Kay(t) ^ μικς>ον τι "" κανγτισωμαι, ^' ο λαλώ, BDEF 
 '" ου Χαλώ " κατά κνριον, αλλ ^ ως ^ ei> '' αφοησυΐ'η, ΐν 
 
 W ahsol., 1 Cor. / ~ a ' ' - b ' 
 
 i.->ii. iv. 7 &ι. ταντχι τη υπηστασα της καυ\ησίως 
 
 Set ch. vii. ι' ί' ' ^ Λ ' ^ 
 
 18 
 
 χ Set ch. vii. 
 
 Η. 
 y So John vii 
 
 eiTii τΓολλοί 
 
 κανγ^ωνται κατά την σαοκα, καγω καν^ησομαι. 
 zver.irefr. ^"^ ηόίως jao ανε^εσοε των αφοονων, φρόνιμοι υντίς' 
 
 Heb. i. 3. 
 xi. 1 odlv. 
 
 av£y(^ioee yap, ει τις υμάς ^ καταΒουΧοι, ύ τις \ατίσβΊίΐ, 
 Psa. xxxviii. £ΐ τίς Aoji/pavfi, ίΐ ης επαίρεται, ει τις ίΐς ττρηςωπον 
 
 b Rom. iii. 27 rfft'. c Sit Rom. i. Sreff. κ. Ύην σ., John viii. 15 only. See Ga1. vi. 8. d Mark vi. 20. 
 
 xii. 37 only. Prnv. iii. 24. ii. 17. e rer. 1. f Rom. xi. 25 al. iron., I Cor. iv. 111. 
 
 gCal. ii. 4 only. Gen. xlvii. 21. h = Matt, xxiii. 13. (Gal. v. 15.) Isa. ix. 12. i Seech, xii. Ifi. 
 
 k = ch.x. Sreff. 1 See Matt. xxvi. 67. 
 
 44. — for μηγί, μη D. — aft t?f£. om μί 219'. — rec μικρόν τι καγω, with mss syr al Oec : 
 txt BDEFGJK 17. 37- 44-6-}i. 64. 72-4.80. 91-3. 100 to 12. 177 to 9. 219 (al .?) it ν 
 Syr arm gr-lat-ff. — (Cf( υ γ (jaojiirti D(E?)JK al. — 17. κατά kvokd' λαλώ BFGK 17.55-7. 
 7;i-4. 80 >Xi. in;- 17. 219 g al Chr Dain : txt DEJ most mss d ev copt syr goth al Thdrt 
 Till Oec Orig-int Aug al. {Appy, κ. κνο. λαλ. vas a corrii, to improve the arrangemt of 
 the sentence, hy introduchiff the qualifying words κότα κυρ. before the repealed verb. 
 In Tisch, ed 2, the notice of this ready is at variance with the fads : he has however 
 constructed his text upon it, arlopting κατά κυρ. λπλ. as the ready of DEJ &fc, against 
 Lachmann. who has the same.) for Kfotov, χοιστον 3!) : ftf oc 1 Ν d e ν Ambrst Aui; Pel : 
 άνθρωποι' 37.-18. τ,,ν om D(E.>)FG" I7. 71-3 Chr Dam (not Thdrt al).- 20. aft yap 
 ins f< ric ιίαπατα υμάς arm. — n to f Trn/iifrni om 80. — rec υμ. ng ττροςωττ. ίίρ. (corrn of 
 order), with D^JK &c goth al Chr Thdrt al : txt BD'D^EFG 1? (al ?) it ν syr al Dam 
 
 mission from the Lord. κατά. κύρ.] as in 
 ref. ' after the (mind of the) Lord,' in ))ur- 
 suancc, i. e. in this case, of βίοηνίκητια 
 from above : not as in 1 Cor. vii. 10. 25. 40. 
 ώξ €v άφρ.] ' as it were in folly,' 
 i. e. ' putting myself into the situation, and 
 speaking the words of a foolish inan vaunt- 
 ing of himself.' ίπΓοστάσει, as ch. 
 ix 4, ' in this present confidence,' not, as 
 Chrys. ^subject,' — 'this subject of boast- 
 ing,' 'ivu μη lO/JiT^g ΐΓονταχοΰ «mit/- 
 ra/j'fti' αυτή}', — and so al. : but the sense 
 would be insipid in the last degree• nor 
 could such a meaning well be expressed 
 without yf, — tv Tai'Ttj ye ttj iiir. De 
 Wette also renders ΰπ. ' subject matter,' 
 and understands, ' since we are come to 
 boasting;' but here again ye would be more 
 naturally found. He objects to ' confi- 
 dence' that the boasting was not begun .• 
 but as Meyer replies, it is conceived of as 
 having beyun in Pant's mind, bv the use of 
 the present λαλώ, ' I am speaking.' 
 18.] ' Since many (viz. the fahe teachers, 
 but not only they : — ' since it is a common 
 habit,' — for he is here speaking as tig τών 
 σφρήνη•. Job ii. 10) boast according to 
 the flesh (not — tv σαρκι, as Chrys., al., 
 but ' in a spirit of fleshly regard,'—' having 
 regard to theirextraction, achievements, &c.' 
 as below vv. 22 fl'.), I also will boast ' 
 (scil. κητα rt)i> σάρκα. Riickert thinks 
 these words are omitted purposely, thereby 
 to imply that the Ap.'s boasting iras not 
 fle.shly ; but this is distinctly contradicted 
 by the context : he is speaking as one of 
 
 the τΓολλοι of oi (Ιφοο)ΐ(ς, see next ver.). 
 19.] Bitterly ironical. They were 
 φρόνιμοι — as 1 Cor. iv. 8, κεκοιησμίνοι — 
 so full of wisdom as to be able to tolerate 
 complacently, looking down from the ' sa- 
 pientum templa serena,' the follies of others. 
 This, forsooth, encourages him to hope for 
 their forbearance and patronage. Compare 
 the earnestness of 1 Cor. iii 1 — 4. And 
 the irony does not stop here : it is not only 
 matter of presumption that they woiild 
 tolerate fools with complacency, but the 
 matter of fact testified it : they %vere doing 
 this: and more. 20.] ' for (proof that 
 
 they could have no objection to so innocent 
 a man as a fool, when they tolerated such 
 noxious ones as are adduced) ye endure 
 (him), if (as is the case) one brings you 
 into slavery (the mere abstract act as re- 
 garded them, not the man's own selfish view, 
 being in the Ap.'s mind, the active, not the 
 middle, is used. Thucyd. iii. /O, uses the 
 active similarly : Xiyovrfg τονςΆθιιναίονς 
 Ti)v Kfi)iciip;ii' κατοι^ονλυνν. But the en- 
 slaving understood, is to the man himself, 
 not to the Imv : — see Gal. ii. 4), if one 
 devours you (by exaction on your pro- 
 perty, see retf. So Hom. Od. y. 315 : μη 
 Toi κατά τιάντα φαγιοσι κτίμιατα, and 
 Plaut.. Ter., and Quintil , in Wetstein), if 
 one catches you (as with a snare, ref. : 
 not, ' takes from yon'), if one uplifts 
 himself (so treq. in Thucyd., e. g. vi. 11, 
 χρή μη ποός τιις τύχας τών ίναντιων 
 ίτταίιιεσίίαι. See other exx. in Wetst.), 
 if one smites you on the face ' (in insult,
 
 17—23. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 671 
 
 ' ησϋίΐηισαμίν ev ω c αν τις τολμά, ( ίΐ> αφοοσννη Xeyio) n = -2T,m.i.i. 
 
 r λ - ' ' 2-2t'VO - ι ' ■> , . _ ', ,' 'ulCi.rxv.43 
 
 τολ/ΐίωκαγω. ^^"^ Ερραίοι £ΐσ(ΐ/ ; /ca-yw. " Ισρηΐ)λΓται ίκκν; p^vV^V'*' 
 
 ' ' ν / ' Λ ί^ ' ' . ' ' 9•^ ^ ' 2 Thess. ϋ. 2. 
 
 κα-γιο. σπέρμα Άρξ)ααμ (ίσιν , Kayw. '^'^ όιακονοι ypt- q = Rom.iv ΐ9. 
 στοϋ ίίσιν \ {^^ τταραίρρονων λαλώ) " υττί ρ εγώ* εν ^ κόττοίς '7er'V7^•^• 
 "ϊΓίρισσοτίρως, ζν "^ ώυΧακαις ^ ττερισσοτερως, ίν ^ πλη-^α^ς Phn.Vi'i. 5 
 
 ' ' ' iinly. Gen. 
 
 XIV. 13Hel). nJohiii.48. Ac(.s ii, 22 al. τ John viii. 33 al. w here only. Zech. Tii. 11. 
 
 X as adv., here only. Winer, } 54, anm. 2. y 1 Cor. iii. 8. xv. 58 al. Gen. xsxi. 42. ζ ch. i. 12 reff. 
 
 a ch. vi. 5. 
 
 M.ff.—Satpn 44. 72. 10G-13-17='-20-l. 219.— 21. »;σθ. ημι,ς FG g : ησθίνηκαμιν Β 81) : 
 και ί;μ. ΐ]σθ. 109.— add εΐ' τοντω τω μεοη DE de v-ed Ambrst Pel: ηρα arm. — 5' om 
 D'. — το^μω καγω, fv αψρ. Xfyc.j FG g. — 22. σπέρμα to κ-αγω om 177• — 23. nffii' ;^ρισΓου 
 FG 44 g. — for λαλώ, λίγω DEFG al Did. — rec f j/ TrXrjy. νπιρβ. (i> ψυ\. ττερισσ., with 
 
 see 1 Kings xxii. 24. Matt. v. 39. Luke 
 xxii. 64. Acts xxiii. 2. This is put as the 
 climax of forbearance. " That such vio- 
 lence might literally be expected from the 
 rulers of the early Christian society, is also 
 implied in the command in 1 Tim. iii. 3, Tit. 
 i. 7) that the 'bishop' is not to be 'a striker.' 
 Even so late as the seventh century the 
 council of Braga (c. T). a.d. G75, orders that 
 no bishop at his will and pleasure shall s/ri/ce 
 his clergy, lest he lose the respect which 
 they owe him." Stanley. 21.] 'Byway 
 
 of disparagement {κητ' an/j.,— so κατά 
 ληίιΐι• 1:κτ[\ώηα%>τίς, Herod, ii. 152 ; κητα 
 Gidv )7^vl', Thucyd. vi 31) I say (assume) 
 that (ώς• on, see ch. v. 19, note, — does not 
 positively state a fact, but assumes one, or 
 states the import of a saying) we (em- 
 phatic) were weak' (when we were among 
 you). An ironical reminiscence of his own 
 abstinence when among them from all these 
 acts of self-exaltation at their expense, q. d. 
 (ironically), ' I feel that I am much letting 
 myself down by the confession that I was 
 too weak ever to do any of these things 
 among you.' This I believe with Si^hrader, 
 De We^te, and Clever, to be the only satis- 
 factory rendering. See also Stanley. Most 
 expositors (1) refer Xh/io back to ver. 20, 
 ' I iai/ it,' — ' I speak, ^ as E. V. So Chrys., 
 Theo|)hyl., Theodoret, Pelag., Erasm.,Calv., 
 al. (Chrys. remarks on ώς οτι, — άσοιρίς- το 
 είρημίΐ'υν. tTTuSt) γαρ φοοτικυν yv. Sin 
 τούτο ούτως αυτό τίθίικίι•, ίια κλίφ^ τι)ν 
 Ιττάχθειαν tij ασαφείς), and (2) under- 
 stand κατά άτιμ., ' to t/ow shame,' and 
 (8) ώς• ΟΤΙ, 'as though.' But (I) can 
 hardly be, seeing that λέγω below and 
 ληλώ ver. 23 have a forward reference : 
 (2) would require νμων and even then 
 would be exceedingly harsh, — cf. the simi- 
 lar meaning 1 Cor. xv. 34, where we have 
 προς ίντικιπήν ΰμων λέγω: and (3) it 
 may be doubted whether ώς- 'ότι ever can 
 mean ' as though,' even in 1 Tliess. ii. 2, 
 where Winer is dispoaed to give it that 
 
 meaning : it is pleonastic, answering to our 
 ex[)ression ' how that' — ' I told him, how 
 that' .... Winer instances the use of 
 Wii ba^ in a somewhat similar way : it»{e 
 baf id) Qfbort t)abe, .... where either 
 luie or ba^ would be enough. Besides the 
 instances given on ch. v. 19, Meyer quotes 
 from Dion. Hal. ix. (with no further ref.) 
 iiTiyvuvc, ώς ότι'εν ει^χάτοις εΙη\ι> o\ κητα- 
 KXunBii'TtQ. Ιν ω δ' αν] 'But in 
 
 whatsoever matter any one (the ης of 
 ver. 20) is hold ' (the av signifies habit, 
 recurrence: so Soph. Philoct. 290, ταντ 
 αν εί,ίρττων τάλας ίμηχαιώμηΐ'' είτα 
 ττΰρ αν οΰ τταρήι•, and Eur. Phoen. 412, 
 τϊοτέ μεν επ' ημαρ είχοί', είτ υιΊκ είχυν ίίΐ', 
 where see Porson). Throughout this pas- 
 sage, compare by all means, Stanley's in- 
 teresting notes. ev άψρ.] see ver. 
 17- 22.] " The three honourable 
 appellations with which the adversaries 
 magnified themselves, — resting on their 
 Jewish extraction, are arranged so as to 
 form a climax .• so that ' Εβρηΐοι refers to 
 the nationality, — 'iTociijAtrai to the theo- 
 cracy (Rom. ix. 4 ff), and σπέρμα Άβρ. 
 to the claim io a part in the Messiah 
 (Rom. ix. 7; xi. 1, al.)." Meyer. The 
 interrogative form of the sentence is much 
 more lively and consistent with the spirit 
 of the context than the affirmative, as given 
 by Erasm., Luther, Estius, al. 23.] 
 Meyer remarks, that all three points of 
 Judaistic comparison, of so little real con- 
 sequence in the matter, were dismissed with 
 the short and contemptuous κάγκι, — 'that 
 am I too.' But that is not enough, now that 
 we are come to the great point of com- 
 parison ; the consciousness of his real 
 standing, and their nullity as ministers of 
 Christ requires the υπέρ ίγι•>, atul the holy 
 earnestness of this consciousness pours 
 itself forth as a stream over the adversaries, 
 so as to overwiielm their conceited aspira- 
 tions to apostolic dignity. ιταραφρ. λ.] 
 stronger than iv άψροσ, λέγω :— ' I say it
 
 672 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 ΧΙ. 
 
 bhereoniy. υττεοβαλλόίτως, εν "^ Θανάτοις ττολλάκις. ^* υπο Ιου- 
 
 Job Χϊ. 11. - , , , jj ^ ι ''\ η 9'i ^ 
 
 " Τϊ cor'sv"' οαιων πεντάκις τεσσαξ)ακοντα πάρα μιαν ελαρον, τρις 
 ^ποθί^σκω ^ εραβδισθ»/!', ατταξ ' Ιλιθάσθην, τρΙς ^ εΐ'αυάγι^σα, ' νι^^^θ- 
 
 ΊΤολΚι,ύί θαιιάτουΐ ί/τΓομβιωΐ' ΰι-ίί' ίι09 τοί jeXevralov, Philo, Flacc. } 20. d = here only. Herod. 
 
 ix.33. ellips.of πλ>)γ., see Luke xii.47, 48. e Acts XTi. 22 only |. Judg. vi. 11. f Acts xiv. ly reff. 
 
 g 1 Tim. i. ly ouly. h here only t• 
 
 Orig Chr Thdrt Dam al Hil al and FG, which (and Origj) put πίρισσ. with ττΧηγ. and 
 νπίρβ. with φΐ'λ. : (v ττλ. vir. om Clem Tert : txt BD'E d e ν goth seth lat-ff. — 25. rec 
 ίρραβέ., with mss Clir al : txt BDEFGJK lOG-9. 219 lect 13 Orig Chr-ms Thl Oec — 
 
 BDEF 
 GJK 
 
 as a madman.' Hardly, as Me5'^er, spoken 
 from a consciousness of the verdict τταρα- 
 φρονΗ which the opponents would pro- 
 nounce on this νπιρ εγώ, — but rather, as 
 De W., from a deep sense of his own un- 
 worthiness, and conscious how utterly- 
 untrue was ύττίρ €γώ, in any boasting 
 sense. He therefore repudiates it even 
 more strongly than the τολμώ κάγώ. 
 ■uirep €γώ must not be misunderstood. He 
 concedes to them their being ίισκ. χρ., and 
 assumes [τταραφρονώι•) for himself, some- 
 thing more, if more abundant labours and 
 sufferings are to be any criterion of the 
 matter. That this is the sense is obvious 
 from the comparison being in the amount 
 of labours and sufferings, — and not (as 
 Meyer), that he denies to them the ζιάκ. 
 χι), and merely puts it hypothetically. 
 ' Well, then, if they are to be considered 
 ζιύκ. χρ. I must be something more.' If 
 so, the comparison would be not in the 
 degree of ministerial self-sacrifice, but in 
 the credentials of the ministry itself. 
 Both are now assumed to be ministers ; 
 but if so, Paul is a minister in a much 
 higher degree, more faithful, more self- 
 denying, richer in gifts and divine tokens, 
 than they. The prep, is used adverbially, 
 see reff. ev κότΓοις ιτερισ.] ' By (the 
 
 fj' is insti-umental: — the direct dative is 
 adopted ver. 26 : — these facts are proofs of 
 the vTrep εγώ, — not as Estius, al., parallel 
 with it, which would only apply to the 
 comparatives and not to ij' Θανάτοις πολ- 
 λάκις) labours (occurring) more abund- 
 antly (the adverbs belong to the substan- 
 tives in each case and are used adjectively ; 
 so την Ιμην άναστροφτ/ν ττοτί. Gal. i. 13, 
 της ΐμης τταρονσίης πήλιΐ', Phil. i. 26), — 
 by prisons (imprisonments) more abund- 
 antly (but one such is mentioned in the 
 Acts [xvi. 23 ff] previous to the writing of 
 thisEp. — Clement, in the celebrated passage 
 of his 1st Ep. to the Corinthians on the 
 labours of Paul, describes him as ΐπτάκις 
 ίίσμά φρρίσας. This whole catalogue 
 should shew the chronologists of the Ap.'s 
 life and epistles how exceedingly unsafe it 
 is to build only on the history in the Acts 
 for a complete account of his journeys and 
 
 voyages), by stripes more exceedingly 
 (particularized below), by deaths often' 
 (see reff. and ch. iv. 10. Such was the 
 danger escaped at Damascus, Acts ix. 23, 
 at Antioch in Pisidia, xiii. 50, at Iconium, 
 xiv. 5, 6, at Lystra, ib. 19, at Philippi, 
 xvi., at Thessalonica, xvii. 5 f., at Beroea, 
 ib. 13, and doubtless many others of which 
 we know nothing. See below). 
 24, 25.] are parenthetical, explaining some 
 of the foregoing expressions : the constr. is 
 resumed, ver. 26 —' At the hands of the 
 Jews five times received I forty save one 
 (in Deut. xxv. 3, it is prescribed that not 
 more than forty stripes should be given, 
 ' lest thy brother should seem vile unto 
 thee.' For fear of exceeding this number, 
 they kept within it. This seems a more 
 likely account of the thirty-nine stripes than 
 that given by Wetst., — that thirteen were 
 inflicted on the breast, and the same num- 
 ber on each shoulder, and the fortieth 
 omitted, lest one part of the body should 
 receive more than another. See the Rab- 
 binical authorities in Wetst., and cf. Jo- 
 seph. Antt. iv. 8. 21 and 23, and Stan- 
 ley's note here. He calls it τιμωρία 
 αΐτχίΰτη : and j\Ieyer remarks that Paul 
 might well number it among the Θάνα- 
 τοι, for it was no rare occurrence for the 
 criminal to die under its infliction. — None 
 of these scourgings are mentioned in the 
 Acts), — thrice was I beaten with rods 
 (scil. by the Roman magistrates, see Acts 
 xvi. 22, 23, which is the only occasion men- 
 tioned in the Acts), once was I stoned 
 (Acts xiv. 19), thrice I suffered shipwreck 
 (not one of these shipwrecks is known to 
 us. Thus we see that perhaps three, per- 
 haps two, voyages of Paul, but certainly 
 one, — previous to this time, must be some- 
 where inserted in the history of the Acts), 
 a night and day have I spent (reft.) in 
 the deep' (i. e. the sea : probably on some 
 remnant of a wreck after one of his ship- 
 wrecks, alone or with others. To under- 
 stand ό βυθός of a dungeon, as Thl. [τινίς 
 δί φασιν tv τινι φοίατι μίτά τον iv Αύ- 
 στροις Kti'Cvvov κατακρνφθί'ις, βυθω λεγο- 
 μίνψ, νυν τοϋτο λέγει], is quite beside 
 the purpose, the time being, for an impri-
 
 24—28. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 673 
 
 ημίοον εν τω ^ βυθω ^ πεποίηκα' ^^ ' όδοιντορ/αίς ττολλά- ' ρΙ„.°"νί'24. 
 
 δ/ 111 - Λ/ ηΐΛ- ^' ' Exod. XV. 5. 
 
 ννοις ποταμών, κινουνοις λΥΐστων, κινουνοις sKk-Actsxv. 
 
 " γίΐ'ους, κιν^υνοις ίζ, ΐΘι>ων, κίνδυνοι ς εν πόλβι, kivSv-^'o^'j"'^ 
 
 »ιιη» ' '>' ' η Λ ' ^' '' Mace. vi. 
 
 ΐΌΐς εν ίοημια, κινόυνυις iu υαλασση, κινόυνοις εν 4ΐ. 
 
 » / S ί'\^ 27 νμ ' ^ ρ ' β • q' ' >°.ε"••,= ΐΡ•='• 
 
 ψίυοηόίΑφοις, ^' -^ κοπώ και '^ μο\υω, εν ^ ayovTrviaic ••.2.ριι/τ. 
 
 , ,_ ,', ^"^Λι' /ί ^^ αιμ. Winer, 
 
 ΤΓολλάκις, εν Χιμώ και '^δίΐ/'Σΐ, εν ^ νηστείαις ττολλόκις, εν nlAcuxviu. 
 
 ti' ^u ' 28 ν \-w \t2. Gal i. 4. 
 
 ψυγίΐ και -γυμνοτητι. χωρ/ς των ττπρεκτος r; ηη Heb. χί. 38 
 
 ο Gal. ϋ. 4 only t. ρ 1 Thess. ii. 9. 2 Thess. iii.8 only. Num. sKiii.21. qch.vi. 5. rhere 
 
 only. Exod. xvii. 3. s ch. vi. 5. t Acts xxviii. 2. John xviii. 18 only. Gen. viil. 22, 
 
 D Rom. viii. 35. Rev. iii. 18 only. Dent, xxviii. 48. ν = Matt. xiv. 21. (Heb. iv. 15.J w constr., 
 
 here only, jr.. Matt. v. 32. Acts xxvi. 2!)only t. Deut. i. 313 Aq. 
 
 26. for τΓολλακ/ς (and in nest ver), πολλαις D^ d e and ν in ver 27. — ττολίσι slav. — 
 (ρημιαις 108^ lect 8. — 27. rec bef kottw ins iv, with JK &c ν all Orig al lat-ff : om 
 BDEFG it goth.— tr λιμω to πολλάκις om 48.— ίιψ»; 64. 73, 91 Origj.— 28. for 
 ■παρίκτος, άλλων ΘΧιψίων arm. — rec ίπισυατασις μου (see note), with JK mss 
 
 sonment, so short, and that particular having 
 been before mentioned. Wetst. gives from 
 jElian, H. An. viii. 7, άθ'ίατον τήχισθαι tv 
 βνθψ. Still less must we think of the cha- 
 racteristic interp. of Estius : "Subjunxit 
 aliud periculum marinum longe gravius, 
 nempe quod demersus fuerit e.\ naufragio 
 in profundum maris, ubi tamen divina ope 
 fuerit servatus incolumis noctem et diem, 
 atque inde postea liberatus." 26.] 
 
 Tiie constr. is resumed from ver. 23, but 
 now with the instrumental dative without 
 the preposition. — ' By journeys frequent- 
 (ly), by perils of rivers (the genitives de- 
 note the 7naterial of the perils ; rivers and 
 robbers being the things and persons actu- 
 ally attacking. Winer, § 30. 2, renders it 
 dangers on rivers, justifying it by κ. ii' 
 ττόλίΐ : but in my view a diiiiactioti is 
 ]iointed out by the variety of constr. Wetst. 
 quotes κιΐ'δ. θαλασσώι> from Heliod. ii. 4. 
 The ' perils of rivers ' might arise from 
 crossing or fording, or from floods. The 
 crossing of the rocky and irregular torrents 
 in Alpine districts is to this day attended 
 with danger, which must have been mucli 
 more frequent when bridges were compara- 
 tively rare. And this is the case with a 
 road, among others, frequently traversed by 
 Paul, that between Jerusalem and Antioch, 
 crossed as it is by the torrents from the 
 sides of Lebanon. Maundrell says that the 
 traveller Spon lost his life in one of these 
 torrents : see Conybeare and Howson, vol. 
 i. p. 4Γ)7: and Stanley in loc), by perils 
 of robbers (see note on Acts xiii. 14), 
 by perils from my kindred (the Jewish 
 nation, ix, arising from : they not being 
 ahvays the direct agents, — but, as in 
 many cases in the Acts, setting on others 
 or plotting secretly : or y'ivovQ, — and iBv. 
 below, — imports generically the source, 
 or quarter whence the danger arose), by 
 Vol. II. 
 
 perils from the Gentiles (not merely 
 '■^ from Gentiles," as Stanley: this would 
 be ΐξ Ιθνικών. The art. is omitted after 
 the preposition, the word being thus cate- 
 gorized in Greek ; but it must be supplied 
 in our English idiom), — by perils in the 
 city (in Damascus, Acts ix. 23 f., — Je- 
 rusalem, ib. 20, — Ephesus, xix. 23 ff., and 
 many other places), by perils in the desert 
 (the actual desert .' or merely tlie solitude 
 of journeys as contrasted with ' the city ? ' 
 but any how, not ' ?« solitude:^ the art. 
 must be supplied as in έΐ' iroXti), by perils 
 in the sea (not, as DeW., a repetition 
 from ver. 25 : there are many perils in the 
 sea short of shipwrecks) by perils among• 
 false brethren {who were these ? Grot., 
 al., suppose, ' qui Christianos se simula- 
 bant, ut res Christianorum perdiscerent, de- 
 lude eos proderent,' — and so apparently 
 Chrys., &c. But Paul's use of this com- 
 pound leads us rather to persons who lona 
 Jfi/e wished to be thought αδελφοί, but were 
 not, scil. in heart and conduct, and were 
 opponents of himself personally, rather 
 than designed traitors to tlie Christian 
 cause. Cf. -φενόαπάστολοι above, ver. 13) ; 
 27.] by labour and weariness, by 
 watchings (see on vi. .">) frequent(ly) (the 
 ev is here resumed, perhaps arbitrarily, per- 
 haps also because κόπος and μόχθος are 
 more directly instrumental, — άγρυττν.,δίΟ., 
 more conditionally) by hunger and thirst, 
 by fastings frequent(ly) (voluntary fast- 
 ings, ' ad purificandam mentem et edo- 
 mandam carnem,' as Estius, see also 1 Cor. 
 ix. 27 : and ch. vi. 5, note. De W. 
 here too [see also Stanley] holds to ' in- 
 voluntary tastings ;' but ho is clearly wrong, 
 for νηστ. is lii.-tinguislied from λιμ. κ. 
 0(ψ.), in cold and nakedness' (insuffi- 
 cient clothing :— or, literally, when thrust 
 into prison after his scourgings, — or 
 X X
 
 674 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 XI. 29—33. 
 
 ίΤΓίστασις jitot τ/ 
 των ίκκληαιων. 
 
 ,θ' 
 
 κασ Ί]μζραν, η μΒξ)ΐμ\ 
 
 ττααων bdef 
 
 b'n- ' 'b'n-. ^ GJK 
 
 τις ctat/fvfi, /ecu oi»/c «σϋεΐ'ω ; τις 
 
 Num. xxvi. t ζιλ'/ λ'•νά - .30T?'e "Ω 
 
 i). σκανοαλιί,ίται, και ουκ ί-γω πυρουμαι, "" ϋ,ι καυνασσαί 
 
 yl Cor. XT. 31 ζ - { \ - g ■> Q ' f . ' .31'l>fl^ ^ 
 
 o£i, τα της ^ ασϋέΐ'ίΐας μην κανγιισομαι ^ ο ϋίος και 
 
 ζ gen.. Matt, 
 xiii. 22. 
 vii. 9 reff. 
 
 a ch. viii. 18 reff. 
 e ubsol., ver. 16. 
 
 c Matt. xvii. 27 al. fr. d 1 Cor. 
 
 ' ch. xii. U al. h Rum. xv. 6 reff. 
 
 nrly (appy) Chr (expl. : οι θόρυβοι, a'l ταραχαι, a'l ποΧιορκίαι των ^ήμων καΊ των πόλί ων 
 £.;)ο5.-ι. So also Tluirt al) Thdrt Dam Thl Oec : t.xt BDEFG 39. 67^ lect 8 (ίττιτασις 
 lect 17) (but DE 39. Cp lect 8 have /<ου) : ίπιστασια Naz : concurstis in me d e f( : 
 iiislaniia mea ν g if. — 30. μυν oui B. — 31. aft ο θ. add του ισ^αηΧ D'E d e. — aft θίος, 
 om και Syr ar-erp seth. — rec κυρίου ημών, with DE &c vss flf : txt BFGJK 1. 17- 31-7• 
 
 after his shipwrecks). 28.] He 
 
 passes from particulars, omitting others 
 which might have been specified, to the 
 weight of apostolic care and sympathy 
 which was on him. — ' Not to mention those 
 (afflictions) which are besides (these), (the 
 Vulg., E. v., Beza, Estius, Bengel, under- 
 stand τταρίκτός as rr 'ίζ,ωΰίν, ' the things 
 that are without,' — a meaning which it 
 never has, always implying exception, see 
 reff. — Chrys., al., join χωρ. r. Trapacr. 
 with the foregoing, and put a period after 
 τταρίΚΓ., interpreting it rightly, TrXiiova τά 
 τταραλίίφθ'ιντα των άπαριθμηθέντωΐ' : — ■ 
 but this seems to break the connexion too 
 abruptly, besides giving a strange and un- 
 likely termination to the long sentence pre- 
 ceding), — my care {ίπίστ. may be either 
 ' delay,' ' hindrance,' as Soph. Antig. 225, 
 ΤΓολΧάς yap (Ιχον φροντίδας ϊττιστάσιις, 
 and Xen. Anab. ii. 4, 26, 'όσον S' av χοονον 
 TO 7ΐγονμ(νον τοΐ) στρατεύματος ίπιστή- 
 aiic, τοσοΐιτον ήν άνάγκί] χρόνον ci' όλου 
 τού στρατίΰματος γίγνισθαι την επίστα- 
 σιν, — or, as very frequently in Polybius, 
 see Schweigh., Lex. Polyb., — 'care,' 'at- 
 tention,' ' matter of earnest thought :' e. g. 
 Tr)v νπϊρ των δλω)' ϊπίστασιν κ. όιάλί/ψιν, 
 viii. 30. 13, ' curam summee rei,' — οΰ /c ίκ 
 Trapipyov, άλλ' ίξ ίπιστάσεως iii. 58. 3, — 
 uyfiv τιιά £Ϊς ίπίστασιν, ' attentionem ali- 
 cujus excitare,' ix. 22. 17, al. — The rec. 
 reading, Ιττιστίστασι? (which has perhaps 
 been introduced from Acts xxiv. 12, iirt- 
 στασις not being understood, and then μοι 
 has been altered to μον as easier) can only 
 mean concitrsiis, in a hostile sense, see reff. 
 and e.xx. in Wetst. : and so Chrys. (see 
 var. readd.), &c., take it here : others me- 
 taphorically, as Beza, ' agmen illud in me 
 quotidie consurgens, i. e. sollicitudo de om- 
 nibus eccl. :' — somewhat similarly De W., — 
 ' that wliich sets upon me, importunes me, 
 daily :' and so E. Λ^. Stanley, with Est. 
 al., renders it, ' the concourse of people to 
 see me :' but this is doubtful, as departing 
 from the hostile sense. In Beza's sense, 
 there is something Pauline in the rec, " the 
 
 daily outbreak against me," and the reading 
 cannot be considered certain) day by day, 
 (viz.) my anxiety for all the churches ' (the 
 constr. is an anacoluthon : not, as Meyer, 
 ίπίστ. the subject and μίριμχ/α the predi- 
 cate, which would be a very flat sentence, 
 — ' my daily care is, anxiety S^'c' As it 
 stands, >'/ Ίπίστ. is general, and >'/ μίριμν. 
 particularizes it. Nothing need be sup- 
 plied, ή ίπίστ. occurs to the Ap.'s mind, 
 and is uttered, in the nom., the constr. 
 being disregarded). 29.] 'Curacerte 
 
 συμττάθίίαν generat : quae facit, ut omnium 
 aflfectus in se suscipiat Christi minister, om- 
 nium personas induat, quo se accommodet 
 omnibus.' Calv. — Olsh., after Emmerling, 
 strangely understands, ' Who is weak, if I 
 am not weak?' i.e. ' Who can be called 
 weak, if I am not so .'' ' — The άσθί'νίΐα of 
 the τις may be in various ways ; in faith, 
 as Rom. xiv. 1 al., or in purpose, or in cou- 
 rage : that of the Ap. see 1 Cor. ix. 22, was 
 a sympathetic weakness, a leaning to the 
 same infirmity for the weak brother's sake, 
 but also a veritable θορυβούμαι κ. ταράσ- 
 σομαι (as Chrys.) in himself, on the weak 
 brother's account. tis σκανδ.] " Non 
 
 priore, sed hac versiculi parte addit ego : 
 nam illic infirmo se accommodat : hie dissi- 
 milem se scandalizantis fatetur, partes a 
 scandalizante neglectas scandalizati causa 
 ipse suscipiens. Partes a scandalizante ne- 
 glectse sunt amor, prudentia, &c. Idem 
 tamen Paulus etiam partes scandalizati, sive 
 incommodum quod scandalizatus sentit, in 
 sesuscipit." Bengel. ιτνροΰμαι, — with 
 
 zeal, or with indignation. 30.] partly 
 
 refers back to what has past since ver. 23. 
 The άσθίναα not being that mentioned in 
 a different connexion in ver. 29, but that of 
 ver. 21, to which all since has applied. But 
 the words are not without a forward refer- 
 ence likewise. He will boast of his weak- 
 nesses — of (τά της άσθ.) those things which 
 made him appear mean and contemptible 
 in the eyes of his adversaries. He is about 
 to adduce an instance of escape from dan- 
 ger, of which this is eminently the case : he
 
 XII. 1. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 675 
 
 yvTog ac>«R7-i|-5 
 
 ' πατιψ τοΐι κυρίου Ίησοϋ ' oiSiv, ό ων ^ ίύλο 
 τους αιώνας, οτι υυ φίυόομαι• ^^ ίν Ααμασκω ό '" έθνάρ- lif^.ix.i 
 ■χ^ης Αρίτα του βασιλέως " βφρουρει την πάλιν Δαμα- '"''^^'■^Ρ."'^.* 
 
 33 
 
 σκηνών " ττώσαι μί, ''^ καΐ δ.α ρ βυρΊ^ης iv "^ σapyάvη ί.ί. α,,.Ι: 
 
 ■' \ ' η r^^ - / \ S •■^> ν_' χίν 7.2 a 
 
 Β-χ^αΛασυην όια του ΤΗ^ους και ίζί^ϋγοί' τας νίίοας "^"Ι- '!» 23 
 αύΓοϋ. ΧΙΙ. ^ "Καυχίσθαι^ηο^συμφίρΗμοι' ελίυσομαι laUjlU. 
 
 q here only f. 
 
 reff. 
 s Rom. ii. 3 reff. 
 
 ρ Acts XX. 9 only. Josh. ii. 15, 18. 
 
 t constr., Matt. xJx. lii, w. aor. inf. 
 
 ο John vii. 30 
 r Acts ix. 25 reff. 
 
 44 6-8'. 67K 72. 91. 109-10-16. 219 lect 6 g am goth syr Chr Dam.— rec aft ιησ. add 
 χριστού, with DEJK &c vss ft' : om BFG l?. 31-7- 118 g am goth syr Chr. {In all snck 
 cases, MSS evidence must decide, the presmnptio7i being in favour of the shorter 
 reading.)— ίώίν lect 8.— 32^rec δαμασκ. ττολ. with D^JK i^s nrly (appy) Chr Thdrt 
 Dam al : txt BD'EFG 37 vss (appy).— rec aft πιασαι με ins θιλων (supplementary 
 ffloss), with D^JK &c goth ff : pref FG g copt syr al : om BD' d e ν Syr ar-erp arm 
 Procop Ambrst Pel. — 33. fi- σαργ. om FG : fv σφνριδι 1 r2-marg. 
 
 Chap. XII. 1. for δη, Cti BD'EFGJ 31-7-9. 67'. 89. 108-19 all lect 14 it goth syrr al 
 Chr (Mtt's ms,) Thl (d") : ii κανχ. δ(ΐ 39 lect 1? ν lat-ff : ce D' 114 slav Thl : txt Κ 
 most mss copt seth lat-mss (Wtst) Ath Chr h 1 (con.m also) Thdrt Dam Oec (see notes). 
 — 01^ om copt : ουδέ syrf ar-pol : sed non Ambrst. — for σνμφ. μοι, σνμφίρον μιν BFG 
 IG. (>72 : μιν for μοι also ν copt Pel Bed: txt (μοι om D', ins D^) DEJK mss nrly 
 (appy) it (mihi quidem goth Syr al g) syr al Ath Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec Ambrst Sedul. 
 
 might be scoffed at as δ σαργανοφόρητος, or 
 the like— but he is carried on in his fer- 
 vency of self-renunciation amidst his appa- 
 rent self-celebration, and he will even cast 
 before his enemies the contemptible ante- 
 cedents of his career, boasting in being de- 
 spised, if only for what Christ had done in 
 him. The asseveration in ver. 31 woy be 
 applied to the whole, but I had rather view 
 it as connected with the strange history about 
 to be related : — ' I will glory in my weak- 
 nesses — yea, and I will yet more abase my- 
 self — God knows that I am telling sober 
 truth — &c.' If the solemnity of the asse- 
 veration seem out of proportion to the inci- 
 dent, the fervid and impassioned character 
 of the whole passage must be taken into 
 account. It «ill be seen that I difler from 
 all Comm. here, and cannot but think that 
 they have missed the connexion. Meyer 
 supposes that vv. 32, 33 were only t/ie be- 
 ffiiininff of a catalogue of his escapes, 
 which he breaks off at xii. 1 : and that the 
 asseveration was meant to apply to the 
 whole catalogue: but surely this is very 
 unnatural. 32, 33.] On they«c/, and 
 
 historical difficulty, see note. Acts ix. 23. 
 32.] €v Δαμ. followed by Ααμα- 
 σκηνωρ is pleonastic, but the pleonasm is 
 common enough, especially when for any 
 reason, our words are more than usually 
 precise and formal. εθνάρχης] ' Pre- 
 
 fect,' or 'governor,' stationed there by Ihe 
 Arabian king. The title appears to have 
 been variously used. The High Priest 
 Simon, as a vassal of Syria, is so named 
 
 X X 
 
 I Mace. xiv. 47 ; xv. 1 ff., and Jos. Antt. 
 xiii. (j'G. — It was bestowed by Augustus on 
 Archelaus after his father's death, Jos. Antt. 
 xvii. 11. 4. B. J. ii. G. 3. The presidents 
 of the seven districts into which Egypt was 
 divided under the Romans, bore it (Strabo, 
 xvii. 798) : as did a petty prince of the 
 Bosporus under Augustus (Lucian, Macrob. 
 17). Also the chief magistrates of the Jews 
 living under their own laws in foreign states 
 had this title (Jos. Antt. xiv. 7. 2; xiv. 8. 
 5. B. J. vii. 6. 3) But apparently it must 
 here be taken in its wider sense, and not in 
 this latter : for the mere chief magistrate 
 of the Jews would not have had the power 
 of guarding the city. Doubtless lie was 
 incited by the Jews, who would represent 
 Paul as a malefactor. — σαργάνη, κόψιΐ'ος, 
 Heysch. ; — οι μΐν, σχοίί'κη' τι, οι δι πλίγ- 
 μα τι ίκ σχοιίΊου. Suidas (see Wetst.), 
 =: σπυρίς. Acts ix. 25. Probably it is, as 
 Stanley, a " rope-basket ;" a net. 
 Chap. XII. 1 — 10.] He proceeds to speak 
 of visions and revelations vouchsafed to him, 
 and relates one such, of which hoicever he 
 will 7iut boast, except in as far as it leads 
 to fresh mention of infirmity, in which he 
 will boast, as being a vehicle for the per- 
 fection of Christ's power. In order to 
 understand the connexion of the following, 
 it is very requisite to bear in mind the bur- 
 den of the whole, which runs through it — 
 ti' Γίΐϊς άσθί\'ύαις κιαιχήσομαι. There 
 is no break between this and the last chap- 
 ter. He has just mentioned a passage of 
 his history which might expose him to con-
 
 676 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 ΧΙΤ. 
 
 "xxiv^sl^' 7"? ^'^ " <>7Γτοσιας και " αττοκαΧυφίΐς ^ κυρίου. 
 
 Acts χχτϊ 19 ''fl ' " y/ \ * " ^ / /»/» 
 
 niy. Dan. avupwTTOV tv -^jOiffTW τΓΟΟ £των Οίκατΐοσαριον (^ίΐτε εν 
 
 ■ έκτος του σώματος ουκ οιοο, ο 
 
 w 2Tim. i.9. Tit. i. 2. John xii. 1. Amos 
 
 ^ Οίδο BDEF 
 GJK. 
 
 VBen.,Rev.i.l aiOUOTl OVK οίδο, tiTE 
 
 only. (See ' ' 
 
 note.) (ICor. i. 7. Gal. i. 12. 2Tliess.i. 7. 1 Pet. i. 7, 13.) 
 i. 1. IT. 7. xl Cor. vi. ISreff. 
 
 —for yap, δε και Β 213: δι FG 73. ί30. 118 g ν copt Dam lat-ff.— ίΐς τας FG.— for 
 κυρ., χριστού FG g. — 2. tr χριστώ om 21'J^ Chr. — υνκ oiva (1st) cm 57- 114 lat-mss 
 
 tempt and ridicule — this was one of the 
 ησϋέ}'(ιαι. He now comes to another: 
 but tliat other inseparably connected with 
 and forming the sequel of, a glorious reve- 
 lation vouchsafed him by the Lord. This 
 therefore he relates, at the same time repu- 
 diating it as connected with himself, and 
 fixing attention only on (he άσθίνηο which 
 followed it. 1.] I have retained the 
 
 rec. reading, believing that from its diffi- 
 culty the others have sprung. Let only the 
 two readings κανχασθαι οι) οΰ σνμφίμίί 
 μοι, ίλενσομαι yap, and καυχάσθαι Oti, oi» 
 σνμφ'ίρον μίν ίλινσομαι δί, be compared, 
 and I think there can be no doubt which is 
 the nervous elliptic irony of the great Apostle, 
 and which the tame conventional propriety 
 of the grammatical correctors. The other 
 varr., δί for δή, and the prefixing of tl, are 
 too palpable emendations to require critical 
 treatment. The difficulty however is con- 
 siderably lessened, when the right con- 
 nexion is borne in mind. — 'To boast, 
 verily, is not to my advantage: for (i.e. 
 it will be shewn to be so, by the following 
 fact of a correction administered to me Ίνα 
 μι) νπιρηίρυιμαι) I will proceed to visions 
 and revelations of the Lord.' δή in this 
 sense implies a consciousness of a reason 
 why the assertion is true, and is therefore 
 naturally followed by yap, if the sentence 
 is completed. The same sense is found in 
 Plato, Phaed. p. GO, ώ "Σώκραης, υστατον 
 δή σΐ TTpuctpoijai νϋν ο'ι ίττιτήδίίοι, και συ 
 τούτους, — the completion of the sense 
 being, — ' for you are to die to-night :' — ττολ- 
 λοί κακώς πυάσσονσπ', οΰ συ δι) μόνος, 
 Eur. Hec. 464 : i. e. οΰ σν δή μόνος κακώς 
 
 ττράσσίΐς, πολλοί yap άλλοι (See 
 
 Hartung, Partikellehre i. 270, who however 
 explains δή in these examples somewhat 
 differently.) The force of it here then, is : 
 " / am tvell aware that to boast is not good 
 for me: for I will come to an instance in 
 which it was so sheivn to me." els 
 
 OTTT. K. άΐΓ. Kvp.] q. d. ' and the instancos 
 I tvill select are just of that kind in which, 
 if boasting ever ivere good, it might be 
 allowed :' thus the yap gives a more com- 
 plete proof, οπτασία is the form or man- 
 ner of receiving άττοκάλυψις, the revela- 
 tion. There can hardly be an όπταπία 
 without an άποκάλυψις of some kind. 
 
 Therefore Theophylact's distinction is 
 scarcely correct, ή άτΓοκάλνφις πλέον η 
 f^ft της οπτασίας' ή μίν yap μόΐ'ον 
 βλίπίΐν δίδωσιν α'ύτη δε και τι βαθύτερον 
 του όρωμ'ενου άπογνμροΤ. κυρίον, 
 
 gen. subj., ' vouchsafed me by the Lord,' 
 — not obj., 'of the Lord,' for such is not 
 that which follows. — No particular polemi- 
 cal reason, as the practice of particular 
 parties at Corinth to allege visions, &c. 
 (Baur), need be sought for the narration of 
 this vision : Paul's object is general, and 
 the means taken to attain it are simply 
 subordinate to it, viz. the vindication of his 
 apostolic character. 2 — 4.] An ex- 
 
 ample of such a vision and revelation. 
 The adoption of the third person is re- 
 markable : it being evident from ver. 7 that 
 he himself is meant. It is plain that a 
 contrast is intended between the rapt and 
 glorified person of vv. 2, 4, — and himself, 
 the weak and afflicted and almost despairing 
 subject of the σκτόλοψ ry σαρκί of ver. 7 ff. 
 Such glory belonged not to him, but the 
 weakness did. Nay so far was the glory 
 from being his, that he knev? not whether 
 he was in or out of the body when it was 
 put upon him : so that the εγώ ηντός, com- 
 pounded of the νονς and σάοξ (Rom. vii. 
 25), clearly was not the subject of it, but 
 as it were another form of his personality, 
 analogous to that which we shall assume 
 when unclothed of the body. — It may be 
 remarked in passing, as has been done by 
 Whitby, that the Ap. here by implication 
 acknowledges the possibility of conscious- 
 ness and receptivity in a disembodied state. 
 — Let it not be forgotten, that in the con- 
 text, this vision is introduced not so much 
 for the purpose of making it a ground of 
 boasting, which he does only passingly and 
 under protest, but that he may by it intro- 
 duce the mention of the σκόλοψ τη σαρκί, 
 %i'hich bore so conspicuous a 2)arl in his 
 άσθενειαι, το boast of avhich is his pre- 
 sent object. 2.] ' I know (not, 
 ' knew,' as E. Ύ. : which introduces serious 
 confusion, making it seem as if the προ 
 ετών δεκατ. were the date of the know- 
 ledge, not, as it really is, of the visiori) a 
 man in Christ {Iv χρ. belongs to uvQp., 
 not to οιδα, as Beza; avQ. iv χρ. = 'a 
 Christian,' *a man whose standing is in
 
 2—4. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους β. 
 
 677 
 
 θίυς oicev) ■ ap-nrayivTa ^ τυν τοιούτον " ί'ως τρίτου ^ ουρά- ^ To'°A%Viiii. 
 
 -3''^ζ^ - "α /,/»/ 39. 1 Thess." 
 
 νου. και οιοα τον τοιούτον ανϋοωττον [ειτί εν σώματι ίτ•.ΐ7. Rev. 
 
 Uts χωρίς του σώματος ουκ οίδα, ο θίυς οίδεν) '^ οτι ^ψ^„^^%^^ 
 
 i/pTTa-yrj ίΐς τον παραοίΐσον και ηκουσεν άρρητα ρήματα aSoMatt. xi 
 
 χ. 1ϊ. b = John i. 3 al. fr. 
 
 d here only t. 
 
 23. Lake 
 c Lake zxiii. 43. Rev. ij. 7 only. Gen. ii. 8, and fr. 
 
 Syr ar-erp aeth Pel Bed. — τον bef σωμ. om B. — aft τοιούτον, ins ανθρωττον 109. — ίως 
 του FG. — 3. εν τω σω DE(' .') : add ουκ otca IJ. — rec for χωρίς, έκτος {cor rn from 
 ver 2), with G (al ?) Orig all : txt BD'E' Methi Epiph.— ουκ oida om Β Meth.— ο θ. 
 
 Christ•;' so υΐ και προ ίμοϋ yiyovav tv 
 χριητψ, Rom. xvi. 7), — fourteen years 
 ago (belongs not to οΙδα, nor to tv χρ. as 
 Grot.: ' honiinem talem, qui per 14 annos 
 Christo serviat ;' — but to άρπα-/(ντα. On 
 the idiotn see reff., — on the dale, the Pro- 
 legg.) whether in the body, I know not, 
 or out of the body, I know not: God 
 knoweth (if in the ϋοΛμ, the idea would be 
 that he was taken up bod'ili/ : if out of the 
 body^ to which the alternative manifestly 
 inclines, — that his spii'it was rapt from the 
 body, and taken up disembodied. Aug. de 
 genesi ad litteram .xii. 3 — 14, discusses the 
 matter at length, and concludes thus, — 
 
 * Proinde cjuod vidit raptus usque in ter- 
 tium caelum, c[uod etiam se scire confirmat, 
 proprie vidit, non imaginaliter. Sed quia 
 ipsa a corpore alienata utrum oranino mor- 
 tuum corpus reliquerit, an secundum mo- 
 dura quendam viventis corporis ibi anima 
 fuerit, sed mens ejus ad videnda vel audi- 
 enda ineffabilia ejus visionis arrepta sit, 
 hoc incertum erat, — ideo forsitan dixit, 
 " sive in corpore sive extra corpus, nescio, 
 Deus scit." ' And similarl}• Thom. Aq. and 
 Estius : not, as Meyer thinks, making the 
 alternative consist between reality and a 
 mere vision, but between the anima, the 
 life, being rapt out of the body, leaving it 
 dead, and the mens, tlie inteliigence or 
 spirit, being rapt out of the body, leaving it 
 
 * secundum modum quendam vivens ') such 
 an one (so τον τοιούτον resumes after a 
 parenthesis, 1 Cor. v. 5) rapt (snatched or 
 taken up, reft.) as far as the third 
 heaven.' — What is the third heaven? 
 The Jews knew no such number, but com- 
 monly (not universally : Rabbi Judah 
 said, " Duo sunt coeH, Deut. x. 14 ") 
 recognized seven heavens : and if their 
 arrangement is to be followed, the tliird 
 heaven will be very low in the celestial 
 scale, being only the material clouds. That 
 the threefold division into the air (nubi- 
 ferum), the sky (astriferum), and the 
 heaven (angeliferum), was in use among the 
 Jews, ^leyer regards as a. fiction of Grotius. 
 Certainly no Rabbinical authority is given 
 for such a statement : but it is put forward 
 confidently by Grotius, and since his time 
 
 adopted without enquiry by many Comm. 
 — It is uncertain whether the severifold 
 division prevailed so early as the Ap.'s 
 time : and at all events, as we must not 
 invent Jewish divisions which never existed, 
 so it seems rash to apply here, one about 
 whose date we are not certain, and which 
 does not suit the context : — for to be rapt 
 only to the clouds, even supposing ver. 4 to 
 relate a further assumption, would hardly 
 be thus solemnly introduced, or the pre- 
 position ϊωζ used. The safest expl. there- 
 fore is, not to follow any fixed division, but 
 judging by the evident intention of the ex- 
 pression, to luiderstand a high degree of 
 celestial exaltation. I cannot see any 
 cogency in Meyer's argument, that ' the 
 third heaven must have been an idea well 
 known and previousl}• defined among his 
 readers,' seeing that in such words as τρις 
 μακάριος, &c. it is manifestly inapplicable. 
 3, 4 ] ^ solemn repetition of the fore- 
 going, with the additional particular of his 
 having had unspeakable revelations made 
 to him. — Some, as Clem., al., Strom, v. 
 p. 427, Iren. ii. S5, Athan. in Apol. (Ben- 
 gel), Orig. on Rom. xvi. (or his inter- 
 preter), Oecum., al., think that this was a 
 fresh assumption, ίως τρίτου ονρανυϋ κα- 
 KiiOiv ίίς τον —αράΐίΐσον, — and with these 
 Meyer agrees : but surely had this been 
 intended, some intimation would have been 
 given of it, either by και, or by placing t/c 
 τον παράζιισον (as the stress would be 
 then no longer on the fact upirayTivat as 
 before, but on the new place to ivltich 
 ήοπάγη) in the place of emphasis before 
 ήρττάγ»; ; — or, by both combined, — 'ότι και 
 ίί'ς τον τταράί'ίΐυον ήρττάγη. As it is, 
 with the verb jjreceding in both clauses, 
 and therefore no prominence given to the 
 places as distinguished from one another, I 
 must hold 'ίως τρίτου υΰρ. to be at least .so 
 far equivalent to ίΐ'ς τον παμάοησοί', as to 
 be a general local description of the situa- 
 tion in which ύ naodSnaog is found. The 
 repetition of fire . . . olotv is equally 
 accountable on either explanation, being 
 made for solemnity and cmjihasis. — The 
 παράδ€ΐσος cannot here bo the Jewish 
 Paradise, the bUssful division or side of
 
 678 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 XII. 
 
 α ουκ 
 
 { 
 κηνχησομαι, ντηρ 
 
 e Acts ii. 29. 
 
 Esth ϊτ. 2. 
 f ch. vii. 14. 
 
 ix. 2. 
 gch. xi.an. 
 h oil. si. 1(1. 
 iRoin. ix. 1. 
 
 Ej)h. iv. 
 
 k = heie only 
 Xen. Cyr. i. 
 B. li». 35. 
 (μη φίίδου 
 ίιόι'•σκ(ιν, 
 Ear. Ore.-t. 387.) Ihereoiily. elf• 
 
 13 ch. IT. 7. Jos. Antt. i. 13. 4. ii. 2. 1 
 
 tt,ov ανθξ)ωτΓω λπλησαι. υπίξ> ^ του τοιούτου 
 
 ταις 
 ίσομηι 
 
 1 
 
 tvtiaiq. 
 αφοων' 
 
 Of ίμαυτου ου ' καυ~^ησομαι, ίΐ μΊ] tv 
 ίαν -γαξ) θίλί]σω καυχ7/σασθοι, ουκ 
 
 ίΐς ίμζ 
 
 7 
 ίμου. ' 
 
 αΧηθίίαν yap ίρω' φίΐ^ομαι δε, μη τις 
 
 λο-γισηται υπίρ ο ρΛίπ£ΐ μζ, η ακουίΐ τι sc, 
 
 και Ty " υπερβολϊ^ τωΐ' ° αποκαλυφίων ^"ίνα μη 
 
 ' ch. 3. 
 
 1 Cor. ϊτ. 6. χ. 13. 
 
 η constr., Rom. vii. 
 
 otS. om Chr. — 4. άρρητα om seth : ρήματα ora 73 Ambr (somet). — 5. row om 64. — for 
 νπιρ de, τηοι St D' (ττίρι before, Orig). — rec aft ασθ. ins μου (from ch xi. 30), with 
 D'EFGJKli^s nrly (aytpy) g ν goth ath al Ath Thdrt Dam al lat-ff: om ΒΟ^ G^K 109 
 d e copt syrr arm. — 6. μηττως ας ίμί \oyi<Ti)Tai τις 17• — τι om (as superfluous) 
 ΒΌΈ^ΡΟ 37. «7^ g am demid tol harl^ seth arm Orig : ins D'E'JK mss nrly (appy) 
 d e V (liarl') goth syr al (η ο άκ. Syr copt) Chr Thdrt Dam Thl Oec Ambrst al. — 
 7. bef ira, ins Sio ABFG 17 g (67 for iva) : om D (al.')'^ nrly Chr Thdrt^ all Iren 
 all. {The corrn arose from joining, as in Lachm, και τη υπίρβ. τ. αττοκ. to the fore- 
 going, as if in apposn ivith acBtvtiaiQ, the inversion of order with iva not being 
 
 Hades (Scheol), where the spirits of the 
 just awaited the resurrection, see note ou 
 Luke xvi. 22, — but the Paradise of which 
 our Lord spoke on the Cross, — the place of 
 happiness into which He at His Death 
 introduced the spirits of the just : see on 
 Luke xxiii. 43. άρρητα ρήματα, i. e. 
 
 as explained below, ' words which it is 
 not lawful to utter:'— as Vulg., ^^ arcana 
 verba, qua non licet hornini loqui." The 
 interp., " qtice did nequeunt," as Beza, 
 Estius, Calov., Olsh., al., is hardly con- 
 sistent with the narrative : for in that case, 
 as Bengel remarks, ' Paulas non potuisset 
 audire.' The passages adduced by Wetst. 
 mostly refer to the mysteries, or some 
 secret rites : e.g. Demosth. contr. Neseram, 
 p. 1369, αϋτη >/ yvvr) νμΧν ΐθνε τα άρρητα 
 lipa ντϊΐμ της πόΧίως, και ilSii>, α ου 
 7Γροςηκ(ν αυτήν of)^ti' ϊ,ίνην ούσαν. 
 α οΰκ ίξόν] ' which it is not lawful for a 
 MAN to Utter ' (see above) : — imparted by 
 God, but not to be divulged to others : and 
 therefore, in this case, intended, we may 
 presume, for the Ap.'s own consolation and 
 encouragement. Of what kind they were, 
 or by whom uttered, we have no hint 
 given, and it were worse than trifling to 
 conjecture. " Sublimitatis certe magnse 
 fuere : nam non omnia coelestia sunt in- 
 effabiUa, v. gr. Ex. xxxiv. 6, Isa. vi. 3, qua 
 tamen valde sublimia." Bengel. 5.] 
 
 Of such a man he will boast, but not (see 
 above on ver. 1) of himself, except it be in 
 his infirmities. τον τοιούτου must be 
 
 masc. as before, not neuter, at Luth., al., 
 take it. This is shewn by ϋπίμ, used of 
 the person respecting whom (reff.), whereas 
 tv is said of the thing on account of 
 which, a man boasts. — He strikes here 
 again the key-note of the whole — boasting 
 
 in his infirmities. He will boast of such a 
 person, so favoured, so exalted; but this 
 merely by the way ; it is not his subject : it 
 was introduced, not indeed without refer- 
 ence to the main point, but princijiaUy to 
 bring in the infirmity following. 6.] 
 
 ' For (supply the sentence for whicli yap 
 renders a reason : ' Not but that I might 
 boast concerning myself if I ivould :') — if 
 I shall wish to boast (ύττίρ Ιμαυτοϋ), I 
 shall not be a fool (I shall not act rashly 
 or imprudently, for I shall not boast with- 
 out solid ground for it) : for I shall speak 
 the truth:— but I abstain (reff.), that no 
 one may reckon of me (reff'. and add 
 tic μαλακίαν σκώπτων, Demosth. 308. 18) 
 beyond (by a standard superior to that 
 furnished by) what he sees me (to be), or 
 what he hears (lit. or hears any thing ; a 
 pleonastic constr. r= η tin άκονιι) from 
 me.' — Lest he should seem to undervalue 
 so legitimate a subject of boasting, he 
 alleges the reason why he abstains : not 
 that he had not this and more such exalta- 
 tions, truly to allege : but because he wished 
 to be judged of by what they really had 
 seen and heard of and from himself in per- 
 son. 7 — 10.] He now comes to that 
 for which the foregoing was mainly alleged: 
 the infirmity in his flesh, which above 
 others hindered his personal efficiency in 
 the apostolic ministry. 7•] 'And 
 that I might not, by the abundant excess 
 of revelations (made to me), be uplifted 
 (the order of the words is chosen to bring 
 Ty υτηρβ. κ.τ.λ. into the place of foremost 
 emphasis : see reff".) there was given me 
 (' by God:' certainly not, as Meyer, al., by 
 Satan, of whom such an expression as 
 ίδόθη would surely hardly be used : of. 
 V Χ"ρΐζ >) ίοθίΐσά μοι, so often said by
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους β. 
 
 679 
 
 ^ υπψαιρωμαι, ϊΒόΟη μοι "^ σκόλοφ "^ ττ? σαοκ], «77*^°^ ''2Theii''V4 
 σαταν ινα με iCoAa^iCy ινα μη ' υπίραιρωμαι. ° υπι-ρ ΐχχί.Ίί 
 
 r \ \ , U /Ν ,/ν' ->» arrangmt of 
 
 τούτου τρις τον κυριον τταρζκαΑίσα ινα αποστη απ ^^"^3, ι cor. 
 
 . - η \ > - '?■ 1'• "''• 
 
 f/uou. ■ /cat ίίρηκίν μοι ^ Λρκει σοι ί] \άξ>ις μου' η yap li.fa. *^'''" 
 έυναμις ev aaUtvita ^ rfAttrac. ηόιστα ουν μάλλον =Num. 
 
 Ezek. xxviii. 24. r dat., 1 Cor. vii. 28. See Gal. iv. 14. s Mutt. xxvi. (17. || Mk. 1 Cur. iv. 
 
 11. 1 Pet. ii. 20 only t. t — ver. 5. u = Matt, xviii. 32. xxvi. 53. Luke xv. 28. Acts xxxv. 2. 
 
 V =" Luke IT. 13. Acts v. 38. xxii.29. Sir. vii. 2. w =■ Matt xxv. 9. John vi. 7 al. Num. xi. 22. 
 
 x=cb. xi. 30. y = (See Luke ii. 39. Rom. ii. 27) here only. Eur. Bacch. 90. zver. laonly. 
 
 understood.) — υττίραιρο/χπί DE?J (and some below also) : υττεριιρω με 109-. — σκολωψ 
 J, σκωλωψ Κ 219'•. — aft; σαιικι, add μην FG g ν al Cypr al. — σατανά A'BD'FG (Origj 
 του σατανά) : t.xt A-D'EJK mss (appy) Origj Ath Mac Chr Tlidrt Dam al. — ivf< μη 
 νπεραιρ. om (as superfluous : but the repelilion has special emphasis) ADEFG 17 it ν 
 aelh Chr Iren Tertj Aug al : ins B(e sil)JK mss nrly (appy) syrr copt gotli al Origj 
 Mac (these two do not cite και τη to νπεραιρ. before) Thdrt, Dam al Bas lat-fF. — 
 8. και υτηρ A Thdrt, Iren. — τον κυρ. τρις D'E d e. — iva to εμού omChr (h 1 and elsw) 
 Thdrt (somet). — 9. for ίίρηκ., enrtv FG Chr Thdrt. — rec aft δυναμ. ins μου (see note), 
 with AD'EJK &c vss Orig Chr Thdrt Pallad al : om BD^FG it ν goth seth arm Iren 
 (gr and lat) Archel Isid Orig-intj Bas Tert Cypr Jer Ambrst al. — rec Γίλίίοιται (expla- 
 natory gloss), with D^EJK &c Orig Ath all : txt ABD'FG (al }).— μάλλον om 3. 93 ν 
 
 the Αρ., — Rom. xii. 3. 6; xv. 15 al., and 
 the absolute use of ίδόθη for bestowed, 
 portioned out by God, I Cor. xi. 15 ; xii. 
 7, 8. Gal. iii. 21. James i. 5) a thorn (the 
 word may signify a stake, or sharp pointed 
 staff, ξνλον οζί), Hesych., — so in Horn. II. 
 sviii. 176, κεφαλήν . . . ττί/ξηι άνά σκο- 
 λήττεσσι ; but in the LXX, reff., it is 'a 
 thorn,^ and such is the more likely mean- 
 ing here. Meyer cites from Artemid. iii. 
 33, άκανθαι καΊ σκόλοπις οοννας σημαι- 
 νονσι Sia το όζύ. See however Stanley's 
 note, who rejects the meaning ' thorn,' and 
 supposes the figure to refer to the punish- 
 ment of impalement) in my flesh (the expr. 
 used Gal. iv. 11 of this same affliction, τον 
 ττίιρασμόν μου τον iv τι] σαρκί μου, seems 
 decisive for rendering the dative thus, and 
 not as a dativus incommodi : see also the 
 other ref.) the (or, an) angel of Satan 
 (σατάν occurs only here in N. T. : else- 
 where it is σατανάς, gen. σατανά. Hence 
 the reading. But it can only be the geni- 
 tive. If taken as the nom., the expression 
 mu^t mean either, a hostile angel, which 
 would be contrary to the universal usage of 
 Satan, as a proper name : or, the angel 
 Satan, which is equally inconsistent with 
 N. T. usage, according to which Satan, 
 though once an angel, is now άηχων της 
 ίζονσίας του άίρος, Eph. ii. 2, and has his 
 own angels, Matt. xxv. 41), that he (the 
 anyel of Satan, — not the σκόλοψ, which 
 would be an unnecessary confusion of me- 
 ta])hors. ' The continuation of a discourse 
 often belongs to the word in apposition, 
 not to tiie main subject.' Meyer) may 
 buffet me (κολα^ιΖ^ is best thus expressed, 
 in the present. The aorist would denote 
 
 merely one such act of insult. Thus 
 Chrys. : . . . wgrt διηνεκούς δέϊσθαι τοΰ 
 χαλινού' ον γαρ ύτην, 'ίνα κυλαψίσψ, 
 άλλ' 'ίνα κολαψίζ^, — Theophyl., οΰχ 'ίνα 
 Ιίπαζ μί κολαφισι^, άλλ' ati, — and simly 
 Oecum.), that I might not be uplifted ' 
 (the repetition gives force and solemnity, — 
 expressing his firm persuasion of the divine 
 intention in thus afflicting him). — As 
 regards the thorn itself, very many, and 
 some very absurd conjectures have been 
 hazarded. They may be resolved into three 
 heads, the two former of which are, from 
 the nature of the case, out of the question 
 (see below) : ( 1 ) that Paul alludes to 
 spiritual solicitations of the devil (' in- 
 jectiones Satanaa '), who suggested to him 
 blasphemous thoughts, — soGerson, Luther 
 (how characteristically!), Calov., — or re- 
 morse for Lis former life, so Osiander, 
 Mosheim, &c. : or according to the Ro- 
 manist interpp., who want to find here a 
 precedent for their monkish stories of 
 temptations, — incitements to lust, — so 
 Thorn. Aq., Lyra, Bellarmin, Estius, Corn, 
 a Lapide, al. (2) that he alludes to oppo• 
 sition from his adversaries, or some one 
 adversary κατ ί^οχί^ν; so many ancient 
 Comm., Chrys., Theophyl., Oecum., Theo- 
 doret, — Calvin, Beza, al., and recently, 
 Fritzsche, and Schradcr. (3) that he 
 points to some grievous bodily pain, which 
 has been curiously specified by different 
 Comm. The ancients (Chrys., Theojjhyl., 
 Oecum., Jerome on Gal. iv. 14) mention 
 κίφαλαλγία : some have suppo.sed hi/po- 
 chondriac melanclioly, which however 
 hardly answers the conditions of a σκιΊλοψ, 
 in which acute pain seems to be implied :
 
 680 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 ΧΙΤ. 
 
 ρ. 
 
 18. 8 
 ccon 
 
 aRom.ii.i7 ^ κανγι^σομίΐι "εν ταις ^ ασβ^νΐίαις μον, Ίνα ΐττισκηνωσι^ abde 
 *" έπΓσΤ'ϊτίί ^^' ^i"^ ^ δυναμίς του "χ^χστοΰ. ^" δίο "^ ίύδο/οώ '^ ίν 
 •!!iyb.'?v!"^' '' ασθενείοις, εν ίίβρεσιν, έι/ '^ avayKaiQ, εν διωγμοις, εν 
 consir, Matt. ^ σΓεvoχw^o(caς, UTTfo γ^ξ>ιστου όταν yap ασυίνω, τογ£ 
 
 (Seecliv% SuVOTOC εί /U. 
 
 refl.) llir" ^ " J .'" ' ' .v> 
 
 d (.\cts sxvii. ^^ 1 ε -yova άφρων νμ^ις μί ijvayKaaare. εγω "yap 
 
 ProT. viii. 13 al. e = 1 Cor. τϋ. 26. ch. τί. 4. f Rom. viii. 35 reft". g ch. Ti. 4 reff. h Acts 
 
 XX. 85 reff. i = 1 Cor. xiii. 1. k ch. xi. 16. 
 
 Syr ar-erp leth arm Orig Chr Vigil Pel. — μου om Β 07"'. 71 copt syr Iren. — επισκηνωσίΐ 
 J. — 10. for ivdoKio, ττε—οιθα tivat sail. — aft ασθ., add μου FG g ν (not am al). — iv 
 ίιωγμ. om A. — νπιρ om 93. — on γ. ασθ., τ. δννατω FG : rore δ. ιιμ. om sah. — 
 11. tysyoin FG. — rec aft αφοωΐ' ins κανχωμινος {explanaiory addn), with J &c syrr al 
 gr-ff: om ABDEFGK 23^ 40. GV- 71. llG-17-77-8. 238 it ν copt teth arm lat-ff.— for 
 
 alii aliter, see Pool, Synops. ad loc. ; and 
 Stanley's note, which is important in other 
 respects also, and full of interest. — On 
 the whole, putting together the figure here 
 used, that of a thorn, occasioning pain, and 
 the κολαφισμός, buffeting or pultwg io 
 shame, it seems quite necessary to infer 
 that the Ap. alludes to some painful and 
 tedious bodily malady, which at the same 
 time put him to shame before those among 
 whom he exercised his ministry. Of such 
 a kind may have been the disorder in his 
 eyes, more or less indicated in several pas- 
 sages of his history and Epistles (see notes 
 on Acts xiii. 9; xxiii. 1 f . : — and Gal. iv. 
 14 (15.'); vi. 11 (?)). But it may also 
 have been something besides this, and to 
 such an inference probability would lead 
 us : disorders in tlie eyes, however sad in 
 their consequences, not being usually of a 
 very painful or distressing nature in them- 
 selves. 8.] 'In respect of this (en^e/ 
 of Satan, not σλ-όλοψ, see below), I thrice 
 {τξΐίς, not indefinite as Chrys., τυντίστι, 
 -πολλάκις. Meyer well observes, ' At his 
 first and second request, no answer was 
 given to him : on the third occasion, it 
 came ; and his faithful resignation to the 
 Lord's will j)revcnted his asking again') 
 besought the Lord (Christ, see ver. 9) 
 that he might depart from me (the angel 
 of Satan, see rcf. Luke) : 9.] And 
 He said to me (this perf. can hardly in 
 English be represented otherwise than by 
 the historical aorist ; in the Greek, it par- 
 takes of its own proper sense — ' He said, 
 and that answer is enough .•' ' He hath 
 said,' — but this last would not contain 
 reference enough to the /act itself. The 
 poverty of our language in the finer dis- 
 tinctions of the tenses often obliges us to 
 render inaccurately and fall short of the 
 wonderful language with which we have to 
 deal. — How this was said, whether accom- 
 panied by an appearance of Christ to him 
 
 or not, must remain in obscurity), My 
 grace (not, — ' My favour generally ;' — 
 ' My imparted grace') is sufficient for thee 
 (άρκ€Ϊ, sjjokcn from the divine omnis- 
 cience, ^suffices, and shall suffice :' q. d. 
 ' the trial must endure, untaken away .• 
 but the grace shall also endure, and never 
 fail thee') for (the reason lying in My ways 
 being not as man's ways. My Power not 
 being brought to perfection as man's power 
 is conceived to be) (My) Power is made 
 perfect (has its full energy and complete 
 manifestation) in (as the element in which 
 it acts as observable by man) weakness.' 
 — See ch. iv. "J, and 1 Cor. ii. 3, 4, — where 
 the influence of this divine response on the 
 Ap. is very manifest. If I mistake not, 
 the expr. της δννάμ€ως, there, favours the 
 omission of μου here, as in our text, and 
 makes it probable that it was inserted for 
 perspicuity's sake, and to answer to )) (vv. 
 του xp. below. — ' Most gladly therefore 
 will I rather (than that my affliction should 
 be removed from me, which before that 
 response, I wished) boast {^κανχ. is in the 
 emphatic place, — I will rather boast in mine 
 infirmities. Had μάλλον signified ' rather 
 than in revelations' or ' rather than in any 
 thing else,' it would have been μάλλον if 
 τα~ις άσθίρίίαις μου κηνχήσομαι) in my 
 infirmities, that (by my anQivnai being, 
 not removed from me, but becoming 
 my glory) the Power of Christ may 
 have its residence in me (see ref. 
 Polyb. — ' may carry on in me its work 
 unto completion,' as above). 10.] 
 
 'Wherefore (because of this relation to 
 human weakness and divine power) I 
 rejoice in infirmities (four kinds of which 
 are then specified, — all coming also, as well 
 as ασθ. proper, under the category of άσθ'ί- 
 vtiai, as hindrances and baffiings of human 
 strength),— ίτα. insults, in necessities, in 
 persecutions, in distresses, — on behalf of 
 Christ : for whenever I am weak (apply-
 
 10—14. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 681 
 
 ωφΕίλον υφ νμων "' συνίστασθαι' ουδέν γαρ ° νστίρησα ^ ^J^^^icJr"' 
 των " υπξρλιαν αποστόλων, η καΐ " ουδί'ΐ' ύμι. ^'^ τα μ£ί' m^Rom.iu. 
 ^ σημίΐα του αποστόλου '^ κατίψ-^άσθη ίν νμ'ιν kv ^ '^^^<^'>J 1''ιςοτ'% \9 
 
 υτΓομοιη^ί, σημποις και τερασιν και όυναμίσιν. rip^mkeu. 
 
 / . tt «^ U ' / Λ ν < \ < Λ < ' Λ ' . 12. 2 Thess. 
 
 •ya^ εστίν ο ηττΐ]Όητί υττίρ της λοιττας ίΚκΑησιας, α ^^,'/^^ 
 μη οτί αυτός ίyω ου '" κατίνάξ)Κησα υμών ; " χο^ίίσπσΟε r = Actssx.i9 
 
 "■ν'ςν' ' ll'^NVz ' a'' a>' ''*''^• 
 
 μοι ΤΊ]ν αόικιαν ταντην. ιοου τρίτον ίτοιμως f^wsRomu? 
 
 t Acts ϋ. 22. Heb. ii. 4. tt constr. ace. w. ώφελβίσθαι, Matt. xvi. 2R. u 2 Pet. ii. 19, 20 only. 
 
 Isa. viii. 9. xx. 5. ν = ver. β. w cli. xi. il refl'. χ = rh. ii. 7, 10 reff. y = here 
 
 only. Thuc.iii. 66. ζ ch. xiii. 1. a Acts xxi. 13. 1 Pel. iv. 5 only. Dan.iii. 15. 
 
 μ(, Se 93. — οφίλην 238. — υφ ημών A : αψ ημών 238 : ουδί r γαρ rt Β. — 12. for τα μιν, 
 αλλ £ (correct »;) τα μίν FG g: τα μιντοι 23. 39. 7Ί. 121-3 Thdrt Dam: τα μίν γαρ 
 01 : άλλα τα 37. 71-3. 80. 93 : tanien d e ν Ambrst Pel (most of them joining etsi nihil 
 Slim with what follows \1).—κατηργασΘη FG, κατηργασθην DE. — rec tv σημ. {me- 
 chanical repetition from the foregoing), wirh D-^JK &c vss Thdrt al : txt ABD'FG 17• 
 39. 71-4. 80 it am tol al goth Syr Chr Dam Ambrst Bed (but pref και FG g Syr Chr : 
 add Γί Β 39. 73-4 Dam).— 13. ησσωθητε BD' 17: ίλαττωΟητε FG : t.\t AD^JK'iiiss 
 nrly (appy) Chr Thdrt Dam al. — for νπιρ, τταρα DE : εΐ' ταις &c 49. — (γω αιτος- FG 
 al vss. — for αΰικιαΐ', αμαρτιαΐ' FG. — 14. iSov om sah. — aft τριτοί' ins τοντο ABFG 10. 
 17. 232. 31-7-9. 47-8. Gl-7. 71 to 4. 80. 109-12-21 to 3. 213 it ν seth arm Chr Thl 
 Ambrst Pel: bef rpirov DE 93 syrr arr copt {insn from ch xiii. \, as the variety of 
 j)Osition sufficiently shews, the ivord having been written in the margin and then 
 variously ji laced) : om JK &c (no vs ajipy). — κατεναρκηαα'ί2. — rec aft καταν.'ιηϋ νμων 
 {sripplemcntary ; from above ; had νμων been in the text origly,it would never have 
 been ejected, leaving the verb standing alone. This is further shewn by the var υμάς), 
 
 ing to all five situations above), then I 
 am mighty.' Wetst. quotes from Philo, 
 Vit. Mosis, ii. p. 92, μι) άναττίπτιη. 
 το άσθίνϊι; νμώί' δΰναμίς ίστι. 
 11 — 18.] He excuses his boasting, and is 
 thereby led to speak of the signs of an 
 Apostle v:rought among them, and to 
 reassert his disinterestedness in preaching 
 to them, on occasion of his past and in- 
 tended visits. 11.] ' I am become 
 (the emphasis on yiyova, — I am verily 
 become a fool, viz. by this boasting, which 
 I have now concluded. ' Receptui canit :' 
 Bengel. But it is still ironical, spoken 
 from the situation of his adversaries) a 
 fool: ye compelled me {νμύς emphatic). 
 For I (εγώ also emphatic, but more with 
 ref. to what has past : ' ye compelled me, 
 it was no doing of mine, for / &c.' The 
 meaning is not, as De W., " /, not mine 
 adversaries," who are an element foreign 
 to the present sentence) ought to have 
 been recommended by you (emphatic, liy 
 yoit, not by himself) : for I was nothing 
 behind (when I was witli you) these sur- 
 passers of the Apostles (see on ch. xi. 5 : 
 but here even more plainly than there, 
 the expression cannot be apjjlied to the 
 other App., seeing that the aor. would iu 
 that case be inconsistent with the fact 
 — the Corinthians never having had an 
 opportunity of compai-inii him with them), 
 even though I am nothing ' (see similar 
 
 expressions of humility, 1 Cor. xv. 9 — 11). 
 12. J Confirmation of the ουδέν 
 
 νστΕρησα ' The signs indeed (the 
 
 jUiJ' is elhptical, — see Hartung, Partikel- 
 lehre, ii. 411, — corresponding to a sup- 
 pressed 'όμως t>£ . . . . ; 'ill this case, the 
 sig7is indeed ike, but, notwithstanding, I 
 am not recommeyided by you.' So Soph. 
 Qid. Col. 52G, ηΐ'ί^κον κακΰτατ, ώ ε,ίνοι, 
 yi'tyK, άίκων μη', θίος ϊστω. — It always 
 throws out into strong emphasis the noun, 
 pronoun, or verb to which it is attached, as 
 here σημεία) of an Apostle (roD generic, 
 — ' ejus qui Apostolus sit,' Bengel) were 
 wrought out among you (" the Ap.'s own 
 personality as the worker is modestly veiled 
 behind tlie passive," Meyer) in all (pos- 
 sible) patience (endurance of opposition, 
 which did not cause me to leave otf work- 
 ing. ντΓομονή is not one of the σημεία, 
 as Chrys. : θέα ποίοι' πρώτον τίΘησι, την 
 νττομονίιν. τυϋτυ yap αποστόλου δε~ιγμα, 
 το ψίρειν πάντα γεί'ναίως, — but the ele- 
 ment in which the σημεία were wrought 
 out), by signs and wonders (σιιμ. not as 
 above, but as constantly found with τί-οΐίσι, 
 as an intensitive synonym) and mighty 
 works ' (see ref. Ileb.). 13- 15.] J /is 
 
 disinterestedness, shewn in his past, and 
 resolved in his future dealings with them. 
 — The question rt yap, κ.τ.λ. is asked in 
 bitter irony. It is an ilhist ration of ίν 
 πάσ•^ ΰττομονι), and of the distinction con-
 
 682 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 XII. 
 
 οΓε""»"' ^*'' ελθειν προς νμας, και ου ^^ καταναρκησω' ου yap 2[»7r(u abde 
 
 d Acis'xxi. 24 \r- 'ΛΛ^'" ' ^ I'j'X ^ ' " fGJK 
 
 άλλα 
 
 δε ^ ηοιστα ' ^ηττανησω και ^ ίκοαπανηθησομαι ΰπΐρ τω^ 
 ■φυγών νμων, Η ^ ττίρισσοτίρως υμάς α-γαπων ήττον 
 
 τα νμων, αΛΛα υμάς, ου yap οώίΐλει τα τέκνα τυις 
 poiyb.xxT. γοΐ'ευσπ' νησαυριί,Ην, αλλ οι yovίις τοις τέκνοις. εγω 
 
 τΐϊ? πρυς- 
 
 f Acts XV. 26. 
 
 Rch. i. 12reff. ' - 16 ''ϋ Λ\ » ν ' h Ο' 
 
 hhereoniy. ayaπωμaι. ϋ,στω οε, εγω ου κατεραρησα υμάς. 
 
 -ύι-ω, Mark 'λλνί'' k - ξι'λ '" 1•'Λ/0 
 
 χίν.4ϋ. ί(Λλα υτταρνων πavoυpynς οολω νμας ελαρον. 
 
 2.Τ. i Acts viii. 16 reff. k here only. = Job y. 12. (good sense, Prov. xiii. 1. xxTiii. 2.) 
 
 1 ch. xi. 20. 
 
 with (but υμάς D'FG) DiD'EFGJK &c vss ff : om AB 17. 71-3. 80 ieth Dam.— yap 
 om sah.— rec αλλ : txt ABDEFGJ 48. lOG-9-12. 238.— bef γην. om τοις 219'.— 15. for 
 de, yap 17• — aft δαπανήσω, add και ίκδαπανησω D'E d e Ambrst. — for -ψυχωτ, ιυχων 
 238. — rec aft ti ins και (ίο give {irastakeii] emphasis : see notes), with D^EJK mss (appy) 
 V syrr al {tamen u( goth) Chr Thdrt Dam Pel al : om (D' it Ambrst om ει also) ABD'FG 
 (copt sah, but have αγαττω for -πων, as also 17) it Ambrst: fi και αυτός 219. — ησσον 
 (corni) ABD' : ίσον 17 : έλασσον FG : txt D^EJK mss nrly (appy) ff. — 16. έστω δε om 
 sah. — εγω δε FG g Thl. — ονκ εβαρησα Ό^ : ου κατεναρκησα νμων (or νμας: om al) 
 FG 20-3'. 37-9. 47. 57- 73 Chr.— rec αλλ : txt ABD'(E?)FGJ &c.— for ων, ov 80. 106. 
 
 ferred on them by so long manifestation of 
 the signs of an Apostle among them. ' JVas 
 this enchuance of working which I shewed, 
 marred by the fact that I worked gratui- 
 tously among you ?' ήττ. νπέρ does not 
 imply that all churches ήττήθησαν, and 
 that the loss of the Corr. was only not 
 greater than that of other churches : but 
 the comparative, implied in ήττ. is carried 
 out by the νπίρ, — 'ye suffered loss in com- 
 parison with the other Churches.' 13. 
 €1 μή oTi] except that one point, in which 
 of all otliers they had least reason to com- 
 plain. This one is put forward to indicate 
 their deep ingratitude, if they did complain, 
 seeing that the only point of difference in 
 their treatment had been a preference: ' tie 
 
 tief geh-&n!tc iicbe vebct,' Meyer.— On 
 
 κατβνάρκ. see ch. xi. 8. X*P• I*• τ. 
 
 άδ. ταΰτην] The irony here reaches its 
 height. 14.] τρίτον (the τοντο, how- 
 
 ever strongly attested, can hardly have been 
 omitted, had it ever been in the text, and 
 therefore has probably been inserted from 
 ch. xiii. 1) It. «χω Ιλθ., must, yror^z the con- 
 text, mean, ' I am ready to come the 
 third time;' — not, ^ J am the third time 
 ready to come,' i. e. ' this is the third time 
 that I have been ready to come to you.' 
 This latter meaning has been adopted by 
 Beza, Grot., Estius, al., Paley, al , and even 
 De Wette, hesitatingly, in order to evade 
 the difficulty of supposing Paul to have 
 been before this time at Corinth. But on 
 this see Prolegomena. Here, the context 
 has absolutely nothing to do with his third 
 preparation to come, which would be a new 
 element, requiring some explanation, as in 
 1 Thess. ii. 18. The natural, and, I am 
 persuaded, only true inference from the 
 
 words here is, ' I am coming to you a third 
 time, — and I will not burden you this time, 
 any more than I did at my tivo previous 
 visits.' — Our business in such cases is, not 
 to wrest plain words to fit our preconceived 
 chronology, but to adapt our confessedly 
 uncertain and imperfect history of the 
 Ap.'s life, to the data furnished by the 
 plain honest sense of his Epistles. 
 ου γαρ ζητώ . . . .] Wetst. quotes Cicero 
 de Fin. ii. 26 : ' Sle igitur ipsum ames 
 oportet, non mea, si veri amici futuri su- 
 mus.' — μείζονα επιζητώ, ψυχί'ίς άντι χρη- 
 μάτων, σωτηβίαν άντι ■χρνσίον. Chrys. 
 οΰ 7°-Ρ οφείλει . . .] Paul was the 
 spiritual father of the Cor. church, 1 Cor. 
 iv. 14, 15 : he does not therefore want to 
 be enriched by them, his children, but ra- 
 ther to lay up riches for them, seeking to 
 have them as his treasure, and thus to en- 
 rich them, as a loving father does his chil- 
 dren. The θησανρός is left indefinite : if 
 pressed strictly, it cannot be earthly trea- 
 sure in the negative part of the sentence, 
 heavenly, in the positive ; — cf. next verse. — 
 Notice, οφείλει is not impersonal, but the 
 common verb to τέκνα and γονείς, agreeing 
 by proximity with the former. 15. J 
 
 εγώ δε τώι> φύσει πάτερων και πλέον τι 
 ποιην επαγγέλλομαι, Tlieodoret : and 
 simly Chrys. and Theophyl. They lay 
 up treasures : / will spend them : — και τι 
 λέγω, χηηματα δαπανί/σο) ; αΐιτύς εγώ εκ- 
 δίΐπανΐ]ΰί]σομαι• τοντέστι, καν την σάρκα 
 c^ej/ δαπαΐ'ησαι νπέρ της σωτηρίας των 
 φΐ'χων νμί7:ν, οΰ φείσομαι, Theophyl. — 
 Cf. Hor. Od. i. 12. 38 : ' animaeque magnse 
 prodigum PauUum.' — el is less strong than 
 f i' καί, which has been apparently a gloss 
 on it. It assumes the case, but does not
 
 15—20. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 683 
 
 ^' μη τίνα ""ων απίσταλκα προς νμας, '" δί' αύτου "χ°"'ί,'';'Εο^* 
 
 1) ' Λ ' ' " . 18 ο '\ ΓΤΛΐ \ ■) viii.3. 
 
 ίπΛίονίΚτησα υμάς, τταρίκαλεσα Ι ιτον, και ' συν- nch. ϋ iireff. 
 
 απίστίΐλα '' roi' α^ίΧφόν' μτιτι " ίπΧεονίκτησεν υμάς β*ΐ7.''"''' 
 
 T',''"'~r' r ' ■> ρ hi-rronly. 
 
 ιτος , ου τω αυτω πνίυματι ττίοι^πατησαμεν ', υυ Exi)ci. χχχϋΐ. 
 
 τοις αυτοις ^ ίχνεσιν ; "^f^aa'^'"' 
 
 19ΐπ'Λ S• -« «-U' Λ 'Λ ν ' r con'str., Acts 
 
 ΙΙαλαι οοκίΐτε οτι υμιν anoAoyovueua. κατεναντι xxi.aireft. 
 
 η - W ' - Λ Λ - . - ί' ' χ ' ^ sRom.iv.12 
 
 Ι/ίου ev γ^ριστιο λαλονμξν τα 6ε τταντα, αγαττητοί, j 1 (jeenote) 
 
 ' \ -'-ν•^- 90, Ο" ^ ' here only. 
 
 υτΓίρ ττις υμών ■' οικοόομΐ]ς. """ ψορουμαι yap μήπως (Matt, xi.si 
 
 u Acts xix.3:3al. ν Rom. iv. 17. ch. ii. 17 only. Exod. xxxii. 11 alex. (See Luke xix. 30 reff.) 
 
 w Rom. ix. 1. X Roin. xii. la al. fr. y Rom. xiv. 19 refl'. 
 
 — 17. for ατΓίσταΧκ., επίνφα (so generally D^) D'E : αποστηλη al ffj. — Si avrov oni 
 FG g : νμας to νμας om 48'. — 18. bef nv. cm nvroj 9P. — 19. rec παλίΐ^ {corrn from 
 misunderstg : see note), with DEJK &c vss ff: t.xt ABFG 6'7^ al d e ν (not harl') 
 Ambrst comm Pel Bed.— rec κατίνι,)πιον, with DEJK &c Thdrt al : txt ABFG 1?. 23. 
 37. 57. G7^• 73 al Dam. — rec bef θίου ins του {corrn in ignorance of usage), with 
 D^EJK&cff: om ABD'FG 57. 115 (al.') Bas {καην. to λαλ. om Chr).— for θίου, 
 χριστοί' 80 {on arrangement, see notes). — 20. yap om 179: Se 31-7.73.80. 118 syr- 
 marg arm. — aft t\0. add προς νμας sah. — και (γω FG Chr Thl-ms. — aft μηττως ins 
 
 bring out the contrast between the course 
 of action and the state of circumstances so 
 strongly. Here, it appears as if τιτσον 
 άγαπωμαι were by Ihe li connected with 
 ΐκ^ατΐανιβήσομαι,'—' and will be spent, 
 used up, in the service of your souls, if, the 
 more abundantly I love you, the less I be 
 loved :' implying, that such a return for his 
 love was leading to, and would in time ac- 
 complish, the ίκϋαπα}'ηθ!ισομαι. 
 16 — 18.] He refutes a possible, perhaps 
 an actual calumny,^ that though he had 
 acted disinterestedly towards them himself, 
 he had some side-way of profiting by them, 
 through others. 16.] έ'στω δ€ — ' but 
 
 let us suppose the former matter dismissed :' 
 ' let the fact be granted, that I myself 
 (emph.) did not burden {— κατίνάρκηση) 
 you.' Then the sense breaks oft', and the 
 force of the concession goes no further, the 
 following words making a new hypothe.sis. 
 ' But, being (by habit and standing, 
 νπάρχ.) crafty (unprincipled, and versatile 
 in devices), I caught you with guile' (with 
 some more subtle way. Caught you, in 
 order to practise upon you for my own 
 ends: but ϊλαβον is not ίπλίονίκτΐ]σα, 
 as Chrys. : — see ref. and note). 
 17, 18] Specification, in refutation, of the 
 ways in which this might be supposed to 
 have taken place.— Ύ\\& constr. τίνα ων . . 
 Ci αϋτον is an anacoluthon. He sets τίνα 
 ών άπίπτ. ττρ. ΰ;ι. forward in the place of 
 emphasis; how intending to govern τίνα, 
 is not plain : but drops the constr., and 
 jiroceeds, Si αντυϊι κ.τ.λ. See exx. of 
 the same, Luke xxi. C. Rom. viii. 3, and 
 Winer, § (ii. 2. d. 18.] irap- 
 
 εκάλΐσα, scil. ' to go to you :' see reff. 
 
 This journey of Titus cannot, of course, 
 be the one spoken of ch. viii. (i. 17. 
 22 ; but some previous mission to them 
 before this Ep. was written : probably that 
 from which he returned with the report of 
 their penitence to Paul in Macedonia, ch. 
 vii. G ff. We certainly have not else- 
 where any hint of ό άίϊίλ^ός having accom- 
 panied him on this journey : but this is no 
 reason why it should not have been so. 
 τον άδελψόν — ]ierliaps, one of the two men- 
 tioned ch. viii. 18. 22 : perhaps, some other, 
 well known to the Corr., but absolutely 
 unknown to us : but not, a brother, as in 
 E. V. It is plain from this and from what 
 follows, that this brother was quite sub- 
 ordinate to Titus in the mission. τω 
 ούτ. ττνίΐίμ..] dat. of the manner ; see ref. 
 The Spirit in which they walked was the 
 Holy Spirit : τψ αΰτψ ττ^'ίνματικψ χαρί- 
 σμαη' χάρισμα γαρ καλίϊ τυ ητ^νοίψίΐ'ον 
 μη λαβΰν. Thcophyl. Tois αϋτ. ϊχν.] 
 ' in the same footsteps,' viz. each as the 
 other : οΰ<5ί μικρόν, <ρη<τί, πιιρίζηλΘον την 
 ΐμην όδόν, Thcophyl. The dative ϊχΐ'ίΐηΐ', 
 as in ref. = «ν 'ιχνισιν : see also Acts xiv. 
 16. Jude 11. Meyer cites Find. Pyth. X. 
 20, — ΐμβ^βακίν 'ίχνίοιν πατρός, and Nem, 
 vi. 27, ίχνκτιν Iv λίραζι^άμαντος ίϋν πόί^α 
 τίμων. Of, also Philo deCaritate, §"2, p.Gi)!), 
 τ<ης αΐ'τιης 'ίχΐ'ίσιν ί-πακολοιιΟϊΊσαι. 
 19 —21.] He re/ides the notion which 
 might arise in the minds of his readers, 
 that he ivas vindicating himself hekore 
 Til EM as judges, see 1 Cor. iv. 3 ; and 
 assures them that he does all for their 
 good, fearing in what state he might find 
 them on his arrival. 19] τταλαι was 
 misunderstood, and π<ίλυ' appears to have
 
 684 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 XII. 21. 
 
 ελθωι 
 
 θέλω ευρω νμας, Kuyio ίυξ>ΐθω ^ υμιν 
 gTv^so/^' "'ο^ ου θελίτε' μήπως ^εξ)Βΐς, ^ ζήλος, ''θυμοί, ' £ξ)ΐΟίΐαι, 
 
 Kdat., Lnke (λϋων ουγ οιους 
 
 χχίν. 3S al. Λ• 
 
 bR ID. ii. 8 
 
 reft'. 
 cl Pet.ii. 1 
 
 ακαταστασιαι 
 
 κατα\α\ιαι, φιΟυρισμοι, " ώυσιιοσίΐς, 
 Rom i 30 " i"*i τταλίν ελι/οί'Γος )»ου '' ταπείνωσα μί ο t /εος ^ιιου 
 
 e here only t. 
 
 f 1 Cor. xiv. 33 reff. 
 
 ;ch. xi. 7. constr., 
 
 ABDE 
 FGJK 
 
 τταλιν arm: ωσι sah.— fpic A 44. 72. 121. 219-38 (al ?) Syr arm Chr Thl : txfc 
 B.'DEFGJK &c vss-ft'. — rec ζη\οι {cnrrn to conform to the other plurals), with D^EJK 
 &c vss ff : txt ABD^FG 17• 39 Syr arm goth Dam. — ακαταστ. om FG g Chr : add ωσιν 
 IT ιψινν arm (not venet) Amhrst. — 21. μί] ποτέ sah. — rec i\Qovra μί {gramml cnrrn), 
 with DEJK &c goth ff', and om με (aftw), with the same, exc ΌΈ al : txt ABFG 39. 93 
 (al ?) vss lat-fl' (^cuni venero'), and ins μ( D'E 31 . 57 all vss lat-flF besides. — rec ταπείνωση 
 
 been a conjectural emendation, from ch. iii. 
 1. V. 12. ιτάλαι does not suit the intei-ro- 
 gaiive form of the sentence, which would 
 throw it out into too strong emphasis. 
 Lachmann, Tischendorf, Meyer, De Wette 
 read it as in txt: — "Ye have been some 
 time imagining (i. e. during this my self- 
 defence) that it is to you that I am de- 
 fending myself." Then the answer fol- 
 lows : the assumption being made, and elhp- 
 tically answered, as in ver. Ifi. κατ. 
 
 θίοΰ is emphatic, and opposed to ΰμ~ιν. 
 ev xp. λαλοΰμίν, as in ch. ii. 17, which 
 see. τα Se ττάντα] supply either 
 
 \α\ονμίν, or better understand τα πάντα 
 as 'all our things^ (1 Cor. xvi. 14), i. e. 
 our words and deeds, and supply γίνεται, 
 as there. Grot., Griesbach, Scholz, and 
 Olsh., would read τάδε πάντα, and join 
 with λαΧουμεν. But (1) Paul never uses 
 the pronoun οδε ; and (2) if he did, it must 
 apply to what follows, not to what has pre- 
 ceded. 20.] ' Edification, of which 
 you stand in need, for, &c.' He here com- 
 pletely and finally throws off the apologist 
 and puts on the Apostle, leaving on their 
 minds a very different impression from 
 that which would have been produced had 
 he concluded with the apology. ' Lest, 
 when I arrive, I should find you not 
 such as I wish (in οΰχ ο'ίυυς θέλω, is an 
 indefinite possibility of aberration from 
 ο'Ιους θέλο), YiresGntly pariicularizefl, μί/ποις 
 tofic, K.T.X.), and I should be found by 
 you {ιψΊν merely the dative of the agent 
 ofter the passive verb. Meyer makes it 
 ' in your judgment' but I much prefer the 
 other : the passive form is adopted to bring 
 out the ίγώ into emphatic contrast), such 
 as ye wish not' (not ονχ oinv θέλετε, 
 because there is now no indefiniteness ; his 
 disposition towards them in such a case 
 could be but of one kind, viz. severity : 
 τοντ'εστι, τιμω^ιϋς κ. κολαστης, Thcophyl. 
 
 — Chrys. brings out another point, — ονκ 
 ιίπεν, οίον ov θέλω" αλλά πληκτικώτεηον, 
 
 — otoj' ov βυνλεσθε). — What follows, viz. 
 μήπως — επραζαν, is an epexegesis of the 
 
 last sentence, but in it the definiteness is 
 on the side of the οΰχ οϊοΐ'ς θέλω, the in- 
 definiteness on that of oloj^ ού θέλετε, 
 which latter is only hinted at by the mild 
 expressions of being humbled, and lament- 
 ing the case of the impenitent. 
 μήτΓως, scil. ωαιν (or εΰρεθώσιΐ') εν νμΧν. 
 " The vehemence of his language has 
 caused him to omit the verb." Stanley. 
 epiGeiai, ' self-seekings,' see 
 note on Rom. ii. 9. — ψιθ. ' secret ma- 
 lignings,' — καταλ. ' open slanders.' 
 άκαταστ., see reff". and note. 
 21.] μη carries on the μήπως . . . μήπως, 
 but with more precision, dropping the in- 
 definite πως. The sentence loses much in 
 force and, indeed, becomes inconsistent 
 with the context, if with Lachmann (and 
 Liicke, Conjectanea exeget. i. De \V.) it be 
 made interrogative (which it may be gram- 
 matically with either reading, ταπεινώσει 
 or -σ?^), in which case the answer would be 
 ■negative, — ττάλι,ν here, as Meyer observes, 
 must belong to the whole Ιλθόντος μον 
 ταπεινώσει μ. ό θ. μ. πηος νμ., because, 
 ίλθών having been used without πάλιΐ' just 
 before, the emphatic situation of πάλιν as 
 applying to it would be unmeaning: see 
 also the very different way in which it is 
 connected with Ιλθών, ch. xiii. 2. 
 ταΐΓίΐνώσίΐ] " Nihil erat quo magis exul- 
 taret apostolus, quam prospero suae praedi- 
 cationis successu (1 Thess. ii 20) : contra 
 nihil erat, unde tristiore et demissiore 
 animo redderetur, quam quum cerneret, se 
 frustra laborasse .' ' Beza (Meyer). The fut. 
 (ref.) indicates an assumption that the sup- 
 posed case will really be. That this hum- 
 bling, and not that of being obliged to 
 punish, is intended, seems evident : the 
 exercise of judicial authority being no hu- 
 miliation, but the contrary, and humiliation 
 being the natural result of want of success. 
 ό Geos μου expresses the conviction 
 that whatever humiliation God might have 
 in store for him would be a i)art of His will 
 respecting him. irpos ίιμάς] ' among 
 
 you,' as the generality of interpp. : ' in
 
 XIII. 1, 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 685 
 
 προς υμάς, κιη ' ττίνθησω πολλούς τωι> ^ ποοημαρτηκ6-^ς^;\%, 
 
 '^1 / πι'' ~ 11 'Λ ' Ν' lonstr., here 
 
 τωχ> και μη μετα\'οΐ}σαι>των em τη ακαυαρσια και «niy Gen. 
 
 ο ' > ι, ' Λ / η τ ,f J. ' VTTT 1 rri ' ssxvii. 34 
 
 ποξ)νίΐα και ^ antAytia '-ρ ίπραί,αν. Aill. ^ 1 /O/rov khereoniyt. 
 
 r~>' v<-s>>/ Λ/ / 1 cunstr , here 
 
 TOVTO ίξ>Λ^ομαι προς υμάς. ίπι στόματος ουο μαρτύρων ;'ηΐ.ν Joei 
 
 τϋ. 3. μετανο4ω, here only in Panl's epp. Acts xvii. 30. xxvi. 20. m = 1 Cor. xiv. 16. 
 
 η Matt.xxiii. 27. Rom. i. 24 Eph. ir. ly reff. ο Matt. v. 32 al. fr. Gen. xxxviii. 24. 
 
 ρ Mark vii.22. Knm. xiii. 13 al. q attr., Acts i. 1. r ch. sii. 14. τρ. toCto, John xxi. 14. 
 
 Num. x.\ii. 28. Judg. xvi. 13. s Dedi. xix. 15. 
 
 {grainml cnrrn), with AK &c ff: txt BDEFGJ 80. lOG-9-12 Oec— προς νμ. ταπ. DE 
 d e copt Thdrtj (elswj om) Cypr al.— μου om ν seth Tert Jer Aug Ambrst Pel.— ii νμας 
 sah. — και bef -πινθ. om sah. — 7]μαρτ)]κοτων 29 Syr arerp seth Chr-text Cassiod. — bef 
 •πορν. om κηι D Ε d e Tert. 
 
 Chap. XIII. 1. iSov tqit. A {from ch xii. 14) I?. 23. 31-9. 48. 57. 72 to 4. 91-3. 
 109-21-78 {t'ivto om msj ν ath Dam Thl Pel Aug Bed. — for £ρχ., (τοιμως ίχω ιλθιιν 
 {from ch xii. 14) A Syr ar-erp copt (Wtst). — iva tin 35 g arm Pel Bed. — for και, η 32. 
 
 regard to you,' in my relalioii to yon, as 
 Meyer. Either may be meant : but if we 
 take the former, we must not join it, as 
 Grot., al., with ίλθόντος: it belongs at all 
 events to ταττίΐνώσει. ττενθήσω] Theo- 
 
 phyl. explains, μι) ΐλθών KoXaay αΰτονς, 
 και irtviiijaij ίιά Γοϋτο• τουτίπτι, τα ϊσ- 
 χητα λvπ1]θy■. so also al. and Billroth, 
 Riickert, Olsh., and De Wette. But ptmish- 
 ment seems out of place in this verse, which 
 expresses his fear lest he should be humbled 
 for, and have to lament the case of the im- 
 penitent, — and then, as he declares ch. 
 xiii. 2, be forced to proceed to discipline ; 
 but this point is not yet introduced. I 
 much prefer therefore taking it as Chrys. — 
 rovQ μή μίταΐ'οονί'τας ττίνθΰ, τονς τά 
 ανίατα νοσοϋντας, τους ίν τψ τοανματι 
 μίΐ'οΐ'τας. ίννόησον τυΊννν άποστολικίμ' 
 άριτήι•, 'όταν μηίϊν ΐαντφ σννιιίώς πο- 
 νηροί', νπϊρ uWoToioj]/ Gpr/vy κακώϊ', καΐ 
 νπίρ των ΐτίροις πλημμίλημίνων ταττίΐ- 
 %•ίύται. τοντο yap μάλιστα ίιδασκάλον, 
 το ηντω awaXytlv ταΐς των μαθητών 
 ιτυμψοραΊς, το κήτττίσθαι καΐ ττίνθΰν ΐπι 
 τοΙς τρανμασι των άηχομίνωΐ'. Simly 
 Calvin : ' veri et germani Pastoris affectum 
 nobis exprimit, quum luctu aliorum pec- 
 cata se prosequuturum dicit. Et sane ita 
 agendum est, ut suam quisque Pastor Ec- 
 clesiam animo inclusam gestet, ejus morbis 
 perinde ac suis afficiatur, miseriis condoles- 
 cat, peccato lugeat.' So Estius, but per- 
 haps too minutely fixing the meaning of 
 ΤΓίνθΰν to mourning them as " Deo mor- 
 tuos :" and Calovius (Meyer) : " non de 
 poena hie Corr. impoenitentium, sed de 
 moerore suo super impoenitentia :" and so 
 likewise Meyer. ττολλ. τ. ττροημ.] 
 
 Why πολλοΓ'ς .' Why not all ί' I believe 
 he uses πολλούς• των προημαρτηκότων as a 
 mild ex})r. for tovq ττολλοΰς τονς προημαρ- 
 τηκόταν, and that we must not therefore 
 press too closely the enquiry as to what the 
 genus 01 ττροημ. is, of which the πολλοί 
 
 are the species. Liicke (as above) cited by 
 Meyer, explains — " Cogitavit rem ita, ut 
 primum poneret Christianorum ex ethnicis 
 potissimum των ττροημ. κ. μή μίτανοη- 
 ccivTojv genus universum, cujus generis 
 homines essent ubique ecclesiarum, deinde 
 vero ex isto hominum genere multos eos 
 qui Corinthi essent, designaret definiret- 
 que." But this seems travelHng quite out 
 of the way. Meyer explains the genus to 
 be all the sinners spoken of in ver. 20, 
 the species {πολλούς) those designated by 
 άκαθαρσ., πορν., and άσίλγ. But this 
 again is unnatural ; and does not accu- 
 rately fit ver. 20, in which not so much the 
 προιιμαρτημίνα as the present state at the 
 Ap.'s coming, is the subject. — The distinc- 
 tion between the two participles, προημ. and 
 μετανοησάντων shou'd be observed. As 
 Meyer well remarks, the perf. προημαρτη- 
 κότων denotes the permanence of the state 
 from the time of the committal of the sin : 
 whereas the aor. μετανοησάντων has the 
 sense of the ' futurum exactum,' — " and 
 who at my coming shall not have repented." 
 To v:hat does προ- refer ? to the time be- 
 fore their conversion ? Hardly so : for the 
 sins, of the incestuous person 1 Cor. v., and 
 of these also, which would give the Ap. 
 such pain, must be conceived to have been 
 committed in their Christian state: being 
 in fact those against which wc find such re- 
 peated cautions in 1 Cor., e. g. ch. v. 1 1 ; vi. 
 15. 18 ; X. 8 ; xv. 33, 34. I would therefore 
 understand the προ- indefinitely, almost 
 pleonastically — pointing to the priority of 
 sin implied in the idea of repentance, 
 μίταν. £7ri] Meyer would join together 
 πεΐ'ΰί\σω . . . Ιπ'ι, atid indicates this as 
 the natural connexion of verb, object, and 
 ground. But to say nothing of the harsli- 
 ness of π(νθ{)σω π'ίλλονς επί, and the 
 almost necessarily reflective form of μετα- 
 νοησ. επι Tt) άκ. . . . y επραζαν, — Ι con- 
 ceive the aorist eirpo|ov to be fatal to this
 
 G86 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 XIII. 
 
 •αΟ))( 
 
 ti. C. aiex. Kut TOiwv σταυηοίται παν ρήμα 
 
 Rom xir. 4. ' , ... ν ν ,ν / 
 
 U Mrttt. xxiT. ^ ΤΓΟολί 
 
 ποοίίρηκα και abde 
 
 , \ ^ - - FGJK 
 
 ροΛίγω, ως τταρων το οίυτίρον και απών νυν, τοις 
 ολΊ. v.'ai. προημαρτηκοσιν και τοις Αοιποις πασιν, οτι εαν ελΟω 
 
 1 Thess. iii. , ^ /-ν 'ν,' '?•'z'^ ^ay 
 
 ''""μ *' ^'^ ''"'^ ΤΓοΛίν ου ψΒίσομαι επει οοκιμην C^TtiTe του 
 
 ν 1 Cnr. τ. 3 rcff. 
 ζ Rom. ν. 4 reff. 
 
 χ here imly. See Lidd. and Scott, sab eti, ii. 2. 
 = 1 Cor. IT. a. 
 
 y = aPet. ii.4, 5. Acts xx. 29. 
 
 46 V sah arm Dial Aug Ambrst Pel. — 2. irpoeip. yap ΒΈ 4-. 61. 113-marg v-ed Atnbrst 
 Pel Bed Sedul. — πάλιν ττρυλί γω arm. — ως om D' d e syr arm. — το διντ. om v-ed ; bis tol 
 demid v-ms : vohis latt-mss Bed.— for απών, αγαπών 106. — rec aft νυν ins γράψω 
 {supplementary gloss), v{\U\ D^EJK &c vss(coj)t Xtyw : Chr [al simly] explaining: Xiyot 
 dk και vvv δια της ίπιστ.) Chr Thdrt Dam al Ambrst: om ABD'FG 23'. 67'. SO. 108 
 to 12 it V copt seth Aug (Chr Pel somet) Sedul Bed. — ας το om FG. — 3. for fTrn, on 
 FG it Ambrj Aug (somet) : ει Orig^ Mac Thdrtj : ή Origj Dial Thdrts : an Orig-int lat ff : 
 
 arrangement. Thus taken, it would make 
 the Ap. lament over these impenitents, on 
 account of the impurity, &c., which they 
 ίπραζαν — i. e. once practised, but which is 
 now gone by. The sense would require 
 πιπράχασι. Whereas if connected with 
 μιτανοησάΐ'των, the aorist expresses 'and 
 shall not have [repented of the άκ., &c., 
 which they practised],' and would thus come 
 rightly after μ.€τα)^ο?;σ., implying the re- 
 moval of the former state of sin. — |Χ€ταν. 
 is usually constructfd with από, Acts viii. 
 22 (Heb. vi. 1), or Ik, Rev. only,— ii. 21 f. ; 
 ix. 21 f . ; xvi. 11: but as Paul only uses 
 the word this once, and as the constr. with 
 ίπί is perfectly legitimate and highly ex- 
 pressive, there can be no objection to it 
 here. Chap. XIII. 1 — 10.] Hetvarns 
 
 them of the severity which on his arrival, 
 if such be the case, he will surely exercise, 
 and prove his apostolic authority. To this 
 proof, however, he exhorts them not to put 
 him. 1.] ' This third time I am 
 
 coming to you:' i. e. 'this is the third 
 visit, lohich I am now about to pay you.' 
 Had not chronological theories intervened, 
 no one would ever have thought of any 
 other rendering. The usual one, ' This is 
 the third time that I have been intending 
 to come to you,' introduces here, as also in 
 ch. xii. 14, an element not only foreign to, 
 but detrimental to, the purpose. The Ap. 
 wishes to impress on them the certainty of 
 this coming, and to prepare them for it by 
 solemn self-examination : and in order to 
 this, he {on this interpretation) uses an 
 expr. which would only remind them of the 
 charge of ίΧαφρΊα which had been brought 
 against him, and tend to diminish the so- 
 lemnity of the learning . As another chro- 
 nological refuge, Beza, al., suppose his two 
 Epistles to be meant by the two former 
 'profectiones ad illos.' — In answer to 
 all attempts to give here any but the ob- 
 vious sense, we may safely maintain that 
 had any other been meant, we should cer- 
 tainly have had more indication of it, than 
 
 we have now. On τρίτον τοντο, Meyer 
 compares Herod, v. 76, τέταρτον Si/ τοΐ>το 
 .... άπικόμενοι : see also reff. : and on 
 Paul's visits to Corinth, the Prolegomena. 
 eirl στόμ.] i. e. 'I will not now, as 
 before, be with you tv πάπ^ υπομονή as 
 regards the offenders : but will come to a 
 regular process, and establish the truth in 
 a legal manner,' see reft". — This expl. how- 
 ever, has not been the usual one : Chrys., 
 Calvin, Estius, al., and recently Neander and 
 Olsh. [and Stanley], understanding the two 
 or three witnesses, of Paul's two or three 
 visits, as establishing, either (1) the truth of 
 the facts, or (2) the reality of his threats : so 
 Chrys. : άπαξ, ιίπον κ. δεΰ'τερον, οτε παρ- 
 εγενόμην λέγω και νυν διά γραμμάτων, 
 και εάν μεν άκονσητε, 'όπερ επεΒνμουν 
 γίγονεν εάν δε παρακονσητε, ανάγκη 
 λοιπϋν στησαι τα ε'ιρημ'ενα, και έπαγα- 
 γίίΐ' την τιμωρία!•,— and Theophyl., πάν 
 ρήμα άττίίλητικον καταοταθήπεται. But 
 it is decisive against the whole interp., as 
 Meyer remarks, that thus the sins com- 
 mitted since the Ap.'s last visit would re- 
 main altogether unnoticed. Another view, 
 connected with the rendering of έρχομαι 
 ' am intending to come,' is given by Wet- 
 stein : " Spero jam denique mihi suc- 
 cessurum, ut vobis demonstrem, serio me 
 desiderasse ad vos venire : sicut ea quae 
 trium hominum testimonio probantur, in 
 judicio fidem faciunt." Simly Grotius 
 and Le Clerc. But it is fatal to this, 
 that according to it, the δύο μάρτυρες 
 had failed to establish it. και 
 
 τρ., not for η τρ., — ' two (where only 
 two can be had), and three (where so 
 many can be obtained) :' * two and three 
 respectively.' μαρτύρων, the dual number 
 not occurring in the N. T. 2.] ' I 
 
 have forewarned you, and I now fore- 
 warn you, as (I did, προίίοιικα) when 
 present the second time, and (I do) 
 now {προλέγω) when absent.' It cer- 
 tainly seems to me that this is the only 
 natural way of taking the words. Grot.,
 
 2—4. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους β. 
 
 687 
 
 iv ίμοι 
 
 λαλοί 
 
 αΧΧα 
 "ασθ 
 
 υντος γυριστού, ος ί'ις νμας ουκ *" ασθενίΓ, ''?.""'°"^"'" 
 
 υ'> -"' '" 4' ^ ' 'Λ >•χ cRom. xiv. 4. 
 
 οΐΊ'ατίΐ εν υμιν. 
 
 και yop ίστανξ>ωυη ες cii.ix. s 
 ίΐ'ειας, άλλα ty έκ δυνάμεως θίοϋ' κα\ yap ημείς ^ fe™' '''' ^^ 
 
 αουίνουμίν ev αυτω, 
 
 aWa 
 
 6ϊσοαεΐ' συν 
 
 αυτω 
 
 35 reff. 
 
 e = 1 Cor. ίτ. 
 ε /C 15 refl-. 
 
 f = Acts XX. 
 ff= 1 Thess. iii. S. 
 
 quid Amhr: quomodo Amhrst: for tffft δοκιμην, επ οικοΰομην 9S. — \αλ. tv εμ. FG g 
 syrr: add προς νμας arm.— dvparat 6^^. 12^^ Chr : δυνατοί 31. 122: ίυΐ'ατος 52: 
 δνναίνναστει 93. — 4. rec και -γαρ ti {see notes), with AD^EJ most mss ν goth syrr al 
 Origj (fi y• κη/, as also 31. 93) Chr Thdrt h 1 Oec Dial Hipp Orig-int Ps-Ath-lat lat-ff 
 (ηωίΐ e/si) vss Orig-int lat-ff: txt BD'FGK 2.39. C7M17 it aithEusThdrtiDamThl Paulin. 
 — aft ασθ. ins ΐ]μων arm al Ambrst Hil-ms Paulin Ambr Pel com m. — και ζη Eus. — θεού 
 cm 17• — rec bef ημείς ins και (appy, as Meyer, the και γηρ ivas taken as wiere/y zznamque, 
 aiid thus another και added to give the emphasis), with mss copt al Chr («rat yap ημ. n 
 Mtt's msj) : t.xt ABDEFG(ya.u om FG 112 arm JK (pref ει, as also 117: £i και arm) 23. 
 44-G-8. 57. 72-3. 80-9. 91. 106-8 to 12. 177 to 9. 219»-38 it ν syr slav-ms Cyr Thdrt 
 Dam Thl Oec lat-ff. — for iv, συν AFG g Syr ar-erp copt. — rec ζησομιθα, with D^EJK 
 &c Chr (Chrj and Mtt's mss σωζομεθα) Thdrt al : txt ABD'FG 17. 31-9. 73-4^ 80 
 Dam. — for συΐ', εν D' 17 d e Chr, (mss vary). — tic ίυ. θε. om FG g: θε. om Κ 117. — 
 f <ς νμ. om {from misunderstandg , it being imagined that ζη(τ. applied to eternal life, in 
 which case εις νμ. appeared irrelevant) BD^E- flor arm Chr Sedul (in vobis joined 
 
 Est , Bengel, al , and De Wette, take ώς 
 τταρών το οεντ. to mean 'as if I ivere 
 present the second iitne,' meaning this 
 next time. But is it possible that the 
 Ap. should have written so confusedly, as 
 to have said in the same sentence TfiiTov 
 τοϋτο ίπχομαι, and ώς τταρων το δίύ- 
 τεοον, both, according to these interpp. 
 with raierence to the same journey / And 
 would he not have even on such an hyp. 
 have said το δεύτερον τοντο ? But if we 
 render as above, the ιτροείρηκα (perf. 
 because the warning yet endured in force) 
 refers to his second visit {παοων το δεντ.), 
 and the τΓρολί'γω to his present condition 
 of absence {άττών vvr), us being ' as ' (' / 
 did ' or ' do,' for it applies to both clauses), 
 and καί the simple copula. τοις 
 
 Ίτροημ.] the same persons as are thus 
 designated above, xii. 21. It is not neces- 
 sary to fix the /TOO any more accurately. 
 Tois Xonrois ττάσιν] ' all the rest 
 of you,' who may not have actually sinned, 
 but still require warning, on account of 
 your own personal danger, connexion with 
 the ττϋοημαυτηκότες, &c. lav ελθ. 
 
 els T. -TT.] ' at my next coming.' This 
 was what he ττριιειοηκεν when he was last 
 there, and now ■npoXiyti. 3.] «irei 
 
 gives the reason why he will not spare : 
 they required the exertion of discipline ; and 
 they challenged him to the proof of his apos- 
 tolic authority. δοκιμ,ήν . . . χριστοί] 
 The gen. is either objective, ' a proof of 
 Christ speaking in me,' i.e. 'that Christ 
 speaks in me,' — or subjective, ' a proof 
 given by Christ speaking in me'— 'a 
 token of my authority vouchsafed by Christ 
 speaking in me.' This latter meaning is 
 
 more suited to what follows, where Christ 
 becomes the subject. Such proof would be, 
 the immediate execution, by divine power, 
 of some punishment denounced by Paul's 
 word, as in Acts xiii. 11. os,' i.e. 
 
 Christ : see above. δ•υνατ€Ϊ, to answer 
 
 to άσθίνΰ, refers both to gifts and mira- 
 cles, and to the Power of Christ which He 
 would exert in punishment — ίΐ'ς ίψας and 
 iv ϊψ'ιν differ — the £ίς being hypothetical, — 
 the iv, matter of fact : see Gal. iii. 1. The 
 assertion tends to remind them of the dan- 
 ger of provoking Christ, who spoke by 
 Paul. 4.] Confirmation of the fore- 
 
 going oiiK άσθενΰ, άλλα δυνατεϊ. — The 
 rec. test, και yap t'l, would be quite beside 
 the purpose, and would mean, ' For even if 
 He were crucified,' ' for even putting the 
 case that He was crucified:' καΊ ti cannot 
 be = f/ και, though, as in Vulg. ' etsi,' — 
 and E. V. Hartung, Partikellehre i. 139, 
 shews that in καί ti, the climax belongs 
 only to the hypothetical particle ti, not 
 as in ti και, to the fact presupposed : 
 'even if,' not 'if even,' or 'although.' 
 Exx. of και ti are Plat. Sympos. 185, 
 Kill εάν τοϋτο ποίησι^ς άπαξ η ίις, και 
 ti πάνυ ιηχυρά εστί, τταυπεται. Eur. 
 Androm. 2(ί(>, και yap ti ττέριξ σ ϊχιι 
 τηκτος μόλνβος, ίζαναστήσω α' εγώ. 
 Sappho, και yap ni (ptiiyti, ταχέως διόιξίΐ : 
 See more in Hartung, 1. c. — 'For he 
 was even crucified (that και γάρ always 
 means 'for . . . even ' . . . , or 'for . . . 
 also,' and never simply 'for,' see Har- 
 tung, i. 137 f•. where he has collected many 
 exx., e.g.: II. a. 63, καΙ yap τ ΰναρ ίκ 
 Διός ΐστιν, — Herod, i. 77. "-«ί yap ττρΌς 
 τούτους αύτψ ίπεπυίητο σνμμαχιη) from
 
 688 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους Β. Χ1Ι1. 
 
 gsndpers., ^vvaiuwc θίοΰ itc VLiac. ^ tuvTOVQ ττειοά^ετε El ΐστε 
 
 ABDE 
 
 k (Ν /y I -Λ '■> ,n . , FGJK 
 
 h(Heb.xi. 17.) ' fi' Ty π/στίΐ, " ίαυτους ^ Βοκιμύί,ίτί' 7/ ουκ '" επιγίΐ'ώ- 
 
 Rev. ii. a. < \n>T- ^n''"' o' 
 
 = Psa.xxv. σκΒΤί εαυτούς, ort ιι;σους• -χοιστος ε»' υμιν ίστιν ', ει 
 
 i 1 Cor xvi 13 ' Ρ ' <^ ' ' ' 6 '\ Ύ ^^ " ' Ο " ' " 
 
 k - Luke χίνΓ μ^'ί αοοκιμοί εστΕ. ελπιί,ω οε οτι γνωσεσι/ε οτι ιψίΐς 
 
 icor. VI 2ai. Qu/c εσμίν αοοκιμοί. ' εννομευα οε προς τον (/εον /u?} 
 ποιησαι υ^υας• κακόν ^αηδευ, οι»^ Ίνα ημείς '^ όοκιμοι φανω- 
 
 mconslr., 1 Cor. 
 
 xiv.37. xvi. 
 
 Ιό. 
 η 1 Cor.xiy.2o. 'ΛΛ''' '" *r Λ"" " Γ-qι^\' 
 
 oicor.Tii.5. πεί', αλλ iva νμεις τυ καλόν ποίϊίτε, νμεις ^ οε ως 
 
 Luke ix. 13''^ ^ Ri \ C\'/T ν - 'Λ 
 
 pR".'m. i.28 '^ acoKijiioi Μμεν. ^ ου yap όυναμεθα * τι κατά της αλη- 
 qRom.xiv. 18 θεΙος, '^ctWci UTTif) της αληθείας. ^ Λ^αίρομεν yap όταν 
 
 r = Rom. νϋ. 16 al. s coustr., Luke xii.20. t ellips., 1 Cor. iii. 1. 
 
 with follg ipsis d e. So also D', tic υμάς εαντονς). — 5. εστηκατε εν τ. π. Tlidrt. — 
 αντί] τη ττ. arm. — εαντ. ^οκιμ. om Α. — χριστ. ιησ. AFG al ν copt Clem Dam Ambrst 
 Bed (not Jer) : txt BDEJK &c. — rec aft νμιν add εστιρ ; copt Jer-gr οικεί tv νμιν : Thl 
 εστίν εν νμ.: txt BD' 17. IIG Clem Chr-commg.— ft μητι apa 38. 47-8. 72. 80 syr*.— 
 6. for ίί, yap FG (g as a var read). — επιγνωσεσθε 17- — 7. rec ίυχομαι {corrn ίο con^ 
 form to ελπίζω, ver 6), with D^EJK &c Syr al ff (so Thl in ver i) also) : t.xt ABD'FG 
 17. 23. 31-7. •''7• 73. 80 it V copt arm seth slav Isid Dam Aug al (not Ambrst Cassiod).^ 
 ort /u;t'f)' ττυιησει κακόν arm : μηΐίν κακόν 109. 238. — for ονχ tva, iva μη 40. 116-17. 
 —άλλα D^.— ως om 2102 arm.— 8. rec αλλ, with B(e sil)DU al : txt Di(E.')FG &c.— 
 αλήθειας 1st to 2nd om I7. 93.-9. γαρ om Κ 4G. 108i-l<j-17 arm : ΰε Syr Ambrst-ed. 
 
 (as the source, — the conditional element, — be given. But I will tell you whom rather 
 
 by which His crucifixion became possible) to prove. ' Prove yourselves ;' there 
 
 wsakness, hut He lives by (source) the let your attention be concentrated, if you 
 
 Power of God ' (wliich raised Him from will apply tests." Notice tlie prominently 
 
 the dead, Rom. vi. 4 ; viii. 11. Eph. i. 20. emphatic εαντονς: so Chrys. : τί γαρ 
 
 Phil. ii. 0). — ' For we also are weak in λέγω ττερι ίμον τον ίιίοσκα'λου, φησί .... 
 
 Him (i.e. in Him, in our communion with νμάς γαρ αντονς εάν βουληθητε ίζετάσαι 
 
 and imitation of Christ, we, as He did, lay , ΰφεηθε 'ότι και εν ΐψΐν ΰ ■χριστός. 
 
 aside our power and spare you : we partake el Ιστέ Iv ttJ it.] ' Whether you 
 of His voluntary abnegation of power which maintain your Christian place and standing 
 we might have used. The context requires in Christ, which will be shewn by the 
 this expl., and refutes that of Chrys., also power of Christ's Spirit present and ener- 
 Theodoret, Theophyl., Grot., Estius, al., — gizing among you.' εττιγιν. έαυτ., οτι] 
 τί ίστιν, άσθ. ίναντψ; διωκόμεθα, ελαυ- for constr. by attraction, see reff. and 
 νόμεθα, τα 'έσχατη πάσχομεν), hnt shall Winer, § 63. 3. a. cl μήτι, unless in- 
 live (exercise our apostolic authority, in deed . . . see reff. αδόκιμοι., ' not abid- 
 contrast to the ασθένεια above) with Him ing the proof,' ' worthless,' — i. e. in this 
 (as He now exercises His power in His case, ' mere pretended Christians.' 6.] 
 glorified resurrection life) by (source) the ' But (however it may fall out with your 
 power of God with respect to you ' (εις proof of yourselves) I hope (or perhaps 
 υμάς may belong either to ίννάμιως θίον, better, expect) that ye shall know that 
 = ίυνο'μ. 0£θί; τη? (ΐς ΰμας, the art. being we are not worthless ' (unable to abide the 
 often omitted in such constrr., — or to ζ?}- proof to wliich you put us. The ver. is 
 σομεν, ' tee shall live with respect to y ου,' said, as Theodoret, άπειλητικως ; — and 
 which agrees better with the parallelism £(ς• Chrys. remarks, ίπειίή γαρ ϊντενθεν βού- 
 ίί'ί'. 0£οϋ, but not so well with the arrange- λεσθε, φησί, διά της ει'ς νμας κολάσεως 
 ment of the sentence. The sense seems to τήν δοκιμήν λαβείν, ονκ άπορήσομεν τον 
 require the latter interp., for the δνναμις ίοΰναι ίιμίν τήν άπόίίιξπ•). 7.] 
 θιον els ΰμ.. would be rather the result, Yet he prays God rather that they may 
 than the source of the apostolic energy require no such demonstration of his apos- 
 indicated by ζήσομεν). — I have taken ζή- folic power, even though he lose in rcputa- 
 σομεν, as the context plainly requires, figu- tion by it. μη ττοιήσ. νιμ. κακ. μηδ.] 
 ratively (see reff.) : but many Comm. take Not, as Grot., al., ' that I may not have to 
 it literally, of the resurrection ; e. g. Grot. inflict on you any evil ' (an extraordinary 
 — ' vitam consequemur immortalem.' rendering of κακόν ττοιείν), but 'that ye 
 5.] " You want to prove C//;-/*-^ speaking in may do no evil,' corresponding to ϊνα 
 me ; — if you necessitate this proof, it will {ιμ€Ϊ9 τ6 καλόν τΓοιήτ€ below. ονχ
 
 13. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορινθίους β. 
 
 689 
 
 Τ7^£ΐς " ασθίνίϋμεν, υμεις Ss δυνατοί ητί' του 
 ίυχυμζΟα, τΐΊν ύμων '' κατάρτισιν. ^^ ^ια τοϋτο 
 
 απών -γράφω, Ίνα "'" πάρων μι) " αποτυμως 
 κατή την * ίζουσίαν ην ^ ί'δ 
 
 y 
 
 και u=ch. xi. 21. 
 ν here only t. 
 
 )ωκ£ν μοί ο κύριος ίΐς ' οίκο 
 
 / W ver. 2 
 
 γρησωμαι χ Tit 
 
 y 
 
 13 
 
 μην και ουκ εις ' καϋαιρεσιν 
 11 
 
 παρακα- y 
 
 ΛοιτΓΟί', α^ίλφοι, yjHpiTi, ^ καταρτ'ιζ^σΟε, 
 λείσΟε, '^ το αυτό '' φρονίΐτε, '^ειρηνεύετε, και ^ό Θεός της 
 
 o.,ly t. See 
 R .πι. xi. 22. 
 coa-tr., E>th. 
 i. 1!'. ix. 27. 
 f Ai'ts xxvii. 
 3.) 
 " X. 8 reff. 
 
 Cm 
 
 . lf>. 
 
 α-γαπης και ειρήνης εσται μεί 
 
 12 f 
 
 αλλ)}Λοΐ'ς 
 ayioi πάντες. 
 
 ayi 
 
 φιΧημαι 
 
 νμ(ον. ασπασασϋε 
 
 ασπάζονται ύμας οι 
 
 1 Thess. ν. 13 only t. Sir. vi. ιΐ. 
 g = Acts ix. 13. Rom. i. 
 
 eRom. XV. 33. Θ. τ. 
 
 here only. 
 
 — oTt FG: on 4. 213 v-ed Pel-text. — δε om 80. — rec aft -ovro ins ?i (for connexion, 
 as the varr also skew), with D^JK &c Syr al Thdrt al : yap Syr goth Chr : i»j 73 : δε 
 without KOI al : txt ABD'FG 39. d'l' it ν copt asth al Dam lat-fF. — 10. αττων ταυ. γραίρω 
 80. — μΐ] Trnpojv D(E.')FG al it ν Oec. — χρησομαι D(E.')FG al. — ο κυρ. ι5ωκ. μοι {corrn 
 of order for emphasis .') ABD(E.')FG al it ν copt goth Dam : txt J(cfiwif.)K mss nrly 
 (appy) syi-r aeth al Chr Thdrt Thl Oec— ο θίος 89.— 11. το \οιπ. 4. 31. 43 Chr Thl.— 
 το αιτ. <:,ρ. om Α. — της up. κηι της DEJ 37• 49. 80. 123 d e v-ed goth arm Thdrt Thl 
 Ambrst Pel {της bef ay. om Thl). — ay απ. και om FG 17- 73 g : ay. κ. της (lo. 44-8. 72. 
 —12. φιλημ. ηγιω AFGJ 448. 72-3. 80 al vss Chr Thl lat-tf : txt B(e sil)bEK most 
 niss d e Thdrt Dam Oec— 13. aft κυριηΐ' add ημών (Ε ?) 37. 44. 113-23. 219= al ν Syr 
 ar-erp ieth copt slav Did Thdrt Chr Thl Ambrst Ambr Pel.— θίου και πατρός 4- slav-ed 
 Chr Thdrt (somet). — for νμ., ημών 112. — rec at end add αμήν, with DEK &c : om 
 ABFGJ 14. 17• 67^ (al?) harl' g seth Chr (Mtt's mss: mSj om υμ. also). 
 
 ϊνα . . . .] ' And the purpose of this my 
 prayer is not to gain any repute by your 
 Christian graces, but that you may be 
 highly endowed with them, and (if it so 
 happen) we may be as of no repute (' ho- 
 minum scilicet judicio,' Beza).' — That this 
 is the sense, and that δόκ.μ,οί is not in this 
 ver. to be applied to substaniiation of power 
 bij punishment, is necessitated by theconstr., 
 — it being plainly shewn by the infin. after 
 ίΰχόμ., that ii'a is not here meant to apply, 
 even in part, to the purport of the prayer (as 
 in Col. i. 9. 2 Thess. i. 1 1 ; see note on 1 Cor. 
 siv. 13), but to its purpose. And that being 
 settled, — ' we pray .... not in order that 
 we may appear δόκιμοι,' — it follows that 
 the appearing δόκιμοι would be a result of 
 the fulfilment of the prayer, viz. of your 
 doing no evil, and this it could only be by 
 their doing no evil bringing credit on the 
 Ap.'s ministry. It is notybr this end that we 
 pray that you may do no evil, but /o/• your 
 own good, even if that tend to the non- 
 exercise, and so depreciation, of our apos- 
 tolic power. 8.] ' for we have no 
 power against the truth (of the Gospel, 
 as Meyer; not of the facts, as Clirys., al., 
 and De AVette, which might suit κατά της 
 άλ., but comes in very lamely with νπϊρ 
 της (Ίλ. — ' If you walk in the truth, we 
 shall be at one with you and so have no 
 opportunity of shewing our power ') but 
 Vol. II. 
 
 (only) on behalf of (in furtherance of the 
 cause and spread of) the truth.' 9.] 
 
 ' For {confirmation of ver. 8 by the still 
 stronger assertion, wherein his joy con- 
 sists, and fur what he prays) our joy is, 
 when we are weak (have no opportunity 
 for shewing our power in punishment) but 
 ye are mighty (in Christian graces, and 
 requiring no exercise of our authority) : 
 this (viz. that the state of the case may 
 be as just mentioned) we also pray for, 
 viz. your perfection ' (generally, — in all 
 good things, see καταρτισμόν, Eph. iv. 
 1 2 : not, as Bengel, ' ne opus sit quen- 
 quam de corpore rescindere ;' the refer- 
 ence here being far more general). 
 10.] δια τοΰτο, ' becatise I wish and pray 
 for your perfection.' ταντα, ' this Epistle.' 
 άποτ., ' sharply.' χρήσ., scil. ύ^ΐ»'. See 
 in reff. similar omissions of the dative. — 
 βοΰλομαι γάρ iv τοις γράμμασι κΓισθαι 
 την άποτομίαν, άλλα μη tv τοΊς ττράγ- 
 μασι. Chrys. κατά. τ. Ιξ. ην . . . .] 
 
 gives the reason why he did not wish to 
 act άτΓοτόμως, — because the power would 
 seem to be exercised in a direction con- 
 trary to that intended by Him tvho gave 
 it. 11 — 13.] Conclusion. 
 
 11.] General exhortations. " Scverius 
 scri])serat Paulus in tractatione ; nunc be- 
 nignius,re tameii ipsa noiidimissa." Bengel. 
 χοίρ., ' rejoice,' sell, in the Lord, 
 Υ γ
 
 690 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ κορίνθιους β. 
 
 XIII. 13. 
 
 h Acts ii. 42. 
 = 1 Cor. i. 
 reff. 
 
 Η \άξ>ις τοΐ) κυρίου Ι/?σου -χ^ριστοΰ και η αγάπ») τον abde 
 9 Θεοΰ και η ' κοινωνία του ayiov πνεύματος μΐτα πάντων 
 νμων. 
 
 Subscription : ττρ. κορ. β. AB'D (D adds ιπΧηρωθη. άρχεται πρ. γαλατάς) : ετιΧεσθη 
 ττρ. κορ. G : all vary. — rec ττρος κορ. ^έντερα ιγραφη απο φίλιππων της μακε^ονιας δια 
 τιτον κ. λονκα, with (with some varr) (Ε.') JK all Syr copt Thdrt-ed Oec : πρ. κορ. β. 
 εγρ. απο ψιλ. δια τιτον βαρραβα κ. λονκα 44. 106-8-33. 
 
 as Phil. iii. 1 ; ίν. 4. 1 Thess. v. 16. 
 καταρτ., τέλειοι -γίνεσθε και άναπληροντε 
 τα λειπόμενα, Chrys. : " amend your- 
 selves," Stanley. παρακαλ., ' take 
 comfort ;' a recurrence in the end of the 
 Ep. to the spirit vcith vrhich it begun ; 
 see ch. i. 6, and, for the need they had of 
 comfort, vii. 8 — 13. This is better than 
 ' exhort {one another),' as Vulg., al., which 
 would hardly be expressed by the verb only, 
 but by παρακαλείτε άλλήλονν, or ίαντούς, 
 see 1 Thesk iv. 18 ; v. 11. Heb. iii. 13. 
 TO αΰτ. φρ. belongs to αγάπη, εΙρηνευ£Τ€ 
 to ειρήνη. καί, ' and then.' 
 12.] Concluding greetings. ev 
 άγ. φιλ.] See on Rom. xvi. 16. 13, 
 ol αγ. iravTis] viz. in the place whence 
 the Ep. was written. Concluding 
 BENEDICTION : remarkable for the distinct 
 recognition of the Three Persons in the 
 Holy Trinity, and thence adopted by the 
 Christian Church in all ages as the final 
 blessing in her Services. — 'The grace of 
 our Lord Jesus Christ ' is put first ; " nam 
 per gratiam Christi venitur ad Patris amo- 
 rem." Bengel. κοινων. τ. άγ. irv.] 
 • communion,' ' fellowship,' gen. obj. — 
 
 not ' communicaiio activa,' gen. subj. — 
 τοντ'εατι την μετοχήν αντον κ. την μετά- 
 ληι^ιιν, καθ' ην ΰγιαζόμεθα, ry εφ' ημάς 
 έπιφοιτήσει τον παρακλητον κοινωνοί αν- 
 τον γενόμενοι, και πνενμα και αντοΊ, οΰκ 
 ονσίΐ}, άλλα μεθίΐ,ει, ΰντες. Theophyl., and 
 simly Oecum. — Chrys. adds, o'vtoj τα της 
 τριάδος αδιαίρετα' και ον τον πνεύματος 
 εστίν ή κοινωΐ'ία, ενυεθη τον ν'ιοΰ' καί ον 
 τον νϊον 'εστίν ή χάρις, και τον πατρός κ. 
 τον αγίου πνεύματος. μετά, ττάντων 
 
 νιμών] " And this blessing he invokes, 
 not on a few individuals, or on any one 
 section of the Corinthian Church, but ex- 
 pressly on every portion and every indi- 
 vidual of those with whom, throughout 
 these two Epistles, he had so earnestly and 
 so variously argued and contended. As in 
 the first, so in the second Epistle, but still 
 more emphatically, as being here his very 
 last words, his prayer was, that this happi. 
 ness might be ' with them all ' {μετά πάν- 
 των νμών)." Stanley. Compare, for the 
 same emphatic πας, Rom. i. 5. 8 ; iv. 16 ; 
 xvi. 24, &c. : and for πάς following its 
 substantive and unemphatic, ib. viii. 32. 37- 
 1 Cor. vii. 17; x. 1, &c. 
 
 END 01" YOL. II. 
 
 GILBERT AND RIVIXGTON, PRINTERS, ST. JOHN's SttUARE, LONDON.
 
 BY THE SAME AUTHOR. 
 
 I. 
 
 QUEBEC CHAPEL βΕΕΜΟΝβ :— Eiest Seeies ; preached in the 
 
 former half of 1854. Second Edition, Ts. 6d. 
 
 Second Series ; preached in the latter half of 1854. 5*. 
 
 Thied Seeies, chiefly on Practical Subjects ; preached in the former 
 
 half of 1856. 7«• &d. 
 
 II. 
 
 DIVINE ΕΟΛ^Ε in CEEATIOX and EEDEMPTIOX : a Course of 
 Sermons from Septuagesima to Trinity. 5s. 
 
 III. 
 SERMONS on CHEISTIAN PEACTICE; preached in the Tear 
 
 1855. 5s. 
 
 IV. 
 
 SERMONS. InSvo. 9^. 1850. 
 
 T. 
 
 EOUE LECTTJEES on the ΕΙΓΤΗ COMMANDMENT. In Syo. 
 
 2s. 6d. 1849. 
 
 YI. 
 
 PLAIN VILLAGE SEEMONS, on the Loed's Peayee and the 
 Beatitudes. In 12mo. 1*. 184G. 
 
 A MEMOEIAL of the Eev. HENET ALFOED, A.M., late Eector 
 
 of Aston Sandford, Bucks, and formerly Fellow of AVadham College, Oxford : con- 
 sisting of Extracts from his Correspondence, six selected Sermons, and a Memoir. 
 In 8vO. 7•*• 6<ί• 
 
 Yin. 
 
 PEOSE HYMNS, chiefly from Scripture, pointed for Chanting; 
 adapted to the Sundays and Holydays throughout the Year. 2s. 
 
 IX. 
 
 PSALMS and HYMNS (in metre), adapted to the Sundays and 
 Holydays throughout the Year. 2s. 6d. 
 
 X. 
 
 POETICAL WOEKS. In 2 A^ols. 10^. Gel 
 
 XI, 
 
 SELECT POETICAL \VOEKS. 1*.
 
 BIBLICAL WORKS, 
 
 PUBLISHED BY MESSRS. RIVINGTON. 
 
 ELSLEY's ANNOTATIONS on the FOUE GOSPELS and ACTS. 
 
 In 2 Vols. 14s. 
 
 CANON SLADE'S ANNOTATIONS on the EPISTLES. In 
 2 Vols. 16*. 
 
 CANON TOWNSEND'S CHEONOLOGICAL AERANGEMENT 
 
 of the BIBLE. With copious Notes. In 4 Vols. 21. 1 6s. 
 
 CATENA AUEEA : a Commentary on the Pour Gospels from the 
 
 Works of the Fathers. 4 Vols, (in 8 Parts.) 3/. Gs. 
 
 BISHOP LONSDALE and AECHDEACON HALE'S COMMEN- 
 TARY on the GOSPELS. 13s. 
 
 THE GOSPEL NAEEATIVES HAEMONIZED, with Devotional 
 Reflections. By ISAAC WILLIAMS, B.D. In 8 Vols. 21. 18s. 
 
 •»* These Volumes are sold separately: — Thoughts on the Study of the Gospels, 7*• 
 A Harmony of the Gospels, 7«• Gd- The Nativity, Is. Gd. Second Year of the 
 Ministry, 7s. Third Year of the Ministry, 7s. Gd. The Holy Week, 7s. Gd. The 
 Passion, 7s. The Resurrection, 7*• 
 
 BISHOP SHFTTLEWOETH'S PAEAPHEASTIC TEANSLA- 
 TION of the EPISTLES. With Notes. 9s. 
 
 CANON WOEDSWOETH'S HAEMONY of the APOCALYPSE. 
 
 4s. Gd. 
 
 GEES WELL'S EXPOSITION of the PAEABLES. In 6 Vols. 
 
 31. 3s. 
 
 HALES'S ANALYSIS of CHEONOLOGY and GEOGEAPHY, 
 
 HISTORY and PROPHECY. In 4 \^ols. 21. Us. 
 
 HENGSTENBERG'S CHEISTOLOGY of the OLD TESTAMENT; 
 edited by the late THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M.A. In I Vol. 16s. 
 
 BISHOP MIDDLETON'S DOCTEINE of the GEEEK AETICLE 
 APPLIED to the CRITICISM of the NEW TESTAMENT. By the late HUGH 
 JAMES ROSE, B.D. 12s.
 
 OCTOBER, 185G. 
 
 Ν EW BOOKS 
 
 IN THE COURSE OF PUBLICATION 
 
 BY 
 
 Messrs. RIVINGTON, 
 
 WATERLOO PLACE, PALL MALL, LONDON. 
 
 I. 
 
 AGONISTES ; or, PHILOSOPHICAL STRICTURES, sug- 
 gested by Opinions, chiefly, of contemporary Writers. By ALFRED 
 LYALL, B.A, Rector of Harbledown, Kent. 
 In this work the opinions of the following Authors (amongst others) 
 are discussed, viz. Abp. Whately — Whewell — Chalmers — Grote — Lord 
 Brougham — Sydney Smith — Jeffrey — Mill — Brown — Paley — Macaulay — 
 Baden Powell — J. H. Newman — Mackintosh — and Sir W. Hamilton. In post 
 8vo. 7s. 6d. (Now ready.) 
 
 II. 
 
 SERMONS on the CHARACTERS of the OLD TESTA- 
 MENT. By the Rev. ISAAC WILLIAMS, B.D., late Fellow of 
 Trinity College, Oxford; Author of a "Harmony of the Gospels," 
 with Notes, in 8 vols. In one volume, small Svo. {In a few days.) 
 
 III. 
 
 The FOUR GOSPELS and ACTS of the APOSTLES. With 
 EXPLANATORY NOTES by LORD LYTTELTON. In post Svo. 
 8s. 6d. 
 
 The GREEK TESTAMENT. * With ENGLISH NOTES. 
 Part I. : The GOSPELS. By CHRISTOPHER WORDSWORTH, 
 D.D., Canon of Westminster. In imperial Svo. {Just ready.) 
 
 V. 
 
 FALSE WORSHIP; an Essay. By the Rev. S. R. Μ AIT- 
 LAND, D.D., F.R.S., and F.S.A. In small Svo. 5s. Qd. 
 Also, by the same Author, 
 SUPERSTITION and SCIENCE : an Essay. 2s. 
 
 VI. 
 
 The FIRST of JUNE; or, SCHOOLBOY RIVALRY: a 
 
 Second Tale of Charlton School. By the Rev. H. C. ADAMS, M.A., 
 late Fellow of Magdalen College, Oxford; Editor of "The Cherry- 
 stones." In small Svo. 3s. Gci. 
 Also, TALES of CHARLTON SCHOOL, containing theViR^T of June 
 and the Cherry-Stones. 6s. &d. 
 
 SERMONS chiefly on OLD TESTAMENT HISTORIES; 
 
 from Texts in the SUNDAY LESSONS. By JOHN HAMPDEN 
 GURNEY, M.A., Rector of St. Mary's, Marylebone ; Author of 
 " Historical Sketches," the "Grand Romish Fallacy," &c. In small 
 Svo. Qs.
 
 BOOKS RECENTLY PUBLISHED 
 
 Vlll. 
 
 SERMONS on CHRISTIAN PRACTICE. By HENRY 
 ALFORD, B.D., Minister of Quebec Chapel, London, and formerly 
 Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. In small 8vo. 5s. 
 
 IX. 
 
 The Third Edition of a HISTORY of the PROTESTANT 
 EPISCOPAL CHURCH in AMERICA. By SAMUEL WILBER- 
 FORCE, D.D., Lord Bishop of Oxford. 5s. {Just published.) 
 
 X. 
 
 The Third Volume of the GREEK -TESTAMENT : with a 
 Critically revised Text ; Various Readings ; Marginal References to 
 Verbal and Idiomatic Usage; Prolegomena; and a CRITICAL and 
 EXEGETICAL COMMENTARY in English. By the Rev HENRY 
 ALFORD, B.D., Minister of Quebec Chapel, London, and late Fellow 
 of Trinity College, Cambridge. In 8vo. 18s. {Now ready ) 
 Lately published, 
 A New Edition of VOLS. I. and II. 
 
 XI. 
 
 The WEEK of DARKNESS ; a SHORT MANUAL for the 
 
 Use and Comfort of MOURNERS in a House where one lies Dead. 
 By the Author of " Ye Maiden and Married Life of Mary 
 Powell." In 18mo. 2s. 6rf, 
 
 XII. 
 
 A Second Edition of the HISTORY of the CHURCH of 
 ENGLAND in the COLONIES and FOREIGN DEPENDENCIES 
 of the BRITISH EMPIRE. By the Rev. JAMES S. M. ANDER- 
 SON, M.A., Preacher of Lincoln's Inn, and Rector of Tormarton. 
 In 3 vols, small 8vo. £1 4s, {Now ready.) 
 
 XIII. 
 
 The Sixth Series of OCCASIONAL SERMONS, preached 
 in Westminster Abbey (No. XLIV. The CHRISTIAN SUNDAY). 
 By CHRISTOPHER WORDSWORTH, D.D., Canon of West- 
 minster. In 8vo. {In the course of publication.) 
 
 XIV. 
 
 A COPIOUS PHRASEOLOGICAL ENGLISH-GREEK 
 
 LEXICON, founded on a Work prepared by J. W. FRADERS- 
 DORFF, Ph. Dr. of the Taylor-Institution, Oxford : revised, enlarged, 
 and improved by the late THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, 
 M.A., formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, and HENRY 
 BROWNE, M.A., Vicar of Pevensey, and Prebendary of Chichester. 
 In 8vo. £1 Is. 
 
 XV. 
 
 A MEMOIR of the Right Rev. DAVID LOW, D.D., for- 
 merly Bishop of the United Dioceses of Ross, Moray, and Argyle ; 
 comprising Sketches of the Principal Events connected with the 
 Scottish Episcopal Church, during the last Seventy Years. By the 
 Rev. WILLIAM BLATCH, Incumbent of St. John's, Pittenweem, 
 and late Clerical Assistant to the Bishop: In 12mo. 7s.
 
 BY MESSRS. RIVINGTON. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 PRACTICAL SERMONS. By JOHN BOWSTEAD, 
 
 M.A., Vicar of Messingham with Bottesford, and Prebendary of 
 Lincoln. In 2 vols. Svo. £1 4s. {Just published.) 
 
 XVII. 
 
 An INQUIRY concerning the Principles in the Constitution 
 of Human Nature, which are the CAUSES of MORAL EVIL. By 
 a LAYMAN. In small Svo. 4s. 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 SERMONS and ADDRESSES delivered on Various Occasions. 
 By JOHN KAYE, D.D., late Lord Bishop of Lincoln. Edited by his 
 Son. In Svo. I6s. 
 
 XIX. 
 
 SPICILEGIUM SYRIACUM ; or, Remnants of WRITERS 
 of the SECOND and THIRD CENTURIES, preserved in SYRIAC ; 
 with an English Translation, and Notes. By the Rev. WILLIAM 
 CURETON, M.A., F.R S., Chaplain in Ordinary to the Queen, and 
 Canon of Westminster. In royal Svo. 9s. 
 
 XX• 
 
 PAROCHIAL SERMONS. By the Rev. GREVILLE 
 PHILLIMORE, M.A., Vicar of Down Ampney ; formerly Student of 
 Christ Church, Oxford. In 12mo. 6s. 
 
 XXI. 
 
 The Fourth Edition of the BISHOPRIC of SOULS. By 
 the Rev. ROBERT WILSON EVANS, B.D., Archdeacon of W^est- 
 moreland, formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge ; Author of 
 the " Rectory of Valehead." In small Svo. 5s. 
 
 XXII. 
 
 DISCOURSES on the PRINCIPLES of SCRIPTURE IN- 
 TERPRETATION and on the FALL. By the Rev. JOHN 
 HANNAH, D.C.L., Warden of Trinity College, Glenalmond. In 
 small Svo. (In preparation.) 
 
 XXIII. 
 
 The POETICAL WORKS of EDMUND PEEL. In small 
 Svo. 7s. 6d. (Just published.) 
 
 XXIV. 
 
 DISCOURSES: chiefly deduced from the GOSPELS and 
 EPISTLES of the SUNDAYS and FESTIVALS. By the Rev. 
 JAMES REYNOLDS, B.A., M.R.A.S., &c.. Perpetual Curate of 
 St. Mary's Hospital Chapel, Great Ilford, Esse.x. In small Svo. 5s. 6rf. 
 (Now ready.) 
 
 XXV. 
 
 The DOCTRINE of the GREEK ARTICLE applied to the 
 CRITICISM and ILLUSTRATION of the NEW TES ΓΑΜΕΝΤ. 
 By the late BISHOP MIDDLETON. With Prefatory Observations 
 and Notes, by HUGH JAMES ROSE, B.D., late Principal of 
 King's College, London. New Edition. In Svo. I2s. {Just pub- 
 lished.)
 
 BOOKS RECENTLY PUBLISHED 
 
 XXVI. 
 
 A SERIES of SERMONS on the EPISTLE and GOSPEL 
 for each SUNDAY in the YEAR, and the HOLY DAYS of the 
 CHURCH. By the Rev. ISAAC WILLIAMS, B.D., late Fellow 
 of Trinity College, Oxford; Author of a " Harmony of the Gospels, 
 with Reflections, in 8 vols." Second Edition. In 3 vols, small 8vo. 
 16*. 6d. 
 *»* The Third Volume (on the SAINTS' DAYS and other HOLY 
 
 DAYS) may be had separately. 5s. 6d. 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 An ILLUSTRATED EDITION of SACRED ALLEGORIES. 
 
 Contents : — The Shadow of the Cross — The Distant Hills — The Old 
 Man's Home; and The King's Messengers. By the Rev. WILLIAM 
 ADAMS, M.A., late Fellow of Merton College, Oxford. In small 
 4to. 25s. in cloth, gilt ; or bound in morocco by Hayday, 38s. 
 
 *„* This New Edition contains nvmerous Engravings on Wood from 
 Original Designs by C. W. Cope, R.A. ; I. C. Horsley, A.R.A.; Samuel 
 Palmer; Birket Foster; and George E. Hicks. 
 
 XXVIII. 
 
 SOME ACCOUNT of the EXTERNAL GOVERNMENT 
 and DISCIPLINE of the CHURCH of CHRIST during the FIRST 
 THREE CENTURIES. By JOHN KAYE, D.D., late Lord 
 Bishop of Lincoln. In Svo. 5s. 
 
 XXIX. 
 
 DIVINE LOVE in CREATION and REDEMPTION: a 
 COURSE of SERMONS, from Septuagesima to Trinity. By 
 HENRY ALFORD, B.D., Minister of Quebec Chapel, London, 
 and late Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. In small Svo. 5s. 
 
 XXX. 
 
 CHRISTIAN THEISM: the TESTIMONY of REASON 
 and REVELATION to the EXISTENCE and CHARACTER of the 
 SUPREME BEING. By the Rev. ROBERT ANCHOR THOMP- 
 SON, M.A. In 2 vols. Svo. £1 Is. 
 
 *#* The FIRST BURNETT PRIZE o/£l800 was awarded to this Work. 
 
 XXXI. 
 
 A DEVOTIONAL COMMENT on the MORNING and 
 EVENING SERVICES in the BOOK of COMMON PRAYER, 
 in a Series of Plain Lectures. By JOHN JAMES, D.D., Canon 
 of Peterborough, Author of a " Comment on the Collects," and other 
 Works. Second Edition, In 2 vols. 12mo. \0s. &d. 
 
 XXXIT. 
 
 EVANGELICAL LIFE, as seen in the EXAMPLE of our 
 LORD JESUS CHRIST. By JOHN JAMES, D.D., Canon of 
 Peterborough, Author of a "Comment on the Collects," and other 
 Works. Second Edition. In ]2mo. 7s. Qd.
 
 BY MESSRS. RIVINGTON. 
 
 XXXIII. 
 
 The CHERRY-STONES; or, the FORCE of CON- 
 SCIENCE: a Tale for Youth. Partly from the MSS. of the Rev. 
 WILLIAM ADAMS, Author of "The Shadow of the Cross," &c. 
 Edited by the Rev. H. C. ADAMS. Fourth Edition. In small 8vo. 
 3s. Qd. 
 
 XXXIV. 
 
 SERMONS, preached at St. Mary's, Oxford. By the Rev. 
 CHARLES PAGE EDEN, M.A., Vicar of Aberford, late Fellow of 
 Oriel College, and Vicar of St. Mary the Virgin, Oxford. In small 
 8vo. 5s. 6rf. 
 
 XXXV. 
 
 ENGLAND'S SACRED SYNODS; a Constitutional His- 
 tory of the CONVOCATIONS of the CLERGY, from the Earliest 
 Records of Christianity in Britain to the Date of the Promulgation of 
 the Book of Common Prayer. Including a List of all the Councils of 
 the Clergy held in England. By JAMES WAYLAND JOYCE, 
 M.A., formerly Student of Christ Church, Oxford, Rector of Bur- 
 ford (Third Portion). In 8vo. 25s. 
 
 XXXVI. 
 
 LETTERS from CANTERBURY, NEW ZEALAND. By 
 ROBERT BATEMAN PAUL, M.A., Archdeacon of Waimea; 
 formerly Fellow of Exeter College, Oxford. With a Map. In 
 small 8vo. {In the Press.) 
 
 XXXVII. 
 
 The FELLOW-TRAVELLERS : or MARRIED LIFE ; 
 
 Notices of the Duty, Honour, and Happiness of that State, and the 
 mutual Recognition of the pious Husband and Wife in the heavenly 
 AVorld to come ; with some Helps for joint Devotion. Also, Two 
 Forms of Intercession for Relatives at the Seat of War. By G. W. 
 TYRRELL, M.A., Rural Dean of Belfast, Rector of Drumbeg, and 
 formerly Examining Chaplain to the late Bishop of the Diocese. In 
 l6mo. 5s. 
 
 XXXVIII. 
 
 The COMMUNION of the LAITY; an ESSAY, chiefly 
 Historical, on the Rule and Practice of the Church with respect to 
 the Reception of the Consecrated Elements, at the Celebration of the 
 HOLY EUCHARIST. By W. E. SCUDAMORE. M.A., Rector 
 of Ditchingham, and late Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge, 
 In 8vo. 4s. 6d. 
 
 XXXIX. 
 
 The Fourth Edition of the FIRST FRENCH BOOK; on 
 
 the Plan of " Henry's First Latin Book." By the Rev. THOMAS 
 KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M.A , late Rector of Lyndon, and 
 formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. In r2mu. 5s. 6d. 
 {Just published.)
 
 BOOKS RECENTLY PUBLISHED 
 
 XL. 
 
 The Third Series of PAROCHIAL SERMONS, preached 
 in the Parish Church of Heversham. By the Rev. ROBERT WIL- 
 SON EVANS, B.D., Archdeacon of Westmoreland ; formerly Fellow 
 of Trinity College, Cambridge; and Author of "The Rectory of 
 Valehead," and " The Bishopric of Souls." In small 8vo. 5s. 
 Also, the FIRST and SECOND VOLUMES. 5s. each. 
 
 XLI. 
 
 MEDITATIONS and PRAYERS on the ORDINATION 
 SERVICE for PRIESTS. By the Rev. J. H. PINDER, M.A., Prin- 
 cipal of Wells Theological College. In small 8vo. 3s. 6d. 
 Also, by the same Author, lately published, 
 MEDITATIONS and PRAYERS on the ORDINATION SERVICE 
 for DEACONS. 3s. 6d. 
 
 XLII. 
 
 A Second Series of QUEBEC CHAPEL SERMONS, 
 
 preached in the Latter Half of 1854. By HENRY ALFORD, B.D., 
 Minister of the Chapel ; Editor of a New Edition of the Greek Testa- 
 ment, with English Notes. In small 8vo. 5s. 
 Also, the FIRST SERIES, for the Former Half of 1854. 7s. 6d. (JThe 
 THIRD SERIES is in the Press.) 
 
 XLIII. 
 
 The CHRISTIAN CHARACTER; Six Sermons preached in 
 LENT. By JOHN JACKSON, D.D., Lord Bishop of Lincoln. 
 Fifth Edition. In small 8vo. 3s. 6d. 
 
 XLIV. 
 
 WAYFARINGS in CHRIST; a Selection of SERMONS 
 preached in St. Philip's Chapel, Regent Street. By the Rev. G. D. 
 HILL, M.A., Evening Preacher at Grosvenor Chapel, South Audley 
 Street. In 12mo. 4s. 
 
 XLV. 
 
 A READING COMPANION to the FIRST GERMAN 
 
 BOOK ; containing Extracts from the best Authors, with a copious 
 Vocabulary and Explanatory Notes. By the Rev. THOMAS KER- 
 CHEVER ARNOLD, M.A., late Rector of Lyndon, and formerly 
 Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, and J. W. FRADERSDORFF, 
 Dr. Phil. Second Edition. In ]2mo. 4s. 
 
 XLVI. 
 
 NINE CHARGES delivered to the CLERGY of the 
 DIOCESE of LINCOLN ; with SOME OTHER WORKS. By 
 JOHN KAYE, D.D., late Lord Bishop of Lincoln. Edited by his 
 SON. In 8vo. IDs. 6d. 
 
 XLVII. 
 
 A Second Edition of SELECTIONS from CICERO, with 
 ENGLISH NOTES. PaktI. : From the ORATIONS; containing 
 the Fourth Book of the Impeachment of Verres, the Four Speeches 
 against Catiline, and the Speech for the Poet Archias. The Notes 
 are taken from several excellent Editions well known in Germany, 
 including those of Orelli, Zumpt, Matthitp, and Klotz. Edited by 
 THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M.A., late Rector of Lyndon, 
 and formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. In 12mo. 4s.
 
 BY MESSRS. RIVINGTON. 
 
 XLVIII. 
 
 PAROCHIAL LECTURES on POETRY and other Subjects. 
 By the Rev. EDWARD MONRO, Incumbent of Harrow Weald, 
 Middlesex; Author of "Parochial Work," "The Parish," and other 
 Works. In small 8vo. 7s. &d. QNow ready.) 
 
 XLIX. 
 
 The Third Volume of PAROCHIAL SERMONS preached 
 in the Parish Church of St. Mary the Virgin, Dover. By the Rev. 
 JOHN PUCKLE, M.A., Incumbent of the Parish, and Rural Dean. 
 In 8vo. 9i. 
 
 L. 
 
 ENGLAND and ROME; a Discussion of the PRINCIPAL 
 DOCTRINES and PASSAGES of HISTORY in common Debate 
 between the Members of the Two COMMUNIONS. By W. E. 
 SCUDAMORE, M.A., Rector of Ditchingham, and late Fellow of 
 St. John's College, Cambridge. In 8vo. 10*. 6c?. 
 
 LI. 
 
 SICKNESS: its TRIALS and BLESSINGS. Fifth Edition. 
 
 In small 8vo. 5s. 
 
 LII. 
 
 PAROCHIAL PAPERS for the CLERGYMAN, the 
 SCHOOLMASTER, and the FAMILY. By the Rev. EDWARD 
 MONRO, Incumbent of Harrow Weald, Middlesex. In the Course 
 of Publication in Weekly Numbers. Nos. I. to XI. are already pub- 
 lished. 
 
 LIII. 
 
 The GOSPEL NARRATIVE of OUR LORD'S RESUR- 
 RECTION HARMONIZED : with Reflections. By the Rev. 
 ISAAC WILLIAMS, B.D., late Fellow of Trinity College, Oxford. 
 Second Edition. In small 8vo. 7s, 
 
 LIV. 
 
 GROTIUS de VERITATE RELIGIONIS CHRISTIANS. 
 With ENGLISH NOTES and ILLUSTRATIONS. By the Rev. 
 J. E. MIDDLETON, M.A., of Trinity College, Cambridge ; Lecturer 
 on Theology at St. Bees' College. Second Edition. In 12 mo. 6s. 
 
 LV. 
 
 The Fifth Edition of A MANUAL of the RUDIMENTS 
 of THEOLOGY; containing an Abridgment of Bp. Tomline's 
 Elements ; an Analysis of Paley's Evidences ; a Summary of Pearson 
 on the Creed ; and a Brief Exposition of the Thirty-nine Articles, 
 chiefly from Burnet; Notices of Jewish Rites and Ceremonies, &c. 
 By the Rev. J. B. SMITH, D.D., formeriy of Christ's College, 
 - Cambridge; late Head Master of Horncastle Grammar School. In 
 12mo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 LVI. 
 
 The JOURNAL of CONVOCATION, No. VI. Being a 
 New Series of " SYNOD ALIA." Edited by the Rev. CHARLES 
 WARREN, of Over, St. Ives, Hunts. In Bvo. 2*. 
 Latelyptiblished, the FIRST VOLUUE. 9s. 6d.
 
 LVII. 
 
 QUESTIONS illustrating the THIRTY-NINE ARTICLES 
 of the CHURCH of ENGLAND : with Proofs from Scripture and 
 the Primitive Church. By the Rev. EDWARD BICKERSTETH, 
 M.A., Archdeacon of Buckingham, and Vicar of Aylesbury. Fourth 
 Edition. In 12mo. 3s. 6c?. 
 
 LVIII. 
 
 The GREAT FEASTS; FOUR SERMONS. By the Rev. 
 FRANCIS GARDEN, M.A., of Trinity College, Cambridge; Professor 
 of Mental and Moral Philosophy in Queen's College, London ; and 
 Curate of St. Stephen's, Westminster. In 12mo. 1*. 6i/. 
 
 LTX. 
 
 The SAMPLER, a System of Teaching PLAIN NEEDLE- 
 WORK in SCHOOLS. By the LADY ELIZABETH FINCH. 
 
 Second Edition. With Illustrative Engravings. In small 8vo. 4s. 6d. 
 
 *,* BLANK FORMS for registering the progress of the Work may be 
 had. 6d. per dozen. 
 
 LX. 
 
 PRACTICAL RELIGION EXEMPLIFIED, bv Letters 
 and Passages from the Life of the late Rev. ROBERT ANDER- 
 SON, of Brighton. By the Hon. Mrs. ANDERSON. Sucth Edition. 
 In small 8vo. 4s. 
 
 LXI. 
 
 The ROCKY ISLAND and OTHER SIMILITUDES. By 
 SAMUEL WILBERFORCE, D.D., Lord Bishop of Oxford. 
 Eleventh Edition. In 18mo. 2s. Qd. 
 
 LXII. 
 
 The COLONIAL CHURCH CHRONICLE and MIS- 
 SIONARY JOURNAL. VOL, VIII. [July, 1854— June, 1855.] 
 In 8vo. 7s. 
 *^* This Journal contains numerous Original Articles, Correspondence, 
 and Documents relating to the CHURCH in the COLONIES, Reviews 
 and Notices of New Publications, and a Monthly Summary of Colonial, 
 Foreign, and Home News. 
 
 Continued in Monthly Numbers, price 6d, each. 
 
 LXIIJ. 
 
 A NEW TRANSLATION of the RECEIVED TEXT of the 
 APOSTOLICAL EPISTLES, slightly interpolated, and illustrated by 
 a Synoptical and Logical Paraphrase of the Contents of each : the 
 whole setting forth the sum of an Ancillary Series of Annotations on 
 the Epistles. By THOMAS WILLIAMSON PEILE, D.D., Head 
 Master of Repton School ; and some time Fellow of Trinity College, 
 Cambridge. PART I.— ROMANS. In 8vo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Also, by the same Author, just published, 
 
 ANNOTATIONS on ST. PAUL'S EPISTLES to the ROMANS 
 
 and CORINTHIANS. Second Edition, revised arid enlarged. In 8vo. 
 14s.
 
 WORKS PUBLISHED BY MESSRS. RIVINGTON. 
 
 RECENT PAMPHLETS AND TRACTS. 
 
 I. 
 
 A LETTER to the LORD BISHOP of EXETER, from the LORD 
 ARCHBISHOP of ARMAGH, on the CHURCH DISCIPLINE BILL 
 In 8vo. 6d. 
 
 II. 
 
 A CHARGE addressed to the CLERGY of the DIOCESE of RIPON at 
 the TRIENNIAL VISITATION, in April, 1856. By CHARLES- 
 THOMAS LONGLEY, D.D., Lord Bishop of Ripon. In 8vo. Is. 
 
 III. 
 
 A CHARGE, delivered to the CLERGY of the ARCHDEACONRY of 
 BUCKINGHAM, at his Second Visitation, in June, 1856. By EDWARD 
 BICKERSTETH, M.A., Archdeacon of Buckingham, and Vicar of Ayles- 
 bury. In 8vo. Is. 
 
 IV. 
 
 THE LAW of SCRIPTURE against DIVORCE. By LORD REDES- 
 DALE. In 8vo. 6d. 
 
 V. 
 
 THE OFFICE of the SUFFRAGAN, or TITULAR BISHOP in the 
 CHURCH of ENGLAND considered, in a CHARGE to the CLERGY of 
 the ARCHDEACONRY of LONDON, in April, 1856. By W. H. HALE, 
 M. Α., Archdeacon of London. In 8vo. 6d. 
 
 VI. 
 
 A CHARGE delivered to the CLERGY of the ARCHDEACONRY of 
 LINDISFARNE, in May, 1856, and published at their rec^uest. By R. C. 
 COXE, M.A., Archdeacon. In 8vo. Is. 
 
 VII. 
 
 The PERIL of UNLAWFUL VENTURE : a SERMON, preached in 
 Quebec Chapel, on Sunday, June 1, 1856. By HENRY ALFORD, B.D., 
 Minister of the Chapel. In square size. Is. 
 
 Vill. 
 
 THE IMPORTANCE of TEACHING COMMON THINGS; a LEC- 
 TURE. By HENRY FEARON, B.D., Rector of Loughborough. Third 
 Edition. In 8vo. 6d. 
 
 IX. 
 
 THE LESSONS of WAR the DUTIES of PEACE : a SERMON, preached 
 in Quebec Chapel, on Sunday, May 4, 1856, being the day appointed for a 
 General Thanksgiving for the Peace. By HENRY ALFORD, B.D., Mi- 
 nister of the Chapel. In 8vo. is. 
 
 X. 
 
 A LETTER to the EDITOR of the GUARDIAN, respecting the PRO- 
 POSED UNION between the CHURCH and the WESLEYANS. By the 
 Rev. WILLIAM MAW SHAW, M.A., Curate of St. Michael, Highgate. 
 In 8vo. 6d. 
 
 XI. 
 
 SPEECH of ROBERT PHILLIMORE, D.C.L., M.P., upon the Second 
 Reading of the TITHE COMMUTATION RENT-CHARGE RATING 
 BILL, in the House of Commons, Wednesday, May 7, 1856. With a 
 DOCUMENTARY APPENDIX. In 8vo. 2s. 
 
 XII. 
 
 A SERMON, on the DEATH of JOHN BOURN FAVIELL Esq., 
 Student of Hatfield Hall, Durham. By the Rev. JAMES ASPINALL, 
 M. A.,• Rector of Althorpe, Lincolnshire. In 12mo. 6d. 
 
 XIII. 
 
 CHURCH RATES, "The Question of the Day," considered in a LETTER 
 to LOFTU^ T. WIGRAM, Esq., M.P. for the University of Cambridge. 
 By the Ven. C. J. HOARE, Archdeacon of Surrey, and Canon of Win- 
 chester. Second Edition. In 8vo. Is. [Continued.
 
 10 WORKS PUBLISHED BY MESSRS. RIVINGTON. 
 
 RECENT PAMPHLETS AND TRACTS (.Conlinued). 
 XIV. 
 
 REMARKS on the RATING of TITHE COMMUTATION RENT- 
 CHARGE ; with special reference to the Rating of the Vahie of Personal 
 Labour. By the Rev. C. A. STEVENS, M.A., late Curate of Kensington, 
 and of St. Margaret's, Westminster. In 8vo. Is. 
 
 XV. 
 
 SPEECH delivered before the House of Commons, March .5, on Sir 
 William Clay's Bill for the total Abolition of CHURCH RATES. By the 
 Right Hon. LORD JOHN MANNERS, M.P. In 8vo. Is. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 THOUGHTS, in Verse, on a PLURALITY of WORLDS. By the Rev. 
 JOHN PEAT, M. Α., Incumbent of the Weald, Sevenoaks, Kent. Second 
 Edition. Is. 
 
 XVII. 
 
 The VISION of the SEVEN GOLDEN CANDLESTICKS : a SERMON, 
 
 preached in the Parish Church of Kettering, May 8th, 185C, before the 
 ARCHDEACON of NORTHAMPTON, and the Clergy assembled, at his 
 Annual Visitation. In 8vo. \s. 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 Are the more Hardened Juvenile Offenders fit Subjects for the 
 Certified Reformatory Schools ? A PLEA for the separate REFOR- 
 MATORY TREATMENT of the comparatively Innocent portion of 
 JUVENILE OFFENDERS. By CONSTANTINE FRERE, M.A., late 
 Fellow of Corpus Christi College, Cambridge, and Rector of Finningham, 
 Suffolk. In 8vo. Is. 
 
 MORE BISHOPS and MORE DIOCESES. A LETTER addressed to 
 the Right Hon. the EARL GRANVILLE. By FREDERICK E. TUSON, 
 M.A., Honorai'y Canon of Bristol, Vicar of Minety, and Rural Dean. In 
 12mo. 3ci. 
 
 XX 
 
 SELF-EXAMINATION and PROOF; a SERMON, on the Occasion of 
 the Ordination held by the Riglit Rev. the Lord Bishop of Oxford, in the 
 Parish Church of Aylesbury, on Sunday, February 17, lii5G. Preached by 
 the Rev. R. W. EVANS, B.D., Vicar of Heversham. In 8vo. Is. 
 
 XXI. 
 
 THE GOOD CHURCHMAN; or, Plain Observations on a GOOD 
 CHURCHMAN'S LIFE. By E. E, B. S. In 12mo. U., or bs. per dozen. 
 
 DAILY PRAYERS for VILLAGE SCHOOLS. In I8mo. 8d., or Ss. per 
 
 dozen. 
 
 XXIII. 
 
 OCCASIONAL PAPER of the ANGLO-AMERICAN CHURCH EMI- 
 
 GRANT'S AID SOCIETY. No. I. (February, 1856.) Qd. 
 
 XXIV. 
 
 A METRICAL VERSION of the BOOK of PSALMS. By THOMAS 
 TURNER, Esq., formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. Part 
 Second. 8vo. Is. 
 
 XXV. 
 
 ALL THINGS REFERRED TO GOD; a SERMON preached on the 
 Day after the FUNERAL of Sir ROBERT HARRY INGLIS, Bart. 
 By BENJAMIN HARRISON, M. Α., Archdeacon of Maidstone, and Canon 
 of Canterbury. In 8vo.
 
 TRACTS 
 
 ON CONFIRMATION, THE SACRAMENTS, THE CHURCH 
 CATECHISM, AND OTHER SUBJECTS. 
 
 The RITE of CONFIRMATION EX- 
 PLAINED. Bj' the Rev. D. J. EYRE, M.A., 
 Sub-Dean of Sarum. Fourth Edition. Price id., 
 or 3i. 6d. per dozen. 
 
 II. 
 
 QUESTIONS and ANSWERS on CON- 
 FIRMATION. By W. F. HOOK, D.D., Vicar 
 of Leeds. Seventh Edition. Price 2d., or 15s. per 
 100. 
 
 III. 
 
 A PLAIN CATECHISM before CON- 
 
 FIRMATION. By the Rev. CHARLES DODG- 
 SON, M.A. Price 2d. 
 
 IV. 
 
 On the SACRAMENT of the LORD'S 
 
 SUPPER. By the PLAIN MAN'S FRIEND. 
 Eighth Edition. Price id. 
 
 V. 
 
 A COMPANION to the LORD'S 
 
 SUPPER. By the PLAIN MAN'S FRIEND. 
 New Edition. Price id. bound. 
 
 VI. 
 
 The HAPPY COMMUNICANT. By 
 
 the Rev. JOHN JAMES, D.D., Author of a 
 " Comment on the Collects." Price id. 
 
 VII. 
 
 The BENEFIT of the SACRAMENT 
 
 of the LORD'S SUPPER EXPLAINED. By ED- 
 WARD BURTON. D.D., late Regius Professor of 
 Divinity in the University of Oxford. New Edition. 
 Price 2d., or 15i. per 100. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 An ORDER of PREPARATION for 
 
 the HOLY COMMUNION. By the Rev. A. K. B. 
 GRANVILLE, M.A. In ISmo. Price 6d. 
 
 IX. 
 
 INFANT BAPTISM, and the MODE 
 
 of ADMINISTERING IT. By R. TWOPENY, 
 B.D. Price 6d. 
 
 X. 
 
 PLAIN REMARKS on INFANT BAP- 
 TISM and CONFIRMATION. By W. J. EDGE, 
 M.A. Fourth Edition. Price Zd. 
 
 XI. 
 
 The INFANT CHRISTIAN'S FIRST 
 
 CATECHISM. By Mrs. PARRY', of Barbados. 
 Sixth Edition. Price 3rf., or 25. 6d. per dozen. 
 
 XII. 
 
 IT IS WRITTEN; or, the CATE- 
 CHISM TEACHING from SCRIPTURE; a Ma- 
 nual ill Question and Answer. By the Rev. C. J. 
 HEATHCOTE, M.A., Minister of St. Thomas's, 
 Stamford Hill. Price 6rf., or 4s. 6</. per dozen. 
 XIII. 
 
 QUESTIONS and ANSWERS on 
 CHRISTIAN DOCTRINE and DUTY. By a 
 PARENT. Price id., or 3s. dd. per dozen. 
 
 HELP and COMFORT for the SICK 
 
 POOR. By the Author of "Sickness: its Trials 
 and Blessings." Second Edition. Price Is. 
 
 XV. 
 
 PRAYERS for the SICK and DYING. 
 
 By the SAME AUTHOR. Price 2s. 6rf. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS for the RELIEF of 
 the SICK POOR in DISEASES of FREQUENT 
 OCCURRENCE. By the late R. PEARSON, M.D. 
 Tliird Edition. In 18mo. Price Is. Od. 
 
 XVII. 
 
 The COTTAGER'S PRAYER BOOK. 
 
 By the late Rev. JAMES BEAN, M.A., Author of 
 " Family Worship." Price Gd. 
 XVIII. 
 
 The COTTAGE BEE-HIVE. Second 
 
 Edition. Price 3d., or 2s. 6d. per dozen. 
 
 XIX. 
 
 THREE WORDS . to ONE WHO 
 
 DRINKS. New Edition. Price 3d., or 2s. 6d. 
 per dozen. 
 
 XX. 
 
 An EXHORTATION to the LORD'S 
 DAY. By the Rev. R. W. EVANS, M.A., Author 
 of " The Rectory of Valehead." Price Is. 6d. 
 
 XXI. 
 
 IS the CHURCH of ROME the 
 
 BABYLON of the APOCALYPSE ? By CHRIS- 
 TOPHER WORDSWORTH, D.D., Canon of 
 Westminster. In ISmo. Price Is. 
 
 XXII. 
 
 The FORM of SOLEMNIZATION 
 
 of MATRIMONY ILLUSTRATED. By SAMUEL 
 WIX, M.A., F.R.S., Vicarof St. Bartholoniew-the- 
 Less. In 18mo. Price Is. 6d. 
 XXIII. 
 
 ADVICE to a PUBLIC SCHOOL BOY. 
 
 By the Rev. F. POYNDER, M.A. Third Edition. 
 In 18mo. Price Gd. 
 
 XXIV. 
 
 The HOLY BIBLE the ONE DE- 
 SIGN of ONE ETERNAL MIND. By the Rev. 
 DAVID LAING, M.A.. Incumbent of Trinity, St. 
 Pancras. Third Edition. Price Is. 
 
 BRIEF HISTORY of the BOOK of 
 COMMON PRAYER. By the SAME AUTHOR. 
 Price Is. 
 
 XXVI. 
 
 An EXPLANATION of DR. WATTS' 
 
 HYMNS, in Question and Answer. Fourth Edi- 
 tion. Price 8d., or 7s. per dozen. 
 XXVII. 
 
 SIXTY GEMS from THOMAS a KEM- 
 
 PIS. Price 6rf.
 
 12 RECENTLY PUBLISHED BY MESSRS. RIVINGTON. 
 
 Recently published, in Eiglit Volumes, 8vo, price £4 4s., a New and 
 Complete Edition of 
 
 WORKS AND CORRESPONDENCE 
 
 OF THE RIGHT HON. 
 
 EDMUND BURKE. 
 
 THIS EDITION CONTAINS 
 
 1. Mr. BURKE'S COERESPONDENCE between tbe year 1744 and 
 his Decease in 1797, first published from the original MSS. in 1844, edited 
 by Earl Fitzwilliam and Sir Richard Bourke ; containing numerous Histo- 
 rical and Biographical Notes, and several Original Letters from the leading 
 Statesmen of the period, and forming an Autobiography of this celebrated 
 Writer. The most interesting portion of the Letters of Mr. Burke to Dr. 
 Erench Laurence, published from the original MSS. by the late Archbishop 
 of Cashel in 1827, is now incorporated in the CORRESPONDENCE : 
 
 2. The WORKS of Mr. BURKE, as edited by his Literary Executors, 
 and completed, by the publication of the 15th and 16th Volumes, in 1826, 
 under the superintendence of the late Bishop of Rochester, Dr. Walker King. 
 
 " The Writings of that eminent Man, whom posterity will regard as the most eloquent of 
 Orators, and the most profound of the philosophic statesmen of modern times." 
 
 The late Sir ROBERT PEEL. 
 
 " The Speeches he made will be the subject of admiration for all succeeding generations." 
 
 Lord JOHN RUSSELL, 
 
 " Burke was one of the first thinkers, as well as one of the greatest Orators, of his time. 
 He is without any parallel in any age or country, except perhaps Lord Bacon and Cicero, and 
 his Works contain an ampler store of poUtical and moral wisdom than can be found in any 
 other writer whatever." Sir J. MACKINTOSH. 
 
 "That great Master of Eloquence, Edmund Burke." 
 
 The Right Hon. T. B. MACAULAY. 
 
 " The compositions of Burke are master-pieces. Wlio can withstand the fascination and 
 magic of his eloquence ? His imperial fancy has laid aU nature under tribute, and has col- 
 lected riches from every scene of the creation and every walk of art. He who can read his 
 Works without pleasure must resign all pretensions to taste and sensibUity." 
 
 ROBERT HALL. 
 
 " No one can doubt that enlightened men in all ages will hang over the Works of Mr. 
 Burke. — He was a writer of the first class, and excelled in almost every kind of prose com- 
 position. Mr. Fox might well avow, without a compUment, that he had learnt more from 
 him than from all other men and authors." Lord BROUGHAM. 
 
 j.* This, the only complete Edition now in circulation, includes the whole 
 of the Contents of the former, puilished in 20 Vols. 8vo, at the 
 price of £9 5s.
 
 WORKS PUBLISHED BY MESSRS. RIVINGTON. 13 
 
 CLASSICAL AND EDUCATIONAL WORKS, 
 
 BY THE 
 
 REV. T. KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M.A. 
 
 LATE RECTOR OF LYNDON, AND FORMERLY FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. 
 
 The "Works under the several numbers may be studied at or about the same stage of a 
 
 pupil's progress. 
 
 KEYS {supplied to Tutors only) are published to those Works to ichich f is prefixed. 
 
 LATIN. 
 1. 
 + HENRY'S FIRST LATIN BOOK. Ticelfih Edition. 12mo. 3s. 
 
 The object of this AVork (which is founded on the principles of imitation and frequent repetition) 
 is to enable the pupil to do exercises from the first day of his beginning his Accidence. It is 
 recommended by the Oxford Diocesan Board of Education, as a useful work for Middle or Com- 
 mercial Schools ; and adopted at the National Society's Training College at Chelsea. 
 
 2. 
 
 t A SECOND LATIN BOOK, and PRACTICAL GRAMMAR. Intended as a 
 Sequel to Henry^s First Latin Book. Sixth Edition. 12iiio. 4s. 
 
 t A FIRST ΛΈRSE BOOK, Part I.; intended as an easy Introduction to the Latin 
 Hexameter and Pentameter. Sixth Edition. 12mo. 2s. 
 
 A FIRST VERSE BOOK, Part II. ; containing additional Exercises. Is. 
 
 3. 
 
 HISTORIC ANTIQUE EPITOME, from Cornelius Nepos, Justin, &.c. With English 
 Notes, Rulesfor Construing, Questions, Geographical Lists, &c. Sixth Edition. 4s. 
 A FIRST CLASSICAL ATLAS, containing fifteen Alaps, coloured in outline ; intended 
 as a Companion to the Historice Antiquce Epitome. 8vo. 7•'• 6d. 
 "These Maps are executed with great accuracy, and apparently quite free from that indistinctness 
 and disproportion wliich are the great fault of all our small maps. AVe think Mr. Arnold suc- 
 cessful here as always ; and he has done his part to render geography, as it should be, an 
 additional inducement for work." — Guardian. 
 OVID.— ECLOG^ OVIDIAN^, with English Notes ; Part I. (from the Elegiac 
 Poems.) Eighth Edition. 12mo. 2s. 6d. Part II. (from the Meta- 
 
 morphoses.) 5s. 
 A PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION to LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. Part I. 
 Tenth Edition. 8vo. 6s. βά. 
 This Work is founded on the principles of imitation and frequent repetition. It is at once a 
 Syntax, a Vocabulary, and an Exercise Book ; and considerable attention has been paid to the 
 Bubject of Synonymes. It is now used at all, or nearly all, the public schools. 
 
 4. 
 •J- CORNELIUS NEPOS, Part T. ; with Critical Questions and Answers, and an imi- 
 tative Exercise on each Chapter. Third Edition. 12mo. 4s. 
 VTRGIL.— The ^NEID of VIRGIL, with Engli-sh Notes from DUbner. 12mo. (is. 
 "VTRGIL.— VIRGILII ^NEIDOS Libri L— VI. ; Addita est Interpretatio ex Adno- 
 tationibus Heynii, Wunderlichii,Wagneri, Forbigeri,aliorumexcerpta. 8vo. 12s. 
 HOEACE.— ECLOG^ HORATIAN^, Pars I.; CARMINA prope Omnia Continens. 
 Addita est Familiaris Interpretatio ex Adnotationibus Alitscherlichii, Doeringii, 
 Orellii, aliorum excerpta. Second Edition. 12mo. 5s. 
 
 *;(.* All the objectionable passages are omitted from this Edition. 
 HOEACE.— The AVorks of' HORACE, followed by English Introductions and Notes, 
 abridged and adapted for School use, from the Pldition of Fr. DUbner. In 
 one Volume, 12mo. 7s. 
 + A PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION to LATIN VERSE COMPOSITION. 
 
 Contents : — 1. " Ideas" for Hexameter and Elegiac Verses. 2. Alcaics. 3. Sap- 
 phics. 4. The other Horatian Metres. 5. Appendix of Poetical Phraseology, 
 and Hints on Versification. 8vo. nird Edition. 5s. 6d. 
 GRADUS AD PARNASSUM NOVUS ANTICLEPTICUS ; founded on Quicherat's 
 Thesaurus Poeticus Linguce Latinos. 8vo. 12s. half-bound. 
 "This AVork is so superior to an ordinary Gradus as scarcely tocome under the same category. 
 Theepithets and phrases are equally well chosen and well arranged."— yi/Z/ewicam. 
 ELLISIAN EXERCISES; adapted to the "Practical Introduction to Latin Prose 
 Composition," 3s. Qd. The KEY, 3s.
 
 14 WORKS RECENTLY PUBLISHED 
 
 5. 
 
 ECLOG^ HISTORIC^ ; or, Selections from the Roman Historians (Sallust, Livy, 
 
 Curtius, Tacitus), witii Latin Notes. 12mo. 4s. 
 CICERO.— Selections from his ORATIONS, with English Notes, from the best and 
 
 most recent sources. Contents : — The Fourth Book of the Impeachment of 
 
 Verres, the Four Speeches against Catiline, and the Speech for the Poet 
 
 Archias. 12mo. Second Edition. 4s. 
 CICEEO, Part II.; containing Selections from his EPISTLES, arranged in the 
 
 order of time, with accoimts of the Consuls, events of each year, &c. With 
 
 English Notes from the best Commentators, especially Matthise. 12mo. 5s. 
 CICEEO, Part III. ; containing the TUSCULAN DISPUTATIONS (entire). With 
 
 English Notes from Tischer, bv the Rev. R. B. Paul, M.A. 5s. 6d. 
 CICEEO, Part IV. ; containing De FINIBUS MALORUM et BONOItUM. (On 
 
 the Supreme Good.) With a Preface, English Notes, &c., partly from Madvig 
 
 and others, by the Rev. James Beaven, D.D., late Professor of Theology in 
 
 King's College, Toronto. 12mo. 5s. Gd. 
 CICEEO, Part V. ; containing CATO MAJOR, sive De Senectute Dialogus; 
 
 with English Notes from SommerbiOdt, by the Rev. Henry Browne, M.A., 
 
 Canon of Chichester. 12rao. 2s. 6f/. 
 TACITUS, Part I. The first Six Books of the ANNALES of TACITUS, ab Excessu 
 
 Divi August!. With English Notes, translated from the German of Dr. Karl 
 
 Nipperdey, by the Rev. Henry Browne, M.A. 12mo. 6s. Part II. (Books 
 
 XI.— XVI.) 5s. 
 SALLUST.- The HISTORY of the JUGURTHINE WAR, explained by Rudolf 
 
 Jacobs. The Notes translated by the Rev. Henry Browne, M.A. 12mo. 3s. 6d. 
 t A PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION to LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION, Part II. ; 
 
 containing the Doctrine of LATIN PARTICLES, with Vocabulary, an Antibar- 
 
 barus, &c. Third Edition. 8vo. 8s. 
 
 6. 
 
 LATIN WORD-BUILDING, with an Etymological Vocabulary; designed for the 
 
 Third Latin Book ; to Λvhich are added, Outlines of Form-Building, and an 
 
 Appendix of Questions. 12mo. 4s. 6d. 
 f LONGER LATIN EXERCISES, Part I. Second Edition. 8vo. 4s. 
 
 The object of this AVork is to supply boys with an easy collection of short passages, as an 
 Exercise book for those who have gone once, at least, through the First Part of the Editor's 
 " Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition." 
 t LONGER LATIN EXERCISES, Part II. ; containing a Selection of Passages of 
 
 greater length, in genuine idiomatic English, for Translation into Latin. 8vo. 4s. 
 + MATERIALS for TRANSLATION into LATIN: selected and arranged by 
 
 Augustus Grotefend. Translated from the German by the Rev. H. H. Arnold, 
 
 B.A., with Notes and Excursuses. Third Edition. 8vo. 7s. Gd. 
 A COPIOUS and CRITICAL ENGLISH-LATIN LEXICON, by the Rev. T. K. 
 
 Arnold and the Rev. J. E. Riddle. Fourth Edition. \l. 5s. 
 An ABRIDGMENT of the above Work, for the Use of Schools. By the Rev. 
 
 J. C. Ebden, late Fellow and Tutor of Trinity Hall, Cambridge. Square 12mo. 
 
 10s. 6c?. bound. 
 
 GEEEK. 
 t The FIRST GREEK BOOK ; on the Plan of " Henry's First Latin Book." TJiird 
 
 Edition. 12mo. 5s. 
 + The SECOND GREEK BOOK (on the same Plan) ; containingan Elementary Treatise 
 on the Greek Particles and the Formation of Greek Derivatives. 12mo. 5s. 6d. 
 The THIRD GREEK BOOK, containing Selections from Xenophon's Cyropsedia, 
 
 Λνϊιΐι English Notes, and a Vocabulary. 12mo. 3s. 6d. 
 The FOURTH GREEK BOOK, containing Xenophon's Anabasis, Books IV. to 
 
 VII., with English Notes. 12mo. 4s. 
 A PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION to GREEK ACCIDENCE. With Easy Exer- 
 cises and Vocabulary. Fifth Edition. 8vo. 5s. 6(/. 
 A PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION to GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION, Part L 
 Eighth Edition (reprinted from the Sixth). 8vo. 5s. Gd. 
 •,* The object of this ΛVork is to enable the Student, as soon as he can decline and conjugate 
 with tolerahle facility, to translate simple sentences after given examples, and with given 
 words; the principles trusted to being principally those of imitation and very frequent repeti- 
 tion. It is at once a Syntax, a Vocabularj', and an Exercise Book. 
 COMPANION to the above.— A PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION to GREEK CON- 
 STRUING. 8vo. 6s. Gd.
 
 BY MESSRS. RIVINGTON. 15 
 
 t A PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION to GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION, Part II. 
 (On the PARTICLES.) 8vo. 6s. C,d. 
 
 A GREEK GRAMMAR ; intended as a sufficient Grammar of Reference for Schools 
 and Colleges. Second Edition. 8vo, half-bound. 10s. 6d. 
 
 PROFESSOR MADVIG'S SYNTAX of the GREEK LANGUAGE, especially of 
 the Attic Dialect ; Translated by the Rev. IIenrv Browne, M. A, Together with 
 an Appendix on the Greek Particles, by the Translator. Square 8vo. 8s. 6c?, 
 
 An ELEMENTARY GREEK GRAMMAR. 12mo. 5s. ; or, with Dialects, 6s. 
 
 Some Account of the GREEK DIALECTS, for the Use of Beginners ; being an Ap- 
 pendix to "An Elementary Greek Grammar." 12rao. Is. 6(i. 
 
 An ELEMENTARY GREEK READER, from the ODYSSEY of HOMER. With 
 Grammatical Introduction, Notes, and Glossary. From the German of Dr. 
 Ahrens, Director of the Lyceum at Hano\'er. 12mo. 3s. 
 
 HOMER for Beginners. — The First Three Books of the ILIAD, with English Notes; 
 forming a sufficient Commentary for young Students. 12mo. 3s. 6(/. 
 
 HOMER.— The ILIAD COMPLETE, with English Notes and Grammatical Refer- 
 ences. In one thick volume, 1•3ηιο., ^rt(;-6u?i>irf. 12s. 
 In this Edition, the Argument of each Book is divided into short Sections, which are prefixed to 
 those portions of the Text, respectively, which they describe. The Notes (principally from 
 DUbner) are at the foot of each page. At the end of the volume are useful Appendices. 
 
 HOMER. — The ILIAD, Books I. to IV. ; with a Critical Introduction, and copious 
 English Notes. 12mo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 HOMER.— A Complete GREEK and ENGLISH LEXICON for the POEMS of 
 HOMER, and the HQ^MERIDtE. Translated from the German of Crusius, 
 bv Professor Smith. New and Revised Edition. 9s. half-hound. 
 
 XENOPHON'S ANABASIS, explained by Dr. F. K. Hertlei'n. In Two Parts. 
 (Part II. forming the "Fourth Greek Book.") Translated from the German, 
 with, additional Notes and Grammatical References, by the Rev. Henry 
 Browne, M.A. 12mo. 6s. Qd. 
 
 HERODOTUS.— ECLOG^ HERODOTE^, Part I. ; from the Text of Schweighaeu- 
 ser. With English Notes. 12mo. 3s. 6t/. 
 
 THUCYDIDES, with copious English Notes, especially from Poppo and Kruger, and 
 Grammatical References. Book the First. 12mo. 5s. M. Book the Se- 
 cond. 4s. Qd. 
 
 DEMOSTHENES, with English Notes from the best and most recent sources, Sauppe, 
 DoBERENz, Jacobs, Dissen, Westermann, &c. 
 The OLYNTHIAC ORATIONS. 12mo. Second Edition. 3s. 
 The ORATION on the CROWN. 12mo. 4s. 6d. 
 The PHILIPPIC ORATIONS. 12nio. 4s. 
 
 ^ISCHINES.- SPEECH AGAINST CTESIPHON. 12mo. 4s. 
 
 The Text is that of Baiter and Sauppe: the Notes are by Professor Champlin, with additional 
 Notes by President Woolsey and the Editor. 
 
 SOPHOCLES, with English Notes, from Schneidewin. 
 
 Part I. The AJAX. 3s. l^^tiioPPTr ρ κ ρλττι μα 
 
 Part II. The PHILOCTETES. 3,.;By theRev.R. Β. PAt;L, M.A. 
 
 Part III. The CEDIPUS TYRANNUS. 4s."] 
 
 Part IV. The CEDIPUS COLONEUS. 4s. [ By the Rev. Henry Browke, M.A. 
 Part V. The ANTIGONE. 4s. J 
 
 EURIPIDES, with English Notes, from Hartung, Dubner, Witzschel, Schone, &c. 
 The HECUBA. 3s. The HIPPOLYTUS. 3s. 
 
 The BACCHiE. 3.^. The MEDEA. 3s. 
 
 The IPHIGENIA IN TAURIS. 3s. 
 ARISTOPHANES.— ECLOCiE ARISTOPH ANICiE, with English Notes, by Professor 
 Felton. Part I. (The CLOUDS) 12mo. 3s. Gd. Part II. (The BIRDS). 
 3s. Gd. 
 
 •,• In this Edition the objectionable passages are omitted. 
 
 CLASSICAL EXAMINATION PAPERS. A Scries of 93 Extracts from Greek, 
 Roman, and English Classics, for Translation, with occasional Questions and 
 Notes ; each extract on a separate leaf. Price of the whole in a spccinKJH 
 packet, 4s., or 6 copies of any Separate Paper may be had for 3'/. 
 
 A COPIOUS PHRASEOLOGICAL ENGLISH-GREEK LEXICON, founded on a 
 Work prepared bv J. W. FRADERSDORFF, Ph. Dr. of the Taylor- hiHtitu- 
 tion, Oxford: revised, enlarged, and imi>iOved by JIENRV BROWNE, M.A., 
 Vicar of Pevcnsey, and Prebendary of Chichester, «vo. 21.f. 
 *»* This work was projected, and a considerable portion of it prepared for the 
 press, by the late Rev. T. K. ARNOLD.
 
 16 ARNOLD'S EDUCATIONAL WORKS {Continued). 
 
 HEBREW. 
 The FIRST HEBREW BOOK ; onthePlan of "Henry's First Latin Book." 12mo. Js.Gd. 
 
 " The arrangement is excellent. The addition of English characters is very well calculated to 
 assist the learner, and to incite those who, from the dilhculty of reading fluently, are disinclined 
 to become learners." — English Churchman. 
 A KEY to the FIRST HEBREW BOOK. Edited by the Rev. Henry Browne, 
 
 M.A. 3s. Gd. 
 The SECOND HEBREW BOOK, containing the Book of Genesis ; together with a He- 
 brew Syntax, and a Vocabulary and Grammatical Commentary. 9s. 
 
 GERMAN. 
 
 The FIRST GERMAN BOOK ; on the Flan of " Henry's First Latin Book." By the 
 Rev. T. K. Arnold and Dr. Fradersdorff. Fourth Edition. 12mo. bti.Gd. 
 
 A KEY to the EXERCISES, by Dr. Fradersdorff. 2s. 6d. 
 
 A READING COMPANION to the FIRST GERMAN BOOK ; containing Extracts 
 from the best Authors, with a Vocabulary and Notes, I2mo. Second Edition. 4s, 
 
 A HANDBOOK of GERMAN VOCABULARY. 4s. 
 
 The SECOND GERMAN BOOK ; a Syntax, and Etymological Vocabulary, with 
 copious Reading- Lessons and ExercieGs. Edited by Dr. Fradersdorff. 6s. Gd. 
 
 A KEY to the ENGLISH EXERCISES in the above. Is. 
 
 FRENCH 
 
 The FIRST FRENCH BOOK ; on the Plan of" Henry's First Latin Book." Fourth 
 Edition. 12mo. 5s. 6d. 
 
 A KEY to the EXERCISES, by M. Delille. 2s. Gd. 
 
 A HANDBOOK of FRENCH VOCABULARY\ 4s. 6d. 
 
 ENGLISH. 
 
 HENRY^'S ENGLISH GRAMMAR; a Manual for Beginners. 12mo. 3s.6d. 
 
 SPELLING turned ETYMOLOGY. 12mo. 2s. Gd. 
 
 The PUPIL'S BOOK, (a Companion to the above.) Is. 3d. 
 
 LATIN via ENGLISH ; being the Second Part of the above Work. 12mo. 4s. Gd. 
 
 An ENGLISH GRAMMAR for CLASSICAL SCHOOLS; being a Practical Intro- 
 duction to " English Prose Composition." Fi/ih Edition. 12mo. 4s. Gd. 
 
 HANDBOOKS FOR THE CLASSICAL STUDENT (WITH QUESTIONS), under the 
 General Superintendence and Editorship of the Rev. T. K. ARNOLD. 
 
 "The leading characteristic of these Handbooks is their exceeding simplicity, the excellent order 
 with which they are arranged, the completeness of their details, and the remarkable accuracy 
 and elaborate erudition which they exhibit in every page." — Dublin Review. 
 I. HANDBOOKS of HISTORY and GEOGRAPHY. From the German of Putz. 
 Translated by the Rev. R. B. Paul. 
 
 I• ^^^^^7^^1}^^^Ι^.Έ• S'^'^ond Edition. Gs.Gd.^ These Works have been already 
 2 MEDIEVAL HISTORY. 4s. Gd. ) translated into the Swedish and 
 
 3. MODERN HISTORY. 5s. Gd. ) Dutch languages. 
 
 Π. The ATHENIAN STAGE, from the German of Witzschf.l. Translated by the Rev. 
 
 R. B. Paul. 4s. 
 ΠΙ. 1. GRECIAN ANTIQUITIES.! 
 
 Second Edition. 3s. 6rf. I From the Swedish of Bojesen. Translated from 
 
 2. ROMAN ANTIQUITIES, f^r. Hoffa's German version by the Rev. R. B. Paul. 
 Second Edition. 3s. 6d. -^ 
 
 The pupil will receive from these works a correct and tolerably complete picture of Grecian and 
 Roman life: the political portions (the account of the national institutions and their effects) 
 appear to be of great value; while the very moderate extent of each admits of its being tho- 
 roughly mastered— of its being got up and retained. 
 
 3. HEBREW ANTIQUITIES. By the Rev. Henry Browne, M.A. 4s. 
 
 This Work describes the manners and customs of the ancient Hebrews which were common to 
 them viith other nations, apd the rites and ordinances which distinguished them as the chosen 
 people Israel. 
 
 IV. HANDBOOKS of SYNONY'MES: 
 
 1. GREEK SYNONYMES. From the French of Pillon. 6s. Gd. 
 
 2. LATIN SYNONYMES, fn.m the German of Doderlein. Translated by the 
 Rev. H. H. Arnold. Second Edition, is. 
 
 V. HANDBOOK of GRECIAN MYTHOLOGY. From the Gei-man of Professor 
 
 Stoi.l, by the Rev. R. B. Paul. ( JVith Outline Engravings of Ancient Statues.) 5s. 
 VL HANDBOOK of CHRONOLOGY.— ANNALES Veterum REGNORUM et 
 POPULORUM, imprimis Romanorum, confecti a C. T. Zumptio. 5s. 
 
 The BOY'S ARITHMETIC. By the Rev. CHARLES ARNOLD, M.A., Rector 
 
 of Tinwell, and late Fellow of Caius College, Cambridge. Pakt I. Second Edition. 12mo. 
 3s. Gd. PART II. 3s. 6d. 
 
 LONDON : 
 RIVINGTONS, WATERLOO PLACE, PALL MALL.
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 
 f * ''ate stamped below.
 
 UCSOUTHERM REGIONAL
 
 ,m 
 
 /[ύϊΜ 
 
 !i Η 
 
 'iiiiiiiiiiii"' 
 
 lilillllllliilliillP^' 
 
 iiiiiili 
 
 ■ii 
 iHijiliiul 
 
 Ίΐϋ 
 
 ίίίΐί 
 
 ίίΙΙίίΙϋί! 
 
 %